^) 


MERECE M. ands Racal 


LN RAIN DN AD DUNS V 


Ades 


phate 


ΣῊ anm 


On eka deren 
ἘΜΌΝ δὰ Ae 





ta: 
Ai ee eee M us 





lal Th lA SL, = 
i ae LL uw 


oy ! 
Digitized by the Internet’ Archive 
in 2008. . 
Sept 232 ἵ Jog 


https://archive.org/details/greekenglishlexiO0grim 











GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 


OF THE 


NEW TESTAMENT 


39 ^ , € ^ > , > 4 
appx” παιδεύσεως 7 τῶν ονοματων ἐπίσκεψις. 


EPICTETUS, Diss. i. 17, 12. 


maius quiddam atque divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis 


litterarum figuris comprehendi queat. 
HERMANN, Opuscc. iii. 253. 


TA PHMATA A ETQ AEAAAHKA YMIN TINEYMA ESTIN KAI ZOH EXTIN 


GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 


OF THE 


NEW TESTAMENT 


BEING 


Grimm's Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti 


TRANSLATED REVISED AND ENLARGED 


BY 


JOSEPH HENRY THAYER, D.D. 


NEW YORK 
HARPER & BROTHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE 
1887 


Copyright, 1886, 
By Harper AND Brotuers, New Yorn. 





All rights reserved. 


PREFACE. 


OWARDS the close of the year 1862, the “Arnoldische Buchhandlung” in Leipzig 
published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared, 
upon the basis of the “Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica” of C. G. Wilke (second edition, 
2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. WiniBALp Grimm of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor 
Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical 
lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen's Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of 
Passow’s Dictionary edited by Rost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a 
word's signifieations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to 
show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly 
to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to 
produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual eriticism, of 
exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The 
successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of 
scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg; and since its 
completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the 
New Testament extant. 

An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce 
the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for 
October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun; but it was protracted by 
engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity — as it seemed — of preparing 
the authorized translation of Lünemann's edition of Winer’s New Testament Grammar, which 
was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann. 
Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm's work was called for. To the typographical 
accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared 
in its completed form in 1879. “Admirable”, “unequalled”, “invaluable”, are some of the 
epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of 
the book by competent erities in Germany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor 
Schürer's review of it in the Theologische Literaturzeitung for January 5, 1878: “The use of 
Professor Grimm's book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the 
best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work 


2061164 


VI PREFACE. 


of the highest intrinsie merit, and one whieh is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an 
acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every 
student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament, 
and consequently for the study of Theology in general.” 

Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such 
changes in his work as might in my judgment the better adapt it to the needs of English- 
speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a 
strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing 
a new book prepared on my predecessor’s as a basis, and — alike in justice to him and for 
the satisfaction of students — to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the 
silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should 
render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm’s work. (See [ ] in the list of 
“Explanations and Abbreviations” given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on 
me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw- 
backs the procedure will I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of 
justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of 
the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect- 
ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation. 

Some of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in 
connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here 
be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and — so far 
as practicable— modern); to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words; to give 
the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of 
interest to the general student; to render complete the enumeration of (representative) verbal 
forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others); to append to every verb 
a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament; to supply the New 
Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk; to note 
more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions; to introduce brief discussions 
of New Testament synonyms; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the 
* Authorized Version" but also of the Revised New Testament; to multiply cross references; 
references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical 
(Kühner, Krüger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, ete.); also to the best English and American 
Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The 
Speakers Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, ete.) as well as to the latest 
exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare, 
etc.) ; and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopedias (Smith, Alexander’s Kitto, 
McClintock and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, ete.), besides the various 
Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul. 

Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place: 

One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New 
"Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of 
the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may 


"PREFA CE. VII 


entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In 
the absenee of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant 
printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after 
general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of 
the text of the ‘ Receptus ’, together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf. 
In his second edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the 
present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm's second edition undergone 
thorough revision (see, for example, * Griesbach " in the list of “ Explanations and Abbrevia- 
tions"), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and 
of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted. 

Again: the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions 
holding in classie usage (as they are laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not 
be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the 
contrary, the exposition of classie usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of 
comparison by which the direction and degree of a word’s change in meaning can be measured. 
When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and 
instructive. 

On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand, 
although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But 
they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Fick, or even more 
frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious 
digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts 
of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when 
such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon. 

The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should 
not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. A student 
often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it 
bears in a given context or discussion: —or, to state the same truth from another point of 
view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or 
another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the 
passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to 
some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing 
the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the 
objections to opposing interpretations. 

Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended 
upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon 
the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter 
into his labors. Any one who consults such articles as αἰών, αἰώνιος, βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ etc., 
δίκαιος and its cognates, δόξα, ἐλπίς, ζωή, θάνατος, θεός, κόσμος, κύριος, πίστις, πνεῦμα, σάρξ, σοφία, σώζω 
and its cognates, υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, vids τοῦ θεοῦ, Χριστός, and the like, will find, it is believed, all 
the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the 
comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been 


YIII PREFACE. 


added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded 
as supplementing or correcting those of Professor Grimm. 

Convenience often prescribes that the archaeological or historical facts requisite to the 
understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for 
fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the 
editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor; yet with the constant exercise of 
self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that 
succinetness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original. 

In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at 
different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose 
use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to 
guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it 
serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten. 
Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a 
different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies 
dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the 
passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen — 
now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi- 
nal; now because they furnish the nlost copious references to other discussions of the same 
topie; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access; 
now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether. 

It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to 
grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The 
expert can easily train his eye to run over them; and yet even for him they may have their 
use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but 
also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the 
decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest. 

Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it 
seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and 
especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find 
that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of 
the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other 
portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament 
vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology 
— which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found 
elsewhere. 


Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many 
years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen, 
by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must be 
made to GeoncE B. Jewett, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eaton now of Middlebury 
College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-verified all the biblical and classical 


PREFACE. ΙΧ 


references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering 
valuable aid in correcting many of the proofs; the latter has gathered the passages omitted 
from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal 
forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation, 
and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly 
labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the 
lamented Dr. Assor been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every 
user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go 
through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, in accordance 
with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on 
the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorfs Editio Octava 
Critiea Major. 

To Dr. CaspAR RENE GnEGoRY of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena 
just named in advance of their publication; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press, 
Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott's 


Lexicon. 


No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present 
volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several 
laborers, having at their command larger resourees than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure 
than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself 
to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every 
remaining blemish 

- ἵνα ὃ λόγος τοῦ κυρίου τρέχη καὶ δοξάζηται. 
J. ἘΠ THAYER, 


CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 





LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS 


QUOTED OR REFERRED TO IN THE LEXICON. 





N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Liddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also 
of Freund’s Triennium Philologicum (1874) vols. i. and ii., of Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace’s 
Dictionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann’s Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of 


reference. 


ACHILLES TaTIUS . . δ 
Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilate, of 
Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Barna- 
bas, etc., at the earliest from . . . 
TNA GE τὰ Rc. doo CEDE 
SARSCHINES οὐ fei ie) 39 29 stele 
VAXESCHIY;DUSS- EE - ἢ eh Geet OO ὁ 
IATSOP Lee ELS vs) EM e τὸ τῆ τ 
Jic B. coop TQ Ὁ ΕΣ 


AGATHARCHIDES) ἡ - σῷ ο ἡ iss 
-ALCAEUS MYTILENAEUS . . . . . 
JAYGCEPESRONI- Ἐπ τ 1 0 52S Ue πρὸ she 
PACMAN.) τὸ - NNNM DA a 
ALEXANDER LSSEPRTERCEHS o ὦ 

ἌΓΕ ΧΙΒ ig ὦ - b TOTIS 


AMBROSE, Bp. of Milan. 0 d Bao 4 
AMMIANUS MARCELLINUS . . .. 
AMMONIUS, the grammarian . . . . 
ANACREON2. . . . . 
ANAXANDRIDES . . 
ANAKIMANDER. . . . 
"ANDOGEIDESU. τ ΣΡ 
ΑΝ ΠΤΡΗΑΝΕΙ, τό 90-9. 
FANEUPHON}) πὶ κοῦ ὧν ἢ ἢ - 
ANTONINUS, M. AURELIUS . . . - 
APOLLODORUS of Athens . . . 
APOLLONIUS DxscOLUS . . . .. 
APOLLONIUS RHODIUS . . . . 
APPIAN . . . 
APPULEIUS . 5 
AQqvrLA (translator of the 0. T) : 
JERATURN S ΠΩ LATINE Φ 
ARCHILOCHUS . 6 
ARCHIMEDES, the RAE CIAM o. ^b 
ARCHYTAS . 


B.C 


345 


*525, 1456 


570 


1172 
610 


610 


350 


530 
350 
580 
405 
380 
412 


140 


200 


270 
700 
250 
c. 400 


A.D. 
500 ? 


2d cent. on 
c. 180 


c. 500 


200% 
200 
374 


t e. 400 
390 


1180 
140 
150 
160 


[2 cent. (under 
Hadrian.) 





! But the current, Fables are not his; on the History of Greek 


Fable, see Rutherford, Babrius, Introd. ch. ii. 


? Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genuine. 


An asterisk (*) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk (1) death. 


B.C. 
ARETAE US» E ECCE NE 
ARISTAENETUSDS. 8-15. lop renal te) Σ- 
ARTISTE AS Lara NC Sut sT ne hate 270 


ARISTIDES eA BUTEA ene nine 
"ARISTOPHANES E N--NE - *444, 1380 
ARISTOPHANES, the grammarian . 200 
ARISTOTLE . . o a . "384, 1322 
ARRIAN (pupil ἘΠ fend of Epictetus) 


ARTEMIDORUS DarpiANUus  (oneiro- 
GUNMEN EG 6 co o o a o Dio ὁ 
ATHANASIUS . . . G4 d. Ten. s 


ATHENAEUS, the grammarian . . . 
ATHENAGORAS of Athens . . . . . 
AUGUSTINE, Bp. of Hippo. . . . . 
Avsowivus, DecIMus MaGNUS . . 
Bannivs (see Rutherford, Babrius, "iss 
ὌΠ" adhe - (some say 50?) 
BARNABAS, Epistle ὙΠ ΘΗ - 
Baruch, Apocryphal Book of . . . . 
Basilica thea M 
Basrr THE GREAT, Bp. of C;sarea . 
IDASITJOLbSeleucia 2.02 es 


Bel and the Dragon. . . . . . . 2dcent.? 
ΤΟΝ E Go Ὁ : 200 
CAESAR, GaA1US Just are 4March 15, 44 
(ATILIMACHUSC- 2-290 - 28 29. 202 260 


Canons and Constitutions, Apostolic. . 
CAPITOLINUS, JvLIUs (one of the “ Hist. 


August. scriptores sex ") 
(URBESI- De tee ce yee 399 
(EDRENUS! 5.19: 20-159: 20-2 - 


A.D. 
801 
4501 


160 


*c. 100 


160 
1373 
228 

177 2 
1430 
1e. 390 


c. 225 
c. 1002 
cake 
c. 900 
1379 
450 


Sd and 4th cent. 


c. 310 


1050 





1 But his letter is spurious; see Hody, De Bibl. text. orig. 1. i.; 


A. Kurz, Arist. ep. etc. (Bern 1872). 


? The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work 


of Justinian and consisting of sixty books. 


It was begun under 


the emperor Basil of Macedonia (1886), completed under his son 
Leo, and revised in 945 under Constantine Porphyrogenitus; (ed. 


Heimbach, 6 vols. 1833-70). 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


B.C. 
Crrsus, A. ComwELIUs, the medical 

writer . . . 
CHARES 320 


CHARITON 

Curysierus of Tyana (ix (Athenaens) 

Curysostom, Dro, the orator, see Dio Chrys. 

Curysostom, Jonw, Bp. of Constan- 
tinople . 

CrcERO 

CLEMENS ALEXANDRINUS . 

CrExENS Romanus, Epistle E 

CLEOMEDES . 

COLUMELLA . 

CONSTANTINUS 
emperor from 

Constitutiones apostolicae . 


pec: 7,43 


PORPHYROGENITUS, 


CRAIUNTTSiy cements Pei are 1428 
CRITIAS 411 
CrmESIAS . 401 
(CURTIUSS mM τε. 5 ek Mese fe a 
CYPRIAN . : 

Cyrit of AGTSERD 

Cyrit of Jerusalem 

Democrirts 430 


DEMOSTHENES. . . . . *885, 1322 
Drxirrvus, the historian 


Dipymus of Alexandria 


DIOPGAXSSLUS S. 05 ER Πν- 
xo CHEYSORTONMS |. I . 
DiocrEes . 5 ὦ 470 
Droports SICULUS . 40 
DriocENEs LAERTIUS 
DrocxzETvs, Epistle to 
Dionysius Gnas oon 
Dionysius of Halicarnassus . . . . 30 
Dionysius PERIEGETES . . . . 
PIDSUORIBERL S1 DS. ets MES 
DirnuiLvs : 300 
Ecclesiasticus (Wisdom οὗ προς the 

Son of Sirach; Grk. trans.) . €. 132? 
ENNIUS . . pee E: 1169 
Enoch, Book dx. 2d cent. on 
ErngEM Sxmus 
ErrcHARMUS 480 


ErrcTrETUS 


Epicurus . *342, 1270 


ErPIMENIDES. 5 : 600 
Errrnaxivs, Bp. of Silents - 
ERATOSTHENES. jd. c. 196 


Esdras, First Book of ( (Valente: Third) Ist cent. ? 
Esdras, Second Book of (Vulgate Fourth) 


Esther, Additions to 2d cent. ? 
Etymologicum Magnum 

EvnULUs. 350 
Evcrrip 300 
Evroris - 439 
EvniPIDES - *480, 1406 


EvsEnivs, Bp. of Casareal 
Evsraruivs of Constantinople, gram- 
marian . Ale 





XH 
A.D. B.C. 
EvTHYMIUS ZIGABENUS or Zigadenus 
20 (Zypadenus) TE T. 
IREORUS; UOHIHHE NEN eL 
450? GALEN. oe e 
? GELLIUS, Aus decidi of Noctes 
"Adticae) ΤΠ ὦ: ἢ a oc OOO 
GENESIUS ó QU ORE 
1407 Geoponica (20 bks. on (US com- 
piled by Cassianus Bassus) . Ss 
200 Grermanus of Constantinople, the 
93-97 younger . . Eae d Re 6s 
100? Goretas of Tons ZU. 430 
50 GnEGOnY of Nazianzus . 
GreGcory of Nyssa 2 
911-959 Harpocration (lexicon to the Ten 
3d and 4th cent. Attic Orators) 
HECATAEUS . : : 510 
HEGESIPPUS (quoted 3 in Tone S 
Ha rioports, Bp. of Tricca iu Thessaly 
50 HrnacrrDEs Ponticus (but the Alleg. 
1257 Homer. are spurious) . 390 
1444 IHERAGDITUS  . =. . . : 500 
1386 [sb CWS 6 Up 6d gone 4 
HEeERMIPPUS . 432 
EHERMOGENES . τς 24. 5 ee 
e. 270 HERO ÁLEXANDRINUS . ... - 250 
c. 395 Heropian, the grammarian . . . . 
200 Heropian, the historian . . . . . 
100 IERODOTUS. 021-07. ie ek OST AOR 
HresroD . . ede oe ΒΟΟΣ 
Hesycutus of Luces d lexicog- 
c. 200 raphere 6-1 e Me Gs 
2d or3d cent. | HimROCLES : 
500 ? Hinronymes, see ish 
Himenrivs Ξ 
8001 ΗΙΡΡΟΟΒΑΤῈΒ . - 480 
100? ἩΙΡΡΟΛΥΩΒ 1G. 4 oO 
Hipronax 540 
Hirtivs (the sonarus of pibeun 
Commentaries) . 143 
Homer et 900 ? 
HonAPOLLO, grammarian à 
c. 375 HORACE. 0. CIEN AE. oe: fe 18 
ἨΥΡΕΕΙΡΕΒ.. 1322 
100 IGNATIUS . 
Trenaevs, Bp. of un ons 
ISAEUS. . . 370 
1403 Isrponvs HIBPARENSIS, fee of Seville 
IsocRATES . *436, 1338 
JAMBLICHUS. . 
lstcent ? | Jeremiah, Ep. of (6th ch. of Baruch) 
Jerome (Sophronius (?) Eusebius Hie- 
1006 ? ronymus) . δ 
JOANNES DAMASCENUS . 
Joannes Moscnus 
JOSEPHUS ... > : 
Judith . . . «175-100 
t e. 340 JurriAN, Roman e fsa Sta! 6 
JusriNIAN, Roman emperor from . . 
1160 Justin, the historian ..... » 
JUSTIN MARTYR ᾿ς ἦν « « © «© © @ 
JUVENATS τὸ 650120 iets ite c0 wr οὐ Ὁ 


1 Called Pamphili (as friend of the martyr Pamphilus). 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


A.D. 


1100 
c. 125 
*131, te. 197 


150 
950 


c. 925 


400 ? 


c. 110 
178 


1636 


300 
Ist cent. ? 


1420 
730 
1620 
75 


361-363 
527-565 
150? 
150 

100 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


B.C. 

IAGTANTIUS- τ 4 - G X 19 0 6 
Lampripits, the liscoriane AO ire Ὁ 
Leo 'Philosophus', emperor . . . 
LinaNrUS, the rhetorician . 
rv M RE Jock MAC Ome, 
LoneGinus . 
iocus . 2 ~ 5. e SO 
Lucan, the epic poet e 63 Goo 
Lucran of Samosata, the satirist 
Lucirivs, the Roman satirist 1103 
LvcnETIUS, the Roman poet . 55 
LvcorHRON . . Soo 03270 
Lycureus of hens the amus: 1329 
LxwcEvs. 300 
Lxsras, the Athenian M aparece 

his school . 410 
LxsrirPcs. 434 
Macanivs : , 
Maccabees, First EXTR of 105-63 ? 
Maccabees, Second Book of . . e. 75? 
Maccabees, Third Book of . . . . . 
Maccabees, Fourth Book of. . . Ist. cent ? 
MACHON . . - ooo 6 6 280 
Macrosits . 6 6 
Mararas, Joun, the coit Go 
Manasses, Prayer of . . ... . - Ist cent.? 
Maneruo, the pela priest 300 
Marcion . a ὃ 
Maximus Romar A coo ὁ 150 
Meta, Powroxivs, the Roman geo 

rapher . 
MELEAGER, the fonder ob the ἘΠῚ 

gram. anthologies . D a 6 1e ac 60 
Mzrrro, Bp. of Sardis Bea so OUI 
MENANDER, the poet . 325 
ΜΈΝΑΝΡΕΕ, the Byzantine πῆτθοσόττη 
MriwwNERMUS,thepoet . . . . . c. 600 
Mozmis, the * Atticist" and lexicog- 

raphera Ὁ Ὁ Ὁ δ oo Ὁ 
ΜΌΞΟΗΙΟΝ 
Moscuts 200 
Mrsowivs Rurus 
INEMESIUS LC (of Jel us) bo c 
INEPOSO US . *90, 124 
INICANDER . . . C Οὗ Ὁ 1001 
NICEPHORUS, patriarch at Constanti- 

nople 
NiICEPHORUS Berrswtts, the ‘histo: 

rian . 
NicEPHORUS (Esc AS, Ene ie 

torian . 
NicETAS EGEPTES USUS (ales Gist), 

Byzantine historian . 
Nicodemus, Gospel of, see Vics, up Pilate 
NiconLAvs DaMascEeNUs 14 


NicowACHUS GERASENUS . . 

Ninus, the pupil and friend on oka 
Chrysostom 

Noxwvus of Panopolis i in iure Eg eypts 
the poet 

Nomenius of Apameia, the philoso- 
pher (as quoted by Origen) . 


310 
886 
350 
117 
250 
400 ? 
165 
160? 


c. 350 


c. 401 


420 
600 ? 


140 


45 


Glia 


XII 


B.C. 

NUMENIUS (as quoted by Athen.) . . c. 350 
OCELLU8)DLucANuS - =) +) 0) 2-295400/2 
Orcumentts, Bp. of Tricca 
Oxtymrroporus, the Neo-Platonic phis 

losopher . . . . 
OpPiaN of Lec in MERO [edo 

of the ἁλιευτικά) 
Oppian of Apameia in Syra (auth. of 

the κυνηγετικά). 
ORIGEN . . o. B eO 
Onosivs ΤΡ στιν o6 5 0 
Ürphicay the E RD ET M 
OviDd 5 MESE 
PALAEPHATUS . . 1 
Paptas, Bp. of Hierapolis, ‘first half Ἔ 
PAUSANIAS 2 c 6 
PETRUS ATSEAND ERIS 
Pnuaranis, spurious epistles of 
PHaAvoRINUS, VARINUS! . . 
PmHinLEMON, COMICUS ... . . 330 
ἘΉΤΕΟ NE TENES 
(PHILODEMUS is ED 50 
PHILOSTRA TUS NC, 
PHOCYLIDES 540 
PsEupo- PHOOYERDES! (in the “Sibyl. 

Ογας;, ἢ MN οἰ Me 
Pnorrus (Patriarch of Constantinople) 
PuryNIcues, the grammarian 
PHYLARCHUS . . . 210 


PriNDAR *521 (Css MEE Jessiy lus), 1441 
Prato, Cowicus, re of Ari- 


stophanes . . . B O5 t 427 
Praro, the Dedi e “497, H 347 
IBPAUTBSI- Δ Ὁ og 1184 


Prix the elder, the cei 

Prrvx the younger, the nephew and 
adopted son of the preceding 

Prorints, the aes 

PLUTARCH : 

Porrux, author ob SE ὀνομαστικόν. 

PoLyaENws, author of the στρατηγή- 
ματα. Seon Ἢ ΤΡ 

POLYBIUS 

PorvcamP . . 

Porpuyry, pupil of IDE eur. 

PosrpiPPUS 

Posipowivs, discs (cured of 
Cicero and Pompey) . . . . . . 78 

Pnocrus, p d 

PROPERTIUS 

Protevangelium aca 

Psalter of Solomon . 

PsErLLvs the younger, philosophies 

ProueMyY, the geographer. . . 

PYTHAGORAS É 0. 7o. 9, Ὁ 

QuiwTILIAN, rhetorician, teacher of 
Pliny the younger. - . . .. 

Quintus SMXRNAEUS . . . . 


. *48, 116 


. 63-48? 


531 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


A.D. 


2d cent. 
160 


1311 
2 


Ist cent. ? 
850 
180 


1155, Feb.23 
270 





1 The Latin name of the Italian Guarino Favorino, who died 
A. D. 1537, and was the author of a Greek Lexicon compiled mainly 


from Suidas, 
chus, Ist ed. Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere since. 


Hesychius, Harpocration, Eustathius, and Phryni- 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


B.C. 
"86, 135 
610 


SEXNDUHR ὦ . oe, fee! τ tet he 

SAPPHO . . s eres 

SENECA, L. Awnaiug, the Philosopher 
(son of the rhetorician) 

Septuagint, Greek translation of O.T. c. 280-150 

Sextus Emprricus, diria: and 
* sceptic T CC 

Sibylline Oracles, of various dates, rang- 
ing perhaps from 

Sirius IrALICUS, poet . 

SiwowrpES of  Amorgos, 
graphus . 

ΞΙΜΟΝΙΡΕῈΒ of Ceos (author of the ope 
taph on the Spartans that fell at 
Thermopylae) : 

Simpuicivs, the iecur on vm 
totle and Epictetus 

Sirach, see Ecclesiasticus. 

Socrates Scholasticus", of Constan- 
tinople, historian . . . . +. . ὁ 

Socrates (in Stobaeus) .... . 

Soriwvs, surnamed Polyhistor . . . 

Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter etc. 

Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom ete. 

Soros, the lawgiver and poet . 

Song of the Three Children . . 

SopHoctes . . . Tiu. 

Sornunoxivs of Damascus SM uc te 

SorADES . . . sns 

Sozomen, OS O^ cw! Orso 

SrAT1US, the Roman poet . . 

SronBAEUSs, i. e. John of Stobi in are 
donia (compiler of Anthol.) 

SrnAnO, the geographer 

Srraron, epigrammatist 

SrnaTTIS, comic poet ὃ 

Suetonius, the historian, End of 
Pliny the vounger . 

Suipas, the lexicographer . 

Susanna à S Ist cent. ? 

Symuacuus ΓΈ τς of the Ο. T. ! 
into Greek) 

Syyesivs, pagan philosopher 
bishop of Ptolemais 

Tacitus . 

AWE kg 

Teaching of the T. ἽΝ Apostles 

TERENCE . z 


170 
“ Tambo- 
693 


525 


: 594 
2d cent. ? 
*496, 1406 


407 


and 


1159 


A.D. 


165 


225? 


to the 4th cent. 


1101 


500 


439 


300 ? 


638 


450 
196 


500? 
124 
150? 


1160 
1100? 


200? 


410 
Tc.117 
c. 160 
2d cent. ? 


XIV 
TERTULLIAN .... . 
Testaments of the Twelve Patriae « 3 
THEAGEH. DOCE, ἡ οὐ 


T'HEMISTIUS: Nee lia ᾿ς 
‘THEOCRIMUS | E M 
THEODORET. . . OL ORO OE 
'"THEoponus MxrocHITA SENSUM ed Ie 
Tueoporion (translator of O. T. i 

Greek) before). EN 
THEOGNIS . . Miornecs 
'TugorniLvus, Bp. ot Antioch. ere 
THEOPHRASTUS, pupil and successor of 


Aristotle |. . . ss 
Tueopuy act, Abp. of Bulgaria se 
THEOPHYLACT SIMOCATTA ... . 


Tuomas Macitsrer, lexicographer and 

PTAMMATIAN Ws) EE 
LUCY DIDES yet ul ENSE Me RES AES NES 
TIBULLUS ^... sen ds 
Trmaerts, the i etu of Sicily Be 
Tracts the Sophist, author of Lexicon 


to Plato 
Trimagevs of Locri, Pythagorean hie 
losopher . .. xs 
Timon, the “ Sillographns " or satirist . 
ÜYMOCLES. Ὁ νον τς 


Tobit : : 
'TRYPHIODORUS, a versifier 
Tzerzes, Byzantine grammarian and 


poet . se 
VALERIUS incon 2 
Varro, “vir Romanorum emndstine 
GE ((ainnihy) SG 5 6 5 a 5 6 
VEGETIUS, on the artofwar. . . . 
VERGIL : 1 
VrrRUVIUS, the Oui Roman writer on 
architecture . . 


Voriscts, historian (cf. Gagiadenty ἢ 

Wisdom of Solomon : 

XENOPHANES, founder of the Eleatic 
philosophy . . .. 

XENOPHON RECEN 

ΧΈΝΟΡΗΟΝ of Ephesus, romancer . . 

Zrwo of Citium E 

ZENODOTUS, first epeacdan E A 
dria . 

ZONARAS, the ΕΣ ΡῈ, 

Zosimuvs, Roman historian 


B.C. 


280 


540 


322 


423 
118 
260 


375? 
c. 279 
350 


. e. 200? 


126 
119 


30 


. c. 100 ? 


540 
401 


290 


280 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


A.D. 
1220? 
c. 125? 
355 


420 
1300 


160 
180 
1078 
610 


1310 


250?' 


400? 
1150 
30 


420? 


c. 310 


400? 


1118 
420 


LIST OF BOOKS 


REFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR’S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREME 
ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE. 


Alberti = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in 
sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725. 

Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the 
edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and 
Brandis; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 1831-1870. Of the 
Rhetorie, Sandys's edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge, 
1877) has been used. 

Biumlein = W. Baumlein, Untersuchungen über griechi- 
schen Partikeln. Stuttgart, 1861. 

B.D. — Dr. William Smith's Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols. 
London, 1860-64. The American.edition (4 vols., N. Y. 
1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Hackett and 
Abbot, has been the edition used, and is occasionally 
referred to by the abbreviation * Am. ed." 

BB. DD. — Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the 
work just named, and the third edition of Kitto's Cyclo- 
pzdia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex- 
ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870. 

Bnhdy.— G. Bernhardy, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der 
Griechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1829. 

B. = Alexander Buttmann, Grammar of the New Testament 
Greek. (Authorized Translation with numerous Addi- 
tions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.) 
Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page 
of the translation, with the corresponding page of the 
German original added in a parenthesis. 

Bttm. Ausf. Spr. or Sprchl. = Philipp Buttmann, Ausführ- 
liche Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., 1st vol. 1830, 2d 
vol. 1839.) 

Bttn. Gram. — Philipp Buttmann's Griechische Gram- 
matik. The edition used (though not the latest) is the 
twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berlin, 
1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth 
edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by 
Harper & Brothers, 1851. Whenthe page is given, the 
translation is referred to. 

Bitm. Lexil. = Philipp Buttmann's Lexilogus u. s. w. (1st 
vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was 
translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one 
volume by John Murray, London, 1836. 

* Bible Educator" — a collection (with the preceding name) 
of miscellaneous papers on biblical topies by various 
writers under the editorship of Rev. Professor E. H. 





Plumptre, and published in 4 vols. (without date) by 
Cassell, Petter, and Galpin. 

Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A Practical Introduction to 
Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised: Oxford, 
1881. 

Cremer = Hermann Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches Wórter- 
buch der Neutestamentlichen Gráücitàt. ‘Third greatly 
enlarged and improved Edition': Gotha, 1883. Of the 
*Fourth enlarged and improved Edition? nine parts 
(comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to 
hand, and are occasionally referred to. A translation 
of the second German edition was published in 1878 
by the Messrs. Clark. 

Curtius = Georg Curtius, Grundzüge der Griechischen Ety- 
mologie. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst 
Windisch: Leipzig, 1879. 

Dict. of Antiq. — Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui- 
ties. Edited by Dr. William Smith. Second edition: 
Boston and London, 1869, also 1873. 

Dict. of Biog. — Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography 
and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols. 
Boston and London, 1849. 

Dict. of Chris. Antiq. — A Dictionary of Christian Antiqui- 
ties, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible. 
Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel 
Cheetham. 2 vols. 1875-1880. 

Dict. of Chris. Biog. — A Dictionary of Christian Biogra- 
phy, Literature, Sects and Doctrines; etc. Edited by 
Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace: vol. 
i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii. 1882; (not yet complete). 

Dict. of Geogr. — Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geogra- 
phy. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 2 vols. 1854-1857. 

Edersheim = Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of 
Jesus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereotyped. 
London and New York, 1884. 

Elsner = J. Elsner, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis 
libros ete. 2 vols., Traj. ad Rhen. 1720, 1728. 

Etym. Magn.—the Etymologicum Magnum (see List of 
Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s edition (1 vol. folio, 
Oxford, 1848) has been used. 

Fick = August Fick, Vergleichendes Worterbuch der In- 
dogermanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Gót- 
tingen, 1874-1876. 


List or Books. 


Graecus Venetus — the Greek version of the Pentateuch, 
Prov., Ruth, Canticles, Eccl., Lam., Dan., according to a 
unique MS. in the Library of St. Mark's, Venice ; edited 
by O. v. Gebhardt. Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592. à 

Green = Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on the Grammar 
of the New Testament etc. etc. A new Edition. Lon- 
don, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1862. 

Also, by the same author, ** Critical Notes on the New 
Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Gram- 
mar of the New Testament Dialect.” London, Samuel 
Bagster and Sons, 1867. 

Goodwin = W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and 
Tenses of the Greek Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston 
and Cambridge, 1871. 

Gottling = Carl Goettling, Allgemeine Lehre vom Accent 
der griechischen Sprache. Jena, 1835. 

Hamburger=J. Hamburger, Real-Encyclopadie fiir Bibel und 
Talmud. Strelitz. First Part 1870; Second Part 1883. 

Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Herm. 

Herzog = Real-Encyklopiidie fiir Protestantische "Theologie 
und Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols. with index, 


1854-1868. ! 
Herzog 2 or ed. 2 — a second edition of the above (edited by 


Herzog t, Plitt t, and Hauck), begun in 1877 and not yet 
complete. 

Hesych.— Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) 
'The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena, 
1858-1868). 

Jelf — W. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language. 
Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Sub- 
sequent editions have been issued, but without, it is 
believed, material alteration.) 

Kautzsch = E. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama- 
ischen. Leipzig, 1884. 

Keim = Theodor Keim, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara u. s. w. 
3 vols. Zürich, 1867-1872. 

Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae 
Linguae Particulis, ed. R. Klotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol. 
ii. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842. 

Krebs, Observv. — J. 'T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test. 
e Flavio Josepho. Lips. 1755. 

Krüger = K. W. Krüger, Griechische Sprachlehre für Schu- 
len. Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq. 
Kypke, Observv. — G. D. Kypke, Observationes sacrae in 
Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graecis et 

antiquitatibus. 2 vols. Wratisl. 1755. 

L. and S. = Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon etc. 
Seventh edition, 1883. 

Lob. ad Phryn., see Phryn. ed. Lob. 

Loesner — C. F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test. e 
Philone Alexandrino. Lips. 1777. 

Lghtft. = Dr. John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the 
17th century. 

Bp. Lghtft. — J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Bishop of Durham; the 
8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala- 
tians is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his com- 
mentary on Philippians, the 7th edition of his commen- 
tary on Colossians and Philemon. 

Lipsius = K. H. A. Lipsius, Grammatische Untersuchungen 
über die Biblische Grücitüt (edited by. Prof. R. A. Lip- 
sius, the author's son). Leipzig, 1863. 

Matthiae = August Matthié, Ausführlich Griechische Gram- 
matik. Third edition, 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835. 


XVI 


List or Books. 


McC. and S.=McClintock and Strong’s Cyclopedia of 
Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature. 10 
vols. 1867-1881 ; with Supplement, of which 1 vol. (1885) 
has appeared. New York: Harper and Brothers. 

Meisterhans — K. Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen 
Inschriften. Berlin, 1885. 

Mullach — F. W. A. Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen 
Vulgarsprache u.s. w. Berlin, 1856. 

Munthe — C. F. Munthe, Observationes philolog. in sacros 
Nov. Test. libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et 
Lips. 1755.) 

Palairet = E. Palairet, Observationes philol-erit. in sacros 
Novi Foederis libros ete. Lugd. Bat. 1752. 

Pape= W Pape, Griechisch-Deutsches Handwórterbuch. 
Second edition. 2 vols. Brunswick, 1866. A continuation 
of the preceding work is the “ Wórterbuch der Griechi- 
schen Eigennamen." "Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben- 
seler. 1863-1870. 

Passow — Franz Passow's Handwórterbuch der Griechischen 
Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz. 
1841-1857. 

Phryn. ed. Zob.— Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo- 
rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig, 
1820. (Cf. Rutherford.) 

Poll. = Pollux (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The 
edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio, 
1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf, 
5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.) 

Pss. of Sol.— Psalter of Solomon; see List of Ancient 
Authors, etc. 

Raphel— G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam 
...ex Xen, Polyb. Arrian. et Herodoto collectae. 2 
vols. Lugd. Bat. 1747. 

Riddell, Platonic Idioms — A Digest of Idioms given as an 
Appendix to * 'The Apology of Plato" as edited by the 
Rev. James Riddell, M. A.; Oxford, 1867. 

Riehm (or Riehm, HW B.) — Handworterbuch des Biblischen 
Altertums u.s.w. edited by Professor Edward C. A. 
Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884. 

Rutherford, New Phryn.— The New Phrynichus, being a 
revised text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phryni- 
chus, etc., by W. Gunion Rutherford. London, 1881. 

Schaff-Herzog =A Religious Encyclopedia etc. by Philip 
Schaff and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and 
Wagnalls, New York. 

Schenkel (or Schenkel, BL.) — Bibel-Lexikon u. s. w. edited 
by Professor Daniel Schenkel. 5 vols. Leipz. 1869-1875, 

Schmidt — J. H. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechi- 
schen Sprache. 3 vols. Leipz. 1876, 1878, 1879. 

Schóttgen = Christiani Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal- 
mudicae ete. 2 vols. Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742. 

Schiirer = Emil Schürer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen 
Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1874. "The “Second Part” of a 
new and revised edition has already appeared under the 
title of Geschichte des Jüdischen Volkes im Zeitalter 

^ Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for the portion of 
the original work which it covers) the references have 
been made, although for convenience the title of the 
first edition has been retained. An English translation 
is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark). 

Scrivener, F. H. A.:— A Plain Introduction to the Criticism 
of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge 
and London, 1883. 


List oF Books. 


Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis ete. Cambridge and 
London, 1864. 

A Full Collation of the Codex Sinaiticus with the 
Received Text of the New Testament ete. Second 
Edition, Revised. Cambridge and London, 1867. 

Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament etc. 
Cambridge and London, 1875. 

Sept. =the translation of the Old Testament into Greek 
known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the 
sixth edition of Tischendorf’s text (edited by Nestle) is 
referred to ; 2 vols. (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The 
double verse-notation occasionally given in the Apocry- 
phal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha 
and select Pseudepigrapha by O. F. Fritzsche; Leipzig, 
1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine, 
Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked 
respectively by an appended Comp., Ald., Vat., Alex. 
For the first two the testimony of the edition of Lam- 
bert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on. 

The abbreviations Aq., Symm., Theod. or Theodot., 
appended to a reference to the O. T. denote respectively 
the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Symmachus, and 
Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc. 

“Lag.” designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde, 
of which the first half appeared at Góttingen in 1883. 

Soph. — £. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and 
Byzantine Periods (from B.c. 146 to 4.p. 1100.)  Bos- 
ton: Little, Brown & Co. 1870. The forerunner (once 
or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title 
* A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming 
vol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American 
Academy." Cambridge, 1860. 

Steph. "Thes. =the “ Thesaurus Graecae Linguae" of Henry 
Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vois. 
Paris, 1831-1865. Occasionally the London (Valpy's) 
edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred 
to. 

Suid. = Suidas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s 
edition (2 vols. folio, Oxford, 1834) has been followed. 
*'Teaching' — The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles (Ar 

Sax] τῶν δώδεκα ἀποστόλων.) The edition of Harnack 


XVII 








Lisr or Books. 


(in Gebhardt and Harnack's Texte und Untersuchungen 
u.s.w. Second vol, Pts. i. and ii, Leipzig 1884) has 
been followed, together with his division of the chapters 
into verses. 

'Thiersch — Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik τι. 5. w. 
Third edition. Leipzig, 1826. 

"Trench — Abp. R. C. Trench's Synonyms of the New Testa- 
ment. Ninth edition, improved. London, 1880. 

Vanicek — Alois Vanicek, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo- 
gisches Worterbuch. ?2 vols. Leipz. 1877. 

By the same author is “ Fremdwórter im Griechischen 
und Lateinischen." Leipzig, 1878. 

Veitch = William Veitch, Greek Verbs irregular and de- 
fective, ete. New Edition. Oxford, 1879. 

Vig. ed. Herm.— Vigeri de praecipuis Graecae dictionis 
Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition. 
Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by 
Rev. John Seager was published at London in 1828. 

Vulg.— the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate. 
Professor Tischendorf's edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been 
followed. 

Wetst. or Wetstein — J. J. Wetstein's Novum Testamen- 
tum Graecum ete. 2vols. folio. Amsterdam, 1751,1752. 

W.= G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testa- 
ment etc. Revised and Authorized Translation of the 
seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine- 
mann; Andover, 1883. Unless otherwise indicated, it is 
referred to by pages, the corresponding page of the orig- 
inal being added in a parenthesis. When Dr. Moulton’s 
translation of the sixth German edition is referred to, 
that fact is stated. 

Win. RWB.— G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realwórterbuch 
u.s.w. Third edition. 2 vols. Leipzig and New York, 
1849. 

Win. De verb. Comp. etc.— G. B. Winer, De verborum 
cum praepositionibus compositorum in Novo Testamento 
usu. Five academic programs ; Leipzig, !843. 

Other titles, it is believed, are so fully given as to be easily 
verifiable. 


EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 





As respects Punctuation —it should be noticed, that 
since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are 
given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek 
Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a 
form of the Present Tense which is in use, and one which 
is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet. 
This is done by putting a semi-colon after a Present which 
actually occurs, and a colon after a Present which is a 
mere alphabetic locum tenens. 

Further: a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic 
voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such 
voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not) 
indicates that said voucher or reference applies to other 
passages, definitions, etc., besides the one which it imme- 
diately follows. The same principle governs the insertion 
or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as 
“absol.”, “ pass.", etc. 

A hyphen has been placed between the component parts 
of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in 
actual use; otherwise the hyphen is omitted. 


[1 Brackets have been used to mark additions by the Amer- 
ican editor. To avoid, however, a complexity which 
might prove to the reader confusing, they have been 
occasionally dispensed with when the editorial additions 
serve only to complete a statement already made in part 
by Professor Grimm (as,in enumerating the forms of 
verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs com- 
pounded with σύν which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ; 
but in no instance have they been intentionally omitted 
where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor 
Grimm an opinion for which he is not responsible. 


* An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the 
instances of the word's occurrence in the New Testament 
are noticed in the article. Of the 5594 words composing 
the vocabulary of the New Testament 5300 are marked 
with an asterisk. To this extent, therefore, the present 
work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon. 


A superior * or ^ or * etc. appended to a verse-numeral 
designates the first, second, third, ete., occurrence of a given 
word or construction in that verse. The same letters ap- 
pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first, 
second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. etc. 
after a page-numeral designates the subdivision of the page. 


The various forms of the GnEEK TExr referred to are 
represented by the following abbreviations : 

R or Rec. — what is commonly known as the Textus Recep- 
tus. Dr. F. H. A. Scrivener's last edition (Cambridge 
and London 1877) has been taken as the standard. To 
designate a particular form of this * Protean text" an 
abbreviation has been appended in superior type; as, “ἢ 
for Elzevir, * for Stephen, ^* for Beza, *r's for Erasmus. 

G or Grsb. — the Greek text of Griesbach as given in his 
manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Owing to a dis- 
regard of the signs by which Griesbach indicated his 
judgment respecting the various degrees of probability 
belonging to different readings, he is cited not infre- 
quently, even in critical works, as supporting readings 
which he expressly questioned, but was: not quite ready 
to expel from the text. 

L or Lchm. — Lachmann's Greek text as given in his larger 
edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text 
of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 1831) is re- 
ferred to, the abbreviation “ min." or “ ster." is added ta 
his initial. 

T or Tdf.—the text of Tischendorf’s * Editio Octava 
Critica Major " (Leipzig, 1869-1872). 

Tr or Treg.— *'The Greek New Testament” etc. by S. P. 
Tregelles (London, 1857-1879). 

WH--*'The New Testament in the Original Greek. The 
Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott D.D. and Fen- 
ton John Anthony Hort D.D. Cambridge and London, 
Macmillan and Co. 1881." 

KC-—*Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vaticani " 
as edited by Professors Kuenen and Cobet (Leyden, 
1860). 

The textual variations noticed are of course mainly those 
which affect the individual word or construction under dis- 
cussion. Where an extended passage or entire section is 
textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20; Jn. v. 
3 fin.—4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be 
known, or at least it is not stated under every word contained 
in the passage. 


As respects the NUMBERING OF THE VERSES — the edition 
of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been 





1 Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, which was 
followed by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheau in the Theoio- 
gische Literaturzeitung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106. 


EXPLANATIONS AND 


followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of 
Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc.). Wariations from this 
standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu- 
meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition 
in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the 
variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek. 


In quotations from the Exarisu Brsre— 

A. V.— the current or so-called ** Authorized Version ” ; 

R. V.—the Revised New Testament of 1881. But when a 
rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be 
assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con- 
trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by 
R. V.is found in the Revision only. 


A. S. — Anglo-Saxon. 

Abp. — Archbishop. 

absol. = absolutely. 

acc. or accus. — accusative. 

acc. to — according to. 

ad 1. or ad loc. — at or on the passage. 

al.— others or elsewhere. 

al. al. — others otherwise. 

Ald. =the Aldine text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List 
of Books). 

Alex. —the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept. 
in'List of Books). 

ap. — (quoted) in 

App. — Appendix. 

appos. — apposition. 

Aq. — Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books). 

art. — article. 

augm. —augment. 

auth. or author. — author or authorities. 

B. or Bttm. see List of Books. 

B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books. 

betw. = between. 

Bibl. = Biblical. 

Bp. — Bishop. 

br.=brackets or enclose in brackets. 

€. before a date — about. 

Cantabr. — Cambridge. 

cf. — compare. 

ch. — chapter. 

cl. — clause. 

cod., codd. — manuscript, manuscripts. 

Com., Comm. — commentary, commentaries. 

comp. — compound, compounded, etc. 

compar. — comparative. 

Comp. or Compl. —the Complutensian text of the Septua- 
gint (see Sept. in List of Books). 

contr. = contracted, contract. 

dim. or dimin. — diminutive. 

dir. disc. — direct discourse. 

6. g. —for example. 

esp. = especially. 


XIX 





ABBREVIATIONS. 


ex., exx. — example, examples. 

exc. — except. 

excrpt.—=an excerpt or extract. 

fin. or ad fin. —at or near the end. 

G or Grsb. — Griesbach's Greek text (see above). 

Graec. Ven. — Graecus Venetus (see List of Books). 

i. e. — that is. 

ib. or ibid.—in the same place. 

indir. disc. — indirect discourse. 

init. or ad init.—at or near the beginning. 

in I. or in loc. — in or on the passage. 

i. q. —the same as, or equivalent to. 

KC — Kuenen and Cobet's edition of the Vatican text (see 
above). 

L or Lclm. — Lachmann's Greek text (see above). 

L. and S. — Liddell and Scott (see List of Books). 

l. or lib. — book. 

l. c., ll. ec. — passage cited, passages cited. 

Lag.— Lagarde's edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in 
List of Books). 

mrg.—-the marginal reading (of a critical edition of the 
Greek Testament). 

Opp. — Works. 

opp. to — opposed to. 

paral. =the parallel accounts (in the Synoptic Gospels). 

Pt. or pt. = part. 

q. v. = which see. 

R or Rec. — the common Greek text (see above). 

.— τοοῦ. 

rel. or relat. — relative. 

sc. — namely, to wit. 

Skr. — Sanskrit. 

8q., sqq. — following. 

Steph. — Stephanus's Thesaurus (see List of Books). 

Stud. u. Krit.—the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Ger- 
man "Theological Quarterly. 

s. v. —under the word. 

Symm. — Symmachus, translator of the Old Testament into 
Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books). 

T or Tdf. = Tischendorf's Greek text (see above). 

"Theod. or ''heodot. — Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of 
Books). 

Tr or Treg. = Tregelles's Greek text (see above). 

τι. i.— as below. 

τι. s. — as above. 

v.— see. 

var.— variant or variants (various readings). 

Vat.—the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in the 
List of Books). 

Vulg.—the Vulgate (see List of Books). 

w.— with (especially before abbreviated names of cases). 

writ. — writer, writers, writings. 

WH= Westcott and Hort's Greek text (see above). 





Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselves. 





NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. 





A 


A, a, ἄλφα 


A, a, ἄλφα, τό, the first letter of the Greek alphabet, 
opening the series which the letter o closes. Hence the 
expression ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ A [LT Tr WH ἀλφα] καὶ τὸ 9 
[Ὦ L WH], Rev. 1. 8, 11 Rec., which is explained by the 
appended words ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος, xxi. 6, and by the 
further addition ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος, xxii. 13. On 
the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4; 
xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73]. Ail 
when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is 
1. privative (στερητικόν), like the Lat. i-, the Eng. 
un-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is 
prefixed, as ἀβαρής ; or signifying what is contrary to it, 
as ἄτιμος, ἀτιμόω ; before vowels generally áv-, as ἀναίτιος. 
2. copulative (G0potgrikóv), akin to the particle dua 
[cf. Curtius $ 598], indicating community and fellow- 
ship, as in dOeAdós, ἀκόλουθος. Hence it is 3. in- 
tensive(ézrrarikóv), strengthening the force of terms, 
like the Lat. con in composition; as ἀτενίζω fr. ἀτενής 
[yet cf. W.100(95)]. This use, however, is doubted or 
denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element. i. 34 
sq.]. Cf. Kühner i. 741, § 339 Anm. 5; [Jelf $ 3425]; 
Bttm. Gram. $ 120 Anm. 11; EDonalisent Gram. p. 334 ; 
New Crat. $$ 185, 213; L. eue S. s. v.].* 

᾿Ααρών, deel prop. name (6 ᾿Ααρών, -àvos in Joseph.), 
y 


[Um (fr. the unused Hebr. radical ns, — Syr. fea n] 


libidinosus, lascivus, — [enlightened, Fürst; acc. to Die- 
trich wealthy, or fluent, like 11's], ace. to Philo, de 
ebriet. § 32, fr. ὙΠ mountain and equiv. to ópewós), Aaron, 
the brother of Moses, the first high-priest of the Israel- 
ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order : Lk. i. 5 ; 
Acts vii. 40; Heb. v.4; vii. 11; ix. 4.* 

᾿Αβαδδών, indecl., jaw, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr. 
ΣΝ to perish), Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place of destruc- 
tion i.q. Orcus, joined with Sinwi, Job xxvi. 6; Prov. 
KV. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the an- 
gel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death 
and author of havoe on earth, and is rendered in Greek 
by ᾿Απολλύων Destroyer, Rev. ix. 11.* 


1 





᾿Αβιάθαρ 


ἀβαρής, -és, (βάρος weight), without weight, light; trop. 
not burdensome: ἀβαρῆ ὑμῖν ἐμαυτὸν ἐτήρησα I have 
avoided burdening you with expense on my account, 
2 Co. xi. 9; see 1 Th. ii. 9, οἵ. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)* 

᾿Αββὰ [WH -βά], Hebr. 38 father, in the Chald. em- 
phatie state, S38 i. e. 6 πατήρ, a customary title of God in 
prayer. Whenever it occurs in the N. T. (Mk. xiv. 36; 
Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation 
subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by 
the fact that the Chaldee sas, through frequent use in 
prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred 
proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added 
the appellative from their own tongue.* 

"Age. [WH "AS. (see their Intr. § 408) ], indecl. prop. 
name (in Joseph. [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] ”ABeXos, -ov), 925 
(breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam 
(Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from his short life and sudden 
death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxix. 
6): Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; Heb. xi. 4; xii. 24.* 

᾿Αβιά, indecl prop. name (Joseph. antt. 7,10, 3; 8, 
10, 1 6'ABías [W. $ 6, 1 m.], -a), rP2N and 37728 (my 
father is Jehovah), Abia [or Abijah, CEB De Ἐς 
* a king of Judah, son of Rehoboam : Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv. 

ilg Save 1). 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal 
mE from whom, when David divided the priests into 
twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia, 
the eighth in order, took its name: Lk. i. 5.* 

᾿Αβιάθαρ, indecl. prop. name (though in Joseph. antt. 
6, 14, 6 ᾿Αβιάθαρος, -ov), V8 (father of abundance), 
Abiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest : Mk. ii. 26, — 
where he is by mistake confounded with Ahimelech his 
father (1 S. xxi. 1 sqq.) ; [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1 


Chr. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 K.ii. 
26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would 


seem that double names were esp. common in the case 
of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph. vit. $8 1, 2) 
and that father and son often bore the same name (cf. 
Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. l.c. and antt. 20, 9, 1). See Me- 
Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].* 


᾿Αβιληνή 2 


᾿Αβιληνή [WH ᾿Αβειλ. (see s. v. εἰ }7, -ῆς, ἡ» (sc. χώρα, 
the district belonging to the city Abila), Abilene, the 
name of a region lying between Lebanon and Hermon 
towards Phoenicia, 18 miles distant from Damascus and 
37 [acc. to the Itin. Anton. 38] from Heliopolis: Lk. iii. 
1. Cf. Λυσανίας [and B. D. s. v.].* 

᾿Αβιούδ, 6, indecl. prop. name, T3728 (father of the 
Jews [al. of glory]), Abiud, son of Zorobabel or Zerub- 
babel: Mt. i. 13.* 

᾿Αβραάμ [ Rec** ‘ABp.; cf. T'df. Proleg. p.106] (Joseph. 
'ABpapos, -ov), D728 (father of a multitude, cf. Gen. 
xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish 
nation: Mt. i. 1 sq.; xxii. 32; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. viii. 33; 
Acts iii. 25; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., andelsewhere. He is ex- 
tolled by the apostle Paul as a pattern of faith, Ro. iv. 1 
sqq. 17 sqq.; Gal. iii. 6 (ef. Heb. xi. 8), on which account 
all believers in Christ have a claim to the title sons or 
posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Ro. iv. 11. 

d-Bvccos, in classic Greek an adj., τος, -ov, (fr. 6 βυσσός 
i.q. Bv6ós), bottomless (so perhaps in Sap. x. 19), un- 
bounded (πλοῦτος ἄβυσσος, Aeschyl. Sept. (931) 950). 
In the Scriptures ἡ ἄβυσσος (Sept. for DINA) sc. χώρα, the 
pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of ‘the 
deep’ sea: Gen. i. 2; vii. 11; Deut. viii. 7; Sir. i. 3; 
xvi. 18, etc.; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the 
lowest parts of the earth: Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 21 ἐκ τῶν ἀβύσ- 
cov τῆς γῆς, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) raprapov ἄβυσσα 
χάσματα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 ἀβύσσων ἀνεξιχνίαστα 
κλίματα, ibid. 59, 3 ὁ ἐπιβλέπων ἐν rais ἀβύσσοις, of God ; 
[Act. Thom. 32 ὁ τὴν ἄβυσσον τοῦ raprápov οἰκῶν, of the 
dragon]), both as the common receptacle of the dead, 
Ro. x. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii. 
31; Rev.ix.1sq.11; xi. 7; xvii.S8; xx. 1,8. Among prof. 
auth. used as a subst. only by Diog. Laért. 4, 5, 27 κατῆλθες 
eis μέλαιναν Πλουτέως ἄβυσσον. Cf. Knapp, Scripta var. 
Arg. p. 554 sq.; [J. G. Müller, Philo’s Lehre von der 
Weltschopfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Deep].* 

"AxaBos [on the breathing see WH. Intr. $ 408], -ov, ὁ, 
the name of a Christian prophet, Agabus: Acts xi. 28 ; 
xxi. 10. (Perhaps from 33) to love [cf. B. D. s. v.].)* 

ἀγαθοεργέω, -@; (fr. the unused ἘΡΓῺ — equiv. to 
ἔρδω, ἐργάζομαι ---- and ἀγαθόν); to be ayaboepyés, benefi- 
cent (towards the poor, the needy): 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. 
do good]. Cf. ἀγαθουργέω. Found besides only in eccl. 
writ., but in the sense to do well, act rightly.* 

ἀγαθο-ποιέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ; (fr. ἀγαθο- 
ποιός) ; 1. to do good, do something which profits 
others: Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. ἀγαθὸν ποιῆσαι; Lk. vi. 9]; to 
show one's self beneficent, Acts xiv. 17 Rec.; τινά, to do 
some one a favor, to benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to 
aun, Zeph. i. 12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). 2 
to do weli, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to ἁμαρτάνω) ; 
jii. 6, 17; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, ex- 
cept in a few of the later in an astrological sense, to 
Jurnish a good omen.)* 

ἀγαθοποιῖα [WH -ποιία (see I, 0)], -as, 7, a course of 
right action, well-doing : ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ, 1 Pet. iv. 19 i. q. 
ἀγαθοποιοῦντες acting uprightly [ef. xii. Patr. Jos. § 18]; 


ἀγαθός. 


if we read here with L Tr mre. ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐαις we must 
understand it of single acts of rectitude [cf. W. § 27, 3; 
B. § 123, 2]. (In eccl writ. ἀγαθοπ. denotes bencfi- 
cence.)* 

ἀγαθοποιός, -óv, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14. 
[Sir. xlii. 14; Plut. de Is. et Osir. $ 42.]* 

ἀγαθός, -7, -óv, (akin to ἄγαμαι to wonder at, think 
highly of, ἀγαστός admirable, as explained by Plato, 
Crat. p. 412 c. [al. al.; cf. Donaldson, New Crat. § 323]), 
in general denotes * perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac 
facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione 
nominis, officio ac lege" (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p. 
134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. Tt 
can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, quali- 
ties and affections of the soul, deeds, times and sea- 
sons. To this general signif. can be traced back all 
those senses which the word gathers fr. the connec- 
tion in which it stands; 1. of a good constitution or 
nature: yn, Lk. viii. 8; δένδρον, Mt. vii. 18, in sense 
equiv. to ‘fertile soil,’ ‘a fruitful tree,’ (Xen. oec. 16, 7 
γῆ ἀγαθή, . . . γῆ κακή, an. 2, 4, 22 χώρας πολλῆς k- ἀγαθῆς 
οὔσης). In Lk. viii. 15 ἀγαθὴ καρδία corresponds to the 
fig. expression “good ground”, and denotes a soul in- 
clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn say- 
ing truth and ready to bear the fruits (καρποὺς ἀγαθούς. 
Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. useful, salutary : 
δόσις ἀγαθή (joined to δώρημα τέλειον) a gift which is 
truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 17; δόματα ἀγαθά, Mt. vii. 
11; ἐντολὴ ay. a commandment profitable to those who 
keep it, Ro. vii. 12, acc. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to εἰς 
τὸ συμφέρον εἰσηγουμένη, hence the question in vs. 13: τὸ 
οὖν ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ γέγονε θάνατος; dy. μερίς the ‘good 
part,’ which insures salvation to him who chooses it, 
Lk. x. 42; ἔργον ay. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, ete.) the 
saving work of God, i. e. substantially, the Christian 
life, due to divine efficiency, Phil. i. 6 [cf. the Comm. 
ad loe.]; εἰς ἀγαθόν for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28. 
(Sir. vii. 13; πάντα τοῖς εὐσεβέσι εἰς ἀγαθά, . . . τοῖς duap- 
τωλοῖς εἰς κακά, Sir. XXXix. 27; τὸ κακὸν . . . γίγνεται eis 
ἀγαθόν, Theognis 162); good for, suited to something : 
πρὸς οἰκοδομήν, Eph. iv. 29 [cf. W. 363 (340)] (Xen. 
mem.4,6,10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is 
good, pleasant, agreeable, joyful, happy: ἡμέραι dy. 1 Pet. 
ii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 Macc. 
x. 55); ἐλπίς, 2 Th. ii. 16 (μακαρία éAmis,Tit. ii. 13) ; 
συνείδησις, a peaceful conscience, i. q. consciousness of 
rectitude, Acts xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16: 
reconciled to God, vs. 21. 4. excellent, distinguished : 
so τὶ ἀγαθόν, Jn. i. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable: 
Mt. xii. 34; xix. 16; Lk. vi. 45; Acts xi. 24; 1 Pet. iii. 
11, etc.; πονηροὶ x. ἀγαθοί, Mt. v. 45; xxii. 10; dyad. καὶ 
δίκαιος, Lk. xxiii. 50; καρδία ἀγαθὴ x. καλή, Lk. viii. 15 
(see καλός, b.) ; fulfilling the duty or service demanded, 
δοῦλε ἀγαθὲ x. moré, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; upright, free 
from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the 
people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum- 
mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18; 
Lk. xviii. 19) ; dy. θησαυρός in Mt. xii. 35; Lk. vi. 45 


ayaboupyéw 


denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure 
thoughts which are brought forth in speech; πίστις ay. 
the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10 
[WH mrg. om.]; on dyad. ἔργον: ay. ἔργα, see ἔργον. 
In a narrower sense, benevolent, kind, generous: Mt. 
xx. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; μνεία, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii. 
20) ; beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 4; 310, Jer. xxxiii. 11; 
Ps. xxxiv. 9; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 “optimus i. e. 
beneficentissimus"), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is, 
Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death; 
for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does 
so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received 
favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker's 
Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de- 
notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and 
in partie. a. in the plur., external goods, riches: Lk. i. 
53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4; Sap. vii. 11) ; τὰ ἀγαθά cov 
comforts and delights which thy wealth procured for 
thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to κακά, as in Sir. 
xi. 14); outward and inward good things, Gal. vi. 6, cf. 
Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king- 
dom: Ro. x. 15; τὰ μέλλοντα dy. Heb. ix. 11; x. 1. 2: 
what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro. 
xii. 2; ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ dy. Ro. ii. 10; Eph. iv. 28; πράσσειν, 
Ro. ix. 11; (2 Co. v. 10]; διώκειν, 1 Th. v. 15; μιμεῖ- 
σθαι, 3 Jn. 11; κολλᾶσθαι τῷ ay. Ro. xii. 9; τί pe ἐρωτᾷς 
περὶ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ, Mt. xix. 17 G L T Tr WH, where the 
word expresses the general idea of right. Spec., what 
is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs: in the 
phrase διάκονος εἰς τὸ ay. Ro. xiii. 4; of rendering ser- 
vice, Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21; τὸ dy. cov the favor thou 
conferrest, Philem. 14. 

[“ It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the 
Sept. that 318 good is predominantly [1] rendered by καλός. 
... The translator of Gen. uses ἀγαθός only in the neut., 
good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for the 
other translators. ... In the Greek O. T., where oí δίκαιοι is 
the technical designation of the pious, of ἀγαθοί or 6 ἀγαθός 
does not occur in so general a sense. The ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός is 
peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3) ; cf. besides 
the solitary instance in 1 Kingsii.32. Thus even in the usage 
of the O. T. we are reminded of Christ’s words, Mk. x. 18, 
οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὺς εἰ μὴ εἷς 6 θεός. In the O. T. the term ‘right- 
eous’ makes reference rather to a covenant and to one’s rela- 
tion to a positive standard ; ἀγαθός would express the abso- 
lute idea of moral goodness” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. 
bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On 
the comparison of ἀγαθός see D. 27 (24).] 

&ya8ovpyéo, -9; Acts xiv. 171, Τ' Tr WH for R ἀγαθο- 
The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WH. App. 
p- 145], see ἀγαθοεργέω ; but cf. κακοῦργος, tepovpyéo-* 

ἀγαθωσύνη, -ης, 7, [on its formation see W. 95 (90); 
WH. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and eccl. writ., 
uprightness of heart and life, [A. V. goodness]: 2 Th. i. 
11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindness, benefi- 
cence); Ro. xv. 14; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench §: lxiii.; 
Ellic. and Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. l. c.] * 

ἀγαλλιάομαι, see ἀγαλλιάω. 

ἀγαλλίασις, -ews, 7, (ἀγαλλιάω). not used by prof. writ. 
but often by the Sept.; exultation, extreme joy: Lk. i. 


ποιῶ. 





ἀγαπάω 


14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. 
(xlv.) 8) oil of gladness with which persons were 
anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer, 
alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses 
as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which 
the Son of God has been exalted.* 

ἀγαλλιάω, -@, and -ἄάομαι, (but the act. is not used 
exc. in Lk. i. 47 [ἡγαλλίασα], in Rev. xix. 7 [ἀγαλ- 
λιῶμεν] L Τ' Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrz. 
(ἀγαλλιᾶτε), cf. WH. App. p. 169]) ; 1 aor. ἠγαλλιασά- 
μην, and (with a mid. signif.) ἠγαλλιάθην (Jn. v. 35; 
Rec. ἠγαλλιάσθην) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr. 
ἀγάλλομαι to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45) ]), often in 
Sept. (for 72, Yo» 121, Ent). to ezult, rejoice exceed- 
ingly: Mt. v.12; Lk.x. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet. 
i. 8; iv. 13; ἔν τινι, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in 
which the joy originates [cf. W. $ 33 a.; B. 185 (160)]; 
but Jn. v. 35 means, ‘to rejoice while his light shone’ 
[i. e. in (the midst of) ete.]. ἐπί τινι, Lk.i.47; foll. by 
ἵνα, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it 
had been promised him that he should see. This divine 
promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise; cf. 
W. 339 (318); B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke 
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.* 

G-yapos, -ov, (γάμος). unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32; 
used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and 
elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said ἄνανδρος." 

ἀγανακτέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ἤγανάκτησα: (as πλεονεκτέω comes 
fr. πλοενέκτης, and this fr. πλέον and ἔχω, so through a 
conjectural ἀγανάκτης fr. ἄγαν and ἄχομαι to feel pain, 
grieve, [al. al.]); to be indignant, moved with indigna- 
tion: Mt.xxi.15; xxvi.8; Mk. x. 14; xiv.4; περί τινος 
[cf. W. 8 33 a.], Mt. xx. 24; Mk. x. 41; foll. by ὅτι, Lk. 
xiii. 14. (From Hdt. down.) * 

ἀγανάκτησις, -ews, 7, indignation: 2 Co. vii. 11. [(From 
Plat. on.) ]* 

ἀγαπάω, -à; [impf. ἠγάπων ; fut.dyarnow; 1 aor. ἢγά- 
moa; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. ἡγαπήκαμεν 1 Jn. iv. 10 WH 
txt.], ptep. 7yazgkós (2 Tim. iv. 8); Pass., [pres. dya- 
πῶμαι]; pf. ptep. 7yazuevos; 1 fut. ἀγαπηθήσομαι; (akin 
to ἄγαμαι [ Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see ἀγαθός, init.]) ; to love, 
to be full of good-will and exhibit the same: Lk. vii. 47 ; 
1 Jn. iv. 7 sq.; with acc. of the person, to have a pre- 
ference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 48 
Sqq.; xix. 19; Lk. vii. 5; Jn.xi. 5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 
11; xii. 15; Gal. v. 14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and 
elsewhere; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris- 
tians towards one another; of the benevolence which 
God, in providing salvation for men, has exhibited by 
sending his Son to them and giving him up to death, 
Jn. iii. 16; Ro. viii. 37; 2 Th. n- 16; 1 Jn. iv. 11, 19; 
[noteworthy is Jude 1 L T Tr WH rois ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ 
ἠγαπημένοις ; see év,l.4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 
12]; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human 
salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20; 
Eph. v. 2; οὗ the love with which God regards Christ, 
Jn. iii. 35; [v. 20 L mrg.]|; x- 17; xv. 9; Eph. i. 6. 
When used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word 


ἀγάπη 


involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe- 
dience, grateful recognition of benefits received: Mt. vi. 
24; xxii. 37; Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. ii. 9; viii. 3; Jas.i. 12; 
1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, and elsewhere. With an 
acc. of the thing ἀγαπάω denotes to take pleasure in the 
thing, prize it above other things, be unwilling to abandon it 
or do without it: δικαιοσύνην, Heb. i. 9 (i. e. steadfastly 
to cleave to); τὴν δόξαν, Jn. xii. 43; τὴν πρωτοκαθεδρίαν, 
Lk. xi. 43; τὸ σκότος and τὸ φῶς, Jn. iii. 19; τὸν κόσμον, 
1 Jn. ii. 15; τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which 
last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advan- 
tages and joys; τὴν Ψυχὴν αὐτῶν, Rev. xii. 11; ζωήν, 
1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it 
agreeable to himself) ; to welcome with desire, long for : 
τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap.i.1; vi. 135 Sir. 
iv. 12, etc.; so of a person: ἠγαπήθη, Sap. iv. 10, cf. 
Grimm ad loe.). Concerning the unique proof of love 
which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it 
is said ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς, Jn. xiii. 1, cf. Lücke or Meyer 
ad loc. [but al. take ἡγάπ. here more comprehensively, 
see Weiss's Mey., Godet, Westcott, Keil]. The combi- 
nation ἀγάπην ἀγαπᾶν τινα occurs, when a relative inter- 
venes, in Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where 
τὸ μῖσος ὃ ἐμίσησεν αὐτήν is contrasted; cf. Gen. xlix. 25 
εὐλόγησέ σε εὐλογίαν; Ps. Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude- 
pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric. i. p. 966; Libri Apoer. etc., 
ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] δόξαν ἣν ἐδόξασεν αὐτήν) ; cf. W. 
§ 32, 2; [B. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Macc. ii. 54. 

On the difference betw. ἀγαπάω and φιλέω, see φιλέω. 
Cf. ἀγάπη, 1 fin. 

ἀγάπη, -75, 7, ἃ purely bibl. and eecl. word (for Wyt- 
tenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago re- 
stored ἀγαπήσων in place of ἀγάπης, ὧν in Plut. sympos. 
quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof. 
auth. fr. [ Aristot.], Plut. on used ἀγάπησις. “The Sept. 
use ἀγάπη for NINN, Cant. di. 4, δ, 7; iij. 5, 10; v. 8; 
vii. 6; viii. 4, 6, 7; [** It is noticeable that the word first 
makes its appearance as a current term in the Song 
of Sol.; — certainly no undesigned evidence respect- 
ing the idea which the Alex. translators had of the 
love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. 
Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eecl.ix. 1, 6; [2 S. xiii. 
15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo 
and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. 
Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas. ; it 
occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and 
Rev., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter, 
Jude” (Bretschn. Lex. s. v.) ; [Philo, deus immut. § 14]. 

In signification it follows the verb ἀγαπάω; conse- 
quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene- 
volence: Jn. xv. 13; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the 
love of men to men; esp. of that love of Christians 
towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by 
their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the 
soul or as expressed: Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8; 
xiv. 1; 2 Co. ii. 4; Gal. v. 6; Philem. 5, 75 1 Tim. i. 
δ; Heb. vi. 10; x. 24; Jn. xiii. 35; 1 Jn. iv. 7; Rev. 
ii.4, 19, ete. Of the love of men towards God: ἡ ἀγάπη 








4 ἀγαπητός 


τοῦ θεοῦ (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; Jn. v. 
42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (ro) πατρός) ; iii. 17; iv. 12; v. 8. Of 
the love of God towards men: Ro. v. 8; viii. 39; 2 Co. 
xiii.13 (14). Of the love of God towards Christ: Jn. xv. 
10; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men: 
Jn. xv. 9 sq.; 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19. 
In construction: dy. εἴς τινα, 2 Co. ii. 8 [?]; Eph. i. 
15 [L WH om. Tr mrg. br. τὴν ἀγάπην] ; τῇ ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐν 
ἡμῖν i. e. love going forth from your soul and taking up 
its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co. 
vii. 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 329 (283)]; μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν 
i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24; μεθ᾽ 
ἡμῶν i e.seen among us, 1 Jn.iv. 17. Phrases: ἔχειν 
ἀγάπην eis τινα, 2 Co. ii. 4; Col. i. 4 [L T Tr, but WH 
br.]; 1 Pet. iv. 8; ἀγάπην διδόναι to give a proof of 
love, 1 Jn. iii. 1; ἀγαπᾶν ἀγάπην τινά, Jn. xvii. 26; 
Eph. ii. 4 (v. in ἀγαπάω, sub fin.) ; dy. τοῦ πνεύματος i. e. 
enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 30; ὁ vids τῆς 
ἀγάπης the Son who is the object of love, i. q. ἀγαπητός, 
Col. i. 13 (W. 237 (222); [B. 162 (141)]) ; ὁ θεὸς τῆς 
dy. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11; κόπος τῆς ay. 
troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th. 
i. 3; dy. τῆς ἀληθείας love which embraces the truth, 
2 Th. ii. 10; 6 θεὸς ἀγάπη ἐστίν God is wholly love, his 
nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. & 16 ; φίλημα 
ἀγάπης à kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual aflec- 
tion, 1 Pet. v. 14; διὰ τὴν ay. that love may have oppor- 
tunity of influencing thee (‘in order to give scope to the 
power of love’ De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; ἐν 
ἀγάπῃ lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21; 
on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element], 
Eph. iv. 15 (where ἐν dy. is to be connected not with 
ἀληθεύοντες but with αὐξήσωμεν), vs. 165 ἐξ ἀγάπης influ- 
enced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; κατὰ ἀγάπην in a manner 
befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together 
with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3; 
v. 8; Col. i. 4 sq. ; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words 
ἀγάπη, ἀγαπᾶν, cf. Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, 
p. 646 sq.; on the idea and nature of Christian love 
see Késtlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. etc. p. 248 sqq. 
332 sqq.; Riickert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius, 
Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq.; [Aeuss, Théol. 
Chrét. livr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Plur. ἀγάπαι, -ῶν, 
agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu- 
tual love which used to be held by Christians before the 
celebration of the Lord's supper, and at which the 
poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par- 
took in common with the rest of food provided at the 
expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13 
L Tr txt. WH mrg.), cf. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq.; Acts ii. 42, 
46; xx. 7; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr. c. 3; 
Cypr. ad Quirin. 3, 3; Drescher, De vet. christ. Agapis. 
Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D. s. v. 
Love-Feasts; Dict. of Christ. Antiq.s. v. Agapae; more 
fully in McC. and S. s. v. Agape]. 

ἀγαπητός, -], -óv, (ἀγαπάω), beloved, esteemed, dear, 
favorite; (opp. to ἐχθρός, Ro. xi. 28): ὁ vids μου (τοῦ 
Θεοῦ) 6 ἀγαπητός, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii. 17 


"Ayap 


[here WH mre. take 6 dy. absol, connecting it with 
what follows]; xii. 18; xvii. 5; Mk. i. 11; ix. 7; Lk. 
iii. 22; ix. 35 (where L mrg. T Tr WH ὁ ἐκλελεγμένος) ; 
2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xx. 13; [cf. Ascensio 
Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25, ete.]. ἀγα- 
πητοὶ Θεοῦ [ W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is applied 
to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by 
him to be worthy of eternal life: Ro. i. 7, cf. xi. 28; 
1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (Ix.) 7; cvii. 
(cviii.) 7; exxvi. (exxvii.) 2, ἀγαπητοί σου and αὐτοῦ, of 
pious Israelites). But Christians, bound together by 
mutual love, are ἀγαπητοί also to one another (Philem. 
16; 1 Tim. vi. 2) ; hence they are dignified with this 
epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro. 
xvi. 5, 8; Col iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct 
(Ro. xii: 19; 1 Co. iv. 14; [Philem. 2 Rec.]; Heb. vi. 
9s Jas. 1. 16; 1 Pet. i. 11; 2 Pet. m. 1; [1 Jn. it. 7 
GLT Tr WH], etc.). Generally foll. by the gen.; once 
by the dat. ἀγαπ. ἡμῖν, 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2; 
B. 190 (165)]. ἀγαπητὸς ἐν κυρίῳ beloved in the fel- 
lowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro. 
xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In 
class. Grk. fr. Hom. Il. 6, 401 on; cf. Cope on Aristot. 
rhet. 1, 7, 41.] 

"Ayap [WH "Ay. (see their Intr. $ 408)], ἡ, indecl., 
(in Joseph. ᾿Αγάρα, -ns), 31 (flight), Hagar, a bond- 
maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael 
(Gen. xvi): Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. T om. Tr br.]. 
Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for- 
merly dwelt among them, Gal. i. 17) called the rocky 
Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to ^4n ( iun 
i.e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred"to em- 
ploys the name Hagar allegorically to denote the servile 
sense of fear with which the Mosaic economy imbued 
its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note"; 
Bp. Lghtft.’s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal. 
Moss 

ἀγγαρεύω ; fut. ἀγγαρεύσω; 1 aor. ἠγγάρευσα ; to em- 
ploy a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word 
of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but 
adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. angariare). ἤλγγαροι were 
public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by appointment 
of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses 
ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from 
one to another and so convey them the more speedily to 
their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson's 
note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. 
s. V. YN; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanitek, Fremd- 
worter s. v. dyyapos]. These couriers had authority to 
press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels, 
even men they met, [cf. Joseph. antt. 13, 2,3]. Hence 
dyyapeve τινά denotes to compel one to go a journey, 
to bear a burden, or to perform any other service: 
Mt. v. 41 (ὅστις σε ἀγγαρεύσει μίλιον ἔν i. e. whoever 
shall compel thee to go one mile) ; xxvii. 82 (ἡγγάρευσαν 
iva ἄρῃ i. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.* 

ἀγγεῖον, -ov, τό, (i. q. τὸ ἄγγος). a vessel, receptacle: 


Mt. xiii. 48 [R G L]; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.) * 





ἄγγελος 


ἀγγελία, -ας, 7, (ἄγγελος), « message, announcement, 
thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where 
Rec. has ἐπαγγελία) [cf. Is. xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From 
Hom. down.]* 

ἀγγέλλω; [1 aor. ἤγγειλα, Jn. iv. 51 T (for ἀπήγγ- 
R GL Tr br.)]; (@yyedos); to announce: ἀγγέλλουσα, 
Jn.xx. 18 L T Tr WH, for RG ἀπαγγέλλ. [From Hom. 
down. Comp.: dv, ἀπ-, Ot, ἐξ-, ém-, mwpo-em-, xar-, 
mpo-kar-, παρ-αγγέλλω.} * 

ἄγγελος, -ov, 6, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is 
sent: Mt. xi. 10; Ek. vii. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; 
Jas. ii. 25. [TFr. Hom. down.] 2. In the Scriptures, 
both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host 
of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish 
and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the 
universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute 
his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk. 
xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts 
vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to 
make them known to men (Lk. i. 11, 26; ii. 9 sqq. ; 
Acts x. 3/2 Ἐπτει ΟΣ ΝΠ 1520/01) 5108! S xocvits 5.: dris 
xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος 
(angel, messenger of God, 3875) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or 
ayy. Tod θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but 
also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, cf. Eph. i. 
21; Gal.iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return 
to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser- 
vants and attendants: Mt. xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv. 
31; xxv. 31; 2 Th. i. 7, cf. Jude 14. Single angels 
have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv. 
18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq.; Jn. v. 4 [R L]. 
Respecting the ἄγγελος τῆς ἀβύσσου, Rev. ix. 11, see 
᾿Αβαδδών, 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men- 
tioned in Mt. xviii, 10; Acts xii. 15. ‘The angels of the 
churches’ in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7, 14 are not 
their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits who exer- 
cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them 
that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or 
of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their 
angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into 
the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Düsterdieck, [ Alford,] on 
Rev. i. 20, and Lücke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii. 
p. 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 199 sq.]. 
διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους that she may show reverence for the 
angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of 
Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. ὥφθη 
ἀγγέλοις in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained 
neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in 
heaven, nor of demons triumphed over by him in the 
nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to 
whom he appeared after his resurrection. ‘This appel- 
lation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily un- 
derstood from the nature of the hymn from which the 
passage ἐφανερώθη . . . ev δόξῃ seems to have been taken; 
cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic. 
ad loe.]. In Jn.i.51(52)angels are employed, by a beau- 
tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent 
the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge 


ἄγγος 


of his Messianic office, and the signal proofs to appear 
in his history of a divine superintendence. Certain of 
the angels have proved faithless to the trust committed 
to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin, 
Jude 6; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch c. vi. ete., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and 
now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41; Rev. xii. 7, ef. 1 Co. 
vi. 3 [yet on this last passage ef. Meyer; he and others 
maintain that &yy. without an epithet or limitation never 
in the N. T. signifies other than good angels]. Hence 
ἄγγελος Saray is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote 
a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See δαίμων; 
[ Soph. Lex. s. v. ἄγγελος ; and for the literature on the 
whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the 
reff. there given add G. L. Hahn, Theol. des N. T., i. 
pp. 260-384; Delitzsch in Riehm s. v. Engel; Kiibel 
in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.]. 

ἄγγος, -eos, τό, (plur. ayyn), i. q. ἀγγεῖον q. v.: Mt. 
xiii.48 T Tr WH. (From Hom. down; [cf. Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 23].) * 

ἄγε, (properly impv. of ἄγω), come ! 
as it often is in the classics (W. 5 
more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.” 

ἀγέλη, -75, ἡ, (ἄγω to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.; 
Mk. v. 11, 13; Lk. viii. 32 sq. (From Hom. down.) * 

ἀγενεαλόγητος, -ov, 6, (yeveadoyew), of whose descent 
there is no account (in the O. T.), [R. V. without gene- 
alogy]: Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 μὴ yeveadoyovpevos). No- 
where found in prof. auth.* 

ἀγενής, -éos (-ovs), ὁ, 7, (γένος), opp. to εὐγενής, of no 
family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu- 
tation; often used by prof. writ., also in the secondary 
sense ignoble, cowardly, mean, base. In the N. T. only 
in 1 Co. i. 28, rà ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου i. e. those who among 
men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj. 
in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].* 

dyáfo; 1 δου. ἡγίασα; Pass., [pres. ἁγιάζομαι]; pf. ἡγί- 
agpat; 1 aor. ἡγιάσθην; ἃ word for which the Greeks use 
dyigew, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to Wap, wap) 
and eecl. writ.; to make ἅγιον, render or declare sacred 
or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render 
or acknowledge to be venerable, to hallow: τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxix. 23; Ezek. xx. 41; 
xxxvii. 23; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4); [Lk. xi. 2]; τὸν 
Χριστόν, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (Β G θεόν). Since the stamp 
of sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to 
whatever has any connection with God, ἁγιάζειν de- 
notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to 
God, to consecrate and so render inviolable; a. things 
(πᾶν πρωτότοκον, rà ἀρσενικά, Deut. xv. 19; ἡμέραν, Ex. 
xx. 8; οἶκον, 2 Chr. vii. 16, etc.) : τὸν χρυσόν, Mt. xxiii. 
17; τὸ δῶρον, vs. 19; σκεῦος, 2 Tim.ii.21. b. persons. 
So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate 
himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn. 
xvii. 19; God is said ἁγιάσαι Christ, i. e. to have selected 
him for his service (cf. ἀφορίζειν, Gal. i. 15) by having 
committed to him the office of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf. 
Jer. i. 5; Sir. xxxvi. 12 [e£ αὐτῶν ἡγίασε, kai πρὸς αὐτὸν 
ἤγγισεν, of his selection of men for the priesthood]; xlv. 


come now! used, 


6 


516 (481)), even when | 








L4 
ἅγιος 


4; xlix. 7. Since only what is pure and without 
blemish can be devoted and offered to God (Ley. xxii. 
20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), ἁγιάζω signifies 3. to 
purify, (ἀπὸ τῶν ἀκαθαρσιῶν is added in Ley. xvi. 19; 
2 S. xi. 4); and a. to cleanse externally (πρὸς τὴν τῆς 
σαρκὸς καθαρότητα), to purify levitically: Heb. ix. 13; 
1 Tim.iv. 5. b. to purify by expiation, free from the 
guilt of sin: 1 Co. vi. 11; Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29; 
xiii. 12; ii. 11 (equiv. to 192, Ex. xxix. 33, 36); οἵ. 
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 340 sqq., [Eng. trans. ii. 68 
sq.]. 6. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn. 
xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii. 
32); 1 Th. ν. 23; 1 Co. i. 2 (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ in the 
fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 (ἐν 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ imbued with the Holy Spirit, the divine 
source of holiness); Jude 1 ( T Tr WH ἠγαπημένοις 
[q. v.]) ; Rev. xxii. 11. In general, Christians are 
called ἡγιασμένοι [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who, 
freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been 
brought near to God by their faith and sanctity, Acts 
xx. 32; xxvi 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 ἁγιάζεσθαι is used in 
a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians 
themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with- 


drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and 


brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit dis- 
playing itself among Christians; cf. Neander ad loc.* 
ἁγιασμός, -οὔ, 6, 2 word used only by bibl. and eccl. 
writ. (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion.*Hal. 1, 21, ἁγισμός is 
the more correct reading),signifying * 1. consecration, 
purification, τὸ ἁγιάζειν. 2. the effect of consecration: 
sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to 
whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7; 
Ro. vi 19, 22; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; ἁγιασμὸς 
πνεύματος sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th. 


| 21.13; 1 Pet.i.2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq. 


(it is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 8 [Alex.]; Ezek. 
xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11]; Sir. vii. 31, ete.) [On its use in 
the N. T. cf. Ellie. on 1 Th. iv. 3; iii. 13.]* 

ἅγιος, -a, -ov, (fr. τὸ dyos religious awe, reverence ; 
ato, ἅζομαι, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents, 
[Curtius $ 118]), rare in prof. auth.; very frequent in 
the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for vp; 1. properly 
reverend, worthy of veneration : τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. i. 
49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev. 
iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, ete.), i. q. ἔνδοξος. Hence used — a. of 
things which on account of some connection with God 
possess a certain distinetion and claim to reverence, as 
places sacred to God which are not to be profaned, 
Acts vii. 33; τόπος ἅγιος the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on 
which pass. see βδέλυγμα, c); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the 
holy land or Palestine, 2 Macc. i. 29; ii. 18; τὸ ἅγιον and 
τὰ ἅγια [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (ef. 
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec. that part of 
the temple or tabernacle which is called *the holy 
place’ (wap, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2 
[here Rec* reads ἁγία]; ἅγια ἁγίων [W. 246 (231), cf. Ex. 
xxix. 37; xxx. 10, etc.] the most hallowed portion of 
the ERAS ‘the holy of holies,’ (Ex. xxvi. 33 [cf. Joseph. 


we 
ἅγιος 


antt. 3, 6, 47), Heb. ix. 3, in ref. to which the simple 
τὰ ἅγια is also used: Heb. ix. 8, 25; x. 19; xiii. 11; 
fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8, 12; 
Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5; 
xxvii 53; Rev. xi 2; xxi 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlvii. 2; 
Neh. xi. 1, 18 [Compl.], etc.) ; τὸ ὄρος τὸ ἅγιον, because 
Christ's transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18; 
ἡ (θεοῦ) ἁγία διαθήκη i. e. which is the more sacred be- 
cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72; τὸ ἅγιον, that 
worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35; the 
blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6; ἁγιωτάτη πίστις, faith 
(quae credituri.e.the object of faith) which came from 
God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude 
20; in the same sense ἁγία ἐντολή, 2 Pet. ii. 21; κλῆσις 
ἁγία, because it is the invitation of God and claims us 
as his, 2 Tim. i. 9; ἅγιαι γραφαί (rà βιβλία τὰ ἅγια, 
1 Macc. xii. 9), which came from God and contain his 
words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God 
employs; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5; angels, 
1 Th. iii. 13; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec.]; Rev. xiv. 10; Jude 
14; prophets, Acts iii. 21; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (oi) 
ἅγιοι (τοῦ) θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι, 2 Pet. i. 21 [ἢ G L Tr txt.]; 
worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety, 
Mt. xxvii. 52; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God, 
to be, as it were, exclusively his; foll by a gen. or 
dat.: τῷ κυρίῳ, Lk. ii. 23; τοῦ θεοῦ (i. q. ἐκλεκτὸς τοῦ 
Θεοῦ) of Christ, Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34, and'aec. to the true 
reading in Jn. vi. 69, ef. x. 36; he is called also 6 ἅγιος 
mais τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts iv. 30, and simply ὁ ἅγιος, 1 Jn. ii. 
20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the 
title of ἅγιοι, because God selected them from the other 
nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in 
his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22; 2 Esdr. 
viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T. 
transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se- 
lected ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the 
influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered, 
through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom 
of God: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xix. 6), cf. vs. 5; Acts ix. 13, 
3204515 xxyr 10:8 R0- dots) y11:/27 cxi. 135 xvi. 15; 
1 Co. vi. 1, 2; Phil. iv. 21 sq.; Col. i. 12; Heb. vi. 10; 
-Jude 3; Rev. v. 8, etc.; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints]. 
S. of sacrifices and offerings; prepared for God with 
-solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to ἀκάθαρτος) : 1 Co. vii. 
14, (cf. Eph. v. 3); connected with ἄμωμος, Eph. i. 4; 
v. 27; Col. i. 22; ἀπαρχή, Ro. xi. 16 ; θυσία, Ro. xii. 1. 
Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, upright, 
holy: 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2; xi. 44); 1 Co. vii. 34; 
δίκαιος x. ἅγιος, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20; ἅγιος x. 
δίκαιος. of Christ, Acts iii. 14; distinctively of him, Rev. 
iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn. 
xvii 11; ἅγιαι ἀναστροφαί, 2 Pet. iii. 11; νόμος and 
“ἐντολή. i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii. 
12; φίλημα, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love, 
1 Th. v. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 12; Ro. xvi. 16. 
On the phrase τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα and τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, 
see πνεῦμα, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes, 
in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq.; [Baudissin, 


x. 19; ἁγία πόλις 





ἁγνίζω 


Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq. ; 
Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq.; esp.] Cremer, 
Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans. of 2d ed. p. 34 
sqq.; Oehler in Herzog xix. 618 sqq. ; Zezschwitz, Pro- 
fangrücitüt u.s-w.p. 15 sqq.; Trench $lxxxviii.; Camp- 
bell, Dissertations, diss. vi., pt. iv.; Tittmann p. 22 sqq.]. 

ἁγιότης, τητος, 7, sanctity, in a moral sense; holiness: 
2Co.i.12L T Tr WH; Heb. xii. 10. (Besides only 
in 2 Maec. xv. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of this 
termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) * 

ἁγιωσύνη [on the c see reff. in ἀγαθωσύνη, init.], -ης; 7, 
a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 (64)]; 1. (God's 
incomparable) majesty, (joined to μεγαλοπρέπεια, Ps. xev. 
(xevi.) 6, cf. exliv. (exlv.) 5): πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἃ spirit 
to which belongs ἁγιωσύνη, not equiv. to πνεῦμα ἅγιον, 
but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted 
with his σάρξ, Ro. i. 4; cf. Rückert ad loc., and Zeller 
in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf. 
Mey. ad loc.; Gifford (in the Speaker’s Com.). Most 
commentators (ef. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard 
the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness]: 
2. moral purity: 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1.* 

ἀγκάλη, -7s, ἡ, (ἀγκή, ἀγκάς [fr. τ. ak to bend, curve, 
cf. Lat. uncus, angulus, Eng. angle, ete.; cf. Curtius $ 1; 
Vanitéek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm: 
δέξασθαι eis τὰς ἀγκάλας, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also 
said ἀγκὰς λαβεῖν, ἐν ἀγκάλαις περιφέρειν, ete., see évay- 
καλίζομαι. [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.) ]* 

ἄγκιστρον, -ov, τό. (fr. an unused ἀγκίζω to angle [see 
the preceding word]), a fish-hook : Mt. xvii. 27.* 

ἄγκυρα, -as, 7, [see ἀγκάλη], an anchor — [ancient an- 
chors resembled modern in form: were of iron, provided 
with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities with- 
out flukes; see Dict. of Antiq. p. 791; Jas. Smith, Voy- 
age and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed. 1866 p. 202 sq.]: 
ῥίπτειν to cast (Lat. jacere), Acts xxvii. 29; ἐκτείνειν, 
vs. 30; περιαιρεῖν, vs. 40. Figuratively, any stay or 
safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19; Eur. Hec. 78 (80); 
Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).* 

ἄγναφος, -ov, 6, 7, (γνάπτω to dress or full cloth, cf. 
appados), unmilled, unfulled, undressed : Mt.ix. 16; Mk. 
ii.21. [Cf. Moeris s. v. dkvazrov; Thom. Mag. p. 12, 14.]* 

ἁγνεία [WH dyvia (see I, c) ], -as, 7, (&yve?o), purity, 
sinlessness of life: 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite, 
Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. Ὁ. T. 864 down.] * 

ἁγνίζω ; 1 aor. ἥγνισα; pf. ptcp. act. ἡγνικώς : pass. 
jywpévos; 1 aor. pass. ἡγνίσθην [ W. 252 (237) ]; (&yvos); 
to purify ; 1. ceremonially: ἐμαυτόν, Jo. xi. 55 (to 
cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means 
of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices); the pass. 
has a reflexive force, to take upon one's self a purifica- 
tion, Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (3r, Num. vi. 3), and 
is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon them- 
selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine 
and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement 
and from shaving the head [ef. BB. DD. s. v. Nazarite ]. 
2. morally: τὰς καρδίας, Jas. iv. 8; τὰς ψυχάς, 1 Pet. i. 
22; ἑαυτόν, 1 Jn. iii. 3. (Soph., Eur., Plut., al.)* 


13 


ἁγνισμός 


ἁγνισμός, -οὔ, 6, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. 3, 
22, i. p. 469, 13; Plut. de defect. orac. 15]: Aets xxi. 26 
(equiv. to 173, Num. vi. 5), Naziritie; see ἁγνίζω, 1." 

ἀγνοέω (INO [cf. γινώσκω 7), -à, [impv. ἀγνοείτω 1 Co. 
xiv. 38 R G Tr txt. WH mrg.]; impf. ἠγνόουν ; 1 aor. 
nyvonoa; [Pass. pres. dyvoodpat, ptcp. ayvoovpevos ; fr. 
Hom. down]; a. to be ignorant, not to know: absol., 
1 Tim. i. 13; τινά, τί, Acts xiii. 27; xvii. 23; Ro. x. 3; 
ἔν τινι (as in [Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii. 
p. 717 [but the reading ἠγνόουν ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις is now 
given here; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant. ete., ed. 
Sinker, Cambr. 18697), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to 
resolve the expression thus: ἐν τούτοις, à ἀγνοοῦσι βλασ- 
φημοῦντες, ΥΥ. 629 (584), [cf. b. 287 (246)]; foll. by ὅτι, 
Ro. ii. 4; vi. 3; vii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antece- 
dent clause ὅτι κτλ. is to be supplied again); ov θέλω 
ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic ] 
scitote; foll. by an ace. of the obj., Ro. xi. 25; ὑπέρ τινος, 
ὅτι, 2 Co. i. 8; περί τινος, 1 Co. xii. 15 1 Th. iv. 13; foll. 
by ὅτι, Ro. i.13; 1 Co. x. 1; in the pass. ἀγνοεῖται ‘he 
is not known" i. e. acc. to the context ‘he is disregarded,’ 
1 Co. xiv. 38 L T Tr mrg. WH txt. ; ἀγνοούμενοι (opp. 
to ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9; 
ἀγνοούμενός τινι unknown to one, Gal. i. 225 οὐκ ἀγνοεῖν 
to know very well, ri, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10). b. not 
to understand: τί, Mk. ix. 32; Lk. ix. 45. Cc. to err, sin 
through mistake, spoken mildly of those who are not 
high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v. 15; 2 Macc. 
xi. 31): Heb. v. 2, on which see Delitzsch.* 

ἀγνόημα, -ros, τό, α sin, (strictly, that committed through 
ignorance or thoughtlessness [A. V. error]): Heb. ix. 7 
(1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. xxiii. 2); cf. dyvoéo, c. 
[and Trench § lxvi. ].* 

ἄγνοια, -as, ἡ, [fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge, 
ignorance, esp. of divine things: Acts xvii. 30; 1 Pet. 
i 14; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv. 
22); of moral blindness, Acts iii. 17. [Cf. àyvoéo.]* 

ἁγνός, -5, τόν, (ἄζομαι, see ἅγιος) ; 1. exciting rever- 
ence, venerable, sacred : mip καὶ ἡ σποδός, 2 Mace. xiii. 
8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Eur. Or. 1604 ἁγνὸς yap 
εἶμι χεῖρας, GAN ov τὰς φρένας, Hipp. 316 sq. dyvas... 
χεῖρας αἵματος φέρεις, χεῖρες μὲν ἁγναί, φρὴν δ᾽ ἔχει 
μίασμα); a. pure from carnality, chaste, modest: Tit. 
ii. 5; παρθένος an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace. 
xviii 7). b. pure from every fault, inmaculate: 2 Co. 
vii. 11; Phil. iv. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 2; 1 Jn. iii. 
8 (of God); Jas. iii. 17. (From Hom. down.) [Cf. reff. 
8. v. ἅγιος, fin.; Westcott on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]* 

dyvórns, -ητος, 7, [ἁγνός], purity, uprightness of life : 
2 Co. vi. 6; in 2 Co. xi. 3 some critical authorities 
add καὶ τῆς dyvornros after ἁπλότητος (so L Tr txt., but 
Tr mrg. WH br.), others read τῆς ἁγνότητος καὶ before 
ámAór. Found once in prof. auth., see Boeckh, Corp. 
Inserr.i. p.583 no. 1133 l. 15: δικαιοσύνης ἕνεκεν καὶ áyvó- 
Tiros.* 

dyvas, adv., purely, with sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).* 

ἀγνωσία, -as, 7, (γνῶσις), want of knowledge, igno- 
rance: 1 Pet. ii. 15; 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1).* 





8 ἀγραυλέω. 


ἄ-γνωστος, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], unknown: Acts xvii. 
23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Altar].* 

ἀγορά, -Gs, ἡ, (&yetpo, pf. ἤγορα, to collect), [fr. Hom. 
down]; 1. any collection of men, congregation, as- 
sembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the 
Ν T. the forum or public place, — where trials are held, 
Acts xvi. 19; and the citizens resort, Acts xvii. 17; and 
commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (ἀπ᾽ ἀγορᾶς 
sc. ἐλθόντες on returning from the market if they have 
not washed themselves they eat not; W. § 66, 2 d. note); 
accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or vil- 
lage: Mt. xi. 16, (Lk. vii. 32); Mk. vi. 56; Mt. xx. ὃ; 
xxiii. 7; Mk. xii. 38; [Lk.xi.43]; xx.46. [See B. D. 
Am. ed. s. v. Market.] * 

&yopáte ; [impf. ἠγόραζον ; fut. dyopacw]; 1 aor. ἠγό- 
paca; Pass, pf. ptep. ἠγορασμένος ; 1 aor. ἠγοράσθην:; 
(ἀγορά); 1. to frequent the marketplace. — 2. to buy 
(properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; 
used a. literally: absol, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; 
Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; τί, Mt. xiii. 44, 46 ; 
xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with παρά 
and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., 
Polyb.]; ἐκ and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. 
of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said . 
to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it 
were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly 
understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9, 10]; 1 Co. vii. 
23 (with gen. of price added; see τιμή, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. 
He is also said to have bought them for God ἐν 7@ 
αἵματι αὐτοῦ, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, 
too, are spoken of as purchased ἀπὸ τῆς 7s, Rev. xiv. 3, 
and ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn 
from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked) 
men. But dyopá(o does not mean redeem (e£ayopáto), 
—as is commonly said. [Cowr.: é£-ayopáto.] 

ἀγοραῖος (rarely -aía), -atov, (ἀγορά), relating to the 
marketplace; 1. frequenting the market-place, (either 
transacting business, as the κάπηλοι, or) sauntering idly, 
(Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus, Germ. Pflastertreter, 
our loafer): Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 c. ἀγοραῖοι καὶ 
φαῦλοι, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually 
transacted in the market-place: ἀγοραῖοι (sc. ἡμέραι [ W. 
590 (549)] or σύνοδοι [Mey. et al.]) ἄγονται, judicial 
days or assemblies, [A. V. mrg. court-days|, Acts xix. 
88 (ras dyopalous ποιεῖσθαι, Strabo 13, p. 932), but many 
think we ought to read ἀγόραιοι here, so G L cf. W. 
53 (52); but see [. Alf. and Tadf. ad loc.; Lipsius, Gram. 
Untersuch. p. 26;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5; Góttling 
p. 297; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].* 

ἄγρα, -ας, 7, [ἄγω]; 1. a catching, hunting: Lk. v. 4- 
2. the thing caught: ἡ ἄγρα τῶν ἰχθύων ‘the catch or haul 
of fish’ i. e. the fishes taken [ A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.* 

ἀγράμματος, -ov, [γράμμα], illiterate, without learning x. 
Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish 
schools; cf. Jn. vii. 15 γράμματα μὴ μεμαθηκώς)" 

ἀγρ-αυλέω, -ὦ ; to be an ἄγραυλος (ἀγρός, αὐλή), i. Ce 
to live in the fields, be under the open sky, even by night : 
Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a.; Plut. Num. 4).* 


ἀγρεύω 


ἀγρεύω: 1 aor. ἤγρευσα; (ἄγραν; to catch (properly, 
wild animals, fishes): fig., Mk. xii. 13 ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσι 
λόγῳ in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re- 
mark elicited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20. 


(in Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of 


love, captivate; cf. παγιδεύω, Mt. xxii. 15; σαγηνεύω, 
Leian. Tim. 25.) * 

ἀγρι-έλαιος, -ov, (ἄγριος and ἔλαιος or ἐλαία, like ἀγριάμ- 
πελος); 1. of or belonging to the oleaster, or wild olive, 
(σκυτάλην ἀγριέλαιον, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [cf. Lob. Para- 
lip. p. 376]) ; spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2. As 
subst. ἡ ἀγριέλαιος the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to 
καλλιέλαιος [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 67), also called by the 
Greeks κότινος, Ro. xi. 243 ef. Fritzscheon Rom. vol. ii. 
495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive, and Tristram, Nat. 
Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377, 
*the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster 
or Oil-tree '. ]* 

ἄγριος, -a,-ov, (ἀγρός), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. living 
or growing in the fields ov the woods, used of animals in 
a state of nature, and of plants which grow without 
culture: pede ἄγριον wild honey, either that which is 
deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the 
bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [ef. vs. 267), ete., or more cor- 
rectly that which distils from certain trees, and is gath- 
ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin. 
speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says φύεται παρ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς μέλι πολὺ τὸ καλούμενον ἄγριον, ᾧ χρῶνται ποτῷ 
μεθ᾽ ὕδατος ; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer s. v. ἀκρίς): Mt. iii. 
4; Mk. i. 6. 2. fierce, untamed: κύματα θαλάσσης, 
Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).* 

᾿Αγρίππας, -a (respecting this gen. see W. $ 8, 1 p. 60 
(59); B. 20 (18)), 6, see Ἡρώδης, (3 and) 4. 

ἀγρός, -o), ὁ, [fr. ἄγω ; prop. a drove or driving-place, 
then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager, Germ. Acker, Eng. acre; 
Fick, Pt. i. p. 8]; a. a field, the country: Mt. vi. 28; 
xxiv. 18; Lk. xv.15; [Mk. xi. 8 T Tr WH], etc. b. 
i. q. xeptov, a piece of land, bit of tillage: Actsiv.37; Mk. 
x. 29; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. C. οἱ aypot the farms, 
country-seats, neighboring hamlets: Mk. v. 14 (opp. to 
πόλις) ; vi. 36; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Hom. on.)] 

ἀγρυπνέω, -ῶ; (ἄγρυπνος equiv. to dimvos); to be sleep- 
less, keep awake, watch, (i. q. γρηγορέω [see below]) ; 
[fr. Theognis down]; trop. to be circumspect, attentive, 
ready: Mk. xii. 33; Lk. xxi 36; εἴς τι, to be intent 
upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18; ὑπέρ τινος, to exercise con- 
stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from 
shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [SYN. ἀγρυπνεῖν, ypnyo- 
peiv, νήφειν: “ἀγρυπνεῖν may be taken to express sim- 
ply - - « absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of 
it when due to nature, and thence a wakeful frame of 
mind as opposed to listlessness; while γρηγορεῖν (the 
offspring of ἐγρήγορα) represents a waking state as 
the effect of some arousing effort ... i. e. a more stir- 
ring image than the former. 'The group of synonyms 
is completed by νήφειν, which sienifies a state untouched 
by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence, 
one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or 





» 
ἄγω 


bewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for wariness 
(cf. νᾶφε καὶ μέμνασ᾽ ἀπιστεῖν) against spiritual dangers 
and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, etc." Green, Crit. Notes 
on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]* 

ἀγρυπνία, -as, 7, sleeplessness, watching: 2 Co. vi. 5; 
xi. 27. [From Hdt. down.]* 

ἄγω ; impf. yov; fut. dw; 2 aor. ἤγαγον, inf. ἀγαγεῖν, 
(more rarely 1 aor. ἦξα, in ἐπάγω 2 Pet. ii. 5); Pass., 
pres. ἄγομαι; impf. ἠγόμην ; 1 aor. ἤχθην ; 1 fut. ἀχθή- 
copa; [fr. Hom. down]; to drive, lead. 1. properly 
[A. V. ordinarily, to bring]; a. to lead by laying 
hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti- 
nation: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7; Lk. xix. 35; Mk. xi. 
7 (T Tr WH φέρουσιν) ; [Lk. xix. 30]; τινά foll. by εἰς 
with aec. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 c.]; x. 
34; (ἤγαγον x. εἰσήγαγον eis, Lk. xxii. 54) ; Jn. xviii. 28; 
Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [RG]; xxi. 34; xxii. 5, 24 
Rec.; xxiii. 10, 31; ἐπί with acc., Acts xvii. 19; ἕως, 
Lk.iv.29; πρός twa, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii. 
40; Acts ix. 27; Jn.viii. 3[Rec.]. b. to lead by accom- 
panying to (into) any place: eis, Acts xi. 26 (25); ἕως, 
Acts xvii. 15; πρός τινα, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ix. 
13; Acts xxiii. 18; foll. by dat. of pers. to whom, Acts 
xxi 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at lencth, [cf. B. 
284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 ἄγειν αὐτοὺς αὐτῷ). c. to 
lead with one’s self, attach to one's self as an attendant = 
τινά, 2 Tim. iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 14, (Joseph. antt. 10, 9, 6 
ἀπῆρεν eis τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἄγων kai Ἱερεμίαν). Some refer 
Acts xxi. 16 to this head, resolving it ἄγοντες Μνάσωνα 
παρ᾽ © ξενισθῶμεν, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as 
above. d. to conduct, bring: twa, [ Lk. xix. 27]; Jn. 
vii. 45; [xix. 4, 13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 37; xx. 
12; xxv. 6, 23; πῶλον, Mk. xi. 2 (where T Tr WH 
φέρετε) ; [Lk. xix. 30, see a. above]; τινά τινι or τί τινι, 
Mt. xxi. 2; Acts xiii. 23 G L T Tr WH. e. to lead 
away, to a court of justice, magistrate, etc.: simply, 
Mk. xiii. 11; [Acts xxv. 17]; ἐπί with acc., Mt. x. 18; 
Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH drayopévovs) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1]; 
Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic); [πρός with 
acc., Jn. xviii. 13 L'T Tr WH]; to punishment: simply 
(2 Mace. vi. 29; vii. 18, ete.), Jn. xix. 16 Grsb. (R καὶ 
ἀπήγαγον, which L T Tr WH have expunged); with 
telie inf., Lk. xxiii. 32; [foll. by ἵνα, Mk. xv. 20 Lehm.]; 
ἐπὶ σφαγήν, Acts viii. 32, (ἐπὶ θανάτῳ, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 
35 an. 1, 6, 10). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, quide, 
direct: Jn. x. 163 εἰς μετάνοιαν, Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead 
through, conduct, to something, become the author of 
good or of evil to some one: εἰς δόξαν, Heb. ii. 10, (εἰς 
[al. ἐπὶ] καλοκἀγαθίαν, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14; eis δουλείαν, 
Dem. p. 213, 28). c. to move, impel, of forces and 
influences affecting the mind: Lk. iv. 1 (where read é» 
τῇ ἐρήμῳ [with L txt. T Tr WH ]) ; πνεύματι θεοῦ ἄγεσθαι. 
Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; ἐπιθυμίαις, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim- 
ply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2 — unless im- 
pelled by Satan's influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20; 
Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) sq.]. S. to pass a day, 
keep or celebrate a feast, ete. : τρίτην ἡμέραν ἄγει sc. ὃ 
Ἰσραήλ, Lk. xxiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply αὐτόν 


ἀγωγή 


or 6 Ἰησοῦς; still others take ἄγει as impers., one passes, 
Vulg. tertia dies est; see B. 134 (118)]; γενεσίων ἀγομέ- 
vov, Mt. xiv. 6 RG; ἀγοραῖοι (α. V. 2), Acts xix. 38; often 
in the O. T. Apocr. (cf. Wahl, Clavis Apocr. s. v. ἄγω, 
3), in Hdt. and Attie writ. 4. intrans. to go, depart, 
(W. 8 38, 1, p. 251 (236) ; [B. 144 (126)]) : ἄγωμεν let 
us go, Mt. xxvi. 46; Mk. xiv. 42; Jn. xiv. 31; mpós 
twa, Jn. xi. 155 eis with ace. of place, Mk. i. 38; Jn. 
xi. 7, (Epiet. diss. 3, 22, 55 ἄγωμεν ἐπὶ τὸν ἀνθύπατον) ; 
[foll. by tva, Jn. xi. 16. Comp.: av-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, συν-απ-, 
δι-, ela-, map-evo-, €E-, ἐπ-, kar-, ner-, Tap-, TEPL-, προ-; προσ-, 
συν-, ἐπι-συν-, ὑπτάγω. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] * 

ἀγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ἄγω, like ἐδωδή fr. $0); 1. prop- 
erly,aleading. 2. figuratively, a. trans. a conduct- 
ing, training, education, discipline. b. intrans. the life 
led, way or course of life (a use which arose from the 
fuller expression ἀγωγὴ τοῦ βίου, in Polyb. 4, 74, 1. 4; cf. 
Germ. Lebensführung): 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. V. conduct], 
(Esth. ii. 20; 2 Mace. iv. 16; ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ dywyn, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; ἁγνὴ ἀγωγή, ibid. 48, 1). Often in 
prof. auth. in all these senses.* 

ἀγών, -ὥνος, ὁ. (ἄγω); 1. a place of assembly (Hom. 
Tl. 7, 298; 18, 376); spec. the place in which the Greeks 
assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian, 
the Olympian); hence 2. a contest, of athletes, run- 
ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase 
(used by the Greeks, see τρέχω, b.) τρέχειν τὸν ἀγῶνα. 
Heb. xii. 1, that is to say * Amid all hindrances let us 
exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of 
perfection set before the followers of Christ’; any 
struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing 
in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the 
gospel: 1 Th. ii. 2; Phil. i. 30; 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. 
iv. 7. b. intense solicitude, anxiety: περί twos, Col. 
ii. 1 [ef. Eur. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical 
use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf. 
Grimm on Sap. iv. 1; [Howson, Metaphors of St. Paul, 
Essay iv.; Conyb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St. 
Paul, ch. xx.; Me. and S. iii. 733° sq.; BB.DD. s. v. 
Games ].* 

ἀγωνία, -as, 7; 1. i. q. ἀγών, which see. 5. ΤΡῚΒ 
often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 ἢν ὁ 
Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ καὶ πολλῇ ἀγωνίᾳ) down, of severe 
mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish: Lk. 
xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; (2 Mace. iii. 14, 
16; xv.19; Joseph. antt. 11,8, 4 6 ἀρχιερεὺς ἦν ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ 
καὶ δέει). [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii. on Lk. l.c.]* 

ἀγωνίζομαι ; impf. ἠγωνιζόμην ; pf. ἠγώνισμαι; ἃ depon. 
mid. verb [cf. W. 260 (244)]; (ἀγών) ; 1. to enter a 
contests contend in the gymnastic games: 1 Co. ix. 25. 
2. univ. fo contend with adversaries, fight: foll. by ἵνα 
μή; Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with 
difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: Col. 
I 06} 1 Tim. iv. 10 Cu) ΠΡ ni txt.) Wik txts tor Rec; 
ὀνειδιζόμεθα) ; ἀγωνίζομαι ἀγῶνα (often used by the 
Greeks also, esp. the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 
T. 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain 
something ; foll. by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24 ; ὑπέρ τινος ἐν rais 


10 





ἀδελφός 
προσευχαῖς, tva, Col. iv. 12. [Comr.: ἀντ-, éz-, κατ-, 
συν-αγωνίζομαι.}" 
᾿Αδάμ, indecl. prop. name (but in Joseph.” Adapos, -ov), 
DIN (i. e. ace. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 
ed. Mang., γήϊνος ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 γηγενής ; 
ace. to Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 2 zvppós, with which Gesenius 
agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first 
man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 38; 
Ro. v.14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq.; Jude 14. 
In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the 
former Adam ( won DW), the first man, the author 
of ‘all our woe,’ and the latter Adam (jr o?N), 
the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ 
is called ὁ ἔσχατος ᾿Αδάμ (see ἔσχατος, 1) and contrasted 
with 6 πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ; Ro. v. 14 6 μέλλων sc. ᾿Αδάμ. 
[2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WH mrg. 
(cf. '" Aópetv).]* 
ἀδάπανος, -ov, (δαπάνη), without expense, requiring no 
outlay: 1 Co. ix. 18 (tva ἀδάπανον θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 
‘that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous’).* 
"ASSL or ᾿Αδδεί T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and 
s. V. etc], 6, the indecl. prop. name of one of the ances- 
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.* 
ἀδελφή, -ῆς. 7, (see ἀδελφός), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sis- 
ter;’ 1. a full, own sister (i.e. by birth): Mt. xix. 
29; Lk. x. 39 sq.; Jn. xi. 1, 3, 5; xix. 25; Ro. xvi. 15, 
ete.; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt. 
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see ἀδελφός, 1. 2. one connected 
by the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; ix. 5; 
Philem. 2 L' T Tr WH; Jas. ii. 15; with a subj. gen., a 
Christian woman especially dear to one, Ro. xvi. 1. 
ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ, (fr. a copulative and δελῴύς, from the 
same womb; cf. ἀγάστωρ), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a 
brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only 
of the same father or the same mother): Mt. i. 2; iv. 18, 
and often. That ‘the brethren of Jesus,’ Mt. xii. 46, 47 
[but WH only in mrg.]; xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 3 (in the 
last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq.; Jn. ii. 
125 νῇ, Soy ΑΟΙΒ ἢ 14... 06Ά1. 1. 19); 1. ον. x: 5; are 
neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary 
(which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [ef. 
Thilo, Cod. Apoer. N. T. i. 362 sq.]), nor cousins, the 
children of Alpheus or Cleophas [i. e. Clopas] and Mary 
a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion 
among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Au- 
gustine [ef. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss. ii. ]), aecord- 
ing to that use of language by which ἀδελφός like the 
Hebr. m8 denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen. 
xiv. 16; 1 S. xx. 29; 2 K. x. 13; 1 Chr. xxiii. 22, 
ete.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear prin- 
cipally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G]; Lk. ii. 7 — where, 
had Mary borne no other children after Jesus, instead 
of υἱὸν πρωτότοκον, the expression υἱὸν μονογενῆ would 
have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, cf. Jn. vii. 5, 
where the Lord's brethren are distinguished from the 
apostles. See further on this point under Ἰάκωβος, ὃ. 
[Cf. B. D. s. v. Brother; Andrews, Life of our Lord, 
pp. 104-116; Bib. Sacr. for 1864, pp. 855-869; for 1869 


adeh porns 


pp. 745-758; Laurent, N. T. Studien pp. 153-193; Mc- 
Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.] 2. according to a 
Hebr. use of ns (Ex. ii. 11; iv. 18, ete.), hardly to be 
met with in prof. auth., having the same national ances- 
tor, belonging to the same people, countryman; so the 
Jews (as the σπέρμα ' ABpadp, υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ, cf. Acts xiii. 
26; [in Deut. xv. 3 opp. to 6 ἀλλύτριος. cf. xvii. 15; 
xv. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called ἀδελφοί: 
Mt. v. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15); vii. 23; xxii. 
5; xxviii. 15, 21; Ro. ix. 3; in address, Acts ii. 29; 
iii. 17; xxiii. 1; Heb. vii. 5. S. just as in Lev. xix. 
17 the word rw is used interchangeably with j^ (but, 
as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of Zsraelites), so in the 
sayings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 24; vii. 3 sqq., ἀδελφός is 
used for ὁ πλησίον to denote (as appears from Lk. x. 
29 sqq.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same 
father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de- 
. scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26); 
cf. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to 
another by the bond of affection; so most frequently of 
Christians, constituting as it were but a single family : 
Mt. xxiii. 8; Jn. xxi. 23; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.]; ix. 
Soria (051: 1 Diy Gom v BOTE ERI 114 dete m. 
courteous address, Ro. i. 13; vii. 1; 1 Co. i. 10; 1 Jn. 
n. 7 Rec., and often elsewhere; yet in the phraseology 
of John it has reference to the new life unto which men 
are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father, 
even God: 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq.; iii. 10, 14, etc., cf. v. 1. 
5. an associate in employment or office: 1 Co. i. 1; 
2 0.1.1; ii. 13(12); Eph. vi. 21; Col. i. 1. 6. brethren 
of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood; see 1 
above. b.all men: Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.]; Heb. ii. 
11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] c. apostles: Mt. 
xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are 
destined to be exalted to the same heavenly δόξα (q. v. 
III. 4 b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29. 

ἀδελφότης, -ητος. ἡ, brotherhood; the abstract for the 
concrete, a band of brothers i.e. of Christians, Chris- 
tian brethren: 1 Pet. ii. 17; v. 9. (1 Macc. xii. 10, 17, 
the connection of allied nations; 4 Macc. ix. 23; x. 3, 
the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed. 
Reiske]; often in eccl. writ.) * 

G-SnAos, -ov, (δῆλος), not manifest: Lk. xi. 44; indis- 
tinct, uncertain, obscure: φωνή, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk. 
auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. 85Xos,fin.; Schmidt ch. 130.]* 

ἀδηλότης, -jros, 7, uncertainty: 1 Tim. vi. 17 πλούτου 
«ἰδηλότητι equiv. to πλούτῳ ἀδήλῳ, cf. W. § 34, 3a. 
[Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]* 

ἀδήλως, adv., uncertainly: 1 Co. ix. 26 οὕτω τρέχω, 
ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως i. 6. not uncertain whither; οἵ. Mey. 
ad loc. [(Thue., al.)]* 

ἀδημονέω, -9; (fr. the unused ἀδήμων, and this fr. a 
priv. and δῆμος ; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at 
home, cf. Germ. unheimisch, unheimlich; cf. Bttm. Lexil. 
ii. 136 [Fishlake's trans. p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol. 
Proleg. p. 238, cf. p. 160) et al. connect it with ἀδήμων, 
adjoa; see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. ii. 26]); to be troubled, 
distressed: Mt. xxvi 37; Mk. xiv. 33; Phil. ii. 26. 


11 








ἀδικέω 


(Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 8 ἀδημονῆσαι τὰς Ψυχάς, and often in 
prof. auth.) * 

“Ans, Gdns, -ov, 6, (for the older ᾿Αἴδης, which Hom. 
uses, and this fr. a priv. and ἰδεῖν, not to be seen, [cf. Lob. 
Path. Element. ii. 6 sq.]) ; in the classies 1. a prop. 
name, Hades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions; so in 
Hom. always. 2. anappellative, Orcus, the nether world, 
the realm of the dead [cf. Theocr. idyll. 2,159 schol. τὴν τοῦ 
ἅδου κρούει πύλην" τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν ἀποθανεῖται]. In the Sept. 
the Hebr. 5)sw is almost always rendered by this word 
(once by θάνατος, 2 S. xxii. 6); it denotes, therefore, in 
bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x. 
21) and dismal place (but ef. yéevva and παράδεισος) in 
the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8; Is. lvii. 9; 
Am. ix. 2, ete.; see ἄβυσσος), the common receptacle 
of disembodied spirits: Lk. xvi. 23; εἰς ἅδου sc. δόμον, 
Acts ii. 27, 31, acc. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W. 
592 (550) [B. 171 (149)]; (but L T Tr WH in vs. 27 
and T WH in both verses read eis ἄδην ; so Sept. Ps. xv. 
(xvi.) 10); πύλαι adov, Mt. xvi. 18 (πυλωροὶ adov, Job 
xxxviii. 17; see πύλη) ; κλεῖς τοῦ dOov, Rev. i. 18; 
Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L 
T Tr WH read θάνατε for R G ἅδη [cf. Acts ii. 24 Tr 
mrg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx. 13 sq. Metaph. ἕως d9ov [xara- 
βαίνειν or] καταβιβάζεσθαι to [go or] be thrust down 
into the depth of misery and disgrace: Mt. xi. 23 [here 
L Tr WH καταβαίνειν] ; Lk. x. 15 [here Tr mre. WH txt. 
καταβαίνειν). [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. v." Adgs 
in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades 
cf. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii. 
pp. 261-406; on the doctrinal significance of the word 
see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rey. 
pp. 864-377. ]* 

ἀ-διά-κριτος, -ον, (διακρίνω to distinguish); — 1. undis- 
tinguished and undistinguishable: φωνή, Polyb. 15, 12, 9; 
λόγος, Leian. Jup. Trag. 25; for 373, Gen. i. 2 Symm. 
2. without dubiousness, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see 
διακρίνω, Pass. and Mid. 3 [al. without variance, cf. δια- 
κρίνω, 2]) : ἡ ἄνωθεν σοφία, Jas. iii. 17 (Ignat. ad Eph. 
3,2 ᾿Ιησοῦς Χριστὸς τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν [yet al. take 
the word here i. q. inseparable, cf. Zahn in Patr. Apost. 
Opp., ed. Gebh., Harn. and Zahn, fasc. ii. p. 7; see also 
in general Zahn, Ignatius, p. 429 note! ; Soph. Lex. s.v. 
Used from Hippocr. down.]).* 

ἀδιάλειπτος, -ov, (διαλείπω to intermit, leave off), uninter- 
mitted, unceasing: Ro.ix.2; 2 Tim.i.3. [ Tim. Locr. 98 e.]* 

ἀδιαλείπτως, adv., without intermission, incessantly, as- 
siduously: Ro.i.9; 1 “ΗΕ Ὁ (9) sie sae Ἐν [Polyb., 
Diod., Strabo; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]* 

ἀ-δια-φθορία, -as, 7, (fr. ἀδιάφθορος incorrupt, incor- 
ruptible; and this from ἀδιαφθείρω), incorruptibility, 
soundness, integrity: of mind, ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ, Tit. ii. 
7 (L Τ Τὺ WH dó6opíav). Not found in the classics.* 

ἀδικέω, -6; [fut. ἀδικήσω]; 1 aor. ἠδίκησα; Pass., 
[prés. ἀδικοῦμαι}; 1 aor. ἠδικήθην ; literally to be ἄδικος. 
1. absolutely; a. to act unjustly or wickedly, to sin: 
Rev. xxii. 11; Col. iii. 36. b. to be a criminal, to have 
violated the laws in some way: Acts xxv. 11, (often so 


ἀδίκημα 


in Grk. writ. [cf. W. 8 40, 2¢.]). c. todo wrong: 1 Co. 
vi. 8; 2 Co. vii. 12. d. to do hurt: Rev. ix. 19. 2 
transitively; a. τί, to do some wrong, sin in some re- 
spect: Col. iii. 25 (ὃ ἠδίκησε ‘the wrong which he hath 
done’). b. τινά, to wrong some one, act wickedly 
towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13 
(by fraud); 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. ἀδικεῖσθαι to be 
wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. ἀδικοῦμαι 
to suffer one's self to be wronged, take wrong [W. 
§ 38, 3; cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, $ 87 sq.]: 1 Co. 
vi. 7; τινὰ οὐδέν [B. $ 131, 10; W. 227 (213)], Acts 
xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; τινά τι, Philem. 18; [ἀδικούμενοι 
μισθὸν ἀδικίας (R. V. suffering wrong as the hire of 
wrong-doing), 2 Pet. ii. 13 WH Tr mrg.] c. τινά, 
to hurt, damage, harm (in this sense by Greeks of every 
period): Lk. x. 19; Rev. vi. 6; vii. 2 sq.; ix. 4, 10; 
Xi. 5; pass. ob μὴ ἀδικηθῇ ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου shall suffer 
no violence from death, Rev. ii. 11.* 

ἀδίκημα, -ros, τό, (ἀδικέω), [fr. Hdt. on], a misdeed [τὸ 
ἄδικον . .. ὅταν πραχθῇ, ἀδίκημά ἐστιν, Aristot. Eth. Nic. 
5, 7]: Acts xviii 14; xxiv. 20; Rev. xviii. 5.* 

ἀδικία, -as, ἡ. (ἄδικος), [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. injustice, 
of a judge: Lk. xviii. 6; Ro. ix. 14. 2. unrighteous- 
ness of heart and life; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 25 Grsb.; 
Acts viii. 23 (see σύνδεσμος); Ro. i. 18, 29; ii. 8; vi. 
13; 2 Tim. ii. 19; opp. to ἡ ἀλήθεια, 1 Co. xiii. 6; 2 Th. 
ii. 12; opp. to ἡ δικαιοσύνη, Ro. iii. 5; Heb. i. 9 Tdf. ; 
owing to the context, the guilt of unrighteousness, 1 Jn. 
i 9; ἀπάτη τῆς ἀδικίας deceit which unrighteousness 
uses, 2 Th. ii. 10; μισθὸς ἀδικίας reward (i. e. penalty) 
due to unrighteousness, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see ἀδικέω, 2 b. 
fin.]. b. spec. unrighteousness by which others are 
deceived: Jn. vii. 18 (opp. to ἀληθής) : μαμωνᾶς τῆς 
ἀδικίας deceitful riches, Lk. xvi. 9 (cf. ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου, 
Mt. xiii. 22; others think ‘riches wrongly acquired’; 
[others, riches apt to be used unrighteously; cf. vs. 8 and 
Mey. ad loc.]) ; κόσμος τῆς ἀδικίας. a phrase having ref- 
erence to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. κόσμος, 8) ; 
treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (οἰκονόμος τῆς ἀδικίας, [al. take it 
generally, ‘acting unrighteously’]). ^ 3. a deed violat- 
ing law and justice, act of unrighteousness: maca ἀδικία 
ἁμαρτία ἐστί, 1 Jn. v. 17; ἐργάται τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. xiii. 27; 
ai ἀδικίαι iniquities, misdeeds, Heb. viii. 12 (fr. Sept. 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34; cf. Dan. iv. 20 (24)) ; μισθὸς 
ἀδικίας reward obtained by wrong-doing, Acts i. 18; 
2 Pet. ii. 15; spec. the wrong of depriving another 
of what is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically 
called d8t(a).* 

ἄδικος, -ov, (δίκη), [fr. Hes. down]; descriptive of one 
who violates or has violated justice ; 1. unjust, (of 
God as judge): Ro. iii. 5; Heb. vi. 10. 2. of one 
who breaks God's laws, unrighteous, sinful, (see ἀδικία, 
2): [1 Co. vi. 9]; opp. to δίκαιος, Mt. v. 45; Acts xxiv. 
15; 1 Pet. iii. 18; opp. to εὐσεβής, 2 Pet. ii. 9; in this 
sense acc. to Jewish speech the Gentiles are called 
ἄδικοι, 1 Co. vi. 1 (see ἁμαρτωλός, b. B.). 3. spec., of 
one who deals fraudulently with others, Lk. xviii. 11; 
who is false to a trust, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to πιστός); 


2 ἀδύνατος 


deceitful, μαμωνᾶς. ibid. vs. 11 (for other interpretations 
see ἀδικία, 2 b.).* 

ἀδίκως, adv., unjustly, undeservedly, without fault: πά- 
oxew, 1 Pet. ii. 19 [A. V. wrongfully. (Fr. Hdt. on.)]* 

᾿Αδμείν, 6, Admin, the indecl. prop. name of one of 
the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33, where Tdf. reads 
ToU ᾿Αδμεὶν τοῦ ᾿Αρνεί for Rec. τοῦ ᾿Αράμ (q. v-), [and WII 
txt. substitute the same reading for τοῦ ᾿Αμιναδάβ τοῦ 
*Apdp of R G, but in their mrg.’ Addy (q. v. 2) for 'AOuetv; 
on the spelling of the word see their App. p. 1557." 

ἀ-δόκιμος, -ov, (δόκιμος), [fr. Eur. down], not standing 
the test, not approved; properly of metals and coin, 
ἀργύριον, Is. i. 22; Prov. xxv. 4; νόμισμα, Plat. lees. 
v. p. 742 ἃ.» al.; hence, which does not prove itself to 
be such as it ought: γῆ, of sterile soil, Heb. vi. 8; in a 
moral sense [A. V. reprobate], 1 Co. ix. 27; 2 Co. xiii. 
5-7; νοῦς, Ro. i. 28; περὶ τὴν πίστιν, 2 Tim. iii. 8; 
hence, unfit for something: πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ad. 
Τυ0.: 16 

ἄδολος, -ον, (δόλος), [fr. Pind. down], guileless; of 
things, unadulterated, pure: of milk, 1 Pet. ii. 2. [Cf. 
Trench § lvi.]* 

᾿Αδραμυττηνός, -ή. -óv, adj., of Adramyttium ( Aópapór- 
τιον, ᾿Αδραμύττειον, ᾿Αδραμμύτειον [also "Arpapvr., ete., cf. 
Poppo, Thue. pt. i. vol. ii. p. 441 sq.; Wetst. on Acts, 
as below; WH “Αδραμυντηνός, cf. their Intr. $ 408 and 
App. p. 1607), a sea-port of Mysia: Acts xxvii. 2, [mod- 
ern Hdremit, Ydramit, Adramiti, ete.; cf. Me. and S. 
s. v. Adramyttium ].* 

᾿Αδρίας [WHI 'A8p.], -ov, 6, Adrias, the Adriatic Sea 
i. e., in a wide sense, the sea between Greece and Italy: 
Acts xxvii. 27, [cf. B. D. s. v. Adria; Dict. of Grk. & 
Rom. Geog. s. v. Adriatieum Mare].* | 

ἁδρότης [ Recs adp.].-nros, 7, or better (cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. 417) ἁδροτής. -jros, [on the accent cf. Lheling, 
Lex. Hom. s. v.; Chandler $$ 634, 635], (fr. ddpos 
thick, stout, full-grown, strong, rich [2 K. x. 6, 11, ete.]), 
in Grk. writ. it follows the signif. of the adj. ddpés; once 
in the N. T.: 2 Co. viii. 20, bountiful collection, great 
liberality, [R. V. bounty]. (ἁδροσύνη, of an abundant 
harvest, Hes. épy. 471.) * 

ἀδυνατέω, -@: fut. ἀδυνατήσω : (ἀδύνατος); a. not to 
have strength, to be weak; always so of persons in classic 
Grk. b. a thing ἀδυνατεῖ. cannot be done, is impos- 
sible; so only in the Sept. and N. T.: οὐκ ἀδυνατήσεε 
παρὰ τῷ θεῷ [τοῦ θεοῦ L mrg. T Tr WH] πᾶν ῥῆμα, 
Lk. i. 37 (Sept. Gen. xviii. 14) [al. retain the act. sense 
here: from God no word shall be without power, see 


mapa, I. b. cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.]; 
οὐδὲν ἀδυνατήσει ὑμῖν, Mt. xvii. 20, (Job xlii. 2).* 


ἀ-δύνατος, -ov, (δύναμαι), [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. without 
strength, impotent: τοῖς ποσί, Acts xiv. 8; fig. of Chris- 
tians whose faith is not yet quite firm, Ro. xv..1 (opp. 
to δυνατός). 2. impossible (in contrast with δυνατόν) = 
παρά τινι, for (with) any one, Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x.27; Lk. 
xviii. 27; τὸ ἀδύν. τοῦ νόμου * what the law could not do’ 
(this God effected by, etc.; [al. take τὸ ἀδύν. here as nom. 
absol, cf. B. 381 (326); W. 574 (534); Meyer or Gif- 


ado 
ford ad loc.]) Ro. viii. 3; foll by acc. with inf., Heb. 
vi. 4,18; χ. 4; by inf., Heb. xi. 6." 

48e (ἀείδων) : common in Grk. of every period; in 
Sept. for ^U; fo sing, chant; ^ 1. intrans.: τινί, to the 
praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Eph. v. 19; Col. 
ii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a 
devout and grateful soul). 2. trans.: ὠδήν, Rev. v. 
9; xiv 3 xv orm 

det, [see αἰών], adv., [fr. Hom. down], always; 1. per- 
petually, incessantly: Acts vii. 51; 2 Co. iv. 11; vi. 10; 
Tit.i12; Heb.iii. 10. ^ 2. invariably, at any and every 
time when according to the cireumstances something is 
or ought to be done again: Mk. xv. 8 [T WH om.] (at 
every feast); 1 Pet. iii. 15; 2 Pet. i. 12.* 

ἀετός, -οῦ, 6, (like Lat. avis, fr. ἄημι on account of its 
wind-like flight [cf. Curtius $ 596 ]), [fr. Hom. down], in 
Sept. for 7), an eagle: Rev.iv.7; viii. 13 (Rec. ἀγγέλου) ; 
xii.14. In Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 37 (asin Job xxxix. 
30; Prov. xxx. 17) it is better, since eagles are said 
seldom or never to go in quest of carrion, to understand 
with many interpreters either the vultur percnopterus, 
which resembles an eagle (Plin. h. n. 10, 3 *quarti 
generis — viz. aquilarum — est perenopterus "), or the 
vultur barbatus. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Adler; [ Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 172 sqq.]. The meaning of 
the proverb [cf. exx. in Wetst. on Mt. l. c.] quoted in 
both passages is, ‘where there are sinners (cf. πτῶμα), 
there judgments from heaven will not be wanting ’.* 

ἄζυμος, -ov, (ζύμη). Hebr. 1132, unfermented, free from 
leaven; properly: ἄρτοι, Ex. xxix. 2; Joseph. antt. 
3, 6,6; hence the neut. plur. ra ἄζυμα, ΓΝ, unleavened 
loaves; ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν ἀζύμων, i330 in, the (paschal) 
festival at which for seven days the Israelites were 
accustomed to eat unleavened bread in commemoration 
of their exit from Egypt (Ex. xxiii. 15; Ley. xxiii. 6), 
Lk. xxii. 1; ἡ πρώτη (sc. ἡμέρα) τῶν ag. Mt. xxvi. 17; 
Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7; αἱ ἡμέραι τῶν a. Acts xii. 3; 
xx. 6; the paschal festival itself is called τὰ ἄζυμα, Mk. 
xiv. 1, [ef. 1 Esdr.i. 10,19; W.176 (166); B. 23 (21)]. 
Figuratively : Christians, if such as they ought to be, 
are called ἄζυμοι i. e. devoid of the leaven of iniquity, 
free from faults, 1 Co. v. 7; and are admonished 
ἑορτάζειν ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας, to keep festival with the 
unleavened bread of sincerity and truth, vs. 8. (The 
word occurs twice in prof. auth., viz. Athen. 3, 74 
(ἄρτον) ἄζυμον, Plat. Tim. p. 74 d. ἄζυμος σάρξ flesh not 
yet quite formed, [add Galen de alim. fac. 1, 2].) * 

᾿Αζώρ, Azor, the indecl prop. name of one of the 
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13 sq.* 

" Atoros, -ov, 7, "AUN, Azotus, Ashdod, one of the five 
chief cities of the Philistines, lying between Ashkelon 
and Jamnia [i. e. Jabneel] and near the Mediterranean : 
Acts viii. 40; at present a petty village, Esdüd. A suc- 
cinct history of the city is given by Gesenius, Thesaur. 
iii. p. 1366; Raumer, Palistina, p. 174; [Alex.’s Kitto 
or Mc. and S. s. v. Ashdod].* 

ἀηδία, -as, 7, (fr. ἀηδής, and this fr. a priv. and ἦδος 
pleasure, delight), [fr. Lysip. down]; 1. unpleasant- 


13 





ἀθετέω 


ness, annoyance. 2. dislike, hatred: ἐν ἀηδίᾳ, cod. 
Cantabr. in Lk. xxiii. 12 for Rec. ἐν ἔχθρᾳ." 

ἀήρ, ἀέρος, ὁ, (ἄημι, dw, [cf. ἄνεμος. init.]), the air (par- 
ticularly the lower and denser, as distinguished from the 
higher and rarer 6 αἰθήρ. cf. Hom. 1]. 14, 288), the at- 
mospheric region: Acts xxii. 23; 1 Th. iv. 17; Rev. ix. 
2; xvi. 17; ὁ ἄρχων τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρος in Eph. ii. 2 
signifies ‘the ruler of the powers (spirits, see ἐξουσία 
4 c. 88.) in the air,’ i.e. the devil, the prince of the de- 
mons that according to Jewish opinion fill the realm of 
air (cf. Mey. ad loc.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air; Stuart 
in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed, 
ἀήρ denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Hom. Il. 17, 
644 ; 3,381; 5, 856, εἴς. : Polyb. 18, 3, 7), but 15 nowhere 
quite equiv. to σκότος, --- the sense which many injudi- 
ciously assign it in Eph. l c. ἀέρα δέρειν (cf. verberat 
iclibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss 
their aim) i.e. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 26; εἰς 
ἀέρα λαλεῖν (verba. ventis profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932)) 
*to speak into the air' i. e. without effect, used of 
those who speak what is not understood by the hearers, 
1 Co. xiv. 9.* 

ἀθανασία, -as, 7, (ἀθάνατος). immortality: 1 Co. xv. 
53 sq.; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as 6 μόνος 
ἔχων ἀθανασίαν. because he possesses it essentially — * ἐκ 
τῆς οἰκείας οὐσίας, οὐκ ἐκ θελήματος ἄλλου, καθάπερ οἱ λοιποὶ 
πάντες ἀθάνατοι᾽ Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61 
p. 84 ed. Otto. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) * 

ἀ-θέμιτος, -ov, a later form for the ancient and prefer- 
able ἀθέμιστος. (θεμιτός, θεμιστός, θεμίζω, θέμις law, 
right), contrary to law and justice, prohibited by law, 
illicit, criminal: 1 Pet. iv. 3 [here A. V. abominable]; 
ἀθέμιτόν ἐστί τινι with inf., Acts x. 28.* 

ἄθεος, -ov, (θεός). [fr. Pind. down], without God, know- 
ing and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. v. h. 
2, 31 declares ὅτι μηδεὶς τῶν βαρβάρων ἄθεος ; in classic 
auth. generally slighting the gods, impious, repudiating 
the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain 
Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 14, 4), 
and subsequently Christians were called ἄθεοι by the 
heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, etc.). In Eph. ii. 12 of 
one who neither knows nor worships the true God; 
so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5; Gal. iv. 8); Clem. 
Alex. protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott. ἀθέους . . . ot τὸν ὄντως ὄντα 
θεὸν ἠγνοήκασι. Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 αἰγυπτιακὴ ἀθεότης, 
Hos. iv. 15 Symm. οἶκος ἀθεΐας a house in which idols are 
worshipped, Ignat. ad Trall. 10 ἄθεοι τουτέστιν ἄπιστοι 
(of the Docetae); [8]. understand Eph. 1. c. passively 
deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo; on the various mean- 
ings of the word see Mey. (or Ellic.) ].* 

à-0cc pos, -ov, (θεσμός. lawless, [ A. V. wicked]; of one 
who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies 
his lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. [Sept., Diod., Philo, 
Joseph., Plut.]* 

ἀθετέω, -ὦ ; fut. ἀθετήσω ; 1 aor. ἠθέτησα ; a word met 
with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb.; a. 
properly, to render a@erov; do away with θετόν τι i. e. 
something laid down, prescribed, established: διαθήκην. Gal. 


ἀθέτησις 


iii. 15, (1 Mace. xi. 36; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, ete.) ; acc. to 
the context, ‘to act towards anything as though it were 
annulled’; hence to deprive a law of force by opinions 
or acts opposed to it, to transgress it, Mk. vii. 9; Heb. 
x. 28, (Ezek. xxii. 26); πίστιν, to break one’s promise 
or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Polyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 29, 3, 
al.; Diod. excerpt. [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 562, 67). 
Hence X b. to thwart the efficacy of anything, nullify, 
make *void, frustrate: τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. vii. 30 
(they rendered inefficacious the saving purpose of God); 
τὴν σύνεσιν to render prudent plans of no effect, 1 Co. 
i. 19 (Ts. xxix. 14 [where κρύψω, yet cf. Bos's note]). 
c. to reject, refuse, slight: τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. ii. 21 
[al. refer this to b.]; of persons: Mk. vi. 26 (by break- 
ing the promise given her); Lk. x. 16; Jn. xii. 48; 
1 Th. iv. 8; Jude 8 (for which καταφρονεῖν is used in 
the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use 
of this word see Soph. Lex. s. v.]* 

ἀθέτησις, -ews, ἡ, (ἀθετέω, ἡ. v.; like νουθέτησις fr. 
νουθετεῖν), abolition: Heb. vii. 18; ix. 26; (found occa- 
sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9; Diog. 
Laért. 3, 39, 66; in the grammarians rejection; more 
frequently in eccl. writ.).* 

᾿Αθῆναι, -ῶν, ai, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)), 
Athens, the most celebrated city of Greece: Acts xvii. 
15 sq.; xviii. 1; 1 Th. iii. 1.* 

᾿Αθηναῖος, -aia, -aiov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sq.* 

ἀθλέω, -6; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. ἀθλήσῃ]; 
(ü8Xos a contest); to engage in a contest, contend in the 
publie games (Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with the 
poniard, the gauntlet, the quoit, in wrestling, running, 
or any other way: 2 Tim. ii. 5; (often in classie auth. 
who also use the form ἀθλεύω). [Comp.: συν-αθλέω. * 

ἄθλησις, -ews, ἡ, contest, combat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down); 
fiz. ἄθλησις παθημάτων a struggle with sufferings, trials, 
Heb. x. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4; Clem. mart. 25].* 

ἀθροίζω: pf. pass. ptep. ἠθροισμένος ; (fr. ἀθρόος i. 4. 
θρόος [a noisy crowd, noise], with a copulative [see A, 
a, 2]); to collect together, assemble; pass. to be assembled, 
to convene: Lk. xxiv. 33 L T Tr WH. ([Soph.,] Xen., 
Plat, Polyb. Plut, al.; O. T. Apocr.; sometimes in 
Sept. for yap.) [Comp.: ἐπ-, συν-αθροίζω.] * 

ἀθυμέω, -ὦ ; common among the Greeks fr. [ Aeschyl.,] 
Thue. down; to be ἄθυμος (θυμός spirit, courage), to be 
disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21. 
(Sept. 1 S. i. 6 sq., etc.; Judith vii. 22; 1 Macc. iv. 
27.)* 

ἀθῶος [R G Tr], more correctly ἀθῷος (L WH and T 
[but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among 
both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars; cf. Steph. 
Thes. i. col. 875 c.; Lob. Path. Element. i. 440 sq. (cf. 
li. 377) ; see I, 1]), -ov, (Aan [i. e. θωϊή, cf. Etym. Mag. 
p. 26,.24] punishment), [fr. Plat. down], unpunished, 
innocent: αἷμα ἀθῷον, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt. 
δίκαιον], (Deut. xxvii. 25; 1 S. xix. 5, ete.; 1 Macc. i. 
37; 2 Mace. i. 8); ἀπό τινος, after the Hebr. [2 2 
([Num. xxxii. 22; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41; 2 S. iii. 28; W. 197 
(185); B. 158 (138)]), ‘innocent (and therefore far) 


14 


Αἰθίοψ 


from,’ innocent of, Matt. xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur- 
der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; ἀπὸ 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. v. 31]. 
The Greeks say ἀθῷός τινος [both in the sense of free 
from and unpunished for].* 

αἴγειος [WH -γιος ; see their App. p. 154, and 1, «], 
-εία, -eiov, (at£, gen. -yos goat, male or female), of a goat, 
(cf. καμήλειος, ἵππειος, ὕειος, προβάτειος, etc.) : Heb. xi. 
37. [From Hom. down.]* 

αἰγιαλός, -o0, 6, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Wom. 
down]: Mt. xiii. 2, 48; Jn. xxi. 4; Acts xxi. 5; xxvii. 
39,40. (Many derive the word from ἄγνυμι and ads, as 
though equiv. to ἀκτή, the place where the sea breaks; 
others fr. αἶγες billows and as [ Curtius $ 140; Vanicek p. 
83]; others fr. ἀΐσσω and dAs [Schenkl, L. and $., s. v.], 
the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.) * 

Αἰγύπτιος, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian: Acts. 
vii. 22, 24, 28; xxi. 38; Heb. xi. 29.* 

Αἴγυπτος, -ov, 7, [always without the art., B. 87 (76); 
W. § 18, 5 a.], the proper name of a well-known coun- 
try, Egypt: Mt. ii. 13 sq.; Acts ii. 10; Heb. iii. 16, ete. ; 
more fully γῆ Αἴγυπτος. Acts vii. 36 [ποὺ L WH Tr txt.], 
40; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12; vi. 26, 
ete.; 1 Mace. i. 19; Dar. i. 19 sq., ete.) ; ἡ γῆ Αἴγυπτος, 
Acts vii. 11; ἐν Αἰγύπτου sc. yj, Heb. xi. 26 Lchm., 
but ef. Bleek ad loc.; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)]. 
In Rev. xi. 8 Aly. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e. 
for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and 
his followers, and so to be likened to the Egyptians in 
their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeav- 
ors to crush his people. 

ἀΐδιος, -ov, (for deidios fr. ἀεί), eternal, everlasting : 
(Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20; Jude 6. (Hom. hymn. 29, 3; 
Hes. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in 
Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (ζωὴ ἀΐδιος), ὃ 31; de opif. 
mund. $ 2, $ 61; de cherub. $ 1, $ 2, $ 3; de post. 
Cain. § 11 fin. Syn. see αἰώνιος.) * 

αἰδώς, (-dos) -ovs, 7; fr. Hom. down; a sense of shame, 
modesty: 1'Tim.ii. 9; reverence, Heb. xii. 28 (λατρεύειν 
θεῷ μετὰ αἰδοῦς καὶ εὐλαβείας. but L "T Tr WH εὐλαβείας 
καὶ δέους). [S¥N. αἰδώς, αἰσχύνη: Ammonius distin- 
guishes the words as follows, αἰδὼς καὶ αἰσχύνη διαφέρει, 
ὅτι ἡ μὲν αἰδώς ἐστιν ἐντροπὴ πρὸς ἕκαστον, ὡς σεβομένως 
Ὡς ἔχει - αἰσχύνη δ᾽ ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἕκαστος ἁμαρτὼν αἰσχύνεται. ὡς 
μὴ δέον τι πράξας. καὶ αἰδεῖται μέν τις τὸν πατέρα - αἰσχύνε- 
ται δὲ ὃς μεθύσκεται, etc., etc. ; accordingly aid. is promi- 
nently objective in its reference, having regard to 
others; while αἰσχ- is subjective, making reference to 
one’s self and one’s actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is 
often said that ‘aid. precedes and prevents the shame- 
ful act, αἰσχ- reflects upon its conseqnences in the shame 
it brings with it? (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). aid. 
is the nobler word, aicx. the stronger; while “aid. would 
always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, αἰσχ- 
would sometimes restrain a bad one." Trench $$ xix. 
xxo* 

Αἰθίοψ, -οπος, 6, (αἴθω to burn, and dy [ὄψ᾽] the face ; 
swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. *i3): Acts viii. 27, here 


aipa 


the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or 
Abyssinia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and 
including the island Meroé; [see Dillmann in Schenkel 
i. 285 sqq.; Alex.’s Kitto or Me. and S. s. v. Ethiopia. 
Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515].* 

αἷμα, -ros, τό, blood, whether of men or of animals ; 
1. a. simply and generally : Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7 
Sq.; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6^ (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 
20 sqq.) ; xix. 13; ῥύσις αἵματος, Mk. v. 25, [(πηγὴ αἵμ. 
29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; θρόμβοι αἵματος, Lk. xxii. 44 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where 
the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, 
Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vii. 16 (26); 
xvii. 10; see Knobel on Ley. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on 
Lev., Preliminary Essay $ 1]; Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 
94. b. As it was anciently believed that the blood is 
the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [ef. Delitzsch, Bibl. 
Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq.)]), the 
phrase σὰρξ x. αἷμα (0) ^73, a common phrase in Rab- 
binical writers), or in inverse order αἷμα x. σάρξ, denotes 
man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. 
xv. 50; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between 
man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph. 
vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv. 
18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of 
divine things, Gal. 1. 16; Mt. xvi. 17. ο. Since the 
first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood 
(Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad Il. 6, 211 (ii. 104, 2) τὸ δὲ αἵματος 
ἀντὶ τοῦ σπέρματός φασιν οἱ σοφοὶ, ὡς τοῦ σπέρματος ὕλην 
τὸ αἷμα ἔχοντος), the word serves to denote generation 
and origin (in the classies also): Jn. i. 13 (on the plur. 
ef. W. 177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [R G]. d. It is 
used of those things which by their redness resemble 
blood: at. σταφυλῆς the juice of the grape [* the blood 
of grapes, Gen. xlix. 11; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. xxxix. 
26; 1.15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, etc.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; ref- 
erence to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. εἰς αἷμα, 
of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)),i.q. ὡς αἷμα, 
Rev. vi. 12. 2. blood shed or to be shed by violence 
(very often also in the classics); ^ a.: Lk. xiii. 1 (the 
meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred 
while they were sacrificing, so that their blood mingled 
with the blood [yet cf. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ; 
ai. ἀθῷον [or δίκαιον Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an 
innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt. xxvii. 
4; ἐκχεῖν and ἐκχύνειν αἷμα (Ὁ 3), Gen. ix. 6; Is. lix. 
7, ete.) to shed blood, slay, Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 50; 
Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6" [here Tdf. 
atpara]; hence αἷμα is used for the bloody death itself: 
Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19, 
yet cf. 1 d. above;] xx. 26; Rev. xvii. 6; μέχρις atpa- 
Tos unto blood i.e. so as to undergo a bloody death, 
Heb. xii. 4, (τὸν αἴτιον tijs.. . μέχρις αἵματος στάσεως, 
Heliod. 7, 8) ; τιμὴ αἵματος ‘price of blood’ i. e. price 
received for murder, Mt. xxvii. 6; ἀγρὸς αἵματος field 
bought with the price of blood, Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. χωρίον 
αἵματος, Acts i. 19 — unless in this latter passage we 
prefer the explanation, which agrees better with the 


15 








aipoppoéw 


context, ‘the field dyed with the blood of Judas’; 
the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following 
Hebraistie expressions: ἐν αὐτῇ αἵματα (Rec. αἷμα [so L 
Tr WH]) εὑρέθη i.e. it was discovered that she was 
guilty of murders, Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. πόλις αἱμάτων, 
Ezek. xxiv. 6); τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς (sc. ἐλθέτω) let 
the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25 ; 
τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν (sc. ἐλθέτω) let the 
guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own ac- 
count, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2 S. i. 16; Josh. ii. 19, ete.) ; 
ἐπάγειν τὸ αἷμά Twos ἐπί twa to cause the punishment of 
a murder to be visited on any one, Acts v. 28; ἐκζητεῖν 
τὸ αἷμά τινος ἀπό τινος (73) TTD /D DI UD3, 2 S. iv. 11; 
Ezek. iii. 18, 20; xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the 
penalty for another's death, Lk. xi. 50; the same idea. 
is expressed by ἐκδικεῖν τὸ αἷμά twos, Rev. vi. 10; xix. 
2. b. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial 
victims having a purifying or expiating power (Lev. 
xvii. 11): Heb. ix. 7, 12 sq. 18-22, 25; x. 4; xi. 28; 
xiii. 11. — c. Frequent mention is made in the N. T. 
of the blood of Christ (αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. x. 16; 
ToU κυρίου, Xi. 27; τοῦ dpviov, Rev. vii. 14; xii. 11, cf. 
xix. 13) shed on the cross (at. rod σταυροῦ, Col. i. 20) for 
the salvation of many, Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24, cf. 
Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 (dzo- 
λύτρωσις διὰ τοῦ ai. αὐτοῦ; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.); 
1 Pet. i. 19 (see ἀγοράζω, 2 b.) ; having expiatory effi- 
cacy, Ro. iii. 25; Heb. ix. 12; by which believers are 
purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix. 
14; xii. 24; [xiii. 12]; 1 Jn. i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8); Rev. 
i 5; vii. 14; 1 Pet. i. 2; are rendered acceptable to 
God, Ro. v. 9, and find access into the heavenly sanc- 
tuary, Heb. x. 19; by which the Gentiles are brought 
to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13, 
and in general all rational beings on earth and in 
heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with which 
Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28, 
and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since 
Christ’s dying blood served to establish new religious 
institutions and a new relationship between men and 
God, it is likened also to a federative or covenant sacri- 
fice: τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης the blood by the shedding of 
which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28; 
Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29; xiii. 20 
(cf. ix. 20); add, 1 Co. xi. 25; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject 
this pass.] (in both which the meaning is, ‘this cup con- 
taining wine, an emblem of blood, is rendered by the 
shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant’), 
1 Co. xi. 27; (cf. Cic. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus san- 
cuine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis 
sanciam Romanum foedus). πίνειν τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ (i. e. 
of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of. Christ's 
death, Jn. vi.53 sq. 56. [ Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 34 sq.]* 
αἱματεκχυσία, -as, ἡ, (αἷμα and ἐκχύνω), shedding of 
blood: Heb. ix. 22. Several times also in eccl. writ.* 
aipoppoéo, -à; (0 be aiuóppoos (αἷμα and péw), to suffer 
from a flow of blood: Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. 33, 
where it means menstruous, and in medical writ.) * 


Aivéas 


Alvéas, -ov, ὁ, «Aeneas, the prop. name of the para- 
lytie eured by Peter: Aets ix. 33 sq.* 

αἴνεσις, -eos, 7, (αἰνέω), praise: θυσία αἰνέσεως (Nt 
nnnm, Lev. vii. 13), Heb. xiii. 15 a thank-offering, 
ΓΑ. V. ‘sacrifice of praise ’], presented to God for some 
benefit received ; see θυσία, b. (αἴνεσις often occurs in 
Sept., but not in prof. auth.) * 

αἰνέω, -ὦ ; (found in prof. auth. of every age [* only 
twice in good Attie prose" (where ἐπαιν. παραιν. ete. 
take its plaee), Veitch], but esp. freq. in Sept. and the 
Apoer. of the O. T.; from αἶνος) ; to praise, extol: τὸν 
(Θεόν, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 37; xxiv. 53 [WH om. Tr txt. 
br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of 
person, τῷ θεῷ, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev. 
xix. 5 L T Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for 
5 nmn), 1 Chr. xvi. 36 ; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 etc. (for 
5 553); [W. 8 31, 1 £.; B. 176 (153). Comp. éz-, παρ- 
ave. ]. * 

αἴνιγμα, -ros, τό, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190),] 
Aeschyl. down; fr. αἰνίσσομαι or aivizropai τι to express 
something obscurely, [fr. αἶνος, q. v-]) ; 1. an obscure 
saying, an enigma, Hebr. mM (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept. 
πρόβλημα). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where 
ἐν αἰνίγματι is not equiv. to αἰνιγματικῶς i. ὁ. ἀμαυρῶς 
obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of 
which we are engaged, as βλέπειν ἔν τινι, Mt. vi. 4; ef. 
De Wette ad loc.; the apostle has in mind Num. xii. 
S Sept.: ἐν εἴδει καὶ οὐ δι’ αἰνιγμάτων. [Al. take ἐν lo- 
cally, of the sphere in which we are looking; al. refer 
the pass. to 1. and take ἐν instrumentally. ]* 

αἶνος, -ov, 6, (often used by the Grk. poets) ; l.a 
saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse: Mt. 
xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3) ; Lk. xviii. 43.* 

Αἰνών, 7, (either a strengthened form of 1j and equiv. 
to ]Yy, or a Chaldaie plur. i. q. ny y springs; [al. al.]), 
Aenon, indecl. prop. name, either of a place, or of a 
fountain, not far from Salim: Jn. iii. 23, [thought to be 
Wady Far’ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan; see 
Conder in * Pal. Explor. Fund” for July 1874, p.191 sq.; 
Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq. ; esp. Stevens in Journ. of 
Exeget. Soc., Dec. 1883, pp. 128-141. Cf. B. D. Am. ed.].* 

αἵρεσις, -ews, 7); 1. (fr. aipéw), act of taking, cap- 
ture: τῆς πόλεως, the storming of a city; in prof. auth. 
2. (fr. αἱρέομαι), choosing, choice, very often in prof. 
writ. : Sept. Lev. xxii. 18; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that 
which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action; 
hence one’s chosen opinion, tenet; ace. to the context, 
an opinion varying from the true exposition of the 
Christian faith (heresy): 2 Pet. ii. 1 (cf. De Wette ad 
loc.), and in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. ἃ 
body of men separating themselves from others and 
following their own tenets [a sect or party]: as the Sad- 
ducees, Acts v. 17 ; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5; xxvi. 5; 
the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with 
a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Dior. Laért. 
1, 13, 18 sq. al, used of the schools of philosophy). 
5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and 
aims: Gal. v. 20; 1 Co. xi. 19. [Cf. Mey. ll. ec.; B.D. 


16 





αἴρω 


Am. ed. s. v. Sects; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829; 
Campbell, Diss. on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] * 

αἱρετίζω : 1 aor. ἡρέτισα [‘Tres. jp., see I, «]; (fr. aípe- 
Tós, see αἱρέω) : to choose: Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in 
O. T. Apoer. and in eccl. writ.; the mid. is found in 
Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf. 
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 144.) * 

αἱρετικός, -7, -óv, [see atpéo]: 1. fitted or able to 
take or choose a thing; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis- 
matic, factious, a follower of false doctrine: Tit. iii. 10.* 

αἱρέω, -ὦ : [thought by some to be akin to ἄγρα, ἀγρέω, 
χείρ, Eng. grip, ete.; cf. Bttm. Lexil i. 131— but see 
Curtius $ 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid. 
only: fut. αἱρήσομαι ; 2 aor. εἱλόμην, but G LT Tr WH 
εἱλάμην, 2 Th. ii. 13, ef. [Τὰ Proleg. p. 123; WH. 
App. p. 165;] W. § 13, 1a.; B. 40 (35), see ἀπέρχομαι 
init.; [ptep. ἑλόμενος, Heb. xi. 25]; to take for one's self, to 
choose, prefer: Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 13; μᾶλλον foll. 
by inf. with ἢ (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Cowr.: 
dv-, ἀφ-, δι-, ἐξ-, καθ-, mept-, mpo-arpew. | * 

αἴρω (contr. fr. poet. depo); fut. ἀρῶ; 1 aor. ἦρα, 
inf. ἄραι, impy. ἄρον: pf. ἦρκα (Col. ii. 14); Pass., 
[pres. atpogat]; pf. ἦρμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ἤρθην ; 
(on the rejection of iota subser. in these tenses see 
Bim. Aust. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. 
ἀρθήσομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. 
NWI; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise 


from the ground, take up: stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents, 


Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up- 
wards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rev. x. 5; the eyes, 
Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, ery 
out, Lk. xvii. 135 Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ; 
τὴν ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly 
(with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, ete.) ; in Jn. x. 
24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and 
hope, cf. Lücke [or Meyer] ad loe. c. to draw up: 
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (ἀνασπᾶν, Hab. i. 15); σκάφην, Acts 
xxvii. 17; anchors from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii. 
13, where supply ras ἀγκύρας: cf. Kuinoel ad loc. ; [W. 
594 (552); B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one's self 
and carry what has been raised, to bear: twa ἐπὶ χειρῶν, 
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xc. (xci. 12); a sick man, 
Mk. ii. 3; ζυγόν, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27); a bed, Mt. 
ix. 6; Mk. ii..9, 11 sq.; Lk. v. 24 sq.; Jn. v. 8-12; 
τὸν σταυρόν. Mt. [x. 38 Lehm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32; 
Lk.ix.23; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21 [in R Lbr.]; xv. 21; [λίθον,] 
Rev. xviii. 21; 10 carry with one, [ A. V. take]: Mk. vi. 8; 
Lk. ix. 3; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed 
in class. Grk. by the mid. αἴρεσθαι. 3. to bear away 
what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its 
place: Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23, (ἄρθητι be thou taken up, 
removed [B. 52 (45)], 56. from thy place); Mt. xxii. 
13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; xx. 1. b. to take 
off or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31, 
38 sq.; to tear away, Mt.ix.16; Mk. ii. 21; to rend 
away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. c. to remove: 1 Co. v. 2 
(cast out from the church, where ἀρθῇ should be read 
for Rec. ἐξαρθῇ); tropically: faults, Eph. iv. 31; τὴν 


5 , 
αἰσθάνομαι 


ἁμαρτίαν, Jn. i. 29, [36 Lehm. in br.], to remove the guilt 
and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin 
be neither imputed nor punished (αἴρειν ἁμάρτημα, 1 S. 
xv. 25; ἀνόμημα, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for 
an offence); but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αἴρειν 
is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin, 
while we enter into fellowship with Christ, who is free 
from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to 
carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20; xv. 37; 
xx. 14; xxiv. 17 sq.; Mk. vi. 29, 43; viii. 8, 19 sq.; 
xiii. 15 sq.; Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 31; Jn. xx. 2, 13, 15; 
Acts xx. 9. 6. to appropriate what is taken: Lk. 
xix. 21 sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to take away from another 
what is his or what is committed to him, to take by force: 
Lk. vi. 30°; xi. 52; τὶ ἀπό with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii. 
19: xxi. 43; xxv. 28; Lk. viu. 12, 18; xix. 24, 26; 
[Mt. xxv. 29]; Mk. iv. (15), 25; Jn. x. 18; xvi. 22; 
perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom 
anything is taken, Lk. vi. 29; xi. 22; Jn. xi. 48, unless 
one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. β΄. to take 
and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to 
take from among the living, either by a natural death, 
Jn. xvii. 15 (ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου take away from intercourse 
with the world), or by violence, Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. 
xxii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition 
of ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, Acts xxii. 22; αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ 
αὐτοῦ. of a bloody death inflicted upon one, Acts viii. 33 
(Is. liii. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, de- 
stroy: xewpoypapoy, Col. ii. 14; cause to cease: τὴν 
κρίσιν. Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). [Cowr.: ἀπ-, ἐξ-, ἐπ-, 
μετ-, our, ὑπερ-αίρω.} * 

αἰσθάνομαι : 2 aor. ἠσθόμην ; [fr. Aeschyl. down]; 
depon. mid. to perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses; 
2. with the mind ; to understand : Lk. ix. 45.* 

αἴσθησις, -ews, 7, (αἰσθάνομαι). [fr. Eurip. down], per- 
ception, not only by the senses but also by the intellect ; 
cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10, 
ete. i. q. Nyy): Phil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the 
understanding of ethicalmatters, as is plain from what 
is added in vs. 10.* 

αἰσθητήριον, -ov, τό, an organ of perception, external 
sense, [Hippoe.]; Plat. Ax. 366 a.; Aristot. polit. 4, 3, 
9, al.; faculty of the min d for perceiving, understanding, 
judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 αἰσθητ. τῆς καρδίας, 
4 Macc. ii. 22 [com. text] rà ἔνδον aicOnrnpia).* 

αἰσχροκερδής, -és, (αἰσχρός and κέρδος ; cf. αἰσχροπαθής 
in Philo [de mere. meretr. § 47), eager for base gain, 
[greedy of filthy lucre]: 1 Tim. iii. 3 Rec., 8; Tit. i. 7. 
(Hat. 1, 187; Xen. Plat, al; [ef. turpilucricupidus, 
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 63].) * 

αἰσχροκερδῶς, adv., from eagerness for base gain, [ Sor 
Jilthy lucre]: 1 Pet. v. 2, cf. Tit. i. 11. Not found 
elsewhere.* 

alex poXoy(a, -as, 7, (fr. αἰσχρολόγος, and this fr. αἰσχρός 
and λέγω), foul speaking (Tertull. turpiloquium), low and 
obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speaking]: Col. iii. 8. 
(Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.; Trench 
$ xxxiv.]* 

2 


il 








DO, 
aureo 


αἰσχρός, -d, -óv, (fr. αἶσχος baseness, diserace), base, dis- 
honorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i. 11.* 

alexpórns, -jros, 7, baseness, dishonor: Eph. v. 4 
ΓΑ. V. jilthiness]. (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)* 

αἰσχύνη, -ns, ἥ, (αἶσχος [cf. αἰσχρός}; 1. subjec- 
tively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything, 
sense of shame: yer αἰσχύνης suffused with shame, Lk. 
xiv. 9; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης those things which 
shame conceals, opp. to φανέρωσις τῆς ἀληθείας, 2 Co. iv. 
2 (evil arts of which one ought to be ashamed). 2. ob- 
jectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb. 
Xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19 
(opp. to δόξα). 8. a thing to be ashamed of: ἡ αἰσχύνη 
τῆς γυμνότητος (gen. of appos.) nakedness to be ashamed 
of, Rev. iii. 18, ef xvi. 15; plur. [cf. W. 176 (166)] ai 
αἰσχῦναι basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13. 
[(AeschyL, Hdt., al.) Syn. see αἰδώς, fin.]* 

αἰσχύνω : (αἶσχος [cf. αἰσχρός); 1. to disfigure: 
πρόσωπον, Hom. Il. 18, 24, and many others. 2. to 
dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxix. 15. 3. to suffuse with 
shame, make ashamed: Sir. xiii. 7. In the N. T. only 
pass., αἰσχύνομαι; fut. αἰσχυνθήσομαι: 1 aor. ἠσχύνθην; to 
be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed : 
2 Co. x. 8; Phil. i. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 16; μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν 
dm αὐτοῦ that we may not in shame shrink from him, 
1 Jn. ii. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 αἰσχυνθήσεται ἀπὸ προσώπου 
[Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13; cf. B. $147, 2]); foll. by inf. 
(on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 3. [Cowr.: ἐπ- 
(μαι), kar-auw xovo. ] * 

αἰτέω, -@; fut. αἰτήσω ; 1 aor. ἤτησα; pt. ἥτηκα: Mid., 
pres. αἰτοῦμαι : impf. ἠτούμην ; fut. αἰτήσομαι; 1 aor. 
ἤτησάμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to ask; mid. to ask for 
one’s self, request for one's self; absol.: Jas. i. 6; Mt. 
vii. 7; mid., Jas. iv. 3; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 8; airei- 
σθαί τι, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv. 7; Mk. vi. 24; x. 38; xi. 24; 
xv. 43; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. ; Lk. xxiii. 52; Acts xxv.,3, 15, 
ete.; αἰτεῖν with aec. of the pers. to whom the request 
is made: Mt. v. 42; vi. 8; Lk. vi. 30; αἰτεῖσθαι with 
acc. of the pers. asked for— whether to be released, 
Mt. xxvii. 20; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mre. παραιτ. 
q. v.]; Lk. xxiii. 25; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii. 
21; αἰτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
[Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH; (so 
αἰτεῖσθαι in Plut. Galb. 20) [ef. B. 149 (130)]; vi παρά 
twos, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 R G T Tr mre. WH mre.; 
Jas.i.5; 1 Jn. v. 15 RG; foll. by the inf, Jn. iv. 9; 
mid., Acts ix. 2; [αἰτεῖν τι ἐν τ. ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ, Jn. xiv. 
13; xvi. 24 (see ὄνομα, 2 e.); ri ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ. Mt. 
xxi. 22]; αἰτεῖν τινά τι, Mt. vii. 9; Lk. xi. 11; Mk. vi. 
22; Jn. [xiv. 14 T but L WH Tr mrs. br.]; xvi. 23; 
ὑπέρ twos foll. by tva, Col. i. 9 [cf. B. 237 (204)]; αἰτεῖ- 
σθαι with the acc. and inf. Lk. xxiii. 23; Acts iii. 14; 
with inf. only, Acts vii. 46 (ἡτήσατο εὑρεῖν he asked that 
he himself might find ; others wrongly translate ἠτήσατο 
desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea of demanding 
prominent: αἰτεῖν τι, Lk. i. 63; 1 Co. i. 22; τινά τι, Lk. 
xii. 48; 1 Pet. iii. 15. : 

[The constructions of this word in the Greek Bible, the 


αἴτημα 


Apost. Fathers, etc., are exhibited in detail by Prof. Ezra 
Abbot in the No. Am. Rey. for Jan. 1872, p. 182 sq. He 
there shows also (in opposition to Trench, § xl., and others) 
that it is not “ the constant word for the seeking of the infe- 
rior from the superior," and so differing from ἐρωτάω, which 
has been assumed to imply * a certain equality or familiarity 
between the parties"; that the distinction between the words 
does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking 
and the person asked; but that airéw signifies to ask for 
something to be given not done, giving prominence to the 
thing asked for rather than the person, and hence is rarely 
used in exhortation. "Eperác, on the other hand, is to re- 
quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring 
more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta- 
tion, ete. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer, 
4te Aufl.s. v. The latter distinguishes airéw from similar 
words as follows: “airéw denotes the request of the will, 
ἐπιθυμέω that of the sensibilities, δέομαι the asking of 
need, while épwrdw marks the form of the request, as does 
εὔχεσθαι also, which in classic Greek is the proper expres- 
sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying ifself 
in prayer." Ἐρωτάω, airéw and δέομαι are also compared 
briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16). 
who concludes of épwrdw “ it cannot serve to indicate directly 
any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent. 
The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having 
relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when 
carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing 
inseparable from the act of direct interrogation” ; cf. further 
Schmidt ch. 7. Cowr.: &r-, é£-, ἐπ-, παρ-(- μαι), προσ-αιτέω.] 

αἴτημα, -ros, τό, (airéw), [fr. Plato down], what is or 
has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; plur. [ A. V. requests], 
Phil. iv. 6 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; things asked for, 1 Jn. v. 
15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.] * 

αἰτία, -as, 7; 1. cause, reason: Acts x. 21; xxii. 
24; xxviii. 20; κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for every cause, Mt. 
xix. 3; δι ἣν αἰτίαν for which cause, wherefore, Lk. viii. 
47; 2 Tim. i. 6, 12; Tit. i. 13; Heb. ii. 11; cf. Grimm 
on 2 Macc. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy 
of punishment; crime of which one is accused: Mt. 
xxvii. 37; Mk. xv. 26; Jn. xviii. 38; xix. 4, [6; Acts 
xxiii. 28]; αἰτία θανάτου [A. V. cause of death] crime 
deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 
18. S. charge of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27. 
(All these signif. in prof. writ. also; [but L. and S. now 
make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 the words 
εἰ οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τῆς γυναικός find a 
simple explanation in a Latinism (causai. q. res: si ita res 
se habet, etc.) if the case of the man with his wife is so.* 

airlapa, -ros, τό, see αἰτίωμα. 

[αἰτιάομαι, -ὥμαι : to accuse, bring a charge against; 
ἡτιασάμεθα is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the 
προῃτιασάμεθα of the printed texts. (Proy. xix. 3; Sir. 
xxix. 5; freq. in prof. writ.) SYN. see κατηγορέω."] 

αἴτιος, -a, -ov, that in which the cause of anything 
resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. ὁ αἴτιος the 
author: owrnpias, Heb. v. 9 (the same phrase is freq. 
in prof. writ.; cf. the opp. ai. τῆς ἀπωλείας in Bel and 
the Dragon vs. 41; τῶν κακῶν, 2 Mace. xiii. 4; Leian. 
Tim. 36 ed. Lips.; τῶν ἀγαθῶν, Isocr. ad Phil. 49 Ῥ. 


106 a.; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94 sq.). 2. τὸ 


18 








a7 
αἰὼν 


αἴτιον i. q. ἡ αἰτία; a. cause: Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. 
400 (342) n.]. b. crime, offence: Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22. 
(αἴτιος culprit.) [See αἰτία, 3.]* 

alriwpa, -ros, τό, (αἰτιάομαι) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the read- 
ing of the best codd. adopted by G 1, Τ Tr WH for Rec. 
airíaua: accusation, charge of guilt. (A form not found 
in other writ.; [yet Mey. notes αἰτίωσις for αἰτίασις, 
Eustath. p. 1422, 21; see B. 73; WH. App. p. 166].)* 

αἰφνίδιος, -ov, (αἴφνης, ἀφανής, ἄφνω q. v.), unexpected, 
sudden, unforeseen: Lk. xxi. 34 [here WII ἐφνίδ., see 
their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151]; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap. 
xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17; 3 Macc. iii. 24; Aeschyl., 
Thue. 2, 61 τὸ αἰφνίδιον kai ἀπροσδόκητον, Polyb., Joseph., 
Plut., Dion. Hal., al.) * 

αἰχμαλωσία, -as, ἡ, (αἰχμάλωτος, q. v.), captivity: Rev. 
xiii. 10; abstr. for coner. i. q. αἰχμάλωτοι (cf. ἀδελφότης 
above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, [cf. B. 148 
(129); W. 225 (211)]); also εἴ τις αἰχμαλωσίαν συνάγει 
(ace. to the common but doubtless corrupt text), Rev. 
xii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, etc.). [Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph., Plut., al.]* 

αἰχμαλωτεύω ; 1 aor. ἠχμαλώτευσα; a later word (cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W.92 (88)]); to make captive, 
take captive: 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec.; freq. in the Sept. and 
O. T. Apoer.; to lead captive: Eph.iv. 8 (Ezek. xii. 3; 
[1 Esdr. vi. 15]).* 

αἰχμαλωτίζω; 1 fut. pass. αἰχμαλωτισθήσομαι; a. 
equiv. to αἰχμάλωτον ποιῶ, which the earlier Greeks use. 
b. to lead away captive: foll. by eis with ace. of place, 
Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob.i.10). c. fig. to sub- 
jugate, bring under control: 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage 
see νόημα, 2); τινά τινι, Ro. vii. 23 [yet T Tr δὲ ete. in- 
sert ἐν before the dat.]; to take captive one's mind, capti- 
vate : γυναικάρια, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec.], (Judith xvi. 9 
τὸ κάλλος αὐτῆς ἠχμαλώτισε ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ). The word 
is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr., 
Heliod.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); Ellic. 
on 2 Tim. l. c.].* 

alx p-&Xoros, -ov, (fr. αἰχμή a spear and ἁλωτός, verbal 
adj. fr. ἁλῶναι, prop. taken by the spear), [fr. Aeschyl. 
down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).* 

αἰών, -ῶνος, 6, (as if aiév— poet. for de( — ὦν, so teaches 
Aristot. de caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279*, 27; [so Proclus 
lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241; et al.]; but more prob- 
able is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that 
αἰών is so connected with ἄημι to breathe, blow, as to 
denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf. 
Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But αἰών (— aiFóv) is now gen- 
erally connected with atei, ἀεί, Skr. évas (aivas), Lat. 
aevum, Goth. aivs, Germ. ewig, Ens. aye, ever; cf. Curtius 
§ 585; Fick, Pt. i. p.27; Vanitek p. 79; Benfey, Wur- 
zellex. i. p. 7 sq. ; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400; 
Pott, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442; Ebeling, Lex. 
Hom. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. ἀεί; Cremer, edd. 2, 3,4 (al- 
though in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm) ; Pott and 
Fick, however, connect it with Skr. @yus rather than 
évas, although both these forms are derived from 7 to 
go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, Vanicek, u. s.).] In 


>? 
αἰὼν 


Greek authors 1. age (Lat. aevum, which is αἰών 
with the Aeolic digamma), a human lifetime (in Hom., 
Hadt., Pind., Tragic poets), life itself (Hom. Il. 5, 685 
μὲ καὶ λίποι αἰών etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity 
of time, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38 a.; Tim. Locr. 
p. 97 d. [quoted below]; Plut., al.). With this signifi- 
cation the Hebrew and Rabbinie idea of the word p71y 
(of which in the Sept. αἰών is the equiv.) combines in 
the bibl. and eccl. writ. Hence in the N. T. used 
1. a. univ.: in the phrases eis τὸν αἰῶνα, Dy? (Gen. 
vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58; xiv. 16; Heb. v. 6; vi. 
20, ete.; and strengthened eis τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, Heb. 
i. 8 [fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. $ 36, 2] (Tob. 
vi. 18; Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 18, etc.); eis αἰῶνα, Jude 
13; eis ἡμέραν αἰῶνος unto the day which is eternity 
gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [cf. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)] ; 
with a negation: never, Jn. iv. 14 [ Lehm. in br.]; viii. 
D150x: 28:5 xi. 20; xin 83 1-60: vin.) 13); or not for 
ever, not always, Jn. viii. 35; eis τοὺς αἰῶνας unto the 
ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the 
individual ages whose sum is eternity): [Lk. i. 33]; 
Ro. 1: 25)5 1x. 5; xi. 36 5 [xvi. 27 R G Tr WHi];-2 Co. 
xi. 31; Heb. xiii. 8; εἰς πάντας τ. αἰῶνας, Jude 25; εἰς 
τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων (in which expression the endless 
future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of 
which are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2; 
among the various phrases to express duration com- 
posed of this word with prep. or adjuncts, (which to the 
number of more than fifteen are to be found in the 
Sept., ef. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of 
the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. 1.7): 
[Ro. xvi. 27 L T]; Gal. i. 5; [Phil iv. 20]; 1 Tim. i. 
17; [2 Lim. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 11]; Rev. i. 6, 18; iv. 
DESC veta vrl? exccn (Gist ΧΙ LO αν ἢν exc DIS Χχ- 
10; xxii. 5; εἰς αἰῶνας αἰώνων, Rev. xiv. 11; 6 αἰὼν τῶν 
αἰώνων the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages, 
Eph. iii. 21 (cf. Mey. [or Ellic.] ad loc.) ; ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων 
from the ages down, from eternity, Col. i. 26 ; Eph. iii. 
9; πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων before time was, before the founda- 
tion of the world, 1 Co. ii. dis πρόθεσις τῶν αἰώνων 
eternal purpose, Eph. iii. 11. — b. in hyperbolic and 
popular usage: ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰῶνος (odiyn, Gen. vi. 4, cf. 
Deut. xxxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within 
the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; 
xv. 18, (Tob. iv. 12 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰῶνος ; 
Longin. 34 τοὺς ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος pyropas); also ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος, 
Jn. ix. 32, (1 Esdr. ii. 19, 22 (23); Diod. iv. 83 of the 
temple of Venus τὴν ἐξ αἰῶνος ἀρχὴν λαβόν, 17, 1 τοὺς 
ἐξ αἰῶνος βασιλεῖς, [excerpt. de legat. xl.] p. 632 τὴν ἐξ 
αἰῶνος παραδεδομένην ἐλευθερίαν). 2. by meton. of the 
container for the contained, of αἰῶνες denotes the worlds, 
the universe, i. 6. the agerecate of things contained in 
time, [on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb. 
i. 2; xi. 3; and (Ὁ) 1 Tim. i. 17; [Rev. xv. 3 WH 
txt.; cf. Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 13; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir. 
xxxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Noé $ 12 bis; de mundo 
8 7; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 2; 
39, 3 (πατὴρ v. a.) ; 55, 6 (θεὸς r. a.) ; Constt. Ap. 7. 34; 


19 





αἰών 


see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete. i.p. 106 n.]. So 
αἰών in Sap. xiii. 9; xiv. 6; xviii. 4; the same use oc- 
curs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriae, Arabic; cf. Bleek, 
Hebrüerbr. ii. 1, p. 36 sqq.; Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 
1036; [ef. the use of of αἰῶνες in the Fathers i. q. the 
world of mankind, e. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2]. 3. As 
the Jews distinguished n3 obiyn the time before the 
Messiah, and San pon the time after the advent of the 
Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. d. Hebrüerbr. p. 204 sqq.; 
[Schiirer § 29,9]), so most of the N. T. writers distin- 
guish 6 αἰὼν οὗτος this age (also simply 6 αἰών, Mt. xiii. 22; 
Mk. iv. 19 GL T Tr WH; ὁ ἐνεστὼς αἰών, Gal. i. 4; ὁ 
νῦν αἰών, 1 Tim. vi. 17; [2 Tim. iv. 10]; Tit. ii. 12), the 
time before the appointed return or truly Messianic ad- 
vent of Christ (i. e. the παρουσία, q. v-), the period of insta- 
bility, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery, 
—and αἰὼν μέλλων the future age (also 6 αἰὼν ἐκεῖνος, Lk. 
xx. 35; ὁ αἰὼν ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Lk. xviii. 30; Mk. x. 30; 
οἱ αἰῶνες οἱ ἐπερχόμενοι, Eph. ii. 7), i. e. the age after 
the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the con- 
'summate establishment of the divine kingdom and all 
its blessings: Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 21; ef. Fritzsche on 
Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of ‘this age’ 
are mentioned in the N. T. with censure: 6 αἰὼν οὗτος, 
by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits 
of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called 
υἱοὶ τοῦ ai. τούτου in Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 343 κατὰ τὸν αἰῶνα 
τοῦ κόσμου τούτου conformably to the age to which this 
(wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [ef. Trench § lix. 
sub fin.]; ἀγαπᾶν τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see 
ἀγαπάω); ἄρχοντες τοῦ al. τούτου, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see ἄρχων); 
ὁ θεὸς τοῦ ai. τούτου the devil, who rules the thoughts 
and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4; at μέριμναι 
τοῦ αἰῶνος the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk. 
iv. 19; πλούσιος ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι rich in worldly wealth, 
1 Tim. vi. 17; σοφία τοῦ ai. τούτ. such wisdom as be- 
longs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to 
the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6; συζητητὴς τοῦ ai. ror. disputer, 
sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20; συντέλεια 
τοῦ ai. τούτ. the end, or rather consummation, of the age 
preceding Christ’s return, with which will be connected 
the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the de- 
molition of this world and its restoration to a more ex- 
cellent condition [cf. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 39 sq. 49; 
xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; it is called συντέλεια τῶν αἰώνων in 
Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 10, test. Benj. 11 
(cf. Vorstman p. 133) ]; τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων the ends (last 
part) of the ages before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11; 
δυνάμεις τοῦ μέλλοντος αἰῶνος powers which present them- 
selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the 
Holy Spirit, Heb. vi. 5 ; rod αἰῶνος ἐκείνου τυχεῖν to partake 
of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among 
the N. T. writers James does not use the word αἰών. 
[On the word in its relation to κόσμος see Trench $ lix. 
Its biblical sense and its relation to D'?1J are discussed by 
Stuart, Exeget. Essays on Words relating to Fut. Punish- 
ment, Andover, 1830 (and Presbyt. Publ. Committee, Phil.) ; 
Tayler Lewis in Lange's Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51; J. W. 
Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 1880. See esp. 


7 
αἰὼν 


E. Abbot, Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, etc., 
(New York, 1867), Index of subjects s. v. For its meanings 
in eccl. writ. see Suicer, "Thesaur. Eccles. i. col. 140 sqq., cf. 
ii. col. 1609; Huet, Origeniana (App. to vol. iv. of De la 
Rue's Origen) lib. ii. c. ii. quaest. 11, 8 26. Its use in Hom., 
Hes. Pind. Aeschyl., Soph., Eur, Aristót, Plato, Tim. 
Loer., is exhibited in detail by E. S. Goodwin in the Christ. 
Exam. for March and May, 1831, March and May, 1832. 
“On αἰών as the complete period, either of each particular life 
or of all existence, see Arist. cael. 1, 9, 15; on αἰών and 
χρόνος, cf. Philo [quis rer. div. her. § 34] i. 496, 18 sq.; [de 
mut. nom. § 47] i.619,10sq.” L.and S.ed.6; see also Philo 
de alleg. leg. iii. 8; quod deus immut. § 6 fin.; de prof. $ 11; 
de praem. et poen. § 15; and (de mund. opif. § 7) esp. J. G. 
Müller, Philo’s Lehre v. d. Weltschópfung, p. 168 (Berl. 1864). 
Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as fol- 
lows: both words denote the abstract idea of time and with 
special reference to its extent or duration; χρόνος is the 
general designation for time, which can be divided up into 
portions, each of which is.in its turn a χρόνος ; on the other 
hand, αἰών, which in the concrete and simple language of 
Homer (Pindar and the Tragedians) denotes the allotted 
lifetime, even the life, of the individual (Il. 4, 478 μινυνθάδιος 
δέ οἱ αἰών etc.), in Attic prose differs from χρόνος by denot- 
ing time unlimited and boundless, which is not conceived of 
as divisible into αἰῶνες (contrast here biblical usage and see 
below), but rather into χρόνοι. In philosophical speech it is 
without beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 c. d. χρόνω δὲ τὰ 
μέρεα τάσδε τὰς περιόδως λέγοντι, ἃς ἐκόσμησεν ó θεὸς σὺν 
κόσμῳ" οὐ γὰρ ἣν πρὸ κόσμω ἄστρα διόπερ οὐδ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸς οὐδ᾽ 
ὡρᾶν περίοδοι, αἷς μετρέεται ὃ γεννατὸς χρόνο" οὗτος. εἰκὼν 
δέ ἐστι τῶ ἀγεννάτω χρόνω, ὃν αἰῶνα ποταγορεύομες - ὡς 
γὰρ ποτ᾽ ἀΐδιον παράδειγμα, τὸν ἰδανικὸν κόσμον, ὅδε ὁ wpavds 
ἐγεννάθη, οὕτως ὡς πρὺς παράδειγμα, τὸν αἰῶνα, 08e 6 χρόνος 
σὺν κόσμῳ ἐδαμιουργήθη --- after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d. 
(where see Stallbaum's note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 34 τοὺς δὲ 
μετ᾽ εὐσεβείας κ. δικαιοσύνης ζῶντας (ὁρῶ) ἔν τε τοῖς παροῦσι 
χρόνοις ἀσφαλῶς διάγοντας καὶ περὶ τοῦ σύμπαντος ai@vos 
ἡδίους τὰς ἐλπίδας ἔχοντας. The adj. ἄχρονος independent 
of time, above and beyond all time, is synon. with αἰώνιος ; 
where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter- 
nity begins: Nonnus, metaph. evang. Johan. i. 1, &xpovos ἣν, 
ἀκίχητος, ἐν ἀρρήτῳ λόγος ἀρχῇ. Thoroughly Platonic in 
cast are the definitions of Gregory οἵ Nazianzus (orat. 
xxxviii. 8) αἰὼν yap οὔτε χρόνος οὔτε χρόνου τι μέρος - οὐδὲ 
γὰρ μετρητόν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅπερ ἡμῖν ὁ χρόνος ἡλίου φορᾷ μετρούμενος, 
τοῦτο τοῖς ἀϊδίοις αἰών, τὸ συμπαρεκτεινόμενον τοῖς οὖσιν οἷόν 
τι χρονικὸν κίνημα καὶ διάστημα (Suicer τι. s.). So Clem. 
Alex. strom. i. 13, p. 756 ἃ. ed. Migne, Ὁ γ᾽ οὖν αἰὼν τοῦ 
χρόνου τὸ μέλλον καὶ τὸ ἐνεστὼς, αὐτὰρ δὴ καὶ τὸ παρῳχηκὸς 
ἀκαριαίως συνίστησι. Instances from extra-biblical writ. of 
the use of αἰών in the plural are: τὸν am αἰώνων μύθον, 
Anthol. vol. iii. pt. ii. p. 55 ed. Jacobs; εἰς αἰῶνας, ibid. vol. 
iy. epigr. 492 ; ἐκ περιτροπῆς αἰώνων, Joseph. b. 1. 3, 8, 5; εἰς 
αἰῶνας διαμένει, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. The dis- 
cussions which have been raised respecting the word may 
give interest to additional reff. to its use by Philo and Jo- 
sephus. Philo: 6 πᾶς (ἅπας, σύμπας) or πᾶς (etc.) ó αἰών: 
de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 1 (a noteworthy passage, 
ef. de congressu erud. § 11 and reff. s. v. θάνατος) ; de sacrif. 
Ab. et Caini $ 11; quod det. pot. § 48; quod deus immut. 
$ 1, $ 24; de plantat. $ 27; de sobrietate § 13; de migr. Abr. 
§ 2; de prof. $ 9; de mut. nom. $ 34; de somn. ii. $ 15, § 31, 
$38; delegat. ad Gaium ὃ 38; (6) μακρὸς ai.: de sacrif. Ab. 
et Caini ὃ 21; de ebrietate $ 47; de prof. § 20; ai. μήκιστος: 


20 


27 
αιωνιος 


de sobrietate § 5; de prof. § 21; 6 ἄπειρος ai.: de legat. ad 
Gaium $ 11; 6 ἔμπροσθεν ai.: de praem et. poen. ὃ 6 ; ai. 
πολύς: de Abrah. $ 46; τίς ai.: de merc. meretr. $ 1; δι᾽ ai.: 
de cherub. § 26; de plantat. $ 27; eis τὸν ai.: de gigant. ὃ 5; 
ἐν (τῷ) ai.: de mut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction) ; 
quod deus immut. ὃ 6; ἐξ ai.: de somn. i. § 3; ἐπ᾽ ai.: de 
plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo ὃ 7; πρὸ ai.: de mut. nom. 
§ 2; πρὸς ai.: de mut. nom. $ 11; (δ) ai.: de prof. § 18; de 
alleg. leg. iii. $ 70; de cherub. $ 22; de migr. Abr. $ 22; de 
somn. i. $ 18, 8 22; de Josepho $ 5; de vita Moys. ii. $ 3; 
de decalogo § 14; de victimis § 3; frag. in Mang. ii. 660 
(Richter vi. p. 219); de plantat. $ 12 (bis) ; de mundo $ 7. 
Josephus: (δ) πᾶς αἰών : antt. 1, 18, 7; 3,8,10; c. Ap. 2, 
11, 3; 2, 22, 1; μακρὸς ai.: antt. 2, 7, 3; πολὺς ai.: c. Ap. 2, 
31, 1; τοσοῦτος ai.: c. Ap. 1, 8, 4; πλῆθος αἰῶνος : antt. 
prooem. $3; ἀπ᾽ αἱ. : b. j. prooem. ὃ 4; δι᾽ ai.: antt. 1, 18,8; 
4, 6, 4; b. j. 6, 2, 1; eis (rv) ai.: antt. 4, 8, 18; 5, 1, 27; 7, 
9, 55. 7,145755 ἘΞ αἰ}... 5, 10; 5; (6)ai-: antt. 19, 2, 95 
b. j. 1, 21, 10; plur. (see above) 3, 8, 5. See αἰώνιος. 

αἰώνιος, -ον, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Heb. ix. 12; Num. 
xxv. 13; Plat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1; 
[cf. WH. App. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -os, 
τα, τον, (αἰών); 1. without beginning or end, that which 
always has been and always will be: θεός, Ro. xvi. 26, (ὁ 
μόνος αἰώνιος, 2 Mace. i. 25); πνεῦμα, Heb. ix. 14. 2. 
without beginning: χρόνοις αἰωνίοις, Ro. xvi. 25; mpd χρό- 
νων αἰωνίων, 2 "im. i. 9; Tit. i. 2; εὐαγγέλιον a gospel 
whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose 
of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. with- 
out end, never to cease, everlasting: 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to 
πρόσκαιρος) ; αἰώνιον αὐτόν, joined to thee forever as a 
sharer of the same eternal life, Philem. 15; βάρος δόξης, 
2 Co. iv. 17; βασιλεία, 2 Pet. i. 11; δόξα, 2 Tim. ii. 10; 
1 Pet. v. 10; ξωή (see ζωή. 2 b.) : κληρονομία, Heb. ix. 
15; λύτρωσις, Heb. ix. 12; παράκλησις, 2 Th. 11. 16; 
oxnvai,, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (the 
habitations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, cf. 
Jn. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernacula aeterna, quae 
praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsche 5 Esdr.) ii. 11]; 
similarly Hades is called αἰώνιος τόπος, Tob. iii. 6, cf. 
Eccl. xii. 5); σωτηρία, Heb. v. 9; [so Mk. xvi. WH, in 
the (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion']. Opposite ideas 
are: κόλασις, Mt. xxv. 46; κρίμα. Heb. vi. 2; κρίσις, 
Mk. iii. 29 (Rec. [but L T WH Tr txt. ἁμαρτήματος ; 
in Acta Thom. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., ἔσται σοι τοῦτο eis ἄφεσιν 
ἁμαρτιῶν kai λύτρον αἰωνίων παραπτωμάτων, it has been 
plausibly conjectured we should read λύτρον αἰώνιον (cf. 
Heb. ix. 12)]); ὄλεθρος [Lchm. txt. ὀλέθριος, 2 Th. i. 
9, (4 Mace. x. 15); πῦρ, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12 
αἰωνίῳ πυρὶ x. βασάνοις, ai εἰς ὅλον τὸν αἰῶνα οὐκ ἀνήσουσί 
σε). 

[Of the examples of αἰώνιος from Philo (with whom it is 
less common than &fd:osyq. v., of which there are some fifty 
instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2; 
de caritate ὃ 17; κόλασις ai. frag. in Mang. ii. 667 fin. 
(Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; cf. de praem. et poen. §12. Other 
exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod 
deus immut. § 30; quis rer. div. her. § 58; de congressu 
quaer. erud. § 19; de prof. § 38; de somn. ii. § 43; de Jose- 
pho § 24; guod omn. prob. lib. § 4, § 18; de ebrietate § 32; 
de Abrah. ὃ 10; ζωὴ ai.: de prof. § 15; θεὸς (δ) ai.: de plan- 


> , 
ἀκαθαρσία 


tat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis); de mundo ὃ 2. From Jose- 
phus: antt. 7, 14, 5; 12, 7, 3; 15, 10, 5; b. j. 1, 33, 2; 6, 2, 
1; κλέος ai.: antt. 4, 6, 5; b. j. 3, 8, 5; μνήμη ai.: antt. 1, 
13,4; 6, 14,4; 10, 11, 7; 15, 11, 1: οἶκον μὲν αἰώνιον Exes 
(of God), antt. 8, 4, 2; ἐφυλάχθη ó ᾿Ιωάννης δεσμοῖς αἰωνίοις, 
b. j. 6, 9, 4. 

Syn. ἀΐδιος, αἰώνιος: aid. covers the complete philo- 
sophie idea — without beginning and without end ; also either 
without beginning or without end; as respects the past, it 
is applied to what has existed time out of mind. αἰώνιος (fr. 
Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasurableness of eter- 
nity (while such words as συνεχῆς continuous, unintermitted, 
διατελής perpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable 
to an abstract term, like αἰών) ; αἰώνιος accordingly is esp. 
adapted to supersensuous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim. 
Locr. 96 c. θεὸν δὲ τὸν μὲν αἰώνιον νόος ὁρῆ μόνος etc. ; Plat. 
Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc.); 38 b. c.; legg. x. p. 
904 a. ἀνώλεθρον δὲ by γενόμενον, ἀλλ᾽ ouk αἰώνιον. ΟἿ. also 
Plato’s διαιώνιος (Tim. 38 b.; 39 e.). Schmidt ch. 45.] 

ἀκαθαρσία, -as, 7, (ἀκάθαρτος). [fr. Hippocr. down], 
uncleanness; ᾿ a. physical: Mt. xxiii. 27. b.ina 
moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profli- 
gate living: Ro. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 
19; Eph. iv. 19; v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 7; used 
of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.) 
Cf. Tittmann i. p. 150 sq.* 

ἀκαθάρτης, -jros, 7, impurity: Rev. xvii. 4, — not found 
elsewhere, and the true reading here is τὰ ἀκάθαρτα τῆς.ἢ 

ἀκάθαρτος, -ov, (kaaipw), [fr. Soph. down], in the Sept. 
i.q. $V, not cleansed, unclean; a. ina ceremonial 
sense, that which must be abstained from according to 
the levitieal law, lest impurity be contracted: Acts x. 
14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of 
men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. lii. 11, of things pertain- 
ing to idolatry); Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. ina 
moral sense, unclean in thought and life (freq. in Plat.) : 
Eph. v. 5; τὰ ἀκάθαρτα τῆς πορνείας, Rev. xvii. 4 (acc. 
to the true reading); πνεύματα, demons, bad angels, [in 
twenty-three pass. of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.]: Mt. x. 
1; xii. 43; MK. i. 23, 26; iii. 11, etc.; Lk. iv. 33, 36; vi. 
18, ete.; Acts v. 16; viü. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2, 
(πνεύματα πονηρά in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; 
xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.). 

ἀκαιρέομαι, -odpar: [impf. ἠκαιρούμην] ; (ἄκαιρος inop- 
portune) ; to lack opportunity, (opp. to εὐκαιρέω ): Phil. 
iv. 10. (Phot, Suid., Zonar.; ἀκαιρεῖν, Diod. excerp. 
Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. l. x. $ 7, ed. Dind.].)* 

ἀκαίρως, (καιρός), adv., unseasonably, [A. V. out of 
season], (opp. to εὐκαίρως) : 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea- 
sonable for men or uo (Sir. xxxv. 4; [ Aeschyl. Ag. 
808]; Plat. de rep. x. p. 606 b.; Tim. 33 a.; 86 c.; 
Xen. Eph. 5, 7; oU antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) * 

&-kakos, -ov, (kakos); ac without guile or fraud, 
harmless; free from quilt: Heb. vii. 26; [cf. Clement. 
frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. LgAtfi. S. Clement of Rome 
etc. p. 219): ἄκακος 6 Πατὴρ πνεῦμα ἔδωκεν ἄκακον]. 
b. fearing no evil from others, distrusting no one, [cf. 
Eng. quileless]: Ro. xvi. 18. ([Aeschyl,] Plat., Dem., 
Polyb. al; Sept.) (Cf. Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. p. 
27 sq.]* 


21 


fruit, barren; 





ἀκαταστασία 


ἄκανθα, -ης, 7, (ἀκή a point [but see in ἀκμή]); a. a 
thorn, bramble-bush, brier: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Heb. 
vi. 8; εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας i. e. among the seeds of thorns, Mt. 
xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7 [L mre. ἐπί], 18 [Tdf. ἐπί]; Lk. viii. 
14 (vs. 7 ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἀκανθῶν) : ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκ. i. e. upon 
ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden, 
Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thorny plant: στέφανον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν, 
Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2, —for bare thorns might have 
caused delirium or even death; what species of plant is 
referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read ἀκάνθων, 
from ἄκανθος, acanthus, bear’s-foot; but the meaning of 
ἄκανθα is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ. ; 
οἵ. the class. Grk. Lexx. 5. v. [On the “Crown of 
thorns” see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Mc. and S.]* 

ἀκάνθινος, -ov, (ἄκανθα ; cf. duapávrwos), thorny, woven 
out of the twigs of a thorny plant: Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 
5. (Is. xxxiv. 13.) Cf. the preceding word.* 

ἄ-καρπος, -ov, (καρπός), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without 
1. prop.: δένδρα, Jude 12. 2. metaph. 
not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. unfruitful]: 
Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit. 
iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing nothing to the instruc- 
tion, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14; 
by litotes pernicious, Eph. v. 11, (Sap. xv. 4; ef. Grimm 
on Sap. i. 11).* 

ἀ-κατά-γνωστος, -ov, (καταγινώσκω); that cannot be con- 
demned, not to be censured: Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47, 
and several times in eccl. writ.) * 

d-kara-káAvurros, -ov, (κατακαλύπτω), not covered, un- 
veiled: 1 Co. xi. 5,13. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2; [Sept., Philo].) * 

ἀ κατά-κριτος, -ov, (κατακρίνω). uncondemned ; punished 
without being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Not 
found in prof. writ.) * 

ἀ-κατά-λυτος, -ov, (καταλύω), indissoluble; not subject to 
destruction, [A. V. endless]: ζωή, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Macc. 
x. 11; Dion. Hal. 10, 31.) * 

ἀκατάπαστος. -ov, — found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd. 
A and B, from which L WH Tr mrg. have adopted 
it instead of the Rec. ἀκαταπαύστους, q. V. It. may be 
derived fr. πατέομαι. pf. πέπασμαι; to taste, eat; whence 
ἀκατάπαστος insatiable. In prof. writ. κατάπαστος [which 
Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading] 
signifies besprinkled, soiled, from καταπάσσω to besprin- 
kle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see 
B. 65 (ὅ1), [and WH. App. p. 170].* 

ἀκατάπαυστος, -ov, (xarazavo), unable to stop, unceas- 
ing; passively, not quieted, that cannot be quieted; with 
gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. ii. 14 
[R G T Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, sc. which 
they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph., Plut.) * 

ἀκαταστασία, -as, 7, (axatdoratos), instability, a state 
of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. 
iii. 16; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.14, 1; [Prov. xxvi. 28; Tob. 
iv. 13]) ; plur. disturbances, disorders: of dissensions, 
2 Co. xii. 20; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (ef. Mey. ad loc.); 

of the tumults or commotions of war, Lk. xxi.9. (Polyb., 
Dion. Hal.) * 


ἀκατάστατος 


ἀκατά-στατος, -ον, (καθίστημι), unstable, inconstant, 
restless: Jas.i. 8,and L T Tr WH ot iii. 8 also, but less 
fitly ; [ef Hermae Past. 1. ii. mand. 2, 3 πονηρὸν πνεῦμά 
ἐστιν ἡ καταλαλιά, καὶ ἀκατάστατον md μηδέποτε 
εἰρηνεῦον, ἀλλά etc.]. ([Hippocr. et al.] Polyb. 7, 4, 6, 
al. [Sept. Is. liv. 11].) * 

d-karácXeros, -ov, (κατέχω to restrain, control), that 
cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8 R G. (Job xxxi. 11; 
3 Mace. vi. 17; Diod. 17, 38 dxar. δάκρυα. al.)* 

᾿Ακελδαμά, or ᾿Ακελδαμάχ (Lehm.), [or ‘Axed. WH 
(see their Intr. § 408) ], or ᾿Αχελδαμάχ (T Tr), fr. Chald. 
827 »pn (field of blood), Akeldama: Acts i. 19; see 
αἶμα, 9. (B. D. s. v.; esp. Kautzsch, Gram. pp. 8, 173].* 

ἀκέραιος, -ov, (IV IEEE ; a. unmired, pure, as 
wine, metals. b. of the mind, 
evil, free from quile, innocent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro. 
xvi 19; Phil ii. 15; (and freq. in prof. writ.). [Cf. 
Ellic. on Phil.l.c.; Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. 27 sq.]* 

ἀκλινής, -és, (κλίνω). not inclining, firm, unmoved: Heb. 
x. 23. (Freq. in prof. writ.) * 

ἀκμάζω: 1 aor. ἤκμασα: (ἀκμήν; to flourish, come to 
maturity: Rev. xiv. 18. (Very freq. in prof. writ.)* — 

ἀκμή, 7s. ἡ, (cf. ἀκή [on the accent cf. Chandler § 116; 
but the word is*a mere figment of the grammarians,’ 
Pape (yet ef. L. and S.) s. v.], atyyn, Lat. acies, acuo) ; 
among the Greeks a. prop. a point, to prick with (cf. 
[the classic] aiu). ^ b. extremity, climax, acme, highest 
degree. c. the present point of time. Hence accus. 
[W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.) ; B. 153 (134)] ἀκμήν with 
adverbial force, i. q. evs, even now, even yet: Mt. xv. 16. 
(Theocr. id. 4, 60; Polyb. 4, 36, 8; Strat. epigr. 3 p. 
101 ed. Lips.; Strabo l. i. [e. 3 prol.] p. 56; Plut. de 
glor. Athen. 2, 85, al.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 123.* 

ἀκοή, 5s, ἡ, (fr. an assumed pf. form ἤκοα, cf. ἀγορά 
above [but cf. Epic dxovj; Curtius p. 555]); 1. hear- 
ing, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing: 
1 Co. xii. 17; 2 Pet. ii. S. Hebraistically, ἀκοῇ ἀκούειν 
by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii. 
14; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9); cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3 
p. 339; § 54, 3 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the 
organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 1; 2 Tim. 
iv. 3, 4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard; 
a. instruction, namely oral; spec. the preaching of the 
gospel, [A. V. txt. report]: Jn. xii. 38; Ro. x. 16 sq. (ris 
ἐπίστευσε τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. zyy32U, which 
in 2 S. iv. 4, ete., is rendered ἀγγελία): ἀκοὴ πίστεως 
preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubens- 
predigt), Gal. iii. 2, 5; λόγος ἀκοῆς i. 4. A. ἀκουσθείς [cf. 
W. 531 (494 sq.)]: 1 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iv. 2. b. hear- 
Say, report, rumor; τινός, concerning any one: Mt. iv. 
24; xiv. 1; xxiv. 6; Mk. i. 28; xiii. 7. (Freq. in Grk. 
writ.) * 

ἀκολουθέω, -à; fut. ἀκολουθήσω ; impf. ἠκολούθουν ; 
1 aor. ἠκολούθησα; pf. ἠκολούθηκα (Mk. x. 28 L T Tr 
WH); (fr. ἀκόλουθος. and this fr. a copulative and κέλευ- 
os road, prop. walking the same road) ; 1. to follow 
one who precedes, join him as his attendant, accompany 
him: Mt. iv. 25; viii. 19; ix. 19; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 7; 


22 


without admixture of 








> , 
ακουὼ 


v. 24, [37 Lehm.]; xiv. 51 [R G]; Lk. xxii. 39,54; xxiii. 
27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xviii. 15; xx. 6, etc. ; 
Acts xii. 8; xiii. 43; xxi. 36; 1 Co. x. 4; distinguished 
fr. προάγειν in Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9; trop. τὰ ἔργα 
αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ per’ αὐτῶν, their good deeds will accom- 
pany them to the presence of God the judge to be 
rewarded by him, Rey. xiv. 13; on the other hand, 
ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῆς αἱ ἁμαρτίαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Rev. xviii. 
5, but here for ἠκολούθησαν G L T Tr WH have re- 
stored ἐκολλήθησαν; [σημεῖα τοῖς πιστεύσασιν ἀκολουθήσει 
ταῦτα, Mk. xvi. 17 Tr WH txt. (where al. παρακολ. q. v.) ]. 
to follow one in time, succeed one: Rev. xiv. 8 86: 
(Hdian. 1, 14, 12 (6) τὰ γοῦν ἀκολουθήσαντα, al. Since 
among the ancients disciples were accustomed to accom- 
pany their masters on their walks and journeys — [ἃ]. 
derive the usage that follows from the figurative sense 
of the word directly ; cf. e. g 2 Mace. viii. 36 τὸ 
ἀκολουθεῖν rots νόμοις ; M. Antonin. 1. vii. $ 31 ἀκολού- 
θησον θεῷ, and Gataker ad loc. ], ἀκολουθέω denotes 2. 
to join one as a disciple, become or be his disciple; side 
with his party, [A. V. follow him]: Mt. iv. 20, 22; ix. 9; 
xix. 27 sq.; Mk.i. 18; viii. 34; Lk. v. 11, 27, etc.; 
Jn. viii. 12 (where Jesus likens himself to a torch which 
the disciple follows); οὐκ ἀκολουθεῖ ἡμῖν he is not of 
our band of thy disciples, Mk. ix. 38. to cleave stead- 
Jastlyj to one, conform wholly to his example, in living and if 
need be in dying also: Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24; Jn. xii. 26 ; 
xxi. 22. This verb is not found in the Epp. exe. in 
1 Co. x. 4. Asin the classics, it is joined mostly with 
a dat. of the obj.; sometimes with pera twos, Lk. ix. 49; 
Rev. vi. 8 [Treg. mrg. dat.]; xiv. 13; (so also in Grk. 
writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 353 sq.; [Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 458 sq.]) ; ὀπίσω τινός, Mt. x. 38; Mk. 
viii. 34 (where R L WH Tr mrg. ἐλθεῖν), Hebr. yon 
153 “ny, cf. 1 K. xix. 21; see W. 234 (219) ; [B. 172 
(150), cf. ἀκολ. κατόπιν τινός, Arstph. Plut. 13. Comp.: 
e&, ἐπ-. kar-, Tap-, συν- ακολουθέω]. 

ἀκούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense ef. W. 
274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ἤκουον ; fut. (in 
best Grk. usage) ἀκούσομαι. Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; 
Acts iii. 22; vii. 87 RG; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; xxv. 
22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.] and (a later form) 
ἀκούσω, Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 
16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14 
[R G]; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (cf. W. 82 (79); B. 
53 (46) [ Veitch s. v.]) ; [1 aor. ἤκουσα; Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf. 
ἀκήκοα; Pass., [ pres. ἀκούομαι; 1 fut. ákovaÓrcopat]; 1 aor. 
ἠκούσθην : [fr. Hom. down]; tocar. I. absol 1. to be 
endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf) : Mk. vii. 
37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the facul- 
ty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in 
exhortations: ἀκούετε, Mk. iv. 3; ἀκούσατε, Jas. ii. 5; 
ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω. Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both 
T WH om. Tr br. ἀκούειν] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; 
ὁ ἔχων οὖς ἀκουσάτω, Kev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22, 
ete. 3. trop. to understand, perceive the sense of 
what is said: Mt. xiii. 15 sq.; Mk. viii. 18; 1 Co. xiv. 
2. II. with an object [B. $ 132, 17 ; W. 199 (187 sq.)]; 


ἀκούω 2 


1. ἀκούω τι, to hear something; ^ a. to perceive by the 
ear what is announced in one’s presence, (to hear im- 
mediately): τὴν φωνήν, Mt. xii. 19; Jn. iii. 8; Rev. 
iv.1; v.11; xviii. 4; Acts xxii. 9, etc.; τὸν ἀσπασμόν, 
Lk. i. 41 (cf. 44); Γαλιλαίαν, the name ‘Galilee,’ Lk. 
xxiii. 6 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. Tad.; cf. B. 166 (145)]; 
ἀνάστασιν νεκρῶν, the phrase *dvágT. νεκρῶν, Acts xvii. 
32; τὸν λόγον, Mk. v. 36 [R GL] (on this pass. see zapa- 
κούω, 2); Mt. xix. 22; Jn. v. 24, οἷο. ; τοὺς λόγους, 
Acts ii. 22; v. 24; Mt. vii. 24; ῥήματα, 2 Co. xii. 4; 
τί λέγουσιν, Mt. xxi. 16; pass., Mt. ii. 18; Rev. xviii. 
22 sq.; τὶ ἔκ τινος, 2 Co. xii. 6 [R G]; foll. by ὅτι [ B. 
300 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2; Mk. xvi. 11 ; Jn. iv. 42; 
xiv. 28. b. to get by hearing, learn (from the mouth 
of the teacher or narrator): Acts xv. 17 ; Mt. x. 27 (6 
eis τὸ οὖς ἀκούετε, what is taught you in secret); Ro. xv. 
21; Eph.i. 13; Col. i. 6; Jn. xiv. 24; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24; 
iii. 11; Χριστόν i. e. to become acquainted with Christ 
from apostolic teaching, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. μαθεῖν τὸν Χριστόν, 
vs. 20 [B. 166 (144) note; W.199 (187) note]); pass. 
Lk. xii. 3; Heb. ii. 1; τὶ with gen. of pers. fr. whom 
one hears, Acts i. 4; τὶ παρά twos, Jn. viii. 26,40; xv. 
15; Acts xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 2, (Thuc. 6, 93; 
Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. zapá]; Plat. rep. vi. 
p. 506 d., aL; [B. 166 (145) ; W. 199 (188)]); [παρά 
twos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)]; && 
twos, Jn. xii. 34 (ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, from attendance on its 
publie reading); ἀπό with gen. of pers., 1 Jn. i. 5; with 
περί twos added, Acts ix. 13; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. v. 21, 
27, 33, 38,43. — C. ἀκούω τι, a thing comes to one’s ears, to 
Jind out (by hearsay), learn, (hear [(of)] mediately): 
with ace. of thing, τὰ ἔργα, Mt. xi. 2; ὅσα ἐποίει, Mk. 
iii. 8 (Treg. txt. ποιεῖ] ; πολέμους, Lk. xxi. 9; Mt. xxiv. 
6; Mk. xiii. 7; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been 
mentioned : Mt. ii. 3; xxii. 7 [R L]; Mk. ii. 17; iii. 
21; Gal. i. 13; Eph. i. 15; Col. i. 4; Philem. 5, ete. 
foll. by ὅτε, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk. vi. 55; 
XT ἐἶπι. ἵν. 47: τὲ 80" x1:06;; ΧΗ 12. Gals 1:129 5 
. περί τινος, Mk. vii. 25; τὶ περί τινος, Lk. ix. 9; xvi. 2; 
xxii. S[R G L]; foll by an acc. with ptep. [B. 303 
(260)]: Lk. iv. 23; Acts vii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11; 3 Jn. 
4; foll. by ace. with inf. in two instances [cf. B. 1. c.]: 
Jn. xii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass.: Acts xi. 22 (ἠκούσθη 
6 λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας was brought to the ears) ; 
1 Co. v. 1 (ἀκούεται πορνεία ἐν ip); Mt. xxviii. 14 
(ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ [L Tr WH mrg. ὑπὸ] τοῦ ἡγεμύ- 
vos); Mk. ii. 1; Jn. ix. 32 ἠκούσθη ὅτι. d. to give ear 
to teaching or teacher: τοὺς λόγους, Mt. x. 14; to follow 
with attentive hearing, τὸν λόγον, Jn. viii. 43 ; τὰ ῥήματα 
τοῦ θεοῦ, 47. e. to comprehend, understand, (like Lat. 
audio): Mk. iv. 33; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lchm. mrg. ἀναγινώ- 
oxere) yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. ἀκούειν is 
not joined with the genitive of the obj. unless one hear 


2 PrN 


223 


the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144)]; | 


a. with gen. of a person; simply; a. to perceive any 
one’s voice: οὗ i.e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in 
the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14, 
[W. 199 (187) note?]. B. to give ear to one, listen, 


3 


| cf. De Wette ad loc., W. $ 30, 11. 





ἀκριβής 


hearken, (Germ. thm zuhüren, ihn anhóren) : Mt. ii. 9 ; 
Mk. vii. 14; xii. 37; Lk. ii. 46; x. 16; xv. 1; xix. 48; 
xxi. 38; Acts xvii. 32; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass. 
τινὸς περί Twos); Xxv. 22; Jn. vi. 60. γ. to yield to, hear 
and obey, hear to one, (Germ. auf einen hóren) : Mt. xvii. 
5, (Mk. ix. 7; Lk. ix. 35); Jn. iii. 29; x. 8; Acts iii. 
22 sq.; iv. 19; vii. 37 [RG]; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence 
8. its use by John in the sense to listen to, have regard 
to, of God answering the prayers of men: Jn. ix. 31 ; xi. 
41; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. (the Sept. render pnw by eicakovo). 
e. with gen. of pers. and ptep. [B. 301 (259)]: Mk. xiv. 
58; Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. i. 37; vii. 32; Acts ii. 6, 11; 
Rey. xvi.5; ἤκουσα τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου λέγοντος, Rev. xvi. 
7GLT [Tr WH cod.Sin.], a poetic personification ; 
b. with gen. of a 
thing: τῆς βλασφημίας, Mk. xiv. 64 (Lehm. τὴν βλα- 
odnpiay, as in Mt. xxvi. 65; the acc. merely denotes the 
object; τῆς βλασφ. is equiv. in sense to αὐτοῦ βλασφημοῦν- 
tos, [cf. B. 166 (145)]) ; τῶν λόγων, Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii. 
24 τοὺς λόγους) : Jn. vii. 40 (L T Tr WH cod. Sin., but 
R ἃ τὸν λόγον, [cf. B.u.s.]); συμφωνίας x. χορῶν, Lk. xv. 
25; τοῦ στεναγμοῦ, Acts vii. 34; τῆς ἀπολογίας. Acts 
xxil. 1. The frequent phrase ἀκούειν τῆς φωνῆς (i. q. POW 
03, Ex. xviii. 19) means a. fo perceive the distinct 
words of a voice: Jn. v. 25,28; Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 
7; Heb. mi7,155 1v. 7; Rev. xiv. 13 ; xxl. 3. B. to 
yield obedience to the voice: Jn. v. 25 (oi ἀκούσαντες sc. 
τῆς φωνῆς); x. 16, 27; xviii. 37; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn. 
xii. 47; xvii. 37; Lk. vi. 47; Acts xxii. 1, it is better 
to consider the pron. pod which precedes as a possess. 
gen. rather than, with B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a 
double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of 
the thing. The Johannean phrase ἀκούειν παρὰ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, or τὶ παρὰ θεοῦ, signifies a. to perceive in the soul 
the inward communication of God: Jn. vi. 45. b. to be 
taught by God's inward communication : Jn. viii. 26, 40, 
(so, too, the simple ἀκούειν in v. 30); to be taught by the 
devil, aec. to the reading of L 'T Tr WH, ἠκούσατε 
παρὰ τοῦ zarpós,in Jn. viii. 38. For the rest cf. B. 165 
(144) sqq. ; 301 (258) sqq. [Comp.: 8r. eia, €m-, zap-, 
mpo-, ὑπ-ακούω.] 

ἀκρασία, -as, 7, (ἀκρατής), want of self-control, inconti- 
nence, intemperance: Mt. xxiii. 25 (Grsb. ἀδικία) ; 1 Co. 
vii. 5. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.524sq. [(Aristot. on.) ] * 

ἀκρατής, -€s, gen. -éos, -οῦς, (κράτος. without self-con- 
trol, intemperate: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof. writ. fr. 
Plato and Xen. down.) * 

ἄκρατος, -ov, (Kepavvupe), unmixed, pure: Rev. xiv. 10 
(of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ. 
and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).* 

ἀκρίβεια, -eias, ἡ, (ἀκριβής), exactness, exactest care: 
Acts xxii. 3 (κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ νόμου in accordance 
with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [cf. Isoc. areop. 
p.147 e.]). [From Thuc. down.]* ; 

ἀκριβής, -és, gen. -ovs, exact, careful. The neut. compar. 
is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv. 
22; ἡ ἀκριβεστάτη αἵρεσις the straitest sect i. e. the most 
precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and 


ἀκριβόω 


in observing even the more minute precepts of the law 
and of tradition, Acts xxvi. 5. [From Hdt. down.]* 

ἀκριβόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἠκρίβωσα; (ἀκριβή); 1. in prof. 
writ. fo know accurately, to do exactly. 2. to investi- 
gate diligently: Mt. ii. 7, 16, (ἀκριβῶς ἐξετάζειν, vs. 8); 
Aristot. gen. anim. 5, 1; Philo, m. opif. $ 25 μετὰ πάσης 
ἐξετάσεως ἀκριβοῦντες. [ΑἸ]. to learn exactly, ascertain; 
cf. Fritz. or Mey. on Mt. u. s.] * 

ἀκριβῶς, adv., exactly, accurately, diligently: Mt. ii. 8; 
Lk. i. 3; Acts xviii. 25; 1 Th. v. 2; ἀκριβῶς περιπατεῖν 
to live carefully, cireumspectly, deviating in no respect 
from the law of duty, Eph. v. 15. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.] * 

ἀκρίς, -iSos, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], « locust, particu- 
larly that species which especially infests oriental coun- 
tries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of 
them almost every spring are carried by the wind from 
Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that coun- 
try migrate to regions farther north, until they perish 
by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed 
to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned 
with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites 
also (ace. to Lev. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them; 
(cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Heuschrecken; Furrer in Schen- 
kel iii. p. 78 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of 
the Bible, p. 313 sqq.]): Mt. iii. 4; Mk.i.6. A marvel- 
lous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Rev. ix. 
3, 7, ef. 2, 5 sq. 8-12; see Düsterdieck ad loc.* 

ἀκροατήριον, -ov, τό, (ἀκροάομαι to be a hearer), place 
of assemblage for hearing, auditorium; like this Lat. 
word in Roman Law, axpoar. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a 
place set apart for hearing and deciding cases, [yet cf. 
Mey. ad loc.]. (Several times in Plut. and other later 
writers.) * 

ἀκροατής, -οὔ, 6, (ἀκροάομαι, [see the preceding word ]), 
a hearer: τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 13; τοῦ Aóyov , Jas. i. 22 sq. 
25. (Thue., Isocr., Plat., Dem., Plut.) * 

ἀκροβυστία, -as, 7, (a word unknown to the Greeks, 
who used ἡ ἀκροποσθία and τὸ ἀκροπόσθιον, fr. πόσθη i. e. 
membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that τὴν πόσθην 
of the Greeks was pronounced τὴν βύστην by the Alex- 
andrians, and ἀκροβυστία said instead of ἀκροποσθία --- 
i. e. τὸ ἄκρον τῆς πόσθης; cf. the acute remarks of 
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i.136, together with the 
opinion which Winer prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te 
Aufl. s. v.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of noy the prepuce, 
the skin covering the glans penis; a. prop. : Acts xi. 
3; Ro. 1. 25, 26"; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15; Col. 
iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 
ὧν having the foreskin ( Tertull. praeputiatus), uncir- 
cumeised i.e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; ἐν dxp. sc. dv, 1 Co. 
vii. 18; equiv. to the same is δι’ ἀκροβυστίας, Ro. iv. 11; 
ἡ ἐν TH ἀκροβ. πίστις the faith which one has while he is 
uncircumcised, Ro.iv.11 sq. ^b. by meton. of the abstr. 
for the coner., having the foreskin is equiv. to a Gentile : 
Rio. 11. 26 *; iii. 30; iv. 9; Eph. ii. 11; ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβ. 
one uncircumcised by birth ora Gentile, opp. to a Jew who 
shows himself aGentile in character, Ro.ii. 27; evayye- 
λιον τῆς dkpoB. gospel to be preached to the Gentiles, Gal. 





4 ἀλάβαστρον 


it, (7 c. in a transferred sense: 7*dxpo8. τῆς σαρκός 
(opp. to the περιτομή ἀχειροποίητος or regeneration, Col. 
ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted 
in the σάρξ were not yet extinct, Col. ii. 13 (the expression 
is derived from the cireumstance that the foreskin was 
the sign of impurity and alienation from God, [ef. B. D. 
s. v. Circumcision ]).* 

ἀκρο-γωνιαῖος, -aía, -aiov, a word wholly bibl. and ecel., 
[W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], (ἄκρος extreme, and γωνία 
corner, angle), placed at the extreme corner; λίθος cor- 
ner-stone; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept. 
Is. xxviii. 16 for 73D 13. For as the corner-stone 
holds together two walls, so Christ joins together as 
Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who 
were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf. 
Mey. ad loc.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq. 
And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice, 
but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner 
carelessly; so some are built up by the aid of Christ, 
while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8; 
see γωνία, a.* 

ἀκροθίνιον, -ov, τό, (fr. ἄκρος extreme, and Gis, gen.. 
θινός, a heap; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener- 
ally in plur. τὰ ἀκροθίνια the first-fruits, whether of crops 
or of spoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from 
the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods, 
Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35); in the Bible only once: Heb. vii. 
4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thue., Plut., al.) * 

ἄκρος, -a, -ov, (ἀκή point [see ἀκμή), [fr. Hom. down], 
highest, extreme; τὸ ἄκρον the topmost point, the extremity 
[cf. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Heb. xi. 21 [see mpoo- 
κυνέω. a. fin.]; ἄκρα, ἄκρον γῆς, οὐρανοῦ, the farthest 
bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven: 
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; cf. Deut. iv. 82; xxviii. 64; 
Is: xi. 53 ΘῈΣ ΧΗ 2* 

᾿Ακύλας, -ov, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see D. 20 
(18)], 6, Aquila, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert 
to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating 
the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi. 
95 1Co. xvi. 19; 2 Tim. iv. 19; [see B. D:].* 

ἀκυρόω, -@; 1 aor. ἠκύρωσα; (ἄκυρος without author- 
ity, not binding, void; fr. κῦρος force, authority), to 
render void, deprive of force and authority, (opp. to κυρόω 
to confirm, make valid): ἐντολήν, Mt. xv. 6 [R G; 
νόμον, ibid. T WH mrg.]; λόγον [ibid. L Tr WH txt.]; 
Mk. vii. 13, (cf. ἀθετέω) ; διαθήκην, Gal. iii. 17. ([1 Esdr. 
vi. 31]: Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.) * 

ἀκωλύτως, adv. (κωλύω), without hindrance: Acts 
xxviii. 31. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.]* 

ἄκων, ἄκουσα. ükov, (contr. fr. ἀέκων, a priv. and ἕκων 
willing), not of one's own will, unwilling: 1 Co. ix. 17. 
(Very freq. among the Greeks.) * 

[ἅλα, τό, read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13; Mk. ix. 50; Lk. 
xiv. 34; see dAas.] 

ἀλάβαστρον, -ov, τό, (in the plur. in Theocr. 15, 114; 
Anth. Pal. 9, 153 ; in other prof. writ. 6 and ἡ aAáfa- 
otpos; [the older and more correct spelling drops the 
p; cf. Steph. "Thesaur. s. v. 1385 d.; L. and S. s. v. dAd- 


ἀλαζονεία 


Baorpos]), a box made of alabaster, in which unguents are 
preserved, (Plin. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] * unguenta 
optime servantur in alabastris ") ; with the addition of 
μύρου (as in Lcian, dial. mer. 14, 2; [Hdt. 3, 20]) : Lk. 
vii. 37; Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L T adopt τὸν 
dAág., Tr WH [Mey.] τὴν ἀλ. ; Mt. and Lk. do not add 
the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they 
use the word, [ef. Tdf.’s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win. 
RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.* 

ἀλαζονεία, and ἀλαζονία (which spelling, not uncommon 
in later Grk., T WH adopt [see I, ¢]), τας, 7, (fr. adago- 
νεύομαι i. e. to act the ἀλαζών, q. v.) ; a. in prof. writ. 
[fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, some- 
times also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration 
see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7; Aristot. eth. Nic. 
4, 13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk.; [also Trench § xxix.]. b. 
an insolent and empty assurance, which trusts in its own 
power and resources and shamefully despises and violates 
divine laws and human rights: 2 Mace. ix. 8; Sap. v. 8. 
c. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the 
stability of earthly things, [ R. V. vaunting]: Jas. iv. 16 
(where the plur. has reference to the various occasions 
on which this presumption shows itself; [cf. W. $ 27, 3; 
B. 77 (67)]); τοῦ βίου, display in one's style of living, 
[R. V. vainglory], 1 Jn. ii. 16.* 

ἀλαζών, -dvos, 6, ἡ, (ἄλη wandering), [fr. Arstph. on], 
an empty pretender, a boaster : Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2. 
[Trench $ xxix.; Tittmann i. p. 73 sq.]* 

ἀλαλάζω ; [fr. Pind. down]; a. prop. to repeat fre- 
quently the cry ἀλαλά, as soldiers used to do on entering 
battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout: Ps. xlvi. 
(xlvii.) 2; lxv. (Ixvi.) 2; and in prof. writ. c. to 
wail, lament: Mk. v. 38, (^r Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv. 
34)); cf. ὀλολύζω, Lat. ululare. [Syn.seekXatefin.] ἃ. 
to ring loudly, to clang: 1 Co. xiii. 1, [ef. ἐν κυμβάλοις 
ἀλαλαγμοῦ, Ps. cl. 5].* 

ἀλάλητος, -ov, (λαλητός fr. λαλέω ; [cf. W. 23]), not to 
be uttered, not to be expressed in words: στεναγμοί mute 
sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief, 
Ro. viii. 26, [al. ‘which (from their nature) cannot be 
uttered’; cf. Mey. ad loc.; W. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5, 
4 συνίστορα ἀλαλήτων i. e. of love-secrets.) * 

&-AaXos, -ov, (λάλος talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl. 
on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech: Mk. 
vii. 37; πνεῦμα, Mk. ix. 17, 25, because,the defects of 
demoniacs were thought to proceed from the nature and 
peculiarities of the demons by which they were pos- 
sessed. (Sept. Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii) 14; xxx. (xxxi.) 
19; ἀλάλου kai κακοῦ πνεύματος πλήρης, Plut. de orac. 
def. 51 p. 438 b.) * 

ἅλας, -aros, τό, (a later form, found in Sept. and N. T. 
[ Aristot. de mirab. ausc. $138; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3], 
cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220; dat. dare Col. iv. 6), and 
ἅλς, ἁλός, 6, (the classic form [fr. Hom. down]; Sir. 
xxii. 15 (13); xlii. 19; Sap. x. 7; 1 Macc. x. 29, etc. ; 
Mk. ix. 49 ἁλί dat. [Δ WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.], 
and in vs. 60 L T Tr WH ἅλα ace. [yet without the 











5 


ἀλεκτοροφωνία 


in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. ν. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see 
his note)] (similar to γάλα, gen. γάλατος, a form noted 
by certain grammarians, see [WH. App. p. 158 4 
Kihner i. 353 sq.; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir. 
(xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt; ae 
Salt with which food is seasoned and sacrifices are 
sprinkled: Mk. ix.49 RG; cf. ἁλίζω. 2. ἅλας τῆς γῆς: 
those kinds of saline matter used to fertilize arable 
land, Mt. ν. 13*; here salt as a condiment cannot be 
understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix. 
23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); ef. Grohmann in Küuf- 
fer’s Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is, 
‘It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened 
to arable land) the influences required for a life of devo- 
tion to God.’ In the statement immediately following, 
ἐὰν δὲ ἅλας krX., the comparison seems to be drawn from 
salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended; 
[but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout 
the pass., and take γῆ to denote the mass of mankind, 
v. 4 b. and ef. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In Mk. 
ix. 50° and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health 
and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue ; 
[cf. Mey. on the former pass.]. S. Salt is a symbol 
of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 *, because it protects food 
from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged.  Ac- 
cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the 
Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to par- 
take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz; 
[BB.DD. s. v. Salt]; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4. 
Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech: Col. iv. 6 [where 
see Bp. Lghtft.].* 

"Alaecca: Acts xxvii. 8; cf. Aacaia. 

[dXecós, 6, T WH uniformly for ἁλιεύς, see Tdf.’s note 
on Mk. i. 16 and N. T. ed. 7, Proles. p. 1.; esp. ed. 8, 
Proleg. p. 82 sq.; WH. App. p. 151.] 

ἀλείφω: impf. ἤλειῴφον; 1 aor. jAewra; 1 aor. mid. 
impv. ἄλειψαι: [allied with λίπτος grease; ef. Curtius 
$340; Vanicek p. 811; Peile p. 407; fr. Hom. down]; 
to anoint: twa or ti, Mk. xvi. 1; Jn. xii. 3; τινά or τί 
τιν: [W. 227 (213)], as ἐλαίῳ, Lk. vii. 46°; Mk. vi. 13; 
Jas. v. 14; μύρῳ, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46 ^; Mid.: 
Mt. vi. 17 (lit. ‘anoint for thyself thy head, unge tibi 
caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf. 
Win. RWB. s. v. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v. 
Anoint, ete. SYN. : * dAe(ewisthe mundane and profane, 
χρίειν the sacred and religious, word." Trench ἃ xxxviii. 
Comp. : ἐξεαλείφω ].* 

ἀλεκτοροφωνία, -as, 7, (ἀλέκτωρ and φωνή [W. 25]), 
the crowing of a cock, cock-crowing: Aesop. fab. 79 [44]. 
Used of the third watch of the night: Mk. xiii. 35; in 
this passage the watches are enumerated into which the 
Jews, following the Roman method, divided the night; 
[cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Nachtwachen; B. D. s. v. Watches 
of Night; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing ; Wetst. on 
Mt. xiv. 25; Wieseler, Chron. Syn. p. 406 note]. (For 
writ. who use this word see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and 
add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 83, 24; 


see s. 


art.] with nom. τὸ ἅλας), finally, nom. and ace. ἅλα Tdf. | Orig. i. 825 b.; Constt. Ap. 5, 18; 5, 19; 8, 34].) * 


ἀλέκτωρ 


ἀλέκτωρ, -opos, ὅ, a cock, (Lat. gallus gallinaceus) : Mt. 
xxvi. 34, 74 sq.; Mk. xiv. 30, 68 [Lehm. br.], 72; Lk. xxii. 
34, 60 sq.; Jn. xiii. 38; xviii. 27. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
229; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 307; W. 23; see also 
BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 221 sq. ; 
esp. Egli, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Theol., 1879 p. 517 sqq. ].* 

᾿Αλεξανδρεύς, -έως, 6, an Alexandrian, a native or a resi- 
dent of Alexandria (a celebrated city of Egypt): Acts 
vi.9; xviii. 24. [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.)]* 

᾿Αλεξανδρινός [cf. Tdf.’s note on Acts xxvii. 6; G L Tr 
Cobet, al. -8pivos; Chandler $ 397 note], τή, -óv, Alexan- 
drian: Acts xxvii. 6; xxviii. 11. [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)] * 

᾿Αλέξανδρος [i. e. defender of men], -ov, 6, Alexander; 
1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross 
of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kin- 
dred of the high priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain 
Jew: Aets xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an op- 
ponent of the apostle Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 
14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the 
same man; cf. e. g. Ellic. on the former J.* 

ἄλευρον, -ov, τό, (ἀλεύω to grind), wheaten flour, meal: 
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. 
σίτου, ἄλφιτα δὲ τῶν κριθῶν. 
seph., al.) * 

ἀλήθεια, -as, ἡ, (ἀληθής), [fr. Hom. down], verity, truth. 
I. objectively; 1. univ. what is true in any matter 
under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious, 
false): Jas. iii. 14; ἀλήθειαν λέγειν, ἐρεῖν, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; 
xvi. 7; Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. xii. 6; 1 Tim. ii. 7; εἶπεν αὐτῷ 
πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν, everything as it really was, Mk. v. 
33, (so in classics); μαρτυρεῖν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ to testify ac- 
cording to the true state of the case, Ain ye 59.» 10 8 
broader sense, λαλεῖν ἀλήθειαν to speak always according 
to truth, Eph. iv. 25; [ἀληθείας ῥήματα ἀποφθέγγομαι. as 
opp. to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 25]; ἀλήθεια 
ἐγένετο, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14. 
ἐν ἀληθείᾳ in truth, truly, as the case is, according to 
fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the 
divine nature); 2 Co. vii. 14; Col. i. 6; ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας 
a. truly, in truth, according to truth: Mk. xii. 32; Lk. 
iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i.§ 1). b. of 
a truth, in reality, in fact, certainly: Mk. xii. 14; Lk. 
xx. 21; [xxii. 59]; Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Rom. 
1Cor. 23, 5 and 47, 3) ; [cf. W. $51, 2f.; B. 336 (289)]; 
xar ἀλήθειαν in accordance with fact, i. e. (acc. to the 
context) justly, without partiality: Ro. ii. 2; etre zpo- 
pacer, etre ἀληθείᾳ, Phil. i. 18; ἐν ἔργῳ x. ἀληθείᾳ, 
1 Jn. iii. 18 [Rec. om. ἐν; so Eph. iv. 21 WH mre. ]. 
2. In reference to religion, the word denotes what is 
true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man, 
(‘moral and religious truth’); and that ^ a. with the 
ereatest latitude, in the sceptical question τί ἐστιν ἀλή- 
Gera, Jn. xviii. 38 ; b. the true notions of God which 
are open to human reason without his supernatural in- 
tervention: Ro. i. 18; also ἡ ἀλήθεια θεοῦ the truth of 
which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, cf. 19, (ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, Evang. Nicod. c. 5, 2; accordingly it is not, as 
many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God [yet 


Hesych. ἄλευρα κυρίως τὰ τοῦ 


(Hdt., Xen., Plat. Jo- 


26 





ἀληθεύω 


see Mey. ad loc.]) ; truth, the embodiment of which the 
Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 20. — c. the truth, 
as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and 
the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respect- 
ing the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions 
of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and 
to the corrupt opinions and precepts of false teachers 
even among Christians: ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ evayy. the truth 
which is the gospel or which the gospel presents, Gal. ii. 
5, 14, [ef. W. § 34, 3 a.]: and absol. ἡ ἀλήθεια and 
ἀλήθεια: Jn. i. 14, 17; viii. 32, 40; [xvi. 13]; xvii. 19; 
1 Jn. i. 8; ii. 4, 21; 2Jn. 1-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Rec.); v. 7; 
2 (Co; civ. 2 rm; 8.) Eph. av. 24592 ΤῊ. 11. 10:22:91 
Tim. ii. 7 (ἐν πίστει x. ἀληθείᾳ in faith and truth, of 
which I became a partaker through faith); iii. 15; iv. 
8): Vis Ds a9 Tom 2185 21:285 ἂν, UB Tat. a.) 14; (9 Pet. 
i. 12; [3 Jn. 8, 12]; ὁ λόγος τῆς ἀληθείας, Col. i. 5; Eph. 
i.13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; λόγος ἀληθείας, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 
18; ὁδὸς τῆς ad. 2 Pet. ii. 2; πίστις ἀληθείας, 2 Th. ii. 
13 [W. 186 (175)]; ὑπακοὴ τῆς ad. 1 Pet. i. 22; ἐπίγνω- 
cis τῆς GA. Heb. x. 26; 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; iii. 
7; [Tit. i. 1]; πνεῦμα τῆς aA. the Spirit (of God) which 
is truth (1 Jn. v. 6) and imbues men with the knowledge 
of the truth, Jn. xiv. 17 ; (xvi. 13]; xv. 26; 1 Jn. iv. 6; 
ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια T am he in whom the truth is summed 
up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6 ; ἡ ἀλήθειά σου [Rec.] 
(i. e. θεοῦ) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from 
thee, Jn. xvii. 17; [ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοί i. e. 
controls, actuates, me, 2 Co. xi. 10]; εἶναι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 
to be eager to know the truth, Jn. xviii. 37 (see ἐκ, IT. 7, 
and εἰμί, V. 3 d.); to proceed from the truth, 1 Jn. ii. 21; 
to be prompted and controlled by the truth, 1 Jn.iii. 19; 
μαρτυρεῖν τῇ ἀληθ. to give testimony in favor of the 
truth in order to establish its authority among men, Jn. 
xviii. 37; ἀλήθειαν ποιεῖν to exemplify truth in the life, 
to express the form of truth in one's habits of thought 
and modes of living, Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn. i. 6, (Tob. xiii. 6; 
iv. 6; ef. Neh. ix. 33; ὁδὸν ἀληθείας αἱρετίζεσθαι, Ps. 
exviii. (exix.) 30); so also περιπατεῖν ἐν τῇ ad. 2 Jn. 4; 
3 Jn. 3 sq.; ἀπειθεῖν τῇ aX. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8; 
so also πλανηθῆναι ἀπὸ τῆς ad. Jas. v. 19. II. sub- 
jectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor 
of mind which is free from affectation, pretence, simula- 
tion, falsehood, deceit: Jn. viii. 44; sincerity of mind 
and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony 
with divine truth: 1 Co. v. 8; xiii. 6 (opp. to ἀδικία) ; 
Eph. iv. 21 [see I. 1 b. above]; v. 9; [vi. 14]; σοῦ ἡ 
ἀλήθεια the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of 
thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3; 
ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ θεοῦ which belongs to God, i. 6. his holi- 
ness [but cf. περισσεύω, 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7; spec. ve- 
racity (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8; ἐν 
ἀληθείᾳ sincerely and truthfully, 2 Jn. 1; 3 Jn. 1. The 
word is not found in Rev. ([nor in 1 Thess., Philem., 
Jude]). Cf. Hilemann, * Bibelstudien ", (Lpz. 1859) 1te 
Abth. p. 8sqq.; [ Wendtin Stud. u. Krit., 1883, p. 511 sqq.]* 

ἀληθεύω ; in prof. writ. ([ Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot., 
al) to speak the truth; a. to teach the truth: τινί 


ἀληθής 


Gal. iv.16. ^ b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) : 
Eph. iv. 15. [R. V. mrg. in both pass. to deal truly.}* 

ἀληθής, -és. (a priv. and λήθω, λαθεῖν [AavOavw], τὸ 
λῆθος, --- cf. ἀμαθής ; lit. not hidden, unconcealed), [fr. 
Hom. down]; I, true: Jn. iv. 18; x. 41; xix. 35; 
1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp. 
to ὅραμα); Phil. iv. 8; μαρτυρία, Jn. v. 31 sq.; viii. 
13 sq. 17; xxi. 24; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. i. 13; κρίσις, just, 
Jn. viii. 16 (L T Tr WH ἀληθινή) ; παροιμία, 2 Pet. ii. 
22: χάρις, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12. 
2. loving the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii. 
16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to 
πλάνος): of God, Jn. iii. 33; viii. 26; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to 
ψεύστης). 3. i. q. ἀληθινός, 1: Jn. vi. 55 (L T Tr 
WH;; for Rec. ἀληθῶς), as in Sap. xii. 27, where ἀληθὴς 
θεός is contrasted with obs ἐδόκουν θεούς. Cf. Riickert, 
Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this 
word and the next, see Trench $ viii.]* 

ἀληθινός, -7, -óv, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down: 
[twenty-three times in Jn.’s writ.; only five (acc. to 
Lehm. six) times in the rest of the N. 1.7); 1. “that 
which has not only the name and semblance, but the real 
nature corresponding to the name” (Tittmann p. 155; 
[* particularly applied to express that which is all that it 
pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adul- 
terated metal” Donaldson, New Crat. § 258; see, at 
length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to 
the idea signified by the name, real and true, genuine; 
a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary, 
simulated, pretended: θεός (now "078, 2 (Bre xy- 3), 
1 Th.i.9; Heb. ix. 14 Lchm.; Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. v. 20. 
(ἀληθινοὶ φίλοι. Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) 
trasts realities with their semblances: σκηνή, Heb. viii. 
2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (ὁ ἵππος contrasted 
with 6 ἐν τῇ εἰκόνι, Ael. v. ἢ. 2, 3.) c. opp. to what is 
imperfect, defective, frail, uncertain: Jn. iv. 23, 37; vii. 
28; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah, 
Rev. iii. 7; φῶς, Jn. i. 9; 1 Jn. ii. 8; κρίσις, Jn. viii. 16 
(L T Tr WH; Is.lix. 4); κρίσεις, Rev. xvi. 7; xix. 2; 
ἄρτος, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn. 
vi. 32; ἄμπελος, Jn. xv. 1; μαρτυρία, Jn. xix. 35; μάρτυς. 
Rev. ii. 14; δεσπότης, Rev. vi. 10; ὁδοί, Rev. xv. 3; 
coupled with πιστός, Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11; substantively, 
τὸ ἀληθινόν the genuine, real good, opp. to external 
riches, Lk. xvi. 11, ([ots μὲν yap ἀληθινὸς πλοῦτος ἐν 
οὐρανῷ, Philo de praem. et poen. $ 17, p. 425 ed. 
Mang.; cf. Wetst. on Lk. l. c.]; ἀθληταί, Polyb. 1, 6, 6). 
2. i. q. ἀληθής, true, veracious, sincere, (often so in 
Sept.): καρδία, Heb. x. 22 (per ἀληθείας ἐν καρδίᾳ ἀλη- 
θινῇ, Is. xxxviii. 3); λόγοι, Rev. xxi. 5; xxii. 6, (Plutarch, 
apophth. p.184 e.). [Cf. Cremer 4te Aufl. s. v. ἀλήθεια. 

ἀλήθω ; (a com. Grk. form for the Attic ἀλέω, cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41; Lk. xvii. 
35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves 
to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5), 
who were called by the Greeks γυναῖκες ἀλετρίδες (Hom. 
Od. 20, 105); [ef. B. D. s. v. Mill].* 


b. it con- | 
| Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex. 


27 : 


| 





ἀλλά 


reality; most certainly: Jn.i.47 (48) ; iv. 42; vi. 14, 55 
Rec.; vii. 26, 40; viii. 31; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. 33; xxvi. 
73; [Mk. xiv. 70; Mt.] xxvii. 54; [Mk. xv. 39]; Lk. 
ix. 27; xii. 44; xxi. 8; Acts xii. 11; 1 'Th.ii. 13; 1 Jn. 
n5: 

ἁλιεύς, -έως, 6, (GAs, ἁλός, the sea), [fr. Hom.-down]; 
a. fisherman, fisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq.; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk. 
v. 2, — in all which pass. T and WH have ἁλεεῖς fr. the 
form ἁλεεύς, q. v.* 

ἁλιεύω ; (ἁλιεύς) ; to fish: Jn. xxi. 3. [Philo, Plut.]* 

ἁλίζω : (GAs, ἁλός, salt); to salt, season with salt, sprin- 
kle with salt; only the fut. pass. is found in the N. T.: 
ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται; by what means can its saltness be 
restored? Mt. v.13; θυσία ἁλὶ ἁλισθήσεται, the sacrifice 
is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to 
God, Mk. ix. 49 [R GL Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13; Ezek. 
xliii. 24; Joseph. antt. 3, 9, 1; cf. Knobel on Lev. 
p.369 sq.; Win. RWEB. s. v. Salz; [BB.DD. s. v. Salt]); 
πᾶς πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται, every true Christian is rendered 
ripe for a holy and happy association with God in his 
kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afflictions and 
trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge 
and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this ex- 
tremely diffieult passage is explained differently by 
others; [cf. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history 
of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [cf. 
Soph. Lex.]; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] áAc- 
σθητε ἐν Χριστῷ, tva μὴ διαφθαρῇ τις ἐν ὑμῖν.) [Cowr.: 
συν-αλίζω, ---- but see the word. ]* 

ἀλίσγημα, -ros, τό, (ἀλισγέω to pollute, which occurs 
Sir. xl. 29; Dan. i. 8; Mal. i. 7,12; akin to ἀλίνω, ἀλινέω 
to besmear [Lat. linere, cf. Lob. Pathol. Element. p. 21; 


p. 145]), pollution, contamination: Acts xv. 20 (τοῦ 
ἀπέχεσθαι krÀ. to beware of pollution from the use 
of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, cf. vs. 29). 
Neither ἀλισγέω nor ἀλίσγημα occurs in Grk. writ.* 
ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, 
neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced 
ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, 
other things sc. than those just mentioned. It differs 
from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441 
sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words 
that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con- 
cessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; 
Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 
48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; 
Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection : 
Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 
3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; 
ag VBS 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. 
xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, 
nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. 
with καί added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21; xxiv. 22. ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, 
but... not even (Germ. ja nicht einmal): Lk. xxiii. 15; 
Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. οὔτε; cf. Fritzsche on 
Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardinal 


ἀληθῶς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, in | matter, especially before imperatives: Mt. ix. 18; Mk. 


ἀλλά 


22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7; Jn. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts ix. 

6 [not Rec.]; x. 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti- 
cally: ἀλλ᾽ iva, i. e. ἀλλὰ τοῦτο γέγονεν. tva, Mk. xiv. 49 ; 
Jn. xiü. 18; xv. 2551 Jn- n- 19: 8. after a condi- 
tional or concessive protasis it signifies, at the begin- 
ning of the apodosis, yet [cf. W. 442 (411)]: after xai 
ei, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [RG]; Mk. xiv. 29 R GL, (2 Mace. 
viii. 15) ; after εἰ καί, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co. 
iv. 16; v. 16; xi. 6; Col. ii. 5, (2 Macc. vi. 26); after 
ei, 1 Co. ix. 2; Ro. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after ἐᾶν, 
1 Co. iv. 15; after εἴπερ. 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. WH br. 
ἀλλ᾽]; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq.; Kühner ii. 
p. 827, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding uév: Mk. 
ix. 13 [T om. Tr br. μέν]; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20; 
ToO IN: 10. it is joined to other particles; 
ἀλλά ye [ Grsb. ἀλλάγε] (twice in the N. T.): yet at least, 
1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely (aber freilich), Lk. xxiv. 21 [L 'T 
Tr WH add καί yea and etc.], cf. Bornemann ad loc. 
In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are 
not combined without the interposition of the most 
emphatie word between them; cf. Bornemann l c.; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 sq. 24 sq.; Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 
101; [W. 444 (413)]. ἀλλ᾽ 7 (arising from the blending 
of the two statements οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ and οὐδὲν ἄλλο, ἀλλά) 
save only, except: 1 Co. ii. 5 (where ἀλλ᾽ ἢ omitted 
by G L T Tr WH is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir. 
xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after ἄλλα itself, 2 Co. i. 13 
[here Lehm. br. ἀλλ᾽ before 7]; cf. Klotz τι. s. ii. 31 sqq. ; 
Kühner ii. p. 824 sq. $ 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374 
(320)]. ἀλλ᾽ οὐ but not, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 (if punctu- 
ated παρεπίκραναν ; ἀλλ᾽ ov) for ‘but why do I ask? did 
not all,’ ete.; cf. Bleek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐχί will he not rather? Lk. xvii. 8. II. preceded by 
a negation: but (Lat. sed, Germ. sondern); 1. οὐκ 
(μή)... ἀλλά: Mt. xix. 11; Mk. v. 39; Jn. vii. 16; 
1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [ovdév]; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tim. v. 
23 [μηκέτι], ete. By a rhetorical construction οὐκ 
- - ἀλλά sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much 
.as: Mk. ix. 37 (οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστεί- 
λαντά pe); Mt. x. 20; Jn. xii. 44; Acts v. 4; 1 Co. xv. 
10; 1 Th. iv. 8; by this form of speech the emphasis is 
laid on the second member; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 
773 sqq.; W. $ δῦ, 8 b.; [B. 356 (306)]. οὐ μόνον... 
ἀλλὰ καί not only... but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [ἀλλ᾽ 
ἵνα καί, etc.]; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When καί is 
omitted (as in the Lat. non solum... sed), the grada- 
tion is strengthened: Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. adds xat]; 
1 Jn. v. 6; ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μᾶλλον, Phil. ii. 12; cf. Fritzsche 
l c. p. 786 sqq.; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)]. 
2. The negation to which ἀλλά pertains is suppressed, 
but can easily be supplied upon refleetion [W. 442 
(412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in each passage, 
before ἀλλά supply * you will say you did not go out into 
the wilderness for this purpose’); Acts xix. 2 (we have 
not received the Holy Spirit, but . . .); Gal. ii. 3 (they 
said not one word in opposition to me, but . . .) ; 2 Co. 
vii. 11 (where before ἀλλά, repeated six times by ana- 
phora, supply οὐ μόνον with the accus. of the preceding 


112702; 


28 














ἅλλομαι 


word). It is used in answers to questions having the 
force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts 
xv. 11; 1 Co. x. 20. ἀλλὰ tva [or ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα, cf. W. 40; 
B. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297); 
620 (576); Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.]: Jn. i. 8 (sup- 
ply ἀλλὰ ἦλθεν, ἵνα) ; ix. 3 (ἀλλὰ τυφλὸς ἐγένετο [or ἐγεν- 
νήθη ], tva) ; Mk. iv. 22 (ἀλλὰ τοιοῦτο ἐγένετυ, ἵνα). [The 
best Mss. seem to elide the final a before nouns, but 
not before verbs” Scrivener, Plain Introduction, ete., 
p. 14; but see Dr. Gregory's full exhibition of the facts 
in Tdf: Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that 
“elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a, 
almost always before v, often before e and ἢ, rarely 
before o and c, never before x; and it should be noticed 
that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words 
ἐν, tva, ὅτι, ov, ὡς, prefer the form ἀλλ᾽ " ; see also WH. 
App. p.146. Cf. W. $5, 1a.; B. p. 10.] 

ἀλλάσσω : fut. ἀλλάξω; 1 aor. jAAafa; 2 fut. pass. 
ἀλλαγήσομαι ; (ἄλλος) : [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to change: 
to eause one thing to cease and another to take its 
place, rà ἔθη, Acts vi. 14; τὴν φωνήν to vary the voice, 
i e. to speak in a different manner according to the 
different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and 
form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now 
severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad 
loc.]. to exchange one thing for another: τὶ & τινι, 
Ro. i. 23 (3 ὙΠ Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; the Greeks say ἀλ- 
Adooe τί τινος [ef. W. 206 (194), 388 (363); Vaughan 
on Rom.le.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq.; Heb. i. 
12. [Cowr.: dz-, Ot-, kar-, ἀπο-κατ-, uer-, συν-αλλάσσω.} * 

ἀλλαχόθεν, adv., from another place: Jn. x. 1 (i. q. 
ἄλλοθεν [which the grammarians prefer, Thom. Mag. 
ed. Ritschl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 11]; cf. 
ἑκασταχόθεν, πανταχόθεν). [(Antiph., al.) ]* 

ἀλλαχοῦ, adv., i. q. ἄλλοθι, elsewhere, in another place: 
Mk.i.38 (T Tr txt. WH Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Borne- 
mann in the Stud. τι. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph., 
Xen., al.; see Thom. M. and Moer. as in the preced. 
word. | * 

ἀλληγορέω, -@: [pres. pass. ptep. adAryopotpevos ]; i. e. 
ἄλλο μὲν ἀγορεύω, ἄλλο δὲ νοέω, “aliud verbis, aliud 
sensu ostendo” (Quint. instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle- 
gorically or in a figure: Gal. iv. 24. (Philo, Joseph., 
Plut., and gram. writ.; [cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. e.].) * 

ἀλληλούϊα, [WH ᾿Αλλ., see their Intr. § 408], Hebr. 
man, praise ye the Lord, Hallelujah: Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq. 
6. [Sept. Pss. passim ; Tob. xiii. 18; 3 Mace. vii. 1351) 

ἀλλήλων, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat. 
τοις. -als, τοῖς 5 ACC. τοὺς; -as, -a, one another ; reciprocally, 
mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25; 
Ro. i. 12; Jas: v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Hom. 
down.] 

ἀλλογενής, -és, (ἄλλος and γένος), sprung from another 
race, a. foreigner, alien: Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen. 
xvii. 27; Ex. xii. 43, etc.], but nowhere in prof. writ.)* 

ἄλλομαι; impf. ἡλλόμην ; aor. ἡλάμην and ἡλόμην (Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to 


| leap (Lat. salio): Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. ἥλλετο ; 


ἄλλος 


GL T Tr WH 7Aaro); to spring up, gush up, of water, 
Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. salire, Verg. ecl. 5, 47; Suet. 
Oetav. 82). [Cowr.: ἐξ-, ἐφ-ἀλλομαι. * : 

ἄλλος, -7, -o, [cf. Lat. alius, Germ. alles, Eng. else; fr. 
Hom. down], another, other; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 
42; xx. 3; Mk. vi. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (ἄλλοι 
μὲν ἄλλο), and often. b. as an adj.: Mt. ii. 12; iv. 
21; Jn. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 29 (ἄλλη συνείδησις i. 6. ἡ συν. 
ἄλλου τινός). c. with the art.: ὁ ἄλλος the other (of 
two), Mt. v. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)]; 
οἱ ἄλλοι all others, the remainder, the rest: Jn. xxi. 8; 
1 Co. xiv. 29. í 

[Sxs. ἄλλος, ἕτερος: GA. as compared with &r. denotes 
numerical in distinction from qualitative difference; &A. adds 
(‘one besides’), ἔτ. distinguishes (‘one of two’); every ér. 
is an ἄλ., but not every &A. is a ἕτ. ; GA. generally ‘ denotes 
simply distinction of individuals, ἕτερος involves the sec- 
ondary idea of difference of kind’; e.g. 2 Co. xi. 4; Gal. i. 
6, 7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass.; Trench 
$ xev.] 

ἀλλοτριο-επίσκοπος (L T Tr WH ἀλλοτρι επ.), -ov, 6, 
(ἀλλότριος and ἐπίσκοπος), one who takes the supervision 
of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a 
meddler in other men’s matters ] : 1 Pet. iv. 15 (the writer 
seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate 
zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether 
publie or private, civil or sacred — in order to make them 
conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (cf. 
Einl. ins N. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat. 
delator.] ‘The word is found again only in Dion. Areop. 
ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another's oflice), 
and [Germ. of Const. ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteler. 
Eccl. Graec. Mon. ii. 481 b.; [cf. W. 25, 99 (94)].* 

ἀλλότριος, -a, -ov; 1. belonging to another (opp. to 
ἴδιος), not one’s own: Heb. ix. 25; Ro. xiv. 4; xv. 20; 
2 Co. x. 15 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk. 
xvi. 12 (opp. to τὸ ὑμέτερον). 2. foreign, strange : 
γῆ: Acts vii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; not of one's own family, 
alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. Il. 
5, 214; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).* 

ἀλλόφυλος, -ov, (ἄλλος, and φῦλον race), foreign, (in 
prof. auth. fr. [ AeschyL,] Thuc. down); when used in 
Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen- 
tile, [A. V. one of another nation]: Acts x. 28. (Philo, 
Joseph.)* 

ἄλλως, adv., (ἄλλος), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise: 
1 Tim. v. 25 (τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, which are of a different 
sort i. e. which are not καλὰ ἔργα, [al. which are not 
πρόδηλα). 

ἀλοάω, -ῶ; (connected with ἡ ἅλως or ἡ ἀλωή, the 
floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out); to 
thresh, (Ammon. τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ ἅλῳ πατεῖν καὶ τρίβειν τὰς 
στάχυας): 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv. 
4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.* 

G-hoyos, -ov, (λόγος reason) ; 1. destitute of reason, 
brute: ζῶα, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap. 
xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason, 
absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11, 1; Thue. 6, 85; 
often in Plat., Isocr., al.).* 


29 


ἀλώπηξ 


ἀλόη [on the accent see Chandler § 1491, -ης, 7, (com- 
monly ξυλαλόη, ἀγάλλοχον), Plut., the aloe, aloes: Jn. 
xix. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in 
eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and 
bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in 
embalming the dead (as, acc. to Hdt., the Egyptians 
did), Hebr.'p"5w and nionw [see Mühlau and Volck 
s. vv.], Num. xxiv. 6; Ps. xlv. 9; Prov. vii. 17; Cant. 
iv. 14. Arab. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloé [Low $ 235; BB.DD].* 

GAs, ἁλός, 6, see ἅλας. 

ἁλυκός, -7, -óv, salt (i. q. GApupds): Jas. iii. 12. 
([Hippoer., Arstph.,] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e.; Aristot., 
Theophr., al.) * 

ἄλυπος, -ov, (λύπη), free from pain or grief: Phil. ii. 28. 
(Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Plat. down.)* 

ἄλυσις, or as it is com. written ἅλυσις [see WH. App. 
p- 144], -ews, ἡ, (fr. a priv. and Avo, because a chain is 
ἄλυτος i. e. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w. 
εἰλέω to restrain, ἁλίζω to collect, crowd; Curtius $ 660; 
Vanicek p: 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or 
any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound: Mk. v. 3; Acts 
xxi 33; xxviii. 20; Rev. xx. 1; ἐν ἁλύσει in chains, a 
prisoner, Eph. vi. 20; οὐκ ἐπαισχύνθη τὴν ad. pov he was 
not ashamed of my bonds i.e. did not desert me be- 
cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec. used of a 
manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are 
bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Mk. u. i.; per contra 
esp. Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. p. 8]: Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29]; 
Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hdt. down.)* 

ἀλυσιτελής, -és, (λυσιτελής, see λυσιτελέω), unprofit- 
able, (Xen. vectig. 4, 6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious : 
Heb. xiii. 17. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)* 

ἄλφα, τό, indecl.: Rev.i.8; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. See A. 

᾿Αλφαῖος [WH ᾿Αλῴφ.. see their Intr. § 408], -atov, 6, 
can, cf. "1| ᾿Αγγαῖος, Hag. i. 1), Alpheus or Alpheus; 
1. the father of Levi the publican: Mk. ii. 14, see Λευΐ, 
4. 2. the father of James the less, so called, one of 
the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; 
Actsi.13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn. 
xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called KAozas 
after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. "55n ace. 
to which ΤΊ was changed into x, as MDD φασέκ, 2 Chr. 
xxx. 1. ΟἿ. Ἰάκωβος, 2; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Alpheus; 
also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp. 
92,103); Wetzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 1883, p. 620 Bb by 

ἅλων, -avos, 7, (in Sept. also ὁ, cf. Ruth iii. 2; Job 
xxxix. 12), i. q. ἡ ἅλως. gen. ἅλω, a ground-plot or thresh- 
ing-floor, i. e. a place in the field itself, made hard after 
the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed 
out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass. by 
meton. of the container for the thing contained, ἅλων is 
the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed 
out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr. 
+93, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place 
áXGva); [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by 
Aristot. de vent. 3, Opp. ii. 973*, 14].* 

ἀλώπηξ, -exos, j, a for: Mt. vii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. 


ἅλωσις 


Metaph. a sly and crafty man: Lk. xiii. 32; (in the 
same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol. 
30, 2; Pind. Pyth. 2, 141; Plut. Sulla 28, 5).* 

ἅλωσις, -ews, ἡ, (ἁλόω, ἁλίσκομαι to be caught), a catch- 
ing, capture: 2 Pet. ij. 12 els ἅλωσιν to be taken, [some 
would here take the word actively: to take]. (Fr. 
Pind. and Hdt. down.) * : 

ἅμα [Skr. sa, sama; Eng. same; Lat. simul; Germ. 
sammt, ete.; Curtius § 449; Vanicek p. 972. Fr. Hom. 
down]; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together: 
Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 3; 1 Tim. v. 13; 
Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. iii. 12. 2. 
prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat.: Mt. xiii. 
29. ἅμα πρωΐ early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk. 
writ. ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ, ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and 
v. 10, where ἅμα is foll. by σύν, ἅμα is an adv. (at the 
same time) and must be joined to the verb.* 

[Syn. ἅμα, ὁμοῦ: the distinction given by Ammonius 
(de diff. voc. s. v.) et al., that ἅμα is temporal, ὁμοῦ local, 
seems to hold in the main; yet see Ro. iii. 12, and cf. Hesych. 
s. v.] 

ἀμαθής, -és, Zen. -oüs, (μανθάνω, whence ἔμαθον, τὸ μάθος, 
ef. ἀληθής, unlearned, ignorant: 2 Pet. iii.16. (In Grk. 
writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

ἀμαράντινος, -ov, (fr. dudpavros, as pddwos made of 
roses, fr. ῥόδον a rose; cf. ἀκάνθινος), composed of ama- 
ranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or 
fades, and when plucked off revives if moistened with 
water; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immor- 
tality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.]; Plin. h. n. 21 
(15), 23 [al. 47]): στέφανος, 1 Pet. v. 4. (Found besides 
only in Philostr. her. 19, p. 741; [and (conjecturally) in 
Boeckh, Corp.Inserr.155, 39, c. B. C. 340].) * 

ἀμάραντος, -ov, (fr. papaivw; cf. ἀμίαντος, ἄφαντος, etc.), 
not fading away, unfading, perennial; Vulg. immarcesci- 
bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [ Diosc. 4, 57, al.]; 
see dpapávrwos): 1 Pet. i.4. Found elsewhere only in 
Sap. vi 13; [ζωὴ duap. Sibyll. 8, 411; Boeckh, Corp. 
Inserr. ii. p. 1124, no. 2942 c, 4; Leian. Dom. c. 9].* 

ἁμαρτάνω ; fut. ἁμαρτήσω (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15; 
in the latter pass. L'T Tr WH. give ἁμαρτήσωμεν for 
RG ἁμαρτήσομεν), in class. Grk. ἁμαρτήσομαι; 1 aor. 
(later) ἡμάρτησα, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (cf. W. 
82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ἥμαρτον; pf. ἡμάρτηκα; 
(ace. to a conjecture of Bitm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv. 
and μείρω, μείρομαι, μέρος, prop. to be without a share in, 
sc. the mark); prop. to miss the mark, (Hom. Il. 8, 311, 
etc.; with gen. of the thing missed, Hom. Il. 10, 372; 
4, 491; τοῦ σκοποῦ, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.; τῆς ὁδοῦ, 
Arstph. Plut. 961, al.) ; then to err, be mistaken; lastly 
to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor, 
to door go wrong. [ Even the Sept., although the Hebr. 
80M also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve 
ἅμαρτ. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the 
Hebr. signifies to miss one’s aim in the literal sense, 
they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in par- 
ticular ἐξαμαρτάνειν, Judg. xx. 16.” Zezschwitz, Profan- 
graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the N. T. 


30 








ἁμαρτία 


to wander from the law of God, violate God’s law, sin; 
a. absol: Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. v. 14; viii. 11; ix. 2 sq.; 
WON ΤΟΣ τ» 11148518:80:5 Ve 185: ΒΟ: τῷ. 121} 1}. 25 
v. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 84; Eph. 
ἦν. 26 1. πὶ: νὸ »ὺ. lit. aie 1d dele DOLOS NOD 
(ἑκουσίως) ; [2 Pet. ii. 4]; of the violation of civil laws, 
which Christians regard as also the transgression of divine 
law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. ἁμαρτάνειν ἁμαρτίαν to commit 
(lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, (μεγάλην ἁμαρτίαν, Ex. xxxii. 
30 sq. Hebr. wor) NOn; αἰσχρὰν dy. Soph. Phil. 1249; 
μεγάλα ἁμαρτήματα ἁμαρτάνειν, Plat. Phaedo p.113 e.) ; cf. 
ἀγαπάω, sub fin. ἁμαρτάνειν ets τινα [ B. 173 (150); W. 233 
(219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LT WH om. Tr mrg. br. eis σέ), 
21; Lk. xv. 18, 21; xvii. 8 Rec., 4; 1 Co. viii. 12; τὶ εἰς 
Καίσαρα, Acts xxv. 8; eis τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα, 1 Co. vi. 18, (εἰς 
αὑτούς re καὶ εἰς ἄλλους, Plat. rep. 3, p. 396 a.; εἰς τὸ 
θεῖον, Plat. Phaedr. p. 242 c.; eis θεούς, Xen. IIell. 1, 7, 
19, ete.; [cf. du. κυρίῳ θεῷ, Dar. i. 13; ii. 5]) ; Hebraisti- 
cally, ἐνώπιόν (335) τινος [B. § 146, 1] in the presence of, 
before any one, the one wronged by the sinful aet being, 
as it were, present and looking on: Lk. xv. 18, 21, (18. 
vii. 6; Tob. iii. 3, etc. ; [ef. ἔναντι κυρίου, Bar. i. 17]). 
[For reff. see ἁμαρτία. CoMr.: zpo-apaprávo. ] * 
ἁμάρτημα, ros, τό, (fr. ἁμαρτέω i. q- ἁμαρτάνω, cf. adi- 
κημα, ἀλίσγημα), a sin, evil deed, [* Differunt ἡ ἁμαρτία et 
τὸ ἁμάρτημα ut Latinorum peccat us et peecat um. Nam 
τὸ ἁμάρτημα et peccatum proprie malum facinus indi- 
cant; contra ἡ ἁμαρτία et peccatus primum peccationem, 
τὸ peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentem, valent." 
Fritzsche ; see ἁμαρτία, fin. ; cf. also Trench § Ixvi.]: Mk. 
iii. 28, and (L T Tr txt. WH) 29; iv. 12 (where GT Tr 
txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. rà ápapr.); Ro. iii. 25; 1 Co. 
vi. 18; 2 Pet. i. 9 (R[L WH txt. Tr mrg.] ἁμαρτιῶν). 
In prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. down; [of bodily de- 
fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; áp. μνημονικόν, Cic. ad Att. 
13, 21; áp. γραφικόν, Polyb. 34, 2, 11; ὅταν μὲν παραλόγως 
ἡ βλάβη γένηται, ἀτύχημα - ὅταν δὲ μὴ παραλόγως, ἄνευ δὲ 
κακίας, ἁμάρτημα" ὅταν δὲ εἰδὼς μὲν μὴ προβουλεύσας δέ, 
ἀδίκημα, Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 10 p. 1185", 16 sq.].* 
ἁμαρτία, -as, 7, (fr. 2 aor. ἁμαρτεῖν, as ἀποτυχία fr. 
ἀποτυχεῖν), a failing to hit the mark (see ἁμαρτάνω). In 
Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thue. down). 150, an error 
of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. im 
Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861) 
p.57n.99]). 2d, a bad action, evil deed. In the N. T. 
always in an ethieal sense, and 1. equiv. to τὸ ápap- 
rávew à sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com- 
mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and action 
(cf. Cie. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; ὑφ᾽ ἁμαρτίαν 
εἶναι held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9; ἐπιμένειν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ro. 
vi. 1; ἀποθνήσκειν τῇ áp. and ζῆν ἐν αὐτῇ. Ro. vi. 2; τὴν áp. 
γινώσκειν, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21; νεκρὸς τῇ áp. Ro. vi. 
11; περὶ ἁμαρτίας to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [ef. 
Mey.]: σῶμα τῆς áp. the body as the instrument of sin, 
Ro. vi. 6; ἀπάτη τῆς áp. the craft by which sin is aceus- 
tomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; ἄνθρωπος τῆς áp. [ἀνομίας 
T Tr txt. WH txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he 
seems unable to exist without it, the man utterly given up 


ἁμαρτία 


to sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. $ 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense 7 
ἁμαρτία (i. q. τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν) as a power exercising domin- 
ion over men (sin as a principle and power) is rhetorically 
represented as an imperial personage in the phrases ἡ 
áp. βασιλεύει, κυριεύει, κατεργάζεται, Ko. v. 21; vi. 12, 
14; vii. 17, 20; δουλεύειν τῇ áp. Ro. vi. 6; δοῦλος τῆς 
áp. Jn. viii. 34 [WH br. Gom. τῆς áp.]; Ro. vi. 17; νόμος 
τῆς áp. the dictate of sin or an impulse proceeding from 
it, Ro. vii. 23; viii. 2; δύναμις τῆς áp. 1 Co. xv. 56; (the 
prosopopeeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, acc. to the read- 
ing ἁμαρτία, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus ἁμαρτία in sense, 
but not in signification, is the source whence the 
several evil acts proceed; but it never denotes vitiosity. 
2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin, 
an offence, a violation of the divine law in thought or in 
act (ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐστὶν ἡ ἀνομία, 1 Jn. iii. 4); a. generally: 
Jas. i. 15; Jn. viii. 46 (where ápapr. must be taken to 
mean neither error, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt- 
ing the people, but sim viewed generally, as is well 
shown by Lücke ad loc. and Ullmann in the Stud. u. 
Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [ef. his Sündlosigkeit Jesu 
p. 66 sqq. (Eng. trans. of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)]; the 
thought is, ‘If any one convicts me of sin, then you may 
lawfully question the truth and divinity of my doctrine, 
for sin hinders the perception of truth’); χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 
so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. 15; ποιεῖν ápap- 
Tlav and τὴν dp. Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 7; 
1 Pet. ii. 22; ἔχειν ἁμαρτίαν to have sin as though it were 
one's odious private property, or to have done something 
needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, Jn. ix. 
41; xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; 1 Jn. i. 8, (so αἷμα ἔχειν, of one 
who has committed murder, Eur. Or. 514); very often 
in the plur. ἁμαρτίαι [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing. 
occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16 ; [Jas. v. 16 
LTTrWH]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., ete. ; πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν, 
Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; ποιεῖν ἁμαρτίας, Jas. v. 15; also 
in the expressions ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν, ἀφιέναι τὰς áp., etc. 
(see adinus, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself 
denote the quilt or penalty of sins, but the sins are con- 
ceived of as removed so to speak from God's sicht, 
regarded by him as not having been done, and there- 
fore are not punished. ἐν ápapr. σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος thou 
wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born, 
i.e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. ix. 
34; ἐν ταῖς ἅμ. ἀποθνήσκειν to die loaded with evil deeds, 
therefore unreformed, Jn. viii. 24; ἔτι ἐν ἁμαρτίαις εἶναι 
still to have one's sins, se. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17. 
b. some particular evil deed: τὴν áp. ταύτην, Acts vii. 60 ; 
πᾶσα ἁμαρτία, Mt. xii. 31; ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον, 1 Jn. v. 16 
(an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from 
the state of ζωή received from Christ into the state of 
θάνατος (cf. θάνατος, 2) in which he was before he be- 
came united to Christ by faith ; cf. Lücke, DeWette, [esp. 
Westcott, ad 1.]). 3. collectively, the complex or 
aggregate of sins committed either by a single person or by 
Many : atpew τὴν áp. τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. i. 29 (see αἴρω, 3 
€.) ; ἀποθνήσκειν ἐν τῇ áp. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ; 
περὶ ἁμαρτίας, sc. θυσίας [ W. 583 (542); B. 393 (336) ], 


91 








ἄμεμπτος 


expiatory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (ace. to the usage of the 
Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. rNDT! and 
nNon, e. g. Lev. v. 11; vii. 27 (37); Ps. xxxix. (xl) 7); 
χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας having no fellowship with the sin which 
he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for 
the concrete, i. q- ἁμαρτωλός : Ro. vii. 7 (ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία, 
opp. to ó νόμος ἅγιος, vs. 12) ; 2 Co. v. 21 (τὸν... . ἁμαρτίαν 
ἐποίησεν he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner). 
Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq.; [see ἁμάρτημα; 
Trench $ Ixvi.]. 

dudprupos, -ov, (μάρτυς), without witness or testimony, 
unattested : Acts xiv. 17.  (Thuc., Dem., Joseph., Plut., 
Leian., Hdian.) * 

ἁμαρτωλός, -óv, (fr. the form ἁμάρτω, as φείδωλος from 
φείδομαι), devoted to sin, a (mase. or fem.) sinner. In 
the N. T. distinetions are so drawn that one is called 
ἁμαρτωλός who is a. not free from sin. In this sense 
all men are sinners; as, Mt.ix. 13; Mk. ii. 17; Lk. v. 8, 
32; xiii. 2; xvill. 13; Ro. iii. 7; v.[8], 19; 1 Tim. 1.15; 
Heb. vii. 26. ^ b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked ; 
a. univ.: 1 Tim.i.9; Jude15; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. vi. 32— 
34; vii. 37, 39; xv. 7, 10; Jn. ix. 16, 24 sq. 31; Gal. ii. 
17; Heb. xii. 3; Jas. iv. 8; v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 185 ἁμαρτία 
itself is called ἁμαρτωλός, Ro. vii. 13. — B. spec., of men 
stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g. 
the tax-catherers: Lk. xv. 2; xviii. 13; xix. 7; hence the 
combination τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοί, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; xi. 19; 
Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen, 
called by the Jews sinners κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν (1 Mace. i. 34; 
ii. 48, 62; Tob. xiii. 6): Mt. xxvi. 45 [?]; Mk. xiv. 41; 
Lk. xxiv. 7; Gal ii. 15. (The word is found often in 
Sept., as the equiv. of SUM and yw, and in the O. T. 
Apoer.; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic. 
2, 9 p. 1109», 33; Plut. de audiend. poét. 7, p. 25 c.)* 

ἄμαχος, -ov, (μάχη), in Grk. writ. [fr. Pind. down} 
commonly not to be withstood, invincible; more rarely 
abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 16 ;. Hell. 4, 4, 
9); in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious: 1 Tim. 
ite Gin Eo. 11:095 

ἀμάω, τῶ: 1 aor. ἤμησα; (fr. ἅμα together; hence to 
gather together, cf. Germ. sammeln; [al. regard the init. 
a as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng. 
mow, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that 
of gathering in secondary; cf. Vanicek p. 673]); freq. in 
the Grk. poets, to reap, mow down: τὰς χώρας, das. v. 4.* 

ἀμέθυστος, -ov, 7, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet 
and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19; ace. to Phavorinus so 
called διὰ τὸ ἀπείργειν τῆς μέθης [So Plut. quaest. conviv. 
iii. 1, 3, 6]): Rev. xxi. 20. [Cf B. D. s. v.]* 

ἀμελέω, -G; fut. ἀμελήσω ; 1 aor. jueAnoa; (fr. ἀμελής, 
and this fr. a priv. and μέλω to care for); very com. in 
prof. auth.; to be careless of, to neglect: τινός, Heb. ii. 3; 
viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foll by inf, 2 Pet. i; 12 RG; 
without a case, ἀμελήσαντες (not caring for what had just 
been said [ A. V. they made light of it ]), Mt. xxii. 5.* 

ἄμεμπτος, -ov, (μέμφομαι to blame), blameless, deserv- 
ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis), free from fault 
or defect: Lk.i.6; Phil. 11. 15; iii. 6; 1 Th. iii. 13 [WH 


ἀμέμπτως 3 


mre. ἀμέμπτως}; Heb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lack- 
ing); in Sept. i. q. DN, Jobi. 1, 8 ete. Com. in Grk. 
writ. [Cf. Trench $ ciii.]* 

ἀμέμπτως, adv., blamelessly, so that there is no cause for 
censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [ii. 13 WH mrg.]; v. 23. [Fr. 
Aeschyl. down. Cf. Trench $ ciii.] * 

ἀμέριμνος, τον, (μέριμνα), free from anxiety, free from 
care: Mt. xxviii. 14; 1 Co. vii. 32 (free from earthly 
cares). (Sap. vi. 16; vii. 23; Hdian. 2, 4, 3; 3, 7, 11; 
Anth. 9, 359, 5; [in pass. sense, Soph. Ajax 1206].) * 

ἀ-μετάθετος, -ov, (μετατίθημι), not transposed, not to be 
transferred ; fixed, unalterable: Heb. vi. 18; τὸ ἀμετάθε- 
Tov as subst., immutability, Heb. vi. 11, (8 Maec. v. 1; 
Polyb., Diod., Plut.) * 

ἀμετα-κίνητος, -ov, (μετακινέω), not to be moved from its 
place, unmoved; metaph. firmly persistent, [A. V. unmov- 
able]: 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a.; Dion. Hal. 
8, 74; [Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16, 9; 2, 382, 85 2,35, 4].)* 

GperapeAntos, -ov, (μεταμέλομαι, μεταμέλει), not re- 
pented of, unregretied: Ro. xi. 29; σωτηρία, by litotes, 
salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10. (Plat., 
Polyb., Plat.) * 

ἀμετανόητος, -ov, (μετανοέω, (|. v.), admitting no change 
of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent: Ro. ii. 5. 
(In Leian. Abdic. 11 [passively ], i. q. ἀμεταμέλητος, q. v. ; 
[Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)* 

ἄμετρος, -ov, (μέτρον a measure), without measure, im- 
mense: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. (eis rà ἄμετρα καυχᾶσθαι to 
boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, ex- 
cessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206, 
ed. Jacobs.)* 

ἀμήν, Hebr. js; 1. verbal adj. (fr. 12 to prop; 
Niph. to be firm), firm, metaph. faithful: ὁ ἀμήν, Rev. 
iii. 14 (where is added ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστὸς kx. ἀληθινός). — 2. 
it eame to be used as an adverb by which something is 
asserted or confirmed: a. at the beginning of a dis- 
course, surely, of a truth, truly; so freq. in the discourses 
of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk.: ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν “1 sol- 
emnly declare unto you,’ e.g. Mt. v. 18; Mk. iii. 28; 
Lk. iv. 24. The repetition of the word (ἀμὴν ἀμήν), em- 
ployed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has 
the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52); 
iii. 3. b. at the close of a sentence; so it is, so be it, 
may it be fulfilled (γένοιτο, Sept. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 
15, ete.): Ro.i. 25; ix.5; Gal.i.5; Eph. iii. 21; Phil. iv. 
20; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb. xiii. 21; 1 Pet.iv.11; Rev. i. 6, 
and often; cf. Jer. xi. 5; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6; 1 K. i. 30. 
It was a eustom, which passed over from the synagogues 
into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had 
read or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to 
God, the others in attendance responded Amen, and 
thus made the substance of what was uttered their own: 
1 Co. xiv. 16 (τὸ ἀμήν, the well-known response Amen), 
cf. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq.; Neh. v. 13; viii. 6. 
2 Co. i. 20 aí ἐπαγγελίαι . . . τὸ val, kai. . . τὸ ἀμήν, i. e. 
had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D.s. v. Amen.] 

ἀμήτωρ, -opos, 6, 7, (μήτηρ), without a mother, mother- 


Jess; in Grk. writ. 1. born without a mother, e. g. 


2 ᾿Αμπλίας 








Minerva, Eur. Phoen. 666 sq., al.; God himself, inasmuch 
as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft 
of a mother, Hdt. 4, 154, al. 3. born of a base or un- 
known mother, Eur. Ion 109 cf. 837. 4. unmotherly, 
unworthy of the name of mother: μήτηρ ἀμήτωρ, Soph. 
ΕἸ. 1184. Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5; 
in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ‘whose mother is not 
recorded in the genealogy’: of Melchizedek, Heb. vii. 3; 
(of Sarah by Philo in de temul. $ 14, and rer. div. haer. 
8 12; [ef. Bleek u. s.]) ; cf. the classic ἀνολυμπιάς." 

ἀμίαντος, -ov, (μιαίνω), not defiled, unsoiled ; free from 
that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and de- 
based, or its force and vigor impaired: κοίτη pure, free 
from adultery, Heb. xiii. 4; κληρονομία (without defect), 
1 Pet. 1. 4 ; θρησκεία, Jas. i. 27; pure from sin, Heb. vii. 
26. (Also in the Grk. writ.; in an ethical sense, Plat. 
lege. 6, p. 777 e.; Plut. Pericl. c. 39 Bios καθαρὸς καὶ 
áp.avros.)* 

᾿Αμιναδάβ, 6, 1732} (servant of the prince, [al. my 
people are noble; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. Aminadab], 
the prop. name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr. 
ii. 10 [A. V. Amminadab]): Mt. 1. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [not 
WH. See B.D.s. v.].* 

ἄμμος, -ov, 7, sand; ace. to a Hebr. comparison ἄμ. τῆς 
θαλάσσης and ἄμ. παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς Gad. are used for 
an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Heb. xi. 12; 
Rey. xx. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Ace. to the con- 
text sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr. 
often, Plut., Sept. often.) * 

ἀμνός, -ov, 6, [fr. Soph. and Arstph. down], a lamb: 
Acts viii. 32; 1 Pet.i. 19; τοῦ θεοῦ, consecrated to God, 
Jn.i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is likened to a 
sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and 
patiently endured, to expiate sin. See ἀρνίον." 

ἀμοιβή, 7s, ἡ, (fr. ἀμείβω, as ἀλοιφή fr. ἀλείφω, στοιβὴ 
fr. στείβω), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital, 
recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of 
the mid. ἀμείβομαι to requite, return like for like): in a 
good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.* 

ἄμπελος, -ov, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], a vine: Mt. xxvi. 29; 
Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii. 18; Jas. iii. 12. In Jn. xv. 1,4 sq. 
Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts 
toits branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses 
into his followers his own divine strength and life. dur. 
τῆς γῆς in Rev. xiv. 18 [Rec% om. τῆς ἀμπ.], 19, signifies 
the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruetion, are 
likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into 
the wine-press, and trodden there.* 

ἀμπελουργός, -00, 6, ἡ, (fr. ἄμπελος and EPTQ), a vine- 
dresser: Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al.; Sept. 
for p?2.)* 

ἀμπελών, -àvos, 6, a vineyard: Mt. xx. 1 sqq.; xxi. 28, 
[33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xiii. 6]; xx. 9 sqq.; 
1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept.; Diod. 4, 6; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)* 

᾿Αμπλίας [T "AuzA(aros, Tr WH L mrg. ᾿Αμπλιᾶτος ; 
hence accent ᾿Αμπλιᾶς ; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505; 
Chandler $ 32], -ov, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the 
Lat. Ampliatus, which form appears in some authorities, 


᾿Αμπλίατος 


cf. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 
8. [See Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. p. 174; cf. The Atheneum 
for March 4, 1882, p. 289 sq.]* 

᾿Αμπλίατος (Tdf.) or more correctly ᾿Αμπλιᾶτος (L 
mrg. Tr WH) i. q. ᾿Αμπλίας, q. v. 

dpóvo: 1 aor. mid. ἠμυνάμην; [allied w. Lat. munio, 
moenia, ete., Vanitek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk. 
writ. [fr. Hom. down] to ward off, keep off any thing 
from any one, τί τινι, acc. of the thing and dat. of pers. ; 
hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assist any 
one (Thue. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Mid. ἀμύνομαι, with acc. 
of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one's self; to 
defend one’s self against any one (so also 2 Mace. x. 17; 
Sap. xi. 3; Sept. Josh. x. 13); to take vengeance on any 
one (Xen. an. 2, 3, 23; Joseph. antt. 9, 1, 2): Acts vii. 
24, where in thought supply τὸν ἀδικοῦντα [cf. D. 194 
(168) note; W. 258 (242) ].* 

dpdidtw; [fr. ἀμφί, lit. to put around]; fo put on, 
clothe: in Lk. xii. 28 L WH ἀμφιάζει for Rec. ἀμφιέννυσι. 
(A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Job 
xxix. 14; [xxxi. 19]; xl 5; Ps. Ixxii. 6 Symm.; several 
times in Themist.; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 112; [Veitch 
s.v.; B. 49 (42 sq.) ; Steph. s. v. col. 201 c. quotes from 
Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 τὸ μὲν ἀμφιέξω ἐστὶ 
κοινῶς, TO δὲ ἀμφιάζω Δωρικὸν, ὥσπερ τὸ ὑποπιέζω kai 
ὑποπιάζωἼ͵.) Cf. ἀμφιέζω." 

ἀμφι-βάλλω ; to throw around, i. q. περιβάλλω, of ἃ gar- 
ment (Hom. Od. 14, 342); to cast to and fro now to one 
side now to the other: a net, Mk.i.16 GLT Tr WH [ace. 
to T Tr WH used absol.; cf. οἱ ἀμφιβολεῖς, Is. xix. 8]. 
(Hab. i. 17.)* 

ἀμφίβληστρον, -ov, τό, (ἀμφιβάλλω), in Grk. writ. any- 
thing thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains, 
a garment; spec. a net for fishing, [casting-net]: Mk. i. 
16 RGL; Mt.iv.18. (Sept.; Hes. seut. 215; Hat. 1, 
141; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Svw. see δίκτυον, and cf. 
Trench $ lxiv.; B. D. s. v. net.]* 

ἀμφιέζω, i. q. ἀμφιέννυμι; in Lk. xii. 28 ἀμφιέζει T Tr. 
Cf. ἀμφιάζω. 

ἀμφι-έννυμι ; pf. pass. ἠμφίεσμαι ; (ἔννυμι) ; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to put on, to clothe: Lk. xii. 28 (RG; ef. auduéto) ; 
Mt. vi. 305 ἔν τινι [B. 191 (166)], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.* 

᾿Αμφίπολις, -ews, 7, Amphipolis, the metropolis of 
Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia]; so called, 
because the Strymon flowed around it [ Thuc. 4, 102]; 
formerly called ’Evvéa ὁδοί (Thuc. 1,100) : Acts xvii. 1 
[see B. D.].* 

ἄμφοδον, -ov, τό, (ἀμφί, ὁδός), prop. a road round any- 
thing, a street, [Hesych. ἄμ φ o8a* ai ῥύμαι. ἀγυιαί. δίοδοι 
(al. διέξοδοι διορυγμαί. al. ἡ πλατεία) ; Lex. in Bekk. An- 
ecdota i. p. 205, 14 “Audodov: ἡ ὥσπερ ἐκ τετραγώνου 
διαγεγραμμένη ὁδός. For exx. see Soph. Lex.; Wetst. on 
Mk. 1. c.; eod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.’s 
note)]: Mk. xi.4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and 
in Grk. writ.) * 

ἀμφότεροι, -αι, -a, [fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the 
one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, etc.; τὰ ἀμφότερα, Acts 
xxiii 8; Eph. ii. 14. 

3 


98 


» 
av 


ἀμώμητος, -ov, (μωμάομαι), that cannot be censured, 
blameless: Phil ii. 15 RG (ef. τέκνα μωμητά, Deut. 
xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Hom. Il. 12, 109; [Hesiod, 
Pind., al.;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)* 

ἄμωμον, -ov, τό, amomum, a fragrant plant of India, 
having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce] 
and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment 
was made (Plin. h. y. 12, 13 [28]) : Rev. xviii. 13 GL 
T Tr WH. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* : 

ἄμωμος, -ov, (μῶμος), without blemish, free from faulti- 
ness, as a victim without spot or blemish: 1 Pet. i. 19 
(Lev. xxii. 21); Heb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is 
made to the sinless life of Christ. Ethically, without 
blemish, faultless, unblamable: Eph. i. 4; v. 27; Col. i. 
22; Phil ii. 15 L T Tr WH ; Jude 24; Rev. xiv. 5. 
(Often in Sept.; [Hesiod, Simon., Tambl.], Hdt. 2, 177; 
Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theoer. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench 
§ ciii.; Tittmann i. 29 sq.]* 

᾿Αμών, 6, indecl., Amon, (tow artificer [but cf. B. D.]), 
king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah: 
Mt. i. 10, [LT Tr WH -μώς. Cf. B. D.].* 

᾿Αμώς, 6, Amos, (78 strong), the indecl. prop. name 
of one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 25.* 

ἄν, a particle indicating that something can or could 
occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of 
certain fortuitous causes. In Lat.it has no equivalent ; 
nor do the Eng. haply, perchance, Germ. wohl (wol), 
etwa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The 
use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious 
exx. fr. Grk. writ, is shown by W. $ 42; [cf. B. 216 
(186) sqq. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exhibited (by 
Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.]. 

It is joined ^ I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen- 
tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the 
impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 (ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν, sciret, 
he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (ἐλέγετε ἄν ye would say) ; Mt. 
xxiii. 30 (non essemus, we should not have been); Jn. 
v. 465 viii. 42; ix. 41; xv. 19; xvid. 36; 1 Co. xi. 31; 
Gal. i. 10; iii. 21 [but WH mrg. br.]; Heb. iv. 8; viii. 4, 
7. 42. with the indie. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the 
plpf. subj. like the fut. pf. subj., 7 would have done it), 
to express what would have been, if this or that either 
were (εἰ with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or 
had been (εἰ with the aor. or plpf. preceding): Mt. xi. 
21 and Lk. x. 13 (ἄν μετενόησαν they would have re- 
pented); Mt. xi 23; xii. 7 (ye would not have con- 
demned) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 (he would have watched), 22 and 
Mk. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i. e. all even now 
would have to be regarded as those who had perished ; 
cf. W. 304 (286)) ; Jn. iv. 10 (thou wouldst have asked); 
xiv. 2 (εἶπον ἄν I would have said so); 28 (ye would have 
rejoiced) ; Ro. ix. 29 (we should have become) ; 1 Co. ii. 
8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes the 
condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered 
from what is said: Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (7 should 
have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given 
it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf.: Jn. xi. 21 
ΓΒ Tr mre.] (οὐκ ἂν ἐτεθνήκει [L T Tr txt. WH ἀπέθανεν 


L4 


av 


would not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. οὐκ ἂν 
ἀπέθανεν) ; Jn. xiv. 7 [not Tdf.] (εἰ with the plpf. preced- 
ing); 1 Jn. ii. 19 (they would have remained with us). 
Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., esp. the later) dv is omitted, 
in order to intimate that the thing wanted but little 
(impf.) or had wanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being 
done, which yet was not done because the condition was 
not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Bttm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858, 
p. 489 sqq.; [N. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on 
Rom. vol. ii. 33; W. § 42, 2 p. 305 (286)), e. g. Jn. viii. 39 
(where the ἄν is spurious); xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; Acts 
xxvi 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (ἄν before ἐδώκατε 
has been correctly expunged by L' T Tr WH), i 
Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad- 
verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the 
Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ. irgend, 
etwa). 1. foll. by a past tense of the Indicative, when 
some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of ; 
where, “when the thing itself which is said to have 
been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved 
in ἄν belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoun or 
particle " (K/otz ad Dev. p. 145) [cf. W. $ 42, 3 a.]; ὅσοι 
dv as many as: Mk. vi. 56 (ὅσοι ἂν ἥπτοντο [ἥψαντο L 
txt. T Tr txt. WII] αὐτοῦ as many as touched him [cf. B. 
216 (187)]) ; Mk. xi. 24 (ὅσα àv προσευχόμενοι αἰτεῖσθε 
[Grsb. om. ἄν], but L txt. T Tr WH have rightly restored 
ὅσα προσεύχεσθε κ. αἰτεῖσθε). καθότι ἄν in so far or so oflen 
as, according as, (Germ. je nachdem gerade) : Acts ii. 45; 
iv.35. ὡς dv: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were 
led [ef. B. $139, 13; 383(329) sq.]). 2. foll. by a Sub- 
junctive, a. the Present, concerning that which 
may have been done, or is usually or constantly done 
(where the Germ. uses mégen); ἡνίκα av whensoever, as 
often as: 2 Co. iii. 15 L T Tr WH; ὃς ἄν whoever, be he 
who he may: Mt. xvi. 25 (1, Τ Tr WH ἐάν) ; [ Mk. viii. 35 
(where T Tr WH fut. indic.; see WH. App. p. 172)]; 
Lk. x. 5 (L T Tr WH aor.), 8; Gal. v.17 (T Tr WH ἐάν, 
L br. ἐάν); 1 Jn. ii. 5; iii. 17; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19) ; 
xvi. 2; 1 Co.xi.27, ete. doris dv: 1 Co. xvi. 2 [Tr WH 
ἐάν; WH mrg. aor.]; Col. iii. 17 (Ltxt. Tr WH ἐάν). ὅσοι 
ἄν: Mt. vii. 12 (T WH ἐάν); xxii. 9 (LT Tr WH ἐάν). 
ὅπου av whithersoever: Lk. ix. 57 (L Tr ἐάν) ; Rev. xiv. 4 
( Tr [T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted ὑπάγει, defended 
also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. ii. 4 (R GL Tr mrg. in 
br.). ὁσάκις ἄν how often soever : 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where 
LT Tr WH ἐάν). ὡς ἄν in what way soever: 1 Th. ii. 7 
({ef. Ellic. ad loe.; B. 232 (200)], LT Tr WH ἐάν). — b. 
the Aorist, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf.; os dv: Mt. 
v. 21, 22 (εἴπῃ whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ; 
31 sq. [in vs. 32 L T Tr WH read πᾶς 6 ἀπολύων]; x. 
11; xxvi. 48 (Tdf. ἐάν); Mk. iii. 29, 35; ix. 41, etc. ὅστις 
dv: Mt. x. 33 [L Tr WH txt. om. dv]; xii. 50; Jn. xiv. 
13 [Tr mrgz. WH pres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. ἐάν), ete. ὅσοι 
av: Mt. xxi. 22 (Treg. ἐάν) ; xxiii. 3 (T WH ἐάν); Mk. iii. 
28 (Tr WH ἐάν); Lk. ix. 5 (LT Tr WH pres.) ; Jn. xi. 
22; Acts ii. 39 (Lehm. o)s); iii. 22. ὅπου dv: Mk. 
xiv. 9 (T WH éay); ix. 18 (L T Tr WH ἐάν). 

dy until. (donec) : 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec.; Rev. ii. 25. 


ἄχρις οὗ 
Y ΝΜ) 
ἕως ἄν 


34 


ye 
ava 


until (usque dum): Mt. ii. 13; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk. vi. 
10; Lk. xxi. 32; 1 Co. iv. 5, etc. ἡνίκα ἄν, of fut. time, 
not until then, when . . . or then at length, when ...: 2 Co. 
iii. 16 (T WH txt. ἐάν) [cf. Kühner ii. 951; Jelf ii. 565]. 
ὡς ἄν as soon as [B. 232 (200)]: 1 Co. xi. 34 ; Phil. ii. 
23. ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἂν ἐγερθῇ, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what- 
ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But ἐάν 
(q. v.) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men- 
tioned, instead of dv; and in many places the Mss. and 
edd. fluctuate between ἄν and ἐάν, (exx. of which have 
already been adduced); [cf. Τὰ Proleg. p. 96; WI. 
App. p. 173 * predominantly ἄν is found after conso- 
nants, and ἐάν after vowels "]. Finally, to this head 
must be referred ὅταν (i. q. ὅτε dv) with the indic. and 
much oftener with the subj. (see ὅταν), and ὅπως ἄν, ak 
though this last came to be used as a final conjunction 
in the sense, that, if it be possible: Lk. ii. 35; Acts iii. 
20 (19); xv. 17; Ro.iii.4; 566 ὅπως, I. 1b. [Cf W. 309 
(290 sq.) ; B. 234 (201).] III. ἄν is joined to the 
Optat. [W. 303 (284) ; B. 217 (188)]; when a certain 
condition is laid down, as in wishes, 7 would that ete. : 
Acts xxvi. 29 (εὐξαίμην [Tdf. εὐξάμην] av I could pray, sc. 
did it depend on me) ; in direct questions [W.l. c.; B. 
254 (219)]: Acts viii. 31 (πῶς àv δυναίμην ; i.e. on what 
condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oec. 11, 
5); Acts xvii. 18 (τί àv θέλοι . . . λέγειν what would he 
say ? it being assumed that he wishes to utter some defi- 
nite notion or other); Acts ii. 15 R ας; in dependent 
sentences and indirect questions in which the nar- 
rator introduces another's thought [ W. $ 42,4; B.l.c.]: 
Lk.i.62; vi. 11; ix.46; [xv.26 L br. Tr WH; cf. xviii. 
36 L br. Trbr. WH mrg.]; Acts v. 24; x. 17; xvii. 20 
RG. IV. dvis found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5 
(e μή τι dv [WH br. ἄν], except perhaps, se. γένοιτο, [but 
cf. Bttm. as below]). ὡς ἄν, adverbially, tanquam (so 
already the Vulg), as if: 2 Co. x. 9 (like ὥσπερ av in Grk. 
writ.; cf. Kühner ii. 210 [8 398 Anm. 4; Jelf $ 430]; B. 
219 (189); [L. and S. s. v. D. III.]). 

ἄν, contr. from ἐάν, if; foll. by the subjune.: Jn. xx. 
23 [Lehm. ἐάν. Also by the (pres.) indic. in 1 Jn. v. 15 
Lehm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)] Further, 
LT Tr WH have received ἄν in Jn. xiii. 20; xvi. 23; 
[so WH Jn. xii. 32; cf. W. 291 (274); B. 72 (63)].* 

ἀνά, prep., prop. upwards, up, (cf. the adv. dvo, opp. to 
κατά and κάτω), denoting motion from a lower place to a 
higher [ef. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only 
with the accus. 1. in the expressions ἀνὰ μέσον (or 
jointly ἀνάμεσον [so R* Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the midst, 
in the midst, amidst, among, between, — with gen. of place, 
Mt. xiii. 25; Mk. vii. 31; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass. see 
μέσος, 2 sub fin.]; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf. 
Sir. xxv. 18(17) ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ (Fritz. τῶν) πλησίον αὐτοῦ; 
ef. W. $ 27, 1 fin. [B. 332 (285) ], (Sir. xxvii. 2; 1 Mace. vii. 
28; xiii. 40, etc. ; in Sept. for 31n3, Ex. xxvi. 28; Josh. 
xvi. 9; xix. 1; Diod. 2, 4 ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν χειλέων [see μέσος, 
2]); ἀνὰ μέρος, (Vulg. per partes), in turn, one after an- 
other, in succession: 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Rec writes ava- 
μέρος], (Polyb. 4, 20,10 ἀνὰ μέρος dew). 2. joined to 


avaBa mos 


numerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B. 
331 sq. (285)]: In. ii. 6 (ἀνὰ μετρητὰς δύο ἢ τρεῖς two or 
three metretz apiece); Mt. xx. 9 sq. (ἔλαβον ava δηνάριον 
they received each a denarius); Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. WH om. 
dvd; ix. 14]; x. 1 (ἀνὰ δύο [WH ἀνὰ δύο [δύο]] two by 
two); Mk. vi. 40 (L T Tr WH xara); [Rev. iv. 8]; and 
very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 398 (372). It is used 
adverbially in Rev. xxi. 21 (ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος, like ἀνὰ τέσ- 
capes, Plut. Aem. 32; cf. W. 249 (234); [B. 30 (26)]). 
3. Prefixed to verbs ava signifies, a. upwards, up, up 
to, (Lat. ad, Germ. auf), as in avaxpovew, ἀναβαίνειν, 
ἀναβάλλειν, ἀνακράζειν, etc. — b. it corresponds to the 
Lat. ad (Germ. an), to [indicating the goal], as in dvay- 
γέλλειν [al. would refer this to d. ], ἀνάπτειν. c. it de- 
notes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as 
d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back, 
Cf. Win. 


in dvayevvav. 
backwards, as in ἀνακάμπτειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, etc. 
De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.* 

ἀνα-βαθμός, -ov, 6, (βαθμός, and this fr. βαίνω) ; ic 
an ascent. 2. a means of going up, a flight of steps, 
a stair: Acts xxi. 35, 40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 324 sq.* 

ἀνα-βαίνω ; [impf. ἀνέβαινον Acts iii. 1; fut. ἀναβήσομαι 
Ro. x. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. ἀναβέβηκα; 2 aor. 
ἀνέβην, ptcp. ἀναβάς, impv. avaBa Rev. iv. 1 (ἀνάβηθι 
Lehm.), plur. ἀνάβατε (for RG ἀνάβητε) Rev. xi. 12 L 
T Tr[WH ; cf. WH. App. p. 168°]; W. $14, 1h.; [B. 54 
(47) ; fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 11235 a. to go up, 
move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (emt), Lk. xix. 
4; upon the roof of a house (ἐπί), Lk. v. 19; into a ship 
(cis), Mk. vi. 51; [Mt. xv. 39 G Trtxt.; Acts xxi. 6 
. Tdf.]; eis τὸ ὄρος, Mt. v. 1; Lk. ix. 28; Mk. iii. 13; eis τὸ 
ὑπερῷον, Acts i. 13; εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Ro. x. 6; Rev. xi. 12; 
eis τὸν obp. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ; 
vi. 62, and in the phrase dvaf. πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Jn. xx. 17. 
(It is commonly maintained that those persons are fig. 
said ἀναβεβηκέναι εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, who have penetrated the 
heavenly mysteries: Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov. 
xxiv.27 (xxx. 4) ; Bar.iii. 29. But in these latter pass. 
also the expression is to be understood literally. Andas 
respects Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ 
brought his knowledge of the divine counsels with him 
from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to 
his incarnation. Now the natural language was οὐδεὶς 
ἦν ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ; but the expression dvagéBrkev is used 
because none but Christ could get there except by as- 
cending. Accordingly εἰ μή refers merely to the idea, 
involved in ἀναβέβηκεν, of a past residence inheayen. 
Cf. Meyer [or Westcott] adloc.) Used of travelling to a 
higher place: εἰς Ἱεροσόλ. Mt. xx. 17 sq.; Mk. x. 32 sq., 
etc.; εἰς τὸ ἱερόν, Jn. vii. 14; Lk. xviii. 10. Often the place 
to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but 
is easily understood from the context: Acts viii. 31 (into 
the chariot) ; Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor, 
acc. to the reading dvaBds restored by L T Tr txt. WH 
for RG ἀναβοήσας), etc.; or the place alone is men- 
tioned from which (ἀπό, ἐκ) the ascent is made: Mt. iii. 
16; Acts viii. 39; Rev. xi. 7. b. in a wider sense 


35 





ἀνάγαιον 


of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring 
up: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27; of smoke rising 
up, Rev. viii. 4; ix. 2; of plants springing up from the 
ground, Mt. xiii. 7; Mk. iv. 7, 32, (as in Grk. writ.; 
Theophr. hist. plant. 8, 3, and Hebr. my); of things 
which come up in one’s mind (Lat. suboriri) : dvaBaiv. ἐπὶ 
τὴν καρδ. or ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, Lk. xxiv. 38; 1 Co. ii. 9; Acts 
vii. 23 (ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν x. it came into his mind i. e. he re- 
solved, foll. by inf.), after the Hebr. 35-5w oy, Jer. iii. 
16, ete. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages, prayers, deeds, 
brought up or reported to one in a higher place: Acts 
X.4; xxi. 31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the 
cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp.: zpoc-, 
συν-αναβαίνω.] 

&va-BáAXo: 2 aor. mid. ἀνεβαλόμην ; 1. to throw or 
toss up. 2. to put back or off, delay, postpone, (very 
often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop. to 
defer for one’s self): twa, to hold back, delay; ina 
forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic. 
Verr. act. 2, 1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and decid- 
ing (adjourn) any one’s case: Acts xxiv. 22; cf. Kypke 
[or Wetst.] ad loc.* 

ἀνα-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ἀνεβίβασα; to cause to go up or as- 
cend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.): Mt. 
xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 πρὸς τὴν γῆν ἀνεβίβαζε τὰς 
ἑαυτοῦ τριήρεις) ἢ 

ἀνα-βλέπω ; 1 aor. ἀνέβλεψα; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. 
to look up: Mk. viii. 24, [22 R GL]; xvi. 4; Lk. xix. 5; 
Xxi.1; Acts xxii. 13; ets τινα, ibid.; eis τὸν οὐρανόν, Mt. 
xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 34, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370 b. ; 
Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight : Mt. xi. 
5; xx. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., ete. ([Hdt. 2, 111;] Plat. 
Phaedrus p. 243 b. παραχρῆμα ἀνέβλεψε. Arstph. Plut. 
126); used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from 
birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 11 (12) (cf. Meyer 
ad loc.) 17 sq. (Paus. 4, 12, 7 (10) συνέβη τὸν ᾿Οφιονέα 
εν «τὸν ἐκ γενετῆς τυφλὸν ἀναβλέψαι). Cf. Win. De verb. 
comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 7 sq. 

&yá-BAejis, -ews, 7, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19), 
(Sept. Is. Ixi. 1). [Aristot.]* 

&va-foáo, -ῶ: 1 aor. dveBónca; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hát. 
down]; to raise a cry, to cry out anything, say it shout- 
ing: Lk. ix. 38 (LT Tr WH ἐβόησε) ; Mk. xv. 8 (where 
read ἀναβάς, see ἀναβαίνω, a. sub fin.) ; with the addition 
of φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, Mt. xxvii. 46 [Tr WH L mrz. ἐβόησε], 
(as Gen. xxvii. 38; Is. xxxvi. 13, ete.). Cf. Win. De 
verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.; [and see Bodo, fin. ].* 

ἀνα-βολή, -ῆς, 7, (ἀναβάλλω, q. v.), often in Grk. writ., 
a putting off, delay: ποιεῖσθαι ἀναβολήν to interpose (lit. 
make) delay, Acts xxv. 17, (as in Thuc. 2, 42; Dion. Hal. 
11, 33; Plut. Camill. c. 35).* 

ἀνάγαιον, -ov, τό, (fr. ava and γαῖα i. e. γῆ). prop. any- 
thing above the ground; hence a room in the upper part 
ofa house: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 12, (in GL T Tr WH). 
Also written ἀνώγαιον (which Tdf. formerly adopted; 
cf. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. ávaxeíov]), ἀνώγεον 
(Rec.), ἀνώγεων ; on this variety in writing cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 297 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 358]; 


ἀναγγέλλω 


Fritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; B. 18 (12); [WH. App. 
p. 151].* 

ἀν-αγγέλλω ; impf. ἀνήγγελλον ; [fut. ἀναγγελῶ]: 1 aor. 
ἀνήγγειλα; 2 aor. pass. ἀνηγγέλην, Ro. xv. 21; 1 Pet. i. 12 
(several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31; W. 82 (78); 
[Veitch s. v. ἀγγέλλω]) ; to announce, make known, [ef. 
ἀνά, 3 b.]: τί, Acts xix. 18; foll. by ὅτι, Jn. v. 15 [L mrg. 
WH txt. T εἶπεν]; ὅσα κτὰ. Acts xiv. 27; [Mk. v. 19 R 
G L mrg.]; [absol. with eis, Mk. v. 14 Rec.]; equiv. to 
disclose: τί run, Jn. iv. 25; xvi. 13-15 ; used of the for- 
mal proclamation of the Christian religion: Acts xx. 
20; 1 Pet.i.12; 1 Jn. i. 5 ; περί τινος, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii. 
15); to report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in 
Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 3, 
21; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they 
have seen or heard, [cf. ἀνά τι. 5.7: τί, Acts xvi. 38 
(where L T Tr WH amyyy.) ; 2 Co. vii. 7. 

&va-yevváo, -à: 1 aor. ἀνεγέννησα ; pf. pass. dvayeyév- 
νημαι; to produce again, beget again, beget anew; metaph. : 
τινά, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he 
lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God, 
1 Pet.i.3; passively ἔκ τινος, ibid. i. 23. (In the same 
sense in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Among prof. 
auth. used by Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 τῶν ἐκ τοῦ στασιάζειν 
αὐτοῖς ἀναγεννωμένων [yet Bekker àv γενομένων] δεινῶν 
which originated.)* 

ἀνα-γινώσκω ; [impf. ἀνεγίνωσκεν Acts viii. 28]; 2 aor. 
ἀνέγνων, [inf. ἀναγνῶναι Lk. iv. 16], ptep. ἀναγνούς ; Pass., 
[pres. ávaywóckopat]; 1 aor. ἀνεγνώσθην : in prof. auth. 
1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately, 
to acknowledge; hence 2. to read, (in this signif. 
[* first in Pind. O. 10 (11). 1"] fr. [Arstph.,] Thuc. 
down): τί, Mt. xxii. 31; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. vi. 3; Jn. xix. 
20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co. 1. 13; [Gal. iv. 21: Lehm. 
mrg.]; Rev.i.3; v.4 Rec.; τινά, one's book, Acts viii. 
28, 30; év with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5; xxi. 42; Mk. 
xii. 26; with ellipsis of ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, Lk. x. 26; foll. by ore 
[objective], Mt. xix. 4; [foll. by ὅτε recitative, Mt. xxi. 
16]; τί ἐποίησε, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not 
mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes : 
Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk.xiii.14; Acts xv. 31; xxiii.34; Eph. 
iii. 4; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2. to read to others, read aloud: 
2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Μωῦσῆς i. q. 
the books of Moses); [Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 27]; 1 Th. 
v. 27; Col. iv. 16.* 

&vaykáte ; [impf. ἠνάγκαζον]: 1 aor. ἠνάγκασα; 1 aor. 
pass. ἠναγκάσθην; (fr. ἀνάγκη) ; [fr. Soph. down]; to 
necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force, 
threats, etc., or by persuasion, entreaties, etc., or by 
other means: τινά, 2 Co. xii. 11 (by your behavior 
towards me); τινά foll. by inf., Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii. 
19; Gal. ii. 3, 14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv. 
22; Mk. vi. 45; Lk. xiv. 23.* 

ἀναγκαῖος, -aía, -atov, (ἀνάγκη), [fr. Hom. down (in vari- 
ous senses) ], necessary ; a. what one cannot do with- 
out, indispensable: 1 Co. xii. 22 (τὰ μέλη) ; Tit. iii. 14 
(χρεῖαι). b. connected by the bonds of nature or of 
friendship: Acts x. 24 (ἀναγκαῖοι [A. V. near] φίλοι). 


96 





3 ,ὔ 
ἀναδείκνυμι 


c. what ought according to the law of duty to be done, 
what is required by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24. 
ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι foll. by acc. with inf., Acts xiii. 46; Heb. 
viii. 3. ἀναγκαῖον ἡγεῖσθαι to deem necessary, foll. by 
inf., Phil. ii. 25; 2 Co. ix. 5." 

ἀναγκαστῶς, adv., by force or constraint; opp. to ékov- 
cis, 1 Pet.y.2. (Plat. Ax. p. 366 a.)* 

ἀνάγκη, -ης, 7; 1. necessity, imposed either by the 
external condition of things, or by the law of duty, re- 
gard to one’s advantage, custom, argument: κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην 
perforce (opp. to κατὰ ἑκούσιον). Philem. 14; ἐξ ἀνάγκης 
of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 12 (neces- 
sarily); ἔχω ἀνάγκην I have (am compelled by) neces- 
sity, (also in Grk. writ.): 1 Co. vii. 37; Heb. vii. 27; foll. 
by inf, Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 RLbr.; Jude 3; ἀν. μοι 
ἐπίκειται necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16; ἀνάγκη 
(i. q. ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι) foll. by inf.: Mt. xviii. 7; Ro. xiii. 
5; Heb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in a sense rare 
in the classies (Diod. 4, 43), but very common in Hellen- 
istic writ. (also in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 7, ete.; see W. 30), 
calamity, distress, straits: Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Th. 
ii. 7; plur. ἐν ἀνάγκαις, 2 Co. vi. 45 xii. 10.* 

&ya-yvop(to : 1 aor. pass. ἀνεγνωρίσθην ; to recognize : 
Acts vii. 13 [Tr txt. WH txt. éyvopía6n] was recognized 
by his brethren, ef. Gen. xlv. 1. (Plat. politic. p. 258 a. 
ἀναγνωρίζειν τοὺς avyyeveis.)* 

ἀνά-γνωσις, -eos, 7, (ἀναγινώσκω, q. v.) ; a. a know- 
ing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on]: Acts 
xiii. 15; 2 Co. iii. 14; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q. 
NopD2-)* 

&y-&yo: 2 aor. ἀνήγαγον, inf. ἀναγαγεῖν, [ptep. dvaya- 
yóv]; Pass, [pres. dvéyogat]; 1 aor. [cf. sub fin.] ἀνή- 
xOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, to lead or bring into 
a higher place; foll. by eis with ace. of the place: Lk. 
ii. 22; iv. 5 [T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.]; xxii. 66 (T 
Tr WH ἀπήγαγον]; Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 (εἰς 
T. ἔρημον, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan). τινὰ ἐκ 
νεκρῶν fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper 
world, Heb. xiii. 20; Ro. x. 7; τινὰ τῷ λαῷ to bring one 
forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place), 
and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4; 
θυσίαν τῷ εἰδώλῳ to offer sacrifice to the idol, because 
the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navi- 
gators are κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν said ἀνάγεσθαι (pass. [or mid.]) 
when they launch out, set sail, put to sea, (so avaywyn 
in Justin. Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 142 [and in the classies]) : 
Lk. viii. 22; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21; xx. 3,13; 
xxi [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21; xxviii 10 sq. (Polyb. 
1, 21,4; 23, 3, ete.) [Comp.: ér-aváyo.] * 

&va-Belkvupa : 1 aor. ἀνέδειξα, [ impv. avadecEov; fr. Soph. 
down]; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all 
to behold (Germ. aufzeigen) ; hence to show accurately, 
clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Macc. ii. 8 cf. 
6): Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast 
chosen). Hence ἀναδ. τινά to proclaim any one as elected 
to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general, 
ete., messenger): Lk. x. 1, (2 Macc. ix. 14, 23, 25; x. 
11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48, 


ἀνάδειξις 


3; 51, 3; Diod. i. 66; 18, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, etc.; 
Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. 
iii. p. 12 sq.* 

ἀνά δειξις, -ews, 7, (ἀναδείκνυμι, q. v.), @ pointing out, 
public showing forth; τῶν χρόνων, Sir. xliii. 6. a pro- 
claiming, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected 
to office (Plut. Mar. 8 ὑπάτων ἀνάδειξις [cf. Polyb. 15, 26, 
7]): Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced 
[A. V. of his shewing] to the people as the forerunner 
of the Messiah; this announcement he himself made at 
the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).* 

ἀνα-δέχομαι: 1 aor. ἀνεδεξάμην; fr. Hom. down; to 
take up, take upon one's self, undertake, assume; hence 
to receive, entertain any one hospitably: Acts xxviii. 7; 
to entertain in one's mind: ras ἐπαγγελίας, i. e. to em- 
brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 17.* 

ἀνα-δίδωμι: 2 aor. ptep. avadovs ; 1. to give forth, 
send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants 
yielding fruit, etc.; in prof. auth. 2. acc. to the sec- 
ond sense which ἀνά has in composition [see dvd, 3 b. ], 
to deliver up, hand over: ἐπιστολήν, Acts xxiii. 33, (the 
same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and .Plut.).* 

ἀνα ζάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἀνέζησα; a word found only in the 
N. T. and eccl. writ.; to live again, recover life; a. 
prop, in Rec. of Ro. xiv. 9; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop. 
one is said ἀναζῆν who has been νεκρός in a trop. sense ; 
a. to be restored to a correct life: of one who returns to 
a better moral state, Lk. xv. 24 [WH mrg. ἔζησεν] ([ A. V. 
is alive again], cf. Mey. ad loc.), 32 (T Tr WH ἔζησε). 
B. to revive, regain strength and vigor: Ro. vii. 9; sin is 
alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the 
fall of Adam; yet it is destitute of power (νεκρά ἐστι) 
in innocent children ignorant of the law; but when they 
come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power 
in them also. Others less aptly explain ἀνέζησε here 
began to live, sprang into life, (Germ. lebte auf ).* 

ἀνα-ζητέω, -ῶ; [impf. ἀνεζήτουν]; 1 aor. ἀνεζήτησα; ‘to 
run through with the eyes any series or succession of 
men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make 
diligent search, Germ. daran hinsuchen, aufsuchen? (Win. 
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 14): twa, Lk. ii. 44, (and 
45 Ltxt. T Tr WH); Acts xi. 25. (See exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. [fr. Plato on] in Win. l.c.) * 

ἀνα-ζώννυμι : fo gird up; mid. to gird up one's self or 
Sor one's self: ἀναζωσάμενοι τὰς ὀσφύας, 1 Pet. i. 13, i. e. 
prepared, — a metaphor derived from the practice of the 
Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their move- 
ments were accustomed, when about to start on a jour- 
ney or engage in any work, to bind their long and flow- 
ing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them 
with a leathern girdle; cf. περιζώννυμι. (Sept. Judo. 
xviii. 16; Prov. xxix. 35 (xxxi. 17); Dio Chrys. or. 72, 
2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139 
d., al.)* 

ἀνα-ζωπυρέω, -à; (τὸ ζώπυρον i.e. a. the remains of 
a fire, embers; ὦ. that by which the fire is kindled 
anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows) ; to kindle anew, 
rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of ἀνα- cf. Ellic. 


37 





ἀναθεματίζω 


on 2 Tim. as below]; generally trop., to kindle up, in- 
lame, one's mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10, 
16 of a horse roused to his utmost; Hell. 5, 4, 46; An- 
tonin. 7, 2 φαντασίας ; Plut. Pericl. 1, 4; Pomp. 41, 2; 
49, 5; Plat. Charm. p. 156 d.; ete.) : τὸ χάρισμα, 2 Tim. 
i. 6, 1. 6. τὸ πνεῦμα, vs. 7. Intrans. to be enkindled, to 
gain strength: Gen. xlv. 27; 1 Mace. xiii. 7, and in prof. 
auth.; ἀναζωπυρησάτω ἡ πίστις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3 
[see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. ].* 

ἀνα-θάλλω: 2 aor. avéCadov; (Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 7; 
Sap. iv.4; very rare in Grk. writ. and only in the poets, 
cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 195; [Veitch s. v. θάλλω ; W. 
87 (83); B. 59 (52)]) ; to shoot up, sprout again, grow 
green again, flourish again, (Hom. Il. 1, 236; Ael. v. h. 
5,4); trop. of those whose condition and affairs are 
becoming more prosperous: Phil. iv. 10 ἀνεθάλετε τὸ 
ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ φρονεῖν ye have revived so as to take thought for 
me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specifica- 
tion, W. 317 (298) ; cf. Ellie. ad loc.]. Others, ace. to 
a trans. use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek. 
xvii. 24; Sir. i. 18, etc.), render ye have revived (allowed 
to revive) your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an 
object-ace., W. 323 (303) ; B. 263 (226); cf. Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc.]; against whom see Meyer ad loc.* 

ἀνάθεμα, -ros, τό, (i. q. TO ἀνατεθειμένον) ; 1. prop. 
a thing set up or laid by in order to be kept; spec. a 
votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god 
was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put 
in some other conspicuous place: 2 Macc. ii. 13, (Plut. 
Pelop. e. 25); Lk. xxi. 5 in LT, for ἀναθήμασι RG Tr 
WH ; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the 
codd.; Moeris, ἀνάθημα ἀττικῶς, ἀνάθεμα ἑλληνικῶς. CE. 
ἐπίθημα, ἐπίθεμα, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [ef. 445; 
Paral. 417; see also Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 41]. 2 
ἀνάθεμα in the Sept. is generally the translation of the 
Heb. pon. a thing devoted to God without hope of being 
redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28, 
29]; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction, 
Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, ete. [W. 32]; a thing abominable 
and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence 
in the N. T. ἀνάθεμα denotes 8. a curse: ἀναθέματι áva- 
θεματίζειν, Acts xxiii. 14 [W. 466 (434); B. 184 (159)]. 
b. a man accursed, devoted to the direst woes (i. q. ἐπι- 
κατάρατος) : ἀνάθεμα ἔστω, Gal. i. 8 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 22; 
ἀνάθεμα λέγειν τινά to execrate one, 1 Co. xii. 3 (RG, 
but L T Tr WH have restored ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς, sc. ἔστω) ; 
ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Ro. ix. 3 (pregnantly i. 4. 
doomed and so separated from Christ). Cf. the full re- 
marks on this word in Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 247 
sqq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq.; [a trans. of the latter 
by Prof. Riddle in Schaff's Lange on Rom. p. 302 sqq. ; 
see also Trench $v.; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. l. c.; Elli- 
cott ibid.; Tholuck on Rom. 1. e.; BB.DD. s. vv. Anath- 
ema, Excommunieation .* 

ἀνα-θεματίζω;; 1 aor. ἀνεθεμάτισα; (ἀνάθεμα, q. v.); a 
purely bibl. and eccl. word, to declare anathema or ac- 
cursed; in the Sept. i. q. Dy to devote to destruction, 
(Josh. vi. 21, ete.; 1 Mace. v. 5); éavrór to declare one's 


5 , 
ἀναθεωρέω 


self liable to the severest divine penalties, Acts xxiii. 
12, 91; ἀναθέματι ἀναθεματίζειν (Deut. xiii. 155 xx. 17, 
[W. 8 54, 3; D. 184 (159) ]) ἑαυτόν foll. by inf., to bind 
one's self under a curse to do something, Acts xxiii. 14. 
absol, to asseverate with direful imprecations: Mk. xiv. 
71. [Cowr.: κατ-αναθεματίζω.} * 
ἀνα-θεωρέω, -@; prop. ‘to survey a series of things from 
the lowest to the highest, Germ. daran hinsehen, lüngs 
durchsehen’, [to look along up or through], (Win. De verb. 
comp. Pt. iii. p. 3); hence to look at attentively, to observe 
accurately, consider well: ri, Acts xvii. 23; Heb. xiii. 7. 
( Diod. Sie. 12, 15 ἐξ ἐπιπολῆς μὲν θεωρούμενος .- . avabew- 
potpevos δὲ καὶ pet’ ἀκριβείας ἐξεταζύμενος ; 14, 109; 2, 
5; Leian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1 
[uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)* 
ἀνάθημα, -ros, τό, (dvariOnut),.a gift consecrated and 
laid up in a temple, a votive offering (see ἀνάθεμα, 1): Lk. 
xxi 5 [RG Tr WH]. (3 Mace. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on 
2 Mace. iii. 2; κοσμεῖν ἀναθήμασι occurs also in 2 Mace. 
ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. $ 12, p. 148 e. ἀναθήμασί τε Ke- 
κοσμήκαμεν τὰ ἱερὰ αὐτῶν, Hdt. 1, 183 τὸ μὲν δὴ ἱερὸν 
οὕτω κεκόσμηται - ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἴδια ἀναθήματα πολλά." 
ἀναίδεια (I WII ἀναιδία ; see I, c), τας, 7, (ἀναιδής, and 
this fr. ἡ αἰδώς a sense of shame); fr. Hom. down; 
shamelessness, impudence: Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate 
man, persisting in his entreaties; ΓΑ. V. importunity ]).* 
ἀν-αίρεσις, -eds, 7, (Ir. dvaipéo, 2, q. v.), a destroying, 
killing, murder, ‘taking off’: Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Rec. 
(Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4; 
9 Mace. v. 13. Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 5; Hdian. 2, 13, 1.)* 
ἀν-αιρέω, -@; fut. ἀνελῶ, 2 Th. ii. 8 (1, Τ Tr WH txt. cf. 
Jud. vii. 13; Dion. Hal. 11, 18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25; cf. W. 
82 (78); [B. 53 (47); Veitch s. v. aipéw, * perh. late 
£A" ]), for the usual ἀναιρήσω ; 2 aor. ἀνεῖλον ; 2 aor. mid. 
ἀνειλόμην (but ἀνείλατο Acts vii. 21, ἀνεῖλαν Acts x. 39, 
ἀνείλατε Acts ii. 23, in GL T Tr WH, after the Alex. 
form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq.; B. 39 (34) sq. [see aípéo]) ; 


Pass., pres. ἀναιροῦμαι; 1 aor. ἀνῃρέθην; —— 1. to take up, 


to lift up (from the ground) ; mid. to take up for myself 


as mine, to own, (an exposed infant): Acts vii. 21; (so 
ἀναιρεῖσθαι, Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7; 
[Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18, 
ete. ]). 2. to take away, abolish; a. ordinances, es- 
tablished customs, (to abrogate): Heb. x. 9: b. aman, 
to put out of the way, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and 
Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 66] Thuc. down): Mt. ii. 16; Lk. 
xxii. 2; xxiii. 32; Acts ii. 23; v. 33, 36; vii. 28; ix. 23 
ΣΧ. 89: x1. 25 RI. 20: eK. 0G RT. 15, 217215 
xxy. 3; xxvi. 10; 2 Th.ii.8 L T Tr WH txt. ; ἑαυτόν, to 
kill one’s self, Acts xvi. 27.* 

ἀν-αίτιος, -ov, (αἰτία) guiltless, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7. 
(Often in Grk. writ.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q- 2; Sus. 62.)* 

ἀνα-καθ-ίζω : 1 aor. ἀνεκάθισα; to raise one's self and 
sit upright; to sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mre. 
WHunrg. ἐκάθισεν]; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19; 
Plut. Alex. c. 14; and often in medical writ.; with 
ἑαυτόν, Plut. Philop. c. 20; mid. in same sense, Plat. 
Phaedo c. 3 p. 60 b.)* 


sq. 99: 





38 


ἀνακεφαλαιόω 


ἀνα-καινίζω ; (καινός) ; to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ. 
auffrischen) : twa εἰς μετάνοιαν so to renew that he shall 
repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isocr. Areop. 3; Philo, leg. ad Gaium 
$11; Joseph. antt. 9, 8, 2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6; Leian. 
Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps. cii. (ciii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 30, ete.; 
eecl. writ.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10.* 

ἀνα-καινόω, -@: [pres. pass. ἀνακαινοῦμαι); a word 
peculiar to the apostle Paul; prop. to cause to grow up 
(ava) new, to make new; pass., new strength and vigor 
is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16; to be changed into a new 
kind of life, opposed to the former corrupt state, Col. 
iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Mey. 
on Col. 1. c. ; Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 dvakawo- 
Cf. Kóstlin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]* 
ἀνα-καίνωσις, -ews, 7, a renewal, renovation, complete 


΄ 
ποιεω. 


change for the better, (cf. ἀνακαινόω) : τοῦ voos, object. gen., 
Ro. xii. 2; πνεύματος ἁγίου, effected by the Holy Spirit, 
Tit. iii. 5. (Etym. Magn., Suid.; [Herm. vis. 3, 8, 9; 
other eccl. writ.]; the simple καίνωσις is found only in 
Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10.) [C£. Trench § xviii.]* 

ἀνα-καλύπτω : [ Pass., pres. ptep. ἀνακαλυπτόμενος ; pf. 
ptep. dvaxexaduppevos ] ; to unveil, to uncover (by 
drawing back the veil), (i. q. n5 Job xii. 22; Ps. xvii. 
(xviii.) 16): κάλυμμα . . . μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον the veil... 
not being lifted (lit. unveiled) [so WH punctuate, see 
W. 534 (497); but LT Alf. ete. take the ptep. as a 
neut. aec. absol. referring to the clause that follows with 
it not being revealed that, etc.; (for ἀνακαλ. in this 
sense see Polyb. 4, 85, 6; Tob. xii. 7, 11) ; see Meyer ad 
loc.], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand- 
ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (ἀνακαλύπτειν συγκάλυμμα, Deut. xxii. 
30 Alex.); ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ with unveiled face, 
2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded, 
but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ. 
(The word is used by Eur., Xen., [ Aristot. de sens. 5, 
vol. i. p. 444°, 25], Polyb., Plut.)* 

ἀνα-κάμπτω: fut. dvakápyro; 1 aor. ἀνέκαμψα; to bend 
back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ; 
in Sept. i. q. 237) intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk. 
x. 6 (where the meaning is, ‘your salutation shall return 
to you, as if not spoken”); Acts xviii. 21; Heb. xi. 15.* 

dva-Ketpat; [impf. 3 pers. sing. ἀνέκειτο] ; depon. mid. 
to be laid up, laid: Mk. v. 40 R L br. [cf. Eng. to lay out]. 
In later Grk. £o lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf. 
B.D. s. v. Meals]; the earlier Greeks used κεῖσθαι, kara- 
κεῖσθαι, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq.; Fritzsche [or 
Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10): Mt. ix. 10; xxii. 10 sq. ; xxvi. 
7,90; Mk.[vi.26 T Tr WH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk. vii. 
37 (LT Tr WH κατάκειται); xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec. 
cvvavakeui.) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat together, to 
dine: Jn. vi. 11. [Cf. ἀναπίπτω, fin. COMP.: συν-ανά- 
κειμαι.} * 

ἀνα-κεφαλαιόω, -ὦ : [pres. pass. ἀνακεφαλαιοῦμαι; 1 aor. 
mid. inf. ἀνακεφαλαιώσασθαι] : (fr. κεφαλαιόω, q. V., and 
this fr. κεφάλαιον, q. v.) ; to sum up (again), to repeat 
summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the 
substance of a speech; Quintil. 6. 1 ‘rerum repetitio et 
congregatio, quae graece ἀνακεφαλαίωσις dicitur ’, [ἔργον 


e" 
οτι: 


ἀνακλίνω 


ῥητορικῆς - - - ἀνακεφαλαιώσασθαι πρὸς ἀνάμνησιν, Aristot. 
frag. 123, vol. v. p. 1499", 33]); so in Ro. xiii. 9. In 
Eph. i. 10 God is said ἀνακεφαλαιώσασθαι τὰ πάντα ἐν τῷ 
Χριστῷ, to bring together again for himself (note the 
mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin) 
into one combined state of fellowship in Christ, the uni- 
versal bond, [ef. Mey. or Ellie. on Eph. 1. 6.1; (Protev. 
Jac. 13 els ἐμὲ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία ᾿Αδάμ, where cf. 
Thilo).* 

ἀνα-κλίνω : fut. ἀνακλινῶ; 1 aor. ἀνέκλινα; Pass., 1 aor. 
ἀνεκλίθην; fut. ἀνακλιθήσομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to lean 
against, lean upon ; a. to lay down: twa, Lk. ii. 7 (ἐν 
(τῇ) φάτνῃ). b. to make or bid to recline: Mk. vi. 39 
(ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς, sc. the disciples, ἀνακλῖναι [-κλιθῆναι L 
WH txt.] πάντας i.e. the people); Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH 
κατέκλιναν) ; xii. 37. Pass. to lie back, recline, lie down: 
Mt. xiv. 19; of those reclining at table and at feasts, 
Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. 11,— in the last 
two pass. used fig. of participation in future blessedness 
in the Messiah’s kingdom.* 

ἀνα-κόπτω: 1 aor. ἀνέκοψα ; to beat back, check, (as the 
course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]): 
τινά foll. by an inf. [A. V. hinder], Gal. v. 7 Rec., where 
the preceding ἐτρέχετε shows that Paul was thinking of 
an obstructed road; cf. ἐγκόπτω." 

ἀνα-κράζω: 1 aor. [rare and late," Veitch s. v. κράζω; 
B. 61 (53)] ἀνέκραξα; 2 aor. ἀνέκραγον (Lk. xxiii. 18 T 
"Tr txt. WH); 0 raise a cry from the depth of the throat, 
to cry out: Mk.i. 23; vi.49; Lk. iv. 33; viii. 28; xxiii. 
18. Exx. fr. prof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
iii. p. 6 sq.* 

dya-kpivo ; 1 aor. ἀνέκρινα; Pass., [pres. avaxpivopar] ; 
1 aor. ἀνεκρίθην ; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic); prop. 
by looking through a series (dvd) of objects or particulars 
to distinguish (κρίνω) or search after. Hence a. to 
investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sifl, ques- 
tion: Acts xvii. 11 (τὰς γραφάς); 1 Co. x. 25, 27 (not 
anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before 
you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spec. in a 
forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to 
hold an investigation ; to interrogate, examine, the ac- 
cused or the witnesses; absol: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv. 
8. τινά, Acts xii. 19; xxviii. 18; pass, Actsiv.9. Paul 
has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term 
ἀπολογία shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 8 he speaks of τοῖς 
ἐμὲ dvakpívovat, investigating me, whether I am a true 
apostle. b. univ. to judge of, estimate, determine (the 
excellence or defects of any person or thing): τί, 1 Co. 
ii. 15; τινά, 1 Co. iv. 3 sq.; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15 ; xiv. 
24. [Cf. Lghtft. Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq. 
Am. ed.).]* à 

&vá-kpucis, -ews, 7, an examination; as a law-term 
among the Greeks, the preliminary investigation held 
for the purpose of gathering evidence for the informa- 
tion of the judges (Meier and Sehómann, Att. Process, 
pp- 27, [622; cf. Dict. of Antiq. s. v.]) ; this seems to 
be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.* 

ἀνα-κυλίω: 1. toroll up. —— 2. to roll back: ávaxe- 


39 








ἀνάλυσις 


κύλισται ὁ λίθος. Mk. xvi. 4 T Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen. 
vi. p. 237 e.; Leian. de luctu 8; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

ἀναικύπτω: 1 aor. ἀνέκυψα; to raise or lift one’s self 
up; 8. one’s body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7, 10; (Xen. 
de re equ. 7, 10, al.; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one's soul ; 
to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28; (Xen. oec. 11, 5; 
Joseph. b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).* 

ἀνατλαμβάνω; 2 aor. ἀνέλαβον; 1 aor. pass. ἀνελήφθην 
(ἀνελήμφθην LT Tr WH; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54) ; 
Veitch (s. v.AapBdve) ; see λαμβάνω, and s. v. M, μ7); [fr. 
Hdt. down]; 1. to take up, raise: eis τὸν οὐρανόν, Mk. 
xvi 19; Actsi. 11; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. 11); without 
care, Actsi.2, 22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385)], 
(Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to 
carry or use it): Acts vii. 43; Eph. vi. 13,16. to take 
to one’s self: τινά, in order to conduct him, Acts xxiii. 
31; or as a companion, 2 Tim.iv.11; or in Acts xx. 13 
sq. to take up sc. into the ship.* 

ἀνάληψις (ἀνάλημψις LT Tr WH; see M, p), -eos, 5, 
(ἀναλαμβάνω), [fr. Hippocr. down], a taking up: Lk. ix. 
51 (sc. eis τὸν οὐρανόν of the ascension of Jesus into 
heaven; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi $ 18; Suicer, 
Thesaur. Eccles. s. v.; and Meyer on Lk. 1. c.]).* 

dv-aMcko: fr. the pres. dvaMóo [3 pers. sing. ἀναλοῖ, 
2 Th.ii.8 WHmrg.] come the fut. ἀναλώσω; 1 aor. 
ἀνήλωσα and ἀνάλωσα [see Veitch]; 1 aor. pass. ἀνηλώ- 
nv; (the simple verb is found only in the pass. ἁλίσκομαι 
to be taken; but a in ἁλίσκομαι is short, in ἀναλίσκω 
long; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv.; “the 
diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans. sense of the pf., 
and above all the difference of sense, indicate a diff. 
origin for the two verbs.”  L. and S.]); [fr. Pind. 
down]; 1. to expend; to consume, e. g. χρήματα (to 
spend money ; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume, 
use up, destroy: Lk. ix. 54; Gal v.15; 2 Th. i. 8 RG@ 
WH mrz. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7; Prov. xxiii. 28; Gen. 
xli. 30, ete.) [Cowr.: kar- zpoc-avaMaxo.]* 

ἀναλογία, -as, 7, (ἀνάλογος conformable, proportional), 
proportion: κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως, i. q. κατὰ TO 
μέτρον πίστεως received from God, Ro. xii. 6, cf. 3. 
(Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)* 

ἀνα-λογίζομαι : 1 aor. ἀνελογισάμην : dep. mid. to think 
over, ponder, consider: commonly with aec. of the thing, 
but in Heb. xii. 3 with acc. of the pers. ‘to consider by 
weighing, comparing, etc. (3 Mace. vii. €. Often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) * 

ἄναλος, -ov, (áAs salt), saliless, unsalted, (ἄρτοι ἄναλοι, 
Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1; ἄρτος ἄναλος, Plut. symp. v. 
quaest. 10 § 1): ἅλας ἄναλον salt destitute of pungency, 
Mk. ix. 50.* 

[ἀναλόω, see ἀναλίσκω. 

ἀνάλυσις, -eos, 7. (ἀναλύω, q. v-); 1. an unloosing 
(as of things woven), a dissolving (into separate parts). 
2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from 
moorings preparatory to setting sail, cf. Hom. Od. 15, 
548; [or, acc. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment; 
cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), Germ. Aufbruch: 2 Tim. 
iv. 6 (departure from life; Philo in Flacc. § 21 [p. 544 


ἀναλύω 


ed. Mang.] 5j ἐκ τοῦ βίου τελευταία ἀνάλυσις ; [Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 44,5 ἔγκαρπον k. τελείαν ἔσχον τὴν ἀνάλυσιν; Euseb. 
h. e. 3, 32, 1 μαρτυρίῳ τὸν βίον ἀναλῦσαι, cf. 3, 34]. Cf. 
ἀνάλυσις ἀπὸ συνουσίας, Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 1).* 

ἀναλύω: fut. dvadvow; 1 aor. ἀνέλυσα; 1. to un- 
loose, undo again, (as, woven threads). 2. to depart, 
Germ. aufbrechen, break up (see ἀνάλυσις, 2), 80 very 
often in Grk. writ.; to depart from life: Phil. i. 23, 
(Leian. Philops. e. 14 ὀκτωκαιδεκαέτης ὧν ἀνέλυεν ; add 
Ael. v. h. 4, 23; [ἀνέλυσεν ὁ ἐπίσκοπος Πλάτων ἐν κυρίῳ, 
Acta et mart. Matth. $ 817). to return, ἐκ τῶν γάμων, 
Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] cf. Kuinoel [and 
Wetstein] ad loc.; Grimm ón 2 Macc. viii. 25.* 

ἀναμάρτητος, -ov, (fr. àv priv. and the form ápapréo), 
sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one who cannot 
sin. In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxix. 19; 
2 Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42; [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj. 
§ 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, ef. Ull- 
mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng. 
trans. p. 99; Cremer s. v.].* 

dva-uévo; [fr. Hom. down]; τινά, to wait for one 
(Germ. erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await 
one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with the 
added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [ef. El- 
licott ad loc.]. Good Greek; cf. Win. De verb. comp. 
etc. Pt. iii. p. 15 sq.* 

[ἀνα-μέρος, i. e. ἀνὰ μέρος, see ἀνά, 1.] 

[dvá-pecov, i. e. ἀνὰ μέσον, see avd, 1.] 

ἀνα-μιμνήσκω ; fut. ἀναμνήσω (fr. the form μνάω) ; Pass., 
[pres. ἀναμιμνήσκομαι); 1 aor. ἀνεμνήσθην; [fr. Hom. 
down]; fo call to remembrance, to remind: twa τί one of 
a thing [W. § 32, 4a.], 1 Co. iv. 17; to admonish, τινά 
foll. by inf., 2 Tim.i. 6. Pass. to recall to one’s own mind, 
to remember; absol: Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing, 
Mk. xiv. 72 Rec. τί, Mk. xiv. 72 L T Tr WH; context- 
ually, to (remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii. 
15; Heb. x. 32; ef. W. § 30, 10c.; [B. § 132, 14]; 
Matth. ii. p. 820 sq. [Cowr.: ἐπ-αναμιμνήσκω. SYN. 
see ἀνάμνησις fin.]* 

ἀνάμνησις, -eos, 7, (ἀναμιμνήσκω), a remembering, recol- 
lection: els τ. ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν to call me (affectionately) 
to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. 
xi.24sq. ἐν αὐταῖς (sc. θυσίαις) ἀνάμνηαις ἁμαρτιῶν in 
offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. 6. 
the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacri- 
fices, Heb. x. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.* 

[Sxx. ἀνάμνησις, ὑπόμνησις : The distinction between these 
words as stated by Ammonius et al. — viz. that ἀνάμν. denotes 
an unassisted recalling, ὑπόμν. a remembrance prompted by 
another,— seems to be not wholly without warrant; note 
the force of ὑπό (cf. our ‘sug-gest’). But even in class. Grk. 
the words are easily interchangeable. Schmidt ch. 14; 
Trench ὃ cvii. 6, cf. p. 61 note; Ellie. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim. 
1:51 

dya-vedw, -ῶ: to renew, (often in Grk. writ.); Pass. [W. 
§ 39, 3 N. 3; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal 
force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc.] ἀνανεοῦσθαι 
τῷ πνεύματι to be renewed in mind, i.e. to be spiritually 
transformed, to take on a new mind [see νοῦς, 1 b. fin. ; 


40 





ἀναπαύω 


πνεῦμα, fin.], Eph. iv. 28. Cf. Tittmann i. p. 60; [Trench 
§§ Ix. xviii.], and ἀνακαινόω above.” 

ἀνα-νήφω : [*in good auth. apparently confined to the 
pres.’; 1 aor. ἀνένηψα] ; to return to soberness (ἐκ μέθης, 
which is added by Grk. writ.); metaph.: 2 Tim. ii. 26 
ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος [ W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free 
from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind 
[‘one’s sober senses’]. (Philo, lege. allez. ii. $ 16 dva- 
videt, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι peravoet; add Joseph. antt. 6, 11, 10; 
Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5, 1.) [See dypv- 
mvéo, fin.]* 

"Avavías [ WH. 'Avav., see their Intr. $ 408], -a [but on 
the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Ananias (773m), fr. 137) to be 
gracious, and ; Jehovah, [cf. Mey. on Acts v. 1]): 
1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of 
Sapphira: Acts v. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus: 
Actsix. 10-18; xxii. 12 sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus, 
and high priest of the Jews c. A. D. 47-59. In the year 
66 he was slain by the Sicarii: Acts xxiii. 2 sq.; xxiv. 
1 sq.; Joseph. antt. 20, 5, 2; 6,2; 9, 2-45 b. j. 2, 17, 6; 
98. [Cle ey salt 

av-avti-ppytos [WH ἀναντίρητος ; see P, p], -ov, (a priv., 
ἀντί, and ῥητός fr. PEQ to say), not contradicted and not 
to be contradicted ; undeniable, [not to be gainsaid]; in the 
latter sense, Acts xix. 36. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. 
fr. Polyb. down.)* 

ἀναντιρρήτως [ WIT ἀναντιρήτως, see their App. p. 163, 
and P, p], adv., without contradiction: Acts x. 29 (I came 
without gainsaying). Polyb. 23, 8, 11, [al. ].* 

ἀν-άξιος, -ov, (a priv. and ἄξιος), [fr. Soph. down], un- 
worthy (τινός) τ unfit for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.* 

ἀν-αξίως, adv., [fr. Soph. down], in an unworthy man- 
ner: 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Rec. [Cf. W. 463 (431).]* 

ἀνά-παυσις, -ews, 7, (ἀναπαύω), {fr. Mimnerm., Pind. 
down]; 1. intermission, cessation, of any motion, busi- 
ness, labor: ἀνάπαυσιν οὐκ ἔχουσι λέγοντες [ Rec. λέγοντα] 
equiv. to οὐκ ἀναπαύονται λέγοντες they incessantly say, 
Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation: Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 
24; Rev. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed 
tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28; li. 27; 
Sap. iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a. 
respite, e. g. of soldiers; cf. Schmidt ch. 25; Bp. Lghtft. 
on Philem. 7; Trench ὃ xli.] * 

éva-ratw: fut. ἀναπαύσω; 1 aor. dvémavga; pf. pass. 
ἀναπέπαυμαι ; Mid., [pres. ἀναπαύομαι] ; fut. ἀναπαύσομαι 
(Rev. vi. 11 [Lchm. ed. min., Tdf. edd. 2, 7, WH; but 
GL T Tr with R -σωνται]). and in the colloquial speech 
of inferior Grk. ἀναπαήσομαι (Rev. xiv. 13 LT Tr WH, 
cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans. p. 64 sq.; Kühner i. 886 ; 
[ Taf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 170]; see also in 
ἐπαναπαύωγ ; 1 aor. ἀνεπαυσάμην : (a common verb fr. 
Hom. down): to cause or permit one to cease from any 
movement or labor in order to recover and collect his 
strength (note the prefix ἀνά and distinguish fr. kara- 
παύω, [see ἀνάπαυσις, fin. ]), to give rest, refresh; mid. to 
give one's self rest, take rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after 
travelling, Mk. vi. 31; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi. 
45; Mk. xiv. 41; of the sweet repose one enjoys after 


> f 
ἀναπείθω 


toil, Lk. xii. 19; to keep quiet, of calm and patient expec- 
tation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead, 
Rev. xiv. 13 (ἐκ τῶν κόπων exempt from toils [cf. B. 158 
(138)]; Plat.Critias in. ἐκ μακρᾶς ὁδοῦ). By a Hebraism 
(Sy maa, Isa. xi. 2) τὸ πνεῦμα ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἀναπαύεται rests 
upon you, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv. 14. Act. to refresh, 
the soul of any one: τινά, Mt. xi. 28; τὸ πνεῦμά τινος, 
1 Co. xvi. 18; τὰ σπλάγχνα τινός, Philem. 20. In pass., 
Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν from your 
sieht, attentions, intercourse). [Comp.: éz- evi- (-par).]* 

ἀνα-πείθω ; to stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ. aufreizen), 
to solicit, incite: twa τι ποιῆσαι, Acts xviii. 13. So also 
in Hdt., Thuc., Plat., Xen., al.* 

ἀνάπειρος, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf. 
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22: διὰ τοῦ m τὴν 
τρίτην, ov διὰ τῆς εἰ διφθόγγου ὡς οἱ ἀμαθεῖς} in some 
Mss. in Lk. xiv. 13, 21 (and adopted by 1, Tr WH;; [see 
WH. App. p. 1517) for ἀνάπηρος, q. v. 

ἀνα-πέμπω : 1 aor. ἀνέπεμψα; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. 
down]; 1. to send up; i. e. 


Marius c. 17; [Philo de creat. princip. $ 8; Joseph. b. j. 
2, 20, 5]): twa πρός τινα, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15; Acts xxv. 21 
-LTTrWH. 42. to send back: τινά, Philem. 12 (11); 
τινά τινι, Lk. xxiii. 11.* 

ἀνα-πηδάω: [1 aor. ptep. ἀναπηδήσας] ; (Hom. Il. 11, 
379; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.); to leap up, spring up, 
start up: ἀναπηδήσας, Mk. x. 50 LT Tr WH ; ef. Fritzsche 
ad loc. (1 5. xx. 34; Prov. xviii. 4 [Ald. ete.]; Tob. 
119 4:5 σι, 8.» walle 6 Ὁ)" 

ἀνά-πηρος, -ον, (prop. πηρός fr. the lowest part to the 
highest — ava; hence Suid. ὁ καθ᾽ ὑπερβολὴν πεπηρωμένος, 
[ef. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs, 
maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member 
of the body: Lk. xiv. 13, 21 ἀναπήρους, χωλούς, τυφλούς. 
In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain 
Mss. the spelling ἀναπείρους ---- manifestly false, as aris- 
ing from itacism. (Plat. Crito p. 53 a. χωλοὶ καὶ τυφλοὶ 
καὶ ἄλλοι avarnpo; Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585», 
29 | γίνονται ἐξ ἀναπήρων ávánnpo:; Lys. ap. Suid. ῥῖνα καὶ 
ὦτα ἀνάπηρος ; 2 Mace. viii. 24 rois μέλεσιν ἀναπήρους." 

ἀνα-πίπτω: 2 aor. ἀνέπεσον, 3 pers. plur. ἀνέπεσον Mk. 
vi. 40 ((T Tr WH dvézecav); Jn..vi. 10 (LT Tr WH 
avérecay), inf. ἀναπεσεῖν, impv. ἀνάπεσε Lk. xiv. 10 (Rec. 
ἀνάπεσον fr. 1 aor. ἀνέπεσα, [ (Grsb. ἀνάπεσαι i. e. 1 aor. 
mid. impv.)]) ; Lk. xvii. 7 [RG ἀνάπεσαι, cf. WH. App. 
p.164; Tf. Proleg. p. 123; see πίπτω], ptep. ἀναπεσών; 
cf. W. $ 13, 1 p. 73 (71); [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59); fr. 
Eur. down]; to lie back, lie down: absol., Mk. vi. 40; 
Jn. vi. 10, (sc. on the ground) ; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Mt. xv. 35 ; ἐπὶ 
τῆς yrs, Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 216; [W. 23 (22)]) for ἀνακλίνομαι to recline at table: 
Lk. xi. 37; xiv.10; xvii.7; xxii. 14; Jn. xiii. 12; xxi. 
20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back, 
Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an act rather than a 
state, and in the last pass. differs from ἀνάκειμαι, vs. 23, 
by indicating a change of position. ]* 

ἀνα-πληρόω, -6; fut. avamAnpoow; 1 aor. ἀνεπλήρωσα; 


a. to a higher place; | 
d | 
b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Plut. 


41 





ἀνάστασις 


[pres. pass. ἀναπληροῦμαι] ; (ἀνά to, up to, e. g. to fill a 
vessel up to the brim; up to the appointed measure or 
standard, Germ. an fiillen) ; [fr. Eurip. down]; ἝΞ 
to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 223); 
hence trop. ἁμαρτίας, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is still 
wanting to complete the number of their sins; on the 
meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16; Dan. viii. 23; ix. 24; Mt. xxiii. 
32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). ἀναπληροῦται ἡ προφητεία the 
prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corre- 
sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. τὸν νόμον to fulfil i. e. observe 
the law perfectly, Gal. vi. 2, (Barn. ep. 21 ἀναπλ. πᾶσαν 
ἐντολήν) ; τὸν τόπον τινός to fill the place of any one, 
1 Co. xiv. 16 (after the rabbin. Dip» NOD to hold the 
position of any one, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]). 2. to 
supply : τὸ ὑστέρημα, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 17 
(they by their presence supplied your place in your ab- 
sence); cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τι ἐξέλιπον, σὸν 
ἔργον (sc. ἐστίν) ἀναπληρῶσαι. Cf. Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq.; [Ellic. on Phil. 1. ¢., or Mey. 
on Gal.l.c. Cowr.: ἀντ-, προσ-αναπληρόω |.” 

ἀναπολόγητος, -ov, without defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20; 
also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1. 
(Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) * 

ἀνα-πτύσσω: 1 aor. ἀνέπτυξα; (àvá— cf. the Germ. auf 
i. q. auseinander, see dvakiw—and πτύσσω to fold up, 
roll together); to unroll, [i. e. open for reading]: τὸ. 
βιβλίον (as in Hdt. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17 [RG T], 
(2 K. xix. 14). The books of the Hebrews were rolls 
(nya) fastened to [one or] two smooth rods and fur- 
nished with handles, so that they could be rolled up and 
unrolled; [ef. B. D. s. v. Writing ].* 

ἀνάπτω; 1 aor. ἀνῆψα: 1 aor. pass. ἀνήφθην; to light 
up, kindle: Lk. xii. 49; Acts xxviii. 2 [R 67; Jas. iii. 5. 
[From Hdt. down.] * 

ἀν-αρίθμητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἀριθμέω), innumerable : 
Heb. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.] ἢ 

ἀνασείω; 1 aor. dvégewa; to shake up; trop. lo stir 
up, excite, rouse: τὸν ὄχλον, Mk. xv. 11; τὸν λαόν, Lk. 
xxii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 
8, 81.)* 

ἀνα-σκευάζω ; (σκευάζω, fr. σκεῦος a vessel, utensil) ; 
1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to 
carry it away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8. 
Mid. to move one’s furniture (when setting out for some 
other place, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5,4 ὅταν δὲ ἀνασκευάζωνται, 
συντίθησι μὲν ἕκαστος τὰ σκεύη) ; hence 2. of an 
enemy dismaniling, plundering, a place (Thue. 4, 116); 
to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, ete.; trop. 
ψυχάς, to turn away violently from a right state, to un- 
setile, subvert: Acts xv. 24.* 

ἀνα-σπάω, -ῶ: ἀνασπάσω; 1 aor. pass. aveamaaOny; to 
draw up: Lk. xiv.5; Acts xi. 10. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἀνάστασις, -εως, 7, (ἀνίστημι), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; 
1. a raising up, rising, (e. g. fr. a seat): Lk. ii. 34 (opp. 
to πτῶσις; the meaning is ‘It lies [or ‘is set’ A. V.] 
like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to 
climb; but others will strike against it and fall’). 2. 
a rising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrectio), [ Aeschyl. 


ἀναστατόω 


Eum. 6481; a. thatof Christ: Actsi.22; ii.31; iv. 
33; Ro. vi.5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 21; with the addi- 
tion of νεκρῶν, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase : the resurrection- 
of-the-dead, although it has come to pass as yet only in 
the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. $ 30, 2 a. 
fin.); ἐκ νεκρῶν, 1 Pet.i.3. b. that of all men at the 
end of the present age. This is called simply ἀνάστασις 
or ἡ ἀνάστασις, Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 23; 
Lk. xx. 27, 33, 36; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2 
Tim. ii. 18; by meton. i. 4. the author of resurrection, Jn. 
xi. 25; with the addition of ἡ ἐκ νεκρῶν, Lk. xx. 355 Acts 
iv.2; or simply of τῶν νεκρῶν [on the distinction which 
some (e. g Van Hengel on Ro. i. 4; Van Hengel and Bp. 
Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 11; Cremer s. v.) would make between 
these phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii. 
31; Acts xvii. 32; xxiii. 6; xxiv. 15 [Rec.], 21; xxvi. 
93; 1 Co. xv. 12 sq. 21, 42; Heb. vi.2. ἀνάστ. ζωῆς res- 
urrection to life (dv. eis ζωήν, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [cf. Dan. xii. 
2), and ἀν. τῆς κρίσεως resurrection to judgment, Jn. v. 
29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)) ; the former is 7j 
dvácr. τῶν δικαίων, Lk. xiv. 14; κρείττων ἀνάστασις, Heb. 
xi. 35 (so called in comparison with a continuance of life 
on earth, which is spoken of as an ἀνάστασις by a kind of 
license; [cf. W. 460 (429) ]). ἡ ἀνάστ. ἡ πρώτη in Rev. 
xx. 5 sq. will. be that of true Christians, and at the end 
of a thousand years will be followed by a second resur- 
rection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq. 
On the question whether and in what sense Paul also 
believed in two resurrections, separated from each other 
by a definite space of time, ef. Grimm in the Zeitschr. 
für wissenschaft]. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res- 
urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were 
restored to life before burial: Heb. xi. 35.* 

ἀναστατόω, -@; 1 aor. ἀνεστάτωσα; à verb found no- 
where in prof. auth., but [in Dan. vii. 23 Sept.; Deut. 
xxix. 27 Graec. Venet.] several times in the O. T. frag- 
ments of Aquila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g. 
Ps. lyiii. 11; Ts. xxii. 3], and in Eustathius, (fr. ἀνάστατος, 
driven from one’s abode, outcast, or roused up from 
one’s situation; accordingly equiv. to ἀνάστατον ποιῶ) 
to stir up, excite, unsetile; foll. by an ace. a. to excite 
tumults and seditions in the State: Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 
38. b. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating 
religious error: Gal. v. 12." 

ἀνα-σταυρόω, -d; lo raise up upon a cross, crucify, (ἀνά 
as in ἀνασκολοπίζω) : Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hdt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. 
iii. p. 9 sq.; [Winer admits that in Heb. 1. c. the meaning 
to crucify again, or afresh, may also be assigned to this 
verb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent 
in prof. writ. for such a sense is, from the nature of the 
case, not surprising ].* 

dya-orevato: 1 aor. ἀνεστέναξα; to draw sighs up from 
the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply: Mk. viii. 12. 
(Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17); 2 Mace. vi. 30, and in 
Grk. writ. fr. [ Aeschyl. choéph. 335,] Hdt. 1, 86 down.) * 

ἀνα-στρέφω:: fut. ἀναστρέψω; [1 aor. ἀνέστρεψα; Pass., 
pres. ἀναστρέφομαι]; 2 aor. ἀνεστράφην; 1. to turn 


42 





ἀνατίθημι 


upside down, overturn: τὰς τραπέζας, Jn. ii. 15, (δίφρους, 
Hom. Il. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W. 
251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. revertor, 
(as in Grk. writ.; in Sept. i. q. 230) : Acts v. 22; xv. 
16 (here ἀναστρέψω καί has not like the Hebr. 3132 the 
force of an adverb, again, but God in the Messiah's 
advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of 
as having previously abandoned; cf. W. 469 (437)). 
3. to turn hither and thither; pass. reflexively, to turn 
one’s self about, sojourn, dwell, év in a place; a. liter- 
ally: Mt. xvii. 22, where L T WH Tr txt. συστρεφομένων, 
cf. Keim ii. p. 581 [Eng. trans.iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. 5: 
Ezek. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. like the Hebr. 
yon to walk, of the manner of life and moral character, 
to conduct one’s self, behave one’s self, live: 2 Co. i. 12 
(ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ) ; 1 Tim. iii. 15 (ἐν οἴκῳ 6co0) ; Eph. ii. 3 
(ἐν οἷς among whom); 2 Pet. ii. 18 (ἐν πλάνῃ). simply 
to conduct or behave one’s self, ‘walk’, (Germ. wandeln) : 
1 Pet.i.17; Heb. x. 33; (καλῶς) xiii. 18. [Cf. its use 
e. g. in Xen. an. 2, 5, 14; Polyb.1, 9, 7; 74, 13; 86,5 
ete., (see ἀναστροφή, fin.); Prov. xx. 7 Sept.; Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; etc.]* 

ἀνα-στροφή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. the pass. ἀναστρέφομαι, see the 
preceding word), prop. ‘walk,’ i. e. manner of life, be- 
havior, conduct, (Germ. Lebenswandel): Gal.i.13; Eph. 
iv. 22; 1 Tim.iv. 12; Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 15, 18; 1i. 12; 
iii.1sq. 16; 2Pet.ii. 7; plur. ἅγιαι ἀναστροφαί the ways 
in which holy living shows itself, 2 Pet.iii. 11. Hence 
life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Heb. xiii. 7. 
(This word, in the senses given, is found in Grk. writ. 
fr. Polyb. 4, 82, 1 down; in the Scriptures first in Tob. 
iv. 14; 2 Mace. v. 8; add Epict. diss. 1, 9, 55 4, 7, 5, 
[and (fr. Soph. Lex. s. ν.) Agatharchides 134, 12; 153, 
8; Aristeas 16].)* 

dva-ráccopav; [1 aor. mid. inf. ἀνατάξασθαι) ; (mid. 
of dvaráca o), to put together in order, arrange, compose : 
διήγησιν, Lk. i. 1 (so to construct [ R. V. draw up] a nar- 
rative that the sequence of events may be evident. 
Found besides only in Plut. de sollert. anim. e. 12, where 
it denotes to go regularly through a thing again, re- 
hearse it; [in Eccl. ii. 20 Ald., and in eccl. writ. e. g. 
Iren. 3, 21, 2 sub fin.]).* 

ἀνα-τέλλω; 1 aor. ἀνέτειλα: pf. ἀνατέταλκα; — a. trans. 
to cause to rise: τὸν ἥλιον, Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bring- 
ing forth plants, Gen. iii. 18; of a river producing 
something, Hom. Il. 5, 777). b. intrans. fo rise, arise: 
light, Mt. iv. 16, (Ts. lviii. 10) ; the sun, Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. 
iv.6; xvi. 2; Jas.i.11; the clouds, Lk. xii. 54; φωσφό- 
pos, 2Pet.i.19. trop. to rise from, be descended from, 
Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used ἀνα- 
τέλλειν of the sun and moon, and ἐπιτέλλειν of the stars; 
but Aelian. Paus., Stob. and other later writ. neglect 
this distinction; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq. [Cowr.: 
ἐξ-ανατέλλω.} * 

dva-r(@npe: 2 aor. mid. ἀνεθέμην ; [in various senses fr. 
Hom. down]; in the mid. voice fo set forth a thing 
drawn forth, as it were, from some corner (ἀνά), to set 


forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before]: τινί τι, Acts 


᾿ἀνατολή 


xxv. 14; Gal. ii. 2, (2 Mace. iii. 9; [Mic. vii. 5]; Artem. 
oneir. 2, 64 τινὶ τὸ ὄναρ; Diog. Laért. 2, 17, 16 p. 191 
ed. Heubn.; Plut. amat. narr. p. 772 d.) Cf. Fritzschio- 
rum Opusce. p. 169; [Holsten, Zum Evang. des Paulus 
u. d. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp.: προσ-ανατίθημι. *. 

ἀνατολή, -ῆς, ἡ. (£r. ἀνατέλλω, q. v.), as in Grk. writ. ; 
1. a rising (of the sun and stars); light rising ἐξ ὕψους, 
Lk. i. 78. 2. the east (the quarter of the sun's ris- 
ing): Mt. ii. 2, 9; Rev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. ἀνατολῶν) ; Hdian. 
2, 8, 18 (10); 3, 5, 1; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14, 3, [6; 1, 26, 
6; Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion']; Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 5,6; Ignat. ad Ro. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb. 
h. e. 4, 26, 14; with ἡλίου added, Rev. vii. 2 [R G T Tr 
WH tst.]; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 176 (166)]: 
Mt.ii.1; vil. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt., 
Plat., Polyb., Plut. al.; Philo in Flacc. § 7); with the 
addition of ἡλίου, Rev. xvi. 12 [-Ags T Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
vii. 2 L WH mrzg.].* 

ἀνα-τρέπω ; to overthrow, overturn, destroy; ethically, 
to subvert: οἴκους families, Tit. i. 11. 
2 Tim. ii. 18. 
sense.)* 

ἀνα-τρέφω: 2 aor. pass. ἀνετράφην ; pf. pass. ptep. ἀνα- 
τεθραμμένος ; 1 aor. mid. ἀνεθρεψάμην; to nurse up, nour- 
ish up, (Germ. aufnühren, auffüttern) ; prop. of young 
children and animals nourished to promote their growth 
(Xen. mem. 4, 3, 10, ete.; Sap. vii. 4) ; to bring up: Lk. 
iv.16 T WH mrg.; Acts vii. 20 sq.; with the predomi- 
nant idea of forming the mind, Acts xxii. 3, (4 Macc. 
x. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. 
etc. Pt. iii. p. 4.* 

&ya-ba(vo : 1 aor. ἀνέφανα, Doric for the more com. 
avednva, (Acts xxi. 3 R'T WH [with Erasm., Steph., 
Mill]; cf. Passow p. 2199; [ Veitch, and L. and S., s. v. 
φαίνω; W.89 (85); B. 41 (35)]; see ἐπιφαίνω) ; Pass., 
[pres. ἀναφαίνομαι] ; 2 aor. ἀνεφάνην ; [fr. Hom. down]; 
to bring to light, hold up to view, show; Pass. to appear, 
be made apparent: Lk. xix. 11. An unusual phrase is 
dvaQavévres τὴν Κύπρον having sighted Cyprus, for ἀναφα- 
veians ἡμῖν τῆς Κύπρου, Acts xxi. 3; cf. B. 190 (164); W. 
$39,1a.p.260(244); here R* T WH [see above] read 
dvadávavres τὴν K. after we had rendered Cyprus visible 
(to us); [R. V. had come in sight of Cyprus. ].* 

dva-bépo; fut. ἀνοίσω (Lev. xiv. 20; Num. xiv. 33, 
ete.); 1 aor. dvrveyka; 2 aor. ἀνήνεγκον ; [see reff. s. v. 
φέρω; impf. pass. dvepepounv; fr. Hom. down]; 1. to 
carry or bring up, to lead up; men to a higher place: 
Mt. xvii. 1; Mk. ix. 2; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf.om. WH 
reject the cl.]. ἀναφέρειν τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον, 1 Pet. 
ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, se. in order to expi- 
ate them by suffering death, [ef. W: 428 sq. (399)]). 2. 
to pul upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept. 
for 719 Yi of presentation as a priestly act, cf. Kurtz 
on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), θυσίας, θυσίαν. etc., (Isa. lvii. 6, 
etc): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with ἐπὶ τὸ 
θυσιαστήριον added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20; Lev. xiv. 
20; [Bar.i.10; 1 Mace. iv. 53]) ; [éavróv, Heb. vii. 27, 
T Tr mrg. WH mrg. προσενέγκας]. Cf.Kurtzu.s. 8. 


τὴν τινων πίστιν, 
(Common in Grk. writ., and in the same 


43 


᾿Ανδρόνικος 


to lift up on one's self, to take upon one’s self, i. e. to place 
on one’s self anything as a load to be upborne, to sus- 
tain: τὰς ἁμαρτίας i. e. by meton. their punishment, Heb. 
ix. 28, (Is. liii. 12; τὴν πορνείαν, Num. xiv. 33); cf. Win. 


De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.* 


ἀνα-φωνέω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἀνεφώνησα; to cry out with a loud 
voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk.i.42. (1 Chr. xv. 28; xvi. 
4; [Aristot. de mund. 6, vol. i. p. 400", 18]; Polyb., 
often in Plut.)* 

ἀνά χυσις, -ews, 7, (ἀναχέω [to pour forth ]), rare in Grk. 
writ. [Strabo, Philo, Plut.; av. ψυχῆς, in a good sense, 
Philo de decal. $ 10 mid.]; an overflowing, a pouring 
out: metaph., 1 Pet. iv. 4 ἀσωτίας ἀνάχυσις the excess 
(flood) of riot in which a dissolute life pours itself 
forth.* 

ἀνα-χωρέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. ἀνεχώρησα; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ; 
1. to go back, return: Mt. ii. 12 sq. [al. refer this to next 
head]. 2. to withdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room: 
Mt.ix.24. b. of those who through fear seek some 
other place, or shun sight: Mt. ii. 14, 22; iv. 12; xii. 15; 
xiv. 13; xv. 21; xxvii. 5; Mk. iii. 7; Jn. vi. 15 [ T df. 
φεύγει]; Acts xxiii. 19 (κατ᾽ ἰδίαν) ; xxvi. 31.* 

avd-puéts, -ews, 7, (ἀναψύχω, q. v.), a cooling, refresh- 
ing: Acts iii. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be 
ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven; Vulg. 
refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 15; Philo de Abr. $ 29; Strabo 
10, p. 459; and in 600]. writ.)* 

ἀνα ψύχω: 1 aor. ἀνέψυξα; to cool again, to cool off, 
recover from the effects of heat, (Hom. Od. 4, 568; Il. 5, 
795; Plut. Aem. P. 25, ete.) ; trop. to refresh: τινά, one's 
spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i. 
16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, re- 
vive, refresh one's self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 14; 
2 5. xvi. 14; Ex. xxiii. 12; 1,S. xvi. 23; etc., in] 2 Macc. 
iv. 46; xiii. 11; and in the later Grk. writ.)* 

ἀνδραποδιστής, -oU, 6, (fr. ἀνδραποδίζω, and this fr. τὸ 
ἀνδράποδον --- ἔν. ἀνήρ and ποῦς ---ἃ slave, a man taken in 
war and sold into slavery), « slave-dealer, kidnapper, 
man-stealer, i.e. as well one who unjustly reduces free 
men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others 
and sells them: 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., 
Dem., Isocr., Lys., Polyb.)* 

*AvSpéas, -ov, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning 
manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. V. ; 
B. D. s. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in 
Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the 
Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ: Jn. i. 40, 44 
(41, 45); vi. 8; xii. 22; Mt.iv.18; x. 2; Mk.i.16, 29; 
iii. 18; xiii.3; Lk. vi. 14; Actsi. 13.* 

ἀνδρίζω: (ἀνήρ); to make a man of or make brave, 
(Xen. oec. 5, 4). Mid. pres. ἀνδρίζομαι; to show one’s 
self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [ A. V. quit you like 
men]. (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Macc. ii. 64; 
Xen., Plat., App., Plut., al.)* 

᾿Ανδρόνικος, -ov, 6, Androni'cus, (a Grk. name, [lit. man 
of victory; for its occurrence see Pape, Eigennamen, 
s. v.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul: Ro. 


xvi. 7.* 





ἀνδροφόνος 


ἀνδρο-φόνος, -ov, ó, a manslayer: 1 Tim.i. 9. (2 Mace. 
ix. 28; Hom., Plat, Dem., al.) [Cf. φονεύς. ἢ 

dy-€ykAnros, -ov, (a priv. and ἐγκαλέω, q. v.), that can- 
not be called to account, unreprovable, unaccused, blame- 
less: 1 Co.i. 8; Col. i. 22; 1 Tim. iii. 10; Tit. 1. 6 sq. (8 
Mace. v. 31; Xen, Plat, Dem., Aristot, al)  [Cf. 
Trench $ ciii.]* 

ἀν-εκδιήγητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκδιηγέομαι, q. v.), un- 
speakable, indescribable: 2 Co. ix. 15 δωρεά, to describe 
and commemorate which words fail. (Only in ecel. writ. 
[Clem. Rom.1Cor 20, 5; 49,4; Athenag., Theoph., al.].)* 

ἀν-εκ-λάλητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκλαλέω), unspeakable : 
1 Pet.i.8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diosc. 
medicam. p. 93 ed. Kühn]; Heliod. 6, 15 p. 252 (296); 
and in eccl. writ.)* 

ἀνέκλειυπτος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκλείπω to fail), unfailing: 
Lk. xii. 33. ([Hyperid. p. 58' ed. Teubner]; Diod. 4, 
84; 1, 36, cf. 3, 16 ; Plut. de orac. defect. p. 438 d., and 
in eccl. writ.)* 

dv-ekrós, -όν, and in later Grk. also -ós, 7, -óv [cf. W. 
68 (67); B. 25 (22)], (ἀνέχομαι to bear, endure); fr. 
Hom. down; bearable, tolerable: ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται the 
lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22, 24; Mk. 
vi. 11 RLbr.; Lk. x. 12, 14. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.)* 

ἀν-ελεήμων, -ov, gen. -ovos, (a priv. and ἐλεήμων), without 
mercy, merciless: Ro. i. 31.  ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37 
p. 1442», 13]; Prov. v. 9, etc.; Sir. xiii. 12, ete.; Sap. xii. 
Dir pad ILS) bs 

dy-éXeos, -ον, without mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 L'T 
Tr WH, unusual form for ἀνίλεως RG. The Greeks 
said ἀνηλεής and dveAejs, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq. ; 
W. 100 (95).* 

ἀνεμίζω : (ἄνεμος) ; to agitate or drive by the wind; pres. 
pass. ptep. ἀνεμιζόμενος, Jas. i. 6. Besides only in schol. 
on Hom. Od. 12, 336 ἔνθα ἢν σκέπη πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀνεμίζεσθαι, 
[Hesych. s. v. ἀναψύξαι: avepioar; Joannes Moschus 
(in Patr. Graec. Ixxxvii. p. 3044 a.) ἀνεμίζοντος τοῦ πλοίου 
velificante nave]. The Greeks said ἀνεμόω. Cf. κλυδω- 
νίζομαι." 

ἄνεμος, -ου, 6, (do, ἄημι to breathe, blow, [but etymolo- 
gists connect de with Skr. vá, Grk. ἀήρ, Lat. ventus, 
Eng. wind, and ἄνεμος with Skr. an to breathe, ete.; cf. 
Curtius §§ 419, 587; Vanicek p. 28]), [fr. Hom. down], 
wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [cf. (Trench 
§ Ixxiii.) πνεῦμα, 1 fin.]: Mt. xi. 7; xiv. 24; Jas. iii. 4, 
ete.; of a very strong and tempestuous wind: Mt. vii. 
25; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. viii. 24, etc. οἱ τέσσαρες ἄνεμοι, the 
four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)), 
τῆς γῆς, Rev. vii. 1; hence the four quarters of the 
heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow): Mt. xxiv. 
31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24). 
Metaph. ἄνεμος τῆς διδασκαλίας, variability and empti- 
ness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14. 

ἀν-ένδεκτος, -ov, (a priv. and ἔνδεκτος, and this fr. ἐνδέ- 
Xonar, q. v.), that cannot be admitted, inadmissible, unal- 
lowable, improper: ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστι τοῦ μὴ ἐλθεῖν it cannot 
be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1 [W. 328 (308); 


44 





a7 
αν exa 


B. 269 (231)]. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 ὁ ἀριθμὸς πρὸς τὸν 
μέλλοντα χρόνον ávévüekros, [ Diog. Laert. 7, 50], and sev- 
eral times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.) * 

ἀνεξερεύνητος, T Tr WH -ραύνητος [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
81; B. 58 (50) ; Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 117; 
see épavváo ], -ov, (a priv. and é£epevváo), that cannot be 
searched out: Ro. xi. 33. (Symm. Prov. xxv. 3; Jer. 
xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)* 

dveEl-Kaxos, -ov, (fr. the fut. of ἀνέχομαι, and κακόν; cf. 
classic ἀλεξίκακος, üuvraikakos), patient of ills and wrongs, 
Jorbearing: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Leian. jud. voc. 9; [Justin 
M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)* 

ἀνεξιχνίαστος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐξιχνιάζω to trace ont), 
that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended, 
[A. V. unsearchable]: Ro. xi. 33; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v. 
9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24]; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. ed. 
Tdf., Proleg. $ xxix.]; several times in eccl. writ.)* 

ἀν-επ-αίσχυντος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐπαισχύνω), (Vulg. 
inconfusibilis), having no cause to be ashamed: 2 Tim. ii. 
15. ([Joseph. antt. 18, 7, 1]; unused in Grk. writ. [W. 
236 (221)].)* 

ἀν-επίτληπτος [LT Tr WH -λημπτος ; see M, p], -ov, (a 
priv. and ἐπιλαμβάνω), prop. not apprehended, that cannot 
be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open 
lo censure, irreproachable, ['Tittmann i.p. 31; Trench 
$ciii.]: 1 Tim. iii. 2; v. 7; vi. 14. (Freq. in Grk. writ. 
fr. [Eur. and] Thue. down.)* 

ἀν-έρχομαι : 2 aor. ἀνῆλθον; [fr. Hom. down]; fo go 
up: Jn. vi. 3; to a higher place; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 17 
[L Tr mrg. ἀπῆλθον), 18; (1 K. xiii. 12). [Comp.: 
ém-avépxopau. ] * 

ἄν-εσις, -ews, 1), (ἀνίημι to let loose, slacken, anything 
tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a 
more tolerable condition in captivity: ἔχειν ἄνεσιν to be 
held in less rigorous confinement [R. V. have indulgence], 
Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10 φυλακὴ μὲν yap καὶ 
τήρησις ἦν, μετὰ μέντοι ἀνέσεως τῆς εἰς δίαιταν). relief, 
rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7; from the troubles of 
poverty, 2 Co. viii. 13; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co. 
ii. 13 (12); vii. 5. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. [ Hdt. 
5,28] down.) [Syn. see ἀνάπαυσις, fin.] * 

ἀν-ετάζω ; pres. pass. ἀνετάζομαι ; (érá(o to examine, 
test); to investigate, examine; τινά, to examine judicially: 
Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Judg. vi. 29 cod. Alex.; Sus. [i. e. 
Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed. 
Tdf.]. Not found in prof. auth.)* 

ἄνευ, prep. with gen., without: 1 Pet. iii. 1; iv. 9. 
with gen. of the pers. without one's will or intervention, 
(often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down): Mt. x. 29. 
[Compared with χωρίς, see Tittm. i. p. 93 sq.; Ellic. on 
Eph.ii.12; Green, Crit. Notes, etc. (on Ro. iii. 28).]* 

ἀν-εύ-θετος, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not jit: 
Acts xxvii. 12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53 ].)* 

dv-evpieko : 2 aor. ἀνεῦρον, 3 pers. plur. dveüpav, Lk. 
ii. 16 (T Tr WH; see εὑρίσκω) ; to find out by search: 
τινά, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 13 sq.* 

dv«xo: in the N. T. only in the mid. ἀνέχομαι ; fut. 


ἀνεψιός 


ἀνέξομαι (W. 83 (79)); impf. ἠνειχόμην 2 Co. xi. [1 Rec*!”), 
4 [Rec.] (G T Tr WH mrg. ἀνειχόμην [cf. Moeris ed. 
Piers. p. 176; (but L WH txt. in vs. 4 dvéy.) ; cf. WH. 
App. p. 162; W. 72 (70); B. 35 (31)]) ; 2 aor. ἠνεσχό- 
μην Acts xviii. 14 (LT Tr WH ἀνεσχόμην, reff. τι. s.); 
to hold up, (e. g. κεφαλήν, χεῖρας, Hom. et al.) ; hence in 
mid. to hold one’s self erect and firm (against any pers. 
or thing), fo sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear 
with, endure, with a gen. of the pers. (in Grk. writ. the 
accus. is more com., both of the pers. and of the thing), 
of his opinions, actions, etc.: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; 
Lk.ix.41; 2 Co. xi. 19; Eph^iv. 2; Colii.13. foll by 
gen. of the thing: 2 Th. i. 4 [WH mre. évex.] (ais by 
attraction for àv, unless ds be preferred [B. 161 (140); 
cf. W. 202 (190)]). foll. by μικρόν τι with gen. of both 
pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (ace. to the reading pov 
μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης [R72 Τ, Τ ΤΥ WH]; cf. Meyer 
ad loc.). without a case, 1 Co. iv. 12 (we endure). foll. 
by εἴ τις, 2 Co. xi. 20. Owing to the context, to bear 
with i. e. to listen: with gen. of the pers., Acts xviii. 14; 
of the thing, 2 Tim. iv. 3; Heb. xiii. 22. [Cowr.: προσ- 
avéxo.] * 

ἀνεψιός, -ov, 6, [for ἁ-νεπτ-ιός con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne- 
pos, Germ. nichte, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342]. a 


cousin: Col. iv. 10. (Num. xxxvi.11; Tob. vii.2.) [Cf. | 


Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.; 
also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister’s Son.]* 


ἄνηθον, -ov, τό, dill, anise [(2); cf. BB.DD. s. v.; Tris- | 


tram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 419 sq.]: Mt. xxiii. 23. 
(Arstph. nub. 982; [Aristot., al.]; often in Theophr. 
hist. pl.) * 

ἀν-ήκω : [impf. ἀνῆκεν]; in Grk. writ. to have come up 
to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foll. generally by 
εἴς τι; hence in later writ. ἀνήκει τί τινι something apper- 
tains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed 
by others (1 Macc. x. 42; xi. 35; 2 Macc. xiv. 8), and 
then ethically τὸ ἀνῆκον what is due, duty, [R. V. befitting], 
Philem. 8; rà οὐκ ἀνήκοντα unbecoming, discreditable, 
Eph. v. 4 (L T Tr WH ἁ οὐκ ἀνῆκεν, W. 486 (452) ; [B. 
350 (301)]); impers. ὡς ἀνῆκε as was fitting, sc. ever 
since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270 
(254) ; cf. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lehtft. ad loc. ].* 

ἀν-ήμερος, τον (a priv. and ἥμερος), not tame, savage, 
fierce: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [ Anacr. 1, 7] 
Aeschyl. down.)* 

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ó, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this 
word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classie usage; 
for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and 
so to distinguish a man from a woman; either a. asa 
male: Acts viii. 12; xvii.12; 1 Tim.ii. 12; or b. asa 
husband: Mt.i.16; Mk.x.2; Jn.iv.16 sqq.; Ro. vii. 2 
sqq.; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii. 2, 12; Tit. 
i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt.i.19; Rev. 
xxl. 2, etc. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis- 
tinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38 
(where ἄνδρες, γυναῖκες and παιδία are discriminated) ; 
with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue : 


45 





ἄνθραξ 


the last two pass. τέλειος ἀνήρ). 3. univ. any male 
person, a man; so where τὶς might have been used: 
Lk. viii. 41; ix. 38; Acts vi.11; x.5,ete. where ἀνήρ 
and τὶς are united: Lk. viii. 27; Acetsv.1; x.1. or 
ἀνήρ and ὅς he who, ete.: Ro. iv. 8; Jas.i.12. where 
mention is made of something usually done by men, not 
by women: Lk. xxii. 63; Acts v.36. where angels or 
other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms 
of men: Lk. ix. 30; xxiv.4; Actsx.30. where it is so 
connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force 
of a substantive: ἀνὴρ ἁμαρτωλός a sinner, Lk. v. 8; 
λεπροὶ ἄνδρες, Lk. xvii. 12; or is joined to appellatives: 
ἀνὴρ φονεύς, Acts iii. 14; ἀν. προφήτης, Lk. xxiv. 19, 
($22 ws, Judg. vi. 8; [cf. W. 30; § 59,1; B. 82 (72); 
other reff. s. v. ἄνθρωπος, 4 a. fin.]) ; or to gentile names: 
ἄνδρες Νινευῖται, Mt. xii. 41; ἀνὴρ ᾿Ιουδαῖος, Acts xxii. 35 


| dv. Αἰθίοψ, Acts vill. 27; avd. Κύπριοι, Acts xi. 20; esp. 


in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5d.; B. 


| 82 (72)], Actsi. 11; ii. 145 xiii. 16; xvii. 22, etc.; even 
| ἄνδρες ἀδελφοί, Actsi. 16; [ii. 29,37; vii. 2]; xiii. [15], 


26, ete. 4. when persons of either sex are included, 
but named after the more important: Mt. xiv. 35; Acts 
iv.4; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts 
1. c.) to dispute even these examples; but al. would refer 
several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31; Jas. i. 20) to 
the same head]. 

ἀνθ-ίστημι : pf. ἀνθέστηκα ; 2 aor. ἀντέστην, [impv. av- 
τίστητε]. inf. ἀντιστῆναι ; Mid., pres. ἀνθίσταμαι ; impf. 
ἀνθιστάμην (ἀντί and ἵστημι); to set against; as in Grk. 
writ., in the mid., and in the pf. plpf. [having pres. and 
impf. force, W. 274 (257)] and 2 aor. act., to set one’s 
self against, to withstand, resist, oppose: pf. act., Ro. ix. 
19; xiii. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [RG]. 2 aor. act., Mt. v. 39; 
Lk. xxi. 15; Acts vi. 10; Gal. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 13; 2 Tim. 
ii.8; [iv. 15 LT Tr WH]. impv., Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v. 
9. Mid.: pres, 2 Tim. iii. 8S. impf. Acts xiii. 8.* 

ἀνθ-ομολογέομαι, -οῦμαι : [impf. ἀνθωμολογούμην; (ἀντί 
and ὁμολογέομαι) ; in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) τις 
to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree 
mutually (in turn), to make a compact. 3. to acknowl- 
edge in the presence of (ἀντί before, over against; cf. 
ἐξομολογεῖσθαι ἔναντι κυρίου, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see 
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.): τὰς ἁμαρτίας 
to confess sins, Joseph. antt. 8, 10, 3 [ Bekk. reads dvopo- 
Noyoupevous]; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). τινί, to declare 
something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give 
thanks to him, Lk. ii. 38; (for rYmn in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 
13; 3 Macc. vi. 33; [Dan. iv. 31 (34) Sept.; Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Jud. $ 1]).* 

ἄνθος, -cos, τό, [fr. Hom. down]; a flower: Jas. i. 10 
sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24.* 

ἀνθρακιά [on accent cf. Etym. Magn. 801, 21; Chand- 
ler ὃ 95], -as, 7, @ heap of burning coals: Jn. xviii. 18; 
xxi 9. (Sir. xi. 32; 4 Mace. ix. 20; Hom. Il. 9, 213, 
ete.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Coal.]* 

ἄνθραξ, -axos, 6, coal, (also, fr. Thue. and Arstph. down, 


| a live coal), dv6p. πυρός a coal of fire i. e. a burning or 


1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to νήπιος) ; Eph. iv.13; Jas. iii. 2, (in | live coal; Ro. xii. 20 dvÓp. πυρὸς σωρεύειν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν 


, , 
ἀνθρωπάρεσκος 


τινος, à proverbial expression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signify- 
ing to call up, by the favors you confer on your enemy, 
the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which 
shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head), 
that he may the more readily repent. The Arabians 
call things that cause very acute mental pain burning 
coals of the heart and fire in the liver; ef. Gesenius in 
Rosenmiiller’s Bibl.-exeg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his 
Thesaurus i. 280; cf. also BB.DD. s. v. Coal]. * 

ἀνθρωπ-άρεσκος, -ov, (ἄνθρωπος and ἄρεσκος agreeable, 
pleasing, insinuating; cf. εὐάρεσκος, δυσάρεσκος, αὐτά- 
ρεσκος in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 621); only in bibl. and 
eccl. writ. [ W. 25]: studying to please men, courting the 
favor of men: Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22. (Ps. lii. (liii.) 6; 
[Ps. Sal. iv. 8, 10].)* 

ἀνθρώπινος, -ivn, -wvov, (ἄνθρωπος), [fr. Hdt. down], 
human; applied to things belonging to men: χεῖρες, 
Acts xvii. 25 LT Tr WH ; φύσις, Jas. iii. 7; or insti- 
tuted by men: κτίσις, [q. v. 3], 1 Pet. ii. 13; adjusted to 
the strength of man: πειρασμός [R. V. a temptation such 
as man can bear], 1 Co. x. 13 (cf. Neander [and Heinrici] 
adloc.; Pollux 3, 27, 131 ὃ οὐκ dv τις ὑπομένειεν, ὃ οὐκ ἄν 
τις ἐνέγκη . - - τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον, κουφόν, εὔφορον, ὀϊστόν, ἀν- 
θρώπινον, ἀνεκτόν). Opp. to divine things, with the im- 
plied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec.; 13 
(σοφία, originating with man); iv. 3 (ἀνθρωπίνη ἡμέρα 
the judicial day of men, 1. 6. human judgment). ἀνθρώ- 
πινον λέγω, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as 
is usual among men, who do not always suitably weigh 
the force of their words; by this expression the apos- 
tle apologizes for the use of the phrase δουλωθῆναι τῇ 
δικαιοσύνῃ). 

ἀνθρωποκτόνος, -ov, (κτείνω to kill), a manslayer, mur- 
derer: Jn. viii. 44. contextually, to be deemed equal to 
a murderer,1 Jn. iii. 15. (Eur.Iph. T.(382) 389.) [Cf. 
Trench § Ixxxiii. and φονεύς. ἢ 

ἄνθρωπος, -ov, 6, [ perh. fr. ἀνήρ and dy, i. e. man’s face; 
Curtius § 422; Vanicek p. 9. From Hom. down]; man. 
It is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature, 
without distinction of sex, a human being, whether male 
or female: Jn. xvi. 21. And in this sense a. with the 
article, generically, so as to include all human individ- 
uals: Mt. iv. 4 (ἐπ᾿ ἄρτῳ ζήσεται ὁ ἄνθρωπος) ; Mt. xii. 35 
(ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθ. every good person); Mt. xv. 11, 18; Mk. 
ii. 27; vii. 15, 18, 20; Lk.iv.4; Jn.ii. 25 [W. § 18,8]; 
vii. 51; Ro. vii. 1,ete. b. so that a man is distinguished 
from beings of a different race or order; a. from ani- 
mals, plants, etc.: Lk. v.10; Mt.iv.19; xii. 12; 2 Pet. 
ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15, 18; xi. 13, etc. β. from 
God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32; 
xix. 6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. ii. 15 [oT WH om., L Tr br.] (opp. 
toangels); Jn. x. 33; Acts x. 26; xiv. 11; 1 Th. ii. 13; 
Gal. i. 10, 12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil.ii. 7,7 (8); 1 Tim. 
ii. 5; Heb. viii. 2; xiii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4, etc. c. with 
the added notion of weakness, by which man is led 
into mistake or prompted to sin: οὐκ ἄνθρωποί (RG 
σαρκικοί) ἐστε; 1 Co. iii. 4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1 Co. ii-5; 
ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. iv. 2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε 


40 








ἄνθρωπος 


ye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iii. 3; λαλεῖν or 
λέγειν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, to speak according to human modes 
of thinking, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 5; xarà ἄνθρωπον λέγω, 
I speak as a man to whom analogies from human affairs 
present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an 
example drawn from ordinary human life, Gal. iii. 15; 
κατὰ avOp. θηριομαχεῖν, as man is wont to fight, urged on by 
the desire of gain, honor and other earthly advantages, 
1 Co. xv. 32; οὐκ ἔστι κατὰ ἄνθρ. is not accommodated 
to the opinions and desires of men, Gal. i. 11; [for exx. 
of κατὰ ἄνθ. in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom. u. s.]; 
with the accessory notion of malignity: προσέχετε 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Mt. x. 17; eis χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, Mt. 
xvii. 22; Lk.ix. 44. d. with the adjunct notion of 
contempt, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.) : Jn. v. 12; the 
address ὦ ἄνθρωπε, or ἄνθρωπε, is one either of contempt 
and disdainful pity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. Gorg. p. 452 b. σὺ 
06... τίς el, à ἄνθρωπε), or of gentle rebuke, Lk. xxii. 
58,60. The word serves to suggest commiseration : ἴδε 
[T Tr WH ἰδοὺ] ὁ ἄνθρ. behold the man in question, mal- 
treated, défenceless, Jn. xix. 5. 6. with a reference 
to the twofold nature of man, ὁ ἔσω and ὁ ἔξω ἄνθρωπος, 
soul and body: Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; 2 Co. iv. 16, 
(Plat. rep. 9, 589 a. 6 ἐντὸς ἄνθρωπος ; Plotin. Enn. 5, 1, 
10 6 εἴσω dvÓp.; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 61sq; [ Mey. 
on Ro.1.c.; Ellie. on Eph. 1. 6.1); 6 κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας 
ἄνθρ. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofold 
moral condition of man, ὁ παλαιός (the corrupt) and ὁ 
καινὸς (ὁ νέος) avOp. (the truly Christian man, conformed 
to the nature of God): Ro. vi. 6; Eph. ii. 15; iv. 22, 24; 
Col. iii. 9 sq. 8. with a reference to the sex, (context- 
ually) a male: Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without 
the article, ἄνθρωπος, a. some one, a (certain) man, 
when who he is either is not known or is not import- 
ant: 1, α. τὶς, Mt. xvii. 14; xxi. 28; xxii. 11; Mk. xii. 1; 
xiv. 13; Lk. v. 18; xiii. 19, ete. with the addition of τὶς, 
Mt. xviii. 1 Dk. x-:805 xiv. 2, 16: 03v, 1155 ΧΥΠῚ Ol 
Jn.v.5. in address, where the speaker either cannot 
or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20; or where the writer 
addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii. 1, 3. b. where 
what is said holds of every man, so that ἄνθρ. is equiv. 
to the Germ. indef. man, one: Ro. iii. 28; 1 Co. iv. 1; 
vii.1; xi. 28; Gal. ii.16. So also where opp. to domes- 
ties, Mt. x. 36; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10; to a father, Mt. 
x. 35; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 36 sq., — in 
which passages many, confounding sense and signifi- 
cation, incorrectly say that the word dv6p. signifies father 
of a family, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur. of 
dvÓp. is sometimes (the) people, Germ. die Leute: Mt. 
v. 13, 16; vi. 5, 18; viii. 27; xvi. 13; Lk. xi. 44; Mk. 
viii. 24, 27; Jn. iv. 28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων (nemo homi- 
num) no one, Mk.xi.2; 1 Tim. vi. 16. 4. It is joined 
a. to another substantive, — a quasi-predicate of oflice, 
or employment, or characteristic, — the idea of the pred- 
icate predominating [W. § 59, 1]: ἄνθρωπος ἔμπορος a 
merchant (-man), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH txt. om. avOp.]; οἶκο- 
δεσπότης, Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 1; xxi. 33; βασιλεύς, Mt. 
xvii. 23; xxii. 2; φάγος, Mt. xi. 19. (So in Hebr. 


ἀνθυπατεύω 
Ὁ ws a eunuch, Jer. xxxviii. 7 sq., {713 WN a priest, 
Lev. xxi. 9; also in Grk. writ.: ἄνθ. ὁδίτης, Hom. Il. 16, 
263, al.; cf. Matthiae $ 430, 6; [Krüger $ 57, 1, 1]; but 
in Attie this combination generally has a contemptuous 
force; cf. Bnhdy. p.48; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic. 
epp. ad diversos 12, 22, 1). b. to a gentile noun: ἄνθ. 
Κυρηναῖος, Mt. xxvii. 32; Ιουδαῖος, Acts xxi. 39; 'Po- 
paios, Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25, (acc. to the context, a Ro- 
man citizen). 5. ὁ dvÓp., with the article, the partic- 
ular man under consideration, who he is being plain 
from the context: Mt. xii. 13; xxvi. 72; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. 
xxili. 6; Jn. iv. 50. οὗτος ὁ dvO., Lk. xiv. 30; Jn. ix. 16, 
24 [L Tr mrg. WH]; xi. 47; ὁ ἄνθ. οὗτος, Mk. xiv. 
71; Lk. xxiii 4, 14, 47; Jn. ix. 24 [RGT Trtxt.]; 
xvii. 17; Acts vi. 13; xxii 26; xxvi. 31,32. ὁ dv@. 
ἐκεῖνος, Mt. xii. 45; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. 6. Phrases: 
ὁ av. τῆς ἁμαρτίας (or with T Tr txt. WH txt. τ. ἀνομίας), 
2 Th. ii. 3, see ἁμαρτία, 1 p. 30 sq. ἄνθ. rod θεοῦ a man 
devoted to the service of God, God's minister: 1 Tim. 
vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the evangelists, the associates 
of the apostles) ; 2 Pet. i. 21 (of prophets, like ὈΠῸΝ VW 
often in the O. T.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For 
6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου and υἱοὶ τῶν dvÓp., see under vids. 

ἀνθ-υπατεύω ; (ἀντί for i. e. in lieu or stead of any one, 
and ὑπατεύω to be ὕπατος, to be supreme, to be consul) ; 
to be proconsul: Acts xviii. I2 [ R G ; cf. B. 169 (147)]. 
(Plut. comp. Dem. c. Cic. c. 3; Hdian. 7, 5, 2.) * 

ἀνθ-ύπατος, -ov, ó, [see the preceding word], proconsul : 
Acts xiii. 7, 8,12; xvii. 12 LT Tr WH; xix. 38. The 
emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into 
senatorial and imperial The former were presided 
over by proconsuls; the latter were administered by 
legates of the emperor, sometimes called also proprae- 
tors. (Polyb., Dion. H., Leian., Plut., and often in Dio 
Cass.) [Β. Ὁ. 5. ν. Proconsul; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Prov- 
ince; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, 
p- 289 sq:]* 

ἀν-ίημι, [ptep. plur. ἀνιέντες]; 2 aor. subj. avd, ptep. 
plur. ἀνέντες ; 1 aor. pass. aveOnv; to send back; to relax; 
contextually, to loosen: τί, Acts xvi. 26, (rods δεσμούς, 
Plut. Alex. M. 73); xxvii.40. trop. τὴν ἀπειλήν, to give 
up, omit, calm [?], Eph. vi. 9; (τὴν ἔχθραν, Thuc. 3, 10; 
τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Alex. M. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to 
let sink: Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).* 

ἀν-ίλεως, των, gen. τω, (ἵλεως, Attic for ἵλαος), without 
mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [RG]. Found nowhere 
else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. dvéAeos.* 

ἄνιπτος, -ov, (νίπτω to wash), unwashed: Mt. xv. 20; 
Mk. vii. 2, and RUmrg.in 5. (Hom. Il. 6, 266, ete.)* 

ἀν-ίστημι : fut. ἀναστήσω; 1 aor. ἀνέστησα; 2 aor. ἀν- 
έστην, impv. ἀνάστηθι and (Acts xii. 7; Eph. v. 14 and 
L WH txt. in Acts ix. 11) ἀνάστα (W. $ 14, 1 h.; [Β. 47 
(40)]); Mid., pres. ἀνίσταμαι ; fut. ἀναστήσομαι; [fr. 
Hom. down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1 
aor. and fut. act, to cause to rise, raise up, (mpm; 
a. prop. of one lying down: Actsix.41. b. toraise up 
from death: Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34, 
(so in Grk. writ.). | c. to raise up, cause to be born: 


41 





" Avvas 


σπέρμα offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [ef. W. 
33 (32)]; τὸν Χριστόν, Acts ii. 30 Rec. to cause to ap- 
pear, bring forward, τινά τινε one for any one’s succor: 
προφήτην, Acts iii. 22; vii. 37; τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Acts iii. 
26. II. Intransitively, in the pf. plpf. and 2 
aor. act., and in the mid.; 1. to rise, stand up; used 
a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed): Mk. i. 
35; v. 42; Lk. viii. 55; xi. 7; Acts ix. 34,40. of per- 
sons lying on the ground: Mk. ix. 27; Lk. xvii. 19); 
xxil. 46; Acts ix. 6. b. of persons seated: Lk. iv.16 
(ἀνέστη ἀναγνῶναι); Mt. xxvi.62; Mk. xiv. 60; Acts 
xxiii. 9. c. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere: 
Mt. ix.9; Mk. ii. 14; [x.50 RG]; Lk. iv. 38; xxiii. 1 5 
Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves 
for a journey, (Germ. sich aufmachen) : Mk. vii. 24; x. 
1; Lk.i.39; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxii. 10. In the 
same way the Hebr. op (esp. Dp?) is put before verbs 
of going, departing, etc. according to the well 
known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to 
the full pietorial delineation of an action or event; hence 
formerly Dp?! and ἀναστάς were sometimes incorreetly 
said to be redundant; cf. W. 608 (565). ἀναστῆναι ἀπά 
to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been 
doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground : 
Lk. xxii. 45. d. of the dead; 2 aor., with ἐκ νεκρῶν. 
added: Mt. xvii. 9 RG WH mrg.; Mk. ix. 9 Sq:5 ΠΣ 25; 
Lk. xvi. 31; xxiv. 46; Jn. xx. 9; Eph. v. 14 (here fiz.) ; 
with ἐκ νεκρῶν omitted: Mk. viii. 31; xvi. 9; Lk. ix. 8, 
19, [22 LT Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; xxiv. 7; Ro. xiv. 9 Rec.; 
so (without ἐκ vexp.) in the fut. mid. also: Mt. xii. 41; 
[xvii. 23 L WH mrg.]; xx. 19 [RGL Trmre. WH mrg.]; 
Mk.x.34; Lk. xi. 32; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23 sq.; 1 Th. iv. 
16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, proph- 
ets, priests, leaders of insurgents: Acts v. 36 sq.; vii. 
18. mid., Ro. xv.12; Heb. vii.11,15. of those about 
to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk. 
x. 25; Acts vi. 9; or to undertake some business, Acts 
v.6; or to attempt something against others, Acts v. 17. 
Hence ἀναστῆναι ἐπί twa to rise up against any one: Mk. 
iii. 26, (Oy. Dp). [Svw. see ἐγείρω, fin. Cowr.: er, 
e£avía gua. | 

"Avva [WH "Avva, see their Intr. $ 408], -as [on this 
gen. cf. B. 17 (15); Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 138], 7, 
Anna, (nin grace), the prop. name of a woman (so in 
1 5.1. 2 sqq.; ii. 1 Alex.; Tob. i. 9, 20, ete.), a prophetess, 
in other respects unknown : Lk. ii. 36.* 

"Avvas [WH "Avvas, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this- 
gen. cf. W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), 6, (in Joseph. "Avavos; fr. 
Hebr. i31 to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews, 
elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of 
Syria c. A. D. 6 or 7; but afterwards, A. D. 15, deposed 
by Valerius Gratus, the procurator of Judzea, who put in 
his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after 
Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office 
passed to Simon; from Simon c. A.D. 18 to Caiaphas, 
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.); but Annas, even after he 
had been put out of office, continued to have great influ- 
ence: Jn. xviii. 13, 24. This explains the mistake [but 


ἀνόητος 


see reff. below (esp. to Schürer), and ef. ἀρχιερεύς, 2] by 
which Luke, in his Gospel iii. 2 (ace. to the true read- 
ing dpytepéws) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to him the 
pontificate long after he had been removed from office. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Annas; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 
135 sq.; Schiirer in the Zeitschr. für wissensch. Theol. 
for 1876, p. 580 sq. [also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. $ 23 
iv.; and BB.DD. s. v.].* 

&-vórros, -ov, (νοητός fr. νοέω) ; 1. not understood, 
unintelligible ; 2. generally active, nol understanding, 
unwise, foolish: Ro. i. 14 (opp. to σοφοί) ; Lk. xxiv. 25; 
Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. iii. 8. ἐπιθυμίαι ἀνόητοι, 1 "Tim. vi. 9. 
(Prov. xvii. 28; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13; and often in Attic 
writ.; [cf. Trench 8 lxxv.; Ellie. on Gal. iii. 1; Schmidt 
ch. 147 $ 20].)* 

ἄνοια, -as, 7, (ἄνους [i. e. dvoos without understand- 
ing ]), want of understanding, folly : 2 Tim. 111. 9. mad- 
ness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [δύο δ᾽ ἀνοίας 
γένη, τὸ μὲν μανίαν, τὸ δὲ ἀμαθίαν, Plato, Tim. p. 86 b. ]. 
({‘Theogn. 453]; Hdt. 6, 69; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)* 

ἀν-οίγω ; (ἀνά, οἴγω i. e. οἴγνυμι); fut. ἀνοίξω; 1 aor. 
ἤνοιξα and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) ἀνέῳξα 
(an earlier form) [and ἠνέῳξα WH in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf. 
Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota 
subser.; see I, 47; 2 pf. ἀνέῳγα (to be or stand open; cf. 
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. 
p. 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ. give this force 
mostly to the pf. pass.) ; Pass., [pres. ἀνοίγομαι Mt. vii. 
8LTrtxt. WHmrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; pf. 
ptep. ἀνεῳγμένος and ἠνεῳγμένος, (ἠνοιγμένος Acts ix. 8 
Tdf.); 1 aor. ἀνεῴχθην, ἠνεῴχθην, and ἠνοίχθην, inf. ἀνε- 
xOjva (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. ἠνοίγην 
(the usual later form); 1 fut. ἀνοιχθήσομαι (Lk. xi. 9 
‘Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. ἀνοιγήσομαι ; (on these forms, in 
the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, ef. 
iL Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161, 170; Bttm. 
(Gram. p. 280 [21st Germ. ed.]; Bttm. N. T. Gr. 63 (55); 
W. 72 (70) and 83 (79); [Veitch s. v.]) ; to open: a 
door, a gate, Acts v. 195; xii. 10, 14; xvi. 26 sq.; Rev. 
iv. 1; very often in Grk. writ. Metaph., to give en- 
trance into the soul, Rev. iii. 20; to furnish opportunity 
to do something, Acts xiv. 27; Col. iv. 3; pass. of an 
opportunity offered, 1 Co. xvi. 9; 2 Co. ii. 12; Rev. iii. 
8; ef. θύρα. simply ἀνοίγειν τινί to open (the door [B. 
145 (127)]) to one; prop.: Lk. xii. 36; Acts v. 23; xii. 
16; Jn. x. 3; in a proverbial saying, to grant something 
asked for, Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq.; parabolically, to 
give aecess to the blessings of God's kingdom, Mt. xxv. 
11; Lk. xiii. 25; Rev. iii. 7. τοὺς θησαυρούς, Mt. ii. 11, 
(Sir. xliii. 14; Eur. Ion 923); τὰ μνημεῖα, Mt. xxvii. 52; 
τάφος, Ro. iii. 13; τὸ φρέαρ, Rev. ix. 2. heaven is said to 
be opened and something to descend fr. it, Mt. iii. 16; Lk. 
i. 21; Jn. 1. 51 (52); Acts x. 11; or something is said 
to be seen there, Acts vii. 56 RG; Rev. xi. 19 (6 ναὸς 
ταῖν ὁ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷγ ; [xv. 5]; xix. 11. ἀνοίγ. τὸ στόμα: of 
a fish’s mouth, Mt. xvii. 27; Hebraistically, of those who 
begin to speak [W. 33 (32), 608 (565)], Mt. v. 2; Acts 
viii. 32, 35; x. 34 ; xviii. 14; foll. by els βλασφημίαν [-pias 


48 











ἀνόμως 


LT Tr WH], Rev. xiii. 6; ἐν παραβολαῖς, i.e. to make 
use of (A. V. in), Mt. xiii. 35, (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2; 
ev ἔπεσι Leian. Philops. § 33) ; πρός τινα, 2 Co. vi. 11 (τὸ 
στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγε πρὸς ὑμᾶς our mouth is open towards 
you, i. e. we speak freely to you, we keep nothing back) ; 
the mouth of one is said to be opened who recovers the 
power of speech, Lk. i. 64; of the earth yawning, Rev. 
xii. 16. dv. ἀκοάς Twos i. e. to restore the faculty of hear- 
ing, Mk. vii..35 (L T Tr WH). ἀν. τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς [W. 
33 (32)], to part the eyelids so as to see, Acts ix. 8, 40; 
τινός, to restore one's sight, Mt. ix. 30; xx. 33; Jn. ix. 
10, 14, 17, 21, 26, 30, 32; x. 21; xi. 37; metaph. Acts 
xxvi. 18 (to open the eyes of one's mind). ἀνοίγω τὴν 
σφραγίδα, to unseal, Rev. v. 9; vi. 1, 8,5, 7,9, 12; viii. 1; 
dv. τὸ βιβλίον, βιβλαρίδιον, to unroll, Lk. iv. 17 L TrWH; 
Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx. 12. [Comp.: δι-ανοίγω.] * 

ἀν-οικο-δομέω, -@: fut. ἀνοικοδομήσω; to build again, 
(Vulg. reaedifico): Acts xv.16. (['Thue. 1, 89, 3]; Diod. 
11, 39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 31; Hdian. 8, 2, 12 [5 
ed. Bekk. ].)* 

ἄνοιξις, -ews, 7, (ἀνοίγω, q. v.), an opening: ἐν ἀνοίξει 
ToU στόματός μου as often as I open my mouth to speak, 
Eph. vi. 19. (Thue. 4, 68, 4; τῶν πυλῶν, id. 4, 67, 3; 
χειλῶν, Plut. mor. [symp. 1. ix. quaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)* 

ἀνομία, -as, 7, (ἄνομος); 1. prop. the condition of 
one without law,— either because ignorant of it, or because 
violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquity, 
wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (T Tr txt. 
WH txt.; cf. ἁμαρτία, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Jn. iii. 
4. opp. to ἡ δικαιοσύνη, 2 Co. vi. 14; Heb. i. 9 [not Tdf.], 
(Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24 ἀνομίᾳ μᾶλλον ἢ δικαιοσύνῃ χρώμενοι); 
and to ἡ δικαιοσύνη and ὁ ἁγιασμός, Ro. vi. 19 (τῇ ἀνομίᾳ 
eis τὴν ἀνομίαν lo iniquity — personified — in order to work 
iniquity) 5 ποιεῖν τὴν ἀνομίαν to do iniquity, act wickedly, 
Mt. xiii. 41; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, ἐργάζεσθαι 
τὴν av. Mt. vii. 23; plur. ai ἀνομίαι manifestations of dis- 
regard for law, iniquities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi. 
(xxxii) 1); Heb. viii. 12 [RGL]; x. 17. (In Grk. 
writ. fr. [Hdt. 1, 96] Thue. down; often in Sept.) [Syn. 
cf. Trench § Ixvi.; Tittm.i. 48; Ellic. on Tit. ii. 14.]* 

ἄνομος, -ov, (νόμος) ; 1. destitule of (the Mosaic) 
law: used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges- 
tion of ‘iniquity’; just asin Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where 
ἄνομοι ἀπερίτμητοι and ἀλλότριοι are used together). 2. 
departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless, 
wicked; (Vulg. iniquus; [also injustus]) : Mk. xv. 28 [R 
L Trbr.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.) ; 
opp. to ὁ δίκαιος, 1 Tim.i.9; ὁ ἄνομος (κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν); he in 
whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abode, 2 Th. 
ii. 8; ἄν. ἔργον an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8; free from 
law, not subject to law, [Vulg. sine lege]: μὴ ὧν ἄνομος 
θεοῦ [B. 169 (147)] (Rec. θεῷ), 1 Co. ix. 21. (Very 
often in Sept.) [SvN. see ἀνομία, fin.] * 

ἀνόμως, adv., without the law (see ἄνομος, 1), without a 
knowledge of the law: av. ἁμαρτάνειν to sin in ignorance 
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; ἀπόλλυσθαι to perish, but 
not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid. (ἀνόμως ζὴν to 
live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. c. 10 


avoplow 


§ 39; ἀνόμως ἀπόλλυσθαι to be slain contrary to law, as 
in wars, seditions, ete., ibid. c. 44 $ 168. In Grk. writ. 
generally unjustly, wickedly, as 2 Mace. viii. 17.)* 

ἀν-ορθόω, -ὥ : fut. ἀνορθώσω; 1 aor. ἀνώρθωσα; 1 aor. 
pass. ἀνωρθώθην (Lk. xiii. 13; without the aug. ἀνορθώθην 
LTTr; cf. [WWH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [W. 73] 
(70)); 1. to set up, make erect: a crooked person, Lk. 
xiii. 13 (she was made straight, stood erect); drooping 
hands and relaxed knees (to raise them up by restoring 
their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear again, build 
anew: σκηνήν, Acts xv. 16 (Hdt. 1, 19 τὸν νηὸν . . . τὸν 
ἐνέπρησαν ; 8,140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8, 12, ete.; in various 
senses in Sept.).* 

ἀν-όσιος, -ov, (a priv. and ὅσιος, q. v.), unholy, impious, 
wicked: 1 Tim. i. 9; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (In Grk. writ. from 
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) * 

dvox 1j, -ῆς, 7), (compare ἀνέχομαί τινος, 8. v. ἀνέχω p. 45), 
toleration, forbearance ; in this sense only in Ro. ii. 4; 
iii. 26 (25). (In Grk. writ.a holding back, delaying, 
fr. avéy to hold back, hinder.) [Cf. Trench § liii.]* 

ἀντ-αγωνίζομαι : to struggle, fight; πρός τι, against a 
thing, Heb. xii. 4 [cf. W. $52, 4, 3]. (Xen., Plat., Dem., 
ete:)* 

ἀντ-άλλαγμα, -ros, τό, (ἀντί in place of, in turn, and 
ἄλλαγμα see ἀλλάσσω), that which is given in place of 
another thing by way of exchange ; what is given either in 
order to keep or to acquire anything: Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. 
viii. 37, where the sense is, * nothing equals in value the 
soul's salvation. Christ transfers a proverbial expres- 
sion respecting the supreme value of the natural life 
(Hom. Il. 9, 401 οὐ yàp ἐμοὶ ψυχῆς ἀντάξιον) to the life 
eternal. (Ruthiv.7; Jer. xv. 13; Sir. vi. 15, ete.; Eur. 
Or. 1157; Joseph. b. j. 1, 18, 3.)* 

ἀντ-ανα-πληρόω, -6 5; (ἀντί and avarAnpda, q. v.) ; to fill 
up in turn: Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, ‘what is wanting 
of the afilietions of Christ to be borne by me, that I 
supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ con- 
ferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions 
laid upon him’); [Mey., Ellic., ete., explain the word 
(with Wetst.) by "ἀντὶ ὑστερήματος succedit ἀναπλήρωμα᾽; 
but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc., who also quotes the pas- 
sages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio 
Cass. 44, 48; Apollon. Dysc. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14, 
1 [cf. Bttm. ad loc.]; 114, 8; 258, 3; 337, 4.)* 

ἀντ-απο-δίδωμι : fut. ἀνταποδώσω; 2 aor. inf. ἀνταποδοῦ- 
vat; 1 fut. pass. ἀνταποδοθήσομαι; (ἀντί for something 
received, in return, ἀποδίδωμι to give back): to repay, 
requite ; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35; 
εὐχαριστίαν τινί, 1 Th. iii. 9. b. in a bad sense, of 
penalty and vengeance; absol.: Ro. xii. 19; Heb. x. 
30, (Deut. xxxii. 35); θλίψιν τινί, 2 Th. i. 6. (Very 
often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses; in Grk. 
writ. fr. [Hdt.] Thue. down.)* 

ἀντ-από-δομα, -τος, τό, (see dvrarodidwpe), the thing paid 
back, requital; 8. in a good sense: Lk. xiv.12.  b. 
in a bad sense: Ro. xi. 9. (In Sept. i. q. 5993, Judg. ix. 
16 [ Alex.], etc. ; the Greeks say ἀνταπόδοσις [cf. W. 25].)* 

ἀντ-από-δοσις, -ews, 7, récompense: Col. iii. 24. (In 

4 


49 








ἀντὶ 


Sept. i. q. 553, Is. lix. 18, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. 
down.)* ; 

ἀντ-απο-κρίνομαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἀνταπεκρίθην [see dzo- 
κρίνω, 1i.] ; to contradict in reply, to answer by contradict- 
ing, reply against: τινὶ πρός τι, Lk. xiv. 6; (Sept. Judg. 
v. 29 [Alex.]; Job xvi. 8; xxxii. 12; Aesop. fab. 172 
ed. de Furia, [p. 353 ed. Coray]). Hence i. q. to alter- 
cate, dispute: with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. (In a mathe- 
matical sense, £o correspond to each other or be parallel, 
in Nicomach. arithm. 1, 8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed. Hoche].) 
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 17.* 

ἀντ-εἴπον, a 2 aor. used instead of the verb ἀντιλέγειν, 
to speak against, gainsay; [fr. Aeschyl. down]: Lk. xxi. 
15; Aetsiv.14. Cf. εἶπον." 

ἀντ-έχω: Mid., [pres. dvréyopac]; fut. ἀνθέξομαι; to 
hold before or against, hold back, withstand, endure; in 
the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one’s self directly opposite 
to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to 
him: τινός, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; τῶν ἀσθενῶν. to aid 
them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14; τοῦ λόγου. to hold to, 
hold it fast, Tit.i.9. (Deut. xxxii. 41; Is. lvi. 4, 6; Prov. 
iii. 18, etc., and often in Grk. writ) Cf. Kiihner 
$520 b. [2te Aufl. $ 416, 2; cf. Jelf § 536]; W. 202 (190); 
[B. 161 (140)].* 

ἀντί [before àv, ἀνθ᾽ ; elsewhere neglecting elision] a 
preposition foll. by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante 
and the Germ. prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which 
the N. T. writ. coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (341)) ; 
1. prop. it seems to have signified over against, opposite 
to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412; [ef. Cur- 
tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc- 
cession, for, instead of, in place of (something). a. univ. 
instead of: ἀντὶ ἰχθύος ὄφιν, Lk. xi. 11; ἀντὶ περιβολαίου 
to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15; ἀντὶ rod λέγειν, Jas. 
iv. 15, (ἀντὶ ro) with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329 
(309); B.263(226)]) b. of that for which any thing 
is given, received, endured: Mt. v. 38; xvii. 27 (to 
release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to 
obtain the joy; cf. Bleek, Lünemann, or Delitzsch ad 
loc.); of the price of sale (or purchase): Heb. xii. 16; 
λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν, Mt. xx. 928; Mk.x.45. Then *c. 
of recompense: κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόναι, Ko. xii. 17; 
1'Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). ἀνθ᾽ àv 
equiv. to ἀντὶ τούτων, ort for that, because: Lk. i. 20; xix. 
44; Acts xii. 23; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx. 
in Wetst. on Luke i. 20]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 710; [W. 
364 (342), cf. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. ^N nna, 
Deut.xxi.14; 9 K. xxii. 17). d. of the eause: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν 
wherefore, Lk. xii. 3; ἀντὶ τούτου for this cause, Eph. v. 
31. 6. of succession to the place of another: 'Apx: 
βασιλεύει ἀντὶ Ἡρώδου in place of Herod, Mt. ii. 22, (1 K. 
xi.44; Hdt.1, 108; Xen.an. l, 1, 4). χάριν ἀντὶ χάρι- 
Tos grace in the place of grace, grace succeeding grace 
perpetually, i.e. the richest abundance of grace, Jn. i. 
16, (Theogn. vs. 344 ἀντ᾽ ἀνιῶν ἀνίας [yet cf. the context 
vs. 342 (vss. 780 and 778 ed. Welcker); more appro- 
priate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de poster. ' 
Caini $ 43, vol. ii. 39 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer- 


ἀντιβάλλω 


dot. 1. vi. e. 18 $ 6227). 3. As a prefix, it denotes 
a. opposite, over against: ἀντιπέραν. ἀντιπαρέρχεσθαι. Ὁ. 
the mutual efficiency of two: ἀντιβάλλειν, ἀντικαλεῖν, 
ἀντιλοιδορεῖν. c. requital: ἀντιμισθία, ἀνταποδίδωμι. ἃ. 
hostile opposition: ἀντίχριστος. e. official substitution, 
instead of: ἀνθύπατος." 
ἀντι-βάλλω ; (0 throw in turn, (prop. Thuc. 7, 25; Plut. 
Nic. 25): λόγους πρὸς ἀλλήλους to exchange words with 
one another, Lk. xxiv. 17, [cf. 2 Mace. xi. 13].* 
ἀντι-δια-τίθημι : [pres. mid. ἀντιδιατίθεμαι} ; in mid. to 
place one's self in opposition, to oppose : of hereties, 2 Tim. 
ii. 25, ef. De Wette [or Holtzm.] ad loc.; (several times 
in eccl. writ.; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand 
in turn: τινά, Diod. exc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed. 
Dind.; absol. to retaliate, Philo de spec. legg. § 15; de 
concupisc. ὃ 4 ]).*- 
ἀντίδικος, -ov, (δίκη) ; as subst. ὁ ἀντίδικος 8. an op- 
ponent in a suit at law: Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 58; xviii. 3, 
(Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an 
adversary, enemy, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1 S. 
ii. 10; Is. xli. 11, etc.) : 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to 
regard the devil as here called ἀντίδικος because he ac- 
euses men before God ).* 
ἀντίθεσις, [(τίθημι),. fr. Plato down],-eos, 7; 8. op- 
position. b. that which is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (dv- 
τιθέσεις τῆς ψευδων. γνώσ. the inventions of false knowl- 
edge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true 
Christian doctrine).* 
ἀντι-καθ-ίστημι : 2 aor. ἀντικατέστην ; [fr. Hdt. down]; 
in the trans. tenses 1. fo put in place of another. 
2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army 
inline of battle); in the intrans. tenses, fo stand against, 
resist: Heb. xii. 4, (Thue. 1, 62. 71).* 
ἀντι-καλέω, -@: 1 aor. ἀντεκάλεσα; to invite in turn: 
twa, Lk. xiv. 12.  [ Xen. conviv. 1, 15.]* 
ἀντί-κειμαι ; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to, 
in a local sense, ([Hippoer. de aére p. 282 Foes. (191 
Chart.); Strab. 7, 7, 5]; Hdian. 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekk.) ; 3, 15, 
17 (8 Bekk.); [cf. Aristot. de caelo 1, 8 p. 277*,23]). 2. 
to oppose, be adverse to, withstand : τινί, Lk. xiii. 17; xxi. 
15; Gal v. 17; 1 Tim.i.10. simply (6) ἀντικείμενος, an 
adversary, [ Tittmann ii.9]: 1 Co. xvi. 9; Phil.i. 28; 2 Th. 
ii. 4; 1 Tim. v. 14. (Dio Cass. 39, 8. Ex. xxiii. 22; 2 
Mace. x. 26, ete. ; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 
ἀντικρύ (L'T WH ἄντικρυς [Chandler ὃ 881; Treg. 
dvrikpós. Cf. Lob. Path. Elementa ii. 283]; ad Phryn. p. 
444; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.]; Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. 366), adv. of place, over against, opposite: with 
gen. Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ.; Philo de vict. 
off. $3; de vit. Moys. iii. $7; in Flacc. $10.) * 
dvr-AapBdvo: Mid. [pres. dvriaufávogat]; 2 aor. 
ἀντελαβόμην; to take in turn or in return, to receive one 
thing for another given, to receive instead of; in mid., 
freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lay hold of, hold fast 
to, anything: τινός. 2. to take a person or thing in 
order as it were to be held, to take to, embrace; with a 
' gen. of the pers., fo help, succor: Lk. i. 54; Acts xx. 35, 
(Diod. 11, 13; Dio Cass. 40,27; 46,45; often in Sept.). 


50 


᾿Αντιόχεια 


with a gen. of the thing, to be a partaker, partake of: 
τῆς εὐεργεσίας of the benefit of the services rendered by 
the slaves, 1 Tim. vi. 2; cf. De Wette ad loc. (unre ἐσθί- 
ov πλειόνων ἡδονῶν ἀντιλήψεται, Porphyr. de abstin. 1, 
46; [cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 15, 37 and exx. in Field, Otium 
Norv. pars.iii. adl. 6.1) [Cowr.: avr-avrt-Aap(9ávopat. ] * 

ἀντι-λέγω ; [impf. ἀντέλεγον] ; to speak against, gainsay, 
contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WH om.]; xxviii. 
19; Tit.i.9. τινί, Acts xiii. 45. foll. by μή and ace. with 
inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [L mrg. Tr WH λέγοντες, (as in Grk. 
writ.; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.; [W. § 65, 2 B.; 
B.355 (305)]). to oppose one's self to one, decline to obey 
him, declare one's self against him, refuse to have anything 
to do with him, [cf. W. 23 (22)]: τινί, Jn. xix. 12, (Leian. 
dial. inferor. 30, 3); absol, Ro. x. 21 [cf. Meyer]; Tit. 
ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. ἀντιλέγομαι 1 am dis- 
puted, assent or compliance is refused me, (W. § 39, 1): 
Lk. ii. 34; Acts xxviii. 22.* 

ἀντίληψις [LT Tr WE -λημψις; see M, 1], -ews, ἡ, (àvrc- 
λαμβάνομαι), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thue. 1, 
120), a laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection 
of a disputant, ete. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi. 
20 [cf. vs. 1]; 1 Esdr. viii. 27; Sir. xi. 12; li. 7; 2 Macc. 
xv. 7, etc.); plur, 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of 
the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.* 

ἀντιλογία.-ας. 1, (ἀντίλογος, and this fr. ἀντιλέγω). [fr- 
Hdt. down}; 1. gainsaying, contradiction: Heb. vii. 7; 
with the added notion of strife, Heb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii. 
16; Deut. xix. 17,ete.). 2. opposition in act, [this sense 
is disputed by some, e. g. Lün. on Heb. as below, Mey. 
on Ro. x. 21 (see ἀντιλέγω) ; contra ef. Fritzsche on Ro. 
lc.]: Heb. xii. 3; rebellion, Jude 11, (Prov. xvii. 11).* 

ἀντι-λοιδορέω -à : [impf. ἀντελοιδόρουν ] ; to revile in turn, 
to retort railing: 1 Pet.ii.23. (Lcian. conviv. 40; Plut. 
Anton. 42; [de inimic. util. $ 5 ].)* 

dyr(-Avrgov, -ov, τό, (at is given in exchange for another 
as ihe price of his redemption, ransom: 1 'Tim. ii. 6. (An 
uncert. translator in Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9; Orph. lith. 587; 
[cf. W. 25].)* 

ἀντι-μετρέω, -à : fut. pass. ἀντιμετρηθήσομαι ; to measure 
back, measure in return: Mt. vii. 2 Rec.; Lk. vi. 38 [L. 
mrg. WH mrg. perpéo], (in a proverbial phrase, i. q. to 
repay; Leian. amor. c. 19).* 

ἀντιμισθία, -as, 7, (ἀντίμισθος remunerating) a re- 
ward given in compensation, requital, recompense; a. in 
a good sense: 2 Co. vi. 13 (τὴν αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν πλατύν- 
Onre kai ὑμεῖς. a concise expression for Be ye also en- 
larged i. e. enlarge your hearts, just as I have done (vs. 
11), that so ye may recompense me,—for τὸ αὐτό, 6 ἐστιν 
ἀντιμισθία; cf. W. 530 (493), and $ 66, 1 b.; [B. 190 
(164); 396 (339)]). Pb. in a bad sense: Ro. i. 27. 
(Found besides only in Theoph. Ant.; Clem. Al.; [ Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 3. 5; 9, 7; 11, 6], and other Fathers.)* 

᾿Αντιόχεια, -as, 7, Antioch, the name (derived fr. various 

| monarchs) of several Asiatic cities, two of which are men- 
| tioned in the N. T.; 1. The most celebrated of all, 

and the capital of Syria, was situated on the river Oron- 
tes, founded by Seleucus [I. sometimes (cf. Suidas s. v. 


᾿Αντιοχεύς 


Σέλευκος. col. 3277 Ὁ. ed. Gaisf.) called] Nicanor [else- 
where (cf. id. col. 2137 b. s. v. Κολασσαεύς) son of Ni- 
canor; but commonly Nicator (cf. Appian de rebus 
Syr. $ 57; Spanh. de numis. diss. vii. $ 3, vol. i. p. 413) ], 
and named in honor of his father Antiochus. Many 
ἝἙλληνισταί, Greek-Jews, lived in it; and there those 
who professed the name of Christ were first called 
Christians : Acts xi. 19 sqq. ; xiii. 1 ; xiv 26 ; xv. 22 sqq. ; 
Gal. ii. 11; cf. Reuss in Schenkel i. 141 sq.; [BB. DD. 
s. v.; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 121-126; also the 
latter in the Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Renan, Les Apótres, 
ch. xii.]. 2. A city of Phrygia, but called in Acts 
xiii. 14 Antioch of Pisidia [or acc. to the crit. texts the 
Pisidian Antioch (see IIuítos)] because it was on the 
confines of Pisidia, (more exactly ἡ πρὸς Πισιδίᾳ, Strabo 
12, p. 577, 8): Acts xiv. 19, 21; 2 Tim. iii. 11. This 
was founded also by Seleucus Nicator, [cf. BB. DD. s. v.; 
Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 168 sqq. ].* 

᾿Αντιοχεύς, -éos, ὁ, an Antiochian, a native of Antioch : 
Acts vi. 5.* 

ἀντι-παρέρχομαι: 2 aor. ἀντιπαρῆλθον: to pass by op- 
posite to, ΓΑ. V. to pass by on the other side]: Lk. x. 31 sq. 
(where the meaning is, *he passed by on the side oppo- 
site to the wounded man, showing no compassion for 
him’). (Anthol. Pal. 12, 8; to come to one’s assistance 
against a thing, Sap. xvi. 10. Found besides in eccl. and 
Byzant. writ.) * 

᾿Αντίπας [ Tdf. ᾿Αντείπας, see s. v. et c],-a (cf. W. $8, 1; 
[B. 20 (18)]), 6, Antipas (contr. fr. ᾿Αντίπατρος W. 103 
(97)), a Christian of Pergamum who suffered martyrdom, 
otherwise unknown: Rev. ii. 13. On the absurd inter- 
pretations of this name, cf. Düsterd. [ Alf., Lee, al.] ad 
loc. Fr. Górres in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1878, p. 257 sqq., endeavors to discredit the opinion 
that he was martyred, but by insufficient arguments.* 

᾿Αντιπατρίς, -idos, 7, Antipatris, a city situated between 
Joppa and Czsarea, in a very fertile region, not far 
from the coast; formerly called Χαβαρζαβᾶ [al. Kapapoa- 
Ba (or -σάβα)] (Joseph. antt. 13, 15, 1), and afterwards 
rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in 
honor of his father Antipater (Joseph. b. j. 1, 21, 9): Acts 
xxiii.31. Cf. Robinson, Researches ete. iii. 45 sq.; Later 
Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478- 
498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq.].* : 

ἀντι-πέραν, or (acc. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down) 
ἀντίπερα [T WH], ἀντιπέρα [L Tr; cf. B. 321; Lob. 
Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, over 
against, on the opposite shore, on the other side, with a gen.: 
Lk. viii. 26.* 

ἀντιπίπτω; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot. 
down]; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against: τινί, 
Acts vii. 51. (Ex. xxvi.5; xxxvi.12ed. Compl.; Num. 
xxvii. 14; often in Polyb., Plut.)* 

ἀντι-στρατεύομαι ; 1. to make a military expedition, 
or take the field, against any one: Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26. 
2. to oppose, war against: τινί, Ro. vii. 23. (Aristaenet. 
2, 1, 13.)* 

ἀντι-τάσσω or -rro : [pres. mid. ἀντιτάσσομαι ; to range 


51 








ἀντλέω 


in battle against; mid. to oppose one’s self, resist: τινί, 
Ro. xiii 2; Jas.iv.6; v. 6; 1 Pet. v. 5; cf. Prov. iii. 34. 
absol, Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
down.) * 

ἀντίττυπος, -ov, (τύπτω), in Grk. writ. l. prop. a. 
actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting 
light; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back, 
repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile. 
In the N. T. language ἀντίτυπον as a subst. means H 
a thing formed after some pattern (τύπος [q. v. 4 a.]), 
(Germ. Abbild): Heb. ix. 24 [R. V. like in pattern]. 
2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something 
in the Messianie times which answers to the type (see 
τύπος, 4 y.) prefiguring it in the O. T. (Germ. Gegenbild, 
Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge: 
1 Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness].* 

dvyr&Cxpwrros, -ov, 6, (ἀντί against and Χριστός, like 
ἀντίθεος opposing God, in Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, etc., 
Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers; [see 
Soph. Lex. s. v., cf. "Trench § xxx. ]), the adversary of the 
Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the 
Messiah's advent, concerning whom the Jews had con- 
ceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36 
sqq.; vii. 25; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. xxxviii. xxxix. 
Cf. Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq.; 
Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber's Encycl. iv. 292 sqq. 
s. v. Antichrist ; Bóhmer, Die Lehre v. Antichrist nach 
Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol. 
iv. p. 405 sqq. The name 6 ἀντίχριστος was formed 
perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses 
it, [five times]; he employs it of the corrupt power and 
influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that 
which is at work in false teachers who have come from the 
bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating 
error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, ‘what ye have 
heard concerning Antichrist, as about to make his ap- 
pearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfilled 
in the many false teachers, most worthy to be called 
antichrists ,' [on the om. of the art. cf. B. 89 (78)]) ; 1 Jn. 
iv. 3; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22; 2 
Jn. 7. In Paul and the Rev. the idea but not thename 
of Antichrist is found; yet the conception differs from 
that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an 
individual man [cf. B. D. as below], of the very worst 
character (τὸν ἄνθρ. τῆς ἁμαρτίας : see ἁμαρτία, 1), in- 
stigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God: 
2 Th. ii. 3-10. The author of the Apocalypse discovers 
the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome, 
and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return 
from the dead: Rey. xiii. and xvii. (Often in eccl. 
writ.) [See B. D. s.v. (Am. ed. for additional reff.), also 
B. D. s. v. Thess. 2d Ep. to the; Kahler in Herzog ed. 
2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89.] 

dyrAéo, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ἤντλησα ; pf. ἤντληκα ; (fr. 6 ávrAos, 
or τὸ ἄντλον, bilge-water, [or rather, the place in the hold 
where it settles, Eustath. com. in Hom. 1728, 58 ὁ τόπος 
ἔνθα ὕδωρ συρρέει, τό re ἄνωθεν καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἁρμονιῶν); — a. 
prop. to draw out a ship’s bilge-water, to bale or pump 


ἄντλημα 


out. b. univ. to draw water: Jn. ii. 8; iv. 15; ὕδωρ, 
Jn.ii.9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 13, 20; Ex. ii. 16, 19; Is. 
xii. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

ἄντλημα, ros, τό; a. prop. what is drawn, (Dioscor. 4, 
64). b. the act of drawing water, (Plut. mor. [de solert. 
an. 21, 1] p. 974 e. [but this example belongs rather under 
e.. σα. a thing to draw with [cf. W. 93 (89)], bucket 
and rope let down into a well: Jn. iv. 11.* 

ἀντοφθαλμέω, -ὦ ; (ἀντόφθαλμος looking in the eye); 
1. prop. to look against or straight at. 2. metaph. /o 
bear up against, withstand : τῷ ἀνέμῳ, of a ship, [cf. our 
‘look the wind in the eye,’ ‘face’ (R. V.) the wind]: Acts 
xxvii.15. (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb.; in 660]. writ.)* 

ἄνυδρος, -ov, (a priv. and ὕδωρ), without water: πηγαί, 
2 Pet. ii. 17; τόποι, desert places, Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 24, 
(ἡ ἄνυδρος the desert, Is. xliii. 19; Hdt. 3, 4, ete. ; in Sept. 
often γῇ ἄνυδρος), [desert places were believed to be the 
haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.), 
and Gesen. or Alex. on the former pass.; ef. further, 
Bar. iv. 35; Tob. viii. 3; 4 Mace. xviii. 8; (Enoch x. 4) ; 
Rev. xviii. 2; ef. d. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Gesell. 
xxi. 609] ; νεφέλαι, waterless clouds (Verg. georg. 3, 197 
sq. arida nubila), which promise rain but yield none, 
Jude 12. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

ἀν-υπόκριτος, -ov, (a priv. and ὑποκρίνομαι), unfeigned, 
undisquised : Ro. xii. 9; 2 Co. vi. 6; 1 Tim. i.5; 2 Tim. 
1.5; 1 Pet.i. 22; Jas.iii. 17. (Sap. v.19; xviii. 16. Not 
found in prof. auth., except the adv. ἀνυποκρίτως in 
Antonin. 8, 5.)* 

ἀνυπότακτος, -ov, (a priv. and ὑποτάσσωλ ; 1. [pas- 
sively] not made subject, unsubjected : Heb. ii. 8, [ Artem. 
oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected 
to control, disobedient, unruly, refractory: 1 Tim.i.9; Tit. 
i. 6, 10, ([Epict. 2, 10, 1; 4, 1, 161; Philo, quis rer. div. 
her. $1]; διήγησις ἀνυπ. a narrative which the reader 
cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 36, 4 ; 3, 38,4; 5, 
21, 4).* 

ἄνω, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; a. above, in a higher 
place, (opp. to κάτω) : Acts ii. 19; with the article, ὁ, 7, 
τὸ ἄνω : Gal. iv. 26 (ἡ dvo Ἱερϑυσαλήμ the upper i. e. the 
heavenly Jerusalem); Phil. iii. 14 (ἡ ἄνω κλῆσις the call- 
ing made in heaven, equiv. to ἐπουράνιος, Heb. iii. 1); 
the neut. plur. rà ἄνω as subst., heavenly things, Col. iii. 
1 sq.; ἐκ τῶν ἄνω from heaven, Jn. viii. 23. 
ii. 7 (up to the brim). b. upwards, up, on high: Jn. xi. 
41 (αἴρω) ; Heb. xii. 15 (dvo de).* 

ἀνώγαιον and ἀνώγεον. see under dváyatov. 

ἄνωθεν, (dvo), adv.; a. from above, from a higher place: 
ἀπὸ ἄνωθεν (W. $ 50, 7 N. 1), Mt. xxvii. 51 ['Tdf. om. 
ἀπό]; Mk. xv. 38; ἐκ τῶν ἄνωθεν from the upper part, 
from the top, Jn. xix. 23. Often (also in Grk. writ.) 
used of things which come from heaven, or from God as 
dwelling in heaven: Jn. iii. 31; xix. 11; Jas. i. 17 ; iii. 
19,17. b. from the first: Lk. 1.3; then, from the begin- 
ning on, from the very first: Acts xxvi.5. Hence c. 
anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use some- 
what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among 
them ; cf. his comm. on Jn. and Gal. as below ]) : Jn. iii. 3, 


ἕως ἄνω, Jn. 


52 











ἄξιος 


7 ἄν. γεννηθῆναι, where others explain it from above, i. 6. 
from heaven. But, ace. to this explanation, Nicodemus 
ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one 
to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [cf. 
Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 63]. Of the repetition of phys- 
ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18 
[i. p. 26 ed. Reiff] (ἀνδρὶ) ἔτι τῷ ἔχοντι ἔγκυον γυναῖκα 
σημαίνει παῖδα αὐτῷ γεννήσεσθαι ὅμοιον κατὰ πάντα. οὕτω 
γὰρ ἄνωθεν αὐτὸς δόξειε γεννᾶσθαι ; cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 
3 φιλίαν ἄνωθεν ποιεῖσθαι, where a little before stands 
προτέρα φιλία; add, Martyr. Polye. 1, 1; [also Socrates 
in Stob. flor. exxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meineke (iii. 438 ed. 
Gaisf.); Harpocration, Lex. s. vv. ἀναδικάσασθαι, avabe- 
σθαι, ἀναποδιζόμενα, ἀνασύνταξις ; Canon. apost. 46 (al. 39, 
Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444); Pseudo-Basil, de bapt. 
1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537) ; Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (opp. iv. 
322 c. Dela Rue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth 
Gospel, ete. (Boston 1880) p. 34 sq.]. πάλιν ἄνωθεν (on 
this combination of synonymous words cf. Kühner § 534, 
1; [Jelf $ 777, 1]; Grimm on Sap. xix. 5 (6)) : Gal. iv. 9 
(again, since ye were in bondage once before).* 

ἀνωτερικός, 7, -óv, (ἀνώτερος), upper: rà ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, 
Acts xix. 1 (i.e. the part of Asia Minor more remote 
from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is 
used by [Hippoer. and] Galen.)* 

ἀνώτερος. -épa, -epov, (compar. fr. ἄνω, cf. κατώτερος, 
see W. $11, 2 c.; [B. 28 (24 sq.)]), higher. ‘The 
neut. ἀνώτερον as adv., higher; a. of motion, to a higher 
place, (up higher): Lk.xiv.10. ^b. of rest, in a higher 
place, above i.e. in the immediately preceding part of 
the passage quoted, Heb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 3, 1, 1 
τρίτῃ ἀνώτερον βίβλῳ. (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)* 

ἀν-ὠφελής, -és, (a priv. and ὄφελος) ; fr. Aeschyl. down; 
unprofitable, useless: "Tit. ii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Heb. 
vii. 18 (διὰ τὸ αὐτῆς ἀνωφελές on account of its unprofita- 
bleness).* 

ἀξίνη, -ης, ἡ, ([perh. fr.] ἄγνυμι, fut. ἄξω, to break), an 
are: Lk.ii.9; Mt.iii.10. (As old as Hom. and Hdt.)* 

ἄξιος, -a, “ον, (fr. ἄγω, ἄξω ; therefore prop. drawing 
down the scale; hence) a. weighing, having weight; 
with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as) 
another thing, of like value, worth as much: Bods ἄξιος, 
Hom. Il. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194)], 
as d£. δέκα μνῶν, common in Attie writ.; πᾶν τίμιον οὐκ 
ἄξιον αὐτῆς (σοφίας) ἐστι, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; οὐκ 
ἔστι σταθμὸς πᾶς ἄξιος ἐγκρατοῦς ψυχῆς, Sir. xxvi. 15; 
οὐκ ἄξια πρὸς τ. δόξαν are of no weight in comparison 
with the glory, i. e. are not to be put on an equality 
with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and 
W. 405 (378) ; [B. 540 (292)]. b. befitting, congru- 
ous, corresponding, τινός, to a thing: τῆς μετανοίας, Mt. 
iii. 8; Lk. iii. 8; Acts xxvi. 20; ἄξια ὧν ἐπράξαμεν, Lk. 
xxiii. 41. ἄξιόν ἐστι it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2 Th. 
i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8); β. it is worth the while, foll. by 
τοῦ with acc. and inf., 1 Co. xvi. 4; — (in both senses very 
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hdt. down, and often 
with ἐστί omitted). c. of one who has merited any- 
thing, worthy, — both in a good reference and a bad; 


ἀξιόω 


a. ina good sense; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x. 
10; Lk. vii. 4; [x. 7]; Acts xiii. 46; 1 Tim. i.15; iv. 9; 
v. 18; vi.1. foll by the aor. inf.: Lk. xv. 19, 21; Acts 
xiii. 25; Rev.iv. 11; v. 2, 4, 9, 12; foll. by tva: Jn. i. 27 
(dva λύσω, a construction somewhat rare; cf. Dem. pro 
cor. p. 279, 9 ἀξιοῦν, tva βοηθήσῃ [ (dubious); see s. v. tva, 
II. 2 init. and c.]) ; foll. by ὅς with a finite verb (like Lat. 
dignus, qui): Lk. vii. 4 [B. 229 (198)]. It stands alone, 
but so that the context makes it plain of what one is 
said to be worthy: Mt. x. 11 (to lodge with); Mt. x. 13 
(sc. τῆς εἰρήνης); Mt. xxii. 8 (sc. of the favor of an invi- 
tation); Rev. iii. 4 (sc. to walk with me, clothed in 
white). with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one's 
fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it: Mt. 
x. 37 sq.; Heb. xi. 38, (rod θεοῦ, Sap. iii.5; Ignat. ad 
Eph.2). f. ina bad sense; with a gen. of the thing: 
πληγῶν, Lk. xii. 48; θανάτου, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts [xxiii. 
29]; xxv. 11, [25]; xxvi 31; Ro.i. 32; absol: Rev. 
xvi. 6 (sc. to drink blood).* 

ἀξιόω, -ó; impf. ἠξίουν ; 1 aor. ἠξίωσα; Pass., pf. ἠξίω- 
μαι; 1 fut. ἀξιωθήσομαι; (ἄξιος); as in Grk. writ. a 
to think meet, fit, right: foll. by an inf., Acts xv. 38; 
xxviii. 22. b. to judge worthy, deem deserving: twa 
with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7; τινά τινος, 2 Th. i. 
11; pass. with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17; Heb. iii. 
3; x.29. [Cowr.: kar-a£ióo.] * 

ἀξίως, adv., suitably; worthily, in a manner worthy of: 
with the gen., Ro. xvi. 2; Phil.i.27; Col.i.10; 1 Th. 
ii. 12; Eph. iv. 1; 3Jn. 6. [From Soph. down.]* 

&-óparos, -ov, (ópác), either? not seen i. e. unseen, or 
that cannot be seen i. e. invisible. In the latter sense 
of God in Col.i.15; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb.xi. 27; rà dópara 
αὐτοῦ his (God's) invisible nature [perfections], Ro. i. 
20; rà ὁρατὰ kai rà ἀόρατα, Col. i. 16. (Gen. i. 2; Is. 
xlv. 3; 2 Mace. ix. 5; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.)* 

ἀπ-αγγέλλω ;; impf. ἀπήγγελλον ; fut. ἀπαγγελῶ; 1 aor. 
ἀπήγγειλα; 2 aor. pass. ἀπηγγέλην (Lk. viii. 20); [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. ἀπό twos to bring tidings (froma 
person or thing), bring word, report: Jn.iv.51 [RGL 
Tr br.]; Acts iv. 23; v. 22; [xv. 27]; with dat. of the pers., 
Mt. ii. 8; xiv. 12; xxviii. 8, [8 (9) Rec.], 10; Mk. xvi. 
[10], 13; Acts v. 25; xi. 13; [xxiii. 16, 19]; τινί τι, [Mt. 
xi. 4; xxviii. 11 (here Tdf. dvayy.)]; Mk. [v.19 (L mrg. 
R G dvayy.) ] ; vi. 30; Lk. [vii. 22; ix. 36]; xiv. 21; xxiv. 
9; Acts xi. 13; [xii. 17; xvi. 38 L T Tr WH ; xxiii. 17]; 
τινί foll. by ὅτι, Lk. xviii. 37; [Jn. xx. 18 RG; foll. by 
mas, Lk. viii. 36]; τὲ πρός τινα, Acts xvi. 36; τινὶ περί 
twos, Lk. vii. 18; xiii. 1; τὶ περί τινος, Acts xxviii. 21; 
[foll. by λέγων and direct disc., Acts xxii. 26]; foll. by 
ace. with inf, Acts xii. 14; εἰς with acc. of place, to 
carry tidings to a place, Mk. v. 14 (Rec. dvyyy.) ; Lk. 
viii. 34; with addition of an acc. of the thing announced, 
Mt. viii. 33, (Xen. an. 6, 2 (4), 25; Joseph. antt. 5, 11, 
3; εἰς robs ἀνθρώπους, Am. iv. 13 Sept.). 2. to pro- 
claim (ἀπό, because what one announces he openly lays, 
as it were, off from himself, cf. Germ. ab kündigen), to 
make known openly, declare: univ., περί twos, 1 ΤῊ. i. 9; 


[τινὶ περί τ. Jn. xvi. 25 LT Tr WIT]; by teaching, rf, 1 Jn. | 








o 
8 ἀπαλλάσσω 


i.2sq.; by teaching and commanding, τινί τι, Mt. viii. 
33; τινί, with inf, Acts xxvi. 20; [xvii. 30 TWH Tr 
mrg.]; by avowing and praising, Lk. viii. 47; τινί τι, 
Heb. ii. 12 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 23 [yet Sept. διηγήσομαι}: 
[ Mt. xii. 18]; foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. xiv. 25.* 

ἀπ-άγχω [cf. Lat. angustus, anzius, Eng. anguish, ete.; 
Curtius $ 166]: 1 aor. mid. ἀπηγξάμην ; to throttle, stran- 
gle, in order to put out of the way (ἀπό away, cf. ἀπο- 
κτείνω to kill off), Hom. Od. 19, 230; mid. to hang one’s 
self, to end one's life by hanging: Mt. xxvii. 5. (2 S. xvii. 
23; Tob. iii. 10; in Attic from Aeschyl. down.)* 

ἀπ-άγω ; [impf. ἀπῆγον (Lk. xxiii. 26 Tr mre. WH 
mrg.)]; 2 aor. ἀπήγαγον; Pass., [pres. ἀπάγομαι]; 1 aor. 
ἀπήχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead away: Lk. xiii. 15 
(sc. ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης); Acts xxiii. 10 (Lchm. [ed. min.]); 
17 (se. hence); xxiv. 7 [RG] (away, ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ἡμῶν); 
1 Co. xii. 2 (led astray πρὸς rà εἴδωλα). Used esp. of 
those led off to trial, prison, punishment: Mt. xxvi. 57; 
xxvii. 2, 31; Mk. xiv. 44, 53; xv. 16; Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr 
WH); [xxii. 66 T Tr WH]; xxiii. 26: Jn. xviii. 13 RG 
[ἤγαγον LT Tr WH]; xix. 16 Rec.; Acts xii. 19; (so 
also in Grk. writ.). Used of a way leading to a certain 
end: Mt. vii. 12, 14 (eis τὴν ἀπώλειαν, eis τὴν ζωήν). 
[Comp. : συν-απάγω.} * 

ἀπαίδευτος, -ov, (παιδεύω). without instruction and dis- 
cipline, uneducated, ignorant, rude, [W. 96 (92)]: ζητή- 
σεις, stupid questions, 2 Tim. ii. 23. (In classies fr. 
[Eurip.,] Xen. down; Sept.; Joseph.)* 

ἀπ-αίρω: 1 aor. pass. ἀπήρθην; to lift off, take or carry 
away; pass., ἀπό τινος lo be taken away from any one: 
Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk. v. 35. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down.) * 

ἀπ-αιτέω, -@; to ask back, demand back, exact something 
due (Sir. xx. 15 (14) σήμερον δανειεῖ καὶ αὔριον ἀπαιτήσει): 
Lk. vi. 30; τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν [Tr WH αἰτοῦσιν} 
thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, is demanded 
back, Lk. xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπαιτηθεὶς 
χρέος). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

ἀπ-αλγέω, -ῶ : [pf..ptep. ἀπηλγηκώς]: to cease to feel 
pain or grief; a. to bear troubles with greater equa- 
nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thue. 2, 61 ete. b. fo 
become callous, insensible to pain, apathetic: so those whe 
have become insensible to truth and honor and shame 
are called ἀπηλγηκότες [A. V. past feeling] in Eph. iv. 
19. (Polyb. 1, 35, 5 ἀπηλγηκυίας ψυχάς dispirited and 
useless for war, [cf. Polyb. 16, 12, 7].)* 

ἀπ-αλλάσσω: 1 aor. ἀπήλλαξα;:; Pass., [pres. ἀπαλλάσ- 
cogat]; pf. inf. ἀπηλλάχθαι ; (ἀλλάσσω to change; ἀπό, 
sc. τινός) ; com. in Grk. writ.; fo remove, release; pass. 
to be removed, to depart: aw αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους, Acts xix. 
12 (Plat. Eryx. 401 c. εἰ ai νόσοι ἀπαλλαγείησαν ἐκ τῶν 
copárov); in a transferred and esp. in a legal sense, 
ἀπό with gen. of pers., to be set free, the opponent being 
appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one: 
Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2, 
9,6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: twa, Heb. ii. 15; 
(in prof. auth. the gen. of the thing freed fr. is often 
added; ef. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1, p. 339 sq.).* 


ἀπαλλοτριόω 


ἀπ-αλλοτριόω, -ὦ : pf. pass. ptep. ἀπηλλοτριωμένος ; to 
alienate, estrange; pass. (o be rendered ἀλλότριος, to be 
shut out from one’s fellowship and intimacy: τινός, Eph. 
ii. 12; iv. 18; se. rod θεοῦ, Col. i. 21, (equiv. to 147, used 
of those who have estranged themselves fr. God, Ps. 
lvii. (Iviii.) 4; Is. i. 4 [Ald. ete.]; Ezek. xiv. 5, 7; [Test. 
xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 10]; τῶν πατρίων δογμάτων, 3 Mace. 
i. 3; ἀπαλλοτριοῦν τινα τοῦ καλῶς ἔχοντος, Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 14,2). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.,] Plato down.)* 
ἁπαλός, -ή, -óv, tender: of the branch of a tree, when full 
of sap, Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii.28. [From Hom. down. ]* 
ἀπ-αντάω, -à : fut. ἀπαντήσω (Mk. xiv. 13; but in better 
Grk. ἀπαντήσομαι, cf. W. 83 (79); [B. 53 (46)]); 1 aor. 
ἀπήντησα; to go to meet; in past tenses, (o meet: τινί, Mt. 
xxviii. 9 [T Tr WH óz-]; Mk. v. 2 RG; xiv. 13; Lk. xvii. 
12 [L WH om. Tr br. dat.; T WH mrg. read óz-]; Jn. iv. 
51R G; Acts xvi. 16 [R G L]. Ina military sense of a 
hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 RG, as in 1 S. xxii. 17; 2 
S. i. 15; 1 Mace. xi. 15, 68 and often in Grk. writ.* 
ἀπάντησις, eos, 7, (ἀπαντάω), a meeting; els ἀπάντησίν 
τινος Or τινι to meet one: Mt. xxv. 1 RG; vs. 6; Acts 
xxviii 15; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26,8; Diod. 18, 59; 
very often in Sept. equiv. to n&?p5 [cf. W. 30].) * 
ἅπαξ, adv., once, one time, [fr. Hos down]; a. univ.: 
2 Co. xi. 25; Heb. ix. 26 sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 20 Rec.; ere 
ἅπαξ, Heb. xii. 26 sq. ; ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, Heb. ix. 7, [Hdt. 
2, 59, ete.]. b. like Lat. semel, used of what is so done 
as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition, 
once for all: Heb.vi.4; x.2; 1 Pet. iii. 18; Jude vss. 3, 
5. c. καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς indicates a definite number [the 
double καί emphasizing the repetition, both once and 
again i. e.] twice: 1'Th.ii. 18; Phil.iv. 16; on the other 
hand, ἅπαξ καὶ δίς means [once and again i. 6.1 several 
limes, repeatedly: Neh. xiii. 20; 1 Mace. iii. 30. Cf. 
Schott on 1 Th. ii. 18, p. 86; [Meyer on Phil. 1. e.].* 
d-rapá-Boros, -ov, (rapaBaí(vo), fr. the phrase zapafat- 
νειν νόμον to transgress i. e. to violate, signifying either 
unviolated, or not to be violated, inviolable: ἱερωσύνη un- 
changeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor, 
Heb. vii. 24; cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. (A later 
word, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313; in Joseph., Plut., al.)* 
ἀπαρα-σκεύαστος, -ov, (παρασκευάζω), unprepared : 2 Co. 
ix. 4. (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 15; an. 1, 1, 6 [var]; 2,3, 21; 
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 41; Hdian. 3, 9, 19 [(11) ed. Bekk.]; 
adv. ἀπαρασκευάστως, [ Aristot. rhet. Alex. 9 p. 1430* 3] ; 
Clem. hom. 32, 15.) * 
ἀπ-αρνέομαι, -οὔῦμαι : depon. verb; fut. ἀπαρνήσομαι: 1 
aor. ἀπηρνησάμην ; 1 fut. pass. ἀπαρνηθήσομαι with a pass. 
signif. (Lk. xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [cf. B. 53 (46)]); 
to deny (ab nego): τινά, to affirm that one has no acquaint- 
ance or connection with him; of Peter denying Christ : 
Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72; [Lk. xxii. 61]; 
Jn. xiii. 328 ἢ GL mreg.; more fully ἀπ. μὴ εἰδέναι ᾿Ιησοῦν, 
Lk. xxii. 34 (L Tr WH om. μή, concerning which cf. 
Kühner ii. p. 761; [Jelf § 749, 1; W. § 65, 2 B. ; B. 355 
(305)]. ἑαυτόν to forget one's self, lose sight of one's 
self and one's own interests: Mt. xvi. 24; Mk. viii. 34; 
Lk. ix. 23 R WH mrs.* 


54 








E] 
aT as 


ἀπάρτι [so Tdf. in Jn., T and Tr in Rev.], or rather ἀπ᾿ 
ἄρτι (cf. W. $ 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275); 
Lipsius p. 127]; see ἄρτι), adv., from now, henceforth : 
Mt. xxiii. 39; xxvi. 29, 64 (in Lk. xxii. 69 ἀπὸ τοῦ vv) ; 
Jn. i.51 (52) Rec. ; xiii. 19; xiv. 7; Rev. xiv. 13 (where 
connect ἀπ᾽ ἄρτι with μακάριοι). In the Grk. of the O. T. it 
is not found (for the Sept. render ry by ἀπὸ τοῦ viv), 
and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. Pl. 388; Plat. 
Com. Zoo. 10] in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. 
For the similar term which the classic writ. employ is 
to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. azapri), 
and has a different sighif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf. 
Knapp, Seripta var. Arg. i. p. 296; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
20 sq.* 

ἀπαρτισμός, -o), 6, (ἀπαρτίζω to finish, complete), com- 
pletion: Lk. xiv. 28. Found besides only in Dion. Hal. 
de comp. verb. c. 24; [ Apollon. Dysc. de adv. p. 532, 7, 
als ef. W.p:24]* 

ἀπ-αρχή, -ῆς, 7. (fr. ἀπάρχομαι : a. to offer firstlings 
or first-fruits; b. to take away the first-fruits; cf. ἀπό in 
ἀποδεκατόω), in Sept. generally equiv. to Ww ; the first- 
fruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a 
natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which 
were offered to God; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Erstlinge, 
[BB.DD. s. v. First-fruits]: ἡ ἀπαρχή sc. τοῦ φυράματος, 
the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves 
were to be prepared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16. 
Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons 
consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: dz. τῆς 
"Axatas the first person in “Achaia to enroll himself as a 
Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with eis Χριστόν added, Ro. 
xvi. 5; with a reference to the moral creation effected 
by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called 
ἀπαρχή τις (a kind of first-fruits) τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ κτισμάτων, 
Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc.), [noteworthy is εἵλατο ὑμᾶς 6 
θεὸς ἀπαρχήν ete. as first-fruits] 2 Th. ii. 13 L Tr mrg. 
WH mrg.; Christ is called ἀπ. τῶν κεκοιμημένων as the 
first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep, 
1 Co. xv. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify 
that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is 
guaranteed; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as 
it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har- 
vest). b. of persons superior in excellence to others 
of the same class: so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain 
class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ 
beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 ἀπαρχὴ: ἐλέ- 
yero οὐ μόνον τὸ πρῶτον τῇ τάξει, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ πρῶτον τῇ 
τιμῇ). €. οἱ ἔχοντες τὴν ἀπ. τοῦ πνεύματος Who have the 
first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (τοῦ mv. 
is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23; cf. what Winer § 59, 
8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see 
Weiss in ed. 6] who take ro) zv. as a partitive gen., 
so that of ἔχ. τ. ἀπ. τοῦ mv. are distinguished from the 
great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down.) * 

ἅπας, -aca, -av, (fr. ἅμα [or rather a (Skr. sa; cf. a 
copulative), see Curtius § 598; Vanicek p. 972] and πᾶς; 
stronger than the simple was), [fr. Hom. down]; quite 


> Ζ 
(ἀπασπάζομαν 


all, the whole, all together, all; it is either placed before 
a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 21; viii. 37; xix. 37; 
or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 (εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἅπαντα into 
all parts of the world) ; Lk. iv. 6 (this dominion whole-ly 
i.e. all parts of this dominion which you see); xix. 48. 
used absolutely, —in the mase., as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii. 
16 [T WH Tr mrg. πᾶσιν]; [iv. 40 WH txt. Tr mrg.]; v. 
26; ix. 15[WH mrg. πάντας] ; Mk. xi. 32 [ Lehm. πάντες]: 
Jas. iii. 2;—in the neut. as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28 
ΓΕ 61; Acts ii. 44; iv. 32 [L WH Tr mrg. πάντα] ; x. 8; 
xi.10; Eph. vi. 13; once in John viz. iv. 25 T Tr WH; 
[ἅπαντες οὗτοι, Acts ii. 7 L T ; ἅπαντες ὑμεῖς, Gal. iii. 28 'T 
Tr; cf. was, II. 1 fin. Rarely used by Paul; most fre- 
quently by Luke. On its occurrence, cf. Alford, Grk. 
Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16]. 

ἀπ-ασπάζομαι: 1 aor. ἀπησπασάμην ; to salute on leav- 
ing, bid farewell, take leave of: τινά, Acts xxi. 6 L T Tr 
WH. (Himer. eclog. ex Phot. 11, p. 194.) * 

ἀπατάω.- 9; 1 aor. pass. ἡπατήθην ; (ἀπάτη); fr. Hom. 
down ; to cheat, deceive, beguile : τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ [R'T Tr 
WH mrz., abr. G, éavr. L WH txt.], Jas. i. 26; τινά τινι, one 
with a thing, Eph. v. 6 ; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 (where L T Tr 
WH ἐξαπατηθεῖσα). cf. Gen.iii. 13. [Comr.: é£azaráo.]* 

ἀπάτη, -ης, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], deceit, deceitfulness : 
Col. ii. 8; rod πλούτου, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19 ; τῆς ἀδικίας, 
2 Th. ii. 10; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Heb. iii. 13; αἱ ἐπιθυμίαι τῆς 
ἀπάτης the lusts excited by deceit, i. e. by deceitful influ- 
ences seducing to sin, Eph. iv. 22, (others, ‘deceitful 
lusts’; but ef. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. ἀπάται: 2 Pet. ii. 13 
(where L Tr txt. WH mrg: ἐν ἀγάπαις), by a paragram 
(or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf. 
:ἀγάπη. 2), because these were transformed by base men 
into seductive revels.* 

ἀπάτωρ, -opos, 6, 7, (πατήρ), a word which has almost 
the same variety of senses as ἀμήτωρ, q.v.; [fr. Soph. 
down]; [without father i. e.] whose father is not recorded 
in the genealogies : Heb. vii. 3.* 

ἀπ-αύγασμα, -ros, τό, (fr. ἀπαυγάζω to emit brightness, 
and this fr. αὐγή brightness; cf. ἀποσκίασμα, ἀπείκασμα, 
ἀπεικόνισμα, ἀπήχημα), reflected brightness: Christ is 
called in Heb. i. 3 ἀπαύγ. τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ, inasmuch 
as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God; so that the 
same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically, 
which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii. 
45 (xiv. 9): 6 θεωρῶν ἐμὲ θεωρεῖ τὸν πέμψαντά pe. (Sap. 
vii. 26 ; Philo, mund. opif. § 51; plant. Noé § 12; de con- 
cup. $ 11; and often in eecl. writ.; see more fully in 
Grimm on Sap.l.c., p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still 
adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin- 
guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad 
loc.; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Cremer s. v.]* 

ἀπ-εῖδον, (ἀπό and εἶδον, 2 aor. of obsol. e(8c), serves as 
2 aor. of ἀφοράω, (cf. Germ. ab sehen) ; 1. to look 
away from one thing and at another. 2. to look at 
Jrom somewhere, either from a distance or from a certain 
present condition of things; to perceive: ὡς ἂν ἀπίδω (L 
T Tr WH ἀφίδω [see ἀφεῖδον]) τὰ περὶ ἐμέ as soon as T 
‘shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A. V. 


58 








ἀπείραστος 


how it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23. 
5, ete.) * j 

ἀπείθεια [ WH -6ía, exc. in Heb. as below (see I, «)],-as, 
ἡ, (ἀπειθής), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obsti- 
nacy, and in the N. T. particularly obstinate opposition to 
the divine will: Ro. xi. 30, 32; Heb. iv. 6,11; υἱοὶ τ. ἀπει- 
θείας, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see 
vids, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 
6 [R GL br.]. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; Plut., al.)* 

dmeéo, -ὦ ; impf. ἠπείθουν:; 1 aor. ἠπείθησα; to be ἀπειθής 
(q. v.) ; not to allow one's self to be persuaded ; not to com- 
ply with; a. to refuse or withhold belief (in Christ, in 
the gospel; opp. to πιστεύω) : τῷ vid, Jn. iii. 36; τῷ 
λόγῳ, 1 Pet. ii. 8; iii. 1; absol. of those who reject the 
gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient; cf. b.]: Aets xiv. 2; 
xvii. 5 [Rec.]; xix. 9; Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (T Tr WH 
b. to refuse belief and obediencé: with dat. 
of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (τῇ ἀληθείᾳ) ; xi. 30 sq. (τῷ 
θεῷ): 1 Pet. iv. 17 ; absol, Ro. x. 21 (Ts. Ixv. 2) ; Heb. iii 
18; xi. 31; 1 Pet.iii.20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to nmm, 
1D; in Grk. writ. often fr. Aeschyl. Ag. 1049 down ; in 
Hom. et al. ἀπιθεῖν.) * 

ἀπειθής, -és, gen. -oüs, (πείθομαι). impersuasible, uncom- 
pliant, contumacious, [ A. V. disobedient]: absol, Lk. i. 
17; Tit.i.16; iii. 35 τινί, 2 Tim.iii. 2; Ro. 1. 30; Acts 
xxvi. 19. (Deut) xxi 185; Num. xx: 10); Js. xxx. 9: 
Zech. vii. 12; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; [in Theogn. 
1235 actively not persuasive ].) * 

ἀπειλέω, -@ : 


(In Sept., Jon. iv. 


ἀπιστοῦσιν). 


impf. ἠπείλουν ; 1 aor. mid. ἠπειλησάμην ; 
to threaten, menace: 1 Pet. ii..23 ; in mid., ace. to later 
Grk. usage ([.App. bell. civ. 3, 29]; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2), 
actively [B. 54 (47)]: Acts iv. 17 (ἀπειλῇ [L T Tr WH 
om.] ἀπειλεῖσθαι, with dat. of pers. foll. by μή with inf., 
with sternest threats to forbid one to etc., W. 8 54, 3; 
[B. 183 (159)]). (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: προσ- 
ameiéo. | * 

ἀπειλή, -ῆς. ἡ. a threatening, threat: Acts iv. 17 RG (cf. 
amethéw), 29; ix. 1; Eph. vi. 9. (From Hom. down.) * 

ἄπ-ειμι : (εἰμί to be); [fr. Hom. down]; 10 be away, be 
absent: 1 Co. v. 8; 2 Co. x. 1, 11; xiii. 2,10; Col. ii. 55 
Phil. i. 27 ; [in all cases exc. Col. l. c. opp. to πάρειμι]. * 

ἄπ-ειμι : impf. 3 pers. plur. ἀπήεσαν ; (εἶμι to go); [fr. 
Hom. down]; to go away, depart: Acts xvii. 10.* 

ἀπ-εῖπον : (εἶπον, 2 aor. fr. obsol. £r) ; 1. to speak 
out, set forth, declare, (Hom. Il. 7, 416 ἀγγελίην ἀπέειπεν, 
9, 309 τὸν μῦθον dmoeureiv). 2. to forbid : 1 K. xi. 2, 
and in Attie writ. 3. to give up, renounce: with-ace. 
of the thing, Job x. 3 (for DD), and often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down. In the same sense 1 aor. mid. ἀπειπάμην, 
2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. αἰσχύνη, 1) ; so 
too in Hdt. 1, 59; 5, 56; 7, 14, [etc.], and the later writ. 
fr. Polyb. down.* 

ἀπείραστος. -ov, (πειράζω). as well untempted as un- 
temptable: ἀπείραστος κακῶν that cannot be tempted by 
evil not liable to temptation to sin, Jas. i. 13; cf. the 
full remarks on this pass. in W. $ 30, 4 [ef. $ 16, 3 a.; B. 
170(148)]. (Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 5,9, 3; 7, 8, 1, and eccl. writ. 
The Greeks said ἀπείρατος. fr. zetpáo-) ἢ 


ἄπειρος δύ 


ἄπειρος, -ον, (πεῖρα trial, experience), inexperienced in, 
without experience of, with gen. of the thing (as in Grk. 
writ.) : Heb. v.13. [(Pind. and Hdt. down.)]* 

ἀπ-εκ-δέχομαι ; [impf. ἀπεξεδεχόμην}; assiduously and 
patiently to wait for, [ οἴ. Eng. wait it out]: absol., 1 Pet. 
iii. 20 (Rec. ἐκδέχομαι) ; τί, Ro. viii. 19, 23, 25; 1 Co. i. 
7; Gal. v. 5 (on this pass. ef. ἐλπίς sub fin.) ; with the 
acc. of a pers., Christ in his return from heaven: Phil. 
ii. 20; Heb. ix. 28. Cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritz- 
schiorum Opusce. p. 155 sq. ; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
iv. p. 14; [Ellie. on Gal.l.c.]. (Scarcely found out of 
the N. T.; Heliod. Aeth. 2, 35; 7, 23.)* 

Gar-ex-Svonar: 1 aor. ἀπεκδυσάμην ; 1. wholly to put 
off from one’s self (ἀπό denoting separation fr. what is 
put off): τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον, Col. iii. 9. 2. wholly 
to strip off for one’s self (for one’s own advantage), de- 
spoil, disarm: twa, Col. ii. 15. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. iv. p. 14 54.. [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii.15]. (Jo- 
seph. antt. 6, 14, 2 ἀπεκδὺς [but ed. Bekk. perexdds| τὴν 
βασιλικὴν ἐσθῆτα.) * 

ἀπ-έκ-δυσις, -ews, ἡ, (ἀπεκδύομαι, q.v.), a putting off, 
laying aside: Col. ii. 11. (Not found in Grk. writ.) * 

ἀπ-ελαύνω: 1 aor. ἀπήλασα; to drive away, drive off: 
Acts xviii. 16. (Com. in Grk. writ.)* 

ἀπ-ελεγμός, -o0, ὁ, (ἀπελέγχω to convict, expose, refute ; 
ἔλεγμός conviction, refutation, in Sept. for ἔλεγξις), 
censure, repudiation of a thing shown to be worthless: 
ἐλθεῖν εἰς ἀπελεγμόν to be proved to be worthless, to be 
disesteemed, come into contempt [R. V. disrepute], Acts 
xix. 27. (Not used by prof. auth.)* 

ἀπ-ελεύθερος, -ov, 6, 7, @ manumitted slave, a freedman, 
(ἀπό, cf. Germ. los, [set free from bondage]) : τοῦ κυρίου, 
presented with (spiritual) freedom by the Lord, 1 Co. 
vii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) * 

᾿Απέλλης [better -λλῆς (so all edd.); see Chandler 
$8 59, 60], -od, 6, Apelles, the prop. name of a certain 
Christian: Ro. xvi. 10. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 
174.]* 

ἀπ-ελπίζω (Lehm. ἀφελπίζω, [cf. gram. reff. s. v. apet- 
8ov]); to despair [W. 24]: μηδὲν ἀπελπίζοντες nothing 
despairing sc. of the hoped-for recompense from God the 
requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WH mre. μηδένα azeXz. ; if this 
reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing 
of no one, or even causing mo one to despair (cf. the 
Jerus. Syriac). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take 
μηδένα as neut. plur., a form thought to be not wholly un- 
precedented; cf. Steph. 'Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix. 
19; 2 Macc. ix. 18; Sir. xxii. 21; [xxvii. 21; Judith ix. 
11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)* 

ἀπ-έναντι, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (273)]; 1. over 
against, opposite: tod τάφου, Mt. xxvii. 61; [τοῦ γαζοφυ- 
λακίου, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mre.]. 2. in sight of, 
before: Mt. xxi. 2 RG; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt. 
κατέναντι); Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 
2). S. in opposition to, against: τῶν δογμάτων Kat- 
capos, Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr. ; 
Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)* 

ἀπέραντος, -ov, (περαίνω to go through, finish; cf. ἀμά- 


ἀπέρχομαι 


pavros), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless : 
yeveadoyiat, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job 
xxxvi. 26; 3 Mace. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) * 

ἀπερισπάστως, adv., (περισπάω, q. v.), without distrac- 
tion, without solicitude: 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective 
occurs in Sap. xvi. 11; Sir. xli. 1; often in Polyb. [the 
adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4, 18, 6; 12, 28, 4; cf. W. 463 (431)] 
and Plut.) * 

ἀ-περίττμητος, -ov, (περιτέμνω); uncircumcised ; metaph. 
ἀπερίτμητοι τῇ καρδίᾳ (Jer. ix. 26; Ezek. xliv. 7) καὶ r- 
ὠσί (Jer. vi^10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e. 
whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitions, 
obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for og 1 Mace. 
i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de mier. Abr. $39]; Plut. am. 
prol. 3.) * 

ἀπ-έρχομαι ; fut. ἀπελεύσομαι (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv. 
28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. ἀπῆλθον (ἀπῆλθα in Rev. x. 9 
[where RG Tr -6ov], ἀπῆλθαν L'T Tr WIL in Mt. xxii. 
22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), ete, and 
WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. $ 13, 1; Mullach p. 17 sq. 
[226]; B. 39 (34); [Soph. Lex. p. 38; T'df. Proleg. p. 123; 
WH. App.p. 164 sq.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. p. Ixiv.; 
Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, ete., p. liv. sq.]); 
pf. ἀπελήλυθα (Jas. i. 24); plpf. ἀπεληλύθειν (Jn. iv. 8) ; 
[fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a place), to depart; 
1. properly, a. absol: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v. 
20; Lk. viii. 39; xvii. 23; Jn. xvi. 7, etc. Ptep. ἀπελθών 
with indie. or subj. of other verbs in past time /o go 
(away) and ete.: Mt. xiii. 28, 46; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25; 
xxvi. 36; xxvii. 5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v. 14. b. with 
specification of the place into which, or of the per- 
son to whom or from whom one departs: eis with: 
acc. of place, Mt. v. 30 L T Tr WH; xiv. 15; xvi. 21; 
xxii. 5; Mk. vi. 36; ix. 43; Jn. iv. 8; Ro. xv. 28, etc. ; 
εἰς ὁδὸν ἐθνῶν, Mt. x. 5; eis τὸ πέραν, Mt. viii. 18; Mk. 
viii. 13; [80 ὑμῶν eis Maxed. 2 Co. i. 16 Lehm. txt.]; ἐπέ 
with acc. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 R GT]; xxiv. 24; ἐπί 
with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to: 
ἐπί (the true reading for R G εἰς) τὴν ἐμπορίαν αὐτοῦ, Mt. 
xxli.5; ἐκεῖ, Mt. ii. 22; ἔξω with gen., Acts iv. 15; πρός 
τινα, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev. x. 95 ἀπό twos, Lk. i. 38; 
viii. 37.  Hebraistically (ef. "nrw 3279) ἀπέρχ. ὀπίσω 
τινός to go away in order to follow any one, go after him 
ficuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him as a leader : 
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; in the same sense ἀπέρχ. πρός τινα, 
Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9, 16 (29); used also of those 
who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog- 
raphers (following Suidas, *dzéA8g* ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐπανέλθῃ ᾽) 
incorrectly aseribe to ἀπέρχεσθαι also the idea of return- 
ing, going back, — misled by the fact that a going away 
is often at the same time a going back. But where this 
is the case, it is made evident either by the connection, 
as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as eis τὸν οἶκον 
αὐτοῦ, Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 30, (οἴκαδε. Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6); 
πρὸς ἑαυτόν [ Tres. mp. αὐτόν] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G, 
but L Tr br. TWH reject the vs.]; Jn. xx. 10 [here T 
Tr πρὸς αὐτούς, WH m. air. (see abr00)]; eis τὰ ὀπίσω, 
Jn. vi. 66 (to return home) ; xviii. 6 (to draw back, re-- 


nob. ἡ 
(am exo 


treat). 2. trop.: of departing evils and sufferings, 
Mk.i.42; Lk. v.13 (ἡ λέπρα ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ); Rev. 
ix. 12; xi. 14; of good things taken away from one, Rey. 
xviii. 14 [R G]; of an evanescent state of things, Rev. 
xxi. 1 (Rec. παρῆλθε), 4; of a report going forth or 
spread εἰς, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. ἐξῆλθεν]. 

ἀπέχω; [impf. ἀπεῖχον Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
pres. mid. dzéxopa:] ; 1. trans. a. to hold back, 
keep off, prevent, (Hom. Il. 1, 97 [Zenod.]; 6, 96; Plat. 
Crat.e. 23 p. 407 b.). — b. to have wholly or in full, to 
have received (what one had a right to expect or de- 
mand; cf. ἀποδιδόναι, ἀπολαμβάνειν: [ Win. De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. iv. p. 8; Gram. 275 (258); B. 203 (176); acc. to 
Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) ἀπό denotes correspon- 
dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos- 
session to the desire, etc.]): τινά, Philem. 15; μισθόν, 
Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; παράκλησιν, Lk. vi. 24; πάντα, Phil. iv. 
18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
le.]. Hence c. ἀπέχει, impers., it is enough, suffi- 
cient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is *ye have 
slept now long enough’; so that Christ takes away the 
permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer; 
cf. Meyer ad loc.; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-) 
Anaer. in Odar. (15) 28, 33; Cyril Alex. on Hag. ii. 
9 [but the true reading here seems to be ἀπέχω, see P. E. 
Pusey's ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intrans. fo be away, 
absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; ἀπό, 
Lk. vii. 6; xxiv. 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; xv. 
8; Mk. vii. 6, (Is. xxix. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one's self 
off, abstain: amo twos, from any thing, Acts xv. 20 
[R G]; 1 Th. iv. 3; v. 22, (Job i.1; ii. 3; Ezek. viii. 6) ; 
twos, Acts xv. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Pet.ii. 11. (So in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀπιστέω, -9; [impf. ἠπίστουν]; 1 aor: ἠπίστησα; (ἄπι- 
gros); 1. to betray a trust, be unfaithful : 2 Tim. ii. 13 
(opp. to πιστὸς μένει) ; Ro. iii. 3; [al. deny this sense in 
the N. T.; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. I. c.; Ellic. on 
2 Tim. Te 2. to have no belief, disbelieve : in the 
news of Christ's resurrection, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv. 
41; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11; in the tidings con- 
cerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (opp. to πι- 
orev), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 T Tr WH]; Acts xxviii. 24. (In 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)* 

ἀπιστία, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἄπιστος), want of faith and trust; 
1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraying a 
trust): Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. ἀπιστέω, 1]. 2. want of 
Saith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine 
power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of 
God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19; in the divine mission of 
Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 6; by opposition to the gos- 
pel 1 Tim.i.13; with the added notion of obstinacy, 
Ro. xi. 20, 23; Heb. iii. 12. contextually, weakness of 
faith: Mt. xvii. 20 (where L'T Tr WH ὀλιγοπιστίαν) ; 
Mk. ix. 34. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)* 

ἄπιστος, -ov, (πιστός), [fr. Hom. down], without faith 
or trust; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted, 
perfidious) : Lk. xii. 46; Rev. xxi. 8. 2. incredible, 
of things: Acts xxvi. 8; (Xen. Hiero 1, 9; symp. 4, 


oT 





ἀνα 
emo 


49; Cyr. 3, 1, 26; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c.; Joseph. antt. 6, 
10, 2, ete.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas 
disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn. 
xx. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co. 
vi.6; vii 12-15; x. 27; xiv. 22 sqq.; [1 Tim. v. 8]; 
with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co. 
iv.4; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them- 
selves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without 
trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41.* 

ἁπλότης, -jros, 7, singleness, simplicity, sincerity, men- 
tal honesty; the virtue of one who is free from pretence 
and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 
3; Hell. 6,1, 18, down): ἐν ἁπλότητι (1, T Tr WH ἁγιό- 
TTL) καὶ εἰλικρινείᾳ θεοῦ i. e. infused by God through the 
Spirit [W. $ 36, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; ἐν ἅπλ. τῆς καρδίας 
(229 "P^, 1 Chr. xxix. 17), Col. iii. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap. 
1. 1); εἰς Χριστόν, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e. 
single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wisdom 
in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3; é& 
ἁπλότητι in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii. 
8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions, 
liberality, [Joseph. antt. 7, 13, 4; but in opposition see 
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 62 sq.]: 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11, 
13 (75s kowovías, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling 
s. v. * Einfalt' in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.* 

ἁπλοῦς, -ἢ, -odv, (contr. fr. -dos, -όη, -óov), [fr. Aeschyl. 
down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing compli- 
cated or confused; without folds, [cf. Trench § 1vi.]) ; 
whole; of the eye, good, fulfilling its office, sound : Mt. 
vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, — [al. contend that the moral sense 
of the word is the only sense lexically warranted; cf. 
Test. xii. Patr. test. Isach. $ 3 οὐ κατελάλησά τινος. etc. 
πορευόμενος ev ἁπλότητι ὀφθαλμῶν, ibid. $ 4 πάντα ὁρᾷ 
ἐν ἁπλότητι, μὴ ἐπιδεχόμενος ὀφθαλμοῖς πονηρίας ἀπὸ τῆς 


"πλάνης τοῦ kómpov; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].* 


ἁπλῶς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], simply, openly, frank- 
iy, sincerely : Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).* 

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, 
(Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [cf. Eng. of, off ]), 
Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On 
its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 
} is traceable, ef. W. 364 sq. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; D. 
321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words 
beginning with a vowel see 7f. Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. 
$5,1a.; B.p.10sq.: WH. App. p. 146.] In order 
to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, 
but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by 
this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used 

I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, 
after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, 
removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, 
ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι. φεύγω, cte.) : ἀπεσπά- 
σθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii. 41; βάλε ἀπὸ cod, Mt. v. 29 sq. ; 
ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ, Mt. 
vil. 4: ap [L WH Tr txt. παρ᾽ (q. v. T5 a.)] ἧς ἐκβεβλήκει 
δαιμόνια. Mk. xvi. 9; καθεῖλε ἀπὸ θρόνων, Lk.i.52. 2. of 
the separation of apart from the whole; where of 
a whole some part is taken: ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου, Mt. ix. 16; 


NY 
amo 


and μελισσίου κηρίου, Lk. xxiv. 42 [R G, but Tr br. the 
clause]: ἀπὸ τῶν ὀψαρίων, Jn. xxi. 10; rà ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου 
fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44; ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ 
τῆς τιμῆς, Acts v. 2; ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος, Acts ii. 
17; ἐκλεξάμενος ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. vi. 13; τίνα ἀπὸ τῶν δύο, 
Mt. xxvii. 21; ὃν ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν ᾿Ισραήλ, sc. τινές [ R. 
V. whom certain of the children of Israel did price (ef. 
tis, 2 c.); but al. refer this to IT. 2 d. aa. fin. q. v.], Mt. 
xxvii. 9, (ἐξῆλθον ἀπὸ τῶν ἱερέων, sc. τινές, 1 Mace. vii. 
33); after verbs of eating and drinking (usually joined 
in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [ef. B. 159 (139); 
W. 198 (186) sq.]) : Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28; πίνειν ἀπό, 
Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. ἐκ). 3. of any 
kind of separation of one thing from another by which 
the union or fellowship of the two is destroyed; 
a. after verbs of averting, loosening, liberating, ransom- 
ing, preserving: see dyopá(e, ἀπαλλάσσω, ἀποστρέφω. 
ἐλευθερόω, θεραπεύω, καθαρίζω, λούω, λυτρόω, Uw, ῥύομαι, 
colo, φυλάσσω. etc. b. after verbs of desisting, abstain- 
ing, avoiding, etc.: see ἀπέχω, παύω, καταπαύω, βλέπω, 
προσέχω, φυλάσσομαι, ete. c. after verbs of concealing 
and hindering: see κρύπτω,. κωλύω, παρακαλύπτω. ἃ. 
Concise constructions, [cf. esp. D. 322 (277)]: ἀνάθεμα 
ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Ro. ix. 3 (see ἀνάθεμα sub fin.); λούειν 
“ἀπὸ τῶν πληγῶν to wash away the blood from: the stripes, 
Acts xvi. 33; μετανοεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας by repentance to 
turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; ἀποθνήσκειν 
«ἀπό τινος by death to be freed from a thing, Col. ii. 20; 
φθείρεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος to be corrupted and thus 
led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3; εἰσακου- 
-Ócis ἀπὸ τ. εὐλαβείας heard and accordingly delivered 
from his fear, Heb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of 
his godly fear [cf. II. 2 b. below]). 4. of a state of 
separation, i.e. of distance; and a. of distance of 
Place,—of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii. 
34; xxiv. 31, ete.; after μακράν, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii. 
34; Jn. xxi. 8; after ἀπέχειν, see ἀπέχω 2; ἀπὸ ἄνωθεν 
ἕως κάτω, Mk. xv. 38; ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, Mt. xxvii. 55, ete. 
[cf. B. τὸ (62); W. $ 65, 2]. Ace. to later Grk. usage 
it is put before nouns indicating local distance: Jn. xi. 
18 (ἦν ἐγγὺς ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε about fifteen fur- 
longs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xiv. 20, (Diod. i. 51 ἐπάνω τῆς 
πόλεως ἀπὸ δέκα σχοίνων λίμνην ὥρυξε, [also 1, 97 ; 4,56; 
16,46; 17,112; 18,40; 19, 25, ete.; cf. Soph. Lex. 
8. v. 5]; Joseph. b. j. 1, 3, 5 τοῦτο ad’ ἑξακοσίων σταδίων 
ἐντεῦθέν ἐστιν, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 18, 5 ὥστε τοὺς zpó- 
Tous νεκροὺς ἀπὸ δυοῖν σταδίων καταπεσεῖν, vit. Oth. c. 11, 
1 κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀπὸ πεντήκοντα σταδίων, vit. Philop. 
C. 4, 3 ἦν γὰρ d'ypós αὐτῷ ἀπὸ σταδίων εἴκοσι τῆς πόλεως); 
cf. W. 557 (518) sq.; [B. 153 (133)]. b. of distance 
of Time,—of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat. 
inde a): ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης, Mt. ix. 22; xvii. 18; Jn. 
xix. 27; dn’ ἐκ. τῆς ἡμέρας, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi. 53; [ἀπὸ 
πρώτης ἡμέρας.) Actsxx. 18; Phil.i. [LT Tr WH τῆς mp. 
ἡμ.}:; ap ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων, Acts xv. 7; ἀπ᾽ ἐτῶν, Lk. viii. 
43; Ro. xv. 23; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος and ἀπὸ τ. αἰώνων, Lk. i. 70, 
€tc.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, Mt. xix. 4, 8, ete.; ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, 
Mt. xiii. 35 [L T Tr WH om. xocp.], etc.; ἀπὸ κτίσεως 


58 








S 
απο 


κόσμου, Ro. i. 20; ἀπὸ βρέφους from a child, 2 Tim. iii. 
15; ἀπὸ τῆς παρθενίας, Lk. ii. 36; ἀφ᾽ ἧς (sc. ἡμέρας) since, 
Lk. vii. 45; Acts xxiv. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 4; ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἡμέρας, 
Col. i. 6, 9; ἀφ᾽ οὗ equiv. to ἀπὸ τούτου ὅτε [cf. D. 82 
(71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25; xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18, 
(Hat. 2, 44; and in Attic) ; ἀφ᾽ οὗ after τρία ἔτη, Lk. xiii. 
7T Tr WH; ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν from the present, henceforth, Lk. i. 
48; v. 10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16; 
ἀπὸ rore, Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21; xxvi. 16; Lk. xvi. 16; ἀπὸ 
πέρυσι since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2; 
ἀπὸ mpwi, Acts xxviii. 23; cf. W. 422 (393); [B. 320 
(275)]; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. ο. of distance of 
Order or Rank, —of the terminus from which in any 
succession of things or persons: ἀπὸ διετοῦς (sc. παιδός) 
kal κατωτέρω, Mt. ii. 16, (Τοὺς Aeviras ἀπὸ εἰκοσαετοῦς 
καὶ ἐπάνω, Num.i. 20; 2 Esdr. iii. S); ἀπὸ ᾿Αβραὰμ ἕως 
Δαυείδ, Mt. 1. 17; ἕβδομος ἀπὸ ᾿Αδάμ, Jude 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ 
ἕως μεγάλου, Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό 
τινος, Mt. xx. 8; Lk. xxiii. 5; xxiv. 27; Jn. viii. 9; Acts 
viii. 35; x. 37. 

II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place 
whence; or of causal origin, the cause from which. 1. 
of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is 
taken; a. after verbs of coming; see ἔρχομαι, ἥκω, ete. : 
ἀπὸ [ L'Tr WH ἀπ᾽] ἀγορᾶς sc. ἐλθόντες, Mk. vii. 4; ἄγγελος 
ἀπ᾽ (τοῦ) οὐρανοῦ. Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ] ; 
τὸν am οὐρανῶν Sc. λαλοῦντα, Heb. xii. 25, etc.; of the 
country, province, town, village, from which any one has 
originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324 
(279)]: Mt. ii. 1; iv. 25; Jn. i. 44 (45); xi. 1; μία ἀπὸ 
ὄρους Swa, Gal. iv. 24. Hence 6 or oí ἀπό twos a native of, 
a man of, some place: 6 ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ the Nazarene, Mt. 
xxi. 11; ὁ ἀπὸ ᾿Αριμαθαίας, Mk. xv. 43; Jn. xix. 38 [here 
GL Tr WH om.. 6]; οἱ ἀπὸ 'Iómmgs, Acts x. 23; οἱ ἀπὸ 
Ἰταλίας the Italians, Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66,6]. A 
great number of exx. fr. prof. writ. are given by Wieseler, 
Untersuch. üb. d. Hebriierbr. 2te Halfte, p. 14 sq. b. 
of the party or society from which one has proceeded, 
i.e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary 
of it: oí ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας. Acts xii. 1; oí ἀπὸ τῆς aipe- 
σεως τῶν Φαρισαίων. Acts xv. 5, (asin Grk. writ.: οἱ ἀπὸ 
τῆς Στοᾶς. οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ακαδημίας. ete). c. of the material 
from which a thing is made: ἀπὸ τριχῶν καμήλου, Mt. 
iii. 4 [W. 370 (347); B. 324 (279)]. d. trop. of that 
rom or by which a thing is known: ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν 
ἐπιγινώσκειν. Mt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lehm. ἐκ τ. x. ete.] 
(Lys. in Andoe. ὃ 6; Aeschin. adv. Tim. p. 69 ed. 
Reiske) ; μανθάνειν ἀπό τινος to learn from the example 
of any one, Mt. xi. 29; xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; but in 
Gal. iii. 2; Col i. 7; Heb. v. 8, pavÓ. ἀπό τινος means 
to learn from one's teaching or training [cf. B. 324 
(279) e.; W. 372 (348)]. e. after verbs of seeking, in- 
quiring, demanding: ἀπαιτεῖν, Lk. xii. 20['Tr WH air.]; 
Gyreiv, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with ἐκ [cf. W. § 50, 
2]); ἐκζητεῖν, Lk. xi. 50 56. ; see airéo. 2. of causal 
origin, or the Cause; and a. of the material cause, 
so called, or of that which supplies the material for the 
maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: so 


3 
«mo 


γεμίζεσθαι, χορτάζεσθαι, πλουτεῖν, διακονεῖν dTÓ Twos, — see 
those verbs. b. of the cause on account of which 
anything is or is done, where commonly it can be ren- 
dered for (Lat. prae, Germ. vor): οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; οὐκέτι ἴσχυσαν ἀπὸ τοῦ πλήθους, Jn. 
xxi. 6, (Judith ii. 20); ἀπὸ τ. δόξης τοῦ φωτός, Acts xxii. 
11; [here many would bring in Heb. v. 7 (W. 371 (348) ; 
B. 322 (276)), see IL. 3 d. above]. c. of the moving or 
impelling cause (Lat. er, prae; Germ. aus, vor), for, 
out of : ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ ὑπάγει, Mt. xiii. 44; ἀπὸ τοῦ 
φόβου for fear, Mt. xiv. 26; xxviii. 4; Lk. xxi, 26. 
Hebraistically : φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό twos (112 N72), Mt. x. 28; 
Lk. xii. 4; φεύγειν ἀπό τινος (12 011), to flee for fear of 
one, Jn. x. 5; Mk. xiv. 52 (RG, but L Tr mre. br. ἀπ᾽ 
αὐτῶν) ; Rev. ix.6; cf. φεύγω and W. 223 (209 sq.). d. 
of the efficient cause, viz. of things from the force of 
which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose 
will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence, 
direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: ἀπὸ 
τοῦ ὕπνου by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 9; ἀπὸ σοῦ 
σημεῖον, Mt. xii. 38; ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν, 2 Co. iii. 18 
(from the glory which we behold for ourselves [cf. W. 
254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we 
share, cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; ἀπὸ κυρίου πνεύματος by the 
Spirit of the Lord [yet cf. B. 343 (295)], ibid.; ὄλεθρον 
mà προσώπου Tod κυρίου destruction proceeding from the 
(incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th. 
i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26 
Sept., cf. Ewald) ; on the other hand, ἀνάψυξις ἀπὸ προ- 
σώπου τ. κι Acts iii. 20 (19); ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἀπὸ (Rec. ὑπό) 
τῶν πληγῶν, Rev. ix. 18. ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυ- 
Tov, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself (myself, 
etc.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distin- 
guished from another's instruction, [cf. W. 372 (348)]: 
Lk. xi 57; xxi/305; dn. v. 19, 30; xi. 515) xiv. 10; xvi. 
13; xviii. 34 [L'Tr WH ἀπὸ ecavr.]; 2 Co. iii. 5; x. 7 [T 
Tr WI ἐφ᾽ €. (see ἐπί A. I. 1 ο΄.)7; of one's own will and 
motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another: 
Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 42; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one's 
own power: Jn. xv. 4; by one's power and on one’s own 
judgment: Jn. viii. 28; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in 
Kypke, Observ. i. p. 391. (CE. εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ᾽ (al. ἐφ᾽ see 
ἐπί A. I. 1 f.) ἑαυτῶν, Acts xxi. 22 WH txt.] after verbs 
of learning, knowing, receiving, ἀπό is used of him to whom 
we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf. W. 
370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p.7 sq.; B. 324 
(279); Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23; per contra Bp. Lehtft. 
on Gal. i. 12]: ἀκούειν, Acts ix. 13; 1 Jn. i. 5; γινώσκειν, 
Mk. xv. 45; λαμβάνειν, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; iii. 
22 L'T Tr WH; éyew, 1 Jn. iv. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3, etc. ; 
παραλαμβάνειν, 1 Co. xi. 23; δέχεσθαι, Acts xxviii. 21; 
respecting μανθάνειν see above, IT. 1 d.; λατρεύω τῷ θεῷ 
ἀπὸ προγόνων after the manner of the λατρεία received 
from my forefathers [cf. W. 372 (349); B. 322 (277)], 2 
Tim. i. 3. γίνεταί μοι, 1 Co. i. 80; iv. 5; χάρις ἀπὸ θεοῦ 
or τοῦ θεοῦ, from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7; 1 
Co. i. 3; Gal.i. 3, and often ; καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ θεοῦ, Phil. i. 28. 
ἀπόστολος ἀπό etc., constituted an apostle by authority 


59 








ἀποβαίνω 


and commission, ete. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal.i.1. after 
πάσχειν, Mt. xvi. 21; [akin to this, ace. to many, is Mt. 
xxvii. 9 ὃν ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, R. V. mre. 
whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel; but see 
in I. 2 above]. bb. When azo is used after passives 
(which is rare in the better Grk. auth., οἵ. Bnhdy. p. 222 
sqq.; [B.325 (280); W. 371 (347 sq.) ]), the connection 
between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser 
and more remote than that indicated by ὑπό, and may 
often be expressed by on the part of (Germ. von Seiten), 
[A: V. generally of]: ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀποδεδειγμένον ap- 
proved (by miracles) according to God's will and ap- 
pointment, Acts ii. 22; ἀπὸ θεοῦ πειράζομαι the cause of 
my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 13; dze- 
στερημένος [T Tr WH advorep. | ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν by your fraud, 
Jas. v. 4; ἀποδοκιμάζεσθαι. Lk. xvii. 25; [ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία 
ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων, Lk. vii. 35 acc. to some; see δικαιόω, 2]; 
τύπον ἡτοιμασμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ by the will and direction 
of God, Rev. xii. 6 ; ὀχλούμενοι ἀπὸ (Ree. ὑπό, [see àyAéc ]) 
πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτ. Lk. vi. 18 (whose annoyance by dis- 
eases [(?) ef. vs. 17] proceeded from unclean spirits 
[ A. V. vexed (troubled) with ete.]) ; ἀπὸ τ. σαρκὸς ἐσπιλω- 
μένον by touching the flesh, Jude 23; [add Lk. i. 26 T Tr 
WH ἀπεστάλη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπὸ (RG 1, ὑπὸ) τοῦ θεοῦ]. As 
in prof. auth. so also in the N. T. the Mss. sometimes 
vary between ἀπό and ὑπό: e. g. in Mk. viii. 31; [ Lk. viii. 
43]; Acts iv. 36; [x. 17, 33; xv. 4]; Ro. xiii. 1; [xv. 
24]; Rev ix. 18; see W. 370 (347) sq.; B. 325 (280) 
sq.; [ef. Vincent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. 
§ 41]. 

III. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in- 
dicating the manner or degree in which anything is 
done or occurs, are the following: ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν ὑμῶν 
from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. xviii. 
35; ἀπὸ μέρους in part, 2 Co. i. 14; ii. 5; Ro. xi. 25; xv. 
24; ἀπὸ μιᾶς sc. either φωνῆς with one voice, or γνώμης or 
ψυχῆς with one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel 
ad loc.; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.); yet see Lob. Par- 
alip. p. 363 J). 

IV. The extraordinary construction ἀπὸ ὁ àv (for Ree. 
ἀπὸ τοῦ 6) καὶ ὁ ἢν Kal ὁ ἐρχόμενος. Rev. i. 4, finds its ex- 
planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used 
the words ὁ ὧν kr. as an indeclinable noun, for the 
purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name 
mv; cf. W. § 10, 2 fin.; [B. 50 (43)]. 

V. In composition ἀπό indicates separation, liberation, 
cessation, departure, as in ἀποβάλλω, ἀποκόπτω, ἀποκυλίω, 
ἀπολύω. ἀπολύτρωσις, ἀπαλγέω, ἀπέρχομαι ; finishing and 
completion, as in ἀπαρτίζω, ἀποτελέω ; refers to the pat- 
tern from which a copy is taken, as in ἀπογράφειν, ἀφομοι- 
οὖν, ete.; or to him from whom the action proceeds, as 
in ἀποδείκνυμι, ἀποτολμάω, ete. 

ἀπο-βαίνω: fut. ἀποβήσομαι; 2 aor. ἀπέβην; 1. to 
a ship (so even in Hom.), ἀπό, Lk. v. 2 
[Tr mrg. br. ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν]; eis τὴν γῆν, Jn. xxi. 9. 2. 
trop. to turn out, * eventuate, (so fr. Hdt. down) : ἀποβή- 
σεται ὑμῖν els μαρτύριον it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; εἰς 
σωτηρίαν, Phil. i. 19. (Job xiii. 16; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) * 


come down from : 


ἀποβάλλω 


ἀπο-βάλλω : 2 aor. ἀπέβαλον ; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw 
off, cast away: a garment, Mk. x. 50. trop. confidence, 
Heb. x. 35.* 

ἀπο-βλέπω : [impf. ἀπέβλεπον] ; fo turn the eyes away 
from other things and fix them on some one thing; to look 
at attentively : ets τὶ (often in Grk. writ.); trop. to look 
with steadfast mental gaze: eis τ. μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. xi. 
26 [W. § 66, 2 d.].* 

ἀπό-βλητος, -ov, thrown away, to be thrown away, re- 
jected, despised, abominated : as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4, 
(in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. equiv. to N20 unclean; Hom. Il. 2, 
361; 3, 65; Lcian., Plut.).* 

daro-BoAn, -ῆς. ἡ, α throwing away; 1. rejection, re- 
pudiation, (ἀποβάλλεσθαι to throw away from one’s self, 
cast off, repudiate) : Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to πρόσλημψις αὐτῶν, 
objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. ἀποβάλλω in the 
sense of Jose): Acts xxvii. 22 ἀποβολὴ ψυχῆς οὐδεμία 
ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν no one of you shall lose his life [W. § 67, 


1e.]. (Plat. Plut., al.) * 
ἀπο-γίνομαι : [2 aor. areyevóugv]; 1. to be removed 
from, depart. 2. to die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 


down); hence trop. dzoy. τινί to die to any thing: ταῖς 
ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι i. e. become utterly alienated from 
our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. $52, 4, 1 d.; B. 178 (155)].* 

&To-ypa. fj, -55, ἡ, (ἀπογράφω) ; a. a writing off, trans- 
cript (from some pattern). b. an enrolment (or regis- 
tration) in the public records of persons together with their 
property and income, as the basis of an ἀποτίμησις (census 
or valuation), i.e.that it might appear how much tax 
should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37; 
on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. cf. Schürer, 
Ntl. Zeitgesch. $ 17, pp. 251, 262-286, and books there 
mentioned; [McClellan i. 392-399 ; B. D. s. v. Taxing ].* 

&mo-ypá$o : Mid., [pres. inf. ἀπογράφεσθαι) : 1 aor. 
inf. ἀπογράψασθαι; [pf. pass. ptep. ἀπογεγραμμένος ; fr. 
Hdt. down]; a. to write off, copy (from some pattern). 
b. fo enter in a register or records; spec. to enter in the 
public records the names of men, their property and income, 
to enroll, (cf. ἀπογραφή. b.) ; mid.to have one's self registered, 
to enroll one's self [W.§ 38, 3]: Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5; pass. of ἐν 
οὐρανοῖς ἀπογεγραμμένοι those whose names are inscribed 
in the heavenly register, Heb. xii. 23 (the reference is 
to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the 
figure being drawn from civil communities on earth, 
whose citizens are enrolled in a register).* 


ἀπο-δείκνυμι ; 1 aor.dzéOei£a; pf. pass. ptep. ἀποδεδειγ- | 


pévos; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Nem. 6, 80 down); 
1. prop. to point away from one's self, to point out, show 
forth; to expose to view, exhibit, (Hdt. 3, 122 and often) : 
1Co.iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare : twa, to show, prove 
what kind of a person any one is, Acts ii. 22 (where cod. 
D givesthe gloss δεδοκιμ]ασμένον) ; 2 'Th.ii.4 [ Lchm. mre. 
dmo8evyvóovra]. to prove by arguments, demonstrate: Acts 
xxv. 7. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.* 

ἀπό-δειξις, -ews, ἡ. (ἀποδείκνυμι, q. V-), [fr. Hdt. down]; 
a. a making manifest, showing forth. b. a demonstration, 
proof: ἀπόδειξις πνεύματος kai δυνάμεως a proof by the 
Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in 


60 





ἀποδίδωμι 


the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and 
thus persuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (contextually opposed 
to proof by rhetorical arts and philosophie arguments, 
—the sense in which the Greek philosophers use the 
word ; [see Heinrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 sq.]).* 
ἀπο-δεκατεύω, Lk. xviii. 12, for ἀποδεκατόω ἡ. v.; [cf. 
WH. App. p. 171]. ; 
ἀπο-δεκατόω, -à, inf. pres. amodexaroiv, Heb. vii. 5 T 
Tr WH (ef. Delitzsch ad loc.; B. 44 (38); [Tdf.’s note 
ad loc. ; WH. Intr. ὃ. 4107) ; (δεκατόω q. v-) ; a bibl. and 
eccl. word ; Sept. for Wy; to tithe i. e. 1. with acc. of 
the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing: Mt. xxiii. 23; 
Lk. xi. 42; xviii. 12 where T WH, after codd. 8* B only, 
have adopted ἀποδεκατεύω. for which the simple δεκατεύω 
is more common in Grk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Deut. 
xiv.21(22)). 2. τινά, to exact, receive, a tenth from any 
one: Heb. vii. 5; (18. viii. 15, 17). [B. D. s. v. Tithe.]* 
&ró-Bekros [so L T WH accent (and Rec. in 1 Tim. ii. 
3) ; al. ἀποδεκτός, cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 498; Gottling p. 313 
sq.; Chandler $ 529 sq.], τον, (see ἀποδέχομαι), a later 
word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable: 1 "Tim. ii. 3; v. 4.* 
ἀπο-δέχομαι; depon. mid. ; impf. ἀπεδεχόμην ; 1 aor. ἀπε- 
SeEaunv; 1 aor. pass. ἀπεδέχθην ; common in Grk. writ., 
esp. the Attic, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. used only by 
Luke; to accept what is offered from without (àzó, cf. Lat. 
excipio), to accept from, receive: τινά, simply, to give 
one access to one's self, Lk. ix. 11 L T Tr WH; Acts 
xxviii. 30; with emphasis [cf. Tob. vii. 17 and Fritzsche 
ad loc.], to receive with joy, Lk. viii. 40; to receive to 
hospitality, Acts xxi. 17 L T Tr WH; to grant one ac- 
cess to one's self in the capacity in which he wishes to be 
regarded, e. v. as the messenger of others, Acts xv. 4 (L 
T Tr WH παρεδέχθησαν) ; as a Christian, Acts xviii. 27; 
metaph. τί, to receive into the mind with assent: to ap- 
prove, Acts xxiv. 3; to believe, τὸν λόγον. Acts ii. 41; (so 
in Grk. writ. esp. Plato; cf. 4s/, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).* 
ἀποδημέω, 0; 1 aor. ἀπεδήμησα ; (dmóünpos, q. v.) ; to 
go away to foreign parts, go abroad: Mt. xxi. 93; xxv. 14 
sq.; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xv. 13 (eis χώραν) ; xx.9. (In Grk. 
writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 
ἀπό-δημος, -ov, (fr. ἀπό and δῆμος the people), away 
from one's people, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. so- 
Journing in another country]. [From Pind. down.]* 
ἀπο-δίδωμι. pres. ptep. neut. ἀποδιδοῦν (fr. the form 
-διδόω, Rev. xxii. 2, where T ‘Tr WH mre. -διδούς [see 
WH. App. p. 167]) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἀπεδίδουν (for the 
more com. ἀπεδίδοσαν, Actsiv.33; cf. W. $ 14, 1 c.) ; fut. 
ἀποδώσω: 1 aor. ἀπέδωκα; 2 aor. ἀπέδων, impv. ἀπόδος. 
subj. 3 pers. sing. ἀποδῷ and in 1 Thess. v. 15 'Tdf. ἀποδοῖ 
(see δίδωμι), opt. 3 pers. sing. ἀποδώῃ [or rather, τδῴη ; for 
-δώῃ is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for ἀποδοίη, 
cf. W. $14, 1g.; B. 46 (40); yet L T Tr WI ἀποδώσει); 
Pass., 1 aor. inf. ἀποδοθῆναι: Mid., 2 aor. ἀπεδόμην, 3 pers. 
sing. ἀπέδοτο (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH ἀπέδετο; cf. B. 
47 (41); Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [ W.H. App. p. 
167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, and 
the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it; 
prop. to put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ. 


ἀποδιορίζω 


abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq. 
who regards ἀπό as denoting to give from some reserved 
store, or to give over something which might have been 
retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty; cf. 
Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 1, 7]); 1. to deliver, relinquish 
what is one's own: τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, Mt. xxvii. 58; hence 
in mid. to give away for one's own profit what is one’s own, 
i. e. to sell [W. 253 (238)]: τί, Acts v. 8; Heb. xii. 16; 
τινά, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp. 
the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for 322, Gen. 
xxv. 33 etc.; Bar. vi. [i. e. Ep. Jer.] 27 (28)). 2. to 
pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a 
burden, is thrown off, ἀπό, by being paid) : a debt (Germ. 
abtragen), Mt. v. 26; xviii. 25-30, 34; Lk. vii. 42; x. 35; 
xii. 59; wages, Mt. xx. 8; tribute and other dues to the 
government, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25; Ro. 
xiii. 7; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41; Heb. xii. 11; Rev. xxii. 
2; ὅρκους things promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf. 
Num. xxx. 3, (εὐχήν a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.) ; con- 
jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3; ἀμοιβάς grateful requitals, 1 Tim. 
v. 4; λόγον to render account: Mt. xii. 36; Lk. xvi. 2; 
Acts xix. 40; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt.; Heb. xiii. 17; 
1 Pet. iv. 5; μαρτύριον to give testimony (as something 
officially due), Acts iv. 33. Hence 3. to give back, re- 
store: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lehm. mrg.]; ix. 42; xix. 8. 
4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense: Mt. 
vi. 4, 6, 18; xvi.27; Ro.ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14; Rev. 
xviii. 6; xxii. 12; κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 
15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [Cowr.: ἀντ-αποδίδωμι.} * 

ἀπο-δι-ορίζω ; (διορίζω, and this fr. ὅρος a limit); by 
drawing boundaries to disjoin, part, separate from anoth- 
er: Jude 19 (οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ἑαυτούς those who by 
their wickedness separate themselves from the living 
fellowship of Christians; if éavr. be dropped, with Rec* 
G L T Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep- 
arations). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 1290^, 25].)* 

ἀπο-δοκιμάζω : (see δοκιμάζω); 1 aor. ἀπεδοκίμασα; Pass., 
1 aor. ἀπεδοκιμάσθην; pf. ptcp. ἀποδεδοκιμασμένος ; to dis- 
approve, reject, repudiate: Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. viii. 31 ; xii. 
10; Lk. ix. 22; xvii. 25 ; xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 4, 7; Heb. xii. 
17. (Equiv. to DX2 in Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22; Jer. viii. 9, 
etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)* 

ἀπο-δοχή, -ῆς, 7, (ἀποδέχομαι, q. v.), reception, admis- 
sion, acceptance, approbation, [ A. V. acceptation] : 1 Tim. 
1.15; iv.9. (Polyb. 2, 56,1; 6, 2,13, etc. ; ὁ λόγος ἀπο- 
δοχῆς τυγχάνει id. 1, 5,5; Diod. 4, 84; Joseph. antt. 6, 14, 
4; al. [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 124].) * 

ἀπόθεσις, -eos, ἡ, [ἀποτίθημι]. a putting off or away: 2 
Pet.i.14; 1 Pet.ii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoc. 
and Plato down.]* 

ἀπο-θήκη, 75, 7), (ἀποτίθημι), a place in which any thing 
is laid by or up; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner, 
barn]: Mt. iii. 12; vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; xii. 18, 
24. (Jer. xxvii. (L) 26; Thuc. 6, 97.)* 

ἀπο-θησαυρίζω ; to put away, lay by in store, to treasure 
away, [seponendo thesaurum colligere, Win. De verb. 
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future 
use: 1 Tim. vi. 19. (Sir. iii. 4; Diod., Joseph., Epict., al.]* 


61 ' 














, , 
ἀποθνήσκω 


ἀπο-θλίβω ; to press on all sides, squeeze, press hard : Lk. 
vili.45. (Num. xxii. 25; used also of pressing out grapes 
and olives, Diod. 3, 62; Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].) * 

ἀπο-θνήσκω, impf. ἀπέθνησκον (Lk. viii. 42) ; 2 aor. 
ánéÜavov; fut. ἀποθανοῦμαι, Ro. v. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24, 
(see θνήσκων ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to die 
(ἀπό, so as to be no more; [cf. Lat. emorior; Eng. die 
off or out, pass away]; Germ. absterben, ver sterben) ; 
I. used properly 1. of the natural death of men: 
Mt. ix. 24; xxii. 24; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. iv.47; Ro. vii. 2, 
and very often; ἀποθνήσκοντες ἄνθρωποι subject to death, 
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [B. 206 (178) ]. 2. of the violent 
death — both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt. 
xxvi. 35; Acts xxi. 13 ete.; 1 Pet. iii. 18 L' T Tr WH txt. ; 
ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρας, Heb. xi. 37; of the punishment of 
death, Heb. x. 28; often of the violent death which 
Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, etc. 3. 
Phrases: ἀποθνήσκ. ἔκ twos to perish by means of some- 
thing, [cf. Eng. to die of], Rev. viii. 11; ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, 
ev ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed, 
Jn. viii. 21, 24; ἐν τῷ ᾿Αδάμ by connection with Adam, 
1 Co. xv. 22; ἐν κυρίῳ in fellowship with, and trusting in, 
the Lord, Rey. xiv. 13; ἀποθνήσκ. τι to die a certain 
death, Ro. vi. 10, (θάνατον μακρόν, Charit. p. 12 ed. D'Or- 
ville [I]. i. c. 8 p. 17, 6 ed. Beck; cf. W. 227 (213) ; B. 149 
(130)]); τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, used of Christ, ‘that he might 
not have to busy himself more with the sin of men,’ Ro. 
vi. 10; ἑαυτῷ to become one's own master, independent, 
by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [cf. Meyer]; τῷ κυρίῳ to become 
subject to the Lord's will by dying, Ro. xiv. 8 [cf. Mey.]; 
διά τινα i. e. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 11 ; on the phrases azo- 
θνήσκ. περί and ὑπέρ twos, see περί 1. c. 0. and ὑπέρ I. 
2and 3. Oratorically, although the proper signification 
of the verb is retained, καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἀποθνήσκω I meet 
death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31, 
cf. 2 Co. vi. 9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12; of 
seeds, which while being resolved into their elements in 
the ground seem to perish by rotting, Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 
36. II. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of eternal 
death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery, 
and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13; 
Jn. vi. 50; xi. 26. 2. of moral death, in various 
senses; a. to be deprived of real life, i. e. esp. of the 
power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope 
of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor 
of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ, 
the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2. b. with dat. of the 
thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to 
become wholly alienated’ from a thing, and freed from 
all connection with it: τῷ vóuo, Gal. ii. 19, which must 
also be supplied with ἀποθανόντ ες (for so we must read 
for Rec*!z dzoÉavóvr os) in Ro. vii. 6 [cf. W. 159 (150)]; 
τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see 1» 
3 above); ἀπὸ τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ κόσμου so that your re- 
lation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (ἀπὸ τῶν παθῶν, 
Porphyr. de abst. animal. 1, 41 [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 370 
(347)]); true Christians are said simply ἀποθανεῖν, as hav- 
ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them 


ἀποκαθίστημι 0 


away from God, Col. iii. 3; since they owe this habit of 
mind to the death of Christ, they are said also ἀποθανεῖν 
σὺν Χριστῷ, Ro. vi. 8; Col. ii. 20. [Comp.: συνιαπο- 
θνήσκω.] 

ἀπο-καθ-ίστημι, ἀποκαθιστάω (Mk. ix. 12 ἀποκαθιστᾷ 
RG), and ἀποκαθιστάνω (Mk. ix. 12 L T Tr [but WH 
ἀποκατιστάνω, see their App. p. 168]; Acts i. 6; cf. W. 
78 (75); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. ἀποκαταστήσω; 2 aor. 
ἀπεκατέστην (with double augm., [cf. Ex. iv. 7; Jer. xxiii. 
8], Mk. viii. 25 T Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. ἀποκατεστάθην 
or, ace. to the better reading, with double augm. amexare- 
στάθην, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 10 (Ignat. ad Smyrn. 
11; cf.[ WH. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.) ; [B. 35 (31)]; 
Mullach p. 22); asin Grk. writ. to restore to its former state ; 
2 aor. act. to be in its former state : used of parts of the 
body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 
10; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25; of the 
restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3) ; of 
the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii. 
11; Mk. ix. 12; of a man at a distance from his friends 
and to be restored to them, Heb. xiii. 19.* 

ἀπο-καλύπτω: fut. ἀποκαλύψω ; 1 aor. ἀπεκάλυψα; [ Pass., 
pres. ἀποκαλύπτομαι]); 1 aor. dmekaAój mv; 1 fut. ἀπο- 
καλυφθήσομαι ; in Grk. writ. fr.[ Hdt. and] Plat. down ; in 
Sept. equiv. to 021; 1. prop. to uncover, lay open what 
has been veiled or covered up; to disclose, make bare: Ex. 
xx. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq.; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; ra 
στήθη. Plat. Prot. p. 352 a.; τὴν κεφαλήν, Plut. Crass. 6. 
2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose, 
what before was unknown; a. pass. of any method 
whatever by which something before unknown becomes 
evident: Mt. x. 26; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass. of matters which 
come to light from things done: Lk. ii. 35 [some 
make the verb mid. here]; Jn. xii. 38 (Is. liii. 1); Ro. i. 


18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. c. ἀποκαλύπτειν τί 


τινι is used of God revealing to men things unknown | 


[Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28; Ps. xevii. (xeviii.) 2; 1S. ii. 
27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation: — 
whether by deeds, Mt. xi. 25; xvi. 17; Lk. x. 21 (by in- 
timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ; — or by the 
Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30; Eph. iii. 5; Phil. iii. 15; 
1 Pet. i. 12; τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί who, what, how great 
his Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men: 
Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass. of things, previously 
non-existent, coming into being and to view: as, ἡ δόξα, 
Ro. viii. 18 (εἰς ἡμᾶς to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v. 
1; ἡ σωτηρία, 1 Pet. i. 5; ἡ πίστις, Gal. iii. 23; the day 
of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass. of persons, previ- 
ously concealed, making their appearance in public: of 
Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now 
hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30; of Anti- 
christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.* 

[On this word (and the foll.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the 
Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. 34 sq.) ; Lücke, Einl. 
in d. Offenb. d. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq.; esp. F. G. B. van 
Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis φανεροῦν et ἀποκαλύπτειν in 
N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1849. φανερόω is thought to describe an ex- 
ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but 
single or isolated ; ἀποκαλύπτω an internal disclosure, to the 


2 , ; 
2 ἀποκαραδοκία. 





believer, and abiding. The ἀποκάλυψις or unveiling precedes 
and produces the φανέρωσις or manifestation ; the former looks 
toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to 
whom the revelation is made. Others, however, seem to- 
question the possibility of discrimination; see e.g. Fritz- 
sche on Rom. vol. ii. 149. Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13.] 

ἀπο-κάλυψις, -ews, 7), (ἀποκαλύπτω. q. V-),an uncovering ; 
1. prop. a laying bare, making naked (1 S. xx. 30). 
2. tropically, in N. T. and eccl. language [see end], a. 
a disclosure of truth, imstruction, concerning divine 
things before unknown — esp. those relating to the 
Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself, 
or by the ascended Christ, esp. through the operation of 
the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished 
from other methods of instruction; hence, κατὰ ἀποκά- 
λυψιν γνωρίζεσθαι, Eph. iii.3. πνεῦμα ἀποκαλύψεως, a 
spirit received from God disclosing what and how great 
are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen. 
of the obj., τοῦ μυστηρίου, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the 
subj., κυρίου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by 
ecstasies and visions, [so 7]); Gal. 1.12; Rey. i. 1 (rev- 
elation of future things relating to the consummation of 
the divine kingdom) ; κατ᾽ ἀποκάλυψιν, Gal. ii. 2 ; λαλεῖν. 
ἐν ἀποκ. to speak on the ground of [al. in the form of] 
a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co. 
xiv. 6; equiv. to ἀποκεκαλυμμένον, in the phrase ἀποκά- 
λυψιν ἔχειν, 1 Co. xiv. 26. b. equiv. to τὸ ἀποκαλύ- 
πτεσθαι as used of events by which things or states or 
persons hitherto withdrawn from view are made visible 
to all, manifestation, appearance, cf. ἀποκαλύπτω, 2, d. 
and e.: φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλ. ἐθνῶν a light to appear to the 
Gentiles [al. render ‘a light for a revelation (of divine 
truth) to the Gentiles,’ and so refer the use to a. above], 
Lk.ii.32; ἀποκ. δικαιοκρισίας θεοῦ, Ro. ii. 5; τῶν υἱῶν 
τοῦ θεοῦ, the event in which it will appear who and what 
the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at 
the last day, Ro. viii. 19; τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, of the 
glory clothed with which he will return from heaven, 1 
Pet. iv. 13; of this return itself the phrase is used azo- 
κάλυψις τοῦ κυρίου "I. Χριστοῦ : 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Co. i. 7; 1 Pet. 
i. 7,13. (Amone Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once, 
Cat. maj. e. 20, of the denudation of the body, [also in 
Paul. Aemil. 14 à. ὑδάτων ; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 32 
d. ἁμαρτίας ; cf. Sir. xi. 27; xxii. 22 ete. See Trench 
§ xciv. and reff. s. v. ἀποκαλύπτω, fin.]) * 

&ro-kapoBokía, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀποκαραδοκεῖν, and this fr. ἀπό, 
κάρα the head, and δοκεῖν in the Ion. dial. to watch ; 
hence καραδοκεῖν [Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6; 
Eur., al.] to wateh with head erect or outstretched, to 
direct attention to anything, to wait for in suspense; 
ἀποκαραδοκεῖν (Polyb. 16, 2, 8; 18, 31, 4; 22, 19, 3; 
[Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p. 235 ed. Reiske]; 
Joseph. b. j. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 7 Aq. for 
o5mna), anxiously [?] to look forth from one’s post. 
But the prefix ἀπό refers also to time (like the Germ. 
ab in abwarten, [cf. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies 
constancy in expecting; hence the noun, found in Paul 
alone and but twice, denotes), anzious[?] and persistent 
expectation: Ro.viii.19; Phil. i. 20. This word is very 


ἀποκαταλλάσσω 


fully discussed by C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum 
Opusce. p. 150 sqq. ; [cf. Ellic. and Lghtft. on Phil. 1. ¢.].* 

ἀπο-κατ-αλλάσσω or -τττω: 1 aor. ἀποκατήλλαξα;: 2 aor. 
pass. ἀποκατηλλάγητε (Col. i. 22(21) L Tr mrg. WH mrg.); 
to reconcile completely (ἀπό), [ἃ]. to reconcile back again, 
bring back to a former state of harmony; Ellic. on Eph. 
ii. 16; Bp. Lghtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20; Win. De verb. 
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 7 sq.; yet see Mey. on Eph. 1. c.; 
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 278; (see ἀπό V.)], (cf. karaA- 
Adoow): Col. i. 22 (21) [cf. Bp. Lzhtft. ad loc.]; τινά 
τινι, Eph. ii. 16; concisely, πάντα εἰς abróv [better αὐτόν 
with edd.; cf. B. p. 111 (97) and s. v. αὑτοῦ], to draw to 
himself by reconciliation, or so to reconcile that they 
should be devoted to himself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200) 
but cf. $49,a.c.8.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor 
in the Grk. O. T.)* 

ἀπο-κατά-στασις, -ews, 7, (ἀποκαθίστημι, q. v.), restora- 
tion: τῶν πάντων, the restoration not only of the true 
theocracy but also of that more perfect state of (even 
physical) things which existed before the fall, Acts iii. 
21; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Often in Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.)* 

[ἀπο-κατ-ιστάνω, see aroxabiornye. | 

ἀπό-κειμαι ; /o be laid away, laid by, reserved, (ἀπό as in 
ἀποθησαυρίζω [q. v.], ἀποθήκη) ; a. prop.: Lk. xix. 20. 
b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one; awaiting 
: him: Col. i. 5 (ἐλπίς hoped-for blessedness); 2 Tim. iv. 
8 (στέφανος) ; Heb. ix. 27 (ἀποθανεῖν, as in 4 Macc. viii. 
10). (In both senses in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down.)* 

ἀποκεφαλίζω: 1 aor. ἀπεκεφάλισα; (κεφαλή); to cut off 
the head, behead, decapitate: Mt. xiv. 10; Mk. vi. 16, 27 
(28); Lk. ix. 9. A later Grk. word: [Sept. Ps. fin.]; 
Epict. diss. 1, 1, 19; 24; 29; Artem. oneir. 1, 35; cf. 
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 690 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 341.* à 

&ro-kAc(o : 1 aor. ἀπέκλεισα ; to shut up: τὴν θύραν, Lk. 
xiii. 25. (Gen. xix.10; 2 S.xiii. 17 sq.; often in Hdt.; 
in Attic prose writ. fr. Thuc. down.) * 

&mo-kómro : 1 aor. dmékoy/a; fut. mid. droxoyyoua; ta 
cut off, amputate: Mk. ix. 43, [45]; Jn. xviii. 10, 26; 
Acts xxvii. 32; ὄφελον kai ἀποκόψονται I would that they 
(who urge the necessity of cireumcision would not only 
circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate them- 
selves (or cut off their privy parts), Gal. v. 12. ἀποκό- 
πτεσθαι occurs in this sense in Deut. xxiii. 1; [Philo de 
alleg. leg. iii.3 ; de vict. off. $ 13; cf. de spec. lege.i.§$7]; 
Epict. diss. 2, 20, 19; Lcian. Eun. 8; [Dion Cass. 79, 11; 
Diod. Sic. 3, 31], and other pass. quoted by Wetst. ad 
loc. [and Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Others incorrectly: I would 
that they would cut themselves off from the society of 
Christians, quit it altogether; [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lehtft. 
ad loc.].* 

ἀπό-κριμα, -ros, τό, (ἀποκρίνομαι, q. v. in ἀποκρίνω), an 
answer: 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, *On asking 
myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril, 
I answered, “I must die.”’ (Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 6 of 
an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in 
Polyb. exept. Vat. 12, 26°, 1].)* 

ἀπο-κρίνω : [Pass., 1 aor. ἀπεκρίθην : 1 fut. ἀποκριθήσο- 


63 


ἀποκρύπτω: 


μαι]; i. to part, separate; Pass. to be parted, separated, 
(1 aor. ἀπεκρίθην was separated, Hom. Il. v. 12; Thue. 
2, 49; [4, 72]; Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10; [other 
exx. in Veitch s. v.]). ii. to give sentence against one, de- 
cide that he has lost; hence Mid., [pres. ἀποκρίνομαι; 1 aor. 
3 pers. sing. ἀπεκρίνατο] ; (to give forth a decision from 
myself [ W. 253 (238) ]), to give answer, to reply; so from 
Thuc. down (and even in Hdt. 5, 49 [Gaisf.]; 8, 101 
[Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses ὕ πὸ κρίνομαι). But 
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. do not give this 
sense to the pass. tenses ἀπεκρίθην, ἀποκριθήσομαι. ** The 
example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b. [ef. 
Stallb. p. 388] is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex. 
p- 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dia- 
logue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is 
sometimes introduced by copyists." Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 
108; [ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 186 sq.; Veitch 
s. v.; W. 23 (22)]. But from Polyb. down ἀποκριθῆναι. 
and ἀποκρίνασθαι are used indiscriminately, and in the 
Bible the pass. forms are by far the more common. In the 
N. T. the aor. middle ἀπεκρίνατο is found only in Mt. 
xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 16; xxiii. 9; Jn. v. 17, 
19; xii. 22[R G L Tr mrg.]; Acts iii. 12; in the great 
majority of places ἀπεκρίθη is used; cf. W. $ 39, 2; [B. 
51 (44)]. 1. to give an answer to a question proposed, 
to answer; a. simply: καλῶς, Mk. xii. 28; νουνεχῶς, 34; 
ὀρθῶς. Lk. x. 28; πρός τι, Mt. xxvii. 14. b. with acc.: 
λόγον, Mt. xxii. 46 ; οὐδέν, Mt. xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; xv. 
4 sq. C. with dat. etc.: ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ, Col. iv. 6; together 
with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 11 ; vi. 
7, 68, etc. ; the dat. omitted: Jn. vii. 46; viii. 19, 49, ete. 
πρός twa, Acts xxv. 16. joined with φάναι, or λέγειν, or 
εἰπεῖν, in the form of a ptep., as ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε or ἔφη: 
or λέγει : Mt. iv. 4; viii. 85; xv. 13; Lk. ix. 19 ; xiii. 2; 
Mk. x. 3, ete.; or ἀπεκρίθη λέγων: Mt. xxv. 9, 37, 44; 
Lk.iv.4 [R GL]; viii. 50 [R G Tr mre. br.]; Jn. i. 26; 
x. 33 [Rec.]; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says 
ἀπεκρίθη καὶ εἶπε : Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 19; iv. 13; vii. 16, 20 
[R ΑἸ, 52, ete. d. foll. by the inf.: Lk. xx. 7; foll. by 
the acc. with inf.: Acts xxv. 4; foll. by ὅτι : Acts xxv. 16- 
2. In imitation of the Hebr. 113? (Gesenius, Thesaur. 
ii. p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something: 
has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks 
refer [W. 19]: Mt. xi. 25; xii. 38; xv. 15; xvii. 4; xxii. 
1; xxviii. 5; Mk. ix. 5, [6 T Tr WH]; x. 24; xi. 14; xii. 
35; Lk. xiv. 3; Jn. ii. 18; v. 17; Acts iii. 12; Rev. vii. 
13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10; 
iii. 4, etc.; 1 Macc. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Mace. xv. 14.) 
[Cowr.: ἀντ-αποκρίνομαι.] 

ἀπό-κρισις, -eos, 7, (ἀποκρίνομαι. see ἀποκρίνω), a reply- 
ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9. 
(From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., andj 
Hdt. down.) * 

ἀπο-κρύπτω: 1 aor. ἀπέκρυψα; pf. pass. ptep. ἀποκεκρυμ- 
μένος: a. to hide: τί, Mt. xxv. 18 (L T Tr WH ἔκρυψε). 
b. Pass. in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : σοφία, 
1 Co. ii. 7; μυστήριον, Col. i. 26 (opp. to φανεροῦσθαι) ; 
with the addition of ἐν τῷ θεῷ, Eph. iii. 9; ri ἀπό twos. 


> ΄ 
ἀπόκρυφος 


Lk. x. 21; Mt. xi. 25 (L T Tr WH ékpwyas), in imitation 
of the Hebr. 12, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 105 exviii. (exix.) 
19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; ef. κρύπτω. [B. 149 (130); 
189 (163); W. 227 (213)] (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

ἀπόκρυφος.-ον, (ἀποκρύπτων). hidden, secreted : Mk. iv. 22; 
Lk. viii. 17. stored up: Col. ii. 3. (Dan. xi. 43 [Theod.]; 
Is. xlv. 3; 1 Mace. i. 23; Xen., Eur.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 
the word, Col. 1. e.].) * 

ἀπο-κτείνω, and Aeol. -κτέννω (Mt. x. 928 L'T Tr; MI. 
xii5 GL T Tr; Lk.xi.4L T Tr; 2 Co. iii. 6 T Tr; 
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507 sq.; [ 7f. Proleg. p. 76]; W. 
83 (79); [B. 61 (54) ]), ἀποκτένω (Grsb. in Mt. x. 28; Lk. 
xii. 4), ἀποκταίνω (Lchm. in 2 Co. iii. 6; Rev. xiii. 10), 
ἀποκτέννυντες (Mk. xii. 5 WI); fut. ἀποκτενῶ; 1 aor. 
ἀπέκτεινα ; Pass, pres. inf. ἀποκτέννεσθαι (Rev. vi. 11 
GL T Tr WH); 1 aor. ἀπεκτάνθην (Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 
227; W.l.c.; [B. 41 (35 sq.)]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. 
prop. to kill in any way whatever, (ἀπό i. e. so as to put 
out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill of], Germ. a hsehlach- 
ten): Mt. xvi. 21; xxii. 6; Mk. vi. 19; ix. 31; Jn. v. 18; 
viii. 22; Acts iii. 15; Rev. ii. 13, and very often ; [ἀποκτ. 
ἐν θανάτῳ, Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, cf. D. 184 (159); W. 339 
(319)]. to destroy (allow to perish): Mk. iii. 4 [yet al. 
take it here absol., to kill]. 2. metaph. fo extinguish, 
abolish : τὴν ἔχθραν, Eph. ii. 16 ; to inflict moral death, Ro. 
vii. 11 (see ἀποθνήσκω, 11. 2) ; to deprive of spiritual life 
and procure eternal misery, 2 Co. iii. 6 [Lehm. ἀποκταίνει ; 
see above]. ' 

ἀπο-κυέω, -ὥ, OF ἀποκύω, (hence 3 pers. sing. pres. either 
ἀποκυεῖ [so WIL] or ἀποκύει, Jas. i. 15; cf. W. 88 (84); 
B. 62 (54)); 1 aor. ἀπεκύησα ; (κύω, or κυέω, to be preg- 
nant; cf. ἔγκυος) ; /o bring forth from the womb, give 
birth to: τινά, Jas. 1. 15; to produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace. 
xv. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Plut., Lcian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4; 
Hdian. 1, 5, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 1, 4, 2 [1 ed. Bekk. ].) * 

ἀπο-κυλίω: fut. ἀποκυλίσω : 1 aor. ἀπεκύλισα; pf. pass. 
[3 pers. sing. ἀποκεκύλισται Mk. xvi. 4 RG L but T Tr 
WH ἀνακεκ.7, ptep. ἀποκεκυλισμένος ; to roll off or away: 
Mt. xxviii. 2; Mk.xvi. 3; Lk.xxiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8, 
10; Judith xiii 9; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3; 
Leian. rhet. praec. 3.) But see dvakvAto.* 

ἀπο-λαμβάνω ; fut. ἀπολήψομαι (Col. 111. 24; 1, Τ Tr 
WH ἀπολήμψεσθε; see λαμβάνω) ; 2 aor. ἀπέλαβον ; 2 aor. 
mid. ἀπελαβόμην ; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to receive (from 
another, ἀπό [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5; Ellie. ibid. and Win. 
De verb. comp. etc. as below ]) what is due or promised 
(cf. ἀποδίδωμι, 2) : τ. υἱοθεσίαν the adoption promised to 
believers, Gal. iv. 5; τὰ ἀγαθά cov thy good things, * which 
thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed 
due to thee” (Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 13), 
Lk.xvi.25. Hence 2. to take again or back, to recover: 
Lk. vi. 34 [(T Tr txt. WH λαβεῖν] ; xv. 27; and to receive 
by way of retribution: Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH 
txt. Adgp); xxii. 41; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 8; Col iii. 24. 
3. to take from others, take apart or aside; Mid. τινά, to 
take a person with one aside out of the view of others: 
with the addition of ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου κατ᾽ ἰδίαν in Mk. vii. 


64 





ἀπόλλυμι 


33, (Joseph. b. 1. 2, 7, 2; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 21; 
Ὑστάσπεα ἀπολαβὼν μοῦνον, lIdt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran. 
78; ἰδίᾳ ἕνα τῶν τριῶν ἀπολαβών, App. b. civ. 5, 40). 
4. to receive any one hospitably: 3 Jn. 8, where L T Tr 
WH have restored ὑπολαμβάνειν." 

ἀπόλαυσις, -ews, 7, (fr. ἀπολαύω to enjoy), enjoyment 
(Lat. fructus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (eis ἀπόλαυσιν to enjoy); 
Heb. xi. 25 (ἁμαρτίας ἀπόλ. pleasure born of sin). (In 
Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)* 

ἀπο-λείπω : [ impf. ἀπέλειπον, WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 13, 
20; Tit. i.5]; 2 aor. awéAurov; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to 
leave, leave behind: one in some place, Tit. i. 5 L T Tr 
WH; 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Pass. ἀπολείπεται it remains, is 
reserved: Heb. iv. 9; x. 26; foll. by acc. and inf., Heb. 
iv. 6. 2. to desert, forsake: a place, Jude 6.* 

ἀπο-λείχω : [impf. ἀπέλειχον] ; to lick off; lick up: Lk. 
xvi. 21 RG; cf. ἐπιλείχω. ([Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478]; 
Athen. vi. c. 13 p. 250 a.) * 

ἀπ-όλλυμι and ἀπολλύω ([ἀπολλύει Jn. xii. 25 T Tr WH], 
impv. ἀπόλλυε Ro. xiv. 15, [cf. B. 45 (39); WH. App. p. 
168 sq.]); fut. ἀπολέσω and (1 Co. i. 19 ἀπολῶ fr. a pass. 
in the O. T., where often) ἀπολῶ (cf. W. 83 (80); [ B. 
64 (56)]) ; 1 aor. ἀπώλεσα; to destroy; Mid., pres. ἀπόλ- 
λυμαι; [impf. 3 pers. plur. ἀπώλλυντο 1 Co. x. 9 T Tr 
WH]; fut. ἀπολοῦμαι ; 2 aor. ἀπωλόμην ; (2 pf. act. ptep. 
ἀπολωλώς) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy 
i. e. to put out of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to, 
ruin: Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34; xvii. 27, 29; Jude 5; τὴν 
σοφίαν render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived, 
1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) ; to kill: Mt. ii. 13; 
xii. 14; Mk. ix. 22; xi. 18; Jn. x. 10, etc.; contextually, 
to declare that one must be put to death: Mt. xxvii. 20; 
metaph. to devote or give over to eternal misery: Mt. x. 
28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one’s conduct to cause 
another to lose eternal salvation: Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to 
perish, to be lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; a. 
properly : Mt. viii. 25; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 33; Jn. xi. 50; 2 
Pet.ii.6; Jude 11, etc.; ἀπόλλυμαι λιμῷ, Lk. xv. 17; ἐν 
μαχαίρᾳ, Mt. xxvi. 52; καταβαλλόμενοι. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀπολλύ- 
μενοι, 2 Co. iv. 9. B. tropically, to incur the loss of true 
or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: Jn. 
iii. 15 [R Lbr.], 16; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in 
mind, that ace. to John’s conception eternal life begins 
on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by 
faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; xv. 18; 2 Pet. iii. 9. 
Hence of σωζόμενοι they to whom it belongs to partake of 
salvation, and of ἀπολλύμενοι those to whom it belongs to 
perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con- 
trasted by Paul: 1 Co. i. 18; 2 Co. ii. 15; iv. 3; 2 Th. ii. 
10, (on these pres. pteps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206 
(178)). b. of things; 10 be blotted out, to vanish away: 
ἡ εὐπρέπεια, Jas. i. 11; the heavens, Heb. i. 11 (fr. Ps. ci. 
(cii.) 27); to perish, —of things which on being thrown 
away are decomposed, as μέλος τοῦ σώματος. Mt. v. 29 
sq-; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in 
some other way, as βρῶσις. Jn. vi. 27 ; χρυσίον. 1 Pet. i. 7; 
—or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve 
the use for which they were designed, as of ἀσκοί: Mt. 


᾿Απολλύων 


ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37. 2. to destroy i. e. to lose; 
a. prop.: Mt. x. 42; Mk. ix. 41 (τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ) ; Lk. 
xv.4, 8, 9; ix. 25; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; 2 Jn. 8, etc. 
b. metaph. Christ is said to lose any one of his followers 
(whom the Father has drawn to discipleship) if such a 
one becomes wicked and fails of salvation: Jn. vi. 39, cf. 
xviii. 9. Mid. to be lost: θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Lk. xxi. 
18; 6. ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Acts xxvii. 34 (Rec. πεσεῖται) ; 
τὰ λαμπρὰ ἀπώλετο ἀπό σου, Rev. xviii. 14 (Rec. ἀπῆλθε). 
Used of sheep, straying from the flock: prop. Lk. xv. 4 
(τὸ ἀπολωλός, in Mt. xviii. 12 τὸ πλανώμενον). Metaph. 
in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people 
of Israel to a flock (Jer. xxvii. (1.)6; Ezek. xxxiv. 4, 
16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left 
to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal sal- 
vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are 
called ra πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα τοῦ οἴκου Ἰσραήλ: Mt. x. 
6; xv. 24, (Is. liii.6; 1 Pet. ii. 25); and Christ, reclaim- 
ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and 
is said ζητεῖν καὶ σώζειν τὸ ἀπολωλός : Lk. xix. 10; Mt. 
xvii. 11 Rec. [Comp.: συν-απόλλυμι.] 

᾿Απολλύων, -ovros, ὁ, (ptep. fr. ἀπολλύω), Apollyon (a 
prop. name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse), 
i. e. Destroyer: Rev. ix. 11; cf. ᾿Αβάδδων, [and B. D. 
B Vell 

᾿Απολλωνία, -as, ἡ, Apollonia, a maritime city of Mace- 
donia, about a day's journey [ace. to the Antonine Itiner- 
ary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which 
Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [36 miles fur- 
ther]: Acts xvii. 1. [See B. D. s. v.]* 

᾿Απολλώς [acc. to some, contr. fr. ᾿Απολλώνιος, W. 102 
(97) ; acc. to others, the o is lengthened, cf. Fick, Griech. 
Personennamen, p. xxi.], gen. -ó (cf. B. 20 (18) sq.; [W. 
62 (61)]), accus. τώ (Acts xix. 1) and -óv (1 Co. iv. 6 T 
Tr WH; Tit. iii. 13 T WH; cf. [WH. App. p. 157]; 
Kühner i. p. 315), à, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who 
became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity, 
attached to the apostle Paul: Acts xviii. 24; xix. 1; 1 
Co. i. 12; iii. 4 sqq. 22; iv. 65 xvi. 12; Tit. iii. 13.* 

ἀπολογέομαι, -οὔμαι ; impf. ἀπελογούμην (Acts xxvi. i) 
1 aor. ἀπελογησάμην; 1 aor. pass. inf. ἀπολογηθῆναι, in a 
reflex. sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. λόγος), 
prop. to speak so as to absolve (ἀπό) one’s self, talk one’s 
self off of a charge ete. ; 1. to defend one’s self, make 
one’s defence : absol, Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foll. by 
ὅτι, Acts xxv. 8; τί, to bring forward something in de- 
fence of one's self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so 
in Grk. writ. also) ; rà περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ dz. either Γ bring for- 
ward what contributes to my defence [2], or Z plead my own 
cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; περί with 
gen. of the thing and ἐπί with gen. of pers., concerning a 
thing before one's tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of 
the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that 
I am innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in 
one’s eyes [A. V. unto], Acts xix. 33; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat. 
Prot. p. 359 a.; often in Leian., Plut. ; (ef. B. 172 (149)]). 
2. to defend a person or a thing (so not infreq. in 
prof. auth.): Ro. ii. 15 (where ace. to the context the 

5 


65 





ἀπολύω 


deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; τὰ περὶ 
ἐμοῦ, Acts xxvi. 2 (but see under 1).* 

ἀπολογία, -as, 7, (See ἀπολογέομαι), verbal defence, speech 
in defence: Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7, 17 
(16); 2 Tim. iv. 16 ; with a dat. of the pers. who is to hear Ἴ 
the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make 
good his cause: 1 Co. ix. 3; 1 Pet. iii. 15; in the same 
Sense ἡ ἀπολ. ἡ πρός twa, Acts xxii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).* 

ἀπο-λούω : to wash off or away; in the N. T. twice in 
1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6, i. p. 
585 ed. Mang.]: ἀπελούσασθε, 1 Co. vi. 11; βάπτισαι καὶ 
ἀπύλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, Acts xxii. 16. For the sin- 
ner is unclean, polluted as it were by the filth of his sins. 
Whoever obtains remission of sins has his sins put, so to 
speak, out of God's sight, — is cleansed from them in 
the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob- 
tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have 
gone down into the baptismal bath [/avacrum, cf. Tit. 
lii. 5; Eph. v. 26] are said ἀπολούσασθαι to have washed 
themselves, or τὰς ápapr. ἀπολούσασθαι to have washed 
away their sins, i.e.to have been cleansed from their 
sins.* 

ἀπο-λύτρωσις, -ews, 7, (fr. ἀπολυτρόω signifying a. to 
redeem one by paying the price, cf. λύτρον : Plut. Pomp. 
24; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8; Zeph. iii. 1; b. to let one go 
free on receiving the price: Plat. lees. 11 p. 919 a.; 
Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [cf.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected 
by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation 
procured by the payment ofa ransom; 1. prop.: πόλεων 
αἰχμαλώτων, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass. in prof. writ. 
where the word has as yet been noted; [add, Joseph. 
antt. 12, 2,3; Diod. frag. ]. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind.; 
Philo, quod omn. prob: lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in 
the N. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the 
death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God 
and the merited penalty of sin: Ro. iii. 24; Eph. i. 7; 
Col. i. 14, (cf. é£ayopá(e, ἀγοράζω, λυτρόω, etc. [and 
Trench ὃ Ixxvii.]) ; ἀπολύτρ. τῶν παραβάσεων deliverance 
from the penalty of transgressions, effected through 
their expiation, Heb. ix. 15, (cf. Delitzsch ad loc. and 
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178) ; ἡμέρα ἀπολυτρώσεως, 
the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced 
from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and 
from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30; in 
the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1 
Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption, 
i.e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we 
could have none), and is to be taken in the phrase dzo- 
λύτρ. τῆς περιποιήσεως, Eph. i. 14, the redemption which 
will come to his possession, or to the men who are God's 
own through Christ, (cf. Meyer ad loc.); τοῦ σώματος, 
deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro. 
viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred 
and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ 
from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, cf. xviii. 7 sq.; deliverance or 
release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.* 

dmo-Aóo ; [impf. dzéAvov]; fut. ἀπολύσω; 1 aor. ἀπέ- 
Avoa; Pass. pf. ἀπολέλυμαι; 1 aor. dwedvOnv; [fut. ἀπο- 


ἀπομάσσω 


λυθήσομαι] ; impf. mid. ἀπελυόμην (Acts xxviii. 25) ; used 
in the N. T. only in the historical books and in Heb. 
xiii. 23; to loose from, sever by loosening, undo, [see ἀπό, 
Melle 1. to set free: τινά τινος (so in Grk. writ. even 
fr. Hom. down), to liberate one from a thing (as from a 
bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (ἀπολέλυσαι [thou hast been loosed 
i. 6.7 be thou free from [ef. W. § 40, 4] τῆς ἀσθενείας [1 Ὁ 
dzóT.dcÓ.]). 42. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ; 
τινά, a. a suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given 
by a decisive answer: Mt. xv. 23; Lk.ii. 29 (*me whom 
thou hadst determined to keep on earth until I had seen 
the salvation prepared for Israel, cf. vs. 26, thou art now 
dismissing with my wish accomplished, and this dismis- 
sion is at the same time dismission also from life’ — in ref- 
erence to which ἀπολύειν is used in Num. xx. 29; Tob. 
iii. 6; [cf. Gen. xv. 2; 2 Mace. vii. 9; Plut. consol. ad 
Apoll. $13 cf. 11 fin.]) ; [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid de- 
part, send away: Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq. ; xv. 32, 39; Mk. vi. 
36,45; viii. 8, 9; Lk. viii. 38; ix. 12; xiv. 4; Acts xiii. 3; 
xix. 41 (τὴν ἐκκλησίαν) ; pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. to 
let go free, to releases a. a captive, i. e. to loose his bonds 
and bid him depart, to give him liberty to depart: Lk. 
xxii. 68 [R GL Tr in br.]; xxiii. 22; Jn. xix. 10; Acts 
xvi. 35 sq.; xxvi. 32 (ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο [might have 
been set at liberty, cf. B. 217 (187), 8 139, 27 c.; W. 305 
(286) i. e. ] might be free; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 12 [see 1 above, 
and W. 334 (313)]) ; Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. xiii. 23; ἀπολ. 
τινά τινι o release one to one, grant him his liberty: Mt. 
xxvii. 15, 17, 21, 26 ; Mk. xv. 6, 9, 11, 15 ; Lk. xxiii. [16], 
17 [R L in br.], 18, 20, 25; [Jn. xviii. 39]. b. to acquit 
one accused of a crime and set him at liberty: Jn. xix. 
12; Actsiii.13. c. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave 
to depart: Actsiv. 21,23; v. 40; xvii.9. d. to release a 
debtor, i. e. not to press one's claim against him, to remit 
his debt: Mt. xviii. 27; metaph. to pardon another his 
offences against me: Lk. vi. 37, (τῆς ἁμαρτίας ἀπολύεσθαι, 
2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as ἀπολύω τὴν 
γυναῖκα to dismiss from the house, to repudiate: Mt. i. 
19; v. 81 sq.; xix. 3, 7-9; Mk. x. 2, 4, 11; Lk. xvi. 18; 
[1 Esdr. ix. 36]; and improperly a wife deserting her 
husband is said τὸν ἄνδρα ἀπολύειν in Mk. x. 12 [cf. Diod. 
12, 18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to 
historie accuracy [yet ef. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 10], makes 
Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage, 
acc. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff. 
in Mey. adl. ]) ; (cf. n5, Jer. iii. 8; Deut. xxi. 14 ; xxii. 
19:29): 5. Mid. ἀπολύομαι, prop. to send one's self 
away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re- 
turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).* 

&mo-pámmo: (μάσσω to touch with the hands, handle, 
work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. ἀπομάσ- 
copa: to wipe one’s self off, to wipe off for one's self: τὸν 
κονιορτὸν ὑμῖν, Lk. x. 11. (In Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. 
down.) * 

ἀπο-νέμω ; (νέμω to dispense a portion, to distribute), to 
assign, portion out, (ἀπό as in ἀποδίδωμι [q. v., cf. amd, V.]): 
τινί τι Viz. τιμήν, showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (so Hdian. 
1, 8, 1; τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν εὐχαριστίαν, Joseph. antt. 1, 7, 


66 





ἀπορρίπτω: 


1; τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ πᾶσαν ἐντροπήν, Ignat. ad Magnes. 3; 
first found in [Simon. 97 in Anthol.. Pal. 7, 253, 2 (vol. i. 
p. 64 ed. Jacobs)]; Pind. Isthm. 2, 68; often in Plat., 
Aristot., Plut., al.).* 

ἀπο-νίπτω : (o wash off; 1 aor. mid. ἀπενυψάμην ; in 
mid. fo wash one's self off, to wash off for one's self: τὰς 
xeipas, Mt. xxvii. 24, cf. Deut. xxi. 6 sq. (The earlier 
Greeks say ἀπονίζω — but with fut. ἀπονίψω, 1 aor. ἀπέ- 
wa; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [80 (17)]; Plut. 
Phoc. 18; Athen. iv. c. 31 p. 149 c., azovizro, although 
this is found [but in the mid.] even in Hom. Od. 18, 
179.)* 

ἀπο-πίπτω: 2 aor. ámémegov; [(cf. πίπτω) ; fr. Hom. 
down]; to fall off, slip down from: Acts ix. 18 [W. $ 52, 
4, 1 a.].* 

ἀπο-πλανάω, -; 1 aor. pass. ἀπεπλανήθην;; to cause to 
go astray, trop. to lead away from the truth to error: twa, 
Mk. xiii. 22; pass. to go astray, stray away from: ἀπὸ τῆς 
πίστεως, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ([Hippoer.]; Plat. Ax. p. 369 d.; 
Polyb. 3, 57, 4; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

ἀπο-πλέω ; 1 aor. ἀπέπλευσα; [fr. Hom. down]; to sail 
away, depart by ship, set sail: Acts xiii. 4; xiv. 26; xx. 
155 xxvi ΠΕΣ 

ἀπο-πλύνω : [1 aor. ἀπέπλυνα (?)] ; to wash off: Lk. v. 2 
(where L Tr WH txt. ἔπλυνον, T WH mrg. -av, for R G 
ἀπέπλυναν [possibly an impf. form, cf. B. 40 (35); 
Soph. Glossary, etc. p. 90]). (Hom. Od. 6, 95; Plat., 
Plut., and subseq. writ.; Sept. 2 S. xix. 24, [cf. Jer. ii. 22; 
iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].) * 

ἀπο-πνίγω: 1 aor. dmémwfa; 2 aor. pass. ἀπεπνίγην ; 
(ἀπό as in ἀποκτείνω q. v. [cf. to choke off ]) ; to choke: 
Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mre. ἔπνιξανν ; Lk. viii. 7 (of seed over- 
laid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with 
water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i. e. p. 
883, 28 ete.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).* 

ἀπορέω, -ὦ : impf. 3 pers. sing. ἠπόρει (Mk. vi. 20 T WH 
Trmrg.) ; [pres. mid. ἀποροῦμαι] ; to be ἄπορος (fr. a priv. 
and πόρος a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e. 
to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting, 
to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way 
to turn; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) πολλὰ ἠπόρει he 
was in perplexity about many things or much perplexed 
(ef. Thue. 5, 40, 3; Xen. Hell. 6, 1, 4; Hdt. 3,4; 4,179; 
Aristot. meteorolog. 1, 1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to be at a loss 
with one’s self, be in doubt; notto know how to decide or 
what to do, to be perplexed: absol. 2 Co. iv. 85 περί twos, 
Lk. xxiv.4 L T Tr WH; περὶ τίνος τις λέγει; Jn. xiii. 225 , 
ἀποροῦμαι ἐν ὑμῖν I am perplexed about you, I know not 
how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal. 
iv. 20; ἀπορούμενος ἐγὼ eis [T Tr WH om. eis] τὴν περὶ 
τούτου [-rev L T Tr WH] ζήτησιν I being perplexed how 
to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or 
these things], Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hat. 
down! often also in Sept.) [Comp.: δι", e£azopéo.] * 

ἀπορία, -as, 7, (ἀπορέω, q. v-), the state of one who is 
ἄπορος, perplexity: Lk. xxi.25. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

ἀπο-ρρίπτω: 1 aor. ἀπέρριψα [ T WH write with one p; 


᾿ἀπορφανίζω 


see P,p]; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw away, cast down; re- 
flexively, to cast one’s self down: Acts xxvii. 43 [R.V. cast 
themselves overboard]. (Soin Leian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ; 
[Chariton 3, 5, see D’Orville ad loc.]; cf. W. 251 (236) ; 
[B. 145 (127)].)* 

ἀποορφανίζω: [1 aor. pass. ptep. ἀπορφανισθείς; (fr. 
ὀρφανός bereft, and ἀπό sc. τινός), to bereave of a parent or 
parents, (so Aeschyl. choéph. 247 (249)) ; hence metaph. 
ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν bereft of your intercourse and 
society, 1 Th. ii. 17 [here Rec?" (by mistake) ἀποφανι- 
obevres ].* 

ἀπο-σκευάζω: 1 aor. mid. ἀπεσκευασάμην; (σκευάζω to 
prepare, provide, fr. σκεῦος a utensil), to carry off goods 


and chattels; to pack up and carry off; wid. to carry off 


one’s personal property or provide for its carrying away, 
(Polyb. 4, 81, 11; Diod. 13, 91; Dion. Hal: 9, 23, etc.) : 
ἀποσκευασάμενοι having collected and removed our bag- 
gage, Acts xxi. 15; but L T Tr WH read ἐπισκευασάμε- 
vot (q. v-)-* 

ἀπο-σκίασμα, -ros, τό, (σκιάζω, fr. σκιά), a shade cast by 
one object upon another, a shadow: τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα 
shadow caused by revolution, Jas.i. 17. Cf. ἀπαύγασμα." 

ἀπο-σπάω, -@; 1 aor. ἀπέσπασα; 1 aor. pass. ἀπεσπάσθην; 
to draw off, tear away: τ. μάχαιραν to draw one’s sword, Mt. 
xxvi. 51 (ἐκσπᾶν τ. pax. (or ῥομφαίαν), 1 S. xvii. 51 [ Alex. 
etc.]; σπᾶν, 1 Chr. xi. 11; Mk. xiv. 47); ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς 
μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν to draw away the disciples to their 
own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. h. 13, 32). 
Pass. reflexively : ἀποσπασθέντες ám αὐτῶν having torn 
ourselves from the embrace of our friends, Acts xxi. 1; 
ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν he parted, tore himself, from them 
about a stone’s cast, Lk. xxii. 41; cf. Meyer ad loc. (In 
prof. auth. fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down.) * 

ἀποστασία, -as, 7, (ἀφίσταμαι), a falling away, defection, 
apostasy; in the Bible sc. from the true religion: Acts 
xxi. 21; 2 Th. ii. 3; ([Josh. xxii. 22; 2 Chr. xxix. 19; 
xxxiii. 19]; Jer. ii. 19 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl. ; 1 Mace. 
ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say ἀπόστασις ; see Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 528; [W. 24].* 

ἀποστάσιον, -ov, τό, very seldom in native Grk. writ., 
defection, of a freedman from his patron, Dem. 35, 48 
[940, 16]; in the Bible 1. divorce, repudiation: Mt. 
xix. 7; Mk. x. 4 (βιβλίον ἀποστασίου, equiv. to 75D 
nd book or bill of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1, 3; [Is.1. 1; 
Jer.iii.8]). 2. a bill of divorce: Mt.v.31. Grotius 
ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc., give a copy 
of one.* 

ἀπο-στεγάζω: 1 aor. ἀπεστέγασα; (στεγάζω, fr. στέγη) ; 
to uncover, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, with his 
hearers, was in the ὑπερῷον q. v., and it was the roof of 
this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus 
are said to have ‘dug out’; [cf. B. D. s. v. House, p. 
1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303; 8, 3, 30, p. 542.)* 

ἀπο-στέλλω; fut. ἀποστελῶ: 1 aor. ἀπέστειλα: pt. ἀπέ- 
σταλκα, [3 pers. plur. ἀπέσταλκαν Acts xvi. 36 L T Tr WH 
(see γίνομαι init.) ; Pass., pres. ἀποστέλλομαι ; pf. ἀπέσταλ- 
μαι; 2 aor. ἀπεστάλην ; [fr. Soph. down]; prop. to send 
off, send away ; 1. to order (one) to go to a place ap- 


67 








ἀποστέλλω 


pointed; a. either persons sent with commissions, 
or things intended for some one. So, very frequently, 
Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix. 
37; Lk. x.16; Jn. v. 36, etc. he, too, is said to have sent 
his apostles, i. e. to have appointed them : Mk. vi. 7 ; Mt. 
x. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 35; Jn. xx. 21, etc. messengers are sent: 
Lk. vii. 3; ix. 52; x. 1; servants, Mk. vi. 27; xii. 2; Mt. 
xxi. 36; xxii. 3; an embassy, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 14; an- 
gels, Mk. xiii. 27; Mt.xxiy. 31, ete. Things are said 
to be sent, which are ordered to be led away or con- 
veyed to any one, as Mt. xxi. 3; Mk. xi. 3; τὸ δρέπανον 
i.e. reapers, Mk. iv. 29 [al. take ἀποστέλλω here of 
the “putting forth” of the sickle, i. e. of the act of reap- 
ing; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. ν᾿ πέμπω, b.)]; 
τὸν λόγον, Acts x. 36; xiii. 26 (1, Τ Tr WH ἐξαπεστάλη) ; 
τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν (equiv. to τὸ ἐπηγγελμένον, i. e. the prom- 
ised Holy Spirit) ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WH e£a- 
ποστέλλω ] ; τὶ διὰ χειρός τινος, after the Hebr. 3, Acts 
xi.30. b. The Place of the sending is specified : ἀποστ. 
ets τινα τόπον, Mt. xx. 2; Lk. i. 26; Acts vii. 34; x. 8; 
xix. 22; 2 Tim. iv. 12; Rev. v. 6, ete. God sent Jesus eis 
τὸν κόσμον : Jn. ili. 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. εἰς 
[unto 1.6.1 among: Mt. xv. 24; Lk. xi. 49; Acts [xxii. 21 
WH mrg.]; xxvi.17; [ἐν (by a pregnant or a Lat. con- 
struction) cf. W. $50, 4; B. 329 (283): Mt. x. 16; Lk. 
x. 3; yet see 1 a. above]; ὀπίσω τινός, Lk. xix. 14 ; ἔμπρο- 
σθέν τινος, Jn. iii. 28; and πρὸ προσώπου τινός, after 
the Hebr. 7325, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10; 
Mk.i.2; Lk. vii. 27; x. 1. πρός twa, to one: Mt. xxi. 
34, 37; Mk. xii. 2 sq.; Lk. vii. 3, 20; Jn. v. 33; Acts 
viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, ete. Whence,or by or from 
whom, one is sent: ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. i. 26 (TT Tr 
WH dzó) ; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9); ἀπό with gen. 
of pers., from the house of anyone: Acts x. 17 [T WH 
Tr mrg. ὑπό], 21 Rec. ; ἐκ with gen. of place: Jn. i. 19. 
c. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin. 
following: Mk. iii. 14; Mt.xxii. 3; Lk.i.19; iv. 18 (Is. 
Ixi. 1, [on the pf. cf. W. 272 (255) ; B. 197 (171)]) ; Lk. 
ix. 2; Jn. iv. 38; 1 Co. i. 17; Rev. xxii. 6. [foll. by eis for: 
eis διακονίαν, Heb. 1. 14. foll. by tva: Mk. xii. 2, 13; Lk. 
xx. 10, 20; Jn. i. 19; iii. 17 ; vii. 32; 1 Jn. iv. 9. [foll. by 
ὅπως: Actsix.17.] foll by an aec. withinf.: Acts v. 21. 
foll. by τινά with a pred. ace.: Acts iii. 26 (εὐλογοῦντα 
ὑμᾶς to confer God's blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176) 
sqq.]) ; Acts vii. 35 (ἄρχοντα, to be a ruler); 1 Jn. iv. 10. 
d. ἀποστέλλειν by itself, without an ace. [cf. W. 594 
(552); B. 146 (128)]: as ἀποστέλλειν πρός τινα, Jn. v. 
33; with the addition of the ptep. λέγων, Aéyovca,'Aé- 
yovres, to say through a messenger : Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. iii. 
31 [here φωνοῦντες αὐτόν R G, καλοῦντες air. L T Tr 
WH]; Jn. xi. 3; Acts xiii. 15; [xxi. 25 περὶ τῶν πεπιστευ- 
κότων ἐθνῶν ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν (1, Tr txt. WH txt.) xpi- 
vavres etc. we sent word, giving judgment, ete.]. When 
one accomplished anything through a messenger, it is ex- 
pressed thus: ἀποστείλας or πέμψας he did so and so; as, 
ἀποστείλας ἀνεῖλε, Mt. ii. 16; Mk. vi. 17; Acts vii. 14; 
Rev. i. 1; (so also the Greeks, as Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 6 πέμψας 
ἠρώτα, Plut. de liber. educ. c. 14 πέμψας ἀνεῖλε τὸν Θεό- 


ἀποστερέω 


κριτον ; and Sept. 2 K. vi. 18 ἀποστείλας λήψομαι αὐτόν). 
2. to send away i. e. to dismiss; a. to allow one to de- 
part: τινὰ ἐν ἀφέσει, that he may be in a state of liberty, 
Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. lviii. 6). b. to order one to depart, 
send off: Mk. viii. 26 ; τινὰ κενόν, Mk. xii. 8. c. to drive 
away: Mk. v. 10. [Comp.: ἐξ-, συν-αποστέλλω. SYN. see 
πέμπω. fin. | 

ἀπο-στερέω, -@; 1 aor. ἀπεστέρησα ; [Pass., pres. ἀπο- 
orepodpar]; pf. ptep. ἀπεστερημένος ; to defraud, rob, de- 
spoil: absol, Mk. x. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; ἀλλήλους to with- 
hold themselves from one another, of those who mutually 
deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5. Mid. to allow 
one's self to be defrauded [W. § 38, 3]: 1 Co. vi. 7; τινά 
τινος (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a thing; pass. 
ἀπεστερημένοι τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [W. 196 (185); D. 
158 (138)]; vtto defraud of a thing, ko withdraw or keep 
back a thing by fraud: pass. μισθὸς ἀπεστερημένος, Jas. 
v. 4 (T Tr WH ἀφυστερημένος, see ἀφυστερέω ; [cf. also 
ἀπό, II. 2 d. bb. p. 59"]), (Deut. xxiv. 14 [(16) Alex.];- 
Mal. iii. 5).* 

ὁπο-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ. (ἀποστέλλω) ; 1. a sending away: 
Τιμολέοντος εἰς Σικελίαν, Plut. Timol. 1, etc.; of the 
sending off of a fleet, Thue. 8,9; also of consuls with an 
army, i. e. of an expedition, Polyb. 26, 7, 1. 2. a send- 
ing away i.e. dismission, release: Sept. Eccl. viii. 8. 
3. a thing sent, esp of gifts: 1 K. ix. 16 [Alex.]; 1 Mace. 
ii. 18 ete. cf. Grimm ad loc. 4. in the N. T. the office 
and dignity of the apostles of Christ, (Vulg. apostolatus), 
apostolate, apostleship: Acts i.25; Ro. i.5; 1 Co. ix. 2; 
Gal. ii. 8.5 

ἀπόστολος, -ov, ὃ; 1. a delegate, messenger, one sent 
forth with orders, (Tidt. 1, 21; 5, 38; for mou in 1 K. xiv. 
6 [ Alex.] ; rabbin. rr ov) : Jn. xiii. 16 (where 6 ἀπόστ. and 
ὁ πέμψας αὐτόν are contrasted) ; foll. by a gen., as τῶν ἐκ- 
κλησιῶν, 2 Co. viii. 23 ; Phil. ii. 25; ἀπόστ. τῆς ὁμολογίας 
ἡμῶν the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, God's chief 
messenger, who has brought the κλῆσις ἐπουράνιος, as 
compared with Moses, whom the Jews confess, Heb. iii. 
T 2. Specially applied to the twelve disciples whom 
Christ selected, out of the multitude of his adherents, to 
be his eonstant companions and the heralds to proclaim to 
men the kingdom of God: Mt. x. 1-4; Lk. vi. 13; Acts i. 
26; Rev. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gospel 
and Epistles of John; [the word ἀπόστολος occurs 79 
times in the N. T., and of these 68 instances are in St. 
Luke and St. Paul.” Bp. Lehtft.]. With these apostles 
Paul claimed equality, because through a heavenly inter- 
vention he had been appointed by the ascended Christ 
himself to preach the gospel among the Gentiles, and 
owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man’s 
instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself, 
and moreover had evinced his apostolic qualifications by 
many signal proofs: Gal. i. 1, 11 sq.; ii. 8; 1 Co. i. 17; 
ix. 1sq.; xv. 8-10; 2 Co. iii. 2 sqq. ; xii. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 7; 
2 Tim. i. 11, ef. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul, 
apostles surpassed as wellthe various other orders of 
Christian teachers (cf. διδάσκαλος, εὐαγγελιστής, mpo- 
φήτης), as also the rest of those on whom the special 





68 





ἀποσυνώγωγος 


gifts (cf. χάρισμα) of the Holy Spirit had been bestowed, 
by receiving a richer and more copious conferment of 
the Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28sq.; Eph.iv.11. Certain false 
teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves 
the name and authority of apostles of Christ: 2 Co. xi. 
5, 13; Rev. ii. 2. 3. In a broader sense the name is 
transferred to other eminent Christiam teachers; as 
Barnabas, Acts xiv. 14, and perhaps also Timothy and 
Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), cf. too Ro. xvi. 7 (Ὁ). But in 
Lk. xi. 49; Eph. iii. 5; Rev. xviii. 20, * apostles’ is to be 
taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of 
the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 92-101; Har- 
nack on ‘Teaching’ ete. 11, 3; cf BB.DD. s. v.] d 
ἀποστοματίζω ; (στοματίζω --- not extant — from στόμα); 
prop. to speak ἀπὸ στόματος, (cf. ἀποστηθίζω) ; 1. to 
recite from memory: Themist. or. 20 p. 238 ed. Hard. ; 
to repeat to a pupil (anything) for him to commit to mem- 
ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 c., 277 a.; used of a Sibyl 
prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. to ply with questions, 
catechize, and so to entice to [off-hand] answers : τινά, Lk. 
xi. 59.* 
ἀπο-στρέφω ; fut. ἀποστρέψω ; 1 aor. ἀπέστρεψα ; 2 aor. 
pass. ἀπεστράφην ; [pres. mid. ἀποστρέφομαι ; fr. Hom. 
down]: 1. 10 turn away : τινὰ or ri ἀπό τινος, 2 Tim. iv. 
4 (τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας) ; to remove anything from 
any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. lix. 20); ἀποστρέφειν twa simply, 
to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to 
defection, [A. V. pervert], Lk. xxiii. 14. 2. to turn 
back, return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put back thy 
sword into its sheath); Mt. xxvii. 3, of Judas bringing 
back the shekels, where T Tr WH ἔστρεψε, [cf. Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Jos. $17]. (Inthe same sense for 2 γι, Gen. 
xiv. 16; xxviii 15; xlii 11 (12), 20 (21), etc.; Bar.i. 
8; ii. 34, ete.) 3. intrans. to turn one’s selfaway, turn 
back, return: ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν, Acts iii. 26, ef. 19, (ἀπὸ 
ἁμαρτίας, Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.]; to return from 
a place, Gen. xviii. 33; 1 Mace. xi. 54, ete.; [see Kneucker 
on Bar. i. 13]; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 12) ; cf. Meyer on Acts 
1. οὐ; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning 
away every one of you, ete.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor. 
pass., to turn one’s self. away from, with acc. of the obj. 
(cf. [Jelf $ 548 obs. 1; Krüg.-$ 47, 23,1]; B. 192 (166)); 
to reject, refuse: τινά, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; τὴν ἀλή- 
θειαν, Tit. i. 14; in the sense of deserting, τινά, 2 Tim. i. 15.* 
ἀπο-στυγέω, -@; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro. 
xii. 9; (Hdt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur, al). The 
word is fully diseussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes 
the do- as expressive of separation (cf. Lat. re for- 
midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see ἀπό, V.) ].* 
ἀποσυνάγωγος, -ov, (συναγωγή; q. v-), excluded from the 
sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, [. A. V. 
put out of the synagogue]: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2. 
Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with 
Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in 
doubt; ef. Win. [or Riehm] R W B. s. v. Bann ; Wieseler 
on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle in 
Schaff's Lange's Romans pp. 304-306; ef. B. D. s. v. 
Excommunication]. (Not found in prof. auth.)* 


ἀποτάσσω 


ἀπο-τάσσω: to set apart, to separate; in the N. T. only 
in Mid. ἀποτάσσομαι ; 1 aor. ἀπεταξάμην; 1. prop. to 
separate one’s self, withdraw one’s self from any one, i. 6. 
to take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [ete.]) : 
τινί, Mk. vi. 46; Lk. ix. 61; Acts xviii. 18, 21 [here L T 
Tr om. the dat.]; 2 Co. ii. 13. (That the early Grk. 
writ. never so used the word, but said ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα, is 
shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq.; [cf. W. 23 (22); 
B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: τινί, 
Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 8; Phil. alles. 
iii. § 48; ταῖς τοῦ βίου φροντίσι, Euseb. h. e. 2, 17,5; [τῷ 
βίῳ, Ignat. ad Philadelph. 11, 1; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2, 
9; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor.6, 4 and 5 where see Gebh. and 
Harn. for other exx., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 

ἀπο-τελέω, -à ; [1 aor. pass. ptep. ἀποτελεσθείς] ; 10 per- 
fect; to bring quite to an end: ἰάσεις, accomplish, Lk. xiii. 
32 (LT Tr WH for R G ἐπιτελῶ) ; ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀποτελε- 
σθεῖσα having come to maturity, Jas.i.15. (Hdt., Xen., 
Plat., and subseq. writ.) * 

ἀπο-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. ἀπεθέμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to 
put off or aside; in the N. T. only mid. to put off from 
one’s self: rà ἱμάτια, Acts vii. 58 ; [to lay up or away, ἐν τῇ 
φυλακῇ (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L T Tr WH (so εἰς φυλα- 
κήν; Lev. xxiv. 12; Num. xv. 34; 2 Chr. xviii. 26; Polyb. 
24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said 
to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces: 
as rà ἔργα τοῦ σκότους, Ro. xiii. 12; — Eph. iv. 22 [cf. W. 
347 (325); B.274 (236) ], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. 
ii. 1; Heb. xii. 1; (τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Coriol. 19; τὸν πλοῦ- 
Tov, τὴν μαλακίαν, etc. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; 7. ἐλευθερίαν 
k. παρρησίαν, ibid. 9, etc.).* 

ἀπο-τινάσσω; 1 aor. ἀπετίναξα;; [1 aor. mid. ptep. ázo- 
τιναξάμενος, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.] ; to shake off: Lk. ix. 
5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1 S. x. 2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch. 
253; [ἀποτιναχθῇ, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kühn].) * 

ἀπο-τίνω and ἀπο-τίω : fut. ἀποτίσω; (ἀπό as in ἀποδί- 
δωμι [cf. also ἀπό, V.]), to pay off; repay: Philem. 19. 
(Often in Sept. for Οὐ; in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀπο-τολμάω, -à ; prop. tobe bold of one's self (ἀπό [q. v. 
V.]), i. e. to assume boldness, make bold: Ro. x. 20; cf. 
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.iv. p. 15. (Occasionally in 
Thuc., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) * 

ἀποτομία, -as, 7, (the nature of that which is ἀπότομος, 
cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough; fr. ἀπο- 
τέμνω), prop. sharpness, (differing fr. ἀποτομή a cutting 
off, a segment); severity, roughness, rigor: Ro. xi. 22 
(where opp. to χρηστότης, as in Plut. de lib. educ. c. 18 
to mpaorns, in Dion. Hal. 8, 61 to τὸ ἐπιεικές, and in Diod. 


p. 591 [exept. Ixxxiii. (frag. l. 32, 27, 3 Dind.)] to ἡμε- 


porns).* 

ἀποτόμως, adv., (cf. ἀποτομία) ; a. abruptly, precipi- 
tously. Vb. trop. sharply, severely, [cf. our curtly]: Tit. i. 
13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. ἀπότομος cf. Grimm on 
Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20, 
22; vi. 5, 11; xi. 10; xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the 
similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim. 
27; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Val. Max. 2, 7, 


14, ete.; see also Polyb. 17, 11, 2; Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 1].* | 


69 








ἀπόχρησις 


ἀπο-τρέπω : [fr. Hom. down]; to turn away; Mid. [ pres. 
ἀποτρέπομαι, impv. ἀποτρέπου) to turn one’s self away 
from, to shun, avoid : τινά or τί (see ἀποστρέφω sub fin.), 
2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33; Aeschyl. Sept. 1060; Eur. 
Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 815", 18; Polyb. 
al.].)* 

ἀπ-ουσία, -as, 7, (ἀπεῖναι), absence: Phil. ii. 12. 
Aeschyl. down.] * 

ἀπο-φέρω : 1 aor. ἀπήνεγκα ; 2 aor. inf. ἀπηνεγκεῖν ; Pass., 
[pres. inf. ἀποφέρεσθαι); 1 aor. inf. ἀπενεχθῆναι; [fr. 
Hom. down]; to carry off, take away: τινά, with the idea 
of violence included, Mk. xv. 1; εἰς τόπον τινά, Rev. xvii. 
3; xxi 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring away 
(Lat. defero) : ri εἰς with aec. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3; ri 
ἀπό τινος ἐπί twa, with pass., Acts xix. 12 (LT Tr WH 
for Rec. ἐπιφέρεσθαι)" 

ἀπο-φεύγω [ptep. in 2 Pet. ii. 18 LT Tr WH; W. 342 
(321)]; 2 aor. ἀπέφυγον; [fr. (Hom.) batrach. 42, 47 
«lown]; to fice from, escape; with aec., 2 Pet. ii. 18 
(where L T wrongly put a comma after ἀποφ. [W. 529 
(492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158 
(138); W. $ 52, 4, 1¢.], 2 Pet. i. 4.* 

ἀπο-φθέγγομαι; 1 aor. ἀπεφθεγξάμην ; to speak out, 
speak forth, pronounce, not a word of every-day speech, 
but one * belonging to dignified and elevated discourse, 
like the Lat. profari, pronuntiare; properly it has the 
force of to utter or declare one's self, give one's opinion, 
(einen A usspruch thun), and is used not only of prophets 
(see Kypke on Acts ii. 4,— adding from the Sept. Ezek. 
xiii. 9;-Mic. v. 12; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men 
and philosophers (Dios. Laért. 1,63; 73; 79; whose 
pointed sayings the Greeks call ἀποφθέγματα, Cic. off. 1, 
29)”; [see φθέγγομαι]. Accordingly, “it is used of the 
utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus- 
trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the 
Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14; and also of the disclosures 
made by Paul to [before] king Agrippa concerning the 
ἀποκάλυψις κυρίου that had been given him, Acts xxvi. 
25." Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 16.* 

ἀπο-φορτίζομαι ; (φορτίζω to load; φόρτος a load), to 
disburden one’s self; ri, to lay down a load, unlade, dis- 
charge: τὸν γόμον, of a ship, Acts xxi. 3; cf. Meyer and 
De Wette ad loc.; W. 349 (328) sq. (Elsewhere also 
used of sailors lightening ship during a storm in order to 
avoid shipwreck: Philo de praem. et poen. § 5 κυβερ- 
νήτης, χειμώνων ἐπιγινομένων, ἀποφορτίζεται ; Athen. 2, 5, 
p. 37 c. sq. where it occurs twice.) * 

ἀπό-χρησις, -εως, ἡ, (ἀποχράομαι to use to the full, to 
abuse), abuse, misuse: Col. ii. 22 d ἐστιν πάντα eis φθορὰν 
τῇ ἀποχρήσει “all which (i.e.things forbidden) tend to 
destruction (bring destruction) by abuse”; Paul says 
this from the standpoint of the false teachers, who in 
any use of those things whatever saw an “ abuse,” i.e. a 
blameworthy use. In opposition to those who treat the 
clause as parenthetical and understand ἀπόχρησις to 
mean consumption by use (a being used up, as in Plut. 
moral. p. 267 f. [quaest. Rom. 187), so that the words do 
not give the sentiment of the false teachers but Paul’s 


[From 


ἀποχωρέω 


judgment of it, very similar to that set forth in Mt. xv. 
17; 1 Co. vi. 13, ef. De Wette ad loc. [But see Meyer, 
Ellicott, Lightfoot. ] * 

ἀπο-χωρέω, τῶ; 1 aor. ἀπεχώρησα; [fr. Thuc. down]; 
to go away, depart: ἀπό twos, Mt. vii. 23; Lk. ix. 39; 
Acts xiii. 13; [absol. Lk. xx. 20 Tr mrg.].* 

ἀπο-χωρίζω: [1 aor. pass. ἀπεχωρίσθην]; to separate, 
sever, (often in Plato) ; to part asunder: pass. 6 οὐρανὸς 
ἀπεχωρίσθη. Rev. vi. 14; reflexively, fo separate one's 
self, depart from: ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ᾿ ἀλλήλων, Acts 
xv. 39.” 

ἀπο-ψύχω ; to breathe out life, expire; to faint or swoon 
away: Lk. xxi. 26. (So Thue. 1, 134; Bion 1, 9, al.; 
4 Mace. xv. 18.)* 

" Arms, -ov, 6, Appius, a Roman praenomen ; ᾿Αππίου 
φόρον Appii Forum (Cie. ad Att. 2, 10; Hor. sat. 1, 5, 
3), [R. V. The Market of Appius], the name of a town 
in Italy, situated 43 Roman miles from Rome on the 
Appian way,— (this road was paved with square [(?) 
polygonal] stone by the eensor Appius Claudius Caecus, 
B. €. 312, and led through the porta Capena to Capua, 
and thence as far as Brundisium) : Acts xxviii. 15. [Cf. 
BB.DD.]* 

ἀπρόσ-ιτος, -ov, (προσιέναι to go to), unapproachable, in- 
accessible : φῶς ἀπρόσιτον. 1 Tim. vi. 16. (Polyb., Diod., 
[Strabo], Philo, Leian., Plut.; φέγγος ἀπρόσιτον, Tatian 
e. 20; δόξα [pas], Chrys. [vi. 66 ed. Montf.] on Is. 
vi. 2.)* 

ἀπρόσκοπος, -ον, (προσκόπτω, Q. V. ); 1. actively, 
having nothing for one to strike against; not causing to 
stumble; a. prop.: 666s, a smooth road, Sir. xxxv. 
(xxxii.) 21. b. metaph. not leading others into sin by 
one's mode of life: 1 Co. x. 32. 2. passively, a. not 
striking against or stumbling; metaph. not led into sin; 
blameless: Phil. i. 10 (joined with εἰλικρινεῖς). b. with- 
out offence: συνείδησις, not troubled and distressed by a 
consciousness of sin, Acts xxiv. 16. (Not found in prof. 
auth. [exc. Sext. Emp. 1, 195 (p. 644, 13 Bekk.) ].)* 

ἀπροσωπολήπτως [-λήμπτως 1, Τ Tr WH; cf. reff. s. v. 
M, p], a word of Hellenistic origin, (a priv. and προσω- 
πολήπτης, Q. V-), without respect of persons, i.e. impar- 
tially: 1 Pet. i. 17, (Ep. of Barn. 4, 12; [Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor.1,3]). (The adj. ἀπροσωπόληπτος occurs here and 
there in eccl. writ.) * 

ἄπταιστος, -ov, (πταίω, q. v.), not stumbling, standing 
Jirm, exempt from falling, (prop., of a horse, Xen. de re 
eq. 1, 6) ; metaph.: Jude 24. 
(37).]* 

ἅπτω ; 1 aor. ptep. das; (cf. Lat. apto, Germ. hefien) ; 
[fr. Hom. down]; 1. prop. to fasten to, make adhere 
to; hence, spec. to fasten fire to a thing, to kindle, set on 
Jire, (often so in Attic) : λύχνον, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33; xv. 
8, (Arstph. nub. 57; "Theophr. char. 20 (18); Joseph. 
antt. 4, 3,4); πῦρ, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WH περι- 
ayrávrov]: πυράν. Acts xxviii.2 L'T Tr WH. 2. Mid., 
[ pres. ἅπτομαι; impf. ἡπτόμην [Mk. vi. 56 RG Tr mre.]; 
laor. ἡψάμην ; in Sept. generally for y33, J^à3; prop. 
to fasten one’s self to, adhere to, cling to, (Hom. Il. 8, 67); 


[Cf. W. 97 (92); B. 42 


70 








ἀπώλεια 


a. to touch, foll. by the obj. in gen. [W. § 30, 8c.; B.167 
(146); cf. Donaldson p. 483]: Mt. viii. 3; Mk. iii. 10; 
vii. 33; viii. 22, ete.; Lk. xviii. 15; xxii. 51,— very 
often in Mt., Mk. and Lk. In Jn. xx. 17, μή μου ἅπτου is 
to be explained thus: Do not handle me to see whether 
Iam still clothed with a body ; there is no need of such 
an examination, * for not yet” ete.; cf. Baumg.- Crusius and 
Meyer ad loc. [as given by Hackett in Bib. Sacer. for 
1868, p. 779 sq., or B. D. Am. ed. p. 1813 sq.]. b. γυναι- 
kos, of carnal intercourse with a woman, or cohabitation, 
1 Co. vii. 1, like the Lat. tangere, Hor. sat. 1, 2,54; Ter. 
Heaut. 4, 4, 15, and the Hebr. 333, Gen. xx. 6; Prov. vi. 
29, (Plat. de lege. viii. 840 a. ; Plut. Alex. Magn. c. 21). 
c. with allusion to the levitieal precept ἀκαθάρτου μὴ 
ἅπτεσθε, have no intercourse with the Gentiles, no fel- 
lowship in their heathenish practices, 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. 
Is. lii. 11) ; and in the Jewish sense, μὴ ἅψῃ, Col. ii. 21 
(the things not to be touched appear to be both women 
and certain kinds of food, so that celibacy and abstinence 
from various kinds of food and drink are recommended ; 
cf. De Wette ad loc. [but also Meyer and Bp. Lehtft.; 
on the distinction between the stronger term ἅπτεσθαι 
(to handle?) and the more delicate θιγεῖν (to touch?) ef. 
the two commentators just named and Trench $ xvii. In 
classic Grk. also ἅπτεσθαι is the stronger term, denoting 
often to lay hold of, hold fast, appropriate; in its carnal 
reference differing from θιγγάνειν by suggesting unlaw- 
fulness. θιγγάνειν is used of touching by the hand as a 
means of knowledge, handling for a purpose; Ψψηλαφᾶν 
signifies to feel around with the fingers or hands, esp. in 
searching for something, often to grope, fumble, cf. ψηλα- 
φίνδα blindman's buff. Schmidt ch. 10.]). d. to touch i.e. 
assail: τινός, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, ete.). 
[Cowr. : av, καθ-, περι-άπτω.] 

᾿Απφία, -as, ἡ, Apphia, name of a woman: Philem. 2. 
[Apparently a Phrygian name expressive of endearment, 
cf. Suidae Lex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. "Ama: ἀδελφῆς x. 
ἀδελφοῦ ὑποκόρισμα, ete. cf. ᾿Απφύς. See fully in Bp. 
Lehtft.’s Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 306 sqq.]* 

ἀπ-ωθέω, -ὦ : to thrust away, push away, repel; in the 
N. T. only Mid., pres. ἀπωθέομαι (-odpar) ; 1 aor. ἀπωσάμην 
(for which the better writ. used ἀπεωσάμην, cf. W 90 (86) ; 
B. 69 (61)) ; to thrust away from one’s self, to drive away 
from one's self, i. e. to repudiate, reject, refuse: twa, Acts 
vii. 27, 39; xiii. 46; Ro. xi. 1 sq.; 1 Tim. i. 19. (Jer. 
ii. 36 (37); iv. 30; vi. 19; Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 14 and often. 
In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀπώλεια, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀπόλλυμι, q. v.) ; 1. actively, a 
destroying, utter destruction: as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22; 
τοῦ μύρου, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a 
gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to τήρησις); 
the putting of a man to death, Acts xxv. 16 Rec.; by 
meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2 
Pet. ii. 2 Ree. ; but the correct reading ἀσελγείαις was 
long ago adopted here. 2. passively, a perishing, ruin, 
destruction; a. in general: τὸ ἀργύριόν σου σύν σοι εἴη εἰς 
ἀπ. let thy money perish with thee, Acts viii. 20; βυθίζειν 
τινὰ εἰς ὄλεθρον x. ἀπώλειαν, with the included idea of 


» 
apa 


misery, 1 Tim. vi. 9; αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας destructive opin- 
ions, 2 Pet. ii. 1; ἐπάγειν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπώλειαν, ibid. cf. vs. 3. 
b. in particular, the destruction which consists in the loss 
of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those 
excluded from the kingdom of God: Rev. xvii. 8, 11, cf. 
xix. 20; Phil. iij. 19 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16 ; opp. to ἡ περιποίησις 
τῆς ψυχῆς, Heb. x. 39; to ἡ ζωή, Mt. vii. 135 to σωτηρία, 
Phil. i. 28. ὁ vids τῆς ἀπωλείας, a man doomed to eternal 
misery (a Hebraism, see vids, 2): 2 Th. ii. 3 (of Anti- 
christ) ; Jn. xvii. 12 (of Judas, the traitor) ; ἡμέρα κρίσεως 
‘K. ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr. 
Polyb. τι. s. [but see Aristot. probl. 17, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916%, 
26; 29,14, 10 ibid. 952^, 26; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 1120", 
2, etc.]; often in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr.)* 

ἄρα, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal 
root APQ to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius $ 488; Vanicek 
p. 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated 
fully by Kiihner ii. $$ 509, 545; [Jelf $$ 787—789], 
and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 160-180, among others; [for 
a statement of diverse views see Düumlein, Griech. Par- 
tikeln, p. 19 sq.]. It intimates that, *under these cir- 
cumstances something either is so or becómes so” (Klotz 
l.c. p. 167): Lat. igitur, consequently, [differing from 
οὖν in ‘denoting a subjective impression rather than a 
positive conclusion.’ L. and S. (see 5 below) ]. In the 
N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings 
of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does 
not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. $$53, 8 a. and 
61,6. Itisfound 1. subjoined to another word : Ro. 
vii. 21; viti. 1; Gal. iii. 7; ἐπεὶ ἄρα since, if it were other- 
wise, 1 Co. vii. 14; [v. 10, cf. B. § 149,5]. When placed 
after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a 
preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist- 
ing only inthe mind. τίς ἄρα who then? Mt. xviii. 1 (i. e. 
one certainly will be the greater, who then?); Mt. xix. 
25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved; you say that the 
rich will not; who then?); Mt. xix. 27; xxiv. 45 (I bid 
you be ready; who then ete.? the question follows from 
this command of mine); Mk. iv. 41; Lk. i. 66 (from all 
these things doubtless something follows ; what, then ?) ; 
Lk. viii. 25 ; xii. 42; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which 
then ?); Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared ; what, then, 
has become of him?). εἰ dpa, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since 
the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ; 
Acts vii. 1 [Ree.] (dpa equiv. to ‘since the witnesses tes- 
tify thus’); Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous, 
perhaps the thought ete.) ; εἴπερ dpa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (NY-DN, 
εἰ dpa, Gen. xviii. 3). οὐκ dpa, Acts xxi. 38 (thou hast 
a knowledge of Greek ; art thou not then the Egyptian, 
as I suspected ?); μήτι dpa (Lat. num igitur), did I then 
etc: 2 €0:21:517: 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ. 
(cf. B. 371 (318) ; [W. 558 (519)]) it is placed at the 
beginning of a sentence; and so, so then, accordingly, 
equiv. to ὥστε with a finite verb: ἄρα μαρτυρεῖτε [páprv- 
pes ἐστε T Tr WH], Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. xxiii. 31 ὥστε pap- 
tupeire); Ro. x. 17; 1 Co. xv. 18; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in 
LT Tr WH no conditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii. 
12; Gal. iv. 31 (L T Tr WH διό); Heb. iv. 9. 3. inan 


Ti 








&pados 


apodosis, after a protasis with ei, in order to bring out 
what follows as a matter of course, (Germ. so ist ja the 
obvious inference is): Lk. xi. 20; Mt. xii. 28; 2 Co. v. 
14 (15) (ἢ G, a protasis with εἰ preceding); Gal. ii. 
21; ii. 29; v. 11; Heb. xii. 8; joined to another word, 
1 Co. xv. 14. 4. with γέ, rendering it more pointed, 
dpaye [L Tr uniformly dpa ye; so R WH in Acts xvii. 
27; cf. W. p. 45; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely 
then, so then, (Lat. itaque ergo) : Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26; 
Acts xi. 18 (L 'T Tr WH om. γέ) ; and subjoined to a 
word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. ἄρα οὖν, a 
combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen- 
tence (W. 445 (414) ; B. 371 (318), [* dpa ad internam 
potius caussam spectat, οὖν magis ad externam." Klotz 
ad Devar. ii. p. 717; dpa is the more logical, οὖν the 
more formal connective; “ dpa is illative, οὖν continua- 
tive,” Win. 1. c.; cf. also Kuhner § 545, 57), [R. V.] so 
then, (Lat. hinc igitur) : Ro. v. 18; vii. 3, 25 ; viii. 12; ix. 
16, 18; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. οὖν) ; 19 [L mrg. ἄρα]; 
Gal. vi. 10; Eph. it, 19; 1. Th: y. 6; 2 Th. ii. 15.* 

dpa, an interrogative particle [*implying anxiety 
orimpatience on the part of the questioner." L. and 
S. s. v. ], (of the same root as the preceding dpa, and only 
differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon 
the first syllable, which is therefore circumflexed) ; 1. 
num igitur, i.e. marking an inferential question to which 
a negative answer is expected: Lk. xviii. 8; with ye 
rendering it more pointed, dpa ye [G T àpáye]: Acts viii. 
30; [dpa oiv . . . διώκομεν Lchm. ed. min. also maj. mrg. 
are we then pursuing ete. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i. e. 
a question to which an affirmative answer is expected, 
in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ. so ist also woll 3), 
he is then? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write 
dpa, so that this example is referred to those mentioned 
under dpa, 3, and is rendered Christ is then a minister of 
sin; but μὴ γένοιτο, which follows, is everywhere by 
Paul opposed to a question). Cf. W. 510 (475) sq. [also 
B. 247 (213), 371 (318); Herm. ad Vig. p. 820 sqq. ; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 180 sqq.; speaking somewhat 
loosely, it may be said * ápa expresses bewilderment as 
to a possible conclusion. .. dpa hesitates, while ἄρα con- 
cludes.” Bp. Lghtit. on Gal. 1. c. ].* 

ἀρά, -üs, ἡ, 1. a prayer; a supplication; much often- 
er 2. an imprecation, curse, malediction, (cf. κατάραν ; 
so in Ro. iii. 14 (cf. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in Sept. 
(In both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

'" Apo ía, -as, 7, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known 
peninsula of Asia, lying towards Africa, and bounded by 
Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the 
Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and the 
Ocean]: Gal. i. 17; iv. 25." 

[ἀραβών Tdf., see ἀρραβών.] 

[apaye, see apa, 4. | 

[ἀράγε, see ἄρα, 1.] 

᾿Αράμ, Aram [or Ram], indecl. prop. name of one of 
the male ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3 sq.; Lk. iii. 33 
[not T WH Tr mrg.; see ᾿Αδμείν and "Apvec].* 

ἄραφος T Tr for dppados, q. v. 


"Apa 


"Ἄραψ, -agos, 6, an Arabian: Acts ii. 11.* 

ápyéo, -à; (to be ἀργός, q. v.) ; to be idle, inactive ; con- 
textually, to linger, delay: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ois τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι 
οὐκ ἀργεῖ, i.e. whose punishment has long been impend- 
ing and will shortly fall. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.) 
[Cowr. : xar-apyéo.] * 

ἀργός. -óv, and in later writ. fr. Aristot. hist. anim. 10, 
40 [vol i. p. 627*, 15] on and consequently also in the 
N. T. with the fem. ἀργή, which among the early Greeks 
Epimenides alone is said to have used, "Tit. i. 12; ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 104 sq.; id. Paralip. p. 455 sqq.; W. 68 
(67), [c£. 24; B. 25 (23)], (contr. fr. depyos which Hom. 
uses, fr. a priv. and ἔργον without work, without labor, 
doing nothing), inactive, idle; a. free from labor, at 
leisure, (ἀργὸν εἶναι, Hdt. 5, 6) : Mt. xx. 3, 6 [Ree.]; 1 
Tim. v. 13. b. lazy, shunning the labor which one ought 
to perform, (Hom. Il. 9, 320 6, T ἀεργὸς ἀνήρ, 6, τε πολλὰ 
éopyas) : πίστις, Jas. ii. 20 (LT Tr WH for RG vexpa) ; 
γαστέρες apyat i. e. idle gluttons, fr. Epimenides, Mites. 12 
(Nicet. ann. 7, 4, 135 d. εἰς dpyas γαστέρας ὀχετηγήσας) ; 
ἀργὸς καὶ ἄκαρπος εἴς τι, 2 Pet. i. 8. c. of things from 
which no profit is derived, although they can and ought 
to be productive; as of fields, trees, gold and silver, (cf. 
Grimm on Sap. xiv. 5; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2]) ; unprofit- 
able, ῥῆμα ἀργόν, by litotes i. q. pernicious (see ἄκαρπος): 
Mt. xii. 36." 

[Sxw.&pyós, βραδύς, νωθρός: apy. idle, involving blame- 
worthiness; Bp. slow (tardy), having a purely temporal ref- 
erence and no necessary bad sense; νωθρ. sluggish, descrip- 
tive of constitutional qualities and suggestive of censure. 
Schmidt ch. 49; Trench § civ.] 

ἀργύρεος -ois, -éa -à, eov -oüv, of silver; in the contracted 
formin Acts xix. 24 [but WH br.]; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. 
ix. 20. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἀργύριον, -ov, τό, (fr. ἄργυρος, q. v-), [fr. Hdt. down]; 
1. silver: Acts iii. 6; vii. 16; xx. 33; 1 Pet. i. 18; [1 
Co. iii. 12 T Tr WH]. 2. money: simply, Mt. xxv. 
18, 27; Mk. xiv. 11 ; Lk. ix. 3; xix. 15, 23; xxii. 5; Acts 
viii. 20; plur., Mt. xxviii. [12], 15. 3. Spec..a silver 
coin, silver-piece, (Luther, Silberling), Sov, σίκλος, shekel 
[see B. D. s. v.], i. e. a coin in circulation among the 
Jews after the exile, from the time of Simon (c. B. c. 
141) down (cf. 1 Mace. xv. 6 sq. [yet see D. D. s. v. 
Money, and reff. in Schürer, N. T. Zeitgesch. $ 7]) ; ac- 
cording to Josephus (antt. 3, 8, 2) equal to the Attic 
tetradrachm or the Alexandrian didrachm (ef. 
στατήρ [ B. D. 5. v. Piece of Silver]) : Mt. xxvi. 15 ; xxvii. 
3,5 sq. 9. In Acts xix. 19, ἀργυρίου μυριάδες πέντε fifty 
thousand pieces of silver (Germ. 50,000 im Silber i. q. 
Silbergeld), doubtless drachmas [cf. δηνάριον] are meant ; 
cf. Meyer [et al.] ad loc.* 

ἀργυροκόπος, -ov, 6, (ἄργυρος and κόπτω to beat, ham- 
mer; a silver-beater), a silversmith: Acts xix. 24. (Judg. 
xvii. 4; Jer. vi. 29. Plut. de vitand. aere alien. c. 7.) * 

ἄργυρος, ov. 6, (ἀργός shining), [fr. Hom. down], silver : 
1 Co. iii. 12 ΓΤ Tr WH ἀργύριον] (reference is made to 
the silver with which the columns of noble buildings 
were covered and the rafters adorned); by meton. 
things made of silver, silver-work, vessels, images of the 


T2 





'" Apéras 


gods, etc.: Acts xvii. 29; Jas. v. 3; Rev. xviii. 12. silver 
coin : Mt. x. 9.* 

Ἄρειος [ 'T'df. " Apios] πάγος, -ov, 6, Areopagus (a rocky 
height in the city of Athens not far from the Acropolis 
toward the west; πάγος a hill,”Apecos belonging to (Ares) 
Mars, Mars’ Hill; so called, because, as the story went, 
Mars, having slain Halirrhothius, son of Neptune, for the 
attempted violation of his daughter Alcippe, was tried 
for the murder here before the twelve gods as judges; 
Pausan. Attic. 1, 28, 5), the place where the judges con- 
vened who, by appointment of Solon, had jurisdiction οὔ" 
capital offences, (as wilful murder, arson, poisoning, ma~ 
licious wounding, and breach of the established religious 
usages). The court itself was called Arcopagus from 
the place where it sat, also Areum judicium (Tacit. 
ann. 2, 55), and curia Martis (Juv. sat. 9, 101). To 
that hill the apostle Paul was led, not to defend himself 
before the judges, but that he might set forth his 
opinions on divine subjects to a greater multitude of 
people, flocking together there and eager to hear some- 
thing new: Acts xvii. 19-22; cf. vs. 32. Cf. J. H. Krause 
in Pauly's Real-Encycl. 2te Aufl. i. 2 p. 1497 sqq. s. v. 
Areopag ; [ Grote, Hist. of Greece, index s. v.; Diets. of 
Geogr. and Antiq.: BB.DD. s. v. Areopagus; and on 
Paul's discourse, esp. D. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mars’ Hill ].* 

᾿Αρεοπαγίτης. Tdi. -γείτης [see s. v. et, c]. του, 6, (fr. the 
preceding [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. 697 sq.]), a member of the 
court of Areopagus, an Areopagite: Acts xvii. 34.* 

ἀρεσκεία (T WH -κία [see I, «]). -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀρεσκεύω to: 
be complaisant; hence not to be written [with R GL 
Tr] ἀρέσκεια, [cf. Chandler $ 99; W. $ 6, 1 g.; B. 12 
(11)]), desire to please: περιπατεῖν ἀξίως τοῦ κυρίου eis 
πᾶσαν ἀρεσκείαν, to please him in all things, Col. i. 10; 
(of the desire to please God, in Philo, opif. $ 50; de 
profug. § 17; de victim. $ 3 sub fin. In native Grk. writ. 
commonly in a bad sense: Theophr.char. 3 (5); Polyb. 
31, 26,5; Diod. 13, 53; al.; [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. 1. e.]).* 

ἀρέσκω ; impf. ἤρεσκον ; fut. apéow; 1 aor. ἤρεσα : (APD 
[see dpa init.]); [fr. Hom. down]; a. to please: τινί, Mt. 
xiv. 6; Mk. vi. 22; Ro. viii. 8; xv.2; 1 Th. ii. 15; iv. 1; 
1 Co. vii. 32-34; Gal. i. 10; 2 Tim. ii 4; ἐνώπιόν" 
τινος, after the Hebr. +373, Acts vi. 5, (1 K. iii. 10; Gen. 
xxxiv. 18, etc.). b. to strive to please; to accommodate- 
one’s self to the opinions, desires, interests of others: τινί, 
1 Co. x. 33 (πάντα πᾶσιν apéoxw) ; 1 Th. ii. 4. ἀρέσκειν 
ἑαυτῷ. to please one’s self and therefore to have an eye 
to one's own interests: Ro. xv. 1, 3.* 

ἀρεστός, -ἡ, -óv, (ἀρέσκων, pleasing, agreeable: τινί, In. 
viii. 29; Acts xii. 3; ἐνώπιόν twos, 1 Jn. iii. 22 (cf. 
ἀρέσκω, a.) ; ἄρεστόν ἐστι foll. by acc. with inf. it is jit, 
Acts vi. 2 [yet cf. Meyer ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
[Soph.] Hdt. down.) * 

"Apéras [WH ‘Ap., see their Intr. $ 408], -a (cf. NS 
§ 8,1; [B. 20 (18) ]), 6, Aetas, (a name common to many 
of the kings of Arabia Petraea or Nabathaean Arabia 
[cf. B. D. s. v. Nebaioth] ; cf. Schürer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 
§ 17 b. p. 233 sq.); an Arabian king who made war (A. D. 
36) on his son-in-law Herod Antipas for having repu- 


ἀρετή T 


diated his daughter; and with such success as complete- 
ly to destroy his army (Joseph. antt. 18, 5). In conse- 
quence of this, Vitellius, governor of Syria, being ordered 
by Tiberius to march an army against Aretas, prepared 
for the war. But Tiberius meantime having died 
[March 16, a. D. 37], he recalled his troops from the 
march, dismissed them to their winter quarters, and 
departed to Rome. After his departure Aretas held 
sway over the region of Damascus (how acquired we do 
not know), and placed an ethnarch over the city: 2 Co. 
xi 32. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Wieseler in Herzog i. 
p. 488 sq.; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 238 sq. ; Schiirer in 


Riehm p. 83 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Aretas; Meyer | 


on Acts, Einl. § 4 (cf. ibid. ed. Wendt) ].* 

ἀρετή, -ῆς, ἡ, [see ἄρα init.], a word of very wide signi- 
fication in Grk. writ.; any ezcellence of a person (in 
body or mind) or of a thing, an eminent endowment, prop- 
erty or quality. Used of the human ;nind and in an 
ethiealsense,itdenotes 1. avirtuous course of thought, 


v. 13; often in 4 Mace. and in Grk. writ.) : 2 Pet. i. 5 


[al. take it here specifically, viz. moral vigor; cf. next | 


head]. 2. any particular moral excellence, as modesty, 
purity; hence (plur. ai ἀρεταί, Sap. viii. 7; often in 4 
Mace. and in the Grk. philosophers) tis ἀρετή, Phil. iv. 
8. Used of God, it denotes a.-his power: 2 Pet. i. 3. 
b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ‘ which shine 
forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of 
our salvation’ (Jn. Gerhard): 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for 
ΠῚ splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of 
the Messiah; in plur. for nj»rin praises, of God, Is. xliii. 
21; xlii. 12; Ixiii. 7.) * j 

ἀρήν, 6, nom. not in use ; the other cases are by syncope 
ἀρνός (for dpévos), ἀρνί, dpva; plur. ἄρνες, ἀρνῶν, ἀρνάσι, 
ἄρνας, a sheep, a lamb: Lk. x. 3. (Gen. xxx. 32; Ex. 
xxiii. 19, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀριθμέω, -9: 1 aor. ἠρίθμησα; pf. pass. ἠρίθμημαι : 
(ἀριθμός) ; [£r. Hom. down]; to number: Mt.x.30; Lk. 
xii. 7; Rev. vii. 9. [Cowr.: xar-api&péo.] * 

ἀριθμός, -o7, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a number; a. a fixed 
and definite number: τὸν ἀριθμὸν πεντακισχίλιοι, in num- 


ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Macc. viii. 16; 3 Macc. v. 2, and often | 


in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (216); [B. 153 (134)]); ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα, Lk. xxii. 3; dp. ἀνθρώπου, a number 
whose letters indicate a certain man, Rev. xiii. 18. b. 
an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude: Acts vi. 7; xi. 
21; Rev. xx. 8. 

᾿Αριμαθαία [WH 'Ap. see their Intr. $ 408], -as, ἥ, 
Arimathea, Hebr. 797 (a height), the name of several 
cities of Palestine; cf. G'esenius, "Thesaur. iii. p. 1275. 
The one mentioned in Mt. xxvii. 57; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. 
xxiii. 51; Jn. xix. 38 appears to have been the same as 
that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel, 
in Mount Ephraim: 1 S. i. 1, 19, ete. Sept. ᾿Αρμαθαΐμ, 
and without the art. ραμαθέμ, and acc. to another read- 
ing Ῥαμαθαΐμ, 1 Mace. xi. 34; Ῥαμαθά in Joseph. antt. 
13,4, 9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus 
von Naz. iii. 514; [B. D. Am. ed.].* 


| dinner was called δεῖπνον. 
feeling and action; virtue, moral goodness, (Sap. iv. 1; 





o - 


3 “Apparyedav 


᾿Αρίσταρχος, -ov, 6, [lit. best-ruling], Aristarchus, a cer- 
tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ‘ fellow-captive? with 
Paul [cf. B. D. Am. ed. ; Bp. Lehtft. and Mey. on Col. as 
below]: Acts xix. 29; xx. 4; xxvii. 2; Col. iv. 10; 
Philem. 24.* 

ἀριστάω, -à: 1 aor. ἠρίστησα; (τὸ ἄριστον, q. V.); a. 
to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 1; and 
often in Attic). b. by later usage to dine: παρά τινι, 
Lk. xi. 37; (Gen. xliii. 24; Ael. v. h. 9, 19).* 

ἀριστερός, -d, -óv, left: Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xxiii. 33; [Mk. 
x. 37 T Tr WH, on the plur. cf. W. $ 27, 3]; ὅπλα ἀρι- 
στερά i. e. carried in the left hand, defensive weapons, 2 
Co. vi.7. [From Hom. down.]* 

᾿Αριστόβουλος, -ov, ὁ, [lit. best-counselling], Aristobulus, 
a certain Christian [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. and Bp. Lghtft. 
on Phil. p. 174 sq.]: Ro. xvi. 10.* 

ἄριστον, -ov, τό, [fr. Hom. down]; a. the first food, 
taken early in the morning before work, breakfast; 
But the later Greeks called 
breakfast τὸ ἀκράτισμα, and dinner ἄριστον i. e. δεῖπνον 
μεσημβρινόν, Athen. 1, 9, 10 p. 11 b.; and so in the N. T. 
Hence b. dinner: Lk. xiv. 12 (ποιεῖν ἄριστον ἢ δεῖπνον, 
to which others are invited) ; Lk. xi. 38; Mt. xxii. 4 
(ἑτοιμάζειν). [B. D. s. v. Meals; Becker's Charicles, sc. 
vi. excurs. i. (Eng. trans. p. 312 sq.).] * 

dokerós, τή, -óv, (ἀρκέω), sufficient: Mt. vi. 34 (where 
the meaning is, * Let the present day's trouble suffice for 
a man, and let him not rashly increase it by anticipating 
the cares of days to come’; [on the neut. cf. W. $58, 5; 
B. 127 (111)]); dpxerov τῷ μαθητῇ | A.V. it is enough for 
the disciple i.e.] let him be content etc., foll. by ἵνα, Mt. x. 
25; foll. by an inf, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Chrysipp. ap. Athen. 
3, 79 p. 113 b.)* 

&pkéo, à; 1 aor. ἤρκεσα ; [ Pass., pres. ἀρκοῦμαι}; 1 fut. 
ἀρκεσθήσομαι : to be possessed of unfailing strength; to be 
strong, to suffice, to be enough (as against any danger; 
hence to defend, ward off, in Hom.; [al. make this the 
radical meaning, cf. Lat arceo ; Curtius $ 7]): with dat. 
of pers., Mt. xxv. 9; Jn. vi. 7; ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου my 
grace is suflicient for thee, sc. to enable thee to bear the 
evil manfully; there is, therefore, no reason why thou 
shouldst ask for its removal, 2 Co. xii. 9; impersonally, 
ἀρκεῖ ἡμῖν "tis enough for us, we are content, Jn. xiv. 8. 
Pass. (as in Grk. writ.) to be satisfied, contented: τινί, 
with a thing, Lk. iii. 14; Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 8; (2 
Mace. v. 15) ; ἐπί τινι, 3 Jn. 10. [Cowr.: éz-apkéo.]* 

ἄρκτος, -ov, 6, 7, or [so GL T Tr WH] ἄρκος, -ov, 6, 7, 
abear: Rev. xiii. 2. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἅρμα, -aros, τό, (fr. APO to join, fit; ateam), a chariot: 
Acts viii. 28 sq. 38; of war-chariots (i. e. armed with 
seythes) we read ἅρματα ἵππων πολλῶν chariots drawn by 
many horses, Rev. ix. 9, (Joel ii. 5. In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down).* 

“Αρμαγεδών [Grsb. 'Apu., WH^Ap Mayedav, see their 
Intr. 8408; Tf. Proleg. p. 106] or (so Rec.) ’Appayeddar, 
Har-Magedon or Armageddon, indecl. prop. name of an 
imaginary place: Rev. xvi. 16. Many, following Beza 
and Glassius, suppose that the name is compounded of 


ἁρμόξω 


*i mountain, and 3332 or 1/222, Sept. Μαγεδώ, Μαγεδδώ. 
Megiddo was a city of the Manassites, situated in the 
great plain of the tribe of Issachar, and famous for a 
double slaughter, first of the Canaanites (Judg. v. 19), 
and again of the Israelites (2 K. xxiii. 29 sq.; 2 Chr. 
xxxv. 22, cf. Zech. xii. 11); so that in the Apocalypse 
it would signify the place where the kings opposing 
Christ were to be destroyed with a slaughter like that 
which the Canaanites or the Israelites had experienced 
of old. But since those two overthrows are said to have 
taken place ἐπὶ ὕδατι May. (Judg. 1. c.) and ἐν τῷ 
πεδίῳ May. (2 Chr. l.c.), it is not easy to perceive 
what can be the meaning of the mountain of Megiddo, 
which could be none other than Carmel. Hence, for 
one, I think the conjecture of L. Capellus [i. e. Louis 
Cappel (akin to that of Drusius, see the Comm.)] to be 
far more easy and probable, viz. that “Appayedav is for 
ἍἍρμαμ εγεδών, compounded of N27T! destruction, and 
j)1a9. [Wieseler (Zur Gesch. d. N. T. Schrift, p. 188), 
Hitzig (in Hilgenf. Einl. p. 440 n.), al., revive the deriva- 
tion (ef. Hiller, Simonis, al.) fr. "5 ^j! city of Megiddo. ]* 

dppdtw, Attic ἁρμόττω : 1 aor. mid. ἡρμοσάμην ; (áppos, 
qr v2); 1. to join, to fit together; so in Hom. of car- 
penters, fastening together beams and planks to build 
houses, ships, ete. 2. of marriage: ἁρμόζειν τινὶ τὴν 
Évyarépa (Ildt. 9, 108) to betroth a daughter to any one; 
pass. ἁρμόζεται γυνὴ ἀνδρί, Sept. Prov. xix. 14; mid. 
ἁρμόσασθαι τὴν θυγατέρα τινός (Mdt. 5, 32; 47; 6, 65) 
to join to one’s self, i. e. to marry, the daughter of any 
one; ἁρμόσασθαί τινί twa to betroth, to give one in mar- 
riage to any one: 2 Co. xi. 2, and often in Philo, ef. 
Loesner ad loc.; the mid. cannot be said to be used 
actively, but refers to him to whom the care of betroth- 
ing has been committed; [cf. D. 193 (167) ; per contra 
Mey. ad loc.; W. 258 (242)].* 

ἁρμός, -ov, 6, (APO to join, fit), a joining, a joint: Heb. 
iv. 12. (Soph., Xen., al.; Sir. xxvii. 2.) * 

ἄρνας, see ἀρήν. 

*Apvel, 6, indecl. prop. name of one of the ancestors of 
Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 T WH Tr mrg.* 

ἀρνέομαι, -οῦμαι ; fut. ἀρνήσομαι ; impf. ἠρνούμην ; 1 aor. 
ἠρνησάμην (rare in Attic, where generally ἠρνήθην, cf. 
Matth. i. p. 538 [better Veitch s. v.]); pf. ἤρνημαι; a 
depon. verb [(fr. Hom. down)] signifying 1. to deny, 
i. e. eimeiv.. . οὐκ [to say .. . not, contradict]: Mk. xiv. 70; 
Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. i. 20; xviii. 25, 27; Lk. viii. 45; Acts 
iv. 16; foll. by ὅτι od instead of simple ὅτι, in order to 
make the negation more strong and explicit: Mt. xxvi. 
72; 1 Jn. ii. 22; (on the same use in Grk. writ. cf. 
Kühnerii p. 761; [Jelf ii. 450; W.$65,2 8.; B. 355 
(305)]). 2. to deny, with an aec. of the pers., in 
various senses: a. dpv. Ἰησοῦν is used of followers of 
Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that 
Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to disown]: 
Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9; [Jn. xiii. 38 L txt. T Tr WI]; 
2 Tim. ii. 12, (dpv. τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Rev. iii. 8, means 
the same); and on the other hand, of Jesus, denying 
that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33; 2 Tim. ii. 12. 


14 





ἁρπάξω 


b. ἀρν. God and Christ, is used of those who by cher- 
ishing and disseminating pernicious opinions and immo- 
rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and 
Christ : 1 Jn. ii. 22 (cf. iv. 2; 2Jn. 7-11); Jude 4; 2 Pet. 
li.l. c. ἀρν. ἑαυτόν to deny himself, is used in two senses, 
a. to disregard his own interests: Lk. ix. 23 [R WH mrg. 
ἀπαρν.}; cf. ἀπαρνέομαι. B. to prove false to himself, act 
entirely unlike himself: 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny i.e. 
abnegate, abjure; τί, to renounce a thing, forsake it: τὴν 
ἀσέβειαν κ. Tas ἐπιθυμίας, Tit. ii. 12; by act to show es- 
trangement from a thing: τὴν πίστιν, 1 Tim. v. 8; Rev. 
li. 13; τὴν δύναμιν τῆς εὐσεβείας, 2 Tim. iii. 5. 4. not 
to accept, to reject, refuse, something offered : τινά, Acts 
iii. 14; vii. 35; with an inf. indicating the thing, Heb. 
xi 24. [Cowr.: ἀπ-αρνέομαι.] 

ἀρνίον. -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ἀρήν, q. v-), [fr. Lys. down], 
a little lamb, a lamb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol- 
lowers τὰ ἀρνία pov in Jn. xxi. 15; τὸ ἀρνίον is used of 
Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the 
sins of men, very often in Rev., as v. 6, 8, 12, etc. (Jer. 
xi. 19 ; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 4, 6; Joseph. antt. 
3, 8, 10.) * 

ἀροτριάω, -à ; (ἄροτρον, q. v.) ; to plough: Lk. xvii. 7; 
1Co.ix. 10. (Deut. xxii. 10; [1 K. xix. 19]; Mic. iii. 
12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more 
ancient dpóo ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sq. [W. 24].) * 

ἄροτρον, -ov, τό, (ἀρόω to plough), a plough: Lk. ix. 62. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἁρπαγή. -ῆς, ἡ, (ἁρπάζω), rapine, pillage ; 1. the act 
of plundering, robbery: Heb. x. 34. 2. plunder, spoil : 
Mt. xxiii. 25; Lk. xi. 39. (ds. iii. 14; Nah.ii. 12. In 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἁρπαγμός, -ov, 0, (ἁρπάζω) ; 1. the act of seizing, rob- 
bery, (so Plut. de lib. educ. c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a. 
the only instance of its use noted in prof. auth.). 2i 
a thing seized or to be seized, booty: ἁρπαγμὸν ἡγεῖσθαί τι 
to deem anything a prize, — a thing to be seized upon 
or to be held fast, retained, Phil. ii. 6; on the meaning 
of this pass. see μορφή ; (ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι ἅρπαγμα, 
Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2; vit. Const. 2, 31; [Comm. in Luc. 
vi. cf. Mai, Nov. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165]; Heliod. 7, 11 
and 20; 8, 7; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1,8 p. 830 d.]; ut om- 
nium bona praedam tuam duceres, Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 15, 39 ; 
[see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. 111) ; Wetstein 
ad loc. ; Cremer 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.])-* 

ἁρπάζω ; fut. ἁρπάσω [ Veitch s. v. ; cf. Rutherford, New 
Phryn. p. 407]; 1 aor. praca; Pass., 1 aor. ἡρπάσθην ; 
2 aor. ἡρπάγην (2 Co. xii. 2, 4; Sap. iv. 11; cf. W. 83 
(80); [B. 54 (47); WH. App. p. 170]); 2 fut. ἁρπαγή- 
copa; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius $ 331); fr. Hom. down]; 
to seize, carry off by force: τί, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see 
διαρπάζω)]; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one's self 
eagerly: τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6, 
5, 18, ete.) ; to snatch out or away: τί, Mt. xiii. 19; τὶ ἐκ 
χειρός τινος, In. x. 28 sq.; τινὰ ἐκ πυρός, proverbial, to 
rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am. 
iv.11; Zech. iii. 2); τινά, to seize and carry off speedily, 
Jn. vi. 15; Acts xxiii. 10; used of divine power trans- 


ἅρπαξ 


ferring a person marvellously and swiftly from one place 
to another, to snatch or catch away : Acts vill. 39; pass. 
πρὸς τ. θεόν, Rev. xii. 5; foll. by ἕως with gen. of place, 
2 Co. xii. 2; εἰς τ. παράδεισον, 2 Co. xii. 4; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 
Th. iv. 17. [Cowr.: 6:-, συν-αρπάζω. ]* 

ἅρπαξ, -ayos, 6, adj., rapacious, ravenous : Mt. vii. 15; 
Lk. xviii. 11; as subst. a robber, an extortioner: 1 Co. v. 
10 sq.; vi. 10. (In both uses fr. [ Arstph. ], Xen. down.)* 

ἀρραβών [Tdf. ἀραβών : 2 Co. i. 22 (so Lchm.); v. 5, 
(but not in Eph. i. 14), see his Proleg. p. 80; WZI. App. 
p. 148; ef. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; B. 32 (28 sq.) ; cf. P, p ], -Gvos; 6, 
(Hebr. 7137), Gen. xxxviii. 17 sq. 20; fr. 5} to 
pledge; a word which seems to have passed from the 
Pheenicians to the Greeks, and thence into Latin), an 
carnest, i. e. money which in purchases is given as a 
pledge that the full amount will subsequently be paid 
[Suid. s. v. ἀραβών], (cf. [obs. Eng. earlespenny ; caution- 
money], Germ. Kaufschilling, Haftpfennig) : 2 Co. 1. 22: 
v. 5, τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ πνεύματος i. e. τὸ πνεῦμα ὡς ἀρρα- 
Bava sc. τῆς κληρονομίας, as is expressed in full in Eph. 
i. 14 [cf. W. $59, 8a.; B. 78 (68)]; for the gift of the 
Holy Spirit, comprising as it does the δυνάμεις τοῦ ped- 
Aovros αἰῶνος (Heb. vi. 5), is both a foretaste and a 
pledge of future blessedness ; οἵ. 5. v. ἀπαρχή, c. [D.D. 
s. v. Earnest.] (Isae. 8, 23 [p. 210 ed. Reiske]; Aristot. 
pol. 1, 4, 5 [ p. 1259", 12]; al) * 

ἄρραφος, ‘I’ Tr WHI ἄραφος (cf. W. 48; B. 32 (29); 
[WH. App. p. 163; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; cf. P, p]), -ov, 
(ῥάπτω to sew together), not sewed together, without a 
seam: Jn. xix. 23.* 

ἄρρην, see ἄρσην. 

ἄρ-ρητος, -ov, (ῥητός, fr. PEQ); a. unsaid, unspoken: 
Tom. Od. 14, 466, and often in Attic. b. unspeakable 
(on account of its sacredness), (Hdt. 5, 83, and often in 
other writ.): 2 Co. xii. 4, explained by what follows: 
à οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι." 

ἄρρωστος, -ον, (ῥώννυμι, q. v.), without strength, weak; 
Sick: Mt. xiv. 14; Mk. vi. 5, 13; xvi.18; 1 Co. xi. 30. 
([Hippoer.], Xen., Plut.) * 

ἀρσενοκοίτης, -ov, ὁ, (ἄρσην a male; κοίτη a bed), one 
who lies with a male as with a female, a sodomite: 1 Co. 
vi. 9; 1 Tim.i.10. (Anthol. 9, 686, 5; eccl. writ.) * 

ἄρσην, -evos, 6, ἄρσεν, Td, also (ace. to R G in Rev. xii. 
5, 13, and in many edd., that of Tdf. included, in Ro. i. 
27° ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 78; [W. 297) ἄρρην, 
-evos, 6, ἄρρεν, τό, [ἔν. Hom. down], male: Mt. xix. 4; 
Mk. x. 6; Lk. ii. 23; Ro.i. 27; Gal. iii. 28; Rev. xii. 5, 
13 (where Lehm. reads dpoevay; on which Alex. form 
of the ace. cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; 66 (64) ; Mullach p. 22 [ef. 
p. 162]; B.13 (12); [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 36; Tdf. Proleg. 
p. 118 (and Inserr. as there referred to); WH. App. p. 
157; Serivener, Collation etc. p. liv.]).* 

᾿Αρτεμᾶς, -à, 6, (abbreviated fr. ᾿Αρτεμίδωρος [i. e. gift 
of Artemis], cf. W. 102 (97); [B. 20 (17 sq.); Lob. 
Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 sq. ; Chandler § 321), Artemas, a 
friend of Paul the apostle: Tit. iii. 12. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]* 

Ἄρτεμις, τιδὸος and -tos, 7, Artemis, that is to say, 
the so-called Tauric or Persian or Ephesian Ar- 


15 








» 
apros 


temis, the goddess of many Asiatic peoples, to be dis- 
tinguished from the Artemis of the Greeks, the sister of 
Apollo; cf. Grimm on 2 Macc. p. 39; [ B. D. s. v. Diana]. 
A very splendid temple was built to her at Ephesus, 
which was set on fire by Herostratus and reduced to 
ashes; but afterwards, in the time of Alexander the 
Great, it was rebuilt in a style of still greater maenifi- 
cence: Acts xix. 24, 27 sq. 34 sq. Cf. Stark in Schenkel 
i. p. 604 sq. s. v. Diana; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, 
Lond. 1877 ].* 

&prépov, -ovos (1, Τ Tr WH -avos, cf. W. $9,1d.; [B. 
24 (22)]), 6, top-sail [or foresail ?] of a ship: Acts xxvii. 
40; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. 
of St. Paul, p. 192 sq.; Graser in the Philologus, 3d 
suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq. ].* 

ἄρτι, adv., acc. to its deriv. (fr. APO to draw close to- 
gether, to join, Lat. arto; [cf. Curtius $ 4887) denoting 
time closely connected ; 1. in Attie “just now, this 
moment, (Germ. gerade, eben), marking something begun 
or finished even now, just before the time in which we 
are speaking " (Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20): Mt. ix. 18; 
1 Th. iii. 6, and perhaps Rev. xii. 10. 2. acc. to later 
Grk. usage univ. now, at this time; opp. to past time: 
Jn. ix. 19, 25; xiii. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal.i.9sq. opp. 
to future time: Jn. xiii. 37; xvi. 12, 31; 2 Th. ii. 7; opp. 
to fut. time subsequent to the return of Christ: 1 Co. 
xiii. 12; 1 Pet.i.6,8.. of present time most closely lim- 
ited, at this very time, this moment: Mt.ii.15; xxvi. 53; 
Jn. xiii. 7; Gal. iv. 20. ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας, 1 Co. iv. 11; 
ἕως ἄρτι, hitherto; until now, up to this time: Mt. xi. 12; 
Jn. ii. 10; v. 17; xvi. 24; 1 Co. iv. 18 ; viii. 7; xv.6; 1 Jn. 
ii.9. am ἄρτι, see ἀπάρτι above. Cf. Lobeck ad Phryn. 
p. 18 sqq. ; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 70 sq.].* 

[Sxs. ἄρτι, ἤδη, νῦν: Roughly speaking, it may be said 
that ἄρτι just now, even now, properly marks time closely con- 
nected with the present; later, strictly present time, (see 
above, and compare in Eng. “just now” i. e. a moment ago, 
and “ just now " (emphat.) i. e. at this precise time). νῦν now, 
marks a definite point (or period) of time, the (objective) 
immediate present. ἤδη now (already) with a suggested ref- 
erence to some other time or to some expectation, the sub- 
jective present (i.e. so regarded by the writer). ἤδη and 
ἄρτι are associated in 2 Thess. ii. 7; νῦν and ἤδη in 1 Jn. iv. 
3. See Kühner $$ 498, 499; Baumlein, Partikeln, p. 138 sqq. ; 
Ellic. on 1 Thess. iii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. 6.] 

ἀρτι-γέννητος, -ον. (ἄρτι and γεννάω), just born, new- 
born: 1 Pet.ii.2. (Leian. Alex. 13 i Long. past. 1, (7) 
OF ὩΣ (9 As) = 

ἄρτιος, -a, -ov, (APO to fit, [cf. Curtius § 488]) ; 1. 
fitted. 2. complete, perfect, [having reference appar- 
ently to ‘special aptitude for given uses']; so 2 Tim. 
iii. 17, [cf. Ellicott ad loe.; Trench $ xxii] (In Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἄρτος, -ov, 6, (fr. APO to fit, put together, [cf. Etym. 
Magn. 150, 36 — but doubtful]), bread ; Hebr. pm; 
1. food composed of flour mixed with water and baked ; 
the Israelites made it in the form of an oblong or round 
cake, as thick as one’s thumb, and as large as a plate or 


platter (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Backen; [BB.DD.]); 


, , 
apro 


hence it was not cut, but broken (see κλάσις and κλάω) : 
Mt. iv. 3; vii. 9; xiv. 17, 19; Mk. vi.36 [T Tr WH om. 
Lbr.], 37 sq.; Lk. iv. 3; xxiv. 30; Jn. vi. 5 sqq.; Acts 
xxvii. 35, and often; ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως, loaves conse- 
crated to Jehovah, see πρόθεσις ; on the bread used at the 
love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 35]; cf. Mt. xxvi. 
26; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,46; xx. 7; 1 
Co. x. 16 sq.; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and like 
the Hebr. om, food of any kind : Mt. vi. 11; Mk. vi. 8; 
Lk. xi. 3; 2 Co. ix. 10; 6 ἄρτος τῶν τέκνων the food served 
to the children, Mk. vii. 27; ἄρτον φαγεῖν or ἐσθίειν to 
take food, to eat (oN? 558) [W. 33 (32)]: Mk. iii. 20; 
Lk. xiv. 1, 15; Mt. xv. 2; dprov φαγεῖν παρά twos to 
take food supplied by one, 2 Th. iii. 8; τὸν ἑαυτοῦ dpr. 
ἐσθίειν to eat the food which one has procured for him- 
self by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; μήτε ἄρτον ἐσθίων. 
μήτε οἶνον πίνων, abstaining from the usual sustenance, 
or using it sparingly, Lk. vii. 33; τρώγειν τὸν ἄρτον μετά 
twos to be one's table-companion, his familiar friend, Jn. 
xiii. 18 (Ps. xl. (xli.) 10). In Jn. vi. 32-35 Jesus calls him- 
self τὸν ἄρτον τοῦ θεοῦ, τ. d. ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τ. d. τῆς ζωῆς. 
as the divine λόγος, come from heaven, who containing 
in himself the source of heavenly life supplies celestial 
nutriment to souls that they may attain to life eternal. 

&prio: fut. ἀρτύσω ; Pass. pf. ἤρτυμαι; 1 fut. ἀρτυθή- 
cogat; (APQ to fit) ; to prepare, arrange ; often soin Hom. 
In the comic writers and epigrammatists used of pre- 
paring food, to season, make savory, ([rà ὄψα, Aristot. 
eth. Nic. 3, 13 p. 1118", 29]; ἠρτυμένος οἶνος, Theophr. 
de odor. ὃ 51 [frag. 4, ο. 11]); so Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 
34; metaph. ὁ λόγος ἅλατι jprupevos, full of wisdom and 
grace and hence pleasant and wholesome, Col. iv. 6.* 

᾿Αρφαξάδ, 6, Arphaxad, (WWID 8), son of Shem (Gen. 
x. 22, 24; xi. 10, 12, [cf. Jos. antt. 1, 6, 47) : Lk. iii. 36* 

ἀρχ-άγγελος, -ov, 6, (fr. ἄρχι, q. v., and ἄγγελος), a bibl. 
and eccl. word, archangel, i. e. chief of the angels (Hebr. 
^i? chief, prince, Dan. x. 20; xii. 1), or one of the princes 
and leaders of the angels (DivNI oen, Dan. x. 13): 
1 Th. iv. 16; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile dis- 
tinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the 
author of the book of Enoch, ix. 1 sqq.; cf. Dillmann 
ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to 
the four sides of the throne of God) of the hiehest rank; 
but others, and apparently the majority (Tob. xii. 15, 
where ef. Fritzsche: Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven 
(after the pattern of the seven Amshaspands, the high- 
est spirits in the religion of Zoroaster). See s. vv. Γὰ- 
βριήλ and Μιχαήλ." 

ἀρχαῖος, -aia, -αἴον, (fr. ἀρχή beginning, hence) prop. 
that has been from the beginning, original, primeval, old, 
ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions: Lk. ix. 
8,19; Acts xv. 7, 21; xxi. 16; 2 Pet. ii. 5; Rev. xii. 9; 
XX. 2; of ἀρχαῖοι the ancients, the early Israelites: Mt. 
v. 21, 27 [Rec.], 33; τὰ ἀρχαῖα the man's previous moral 
condition: 2 Co. v. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and 
Hdt. down.)* 

[Svs. ἀρχαῖος, παλαιός: in παλ. the simple idea of 
time dominates, while apy. (“ σημαίνει καὶ τὸ ἀρχῆς ἔχεσθαι," 


76 








, la 
ἀρχή 
and so) often carries with it a suggestion of nature or origi- 
nal character. Cf. Schmidt ch. 46; Trench § Ixvii.] 

" Apxé-Aaos, -ov, 6, Archelaus, (fr. ἄρχω and dads, ruling 
the people), a son of Herod the Great by Malthace, the 
Samaritan. He and his brother Antipas were brought 
up with a certain private man at Rome (Joseph. antt. 
17,1, 8). After the death of his father he ruled ten 
years as ethnarch over Judwa, Samaria, and Idumzea, 
(with the exception of the cities Gaza, Gadara, and 
Hippo). TheJews and Samaritans having accused him 
at Rome of tyranny, he was banished by the emperor 
(Augustus) to Vienna of the Allobroges, and died there: 
(Joseph. antt. 17, 9, 3; 11,4; 13, 2; b. j. 2, 7, 3): Mt. 
ii. 22. [See B. D. s. v. and cf. Ἡρώδης." 

ἀρχή, -ῆς, ἡ: [fr. Hom. down], in Sept. mostly equiv. to 
WNT, UN, nnn; a. used 
absolutely, of the beginning of all things: ἐν ἀρχῇ, Jn. i. 
1 sq. (Gen. i. 1); ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, Mt. xix. 4 (with which ef. 
Xen. mem. 1, 4, 5 ὁ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ποιῶν ἀνθρώπους), 8; Jn. 
viii. 44; 1 Jn. i. 1; ii. 13 sq.; iii. 8; more fully ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς 
κτίσεως or κόσμου, Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. x. 6; xiii. 19; 2 Th. 
ii. 13 (where L [Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ἀπαρχήν; q. v.) ; 2 Pet. 
ii. 4; kar ἀρχάς, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26). b. ina 
relative sense, of the beginning of the thing spoken of : 
ἐξ ἀρχῆς, fr. the time when Jesus gathered disciples, Jn. 
vi. 64; xvi.4; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, Jn. xv. 27 (since I appeared in 
public); as soon as instruction was imparted, 1 Jn. ii. 
[7], 24; iii. 11; 2 Jn. 5 sq. ; more fully ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ εὐαγ- 
yeMov, Phil. iv. 15 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2 [see note in 
Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and cf. ] Polyc. ad Philipp. 11, 3); 
from the beginning of the gospel history, Lk. i. 2; from 
the commencement of life, Acts xxvi. 4; ἐν ἀρχῇ; in the 
beginning, when the church was founded, Acts xi. 15. 
The ace. ἀρχήν [cf. W. 124 (118) ; Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 
18] and τὴν ἀρχήν in the Grk. writ. (ef. Lennep ad Pha- 
larid. p. 82 sqq. and p. 94 sqq. ed. Lips.; Briickner in De 
Wette’s Hdbceh. on John p. 151) is often used adver- 
bially, i. q. ὅλως altogether, (properly, an ace. of *direc- 
tion towards’: usque ad initium, [cf. W. 230 (216); B. 
153 (134) ]), commonly followed by a negative, but not 
always [cf. e.g. Dio Cass. frag. 101 (93 Dind.); xlv. 34 
(Dind. vol. ii. p. 194); lix. 20; Ixii. 4; see, further, 
Lycurg. $ 125 ed. Mützner]; hence that extremely diffi- 
cult passage, Jn. viii. 25 rv. . . ὑμῖν, must in my opinion 
be interpreted as follows: J am altogether or wholly (i. e. in 
all respects, precisely) that which I even speak to you (1 
not only am, but also declare to you what I am; therefore 
you have no need to question me), [cf. W. 464 (432); B. 
253 (218)]. ἀρχὴν λαμβάνειν to take beginning, to begin, 
Heb. ii. 3. with the addition of the gen. of the thing 
spoken of : ὠδίνων, Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) [(here 
RG plur.); τῶν σημείων, Jn. ii. 11]; ἡμερῶν, Heb. vii. 35 
Tov εὐαγγελίου, that from which the gospel history took 
its beginning, Mk. i. 1; τῆς ὑποστάσεως, the confidence 
with which we have made a beginning, opp. to uéxpt 
τέλους. Heb. iii. 14. τὰ στοιχεῖα τῆς ἀρχῆς, Heb. v. 12 
(τῆς ἀρχῆς is added for greater explicitness, as in Lat. ru- 
dimenta prima, Liv.1,3; Justin. hist. 7, 5; and prima 


1. beginning, origin; 


ἀρχηγός 


elementa, Horat. sat. 1, 1, 26, ete.); ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ λόγος equiv. to ὁ τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγος ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς, 
i. 6. the instruction concerning Christ such as it was at 
the very outset [cf. W. 188 (177) ; B. 155 (136)], Heb. 
vi.l. 2. the person or thing that commences, the first per- 
son or thing in a series, the leader : Col. i. 18; Rev. i. 8 Rec.; 
xxi. 6; xxii. 13; (Deut. xxi. 17; Job xl. 14 (19), etc.). 
3. that by which anything begins to be, the origin, active 
cause (a sense in which the philosopher Anaximander, 
8th cent. B. C., is said to have been the first to use the 
word; ef. Simpl. on Aristot. phys. f. 9 p. 326 ed. Brandis 
and 32 p. 334 ed. Brandis, [cf. Teichmiiller, Stud. zur 
Gesch. d. Begriffe, pp. 48 sqq. 560 sqq.]): ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς 
κτίσεως, of Christ as the divine λόγος, Rev. iii. 14 (cf. 
Düsterdieck ad loc.; Clem. Al. protrept. 1, p. 6 ed. 
Potter, [p. 30 ed. Sylb.] 6 λόγος ἀρχὴ θεῖα τῶν πάντων ; 
in Evang. Nicod. c. 23 [p. 308 ed. Tdf., p. 736 ed. 
Thilo] the devil is called ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ θανάτου kai ῥίζα 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας). 4. the extremity of a thing: of the cor- 
ners of a sail, Acts x. 11; xi. 5; (Hdt. 4, 60; Diod. 
1, 35; al.). 5. the first place, principality, rule, magis- 
tracy, [cf. Eng. ‘ authorities"], (ἄρχω τινός) : Lk. xii. 11; 
xx. 20; Tit. iii. 1; office given in charge (Gen. xl. 13, 21; 
2 Macc. iv. 10, etc.), Jude 6. Hence the term is trans- 
ferred by Paul to angels and demons holding dominions 
entrusted to them in the order of things (see ἄγγελος, 
2 [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 21]): 
Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. i. 21; iii. 10; vi. 12; 
Col.i.16;ii1.10, 15. See ἐξουσία, 4 c. BB. * 

ἀρχηγός, -óv, adj., leading, furnishing the first cause or 
occasion: Eur. Hipp. 881; Plat. Crat. p. 401 d.; chiefly 
used as subst. 6, ἡ, ἀρχηγός, (ἀρχή and ἄγω) ; 1. the 
chief leader, prince: of Christ, Acts v. 31; (Aeschyl. 
Ag. 259; Thue. 1, 132; Sept. Is. iii. 5 sq.; 2 Chr. xxiii. 
14, and often). 2. one that takes the lead in any thing 
(1 Mace. x. 47 apy. λόγων εἰρηνικῶν) and thus affords an 
example, a predecessor in a matter: τῆς πίστεως. of Christ, 
Heb. xii. 2 (who in the pre-eminence of his faith far sur- 
passed the examples of faith commemorated in ch. xi.), 
[4]. bring this under the next head; yet cf. Kurtz ad 
loc.]. So ἀρχηγός ἁμαρτίας, Mic. i. 13; ζήλους, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1; τῆς στάσεως kai διχοστασίας. ibid. 51, 
1; τῆς ἀποστασίας, of the devil, Iren. 4, 40, 1; τοιαύτης 
φιλοσοφίας, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 983° 20]. 
Hence 3. the author : τῆς ζωῆς, Acts iii. 15; τῆς σωτη- 
pias, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : τῶν πάντων, 
of God, [Plato] Tim. Loer. p. 96 c.; τοῦ γένους τῶν ἀν- 
θρώπων, of God, Diod. 5, 72; ἀρχηγὸς καὶ αἴτιος, leader and 
author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, 66, 10; Hdian. 2, 6, 
22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.1, p.301 sq.* 

ἄρχι, (fr. ἄρχω, dpxós), an inseparable prefix, usually 
to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who 
is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Ober-, 
Erz, [Eng. arch- (chief-, high-)]), as ἀρχάγγελος, ἀρχι- 
ποίμην [q. v.], ἀρχιερεύς, ἀρχίατρος, ἀρχιευνοῦχος, ἀρχυπε- 
ρέτης (in Egypt. inscriptions), etc., most of which belong 
to Alexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. Thiersch, De Pen- 
tateuchi versione Alex. p. 77 sq. 


TT 








ἀρχιερεύς 


ἀρχ-ιερατικός, -7, -όν, (ἄρχι and ἱερατικός, and this fr. 
ἱεράομαι [to be a priest ]), high-priestly, pontifical : γένος, 
Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inserr. Graec. no. 4363; see Schürer 
as cited s. v. ἀρχιερεύς, 2fin.]. (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 7; 6, 
6, 3; 15, 8, 1.)* 

ἀρχ-ιερεύς, -ews, 6, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who 
above all others was honored with the title of priest, the 
chief of the priests, 917377 {715 (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. xxxv. 
25, [later WNIT 133, 2 K. xxv. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 11, ete.]) : 
Mt. xxvi. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the 
Ep.tothe Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the 
common duties of the priesthood; but his chief duty 
was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the 
Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex- 
cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins 
of the people (Lev. xvi.; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside 
over the Sanhedrin, or supreme Council, when convened 
for judicial deliberations (Mt. xxvi 3; Acts xxii. 5; 
xxiii. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could 
aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe 
of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly 
family ; and he on whom the office was conferred held 
it tilldeath. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes, 
when the kings of the Seleucide and afterwards the 
Herodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them- 
selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office 
neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was 
conferred on any one for life; but it became venal, and 
could be transferred from one to another according to 
the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to, 
pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter- 
vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of 
the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical 
dignity (Joseph. antt. 20, 10; see "Avvas). Cf. Win. 
R W B. s. v. Hoherpriester; Oehler in Herzog vi. p. 198 _ 
sqq-; [BB.DD. s. vv. Highpriest, Priest, ete. The 
names of the 28 (27?) above alluded to are given, to- 
gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schiirer 
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597—607]. 2. The 
plur. ἀρχιερεῖς, which occurs often in the Gospels and 
Acts,as Mt.ii.4; xvi. 21; xxvi. 3; xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 31; 
xiv. 14 xv. 1; Lk. xix. 47; xxii. 52, 66; xxiii. 4; xxiv. 20; 
Jn. vii. 32; xi. 57; xviii. 35; Actsiv. 23; v. 24; ix. 14, 
21; xxii. 30; xxiii. 14, ete., and in Josephus, comprises, 
in addition to the one actually holding the high-priestly 
office, both those who had previously discharged it and 
although deposed continued to have great power in the 
State (Joseph. vita 38; b. j. 2, 12,6; 4,3, 7; 9; 4,4, 3; 
see" Avvas above), as well as the members of the families 
from which hich-priests were created, provided they had 
much influence in publie affairs (Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 2). 
See on this point the learned discussion by Schiirer, Die 
ἀρχιερεῖς im N. T., in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, p. 
593 sqq. and in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. $ 23 iii. p. 407 
sqq. [Prof. Schürer, besides reviewing the opinions of 
the more recent writers, contends that in no instance 
where indubitable reference to the heads of the twenty- 


| four classes is made (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv. 


ἀρχιποίμην 


3 sq.; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 14; Ezra x. 5; Neh. xii. 7; nor in 
Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called ἀρχιερεῖς ; that the 
nearest approximations to this term are periphrases 
such as ἄρχοντες τῶν ἱερέων, Neh. xii. 7, or φύλαρχοι τῶν 
ἱερέων, Esra apocr. (1 Esdr.) viii. 92 (94) ; Joseph. antt. 
11. 5, 4; and that the word ἀρχιερεῖς was restricted in its 
application to those who actually held, or had held, the 
high-priestly office, together with the members of the 
few prominent families from which the high-priests still 
continued to be selected, cf. Acts iv. 6; Joseph. b. 1. 4, 
3, 6.] 3. In the Ep. to the Heb. Christ is called 
* high-priest, because by undergoing a bloody death he 
offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and 
has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually 
intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17; iii. 1; iv. 14; v. 10; 
vi. 20; vii. 26; viii. 1; ix. 11; ef. Winzer, De sacerdotis 
officio, quod Christo tribuitur in Ep. ad Hebr. (three 
Programs), Leips. 1825 sq. ; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des He- 
brüerbriefes, ii. pp. 431—488. In Grk. writ. the word is 
used by Hadt. 2, [(37), 142,] 143 and 151; Plat. legg. 12 
p. 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5; Plut. Numa c. 9, 
al.; [often in Inserr.]; once (viz. Lev. iv. 3) in the 
Sept., where ἱερεὺς μέγας is usual, in the Ὁ. T. Apocr. 1 
Esdr. v. 40; ix. 40, and often in the bks. of Mace. 

ἀρχι-ποίμην, -evos [so L T Tr WILKC (after Mss.), but 
Grsb. al. -μήν, -μένος ; cf. Lob. Paralip. p 195 sq. ; Steph. 
Thesaur. s. v. ; Chandler § 580], 6, a bibl. word [Test. 
xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8], chief shepherd: of Christ the 
head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4; see ποιμήν, b.* 

" Apxurros [Chandler § 308], του, ὁ, [i. e. master of the 
horse], Archippus, a certain Christian at Colosse : Col. 
iv. 17; Philem. 2. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 
and Philem. p. 308 sq.]* 

ἀρχισυνάγωγος, -ov, ὁ, (συναγωγή). ruler of a synagogue, 
no32n wo: Mk. v. 22, 35 sq. 38; Lk. viii. 49 ; xiii. 14; 
Acts xiii. 15; xviii. 8, 17. It was his duty to select the 
readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the 
discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all 
things were done with decency and in accordance with 
ancestral usage; [ef. Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Synagogue]. 
(Not found in prof. writ.; [yet Schürer (Theol. Literatur- 
Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inserr. Graec. no 2007 f. 
(Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221* (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894, 
9906; Mommsen, Inserr. Regni Neap.no. 3657; Garrucci, 
Cimitero deeli antichi Ebrei, p. 67; Lampridius, Vita 
Alexandr. Sever. c. 28; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. c 8; 
Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in 
Tdf/s Ev. Apoer. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275, 284; Justin. 
dial. e. Tryph. c. 137; Epiph. haer. 30, 18; Euseb. h. e. 
7, 10, 4 ; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden 
in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt 
(Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq.]-) * 

ἀρχιτέκτων, -ovos, 6, (τέκτων. q. v.), a master-builder, 
architect, the superintendent in the erection of buildings : 
1 Co. iii. 10. (Hdt., Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.; Is. 
iil. 8; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Macc. ii. 29.) * 

ἀρχι-τελώνης, -ov, 6, a chief of the tax-collectors, chief 
publican: Lk. xix. 2. [See redwrns.]* 


* 78 








ἄρχω 


dpxt-rplkAwos, -ov, 6, (τρίκλινον [or -vos (sc. οἶκος), a room 
with three couches ]), ‘he superintendent of a dining-room, 
a τρικλινιάρχης. table-master: Jn. ii. 8 sq. [ef. B.D. s. v. 
Governor]. It differs from “the master of a feast,” 
συμποσιάρχης: toast-master, who was one of the guests se- 
lected by lot to prescribe to the rest the mode of drink- 
ing; ef. Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 1. But it was the duty of 
the ἀρχιτρίκλινος to place in order the tables and couches, 
arrange the courses, taste the food and wine beforehand, 
ete. (Heliod. 7, 27.) [Some regard the distinetion be- 
tween the two words as obliterated in later Grk.; cf. 
Soph. Lex. s. v., and Schaff's Lange's Com. on Jn. 1. 6.1" 

ἄρχομαι, see dpxo. 

ἄρχω ; [fr. Hom. down]; to be first. 1. to be the first 
to do (anything), to begin, — a sense not found in the 
Grk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler : twos [B. 169 
(147)], Mk. x. 42; Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10). See ἄρχων. 
Mid., pres. ἄρχομαι ; fut. ἄρξομαι (once [twice], Lk. xiii. 
26 [but not Tr mrg. WH mrg.; xxiii. 30]) ; 1 aor. 7p£d- 
μην; to begin, make a beginning: ἀπό twos, Acts x. 37 
[B. 79 (69) ; cf. Matth. $ 558]; 1 Pet. iv. 17; by bra- 
chylogy ἀρξάμενος ἀπό twos ἕως τινός for, having begun 
from some person or thing (and continued or continu- 
ing) to some person or thing: Mt. xx. 8; Jn. viii. 9 [i. e. 
Rec.]; Actsi. 22; cf. W. $ 66, 1 c.; [B. 374 (320)]; ap£d- 
μενον is used impers. and absol. a beginning being made, 
Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Hdt. 3, 91; cf. W. 624 (580) ; [B. 374 
sq. (321)]); carelessly, ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ Μωυσέως καὶ ἀπὸ 
πάντων προφητῶν διηρμήνευεν for, beginning from Mo- 
ses he went through all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27; W. 
$67, 2; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. ὧν ἤρξατο ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδά- 
σκειν, ἄχρι hs ἡμέρας which he began and continued both 
to do and to teach, until ete., Acts i. 1 [W. $ 66, 1 c.; B. 
τι. 5.71. "Apxopac is connected with an inf. and that so of- 
ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter- 
preters thought it constituted a periphrasis for the finite 
form of the verb standing in the inf., as ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν 
for ἐκήρυξε. But through the influence principally of 
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), cf. W. § 65, 7 d., it is now 
conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was 
a rash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example 
which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes : 
a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im- 
portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word: 
Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ 
began to speak concerning John, which he did not do 
while they were present); Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin 
to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) 3 
Lk. xv. 14 (the beginning of want followed hard upon the 
squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28; 2 Co. iii. 1; esp. 
when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its 
continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7; viii. 31 (cf. ix. 
31; x. 33 sq.); or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp. 
to ἐκτελέσαι) ; Jn. xiii. 5 (cf. 12). b. apy. denotes some- 
thing as begun by some one, others following : Acts xxvii. 
35sq.[W. $65,7d.]. c. apy. indicates that a thing was 
but just becun when it was interrupted by something 
else: Mt. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of corn, 


ἄρχων 


but they were prevented from continuing by the inter- 
ference of the Pharisees); Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered 
before all had finished), 74; Mk. ii. 23; iv. 1 (he had 
searcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto 
him); Mk. vi. 2; x. 41; Lk. y. 21 ; xii. 45 sq.; xiii. 25; 
Acts xi. 15 (cf. x. 44); xviii. 26, and often. d. the ac- 
tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have 
been mentioned; but in order that the more attention 
may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer 
to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be- 
ginning, is expressly pointed out: Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xiv. 
18; Acts ii. 4, etc. e. dpx. occurs in a sentence which 
has grown out of the blending of two statements: Mt. iv. 
17; xvi. 21 (fr. ἀπὸ τότε exnpv&e... ἔδειξε, and τότε 
ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν ... δεικνύειν). The inf. is wanting 
when discoverable from the context: ἀρχόμενος, sc. to 
discharge the Messianie office, Lk. iii. 23 [W. 349 
(328)]; ἀρξάμενος sc. λέγειν, Acts xi. 4. [Comp.: ἐν- 
(μαι), προ-εν-(-μαι), ὑπ-, προ-ῦπ -ápxo- | 

ἄρχων, -ovros, 6, (pres. ptep. of the verb ἄρχω), [fr. 
Aeschyl. down], a ruler, commander, chief, leader : used 
of Jesus, ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς, Rev. i. 5; of the 
rulers of nations, Mt. xx. 25; Acts iv. 26; vii. 35; 
univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3; Acts xxiii. 5; espe- 
cially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (where note 
the antithesis: whom they refused as ἄρχοντα kai δικα- 
στήν, him God sent as dpyovra— leader, ruler— kai Avrpo- 
τήν); Acts xvi. 19.- of ἄρχοντες τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, those 
who in the present age (see αἰών, 3) by nobility of birth, 
learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the 
greatest influence, whether among Jews or Gentiles, 1 Co. 
ii. 6, 8; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 sqq. Of the members 
of the Jewish Sanhedrin: Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20; 
Jn. iii. 1; vii.26, 48; xii.42; Actsiii. 17; iv. 5, 8; xiii. 
27; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues : 
Mt. ix. 18,23; Lk. viii. 41 (ἄρχων τῆς συναγωγῆς, cf. Mk. 
v. 22 ἀρχισυνάγωγος). and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18; 
ἄρχων τῶν Φαρισαίων, one who has great influence among 
the Pharisees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devil, the prince of 
evil spirits: (6) ἄρχων τῶν δαιμονίων, Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24; 
Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15 ; 6 dpx. τοῦ κόσμου, the ruler of the 
irreligious mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31; xiv. 30; xvi. 11, 
(in rabbin. writ. Dyn Ww; apy. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, 
Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad Magn. 1, 3]; ἄρχων τοῦ καιροῦ 
τῆς ἀνομίας, Barn. Ep. 18, 2) ; τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρος, Eph. 
ii. 2 (see anp).* 

ἄρωμα, -ros, τό, (fr. APO to prepare, whence ἀρτύω to 
season; [al connect it with r. ar (dpóc) to plouch (cf. 
Gen. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume: Mk. xvi. 1; Lk. 
xxiii. 56; xxiv.1; Jn. xix.40. (2 K. xx. 13; Esth. ii. 12; 
Cant.iv.10,16. [Hippocr.], Xen., Theophr. and subseq. 
writ.) * 

"Acá, 6, (Chald. NDN to cure), Asa, king of Judah, son 
of king Abijah (1 K. xv. 8 sqq.): Mt.i.7 sq. [LT Tr 
WH read ᾿Ασάφ q. v.]* 

ἀσαίνω : in 1 Th. iii. 3, Kuenen and Cobet (in their 
N. T. ad fidem cod. Vat., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xc.]), fol- 
lowing Lehm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J. 


19 


ἀσέλγεια 


J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck. Opusce. 
ii. 246-249] in his larger edit., conjectured and received 
into their text μηδὲν ἀσαίνεσθαι, which they think to be 
equiv. to ἄχθεσθαι, χαλεπῶς φέρειν. But there is no ne- 
cessity for changing the Rec. (see σαίνω, 2 b. 8.), nor can 
it be shown that ἀσαίνω is used by Grk. writ. for doác.* 

ἀ σάλευτος, -ov, (σαλεύω), unshaken, unmoved : prop. 
Acts xxvii. 41; metaph. βασιλεία, not liable to disorder 
and overthrow, firm, stable, Heb. xii. 28. (Eur. Bacch. 
391; ἐλευθερία, Diod. 2, 48 ; εὐδαιμονία, ibid. 3, 47 ; ἡσυχία, 
Plat. Ax. 370 d.; Plut., al.) * 

"Acad, ὁ, (28 collector), a man's name, a clerical 
error for R G 'Aad (q. v.), adopted by L T Tr WH in 
Mt. i. 7 sq;* 

ἄσβεστος, -ov, (σβέννυμι), unquenched (Ovid, inexstine- 
tus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis) : πῦρ, Mt. iii. 
12; Lk.ii. 17; Mk.ix.43, and R ἃ L br. in45. (Often 
in Hom. ; πῦρ ἄσβ. of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 76; [of the fire on the altar, Philo de 
ebriet. $ 34 (Mang. i. 378) ; de viet. off. § 5 (Mang. ii. 
254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15, (3) 155 see 
also Plut. symp. l. vii. probl. 4; Aelian. nat. an. 5,3; cf. 
Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 15].) * 

ἀσέβεια, -as, 7, (ἀσεβής, 4. v.), want of reverence towards 
God, impiety, ungodliness: Ro. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit. 
*ii. 12; plur. ungodly thoughts and deeds, Ro. xi. 26 (fr. 
Is. lix. 20) ; rà ἔργα ἀσεβείας [Treg. br. doeB.] works of 
ungodliness, a Hebraism, Jude 15, cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. 
$132, 10]; ai ἐπιθυμίαι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν their desires to do 
ungodly deeds, Jude 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur.], Plat. 
and Xen. down; in the Sept. it corresponds chiefly to 
pwa.)* 

ἀσεβέω, -G; 1 aor. ἠσέβησα; (ἀσεβής, q. v.); from 
[Aeschyl.], Xen. and Plato down; to be ungodly, act im- 
piously: 2 Pet. ii. 6; ἀσεβεῖν ἔργα ἀσεβείας [ Treg. br. 
ἀσεβείας], Jude 15, cf. W. 222 (209); [B. 149 (130)]. 
(Equiv. to pw, Zeph. iii. 11; pw, Dan. ix. 5.) * 

ἀσεβής, -és, (σέβω to reverence); fr. Aeschyl and 
"Thuc. down, Sept. for pw; destitute of reverential awe 
towards God, contemning God, impious: Ro. iv. 5; v. 65 
1 Tim. i. 9 (joined here with ἁμαρτωλός, as in 1 Pet. iv. 
18); 2 Pet. ii. 5; iii. 7; Jude 4, 15.* 

ἀσέλγεια, -as, 7, the conduct and character of one who 
is ἀσελγής (a word which some suppose to be com- 
pounded of a priv. and SéAyn, the name of a city in Pi- 
sidia whose citizens excelled in strictness of morals [so 
Etym. Magn. 152, 38; per contra cf. Suidas 603 d.]; 
others of a intens. and σαλαγεῖν to disturb, raise a din; 
others, and now the majority, of a priv. and σέλγω i. q. 
Oc Xyo, not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), un- 
bridled lust, excess, licentiousness, lasciviousness, wanton- 
ness, outrageousness, shamelessness, insolence : Mk. vii. 
22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken 
of); of gluttony and venery, Jude 4; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3; 
2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. ἀπωλείαις), 18; of carnality, 
lasciviousness : 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 19; Eph.iv. 19; 2 
Pet. ii. 7; plur. “wanton (acts or) manners, as filthy 
words, indecent bodily movements, unchaste handling of 


ἄσημος 


males and females, ete.” (Fritzsche), Ro. xiii. 13. (In 
bibl. Grk. besides only in Sap. xiv. 26 and 3 Mace. ii. 26. 
Among Grk. writ. used by Plat., Isoer. et sqq.; at length 
by Plut. [Lucull. 38] and Leian. [dial. meretr. 6] of the 
wantonness of women [Lob. ad Phryn. p.184n.].) Cf. 
Tittmann i. p. 151 sq.; [esp. Trench § xvi.].* 

ἄσημος, -ov, (σῆμα a mark), unmarked or unstamped 
(money); unknown, of no mark, insignificant, ignoble : 
Acts xxi. 39. (3 Mace. i. 3; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; 
trop. fr. Eur. down.) * 

᾿Ασήρ, 6, an indecl. Hebr. prop. name, (ws [i. e. hap- 
py, Gen. xxx. 13]), (in Joseph. “Aonpos, -ov, 6), Asher, 
the eighth son of the patriarch Jacob: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. 
Vil. 6.* 

ἀσθένεια, -as, ἡ, (ἀσθενής). [fr. Hdt. down], want of 
strength, weakness, infirmity; a. of Body; a. its native 
weakness and frailty: 1 Co. xv.43; 2 Co. xiii.4. f. feeble- 
ness of health ; sickness: Jn. v. 5; xi. 4; Lk. xiii. 11, 12; 
Gal. iv. 13 (ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός) ; Heb. xi. 34; in plur.: 
Mt. viii. 17; Lk.v.15; viii.2; Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Tim. v. 
23. b. of Soul; want of the strength and capacity re- 
quisite a. to understand a thing: Ro. vi. 19 (where ag. 
σαρκός denotes the weakness of human nature). . to do 
things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of 
skill in speaking, in the management of men: 1 Co. ii. 
3. y. to restrain corrupt desires; proclivity to sin : Heb. 
v. 2; vii. 28; plur. the various kinds of this proclivity, 
Heb. iv. 15. 8.to bear trials and troubles: Ro. viii. 26 
(where read τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ for Rec. rais ἀσθενείαις) ; 2 Co. 
xi. 30; xii. 9; plur. the mental [?] states in which this 
weakness manifests itself: 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sq.* 

do8evéo, - ; impf. ἠσθένουν ; pf. ἠσθένηκα (2 Co. xi. 21 
LT TrWH); 1aor.706évgca; (ἀσθενής. ; [fr. Eur. down]; 
to be weak, feeble; univ. to be without strength, power- 
less: Ro. viii. 3; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab- 
stains from the use of his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4; and 
of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co. 
xiii. 9; contextually, to be unable to wield and hold sway 
over others, 2 Co. xi. 21; by oxymoron, ὅταν ἀσθενῶ, τότε 
δυνατός εἰμι when I am weak in human strength, then am 
I strong in strength divine, 2 Co. xii. 105 εἴς τινα, to be 
weak towards one, 2 Co. xiii. 3; with a dat. of the respect 
added: πίστει, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19; πίστει, to 
be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris- 
tian, Ro. xiv. 1; simple ἀσθενεῖν with the same idea sug- 
gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br.]; 1 Co. 
viii. 9 Rec., 11 sq.; τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ ; who is 
weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law- 
ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of 
the same weakness? 2 Co. xi. 29. contextually, to be 
weak in means, needy, poor: Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph. 
pax 636]; Eur. in Stob. 145 vol. ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), cf. 
De Wette [more fully Hackett, per contra Meyer] ad 
loc. Specially of debility in health : with νόσοις added, 
Lk. iv. 40; simply, to be feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [R G Tr 
mrg. br.]; Mt. xxv. 36, 39 L txt. T Tr WH ; Jn.iv. 46; 
xi. 1-3, 6; Acts ix. 37; Phil. ii. 26 sq.; 2 Tim. iv. 20; 
Jas. v. 14; of ἀσθενοῦντες, and ἀσθενοῦντες, the sick, sick 


80 





᾿Ασιάρχης 


folks: Mt. x. 8; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. ix. 2 Rec.; Jn. v. 8, 7, 


19 ΠΕ τ vi. 95 Acts xix. 12.* 

ἀσθένημα, -aros, τό, (ἀσθενέω), infirmity: Ro. xv. 1 
(where used of error arising from weakness of mind). 
[In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11, 7 vol. i. 638%, 
37; gen. an. 1, 18 ibid. p. 726* 15.]* 

ἀσθενής, -és, (τὸ σθένος strength), weak, infirm, feeble ; 
[fr. Pind. down]; a. univ.: Mt. xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38; 
1 Pet. iii. 7; τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ, the act of God in which 
weakness seems to appear, viz. that the suffering of the 
cross should be borne by the Messiah,1 Co. i. 25. b. spee.: 
contextually, unable to achieve anything great, 1 Co. iv. 
10; destitute of power among then, 1 Co. i. 27 [Lehm. 
br.]; weaker and inferior, μέλος, 1 Co. xii. 22; sluggish 
in doing right, Ro. v. 6; wanting in manliness and dig- 
nity, 2 Co. x. 10; used of the religious systems anterior 
to Christ, as having no power to promote piety and sal- 
vation, Gal. iv. 9; Heb. vii. 18; wanting in decision 
about things lawful and unlawful (see ἀσθενέω), 1 Co. 
va. 7, 9 Τὺ Dr WH, 105 ix. 59... Ὁ ΠΡ Ὑυ- 14. Ὁ" of 
the body, feeble, sick: Mt. xxv. 39 R G L mrg., 43 sq.; 
Lk. ix. 2 L Tr br.; x. 9; Aetsiy. 9; v. 15 sq.; 1 Co. 
xi. 30.* 

" Acta, -as, ἡ, Asia; 1. Asia proper, ἡ ἰδίως kaXov- 
μένη Acta (Ptol. 5, 2), or proconsular Asia[often so called 
from the 16th cent. down; but correctly speaking it was 
a provincia c o nsularis, although the ruler of it was vested 
with *proconsular power. The ‘Asia’ of the N. T. 
must not be confounded with the ‘Asia proconsularis * 
of the 4th cent.], embracing Mysia, Lydia, Phrygia and 
Caria [ef. Cic. pro Flac. c. 27]: Acts vi. 9 [L om. Tr mrg. 
br.]; xvi. 6 sqq.; 1 Pet. i. 1; Rev.i.4; and, apparently, Acts 
xix. 26; xx. 16; 2 Co. i. 8; 2 Tim. i.15,ete. Cf. Win. 
R W B.s. v. Asien; Stark in Schenkel i. p. 261 sq. ; [BB. 
DD. s. v. Asia; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii.; 
Wieseler, Chron. d. apost. Zeit. p. 31 sqq.]. 2. A 
part of proconsular Asia, embracing Mysia, Lydia, and 
Caria, (Plin. h. n. 5, 27, (28) [al. 5, 100]) : Acts ii. 9. 

᾽᾿Ασιανός, -οῦὔ, 6, a native of Asia, Asian, Asiatic: Acts 
xx. 4. [(Thue,, al.)]* 

᾿Ασιάρχης, -ov, ὁ, an Asiarch, President of Asia: Acts 
xix. 31. Each of the cities of proconsular Asia, at the 
autumnal equinox, assembled its most honorable and 
opulent citizens, in order to select one to preside over 
the games to be exhibited that year, at his expense, in 
honor of the gods and the Roman emperor. ‘Thereupon 
each city reported the name of the person selected to a 
general assembly held in some leading city, as Ephesus, 
Smyrna, Sardis. This general council, called τὸ κοινόν, 
selected ten out of the number of candidates, and sent 
them to the proconsul; and the proconsul, apparently, 
chose one of these ten to preside over the rest. This 
explains how it is that in Acts 1. 6. several Asiarchs 
are spoken of, while Eusebius h. e. 4, 15, 27 mentions 
only one; [perhaps also the title outlasted the ser- 
vice]. Cf. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. s. v. 
Asiarchen; [BB.DD. s. v.; but esp. Le Bas et Wadding- 
ton, Voyage Archéol. Inserr. part. v. p. 244 sq.; Kun, 


EB , 
ALG UT LG, 


Die stüdtische τι. bürgerl. Verf. des rém. Reichs, i. 106 
sqq. ; Marquardt, Rom. Staatsverwalt. i. 374 sqq.; Stark 
in Schenkel i. 263; esp. Bp. Lght/t. Polycarp, p. 987 sqq. ].* 

ἀσιτία, -as, ἡ, (ἄσιτος q. V-), abstinence from food (wheth- 
er voluntary or enforced) : πολλή long, Acts xxvii. 21. 
(Hdt. 3, 52; Eur. Suppl. 1105; [ Aristot. probl. 10,35; 
eth. Nic. 10 p. 1180°, 9]; Joseph. antt. 12, 7; al.)* 

ἄσιτος. -ov, (σῖτος), fasting; without having eaten: Acts 
xxvii. 33. (Hom. Od. 4, 788; then fr. Soph. and Thuc. 
down.)* 

dckéo, -ῶ; 1. to form by art, to adorn; in Homer. 
2. to exercise (one's self), take pains, labor, strive ; foll. 
by an inf. (as in Xen. mem. 2, 1, 6; Cyr. 5, 5, 12, etc.) : 
Acts xxiv. 16.* 

ἀσκός, -00, 6, a leathern bag or bottle, in which water or 
wine was kept: Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37 sq. 
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) [BB.DD. 
s. v. Bottle; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 92.] * 

ἀσμένως, adv., (for ἡσμένως ; fr. ἥδομαι), with joy, glad- 
ly: Acts ii. 41 [Rec.]; xxi. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
[the adv. fr. Aeschyl.] down.) ἢ 

ἄσοφος, -ov, (σοφός), unwise, foolish: Eph. v. 15. 
[From Theogn. down.]* 

ἀσπάζομαι ; [impf. ἠσπαζόμην] ; 1 aor. ἠσπασάμην ; (fr. 
σπάω with a intensive [q. v., but cf. Vanicek p. 1163 ; 
Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 324 sq.]; hence prop. to draw to 
one's self [ W. $ 38, 7 fin.]; οἵ. dakaípo for σκαίρω, ἀσπαί- 
po for σπαίρω, ἀσπαρίζω for σπαρίζω) ; [fr. Hom. down]; 
a. with an acc. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid wel- 
come, wish well to, (the Israelites, on meeting and at 
parting, generally used the formula 2 Di»wU); used 
of those accosting any one: Mt. x. 12; Mk. ix. 15; xv. 
18; Lk.i. 40; Acts xxi. 19. of those who visit one to 
see him a little while, departing almost immediately af- 
terwards: Acts xviii. 22; xxi. 7; like the Lat. salutare, 
our ‘pay one's respects to,’ of those who show regard for 
a distinguished person by visiting him: Acts xxv. 13, 
(Joseph. antt. 1,19, 5; 6, 11,1). οἵ those who greet one 
whom they meet in the way: Mt. v. 47 (in the East even 
now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each 
other); Lk. x.4 (asa salutation was made not merely by 
a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em- 
bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting 
frequently). of those departing and bidding farewell: 
Acts xx. 1; xxi. 6 [ἢ G]. of the absent, saluting by 
letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-23; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12 
(13); Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 Sq: 3) BSlb-sv:126, 
etc. ev φιλήματι: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 
12; 1 Pet. v. 14. b. with an acc. of the thing, to receive 
joyfully, welcome : ras ἐπαγγελίας, Heb. xi. 13, (τὴν συμ- 
φοράν, Eur. Ion. 587; τὴν εὔνοιαν, Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 3; 
τοὺς λόγους, ibid. 7, 8, 4; so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524). 
[Comp.: ἀπ-ασπάζομαι. 

ἀσπασμός, -o0, 6, (ἀσπάζομαι). a salutation, — either 
oral: Mt. xxiii. 7; Mk. xii. 38; Lk. i. 29, 41, 44 ; x1. 43; 
Xx.46; or written: 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th. iii. 
17. [From Theogn. down.]* 

ἄσπιλος, -ov, (σπῖλος a spot), spotless: ἀμνός, 1 Pet. i. 

5 


81 








ἀστήρ 


19; (ἵππος, Hdian. 5, 6, 16 [7 ed. Bekk.]; μῆλον, Anthol. 
Pal. 6, 252, 3). metaph. free from censure, irreproach- 
able, 1 Tim. vi. 14; free from vice, unsullied, 2 Pet. iii. 
14; ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου, Jas. i. 27 [B. $ 132, 5]. (In eccl. 
writ.) * 

ἀσπίς, -ίδος, ἡ, an asp, a small and most venomous ser- 
pent, the bite of which is fatal unless the part bitten be 
immediately cut away: Ro. iii. 13. (Deut. xxxii. 33; 
Is. xxx. 6 [ete. Hdt., Aristot., al.] Ael. nat. an. 2, 24; 6, 
38; Plut. mor. p. 380 £. i. e. de Isid. et Osir. $ 74; Op- 
pian. eyn. 3, 433.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Asp; Tristram, Nat. 
Hist. of the Bible, p. 270 sqq.]* 

ἄσπονδος, -ον, (σπονδή a libation, which, as a kind of 
sacrifice, accompanied the making of treaties and com- 
pacts; cf. Lat. spondere); [fr. Thue. down]; 1. with- 
out a treaty or covenant; of things not mutually agreed 
upon, e. g. abstinence from hostilities, Thue. 1, 37, ete. 
2. that cannot be persuaded to enter into a covenant, im- 
placable, (in this sense fr. Aeschyl. down; esp. in the 
phrase ἄσπονδος πόλεμος, Dem. pro cor. p. 314, 16; 
Polyb. 1, 65, 6; [Philo de sacrif. $4]; Cic. ad Att. 9, 
10, 5; [cf. Trench § Iii.]) : joined with ἄστοργος, Ro. i. 
31 Rec.; 2 Tim. iii. 3.* 

drcptov, -ov, τό, an assarium or assarius, the name of 
a coin equal to the tenth part of a drachma [see δηνάριον], 
(dimin. of the Lat. as, Rabbin. *5^&), [a penny]: Mt. x. 
29; Lk. xii. 6. (Dion. Hal, Plut., al.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. 
Farthing.]* 

ἄσσον, adv., nearer, (compar. of ἄγχι near [cf. ἐγγύς): 
Acts xxvii. 13 [here Rec.*t*Aog. (or"Aca. q. v.), Rechez εἰς 
aoo., (cf. Tdf. ad loc.) ; but see Meyer]. (Hom., Hdt., 
tragic poets; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 4.) * 

"Accos [so all edd., perh. better -σσός ; Chandler § 317, 
cf. $319; Pape, Eigennamen s. v.], του; 7, Assos, a mari- 
time city in Asia Minor, on the #gean Sea [Gulf of 
Adramyttium], and nine [ace. to Tab. Peuting. (ed. 
Fortia d’Urban, Paris 1845, p. 170) 20 to 25] miles [see 
Hackett on Acts as below] distant [to the S.] from Troas, 
acity of Lesser Phrygia: Acts xx. 13 sq. ; [formerly read 
also in Acts xxvii. 13 after the Vulg.; cf. ἄσσον. See 
Papers of the Archzol. Inst. of America, Classical 
Series i. (1882) esp. pp. 60 sqq.].* 

ἀστατέω. -@; (ἄστατος unstable, strolling about; cf. 
dkarácraros); io wander about, to rove without a settled 
abode, [ A. V. to have no certain dwelling-place]: 1 Co. iv. 
11. (Anthol. Pal. appendix 39, 4.) * 

1. of the city; of pol- 
ished manners (opp. to ἄγροικος rustic), genteel, (fr. Xen. 
and Plat. down). 2. elegant (of body), comely, fair, 
(Judith xi. 23; Aristaenet. 1,4, 1 and 19, 8): of Moses 
(Ex. ii. 2), Heb. xi. 23; with τῷ θεῷ added, unto God, 
God being judge, i.e. truly fair, Acts vii. 20; ef. W. $31, 4 
a. p. 212 (199); [248 (232)]; B. 179 (156); (Philo, vit. 
Moys. i. $ 3, says of Moses γεννηθεὶς ὁ παῖς εὐθὺς ὄψιν ἐνέ- 
φηνεν ἀστειοτέραν ἢ κατ᾽ ἰδιώτην). [Cf. Trench $cvi.]* 
ἀστήρ, -έρος, 6, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the 
sky), cf. ἄστρον, Lat. stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; Fick, 
Pt. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Vanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom. 


ἀστεῖος, -ov, (ἄστυ ἃ city) ; 


ἀστήρικτος 


down]; a star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [ace. -épav N* C ; see 
ἄρσην fin.]; xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. 
vi. 13; viii. 10-12; ix. 1; xii. 1, 4; ὁ ἀστὴρ avrov, the 
star betokening his birth, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. *the star of the 
Messiah, on which ef. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeo- 
rum $ 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner's 
Zeitschr. f. d. histor. Theol. for 1847, fasc. 3; [B. D. s. v. 
Star of the Wise Men]); by the figure of the seven 
stars which Christ holds in his right hand, Rev. i. 16; 
ji. 1; iii. 1, are signified the angels of the seven churches, 
under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20; see what was 
said s. v. ἄγγελος. 2. ἀστὴρ ὁ πρωϊνός the morning star, 
Rev. xxii. 16 [ Rec. ὀρθρινός ; ii. 28 (δώσω αὐτῷ τὸν ἀστέρα 
τ. mpwivoy I will give to him the morning star, that he 
may be irradiated with its splendor and outshine all 
others, i. e. I will cause his heavenly glory to excel that 
of others). ἀστέρες πλανῆται, wandering stars, Jude 13 
(these are not planets, the motion of which is scarcely 
noticed by the commonalty, but far more probably comets, 
which Jude regards as stars which have left the course 
prescribed them by God, and wander about at will — cf. 
Enoch xviii. 15, and so are a fit symbol of men πλανῶντες 
καὶ πλανώμενοι, 2 Tim. iii. 13).* 

ἀστήρικτος, -ov, (στηρίζω). unstable, unsteadfast ; 2 Pet. 
ii. 14; iii. 16. (Anthol. Pal. 6, 203, 11.) * 

ἄστοργος, -ov, (στοργή love of kindred), without natural 
affection: Ro. i. 31; 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aeschin., Theocr., 
PPlut., al) * 

ἀστοχέω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἠστόχησα; (to be doroxos, fr. 
στόχος a mark), to deviate from, miss, (the mark): with 
gen. [W. $ 30, 6], to deviate from anything, 1 Tim. i. 6 
(Sir. vii. 19; viii. 9) ; περί τι, 1 Tim. vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 
1& (Polyb., Plut., Leian., [al.].) * 

ἀστραπή, -75, ἡ, lightning: Lk. x. 18; xvii. 24; Mt. xxiv. 
27; xxviii. 3; plur., Rev. iv.5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; 
of the gleam of a lamp, Lk. xi. 36 [so Aeschyl. frag. (fr. 
schol. on Soph. Oed. Col. 1047) 188 Ahrens, 372 Dind. ].* 

ἀστράπτω ; (later form στράπτω, see ἀσπάζομαι init. 
[prob. allied with ἀστήρ q. v.]); to lighten, (Hom. Il. 9, 
237; 17, 595, and often in Attic): Lk. xvii. 24. of 
dazzling objects: ἐσθής (RG ἐσθήσεις), Lk. xxiv. 4 
(and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. Oed. Col. 1067; 
Eur. Phoen. 111, down). [Comp.: ἐξ-, περι-αστράπτω.] ἢ 

ἄστρον, -ov, τό, [ (see ἀστήρ init.), fr. Hom. down]; 1. 
a group of stars, a constellation ; but not infreq. also 2. 
i.q. ἀστήρ a star: Lk. xxi. 25; Acts xxvii. 20; Heb. xi. 
12; the image of a star, Acts vii. 43.* 

᾿Α-σύγ-κριτος [T WH ᾿Ασύνκρ.]. -ov, 6, (a priv. and 
συγκρίνω to compare; incomparable); Asyncritus, the 
name of an unknown Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.* 

ἀ σύμφωνος, -ov, not agreeing in sound, dissonant, inhar- 
monious, at variance: πρὸς ἀλλήλους (Diod. 4, 1), Acts 
xxviii. (Sap. xviii. 10; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 8, 1]; 
Plat., Plut., [a1-])) * 

ἀσύνετος, -ov, unintelligent, without understanding: Mt. 
xv. 16; Mk. vii. 18; stupid: Ro.i. 21; x. 19. In imita- 
tion of the Hebr. 523, ungodly (Sap. i. 5; Sir. xv. 7 sq. 
[cf. dowvereiv, Ps. exviii. (cxix.) 158]), because a wicked 


25. 


82 





> fe 
ἀσωτιίια. 


man has no mind for the things which make for salva- 
tion: Ro. i. 31 [al. adhere here to the Grk. usage; cf. 
Fritzsche adloc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) [Cf. 
σοφός. fin.]* 

ἀσύνθετος, -ov, 1. uncompounded, simple, (Plat., 
Aristot., al.). 2. (avwriÜeguacto covenant), covenant- 
breaking, faithless: Ro. i. 31 (so in Jer. iii. 8, 11; Dem. 
de falsa leg. p. 383, 6; cf. Pape and Passow s. v.; ἀσυν- 
Gereiv to be faithless [ Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 15; 2 Esdr. x. 2; 
Neh. i. 8, ete.]; ἀσυνθεσία transgression, 1 Chr. ix. 1 
[Ald., Compl.; 2 Esdr. ix. 2, 4; Jer. iii. 7]; εὐσυνθετεῖν 
to keep faith; [cf. Trench § lii. ]).* 

ἀσφάλεια, -as, 7, (ἀσφαλής), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; a. 
Jirmness, stability: ἐν πάσῃ aod. most securely, Acts v.. 
23. trop. certainty, undoubted truth: λόγων (see λόγος, 
I. 7), Lk. i. 4, (rod λόγου, the certainty of a proof, Xen. 
mem. 4, 6, 15). b. security from enemies and dangers, 
safety: 1 Th. v. 3 (opp. to κίνδυνος, Xen. mem. 3, 12, 7).* 

ἀσφαλής, -és, (σφάλλω to make to totter or fall, to 
cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo, Germ. fallen, ete., Eng. fall, fail], 
σφάλλομαι to fall, to reel), [fr. Hom. down]; a. firm 
(that can be relied on, confided in) : ἄγκυρα, Heb. vi. 19 
(where L and Tr have received as the form of ace. sing. 
ἀσφαλήν [ Tdf. 7 -Ajv; cf. Tdf. ad loc.; Delitzsch, Com. 
ad loc.] see ἄρσην). trop. certain, true: Acts xxv. 26; 
τὸ ἀσφαλές, Acts xxi. 34; xxii.30. b. suited to confirm: 
τινί, Phil. iii. 1 (so Joseph. antt. 3, 2, 1).* 

ἀσφαλίζω : 1 aor. pass. inf. ἀσφαλισθῆναι; 1 aor. mid. 
ἠσφαλισάμην ; (ἀσφαλής) ; esp. freq. fr. Polyb. down; to 
make firm, to make secure against harm ;. pass. to be made 
secure: Mt. xxvii. 64 (ὁ τάφος) [B. 52 (46)]; mid. 
prop. to make secure for one's self or for one's own ad- 
vantage, (often in Polyb.): Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; to make 
fast rods πόδας eis τὸ ξύλον, Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2 d.; 
B. § 147, 8].* 

ἀσφαλῶς, adv., [fr. Hom. down], safely (so as to prevent 
escape): Mk. xiv. 44; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly: ywo- 
σκειν, Acts ii. 36 (εἰδότες, Sap. xviii. 6).* 

ἀσχημονέω, -ó; (to be ἀσχήμων, deformed ; τὴν Kepa- 
λὴν ἀσχημονεῖν, of a bald man, Ael. v. h. 11, 4) ; fo act un- 
becomingly ([ Eur.], Xen., Plat., al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5; ἐπί τινα, 
towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for 
her, 1 Co. vii. 36.* 

ἀσχημοσύνη, -ης. ἧ: (ἀσχήμων ); fr. Plato down; un- 
seemliness, an unseemly deed: Ro. i. 27; of the pudenda, 
one’s nakedness, shame: Rev. xvi. 15, as in Ex. xx. 26; 
Deut. xxiii. 14, ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.)* 

ἀσχήμων, -ovos, neut. ἄσχημον, (σχῆμα); a. deformed. 
b. indecent, unseemly: 1 Co. xii. 23, opp. to εὐσχήμων. 
([Hdt.], Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) * 

ἀσωτία, -as, 7, (the character of an ἄσωτος, i. 6. of am 
abandoned man, one that cannot be saved, fr. cada, σύω 
i. q. σώζω, [d-me-ro-s, Curtius $ 570]; hence prop. incor- 
rigibleness), an abandoned, dissolute, life; profligacy, prod- 
igality, [R. V. riot]: Eph. v. 18; Tit.i.6; 1 Pet. iv. 4; 
(Prov. xxviii. 7; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Plat. rep. 8, p. 560 e.; 
Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 1, 5 (3) p. 1120*, 3; Polyb. 32, 20, 
9; 40, 12, 7; cf. Cic. Tusc. 3, 8; Hdian. 2, 5, 2 (1 ed. 


ἀσώτως 


Bekk.), and elsewhere). Cf. Tittmann i. p. 152 sq.; 
[Trench § xvi.].* 

ἀσώτως, adv., (adj. ἄσωτος, on which see dowria), dis- 
solutely, profligately: Gv (Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk. 
xv. 13 [ A. V. riotous living].* 

&rakréo, -ῶ : 1 aor. ἠτάκτησα; to be ἄτακτος, to be disor- 
derly; a. prop. of soldiers marching out of order or 
quitting the ranks: Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 6, etc. Hence b. 
to be neglectful of duty, to be lawless: Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 22 ; 
oec. 5, 15; Lys. 141, 18 [i.e. c. Alcib. or. 1 § 18], al. c. 
to lead a disorderly life: 2 Th. iii. 7, cf. 11.* 

ἄτακτος, -ov, (rácac), disorderly, out of the ranks, 
(often so of soldiers); irregular, inordinate (ἄτακτοι 
ἡδοναί immoderate pleasures, Plat. lege. 2, 660 b.; Plut. 
de lib. educ. c. 7), deviating from the prescribed order or 
rule: 1 Th. v. 14, cf. 2 Th. iii. 6. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
[Hdt. and] Thuc. down ; often in Plat.) * 

&-rákros, adv., disorderly: 2 Th. iii. 6 ἀτάκτως περιπα- 
teiv, which is explained by the added xal μὴ κατὰ τὴν 
παράδοσιν ἣν παρέλαβε παρ᾽ ἡμῶν; cf. ibid. 11, where it is 
explained by μηδὲν ἐργαζόμενοι, ἀλλὰ περιεργαζόμενοι. 
(Often in Plato.) * i 

ἄτεκνος, -ov, (τέκνον), without offspring, childless: Lk. 
xx. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hesiod opp. 600 down.)* 

drevitw; 1 aor. 7révca; (fr. ἀτενής stretched, intent, 
and this fr. re(vo and a intensive ; [yet cf. W. $ 16,4 D. a. 
fin., and s. v. A, a, 3]); to fix the eyes on, gaze upon: with 
dat. of pers., Lk. iv. 20; xxii. 56; Actsiii.12; x. 4; xiv. 9; 
xxiii. 1; foll. by ets with ace. of pers., Acts iii. 4 ; vi. 15; 
xiii. 9; metaph. to fix one's mind on one as an example, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9,2; ets vt, Acts i. 10; vii. 55; 2 Co. 
iii. 7, 13; εἴς τι, to look into anything, Acts xi 6. (3 
Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, 11, 5 [i. e. 6, 11*, 12 
Dind.]; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. évar.]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 12, 3; 
Lcian. cont. 16, al.) * 

ἄτερ, prep., freq. in the poets [fr. Hom. down], rare’ 
in prose writ. fr. Plat. [7] down; without, apart from: 
with gen. [ Dion. Hal. 3, 10; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5]; 
in the Bible only in 2 Mace. xii. 15; Lk. xxii. 6 (ἄτερ 
ὄχλου in the absence of the multitude; hence, without 
tumult),35. [* Teaching’ 3, 10; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.]* 

ἀτιμάζω: 1 aor. ἠτίμασα ; [Pass., pres. ἀτιμάζομαι]: 1 
aor. inf. ἀτιμασθῆναι ; (fr. ἄτιμος ; hence) to make ἄτιμος. 
to dishonor, insult, treat with contumely, whether in word, 
in deed, or in thought: [Mk. xii. 4 T Tr mrg. WH (cf. 
᾿ἀτιμάω and -pow) |; Lk. xx.11; Jn. viii. 49; Acts v. 41; 
Ro. ii. 23; Jas. ii. 6 [W. § 40, 5, 2; B. 202 (175)]. Pass.: 
Ro. i. 24, on which cf. W. 326 (305 sq.) ; [and § 39,3 
N.3]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) * 

é-ripdw, -ῶ: [1 aor. ἠτίμησα]; (τιμή); to deprive of 
honor, despise, treat with contempt or contumely : twa, Mk. 
xii. 4 L Tr txt. ἠτίμησαν (see ἀτιμάζω and -μόω). (In 
Grk. writ. [chiefly Epic] fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀτιμία, -as, 7, (ἄτιμος), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace, [fr. 
Hom. down]: 1 Co. xi. 14; opp. to δόξα, 2 Co. vi. 8; 1 
Co. xv. 43 (ἐν ἀτιμίᾳ sc. ὄν, in a state of diserace, used 
of the unseemliness and offensiveness of a dead body) ; 


88 


αὐθάδης 


κατ᾽ ἀτιμίαν equiv. to ἀτίμως, with contempt sc. of myself, 
2 Co. xi. 21 [R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. κατά, 11. 
fin.]; πάθη ἀτιμίας base lusts, vile passions, Ro. i. 26, ef. 
W.§ 34,3 b.; [B. $132, 10]. εἰς ἀτιμίαν for a dishonor- 
able use, of vessels, opp. to τιμή : Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 
20.* 

ἄτιμος, -ον, (τιμή) ; fr. Hom. down; without honor, un- 
honored, dishonored: Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; 1 Co. iv. 
10 (opp. to ἔνδοξος) ; base, of less esteem: 1 Co. xii. 23 
[here the neut. plur. of the compar., ἀτιμότερα (Rec.* 
dri órepa) ].* 

ἀτιμόω, -ῶ: [pf. pass. ptep. ἠτιμωμένος ; (dros); fr. 
Aeschyl. down ; to dishonor, mark with disgrace: Mk. xii. 
4 RG, see ἀτιμάω [and árqiáto].* 

ἀτμίς. -idos, 7, vapor: Jas. iv. 14; καπνοῦ (Joel ii. 30 
[al. iii. 3]), Acts ii. 19 [opp. to καπνός in Aristot. meteor. 
2, 4 p. 359%, 29 sq., to νέφος ibid. 1, 9 p. 346^, 32]. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 75 and] Plat. Tim. p. 86 e. 
down.) * 

&-ropos, -ov, (τέμνω to cut), that cannot be cut in two or 
divided, indivisible, [Plat. Soph. 229 d.; of time, Aristot. 
phys. 8,8 p. 263°, 27]: ἐν ἀτόμῳ in a moment, 1 Co. 
xv. 52.* . 

ἄτοπος. -ov, (τόπος), out of place; not befitting, unbe- 
coming, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; very often in 
Plato); in later Grk. in an ethical sense, improper, 
wicked : Lk. xxiii. 41 (ἄτοπόν τι πράσσειν, as in Job xxvii. 
6; 2 Macc. xiv. 23); Acts xxv. 5 L T Tr WH; (Sept. 
for nw Job iv. 8; xi. 11, ete. Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 6; 
Plut. de aud. poét. c. 3 φαυλά and arora) ; of men: 2 Th. 
iii. 2 (ἄτοποι καὶ πονηροί; Luth. unartig, more correctly 
unrighteous [ (iniquus), A. V. unreasonable, cf. Ellic. ad 
loc.]). inconvenient, harmful: Acts xxviii. 6 μηδὲν ἄτοπον 
eis αὐτὸν γινόμενον, no injury, no harm coming to him, 
(Thuc. 2, 49; Joseph. antt. 11, 5, 2; Hdian.4, 11, 7 [4, 
ed. Bekk. ]).* 

᾿Αττάλεια [-Aía T WH (see I, c)], -as, 7, Attalia, a mar- 
itime city of Pamphylia in Asia, very near the borders 
of Lycia, built and named by Attalus Philadelphus, king 
of Pergamum; now Antali [or Adalia; cf. Dict. of Geog.]: 
Acts xiv. 25.* 

αὐγάζω: 1 aor. inf. αὐγάσαι; (αὐγή); 1. in Grk. 
writ. transitively, to beam upon, irradiate. 2. in the 
Bible intrans. to be bright, to shine forth: 2 Co. iv. 4 [L 
mrg. Tr mrg. karavy. see φωτισμός, b.], (Lev. xiii. 24-28, 
[ete.]). [Comp.: 8c κατ-αυγάζω. ]* 

αὐγή. -ῆς, ἡ, brightness, radiance, (cf. Germ. Auge [eye], 
of which the tragic poets sometimes use αὐγή. see Pape 
[or L. and S.; cf. Lat. /umina]), especially of the sun; 
hence ἡλίου is often added (Hom. and sqq.), daylight; 
hence ἄχρις [-pe T Tr WH] αὐγῆς even till break of day, 
Acts xx. 11 (Polyaen. 4, 18 p. 386 κατὰ τὴν πρώτην αὐγὴν 
τῆς ἡμέρας). [SYN. see φέγγος, fin.]* 

Αὔγουστος, -ov, 6, Augustus [cf. Eng. Majesty; see 
σεβαστός, 2], the surname of G. Julius Caesar Octavia- 
nus, the first Roman emperor: Lk. ii. 1.* 

αὐθάδης. -es, (fr. αὐτός and ἥδομαι), self pleasing, self- 
willed, arrogant: Tit.i. 7; 2 Pet.ii. 10. (Gen. xlix. 3, 7; 


, , 
αὐθαίρετος 


Prov. xxi. 24. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down.) [Trench § xciii.]* 

αὐθ-αίρετος, -ov, (fr. αὐτός and aipéopar), self-chosen ; in 
Grk. writ. esp. of states or conditions, as δουλεία, Thuc. 
6, 40, etc., more rarely of persons; voluntary, of free 
choice, of one's own accord, (as στρατηγός, Xen. an. 5, 7, 
29, explained § 28 by ὃς ἑαυτὸν €Anrat): 2 Co. viii. 3, 17.* 

αὐθεντέω, -à ; (a bibl. and eccl. word ; fr. αὐθέντης contr. 
fr. abroévrgs, and this fr. αὐτός and ἔντεα arms [al. évrgs, 
cf. Hesych. συνέντης - avvepyós; cf. Lobeck, Technol. p. 
121]; hence a. acc. to earlier usage, one who with his 
own hand kills either others or himself. ὃ. in later Grk. 
writ. one who does a thing himself, the author (τῆς πράξεως, 
Polyb. 23, 14, 2, etc.) ; one who acts on his own authority, 
autocratic, i. q. αὐτοκράτωρ an absolute master ; cf. Lobeck 
ad Phryn. p. 120 [also as above; cf. W. § 2, 1 c.]) ; to 
govern one, exercise dominion over one: twos, 1 Tim. 
tat Fs 

αὐλέω, -@: 1 aor. ηὔλησα ; [pres. pass. ptep. τὸ addov- 
μενον]; (addds); to play on the flute, to pipe: Mt. xi.17; 
Lk. vii. 32; 1Co.xiv.7. (Fr. [Alem., Hdt.,] Xen. and 
Plat. down.) * 

αὐλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (de to blow; hence) prop. a place open to 
the air (διαπνεόμενος τόπος αὐλὴ λέγεται, Athen. 5, 15 p. 
189 b.); 1. among the Greeks in Homer's time an 
uncovered space around the house, enclosed by a wall, in 
which the stables stood (Hom. Od. 9, 185; Il. 4, 433); 
hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the 
open country in which flocks were herded at night, a sheep- 
fold : Jn. x. 1, 16. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the 
house, Hebr. 981), Sept. αὐλή, Vulg. atrium. Inthe O. T. 
particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the 
temple at Jerusalem; so in the N. T. once: Rey. xi. 2 
(τὴν αὐλὴν τὴν ἔξωθεν [Recs ἔσωθεν] τοῦ ναοῦ). The 
dwellings of the higher classes usually had two αὐλαί, one 
exterior, between the door and the street, called also 
προαύλιον (q. v.); the other interior, surrounded by the 
buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned 
Mt. xxvi. 69 (where ἔξω is opp. to the room in which the 
judges were sitting) ; Mk. xiv. 66; Lk. xxii.55. Cf. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Hiuser ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Court; BB.DD. 
s. v. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace: Mt. xxvi. 
3, 58; Mk. xiv. 54; xv. 16; Lk. xi. 21; Jn. xviii. 15, and 
so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 74 down [cf. 
Eustath. 1483, 39 τῷ τῆς αὐλῆς ὀνόματι rà δώματα δηλοῖ, 
Suid. col. 652 c. αὐλή - ἡ τοῦ βασιλέως οἰκία. Yet this sense 
is denied to the N. T. by Meyer et ἃ]. ; see Mey. on Mt. 
ib: 

αὐλητής, -o7, 6, (αὐλέω), a flute-player : Mt. ix. 23; Rev. 
xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hdt. 6, 60 
down.) * 

αὐλίζομαι : depon.; impf. ηὐλιζόμην; 1 aor. ηὐλίσθην 
[Veitch s. v.; B.51 (44); W.§ 39, 2]; (αὐλή) ; in Sept. 
mostly for m; 1. prop. to lodge in the court-yard 
esp. at night; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pass the 
night in the open air, bivouac. 3. univ. to pass the 
night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 (ἐξερχόμενος 
ηὐλίζετο εἰς τὸ ὄρος. going out to pass the nicht he retired 


84 





αὐτάρκεια 


to the mountain; cf. B. § 147,15). (In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down.) * 

αὐλός, -οῦ, 6, (dc, avc), [fr. Hom. down], a pipe: 1 Co. 
xiv. 7. [Cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. v.]* 

αὐξάνω, and earlier (the only form in Pind. and Soph. 
[Veitch s. v. says, ‘Hes. Mimnerm. Soph. Thue. always 
have αὔξω or αὔξομαι. and Pind. except ab£ávo Fr. 130 
(Bergk)']) αὔξω (Eph. ii. 21; Col. ii. 19) ; impf. ηὔξανον; 
fut. αὐξήσω ; 1 aor. ηὔξησα; [ Pass., pres. αὐξάνομαι ; 1 aor. 
ηὐξήθην ; 1. trans. fo cause to grow, to augment: 1 
Co. iii. 6 sq.; 2 Co.ix. 10. Pass. to grow, increase, become 
greater : Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.8 L T Tr WH; 2 Co. x. 15; 
Col. i. 6 [not Rec.]; eis τὴν ἐπίγνωσιν τοῦ θεοῦ unto the 
knowledge of God, Col.i. 10 (GL T Tr WH τῇ ἐπιγνώσει 
τοῦ θεοῦ); εἰς σωτηρίαν [not Rec.] to the attaining of sal- 
vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. acc. to later usage (fr. Aristot. 
an. post. 1, 13 p. 78°, 6, ete., down ; but nowhere in Sept. 
[cf. B. 54 (47) ; 145 (127); W. $ 38, 1]) intrans. to grow, 
increase: of plants, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec.; Lk. xii. 
27 [not Tdf. ; Tr mrg. br. av£.]; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants, 
Lk. i. 80; ii. 40; of a multitude of people, Acts vii. 17. 
of inward Christian growth: εἰς Χριστόν. in reference to 
[W. 397 (371); yet cf. Ellic. ad loc.] Christ, Eph. iv. 
15; eis ναόν, so as to form a temple, Eph. ii. 21; ἐν χάριτι, 
2 Pet. iii. 18; with an ace. of the substance, τὴν αὔξησιν, 
Col. ii. 19 [cf. W. § 32, 2; B. $ 131, 5, also Bp. Lehtft.'s 
note ad loc.]: of the external increase of the gospel 
it is said ὁ λόγος ηὔξανε: Acts vi 7; xii. 24; xix. 20; 
of the growing authority of a teacher and the number of 
his adherents (opp. to ἐλαττοῦσθαι), Jn. iii. 30. [Cowr.: 
συν-, iz ep-avéávo. ] * 

αὔξησις, -ews, ἡ, (ato), increase, growth: Eph. iv. 16; 
ToU θεοῦ, effected by God, Col. ii. 19; cf. Meyer ad loc. 
([Hdt.], Thue., Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) * 

αὔξω. see αὐξάνω. 

αὔριον, adv., (fr. αὔρα the morning air, and this fr. avo 
to breathe, blow; [ace. to al. akin to nas, Lat. aurora; 
Curtius § 613, cf. Vaniéek p. 944]), to-morrow (Lat. cras) : 
Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; Acts xxiii. 15 Rec., 20; xxv. 22; 
1 Co. xv. 32 (fr. Is. xxii. 13) ; σήμερον καὶ αὔριον, Lk. xiii. 
32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13 [Rec.s Ὁ ; al. σήμ. i atp.]. ἡ αὔριον sc. 
ἡμέρα [ W. § 64, 5; B. $123, 8] the morrow, Mt. vi. 34; 
Acts iv. 3; ἐπὶ τὴν αὔριον, on the morrow, i. e. the next 
morning, Lk. x. 35; Actsiv. 5; τὸ [L τὰ; WH om.] τῆς 
αὔριον, what the morrow will bring forth, Jas. iv. 14. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

αὐστηρός, -á, -óv, (fr. avo to dry up). harsh (Lat. au- 
sterus), stringent of taste, αὐστηρὸν kai γλυκὺ (kal πικρόν), 
Plat. legg. 10, 897 a.; οἶνος, Diog. Laért. 7, 117. of 
mind and manners, harsh, rough, rigid, [cf. Trench 
8 xiv.]: Lk. xix. 21, 22; (Polyb. 4, 20, 7; Diog. Laert. 
7, 26, ete. 2 Macc. xiv. 30).* 

αὐτάρκεια, -as, ἡ, (αὐτάρκης, q. v-), a. perfect condition 
of life, in which no aid or support is needed ; equiv. to 
τελειότης κτήσεως ἀγαθῶν, Plat. def. p. 412 b.; often in 
Aristot. [defined by him (pol. 7, 5 init. p. 1326^, 29) as 
follows: τὸ πάντα ὑπάρχειν κ- δεῖσθαι μηθενὸς abrápkes ; cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 11]; hence, a sufficiency of the 


αὐτάρκης 


necessaries of life: 2 Co. ix. 8; subjectively, @ mind con- 
tented with iis lot, contentment: 1 Tim. vi. 6; (Diog. 
Laért. 10, 130).* 

αὐτάρκης [on the accent see Chandler § 705], es, (αὐτός, 
dpxéw), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sufficient for one’s self, strong 
enough or possessing enough to need no aid or support; 

. independent of external circumstances; often in Grk. 

writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 1, 32 down. Subjectively, 
contented with one’s lot, with one’s means, though the slender- 
est: Phil. iv. 11, (so Sir. xl. 18; Polyb. 6, 48, 7; Diog. 
Laért. 2, 24 of Socrates, αὐτάρκης kai σεμνός). [ Cf. abráp- 
κεια.} * 

αὐτο-κατά-κριτος, -ov, (αὐτός, karakptvo), self-condemned : 
Tit. iii. 11; (eccl. writ. [cf. W. $34, 3]).* 

αὐτόματος, -ov, and -7, -ov, (fr. αὐτός and uépaa to desire 
eagerly, fr. obsol. theme paw), moved by one’s own wn- 


pulse, or acting without the instigation or intervention of 


another, (fr. Hom. down); often of the earth producing 
plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits 
growing without culture; [on its adverbial use cf. W. 
$54, 2]: Mk. iv. 28; (Hdt. 2, 94; 8, 138; Plat. polit. p. 
212 a.; [ Theophr. h. p. 2, 1]; Diod.1, 8, ete. Lev. xxv. 
5,11). of gates opening of their own accord: Acts xii. 
10, (so in Hom. Il. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 7; Apoll. 
Rh. 4, 41; Plut. Timol. 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21; [Dion 
Cass. 44, 17]).* 

αὐτόπτης, -ov, ὁ, (αὐτός, OIITQ), seeing with one's own 
eyes, an eye-witness, (cf. αὐτήκοος one who has himself 
heard athing): Lk.i.2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (* derived from the particle ad with 
the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself 
it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has 
either been previously mentioned or, when the whole 
discourse is looked at, must necessarily be zupplied." 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is 
used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. 
far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this 
very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they de- 
viate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. $ 127, 9. [On 
classic usage cf. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which 
dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger 
pp- 132-796. 

I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to 


sc 
distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with 
another, or to give him (it) emphatie prominence. Τίς 


When used to express Opposition or Distinction, 
itis added a. to the subjects implied in the verb, the 
personal pronouns ἐγώ, ἡμεῖς, ov, etc., being omitted : Lk. 
v. 37 (αὐτὸς ἐκχυθήσεται the wine, as opp. to the skins); 
Lk. xxii. 71 (αὐτοὶ yap ἠκούσαμεν we ourselves, opp. to 
witnesses whose testimony could have been taken) ; Jn. 
ii. 25 (αὐτὸς ἐγίνωσκεν. opp. to testimony he might have 
called for); Jn. iv. 42 (we ourselves, nót thou only); Jn. 
ix. 21 [Τ Tr WH om.]; Acts xviii. 15 (ὄψεσθε αὐτοί) ; 
xx. 34; xxii. 19; 1 Th. i. 9, etc. ; with a negative added, 
*he does not himself do this or that,' i. e. he leaves it to 
others: Lk. vi. 42 (αὐτός, viz. thou, οὐ βλέπων) ; Lk. xi. 
46 (αὐτοί, viz. ye, οὐ mpoowavere), 52; Jn. xviii. 28; 3 


85 





> , 
αυτος 


Jn. 10. With the addition of καί to indicate that a thing 
is ascribed to one equally with others: Lk. xiv. 12 
(μήποτε καὶ αὐτοί σε ἀντικαλέσωσι) ; xvi. 28; Acts ii. 22 
(GL T Tr WH om. καί]; Jn. iv. 45; xvii. 19, 21; Phil. 
ii. 24, ete. In other pass. καὶ αὐτός is added to a subject 
expressly mentioned, and is placed after it ; and in trans- 
lation may be joined to the predicate and rendered like- 
wise: Lk. i. 36 (ἡ συγγενής σου καὶ αὐτὴ συνειληφυῖα υἱόν 
thy kinswoman. herself also, i. e. as well as thou); Mt. 
xxvii. 57 (ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἐμαθήτευσε [LT Tr WH txt. -τεύθη] 
τῷ Ἰησοῦ); Lk. xxiii. 51 [RG]; Mk. xv. 43; Acts viii. 
13 (ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσε) ; xv. 32; xxi. 24; 1 
Jn. ii. 6; Gal. ii. 17; Heb. xiii. 3. b. it is added to 
subjects expressed, whether to pronouns personal or 
demonstrative, or to nouns proper or common: Jn. iii. 
28 (αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς ye yourselves bear witness, not only have 
I affirmed), Acts xx. 30 (ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν from among 
your own selves, not only from other quarters); Ro. xv. 
14 (kai αὐτὸς ἐγώ I of myself also, not only assured by 
report, cf. i. 8); 1 Co. v. 13 (ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν from your 
own society, opp. to them that are without, of whose 
character God must be the judge) ; 1 Co. vii. 35; xi. 13; 
1 Th. iv. 9; αὐτοὶ οὗτοι, Acts xxiv. 20; αὐτοῦ rovrov 
(masc.), Acts xxv. 25; Ἰησοῦς αὐτός Jesus himself, per- 
sonally, opp. to those who baptized by his command, 
Jn. iv. 2; αὐτὸς ᾿Ιησοῦς, opp. to those who believed on 
him on account of his miracles, Jn. ii. 24; Jesus himself, 
not others only, Jn. iv. 44; adr. Δαυείδ, opp. to the doc- 
tors of the law, whose decision did not seem quite to 
aeree with the words of David, Mk. xii. 36 sq. ; Lk. xx. 
42; αὐτὸς ὁ Σατανᾶς, opp. to his ministers, 2 Co. xi. 14; 
αὐτὸς ὁ θεός, God himself, not another, Rev. xxi. 3; αὐτὰ 
τὰ ἐπουράνια, the heavenly things themselves [1. e. sanc- 
tuary ], opp. to its copies, Heb. ix. 23 [see ἐπουράνιος, 1 c. ]. 
c. it is used to distinguish one not only from his compan- 
ions, disciples, servants, — as Mk. ii. 25 (αὐτὸς kai of μετ᾽ 
avtod) ; Jn. 11. 12; iv. 53; xviii. 1,— but also from things 
done by him or belonging to him, as Jn. vii. 4 (τὶ ποιεῖ καὶ 
ζητεῖ αὐτός [L Tr mrg. WH mrg. αὐτό]): 1 Co. iii. 15 (τινὸς 
τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται. αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται): Lk. xxiv. 15 
(αὐτὸς (6) ᾿Ιησοῦς. Jesus himself in person, opp. to their 
previous conversation about him). d. se/f to the exclu- 
sion of others, i. e. he ete. alone, by one’s self: Mk. vi. 31 
(ὑμεῖς αὐτοί ye alone, unattended by any of the people; 
cf. Fritzsche ad loc.) ; Jn. xiv. 11 (διὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτά [WH 
mrg. αὐτοῦ); Ro. vii. 25 (αὐτὸς ἐγώ I alone, unaided by 
the Spirit of Christ; cf. viii. 2); 2 Co. xii. 13 (αὐτὸς ἐγώ, 
unlike the other preachers of the gospel) ; Rev. xix. 12; 
cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 133 iii.; Matth. $ 467, 5; Kühner 
§ 468 Anm. 2; [Jelf $ 656, 3]; with the addition of 
μόνος (as often in Attic writ.): Jn. vi. 15. e. self, not 
prompted or influenced by another, i. e. of one's self, of 
one's own accord : Jn. xvi. 27 (so even Hom. Il. 17, 254; 
and among Attic writ. esp. Xen.). 2. When it gives 
Prominence, itanswers a. to our emphatic he, she, 
it: Mt. i. 21 (αὐτὸς σώσει HE and no other); Mt. v. 4-10 
(αὐτοί) ; vi. 4 [RG]; xvii. 5 (αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε) ; Lk. vi. 35; 
xvii. 16; xxiv. 21; Jn. ix. 21 (αὐτὸς [T Tr WH om.] . .. 


αὐτός . 


αὐτὸν . . - αὐτός); Acts x. 42 [L txt. Tr txt. WH οὗτος]; 
Gal. iv. 17 (αὐτούς) ; Eph. ii. 10 (αὐτοῦ) ; Col. i. 17; 1 Jn. 
ii. 2; iv. 5; Jas.ii 6 sq. So in Grk. writ. also fr. Hom. 
down; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 734 v. It is used with the same 
force after relative sentences, where Greek prose uses 
οὗτος : Mt. xii. 50 (ὅστις ἂν ποιήσῃ - - . , αὐτός μου ἀδελφός 
ἐστιν, where in Mk. iii. 35 οὗτος) ; Mt. xxvi. 48 ; Mk. xiv. 
44; ef. B. 107 (94) sq. Less emphatically, αὐτός is put 
before subjects, serving to recall them again: Mt. iii. 4 
(αὐτὸς δὲ Ἰωάννης now he, whom I spoke of, John) ; Mk. 
vi. 17 (αὐτὸς yap Ἡρώδης) ; Ro. viii. 16 (αὐτὸ τὸ πνεῦμα). 
b. it points out some one as chief, leader, master of 
the rest (often so in Grk., as in the well-known phrase of 
the Pythagoreans αὐτὸς ἔφα [cf. W. $ 22, 3, 4 and p. 150 
(142)]) : of Christ, Mt. viii. 24 ; Mk. iv. 38; vi. 47; viii. 
29; Lk. v. 16 sq.; ix. 51; x. 38; of God, Lk. vi. 35; 
Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Jn. iv. 19 [not Lehm.]. c. it answers 
to our very, just, exactly, (Germ. eben, gerade): Ro. ix. 3 
(αὐτὸς ἐγώ I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi- 
cal to the Israelites) ; 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore 
myself lowly in your presence, as ye said); αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα, 
Jn. v. 36; often in Luke ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ or ὥρᾳ, αὐτῷ 
τῷ καιρῷ, in that very day, hour, season : LK. ii. 38; x. 21; 
xii. 12; xiii. 1, 31; xx. 19; xxiii. 12; xxiv. 13, 33; Acts 
xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul αὐτὸ τοῦτο this very 
thing: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 6; eis αὐτὸ 
τοῦτο for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. ix. 
17; xiii. 6; 2 Co. v. 5; Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; and in 
the same sense [ for this very thing] the simple accus. 
(as in Attic, cf. Matth. $470, 7; Kühner ii. 267 Anm. 6 ; 
W. § 21 N. 2) τοῦτο αὐτό, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ad 
loc.], and αὐτὸ τοῦτο, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here αὐτοί]. 
d. even, Lat. vel, adeo, (in Hom. ; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
733 1i.) : kat αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις, Ro. viii. 21; οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτή, 
1 Co. xi. 14; καὶ [Tr om. L WH br. καὶ] αὐτὸς ὁ vids, 1 Co. 
xv. 28; καὶ αὐτὴ Σάρρα even Sarah herself, although a 
feeble old woman, Heb. xi. 11 [yet WH mrg. reads the 
dat. αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ; see καταβολή, 1]. 

II. αὐτός has the force of a simple personal pronoun 
of the third person, answering to our unemphatie he, she, 
it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique 
cases, him, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, — 
as in the gen. absolute, e. g. αὐτοῦ ἐλθόντος. λαλήσαντος, 
ete.; or in the ace. with inf., εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολο- 
γήτους, Ro. i. 20; or after prepositions, ἐξ αὐτοῦ. ἐν αὐτῷ, 
ete.; or where it indicates the possessor, 6 πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ; 
or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active 
verb, as ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ, Mt. vii. 9: ἀσπάσασθε αὐτήν. Mt. 
x. 12; ἀφεὶς αὐτούς, Mt. xxvi. 44; ἦν διανεύων αὐτοῖς, Lk. 
i. 22; οὐκ eta αὐτὰ λαλεῖν, Lk. iv. 41; ἡ σκοτία αὐτὸ οὐ 
κατέλαβε, Jn.i. 5. But see αὑτοῦ below. 2. Contrary 
to Grk. usage, in the N. T. even in the Nominative it 
is put for a simple personal pronoun of the third person, 
where the Greeks say οὗτος or 6 δέ, or use no pronoun at 
all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93) 
sqq-; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not 
decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage 
illustrated under I. 1; — those in which αὐτός is used of 


86 








3r. 
avuTos 


Christ, apparently to I. 1 b. But, in my opinion, the 
question is settled even by the following: αὐτός, Mt. 
xiv. 2; Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. i. 22; xv. 14; so too in the Sept. 
(cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98); Sir. xlix. 7; 
Tob. vi. 11; αὐτοί, Mk. ii. 8 (οὕτως αὐτοὶ διαλογίζονται in 
Grsb.); Lk. ix. 36; xiv. 1; xxii. 23; αὐτό, Lk. xi. 14 
[Tr mrg. WH om., Trtxt.br.]. Whether αὐτή and αὐταί, 
also are so used, is doubtful; cf. B. 109 (95). 3. 
Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted, 
being evident from the context: Mk. vi. 5 (ἐπιθείς, se. 
avrois); Jn. iii. 34 (δίδωσι, sc. αὐτῷ) ; Jn. x. 29 (δέδωκέ 
μοι, 80. αὐτούς) ; Acts xiii. 3 (ἀπέλυσαν. sc. αὐτούς) ; Rev. 
xviii. 21 (ἔβαλεν, sc. αὐτόν), etc. 4. Not infrequently 
avrós in the oblique cases is ad ded to the verb, although 
the case belonging to this very verb has preceded : Mt. 
viii. 1 (καταβάντι δὲ αὐτῷ ΓΤ, Tr WH gen. absol.] ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὄρους ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ) ; Mt. iv. 16 ; v. 40; viii. 23, 28 
[RG]; ix. 28; xxv. 29 (ἀπὸ [om. by LT Tr WH] τοῦ μὴ 
ἔχοντος ... ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ); xxvi ΤΙ [RG L br. T]; Mk. v. 2 
[RG]; ix. 28[R ΟἹ; Jn. xv. 2 (πᾶν κλῆμα... . αἴρει αὐτό); 
Acts vii. 21 [R G]; Jas. iv. 17; Rev. ii. 7; vi. 4 [L Tr 
mrg. br.]; cf. W. $ 22, 4 a.; B. 142 (125). Doubtless 
the writer, while writing the earlier words with the in- 
tention of joining them to the leading verb to follow, 
marked off these very words as a clause by themselves, 
as if they formed a protasis; and so, when he came to 
the leading verb, he construed it just as though it were 
to form an apodosis. 5. By a Hebraism αὐτός is used 
redundantly in relative sentences: ἧς εἶχε τὸ θυγάτριον 
αὐτῆς, Mk. vii. 25 ; οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (RG 
T, but Tr mrg. br. αὐτοῦ) ; esp. in the Apocalypse: ἣν 
οὐδεὶς δύναται κλεῖσαι αὐτήν, Rev. iii. 8 (ace. to the true 
text); οἷς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς, Rev. vii. 2; add vs. 9; xiii. 12; 
xvii. 9; far oftener in the Sept. ; rare in Grk. writ. [fr. 
Callim. ep. 44]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 709; [B.$143,1]; W. 
§ 22, 4 b. where add to the exx. Hdian. 8, 6, 10 [5 Bekk.] 
ois ἐπιφοιτῶσι αὐτοῖς Tas λοιπὰς πόλεις πύλαι dvotyvvvro. 
But to this construction must not be referred Mt. iii. 12 
οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ, nor 1 Pet. ii. 24 ὃς τὰς 
ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν. For in the latter pas- 
sage αὐτός is in contrast with us, who must otherwise 
have paid the penalty of our sins; and in the former the 
sense is, ‘he holds his winnowing-shovel in his hand." 
6. Very often αὐτός is used rather laxly, where the 
subject or the object to which it must be referred is not 
expressly indicated, but must be gathered especially 
from some preceding name of a province or city, or from 
the context : Mt. iv. 23 (περιῆγεν τὴν Γαλιλαίαν διδάσκων ἐν 
ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν. 1. e. of the Galilzans); Acts viii. 5 
(Σαμαρείας ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς, i. €. τοῖς Sapapetrats) ; Xx. 2 
(αὐτούς. i. e. the inhabitants τῶν μερῶν ἐκείνων ) ; 2 Co. ii. 
13 (αὐτοῖς, i. e. the Christians of Troas); Mt. xix. 2 (ὄχλοι 
πολλοὶ καὶ ἐθεράπδυσεν αὐτούς, i. e. their sick); 1 Pet. iii. 
14 (φόβον αὐτῶν, i.e. of those who may be able κακῶσαι 
you, vs. 13); Lk. xxiii. 51 (τῇ βουλῇ αὐτῶν, i. e. of those 
with whom he had been a βουλευτής) ; Heb. viii. 8 (αὐτοῖς 
[L T WH Tr mre. αὐτούς : see μέμφομαι] i. e. τοῖς ἔχουσι 
τὴν διαθήκην τὴν πρώτην) ; Lk. ii. 22 (τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ αὐτῶν, 


αὐτοῦ 


‘of the purification prescribed by the law of Moses to 
women in child-bed); Jn. viii. 44 (ψεύστης ἐστὶν καὶ ὁ 
πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, i. e. of the liar; cf. Baumg.-Crusius and 
Meyer ad loc.). By this rather careless use of the pro- 
noun it came about that at length αὐτοί alone might be 
used for ἄνθρωποι: Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14, 17 
[here T WH Tr mrg. αὐτόν]; cf. W. $ 22, 3; B. 8127, 8. 
7. Sometimes, in relative sentences consisting of several 
members, the second member is not joined to the first by 
the relative és, but by a loose connection proceeds with 
xal αὐτός ; as, Lk. xvii. 31; Acts iii. 13 (ὃν ὑμεῖς παρεδώκατε 
“καὶ ἠρνήσασθε αὐτόν [LT WH om. Tr br. airóv]) ; 1 Co. 
viii. 6 (ἐξ οὗ rà πάντα καὶ ἡμεῖς els αὐτόν, for kai εἰς ὃν 
ἡμεῖς); 2 Pet. ii. 3. This 15 the usage likewise of Greek 
as wellas of Hebrew; οἵ. W. 149 (141); [B. 283 (248) ]; 
Bnhdy. p. 304. 

III. ὁ αὐτός. ἡ αὐτή. τὸ αὐτό, with the article, the same ; 
1. without a noun: ὁ αὐτός, immutable, Heb. i. 12; xiii. 
8, (Thue. 2, 61); τὸ αὐτό: --- ποιεῖν, Mt. v. 46 [ἢ GT 
WH txt., 411, T Tr WH]; Lk. vi. 33; λέγειν, to profess 
the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; ὀνειδίζειν, not in the same 
manner but reproached him with the same, cast on him 
the same reproach, Mt. xxvii. 44, (ὀνειδίζειν τοιαῦτα, Soph. 
Oed. Col. 1002). τὰ αὐτά: Acts xv. 27; Ro. ii. 1; Eph. 
vi. 9. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό [Rec* passim ἐπιτοαυτό] (Hesych. 
ὁμοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν αὐτὸν τόπον). to the same place, in the same 
place: Mt. xxii. 34; Acts i. 15; ii.1; 1 Co. xi. 20; xiv. 23, 
(Ps. ii. 2; 2.5.1. 13; 3 Mace. 1.1; Sus. 14); together: 
Lk. xvii. 35; Acts iii. 1 [L T Tr WH join it to ch. 
ii.; 1 Co. vii. 5]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, (Vulg. simul), together : 
Acts xiv. 1 (for 1m, Ex. xxvi. 24; 1 K. iii. 18; exx. fr. 
Grk. writ. are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 69 sqq.). 
Like adj. of equality 6 αὐτός is foll. by the dat.: ἕν καὶ 
τὸ αὐτὸ τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ, 1 Co. xi. 5, (Sap. xviii. 11; 4 Mace. 
viii. 5; x. 2, 13, and often in Grk. writ., cf. W. 150 (141)). 
2. With a noun added: Mt. xxvi. 44; Mk. xiv. 39 (τὸν 
«αὐτὸν λόγον) ; Lk. vi. 38[ RG L mrg.] (τῷ αὐτῷ μέτρῳ) ; 
Phil. i. 30; 1 Co. i. 10 {ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ vot); 1 Co. xii. 4 (τὸ 
δὲ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα), etc. τὰ αὐτά (with the force of a subst. : 
the same kind) τῶν παθημάτων, 1 Pet. v. 9. [Cf. ταὐτά. 

αὐτοῦ, prop. neuter genitive of the pron. αὐτός. in that 
place, there, here: Mt. xxvi. 36; [Lk. ix. 27 (R L ὧδε)7; 
Acts xv. 34 (a spurious vs. [see WH. App. ad loc. ]) ; xviii. 
19 (L Tr mrg. ἐκεῖ) ; xxi. 4 (Lehm. αὐτοῖς). 

αὑτοῦ, -ῆς, -oU, of himself, herself, itself, i. q. ἑαυτοῦ. q. v. 
Tt is very common in the edd. of the N. T. by the Elzevirs, 
‘Griesbach, Knapp, al; but Bengel, Matthaei, Lchm., 
Tdf., Trg. have everywhere substituted αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, ete. 
for αὑτοῦ, αὑτῷ, etc. “ For I have observed that the 
former are used almost constantly [not always then? 
Grimm] not only in uncial codd. of the viii. ix. and x. 
cent., but also in many others (and not N. T. codd. alone). 
That this is the correct mode of writing is proved also 
by numerous examples where the pron. is joined to prep- 
ositions; for these last are often found written not ed, 
ap, μεθ, καθ. ἀνθ, etc., but ez, am, uer, kar, avr." Taf. 
Proleg. ad N. T., ed. 2 p. xxvi. [ed. 8 p. 126]; cf. his 
Proleg. ad Sept. ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xxxiii. (not in 


8T E 





ἀφαιρέω 


ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it 
forth at length in his note on Heb. i. 3, vol. ii. 1 p. 
67 sqq. The question is hard to decide, not only be- 
cause the breathings and accents are wanting in the 
oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the 
mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he 
will speak in his own person, or ace. to the thought of 
the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority 
of the passages in the N. T. αὐτοῦ is correctly restored; 
but apparently we ought to write 8? αὑτοῦ ( Rec. ἑαυτοῦ 
[so L mrg. T WH]), Ro. xiv. 14 [Ltxt. Tr 8¢ αὐτ.7; eis 
αὗτόν, Col. i. 20 [al. eis abr-]; αὐτὸς περὶ αὑτοῦ [T Tr txt. 
WH ἑαυτοῦ], Jn.ix.21. Cf. W.151 (143); [B. 111 (97) sq.; 
Bp. Lehtft. on Col.l. ¢., and see esp. Hort in Westcott and 
Hort's Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq. ; these editors have in- 
troduced the aspirated form into their text “nearly twen- 
ty times” (e. g. Mt. vi. 34; Lk. xii. 17, 21; xxiii. 12; xxiv. 
12; Jn. ii. 24 ; xiii. 32; xix. 17; xx. 10; Acts xiv. 17; Ro. 
1.27; 2 Co.iii. 5; Eph.ii.15; Phil. iii. 21; 1 Jn. v. 10; 
Rev. viii. 6, ete.). Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 432]. 

αὐτόφωρος, -ov, (αὐτός and dap a thief, φωρά a theft), 
[fr. Soph. down]; prop. caught in the act of theft; then 
univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime; 
very often in the phrases ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ (as one word 
ἐπαυτοφώρῳ) τινὰ λαμβάνειν, pass. λαμβάνεσθαι, karaAap- 
βάνεσθαι, ἁλίσκεσθαι, (fr. Hdt. 6, 72 on), the crime being 
specified by a participle: μοιχευομένη, Jn. viii. 4 [R G]], 
as in Ael. nat. an. 11, 15; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn. 
[x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Nicias 4, 5; Eumen. 2, 2]; Sext. 
Empir. adv. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fábrie.].* 

αὐτό-χειρ, -pos, 6, (αὐτός and χείρ, cf. μακρύχειρ. ἀδικό- 
xetp), doing a thing with one’s own hand: Acts xxvii. 19. 
(Often in the tragedians and Attic orators.) * 

αὐχέω ; (in pres. and impf. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
but rare in prose); prop. to lift up the neck, hence to 
boast: μεγάλα αὐχεῖ, Jas. iii. 5 1, T Tr WH for R G pe- 
γαλαυχεῖ q. v.* 

αὐχμηρός, -á, -óv, (αὐχμέω to be squalid), squalid, dirty, 
(Xen., Plat., sqq.), and since dirty things are destitute of 
brightness, dark: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 τὸ 
λαμπρὸν ἢ στίλβον . . . ἢ τοὐναντίον αὐχμηρὸν kai ἀλαμπές. 
(Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.) * 

ἀφ-αιρέω, -G; fut. ἀφαιρήσω (Rev. xxii. 19 Ree. [fr. 
Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority; see Tdi.’s 
note]), and ἀφελῶ (ibid. GL T Tr WH; on this rarer fut. 
cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) ; 2 aor. ἀφεῖλον ; 1 fut. pass. 
ἀφαιρεθήσομαι ; Mid., pres. ἀφαιροῦμαι: 2 aor. ἀφειλόμην; 
[see aipéw]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to take from, 
take away, remove, carry off : ti, Lk. i. 25; to cut off, τὸ 
ὠτίον, Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv.47[L T Tr WH τὸ óráptov]; 
LK. xxii. 50 [τὸ οὖς], (τὴν κεφαλήν twos, 1 Mace. vii. 47; 
for N73, 1 S. xvii. 51); to take away, vi ἀπό with gen. 
of a thing, Rev. xxii. 19; ri ἀπό with gen. of pers. Lk. 
x. 42 [T WH om. L Tr br. ἀπό], (Gen. xxxi. 31; Job 
xxxvi 7; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], etc.); mid. (prop. to 
take away or bear off for one's self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev. 
iv. 10; Mic. ii. 8; in Grk. writ. with a simple gen. for 
ἀπό Twos); ἀφαιρεῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας to take away sins, of 


ἀφανής 
victims expiating them, Heb. x.4, (Jer. xi. 15; Sir. xlvii. 
11); mid. of God putting out of his sight, remembering 
no more, the sins committed by men, i.e. granting par- 
don for sins (see ἁμαρτία, 2 a.) : Ro. xi. 27.* 

ἀφανής, és, (atv), not manifest, hidden: Heb. iv. 13. 
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) [Cf. 
δῆλος, and Schmidt ch. 130.]* 

ἀφανίζω ; [Pass., pres. ἀφανίζομαι] ; 1 aor. ἠφανίσθην ; 
(ἀφανής); a. to snatch out of sight, to put out of view, to 
make unseen, (Xen. an. 3, 4, 8 ἥλιον νεφέλη παρακαλύψασα 
ἠφάνισε sc. τὴν πόλιν, Plat. Phil. 66 a. ἀφανίζοντες κρύ- 
mropev). Bb. to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume : 
Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. and Sept. [ef. B. 
§ 130, 5]); Pass. to perish: Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor 
Schrecken vergehen) ; to vanish away, Jas. iv. 14, (Hat. 7, 
6; 167; Plat. et sqq.). c. to deprive of lustre, render 
unsightly; to disfigure: τὸ πρόσωπον, Mt. vi. 16.* 

ἀφανισμός, -o9, ὁ, (ἀφανίζω, q. v-), disappearance ; de- 
struction: Heb. viii. 13. ((Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Leian., al.; often in Sept., particularly for Taw and 
mo») 

ἄφαντος, -ov, (fr. φαίνομαι), taken out of sight, made 
invisible: ἄφαντος ἐγένετο ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, he departed from 
them suddenly and in a way unseen, he vanished, Lk. 
xxiv. 31. (In poets fr. Hom. down; later in prose writ. 
also; Diod. 4, 65 ἐμπεσὼν els τὸ χάσμα... ἄφαντος ἐγένετο, 
Plut. orae. def. c. 1. Sometimes angels, withdrawing 
suddenly from human view, are said d p avets γίνεσθαι: 
2 Macc. iii. 34; Acta Thom. $$ 27 and 43.) * 

ἀφεδρών, -àvos, 6, apparently a word of Macedonian 
origin, which Suidas calls ‘barbarous’; the place into 
which the alvine discharges are voided; a privy, sink; 
found only in Mt. xv. 17; Mk. vii. 19. It appears to 
be derived not from ἀφ᾽ éSpav a podicibus, but from 
ἄφεδρος, the same Macedon. word which in Lev. xii. 5; 
xv. 19 sqq. answers to the Hebr. 7132 sordes menstruorum. 
C£. Fischer's full discussion of the word in his De vitiis 
lexx. N. T. p. 698 sqq.* 

ἀφειδία (ἀφείδεια Lehm., see s. v. e; £);-as, ἡ, (the dispo- 
sition of a man who is ἀφειδής, unsparing), unsparing 
severity: with gen. of the object, rod σώματος, Col. ii. 23 
(τῶν σωμάτων ἀφειδεῖν, Lys. 2, 25 (193,5); Diod. 13, 60; 
79 ete. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l. 6.1; in Plat. defin. p. 
412 d. apecdia means liberality).* 

ἀφ-εῖδον, i. q. ἀπεῖδον, q. v. Cf. B. 7; Mullach p. 
W. 45 (44); [ Tf. Proleg. p. 91 sq., Sept. ed. 4 Proleg. 
p. xxxiii.; Scrivener’s ed. of cod. Cantab. Intr. p. xlvii. 
(11); esp. WH. App. p. 143 sq., Meisterhans $ 20, and 
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 23; Curtius p. 687 sq.]. 

ἀφελότης, -ητος, ἡ, (fr. ἀφελής without rock, smooth, 
plain, and this fr. φελλεύς rocky land), simplicity, [ A.V. 
singleness]: καρδίας, Acts ii. 46, (found only here [and in 
eccl. writ.]. The Greeks used ddéAea).* 

ἀφ-ελπίζω, i. q. ἀπελπίζω, q. v.; cf. ἀφεῖδον. 

ἄφ-εσις, -eos, ἡ, (ἀφίημι) ; 1. release, as from bond- 
age, imprisonment, etc.: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. Ixi. 1 sq.; 
Polyb. 1, 79,12, ete.). 2. ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν forgiveness, 


99. 


Z4) 


pardon, of sins (prop. the letting them go, as if they had | 


88 








ἀφίημι 


not been committed [see at length Trench § xxxiii.])» 
remission of their penalty: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. i. 4; Lk. 
i. 77; iii. 3; xxiv. 47 ; Acts 1i. 38; v. 31; x. 435 xiii. 88; 
xxvi. 18; Col. i. 14; τῶν παραπτωμάτων, Eph. i. 7; and 
simply ἄφεσις : Mk. iii. 29; Heb. ix. 22; x. 18, (φόνου, 
Plat. legg. 9 p. 869 d.; ἐγκλημάτων, Diod. 20, 44 [so 
Dion. Hal. l. 8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; esp. 7, 64; 
ἁμαρτημάτων. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 17; al.]).* 

ἁφή, -ns 7. (mro to fasten together, to fit), (Vulg. 


Junctura [and nezus]), bond, connection, [ A. V. joint (see 


esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below)]: Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 
19. (Plut. Anton. c. 27.) * 

ἀφθαρσία, -as, ἡ. (ἄφθαρτος, cf. ἀκαθαρσία), (Tertull. 
and subseq. writ. incorruptibilitas, Vulg. incorruptio [and 
incorruptela ]), incorruption, perpetuity: τοῦ κόσμου, Philo 
de incorr. mund. § 11; it is ascribed to τὸ θεῖον in Plut. 
Arist. c. 6; of the body of man exempt from decay after 
the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (ἐν ἀφθ. sc. dv), 50, 53 sq.;. 
of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 Macc. 
xvii. 12), Ro. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 10. τινὰ ἀγαπᾶν ἐν ἀφθαρ- 
cia to love one with never diminishing love, Eph. vi. 
24 [ef. Mey. ad loc. ‘The word seems to have the mean- 
ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Rec.*t].* 

ἄφθαρτος, -ov, (φθείρω), uncorrupted, not liable to cor- 
ruption or decay, imperishable: of things, 1 Co. ix. 25; 
1 Pet. i. 4, 23; iii. 4; [ἀφθ. κήρυγμα τῆς αἰωνίου σωτηρίας, 
Mk. xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conelusion']. im- 
mortal: of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52; of God, Ro. i. 
23; 1 Tim. i. 17. (Sap. xii. 1; xviii. 4. [Aristot.],. 
Plut, Leian., al [Cf. Trench § Ixviii.])* 

&-p0opla, -as, 7. (ἄφθορος uncorrupted, fr. φθείρω), un- 
corruptness: Tit. ii. 7 L Τ Tr WII; see ἀδιαφθορία." 

ἀφ-ίημι ; pres. 2 pers. sing. ἀφεῖς (fr. the form apéw, 
Rey. ii. 20 for Ree. ἐᾷς), [3 pers. plur. ἀφιοῦσιν Rey. xi. 
9 'Tdf. edd. 2, 7, fr. a form ἀφιέω ; cf. D. 48 (42)]; impf. 3 
pers. sing. ἤφιε. with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i. 
34; xi. 16, fr. the form ἀφίω ; whence also pres. 1 pers. 
plur. ἀφίομεν Lk. xi. 4 L T Tr WH for ἀφίεμεν Rec. and 
3 pers. ἀφίουσιν Rev. xi. 9 L T Tr WH; [see WT. App. 
p. 167]; fut. ἀφήσω; 1 aor. ἀφῆκα, 2 pers. sing. -«es Rev. 
ii. 4 T Tr WH [ef. κοπιάω ] ; 2 aor. impv. ἄφες, ἄφετε, subj. 
3 pers. sing. ἀφῇ, 2 pers. plur. ἀφῆτε, [inf. ἀφεῖναι (Mt. 
xxii, 28 LT. Dr WH; Dk 22] txts Τὸ 1 ΜΠ 
ptep. ἀφείς, ἀφέντες ; Pass., pres. ἀφίεμαι, [yet 3 pers. 
plur. dpiovra Jn. xx. 23 WH mrg. ete.; cf. ἀφίω above]; 
pf. 3 pers. plur. ἀφέωνται (a Doric form [cf. W. § 14, 3 a.; 
B 49 (42); Kiihner § 285, 4], Mt. ix. 2,5; Mk. ii. 5, [9] 
— in both these Gospels L [exe. in Mk. mrg.] T Tr WH 
have restored the pres. 3 pers. plur. ἀφίενται; Lk. ν. 20, 
23; vii. 47, [48]; Jn. xx. 23 L txt. T Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
1 Jn. ii. 12) ; 1 aor. ἀφέθην : fut. ἀφεθήσομαι ; cf. W. 8 14, 
3; B. 48 (42); [WH. App. p. 167; Veitch s. v. tue]; 
(fr. ἀπό and tinue); [fr. Hom. down]; to send from (ἀπό) 
one’s self; 1. to send away; a. to bid go away or 
depart: τοὺς ὄχλους, Mt. xiii. 36 [al. refer this to 3 be- 
low]; τὴν γυναῖκα. of a husband putting away his wife, 
1 Co. vii. 11-13, (Hdt. 5, 39; and subst. ἄφεσις, Plut. 
Pomp. e. 42, 6). b. to send forth, yield up, emit: τὸ: 


ἀφίημι 


πνεῦμα, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 (τὴν ψυχήν, Gen. xxxv. 
18; Hdt. 4, 190 and often in other Grk. writ. [see πνεῦμα, 
27), φωνήν to utter a cry (emittere vocem, Liv. 1, 58), Mk. 
xv. 37 (Gen. xlv. 2 and often in Grk. writ. ; [cf. Heinichen 
on Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 17]). c. to let go, let alone, let be; 
a. to disregard: Mt. xv. 14. f. to leave, not to discuss 
now, a topie, used of teachers, writers, speakers, etc.: 
Heb. vi. 1, (Eur. Andr. 392; Theophr. char. praef. $ 3; 
for other examples fr. Grk. writ. see Bleek on Heb. vol. 
ii. 2 p. 144 sq.), [al. take the word in Heb. l. c. as expres- 
sive of the duty of the readers, rather than the purpose of 
the writer; and consequently refer the passage to 3 be- 
low]. y. toomit, neglect: Mt. xxiii. 23, [Lk. xi. 42 R G]; 
Mk. vii. 8; Ro.i.27. d. to iet go, give up, a debt, by not 
demanding it (opp. to κρατεῖν, Jn. xx. 23), i. e. to remit, 
forgive: τὸ δάνειον, Mt. xviii. 27; τὴν ὀφειλήν, Mt. xviii. 
32; rà ὀφειλήματα, Mt. vi. 12; τὰ παραπτώματα. vi. 14 sq. ; 
Mk. xi. 25 sq. [T Tr WH om. verse 26]; τὰς ἁμαρτίας. rà 
ἁμαρτήματα, τὰς ἀνομίας, Mt. ix. 2,5 sq.; xii. 31; Mk. ii. 5, 
7; iii. 28; Lk. v. 20 sq. 23; Ro. iv. 7 (fr. Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 
1); 1 Jn. i. 9; Jas. v. 15, (Is. xxii. 14 ; xxxiii. 24, etc.) ; 
T. ἐπίνοιαν τῆς καρδίας. Acts viii. 22, (τὴν αἰτίαν, Hat. 6, 
30; τὰ χρέα, Ael. v. h. 14, 24); absolutely, ἀφιέναι τινί to 
forgive one: Mt. xii. 32; xviii. 21, 35; Mk. iv. 12; Lk. 
xi.4; xii. 10; xvii. 3 sq. ; xxiii. 34[L br. WH reject the 
pass.]. e. to give up, keep no longer: τὴν πρώτην ἀγάπην, 
Rev.ii.4. 2. to permit, allow, not to hinder; a. foll. by 
a pres. inf. [ B. 258 (222)]: Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16 ἄφετε 


ἔρχεσθαι kai μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά, Mt. xiii. 30; Mk. i. 34; Jn. 


xi. 44; xviii. 8. by the aor. inf.: Mt. viii. 22; xxiii. 13 
(14); Mk. v. 37; vii. 12, 27; Lk. viii. 51; ix. 60; xii. 39; 
Rev.xi.9. b. without an inf.: Mt. iii. 15 (ἄφες ἄρτι per- 
mit it just now). with acc. of the pers. or thing permitted : 
Mt. iii. 15 τότε ἀφίησιν αὐτόν, Mk. v. 19; xi. 6; xiv. 6; Lk. 
xiii. 8; Jn. xii. 7 RG; xi. 48; Acts v. 38(L T Tr WH; 
RG ἐάσατε) ; Rev. ii. 20 (Rec. ἐᾷς). c. ἀφίημι τινί τι; to 
give up a thing to one: Mt. v. 40 (ἄφες αὐτῷ kai τὸ ἱμάτιον). 
d. foll. by (va: Mk. xi. 16; Jn. xii. 7 LT Tr WH, a later 
construction, cf. W. $ 44, 8; B. 238 (205). e. foll. by 
the simple hortative subjunc.: Mt. vii. 4; Lk. vi. 42 
(ἄφες ἐκβάλωγ ; Mt. xxvii. 49; Mk. xv. 36, (ἄφετε ἴδωμεν) ; 
Epict. diss. 1, 9, 15 ἄφες δείξωμεν, 3, 12, 15 ἄφες ἴδω. 
C£. B. 209 (181) sq. ; W. 285 (268). 3. to leave, go 
away from one; to depart from any one, a. in order to 
go to another place: Mt. xxii. 22; xxvi. 44; Mk. viii. 13 
(Mt. xvi. 4 καταλιπών) ; xii. 12; xiii. 34; Jn. iv. 3; xvi. 
28. b. to depart from one whom one wishes to quit: 
Mt. iv. 11; so of diseases departing, ἀφῆκέν twa ὁ πυρετός, 
Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; Lk. iv. 39; Jn.iv.52. c. to de- 
part from one and leave him to himself, so that all mutual 
claims are abandoned : τὸν πατέρα, Mt. iv. 22; Mk. i. 20; 
Mt. xviii. 12 (Lk. xv. 4 καταλείπει). Thus also ἀφιέναι 
τὰ ἑαυτοῦ to leave possessions, home, ete.: Mt. iv. 20; 
xix. 27, 29; Mk. i. 18; x. 28sq.; Lk. v. 11; xviii. 28 sq. 
d. to desert one (wrongfully) : Mt. xxvi. 56; Mk. xiv. 
50; Jn.x.12. e. to goaway leaving something behind : 
Mt. v. 24; Jn.iv.28. f. to leave one by not taking him 
as a companion : opp. to παραλαμβάνειν, Mt. xxiv. 40 sq.; 


89 ! 





ἀφομοιόω. 


Lk. xvii. 34 sq. 6. to leave on dying, leave behind one: 
τέκνα, γυναῖκα, Mt. xxii. 25; Mk. xii. 20, 22, (Lk. xx. 31 
καταλείπω). h. to leave so that what is left may re- 
main, leave remaining: οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον: 
[or λίθῳ], Mt. xxiv.2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi.6. i. ἀφιέναι 
foll. by the acc. of a noun or pron. with an ace. of the 
predicate [B. $ 144, 18]: Lk. x. 30 (ἡμιθανῆ) ; Jn. xiv. 
18 (τινὰ ὀρφανόν) ; Mt. xxiii. 38 ; Lk. xiii. 35, (but Lehm. 
om. ἔρημος in both pass, WH txt. om. in Mt., G T Tr 
WH om. in Luke; that being omitted, ἀφιέναι means to 
abandon, to leave destitute of God's help); Aets xiv.17 
(ἀμάρτυρον ἑαυτόν [LT Tr αὐτόν (WH air. q. v.) ])- 

ἀφ-ικνέομαι, -οὔμαι : 2 aor. ἀφικόμην ; (ἱκνέομαι to come) ; 
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to come from 
(ἀπό) a place (but often the prep. has almost lost its 
force) ; to come to, arrive at; in the N. T. once, tropically : 
Ro. xvi. 19 (ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ eis πάντας ἀφίκετο your obedi- 
ence has reached the ears of [A. V. is come abroad unto] 
all men; Sir. xlvii. 16 eis νήσους ἀφίκετο τὸ ὄνομά σου. 
Joseph. antt. 19, 1, 16 eis τὸ θέατρον... . ἀφίκετο 6 Aóyos).* 

ἀ φιλ-άγαθος, -ov, (a priv. and φιλάγαθος), opposed to 
goodness and good men, [R. V. no lover of good]; found 
only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.* 

ἀφιλ-άργυρος, -ov, (a priv. and φιλάργυρος), not loving: 
money, not avaricious; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1 
Tim. iii. 3; Heb. xiii. 5. [Cf. Trench § xxiv.]* 

ἄφ-ιξις, -ews, 7, (ἀφικνέομαι), in Grk. writ. generally 
arrival; more rarely departure, as Hdt. 9, 17; Dem. 
1463, 7; [1484, 8]; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,47; 3 Mace. vii- 
18; and so in Acts xx. 29.* 

ἀφτίστημι: 1 aor. ἀπέστησα; 2 aor. ἀπέστην; Mid., 
pres. ἀφίσταμαι, impv. ἀφίστασο (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.; cf. 
W. § 14,1 e.); [impf. ἀφιστάμην]; fut. ἀποστήσομαι; 
1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, toy 
make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. to 
excite to revolt: Acts v. 37 (ἀπέστησε Aaóv . . . ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 
drew away after him; twa ἀπό twos, Deut. vii. 4, and in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively, 
in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, to stand off, stand aloof, in 
various senses [as in Grk. writ.] acc. to the context: ἀπό 
with gen. of pers. to go away, depart, from any one, Lk. 
xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9; cf. Mt. vii. 23 ἀποχωρεῖτε ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ): 
Acts xii. 10; xix. 9; to desert, withdraw from, one, Acts 
xv. 38; to cease to vez one, Lk. iv.13; Acts v. 38; xxii. 
29; 2 Co. xii. 8; to fall away, become faithless, ἀπὸ θεοῦ, 
Heb. iii. 12; to shun, flee from, ἀπὸ τῆς ἀδικίας, 2 Tim. 
ii. 19. Mid. to withdraw one’s self from: absol. to fall 
away, Lk. viii. 13 ; [τῆς πίστεως, 1 Tim. iv. 1, cf. W. 427, 
428 (398)]; to keep one’s self away from, absent one’s 
self from, Lk. ii. 37 (οὐκ ἀφίστατο ἀπὸ [T Tr WH om. 
ἀπὸ] τοῦ ἱεροῦ, she was in the temple every day) ; from 
any one’s society or fellowship, 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.* 

ἄφνω, adv., (akin to αἴφνης, see in αἰφνίδιος above), sud- 
denly: Acts ii. 2; Xvi. 26; xxviii. 6. (Sept.; [Aeschyl.], 
Thue. and subseq. writ.) * 

ἀφόβως, adv., (φόβος), without fear, boldiy: Lk. i. 74; 
Phil. i. 14; 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down.]* 

ἀφ-ομοιόω, -à : [ pf. pass. ptep. ἀφωμοιωμένος (on augm. 


ἀφοράω 


90 


ἀχλύς 


see WH. App. p. 161)]; to cause a model to pass off | ἀφευπνόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἀφύπνωσα ; (ὑπνόω to put to sleep, 


(dmó) into an image or shape like it, — to express itself in 
it, (cf. ἀπεικάζειν, ἀπεικονίζειν, ἀποπλάσσειν, ἀπομιμεῖσθαι); 
to copy ; to produce a fac-simile : τὰ καλὰ εἴδη, of painters, 
Xen. mem. 3, 10, 2; often in Plato. Pass. to be made 
like, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Ep. Jer. 4 (5), 
62 (63), 70 (71); and in Plato.) * 

ἀφ-οράω, -@; to turn the eyes away from other things 
and fix them on something; cf. ἀποβλέπω. trop. to turn 
one's mind to: εἴς twa, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 66, 2 d.], (εἰς 
θεόν, 4 Mace. xvii. 10; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. ef. Bleek 
on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 862). Further, cf. ἀπεῖδον." 

ἀφ-ορίζω ; impf. ἀφώριζον ; Attic fut. ἀφοριῶ Mt. xxv. 32 
(T WH d$opíao); xiii. 49, [W. $13, 1 οὐ; B. 37 (32)]; 
1 aor. ἀφώρισα; Pass, pf. ptep. ἀφωρισμένος ; 1 aor. 
impv. ἀφορίσθητε ; (ὁρίζω to make a ὅρος or boundary) ; 
to mark off from (ἀπό) others by boundaries, to limit, to 
separate: ἑαυτόν, from others, Gal. ii. 12; τοὺς μαθητάς, 
from those unwilling to obey the gospel, Acts xix. 9; ἐκ 
μέσου τινῶν, Mt. xiii. 49; ἀπό twos, xxv. 32. Pass. in a 
reflex. sense: 2 Co. vi. 17. absol.: in a bad sense, 
to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22; in a good sense, τινὰ 
εἴς τι, lo. appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do 
something), Acts xiii. 2; Ro. i. 1; τινά foll. by a telic 
inf., Gal. i. 15 [(?) seethe Comm. adloc.]. ([Soph.], Eur., 
Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al.; very often in Sept. esp. for 
5n, 32, OD, 70, ete.) * 

ἀφ-ορμή, -ῆς, 7, (ἀπὸ and ὁρμή q. v.) ; 1. prop. a 
place from which a movement or attack is made, a base 
of operations: Thue. 1, 90 (τὴν Πελοπόννησον πᾶσιν ava- 
χώρησίν τε καὶ ἀφορμὴν ἱκανὴν εἶναι) ; Polyb. 1,41,6. 2. 
metaph. that by which endeavor is excited and from which 
it goes forth ; that which gives occasion and supplies matter 
for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail 
ourselves of in attempting or performing anything: Xen. 
mem. 3, 12, 4 (τοῖς ἑαυτῶν παισὶ καλλίους ἀφορμὰς εἰς τὸν 
βίον καταλείπουσι). and often in Grk. writ. ; λαμβάνειν, to 
take occasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 11 ; διδόναι, 2 
Co. v. 12; 1 Tim. v. 14, (3 Macc. iii. 2; both phrases often 
also in Grk. writ.); 2 Co. xi. 12; Gal. v. 13. On themean- 
ings of this word see Viger. ed. Herm. p. 81 sq.; Phryn. 
ed. Lob. p. 223 sq. ; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 304]. * 

ἀφρίζω ; (ἀφρός) ; to foam: Mk.ix.18,20. (Soph. El. 
719; Diod. 3, 10; Athen. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al].) 
[Cowr.: éz-ajpito.]* 

ἀφρός, -οὔ, ὁ, foam: Lk. ix. 39. 
[21. ].) * 

ἀφροσύνη, -7s, 7, (ἄφρων), foolishness, folly, senseless- 
ness: 2 Co. xi. 1, 17, 21 ; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

ἄφρων, -ovos, 6, 7j, -ov, τό, (fr. a priv. and φρήν, cf. ei- 
pov, copper), [fr. Hom. down], prop. without reason 
([εἴδωλα, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4]; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14), 
senseless, foolish, stupid ; without reflection or intelligence, 
acting rashly: Lk. xi. 40; xii. 20; Ro. ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 
36; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to φρόνιμος, asin Prov. xi. 29) ; 
2 Co. xii. 6, 11; Eph. v. 17 (opp. to συνιέντες) ; 1 Pet. 
ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt ch. 147 $ 17.]* 


(Hom. Il. 20, 168; 


vii. 22. 





to sleep); a. to awaken from sleep (Anthol. Pal. 9, 517, 
5). b. to fall asleep, to fall off to sleep: Lk. viii. 23; 
for this the ancient Greeks used καθυπνόω; see Lobeck 
ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1, 1.]* 

ἀφ-υστερέω, -@: (a later Grk. word); 1. to be be- 
hindhand, come too late (ἀπό so as to be far from, or to 
fail, a person or thing); used of persons not present at 
the right time: Polyb. 22, 5, 2; Posidon. ap. Athen. 4, 
37 ((. 6. 4 p.151e.); [al]: ἀπὸ ἀγαθῆς ἡμέρας to fail (to 
make use of) a good day, to let the opportunity pass by, 
Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fail, to with- 
draw, take away from, defraud: τὸ μάννα σου οὐκ ἀφυστέ- 
pnoas ἀπὸ στόματος αὐτῶν, Neh. ix. 20 (for }»} to with- 
hold); pf. pass. ptep. ἀφυστερημένος (μισθός), Jas. v. 4 
T Tr WH after 8 B *, [Ree. ἀπεστερημένος, see ἀποστε- 
peo, also s. v. ἀπό, 11. 2 d. bb., p. 8951." 

ἄφωνος, -ov, (φωνή), voiceless, dumb; without the faculty 
of speech; used of idols, 1 Co. xii. 2 (ef. Ps. exv. 5 (exiii. 
13); Hab. ii. 18) ; of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. xiv. 10 
τοσαῦτα γένη φωνῶν καὶ οὐδὲν αὐτῶν [L 'T Tr WII om. 
αὐτ.} ἄφωνον, i. e. there is no language destitute of the 
power of language, [ R. V. txt. no kind (of voiee) is with- 
out signification], (cf. the phrases Bios ἀβίωτος a life un- 
worthy of the name of life, χάρις ἄχαρις). used of one 
that is patiently silent or dumb: ἀμνός, Acts viii. 32 fr. 
Ts. liii. 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl. 
down.)* 

"Axat [WH "Axas ], 6, (so Sept. for Ix possessing, pos- 
sessor; in Joseph. ’Ayagys, -ov, 6), Ahaz, king of Judah, 
[fr. c. B. c. 741 to c. n. c. 725; cf. B. D. s. v. Israel, king- 
dom of], (2 K. xvi. 1 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq.; Is. vii. 1 
sqq.) : Mt. i. 9.* 

᾿Αχαΐα [WH ᾿Αχαία (see I, c)], -as, ἡ, Achaia; 1. 
in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern 
Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. p. c. 146 
on [yet see Diet. of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em- 
bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. Τὶ: 
Acts xviii. 12, 27; xix. 21; Ro. xv. 26; xvi. 5 Rec.; 1 
Co. xvi. 15; 2100.1. 1; ix. 2; xi. 10; 1'Th.i.7sq. [B.D. 
ΒΥ 

᾿Αχαϊκός, -οὔ, 6, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of 
Corinth : 1 Co. xvi. 17.* 

ἀχάριστος, -ov, (χαρίζομαι), ungracious; a. unpleasing 
(Hom. Od. 8, 236; 20, 392; Xen. oec. 7, 37; al.). b. 
unthankful (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 90 down): Lk. 
vi 35; 2 Tim. ii. 2. (Sir. xxix. 17; Sap. xvi. 29.)* 

['Axas, Mt. i. 9 WH; see"Axac.] 

"Axelp, ὁ, Achim, prop. name of one of the ancestors 
of Christ, not mentioned in the O. T.: Mt. i. 14.* 

ἀχειρο-ποίητος, -ov, (χειροποίητος. q. v.), not made with 
hands : Mk. xiv. 58; 2 Co. v. 1; Col. ii. 11 [where cf. Bp. 
Lehtft.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Sept. 
[W. $34, 3].)* 

[᾿Αχελδαμάχ : Acts i. 19 T Tr for R G ᾿Ακελδαμά q. v.] 

ἀχλύς, -vos, 7, & mist, dimness, (Lat. caligo), esp. over 
the eyes, (a poetie word, often in Hom. ; then in Hesiod, 
Aeschyl.; in prose writ. fr. [ Aristot. meteor. 2, 8 p. 367°, 


ἀχρεῖος 


17 etc. and] Polyb. 34, 11, 15 on; [of a cataract, Dios- 
cor. Cf. Trench § 6.7): Acts xiii.11. (Joseph. antt. 9, 
4, 3 τὰς τῶν πολεμίων ὄψεις ἀμαυρῶσαι τὸν θεὸν παρεκάλει 
ἀχλὺν αὐταῖς ἐπιβαλόντα. Metaph. of the mind, Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6 ἀχλύος γέμειν.) * 

ἀχρεῖος, -ov, (χρεῖος useful), useless, good for nothing : 
Mt. xxv. 30 (δοῦλος, cf. Plat. Ale. i. 17 p. 122 b. τῶν 
οἰκετῶν τὸν ἀχρειότατον) ; by an hyperbole of pious mod- 
esty in Lk. xvii. 10 ‘the servant’ calls himself ἀχρεῖον, 
because, although he has done all, yet he has done noth- 
ing except what he ought to have done; accordingly 
he possesses no merit, and could only claim to be called 
* profitable; should he do more than what he is bound to 
do; cf. Bengel ad loc. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54 ἀχρεῖον kai ἀνωφελές. Sept. 
2 S. vi. 22 equiv. to Daw low, base.) [Sywn. οἵ. Tittmann 
ii. p. 11 sq.; Ellic. on Philem. 11.]* 

ἀχρειόω, -ὥ: 1 aor. pass. ἠχρειώθην ; (ἀχρεῖος, q. v.) ; to 
make useless, render unserviceable: of character, Ro. iii. 
12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3), where L mrg. T Tr WH read 
ἠχρεώθησαν fr. the rarer dxpeos i. q. ἀχρεῖος. (Several 
times prop. in Polyb.) * 

ἄ-χρηστος, -ov, (χρηστός, and this fr. xpdopat), useless, 
unprofitable: Philem. 11 (here opp. to εὔχρηστος). (In 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach. 70; Theogn.] down.) 
[Syn. ef. Tittmann ii. 11 sq.; Trench $ c. 17; Ellic. on 
Philem. 11.]* 

ἄχρι and ἄχρις (the latter of which in the N. T. is 
nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be- 
fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is 
so far regarded that we almost constantly find ἄχρι ἧς 
ἡμέρας, ἄχρις ob, cf. B. 10 (9) ; [W. 42]; and ἄχρι o? is 
not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 25 by L T 
Tr WH and Lk. xxi. 24 by T Tr WH; [to these in- 
stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 T WH ; xv. 25 
T WH; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148) ; on the 
usage in secular authors (‘where -pz is the only Attic 
form, but in later auth. the Epic -p:s prevailed’, L. and 
S. s. v.) ef. Lobeck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq.; 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 64; further, K/otz ad Devar. 
vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq. ]) ; a particle indicating the terminus 
ad quem. (On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz u. s. p. 
224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep. now of a 
conj., even to; until, to the time that; (on its derivation 
see below). 1. asa Preposition it takes the gen. 
[ef. W. $54, 6], and is used a. of Place: Acts xi. 5; 
xiii. 6; xx. 4 [T Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]; xxviii. 
15; 2 Co. x. 13 sq.; Heb. iv. 12 (see μερισμός, 2); Rev. 
xiv. 20; xviii. 5. b. of Time: ἄχρι καιροῦ, until a sea- 
son that seemed to him opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but cf. 
καιρός, 2 a.]; until a certain time, for a season, Acts 
xiii. 11; [ἄχρι (vel μέχρι, q. v. 1 a.) τοῦ θερισμοῦ, Mt. xiii. 
30 WH mrg. cf. ἕως, IT. 5]; ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας until the day 
that ete. Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; 
[ἄχρι (Rec. et al. ἕως) τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς, Acts i. 22 Tdf.]; 
ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας and ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, Acts 


91 





ἄψυχος 


ii. 29; xxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; ἄχρι [-ρις R 6] ἡμερῶν πέντε 
even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five 
days, Acts xx. 65 ἄχρις [-ρι T Tr WH] αὐγῆς, Acts xx. 11; 
ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i. 5; ἄχρι τέλους, Heb. 
vi. 11; Rev. ii. 26; see besides, Acts iii. 21; [xxii. 22]; 
Ro. 1. 13);) v- 195/11 60»1»:: 113) 2 (Con τι 15. Gal v2 
Phil. i. 6 [-p. L TWH]. c. of Manner and Degree: 
ἄχρι θανάτου, Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto 
death) ; Rev. ii. 10 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev. 
xii. 11; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb. 
iv. 12 [see μερισμός, 2]. d. joined to the rel. οὗ (ἄχρις 
οὗ for ἄχρι τούτου, ᾧ) it has the force of a conjunc- 
tion, until, to the time that: foll. by the indic. pret., of 
things that actually occurred and up to the beginning of 
which something continued, Acts vii. 18 (ἄχρις οὗ 
ἀνέστη βασιλεύς) ; xxvii. 33. foll. by a subj. aor. having 
the force of a fut. p, Lk. xxi. 24 L T Tr WH; Ro. xi. 
25; 1 Co. xi. 26 [Rec. ἄχρις οὗ àv]; Gal. iii. 19 [not 
WH txt. (see 2 below)]; iv. 19 [T Tr WH μέχρις]; 
Rev. vii. 3 Rec.*7 G; ἄχρις οὗ ἄν until, whenever it may 
be [cf. W. § 42, 5 b.], 1 Co. xv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev. ii. 25. 
with indic. pres. as long as : Heb. iii. 13 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. 
and B. 231 (199). 2. ἄχρις without οὗ has the force 
of a simple Conjunction, until, to the time that: 
foll. by subj. aor., Lk. xxi. 24 RG; Rev. vii. 3 L T Tr 
WH; xv. 8; [xvii. 17 Rec.]; xx. 3, [5 GL T Tr WH]; 
with indic. fut., Rev. xvii. 17 [L T Tr WH]; [ἄχρις dv 
foll. by subj. aor., Gal. iii. 19 WH txt. (see 1 d. above) ]. 
Since ἄχρι is akin to ἀκή and dxpos [but cf. Vaniéek p. 
22; Curtius § 166], and μέχρι to μῆκος, μακρός, by the 
use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is 
said to extend is likened to a height, by the use of 
μέχρι; to a length; ἄχρι, indicating ascent, signifies up 
to; μέχρι, indicating extent, is unto, as far as; cf. Klotz 
u.s p.225 sq. But this primitive distinction is often 
disrezarded, and each particle used of the same thing; 
cf. ἄχρι τέλους, Heb. vi. 11; μέχρι τέλους. ibid. iii. 6, 14; 
Xen. symp. 4, 37 περίεστί μοι kai ἐσθίοντι ἄχρι TOU μὴ 
πεινῆν ἀφικέσθαι kai πίνοντι μέχρι τοῦ μὴ διψῆν. Cf. Fritz- 
sche on Ro. v. 13, vol. i. p. 308 sqq.; [Ellic. on 2 Tim. 
ii. 9. "Axpr occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke; else- 
where in the four Gospels only in Mt. xxiv. 38.].* 

ἄχυρον; -ov, τό, a stalk of grain from which the kernels 
have been beaten out; straw broken up by a threshing- 
machine, chaff: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. (In Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt. 4, 72; Xen. oec. 18. 1, 2, 6 down; mostly in plur. 
τὰ ἄχυρα: in Job xxi. 18 Sept. also of the chaff wont to 
be driven away by the wind.) * 

ἀ ψευδής, -és, (ψεῦδος), without lie, truthful: Tit. i. 2. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. theog. 233 down.) * 

ἄψινθος, -ov, 7, wormwood, Absinthe: Rev. viii. 11; ὁ 
ἄψινθος ibid. is given as a prop. name to the star which 
fell into the waters and made them bitter.* 

ἄψυχος, -ov, (ψυχή), without a soul, lifeless: 1 Co. xiv. 7. 
(In Grk. writ. from [Archil., Simon. and] Aeschylus 
down.) * 


B 


Baar 


Βαάλ [so accented also by Pape (Eigenn. s. v.), Kue- 
nen and Cobet (Ro. as below); but L T (yet the name 
of the month, 1 K. vi. 5 (38), Baad) Tr WH ete. Baad ; 
so Etym. Magn. 194, 19; Suid. 1746 a. ete. Dind. in 
Steph. Thesaur. s. v. Baad or Bada ], 6, 7, an indecl. noun 
(Hebr. 5y3, Chald. 3 contr. fr. 9373), lord: Ro. xi. 4. 
This was the name of the supreme heavenly divinity 
worshipped by the Shemitie nations (the Phenicians, 
Canaanites, Babylonians, Assyrians), often also by the 
Israelites themselves, and represented by the Sun: τῇ 
Badd, Ro. xi. 4. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. 
and J. G. Müller in Herzog i. p. 637 sqq.; Merx in Schen- 
kel i. 322 sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm p. 126 sq. Since 
in this form the supreme power of nature generating 
all things, and consequently a male deity, was wor- 
shipped, with which the female deity Astarte was as- 
sociated, it is hard to explain why the Sept. in some 
places say 6 Badd (Num. xxii. 41; Judg. ii. 13; 1 K. xvi. 
31; xix. 18, ete.), in others ἡ Badd (Hos. ii. 8; 1 S. vii. 
4,ete. [yet see Dillmann, as below, p. 617]). Among 
the various conjectures on this subject the easiest is 
this: that the Sept. called the deity ἡ Badd in derision, 
as weak and impotent, just as the Arabs call idols 
goddesses and the Rabbins niiow; so Gesenius in 
Rosenmiiller’s Repert. i. p. 139 and Tholuck on Ro. l. c.; 
[yet cf. Dillmann, as below, p. 602; for other opinions 
and reff. see Meyer ad loc.; cf. W. $27, 6 N. 1. But 
Prof. Dillmann shows (in the Monatsbericht d. Akad. zu 
Berlin, 16 Juni 1881, p. 601 sqq.), that the Jews (just 
as they abstained from pronouncing the word Jehovah) 
avoided uttering the abhorred name of Baal (Ex. xxiii. 
13). Asasubstitute in Aramaie they read Mv, som 
or 82223, and in Greek αἰσχύνη (cf. 1 K. xviii. 19, 25). 
This substitute in Grk. was suggested by the use of 
the fem. article. Hence we find in the Sept. 7 B. every- 
where in the prophetic bks. Jer., Zeph., Hos., ete., while 
in the Pentateuch it does not prevail, nor even in Judges, 
Sam., Kings, (exc. 1 S. vii. 4; 2 K. xxi. 3). It disap- 
pears, too, (when the worship of Baal had died out) in 
the later versions of Aq., Sym., ete. The apostle's use in 
Ro. l. c. aecords with the sacred eustom; ef. the substi- 
tution of the Hebr. nwa in Ish-bosheth, Mephi-bosheth, 
etc. 2 S. ii. 8, 10; iv. 4 with 1 Chr. viii. 33, 34, also 2 S. 
xi 21 with Judg. vi. 32; etc.]* 

Βαβυλών, -Gvos, ἡ, (Hebr. 533 fr. 555 to confound, ace. 
to Gen. xi. 9; cf. Aeschyl. Pers. 52 Βαβυλὼν δ᾽ ἡ πολύ- 
χρυσος πάμμικτον ὄχλον πέμπει σύρδην. But more cor- 
rectly, as it seems, fr. 53 2W3 the gate i. e. the court or 
city of Belus [Assyr. Báb-Il the Gate of God; (perh. of 
Il the supreme God); ef. Schrader, Keilinschr. u. d. 


βαθύνω 


Alt. Test. 2te Aufl. p. 127 sq.; Oppert in the Zeitsch. d. 
Deutsch. Morg. Gesellschaft, viii. p. 595]), Babylon, 
formerly a very celebrated and large city, the residence 
of the Babylonian kings, situated on both banks of the 
Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius 
Ilystaspis threw down its gates and walls, and Xerxes 
destroyed [?] the temple of Belus. At length the city 
was reduced almost to a solitude, the population hav- 
ing been drawn off by the neighboring Seleucia, built 
on the Tigris by Seleucus Nicanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin- 
son in B. D. s. v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi. 
and viii, vol. ii. Essay iv.] The name is used in the 
ἽΝ ον ἐς 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet. 
v. 13 (where some have understood Babylon, a small 
town in Egypt, to be referred to; but in opposition ef. 
Mayerhoff, Einl. in die petrin. Schriften, p. 126 sqq.; 
[cf. 3 fin. below]). 2. of the territory, Babylonia: 
Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle- 
gorically, of. Rome as the most corrupt seat of idolatry 
and the enemy of Christianity: Rev. xiv. 8 [here Rec.*!7 
BagovAov]; xvi. 19; xvii. 5; xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the 
opinion of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [cf. 1 fin. above]).* 

βαθέως, adv., deeply : ὄρθρου βαθέως sc. ὄντος (cf. Bnhdy. ἡ 
p. 338), deep in the morning, at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1 
LT Tr WH; so Meyerad loc. But βαθέως here is more 
correctly taken as the Attic form of the gen. fr. βαθύς, 
q. v.; cf. B. 26 (23) ; [Zob. Phryn. p. 247].* 

βαθμός, -οὔ. ὁ, (fr. obsol. Baw i. q. Batvo, like σταθμός 
[fr. Corn-pe]), threshold, step; of a grade of dignity and 
wholesome influence in the church, [R. V. standing], 1 
Tim. iii. 13 [ef. Ellie. ad loc.]. (Used by [Sept. 1 S. v. 
5; 2 K. xx. 95 also Sir. vi. 36]; Strabo, [Plut.], Leian., 
Appian, Artemid., [al.]; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324.) * 

βάθος. -eos (-ovs), τό, (connected with the obsol. verb 
βάζω, Baw [but cf. Curtius § 635; Vanicek p. 195]; cf. 
βαθύς, βάσσων, and ὁ βυθός, 6 βυσσός ; Germ. Boden), 
depth, height, —[ace. as measured down or up]; 1. 
prop. : Mt. xiii. 5; ΜΚ. ἵν. 5; Ro. viii. 39 (opp. to ὕψωμα) ; 





Eph. iii. 18 (opp. to ὕψος) ; of ‘the deep’ sea (the ‘high 
| seas"), Lk. v. 4. 2. metaph.: ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία 
᾿αὐτῶν, deep, extreme, poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2; τὰ βάθη τοῦ 

θεοῦ the deep things of God, things hidden and above 
| man's scrutiny, esp. the divine counsels, 1 Co. ii. 10 (τοῦ 
᾿Σατανᾷ, Rev. ii. 24 Ree. ; καρδίας ἀνθρώπου, Judith viii 
"14: [ra B. τῆς θείας γνώσεως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 40,1 (ef. 
| Lehtft. ad loc.)]): inexhaustible abundance, immense 

amount, πλούτου, Ro. xi. 33 (so also Soph. Aj. 130 ; βαθὺς 
| mAovros, Ael v. h. 3, 18; κακῶν, [Aeschyl. Pers. 465, 
| 712]; Eur. Hel. 303; Sept. Prov. xviii. 3).* 

| βαθύνω : [impf. ἐβάθυνον ; (βαθύς. ; to make deep: Lk. 


βαθύς 


vi. 48, where ἔσκαψε καὶ ἐβάθυνε is not used for βαθέως 
ἔσκαψε, but ἐβάθυνε expresses the continuation of the 
work, [he dug and deepened i. e. went deep]; cf. W. $54, 


5. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 
βαθύς, -cia, -v, [cf. βάθος], deep; prop.: Jn. iv. 11. 
metaph.: ὕπνος, a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7; 


often also in Grk. writ.) ; ὄρθρος (see βαθέως), Lk. xxiv. 
1 ([Arstph. vesp. 216]; Plat. Crito 43 a.; Polyaen. 4, 9, 
1; ἔτι βαθέος ὄρθρου, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Philo 
de mutat. nom. ὃ 30; de vita Moys. i. $ 32]) ; rà βαθέα 
To) Xaravá, Rev. ii. 24 (G L T Tr WH ; cf. 8á6os).* 
Batov [al. also Baioy (or even βαῖον, Chandler ed. 1 p. 
272); on its deriv. (fr. the Egyptian) ef. Steph. "Thesaur. 
s. v. Bats ], -ov, τό, a palm-branch ; with τῶν φοινίκων added 
[so Test. xii. Patr. test. Naph. $5] (after the fashion of 
οἰκοδεσπότης τῆς οἰκίας, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν, [cf. W. 603 
(561)]), Jn. xii. 13. (A bibl. and eccles. word: 1 Macc. 
xiii. 51; Cant. vii. 8 Symm.; Lev. xxiii. 40 unknown trans. 
In the Grk. church Palm-Sunday is called ἡ κυριακὴ τῶν 
Baiev. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 18 sqq.; 
[ Sturz, Dial. Maced. etc. p. 88 sq.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. ].)* 
Βαλαάμ, ὁ, indecl., (in Sept. for ny^s, ace. to Gesenius 
[* perhaps "] fr. 53 and Dy non-populus, i. e. foreign ; ace. 
to Jo. Simonis equiv. to Dy yos a swallowing up of the 
people; in Joseph. 6 Badapos), Balaam. (or Bileam), a 
native of Pethor a city, of Mesopotamia, endued by Je- 
hovah with prophetic power. He was hired by Balak 
(see Βαλάκ) to curse the Israelites ; and influenced by the 
love of reward, he wished to gratify Balak; but he was 
compelled by Jehovah’s power to bless them (Num. xxii.— 
xxiv. 9; Mic. vi. 





xxiv.; Deut. xxiii. 5 sq.; Josh. xiii. 22; 
5). Hence the later Jews saw in him a most abandoned 
deceiver: Rey. ii. 14; 2 Pet.ii.15; Jude 11. Cf. Win. 


RWE. [and BB.DD.] s. v.* 

Βαλάκ, 6, indecl., (ΟΞ empty [so Gesen. in his Thesaur., 
but in his later works he adopts (with Fürst et al.) an act. 
sense ‘one who makes empty,’ ‘a devastator,’ ‘ spoiler’ ; 
see BD. Am. ed. s. v.]), Balak, king of the Moabites 
(Num. xxii. 2 sq. and elsewhere): Rey. ii. 14.* 

βαλάντιον and βαλλάντιον (so L T Tr WH; cf. ['Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 79]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 620; W. p.43; Passow, 
Lex. [also L. and S.] s. v.), -ov, τό, a money-bag, purse : 
Lk. x. 4; xii. 33; xxii. 35 sq. (Sept.Jobxiv.17 cf.[Simon. 
181]; Arstph. ran. 772; Xen. symp. 4, 2; Plat. Gorg. 
p. 508 e.; Hdian. 5, 4, 4 [3 ed. Bekk. ], and other writ.) * 

βάλλω ; fut. βαλῶ ; pf. βέβληκα ; 2 aor. ἔβαλον (3 pers. 
plur. ἔβαλον in Lk. xxiii. 34; Acts xvi. 23, ἔβαλαν, the 
Alex. form, in Acts xvi. 37 L T Tr WH; [Rev. xviii. 19 
Lchm.,see WH. App. p. 165 and] for reff. ἀπέρχομαι 
init.); Pass. [pres. βάλλομαι] ; pf. βέβλημαι ; plpf. ἐβε- 
βλήμην; 1 aor. ἐβλήθην ; 1 fut. βληθήσομαι ; to throw, — 
either with force, or without force yet with a purpose, 
or even carelessly ; 1. with force and effort: 
βάλλειν τινὰ ῥαπίσμασι to smite one with slaps, to buffet, 
Mk. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, τινὰ Bad- 
New λίθοις, βέλεσι, τόξοις, etc., κακοῖς, ψόγῳ, σκώμμασι, 
ete., in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow i. p. 487; [L. and S. s. v. 
I. 1 and 3]; for the Rec. ἔβαλλον we must read with 





93 


βάλλω 


Fritzsche and Schott ἔβαλον, fr. which arose ἔλαβον, 
adopted by 1, T Tr WII; βαλεῖν and λαβεῖν are often 
confounded in codd. ; ef. Grimm on 2 Mace. v. 6; [Seriv- 
ener, Introd. p. 10]) ; βάλλειν λίθους ἐπί τινι or τινα, Jn. 
viii. (7), 59; χοῦν ἐπὶ τὰς κεφαλάς, Rev. xviii. 19 [WH 
mre. ἐπέβ.] ; κονιορτὸν eis τὸν ἀέρα, Acts xxii. 23; τὶ εἰς 
τὴν θάλασσαν, Mk. ix. 42; Rev. viii. 8; xviii. 21; εἰς τὸ 
πῦρ, Mt. iii. 10; xviii. 8; Lk. iii. 9; Mk. ix. 22; Jn. xv. 
65 εἰς κλίβανον, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; εἰς γέενναν, Mt. v. 
[29], 30[R G]; Mk. ix. 47; εἰς τ. γῆν, Rev. viii. 5, 7; xii. 
4, 9, 13; εἰς τ. ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 19; εἰς τ. λιμνήν, Rev. xix. 
20; xx. 10, 14 sq. ; εἰς τ. ἄβυσσον, Rev. xx. 3; absol. and 
in the pass. to be violently displaced from a position 
gained, Rev. xii. 10 L'T Tr WH. an attack of disease 
is said βάλλειν τινὰ εἰς κλίνην, Rev. ii. 22; Pass. to lie sick 
abed, be prostrated by sickness: βέβλημαι ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. 
ix. 2; Mk. vii. 30 [R G L mreg.]; with ἐπὶ κλίνης omitted, 
Mt. viii. 6, 14, cf. Lk. xvi. 20; τινὰ eis φυλακήν, to cast one 
into prison, Mt. v. 25; xviii. 30; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19 
[RGL], 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts xvi. 23 sq. 37; Rev. ii. 10; 
[. ἐπί twa τὴν χεῖρα or Tas χεῖρας to lay hand or hands 
on one, apprehend him, Jn. vii. 44 L Tr WH, also 30 L 
mrg.]; δρέπανον els γῆν to apply with force, thrust in, the 
sickle, Rey. xiv. 19; μάχαιραν βάλλειν (to cast, send) ἐπὶ 
T. γῆν, Mt. x. 34, which phrase gave rise to another 
found in the same passage, viz. εἰρήνην βάλλ. ἐπὶ τ. γῆν 
to cast (send) peace; ἔξω, to cast out or forth: Mt. v. 
13; xiii. 48; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); 1 Jn. iv. 18; Jn. xv. 6; 
ἑαυτὸν κάτω to cast one's self down: Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; 
ἑαυτὸν eis τ. θάλασσαν, Jn. xxi. 7; pass.in a reflex. sense 
[B. 52 (45)], βλήθητι, Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23; ri ἀφ᾽ 
ἑαυτοῦ to cast a thing from one's self, throw it away: Mt. 
v. 29 sq. ; xviii. 8; ὕδωρ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, Rev. xii. 15 sq. 
(cast out of his mouth, Luther schoss aus ihrem Munde) ; 
ἐνώπιον with gen. of place, to cast before (eagerly lay 
down), Rev. iv. 10; of a tree casting its fruit because 
violently shaken by the wind, Rev. vi. 13. Intrans. to 
rush (throw one's self [cf. W. 251 (236) ; 381 (357) note!; 
B. 145 (127)]) : Acts xxvii. 14; (Hom. Il. 11, 722; 23, 
462, and other writ.; [cf. L. and S. s. v. III. 1]). 2 
without force and aloud 10 throw or let go of a thing 
without caring where it falls: κλῆρον to cast a lot into the 
urn [B. D. s. v. Lot], Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. 
xxiii. 34 ; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; (κύβους, Plat. 
lege. 12 p. 968 e. and in other writ.). 1o scatier: κόπρια 
[ Rec.* κοπρίαν], Lk. xiii. 8; seed ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Mk. iv. 26; 
εἰς κῆπον, Lk. xiii. 19. to throw, cast, into: ἀργύριον eis 
τὸν kopBaváàv [L mrg. Tr mrg. κορβᾶν], Mt. xxvii. 6; 
χαλκόν, Sapa, etc., els τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον, Mk. xii. 41-44; 
Lk. xxi. 1-4, cf. Jn. xii. 6. βάλλειν τί τινι, to throw, cast, 
a thing to: “τὸν ἄρτον τοῖς κυναρίοις, Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii. 
27; ἔμπροσθέν τινος, Mt. vii. 6; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Rev. ii. 14 
(see σκάνδαλον, b. 8.) ; to give over to one's care uncertain 
about the result: ἀργύριον rois τραπεζίταις, to deposit, Mt. 
xxv. 27. of fluids, to pour, to pour in: foll. by eis, Mt. 
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37; Jn. xiii. 5, (οἶνον eis τὸν 
πίθον, Epictet. 4, 13, 12; of rivers, ῥόον eis ἅλα, Ap. Rhod. 
2, 401, etc. ; Sept. Judg. vi. 19 [ Ald., Compl.]) ; to pour 


βαπτίζω 


out, ἐπί τινος. Mt. xxvi. 12. 3. to move, give motion 
to, not with force yet with attention and for a pur- 
pose; εἴς τι, to put into, insert : Mk. vii. 33 (rods δακτύλους 
εἰς τὰ Gra); Jn. xx. 25, 27; xviii. 11 ; χαλίνους εἰς τὸ στόμα, 
Jas. iii. 3; to let down, cast down: Jn. v. 7; Mt. iv. 18 
(cf. Mk. i. 16 Rec.]; Mt. xvii. 27. Metaph. : εἰς τὴν καρδί- 
av τινός, to suggest, Jn. xiii. 2 (τὶ ἐν θυμῷ twos, Hom. Od. 
1, 201; 14, 269; εἰς νοῦν, schol. ad Pind. Pyth. 4, 133; 
al.; ἐμβάλλειν εἰς νοῦν τινι, Plut. vit. Timol.c.3). [Cowr.: 
ἀμφι-, dva-, avtt-, ἀπο-, δια-. €k-, ép-, map-eu-, ἐπι-, kara-, 
μετα-, παρα-. περι-, Tpo-, Tup-, ὑπερ-, ὑπο-βάλλω.} 
βαπτίζω ; [impf. ἐβάπτιζον] ; fut. βαπτίσω ; 1 aor. ἐβά- 
mica; Pass., [pres. βαπτίζομαι] ; impf. ἐβαπτιζόμην : pf. 
ptep. βεβαπτισμένος ; 1 aor. ἐβαπτίσθην ; 1 fut. βαπτισθή- 
gona; 1 aor. mid. ἐβαπτισάμην ; (frequentative fr. Barre, 
like βαλλίζω fr. βάλλω) ; here and there in Plat., Polyb., 
Diod., Strab., Joseph., Plut., al. I. 1. prop. to dip 
repeatedly, to immerge, submerge, (of vessels sunk, Polyb. 
1,51, 6; 8, 8,4; of animals, Diod. 1, 36). 2. to cleanse 
by dipping or submerging, to wash, to make clean with 
water ; in the mid. and the 1 aor. pass. to wash one’s self, 
bathe; so Mk. vii. 4 [where WH txt. ῥαντίσωνται]; Lk. 
xi. 38, (2 K. ν. 14 ἐβαπτίσατο ἐν τῷ ᾿Ιορδάνῃ, for 520; 
Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 30; Judith xii. 7). 3. metaph. to 
overwhelm, as ἰδιώτας ταῖς εἰσφοραῖς, Diod. 1, 73; ὀφλήμασι, 
Plut. Galba 21 ; τῇ συμφορᾷ βεβαπτισμένος, Heliod. Aeth. 
2,3; and alone, to inflict great and abounding calamities 
on one: ἐβάπτισαν τὴν πόλιν, Joseph. b. 1. 4, 3, 35 ἡ ἀνομία 
pe βαπτίζει, Is. xxi. 4 Sept.; hence βαπτίζεσθαι βάπτισμα 
(cf. W. 225 (211); [B. 148 (129)]; cf. λούεσθαι τὸ λου- 
rpóv, Ael, de nat. an. 3, 42), to be overwhelmed with ca- 
lamities, of those who must bear them, Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec.; 
Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50, (cf. the Germ. etwas auszubaden 
haben, and the use of the word e. ¢. respecting those who 
cross a river with difficulty, ἕως τῶν μαστῶν oi πεζοὶ Ba- 
πτιζόμενοι διέβαινον, Polyb. 3, 72,4; [for exx. see Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; also T. J. Conant, Baptizein, its meaning and 
use, N. Y. 1864 (printed also as an App. to their revised 
version of the Gosp. of Mt. by the * Am. Bible Union”) ; 
and esp. four works by J. W. Dale entitled Classic, Ju- 
daic, Johannic, Christie, Baptism, Phil. 1867 sqq.; D. P. 
Ford, Studies on the Bapt. Quest. (including a review of 
Dr. Dale’s works), Bost. 1879]). II. In the N. T. it 
is used particularly of the rite of sacred ablution, first in- 
stituted by John the Baptist, afterwards by Christ’s com- 
mand received by Christians and adjusted to the con- 
tents and nature of their religion (see βάπτισμα, 3), viz. 
an immersion in water, performed as a sign of the re- 
moval of sin, and administered to those who, impelled by 
a desire for salvation, sought admission to the benefits 
of the Messiah’s kingdom ; [for patristic reff. respecting 
the mode, ministrant, subjects, etc. of the rite, cf. Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; Dict. of Chris. Antiq. 5. v. Baptism]. a. The 
word is used absolutely, to administer the rite of ablu- 
tion, to baptize, (Vule. baptizo; "Tertull. tingo, tinguo, [cf. 
mergito, de corona mil. 8 57): Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 25 sq. 28; 
iii. 22 sq. 26; iv. 2; x. 40; 1 Co. i. 17; with the cognate 
noun τὸ βάπτισμα, Acts xix. 4; ὁ βαπτίζων substantively 


94 





βάπτισμα 


i. q. ὁ βαπτιστής, Mk. vi. 14, [24 T Tr WH]. τινά, Jn. 
iv. 1; Acts viii. 38; 1 Co.i.14,16. Pass. to be baptized : 
Mt. iii. 13 sq. 16; Mk. xvi. 16; Lk. iii. 21; Acts ii. 41; 
viii. 12, 13, [36]; x. 47; xvi. 15; 1 Co. 1. 15 L T Tr WH; 
x.2L' T Tr mrg. WH mrg. Pass. in a reflex. sense [i. e. 
Mid. ef. W. § 38, 3], to allow one's self to be initiated by 
baptism, to receive baptism: Lk. [iii. 7, 12] ; vii. 305 Acts ii. 
38; ix. 18; xvi. 33; xviii. 8; with the cognate noun τὸ Bd- 
πτισμα added, Lk. vii. 29; 1 aor. mid., 1 Co. x. 2 (L T Tr 
mrg.W H mrg. ἐβαπτίσθησαν [cf.W. ὃ 38, 4 b.]) ; Acts xxii. 
16. foll. by a dat. of the thing with which baptism is per- 
formed, ὕδατι, see bb. below. b. with Prepositions; 
aa. εἰς, to mark the element into which the immersion 
is made: eis τὸν Ιορδάνην, Mk.i. 9. to mark the end: 
eis μετάνοιαν. to bind one to repentance, Mt. iii. 11; eis 
τὸ ᾿Ιωάννου βάπτισμα. to bind to the duties imposed by 
John’s baptism, Acts xix. 3 [cf. W. 397 (371)]; eis ὄνομά 
twos, to profess the name (see dvoua,2) of one whose fol- 
lower we become, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii. 16; xix. 5; 
1 Co. i. 13, 155. εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν, to obtain the forgive- 
ness of sins, Acts ii. 38; εἰς τὸν Moony, to follow Moses 
as a leader, 1 Co. x. 2. to indicate the effect: els ἐν 
σῶμα. to unite together into one body by baptism, 1 Co. 
xii. 13; εἰς Χριστόν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ. to bring by bap- 
tism into fellowship with Christ, into fellowship in his 
death, by which fellowship we have died to sin, Gal. iii. 
27; Ro. vi. 3, [cf. Mey. on the latter pass., Ellic. on the 
former]. bb. ἐν, with dat. of the thing in which one is 
immersed: ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ, Mk. i. 5; ἐν τῷ ὕδατι, Jn. i. 31 
(L T Tr WH ἐν 08., but cf. Mey. ad loc. [who makes the 
art. deictic]). of the thing used in baptizing: ἐν ὕδατι, 
Mt. iii. 11; ΜΚ. 1. 8 [T WH Tr mre. om. Tr txt. br. ev]; 
Jn. i. 26, 33; cf. B. § 133, 19; [cf. W. 412 (384); see 
ev, 1.5 d. a.]; with the simple dat., ὕδατι, Lk. iii. 16 ; 
Actsi.5; xi. 16. ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ, to imbue richly with 
the Holy Spirit, (just as its large bestowment is called an 
outpouring): Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 8 [L Tr br. ἐν]: Lk. iii. 
16; Jn.i. 33; Acts 1.5; xi. 16; with the addition kai πυρί 
to overwhelm with fire (those who do not repent), i. e. to 
subject them to the terrible penalties of hell, Mt. iii. 11. 
ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου, by the authority of the Lord, Acts 
x. 48. cc. Pass. ἐπὶ [LL Tr WH ἐν] τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, relying on the name of Jesus Christ, i. e. repos- 
ing one’s hope on him, Acts ii. 38. dd. ὑπὲρ τῶν 
νεκρῶν on behalf of the dead, i. 6. to promote their eternal 
salvation by undergoing baptism in their stead, 1 Co. xv. 
29; cf. [W. 175 (165) ; 279 (262); 382 (358); Meyer (or 
Beet) ad loc.]; esp. Neander ad loc.; Riickert, Progr. 
on the passage, Jen. 1847; Paret in Ewald’s Jahrb. d. 
bibl. Wissensch. ix. p. 247; [cf. B. D. s. v. Baptism XII. 
Alex.'s Kitto ibid. VI.].* 

βάπτισμα, -ros, τό, (βαπτίζω), a word peculiar to N. T. 
and eccl. writ., immersion, submersion ; 1. used trop. 
of calamities and afflictions with which one is quite over- 
whelmed : Mt. xx. 22 sq. Ree.; Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50, 
(see βαπτίζω. I. 3). 2. of John’s baptism, that 
purifieatory rite by which men on confessing their sins 
were bound to a spiritual reformation, obtained the par- 


βαπτισμός 


don of their past sins and became qualified for the benefits 
of the Messiah’s kingdom soon to be set up: Mt. iii. 7; 
xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. vii. 29; xx. 4; Actsi. 22; x.37; 
xviii. 25 ; [xix. 3]; βάπτ. μετανοίας, binding to repentance 
[W. 188 (177)], Mk. i. 4; Lk. iii. 3; Acts xiii. 24; xix. 4. 
3. of Christian baptism; this, according to the view 
of the apostles, is a rite of sacred immersion, commanded 
by Christ, by which men confessing their sins and pro- 
fessing their faith in Christ are born again by the Holy 
Spirit unto a new life, come into the fellowship of Christ 
and the church (1 Co. xii. 13), and are made par- 
takers of eternal salvation; [but see art. * Baptism” in 
BB.DD., McC. and S., Schaff-Herzoz]: Eph. iv. 5 ; Col. 
ii. 12 [L mrg. Tr -μῷ q. v.]; 1 Pet. iii. 21; εἰς τὸν θάνατον. 
Ro. vi. 4 (see βαπτίζω, II. b. aa. fin.). [Trench § xcix.]* 

βαπτισμός, -οὔ, 6, (βαπτίζω), a washing, purification 
effected by means of water: Mk. vii. 4, 8 [RG L Tr in 
br.] (ξεστῶν καὶ ποτηρίων) ; of the washings prescribed 
by the Mosaic law, Heb. ix. 10. βαπτισμῶν διδαχῆς 
equiv. to διδαχῆς περὶ βαπτισμῶν, Heb. vi. 2 [where L txt. 
WH txt. βαπτ. διδαχήν], which seems to mean an expo- 
sition of the difference between the washings prescribed 
by the Mosaic law and Christian baptism. (Among 
prof. writ. Josephus alone, antt. 18, 5, 2, uses the word, 
and of John’s baptism; [respecting its interchange with 
βάπτισμα cf. exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 2 and Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col. ii. 12, where L mrg. Tr read βαπτισμός ; cf. 
Trench § xcix.].) * 

βαπτιστής, -οῦ, 6, (βαπτίζω), a baptizer; one who ad- 
ministers the rite of baptism; the surname of John, the 
forerunner of Christ: Mt. iii. 1; xi. 11 sq.; [xiv. 2, 8; 
. xvi. 14; xvii. 13]; Mk. vi. 24 [T Tr WH τοῦ βαπτίζοντος, 
25; viii. 28; Lk. vii. 20, 28 [T Tr WH om.], 33; ix. 19; also 
given him by Josephus, antt. 18, 5, 2, and found in no other 
prof. writ. (Joh. d. Táuferby Breest (1881), Kohler ('84).]* 

Barro: [fut. Bayo, Jn. xiii. 26 T Tr WH]; 1 aor. 
ἔβαψα:; pf. pass. ptep. βεβαμμένος ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; in Sept. for 530 ; a. to dip, dip in, immerse: τί, 
Jn. xiii. 26 [but in 26* Lchm. ἐμβάψας, as in 26" L txt. 
RG]; foll. by a gen. of the thing into which the object is 
dipped (because only a part of it is touched by the act 
of dipping), Lk. xvi. 24 (cf. ἅπτεσθαί τινος, λούεσθαι ποτα- 
poto, Hom. Il. 5, 6; 6, 508; cf. B. § 132, 25; [W. § 30, 
8c.]) b. to dip into dye, to dye, color: ἱμάτιον αἵματι, 
Rev. xix. 13 [Tdf. περιρεραμμένον, see s. v. περιρραίνω ; 
WH ῥεραντισμένον, see pavri(o]. (Hdt. 7, 67; Anth. 11, 
68; Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 1.) [Cowr.: ἐμ-βάπτω.] * 

βάρ, Chald. *3 [cf. Ps. ii. 12; Prov. xxxi. 2]; Bap Ἰωνᾶ 
son of Jonah (or Jonas): Mt. xvi. 17, where L T WH 
Βαριωνᾶ (q. v.) Barjonah (or Barjonas), as if a surname, 
like Bapvágas, etc. [R. V. Bar-Jonah. Cf. Ἰωνᾶς, 2.]* 

Βαραββᾶς, -à, ó, (fr. 33 son, and Nas father, hence son 
of a father i. e. of a master [cf. Mt. xxiii. 9]), a captive 
robber whom the Jews begged Pilate to release instead of 
Christ: Mt. xxvii. 16 sq. (where codd. mentioned by 
Origen, and some other authorities, place Ἰησοῦν before 
βαραββᾶν, approved by Fritzsche, De Wette, Meyer, 
Bleek, al.; [cf. WH. App. and Tdf.'s note ad loc.; also 


95 








Βαρθολομαῖος 


Treg. Printed Text, etc. p. 194 sq.]), 20 sq. 26; Mk. xv. 
7, 11,15; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xviii. 40.* 

Bapáx, ó, indecl., (p»3 lightning), Barak, a commander 
of the Israelites (Judg. iv. 6, 8) : Heb. xi. 32. [BB.DD.]* 

Bapax(as, -ov, ὁ, [711973 Jehovah blesses], Barachiah : 
in Mt. xxiii. 35 said to have been the father of the Zach- 
ariah slain in the temple ; cf. Ζαχαρίας." 

βάρβαρος, -ov ; 1. prop. one whose speech is rude, 
rough, harsh, as if repeating the syllables BapBap (cf. 
Strabo 14, 2, 28 p. 662; ὠνοματοπεποίηται ἡ λέξις, Etym. 
Magn. [188, 11 (but Gaisf. reads Bpayyos for βάρβαρος); 
cf. Curtius $ 394; Vanicek p. 561]); hence 2. 
one who speaks a foreign or strange language which is 
not understood by another (Hdt. 2, 158 βαρβάρους πάντας 
οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι καλέουσι τοὺς μὴ σφίσι ὁμογλώσσους, Ovid. 
trist. 5, 10, 37 barbarus hic ego sum, quia non intelligor 
ulli) ; so 1 Co. xiv. 11. 3. The Greeks used βάρβαρος 
of any foreigner ignorant of the Greek language and the 
Greek culture, whether mental or moral, with the added. 
notion, after the Persian war, of rudeness and brutality. 
Hence the word is applied in the N. T., but not re- 
proachfully, in Acts xxviii. 2, 4, to the inhabitants of 
Malta [i. e. Μελέτη, q. v.], who were of Phenician or 
Punie origin; and to those nations that had, indeed, 
some refinement of manners, but not the opportunity of. 
becoming Christians, as the Scythians, Col. iii. 11 [but 
cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. But the phrase “Ἑλληνές τε kat 
βάρβαροι forms also a periphrasis for all peoples, or indi- 
cates their diversity yet without reproach to foreigners 
(Plat. Theaet. p. 175 a.; Isocr. Euag. c. 17 p. 192 b.; 
Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 and in other writ.); so in Ro. i. 14. 
(In Philo de Abr. $ 45 sub fin. of all nations not Jews. 
Josephus b. j. prooem. 1 reckons the Jews among bar- 
barians.) Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. ii. 21 p. 61; [Bp- 
Lghtft. on Col. u. s.; B. D. s. v. Barbarian ].* 

Bapéo, -ὦ : to burden, weigh down, depress; in the N. T. 
found only in Pass. viz. pres. ptcp. Bapodpevor, impv. 
βαρείσθω; 1 aor. ἐβαρήθην ; pf. ptep. βεβαρημένος ; the 
better writ. do not use the pres.; they use only the 
pteps. βεβαρηώς and βεβαρημένος ; see Matth. § 227; W. 
83 (80); [B. 54 (47); Veitchs. v.]. Used simply: to be 
weighed down, oppressed, with external evils and calami- 
ties, 2 Co. i. 8; of the mental oppression which the 
thought of inevitable death occasions, 2 Co. v. 4; ὀφθαλ- 
μοὶ BeBapnpevor, sc. ὕπνῳ, weighed down with sleep, Mk. 
xiv. 40 (LT Tr WH καταβαρυνόμενοι) ; Mt. xxvi. 43; 
with ὕπνῳ added, Lk. ix. 32; ἐν (3) κραιπάλῃ, Lk. xxi. 
34 Rec. βαρυνθῶσιν, [see βαρύνω], (Hom. Od. 19, 122 
οἴνῳ BeBapnores, Diod. Sic. 4, 38 τῇ νόσῳ) ; μὴ βαρείσθω 
let it not be burdened, sc. with their expense, 1 Tim. v. 
16, (εἰσφοραῖς, Dio Cass. 46, 32). [Comp.: ém-, κατα- 
Bapéw. | * 

βαρέως, adv., (βαρύς, q. v-), heavily, with difficulty: Mt. 
xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (Is. vi. 10). [From Hat. on.]* 

Βαρθολομαῖος. -ov, 6, (»5n ^3 son of Tolmai), Bar- 
tholomew, one of the twelve apostles of Christ: Mt. x. 3; 
Mk.ii.18; Lk. vi. 14; Actsi.13. [See Ναθαναήλ and 
BB.DD.] * 


Βαριησοῦς 


Βαρ-ιησοῦς, 6, (^3 son, yi^ Jesus), Bar-Jesus, a cer- 
tain false prophet: Acts xiii. 6 [where Γαΐ, go); see 
his note. Cf. Ἐλύμας]." 

Bap-twvas, -ἃ [cf. B. 20 (17 sq.)], 6, (fr. *3 son, and 
mr Jonah [al. 13m i. e. Johanan, Jona, John; cf. Mey. 
on Jn. i. 42 (43) and Lghtft. as below]), Bar-Jonah [or 
Bar-Jonas], the surname of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17 
[L T WH; in Jn. i. 42 (43) ; xxi. 15 sqq. son of John; 
see Lghtfl. Fresh Revision, etc., p. 159 note (Am. ed. 
p. 137 note)]; see in Bap and ᾿Ιωνᾶς, 3." 

BapvaBas, -a [ B. 20 (18)], 6, (^3 son, and $23; acc. to 
Luke's interpretation vids παρακλήσεως, i. e. excelling in 
the power τῆς παρακλήσεως, Acts iv. 36; see παράκλησις, 
5), Barnabas, the surname of Joses [better Joseph], a 
Levite, a native of Cyprus. He was a distinguished 
teacher of the Christian religion, and a companion and 
colleague of Paul: Acts ix. 27; xi. 22, [25 Rec.], 30; xii. 
255 xil.—xv.; 1 Co. ix.6; Gal. ii. 1, 9,18; Οὐ] αν ΤΟΝ" 

βάρος. -cos, τό, heaviness, weight, burden, trouble: load, 
ἐπιτιθέναι τινί (Xen. oec. 17, 9), to impose upon one diffi- 
cult requirements, Acts xv. 28; βάλλειν ἐπί τινα, Rev. ii. 
24 (where the meaning is, ‘I put upon you no other in- 
junction which it might be difficult to observe’; cf. 
Diisterdieck ad loc.); βαστάζειν τὸ βάρος τινός. i. e. either 
the burden of a thing, as τὸ βάρος τῆς ἡμέρας the weari- 
some labor of the day Mt. xx. 12, or that which a person 
bears, as in Gal. vi. 2 (where used of troublesome moral 
faults; the meaning is, *bear one another's faults"). 
αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης a weight of glory never to cease, i. e. 
vast and transcendent glory (blessedness), 2 Co. iv. 17; 
cf. W. $ 34, 3; (πλούτου, Plut. Alex. M. 48). weight i. q. 
authority: ἐν βάρει εἶναι to have authority and influence, 
1 Th. ii. 7 (6), (so also in Grk. writ.; cf. Wesseling on 
Diod. Sic. 4, 61; [exx. in Suidas s. v.]). [Sxw. see 
ὄγκος.) * 

Βαρσαβᾶς [-σαββᾶς L' T Tr WH ; see WH. App. p. 
159], -a [B. 20 (18)], 6, Barsabas [or Barsabbas] (i. e. 
son of Saba [al. Zaba}) ; 1. the surname of a certain 
Joseph: Acts i. 23, [ B. D. s. v. Joseph Barsabas]. 2: 
the surname of a certain Judas: Acts xv. 22, [B. D. s. v. 
Judas Barsabas].* 

Bap-ripatos [ Tdf. -μαῖος, yet cf. Chandler § 253], -ov, 6, 
(son of Timeus), Bartimaeus, a certain blind man: Mk. 
x. 46.* 

Bapive: to weigh down, overcharge: Lk. xxi. 34 (1 aor. 
pass. subj.) βαρυνθῶσιν Rec. [cf. W. 83 (80); B. 54 (47)], 
for βαρηθῶσιν; see Bapée. [Cowr.: kara-Bapivo. ] * 

βαρύς, -eia, -v, heavy; 1. prop. i. e. heavy in weight : 
φορτίον, Mt. xxiii. 4 (in xi. 30 we have the opposite, 
ἐλαφρόν). 2. metaph. a. burdensome: ἐντολή, the 
keeping of which is grievous, 1 Jn. v. 3. b. severe, stern: 
ἐπιστολή. 2 Co. x. 10 [al. imposing, impressive, οἵ. Wet- 
stein adloc.]. c. weighty, i.e. of great moment: τὰ βαρύ- 
Tepa τοῦ νύμου the weightier precepts of the law, Mt. 
xxiii. 23; αἰτιάματα [better αἰτιώματα (4. v-)], Acts xxv. 
7. d. violent, cruel, unsparing, [A. V. grievous]: λύκοι, 
Acts xx. 29 (so also Hom. Il. i. 89; Xen. Ages. 11, 12).* 

βαρύτιμος, -ov, (βαρύς and τιμή), of weighty (i. e. great) 


96 





βασιλεία 


value, very precious, costly: Mt. xxvi. 7 [RG Trtxt. 
WH], (so Strabo 17 p. 798; selling at a great price, 
Heliod. 2, 30 [var.]; possessed of great honor, Aeschyl. 
suppl. 25 [but Dindorf (Lex. s. v.) gives here (after a 
schol.) severely punishing]).* 

Bacavitw: [impf. ἐβασάνιζον); 1 aor. ἐβασάνισα; Pass., 
[pres. βασανίζομαι) ; 1 aor. ἐβασανίσθην ; 1 fut. βασανι- 
σθήσομαι; (βάσανος) ; 1. prop. to test (metals) by the 
touchstone. 2. to question by applying torture. 3. 
to torture (2 Mace. vii. 13); hence 4. univ. to vez with 
grievous pains (of body or mind), to torment: twa, Mt. 
viii. 29; Mk. v. 7; Lk. viii. 28; 2 Pet. ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; 
passively, Mt. viii. 6; Rey. ix.5; xx. 10; of the pains of 
child-birth, Rev. xii. 2 (cf. Anthol. 2, p. 205 ed. Jacobs); 
with ἐν and the dat. of the material in which one is tor- 
mented, Rev. xiv. 10. 5. Pass. to be harassed, dis- 
tressed ; of those who at sea are struggling with a head 
wind, Mk. vi. 48; of a ship tossed by the waves, Mt. 
xiv. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. Often in O. T. 
A poer.) * 

βασανισμός, -οῦ. 6, (βασανίζω, q. v.) ; 1. a testing by 
the touchstone or by torture. 2. torment, torture; a. 
the act of tormenting: Rev. ix. 5. b. the state or con- 
dition of those tormented: Rev. xviii. 7, 10, 15; ὁ kamvos 
ToU βασανισμοῦ αὐτῶν the smoke of the fire by which they 
are tormented, Rev. xiv. 11. (4 Mace. ix. 6; xi.2; [al.]; 
bad wine is ealled βασανισμός by Alexis in Athen. 1, 56 
p. 30 £)* 

βασανιστής, -ov, 6, (Bacavi(e), one who elicits the truth 
by the use of the rack, an inquisitor, torturer, ([ Antiphon ; 
al]; Dem. p. 978,11; Philo in Flacc. § 11 end; [de 
concupise. § 1; quod omn. prob. lib. 16; Plut. an vitios. 
ad infel. suff. § 2]); used in Mt. xviii. 34 of a jailer 
(δεσμοφύλαξ Acts xvi. 23), doubtless because the busi- 
ness of torturing was also assigned to him.* 

βάσανος, -ov, 7, [Curtius p. 439]; a. the touchstone, 
[called also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by which gold 
and other metals are tested. b. the rack or instrument 
of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth. c. 
torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease, 
Mt. iv. 24; of the torments of the wicked after death, 
ἐν βασάνοις ὑπάρχειν, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. ili. 1; 4 Mace. 
xiii. 14); hence ὁ τόπος τῆς βασάνου is used of Gehenna, 
Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.) * 

βασιλεία. -as, ἡ, (fr. βασιλεύω; to be distinguished fr. 
βασίλεια a queen; cf. ἱερεία priesthood fr. iepedw, and 
ἱέρεια a priestess fr. ἱερεύς), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. royal 
power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 33; xix. 12, 15; 
xxii. 29; Jn. xviii. 36; Acts i. 6; Heb. i. 8; 1 Co. xv. 
24; Rey. xvii. 12; of the royal power of Jesus as the 
triumphant Messiah, in the phrase ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῇ Bac. 
αὐτοῦ. i. e. to come in his kingship, clothed with this pow- 
er: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [eis τὴν β. L mrg. Tr mrg. 
WH txt.]; of the royal power and dignity conferred on 
Christians in the Messiah's kingdom: Rev. i. 6 (ace. to 
Tr txt. WH mre. ἐποίησεν ἡμῖν or L ἡμῶν [yet RG T WIL 
txt. Tr mrg. ἡμᾶς] βασιλείαν [Rec. βασιλεῖς}; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rey. xii. 


βασιλεία 


10. 2. a kingdom i.e. the territory subject to the 
rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq.; xxiv. 7; Mk. iii. 24; vi. 
23; xiii. 8; Lk. xi. 17; xxi. 10; plur.: Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 
5; Heb. xi. 33. 3. Frequent in the N. T. in refer- 
ence to the Reign of the Messiah are the following 
phrases: ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ (N39N7 81255, Targ. is 
xl. 9; Mie. iv. 7), prop. the kingdom over which God rules; 
ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (REY 321 1225, Targ. Jonath. ad 
Is. liii. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, hick: will be 
founded by God through the Messiah and over which the 
Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν 
οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 
times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is 
of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. 
nw mooni is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed 
univ ersally , not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes 
simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. 
τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was WOES the Messiah would be 
one of David's descendants and a king very like David, 
Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. v. 
5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — 
who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after 
four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one an- 
other and the last of them shown itself hostile to the 
people of God, at length its despotism should be broken, 
and the empire of the world pass over for ever to the holy 
people of God (Dan. ii. 44; vii. 14, 18, 27) — the Jews 
were expecting a kingdom of the greatest felicity, which 
God through the Messiah would set up, raising the dead 
to life again and renovating earth and heaven; and that 
in this kingdom they would bear sway for ever over all 


the nations of the world. This kingdom was called the | 


kingdom of God or the kingdom of the Messiah; and in 
this sense must these terms be understood in the utter- 
ances of the Jews and of the disciples of Jesus when 
conversing with him, as Mt. xviii. 1; xx. 21; Mk. xi. 10; 
Lk. xvii. 20; xix. 11. But Jesus employed the phrase 
kingdom of God or of heaven to indicate that perfeci order 
of things which he was about to establish, in which all those 
of every nation who should believe in him were to be gathered 
together into one society, dedicated and intimately united 
to God, and made partakers of eternal salvation. This 
kingdom is spoken of as now begun and actually pres- 
ent, inasmuch as its foundations have already been 
laid by Christ and its benefits realized among men 
that believe in him: Mt. xi. 12; xii. 28; xiii. 41 (in 
this pass. its earthly condition is spoken of, in which it 
includes bad subjects as well as good); Lk. xvii. 21; 1 
Co. iv. 20; Ro. xiv. 17 (where the meaning is, ‘the es- 
sence of the kingdom of God is not to be found in ques- 
tions about eating and drinking’); Col.i.13. But far 
more frequently the kingdom of heaven is spoken of as 
a future blessing, since its consummate establishment 
is to be looked for on Christ's solemn return from the 
skies, the dead being called to life again, the ills and 
wrongs which burden the present state of thines being 
done away, the powers hostile to God being vanquished : 
Mt. vi. 10 ; viii. 11; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 1; xv. 43; Lk. ix. 
7 


97 


| Mk. iv. 26. 
| order to reception among its citizens : 





βασιλεία 


27; xiii. 28 sq.; xiv. 15; xxii. 18; 2 Pet. i. 11; also in 
the phrases εἰσέρχεσθαι eis τ. Baa. τ. οὐρανῶν or τ. θεοῦ: 
Mt. v. 20; vii. 21; xviii. 3; xix. 23, 24; Mk.ix-47; x. 
23, 24, 25; Lk. xviii. 24 [T Tr txt. WH εἰσπορεύονται], 
25; Jn. iii. 5; Acts xiv. 22; κληρονόμος τῆς βασιλείας, 
Jas. ii. 5; κληρονομεῖν τ. B. τ. 6.; see d. below. By a sin- 
gular use 7 Bac. τοῦ κυρίου ἡ ἐπουράνιος God's heavenly 
kingdom, in 2 Tim. iv. 18, denotes the exalted and perfect 
order of things which already exists in heaven, and into 
which true Christians are ushered immediately after 
death; cf. Phil. i. 23; Heb. xii. 22 sq. The phrase Bac. 
τῶν οὐρανῶν Or τοῦ θεοῦ. while retaining its meaning king- 
dom of heaven or of God, must be understood, according 
to the requirements of the context, a. of the beginning, 
growth, potency, of the divine kingdom: Mt. xiii. 31-33; 
Mk. iv. 30; Lk. xiii. 18. b. of its fortunes: Mt. xiii. 24; 
c. of the conditions to be complied with in 
Mt. xviii. 23; xx. 
1; xxii. 2; xxv. 1. d. of its blessings and benefits, 
whether present or future: Mt. xiii. 44 sq.; Lk. vi. 20; 
also in the phrases ζητεῖν τὴν Bac. τ. θεοῦ, Mt. vi. 33 
[L T WH om. τ. θεοῦ]; Lk. xii. 31 [αὐτοῦ L txt. T Tr 
WH); δέχεσθαι v. Bac. τ. . ὡς παιδίον, Mk. x. 15; Lk. 
xviii. 17; κληρονομεῖν τ. B. τ. 0. Mt. xxv. 34; 1 Co. vi. 
9 sq.; xv. 50; Gal. v. 21; see in κληρονομέω, 2. e. of 
the congregation of those who constitute the royal ‘city 
of God’: ποιεῖν τινας βασιλείαν, Rev. i. 6 G T WH txt. 
Tr mrg. [cf. 1 above]; v. 10 (here R ἃ βασιλεῖς, so R in 
the preceding pass.), cf. Ex. xix. 6. Further, the foll. 
expressions are noteworthy: of persons fit for admis- 
sion into the divine kingdom it is said αὐτῶν or τοιούτων 
ἐστὶν ἡ Bac. τῶν ovp. or τοῦ θεοῦ : Mt. v. 3, 10; xix. 14; 
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 10. διδόναι τινὶ 7. Bac. is used of 
God, making men partners of his kingdom, Lk. xii. 32; 
παραλαμβάνειν of those who are made partners, Heb. xii. 
28. διὰ τὴν Bac. τ. ovp. to advance the interests of the 
heavenly kingdom, Mt. xix. 12 ; ἕνεκεν τῆς Bac. τ. 6. for the 
sake of becominz a partner in the kingdom of God, Lk. 
xviii.29. "Those who announce the near approach of the 
kingdom, and describe its nature, and set forth the condi- 
tions of obtaining citizenship in it, are said διαγγέλλειν τ. 
Bac. v. 0. Lk. ix. 60; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι τὴν B. τ. 6. Lk. iv. 43; 
viii. 1; xvi. 16 ; περὶ τῆς Bac. τ. θ. Acts viii. 12 ; κηρύσσειν 
τὴν Bac. τ. 6. Lk. ix. 2; Acts xx. 25; xxviii. 31; τὸ evay- 
γέλιον τῆς Bac. Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14 ; with the addi- 
tion of τοῦ θεοῦ, Mk. i. 14 R L br. ἤγγικεν ἡ Bao. τ. οὐρ. 
Or τοῦ θεοῦ, is used of its institution as close at hand: Mt. 
iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15; Lk. x. 9, 11. it is said ἔρχεσθαι 
i. e. to be established, in Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20; 
Mk. xi. 10. In accordance with the comparison which 
likens the kingdom of God to a palace, the power of ad- 
mitting into it and of excluding from it is called κλεῖς 
τῆς B. τ. ovp. Mt. xvi. 19; κλείειν τὴν B. 7. ovp. to keep 
from entering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14). υἱοὶ τῆς Baa. are those 
to whom the prophetic promise of the heavenly kingdom 
extends : used of the Jews, Mt. viii. 12; of those gathered 
out of all nations who have shown themselves worthy of 
a share in this kingdom, Mt. xiii. 38. (In the O. T. 


βασίλειος 


Apocr. ἡ Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ denotes God’s rule, the divine ad- 
ministration, Sap. vi. 5; x. 10; Tob. xiii. 1; so too in Ps. 
cii. (ciii.) 19; civ. (ev.) 11-13; Dan. iv. 33; vi. 26; the 
universe subject to God's sway, God's royal domain, Song 
of the Three Children 32; ἡ βασιλεία, simply, the O. T. 
theocratic commonwealth, 2 Macc. i. 7.) Of. Fleck, De 
regno divino, Lips. 1829; Baumg.-Crusius, Bibl. Theol. 
p. 147 sqq.; Tholuck, Die Bergrede Christi, te Aufl. p. 
55 sqq. [on Mt. v. 3]; CólIn, Bibl. Theol. i. p. 567 sqq. 
ii. p. 108 sqq. ; Schmid, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 262 sqq. 
ed. 4; Baur, Neutest. Theol. p. 69 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. d. N. T. $ 13; [also in his Leben Jesu, bk. iv. ch. 
2]; Schiirer, [Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29 (esp. par. 8) and 
reff. there; also] in the Jahrbb. für protest. Theol., 
1876, pp. 166-187 (cf. Lipsius ibid. 1878, p. 189) ; [B.D. 
Am. ed. s. v. Kingdom of Heaven, and reff. there]. 

βασίλειος, (rarely -eía), -ewv, royal, kingly, regal: 1 Pet. 
ii. 9. As subst. τὸ βασίλειον (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 3; Prov. 
xviii. 19 Sept.; Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 4), and much oftener 
(fr. Hdt. 1, 30 down) in plur. rà βασίλεια (Sept. Esth. 
i. 9, ete.), the royal palace: Lk. vii. 25 LA. V. kings’ 
courts ].* 

βασιλεύς, -éos, 6, leader of the people, prince, com- 
mander, lord of the land, king; univ.: οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς 
γῆς, Mt. xvii. 25; Rev. xvi. I4 [L T Tr WH om. τῆς γῆς ]» 
etc.; τῶν ἐθνῶν, Lk. xxii. 25; of the king of Egypt, Acts 
vii. 10, 18; Heb. xi. 23, 27; of David, Mt. i. 6; Acts xiii. 
22; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq.; 
Lk.i.5; Aetsxii.1; xxv. 13; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9 ; 
Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of a king, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; ** re- 
ges Syriae, regis Antiochi pueros, scitis Romae nuper 
fuisse," Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17, 59; [ Verg. 
Aen. 9, 223]) ; of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 
17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 NA (so in prof. writ. in the Roman 
age, as in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 6; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk. ]; 
of the son of the MERC ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]) ; of 
the Messiah, ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, Mt. ii. 2, ete.; τοῦ 
ἸΙσραήλ, Mk. xv. 32; Jn. i. 49 (50); xii. 13; of Chris- 
tians, as to reign over the world with Christ in the mil- 
lennial kingdom, Rev. i. 6; v. 10 (Rec. in both pass. and 
Grsb. in the latter; see βασιλεία, 3 e.) ; of God, the su- 
preme ruler over all, Mt. v. 35; 1 Tim.i. 17 (see αἰών, 
2); Rev. xv. 3; βασιλεὺς βασιλέων, Rev. xvii. 14 [but 
here as in xix. 16 of the victorious Messiah]; 6 Bac. 
τῶν βασιλευόντων, 1 Tim. vi. 15, (2 Macc. xiii. 4; 3 Macc. 
v. 35; Enoch 9, 4; [84, 2; Philo de decal. $ 10]; cf. [κύ- 
pwos τῶν Bac. Dan. ii. 47]; κύριος τ. κυρίων, Deut. x. 17; 
Ps. exxxv. (exxxvi) 3; [so of the king of the Par- 
thians, Plut. Pomp. $ 38, 1]). 

βασιλεύω ; fut. βασιλεύσω; 1 aor. eanaihenea: (Bao 
Aevs) ; — in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] with gen. or dat., 
in the sacred writ. after the Hebr. (Oy oU»), foll. by 
ἐπί with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT WH om. 
Trbr. ἐπί) ; Rev. v. 10; foll. by ἐπί with acc. of the 
pers, Lk.i.33; xix. 14, 27; Ro. v. 14; [cf. W. 206 (193 
sq.); B. 169 (147)]—to be king, to exercise kingly power, 
to reign: univ. 1 Tim. vi.15; Lk. xix. 14,97; of the 
governor of a country, although not possessing kingly 


98 





Bacrato 


rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6; of the 
rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33; 1 Co. xv. 25; Rev. 
xi. 15; of the reign of Christians in the millennium, 
Rey. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the 
word to denote the supreme moral dignity, liberty, bless- 
edness, which will be enjoyed by Christ's redeemed ones: 
Ro. v. 17 (cf. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.) ; 1 Co. iv. 8. 
Metaph. to exercise the highest influence, to control: Ro. 
v. 14, 17, 21; vi. 12. The aor. ἐβασίλευσα denotes 7 
obtained royal power, became king, have come to reign, in 
1 Co. iv. 8 [cf. W. 302 (283); B. 215 (185)]; Rev. xi. 
17; xix. 6, (as often in Sept. and prof. writ.; cf. Grimm 
on 1 Mace. p. 11; Breitenbach or Kühner on Xen. 
mem. 1, 1, 18; on the aor. to express entrance into a 


state, see Bnhdy. p. 382; Krüger § 53, 5, 1; [Kühner 
§ 386, 5; Goodwin ὃ 19 N.1]). [Cowr.: συμ-βασι- 
Aévo.] * 


βασιλικός, -7, -óv, of or belonging to a king, kingly, 
royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince, 
a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27; 
often in Joseph.). subject to a king: of a country, Acts 
xii. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: ἐσθής, Acts 
xii 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: νόμος, Jas. ii. 
8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 c. τὸ ὀρθὸν νόμος ἐστὶ βασιλικός, 
Xen. symp. 1, 8 βασιλικὸν κάλλος ; 4 Macc. xiv. 2).* 

[βασιλίσκος, -ov, ὁ, (dimin. of βασιλεύς), a petty king; 
a reading noted by WH in their (rejected) marg. of Jn. 
iv. 46,49. (Polyb., al.)*] 

βασίλισσα, -7s, 7, queen: Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Acts 
viii. 27; Rev. xviii. 7. (Xen. oec. 9, 15; Aristot. oec. 
9 [in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 84; cf. frag. 385 (fr. Poll. 8, 
90) p. 1542", 25]; Polyb. 23, 18, 2 [exerpt. Vales. 7], 
and often in Ten writ.; Sept.; Joseph.; the Atticists 
prefer the forms βασιλίς ng βασίλεια; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 225; [on the termination, corresponding to Eng. -ess, 
cf. W. 24; B. 73; Soph. Lex. p. 37; Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. et Alex. p. 151 sqq.; Curtius p. 653].) * 

βάσις, -ews, ἡ, (BAQ, Baiva) ; 1. a stepping, wall 
ing, (Aeschyl., Soph., al.). 2. that with which one 
steps, the foot: Acts iii. 7, (Plat. Tim. p. 92a. et al.; 
Sap. xiii. 18).* 

βασκαίνω: 1 aor. ἐβάσκανα, on which form cf. W. [75 
(72)]; 83 (80); [B. 41 (35); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 sq.; 
Paralip. p. 21 sq.]; (βάζω, βάσκω [pack | to speak, talk) ; 
τινά [ W. 223 (209) ]; 1. to speak ill of one, to slander, 
traduce him, (Dem. 8, 19 [94,19]; Ael. v. h. 2, 13, ete.). 
2. to bring evil on one by feigned praise or an evil eye, 
to charm, bewitch one, (Aristot. probl. 20, 34 [p. 926^, 
24]: Theocr. 6, 39; Ael.nat. an. 1, 35); hence, of those 
who lead away others into error by wicked arts (Diod. 
4, 6): Gal. iii. 1. Cf. Schott [or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc. ; 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 462.* 

Bacáto; fut. βαστάσω; laor.égácraca; 1. to lake 
up with the hands: λίθους, Ju. x. 31, (λᾶαν, Hom. Od. 11, 
594; τὴν μάχαιραν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7). 
2. to take up in order to carry or bear; to put upon one's 
self (something) to be carried; to bear what is burden- 
some: τὸν σταυρόν, Jn. xix. 17; Lk. xiv. 27; (see σταυρός 


Baros 


2 a. and b.); Metaph.: βαστάζειν τι, to be equal to un- 
derstanding a matter and receiving it calmly, Jn. xvi. 
12 (Epict. ench. 29, 5); φορτίον, Gal. vi. 5; βαστάσει 
τὸ κρίμα, must take upon himself the condemnation of 
the judge, Gal. v. 10 (wawn svi, Mic. vii. 9). Hence 
to bear, endure: Mt. xx. 12; Acts xv. 10 (ζυγόν) ; Ro. 
xv. 1; Gal. vi. 2; Rev. ii. 2sq. (Hpict. diss. 1, 3, 2; 
Anthol 5, 9, 3; in this sense the Greeks more com- 
monly use φέρειν.) 3. simply to bear, carry: Mt. iii. 
11; Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. vii. 14; xxii. 10; Rev. xvii. 7; 
pass. Acts iii. 2; xxi. 35. τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν, 
so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles, 
i e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name 
to the Gentiles, Acts ix. 15. to carry on one’s person: 
Lk. x. 4; Gal. vi. 17 [cf. Ellie. ad loc.]; of the womb 
carrying the fetus, Lk. xi. 27; to sustain, i. e. uphold, 
support; Ro. xi. 18. 4. by a use unknown to Attic 
writ. to bear away, carry off: νόσους, to take away or 
remove by curing them, Mt. viii. 17 (Galen de compos. 
medicam. per gen. 2, 14 [339 ed. Bas.] Wopas re Oepa- 
πεύει καὶ ὑπώπια βαστάζει) [al. refer the use in Mt. l. c. 
to2; cf. Meyer]. Jn. xii. 6 (ἐβάσταζε used to pilfer [ R. 
V. txt. took away; cf. our ‘shoplifting’, though perh. this 
lift is a diff. word, see Skeat s. v.]) ; Jn. xx. 15, (Polyb. 
1, 48, 2 ὁ ἄνεμος τοὺς πύργους τῇ Bia βαστάζει, Apollod. 
bibl. 2, 6, 2; 3, 4, 3; Athen. 2, 26 p. 46 £.; 15, 48 p. 698 e.; 
very many instances fr. Joseph. are given by Krebs, 
Observv. p. 152 sqq.). [Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] * 

βάτος, -ov, 7 and (in Mk. xii. 26 GL T Tr WH) ὁ, 
(the latter acc: to Moeris, Attic; the former Hellenistic ; 
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 532; W. 63 (62) [cf. 36; B. 12 
(11)]), [fr. Hom. down], a thorn or bramble-bush [cf. 
B. D. s. v. Bush]: Lk. vi. 44; Acts vii. 30, 35; ἐπὶ τοῦ 
(τῆς) βάτου at the Bush, i. e. where it tells about the Bush, 
Mk. xii. 26; Lk. xx. 37; cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xi. 2; [B.D. 
s. v. Bible IV. 1].* 

βάτος, -ov, ὁ, Hebr. n3 a bath, [A. V. measure], a Jew- 
ish measure of liquids containing 72 sextarii [between 
8 and 9 gal. ], (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9): Lk. xvi. 6 [see B.D. 
s. v. Weights and Measures II. 2].* 

βάτραχος, -ov, 6, a frog, (fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach., and 
Hdt.] down): Rev. xvi. 13.* 

Barrodoyéw [T WH farraA. (with N B, see WH. App. 
p.152)],-ó: 1 aor. subj. βαττολογήσω; a. to stammer, 
and, since stammerers are accustomed to repeat the 
same sounds, b. to repeat the same things over and 
over, to use many and idle words, to babble, prate ; so Mt. 
vi. 7, where it is explained by ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ, (Vulg. 
multum loqui ; [A. V. to use vain repetitions]) ; cf. Tho- 
luck ad loc. Some suppose the word to be derived from 
Battus, a king of Cyrene, who is said to have stuttered 
(Hat. 4, 155); others from Battus, an author of tedious 
and wordy poems; but comparing Barrapi¢ew, which 
has the same meaning, and BapBapos (q. v.), it seems 
far more probable that the word is onomatopoetic. (Sim- 
plic. in Epict. [ench. 30 fin.] p. 340 ed. Schweigh.) * 

βδέλυγμα, -ros, τό, (βδελύσσομαι), a bibl. and eccl. word; 
in Sept. mostly for 11331, also for ypu and ype a foul 


99 





βεβαιόω 


thing (loathsome on acct. of its stench), a detestable thing ; 
(Tertull. abominamentum) ; Luth. Greuel; [A. V. abom- 
ination]; a. univ.: Lk. xvi. 15. b. in the O. T. often 
used of idols and things pertaining to idolatry, to be 
held in abomination by the Israelites; as 1 K. xi. 6 (5); 
xx. (xxi) 26; 2 K. xvi. 3; xxi.2; 1 Esdr. vii. 13; Sap. 
xii. 23; xiv. 11; hence in the N. T. in Rev. xvii. 4 sq. 
of idol-worship and its impurities; ποιεῖν βδέλυγμα k. 
ψεῦδος, Rev. xxi. 27. c. the expression τὸ (38. τῆς ἐρη- 
μώσεως the desolating abomination [al. take the gen. al. ; 
e. g. Mey. as gen. epex.] in Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14, 
(1 Mace. i. 54), seems to designate some terrible event 
in the Jewish war by which the temple was desecrated, 
perh. that related by Joseph. b. j. 4, 9, 11 sqq. (Sept. 
Dan. xi. 31; xii. 11, 88. (τῆς) ἐρημώσεως for nU pp? 
and poU “ὦ, Dan. ix. 27 88. τῶν ἐρημώσεων for χρυ 
ὉΠ the abomination (or abominations) wrought by the 
desolator, i. e. not the statue of Jupiter Olympius, but a 
little idol-altar placed upon the altar of whole burnt- 
offerings; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 31; Hengstenberg, 
Authentie des Daniel, p. 85 sq.; [the principal explana- 
tions of the N. T. phrase are noticed in Dr. Jas. Mori- 
son's Com. on Mt. l. c.].) * 

βδελυκτός, -7, ov, (βδελύσσομαι), abominable, detestable : 
Tit. i. 16. (Besides only in Prov. xvii. 15; Sir. xli. 5; 
2 Mace. i. 27; [cf. Philo de victim. offer. § 12 sub fin. ].)* 

βδελύσσω : (βδέω quietly to break wind, to stink) ; 
1. to render foul, to cause to be abhorred : τὴν ὀσμήν, Ex. 
v. 21; to defile, pollute: τὰς ψυχάς, τ. ψυχήν, Lev. xi. 43 ; 
xx. 25; 1 Mace. i. 48; pf. pass. ptep. ἐβδελυγμένος abomi- 
nable, Rev. xxi. 8, (Lev. xviii. 30; Prov. viii. 7; Job xv. 
16; 3 Mace. vi. 9; βδελυσσόμενος, 2 Mace. v. 8). In 
native Grk. writ. neither the act. nor the pass. is found. 
2. βδελύσσομαι; depon. mid. (1 aor. ἐβδελυξάμην often 
in Sept. [Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 10]; in Grk. writ. depon. pas- 
sive, and fr. Arstph. down) ; prop. to turn one's self away 
from on account of the stench; metaph. to abhor, detest: 
τί, Ro. 11. 22.* 

βέβαιος, -αἰα (W. 69 (67); B. 25 (22)), -aov, (BAQ, 
Baívo), (fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast, firm; prop. : ἄγκυ- 
pa, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: ἐπαγγελία, Ro. 1v. 
16; κλῆσις καὶ ἐκλογή, 2 Pet. i. 105 λόγος προφητικός, 2 
Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Heb. iii. 14; ἐλπίς, 2 Co. 
i. 7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; παρρησία, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH 
Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, λόγος, 
Heb. ii. 2; διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same mean- 
ings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

βεβαιόω, -; fut. βεβαιώσω; 1 aor. ἐβεβαίωσα; Pass., 
[pres. βεβαιοῦμαι]; 1 aor. ἐβεβαιώθην ; (βέβαιος) ; to make 
firm, establish, confirm, make sure : τὸν λόγον, to prove its 
truth and divinity, Mk. xvi. 20; ras ἐπαγγελίας make 
good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Ro. xv. 
8 (so also in Grk. writ. as Diod. 1, 5) ; Pass. : τὸ μαρτύριον 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. i. 6; ἡ cwrnpia... eis ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη, 
a constructio praegnans [W. $ 66, 2 d.] which may be re- 
solved into eis ἡμᾶς παρεδόθη Kal ἐν ἡμῖν βέβαιος ἐγένετο, 
Heb. ii. 3 cf. 2; see βέβαιος. of men made steadfast and 
constant in soul: Heb. xiii. 9; 1 Co. i. 8 (βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς 


βεβαίωσις 


ἀνεγκλήτους will so confirm you that ye may be unre- 
provable [W. § 59, 6 fin.]); 2 Co. i. 21 (βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς 
eis Χριστόν, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship 
with Christ; ef. Meyer ad loe.); ἐν τῇ πίστει, Col. ii. 7 
[LT Tr WH om. ἐν]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. and Plat. 
down.) [Comp.: a-BeBatóopa. | * 

βεβαίωσις, -eos, ἡ, (BeBaióo), confirmation: τοῦ evayye- 
λίου, Phil. i. 7; εἰς βεβαίωσιν to produce confidence, Heb. 
vi. 16. (Sap. vi. 19. "Thuc., Plut., Dio Cass., [al.]) * 

βέβηλος, -ov, (BAQ, βαίνω, βηλός threshold) ; 1. ac- 
cessible, lawful to be trodden; prop. used of places; hence 
2. profane, equiv. to 5n [i. e. unhallowed, common], 
Lev. x. 10; 1 S. xxi. 4; opp. to ἅγιος (as in [Ezek. xxii. 
26]; Philo, vit. Moys. iii. $ 18): 1 Tim. iv. 7; vi. 20; 
2 Tim. ii. 16; of men, profane i.e. ungodly: 1 Tim. i. 9; 
Heb. xii. 16. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) 
[Cf. Trench § ci.]* 

βεβηλόω, -à ; 1 aor. ἐβεβήλωσα; (βέβηλος) ; to profane, 
desecrate: τὸ σάββατον, Mt. xii. 5; τὸ ἱερόν, Acts xxiv. 6. 
(Often in Sept. for 55r; Judith ix. 8; 1 Mace. ii. 12, 
etc.; Heliod. 2, 25.) * 

Βεελζεβούλ and, as written by some [yet no Greek] 
authorities, Βεελζεβούβ [cod. B Βεεζεβούλ, so cod. δὲ exc. 
in Mk. iii. 22; adopted by WH, see their App. p. 159; cf. 
B. 6], 6, indecl., Beelzebul or Beelzebub, a name of Satan, 
the prince of evil spirits: Mt. x. 25; xii. 24, 27; Mk. iii. 
22; Lk.xi.15,18, 19. The form Βεελζεβούλ is composed 
of i3 (rabbin. for 53: dung) and 5y3, lord of dung 
or of filth, i. e. of idolatry; οἵ. Lightfoot on Mt. xii. 24. 
The few who follow Jerome in preferring the form BeeA- 
ζεβούβ derive the name fr. 3321 5313, lord of flies, a false 
god of the Ekronites (2 K. i. 2) having the power to 
drive away troublesome flies, and think the Jews trans- 
ferred the name to Satan in contempt. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Beelzebub: and J. G. M(üller) in Herzog vol. i. p. 
768 sqq.; [BB.DD.; cf. also Meyer and Dr. Jas. Mori- 
son on Mt. x. 25; some, as Weiss (on Mk.1. c.; Bibl. Theol. 
§ 23 a.), doubt alike whether the true derivation of the 
name has yet been hit upon, and whether it denotes Satan 
or only some subordinate ‘ Prince of demons']. (Besides 
only in eccl. writ., as Ev. Nicod. c. 1 sq.) * 

Βελίαλ, ὁ, (53753 worthlessness, wickedness), Belial, a 
name of Satan, 2 Co. vi. 15 in Rec.*z* L. But Βελίαρ 
(q. v-) is preferable, [see WH. App. p. 159; B. 6].* 

Βελίαρ, ὁ, indecl, Beliar, a name of Satan in 2 Co. vi. 
15 Rec.* G T Tr WH, etc. 
cribed (as most suppose) to the harsh Syriae pronuncia- 
tion of the word BeMaA (q. v.), or must be derived from 


BÀ 53 lord of the forest, i. e. whorules over forests and | 


deserts, (cf. Sept. Is. xiii. 21; Mt. xii. 43; [BB.DD. s. v. 
Belial, esp. Alex.’s Kitto]). Often in eccl. writ.* 

βελόνη, -ης, 7. (βέλος); a. the point of a spear. b. a 
needle: Lk. xviii. 25 LT TrWH ; see pacis. ([Batr. 130], 
Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., al.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90.)* 

βέλος, -εος, τό, (βάλλω). a missile, a dart, javelin, arrow: 
Eph. vi. 16. [From Hom. down.]* 

βελτίων, -ov, gen. -ovos, better; neut. adverbially in 2 
Tim. i. 18 [W. 242 (227); B. 27 (24). Soph., Thuc., al.]* 


100 


'This form is either to be as- | 





Βηθεσδά 


Βενιαμίν [-μείν 1, T Tr WH; see WH. App. 155, and 
8. V. et, 47,6, (12723; i. e. 2113 son of the right hand, i. e. 
of good fortune, Gen. xxxv. 18), Benjamin, Jacob's 
twelfth son; φυλὴ Βενιαμίν the tribe of Benjamin: Acts 
xiii. 21; Ro. xi. 1; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. vii. 8.* 

Βερνίκη, -5s, 7, (for Βερενίκη, and this the Macedonie 
form [ef. Sturz, De dial. Mac. p. 31] of Φερενίκη [i. e. vic- 
torious ]), Bernice or Berenice, daughter of Herod Agrip- 
pa the elder. She married first her uncle Herod, king , 
of Chalcis, and after his death Polemon, king of Cilicia. 
Deserting him soon afterwards, she returned to her 
brother Agrippa, with whom previously when a widow 
she was said to have lived incestuously. Finally she 
became for a time the mistress of the emperor Titus 
(Joseph. antt. 19, 5, 1; 20, 7, 1 and 3; Tacit. hist. 2, 2 
and 81; Suet. Tit. 7): Acts xxv. 13, 23; xxvi. 30. Cf. 
Hausrath in Schenkel i. p. 396 sq.; [.Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 
599 sq. ].* 

Bépoua, -as, 7, (also Béppoia [i. e. well-watered]), Berea, 
a city of Macedonia, near Pella, at the foot of Mount 
Bermius: Acts xvii. 10, 13.* 

Bepouaios, -a, -ov, Berwan: Acts xx. 4.* 

[Bn$caiá, viven by L mrg. Tr mrg. in Lk. x. 13 where 
Rec. etc. Βηθσαϊδά. q. v.] 

Βηθαβαρά, -as, [-pa Rec.****', indecl.], ἡ, (033p m3 
place of erossing, i. e. where there is a crossing or ford, 
cf. Germ. Furthhausen), Bethabara: Jn. i. 28 Rec. [in 
Rec.?* of 1st decl, but ef. W. 61 (60)]; see [WH. 
App. ad loc. and] Βηθανία, 2.* 

Βηθανία. -as, ἡ, (773). v3 house of depression or misery 
[cf. B.D. Am. ed.]), Bethany; 1. a town or village 
beyond the Mount of Olives, fifteen furlongs from Jeru- 
salem: Jn. xi. 1, 18; xii. 1; Mt. xxi. 17; xxvi. 6; Lk. xix. 
29 [here WH give the accus.-ma (see their App. p. 160), 
cf. Tr mrg.]; xxiv. 50; Mk. xi.1, 11 sq.; xiv.3; nowa 
little Arab hamlet, of from 20 to 30 families, called e/- 
’Azirtyeh or el-’Azir (the Arabic name of Lazarus) ; cf. 
Robinson i. 431 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.]. 2. a town or 
village on the east bank of the Jordan, where John bap- 
tized: Jn. i. 28 L T Tr WH, [see the preceding word]. 
But Origen, although confessing that in his day nearly 
all the codd. read ἐν Βηθανίᾳ, declares that when he 
journeyed through those parts he did not find any place 
of that name, but that Bethabara was pointed out as the 
place where John had baptized; the statement is con- 
firmed by Eusebius and Jerome also, who were well ac- 
quainted with the region. Hence it is most probable that 


| Bethany disappeared after the Apostles’ time, and was 


restored under the name of Bethabara; οἵ. Liicke ad 
loc. p. 391 sqq. [Cf. Prof. J. A. Paine in Phila. S. S. 
Times for Apr. 16, 1881, p. 243 sq.]* 

Βηϑθεσδά, ἡ, indec., (Chald. 810M 13, i. e. house of 
mercy, or place for receiving and caring for the sick), 
Jethesda, the name of a pool near the sheep-sate at 
Jerusalem, the waters of which had curative powers: 
Jn. v. 2 [here L mre. WH mre. read Βηθσαϊδά, T WH txt. 
Βηθζαθά (q. v.)]. What locality in the modern city is 
its representative is not clear; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; 


BnOtabd 


Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 117 sq.; Robinson i. 330 sq. 
342 sq.; [B.D. s. v.; “ 'The Recovery of Jerusalem ” 
(see index) ]-* 

Βηθζαθά, ἡ, (perh. fr. Chald. sry 13 house of olives; 
not, as some suppose, SAM 73 house of newness, Germ. 
Neuhaus, since it cannot be shown that the Hebr. nV is 
ever represented by the Grk. €), Bethzatha: Jn. v. 2 
T [WH tst.] after codd. § LD and other authorities 
(no doubt a corrupt reading, yet approved by Keim ii. 
p. 177, [see also WH. App. ad loc.]), for Ree. Βηθεσδά, 
q.v. [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.] * 

Βηθλεέμ, ἡ, [indecl.], (in Joseph. not only so [antt. 8, 
10, 1], but also Βηθλεέμη, -ns, antt. 6, 8, 15 11, 7; eg adl 
3]; ἀπὸ Βηθλέμων, 5, 2, 8; ex Βηθλεέμων, 5, 9, 1; [ef. 7, 
13; 9, 27), Bethlehem, (oro ma house of bread), a little 
town, named from the fertility of its soil, six Roman 
miles south of Jerusalem; now Beit Lachm, with about 
3000 [ 5000”, Baedeker] inhabitants : Mt. ii. 1, 5 sq. 8, 
16; Lk. ii. 4, 15; Jn. vii. 42. C£. Win. RWB.s. v.; Rob- 
inson i. p. 470 sqq.; Raumer p. 313 sqq. ; Tobler, Beth- 
lehem in Palüstina u.s.w. 1849; [Socin (i. e. Baedeker), 
Habk. ete., s. v. ; Porter (i. e. Murray) ib. ; BB.DD.].* 

Βηθσαϊδά [WH -cada; see I, ει] and (Mt. xi. 21 RG 
T WH) -δάν, ἡ, indecl. but with ace. [which ma y, how- 
ever, be only the alternate form just given; ef. WH. 
App. p. 160] Βηθσαϊδάν [B. 17 (16 sq.) ; Win. 61 (60); 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 sq.], (Syr. i, Ass i. 6. house or 
place of hunting or fishing), Bethsaida ; 1. a small 
city (πόλις, Jn. i. 44 (45)) or a village (κώμη, Mk. viii. 22, 
23) on the western shore of the Lake of Gennesaret: 
Jn. i. 44 (45); Mt. xi. 21; Mk. vi. 45; Lk. x. 13 [here 
Lumrg. Trmrg. Βηδσαῖδά; cf. Τὰ Proleg. u. s.]; Jn. 
xii. 21 (where τῆς Γαλιλαίας is added). 2. a village 
in lower Gaulanitis on the eastern shore of Lake Gennes- 
aret, not far from the place where the Jordan empties 
into it. Philip the tetrarch so increased its population 
that it was reckoned as a city, and was called Julias in 
honor of Julia, the daughter of the emperor Augustus 
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1; Plin. h. n. 5, 15). Many think 
that this city is referred to in Lk. ix. 10, on account of 
Mk. vi. 32,45; Jn. vi. 15 others that the Evangelists 
disagree. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Raumer p. 122 sq.; 
[BB.DD. s. v. 3. In Jn. v. 2 Lchm. mrg. WH mrg. 
read Βηθσαϊδά: see s. v. Brfeoóa.] * 

Βηθφαγή [but Lchm. uniformly, Treg. in Mt. and Mk. 
and R G in Mt. -y5 (B. 15; W.52 (51); cf. Tdf. Proles. 
p. 103); in Mt. xxi. 1 Tdf. ed. 7 -σφαγή]. ἡ, indecl., (fr. 
ma and 35 house of unripe figs), Bethphage, the name 
of a country-seat or hamlet (Euseb. calls it κώμη; Jerome 
villula), on the Mount of Olives, near Bethany: Mt. xxi. 
1; Mk. xi. 1 RG Tr txt. WH txt., but Tr mre. in br. ; 
Lk. xix. 29. [BB.DD. s. v.]* 

βῆμα, -τος. τό, (fr. BAQ, Batvo), [fr. Hom. (h. Mere.), 
Pind. down]; 1. a step, pace: βῆμα ποδός the space 
which the foot covers, a foot-breadth, Acts vii. 5 (for 
5482 Deut. ii. 5, cf. Xen. an. 4, 7,10; Cyr. 7, 5, 6). 
2. a raised place mounted by steps; a platform, tribune : 


101 





βιβλίον 


‘used of the official seat οἵ a judge, Mt. xxvii. 19; Jn. 


xix. 13; Acts xviii. 12, 16 sq.; xxv. 6, 10, [17]; of the 
judgment-seat of Christ, Ro. xiv. 10 (LT Tr WH τοῦ 
cov); 2 Co. v. 105 of the structure, resembling a throne, 
which Herod built in the theatre at Cesarea, and from 
which he used to view the games and make speeches to 
the people, Acts xii. 21; (of an orator's pulpit, 2 Mace. 
xiii.26; Neh. viii. 4. Xen. mem. 3, 6, 1; Hdian. 2, 10, 
2 [1 ed. Bekk. ])-* 

βήρυλλος, -ov, 6, 7, beryl, a precious stone of a pale 
green color (Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (20) [1. e. 37, 79]): Rev. 
xxi 20. (Tob. xiii. 17; neut. βηρύλλιον equiv. to DNY, 
Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix. 13)). Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Edelsteine, 11; [esp. Riehm, HWB. ib. 3 and 12:5 

βία, -ας, ἡ; 1. strength, whether of body or of mind: 
Hom. and subseq. writ. 2. strength in violent action, 
force: μετὰ Bias by the use of force, with violence, Acts 
v. 26; xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; shock τῶν κυμάτων, Acts xxvii. 41 
ΓΕ G, but Tr txt. br. al. om. τῶν κυμάτων ; διὰ τ. βίαν τοῦ 
ὄχλου, the crowd pressing on so violently, Acts xxi. 35. 
[Syn. see δύναμις, fin. ]* 

βιάζω: (Bia); to use force, to apply force; τινά, to 
force, inflict violence on, one ; the Act. is very rare and 
almost exclusively poetic, [fr. Hom. down]; Pass. [B. 
53 (46) ] in Mt. xi. 12 ἡ βασιλεία τ. οὐρ. βιάζεται, the king- 
dom of heaven is taken by violence, carried by storm, i.e. 
a share in the heavenly kingdom is sought for with the 
most ardent zeal and the intensest exertion; cf. Xen. 
Hell. 5, 2, 15 (23) πόλεις τὰς βεβιασμένας ; [but see Weiss, 
Jas. Morison, Norton, in loe.] The other explanation : 
the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence sc. from its ene- 
mies, agrees neither with the time when Christ spoke the 
words, nor with the context; cf. Fritzsche, De Wette, 
Meyer, ad loc. Mid. βιάζομαι foll. by εἴς τε to force one’s 
way into a thing, (ἐς τὴν Ἰποτίδαιαν, Thue. 1, 63; ἐς τὸ ἔξω, 
7,69; εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν, Polyb. 1, 74, 5; els τὰ ἐντός, 
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; εἰς τὸ στρατύπεδον, Plut. Otho 
12, etc.) : εἰς τ. βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, to get a share in the 
kingdom of God by the utmost earnestness and effort, 
Lk. xvi. 16. [Cowr.: παραβιάζομαι.} * 

βίαιος, -a, -ov, (βία), violent, forcible: Acts ii. 2 [ A. v. 
mighty]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

βιαστής, -ov, ὁ, (Bata) ; 1. strong, forceful: Pind. 
Ol. 9, 114 [75]; Pyth. 4, 420 [236; but Pind. only uses 
the form βιατάς, so al.]. 2. using force, violent: Philo, 
agric. § 19. In Mt. xi. 12 those are called βιασταί by 
whom the kingdom of God βιάζεται, i. 6. who strive to 
obtain its privileges with the utmost eagerness and 
effort.* : 

βιβλαρίδιον, -ov, τό. (dimin. of the dimin. βιβλάριον fr. 
ἡ BiBXos), a little book: Rev. x. 2, 8 [L Tr WH βιβλίον, 
Taf. 2 and 7 βιβλιδάριον. q. v.], 9,10. Not found in prof. 
auth. [Herm. vis. 2, 4, 3]; οἵ. W. 96 (91).* 

βιβλιδάριον, -ov, τό, (fr. βιβλίδιον, like ἱματιδάριον fr. 
ἱματίδιον), a little book: Rev. x. 8 Tdf. [edd. 2 and] 7. 
(Arstph. frag. 596.) * 

βιβλίον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of βίβλος), a small book, a 
scroll: Lk.iv.17,20; Jn. xx. 30; Gal i10; 2 Tim. iv. 


βίβλος 


13, ete.; a written document; a sheet on which some- 
thing has been written, 8. ἀποστασίου [bill of divorce- 
ment]: Mt. xix.7; Mk. x. 4; see ἀποστάσιον, 1. βιβλίον 
, ζωῆς, the list of those whom God has appointed to eter- 
nal salvation: Rev. xiii. 8 [Rec. τῇ βίβλῳ] ; xvii. 8; xx. 
12; xxi. 27; see ζωή, 2b. [From Hdt. down.] 

βίβλος, -ov, 7, (or rather ἡ βύβλος [but the form βίβλ. 
more com. when it denotes a writing], the plant called 
papyrus, Theophr. hist. plant. 4, 8, 2 sq.; [Plin. h. n. 
13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)]; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular sub- 
stance of its stem (for it was an endogenous plant)] 
paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 433 sq. ; 
esp. Dureau de la Malle in the Mémoires de l'Acad. d. 
Inserr. ete. tom. 19 pt. 1 (1851) pp..140—-183, and (in 
correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot 
in the Library Journal for Nov. 1878, p. 323 sq., where 
other reff. are also viven ]), a written book, a roll or scroll: 
Mt.i.1; Lk.ii.4; Mk. xii. 26; Actsi. 20; τῆς ζωῆς, 
Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, ete.; see βιβλίον. [From Aeschyl. 
down. | 

βιβρώσκω: pf. βέβρωκα; to cat: Jn. vi. 13. 
writ. fr. Hom. down ; often in Sept.) * 

Βιθυνία, -as, ἡ, Bithynia, a province of Asia Minor, 
bounded by the Euxine Sea, the Propontis, Mysia, 
Phrygia, Galatia, Paphlagonia: Acts xvi. 7; 1 Pet. i. 1. 
[Οἷς B. D. s. v. ; Diet. of Grk. and Rom. Geog. s. v. ; Cony- 
beare and Howson, St. Paul, etc. ch. viii.]* 

βίος, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down]; a. life extensively, 
i.e. the period or course of life [see below and 
Trench $ xxvii.]: Lk. viii. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 4; 
1 Jn. ii. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 3 [Rec.]. b. (as often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 230, 575; Hdt., Xen.) that by which 
life is sustained, resources, wealth, [ A. V. living]: Mk. 
xii: 44; Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. cl.]; xv. 12, 
30; xxi 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17 [goods]. (For on? in Prov. 
xxxl 14 (xxix. 32).)* : 

[8xx. βίος, ζωή: ¢. existence (having death as its antithe- 
sis); 8. the period, means, manner, of existence. Hence 
the former is more naturally used of animals, the latter of 
men; cf. zoology, biography. N.T. usage exalts ζωή, and 
so tends to debase Bios. But see Bp. Lght/t. Ign.ad Rom. 7.] 


(In Grk. 


Bidw, -G: 1 aor. inf. βιῶσαι; for which in Attic the 2 
aor. inf. βιῶναι is more common, ef. W. 84 (80); [B. 54 
(48); Veitch or L. and S. s. v.]; (Bios); [fr. Hom. down]; 
to spend life, to live: τὸν χρόνον, to pass the time, 1 Pet. iv. 
2; (Job xxix. 18; ἡμέρας, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 2). [Svx. 
see Bios, fin.]* 

Blocs, -eos, 7, manner of living and acting, way of life: 
Acts xxvi. 4. (Sir. prolog. 10 διὰ τῆς ἐννόμου βιώσεως ; 
not found in prof. auth.) * 

βιωτικός, -7, -ov, pertaining to life and the affairs of this 
life: Lk. xxi. 34; 1 Co. vi. 3 sq. (The word, not used in 
Attic, first occurs in Aristot. h. a. 9, 17, 2 [ p. 6165, 27]; 
χρεῖαι βιωτικαί is often used, as Polyb. 4, 73, 8; Philo, vit. 
Moys. iii. $ 18 fin. ; Diod. 2, 29; Artemid. oneir. 15551. 
Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 354 sq.)* 

BXafepós, -á, -óv, (βλάπτων), hurtful, injurious, (Xen. 
mem. 1, 5, 3 opp. to ὠφέλιμος) : 1 Tim. vi. 9 ἐπιθυμίαι 


102 





βλασφημία 


βλαβεραί, cf. ἡδοναὶ BA. Xen. mem. 1, 8,11. (Often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. h. Merc. 36 (taken fr. Hes. opp. 
365)] down; once in Sept., Prov. x. 26.)* 

βλάπτω : fut. βλάψω ; 1 aor. ἔβλαψα ; to hurt, harm, in- 
jure: τινά, Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. iv. 35. (Very often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; Tob. xii. 2; 2 Mace. xii. 22, ete.) * 

βλαστάνω, 3 pers. sing. pres. subj. βλαστᾷ fr. the form 
βλαστάω, Mk. iv. 27 1, Τ Tr WH (cf. B. 55 (48) ; [Eeccl. 
ii. 65 Herm. sim. 4, 1 sq.]); 1 aor. ἐβλάστησα (cf. W. 
84 (80) ; [B. L.c.]) ; 1. intransitively, to sprout, bud, 
put forth leaves: Mk. iv. 27; Mt. xiii. 26; Heb. ix. 4; 
(Num. xvii. 8; Joel ii. 22, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. 
down). 2. in later Grk. writ. transitively, to produce: 
τὸν καρπόν, Jas. v. 18. (Gen. i. 11, etc.) * 

Βλάστος [i. e. a sprout], -ov, 6, Blastus, the chamber- 
lain of king Herod Agrippa I.: Acts xii. 20 [cf. Mey. 
ad loc.].* 

βλασφημέω, -ὦ ; impf. ἐβλασφήμουν; 1 aor. ἐβλασφή- 
μησα; Pass. [pres. βλασφημοῦμαι); 1 fut. βλασφημηθή- 
σομαι; (βλάσφημος, q. v-) ; to speak reproachfully, rail at, 
revile, calumniate, (Vulg. blasphemo) ; absol.: Lk. xxii. 
65; Acts xiii. 45 ; xviii. 6; xxvi. 11; 1 Tim. i. 20; 1 Pet. 
iv.4; with acc. of pers. or thing (asin later Grk., Joseph., 
Plut., Appian, ete.): Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. iii. 28 L T Tr 
WH; xv. 29; Lk.xxii.39; Tit. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 7; Jude 
10; with the cognate noun βλασφημίαν, to utter blasphe- 
my (Plat. lege. 7 p. 800 c.; see ἀγαπάω ad fin.), Mk. iii. 
28 R G (where L'T Tr WH ὅσα for ὅσας, see above) ; 
[foll. by ἐν, 2 Pet. ii. 12; cf. Bttm. as at end, and see 
dyvoeo, a.]. Pass. βλασφημοῦμαι to be evil spoken of, re- 
viled, railed at: Ro. iii. 8; xiv. 16; 1 Co. iv. 13 (T WH 
Tr mrg. δυσφημούμενοι) ; x. 30; Tit. ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 2; 
τὸ ὄνομά τινος, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 1. Spec. of those 
who by contemptuous speech intentionally come short 
of the reverence due to God or to sacred things (for 
"11, 2 K. xix. 6, 22 cf. 4; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. x. 34); 
absol: Mt. ix. 3; xxvi. 65; Mk.ii.7 LT Tr WH; [Jn. 
x. 36]; τὸν θεόν, Rev. xvi. 11, 21; τὴν θεάν, Acts xix. 37 
(G L'T Tr WH τὴν θεόν); τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xiii. 
6; xvi. 9; τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ (βλασφημεῖται), 1 Pet. iv. 
14 Rec.; δόξας, Jude 8; 2 Pet. ii. 10 (see δόξα, III. 3 b. y.) ; 
εἰς τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ay. Mk. iii. 29; Lk. xii. 10, (eis θεούς, 
Plat. rep. 2 p. 381 e.). The earlier Grks. say βλασφ. 
εἴς τινα, περί Or κατά τινος ; [on the N. T. constructions 
cf. W. 222 (208); 629 (584); B. 146 (128)].* 

βλασφημία, -as, 7, railing, reviling, (Vule. blasphemia) ; 
a. univ. slander, detraction, speech injurious to another's 
good name: Mt. xii. 31; xv. 19; Mk. iii. 28; vii. 22; Eph. 
iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 4; Jude 9 (κρίσις βλα- 
σφημίας, i. 4. κρίσις βλάσφημος in 2 Pet. ii. 11, a judgment 
pronounced in reproachful terms); Rev. ii.9. ^ b. spe- 
cifically, impious and reproachful speech injurious to the 
divine majesty: Mt. xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 7 [RG]; xiv. 64; 
Lk. v. 21; Jn. x. 33; Rev. xiii. 5 [not Lehm.]; ὄνομα or 
ὀνόματα βλασφημίας i.q. βλάσφημα (cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; 
[B. $132, 10]) : Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [R G Tr, see γέμω]; 
τοῦ πνεύματος, gen. of obj., Mt. xii. 31; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Rev. 
xiii. 6. (Eur. Plat, Dem., al; for ΠΥ, Ezek. xxxv. 


βλάσφημος 


12.) [BB.DD. 5. ν. Blasphemy; Campbell, Diss. on the 
Gospels, diss. ix. pt. ii.]* 

βλάσφημος, -ov, (βλάξ sluggish, stupid, and φήμη speech, 
report, [al. βλάπτω (q. v-) and ¢.]), speaking evil, slan- 
derous, reproachful, railing, abusive: Acts vi. 11 (ῥήματα 
βλάσφημα eis Μωῦσῆν καὶ τὸν θεόν) ; [vi. 13 Rec. (p. 8A. 
κατὰ τοῦ τόπου τοῦ dyiov)]; 2 Pet. ii. 11 (see βλασφημία, 
a.); Rev. xiii. 5 [Lehm.]; βλάσφημος as subst. a blas- 
phemer: 1 Tim. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Is. xvi. 3; Sap. 1. 
6; Sir. iii. 16; 2 Mace. ix. 28; [x. 36 (cf. 4)]; in Grk. 
writ. fr. Dem. down.) * 

βλέμμα, -τος, τό, (βλέπω); a look, glance: βλέμματι k. ἀκοῇ 
in seeing and hearing, 2 Pet. ii. 8 [ef. Warfield in Presbyt. 
Rev. for 1883 p. 629 sqq.]. (Eur., Arstph., Dem., Plut., al.) * 

βλέπω ; [impf. ἔβλεπον] ; fut. βλέψω ; 1 aor. ἔβλεψα ; 
[pres. pass. βλέπομαι]; Sept. for AN, 123, mm, b3n; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; to see, discern; als 
with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have 
the power of seeing, opp. to τυφλός : Mt. xii. 22; xiii. 16; 
Ἐν 591.: dn 1s 7, 15, 19; 25 ΔΙΡΙΒ ἔχ 9): Ro; x1. 8, 10); 
Rev. iii. 18, etc. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15; 
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, ete. Ex. iv. 11; 
xxii. 8, etc. Tob. xi. 15). τὸ βλέπειν sight, the power 
of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (GL T Tr WH om. ró). b. to 
perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look, descry; a. 
absol.: βλεπόντων αὐτῶν while they were looking, Acts i. 
9; [xxii. 11 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; ἔρχου καὶ βλέπε, Rec. in 
Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7.  &. with acc. of pers. or thing: Mt. 
vil. 3; xi. 4; xxiv. 2; Mk. v. 31; viii. 23 sq.; xiii. 2; 
Lk. vi. 41; xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; 
Jn.i. 29; Acts iv. 14, etc.; [ Rev. xviii. 18 Rec. ὁρῶντες]; 
τὴν φωνήν, him who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12; ὅραμα, 
Acts xii. 9; he who has free access to one, as princes, 
ministers, and personal friends have to a king, is said 
BX. τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος (1291 3385, 2 K. xxv. 19; Jer. 
lii. 25; Esth.i 14); hence in Mt. xviii. 10 angels of 
closest access or of highest rank are referred to (see 
ἀρχάγγελος). Pass. rà βλεπόμενα the things that are 
seen: 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 3 (L T Tr WH τὸ βλεπόμενον, 
the sum-total or complex of things seen) ; ἐλπὶς βλεπομένη 
hope of things that are seen, i. e. that are present, Ro 
viii. 24. — c. to turn the eyes to anything, to look at, 
look upon, gaze at: γυναῖκα, Mt. v. 28; ets τι or τινα [W. 
8 33g.] Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 22; Acts iii. 4; εἰς τὸν 
οὐρανόν, Actsi. 11 T Tr WH; in the sense of looking into 
(i. e. in order to read), βιβλίον, Rev. v. 3 sq. d. univ. 
to perceive by the senses, to feel: τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρόν [T WH 
om. icy. ], Mt. xiv. 30, (κτύπον δέδορκα, Aeschyl. sept. 104). 
e. to discover by use, to know by experience: ri, Ro. vii. 
23; foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. vii. 8; by attract. τὸ θηρίον, ὅτι κτλ. 
Rev. xvii. 8; ὑπὲρ ὃ βλέπει pe for ὑπὲρ τοῦτο. ὃ βλέπει pe 
ὄντα, lest he think me greater than on personal knowl- 
edge he finds me to be, 2 Co. xii. 6. 2. metaph. to see 
with the mind’s eye; a. to have (the power of) un- 
derstanding: βλέποντες οὐ βλέπουσι, though endued with 
understanding they do not understand, Mt. xiii. 13; Lk. 
viii. 10. b. to discern mentally, observe, perceive, dis- 
cover, understand ; absol. : 


103 





Bodo 


the omniscient God βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ seeing in secret, 
where man sees nothing, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 [here L T Tr 
WH fA. ἐν v. κρυφαίῳ] ; ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν, Heb. x. 
25 (fr. certain external signs) ; Ἰησοῦν . . . ἐστεφανωμέ- 
νον, we see (from his resurrection and from the effects 
and witness of the Holy Spirit) Jesus crowned, Heb. ii. 
9; foll. by ὅτι, Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22. — c. to turn the 
thoughts or direct the mind to a thing, to consider, contem- 
plate, look to; absol. βλέπετε take heed: Mk. xiii. 23, 33; 
with an ace. of the thing or pers., 1 Co. i. 26; x. 18; 
2 Co. x. 7; Phil.ii.2; Col ii.5; foll. by πῶς with indic. 
[W. 300 (282); B. 255 (219)], Lk. viii. 18; 1 Co. iii. 
10; Eph. v. 15; to weigh carefully, examine, foll. by 
interrog. τί with indie. Mk. iv. 24; eis πρόσωπόν τινος. 
to look at i. e. have regard to one's external condition, 
— used of those who are influenced by partiality : Mt. 
xxii. 16; Mk.xii.14. By a use not found in Grk. auth. 
ἑαυτὸν βλέπειν to look to one’s self (i. q. sibi cavere) : Mk. 
xiii. 9; foll. by tva μή [cf. B. 242 (209)], 2 Jn. 8; 8Aé- 
mew ἀπό τινος (i. q. sibi cavere ab aliquo) to beware of one 
[W. 223 (209), cf. 39 (38); B. 242 (209), cf. 323 (278)], 
Mk. viii. 15; xii. 38; look to in the sense of providing, 
taking care: foll. by tva, 1 Co. xvi. 10; foll. by μή with 
subj. aor., Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii.5; Lk.xxi.8; Acts xiii ' 
40; 1 Co. viii. 9 (μήπως); x. 12; Gal. v. 15; Heb. xii. 
25; foll by μή with fut. indie., Col. ii. 8; Heb. iii. 12. 
The Grks. say ὁρᾶν μή, [cf. W. 503 (468 sq.); B. 242 sq. 
(209)]. 3. in a geographical sense, like Lat. specto 
[ Eng. look], of places, mountains, buildings, ete., turned 
towards any quarter, as it were facing it: foll. by κατά 
with ace., Acts xxvii. 12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Phenice], 
(Sept. [Num. xxi. 20]; Ezek. xi. 1; [xliv. 1; xlvii. 1]; 
zpós, Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 17; mem. 3, 8, 9; ἘΝ 620539 
Dios. Laért. 1, 2, 48; Sept. Ezek. ix. 2; xl. 24; [xlvi. 
1]; eis, viii. 3, etc. τὴς other exx. see Soph. Lex. 8. v.]). 
[Svw. see s. v. dpdw. Comp.: dva-, dmo-, dia-, ἐμ-, emt, 
περι-, προ-βλέπω.] 

βλητέος, -α, -ον, (βάλλω), which must be thrown or put, 
(see βάλλω, 2); found only in neut.: Mk. ii. 22 (WH 
Tom. Tr br.); Lk. v. 38 βλητέον ἐστί foll. by ace. τὸν 
οἶνον, cf. Matth. § 447, 3a.; [B. 190 (165)]. (Besides 
only in Basil i. p. 137 c. ed. Benedict.) * 

Boavepyés ([ RG, so Suid. (ed. Gaisf. 751 a.); but] LT 
Tr WH Boampyés), Boanerges, Hebr. V3? *33 i. e. sons of 
thunder (as Mark himself explains it), [the name given 
by our Lord to James and John the sons of Zebedee] : 
Mk. iii. 17; 3 pronounced Boa as Noabhyim for Nebhy- 
im; see Lghtft. Horae Hebr. ad loc.; w3}, in Ps. lv. 15 
a tumultuous crowd, seems in Syriac to have signified 
thunder; so that the name Βοανηργές seems to denote 
fiery and destructive zeal that may be likened to a thun- 
der-storm, and to make reference to the occurrence nar- 
rated in Lk. ix.34. [Cf. Dr. Jas. Morison's Com. on Mk. 
l.c.; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.]* 

Bodw, -@; [impf. ἐβόων Acts xxi. 34 Rec.]; 1 aor. 
ἐβόησα; (Bon); fr. Hom. down; in Sept. mostly for 
NIP, Pst py, to cry aloud, shout, (Lat. boo) ; 1. to 


δὲ ἐσόπτρου, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of | raise a cry: of joy, Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); of pain, 


Boés 


Mt. xxvii. 46 Lmre. Tr WH; Acts viii. 7. 2. to cry 
i. e. speak with a high, strong voice: Mt. iii. 3, Mk. i. 3, Lk. 
iii. 4, Jn. i. 23, (all fr. Is. xl. 3) ; Mk. xv. 34; Lk. ix. 38 
(RG dvaB.); [xviii. 38]; Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 34 Rec.; 
xxv. 24 (RG émi.). 3. πρός twa to cry to one for 
help, implore his aid: Lk. xviii. 7 [T Tr WH αὐτῷ ; cf. 
W. 212 (199)], (1 S. vii. 8; 1 Chr. v. 20; Hos. vii. 14, 
ete. for ὮΝ pz) [Come. : dva-, ἐπι-βοάω. * 

[Sxs. Boda, καλέω, κράζω, κραυγάζω: It is not un- 
instructive to notice that in classic usage καλεῖν denotes 
“to cry out’ for a purpose, to call; βοᾶν to cry out as a mani- 
festation of feeling; κράζειν to cry out harshly, often of 
an inarticulate and brutish sound; thus καλεῖν suggests in- 
telligence; βοᾶν sensibilities; κράζειν instincts; 
hence, βοᾶν esp. a cry for help. κραυγάζειν, intensive of 
κράζω, denotes to ery coarsely, in contempt,etc. Cf. Schmidt 
ch. 3.] . 


Boés, 6, Mt. i. 5 T WH, for Rec. Bodg, q. v. 

βοή, -ῆς, ἡ, a cry: Jas. v. 4 (of those imploring ven- 
geance). From Hom. down.* 

βοήθεια, -as, ἡ, (see βοηθέω), help: Heb. iv. 16, (often 
in Sept, chiefly for rwy and wy; in Grk. writ. fr. 
Thue. and Xen. down); plur. helps: Acts xxvii. 17 
[see Hackett ad loc.; B.D. s. v. Ship 4; Smith, Voyage 
and Shipwr. of St. Paul, pp. 106 sq. 204 sq.; ef. ὑποζών- 
vypa |.” 

βοη-θέω, -5; 1 aor. ἐβοήθησα ; (fr. Bon a cry and θέω 
to run); in Sept. chiefly for "1; in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; prop. to run to the cry (of 
those in danger); hence univ. to help, succor, bring aid: 
τινί, Mt. xv. 25; Mk. ix. 22, 24 (βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ, 
“quod fiduciae meae deest bonitate tua supple," Gro- 
tius); Acts xvi. 9; xxi. 28; 2 Co. vi. 2; Heb. ii. 18; 
Rev. xii. 16.* 

βοηθός, -óv, helping, (νῆες, Hdt. δ, 97; στήριγμα, Tob. 
viii. 6); mostly as subst. [so fr. Hdt. down] a helper: 
Heb. xiii. 6 (of God, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 7, as often 
in Sept.).* 

βόθυνος, -ov, 6, a pit, a ditch: Mt. xii. 11; xv. 14; Lk. 
vi. 39. (Solon'in Bekker's Anecd. i. 85; Xen. oec. 19, 
3; "Theophr. hist. pl. 4, 2, 2 [(var.) ; al]; Sept. 2 S. 
xylii. 17, etc.) * 

Bodh, -ῆς, ἡ, (βάλλω), a throw: ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν about 
a stone’s throw, as far as a stone can be cast by the hand, 
Lk. xxii. 41, (ὡσεὶ τόξου βολήν. Gen. xxi. 16; μέχρι λίθου 
x. ἀκοντίου βολῆς, Thue. 5, 65; ἐξ ἀκοντίου βολῆς. Xen. 
Hell. 4, 5, 15).* 

βολίζω: 1 aor. ἐβόλισα; (βολίς a missile, dart; a line 
and plummet with which mariners sound the depth of 
the sea, a sounding-lead) ; to heave the lead, take sound- 
ings: Acts xxvii. 28. (Besides only in Eustath.; [Mid. 
intrans. to sink in water, Geopon. 6, 17].) * 

βολίς, -ἰδος, ἡ, (βάλλω), a missile, dart, javelin: Heb. 
xii. 20 Rec. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Neh. iv. 17; Num. xxiv. 
8; [Sap. v. 22; Hab. iii. 11]; Plut. Demetr. 3.) * 

Bost, ὁ, (1y3 fleetness [but see B.D. Am. ed.]), Booz, 
[more commonly] Boaz, a kinsman of Ruth, afterwards 
her (second) husband, (Ruth ii. 1 sqq.; 1 Chr. ii. 11): 


104 





βουλή 


Mt. i. 5 [Boos L Tr, Boés TWH]; Lk. iii. 32 [L T Tr 
WH Boos ].* 

βόρβορος, -ov, 6, dung, mire: 2 Pet. ii. 22. (Sept.; 
Aeschyl, Arstph., Plat., sqq.; ἐν βορβόρῳ κυλίεσθαι, of 
the vicious, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 29.) * 

βορρᾶς, -a [W. $ 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, (equiv. to 
βορέας. -éov), often [in Attic writ.], in Sept. for W8y; 
1. Boreas; the north-north-east wind. 2. the north: 
Lk. xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13, [cf. W. 121 (115) s. v. pe- 
one Bpta]-* 

fócko; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to feed: Mk. 
v. 14; Lk.xv. 15; ἀρνία, πρόβατα, Jn. xxi. 15, 17, (in a 
fig. disc. portraying the duty of a Christian teacher to 
promote in every way the spiritual welfare of the mem- 
bers of the church); ὁ βόσκων a herdsman: Mt. viii. 33; 
Lk. viii. 34. In Pass. and Mid. [pres. ptep. Bookopevos, 
cf. W. $38, 2 note] of flocks or herds, to feed, graze: 
Mt. vii: 30; Mk. v. 11; Lk. vii. 82. (In Sept. for 
nons 

[Svx. βόσκειν, ποιμαίνειν: m. is the wider, B. the nar- 
rower term ; the former includes oversight, the latter de- 
notesnourishment; π᾿ may be rendered tend, B. specifically 
feed. See Trench $ xxv.; Meyer on Jn. as above.] 

Βοσόρ, 6, (13 a torch, a lamp; Sept. Βεώρ, Num. 
xxii. 5; xxxi. 8; Deut. xxiii. 4; by change of } into o, 
Boodp), Bosor, the father of Balaam: 2 Pet. ii. 15 [WH 
txt. Beop ].* 

βοτάνη, -ns, ἡ, (βόσκω), an herb fit for fodder, green 
herb, growing plant: Heb. vi. 1. (Hom., Pind., Plat., 
Eur. Diod., Ael, al. Sept. for sw, xr», avy. [Met- 
aph. of men, Ignat. ad Eph. 10, 3; ad Trall. 6, 1; ad 
Philad. 3, 1]:)* 

βότρυς, -vos, 6, a bunch or cluster of grapes: Rev. xiv. 
18 [cf. B. 14 (13)]. (Gen. xl. 10; Num. xiii. 24 sq. 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

βουλευτής, -o0, 6, @ councillor, senator, (buleuta, Plin. 
epp.): first in Hom. Il. 6, 114; of a member of the 
Sanhedrin, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 50. (Job iii. 14; 
sse Π ἢ} 

βουλεύω : 1. to deliberate, take counsel, resolve, give 
counsel, (Is. xxiii. 8; [fr. Hom. down]). 2. to be a 
councillor or senator, discharge the office of a senator: 
Xen. mem. 1,1, 18; Plat. Gorg. p. 473 e.; [al.]. In the 
N. T. Mid., [pres. BovAevopar; impf. ἐβουλευόμην ; fut. 
βουλεύσυμαι, Lk. xiv. 31 L mrg. T WH; 1 aor. ἐβουλευσά- 
μην]; 1. to deliberate with one’s self, consider: foll. 
by εἰ, Lk. xiv.31, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 8). 2. to take 
counsel, resolve: fol. by inf., Acts v. 33 [RG T Tr 
mrg.]; xv.37 [Rec.]; xxvii. 39; τί, 2 Co. i. 17; foll. 
by fva, Jn. xi. 53 LT Trtxt. WH; xii. 10 [cf. W. § 38,. 
3]. [Comp.: παρα- (-yar), συμ-βουλεύω.] * 

βουλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (βούλομαι), fr. Hom. down; often in 
Sept. for ΤΣ ; counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where 
distinguished fr. ἡ mpdéis); Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see 
τίθημι, 1 a.), 42; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts 
xiii. 36; esp. of the purpose of God respecting the sal- 
vation of men through Christ: Lk. vii. 30; Acts ii. 23; 
iv. 28; [Heb. vi. 17]; πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ θεοῦ all the 


βούλημα 


contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ 
θελήματος αὐτοῦ the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.* 

βούλημα, -ros, τό, (βούλομαι), will, counsel, purpose : 
Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. ix. 19; 1 Pet. iv. 3 (Rec. θέλημα). 
(2 Mace. xv. 5; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.) [Syn. 
cf. θέλω, fin. ]* 

βούλομαι, 2 pers. sing. βούλει Lk. xxii. 42 (Attic for 
βούλῃ, cf. W. § 13, 2 a.; B. 42 (37)) ; impf. ἐβουλόμην 
(Attie [(ef. Veitch), yet commonly] ἠβουλόμην) ; 1 aor. 
ἐβουλήθην (Mt. i. 19) and ἠβουλήθην (2 Jn. 12 RG; but 
al. ἐβουλήθ. cf. [WH. App. p.162]; W. $12,1c.; B.33 
(29)) ; Sept. for Mas, yan; [fr. Hom. down]; /o will, 
wish; and 1. commonly, to will deliberately, have a 
purpose, be minded : foll. by an inf., Mk. xv. 15; Acts v. 
28,33 (L WH Tr txt. for RG T ἐβουλεύοντο); xii. 4; xv. 
37 (L T Tr WH for R ἐβουλεύσατο) ; xviii. 27 ; xix. 30; 
xxii. 30; xxiii. 28; xxvii. 43; xxviii. 18; 2 Co. i. 15; 
Heb. vi. 17; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 10 (τοὺς βουλομένους sc. 
ἐπιδέχεσθαι τοὺς ἀδελφούς) ; Jude5; Jas. i. 18 (βουληθεὶς 
ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς of his own free will he brought us forth, 
with which will it ill accords to say, as some do, that they 
are tempted to sin by God). with an ace. of the obj. 
τοῦτο, 2 Co. i. 17 (L T Tr WH for R βουλευόμενος) ; foll. 
by an ace. with inf. 2 Pet. iii. 9. of the will electing or 
choosing between two or more things, answering to 
the Lat. placet mihi: Mt. i. 19 (cf. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι, 20) ; xi. 
27 [not L mrg.]; Lk. x. 22; xxii. 42; Acts xxv. 20; [1 
Co. xii. 11]; Jas. iii. 4; iv. 4; foll. by the subj. βούλεσθε, 
ὑμῖν ἀπολύσω; is it your will should release unto you? 
(cf. W. $41a. 4 b.; B. $ 139, 2), Jn. xviii. 39. of the 
will prescribing, foll. by an ace. with inf.: Phil. i. 
12 (γινώσκειν ὑμᾶς βούλομαι I would have you know, 
know ye); 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 14; Tit. iii. 8. 2. of will- 
ing as an affection, to desire: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. vi. 
9 (οἱ βουλόμενοι πλουτεῖν); Acts xvii. 20; xviii. 15; 
ἐβουλόμην (on this use of the impf. see B. 217 (187) sq. ; 
[ef. W. 283 (266); Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]), Acts 
xxv. 22; Philem. 13. On the difference between βούλομαι 
and θέλω, see θέλω, fin.* 

Bovvós, -ov, 6, a Cyrenaic word acc. to Hdt. 4, 199, 
which Eustath. [831, 33] on Il. 11, 710 says was used by 
Philemon [Νοθ. 1], a comie poet (of the 3d cent. n. c.). 
Tt was rejected by the Atticists, but from Polyb. on [who 
(5, 22, 1 sq.) uses it interchangeably with λόφος] it was 
occasionally received by the later Grk. writ. (Strabo, 
Pausan., Plut., al.) ; in Sept. very often forr1y23; (perh. 
fr. BAQ to ascend [cf. Hesych. βουνοί: βωμοί, and βωμίδες 
in Hdt. 2, 125 (Schmidt ch. 99, 11)]) ; a hill, eminence, 
mound: Lk. iii. 5 (Is. xl. 4) ; xxiii. 30 (Hos. x. S). Cf. 
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 153 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 355 sq.; [Donaldson, New Crat. § 469].* 

βοῦς, Bods, acc. sing. βοῦν, [acc. plur. βόας, D. 14 (13)], 
6, 1, an ox, a cow: Lk. xiii. 15; xiv. 5,19; Jn. ii. 14 sq.; 
1 Co. ix. 9; 1 Tim. v. 18. [From Hom. down.] ἢ 

βραβεῖον, -ov, τό, (βραβεύς the arbiter and director of a 
contest, who awards the prize; called also βραβευτής, 
Lat. designator), the award, to the victor in the games, a 
prize, (in eccl. Lat. brabeum, brabium), (Vulg. bravium) : 


105 








βρέχω 


1 Co. ix. 24; metaph. of the heavenly reward for Chris 
tian character, Phil. iii. 14. (Oppian, cyn. 4, 197; 
Lycophr. 1154; ὑπομονῆς Bp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 5 
[where see Lghtft., Gebh. and Harn.]; ἀφθαρσίας, Mart. 
Polye. 17.) * 

βραβεύω ; in Grk. writ. fr. Isoc. and Dem. down; 1. 
to be a BpaBeds or umpire (see βραβεῖον). — 2. to decide, 
determine. 3. to direct, control, rule : Col.iii. 15 [where 
see Meyer; contra, Bp. Lghtft. Comp.: kara-Bpafgeóo.]* 

βραδύνω; (βραδύς) ; to delay, be slow; 1. rarely 
trans. to render slow, retard: τὴν σωτηρίαν, Sept. Is. xlvi. 
13; pass. ὁδός, Soph. El. 1501 [cf. O. C. 1628]. Mostly 
2. intrans. to be long, to tarry, loiter, (so fr. Aeschyl. 
down): 1 Tim.iii.15; unusually, with gen. of the thing 
which one delays to effect, 2 Pet. iii. 9 τῆς ἐπαγγελίας: 
[A. V. is not slack concerning his promise] i. e. to fulfil his 
promise; cf. W. § 30,6 b. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22.)* 

βραδυπλοέω, -à ; (βραδύς and πλοῦς) ; to sail slowly: pres. 
ptep. in Acts xxvii. €. (Artem. oneir. 4, 30.) * 
. βραδύς -cia, -v, slow; a. prop.: ets τι, Jas. i. 19. b. 
metaph. dull, inactive, in mind; stupid, slow to apprehend 
or believe, (so Hom. Il. 10, 226; opp. to συνετός, Polyb. 
4, 8, 7; τὸν νοῦν, Dion. Hal. de Att. oratt.7 [de Lys. 
judic.]; δυσμαθία: βραδυτὴς ἐν μαθήσει, Plat. defin. p. 
415 e.): with a dat. of respect, τῇ καρδίᾳ, Lk. xxiv. 25. 
[Syn. see ἀργός, fin.] * 

βραδυτής (on accent ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 417 sq.; 
[Chandler $8 634, 635; W. 52 sq. (52) ]), τῆτος, ἡ, (Bpa- 
dvs), slowness, delay: 2 Pet. iii. 9. (From Hom. down.) * 

βραχίων, -ovos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], the arm: the Bpa- 
χίων of God is spoken of Hebraistically for the might, the 
power of God, Lk. i. 51 (cf. Deut. iv. 34; v. 15 ; xxvi. 8); 
Jn. xii. 38 (Is. liii. 1) ; Acts xiii. 17.* 

βραχύς, -eia, -ύ, short, small, little, (£r. Pind., Hdt., Thue. 
down); a. of place; neut. βραχύ adverbially, a short 
distance, a little: Acts xxvii. 28 (2 S. xvi. 1; Thue. 1, 63). 
b. of time; βραχύ τι a short time, for a little while: Heb. 
ii. 7, 9, (where the writer transfers to time what the 
Sept. in Ps. viii. 6 says of rank); Acts v. 34 [here 
LT Tr WH om. τι]; μετὰ βραχύ shortly after, Lk. xxii. 58. 
c. of quantity and measure; βραχύ τι [Tr txt. WH 
om. L Tr mrg. br. τι} some little part, a little: Jn. vi. 7 
(βραχύ τι τοῦ μέλιτος, 1 S. xiv. 29; ἔλαιον βραχύ, Joseph. 
antt. 9, 4, 2; βραχύτατος λιβανωτός, Philo de vict. off. 
§ 4); διὰ βραχέων in few se. words, briefly, Heb. xiii. 22 
(so [Plat., Dem., al. (cf. Bleek on Heb. 1. c.) ] Joseph. 
b. j. 4, 5, 4; ἐν βραχυτάτῳ δηλοῦν to show very briefly, 
Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 15).* 

βρέφος, -ovs, τό; a. an unborn child, embryo, fetus: 
Lk. i. 41, 44; (Hom. Il. 23, 266; Plut. rep. Stoic. 41 
τὸ Bp. ἐν τῇ γαστρί). — b. a new-born child, an infant, a 
babe, (so fr. Pind. down) : Lk. ii. 12, 16; xviii. 15; Acts 
vii. 19; 1 Pet. ii. 2; ἀπὸ βρέφους from infancy, 2 Tim. 
iii. 15 (so ἐκ βρέφους, Anth. Pal. 9, 567).* 

βρέχω ; 1aor.éBpe£a; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; ἜΣ 
to moisten, wet, water: Lk. vii. 88 (τ. πόδας δάκρυσι, cf. 
Ps. vi. 7), 44. 2. in later writ. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 291 [W. 23]) to water with rain (Polyb. 1€, 12, 3), to 


βροντή 


cause to rain, to pour the rain, spoken of God: ἐπί τινα, 
Mt. v. 45; to send down like rain: κύριος ἔβρεξε θεῖον x. 
πῦρ, Gen. xix. 24; χάλαζαν, Ex. ix. 23; [μάννα, Ps. Ixxvii. 
(Ixxviii.) 24]; impers. βρέχει it rains (cf. W. $ 58, 9 b. 
B.): Jas. v. 17; with added ace., πῦρ x. θεῖον, Lk. xvii. 
39; with added subject, ὑετός, Rev. xi. 6.* 

βροντή, -ἧς, ἡ, thunder: Mk. iii. 17 (on which see 
Boavepyés) ; Jn. xii. 29; Rev. iv. 5; vi. 1; vili. 55 x. 3sq.; 
xi 19; xiv. 2; xvi 18; xix. 6. [From Hom. down.]* 

βροχή. -ῆς, ἡ, (βρέχω, q. v.), a later Grk. word (cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 291), a. besprinkling, watering, rain: used 
of a heavy shower or violent rainstorm, Mt. vii. 25, 27; 
Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 10; civ. (cv.) 32, for Du3.* 

βρόχος, -ov, 6, α noose, slip-knot, by which any person 
or thing is caught, or fastened, or suspended, (fr. Hom. 
down): Bpóxov ἐπιβάλλειν τινί to throw a noose upon one, 
a fig. expression borrowed from war [or the chase] (so 
Bp. περιβάλλειν τινί, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. $ 34; Joseph. 
b. j. 7, 7, 4), i. e. by craft or by force to bind one to some 
necessity, to constrain him to obey some command, 1 Co. 
vii. 35.* 

βρυγμός, -o9, ὁ, (βρύχω, q. v-), a gnashing of teeth: with 
τῶν ὀδόντων added, a phrase denoting the extreme an- 
guish and utter despair of men consigned to eternal 
condemnation, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 42, 50; xxii. 13; xxiv. 
51; xxv. 30; Lk. xiii. 28. 
tributed to beasts, which gnash the teeth as they attack 
their prey; in Prov. xix. 12 Sept. for 003 snarling, 
growling; in the sense of biting, Nic. th. 716, to be de- 
rived fr. βρύκω to bite; cf. Fritzsche on Sir. as above, 
p. 308.)* 

Beixo: [impf. éBpvxyov]; to grind, gnash, with the 
teeth: ὀδόντας ἐπί twa, Acts vii. 54, (Job xvi. 9; Ps. 
xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16; xxxvi (xxxvii) 12 for p'3U3 PIN 
and Ὁ) pon; intrans. without ὀδόντας. [ Hermipp. ap.] 
Plut. Pericl. 33 fin. ; [Hipp. (see L. and S.)]). Of the 
same origin as βρύκω (cf. δέχω and óéko), to bite, chew ; 


see Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 735; [Ellendt, Lex. | 


Soph. s. v. Bpvxe }.* 

βρύω ; 1. intrans. fo abound, gush forth, teem with 
juices, ([akin to βλύω, φλύω ; see Lob. Techn. p. 22 sq.; 
Curtius p. 531], cf. Germ. Brust, Brühe); often so fr. 
Hom. down (Il. 17, 56 ἔρνος ἄνθεϊ βρύει). 2. more 


rarely trans. to send forth abundantly: absol. to teem, 7 | 


γῆ βρύει, Xen. venat. 5, 12; with an ace. of flowers, 
fruits, Χάριτες pdda βρύουσι, Anacr. 44, 2 (37, 2); to send 
forth water, Jas. iii. 11.* 

βρῶμα, -ros, τό, (βρόω i. q. βιβρώσκω), that which is 
eaten, food; (fr. Thue. and Xen. down): 1 Co. viii. 8, 
13; x. 3; Ro. xiv. 15, 20; plur.: Mt. xiv. 15; Mk. vii. 19; 
Lk. iii. 11; ix. 13; 1 Co. vi. 13; 1 Tim.iv. 3; Heb. xiii. 
9; βρώματα x. πόματα meats and drinks, Heb. ix. 10 (as 
in Plat. legg. 11 p. 932 e. ; 6 p. 782 a.; Critias p. 115 b.; 
in sing. Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,17). of the soul's aliment, i. e. 
either instruction, 1 Co. iii. 2 (as solid food opp. to τὸ 


106 


(In Sir. li. 3 βρυγμός is at- |, 





βωμός 


γάλα), or that which delights and truly satisfies the mind, 
Jn. iv. 84." 

βρώσιμος, -ov, (βρῶσις), eatable : Lk. xxiv. 41. (Lev. 
xix. 23; Ezek. xlvii. 12. Aeschyl. Prom. 479; [Antiatt. 
in Bekker, Anecd. p. 84, 25].) * 

βρῶσις, -ews, 7. (Bpóo, Bigpooko) ; 1. the act of eat- 
ing, (Tertull. esus): βρῶσις x. πόσις, Ro. xiv. 17 (on 
which see βασιλεία, 3); with gen. of the obj. 1 Co. viii. 
4 (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 619 c. παίδων αὐτοῦ); in a wider 
sense, corrosion: Mt, vi. 19 sq. 2. as almost every- 
where in Grk. writ. that which is eaten, food, aliment: 
Heb. xii. 16; εἰς βρῶσιν for food, 2 Co. ix. 10 (Sap. iv. 
5); βρῶσις καὶ [so WH txt. Trmrg.; al. ἢ] πόσις, Col. ii. 
16, (Hom. Od. 1, 191; Plat. legg. 6, 783 c.; Xen. mem. 
1, 3,15; [ef. Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 200 note; per 
contra Mey. or Ellic. on Col. 1. c.]). used of the soul's 
aliment — either that which refreshes it, Jn. iv. 32, or 
nourishes and supports it unto life eternal, Jn. vi. 27, 55.* 

βρώσκω, unused pres. whence pf. βέβρωκα; see βι- 
Bpocko. 

βυθίζω; [pres. pass. βυθίζομαι]; (βυθός, q. v-); to 
plunge into the deep, to sink: ὥστε βυθίζεσθαι αὐτά, of 
ships (as Polyb. 2, 10, 5; 16, 3, 2; [ Aristot., Diod., al.]), 
so that they began to sink, Lk. v. 7; metaph. τινὰ eis dhe 
Opov [A. V. drown], 1 Tim. vi. 9.* 

βυθός, -o), ὁ, the bottom (of a ditch or trench, Xen. oec. 
19, 11) ; the bottom or depth of the sea, often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aeschyl. Prom. 432 down; the sea itself, the deep sea: 
2 Co. xi. 25, as in Ps. evi. (evii.) 24; so Lat. profundum 
in Lucan, Phars. 2, 680 * profundi ora videns." * 

βυρσεύς, -éos, 6, (βύρσα a skin stripped off, a hide), a 
tanner: Acts ix. 43; x. 6, 32. (Artem. oneir. 4, 56.) 
[Cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Tanner.]* 

βύσσινος, -7. -ov, (ἡ βύσσος, q. v.; cf. ἀκάνθινος, apa- 
pávriwos), made of fine linen; neut. βύσσινον sc. ἱμάτιον 
(W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72) ]), (a) ine linen (garment): 
Rev. xviii. 12 (Rec. βύσσου), 16; xix. 8, 14 [WH mrg. 
λευκοβύσσινον (for βύσσινον λευκόν)]. (Gen. xli. 42; 
1 Chr. xv. 27. Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Diod. 1, 85; Plut., 
al.) * 

βύσσος, -ov, ἡ, [ Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.], byssus, a 
species of Egyptian flax (found also in India and Achaia) 
—or linen made from it—very costly, delicate, soft, 
white, and also of a yellow color, (see respecting it 
Pollux, onomast. l. 7 e. 17 § 75): Lk. xvi. 19; Rev. xviii. 
12 Rec. (In Sept. generally for wv’, also ]?3, cf. 1 Chr. 
xv. 27; 2 Chr. v. 12; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Baumwolle; 
[BB.DD. s. vv. Byssus and Linen]. Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 
1 sq.; 3, 7, 2; Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 20 [p. 71 ed. 
Olear.]; on the flax of Achaia growing about Elis, cf. 
IPausan-15,195 2/5 5 15 ΣῈ 

βωμός, -o?, 6, (see Bovvós), an elevated place; very 
freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a raised place on 
which to offer sacrifice, an altar: Acts xvii. 23. (Often 
in Sept. for n3i2.) * 


107 


TaBBaba 


Ταββαθά [-θά WH], 7, indecl, Gabbatha, Chald. 833, 
(Hebr. 33 the back); hence a raised place, an elevation, 
(cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste Tholucks 
u.s.w. p. 102 sq.; Delitzsch in the Zeitschz, f. luth. Theol. 
for 1876, p.605 ; [ Wünsche, Neue Beitrage u.s.w. p. 560]; 
but see the somewhat diff. opinion of Keim, Jesu von 
Nazara, iii. 365): Jn. xix. 13, where is added the 
rather loose interpretation λιθόστρωτον, i. e. a stone pave- 
ment, which some interpreters think was a portable 
pavement, or the square blocks such as the Roman gen- 
erals carried with them, to be laid down not only under 
their seats in general, but also under those they occupied 
in administering justice (cf. Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 and 
Casaubon ad loc.). This opinion is opposed by the cir- 
cumstance that John is not accustomed to add a Greek 
interpretation except to the Hebr. names of fixed Jewish 
localities, cf. v. 2; ix. 7; xix. 17; and that this is so in 
the present case is evident from the fact that he has 
said eis τόπον, i. e. in a definite locality which had that 
name. Besides, it cannot be proved that that custom of 
the military commanders was followed also by the goy- 
ernors of provinces residing in cities. Doubtless the 
Chaldaic name was given to the spot from its shape, 
the Greek name from the nature of its pavement. 
Cf. below under λιθόστρωτον; Win. RWB. s. v. Litho- 
stroton; [BB.DD. s. v. Gabbatha; Tholuck, Beitrüge 
zur Spracherklürung u.s.w. p. 119 sqq. ].* 

Ταβριήλ, 6, (ow 31 fr. 321 strong man, hero, and 5x 
God), indecl., Gabriel, one of the angel-princes or chiefs 
of the angels (Dan. viii. 16; ix. 21): Lk. i. 19, 26; see 
ἀρχάγγελος [and reff. s. v. ἄγγελος, fin.; BB.DD. s. v.].* 

γάγγραινα, -ης, 7, (γράω or ypaivw to gnaw, eat), a gan- 
grene, a disease by which any part of the body suffering 
from inflammation becomes so corrupted that, unless 
a remedy be seasonably applied, the evil continually 
spreads, attacks other parts, and at last eats away the 
bones: 2 Tim. ii. 17 [where cf. Ellic.]. (Medical writ. 
[cf. Wetst. ad 1. c.]; Plut. diser. am. et adulat. c. 36.)* 

Τάδ, ὁ, (11 fortune, cf. Gen. xxx. 11; [xlix. 19; on the 
meaning of the word see B.D. s. v.]), indecl., Gad, the 
seventh son of the patriarch Jacob, by Zilpah, Leah’s 
maid: Rev. vii. 5.* 

T'abapnvós, -7, -óv, (fr. the prop. name Tadapd; cf. the 
adj. ᾿Αβιληνή, Μαγδαληνή), of Gadara, a Gadarene. Gad- 
ara was the capital of Perza (Joseph. b. 1. 4, 7, 3), 
situated opposite the southern extremity of the Lake 
of Gennesaret to the south-east, but at some distance 
from the lake on the banks of the river Hieromax (Plin. 
h. n. 5, 16), 60 stadia from the city Tiberias (Joseph. 
vita 65), inhabited chiefly by Gentiles (Joseph. antt. 17, 


ἢ 





γαζοφυλάκιον 


11, 4); οἵ. Win. RWB.s. v. Gadara; Riietschi in Herzog 
iv. p. 636 sq.; Kneucker in Schenkel ii. 313 sq.; Riehm, 
HWB. p. 454; [BB.DD. s. v.]. χώρα τῶν Γαδαρηνῶν 
the country of the Gadarenes, Gadaris: Mk. v. 1 Rec.; 
Lk. viii. 26 Ree., 37 RG [but here ἡ περίχωρος τῶν Y.], 
and in Mt. viii. 28 T Tr WH ; but the Mss. differ in 
these pass.; see Tepaonvoi and Tepyeonvoi.* 

γάζα, -ns, 7, a Persian word, adopted by the Greeks 
and Latins (Cic. off. 2, 22), the royal treasury, treasure, 
riches, (Curt. 3, 13, 5 pecuniam regiam, quam gazam 
Persae vocant): Acts viii. 27. ([Theophr.], Polyb., 
Diod. 17, 35 and 64; Plut, al Sept. 2 Esdr. v. 17; 
vii. 20.) * 

Tafa, -ης [B. 17 (15)], ἡ, (My i. e. strong, fortified, 
(cf. Valentia) ; the Y being represented by y, cf. 773} 
T'opóppa), formerly a celebrated city of the Philistines, 
situated on a hill near the southern border of the land 
of Israel, between Raphia and Ascalon, twenty stadia 
[‘at the most,’ Arrian.exp. Alex. 2, 26; “seven,” Strabo 
16, 30] from the sea and eleven geographical miles from 
Jerusalem. It was fortified and surrounded by a mas- 
sive wall. Although held by a Persian garrison, Alex- 
ander the Great captured it after a siege of two months, 
but did not destroy it ([Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4]; Diod. 
17,48; Plut. Alex. 25; Curt. 4,6 sq.). Afterwards, in 
the year 5. c. 96, Alexander Jannzus, king of the Jews, 
took it after a year's siege and destroyed it (Joseph. 
antt. 13, 13, 3). Gabinius rebuilt it n. c. 58 (Joseph. 
lc.14,5,3). Finally the emperor Augustus gave it 
[z. c. 30] to Herod the Great (Joseph. 1. c. 15, 7, 3), 
after whose death it was annexed to Syria (Joseph. l. c. 
17,11, 4). Modern Ghuzzeh [or Ghazzeh], an unforti- 
fied town, having an area of two English miles, with 
between fifteen and sixteen thousand inhabitants. Men- 
tioned in the N. T. in Acts viii. 26, where the words 
αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος refer to ἡ ó0ós; Philip is bidden to take 
the way which is ἔρημος, solitary; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W. 
$18,9 N. 3; B. 104 (91)]. A full history of the city 
is given by Stark, Gaza u. d. philistiische Küste. Jena, 
1852; a briefer account by Win. RWB. [see also BB. 
DD.] s. v. Gaza; Arnold in Herzog iv. p. 671 sqq.* 

γαζο-φυλάκιον. -ov, τό. (fr. γάζα. q. v., and φυλακή ; hence 
i. q. θησαυροφυλάκιον, Hesych.), a repository of treasure, 
esp. of publie treasure, a treasury: Esth. iii. 9; 1 Esdr. 
viii. 18, 44; 1 Macc. iii. 28. In Sept. used for naw) 
and 713v} of apartments constructed in the courts of the 
temple, in which not only the sacred offerings and things 
needful for the temple service were kept, but in which 
also the priests, etc., dwelt: Neh. xiii. 7; x. 37 sqq.; of 
the sacred treasury, in which not only treasure but also 


Τάϊος 


the public records (i Mace. xiv. 49; cf. Grimm ad loc.) 
were stored, and the property of widows and orphans was 
peed (2 Mace. iii. 10; cf. Grimm ad loc.) : 1 Macc. 
xiv. 49; 2 Macc. iii. 6, 28, 40; iv. 42; v. 18. Josephus 
speaks of ‘both γαζοφυλάκια (plur.) in the women’s court 
of Herod's temple, b. j. 5, 5, 2; 6, 5, 2; and τὸ γαζοφ.; 
antt. 19, 6,1. Inthe N. T., in Mk. xii. 41, 43; Lk. xxi. 
1; Jn. viii. 20 (ἐν τῷ γαζοφ. at, near, the treasury [yet 
cf. W. § 48, a. 1 e. ]), τὸ yat. seems to be used of that re- 
ceptacle mentioned by the Rabbins to which were fitted 
thirteen chests or boxes, nY»3YU i. e. /rumpets, so called 
from their shape, and into which were put the contribu- 
tions made voluntarily or paid yearly by the Jews for 
the service of the temple and the support of the poor; 
cf. Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. et Talm. p. 536 sq.; Lücke 
[Tholuck, or Godet] on Jn. viii. 20; [B.D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Treasury]. (Strabo 2 p. 319 [i. e. 7, 6, 1].)* 

T'éios [ WH Γαῖος (cf. I, c) ], του, 6, Gaius or Caius; the 
name of a Christian 1. of Derbe: Actsxx.4. 2. of 
Macedonia: Acts xix. 29. 3. of Corinth, Paul's host 
during his [second] sojourn there: Ro. xvi. 23; 1 Co. i. 
14. 4. of an unknown Christian, to whom the third 
Ep. of John was addressed: 3 Jn. vs. 1. [B.D. Am. ed. 
s. v. Gaius; Farrar, Early Days of Christianity, ii. 506.] * 

γάλα, -Aakros [cf. Lat. Jac; Curtius § 123], τό, [from 
Hom. down], milk: 1 Co. ix. 7. Metaph. om the less 
difficult truths of the prd religion, 1 Co. iii. 2; Heb. 
v. 12 sq. (Quintil. 2 5 * doctoribus hoe esse curae 
velim, ut teneras de mentes more nutrieum mollius 
alant et satiari velut quodam jucundioris disciplinae 
lacte. patiantur," [cf. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p. 329, 
cf. p. 261]) ; of the word of God, by which souls newly 
regenerate are healthfully nourished unto growth in the 
Christian life, 1 Pet. ii. 2.* 

Ταλάτης, -ov, 6, « Galatian, (see TaXaría) : Gal. iii. 1. 
(1 Macc. viii. 2; 2 Macc. viii. 20.) * 

Ταλατία, -as, 7, Galatia, Gallogrecia, a region of Asia 
Minor, bounded by Paphlagonia, Pontus, Cappadocia, 
Lycaonia, Phrygia, and Bithynia. It took its name from 
those Gallic tribes that crossed into Asia Minor B. C. 278, 
and after roaming about there for a time at length set- 
tled down permanently in the above-mentioned region, 
and intermarried with the Greeks. From n. c. 189 on, 
though subject to the Romans, they were governed by 
their own chiefs; but n. c. 24 [al. 25] their country was 
formally reduced to a Roman province, (cf. Liv. 37, 8; 
38, 16 and 18; Joseph. antt. 16,6; Strabo 12, 5, 1 p. 567; 
Flor. 2, 11 [i. e. 1, 27]): Gal.i.2; 1 Co. xvi. 1; 2 Tim. 
iv. 10 [Τ᾿ Tr mrg. TaAMav]; 1 Pet.i.1. Cf. Grimm, Ueb. 
d. (keltische) Nationalitit der kleinasiat. Galater, in 
the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 199 sqq. ; replied to by K. 
Wieseler, Die deutsche Nationalitüt d. kleinas. Galater. 
Gütersl. 1877; [but see Hertzberg in the Stud. u. Krit. 
for 1878, pp. 525-541; Bp. Lghtft. in his Com. on Gal., 
Dissertation i. also Intr. § 1].* 

Ταλατικός, -7), -óv, Galatian, belonging to Galatia: Acts 
xvi. 6; xviii. 23.* 

γαλήνη, -ης, 7, (adj. 6, 9, γαληνός calm, cheerful), calm- 


108 














γαμέω 


ness, stillness of the sea, a calm: Mt. viii. 26 ; Mk. iv. 39; 
Lk. viii. 24. (From Hom. down.) * 

Ταλιλαία.-ας, ἡ, Galilee, (fr. Yn, 2 K. xv. 29; ban, 
Josh. xx. 7; xxi. 32; 9 "i yas 1 K. ix. 11, i. e. the circle 
or circuit, by which name even before the exile a cer- 
tain distriet of northern Palestine was designated ; Sept. 
TaXAaía); the name of a region of northern Palestine, 
bounded on the north by Syria, on the west by Sidon, 
Tyre, Ptolemais and their territories and the promontory 
of Carmel, on the south by Samaria and on the east by 
the Jordan. It was divided into Upper Galilee (extend- 
ing from the borders of ‘Tyre and Sidon to the sources of 
the Jordan), and Lower Galilee (which, lower and more 
level, embraced the lands of the tribes of Issachar and 
Zebulun and the part of Naphtali bordering on the Sea of 
Galilee): 7 ἄνω καὶ ἡ κάτω Γαλιλαία (Joseph. b. 1. 3, 3, 1, 
where its boundaries are given). It was a very fertile 
region, populous, having 204 towns and villages (Joseph. 
vit. 45), and inasmuch as it had, esp. in the upper part, 
many Gentiles among its inhabitants (Judg. i. 30-35; 
Strabo 16, 34 p. 760), it was called, Mt. iv. 15, Γαλιλαία 
τῶν ἐθνῶν (Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1)), and, 1 Mace. v. 15, Γαλιλαία 
ἀλλοφύλων. Often mentioned in the Gospels, and three 
times in the Acts, viz. ix. 31; x. 37; xiii. 31. [Cf. Mer- 
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, Boston 1881.] 

Ταλιλαῖος, -aía, -atov, Galilean, a native of Galilee: Mt. 
xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xiii. 1 sq. ; xxii. 09 ; xxiii. 6; 
Jn. iv.45; Actsi. 11; ii. 7; v. 37.* 

Ταλλία, -as, 7, Gallia: 2 Tim. iv. 10 T Tr mrg., by 
which is to be understood Galatia in Asia Minor or TaA- 
Ma ἡ éga, App. b. civ. 2,49. [See esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. 
on Gal. pp. 3, 31 (Am. ed. pp. 11, 37).]* 

Ταλλίων, -evos, 6, Gallio, proconsul of Achaia, elder 
brother of L. Annaeus Seneca the philosopher. His 
original name was Marcus Annaeus Novatus, but after 
his adoption into the family of Junius Gallio the rheto- 
rician, he was called Gallio : Acts xviii. 12, 14, 17. [Cf. 
B.D. Am. ed.; Farrar, St. Paul, i. 566 sq.]* 

Ταμαλιήλ, ó, (2 recompense of God [God the 
avenger, Fürst]; Num. i. 10; ii. 20), indeel., Gamaliel 
(distinguished by the Jews from his grandson of the 
same name by the title 717, the elder), a Pharisee and 
doctor of the law, son of R. Simeon, grandson of Hillel, 
and teacher of the apostle Paul. He is said to have had 
very great influence in the Sanhedrin, and to have died 
eighteen years before the destruction of Jerusalem. A 
man of permanent renown among the Jews: Acts v. 34; 
xxii. 3. Cf. Gritz, Gesch. d. Juden, iii. p. 289 sqq.; 
Schenkel, BL. ii. p. 828 sqq. ; [esp. Alex^s Kitto s. v. 
Gamaliel I. (cf. Farrar, St. Paul, i. 44 and exe. v.) ].* 

γαμέω, -@; impf. ἐγάμουν (Lk. xvii. 27) ; 1 aor. ἔγημα 
(the classic form, [Mt. xxii. 25 L'T Tr WH]; Lk. xiv. 
20; 1 Co. vii. 28* R Οὐ, 28") and ἐγάμησα (the later form, 
Mt. v. 82; [xxii. 25 R G]; Mk. vi. 17; x. 11; 1 Co. vii. 
9, [28° L T Tr WH], 33); pf. yeydugka; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐγαμήθην ; (cf. W. 84 (80) ; B. 55 (48); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. 
ii. 134; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 742; [Veitch s. v.]) ; 1. 
used of the man, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to lead 


γαμίζω 


in marriage, take to wife; a. with the addition οἵ γυναῖκα 
or other acc. : Mt. v. 82 [here WH br. the cl.]; xix. 9; 
Mk. vi. 17; x.11; Lk. xiv. 20; xvi. 18. b. without a 
case, absol. to get married, to marry, [cf. B. 145 (127)]: 
Mt. xix. 10; xxii. 25, 30; xxiv. 38; Mk. xii. 25 ; Lk. xvii. 
27; xx. 34 sq. ; 1 Co. vii. 28, 33; (Ael. v. h. 4, 1; of yeya- 
μηκότες, Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4; opp. to ἄγαμοι, Xen. symp. 
9, 7). Pass. and Mid. γαμέομαί τινι, of women [ Lat. nu- 
bere alicui, cf. B. $ 133, 8], to give one's self in marriage 
[W. § 38, 3]: 1 aor. pass., Mk. x. 12 (where L T Tr WH 
γαμήσῃ ἄλλον for RG γαμηθῇ ἄλλῳ) ; 1 Co. vii. 39. 2. 
contrary to Grk. usage, the Act. yapeivis used of women, 
to give one's self in marriage; and a. with the acc.: 
Mk. x. 12 L T Tr WH (see above); b. absol.: 1 Co. 
vii. 28, 34 (ἡ γαμήσασα, opp. to ἡ ἄγαμος) ; 1 Tim. v. 11, 
14. 3. absol. of both sexes: 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Co. vii. 
9 sq. 36 (γαμείτωσαν, sc. the virgin and he who seeks her 
to wife). In the Ὁ. T. γαμεῖν occurs only in 2 Mace. 
xiv. 25.* 

γαμίζω; [Pass, pres. γαμίζομαι; impf. ἐγαμιζόμην] ; 
(yápos) ; to give a daughter in marriage: 1 Co. vii. 38° 


[L T Tr WH, 38°] GL T Tr WH; Pass.: Mt. xxii. 30 


LTTrWH; [xxiv. 38 TWH]; Mk. xii. 25; Lk. xvii. 
27; xx. 35 [WH mre. yapioxovra]. (The word is men- 
tioned in Apoll. de constr. 3, 31 p. 280, 10 ed. Bekk.) 
[Cour.: ἐκ-γαμίζω. * 

γαμίσκω, i. q. γαμίζω, q. v. [Mt. xxiv. 38 Lchm.]; Pass. 
[pres. γαμίσκομαι] ; Mk. xii. 25 RG; Lk. xx. 34 L T Tr 
WH, [35 WH mrg.; cf. W. 92 (88); and Tdf.’s note 
on Mt. xxii. 30]. (Aristot. pol. 7, 14, 4 ete.) [Cowr.: 
ek-yapiako. ] * 

γάμος, -ov, 6, [ prob. fr. τ. gam to bind, unite; Curtius 
p- 546 sq. ], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; 1. a wed- 
ding or marriage-festival: Jn. ii. 1 sq.; Rev. xix. 7 (un- 
der the figure of a marriage here is represented the inti- 
mate and everlasting union of Christ, at his return from 
heaven, with his church) ; τὸ δεῖπνον τοῦ γάμου, ibid. 9 (a 
symbol of the future blessings of the Messiah’s kingdom) ; 
esp. a wedding-banquet, a marriage-feast: Mt. xxii. 8, 10 
[here T WH Tr mrg. νυμφών], 11, 12; plur. (referring 
apparently to the several acts of feasting), Mt. xxii. 2 
sqq. 9; xxv. 10; Lk. xii. 36; xiv. 8, (cf. W. 8 27, 3; B. 
23 (21)). 2. marriage, matrimony: Heb. xiii. 4.* 

γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, γέ 
and dpa (i. q. ἄρ), is properly a particle of affirma- 
tion and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily 
as the case stands, * the thing is first affirmed by the par- 
ticle γέ, and then is referred to what precedes by the 
force of the particle dpa" (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 
232; ef. Kühner ii. p. 724; [Jelf $ 786; W. 445 (415) 
sq.]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently 
the reason and nature of something previously men- 
tioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use 
of this particle, either the reason and cause of a forego- 
ing statement is added, whence arises the causal or 
argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam, 
enim; Germ. denn) ; or some previous declaration is ex- 
plained, whence yap takes on an ex plicative force: 


109 





yap 


for, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmlich). 
Thus the force of the particle is either conclusive, 
or demonstrative, or explicative and declara- 
tory; cf. Rost in Passow’s Lex. i. p. 535 sqq.; Kühner 
li. pp. 724 sqq. 852 sqq.; [ef. L. and S. s. v.]. The use 
of the particle in the N. T. does not differ from that in 
the classies. 

I. Its primary and original Conclusive force is 
seen in questions (in Grk. writ. also in exclamations) and 
answers expressed with emotion; where, acc. to the con- 
nexion, it may be freely represented by assuredly, verily, 
Jforsooth, why, then, ete. : ἐν yap τούτῳ ete. ye profess not 
to know whence he is; herein then is assuredly a mar- 
vellous thing, why, herein etc. Jn. ix. 30; οὐ yap, ἀλλὰ 
ete. by no means in this state of things, nay verily, but 
ete. Acts xvi. 37; certainly, if that is the case, 1 Co. viii. 
11L T Tr WH. It is joined to interrogative particles 
and pronouns: μὴ yap ete. Jn. vii. 41 (do ye then sup- 
pose that the Christ comes out of Galilee? What, doth 
the Christ, ete.?); μὴ yap... οὐκ, 1 Co. xi. 22 (what! 
since ye are so eager to eat and drink, have ye not, ete.?) ; 
tis yap, τί γάρ: Mt. xxvii. 23 (τί yap κακὸν ἐποίησεν, ye 
demand that he be crucified like a malefactor, Why, what 
evil hath he done?); Mt. ix. 5 (your thoughts are evil; 
which then do ye suppose to be the easier, etc. ?) ; Mt. xvi. 
26; xxiii. 17, 19; Lk. ix. 25; Actsxix. 35; τί γάρ ; for τί 
yap ἐστι, what then ? i.e. what, under these circumstances, 
ought to be the conclusion? Phil. i. 18 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.] ; 
πῶς yap, Acts viii. 31; cf. Klotz l. c. p. 245 sqq.; Kühner 
ii. p. 726; [Jelf ii. p. 608]; W. 447 (416). Here belongs 
also the vexed passage Lk. xviii. 14 ἢ yap ἐκεῖνος (so G T 
Tr mrg., but L WH Tr txt. παρ᾽ ἐκεῖνον) or do ye sup- 
pose then that that man went down approved of God? 
cf. W. 241 (226). 

II. It adduces the Cause or gives the Reason of 
a preceding statement or opinion ; 1. univ.: Mt. 11. 
55 vi. 24; Mk. 1.22; ix. 6; Lk. 15,18; xxi. 4: Jn. i. 
25; Acts ii. 25; Ro.i. 9,11; 1 Co. xi. 5; Heb. ii. 8; 1 Jn. 
ii 19; Rev. i. 3, and very often. In Jn. iv. 44 yap 
assigns the reason why now at length Jesus betook him- 
self into Galilee; for the authority denied to a prophet 
in his own country (Galilee), he had previously to seek 
and obtain among strangers; cf. 45; Meyer [yet see ed. 
6 (Weiss)] ad loc.; Strauss, Leben Jesu, i. 725 ed. 3; 
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 385 sq. ed. 1 [Am. trans. pp. 
100, 168]; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl. Wissensch. x. p. 108 
sqq. 2. Often the sentences are connected in such a 
way that either some particular statement is established 
by a general proposition (‘the particular by the uni- 
versal’), as in Mt. vii. 8; xiii. 12; xxii. 14; Mk. iv. 22, 
25; Jn. iii. 20; 1 Co. xii. 12; Heb. v. 13, ete.; or what 
has been stated generally, is proved to be correctly 
stated by a particular instance (‘the universal by the 
particular’): Mk. vii. 10; Lk. xii. 52, 58; Ro. vii. 2; 1 
Co. i. 26; xii. 8. 3. To sentences in which some- 
thing is commanded or forbidden, ydp annexes the rea- 
son why the thing must either be done or avoided: Mt. 
i 20 sq.; ii. 20; iii. 9; vii. 2; Ro. xiii. 11; Col. iii. 3; 


γάρ 


1 Th. iv. 3; Heb. ii. 2, and very often. In Phil. ii. 13 
γάρ connects the verse with vs. 12 thus: work out your 
salvation with most intense earnestness, for nothing 
short of this accords with God's saving efficiency within 
your souls, to whom you owe both the good desire and 
the power to execute that desire. 4. To questions, 
yap annexes the reason why the question is asked: Mt. 
ii. 2 (we ask this with good reason, for we have seen 
the star which announces his birth); Mt. xxii. 28; Ro. 
xiv. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Gal. i. 10. 5. Frequently the 
statement which contains the cause is interrogative; ris, 
τί γάρ: Lk. xxii. 27; Ro. iv. 3; xi. 34; 1 Co.ii. 16; vii. 
16; Heb.i.5; xii. 7; τί γάρ for ri γάρ ἐστι, Ro. iii. 3 (cf. 
Fritzsche ad loc.; [Ellic. on Phil. i. 18]) ; tva τί γάρ, 1 
Co. x. 29; ποία γάρ, Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. yap]. 
6. Sometimes in answers it is so used to make good the 
substance of a preceding question that it can be ren- 
dered yea, assuredly: 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. ii. 20; cf. 
Kühnerii.p.724. 7. Sometimes it confirms, not a sin- 
gle statement, but the point of an entire discussion: Ro. 
ii. 25 (it is no advantage to a wicked Jew, for etc.). On 
the other hand, it may so confirm but a single thought 
as to involve the force of asseveration and be rendered 
assuredly, yea: Ro. xv. 27 (εὐδόκησαν yap); so also καὶ 
yap, Phil. ii. 27. 8. It is often said that the sentence 
of which ydp introduces the cause, or renders the reason, 
is not expressed, but must be gathered from the con- 
text and supplied in thought. But that this ellipsis 
is wholly imaginary is clearly shown by Klotz ad Devar. 
ii. 1 p. 236 sq., cf. W. 446 (415) sq. The particle is 
everywhere used in reference to something expressly 
stated. Suflice it to append a very few examples; the 
true nature of many others is shown under the remain- 
ing heads of this article: In Mt. v. 12 before yap some 
supply ‘nor does this happen to you alone’; but the rea- 
son is added why a great reward in heaven is reserved 
for those who suffer persecution, which reason consists 
in this, that the prophets also suffered persecution, and 
that their reward is great no one can doubt. In Ro.viii. 
18 some have supplied *do not shrink from this suffer- 
ing with Christ’; but on the use of yap here, see III. a. 
below. On Mk. vii. 28 [T Tr WH om. L br. yap], 
where before xai yap some supply ‘but help me,’ or * yet 
we do not suffer even the dogs to perish with hunger, 
see 10 b. below. In Acts ix. 11 before yap many supply 
‘he will listen to thee’; but it introduces the reason for 
the preceding command. 9. When in successive state- 
ments ydp is repeated twice or thrice, or even four or five 
times, either a. one and the same thought is confirmed 
by as many arguments, each having its own force, as there 
are repetitions of the particle [Mey. denies the codrdi- 
nate use of yap in the N. T., asserting that the first is 
argumentative, the second ex plieative, see his Comm. 
on the pass. to follow, also on Ro. viii. 6]: Mt. vi. 32; Ro. 
xvi. 18 sq.; or b. every succeeding statement contains 
the reason for its immediate predecessor, so that the state- 
ments are subordinate one to another: Mk. vi. 52; Mt. 
xvi. 25-27; Jn. iii. 19 sq.; v.21sq.; Acts ii. 15; Ro. iv. 





110 γέ 


13-15 ; viii. 2 sq. 5 sq. ; 1 Co. iii. 3 sq.; ix. 15-17 (where 
five times in GL T Tr WH); 1 Co. xvi. 7; Jas. ii. 10, 
ete.; or c. it is repeated in a different sense: Mk. ix. 
39-41; Ro. v. 6 sq. (where cf. W. 453 (422)); x. 2-5 
(four times) ; Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. the first yap, 
LWH mrg.om.thesecond]. 10. καὶ γάρ (on which ef. 
Kiihner ii. p. 854 sq.; W.448 (417); [Ellic. on 2 Thess. 
iii. 10]) is a. for, and truly, (etenim, namque, [the sim- 
ple rendering for is regarded as inexact by many; cf. 
Mey. on 2 Co. xiii. 4 and see Hartung, Partikeln, i.137 sq.; 
Krüger $69, 32, 217): Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xxii. 37 [L Tr 
br. yap]; 1 Co. v. 7; xi. 9; xii. 13. b. for also, for even, 
(nam etiam): Mt. viii. 9; Mk. x. 45; Lk. vi. 32; Jn. iv. 
45; 1 Co. xii. 14, ete. In Mk. vii. 28 xai yap [RG L br.] 
τὰ κυνάρια etc. the woman, by adducing an example, con- 
firms what Christ had said, but the example is of such a 
sort as also to prove that her request ought to be granted. 
τὲ yap for indeed (Germ. denn ja): Ro. vii. 7; cf. Fritz- 
sche ad loc.; W. 448 (417). ἰδοὺ yap, see under ἰδού. 

III It serves to explain, make clear, illus- 
trate, a preceding thought or word: for i. 4. that is, 
namely ; a. so that it begins an exposition of the 
thing just announced [cf. W. 454 (423) sq.]: Mt. i. 18 
[RG]; xix.12; Lk. xi. 30; xviii. 32. In Ro. viii. 18 yap 
introduces a statement setting forth the nature of the 
συνδοξασθῆναι just mentioned. ^ b. so that the explana- 
tion is intercalated into the discourse, or even added by 
way of appendix: Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16; ii. 15; v. 42; 
Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. xvi. 5. In Mk. xvi. 4 the information 
jv yap μέγας σφόδρα is added to throw light on all that 
has been previously said (in vs. 3 sq.) about the stone. 

IV. As respects Position: ydp never occupies the 
first place in a sentence, but the second, or third, or even 
the fourth (ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ yap vids, 2 Co. i. 19 — acc. to true 
text). Moreover, *not the number but the nature 
of the word after which it stands is the point to be no- 
ticed," Hermann on Soph. Phil. 1437. 

γαστήρ, -pós (poet. -épos), 7, in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. 
down; in Sept. for 103; 1. the belly; by meton. of 
the whole for a part, ^. 2. Lat. uterus, the womb: ἐν ya- 
api ἔχειν to be with child [see ἔχω, I. 1 b.]: Mt. i. 18, 23; 
xxiv. 19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Th. v. 3; Rev. xii. 
2; (in Sept. for 7779, Gen. xvi. 4 sq.; xxxviii. 25; Is. 
vii. 14, etc. ; Hdt. 3, 32 and vit. Hom. 2; Artem. oneir. 
2, 18 p. 105; 3, 32 p. 177; Pausan., Hdian., al.) ; συλ- 
λαμβάνεσθαι ἐν γαστρί to conceive, become pregnant, Lk. 
i. 31. 3. the stomach; by synecdoche a glutton, gor- 
mandizer, aman who is as it were all stomach, Hes. theog. 
26 (so also ydorpis, Arstph. av. 1604; Ael. v. h. 1, 28; and 
Lat. venter in Lucil. sat. 2, 24 ed. Gerl. ‘ vivite ventres") : 
γαστέρες apyat, Tit. i. 12; see ἀργός, be 

yé, an enclitic particle, answering exactly to no one 
word in Lat. or Eng.; used by the bibl. writ. much more 
rarely than by Grk. writ. How the Greeks use it, is 
shown by (among others) Hermann ad Vig. p. 822 sqq. ; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 272 sqq.; Rost in Passow's Lex. 
i.p. 538 sqq.; [L. and S. s. v. ; 7. S. Evans in Journ. 
of class. and sacr, Philol. for 1857, p. 187 sqq.]. It indi- 


γέ 111 


cates that the meaning of the word to which it belongs 
has especial prominence, and therefore that that word 
is to be distinguished from the rest of the sentence and 
uttered with greater emphasis. This distinction “can 
be made in two ways, by mentioning either the least 
important or the most; thus it happens that yé seems 
to have contrary significations: at least and even" (Her- 
mann l. c. p. 822). 1. where what is least is indi- 
cated ; indeed, truly, at least: διά ye τὴν ἀναίδειαν, Lk. xi. 
8 (where, since the force of the statement lies in the 
substantive not in the preposition, the Greek should have 
read διὰ τήν ye dvaià., cf. Klotz l.c. p. 327; Rost l. c. p. 
542; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]); διά ye τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον, at 
least for this reason, that she troubleth me [ A. V. yet 
because ete.], Lk. xviii. 5 (better Greek διὰ τό ye etc.). 
2. where whatismost or greatest is indicated ; even : 
ὅς ye the very one who ete., precisely he who ete. (Germ. 
der es ja ist, welcher etc.), Ro. viii. 32; cf. Klotz l. c. p. 
305; Matthiae, Lex. Euripid. i. p. 613 sq. 3. joined 
to other particles it strengthens their force; a. ἀλλά ye 
[so most edd.] or ἀλλάγε [Grsb.] (cf. W. § 5, 2): Lk. 
xxiv. 21; 1 Co. ix. 2; see ἀλλά, 1.10. b. dpa ye or dpaye, 
see ἄρα, 4. ἄρά ye, see dpa, 1. c. etye[so G T, but L Tr 
WH εἴ ye; cf. W.u.s.; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 123], 
foll. by the indic. if indeed, seeing that, “of a thing be- 
lieved to be correctly assumed” (Herm. ad Vig. p. 831; 
ef. Fritzsche, Praeliminarien u.s.w. p. 67 sqq.; Anger, 
Laodicenerbrief, p. 46; [W.448 (417 sq.). Others hold 
that Hermann’s statement does not apply to the N. T. 
instances. Acc. to Meyer (see notes on 2 Co. v. 3; Eph. 
iii. 2; Gal. iii. 4) the certainty of the assumption resides 
not in the particle but in the context; so Ellicott (on Gal. 
I. c., Eph. l.e.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.1.c.; Col.i.23. Her- 
mann's canon, though assented to by Bornemann (Cyrop. 
2, 2, 3 p. 132), Stallbaum (Meno p. 36), al., is qualified 
by Büumlein (Partikeln, p. 64 sq.), who holds that γέ 
often has no other effect than to emphasize the condition 
expressed by ei; cf. also Winer ed. Moulton p. 5017), if, 
that is to say; on the assumption that, (see εἴπερ s. v. ei, ITI. 


13): Eph. iii. 2; iv. 21; Col. i. 23; with καί added, if 


that also, if it be indeed, (Germ. wenn denn auch): etye 
[L Tr WH mre. εἴ περ] kai ἐνδυσάμενοι, ov γυμνοὶ eópe. 
if indeed we shall be found actually clothed (with a new 
body), not naked, 2 Co. v. 3 (cf. Meyer ad loe.) ; εἴγε καὶ 
εἰκῆ SC. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε, if indeed, as I believe, ye have 
experienced such benefits in vain, and have not already 
received harm from your inclination to Judaism, Gal. iii. 
4 [yet cf. Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft., al. adloc.]. d. εἰ δὲ 
phye Lor εἰ δὲ μή ye Lehm. Treg.] (also in Plat., Arstph., 
Plut., al. ; ef. Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc. p. 95 ; Klotz ad 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 527), stronger than ei δὲ μή [B. 393 (336 
sq.) ; cf. W. 583 (543); 605 (563) ; Mey. on 2 Cor. xi. 16], 
a. after affirmative sentences, but unless perchance, but 
if not: Mt. vi. 1; Lk. x. 6; xiii. 9. 8. after negative sen- 
tences, otherwise, else, in the contrary event: Mt. ix. 17; 
Lk. v. 36 sq.; xiv. 32; 2 Co.xi.16. e. καίγε [so GT, 
but L Tr WH xaí ye; cf. reff. under etye above], (ef. 
Klotz ad Devar.ii.1p.319; [W.438 (408)]), a. and at 








Γεθσημανῆ 


least: Lk. xix. 42 [Tr txt. WH om. 1, Trmrg.br.]. f. 
and truly, yea indeed, yea and: Acts ii. 18; xvii. 27 LT 
Tr WH. f. καίτοιγε [so GT WH, but L καίτοι ye, Tr 
καί τοι ye; cf. reff. under c. above. Cf. Klotz ad Devar. 
li. 2 p. 654; W. 444 (413)], although indeed, and yet 
indeed: Jn. iv. 2; also in Acts xiv. 17 [RG]; xvii. 27 
Rec. 6. μενοῦνγε see in its place. 
[and in its place].* 

Γεδεών, ὁ, indecl. [in the Bible (cf. B. p. 15 (14)), and 
in Suidas (e. g. 1737 a.) ; but] in Joseph. antt. 5, 6, [3 and] 
4 Τεδεών, -àvos, (11}} cutting off, [al. tree-feller i. e. 
mighty warrior], fr. 32), Gideon, a leader of the Israel- 
ites, who delivered them from the power of the Midianites 
(Judg. vi—viii.) : Heb. xi. 32 [where A. V. unfortunately 
follows the Grk. spelling G e deon].* 

γέεννα [al. would accent yeévva, deriving it through the 
Chaldee. In Mk. ix. 45 Rec.* yéeva], -ns [B. 17 (15)], 
ἡ, (fr. DI ^3, Neh. xi. 30; more fully D3113 Nà, Josh. 
xv. 8; xviii. 16; 2 Chr. xxviii. 3; Jer. vii.32; 0371723 "2, 
2 K. xxiii. 10 K'thibh; Chald. Ὁ) 112, the valley of the 
son of lamentation, or of the sons of lamentation, the 
valley of lamentation, 037 being used for 073 lamenta- 
tion; see Hiller, Onomasticum; cf. Hitzig [and Graf] on 
Jer. vii. 31; [Béttcher, De Inferis, i. p. 82 sqq.]; acc. to 
the com. opinion 037} is the name of a man), Gehenna, 
the name of a valley on the S. and E. of Jerusalem [yet 
apparently beginning on the W., cf. Josh. xv. 8; Pressel 
in Herzog s. v.], which was so called from the cries of 
the little children who were thrown into the fiery arms 
of Moloch [q.v.]i. e. of an idol having the form of a 
bull. 'The Jews so abhorred the place after these horri- 
ble sacrifices had been abolished by king Josiah (2 K. 
xxiii. 10), that they cast into it not only all manner of 
refuse, but even the dead bodies of animals and of un- 
buried criminals who had been executed. And since 
fires were always needed to consume the dead bodies, 
that the air might not become tainted by their putrefac- 
tion, it came to pass that the place was called yéevva τοῦ 
πυρός [this common explanation of the descriptive gen. 
τοῦ πυρός is found in Rabbi David Kimchi (fl. c. A. p. 
1200) on Ps. xxvii. 13. Some suppose the gen. to refer 
not to purifying fires but to the fires of Molech; others 
regard it as the natural symbol of penalty (cf. Lev. x. 2; 
Num. xvi. 35; 2 K. i.; Ps. xi. 6; also Mt. iii. 11; xiii.42; 
2 ΤῊ. i. 8, etc.). See Dóttcher, u.s. p. 84; Mey., (Thol.,) 
Wetst. on Mt. v. 22]; and then this name was transferred 
to that place in Hades where the wicked after death will 
suffer punishment: Mt. v. 22, 29 sq.; x. 28; Lk. xii. 5; 
Mk. ix. 43, 45; Jas. iii. 6; γέεννα τοῦ πυρός, Mt. v. 22; 
xviii. 9; Mk. ix. 47 [ἢ G Tr mrg. br.]; κρίσις τῆς γεέννης, 
Mt. xxiii. 33; υἱὸς τῆς γεέννης, worthy of punishment in 
Gehenna, Mt. xxiii. 15. Further, cf. Dillmann, Buch 
Henoch, 27, 1 sq. p. 131 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed.; Büttcher, 
u. s. p. 80 sqq.; Hamburger, Real-Encycl., Abth. r. s. v. 
Holle; Bartlett, Life and Death eternal, App. H.].* 

Τεθσημανῆ, or Τεθσημανεί (T WH), or Γεθσημανεῖ (L 
Tr); [on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103 ; W. 
$6,1 m.; indecl. B. 15 (14)], (fr. nà press, and w3pU oil), 


h. μήτιγε, see μήτι, 


γείτων 


Gethsemane, the name of a ‘ place’ (χωρίον [an enclosure 
or landed property ]) at the foot of the Mount of Olives, 
beyond the torrent Kidron: Mt. xxvi. 36; Mk. xiv. 32. 
[B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* 

γείτων, -ovos, 6, 7), [fr. γῆ, hence originally ‘of the same 
land,’ cf. Curtius $ 132], fr. Hom. down, a neighbor: Lk. 
xiv. 125 xy. 6, 9; Jn. ix. 8.* 

γελάω, -à ; fut. γελάσω (in Grk. writ. more com. γελάσο- 
pac[ B. 53,(46) ; W.84 (80)]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to laugh: 
Lk. vi. 21 (opp. to κλαίω), 25. [Cowr.: kara-yeAáo. ] * 

γέλως, -wros, ὁ, laughter: Jas. iv. 9. [From Hom. down.]* 

veto : 1 aor. ἐγέμισα ; Pass., [ pres. yeut£ogat]; 1 aor. 
ἐγεμίσθην; (γέμω. q. v.) ; to fill, fill full; a. absol. in 
pass.: Mk. iv. 37; Lk.xiv.23. b. τί τινος, to fill a thing 
full of something: Mk. xv. 36; Jn. ii. 7; vi. 13; Rev. xv. 
8, (Aeschyl. Ag. 443; al.); τὶ ἀπό τινος, of that which 
is used for filling, Lk. xv. 16 [not WH Tr mrg.]; also in 
the same sense τὶ ἔκ τινος, Rev. viii. 5; [ef. Lk. xv. 16 in 
WH mrg.], (15 non, Ex. xvi. 32; Jer. li. 34, ete. [cf. 
W. $30, 8b.; B. 163 (143)]).* 

γέμω, defect. verb, used only in pres. and impf., [in 
N. T. only in pres. indic. and ptep.]; to be full, filled full; 
a. rwós (as generally in Grk. writ.) : Mt. xxiii. 25 Lehm., 
27; Lk.xi.39; Ro.iii.14 (fr. Ps. ix. 28 (x.7)) ; Rev. iv. 
6,8; v.8; xv. 7; xvii. 3 R G (see below), 4; xxi. 9. b. 
ἔκ τινος : Mt. xxiii. 25 (γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς [ L om. Tr br. 
ἐξ] their contents are derived from plunder; see γεμέζω, 
b. [and reff. there]). c. Hebraistically (see πληρόω, 1 
Tef. B. 164 (143) ; W. $ 30, 8 b.]), with aec. of the mate- 
rial, γέμοντα [ Treg. γέμον τὰ] ὀνόματα βλασφημίας, Rev. 
xvii. 3 [L T Tr WH (see above and cf. Β. 80 (70))].* 

γενεά, -Gs, ἡ, (TENQ, γίνομαι [cf. Curtius p. 610]) ; Sept. 
often for ^37; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. abe- 
getting, birth, nativity: Hdt. 3, 33 ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 8, ete. ; 
{others make the collective sense the primary signif., 
see Curtius u. s.]. 2. passively, that which has been 
begotten, men of the same stock, a family; a. prop. as 
early as Hom.; equiv. to 71252, Gen. xxxi. 3, etc.; 
σώζειν Ῥαχάβην k. τὴν γενεὰν αὐτῆς, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 5. 
the several ranks in a natural descent, the successive mem- 
bers of a genealogy: Mt. i. 17, (ἑβδόμη γενεὰ οὗτός ἐστιν 
ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου, Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 2). b. metaph. a 
race of men very like each other in endowments, pursuits, 
character ; and esp. in a bad sense a perverse race: Mt. 
xvii 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; xvi. 8; [Acts ii. 40]. 
3. the whole multitude of men living at the same time: Mt. 
xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30; Lk. i. 48 (πᾶσαι αἱ yeveat) ; xxi. 
32; Phil. ii. 15; used esp. of the Jewish race living at 
one and the same period: Mt. xi. 16; xii. 39, 41 sq. 45: 
xvi. 4; xxiii. 36; Mk. viii. 12, 38; Lk. xi. 29 sq. 32, 50 
Sq-; xvii. 25; Acts xiii. 36; Heb. iii. 10; ἄνθρωποι τῆς 
γενεᾶς ταύτης, Lk. vii. 31; ἄνδρες τῆς γεν. ταύ. Lk. xi. 31; 
τὴν δὲ γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται, who can describe the 
wickedness of the present generation, Acts viii. 33 (fr. 
Is. liii. 8 Sept.) [but cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 4. an age (i. e. 
the time ordinarily occupied by each successive genera- 
tion), the space of from 30 to 33 years (Hdt. 2, 142 et al. ; 
Heraclit. in Plut. def. orac. c. 11), or ὁ χρόνος, ἐν à yer- 


112 


γενετή 


νῶντα παρέχει τὸν ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγεννημένον 6 γεννήσας (Plut. 
l.c.); in the N. T. com. in plur.: Eph. iii. 5 [W. § 31, 
9 a.; B. 186 (161)]; παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς in ages gone 
by, Acts xiv. 16; ἀπὸ τῶν γενεῶν for ages, since the gener- 
ations began, Col. i. 26; ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων from the gen- 
erations of old, from ancient times down, Acts xv. 21; eis 
γενεὰς γενεῶν unto generations of generations, through 
all ages, for ever, (a phrase which assumes that the longer 
ages are made up of shorter; see αἰών, 1 a.) : Lk. i. 50 
R L (o3 75, Is. li. 8) ; εἰς γενεὰς x. γενεάς unto genera- 
tions and generations, ibid. ' Tr WH equiv. to jn 3, 
Ps. Ixxxix. 2 sq.; Is. xxxiv. 17; very often in Sept.; [add, 
els πάσας τὰς γενεὰς TOU αἰῶνος τῶν αἰώνων, Eph. iii. 21, cf. 
Ellic. ad loc.] (γενεά is used of a century in Gen. xv. 16, 
cf. Knobel ad loc., and on the senses of the word see the 
full remarks of Keim iii. 206 [v. 245 Eng. trans.]).* 

yeveaXoyéo, -@: [pres. pass. »yeveaAoyoüpat]; to act the 
genealogist (γενεά and λέγω), to recount a family's origin 
and lineage, trace ancestry, (often in Hdt.; Xen., Plat., 
Theophr., Leian., Ael., al.; [Sept. 1 Chr. v. 2]); pass. to 
draw one’s origin, derive one's pedigree: ἔκ twos, Heb. 
vii. 6.* 

γενεαλογία, -as, 7, a genealogy, a record of descent or 
lineage, (Plat. Crat. p. 396 c.; Polyb. 9, 2, 1; Dion. Hal. 
antt. 1, 11; [al.]. Sept. [edd. Ald., Compl.] 1 Chr. vii. 
5, 7; ix. 22; [iv. 33 Compl. ; Ezra viii. 1 ib.]) ; in plur. 
of the orders of «ons, according to the doctrine of the 
Gnosties: 1 Tim.i.4; Tit.iii.9; cf. De Wette on Tit. i. 
14 [substantially reproduced by Alf. on 1 Tim.1.¢.; see 
also Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, pp. 126 sq. 134 sq. 143 ].* 

γενέσια, -ων, ra [cf. W. 176 (166)], (fr. the adj. yevé- 
ovos fr. γένεσις), a birth-day celebration, a birth-day feast: 
Mk. vi. 21; Mt. xiv. 6; (Alciphr. epp. 3, 18 and 55; Dio 
Cass. 47, 18, etc. ; 7) yevéatos ἡμέρα, Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7). 
The earlier Greeks used γενέσια of funeral commemora- 
tions, a festival commemorative of a deceased friend 
(Lat. feriae denicales), see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 103 sq.; 
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 184; W. 24 (23)]. Cf. 
Keim ii. p. 516 [iv. 223 Eng. trans. ].* 

γένεσις, -eos, 7, (TEN@ [Curtius $ 128]), in Grk. writ. 
for the first time in Hom. Il. 14, 201 [cf. 246]; ^ 1. 
source, origin: βίβλος γενέσεώς τινος a book of one's lin- 
eage, i. e. in which his ancestry or his progeny are enu- 
merated (i.q. niwoin ^30, Gen. v. 1, etc.), [Mt. i. 1]. 
2. used of birth, nativity, in Mt. i. 18 and Lk. i. 14, for 
Ree. γέννησις (ἡμέραι τῆς γενέσεώς μου equiv. to ἀφ᾽ οὗ 
ἐγεννήθην, Judith xii. 18 cf. 20); πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως 
his native (natural) face, Jas. i. 23. 3. of that which 
follows origin, viz. existence, life: 6 τροχὸς τῆς γενέσεως 
the wheel [cf. Eng. “ machinery "'] of life, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. 
Grimm on Sap. vii. 5); but others explain it the wheel 
of human origin which as soon as men are born begins 
to run, i. e. the course [cf. Eng. * round "'] of life.* 

ever, -ῆς, 7, (TENQ, γίνομαι), (cf. Germ. die Geworden- 
heit), birth; hence very often ἐκ γενετῆς from birth on 
(Hom. Il. 24, 535; Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 13, 1 p. 1144*, 6 
etc.; Polyb. 3, 20, 4; Diod. 5, 32, al.; Sept. Lev. xxv. 47) : 
Jn. ix. 1.* 


γένημα 


γένημα, -ατος, τό, (fr. γίνομαι), a form supported by the 
best Mss. in Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xii. 18; xxii. 
18; 2 Co. ix. 10, and therefore adopted by T [see his 
Proleg. p. 79] Tr [L WH (see WH. App. p. 148 and be- 
low) ], printed by Grsb. only in Lk. xii. 18; 2 Co. ix. 10, 
but given by no grammarian, and therefore attributed by 
Fritzsche (on Mk. p. 619 sq.) to the carelessness of tran- 
scribers, — for Rec. [but in Lk. 1. c. R*' reads γενημ-.] yév- 
νημα, 4- v. In Mk. xiv. 25 Lehm. has retained the com- 
mon reading; [and in Lk. xii. 18 Trtxt. WH have 
σῖτον. In Ezek. xxxvi. 30 codd. A B read γενήματα]. ἢ 

γεννάω, -à ; fut. yerrnow; 1 aor. ἐγέννησα: pf. yeyévvnka ; 
[Pass, pres. γεννάομαι, -àpat]; pf. γεγέννημαι ; 1 aor. 
ἐγεννήθην; (fr. γέννα, poetic for γένος) ; in Grk. writ. fr. 
Pind. down; in Sept. for 3955 to beget ; 1. properly : 
of men begetting children, Mt. i. 1-16; Acts vii. 8, 29; 
foll. by ἐκ with gen. of the mother, Mt. i. 3, 5, 6; more 
rarely of women giving birth to children, Lk. i. 13, 57; 
xxiii. 29; Jn. xvi. 21; eis δουλείαν to bear a child unto 
bondage, that will be a slave, Gal. iv. 24, ([ Xen. de rep. 
Lac. 1, 3]; Leian. de sacrif. 6; Plut. de liber. educ. 5; 
al; Sept. Is. Ixvi. 9; 4 Mace. x. 2, etc.). Pass. to be 
begotten: τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ γεννηθέν that which is begotten in 
her womb, Mt. i. 20; to be born: Mt. ii. 1, 4 [W. 266 
(250) ; B. 203 (176) ]; xix. 12; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Lk. 
i. 35; Jn. iii. 4; [Acts vii. 20]; Ro. ix. 11; Heb. xi. 23; 
with the addition εἰς τὸν κόσμον, Jn. xvi. 21; foll. by ἐν 
with dat. of place, Acts xxii. 3; ἀπό τινος, to spring from 
one as father, Heb. xi. 12 [L WH mrg. ἐγενήθ. see Tdt. 
ad loc.]; ἔκ twos to be born of a mother, Mt. i. 16; ἐκ 
πορνείας, Jn. viii. 41; ἐξ αἱμάτων, ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρός, Jn. 
i. 13; ἐκ τῆς σαρκός, Jn. iii. 6 [ Rec.** γεγενημ.} : ἐν ápap- 
τίαις ὅλος, Jn. ix. 34 (see ἁμαρτία, 2 a.) ; εἴς τι, to. be born 
for something, Jn. xviii. 37; 2 Pet. ii. 12 [Tdf. γεγενημ. 
so Rec.t**]; with an adj.: τυφλὸς γεγέννημαι, Jn. ix. 2, 
19 sq. 32; Ῥωμαῖος to be supplied, Acts xxii. 28; τῇ 
διαλέκτῳ, ἐν ἡ ἐγεννήθημεν, Acts ii. 8 ; γεννηθεὶς κατὰ σάρκα 
begotten or born according to (by) the working of nat- 
ural passion; κατὰ πνεῦμα according to (by) the working 
of the divine promise, Gal. iv. 29, cf. 23. 2. metaph. 
a. univ. /o engender, cause to arise, excite: μάχας, 2 Tim. 
ii. 23 (βλάβην, λύπην, ete. in Grk. writ.). b. in a Jew- 
ish sense, of one who brings others over to his way of 
life : ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα I am the author of your Christian 
life, 1 Co. iv. 15; Philem. 10, (Sanhedr. fol. 19, 2 “If 
one teaches the son of his neighbor the law, the Scrip- 
ture reckons this the same as though he had begotten 
him”; [cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium $ 87). c. after Ps. ii. 7, 
it is used of God making Christ his son; a. formally to 
show him to be the Messiah (υἱὸν rod θεοῦ), viz. by the 
resurrection: Acts xiii. 33. β. to be the author of the 
divine nature which he possesses [but cf. the Comm. on 
the pass. that follow]: Heb.i.5; v.5. d. peculiarly, in 
the Gospel and 1 Ep. of John, of God conferring upon 
men the nature and disposition of his sons, imparting to 
them spiritual life, i.e. by his own holy power prompting 
and persuading souls to put faith in Christ and live a 
new life consecrated to himself; absol: 1 Jn. v. 1; 

8 


118 


γένος 


mostly in pass., ἐκ θεοῦ or ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐγεννήθησαν, γεγέν- 
νηται, γεγεννημένος, etc. : Jn. i. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 29 [Rec.* ye- 
γένηται]: iii. 9; iv. 7; v. 1, 4, 18; also ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος 
γεννᾶσθαι, Jn. iii. 6 [ Rec.** yeyevgu.], 8; ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ 
πνεύματος (because that moral generation is effected in 
receiving baptism [(?) ef. Schaff's Lange, Godet, West- 
cott, on the words, and reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]), Jn. iii. 5; 
ἄνωθεν γεννᾶσθαι, Jn. iii. 3, 7 (see ἄνωθεν. c.) equiv. to 
τέκνον θεοῦ γίνεσθαι, i. 12. [Cowr.: áva-yevváo. | * 

γέννημα, -ros, τό, (fr. yevváo), that which has been be- 
gotten or born; a. as in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Soph. 
down, the offspring, progeny, of mensor of animals: éyr- 
δνῶν, Mt.iii.7; xii.34; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; (γυναικῶν, 
Sir. x. 18). b. fr. Polyb. [1, 71, 1 ete.] on [cf. W. 23]; 
the fruits of the earth, products of agriculture, (in Sept. 
often γεννήματα τῆς γῆς): Lk. xii. 18 (where Tr [txt. 
WH] τὸν airov) ; τῆς ἀμπέλου, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; 
Lk. xxii. 18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 286. Metaph. fruit, 
reward, profit : τῆς δικαιοσύνης. 2 Co. ix. 10, (Hos. x. 12; 
τῆς σοφίας, Sir. i. 17; vi. 19). Further, see γένημα." 

Τεννησαρέτ [so G T Tr WH], -ρέθ [ Lchm. in Mt. xiv. 
34], [Γενησαρέτ Rec. in Mk. vi. 53; cf. Tdf. ed. 2 Proleg. 
p- xxxv., ed. 7 Proleg. p. liv. note?], (Targums 32731 or 
303i [aec. to Delitzsch. (Romerbr. in d. Hebr. übers. p- 
27) 10°33, 7031]; Γεννησάρ, 1 Macc. xi. 67; Joseph. b. j. 
2, 20, 6 ete.; Genesara, Plin. 5, 15), Gennesaret, a very 
lovely and fertile region on the Sea of Galilee (Joseph. 
b. 7. 3, 10, 7) : ἡ γῆ Γεννησ. Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; ἡ 
λίμνη ΤῪέννησ. Lk. v. 1, anciently 332 Ὁ", Num. xxxiv. 
ll,ornj333 D", Josh. xii. 3, fr. the city 322, Deut. iii. 17, 
which was near by; called in the Gospels ἡ θάλασσα τῆς 
Ταλιλαίας, Mk. i. 16; Mt. iv. 18; ἡ θάλασσα τῆς Τιβερι- 
δος, Jn. vi. 1; xxi. l. The lake, acc. to Joseph. b. j. 3, 
10, 7, is 140 stadia long and 40 wide; [its extreme di- 
mensions now are said to average 123m. by 62 m., and 
its level to be nearly 700 ft. below that of the Mediter- 
ranean]. Cf. Riietschi in Herzog v. p. 6 sq. ; Furrer in 
Schenkel ii. p. 322 sqq.; [Wilson in *'The Recovery of 
Jerusalem," Pt. ii.; Robinson, Phys. Geog. of the Holy 
Land, p. 199 sqq.; BB.DD. For conjectures respecting 
the derivation of the word cf. Alex.’s Kitto sub fin. ; Mer- 
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, § vii. ].* 

γέννησις, -ews, 7, (yevváo), a begetting, engendering, 
(often so in Plat.); nativity, birth: Rec. in Mt.i. 18 and 
Lk. i. 14; see γένεσις, 2.* 

γεννητός, -7), -όν, (γεννάω). begotten, born, (often in Plat. ; 
Diod. 1, 6 sqq.); after the Hebr. (AWS m», Job xiv. 1, 
ete.). γεννητοὶ γυναικῶν [B. 169 (147), born of women] 
is a periphrasis for men, with the implied idea of weak- 
ness and frailty: Mt. xi. 11; Lk. vii. 28.* 

γένος. -ovs, τό, (TENQ, γίνομαι). race; a. offspring: 
τινός, Acts xvii. 28 sq. (fr. the poet Aratus) ; Rev. xxii. 
16. b. family: Acts [iv. 6, see ἀρχιερεύς, 2 fin.]; vii. 13 
[al. refer this to c.]; xiii. 26. c. stock, race: Acts vii, 
19; 2 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 5; Gal. i. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 9; (Gen. 
xi. 6; xvii. 14, ete. for Dj) ; nation (i. e. nationality or 


‘descent from a particular people): Mk. vii. 26; Acts iv. 


36; xviii. 2, 24. d. coner. the aggregate of many indi- 


Tepacnvos 


viduals of the same nature, kind, sort, species : Mt. xiii. 47 ; 
xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29; 1 Co. 
xii. 10, 28; xiv. 10. (With the same significations in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

Τερασηνός, -ov, 6, Gerasene, i.e. belonging to the city 
Gerasa (rà Γέρασα, Joseph. b. 1. 3, 3, 3): Mt. viii. 28 
[Lcehm.]; Mk. v. 1 [LT WH Tr txt.]; Lk. viii. 26 and 37 
LL Tr WH] ace. to very many codd. seen by Origen. But 
since Gerasa was a city situated in the southern part of 
Ferma (Joseph. l. ¢., cf. 4, 9, 1), or in Arabia (Orig. 
opp. iv. 140 ed. De la Rue), that cannot be referred to 
here; see Ταδαρηνός, and the next word.* 

Τεργεσηνός, -7, -óv, Gergesene, belonging to the city 
Gergesa, which is assumed to have been situated on the 
eastern shore of Lake Gennesaret: Mt. viii. 28 Ree. But 
this reading depends on the authority and opinion of 
Origen, who thought the variants found in his Mss. 
Ταδαρηνῶν and Γερασηνῶν (see these words) must be made 
to conform to the testimony of those who said that there 
was formerly a certain city Gergesa near the lake. But 
Josephus knows nothing of it, and states expressly (antt. 
1, 6, 2), that no trace of the ancient Gergesites [A. V. 
Girgashites, cf. B. D. s. v.] (mentioned Gen. xv. 20; 
Josh. xxiv. 11) had survived, except the names preserved 
in the O. T. Hence in Mt. viii. 28 we must read T'aóa- 
ρηνῶν [so T Tr WIT] and suppose that the jurisdiction 
of the city Gadara extended quite to the Lakeof Gennes- 
aret; but that Matthew (viii. 34) erroneously thought 
that this city was situated on the lake itself. For in Mk. 
v. 14 sq.; Lk. viii. 34, there is no objection to the sup- 
position that the men came to Jesus from the rural dis- 
triets alone. [But for the light thrown on this matter 
by modern research, see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gadara ; 
Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 34 sqq.; Wilson 
in * The Recovery of Jerusalem " p. 286 sq.]* 

γερουσία, -as, 7, (adj. γερούσιος, belonging to old 
men, yépov), a senate, council of elders; used in prof. 
auth. of the chief council of nations and cities (ἐν ταῖς 
πόλεσι ai yepovoia, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 16; in the O. T. of 
the chief council not only of the whole people of Israel, 
Ex. iii. 16, ete.; 1 Mace. xii. 6, etc. ; but also of cities, 
Deut. xix. 12, etc.) ; of the Great Council, the Sanhedrin 
of the Jews: Acts v. 21, where to τὸ συνέδριον is added 
καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν ᾿Ισραήλ and indeed (καί 
explicative) all the senate, to signify the full Sanhedrin. 
[Cf. Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung d. Juden in Rom 
in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt. Leips. 
1879, p. 18 sq.; Hatch, Bamp. Lects. for 1880, p. 64 sq.]* 

γέρων, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], an old man: Jn. iii. 4. 
[Svx. cf. Augustine in Trench § cvii. 2.]* 

γεύω: [ef. Lat. gusto, Germ. kosten; Curtius § 131]; to 
cause to taste, to give one a taste of, τινά (Gen. xxv. 30). 
In the N. T. only Mid. yetouar: fut. γεύσομαι ; 1 aor. 
€yevoduny ; 1. to taste, try the flavor of : Mt. xxvii. 34 ; 
contrary to better Grk. usage (cf. W. § 30, 7 c. [and p. 36; 
Anthol. Pal. 6, 120]) with ace. of the obj.: Jn.ii.9. 2. 
lo taste, i. e.. perceive the flavor of, partake of, enjoy: 
τινός, Lk. xiv. 24 (γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου, i. e. shall par- 


114 





γῆ 


take of my banquet); hence, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down, i. q. to feel, make trial of, experience : τινός, Heb. 
Vi. 4; ῥῆμα θεοῦ, ib. 5, (τῆς γνώσεως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
36,2). as in Chald., Syr. and Rabbin. writers, γεύεσθαι 
τοῦ θανάτου [ W. 33 (32)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Mk. ix. 1; Lk. 
ix. 27; Jn. viii. 52; Heb. ii. 9; (cf. Wetstein on Mt. l. c.; 
Meyer on Jn. 1. c.; Bleek, Lünem., Alf. on Heb. 1. Cale 
foll. by ὅτι: 1 Pet. ii. 3 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 9). 3. to 
take food, eat: absol, Acts x. 10; xx. 11; ef. Kypke, 
Observy. ii. p. 47; to take nourishment, eat —[but sub- 
stantially as above], with gen. μηδενός, Acts xxiii. 14; with 
the ellipsis of a gen. denoting unlawful food, Col. ii. 21.* 

yeopyéo, -ὦ : [ pres. pass. γεωργοῦμαι]} ; (γεωργός, q- v-) ; 
to practise agriculture, to till the ground: τὴν γῆν (Plat. 
Theag. p. 121 b.; Eryx. p. 392 d.; [al.]; 1 Esdr. iv. 6; 
1 Maec. xiv. 8) ; Pass.: Heb. vi. 7.* 

γεώργιον, -ov, τό, a (cultivated) field: 1 Co. iii. 9 [A. V. 
husbandry (with marg. tillage)]. (Prov. xxiv. 45 (30); 
xxxi. 16 (xxix. 34) ; Theag. in schol. Pind. Nem. 3, 21; 
Strabo 14, 5, 6 p. 671; [al.].)* 

γεωργός, -ov, 6, (fr. γῆ and EPTQ), fr. [Hdt.], Xen. and © 
Plat. down ; a husbandman, tiller of the soil: 2 Tim. ii. 
6; Jas. v. 7; several times in Sept. ; used of a vine-dresser 
(Ael. nat. an. 7, 28; [Plat. Theaet. p. 178 d.; al.]) in 
Mt. xxi. 33 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sq. 7, 9; Lk. xx. 9 sq. 14, 
16; Jn. xv. 1.* 

γῆ; gen. yrs, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. γαῖα), Sept. very 
often for y?N and 7978, earth; 1. arable land: Mt. 
xiii. 5, 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20, 26, 28, 31; Lk. xiii. 7; xiv. 
35 (34); Jn. xii. 24; Heb. vi. 7; Jas. v. 7; Rev. ix. 4; 
of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed, 
with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: ἐκ γῆς 
xoixós, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a 
standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii. 
35; xxvii. 51; Mk. viii. 6; ix. 20; xiv. 35; Lk. xxii. 44 
[L br. WH reject the pass.] ; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i. e. 
Rec.]; Aets ix. 4, 8. 3. the main /and, opp. to sea or 
water: Mk.iv.1; vi. 47; Lk. ν. 8; viii. 27; Jn. vi. 21; 
xxi.8 sq. 11; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole, 
the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp. 
to the heavens: Mt. ν. 18, 355; vi. 105; xvi.19; xviii. 18; 
xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. ii. 14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19; 
iv. 24 ; 2 Pet. 111. 5, 7, 10,13; Rev. xxi. 1; rà ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 
the things and beings that are on the earth, Eph. i. 10; 
Col.i.16 [Ὁ WH om. L Tr br. τά]; involving a suggestion 
of mutability, frailty, infirmity, alike in thought and in 
action, Mt. vi. 19; τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (equiv. to ra ἐπίγεια, 
Phil. iii. 19) terrestrial goods, pleasures, honors, Col. iii. 
2 (opp. to τὰ dvo) ; rà μέλη ὑμῶν rà ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς the mem- 
bers of your earthly body, as it were the abode and 
instruments of corrupt desires, Col. iii. 5; ὁ àv ἐκ τῆς γῆς 
. .. λαλεῖ (in contrast with Christ as having come from 
heaven) he who is of earthly (human) origin, has an 
earthly nature, and speaks as his earthly origin and 
nature prompt, Jn. iii. 31. b. the inhabited earth, the 
abode of men and animals: Lk. xxi. 35; Actsi. 8; x. 12; 
xi. 6; xvii. 26; Heb. xi. 13; Rev. iii. 10; αἴρειν ζωήν 
τινος Or τινὰ ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς: Acts viii. 33; xxii. 22; κληρο- 


γῆρας 


νομεῖν τὴν γῆν (see κληρονομέω, 2), Mt. v. 5 (4); πῦρ βάλ- 
λειν ἐπὶ [ Rec. eis] τὴν γῆν, i. e. among men, Lk. xii. 49, cf. 
51 and Mt. x. 34; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς among men, Lk. xviii. 8; 
Jn. xvii. 4. 5. a country, land enclosed within fixed 
boundaries, a tract of land, territory, region; simply, when 
it is plain from the context what land is meant, as that 
of the Jews: Lk. iv. 25; xxi. 23; Ro. ix. 28; Jas. v. 
17; with a gentile noun added [then, as a rule, anar- 
throus, W. 121 (114 sq.)]: γῆ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. ii. 20 sq. ; 
᾿Ιούδα, Mt. ii. 6 ; Τεννησαρέτ, Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; Σο- 
δόμων x. Τομόρρων, Mt. x. 15; xi. 24; Χαλδαίων, Acts vii. 
4; Αἴγυπτος, (see Αἴγυπτος) ; 7] ᾿Ιουδαία yr, Jn. ill. 22; 
with the addition of an adj.: ἀλλοτρία, Acts vii. 6 ; ἐκείνη, 
Mt. ix. 26, 31; with gen. of pers. one’s country, native 
land, Acts vii? 3. 

γῆρας, -aos (-os), Ion. ynpeos, dat. γήρεϊ, γήρει, τό, [tr. 
Hom. down], old age: Lk. i. 36 ἐν γήρει ἃ 1, Τ Tr 
WH for Ree. ἐν γήρᾳ; a form found without var. in Sir. 
xxv. 3; [also Ps. xci. (xcii.) 15; cf. Gen. xv. 15 Alex.; 
xxi. 7 ib.; xxv. 8 ib.; 1 Chr. xxix. 28 ib.; Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 10, 7 var.; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117]; Fritzsche 
on Sir. iii. 12; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 155; W. 
[36 and] 64 (62); [B. 15 (14)]-* . 

γηράσκω or γηράω: 1 aor. éynpaca; fr. Hom. down; [cf. 
W. 92 (88); Donaldson, New Crat. $ 387]; to grow oli : 
Jn. xxi. 18; of things, institutions, ete., to fail from age, 
be obsolescent: Heb. viii. 13 (to be deprived of force and 
authority ; [here associated with wahatotpevos — the lat- 
ter (used only of things) marking the lapse of time, while 
γηράσκων carries with it a suggestion of the waning 
strength, the decay, incident to old age (cf. Schmidt ch. 
46, 7; "Theophr. caus. pl. 6, 7, 5) : “that which is becom- 
ing old and faileth for age” etc. ]).* 

γίνομαι (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot. 
on for Attic γίγνομαι) ; [impf. ἐγινόμην ; fut. γενήσομαι ; 2 
aor. ἐγενόμην (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. γένοιτο ; [ptep. 
yevápevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. il and, with no diff. in 
signif., 1 aor. pass. ἐγενήθην, rejected by the Atticists (cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [ Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 
75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts 
iv. 4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, ete.), impv. γενηθήτω (Mt. 
vi. 10; xv. 28, etc.) ; pf. γεγένημαι and γέγονα; 3 pers. plur. 
yéyovav 1, T Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rev. xxi. 6 (cf. 
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p. 
37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73) 
sq.; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. γεγονώς] ; 
plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγεγόνει (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.]; Acts 
iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH γεγόνει, cf. W. $12,,9; B. 33 
(29); Tdf.s note on the pass.]) ; to become, and 

1. to become, i. e. to come into existence, begin to be, re- 
ceive being : absol., Jn. i. 15, 30 (ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν) ; 
Jn. viii. 58 (πρὶν ᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσθαι) ; 1 Co. xv. 37 (τὸ σῶμα 
τὸ γενησόμενον) ; ἔκ Twos, to be born, Ro. i. 3 (ἐκ σπέρματος 
Δαυΐδ) ; Gal. iv. 4 (ἐκ γυναικός) ; Mt. xxi. 19 (μηκέτι ἐκ 
σοῦ καρπὸς γένηται, come from) ; of the origin of all things, 
Heb. xi. 3; διά τινος, n.i. 3,10. to rise, arise, come on, 
appear, of occurrences in nature or in life: as γίνεται 
βροντή, Jn. xii. 29; ἀστραπή, Rev. viii. 5; σεισμός, Rev. 


115 





γίνομαι 


[vi. 12; xi. 13]; xvi. 18; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 
39; Lk. viii. 24; λαῖλαψ, Mk. iv. 37; yoyyvopds, Acts 
vi. 1; ζήτησις, Jn. iii. 25 [foll. by ἐκ of origin ; στάσις καὶ 
ζήτησις], Acts xv. 2 [Grsb. questions ζήτ., Rec. reads 
συζήτ.]; πόλεμος, Rev. xii. 7; ἡ βασιλεία [or αἱ B.] κτλ. 
Rey. xi. 15; xii. 10; χαρά, Acts viii. 8, and in many other 
exx. Here belong also the phrases γίνεται ἡμέρα it be- 
comes day, day comes on, Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii. 66; 
Acts xii. 18; xvi. 35 ; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39; y. ὀψέ 
evening comes, Mk. xi. 19, i. q. y. ὀψία, Mt. viii. 16, xiv. 
15, 23; xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; xxvi. 20; 
Mk. xiv. 17; Jn. vi. 16, etc.; mpwia, Mt. xxvii. 1; Jn. 
Xxi. 4; νύξ, Acts xxvii. 27 [cf. s. v. ἐπιγίν. 2]; σκοτία, Jn. 
vi.17[not Tdf.]. Hence 

2. to become i. q. to come to pass, happen, of events; 
a. univ.: Mt. v. 18; xxiv. 6, 20, 34; Lk. i. 20; xii. 54; 
xxi. 28; Jn. i. 28; xiii. 19, ete.; τοῦτο γέγονεν, tra ete. 
this hath come to pass that etc., Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4; xxvi. 
56; rà γενόμενα or γινόμενα, Mt. xvii. 31; xxvii. 54; 
xxviii. 11; Lk. xxiii 48; [cf. τὰ γενόμενα ἀγαθά, Heb. 
ix. 11 LWH txt. Trmrg.]; τὸ γενόμενον, Lk. xxiii. 47; 
τὸ γεγονός, Mk. v. 14; Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH 
reject the vs.]; Acts iv. 21; τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ γεγονός, Lk. ii. 
15; τὰ μέλλοντα γίνεσθαι, Lk. xxi. 36; Acts xxvi. 22; τὴν 
ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι, 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; θανάτου γενομένου 
a death having taken place (Germ. nach erfolgtem Tode), 
Heb. ix. 15. μὴ γένοιτο, a formula esp. freq. in Paul (and 
in Epictetus, cf. Schweigh. Index Graec. in Epict. p. 392), 
Jar be it! God forbid ! [cf. Morison, Exposition of Rom. 
iii., p. 31 sq.]: Lk. xx.16; Ro. iii. 4, 6, 31; vi. 2, 15; vii. 
7,195 ix. 14; ae Comvetor Gals 17. 1521 
(equiv. to non, Josh. xxii. 29, etc.) ; cf. Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. ete. p. 204 sq. ; τί γέγονεν, ὅτι etc. what has come 
to pass, that ete. i. q. for what reason, why ? Jn. xiv. 22 (τί 
ἐγένετο, ὅτι. . . Eccles. vii. 11 (10) ; τί ἐστιν, ὡς ete., Eur. 
"Troad. 889). — b. Very common in the first three Gos- 
pels, esp. that of Luke, and in the Acts, is the phrase καὶ 
ἐγένετο (Cr foll. by 1); ef. W. § 65, 4 e. [also $ 44, 3 c.], 
and esp. B. $ 141,6. α. καὶ ἐγένετο καί with a finite verb: 
Mk. ii. 15 (( Tr txt. καὶ γίνεται], TWH xai yiv. [foll. by 
ace. and inf.]); Lk. ii. 15 [R G L br. Tr br.]; viii. 1; xiv. 
1; xvii. 11; xix. 15; xxiv. 15 [ΓΗ br. xac]; foll. by καὶ 
ἰδού, Mt. ix. 10 [T om. καί before i§.]; Lk. xxiv. 4. . 
much oftener καί is not repeated: Mt. vii. 28; Mk. iv. 4; 
Lk.i.23; ii. [15 T WH], 46; vi. 12; vii. 11; ix. 18,33; xi. 
1; xix. 29; xxiv. 30. γ. καὶ éyev. foll. by acc. with inf. : 
Mk. ii. 23 [W. 578 (537) note]; Lk. vi. 1, 6 [RG éyév. δὲ 
καί]. c. In like manner ἐγένετο δέ α. foll. by καί with 
a finite verb: Lk. v. 1; ix. 28 [WH txt. om. L br. καί, 
51; x.38R G T, L Tr mrg. br. ka]; Acts v.?. B. ἐγένετο 
δέ foll. by a fin. verb without καί : Lk. i. 8; ii. 1, 6; [vi. 
12 RG L]; viii. 40 [WH Tr txt. om. éyév.]; ix. 37; xi. 
14, 27. y. ἐγένετο δέ foll. by aec. with inf.: Lk. iii. 21; 
[vi. 1,6 L T Tr WH, 12 T Tr WH]; xvi. 22; Acts iv. 
5; ix. 3 [without δέ], 32, 37; xi. 26 RG; xiv. 1; [xvi. 
16; xix. 1]; xxviii. S, [17]. δ. éyév. δέ [ὡς δὲ éyév.] foll. 
by ro) with inf.: Acts x. 25 (Rec. om. τοῦ), cf. Mey. ad 
loc. and W. 328 (307); [B. 270 (232)]. ἃ. with dat. of 


γίνομαι 


pers. to occur or happen to one, befall one: foll. by inf., 
Acts xx. 16; ἐὰν γένηται (sc. αὐτῷ) εὑρεῖν αὐτό, if it happen 
to him, Mt. xviii. 135 ἐμοὶ δὲ μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι far be it 
from me to glory, Gal. vi. 14, (Gen. xliv. 7, 17; 1 K. xx. 
(xxi) 3; Aleiphr. epp. 1, 26); foll. by ace. with inf. it 
happened to me, that etc.: Acts xi. 26 LT Tr WH [but 
acc. implied]; xxii. 6, 17, [cf. W. 323 (303); B. 305 
(262)]; with adverbs, go, fare, (Germ. ergehen) : εὖ, Eph. 
vi. 3, (μὴ γένοιτό σοι οὕτω κακῶς. Ael. v. h. 9, 36). with 
specification of the thing befalling one: τί γέγονεν [LT 
Trtxt. WH éyév.] αὐτῷ, Acts vii. 40 (fr. Ex. xxxii. 1); 
ἐγένετο [L T Tr WH ἐγίνετο] πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος fear came 
upon, Acts ii. 43. — Mk. iv. 11; ix. 21; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. v. 
14; xv. 7; Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co. iv. 5; 2 Co. i.8 [GL T Tr 
WHom.dat.]; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with the 
ellipsis of ἡμῖν, Jn. i. 17. — ἐγένετο (αὐτῷ) γνώμη a purpose 
occurred to him, he determined, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230), 
but T Tr WII read éyév. γνώμης; see below, 5 e. a.]. 
foll. by prepositions: ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ upon (Germ. bei or an) 
her, Mk. v. 33 [RG L br.]; eis τινα, Acts xxviii. 6. 

3. to arise, appear in history, come upon the stage: 
of men appearing in publie, Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 6, [on which 
two pass. cf. W. 350 (328); B. 308 (264) sq.]; 2 Pet. ii. 
1; γεγόνασι, have arisen and now exist, 1 Jn. ii. 18. 

4. to be made, done, finished: τὰ ἔργα, Heb. iv. 3; διὰ 
χειρῶν, of things fabricated, Acts xix. 26; of miracles to 
be performed, wrought: διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος, Mk. vi. 2; 
διά τινος, Acts ii. 43; iv. 16,30; xii. 9 ; ὑπό τινος, Lk. ix. 
7 (RL [but the latter br. ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ}; xiii. 17; xxiii. 8; 
γενόμενα eis Kadapy. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for 
its benefit (W. 416 (388) ; [ef. B. 333 (286) ]), Lk. iv. 23 
[Ree. ἐν τῇ K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re- 
quests, ete. to be done, executed : Mt. vi. 10; xxi. 21; xxvi. 
42; Mk. xi. 22; Lk. xiv. 22; xxiii. 24; Acts xxi. 14 ; ye- 
νήσεται 6 λόγος will be accomplished the saying, 1 Co. xv. 
54. joined to nouns implying a certain action: ἡ ἀπώ- 
Neva γέγονε, Mk. xiv. 4; ἀπογραφή, Lk. ii. 2; ἐπαγγελία 
γενομένη ὑπὸ θεοῦ given by God, Acts xxvi. 6; ἀνάκρισις, 
Acts xxv. 26 ; νόμου μετάθεσις, Heb. vii. 12; ἄφεσις, Heb. 
ix. 22. of institutions, laws, ete. to be established, en- 
acted : τὸ σάββατον ἐγένετο, the institution of the Sabbath, 
Mk. ii. 27; ὁ νόμος, Gal. iii. 17 ; οὐ γέγονεν οὕτως hath not 
been so ordained, Mt. xix. 8. of feasts, marriages, en- 
tertainments, to be kept, celebrated: τὸ πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 
2 (1. q. nizy3, 2 K. xxiii. 22); τὸ σάββατον, Mk. vi. 2; τὰ 
ἐγκαίνια, Jn. x. 22; [γενεσίοις γενυμένοις (cf. W.§ 31,9 b.; 
RG γενεσίων ἀγομένων), Mt. xiv. 6], (τὰ ᾿Ολύμπια, Xen. 
Hell. 7, 4, 28; Ἴσθμια, 4, 5, 1) ; γάμος, Jn. ii. 1. οὕτως 
γένηται ἐν ἐμοί so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15. 

5. to become, be made, * in passages where it is speci- 
fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren- 
dered, as respects quality, condition, place, rank, charac- 
ter” (Wahl, Clavis Apocr. V. T. p. 101). a. with a 
predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj. : οἱ λίθοι 
οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται, Mt. iv. 3; Lk. iv. 3; ὕδωρ οἶνον yeye- 
νημένον. Jn. ii. 9 ; ἀρχιερεὺς γενόμενος, Heb. vi. 20 ; διάκονος, 
Col. i. 25; ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο, Jn. i. 14 ; ἀνήρ, 1 Co. xiii. 
11, and many other exx. ; χάρις οὐκέτι γίνεται χάρις grace 


116 





γίνομαι 


ceases to have the nature of grace, can no longer be called 
grace, Ro. xi. 6; ἄκαρπος γίνεται, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; 
— in Mt. xvii. 2; Lk. viii. 17; Jn. v. 6, and many other 
places. contextually, to show one's self, prove one’s self: 
Lk. x. $65 xix. 17; xxiv. 19; Ro. xi: 845 xvi 972169. 1. 
18 Rec.; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 7; Heb. xi. 6, ete.; esp. in exhor- 
tations : γίνεσθε, Mt. x. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; Eph. 
iv. 32; Col. iii. 15; μὴ γίνου, Jn. xx. 27; μὴ γίνεσθε, Mt. 
vi. 16; Eph. v. 7,17; 1 Co. x. 7; μὴ γινώμεθα, Gal. v. 26 ; 
hence used declaratively, i. q. to be found, shown: Lk. 
xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were 
sinners); Ro. iii. 4; 2 Co. vii. 14; — γίνομαί τινί τις to 
show one's self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20, 
22. b. with an interrog. pron. as predicate : τί ὁ Πέτρος 
eyévero what had become of Peter, Acts xit. 18 [cf. use of 
τί éyév. in Act. Phil. in Hell. $ 23, 7f. Acta apost. apoer. 
p.104]. ο. γίνεσθαι ὡς or ὡσεί τινα to become as or like 
to one: Mt. x. 25; xviii.3; xxviii.4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii. 
44 [L br. WII reject the pass.]; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9) ; 
1 Co. iv.13; Gal.iv.12. — d. γίνεσθαι εἴς τι to become i. e. 
be changed into something, come to be, issue in, something 
(Germ. zu etwas werden) : ἐγενήθη els κεφαλὴν γωνίας, Mt. 
xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 17 ; Actsiv. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, 
—all after Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22. Lk. xiii. 19 (eis δένδρον 
μέγα); Jn. xvi. 20; Acts v. 36; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. 
(Ixix.) 23) ; 1 Th. iii. 5; Rev. viii. 11 ; xvi. 19, ete. (equiv. to 
5 m7; but the expression is also classic; ef. W. § 29, 3 a. ; 
B.150(131)). 6. γίνεσθαι with Cases; a. with the gen. 
to become the property of any one, to come into the power 
of a person or thing, [cf. W. $ 30,5; esp. B. 162 (142)]: 
Lk. xx. 14 [L mrg. ἔσται], 33; Rev. xi. 15 ; [γνώμης, Acts 
xx. 3 Τ Tr WH (cf. ἐλπίδος μεγάλης yiv. Plut. Phoc. 23, 
4)]; προφητεία ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται no one can ex- 
plain prophecy by his own mental power (it is not a mat- 
ter of subjective interpretation), but to explain it one 
needs the same illumination of the Holy Spirit in which 
it originated, for ete. 2 Pet. i. 20. γενέσθαι with a gen. 
indicating one's age, (to be) so many years old: Lk. ii. 
42; 1 Tim. v. 9. f. with the dat. [cf. W. 210 sq. (198)]: 
γίνεσθαι ἀνδρί to become a man’s wife, Ro. vii. 3 sq. (mm 
vs, Lev. xxii. 12; Ruthi.12,ete.). f. joined to prep- 
ositions with their substantives; ἔν tu, to come or pass 
into a certain state [cf. B. 330 (284)]: ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ, Lk. xxii. 
44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts xxii. 
17; ἐν πνεύματι, Rev. i. 10; iv. 2; ἐν δόξῃ [ R. V. came with 
(in) glory], 2 Co. iii. 7; ἐν παραβάσει, 1 Tim. ii. 14; ἐν 
ἑαυτῷ, to come to himself, recover reason, Acts xii. 11 
(also in Grk. writ.; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749); ἐν 
Χριστῷ, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be- 
come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7; ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων, to 
become like men, Phil. ii. 7; ἐν λόγῳ κολακείας [ R. V. 
were we found using] flattering speech, 1 Th. ii.5. ἐπάνω 
τινός to be placed over a thing, Lk. xix. 19. μετά τινος or 
σύν τινι to become one’s companion, associate with him: 
Mk. xvi. 10; Acts vii. 38; xx. 18; ὑπό τινα to be made 
subject to one, Gal. iv. 4. [Cf.h. below.] 6. with speci- 
fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest: εἰς 
with ace. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some 


γινώσκω 


thing, Acts xx. 16; xxi. 17; xxv. 15; ὡς ἐγένετο... εἰς 
τὰ ὦτά pov when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44; 
εἰς with acc. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Rev. xvi. 2 
RG; of blessings, Gal. iii. 14; 1 Th. i. 5 [Lchm. πρός ; Acts 
xxvi. 6 L T Tr WH]; γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου, Lk. xxii. 
40; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς; Jn. vi. 21 [ Edf. ἐπὶ τὴν y-]; ὧδε, ib. 25 
(ἐκεῖ, Xen. an. 6,3 [5], 20; [cf. B. 71]) ; ἐπί with ace. of 
place, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts xxi. 35; [Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.]; 
ἐγένετο διωγμὸς ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Acts viii. 1; ἐγένετο 
φόβος or θάμβος ἐπὶ πάντας, Lk. i. 65; iv. 36; Acts v. 5, 
11; [ἔκστασις, Acts x. 10 (Ree. ἐπέπεσεν) |]; ἕλκος κακὸν 
k. πονηρὸν ἐπὶ τ. ἀνθρώπους, Rev. xvi. 2 L Τ Tr WH; 
ἐγένετο ῥῆμα ἐπί τινα, λόγος OY φωνὴ πρός τινα (came to) : 
Lk. iii. 2; Jn. x. 35; Acts vii. 31 [Rec.]; x. 13, (Gen. xv. 
1, 4; Jer. i. 2,11; xiii. 8; Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1) ; [ἐπαγ- 
yeMa, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6 Rec.]; κατά with ace. of place, 
Lk. x. 32 [Tr WH om.]; Acts xxvii. 7, (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 
15); κατά with gen. : τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς 'Iov- 
δαίας the matter the report of which spread throughout 
all Judza, Acts x. 37; πρός twa, 2 Jn. 12 (Rec. ἐλθεῖνν ; 
1 Co. ii. 3; σύν τινι, to be joined to one as an associate, 
Lk. ii. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5,3, 8) ; ἐγγὺς γίνεσθαι, Eph. ii. 13; 
τινός, Jn. vi. 19; h. [with ἐκ of the source (see 1 
above): Mk. i. 11 (Tdf. om. éyév.); ix. 7 (T Trmrg. 
WH); Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35; Acts xix. 34]; γίνεσθαι ἐκ 
μέσου, to be taken out of the way, 2 Th. ii. 7; γενέσθαι 
ὁμοθυμαδόν, of many come together in one place, Acts xv. 
25 cf. ii. 1 [but only in RG; γενομένοις ὁμοθυμαδόν in xv. 
25 may mean either having become of one mind, or possi- 
bly having come together with one accord. On the alleged 
use of γίνομαι in the N. T. as interchangeable with εἰμί 
see Fritzschior. Opusce. p. 284 note. Comp.: azo-, δια-, 
ἐπι-, παρα-, συμ- mapa-, προ-γίνομαι. 

γινώσκω (Attic γιγνώσκω, see γίνομαι init.; fr. PNOQ, 
as βιβρώσκω fr. BPOQ) ; [impf. ἐγίνωσκον; ; fut. γνώσομαι; 
2 aor. ἔγνων (fr. PNOMI), impv. γνῶθι, γνώτω, subj. γνῶ 
(3 pers. sing. yvot, Mk. v. 43; ix. 30; Lk. xix. 15 L T Tr 
WHI, for RG γνῷ [B. p. 46 (40); cf. δίδωμι init. ]), inf. 
γνῶναι, ptep. yvoós; pf. ἔγνωκα (Jn. xvii. 7; 3 pers. plur. 
€yvokav for ἐγνώκασι, see reff. in γίνομαι init.); plpf. 
ἐγνώκειν ; Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. γινώσκεται (Mk. xiii. 
28 'Tr mrg.) ] ; pf. ἔγνωσμαι ; 1 aor. ἐγνώσθην ; fut. γνωσθή- 
σομαι; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for ym; Lat. 
nosco, novi (i. e. gnosco, gnovi) ; 

I. univ. 1. to learn to know, come to know, get a 
knowledge of; pass. to become known : with ace., Mt. xxii. 
18; Mk. v. 43; Actsxxi. 34; 1 Co. iv. 19; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col. 
iv.8; 1 Th. iii. 5, ete. Pass., Mt. x. 26; Acts ix. 24; Phil. 
iv. 5, etc.; [impers. γινώσκεται, Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.T 2, 7]; 
τὶ ἔκ twos, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 1 Jn. iv. 6; τινὰ or τὶ 
ἔν τινι; to find a sign ina thing by which to know, to recog- 
nize in or by something, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35; 1 
Jn. iv. 2; κατὰ τί γνώσομαι rovro, the truth of this promise, 
Lk. i. 18 (Gen. xv. 8) ; περὶ τῆς διδαχῆς, Jn. vii. 17. often 
the object is not added, but is readily understood from 
what precedes: Mt. ix. 30; xii. 15 (the consultation held 
by the Pharisees) ; Mk. vii. 24 (he would have no one 
know that he was present); Mk. ix. 30; Ro. x. 19, ete. ; 


117 











γινώσκω 


foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. iv. 1; v. 6 ; xii. 9, etc. ; foll. 
by the interrog. τί, Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xvi. 4; ἀπό τινος, to 
learn from one, Mk. xv. 45. with ace. of pers. to recog- 
nize as worthy of intimacy and love, to own; so those 
whom God has judged worthy of the blessings of the gos- 
pel are said ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ γινώσκεσθαι, 1 Co. viii. 3; Gal. 
iv. 9, [on both cf. W. § 39, 3 Note2; B. 55 (48)]; nes- 
atively, in the sentence of Christ οὐδέποτε ἔγνων ὑμᾶς, I 
never knew you, never had any acquaintance with you, 
Mt.vii.23. to perceive, feel: ἔγνω τῷ σώματι, ὅτι etc. Mk. 
v. 29; ἔγνων δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, Lk. viii. 46. 
2. to know, understand, perceive, have knowledge of; a. 
to understand : with ace., rà Aeyóueva, Lk. xviii. 34; à 
ἀναγινώσκεις, Acts viii. 305 foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. 
viii. 27 sq.; 2 Co. xiii. 6; Gal.iii. 7; Jas. ii. 20; foll. by 
interrog, τί, Jn. x. 6; xiii. 12, 28; ὃ κατεργάζομαι οὐ γι- 
νώσκω I do not understand what I am doing, my conduct 
is inexplicable to me, Ro. vii. 15. 
Lk. xii. 47; ras καρδίας, Lk. xvi. 15 ; τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 
ignorant of sin, i. e. not conscious of having committed it, 


b. to know: τὸ θέλημα, 


2 Co. v. 21; ἐπιστολὴ γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη, 2 Co. 
lii. 2; τινά, to know one, his person, character, mind, 
plans: Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 24; Acts xix. 15; 2 Tim. ii. 19 
(fr. Num. xvi. 5); foll. by ὅτι, Jn. xxi. 17; Phil. i. 12; 
Jas. i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 20; foll. by acc. with inf. Heb. x. 34; 
foll. by an indirect question, Rev. iii. 3; ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκ. 
to know Greek (graece scire, Cic. de fin. 2, 5) : Acts xxi. 
37, (ἐπίστασθαι συριστί, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 31; graece nescire, 
Cic. pro Flac. 4, 10); tore (Rec. ἐστε) γινώσκοντες ye 
know, understanding etc. [R. V. ye know of a surety, 
ete.], Eph. v. 5; see W. 355 (333) ; [cf. B. 51 (44) ; 314 
(269)]. impv. γινώσκετε know ye: Mt. xxiv. 32 sq. 43; 
Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. x. 11; Jn. xv. 18; Acts ii. 36 ; Heb. xiii. 
235 1 dn: 11429: 3. by a Hebraistic euphemism [ef. 
W. 18], found also in Grk. writ. fr. the Alexandrian age 
down, γινώσκω is used of the carnal connection of male 
and female, rem cum aliquo or aliqua habere (cf. our 
have a [eriminal] intimacy with): of a husband, Mt. i. 
25; of the woman, Lk. i. 34; (Gen. iv. 1, 17; xix. 8; 1 
S. i. 19, ete. ; Judith xvi. 22; Callim. epigr. 58, 3; often 
in Plut. ; cf. Vógelin, Plut. Brut. p. 10 sqq.; so also Lat. 
cognosco, Ovid. met. 4, 596 ; novi, Justin. hist. 27, 3, 11). 

II. In particular γινώσκω, to become acquainted with, 
to know, is employed in the N. T. of the knowledge of 
God and Christ, and of the things relating to them or pro- 
a. τὸν θεόν, the one, true God, in 





ceeding from them; 
contrast with the polytheism of the Gentiles: Ro. i. 21; 
Gal. iv. 9; also τὸν μόνον ἀληθινὸν θεόν, Jn. xvii. 3 cf. 1 Jn. 
v. 20; τὸν θεόν. the nature and will of God, in contrast 
with the false wisdom of both Jews and Gentiles, 1 Co. 
i. 21; τὸν πατέρα, the nature of God the Father, esp. 
the holy will and affection by which he aims to sanctify 
and redeem men through Christ, Jn. viii. 55; xvi. 3; 
1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. 14 (13) ; iii. 1, 6; iv. 8; a peculiar knowl- 
edge of God the Father is claimed by Christ for him- 
self, Jn. x. 15; xvii. 25; γνῶθι τὸν κύριον, the precepts 
of the Lord, Heb. viii. 11; τὸ θέλημα (of God), Ro. ii. 
18; νοῦν κυρίου, Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16; τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ 


γινώσκω 


Θεοῦ, 1 Co. ii. 8; τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. iii. 10 (fr. 
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10). b. Χριστόν, his blessings, Phil. 
iii. 10; in Χριστὸν ἐγνωκέναι κατὰ σάρκα, 2 Co. v. 16, 
Paul speaks of that knowledge of Christ which he had 
before his conversion, and by which he knew him merely 
in the form of a servant, and therefore had not yet seen 
in him the Son of God. Ace. to J oh n's usage, γινώσκειν, 
ἐγνωκέναι Χριστόν denotes to come to know, to know, his 
Messianic dignity (Jn. xvii. 3; vi. 69); his divinity (τὸν 
ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. cf. Jn. i. 10), his consummate 
kindness towards us, and the benefits redounding to us 
from fellowship with him (in Christ’s words γινώσκομαι 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμῶν, Jn. x. 14 [ace. to the crit. texts γινώσκουσίν 
pe τὰ ἐμά]): his love of God (Jn. xiv. 31); his sinless 
holiness (1 Jn. iii. 6). John unites πιστεύειν and γινώσκειν, 
at one time putting πιστεύειν first: vi. 69 [ef. Schaff's 
Lange or Mey. ad loe.]; but at another time γινώσκειν: 
x..38 (ace. to RG, for which L T Tr WH read ἵνα γνῶτε 
καὶ γινώσκητε [R. V. know and understand]) ; xvii. 8 [L 
br. x. ἔγν.7; 1 Jn. iv. 16 (the love of God). — c. y. τὰ τοῦ 
πνεύματος the things which proceed from the Spirit, 1 Co. 
ii. 14; τὸ πνεῦμα τ. ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πν. τῆς πλάνης, 1 Jn. iv. 
6; τὰ μυστήρια τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, Mt. xiii. 115 τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν, Jn. viii. 32; 2 Jn. 1; absol, of the knowledge 
of divine things, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of the knowledge of 
things lawful for a Christian, 1 Co. viii. 2. 

[Syn. γινώσκειν, εἰδέναι, ἐπίστασθαι, συνιέναι: 
In classic usage (cf. Schmidt ch. 13), γινώσκειν, distinguished 
from the rest by itsoriginal inchoativ e force, denotes a dis- 
criminating apprehension of external impressions, a knowl- 
edge grounded in personal experience. εἰδέναι, lit. ‘to have 
seen with the mind’s eye,’ signifies a clear and purely mental 
perception, in contrast both to conjecture and to knowledge 
derived from others. ἐπίστασθαι primarily expresses the 
knowledge obtained by proximity to the thing known (cf. 
our understand, Germ. verstehen) ; then knowledge viewed as 
the result of prolonged practice, in opposition to the process 
of learning on the one hand, and to the uncertain knowledge 
of a dilettante on the other. συνιέναι implies native insight, 
the soul’s capacity of itself not only to lay hold of the phe- 
nomena of the outer world through the senses, but by combi- 
nation (σύν and ἱέναι) to arrive at their underlying laws. 
Hence συνιέναι may mark an antithesis to sense-perception ; 
whereas γινώσκειν marks an advance upon it. As applied 
€. κ΄. to a work of literature, γινώσκειν expresses an acquaint- 
ance with it; ἐπίστασθαι the knowledge of its contents; 
συνιέναι the understanding of it, a comprehension of its mean- 
ing. γινώσκειν and εἰδέναι most readily come into contrast 
with each other; if εἰδέναι and ἐπίστασθαι are contrasted, the 
former refers more to natural, the latter to acquired knowl- 
edge. In the N. T., as might be expected, these distinctions 
are somewhat less sharply marked. Such passages as John 
i. 26, 31, 48 (49) ; vii. 27 sq. ; xxi. 17 ; 2 Co. v. 16; 1 Jn. v. 20 
may seem to indicate that, sometimes at least, γινώσκω and 
οἶδα are nearly interchangeable; yet see Jn. iii. 10, 11 ; viii. 
55 (yet cf. xvii. 25); 1 Jn. ii. 29 (know . 
characteristic use of εἰδέναι by John to describe our Lord's 
direct insight into divine things: iii. 11 ; v. 32 (contrast 42) ; 
vii. 29; viii. 55; xii. 50, ete; cf. Bp. Lghtft.’s note on Gal. 
iv. 9; Green, ‘Critical Notes’ etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. 55) ; 
Westcott on John ii. 24. 
ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97); ola and 








. . perceive), and the | 


γινώσκω and ἐπίσταμαι are associ- | 


118 





γλῶσσα 


γινώσκω in Eph. v. 5; οἶδα and ἐπίσταμαι in Jude 10. 


Comp. : àva-, δια-, ἐπι-, kara-, προ-γινώσκω.] 

γλεῦκος, -ovs, τό, must, the sweet juice pressed from the 
grape; Nicand. alex. 184, 299; Plut., al.; Job xxxii. 19; 
sweet wine: Acts ii. 13. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Wine.]* 

γλυκύς, -eia, -v, sweet: Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to πικρόν); 12 
(opp. to dAvkóv) ; Rev. x. 9, [10]. [From Hom. down.]* 

γλῶσσα, -ης; ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], the tongue; 1. the 
tongue, a member of the body, the organ of speech: Mk. 
vii. 33, 35; Lk. i. 64; xvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Jas. i. 26; 
iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. iii. 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10]. 
By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistie, that 
member of the body which is chiefly engaged in some act 
has ascribed to it what belongs to the man; the /ongue 
is so used in Acts ii. 26 (ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά pov); Ro. 
ii.13; xiv. 11; Phil.ii. 11 (the tongue of every man); of 
the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign 
tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. e. the language 
used by a particular people in distinction from that of 
other nations: Actsii.11 ; henceinlaterJewish usage (Is. 
Ixvi. 18; Dan. iii. 4; v. 19 Theod.; vi. 25; vii. 14 Theod.; 
Jud. iii. 8) joined with φυλή, Xaós, ἔθνος, it serves to desig- 
nate people of various languages [cf. W. 32], Rev. v. 9; 
vii. 9; x. 11; xi.9; xiii. 7; xiv. 6; xvii. 15. λαλεῖν éré- 


| pas γλώσσαις to speak with other than their native i. e. in 


foreign tongues, Acts ii. 4 cf. 6-11; γλώσσαις λαλεῖν kat- 
vais to speak with new tongues which the speaker has not 
learned previously, Mk. xvi. 17 [but Trtxt. WH txt. om. 
Tr mrg. br. καιναῖς 1; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 sqq. [eor- 
rect and supplement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 10; 
cf. also B. D. s. v. Tongues, Gift of]. From both these 
expressions must be carefully distinguished the simple 
phrases λαλεῖν γλώσσαις, γλώσσαις λαλεῖν, λαλεῖν γλώσσῃ; 
γλώσσῃ λαλεῖν (and προσεύχεσθαι γλώσσῃ, 1 Co. xiv. 14), 
to speak with (in) a tongue (the organ of speech), to speak 
with tongues ; this, as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 7 sqq., is the 
gift of men who, rapt in an ecstasy and no longer quite 
masters of their own reason and consciousness, pour forth 
their glowing spiritual emotions in strange utterances, 
rugged, dark, disconnected, quite unfitted to instruct or to 
influence the minds of others: Acts x. 46; xix. 6; 1 Co. 
xii. 80; xiii. 1; xiv. 2,4-6, 13, 18, 23, 27,39. The origin of 
the expression is apparently to be found in the fact, that 
in Hebrew the tongue is spoken of as the leading instru- 
ment by which the praises of God are proclaimed (ἡ τῶν 
θείων ὕμνων μελῳδός, 4 Mace. x. 21, cf. Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 
28; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 17; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 24; exxv. (exxvi.) 2; Acts 
ii. 26; Phil. ii. 11; λαλεῖν ἐν γλώσσῃ, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 
4), and that according to the more rigorous conception 
of inspiration nothing human in an inspired man was 
thought to be active except the tongue, put in motion by 
the Holy Spirit (καταχρῆται ἕτερος αὐτοῦ rois φωνητηρίοις 
ὀργάνοις, στόματι kai γλώττῃ πρὸς μήνυσιν ὧν ἂν θέλῃ, 
Philo, rer. diy. haer. § 53, [i. 510 ed. Mang.]) ; hence the 
contrast δεὰ τοῦ vods [crit. edd. τῷ vot λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xiv. 
19 cf. 9. The plur. in the phrase γλώσσαις λαλεῖν, used 
even of a single person (1 Co. xiv. 5 sq.), refers to the 
various motions of the tongue. By meton. of the cause for 


ηλωσσόκομον 


the effect, γλῶσσαι tongues are equiv. to λόγοι ἐν γλώσσῃ 
(1 Co. xiv. 19) words spoken in a tongue (Zungenvortra- 
ge): xiii. 8; xiv. 22; γένη γλωσσῶν, 1 Co. xii. 10, 28, of 
which two kinds are mentioned viz. προσευχή and ψαλμός, 
1 Co: xiv. 15; γλῶσσαν ἔχω; something to utter with a 
tongue, 1 Co. xiv. 26. [On *Speaking with Tongues' 
see, in addition to the discussions above referred to, 
Wendt in the 5th ed. of Meyer on Acts (ii. 4) ; Heinrici, 
Korinthierbriefe, i. 372 sqq.; Schaff, Hist. of the Chr. 
Church, i. 234—245 (1882); Farrar, St. Paul, i. 95 sqq.]* 

γλωσσόκομον, -ov, τό, (for the earlier γλωσσοκομεῖον or 
γλωσσοκόμιον [W. 24 (23), 94 (90); yet see Boeckh, 
Corp. inserr. 2448, viii. 25, 31], fr. γλῶσσα and κομέω to 
tend); a. a case in which to keep the mouth-pieces of 
wind instruments. b. a small box for other uses also; esp. 
a casket, purse to keep money in : Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29; cf. 
Lob.ad Phryn. p. 98 sq. (For oW a chest, 2 Chr. xxiv. 
8, 10 sq.; Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 2; Plut., Longin., al.) * 

γναφεύς, -éos, 6, (also [earlier] κναφεύς, fr. γνάπτω or 
kvámro to card), a fuller: Mk. ix. 3. (Hdt., Xen., and 
Sqq.; Sept. Is. vii. 3; xxxvi. 2; 2 K. xviii. 17.) * 

γνήσιος, -a, -ov, (by syncope for γενήσιος fr. γίνομαι, 
yev-, [cf. Curtius $ 128]), legitimately born, not spurious ; 
genuine, true, sincere: Phil.iv. 3; 1 Tim. i. 2; Tit. i.4; 
τὸ τῆς ἀγάπης γνήσιον i. q. τὴν γνησιότητα [ A. V. the sin- 
cerit], 2 Co. viii. 8. (From Hom. down.) * 

γνησίως, adv., genuinely, faithfully, sincerely: Phil. ii. 
20. [From Eur. down.] ἢ 

γνόφος, -ov, -ó, (for the earlier [and poetic] δνόφος, 
akin to νέφος [so Bttm. Lexil. ii. 266; but see Curtius 
pp. 704 sq. 706, cf. 535; Vanicek p. 1070]), darkness, 
gloom: Heb.xii.18. (Aristot. de mund. c. 2 fin. p. 392», 
12; Lceian. de mort. Peregr. 43; Dio Chrys.; Sept. also 
for 13j a cloud, Deut. iv. 11, ete. and for Say. ‘thick 
cloud,’ Ex. xx. 21, ete.; [Trench $ c.].) * 

γνώμη, -ης; ἡ, (fr. γινώσκω) ; 1. the faculty of know- 
ing, mind, reason. 2. that which is thought or known, 
one'smind; a. view, judgment, opinion : 1 Co.i. 10; Rev. 
xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done, 
aa. by one’s self, resolve, purpose, intention: ἐγένετο 
γνώμη [E Tr WH γνώμης, see γίνομαι 5 e. a.) τοῦ ὑποστρέ- 
dew, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230)]. bb. by others, judg- 
ment, advice: διδόναι γνώμην, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40]; 2 Co. viii. 
10. cc. decree: Rev. xvii. 17; χωρὶς τῆς σῆς γνώμης, 
without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in 
Grk. writ.; [cf. Schmidt, ch. 13, 9; Mey. on 1 Co. i. 10].) * 

γνωρίζω ; fut. γνωρίσω (Jn. xvii. 26 ; Eph. vi. 21; Col. 
iv. 7), Attic «à (Col. iv. 9 [L WH -(co; B. 37 (32); 
WH. App. p- 163]) ; 1 aor. ἐγνώρισα; Pass., [ pres. yvopt- 
Cova]; 1 aor. éyvepícÓgv; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
down [see ad fin.]; Sept. for yn and Chald. jn; 
1. trans. to make known: τί, Ro. ix. 22 sq.; τί τινι, Lk. 
ii. 15; Jn. xv. 15;.xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1; 
Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass. in these two exx.]; Eph. vi. 21; 
Col. iv. 7, 9; 2 Pet. i.16; τινὶ τὸ μυστήριον, Eph. i. 9; 
iii. 3 [G LT Tr WH read the pass.]; vi 19; τινὶ ὅτι, 
1 Co. xii. 35 τινί τι, ὅτι 1. q. τινὶ ὅτι τι, Gal. i. 11; foll. by 
τί interrog. Col. i. 27; περί τινος, Lk. ii. 17 LT Tr WH; 


119 











γνωστός 


γνωριζέσθω πρὸς τὸν θεόν be brought to the knowledge of 
God, Phil. iv. 6 ; γνωρίζεσθαι εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη to be made 
known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26; contextually 
and emphatically i. q. to recall to one’s mind, as though 
what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xv. 1 ; with 
acc. of pers. [(Plut. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to 
become known, be recognized: Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. WII 
txt. 2. intrans. to know: τί αἱρήσομαι, οὐ γνωρίζω, Phil. 
i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate τί aip.; οὐ yv.; some refer 
this to 1 (R. V. mrg. 7 do not make known), cf. Mey. ad 
loc. In earlier Grk. γνωρίζω signifies either ‘to gain a 
knowledge of,’ or ‘to have thorough knowledge of. Its 
later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found 
only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487; οἵ. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287; 
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. e. Comr.: dva-, δια-γνωρίζω ].* 

γνῶσις, -ews, 7, (γινώσκω), [fr. Thue. down], Enowl- 
edge: with gen. of the obj., σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 77; τοῦ 
θεοῦ, the knowledge of God, such as is offered in the 
gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul’s exposition of it, 2 Uo. 
x. 5; τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. iv. 6; 
Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8; 2 Pet. 
iii. 18; with subj. gen. τοῦ θεοῦ, the knowledge of things 
which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. γνῶσις, by itself, sig- 
nifies in general intelligence, understanding : Eph. iii. 19; 
the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv. 
14; 1 Co. i. 5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged 
knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more 
advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8; xiii. 2, 8; xiv. 6; 2 Co. vi. 6; viii. 7; 
xi. ὃ ; esp. of things lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1 
Co. viii. 1, 7, 10 sq.; the higher knowledge of Christian 
and divine things which false teachers boast of, ψευδώνυ- 
pos γνῶσις, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [cf. Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, 
p.132 sq.]; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living, 
2 Pet. i. 5; and in intercourse with others : κατὰ γνῶσιν, 
wisely, 1 Pet. iii. T. objective knowledge: what is known 
concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20; 
Col. ii. 3; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. xi. 
52. Where γνῶσις and σοφία are used together the for- 
mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the 
latter wisdom as exhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1 
Co. xii. 8; Col. ii. 3. [“yv. is simply intuitive, cod. is 
ratiocinative also; yr. applies chiefly to the appre- 
hension of truths, cop. superadds the power of reason- 
ing about them and tracing their relations.” Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col.lec. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro. 
l. c.), *yv. perspicientia veri, cod. sapientia aut mentis 
sollertia, quze cognita intellectaque veritate utatur, ut res 
efficiendas efficiat. ^ Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. c.) nearly re- 
verses Lehtft.’s distinction ; elsewhere, however (e. g. on 
Col. 1. c., cf. i. 9), he and others regard cod. merely as 
the more general, y». as the more restricted and special 
term. Cf. Lehtft. u. s. ; Trench § Ixxv.]* 

γνώστης, -ov, 6, (a knower), an expert; a connoisseur : 
Acts xxvi. 3. (Plut. Flam. e. 4; θεὸς ὁ τῶν κρυπτῶν 
γνώστης, Hist. Sus. vs. 42; of those who divine the future, 
1 S. xxviii. 3, 9, etc.) * 

γνωστός, -1, -óv, known: Actsix. 42; τινί, Jn. xviii. 15 
Sq.; Actsi.19; xv. 18 RL; xix. 17; xxviii. 22; γνωστὸν 


yoyyusoo 


ἔστω ὑμῖν be it known to you: Acts ii. 14; iv. 10; xiii. 38; 
xxviii. 28; contextually, notable, Acts iv. 16; γνωστὸν 
ποιεῖν to make known, disclose: Acts xv. 17 sq. GT Tr 
WH [al. construe yvocr. as pred. of ταῦτα : R. V. mrg. 
who doeth these things which were known; cf. Mey. ad 
loc.]. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, either that which may be 
known of God, or i. q. γνῶσις τοῦ θεοῦ, for both come to 
the same thing: Ro. i. 19; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and W. 
235 (220), [and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. of 
γνωστοί acquaintance, intimates, (Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 12; 
[Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 9, 19]; Neh. v. 10): Lk. ii. 44 ; xxiii. 
49. (In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

γογγύζω ; impf. ἐγόγγυζον ; 1 aor. ἐγόγγυσα; to murmur, 
mutter, grumble, say anything in a low tone, (acc. to Pollux 
and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the 
τονθρύζω and τονθορύζω of the more elegant Grk. writ. ; 
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 358; [W. 22; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
ii. 14]); hence of those who confer together secretly, τὶ 
περί Twos, Jn. vii. 32; of those who discontentedly com- 
plain: 1 Co. x. 10; πρός twa, Lk. v. 30; per ἀλλήλων, 
Jn. vi. 43; κατά twos, Mt. xx. 11; περί τινος, Jn. vi. 41, 
61. (Sept.; Antonin. 2, 3; Epict. diss. 1, 29, 55; 4, 1, 
79; [al.].) [Cowr.: δια- yoyyóto-] * 

γογγυσμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (γογγύζω, q. v.), a murmur, murmur- 
ing, multering; applied to a. secret debate: περί τινος, 
Jn. vii. 12. b. secret displeasure, not openly avowed: 
πρός twa, Acts vi 1; in plur. χωρὶς or ἄνευ γογγυσμῶν 
without querulous discontent, without murmurings, i. e. 
with a cheerful and willing mind, Phil. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iv. 
9 (where L T Tr WH read the sing.). (Ex. xvi. 7 sqq. ; 
Sap. i. 10 sq. ; Antonin. 9, 37.) * 

γογγυστής, -o0, 6, a murmurer, (Vulg., Augustine, mur- 
murator) one who discontentedly complains (against 
God; for μεμψίμοιροι is added): Jude 106. [ Prov. xxvi. 
21 Theod., 22 Symm.; xxvi. 20, 22 Graec. Ven.]* 

γόης, τητος, 6, (γοάω to bewail, howl) ; 1. a wailer, 
howler: Aeschyl. choéph. 823 [Hermann et al. yonrns]. 
2. a juggler, enchanter, (because incantations used to be 
uttered in a kind of howl). 3. a deceiver, impostor : 
2 Tim. iii. 13; (Hdt., Eur., Plat., and subseq. writ.).* 

Τολγοθά [Tr WH, or -θὰ R G L T (see Tdf. Proles. 
p. 102; Chandler § 88); also -όθ L'WH mre. in Jn. xix. 
17; acc. -av Tdf. in Mk. xv. 22 (WH -ay, see their App. 
p- 160), elsewhere indecl., W. 61 (60)], Golgotha, Chald. 
339253, Heb. n5351 (fr. 953 to roll), i. e. κρανίον, a skuil 
[Lat. calvaria], the name of a place outside of Jerusa- 
lem where Jesus was crucified; so called, apparently, 
because its form resembled a skull: Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. 
xv. 22; Jn. xix. 17. Cf. Tobler, Goleatha. St. Gall. 1851 ; 
Furrer in Schenkel ii. 506 sqq.; Keim, Jesus von Naz. 
iii. 404 sq. ; [Porter in Alex.'s Kitto s. v.; F. Howe, The 
true Site of Calvary, N. Y., 1871].* 

Τόμορρα [or Popoppa, cf. Chandler § 167], -as, 7, and -ov, 
τά, [cf. B. 18 (16); Tdf. Proleg. p. 116; WH. App. p. 
156], Gomorrah, (yYY2y, cf. ny Gaza), the name of a city 
in the eastern part of Judea, destroyed by the same earth- 
quake [ef. B. D. s. v. Sea, The Salt] with Sodom and its 
neighbor cities: Gen. xix. 24. "Their site is now occu- 


120 





γράμμα 


pied by the Asphaltic Lake or Dead Sea [cf. BB. DD. 
s. vv. Gomorrah and Sodom]: Mt. x. 15; Mk. vi. 11 R L 
in br.; Ro. ix. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 6; Jude 7.* 

yópos. -ov, 6, (γέμω); a. the lading or freight of a ship, 
cargo, merchandise conveyed in a ship: Acts xxi. 3, (Hat. 
1, 194; [Aeschyl.], Dem., al.; [in Sept. the /oad of a 
beast of burden, Ex. xxiii. 5; 2 K. v. 17]). b. any mer- 
chandise: Rev. xviii. 11 sq.* 

γονεύς, -éos, ὁ, (PENQ, γέγονα), [Hom. h. Cer., Hes., 
al.]; a begetter, parent; plur. οἱ γονεῖς the parents: Lk. ii. 
41,43 L txt. T Tr WH; [viii. 56]; xxi. 16; Jn. ix. 2, 3, 
20, 22, 23; 2 Co. xii. 14; Ro.i.30; Eph. vi.1; Col. iii. 
20; 2 Tim. iii. 2; ace. plur. yoveis: Mt. x. 21; [xix. 29 
Lehm. mrg.]; Lk. ii. 27; [xviii. 29]; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn. 
ix. 18]; on this form cf. W. § 9, 2; [B. 14 (13)].* 

γόνυ. yóvaros, τό, [fr. Hom. down], the knee: Heb. xii. 
12; τιθέναι τὰ yovara to bend the knees, kneel down, of 
persons supplicating: Lk. xxii. 41; Acts vii. 60; ix. 40; 
xx. 36; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so 
also προσπίπτειν τοῖς γόνασί twos, Lk. v. 8 (of a suppliant 
in Eur. Or. 1332) ; κάμπτειν τὰ γόνατα to bow the knee, of 
those worshipping God or Christ: τινί, Ro. xi. 4; πρύς 
twa, Eph. iii. 14 ; reflexively, γόνυ κάμπτει τινί, fo i.e. in 
honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, 
Phil. ii. 10 (Is. xlv. 23).* 

yovvmeréo, -ó; 1 aor. ptep. yovumernoas; (yovumerns, 
and this fr. γόνυ and ΠΕΤῺ i. q. πίπτω) ; to fall on the 
knées, the act of one imploring aid, and of one express- 
ing reverence and honor: τινί, Mt. xvii. 14. Rec.; τινά, 
ibid. G L'T Tr WH; Mk. i. 40 RG Tr txt. br. WH br. ; x. 
17; cf. W. 210 (197); [B. 147 sq. (129)]; ἔμπροσθέν 
twos, Mt. xxvii. 29. (Polyb., Heliod. ; eccl. writ.) * 

γράμμα, -ros, τό, (γράφω). that which has been written ; 
1. a letter i. e. the character: Lk. xxiii. 38 [R G L br. Tr 
mrg. br.]: Gal. vi. 11. 2. any writing, a document or 
record; a. a note of hand, bill, bond, account, written ac- 
knowledgment of debt, (as scriptio in Varr. sat. Men. 8, 1 
[ef. Edersheim ii. 268 sqq.]) : Lk. xvi. 6 sq. ([Joseph. 
antt. 18, 6,3], in L txt. T Tr WH plur. τὰ γράμματα; so 
of one doeument also in Antiph. p. 114, (30); Dem. p. 
1034, 16; Vule. cautio). b. a letter, an epistle: Acts 
xxviii. 21; (Hdt. 5, 14; Thue. 8, 50; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 
26, ete.). €. rà ἱερὰ γράμματα the sacred writings (of the 
O. T.; [so Joseph. antt. prooem. $ 3; 10, 10,4 fin.; c. Ap. 
1, 10; Philo, de vit. Moys. 3, 39; de praem. et poen. $ 14 ; 
leg. ad Gai. $ 29, ete.— but always rat. y.]): 2 Tim. iii. 15 
[here 'T WH om. L Tr br. ra]; γράμμα i. q. the written 
law of Moses, Ro. ii. 27; MoUcéos γράμματα, Jn. v. 47. 
Since the Jews so clave to the letter of the law that 
it not only became to them a mere letter but also a hin- 
drance to true religion, Paul calls it γράμμα in a disparag- 
ing sense, and contrasts it with τὸ πνεῦμα i. e. the divine 
Spirit, whether operative in tlie Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 29, 
or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro. 
vii. 6; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7R GT WH read the 
plur. written in letters, so L mrg. Tr mrg.]. 3. rà 
γράμματα, like the Lat. litterae, Eng. letters, i. q. learning : 
Acts xxvi. 24; εἰδέναι. μεμαθηκέναι yp. (cf. Germ. studirt 


γραμματεύς 


haben), of sacred learning, Jn. vii.15. (μανθάνειν, ἐπίστα- 
σθαι, etc., γράμματα are used by the Greeks of the rudi- 
ments of learning; cf. Passow i. p. 571; [L. and S. s. v. 
ΠῚ a-]b)y * 

γραμματεύς, -éos, (acc. plur. -eis, W. $9, 2; [D. 14 
(13)]), 6, (γράμμα). Sept. for 75D and Ww; 1. in 
prof. auth. and here and there in the O. T. [e. g. 2 S. 
ziii. 173xx.25;2 K-xix. 2; xxv. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv-) 2], 
a clerk, scribe, esp. a public scribe, secretary, recorder, 
whose office and influence differed in different states: 
Acts xix. 35, (Sir. x. 5); [ef. Lghtft. in The Contemp. 
Rev. for 1878, p. 294; Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, 
App. Inserr. fr. the Great Theatre, p. 49 n.]. 2. in 
the Bible, « man learned in the Mosaic law and in the 
sacred writings, an interpreter, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 34; 1 
Co. i. 20, (called also νομικός in Lk. x. 25, and νομοδιδά- 
σκαλος in Lk. v. 17; [Meyer (on Mt. xxii. 35), while deny- 
ing any essential diff. betw. γραμματεύς and νομικός 
(cf. Lk. xi. 52, 53 — yet see crit. txts.), regards the latter 
name as the more specific (a jurisconsult) and Classic, 
yp- as the more general (a learned man) and Hebraistic ; 
it is also the more common in the Apocr., where voy. 
occurs only 4 Mace. v. 3. As teachers they were called 
νομοδιδάσκαλοι. Cf. D. D. s. v. Lawyer, also s. v. Scribes 
I. 1 note]); Jer. viii. 8 (cf. ii. 8); Neh. viii. 1 sq. ; xii. 
26,36; 2 Esdr. vii. 6, 11, and esp. Sir. xxxviii. 24, 31 
sqq.; xxxix. 1-11. The γραμματεῖς explained the mean- 
ing of the sacred oracles, Mt. ii. 4 [yp. τοῦ λαοῦ, Josh. i. 10; 
1 Macc. v. 42; cf. Sir. xliv. 4]; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11; xii. 
35; examined into the more difficult and subtile ques- 
tions of the law, Mt. ix. 3; Mk. ii. 6 sq. ; xii. 28; added 
to the Mosaic law decisions of various kinds thought to 
elucidate its meaning and scope, and did this to the detri- 
ment of religion, Mt. v. 20; xv. 1 sqq. ; xxiii. 2 sqq. ; Mk. 
vii. 1sqq.; ef. Lk. xi. 46. Since the advice of men skilled 
in the law was needed in the examination of causes and 
the solution of difficult questions, they were enrolled in 
the Sanhedrin; and accordingly in the N. T. they are 
often mentioned in connection with the priests and elders 
of the people: Mt. xxi. 15; xxvi. 3 RG; Mk. xi. 18, 27; 
xiv. 1; xv. 1; Lk.xix.47; xx.1; xxii.2. Cf. Schürer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 25 ii.; K/ópper in Schenkel v. 247 
sqq.; [and thorough articles in BB.DD. s. v. Scribes; cf. 
W. Robertson Smith, The O. T. in the Jewish Ch., Lect. 
iii.]. S. univ. a religious teacher: γραμματεὺς μαθητευ- 
θεὶς eis τὴν Bact. τῶν ovp. a teacher so instructed that 
from his learning and ability to teach advantage may 
redound to the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xiii. 52 [but G T 
Tr WH read paé. τῇ βασιλείᾳ (1, ἐν τ. 8.); and many in- 
terpret made a disciple unto the k. of h. (which is person- 
ified); see μαθητεύω. fin. ]. 

γραπτός, -7, -óv, written: Ro. ii.15. [Gorg. apol. Palam. 
p- 190 sub fin. ; Sept.; al.]* 

γραφή, -ῆς, 7. (γράφω. cf. γλυφή and yAó$o); a. a 
writing, thing written, [fr. Soph. down] : πᾶσα γραφή every 
scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; plur. ypadai 
ἅγιαι. holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the O. T.), 
Ro. i. 2 ; προφητικαί, Ro. xvi. 26 ; ai γραφαὶ τῶν προφητῶν, 


121 








γράφω 


Mt. xxvi. ὅθ. b. ἡ γραφή, the Scripture κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν, the 
holy scripture (of the O. T.), — and used to denote either 
the book itself, or its contents [some would restrict the 
sing. γραφή always to a particular passage; see Bp. 
Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 22]: Jn. vii. 38; x. 35; Aets viii. 32; 
Ro. iv. 3; Gal. iii. 22; iv. 30; Jas. ii. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 6; 2 
Pet. i. 20; also in plur. αἱ γραφαί: Mt. xxi. 42; xxvi. 54; 
Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xxiv. 27; Jn. v. 39; Acts xvii. 2, 11; 
xviii. 24, 28; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq.; once ai γραφαί comprehends 
also the books of the N. T. already begun to be collected 
into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by meton. ἡ γραφή is used 
for God speaking init: Ro. ix. 17; Gal. iv. 30; ἡ γραφή 
is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in 
Gal.iii.8. εἰδέναι τὰς γραφάς, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii. 24; 
συνιέναι, Lk. xxiv. 45. c. a certain portion or section of 
holy Scripture: Mk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21; Jn. xix. 37; Acts 
i. 16. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Seripture.] 

γράφω ; [impf. ἔγραφον] ; fut. γράψω: 1 aor. ἔγραψα; 
pf. γέγραφα; Pass, [pres. γράφομαι]; pf. γέγραμμαι ; 
[plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγέγραπτο, Rev. xvii. 8 Lchm.]; 2 
aor. ἐγράφην ; (prop. to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave; 
cf. Germ. graben, eingraben ; γράψεν δὲ oi ὀστέον ἄχρις 
αἰχμή, Hom. Il. 17, 599; σήματα γράψας ἐν πίνακι, ib. 6, 
169; hence to draw letters), to write; 1. with reference 
to the form of the letters; to delineate (or form) letters 
on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material: τῷ δα- 
κτύλῳ ἔγραφεν eis τὴν γῆν made figures on the ground, Jn. 
viii. 6 Rec. ; οὕτω γράφω so am I accustomed to form my 
letters, 2 Thess. iii. 17; πηλίκοις γράμμασι ἔγραψα with 
how large (and so, ill-formed [?]) letters I have written, 
Gal. vi. 11; cf. Winer, Rückert, Hileenfeld ad loc. [for 
the views of those who regard éyp. as covering the close 
of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey.; cf. W. 278 
(261); B. 198 (171 sq.) ]. 2. with reference to the 
contentsofthewriting; a. fo express in written char- 
acters, foll. by the words expressed: ἔγραψε λέγων: Ἰωάν- 
ms ἐστὶ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Lk. i. 63; μὴ γράφε- ὁ βασιλεὺς 
τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων krÀ. Jn. xix. 21; γράψον: μακάριοι κτλ. 
Rey. xiv. 13. γράφω τι, Jn. xix. 22; pass. Rey. i. 3; τὲ 
ἐπί τι, Rev. ii. 17; xix. 165 τὶ ἐπί τινα, lii. 12; ἐπί twos, 
xiv. 1. b. to commit to writing (things not to be for- 
gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 (γράψον à εἶδες) ; 
X. 4; γράφειν eis βιβλίον, Rev. i. 11; ἐπὶ τὸ βιβλίον τῆς 
ζωῆς, Rev. xvii. 8; γεγραμμ. ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ [or τῇ 8i8Xo ], ἐν 
τοῖς βιβλίοις, Rev. xiii. 8; xx. 12, 15; xxi. 27; xxii. 18, 
19; rà ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ἐγράφη [év-(éy- Tr see N,v) yeyp.T Tr 
WII] ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. i.e. that ye have been enrolled 
with those for whom eternal blessedness has been pre- 
pared, Lk. x. 20; γράφειν τί τινι, to record something for 
some one’s use, Lk.i.3. c. ἐγράφη and γέγραπται (in the 
Synoptists and Paul), and γεγραμμένον ἐστί (in John), 
are used of those things which stand written in the sacred 
books (of the O. T.) ; absol. γέγραπται. foll. by the quo- 
tation fr. the sacred vol.: Mt. iv. 4, 6 sq. 10; xxi. 13; 
Mk. vii. 6; xi. 17; xiv. 27; Lk.iv.8; xix. 46; καθὼς 
γέγραπται, Acts xv. 15, very often in Paul, as Ro. i. 17; 
ii. 24; iii. 4 [see below]; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 9; 2 Co. viii. 15; 
ix. 9; καθάπερ yeyp. Ro. xi. 8 T Tr WH; [iii. 4 T Tr 


ραώδης 


WH]; γέγραπται γάρ, Mt. xxvi. 31; Lk. iv. 10; Acts 
xxiii. 5; Ro. xii. 19; xiv. 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 19; Gal. iii. 10, 13 
Rec. ; iv. 22, 27; ὁ λόγος ὁ γεγραμμένος, 1 Co. xv. 54; κατὰ 
TÓ γεγραμμένον, 2 Co.iv. 13; γεγραμμένον ἐστί, Jn. ii. 17; 
vi. 81; xii. 14; ἐγράφη δὲ πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν, 1 Co. x. 
11; ἐγράφη dv ἡμᾶς for our sake, Ro. iv. 24; 1 Co. ix. 10; 
with the name of the author of the written words or of 
the books in which they are found: γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ 
ψαλμῶν, Acts i. 20; ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν, Acts vii. 42; 
ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ [R WH δευτέρῳ] ψαλμῷ, Acts xiii. 33; ἐν 
Ἡσαΐᾳ, ΜΚ. 1. 2 [not Ree.], etc. τινά or τί to write of i. e. 
in writing to mention or refer to a person or a thing: ὃν 
ἔγραψε Μωῦσῆς whom Moses had in mind in writing of 
the Messiah, or whose likeness Moses delineated, Jn. i. 
45 (46); Μωῦσῆς γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου, 
Moses, writing the words ὅτι 6 ποιήσας αὐτά krÀ., points 
out the righteousness which is of the law, Ro. x. ὅ. γέ- 
γραπται, γράφειν, etc. περί τινος, concerning one: Mt. 
xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Jn. v. 46; Acts xiii. 29; ἐπὶ τὸν 
viàv τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, that it should find fulfilment in him, 
Mk. ix. 12 sq. [ef. ἵνα, IT. 2 b.]; ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ, on him i. e. of 
him (cf. W. 393 (368) [and ἐπί, B. 2 f. 8.]), Jn. xii. 16; 
τὰ γεγραμμένα τῷ υἱῷ τοῦ avOp. written for him, allotted 
to him in Scripture, i.e. to be accomplished in his ca- 
reer, Lk. xviii. 31; cf. W. § 31, 4; [yet cf. B. 178 (154)]; 
Μωῦσῆς ἔγραψεν ὑμῖν iva etc. Moses in the Scripture com- 
manded us that ete. [cf. B. 237 (204)], Mk. xii. 19; Lk. 
XX.28. d. γράφειν τινί to write to onei. e. by writing (in 
a written epistle) fo give information, directions, ete. to 
one: Ro. xv. 15; 2 Co. ii. 4, 9 [dat. implied]; vii. 12; 
Philem. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 15; 1 Jn. ii. 12 sqq.; dv ὀλίγων, 1 
Pet. v. 12; διὰ μέλανος καὶ καλάμου, 3 Jn. 13; foll. by the 
words written or to be written in the letter: Acts xv. 
23; Rey. ii. 1,8, 12, 18 ; iii. 1, 7, 14 ; γράφειν τινί τι, 1 Co. 
xiv. 37; 2 Co.i. 13; ii. 3[L'T Tr WH om. the dat.]; Gal. 
i. 20; 1 Tim. iii. 14; 1 Jn. i. £[R GL]; ii. 1 ; περί τινος, 
1Jn.4í. 26; Actsxxv. 20; 2(0.1x-15 1Dho3y:9:; v. a); 


12 





Jude 3; διὰ χειρός τινος, to send a letter by one, Acts xv. 
23 [see χείρ] ; γράφειν τινί, foll. by an inf., by letter to 
bid one do a thing, Acts xviii. 27; foll. by μή with inf. 
(to forbid, write one not to ete.), 1 Co. v. 9, 11. 3. 
to fill with writing, (Germ. beschreiben) : βιβλίον yeypap- 
μένον ἔσωθεν kai ὄπισθεν a volume written within and be- 
hind, on the back, hence on both sides, Rev. v. 1 (Ezek. 
ii. 10) ; ef. Düsterdieck, [ Alford, al.] ad loc. 4. lo 
draw up in writing, compose : βιβλίον, Mk. x. 4; Jn. xxi. 
25 [Tdf. om. the vs.; see WH. App. ad loc.]; τίτλον, Jn. 
xix. 19; ἐπιστολήν, Acts xxiii. 25; 2 Pet. iii. 1; ἐντολήν 
τινι ἴο write a commandment to one, Mk. x. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 7 
sq.; 2Jn.5. [Comp.: ἀπο-, y^, ἐπι-, kara-, mpo-ypaha. | 
γραώδης, -es, (fr. γραῦς an old woman, and eios), old- 


womanish, anile, [ A. V. old wives]: 1 Tim. iv. €. (Strabo | 


1 p. 32 [p. 44 ed. Sieben.]; Galen; al.)* 
γρηγορέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐγρηγόρησα; (fr. éypryyopa, to have 
been roused from sleep, to be awake, pf. of éyeipw; cf. 





Lob. ad Phryn. p. 118 sq.; Bttm. Aust. Spr. ii. p. 158; | 
[W. 26 (25); 92 (88)]); to watch; 1. prop.: Mt. 
xxiv. 43; xxvi. 38, 40 ; Mk. xiii. 34; xiv. 34, 37 ; Lk. xii. | 


D 


2 γυμνότης 


37,39 RGL Trtxt. WH txt. As fo sleep is often i. q. 
lo die, so once, 1 Th. v. 10, ypny. means to live, be alive 
on earth. 2. Metaph. to watch i.e. give strict attention 
to, be cautious, active :—to take heed lest through remiss- 
ness and indolence some destructive calamity suddenly 
overtake one, Mt. xxiv. 42; xxv. 13; Mk. xiii. 35, [37]; 
Rev. xvi. 15; or lest one be led to forsake Christ, Mt. 
xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; or lest one fall into sin, 1 Th. v. 
6; 1 Co. xvi. 13; 1 Pet. v. 8; Rev. iii. 2 86. ; or be cor- 
rupted by errors, Acts xx. 31; ἔν τινι, to be watchful in, 
employ the most punctilious care in a thing: Col. iv. 2. 
(Sept. ; [Bar. ii. 9; 1 Mace. xii. 27; Aristot. plant. 1, 2 
p. 816^, 29. 37]; Joseph. antt.11,3,4; Achill. Tat. ; al.) 
[Svw. see ἀγρυπνέω. Comp.: δια- γρηγορέω.] * 

γυμνάζω; [pf. pass. ptep. γεγυμνασμένος]; (γυμνός); 
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. prop. to ez- 
ercise naked (in the palestra). 2. to exercise vigor- 
ously, in any way, either the body or the mind: ἑαυτὸν 
πρὸς εὐσέβειαν, of one who strives earnestly to become 
godly, 1 Tim. iv. 7; γεγυμνασμένος exercised, Heb. v. 14; 
Xii. 11; καρδίαν γεγυμν. πλεονεξίας (Rec. πλεονεξίαις), a 
soul that covetousness or the love of gain has trained in 
its crafty ways, 2 Pet. ii. 14; cf. W. § 30, 4." 

γυμνασία, -as, 7, (γυμνάζω); a. prop. the exercise of 
the body in the palestra. b. any exercise whatever: 
σωματικὴ γυμνασία, the exercise of conscientiousness rel- 
ative to the body, such as is characteristic of ascetics 
and consists in abstinence from matrimony and certain 
kinds of food, 1 Tim. iv. 8. (4 Mace. xi. 19. In Grk. 
writ. fr. Plat. lege. i. p. 648 c. down.) * 

γυμνητεύω (γυμνιτεύω LT Tr WH; [cf. Tf. Proleg. 
p. 81; W. 92 (88)]); (ψυμνήτης) ; [A. V. literally to be 
naked i. e.] to be lightly or poorly clad: 1Co.iv.11. (So 
in Dio Chrys. 25, 3 and other later writ.; to be a ligAt- 
armed soldier, Plut. Aem. 16; Dio Cass. 47, 34, 2.) * 

γυμνός, -7, -óv, in Sept. for Dj! and ON}, naked, not 
covered ; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing : Mk. 
xiv. 52; Rev. ii. 17; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; τὸ γυμνόν, sub- 
stantively, the naked body: ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ, Mk. xiv. 51; cf. 
Fritzsche ad loc.; (rà γυμνά, Leian. nav. 33). b. ill- 
clad: Mt. xxv. 36, 38, 43 sq. ; Acts xix. 16 (with torn 
garments); Jas. ii. 15; (Job xxii. 6; xxiv. 10; xxvi. 6). 
c. clad in the undergarment only (the outer garment or 
cloak being laid aside): Jn. xxi. 7; (1 S.xix. 24; Is. xx. 
2; Hes. opp- 389; often in Attic; so nudus, Verg. Georg. 
1, 299). ἃ. of the soul, whose garment is the body, 
stript of the body, without a body: 2 Co. v. 3, (Plat. Crat. 
c. 20 p. 403 b. ἡ ψυχὴ γυμνὴ τοῦ σώματος). 2. metaph. 
a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare: Heb. iv. 13, (γυμνὸς ὁ ἅδης 
ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, Job xxvi. 6; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in 
Bleek on Heb. vol.ii.1p. 585). b. only, mere, bare, i. q. 
ψιλός (like Lat. nudus) : γυμνὸς κόκκος, mere grain, not 
the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5 
σπέρματα πεσόντα εἰς THY γῆν ξηρὰ καὶ γυμνὰ διαλύεται)" 

γυμνότης, -nros, 7, (γυμνός), nakedness: of the body, 
Rey. iii. 18 (see αἰσχύνη, 3); used of want of clothing, 
Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin. 
11, 27.)* 


qyuvatkapov 


γυναικάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. γυνή), a. little woman ; 
used contemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. 6 [A. V. silly women ; 
cf. Lat. muliercula]. (Diocles. com. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 
87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occasionally in Epictet.) On 
dimin. ending in ἄριον see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; Fritz- 
sche on Mk. p. 638; [cf. W. 24, 96 (91)].* 

γυναϊκεῖος, -eía, -eiov, of or belonging to a woman, femi- 
nine, female: 1 Pet.ii.7. (From Hom. down; Sept.) * 

γυνή, -αικός. ἡ; 1. univ. a woman of any age, wheth- 
er a virgin, or married, or a widow: Mt. ix. 20; xiii. 33; 
xxvii. 55; Lk. xiii. 11; Acts v. 14, etc. ; ἡ μεμνηστευμένη 
τινὶ γυνή, Lk. ii. 5 RG; ἡ ὕπανδρος γυνή, Ko. vii. 2 ; γυνὴ 
xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14) ; xvii. 9; femina vidua, 
Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq. ; 
Eph. v. 22, etc. ; γυνή τινος, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xix. 3,5; Acts 
v.1, 7; 1 Co. vii. 2; Eph. v. 28; Rev. ii. 20 [(G L WH 
mrg.|, ete. of a betrothed woman: Mt.i. 20, 24. ἡ γυνὴ 
τοῦ πατρός his step-mother : 1 Co. v. 1 (a8 NWS, Lev. xviii. 
8). ἔχειν γυναῖκα : Mt. xiv.4; xxii. 28; Mk. vi. 18; xii. 
23; Lk. xx. 33; see ἔχω, I. 2b. fin. γύναι, as a form of 
address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii. 
57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and 
favor, Lk. xiii. 12; Jn. iv. 21; or in respect, Jn. ii. 4; 
xix. 26, (as in Hom. Il. 3, 204; Od. 19, 221; Joseph. antt. 
1, 16, 3). 


125 


δαιμόνιον 


Téy, 6, (232), indecl. prop. name, Gog, king of the land 
of Magog [q. v. in BB.DD.], who it is said in Ezek. 
xxxviii. sq. will come from the remote north, with innu- 
merable hosts of his own nation as well as of allies, and 
will attack the people of Israel, reéstablished after the 
exile; but by divine interposition he will be utterly de- 

| stroyed. Hence in Rev. xx. 8 sq. 6 Tóy and 6 Mayóy 
| are used collectively to designate the nations that at the 
close of the millennial reign, instigated by Satan, will 
break forth from the four quarters of the earth against 
the Messiah’s kingdom, but will be destroyed by fire 
from heaven.* : 

γωνία, -ας, ἡ, [fr. Hdt. down], an angle, i.e. a. an 
external angle, corner (Germ. Ecke): τῶν πλατειῶν, Mt. 
vi. 5; κεφαλὴ γωνίας, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 
17; Actsiv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 7, (123. ws, Ps.exvii. (exviii.) 
22), the head of the corner, i. e. the corner-stone, (axpo- 
γωνιαῖος, q- V-) ; ai τέσσαρες γωνίαι τῆς γῆς, the four ex- 
treme limits of the earth, Rev. vii. 1; xx. 8. b. like 
Germ. Winkel, Lat. angulus, Eng. (internal) corner; 
i. q. a secret place: Acts xxvi. 26, (so Plat. Gorg. p. 485 d. 
βίον βιῶναι ἐν γωνίᾳ, Epict. diss. 2, 12, 17; [for other ex- 
amples see Wetstein on Actsl c.; Stallbaum on Plato 


| Ina i 


A 


Δαβίδ (the form in Rec. after the more recent codd. 
[ninuseules, cf. Tdf. on Mt. i. 1, and Treg. on Lk. iii. 
31]), Δαυΐδ (Grsb., Schott, Knapp, Theile, al.), and Aav- 


εἰδ (L T Tr WH [on the e see WH. App. p. 155 and | 


S. V. e 1]; cf. W. p. 44; Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 538; 
in Joseph. [antt. 6, 8,1 sqq. also Nicol. of Damasc. fr. 31 p. 
114] Δαυΐδης, -ov), 6, (1*3, and esp. after the exile 13, 
[i- e. beloved]), David, indecl. name of by far the most 
celebrated king of the Israelites: Mt. 1.1, 6, 17, ete. ἡ 
σκηνὴ A. Acts xv. 16; ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ A. Rev. iii. 7; ὁ θρόνος 
A. Lk. i. 32; ὁ vids A., a name of the Messiah, viz. the 
descendant of David and heir to his throne (see υἱός, 
1 b.); ἡ ῥίζα A. the offspring of David, Rev. v. 5; xxii. 
16; ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ A. Mk. xi. 10 (see βασιλεία, 3); ἐν 
Δαυΐδ, in the book of the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [8]. 
take it personally, cf. i. 1 sq.; yet see ἐν, I. 1 d.]. 
Saipovitopar; 1 aor. pass. ptep. δαιμονισθείς : (Saluwy) ; 
to be under the power of a demon: ἄλλος κατ᾽ ἄλλην δαιμο- 
νίζεται τύχην, Philem. in Stob. ecl. phys. 1 p. 196; of 
the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth. 
In the N. T. δαιμονιζόμενοι are persons afflicted with 
especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such 
as paralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilepsy, 


melancholy, insanity, ete.), whose bodies in the opinion 
of the Jews demons (see δαιμόνιον) had entered, and so 
held possession of them as not only to afflict them with 
ills, but also to dethrone the reason and take its place 
themselves; accordingly the possessed were wont to ex- 
press the mind and consciousness of the demons dwell- 
ing in them ; and their cure was thought to require the 
expulsion of the demon — [but on this subject see B.D. 
Am. ed. s. v. Demoniaes and reff. there; Weiss, Leben 
Jesu bk. iii. ch. 6]: Mt.iv.24; viii. 16, 28, 33; ix.32; 
xii. 22; xv. 22; Mk. i. 32; v. 15 sq.; Jn. x. 21; δαιμο- 
νισθείς, that had been possessed by a demon [demons], 
Mk.vy.18; Lk. viii. 36. They are said also to be ὀχλού- 
μενοι ὑπὸ or ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων, Lk. vi. 18 [T Tr 
WH évoxyA.]; Acts v. 16; καταδυναστευόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ δια- 
βόλου i. e. by his ministers, the demons, Acts x. 38.* 
δαιμόνιον. -ov, τό, (neut. of adj. δαιμόνιος, -a, -ov, divine, 
fr. δαίμων ; equiv. to τὸ θεῖον) ; 1. the divine Power, 
deity, divinity; so sometimes in prof. auth. as Joseph. 
b.j.1, 2,8; Ael. v. h. 12, 57; in plur. καινὰ δαιμόνια, 
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1 sq., and once in the N. T. ξένα δαιμό- 
ma, Acts xvii. 18. 2. a spirit, a being inferior to God, 
superior to men [wav τὸ δαιμόνιον μεταξύ ἐστι θεοῦ τε kai 





δαιμονιώδης 1 


θνητοῦ, Plat. symp. 23 p. 202 e. (where see Stallbaum)], 
in both a good sense and a bad; thus Jesus, after his 
resurrection, said to his disciples οὐκ εἰμὶ δαιμόνιον ἀσώ- 
parov, as Ignat. (ad Smyrn. 3, 2) records it; πνεῦμα 
δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (gen. of apposition), Lk. iv. 33; 
(πονηρόν. Tob. iii. 8, 17; δαιμόνιον ἢ πνεῦμα πονηρόν, ibid. 
vi. 8). But elsewhere in the Scriptures used, without 
an adjunet, of evil spirits or the messengers and ministers 
of the devil [W. 23 (22)]: Lk. iv. 35; ix. 1, 42; x. 17; 
Jn. x. 21; Jas. ii. 19; (Ps. xe. (xci.) 6; Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 
14; Tob. vi. 18; viii. 3; Bar. iv. 35) ; πνεύματα δαιμονίων 
(Ree. δαιμόνων), i. ὁ. of that rank of spirits that are 
demons (gen. of appos.), Rev. xvi. 14; ἄρχων τῶν δαιμο- 
viov, the prince of the demons, or the devil: Mt. ix. 34; 
xii. 24; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15; they are said εἰσέρχεσθαι 
ets Twa, to enter into (the body of) one to vex him with 
diseases (see δαιμονίζομαι) : Lk. viii. 30, 32 sq.; ἐκβλη- 
θῆναι and ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος or ἀπό Tivos, when they are 
forced to come out of one to restore him to health: Mt. 
ix. 88; xvii. 18; Mk. vii. 29, 30; Lk. iv. 35, 41; viii. 2, 
33,35. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια, is used of those who compel 
demons to come out: Mt. vii. 22; xii. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 34, 
39; Lk.ix.49, ete. ἔχειν δαιμόνιον, to have a demon, be 
possessed by a demon, is said of those who either suffer 
from some exceptionally severe disease, Lk. iv. 33; viii. 
27 (éx. δαιμόνια) ; or act and speak as though they were 
mad, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. vii-20; viii. 48 sq. 52; 
x. 20. According to a Jewish opinion which passed 
over to the Christians, the demons are the gods of the 
Gentiles and the authors of idolatry; hence δαιμόνια 
stands for op ow Ps. xev. (xevi.) 5, and pw Deut. 
xxxii. 17; Ps. cv. (evi.) 37, cf. Bar. iv. 7: προσκυνεῖν τὰ 
δαιμόνια καὶ τὰ εἴδωλα, Rev. ix. 20. The apostle Paul, 
though teaching that the gods of the Gentiles are a fiction 
(1 Co. viii. 4; x. 19), thinks that the conception of them 
has been put into the minds of men by demons, who 
appropriate to their own use and honor the sacrifices 
offered tu idols. Hence what the Gentiles θύουσι, he 
says δαιμονίοις θύουσιν καὶ οὐ θεῷ, 1 Co. x. 20 (fr. the 
Sept. of Deut. xxxii. 17, cf. Dar. iv. 7), and those who 
frequent the sacrificial feasts of the Gentiles come into 
fellowship with demons, 1 Co. x. 20 sq.; [ef. Baudissin, 
Stud. zur semit. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (St. ii. 4) p. 110 
sqq.] Pernicious errors are disseminated by demons 
even among Christians, seducing them from the truth, 
1'Tim.iv.1. Josephus also makes mention of δαιμόνια 
taking possession of men, antt. 6, 11, 2 sq.; 6, 8, 2; 8, 
2, 5; but he sees in them, not as the N. T. writers do, 
bad angels, but the spirits of wicked men deceased, b. j. 
7, 6, 3. 

δαιμονιώδης, -es, (δαιμόνιον, q. v., and εἶδος), resembling 
or proceeding from an evil spirit, demon-like: Jas. iii. 15. 
[Schol. Arstph. ran. 295; Ps. xc. 6 Symm.]* 

δαίμων, -ovos, 6, 7; 1. in Grk. auth. a god, a god- 
dess; an inferior deity, whether good or bad; hence 
ἀγαθοδαίμονες and kako8a(poves are distinguished [cf. W. 
23 (22)]. 2. In the N. T. an evil spirit (see δαιμόνιον, 
2): Mt. viii. 31; Mk. v. 12 [RL]; Lk. viii. 29 [RGL 


24 





Δαμασκηνός 


mrg.]; Rev. xvi. 14 (Rec.); xviii. 2 (where L T Tr WII 
δαιμονίων). [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Demon; cf. δαι- 
μονίζομαι.} * : 

δάκνω; to bite; a. prop. withthe teeth. Ὁ, metaph. 
to wound the soul, cut, lacerate, rend with reproaches : 
Gal v. 15. So even in Hom. Il. 5, 493 μῦθος δάκε 
φρένας, Menand. ap. Athen. 12, 77 p. 552 e., and times 
without number in other auth.* 

δάκρυ, -vos, rd, and τὸ δάκρυον, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], 
a tear: Mk. ix. 24 RG; Actsxx. 19,31; 2 Co. ii. 4; 2 
Tim.i.4; Heb. v. 7; xii. 17. The (nom.) form τὸ δά- 
κρυον in Rev. vii. 17; xxi.4, (Is. xxv. 8). dat. plur. 
δάκρυσι in Lk. vii. 38, 44, (Ps. exxv. (exxvi.) 5; Lam. 
ii. 11). 

Saxptw: 1 aor. ἐδάκρυσα: fo weep, shed tears: Jn. xi. 
35. [From Hom. down. Syn. see κλαίω, fin.] * 

δακτύλιος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. δάκτυλος, because decorating the 
fingers), a ring: Lk. xv. 22. (From IIdt. down.) * 

δάκτυλος, -ov, 6, [fr. Batrach. 45 and Hdt. down], a 
Jinger: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xi. 46; xvi 24; Mk. vii. 33; 
Jn. viii. 6 Rec.; xx. 25,27; ἐν δακτύλῳ θεοῦ, by the power 
of God, divine eflieieney by which something is made 
visible to men, Lk. xi. 20 (Mt. xii. 28 ἐν πνεύματι θεοῦ) ; 
Ex. viii. 19, [cf. xxxi. 18; Ps. viii. 4].* 

Δαλμανουθά [on the accent cf. 7f. Proleg. p. 103], ἡ, 
Dalmanutha, the name of a little town or village not far 
from Magdala [better Magadan (q. v.) ], or lying within 
its territory: Mk. viii. 10 (cf. Mt. xv. 39), see Fritzsche 
ad loc. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]. Derivation of the name 
uncertain; cf. Keim ii. 528 [(Eng. trans. iv. 238), who 
associates it with Zalmonah, Num. xxxiii. 41 sq., but 
mentions other opinions. Furrer in the Zeitschr. des 
Deutsch. Palaestin.-Vereins for 1879, p. 58 sqq. identi- 
fies it with Minyeh (abbrev. Manutha, Lat. mensa) J.* 

Δαλματία [ Lchm. Δελμ. (“ prob. Alexandrian but pos- 
sibly genuine,” Hort) ], -as, ἡ, Dalmatia, a part of Illyri- 
cum on the Adriatic Sea; on the east adjoining Pannonia 
and upper Moesia, on the north separated from Liburnia 
by the river Titius, and extending southwards as far as 
to the river Drinus and the city Lissus [ef. Dict. of Geog. 
s. v.5 Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, ii. 126 sq.; Lewin, St. 
Paul, ii. 357]: 2 Tim. iv. 10." 

δαμάζω: 1 aor. ἐδάμασα ; Pass., [pres. δαμάζομαι} ; pf. 
δεδάμασμαι; [akin to Lat. domo, dominus, Goth. galam- 
jan; Eng. tame; cf. Curtius $ 260]; com. fr. Hom. 
down; to tame: Mk. v. 4; Jas. iii. 7; to restrain, curb, 
τὴν γλῶσσαν. Jas. iii. 8.* 

δάμαλις, -ews, 7, (fem. of 6 δαμάλης a young bullock 
or steer), a young cow, heifer, (Aeschyl., Dion. Hal, 
Leian., al.) ; used in Num. xix. 2, 6, 9 sq. for 775 and 
in Heb. ix. 13 of the red heifer with whose ashes, by the 
Mosaic law, those were to be sprinkled who had become 
defiled. (Besides in Sept. chiefly for 13235.) * 

Δάμαρις, -ιδος, ἡ, Damaris, a woman of Athens con- 
verted by Paul: Acts xvii. 34; [cf. Mey. ad loc.; B. D. 
8: ΨΑΙΣ 

Δαμασκηνός, -7, -όν, of Damascus, Damascene; sub- 
stantively of Δαμασκηνοί : 2 Co. xi. 32." 


Aapackos 


Aapacxés, -οὔ, 7, Damascus, (Hebr. pv), a very an- 
cient (Gen. xiv. 15), celebrated, flourishing city of Syria, 
lying in a most lovely and fertile plain at the eastern 
base of Antilibanus. It had a great number of Jews 


among its inhabitants (Joseph. b. j. 2, 20, 2 cf. 7, 8, 7). | 


Still one of the most opulent cities of western Asia, 
having about 109,000 inhabitants [“in 1859 about 
150,000; of these 6,000 were Jews, and 15,000 Chris- 
tians" (Porter)]: Acts ix. 2sqq.; xxii. 5 sqq. ; 2 Co. xi. 
32; Gali.17. [Cf. BB.DD. s. v., esp. Alex.’s Kitto.] * 

Save(to (T WH δανίζω [see I, (]) ; 1 aor. ἐδάνεισα (Lk. 
vi. 34 L txt. T WH Tr mrg.); 1 aor. mid. ἐδανεισάμην ; 
(δάνειον, q. v.) ; [fr. Arstph. down]; to lend money: Lk. 
vi. 34 sq. ; Mid. to have money lent to one's self, to take a 
loan, borrow [cf. W. $38,3; Riddell, Platon. idioms, $ 87]: 
Mt. v. 42. (Deut. xv. 6,8; Prov. xix. 17; in Grk. auth. 
fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) * 

[Syn.: δανείζω, κίχρημι: δ. to lend on interest, as a 
business transaction ; «(xp. to lend, grant the use of, asa 
friendly act.] 

δάνειον [WH damor, see I, «], -etov, τό, (Savos a gift), 
a loan: Mt. xviii. 27. (Deut. xv. 8; xxiv. 13 (11); 
Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2, 3; Diod. 1, 79; Plut.; al)* 

δανειστής (T WII δανιστής [see L« ]), -o?, 6, (δανείζω. 
q. v.), a money-lender, creditor: Lk. vii. 41. (2 K. iv. 1; 
Ps. eviii. (cix.) 11; Prov. xxix. 13; Sir. xxix. 28. Dem. 
p. 885, 18; Plut. Sol. 13, 5; de vitand. aere, etc. 7, 8; 
[al.].)* 

Savitw, see δανείζω. 

Δανιήλ, 6, Ow and OR] i.e. judge of God [or God 
is my judge ]), Daniel, prop. name of a Jewish prophet, 
conspieuous for his wisdom, to whom are ascribed the 
well-known prophecies composed between B. c. 167-164; 
[but cf. BB.DD.]: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec.* 

[9&vvov, see δάνειον. ] 

ϑανιστής, see δανειστής. 

δαπανάω, -à : fut. δαπανήσω; 1 aor. ἐδαπάνησα: (δαπάνη) ; 
fr. [Hdt. and] Thue. down; to incur expense, expend, 
spend: τί, Mk. v. 26 (1 Mace. xiv. 32); ἐπί with dat. of 
pers., for one, in his favor, Acts xxi. 24; ὑπέρ twos, 2 Co. 
xii. 15. in a bad sense, to waste, squander, consume : 
πάντα, Lk. xv. 14; ἵνα ἐν ταῖς ἡδοναῖς ὑμῶν δαπανήσητε. 
that ye may consume, waste what ye receive, in luxuri- 
ous indulgence — [év marking the realm in rather than 
the object on]: Jas. iv. 3. [Cowr.: ἐκ-, προσ- δαπανάω. * 

δαπάνη, -7s, ἡ, (fr. δάπτω to tear, consume, [akin are 
δεῖπνον, Lat. daps ; Curtius $ 261 ]), expense, cost: Lk. xiv. 
98. (2 Esdr. vi. 4; 1 Macc. iii. 30, ete. Among Grk. 
writ. Hes. opp. 721, Pind., Eur., Thuc., et sqq.) * 

Δανείδ and Δαυΐδ, see Δαβίδ. 

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 
2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, 
but, moreover, (W. § 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more 
freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other 
books, very rare inthe Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. 
[On its general neglect of elision (when the next word 
begins with a vowel) cf. Τὰ Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. 
p.146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10 sq.] It is used 1. 


125 








δέ 


univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is 
added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν 
yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν δὲ ὁ 
ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; 
it opposes persons to persons or things previously men- 
tioned or thought of,— either with strong emphasis: 
ἐγὼ dé, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39, 44; ἡμεῖς δέ, 1 Co. i. 23; 
2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6 ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ 
υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. viii. 12; at ἀλώπεκες... . 6 δὲ υἱὸς 
τοῦ avp. Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; πᾶς ὁ Aaós... of δὲ 
Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. vii. 29 sq.; ὁ δὲ πνευματικός, 1 Co. ii. 15, 
and often; — or with a slight discrimination, ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ: 
Mk. i. 455 v. 343 vi. 37; vil. 6; Mt. xiii. 29, 37,52; xv. 
23 sqq.; Lk. iv. 40,43; v. 16; vi. 8; viii. 10, 54; xv. 29; 
οἱ δέ, Mt. ii. 5; Mk. iii. 4 ; viii. 28, etc., ete.; with the addi- 
tion also of a prop. name, as 6 δὲ “Ijcods: Mt. viii. 22 
[ Tdf. om. *I.]; ix. 12 [R G Trbr.], 22 [Tdf. om. I.]; xiii. 
57; Mk.i. 41 [R G L mrg. Tr mrg.]; ἀποκρ. δὲ (ὁ) Σίμων, 
Lk. vii. 43 R GL br. ; ἡ δὲ Μαρία, Lk. ii. 19, etc. 2. 
pev... δέ, see μέν. 3. after negative sentences, but, 
but rather (Germ. wohl aber): Mt. vi. 19 sq. (μὴ θησαυ- 
pitere ... θησαυρίζετε δέ); x. 5 sq.; Acts xii. 9, 14; Ro. 
iii. 4; iv. δ; 1 Co. i. 105 vii. 37; 1 Th. v. 21 [not Rec.]; 
Eph. iv. 14 sq.; Heb. ii. 5 sq.; iv. 13, 15; ix. 12; x. 26 sq.; 
xii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 12 (ody ἑαυτοῖς ὑμῖν [ Rec. ἡμ.] δέ) ; Jas. 
313. 8q. 3, te) Ete 4. it is joined to terms which are re- 
peated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions 
as tend to explain and establish them more exactly; in 
this use of the particle we may supply a suppressed neg- 
ative clause [and give its force in Eng. by inserting 7 
say, and that, so then, ete.]: Ro. iii. 21 sq. (not that com- 
mon δικαιοσύνη which the Jews boast of and strive after, 
but δικαιοσ. διὰ πίστεως) ; Ro. ix. 30; 1 Co. ii. 6 (σοφίαν 
δὲ οὐ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου) ; Gal. ii. 2 (I went up, not of my 
own accord, but etc.); Phil. ii. 8; cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 
2 p. 361 sq.; L. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. ii. col. 928; [cf. 
W. 443 (412)]. 5. it serves to mark a transition to 
something new (δέ metabatic); by this use of the parti- 
cle, thenew addition is distinguished from and, as it were, 
opposed to what goes before: Mt. i. 18; ii. 19; x. 21; 
Lk. xii 13; xiii. 1; Jn. vii. 14, 37; Actsvi. 1; Ro. viii. 
28; 1 Co. vii. 1; viii. 1, etc., etc. ; so also in the phrase 
ἐγένετο δέ, see γίνομαι. 2 c. 6. it introduces explana- 
tions and separates them from the things to be explained : 
Jn. iii. 19; vi. 39; 1 Co. i. 12; vii. 6, 29; Eph. v. 32, etc. ; — 
esp. remarks and explanations intercalated into the dis- 
course, or added, as it were, by way of appendix: Mk. v. 
13 (ἦσαν δέ ete. R L br.) ; xv. 25; xvi. S[R G]; Jn. vi. 10; 
ix. 14; xii. 3; τοῦτο δὲ γέγονε. Mt.i.22; xxi. 4. Owing 
to this use, the particle not infrequently came to be con- 
founded in the Mss. (of prof. writ. also) with yap; cf. 
Winer on Gal. i. 11; Fritzsche on Mk. xiv. 2; also his 
Com. on Rom. vol. i. pp. 234, 265; ii. p. 476; iii. p. 196 ; 
[W. 452 (421); B. 363 (212)]. 7. after a parenthe- 
sis or an explanation which had led away from the sub- 
ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse 
again [cf. W. 443 (412)]: Mt. iii.4; Lk. iv. 1; Ro. v. 8; 
2 Co. ii. 12; v. 8; x. 2; Eph. ii. 4; cf. K/otz ad Devar. 


δέησις il 


ii. 2 p. 376 sq. 8. it introduces the apodosis and, 
as it were, opposes it to the protasis: Acts xi. 17 RG (1 
Maec. xiv. 29; 2 Mace. i. 34) ; after a participial con- 
struction which has the force of a protasis : Col. i. 22 (21); 
cf. Matthiae ii. 1470; Kiihner ii. 818; [Jelf $770]; Klotz 
u. s. p. 370 sq.; [B. 364 (312) ]. 9. cal... δὲ, but... 
also, yea and, moreover also : Mt. x. 185 xvi. 18; Lk. ii. 35 
[WH txt. om. L Tr br. δέ]; Jn. vi.51; xv. 27; Acts iii. 24; 
xxii. 99; Ro. xi. 23; 2 Tim. iii. 12; 1Jn.i.3; 2 Pet. 1. 
5; cf. Klotz u. s. p. 645 sq.; B. 364 (312) ; [also W. 443 
(413); Ellic. on 1 Tim. iii. 10; Mey.on Jn. vi. 51]. καὶ 
ἐὰν δέ yea even if: Jn. viii. 16. 10. δέ never stands 
as the first word in the sentence, but generally second ; 
and when the words to which it is added cannot be sep- 
arated, it stands third (as in Mt. x. 11; xviii. 25; Mk. iv. 
34; Lk. x. 31; Acts xvii. 6 ; xxviii. 6; Gal. iii. 22; 2 Tim. 
iii. 8, etc.; in ob μόνον dé, Ro. v. 3, 11, ete.), or even in 
the fourth place, Mt. x. 18; Jn. vi. 51; viii. 16 sq.; 1 Jn. 
i 3; 1 Co. iv. 18; [Lk. xxii. 69 L T Tr WH]. 

δέησις, -εως, 7, (δέομαι); 1. need, indigence, (Ps. xxi. 
(xxii.) 25; Aeschin. dial. 2, 39 sq.; [Plato, Eryx. 405 e. 
bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385*, 27]). 2. a seek- 
ing, asking, entreating, entreaty, (fr. Plat. down) ; in the 
N. T. requests addressed by men to God (Germ. Bitige- 
bet, supplication) ; univ.: Jas. v. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as 
often in the Sept., joined with προσευχή (i. e. any pious 
address to God [see below]) : Acts i. 14 Rec.; Eph. vi. 
18; Phil. iv. 6; plur. 2 Tim. i. 3; joined with προσευχαί, 
1 Tim. v. 5; with νηστεῖαι, Lk. ii. 37; ποιεῖσθαι δέησιν, 
Phil. i. 4; π. δεήσεις, Lk. v. 33; 1 Tim. 11. 1. contextu- 
ally, of prayers imploring God's aid in some particular 
matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i. 19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppli- 
cation for others: [2 Co. i. 11]; περί τινος, Eph. vi. 18; 
ὑπέρ τινος, 2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; with the addition 
πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Ro. x. 1.* 

[ϑυν. δέησις, προσευχή, ἔντευξις: mp. as Prof. 
Grimm remarks, is unrestricted as respects its contents, 
while δ. is petitionary; moreover 7p. is a word of sacred char- 
acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas à. may also be 
used of a request addressed to man. In Byzantine Grk. it is 
used of a written supplication (like our petition) ; cf. Soph. 
Lex.s.v. See more at length Trench § li. ; also Bp. Lghtft. 
on Phil. iv. 6; Ellic. on Eph. vi. 18; cf. Schmidt ch. vii. In 
1 Tim. ii. 1 to these two words is added ἔντευξις, whieh ex- 
presses confiding access to God; thus, in combination, δέησις 
gives prominence to the expression of personal need, προσ- 
εὐχή to the element of devotion, ἔντευξις to that of child- 
like confidence, by representing prayer as the heart’s con- 
verse with God. See Huther’s extended note ad loc. ; Ellic. 
ad loc.; Trench u. s.] 


Set; subjune. pres. δέῃ ; impf. ede; an impers. verb 
[cf. B. § 132, 32; cf. § 131, 3; fr. Hom. down]; (δέω, 
sc. τινός, to have need of, be in want of; cf. Germ. es 
bedarf), it is necessary, there is need of, it behooves, is 
right and proper: foll. either by the inf. alone (cf. our 
one ought), or by the acc. with inf. [cf. B. 147 (129)], 
it denotes any sort of necessity; as a. necessity 
lying in the nature of the case: Jn. iii. 30; 2 Tim. ii. 
6. b. necessity brought on by circumstances or by 


6 δεικνύω 


the conduct of others toward us: Mt. xxvi. 35 (κἂν δέῃ 
pe ἀποθανεῖν), cf. Mk. xiv. 31; Jn. iv. 4; Acts xxvii. 21; 
2 Co. xi. 30; [xii. 1 LT Tr WHtxt.]; or imposed by a 
condition of mind: Lk. ii. 49; xix. 5. C. necessity in 
referenee to what is required to attain some end : Lk. 
xii. 12; Jn. iii. 7; Actsix. 6; xvi. 30; 1 Co. xi. 19; Heb. 
ix. 26 (on this cf. W. 283 (266); [also B. 216 (187); 
225 (195)]); Heb. xi. 6. d. a necessity of law and 
command, of duty, equity: Mt. xviii. 33; xxiii. 23; Lk. 
x1. 49^ ΧΗ]. ΠῚ». xv. 52.» xvill. 15 xxi. 7; 91, ἅν: 20) 
Acts v. 29; xv. 5; Ro. i. 27 (ἀντιμισθίαν, ἣν ἔδει, sc. ἀπο- 
λαμβάνεσθαι, the recompense due by the law of God) ; 
Ro. viii. 26; xii. 3; 1 Co. viii. 2, ete. or of oflice: Lk. 
iv.43; xiii. 88; Jn. ix.4; x. 16; Eph. vi. 20; Col. iv. 4; 
2 Tim. ii. 24. e. necessity established by the counsel 
and decree of God, esp. by that purpose of his which 
relates to the salvation of men by the intervention of 
Christ and which is disclosed in the O. T. prophecies: 
Mt. xvii. 10; xxiv. 6; Mk.ix.11; Actsiv. 12; 1 Co. xv. 
53; in this use, esp. of what Christ was destined finally 
to undergo, his sufferings, death, resurrection, ascen- 
sion: Lk. xxiv. 46 [RG Lbr.]; Mt. xxvi. 54; Jn. iii. 14; 
Acts iii. 21, ete. (of the necessity of fate in Hat. 5, 33; 
with the addition κατὰ τὸ θεοπρύπιον, 8, 535 Thue. 5, 26.) 

[Syn.: δεῖ, χρή: δεῖ seems to be more suggestive of 
moral obligation, denoting esp. that constraint which arises 
from divine appointment; whereas χρή signifies rather the 
necessity resulting from time and circumstance. Schmidt 
ch. 150.] 


δεῖγμα, -ros, τό, (δείκνυμι) ; a. prop. thing shown. 
b. a specimen of any thing, example, pattern: πυρὸς 
αἰωνίου, set forth as a warning, Jude 7. (From Xen., 
Plat., Isocr. down.) * 

δειγματίζω : 1 aor. ἐδειγμάτισα ; (δεῖγμα) ; to make an 
example of, to show as an example; τινά, to expose one 
to disgrace (cf. παραδειγματίζω, θεατρίζω) : Mt.i.19 LT 
Tr WH; Col. ii.15. A word unknown to Grk. writ. 
(Cf. Act. Petr. et Paul. $ 33; W. 25 (24); 91 (87); 
δειγματισμός occurs on the Rosetta stone, line 30; Boeckh, 
Inserr. 4697. Comp. : παρα-δειγματίζω.} * 

δεικνύω (δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δεικνύεις, Jn. ii. 18; τοῦ 
δεικνύοντος, Rev. xxii. 8 [not Tdf.]) and δείκνυμι (1 Co. 
xii. 31; Mt.iv.8; Jn. v. 20; cf. B. 45 (39)); fut. δείξω; 
1 aor. ἔδειξα ; 1 aor. pass. ptep. δειχθείς (Heb. viii. 5) ; 
Sept. mostly for ANIA; 10 show, exhibit; 1. prop. to 
show i. e. expose to the eyes: τινί τι, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 5; 
xx. 24 (for Ree. ἐπιδείξ.): xxii. 12; xxiv. 40 [RGL, 
but Tom. Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Mk. xiv. 15; Jn. 
xx. 20; Acts vii. 3; ὁδόν τινι, metaph., in which one 
ought to go, i. e. to teach one what he ought to do, 1 Co. 
xii. 31; κατὰ τὸν τύπον τὸν δειχθέντα σοι. Heb. viii. 5; 
ἑαυτὸν δεικνύναι τινί to expose one’s self to the view of 
one, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν 
πατέρα render the Father visible to us, Jn. xiv. 8 sq.; of 
things presented to one in a vision: τινί τι, Rev. Xvii. 1; 
xxi. 9 sq.; xxii. 1, 8; δεῖξαί τινι, à δεῖ γενέσθαι, Rev. i. 1; 
iv. 1; xxii 6. to show, i. q. to bring to pass, produce 
what can be seen (Germ. sehen lassen) ; of miracles per- 


δειλία 


formed in presence of others to be seen by them: σημεῖον, 
Jn. ii. 18, (Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 66; σῆμα, Hom. Od. 3, 
174; Il. 13, 244) ; ἔργα ἔκ τινος, works done by the aid 
of one, Jn. x. 32; τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, spoken 
of God, as the author of Christ's visible return, 1 Tim. 
vi. 15; ἔργα δεικνύειν is used differently in Jn. v. 20, to 
show works to one for him to do. 2. metaph. a. 
with aec. of the thing, to give the evidence or proof of a 
thing: πίστιν, Jas. ii. 18; τὶ ἔκ Twos, as THY πίστιν ἐκ τῶν 
ἔργων, ibid.; τὰ ἔργα ἐκ τῆς καλῆς ἀναστροφῆς, Jas. iii. 13. 
b. to show by words, to teach: foll. by ὅτι. Mt. xvi. 21 
(διδάσκειν in Mk. viii. 31 for δεικνύειν) ; foll. by an inf. 
Acts x. 28. [CowP.: ἀνα-, ἀπο-, év-, ἐπι-, ὑπο-δείκνυμι.) * 

δειλία, -as, 7, (δειλός), timidity, fearfulness, cowardice : 
2 Tim.i. 7. (Soph., [Hdt.], Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc., and 
subseq. writ.) * 

[Syn. δειλία, φόβος,εὐλάβεια: “of these three words 
the first is used always in a bad sense; the second is a mid- 
dle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil, 
and lying pretty evenly between the two; the third is quite 
predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not 
altogether escaped being employed in an eviL" Trench ὃ x. 
q. v.; cf. δέος.] 


δειλιάω, -@; (δειλία, q. v.) ; to be timid, fearful: Jn. xiv. 
27. (Deut. xxxi. 6; i. 21 and often in Sept. ; Sir. xxii. 
16; xxxi (xxxiv.) 16; 4 Macc. xiv. 4. Diod. 20, 78. 
The Greeks prefer the comp. ἀποδειλιῶ.) * 

δειλός, -ἡ, -óv, (δείδω to fear), timid, fearful: Mt. viii. 
26; Mk.iv. 40; in Rev. xxi. 8 of Christians who through 
cowardice give way under persecutions and apostatize. 
(From Hom. down.) * 

δεῖνα, 6, 7, τό ; gen. δεῖνος ; dat. δεῖνι ; ace. τὸν, τὴν, TO 
δεῖνα (cf. Matthiae § 151), such a one, a certain one, i. 6. 
one whose name I cannot call on the instant, or whose 
name it is of no importance to mention; once in the 
Scriptures, viz. Mt. xxvi. 18. (Arstph., Dem., al.) * 

δεινῶς, adv., (δεινός), terribly, grievously: Mt. viii. 6 ; 
Lk.xi.53. [From Hdt. down.] ἢ 

Sevrvéo, -@: [fut. δειπνήσω]; 1 aor. ἐδείπνησα; (δεῖ- 
mvov); to sup: Lk. xvii. 8; xxii. 20 [WH reject the 
whole pass. see their App.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; in an alle- 
gory, δειπνήσω per αὐτοῦ, I will make him to share in 
my most intimate and blissful intercourse: Rev. iii. 20.* 

δεῖπνον, -ov, τό, and ace. to a rare and late form ὁ 
δεῖπνος in Lk. xiv. 16 Lehm. [ef. Tdf. on Rev. xix. 9, 17, 
also W. 65 (64); on deriv. cf. δαπάνη], (in Hom. the 
morning meal or breakfast, cf. Passow [more fully L. and 
S.] s. v.; this the Greeks afterwards call τὸ ἄριστον q. v. 
[and reff. there], designating as τὸ δεῖπνον the evening 
meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu- 
ally held at evening: Lk. xiv. 17, 24; Jn. xiii. 2,4; xxi. 
20; plur.: Mt. xxiii. 65; Mk. xii. 39; Lk. (xi. 43 Lehm. 
in br.); xx. 46; used of the Messiah's feast, symbolizing 
salvation in the kingdom of heaven: Rev. xix. 9, 17; 
kuptaküv δεῖπνον (see κυριακός, 1), 1 Co. xi. 20; ποιεῖν 
δεῖπνον, Lk. xiv. 12 (ἄριστον ἢ δεῖπνον) ; 16 (Dan. v. 1 
[Theodot.]); with the addition τινί, Mk. vi. 21; Jn. 
xii. 2. 2. univ. food taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.* 


127 








ΖΔεκάπολις 


δεισιδαιμονία, -as, ἡ, (δεισιδαίμων). fear of the gods; 1. 
in a good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion: 
Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph. antt. 10, 3, 2; καὶ θεοφιλὴς 
Bios, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. q. ἡ δειλία πρὸς τὸ δαιμόνιον 
(Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [cf. Jebb p. 263 sq.]) ; su- 
perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24, 5]; Plut. [Sol. 12, 4]; Alex. 75, 
1; de adulat. et am. 25, and in his Essay περὶ τῆς δεισι- 
δαιμονίας ; Antonin. 6, 30 θεοσεβὴς χωρὶς δεισιδαιμηνίας. 
3. religion, in an objective sense; in which sense Jose- 
phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews 
μὴ Tas τῶν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν δεισιδαιμονίας ἐξουδενίζειν. | Festus 
in the presence of Agrippa the Jewish king employs 
the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19, 
of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave his own judg- 
ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz, 
Profangrücitüt u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59; [K. F. Her- 
mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. Alterthiimer, $8 note 6 ; 
Trench § xlviii.; (cf. Kenrick, Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108 
sqq.; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 80 sq.) ].* 

δεισι-δαίμων, -ov, ven. -ovos, (δείδω to fear, and δαίμων 
deity), fearing the deity or deities, like the Lat. religiosus; 
used either 1. ina good sense, reverencing god or the 
gods, pious, religious: Xen. Cyr. 3,3, 58; Ages. 11, 8; 
Aristot. pol. 5, 11 [p. 1315*, 1]; or 2. in a bad sense, 
Theophr. char. 16 (22); Diod. 1, 62; 4, 
51; Plut. de adul. e. 16; de superstit. c. 10 sq. Paul 
in the opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts 
xvii. 22, calls them, with kindly ambiguity, κατὰ πάντα 
δεισιδαιμονεστέρους (sc. than the rest of the Greeks [ W. 
244 (229) ], cf. Meyer ad loc.), as being devout without 
the knowledge of the true God ; ef. Bengel ad loc.* 

δέκα, of, αἱ, τά, [fr. Hom. down], ten: Mt. xx. 24, ete. 
θλίψις ἡμερῶν δέκα, i.e. to last a short time: Rev. ii. 10; 
ef. Dan. i. 12, 14; Num. xi. 19; Ter. heaut. 5, 1, 36 
decem dierum vix mi est familia. 

δεκα-δύο, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later 
(see Passow s. v. δέκα [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.; cf. W. 23 
(22); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept.; i. q. 
δώδεκα, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places 
LT Tr WH δώδεκα ; [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, 7].* 

[8eka-é&, sixteen: Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg.  (Sept., al.) *] 

[δεκα-οκτώ for δέκα kal ὀκτώ, eighteen: "df. in Lk. xiii. 4, 
11, but WH om. L Tr br. καί ; cf. s. v. καί, I. 1 b.*] 

δεκα-πέντε, for the earlier πεντεκαίδεκα. fifteen : Jn. xi. 
18; Acts xxvii. 28; Gal i. 18; [Gen. vii. 20 Ald., 
Compl; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Mace. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3 
var.; Diod. 2, 13; Plut. Dion 38, 1; al.; cf. δεκαδύο]. " 

Δεκά-πολις, -ews, 7, Decapolis (regio decapolitana, Plin. 
h. n. 5, 16. 17), i. e. a region embracing ten cities. This 
name is borne by a distriet of the tribe of Manasseh 
beyond the Jordan and bordering upon Syria, embrae- 
ing ten principal cities with smaller towns also scattered 
in among them. But the ancient geographers vary in 
their enumeration of these ten cities. Pliny l. c. reckons 
Damaseus among them, which Josephus seems to have 
excluded, calling Seythopolis μεγίστην τῆς δεκαπόλεως, 
b. j. 3,9, 7. All seem to agree in this, that Gadara, 
Hippo, Pella and Seythopolis were of the number. (ΟἿ. 


superstitious : 


δεκατέσσαρες Hi 


Win. RWB. 
325 sq.; Riehm, HWB. 266 sq.; [BB.DD. s 
iv. 25; Mk. v. 20; vii. 31.° 

δεκα-τέσσαρες, -o, οἱ, ai, -σαρα. τά, fourteen: Mt. i. 17; 
2 Co. xii. 2; Gal.ii.1. [Gen. xxxi. 41; Tob. viii. 19; x. 
7; Polyb. 1, 36, 11; cf. 8exaóvo. ] * 

δεκάτη, -ης, ἡ, (δέκατος), the tenth part of any thing, 
a tithe; specially the tenth part of booty taken from the 
enemy: Heb. vii. 2, 4; the tithes of the fruits of the 
earth and of the flocks, which, by the law of Moses, were 
presented to the Levites in the congregation of Israel: 
Heb. vii. 8 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Simon. 133 Bgk.; 
Hat. 2, 135]; 4, 152 down; Sept. for wy.) [Cf 
BB.DD. s. v. Tithe.] * 

δέκατος, -7, -ov, (δέκα), [fr. Hom. down], the tenth: Jn. 
i. 39 (40); Rey. xxi. 20; τὸ δέκατον, subst., the tenth 
part: Rev. xi. 13.* 

δεκατόω, -@: pf. dedexarwxa; pf. pass. δεδεκάτωμαι; (de- 
xaros); to exact or receive the tenth part (for which Grk. 
writ. use δεκατεύω [W. 24]): with acc. of pers. from 
whom, Heb. vii. 6 [on the pf. ef. W. $ 40,4 a.; Lghtft. 
St. Clement, App. p. 414]; Pass. to pay tithes (Vulg. 


v. Decapolis; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. 


- Ve): Mt. 


decimor): Web. vii. 9. (Neh. x. 37.) [Cowr.: ἀπο- 
Oekaróo. ] * 
δεκτός, -1, -óv, (δέχομαι), accepted, acceptable: Lk. iv. 


24; Phil iv. 18; τινί, Acts x. 35; the phrases καιρὸς 
dexros, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for y? ny), and ἐνιαυτὸς 
Oekrós, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. Ixi. 2 for iy» n3U), denote that 
most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of 
God profusely abound. (Ex. xxviii. 34; Is. lvi. 7, [ete.]. 
Among prof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. $ 20 
p. 350.) * 

δελεάζω ; [ pres. pass. δελεάζομαι]; (δέλεαρ a bait); 1. 
prop. to bait, catch by a bait: Xen. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al. 
2. as often in prof. auth., metaph. to beguile by blandish- 
ments, allure, entice, deceive: τινά, 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18; Jas. 
i. 14, on this pass. cf. Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 22 
πρὸς ἐπιθυμίας ἐλαύνεται ἣ ὑφ᾽ ἡδονῆς δελεάζεται." 

[Δελματία see Δαλματία.] 

δένδρον, -ov, τό, a tree: Mt. vii. 17, ete.; γίνεσθαι δένδρον 
or εἰς δένδρον, to grow to the shape and size of a tree, 
Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19. [(Hom., Hdt.), Arstph., 
Thue. down.] 

δεξιο-βόλος, -ov, 6, (fr. δεξιός and βάλλω), throwing with 
the right hand, a slinger, an archer: Acts xxiii. 23 in 
Lehm. ed. min.; cf. the foll. word.* [ 

δεξιολάβος, -ov, ὁ, (δεξιός and λαμβάνω), a word un- 
known to the earlier writ., found in Constant. Por- 
phyrogenitus (10th cent.) de them. 1, 1, who speaks 
of δεξιολάβοι, as a kind of soldiers, in company with 
bow-men (τοξοφόροι) and peltasts; [they are also men- 
tioned by "Theoph. Simoc. (hist. 4, 1) in the 7th cent. ; 
see the quotations in Meyer]. Since in Acts xxiii. 23 
two hundred of them are ordered to be ready, appar- 
ently spearmen are referred to (carrying a lance in the 
right hand); and so the Vulg. has taken it. The great 
number spoken of confliets with the interpretation of 
those who suppose them to be soldiers whose duty it was 








8 δεξιός 


to guard captives bound by a chain on the right hand. 
Meyer ad loc. understands them to be [either] javelin- 
men [or slingers].* 
δεξιός, -d, -óv, (fr. δέχομαι, fut. δέξομαι, or fr. δέκω, which 
is akin to δείκνυμε; prop. of that hand which is wont to 
take hold of as well as to point out; just as ἄξιος comes fr. 
ἄξω, fut. of ἄγω ; [cf. Curtius $8 11, 266 ]), the right: Mt. 
v. 29, 39; Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xviii. 105 Rev. x. 2; ἡ δεξιὰ 
χείρ, Mt. v. 30; Lk. vi. 6; Acts iii. 7; Rev. i. 16 ; xiii. 
16; and (with χείρ omitted) ἡ δεξιά (like ἡ ἀριστερά), 
Mt. vi. 3; xxvii. 29; Rev. i. 20; ii. 1; v. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν 
[on the right hand i. 6.1 at the right side, Rev. v. 1 [but 
al. take it more closely, i» the right hand ; cf. vs. 7 and 
xx. 1]; διδόναι τὴν δεξιάν or τὰς δεξιάς, to pledge either 
à mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right 
hands: Gal.ii.9 (1 Mace. vi. 58; xi. 50, 62, 66; xiii. 50; 
2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11; xiii. 22; ef. Gesenius, "Thesaur. 
ii. pp. 566 and 599; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6, 
6; 2,5, 3; Joseph. antt. 18, 9, 3 δεξιάν τε kai πίστιν διδόναι 
τινί) ; God is said to have done something τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 
with his right hand i. e., aec. to Hebr. idiom, by his own 
power [cf- W. 214 (201)]: Acts ii. 33; v. 31; τὰ ὅπλα τὰ 
δεξιά, arms carried in the right hand and used for attack, 
as the sword, the spear, καὶ ἀριστερά those carried in the 
left hand, for the purpose of defence, as the shield: 2 
Co. vi. 7; τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη τοῦ πλοίου, Jn. xxi. 6. τὰ δεξιά 
the right side [W.176 (166)]: Mk. xvi. 5; ἐκ δεξιῶν 
τινος on one's right hand (Lat. ad alicuius dextram), Mt. 
xxv. 33 sq.; xxvii. 38; Mk. xv. 27; Lk.i.11; xxiii. 335 
εἶναι, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8, he is at my on 
hand, sc. as a leader, to sustain me). Asin thisexpression 
the Greeks use the prep. ἐκ, so the Hebrews sometimes 
use y (722 from i. e. at the right, 75 5xwD from i. e. 
at ins side of any one) and the Romans ab (sedere a 
dextra alicuius, proximum esse ab aliquo), because they 
define the position of one standing or sitting next another 
by proceeding from the one next to whom he is said to 
stand or sit [cf. W. 367 (344)]. καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν x. ἐξ 
εὐωνύμων τινὸς βασιλέως, to occupy the places of honor 
nearest the king, Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37, 40; ον: 
As) po", TER SIS ES: xliv. (xlv.) 10). Hence, after 
Ps. cix. (ex.) 1 as tere to the Messiah (Mt. xxii. 44; 
Mk. xii. 36; Lk. xx. 42), Christ is said to have ascended 
καθῆσθαι or καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν (at or on the right hand) of 
God, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; xvi. 19; Lk. xxii. 69; 
Acts ii. 34; Heb. i. 12; εἶναι or καθίσαι ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, 
Ro. viii. 34; Eph.i. 20; Col. iii. 1; Heb. i. 3; viii.1; x. 12; 
xii. 2, — to indicate that he has become a partner in God's 
universal government (cf. Knapp, De J. Chr. ad dextram 
dei sedente, in his Seripta var. arg. p. 41 sqq.; [ Stuart, 
Com. on Heb., exeurs. iv.]). That these expressions are 
tobe understood in this figurative sense, and not of a fixed 
and definite place in the highest heavens (as Chr. Fr. 
Fritzsche in Nov. Opusec. acad. p. 209 sqq. tries to prove, 
after the orthodox theologians of the reformed church), 
will be questioned by no one who carefully considers 
Rey. iii. 21. Christ is once spoken of as ἑστὼς ἐκ δεξιῶν 
τοῦ θεοῦ, as though in indignation at his adversaries [ace. 





δέομαι 


to others, to welcome his martyred servant] he had risen 
from his heavenly throne, Acts vii. 55 sq. 

δέομαι ; 3 pers. sing. impf. ἐδέετο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 220; W. 46; [Veitch s. v. δέω to need fin.]), Lk. viii. 
38 (where Lchm. ἐδεεῖτο, Tr WH ἐδεῖτο ; cf. Mey. ad loc.; 
[WH. App. p. 166]; B.55 (48)) ; 1 aor. ἐδεήθην ; (fr. 
δέω to want, need; whence mid. δέομαι to stand in need 
of, want for one's self); [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to want, 
lack: twos. 2. to desire, long for: twos. 3. to ask, 
beg, (Germ. bitten); a. univ. — the thing asked for be- 
ing evident from the context : with gen. of the pers. from 
whom, Gal. iv. 12; the thing sought being specified 
in direct discourse: Lk. v. 12; viii. 28; ix. 38 (acc. to 
the reading ἐπίβλεψον RL); Acts viii. 34 (δέομαί σου, 
περὶ τίνος ὁ προφήτης λέγει τοῦτο; of whom, I pray thee, 
doth the prophet say this?); Acts xxi. 39; 2 Co. v. 20; 
foll. by the inf., Lk. viii. 38; ix. 38 (acc. to the reading 
ἐπιβλέψαι Tr WH) ; Acts xxvi. 3 (where G LT Tr WH 
om. σοῦ after δέομαι) ; foll. by tva, Lk. ix. 40 (cf. W. 335 
(315); [B. 258 (222)]); foll. by ro with inf. 2 Co. x. 2 
[ef. B. 263 (226), 279 (239); W. 321, 322 (301 sq.)]; 
with gen. of pers. and aec. of thing, 2 Co. vii: 4 (GL T 
"Tr WH; for Rec. adds δέξασθαι ἡμᾶς without warrant), 
[cf. B. 164 (143); W.198(186)]. b. spec. of requests 
addressed to God; absol. to pray, make supplication: Acts 
iv. 31; τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts x. 2; foll. by ei dpa, Acts viii. 22 
[B. 256 (220); W. 300 (282)]; τοῦ κυρίου, ὅπως etc. Mt. 
ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; without the gen. θεοῦ, ---- foll. by εἴ πως, 
Ro. i. 10 [ef. W. and B. ll. cc.]; by tva, Lk. xxi. 36 ; xxii. 
32; by the telie els τό, 1 Th. iii. 10 [cf. B. 265 (228)]; 
ὑπέρ Twos πρὸς τὸν κύριον, ὅπως, Acts Vili. 24. [SYN. see 
αἰτέω and δέησις. Come.: προσ-δέομαι.] * 

δέον, -οντος, τό, (ptep. of δεῖ, q. v.), fr. [Soph. and] Hat. 
down, that of which there is need, which is requisite, due, 
proper : δέον ἐστί there is need, 1 Pet. i. 6 [T Tr txt. WH 
om. Tr mre. br. é.]; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xix. 36; 
τὰ μὴ δέοντα that are not proper, 1 Tim. v. 13.* 

ϑέος, -ovs, τό, (δείδω), [fr. Hom. down], fear, awe: pera 
εὐλαβείας καὶ δέους, Heb. xii. 28 L T Tr WH.* 

[Syx. 8 éos (apprehension), 6 ὁ Bos (fear): Ammonius s. v. 
8. says δέος καὶ φόβος diapeper- δ έο ς μὲν γάρ ἐστι πολυχρό- 
vios κακοῦ ὑπόνοια. φόβος δὲ 7 παραυτίκα πτόησις. Plato 
(Laches p. 198 b.) : δέος γὰρ εἶναι προσδοκίαν μέλλοντος κακοῦ. 
Cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Protag. p. 167 ; Schmidt ch. 139); 
and see s. v. 8eiMa.] 


Δερβαῖος, -ov, ὁ, of Derbe, a native of Derbe: Acts xx. 4.* 

Aép8n, -7s, 7, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, on the confines 
of Isauria, [on its supposed site see Lewin, St. Paul, i. 
151 sq. ; B.D. s. v.; ef. Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, Index 
8. V.]: Acts xiv. 65 205 xvi. 1.* 

δέρμα, -ros, τό, (fr. δέρω or Seipa, as κέρμα fr. ketpo), a 
skin, hide, leather: Heb. xi. 37. (Hom. et sqq.) * 

δερμάτινος, -7, -ov, (δέρμα). made of skin, leathern (Vule. 


pelliceus): Mt. iij. 4; Mk. i. 6; cf. 2 K.i.8. (Hom., 
Hat., Plat., Strab., al.) * 
8épo; laor. ἔδειρα ; 2 fut. pass. Oaprjeopat ; 1. to 


flay, skin: Hom. Il. 1, 459; 23, 167, etc. 2. to beat, 

thrash, smite, (cf. Germ. durchgerben, [low Eng. hide]), so 

sometimes in prof. auth. fr. Arstph. ran. 619 [ef. vesp. 
9 


129 








δεσμοφύλαξ 


485] down: τινά, Mt. xxi. 35; Mk. xii. 3, 5 ;; Lk. xx. 10 
Sq.; xxii. 63; Jn. xviii. 23; Acts v. 40; xvi. 37; xxii. 
19; eis πρόσωπον δέρειν τινά, 2 Co. xi. 20; ἀέρα δέρειν 
(see ἀήρ), 1 Co. ix. 26; Pass.: Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 47 
(δαρήσεται πολλάς, sc. πληγάς, will be beaten with many 
stripes) ; 48, (ὀλίγας; cf. Xen. an. 5, 8, 12 παίειν ὀλίγας, 
Soph. El. 1415 παίειν διπλῆν, Arstph. nub. 968 (972) 
τύπτεσθαι πολλάς, Plat. legg. 8 p. 845 a. μαστιγοῦσθαι 
πληγάς ; cf. [W. 589 (548)]; B. [82 (72)]; $134, 6).* 

δεσμεύω ; [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἐδεσμεύετο (Lk. 
viii. 29 T Tr WH)]; (δεσμός); a. to put in chains: 
Lk. viii. 29 T Tr WH; Acts xxii. 4; (Sept. Jude. xvi. 11; 
Eur. Bacch. 616; Xen. Hier. 6, 14; Plat. lese. 7 p. 
808 d.). b. to bind up, bind together: φορτία, Mt. xxiii. 
4; (δράγματα, Gen. xxxvii. 7; Judithviii.3. [Hes. opp. 
419, al. ]).* 4 

δεσμέω, - : [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἐδεσμεῖτο] ; to bind, 
tie: Lk. viii. 22 RG L; see δεσμεύω. ([ Aristot. de plant. 
1, 2 p. 817, 21; al.]; Heliod. 8, 9.) * 

δέσμη. -7s, or as others write it [e. gy. Rec.*t T ; yet cf. 
Lob. Paralip. p. 396; Chandler ὃ 132] δεσμή, -75 9, (δέω), 
a bundle: Mt. xiii. 30. (Ex. xii. 22. Dem., Dion. 
Hal., al) * 

δέσμιος, -ov, 6, bound, in bonds, a captive, a prisoner, 
[fr. Soph. down]: Mt. xxvii. 15 sq.; Mk. xv. 6; Acts 
xvi 25, 27; xxiii. 18; xxv. 14, 27; xxviii. 16 [RG], 
17; Heb. x. 34 GL T Tr txt. WH; xiii. 3; ὁ δέσμιος 
τοῦ Χριστὸῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, whom Christ, i. e. his truth which I 
have preached, has put in bonds (W. 189 (178) ; [B. 169 
(147)]), Eph. iii. 1; 2 Tim.i.8 ; Philem. 1, 9; in the same 
sense ὁ δέσμιος ἐν κυρίῳ, Eph. iv. 1; [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on 
Philem. 13 ].* 

δεσμός, -οῦ, 6, (δέω), [fr. Hom. down], a band or bond: 
Mk. vii. 35 (ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ, i. e. the 
impediment in his speech was removed); Lk. xiii. 16 
(λυθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ, of a woman bowed together, 
held fast as it were by a bond). The plur. form τὰ de- 
cpa, the more com. form in Grk. writ. (W. 63 (62) [ef. B. 
23 (21); see below]), is found in Lk. viii. 29; Acts xvi. 
26; xx. 23; the other form of δεσμοί in Phil. i. 13 (ὥστε 
τοὺς δεσμούς μου φανεροὺς ἐν Χριστῷ γενέσθαι, so that my 
captivity became manifest as made for the cause of Christ), 
[“ δεσμά sunt vincula quibus quis constringitur, sed de- 
σμός est in carcerem conjectio et captivitas in vinculis . .. 
Utraque forma et ceteri Graeci omnes et Attici utuntur, 
sed non promiscue ut inter se permutari possint." Cobet 
as quoted in Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 353]; the gen. 
and dat. in Acts xxii. 30 Rec.; xxiii. 29; xxvi. 29, 31; 
Phil. i. 7, 14, 16 (17); Col. iv. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 9; Philem. 
10; Heb. x. 34 R Tr mrg.; xi. 36; Jude 6; ἐν rois δεσμοῖς 
rod εὐαγγελίου, in the captivity into which the preaching 
of the gospel has thrown me, Philem. 13 [W. 189 (178) ; 
cf. ref. s. v. δέσμιος, fin. ].* 

δεσμο-φύλαξ, -kos, 6, (δεσμός and φύλαξ, like θησαυρο- 
φύλαξ [cf. W. 100 (95) ]), a keeper of a prison, a jailer: 
Acts xvi. 23, 27,36. (Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 1; Leian. Tox. 
30; [Artem. oneir. 3, 60; al.]; ἀρχιδεσμοφύλαξ, Gen. 
xxxix. 21-23.) * 


δεσμωτήριον 


δεσμωτήριον, -ov, τό, a prison, jail: Mt. xi. 2; Acts v. 
21,23; xvi. 26. (Gen. xl. 3; [Hdt.], Thuc., Plat., Dem., 


al.)* 
δεσμώτης, -ov, 6, one bound, a prisoner: Acts xxvii. 
1,42. (Gen. xxxix. 20; Bar. 1.9; Hdt., Aeschyl., Soph., 


'Thuc., subseq. writ.) * 

δεσπότης, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Pind. down], a master, lord (as of 
δοῦλοι, οἰκέται) : 1 Tim. vi. 1, [2]; 2 Tim.ii. 21; Tit. ii. 
9; 1 Pet. ii. 18; God is thus addressed by one who calls 
himself his δοῦλος : Lk. ii. 29, cf. Acts iv. 24, 29, (δεσπό- 
ms τῶν πάντων, Job v. 8; Sap. vi. 8) ; Christ is so called, 
as one who has bought his servants, 2 Pet. ii. 1; rules 
over his church, Jude 4 [some take 6. here as designating 
God; οἵ. R. V. mrg.]; and whose prerogative it is to 
take vengeance on those who persecute his followers, 
Rev. vi. 10.* 

[Syn. δεσπότη»“, κύριος: 8. was strictly the correla- 
tive of slave, δοῦλος, and hence denoted absolute ownership 
and uncontrolled power; κύριος had a wider meaning, appli- 
cable to the various ranks and relations of life, and not sug- 
gestive either of property or of absolutism. Ammonius s. v. 
δεσπότης says δ. ὁ τῶν ἀργυρωνήτων " κύριος δὲ καὶ πατὴρ υἱοῦ 
So Philo, quis rer. div. heres ὃ 6 ὥστε 
τὸν δεσπότην κύριον εἶναι καὶ ἔτι ὡσανεὶ φοβερὸν κύριον, ov 
μόνον τὸ κῦρος καὶ τὸ κράτος ἁπάντων ἀνημμένον, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
δέος καὶ φόβον ἱκανὸν ἐμποιῆσαι. Cf. Trench $ xxviii.; 
Woolsey, in Bib. Sacr. for 1861, p. 599 sq.] 

δεῦρο, adv., fr. Hom. down ; 1. of place, a. hither; 
to this place. b. in urging and calling, here! come! 
(Sept. esp. for y and n25) : Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. 
xviii. 22 ; Jn. xi. 43 (δεῦρο ἔξω come forth). Acts vii. 34; 
Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; δεῦρο eis γῆν, ἣν κτλ. Acts vii. 3 
(δεῦρο eis τὸν οἶκόν aov, 1 K. 1.53; eis Πτολεμαΐδα, 1 Mace. 
xii. 45). 2. of time, hitherto, now: ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο up to 
this time, Ro. i. 13 (μέχρι δεῦρο, [Plat. lege. 7 p. 811 c.]; 
Athen. 1, 62 p. 34 c.; Plut. vit. Num. 4; Pomp. 24).* 

δεῦτε, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf. 
B. τὸ (61)]; perhaps fr. δεῦρ᾽ tre [yet see Bttm. Gram. 
21te Aufl. 8 115 Anm. 8], see δεῦρο, 1; 1. fr. Hom. 
down, come hither, come here, come: foll. by an impv., 
δεῦτε, κληρονομήσατε, Mt. xxv. 34; δεῦτε, ἴδετε, Mt. xxviii. 
6; Jn. iv. 29; δεῦτε, ἀριστήσατε, Jn. xxi. 12; δεῦτε, συνά- 
χθητε (Rec. δ. καὶ συνάγεσθε), Rev. xix. 17. δεῦτε ὀπίσω 
pov come after me, be my disciples: Mt. ἵν. 19; Mk. i. 17, 
(equiv. to "^ri 125, 2 K. vi. 19) ; δεῦτε εἰς 7. γάμους, Mt. 
xxii. 4; εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, Mk. vi. 31; δεῦτε πρός pe, Mt. 
xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come ! 
come now! foll. by a hortat. subj.: δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν, 
Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 and RG in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept. 
mostly for 125, sometimes for 383.) * 

δευτεραῖος, -aia, -atov, (δεύτερος). [ Hdt., Xen., al.], of 
or belonging to the second ; of one who comes, or does a 
thing, on the second day (cf. τριταῖος, τεταρταῖος, etc.) : 
δευτεραῖοι ἤλθομεν, Acts xxviii. 13; cf. W. $54, 2; [B. 
$123, 97. 

᾿ Sevrepó-mporos, -ov, second-first (cf. δευτερέσχατος sec- 
ond-last, last but one): ἐν σαββάτῳ δευτεροπρώτῳ in Lk. 
vi. 1 seems to be, the second of the first sabbaths after the 
Jeast of the Passover; cf. Redslob in the Intellizenzblatt 


καὶ αὐτός Tis ἑαυτοῦ. 


130 





δέχομαι 


zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl. 
Wissensch. i. p. 72; [WH. App. ad loe.]. The various 
opinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and McClel- 
lan] ad loc. and Lübkert in the Stud. und Krit. for 1835, 
p. 664 sqq. (Eustrat. in vita Eutych. n. 95 calls the first 
Sunday after Easter δευτεροπρώτην κυριακὴν). [But the 
zenuineness of the word is questionable. It is wanting in 
NBL1, 33, 69 and some other authorities. Hence Tr txt. 
WH om. the word, L Tr mrg. br. it. T'ischendorf, after 
expunging it in his 2d ed., restored it in his 7th, subse- 
quently put it in brackets, and finally (ed. 8) inserted 
it again. It is questioned or discarded, by Mey., Bleek, 
Alf., Weiss (on Mk. p. 101), Holtz., Hilgenf., Volkm., 
Farrar (Com. ad loc. and Life of Christ i.435), al. For 
the evidence see Tdf.’s note, and for discussions of it 
see WH. App. ad loc. ; Scrivener, Intr. p. 515 sq. ; Green, 
“Developed Criticism " ad loc.] * 

δεύτερος, -épa, -epov, [fr. Hom. down; Curtius $277], 
second: Mt. xxii. 26 ; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xii. 38; Jn. iv. 54; 
Rev. iv. 7, ete.; the second, the other of two: Mt. xxii. 
89; Mk. xii. 81; 1 Co. xv. 47; Tit. ii. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1; 
Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; δεύτερος θάνατος (see θάνατος, 3), Rev. 
li. 11; xx. 14; xxi. 8; δευτέρα χάρις in 2 Co. i. 15 is not 
a double benefit, but « second, opp. to the former which 
the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing 
through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them πρότε- 
pov, [WIi txt. Tr mrg. read 8evr. χαράν, q. v.]. The 
neuter δεύτερον is used adverbially in the second place, a 
second time [cf. W. $ 37,5 Note 1]: Jn. iii. 4; Rev. xix. 
3; πάλιν is added, as often in Grk. writ. (see ἄνωθεν, 
fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also τὸ δεύτερον, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude 
δ; ἐκ δευτέρου (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24; 
Acts xi. 9; Heb. ix. 28; cf. W. $51,1d.; with πάλιν added, 
Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15, (Hom. Od. 3, 161 ἐπὶ δεύτερον 
αὖτις) ; ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ at the second time, Acts vii. 13 (when 
they had come the second time) ; δεύτερον in a partition, 
then, in the second place: 1 Co. xii. 28. 

δέχομαι ; [fut. 2 pers. plur. δέξεσθε, Eph. vi. 17 Rec.**7]; 
1 aor. ἐδεξάμην ; pf. δέδεγμαι (Acts viii. 14) ; depon. mid.; 
Sept. mostly for np?; 1. to take with the hand: τὸ 
γράμμα [L txt. T Tr WH τὰ ypappara], Lk. xvi. 6 sq.; τὸ 
ποτήριον, Lk. xxii. 17; to take hold of, take up, τ. περι- 
κεφαλαίαν, τ. μάχαιραν, Eph. vi. 17; τὸ παιδίον εἰς τὰς 
ἀγκάλας, Lk. ii. 28. 2. to take up, receive, (Germ. auf- 
nehmen, annehmen); a. used of a place receiving one: 
ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν δέξασθαι (ovp. is subject), Acts iii. 21, (Plat. 
Theaet. p. 177 a. τελευτήσαντας αὐτοὺς ... ὁ τῶν κακῶν 
καθαρὸς τόπος οὐ δέξεται). b. with ace. of pers. to receive, 
grant access to, a visitors not to refuse intercourse or friend- 
ship: Lk. ix. 11 RG; Jn. iv. 45; 2 Co. vii. 15; Gal. iv. 
14; Col. iv.10; to receive to hospitality, Mt. x. 14, 40 sq. ; 
Mk. vi. 11; Lk. ix. 5, 53; x. 8,10; Acts xxi. 17 Rec.; 
Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; παιδίον, 
to receive into one's family in order to bring up and edu- 
cate, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48; to receive eis 
τ. οἴκους, Tas σκηνάς, Lk. xvi. 4, 9; δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά pov, to. 
thyself in heaven, Acts vii. 59. c. with acc. of the thing 
offered in speaking, teaching, instructing; to receive fa- 


δέω 


vorably, give ear to, embrace, make one’s own, approve, 
not to reject: τὸν λόγον, Lk. viii. 13; Acts viii. 14; xi. 
1; xvii. 11; 1 Th.i. 6; ii. 13; Jas. 1. 21; ra τοῦ πνεύ- 
ματος, 1 Co. ii. 14; τὴν παράκλησιν; 2 Co. viii. 17; τὴν ἀγάπην 
τῆς ἀληθείας sc. commended to them, 2 Th. ii. 10; [add 
the elliptieal constr. in Mt. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ; 
to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4 
Rec. d. to receive i. q. to take upon one’s self, sustain, 
bear, endure : τινά, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. 16, 
(τὴν ἀδικίαν, Hebr. N23, Gen. 1. 17; πᾶν, ὃ ἐὰν ἐπαχθῇ, 
Sir. ii. 4; μῦθον χαλεπόν, Hom. Od. 30, 271, and often in 
Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ. empfangen) : 
ἐπιστολάς, Acts xxii. 5; γράμματα, Acts xxviii. 21; τὴν 
βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, to become a partaker of the benefits 
of God's kingdom, Mk. x.15; Lk. xviii. 17; λόγια ζῶντα, 
Acts vii. 38; εὐαγγέλιον, 2 Co. xi. 4; τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, 
2 Co. vi. 1;—i. q. to learn: Phil. iv. 18 [(?) see the 
Comm. ad loc. ].* 

[Syn. δέχομαι, λαμβάνω: The earlier classic use 
of these verbs sustains in the main the distinction laid down 
in the glossaries (e. y. Ammonius s. v. λαβεῖν: λαβεῖν μέν 
ἐστι, τὸ κείμενόν τι ἀνελέσθαι" δέξασθαι δέ, τὸ διδόμενον ex 
χειρός), and the suggestion of a self-prompted taking still 
adheres to A. in many connexions (cf. λαβεῖν τινα γυναῖκα, 
ἀρχὴν λαβεῖν) in distinction from a receiving of what is 
offered ; in use, however, the words overlap and distinctions 
disappear; yet the suggestion of a welcoming or an ap- 
propriating reception generally cleaves to 6. See Schmidt 
ch. 107, who treats of the comp. of δ. in detail. Comp.: ἀνα-, 
Go-, δια-, eig-, ἐκ-, ἀπ-ἐκ-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, παρα-, προσ-, ὑπο-δέχομαι.] 

δέω: [fut. δήσω]; 1 aor. ἔδησα ; pf. ptep. δεδεκώς (Acts 
xxii. 29) ; Pass., pf. δέδεμαι ; 1 aor. inf. δεθῆναι (Acts xxi. 
33); Sept. chiefly for 358; [fr. Hom. down]; to bind, tie, 
fasten ; 1. prop.: τί, εἰς δεσμάς, Mt. xiii. 30 [Tr WH 
br. G prob. om. εἰς, cf. B. 150 (131) ; W. 225 (211) ]; ὀθόνη 
τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς δεδεμ. a sheet bound by the four cor- 
ners (to the sky), Acts x. 11 (GL T Tr WH om. Sede. 
kai); an animal, to prevent it from straying about, dvos 
δεδεμένη, πῶλος δεδεμένος, Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 
30; with πρὸς τ. θύραν added, Mk. xi. 4; with ace. of 
pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains: 
ἀγγέλους, Rev. ix. 14; a madman, πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι, Mk. 
v. 3 sq.; captives, Mt. [xii. 29]; xiv. 3; xxii. 13; xxvii. 
2; Mk.[iii.27]; vi.17; xv. 1; Jn. xviii. 12; Acts ix. 14; 
xxi. 11; xxii. 29; Rev. xx. 2; Pass., Mk. xv. 7 ; Jn. xviii. 
24; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. δεδεμένον ἄγειν 
twa); Acts xxi. 13; xxii. 5; xxiv. 27 ; Col. iv. 3; ἁλύσεσι, 
Acts xii. 6; xxi. 33; ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται, fig. for 
these bonds of mine in no way hinder its course, i. e. 
the preaching, extension, and efficacy of the gospel, 2 
Tim. ii. 9 ; the bodies of the dead, which were wont to 
be bound with bandages and linen cloths: 6 τεθνηκὼς 
δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας k. τὰς χεῖρας κειρίαις, bound hand and 
foot with grave-cloths, Jn. xi.44; τὸ σῶμα ὀθονίοις (Taf. 
2, 7 ἐν dOov.), to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 40. 2. 
metaph. a. Satan is said δῆσαι a woman bent together, 
i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos- 
session of the woman and preventing her from standing 
upright, Lk. xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to bind, i. e. put under 


181 











δηλόω 


obligation, sc. of law, duty, ete.: δεδεμένος. τῷ πνεύματι, 
bound or constrained in my spirit, i. e. compelled by my 
convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth. 
as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. ἀνάγκῃ δέδεται ἣ προστάττει ai- 
τῷ) ; with dat. of pers. δεδέσθαι τινί to be bound to one : 
ἀνδρί, of a wife, Ro. vii. 25 γυναικί, of a husband, 1 Co. 
vii. 27; δέδεται absol, opp. to ἐλευθέρα ἐστί, ibid. 39; 
(Achill. Tat. 1, 11 p. 41 ἄλλῃ δέδεμαι παρθένῳ, Jambl. 
vit. Pyth. 11, 56 τὴν μὲν ἄγαμον, . . . τὴν δὲ πρὸς ἄνδρα δε- 
δεμένην). C. by a Chald. and rabbin. idiom (equiv. to 
os) to forbid, prohibit, declare to be illicit: Mt. xvi. 
19; xviii. 18. [Comp.: κατα-, rept-, cvv-, ὑπο-δέω.] * 

δή, (shortened fr. ἤδη [al. al.]), a particle which, the 
Epic phrases δὴ τότε, δὴ yap excepted, is never placed 
at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some pre- 
ceding word, and indicates that * what it introduces can 
be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in 
truth” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392): now therefore, 
then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, etc.— al- 
though neither Lat., Germ., [nor Eng.] has a word pre- 
cisely equiv. to δή). 1. added to relative pronouns: 
ὃς δή who is such a one as, who preéminently, who then, 
Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory 
subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be 
done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may 
be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 612"), 
where the Lat. says agedum; jam, Germ. doch, nur, [Eng. 
now, only, but]: Lk. ii. 15; Acts [vi. 3 L WH mrg. br.]; 
xiii. 2; xv. 36; 1 Co. vi. 20, (Sir. xliv. 1). 
certainly: 2 Co. xii. 1 R 6." 

δηλαυγῶς, (fr. δῆλος and αὐγή), radiantly, in full light, 
clearly: Mk. viii. 25 TWH mrg. with codd. N*CLA for 
Rec. τηλαυγῶς. Hesych. says δηλαυγῶς - ἄγαν φανερῶς ; 
add δηλαυγέσι τεκμηρίοις, Democrit: in Fabricius, Biblioth. 
Gr. iv. p. 333. With the exception of this word [δηλο- 
ποιέω, (Plut. Pericl. 33, 8; al.)] and the very rare δηλο- 
davis, δῆλος is not found in composition.* * 

δῆλος, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], clear, evident, manifest : 
Mt. xxvi. 73; δῆλον sc. ἐστίν it is manifest, evident, foll. 
by ὅτι (4 Mace. ii. 7; Xen. an. 1, 3, 9; al.) : 1 Co. xv. 27 
[here some would take the words adverbially and paren- 
thetically i. e. δηλονότι manifestly cf. W. § 64, 2 a.] ; Gal. 
iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 7 (here L'T Tr WH om. 05Xov).* 

[Syn. δῆλος, φανερός: δ. evident, what is known and un- 
derstood, $. manifest, as opp. to what is concealed or invisible ; 
δ. points rather to inner perception, $.to outward appear- 
ance. Cf. Schmidt ch. 129.] 

δηλόω, -ὦ ; [impf. ἐδήλουν ; fut. δηλώσω]; 1 aor. ἐδή- 
Aeca; Pass. [impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐδηλοῦτο (1 Pet. i. 11 
WH mre.)]; 1 aor. ἐδηλώθην;; (δῆλος) ; Sept. for pan 
and sometimes for 77/7 ; in Grk. auth. fr. [ Aeschyl. and] 
Hdt. down; to make manifest: ri, 1 Co. iii. 13; to make 
known by relating, to declare: ri, Col. i. 8; τινὶ περί τινος, 
ὅτι, 1 Co. i. 11; to give one to understand, to indicate, 
signify: ti, Heb. xii. 27; 2 Pet. i. 14; foll. by ace. with 
inf. Heb. ix. 8; ets τι, point unto, 1 Pet. i. 11.* 


[Syn. 99A óc, ἐμφανίζω: eum. to manifest to the sight, 
make visible; 8. to render evident to the mind, of such dis- 
closures as exhibit character or suggest inferences; hence 


3. surely, 


Anpas 


esp. of prophetical, typical, or other supernatural disclosures. 
Cf. Schmidt ch. 129 § 6; Bleek on Heb. ix. 8.] 

Anpas, 6, Demas, (prop. name, contracted apparently 
fr. Δημήτριος, cf. W. 103 (97); [on its declension, ef. B. 
20 (18) }),a companion of Paul, who deserted the após- 
tle when he was a prisoner at Rome and returned to 
Thessalonica: Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.* 

Sypnyopéw, -ὦ : [impf. ἐδημηγόρουν ; (to be a δημηγόρος, 
fr. δῆμος and ἀγορεύω to harangue the people) ; to address 
a public assembly, make a speech to the people: ἐδημηγόρει 
πρὸς αὐτούς [A. V. made an oration], Acts xii. 21. (Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. Prov. xxx. 31 (xxiv. 66); 
4 Macc. v. 15.) * 

Δημήτριος, -ov, 6, Demetrius ; 1. a silversmith of 
Ephesus, a heathen: Acts xix. 24, 38. 2. a certain 
Christian: 3 Jn. 12." 

δημιουργός, -o0, 6, (δήμιος publie, belonging to the peo- 
ple, and EPTQ; cf. iepoupyds, ἀμπελουργός, ete.), often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a. prop. a workman for the 
public. b. univ. the author of any work, an artisan, 
JSramer, builder: τεχνίτης x. δημιουργός, Heb. xi. 10; (Xen. 
mem. 1,4, 7 [cf. 9] σοφοῦ τινος δημιουργοῦ τέχνημα. God 
is called 6 τοῦ οὐρανοῦ δημιουργός in Plat. rep. 7 p. 530 a. ; 
ὁ dnp. τῶν ὅλων in Joseph. antt. 1, 7, 1, and often in eccl. 
writ. from Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11; 26, 1; 33, 2 on; 
[cf. Philo, de mut. nom. § 4; de opif. mund. ed. Müller 
p. 133; Piper, Einl. in monument. Theol. § 26; Soph. 
Lex. s. v.]. In the Scriptures, besides, only in 2 Mace. 
iv. 1 κακῶν Onp.). [Cf. Trench 8 ev.]* 

δῆμος, -ov, 6, the people, the mass of the people assembled 
in a public place: Acts xii. 22; xix. 33; ἄγειν [RG], 
εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸν δῆμον: Acts xvii. 5 [L T Tr WH zpoay.]; 
xix. 30. [From Hom. down.]* 

[Svs. δῆμος, λαός zin classic Grk. δῆμος denotes the peo- 
ple as organized into a body politic, λαός the unorganized 
people at large. But in biblical Grk. Aaós is used esp. of the 
chosen people,of God ; δῆμος on the other hand (found only 
in Acts) denotes the people of a heathen city. Cf. Trench 
§ xcviii.] 

δημόσιος, -a, -ov, esp. freq. in Attic; belonging to the 
people or state, public (opp. to ἴδιος) : Acts v. 18; in dat. 
fem. δημοσίᾳ used adverbially (opp. to ἰδίᾳ) [cf. W. 591 
(549) note], publicly, in public places, in view of all: Acts 
xvi. 87; xviii. 28; δημ. καὶ κατ᾽ οἴκους, Acts xx. 20; (2 
Mace. vi. 10; 3 Mace. ii. 27; in Grk. writ. also by public 
authority, at the public expense).* 

δηνάριον, -ov, τό, [ Plut., Epict., al.], a Lat. word, a de- 
narius, a silver coin, originally consisting of ten [whence 
its name], afterwards [fr. n. c. 217 on] of sixteen asses; 
about [3.898 grams, i. e. 84 pence or 162 cents; rapidly 
debased fr. Nero on; cf. BB.DD. s. v. Denarius]: Mt. 
xv11..285 xx. 2,9, 15. xxr. 19: Mike xa. ΤῸ; xt. 
5; Lk. vii. 41; x.35; xx. 24; Jn. vi. 7; xii.5; Rev. vi. 
6 [ef. W. 587 (546); Β. 404 (143)]; τὸ ἀνὰ δηνάριον sc. 
ὄν the pay of a denarius apiece promised to each work- 
man, Mt. xx. 10 T Tr [txt., Tr mrg. WH br. τό]." 

δή-ποτε (fr. δή and ποτέ), adv., now at length (jam 
aliquando); at any time ; at last, etc., just exactly ; [hence 
it generalizes a relative, like the Lat. cumque ; see Lob. 


182 





διά 


ad Phryn. p. 373]: ᾧ δήποτε νοσήματι, with whatsoever 
disease, Jn. v. 4 [R G, but L οἱῳδηποτοῦν." 

δή-που [L WH δή zov; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 
123 sq.], adv., (fr. δή and zov), prop. now in some way, 
whatever that way is ; it is used when something is affirmed 
in a slightly ironical manner, as if with an affectation of 
uncertainty, perhaps, doubtless, verily: ob δήπου not surely 
(Germ. doch nicht etwa), hardly I trow; (cf. Rost in 
Passow i. p. 613^; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 427 sq.). Once 
in Scripture: leb. ii. 16.* 

[Ala, see Zevs.] 

διά, [“ written δύ before a vowel, exc. in prop. names 
and 2 Co. v. 7; Ro. viii. 10” Tdf. Proleg. p. 94], akin 
to dis and Lat. dis in composition, prop. denoting a divis- 
ion into two or more parts; a preposition taking the 
gen. and the ace. — In its use the bibl. writ. differ in no 
respect fr. the Grk.; cf. W. 377 (353) sqq.; 398 (372) sq. 

A. with the Genrrive: through; I. of Place; 
1. prop. after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion, 
or an aet, that occurs through any place: δύ ἄλλης ὁδοῦ 
ἀναχωρεῖν, Mt. ii. 12; δι ἀνύδρων τόπων, Mt. xii. 43; διὰ 
τῆς Σαμαρείας, Jn. iv. 4 ; διὰ τῆς θύρας, Jn. x. 1 sq.; add, 
Mit xix. 24 Mik. 1.28; x. 25» πὶ Geeky Βῦ) στ. 19: 
Xvill. 25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. ix. 11 sq.; xi. 29, ete.; δι᾽ 
ὑμῶν, through your city, Ro. xv. 28; [on διὰ πάντων, 
Acts ix. 32, see was, I. 1]; ὁ διὰ πάντων, diffusing his 
saving influence through all, Eph. iv. 6; σώξεσθαι διὰ 
πυρός, 1 Co. iii. 15; διασώζ. δ ὕδατος, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Ev. 
Nicod. e. 9 p. 568 sq. ed. Thilo [p. 228 ed. Tdf.] διὰ 
θαλάσσης ὡς διὰ Enpas); βλέπειν SV ἐσόπτρου, 1 Co. xiii. 
12 [cf. W. 380 (356)]. Add the adverbial phrase dv 
ὅλου from top to bottom, throughout, Jn. xix. 23 (met- 
aph. in every way, 1 Mace. vi. 18). From this use of 
the preposition has come 2. its tropical use of a 
state or condition in which (prop. passing through 
which as through a space) one does or suffers some- 
thing, where we, with a different conception, employ 
with, in, ete. (Germ. bei, unter, mit): ὁ διὰ γράμματος x. 
περιτομῆς παραβάτης νόμου, Ro. ii. 27 [W. 380 (355)]; of 
πιστεύοντες Ov ἀκροβυστίας who believe though uncircum- 
cised (see ἀκροβυστία, a.), Ro. iv. 11; διὰ προσκόμματος 
ἐσθίειν, with offence, or so as to be an offence [ef. W. 380 
(356), and see πρόσκομμα], Ro. xiv. 20; διὰ πίστεως περι- 
πατεῖν, ov διὰ εἴδους (see εἶδος, 1), 2 Co. v. 7; τὰ διὰ 
{Lehmanre. (cf. Tr mrg.) τὰ ἴδια (see Mey. ad loc.) ] τοῦ 
σώματος, done in the body (i. e. while we were clothed 
with our earthly body [al. take διά here instrumentally ; 
see III. 2 below]), 2 Co. v. 10; διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων, 2 Co. 
ii. 4; διὰ δόξης, clothed with glory, 2 Co. iii. 11; ἔρχεσθαι, 
εἰσέρχ. διά τινος with a thing, Heb. ix. 12; 1 Jn. v. 6, [but 
cf. W. 380 (355)]; 8¢ ὑπομονῆς, Ro. viii. 25, (διὰ πένθους 
τὸ γῆρας διάγειν, Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 6; cf. Matthiae ii. 
p. 1358). 

IL of Time [ef. W. 380 (356); Ellic. or Mey. on 
Gal. ii. 1; Fritzsche as below]; 1. of continued 
time; hence a. of the time ‘roughout (during) which 
anything is done: Mt. xxvi. 61; Mk. xiv. 58; OU ὅλης 
(τῆς Τὶ 6) νυκτός, Lk. v. 55 διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb. ii. 15; 


διά 


διὰ παντός [so L WH Tr (exe. Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53)], 
or written together διαπαντός [so G T (exe. in Mt.) ; c£. 
W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continually, 
always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii. 
25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr. 
Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24); 2 Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15, 
(often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a 
thing is done: διὰ τῆς νυκτός (L T Tr WH διὰ νυκτός), by 
night, Acts v. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph. 
1, 10); δύ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the 
spacé of forty days, Acts i. 3; — (denying this use of the 
prep. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 
164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted 
under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s. ]). 2. of time 
elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed 
through: Gal ii. 1 [cf. W. 380 (356)]; δέ ἡμερῶν, 
(some) days having intervened, afier (some) days, Mk. ii. 
1; 8¢ ἐτῶν πλειόνων, Acts xxiv. 17; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in 
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 50; [W. 380 (356) ; L. and S. s. v. A. 
II. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 2; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 14]. 
TIT. of the Méans or Instrument by which any- 
thing is effected; because what is done by means of a 
person or thing seems to pass as it were through the 
same [cf. W. 378 (354) ]. 1. of one who is the author 
of the action as well as its instrument, or of the effi- 
cient cause: δι αὐτοῦ (i. e. τοῦ θεοῦ) rà πάντα sc. ἐστίν 
Or ἐγένετο, Ro. xi. 36; also δ οὗ, Heb. ii. 10; δύ οὗ ἐκλή- 
θητε, 1 Co. i. 9; add [Gal.iv. 7 L T Tr WH, see below]; 
Heb. vii. 21 (ἡ ἰατρικὴ πᾶσα διὰ τοῦ θεοῦ rovrov, i. e. Aes- 
culapius, κυβερνᾶται, Plat. symp. p. 186 e. ; cf. Fritzsche 
on Rom. vol. i. p. 15, [and for exx. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1]) ; of 
him to whom that is due which any one has or has done; 
hence i. q. by the fault of any one: δ οὗ τὸ σκάνδαλον 
ἔρχεται, Mt. xviii. 7; δι᾽ ἑνὸς avOp. ἡ ápapría . . . εἰσῆλθε. 
Ro. v. 12, cf. 16-19; ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, Ro. viii. 3; 
by the merit, aid, favor of any one: ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσι 
διά etc. Ro. v. 17, cf. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 21; διὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
and the like: Ro. v. 1sq. 11; Acts x. 43; Gal. iv. 7 
[Ree., but see above]; δοξάζειν τ. θεὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
1 Pet. iv. 11, and εὐχαριστεῖν τῷ θεῷ διὰ "Ing. Xp. Ro. i. 
8; vii. 25 (where LT Tr WH txt. χάρις τῷ θεῷ) ; Col. iii. 
17, — because the possibility both of glorifying God and 
of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ; 
καυχᾶσθαι ἐν τῷ θεῷ διὰ “Ino. Xp. Ro. v. 11; ἀναπαύεσθαι 
διά τινος, Philem. 7; οἱ πεπιστευκότες διὰ τῆς χάριτος, Acts 
' xviii. 27; πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες διὰ σοῦ ... διὰ τῆς 
σῆς προνοίας, Acts xxiv. 3 (3) ; ὑπερνικᾶν διὰ τοῦ dyaz7- | 
σαντος ἡμᾶς, Ro. viii. 37; περισσεύειν διά τινος, by the 
increase which comes from one, Phil. i. 26; 2 Co. i. 5; 
ix. 12; διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Phil. i.19; add, Philem. 22; 
Ro. i. 12; 2 Co.i.4; Gal. iv. 23; 1 Pet.i.5. 2. of the 
instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instru- 
mental cause in the stricter sense: — with gen. of 
pers. by the service, the intervention of, any one; with gen. 
of thing, by means of, with the help of, any thing; a. in 
passages where a subject expressly mentioned is said to 
do or to have done a thing by some person or by some 
thing: Mk. xvi. 20 (τοῦ kvxtov τὸν λόγον βεβαιοῦντος διὰ 





133 


διά 


T. σημείων) ; Lk.i. 70; Actsi. 10 ; ii. 22 (τέρασι x. σημεί- 
ots, ois ἐποίησε δι’ αὐτοῦ ὁ θεός) ; Vili. 20; x. 36; xv. 23 
(γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν) ; xx. 28; xxi. 19; xxviii. 
25; Ro. ii. 16; iii. 31; vii. 13; [viii. 11 Rec.bez εἰς T, ed. 
min. TWH txt.]; xv. 18; xvi. 18; 1 Co. i. 21 [cf. W. 
381 (357)]; ii. 10; iv. 155 vi. 14; xiv. 9, 19 [RG]; xv. 
57; 2C0.i.4; iv. 14 RG; v. 18, 20; ix. 13 [cf. W. 381 
(357)]; x.9; xii. 17; Eph.i.5; 1i. 16; Col. i. 20, 22; ii. 
8; 1 Th.iv.14; 2 Th.ii.14; Tit.ii.5; Heb.i.2,3[R 
ΟἹ; 1. 14:5. γι 2p vH ΘΙ 1x 26. xin 22:193 eee 
Rev.i.1; γῆ ἐξ ὕδατος (material cause) x. δ ὕδατος avve- 
στῶσα τῷ ToU θεοῦ λόγῳ, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [ W. 419 (390) cf. 
217(204)]. b. in passages in which the author or prin- 
cipal cause is not mentioned, but is easily understood 
from the nature of the case, or from the context: Ro.i. 
12; 1 Co. xi. 12 [cf. W. 381 (357)]; Phil.i.20; 1 Th. iii. 
7; 2 Th.ii. 2, 15; Heb. xi. 39 [cf. W. τι. s., also § 50, 3]; 
xii. 11,15; 1 Pet. i. 7; διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων, by the me- 
diation (intervention) of many witnesses, they being 
summoned for that purpose [cf. W. 378 (354); A.V. 
among], 2 Tim.ii.2. Where it is evident from the relig- 
ious conceptions of the Bible that God is the author or 
first cause: Jn. xi. 4; Acts v. 12; Eph. iii. 10; iv. 16; 
Col.ii.19; 2 Tim. i. 6; Heb. x. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 6; σώζε- 
σθαι διὰ τ. πίστεως, Eph. ii. 8; συνεγείρεσθαι διὰ τ. πίστ. 
Col. ii. 12; δικαιοῦσθαι διὰ τ. mío. Gal. ii. 16, cf. Ro. iii. 
30; in the phrases διὰ τοῦ "Ina. Χριστοῦ, and the like: 
Jn.i.17; ii. 17;, Acts xi.38; Ro.1.5; v. 9; 1 Co. xv. 
57; 1 Jn. iv. 9; Phil.i. 11; διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, 1 Co. xv. 
2; Eph. iii. 6; διὰ λόγου θεοῦ, 1 Pet. i. 23, cf. 3; διὰ 
νόμου, Ro. iii. 27; iv. 13; δύ ἀποκαλύψεως Inc. Xp. Gal. 
i. 12, cf. 15 sq.; διὰ τοῦ (ἁγίου) πνεύματος. Ro. v. 5; 1 Co. 
xii. 8; Eph. iii. 16; πιστεύειν διά τινος (see πιστεύω, 
1 b. y-), ὅπ. 1. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; σημεῖον γέγονε δι᾿ αὐτῶν, 
Acts iv. 16; 6 λόγος dv ἀγγέλων λαληθείς, Heb. ii. 2, cf. 
Gal. ili. 19; ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωῦσέως ἐδόθη. Jn. i. 17; in pas- 
sages in which something is said to have been spoken 
through the O. T. prophets, or some one of them [cf. 
Lghtft. Fresh Revision ete. p. 121 sq.]: Mt. 11. 5,17 LT 
Tr WH, 23; [ii.3 LT Tr WH]; iv. 14; viii. 17; xii. 
17; xxi 4; xxiv. 15; xxvii. 9; Actsii. 16; orto have 
been so written: Lk. xviii. 31 ; with the added mention 
of the first cause: ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφ. Mt. i. 22; 
ii. 15, ef. Lk. i. 70; Actsi.16; xxviii. 25; Ro. 1. 2; in 
passages relating to the Logos: πάντα δὲ αὐτοῦ (i.e. 
throuch the divine Logos [cf. W. 379 (355)]) ἐγένετο or 
Ekriotg - Jn. i.3; 1 Co. viii. 6 (where he is expressly 
distincuished from the first cause: ἐξ αὐτοῦ [W. 419 
(391)]); Col. i. 16 [W. 1. e.], cf. Heb. i. 2, (Philo de 
cherub. $35). The instrumental cause and the princi- 
pal are distinguished in 1 Co. xi. 12 (διὰ τῆς γυναικός . . . 
ἐκ τοῦ Ücov) ; Gal.i.1(dz' ἀνθρώπων . . . δὲ ἀνθρώπου [cf. 
W.418(390)]. 3. with the gen. of a thing διά is used 
to denote the manner in which a thing is done, or the 
formal cause: εἶπε διὰ παραβολῆς, Lk. viii. 4; εἶπε δύ 
ópáparos, Acts xviii. 9; ἀπαγγέλλειν διὰ λόγου, by word of 
mouth, Acts xv. 27; τῷ λόγῳ de ἐπιστολῶν, 2 Co. x. 11, 
cf. 2 Th. ii. 15; πίστις ἐνεργουμένη δι’ ἀγάπης. Gal. v. 6; 


διά 


κεχάρισται δι’ ἐπαγγελίας, Gal. iii. 18; δουλεύειν διὰ τῆς 
ἀγάπης. Gal. v. 135. ἐπιστέλλειν διὰ βραχέων, Heb. xiii. 
22; γράφειν δι᾿ ὀλίγων, 1 Pet. v. 12, (Plat. Gorg. p. 449 b. 
διὰ μακρῶν λόγους ποιεῖσθαι [see ὀλίγος, fin.; cf. W. $ 51, 
1 b.]); διὰ χάρτου kai μέλανος, 2 Jn. 12; διὰ μέλανος x. 
καλάμου. 3 Jn. 13, (Plut. Sol. 17, 3). Τὸ this head I 
should refer also the use of διά τινος in exhortations ete., 
where one seeks to strengthen his exhortation by the 
mention of a thing or a person held sacred by those 
whom he is admonishing (διά equiv. to by an allusion to, 
by reminding you of [ef. W. 381 (357)]): Ro. xii. 1; 
xy. 80; 1Co.i.10; 2Co.x.1; 1 Th. iv. 2 [yet cf. W. 879 
(355) note]; 2 Th. iii. 12 RG. 

B. with the Accusative [W. 398 (372) sq.]. 1. of 
Place; through; often so in the Grk. poets, once in the 
N. T. ace. to LT Tr WH viz. Lk. xvii. 11 διὰ μέσον 
Σαμαρείας, for RG διὰ μέσου Sap. [but see μέσος, 2]. 

11. of the Ground or Reason on account of which 
anything is or is not done; by reason of, because of 
(Germ. aus Grund). 1. of the reason for whicha 
thing is done, or of the efficient reason, when for 
greater perspicuity it may be rendered by [cf. Kühner 
$434 Anm.]; a. with ace. of the thing: àv ἥν, viz. 
τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμέραν (prop. by reason of which day i. e. 
because it will come (cf. W. 400 (373) ]), 2 Pet. iii. 12; 
διὰ τ. λόγον (prop. by reason of the word i. e. because 
the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3; διὰ τὸ θέλημά 
cov (Vule. propter voluntatem. tuam i. e. because thou 
didst will it), Rev. iv. 11; add, Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14, 
(ἀναβιώσκεται διὰ τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς φύσιν, Plato, symp. p. 
203 e.); οἵ. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 1. — b. with ace. of 
the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, any- 
thing is or is done: διὰ τὸν πατέρα... . δ ἐμέ (prop. be- 
cause the father lives... because I live [cf. W. 399 
(313)]), Jn. vi. 57; διὰ τὸν imoráfavra, by the will of 
him who subjected it, opp. to οὐχ ἑκοῦσα, Ro. viii. 20 
[cf. Win. 399 (373) note]; μὴ εἴπῃς ὅτι διὰ κύριον ἀπέ- 
στην, Sir. xv. 11; so too in the Grk. writ. of every age; 
cf. Krüger $68, 22; Grimm on 2 Macc. vi. 25. Much 
oftener 2. of the reason or cause on account 
of which anything is or is done, or ought to be done; 
on account of, because of; a. in the phrases διὰ τοῦτο 
Jor this cause; for this reason; therefore; on this accbunt ; 
since this is so: Mt. vi. 25; xii. 27, 81; xiii. 13, etc.; 
Mk. vi. 14; xi. 24; Lk. xi. 49; xiv. 20; Jm. vi. 65; ix. 
23; Acts ii. 26; Ro. i. 26; iv. 16; v.12; xiii. 6; xv. 9; 
1 Co. iv. 17; xi. 10, 30; 2 Co. iv. 1; Eph. i. 15; v. 17; 
Vi. 13); 0017329: {ΠῚ}. 11; 19 sans ois) beat 11; 2) im 
ii. 10; Heb. i. 9; it. 1; 1 Jn. iv. 5; 3 Jn. 10; Rey. vii. 
15; xii. 12; xviii. 8. foll. by ὅτι, for this cause . 
cause, therefore ... because: Jn. v. 16, 18; viii. 47; x. 
17; xii. 18, 39; 1 Jn. iii. 1; cf. Tholuck ed. 7 on Jn. x. 
17, [he questions, at least for x. 17 and xii. 39, the canon 
of Meyer (on xii. 39), Luthardt (on x. 17), al., that in this 
phrase in Jn. the τοῦτο always looks backwards]. in the 
opposite order (when the words that precede with ὅτε are 
to be emphasized): Jn. xv. 19. It indicates the end 
and purpose, being foll. either by tva, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 


.. be- 


134 





διά 


Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15, (in the opp. order, Jn. i. 31) ; or 
by ὅπως, Heb. ix. 15. διὰ τί [so L Tr WH] and written 
together διατί [so GT; ef. W.45; Lipsius, Gram. Unters. 
p- 126], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; xvii. 19; 
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 30; Jn. vii. 45; Acts v. 3; Ro. ix. 32; 1 
Co. vi. 7; Rev. xvii. 7. 60 ἣν αἰτίαν, 566 αἰτία, 1. τίς ἡ αἰτία, 
δι ἥν, Acts x. 21; xxiii. 28; διὰ ταύτην τὴν αἰτίαν, Acts 
xxviii. 20; διὰ ταῦτα, Eph. v.6,ete. — b. used, with the ace. 
of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is im- 
pelled to some act [Eng. for; cf. W. 399 (372)]: διὰ φθό- 
vov, because prompted by envy, for envy, Mt. xxvii. 18; 
Mk. xv. 10; διὰ τὸν φόβον τινός, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 38; xx. 
19; Rev. xviii. 10, 15; διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην, Eph. ii. 4. 
of any other cause on account of which one is said to do 
or to have done something, — as in Mt. xiv. 3,9; xv. 3,6; 
Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq.; xii. 11; xiv. 11; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro. 
iii. 25 (διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν τῶν mpoyey. ἅμαρτημ. because of the 
pretermission ete., i. e. because he had left the sins un- 
punished); Ro. vi. 19; xv. 15; 2 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iv. 13 
(60 ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκός, on account of an infirmity of the 
flesh, i. e. detained among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler 
[or Bp. Lehtft.] ad loc.) ; — or to suffer or have suffered 
something, Mt. xxiv. 9; xxvii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts 
xxi. 85; 2 Co. iv. 11; Col. iii. 6; 1 Pet. iii. 14; Rev. i. 9; 
vi.9;—or to have obtained something, Heb. ii. 9; v. 14; 1 
Jn. ii. 12; — or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10 ; 
xi 28; Eph. iv. 18; Heb. v. 12 [W. 399 (373)]; vii. 18. 
of the im peding cause, where by reason of some per- 
son or thing something is said to have been impossible: 
Mt. xiii. 58 ; xvii. 20; Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts 
xxi. 34; Heb. iii. 19; iv. 6. διά with the acc. of a pers. 
is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. for the sake of ]: Mk. 
li. 27; Jn. xi. 42; xii. 30; 1 Co. xi. 9; Heb. i. 14; vi. 7; 
διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; 2 Tim. ii. 
10; διὰ Χριστόν for Christ's sake, to promote his cause, 
1 Co. iv. 10; àv ὑμᾶς, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9; 
Phil.i.24; 1 Th.i.5. διά τινα, because of the example 
set by one: 2 Co. ij. 10; Ro. ii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 2; διὰ τὸν 
Χριστόν for Clirist, to become a partner of Christ, Phil. 
iii. 7 (equiv. to tva Χριστὸν κερδήσω, vs. 8). 6. dia τό, 
because that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either 
standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 23; — or having a 
subjeet aec. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12; Mk. v. 4; Lk. ii. 
4; xix. 11; Acts iv. 2; xii. 20; xviii. 2; xxvii. 4, 9; xxviii. 
18; Phil. i. 7; Heb. vii. 24; x. 2; Jas. iv. 2; — or with its 
subject acc. evident from the context, as Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. 
iv. 6; Lk. xi. 8; xviii. ; xxiii. 8; Acts viii. 11; xviii. 3. 

C. In Composition διά indicates 1. a passing 
through space or time, through, (διαβαίνω, διέρχομαι, διὺ- 
λίζω, ete.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (Otapévo, δια- 
τελέω, διατηρέω). and completeness of action (διακαθαρίζω, 
διαζώννυμι). 3. distribution (διαδίδωμι, διαγγέλλω, δια- 
φημίζω). 4, separation (διαλύω, διαιρέω). 5. rival- 
ry and endeavor (διαπίνω, διακατελέγχομαι ; cf. Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 854; [Winer, as below, p. 6]). 6. transition 
from one state to another (διαλλάσσω, διορθόω). [Cf. Win- 
er, De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v.; Valekenaer on Hdt. 5, 
18; Cattier. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39; 4. 


διαβαίνω 


Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. priip. zusammeng. verba 
im N. T. p. 17 sq.] No one of the N. T. writers makes 
more freq. use of verbs compounded with διά than Luke, 
[see the list in Winer, u. s. p. 3 note; on their constr. W. 
§ 52, 4, 8]. ; 

δια-βαίνω : 2 aor. διέβην, inf. διαβῆναι, ptep. διαβάς ; as 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; (Plin. pertranseo) ; to pass 
through, cross over; a. transitively : τὴν θάλασσαν ὡς διὰ 
ξηρᾶς, Heb. xi. 29. b. intrans.: πρός twa, Lk. xvi. 26; 
eis with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 9; (for 12,15. xiii. 7).* 

δια-βάλλω: 1 aor. pass. διεβλήθην ; 1. prop. to throw 
over or across, to send over, (τὶ διά τινος). — 2. very often, 
fr. Hdt. down, to traduce, calumniate, slander, accuse, 
defame (cf. Lat. perstringere, Germ. durc hziehen, [διά 
as it were from one to another; see Winer, De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 17]), not only of those who bring a 
false charge against one (διέβλητο πρὸς αὐτὸν ἀδίκως, 
Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 3), but also of those who disseminate 
the truth concerning a man, but do so maliciously, insidi- 
ously, with hostility [cf. Lucian's Essay de calumn. non 
temere credend.], (Dan. iii. 8 Sept.; Dan. vi. 24 Theo- 
dot.) ; so διεβλήθη αὐτῷ ὡς διασκορπίζων, Lk. xvi. 1, (with 
dat. of pers. to whom the charge is made, also in Hdt. 5, 
35, et al.; τινὰ πρός τινα, Hdt. 5, 96, et al.; foll. by ὡς 
with ptep., Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 23; Plat. epp. 7 p. 334 a.). 
[S¥YN. see κατηγορέω.] * 

δια-βεβαιόομαι (-odpar); mid. to affirm strongly, assert 
confidently, [cf. W. 253 (238)]: περί twos (Polyb. 12, 
11 (12), 6), 1 Tim. i. 7 [ef. WH. App. p. 167]; Tit. iii. 
8. (Dem. p. 220, 4; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ael.) * 

δια-βλέπω : fut. διαβλέψω; 1 aor. διέβλεψα; to look 
through, penetrate by vision; a. to look fixedly, stare 
straight before one (Plat. Phaedo p. 86 d.): διέβλεψε, of 
a blind man recovering sight, Mk. viii. 25 T WH Tr txt. 
[some refer this tob.]. — b. to see clearly: foll. by an inf. 
expressing the purpose, Mt. vii. 5; Lk. vi. 42. (Aristot., 
Plut.) * 

διάβολος, -ov, (διαβάλλω, q. v.), prone to slander, slander- 
ous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut. al): 1 
Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. ii.3; as subst. 6 διάβολος, 
a calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see κατηγορέω, 
fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11, 5; [Aristot., al.]) : Sept. Esth. vii. 
4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. 6 διάβολος 
[also διάβ. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118); B. 89 
(78)] is applied κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν to the one called in Hebr. 
jown, ὁ σατανᾶς (q. v-), viz. Satan, the prince of demons, 
the author of evil, persecuting good men (Jobi.; Zech. 
iii. 1 sqq., cf. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God 
and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with dis- 
eases by means of demons who take possession of their 
bodies at his bidding ; the malignant enemy of God and 
the Messiah: Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11]; xiii. 39; xxv. 41; Lk. 
iv. 2, [3, 5 RL, 6, 13]; viii. 12; Jn. xiii. 2; Acts x. 38; 
Eph.iv.27; vi. 11; 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb. 
ii. 14; Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v. 8; Jude 9; Rev. ii. 10; xii. 
9, 12; xx. 2, 10; (Sap. ii. 24; [cf. Ps. eviii. (eix.) 6; 1 Chr. 
xxi 1]) Men who resemble the devil in mind and will 
are said εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου to be of the devil, prop. to de- 


‘ 


135 











διάγω 


rive their origin from the devil, trop. to depend upon the 
devil in thought and action, to be prompted and governed 
by him: Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; the same are called 
τέκνα ToU διαβ. children of the devil, 1 Jn. iii. 10; υἱοὶ 
ToU δ. sons of the devil, Acts xiii. 10, cf. Mt. xiii. 38; Jn. 
viii. 38; 1 Jn. iii. 10. The name διάβολος is fig. applied 
to a man who, by opposing the cause of God, may be 
said to act the part of the devil or to side with him: Jn. 
vi. 70, cf. Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. BB.DD. s.v.]* 
δι-αγγέλλω ; 2 aor. pass. διηγγέλην ; fr. Pind. down; to 
carry a message through, announce everywhere, through 
places, through assemblies of men, ete.; to publish abroad, 
declare, [see διά, C. 3]: τί, Lk. ix. 60; Acts xxi. 26 (διαγ- 
γέλλων, sc. to all who were in the temple and were 
knowing to the affair) ; with the addition ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ; 
Ro. ix. 17 fr. Ex. ix. 16. (Lev. xxv. 9; Josh. vi.10; Ps. 
ii. 7; [lviii. (lix.) 13]; Sir. xliii. 2; 2 Macc. iii. 34.) * 

διά-γε, see γέ, 1. 

Sta-ylvopar: 2 aor. διεγενόμην ; 1. to be through, con- 
tinue. 2. to be between, intervene ; hence in Grk. writ. 
fr. Isaeus (p. 84, 14, 9 [or. de Hagn. hered. ] χρόνων διαγε- 
vouévov) down, the aor. is used of time, to have intervened, 
elapsed, passed meanwhile, [ef. χρόνου μεταξὺ διαγενομένου 
Lys. 93, 6]: ἡμερῶν διαγενομένων τινῶν, Acts xxv. 13; 
ἱκανοῦ χρόνου διαγενομένου, Acts xxvii. 9 ; Suayevopevov τοῦ 
σαββάτου, Mk. xvi. 1.* 

δια-γινώσκω ; fut. διαγνώσομαι; 1. to distinguish (Lat. 
dignosco), i. e. to know accurately, ascertain exactly: rt, 
Acts xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. 
in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic. 
cognosco): τὰ καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς your case, Acts xxiv. 22; (2 
Mace. ix. 15; Dem. p. 629, 25; p. 545, 9; al.).* 

δια-γνωρίζω: 1 aor. διεγνώρισα ; to publish abroad, make 
known thoroughly: περί τινος, Lk. ii. 17 RG. Besides, 
only in [Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang. 
and] in Schol. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate.* 

διά-γνωσις, -ews, 7, (see διαγινώσκω) ; 1. a distin- 
guishing. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. cognitio), examina- 
tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 18; Plat. lege. 9 p. 865 c.): 
Acts xxv. 21." 

Sia-yoyyito: impf. διεγόγγυζον ; to murmur (διά i.e. 
either through a whole crowd, or ‘among one another,’ 
Germ. durch einander [cf. διά, C.]); hence it is always 
used of many indignantly complaining (see γογγύζων) : 
Lk. xv. 2; xix.7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7,8; [Num. xiv. 2]; Josh. 
ix. 24 (18), ete.; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24; Clem. Alex. i. 
p. 528 ed. Pott.; Heliod. 7, 27, and in some Byzant. writ.) 
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.* 

δια-γρηγορέω, -à : 1 aor. διεγρηγόρησα; to watch through, 
(dian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] πάσης τῆς νυκτὸς... δια- 
γρηγορήσαντες, Niceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571 
2.) ; to remain awake: Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome 
the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down, 
βεβαρημ. trv); [al. (e.g. R. V. txt.) to be fully awake, 
ef. Niceph. τι. s. p. 205 f. δόξαν ἀπεβαλόμην ὥσπερ οἱ δια- 
γρηγορήσαντες Ta ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις ὀνείρατα; Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 11 sq.].* 

Si-dyo ; 1. to lead through, lead across, send across. 


διαδέχομαι 


2. with τὸν βίον, τὸν χρόνον, οἷο., added or understood, 
to pass: βίον, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (very often in Grk. writ.) ; 
διάγειν ἔν τινι, sc. τὸν βίον to live [W. 593 (551 sq.) ; B. 
144 (126)], Tit. iii. 3 (ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ, Plat. Phaedr. p. 
259 d.; ἐν εἰρήνῃ καὶ σχολῇ. Plut. Timol. 3).* 

δια-δέχομαι : 1 aor. διεδεξάμην : prop. to receive through 
another anything left or bequeathed by him, to receive in 
succession, receive in turn, succeed to: τὴν σκηνήν the 
tabernacle, Acts vii. 45. (τὴν ἀρχήν, τὴν βασιλείαν, etc., 
in Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.) [C£. δέχομαι. * 

διάδημα, -ros, τό, (διαδέω to bind round), a diadem, i. e. 
the blue band marked with white with which Persian 
kings used to bind on the turban or tiara; the kingly or- 
nament for the head: Rev. xii. 3; xiii. 1; xix. 12. (Xen. 
Cyr. 8,3, 13; Esth. i. 11; ii. 17 for 33; 1 Mace. i. 9.)* 

[Syn. διάδημα, στέφανος: στ. like the Lat. corona is 
a crown in the sense of a chaplet, wreath, or garland —the 
badge of “victory in the games, of civic worth, of military 
valor, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness”; διάδημα is a crown 
as the badge of royalty, βασιλείας γνώρισμα ( Lucian, Pisc. 35)- 
Cf. Trench § xxiii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 1; Dict. of 
Christ. Antiq. s. v. Coronation p. 464sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Diadem; but cf. στέφανος, a.] 

δια-δίδωμι ; fut. διαδώσω (Rev. xvii. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. 
διέδωκα ; 2 aor. impv. διάδος : Pass., impf. 3 pers. sing. 
διεδίδοτο (Acts iv. 35), for which LT Tr WH read διε- 
Oideto (see ἀποδίδωμι) ; 1. to distribute, divide among 
several [cf. διά, C. 3]: ri; Lk. xi. 22; τί τινι, Lk. xviii. 22 
(Lehm. δός) ; Jn. vi. 11 (Tdf. ἔδωκεν) ; pass. Acts iv. 35. 
Its meaning is esp. illustrated by Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 7 τὸν 
Κῦρον λαβόντα τῶν κρεῶν διαδιδόναι rois . . . Üepazevrais 
«ον τοιαῦτα ἐποίει, ἕως διεδίδου πάντα à ἔλαβε κρέα. 2. 
to give over, deliver : τί τινι, Rev. xvii. 13; but here GL 
T Tr WH have restored é:ddaox (cf. δίδωμι, init.).* 

διά-δοχος, -ov, 6, 7, (διαδέχομαι), succeeding, a successor : 
Acts xxiv. 27. (Sir. xlvi. 1; [xlviii. 8]; 2 Mace. xiv. 26; 
often in Grk. writ. fr. [ Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 5, 26 down.) * 

δια-ζωννύω or διαζώννυμι : 1 aor. διέζωσα ; 1 aor. mid. 
διεζωσάμην : pf. pass. ptep. διεζωσμένος ; to bind or gird 
all around (διά; this force of the prep. appears in the 
trop. use of the verb in Plut. Brut. 31, 3 ὡς δ᾽ ἡ φλὸξ ῥυεῖσα 
καὶ διαζώσασα πανταχόθεν τὴν πόλιν διέλαμψε ποὰ- 
An) : ἑαυτόν, Jn. xiii. 4; Pass. διαζώννυμαί τε to be girded : 


@ (by attraction for ὃ [yet ef. Mey.]) ἦν διεζωσμένος, Jn. | former of which (τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ, Heb. ix. 15, 18, ef. 


xiii. 5; Mid. διαζώννυμαί τι to gird one’s self with a thing, | 


gird a thing around one's self: Jn. xxi. 7; (Ezek. xxiii. 
15 [Alex.]. in Grk. writ. occasionally fr. Thuc. on). 
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 13.* 


διαθήκη, 55,7. (διατίθημι).; 1. a disposition, arrange- 


ment, of any sort, which one wishes to be valid, (Germ. | 


Verordnung, Willensverfiigung): Gal. iii. 15, where un- 
der the name of a man's disposition is meant specifically a 
testament, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of 
that disposition [ef. Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; esp. the 
last disposal which one makes of his earthly possessions 
after his death, a. testament or will (so in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Arstph.], Plat. lege. 11 p. 922 c. sqq. down) : Heb. ix. 
16 sq. 2. a compact, covenant (Arstph. av. 440), 
very often in the Scriptures for m3 (Vulg. testamen- 


136 








διαθήκη 


ium). Τὸν the word covenant is used to denote the close: 
relationship which God entered into, first with Noah 
(Gen. vi. 18; ix. 9 sqq. [cf. Sir. xliv. 18]), then with 
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob and their posterity (Lev. 
xxvi. 42 [cf. 2 Mace. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen. 
xv. and xvii.), and afterwards through Moses with the 
people of Israel (Ex. xxiv.; Deut. v. 2; xxviii. 69 (xxix. 
1). By this last covenant the Israelites are bound to 
obey God’s will as expressed and solemnly promulged in 
the Mosaie law; and he promises them his almighty 
protection and blessings of every kind in this world, 
but threatens transgressors with the severest punish- 
ments. Hence in the N. T. we find mention of ai πλάκες 
τῆς διαθήκης (303 nim, Deut. ix. 9, 15), the tables of 
the law, on which the duties of the covenant were inscribed 
(Ex. xx.); of ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθ. (ZT 7178, Deut. x. 
8; xxxi. 9; Josh. iii. 6, ete.), the ark of the covenant or 
law, in which those tables were deposited, Heb. ix. 4; 
Rev. xi. 19; of ἡ διαθήκη περιτομῆς the covenant of cir- 
cumcision, made with Abraham, whose sign and seal was 
circumcision (Gen. xvii. 10 sqq.), Acts vii. 8; of τὸ αἷμα: 
τῆς διαθήκης the blood of the victims, by the shedding and 
sprinkling of which the Mosaic covenant was ratified, 
Heb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8; of ai διαθῆκαι the covenants, 
one made with Abraham, the other through Moses with 
the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mrg. ἡ διαθήκη] (Sap- 
xviii. 22; Sir. xliv. 11; 2 Mace. viii. 15; Ep. of Barn. 9; 
[ef. W. 177 (166)]); of ai διαθῆκαι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, the 
covenants to which the promise of salvation through the 
Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 12 (συνθῆκαι ἀγαθῶν ὑπο-- 
σχέσεων, Sap. xii. 21); for Christian salvation is the 
fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those cov- 
enants, esp. to that made with Abraham: Lk. i. 72 sq.: 
Acts iii. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (where διαθήκη is 
God's arrangement i. e. the promise made to Abraham). 
As the new and far more excellent bond of friendship 
which God in the Messiah's time would enter into with 
the people of Israel is called AWAN ΓΞ, καινὴ διαθήκη 
(Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31), — which divine promise Christ 
has made good (Heb. viii. 8-10; x. 16), — we find in the 
N. T. two distinct covenants spoken of, δύο διαθῆκαι (Gal. 
iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the 








viii. 9) the latter is contrasted, as καινὴ διαθήκη. Mt. xxvi. 
28; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass. in RGL [in Mt. in Tr 
also]) ; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25 
2 Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8; κρείττων διαθήκη. Heb. vii. 22 
αἰώνιος διαθήκη, Heb. xiii. 20; and Christ is called κρείτ- 
Tovos Or καινῆς or νέας διαθήκης μεσίτης : Heb. viii. 6; ix. 
15; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise 
faith in Christ, and God promises them grace and salva- 
tion eternal. This covenant Christ set up and ratified by 
undergoing death; hence the phrases τὸ αἷμα τῆς καινῆς" 
διαθήκης, τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης. (see αἷμα sub fin.), [ Heb. 
x. 29]; τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, my blood by the shed- 
ding of which the covenant is established, Mt. xxvi. 28 
T WH and Mk. xiv. 24 T Tr WII (on two gen. after one 
noun cf. Matthiae $ 380, Anm. 1; Kühner ii. p. 288 sq. 5. 





διαίρεσις 


[Jel£ § 543, 1, cf. $ 466; W. $30, 3 Note 3; B. 155 (136) ]). 
By metonymy of the contained for the container ἡ παλαιὰ 
διαθήκη is used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of the sacred books of the 
O. T. because in them the conditions and principles of 
the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be 
noted the amphiboly or twofold use [cf. Philo de mut. 
nom. § 6] by which the writer to the Hebrews, in ix. 16 
sq., substitutes for the meaning covenant which διαθήκη 
bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of testament (see 1 above), 
and likens Christ to a testator, — not only because the 
author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be- 
queathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring 
to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is 
made possible for the disciples of Christ by his death 
(ix. 15), and that even the Mosaie covenant had been 
consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led 
the Latin Vulgate to render διαθήκη wherever it occurs 
in the Bible [i. e. in the New Test., not always in the 
Old; see B.D. s. v. Covenant, and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Testament] by the word testamentum.* 

δι-αίρεσις, -ews, 7, (διαιρέω, 4- V-) ; 1. division, dis- 
tribution, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. distinction, differ- 
ence, (Plat. Soph. p. 267 b. τίνα διαίρεσιν ἀγνωσίας τε kal 
γνώσεως θήσομεν ; al.) ; in particular, a distinction arising 
from a different distribution to different persons, [ A. V. 
diversity]: 1 Co. xii. 4—6, cf. 11 διαιροῦν ἰδίᾳ ἑκάστῳ καθὼς 
βούλεται." 

δι-αιρέω, -ῶ; 2 aor. διεῖλον ; 1. to divide into parts, 
to part, to tear, cleave or cut asunder, (Hom. and subseq. 
writ.; Gen. xv. 10; 1 K. iii. 25). 2. to distribute: τί 
τινε (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 51; Hell. 3, 2, 10) : Lk. xv. 12; 1 
Co. xii. 11; (Josh. xviii. 5; 1 Chr. xxiii. 6, etc.).* 

[δια-καθαίρω : 1 aor. διεκάθαρα (un-Attic and later form ; 
cf. Moeris, ed. Piers. p. 137 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25; Veitch 
8. v. καθαίρων), inf. διακαθᾶραι : to cleanse (throughly cf. διά, 
C. 2 ie.) thoroughly: Lk. iii. 17 TWH Lmrg. Tr mrg. ; 
for RG διακαθαρίζω. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat. down.) ἢ] 

δια-καθαρίζω: fut. διακαθαριῶ | B. 37 (32); W. $13,16.; 
WH. App. p. 163]; to cleanse thoroughly, (Vulg. per- 
mundo): τὴν ἅλωνα, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17 [T WH etc. 
διακαθᾶραι, q. v.]. (Not found in prof. auth., who use 
διακαθαίρω, as τὴν ἅλω, Alciphr. ep. 3, 26.) * 

δια-κατ-ἐελέγχομαι : impf. διακατηλεγχόμην ; to confute 
with rivalry and effort or in a contest (on this use of the 
prep. διά in compos. cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 854; [al. give 
it here the sense of completeness; see διά, C. 2]): with 
dat. of pers. [W. $ 31, 1 f. ; B. 177 (154)]; not found exe. 
in Acts xviii. 28 [ R. V. powerfully confuted].* 

&akovéo, -d; impf. διηκόνουν (as if the verb were com- 
pounded of διά and ἀκονέω, for the rarer and earlier form 
ἐδιακόνουν, cf. B. 35 (31) ; Ph. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. $86 Anm. 
6; Krüger $28, 14, 13); [fut. &akovjsc]; 1 aor. διηκό- 
vnoa (for the earlier ἐδιακύνησα) ; Pass., pres. ptep. δια- 
kovovpevos; 1 aor. inf. διακονηθῆναι, ptep. διακονηθείς ; 
(διάκονος, q. v.) ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.], Hdt. down ; to 
be a servant, attendant, domestic; to serve, wait upon; — 1. 
univ.: [absol 6 διακονῶν, Lk. xxii. 26]; with dat. of 
pers. to minister to one; render ministering offices to : Jn. 


187 








διακονία 


xii. 26; Acts xix. 22; Philem. 13; Pass. to be served, 
ministered unto (W. $ 39, 1; [B. 188 (163)]): Mt. xx. 
28; Mk. x. 45. 2. Like the Lat. ministrare, to wait 
at table and offer food and drink to the guests, [cf. W. 593 
(552)] : with dat. of pers., ΜῈ. ἵν. 11; viii. 15; Mk. i. 13, 
31; Lk. iv. 39; xii. 37; xvii. 8; absol. 6 διακονῶν, Lk. 
xxii. 27; soalso of women preparing food, Lk. x. 40; Jn. 
xii. 2; (Menand. ap. Athen. 6 c. 46, p. 245 c.; Anaer. 
4,6; al.; pass. διακονεῖσθαι ὑπό τινος, Diod. 5, 28; Philo, 
vit. contempl. § 9). 3. 10 minister i.e. supply food and 
the necessaries of life: with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 44; 
xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 41; διηκόνουν αὐτοῖς ἐκ (Rec. ἀπὸ) 
τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐταῖς, Lk. viii. 3; to relieve one's neces- 
sities (e. g. by collecting alms): Ro. xv. 25 ; Heb. vi. 10; 
τραπέζαις , to provide, take care of, distribute, the things 
necessary to sustain life, Acts vi. 2. absol, those are 
said διακονεῖν, i. e. to take care of the poor and the sick, 
who administer the office of deacon (see διάκονος, 2) in 
the Christian churches, to serve as deacons: 1 Tim. iii. 
10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen- 
eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace. 
of the thing, to minister i. e. attend to, anything, that may 
serve another's interests: χάρις διακονουμένη ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, 2 
Co. viii. 19; [ἁδροτής, ibid. 20]; ὅσα διηκόνησε, how many 
things I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. 18; ἐπιστολὴ 
διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, an epistle written, as it were, by 
our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 3. with ace. of the 
thing and dat. of pers., to minister a thing unto one, to- 
serve one with or by supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; τὶ 
eis ἑαυτούς, i. e. εἰς ἀλλήλους to one another, for mutual 
use, 1 Pet. iv. 10.* 

διακονία. -as, ἡ. (διάκονος), [fr. Thue., Plat. down], ser- 
vice, ministering, esp. ef those who execute the commands 
of others; 1. univ.: 2 Tim. iv. 11; Heb. i. 14. 2. 
of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro- 
mote religion among men; a. of the office of Moses: 
ἡ Stax. τοῦ θανάτου, concisely for the ministration by 
which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings 
death, 2 Co. iii. 7; τῆς κατακρίσεως, the ministration by 
which condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the 
office of the apostles and its administration: Acts i. 
17, 25; xx. 24; xxi. 19; Ro. xi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 1: vi. 35 
1 Tim. i. 12; τοῦ λόγου, Acts vi. 4; τοῦ πνεύματος. the 
ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and 
be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. iii. 8; τῆς δικαιο- 
σύνης, by which men are taught how they may become 
rizhteous with God, ibid. 9; τῆς καταλλαγῆς, the ministry 
whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered 
reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18; πρὸς τὴν ὑμῶν δια- 
κονίαν, that by preaching the gospel I might minister 
unto you, 2 Co. xi. 8. c. of the ministration or service 
of all who, endowed by God with powers of mind and 
heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously 
and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among 
men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, ete. : 1 Co. 
xii. 5; Eph. iv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 5. What ministry is re- 
ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the ministra- 
tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian 


διάκονος 


affection: 1 Co. xvi. 15; Rev. ii. 19, esp. of those who 
suecor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac- 
tions [Acts xii. 25]; the care of the poor, the supplying 
or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Tandreichung): 
Acts vi. 1; 2 Co. ix. 13; ἡ διακονία ἡ els τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. 
vill. 4; ix. 1; ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας, the ministration 
rendered through this λειτουργία, 2 Co. ix. 12; πέμπειν 
εἰς διακονίαν τινί, to send a thing to one for the relief of 
his want [ A. V. to send relief unto], Acts xi. 29 (κομίζειν 
χρήματα πολλὰ eis διακονίαν τῶν χηρῶν, Acta "Thomae 8 56, 
p. 233 ed. Tdf.); ἡ διακονία pov ἡ els 'IepovgaA. “ my min- 
istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis- 
tration intended for Jerusalem " (Fritzsche), Ro. xv. 31 
[here L Tr mrg. read ἡ Óopodopía . . . ἐν etc. ]. 4. the 
officeofdeacon in the primitive church (see διάκονος, 
2): Ro. xii. 7. 5. the serviee of those who prepare 
and present food : Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oec. 7, 41).* 
διάκονος, -ov, ὁ, 7, (of uncert. origin, but by no means, 
as was formerly thought, compounded of διά and κόνις, 
so as to mean prop. ‘raising dust by hastening’; cf. 
€yxovew ; for a in the prep. διά is short, in διάκονος long. 
Bttm. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 231 sq.] thinks 
it is derived fr. obsol. διάκω i. q. διήκω [allied with διώκω ; 
cf. Vaniéek p. 363]); one who executes the commands 
of another, esp. of a master; a servant, attendant, min- 
ister ; 1. univ.: of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii. 
13; with gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 26; xxiii. 11; 
Mk. ix. 35; x. 43, (in which pass. it is used fig. of those 
who advance others’ interests even at the sacrifice of their 
own) ; τῆς ἐκκλησίας, of one who does what promotes the 
welfare and prosperity of the church, Col. i. 25; διάκονοι 
τοῦ θεοῦ, those through whom God carries on his admin- 
istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4; teachers 
of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5; 2 Co. vi. 4; 1 Th. iii. 
9 RT Tr WH txt. Lmreg.; the same are called διάκονοι 
(τοῦ) Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xi. 23; Col.i. 7; 1 Tim. iv. 6; ἐν κυρίῳ, 
in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7; [Eph. vi. 21]; 6 διάκ. 
pov my follower, Jn. xii. 26; τοῦ Σατανᾶ, whom Satan 
uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [dyaprias, Gal. ii. 17]; 
διάκ. περιτομῆς (abstr. for coner.), of Christ, who labored 
for the salvation of the circumcised i. e. the Jews, Ro. xv. 
8; with gen. of the thing to which service is rendered, 
i.e. to which one is devoted : καινῆς διαθήκης, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; 
Tov εὐαγγελίου, Eph. iii. 7; Col. i. 23; δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co. 
sa Woe 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office 
assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has 
charge of and distributes the money collected for their 
use, [cf. BB.DD., Diet. of Christ. Antiq., Schaff-Herzoz 
s. v. Deacon; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. dissert. i. $i.; 
Julius Müller, Dogmatische Abhandlungen, p. 560 
sqq.]: Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 12, cf. Acts vi. 3 sqq. ; 
ἡ διάκονος, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp. 10, 97), a wo- 
man to whom the care of either poor or sick women was 
entrusted, Ro. xvi. 1 [cf. Diets. as above, s. v. Deaconess ; 
Lehtft. as above p. 191; B. D. s. v. Phoebe]. 3. a 
waiter, one who serves food and drink: Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in 
Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3, 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31, 4, 5; 
Leian. de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, p. 291 a.; 10, 


138 





διακρίνω 


420 e.; see διακονέω, 2 and -via, 5; [also Wetst. on Mt. iv. 
111." 

[ϑυν. διάκονος, δοῦλος, θεράπων, ὑπηρέτης: “ διά- 
kovos represents the servant in his activity for the work; not 
in his relation, either servile, as that of the δοῦλος, or more 
voluntary, as in the case of the θεράπων, to a person” 
Trench; [yet cf. e. g. Ro. xiii. 4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 ete.]. δοῦλος 
opp. to ἐλεύθερος, and correlate to δεσπότης or κύριος, denotes 
a bondman, one who sustains a permanent servile relation to 
another. θεράπων is the voluntary performer of services, 
whether as a freeman or a slave ; it is a nobler, tenderer word 
than δοῦλος. ὑπηρ. acc. to its etymol. suggests subordi- 
nation. Cf. Trench $ ix.; B. D. 5, v. Minister; Mey. on 
Eph. iii. 7.] 

διακόσιοι, ar, -a, wo hundred: Mk. vi. 37; Jn. vi. 7, ete. 

δι-ακούω : fut. διακούσομαι ; prop. to hear one through, 
hear to the end, hear with care, hear fully, [cf. διά, C. 2] 
(Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause, Acts xxiii. 
35; so in Deut. i. 16; Dio Cass. 36, 53 (36).* 

δια-κρίνω ; impf. διέκρινον ; 1 aor. διέκρινα ; Mid., [ pres. 
Staxpivopar); impf. διεκρινόμην ; 1 aor. διεκρίθην (in prof. 
auth. in a pass. sense, to be separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B. 
52 (45)]) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; in Sept. chiefly 
for Ddw, also for 31 ete. 1. to separate, make a dis- 
tinction, discriminate, [cf. διά, C. 4]: οὐδὲν διέκρινε μεταξὺ 
ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν, Acts xV. 95 μηδὲν διακρίναντα, making 
no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12 
LT Tr WH; like the Lat. distinguo, used emphatically : 
to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest, 
in effect i.q. to prefer, yield to him the preference or 
honor : τινά, 1 Co. iv. 7 [cf. W. 452 (421) ]; τὸ σῶμα τοῦ κυ- 
piov, 1 Co. xi. 29 [R G]. 2. to learn by discrimination, 
to. try, decide: Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; 1 
Co. xiv. 29; ἑαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 31; 10 determine, give judg- 
ment, decide a dispute: 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass.and Mid. to be 
parted, to separate one’s self from; 1. to withdraw from 
one, desert him (Thue. 1, 105; 3, 9) ; of hereties withdraw- 
ing from the society of true Christians (Sozom. 7, 2 [ p. 705 
ed. Vales.] ἐκ rovrov of μὲν διακριθέντες ἰδίᾳ ἐκκλησίαζον) : 
Jude 22 acc. to the (preferable) reading of L T Tr txt. 
ἐλέγχετε διακρινομένους, those who separate themselves from 
you, i.e. who apostatize ; instead of the Ree. ἐλεεῖτε δια- 
κρινόμενοι, Which is to be rendered, making for yourselves 
a selection; cf. Huther ad loc.; [others though adopting 
the reading preferred above, refer διακρ. to the following 
head and translate it while they dispute with you; but 
WII (see their App.) Tr mrg. follow codd. NB and a few 
other author. in reading éAeáre διακρινομένους ace. to 
which διακρ. is probably to be referred to signification 3 : 
R. V. txt. “on some have mercy, who are in doubt”). 2. 
to separate one's self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive 
with, dispute, contend : with dat. of pers. Jude 9, (Polyb. 
2, 22,11 [cf. W. 8 31,1 g.; B. 177 (154) ; πρός τινα, Acts 
xi. 2, (Hdt. 9, 58). 3. in a sense not found in prof. 
auth. to be at variance with one’s self, hesitate, doubt: Mt. 
xxi. 21; Ro. xiv. 23; Jas. i. 6 ; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, Mk. xi. 
23 ; ἐν ἑαυτῷ [i. e. rois], Jas. ii. 4 [al. refer this to 1: do 
ye not make distinctions among yourselves]; μηδὲν διακρι- 
vóuevos, nothing doubting i. e. wholly free from doubt, 


διάκρισις 


Jas. i. 6; without any hesitation as to whether it be law- 
ful or not, Acts x. 20 and acc. to RG in xi. 12; οὐ διε- 
κρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ he did not hesitate through want of faith, 
Ro. iv. 20.* 

Sid-Kpicis, -ews, 9, (διακρίνω). a distinguishing, discern- 
ing, judging: πνευμάτων, 1 Co. xii. 10; καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ, 
Heb. v. 14; μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν not for the pur- 
pose of passing judgment on opinions, as to which one is 

to be preferred as the more correct, Ro. xiv. 1 [see δια- 
λογισμός, 1]. (Xen., Plat., al.) * 

δια-κωλύω: impf. διεκώλυον ; (διά in this compound does 
not denote effort as is com. said, but separation, 
Lat. dis, ef. Germ. verhindern, Lat. prohibere; οἵ. δια- 
κλείω, to separate by shutting, shut out ; ef. Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 17 sq.); to hinder, prevent: τινά, 
Mt. iii. 14 [on the tense cf. W. $ 40, 8 ο.; B. 205 (178)]. 
(From Soph. and Thuc. down.) * 

Sia-Aarew : impf. διελάλουν ; impf. pass. διελαλούμην; 
to converse together, to talk with, (διά denoting by turns, 
or one with another; see διακατελέγχομαι), τί, pass. 
[were talked of ], Lk. i. 65; πρὸς ἀλλήλους (as Polyb. 23, 
9, 6), τί ἂν ποιήσειαν [-σαιεν al. ], of the conference of men 
deliberating, Lk. vi. 11. (Eur. Cycl. 175.) * 

δια-λέγομαι ; impf. διελεγόμην; τ aor. 3 pers. sing. δὲε- 
λέξατο (LT Tr WH in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor. 
διελέχθην ; (mid. of διαλέγω; to select, distinguish) ; J. 
to think different things with one's self, mingle thought with 
thought (c£. diadoyigopar) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so 
in Hom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, dis- 
course with one, argue, discuss: absol, Acts [xviii. 4]; 
xix. 8 sq.; [xx. 9]; περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 25; τινί, with 
one, Acts xvii. 17; xviii. 19; xx. 7; Heb. xii. 5; ἀπὸ τῶν 
γραφῶν, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts 
xvii. 2; πρός τινα, Acts xvii. 17; xxiv. 12; with the idea 
of disputing prominent: πρὸς ἀλλήλους, foll. by interrog. 
tis, Mk. ix. 34 ; περί τινος, Jude 9.* 

δια-λείπω : [2 aor. διέλιπον] ; to interpose a delay, to in- 
termit, leave off for a time something already begun: ov 
διέλιπε [T WH mrg. διέλειπεν] καταφιλοῦσα (on the ptep. 
cf. W. $ 45, 4 a.; [B. 300 (257)]), she has not ceased 
kissing, has continually kissed, Lk. vii. 45. (Is. v. 14; 
Jer. xvii. 8; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

διά-λεκτος, -ov, 7), (διαλέγω) ; 1. conversation, speech, 
discourse, language (Plat., Dem., al.). 2. fr. Polyb. 
[ef. Aristot. probl. 10, 38 τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μία φωνή. ἀλλὰ 
διάλεκτοι πολλαί] down, the tongue or language peculiar 
to any people: Acts i. 19; ii. 6, 8; xxi. 40 ; xxii. 2; xxvi. 
14. (Polyb. 1, 80,6; 3, 22, 3; 40,6, 3 sq. 5 μεθερμηνεύειν 
εἰς τὴν SORT διάλεκτον, Diod. 1, 37; πᾶσα μὲν διάλεκτος, 
ἡ δ᾽ ἑλληνικὴ διαφερόντως ὀνομάτων πλουτεῖ, Philo, vit. 
Moys. ii. $ 7; [cf. Müller on Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 4 fin.].)* 

[δια-λιμπάνω (or -λυμπάνω) : impf. διελίμπανον ; to in- 
lermit, cease: κλαίων ov διελίμπανεν, Acts viii. 24 WH (re- 
jected) mrg.; ef. W. 345 sq. (323 sq.); B. 300 (257). 
(Tobit x. 7; Galen in Hippocr. Epid. 1, 3; cf. Bornem. 
on Acts l. c.; Veitch s. v. λιμπάνω.) *] 

δι-αλλάσσω: 2 aor. pass. διηλλάγην; (see διά, C. 6); 
1. to change: τὶ ἀντί τινος [cf. W. 206 (194)]. 2. to 


139 








διαμαρτύρομαι 


change the mind of any one, to reconcile (so fr. [Aeschy].1 
Thue. down): τινά τινι. Pass. to be reconciled, τινί, to re- 
new friendship with one: Mt. v. 24; (1 S. xxix. 4; 1 
Esdr. iv. 31). See Fritzsche’s learned discussion of this 
word in his Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [in opp. to 
Tittmann’s view that it implies mutual enmity; see 
καταλλάσσω, fin.]; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. pp. 
7,10; [Tholuck, Bergrede Christi, p. 171 (on Mt. v. 24) ].* 

δια-λογίζομαι ; dep. mid.; impf. διελογιζόμην;; [1 aor. 
διελογισάμην, Lk. xx. 14 Lehm.]; (διά as in διαλέγομαι) ; 
to bring together MUS reasons, to reckon up the reasons, 
to reason, revolve in one's mind, deliberate: simply, Lk. i. 
29; v. 21; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, Mk. ii. 6, 8; Lk. v. 22; with ad- 
dition of περί τινος, Lk. iii. 15 ; ἐν ἑαυτῷ [or -rois], with- 
in himself, etc., Mk. ii. 8; Lk. xii. 17; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς i. q. ἐν 
ἀλλήλοις among themselves, Mt. xvi. 7 sq.; πρὸς ἑαυτούς 
i. q. πρὸς ἀλλήλους, one turned towards another, one with 
another, Mk. ix. 33 Rec.; xi. 31 L T Tr WH ; Lk. xx. 
14; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, Mk. viii. 16; παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς [see παρά, 
IL c.], Mt. xxi. 25 [L Tr WH txt. ἐν €.]; ὅτι, Jn. xi. 50 
Rec.; ὅτι equiv. to περὶ τούτου ὅτι, Mk. viii. 17. (For 
awn several times in the Psalms; 2 Mace. xii. 43; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) * 

δια-λογισμός, -o0, 6, (διαλογίζομαι), Sept. for nano 
and Chald. y, in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down, the thinking 
of a man deliben ating with himself; hence 1. athought, 
inward reasoning: Lk. ii. 35; v. 22; vi. 8; ix. 46 sq.; 
Ro. xiv. 1 [yet some bring this E 2]; the reasoning 
of those who think themselves to be wise, Ro. i. 21; 1 
Co. iii. 20; an opinion: κριταὶ διαλογισμῶν πονηρῶν judges 
with evil thoughts, i. e. who follow perverse opinions, rep- 
rehensible principles, Jas. ii. 4 [cf. W. 187 (176)]; pur- 
pose, design: Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21. 2. a deliberat- 
ing, questioning, about what is true: Lk. xxiv. 38; when 
in reference to what ought to be done, hesitation, doubt- 
ing: χωρὶς γογγυσμῶν καὶ διαλογισμῶν, Phil. ii. 14 [*yoyy. 
is the moral, dad. the intellectual rebellion against 
God’ Bp. Lghtft.]; χωρὶς ὀργῆς x. διαλογισμοῦ, 1 Tim. ii. 
8; [in the last two pass. al. still advocate the rendering 
disputing; yet cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. ¢.].* 

δια-λύω : 1 aor. pass. διελύθην ; to dissolve [cf. διά, C. 4]: 
in Acts v. 36 of a body of men broken up and dispersed, 
as often in Grk. writ.” 

δια-μαρτύρομαι ; dep. mid.; impf. διεμαρτυρόμην (Acts 
ii. 40 Rec.) ; 1 aor. διεμαρτυράμην;; in Sept. mostly for 
yn; often in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down; see a multitude 
of exx. fr. them in Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 20 
sqq. ; to call gods and men to witness [ διά, with the inter- 
position of gods and men; ef. Ellic. (after Win.) on 1 
Tim. v. 21]; 1. to testify, i. e. earnestly, religiously to 
charge: foll. by an impv. Acts ii. 40; ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ κ. 
Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, 2 Tim. iv.1, (2 K. xvii. 13; Xen. Cyr. 7, 
1,17 σὺ μὴ πρότερον ἔμβαλλε τοῖς πολεμίοις, διαμαρτύρομαι. 
πρίν ete.) ; also with ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ κτλ. foll. by ἵνα [cf. 
B. 237 (204)], 1 Tim. v. 21, (foll. by uj, Ex. xix. 21); 
foll. by the inf. 2 Tim. ii. 14 [not Lehm.], (Neh. ix. 26). 
2. to attest, testify to, solemnly affirm: Acts xx. 23; 1 Th. 
iv. 6; Heb. ii. 6 ; foll. by ὅτι, Acts x. 42; with dat. of pers. 


διαμάχομαι 


to give solemn testimony to one, Lk. xvi. 28; with ace. of 
the obj. fo confirm a thing by (the interposition of) 
testimony, to testify, cause it to be believed: τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
κυρίου, Acts vill. 25; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, Acts xx. 21; τὴν Ba- 
σιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xxviii. 23; for all the apostolice in- 
struction came back finally to testimony respecting things 
which they themselves had seen or heard, or which had 
been disclosed to them by divine revelation, (Acts i. 21 
sq.; ν. 82; x:41; xxii. 18) ; with the addition of eis and 
an ace. of the place unto which the testimony is borne: 
τὰ περὶ ἐμοῦ εἰς Ἵερουσ. Acts xxiii. 11; with the addition 
of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : τοῖς 
Ἰουδαίοις τὸν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, the Messianic dignity of 
Jesus, Acts xviii. 5; Ἰουδ. τὴν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν, the 
necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21, (τῇ 'Iepova. 
ras ἀνομίας, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).* 

δια-μάχομαι : impf. διεμαχόμην; to fight it out; contend 
fiercely: of disputants, Acts xxii. 9. (Sir. viii. 1, 3; 
very freq. in Attie writ.) * 

δια-μένω ; [impf. διέμενον] ; 2 pers. sing. fut. διαμενεῖς 
(Heb. i. 11 Knapp, Bleek, al, for Rec. [G L T Tr 
WH al.] διαμένεις) ; 1 aor. διέμεινα ; pf. διαμεμένηκα : to 
stay permanently, remain permanently, continue, [ef. per- 
dure; διά, C. 2] (Philo de gigant. ὃ 7 πνεῦμα θεῖον μένειν 
δυνατὸν ἐν ψυχῇ: διαμένειν δὲ ἀδύνατον) : Gal. ii. 5; opp. 
to ἀπόλλυμαι, Heb. i. 11 fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; with an adj. 
or adv. added denoting the condition : διέμεινε κωφός, Lk. 
i. 22; οὕτω, as they are, 2 Pet. 111. 4 ; to persevere: ἕν τινι; 
Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.) * 

δια-μερίζω : impf. διεμέριζον ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. 
διαμερίσατε; Pass., [pres. διαμερίζομαι] :; pf. ptep. drape- 
μερισμένος: 1 aor. διεμερίσθην; fut. διαμερισθήσομαι : [ Mid., 
pres. διαμερίζομαι;; 1 aor. διεμερισάμην] ; to divide; T 
to cleave asunder, cut in pieces: ζῶα διαμερισθέντα sc. by 
the butcher, Plat. lege. 8 p. 849 d.; ace. to a use pecu- 
liar to Lk. in pass. to be divided into opposing parts, to be 
at variance, in dissension: ἐπί τινα, against one, Lk. xi. 
17 sq.; ἐπί τινι, xii. 52 sq. 2. to distribute (Plat. polit. 
p. 289 c.; in Sept. chiefly for pom): τί, Mk. xv. 24 Rec.; 
τί τινι, Lk. xxii. 17 (where L'T Tr WH eis ἑαυτούς for 
RG €avrois); Acts ii. 45; Pass. Acts ii. 3; Mid. fo dis- 
tribute among themselves: τί, Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24 
GLT Tr WH; Lk. xxiii. 34; with ἑαυτοῖς added, [ Mt. 
xxvii. 35 Rec.]; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19.* 

ϑδια-μερισμός, -οῦ, 6, (Stapepitw), division; 1. a part- 
ing, distribution: Plat. lege. 6 p. 771 d.; Diod. 11, 47; 
Joseph. antt. 10, 11, 7, Sept. Ezek. xlviii. 29; Mic. vii. 
12. 2. disunion, dissension: opp. to εἰρήνη, Lk. xii. 
51; see διαμερίζω, 1." 

δια-νέμω: 1 aor. pass. διενεμέθην ; to distribute, divide, 
(Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.): pass. εἰς τὸν λαόν to be dis- 
seminated, spread, among the people, Acts iv. 17.* 

Sta-vebw ; 10 express one's meaning by a sign, nod to, 
beckon to, wink at, (διά, because “ the sign is conceived of 
as passing through the intervening space to him to whom 
it is made” Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 4): Lk. 
1.29. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Sir. xxvii. 22; Diod. 3, 
18; 17, 37; Lcian. ver. hist. 2, 44; Iearom. 15; [al.].)* 


140 





διαπεράω: 


δια-νόημα, -ros, τό, (διανοέω to think), a thought: Lk. xi. 
17. (Sept.; Sir.; often in Plat.) * 

διάνοια, -as, ἡ, (διά and νοός). Sept. for 25 and 23; 
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl.] Hdt. down; 1. 
the mind as the faculty of understanding, feeling, desiring: 
Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 30 [Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. x. 27; Eph. 
1.18 Rec. ; iv. 18; Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; 1 Pet. i.13. 2E 
understanding: 1 Jn. v. 20. 3. mind i. e. spirit (Lat. 
animus), way of thinking and feeling: Col. i. 21; Lk. i. 
51; 2 Pet. iii. 1. 4. thought; plur. contextually in a 
bad sense, evil thoughts: Eph. ii. 3, as in Num. xv. 39 
μνησθήσεσθε πασῶν τῶν ἐντολῶν κυρίου . . kai ov διαστρα- 
φήσεσθε ὀπίσω τῶν διανοιῶν ὑμῶν." 

δι-αν-οίγω ; impf. διήνοιγον: 1 aor. dujvorEa; Pass., 1 aor. 
διηνοίχθην ; [2 aor. διηνοίγην ; pf. ptep. διηνοιγμένος (Acts 
vii. 56 L'T Tr WH) ; [on variations of augm. see reff. s. v. 
dvotyo]; Sept. chiefly for NPS and nn3; occasionally in 
prof. auth. fr. Plat. Lys. p. 210 a. down; to open by di- 
viding or drawing asunder (8t), to open thoroughly (what 
had been closed) ; 1. prop.: ἄρσεν διανοῖγον μήτραν, 
a male opening the womb (the closed matrix), i. e. the 
first-born, Lk. ii. 23 (Ex. xiii. 2, ete.); οὐρανούς, pass., 
Acts vii. 56 L T Tr WH; the ears, the eyes, i. e. to restore 
or to give hearing, sight: Mk. vii. 34, 35 RG; Lk. xxiv. 
31, (Gen. iii. 5, 7; Is. xxxv. 5; 2 K. vi. 17, etc.). — 2. 
trop.: τὰς γραφάς, to open the sense of the Scriptures, 
explain them, Lk. xxiv. 32; τὸν νοῦν τινος to open the 
mind of one, i. e. cause him to understand a thing, Lk. 
xxiv. 45; τὴν καρδίαν to open one's soul, i. e. to rouse in 
one the faculty of understanding or the desire of learn- 
ing, Acts xvi. 14, (2 Mace. i. 4; Themist. orat. 2 de 
Constantio imp. [p. 29 ed. Harduin] διανοίγεταί μου ἡ kap- 
δία x. διαυγεστέρα γίνεται ἡ ψυχήν : absol., foll. by ὅτι, to 
explain, expound sc. αὐτάς, i. e. τὰς γραφάς, Acts xvii. 3. 
Cf. Win. De verb.-comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 19 sq.* 

δια-νυκτερεύω ; (opp. to διημερεύω) ; to spend the night, 
to pass the whole night, [cf. διά, C. 1]: ἔν τινι, in any em- 
ployment, Lk.vi. 12. (Diod. 13,62; Antonin. 7, 66 ; Plut. 
mor. p. 950 b. ; Hdian. 1, 16, 12 [5 Bekk.] ; Joseph. antt. 
6,13,9; b.j.2, 14, 7 [Job ii. 9; Phil. incorr. mund. $ 2; 
in Flac. § 6]; with τὴν νύκτα added, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 3.)* 

δι-ανύω: 1 aor. ptep. διανύσας ; (o accomplish fully, bring 
quite to an end, finish: τὸν πλοῦν, Acts xxi. 7. (2 Mace. 
xii. 17; fr. Hom. down.) [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii. 


| p. 85 sq.]* 


δια-παντός, see διά, A. TI. 1. a. 

δια-παρα-τριβή, -ῆς. ἡ, constant contention, incessant 
wrangling or strife, (παρατριβή attrition; contention, 
wrangling); a word justly adopted in 1 Tim. vi. 5 by 
GL T Tr WH (for Ree. παραδιατριβαί. q. v-); not found 
elsewhere [exe. Clem. Al. ete.]; cf. W. 102 (96). CE. 
the double compounds διαπαρατηρεῖν, 2 S. iii. 30; also 
(doubtful, it must be confessed), διαπαρακύπτομαι, 1 K. 
vi. 4 Ald.: διαπαροξύνω, Joseph. antt. 10, 7, 5. [Steph. 
cives also διαπαράγω, Greg. Nyss. ii. 177 b.; διαπαρα- 
λαμβάνω : διαπαρασιωπάω, Joseph. Genes. p. 9 a.; óta- 
παρασύρω. Schol. Lucian. ii. 796 Hemst.] * 

Sia-mepáo, -6; 1 aor. Otezrépaga; (0 pass over, cross over, 


διαπλέω 


e.g. ariver, a lake: Mt. ix.1; xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53 [here 
T WH follow with ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν for (to) the land (cf. R. V. 
mrg.)]; foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, Mk. v. 21; Acts 
xxi. 2; πρός with acc. of pers. Lk. xvi. 26. ([Eur.], Ar- 
stph., Xen., subseq. writ. ; Sept. for 723.) * 

δια-πλέω : 1 aor. ptep. διαπλεύσας ; (Plin. pernavigo), 
to sail across: πέλαγος (as often in Grk. writ.), Acts 
xxvii. 5 [W. $ 52, 4, 8].* 

δια-πονέω : to work out laboriously, make complete by la- 
bor. Mid. [pres. διαπονοῦμαι}; with 1 aor. pass. Otezo- 
νήθην (for which Attic writ. διεπονησάμην) ; a. to exert 
one’s self, strive; b. to manage with pains, accomplish 
with great labor ; in prof. auth. in both senses [fr. Aeschyl. 
down]. c. to be troubled, displeased, offended, pained, 
[cf. colloq. Eng. to be worked up; W. 23 (22)]: Acts iv. 
2; xvi. 18. (Aquila in Gen. vi. 6; 1 S. xx. 30; Sept. in 
Eccl. x. 9 for 3373; Hesych. διαπονηθείς - λυπηθείς.) * 

δια-πορεύω: to cause one to pass through a place; to car- 
ry across; Pass., [ pres. διαπορεύομαι ; impf. διεπορευόμην] ; 
with fut. mid. [(not found in N. T.) ; fr. Hdt. down]; to 
journey through a place, qo through: as in Grk. writ. foll. 
by διά with gen. of place, Mk. ii. 23 L Tr WH txt.; Lk. 
vi. 1; foll. by aec. [ W. $ 52, 4, 8] to travel through: Acts 
xvi.4; absol: Lk. xviii.36; Ro. xv. 24; with the addition 
[S¥N. see ἔρχομαι. * 

δι-απορέω, -d : impf. διηπόρουν ; Mid., [ pres. inf. διαπο- 
ρεῖσθαι (Lk. xxiv. 4 αὶ G)]; impf. διηπορούμην (Acts ii. 
12 T Tr WH ); in the Grk. Bible only in [Dan. ii. 3 
Symm. and] Luke; prop. thoroughly (διαγἀπορέω (q. v.), 
to be entirely at a loss, to be in perplexity: absol. Acts ii. 
12; foll. by διὰ τό with inf. Lk. ix. 7; περί τινος, Lk. xxiv. 
4 (here the mid. is to be at a loss with one’s self, for which 
L T Tr WH read the simple ἀπορεῖσθαι) ; Acts v. 24; ἐν 
ἑαυτῷ foll. by indir. discourse, Acts x. 17. (Plat., Aristot., 
Polyb., Diod., Philo, Plut., al.) * 

δια-πραγματεύομαι : 1 aor. διεπραγματευσάμην:; thorough- 
ly, earnestly (διά) to undertake a business, Dion. Hal. 3, 72; 
contextually, to undertake a business for the sake of gain : 
Lk. xix. 15. (In Plat. Phaedo p. 77 d. 95 e. to examine 
thoroughly.) * 

δια-πρίω : impf. pass. διεπριόμην ; to saw asunder or in 
twain, to divide by a saw: 1 Chr. xx. 3; Plat. conv. p. 
193 a.; Arstph. egq. 768, and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to 
be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation, 
[A. V. eut to the heart], Acts v. 33; with the addition 
ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν. Acts vii. 54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35) ; μεγάλως 
ἐχαλέπαινον kai διεπρίοντο καθ᾽ ἡμῶν. Euseb. h. e. 5, 1, 6 
[15 ed. Heinich. ; cf. Gataker, Advers. misc. col. 916 g.].* 

δι-αρπάζω: fut. διαρπάσω: 1 aor.[subj. 3 pers. sing. 
διαρπάσῃ |, inf. διαρπάσαι : to plunder: Mt. xii. 29* (where 
L T Tr WH ἁρπάσαι), 29° (R T Tr WH); Mk. iii. 27. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

δια-ρρήγνυμι and διαρρήσσω (Lk. viii. 29 [R G ; see be- 
low ]); 1 aor. διέρρηξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. διερρήγνυτο 
(Lk. v. 6, where Lehm. txt. διερήγνυτο and T Tr WH 
διερήσσετο (L mrg. διερρ.). also L T Tr WH διαρήσσων 
in Lk. viii. 29; [WH have διέρηξεν in Mt. xxvi. 65, 
and διαρήξας in Mk. xiv. 63; see their App. p. 163, and 


κατὰ πόλεις Kat κώμας, Lk. xiii. 22. 


141 


διασπορά 


8. V. P p]) ; to break asunder, burst through, rend asunder : 
τὰ δεσμά, Lk. viii. 29 ; τὸ δίκτυον, pass., Lk. v. 6; τὰ ἱμάτια. 
χιτῶνας, to rend, which was done by the Jews in extreme 
indignation or in deep grief [cf. B. D. s. v. Dress, 4]: Mt. 
xxvi 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts xiv. 14, cf. Gen. xxxvii. 29, 
34, etc.; 1 Mace. xi. 71; Joseph. b.j. 2, 15, 4. (Sept, 
[Hom.], Soph., Xen., subseq. writ.) * 

διασαφέω, -G: 1 aor. διεσάφησα;: (σαφής clear); 1. 
to make clear or plain, to explain, unfold, declare: τὴν 
παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 36 L Tr txt. WH; (Eur. Phoen. 
398; Plat. lego. 6, 754a.;al.; Polyb. 2, 1,1; 3,52, 5). 2. 
of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate: 
Mt. xviii. 31; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb. 1,46, 4; 2, 27, 3). 
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 622 sqq.; Win. De 
verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 11.* 

δια-σείω : 1 aor. διέσεισα; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; 
to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job 
iv. 14 for 197), to agitate; like concutio in juridical 
Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other 
property : τινά, Lk. tii. 14 [ A. V. do violence to]; 3 Mace. 
vii. 21; the Basilica; [Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 7,30, 7].* 

δια-σκορπίζω; 1 aor. διεσκόρπισα; Pass., pf. ptep. διε- 
σκορπισμένος ; 1 aor. διεσκορπίσθην ; 1 fut. διεσκορπισθή- 
copa: ; often in Sept., more rarely in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. 
1, 47,4; 27, 2, 10 on (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 25]) ; 
to scatter abroad, disperse: Jn. xi. 52 (opp. to συνάγω) ; 
of the enemy, Lk. i. 51; Acts v. 37, (Num. x. 35, ete. ; 
Joseph. antt. 8, 15, 4; Ael. v. h. 13, 46 (1, 6) 6 δράκων 
τοὺς μὲν διεσκόρπισε, τοὺς δὲ ἀπέκτεινε). of a flock of 
sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31 (fr. Zech. xiii. 7) ; Mk. xiv. 27; of 
property, to squander, waste: Lk. xv. 13; xvi. 1, (like δια- 
σπείρω in Soph. El.1291). like the Hebr. iw (Sept. 
Ezek. v. 2, 10, 12 [ Ald.], ete.) of grain, to scatter i. e. to 
winnow (i.e. to throw the grain a considerable distance, or 
up into the air, that it may be separated from the chaff; 
opp. to συνάγω, to gather the wheat, freed from the chaff, 
into the granary [ef. BB.DD. s. v. Agriculture]): Mt. 
xxv. 24, 26.* 

δια-σπάω: Pass. [pf. inf. διεσπᾶσθαι}; 1 aor. διεσπά- 
anv; to rend asunder, break asunder: τὰς ἁλύσεις, Mk. 
v. 4 (ras νευράς, Judg. xvi. 9); of a man, to tear in 
pieces: Acts xxiii. 10, (rods ἄνδρας κρεουργηδόν, Hat. 3, 
13).* 

δια-σπείρω: 2 aor. pass. Steamapyy; to scatter abroad, 
disperse; Pass. of those who are driven to different places, 
Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. andj 
Hdt. down ; very often in Sept.) * 

δια-σπορά. -as, 7. (διασπείρω, cf. such words as ἀγορά, 
διαφθοράν, ( Vulg. dispersio), a scattering, dispersion: dró- 
μων, opp. to σύμμιξις x. παράζευξις, Plut. mor. p. 1105 a. ; in 
the Sept. used of the Israelites dispersed among foreign 
nations, Deut. xxviii. 25; xxx. 4; esp. of their Babylo- 
nian exile, Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 17; Is. xlix. 6; Judith v. 
19; abstr. for coner. of the exiles themselves, Ps. exlvi. 
(exlvii.) 2 (i. q. 73 expelled, outeasts) ; 2 Macc. i. 27; 
εἰς τ. διασπορὰν τῶν “Ἑλλήνων unto those dispersed among 
the Greeks [W. § 30, 2 a.], Jn. vii. 35. Transferred to 
Christians [i. e. Jewish Christians (?)] scattered abroad 


διαστέλλω 


142 


διατίθημι 


among the Gentiles: Jas. i. 1 (ἐν τῇ διασπορᾷ, sc. οὖσι) ; | Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God's 


παρεπίδημοι διασπορᾶς Πόντου, sojourners in Pontus far 
away from home, 1 Pet.i. 1 (see παρεπίδημος). [BB.DD. 
s. v. Dispersion; esp. Schürer, N.'T. Zeitgesch. $ 31.]* 

δια-στέλλω: fo draw asunder, divide, distinguish, dis- 
pose, order, (Plat., Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.; often in 
Sept.) ; Pass. τὸ διαστελλόμενον, the injunction: Heb. xii. 
20, (2 Mace. xiv. 28). Mid., [ pres. διαστέλλομαι ; impf. 
διεστελλόμην ; 1 aor. διεστειλάμην ; to open one's self i. e. 
one's mind, to set forth distinctly, (Aristot., Polyb.); 
hence in the N. T. [so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12] 
to admonish, order, charge: twi, Mk. viii. 15; Acts xv. 
24; foll. by tva [cf. B. 237 (204) ], Mt. xvi. 20 R T Tr WH 
mrg.; Mk. vii. 36; ix. 9 ; διεστείλατο πολλά, ἵνα ete. Mk. 
v. 48." 

διάστημα, -ros, rd, [(διαστῆναι)}, an interval, distance ; 
space of time: ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστ. Acts v. 7, ([ἐκ πολλοῦ 
διαστήματος, Aristot. de audib. p. 800°, 5 ete.] ; rerpaerés δ. 
Polyb. 9, 1, 1; [σύμπας ὁ χρόνος ἡμερῶν k. νυκτῶν ἐστι διά- 
στημα, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried s. v. p. 
66]).* 

δια-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (διαστέλλω, cf. ἀνατολή), a distinction, 
difference: Ro. iii. 22; x. 12; of the difference of the 
sounds made by musical instruments, 1 Co. xiv. 7. 
([Aristot., Theophr.], Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

δια-στρέφω; 1 aor. inf. διαστρέψαι ; pf. pass. ptep. διε- 
orpappevos [ οἵ. WH. App. p. 170 sq.]; fr. Aeschyl. down; 
a. to distort, turn aside: τὰς ὁδοὺς κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας, ἢ σ- 
uratively (Proy. x. 10), to oppose, plot against, the saving 
purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence  b. 
to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt: τὸ 
ἔθνος, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41, 1; 8, 24, 8); τινὰ ἀπό 
τινος, to corrupt and so turn one aside from ete. Acts 
xiii. 8, (Ex. v. 4; voluptates animum detorquent a vir- 
tute, Cic.) ; διεστραμμένος perverse, corrupt, wicked: Mt. 
xvii 17; Lk. ix. 41; Acts xx. 30; Phil. ii. 15.* 

δια-σώζω: 1 aor. διέσωσα; 1 aor. pass. dreow@Onv; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; often in Sept., esp. for vb and 
WIT; to preserve through danger, to bring safe through ; 
to save i. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our colloq. bring 
him through): Lk. vii. 3; pass. Mt. xiv. 36; to save i. e. 
keep safe, keep from perishing: Acts xxvii. 43; to save 
out of danger, rescue: Acts xxviii. 1; ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, 
ibid. 4; — as very often in Grk. writ. (see exx. in Win. 
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of 
the person to whom or of the place to which one is 
brought safe through: πρὸς Φήλικα, Acts xxiii. 24; ἐπὶ 
τὴν γῆν, Acts xxvii. 44; εἴς τι, 1 Pet. iii. 20.* 

δια-ταγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (διατάσσων, a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv. 
11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use διάταξις), 
a disposition, arrangement, ordinance: Ro. xiii. 2; éda- 
Bere τὸν νόμον eis διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων, Acts vii. 53, ye re- 
ceived the law, influenced by the authority of the ordain- 
ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive 
what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration of an- 
gels [nearly i. q. as being the ordinances etc.], similar 
to eis ὄνομα δέχεσθαι, Mt. x. 41; see eis, D. II. 2 d.; [W. 
398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the 





assistants in the solemn proclamation of the Mosaic law, 
cf. Deut. xxxiii. 2 Sept. ; Acts vii. 38; Gal.iii.19; Heb. 
ii. 2; Joseph. antt. 15, 5, 3; [Philo de somn. i. ὃ 22; Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. e. ].* 

διά-ταγμα, -ros, τό, (διατάσσων, an injunction, mandate: 
Heb. xi. 23 [Lehm.8óyga]. (2 Esdr. vii. 11; Add. Esth. 
iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. fin., line 14]; Sap. xi. 8; Philo, 
decal. $ 4; Diod. 18, 64; Plut. Marcell. c. 24 fin.; 
palsy)" 

δια-ταράσσω, or -rr@: 1 aor. pass. διεταράχθην ; to agi- 
tate greatly, trouble greatly, (Lat. perturbare) : Lk. i. 29. 
(Plat., Xen., al.) * 

δια-τάσσω; 1 aor. διέταξα ; pf. inf. διατεταχέναι (Acts 
xviii. 2 [not Tdf.]); Pass., pf. ptep. διατεταγμένος ; 1 aor. 
ptep. διαταχθείς; 2 aor. ptep. διαταγείς ; Mid., pres. δια- 
τάσσομαι; fut. διατάξομαι; 1 aor. διεταξάμην ; (on the 
force of διά cf. Germ. verordnen, [Lat. d is ponere, Win. 
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 7 sq.]) ; to arrange, ap- 
point, ordain, prescribe, give order: τινί, Mt. xi. 1; 1 Co. 
xvi. 1; foll. by aec. with inf., Lk. viii. 55; Acts xviii. 2 
[here T rerax. Tr mrg. br. àta-; τινί foll. by inf. 1 Co. ix. 
14]; τί, pass., 6 νόμος διαταγεὶς 0€ ἀγγέλων (see διαταγή) : 
Gal. iii. 19, (Hes. opp. 274); τινί τι, pass.: Lk. iii. 13; 
xvii. 9 [Rec.], 10; Acts xxiii. 31. Mid.: 1 Co. vii. 17; 
οὕτω ἦν διατεταγμένος (cf. W. 262 (246) ; [B. 193 (167) ]), 
Acts xx. 13; τινί, Tit. i. 5; ri, 1 Co. xi. 34; τινί, foll. by 
inf.: Acts vii. 44; xxiv. 23. [Comr.: ἐπι-διατάσσομαι.} * 

δια-τελέω, -à ; to bring thoroughly to an end, accomplish, 
[ef. διά, C. 2]; with the addition of τὸν βίον, τὸν χρόνον, 
etc., it is joined to participles or adjectives and denotes 
the continuousness of the act or state expressed by the 
ptep. or adj. (as in Hdt. 6, 117; 7, 111; Plat. apol. p. 
31 a.) ; oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined 
with the same force simply to the pteps. or adjs.: thus 
ἄσιτοι διατελεῖτε ye continue fasting, constantly fast, Acts 
xxvii. 33 (so ἀσφαλέστερος [al. -raros] διατελεῖ, Thuc. 1, 
34; often in Xen.; W. 348 (326) ; [B. 304 (261) ]).* 

δια-τηρέω, -ῶ ; 3 pers. sing. impf. διετήρει ; to keep con- 
tinually or carefully (see διά, C. 2): Lk. ii. 51, (Gen. 
xxxvii. 11); ἐμαυτὸν ἔκ τινος (cf. τηρεῖν ἔκ τινος, Jn. xvii. 
15), to keep one’s self (pure) from a thing, Acts xv. 29; 
ἀπό twos for Ww foll. by 112, Ps. xi. (xii) 8. (Plat., 
Dem., Polyb., al.) * 

δια-τί, see διά, D. TT. 2 a. p. 134”. 

δια-τίθημι : fo place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint, 
[cf. Sué, C. 3]. In the N. T. only in Mid., pres. διατίθε- 
par; 2 aor. διεθέμην ; fut. διαθήσομαι ; 1. to arrange, 
dispose of, one’s own affairs; a. τί, of something that 
belongs to one (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. down) ; 
with dat. of pers. added, in one’s favor, to one’s advan- 
tage; hence to assign a thing to another as his possession : 
τινὶ βασιλείαν (to appoint), Lk. xxii. 29. b. to dispose 
of by will, make a testament: Heb. ix. 16 sq.; (Plat. legs. 
11 p. 924 e.; with διαθήκην added, ibid. p. 923 c., ete.). 
2. διατίθεμαι διαθήκην τινί ("^3 DN 13. NID, Jer. xxxviii 
(xxxi) 31 sqq.), to make a covenant, enter into cove- 
nant, with one, [cf. W. 225 (211); B. 148 (129 sq.)]: 


διατρίβω 


Heb. viii. 10, (Gen. xv. 18); πρός τινα, Acts iii. 25; Heb. 
x. 16, (Deut. vii. 2); μετά τινος, 1 Mace. i. 11. The 
Grks. said συντίθεμαι πρός τινα, ai πρός τινα συνθῆκαι, 
Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 21. [Cowr.: ἀντι-διατίθημι.} * 

δια-τρίβω; impf. διέτριβον; 1 aor. διέτριψα: to rub 
between, rub hard, (prop. Hom. Il. 11, 847, al.) ; to wear 
away, consume; χρόνον or ἡμέρας, to spend, pass time: 
Acts xiv. 3, 28; xvi. 12; xx.6; xxv. 6, 14, (Lev. xiv. 8; 
Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.); simply to stay, tarry, [cf. B. 
145 (127); W. 593 (552)]: Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54 [WH Tr 
ἐχί. ἔμεινεν]; Acts xii. 19; xiv. 18 (Lchm. ed. min.); xv. 
35; (Judith x. 2; 2 Macc. xiv. 23, and often in prof. 
auth. fr. Hom. Il. 19, 150 down).* 

δια-τροφή, -ῆς, 7, (διατρέφω to support), sustenance : 
1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49; Menand. ap. Stob. 
floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.]; Diod. 19, 32; Epict. 
ench. 12; Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 7; 4, 8, 21; often in Plut.; 
1 Macc. vi. 49.) * 

δι-αυγάζω: 1 aor. διηύγασα; to shine through, (Vulg. 
elucesco), to dawn; of daylight breaking through the 
darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [cf. Act. Andr. 8 
p- 116 ed. Tdf.]): 2 Pet. i. 19. [Plut. de plac. philos. 
3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]* 

διαυγής, -és, (αὐγήν, translucent, transparent: Rev. xxi. 
21, for the Rec. διαφανής. — ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll. 
Rh., Leian., Plut., Themist.; often in the Anthol.) * 

διαφανής, -és, (Suapaivw to show through), transparent, 
translucent: Rey. xxi. 21 Rec.; see διαυγής. (Hadt., 
Arstph., Plat., al.) * 

δια-φέρω ; 2 aor. διήνεγκον [but the subj. 3 pers. sing. 
διενέγκη (Mk. xi. 16), the only aor. form which occurs, 
can come as well fr. 1 aor. διήνεγκα; cf. Veitch 5. v. 
φέρω, fin.]; Pass., [pres. διαφέρομαι] ; impf. διεφερόμην ; 
[fr. Hom. (h. Mere. 255), Pind. down]; 1. to bear or 
carry through any place: σκεῦος διὰ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Mk. xi. 
16. 2. to carry different ways, i.e. a. trans. to carry 
in different directions, to different places: thus persons 
are said διαφέρεσθαι, who are carried hither and thither 
in a ship, driven to and fro, Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7 
p- 144; σκάφος ὑπ᾽ ἐναντίων πνευμάτων διαφερόμενον, Philo, 
migr. Abr. $ 27; Leian. Hermot. 28; often in Plut.); 
metaph. to spread abroad: διεφέρετο ὃ λόγος τοῦ κυρίου 
δ ὅλης τῆς χώρας, Acts xiii. 49, (ἀγγελίας, Lcian. dial. 
deor. 24, 1; φήμη διαφέρεται, Plut. mor. p. 163 d.). b. 
intrans. (like the Lat. differo) to differ: δοκιμάζειν τὰ 
διαφέροντα to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to 
distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful, 
Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, (διάκρισις καλοῦ τε kat κακοῦ, Heb. 
v. 14); cf. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. 111 ed. 5.; "Theoph. 
Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto δοκιμάζοντες rà διαφέροντα, 
ἤτοι φῶς, ἢ σκότος, ἢ λευκὸν, ἢ μέλαν KTA.); [al., adopting a 
secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans- 
late (cf. A. V.) to approve the things that excel; see Mey. 
(yet cf. ed. Weiss) on Ro. 1. c.; Ellie. on Phil. 1. c.]. 
διαφέρω τινός, to differ from one, i.e. to excel, surpass 
one: Mt. vi. 26; x. 31; xii. 12; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so 
in Attic auth.) ; τινὸς ἔν τινι, 1 Co. xv. 41; [τινὸς οὐδέν, 
Gal. iv. 1]. c. impersonally, διαφέρει it makes a differ- 


143 





διαχλευάζω 


ence, it matters, is of importance: οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει it 
matters nothing to me, Gal. ii. 6, (Plat. Prot. p. 316 b. 
ἡμῖν οὐδὲν διαφέρει, p. 358 e.; de rep. 1 p. 340 c.; Dem. 
124, 3 (in Phil. 3, 50) ; Polyb.3, 21, 9; Ael. v. h. 1, 25; 
al.; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 394; Wetst. on Gal. l. c.]).* 

Sia-pevyw: [2 aor. διέφυγον]; fr. Hdt. down; to flee 
through danger, to escape: Acts xxvii. 42, (Prov. xix. 5; 
Josh. viii. 22).* 

Sta-pypitw; 1 aor. διεφήμισα; 1 aor. pass. διεφημίσθην; 
to spread abroad, blaze abroad : τὸν λόγον, Mk. i. 45; Mt. 
xxviii. 15 [T WH mrg. ἐφημίσθ.] ; τινά, to spread abroad 
his fame, verbally diffuse his renown, Mt. ix. 31; in Lat. 
diffamare aliquem, but im a bad sense. (Rarely in Grk. 
writ. as Arat. phaen. 221; Dion. Hal. 11, 46; Palaeph. 
incred. 14, 4; [ef. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 
14 sq.].) * 

δια-φθείρω ; [impf. διέφθειρον]; 1 aor. διέφθειρα ; Pass., 
[pres. διαφθείρομαι]; pf. ptep. διεφθαρμένος ; 2 aor. διε- 
φθάρην ; Sept. very often for Nw, occasionally for 53n; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. to change for the worse, 
to corrupt: minds, morals; τὴν γῆν, i. e. the men that in- 
habit the earth, Rev. xi. 18; διεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν, 1 Tim. 
vi. 5, (τὴν διάνοιαν, Plat. lege. 10 p. 888 a.; τὴν γνώμην, 
Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 21; τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12). 
2. to destroy, ruin, (Lat. perdere); a. to consume, of bodily 
vigor and strength: 6 ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται [is 
decaying |, 2 Co. iv. 16; of the worm or moth that eats pro- 
visions, clothing, ete. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. de- 
lere) : Rev. viii. 9; to kill, διαφθείρειν τοὺς etc. Rev. xi. 18.* 

δια-φθορά, -as, ἡ, (διαφθείρω), corruption, destruction; 
in the N. T. that destruction which is effected by the de- 
cay of the body after death: Acts ii. 27, 31; xiii. 34-37 
[ef. W. $65, 10], see εἴδω, I. 5 and ὑποστρέφω, 2. (Sept. 
for nrw); in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)* 

διά-φορος, -ov, (διαφέρω) ; 1. different, varying in 
kind, (Hdt. and sqq.): Ro. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10. 2. 
excellent, surpassing, ([Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : com- 
par. διαφορώτερος, Heb. i. 4; viii. 6.* 

Sta-puddoow: 1 aor. inf. διαφυλάξαι; fr. Hdt. down; 
to guard carefully: twa, Lk. iv. 10 fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 11. 
“The seventy chose to employ this term esp. of God's 
providential care; cf. Gen. xxviii. 15; Josh. xxiv. 17; 
Ps. xl. (xli.) 3. Hence it came to pass that the later 
writers at the close of their letters used to write διαφυ- 
λάττοι, διαφυλάξοι ὑμᾶς ὁ θεός, cf. Theodoret. iii. pp. 800, 
818, 826, (edd. Schulze, Nosselt, ete. Hal.).” Win. De 
verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 16.* 

δια-χειρίζω : 1 aor. mid. διεχειρισάμην ; to move by the use 
of the hands, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr. 
[Andoe., Lys.], Xen. and Plato down). Mid. to lay hands 
on, slay, kill [with one’s own hand]: τινά (Polyb. 8, 23, 8; 
Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts 
v. 90; xxvi. 21.* 

δια-χλευάζω ; to deride, scoff, mock, [*deridere i. e. 
ridendo exagitare" Win.]: Acts ii. 13 6 L T Tr WH. 
(Plat. Ax. p. 364 b.; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 49]; 
Aeschin. dial. 3, 2; Polyb. 17,4, 4; al.; eecles. writ.) Cf. 
Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 17.* 


διαχωρίξω 


δια-χωρίζω: to separate thoroughly or wholly (cf. διά, C. 
2), (Arstph., Xen., Plat, al.; Sept.). Pass. pres. δια- 
χωρίζομαι ([in reflex. sense] cf. ἀποχωρίζω) to separate 
one's self, depart, (Gen. xiii. 9, 11, 14; Diod. 4,53): ἀπό 
τινος, Lk. ix. 33.* 

διδακτικός, -7, -óv, (i. q. διδασκαλικός in Grk. writ.), apt 
and skilful in teaching : 1 Vim. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (δι- 
δακτικὴ ἀρετή, the virtue which renders one teachable, 
docility, Philo, praem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud. 
8. 110" 

διδακτός, -7, -όν, (διδάσκω); 1. that can be taught 
(Pind., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. taught, instructed, foll. by 
gen. by one [cf. W. 189 (178); 194 (182); B. 169 (147)]: 
τοῦ θεοῦ, by God, Jn. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13; πνεύματος ἁγίου 
(GL T Tr WH om. ἁγίου]. by the-(Holy) Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 
13. (νουθετήματα κείνης διδακτά, Soph. El. 344.) * 

διδασκαλία, -as, 7, (διδάσκαλος), [fr. Pind. down]; 1. 
teaching, instruction: Ro. xii. 7; xv. 4 (eis τὴν ἡμετέραν 
διδασκαλίαν, that we might be taught, [A. V. for our 
learning]); 1 Tim. iv. 13, 16; v. 17; 2 Tim. iii. 10, 16; 
Tit. ii. 7.  .2. teaching i.e. that which is taught, doc- 
trine: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Tim.i. 10; iv. 6; vi. 1,3; 2 Tim. iv. 
35; Tit.i.9; ii. 1, 10; plur. διδασκαλίαι teachings, precepts, 
(fr. Is. xxix. 13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; ἀνθρώπων, Col. ii. 
22; δαιμονίων, 1 Tim. iv. 1.* 

διδάσκαλος. -ov, ὁ, (διδάσκω), a teacher; in the N. T. one 
who teaches concerning the things of God, and the duties 
of man; 1. of one who is fitted to teach, or thinks 
himself so: Heb. v. 12; Ro. ii. 20. 2. of the teachers 
of the Jewish religion: Lk. ii. 46; Jn. iii. 10; hence the 
Hebr. 37 is rendered in Greek διδάσκαλος : Jn.i. 38 (39) ; 
xx. 16; cf. below, under ῥαββί, and Pressel in Herzog 
xii. p. 471 sq.; [ Campbell, Dissert. on the Gospels, diss. 
vii. pt. 2]. 3. of those who by their great power as 
teachers drew crowds about them; a. of John the Bap- 
tist: Lk. iii. 12. b. of Jesus: Jn. i. 38 (39); iii. 2; viii. 4; 
xi. 28; xiii. 13 sq.; xx. 16 ; often in the first three Gospels. 
4. by preéminence used of Jesus by himself, as the one 
who showed men the way of salvation: Mt. xxiii. 5 L T 
Tr WH. 5. of the apostles: ὁ διδάσκαλος τῶν ἐθνῶν, 
of Paul, 1 Tim. 21. 7; 2 Lim. i. 11. 6. of those who 
in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the 
work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy 
Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, cf. 
Jas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians : 2 
Tim. iv. 8. [Hom. (h. Merc. 556), Aeschyl., al.] 

διδάσκω ; impf. ἐδίδασκον ; fut. διδάξω; 1 aor. ἐδίδαξα: 
1 aor. pass. ἐδιδάχθην; (AAQ [cf. Vanicek p. 327]) ; [fr. 
Hom. down]; Sept. for yin, rn, and esp. for 3127; 
to teach; 1. absol a. to lbid discourse with others 
in order to instruct them, deliver didactic discourses: Mt. 
iv. 23; xxi. 23; Mk. i. 21; vi.65 xiv. 49> Lk. iv. 15; v. 
17; vi. 6; Jn. vi. 59; vii. 14; xviii. 20, and often in the 
Gospels; 1 Tim. ii. 12.. — b. to be a teacher (see διδά- 
oxados, 6): Ro. xii* 7. c. to discharge the office of teach- 
er, conduct one's self as a teacher: 1 Co. iv. 17. 2. in 
construction; a. either in imitation of the.Hebr. 5 325 
(Job xxi. 22), or by an irregular use of the later Greeks 


144 





l 


| 


διδαχή 


(of which no well-attested example remains exe. one in 
Plut. Marcell. c. 12), with dat. of person: τῷ Βαλάκ, Rev. 
ii. 14 (ace. to the reading now generally accepted for the 
Rec. εἰς τὸν Ban.) ; cf. B. 149 (180); W. 223 (209), ef. 
227 (213). b. ace. to the regular use, with acc. of pers., 
to teach one: used of Jesus and the apostles uttering in 
publie what they wished their hearers to know and re- 
member, Mt. v. 2; Mk. i. 22; ii. 13; iv. 2; Lk. v. 3; Jn. 
viii. 2; Acts iv. 2; v. 25; xx. 20; τοὺς Ἕλληνας, to act 
the part of a teacher among the Greeks, Jn. vii. 35 ; used 
of those who enjoin upon others to observe some ordi- 
nanee, to embrace some opinion, or to obey some pre- 
cept: Mt. v. 19; Acts xv. 1; Heb. viii. 11; with esp. 
reference to the addition which the teacher makes to 


the knowledge of tbe one he teaches, to impart instruc- 


tion, instil doctrine into one: Acts xi. 26; xxi. 28; Jn. 
ix. 34; Ro. ii. 21; Col. iii. 16; 1 Jn. ii. 27; Rev. ii. 20. 
c. the thing taugbt or enjoined is indicated by a foll. 
ὅτι : Mk. viii. 31; 1 Co. xi. 14; by a foll. infin., Lk. xi. 
1; Mt. xxviii. 20; Rev. ii. 14 ; περί twos, 1 Jn. ii. 27; 
ἐν Χριστῷ διδαχθῆναι, to be taught in the fellowship of 
Christ, Eph. iv. 21; foll. by an acc. of the thing, to teach 
i.e. prescribe a thing: διδασκαλίας, ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων, 
precepts which are commandments of men (fr. Is. xxix. 


13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7, [B. 148 (129)]; τὴν ὁδὸν oi 


θεοῦ, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14 ; Lk. xx. 21; ravra, 1 Tim. 
iv. 11; ἃ μὴ δεῖ, Tit. i. 11; to explain, expound, a thing: 
Acts xviii. 11, 25; xxviii. 31; ἀποστασίαν ἀπὸ Maiceéas, 
the necessity of forsaking Moses, Acts xxi. 21. d. with 
aec. of pers. and of thing, to teach one something [W. 226 
sq. (212); B. 149 (130)]: [ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα, 
Jn. xiv. 26]; τοῦ διδάσκειν ὑμᾶς twa τὰ στοιχεῖα. Leb. v. 
12 (where R ἃ T Tr and others read — not so well — 
riva; [but cf. B. 260 (224) note, 268 (230) note]) ; ἑτέρους 
διδάξαι, sc. αὐτά, 2 Tim. ii. 2; hence pass. διδαχθῆναί τι 
[B. 188 (163); W. 229 (215)]: Gal. i. 12 (ἐδιδάχθην, se. 
αὐτόν), 2 Th. ii. 15. 

διδαχή. -ῆς, ἡ, (διδάσκω). [fr. Hdt. down]; ^ 1. teach- 
ing, viz. that which is taught: Mk.i. 27; Jn. vii. 16; Acts 
xvii. 19; Ro. [vi. 17]; xvi. 17; 2 Jn. 10; Rev. ii. 24 ; ἡ 
διδ. τινος. one's doctrine, i. e. what he teaches: Mt. vii. 
28; xvi. 12; xxii. 33; Mk.i. 22; xi. 18; Lk. iv. 82; Jn. 
xviii. 19; Acts v. 28; Rev. ii. 14 sq.; ἡ διδαχή of God, 
τοῦ κυρίου, Tov Χριστοῦ, the doctrine which has God, 
Christ, the Lord, for its author and supporter: Jn. vii. 
17; Acts xiii. 12; 2 Jn. 9; with the gen. of the object, 
doctrine, teaching, concerning something: Heb. vi. 2 [W. 
187 (176); 192 (181); 551 (513)]; plur. Heb. xiii. 9. 
2. [the act of ] teaching, instruction, (ct. διδασκαλία [on the 
supposed distinction betw. the two words and their use 
in the N. T. see Ellic. on 2 Tim. iv. 2; they are asso- 
ciated in 2 Tim. iv. 2,3; Tit.i.9]): Actsii.42; 2 Tim. 
iv. 2; ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ: while he was teaching, a phrase by 
which the Evangelist indicates that he is about to cite 
some of the many words which Jesus spoke at that 
time, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; rod κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν πιστοῦ 


| λόγου, the faithful word which is in accordance with the 


received (2 Tim. iii. 14) instruction, Tit. i. 9; in partic- 


δίδραχμον 


ular, the teaching of the διδάσκαλος (q. v. 6) in the relig- 
ious assemblies of Christians: λαλεῖν ἐν διδαχῇ to speak 
in the way of teaching, in distinction from other modes 
of speaking in public, 1 Co. xiv. 6 ; ἔχω διδαχήν, to have 
something to teach, ibid. 26.* 

δίδραχμον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. δίδραχμος, -ov, sc. 

ψόμισμα; fr. dis and δραχμή), a didrachmon or double- 

: drachma, a silver coin equal to two Attic drachmas or 
one Alexandrian, or half a shekel, [about one third of a 
dollar] (see in ἀργύριον, 3): Mt. xvii. 24. (Sept. often 
for pU; [Poll., Galen ].) * 

δίδυμος, 7, -ov, and -os, -ov, twofold, twain, (double, Hom. 
Od. 19, 227; as τρίδυμος triple, rerpáóvpos quadruple, 
ἑπτάδυμος) ; hence twin (sc. παῖς, as τρίδυμοι παῖδες, υἱοί, 
Germ. Drillinge, three born at a birth), Hebr. Dn, a 
surname of the apostle Thomas [cf. Luthardt on the 
first of the foll. pass.; B. D. s. v. Thomas]: Jn. xi. 16; 
xx. 24; xxi.2. (Hom. Il. 23, 641.) * 

δίδωμι (διδῶ, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [δίδω Tr, yet see 
WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. διδόασι (Rev. xvii. 13 
[not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers. 
sing. ἐδίδου, 3 pers. plur. ἐδίδουν (ἐδίδοσαν, Jn. xix. 3 L T 
Tr WH [see éyo]); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα [2 pers. 
sing. -κες, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg. 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v. 
κοπιάω], subjune. δώσῃ [and δώσωμεν] fr. an imaginary 
indic. form ἔδωσα, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr 
mre. WH δώσει); Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH δώσει; cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch 
s. v. 848. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40; 
WH. App. p. 172]); pf. δέδωκα [on the inter¢hange 
between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb 
cf. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν and without augm. 
[W. $12, 9; B. 33 (29)] δεδώκειν, Mk. xiv. 44; and L 
txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. δεδώκεισαν, Jn. 
xi. 57; 2 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. δῷ [δώῃ. Jn. xv. 16 Tr 
mrg.; Eph.i.17 WH mrg.; 2 Tim. ii. 22 L WH mrg.; 
δοῖ, Mk. viii. 37 T Tr WH; cf. B. 46 (40); WH. App. p. 
168; Kuenen and Cobet, praef. p. lxi. ], plur. δῶμεν, δῶτε, 
δῶσιν, optat. 3 pers. sing. δῴη for δοίη, Ro. xv. 5; [2 Th. 
iii. 16]; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18; [ii. 25 T Tr WH txt. ; Eph. i. 
17 RG; iii. 16 RG] and elsewhere among the variants 
([cf. W. $ 14, 1 g.; B. 46 (40), cf. § 139, 37 and 62]; see 
(WH. App. u.s.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122;] Lob. ad Phryn. 
p.346; [Kühner ὃ 282 Anm. 2; Veitch s. v. δίδωμε ad 
fin. ]), impv. δός, δότε, inf. δοῦναι, ptcp. δούς ; Pass. pf. 
δέδομαι: 1 aor. ἐδόθην ; 1 fut. δοθήσομαι: cf. B. 45 (39) 
sq.; [WHu.s.]. In the Sept. times without number for 
12, sometimes for Di”; and for Chald. 377; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to give; 

A. absolutely and generally: μακάριόν ἐστι μᾶλλον 
διδόναι, ἢ λαμβάνειν, Acts xx. 35. 

B. In construction; I. τινί τι, to give something 
to some one,—in various senses; 1. of one's own ac- 
cord to give one something, to his advantage; to bestow, 
give as a gift: Mt. iv. 9; Lk.i. 32; xii. 32, and often; 
δόματα [cf. B. 148 (129)], Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13; Eph. 
iv. 8 (Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); rà ὑπάρχοντα what thou 
hast rois πτωχοῖς, Mt. xix. 21; χρήματα, Acts xxiv. 26. 

10 


14 





~ 


9 δίδωμε 


2. to grant, give to one asking, let have: Mt. xii. 39; xiv. 
7 sq-; xvi. 4; xx. 23; Mk. vi. 22,25; viii. 12; x. 40; 
Lk. xi. 29; xv. 16; Jn. xi. 22; xiv.16; xv.16; xvi. 23; 
Acts ii. 6; Jas.i.5; [noteworthy is 1 Jn. v. 16 δώσει (sc. 
prob. 6 θεός) αὐτῷ ζωὴν τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν etc., where 
αὐτῷ seems to be an ethical dat. and τ. ἅμαρ. dependent 
on the verb; see B. 133 (116) note, cf. 179 (156); W.523 
(487), cf. 530 (494)]; in contradistinction from what 
one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. S. to supply, furnish, 
necessary things: as ἄρτον τινί, Mt. vi. 11; Lk. xi.3; Jn. 
vi. 32, 51; τροφήν, Mt. xxiv. 45; βρῶσιν, Jn. vi. 27; be- 
sides in Mt. xxv. 15, 28 sq.; Mk. ii. 26; iv. 25; Lk. vi. 
4; viii. 18; xii. 42; xix. 24, 26; Jn. iv. 10, 14, 15; Eph. 
wi: 19: 4. to give over, deliver, i.e. a. to reach out, 
extend, present: as Mt. xiv. 19; xvii. 27; Mk. vi.41; 
xiv. 22 sq.; Lk.ix.16; xxii. 19; τὸ ψωμίον, Jn. xiii. 26 ; 
τὸ ποτήριον, Jn. xviii. 11; Rev. xvi. 19; ras χεῖρας διδό- 
vat to give one the hand, Acts ix. 41; Gal.ii.9. b. ofa 
writing : ἀποστάσιον, Mt. v.31. c. to give to one’s care, 
intrust, commit; aa. something to be administered; 
univ.: παντὶ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, Lk. xii. 48; property, money, 
Mt. xxv. 15; Lk. xix. 13,15; ἀμπελῶνα, a vineyard to 
be cultivated, Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 16; τὰς κλεῖς [κλεῖδας] 
τῆς Bac. Mt. xvi. 19; τὴν κρίσιν, Jn. v. 22; κρίμα, Rev. 
XX. 4; τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἑαυτῶν, Rev. xvii. 13 [not Ree.]; ra 
ἔργα. ἵνα τελειώσω αὐτά, Jn. v. 36; τὸ ἔργον, tva ποιήσω, 
Jn. xvii. 4; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, to be declared, Jn. xvii. 11 
[not Rec., 12 T Tr WH]. bb. to give or commit to some 
one something to be religiously observed: διαθήκην περιτο- 
pis, Acts vii. 8; τὴν περιτομήν, the ordinance of circum- 
cision, Jn. vii. 22; τὸν νόμον, ibid. vs. 19; λόγια ζῶντα. 
Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligatory, to 
pay: wages or reward, Mt. xx. 4,14; xxvi.15; Rev. xi. 
18; ἀργύριον, as a reward, Mk. xiv. 11; Lk. xxii. 5; 
taxes, tribute, tithes, etc.: Mt. xvii. 27; xxii. 17; Mk. 
xii. 14 (15) ; Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2; Heb. vii. 4 ; θυσίαν sc. τῷ 
κυρίῳ, Lk. ii. 24 (θυσίαν ἀποδοῦναι τῷ θεῷ, Joseph. antt. 
7, 9, 1) ; Aóyov, render account, Ro. xiv. 12 [L txt. Trtxt. 
ἀποδ.]. 6. δίδωμι is joined with nouns denoting an 
act or an effect; and a. the act or effect of him who 
gives, in such a sense that what he is said διδόναι (either 
absolutely or with dat. of pers.) he is conceived of as 
effecting, or as becoming its author. Hence δίδωμε 
joined with a noun can often be changed into an active 
verb expressing the effecting of that which the noun de- 
notes. Thus διδόναι αἶνον τῷ θεῷ is equiv. to αἰνεῖν τὸν 
θεόν, Lk. xviii. 43; ἀπόκρισίν τινι i. q. ἀποκρίνεσθαι, Jn. 
i. 22; xix. 9; ἐγκοπὴν δοῦναι τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1. q. ἐγκόπτειν 
τὸ evayy. to hinder (the progress of) the gospel, 1 Co. 
ix. 12; ἐντολήν run i. q. ἐντέλλεσθαί τινι, Jn. xi. 57; xii. 
49; xiii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 23; δόξαν τινί i. q. δοξάζειν τινά (see 
δόξα, IL); ἐργασίαν. after the Lat. operam dare, take 
pains, [A. V. give diligence], i. q. ἐργάζεσθαι, Lk. xii. 58; 
[συμβούλιον. cf. the Lat. consilium dare, i. q- συμβουλεύ- 
εσθαι. Mk. iii. 6 Trtxt. WHtxt.]; διαστολήν τινε i. q. 
διαστέλλειν τι, 1 Co. xiv. 7; παραγγελίαν, 1 Th. iv. 2; 
παράκλησιν, 2 Th. ii. 16; ἔλεος i. 4. ἐλεεῖν, 2 Tim. i. 16, 
18; ἀγάπην, show [A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. iii. 1; ἐκδίκησιν, 


δίδωμι 


2 Th. i. 8; βασανισμόν, Rev. xviii. 7; ῥάπισμα i. q. ῥαπί- 
ζειν avd, Jn. xviii. 22; xix. 3; φίλημα i. q. φιλεῖν τινα, 
Lk. vii. 45. or b. the noun denotes something to be 
done by him to whom it is said to be given: διδόναι τινὶ 
μετάνοιαν, to cause him to repent, Acts v. 31; xi. 18; 
γνῶσιν σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 77; ἐλπίδα τινί, 2 Th. ii. 16. νῷ 
Joined with nouns denoting strength, faculty, power, 
virtue, δίδωμι (τινί τι) is equiv. to to furnish, endue, (one 
with a thing): Lk. xxi. 15 (δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα x. σοφίαν) ; 
Acts vii. 10; ἐξουσίαν, Mt. ix. 8; x. 1; Lk. x. 19; Jn. 
xvii. 2; Rev. ii. 26; vi. 8; xiii. 7; διάνοιαν, 1 Jn. v. 20; 
σύνεσιν, 2 Tim. ii. 7; and in the very common phrase 
διδόναι τὸ πνεῦμα. [1΄- 8. τινί revos to give to one (a 
part) of ete.: Rey. ii. 17 (GL T Tr WH) δώσω αὐτῷ τοῦ 
μάννα, cf. W. 198 (186); B. 159 (139).] 

II. δίδωμί τι without a dative, and δίδωμί τινα. iy 
δίδωμί τι; a. with the force of to cause, produce, give 
forth from one’s self: ὑετόν, from heaven, Jas. v. 18; 
καρπόν, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7, 8 56:» (Deut. xxv. 19; Sir. 
xxiii. 25); σημεῖα, Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 [not Tdf.]; 
Acts ii. 19, (Ex. vii. 9; Deut. xiii. 1, etc.) ; ὑπόδειγμα, 
Jn. xiii. 15; φέγγος, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (φῶς, 
Is. xiii. 10) ; φωνήν, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq:; διὰ τῆς γλώσσης 
λόγον, ibid. 9; γνώμην, to give one's opinion, to give ad- 
vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 10. — b. διδόναι κλήρους 
Ona 103, Lev. xvi. 8), to give i. e. hand out lots, se. to 
be cast into the urn [see κλῆρος, 1], Acts i. 26. c. δίδωμί 
τι with pred. acc. : Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45, (to give up asa 
λύτρον) ; Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiv- 
alent). 2. δίδωμί τινα; a. where the noun refers to 
the office one bears, to appoint: κριτάς, Acts xiii. 20. b. 
to cause to come forth: δίδωμι ἐκ τῆς συναγωγῆς τοῦ Σατανᾶ 
τῶν λεγόντων (sc. τινάς [cf. B. 158 (138) ; W. § 59, 4 b.]), 
Rev. iii. 9; so also the sea, death, Hades, are said to 
give (up) the dead who have been engulfed or received 
by them, Rev. xx. 13. 3. δίδωμί τινά τινι; a. to give 
one to some one as his own: as the object of his saving 
care, Heb. ii. 13; to give one to some one, to follow him 
as a leader and master, Jn. vi. 37, 39; x. 29; xvii. 6, 9, 
12 [but see B. I. 4. c. aa. above], 24; xviii. 9; in these 
pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ, 
i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the 
author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into 
intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them *his 
own’ (rà ἐμά, Jn. x. 14). b. to give one to some one to 
care for his interests: Jn. iii. 16 (ἔδωκεν sc. αὐτῷ, 1. 6. τῷ 
κόσμῳ); Acts xiii.21. o. to give one to some one to whom 
he already belonged, to return: Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 ἀπέ- 
δωκε [so L mrg. in vii. 15]). d. δίδωμι ἐμαυτόν τινι, to 
one demanding of me something, 7 give myself up as it 
were; an hyperbole for disregarding entirely my private 
interests, I give as much as ever, I can: 2 Co. viii. 5. 4. 
δίδωμί τινα with a predicate acc.: ἑαυτὸν τύπον, to render 
or set forth one's self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9; with 
a predicate of dignity, office, function, and a dat. of 
the person added for whose benefit some one invested 
with said dignity or office is given, that is, is bestowed : 
αὐτὸν ἔδωκεν κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, head over 


140 


δίδωμε 


all things to the church, Eph. i. 22; ἔδωκεν τοὺς μὲν ἀπο- 
στόλους κτλ. sc. τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Eph.iv.11. For in neither 
of these passages are we obliged, with many interpreters, 
to translate the word appointed, made, after the use of 
the Hebr. 153; esp. since in the second Paul seems to 
wish to confirm the words quoted in vs. 8, ἔδωκε δόματα 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. Those in the church whom Christ has 
endued with gifts and functions for the common advan- 
tage the apostle reckons among the δόματα given by him 
after his ascension to heaven. 

III. Phrasesin which to the verb δίδωμι, either stand- 
ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an 
infinitive, either alone or with an accusative ; δίδωμί τινε 
foll. by an infin. denoting the object: δίδωμί τινι φαγεῖν, 
give, supply, something to eat, give food [B. 261 (224); 
W. 318 sq. (299) ], Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk. vi. 375 
v. 43; Lk. viii. 55; ix. 13; Rev. ii. 7; πιεῖν, Jn. iv. 7, 10; 
with the addition of an object acc. depending on the 
φαγεῖν or πιεῖν : Mt. xxvii. 34; Mk. xv. 23 [RG L]; with 
an aec. added depending on the verb δίδωμι : Jn. vi. 31; 
Rev. xvi. 6; foll. by an infin. indicating design [cf. D. 
τ. 5.7, to grant or permit one to ete.: Lk. i. 73 sq. (Sodvae 
ἡμῖν ἀφόβως λατρεύειν αὐτῷ) ; Jn. v. 26; Acts iv. 29; Ro. 
xv. 5; Eph. iii. 16; Rev. iii. 21; vi. 4 ; vii. 2; [foll. by eis 
with the infin. : Ro. xv. 16, cf. D. 265 (228)]; by a constr. 
borrowed from the Hebrew, καὶ δώσω τοῖς . . - kat προφη- 
τεύσουσι, Rev. xi. 3; in the passive, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 
11 (ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι [ G L 'T Tr WH om. γνῶναι] to you 
it has been granted οἷο.) ; foll by the acc. and inf.: 
δῴη [L T Tr WI δῷ] ópiv . -. κατοικῆσαι τὸν Χριστὸν ev 
ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν, Eph. iii. 16 sq.; ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ 
γενέσθαι. Acts x. 40; οὐ δώσεις τὸν ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν δια- 
φθοράν (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10), Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35. 2. 
δίδωμί τινι, foll. by tva, to grant or permit, that ete. [B. 
238 (205); W. 337 (316), cf. 545 (507)]: Mk. x. 37; Rev. 
xix. 8. to commission, Rev. ix. 5. 

IV. δίδωμί τι, or twi τι, Or τινί or τινά, foll. by a prep- 
osition with a noun (or pronoun) ; 1. τινὶ ἔκ τινὸς [cf. 
W.8 28,1; B. 159 (139)] : δότε ἡμῖν (a part) ἐκ τοῦ ἐλαίου 
ὑμῶν, Mt. xxv. 8; ἐκ τῶν ἄρτων, easily to be supplied from 
the context, Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ 
ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν, 1 Jn. iv. 13; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 6 θεὸς οὐ 
δίδωσι τὸ πνεῦμα ἐκ μέτρου, by measure i. 6. according to 
measure, moderately, [ef. W. $51, 1 d.]; otherwise in 
Rev. iii. 9 δίδωμι ἐκ τῆς συναγωγῆς, (see II. 2 b. above). 
τινὶ ἀπό twos: Lk. xx. 10 tva ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶ- 
vos δῶσιν [LT Tr WH δώσουσιν] αὐτῷ, sc. the portion 
due. τί foll. by εἰς with a noun, to give something to be 
put into, Lk. vi. 38 μέτρον δώσουσιν eis τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν 
(shall they give i.e. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk. 
xv. 22 δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ (put a ring on 
his hand) ; εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν for the field, to pay its price, Mt. 
xxvii. 10; τινί τι εἰς τὰς χεῖρας, to commit a thing to one, 
deliver it into one’s power: Jn. xiii. 3 (Hebr. ^53 3 qn, 
Gen. ix. 2; xiv. 20; Ex. iv. 21); eis τ. διάνοιαν, or ἐπὶ ras 
καρδίας (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten 
upon the heart, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; or eis τ. καρδίας with 
inf. of the thing, Rev. xvii. 17; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 διδόναι 


διεγείρω 


τινί τι εἰς τὴν ψυχήν). ἑαυτὸν διδόναι εἰς with ace. of place, 
to betake one’s self somewhere, to go into some place: 
Acts xix. 31, (εἰς τόπους παραβόλους, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; εἰς 
τόπους τραχεῖς, Diod. 14, 81 ; eis Tas ἐρημίας, Diod. 5, 59 ; 
Joseph. antt. 15, 7,7; εἰς κώμην τινά, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 7). 
2. δίδωμί τι ἔν τινι; i. 6. to be or remain in, so that it is in, 
[ef. W. 414 (386); B. 329 (283)]: ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος, Jn. 
iii. 35; ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις, 2 Co. i. 22; ἐν τῇ καρδ. τινός, 2 Co. 
viii. 16, (cf. 1 K. x. 24); εἰρήνην δοῦναι ev τῇ γῇ to bring 
peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. δίδωμί τι ὑπέρ 
τινος, give up for ete. [cf. W. 383 (358) sq.]: Jn. vi. 51; 
ἑαυτὸν ὑπέρ τινος, Tit. ii. 14; ἑαυτὸν dvr(Avrpov ὑπέρ Twos, 
1 Tim. ii. 6 ; ἑαυτὸν περὶ [ R WH txt. ὑπέρ ; cf. περί, I. c. 8.] 
τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, for sins, i. 6. to expiate them, Gal. i. 4. 
4. διδόναι τινὶ κατὰ rà ἔργα, THY πρᾶξιν, to give one acc. 
to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds: 
Rev. ii. 23 [ Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 4]; (cf. ἀποδώσει, Mt. xvi. 
27; Ro. ii. 6). 5. Hebraistically, δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου 
θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην I have set before thee a door opened 
i. e. have caused the door to be open to thee, Rev. iii. 8. 

[Sxs. διδόναι, δωρεῖσθαι: 516. to give in general, an- 
tithetic to λαμβάνειν ; 8wp. specific, to bestow, present ; 816. might 
be used even of evils, but 5wp. could be used of such things 
only ironically ; see δόμα, fin. Cowr.: ἀνα-, &ro-, ἄντ-απο-, 
δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, μετα-, mapa-, προ- δίδωμι.] 

δι-εγείρω ; 1 aor. διήγειρα; Pass., impf. διηγειρόμην [but 
Tr WH (T edd. 2, 7) διεγείρετο in Jn. vi. 18, cf. B. 34 (30); 
WH. App. p. 161]; 1 aor. ptep. διεγερθείς ; to wake up, 
awaken, arouse (from repose; differing from the simple 
ἐγείρω, which has a wider meaning); ffom sleep: τινά, 
Mk. iv. 38 [here T Tr WH eyeipovow]; Lk. viii. 24; pass., 
Lk. viii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; Mk. iv. 39; with the addi- 
tion ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, Mt. i. 24 (L T Tr WH ἐγερθείς) ; from 
repose, quiet: in pass. of the sea, which begins to be agi- 
tated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the mind; 
stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1, as in 2 Macc. 
xv. 10, τινὰ rois θυμοῖς. (Several times in the O. T. 
Apocr. [cf. W. 102 (97)]; Hippoer., [ Aristot.], Hdian.; 
occasionally in Anthol.) * 

δι-ενθυμέομαι, -odpar; to weigh in the mind, consider : περί 
twos, Acts x. 19, for Rec. év@up. (Besides, only in eccl. 
writ.) * 

δι-εξέρχομαι: [2 aor. διεξῆλθον]; to go out through 
something: διεξελθοῦσα, sc. διὰ φρυγάνων, Acts xxviii. 3 
'Tdf. edd. 2, 7. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph., Hdt.], 
Eur. down.) * 

81-€£-080s, -ov, 7; fr. Hdt. down; a way out through, 
outlet, exit: διέξοδοι τῶν ὁδῶν, Mt. xxii. 9, lit. ways through 
which ways go out, i. e. ace. to the context and the design 
of the parable places before the city where the roads from 
the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high- 
ways, the same being also their entrances; [cf. Ob. 14; 
Ezek. xxi. 21; the R. V. renders it partings of the high- 
ways]. The phrase figuratively represents the territory 
of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to 
go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. 
p. 634 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is 
equiv. to the Hebr. nixxin, Num. xxxiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and 


147 





διέρχομαι 


often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen- 
gesetzten Verba τι. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the 
crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most 
frequented spots. ]* 

δι-ερμηνεία, -as, 7, (διερμηνεύω, q. v-), interpretation: of 
obscure utterances, 1 Co. xii. 10 Ltxt. (Not yet found 
elsewhere.) * 

δι-ερμηνευτής, -οὔ, 6, (διερμηνεύω, q. V.), an interpreter: 
1 Co. xiv. 28 [L Tr WH mrg. épugv.]. (Eccles. writ.) * 

δι-ερμηνεύω ; impf. διηρμήνευον and (without augm. cf. 
B. 34 (30)) διερμήνευον (Lk. xxiv. 27 L Tr mrg.); 1 aor. 
(also without augm.; so “all early Mss.” Hort) διερ- 
μήνευσα (Lk. l. c. T Tr txt. WH); [pres. pass. διερμηνεύο- 
pac]; to interpret [διά intensifying by marking transition, 
(cf. Germ. verdeutlichen); Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
v. p- 10 sq. ]; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said, 
explain, expound : τί, Lk. xxiv. 27; absolutely, 1 Co. xii. 
305 πῖνε Ὁ; 194 ade 2. to translate into one’s native 
language: Acts ix. 36, (2 Mace. i. 36; Polyb. 3, 22, 3, 
and several times in Philo [ef. Siegfried, Glossar. Phil. 
Goes 

δι-έρχομαι ; impf. διηρχόμην ; fut. διελεύσομαι (Lk. ii. 
35; see W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 58 (50)]) ; 2 aor. διῆλθον; 
pf. ptep. διεληλυθώς (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Hom. down]; 
1. where διά has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf. 
διά, C.]) : to go through, pass through, [on its construe- 
tions cf. W. $ 52, 4, 8]; a. διά τινος, to go, walk, jour- 
ney, pass through a place (Germ. den Durchweg neh- 
men): Mt.xii.43; xix. 24 R L Tr mrg. WH mre.; Mk. 
x. 25 [Rec.* εἰσελθεῖν]; Lk. xi. 24 ; xviii. 22 L Tr mrg.; 
Jn. iv. 4; 1 Co. x. 1; διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν, through the midst 
of a crowd, Lk. iv. 30; Jo. viii. 59 Rec. ; [διὰ μέσου (L T 
Tr WH ὃ. μέσον, see διά, B. I.) Σαμαρείας, Lk. xvii. 11]; 
δι ὑμῶν, i. e. διὰ τῆς χώρας ὑμῶν, 2 Co. i. 16 (where Lehm. 
txt. ἀπελθεῖν) ; [διὰ πάντων sc. τῶν ἁγίων (see ras, II. 1), 
Acts ix. 32]. b. with ace. to travel the road which leads 
through a place, go, pass, travel through a region: Lk. 
xix. 1; Acts xii. 10; xiii. 6; xiv. 24; xv. 3, 41; xvi. 6; 
xvii. 23 (rà ceBacpara) ; xviii. 23; xix. 1, 21; xx. 2; 1 Co. 
xvi 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: τὴν ψυχὴν διελεύσεται 
ῥομφαία, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart, 
with gen. Hom. Il. 20, 263; 23, 876). c. absolutely: 
ἐκείνης sc. ὁδοῦ (δι before ἐκείνης in Rec. is spurious) ἤμεὰ- 
Xe διέρχεσθαι, for he was to pass that way, Lk. xix. 4. 
d. with specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre- 
fix διά makes reference to the intervening space to be 
passed through or gone over: ἐνθάδε, Jn. iv. 15 T WH 
Tr mrg.; [eis τὴν ᾿Αχαίαν, Acts xviii. 27]; eis τὸ πέραν, 
to go, eross, over to the farther shore, Mk. iv. 35; Lk. 
viii. 22; 6 θάνατος διῆλθεν eis πάντας ἀνθρώπους, passed 
through unto all men, so that no one could escape its 
power, Ro. v. 12; ἕως τινός, go even unto, etc. Lk. ii. 15; 
Acts ix. 38; xi. 19, 22 R G[W. 609 (566) ]. 2. where 
διά answers to the Latin dis [ef. διά, C.]; to go to differ- 
ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9; Am. vi. 2): Acts viii. 4, 40; 
[x. 38]; διελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Πέργης having departed from 
Perga sc. to various places, Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this 
to 1, understanding διελθόντες of passing through the ex- 


διερωτάω 


tent of country]; ἐν οἷς διῆλθον among whom i.e. in 
whose country J went about, or visited different places, 
Acts xx. 25; διήρχοντο κατὰ τὰς κώμας they went about 
in various directions from one village to another, Lk. ix. 
6; of a report, to spread, go abroad: διέρχεται ὁ λόγος, 
Lk. v. 15; Thuc. 6, 46; Xen. an. 1, 4, 7. [Sy¥N. see 
ἔρχομαι. * 

St-epwrdw: 1 aor. ptep. διερωτήσας ; to ask through (i. e. 
ask many, one after another): ri, to find out by asking, 
to inquire out, Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., 
Dio.Cass. 43, 10; 48, 8.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. 
Pt. v. p. 15.* 

διετής, -és, (Sis and ἔτος), [fr. Hdt. down], of two years, 
two years old : ἀπὸ διετοῦς sc. παιδός, Mt. ii. 16, cf. Fritzsche 
ad loc.; [others take διετοῦς here as neut.; see Meyer].* 

διετία, -as, 7, (from διετής, cf. τριετία, rerpaería), the 
space of two years: Acts xxiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo 
in Flace. $ 16; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xli. 1; xlv. 5].)* 

δι-ηγέομαι, -odpar, [impv. 2 pers. sing. διηγοῦ, ptep. διη- 
yoópevos] ; fut. διηγήσομαι ; 1 aor. διηγησάμην ; to lead or 
carry a narration through to the end, (cf. the fig. use of 
Germ. durchführen); set forth, recount, relate in full: 
absol. Heb. xi. 82; τί, describe, Acts viii. 33 (see γενεά, 
3); τινί foll. by indir. dise., πῶς etc., Mk. v. 16; Acts ix. 
27; xii. 17 [here T om. Tr br. the dat.]; foll. by ἃ εἶδον, 
Mk. ix. 9; ὅσα ἐποίησε or ἐποίησαν, Lk. viii. 39; ix. 10. 
(Arstph., Thue., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. often for 730.) 
[Comp.: ἐκ-διηγέομαι. * 

δι-ήγησις, -ews, 7, (διηγέομαι), a narration, narrative : 
Lk. i. 1; used of the Gospel narratives also in Euseb. 
h. e. 3, 24, 7; 3,39, 12; ef. Grimm inthe Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35 
(34); ix. 15, etc.; 2 Macc. ii. 32; vi. 17.) * 

δι-ηνεκής, -és, (fr. Oujveyka, διαφέρω, as the simple 
nvexns fr. ἤνεγκα, φέρω), fr. Hom. down, continuous: 
els τὸ διηνεκές, continually, Heb. vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14, (δι- 
krárop ἐς τὸ διηνεκὲς ἡρέθη, App. b. c. 1, 4).* 

διθάλασσος, -ov, (dis and dadacaa) ; 1. resembling 
[or forming] two seas: thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2, 
5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i. e. 
washed by the sea on both sides (Dio Chrys. 5 p. 83): 
τόπος διθάλασσος, an isthmus or tongue of land, the ex- 
tremity of which is covered by the waves, Acts xxvii. 
41; al. understand.here a projecting reef or bar against 
which the waves dash on both sides; in opposition cf. 
Meyer ad loc. (In Clem. hom. p. 20, ed. Dressel [Ep. 
Petr. ad Jacob. $ 14], men ἀλόγιστοι x. ἐνδοιάζοντες περὶ 
τῶν τῆς ἀληθείας ἐπαγγελμάτων are allegorically styled 
τόποι διθάλασσοι δὲ καὶ θηριώδεις.) * 

δι-ἱκνέομαι | L WH διικν. (see I, «) ], -odpar; to go through, 
penetrate, pierce: Heb. iv. 12. (Ex. xxvi. 28; Thuc. 
Theophr., Plut., al.; in Homer transitively, to go through 
in narrating.)* 

διΐστημι;: 1 aor. διέστησα; 2 aor. διέστην; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to place separately, put asunder, disjoin ; in the 
mid. [or pass.] and the pf. and 2 aor. act. to stand apart, 
to part, depart: βραχὺ δὲ διαστήσαντες, sc. ἑαυτούς or τὴν 
ναῦν (cf. B. 47 (41)), when they had gone a little distance 


148 


δίκαιος 


viz. from the place before mentioned, i. 6. having gone 
a little farther, Acts xxvii. 28; of time: διαστάσης ὥρας 
μιᾶς one hour having intervened, Lk. xxii. 59; διέστη 
ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν parted, withdrew from them, Lk. xxiv. 51.* 

δι-σχυρίζομαι [ LL WH ducy. (see I, c) ] : impf. δισχυριζό- 
μηνὶ 1. to lean upon. 2. to affirm stoutly, assert 
confidently: Lk. xxii. 59; Acts xii. 15. (Lys., Isae., 
Plat., Dem., Joseph. antt. 2, 6, 4; Ael. hist. an. 7, 18; 
Dio Cass. 57, 23; al.)* 

[δικάζω ; 1 aor. pass. ἐδικάσθην ; fr. Hom. down; to 
judge, pass judgment: absol. Lk. vi. 37 Tr mrg. (al. ka- 
ταδικ.)."} 

δικαιοκρισία, -as, 7, righteous judgment: Ro. ii. 5. (an 
uncert. trans. in Hos. vi. 5 [where Sept. κρίμα]; Test. 
xii. patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547, and [$15] p. 581, ed. 
Fabric.; Justin. Mart. resp. de resurrect. xi. (15) 28 p. 
360 ed. tert. Otto; [Hippol. p. 801 a.ed. Migne]; Basil 
iii. p. 476 d. ed. Garn. or p. 694 ed. Par. alt. 1839. [Cf. 
W. 25; 99 (94)].)* 

δίκαιος, -aia, -atov, (fr. δίκη right), [fr. Hom. down], 
prop. the Hebr. pas, observant of ἡ δίκη, righteous, ob- 
serving divine and human laws; one who is such as he 
ought to be; (Germ. rechtbeschaffens in the earlier lan- 
guage, whence appropriated by Luther, gerecht in a 
broad sense; in Grk. writ. used even of physical things, 
as ἵππος, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 5; γήδιον δικαιότατον, most fer- 
tile, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 38; [ἅρμα δίκαιον, ib. 2, 2, 26]); 1. 
in a wide sense, upright, righteous, virtuous, keeping the 
commands of God; a. univ.: Mt.i.19 (the meaning is, 
it was not consistent with his uprightness to expose his 
betrothed to publie reproach); Mt. x. 41; xiii. 43, 49; 
xxiii. 28; xxv. 37, 46 ; Lk. i. 6, 17; xiv. 14; xviii. 9; xx. 
20; Ro. v. 7 [cf. W. 117 (111)]; 1 Tim.i. 9; Jas. v. 6, 
16; 1 Pet. iii 12; 1 Jn. iii. 7, [10 Lehm.]; Rev. xxii. 
11; opp. to ἁμαρτωλοὶ kai ἀσεβεῖς, 1 Pet. iv. 18; δίκαιοι 
καὶ ἄδικοι, Mt. v.45; Acts xxiv. 15; used of O. T. char- 
acters noted for piety and probity : Mt. xiii. 17; [xxiii. 
29]; Heb. xii. 22; thus of Abel, Mt. xxiii. 35; Heb. xi. 
4; of Lot, 2 Pet. ii. 7 sq. (Sap. x. 4 sq.) ; of those who 
seem to themselves to be righteous, who pride them- 
selves on their virtues, whether real or imaginary : Mt. 
ix. 13; Mk. ii.17; Lk. v. 32; xv. 7, (Eccl. vii. 17 (16)). 
Joined with εὐλαβής, Lk. ii. 25 (ἤθη εὐλαβῆ k. δίκαια, τὸ 
δίκαιον k. εὐλαβές, Plat. polit. p. 311 a. b.) ; with ἅγιος, 
Mk. vi. 20; with ἀγαθός, Lk. xxiii. 50; with φοβούμενος τὸν 
θεόν, Acts x. 22; ἔργα δίκαια, opp. to πονηρά, 1 Jn. iii. 12. 
Neut. τὸ δίκαιον, that which regard for duty demands, what 
is right: 2 Pet. i. 13; plur. Phil. iv. 8; δίκαιόν ἐστι, Eph. 
vi.1; Phil.i.7 ; with the addition of ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, God 
being judge, Actsiv.19. Ὁ. the negative idea predomi- 
nating: innocent, faultless, guiltless, (for 50), Prov. i. 11; 
Job ix. 23, ete.) ; thus used of Christ in the speech of 
Gentiles: Mt. xxvii. 19, 24 RG L br. Tr br. WH mrg.; 
Lk. xxiii 47; αἷμα δίκαιον (Prov. vi. 17; Joel iii. 19 
(24); Jon. i. 14), Mt. xxiii. 35; [xxvii. 4 Tr mrg. Wil 
txt.]; ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία x. δικαία (having no fellowship 
with sin [al. al., see the Comm. ad loc.]) x. ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 
12. c. preéminently, of him whose way of thinking, 


δικαιοσύνη 


feeling, and acting is wholly conformed to the will of 
God, and who therefore needs no rectification in heart or 
life ; in this sense Christ alone can be called δίκαιος : Acts 
vii. 52; xxii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1; ἅγιος x. δίκαιος, 
Acts iii. 14; among the rest of mankind it is rightly de- 
nied that one δίκαιος can be found, Ro. iii. 10 (Eccl. vii. 
21 (20) ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἔστι δίκαιος ἐν τῇ γῇ: ὃς ποιήσει ἀγαθὸν 
καὶ οὐχ ἁμαρτήσεται). of God: holy, Ro. iii. 26 (where 
it is to be closely rendered just or righteous, on account 
of the following καὶ τὸν δικαιοῦντα and the justifier or who 
pronounces righteous, but the substantial meaning is 
holy, that quality by virtue of which he hates and pun- 
ishes sin); 1 Jn. ii. 29. d. contextually, approved of 
God, acceptable to God, (Germ. gottwohlgefüllig) : Ro. v. 
19; with the addition ἐκ πίστεως, acceptable to God by 
faith [W. 136 (129)]: Ro. i. 17; Gal. iii. 11; Heb. x. 38; 
dix. παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, Ro. ii. 13. 2. In a narrower sense, 
rendering to each his due; and that in a judicial sense, pass- 
ing just judgment on others, whether expressed in words or 
shown by the manner of dealing with them: Tit. i. 8; 
so of God recompensing men impartially according to 
their deeds, Rev. xvi. 5; in the same sense also in Jn. 
xvii. 25 (who does not award the same fate to the loving 
and faithful disciples of Christ and to ‘the world’); 1 
Jn. i. 9 (who executes the laws of his government, and 
therefore also the law concerning the pardon of sins) ; 
ὁ δίκαιος κριτής, of Christ, 2 Tim. iv. 8; κρίσις δικαία, Jn. 
τ 80: vil. 24/2) ὉΠ|:1. δ; plum, Reva Ἀν 1} xix. 25 αἱ 
ὁδοὶ τ. θεοῦ δίκαιαι k. ἀληθιναί, Rev. xv. 3; neut. τὸ δίκαιον, 
what is due to others, Col. iv. 1; what is agreeable to 
justice and law, Lk. xii. 57 ; δίκαιον se. ἐστίν, it is agreeable 
to justice, 2 Th. i. 6; accordant with deserts, Mt. xx. 4, 
and 7 Rec. [See reff. s. v. δικαιόω, fin.; cf. ἀγαθός, fin. | * 

δικαιοσύνη, -ης; 7, (δίκαιος) ; most frequently in Sept. 
for ps and npa, rarely for 39r; the virtue or quality 
or state of one who is δίκαιος; 1. in the broad sense, 
the state of him who is such as he ought to be, righteousness 
(Germ. Rechtbeschaffenheit) ; the condition acceptable to 
God (Germ. Gottwohlgefülligkeit) ; a. univ.: λόγος τῆς 
δικαιοσύνης (like λόγος τῆς καταλλαγῆς; À. τοῦ σταυροῦ). 
the doctrine concerning the way in which man may at- 
tain to a state approved of God, Heb. v. 13; βασιλεὺς 
δικαιοσύνης, the king who himself has the approbation of 
God, and who renders his subjects acceptable to God, 
Heb. vii. 2; cf. Bleek ad loc. b. integrity, virtue, purity 
of life, uprightness, correctness in thinking, feeling, and 
acting : Mt. iii. 155 v.6, 10, 20; vi. 1 GLT Tr WH; Acts 
xiii. 10; xxiv. 25; Ro. vi. 13, 16, 18-20 (opp. to ἁμαρτία, 
ἀνομία, and ἀκαθαρσία) ; Ro. viii. 10 (opp. to ἁμαρτία) ; 
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see c.]) ; 2 Co. vi. 7, 14 (opp. to ἀνομία, as in 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24) ; 2 Co. xi. 15; Eph. v. 9; vi. 14; Phil. 
i. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iii. 16; iv. 8; Tit. iii. 5; 
Heb. i. 9; xii. 11; Jas. iii. 18 ; 1 Pet. iij. 14 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5, 
21; iii. 13, and very often in the O. T. ; ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης, 
walking in the way of righteousness i. q. an upright, 
righteous, man, Mt. xxi. 32; τοῦ θεοῦ, the righteousness 
which God demands, Mt. vi. 33; Jas.i. 20; of righteous- 
ness which manifests itself in beneficence : 2 Co. ix. 9 sq. 


149 





δικαιοσύνη 


(cf. Tob. xiv. 11; Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1151; so 
Chald. np, Dan. iv. 24, and in the Talmud and rabbin. 
writ. [Buxtorf. col. 1891 (p. 941 ed. Fischer) ; cf. W. 32]) ; 
where δικ. καὶ ὁσιότης are connected, — Lk. i. 75; Eph. 
iv. 24, (Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4 and occasion- 
ally in prof. writ.), —the former denotes' right conduct 
towards men, the latter piety towards God (cf. Plat. 
Gorg. p. 507 b.; Grimm on Sap. p. 181 sq. ; [ef. Trench 
§ lxxxviii. p. 328 sq.; for additional exx. see Wetst. on 
Eph. l.c.; cf. datos]; εὐσέβεια κ. δικαιοσύνη, Diod. 1, 2); 
ποιεῖν τὴν δικαιοσ. to do righteousness; to live upriehtly : 
1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7; iii. 10 [not Lehm.]; and in Rev. xxii. 
11 acc. to the text now accepted ; in like manner épyd¢e- 
σθαι δικαιοσύνην, Acts x. 35; Heb. xi. 33; ζῆν τῇ δικαιο- 
c i5, to live, devote the life, to righteousness, 1 Pet. ii. 24; 
πληροῦν πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην, ἴο perform completely whatever 
isright, Mt. iii.15. When affirmed of Christ, δικαιοσύνη 
denotes his perfect moral purity, integrity, sinlessness: 
Jn. xvi. 8, 10; when used of, G od, his holiness: Ro. iii. 
5,25sq. c. in the writings of PAUL ἡ δικαιοσύνη has a 
peculiar meaning, opposed to the views of the Jews and 
Judaizing Christians. To understand this meaning, the 
foll. facts esp. must be kept in view: the Jews as a peo- 
ple, and very many who had become converts from among 
them to Christianity, supposed that they secured the 
favor of God by works conformed to the require- 
ments of the Mosaic law, as though by way of merit; and 
that they would thus attain to eternalsalvation. Butthis 
law demands perfect obedience to all its precepts, 
and threatens condemnation to those who do not render 
such obedience (Gal. iii. 10, 12). Obedience of this 
kind no one has rendered (Ro. iii. 10), neither Jews nor 
Gentiles (Ro. i. 24— ii. 1), —for with the latter the 
natural law of right written on their souls takes the place 
of the Mosaic law (Ro. ii. 14 sq.). On this account Paul 
proclaims the love of God, in that by giving up Christ, 
his Son, to die as an expiatory sacrifice for the sins of 
men he has attested his grace and good-will to mankind, 
so that they can hope for salvation as if they had not 
sinned. But the way to obtain this hope, he teaches, is 
only through faith (see πίστις [esp. 1 b. and 4.7), by 
which a man appropriates that grace of God revealed 
and pledged in Christ; and this faith is reckoned by 
God to the man as δικαιοσύνη ; that is to say, 6. denotes 
the state acceptable to God which becomes a sinner's posses- 
sion through that faith by which he embraces the grace of 
God offered him in the expiatory death of Jesus Christ 
(see δικαιόω, 3 b.). In this sense ἡ δικαιοσύνη is used 
without an adjunct in Ro. iv. 5 sq. 11; v. 17, 21; ix. 30 sq.; 
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see b.]) ; 1 Co. i. 30; Gal. v. 5; δικαιοσύνη 
θεοῦ, ἡ τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιοσύνη, the righteousness which God 
ascribes, what God declares to be righteousness [W. 186 
(175)], Ro. i. 17; iii. 21; x. 3; by a pregnant use, equiv. 
to that divine arrangement by which God leads men to a 
state acceptable to him, Ro. x. 4; as abstract for con- 
crete, equiv. to those whom God accounts righteous, 2 
Co. v. 21; dix. θεοῦ διὰ πίστεως, Ro. iii. 22; ἡ Ou. τῆς 
πίστεως, which is acquired by faith, or seen in faith, Ro. 


δικαιόω 


iv. 11, 13; ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ δικαιοσ. which comes from God, i. e. 
is adjudged, imputed, Phil. iii. 9 (where the addition ἐπὶ 
τῇ πίστει depends on ἔχων, having . . . founded upon faith 
[cf. W. 137 (130); 392 (367); yet cf. Ellic. ad loc.]) ; 
ἡ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσ. which comes from faith, Ro. ix. 30; 
x. 0; ἡ διὰ πίστεως Χριστοῦ, Phil. iii. 9; ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δι- 
καιοσ. according to, appropriate to, faith, Heb. xi. 7 (but 
it should be kept in mind that the conception of ‘faith’ 
in the Ep. to the Heb. is broader than in Paul’s writings 
[ef. e. gy. Kurtz ad loc.]) ; Christ is called δικαιοσύνη, as 
being the one without whom there is no righteousness, 
as the author of righteousness, 1 Co. i. 30; εἰς δικαιοσύνην, 
unto righteousness as the result, to obtain righteousness, 
Ro. x. 4, 10; ἡ πίστις λογίζεταί τινι εἰς δικαιοσύνην faith 
is reckoned to one for righteousness, i. e. is so taken into 
account, that righteousness is ascribed to it or recognized 
in it: Ro. iv. 8, 6, 9, 22; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 23; ἡ διακονία 
τῆς δικαιοσ. (see διακονία, 2 b.), 2 Co. iii. 9. Opposed to 
this δικαιοσύνη arising from faith is ἡ ἐκ νόμου Oiatoc., à 
state acceptable to God which is supposed to result from 
obedience to the law, Ro. x. 5 sq. ; ἡ δικ. ἐν νόμῳ relying on 
the law, i.e. on imaginary obedience to it, Phil. iii. 6; ἡ 
ἰδία δικαιοσ. and ἡ ἐμὴ dcx-, such as one supposes that he 
has acquired for himself by his own works, Ro. x. 3; 
Phil. iii. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 21 ; iii. 21. 2. in a closer sense, 
justice, or the virtue which gives each one his due; it is said 
to belong to God and Christ, as bestowing ἰσότιμον πίστιν 
upon all Christians impartially, 2 Pet. i. 1; of judicial 
justice, Ro. ix. 28 RG Tr mrg. in br.; κρίνειν ἐν δικαιο- 
σύνῃ, Acts xvii. 31; Rev. xix.11. [See reff. s. v. δικαιόω, 
fin.]* à 
δικαιόω, -ὦ ; fut. δικαιώσω; 1 aor. ἐδικαίωσα; Pass., [pres. 
δικαιοῦμαι ; pf. δεδικαίωμαι ; 1 aor. ἐδικαιώθην ; fut. δικαιω- 
θήσομαι; (δίκαιος); Sept. for pay and pn; al 
prop. (aec. to the analogy of other verbs ending in óc, as 
Tuprdw, δουλόω) to make δίκαιος ; to render righteous or 
such as he ought to be; (Vulg. justifico) ; but this mean- 
ing is extremely rare, if not altogether doubtful; ἐδικαί- 
ceca τὴν καρδίαν pov stands for 23 ‘at in Ps. Ixxii. 
(Ixxiii.) 13 (unless J have shown my heart to be upright 
be preferred as the rendering of the Greek there). 2. 
τινά, to Show, exhibit, evince, one to be righteous, such 
as he is and wishes himself to be considered (Ezek. xvi. 
51 sq.; τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, Jer. iii. 11, and, probably, δὲς 
καιοῦν δίκαιον, Is. liii. 11): ἡ σοφία ἐδικαιώθη ἀπὸ τῶν 
τέκνων αὐτῆς, the wisdom taught and exemplified by John 
the Baptist, and by Jesus, gained from its disciples (i. e. 
from their life, character, and deeds) the benefit of be- 
ing shown to be righteous, i. e. true and divine [cf. B. 
322 (277); al. interpret, was acknowledged to be rizht- 
eous on the part of (nearly i. q. by) her children; cf. B. 
325 (280); see ἀπό, II. 2 d. bb.], Lk. vii. 35; Mt. xi. 19 
[here T Tr txt. WH read ἔργων i. 6. by her works]; 
Pass, of Christ: ἐδικαιώθη ἐν πνεύματι, evinced to be 
righteous as to his spiritual (divine [(?) cf. e. g. Ellic. ad 
loc., or Mey. on Ro. i. 47) nature, 1 Tim. iii. 16; of God: 
ὅπως δικαιωθῇς ev rois λόγοις σου, Ro. iii. 4 fr. Ps. ]. (li.) 6 
(κύριος μόνος δικαιωθήσεται, Sir. xviii. 2); pass. used re- 


150 











δικαιόω 


flexively, to show one’s self righteous : of men, Rev. xxii. 
11 Rec.; (τί δικαιωθῶμεν ; Gen. xliv. 16). 3. rud, to 
declare, pronounce, one to be just, righteous, or such 
as he ought to be, (cf. ὁμοιόω to declare to be like, liken i. e. 
compare; ὁσιόω, Sap. vi. 11; ἀξιόω, which never means 
to make worthy, but to judge worthy, to declare worthy, 
to treat as worthy; see also κοινόω, 2 b.); a. with the 
negative idea predominant, to declare guiltless one 
accused or who may be accused, acquit of a charge or 
reproach, (Deut. xxv. 1; Sir. xiii. 22 (21), ete.; an un- 
just judge is said δικαιοῦν τὸν ἀσεβῆ in Ex. xxiii. 7; Is. v. 
23): ἑαυτόν, Lk. x. 29; pass. οὐ δεδικαίωμαι, sc. with God, 
1 Co. iv. 4; pregnantly with ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν added, to 
be declared innocent and therefore to be absolved from 
the charge of sins [cf. B. 822 (277)], Acts xiii. 38 (39) 
(so ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας, Sir. xxvi. 29 ; simply, to be absolved, se. 
from the payment of a vow, Sir. xviii. 22 (21)) ; hence 
figuratively, by a usage not met with elsewhere, fo be freed, 
ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, from its dominion, Ro. vi. 7, where cf. 
Fritzsche or [(less fully) Meyer]. b. with the posi- 
tive idea predominant, /o judge, declare, pronounce, 
righteous and therefore acceptable, (God is said δικαιοῦν 
δίκαιον, 1 K. viii. 32): ἑαυτόν, Lk. xvi. 15; ἐδικαίωσαν τὸν 
θεόν declared God to be righteous, i.e. by receiving the 
baptism declared that it had been preseribed by God 
rightly, Lk. vii. 29; pass. by God, Ro. ii. 13; ἐξ ἔργων 
ἐδικαιώθη. got his reputation for righteousness (se. with 
his countrymen [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]) by 
works, Ro. iv. 2; ἐκ τῶν λόγων, by thy words, in contrast 
with καταδικάζεσθαι, sc. by God, Mt. xii. 81. Especially 
is it so used, in the technical phraseology of Paul, re- 
specting God who judges and declares such men as put 
faith in Christ to be righteous and acceptable to him, 
and accordingly fit to receive the pardon of their sins 
and eternal life (see δικαιοσύνη, 1 c.) : thus absolutely, 
δικαιοῦν twa, Ro. iii. 26; iv. 5; viii. 30, 33 (se. ἡμᾶς, opp. 
to ἐγκαλεῖν) ; with the addition of ἐκ (in consequence of) 
πίστεως, Ro. iii. 30; Gal. iii. 8; of διὰ τῆς πίστεως, Ro. 
ii. 30; men are said δικαιοῦσθαι, δικαιωθῆναι, τῇ χάριτι 
ToU θεοῦ, Tit. iii. 7; δωρεὰν τῇ xáp. τ. θεοῦ, Ro. iii. 24 ; 
πίστει, Ro. iii. 28; ἐκ πίστεως, by means of faith, Ro. v. 
1; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 24; ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ (as the 
meritorious cause of their acceptance, as the old 
theologians say, faith being the apprehending or 
subjective cause), Ro. ν. 9; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου 
Ἰησοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν, by confessing the 
name of the Lord (which implies faith in him, Ro. x. 10, 
cf. 2 Co. iv. 13), and by the Spirit of God (which has 
awakened faith in the soul), 1 Co. vi. 11; ἐν Χριστῷ 
through Christ, Gal. ii. 17 ; Acts xiii. 39; it is vehement- 
ly denied by Paul, that a man δικαιοῦται ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, 
Gal. ii. 16, — with the addition ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, i. e. of 
God, Ro. iii. 20, cf. vs. 28; iv. 2, (see δικαιοσύνη, 1 c. sub 
fin.) ; —a statement which is affirmed by James in ii. 21, 
24 sq. (though he says simply ἐξ ἔργων δικαιοῦται, signifi- 
cantly omitting νόμου) ; to the same purport Paul de- 
nies that a man δικαιοῦται ἐν νόμῳ. in obeying the law, or 
by keeping it, Gal. v. 4; with the addition παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, 


δικαίωμα 


in the sight of God, Gal. iii. 11. Lk. xviii. 14 teaches 
that a man δικαιοῦται by deep sorrow for his sins, which 
so humbles him that he hopes for salvation only from 
divine grace. 

The Pauline conceptions of δίκαιος, δικαιοσύνη. δικαιόω, 
are elucidated esp. by Winzer, De vocabulis δίκαιος, etc., 
in Ep. ad Rom., Lips. 1831; Usteri, Paulin. Lehrbegriff 
p- 86 sq. ed. 4 ete.; Neander, Gesch. der Pilanzung u.s.w. 
ii. p. 567 sqq. et passim, ed. 3, [ Robinson's trans. of ed. 
4, pp. 382 sqq., 417 sqq.]; Baur, Paulus p. 572 sqq. 
[(Zeller's) ed. 2, vol. ii. 145-183; Eng. trans. vol. ii. p. 
134 sqq.]; Rauwenhoff, Disquisitio etc., Lugd. Bat. 1852; 
Lipsius, Die paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, Lpz. 1853; 
Schmid, Bibl. Theologie des N. T. p. 562 sqq. ed. 2, [p. 
558 sqq. ed. 4; Eng. trans. p. 495 sq.]; Ernesti, Vom 
Ursprung der Sünde u.s.w. i. p. 152 sqq. ; Messner, Lehre 
der Apostel, p. 256 sqq., [summary by S. R. Asbury in 
Bib. Saer. for 1870, p. 140 sq.]; Jul. Kóstlin in the 
Jahrbb. für deutsche Theol. 1856 fase. 1 p. 85 sqq.; 
Wieseler, Commentar ü. d. Br. an d. Galater, p. 176 sqq. 
[see in Schaff's Lange's Rom. p. 122 sq.]; Kahnis, Lu- 
therische Dogmatik, Bd. i. p. 592 sqq.; Philippi, Dog- 
matik, v. 1 p. 208 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. $65; 
Ritschl, Die christl. Lehre v. d. Versóhnung u. Rechtf. 
ii. 318 sqq.; P/leiderer, Paulinismus, p. 172 sqq. [ Eng. 
trans. vol. i. p. 171 sqq. ; but esp. Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. 
Expos. of the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 
163-198. On the patristic usage see Reithmayr, Gala- 
terbrief, p. 177 sq.; Cremer, Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 
285; Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]. 

In classie Grk. δικαιόω (Ionic δικαιέω, Hdt.) is ii 
i. q. δίκαιον νομίζω, to deem right or fair: ri, often foll. 
by the inf.; to choose what is right and fair, hence univ. 
to choose, desire, decide: Hdt., Soph., Thuc., al. 2. 
with ace. of person, τὸ δίκαιον ποιῶ τινα to do one justice, 
in a bad sense, viz. to condemn, punish, one: Hdt., Thuc., 
Plat. al.; hence δικαιοῦσθαι, to have justice done one’s 
self, to suffer justice, be treated rightly, opp. to ἀδικεῖσθαι, 
Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 9, 11 p. 1186", 18 sqq. (In like 
manner the German rechtfertigen in its early forensic 
use bore a bad sense viz. to try judicially (so for avaxpi- 
vew, Acts xii. 19 Luther), then condemn; execute judg- 
ment, esp. put to death.) * 

δικαίωμα, -ros, τό, (fr. δικαιόω ; ὃ δεδικαίωται or τὸ δεδι- 
καιωμένον), Sept. very often for pn, 7pm, and yawn; for 
myn, Deut. xxx. 16; 1 K. ii. 3; plur. occasionally for 
D'mpa2; 1. that which has been deemed right so as to 
have the force of law; a. what has been established and 
ordained by law, an ordinance: univ. of an appointment 
of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32; plur. used of 
the divine precepts of the Mosaic law: τοῦ κυρίου, Lk. 
i. 6; τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 26; τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου. collec- 
tively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Ro. viii. 
4; δικαιώματα λατρείας, precepts concerning the public 
worship of God, Heb. ix. 1; δικαιώματα σαρκός, laws re- 
specting bodily purity [(?) cf. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b. 
a judicial decision, sentence; of God — either the favor- 
able judgment by which he acquits men and declares 


151 








δίλογος 


them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16; or unfavorable: sen- 
tence of condemnation, Rev. xv. 4, (punishment, Plat. lege. 
9,864e.). 2. a righteous act or deed : τὰ δικαιώματα τῶν 
ἁγίων, Rey. xix. 8 (τῶν πατέρων, Bar. ii. 19) ; ἑνὸς δικαί- 
opa, the righteous act of one (Christ) in his giving him- 
self up to death, opp. to the first sin of Adam, Ro. v. 18, 
(Aristot. eth. Nie. 5, 7, 7 p. 1185", 12 sq. καλεῖται δὲ 
μᾶλλον δικαιοπράγημα τὸ κοινόν, δικαίωμα δὲ τὸ ἐπανόρθωμα 
τοῦ ἀδικήματος, [ οἷ. rhet. 1, 13, 1 and Cope's note on 1, 3, 
9]. [Cf reff. in δικαιόω.] * 

δικαίως, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; 1. justly, agreeably 
to right: κρίνειν (see δίκαιος, 2), 1 Pet. ii. 23; to suffer, 
Lk. xxiii. 41. 2. properly, as is right: 1 Co. xv. 34. 
3. uprightly, agreeably to the law of rectitude: 1 Th. ii. 
10 (ὁσίως kai δικαίως, as Plat. rep. 1 p. 331 a. [cf. Trench 
§ Ixxxviii. p. 328]) ; Tit. ii. 12.* 

δικαίωσις, -eos, 7, (fr. δικαιόω, equiv. to τὸ δικαιοῦν, the 
act τοῦ δικαιοῦντος ; in extra-bibl. writ. fr. Thue. on, the 
justification or defence of a cause; sentence of condem- 
nation; judgment in reference to what is just), the act 
of God’s declaring men free from guilt and acceptable to 
him; adjudging to be righteous, [A. V. justification]: διὰ 
τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν, because God wished to declare us 
righteous, Ro. iv. 25; εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς, unto acquittal, 
which brings with it the bestowment of life, Ro. v. 18. 
[ Cf. reff. in δικαιόω. |* 

δικαστής, -o0, 6, (δικάζω), a judge, arbitrator, umpire: 
Lk. xii. 14 [here crit. texts κριτήν]; Acts vii. 27 (fr. Ex. 
ii. 14); Acts vii. 35. (Sept. for DBU ; in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. on.) * 

[Syn. δικαστής, κριτής: acc. to etymol. and classic usage 
δ. is the more dignified and official term ; x. gives prominence 
to the mental process, whether the ‘judge’ be a magistrate 
ornot. Schmidt ch. 18, 6.] 

δίκη, -ns, 7, [allied with δείκνυμι, Curtius § 14], fr. 
Hom. down; 1. custom, usage, [cf. Schmidt ch. 18, 
4 cf.3]. 2. right, justice. 3. asuitatlaw. 4.4 
judicial hearing, judicial decision, esp. a sentence of con- 
demnation; so in Acts xxv. 15 [L T Tr WH καταδίκην]. 
5. execution of the sentence, punishment, (Sap. xviii. 11; 
2 Mace. viii. 11): δίκην ὑπέχειν, Jude 7; δίκην τίνειν 
(Soph. El. 298; Aj. 113; Eur. Or. 7), to suffer punish- 
ment, 2 Th. i. 9. 6. the goddess Justice, avenging 
justice: Acts xxviii. 4, as in Grk. writ. often fr. Hes. 
theog. 902 on; (of the avenging justice of God, personi- 
fied, Sap. i. 8, ete.; cf. Grimm ad loc. and Com. on 4 
Macc. p. 318, [he cites 4 Macc. iv. 13, 21; viii. 13, 21; 
ix. 9; xi. 3; xii. 12; xviii. 22; Philo adv. Flacc. § 18; 
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 8]).* 

δίκτυον, -ov, τό, [perhaps fr. AIKEIN to cast, cf. Etym. 
Magn. col. 275, 21], a net: Mt. iv. 20 sq.; Mk. i. 18 sq.; 
Lk. v. 2, 4-6; Jn. xxi. 6, 8, 11. (Hom. et sqq.) * 

[Svx. δίκτυον, ἀμφίβληστρον, σαγήνη: δ. seems to be 
the general name for nets of all kinds; whereas aug. and cay. 
designate specifically nets for fishin g:— the former a cast- 
ing-net, generally pear-shaped ; the latter a seine or drag-net. 
Cf. Trench § lxiv.; B.D. s. v. Net.] 

δίλογος, -ov, (Sis and λέγω); 1. saying the same thing 
twice, repeating: Poll. 2, 118 p. 212 ed. Hemst.; whence 


διό 


διλογεῖν and διλογία, Xen. de re equ. 8, 2. 2. double- 
tongued, double in speech, saying one thing with one person, 
another with another (with intent to deceive): 1 Tim. 
iii. 8." 

διό, conjunction i. q. δι᾿ 6, [fr. Thue. and Plato down], 
wherefore, on which account: Mt. xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 35; vii. 
7; Acts x. 29;- ΚΕ. 1. 24; ii. 1; 1 Co. xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 17; 
Heb. iii. 7; Jas.i. 21; 1 Pet. i. 13, and often. [Cf. W. 
445 (414); B. 233 (200); on Paul's use, see Ellic. on 
Gal. iv. 31.] 

δι-οδεύω : impf. διώδευον ; [1 aor. διώδευσα] ; 1. to 
pass or travel through: τόπον twa, Acts xvii. 1; (Sept., 
Polyb., Plut., al.). 2. to travel hither and thither, go 
about: with κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην added, through city 
and village, Lk. viii. 1.* 

Avovicvos,.-ov, 6, Dionysius, an Athenian, a member 
of the Areopagus, converted to Christianity by Paul’s 
instrumentality: Acts xvii. 34. [Cf. B.D. s. v.]* 

διό-περ, conjunction, (fr. διό and the enclitie particle 
πέρ [q. v.]), [fr. Thue. down]; on which very account, 
[A. V. wherefore]: 1 Co. viii. 13 [Treg. διό περ]; x. 14; 
xiv. 13 where L T Tr WH διό." 

διοπετής, -és, (fr. Διός of Zeus, and πέτω for πίπτω ; in 
prof. writ. also Simerns), fallen from Zeus, i. e. from 
heaven: τὸ διοπετές, sc. ἄγαλμα (which is expressed in 
Eur. Iph. T. 977; Hdian. 1, 11, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.; cf. W. 
234 (219) ; 592 (551)]), an imaze of the Ephesian Ar- 
temis which was supposed to have fallen from heaven, 
Acts xix. 35; [ef. Meyer ad loc.; Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 
13 sq.].* 

διόρθωμα, -ros, τό, (fr. διορθόω to set right); correction, 
amendment, reform: Acts xxiv. 2 (3) L' T Tr WH for 
RG κατορθωμάτων. (Hippoer., Aristot., Polyb. 3, 13; 
Plut. Num. 17; Diog. Laért. 10, 121; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 250 sq.].) * 

διόρθωσις, -ews, 7, (fr. διορθόω) ; 1. prop. in a 
physical sense, a making straight, restoring to its natural 
and normal condition something which in some way pro- 
trudes or has got out of line, as (in Hippocr.) broken or 
misshapen limbs. 2. of acts and institutions, refor- 
mation: καιρὸς διορθώσεως a season of reformation, or 
the perfecting of things, referring to the times of the 
Messiah, Heb. ix. 10. (Aristot. Pol. 3, 1, 4 [p. 1275», 
13]; νόμου, de mund. 6 p. 400", 29; [ef. Joseph. e. Ap. 
2, 20, 2]; Polyb. 3, 118, 12 τῶν πολιτευμάτων, Diod. 1, 
75 τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων, Joseph. antt. 2, 4, 4; b. j. 1, 20, 1; 
al.; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq.].)* 

δι-ορύσσω ; Pass. 1 aor. inf. διορυχθῆναι (Mt. xxiv. 43 
T Tr WH; Lk. xii. 39 T WH Tr mrg.); 2 aor. inf. διο- 
puyjva, [cf. WH. App. p. 170; fr. Hom. down]; to dig 
through: a house (Xen. symp. 4, 30; Job xxiv. 16 Sept.), 
Mt. xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 39; absol. Mt. vi. 19 sq. [W. 594 
(552); B. 146 (127)].* 

[Atés, see Ats.] 

Διόσ-κουροι (Phrynichus prefers the form Διόσκοροι ; 
in earlier Attic the dual τὼ Διοσκόρω was more usual, cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 235), των, of, (fr. Διός of Zeus, and 
κοῦρος Or κύρος boy, as κόρη girl), Dioscuri, the name 


152 





: δίστομος 


given to Castor and [(Polydeuces, the Roman) ] Pollux, 
the twin sons of Zeus and Leda, tutelary deities of 
sailors: Acts xxviii. 11 [R. V. The Twin Brothers; cf. 
B.D. s. v. Castor and Pollux].* 

δι-ότι, conjunction, equiv. to διὰ τοῦτο, ὅτι; 1. on 
this account that, because, [cf. W. 445 (415)]: Lk. ii. 7; 
xxi. 28; Acts [xiii. 35, where RG 610];. xvii. 31 Ree.; 
xx. 26 TWH Trmrg.; xxii. 18; 1 Co. xv. 9; Gal. ii. 16 
(LT Tr WH or); Phil.ii.26; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 8; iv. 6; Heb. 
xi. 5, 23; Jas. iv. 35 1 Pet. i. 16, 24; ii. 6 [ Rec. διὸ καί]. 
2. for (ef. Fritzsche on Ro. i. 19, vol. i. p. 57 sq.; [per 
contra Mey. ad loc.; Ellic. on Gal. ii. 16; (cf. Jebb in 
Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek ete. ed. 2, App. 
$80, 3)]) : Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 20 Rec. ; xviii. 10; Ro.i. 19, 
21; ii. 20; viii. 7; (1 Th.ii. 18 L T Tr WH for RG 
διό); [1 Pet.i. 16" Tdf. From Hdt. down.]* 

Διοτρεφής [ L WH -rpedns; cf. Chandler $8 634, 637], 
6, (fr. Διός and τρέφω, nourished by Zeus, or foster-child 
of Zeus), Diotrephes, a Christian man, but proud and 
arrogant: 3 Jn. vs. 9 sq. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.]* 

διπλόος (-o)s), -ón (-5), -óov (-o)v), [fr. Hom. down], 
twofold, double: 1 Tim. v. 17; Rev. xviii. 6; διπλότερος 
(a compar. found also in Appian. hist. praef. $ 10, from 
the positive form διπλός [ B. 27 (24)]) ὑμῶν, twofold more 
than yourselves, Mt. xxiii. 15 [(cf. Just. M. dial. 122) ].* 

διπλόω, -6: [1 aor. ἐδίπλωσα] ;; (διπλόος) ; to double: 
διπλώσατε αὐτῇ [only RG] διπλᾶ [τὰ 8. T Tr WH br.] 
i.e. return to her double, repay in double measure the 
evils she has brought upon you, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. 
double unto her the double]. (Xen. Hell. 6, 5, 19; Plut. 
Cam. 41; Diog. Laért. 6, 22.) * 

δίς, adv., [Curtius $ 277; fr. Hom. down], tice: Mk. 
xiv. 30, 72; dis rod σαββάτου twice in the week, Lk. xviii. 
12; xai ἅπαξ καὶ δίς (see ἅπαξ, c.), Phil. iv. 16; 1 Th. ii. 
18. In the phrase dis ἀποθανόντα, Jude 12, δίς is not 
equiv. to completely, absolutely; but the figure is so ad- 
justed to the fact, that men are represented as twice 
dead in a moral sense, first as not having yet been re- 
generated, and secondly as having fallen from a state of 
grace; see ἀποθνήσκω, I. 4; [but cf. the various interp. 
as given in (Mey.) Huther or in Schaff's Lange (Fronm.) 
ad loe. Inthe Babyl. Talm. (Ber. 10 a.) we read, * Thou 
art dead here below, and thou shalt have no part in the 
life to come" ].* 

Als, an unused nominat. for Ζεύς, gen. Διός, acc. Δία 
(Atav, Acts xiv. 12 Tdf. ed. 7; see in ἄρρην and B. 14 
(373)), Zeus, Jupiter, the supreme divinity in the belief 
of Greeks and Romans; the father of gods and men: 
Acts xiv. 12sq. (2 Mace. vi. 2.) [Cf. Zevs.]* 

δισ-μυριάς, -άδος, 7, twice ten thousand, two myriads : 
Rey. ix.16 LT (WH Sis pupiddes), for RG δύο μυριάδες." 

διστάζω: 1 aor. ἐδίστασα; (dis); to doubt, waver: Mt. 
xiv. 31; xxviii. 17. (Plat., [Soph.], Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

δίστομος. -ov, (δίς and στόμα), having a double mouth, 
as a river, Polyb. 34, 10, 5; [ὁδοί i. e. branching, Soph. 
O.C.900]. As στόμα is used of the edge of a sword and 
of other weapons, so δίστομος has the meaning two-edged : 
used of a sword in Heb. iv. 12; Rey. i. 16; ii. 12, and 


δισχίλιοι 


acc. to Schott in xix. 15; also Judges iii. 16; Prov. v. 4; 
Ps. exlix. 6; Sir. xxi. 3; ξίφος, Eur. Hel. 983.* 

δισ-χίλιοι, -αι, -a, two thousand: Mk. v. 13. 
Hat. down. ] * 

δι-υλίω [ἢ G T Tr din. (see Y,v)]: (ὑλίζω to defecate, 
cleanse from dregs or filth) ; to filter through, strain thor- 
oughly, pour through a filter : τὸν κώνωπα, to rid wine of a 
gnat by filtering, strain out, Mt. xxiii. 24. (Amos vi. 6 
διυλισμένος οἶνος, Artem. oneir. 4, 48 ἔδοξαν διυλίζειν 
πρότερον τὸν οἶνον, Dioscor. 2, 86 διὰ paxous λινοῦ διυλισθέν 
[et passim; Plut. quaest. conviv. 6,7, 1, 5]; Archyt. ap. 
Stob. floril. i. p. 13, 40 metaph. θεὸς εἰλικρινῆ καὶ διυλι- 
σμέναν ἔχει τὴν dpezáv.) * 

διχάζω: 1 aor. inf. διχάσαι; (δίχα) ; to cut into two parts, 
cleave asunder, dissever: Plat. polit. p. 264 d.; metaph. 
διχάζω τινὰ κατά Twos, to set one at variance with [lit. 
against] another: Mt. x. 35. [Cf. Fischer, De vitiis 
lexx. etc. p. 334 sq.]* 

διχοστασία. -as, 7, (διχοστατέω to stand apart), dissen- 
sion, division; plur.: Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. iii. 3 [Rec.]; 
Gal. v. 20. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Solon in Dem. 
p- 423, 4 and Hdt. 5, 75 on; [1 Mace. iii. 29].) * 

διχοτομέω, -5: fut. διχοτομήσω ; (διχοτόμος cutting in 
two); to cut into two parts (Ex. xxix. 17) : Mt. xxiv. 51; 
Lk. xii. 46, — in these passages many suppose reference 
to be made to that most cruel mode of punishment, in use 
among the Hebrews (18. xv. 33) and other ancient nations 
(see Win. RWB. s. v. Lebensstrafen; [B. D. s. v. Pun- 
ishments, III. b. 3; esp. Wetstein on Mt. ]. c.]), by which 
criminals and captives were cut in two. But in the text 
the words which follow, and which imply that the one 
thus ‘cut asunder’ is still surviving, oppose this interpre- 
tation; so that here the word is more fitly translated cut 
up by scourging, scourge severely, [but see Meyer on Mt. 
le.] (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) * 

διψάω, -ó, subjunc. pres. 3 pers. sing. διψᾷ (Jn. vii. 37; 
Ro. xii. 20; often so fr. the Maced. age on for the Attic 
διψῇ. cf. W. $13, 3 b.; [B. 44 (38) ]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
61); fut. διψήσω:; 1 aor. ἐδίψησα; (δίψα thirst); [fr. 
Hom. down]; to thirst; 1. absolutely, to suffer thirst; 
suffer from thirst: prop., Mt. xxv. 35,37, 42, 44; Jn. iv. 
15; xix. 28; Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 11; figuratively, those 
are said to thirst who painfully feel their want of, and 
eagerly long for, those things by which the soul is re- 
freshed, supported, strengthened: Jn. iv. 13 sq.; vi. 35; 
vii. 37; Rev. vii. 16; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; (Sir. xxiv. 21 (20); 
li. 24). 2. with an acc. of the thing desired: τὴν àr- 
καιοσύνην, Mt. v. 6, (Ps. Ixii. (1xiii.) 2; in the better Grk. 
writ. with gen.; cf. W. $30, 10 b. ; [B. 147 (129)] ; ἐλευθε- 
pias, Plat. rep. 8 p. 562 c. ; τιμῆς, Plut. Cat. maj. 11; al.; 
(aie WG πὴ Ee 

δίψος. -eos (-ους). τό, thirst: 2 Co. xi. 27. 
down, for the older diya. ] * 

δίψυχος, -ov, (Sis and ψυχή), double-minded; a. wa- 
vering, uncertain, doubting: Jas. i. 8, (οἱ δίψυχοι καὶ of 
διστάζοντες περὶ τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ δυνάμεως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
11, 2; ταλαίπωροί εἰσιν οἱ δίψυχοι. οἱ διστάζοντες τὴν ψυχήν 
[8]. τῇ ψυχῇ]; ibid. 23, 3; μὴ γίνου δίψυχος ἐν προσευχῇ 


[From 


[From Thue. 


153 





δόγμα 


σου, εἰ ἔσται ἢ ob, Constt. apostol. 7, 11 ; μὴ γίνου δίψυχος: 
ἐν προσευχῇ σου, μακάριος yap 6 μὴ διστάσας, Ignat. ad 
Heron. 7; (cf. reff. in Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 19, 57). 
b. divided in interest sc. between God and the world: 
Jas.iv.8. Not found in prof. writ. [ Philo, frag. ii. 663].* 

διωγμός, -οὔ. 0, (διώκω), persecution: Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 
17; x. 30; Acts viii. 1; xiii. 50; Ro. viii. 35; plur., 2 Co. 
xii.10; 2 Th. i. 4; 2 Tim. iii. 11. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.]* 

διώκτης, -ov, ὁ, (διώκω), a persecutor: 1 Tim. i. 13. 
Not found in prof. writ.* 

διώκω ; impf. ἐδίωκον ; fut. διώξω (Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. 
xxi. 12; Jn. xv. 20; 2 S. xxii. 38; Sap. xix. 2; a rarer 
form for the more com. Attie διώξομαι, cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. 154; W.84 (80); [B. 53 (46) ; esp. Veitch s. v. ; 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 377]); 1 aor. ἐδίωξα ; Pass., 
[pres. διώκομαι] ; pf. ptep. δεδιωγμένος ; 1 fut. διωχθήσομαι:; 
(fr. δίω to flee) ; Sept. commonly for 417; 1. tomake 
to run or flee, put to flight, drive away: (τινὰ) ἀπὸ πόλεως 
els πόλιν, Mt. xxiii. 34, cf. x. 23 Grsb. 2. to run swiftly 
in order to catch some person or thing, to run after ; absol. 
(Hom. Il. 23, 344; Soph. El. 738, ete.; διώκειν δρόμῳ, 
Xen. an. 6, 5, 25; ef. 7, 2, 20), to press on: fig. of one 
who in a race runs swiftly to reach the goal, Phil. iii. 12 
(where distinguished fr. καταλαμβάνειν, [cf. Hdt. 9, 58; 
Leian. Hermot. 77]), vs. 14. to pursue (in a hostile 
manner): τινά, Acts xxvi. 11; Rev. xii. 13. Hence, 
3. in any way whatever to harass, trouble, molest one ; 
to persecute, (cf. Lat. persequor, Germ. verfolgen) : Mt. 
v. 10-12, 44; x. 23; Lk. xxi. 12; [xi. 49 WH Tr mrg.]; 
Jn. v. 16; xv. 20; Acts vii. 52; ix. 4 sq. ; xxii. 4, 7 sq.; 
xxvi. 14 sq.; Ro. xii. 14; 1 Co. iv. 12; xv. 9; 2 Co. iv. 
9; Gal. i. 13, 23; iv. 29; v. 11; Phil ii. 6; 2 Tim. iii. 
12; Pass. with a dat. denoting the cause, to be maltreated, 
suffer persecution on account of something, Gal. vi. 12 
[here L mrg. T read διώκονται (al. -kovrat), see WH. App. 
p.169; on the dat. see W. $ 31, 6 c. ; B. 186 (161)]. 
4. without the idea of hostility, to run after, follow after : 
some one, Lk. xvii. 23. 5. metaph. with acc. of thing, 
to pursue i. e. to seek after eagerly, earnestly endeavor to 
acquire: Ro. ix. 30 (distinguished here fr. καταλαμβά- 
vew) ; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22, (in both pass. opp. to 
φεύγειν) ; νόμον δικαιοσύνης, Ro. ix. 31, (Prov. xv. 9; τὸ δί- 
καιον, Deut. xvi. 20; Sir. xxvii. 8, where distinguished fr. 
καταλαμβάνειν); 7. φιλοξενίαν, Ro. xii. 13; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, 
Ro. xiv. 19 [here L mre. Tr mrg. WH mrg. T read 6c 
ὦκομεν (for the διώκωμεν of al.), see WH. App. p. 169]; 7. 
ἀγάπην, 1 Co. xiv. 1; τὸ ἀγαθόν. 1 Th. v. 15; εἰρήνην, Heb. 
xii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 11 (here joined with ζητεῖν rr); times 
without number in Grk. writ. (fr. Hom. Il. 17, 75 διώκειν" 
ἀκίχητα On; as τιμάς, ἀρετήν, Ta καλά, [ef. W. 30.]). 
[Conr.: ék-, κατα-διώκω. | * 

δόγμα, -ros, τό, (fr. δοκέω, and equiv. to τὸ δεδογμένον). 
an opinion, a judgment (Plat., al.), doctrine, decree, ordi- 
nance; _1. of publie decrees (as τῆς πόλεως, Plat. legs. 
1 p. 644 d.; of the Roman Senate, [Polyb. 6, 13, 2]; 
Hdian. 7, 10, 8 [5 ed. Bekk.]): of rulers, Lk. ii. 1; Acts 
xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 23 Lchm., (Theodot. in Dan. ii. 13; iii. 
10; iv. 3; vi. 13, etc., — where the Sept. use other words). 


δογματίζω 


2. of the rules and requirements of the law of Moses, 3 
Mace. i. 3; διατήρησις τῶν ἁγίων δογμάτων, Philo, alleg. 
lege. i. § 16; carrying a suggestion of severity, and of 
threatened punishment, τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ev δόγμασι, 
the law containing precepts in the form of decrees [A. V. 
the law of commandments contained in ordinances], Eph. 
ii. 15; τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον τοῖς δόγμασι equiv. to τὸ 
τοῖς δόγμασι (dat. of instrument) ὃν καθ᾽ ἡμῶν, the bond 
against us by its decrees, Col. ii. 14 ; cf. W.§ 31, 10 Note 1, 
[B. 92 (80); on both pass. see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]. 
3. of certain deerees of the apostles relative to right 
living: Acts xvi. 4. (Of all the precepts of the Chris- 
tian religion: βεβαιωθῆναι ἐν rois δόγμασιν τοῦ κυρίου καὶ 
τῶν ἀποστόλων, Ienat. ad Magnes. 13, 1; of the precepts 
(f sentences’ or tenets) of philosophers, in the later prof. 
writ.: Cic. acad. 2, 9, 27 de suis decretis, quae philosophi 
vocant dogmata.) [On the use of the word in general, 
see Bp. Lghtft. as above; (cf.‘ Teaching’ ete. 11, 3).]* 

δογματίζω : to decree, command, enjoin, lay down an or- 
dinance : Diod. 4, 83, etc. ; Esth. iii. 9; 2 Macc. x. 8 [ete.] ; 
Sept. (not Theodot.) Dan. ii. 13; Pass. [ pres. δογματίζο- 
pat]; ordinances are imposed upon me, I suffer ordinances 
to be imposed upon me: Col. ii. 20 [R. V. do ye subject 
yourselves to ordinances ; cf. W. $ 39,1 a.; B. 188 (163) ; 
Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ].* 

δοκέω, -à ; impf. ἐδόκουν; 1 aor. ἔδοξα ; (akin to δέχομαι 
or δέκομαι, whence δόκος an assumption, opinion, [cf. Lat. 
decus, decet, dignus; Curtius $15; cf. his Das Verbum, 
i. pp. 376, 382]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to-be of opin- 
ion, think, suppose : foll. by acc. with inf., Mk. vi. 49[R G 
L Tr]; 2 Co. xi. 16; 1 Co. xii. 23 ; with an inf. relating 
to the same subject as that of δοκέω itself, Lk. viii. 18 
(ὃ δοκεῖ ἔχειν) ; xxiv. 37 (ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν) ; Jn. 
v. 39; xvi. 2; Acts xii. 9; xxvii. 13; 1 Co. i. 183 vii 
40; vill. 2; x. 12; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 3; Phil. 1.4; Jas. 1. 
26; μὴ δόξητε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς do not suppose that ye 
may think, Mt. iii. 9; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. foll. by ὅτι, 
Mt. vi. 7; xxvi. 53; [Mk. vi. 49 T WH]; Lk. xii. 51; 
xiii. 2, 4; xix. 11 ; Jn. v. 45; xi. 13, [31 T Tr WH]; xiii. 
29; xx. 15; 1 Co. iv. 9; 2 Co. xii. 19; Jas. iv. 5. so used 
that the object is easily understood from the context : Mt. 
xxiv. 44 (7 ὥρᾳ ob δοκεῖτε ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται) ; 
Lk. xii. 40; xvii. 9 [R GL br. Tr mrg. br.]; forming a 
parenthesis in the midst of a question: πόσῳ, δοκεῖτε, 
χείρονος ἀξιωθήσεται τιμωρίας; lleb. x. 29; (Arstph. 
Acharn. 12 πῶς τοῦτ᾽ ἔσεισέ pov, δοκεῖς. τὴν καρδίαν ; 
Anaer. 40, 15 [i. e. 35 (33), 16] πόσον, δοκεῖς, πονοῦσιν. 
ἔρως, ὅσους σὺ βάλλεις ;). [Syn. see ἡγέομαι, fin. ] 2. 
intrans. to seem, be accounted, reputed: Lk. x. 36; xxii. 
24; Acts xvii. 18; xxv. 27; 1 Co. xii. 22; 2 Co. x. 9; 
Heb. xii. 11; ἔδοξα ἐμαυτῷ δεῖν πρᾶξαι, I seemed to my- 
self, i.e. I thought, Acts xxzi. 9 [cf. B. 111 (97)]; of 
δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν those that are accounted to rule, who 
are recognized as rulers, Mk. x. 42; of δοκοῦντες εἶναί τι 
those who are reputed to be somewhat (of importance), 
and therefore have influence, Gal. ii. 6, [9], (Plat. Euthyd. 
p. 303 c.); simply, of δοκοῦντες those highly esteemed, of 
repute, looked up to, influential, Gal. ii. 2 (often in Grk. 


154 





δοκιμή 


writ. as Eur. Hec. 295, where ef. Schüfer ; [cf. W. § 45, 
17). By way of courtesy, things certain are sometimes 
said δοκεῖν, as in Heb. iv. 1 (cf. Cic. offic. 3, 2, 6 ut tute 
tibi defuisse videare) ; 1 Co. xi. 16 [but cf. Mey. ad loe.]; 
cf. W. 8 65, 7 c. 3. impers. δοκεῖ μοι, i! seems to me; 
i e. a. I think, judge: thus in questions, τί σοι (ὑμῖν) 
δοκεῖ; Mt. xvii. 25 ; xviii. 12 ; xxi. 28; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi. 
66; Jn. xi. 56; κατὰ τὸ δοκοῦν αὐτοῖς as seemed good 
to them, Heb. xii. 10, (Leian. Tim. $ 25, and παρὰ τὸ 
δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, Thuc. 1, 84). b. ἔδοξέ μοι it seemed good to, 
pleased, me; I determined: foll. by inf, Lk. i. 3; Acts xv. 
22, 25, 28, 34 Rec.; also often in Grk. writ. Comp.: 
€i-, συν- ev- δοκέω." 

[Syn. δοκεῖν, φαίνεσθαι: daly. (primarily of luminous 
bodies) makes reference to the actual external appear- 
ance, generally correct but possibly deceptive; dox. refers 
to the subjective judgment, which may or may not 
conform to the fact. Hence such a combination as δοκεῖ 
φαίνεσθαι is no pleonasm. Cf. Trench $ lxxx.; Schmidt 
ch. 15.] 

δοκιμάζω ; [fut. δοκιμάσω]; 1 aor. ἐδοκίμασα; Pass., 
[pres. δοκιμάζομαι}; pf. δεδοκίμασμαι ; (δόκιμος) ; Sept. 
chiefly for try; as in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt., Thue.], Xen. 
and Plat. on, to try; 1. 10 test, examine, prove, scruti- 
nize (to see whether a thing be genuine or not), as 
metals: χρυσίον διὰ πυρός (Isocr. p. 240 d. [i. e. Pana- 
then. § 14]; ad Demon. p. 7 b. [here Bekk. βασανίζομεν] ; 
Sept., Prov. viii. 10; Sir.ii.5; Sap. iii. 6; ἄργυρον, Prov. 
xvii. 3, [cf. Zech. xiii. 9]), 1 Pet. i. 7; other things: Lk. 
xii. 56; xiv. 19; 2 Co. viii. 8; Gal. vi. 4; 1 Th. ii. 4; v. 21; 
τὰ διαφέροντα, Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, [al. refer these pass. 
to 2; see διαφέρω, 2 b.]; men, 1 Tim. iii. 10 (in the pass.) ; 
ἑαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 28; 2 Co. xiii. 5, (cf. ἐξετάζειν ἑαυτόν, Xen. 
mem. 2, 5, 1 and 4); θεόν, Heb. iii. 9 (RG, fr. Ps. xciv. 
(xev.) 9; on the sense of the phrase see πειράζω, 2 d. B.) ; 
τὰ πνεύματα, foll. by εἰ whether ete. 1 Jn. iv. 1; foll. by 
indir. disc., Ro. xii. 2; 1 Co. iii. 13; Eph. v. 10. 2. to 
recognize as genuine after examination, to approve, deem 
worthy: 1 Co. xvi. 3; τινὰ σπουδαῖον ὄντα, 2 Co. viii. 22; 
ἐν à δοκιμάζει for ἐν τούτῳ, ὃ δοκιμάζει in that which he 
approves, deems right, Ro. xiv. 22 ; δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ 
θεοῦ πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον we have been approved by 
God to be intrusted with the business of pointing out to 
men the way of salvation, 1 Th. ii. 4; οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν τὸν 
θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει they did not think God worthy to 
be kept in knowledge, Ro. i. 28. [On δοκιμάζω (as com- 
pared with πειράζω) see Trench § lxxiv.; Cremer s. v. 
πειράζω. COMP.: ἀποδοκιμάζω.} * 

δοκιμασία. -as, 7. a proving, putting to the proof: me- 
ράζειν ev δοκιμασίᾳ to tempt by proving, Heb. iii. 9 LT 
Tr WH. ([Lys.] Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al. ; 
λίθος δοκιμασίας, Sir. vi. 21.) * 

δϑοκιμή, -7s. 7. (δόκιμος) ; 1. in an active sense, a 
proving, trial: θλίψεως, through affliction, 2. Co. viii. 2. 
2. approvedness, tried character: Ro. v. 4; 2 Co. ii. 9; 
Phil. ii. 22; τῆς διακονίας, exhibited in the contribution, 
2 Co. ix. 13. 3. a proof [objectively], a specimen of 
tried worth: 2 Co. xiii. 3. (Diosc. 4, 186 (183); occa- 
sionally in eccl. writ.) * 


δοκίμιον 
μ 


δοκίμιον, -ου, 70, (δοκιμή) ; 1. i. q. τὸ δοκιμάζειν, the 
proving: τῆς πίστεως, Jas. i. 3. 2. that by which some- 
thing is tried or proved, a test: Dion. Hal. ars rhet. 11; 
γλῶσσα γεύσεως δοκίμιον, Longin. de sublim. 32, 5; doxi- 
piov δὲ στρατιωτῶν κάματος, Hdian. 2, 10, 12 [6 ed. 
Bekk.]; in Sept. of a crucible or furnace for smelting: 
Proy. xxvii. 21; Ps. xi. (xii) T. 3. equiv. to δοκιμή, 
2: ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως, your proved faith, 1 Pet. i. 7. 
This word is treated of fully by Fritzsche in his Prüli- 
minarien u.s.w. pp. 40, 44.* 

δόκιμος, -ov, (δέχομαι); fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop. 
accepted, particularly of coins and metals, Gen. xxiii. 16; 
2 Chr. ix. 17; Leian. Herm. 68, etc.; hence univ. proved, 
tried: in the N. T. one who is of tried faith and integ- 
rity [R. V. approved], Ro. xvi. 10 (τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ, 
the approved servant of Christ); 1 Co. xi. 19; 2 Co. x. 
18; xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15 (παριστάναι ἑαυτὸν δόκιμον τῷ 
θεῷ) ; Jas. i. 12. 2. accepted i. q. acceptable, pleasing : 
εὐάρεστος τῷ θεῷ x. δόκιμος [1 mrg. -μοις] τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, 
Ro. xiv. 18." 

δοκός, -od, 7, (fr. δέκομαι for δέχομαι; in so far as it has 
the idea of bearing [cf. Curtius $ 11]); fr. Hom. down; 
a beam: Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq.* 

δόλιος, -a, -ov, (δόλος) ; fr. Hom. on; deceitful: 2 Co. 
xi. 18.* 

δολιόω : (δόλιος) ; to deceive, use deceit: in Ro. iii. 13, 
fr. Ps. v. 10, impf. ἐδολιοῦσαν an Alexandrian form for 
ἐδολίουν, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349; W.§ 13, 2£.; Mul- 
lach p. 16; B. 43 (37); [ef. ἔχω]. (Not found in prof. 
writ.; [Numb. xxv. 18; Ps. civ. (ev.) 25. Cf. W. 26 
(25)])* 

δόλος, -ov, 6, (fr. δέλω to catch with a bait [(?) ; Lat. 
dolus, cf. Curtius $ 271]; see δελεάζω above) ; prop. bait, 
Hom. Od. 12, 252; a lure, snare; hence craft, deceit, 
guile: Mt. xxvi. 4; Mk. xiv. 1; vii. 22; Jn. i. 47 (48); 
Acts xiii. 10; 2 Co. xii. 16; Ro. i. 29; 1 Th. ii. 3 (οὐκ 
ἔστι ev δόλῳ, there is no deceit under it); 1 Pet. ii. [1], 
22, and Rev. xiv. 5 Rec., after Is.liii. 9; λαλεῖν δόλον 
to speak deceitfully (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14), 1 Pet. 
iii. 10.* 

δολόω, -ὦ; (δόλος) ; 1. to ensnare: Hes., Hdt. and 
succeeding writers. 2. to corrupt, ([βδέλλιον and 
λίβανον, Dioscor. 1, 80. 81]; τὸν οἶνον, Lcian. Hermot. 59) : 
τὸν Aóyov τοῦ θεοῦ, divine truth by mingling with it wrong 
notions, 2 Co. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii. and see καπη- 
λεύω.7 " 

δόμα, -τος, τό, (δίδωμι), a gift: Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13; 
Eph. iv. 8; Phil. ἵν. 17. (Plat. def. p. 415 b.; Plut.; 
often in Sept., chiefly for 33052.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. 
p. 291 sq. [who quotes Varro de ling. Lat. l. iv. p. 48 ed. 
Bip. “dos erit pecunia si nuptiarum causa data: haec 
Graece δωτίνη, ita enim hoe Siculi: ab eodem Donum. 
Nam Graece ut ipsi δῶρον; ut alii δόμα, et ut Attici 8óois."] * 

[ϑτν. δόμα, δόσις, δῶρον, δωρεά: Bóc.act. a giving, pass. 
thing given, cf. medical “dose”; δῶρ. specific “ present,” yet 
not always gratuitous or wholly unsuggestive of recom- 
pense; but δωρεά differs from δῶρ. in denoting a gift which 
is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover- 


155 ‘ 








δόξα 


eign; ἃ δόσις θεοῦ is what God confers as possessor of all 
things; a δωρεὰ θεοῦ is an expression of his favor; a δῶρον 
θεοῦ is something which becomes the recipient’s abiding pos- 
Philo de cherub. § 25, says πάνυ ἐκδήλως παριστάς 
(Num. xxviii. 2), ὅτι τῶν ὄντων τὰ μὲν χάριτος μέσης ἠξίωται, 
ἢ καλεῖται δόσις, τὰ δὲ ἀμείνονος, Hs ὄνομα οἰκεῖον δωρεά. 
Again, de leg. alleg. iii. § 70 (on the same bibl. pass.), d:a- 
τηρήσεις ὅτι δῶρα δομάτων διαφέρουσι: τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἔμφασιν 
μεγέθους τελείων ἀγαθῶν δηλοῦσιν... τὰ δὲ εἰς βραχύτατον 
ἔσταλται κτλ. Hence δόμα, δόσις, gift; δωρεά, δῶρον, benefac- 
tion, bounty, etc.; yet cf. e. g. Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. $ 1 
ἐγώ εἰμι Ζαβουλών, δόσις ἄγαθὴ τοῖς γονεῦσί μου, with Gen. 
xxx. 20 δεδώρηται 6 θεός μοι δῶρον καλὸν . . . k. ἐκάλεσε τὸ 
ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ζαβουλών. Cf. Schmidt ch. 106.] 

δόξα, -ης, 7, (δοκέω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. most freq. 
for 3/23, several times for ΓΙ, 777, ete. ; 

I. opinion, judgment, view: in this sense very often in 
prof. writ.; but in the Bible only in 4 Mace. v. 17 (18). 

II. opinion, estimate, whether good or bad, concerning 
some one; but (like the Lat. existimatio) in prof. writ. 
generally, in the sacred writ. always, good opinion con- 
cerning one, and as resulting from that, praise, honor, 
glory: Lk. xiv. 10; Heb. iii. 3; 1 Pet. v. 4; opp. to 
ἀτιμία, 2 Co. vi. 8; opp. to αἰσχύνη, Phil. iii. 19; joined 
with τιμή, Ro. ii. 7, 10; 1 Pet. i. 7; 2 Pet.i. 17 ; δόξα τινός, 
praise or honor coming to some one, Lk. ii. 32; Eph. iii. 
13; coming from some one, Jn. viii. 54; xii. 43; τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, τοῦ θεοῦ; Jn. xii. 43; Ro. iii. 23; persons whose 
excellence is to redound to the glory of others are called 
their δόξα: thus, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, 1 Th. ii. 20; 
ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν δόξα Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. viii. 23. ζητεῖν τὴν ἰδίαν 
δόξαν, or τ. δόξ. αὐτοῦ, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; of God, to 
endeavor to promote the glory of God, Jn. vii. 18; 
Enreiv δόξαν ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, 1 Th. ii. 6; τὴν δόξαν τ. παρὰ 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. v. 44; λαμβάνειν δόξαν (Lat. captare hono- 
rem) to seek to receive, catch at glory, Jn. v. 41,44; to 
receive glory, 2 Pet. i. 17; Rev. v. 12; τὴν δόξαν, the glory 
due [ef. W. 105 (100) sq.; B. 88 (77); Ellie. on Gal. i. 
5, cf. B. 89 (78)], Rev. iv. 11; διδόναι δόξαν τῷ θεῷ, 
mim 23 pi or (Jer. xiii. 16) 13, to give or ascribe 
glory to God, why and how being evident in each 
ease from the context: thus, by declaring one's grati- 
tude to God for a benefit received, Lk. xvii. 18; by not 
distrusting God's promises, Ro. iv. 20; by celebrating 
his praises, Rev. iv. 9; xi 135 xiv. 75. [xvis 9]: bre m 
(τὴν δόξαν the glory due); by rendering its due honor 
to God's majesty, Acts xii. 23; δὸς δόξαν τῷ θεῷ, ac- 
knowledge that God knows all things, and show that 
you believe it by the confession you are about to make, 
Jn. ix. 24, cf. 1 S. vi. 5 ; Josh. vii. 19; Ev. Nicod. c. 14 [p. 
622 ed. Thilo, 296 ed. Tdf.]; cf. Grimm on 4 Macc. i. 12. 
els δόξαν θεοῦ. so as to honor God, to promote his glory 
(among men): Ro. xv. 7; 1 Co. x. 31; Phil.i.11; ii. 11; 
els τὴν δόξ. τ. θεοῦ, Ro. iii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 15; τῷ θεῷ πρὸς 
δόξαν, 2 Co. i. 20; πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κυρίου δόξαν, 2 Co. viii. 19 ; 
ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. xi. 4; in doxologies: δόξα ἐν 
ὑψίστοις θεῷ, Lk. ii. 14, cf. xix. 38; αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα, Ro. xi. 
36 ; Eph. iii. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 18; à ἡ δόξα, Ro. xvi. 27; Gal. 
i. 5; 2 Tim. iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 21; τῷ θεῷ ἡ δόξα, Phil. iv. 


session. 


δόξα 


20; τιμὴ καὶ δόξα, 1 Tim. i. 17. [Even in classic Grk. 
δόξα is a word of wide signif., ranging from one’s private 
opinion, fancy, to public opinion, repute, renown 
(κλέος ; cf. the relation of φήμη to φάναι). Coupled with 
τιμή it denotes rather the splendid condition (evident 
glory), τιμή the estimate and acknowledgment of it 
(paid Aonor).] 

III. As a translation of the Hebr. 322, in a use for- 
eign to Grk. writ. [W. 32], splendor, brightness ; E 
properly: τοῦ φωτός, Acts xxii. 11; of the sun, moon, 
stars, 1 Co. xv. 40 sq. ; used of the heavenly brightness, 
by which God was conceived of as surrounded, Lk. ii. 9; 
Acts vii. 55, and by which heavenly beings were sur- 
rounded when they appeared on earth, Lk. ix. 31; Rev. 
xviii 1; with which the face of Moses was once made 
luminous, 2 Co. iii. 7, and also Christ in his transfigura- 
tion, Lk. ix. 32; δύξα τοῦ κυρίου, in Sept. equiv. to "23 
Mim, in the targ. and talm. ny 3), Shekinah or Shechi- 
nah [see BB.DD. s. v.], the glory of the Lord, and simply 
ἡ δόξα, a bright cloud by which God made manifest to 
men his presence and power on earth (Ex. xxiv. 17; xl. 
28 (34) sqq., ete.) : Ro. ix. 4; Rev. xv. 8; xxi. 11, 23; hence, 
ὁ beds τῆς δόξης (God to whom belongs δόξα) ὥφθη, Acts 
vii. 2; Χερουβεὶν δόξης. on whom the divine glory rests 
(so δόξα without the article, Ex. xl. 28 (34); 1 S. iv. 22; 
Sir. xlix. 8), Heb. ix. 5. 2. magnificence, excellence, 
preéminence, dignity, grace: βασιλεῖαι τοῦ κόσμου κ. 7] δόξα 
αὐτῶν, i. 6. their resources, wealth, the magnificence and 
greatness of their cities, their fertile lands, their throng- 
ing population, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 6; ἡ δόξα τῶν βασιλείων 
τῆς γῆς; Rev. xxi. [24; τῶν ἐθνῶν, ibid.] 26; used of 
royal state, splendid apparel, and the like: Mt. vi. 29; 
Lk. xii. 27, (Esth. v. 1; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5); glorious form 
and appearance: e. g. of human bodies restored to life, 
opp. to ἡ ἀτιμία which characterized them when they 
were buried, 1 Co. xv. 43; ἡ δόξα τῆς σαρκός * omne id, 
quod in rebus humanis magnificum dicitur " (Calvin), 1 
Pet. i. 24; εἶναί τινι δόξα to be a glory, ornament, to one, 
1 Co. xi. 15 ; univ. preéminence, excellence: 2 Co. iii. 8-11. 
3. majesty; a. that which belongsto God; and a. the 
kingly majesty which belongs to him as the supreme 
ruler; so in pass. where it is joined with βασιλεία, δύναμις, 
κράτος. ἐξουσία, and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec.; esp. in 
doxologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11; v. 11 RG; Jude 25; Rev. i. 
6; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those 
cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass. similar to each other 
in form it is not always clear whether δόξα is used to de- 
note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii. 
12 ἡ εὐλογία x. ἡ δόξα x. 7] σοφία x. ἡ εὐχαριστία kK. ἡ τιμὴ 
kx. ἡ ἰσχύς, Rev. xix. 1 ἡ σωτηρία x. 7] δόξα κ. ἡ τιμὴ Kk. ἡ 
δύναμις ; likewise in Rev. v. 12, [13]. of the judicial 
majesty of God as exhibited at the last day, Jude vs. 24. 
ἀνὴρ εἰκὼν x. δόξα θεοῦ ὑπάρχων, whose function of covern- 
ment reflects the majesty of the divine ruler, 1 Co. xi. 7; 
(ἢ) γυνὴ δόξα ἀνδρός. because in her the preéminence and 
authority of her husband are conspicuous, ibid. f. maj- 
esty in the sense of the absolute perfection of the 
deity : Βο. 1. 28 ; 2 Co. iv. 6; Heb. i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 17 ; 1 Pet. 


156 


δόξα 


lv. 14; ἐν δόξῃ i. q. ἐνδόξως, i. e. as accords with his di- 
vine perfection, Phil. iv. 19 [ef. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc.]; of the majesty of his saving grace: Ro. ix. 23 ; 
Eph. i. 12, 14, 18; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 11; 2 Pet. i. ὃ [W. 
381 (356)]; more fully δόξα τῆς χάριτος, Eph. i. 6; ὁ za- 
mp τῆς δόξης, the Father whose characteristic is majesty, 
Eph. i. 17; the majesty of God as exhibited in deeds of 
power: Jn. xi. 40; Ro. vi. 4 (whence δόξα for tj’, Sept. 
Is. xii. 2; xlv. 24); hence τὸ κράτος τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, the 
might in which his majesty excels, Col. i. 11. Ὁ. maj- 
esty which belongs to Christ; and a. the kingly 
majesty of the Messiah, to which belongs his kingly state, 
the splendor of his external appearance, the retinue of 
angels, and the like (see in III. 1): Mk. x. 37; in this 
sense it is said that Christ will come hereafter to set up 
the Messianic kingdom ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός. clothed by 
the Father in kingly array, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 
Lk. ix. 26; μετὰ δυνάμεως x. δόξης πολλῆς, Mt. xxiv. 30; 
Mk. xiii. 26 ; Lk. xxi. 27 cf. Mt. xxv. 81; Tit. ii. 13; 1 Pet. 
iv. 13; also καθίσαι ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης αὐτοῦ. Mt. xix. 28; 
xxv. 31, cf. 1 S. ii. 8; ἡ δόξα τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ, the majesty 
of his Messianie power with which he will punish his 
adversaries, 2 Th. i. 9. f. thé absolutely perfect inward 
or personal excellence of Christ: 2 Co. iii. 18; iv. 4; in 
which he excels by virtue of his nature as 6 θεῖος λόγος, 
Jn. i.14; xii. 41; of which majesty he gave tokens in 
the miracles he performed, Jn. ii. 11 cf. xi. 40; ὁ κύριος 
τῆς δόξης, 1 Co. ii. 8; Jas. ii. 1. y. the majesty (glory) of 
angels, as apparent in their exterior brightness, Lk. ix. 
26; in a wider sense, in which angels are called δόξαι as 
being spiritual beings of preéminent dignity: Jude vs. 8; 
2 Pet. ii. 10. 4. a most glorious condition, most exalted 
state; a. of that condition with God the Father in heav- 
en to which Christ was raised after he had achieved his 


| work on earth: Lk. xxiv. 26; Jn. xvii. 5 (where he is 


said to have been in the same condition before his incar- 
nation, and even before the beginning of the world) ; ib. 
22, 24; Heb. ii. 7, 9; 1 Pet. i. 11, 21; τὸ σῶμα τῆς δόξης 
αὐτοῦ, the body in which his glorious condition is mani- 
fested, Phil. iii. 21; ἀνελήφθη ἐν δόξῃ, was taken up (into 
heaven) so that he is now ἐν δόξη, 1 Tim. iii. 16 [ef. W. 
413 (385); B. 328 (283)]. b. the glorious condition of 
blessedness into which it is appointed and promised that 
true Christians shall enter after their Saviour’s return from 
heaven: Ro. viii. 18, 21; ix. 23; 2 Co. iv. 17; Col. i. 27 
(twice; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; iii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. ii. 

10; 1 Pet. ν. 1; which condition begins to be enjoyed 
even now through the devout contemplation of the divine 
majesty of Christ, and its influence upon those who con- 
template it, 2 Co. iii. 18; and this condition will include 
not only the blessedness of the soul, but also the gain of 
a more excellent body (1 Co. xv. 43; Phil. iii. 21); cf. 

Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 203 sqq. ; ἡ δόξα 
τοῦ θεοῦ, which God bestows, Ro. v. 2; 1 Th. ii. 12; δόξα 
τοῦ κυρ. Hp. "Ing. Xp. the same in which Christ rejoices, 

2 Th. ii. 14 (cf. Ro. viii. 17, etc.) ; εἰς δύξαν ἡμῶν, to 

render us partakers of δόξα, 1 Co. ii. 7. Cf. Weiss, Bibl. 

Theol. des N. T. $ 76 d.* 


δοξάξω 


δοξάζω ; [impf. ἐδόξαζον] ; fut. δοξάσω ; 1 aor. ἐδόξασα: 
Pass., [ pres. δοξάζομαι]; pf. δεδόξασμαι;; 1 aor. ἐδοξάσθην ; 
(δόξα) ; Vulg. honorifico, glorifico, clarifico ; Sept. chiefly 
for 3533, several times for 183, (in Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. 
35 δοξάζεσθαι stands for jp to shine) ; 1. to think, 
suppose, be of opinion, (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., 
Thue., et sqq.; nowhere in this sense in the sacred writ- 
ings). 2. fr. Polyb. (6, 53, 10 δεδοξασμένοι ἐπ᾿ ἀρετῇ) on 
to praise, extol, magnify, celebrate: τινά, pass., Mt. vi. 2; 
Lk. iv. 15; ἑαυτόν, to glorify one's self, Jn. viii. 54; Rev. 
xviii. 7; τὸν λόγον τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xiii. 48; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ 
κυρίου, Rev. xv. 4 ; τὸν θεόν, Mt. v. 16; ix. 8; xv. 31: Mk. 
ii.12; Lk. v. 25 sq. ; vii. 16; xiii. 13; xvii. 15; xviii. 43; 
xxiii. 47; Acts xi 18; xxi. 20 [ Rec. κύριον] ; Ro. xv. 6, 
9 [W. § 44,3 b.; 332 (311)]; 1 Pet. ii. 12; iv. 14 Rec.; 
with the addition of ἐπί τινι, for something, Lk. ii. 20; 
Acts iv. 21; 2 Co. ix. 13; ἐν ἐμοί, on account of me (prop- 
erly, finding in me matter for giving praise [cf. W. 387 
(362) sq.]), Gal. i. 24; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι rovro, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L 
ID DW H: 3. to honor, do honor to, hold in honor: 
τὴν διακονίαν μου, by the most devoted administration of 
it endeavoring to convert as many Gentilesas possible to 
Christ, Ro. xi. 13; a member of the body, 1 Co. xii. 26; 
Θεόν, to worship, Ro. i. 21; with the adjunct ἐν τῷ σώματι, 
by keeping the body pure and sound, 1 Co. vi. 20; τῷ 
θανάτῳ, to undergo death for the honor of God, Jn. xxi. 
ΤΣ 4. By ause not found in prof. writ. to make glori- 
ous, adorn with lustre, clothe with splendor; a. to impart 
glory to something, render it excellent: pf. pass. δεδόξα- 
cya: to excel, be preéminent ; δεδοξασμένος excelling, emi- 
nent, glorious, 2 Co. iii. 10 ; δεδοξασμένη χάρα surpassing 
i. e. heavenly joy, [A. V. full of glory], 1 Pet.i.8. b. 
to make renowned, render illustrious, i.e. to cause the 
dignity and worth of some person or thing to become mani- 
fest and acknowledged: τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, 2 Th. iii. 1; 
Christ, the Son of God, Jn. viii. 54; xi. 4; xvi. 14 ; xvii. 
10; God the Father, Jn. xiii. 31 sq. ; xiv. 13; xv. 8; xvii. 
1,4; 1 Pet.iv.11; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. xii. 28. — c. to 
ezalt to a glorious rank or condition (Is. xliv. 23; lv. 5, 
ete.; joined to ὑψοῦν, Is. iv. 2; Esth.iii. 1) : οὐχ ἑαυτὸν 
ἐδόξασε did not assume to himself the dignity (equiv. to 
οὐχ ἑαυτῷ τὴν τιμὴν ἔλαβε. vs. 4), the words γενηθῆναι ap- 
χιερέα being added epexegetically (W. § 44, 1), Heb. v. 
5; of God exalting, or rather restoring, Christ his Son 
to a state of glory in heaven : Jn. vii. 39; xii. 16, [23]; 
xiii. 31 sq.; xvii. 1, 5; Actsiii. 13; (see δόξα, III. 4 a.); 
of God bringing Christians to a heavenly dignity and 
condition, (see δόξα. III. 4 b.): Ro. viii. 30. [Cowr.: 
€v-, συν-δοξάζω.} * 

Aopkás, -ddos, 7, (prop. a wild she-goat, a gazelle, * παρὰ 
τὸ δέρκω, τὸ βλέπω" ὀξυδερκὲς yàp τὸ ζῷον x. εὐόμματον " 
Etym. Magn. [284, 67}, Dorcas, a certain Christian wo- 
man: Acts ix. 36, 39; see Ταβιθά." 

δόσις. -ews, 7, (δίδωμι) : 1. a giving, [fr. Hat. 
down]: λόγος δόσεως x. λήψεως, an account of giving 
and receiving [i. e. debit and credit accounts; cf. λόγος 
II. 3], Phil. iv. 15; here Paul, by a pleasant euphemism, 
refers to the pecuniary gifts, which the church bestow- 


157 





δοῦλος 


ing them enters in the account of expenses, but he him- 
self in the account of receipts; cf. Van Hengel ad loc. ; 
so δόσις καὶ λῆψις, of money given and received, Sir. xli. 
19; xlii. 7; [Herm. mand. 5, 2, 2], and plur. Epict. diss. 2, 
9, 12. 2. a gift, [fr. Hom. down]: Jas. i. 17. [Sxw. 
see δόμα, fin. ]* 

δότης, -ov, 6, (δίδωμι), for the more usual δοτήρ, a giver, 
bestower: 2 Co. ix. 7 fr. Prov. xxii. 8. Not found else- 
where.* 

SovAayoyéo [ Rec.* -ayay-], -à ; (δουλάγωγος, cf. παιδά- 
yeyos) ; to lead away into slavery, ciaim as one's slave, 
(Diod. Sic. 12, 24, and occasionally in other later writ.) ; 
to make a slave and to treat as a slave i. e. with severity, 
to subject to stern and rigid discipline: 1 Co. ix. 27. 
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum N. T. p. 472 sq.* 

δουλεία (Tdf. -ia, [see I, ¢]), -as, ἥ, (δουλεύω) ; slavery, 
bondage, the condition of a slave: τῆς φθορᾶς, the bond- 
age which consists in decay [W. § 59, 8 a., cf. B. 78 (68)], 
equiv. to the law, the necessity; of perishing, Ro. viii. 
21; used of the slavish sense of fear, devoid alike of 
buoyancy of spirit and of trust in God, such asis produced 
by the thought of death, Heb. ii. 15, as well as by the 
Mosaic law in its votaries, Ro. viii. 15 (πνεῦμα δουλείας) ; 
the Mosaie system is said to cause δουλεία on account of 
the grievous burdens its precepts impose upon its adhe- 
rents: Gal. iv. 24; v. 1. [From Pind. down.]* 

δουλεύω ; fut. δουλεύσω; 1 aor. ἐδούλευσα; pf. δεδού- 
Aevka ; (δοῦλος) ; Sept. for Tay; 1. prop. to be a slave, 
serve, do service: absol, Eph. vi.7; 1 Tim. vi. 2; τινί, 
Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ix. 12; said of nations in 
subjection to other nations, Jn. viii. 33; Acts vii. 7; men 
are said δουλεύειν who bear the yoke of the Mosaic law, 
Gal. iv. 25 (see δουλεία). 2. metaph. to obey, submit 
to; 8. in a good sense: absol. to yield obedience, Ro. 
vii. 6; τινί. to obey one's commands and render to him the 
services due, Lk. xv. 29; God: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; 
1 Th.i.9; κυρίῳ and τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts xx. 19; Ro. xii. 11 
(not Rec.*, see below); Eph. vi. 7; Christ: Ro. xiv. 
18; Col. iii. 24; νόμῳ θεοῦ, ace. to the context, feel myself 
bound to, Ro. vii. 25 ; τοῖς θεοῖς, to worship gods, Gal. iv. 
8; τῷ καιρῷ ( Anth. 9, 441, 6), wisely adapt one’s self to, 
Ro. xii. 11 Rec.* (see above), cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; per- 
form services of kindness and Christian love: ἀλλήλοις, 
Gal. v. 13 ; used of those who zealously advance the in- 
terests of anything: ὡς πατρὶ τέκνον aiv ἐμοὶ ἐδούλευσεν 
εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον equiv. to ὡς πατρὶ τέκνον δουλεύει, ἐμοὶ 
ἐδούλευσεν καὶ οὕτω σὺν ἐμοὶ ἐδούλ. etc. Phil. ii. 22 [W. 
422 (393) ; 517(537)]. Pb. ina bad sense, of those who 
become slaves to some base power, to yield to, give one's 
self up to: τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ro. vi. 6; νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας, Ro. vii. 
25; ἐπιθυμίαις x. ἡδοναῖς, Tit. iii. 3, (Xen. mem. 1, 5, 5; 
apol. Socr. 16; Plat. Phaedrus p. 238 e.; Polyb.17,15,16; 
Hdian. 1, 17, 22 [9 ed. Bekk.]) ; τῇ κοιλίᾳ, Ro. xvi. 18, 
(γαστρί, Anthol. 11, 410, 4; Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8; abdomini 
servire, Sen. de benef. 7, 26, 4; ventri obedire, Sall. [Cat. i. 
17); μαμωνᾷ, to devote one's self to getting wealth : Mt. vi. 
24; Lk. xvi. 13. τοῖς στοιχείοις τοῦ κόσμου, Gal. iv. 9.* 

δοῦλος, -η, τον, (derived by most fr. δέω to tie, bind; 


δουλόω 


by some fr. AEAQ to ensnare, capture, [(?) al. al.; cf. 
Vanitek p. 322]); serving, subject to: παρεστήσατε rà 
μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, Ro. vi. 19. Then substan- 
tively, ἡ δούλη a female slave, bondmaid, handmaid : rod 
θεοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου, one who worships God and submits to 
him, Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 (iii. 2)); Lk. i. 38, 48. 
ὁ δοῦλος, Sept. for 32; 1. a slave, bondman, man of 
servile condition; a. properly: opp. to ἐλεύθερος, 1 Co. 
vii. 21; xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11 ; Rev. 
vi 15; xiii. 16; xix. 18; opp. to κύριος, δεσπότης, oiko- 
δεσπότης, Mt. x. 24; xiii. 27 sq.; Lk. xii. 46 ; Jn. xv. 15; 
Eph: vi. 5; Col iii. 22; iv. 1; 1 Tim. vi 1; Tit. n. 9, 
and very often. b. metaph. a. one who gives himself 
up wholly to another’s will, 1 Co. vii. 23; or dominion, 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Jn. viii. 34; Ro. vi. 17, 20; τῆς φθορᾶς, 2 
Pet. ii. 19, (τῶν ἡδονῶν, Athen. 12 p. 531 ¢.; τῶν χρημά- 
tov, Plut. Pelop. c. 3; τοῦ πίνειν, Ael. v. h. 2,41). f. 
the δοῦλοι Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, are those 
whose service is used by Christ in extending and ad- 
vancing his cause among men: used of apostles, Ro. i. 1; 
Gal?1:10: Phil 1 1.2. Dims ii: 945 ΤΠ τ 1. ΒΗ τ; 
2 Pet. i. 1; of other preachers and teachers of the 
gospel, Col. iv. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jude vs. 1; of the 
true worshippers of Christ (who is κύριος πάντων, Acts 
x. 36), Eph. vi. 6. the δοῦλοι τοῦ θεοῦ, nim "Jap, are 
those whose agency God employs in executing his pur- 
poses: used of apostles, Acts iv. 29; xvi. 17; of Moses 
(Josh. i. 1), Rev. xv. 3; of prophets (Jer. vii. 25; xxv. 
4), Rev. 1.1; x. 7; xi. 18; of all who obey God's com- 
mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29; Rev. ii. 20; vii. 3; 
xix. 2, 5; xxii. 3,6; (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 
37; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4, 21). γ. δοῦλός τινος, devoted to 
another to the disregard of one's own interests: Mt. xx. 
27; Mk. x. 44 ; strenuously laboring for another's sal- 
vation, 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. aservant, attendant, (of a king) : 
Mt. xviii. 23, 26 sqq. [Syn. see διάκονος.] 

δουλόω, -@: fut. δουλώσω ; 1 aor. ἐδούλωσα ; pf. pass. 
δεδούλωμαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἐδουλώθην ; (δοῦλος) ; [fr. Aes- 
chyl. and Hdt. down]; to make a slave of, reduce to bond- 
age; a. prop.: τινά, Acts vii. 6; τούτῳ kai [yet T WH 
om. Tr br. καὶ] δεδούλωται to him he has also been made a 
bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. b. metaph.: ἐμαυτόν τινι give 
myself wholly to one’s needs and service, make myself a 
bondman to him, 1 Co. ix. 19 ; δουλοῦσθαί τινι, to be made 
subject to the rule of some one, e. g. τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, τῷ 
θεῷ, Ro. vi. 18, 22; likewise ὑπό τι, Gal. iv. 3; δεδουλω- 
μένος οἴνῳ, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Tit. ii. 3 
(δουλεύειν οἴνῳ, Liban. epist. 319) ; δεδούλωμαι ἔν τινι, to 
be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity, 
in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [Comp.: κατα-δουλόω. * 

Sox, -ῆς, 7, (δέχομαι to receive as a guest), a feast, 
banquet, [cf. our reception] : δοχὴν ποιῶ, Lk. v. 29 ; xiv. 
13. (i. q. ni», Gen. [xxi. 8]; xxvi. 30; Esth. i. 3; v. 
4 sqq.; Athen. 8 p. 348 f.; Plut. moral. p. 1102 b. [i. e. 
non posse suav. vivi etc. 21, 9].) * 

δράκων, -ovros, 6, (apparently fr. δέρκομαι, 2 aor. ἔδρα- 
kov; hence δράκων prop. equiv. to ὀξὺ βλέπων [Etym. 
Magn. 286, 7; cf. Curtius 8 13]); Sept. chiefly for pn; 


158 








δύναμαι 


a dragon, ἃ great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early 
as Hom. Il. 2, 308 sq., ete.). From it, after Gen. iii. 
1 sqq., is derived the fig. description of the devil in Rev. 
xii. 3-17; xiii. 2,4,11; xvi. 13; xx. 2. [Cf. Baudissin, 
Studien zur semitisch. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (iv. 4) p. 
281 sqq.]* 

δράμω, (0 run, see τρέχω. 

δράσσομαι; fo grasp with the hand, to take: τινά, 1 Co. 
ii. 19 [B. 291 (250); W. 352 (330)]. (In Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; Sept.) * 

δραχμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (δράσσομαι, [hence prop. a grip, a hand- 
ful]), [fr. Hdt. down], a drachma, a silver coin of [near- 
ly] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see δηνάριον) : 
Lk. xv. 8sq.* 

δρέπανον, -ov, τό, (i. q. δρεπάνη, fr. δρέπω to pluck, pluck 
off), a sickle, a pruning-hook, ahooked vine-knife, such as 
reapers and vine-dressers use: Mk. iv. 29; Rev. xiv. 
14-19: (Hom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.)* 

δρόμος, -ov, ó, (fr. APAMQ [q. v.] ; cf. νόμος, τρόμος. and 
the like), a course (Hom. et sqq.) ; in the N. T. fig., the 
course of life or of office : πληροῦσθαι τὸν δρόμον, Acts xiii. 
25; τελειοῦν, Acts xx. 24; τελεῖν, 2 Tim. iv. 7.* 

Δρουσίλλα [al. Δρούσιλλα, cf. Chandler ὃ 120], -ys, ἡ, 
Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa the elder, wife of Felix, 
the governor of Juda, a most licentious woman (Joseph. 
antt. 20, 7, 1 sq.): Acts xxiv. 24; cf. Win. RWB. [and 
B.D.] s. v.; Schürer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. $ 19, 4.* 

δύναμαι, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. δύνασαι 
and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr. 
Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 359; [ WH. App.p. 168; W. $ 13,2 b.; Veitch 
s. v.]), δύνῃ (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [Lk. xvi. 2 
T WH Tr txt. ]; Rev. ii. 2); impf. ἐδυνάμην and Attie 
ἠδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are 
almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk. 
viii. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 76., so 
RG in Mt. xxvi. 9; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rev. xiv. 3; 
on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; 
Rev. xiv. 3, L T Tr WH all read é8., so T WH in Mt. 
xxvi. 9; R Gin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162; 
W.5812,1b.; B. 33 (29)]; fut. δυνήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἠδυνήθην 
and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt. 
xvii. 16 cod. B) ἠδυνάσθην (cf. [WH τι. s. and p. 169]; 
Kühner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; W. 84 (81); B. 33 
(29); Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 402]) ; Sept. for 5"; to 
be able, have power, whether by virtue of one’s own ability 
and resources, or of a state of mind, or through favora- 
ble circumstances, or by permission of law or custom ; 
a. foll. by an inf. [W. § 44, 3] pres. or aor. (on the dis- 
tinction between which, οἵ. W. $44, 7). a. foll. by a 
pres. inf.: Mt. vi. 24; ix. 155; Mk. ii. 7; iii. 23; Lk. vi. 
39; Jn. iii. 2; v. 19; Acts xxvii. 15; 1 Co. x. 21; Heb. 
v. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 9; Rev. ix. 20, and often. 8. foll. by an 
aor. inf. : Mt. iii. 9; v. 14; Mk. i. 45; ii. 4 ; v. 3; Lk. viii. 
19; xiii. 11; Jn. iii. 8 sq. ; vi. 52; vii. 34,36; Acts iv. 16 
[R G]; v.39; x. 47; Ro. viii. 39; xvi.25; 1 Co. ii. 14; 
iii. 1; vi. 5; 2 Co. iii. 7; Gal. iii. 21; Eph. iii. 4, 20; 1 Th. 
iii. 9; 1 Tim. vi. 7, 16; 2 Tim. ii. 13; iii. 7, 15; Heb. ii. 


δύναμις 


18; iii. 19; [xi. 19 Lchm.]; Jas. i. 21; Rev. iii. 8; v. 3; 
vi. 17, and very often. b. with inf. omitted, as being 
easily supplied from the context: Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. 
WH reject the pass.]; xx. 22; Mk. vi. 19; x. 39; Lk. ix. 
40; xvi. 26; xix. 3; Ro. viii. 7. c. joined with an accus. 
δύναμαί tt, to be able to do something (cf. Germ. ich vermag 
etwas): Mk. ix. 22; Lk. xii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 8, (and in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on). d. absol. like the Lat. possum 
(as in Caes. b. gall. 1, 18, 6), i. q. to be able, capable, 
strong, powerful: 1 Co. ili. 2; x. 13. (2 Chr. xxxii. 13; 
1 Macc. v. 40 sq.; in 2 Mace. xi. 13 cod. Alex., and 
often in Grk. writ. as Eur. Or. 889; Thuc. 4, 105; Xen. 
an. 4, 5, 11 sq.; Isoc., Dem., Aeschin.) 

δύναμις, -ews, 7; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for n, n2), 
iy, 13, 82¥ (an army, a host); strength, ability, power ; 
a. univ. inherent power, power residing in a thing by vir- 
tue of its nature, or which a person or thing exerts and 
puts forth: Lk. i. 17; Acts iv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Co. iv. 
7; xii. 9 (ἡ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται [RG τελειοῦται) ; 
xiii. 4; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 5; Heb. vii. 16; xi.34; Rev. i. 16; xvii. 
13; ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει, Acts iii. 12; μεγάλῃ δυνάμει, Acts iv. 33; 
ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, Mt. xxv. 15; ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, 
beyond our power, 2 Co. i. 8; ἐν δυνάμει sc. dv, endued 
with power, Lk. iv. 36; 1 Co. xv. 43; so in the phrase 
ἔρχεσθαι ἐν δυνάμει, Mk. ix. 15 powerfully, Col. i. 29; 2 
Th. i. 11; contextually i.q. evidently, Ro. i. 4; ἐν δυνάμει 
σημείων k. τεράτων, through the power which I exerted 
upon their souls by performing miracles, Ro. xv. 19 ; δύν. 
ets rt, Heb. xi. 11; δύν. ἐπὶ τὰ δαιμόνια καὶ νόσους θερα- 
πεύειν, Lk. ix. 1; ἡ δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας 6 νόμος, sin exer- 
cises its power (upon the soul) through the law, i. e. 
through the abuse of the law, 1 Co. xv. 56; τῆς ἀναστάσεως 
ToU Χριστοῦ, the power which the resurrection of Christ 
has, for instructing, reforming, elevating, tranquillizing, 
the soul, Phil. iii. 10; τῆς εὐσεβείας, inhering in godliness 
and operating upon souls, 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; δυνάμεις μέλλοντος 
αἰῶνος (see αἰών, 3), Heb. vi. 5; τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς δυνάμεως 
(see πνεῦμα, 5), 1 Pet. iv. 14 Lehm.; 2 Tim. i. 7; δύναμις 
is used of the power of angels: Eph. i. 21 [cf. Mey. 
ad loc.]; 2 Pet. ii. 11; of the power of the devil and 
evil spirits, 1 Co. xv. 24; rod ἐχθροῦ, i. e. of the devil, 
Lk. x. 19 ; rot δράκοντος, Rev. xiii. 2; angels, as excelling 
in power, are called δυνάμεις [cf. (Philo de mutat. nom. 
§ 8 δυνάμεις ἀσώματοι) Mey. as above; Bp. Lehtft. on 
Col. i. 16; see ἄγγελος]: Ro. viii. 38; 1 Pet. iii. 22. ἡ 
δύναμις τοῦ θεοῦ, univ. the power of God: Mt. xxii. 
29; Mk. xii. 24; Lk.xxii. 69; Acts viii. 10; Ro. i. 20; 
ix. 17; 1 Co. vi. 14 ; δύναμις ὑψίστου, Lk. i. 35; ἡ δύναμις, 
esp. in doxologies, the kingly power of God, Mt. vi. 
13 Rec. ; Rev. iv. 11; vii. 12; xi. 17; xii. 10; xv. 8; xix. 
1; and the abstract for the concrete (as 173237 in Jew- 
ish writ.; ef. Buztorf, Lex. talm. col. 385 [p. 201 sq. ed. 
Fischer]) equiv. to 6 duvards, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; 
δύναμις τοῦ θεοῦ is used of the divine power considered 
as acting upon the minds of men, 1 Co. ii. 5; 2 Co. vi. 
7; Eph. iii. 7, 20; [2 Tim.i. 8; 1 Pet. i. 5]; εἴς twa, 2 
Co. xiii.4 [but WH in br.]; Eph. i. 19; ἐνδύεσθαι δύναμιν 
ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. xxiv. 49; by meton. things or persons in 


159 





δύναμις 


which God's saving power shows its efficacy are called àv- 
νάμεις θεοῦ : thus ὁ Χριστός, 1 Co. i. 24; ὁ λόγος τοῦ σταυροῦ, 
1 Co. 1. 18 ; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, with the addition εἰς σωτηρίαν 
παντὶ etc. Ro. i. 16 [cf. W. § 86, 3. b.]. δύναμις is ascribed 
to Christ, now in one sense and now in another: a power 
to heal disease proceeds from him, Mk. v. 30; Lk. v. 17; 
vi. 19; viii.46; the kingly power of the Messiah ishis, 
Mt. xxiv. 30; [ Mk. xiii. 26]; Lk. xxi. 27; 2 Pet. i. 16; 
Rev. v. 12; ἄγγελοι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ (see ἄγγελος, 2), 
ministering to his power, 2 Thess. i. 7 [ W. $34, 3 b. note]; 
metaphysieal[or essential] power, viz. that which 
belongs to him as ὁ θεῖος λόγος, in the expression τὸ ῥῆμα 
τῆς δυνάμ. αὐτοῦ the word uttered by his power, equiv. 
to his most powerful will and energy, Heb. i. 3; moral 
power, operating on the soul, 2 Co. xii. 9 RG; and called 
ἡ θεῖα αὐτοῦ δύναμις in 2 Pet. i. 3; ἡ δύναμις τοῦ κυρίου, 
the power of Christ invisibly present and operative in a 
Christian church formally assembled, 1 Co. v. 4. δύναμις 
τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος: Acts i. 8 [W.125 (119)]; mv. 
ἅγιον x. δύναμις, Acts x. 38; ἀπόδειξις πνεύματος kai δυ- 
νάμεως (see ἀπόδειξις, b.), 1 Co. ii. 4; ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ 
πνεύματος; under or full of the power of the Holy Spirit, 
Lk. iv. 14; ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου, by the power and 
influence of the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 13; by the power 
which, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, I exerted 
upon their souls, Ro. xv. 19. — b. specifically, the power 
of performing miracles: Acts vi. 8; πᾶσα δύναμις, every 
kind of power of working miracles (with the addition 
καὶ σημείοις x. τέρασι), 2 Th. ii. 9; plur.: [Mt. xiii. 54; 
xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14]; 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Gal. iii.5; évep- 
γήματα δυνάμεων, 1 Co. xii. 10; by meton. of the cause for 
the effect, a mighty work [cf. W. 32; Trench § xci.]: δύ- 
ναμιν ποιεῖν, Mk. vi. 5; ix. 39; so in the plur., Mk. vi. 2; 
Lk. xix. 37; joined with σημεῖα, Acts viii. 13 ; with σημεῖα 
k. τέρατα, Acts ii. 22; 2 Co. xii. 12; Heb. ii. 4 [?] ; ποιεῖν 
δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; [xiii. 58]; Acts xix. 11; γίνονται 
δυνάμεις, Mt. xi. 20 sq. 23; Lk.x.13. 0. moral power 
and excellence of soul: 1 Co.iv. 19; 2 Co. iv. 7; Eph. iii. 
16; Col.i.11. d. the power and influence which belong to 
riches; (pecuniary ability), wealth: τοῦ στρήνους, ‘riches 
ministering to luxury’ (Grotius), Rev. xviii. 3; κατὰ δύ- 
ναμιν καὶ ὑπὲρ [ἃ]. rapa] δύναμιν, according to their means, 
yea, beyond their means, 2 Co. viii. 3; (in this sense, for 
Sn, Sept. Deut. viii. 17 sq.; Ruth iv. 11; not infreq. in 
Grk. writ, as Xen. Cyr. 8,4, 34; an. 7, 7, 31 (36)). 6. 
power and resources arising from numbers: Rev. iii. 8. 
f. power consisting in or resting upon armies, forces, 
hosts, (so, both in sing. and in plur., often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt., Thue., Xen. on; in the Sept. and in Apocr.) ; 
hence δυνάμεις τοῦ οὐρανοῦ the hosts of heaven, Hebraisti- 
cally the stars: Mt. xxiv. 29; Lk. xxi. 26; and ὃ. ἐν τοῖς 
οὐρανοῖς, Mk. xiii. 25; equiv. to DAW N2Y, 2 K. xvii. 
16; xxiii. 4; Is. xxxiv. 4; Jer. viii. 2; Dan. viii. 10, etc. 
[cf. σαβαώθ]. — g. Like the Lat. vis and potestas, equiv. 
to the (force i. e.) meaning of a word or expression: 1 
Co. xiv. 11; (Plat. Crat. p. 394 b.; Polyb. 20, 9, 11; 
Dion. Hal. 1, 68; Dio Cass. 55, 3; al.).* 
[Sxn. Bla, δύναμις, ἐνέργεια, ἐξουσία, ἰσχύς, κράτος: 


δυναμόω 


Bla force, effective, often oppressive power, exhibiting itself 
in single deeds of violence; δύν. power, natural ability, gen- 
eral and inherent; évépy. working, power in exercise, opera- 
tive power; ἐξουσ. primarily liberty of action ; then, authority 
—eitheras delegated power, or as unrestrained, arbitrary 
power; iex. strength, power (esp. physical) as an endowment ; 
κράτος, might, relative and manifested power — in the N. T. 
only of God; τὸ κράτος τῆς ic x. Eph. vi. 10, ἡ ἐνέργ. τῆς δυν. 
Eph. iii. 7, ἡ ἐνέργ. τοῦ xp. τῆς icx. Eph. i.19. Cf. Schmidt 
ch. 148; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 19.] 

$vvapóo, -@: [pres. pass. Suvapodpat]; to make strong, 
confirm, strengthen: Col. i. 11; [Eph. vi. 10 WH mrg.]; 
1 aor. ἐδυναμώθησαν, Heb. xi. 34 (RG éve8.). (Ps. Ixvii. 
(Ixviii.) 29; Eccl. x. 10; Dan. ix. 27 [Theod.; Ps. Ixiv. 
(Ixv.) 4 Aq.; Job xxxvi. 9 Aq.] and occasionally in eccl. 
and Byz. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 605; [W. 26 
(25)]) [Come.: ἐν-δυναμόω.] * 

δυνάστης, -ov, 6, (δύναμαι) ; fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. on; 
powerful ; 1. a prince, potentate: Lk. i. 52; used of 
God (Sir. xlvi. 5; 2 Macc. xv. 3, 23, etc. ; of Zeus, Soph. 
Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. 15. 2. a courtier, high officer, 
royal minister: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of great 
authority; but see Meyer ad loc.], (δυνάσται Φαραώ, Gen. 
]; 4).* 

δυνατέω, -à ; (δυνατός) ; (o be powerful or mighty; show 
one's self powerful: 2 Co. xiii. 3 (opp. to ἀσθενῶν) ; to be 
able, have power : foll. by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L T Tr WH; 
2 Co.ix. 8 L T Tr WH. Not found in prof. writ. nor 
in the Sept.* 

δυνατός, -7, -óv, (δύναμαι) ; [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for 
5131; able, powerful, mighty, strong; 1. absolutely; a. 
mighty in wealth and influence: 1 Co. i. 26; (Rev. vi. 15 
Rec.); of δυνατοί, the chief men, Acts xxv. 5, (Joseph. 
b. j. 1, 12, 4 ἧκον Ἰουδαίων ot δυνατοί; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1; 
Thue. 1,89; Polyb.9,23, 4). ὁ δυνατός, the preéminently 
mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i.49. b. strong in soul: 
to bear calamities and trials with fortitude and patience, 
2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. xiii. 9; 
firm in conviction and faith, Ro. xv. 1. 2. in con- 
struction; a. δυνατός εἶμι with inf., to be able (to do some- 
thing; [B. 260 (224); W. 319 (299)]) : Lk. xiv. 31; Acts 
xi 17; Ro.iv.21; xi. 23; xiv.4 R G; 2 Co.ix. 8 RG; 
2 Tim. i. 12; Tit.i. 9; Heb. xi. 19 (Lehm. δύναται) ; Jas. 
lii. 2. b. δυνατὸς ἔν τινι, mighty i. e. excelling in some- 
thing: ἐν ἔργῳ x. λόγῳ, Lk. xxiv. 19; ἐν λόγοις Kal ἔργοις, 
Acts vii. 22; ἐν γραφαῖς, excelling in knowledge of the 
Seriptures, Acts xviii. 24. c. πρός te, mighty i. e. having 
power for something: 2 Co. x. 4. d. neuter δυνατόν [in 
pass. sense, cf. B. 190 (165)] possible: ei δυνατόν (ἐστι), 
Mt. xxiv. 24; xxvi. 39; Mk. xiii. 22; xiv. 35; Ro. xii. 
18; Gal. iv. 15; οὐκ ἦν δυνατόν foll. by inf. Acts ii. 24; 
δυνατόν τί ἐστί τινι [B. 190 (165)], Mk. ix. 23 ; xiv. 36; 
Acts xx. 16; παρὰ θεῷ πάντα δυνατά ἐστι, Mt. xix. 26; Mk. 
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, what his power 
could do, equiv. to τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ, Ro. ix. 22, cf. W. 
§ 34, 2.* 

δύνω, δύω; 2 aor. ἔδυν; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ. transi- 
tively) ἔδυσα (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WH), cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. 
li. p. 156 sq.; W. p. 84 (81); B. 56 (49); [Veitch s. vv.]; 


160 





δυσερμήνευτος 


to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in: in the 
N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the 
sea), Mk. i. 82; Lk.iv.40. So times without number in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 11; Lev. xxii. 
7, etc.; ΤῸΡ. 11. 4; 1 Mace. x. 50. [Cowr.: ék-, dz-ex- 
(μαι), év-, ἐπ-εν-, παρ-εισ-, ἐπι-δύνω. * 

δύο, genit. indecl. δύο (as in Epic, and oceasionally in 
Hdt., Thue., Xen., Polyb., al. for δυοῖν, more common in 
Attie [see Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 289 sq.]) ; dat. 
δυσί, δυσίν, ([-σί in Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts xxi. 33 
(Tr -civ),-oivin Mt. xxii. 40; Mk. xvi. 12; Lk. xii.52(R α 
-ot); Acts xii. 6 (R GL-ot) ; Hob. x. 28; Rev. xi.3 (RG@ 
-oi) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.98; WH. App. p. 147]— a form not 
found in the older and better writ., met with in Hippocr., 
Aristot., Theophr., frequent fr. Polyb. on, for the Attic 
δυοῖν); ace. δύο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 210; Bttm. Ausf. 
Spr. i. p. 276 sq.; W. $ 9, 2 b.; Passow i. p. 729); two: 
absol., οὐκ ἔτι εἰσὶ δύο, ἀλλὰ σὰρξ pia, Mt. xix. 6; Mk. x. 8; 
δύο ἣ τρεῖς. Mt. xviii. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 29; τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶ x. δύο 
ἐπὶ τρισί, Lk. xii. 52; ava and κατὰ δύο, two by two [W. 
898 (372); 401 (374); B. 30 (26)], Lk. ix.3 [WH om. 
Tr br. ἀνά]; x. 1 [WH ἀνὰ δύο [070]: cf. Acta Philip. 
8 36, ed. Tdf. p. 92]; Jn. ii. 6 [apiece]; 1 Co. xiv. 27; δύο 
δύο two and two, Mk. vi. 7 (so, after the Hebr., in Gen. 
vi. 19, 20; but the phrase is not altogether foreign even 
to the Grk. poets, as Aeschyl. Pers. 981 μυρία μυρία for 
κατὰ μυριάδας, cf. W. 249 (234), [cf. 39 (38) ]) ; neut. εἰς 
δύο into two parts, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; with gen. 
δύο τῶν μαθητῶν(αὐτοῦ), Mk. xi. 1; xiv. 135; Lk. xix. 29; 
[Mt. xi. 2 RG]; τῶν οἰκετῶν, Acts x. 7. δύο ἐξ αὐτῶν, 
Lk. xxiv. 13 [cf. Bttm. 158 (138); Win. 203 (191)]. 
with a noun or pronoun: δύο δαιμονιζόμενοι, Mt. viii. 28. 
δύο μάχαιραι, Lk. xxii. 38; ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων, Mt. 
xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1; δυσὶ κυρίοις, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 
13; εἶδε δύο ἀδελφούς, Mt. iv. 18; preceded by the article, 
οἱ δύο the two, the twain: Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x. 8; 1 Co. vi. 
16; Eph. v. 31; τοὺς δύο, Eph. ii. 15; ai [ Rec. only] δύο 
διαθῆκαι, Gal. iv. 24 ; οὗτοι [ Lclim. br. or. ] οἱ δύο υἱοί μου, 
Mt. xx. 21; περὶ τῶν δύο ἀδελφῶν, Mt. xx. 21; ἐν ταύταις 
rais δυσὶν ἐντολαῖς, Mt. xxii. 40; τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας, Mt. xiv. 
19; Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16 ; δύο δηνάρια, Lk. x. 35. 

Sus, an inseparable prefix conveying the idea of diffi- 
culty, opposition, injuriousness or the like, and 
corresponding to our mis-, un- [Curtius § 278]; opp. to εὖ. 

δυσ-βάστακτος. -ov, (βαστάζων. hard [A. V. grievous] to 
be borne : Mt. xxiii. 4 [T WH txt. om. Tr br. δυσβάστ.] 
and Lk. xi. 46 φορτία δυσβάστακτα, said of precepts hard 
to obey, and irksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3; Philo, omn. 
prob. lib. $5; Plut. quaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 £.)* 

Sucevtepla, -as, 7j, (ἔντερον intestine), dysentery, (Lat. 
tormina intestinorum, bowel-complaint): Acts xxviii. 8 
RG; see the foll. word. (Hippocr. and med. writ.; 
Hdt., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.) * 

δυσεντέριον, -ov, τό, a later form for Ovcevrepía, q. v. : 
Acts xxviii. 8 LT Tr WH. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 518.* 

δυσερμήνευτος, -ov, (Epunvedw), hard to interpret, diffi- 
cult of explanation: Heb.v. 11. (Diod. 2, 52; Philo de 

somn. $32 fin.; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) * 


δύσις 


[δύσις, -ews, 7; 1. α sinking or setting, esp. of the 
heavenly bodies; 2. of the quarter in which the sun 
sets, the west: Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) * Shorter Conclu- 
sion. (So both in sing. and in plur.: Aristot. de mund. 
3 p. 393*, 17 ; 4 p. 894", 21; Polyb. 1, 42, 5 etc.)*] 

δύσκολος, -ov, (κόλον food); 1. prop. hard to find 
agreeable food for, fastidious ‘about food. 2. difficult 
to please, always finding fault; (Eur., Arstph., Xen., 
Plat., al.). 3. univ. difficult (Xen. oec. 15, 10 ἡ yewp- 
yia δύσκολός ἐστι μαθεῖν) : πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστι, foll. by acc. 
with inf., Mk. x. 24." 

δυσκόλως, adv., (δύσκολος), [fr. Plato down ], with diffi- 
culty: Mt. xix. 23; Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24.* 

δυσμή, -ῆς, ἡ, [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], much often- 
er in plur. [W. $ 27, 3] δυσμαί, ai, (δύω or δύνω, q. v.), 
sc. ἡλίου, the setting of the sun: Lk. xii. 54 [acc. to the 
reading of T WH Tr mrg. ἐπὶ δ. may possibly be un- 
derstood of time (cf. W. 315 sq. (352)) ; see ἐπί, A. IL; 
al. take the prep. locally, over, in, and give δυσμ. the 
meaning which follows ; see ἐπί, A. I. 1 b.]; the region of 
sunset, the west, [anarthrous, W.121 (115) ]: Rev. xxi. 13; 
ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ δυσμῶν, from all regions or nations, Mt. 
viii. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Hebr. wnwn wj25, 
Josh.i.4. Often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. on, both with 
and without 7Atov.* 

δυσνόητος, -ov, (νοέω), hard to be understood : 2 Pet. iii. 
16. (χρησμός, Leian. Alex. 54; Diog. Laért. 9, 13 δυσ- 
vónróv re kai δυσεξήγητον ; [ Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 8167,3].)* 

δυσφημέω, -à : [ pres. pass. δυσφημοῦμαι] ; (070 pos) ; 
to use ill words, defame ; pass. to be defamed, 1 Co. iv. 13 
'TWH Trmrg. (1 Mace. vii. 41; in Grk. writ. fr. Aes- 
chyl. Agam. 1078 down.) * 

δυσφημία, -as, 7, both the condition of a δύσφημος, i. e. 
of one who is defamed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of 
one who uses opprobrious language, viz. defamation, re- 
proach: διὰ δυσφημίας x. εὐφημίας [ A. V. by evil report and 
good report], 2 Co. vi. 8. (1 Mace. vii. 38; 3 Mace. ii. 
26. Dion. H. 6, 48; Plut. de gen. Socr. $ 18 p. 587 £.) * 

δύω, see dive. 

δώδεκα, οἱ, ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; 
x.1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; 
Rev. vii. 5 [R G «']; xxi. 21, etc. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve 
apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. 
35; x. 32; xi. 11; Mt. xxvi. 14, 20; Lk. xxii. 3, etc. 

δωδέκατος, -7, -ov, twelfth: Rev. xxi. 20. [ Fr. Hom. on.]* 

Swdexa-udov, -ov, τό, (fr. δώδεκα, and φυλή tribe), the 
twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as 
consisting of twelve tribes: Acts xxvi. 7. (Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 55, 6; Prot. Jac. c. 1, 3; λαὸς ὁ δωδεκάφυλος, Orac. 
Sibyll. Cf. δεκάφυλος, τετράφυλος, Hdt. 5, 66; [W. 100 
(95)])* 


11 


161 


δωροφορία 


δῶμα, -τος, τό, (δέμω to build) ; 1. a building, house, 
(Hom. et sqq.). 2. a part of a building, dining-room, 
hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script. equiv. to 23, 
house-top, roof [W. 23]: Mt. xxiv. 17; Mk. xiii. 15; Lk. 
v. 19; xvii. 31. The house-tops of the Orientals were 
(and still are) level, and were frequented not only for 
walking but also for meditation and prayer: Acts x. 9; 
hence ἐπὶ δωμάτων, on the house-tops, i. e. in public: Mt. 
x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα... . κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς παντὸς 
Ἰσραήλ, 2 5. xvi. 22." 

δωρεά, -ἂς, ἡ, (δίδωμι) ; from [ Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; 
a gift: Jn. iv. 10; Acts viii. 20; xi. 17; Ro. v. 15; 2 Co. 
ix. 15; Heb. vi.4; ἡ χάρις ἐδόθη κατὰ τὸ μέτρον τῆς δωρεᾶς 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, according to the measure in which Christ 
gave it, Eph. iv. 7; with an epexegetical gen. of the 
thing given, viz. τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, Acts ii. 38; x. 455 
δικαιοσύνης, Ro. v. 17 [L WH Tr mrg. br. 7. dap.]; τῆς 
χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Eph. iii. 7. The acc. δωρεάν (prop. as 
a gift, gifi-wise [cf. W. 230 (216) ; B. 153 (134) ]) is used 
adverbially ; Sept. for DIN; a. freely, for naught, gratis, 
gratuitously : Mt. x. 8; Ro. iii. 24; 2 Co. xi. 7; 2 Th. iii. 8; 
Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 17, (Polyb. 18,17, 7; Ex. xxi. 11 ; δωρεὰν 
ἄνευ ἀργυρίου, Is. lii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet 
no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without just 
cause, unnecessarily: Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5; 
xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19); Gal.ii. 21, (Job i. 9 [7]; Ps. xxxiv. 
(xxxv.) 7 [where Symm. ἀναιτίως] ; so the Lat. gratuitus: 
Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor, Sen. epp. 105, 3 [ bk. xviii. ep. 
2, $3] odium aut est ex offensa... aut gratuitum). [Syn. 
see δόμα, fin.]* 

δωρεάν, see δωρεά. 

Sepéo, -ὥ: to present, bestow, (Hes., Pind.; Hdt., al.) ; 
pass. Lev. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more 
frequently as depon. mid. δωρέομαι; -οῦμαι (Hom. et sqq.) : 
1 aor. ἐδωρησάμην ; pf. δεδώρημαι ; τινί τι, Mk. xv. 45; 
2 Pet. i. 3, 4.* 

δώρημα, -ros, τό, (Swpeopar) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction : 
Ro. v.16; Jas.i. 17. ([Aeschyl.], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf 
δόμα, fin. | * 

Sapov, -ov, τό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for 
{2 7p, often also for 73D and Ww; a. gift, present: Eph. 
ii. 8; Rey. xi. 10; of gifts offered as an expression of 
honor, Mt. ii. 11; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to 
God, Mt. v. 23 sq.; viii. 4; xv. 5; xxiii. 18 sq.; Mk. vii. 
11; Heb. v. 1; viii. 3 sq. ; ix. 9; xi. 4; of money cast into 
the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the 
support of the poor, Lk. xxi. 1, [4]. [S¥N. see δόμα, fin.] * 

Sopodopía, -as, 7, (Swpopdpos bringing gifts), the offering 
of a gift or of gifis: Ro. xv. 31 L Trmrg. cf. διακονία, 3. 
(Alciphr. 1, 6; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Hemst.]; several 
times in eccles. writ.) * 


162 


E 


x 
ea 


fa, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of 
wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the 
impy. pres. of the verb eay[acc. to others a natural, 
instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in 
prose writ. (as Plat. Prot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah/: Mk. i. 
24 RG; Lk. iv. 34; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 32 sq.* 

ἐάν ; I. aconditional particle (derived fr. εἰ dv), which 
makes reference to time and to experience, introducing 
something future, but not determining, before the event, 
whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat. 
si; Germ. wenn; im Fall, dass; falls; wofern); cf., among 
others, Hermann ad Viger. p. 832; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 
p. 450 sqq.; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with 
the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the 
more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the 
subjune. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (ἐὰν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός cov 
ἁπλοῦς 7, if it be the case, as to which I do not know, 
that thine eye etc.); ibid. 23; xvii. 20; Lk. x. 6 ; Jn. vii. 
17; viii. 54 [RG L mrg.]; ix. 31; xi. 9, 10; Acts v. 38; 
xiii. 41; Ro. ii. 25 sq.; 1 Co.ix. 16; Gal. v. 2; 1 Tim. i. 
8 [not Lchm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 etc. 
b. with the subjune. A orist, corresponding to the Lat. 
fut. perf.: Mt. iv. 9 (ἐὰν προσκυνήσῃς μοι if thou shalt 
have worshipped me) ; v. 46; ix. 21; Mk. iii. 24; ix. 50; 
Lk. xiv. 34 ; xvii. 4; xx. 28; Jn. v. 43; x1. 57 ; Ro. vii. 2; 
x. 9; 1 Co. vii. 8, 39; viii. 10; xvi. 10 (ἐὰν ἔλθη Τιμό- 
6cos; for although he was already on his way to Cor- 
inth, yet some hindrance might still prevent his arriv- 
ing) ; 2 Co. ix. 4; Gal. vi. 1; Jas. ii. 2; 1 Jn. v. 16 [Lehm. 
pres.]; Rev. iii. 20, and often; also in the oratio obliqua, 
where the better Grk. writ. use the Optative : Jn. ix. 22; 
xi 57; Acts ix. 2 (W. 294 (276); [ef. B. 224 (193)]). 
The difference between the Pres. and the Aor. may be seen 
especially from the following passages: 2 Tim.ii. 5 éàv 
δὲ καὶ ἀθλῇ τις, ov στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ, 1 
Co. xiv. 23 ἐὰν οὖν συνέλθη ἡ ἐκκλησία . . - καὶ πάντες γλώσ- 
cats λαλῶσιν, εἰσέλθωσι δὲ ἰδιῶται ἢ ἄπιστοι, VS. 34 ἐὰν δὲ 
πάντες προφητεύωσιν, εἰσέλθῃ δέ τις ἄπιστος, Mt. xxi. 21 
ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν καὶ μὴ διακριθῆτε. Also εἰ (* quod. per 
se nihil significat praeter conditionem," Klotz 1. c. p. 


455) and ἐάν are distinguished in propositions subjoined | 


the one to the other [W. 296 (277 sq.)]: Jn. xiii. 17 εἰ 
ταῦτα οἴδατε, μακάριοί ἐστε, ἐὰν ποιῆτε αὐτά, Jn. iii. 12; 1 
Co. vii. 36; in statements antithetic, Acts v. 38 sq. ; or 
parallel, Mk. iii. 24-26. Finally, where one of the evan- 
gelists uses εἰ another has ἐάν, but so that each particle 
retains its own force, inasmuch as one and the same thing 
is differently conceived of by the different minds: Mk. 
ix.43 ἐὰν σκανδαλίζῃ [-λίσῃ L mrg. T WH txt.] ἡ χείρ aov, 
and vs. 47 ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός cov σκανδαλίζῃ ce, i. e. if so 





27 
€av 


be that etc. ; on the other hand, Matthew, in xviii. 8 sq. 
and v. 29 sq. concerning the same thing sayse?. c. irreg- 
ularly, but to be explained as an imitation of the Hebr. ox 
which is also a particle of time (cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. v. 
4), ἐάν with the Subjunc. Aor. is used of things which the 
speaker or writer thinks will certainly take place, where 
ὅταν when, whenever, should have been used: ἐὰν ὑψωθῶ, 
Jn. xii. 32; ἐὰν πορευθῶ, Jn. xiv. 3; ἐὰν φανερωθῇ, 1 Jn. 
ii. 28 (LT Tr WH, for ὅταν RG) ; iii. 2; ἐὰν ἀκούσητε, 
Heb. iii. 7 fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 8; (ἐὰν εἰσέλθης εἰς τὸν 
νυμφῶνα, Tob. vi. 17 (16) [al. órav]; ἐὰν ἀποθάνω, θάψον 
pe, Tob. iv. 3, ef. vs. 4 ὅταν ἀποθάνῃ, θάψον αὐτήν; for ON 
when, Is. xxiv. 13; Am. vii. 2). — d. sometimes when the 
particle is used with the Subj. Aor. the futurity of a thing 
is not so much affirmed as imagined, it being known to 
be something which never could happen: ἐὰν εἴπῃ ὁ 
ποῦς, if the foot should say, or were to say, 1 Co. xii. 
15; ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 6. 
2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the 
time of Aristotle on, ἐάν is connected also with the In- 
dicative, [cf. Klotz l.c. p. 468 sqq.; Kühner § 575 
Anm.5; W. 295 (277); B. 221 (191) sq.; Tdf. Proleg. 
p. 124 sq.; WH. App. p. 171; Soph. Lex.s. v.; Vin- 
cent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77]; and 
a. with the indic. Future, in meaning akin, as is well 
known, to the subjunc.: [ἐὰν δύο συμφωνήσουσιν. Mt. 
xviii. 19 T Tr]; ἐὰν οὗτοι σιωπήσουσι, Lk. xix. 40 LT Tr 
WH; ἐὰν... . ὁδηγήσει, Acts viii. 31 T Tr WH, (ἐὰν βεβη- 
λώσουσιν αὐτά, Lev. xxii. 9); butalso — b. with the indic. 
Present: ἐὰν δανείζετε. Lk. vi. 34 L mrg. Trtxt.; ἐὰν 
στήκετε, 1 Th. iii. 8 T Trtxt. WH; ἐάν re ἀποθνήσκομεν, 
Ro. xiv. 8 Lchm. with an indic. Preterite, but one 
having the force of a Pres.: ἐὰν [Lchm. av] οἴδαμεν, 1 Jn. 
v. 15 without var. 9. ἐάν joined with other particles; 
a. ἐὰν δὲ καί but if also, but even if, [ A. V. but and if (re- 
tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)]; with the Subjunc.: Mt. xviii. 
17; 1 Co. vii. 11, 28; 2 Tim.ii.5. b. ἐὰν καί : Gal. vi. 
1. c. ἐὰν μή if not, unless, except; with the subjunc. 
Present: Mt. x. 13; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lehm.txt. aor.]; Acts 
xv. 1 [Rec.]; 1 Co. viii. 8; ix. 16 [RG L mrg. TWH 
mrg.]; Jas. ii. 17 ; 1 Jn. iii. 21; with the subjunc. Aorist : ἡ 
Mt. vi. 15; xviii. 35 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Jn. iii. 3 ; viii. 24; 1 Co. 
xiv. 6sq. 9; Ro. x. 15; [xi. 23 RL]; 2 Tim.ii.5; Rev. ii. 
5,22 [R L], and often. with the Indicative pres. : ἐὰν μὴ 
πιστεύετε, Jn. x. 38 Tdf. In some passages, although the 
particles ἐὰν μή retain their native force of unless, if not, 
yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate 
them Put that, without : Mt. xxvi. 42 (the cup cannot pass 
by without my drinking it); οὐ ydp ἐστιν κρυπτόν, ἐὰν 
μὴ φανερωθῇ (Tres.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall 


a7 
ἐάνπερ 


be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex- 
cept that it should be made manifest), Mk. iv. 22; οὐδείς 
ἐστιν, ὃς ἀφῆκεν oikíav . . . ἐὰν μὴ λάβη, but that shall re- 
ceive (properly, unless he shall receive .. . it cannot be 
said that any one has left), Mk. x. 29, 30, [cf. B. $ 149, 6. 
On the supposed use of ἐὰν μή (εἰ μή) as equiv. to ἀλλά, 
cf. Mey. on Mt. xii. 4; Gal. i. 7; ii. 16; Fritzsche on Ro. 
xiv. 14 fin. ; Ellie. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.ll ec. See ei, 
1Π. 8 ο. β.] d. ἐάνπερ [L Tr separately, ἐάν rep] if only, 
if indeed: Heb. iii. 6 (where L br. περ, and T Tr WH 
read éav), 14; vi. 3; it occurs neither in the Sept. nor in 
the O. T. Apocr.; on its use in Grk. writ. cf. Klotz, 1. c. 
p-483 sq. 6. éavte... ἐάν Te, sive . . . sive, whether... 
or: Ro. xiv. 8; (often in Sept. for DN . . - ON, as Ex. xix. 
13; Lev. iii. 1; Deut. xviii. 3). Cf. Klotz, I. c. p. 479 
sq.; Kühner $541; [B.221(191)]. f. κἂν for xai ἐάν, 
see κἄν. II. The classic use of the conditional par- 
ticle ἐάν also in the contracted form ἄν (see p. 34" above) 
seems to have led the biblical writers of both Testaments 
to connect ἐάν with relative pronouns and adverbs in- 
stead of the potential particle ἄν, as ὃς ἐάν [so Tdf. in 
12 places]. ó éav [so Tdf. uniformly], etc. (this use 
among prof. writ. is very doubtful, cf. W. p. 310 (291); 
B. 72 (63)): Mt. v. 19; x. 14[R 6]; xv. 5; Mk. vi. 22 
sq.; Lk. ix. 48(WH dv]; xvii. 33; Acts vii. z [R G T]; 
1 Co. vi. 18; Eph. vi. 8 [RG L txt.]; 3 Jn. 5, etc.; ὅπου 
ἐάν, Mt. viii. 19; xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10 [1, Tr dv]. ὁσάκις 
ἐάν, Rev. xi. 6. οὗ ἐάν, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (1 Mace. vi. 36). 
καθὸ ἐάν, 2 Co. viii. 12 [Tdf. dv; ὅστις ἐάν, Gal. v. 10 T 
Tr WH; ἥτις ἐάν, Acts iii. 23 Tdf. For many other exx. 
see Soph. Lex. 5. v. ἐάν, 3.] In many places the codd. 
vary between ἐάν and ἄν; cf. ἄν, II. p. 34; [and esp. Tf. 
Proleg. p. 96]. 

ἐάν-περ, see ἐάν, I. 3 d. 

ἑαυτοῦ, -7s, -od, etc. or (contracted) αὑτοῦ, -ῆς, -od, (see 
p. 87); plur. ἑαυτῶν ; dat. -ois, -ais, -ois, etc. ; reflexive 
pronoun of the 3d person. It is used 1. of the 3d 
pers. sing. and plur., to denote that the agent and the 
person acted on are the same; as, od ew ἑαυτόν, Mt. 
xxvii 42; Mk. xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 35; ὑψοῦν ἑαυτόν, Mt. 
xxiii 12, etc. ἑαυτῷ, ἑαυτόν are also often added to 
middle verbs: διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jn. xix. 24 (Xen. 
mem. 1, 6, 13 ποιεῖσθαι ἑαυτῷ φίλον) ; cf. W. $ 38, 6; [B. 
$135,6]. Ofthe phrases into which this pronoun enters 
we notice the following: ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, see ἀπό, II. 2 d. aa. ; 
δ ἑαυτοῦ of itself, i. e. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr 
L txt. read abr.]; ἐν ἑαυτῷ, see in διαλογίζεσθαι. λέγειν, 
εἰπεῖν. εἰς ἑαυτὸν ἔρχεσθαι to come to one's self, to a 
better mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν by 
one’s self, alone: Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas.ii. 17. παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, 
by him i. e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3). 
πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to himself i. e. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12 
ΓΕ ας; T om., WH (but with abr.) reject, L Tr (but the 
latter with air.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr air. 
(see abrov) ] ; with [cf. our to] himself, i. e. in his own mind, 
προσεύχεσθαι, Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Macc. xi. 13) ; 
in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos- 
sessive pronoun, as τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς: Mt. viii. 22; Lk. 


163 





Ἑβραῖος 


ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the 1st and 2d 
pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is 
thereby occasioned; thus, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς equiv. to ἐν ἡμῖν av- 
τοῖς, Ro. viii. 23; ἑαυτούς equiv. to ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, 1 Co. xi. 
31; ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ i. 4. ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ [read by L Tr WH], Jn. 
xviii. 34; ἑαυτόν i. q. σεαυτόν [read by L T Tr WH], Ro. 
xiii. 9; ἑαυτοῖς for ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, Mt. xxiii. 31, etc.; cf. Mat- 
thiae $489 IL; W. $ 22; 5; [B. § 127, 15]. 3. It is 
used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun 
ἀλλήλων, ἀλλήλοις, ἀλλήλους, reciprocally, mutually, one 
another: Mt. xvi. 7; xxi.38; Mk. x. 26 [Trmre. WH 
αὐτόν]; xvi. 3; Lk. xx. 5; Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 13, 16; 
1 Pet. iv. 8, 10; see Matthiae $489 III. ; Kühnerii. p. 497 
sq.; Bnhdy. p. 273; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13]. 

ἐάω, -@; impf. εἴων ; fut. ἐάσω ; 1aor.etaca; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. to allow, permit, let: foll. by the inf., οὐκ 
ἂν εἴασε διορυγῆναι [T Tr WH -x65vac], Mt. xxiv. 43; by 
the acc. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (οὐκ εἴα αὐτὰ 
λαλεῖν); Acts xiv. 16; xxiii. 32; xxvii. 32; xxviii.4; 1 Co. ἢ 
x. 13; by the aec. alone, when the inf. is easily supplied 
from the context, οὐκ εἴασεν αὐτούς, sc. πορευθῆναι, Acts 
Xvi. 7; οὐκ εἴων αὐτόν, SC. εἰσελθεῖν, Acts xix. 30; [cf. W. 
476 (444) ]. 2. twa, to suffer one to do what he wishes, 
not to restrain, to let alone: Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; Acts v. 38 
RG; ἐᾶτε sc. αὐτούς, is spoken by Christ to the apostles, 
meaning, ‘do not resist them, let them alone, (the fol- 
lowing ἕως τούτου is to be separated from what precedes; 
[al. connect the words closely, and render ‘ suffer them 
to go even to this extreme’; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed. 
Weiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave: 
τὰς ἀγκύρας . . . εἴων els THY θάλασσαν, they let down into 
the sea [i. e. abandoned; cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009* bot. ], 
Acts xxvii. 40. [COMP.: mpoc-edo.] * 

ἑβδομήκοντα, οἱ, ai, ra, [fr. Hdt. down], seventy: Acts 
vii. 14 [here Rec.* ἑβδομηκονταπέντε] ; xxiii. 23; xxvii. 
37; οἱ ἑβδομήκοντα [ἐβδ. δύο L br. WH br.], the seventy 
disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve 
apostles: Lk. x. 1, 17. [ B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Seventy Dis- 
ciples. ] * 

Γἑβδομηκοντα-έξ for ἑβδομήκοντα ἔξ, seventy-six: Acts 
xxvii. 37 Rec.*] 

ἑβδομηκοντάκις, [ Gen. iv. 24 j, seventy times: ἑβδομηκον- 
τάκις ἑπτά, seventy times seven times, i. e. countless times, 
Mt. xviii. 22 [cf. W. 837, 5 Note 2; B. 30 (26) and see 
ἑπτά, fin. ; al. (cf. R. V. mrg.) seventy-seven times, see 
Mey. ad loc.].* 

[ἑβδομηκοντα-πέντε, seventy-five: Acts vii. 14 Προ. εἰς 
(Gen. xxv. 7; Ex. xxxix. 6 (xxxviii. 27) ; 1 Esdr.v. 12).*] 

ἕβδομος, -η, -ov, seventh: Jn. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4; Jude 
14; Rev. viii. 1; xi 15, ete. [From Hom. down.] 

Ἐβέρ [R* G], more correctly [L T WH]"EBep [on the 
accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Treg. "EB., cf. 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408; cf. B. Irt 
Heber], 6, Eber or Heber, indeclinable proper name of a 
Hebrew: Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).* 

*Egpaikós, -7, -óv, Hebrew: Lk. xxiii. 38 (R GL br. Tr 
mrg. br.).* 


‘EBpatos [WH 'Egp., see their Intr. ὃ 408], -ov, 6, a 


" EBpais 


Hebrew (*33y a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv. 
13, afterwards transferred to his posterity descended 
from Isaae and Jacob; by it in the O. T. the Israelites 
are both distinguished from and designated by foreign- 
ers, as afterwards by Pausan., Plutarch, al. The name 


is now generally derived from 72) for 7733 "Ay 1. 6. of 


the region beyond the Euphrates, whence "3j! equiv. to 
one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen. 
xiv. 13 Sept. ὁ περάτης. Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. ἃ. hebr. 
Sprache u. Schrift, p. 11 sq.; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987; 
Knobel, Volkertafel der Genesis, p. 176 sqq.; Bleek, Einl. 
in d. A. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Eng. trans. i. 76 sq.]; [B. D. 
s.v. Hebrew. For Syn. see Ἰουδαῖος.7). Inthe N. T. 1. 
any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation: 2 Co. xi. 22; 
Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Euseb. ἢ. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo, 
the Alexandrian Jew, "Efjpatos, although his education 
was Greek, and he had little [if any] knowledge even of 
the Hebrew language; and in Praep. evang. 8, 8, 34 he 
applies the same word to Aristobulus, who was both an 
Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jew.) 2. Ina nar- 
rower sense those are called Ἑβραῖοι who lived in Pales- 
tine and used the language of the country, i. e. Chaldee; 
from whom are distinguished οἱ Ἑλληνισταί, q. v. That 
name adhered to them even after they had gone over to 
Christianity: Acts vi.1. (Philo in his de conf. lingg.§ 26 
makes a contrast between Ἑβραῖοι and ἡμεῖς ; and in his 
de congr. erud. grat. $ 8 he calls Greek ἡ ἡμετέρα διάλεκτος. 
Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He- 
brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke 
Aramaic or Greek, equiv. to πιστοὶ ἐξ Ἑβραίων ; so in the 
heading of the Epistle to the Hebrews; called by Euseb. 
h. e. 3, 4, 2 of ἐξ “Ἑβραίων ὄντες. [Cf. K. Wieseler, Unters. 
ii. d. Hebrierbrief, 2te Hiilfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.]* 
"Eppats [ WII'Ep., see their Intr. $ 408], -idos, ἡ, He- 
brew, the Hebrew language; not that however in which 
the O. T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal- 
daie, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; cf. A. 
Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at the 
time of Jesus and the apostles had long superseded it 
in Palestine: Acts xxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 14; 'Efpats φωνή, 
4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Shemitie Lan- 
guages etc.; ib. Am. ed. s. v. Lang. of the New Test.]* 
"EBpoaicr( [WH Ἔβρ., see their Intr. $ 408], adv., 
(éBpai£o), in Hebrew, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing 
word and reff.) : Jn. v. 2; xix. 13, 17, 20; [xx. 16 T Tr 
WHLbr.]; Rev. ix. 11; xvi. 16. [Sir. prol. line 13.]* 
ἐγγίζω ; impf. ἤγγιζον ; Attic fut. ἐγγιῶ (Jas. iv. 8 [ Bttm. 
37 (32); W. $ 13, 1 e.]) ; 1 aor. ἤγγισα; pf. ἤγγικα ; 
(ἐγγύς) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on; Sept. for 
wa) and 370p. 1. trans. to bring near, to join one thing 
to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v. 
8. 2. intrans. to draw or come near, to approach; 
absol., Mt. xxi. 34; Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28; 
xxii. 1; xxiv. 15; Acts vii. 17; xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [ Heb. 
x. 25]; pf. ἤγγικε has come nigh, is at hand : ἡ βασιλ. τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; x. 7; Mk.i.15; Lk.x.11; with 
the addition ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, vs. 9; ἡ ἐρήμωσις, Lk. xxi. 20; ἡ 
ὥρα, Mt. xxvi. 45; 6 παραδιδούς pe, Mt. xxvi. 46; [ Mk. 


164 





ἐγγύς 


xiv. 42 (where Tdf. ἤγγισεν}; ὁ καιρός, Lk. xxi. 8; ἡ 
ἡμέρα, Ro. xiii. 12; τὸ τέλος, 1 Pet. iv. 7; ἡ παρουσία τοῦ 
κυρίου, Jas. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the person or 
the place approached : Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; xxii. 41; 
Acts ix. 3; x. 9; xxii. 6; ἐγγίζειν τῷ θεῷ (in Sept. used esp. 
of the priests entering the temple to offer sacrifices or to 
perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix. 22; xxxiv. 30; 
Lev. x. 3, ete.) : to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Rec., fr. Is. 
xxix. 13; to turn one's thoughts to God, to become ac- 
quainted with him, Heb. vii. 19 ; Jas. iv. 8; ὁ θεὸς ἐγγίζει 
τινί, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his 
grace and help, Jas.iv.8. Foll. by eis and the ace. of the 
place: Mt. xxi. 1; Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xviii. 85 ; xix. 29; xxiv. 
28; [foll. by πρός w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see B. $ 147, 28; 
al. regard this as a pregn. constr., cf. W. $$ 48, e.; 66, 
2 d.]: μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισε, to draw nigh unto, be at the 
point of, death, Phil. ii. 30 (ἐγγίζειν εἰς θάνατον, Job xxxiii. 
22); with an adv. of place, ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει, Lk. 
xii. 33. [Cowr.: mpoc-eyyi(o.] * 

[ἔγγιστα, neut. plur. superl. (fr. ἐγγύς) as adv., nearest, 
neat: WH (rejected) mrg. in Mk. vi. 36 (al. κύκλῳ)." 

€y-ypá$o [T WH evyp., see ἐν, III. 3]: pf. pass. éyyé- 
ypappar; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; to engrave ; in- 
scribe, write in or on: τί, pass. with dat. of the means 
[with] and foll. by ἐν with dat. of the place (in minds, 
tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2, 3; to record, enrol: rà ὀνόματα, pass. 
Lk. x. 20 T Tr WH.* 

ἔγγνος, του, ὁ, 7, @ surety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor): 
κρείττονος διαθήκης éyyvos, he by whom we get full assur- 
ance of the more excellent covenant made by God with 
us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con- 
nected with it$ eb. vii. 22. (2 Macc. x. 28; Sir. xxix. 
15 56. Xen. vect. 4,20; Aeschin. Epp. 11, 12 p. 128 a. ; 
Aristot. oec. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. 1350*, 19], Polyb., Diod., al.)* 

ἐγγύς, adv., (fr. ἐν and yviov [limb, hand], at hand; [but 
rather allied w. ἄγχι, ἄγχω, anzius, anguish, etc.; see 
Curtius $ 166 ; Vanicek p. 227), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 
for 310p; near; 1l. of Place and position; a. 
prop. : absol. Jn. xix. 42, [cf. also 20 G L T Tr WH (but 
see below)]; with gen. (Matthiae $339, 1 p. 812; W. 
195 (183); [471 (439) ; B. $132, 24]), Lk. xix. 11; Jn. 
iii. 23; vi. 19, 23 ; xi. 18, 54; xix. 20 [ Rec., but see above]; 
Actsi.12; with dat. (Matthiae $ 386, 6; Kühner $ 423, 
13; [Jelf § 592, 27), Acts ix. 38; xxvii 8. ^b. trop- 
ically; of ἐγγύς, those who are near of access to God i. e. 
Jews, and of μακράν, those who are alien from the true 
God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles : 
Eph. ii. 17 (cf. Is. lvii. 19) ; ἐγγὺς γίνεσθαι, to be brought 
near, sc. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii. 
13, (so with the Rabbins not infrequently to make nigh 
is equiv. to to make a proselyte, cf. Wetstein ad 1. c.; 
[SehóMgen, Horae ete. i. 761 sq.; Valck. Schol. i. 363]) ; 
ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, near thee i. e. at hand, already, 
as it were, in thy mind, Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut.'xxx. 14, [ef. 
Β. 8 129,11; W. 465 (434)]. 2. of Time; concern- 
ing things imminent and soon to come to pass: Mt. xxiv. 
32; xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30, 31; Jn. ii. 13; 
vi.4; vii. 2; xi. 55; Rev.i. 3; xxii. 10; of the near ad- 


ἐγγύτερον 


vent of persons: ὁ κύριος ἐγγύς, οἵ Christ’s return from 
heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in another sense, of God in Ps. exliv. 
(exlv.) 18); with the addition ἐπὶ θύραις, at the door, 
Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; ἐγγὺς κατάρας, near to being 
cursed, Heb. vi. 8; ἀφανισμοῦ, soon to vanish, Heb. viii. 
13.* 

ἐγγύτερον, neut. of the compar. ἐγγύτερος (fr. ἐγγύς), 
used adverbially, nearer: Ro. xiii. 11.* 

éyelpw; fut. éyepó ; 1 aor. ἤγειρα; Pass., pres. ἐγείρο- 
pat, impy. 2 pers. sing. éye(pov (Mk. ii. 9 Tr WH), Lk. 
viii. 54 (where L Tr WH ἔγειρε), 2 pers. plur. ἐγείρεσθε; 
pf. ἐγήγερμαι; 1 aor. ἠγέρθην [cf. B. 52 (45); W. $38, 
1]; 1 fut. ἐγερθήσομαι;; Mid., 1 aor. impv. éyeipac Rec. ; 
but, after good codd., Grsb. has in many pass. and lately 
L T Tr WH have everywhere in the N. T. restored 
ἔγειρε; pres. act. impv. used intransitively and employed as 
a formula for arousing ; properly, rise, i. e. up! come ! cf. 
ἄγε; so in Eur. Iph. A.624; Arstph. ran. 340; cf. Fritzsche 
on Mk. p. 55; [ B. 56 (49), 144 (126) sq.; Kühner $ 373, 
2]; Sept. generally for ym and O°); to arouse, cause 
to rise ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Homer down, to arouse 
from sleep, to awake: Acts xii. 7; [Mk.iv.38 T Tr WH]; 
pass. to be awaked, wake up, [ A. V. arise, often including 
thus the subseq. action (cf. 3 below)]: Mt. xxv. 7; Mk. iv. 
27; [ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, Mt.i. 24 L T Tr WH); ἐγερθείς with 
the impv. Mt. ii. 13, 20; with a finite verb, Mt. ii. 14, 21; 
viii. 26; [Lk. viii. 24 R G L Tr mrg.] ; ἐγείρεσθε, Mt. xxvi. 
46; Mk. xiv. 42. Metaph. ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι, to arise 
from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to 
God, Ro. xiii. 11; likewise ἔγειρε [Rec. -par] arise, 6 
καθεύδων, Eph. v. 14. 2. to arouse from the sleep of 
death, to recall the dead to life: with νεκρούς added, Jn. 
v.21; Acts xxvi. 8; 2 Co.i. 9. ἔγειρε [ Rec. -ραι] arise, 
Mk. v. 41; pass. éyeípov, Lk. viii. 34[R G T]; ἐγέρθητι, 
arise from death, Lk. vii. 14; ἐγείρονται of νεκροί, Mt. xi. 
5; Lk. vii. 22; xx. 37; 1 Co. xv. 15, 16, 29, 32, (Is. xxvi. 
19); ἐγείρειν ἐκ νεκρῶν, from the company of the dead 
[cf. W. 123 (117) ; B. 89 (78)], Jn. xii. 1,9; Acts iii. 15; 
iv. 10; xiii. 30; Ro. iv. 24; viii. 11; x. 9; Gal.i. 1; Eph. 
1.20; Col ii. 12; 1 Th. i. 10; Heb.xi.19; 1 Pet.i.21; 
pass., Ro. vi. 4, 9; vii. 4; 1 Co. xv. 12, 20; Jn. ii. 22; xxi. 
14; Mk. vi. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. ἐκ vexp.]; Lk. ix. 7; 
[Mt. xvii. 9 L'T Tr WH txt.]; ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, Mt. xiv. 
2; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 7, (νεκρὸν ek θανάτου καὶ ἐξ á8ov, Sir. 
xlviii. 5; for (PO, 2 K. iv. 31); ἐγείρειν simply: Acts 
v. 30; x. 40; xiii. 37; 1 Co. vi. 14; 2 Co. iv. 14; pass., Mt. 
xvi. 21; xvii. 23 [L WH mrg. ἀναστήσεται]; [xx. 19 T Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; xxvi. 32; xxvii. 63; Mk. [vi. 16 T WH 
(see above)]; xvi. 6; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WH reject the clause], 
34; Ro.iv. 25; 1 Co. xv. 4, etc. 3. in later usage gen- 
erally to cause to rise, raise, from a seat, bed, ete.; pass. 
and mid. to rise, arise; used — a. of one sitting: ἐγεί- 
pera. [L. Tr WH ἠγέρθη] ταχύ, Jn. xi. 29, cf. vs. 20; pres. 
act. imperative ἔγειρε (see above), Mk. x. 49 [not Rec.], 
cf. vs. 46 ; hence (like the Hebr. Dip, Gen. xxii. 3; 1 Chr. 
xxii. 19),in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. ἀνίστημι, 
IL 1 c.it is used before verbs of going, οἵο. ἐγερθεὶς 
ἠκολούθει [-noev RG] αὐτῷ, Mt. ix. 19; ἔγειρε [R G -par] 


165 








ἐγκαίνια 


καὶ μέτρησον, Rev. xi. 1. b. of one reclining: ἐγείρεται 
ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου, Jn. xiii. 4; ἐγείρεσθε, Jn. xiv. 31. | c. of 
one lying, to raise up : ἤγειρεν αὐτόν, Acts x. 26; ἐγέρθητε 
arise, Mt. xvii. 7; ἔγειρε (see above) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr 
txt. br.]; ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς he rose from the earth, 


M . A . . 
Acts ix. 8; to [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a 


pit, Mt. xii. 11. d. of one ‘down’ with disease, lying 
sick: act., Mk. ix. 27; Acts iii. 7; ἐγερεῖ αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος. 
will cause him to recover, Jas. v. 15; pass. Mt. viii. 15; 
ἔγειρε ([ Rec. -ραι, so Grsb. (doubtfully in Mt.) ], see above) 
arise: Mt. ix.5; Jn. v. 8; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br.]. 
4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear; 8. to cause to 
appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract 
the attention of men): ἤγειρε τῷ Ἰσραὴλ σωτῆρα, Acts 
xiii. 25 Rec.; ἤγειρεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Δαυεὶδ εἰς βασιλέα, Acts 
xiii. 22 (so DDT, Judg. ii. 18 ; iii. 9, 15) ; pass. ἐγείρομαι, 
to come before the public, to appear, arise : Mt. xi. 11; xxiv. 
11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vii. 16; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266 
(250); B. 204 (177)]; contextually, to appear before a 
judge: Mt. xii. 425; Lk. xi. 31. — b. ἐπί τινα to raise up, 
incite, stir up, against one; pass. to rise against: Mt. xxiv. 
7; Mk. xiii.8; Lk.xxi.10. c. to raise up i. e. cause to 
be born: τέκνα τινί, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; κέρας σωτηρίας, 
Lk. i. 69 (see ἀνίστημι, I. c. ἐξανίστημι, 1); θλίψιν τοῖς 
δεσμοῖς pov, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e. 
the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib- 
ulation, Phil. i.16 (17) LT Tr WH. — d. of buildings, 
to raise, construct, erect: τὸν ναόν, Jn. ii. 19 sq. (so Dp, 
Deut. xvi. 22; 1 K. xvi. 32. Aelian. de nat. an. 11, 10; 
Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 5; Hdian. 3, 15, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; 8, 2,12 
[5 ed. Bekk.]; Lcian. Pseudomant. § 19; Anthol. 9, 696. 
1 Esdr. v. 43 ; Sir. xlix. 13; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. g. 
5, 40; sepulcrum, Cic. legs. 2, 27, 68). [Ammonius : dva- 
στῆναι Kat ἐγερθῆναι διαφέρει. ἀναστῆναι μὲν yap ἐπὶ 
ἔργον, ἐγερθῆναι δὲ ἐξ ὕπνου: cf. also Thom. Mag. 
ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 sq. But see exx. above. Comp.: 
δι-, ἐξ-, ἐπ-, συν-εγείρω.] 

ἔγερσις, -ews, 7), (éyeipo), arousing, excitation: τοῦ θυμοῦ, 
Plat. Tim. p. 70 ¢.; a rising up, Ps. exxxviii. (exxxix.) 
2; resurrection from death : Mt. xxvii. 53.* 

ἐγκάθετος [T WH év«., see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, 6, 7, (ἐγκαθί- 
nue [to send down in (secretly)]), suborned to lie in 
wait; a lier-in-wait, spy, (ef. Lat. insidiator; Eng. insid- 
ious]: used in Lk. xx. 20 of one who is suborned by 
others to entrap a man by crafty words. (Plat. Ax. p. 
368 e.; Dem. p. 1483, 1; Joseph. b. 1.0, 5, 2; Polyb. 13, 
5, 1, al.; Sept., Job [xix. 12]; xxxi. 9.)* 

ἐγκαίνια [T WH év«., see ἐν, IIT. 3], -ov, ra, (fr. ἐν and 
xawvos) ; only in bibl. and eccl. writ., [on the plur. cf. W. 
$27, 3; B. 23 (21)]; dedication, consecration; thus in 2 
Esdr. vi. 16, 17; Neh. xii. 27 for 72330; in particular, 
[Vule. encaenium i. e. renovation], an annual feast cele- 
brated eight days beginning on the 25th of Chislev (mid- 
dle of our December), instituted by Judas Maceabaeus 
[5. c. 164] in memory of the cleansing of the temple from 
the pollutions of Antiochus Epiphanes (αἱ ἡμέραι ἐγκαι- 
νισμοῦ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου, 1 Mace. iv. 59): Jn.x.32. Cf. 
Win. RWB. [also Riehm, HWB.] s. v. Kirehweihfest ; 


> , 
ἐγκαινίζω 


Oehler in Herzog iv. p. 389; Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 54; 
iv. 52; Dillmann in Schenkel iii. 534 sq.; [BB.DD. 
(esp. Kitto) s. v. Dedication, Feast of the ].* 

ἐγ-καινίζω [T WH ἐνκ., see ev, ITI. 3] : 1 aor. ἐνεκαίνισα: 
pf. pass. ἐγκεκαίνισμαι ; ἃ word exclusively bibl. and eccl. 
[W. 33]; to innovate, i. e. 1. to renew : 2 Chr. xv. 8. 
2. to do anew, again: onpeia, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 6. 
3. to initiate, consecrate, dedicate, (Deut. xx. 5; 1 K. 
viii. 63; 1 S. xi. 14, ete.): διαθήκην, Heb. ix. 18; ὁδόν, 
Heb. x. 20.* 

éy-kakéo, -@ [(see below); 1 aor. évekdkgga]; (κακός) ; 
[prop. to behave badly in; hence] to be weary in any- 
thing, or to lose courage, flag, faint: adopted by L T Tr 
WH in place of R G éxkakéo (q. v.) in Lk. xviii. 1; 2 Co. 
iv. 1, 16; Gal. vi. 9; Eph. iii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 13 — except 
that T WH write ἐνκ. in Lk. xviii. 1; Gal. vi. 9; Eph. 
iii. 13; so WH in 2 Th. iii. 13, also; see ἐν, III. 3; [cf. 
Tdf.’s note on 2 Co. iv. 1; Meyer ibid., who thinks that 
exx. may have been a colloquial form. See the full exhi- 
bition of the usage of the Mss. given by Dr. Gregory in 
his Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, p. 78.] (Found a few times in 
Symmachus [Gen. xxvii. 46; Num. xxi. 5; Is. vii. 16; 
also Prov. iii. 11. Theod.]; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 2, 2; in 
prof. writ. only in Polyb. 4, 19, 10 τὸ πέμπειν τὰς βοηθείας 
ἐνεκάκησαν they culpably neglected to send aid, [add 
Philo de confus. linge. $ 13 (Mang. i. 412, 36) οὐκ éxka- 
koupevos ἐκνάμφθην ].)* 

€y-kaAéo [see ev, IIT. 3] -ὦ ; fut. ἐγκαλέσω ; impf. ἐνεκά- 
Aovv; [ pres. pass. ἐγκαλοῦμαι] ; prop. to call (something) in 
some one (ἐν [i. e. prob. in his case ; or possibly, as rooted 
in him]); hence,*to call to account, bring a charge against. 
accuse: as in classic Grk. foll. by dat. of the person [cf. 
W. § 30, 9 a.], Acts xix. 38 ; xxiii. 28, (Sir. xlvi. 19) ; κατά 
with gen. of the pers. to come forward as accuser against, 
bring a charge against: Ro. viii. 33. Pass. to be accused 
(cf. B. $134, 4, [8 133, 9; yet cf. Mey. on Acts as below, 
W.u.s]; with gen. of the thing: στάσεως, Acts xix. 
40, (ἀσεβείας ἐς τὸν Τιβέριον ἐγκληθείς, Dio Cass. 58, 4; 
act. with dat. of the pers. and gen. of the thing, Plut. 
Arist. 10, 9; see W.u.s.; Matthiae § 369); περὶ rov- 
Tov, ὧν ἐγκαλοῦμαι, unless this is to be resolved into περὶ 
τούτων ἅ ete., acc. to the well-known construction ἐγκα- 
λεῖν τινί τι, Acts xxvi. 2; περί τινος (act. Diod. 11, 83) 
Acts xxiii. 29; xxvi. 7, [B. $133, 9]. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
Soph. and Xen. down.) [Sy¥n. see κατηγορέω, fin.]* 

ey-kata-helrw [Acts ii. 27, 31, TWH ἐνκ.; T also in 
Ro. ix. 29, see his note and ef. ἐν, III. 3]; [impf. ἐγκατέ- 
Xeurov (WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16)]; fut. ἐγκαταλείψω; 
2 aor. ἐγκατέλιπον ; Pass., [pres. éykaraAetzopat]; 1 aor. 
ἐγκατελείφθην; Sept. for 33 ; — 1. to abandon, desert, 
(ἐν equiv. to ἔν τινι, in some place or condition), i. e. to 
leave in straits, leave helpless, (colloq. leave in the lurch) : 
τινά, Mt. xxvii. 46 and Mk. xv. 34 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2; 
Heb. xiii. 5; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9; after the Hebr. 317 with 
5, τινὰ els d8ov [or ἄδην, by forsaking one to let him go 
into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27, 31 (not R). 
to desert, forsake : τινά, 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16; τὴν ἐπισυναγωγήν, 
Heb. x. 25. 2. to leave behind among, to leave surviv- 


166° - 





ἐγκράτεια 
ing: ἡμῖν σπέρμα, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (Hes. opp. 376 ; 
Thuc., sqq.) * 

ἐγ-κατ-οικέω [T WH ἐνκ., see ἐν, III. 3], τῶ ; to dwell 
among: ἐν αὐτοῖς among them, 2 Pet. ii. 8. (Very rare 
in prof. writ. as [Hdt. 4, 204]; Eur. frag.[188] ap. Dion 

* Chrys. or. 73 fin.; Polyb. 18, 26, 13.) * 

ἐγ-καυχάομαι [T WH ἐνκ., see ev, IIT. 3]; to glory in: 
foll. by ἐν with dat. of the obj. (Ps. li. (lii.) 3; xevi. (xevii.) 
7; ev. (evi.) 47), 2 Th. i.4 L'T Tr WH. (With simple 
dat. of thing in eccl. writ. and Aesop's Fables.) * 

éy-kevrpitoo [T WH evk., see ἐν, III. 3]: 1 aor. ἐνεκέν- 
tpica; Pass., 1 aor. ἐνεκεντρίσθην ; 1 fut. ἐγκεντρισθήσομαι; 
to cut into for the sake of inserting a scion; to inoculate, 
ingraft, graft in, (Aristot. ap. Athen. 14, 68 [p. 653 d.]; 
"Theophr. h. p. 2, 2,5; Antonin. 11, 8): τινά, Ro. xi. 17, 
19, 23, 24 [cf. W. $52, 4, 5]; in these pass. Paul likens 
the heathen who by becoming Christians have been ad- 
mitted into fellowship with the people for whom the 
Messianie salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees 
inserted into a cultivated stock ; [cf. Beet on vs. 24; 
B. D. s. v. Olive].* 

ἔγκλημα [see ἐν, IIT. 3], -ros, τό, (ἐγκαλέω), accusation : 
the crime of which one is accused, Acts xxv. 16; ἔγκλημα 
ἔχειν, to have laid to one’s charge, be accused of a crime, 
Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attie writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. 
on.) * 

«br see κατηγορέω; cf. Isoc. 16, 2 τὰς μὲν yap δίκας 
ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἐγκλημάτων λαγχάνουσι, Tas BE ka YO- 
ρίας ὑπὲρ τῶν τῆς πόλεως πραγμάτων ποιοῦνται, καὶ πλείω 
χρόνον διατρίβουσι τὸν πατέρα μουδιαβάλλοντες ἢ κτλ.] 

ἐγ-κομβόομαι [ see ἐν, ITI. 3], -οῦμαι : [1 aor. mid. ἐνεκομ- 
βωσάμην] ; (fr. ἐν and κομβόω to knot, tie, and this fr. 
κόμβος knot, band, (Germ. ScAleifz), by which two things 
are fastened together), to fasten or gird on one’s self; the 
ἐγκόμβωμα was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which 
was fastened to the girdle of the vest [ἐξωμίς], and dis- 
tinguished slaves from freemen; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 τὴν 
razewodQp. ἐγκομβώσασθε, gird yourselves with humility 
as your servile garb (ἐγκόμβωμαλ i. e. by putting on humil- 
ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea 
lies in the phrase is shown by C. F. A. Fritzsche, with his 
usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 259 sqq.* 

ἐγ-κοπή [ WH ἐνκ. T ἐκκ.. see ev, IIT. 3], -ῆς, 7, (ἐγκόπτω), 
properly, a cutting (made in the road to impede an en- 
emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12. 
(Diod. 1, 32; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ; 
Longin. de sublim. 41, 3; [al.].) * 
. ἐγκόπτω [in Acts T WH ἐνκ., so T in 1 Pet. where K 
exk.; see ev, III. 3]; 1 aor. ἐνέκοψα; Pass., [ pres. ἐγκόπτο- 
pac]; impf. ἐνεκοπτόμην ; to cut into, to impede one's course 
by cutting off his way; hence univ. to hinder (Hesych.: 
ἐμποδίζω, διακωλύω) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1, 
12; in the N. T. with acc. of the obj., 1 Th. ii. 18; foll. 
by inf, Gal. v. 7 (see ἀνακόπτω) ; inf. preceded by τοῦ, 
Ro. xv. 22; εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐγκόπτεσθαι Tas προσευχὰς ὑμῶν, that 
ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii. 
7; i. q.to detain [A. V. to be tedious unto] one, Acts xxiv. 
4 [cf. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq.].* 

ἐγκράτεια [see ἐν, III. 3], -as, 9, (ἐγκρατής), self-control, 


ἐγκρατεύομαι 


Lat. continentia, temperantia, (the virtue of one who mas- 
ters his desires and passions, especially his sensual ap- 
petites): Acts xxiv. 25; Gal. v. 23 (22); 2 Pet. i. 6. 
(Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sir. xviii. 29; 4 Mace. v. 34.) * 
ἐγκρατεύομαι [see ἐν, III. 3]; depon. mid.; to be self- 
controlled, continent (ἐγκρατής); to exhibit self-government, 
conduct one’s self temperately: [used absol. Gen. xliii. 
30]; with dat. of respect, τῇ γλώσσῃ; Sir. xix. 6 var.; 
πάντα, in everything, every way,1 Co. ix. 25 (ina figure 
drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for 
the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and 
sexual indulgence) ; οὐκ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι, said of those who 
cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. Though this 
word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ. that have 
come down to us [exc. in Aristot.eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p. 
1298", 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Phry- 
nichus; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.442; [W. 251. — 
ἐγκρατής [see ἐν, III. 3], -és, (κράτος) ; 1. prop. 
equiv. to ὁ ev κράτει ὦν, strong, robust: Aeschyl., Thuc., 
sqq- 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing), 
with a gen. of the object; so fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down. 
3. mastering, controlling, curbing, restraining : ἀφροδισίων, 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1; ἡδονῆς, ibid. 4, 5, 10; ἑαυτοῦ, Plat. ; 
absol. (without a gen.), controlling one’s self, temperate, 
continent, ([ Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. 1146", 10 sqq.]; Sir. 
xxvi. 15; Sap. viii. 21; Philo de Jos. § 11): Tit. i. 8.* 
éy-kptvo [T WH év«., see ἐν, III. 3]: [1 aor. ἐνέκρινα] ; 
to reckon among, judge among: τινά τινι, to judge one 
worthy of being admitted to a certain class [A. V. to 
number with], 2Co.x.12. (From Xen. and Plato down.) * 
ἐγ-κρύπτω : 1 aor. évékpvyra ; to conceal in something, 
τὶ εἴς τι (Diod. 3, 63 ; Apollod. 1, 5, 1 $ 4) ; contextually, 
to mingle one thing with another: Mt. xii.33; Lk. xiii. 
21 here T Tr WH ἔκρυψεν. (τί τινι, Hom. Od. 5, 488.) * 
ἔγκυος [WH £v, see ἐν, III. 3.], -ov, for the more 
usual ἐγκύμων, (fr. ἐν and kia), big with child, pregnant : 
Lk.ii.5. (Hdt.1,5 ete. ; Diod. 4, 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 
33.))* 
ἐγ-χρίω [see ἐν, TIT. 3]: 1 aor. act. impv. ἔγχρισον; mid. 
(in T Tr) ἔγχρισαι [but 1, WH 1 aor. act. infin. éyypioa 
(Grsb. ἐγχρίσαι ; cf. Veitch s. v. χρίω, fin.)]; to rub in, 
besmear, anoint ; Mid. to anoint for one’s self: τοὺς ὀφθαλ- 
povs, Rev. iii. 18 [cf. Bttm. 149 sq. (131) ; W. $ 32, 4 a.]. 
(Tob. vi. 9; xi. 7; Strab., Anthol, Epict., al.)* 
ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitie μοῦ ; dat. ἐμοί, enclitie poi; acc. 
ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, etc.; personal pronoun, J. 
1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, 
generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, 
as Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... 6 δέ); 
Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ . . . ἔχω, καὶ σύ); v. 22, 28, 39, and often; 
ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of bapi- 
σαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are 
used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, 
as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; 
Lk. vii. 27; ef. B. $129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 139, behold me, 
here am I: Acts ix. 10 (1 S.iii. 8). ἐγώ, like "3m, Tam: 
Jn. 1.28; Acts vii. 32, [cf. W. 585 (544) ; B. 125 (109)]. 
2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and acc. 


167 








ἐδαφίζω 


are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with 
prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω pov, Mt. 
lii. 11; ἰσχυρότερός pov, ibid.; τίς pov ἥψατο, Mk. v. 31; 
λέγει μοι, Rev. v. 5; ἀρνήσηταί pe, Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9, 
(on the accent in these expressions ef. ‘W. § 6, 3; [Lip- 
sius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq.; Lob. Path. Elementa 
li. p. 323 sq.; T'df. N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. lxi. sq.; ed. 8 
p.104]); but δι ἐμοῦ, κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ, πρὸ ἐμοῦ, etc., σὺν, ἐν ἐμοί, 
περὶ, Ov, ἐπ᾽, κατ᾽, εἰς ἐμέ. ‘The only exception is πρός, ἴο 
which the enclitic μέ is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 86; 
Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely πρὸς ἐμέ, Jn. 
vi. 875, and acc. to LT Tr WH in Acts xxii. 8, 13; 
xxiv. 19; [also Acts xxiii. 22T Tr WH; Jn. vi. 35 and 
45 T Tr txt. WH; Lk.i.43 TWH; Mt. xix. 14; Jn. vi. 
37°, 65, Tdf.; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. WH mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11 
L Tr; but πρὸς μέ, Mt. iii. 14 'Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf. 
Lipsius τι. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms ἐμοῦ, 
ἐμοί, ἐμέ are used in ease of emphasis or antithesis; thus, 
ἐμοῦ, Lk. x. 16 ; ἐμοί, Jn. vii. 23; x. 38, etc.; ἐμέ, Mk. xiv. 
7; Jn. vii. 7, ete. S. Asin classic Greek, μοῦ and ἡμῶν 
are very often used for the possessive pronouns ἐμός and 
ἡμέτερος [B. $ 127, 21]; and when so used, — a. they are 
generally placed after their substantives, as 6 οἶκός pov, ἡ 
ζωὴ ἡμῶν, etc. — the fuller form ἐμοῦ only for the sake of 
distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 127, 22], as μητέρα αὐτοῦ 
kai ἐμοῦ, Ro. xvi. 13; πίστεως ὑμῶν re kat ἐμοῦ, Ro. i. 12, 
But b. they are sometimes placed before substantives, 
even which have the article, when no emphasis resides 
in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22, 
7 N. 1; B.u. s.]: pov τοὺς λόγους, Mt. vii. 24, 26; even 
before prepositions, μου ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην, Mt. viii. 8; less 
frequently ἡμῶν, as ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν, Acts xvi. 20; it is 
prefixed for emphasis in ἡμῶν τὸ πολίτευμα, Phil. iii. 20, 
cf. W. u. s.; Rost ὃ 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a 
multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth. ; [cf. Krüger, § 47, 9, 12 
who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst. 
having the art. the reflexive gen., with αὐτοῦ ipsius, 
and ἀλλήλων, requires the attributive position, the 
personal gen., and αὐτοῦ ejus, the partitive posi- 
tion ]. 4. τί ἐμοὶ (ἡμῖν) καὶ σοί (ὑμῖν) ; what have 1 
(we) to do with thee (you)? [cf. B. 138 (121); W. 211 
(198); 585 (544)]: Mt. viii. 29 ; Mk.i. 24; v. 7; Lk. viii. 
28; Jn.ii.4; Heb. 351 ^5-n5, Jude. xi. 12; 2 K. iii. 13; 
2 S. xvi. 10; 2 Chr. xxxv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 24; also in 
classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2; Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16; 
τί ἡμῖν κι αὐτῷ, ibid. 1, 1, 16; τί ἐμοὶ καὶ αὐτοῖς, ibid. 1, 27, 
13; 22,15. τί γάρ μοι, what does it concern me? what 
have I to do ete.: 1 Co. v. 125 cf. Bos, Ellipses Graec. p. 
599, ed. Schaefer; Bnhdy. p. 98; Krüger $ 48,3, 9; 
Kiihner ii. 364 sq.; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W. 
586 (545)]. 

ἐδαφίζω : Attic fut. ἐδαφιῶ [B. 37 (32); W.§ 13,1¢.]; 
(see ἔδαφος) ; to throw to the ground,— both of cities, 
buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men; in 
both applications in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) cf. W. 
8.66, 2 6.1. (Ps. exxxvi (exxxvii.) 9; Is. iii. 26; Ezek. 
xxxi.12; Hos. xiv. 1 (xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [ Ald.] ; rare in 
prof. writ., as [ Aristot. probl. 23, 29] ; Polyb. 6, 33, 6.)* 


ἔδαφος 108 εἰ, t 


ἔδαφος, -εος (τους), τό, bottom, base, ground: πίπτειν εἰς 
τὸ ἔδαφος, Acts xxii. 7. (Sept. ; in class. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

ἑδραῖος, (rarely fem.-aia [ W. § 11, 1]), -αἴον, (ἔδρα seat, 
chair) ; 1. sitting, sedentary, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2 
firm, immovable, steadfast, (Eur., Plat., al.); in the N. T. 
metaph., of those who are fixed in purpose: 1 Co. xv. 
58; Col. i. 23; ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, 1 Co. vii. 37.* 

ἑδραίωμα, -ros, τό, (ἑδραιόω to make stable, settle firmly), 
a stay, prop, support, (Vulg. firmamentum) : 1 Tim. iii. 15 
[A.V. ground]. (Eccl. writ.) * 

Ἐζεκίας [WH *EC-; L -κείας, see Tf. Proleg. p. 85], 
(pin strength of Jehovah, i. e. strength given by Je- 
hovah; Germ. Gotthard; Sept. Ἐζεκίας), [gen. -ov, cf. D. 
17 (16) no. 8], Hezekiah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1 
sqq.; xx. 1 sqq. ; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.) : Mt. i. 9, 10. * 

ἐθελο-θρησκεία [T WII -xia, see I, c], -as, 7, (fr. ἐθέλω 
and θρησκεία, q. v. [cf. W. 100 (95)]), voluntary, arbitrary 
worship, (Vulg. superstitio), [A. V. will-worship], i. e. 
worship which one devises and prescribes for himself, 
contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which 
ought to be directed to Christ; said of the misdirected 
zeal and practices of ascetics: Col. ii. 23; Suid. ἐθελο- 
θρησκεῖ " ἰδίῳ θελήματι σέβει τὸ δοκοῦν. Cf. ἐθελόδουλος, 
ἐθελοδουλεία, ἐθελοπρόξενος one who acts the part of a 
proxenus without having been appointed to the office, 
ete. The explanation of others : simulated, counterfeit re- 
ligion (cf. in Greek lexicons ἐθελοφιλόσοφος, ἐθελόκωφος, 
etc.), does not square so well with the context. (The 
word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv. 
p. 1380, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. clxi. p. [1460 b. 
ed. Migne] 1331, Halle ed.; [ Euseb. h. e. 6, 12, 1; Jerome 
ep. exxi. vol. i. 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. 1, 16 [i. 
p- 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes ἐθελοπερισσο θρησκεία 
to the Pharisees.)* 

ἐθέλω, see θέλω. 

ἐθίζω : (ἔθος q. v.) ; to accustom; Pass. to be accustomed ; 
pf. ptep. τὸ εἰθισμένον usage, custom: τοῦ νόμου, pre- 
scribed by the law, Lk. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc., 
Xen., Plat., al.) * 

ἐθνάρχης, -ov, ó, (fr. ἔθνος and apy), [i. q. founder of 
a nation, Philo, quis rer. div. her. 8 56], an ethnarch, one 
set over a people as ruler, but without the authority and 
name of king (Leian. in Macrob. $17 ἀντὶ ἐθνάρχου 
βασιλεὺς ἀναγορευθεὶς Βοσπόρου ; so the governor whom 
the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called ἐθνάρχης, 
of whom Josephus says, antt. 14, 7, 2, ὃς διοικεῖ re τὸ ἔθνος 
xai διαιτᾷ κρίσεις καὶ συμβολαίων ἐπιμελεῖται καὶ προσταγ- 
μάτων, ὡς ἂν πολιτείας ἄρχων αὐτοτελοῦς ; likewise Simon 
Maccabaeus, 1 Mace. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2; Joseph. antt. 
13, 6,6 ; cf. [19, 5, 2]; b. j. 2, 6, 3) : 2 Co. xi. 826 ἐθνάρχης 
᾿Αρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως, the governor of Damascene Syria, 
ruling in the name of king Aretas[(q. v.) ; cf. B. D. s. v. 
Governor, 11].* 

ἐθνικός, -7, -όν, (€Ovos); 1. adapted to the genius or 
customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national : Polyb., 
Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or language of for- 
eigners, strange, foreign; so in the erammarians [cf. our 





* gentile ']. 3. in the N. T. savoring of the nature of 
pagans, alien to the worship of the true God, heathenish ; 
substantively, ὁ ἐθνικός the pagan, the Gentile: Mt. xviii. 
17; plur., Mt. v. 47 GL T Tr WH; vi. 7; and 8 Jn. 7 
TONER ΝΗ." 

* ἐθνικῶς, adv., (see e&vikos), like the Gentiles: Gal. ii. 14, 
[W. 463 (431). Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5; Diog. Laért. 
7, 561." 

ἔθνος. -ovs, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or 
of beasts) associated or living together; a company, troop, 
swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. Il. ; 
ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2, 87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2a 
multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ 
ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος 
ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems 
to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. 
xxi 43; Acts x. 35, etc.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; 
Mk. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; 
Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, 
Lk. vii. 5; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 85; Acts x: 
22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10 ; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (rà) ἔθνη, 
like 0°37 in the Ὁ. T., foreign nations not worshipping 
the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [cf. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. 
iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 RG; cf. 
Rev. xv. 3 GL T Tr WH mrg. after Jn. x. 7], and very 
often; in plain contradistinetion to the Jews: Ro. iii. 
29; ix. 24; [1 Co.i.28 GL T Tr WH]; Gal. ii. 8, ete. ; ὁ 
λαὸς (τοῦ θεοῦ, Jews) καὶ τὰ ἔθνη, Lk. ii. 32; Acts xxvi. 
17, 23; Ro. xv. 10. 5. Paul uses τὰ ἔθνη even of Gen- 
tile Christians: Ro. xi. 13; xv. 27; xvi. 4; Gal. ii. 12 
(opp. vs. 13 to οἱ 'IovOator i. e. Jewish Christians), vs. 14; 
Eph. iii. 1, cf. iv. 17 [W. $59, 4 a.; B. 130 (114)]. 

ἔθος, -eos (τους), [cf. ἦθος}, τό, fr. Aeschyl [Agam. 
728 (?) ; better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 39; 
ἔθος ἐστί τινι foll. by an inf., Jn. xix. 40; Acts xxv. 16; 
Heb. x. 25; contextually, usage prescribed by law, in- 
stitute, prescription, rite: Lk. i. 9; ii. 42; Acts xvi. 21; 
xxi. 21 ; xxvi. 3; xxviii. 17; περιτέμνεσθαι τῷ ἔθει Μωῦσέως, 
Acts xv. 1; ἀλλάξει rà ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκε Μωῦσῆς, Acts vi. 14.* 

ἔθω (of the pres. only the ptep. ἔθων is used, in Hom.): 
pf. εἴωθα, to be accustomed, used, wont; [plpf. as impf. 
(W. 274 (257 sq.)) εἰώθειν] ; foll. by inf.: Mt. xxvii. 15; 
Mk. x. 1. Ptep. τὸ εἰωθός in a pass. sense, that which is 
wont; usage, custom: κατὰ τὸ εἰωθός τινι as one's custom 
is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.* 

[e «: εἰ and « are freq. interchanged in Ν T. spelling. 
This is due partly to itacism, partly to the endeavor to mark 
the ὁ sound as long or short. See the remarks on this subject 
in WH. App. p. 152 sq. (cf. Intr. § 399) ; df. Proleg. p. 83 
sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. e. The use of « for εἰ is noticed &. v. 1, +; 
instances in which εἰ is substituted for « are the foll.: “ABe- 
Anvh WH; 'A68e( T Tr WH ;'Avretzas T ; ᾿Αρεοπαγείτης T ; 
Beviauetv LT ΤῊ WH; Δανείδ L 'T Tr WH; 'Ececeías L; 
Ἐλαμείτης T WH; Ἐλεισάβετ WH; 'EcAc( T Tr WH; Εὐ- 
νείκη Rec"; 'HAe( T Tr WH; Ἠλείας T WH; Ἱερειχώ T 
WH; Ἱεροσολυμείτης T WH; Ἰσραηλείτης T WH, so Tr in 
Jn. i. 47 (48); Ἰωσείας L T Tr WH; Keis L T Tr WH; 
Kupeivos Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Aeveís T WH, so Trexc.in Mk. 
ii. 14; Aevelrns T WH, so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; Λενειτικός 
TWH; MeAxe( T Tr WH; Νηρεί (T Tr WH; Νινευείτης T 


εἰ 109 εἶ 


WH, so Tr in Mt. xii. 41; ᾽Ο(είας 1, T Tr WH; Πειλᾶτος T 
WH; Σεμεείν T Tr WH; Ταβειθά WH; Χερουβείν 1, T 
Tr WH (-βίμ R G); Χοραζείν T Tr WH; ἀφείδεια LL; εἰδέα 
T Tr WH; ἐπαρχεία T WH; ἐπιπόθεια WH; ἡλεί T ; πανοικεί 
TWH; ῥαββεί TWH; ῥαββουνεί WH; σαβαχθανεί T Tr 
WH; ταλειθά WH; τάχειον WH; τραπεζείτης T WH.| 

el, is first a conditional particle, ἐγ (Lat. si); secondly, 
an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne). 

I. εἰ CoxprTIONAL (on the difference between it and 
ἐάν, see ἐάν, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety 
of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. ap 
with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is 
simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to 
have been done, or to be about to be, (W. $41 b., 2; cf. 42, 
2; [Β. 220 (190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll. 
in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (εἰ οὕτως 
ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία... οὐ συμφέρει γαμῆσαι) ; xi. 14; Ro. vii. 
16, 20; viii. 25; xiv. 15: 1 Co.ix.17; Gal. ii. 185 v. 18; 
Heb. xii. 8; Jas. ii. 8 sq., etc. f. foll. by an Imperative 
in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix.17 L Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; Mk. iv. 23; vii.16 RG L; Jn.xv. 18; Acts 
xiii. 15; xxv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15; Jas. iii. 14, etc.; or the 
aor. as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31; xix. 17 [R G T Trmrg. 
WH mrg.]; Mk. ix. 22 [cf. B. 55 (48)]; Lk. xxii. 67 (66) ; 
1 Co.vii.9. y. foll. by the Future in the apodosis: Lk. 
xvi. 31; Acts v. 39 L T Tr WH ; xix. 39; Ro. viii. 11, 13; 
2 Co. xi.30, etc. δ. foll.by the Perfect or the Aorist in 
the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is, 
something else has or has not occurred: Mt. xii. 26, 28; 
Lk. xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 16; Gal. ii. 21; Ro. iv. 14; 2 Pet.ii. 20. 
e. foll. by the Imperfect, either with or without ἄν, where 
in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the 
apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be 
the case. Three passages falling under this head have 
a doubtful or disputed text: εἰ ἔχετε (T Tr WH, for the 
RG L εἴχετε) .. . ἐλέγετε ἄν ete. Lk. xvii. 65 et... μνημο- 
vevovow (T Tr, for R GL WH ἐμνημόνευον) . . . εἶχον ἄν, 
Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense the writer refers 
to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re- 
corded in the sacred Scriptures; cf. τοιαῦτα λέγοντες vs. 
14); εἰ τέκνα τοῦ 'ABp. ἐστε (G LT Tr WII, for R 7re) 
«ον ἐποιεῖτε (WH txt. Trot. | R Ladd a), Jn. viii. 39; cf. 
Bitm. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1858 p. 474 sqq. [ N. T. Gram. 
§ 139, 26; but cf. Mey. on Lk.l.c.]J. But2Co.xi.4e... 
κηρύσσει... ἀνείχεσθε GT Tr WH mre. (ἀνέχεσθε L WH 
txt.) must not be referred to this head; here Paul in the 
protasis supposes something which actually occurred, 
in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred 
viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con- 
tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers. 
On the difficulty of the passage cf. Holsten in the Zeit- 
schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874, p. 1 sqq. ; [ef. also B. 
226 (195); but W. 306 (287) and Mey. ad loc.]. t. with 
a question as the apodosis : Mt. vi. 23; Jn. v. 47 ; vii. 23; 
viii. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. with the Ind. Future: Mt. 
xxvi 33; Jas.ii. 11 RG; 1 Pet. ii. 20. c. with the Ind. 
Perfect: Jn.xi.12; Actsxvi. 15; Ro. vi. 5; xi. 6 (where 
after εἰ supply λεῖμμα γέγονεν fr. what precedes), 2 Co. ii. 
5;v.16;vii.14. d. with the Ind. A orist,—foll. by the 











Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix. 8; Ro. iv. 2; xv. 27; foll. 
by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11, 12; Jn. xviii. 
23; 1 Co.iv. 7; ix. 11; foll. by the Aor. in the apodosis, 
Rey. xx. 15; by the Impv. in the apodosis, Jn. xviii. 23 ; 
xx. 15; Ro. xi. 17 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 9, 10; Philem. 18; by 
the Fut. in the apodosis, Jn. xiii. 32; xv. 20; Heb. xii. 
25 (where supply οὐκ ἐκφευξόμεθα in the apodosis). 2. 
Notinfrequently, when a conclusion is drawn from some- 
thing that is quite certain, εἰ with the Indic. is used argu- 
mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to ἐπεί, (cf. the 
use of Germ. wenn) [cf. W. 448 (418)]: Mt. xii. 28; Lk. 
xxil.31; Jn. vi. 45; Βοῖ ν 11; vi5; νι 51: xt Glee 
Col. ii. 20; iii. 1, etc. 3. When it is said what would 
have been, or what would be now or in the future, if 
something else were or had been, ei is used with the Impf., 
Plp£, and Aor. ind.; in the apodosis it is followed in 
direct disc. by ἄν with the impf. or the plpf. or the aor. ; 
sometimes ἄν is omitted, (on the causes of the omission, 
see B. $ 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques- 
tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. ei with the Impf., foll. 
in the apodosis by ἄν with the impf.: Mt. xxiii. 30; Lk. 
vii. 39 (ei οὗτος ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν àv if this man were 
a prophet, he would know); Jn. v. 46; viii. 42; ix. 41; 
xv. 19; 1 Co. ΣΙ 587. Gal 13105 UE eb. vm. Ee 
were etc. there would not be sought ete. viz. in the O. T. 
passage quoted vs. 8); by a question in the apodosis : 
1 Co. xii. 19; Heb. vii. 11; by ἄν with the aor., where 
the Latin uses the plupf. subjunc.: Jn. xi. 32 (εἰ ἧς ὧδε 
if thou hadst been here, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανέ pov 6 ἀδελφός my 
brother would not have died [when he did (cf. below) ; 
B. $139, 25 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur- 
ation]); Jn. iv. 10; xviii. 30 (εἰ μὴ ἢν οὗτος κακοποιός, οὐκ 
ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν, we would not have delivered 
him to thee); Acts xviii. 14; by dv with the plupf.: Jn. 
xi. 21 (ei ἧς ὧδε... . οὐκ àv ἐτεθνήκει, would not have died 
[and be now dead; cf. W. 304 (285) and see above; but 
L T Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19. 
b. ei with the Plpf., foll. in the apodosis by àv with the 
plpf. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj. : 
Mt. xii. 7 (εἰ &yvókevre if ye had understood i.e. if ye 
knew, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους ye would not 
have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 48 and Lk. xii. 
39, (εἰ ἤδει if he had perceived i. 6. if he knew, ἐγρηγόρη- 
σεν av he would have watched, se. before the thief had 
approached [Tr txt. WH om. ἄν in Lk. 1. c.]) ; Jn. iv. 10; 
viii. 19; xiv. 7[RGL]. c. with the Aor. in the same 
sense as the Lat. plpf. subjune.: ei ἐδόθη νόμος . . . ὄντως 
ἂν ἐκ νόμου ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη if a law had been given, right- 
eousness would in truth come from the law, Gal. iii. 21; 
εἰ αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν if Joshua had given them 
rest, οὐκ ἂν περὶ ἄλλης ἐλάλει he would not be speaking, 
sc. in the passage quoted, Heb. iv. 8; apodosis without 
dv, Jn. xv. 22, see dv I. 3 p. 33 sq. 4. As in classie 
Greek, εἰ with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing 
wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where ὅτε 
might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is 
either not quite certain, or, although certain, yet in ae- 
cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre- 


m 170 EM 


sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthiae ii. p. 1474 
sq.; Kühner ii. p. 887 sq.; [Jelf $504, 9]; W. § 60,6; [B. 
§ 139, 52]). Thus it is joined — to the verb θαυμάζω : ἐθαύ- 
pacer, εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκε, for the matter had not yet been in- 
vestigated; hence it is added ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν, ei ἤδη 
[RG'T Tr mrg. WH mrg. πάλαι] ἀπέθανεν, Mk. xv. 44; 
μὴ θαυμάζετε, el μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος (the thing is certain) 
1Jn.iii.13; to the phrase ἄπιστον κρίνεται: Acts xxvi. 
8, (with παράδοξον preceding, Leian. dial. mort. 13, 1); 
to καλόν ἐστιν and λυσιτελεῖ: Mk. ix. 42 and Lk. xvii. 2 
(Mt. xviii. 6 has συμφέρει, ἵνα) ; Mt. xxvi. 24 and Mk. 
xiv. 21; ἴο μέγα ἐστί: 1 Co. ix. 11 (on which see 8 below); 
2 Co. xi. 15; τί θέλω, εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη (τὸ πῦρ), how would I 
if (i. e. that) it were already kindled (but it has not yet 
been kindled), Lk. xii. 49 (al. al., but cf. Meyer ad loc.; [so 
B. 1. c.; ef. W. 448 (418); see τίς, 1 e. y. fin.]; Sir. xxiii. 
14 θελήσεις, εἰ μὴ eyerOns; [in addition to the other inter- 
pretations noticed by Win. and Mey. ll. ec. mention may 
be made of that which takes θέλω as subjune. : what am 
I to choose if (as I may well assume) it has already been 
kindled; cf. Green, ‘Crit. Notes’ ad loc.]). 5. Con- 
trary to Greek usage, in imitation of the Hebr. DN, εἰ with 
the Indic. is so used in oaths and asseverations that by 
aposiopesis the formula of imprecation [constituting 
the apodosis] is suppressed (W. § 55 fin.; B. § 149, 4): 
ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰ δοθήσεται . . . σημεῖον (fully expressed, 
‘may God punish me, if it shall be given,’ i. e. it shall by 
no means be given), Mk. viii. 12; ®poca, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται 
εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου (fully, ‘let my name no longer be 
Jehovah, if they shall enter? etc.), Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, fr. 
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11 Sept. (Hebr. ox, Gen. xiv. 23; Num. 
xiv. 30; 1S. xiv. 45, etc.; we have the full expression 
in 1 S. iii. 17; Cant. ii. 7, etc.). 6. Sometimes, as in 
classic Grk., after a protasis with εἰ and the Indic., the 
apodosis is suppressed on account of mental agitation 
and left to be supplied by the reader or the hearer from 
the context, (cf. W. 599 sq. (557)) : ei βούλει mapeveyKeiv 
τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο (sc. mapéveyke [but here L Tr WH 
adopt the impv. in place of the inf.; yet cf. B. 396 
(339)]), Lk. xxii. 42; ei δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ 1) ἄγγε- 
Aos, supply in place of an apodosis the question what 
then? Acts xxiii. 9 (the apod. added in Ree., μὴ θεο- 


μαχῶμεν, is spurious); εἰ ἔγνως ... rà πρὸς εἰρήνην cov, | 
80. ἐπίστευες ἂν ἐμοί, Lk. xix. 42 [B. 396 (339) ]. 72 


The conditional εἰ is joined with the O ptative, to in- 
dicate that the condition is merely thought of or 
stated as a possibility, (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 
491sqq.; W. 293 (275) sq. ; B. $139, 24). No example 
of this construction is found in the Gospels; very few 
in the rest of the N. T. a. univ. in short intercalated 


clauses: ei τύχοι if it so chance, it may be, (see τυγχάνω, | 


2), 1 Co. xiv. 10; xv. 37; ei θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 
Pet. ii. 17 (Rec. θέλει). — b. where it indicates that 
something may occur repeatedly (cf. Klotz l. c. p. 


492 sq.): ei kai πάσχοιτε, 1 Pet. 111. 14 [ef. W.u.&.]. Cc. | 
where the condition represents the mind and judgment 


of others: eis ὃν ἐβουλεύοντο [R G -σαντοΊ, εἰ δύναιντο 
ἐξῶσαι [WH txt. ἐκσῶσαι (q. v.)] τὸ πλοῖον, into which 





bay [or rather ‘upon which beach’; see é£o6éo]they 
determined to run the ship, if they could; as though the 
navigators had said among themselves, ἐξώσομεν, ei Suvd- 
μεθα, Acts xxvii. 39; so also et τι ἔχοιεν πρός pe, if they 
think they have anything against me, Acts xxiv. 19. 
8. with the Subjunctive, when it is assumed that 
something may take place, but whether it will in reality is 
unknown before the event, in order to make the event 
seem to be more certain than if ἐάν were used (Klotz 
l.c. p. 500 sqq.; W. 294 (276) sq.; B. $139,22): e... 
θερίσωμεν, 1 Co. ix. 11 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, [Lchm. mrg.; al. 
-couev]; (Sept. Gen. xliii. 3 sq.; Sir. xxii. 26; 4 Mace. 
vi 20). But see IIT. below, under εἰ μή, εἰ μήτι, εἴ πως, 
€LT€ . . . εἴτε, EL TLS. 

II. εἰ INTERROGATIVE, whether. “The conditional 
particle gets this force if a question is asked about any- 
thing, whether it is or is not so, and that about which 
the question is put is uttered as it were conditionally ” 
(Klotz 1. e. p. 508; [W. $ 57, 1; Bttm. 248 (214) sqq ; 
254 (218) sq. ])- 1. As in Grk. writ. in an indirect 
question after verbs of seeing, asking, deliberating, 
knowing, saying, etc. a. with the Indic. Present: 
as οὐδ᾽ εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν. ἠκούσαμεν (prop., acc. to 
the conditional force of the particle, * i£ there is [i. e. has 
appeared, been given; cf. εἰμί, I. 2] a Holy Spirit, we did 
not even hear’), Acts xix. 2; ἴδωμεν, εἰ ἔρχεται, Mt. xxvii. 
49; Mk. xv. 36; βουλεύεται [T WH L mrg. -cerac], εἰ 
δυνατός ἐστιν, Lk. xiv. 31; iva εἴπῃς, ei σὺ εἶ, Mt. xxvi. 
63; [tva γνῶ τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν εἰ (WH mrg. 7) . . ὑπήκοοί 
ἐστε, 2 Co. ii. 9 (see WH. Intr. § 404)]; after οὐκ οἶδα, 
Jn. ix. 25; after κρίνατε, Acts iv. 19; δοκιμάζετε [(?), 
πειράζετε], 2 Co. xiii. 5. — b. with the Indic. Future 
[cf. W. 300 (282); B. § 139, 61 b.]: δεήθητι, εἰ dpa 
ἀφεθήσεταί σοι, Acts viii. 22; τί οἶδας, εἰ... σώσεις, 1 
Co. vii. 16 ; παρετήρουν, εἰ θεραπεύσει | Tdf. sever], Mk. iii. 
2 and in Lk. vi. 7 [RG WII mrg.]; ἦλθεν (sc. to see), εἰ 
dpa rt εὑρήσει, Mk. xi. 13. c. with the Indic. Aorist: 
οὐκ οἶδα, εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα, whether I baptized, 1 Co. 
i. 16; ἐπηρώτησαν, εἰ πάλαι [ L Tr txt. WH txt. ἤδη] ἀπέ- 
θανεν, whether he were long dead, Mk. xv. 44; εἰπέ μοι, 
ei... ἀπέδοσθε, Acts v. 8. d. with the Subjunctive 
Aorist [ef. B. 255 sq. (220); W. 298 (280) sq.]: διώκω, 
εἰ καὶ καταλάβω I press on (sc. πειρώμενος or σκοπῶν, try- 
ing to see), whether I may also lay hold, Phil. iii. 12. 
So si is used in Latin, e. g. Nep. vit. Hann. 8 Hannibal 
... Africam accessit in finibus Cyrenaeorum (se. exper- 
turus), si forte Carthaginienses ad bellum possent induci ; 
Caes. b. g. 1, 8, 4 si perrumpere possent, conati; add 
Caes. b. g. 2, 9, 1. Cf. Kühner ii. p. 1032 sq.; [Jelf 
&$877b.] 42. Contrary to the usage of Grk. auth., 
like the Hebr. nw and interrog. ΤΊ, it is used in the Sept. 
and the N. T. (esp. by Luke) also in direct ques- 
tions (ef. the colloq. use of the Germ. ob; e. g. ob ich’s 
wohl thun soll?) ; cf. W. § 57, 1; B. 248 (214), and, in 
opposition to those who have striven to absolve the sa- 
cred writers from this misuse of the particle (esp. Fritz- 
sche and Meyer [see the latter's note on Mt. xii. 10 and 
Lk. xiii. 23; he quotes with approval the language of 


εἰ ἘΠῚ εἰ 


Ast (Lexicon Platon. vol. i. 601), ‘dubitanter inter- 
rogat, ita ut interrogatio videatur directa esse’]), cf. 
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 30 sqq. : — εἶπέ 
τις αὐτῷ. κύριε, εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; Lk. xiii. 23; κύριε, 
εἰ πατάξομεν ἐν μαχαίρᾳ [-py T Tr WH]; Lk. xxii. 49; 
κύριε, εἰ... ἀποκαθιστάνεις τ. βασιλείαν; Acts i. 6; cf. be- 
sides, Mt. xii. 10; xix. 3; Mk. viii. 23 (acc. to the read- 
ing of [Tdf. 2, 7] Tr [mrg. WH txt.] εἴ τι βλέπεις for 
RGL T Tr txt. WH mrg. βλέπει) ; Acts xix. 2, ete. (Gen. 
xvii. 17; xliii. 6; 1 S. x. 24, ete. ; in the O. T. Apocr. 2 
Mace. vii. 7; xv. 3; 4 Macc. xviii 17 fr. Ezek. xxxvii. 
3 Sept.; Tob. v. 5). | 

III. εἰ with other particles and with the indef. pron. 
Tis, τὶ. 1. εἰ ἄρα, see dpa, 1. 2. εἴγε, see γέ, 3 c. 
S. εἰ δὲ καί, a. but if also, so that καί belongs to some 
word that follows: Lk. xi. 18 (but if Satan also). b. 
but though, but even if, so that καί belongs to εἰ : 1 Co. iv. 
7; 2 Co. iv. 3; v.16 [RG; al. om. δέ]; xi. 6; see 6 below. 
4. εἰ δὲ pn, but if not; if it is or were otherwise, [B. 393 
(336 sq.), cf. 345 (297) ; W. as below]: Jn. xiv. 2 (εἰ δὲ 
μή: SC. οὕτως zv), 11 (εἰ δὲ μή, 56. ἐμοὶ πιστεύετε, i. e. my 
words). As in these passages so generally the phrase 
stands where a word or clause must be repeated in 
thought from what immediately precedes; it thus has 
the force of the Lat. alioquin, otherwise, or else, [W. 583 
(543)]: Rev. ii. 5, 16; also after negative declarations, 
Mk. ii. 21 sq.; cf. Matthiae $ 617 b. 5. εἰ δὲ μήγε, see 
yé 34. 6. εἰ καί, a. if even, if also, (cf. ei δὲ καί, 3 a., 
[and 7 below]): 1 Co. vii. 21 [cf. Mey. ad loc.; Bp. 
Lehtft. on Philem. p. 324]; 2 Co. xi.15. b. though, al- 
though: Lk. xi. 8; 2 Co. iv. 16; vii. 8, 12; Phil. ii. 17; 
Col. ii. 5 [εἰ yap καί] ; Heb. vi. 9; with the optat. 1 Pet. 
jii. 14; see I. 7 b. above. 7. kai el, even if: Mk. xiv. 
29 [T Tr WH e xat]; 1 Pet. iii. 1; cf. Klotz l. c. p. 519 
[who says, “In εἰ καί the conditional particle εἰ has 
the greater force; in καὶ εἰ the conjunctive particle 
καί. Hence καὶ εἰ is used of what is only assumed to 
be true ; ei καί, on the other hand, of what is as it is said 
to be." Biiumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 151) says, “In 
εἰ καί the καί naturally belongs to the conditional clause 
and is taken up into it, 7f even; in the combination καὶ 
εἰ the καί belongs to the consequent clause, even if. 
Sometimes however the difference disappears.” Krüger 
(ὃ 65, 5, 15) : “with καὶ εἰ, the leading clause is rezarded 
as holding under every condition, even the one 
stated, which appears to be the most extreme; with εἰ 
καί the condition, which may also come to pass, is re- 
garded as a matter of indifference in reference 
to the leading clause ;” Sauppe (on Dem. Ol. ii. § 20) is 
very explicit: * καὶ εἰ and εἰ καί both indicate that some- 
thing conflicts with what is expressed in the leading 
clause, but that that is (or is done) notwithstanding. καὶ 
«i, however, represents the thing adduced in the condi- 
tional sentence to be the only thing conflicting ; but when 
the conditional particle precedes (εἰ xac), the represen- 
tation is that something which is (or may be) accom- 
panied by many others (καί) conflicts ineffectually. Ac- 
cordingly the phrase καὶ εἰ greatly augments the force of 








what follows. εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although 
it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ 
ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413) ; Ellic. on 
Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, ὃ 41; Paley, 
Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional 
protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses 
as the simple ei, see I. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 
411 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)] : Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; 
xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 1, οἷς. b. it serves, with the entire 
following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been 
said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308)]: Mk. 
vi.5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition e μὴ 
ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what 
had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . . 
ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironi- 
cal answers, unless perchance, save forsooth that, (Küh- 
ner § 577, 7; [Jelf $ 860, 5 Obs.]): ei μὴ χρήζομεν κτλ. 
2 Co. iii. 1 Rec. c. ei μή very often coalesce into one 
particle, as it were, which takes the same verb as the 
preceding negation: unless, i.q. except, save, [Kühner 
$571,8; B. 359 (308)]; α. univ.: Mt. xi. 27; xii. 39; 
Mk. ii. 26; vii. 14; Jn. ii. 13; Ro. vii. 7; xiii. 1, 8; 1 
Co. viii. 4; xii.3; 2 Co. xii. 5, etc. as in classic Greek, 
μόνος, μόνον, is added pleonastically: Mt. xvii. 8; xxi. 
19; xxiv.36 ; Acts xi. 19; Phil. iv. 15; Rev. xiii. 17, etc. 
B. after negatives joined to nouns it is so used as to re- 
fer to the negative alone (hence many have regarded it 
as used for ἀλλά [i.e. as being not exceptive but ad- 
versative]), and can be rendered in Lat. sed tantum, 
but only: Mt. xii. 4 (οὐκ ἐξὸν jv αὐτῷ φαγεῖν οὐδὲ τοῖς per 
αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι μόνοις, as if οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν φαγεῖν 
alone preceded) ; Lk. iv. 26 sq.; Ro. xiv. 14; Rey. ix. 
4; xxi. 27 (ἐὰν μή 15 so used in Gal. ii. 16; on Gal. i. 19 
see Ἰάκωβος, 3); cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 195; 
[see ἐάν, 1. 3 c. and reff.]. y. when preceded by the in- 
terrogative ris in questions having a negative force: Mk. 
ii. 7; Lk. v. 21;-Ro. xi 15), 1 (05 1 115 9 Co. 2a 
13; Heb. iii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 22; v.5; (Xen. oec. 9, 1; Ar- 
stph. eqq. 615). δ. with other conjunctions: εἰ μὴ ἵνα, 
Jn. x. 10; ef μὴ ὅταν, Mk. ix. 9; τί ἐστιν, εἰ μὴ ὅτι ete., 2 
Co. xii. 13; Eph. iv. 9. e. it has its own verb, and 
makes a phrase by itself: ὃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλο, εἰ μή τινές 
εἰσιν of ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς Which means nothing else, save 
that there are some who trouble you, Gal. i. 7 [so 
Winer (Com. ad loc.) et al.; but see Meyer]. 
εἰ μή, arising from the blending of the two expressions 
ei μή and ἐκτὸς ei, like the Lat. nisi si equiv. to praeter- 
quam si, except in case, except: 1 Tim. v. 19; with the 
indic. aor. 1 Co. xv. 2; with the subjunc. pres. 1 Co. xiv. 
5; (Leian. de luetu c. 19; dial. meret. 1, 2, etc.). Cf. 
Lob.ad Phryn. p. 459; W. $65, 3 c.; [B. index s. v. ἐκτὸς 
εἰ μή]. 9. εἰ μήν, assuredly, surely, in oaths: Heb. vi. 
14 LT Tr WH (for R G3 μήν [q. v.]) and several times 
in Sept. as Ezek. xxxiii. 27; xxxiv. 8; [cf. xxxvi. 5; 
xxxviii. 19; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 23], etc. ; here, if ei did not 
come from ἢ by itacism, εἰ μήν must be explained as a 
confusion of the Hebraistie εἰ μή (see I. 5 above) and 
the Grk. formula of asseveration 7 μήν ; cf. Bleek on Heb. 


d. ἐκτὸς 


εἰ 172 


vol. ii. 2 p. 248 sqq., and what Fritzsche says on the 
other side, Com. on Bar. ii. 29; Judith i. 12; [cf. Kneu- 
cker on Bar. 1. c.; B. 359 (308); Tdf. Proleg. p.59; WH. 
App. p. 151; B. D. s. v. New Testament, I. 31]. 10. 
εἰ μή τι Or μήτι, unless in some respect, unless perchance, 
unless indeed: ironically, with the indic. pres. 2 Co. xiii. 
5; hesitatinely, with the subjune. aor. Lk. ix. 13; cf. 
Meyer ad loc. [also W. 294 (276); B. 221 (191)]; εἰ μή 
τι ἄν: 1 Co. vii. 5, see dy, ΠΥ. 11. εἰ οὐ (fully discussed 
by W. $ 55, 2 c. and B. 345 (297) sqq.), ifnot; this com- 
bination is used much more frequently in the N. T. than 
in the more elegant Grk. auth.; it differs from εἰ μή in 
this, that in the latter μή belongs to the particle ei, while 
in ei οὐ the οὐ refers to some following word and denies 
it emphatically, not infrequently even coalescing with it 
into asingleidea. a. when the idea to which οὐ belongs 
is antithetic a. to a positive term, either preceding 
or following: εἰ δὲ ov poryevers hovevers δέ, Jas. ii. 11 
[in R G the fut.]; εἰ yàp 6 cds... οὐκ eeicaro,... 
ἀλλὰ... παρέδωκεν eis κρίσιν, 2 Pet. ii. 4 sq.; εἰ καὶ ov 
δώσει... 
ποιῶ, Jn. x. 37 sq. ; εἰ yap ἐπιστεύετε.... εἰ δὲ . -- οὐ TE 
στεύετε, Jn. v. 46 sq.; add, Mk. xi. 26 RGL; Ro. viii. 
9; 1 Co.ix. 2; xi. 6; Jas.iii. 2. — B. to some other idea 
which is negative (formally or virtually): €... οὐκ 
ἀκούουσιν,οὐδὲ ... πεισθήσονται, Lk. xvi. 31; ef... οὐκ 
ἐφείσατο, οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται [ Rec. -σηται], Ro. xi. 21; add, 
1 Co. xv. 13, 15-17; 2 Th. iii. 10; foll. in the apodosis 
by a question having the force of a negative: Lk. xvi. 
11 sq.; Jn. iii. 12; 1 Tim.iii.5. ^ y. the οὐ denies with 
emphasis the idea to which it belongs: καλὸν ἦν αὐτῷ. εἰ 
οὐκ ἐγεννήθη, good were it for him not to have been born, 
Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. δ. the whole emphasis is 
placed on the negative itself: ei σὺ οὐκ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, Jn. 
i.35. b. the οὐ coalesces, as it were, with the word to 
which it belongs into a single idea: ei δὲ οὐκ ἐγκρατεύον- 
rat, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9; εἴ τις τῶν ἰδίων 
ov προνοεῖ [or -eira. T Tr txt. WH mrg.], neglects, 1 
Tim. v. 8; add, Lk. xiv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. xx: 15, 
etc. 12. ei οὖν, if then: Mt. vi. 23; vii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 13, 
36; Jn. xiii. 14; xviii. 8; Acts xi. 17: Col. iii. 1; Philem. 
17. [On εἰ μὲν οὖν see μέν IT. 4.] 13. emep[so T WH 
(exc. in 2 Co. v. 3 mrg.), but L Tr εἴ περ; cf. W. 45; 
Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 123], (εἰ and πέρ, and this ap- 
parently from περί), prop. if on the whole; if only, pro- 
vided that, is used “of a thing which is assumed to be, 
but whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt " ( erm. 
ad Vig. p. 831, [so W. 448 (417) ; but cf. Büumlein, 
Griech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 bot.) ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 
2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. etye (in yé, 3 c.) and the reff. to 
Mey., Lehtft., Ellic., there given]) : Ro. viii. 9,17; 1 Co. 
viii. 5; xv. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L T Tr WH ei); by 
a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about 
which there is no doubt: 2 Th. i. 6; Ro. iii. 30 L T Tr 
WH; 2 Co. v. 3 L Tr WH org. 14. εἴ πως [L Tr 
WH] or εἴπως [G T], if in any way, if by any means, if 
possibly: with the optat. pres. (see I. 7 above), Acts 
xxvii. 12; interrogatively, with the indic. fut. Ro. i. 10; 


. διά ye - .. δώσει, Lk. xi. 8; ei οὐ mot . . εἰ δὲ 


εἴδω 


with the subjune. aor., so that before εἰ the word σκοπῶν 
or πειρώμενος must be mentally supplied (see IL. 1 d. 
above): Ro. xi. 14; Phil. iii. 11. 15. etre... etre, 
a. whether . . . or [as disjunc. conjunc., sive .. . sive; cf. 
W. 440 (409 sq.) ; B. 221 (191)], without a verb follow- 
ing: Ro. xii. 6-8; 1 Co. iii. 22; viii. 5; 2 Co. v. 9sq.; 
Phil. 3. 18, 20, 27; 2 ΤῊ: 1.156... €01-3.16, 20: 1 Peto: 
13 sq.; etre οὖν... etre, 1 Co. xv. 11; foll. by the indic. 
pres. 1 Co. xii. 26; xiii. 8; 2 Co. i. 6 ; foll. by the sub- 
june. pres. 1 Th. v. 10, where the use of the subjunc. 
was occasioned by the subjunc. ζήσωμεν in the leading 
clause; cf. W. 294 (276); B.221(191). b. whether... or 
[as indirect interrogatives, utrum . . . an; cf. B. 250 (215) ] 
(see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Matthiae p. 1476 sq.) : after 
οὐκ οἶδα, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 16. εἴ τις, εἴ τι : exx. of this 
combination have already been given among the preced- 
ing; here may be added εἴ τις ἕτερος, εἴ τι ἕτερον, and if 
(there be) any other person or thing, — a phrase used as 
a conclusion after the mention or enumeration of several 
particulars belonging to the same class (in the classics 
εἴ τις ἄλλος. el kat τις ἄλλος. καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο, etc., in Hdt., 
Xen., Plat, 41.) : Ro. xiii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10; εἴ τις with 
subjunc. pres. Rev. xi. 5 Rec.; with the subjunc. aor., 
ibid. T Tr WH txt. 

[elye, see ye, 3 c.] 

εἰδέα. -as, ἡ, Mt. xxviii. 3 T Tr WH, a poet. form for ἰδέα, 
q. v- [cf. WH. App. p. 153], (Bar. vi. [ep.Jer.] 62; Arstph. 
"Thesm. 438 var.). Cf. B. 5; [W. 48 (47) ; see e; «].* 

εἶδος, -ovs, τό, (EIAQ), in Sept. chiefly for AND and 
"NA; prop. that which strikes the eye, which is exposed 
to view; 1. the external appearance, form, figure, 
shape, (so fr. Hom. down): Jn. v. 37; σωματικῷ εἴδει, 
Lk. iii. 22; τὸ εἶδος τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, Lk. ix. 29; διὰ. 
εἴδους, as encompassed with the visible appearance (of 
eternal things), (see διά, A. I. 2), 2 Co. v. 7, — com. ex- 
plained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth.: im Schauen); 
but no ex. has yet been adduced fr. any Grk. writ. in 
which εἶδος is used actively, like the Lat. species, of vision ; 
(στόμα κατὰ στόμα. ἐν εἴδει, kai ov δὲ ὁραμάτων καὶ évv- 
πνίων, Clem. homil. 17, 18; οἵ. Num. xii. 8 Sept.). 2; 


form, kind : ἀπὸ παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε, i. e. from 


every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Th. v. 22 [cf. πονηρός, sub. 
fin.]; (Joseph. antt. 10, 3, 1 πᾶν εἶδος πονηρίας. The 
Grks., esp. Plato, oppose τὸ εἶδος to τὸ γένος, as the Lat. 
does species to genus).* 

εἴδω, ἴδω, Lat. video, [Skr. vid, pf. véda know, vind-a- 
mi find, (cf. Vedas); Curtius $ 282], an obsol. form of 
the present tense, the place of which is supplied by ὁράω. 


The tenses coming from εἴδω and retained by usage form * 


two families, of which one signifies to see, the other to 
know. 

I. 2 aor. εἶδον, the com. form, with the term. of the 
1 aor. (see reff. s. v. ἀπέρχομαι. init.) εἶδα, Rev. xvii. 3- 
L,6 LT Tr; 1 pers. plur. εἴδαμεν, L T Tr WH in Acts 
iv. 20; Mk. ii. 12; Tr WH in Mt. xxv. 37; WH in Mt. 
xxv. 38; Mk. ix. 38; Lk. ix. 49; 3 pers. plur. eidav, 
T WH in Lk. ix. 32; Tr WH in Lk. x. 24; Acts vi. 15; 
xxviii. 4; T Tr WH in Mk. vi. 50; L T Tr WH in Jn. 


εἴδω 173 


i. 39 (40); Actsix.35; xii. 165 WH in Mk. vi. 33; add 
ἴδαν Tdf. in Mt. xiii.17; Lk. x. 24; ἴδον (an Epic form, 
cf. Matthiae i. p. 564; [Veitch p. 215]; very freq. in 
Sept. and in 1 Mace., cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 54; on 
the freq. interchange of ἴδον and εἶδον in codd., cf. Jacobs 
ad Achill. Tat. 2, 24; [WH. App. pp. 162, 164; Tf. 
Sept. Proleg. p. lx. ; N. T. Proleg. p. 89; B. 39 (34)]), 
Tot inv Rev-11v-059vi:1,255. 87971925 vrl; ete. 3 pers. 
sing. ἴδεν, Tdf. in Lk. v. 2; Rev. i. 2; 2 pers. plur. ἴδετε, 
Phil. i. 30 Rec.; 3 pers. plur. ἴδον, Tdf. in [Lk. ii. 20]; 
Jn. xix. 6; subjunc. ἴδω; impv. ἴδε (Attic ἰδέ, cf. W. § 6, 
1 ἃ.; [B.62 (54); Gétiling, Accentl. 52]), [2 pers. plur. 
ἴδετε, Jn. i. 39 (40) R GL]; inf. ἰδεῖν ; ptep. iov; (Sept. 
mostly for 787, sometimes for Tim and y); to see (have 
seen), be seeing (saw), i. e. 1. to perceive (with the 
eyes; Lat. conspicere, Germ. erblicken) ; a. univ. τινά 
or ri: Mt.ii.2; iv. 16 ; xiv. 14 ; xxviii. 6; Mk.i. 10, 16; 
1i. 14; Lk. v. 26; vii. 22; Jn.i.47 (48) sq. ; vi. 26; xix. 
6; Actsix. 35; xii. 16 ; Gal. 1.19; 1 Tim. vi. 16, and very 
often. οὐδέποτε οὕτως εἴδομεν we never saw in such fash- 
ion, i.e. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 12, old Germ. 
also hat man nicht gesehen, seit etc. ; cf. Kuinoel ad Mat. 
p. 280 ed. 4. ἰδεῖν τι and ἀκοῦσαί τι are conjoined in Lk. 
vii. 22; Acts xxii. 14; 1 Co. ii. 9; Jas. v. 11; ἰδεῖν and 
ἰδεῖν τι are also used by those to whom something is pre- 
sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates 
that he saw this or that: Rev. i. 12, 17 ; iv. 1 [here εἶδον 
«. ἰδού a formula peculiar to Rev. ; see ἰδού, sub fin.]; v. 
1 sq. 6, 11; vi.9; vii. 1, 9, etc.; Jn.xii. 41; ἰδεῖν ὅραμα, 
Acts x. 17; xvi. 10; ἰδεῖν ἐν ὁράματι, Acts ix. 12 [RG]; 
x. 3; ἐν τῇ ὁράσει, Rev. ix. 17; elliptically ἰδεῖν τι ἔκ τινος 


' sc. ἐκπορευθέν, Rev. xvi. 13, cf. i. 16; Hebraistically (on 


which see W. 8 45, 8; B. $ 144, 30) ἰδὼν εἶδον 7 have 
surely seen: Acts vii. 34 after Ex. iii. 7. Frequent in 
the historical books of the N. T. is the ptep. ἰδών, ἰδόντες, 
continuing the narrative, placed before a finite verb, and 
either having an acc. added, as in Mt. ii. 10; iii. 7; v. 1; 
viii. 34; Mk. v. 22; ix. 20; Lk.ii.48; vii. 13; Jn. v. 6; 
vi. 14; Acts xiii. 12; xiv. 11, etc. ; or the acc. is omitted, 
as being evident from the context: Mt. ix. 8, 11 ; xxi. 
20; Mk. x.14; Lk.i. 12; ii. 17 ; Acts iii. 12 ; vii. 31, etc. 
b. with the ace. of a pers. or a thing, and a ptep. [cf. 
W. $45,4a.]: Mt. iii. 7, 16; viii. 14 ; Mk. i. 16; vi. 33; 
Lk.ix.49; xxi. 2; Jn. i. 33, 47 (48) sq.; Acts iii. 9; 
xi.13; 1 Co. viii. 10; 1 Jn. v. 16; Rev. ix. 1, and often. 
c. foll. by ὅτε : Mk. ii. 16 L T Tr WH; ix. 25; Jn. vi. 
22, 24, etc. — d. foll. by an indirect question with the 
indie.: with τίς, Lk. xix. 3; with τί, Mk. v. 14; with 
πηλίκος, Gal.vi. 11. 6. ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, a formula of invi- 
tation, the use of which leaves the object of the seeing to 
be inferred by the hearers from the matter under consid- 
eration: Jn. xi. 34 (35) ; i. 46 (47) (here ἴδε is equiv. to 
by seeing learn, sc. that Jesus is the Messiah), and Grsb. 
in Rev. vi. 1, 5; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) (where T Tr WH 
ἔρχ. κι ὄψεσθε). The Rabbins use the phrases iM) ND 
and ΠῚ 82 to command attention. f. ἰδεῖν used 
absol. and πιστεύειν are contrasted in Jn. xx. 29. 2: 
like the Lat. video, to perceive by any of the senses: Mt. 








εἴδω 


xxvii. 54; Mk.xv. 39; Lk. xvii. 15. 3. univ. to per- 
ceive, notice, discern, discover: τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν, Mt. ix. 2; 
τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν, ib. 4 (where L Tr WH txt. εἰδώς 
for ἰδών) ; τ. διαλογισμὸν τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν, Lk. ix. 47 ['T 
WH txt. Tr mrg. eios]; ἴδε with acc. of the thing, Ro. 
xi. 22; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxvii. 3, 24; Acts xii.3; xiv. 9; 
xvi. 19; Gal. ii. 7, 14; ἴδε, ὅτι, Jn. vii. 52; ἰδεῖν τινα, ὅτι, 
Mk. xii. 34 [Trbr. the acc. ]. 4. to see, i. e. to turn 
the eyes, the mind, the attention to anything; a. to 
pay attention, observe: foll. by ei interrog. Mt. xxvii. 49; 
by ποταπός, 1 Jn. iii. 1. b. περί τινος (cf. Lat. videre de 
aliqua re), to see about something [A. V. to consider of ], 
i.e. to ascertain what must be done about it, Acts xv. 6. 
c. to inspect, examine: τί, Lk. xiv. 18. d. τινά, to look 
at, behold : Jn. xxi. 21; Mk. viii. 33. 5. to experience, 
τί, any state or condition [cf. W. 17]: as τὸν θάνατον, Lk. 
ii. 26; Heb. xi. 5, (Joseph: antt. 9, 2, 2 [oidev]), cf. Jn. 
viii. 51 (Ps.Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 49); τὴν διαφθοράν, to 
pass into a state of corruption, be dissolved, Acts ii. 27, 
31; xiii. 35-37, (Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10) ; τὴν Bac. v. θεοῦ, 
to partake of salvation in'*the kingdom of God, Jn. iii. 
3; πένθος, Rev. xviii. 7; τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ, by some mar- 
vellous event get a signal experience of the beneficent 
power of God, Jn. xi. 40; στενοχωρίας, 1 Mace. xiii. 3, 
(ἀλόχου χάριν, Hom. Il. 11, 243); on the same use of the 
verb ns? and the Lat. videre, cf. Gesenius, "Thesaur. iii. 
p. 1246. ἡμέραν, to live to see a day (a time) and en- 
joy the blessings it brings: ἡμέρας ἀγαθάς, 1 Pet. iii. 10 
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; τὴν ἡμέραν ἐμήν (Christ's lan- 
guage) the time when I should exercise my saving power 
on earth, Jn. viii. 56; εἶδε sc. r. jp. ἐμήν, from the abode 
of the blessed in paradise he in spirit saw my day, ibid. 
(see ἀγαλλιάω, sub fin.) ; ἐπιθυμήσετε μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν... 
ἰδεῖν, ye will wish that even a single day of the blessed 
coming age of the Messiah may break upon your 
wretched times, Lk. xvii. 22; so in Grk. writ., esp. the 
poets, ἧμαρ, ἡμέραν ἰδεῖν, in Latin videre diem; cf. Kuinoel 
on Jn. viii. 56. 6. with aec. of pers. fo see i. e. have 
an interview with, to visit: Lk. viii. 20; Jn. xii. 212; Acts 
xvi. 40; xxviii. 20; Ro. i. 11; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Phil.i. 27; 
1Th.iii.6; 2 Tim.i.4; 3Jn.14; τὸ πρόσωπόντινος : 1 Th. 
ii. 17; iii. 10, (Leian. dial. d. 24, 2 [cf. Rutherford on Babr. 
11, 9]); with an acc. of place, to visit, go to: Acts xix. 21. 

[Syn.: * When εἶδον, ἐδεῖν are called “ momentary preter- 
ites," it must not be supposed that thereby a quickly-past 
action is designated ; these forms merely present the action 
without reference to its duration.... The un- 
augmented moods, too, are not exclusively past, but present 
or future as well, — the last most decidedly in the imperative. 
Now itis obvious that when a perception is stated without 
regard to its duration, its form or mode cannot have 
prominence; hence ἰδεῖν is much less physical than ὁρᾶν. 
ἰδεῖν denotes to perceive with the eyes; ὁρᾶν [q. v.], on the 
other hand, to see, i. e. it marks the use and action of the 
eye as the principal thing. Perception as denoted by ἰδεῖν, 
when conceived of as completed, permits the sensuous ele- 
ment to be forgotten and abides merely as an activity of the 
soul; for οἶδα, εἰδέναι, signifies not “to have seen,” but “to 
know." Schmidt ch. xi. Comp.: ἀπ-, ἐπ-, mpo-, συν-, ὑπερ- 
εἴδον.] 


εἴδω 


II. 2 pf. οἶδα, οἶδας (1 Co. vii. 16; Jn. xxi. 15, for the 
more com. οἶσθα), οἴδαμεν (for ἴσμεν, more com. in Grk.), 
οἴδατε (ἴστε, the more usual classic form, is found only in 
Eph. v. 5 G L T Tr WH and Heb. xii. 17, [prob. also in 
Jas. i. 19 acc. to the reading of L T Tr WH; but see be- 
low]), οἴδασι (and once the -Attic ἴσασι, Acts xxvi. 4), 
impv. tere, once, Jas. i. 19 L T Tr WH, [but see above], 
subjune. εἰδῶ, inf. εἰδέναι, ptep. εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα (Mk. v. 33; 
Acts v. 7); plpf. ἤδειν, 2 pers. everywhere ἤδεις, 3 pers. 
ἤδει, plur. 2 pers. ἤδειτε, 3 pers. ἤδεισαν (for the more com. 
ἤδεσαν [Veitch p. 218; B. 43 (38)]); fut. εἰδήσω (Heb. 
viii. 11) ; cf. W. 84 (81) ; B. 51 (44); Sept. chiefly for 
yv; like the Lat. novi it has the signification of a pres- 
ent to know, understand; and the plpf. the signif. of an 
impf.; [cf. W. 274 (257)]. 

. 1. to know: with acc. of the thing, Mt. xxv. 13; Mk. 
x. 19; Jn. x. 4; xiii. 17; xiv.4; Actsv.7; Ro. vii.7; 1 
Co. ii. 2; Rev. ii. 2, 9, etc. ; τοῦτο [ Rec. ; al. πάντα] foll. 
by ὅτι ete. Jude 5; with acc. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 72, 74; 
Jn. i. 31; vi. 42; Actsiii.16; 2 Co. v. 16, etc.; τὸν θεόν, 
Tit. i. 16, cf. Jn. viii. 19; xv. 21; Gentiles are called oí 
μὴ εἰδότες τ. θεόν in 1 "Th. iv. 5; 2 Th. i. 8, ef. Gal. iv. 8; 
the predicate of the person is added (as often in Attic), 
εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον, sc. ὄντα, Mk. vi. 20 [B. 304 
(261)]; in the form of a ptep. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus. 
of the object by attraction (W. § 66, 5 a.; B. 377 (323)) 
an epexegetical clause is added [cf. esp. B. 301 (258)], 
with ὅτι, 1 Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq. ; Acts xvi. 3; or 
an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24; Lk. 
iv. 34; xiii. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. εἰδέναι is used 
with the acc. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41; 1 Pet. v. 9; foll. by 
ὅτι, Mt. ix. 6; Jn. xix. 35; Acts ii. 30; Ro. v. 3, and very 
often; οἴδαμεν foll. by ὅτι is not infrequently, so far as 
the sense is concerned, equiv. to it is well known, ac- 
knowledged : Mt. xxii. 16 ; Lk. xx. 21; Jn. iii. 2; ix. 31; 
Ro. ii. 2; iii. 19 ; vii. 14 ; viii. 22, 28; 2 Co. v. 1; 1 Tim. i. 
8; 1 Jn. iii. 2; v. 20; cf. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr. 
et Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp. 
in Paul, is the interrog. formula οὐκ οἴδατε and ἢ οὐκ 
οἴδατε ὅτι, by which something well known is commended 
to one for his thoughtful consideration: Ro. xi. 2; 1 Co. 
iii. 16; v.6; vi. 2sq. 9, 15 sq. 19; ix. 13, 24; οὐκ οἴδατε 
foll. by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [ Rec.]; οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι, Jn. 
xix. 10; οὐκ ἤδειτε, Lk. ii. 49; εἰδέναι foll. by an indir. 
quest. [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. ix. 21, 25, 30; xiv. 
5; xx.185 1 δεν 16; vii. 16; 9 Cozxi28q.; Ro. viii. 
26; Eph. vi. 21; 1 Tim. iii. 15, and very often. 2. to 
know i. e. get knowledge of, understand, perceive; a. any 
fact: as, ras ἐνθυμήσεις, Mt. xii. 25; τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, Mk. 
xii. 15; τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν, Lk. vi. 8; xi. 17 ; with 
the addition of ἐν ἑαυτῷ foll. by ὅτι, Jn. vi. 61. b. the 
force and meaning of something, which has a definite 
meaning: 1 Co. ii. 11 sq.; τὴν παραβολήν, Mk. iv. 13; 
μυστήρια, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foll. by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18. 
c. asin class. Grk., foll. by an inf. in the sense of to know 
how (Lat. calleo, to be skilled in): Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 
13; xii. 56; Phil iv. 12; 1 Th.iv.4; 1 Tim. iii. 5; Jas. 
lv. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 9; ὡς οἴδατε, sc. ἀσφαλίσασθαι, Mt. xxvii. 


174 








εἴκοσι 


65. 3. Hebraistically, εἰδέναι τινά to have regard for 
one, cherish, pay attention to: 1 Th. v. 12, (Sept. Gen. 
xxxix. 6 for jT). [SYN. see γινώσκω. 

εἰδωλεῖον [-A«ov T WH; see I, t], -ov, τό, (εἴδωλον, q. v. ; 
cf. ᾿Ασκληπεῖον, ᾿Απολλωνεῖον, Ἡρακλεῖον, ete. [W. 95 
(90) ]), an idol’s temple, temple consecrated to idols: 1 Co. 
viii. 10 (1 Macc. i. 47; x. 83; 1 Esdr. ii. 9; not found 
in prof. auth.; for in the frag. fr. Soph. [152 Dind.] in 
Plut. de amico et adul. c. 36 ἑδώλεα has of late been 
restored).* 

εἰδωλόθυτος, -ov, (εἴδωλον and θύω), a bibl. and eccl. 
word [W. 26; 100 (94)], sacrificed to idols; τὸ εἰδωλόθυ- 
rov and τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα denote the flesh left over from the 
heathen sacrifices ; it was either eaten at feasts, or sold 
(by the poor and the miserly) in the market: Acts xv. 
29; xxi. 25; 1 Co. viii. 1, 4, 7, 10; x. 19, 28 (here L txt. 
T Tr WH read íepófvrov, q. v.) ; Rev. ii. 14, 20. [Cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 308 sq.]* 

elSwdo-Aarpela [-rpia WH; see I, «], -as, ἡ, (εἴδωλον, 
q. v., and λατρεία), (Tertull. al. idololatria), the worship 
of false gods, idolatry: Gal. v. 20; used of the formal sac- 
rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14; of 
avarice, as a worship of Mammon [q. v.) Col. iii. 5 [Bp. 
Lehtft. ad loc.]; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry 
and peculiar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 26 ].)* 

εἰδωλολάτρης, -ov, ὁ, (εἴδωλον, and λάτρις i. e. ἃ hireling, 
servant, slave), α worshipper of false gods, an idolater, 
(Tertull. idololatres) : 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15; 
any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the 
worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11; vi. 9; esp. one who at- 
tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of, 
the offered victims, 1 Co. x. 7; a covetous man, as a 
worshipper of Mammon, Eph. v. 5; cf. Meyer ad loc. 
(Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 100 (94 sq.) ].)* 

εἴδωλον, -ov, τό, (εἶδος [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn. 
296, 97), in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, an image, likeness, 
i.e. whatever represents the form of an object, either 
real or imaginary; used of the shades of the departed 
(in Hom.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the 
mind, ete.; in bibl. writ. [an idol, i. e.] 1. the image 
of a heathen god: Acts vii.41; 1 Co. xii. 2; Rev. ix. 20, 
(Is. xxx. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, etc.; θεῶν ἢ δαιμόνων 
εἴδωλα, Polyb. 31, 3, 13) ; 2. a false god : Acts xv. 
20 (on which see ἀλίσγημα) ; Ro. ii. 22; 1 Co. viii. 4, 7 ; 
x. 19; 2 Co. vi. 16; 1 Th. i. 9, (often in Sept.) ; φυλάσ- 
cep ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τ. εἰδώλων, to guard one’s self from all 
manner of fellowship with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21.* 

εἰκῆ (L WH R?* εἰκῇ ; ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 342; 
B. 69 (61); [W.$5,4 e.; Jelf $ 324 Obs. 6; Kiihner 
$336 Anm. 7; esp. Etym. Magn. 78, 26 sq. ; and reff. s. v. 
I, 17). adv.; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; a [s 
considerately, without purpose, without just cause : Mt. v. 
22 R G Trbr.; Ro. xiii. 4 (i. e. *not to hide it in the 
scabbard, but to draw it’ Fritzsche); Col. ii. 18. 2. 
in vain; without success or effect: 1 Co. xv. 2; Gal. iii. 
4; iy. 11. [From Xenophon, Aeschyl. down.] * 

εἴκοσι [or -cw; Tdf. uses σὲ ten times before a conso- 
nant, and says -σι “ etiam ante vocalem fere semper in 


in- 


aT 


εἴκω 1 
codd. antiquiss.” Proleg. p. 98: WH everywhere -σι- 
ef. their App. p. 148; B. 9], οἱ, ai, ra, twenty: Lk. xiv. 
31; Acts i. 15, ete. [From Hom. down.] 

elkw : 1 aor. ei£a ; to yield, [A. V. give place]: τινί, Gal. 
ii. 5. (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: ὑπ-είκω.] * 

EIKQ: whence 2 pf. ἔοικα with the force of a pres. 
[W. 274 (257)]; to be like: τινί, Jas. i. 6, 23. [From 
Hom. down. }* ; 

εἰκών, -óvos, (acc. εἰκόναν, Rev. xiii. 14 Lchm.; see 
ἄρσην ), ἡ, (EIKQ, q. v.) ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; 


Sept. mostly for DOYS; an image, figure, likeness; a. Mt. 
xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx. 24; Ro. i. 23; 1 Co. xv. 49; 


Rev. xiii. 14 sq. ; xiv- 9,11; xv. 2; xvi.2; xix. 20; xx. 4; 
ἡ εἰκὼν τῶν πραγμάτων, the image of the things (sc. the 
heavenly things), in Heb. x. 1, is opp. to ἡ σκιά, just as 
in Cic. de off. 3, 17 solida et expressa effigies is opp. to 
umbras; εἰκὼν v. θεοῦ is used of the moral likeness of re- 
newed men to God, Col. iii. 10; εἰκὼν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 
the image of the Son of God, into which true Christians 
are transformed, is likeness not only to the heavenly 
body (cf. 1 Co. xv. 49; Phil. iii. 21), but also to the most 
holy and blessed state of mind, which Christ possesses : 
Ro. viii. 29; 2 Co.iii. 18. b. metonymically, eikóv twos, 
the image of one; one in whom the likeness of any one 
is seen: εἰκὼν θεοῦ is applied to man, on account of his 
power of command (see δόξα, III. 3 a. a.), 1 Co. xi. 7; to 
Christ, on aecount of his divine nature and absolute 
moral excellence, Col. i. 15; 2 Co. iv. 4; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. 
and Mey. on Col. l. c.].* 

[Sxw. εἰκών, ὁμοίωμα : du. denotes often not mere 
similarity but likeness (see ὁμοίωμα, b. and cf. Mey. on Ro. i. 
23), visible conformity to its object ; eix. adds to the idea of 
likeness the suggestions of representation (as a de- 
rived likeness) and manifestation. Cf. Trench ὃ xv.; 
Lghtft. u. s.] 

εἰλικρίνεια (-ía T [WH, seeI, «; on the breathing see 
WH. App. p. 1447), -as, 7. (εἰλικρινής, q. v-), purity, sin- 
cerity, ingenuousness : 1 Co. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 17 ; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
which God effects by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. i. 12 [W. 
$36,3b.]. (Theophr. Sext. Empir., Stob.) * 

εἰλικρινής, -és, ([on the breathing see WH. App. p. 
144; L. and S. s. v. fin.]; com. supposed to be fr. εἵλη or 
ἕλη sunlight, and κρίνω, prop. found pure when unfolded 
and examined by the sun’s light; hence some write εἷλ. 
[see reff. above]; acc. to the conjecture of others fr. 
εἶλος, εἰλεῖν, prop. sifted and cleansed by rapid move- 
ment or rolling to and fro), pure, unsullied, sincere ; of the 
soul, an εἰλικρινῆς man: Phil. i. 10; διάνοια, 2 Pet. iii. 1. 
(Sap. vii. 25, where cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb.; [see, on the 
word, also Trench $ Ixxxv.]; [Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., 
[Aristot., Plut.], Polyb., Philo, [al.].) * 

[SxN. εἰλικρινή», καθαρός: Acc. to Trench τι. s. the 
former word expresses freedom from the falsehoods, the 
latter from the defile ments, of the flesh and of the world.] 

εἱλίσσω, Tonic and poetie and occasional in later prose 
for ἑλίσσω [ W. § 2, 1 a.]: [pres. pass. εἱλίσσομαι] ; (eto 
to press close, to roll up, [ef. L. and S. s. v. fin.]). to roll 
up or together: Rev. vi. 14 RG; but LT Tr WH have 
restored ἑλισσόμ. (From Hom. down.) ἢ 








5 εἰμί 
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμί in inscriptions [?]; Aeol. ἐμμέ 
[Curtius (yet ἔμμι, so G. Meyer) ὃ 564; Veitch p. 228]), 
impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v. 12; 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 
31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 c. [here it has given place to ἔστω. 
(or tro), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. 
plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. etvau; impf. 
— acc. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. 
ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk.. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. 
xxy..21, 23; Jn. xi 21, 92: x. 18; Revi 15 Gln 
Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. ἦμεν, -- acc. to the mid. 
form, com. in later Grk. [cf. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv- 
35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 cf. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal. 1.10, 
etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts 
xxvii. 37 L'T Tr WH; [Gal.iv.3 T WH Tr mrg.; Eph. 
ἢ. δ T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 
149, 152; fut. ἔσομαι; cf. W. $14, 2; B.49 sq. (43) ; to 
be; 

I. εἰμί has the force of a predicate [i.e. is the sub- 
stantive verb]: to be, i.e. 1. toexist; a. passages 
in which the idea of the verb preponderates, and some 
person or thing is said to exist by way of distinction 
from things non-existent: ἔστιν ὁ θεός, Heb. xi. 6; ὁ 
dy καὶ ὁ ἦν [W. 68 (66), cf. 182 (172); B. 50 (43)], Rev. 
i.4,[8; iv. 8]; xi. 17; xvi. 9; ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λόγος, Jn.i. 1; 
πρὶν ᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ cipi, Jn. viii. 58 [so WH mre. 
in 24, 28; xiii. 19 (see II. 5 below)]; πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον 
εἶναι, Jn. xvii. 5; ἦν, καὶ οὐκ ἔστι καίπερ ἐστίν Rec., acc. 
to the better reading καὶ πάρεσται [G Tr WH, but L T 
παρέσται, correctly ; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 108 Anm. 20; 
Chandler § 803], Rev. xvii. 8; ἐσμέν, Acts xvii. 28; τὰ 
μὴ ὄντα and τὰ ὄντα things that are not, things that are, 
Ro. iv. 17; things that have some or have no influence, 
of some or of no account, 1 Co. i. 28, (ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς οὐκ 
ὄντας καὶ ἠθέλησεν ἐκ μὴ ὄντος εἶναι ἡμᾶς, Clem. Rom. 2 
Cor. i. 8 [ef. Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and esp. on Herm. 
vis. 1, 1, 6]). Hence — b. i. q. to live: εἰ ἤμεθα [or ἦμεν 
Rec.] ἐν rais ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had been 
(viz. living) in the days of our fathers, Mt. xxiii. 30; 
οὐκ εἶναι is used (as in class. Grk., ef. Passow i. p. 792, 
[L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1]) of the dead [who are not, are no 
more]: Mt.ii.18. 6. i. q. to stay, remain, be in a place: 
Mt.ii.13,15; Mk.i.45[L WH br. jv]; v. 21; Lk. i. 80; 
see V. 4 below. ἃ. i. q. to be found, the subject being 
anarthrous; as, ἦν ἄνθρωπος there was (found, Germ. es 
gab) a man, etc.: Lk. xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23; Jn. iii. 1; 
iv. 6; v. 2; vi. 10; 1 Co. viii. 5; xii. 4-6; xiv. 10; xv. 
44; 1 Jn. v. 16, and often; ἔσονται ἐμπαῖκται, Jude 18; 
ἔστι, ἦν, ἔσται with a negative: οὐκ ἔστι δίκαιος there is 
not (se. found) a righteous man, Ro. iii. 10; add 12, 18; 
χρόνος οὐκ ἔσται ἔτι there shall be no longer time, Rey. x. 
6; add, Rev. xxii. 3,5 [ Rec. adds ἐκεῖ]; xxi. 25 [here ἐκεῖ 
stands]; ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, 1 Co. xv. 12; μὴ εἶναι. 
ἀνάστασιν, Mt. xxii. 23 and its parall.; Acts xxiii. 8. Here 
belong also the phrases εἰσίν, of etc., οἵτινες etc., there are 
(some) who ete.: Mt. xvi. 28; xix. 12; Mk. ix.1; Lk. ix. 
27; Jn. vi. 64; Acts xi. 20; οὐδείς ἐστιν, ὅς, Mk. ix. 39 
sq.; x. 29; Lk. i. 61; xviii. 29; with a noun added, ἐξ 


» , 
εἰμί 


ἡμέραι εἰσίν, ἐν αἷς etc. Lk. xiii. 14 ; τίς ἐστιν, ὅς, Mt. vii. 9 
[L Tr WH om. écr.]; xii. 11 [Tr om. WH br. ἐστ.}; ἔστιν 
6 with a ptep. there is (viz. is not wanting) one that ete. 
Jn. v. 32 [3], 45; viii. 50. 6. when used of things, 
events, facts, ete., εἶναι 15 i. q. (o happen, take place: 
νῦν κρίσις ἐστίν, Jn. xii. 31; γογγυσμὸς ἦν, Jn. vii. 12: 
θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ, Mk. xiv. 2; σχίσμα, σχίσματα, Jn. ix. 
16; 1 Co. 1. 10 ; xii. 25; ἔριδες, 1 Co.i. 11; αἱρέσεις, 1 Co. 
xi. 19; πένθος, πόνος, κραυγή, Rev. xxi. 4; ἔσονται λιμοὶ 
x. λοιμοὶ [R G Tr mrg. in br., al. om. «. Aou. ] « σεισμοί, 
Mt. xxiv. 7; ἀνάγκη μεγάλη, Lk. xxi. 22; ἀνάστασιν μέλ- 
λειν ἔσεσθαι, Acts xxiv. 15. of times and seasons: χειμών 
ἐστιν, Jn. x. 22; νύξ, Jn. xiii. 30; ψῦχος, Jn. xviii. 18; 
καύσων, Lk. xii. 55; ἑσπέρα, Acts iv. 3; pota, Jn. xviii. 28 
[Ree.]; σκοτία, Jn. xx. 1; ἔστι, ἦν pa, — as ἕκτη, Lk. 
xxiii. 44; Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [L T Tr WH]; i. 39 (40), 
ete.; also of feasts: Jn. v. 1, 10; ix. 14; Acts xii. 3; Lk. 
xxii. 54; Mk. xv. 42. univ. τὸ ἐσόμενον what will be, 
follow, happen: Lk. xxii. 49 ; πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; Mt. xxiv. 
3; πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; Lk.i. 34; after the Hebr., kai ἔσται 
(equiv. to rr) foll. by the fut. of another verb: Acts ii. 
17 (fr. Joel ii. 28 (iii. 1)) ; 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; Acts 
ii. 23; Ro.ix. 26 (fr. Hos. i. 10 (ii. 1)). 
what then is it? i.e. how stands the case? what follows 
therefore? Acts xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. 2. i.q. 
πάρειμι, lo be present; to be at hand; to be in store: οἶνος 
οὐκ ἔστιν, Jn. ii. 3 Tdf.; παμπόλλου [Rec.] ὄχλου ὄντος, 
when there was present, Mk. viii. 1; add, ii.15; Mt. xii. 
10 RG; Heb. viii. 4; οὔπω yap ἦν πνεῦμα (ἅγιον), was 
not yet present, i. e. had not yet been given [which some 
authorities add], Jn. vii. 39; so also in the words εἰ πνεῦμα 
ἅγιον ἔστιν [but RG Tr accent ἅγιόν éor., cf. Chandler 
§ 938], Acts xix. 2; ἀκούσας . . . ὄντα σῖτα, that there was 
an abundance of grain, Acts vii. 12; δύναμις κυρίου ἦν εἰς 
τὸ ἰᾶσθαι αὐτούς, was present to heal them, Lk. ν. 17. 
3. ἔστιν with inf., as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down (see 
Passow i. p. 792 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. A. VI.]; see exx. 
fr. the O. T. Apocr. in Wahl, Clavis apoeryph. p. 155), 
it is possible to ete.; with a negative (as more com. in 
classic Grk. also), it is impossible: Heb. ix. 5; 1 Co. xi. 
20, [cf. W. § 44, 2 b.]. 

II. εἰμί [as a copula] connects the subject with the 
predicate, where the sentence shows who or what a per- 
son or thing is as respects character, nature, disposition, 
race, power, dignity, greatness, age, etc. 1. univ.: 


Howe. Ser eo, 
τι OUP E€OTLY; 


ἐγώ εἰμι πρεσβύτης, Lk. i. 18; ἐγώ εἰμι Ταβριήλ, Lk. i. 19; 
ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος, Mt. xiv. 15; προφήτης εἶ σύ, Jn. iv. 
19; σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, Mt. xxvi. 63; καθαροί ἐστε, Jn. xiii. 
10; ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς yrs, Mt. v. 13; ᾿Ιουδαίους εἶναι 
ἑαυτούς, Rev. iii. 9, cf. ii. 9, and countless other exx. 2. 
εἰμί, as a copula, indicates that the subject is or is to be 
compared to the thing expressed by the predicate: ἡ 
σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε, ye are, as it were, 
the seal attesting my apostleship, i. 6. your faith is proof 
that the name of apostle is given me rightfully, 1 Co. ix. 
25 ἡ ἐπιστολὴ (sc. συστατική, cf. vs. 1) ὑμεῖς ἐστε, i. e. ye 
yourselves are like a letter of recommendation for me, 
Or ye serve as a substitute for a letter of recommenda- 


176 











εἰμί 


tion, 2 Co. iii. 2; τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ σῶμά μου, this which I 
now hand to you is, as it were, my body, Mt. xxvi. 26; 
Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; ὑμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐστέ [L txt. 
T Tr txt. WH ἡμεῖς... ἐσμέν] ye [we] are to be regarded 
as the temple of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19; ὁ θεὸς 
ναὸς αὐτῆς ἐστίν [ἐστι(ν) RG Tr], x. τὸ ἀρνίον, they are to 
be regarded as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem- 
ple in the city because present with every one in it, Rev. 
xxi. 22. Hence 3. εἶναι, getting an explicative 
force, is often i. q. to denote, signify, import, as ὁ ἀγρός 
ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος, Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 sq. 22 sq.; Lk. viii. 11 
sq. 14 sq.; Gal. iv. 24 sq.; Rev. xvii. 15; xix. 8, (Sept. 
Gen. xli. 26 sq.; Ezek. xxxvii. 11); τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν [so TWH 
uniformly, exe. that WI om. v ἐφελκ. in Heb. ii. 14], 
Lehm. τουτέστιν [exc. in Ro. x. 6, 7, 8; also Treg. exc. in 
Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Actsi. 19; Ro. ix. 8; x. 6, 7, 8; 
sometimes written τοῦτό ἐστιν, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 111; cf. 
W. 45; B.*11 (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to 
τοῦτο σημαίνει) which is either inserted into the discourse 
as a parenthesis, or annexed to words as an apposition 
[cf. W. 530 (493); B. 400 (312). It isto be distinguished 
from τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν : τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν introduces an incidental 
explanation for the most part of the language; τοῦτο 
δέ ἐστιν subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen- 
erally to the thought; (cf. our “that is to say,” and 
“that is"); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc.]: Mt. 
xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19; Ro. vii. 18; x. 6-8; 
Philem. 12; Heb. ii. 14; vii. 5, ete.; likewise 6 ἐστι, Mk. 
ii. 17; vii. 11, 31 ; Heb. vii. 2; 6 ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, 
this signifies, when interpreted, etc. Mk. xv. 34; Acts iv. 
36; see 6 c. below. 4. In the Dible far more frequent- 
ly than in prof. auth., and in the N. T. much oftener in 
the historical than in the other books, a participle 
without the article serves as the predicate, being 
connected with the subject by the verb εἶναι (cf. W. § 45, 
5 and esp. B. 309 (265) sqq.); and — a. so as to form a 
mere periphrasis of the finite verb; — e. with the Pres- 
ent ptep. is formed —a periphrasis of the pres.: ἐστὶ 
προσαναπληροῦσα... . kai περισσεύουσα, 2 Co. ix. 12; —a 
periph. of the impf. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and 
Luke [B. 312 (268)]: ἦν καθεύδων, Mk. iv. 38; ἦν mpod- 
yov. X. 32; ἢν συγκαθήμενος, xiv. 54; ἦν διανεύων, Lk. i. 
22; ἦσαν καθήμενοι, v. 17; ἦν ἐκβάλλων, xi. 14; ἦσαν Kabe- 
ζόμενοι [Lehm., al. καθήμενοι], Acts ii. 2, and other exx. ; 
once in Paul, Phil. ii. 26 ἐπιποθῶν zv; — a periph. of the 
fut.: ἔσονται πίπτοντες [ἐκπ. R G], Mk. xiii. 25. B. with 
the Perfect ptep. is formed —a periph. of the aor. 
[impf. (?)]: ἦν ἑστώς, Lk. v. 1; — ἃ periph. of the plpf. : 
ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες, συνεληλυθυῖαι, Lk. v. 17; xxiii. 55; esp. 
with the pf. pass. ptep. : ἦν ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπιγεγραμμένη, Mk. 
xv. 26; ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον, Lk. ii. 26; ἦν τεθραμμένος, 
Lk.iv.16; add, viii. 2; xxiii. 51; Actsi.17,ete. y. once 
with an Aorist ptep. a periph. of the plpf. is formed: 
jv... βληθεὶς (ἢ GL Tr mrg. βεβλημένος) ev τῇ φυλακῇ, 
Lk. xxiii. 19 T Tr txt. WH; on the same use of the aor. 
sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. Passow i. p. 793; [L and S. 
s. v. B. 2; yet cf. B. $ 144, 24 fin.]. — b. so as to indi- 
cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq. 


3r 
εἰμί 


(266)]: ἦν διδάσκων was wont to teach, Mk. i. 22; Lk. 
iv. 31; xix. 47 ; ἦν [T Tr txt. WH ἦλθεν] κηρύσσων, Mk. 
i.39; Lk. iv. 447 ἦσαν νηστεύοντες held their fast, Mk. ii. 
18; ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες were talking, Mk. ix. 4; ἦν συγκύ- 
πτουσα, Lk. xiii. 11; ἦν θέλων, Lk. xxiii. 8; ἦν προσδεχό- 
μενος, Mk. xv. 43 (Lk. xxiii. 51 προσεδέχετο) ; once in 
Paul, Gal. i. 23 ἦσαν ἀκούοντες. with the Future [cf. 
B. 311 (267)]: ἔσται δεδεμένον, ἔσται λελυμένον: i. q. shall 
remain bound, shall remain loosed, Mt. xvi. 19; ἔσται 
πατουμένη shall continue to be trodden down, Lk. xxi. 24, 
and other exx. c. to signify that one is in the act of 
doing something: ἦν ἐρχόμενον was in the act of coming, 
Jn. i. 9 [cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.]; ἦν ὑποστρέφων, Acts 
viii. 28. d. the combination of εἶναι with a ptep. seems 
intended also to give the verbal idea more force and 
prominence by putting it in the form of a noun [see B. 
and W. τι. s.]: ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά (Germ. wohlha- 
bend, [Eng. was one that had]), Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; 
ἔσῃ σιωπῶν, Lk. i. 20; ἦν ὑποτασσύμενος (obedient, in sub- 
jection), Lk. ii. 51 ; ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, be thou ruler over, 
Lk. xix.17 ; ἦν συνευδοκῶν, Acts viii. 1; ζῶν εἰμι, Rev.i. 18, 
and in other exx. three times in Paul: e... ἠλπικότες 
ἐσμὲν μόνον if we are those who have only hoped, or to 
whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. 19; jv... karaA- 
λάσσων, the reconciler, 2 Co. v. 19 ; ἅτινά ἐστι λόγον ἔχοντα 
σοφίας, are things having a reputation of wisdom, Col. ii. 
23, (Matthiae § 560 [(so Kühner § 353 Anm. 3)] gives 
exx. fr. prof. auth. in which several words intervene be- 
tween εἶναι and the ptep.). 6. Of quite another sort are 
those exx. in which εἶναι has its own force, being equiv. 
to to be found, to be present, to stay, (see I. above), and 
the ptep. is added to express an act or condition of the 
subject (cf. B. § 144, 27): ἐν τοῖς μνήμασι ... ἦν (was 
i. 6. stayed) κράζων, Mk. v. 5; ἦν δὲ ἐκεῖ (was kept there) 
«ον βοσκομένη, Mk. v. 11; Mt. viii. 30; ἦσαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 
ἀναβαίνοντες, Luther correctly, they were in the road, go- 
ing up etc. Mk. x. 32; εἰσὶν ἄνδρες . . . εὐχὴν ἔχοντες, Acts 
xxi. 23; add, Mt. xii. 10 [RG]; xxvii. 55; Mk. ii. 6, (in 
the last two exx. ἦσαν were present) ; Lk. iv. 33; Jn. i. 28; 
ili. 23; Acts xxv. 14; Ro. iii. 12, ete.; ἄνωθέν ἐστιν, 
καταβαῖνον etc. (insert a comma after ἐστίν), is from above, 
καταβαῖνον etc. being added by way of explanation, Jas. 
i. 17 [ef. B. 310 (266)]. 5. The formula ἐγώ εἰμι (1 
am he), freq. in the Gospels, esp. in John, must have its 
predieate supplied mentally, inasmuch as it is evident 
from the context (cf. Krüger § 60, 7) ; thus, ἐγώ eig, 
sc. Ἰησοῦς ὁ Nat. Jn. xviii. 5 [here L mrg. expresses 6 
᾿ησοῦς, WH mre. Ἴησ.]. 6, 8; itis J whom you see, not 
another, Mt. xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. xxiv. 36 (Lehm. 
in br.); Jn. vi. 20; se. ὁ καθήμενος x. προσαιτῶν, Jn. ix. 
9; simply εἰμί, J am teacher and Lord, Jn. xiii. 13; οὐκ 
εἰμί sc. ἐξ αὐτῶν, Lk, xxii. 58; Jn. xviii. 25; 7 am not 
Elijah, Jn. i. 21; spec. 1 am the Messiah, Mk. xiii. 6 ; 
xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 8; Jn. iv. 26; viii. 24, 28; xiii. 19; I 
am the Son of God, Lk. xxii. 70 (like «31 ^3N. Dent. 
xxxii. 39; Is. xliii. 10); cf. Keim iii. 320 [ Eng. trans. vi. 
34; Hofmann, Schriftbeweis, i. 63 sq.]. The third pers. 
is used in the same way: ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν, sc. ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ, 
12 


177 





3: A 
εἰμι 


Jn. ix. 37; sc. ὅ παραδώσων ἐμέ, Jn. xiii. 26. 6. Of 
the phrases having a pronoun in place of a predi- 
cate, the following deserve notice: ^ a. ris εἰμι, εἶ, ἐστίν, 
a formula of inquiry, used by those desiring — either to 
know what sort of a man one is whom they see, or what 
his name is, Jn. i. 19; viii. 25; xxi. 12; Acts xxvi. 15;— 
or that they may see the face of some one spoken of, and 
that he may be pointed out to them, Lk. xix. 3; Jn. ix. 
36 ; σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ with a ptep., who (i. e. how petty) art thou, 
that etc.? the question of one administering a rebuke and 
contemptuously denying another’s right to do a thing, 
Ro. ix. 20; xiv. 4, (Strabo 6, 2, 4 p. 271 σὺ τίς εἶ ó 
τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς pvOdypapov;); ἐγὼ τίς εἶμι; who 
(how small) am I? the language of one holding a modest 
opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness, Acts 
xi. 17, ef. Ex:iii. 11. Ῥ. εἰμὲ vis, like sum aliquis in Lat., 
to be somebody (eminent): Acts v. 36; εἶναί τι, like the 
Lat. aliquid esse, to be something (i. e. something excel- 
lent): Gal. ii. 6; vi. 3; in these phrases ris and ri are 
emphatic; cf. Kühner § 470, 3; [W. 170 (161); B.114 
(100)]; εἶναί τι after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii. 
7, ef. Mey. ad loc.; also in questions having a negative 
force, 1 Co. x. 19 [cf. W. $6, 2]. οὐδέν εἰμι, 1 Co. xiii. 
2; 2 Co. xii. 11; οὐδέν ἐστιν, it is nothing, is of no ac- 
count, Mt. xxiii. 16, 18; Jn. viii. 54; Acts xxi. 24; 1 Co. 
vii. 19. — c. τίς ἐστι, 6. g. ἡ παραβολή, what does it mean ? 
what is the explanation of the thing? Lk. viii. 9 ris εἴη ἡ 
παραβολὴ αὕτη; Acts x. 17 τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα; Mk. i. 27 
τί ἐστι τοῦτο; what is this ? expressive of astonishment, 
Lk. xv. 26 τί εἴη ταῦτα; what might be the cause of the 
noise he heard? Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. x. 6 τίνα ἦν, ἃ ἐλάλει 
αὐτοῖς. τί ἐστι what does it mean? Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; 
Lk. xx. 17; Jn. xvi. 17 sq. ; τί ἐστιν εἰ μὴ ὅτι, Eph. iv. 9; 
see II. 3 above. ἃ. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτό ἐστιν foll. by a 
noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, etc. a. is so 
employed that the pronoun refers to something which 
has just been said: οὗτος γάρ ἐστι ὁ νόμος, the law is 
summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this, 
Mt. vii. 12. β. in John’s usage it is so employed that 
the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a 
noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as 
it were for the predicate: αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ νίκη .. . ἡ πίστις 
ἡμῶν, 1 Jn. v. 4; αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ θεοῦ, ἣν etc. 
1 ὅπ. ν. 9 Rec. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτό ἐστι foll. by ὅτι [Β. 105° 
(92) ; ef. W. 161 (152)]: Jn. iii. 19; 1 Jn. 1. δ: v. 11, 14; 
foll. by tva (to say that something ought to be done, or 
that something is desired or demanded [cf. W. 338 
(317); B. 240 (207)]) : Jn. vi. 29, 39 sq.; xv. 12; 1 Jn. 
iii. 11, 23; v. 3; foll. by ὅτε etc. Jn. i. 19 [W. 438 (408)]. 
7. The participle ὦν, οὖσα, ὄν, ὄντες, ὄντα, joined to a sub- 
stantive or an adjective, has the force of an intercalated 
clause, and may be translated since or although I am, thou 
art, etc., [here the Eng. use of the ptep. agrees in the main 
with the Grk.]: εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖς, πονηροὶ ὄντες. οἴδατε, Mt. vii. 
11; add, xii. 34; Lk. xx. 36; Jn. iii. 4; iv. 9; Acts xvi. 21; 
Ro. v. 10; 1 Co. viii. 7; Gal. ii. 3; Jas. iii. 4, and often; 
twice with other participles, used adjectively [B. 310 
(266)]: ὄντες ἀπηλλοτριωμένοι, Col. i. 21; ἐσκοτισμένοι 


> , 
εἰμί 


[R G, al. -τωμενοι], Eph. iv. 18. 8. Sometimes the 
copula ἔστιν (with the accent [see Chandler $ 938]) stands 
at the beginning of a sentence, to emphasize the truth of 
what the sentence aflirms or denies: Lk. viii. 11; 1 Tim. 
vi. 6; ἔστι δὲ πίστις etc. Heb. xi. 1 (although some explain 
it here [as a subst. verb], ‘ but faith exists’ or ‘is found,’ 
to wit in the examples adduced immediately after [see 
W.87,3]); several times so used in Philo in statements 
(quoted by Delitzsch on Heb. xi. 1) resembling defini- 
tions. οὐκ ἔστιν : Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. xii. 27; Acts x. 34; 
1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. iii. 15. 

III. εἰμί joined with Adverbs; 1. with adverbs 
of place; a. where? to be, be busy, somewhere: éxei, 
Mt. ii. 15; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 1 [L om. Tr br. jy], ete. ; 
ἐνθάδε, Acts xvi. 28; ἔσω, Jn. xx. 26; οὗ, Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 
20; Actsxvi. 13; ὅπου, Mk. ii. 4; v. 40; Jn: vi. 62; Acts 
xvii. 1, etc.; ποῦ, Mt. ii. 2; Jn. vii. 11, etc.; ὧδε, Mt. 
xxviii. 6; Mk. ix. 5, etc. b. with adverbs of dis- 
tance: ἀπέναντί τινος, Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2); 
ἐκτός τινος, 2 Co. xii. 2, [3 χωρίς τ. LT Tr WH); ἐμπρο- 
σθέν τινος, Lk. xiv. 2; ἐντός τινος, Lk. xvii. 21; ἐνώπιόν 
twos, Rev. i.4; vii. 15; μακρὰν ἀπό τινος, Jn. xxi. 8; Mk. 
xii. 34; πόρρω, Lk. xiv. 32; ἐπάνω, Jn. iii. 31*, [31 G T 
WH mre. om. the cl.]; of the situation of regions and 
places: ἀντιπέρα [or -τίπερα etc. see s. v.] τινός, Lk. viii. 
26; éyyós, — now standing absol. Jn. xix. 42; now with 
gen., Jn. xi. 18; xix. 20, etc. ; now with dat., Acts ix. 38; 
xxvii. 8. c. whence? to be from some quarter, i. e. to 
come, originate, from: πόθεν, Mt. xxi. 25; Lk. xiii. 25, 
27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29; xix. 9; ii. 9 (πόθεν ἐστίν sc. ὁ 
οἶνος, whence the wine was procured) ; ἐντεῦθεν, Jn. xviii. 
36. 2. with adverbs of quality; οὕτως εἰμί, to be 
thus or so, to be such; absol. Mt. xiii. 49; with ἐν ὑμῖν 
added, Mt. xx. 26 [here R GT ἔσται] ; οὕτως ἔσται. so will 
it bei.e. come to pass, Mt. xiii. 40, (49 [see above]); 
οὕτως ἐστίν or ἔσται. of thines, events, etc., such is or will 
be the state of the case [W. 465 (434) ]: Mt. xix. 10; xxiv. 
27, 37,39; Mk. iv. 26; Ro. iv. 18 (Gen. xv. 5); so of 
persons, Jn. iii. 8. καθώς ἐστιν as, even as, he ete. is, 1 
Jn. iii. 2, 7; iv. 17; εἰμὶ ὥσπερ τις to be, to do as one, 
to imitate him, be like him, Mt. vi. 5 [RG]; Lk. xviii. 
11[RGT WH txt.]: ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ ete. regard him 
as a heathen and a publican, i. e. have no fellowship with 
him, Mt. xviii. 17; εἰμὶ ὡς or ὡσεί τις, to be as i. e. like 
or equal to any one, Mt. [vi. 5 L T Tr WH]; xxii. 30; 
xxviii. 3; Lk. xi. 44; [xviii. 11 L Tr WH mrg.]; xxii. 
27; 1 Co. vii. 29sq.; τὰ σπλάγχνα περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς 
ἐστιν he is moved with the more abundant love toward 
you, 2 Co. vii. 15. — But see each adverb in its place. 

IV. εἰμί with the oblique cases of substantives or of 
pronouns; 1. εἶναί τινος. like the Lat. alicuius esse, 
i. q. to pertain to a person or a thing, denotes any kind of 
possession or connection (Possessive Genitive); cf. Krü- 
ger $47, 6,4sqq.; W.$30,5 b.; B. $132, 11. a. of things 
which one owns: ἔσται σοῦ πᾶσα [ Rec. πάντα], Lk. iv. 7; 
οὗ ἐστὶν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, Acts xxi. 11; add, Mk. xii. 7; Jn. 
X. 12; xix. 24; — or for the possession of which he is 
fitted: τινός ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τ. οὐρ. or τοῦ θεοῦ, he is fit 


178 








> F 
εἰμί 


for a share in the kingdom of God, Mt. v. 3, 10; xix. 14; 
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. πάντα ὑμῶν ἐστι, all things 
serve your interests and promote your salvation, 1 Co. 
iii. 21. b. of things which proceed from one: 2 Co. iv. 
7. c. lo be of one's party, be devoted to one: 1 Co. i. 12; 
2 Tim. ii. 19; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. viii. 9; 1 Co. 
1.12; 2 Co. x. 7; hence also τῆς ὁδοῦ (sc. rod κυρίου) εἶναι, 
Acts ix. 2 [cf. B. 163 (142)]. d. to be subject to one; to 
be in his hands or power: Mt. xxii. 28; Acts xxvii. 23; 
Ro. ix. 16; xiv. 8; 1 Co. iii. 23; vi. 19, 20 Rec. ; πνεύμα- 
ros, Lk.ix. 55 Ree. [lence e. tobesuitable, fit, for one: 
Aetsi.7. f. to be of a kind or class: εἶναι νυκτός, σκότους, 
ἡμέρας, 1 Th. v. 5, 5; or to be of the number of [a partit. 
gen., cf. B. 159 (139)]: Acts xxiii. 6; 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. 
i.15. g. with a gen. of quality: Heb. x. 39; xii. 11. 
h. with a gen. of age: Mk. v. 42; Lk. iii. 23; Acts iv. 22, 
(Tob.xiv.11). With this use (viz. 1) of εἶναι, those ex- 
amples must not be confounded in which a predicate 
nominative is to be repeated from the subject (cf. Krüger 
$47, 6,1): οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων, sc. θεός, 
Mt. xxii. 32, cf. Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα 
οὐκ ἔστι δαιμονιζομένου, sc. ῥήματα, Jn. x. 21; οὐκ ἔστιν 
ἀκαταστασίας ὁ θεός, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης, 1 Co. xiv. 33; ἄλλο 
Βιβλίον. 6 ἐστι τῆς ζωῆς, Rev. xx. 12; add, 2 Co. ii. 3; 
1 Pet. ii. 3. 2. εἰμί with the dative (cf. Krüger 
$48, 3 [who appears to regard the dat. as expressing a 
less close or necessary relationship than the gen.]; W. 
$31,2); a. ἔστι μοι, ἡμῖν, ete. it is mine, ours, etc., 7, we, 
ete., have: Lk. i. 7; il. 7, 10 ; xiv. 10; Jn. xviii. 10, 39; 
xix. 40; Acts vii. 5; vii. 21; x. 6; Ro. ix. 2,9; 1 Co. 
ix. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 11, and often. οὐκ ἔστι ἡμῖν [al. óp.] ἡ 
πάλη πρός etc. we have not a struggle against ete. Eph. 
vi. 12; εἰσὶν ἡμῖν we have here ete. Acts xxi. 23; τί 
ἔσται ἡμῖν what shall we have? what will be given us? 
Mt. xix. 27; ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία the promise belongs 
to you, Acts ii. 39. Db. εἶναί τινί τι to be something to (or 


for) some one, used of various relations, as of service, 


protection, etc.: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς ἐστί μοι οὗτος, sC. τοῦ 
with inf. Acts ix. 15; ἔσεσθέ μοι μάρτυρες, Acts [i. 8 
RG, ef.] xxii. 15; ἔσομαι αὐτῷ θεὸς x. αὐτὸς ἔσται por 
υἱός, Rev. xxi. 7; ἔσονταί μοι λαός, 2 Co. vi. 16 [RG]; 
εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν... πατέρα... τοῖς ete. Ro. iv. 11. c. 
εἶναί τινί τι, to be to one as or for something, to pass for 
etc.: 1 Co.i. 18; ii. 14; ix. 2, cf. Mt. xviii. 17. ἃ. elvat 
τινί τι, to be i. e. conduce, redound to one for (or as) 
something (cf. Krüger § 48, 3, 5): 1 Co. xi. 14 sq.; 2 
Co. ii. 15; Phil. i. 28; οὐαὶ δέ μοί ἐστι, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hos. 
ix. 12). e. ἔσται τινί, will come upon, befall, happen to, 
one: Mt. xvi. 22; Lk.i.45. f. Acts xxiv. 11 οὐ πλείους 
εἰσί μοι ἡμέραι ἣ δεκαδύο [L T Tr WH om. ἢ and read 
δώδεκα] not more than twelve days are (se. passed) to. 
me i. e. it is not more than twelve days. Lk. i. 36 οὗτος 
μὴν ἕκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ this is the sixth month to (with) her. 
Those passages must not be brought under this head in 
which the dative does not belong to the verb but de- 
pends on an adjective, as καλός, κοινωνός, φίλος. etc. 

V. εἰμί with Prepositions and their cases. E 


ἀπό τινος (τόπου); to come from, be a native of: Jn. i. 44 


εἰμί 


(45) [cf. ἀπό, 1.1 8.1. 2. εἴς τι, a. tohave betaken 
one’s self to some place and to 5e there, to have gone into 


(cf. W. § 50, 4 b.; [B. 333 (286)]): εἰς οἶκον, Mk. ii. 1 | 


[RG; al év]; eis τὸν ἀγρόν, Mk. xiii. 16 [RG]; eis τ. 
κοίτην, Lk. xi. 7; eis τὸν κόλπον, Jn. i. 18, where cf. 
Tholuck, [W. 415 (387); B. u. s.] ; (on Acts viii. 20 see 
ἀπώλεια, 2a.). metaph. to come to: εἰς χολὴν πικρίας 
(hast fallen into), Acts viii.23. b. to be directed towards 
a thing: ὥστε τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν ... εἶναι εἰς θεόν, 1 Pet. 
i. 21; to tend to anything: Ro. xi. 86 [W. $50, 61. c. 
to be for i. e. conduce or inure to, serve for, [ B. 150 (131) 
sq.; W. $29,3a.]:1 Co. xiv. 22; Col. ii. 22; Jas. v. 3; ἐμοὶ 
eis ἐλάχιστόν ἐστι, it results for me in, i. e. I account it, 
a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (eis ὠφέλειαν, Aesop. fab. 
124, 2). d. In imitation of the Hebr. 717 foll by 9, 
εἶναι ets τινα or τι stands where the Greeks use a nomi- 
native [W. and B. u. s.; -esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. eis, 3]: 
Mt. xix. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31 
ἔσονται eis σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen. ii. 24) ; 1 Jn. v. 8 eis τὸ ἔν 
εἰσιν, unite, conspire, towards one and the same result, 
agree in one; 2 Co.vi. 18 (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 1); Heb. 
i. 5 (2 S. vii. 14) ; viii. 10. 3. ἔκ τινος, a. tobeof 
i. e. a part of any thing, to belong to, etc. [W. 368 (845) ; 
cf. B. 159 (139)]: 1 Co. xii. 15sq.; ἔκ τινων, of the num- 
ber of: Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 69sq.; Lk. xxii. 58; Jn. 
i. 24; vi. 64,71 [RT]; vii. 50; x. 26; xviii. 17, 25; Acts 
xxi 8; 2 Tim. iii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 19; Rev. xvii. 11, (Xen. 
mem. 3, 6, 17) ; ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τινων, Lk. xxii. 3. b. to 
be of i. e. to have originated, sprung, come, from [ W. $ 51, 
1 d.; B. 327 (281 sq.) ]: Lk. xxiii. 7; Jn. i. 46 (47); iii. 31 
(ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς); iv. 22; vii. 52; viii. 23; xviii. 36; Acts 
iv. 6; xix. 25; xxiii. 34 ; Gal. iii. 21; 1 Jn. iv. 7; ὅς ἐστιν 
ἐξ ὑμῶν, your fellow-countryman, Col.iv. 9. c. to be of 


i.e. proceed from one as the author | W. 366 (344) sq.; | 


B. 327 (281)]: Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17; Acts v. 38 sq.; 
2 Co. iv. 7; 1 Jn. ii. 16; Heb. ii. 11; εἶναι ἐξ οὐρανοῦ. ἐξ 
ἀνθρώπων, to be instituted by the authority of God, by 
the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4; 
to be begotten of one, Mt.i.20. d. to be of i. e. be con- 
nected with one; to be related to, [cf. Win. $ 51,1 d.; cf. 
in ἐκ, IT. 1 a. and 7] : ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως, has no 
connection with faith, Gal. iii. 12; ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι 
(Luth. mit Werken umgehen), Gal. iii. 10; esp. in John's 
usage, to depend on the power of one, to be prompted and 
governed by one, and reflect his character: thus εἶναι ἐκ 
tov διαβόλου, Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ. 1 
Jn.iii.12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 1 Jn. 
iv. 5; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is 
equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1 
Jn. ii. 16 ; opp. to ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι, Jn. viii. 47; 1 Jn. iv. 
1-3; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as 
begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see γεννάω, 2 d.) : 
1 Jn. iv. 4,6; v. 19; 3 Jn. 11 ; ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι, either 
to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii. 
21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed by 
the love and pursuit of truth, as Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 
19; ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστί, he who is from the 
earth as respects origin bears the nature of this his earth- 


119 





from : Rev. xxi. 21; 1 Co. xi. 8. 


"em. 
εἰμὶ 


ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 31. e. to be of i.e. formed 
4. ἔντινι, a. with 
dat. of place, to be in i. e. be present, to stay, dwell; a. 
prop.: Mt. xxiv. 26; Lk.ii.49, etc.; on the surface of a 
place (Germ. auf), as ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere; 
ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ, Lk. xv. 25. at: ἔν δεξιᾷ τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. viii. 
34; to live, dwell, as in a city: Lk. xviii. 3; Acts ix. 10; 
Phil. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 2, ete.; of God, ἐν οὐρανοῖς, Eph. vi. 9; 
of things which are found, met with, in a place: 2 Tim. 
i. 20, ete. f. things so pertaining to locality that one 
can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by 
them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and 
improp., as εἶναι ἐν τῷ φωτί, ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ: 1 Jn. ii. 9, 
11; 1 Th. v. 4; ἐν σαρκί, Ro. vii. 5; viii. 8, (see σάρξ, 4). 
b. tobe in a state or condition [see B. 330 (284); cf. 
W. $ 29, 3b. and ἐν, I. 5 e.]: ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Lk. xi. 21; ἐν 
€x6pà, xxiii. 12; ἐν κρίματι, ibid. 40; ἐν περιτομῇ: ἐν ἀκρο- 
βυστίᾳ, Ro. iv. 10; ἐν 8ó£g, 2 Co. iii. 8, etc.; hence 
spoken of ills which one is afflicted with : ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος, 
Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, (ἐν τῇ νόσῳ, Soph. Aj. 271; in 
morbo esse, Cic. Tuse. 3, 4, 9) ; of wickedness in which 
one is, as it were, merged, ἐν rais ἁμαρτίαις, 1 Co. xv. 17; 
of holiness, in which one perseveres, ἐν πίστει, 2 Co. xiii. 
5. c. tobe in possession of, provided with a thing [ W.386 
(361)]: Phil. iv. 11; ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ, Lk. iv. 32; ἐν βάρει (see 
Bápos,fin.), 1 Th. ii. 7 (6). d. to be occupied in a thing 
(Bnhdy. p. 210; [see ἐν, I. 5 g.]): ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, in cele- 
brating the feast, Jn. ii. 23; to be sedulously devoted to 
[A. V. give one’s self wholly to] a thing, 1 Tim. iv. 15, 
(Hor. epp. 1, 1, 11 omnis in hoc sum). 6. a person or 
thing is said to be in one, i. e. in his soul: thus, God (by 
his power and influence) in the prophets, 1 Co. xiv. 25; 
Christ (i. e. his holy mind and power) in the souls of his 
disciples or of Christians, Jn. xvii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 5; τὸ 


| πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας, Jn. xiv. 17; friends are said to be 


ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ of one who loves them, 2 Co. vii. 3. vices, 
virtues, and the like, are said to bein one: as δόλος. Jn. 
i. 47 (48) ; ἀδικία, Jn. vii. 18; ἄγνοια, Eph. iv. 18 ; ἁμαρτία, 
1 Jn. iii. 5; ἀλήθεια, Jn. viii. 44; 2 Co. xi. 10; Eph. iv. 
21; 1 Jn. i. 8; ii. 4, (ἀλήθεια καὶ κρίσις, 1 Macc. vii. 18); 
ἀγάπη, Jn. xvii. 26; 1 Jn. ii. 15; ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ (τ. θεοῦ) 
οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν, God's word has not left its impress on 
our souls, 1 Jn. i. 10; τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ, the effi- 
cacy or influence of the light is not in his soul, [rather, 
an obvious physical fact is used to suggest a spiritual 
truth : the light is not in him, does not shine from within 
outwards], Jn. xi. 10; σκοτία, 1 Jn. i.5; σκάνδαλον, 1 Jn. 
ii. 10 i. e. there is nothing within him to seduce him to 
sin (cf. Düsterdieck and Huther ad loc.). Acts xiii. 15 
(if ye have in mind any word of exhortation ete. [ W. 
218 (204 sq.)]). £ ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι is said a. of 
Christians, as being rooted, so to speak, in him, i. e. inti- 
mately united to him, 1 Jn. ii. 5; vy. 20; f. of all men, 
because the ground of their creation and continued beinc 
is to be found in him alone, Acts xvii. 28. g. witha 
dat. of the pers. to be in, — [i. e. either] among the num- 
ber of: Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. ii. 44; Ro. i. 6; 
— ἴον, in the midst of: Acts ii. 29; vii. 44 Rec., ete.] 


εἰμί 


h. noteworthy, further, are the following: ἔστι τι ἔν τινι 
there is something (to blame) in one, Acts xxv. 5; some- 
thing is (founded [A. V. stand]) in a thing, 1 Co. ii. 5; 
οὐκ ἔστιν ev οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ ἡ σωτηρία salvation is (laid up, 
embodied) in none other, can be expected from none, 
Acts iv. 12; with dat. of the thing, ἐξ (contained, wrapped 
up) in something: Eph. v. 18; Heb. x. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 18. 
5. εἰμὶ ἐπί a. τινός. to be on: ἐπὶ rod δώματος, Lk. 
xvii. 31; ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Jn. xx. 7; to be (set) over a 
thing, Acts viii. 27; to preside, rule, over, Ro. ix. 5. b. 
τινί, lo be at [W. 392 (367)]: ἐπὶ θύραις, Mt. xxiv. 33; 
Mk. xiii. 29. ¢. revd, to be upon one : χάρις ἦν ἐπί τινα, 
was with him, assisted him, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; πνεῦμα 
ἦν ἐπί twa, had come upon one, was impelling him, Lk. ii. 
25, cf. Lk. iv. 18; Sept. Is. lxi. 1; add, Gal. vi. 16; εἶναι 
ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, to be (assembled) together [cf. αὐτός, III. 1], 
Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (acc. 
to the reading ἦτε for Rec. συνέρχεσθε). 6. εἰμί 
κατά a. τινός, lo be against one, to oppose him: Mt. 
xii. 30; Lk. ix. 50; xi. 23; Gal. v. 23; Ro. viii. 31 (opp. 
to ὑπέρ τινος, as in Mk. ix. 40). Db. xard te, according 
to something : κατὰ σάρκα, κατὰ πνεῦμα, to bear the char- 
acter, have the nature, of the flesh or of the Spirit, Ro. 
viii. 5; εἶναι κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον, Gal. i. 11 ; κατ᾽ ἀλήθειαν, Ro. ii. 
2. 7. μετά τινος, a. to be with (i. e. to associate 
with) one: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. iii. 14; v. 18; Lk. vi. 3; Jn. 
iii. 26 ; xii. 17 ; xvi. 32; Actsix. 39, and often in the Gos- 
pels; Rev. xxi. 3; of ships accompanying one, Mk. iv. 36; 
of what is present with one for his profit, 2 Jn. 2; Ro. xvi. 
20; Hebraistically, to be with one i. e. as a help, (of God, 
becoming the companion, as it were, of the righteous) : 
Lk. i. 66; Jn. iii. 2; viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii. 9; x. 38; xi. 
21; xviii. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 11; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Jn. 3, cf. Mt. 
xxviii. 20, (Gen. xxi. 20; Judg. vi. 12, etc.). b. to be 
(i. e. to cooperate) with: Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (Xen. 
an. 1, 3, 5 [al. ἰέναι). 8. epi παρά a. τινός, to 
(have come and so) be from one: Christ is said εἶναι 
παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. vi. 46; vii. 29; ix. 16, 33; vi παρά 
twos, is from i. e. given by one, Jn. xvii. 7. b. revi, to 
be with one: Mt. xxii. 25; οὐκ εἶναι παρὰ τῷ θεῷ is used 
to describe qualities alien to God, as προσωπολημψία, 
Ro.ii.11; Eph. vi. 9; ἀδικία, Ro.ix.14. c. reva (τόπον). 
by, by the side of: Mk. ν. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. πρός 
τινα [cf. W. 405 (378)], a. towards: πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστί 
it is towards evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. b. δὴ (turned tow- 
ards): Mk. iv. 1. c. with one: Mt. xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3; 
ix.19; Lk. ix. 41; Jn.i.1 [cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 10. civ 
τινι, a. to associate with one: Lk. xxii. 56; xxiv. 44; 
Acts xiii. 7; Phil. i. 23; Col. ii.5; 1 ΤῊ. ἐν. 17. b. to be 
the companion of one, to accompany him: Lk. vii. 12 [Ἐπὶ 
T Tr br. WH]; viii. 38; Acts iv. 13; xxii. 9; 2 Pet. i. 
18. c. to be an adherent of one, be on his side: Acts v. 
17; xiv. 4 [A. V.to hold with], (Xen. Cyr. 5,4,37). 11. 
εἰμὶ ὑπέρ a. τινός, to be Ser one, to favor his side: 
Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, (opp. to εἰμὶ κατά 
Twos). b. τινά, to be above one, to surpass, excel him : 
Lk. vi. 40. 12. ὑπό τινα [cf. B. 341 (293)], a. to 
be under (i. e. subject to) one: Mt. viii. 9 RG T Tr; Ro. 


180 





5 
εἰπὸν 


iii. 9; vi. 14 sq. ; Gal. iii. 10, 25; v.18; 1 Tim. vi. 1. b. 
to be (locally) under a thing: e. g. under a tree, Jn. i. 48 
(49); acloud, 1 Co.x.1. Further, see each preposition 
in its own place. 

VI. As in classical Greek, so also in the N. T. εἰμί is 
very often omitted (cf. Winer § 64, I. 2, who gives nu- 
merous exx. [ef. 596 (555) ; 350 (328 sq.)]; B. 136 (119) 
sq.), ἐστίν most frequently of all the parts: Lk. iv. 18; 
Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 16; Heb. v. 13, etc. ; 
in exclamations, Acts xix. 28, 34; in questions, Ro. ix. 
14; 2 Co. vi. 14-16; τί ydp, Phil. i. 18; Ro. iii. 3; ri οὖν, 
Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15; also εἶ, Rev. xv. 4; εἰμί, 2 Co. xi. 6; 
ἐσμέν, ἐστέ, 1 Co. iv. 10 ; εἰσί, Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. xiii. 8, etc.; 
the impv. ἔστω, Ro. xii. 9; Heb. xiii. 4 sq.; ἔστε, Ro. xii. 
9; 1 Pet. iii. 8; εἴη in wishes, Mt. xvi. 22; Gal. vi. 16, 
etc.; even the subjunc. 7 after tva, Ro. iv. 16; 2 Co. viii. 
11 [after ὅπως], 13; often the ptep. ὦν, ὄντες, as (see B. 
$144, 18) in Mk. vi. 20; Acts xxvii. 33; in the expres- 
sions oí ἐκ περιτομῆς, ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, oi ὑπὸ νόμον, etc. 
[Conr.: ἄπ-. ἔν-, (ἔξεεστι.) wap-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι.] 

εἶμι, fo go, approved of by some in Jn. vii. 34, 36, for 
the ordinary εἰμί, but cf. W. § 6,2; [B.50 (43). Comp.: 
ἄπ-. εἴσ-, €&-, ἐπ-. σύν-ειμι. * 

εἵνεκεν. see ἕνεκα, ἕνεκεν. 

εἴ-περ, see ei, IIT. 18. 

εἶπον. 2 aor. act. fr. an obsol. pres. EM [late Epic and 
in composition ; see Veitch] (ef. ἔπος [Curtius § 620]), 
Ton. EIHQ (like ἐρωτάω, eipor.; ἑλίσσω, εἱλίσσ.) ; sub- 
junc. εἴπω, optat. εἴποιμι, impv. εἰπέ, inf. εἰπεῖν, ptcp. 
εἰπών ; 1 aor. εἶπα (Jn. x. 34 RG T Tr WH, fr. Ps. Ixxxi. 
(Ixxxii) 6; Acts xxvi. 15 L T Tr WH; Heb. iii. 10 
Lehm. fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10; add [Mk.ix. 18 TWH Tr 
txt.]: Job xxix. 18; xxxii. 8, ete.; Sir. xxiv. 31 (29); 
1 Mace. vi. 11, ete. ; cf. Kithner i. 817, [esp. Veitch s. v. 
pp. 232, 233]), 2 pers. εἶπας (Mt. xxvi. 25, [64]; Mk. xii. 
32 [not TWH; Jn. iv. 17 where T WH again -zes ; Lk. 
xx. 39]), 3 pers. plur. εἶπαν (often in L T Tr WH [i. e. 
out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between 
3 pers. plur. -zov of the Rec. and -zav, the latter ending 
has been adopted by L in 56, by T in 82, by Tr in 74, by 
WH in104, cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123], e.g. Mt. xii. 2; xxvii. 
6; Jn. xviii. 30, etc.) ; impv. εἰπόν (Mk. xiii. 4 L T Tr 
WH; Lk. x. 40 TWH Tr mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26 GL'T 
Tr WH, [also Mt. iv. 3 WH; xviii. 17 T WH; xxii. 17 
T WH Tr mrg.; xxiv.3 WH; Lk. xx. 2 T Tr WH; xxii. 
(66)67 T Tr WH; Jn. x. 24 T WH], for the Attic εἶπον, 
cf. W. $6, 1 k.; [Chandler $ 775]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 
515 sqq.; [but Win. (p. 85 (81)) regards εἰπόν as impv. 
of the 2nd aor.; cf., too, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 348; B. 57 
(50); esp. Fritz. 1. c.]). in the remaining persons εἰπάτω 
(Rev. xxii. 17), εἴπατε (Mt. [x. 27; xxi. 5]; xxii. 4; xxvi. 
18, etc. ; Mk. [xi. 3]; xiv. 14; xvi. 7; [Lk. x. 10; xiii. 
32; xx. 3; Col. iv. 17]), εἰπάτωσαν (Acts xxiv. 20) also 
freq. in Attic, [Veitch s. v.; WH. App. p. 164 ; Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 219]; ptep., after the form chiefly Ion., 
εἴπας ([Jn. xi. 28 Tr WH]; Acts vii. 37 L T Tr WH 
[also xxii. 24; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 35 ]); the fut. ἐρῶ is from the 
Epic pres. eipw [cf. Lob. Technol. p. 137]; on the other 


2 
εἰπὸν 


hand, from ΡΕΩ come pf. εἴρηκα, 3 pers. plur. εἰρήκασιν 
(Acts xvii. 28), εἴρηκαν (Rev. xix. 3; see γίνομαι), inf. 
εἰρηκέναι, Heb. x. 15 LT Tr WH; Pass., pf. 3 pers. 
sing. εἴρηται, ptep. εἰρημένον ; plpf. εἰρήκειν : 1 aor. ἐρρέθην 
(Rev. vi. 11; ix. 4 and R α T WH in Mt. v. 21 sqq.; 
L T Tr WH in Ro. ix. 12, 26 ; Gal. iii. 16), [* strict " 
(cf. Veitch p. 575)] Attic ἐρρήθην (Mt. v. 21 sqq. L Tr ; 
RG in Ro. ix. 12, 26; Gal. iii. 16; [cf. B. 57 (50); WH. 
App. p- 1667), ptep. ῥηθείς. ῥηθέν ; Sept.for Y2N ; fospeak, 
say, whether orally or by letter; 

1. with an accus. of the obj.; a. with acc. of the 
thing: εἰπεῖν λόγον, Mt. viii. 8 Rec.; Jn. ii. 22 [L T Tr 
WH]; vii. 36; xviii. 9, 32; ῥῆμα, Mk. xiv. 72 [Knapp 
et al.]; εἰπεῖν λόγον ets τινα. i. 4. βλασφημεῖν, Lk. xii. 10; 
also κατά twos, Mt. xii 32; ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, so to say (a 
phrase freq. in class. Grk., cf. Weiske, De pleonasmis gr. p. 
47; Matthiae $545; Delitzsch on Heb. as below; [Küh- 
ner $ 585,3; Krüger $ 55, 1, 2; Goodwin $100; W. 449 
(419); 317 (298) ), Heb. vii. 9, (opp. to ἀκριβεῖ λόγῳ, 
Plat. rep. 1, 341 b.); τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Mk. v. 33; ἀλήθειαν 
ἐρῶ, 2 Co. xii. 6; τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας, Jn. iv. 18 [W. 464 
(433) n.]; τί εἴπω ; what shall I say? (the expression of 
one who is in doubt what to say), Jn. xii. 27; πῶς ἐρεῖ τὸ 
ἀμὴν ...; 1 Co. xiv. 16; τί ἐροῦμεν ; or τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν; 
what shall we say? i. 6. what reply can we make? or, to 
what does that bring us? only in the Ep. to the Ro. 
[W. § 40, 6] viz. iii.5; vi. 1; vii. 7; ix. 14, 30; with πρὸς 
ταῦτα added, viii. 31; εἰπεῖν τι περί twos, Jn. vii. 39; x. 
41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the 
New are usually introduced as follows: τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ 
[LT Tr WH om. τοῦ] κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου, Mt. i. 22 ; 
li. 15; ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. xxii. 31; ὑπὸ τοῦ προφήτου Rec. 
Mt. xxvii. 35, cf. ii. 17; τὸ ῥηθὲν διά τινος, Mt. ii. 17 L T 
Tr WH, 23; iv. 14; yii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35; xxi. 4; 
xxvii. 9; τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ pod. Acts ii. 16; τὸ εἰρημέ- 
νον, Lk. ii. 24; Acts xiii. 40; Ro. iv. 18; ἐρρέθη, Mt. v. 
21, ete. ; καθὼς εἴρηκεν, Heb.iv.3. ^b. with acc. of the 
pers. to speak of, designate by words: ὃν εἶπον, Jn. i. 15 
[(not WH txt.) ; B. 377 (323); cf. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. (say 
of )]; 6 ῥηθείς, Mt. iii. 8. εἰπεῖν τινα καλῶς, to speak well 
of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (εὖ εἰπεῖν τινα, Hom. Od. 1, 
302); κακῶς, to speak ill of one, Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. xxii. 
28; cf. Kühner $ 409, 2; 411, 5; [W. $32, 1 b. β.; B. 
146 (128)]. c. with an ellipsis of the acc. αὐτό (see 
αὐτός, II. 3): Lk. xxii. 67; Jn. ix. 27; xvi. 4, ete. od 
εἶπας (sc. αὐτό), i. e. you have just expressed it in words; 
that's it; itis just as you say : Mt. xxvi. 25,64, [a rabbin- 
ical formula; for exx. cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on vs. 
25; al seem to regard the answer as non-committal, 
e. g. Origen on vs. 64 (opp. iii. 910 De la Rue); Wünsche, 
Erlüut. der Evang. aus Talmud usw. on vs. 25; but cf. 
the ἐγώ εἰμι of Mk. xiv. 62; in Mt. xxvi. 64 WH mrg. 
take it interrogatively ]. 2. the person, to whom a 
thing issaid,isindicated 8. by a dat. : εἰπεῖν τί τινι, Lk. 
vii. 40, and very often; εἶπον ὑμῖν sc. αὐτό, I (have just) 
told it you; this is what I mean; let this be the word: Mt. 
xxviii. 7; cf. Bnhdy. p. 381; [Jelf $ 403, 1; Goodwin 
$ 19, 5; esp. (for exx.) Herm. Vig. p. 146]. τινὶ περί 


181 





“- 
€lL7TOV 


twos [cf. W. § 47,4], Mt. xvii. 13; Jn. xviii. 84. to say 
anything to one by way of censure, Mt. xxi. 3; to cast 
in one’s teeth, épeiré μοι τὴν παραβολήν, Lk. iv. 23. to 
tell what anything means, e. g. τὸ μυστήριον, Rev. xvii. 7. 
b. by the use of a prep.: πρός twa [cf. B. 172 (150); 
Krüger $ 48, 7, 13], to say (a thing) to one, as Lk. iv. 
23; v. 4; xii. 16, and many other places in Luke; to 
say a thing in reference to one [W. 405 (318)], Mk. 
xii. 12; Lk. xviii. 9; xx. 19. 3. εἶπον, to say, speak, 
simply and without an ace. of the obj., i. e. merely to de- 
clare in words, to use language; a. with the addition of 
an adverb or of some other adjunct: ὁμοίως, Mt. xxvi. 35; - 
ὡσαύτως, Mt. xxi. 30; καθώς, Mt. xxviii. 6; Lk. xxiv. 24; 
Ju. i. 233 vii. 38; εἶπε διὰ παραβολῆς, making use of a 
parable [see διά, A. III. 3] he spake, Lk. viii. 4 ; ἐν zapa- 
βολαῖς, Mt. xxii. 1; with an instrumental dative: εἶπε 
λόγῳ, say in (using only) a (single) word, sc. that my ser- 
vant shall be healed, Mt. viii. 8 (where Rec. λόγον) ; Lk. 
vii. . b. with the words spoken added in direct dis- 
course; so a hundred times in the historical books of the 
N. T., as Mt. ix. 4sq.; viii.32; [xv. 4 L Tr WH], ete.; 
1 Co. xii. 15; [2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. T Tr WH, (cf. 4 below) ]; 
Heb.i.5; iii. 10; x. 7, [15 L T Tr WH], 30; xii. 21; Jas. 
ii. 3, 11; Jude 9; Rev. vii. 14; πέμψας εἶπεν he said by 
a messenger or messengers, Mt.xi.2 sq. The following 
and other phrases are freq. in the Synoptic Gospels: ὁ δὲ 
ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, as Mt. iv. 4; xv. 13 ; kai ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, 
Mt. xxiv. 4; ἀποκριθεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ εἶπεν. Lk.i. 60 ; ἀποκριθεὶς 
ὁ Σίμων εἶπεν, Lk. vii. 43, etc. ; ἀποκριθέντες δὲ εἶπον [-παν 
T Tr WH], Lk. xx. 24; θα’, John usually writes ἀπεκρίθη 
καὶ εἶπεν : Jn.i.48 (49) ; 1i. 19; iii. 105 iv. 10, 13, 17 ; vi. 
26, 29; vii. 16, 20 [R G], 52; ix. 11 [RGL br.], 30, 36 [L 
Tr mrg. om. WH br. x. eiz.]; xiii. 7; xiv. 23; xviii. 30; 
— [εἶπαν αὐτῷ λέγοντες, Mk. viii. 28 T WH Tr mrg., cf. 
xii.26]. c. foll. by ὅτε : Mt. xxviii. 7; Mk. xvi. 7; Jn. 
vi. 36 ; vii. 42; viii. 55; xi. 40; xvi. 15; xviii. 8; 1 Jn. i. 6, 
8,10; 1 Co. i. 15; xiv. 23; xv. 27 [L br. WH mrs. om. 
ὅτι]. ἃ. foll. by acc. and inf.: ri οὖν ἐροῦμεν ᾿Αβραὰμ τὸν 
πατέρα ἡμῶν εὑρηκέναι [WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. evpne. ; 
cf. 1 b. above] κατὰ σάρκα; Ro. iv. 1. 4. εἰπεῖν some- 
times involves in it the idea of commanding [cf. B. 275 
sq. (237)]: foll. by the inf., εἶπε δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν, Mk. 
v. 43; εἰπὲ τῷ ἀδελφῷ pov μερίσασθαι per’ ἐμοῦ τὴν KAnpo- 
νομίαν, Lk. xii. 13; ὅσα ἂν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν (sc. τηρεῖν [in- 
serted in R G]), τηρεῖτε. Mt. xxiii. 3, (Sap. ix. 8). foll. 
by the ace. and inf., 6 εἰπὼν ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι. 2 Co. 
iv. 6 [R GL mreg., cf. B. 273 sq. (235); but L txt. T Tr 
WH read λάμψει, thus changing the construction fr. the 
acc. with infin. to direct discourse, see 3b. above]; 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ (for ἑαυτῷ, see αὑτοῦ) φωνηθῆναι τοὺς δούλους ᾿ 
τούτους. he commanded to be called for him (i. 6. to him) 
these servants, Lk. xix. 15; cf. W. $44, 3 b.; Krüger 
§ 55, 3,13. foll. by tva with the subjunc.: Mt. iv. 3; xx. 
21; Lk. iv. 3; to εἰπεῖν is added a dat. of the pers. bidden 
to do something, Mk. iii. 9; Lk. x. 40 cf. iv. 3; Rev. 
vi.11; ix. 4. “Moreover, notice that ἵνα and ὄφρα are 
often used by the later poets after verbs of command- 
ing;” Hermann ad Vig. p. 849; cf. W. $ 44, 8; [B. 237 


ν 
eumaos 


(204)]. 5. By a Hebraism εἰπεῖν ἐν ἑαυτῷ (like ow 
373, Deut. viii. 17; Ps. x. 6 (ix. 27) ; xiii. (xiv 2i? Esth. 
vi. 6) is equiv. to to think (because thinking is a silent 
soliloquy) : Mt. ix. 3; Lk. vii. 39; xvi.3; xviii. 4 (else- 
where also λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ) ; and εἰπεῖν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 
amounts to the same, Lk. xii. 45; Ro. x. 6; but in other 
passages εἶπον, ἔλεγον, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς isi. q. ἐν ἀλλήλοις : Mt. 
xxi. 38; see λέγω, II. 1 d. 6. εἰπεῖν twa with a pred- 
icate accus. to call, style, one: ἐκείνους εἶπε θεούς, Jn. x. 
35; ὑμᾶς εἴρηκα φίλους, Jn. xv. 15; (Hom. Od. 19, 334; 
Xen. apol. Soer. § 15; eed fim. $20). [Comp.: 
ἀπ-, προ- εἴπον. 1] 

εἴ-πως, see ei, IIT. 14. 

εἰρηνεύω ; (εἰρήνη) ; 


> 
avT-, 


1. to make peace: 1 Mace. vi. 
60; Dio Cass. 77, 12, ete. 2. to cultivate or keep peace, 
i. e. harmony ; to be at peace, live in peace: 2 Co. xiii. 11; 
ἐν ἀλλήλοις, Mk. ix. 50; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς [ T Tr αὐτοῖς], 1 Th. 
v. 135 μετά twos, Ro. xii. 18; (Plat. Theaet. p. 180 b. ; 
Dio Cass. 42, 15, etc. ; Sept.).* 

εἰρήνη, -ns, 7, (apparently fr. εἴρω to join; [al. fr. etpo 
i 4ᾳ: λέγω ; Etym. Magn. 303, 41; Waniéek p. 892; Lob. 
Path. Proleg. p. 194; Benfey, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept. 
chiefly for DIY ; [fr. Hom. down]; peace, i. e. da 
state of national tranquillitys exemption from the rage and 
havoc of war: Kev. vi. 4; πολλὴ εἰρήνη, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ; 
τὰ [ WH txt. om. τά] πρὺς εἰρήνην, things that look tow- 
ards peace, as an armistice, conditions for the restoration 
of peace, Lk. xiv. 32; αἰτεῖσθαι εἰρήνην, Acts xii. 20; 
ἔχειν εἰρήνην, of the church free from persecutions, Acts 
ix. S1. 2. pee between individuals, i. e. harmony, 
concord: Mt. x. 34; Lk. xii. 51; Acts vii. 26; Ro. xiv. 

7; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v.22; Eph. ii. 17; iv.35 i.q. the 
author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [ef. B. 125 (109)]; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18; 
ὁδὸς εἰρήνης, way leading to peace, a course of life pro- 
moting harmony, Ro. iii. 17 (fr. Is. lix. 8) ; uer εἰρήνης, 
in ἃ mild and fr iendly spirit, Heb. xi. 31; ποιεῖν εἰρήνην, 
to promote concord, Jas. iii. 18; to effect it, Eph. ii. 15; 
ζητεῖν, 1 Pet. iii. 11 ; διώκειν, 2 Tim. ii. 22; with pera 
πάντων added, Heb. xii. 14; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκειν, Ro. 
xiv. 19 [ef. B. 95 (83); W. 109 (103 sq.)]. spec. good 
order, opp. to ἀκαταστασία, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 3. after the 
Hebr. Ὁ γυ, security, safety, prosperity, felicity, (because 
peace and harmony make and keep things safe and pros- 
perous): Lk. xix. 42; Heb. vii. 2; εἰρήνη κ' ἀσφάλεια, 
one to ὄλεθρος, 1 Th. v. 3; ἐν εἰρήνῃ ἐστὶ τὰ ὑπάρχοντα 
αὐτοῦ, his goods are secure from hostile attack, Lk. xi. 
21; ὕπαγε els εἰρήνην, Mk. v. 34, and πορεύου eis eip. Lk. 
vii. 50; viii. 48, a formula of wishing well, blessing, ad- 
dressed by the Hebrews to departing friends (ov»U? 35, 
18.1.17; xx. 42, etc.; properly, depart into a place or 
state of peace; (cf. B. 184 (160)]) ; πορεύεσθαι ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
Acts xvi. 36, and ὑπάγετε ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Jas. ii. 16, go in peace 
1. e. may happiness attend you; ἀπολύειν τινὰ per’ εἰρήνης, 
to dismiss one with good wishes, Acts xv. 33; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
with my wish fulfilled, and therefore happy, Lk. ii. 29 
(see ἀπολύω. 2 a.); προπέμπειν τινὰ ἐν eip. free from dan- 
ger, safe, 1 Co. xvi. 11 [al. take it of inward peace or 


9 , , 
z εἰρηνικὸς 


18 








of harmony; cf. Mey. ad loc.]. The Hebrews in invok- 
ing blessings on a man called out 19 piov (Judg. vi. 
23 ; Dan. x. 19) ; from this is to be derived the explana- 
tion of those expressions which refer apparently to the 
Messianie blessings (see 4 below): εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ 
τούτῳ, let peace, blessedness, come to this household, Lk. 
x. 53 υἱὸς εἰρήνης, worthy of peace [cf. W. $34, 3 N. 2; 
B. 161 sq. (141) ], Lk. x. 6; ἐλθέτω ἡ εἰρήνη ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, let 
the peace which ye wish it come upon it, i. e. be its lot, 
Mt. x. 13; to the same purport ézavazr. ἡ eip. ip. ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν, 
Lk. x. 65 ἡ eip. ip. πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστραφήτω, let your peace 
return to you, because it could not rest upon it, i. e. let 
it be just as if ye had not uttered the wish, Mt. x. 13. 
4. spec. the Messiah’s peace: Lk. ii. 14 ; ὁδὸς εἰρήνης, the 
way that leads to peace (salvation), Lk. i. 79; eip. ἐν 
οὐρανῷ, peace, salvation, is prepared for us in heaven, 
Lk. xix. 38; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἰρήνην, Acts x. 36. 5. ace. 
to a conception distinctly peculiar to Christianity, the 
tranquil state of a soul assured of its salvation through 
Christ, and so fearing nothing from God and content with 
its earthly lot, of whatsoever sort that is: Ro. viii. 6; ἐν 
εἰρήνῃ sc. ὄντες is used of those who, assured of salvation, 
tranquilly await the return of Christ and the transfor- 
mation of all things which will accompany that event, 
2 Pet. iii. 14; [πληροῦν πάσης . . - εἰρήνης ἐν τῷ πιστεύειν, 
Ro. xv. 13 (where L mrg. ἐν π. εἰρήνῃ) |; ἔχειν ἐν Χριστῷ 
εἰρήνην (opp. to ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ θλίψιν ἔχειν), Jn. xvi. 33; 
ἔχειν cip. πρὸς τ. θεόν, with God, Ro. v. 1, (eip. πρός τινα, 
Plat. rep. ὅ p. 465 b.; cf. Diod. 21, 12; [cf Mey. οὐ Ro. 
l.c. ; W. 186 (175); 406 (879)]); εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἰρήνην, 
Ro. x. 15 [R G Tr mrg. in br.] ; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς εἰρήνης; 
Eph. vi. 15 ; in the expression εἰρήνην ἀφίημι κτλ. Jn. xiv. 
27,in which Christ, with allusion to the usual Jewish 
formula at leave-taking (see 3 above), says that he not 
merely wishes, but gives peace; ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
which comes from Christ, Col. iii. 15 [ Rec. θεοῦ]; τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Phil. iv. 7, [cf W. 186 (175)]. Comprehensively of 
every kind of peace (blessing), yet with a predominance 
apparently of the notion of peace with God, εἰρήνη is used 
—in the salutations of Christ after his resurrection, εἰρήνη 
ὑμῖν (039 piov), Lk. xxiv. 36 [T om. WH reject, the 
cl.] ; Jn. xx. 19, 21, 26 ; in the phrases 6 κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης; 
the Lord who is the author and promoter of peace, 2 
Th. iii. 16; ὁ θεὸς τῆς eip. Ro. xv. 33; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 

1; Phil. iv. 9; 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. xiii. 20; in the salu- 
tations at the beginning and the close of the apostolic 
Epp.: Ro. i. 7; 1 Co. i. 3; 2Co. i. 2; Gal. i. 8; vi. 16; 
Eph. i. 2; vi. 23; Phil. i. 2; Col. i. 2; 1 Thi. 1; 2 Th. 
i. 2; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim.i. 2; Tit.i.4; [Philem. 3]; 
1 Pet.i. 2; v. 14; 2 Pet.i.2; 2Jn.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); [Jude 
2]; Rev. i 4. Cf. Kling in Herzog iv. p. 596 sq. s..v. 
Friede mit Gott; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 83 b.; 
[ Otto in the Jahrbb. für deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678 
sqq.; ef. W. 549 (511)]. 6. of the blessed state of 
devout and upright men after death (Sap. iii. 3): Ro. 
ii. 10." 

εἰρηνικός, -ἦ,-όν, 1. relating to peace: ἐπιστῆμαι, the 
arts of peace, Xen. oec. 1, 17; ἔργα, ibid. 6, 1; χρεῖαι; 


εἰρηνοποιέω 


Diod. 5, 31; often in 1 Macc. 2. peaceable, pacific, 
loving peace: Jas. iii. 17; (Plat., Isoc., al. ; Sept.). 3. 
bringing peace with it, peaceful, salutary, (see εἰρήνη, 3) : 
Heb. xii. 11.* : 

εἰρηνο-ποιέω, -à: [1 aor. εἰρηνοποίησα) ; (εἰρηνοποιός); 
to make peace, establish harmony: Col. 1. 20. (Prov. x. 
10; in Mid., Hermes ap. Stob. eclog. ph. 1, 52 [984].)* 

εἰρηνοποιός, -óv, masc. a peace-maker (Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 
4; Dio Cass.) ; pacific, loving peace: Mt. v. 9; [others 
(cf. A. V.) dispute this secondary meaning ; see Meyer 
ad loc.].* 

elpo, fut. ἐρῶ, see εἶπον. 

els, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting 
entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, 
Jor, among. It is used 

A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, 
coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, 
throwing, sending, ete. ; 1. of a place entered, or 
of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands be- 
fore nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or 
one in which an object can be hidden: as eis (τὴν) πόλιν, 
Mt. xxvi. 18; xxvii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; eis τ. 
οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 
23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; 
ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, Jn. i. 
9; iii. 19, etc.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; 
.drroÜrkgv, Mt. iii. 12; eis rà ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας 
or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc. ; eis ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 
9 ; eis wip, Mk. ix. 22, etc. ; εἰς αὐτόν, of a demon entering 
the body of a man, Mk. ix. 25. with acc. of pers. (Germ. 
zu jemand hinein), into the house of one (cf. Kühner 
§ 432, 1, 1 a.; [Jelf $ 625, 1a.]): eis τὴν Λυδίαν, Acts 
xvi. 40 Rec., but here more correctly πρός with GL T Tr 
WH; cf. W. $ 49, a, a. (eis ἐμαυτόν, Sap. viii. 18). γίνομαι 
eis with acc. of place, see γίνομαι, ὅσ. — b. before names 
of cities, villages, and countries, eis may be rendered 
simply to, towards, (Germ. nach ; as if it indicated merely 
motion towards a destination; [οἵ. W. $ 49, a, a.]); as 
εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, eis Δαμασκόν, els Βέροιαν, etc. ; eig Σπανίαν, 
Αἴγυπτον, Ταλιλαίαν, ete. ; but itis not to be so translated 
in such phrases as eis τὴν Ιουδαίαν γῆν, etc., Jn. iii. 22 ; 
Mt. ii. 12 cf. 20, 21; eis rà μέρη τῆς Γαλιλαίας, Mt. ii. 
ete. 





22, 
c. elliptical expressions are — eis ἄδου, sc. δόμον, 
Acts ii. 27 [Rec.], 31 [not T WH]; see ays, 2. ἐπιστολαὶ 
eis Δαμασκόν, to be carried to D., Acts ix. 2; ἡ διακονία 


pou ἡ εἰς [L Tr mrg. ἐν] Ἵερουσ. (see in διακονία, 3), Ro. 


xv. 31; cf. Bnhdy. p. 216. d. eig means among (in 
among) before nouns comprising a multitude; as, εἰς 
τοὺς λῃστάς, Lk. x. 36; εἰς [L mrg. ἐπὶ] τὰς ἀκάνθας, Mk. 
iv. 7 (for which Lk. viii. 7 gives ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἀκανθῶν) ; 
or before persons, Mk. viii. 19 sq.; Lk. xi. 49; Jn. xxi. 
235 Acts’ -xvill. 6; xx. 29; xxii. 21; 30; xxvi. 17; see 
ἀποστέλλω, 1 b.; or before a collective noun in the 
singular number, as eis τὸν δῆμον, Acts xvii. 5; xix. 30; 
eis τὸν ὄχλον, Acts xiv. 14; εἰς τὸν λαόν, Actsiv.17. 2. 
Tf the surface only of the place entered is touched or 
occupied, εἰς, like the Lat. in, may [often] be rendered 
on, upon, (Germ. auf), [sometimes by unto, — (idioms 


183 





εἰς 


vary) ], to mark the limit reached, or where one sets foot. 
Of this sort are εἰς τὸ πέραν [A. V. unto], Mt. viii. 18 ; 
xiv. 22; Mk. iv. 35; εἰς τὴν γῆν, Lk. xii. 49 (L T Tr WH 
emi); Acts xxvi. 14; Rev. viii. 5,7; ix.3; xii. 4, 9; εἰς 
τὴν κλίνην, Rev. ii. 22; εἰς ὁδόν, Mt. x. 5; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. 
i 19; eis τὴν ὁδόν, Mk. xi. 8* [L mrg. ἐν w. dat., 85 RG 
L]; εἰς τ. ἀγρόν, Mt. xxii. 5; Mk. xiii. 16; εἰς τὸ ὄρος 
[or eis ὄρ.; here A. V.uses into], Mt. v. 1; xiv. 23; xv. 
29; xvii. 1; Mk.iii.13; ix. 2; Lk.ix.28; Jn. vi.3, ete.; 
εἰς rà δεξιά, Jn. xxi. 6; σπείρειν εἴς τι (τὴν σάρκα), Gal. vi. 
8 [here A. V. unto; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; ἀναπίπτειν εἰς 
τύπον, Lk. xiv. 10; δέχομαι eis τὰς ἀγκάλας, Lk. ii. 28 ; 
τύπτειν eis τὴν κεφαλήν, Mt. xxvii. 30, [eis τὴν σιαγόνα, 
Lk. vi. 29 Tdf.; ῥαπίζειν εἰς τ. σιαγόνα, Mt. v. 39 L T Tr 
txt. WH, where RG ἐπί], and in other phrases. 3. 
of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity 
of a place; where it may be rendered to, near, towards, 
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 81 sq. [for exx. only]) : εἰς r. 
θάλασσαν, Mk.iii. 7G L T Tr mrg.; eis πόλιν, Jn. iv. 5 cf. 
28; εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, Jn. xi. 31, 38; xx. 1, 3 sq. 8; ἐγγίζειν 
eis etc. Mt. xxi. 1; Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xviii. 35; xix. 29; eis 
τοὺς φραγμούς, Lk. xiv. 23; πίπτειν eis τ. πόδας, at, Jn. xi. 32 
[T Tr WH πρός]; kMvew τὸ πρόσωπον eis τ. γῆν, Lk. xxiv. 
5; els τὴν χεῖρα, on, Lk. xv. 22. 4. of the limit to 
which; with ace. of place, as far as, even to: λάμπειν 
. eis, Lk. xvii. 24; with ace. plur. of pers. to, unto: 
Acts xxiii. 15 (eis ὑμᾶς, for RG πρός) ; Ro. v. 12; xvi. 19; 
2 Co. ix. 5 [L Tr πρός]; x. 14. 5. of local direc- 
tion; a. after verbs of seeing: ἐπαίρειν τοὺς ὀφθαὰλ- 
μοὺς εἴς τι, τινα, Lk. vi. 20; βλέπειν, Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 
22; Acts iii. 4; ἀναβλέπειν, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16; 
Acts xxii. 13; ἐμβλέπειν, Mt. vi. 26; ἀτενίζειν, q.v. — b. 
after verbs of saying, teaching, announcing, 
ete. (cf. Germ. die Rede richten an οἷο. Lat. dicere ad 
or coram; [Eng. direct one's remarks to or towards]; 
exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Bnhdy. p. 217; Passow 
i. p. 802^; [L. and S. s. v. I. b. 3]; Krüger § 68, 21, 6): 
κηρύσσειν, às ἦν κηρύσσων els Tas συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς 
ὅλην τὴν Ταλιλ. preaching to the synagogues throughout all 
Galilee, Mk. i. 39 (Ree. ἐν ταῖς συναγ., as Lk. iv. 44 
[where T WH Tr txt. now eis; cf. W. 416 (387); B.333 
(287); but in Mk. 1. c. T Tr txt. WH now read ἦλθεν 
κηρύσσων krÀ.]) ; τὸ εὐαγγ.- els ὅλον τ. κόσμον. Mk. xiv. 9; 
els πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, Mk. xiii. 10; Lk. xxiv. 47; eis ὑμᾶς, 1 
Th. ii. 9; ἀπαγγέλλειν [Rec. dvayy.] τι eis, Mk. v. 14; Lk. 
Vili. 34; γνωρίζειν, Ro. xvi. 26; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, 2 Co. x. 
16; eis ὑμᾶς, 1 Pet. i. 25; λέγειν [ Rec. ; al. λαλεῖν] eis τὸν. 
κόσμον, Jn. viii. 26; [λαλεῖν τὸν λόγον eis τὴν Πέργην, Acts 
xiv. 25 T WH mrg.]; διαμαρτύρεσθαι and μαρτυρεῖν, Acts 
xxiii. 11. 

II. of Time; 1. it denotes entrance into a 
period which is penetrated, as it were, i. e. duration 
through a time, (Lat. in; Germ. Ainein, hinaus) : els τὸν 
αἰῶνα, and the like, see αἰών, 1 a.; eis τὸ διηνεκές, Heb. 
vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14; eis ἔτη πολλά, Lk. xii. 19; τῇ ἐπι- 
φωσκούσῃ (ἡμέρᾳ) eis μίαν σαββάτων, dawning into [ A. V. 
towards] the first day of the week, Mt. xxviii. 1. Hence 
2. of the time in which a thing is done; because he 


B 
εκ .. 


> 
εἰς 


who does or experiences a thing at any time is conceived 
of as, so to speak, entering into that time: εἰς τὸν καιρὸν 
αὐτῶν, in their season, Lk. i. 20; εἰς τὸ μέλλον se. ἔτος, 
the next year, [but 5, v. μέλλω, 1. Grimm seems to take 
the phrase indefinitely, thenceforth (ef. Grk. txt.) ], Lk. 
xiii. 9; els τὸ μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next sabbath, Acts 
xiii.42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν, azain (for the second, third, time), 
2 Co. xiii. 2. 3. of the (temporal) limit for which 
anything is or is done; Lat. in; our for, unto: Rev. 
ix. 15; eis τὴν αὔριον sc. ἡμέραν, for the morrow, Mt. vi. 
34; Actsiv.3; εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως, 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7; εἰς 
ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ, Phil. i. 10; ii. 16; εἰς ἡμέραν ἀπολυτρώ- 
σεως, Eph. iv. 30. 4. of the (temporal) limit to 
which; unto i. e. even to, until: Acts xxv. 21; 1 'Th. iv. 
15; els ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν, 2 Tim. i. 12. On the phrase 
εἰς τέλος, see τέλος, 1 a. 

B. Used METAPHORICALLY, eis I. retains the force 
of entering into anything, 1. where one thing is 
said to be changed into another, or to be separated into 
parts, or where several persons or things are said to be 
collected or combined into one, οἷο. : ἀποβαίνειν ets τι, 
Phil. i. 19; γίνεσθαι εἴς τι, see γίνομαι, 5 d.; εἶναι εἴς τι, 
see εἰμί, V. 2 [a. fin.] c. and d.; στρέφειν τι εἴς τι, Rev. 
xi. 6; μεταστρέφειν, Acts ii. 20; Jas. iv. 9; μεταλλάσσειν, 
Ro. i. 26; μετασχηματίζεσθαι, 2 Co. xi. 13 sq.; συνοικο- 
δομεῖσθαι, Eph. ii. 22; κτίζειν τινὰ eis, Eph. ii. 15; λαμ- 
Bavew τι eis, Heb. xi. 8; λογίζεσθαι εἴς τι, see λογίζομαι, 
la. ἐσχίσθη εἰς δύο, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38, (Polyb. 
2, 16, 11 σχίζεται εἰς δύο μέρη) : δέειν εἰς Seopas, Mt. xiii. 
30 [ἃ om. Tr WH br. eis]; εἰς év τελειοῦσθαι, Jn. xvii. 
23; συνάγειν εἰς €v, Jn. xi. 2. 2. after verbs of going, 
coming, leading, ete., εἰς is joined to nouns desig- 
nating the condition or state into which one passes, 
falls, ete. : εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς THY βασιλ. τῶν οὐραν. or τοῦ θεοῦ, 
see βασιλεία, 3 p. 97; εἰς τ. ζωήν, Mt. xviii. 8; xix. 17; 
xxv. 46; εἰς r. χαράν, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; eis κόλασιν αἰώνιον, 
ib. 46; ἔρχεσθαι eis κρίσιν, Jn. v. 24; εἰσφέρειν, εἰσέρχ. 
εἰς πειρασμόν, Mt. vi 13; xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WH 
ἔλθητε] ; ἔρχεσθαι eis τὸ χεῖρον, Mk. v. 26 ; εἰς ἀπελεγμόν, 
Acts xix. 27; εἷς προκοπήν, Phil. i. 12; μεταβαίνειν eis τ. 
ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; πορεύεσθαι εἰς θάνατον, Lk. 
xxii. 33; ὑπάγειν els ἀπώλειαν, Rev. xvii. 8, 11; ὑπάγειν 
or πορεύεσθαι els εἰρήνην, see εἰρήνη. 3; ὑποστρέφειν εἰς 
διαφθοράν, Acts xiii. 34; συντρέχειν εἰς ἀνάχυσιν, 1 Pet. 
iv. 4; βάλλειν εἰς θλίψιν, Rev. ii. 22; περιτρέπειν εἰς 
μανίαν, Acts xxvi. 24; μεταστρέφειν and στρέφειν εἴς τι, 
Acts ii. 20; Rev. xi. 6; ὁδηγεῖν εἰς τ. ἀλήθειαν [ T. ἐν τῇ aA.], 
Jn. xvi. 13; αἰχμαλωτίζειν εἰς ὑπακοήν, 2 Co. x. 5; παρα- 
διδόναι cis θλίψιν, Mt. xxiv. 9; εἰς θάνατον, 2 Co. iv. 11; 
εἰς κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 20; συγκλείειν εἰς ἀπείθειαν, 
Ro. xi. 32; ἐμπίπτειν εἰς κρίμα, εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν καὶ παγίδα, 
εἰς πειρασμόν, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; vi. 9. 3.-it is used of 
the business which one enters into, i. e. of what he 
undertakes : εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τ. κόπον τινός. to take up and 
carry on a labor begun by another, Jn. iv. 38; τρέχειν 
εἰς πόλεμον, Rev. ix. 9; ἔρχομαι εἰς ἀποκαλύψεις, I come, 
in my narrative, to revelations i. e. to the mention of 
them, 2 Co. xii. 1. 








184 els 


II. εἰς after words indicating motion or direc- 
tion or end; 1. it denotes motion to something, 
after verbs of going, coming, leading, calling, ete., and 
answers to the Lat. ad, to: καλεῖν twa εἰς γάμον, γάμους, 
δεῖπνον, etc. to invite to, etc., Mt. xxii. 3 ; Lk. xiv. 8, 10; 
Jn. ii. 25; καλεῖν τινα εἰς μετάνοιαν, etc., Lk. v. 32; 2 Th. 
H. 145 ἄγειν τινὰ eis μετάνοιαν, Ro. ij. 4; ἐπιστρέφειν eis 
τὸ φῶς, Acts xxvi. 18; ἐκτρέπεσθαι εἰς ματαιολογίαν, 1 
Tim. i. 6 ; μετατίθεσθαι εἰς ἕτερον εὐαγγέλ. Gal. i. 6; χωρῆ- 
σαι εἰς μετάνοιαν, 2 Pet. iii. 9, ete. 2. of ethical di- 
rection or reference; a. univ. of acts in which the 
mind is directed towards, or looks to, something : βλέπειν 
els πρόσωπόν twos (see BAémo,2c.); ἀποβλέπειν els τ. 
μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. xi. 26; ἀφορᾶν eis... Ἰησοῦν, ib. 
xii. 2 (see A. 1. 5 a. above); πιστεύειν ets τινα, and the. 
like, cf. under πιστεύω, πίστις, ἐλπίζω, [ἐλπίς], ete. 5 exc 
θυμίαν ἔχειν εἴς τι, directed towards ete. Phil. i. 23; 
λέγειν εἴς τινα, to speak with reference to one, Acts ii. 25 
(Diod. Sie. 11, 50); λέγειν τι εἴς τι, to say something 
in reference to something, Eph. v. 32; λαλεῖν τι ets τι; 
to speak something relating to something, Heb. vii. 14; 
ὀμνύειν ets τι, to swear with the mind directed towards, 
Mt. v. 35; εὐδοκεῖν ets τινα, Mt. xii. 18 [RG]; 2 Pet. 1. 
17. b. forone's advantage or disadvantage; a. 
for, for the benefit of, to the advantage of: εἰς ἡμᾶς, Eph. 
i. 19; εἰς ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but WH br.]; Eph. iii. 2; 
Col. i. 25; πλουτεῖν eis θεόν, to abound in riches made 
to subserve God's purposes and promote his glory, Lk. 
xii. 21 [so too W. 397 (371); but cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad 
loc.]; Christ is said πλουτεῖν eis πάντας, to abound in 
riches redounding to the salvation of all men, Ro. x. 12; 
πλεονάζειν εἴς τι, Phil. iv. 17; ἐλεημοσύνην ποιεῖν εἰς TO 
ἔθνος, Acts xxiv. 17; εἰς τοὺς πτωχούς, for the benefit 
of the poor, Ro. xv. 26; εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; ix. 
1, cf. 13: κοπιᾶν εἴς twa, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11 : εἰς Χριστόν, 
to the advantage and honor of Christ, Philem. 6; epyd- 
ζεσθαί τι εἴς twa, Mk. xiv. 6 Rec.; 3 Jn. 5; λειτουργὸς εἰς 
τὰ ἔθνη, Ro. xv. 16 ; γενόμενα eis Καφαρναούμ (for Rec. 
ἐν Καπερναούμ [cf. W. 416 (388) ; B. 333 (286)]), Lk. 
iv. 93. β. unto in a disadvantageous sense, (against) : 
μηδὲν ἄτοπον eis αὐτὸν γενόμενον, Acts xxviii. 6. ὁ. of 
the mood orinclination, affecting one towards any 
person or thing; of one's mode of action towards; 
a. in a good sense: ἀγάπη ets τινα, unto, towards, one, 
Ro. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 4,8; Col. i.4, 1 Th. iii. 12; τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς 
ἀλλήλους φρονεῖν, Ro. xii. 16; φιλόστοργος, ib. 10; φιλό-- 
Éevos, 1 Pet. iv. 9; χρηστός, Eph. iv. 32; amokaraA- 
λάσσειν els αὑτόν [al. abr. see αὑτοῦ], Col. i. 20 [ef. W. 
397(371)]. β. ina bad sense: ἁμαρτάνειν εἴς τινα (see 
ἁμαρτάνω, b.) ; λόγον εἰπεῖν and βλασφημεῖν ets τινα, Lk. 
xii. 10; Mk. iii. 29; βλάσφημος εἴς τινα, Acts vi. 11; 
βλασφημῶν λέγω ets τινα, Lk. xxii. 65 ; ἐπιβουλὴ ets τινα, 
Acts xxiii. 30; ἔχθρα, Ro. viii. 7; ἀντιλογία, Heb. xii. 
3; θαρρεῖν εἴς twa, 2 Co. x. 1. d. of reference or 
relation; with respect to, in reference to; as regards, 
(cf. Kühner ii. 408 ο.ὕ: [Jelf § 625, 3 6.7): Lk. vii. 30; 
Acts xxv. 20 [T Tr WH om. és]; Ro. iv. 20; xv. 2; 2 
Co. x. 16; xiii. 3; Gal. vi. 4; Eph. iii. 16; Phil. i. 5; ii- 


εἰς 185 eis 


22; 1 Th. v. 18; εἰς τί ἐδίστασας ; ‘ (looking) unto what 
i. e. wherefore) didst thou doubt ? Mt. xiv. 31; cf. Her- 
mann ad Oed. C. 528’ (Fritzsche). of the considera- 
tion influencing one to do anything: μετανοεῖν εἰς 
κήρυγμά τινος, at the preaching of one, i. e. out of regard 
to the substance of his preaching, Mt. xii. 41; δέχεσθαί 
twa εἰς ὄνομά τινος, Mt. x. 41 sq.; εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 
(see διαταγή), Acts vii. 93. 6. with acc. of the pers. 
towards (Germ. nach einem hin), but in sense nearly 
equiv. to the simple dat. to, unto, after verbs of ap prov- 
ing, manifesting, showing one's self: ἀποδεδειγ- 
μένος eis ὑμᾶς, Acts ii. 22 ; ἔνδειξιν ἐνδείκνυσθαι, 2 Co. viii. 
24; φανερωθέντες cis ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. xi. 6 (L T Tr WH φανε- 
ρώσαντες SC. τὴν γνῶσιν). 3. it denotes the end; 
and a. the end to which a thing reaches or extends, 
i.e.measure or degree: [ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, Mk. iv. 
8T Trtxt. WH; cf. B. 30 (27); L. and S. s. v. A. III. 
2]; eis rà ἄμετρα, 2 Co. x. 135 eis περισσείαν, 2 Co. x. 15; 
eis ὑπερβολήν (often in Grk. writ, as Eur. Hipp. 939 ; 
Aeschin. f. lez. $ 4), 2 Co. iv. 17. of the limit: eis τὸ σω- 
φρονεῖν, unto moderation, modesty, i. e. not beyond it, Ro. 
xii.3. b. the end which athing isadaptedtoattain 
(a use akin to that in B. IL. 2 b.; [cf. W. 213 (200)]): 
ἀργὸς k. ἄκαρπος ets τι, 2 Pet. 1. 8; εὔθετος, Lk. ix. 62 RG; 
xiv. 35 (34) ; εὔχρηστος, 2 Tim. iv. 11; χρήσιμος, 2 Tim. 
ii. 14 RG, dvvapovpevos, Col. i. 11; θεοδίδακτος, 1 Th. iv. 
9; βραδύς, Jas. i. 19; σοφός, Ro. xvi. 19; φῶς eis ἀποκά- 
λυψιν, Lk. ii. 32 ; δύναμις εἰς etc. Ro. i. 16; Heb. xi. 11; 
dvayevvay eis, 1 Pet. i. 3 sq.; ἀνακαινόω, Col. iii. 10; σο- 
φίζειν twa εἰς, 2 Tim. iii. 15; ἰσχύειν εἰς, Mt. v. 18. c. 
the end which one has in view, i.e. object, purpose; 
a. associated with other prepositions [cf. W. § 50,5]: ἐκ 
πίστεως eis πίστιν, to produce faith, Ro.i. 17, cf. Fritzsche, 
Meyer, Van Hengel, ad loc. ; ἐξ αὐτοῦ καὶ δ αὐτοῦ καὶ εἰς 
αὐτόν, answering to his purposes (the final cause), Ro. xi. 
36 ; ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν, 1 Co. viii. 6; δ αὐτοῦ 
καὶ εἰς αὐτόν (see διά, A. IIT. 2 b. sub fin.), Col. i. 16; 
6¢ αὐτοῦ eis αὑτόν, Col. i. 20. f. shorter phrases: εἰς 
τοῦτο, to this end, Mk. i. 38; [Lk. iv. 43 RG Tr mrz.]: 
eis αὐτὸ τοῦτο [ R. V. for this very thing], 2 Co. v. 5; εἰς 
ToUTO .. . wa ete. Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 8; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 
Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 6; εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο... ὅπως etc. Ro. 
ix. 17; tva, Col. iv. 8; Eph. vi. 22 ; eis ri, to what purpose, 
Mt. xxvi. 8; Mk. xiv. 4; eis 6, to which end, for which 
cause, 2 Th. i.11; Col. 1. 39. y. univ.: βαπτίζω ets τινα, 
τι (see βαπτίζω, IL. b. aa.) ; παιδαγωγὸς eis τὸν Χριστόν, 
Gal. iii. 24; συγκεκλεισμένοι εἰς τ. πίστιν, that we might 
the more readily embrace the faith when its time should 
come, Gal. iii. 22; φρουρούμενοι eis τὴν σωτηρίαν, that 
future salvation may be yours, 1 Pet. i. 5; ἀγοράζειν εἰς 
T. ἑορτήν, Jn. xiii. 29; eis ὄλεθρον σαρκός, 1 Co. v. 5; εἰς 
τ. ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν, Ro. xv. 4, and in many other exx. 
esp. after verbs of appointing, choosing, preparing, do- 
ing, coming, sending, etc.: κεῖμαι, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. i. 17 
(16); 1 Th. iii. 3; τάσσω, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; τάσσομαι, Acts 
xiii. 48; ἀφορίζω, Ro. i. 1; Acts xiii. 2; mpoopitw, Eph. 
i 5; 1 Co. ii. 7; αἱρέομαι, 2 Th. ii. 13; τίθεμαι, 1 Tim. i. 
12; 1Pet. ii. 8; karapri(o, Ro. ix. 22 sq.; ἀποστέλλω, 





Heb. i. 14; zépzo,1 Th.iii.2, 5; Col. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 16 
[L br. eis]; 1 Pet. ii. 14; ἔρχομαι, Jn. ix. 39; ποιεῖν τι eis, 
1 Co. x. 31; xi. 24. Modelled after the Hebr. are the 
phrases, ἐγείρειν τινὰ eis βασιλέα, to be king, Acts xiii. 22; 
ἀνατρέφεσθαί twa εἰς υἱόν, Acts vii. 21; τέθεικά σε εἰς 
φῶς ἐθνῶν, Acts xiii. 47 (fr. Is. xlix. 6 Alex.); cf. Gesenius, 
Lehrgeb. p.814; B. 150 (131) ; [W. $32, 4 b.]. δ. εἴς τι; 
indicating purpose, often depends not on any one pre- 
ceding word with which it coalesces into a single phrase, 
but has the force of a telie clause added to the already 
complete preceding statement; thus, eis δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Ro. xv. 7; Phil. i. 11; ii. 11; εἰς φόβον, that ye should 
fear, Ro. viii. 15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, that he might show, Ro. 
iil. 25; εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, to procure eternal life (sc. for 
those mentioned), Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27, (in which passages 
the phrase is by many interpp. [e. g. De Wette, Mey., 
Lange; cf. W. 397 (371) note] incorrectly joined with 
ἅλλεσθαι and μένειν [cf. Thol., Luthardt, al.]); Ro. v. 
21; 1 Tim. i. 16; Jude 21; add, Mt. viii. 4; xxvii. 7; 
Mk. vi. 11; Acts xi. 18; Ro. x. 4; Phil. i. 25; ii. 16; 2 
Tim. ii. 25; Rev. xxii. 2, etc. «€. εἰς τό foll. by an inf., 
a favorite construction with Paul (cf. B. 264 (227) sq.; 
Harmsen in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874, 
pp. 345-360), is like the Lat. ad with the gerundive. It 
is of two kinds; either aa. eis τό combines with the 
verb on which it depends into a single sentence, as παρα- 
δώσουσιν αὐτὸν . . . eis τὰ ἐμπαῖξαι, (Vulg. ad deludendum), 
Mt. xx. 19; eis τὸ σταυρωθῆναι, Mt. xxvi. 2; οἰκοδομηθή- 
σεται eis τὸ Ta εἰδωλόθυτα ἐσθίειν, (Vulg. aedificabitur ad 
manducandum idolothyta), 1 Co. viii. 10; μὴ οἰκίας οὐκ 
ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν k. πίνειν, 1 Co. xi. 22; εἰς τὸ προσφέρειν 
δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίας καθίσταται, (Vulg. ad offerenda munera 
et hostias), Heb. viii. 3; add, Heb. ix. 28; 1 Th. ii. 16; 
iv. 9; Phil.i.23; or ββ. eis τό with the inf. has the 
force of a separate telic clause (equiv. to ἵνα with the 
subjune.), [Meyer (on Ro. i. 20) asserts that this is its 
uniform force, at least in Ro. (cf. his note on 2 Co. viii. 
6); on the other hand, Harmsen (τ. s.) denies the telie 
force of ets τό before an inf. Present; «f. also W. 329 
(309); esp. B. as above and p. 265 note; Ellic. on 1 
Thess. ii. 12; and see below, d. fin.]: Lk. xx. 20 
RG; Acts iii. 19 [T WH πρός]; Ro. i. 11; iv. 16, 18; 
xi. 11; xii.2; xv. 8,13; 1 Co. ix. 18; x. 6; Gal. iii. 17; 
Eph. i. 12, 18; 1 Th. ii. 12; 1650-5; 2 Th; E 57 n-9:107 
Jas.i.18; Heb. ii. 17 ; vii. 25; ix. 14, 28 ; xii. 10 ; xiii. 21; 
els τὸ μή, lest, 2 Co. iv. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 7. d. the end by 
which a thing is completed, i.e. the result or ef- 
fect: Actsx.4; Ro. vi. 19 (εἰς τ. ἀνομίαν [but WH br.], 
so that iniquity was the result); x. 10; xiii. 14; 1 Co. 
xi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 16; Eph. v. 2, ete.; εἰς τό with inf. so 
that [cf. 88. above]: Ro.i. 20; 2 Co. viii. 6. 

C. CoNsTRUCTIONS in some respects PECULIAR. 
1. Various forms of pregnant and brachylogical 
construction (W. $66, 2; [less fully, B. 327 (282)]; 
Bnhdy. p. 348 sq.) : σώζειν τινὰ eis etc. to save by trans- 
lating into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 [see σώζω, b. sub-fin.]; δια- 
σώζειν, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Sept. Gen. xix. 19, and often in 
Grk. writ.); μισθοῦσθαι ἐργάτας εἰς τ. ἀμπελῶνα, to go 


els 


into etc. Mt. xx. 1; ἐλευθεροῦν εἰς etc. Ro. viii. 215 ἀπο- 
διδόναι τινὰ εἰς Αἴγυπτον, Acts vii. 9; ἔνοχος εἰς γέενναν, 
to depart into ete. [cf. B. 170 (148) note], Mt. v. 23; κλᾶν 
εἴς twas, to break and distribute among ete. Mk. viii. 19; 
ἀσφαλίζεσθαι eis τὸ ξύλον, Acts xvi. 24; κτᾶσθαι χρυσὸν 
εἰς τ. ζώνας, Mt. x. 9; ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ἕνα τόπον, rolled 
up and laid away in ete. Jn. xx. 7. 2. Akin to this is 
the very common use of εἰς after verbs signifying rest 
or continuance in a place, because the idea of a pre- 
vious motion into the place spoken of is involved (cf. W. 
50, 4 b.; B. 332 (286) sq.; Kühner ii. p. 317; [Jelf 
646, 1]; Bnhdy. p. 215; [yet cf. also exx. in Soph. Lex. 
v. eis, 1]) : εὑρέθη eis " ACorov, sc. transferred or carried 
off to, Acts viii. 40, cf. 39 πνεῦμα κυρίου ἥρπασε τὸν Φίλιπ- 


§ 
§ 


mov, (Esth. i. 5 τοῖς ἔθνεσι τοῖς εὑρεθεῖσιν εἰς τ. πόλιν; 
so φανεῖσθαι is foll. by eis in 2 Mace. i.33; vii. 22). δεῖ 
με τὴν ἑορτὴν ποιῆσαι εἰς Ἵεροσ. sc. by going, Acts xviii. 21 
Ree. ; likewise ἑτοίμως ἔχω ἀποθανεῖν εἰς Ἵεροσ. Acts xxi. 
13 (Hoaoriov εἰς ᾿Εκβάτανα ἀπέθανε, Ael. v. h. 7, 8); 
συνέβαλεν ἡμῖν eis”"Aooov, Acts xx. 14; ἡ μέλλουσα δόξα 
εἰς ἡμᾶς ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, which shall be revealed (and 
conferred) on us, Ro. viii. 18. κατοικεῖν eis πόλιν, εἰς γῆν, 
to come into a city and dwell there, Mt. ii. 23; iv. 13; 
Acts vii. 4, [ef. Num. xxxv. 33; 2 Chr. xix.4ete.]; also 
παροικεῖν, Heb. xi. 9 (évorxeiv, Xen. an. 1, 2; 24); στῆναι, 
ἑστηκέναι (because it is nearly equiv. to to have placed 
one’s self) ets τι, Lk. vi. 8; Jn. xx. 19, 26; 1 Pet. v. 12; 
καθῆσθαι, to have gone unto a place and to be sitting 
there, Mk. xiii. 3; 2 Th. ii. 4, (on this use of these two 
verbs in Grk. auth. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1344 sq.; [cf. W. 
and B.u.s.]). εἶναι eis with ace. of place see eiut, V. 2 a.; 
οἱ els τ. οἶκόν μου sc. ὄντες, Lk. ix. 61; τοῖς εἰς μακράν sc. 
οὖσι (Germ. ins Ferne hin befindlich), Acts ii. 39. συνά- 
γεσθαι foll. by εἰς with aec. of place: to go toa place and 
assemble there, Mt. xxvi. 8 and Acts iv. 5 R T, (1 Esdr. 
v.46(47); ix. 3). Sometimesa word implying motion, 
occurring in the same sentence, seems to have occasioned 
the connection of a verb of rest with eis, as it were by 
a kind of attraction [ B. u. s.]: ἐξερχόμενος ηὐλίζετο eis τὸ 
ὄρος, Lk. xxi. 37; ἀκούσας ... ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 
[ Rec. σῖτα ἐν Αἰγ.] ἐξαπέστειλεν etc. Acts vii. 12 ; παραδώ- 
σουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια k. εἰς συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε. Mk. 
xiii. 9 [W. 416 (387), B. 333 (287)]; ὕπαγε, νίψαι [but 
L br.] εἰς v. κολυμβήθραν, Jn. ix. 7, although νίπτεσθαι 
εἴς τι can also be used (as λούεσθαι eis τὸ βαλανεῖον, Alci- 
phr. epp. 3, 43; eis λουτρῶνας, Athen. 10 p. 438 e.; λού- 
ew τινὰ eis σκάφην, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 71), since the water 
with which one bathes flows down into the pool. Cf. 
Beyer, De praepositt. eis et ἐν in N. T. permutatione. 
Lips. 1824, 4to. 

D. ApvEnBIAL Purases (cf. Matthiae § 578 d.) : 
εἰς τέλος (see τέλος, 1 a.) ; εἰς τὸ πάλιν, see A. IT. 2 above; 
εἰς τὸ παντελές, perfectly, utterly, Lk. xiii. 11 [ef. W. $51, 
lc.]; els κενόν (see κενός, 3) ; eis ὑπάντησιν and eis ἀπάν- 
Tow, see each subst. 

In eomposition eis is equiv. to the Lat. in and ad. 

els, pia, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, a cardinal numeral, 
one. Used 1. univ. a. in opp. to many; and 


186 








els 


«. added to nouns after the manner of an adjective : 
Mt. xxv. 15 (opp. to πέντε, δύο) ; Ro. v. 12 (opp. to záv- 
tes); Mt. xx. 13; xxvii. 15; Lk. xvii. 34 [but L WH br.]; 
Acts xxviii. 13; 1 Co. x. 8; Jas. iv. 13 [R G], and often; 
παρὰ μίαν sc. πληγήν [W. 589 (548); B. 82 (72)], save 
one [W. $ 49, g.], 2 Co. xi. ?4; with the article, ó eis 
ἄνθρωπος, the one man, of whom I have spoken, Ro. v. 
15. β. substantively, with a partit. gen.,—to denote 
one, whichever it may be: μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν, one command- 
ment, whichever of the whole number it may be, Mt. v. 
19; add, Mt. vi. 29; xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. xii. 27; 
xvii. 2, 22; or, that one is required to be singled out 
from a certain number: Lk. xxiii. 39; Jn. xix. 34, etc. 
foll. by ἐκ with the gen. of a noun signifying a whole, to 
denote that one of (out of) a company did this or that: 
Mt. xxii. 35; xxvi. 21; xxvii. 48; Mk. xiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 
15; Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 8, 70; xii. 2 [1 WH Tr mre. in 
br.], 4 [Tr om. ἐκ]; xiii. 21, 23 [ Rec. om. ἐκ]; xviii. 26; 
Rev. v. 5; vii. 13; ix. 135 xiii. 3[Rec. om. ἐκ]. γ. absol.: 
Mt. xxiii. 8-10; Heb. ii. 113 xi. 12; and where it takes 
the place of a predicate, Gal. iii. 20 [ef. W. 593 (551)], 
28 (ye that adhere to Christ make one person, just as 
the Lord himself); συνάγειν eis ἕν, to gather together into 
one, Jn. xi. 52; ποιεῖν τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν, Eph. ii. 14; with 
the article, 6 eis, the one, whom I have named, Ro. v. 15, 
19. b. in opp. to a division into parts, and in ethi- 
cal matters to dissensions: ἕν σῶμα, πολλὰ μέλη, Ro. 
xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12, 20; ἕν εἶναι, to be united most 
closely (in will, spirit), Jn. x. 30; xvii. 11, 21-23; ἐν ἑνὶ 
πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ, Phil. i. 27 ef. Acts iv. 32, (cf. Cic. 
Lael. 25 (92) amicitiae vis est in eo, ut unus quasi ani- 
mus fiat ex pluribus); ἀπὸ μιᾶς (see dmó, III. p. 59"), 
Lk.xiv.18. c. with a negative following joined to the 
verb, eig... οὐ Or μή, (one... not, i. e.) no one, (more 
explicit and emphatic than οὐδείς) : ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖ- 
ται, Mt. x. 29; besides, Mt. v. 18; Lk. xi. 46 ; xii. 6; this 
usage is not only Hebraistie (as that language has no 
particular word to express the notion of none), but also 
Greek (Arstph. eccl. 153; thesm. 549; Xen. an. 5, 6, 12; 
Dion. Hal. verb. comp. 18, ete.), cf. W. 172 (163) ; [ B. 
121 (106)]. 2. emphatically, so that others are 
excluded, and eis is the same as — a. a single (Lat. unus 
i. q. unicus) ; joined to nouns: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. viii. 14 
(οὐκ... ei μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον); Mk. xii. 6 ; Lk. xii. 52; Jn. xi. 
50; vii. 21; 1 Co. xii. 19; Eph. iv.5,etc.; absol: 1 Co. 
ix. 24; 2 Oo. v. 14 (15); 1 Tim. ii. 5; Jas. iy. 12, etc. ; 
οὐδὲ εἷς, not even one: Mt. xxvii. 14 ; Jn. i. 35 Acts iv. 
32; Ro. iii. 10; 1 Co. vi. 5 [R 61; οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός [there 
is not so much as one], Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3; 
cf. Lat. omnes ad unum, all to a man. Neut. ἕν, one thing, 
exclusive of the rest; one thing before all others: Mk. x. 
21; Lk. xviii. 22; x. 42 [but WH only txt.]; Jn. ix. 25; 
Phil. iii. 13 (14); Jas.ii. 10. ^b. alone: οὐδεὶς . . . €i μὴ 
εἷς ὁ θεός, Mk. ii. 7 (for which in Lk. v. 21 μόνος ὁ θεός); 
Mk. x. 18; Lk.xviii. 19. ὁ. one and the same (not at 
variance with, in accord with one’s self): Ro. iii. 30; 
Rey. xvii. 13, 17 [Lom.]; xviii. 8; τὸ ἕν φρονεῖν, Phil. 
ii. 2 [WH mrg. αὐτό]; ἕν εἶναι are one, i.e. are of the 


εἷς 


same importance and esteem, 1 Co. iii. 8; εἰς τὸ ἕν εἶναι 
(see εἰμί, V. 2 d.), 1 Jn. v. 8; more fully τὸ ἕν καὶ τὸ αὐτό, 
1 Co. xii. 11; ἐν καὶ τὸ αὐτό τινι, 1 Co. xi. 5. 3. the 
numerical force of εἷς is often so weakened that it hardly 
differs from the indef. pron. ris, or from our indef. article 
(W. 117 (111). [cf. 29 note 2; B. 85 (74)]): Mt. viii. 19 
(εἷς γραμματεύς) ; xix. 16; xxvi. 69; Jn. vi. 9 (παιδάριον 
év, where T Tr WH om. and L br. &) ; Rev. viii. 13; ix. 
13, (Arstph. av. 1292; Xen. mem. 3, 3, 12; Plat. de rep. 
6 p. 494 d.; lege. 9 p. 855 d., etc.; esp. later writ. ; 
[Tob. i. 19; ii. 3; 3 Esdr. iv. 18; Gen. xxi. 15; 2 S. ii. 
18; Judith xiv. 6]; so the Hebr. 148, Dan. viii. 3; Gen. 
MMS IS. ipl Recor (xx.) 13; see Gesenius, 
Lehrgeb. p. 655); eis τις (Lat. unus aliquis), a certain 
one; one, I know not who; one who need not be named: 
with a subst. Mk. xiv. 51 (L Tr WH om. eis); or foll. 
by a gen. Mk. xiv. 47 where L Tr om. WH br. tis; foll. 
by ἐκ, ἐξ, with gen.: Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xi. 49, (ἕν τι τῶν 
ῥημάτων, Judith ii. 13, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Wet- 
stein on Mk. xiv. 51; Matthiae § 487). 4. it is used 
distributively [ W. $ 26, 2; esp. B. 102 (90)]; 
kai εἷς, one... and one: Mt. xvii. 4; xx. 21; xxiv. 40 L T 
Tr WH, 41; xxvii. 38; Mk.iv. S(R GL WH mrz.], 20 
[RG L Tr mrg. WH mrg. in br.]; ix. 5; x. 37; xv. 27 ; Lk. 
ix. 33; Jn. xx. 12; Gal. iv. 22; (in Grk. auth. εἷς μὲν... εἷς 
δέ, as Aristot. eth. 6, 1, 5; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4); with the art. 
prefixed, 6 εἷς the one, Lk. xxiv. 18 R G ; foll. by 6 εἷς, the 
one... the other, Mt. xxiv. 40 RG; foll. by 6 érepos, Mt. 
vi. 24: Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 13>; xvii. 34 R WH; xviii. 10 
RG TWH mrg.; Acts xxiii. 6; εἷς (without the art.) 
«ον 6 ἕτερος : Lk. xvi. 13°; xvii. 84 G L T Tr; xviii. 10 
L Tr WH txt.; πέντε. - ὁ ἄλλος, Rey. xvii. 10. 
b. εἷς ἕκαστος, every one: Actsii. 6; xx. 31; Eph. iv. 16; 
Col. iv. 6; foll. by a partit. gen.: Lk. iv. 40; xvi. 5; Acts 
1i. 3; xvii. 27; xxi. 26; 1Co. xii. 18; Eph. iv. 7; 1 Th. 
li. 11; ef. B. 102 (89) sq.; ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος (see dvd, 2), 
Rev. xxi. 21. ὁ. a solecism, com. in later Grk. (cf. 
Leian. soloec. [Pseudosoph.] $ 9; W.$37,3; B. 30 (26) 
sq.; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 613 sq.; [.SopA. Lex. s. v. kaOeis]), 
is καθ᾽ cis, and in combination καθεῖς, (so that either κατά 
is used adverbially, or εἷς as indeclinable): ὁ καθ᾽ eis, i. q. 
εἷς ἕκαστος, Ro. xii. 5 (where L T Tr WH τὸ καθ᾽ eis, as 
respects each one, severally ; cf. what is said against this 
reading by Fritzsche, Com. iii. p. 44 sq., and in its favor 
by Meyer); with a partit. zen. 3 Mace. v. 34; εἷς καθ᾽ 
[T WH Tr mrg. κατὰ ] cis, every one, one by one, Mk. xiv. 
19; Jn. viii. 9; καθ᾽ ἕνα, καθ᾽ ἕν, (as in Grk. writ.), of a 
series, one by one, successively: καθ᾽ ἕν, all in succession, 
Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1 Co. xiv. 31 
(Xen. venat. 6, 14) ; καθ᾽ ἕν ἕκαστον, Acts xxi. 19 (Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 6, 22 (27); Ages. 7, 1) ; ὑμεῖς of καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστος, 
ye severally, every one, Eph. v. 33. 5. like the Hebr. 
Mk, εἷς is put for the ordinal πρῶτος, first [W. § 37, 1; 
B. 29 (26)]: μία σαββάτων the first day of the week, Mt. 
xxvii.1; Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx. 1, 19; Acts 
xx. 7; 1 Co. xvi. 2 [L T Tr WH μία σαββάτου] ; (in Grk. 
writ. so used only when joined with other ordinal num- 
bers, as εἷς kai τριηκοστός, Hdt. 5, 89; Diod. 16, 71. Cic. 


Ek ahs ac 


e ee 
~ OES... 


18 








7 εἰσέρχομαι 


[C£. Soph. Lex. 


de senect. 5 uno et octogesimo anno. 
5. v.])- 

εἰσ-άγω : 2 aor. εἰσήγαγον ; [pres. pass. εἰσάγομαι] ; [fr. 
Hom. down]; Sept. chiefly for 3720; 1. to lead in: 
twa foll. by eis with ace. of place, Lk. xxii. 54 [Tr mrg. 
br.]; Acts ix. 8; xxi. 28, 29, 37; xxii. 24 (for Rec. aye- 
σθαι); ὧδε, Lk. xiv. 21; the place into which not being 
expressly noted: Jn. xviii. 16 (se. εἰς τὴν αὐλήν) ; Heb. i. 
6 ὅταν... . εἰσαγάγῃ; λέγει, God, having in view the time 
when he shall have again brought in the first-born into the 
world (i. 6. at the time of the παρουσία) says ete. 2 
io bring in, the place into which not being expressly 
stated: Acts vii. 45 (sc. eis τὴν γῆν); Lk. ii. 27 (sc. eis 
τὸ ἱερόν). [Cowr.: map-ewáyo.] * 

εἰσ-ακούω : fut. εἰσακούσομαι; Pass., 1 aor. εἰσηκούσθην; 
1 fut. εἰσακουσθήσομαι ; Sept. very often for pow, but 
also for 73)? to answer; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 8, 97 
down ; to hearken unto, to give ear to; i. e. 1. to give 
heed to, comply with, admonition; to obey (Lat. obedio 
i. e. ob-audio) : τινός, 1 Co. xiv. 21, (Deut. i. 43 ; ix. 23; 
Sir. iii. 6, ete.). 2. to listen to, assent to, a request; 
pass. to be heard, to have one's request granted; a. of 
persons offering up prayers to God: Heb. v. 7 (on which 
see ἀπό, I. 3 d. fin.) ; Mt. vi. 7. b. of the prayers offered 
up: Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 31, (Ps. iv. 2; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 
29 (26), etc.).* 

εἰσ-δέχομαι : fut. εἰσδέξομαι ; to receive kindly, i. e. con- 
textually, to treat with favor: twa, 2 Co. vi. 17. [From 
Pind. and Soph. down. Syn. cf. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

εἴσ-ειμι, inf. εἰσιέναι ; impf. εἰσήειν; (εἶμι [cf. B. 50 
(43)]); [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, enter: foll. by εἰς 
with the name of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. 
Pt. ii. p. 11), Acts 111. 3; xxi. 26; Heb. ix. 6 [W. 267 
(251)]; πρός τινα, Acts xxi. 18.* 

εἰσ-έρχομαι ; fut. εἰσελεύσομαι ; 2 aor. εἰσῆλθον, 2 pers. 
plur. εἰσήλθατε (Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -dere), impv. εἰσέλθατε 
(Mt. vii. 13 but RG -6ere, [3d pers. sing. -θάτω Mk. xiii. 
15, RG -6éro]) ; see ἀπέρχομαι, init.; pf. εἰσελήλυθα, 3 
pers. plur. εἰσελήλυθαν (Jas. v. 4, for RG εἰσεληλύθασιν, 
see γίνομαι, init.); Sept. mostly for N13; fo go or come 
into or in; to enter ; 1. prop., of men and of animals: 
foll. by eis with specifieation of the place (cf. Win. De 
verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq.), as into a house, 
into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts 
xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place, 
— when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix. 
25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.]; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 cf. 
25; xxiv. 3; Acts i. 13; v. 7,10; x. 25 ; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq.; 
or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii. 
24; xvii. 7; eig is also added to signify among: Acts 
xix. 30; xx. 29; εἰσέρχ. Sea twos, to enter (a place) 
through something: διὰ τῆς πύλης, to enter the king- 
dom of God (compared to a palace) through the gate, 
Mt. vii. 13; Lk. xiii. 24; διὰ τῆς θύρας eis τ. αὐλήν, Jn. 
x. 1 sq. ; add, Mt. xix. 24 GT Tr txt. WH txt. ; [Mk. x. 
25 R* Lmrg. Tr mrg.]; Lk. xviii. 25 RG T Tr txt. WH; 
εἰσέρχ. ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην, by entering to come under the 
roof, i. e. enter my house, Mt. viii. 8; with adverbs: 


εἰσέρχομαι 


ὅπου, Mk. xiv. 14; Heb. vi. 20; ὧδε, Mt. xxii. 12; ἔσω, 
Mt. xxvi. 58; εἰς with ace. of pers., into one’s house, 
Acts xvi. 40, but on this pass. see eis, A. I. 1a. εἰσέρχ. πρός 
τινα, to one, i.e. into his house, visit, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. i. 
28; Acts x. 3; xi. 8; xvi. 40 GL TTrWH; xxviii. 8; 
Rev. iii. 20; to an assembly of persons, Acts xvii. 2. 
Moreover the following deserve notice: a. the phrase 
εἰσέρχεσθαι καὶ ἐξέρχεσθαι, to go in and out, (the Hebr. 
DNY) Nj3, or reversed Nj3} ANY, usually denotes one's 
whole mode of living and acting, Deut. xxviii. 6; 1 S. 
xxix. 6, ete.; cf. Gesenius, "Thesaur. i. p. 184 sq.), is used 
of familiar intercourse with one : ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ à εἰσῆλθε 


188 


x. ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ὁ κύριος. equiv. to εἰσῆλθε ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς κι | 


ἐξῆλθε ap ἡμ- Acts i. 21, (Eur. Phoen. 536 és οἴκους εἰσῆλθε 
k. ἐξῆλθ᾽ [W. 634 sq. (580); but cf. B. 390 (334)]); fig- 
uratively, of moral pursuits unimpeded by difficulties, 
Jn. x. 9. 
ing not a place, but what occurs in a place: eis τοὺς 
γάμους, Mt. xxv. 10; eis τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου, 21, 23. c. 
εἰσελθεῖν εἴς τινα is used of demons or of Satan taking 
possession of the body of a person: Mk. ix. 25; Lk. viii. 
30; xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27. d. of things: —as of food, that 
enters into the eater's mouth, Mt. xv. 11; Acts xi. 8; 
figuratively, hope is called ἄγκυρα εἰσερχομένη eis τὸ ἐσώ- 
τερον To) καταπετάσματος, i.e. we firmly rely on the hope 
that we shall be received into heaven, Heb. vi. 19; cries 
of complaint are said εἰσέρχ. eis rà ὦτά τινος, i. e. to be 
heard, Jas. v. 4; of forces and influences: πνεῦμα ζωῆς 
εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (Tr om. WH br. ἐν; Ree. ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς 
[B. 338 (291) ]), a pregnant construction, the breath of life 
entered into and remained in them, Rev. xi. 11 [W. $50, 
4; B. 329 (283)]. 2. Metaph. used, a. of entrance 
into any condition, state of things, society, employment : 
eis τ. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45; eis 
T. βασιλ. τῶν οὐρανῶν or τοῦ θεοῦ (see βασιλεία, 3 p. 91): 
τοὺς εἰσερχομένους. that are trying to enter, or rather, 
that have taken the road to enter, are (engaged in) en- 
tering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14); Lk. xi. 52; used absol. of 
those who come into (i.e. become members of) the 
Christian church, Ro. xi. 25, (hence in 1 Co. v. 12 sq. of 
ἔσω and oí ἔξω are distinguished) ; eis τ. κατάπαυσιν, Heb. 
iii. 11, 18; iv. 1, 3, 9 sq. 10 sq.; eis τὴν δόξαν, Lk. xxiv. 26; 
eis πειρασμόν. to come (i. e. fall) intotemptation, Mt. xxvi. 


b. eicépx. eis is joined with nouns designat- | 


41; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WH ἔλθητε] ; Lk. xxii. 40, 46; eic | 


τὸν κόπον τινός (see eis, B. I. 3), Jn. iv. 38. εἰσέρχεσθ. 
εἰς τ. κόσμον. to enter the world [cf. W. 18], is a. i.q. 
to arise, come into existence, begin to be [i. e. among men]: 
used thus of sin and death, Ro. v. 12; of death, Sap. ii. 
24; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4; of idols, Sap. xiv. 14. f. 
of men, to come into life: whether by birth, Antonin. 6, 
ὅθ: or by divine creation, Philo, opif. mund. $25. y. 
to come before the public: 2 Jn. ? [Rec.]; to come to men, 
of Christ, Jn. xviii. 37; εἰσερχόμ. eis τ. κόσμον, when he 
cometh into the world,i.e. when he was on the point of 
entering it, viz. at his incarnation, Heb. x. 5. b. of 
thoughts coming into the mind: εἰσῆλθε διαλογισμὸς ἐν 
αὐτοῖς. a pregnant construction, there came in and estab- 
lished itself within [al. take ἐν outwardly: among (cf. 





^ 
eura 


δεαλογ. fin.)] them, Lk. ix. 46 [ef. W. 413 (385)]. The 
Grks. fr. Hom. down use εἰσέρχεσθαί τινα of thoughts and 
feelings, as φόβος, μένος, πόθος, ete. [cf. W. 427 (398). 
Comp. éz-, map-, avv- εἰσέρχομαι. 

εἰσ-καλέομαι, -οὔμαι, (mid. of εἰσκαλέω) : 1 aor. ptep. 
εἰσκαλεσάμενος ; to call in unto one's self, to invite in to 
one's house: τινά, Acts x. 23. [Polyb., al.]* 

εἴσ-οδος, -ov, 7, (ὁδός), [fr. Hom. on], an entrance, i. e. 
both the place or way leading into a place (as. a gate), and 
the act of entering ; only in the latter sense in the N. T. 
With gen. of place, τῶν ἁγίων, entrance into the holy place, 
i. e. reception into heaven, Heb. x. 19 [but in 20 appar- 
ently called ὁ δός]; eis τ. βασιλείαν τοῦ κυρίου, 2 Pet. i. 
11; of the act of coming forward to administer an oflice, 
Acts xiii. 24; with πρός τινα added, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1.* 

εἰσ-πηδάω, -ó: 1 aor. εἰσεπήδησα ; to spring in: els τὸν 
ὄχλον, Acts xiv. 14 Rec. (see ἐκπηδάω) ; to rush in impet- 
uously, Acts xvi. 29. (Xen., Dem., al. ; Sept. Am. v. 19.) * 

εἰσ-πορεύομαι (pass. of εἰσπορεύω to lead into, Eur. El. 
1285); impf. εἰσεπορευόμην (Mk. vi. 56); to go into, 
enter 5 1. prop. a. of persons: foll. by εἰς with acc. 
of place, Mk. i. 21; vi. 56; xi.2; Acts iii. 2; ὅπου, Mk. 
v. 40; οὗ, Lk. xxii. I0[R G, cf. B. 71 (62); W.$54, 7]; 
without specification of place where that is evident from 
the context, Lk. viii. 16; xi. 33; xix. 30; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους, 
to enter house after house [A. V. every house, see kará, 
ΤΙ. 3 a. a.], Acts viii. 3; πρός τινα, to visit one at his 
dwelling, Acts xxviii. 30; εἰσπορεύεσθαι k. ἐκπορεύεσθαι 
μετά τινος, to associate with one, Acts ix. 28 (ἐνώπιόν Tivos, 
Tob. v. 18; see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 a.). b. when used of 
things it isi. q. to be carried into or put into: so of 
food, which is put into the mouth, Mk. vii. 15, 18, [19]; 
Mt. xv. 17, (see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 d.). 2. metaph.: | εἰς 
τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. xviii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; see 
βασιλεία, 3 p. 91^]; of affections entering the soul, Mk. 
iv. 19; see εἰσέρχομαι, 2b. (Of the earlier Grk. writ. 
Xen. alone uses this verb, Cyr. 2, 3, 21; Sept. often 
for N33.) * 

elo-rpéxo : 2 aor. εἰσέδραμον ; to run in: Acts xii. 14. 
[Thue., Xen., al.] * 

elo-bépo; 1 aor. εἰσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. εἰσήνεγκον ; [pres. 
pass. εἰσφέρομαι ; fr. Hom. down]; to bring into, in or to; 
a. τί, foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, 1 Tim. vi. 7; pass. 
Heb. xiii. 11; τινά sc. εἰς τ. οἰκίαν, Lk. v. 18 sq.; [τινὰ 
ἐπὶ τ. συναγωγάς etc. Lk. xii. 11 T Tr txt. WH]; ri eis 
τὰς ἀκοάς Twos, i. e. to tell one a thing, Acts xvii. 20 
(φέρειν τι εἰς τὰ ὦτά τινος, Soph. Aj. 149). ^b. to lead 


into: τινὰ εἰς πειρασμόν, Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4. [Comp. : 


mrap-eiapepw. | * 1 

εἶτα, adv. of time, then; next; after that: Mk. viii. 25; 
Lk. viii. 12; Jn. xiii. 5; xix. 27; xx. 27; Jas.i. 15; with 
the addition of a gen. absol. to define it more precisely, 
Mk. iy. 17; as in classic Grk., it stands in enumerations, 
to mark a sequence depending either on temporal 
succession, as Mk. iv. 28 (see εἶτεν) ; 1 Co. xv. 5-7 (εἶτα 
[T ἔπειτα, so in mrg. Tr WH]...ézera . - - ἔπειτα - - - 
εἶτα [T ἔπειτα, so in mrg. L Tr WH]); 1 Co. xv. 24 
(ἔπειτα - «. εἶτα) ; 1 Tim. ii. 13; or on the nature of the 


. 
» 
€LTE 


things enumerated, 1 Co. xii. 28 (πρῶτον . . . δεύτερον 
... Tpirov ... ἔπειτα. -. εἶτα for which L T Tr WH 
ἔπειτα); [1 Tim. iii. 10]; in arguments it serves to add 
a new reason, furthermore (Germ. sodann) : Heb. xii. 9.* 

εἴτε, see ei, III. 15. 

εἶτεν a very rare [Ionic] form for εἶτα (q. v.) : Mk. iv. 
28 TWH. [Cf. Kuenen et Cobet, Nov. Test. ete. praef. 
p. xxxiii.; Lob. Phryn. p. 124, also Pathol. Gr. Element. 
ii. 155 ; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. and s. v. ἔπειτεν.} ἢ 

εἴωθα, see ἔθω. 

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the gen- 
itive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as 
separation from, something with which there has been 
close connection; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν 
in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἴ. 
W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used 

I. of PraAcE, and 1. univ. of the place from 
which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, 
from the*interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ. 
Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. i. 8; 
ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after 
verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, free- 
ing, removing, releasing, ete.: ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας 
εἰς τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the 
body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here 
L mrs. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the 
body, Mk. v. 30 [ef. B. 301 (258) ; W. 346 (324) ; Mey. 
ed. Weiss ad loc.]; ἐκ τῶν μνημείων, Mt. viii. 28; xxvii. 
53; ἐκπορεύεσθαι, Mt. xv. 11, 18 sq.; καταβαίνειν ἐκ 
τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. xxviii. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33; e£- 
ἄγειν, Acts xii. 17 ; φεύγειν, Acts xxvii. 30 ; καλεῖν, Mt. ii. 
15; metaph. ἐκ τοῦ σκότους eis τὸ às, 1 Pet. ii. 9; ἐκβάλ- 
Aew τὸ κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ. Mt. vii. [4 (R G dro) ]. 5; 
Lk. vi. 42 (opp. to ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ): τὶ ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ, Mt. 
xii. 35 [but see under II. 9 below]; xiii. 52; τὸ δαιμόνιον 
ἔκ twos, out of the body of one, Mk. vii. 26; azokvAtew 
τὸν λίθον ἐκ [L Tr txt. ἀπό; cf. W. 364 (342) note] τῆς 
θύρας, Mk. xvi.3; αἴρειν, Jn. xx. 1 sq. ; κινέω, Rev. vi. 14; 
σώζειν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, Jude 5; διασώζειν ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Acts xxviii. 4. Metaph., ἐκ τῆς χειρός τινος, out of the 
power of one [cf. B. 183 (158)]: after ἐξέρχεσθαι, Jn. x. 
39; after ἀπάγειν, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; after ἁρπάζειν, Jn. 
x. 28 sq.; after ἐξαιρεῖσθαι, Acts xii. 11; after ῥύεσθαι, 
Lk. i. 74; after σωτηρία, Lk. i. 71. after πίνειν, of the 
thing out of which one drinks [differently in II. 9 below]: 
ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 1 Co. xi. 28; ἐκ 
πέτρας, 1 Co. x. 4 ; ἐκ τοῦ φρέατος, Jn. iv. 12; after ἐσθίειν, 
of the place whence the food is derived, ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, 1 Co. 
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read ra ἐκ κτλ.]. ofthe place forth 
from which one does something : διδάσκειν ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου. 
Lk. v. 3 [here Tdf. ἐν ete.]. It is joined also to nouns 
designating not a place, but what is done in a place: 
ἐγείρεσθαι ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου, Jn. xiii. 4; ἀναλύειν ἐκ τῶν 
γάμων, Lk. xii. 36. 2. from the midst (of a group, 
number, company, community) of many; a. after 
verbs of going, leading, choosing, removing, 
ete. a. before collective nouns, as ἐξολεθρεύω ἐκ τοῦ 
λαοῦ. Acts iii. 23; προβιβάζω or συμβιβάζω ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, 








189 di 


Acts xix. 33; ἐκλέγειν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19. ἐκ 
μέσου τινῶν ἀφορίζειν, Mt. xiii. 49; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Acts xvii. 
33: ἁρπάζειν, Acts xxiii 10; ἐξαίρειν, 1 Co. v. 13; ἐκ 
πάσης φυλῆς kK. γλώσσης ἀγοράζειν, Rev. v. 9; ἐκ παντὸς 
γένους συνάγειν, Mt. xiii. 47. B. before plurals: ἀνιστάναι 
τινὰ ἔκ τινων. Acts ili. 22; ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts xvii. 31; ἀνί- 
σταταί τις ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts x. 41; xvii. 3; ἐγείρειν τινὰ ἐκ 
νεκρῶν, Jn. xii. 1, 9,17; Acts iii. 15; iv. 10; xiii. 30; 
Heb. xi. 19, ete.; ἡ ἀνάστασις ἐκ νεκρῶν, Lk. xx. 35; 1 Pet. 
i. 3; ἀνάγειν τινὰ ἐκ νεκρῶν, Ro. x. 7; ἐκλέγειν, Acts i. 24; 
xv. 22; καλεῖν, Ro. ix. 24; ἐγένετο ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν etc. Jn. 
iii. 25 [but cf. IL 1b.; W. 368 (345)]. b. before words 
signifying quantity: after eis, as Mt. x. 29; xxvi. 21; 
Lk. xvii. 15, and often; πολλοί, Jn. xi. 19, 45, etc.; of 
πλείους (πλείονες), 1 Co. xv. 6; οὐδείς, Jn. vii. 19; xvi. 
5, and elsewhere; χιλιάδες ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς, Rev. vii. 4 ; 
after the indef. ris, Lk. xi. 15 ; xii. 13; Jn. vi. 64; vii. 
48; τὶς γυνὴ ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; with τινές to be 
added mentally [cf. W. 203(191) ; B. 158 (138)]: Jn. ix. 
40 [(?) better, vii. 40]; xvi. 17; Rev. xi. 9, (1 Esdr. v. 
45 (44)); τινάς : Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xi. 49; xxi.16 ; 2 Jn. 
4; Rev. ii. 10; cf. Fritzsche, Conjectanea in N. T. p. 36 
note; after the interrog. τίς, who? Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xi. 
5, ete.; τίς πατήρ, Lk. xi. 11 [L T Tr WH]; preceded 
by a generic noun: ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν etc. Jn. iii. 1. c. 
εἶναι ἔκ τινων, to be of the number, company, fellowship, 
etc., of ; see εἰμί, V. 3 a. 3. from a local surface, 
as sometimes the Lat. ez for de; down from: καταβαίνειν 
ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους (Hom. Il. 13, 17; Xen. an. 7, 4, 12; Sept. 
Ex. xix. 14; xxxii.1; Deut. ix. 15; x. 5; Josh. ii. 23), 
Mt. xvii. 9 (for the more com. ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρ. of Rec. and the 
parallel pass. Mk. ix. 9 [here L WH txt. Tr mre. ἐκ]; 
Lk. ix. 37; [cf. Mt. viii. 1]); θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπόλ- 
λυται (unless we prefer to regard ἐκ as prompted here 
by the conception of the hairasfixed in the skin), 
Lk. xxi. 18; Acts xxvii. 34 [here L T Tr WH dzo; ef. 
W. 364 (342) note]; ἐκπίπτειν ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν, of the chains 
with which the hands had been bound, Acts xii. 7; 
κρέμασθαι ἔκ τινος. Acts xxviii. 4, (1 Mace. i. 61; 2 Mace. 
vi. 10; so the Grks. fr. Hom. down); dayeiv ék rod 
θυσιαστηρίου, the things laid upon the altar, Heb. xiii. 
10. Akin to this is ἐξελθεῖν ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ, from an abode 
with God (for the more usual ἀπὸ τ. θεοῦ), Jn. viii. 42. 
4. of the direction whence; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Lat. a dez- 
tra, lit. from i. e. (Germ. zu) on the right, see δεξιός ; so 
ἐκ δεξιᾶς, ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς. sc. χώρας [or χειρός which is 
sometimes expressed ; W. 592 cf. 591; B. 83 (72)], (also 
in Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 15) ; ἐξ ἐναντίας, over 
against, Mk. xv. 39 (Hdt. 8, 6; Sir. xxxvii.9; 1 Maec. 
iv. 34; Sap. iv. 20); metaph. [W. 8 51, 1 d.] ὁ ἐξ évav- 
τίας [ A. V. he that is of the contrary part], our opponent, 
adversary, Tit. ii. 8; ἐκ ῥιζῶν, from the roots, i. e. utterly, 
Mk. xi. 20 (Job xxviii. 9; xxxi. 12). 5. of the con- 
dition or state out of which one comes or is brought : 
σώζειν ἐκ θανάτου. Heb. v. 7; Jas. v. 20; ἔρχεσθαι ἐκ 
[Lehm. ἀπὸ] θλίψεως, Rev. vii. 14; μεταβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ 
θανάτου eis τ. ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14; ἐγερθῆναι ἐξ 
ὕπνου, Ro. xiii. 11 [cf. W. 366 (344) note]; ζῶντες ἐκ 





εκ 


νεκρῶν, alive from being dead (i. 6. who had been dead 
and were alive again), Ro. vi. 13; ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν i. 6. of 
those that had been νεκροί, Ro. xi. 15, (ἐλεύθερος ἐκ δούλου 
kat πλούσιος ἐκ πτωχοῦ γεγονώς, Dem. p. 270 fin.; ἐκ 
πλουσίου πένητα γενέσθαι καὶ ἐκ βασιλέως ἰδιώτην φανῆναι, 
Xen. an. 7, 7, 28; γίγνομαι τυφλὸς ἐκ δεδορκότος, Soph. 
O. T. 454; ἔλαφον ἐξ ἀνδρὸς γενέσθαι, Palaeph. 3, 2; 
add, Lys. adv. Ergocl. init.; Tac. ann. 1, 74 ex pauperi- 
bus divites, ex contemtis metuendi). Also of the state 
out of the midst of which one does something : ἐκ πολλῆς 
θλίψεως γράφειν, 2 Co. ii. 4. 6. of any kind of sep- 
aration or dissolution of connection witha thing 
or person [ef. B. 157 (188) ]: ἀναπαύεσθαι ἐκ (released 
from) τῶν κόπων, Rey. xiv. 13; ἀνανήφειν ἐκ (set free 
from) τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος, 2 Tim. ii. 26; μετανοῶν ἐκ 
ete. Rey. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 30 sq.; xvi. 11; ἐπιστρέφειν [LT 
Tr WH ὑποστρ.] ἐκ ([1 ἀπό], by severing their connec- 
tion with) τῆς ἐντολῆς, 2 Pet. ii. 21; τηρεῖν τινα ἐκ ete. to 
keep one at a distance from ete. [cf. D. 327 (281)], Jn. 
xvii. 15; Rev. iii. 10; also διατηρεῖν, Acts xv. 29; νικᾶν ἔκ 
twos, by conquest to free one's self from the power of one 
[cf. B. 147 (128) ; W. 367 (344) ], Rev. xv. 2; ὑψοῦσθαι ἐκ 
τῆς γῆς, to be so lifted up as to dissolve present relations 
to the earth [* taken out of the sphere of earthly action’ 
Westcott], Jn. xii. 32; ἐλεύθερος ἐκ πάντων (elsewhere 
always ἀπό twos), 1 Co. ix. 19. 7. Hebraistically : 
ἐκδικεῖν τὸ αἷμά τινος ἐκ χειρός Twos (7D ὉΠ op), 2 K. 
ix. 7), to avenge the blood (murder) of one at the hand 
of (on) the slayer, Rev. xix. 2 [Β. 182 (158)]; κρίνειν τὸ 
κρίμα τινὸς ἔκ τινος, to judge one's judgment on one, 
vindicate by vengeance on [cf. B. u. s.], Rev. xviii. 20 
(cf. Sept. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 84). 

II. of the Orter1n, Sourcr, CaAvsE; 1. of gen- 
eration, birth, race, lineage,nativity; a. after 
verbs of begetting, being born, ete.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχειν 
ἔκ twos, Mt. i. 18 cf. 20; κοίτην ἔχειν ἔκ τ. Ro. ix. 105 yer 
vüv twa ἐκ with gen. of the woman, Mt. i. 3, 5 sq. 16; 
γίνεσθαι ἐκ γυναικός, to be born of a woman, Gal. iv. 4 
cf. 22 56. ; γεννᾶσθαι ἐξ. αἱμάτων, ἐκ θελήματος σαρκός, Jn. 
i. 18; ἐκ τῆς σαρκός, Jn. iii. 6; ἐκ πορνείας, Jn. viii. 41 ; 
ἐγείρειν τινὶ τέκνα ἐκ, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; (ris) ἐκ καρποῦ 
τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, Acts ii. 30 (Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 11); ἡ 
ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, Ro. ii. 27. In a supernatural 
sense: τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ sc. ὄν, from the divine nature 
[ef. W. 193 (182)], 1 Co. ii. 12 cf. Rev. ii. 11; men are 
said γεννᾶσθαι ἐκ πνεύματος, Jn. iii. 5 sq. 8; γεγεννημένοι 
εἶναι ἐκ θεοῦ (see γεννάω, 2 d.), and to the same purport 
εἶναι ἐκ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. iv. 4, 6; v. 19, (see eiut, V. 3 d. [and 
cf. 7 below]). b. εἶναι, γενέσθαι, ἔρχεσθαι, etc., ἐκ with 
the name of the city, race, people, tribe, family, etc., fo 
spring or originate from, come from: ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ εἶναι. Jn. 
1. 46 (47); ἐκ πόλεως, i. 44 (45) ; ἐξ ὧν, sc. πατέρων [?], Ro. 
ix. 5; ἐξ οἴκου τινός, Lk. i. 27; ii. 4; ἐκ yévovs, Phil. iii. 
5; Acts iv. 6; “Ἑβραῖος ἐξ “Ἑβραίων, Phil. iii. 5; ἐκ φυλῆς, 
Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. xi. 1 2 ἐξ *Tovda, Heb. vii. 
14; ἐκ σπέρματός τινος, Jn. vii. 42; Ro. i. 3; xi. 13 with- 
out a verb: ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί, sinners of Gentile birth, 


Gal. ii.15; of the country to which any one belongs: eivac | Jas. ii. 22; 


2 190 j 











. 
εκ 


ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ηρώδου, Lk. xxiii. 7; ἐξ ἐπαρχίας, Acts 
xxiii. 34; ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς, Jn. iii. 31. 2. of any oth- 
er kind of origin: καπνὸς ἐκ τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. 
xv. 8; ἐκ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐστί, comes from the Jews, Jn. 
iv. 22; εἶναι ἔκ τινος, to proceed from any one as the au- 
thor, Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17, 22; Ro. ii. 29; 2Co. iv. 7; 1 
Jn. ii. 16, 21, ete.; with ἐστίν to be mentally supplied: Ro. 
xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6, (see εἰς, B. II. 3 e. a.) ; 1 Co. xi. 125 
2 Co. iii. 5; v. 18; Gal. v. 8; ἔργα ἐκ τοῦ πατρός μου, works 
of which my father is the author, i. e. which I, endued 
with my father's power, have wrought, Jn. x. 32; oiko- 
δομὴ ἐκ θεοῦ, whose author is God, 2 Co. v. 1; χάρισμα, 1 
Co. vii. 7; δεδομένον ἐκ τοῦ πατρός, Jn. vi. 65; add, Jn. 
xviii. 3; 1 Co. vii. 7. ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ δικαιοσύνη, that comes 
from God, i. e. is adjudged by him, Phil. iii. 9; ἡ ἐξ ὑμῶν 
ἐν ἡμῖν [WH txt. ἡμ. ἐν ὑμ.] ἀγάπη, love proceeding from 
you and taking up its abode in us, i. e. your love the in- 
fluence of which we feel [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 157 
(187) ], 2 Co. viii. 7 ; ὁ ἐξ ὑμῶν ζῆλος, your zeal, 2 Co. ix. 
2[R G; cf. W.u.s.note; B. u. 5.7; βλασφημία ἔκ τινος, 
calumny from i. e. disseminated by, Rev. ii. 9 [not Rec.]; 
εἶναι ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, see εἰμί, V. 3 c. ; with the 
suggested idea of a nature and disposition derived from 
one's origin: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου. is not of 
earthly origin nor of earthly nature, Jn. xviii. 36 ; ἐκ τῆς 
γῆς ἐστιν, is of an earthly nature, Jn. iii. 31; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 
λαλεῖν, to speak as an earthly origin prompts, ibid.; hu- 
man virtues are said to be from God, as having their 
prototype in God and being wrought in the soul by his 
power, ἡ ἀγάπη ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ eorw,1Jn.iv.7. 98. of the 
material out of which a thing is made, ete. : ἡ γυνὴ ἐκ 
τοῦ ἀνδρός, from “ one of his ribs,” 1 Co. xi. 12; στέφα- 
νον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν, Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2; add, Jn. ii. 15; 
ix. 6; Ro. ix. 21; 1 Co. xv. 47 ; Rev. xvii. 12; xxi. 21. 
Akin is 4. its use to notethe price, because the 
money is, as it were, changed into that which is bought, 
(the simple gen. of price is more common, cf. W. 206 
(194); [B. 8 132, 13]) : ἀγοράζειν τι ἔκ τινος, Mt. xxvii. 7, 
(Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 24) ; κτᾶσθαι ex, Acts i. 18, (dvei- 
σθαι ἐκ, Palaeph. 46, 3 sq.) ; συμφωνεῖν ἐκ δηναρίου (be- 
cause the agreement comes from the promised denary [cf. 
W.368 (345); B.u. 5.7}, Mt. xx. 2. Cognate to this is the 
phrase ποιεῖν ἑαυτῷ φίλους ἐκ τοῦ μαμωνᾷ, Lk. xvi.9. 5. 
esp. after neut. and pass. verbs, ἐκ is used of the cause 
(whether thing or person) by which the act expressed 
by the accompanying verb is aided, sustained, ef- 
fected: ὠφελεῖσθαι ἔκ τινος, Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11; . 
(nuova at, 2 Co. vii. 9 ; λυπεῖσθαι, 2 Co. ii. 2; esp. in the 
Apocalypse: ἀδικεῖσθαι, Rey. ii. 11; ἀποθανεῖν, viii. 11; 
[ἀποκτείνεσθαι], ix. 18; φωτίζεσθαι, xviii. 1; σκοτίζεσθαι 
[LT WH cxorodo@at], ix. 2; πυροῦσθαι, iii. 18; γεμίζεσθαι.. 
xv. 8 (ef. Is. vi. 4); Jn. vi. 13; γέμειν, Mt. xxiii. 25 
(where L om. Tr br. ἐξ); πληροῦσθαι, Jn. xii. 3 ['Treg. 
mars. égMje8n]: χορτάζεσθαι, Rev. xix. 21; πλουτεῖν, 
xviii. 3, 19; μεθύσκεσθαι, μεθύειν, xvii. 2, 6 [not Treg. 
marg.]; ζῆν ἐκ, Ro. i. 17; 1 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iii. 11; 
αὔξησιν ποιεῖσθαι. Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; τελειοῦσθαι. 
κεκοπιακώς, Jn. iv. 6, (Ael. v. h. 3, 23 ἐκ τοῦ 


> 
εκ 


πότου ἐκάθευδεν). Also after active verbs: γεμίζειν, Jn. vi. 
13; Rev. viii. 5; ποτίζειν, Rev. xiv. 8; [on ἐκ with the 
gen. after verbs of fulness, cf. B. 163 (142 sq.); W. 201 
(189)]. 6. of that on which a thing depends, or 
from which it results: οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ ζωὴ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόν- 
των, does not depend upon possessions, i. e. possessions 
cannot secure life, Lk. xii. 15; εὐπορία ἡμῶν ἐστι ἐκ τῆς 
ἐργασίας ταύτης, Acts xix. 25; τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, as far as de- 
pends on you, Ro. xii. 18; in the Pauline phrases δίκαιος. 
δικαιοσύνη. δικαιοῦν ἐκ πίστεως, ἐξ ἔργων, see [the several 
words, esp. ] p. 150; ἐξ (as the result of, in consequence of) 
ἔργων λαβεῖν τὸ πνεῦμα, Gal. iii. 2, 5 ; ἐξ ἀναστάσεως λαβεῖν 
τοὺς νεκρούς, Heb. xi. 85 ; ἐσταυρώθη ἐξ ἀσθενείας, 2 Co. 
xiii.4; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18, 21 sq.; Eph. ii. 8 sq. 
7. of the power on which any one depends, by which 
he is prompted and governed, whose character he 
reflects: ἐκ θεοῦ (equiv. to θεόπνευστον) λαλεῖν, 2 Co. ii. 17 ; 
in the Johannean expressions, εἶναι ἐκ θεοῦ. Jn. viii. 47 
(in a different sense above, II. 1 a.) ; ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου, ἐκ 
TOU πονηροῦ, ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου. see εἰμί, V. 3 d.; ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 
εἶναι, to be led by a desire to know the truth, be a lover 
of the truth, Jn. xviii. 37; 1Jn. iii. 19; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, the 
subjects of the law, Ro. iv. 14; οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας equiv. to 
οἱ ἐριθευόμενοι [cf. ἐριθεία]. Ro. ii. 8; 6 ex πίστεως equiv. 
to ὁ πιστεύων, Ro. iii. 26; iv.16. εἶναι ἔκ Twos also means 
to be bound to one, connected with him; to have relations 
with him; see εἰμί, V. 3 d.; hence the periphrasis of ἐκ 
περιτομῆς, the circumcised: Acts xi. 2; Ro. iv. 12; Gal. 
li. 12; of ὄντες ἐκ περιτομῆς, Col. iv. 11; of ἐκ περιτομῆς 
πιστοί. Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. 8. of the 
cause for which: ἐκ τοῦ πόνου, for pain, Rev. xvi. 10; 
of the reason for (because of) which: Rev. viii. 13; xvi. 
11; ἐκ τούτου, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; cf. Meyer on these 
pass. [who urges that ἐκ τούτου used of time denotes 
“the point of departure of a temporal series” (W. 367 
(344)): from this time on, thenceforth. This argument 
seems not to be decisive in the second example (Jn. xix. 
12), for there the verb is in the imperfect. On the 
use of the phrase in classic Grk. see L. and S. s. v. ἐκ, IT. 
1; Krüger §68,17, 7. Cf. our Eng. upon this, hereupon, 
in which the temporal sense and the causal often seem 
to blend. See below, IV. 1 fin.]. 9. of the supply 
out of (from) which a thing is taken, given, received, 
eaten, drunk, ete. [cf. W. § 30, 7 and 8; B. 159 (139) 
sqq.]: λαμβάνειν ἐκ, Jn. 1. 16; xvi. 14 sq.; διδόναι, διαδι- 
Sova, Mt. xxv. 8; Jn. vi. 11; 1 Jn.iv. 13; ἐσθίειν, 1 Co. 
ix. 7; xi. 28; φαγεῖν, Jn. vi. 26, 50sq.; Rev.ii.7; peré- 
xew, 1 Co. x. 17 (but see μετέχω) ; πίνειν, Mt. xxvi. 29; 
Mk. xiv. 25; Jn. iv. 13 sq.; Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3, (differ- 
ently in L 1 above) ; λαλεῖν ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων, Jn. viii. 44; ἐκ 
ToU περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, Mt. xii. 34; ἐκβάλλειν, ib. 
35 [this belongs here only in case θησαυρός is taken in the 
sense of freasure not treasury (the contents as distin- 
guished from the re pository); cf. I. 1 above, and s. v. 
θησαυρός] : βάλλειν ἐκ (a part), Mk. xii. 44; Lk. xxi. 4. 
10. of that from which any thing is obtained: συλ- 
λέγειν ἐξ ἀκανθῶν, τρυγᾶν ἐκ βάτου, Lk. vi. 44; θερίζειν 
ἐκ, Gal. vi. 8. 11. of the whole of which anything 





191 ἐκ 


is a part: 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. [cf. W. 368 (345)]. 12. 
of the source; a. univ.: ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλάλησα, Jn. 
Xii. 49, (οὐδὲν ἐκ σαυτῆς λέγεις, Soph. El. 344). b. of 
the source of conduct, as to be found in the state of 
the soul, its feelings, virtues, vices, etc.: ἐκ καρδίας, 
Ro. vi. 17; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 23, (1 Mace. 
Vili. 27; ἐκ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀσπάζεσθαι, Xen. oec. 10, 4) ; ἐκ 
καθαρᾶς καρδίας, 1 Tim. i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22 
[L T Tr WH om. ka6.]; ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας... ψυχῆς 
- « - διανοίας krÀ. Mk. xii. 30 sqq. (Sap. viii. 21; 4 Mace. 
vii. 18); ἐκ πίστεως, Ro. xiv. 23; ἐξ εἰλικρινείας, 2 Co. ii. 
17; ἐξ ἐριθείας, Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet see épi&eía]. α. of 
the source of knowledge: κατηχεῖσθαι ἐκ, Ro. ii. 18; 
ἀκούειν ἐκ, Jn. xii. 34; γινώσκειν, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 
1 Jn. iv. 6; ἐποπτεύειν, 1 Pet. ii. 12. δεικνύναι, Jas. ii. 
18; ὁρίζειν, to declare, prove to be, Ro. i. 4 [ef. s. v. 
ὁρίζω, 2 and Mey. ad loc. . 13. of that from which a 
rule of judging or acting is derived; after, accord- 
ing to, [cf. W. 368 (345)]: κρίνειν ἐκ, Lk. xix. 22 [A. V. 
out of thine own mouth, etc.]; Rev. xx. 12 (Xen. Cyr. 
2, 2, 21 ἐκ τῶν ἔργων κρίνεσθαι) ; δικαιοῦν, καταδικάζειν, 
Mt. xii. 37 ; ὀνομάζειν ἐκ, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. Il. 10, 68; 
Soph. O. T. 1036, ete.) ; ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, according to your 
ability, 2 Co. viii. 11. 

III. By ATTRACTION, common in classie Grk. (cf. W. 
§ 66,6; [B. 377 sq. (323) ]), two prepositions coalesce 
as it were into one, so that ἐκ seems to be used for ἐν, 
thus ἄραι τὰ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ concisely for τὰ ἐν τῇ 
οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἐξ αὐτῆς, Mt. xxiv. 17; ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 
δώσει Tor ὁ πατὴρ 6 ἐν οὐρανῷ δώσει ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Lk. xi. 
13; τὴν ἐκ Λαοδικείας ἐπιστολήν for τὴν eis Λαοδικ. γεγραμ- 
μένην καὶ ἐκ Λαοδικείας κομιστέαν, Col. iv. 10, (2 Mace. 
ii. 18). [To this constr. some would refer ἐπιγνοὺς &v 
ἑαυτῷ τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν, Mk. v. 30, resoly- 
ing τὴν ἐν αὐτῷ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν ἐξ αὐτοῦ ; cf. Field, 
Otium Norvicense, pars iii. ad loc.] 

IV. of Time [W. 367 (344)]; ^ 1. ofthe (temporal) 
point from which; Lat. ez, inde a; from, from ... on, 
since: ἐκ χρόνων ἱκανῶν, Lk. viii, 27 [RG Tr mrg.]; ἐκ 
γενετῆς, Jn. ix. 1 (Hom. Il. 24, 535; Od. 18, 6); ἐκ κοι- 
Alas μητρός (see κοιλία. 4) ; ἐκ νεότητος. Mt. xix. 20 [RG]; 
Mk.x.20; Lk.xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4 (Hom. Il. 14, 86); 
ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος (see αἰών, 1 b.), Jn. ix. 32 (Ael. v. h. 6, 13; 
12, 64 ἐξ αἰῶνος) ; ἐξ ἀρχῆς. Jn. vi. 64; xvi.4; ἐκ γενεῶν 
ἀρχαίων, Acts xv. 21; ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτώ, Acts ix. 33; ἐκ ποὰ- 
λῶν ἐτῶν, Acts xxiv. 10; ἐξ αὐτῆς (sc. pas), forthwith, 
instantly (see ἐξαυτῆς. ; ἐξ ἱκανοῦ [(sc. χρόνου) ; but 1, Τ' 
Tr WH here ἐξ ἱκανῶν χρόνων]. of a long time, Lk. xxiii. 
8, (ἐκ πολλοῦ, Thuc. 1, 68; 2, 88); with an adverb: ἐκ 
παιδιόθεν. Mk. ix. 21 L T Tr WH, (ἐκ πρωΐθεν, 1 Macc. 
x. 80), cf. W. § 65, 2; [B. 70 (62)]. Many interpreters 
translate ἐκ rovrov, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12, from this time, 
but cf. II. 8 above. 2. of succession in time, a 
temporal series: ἐκ δευτέρου (as it were, proceeding 


from, beginning from the second), a second time (see 


δεύτερος) : ἐκ τρίτου, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mre. br. ἐκ rpír.]; 
ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας (diem ex die, Cic. ad Att. 7, 26; Caes. 
b. g. 1, 16, 4; diem de die, Liv. 5, 48) from day to day, 


Ld 
εκᾶαστος 


day after day, 2 Pet. ii. 8, (Gen. xxxix. 10; Num. xxx. 
15; [2 Chr. xxiv. 11]; Sir. v. 7; Eur. Rhes. 437 (445) 
etc.; ἔτος ἐξ ἔτους, Lev. xxv. 50; ἐνιαυτὸν ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ, 
Deut. xv. 30). 

V. ApvERBIAL Purases [cf. W. § 51, 1 d.], in which 
lies the idea 1. of direction whence: ἐξ évav- 
τίας, cf. I. 4 above. 2. of source: ἐκ συμφώνου, by 
consent, by agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5; ἐξ ἀνάγκης of neces- 
sity, i. e. by compulsion, 2 Co. ix. 7; necessarily, Heb. 
Vile 2. 3. of the measure or standard: ἐκ μέ- 
ρους, so that each is a part of the whole, proportion- 
ately, [R. V.mrg. each in his part], 1 Co. xii. 27, cf. 
Meyer ad loe.; in part, partly, 1 Co. xiii. 9 sqq.; ἐκ 
μέτρου i. q. μετρίως, by measure, moderately, sparingly, 
Jn. iii. 34; ἐξ ἰσότητος, by equality, in equal proportion, 
2 Co. viii. 13 (14) (ἐξ ἴσου, Hdt. 7, 135); ἐκ περισσοῦ, 
beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr. br. ]. 

VI. In Composirion ἐκ denotes 1. egress: ἐκβαίνω, 
ἐξέρχομαι. 2. emission, removal, separation: ἐκβάλλω, 
ἐκπέμπω. ἐξαιρέω. 3. origin: ἔκγονος. 4. publie- 
ity: ἐξαγγέλλω. 5. the unfolding, opening out, of 
something tied together or rolled up: ἐκτείνω, ἐκπετάννυμι. 
6. is i. q. utterly, entirely, παντελῶς, [cf. Eng. out and 
out}, denoting completion and perfection: ἐκπληρύω, 
ἐκτελέω. Cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 120 sq. 

ἕκαστος, -7, -ov, Sept. for ws, [fr. Hom. down], each, 
every 5 a. joined to a substantive: ἕκαστον δένδρον, 
Lk. vi. 44; ἑκάστῳ στρατιώτῃ, Jn. xix. 23; κατὰ μῆνα 
ἕκαστον, every month, Rev. xxii. 2 [not Rec.]; καθ᾽ 
ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, Heb. iii. 135 ef. W. 111 (106); B. $ 127, 
30. preceded by eis, Lat. unusquisque, every one: with 
a substantive, Eph. iv. 16; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. b. used 
substantively: Jn. vii. 53 [Ree.]; Acts iv. 35; Ro. ii. 
6; Gal. vi. 4, ete.; once plur. ἕκαστοι : Rev. vi. 11 Rec. 
With a partitive genitive added: ἡμῶν, ho. xiv. 12; 
ὑμῶν, Lk. xiii. 15; 1 Co. i, 12; Heb. vi.11; αὐτῶν, Jn. 
vi. 7[RG]; τῶν σπερμάτων, 1 Co.xv.38. εἷς ἕκαστος, 
every one (see eis, 4 b.) : without a partit. gen., Acts xx. 
31; Col.iv. 6; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40; Acts ii. 3; 
xvii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, etc. ἕκαστος, when it denotes 

individually, every one of many, is often added apposi- 
tively to nouns and pronouns and verbs in the plural 
number, (Matthiae ii. p. 764 sq.; [W. 516 (481); B. 
131 (114)]): ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος, Acts ii. 8; σκορ- 
πισθῆτε ἕκαστος, Jn. xvi. 32; ἐπορεύοντο mávres . . . , 
ἕκαστος ..., Lk. ii. 3; add, Acts iii. 26; 1 Pet. iv. 10; 
Rey. v. 8; xx. 13; likewise εἷς ἕκαστος, Acts ii. 6; xxi. 
26; ὑμεῖς οἱ καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἀγαπάτω, 
you one by one, each one of you severally, Eph. v. 33. 
In imitation of the Hebr., ἕκαστος τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ 
(Vn? ws, Gen. xxvi. 31), Mt. xviii. 35; μετὰ τοῦ πλη- 
σίον αὐτοῦ (33y 3-98 wR, Judg. vi. 29, ete.), Eph. iv. 25, 
cf. Heb. viii. 11 Ree. 

ἑκάστοτε, adv., at every time, always: 2 Pet. i. 15. 
(Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.) * 

ἑκατόν, oi, ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], a hundred: Mt. 
xiii. 8 (sc. καρπούς); xviii. 12; Jn. xix. 39, ete. 

ἑκατονταέτης [ R G ΤΊ, -es, and ἑκατονταετής [L Tr WH], 


192 











ἐκβάλλω 


τές, (fr. ἑκατόν ἃ πα ἔτος ; on the want of uniformity in ac- 
centuation among authors, copyists, and grammarians 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 406 sq.; W. $6, 1 b.; B. 29 (26); 
[ Tdf- Proleg. p. 102; Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. δεκέτης ; esp. 
Chandler §§ 703, 709; Gottling p. 323 sq.]), centenarian, 
a hundred years old: Ro.iv.19. (Pind. Pyth. 4, 502.) *: 

ἑκατονταπλασίων, -ov, a hundredfold, a hundred times | 
as much: Mt. xix. 29 [RG]; Mk. χ. 80; Lk.viii.8. (2; 
S. xxiv. 3; Xen. oec. 2, 3.) * : 

ἑκατοντάρχης, -ov, 6, (ἕκατον and dpyw; on the termi- 
nations dpyns and apxos see the full exposition in W. 
61 (60); ef. B. 73 (64); Bornemann, Schol. ad Lue. p. 
151 sq.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156 sq.]), 
a centurion: Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.], 13 GL T Tr WH; 
[xxvii. 54 T]; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 TWH; [xxiii. 47 T 
TrWH]; Actsx.1,22; xxi. 32 L T Tr WH; [xxii. 26 
LT WH]; xxiv. 23; xxvii. 1, 6 L T Tr WH, 11 GLT 
Tr WH, 31, 43 L T Tr WH; gen. plur. T WH in Acts 
xxiii. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. 11 d.; Hat. 
7, 81; Dion. Hal, Plut., al.). See the foll. word.* 

ἑκατόνταρχος, -ov, 6, 1. q. ἑκατοντάρχης: q. v.: Mt. viii. 5, 
8 [in 5, 8, Γαΐ, -apyns], 13 Rec.; xxvii. 54 [ Tdf. -apyns]; 
Lk. vii. 2, 6 [T WH -dpyns]; xxiii. 47 ['T Tr WI -dp- 
xus]; Acts xxi. 32 RG; xxii. 25, 26 [L T WH -apyns]; 
xxvii. 6 [RG, 11 Ree., 43 RG], also xxviii. 16 Rec.; 
gen. plur., Acts xxiii. 17 and 22 R GL Tr. (Xen. Cyr. 
5, 3, 41; Plut., al.) * 

ἐκ-βαίνω : 2 aor. ἐξέβην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go out: 
Heb. xi. 15 Τ Ὁ Tr WH.* 

ἐκ-βάλλω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐξέβαλλον (Mk. vi. 13 
[Tr mrg. aor.]) ; fut. ἐκβαλῶ ; plpf. ἐκβεβλήκειν (without 
augm., Mk. xvi. 9; cf. W. $ 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); 2 aor. 
e&cBadov; [Pass. and Mid. pres. ἐκβάλλομαι]:; 1 aor. 
pass. €&eBAnOnv; fut. pass. ἐκβληθήσομαι; [fr. Hom. 
down]; Sept. generally for v2, occasionally for wx, 
win, Tovn; to cast out; to drive out; to send out; 
1. with the included notion of more or less vio- 
lence; 8. to drive out, (cast out): a person, Mt. xxi. 
12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii.-15 (ex); Lk. xx. 12, etc.; pass. 
Mt. viii. 12 [T WH (rejected) mrg. ἐξελεύσονται]: δαιμό- 
va, Mt. vii. 22; vill. 16,31; ix.38; Mk.i. 34,39; Lk. 
xi. 20; xiii. 32, ete.; ἔκ τινος, Mk. vii. 26; ἀπό, Mk. xvi. 
9 [L WH Tr txt. παρά]; ἔν τινι, by, through [W. 389 
(364) ], Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24, 27 sq.; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15, 
19 sq.; τῷ ὀνόματί twos, Mt. vii. 22; [Mk. ix. 38 R* G]; 
ἐπὶ τῷ ov. τινος, Lk. ix. 49 [WH Tr mrg. ἐν; ἐν τῷ ov. Mk. 
ix. 38 Rez L T Tr WH]; λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 16; τινὰ ἔξω 
τῆς πόλεως, Lk. iv. 29; Actswii. 58. b. to cast out: 
τινά foll by ἔξω, Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34 sq.; xii. 31 (se. out 
of the world, i. e. be deprived of the power and influ- 
ence he exercises in the world); Lk. xiii. 28; ἔξω with 
gen. Mt. xxi. 39; Mk. xii. 8; Lk. xx. 15. a thing: 
excrement from the belly into the sink, Mt. xv. 17; 
mid. ἐκβαλλόμενοι (i. 6. for themselves, that they might 
the more easily save the ship and thereby their lives) 
τὸν σῖτον eis τ. θάλασσαν, Acts xxvii. 38. c. to expel 
a person from a society: to banish from a family, Gal. 
iv. 30 (Gen. xxi. 10); ἐκ [Tdf.om. ἐκ] τῆς ἐκκλησίας, 3 


"ἔκβασις 


Jn. 10. 
xiii. 50; to bid one depart, in stern though not violent 
language, Mt. ix. 25; Mk. v.40; Acts ix. 40; xvi. 37 
(where distinguished fr. ἐξάγειν) ; to bid one go forth 
to do some business, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2. e. so em- 
ployed that the rapid motion of the one going is trans- 
ferred to the one sending forth; to command or cause 
one to depart in haste: Mk. i. 43; Jas. ii. 25; rà πάντα 
(sc. πρόβατα), to let them out of the fold so that they 
rush forth, [al. to thrust them forth by laying hold of 
them], Jn. x. 4. f. to draw out with force, tear out: 
τί, Mk. ix. 47. g. with the implication of force over- 
coming opposing force; to cause a thing to move straight 
on to its intended goal: τὴν κρίσιν eis νῖκος, Mt. xii. 20. 
h. to reject with contempt; to cast off or away: τὸ ὄνομά 
twos ὡς πονηρόν, Lk. vi. 22, (Plat. Crito p. 46 b. ; de rep. 
2 p. 377 e.; Soph. O. C. 636, 646; of actors driven from 
the stage, hissed and hooted off, Dem. p. 449, 19). 2. 
without the notion of violence; a. to draw out, 
extract, one thing inserted in another: τὸ κάρφος τὸ ev 
τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ. Lk. vi. 42; ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ, ibid. and Mt. 
vii. 5; ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀφθ. 4 (where LT Tr WH ex). b. to 
bring out of, to draw or bring forth: τὶ ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ, 
Mt. xii. 35; xiii. 52; money from a purse, Lk. x. 35. 
C. lo except, to leave out, i. e. not receive: τί, foll. by ἔξω 
[or ἔξωθεν], Rev. xi. 2 (leave out from the things to be 
measured, equiv. to μὴ αὐτὴν petpnons). ἃ. foll. by eis 
with ace. of place, to lead one forth or away somewhere 
with a force which he cannot resist: Mk. i. 12. [On the 
pleonastie phrase ἐκβ. ἔξω (or ἔξωθεν) cf. W. § 65, 2.] 

ἔκ-βασις. -ews, ἡ, (ἐκβαίνω) ; 1. an egress, way out, 
(Hom., et al.) : applied fig. to the way of escape from 
temptation into which one εἰσέρχεται or εἰσφέρεται (see 
these words), 1 Co. x. 13. 2. in a sense foreign to 
prof. auth., the issue [ (ef. its objective sense e. g. Epict. 
diss. 2, 7, 9)] i. q. end: used of the end of life, Sap. ii. 
17; éxB. τῆς ἀναστροφῆς τινων, in Heb. xiii. 7, is not 
merely the end of their physical life, but the manner in 
which they closed a well-spent life as exhibited by their 
spirit in dying; cf. Delitzsch ad loc.* 

é«-BoAn, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐκβάλλω) ; a. a casting out. b. 
spec. the throwing overboard of goods and lading whereby 
sailors lighten a ship in a storm to keep her from sinking, 
(Aeschyl. sept. 769; Aristot. eth. Nie. 3, 1, 5 [p. 1110", 
9]; Leian. de mere. cond. 1): ποιεῖσθαι ἐκβολήν, Lat. 
jacturam facere, to throw the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 
18; with τῶν σκευῶν added, Sept. Jon. 1. 5; τῶν φορτίων, 
Poll. 1, 99 p. 70 ed. Hemsterh.* 

*eyap(to; Pass, [pres. ἐκγαμίζομαι): impf. ἐξεγαμι- 
Counv; to give away (ἐκ out of the house [cf. W. 102 
(97)]) in marriage: a daughter, 1 Co. vii. 38 RG, 
[ibid Rec.]; Mt. xxiv. 38 αὶ G Trtxt. Pass. to marry, 
to be given in marriage, Mt. xxii. 30 R G [cf. Tdf.’s note 
ad loc.]; Lk. xvii. 27 RG; see yauí(e. Not found 
elsewhere.* 

ἐκ-γαμίσκω, i. q. ἐκγαμίζω, q. v.: Pass. [pres. éxya- 
μίσκομαι]; Lk. xx. 34 sq. RG; cf. γαμίσκω and Fritzsche 
on Mk. p. 529 sqq. Not found elsewhere.* 

13 


193 


d. to compel one to depart: ἀπὸ r&v ὁρίων, Acts | 








ἐκδικέω 


ἔκ-γονος, -ov, (ἐκγίνομαι), sprung from one, born, begotten, 
(Hom. and sqq.); commonly as a subst. 6, ἡ ἔκγονος, of 
ἔκγονοι, a son, daughter, offspring, children, descendants ; 
in Sept. com. in neut. plur. ἔκγονα and τὰ ἔκγονα, for 
19, Deut. vii. 13 [Alex.]; xxviii 4, etc.; LD'NXNX, 
Is. xlviii. 19; 1xi. 9; 13, Is. xlix. 15; also in Sir. xl. 15; 
xliv. 11, etc. In the N. T. once: 1 Tim. v. 4 τέκνα ἢ 
ἔκγονα. grandchildren, [(.&. V. renders it by the obsol. 
nephews; ef. Eastwood and Wright, Bible Word-Book, 
or B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Nephew)].* 

ἐκ-δαπανάω : [fut. ἐκδαπανήσω ; 1 fut. pass. ἐκδαπανα- 
θήσομαι; to exhaust by expending, to spend wholly, use 
up: τὰς προσόδους, Polyb. 25, 8,4. Pass. reflexively, to 
spend one’s self wholly: foll. by ὑπέρ twos, of one who con- 
sumes strength and life in laboring for others’ salvation, 
2 Co. xii. 15; ef. Kypke ad loc.; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

ἐκ-δέχομαι ; impf. ἐξεδεχόμην ; (ἐκ from some person 
or quarter) ; 1. to receive, accept, ([Hom.], Aeschyl., 
Hat., sqq-)- 2. to look for, expect, wait for, await: τί, 
Jn. v.3 RL; Heb. xi. 10; Jas. v.7; τινά, Acts xvii. 
16; 1 Co. xvi. 11; ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε wait for one 
another, sc. until each shall have received his food, 1 Co. 
xi. 33, cf. 21; foll. by ἕως etc. Heb. x. 13; [absol. 1 Pet. 
iii. 20 Rec., but see Tdf.’s note ad loc.]. Rarely with 
this meaning in prof. auth., as Soph. Phil. 123; Apollod. 
1, 9, 27 $3; ἕως ἂν γένηταί τι, Dion. Hal. 6,67. [Cowr.: 
ἀπ-εκδέχομαι. Cf. δέχομαι, ἢπ.] " 

ἔκ-δηλος, -ον, (δῆλος), evident, clear, conspicuous : 2 Tim. 
iii. 9. (Hom. Il. 5, 2; Dem. p. 24, 10; Polyb.) * 

ἐκδημέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἐκδημῆσαι ; (ἔκδημος away from 
home) ; 1. to go abroad (Hdt., Soph., Plat., Joseph., 
al.); hence univ. to emigrate, depart: ἐκ τοῦ σώματος, 
from the body as the earthly abode of the spirit, 2 Co. 
v. 8. 2. to be or live abroad: 2 Co. v. 9; ἀπὸ τοῦ 
κυρίου, abode with whom is promised us, 2 Co. v. 6; in 
these exx. opp. to évóguó, q. v.* 

ἐκ-δίδωμι: Mid., fut. ἐκδώσομαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐξέδοτο, T WH ἐξέδετο (see ἀποδίδωμι) ; a com. word in 
Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Il. 3, 459 on; to give out of one's 
house, power, hand, stores ; to give out, give up, give over; 
hence also to le! out for hire, to farm out, Udt. 1, 68; 
yewpyia δὲ ἐκδεδομέναι δούλοις, Plat. lese. 7 p. 806 d. ; 
al. In the N. T., Mid. to let out for one's advantage: 
Mt. xxi. 33, 41 [Rec. ἐκδόσεται, cf. Tdf.’s note; B. 47 
(41)]; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9.* 

ἐκ-δι-ηγέομαι, -oüpac; dep. mid.; prop. to narrate in full 
or wholly; univ. to relate, tell, declare: τί, Acts xiii. 41 
(Hab.i.5); xv. 3. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 23 p. 1484", 
4]; Joseph., [Philo], Galen, [al.]; Sept.) * 

ἐκδικέω, -; fut. ἐκδικήσω ; 1 aor. ἐξεδίκησα ; (ἔκδικος, 
q. v-); Sept. for np3, 1p3, DU; a. τινά, to vindicate 
one's right, do one justice, [A. V. avenge]: Lk. xviii. 5 
(1 Mace. vi. 22); τινὰ ἀπό twos, to protect, defend, one 
person from another, Lk. xviii. 3; ἑαυτόν, to avenge one’s 
self, Ro. xii. 19. b. τί, to avenge a thing (i. e. to pun- 
ish a person for a thing): τὴν παρακοήν, 2 Co. x. 6; τὸ 
αἷμά τινος ἀπό or ἔκ twos, to demand in punishment the 
blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer 





DESI 
ἐκδίκησις 


the penalty of his erime, [A. V. avenge one’s blood on 
or at the hand of]: Rev. vi. 10; xix. 2; see ἐκ, I. 7. 
(In Grk. auth. fr. [Apollod.], Diod. down.) * 

ἐκ-δίκησις, -ews, 7), (ἐκδικέω, q. v.), Sept. for "op and 
Dp3, pa, vawD (Ezek. xvi. 38; xxiii. 45) and p yaw; 
a revenging; vengeance, punishment: Ro. xii. 19 and 
Heb. x. 30 fr. Deut. xxxii. 35; 2 Co. vii 11; Lk. xxi. 
99: 


“ay 


ποιεῖν τὴν ἐκδίκησίν τινος, to vindicate one from 
wrongs, accomplish the avenging of, Lk. xviii. 7 sq. ; 
τινί, to avenge an injured person, Acts vii. 24 (Jude. xi. 
86); ἐκδίκησίς τινος, objec. gen., the punishment of one, 
1 Pet. ii. 14 ; διδόναι ἐκδίκησίν run, to inflict punishment 
on, [render vengeance to] one, 2 Th. i. 8; cf. [Sir. xii. 
6]; Ezek. xxv. 14. (Polyb. 3, 8, 10.) * Σ 

ἔκδικος, -ov, (δίκη right, justice, penalty); 1ἔ- with- 
out law and justice (cf. Lat. exlex), unjust: Aeschyl., 
Soph., Eur., Ael. n. an. 16, 5. 2. exacting penalty from 
(éx) one; an avenger, punisher: Ro. xiii. 4; περί τινος, 
1 Th. iv. 6; (Sap. xii. 12; Sir. xxx. 6; 4 Mace. xv. 26 
(29); [Plut. de garrul. § 14 p. 509 f.]; Hdian. 7, 4, 10 
[5 ed. Bekk.; al.]).* 

ἐκ-διώκω : fut. ἐκδιώξω ; 1 aor. ἐξεδίωξα; 1. to drive 
out, banish: τινά, Lk. xi. 49 [here WH Trmre. διώξουσιν ; 
some refer this to 2]; (Thue. 1, 24; Leian. Tim. 10; 
Sept. 1 Chr. viii. 13; Joel ii. 20, ete.). 2. to pursue 
i. q. to persecute, oppress with calamities: τινά, 1 Th. ii. 
15 [some refer this to 1]; (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 157; Sir. 
xxx. 19; Dem. 883, 27).* 

ἔκ-δοτος, -ov, (ἐκδίδωμι), given over, delivered up, (to 
enemies, om to the power, the will, of some one): λαμβά- 
νειν τινὰ ἔκδοτον, Acts ii. 23 (but λαβόντες is rejected by 
GLT Tr WH); διδόναι or ποιεῖν τινα éx0. Hdt. 3, 1; 
Dem. 648, 25; Joseph. antt. 6, 13, 9; Palaeph. 41, 2; 
al; Bel and the Dragon vs. 22; 
θανάτῳ, Ignat. ad Smyrn. 4, 2.* 

ἐκ-δοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐκδέχομαι), the act or manner of receiv- 
ing from; hence in prof. auth. 1. reception. 2 
succession. 3. [a taking in a certain sense, i. e.] 
interpretation. 4. once in the sacred writings, expec- 
tation, awaiting, [cf. ἐκδέχομαι, 2]: Heb. x. 27.* 

i-Bóo: 1 aor. ἐξέδυσα; 1 aor. mid. ἐξεδυσάμην;; (δύων ; 
to take off: twa, to strip one of his garments, Mt. xxvii. 
28 [L WH org. ἐνδύσ.]:; Lk. x. 30; τινά τι (as in Grk. 
fr. Hom. down), [a thing from a person]: Mt. xxvii. 31; 
Mk. xv. 20; 
one's raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3, 4, 19); fig. to 
put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. be un- 
clothed|: 2 Co. v. 4; the reading ἐκδυσάμενοι, adopted 
in vs. 3 by certain critics [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al.], 
is due to a correction by the copyists; see γυμνός, 1 d. 
[Coxr.: ἀπ-εκδύομαι.] * 

ἐκεῖ, adv. of place, there; a. properly: Mt. ii. 13, 
15; v. 24, and freq. In Lk. xiii. 28 ἐκεῖ is not used for 
ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ foll. by ὅταν (at that time... when 
ete.), but means in that place whither ye have been ban- 
ished; ef. Meyer ad loc. οἱ ἐκεῖ, sc. ὄντες, Standing 
there, Mt. xxvi. 71 [Tr mrg. αὐτοὶ ἐκεῖ]. It answers to 
a relative adv.: οὗ τὸ πνεῦμα, ἐκεῖ ἐλευθερία, 2 Co. iii. 17 


ἑαυτὸν ἔκδ. διδόναι τῷ 


194 








Mid. to take off from one’s self, to put off 





ἐκεῖνος. 


Rec.; Mt. vi. 21 xviii. 20; xxiv. 28; Mk. vi.10; Lk. 
xii. 34; Hebraistically, where a preceding adv. or rel. 
pron. has already attracted the verb, ἐκεῖ is added to 
this verb pleonastically: Rev. xii. 6 GT Tr WH (ὅπου 
ἔχει ἐκεῖ τόπον), 14 (ὅπου τρέφεται ἐκεῖ) ; cf. Deut. iv. 5,. 
14, 26; 1 Macc. xiv. 34, and what was said p. 86^, 5 
on the pron. αὐτός after a relative. b. by a negligent. 
use common also in the classies it stands after verbs of 
motion for ἐκεῖσε, thither: so after ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. ii. 
22; peraBaivo, Mt. xvii. 20; ὑπάγω, Jn. xi. 8; ἔρχομαι, 
Jn. xviii. 3; προπέμπομαι, Ro. xv. 24; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
pp. 43 sq. 128; Hermann on Soph. Antig. 515; Trachin. 
1006; Bttm. on Philoct. 481; W. $54, 7; B. 71 (62). 
and 378 (324). 

ἐκεῖθεν, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V. 
sometimes from thence]: Mt. iv. 21; Mk. vi. 1; Lk. ix. 4;, 
Jn.iv.43; Acts xili.4; and often in the historical bks. 
of the N. T. οἱ ἐκεῖθεν elliptieally for οἱ ἐκεῖθεν διαβῆναι: 
θέλοντες, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L WH om. οἱ). 

ἐκεῖνος, -7, -o, (fr. ἐκεῖ, prop. the one there, cf. Germ. 
dortig, der dort), demonst. pron., that man, woman, thing 
(Lat. ille, illa, illud); properly of persons, things, times, 
places somewhat remote from the speaker. — 1. used ab- 
solutely, a. in antithesis, referring to the more remote 
subject: opp. to οὗτος, Lk. xviii. 14; Jas. iv. 15; ὑμῖν: 

. ἐκείνοις, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; ἐκεῖνοι . . . ἡμεῖς, 
Heb. xii. 25; ἄλλοι . . . ἄλλοι. . . ἐκεῖνος. Jn. ix. 9; ἐκεῖ- 
. ἐμέ. Jn. iii. 30; οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι... ἐκεῖνος δέ, Jn. ii. 
20 sq.; ὁ μὲν κύριος ᾿Ιησοῦς [RG T om."'r. WH Tr mre. 
br.] .. . ἐκεῖνοι δέ, Mk. xvi. 19 sq., ete. b. of noted per- 
sons (as in classic Grk.): in a bad sense, that notorious 
man, Jn. vii. 11; ix. 28; in a good sense, — of the Lord 
Jesus, 1 Jn. ii. 6; 111. 3, 5, 7, 16 ; iv. 17 ; of the Holy Spirit, 
with an apposition added, ἐκεῖνος, τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας, 
Jn. xvi. 13. c. referring to a noun immediately pre- 
ceding, he, she, it, (Lat. is, ea, id, Germ. selbiger) : Jn. vii. 
45; v. 46; Mk. xvi. 11; Acts iii. 18, etc. ; cf. W. $23, 15 
[B.104 (91). Here perhaps may be noticed its use to- 
gether with αὐτός of the same subject in the same sen- 
tence: ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ (i. e. the devil) eis τὸ ἐκείνου 
θέλημα, 2 Tim. ii. 26; cf. Thue. 1, 132, 6; 4, 29, 3; Xen. 
Cyr. 4,5, 20; see Riddell, Apol. of Plato, App. § 49; 
Kühner § 467, 12; cf. ζωγρέω, 2]; equiv. to an emphatie 
(Germ. er) he, etc., Mt. xvii. 27; Jn. i. 8; v. 43; Tit. iii. 
7; equiv. to the forcibly uttered Germ. der (that one 
etc.), in which sense it serves to recall and lay stress upon 
nouns just before used [ef. our resumptive the same; W. 
§ 23,4]: Jn.i.18; v.39; xii. 48; xiv. 26; xv.26; esp. 
is it thus resumptive of a subject expressed participially 
[B. 306 (262 sq.)]: Mk. vii. 15 [T WHom. Tr br. the 
pron.], 20; Jn.i. 33; ix. 37 (ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν, sc. ὁ vids τοῦ 
co), see εἰμί, II. 5) ; Jn. x. 15; xiv. 21; Ro. xiv. 14; 2 
Co. x. 18; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 33 ὁ yàp λόγχην dkováv, ékei- 
vos καὶ THY ψυχήν τι παρακονᾷ). ἃ. foll. by ὅτι, Mt. 
xxiv. 43; foll by és, Jn. xiii: 26; Ro. xiv. 15. 2. 
joined with nouns, and then the noun with the article 
either precedes, or (somewhat more rarely) follows it 
(W. 162 (153)), [B. 119 (104) sq.]; a. in contrasts : 


VOV . . 


9 ^ 
EKELOE 


ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη, Heb. viii. 7. ^b. used to distinguish 
accurately from others the things or the persons spoken 
of, (Germ. selbig) : Mt. vii. 25, 27; x. 15; xviii. 32; Mk. 
iii. 24 sq.; Lk. vi. 48 sq. ; Jn. xviii. 15, and often; esp. 
of Time,— and of time past: ἐν rais ἡμέραις ἐκείναις. 
Dn 03, at that time which has been spoken of; said of 
time which the writer either cannot or will not define 
more precisely and yet wishes to be connected with the 
time of the events just narrated: Mt. iii. 1; Mk. i. 9; 
viii. 1; Lk. ii. 1, (Ex. ii. 11; Judg. xviii. 1; 1 S. xxviii. 
1); ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 106 sq.; at the time under 
consideration: Lk.iv.2; ix. 36; the same phrase is used 
of time future: Mt. xxiv. 19; Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 
(iii. 2)); Rev. ix. 6; likewise in the singular, ἐν ἐκείνῃ 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, Lk. xvii. 31; Jn.xvi.23,26. But the solemn 
phrase ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα, or ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη, simply sets future 
time in opposition to the present, that fateful day, that 
decisive day, when the Messiah will come to judge: Mt. 
τος: ΠΚῸ τ 98. x. LO 2) ΠΗ 10.» 2 Pim: 3:912. 18} 
Rey. xvi. 14 (where L T Tr WH om. ἐκείνης) ; so in the 
phrase 6 αἰὼν ἐκεῖνος, Lk. xx. 35. 3. ἐκείνης (in Rec. δὲ 
ἐκείνης), scil. ὁδοῦ, adverbially, (by) that way: Lk. xix. 
4; W. § 64,5; [B. 171 (149); see ποῖος, fin.]. John’s 
use of the pronoun ἐκεῖνος is discussed by Sveitz in the 
Stud. u. Krit. for 1859, p. 497 sqq.; 1861, p. 267 sqq., 
and by Alex. Buttmann, ibid. 1860, p. 505 sqq. and in 
Hilgenfeld’s Zeitsch. für wissenschaftl. Theol. 1862, p. 
204 sqq.; Buttmann clearly proves in opp. to Steitz 
that John's usage deviates in no respect from the 
Greek; Steitz, however, resorts to psychological consid- 
erations in the case of Jn. xix. 35, [regarding ἐκ. there 
as expressing the writer's inward assurance. But Steitz 
is now understood to have modified his published 
views.] 

ἐκεῖσε, adv. of place, thither, towards that place: Acts 
xxi. 3, on which see W. 349 (328); used for ἐκεῖ in the 
pregn. constr. τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, collected there, Acts 
xxii. 5, (Acta Thomae $ 8); cf. W. § 54, 7." 

ex-{yréw, -9; 1 aor. ἐξεζήτησα; Pass., 1 aor. ἐξεζητήθην; 
1 fut. ἐκζητηθήσομαι; (ἐκ out from a secret place, from 
all sides) ; Sept. very often for v7, also for wpa, ete. ; 
a. to seek out, search for: properly, τινά, 1 Mace. ix. 26; 
figuratively: τὸν κύριον, τὸν θεόν, to seek the favor of 
God, worship him, Acts xv. 17; Ro. iii. 11 [Tr mrg. WH 
mrg. ζητῶν]; Heb. xi. 6, (Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2; xxxiii. 
(xxxiv.) 5; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 33; Amos v. 4, etc.). b. to 
seek out i. e. investigate, scrutinize: ri, Sir. xxxix. 1, 3; 
περί τινος, to examine into anything, 1 Pet. i. 10, where 
it is joined with ἐξερευνᾶν [to seek out and search out], 
as in 1 Macc. ix. 26. C. to seek out for one's self, beg, 
crave: Heb. xii. 17. d. to demand back, require: τὸ 
αἷμα τῶν προφητῶν ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, to take ven- 
geance on this generation for the slaughter of the proph- 
ets (after the Hebr., cf. 2 S. iv. 11; Ezek. iii. 18; see ἐκ, 
I. 7): Lk. xi. 50, [51]. .(In prof. auth. thus far only a 
single passage has been noted in which this word ap- 
pears, Aristid. or. 8, i. p. 488 [i. e. orat. 38, i. p. 726 ed. 
Dind.].) ἢ 


; 195 





ἐκκλησία 


ἐκ-ζήτησις, (ἐκζητέω, 4. ν.), -εως, 7; 1. an investigat- 
ing. 2. a subject of subtle inquiry and dispute, [R. V. 
questioning]: 1 Tim. i. 4T Tr [WH; see Ellic. ad loc. 
and cf. οἰκονομία]. (Basil Caes., Didym. Al.) * 

ἐκ-θαμβέω, -ὦ : Pass, [pres. ἐκθαμβοῦμαι]; 1 aor. ἐξε- 
θαμβήθην ; (ἔκθαμβος, 4. v.) ; 1. trans. to throw into 
amazement or terror; to alarm thoroughly, to terrify: Sir. 
xxx. 9; [Job xxxiii. 7 Aq., Compl.]. 2. intrans. to 
be struck with amazement; to be thoroughly amazed, as- 
tounded ; in Grk. writ. once, Orph. Arg. 1217. In the 
N. T. only in the pass. and by Mark: to be amazed, for 
joy at the unexpected coming of Christ, ix. 15; to be 
struck with terror, xvi. 5 sq.; joined with ἀδημονεῖν, 
xiv. 33.* 

ἔκ-θαμβος, -ov, (θάμβος, cf. expoBos), quite astonished, 
amazed: Acts iii. 11. (Polyb. 20, 10, 9. Eccl. and 
Byzant. writ.5 terrifying, dreadful, Dan. vii. 7 Theod.) * 

ἐκ-θαυμάζω : [impf. ἐξεθαύμαζον ; to wonder or marvel 
greatly (see ἐκ, VI. 6) : ἐπί τινι, at one, Mk. xii. 17 T WH. 
(Sir. xxvii. 23; xliii. 18; Dion. Hal., Longin., al.) * 

€k-Beros, -ov, (ἐκτίθημι), cast out, exposed : ποιεῖν ἔκθετα 
(equiv. to ἐκτιθέναι) rà βρέφη. Acts vii. 19. (Eur. Andr. 
70; [Manetho, apoteles. 6, 52].)* 

ἐκ-καθαίρω : 1 aor. ἐξεκάθαρα [on the a cf. B. 41 (35)]; 
(ἐκ either i. q. utterly or for ἔκ τινος); in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. Il. 2, 153 down; to cleanse out, clean thoroughly : 
ἐμαυτὸν ἀπό τινος, to avoid defilement from one and so 
keep one's self pure, 2 Tim. ii. 21; with acc. of the thing 
by the removal of which something is made clean, [ A. V. 
purge out], 1 Co. v. 7. (For ἢν i. q. to cleanse, Judg. vii. 
4 var.; for 13 i. q. to take away, Deut. xxvi. 13.) * 

ἐκ-καίω: 1 aor. pass. ἐξεκαύθην ; 1. to burn out. 
2. to set on fire. pass. to be kindled, to burn, (Hdt. and 
sqq.; often in Sept.) : properly, of fire; metaph. of the 
fire and glow of the passions (of anger, Job iii. 17 ; Sir. 
xvi. 6, and often in Plut.) ; of lust, Ro. i. 27, ( Alciphr. 3, 
67 οὕτως ἐξεκαύθην eis €pwra).* 

ἐκκακέω, -à ; [1 aor. éfekdkgga]; (kakós) ; to be utterly 
spiritless, to be wearied out, exhausted; see ἐγκακέω [cf. 
uil: 

ἐκ-κεντέω, -ῶ : 1 aor. ἐξεκέντησα; 1. to put out, dig 
out: τὰ ὄμματα, Aristot. h. a. 2, 17 [p. 508^, 6]; 6, 
5. 2. to dig through, transfiz, pierce: τινά, Rev. i. 7; 
ὄψονται eis ὃν (i. e. εἰς τοῦτον, ὃν [cf. W. 158 (150)]) ἐξε- 
κέντησαν, Jn. xix. 37. (Polyb. 5, 56, 12; Polyaen. 5, 3, 
8; for 3p3, Judg. ix. 54; 177 to kill, Num. xxii. 29. 2 
Mace.xii.6. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexice. ete. p. 540 sq.)* 

ék-kAdw: 1 aor. pass. ἐξεκλάσθην ; to break off; to cut 
off: Ro. xi. 17, 19, 20 R G T WH (on this vs. see κλάω). 
(Sept. Lev. i. 17; Plat. rep. 10 p. 611 d.; Plut., Aleiphr., 
zs) 

ἐκ-κλείω : 1 aor. inf. ἐκκλεῖσαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἐξεκλείσθην:; 
[fr. (Hdt.) Eur. down]; to shut out: Gal. iv. 17 (viz. 
from intercourse with me and with teachers coóperating 
with me) ; i. q. to turn out of doors: to prevent the ap- 
proach of one, pass. in Ro. iii. 27.* 

ἐκκλησία, -as, 7, (fr. ἔκκλητος called out or forth, and - 
this fr. ἐκκαλέω) ; prop. a gathering of citizens called out 


ἐκκλησία 


from their homes into some public place; an assembly; so 
used 1. among the Greeks from Thue. [ef. Hat. 3, 
142] down, an assembly of the people convened at the 
public place of council for the purpose of deliberating: 
Acts xix. 39. 2. in the Sept. often equiv. to TP the 
assembly of the Israelites, Judg. xxi. 8; 1 Chr. xxix. 1, 
ete., esp. when gathered for sacred purposes, Deut. xxxi. 
30 (xxxii. 1); Josh. viii. 35 (ix. 8), ete.; in the N. T. 
thusin Acts vii. 38; Heb. ii. 12. 3. any gathering or 
throng of men assembled by chance or tumultuously : Acts 
xix. 32, 41. 4. in the Christian sense, a. an assem- 
bly of Christians gathered for worship : ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, in the 
religious meeting, 1 Co. xiv. 19, 35; ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις, 
ib. 34; συνέρχεσθαι ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, 1 Co. xi. 18; cf. W.§ 50, 
4a. b. acompany of Christians, or of those who, hoping 
for eternal salvation through Jesus Christ, observe their 
own religious rites, hold their own religious meetings, 
and manage their own affairs according to regulations 
prescribed for the body for order's sake; aa. those 
who anywhere, in city or village, constitute such a com- 
pany and are united into one body: Acts v. 11; viii. 
3; 1 Co.iv. 17; vi. 4; Phil. iv. 15; 3 Jn. 6 [cf. W. 122 
(116)]; with specification of place, Acts viii. 1; xi. 22; 
Ro. xvi. 1; 1 Co.iv.17; vi.4; Rev. ii. 1, 8, etc. ; Θεσσα- 
λονικέων, 1 Th. i. 1; 2 Th. i. 1 ; Λαοδικέων, Col. iv. 16; 
with gen. of the possessor, rod θεοῦ (equiv. to rn np, 
Num. xvi. 3; xx. 4), 1 Co. xi. 22; and mention of the 
place, 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 1. Plur. ai ἐκκλησίαι: Acts xv. 
41; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 19; Rev. i. 4 ; iii. 6, ete. ; 
with ro? θεοῦ added, 1 Th. ii. 14; 2 Th. 1. 4; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
Xo. xvi. 16; with mention of the place, as τῆς ᾿Ασίας, 
Ταλατίας, etc.: 1 Co. xvi. 1, 19; 2 Co. viii. 1; Gal. i. 2; 
τῆς ‘Iovdatas rais ἐν Χριστῷ, joined to Christ [see ἐν, I. 6 b. ], 
i. e. Christian assemblies, in contrast with those of the 
Jews, Gal. i. 22; ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν, gathered from the 
Gentiles, Ro. xvi. 4; τῶν ἁγίων, composed of the saints, 
1 Co. xiv. 33. ἡ ἐκκλησία κατ᾽ οἶκόν τινος, the church in 
one's house, i. e. the company of Christians belonging to 
a person's family; others less aptly understand the 
phrase of the Christians accustomed to meet for worship 
in the house of some one (for as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 
23, the whole Corinthian church was accustomed to 
assemble in one and the same place; [but see Bp. 
Lehtft. on Col. iv. 15]): Ro. xvi. 5; 1 Co. xvi. 19; Col. iv. 
15; Philem. 2. The name ἡ ἐκκλησία is used even by 
Christ while on earth of the company of his adherents 
in any city or village: Mt.xviii.17. bb. the whole body 
of Christians scattered throughout the earth; collectively, 
all who worship and honor God and Christ in whatever 
place they may be: Mt. xvi. 18 (where perhaps the Evan- 
gelist employs τὴν ἐκκλησίαν although Christ may have 
said τὴν βασιλείαν pov); 1 Co. xii. 28; Eph. i. 22; iii. 10; 
v. 23 sqq. 27, 29, 32; Phil. iii. 6; Col. i. 18, 24; with 
gen. of the possessor : τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xx. 28 [R Tr mrg. 
WII. 0co9]; τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. i.13; 1 Co. xv. 9; 1 Tim. iii. 15. 
cc. the name is transferred to the assembly of faithful 
Christians already dead and received into heaven : Heb. 
xii. 23 (on this pass. see in ἀπογράφω, b. and πρωτότοκος, 


196 : 





ἐκλέγω 


fin.). [In general, see Trench $ 1, and B. D. s.v. Church, 
esp. Am. ed.; and for patristic usage Soph. Lex. s. v.] 

ἐκ-κλίνω [ Ro. xvi. 17 T Tr WH]; 1 aor. ἐξέκλινα ; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down; Sept. chiefly for ^2 and n3; 
intrans. fo turn aside, deviate (from the right way and 
course, Mal. ii. 8, [cf. Deut. v. 32]) ; metaph. and absol. 
to turn (one's self) away [B. 144 (126) sq.; W. 251 
(236)], either from the path of rectitude, Ro. iii. 12 
(Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3); or from evil (a malis declinare, 
Cic. Tusce. 4, 6): ἀπὸ κακοῦ, 1 Pet. iii. 11 (Ps. xxxiii. 
(xxxiv.) 15; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 27; Prov. iii. 7); ἀπό with 
gen. of pers. fo turn away from, keep aloof from, one's 
society; to shun one: Ro. xvi. 17, (οὕς, Ignat. ad Eph. 
7, 1).* 

ἐκ-κολυμβάω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. ἐκκολυμβήσας ; to swim 
outof: Acts xxvii. 42. (Eur. Hel. 1609; Diod., Dion. 
Hal.)* 

ἐκ-κομίζω : impf. pass. ἐξεκομιζόμην ; lo carry out; a dead 
man for burial (Polyb. 35, 6, 2; Plut. Agis 21; Hdian. 
2, 1, 5 [2 ed. Bekk.], etc.; in Lat. efferre) : Lk. vii. 12.* 

ἐκ-κοπή, -ns, ἡ, [ Polyb., Plut., al.], see ἐγκοπή. 

ἐκ-κόπτω : fut. ἐκκόψω ; 1 aor. impy. ἔκκοψον, subjune. 
ἐκκόψω ; [ Pass., pres. ἐκκόπτομαι] ; 2 aor. ἐξεκόπην ; 2 fut. 
exxomoopat; lo cut out, cutoff; a. properly: of a tree, 
Mt. ni 10; vii. 19; Lk: 950x719 Hd: 9: 91, 
ete.) ; a hand, an eye: Mt. v. 30 ; xviii. 8, (τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, 
Dem. p. 744, (13) 17); pass. ἔκ twos, a branch from a 
tree, Ro. xi. 22, 24. b. figuratively: τὴν ἀφορμήν, to cut 
off occasion, 2 Co. xi. 12, (τὴν ἐλπίδα, Job xix. 10). In 
1 Pet. iii. 7 read ἐγκόπτεσθαι ; see éykómro.* 

ἐκ-κρέμαμαι (mid. of ἐκκρεμάννυμι, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. 
ii. 224 sq. ; [Veitch s. v. κρέμαμαι]; B. 61 (53)) : [impf. 
ἐξεκρεμάμην]; to hang from: éfekpéparo αὐτοῦ ἀκούων, 
hung upon his lips (Verg. Aen. 4, 79), Lk. xix. 48, where 
T WII ἐξεκρέμετο, after codd. NB, a form which T con- 
jectures “a vulgari usu haud alienum fuisse; " [cf. B.u. s.; 
WII. App. p. 168]. (Plat., Philo, Plut., al.) * 

ἐκ-κρέμομαι, see the preceding word. 

ἐκ-λαλέω, -@: 1 aor. inf. ἐκλαλῆσαι ; to speak out, di- 
vulge: τινί, foll by ὅτι, Acts xxiii. 22. (Judith xi. 9; 
Demosth., Philo, Dio Cass., al.) * 

ἐκ-λάμπω : fut. ἐκλάμψω ; to shine forth: Mt. xiii. 48; 
Dan. xii. 3 var. (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἐκ-λανθάνω : to cause to forget; Mid. to forget; pf. ἐκλέ- 
λησμαι, foll. by gen.: Heb. xii. 5. (Hom. et sqq.) * 

ἐκ-λέγω : pf. pass. ptep. ἐκλελεγμένος, once in Lk. ix. 
35 Lmrg. T Tr WH; Mid., impf. ἐξελεγόμην (Lk. xiv. 7); 
1 aor. ἐξελεξάμην ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
r3; to pick out, choose; in the N. T. (exc. Moke 1x95 
where the reading is doubtful) always mid., ἐκλέγομαι, to 
pick or choose out for one's self: ri, Lk. x. 42; xiv. 7; 
τινά, one from among many (of Jesus choosing his disci- 
ples), Jn. vi. 70; xiii. 185 xv. 16; Actsi. 2; ἀπό τινων, 
from a number of persons (Sir. xlv. 16), Lk. vi. 13; ἐκ 
τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19 ; used of, choosing one for an office, 
Acts vi. 5; foll by ἔκ τινων, Acts i. 24; to discharge 
some business, Acts xv. 22, 25; ἐν ἡμῖν (al. ὑμῖν) ἐξελέ- 
Earo ὁ θεός, foll. by the acc. and inf. denoting the end, 


ἐκλείπω 


God made choice among usi. e. in our ranks, Acts xv. 7, 
where formerly many, misled by the Hebr. 3 ^r13 (1 S. 
xvi. 9; 1 K. viii. 16, etc., and the Sept. of these pass.), 
wrongly regarded ἐν ἡμῖν as the object on which the mind 
of the chooser was as it were fixed; [W. $32, 3 a.; B. 
159 (138)]. Especially is God said ἐκλέξασθαι those 
whom he has judged fit to receive his favors and sepa- 
rated from the rest of mankind to be peculiarly his own 
and to be attended continually by his gracious oversight: 
thus of the Israelites, Acts xiii. 17 (Deut. xiv. 2, 
[ef. iv. 37]; 2 Macc. v. 19); of Christians, as those 
whom he has set apart from among the irreligious mul- 
titude as dear unto himself, and whom he has rendered, 
through faith in Christ, citizens in the Messianic king- 
dom: Mk. xiii. 20; 1 Co. i. 27 sq.; with two acc. one of 
the object, the other of the predicate [W. § 32, 4 b.], 
Jas. ii. 5; τινὰ ἐν Χριστῷ, so that the ground of the choice 
lies in Christ and his merits, foll. by ace. with inf. denot- 
ing the end, Eph. i. 4. In Lk. ix. 35 Lmrg. T Tr WH 
Jesus is called ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ ὁ ἐκλελεγμένος (R G L txt. 
ἀγαπητός), as being dear to God beyond all others and 
exalted by him to the preéminent dignity of Messiah ; 
but see ἐκλεκτός, 1 b.* 

ἐκ-λείπω ; fut. ἐκλείψω ; 2 aor. ἐξέλιπον ; 1. trans. 
a. to leave out, omit, pass by. Ὁ. to leave, quit, (a place) : 
τὸ ζῆν, τὸν βίον, to die, 2 Macc. x. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 23; 
Soph. Electr. 1131; Polyb. 2, 41, 2, al.; Dion. Hal. 1, 24; 
Luc. Macrob. 12; Alciphr. 3, 28. 2. intrans. to fail; 
i. e. to leave off, cease, stop: τὰ ἔτη, Heb. i. 12 fr. Ps. ci. 
(cii.) 28 (where for DA); ἡ πίστις, Lk. xxii. 32; riches, 
acc. to the reading ἐκλίπῃ (L txt. T Tr WH), Lk. xvi. 
9 (often so in Grk. writ., and the Sept. as Jer. vii. 28; 
xxviii. (li.) 30). as often in classic Grk. fr. Thuc. 
down, it is used of the failing or eclipse of the light of 
the sun and the moon: τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλιπόντος [ WH ἐκλεί- 
movros |, the sun having failed [or failing], Lk. xxiii. 45 
'Tdf.; on this (without doubt the true) reading [see esp. 
WH. App. ad loc., and] ef., besides Tdf.’s note, Keim 
iii. 440 [Eng. trans. vi. 173] (Sir. xvii. 31 (26)). to 
expire, die; so aec. to RG L προ. ἐκλίπητε in Lk. xvi. 9, 
(Tob. xiv. 11; Sap. v. 13; Sept. for yj, Gen. xxv. 8, 
ete.; Ps. ciii (civ.) 29; Lam.i.19; for nm, Jer. xlix. 
(xli.)17,22. Plat.legg. 6, 759 e.; 9,856 e.; Xen. Cyr. 
8, 7, 26).* 

ἐκ-λεκτός, -7, -óv, (ἐκλέγω), picked out, chosen; rare in 
Grk. writ. as Thuc. 6, 100; Plat. lez. 11 p. 938 b.; 12, 
948 a., etc.; Sept. for ΓΞ and wvn3; inthe N. T. 1. 
chosen by God, and Xa. to obtain salvation through 
Christ (see ἐκλέγω); hence Christians are called oí 
ἐκλεκτοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ, the chosen or elect of God, [cf. W. 35 
(34); 234 (219)], (AIM "Yr3, said of pious Israelites, 
Is. Ixv. 9, 15, 23; Ps. civ. (ev.) 43, cf. Sap. iv. 15) : Lk. 
xvii. 7; Ro. viii. 33; Col.ii.12; Tit.i.1; without the 
gen. θεοῦ, Mt. xxiv. 22, 24; Mk. xiii. 20, 22; 1 Pet. 1.1; 


with the addition of τοῦ Χριστοῦ, as gen. of possessor, | 


Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27 [T Tr om. gen.]; κλητοὶ καὶ 
ἐκλεκτοὶ x. πιστοί, Rev. xvii. 14; γένος ἐκλεκτόν, 1 Pet. ii. 
9 (fr. Is. xliii. 20, cf. Add. to Esth. viii. 40 [vi. 17, p. 64 


191 














ἐκλύω 


ed. Fritz.]) ; ἐκλεκτοί, those who have become true par- 
takers of the Christian salvation are contrasted with 
κλητοί, those who have been invited but who have not 
shown themselves fitted to obtain it, [al. regard the 
‘called’ and the ‘chosen’ here as alike partakers of 
salvation, but the latter as the * choice ones' (see 2 be- 
low), distinguished above the former; cf. Jas. Morison 
or Meyer ad loc.], Mt. xx. 16 [here T WH om. Tr br. the 
cl.]; xxii. 14; finally, those are called ἐκλεκτοί who are 
destined for salvation but have not yet been brought to 
it, 2 Tim. ii. 10 [but cf. Huther or Ellie. ad loc.]. b. 
The Messiah is called preéminently 6 ἐκλεκτὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, 
as appointed by God to the most exalted office conceiv- 
able: Lk. xxiii. 35, ef. ix. 35 L mrg. T Tr WH; cf. 
Dillmann, Das Buch Henoch [übers. τι. erklürt; allgem. 
Einl.], p. xxiii. c. Angels are called ἐκλεκτοί, as 
those whom God has chosen out from other created 
beings to be peculiarly associated with him, and his hieh- 
est ministers in governing the universe: 1 Tim. v. 21; 
see ἅγιος, 1 b.; μαρτύρομαι δὲ ἐγὼ μὲν ὑμῶν rà ἅγια kai 
τοὺς ἱεροὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ θεοῦ, Joseph. b. 1. 2, 16, 4 sub 
fin.; [yet al. explain by 2 Pet. ii.4; Jude 6; οἵ. Ellic. on 
£1 dis Jb Geo] 2. univ. choice, select, i. e. the best of 
its kind or class, excellent, preéminent: applied to cer- 
tain individual Christians, 2 Jn. 1, 13; with ἐν κυρίῳ 
added, eminent as a Christian (see ev, I. 6 b.), Ro. 
xvi. 13; of things: λίθος, 1 Pet. ii. 4, [6], (Is. xxviii. 16; 2 
Esdr. v. 8; Enoch c. 8 Grk. txt., ed. Dillmann p. 82 sq.).* 

ἐκλογή. -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐκλέγω), election, choice ; a. the act 
of picking out, choosing: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς (gen. of quality ; 
cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. 161 (140 sq.) ]), 1. q. ἐκλεκτόν, sc. τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Acts ix. 15; spec. used of that act of God's free 
will by which before the foundation of the world he de- 
creed his blessings to certain persons ;—7 κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν 
πρόθεσις, the decree made from choice [ A. V. the purpose 
acc. to election, cf. W. 193 (182)], Ro. ix. 11 (cf. Fritz- 
sche ad loc. p. 298 sqq.) ; — partieularly that by which 
he determined to bless certain persons through Christ, 
Ro. xi. 28; κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν χάριτος, according to an election 
which is due to grace, or a gracious election, ἜΣ σὴ 5» 
with gen. of the pers. elected, 1 ΤῊ. i. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10. 
b. the thing or person chosen: i. q. ἐκλεκτοί, Ro. xi. 7. 
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Dion. Hal., al.)* 

ἐκ-λύω : [Pass., pres. éxhvouar]; pf. ptep. ἐκλελυμένος ; 
1 aor. ἐξελύθην:; 1 fut. ἐκλυθήσομαι ; often in Grk. writ. 
fr. [Hom.]. Aeschyl. down ; 1. to loose, unloose (cf. 
Germ. auslésen), to set free: τινά twos and ἔκ τινος. 2. 
to dissolve; metaph. to weaken, relax, exhaust, (Sept. Josh. 
x. 6; Jer. xly. (xxxviii.) 4; Aristot. h. an. 9, 1 sub fin. 
[p. 610°, 27]; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 3; 13,8, 1). Com- 
monly in the Pass. a. to have one's strength relaxed, to 
be enfeebled through exhaustion, to grow weak, grow weary, 
be tired out, (often so in Grk. writ.): of the body, Mt. 
ix. 36 Rec.; xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3; thus for 47}, 1 S. xiv. 
28; 2S. xvii. 29; for 797, 2 S. iv. 1 ete.; of the mind, 
Gal. vi. 9 (μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι if we faint not, sc. in well-do- 
ing). Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 17. b. to despond, 
become faint-hearted: Heb. xii. 5, (Deut. xx. 3; Prov. 


ἐκμάσσω 


ii. 11); with ταῖς ψυχαῖς added, Heb. xii. 3; τοῖς σώ- 
μασι, ταῖς ψυχαῖς, Polyb. 20,4, 7; τῇ ψυχῇ, 29, 6, 14 ; 
40, 12, 7; cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. ix. 8; 2 Mace. iii. 24." 

ἐκ-μάσσω ; impf. ἐξέμασσον; 1 aor. ἐξέμαξα; to wipe 
off, to wipe away: with ace. of object and dat. of instru- 
ment, Lk. vii. 38, 44; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3 ;*xiii. 5. (Soph., 
Eur. Hippoer., Aristot. al. Sir. xii. 11; Bar. vi. (ep. 
Jer.) 12, 23 (13, 24).)* 

ἐκ-μυκτηρίζω : impf. é£eavkrzpi£ov; to deride by turning 
up the nose, to sneer at, scoff at: τινά, Lk. xvi. 145 xxiii. 
35. (For ap, Ps. ii. 4; [xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16]; 2 K. xix. 
21 [here the simple verb]; 1 Esdr.i. 49 Alex.; Ev. 
Nicod. e. 10. Prof. writ. use the simple verb (fr. μυκτήρ 
the nose) ; [cf. W. 25].)* 

&-veóo : 1 aor. ἐξένευσα; 1. to bend to one side (τῇ 
κεφαλῇ, Xen. ven. 10, 12). 2. to take one's self away, 
withdraw: Jn. v. 13, where Chrysostom says that ἐξέ- 
νευσε is equiv. to ἐξέκλινε; but others derive the form 
from ἐκνέω, q. v. (Sept. for 30, Judg. iv. 18 Alex. ; 123, 
to turn one’s self, Judg. xviii. 26 Alex.; 2 K. ii. 24; xxiii. 
16; [add 3 Macc. iii. 22; Joseph. antt. 7, 4, 2]. In prof. 
auth. also transitively, to avoid a thing; as rà βέλη, Diod. 
15, 87; πληγήν, ib. 17, 100.) * 

ἐκ-νέω: 1. properly, to swim away, escape by swim- 
ming, (Thue. 2, 90). 2. to escape, slip away secretly, 
([Pind. ΟἹ. 13, 163]; Eur. Hipp. 470, ete.) ; in this sense 
many interpp. take é£évevoe in Jn. v. 13. But Jesus 
withdrew not to avoid danger but the admiration of the 
people; for the danger first arose after his withdrawal." 

&cvfjóo: 1 aor. ἐξένηψα; a. prop. fo return to one's 
self from drunkenness, become sober, (Gen. ix. 94 ; [1 5. 
xxv. 37]; Joeli.5; [Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 2]; Lynceus ap. 
Ath. 4, 5 p. 130 b.). b. metaph. to return to soberness 
of mind (ef. àvavio) : 1 Co. xv. 34, (Plut. Dem. 20).* 

ἑκούσιος, -ov, (ἑκών ), voluntary: κατὰ ἑκούσιον, of free 
will, Philem. 14. (Num. xv. 3; καθ᾽ ἑκουσίαν, Thue. 8, 
27 —[* The word understood in the one case appears to 
be τρόπον (Porphyr. de abst. 1, 9 καθ᾽ ἑκούσιον τρόπον, 
comp. Eur. Med. 751 ἑκουσίῳ rpózo) ; inthe other, γνώμην 
so ἑκουσίᾳ [ doubtful, see L. and S.], ἐξ ἑκουσίας, ete. ;” 
cf. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 1. ¢.; cf. 
W. 463 (432)].)* 

ἑκουσίως, adv., [fr. Eur. down], voluntarily, willingly, 
of one’s own accord: Heb. x. 26 (ἐκ. ἁμαρτάνειν [ A. V. 
to sin wilfully] is tacitly opposed to sins committed 
inconsiderately, and from ignorance or from weakness) ; 
1 Pet. v. 2.* 


ἔκ-παλαι, adv., (fr. ἐκ and πάλαι, formed like ἔκτοτε [cf. 


W. 24 (23); 422 (393); B. 321 (275)]), from of old; of 


a long time: 2 Pet. ii: 3; iii. 5. (A later Grk. word, fr. 
Philo down; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sqq.) * 
ἐκ-πειράζω ; fut. ἐκπειράσω ; [1 aor. ἐξεπείρασα, 1 Co. x. 
95 Lmrg. T WH mrg.]; a word wholly biblical [put by 
Philo (de congr. ernd. grat. §30, Mang. i. 543) for Sept. 
meta. in quoting Deut. viii. 2]; to prove, test, thoroughly 
LA. V. tempt]: τινά, his mind and judgment, Lk. x. 25; 


198 








> / 
ἐκπλήσσω 


τὸν Χριστόν, by irreligion and immorality to test the 
patience or the avenging power of Christ (exalted to 
God's right hand), 1 Co. x. 9* [(yet L T WH Tr txt. 
κύριον), 9" L mrg. T WH mrg. Cf. Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 
18].* 

ἐκ-πέμπω : 1 aor. ἐξέπεμψα: 1 aor. pass. ptep. ἐκπεμ- 
φθείς ; to send forth, send away: Acts xiii. 4; xvii. 10. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

ἐκ-περισσῶς, adv., exceedingly, out of measure, the more: 
used of intense earnestness, Mk. xiv. 31 L T Tr WH 
(for Rec. ἐκ περισσοῦ ) ; not found elsewhere. But see 
irepekrepug as." 

ἐκ-πετάννυμι : 1 aor. ἐξεπέτασα; to spread out, stretch 
forth: τὰς χεῖρας πρός twa, Ro. x. 21 fr. Is. Ixv. 2, (Eur., 
Polyb., Plut., Anthol., al.) * 

ἐκ-πηδάω, -0: 1 aor. ἐξεπήδασα: to spring out, leap 
Jorth: εἰς v. ὄχλον, Acts xiv. 14 GL Ὁ Tr WH. (eis τὸν 
Aaóv, Judith xiv. 17; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. 
down. Deut. xxxiii. 22.) * 

ἐκ-πίπτω ; pf. ἐκπέπτωκα ; 2 aor. ἐξέπεσον ; 1 aor. ἐξέ- 
meoa (Acts xii. 7 LT Tr WH; Gal. v. 4; on this aor. 
see [πίπτω and] ἀπέρχομαι) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall 
out of, to fall down from; 1. prop.: ai ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν 
χειρῶν (see ἐκ, T. 3 [cf. W. 427 (398) and De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. ii. p. 11]), Acts xii. 7 (ἐκ τῆς θήκης, Is. vi. 13; 
ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. Is. xiv. 12) ; absol: Mk. xiii. 25 RG; 
Acts xxvii. 32; Jas.i. 11; 1 Pet. i. 24; of navigators, 
ἐκπ. eis (i. e. from a straight course) to fall off i. e. be 
driven into [cf. Stallbaum on Plato's Phileb. p. 106 sq. ; 
al. supply ‘from deep water,’ and render ékz. to be cast 
away |, Acts xxvii. 17, 26, 29, in this last vs. L T Tr WH 
have adopted ἐκπ. κατά ; (often in Grk. writ., as εἰς γῆν, 
Eur. Hel. 409; εἰς τὸν λιμένα, Thue. 2, 92). 2. met- 
aph. a. τινός [W. 427 (398), and De verb. comp. ete. 
u. 5.7, to fall from a thing, to lose it: τῆς χάριτος, Gal. v. 
4; τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ, 2 Pet. iii. 17, (τῆς πρὸς τὸν δῆμον 
εὐνοίας, Plut. Tib. Gracch. 21; βασιλείας, Joseph. antt. 
7,9, 2; also with prepositions, ἐκ τῶν ἐόντων, Hat. 3, 14; 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἐλπίδων, Thuc. 8, 81); πόθεν, Rev. ii. 5 Rec. 
(ἐκεῖθεν, Ael. v. h. 4, 7). b. absol. to perish; to fail, 
(properly, to fall from a place which one cannot keep, 
fall from its position) : ἡ ἀγάπη, 1 Co. xiii. 8 RG; to fall 
powerless, fall to the ground, be without effect: of the 
divine promise of salvation by Christ, Ro. ix. 6.* 

ἐκ-πλέω : [impf. ἐξέπλεον]; 1 aor. é£émAevaa; to sail 
from, sail away, depart by ship: ἀπό with gen. of place, 
Acts xx. 6; εἰς with acc. of place, Acts xv. 39 ; xviii. 18. 
[Soph., Hdt., Thuc., al.] * 

ἐκ-πληρόω : pf. ἐκπεπλήρωκα; to fill full, to fill up com- 
pletely; metaph. τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, to fulfil i. e. make good : 
Acts xiii. 33 (32), as in Polyb. 1, 67, 1. [From Hdt. 
down.]* 

ék-mAfjpocts, -ews, 7, a completing, fulfilment : τ. ἡμερῶν 
τ. ἁγνισμοῦ. the time when the days of purification are 
to end, Acts xxi. 26. [Dion. Hal., Strab., Philo, al.]* 

ἐκ-πλήσσω, -τττω : Pass. [pres. ἐκπλήσσομαι or -rropat 


τὸν θεόν, to put to proof God’s character and power: | (so RG Mt. xiii. 54; Tr WH Acts xiii. 12)]; impf. ἐξ- 
Mt. iv. 7; Lk. iv. 12, after Deut. vi. 16, where for 123; | επλησσόμην; 2 aor. ἐξεπλάγην ; com. in Grk. fr. Hom. 


Ed , 
€x veo 


down; prop. to strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or 
away; to cast off by a blow, to drive out; commonly, to 
strike one out of self-possession, to strike with panic, shock, 
astonish; Pass. to be struck with astonishment, astonished, 
amazed ; absol.: Mt. xiii. 54; xix. 25; Mk. vi. 2; x. 26; 
Lk. ii. 48; used of the glad amazement of the wonder- 
ing people, Mk. vii. 37; ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ, Mt. vii. 28; xxii. 
33; Mk. 1. 22; xi. 18; Lk.iv.32; Acts xiii. 12; [ἐπὶ τῇ μεγα- 
λειότητι, Lk. ix. 43], (ἐπὶ τῷ κάλλει, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27; 
ἐπὶ τῇ θέᾳ, Ael. v. h. 12, 41; [W.§ 33, b.]; by the Greeks 
also with simple dat. and with acc. of the thing, as Sap. 
xii. 4; 2 Mace. vii. 12). [SvN. see φοβέω, fin.]* 
ék-mvéo : 1 aor. ἐξέπνευσα ; to breathe out, breathe out 
one’s life, breathe one's last, expire: Mk. xv. 37, 39; Lk. 
xxiii. 46, and often in Grk. writ., both without an object 
(fr. [Soph. Aj. 1026] Eur. down), and with βίον or ψυχήν 
added (fr. Aeschyl. down).* 
€k-ropevonar; impf. ἐξεπορευόμην ; fut. ἐκπορεύσομαι ; 
(pass. [mid., cf. πορεύω] of ἐκπορεύω to make to go forth, 
to lead out, with fut. mid.); [fr. Xen. down]; Sept. for 
WX^; to go forth, go out, depart; 1. prop.; with men- 
tion of the place whence: dzó, Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46; 
ἔξω (τῆς πόλεως), Mk. xi. 19; ἐκ, Mk. xiii. 1; ἐκεῖθεν, Mk. 
vi. 11; παρά twos, from one's abode, one's vicinity, Jn. 
xv. 26, (ἀκούσωμεν τὰ ἐκπορευόμενα παρὰ κυρίου, Ezek. 
xxxiii. 30); without mention of the place whence or 
«whither, which must be learned from the context: Lk. 
iii. 7; Acts xxv. 4; with mention of the end to which: 
ἐπί twa, Rey. xvi. 14; πρός τινα, Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5; ἐκ- 
πορεύεσθαι eis ὁδόν, to go forth from some place into the 
road [or on his way, cf. ὁδός, 1 b.], Mk. x. 17; on Acts 
ix.28 see εἰσπορεύομαι, 1 a. demons, when expelled, are 
said to go out (sc. from the human body): Mt. xvii. 21 
RGL; Aetsxix. 12 GL'T Tr WH. [food (excrement) ] 
to go out i. e. be discharged, Mk. vii. 19. to come forth, 
ἐκ τῶν μνημείων, of the dead who are restored to life and 
leave the tomb, Jn. v. 29. 2. fig. to come forth, to issue, 
to proceed: with the adjuncts ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ἐκ τῆς 
καρδίας, ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, of feelings, affections, deeds, 
sayings, Mt. xv. 11,18; Mk. vii. 15 L T Tr WH, 20; Lk. 
iv. 22; Eph. iv. 29; [ἔσωθεν ἐκ τῆς καρδίας, Mk. vii. 21; 
with ἔσωθεν alone, ibid. 23]; πᾶν ῥῆμα ἐκπορ. διὰ στόματος 
θεοῦ, every appointment whereby God bids a man to be 
nourished and preserved, Mt. iv. 4, fr. Deut. viii. 3. 
break forth: of lightnings, flames, etc., ἔκ τινος, Rev. iv. 5; 
ix. 17 sq.; xi. 5. to flow forth: of a river (ἔκ r.), Rev. 
xxii. 1. 1o project, from the mouth of one: of a sword, 
Rev. i. 16; x. 15, 21 Rec. to spread abroad, of a ru- 
mor : foll. by eis, Lk. iv. 87. [Svx. cf. ἔρχομαι, fin.]* 
ἐκ-πορνεύω: 1 aor. ptep. fem. ἐκπορνεύσασα ; (the prefix 
ἐκ seems to indicate a lust that gluts itself, satisfies itself 
completely); Sept. often for 731; to go a whoring, ‘give 
one’s self over to fornication’ A. V.: Jude 7. Not found 
in prof. writ. [Test. xii. Patr. test. Dan § 5; Poll. 6, 30 
(126).]* 
éx-rriw: 1 aor. ἐξέπτυσα; to spit out (Hom. Od. 5, 322, 
etc.); trop. to reject, spurn, loathe: ri, Gal. iv. 14, in 
which sense the Greeks used karamrvew, προσπτύειν, 


to 


199 











ἐκτείνω 


πτύειν, and Philo παραπτύειν ; cf. Kypke and Loesner [or 
Ellic.] on Gal. 1. e.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 17.* 

ἐκ-ριζόω, τῶ : 1 aor. ἐξερίζωσα ; Pass., 1 aor. ἐξεριζώθην; 
1 fut. ἐκριζωθήσομαι; to root out, pluck up by the roots: τί, 
Mt. xiii. 29; xv. 13; Lk. xvii. 6; Jude12. (Jer.i. 10; 
Zeph. ii. 4 ; Sir. iii. 9; [Sap. iv.4]; 1 Mace. v. 51 [Alex.]; 
2 Macc. xii. 7; [Sibyll. frag. 2, 21; al.]; Geopon.) * 

ἔκ-στασις, -ews, 7), (ἐξίστημι) ; 1. univ. in Grk. writ. 
any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state ; 
displacement, (Aristot., Plut.). 2. a throwing of the 
mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether 
such as makes a lunatie (διανοίας, Deut. xxviii. 28; τῶν 
λογισμῶν, Plut. Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some 
sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself, 
so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his 
mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and 
wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the 
forms and images lying within, and thinks that he per- 
ceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him 
by God, (Philo, quis rerum divin. heres $53 [cf. 51; B. D. 
s. v. Trance; Delitzsch, Psychol. v. 5]) : ἐπέπεσεν [ Rec., al. 
ἐγένετο] ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις, Acts x. 10; εἶδεν ἐν ἐκστάσει 
ὅραμα, Acts xi. 5; γενέσθαι ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts xxii. 17, cf. 
2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 3. In the O. T. and the New amaze- 
ment [cf. Longin. 1, 4; Stob. flor. tit. 104, 7], the state of 
one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of 
an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and won- 
der: εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος kai ἔκστασις, Mk. xvi. 8; ἐξέστη- 
cav ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ, Mk. v. 42 (Ezek. xxvi. 16); ἔκστασις 
ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας, Lk. v. 26; ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους x. ἐκστά- 
σεως, Acts iii. 10; (for ΓΤ ΠῚ, trembling, Gen. xxvii. 33 ; 
1 S. xiv. 15, ete.; 113, fear, 2 Chr. xiv. 14, etc.).* 

ἐκ-στρέφω: pf. pass. ἐξέστραμμαι ; 1. to turn or twist 
out, tear up, (Hom. Il. 17, 58). 2. to turn inside out, 
invert; trop. to change for the worse, pervert, corrupt, 
(Arstph. nub. 554; Sept. Deut. xxxii. 20): Tit. iii. 11.* 

[ἐκ-σώζω : 1 aor. ἐξέσωσα; to save from, either to keep 
or to rescue from danger (fr. Aeschyl. and IHdt. down): 
εἰς αἰγιαλὸν ἐκσῶσαι τὸ πλοῖον to bring the ship safe to 
shore, Acts xxvii. 39 WH txt.; al. ἐξῶσαι, see ἐξωθέω, and 
eint rcs 

ἐκ-ταράσσω ; post-classical ; to agitate, trouble, exceed- 
ingly: T. πόλιν, Acts xvi. 20. (τ. δῆμον, Plut. Coriol. 19, 
and the like often in Dion Cass. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5; 
Sap. xvii. 3, ete.) * 

ἐκ-τείνω ; [impf. é£érewov]; fut. ἐκτενῶ; 1 aor. ἐξέτεινα ; 
[fr.Aeschyl., Soph., Hdt. down]; Sept. com. ἔον ΠΣ, #713 
and mw; to stretch out, stretch forth: τὴν χεῖρα (often 
in Sept.), Mt. viii. 3; xii. 13; xiv. 915 xxvi. 515 Mk. i 
41; ii. 5; Lk. v. 13; vi. 10; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xxvi. 1; 
with the addition of ἐπί twa, over, towards, against one 
— either to point out something, Mt. xii. 49, or to lay 
hold of a person in order to do him violence, Lk. xxii. 
53; ékr. τ. χεῖρα eis ἴασιν, spoken of God, Acts iv. 30; 
ἀγκύρας. properly, to carry forward [R. V. lay out] the 
cable to which the anchor is fastened, i. e. to cast anchor, 
[the idea of extending the cables runs into that of car- 


| rying out and dropping the anchors " (Hackett) ; ef. B. D. 


ἐκτελέω 


Am. ed. p. 3009* last par.], Acts xxvii. 80, [Cowr.: ἐπ-, 
bmep-exretvo. ] * 

ἐκ-τελέω, τῶ : 1 aor. inf. ἐκτελέσαι :; to finish, complete : 
Lk. xiv. 29 sq. (From Hom. down; i. q. 153, Deut. 
xxxii. 45.)* 

ἐκ-τένεια, -as, ἡ, (ἐκτενής), ἃ later Grk. word, (cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p.311); a. prop. extension. b. intentness 
(of mind), earnestness: ἐν éxreveta, earnestly, Acts xxvi. 7. 
(2 Macc. xiv. 38; Judith iv. 9. Cf. Grimm on 3 Macc. 
vi. 41 [where he refers to Cic. ad Att. 10, 17, 1].)* 

ἐκτενής, -és, (exreivw), prop. stretched out; fig." intent, 
earnest, assiduous : προσευχή, Acts xii. 5 R G (εὐχή, Ignat. 
[interpol.] ad Eph. 10; δέησις x. ἱκεσία, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
59,2); ἀγάπη. 1 Pet. iv. 8. Neut. of the compar. exre- 
véarepov, as adv., more intently, more earn estly, Lk. xxii. 44 
ΓΙ, br. WH reject the pass.]. (ἐκτενὴς φίλος, Aeschyl. 
suppl. 983; Polyb. 22, 5,4; then very often fr. Philo 
on; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311.) * 

ἐκτενῶς, adv., earnestly, fervently: Acts xii. 5 L T Tr 
WH; ἀγαπᾶν. 1 Pet.i.22. (Jonah iii. 8; Joel i. 14; 3 
Mace. v.9. Polyb.ete. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311; [W. 
25; 463 (431)]-)* 

ἐκ-τίθημι : leaor. pass. ptep. ἐκτεθείς ; Mid., impf. ἐξετι- 
θέμην ; 2 aor. ἐξεθέμην; to place or set out, expose ; als 
prop.: an infant, Acts vii. 21; (Sap. xviii. 5; [Hdt. 1, 
112]; Arstph. nub. 531; Ael. v. h. 2, 7; Leian. de 
sacrif. 5, and often). 2. Mid. metaph. to set forth, de- 
clare, expound: Acts xi. 4; τί, Actsxviii. 26; xxviii. 23; 
([Aristot. passim]; Diod. 12, 18; Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 2; 
Athen. 7 p. 278 d.; al.).* 

ἐκ-τινάσσω: 1 aor. impy. ἐκτινάξατε : 1 aor. mid. ptep. 
ékrwa£ápevos ; to shake off, so that something adhering 
shall fall: τὸν χοῦν, Mk. vi. 11; τὸν κονιορτόν, Mt. x. 14 
(where the gen. τῶν ποδῶν does not depend on the verb 
but on the subst. [L T WH mrg., however, insert éx]) ; 
by this symbolic act a person expresses extreme con- 
tempt for another and refuses to have any further inter- 
course with him [ B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Dust] ; Mid. to shake 
off for (the cleansing of) one's self: τ. κονιορτὸν . . . ἐπί 
τινα, against one, Acts xiii. 51; rà ἱμάτια, dust from gar- 
ments, Acts xviii. 6; [cf. B. D. u.s., Neh. v.13]. (to knock 
out, τοὺς ὀδόντας, Hom. Il. 16, 348; Plut. Cat. maj. 14.)* 

ἕκτος, -7, -ov, the sixth: Mt. xx. 5, ete. [From Hom. 
down. ] 

ἐκτός, adv., (opp. to ἐντός, q. v.), outside, beyond; a. 
τὸ ἐκτός, the outside, exterior, with possess. gen., Mt. xxiii. 
26 (cf. τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου, 25). On the pleonastie 
phrase ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, see ei, III. 8d. — b. It has the force of 
a prep. [ef. W. § 54,6], and is foll. by the gen. [so even 
in Hom.]; a. outside of: ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος out of the 
body, i. e. freed from it, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. (in vs. 3 L T Tr 
WH read χωρίς for ἐκτός) ; εἶναι ἐκτὸς τοῦ cap. [A. V. 
without the body i. e.], does not pertain to the body, 1 
Co. vi. 18. f. beyond, besides, except: Acts xxvi. 22 
(where the constr. is οὐδὲν λέγων ἐκτὸς τούτων, ἅτε οἱ . - . 
ἐλάλησαν etc. [cf. B. 287 (246) ; W. 158 (149) sq.]) ; 1 
Co. xv. 27. (Sept. for 735 foll. by 712, Judg. viii. 26 ; 
3355, 1K. x. 13; 2 Chr. ix. 12; xvii. 19.) * 


200 








|.23 T Trtxt. WH- 


ἐκφεύγω. 


ἐκ-τρέπω : Pass., [pres. ἐκτρέπομαι ; 2 aor. ἐξετράπην; 
2 fut. ἐκτραπήσομαι; 1. to turn or twist out; pass. in 
a medical sense, in a fig. of the limbs: ἵνα μὴ τὸ χωλὸν 
ἐκτραπῇ. lest it be wrenched out of (its proper) place, 
dislocated, [R. V. mrg. put out of joint], (see exx. of this 
use fr. med. writ. in Steph. "Thesaur. iii. col. 607 d.), i. e. 
lest he who is weak in a state of grace fall therefrom, 
Heb. xii. 13 [but Lünem., Delitzsch, al., still adhere to 
the meaning turn aside, go astray; cf. A. V., R. V. txt.]. 
2. to turn off or aside; pass. in a mid. sense [cf. B. 192 
(166 sq.)], to turn one’s self aside, to be turned aside; (in- 
trans.) fo turn aside; Hesych.: ἐξετράπησαν - ἐξέκλιναν, 
(τῆς ὁδοῦ, Leian. dial. deor. 25, 2; Ael. v. h. 14, 49 [48]; 
ἔξω τῆς ὁδοῦ, Arr. exp. Al. 3, 21, 7 [4]; absol. Xen. an. 
4, 0,15; Arstph. Plut. 837; with mention of the place 
to which, Hdt. 6, 34; Plat. Soph. p. 222 a.; al.); figu- 
ratively : eis paratoXoyíav, 1 Tim. i. 6; ἐπὶ τοὺς μύθους, 2 
Tim. iv. 4; ὀπίσω τινός, to turn away from one in order to 
follow another, 1 Tim. v. 15, (εἰς ἀδίκους πράξεις, Joseph. 
antt. 8, 10, 2). with ace. to turn away from, to shun a 
thing, to avoid meeting or associating with one: τὰς kevo- 
φωνίας, 1 Tim. vi. 20, (τὸν ἔλεγχον, Polyb. 35, 4, 14; 
Τάλλους ἐκτρέπεσθαι καὶ σύνοδον φεύγειν τὴν μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, 
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 40).* 

ἐκ-τρέφω : fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. to nourish up to: 
maturity; then univ. to nourish: τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σάρκα, Eph. 
v. 29. 2. to nurture, bring up: τὰ τέκνα, Eph. vi. 4.* , 

[éxrpopos, adj., (cf. expoBos), trembling exceedingly, ex- 
ceedingly terrified : Heb. xii. 21 Tr mrg. WH mrg., after 
codd. Sin. and Clarom. (al. ἔντρομος, q. v.). Not found 
elsewhere.* ] 

ἔκ-τρωμα, -ros, τό, (ἐκτιτρώσκω to cause or to suffer abor- 
tion; like ἔκβρωμα fr. ἐκβιβρώσκω), an abortion, abortive 
birth; an untimely birth: 1 Co. xv. 8, where Paul likens 
himself to an ἔκτρωμα, and in vs. 9 explains in what sense : 
that he is as inferior to the rest of the apostles as an im- 
mature birth comes short of a mature one, and is no more 
worthy of the name of an apostle than an abortion is of 
the name of a child. (Num. xii. 12; Eccl. vi. 3; Job 
iii. 16; in Grk. first used by Aristot. de gen. an. 4, 5, 4 
[p. 7735, 18]; but, as Phrynichus shows, p. 208 sq. ed. 
Lob., [288 sq. ed. Rutherford], ἄμβλωμα and ἐξάμβλωμα 
are preferable; [Huxtable in “ Expositor” for Apr. 1882: 
p. 277 sqq. ; Bp. Lghift. Ignat. ad Rom. 9 p. 230 sq.].) * 

ἐκ-φέρω ; fut. ἐξοίσω ; 1 aor. ἐξήνεγκα ; 2 aor. ἐξήνεγκον ; 
1. to carry out, to bear forth: twa, Acts v. 15; the dead 
for burial, Acts v. 6, 9 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. Il. 24, 786 down; see éxxopi(o) ; τί, @k. xv. 22; 1 
Tim. vi. 7. 2. to (bring i. e.) lead out : τινά, Mk. viii. 
3. to bring forth i. e. produce : of 
the earth bearing plants, Heb. vi. 8 [cf. W. § 45, 6 a.]; 
(Hdt. 1,193; Xen. oec. 16, 5; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 and often; 


| Sept., Gen. i. 12; Hag. i. 11; Cant. ii. 13).* 


ἐκ- φεύγω : fut. ἐκφεύξομαι ; pf. exmepevya; 2 aor. é£- 
épvyov; [fr. Hom. down]; to flee out of, flee away; 8. 
to seek safety in flight; absol. Acts xvi. 27; ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου, 
Acts xix. 16. b. to escape: 1 Th. v. 3; Heb. ii. 3; τί, 
Lk. xxi. 36; Ro. ii. 3; τινά, Heb. xii. 25 L T Tr WH ;. 


ἐκφοβέω 


[τὰς χεῖράς τινος, 2 Co. xi. 33. 
(128) sq.].* 

ἐκ-φοβέω, -ῶ ; to frighten away, to terrify ; to throw into 
violent fright: τινά, 2 Co. x. 9. (Deut. xxviii. 26 ; Zeph. 
iii. 13, ete. ; Thuc., Plat., al.) * 

ἔκφοβος, -ov, stricken with fear or terror, exceedingly 
frightened, terrified: Mk. ix. 6; Heb. xii. 21 fr. Deut. ix. 
19. (Aristot. physiogn. 6 [p. 812*, 29]; Plut. Fab. 6.)* 

ἐκ-φύω ; 2 aor. pass. ἐξεφύην (W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60) ; 
Kriiger § 40, s. v. Qvo; [Veitch ibid. ]) ; [fr. Hom. down]: 
to generate or produce from; to cause to grow out: ὅταν 6 
κλάδος . . . τὰ φύλλα ἐκφύῃ (subj. pres.), when the branch 
has become tender and puts forth leaves, R (not R*) G'T 
WH in Mt. xxiv. 32 and Mk. xiii. 28; [al., retaining the 
same accentuation, regard it as 2 aor. act. subj. intrans., 
with rà φύλ. as subject; but against the change of sub- 
ject see Meyer or Weiss]. But Fritzsche, Lchm., Trez., 
al. have with reason restored [after Erasmus] ἐκφυῇ (2 
aor. pass. subj.), which Grsb. had approved: when the 
leaves have grown out,—so that ra φύλλα is the subject.* 

ἐκ-χέω and (a form censured by the grammarians, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 726) ἐκχύνω (whence pres. pass. ptep. 
éxxuvopevos and, in L T Tr WH after the Aeolic form, 
ékxvvvópevos [cf. B. 69 (61); W.$2,14d.; Tf. Proleg. 
p. 79]: Mt. xxiii. 35; xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24; Lk. xi. 50 
[where Tr txt. WH txt. ἐκκεχυμένον for ékxvvvópevov] ; 
xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]); impv. plur. ἐκχέετε 
(Rev. xvi. 1 L T WH; on which uncontr. form ef. Bitm. 
Gram. p. 196 [p. 174 Robinson's trans.]; B. 44 (38); 
[some would make it a 2 aor., see WH. App. p. 1657); 
fut. ἐκχεῶ (Acts ii. 17 sq.; Ex. xxix. 12), for which the 
earlier Greek used ἐκχεύσω (W. 77 (74); [cf. 85 (82); 
esp. B. 68 (60)]); 1 aor. ἐξέχεα, 3 pers. sing. ἐξέχεε 
([whereas the 3 sing. of the impf. is contr. -éxee -€yet, 
ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 299 sq.]; cf. Bttm. Gram. 
p. 196 note "* [ Eng. trans. u. s. note f ]), inf. ἐκχέαι (Ro. 
iii. 15; Is. lix. 7; Ezek. ix. 8); Pass., [pres. ἐκχεῖται, 
Mk. ii. 22 RG L Tr mrg.br.; impf. 3 pers. sing. é£exeiro, 
Acts xxii. 20 R ἃ, é£exvvvero L T Tr WH); pf. ἐκκέ- 
χυμαι; 1 aor. ἐξεχύθην; 1 fut. ἐκχυθήσομαι (see B. 69 
(60) sq.); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 33:2; to pour out; 
a. prop.: φιάλην, by meton. of the container for the 
contained, Rev. xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; of wine, which 
when the vessel is burst runs out and is lost, Mt. ix. 17: 
Mk. ii. 22 [R G L Tr mrg. in br.]: Lk. v. 37; used of 
other things usually guarded with care which are poured 
forth or cast out: of money, Jn. ii. 15; ἐξεχύθη τὰ σπλάγ- 
xva, of the ruptured body of a man, Acts i. 18 (ἐξεχύθη 
ἡ κοιλία αὐτοῦ εἰς τ. γῆν. of a man thrust through with a 
sword, 2S. xx. 10). The phrase αἷμα ἐκχεῖν or ἐκχύ- 
v(v)ew is freq. used of bloodshed: [Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 
50; Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6* (where Ταῦ. 
aipara)]; see αἷμα, 2 a. b. metaph. i. q. to bestow or 
distribute largely (cf. Fritzsche on Tob. iv. 17 and Sir. 
i 8): τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον or ἀπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος, i. e. the 
abundant bestowal of the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33 fr. 
Joel ii. 28, 29 (iii. 1, 2); ἐπί τινα, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45; 
Tit. iii. 6; ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις 


, 


Cf. W. § 52, 4,4; B. 146 


201 








ἐλαιών; 


ἡμῶν διὰ mv. ἁγίου. the Holy Spirit gives our souls a rich 
sense of the greatness of God’s love for us, Ro. v. 5; 
(ὀργήν, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 8, [cf. xvi. 117). The pass., 
like the Lat. effundor, me effundo, is used of those who 
give themselves up to a thing, rush headlong into it, (yé- 
hort, Alciphr.; eis ἑταίρας, Polyb. 32, 11, 4): absol. τῇ 
πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ μισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν, led astray by the 
hire of Balaam (i. 6. by the same love of reward as Ba- 
laam) they gave themselves up, sc. to wickedness, Jude 
11, (so ἐκχυθῆναι in Arstph. vesp. 1469 is used absol. of 
one giving himself up to joy. The passage in Jude is 
generally explained thus: “for hire they gave themselves 
up to [R. V. ran riotously in] the error of Balaam”; cf. 
W. 206 (194) [and De Wette (ed. Brückner) ad loc.]).* 

é-xtvw, and (L T Tr WH) ἐκχύννω, see ἐκχέω. 
[Comp.: ὑπερ- εκχύνω.] 

ἐκ-χωρέω, -ὦ ; [fr. Soph. and Hdt. on]; to depart from; 
to remove from in the sense of fleeing from: Lk. xxi. 21.. 
(For 13, Am. vii. 12.) * 

ἐκ-ψύχω: 1 aor. ἐξέψυξα; to expire, to breathe out one's 
life (see ἐκπνέω): Acts v. 5,10; xii. 23. (Hippocr., 
Jambl.) * 

ἑκών, -ovca, -óv, unforced, voluntary, willing, of one’s 
own will, of one’s own accord: Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 17. 
[From Hom. down. ]* 

ἐλαία, -as, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for m1; 1. an 
olive tree: Ro. xi. 17, 24; plur. Rev. xi. 4. τὸ ὄρος τῶν" 
ἐλαιῶν (for OI n, Zech. xiv. 4), the Mount of Olives, 
so called from the multitude of olive-trees which grew 
upon it, distant from Jerusalem (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6) 
five stadia eastward (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Oelberg; Ar- 
nold in Herzog x. p. 549 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 
354 sq.; [Grove and Porter in BB.DD.]): Mt. xxi. 1; 
xxiv. 3; xxvi. 30; Mk. xi. 1; xi. 3; xiv. 26; Lk. xix. 
37; xxii. 39; Jn. viii. 1 Réc.; (on Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37, 
see éAatov). 2. an olive, the fruit of the olive-tree: 
Jas. iii. 12.* 

ἔλαιον, -ov, τό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for 12v, 
also for à3^; olive-oil: used for feeding lamps, Mt. xxv. 
3 sq. 8; for healing the sick, Mk. vi. 13; Lk. x. 34; Jas. 
v. 14; for anointing the head and body at feasts (Athen. 
15, c. 11) [ef. s. v. μύρον], Lk. vii. 46; Heb. i. 9 (on 
which pass. see ἀγαλλίασις) : mentioned among articles. 
of commerce. Lk. xvi. 6; Rev. vi. 6; xviii. 13. Cf. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Oel; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 354; Schneder- 
mann, Die bibl. Symbolik des Oelbaumes u. d. Oeles, in 
the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1874, p. 4 sqq.; [B. D. 
s. v. Oil, II. 4; and Mey. ed. Weiss on Mk. vi. 13].* 

ἐλαιών, -ῶνος, 6, (the ending oy in derivative nouns in- 
dicating a place set with trees of the kind designated 
by the primitive, as δαφνών, ireóv, δρυμών, κεδρών, cf. 
Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 422 sqq.; Kühner i. p. 711; [Jelf 
§ 335 d.]); an olive-orchard, a place planted with olive 
trees, i.e. the Mount of Olives [ A.V. Olivet] (see ἐλαία. 1) : 
Acts i. 12 (διὰ τοῦ ἐλαιῶνος ὄρους, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 2). 
In Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37 also we should write τὸ ὄρος 7é- 
καλούμενον ἐλαιών (so L T Tr, [but WH with R G -àv]); 
likewise in Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6 πρὸς ὄρος τὸ προσαγο- 


᾿Ελαμίτης 


2, 3 els (κατὰ) 
6, 2, 8 κατὰ τὸ ἐλαιὼν ὄρος ; [but 
in Joseph. ll. ce. Bekker edits τῶν]. Cf. Fritzsche on 
Mk. p. 794 sq.; B. 22 (19 sq.) ;; W. 182 (171) n. 1; [but 
see WH. App. p. 158*]. (The Sept. sometimes render 
n freely by ἐλαιών, as Ex. xxiii. 11; Deut. vi. 11; 1 S. 
viii. 14, etc. ; not found in Grk. writ.) * 

᾿Ἐλαμίτης (T WIT'EAagetrgs, [see s. v. eu «]), του; 6, an 
Elamite, i. e.'an inhabitant of the province of Elymais, 
a region stretching southwards to the Persian Gulf, but 
the boundaries of which are variously given (ef. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Elam; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. p. 747 sqq.; 
Dillmann in Schenkel ii. p. 91 sq.; Schrader in Riehm 
p. 358 sq.; Grimm on 1 Macc. vi. 1; [BB.DD. s. vv. 
Elam, Elamites]): Actsii.9. (Is.xxi. 2; in Grk. writ. 
᾿ἘἘλυμαῖος, and so Judith i. 6.) * 

ἐλάσσων [in Jn., Ro.] or -rrev [in Heb., 1 Tim.; ef. B. 
7], τον, (compar. of the Epic adj. éAaxós equiv. to μικρός), 
[fr. Hom. down], /ess, — either in age (younger), Ro. ix. 
12; οὐ ἴῃ rank, Heb. vii. 7; or in excellence, worse (opp. 
to καλός), Jn. ii. 10. Neuter ἔλαττον, adverbially, less 
[se. than ete., A. V. under; cf. W. 239 (225); 595 sq. 
(554); B. 127 sq. (112)]: 1 Tim. v. 9.* 

ἐλαττονέω [B. 7], -ó: 1 aor. ἠλαττόνησα; (ἔλαττον) ; 
not eee in prof. auth. [yet see Aristot. de plant. 2, 3 

. 825%, 23]; to be less, inferior, (in possessions): 2 Co. 
vui 15 fr: Ex. xvi. 18. (Prov. xi. 24; Sir. xix. (5) 6; 
also transitively, to make less, diminish: Gen. viii. 3; 
Prov. xiv. 34; 2 Macc. xiii. 19, etc.) * 

&arróo [B. ΤΊ, - ἠλάττωσα; Pass, [pres. 
€Aarro)pat]; pf. ptep. ἠλαττωμένος ; (ἐλάττων) ; to make 
less or inferior: twd, in dignity, Heb. ii. 7; Pass. to be 
made less or inferior: in dignity, Heb. ii. 95 to decrease 
(opp. to adéavw), in authority and popularity, Jn. iii. 30. 
(Many times in Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. on.) * 

ἐλαύνω ; pf. ptep. ἐληλακώς ; Pass. [pres. ἐλαύνομαι ; 
impf. ἠλαυνόμην ; to drive: of the wind driving ships or 
clouds, Jas. iii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 17; of sailors propelling a 
vessel by oars, to row, Mk. vi. 48; to be carried in a 
ship, to sail, Jn. vi. 19, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; often also with νῆα or ναῦν added); of demons 
driving to some place the men whom they possess, Lk. 
viii. 29. [Cowr.: az-, evv-eAabvo.] * 

adpla, -as, ἡ, (ἐλαφρός), lightness; used of levity and 
fickleness of mind, 2 Co. i. 17; a later word, cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 343.* 

ἐλαφρός, -d, -óv, light in weight, quick, agile; a light 
φορτίον is used fig. concerning the commandments of 
Jesus, easy to be kept, Mt. xi. 30; neut. τὸ ἐλαφρόν, 
substantively, the lightness: τῆς θλίψεως [A. V. our light 
affliction], 2 Co. iv. 17. (From Hom. down.) * 

ἐλάχιστος, -7, -ov, (superl. of the adj. μικρός, but com- 
ing fr. ἐλαχύς), [ (Hom. h. Mere. 573), Hdt. down], small- 
est, least, — whether in size: Jas. iii. 4; in amount: of 
the management of affairs, πιστὸς ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ, Lk. xvi. 
10 (opp. to ἐν πολλῷ); xix. 17; ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἄδικος, Lk. 
xvi. 10; in importance: what is of the least moment, 
1 Co. vi. 2; in authority: of commandments, Mt. v. 19; 


ρευόμενον eXawv; b. 1. 2, 13, 5 and 5, 
ἐλαιὼν καλούμενον ὄρος ; 


1 aor. 


202 





ἐλέγχω 


in the estimation of men: of persons, Mt. xxv. 40, 45; 
in rank and excellence: of persons, Mt. v. 19; 1 Co. xv. 
9; of a town, Mt. ii. 6. οὐδὲ [RG οὔτε] ἐλάχιστον, not 
even a very small thing, Lk. xii. 26; ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν 
ἐστι (see εἰμί, V. 2 c.), 1 Co. iv. 8." 

ἐλαχιστότερος. -a, -ov, (compar. formed fr. the superl. 
ἐλάχιστος ; there is also a superl. ἐλαχιστότατος ; “it is 
well known that this kind of double comparison is com- 
mon in the poets ; but in prose, it is regarded as faulty.” 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136; ef. W. § 11, 2 b., [also 27 (26); 
B. 28 (25)]), less than the least, lower than the lowest: 
Eph. iii. 8.* 

ἐλάω, see ἐλαύνω. 

Ἐλεάζαρ, (ap oN whom God helps), 6, indeel., Eleazar, 
one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 15.* 

ἐλεάω, adopted for the more com. ἐλεέω (q. v.) by LT Tr 
WH in Ro. ix. 16 and Jude 23, [also by WH Tr mre. in 
22]; (Prov. xxi. 26 cod. Vat.; 4 Mace. ix. 3 var.; Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 2; Polye. ad Philip. 2, 2). Cf. W. 85 
(82); B. 57 (50); [Mullach p. 252; WH. App. p.166; 
Τα. Proleg. p. 122 ].* 

ἐλεγμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (ἐλέγχω), correction, reproof, censure : 2 
Tim. iii. 16 L T Tr WH for RG ἔλεγχον. (Sir. xxi. 6; 
xxxv. (xxxii.) 17, ete.; for rm ehastisement, punish- 
ment, 2 K. xix. 35; Ps. exlix. 7; [Is. xxxvii. 3; ete.]. Not 
found in prof. writ.)* 

ἔλεγξις, -ews, 7, (ἐλέγχω, q. v.), refutation, rebuke; 
(Vulg. correptio; Augustine, convictio) : ἔλεγξιν ἔσχεν 
ἰδίας παρανομίας, he was rebuked for his own transgres- 
Pet.ii. 16. (Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 22 [p. 74 ed. 
Olear.]; Sept., Job xxi. 4; xxiii. 2, for rri? complaint; 
[Protevangel. Jacob. 16, 1 τὸ ὕδωρ τῆς ἐλέγξεως κυρίου 
(Sept. Num. v. 18 τὸ ὕδωρ τοῦ ἐλεγμοῦ)].} * 

ἔλεγχος, -ου. ὁ. (ἐλέγχω) ; 1. a proof, that by which 
a thing is proved or tested, (τὸ πρᾶγμα τὸν ἔλεγχον δώσει, 
Dem. 44, 15 [i. e. in Phil. 1, 15]; τῆς εὐψυχίας, Eur. Here. 
fur. 162; ἐνθάδ᾽ ὁ ἔλεγχος τοῦ πράγματος, Epict. diss. 3, 10, 
11; al): τῶν [or rather, πραγμάτων] οὐ βλεπομένων, 
that by which invisible things are proved (and we are 
convinced of their reality), Heb. xi. 1 (Vulg. argumen- 
tum non apparentium [Tdf. rerum arg. non parentum]); 
[al. take the word here (in accordance with the preced- 
ing ὑπόστασις, q. v.) of the inward result of proving viz. 
a conviction; see Lünem. ad loc. ]. 2. conviction ( Xu- 
custine, convictio) : πρὸς ἔλεγχον, for convicting one of 
his sinfulness, 2 Tim.iii.16 RG.  (Eur., Plat., Dem., al. ; 
Sept. chiefly for nn3in.) * 

ἐλέγχω ; fut. ἐλέγξω ; 1 aor. inf. ᾿ἐλέγξαι, i impv. ἔλεγξον ; 
[Pass., pres. ἐλέγχομαι ; 1 aor. ἐλέγχθην] ; Sept. for rv2in ; 
1. to convict, refute, confute, generally with a suggestion 
of the shame of the person convicted, [* ἐλέγχειν hat ei- 
ventlich nicht die Bedeutung * tadeln, sehmühen, zurecht- 
weisen, welche ihm die Lexika zuschreiben, sondern 
bedeutet nichts als überführen" (Schmidt ch. iv. $ 12)]: 
τινά, of crime, fault, or error; of sin, 1 Co. xiv. 24; 
ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ws παραβάται, Jas. ii. 9; ὑπὸ 
τῆς συνειδήσεως, Jn. viii. 9 R G (Philo, opp. ii. p. 649 
[ed. Mang., vi. 203 ed. Richter, frag. περὶ ἀναστάσεως καὶ 


sion, 2 


ἐλεεινός 203° 


κρίσεως) τὸ συνειδὸς ἔλεγχος ἀδέκαστος kal πάντων ἀψευ- 
δέστατος) ; foll. by περί with gen. of thing, Jn. viii. 46 ; 
xvi. 8, and L T Tr WH in Jude 15, (Arstph. Plut. 574); 
contextually, by conviction to bring to light, to expose: ri, 
Jn. iii. 20, cf. 21; Eph. v. 11, 13, (Arstph. eecl. 485; 
τὰ κρυπτά, Artem. oneir. 1, 68; ἐπιστάμενος, ὡς εἰ kai 
λάθοι ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ K- μὴ ἐλεγχθείη, Hdian. 3, 12, 11 [4 ed. 
Bekk. ]; al.) ; used of the exposure and confutation of false 
teachers of Christianity, Tit.i.9, 13; ταῦτα ἔλεγχε, utter 
these things by way of refutation, Tit. ii. 15. 2. to 
Jind fault with, correct; 8. by word; to reprehend se- 
verely, chide, admonish, reprove: Jude 22 L T Tr txt.; 
1 Tim. v. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 2; τινὰ περί τινος, Lk.-iii. 19; 
contextually, to call to account, show one his fault, de- 
mand an explanation: τινά, from some one, Mt. xviii. 15. 
b. by deed; to chasten, punish, (acc. to the trans. of the 
Hebr. main, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 2, ete. ; Sap. xii. 2): 
Heb. xii. 5 (fr. Prov. iii. 11); Rev. iii. 19. [On this 
word ef. J. C. Hare, 'The Mission of the Comforter, 
note L; Trench $iv. Cowr.: ἐξ-, δια-κατ-((μαι).] * 

ἐλεεινός, -7, -óv, (ἔλεος). fr. Hom. down, to be pitied, 
miserable: Rev. iii. 17, [where WH have adopted the 
Attic form ἐλεινός, see their App. p. 145]; compar. 1 
Co. xv. 19. [Cf. W. 99 (94).]* 

ἐλεέω. -ῶ; fut. ἐλεήσω; 1 aor. ἠλέησα; Pass, 1 aor. 
ἠλεήθην ; 1 fut. ἐλεηθήσομαι; pf. ptep. ἠλεημένος ; (ἔλεος) ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. most freq. for pn to be gracious, 
also for pr? to have mercy; several times for Son to 
spare, and Dr) to console; fo have mercy on: twa [W. 
§ 32, I b. a.], to succor one afflicted or seeking aid, Mt. 
ix. 27; xv. 22; xvii. 15; xviil. 33; xx. 30 sq.; Mk. v. 19 
[here, by zeugma (W. ὃ 66, 2 e.), the ὅσα is brought 
over with an adverbial force (W. 463 (431 sq.), how]; 
x. 47sq.; Lk. xvi. 24; xvii. 13; xviii. 38 sq.; Phil. ii. 
27; Jude 22 Rec.; absol. to succor the afflicted, to bring 
help to the wretched, [A. V. to show mercy], Ro. xii. 8; 
pass. to experience [ A. V. obtain] mercy, Mt. v. τ. Spec. 
of God granting even to the un worth y favor, benefits, 
opportunities, and particularly salvation by Christ: Ro. 
ix. 15, 16 R G (see éAedo), 18 ; xi. 32; pass., Ro. xi. 30 sq. ; 
1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. iv. 1; 1 Tim. i.13, 16; 1 Pet. ii. 10.* 

[Syn. ἐλεέω, οἰκτείρω: ἐλ. to feel sympathy with the 
misery of another, esp. such sympathy as manifests itself in 
act, less freq. in word; whereas oixr. denotes the inward 
feeling of compassion which abidesin the heart. A criminal 
begs ἔλεος of his judge; but hopeless suffering is often 
the object of οἰκτιρμός. Schmidt ch. 143. On the other 
hand, Fritzsche (Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 315) makes oix. 
and its derivatives the stronger terms: eA. the generic word 
for the feeling excited by another's misery; oikr. the same, 
esp. when it calls (or is suited to call) out exclamations 
and tears.] 

ἐλεημοσύνη, -7s, 7, (ἐλεήμων), Sept. for 32r) and NPIS 
(see δικαιοσύνη, 1 b.) ; 1. mercy, pity (Callim. in Del. 
152; Is. xxxviii. 18; Sir. xvii. 22 (24), etc.), esp. as ez- 
hibited in giving alms, charity: Mt. vi. 4; ποιεῖν ἐλεημο- 
σύνην, to practise the virtue of mercy or beneficence, to 
show one’s compassion, [ A. V. do alms], (cf. the similar 
phrases δικαιοσύνην, ἀλήθειαν, etc. ποιεῖν), Mt. vi. 1 Rec., 





ἔλεος 


2, 3, (Sir. vii. 10; Tob. iv. 7; xii. 8, ete.; for 10r τὴ». 
Gen. xlvii. 29); ἐλεημοσύνας, acts of beneficence, bene- 
factions [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)], Acts x. 2; ets 
twa, Acts xxiv. 17. Henee 2. the benefaction itself, 
a donation to the poor, alms, (the Germ. Almosen [and 
the Eng. a/ms] being [alike] a corruption of the Grk. 
word): ἐλεημοσύνην διδόναι [(Diog. Laért. 5, 17)], Lk. 
Xi. 41; xii. 33 ; αἰτεῖν, Acts iii. 2; λαμβάνειν, ib. 3 ; πρὸς τὴν 
ἔλεημοσ. for (the purpose of asking) alms, Acts iii. 10; 
plur., Acts ix. 36; x. 4, 31.* 

ἐλεήμων, -ov, merciful: Mt. v. 7; Heb. ii. 17. 
Hom. Od. 5, 191 on; Sept.]* 

[ἐλεινός, see ἐλεεινός. 

ἔλεος, -ov, 6, mercy: that of God towards sinners, Tit. 
lil. 5; ἔλεον λαμβάνειν, to receive i. e. experience, Heb. 
iv.16; that of men: readiness to help those in trouble, 
Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7 (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; Mt. xxiii. 23. But 
in all these pass. L T Tr WH have adopted the neut. 
form τὸ ἔλεος (q. v.), much more com. in Hellenistic 
writ. than the masc. 6 ἔλεος, which is the only form in 
classic Grk. [Soph. (Lex. s. v.) notes τὸ £A. in Polyb. 1, 88, 
2; and Pape in Diod. Sic. 3, 18 var.]. The Grk. Mss. 
of the O. T. also freq. waver between the two forms. 
Cf. [WH. App. p. 158]; W. 66 (64); B. 22 (20).* 

ἔλεος, -ovs, τό, (a form more common in Hellenistic 
Grk. than the classic ὁ ἔλεος, q. v.), mercy; kindness or 
good will towards the miserable and afflicted, joined with 
a desire to relieve them; 1. of men towards men: 
Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; xxiii. 23, (in these three pass. ace. to 
LT Tr WH); Jas. ii. 13; iii. 17 ; ποιεῖν ἔλεος, to exer- 
cise the virtue of mercy, show one’s self merciful, Jas. 
ii. 13; with the addition of pera twos (in imitation of the 
very com. Hebr. phrase 3 DY TOM nt/j, Gen. xxi. 23; 
xxiv. 12; Judg.i. 24, ete.; ef. Thiersch, De Pentateuchi 
vers. Alex. p. 147; [W. 33 (32); 376 (353)]), to show, 
afford, mercy to one, Lk. x. 37. 2. of God towards 
men; a. univ.: Lk.i.50; in benedictions: Gal. vi. 16; 
1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; [(prob.) Tit. i 4 RL]; 2 Jn. 
3; Jude 2. ἐμεγάλυνε κύριος τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ᾽ αὐτῆς. 
magnified his mercy towards her, i. e. showed distin- 
guished mercy to her, (after the Hebr., see Gen. xix. 18), 
Lk. i. 58. b. esp. the mercy and clemency of God in 
providing and offering to men salvation by Christ: Lk. 
i. 54; Ro. xv. 9; Eph. ii. 4; [Tit.iii. 5L T Tr WH; Heb. 
iv. 16 L T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 3; σπλάγχνα ἐλέους (gen. 
of quality [cf. W. 611 (568)]), wherein merey dwells, 
—as we should say, the heart of mercy, Lk. i. 78; ποιεῖν 
ἔλεος μετά twos (see 1 above), Lk. i. 72; σκεύη ἐλέους, 
vessels (fitted for the reception) of mercy, i. e. men 
whom God has made fit to obtain salvation through 
Christ, Ro. ix. 23; τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει. by (in consequence 
of, moved by) the mercy shown you in your conversion 
to Christ, Ro. xi. 31 [cf. W. $22, 7 (cf. $61,3 a.) ; B. 157 
(137)]. 3. the mercy of Christ, whereby at his 
return to judgment he will bless true Christians with 
eternal life: Jude 21; [2 Tim. i. 16, 18, (on the repeti- 
tion of κύριος in 18 cf. Gen. xix. 24; 1 S. iii. 21; xv. 
22; 2 Chr. vii. 2; Gen. i. 27, etc. W. $22, 2); but Prof. 


[From 


ἐλευθερία 


Grimm understands κύριος here as referring to God; 
see κύριος, €. a.]. [Cf. Trench § xlvii.; and see ἐλεέω 
fin.]* 

ἐλευθερία, -as, ἡ, (ἐλεύθερος), liberty, [fr. Pind., Hdt. 
down]; in the N. T. a. liberty to do or to omit things 
having no relation to salvation, 1 Co. x. 29; from the 
yoke of the Mosaic law, Gal. ii. 4; v. 1, 13; 1 Pet. ii. 16; 
from Jewish errors so blinding the mental vision that it 
does not discern the majesty of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17 ; free- 
dom from the dominion of corrupt desires, so that we do 
by the free impulse of the soul what the will of God re- 
quires : ὁ νόμος τῆς ἐλευθερίας, i. e. the Christian religion, 
which furnishes that rule of right living by which the 
liberty just mentioned is attained, Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; free- 
dom from the restraints and miseries of earthly frailty : 
so in the expression 7 ἐλευθερία τῆς δόξης (epexecet. 
gen. [W. 531 (494) ]), manifested in the glorious condi- 
tion of the future life, Ro. viii. 21. b. fancied liberty, 
i. e. license, the liberty to do as one pleases, 2 Pet. ii. 19. 
J.C. Erler, Commentatio exer. de libertatis christianae 
notione in N. T. libris obvia, 1830, (an essay I have never 
had the good fortune to see).* 

ἐλεύθερος, -ἐρα, -epov, (EAEYOQO i. q. ἔρχομαι [so Curtius, 
p- 497, after Etym. Magn. 329, 43; Suid. col. 1202 a. ed. 
Gaisf.; but al. al., ef. Vanicek p. 61]; hence, prop. one 
who can go whither he pleases), [fr. Hom. down], 
Sept. for "war free; 1. freeborn; in a civil sense, 
one who is not a slave: Jn. viii. 33; 1 Co. vii. 22; xii. I5 
Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col iii. 11; Rev. vi. 15; xiii. 16; 
xix. 18; fem., Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. (opp. to ἡ παιδίσκην: 
of one who ceases to be a slave, freed, manumitted : γίνε- 
σθαι ἐλεύθερον, 1 Co. vii. 21. 2. free, exempt, unre- 
strained, not bound by an obligation: 1 Co.ix.1;. ἐκ 
πάντων (see ἐκ, I. 6 fin.), 1 Co. ix. 19 Ἢ ἀπό τινος, Sree Jrom 
i. e. no longer under obligation to, so that one may 
now do what was formerly forbidden by the person or 
thing to which he was bound, Ro. vii. 3 [cf. W. 196 sq. 
(185); B. 157 sq. (138), 269 (231)]; foll. by an inf. [W. 
319 (299); B. 260 (224)], ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν . . . γαμηθῆναι 
she is free to be married, has liberty to marry, 1 Co. vii. 
39; exempt from paying tribute or tax, Mt. xvii. 26. 
3. in an ethical sense: free from the yoke of the 
Mosaic law, Gal. iv. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 16; from the bondage 
of sin, Jn. viii. 36; left to one's own will and pleasure, 
with dat. of respect, τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, so far as relates to 
righteousness, «s respects righteousness, Ro. vi. 20 (W. 
§ Silke; eB Salsa ΠΝ 

ἐλευθερόω. -à: fut. ἐλευθερώσω:; 1 aor. ἠλευθέρωσα; 
Pass., 1 aor. ἠλευθερώθην ; 1 fut. ἐλευθερωθήσομαι; (ἐλεύ- 
8epos) ; [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to make free, set at liberty: 
from the dominion of sin, Jn. viii. 32, 36 ; τινὰ ἀπό twos, 
one from another's control [W. 196 sq..(185); B. 157 
Sq. (138)]: ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τ. ἁμαρτίας k. τοῦ θανάτου (see 
νόμος, 1), Ro. viii. 2; ἀπὸ τ. ἁμαρτίας. from the dominion 
of sin, Ro. vi. 18, 22; ἀπὸ τ. δουλείας τ. φθορᾶς εἰς τ. 
ἐλευθερίαν, to liberate Jrom bondage (see δουλεία) and to 
bring (transfer) into etc. (see eis, C. 1), Ro. viii. 21; 
with a dat. commodi, τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, that we might be pos- 


204 








ἕλκω 


sessors of liberty, Gal. v. 1; cf. B. § 133, 12 [and Bp. 
Lghtft. ad loc. ].* 

ἔλευσις, -ews, 7, (ἔρχομαι), a coming, advent, (Dion. 
Hal 3,59): Acts vii. 52. (ἐν τῇ ἐλεύσει αὐτοῦ, i. e. of 
Christ, καὶ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῇ ὑστέρᾳ, Act. Thom. 28; plur. 
ai ἐλεύσεις, of the first and the second coming of Christ 
to earth, Iren. 1, 10.) * 

ἐλεφάντινος, -ίνη, «vov, (ἐλέφας), of ivory: Rev. xviii. 
12. [Alcae., Arstph., Polyb., al.]* 

ἘΕλιακείμ, (ΟΝ whom God set up), Eliakim, one of 
the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13; Lk. iii. 30.* 

Γέλιγμα, -aros, τό, (ἑλίσσω). a roll: Jn. xix. 39 WH txt., 
where al. read μίγμα, q.v... (Athen., Anth. P., al.)* ] 

ἘΕλιέζερ, (515^5w my God is help), Eliezer, one of the 
ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 29.* 

ἜΕλιούδ, (fr. 58 and 9n glory, [?]), Eliud, one of the 
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 14 sq.* 

Ἐλισάβετ [WH Ἔλεισ.. see WH. App. p. 155, and 
8. Y. et, 1], (paws my God is my oath, i. e. a worshipper 
of God), Elisabeth, wite of Zacharias the priest and 
mother of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5 sqq.* 

Ἔλισσαϊος and (so L T) “Ἑλισαῖος [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
107; Tr WII 'EXatos, cf. WH. App. p. 159], -ov, 6, 
(ywros my God is salvation), Elisha, a distinguished 
(«T prophet; the disciple, companion, and successor of 
Elijah (1 Κα. xix. 16 sq. ; 2 K. i—xiii.) : Lk. iv. 27.* 

ἑλίσσω : fut. ἑλίξω [ Rec** &A.]; [pres. pass. ἑλίσσομαι; 
fr. Hom. down]; to roll up, fold together: Meb. i. 12 
[where T Trmrg. ἀλλάξεις], and Rev. vi. 14 LT Tr 
WII; see εἱλίσσω." 

ἕλκος, -eos (τους), [cf. Lat. uleus, ulcerare; perh. akin 
to ἕλκω (Etym. Magn. 331, 3; 641, 3), yet ef. Curtius 
§ 23], τό; 1. a wound, esp. a suppurated wound; so 
in Hom. and earlier writ. 2. fr. [Thue.], Theophr.,. 
Polyb. on, a sore, an ulcer: Rev. xvi. 2; plur., Lk. xvi. 
21; Rev.xvi.11. (for pnw, Ex. ix. 9; Job ii. 7, etc.) * 

ἑλκόω, -ῶ : to make sore, cause to ulcerate (Hippocr. 
and Med. writ.); Pass. to be ulcerated; pf. ptep. pass. 
ἡλκωμένος (L T Tr WH eAxop. [ WH. App. p. 161; W- 
§ 12, 8; B. 34 (30) ]), full of sores: Lk. xvi. 20, (Xen. 
ἀ6 16: δα. 1. 45 1Ὁ. ΤῊΝ 

ἑλκύω, see ἕλκω. 

ἕλκω (and in later writ. ἑλκύω also [Veitch s. v.; W. 
86 (82) ]); impf. εἷλκον (Acts xxi. 30); fut. ἑλκύσω [ἐλκ. 
Rec. Jn. xii. 32]; 1 aor. εἵλκυσα ([inf. (Jn. xxi. 6) 
ἑλκύσαι Rhe ez T, T WH, -κῦσαι R* G Tr]; cf. Bum. Ausf. 
Spr. $ 114, vol. ii. p. 171; Krüger $ 40 s. v.; [Lob. 
Paralip. p. 35 sq.; Veitch s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for Jw; !o draw; 1. prop.: τὸ δίκτυον, Jn. xxi. 6, 
11; μάχαιραν, i. e. unsheathe, Jn. xviii. 10 (Soph. Ant. 
1208 (1233), etc.) ; τινά, a person forcibly and against 
his will (our drag, drag off), ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Acts xxi. 30; 
els τὴν ἀγοράν, Acts xvi. 19; εἰς κριτήρια, Jas. 11. 6 (πρὸς 
τὸν δῆμον, Arstph. eqq. 710; and in Latin, as Caes. b. g. 
1, 53 (54, 4) eum trinis catenis vinctus traheretur, Liv. 
2, 27 cum a lictoribus jam traheretur). 2. metaph. 
to draw by inward power, lead, impel: Jn. vi. 44 (so in 
Grk. also; as émOupias... ἑκκούσης ἐπὶ ἡδονάς, Plat. 


Ἑλλάς 


Phaedr. p. 238 ἃ. ; ὑπὸ τῆς ἡδονῆς ἑλκόμενοι, Ael. h. a. 6, 
31; likewise 4 Mace. xiv. 13; xv. 8 (11). trahit sua 
quemque voluptas, Vergil, ecl. 2, 65) ; πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς 
ἐμαυτόν, I by my moral, my spiritual, influence will win 
over to myself the hearts of all, Jn. xii. 32. Cf. Mey. 
on Jn. vi. 44; [Trench ὃ xxi. Cowr.: ἐξέλκω.] * 

Ἕλλάς, -ddos, ἡ, Greece i.e. Greece proper, as opp. to 
Macedonia, i. q. "Ayaia (q. v.) in the time of the Ro- 
mans: Acts xx. 2 [cf. Wetstein ad loc.; Mey. on xviii. 
121. 

ἽΝ τηνος, ὁ; 1. a Greek by nationality, whether 
a native of the main land or of the Greek islands or 
colonies: Acts xviii. 17 Rec. ; Ἕλληνές τε καὶ βάρβαροι, 
Ro. i. 14. 2. in a wider sense the name embraces 
all nations not Jews that made the language, cus- 
toms, and learning of the Greeks their own; so that 
where Ἕλληνες are opp. to Jews, the primary reference 
is to a difference of religion and worship: Jn. vii. 35 (cf. 
Meyer ad loe.); Acts xi. 20 GL T Tr [ef. B.D. Am. ed. 
p. 967]; Acts xvi. 1, 3; [xxi. 28]; 1 Co. i. 22, 23 Rec.; 
Gal. ii. 3, (Joseph. antt. 20, 11, 2) ; Ἰουδαῖοί τε kai ἝἝλλη- 
ves, and the like: Acts xiv. 1; xviii. 4; xix. 10, 17; xx. 
ἘΣ: ΒΟΣ 1: 16... τὸς 9: 10: 99 sot] (101-5245: ας. 952: 
xii 13; Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11. The word is used in 
the same wide sense by the Grk. church Fathers, οἵ. 
Otto on Tatian p. 2; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]. The Ἕλληνες 
spoken of in Jn. xii. 20 and Acts xvii. 4 are Jewish 
proselytes from the Gentiles; see προσήλυτος, 2. ([Cf. 
B. D. s. v. Greece ete. (esp. Am. ed.) ]* 

“Ἑλληνικός, -7, -óv, Greek, Grecian: Lk. xxiii. 38 [T 
WH Tr txt. om. L Tr mrg. br. the cl]; Rev. ix. 11. 
[From Aeschyl., Hdt. down. ]* 

“Ἑλληνίς, -idos, ἡ ; 1. a Greek woman. 2. a Gen- 
tile woman; not a Jewess (see Ἕλλην, 2): Mk. vii. 26; 
Acts xvii. 12.* 

“Ἑλληνιστής, -od, 6, (fr. ἑλληνίζω to copy the manners 
and worship of the Greeks or to use the Greek language 
[W. 94 (89 sq.), cf. 28]), a Hellenist, i. e. one who imi- 
tates the manners and customs or the worship of the 
Greeks, and uses the Greek tongue; employed in the 
N. T. of Jews born in foreign lands and speaking Greek, 
[Grecian Jews]: Acts xi. 20 R[WH ; see in Ἕλλην, 2]: 
ix. 29; the name adhered to them even after they had 
embraced Christianity, Acts vi. 1, where it is opp. to 
of Ἑβραῖοι, q. v. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Hellenisten ; 
Reuss in Herzog v. p. 701 sqq. ; [BB.DD. s. v. Hellen- 
ist; Farrar, St. Paul, ch. vii.; Wetst. on Acts vi. 1].* 

Ἑλληνιστί, adv., (Apto), in Greek, i. e. in the 
Greek language: 20; Acts xxi. 37. [Xen. an. 
721648: Ale] = 

ἐλλογάω. i. q. ἐλλογέω. q. v. 

ἐλλογέω [see ev, IIT. 3], -6; [Pass., 3 pers. sing. pres. 
ἐλλογεῖται RG Ltxt T Tr; impf. ἐλλογᾶτο Lmre. WH; 
cf. WH. App. p. 166; T4f. Proleg. p. 122; Mullach p. 
252; B. 57 sq. (50); W. 85 (82)1: (Λόγος a reckoning, 
account) ; to reckon in, set to one’s account, lay to one’s 
charge, impute: τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγει (LT Tr WH ἐλλόγα 
[see reff. above]), charge this to my account, Philem. 


Jn. xix. 


20 








5 ἐλπίς 


18; sin the penalty of which is under consideration, Ro. 
v. 13, where cf. Fritzsche p. 311. (Inscr. ap. Boeckh 
i. p. 850 [no. 1732 a.; Bp. Lghtft. adds Edict. Diocl. in 
Corp. Inserr. Lat. iii. p. 836; see further his note on 
Philem. 18; cf. B. 57 sq. (50)].) * 

᾿Ἐλμωδάμ. (Lchm. Ἑλμαδάμ, T Tr WH ᾿Ἐλμαδάμ [on the 
breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 107]), 6, Elinodam 
or Elmadam, proper name of one of the ancestors of 
Christ: Lk. iii. 28.* 

Arifo; impf. ἤλπιζον: Attic fut. ἐλπιῶ (Mt. xii. 21, 
and often in Sept. [(whence in Ro. xv. 12); cf. B. 37 
(92); W.$13,1c.]; the com. form ἐλπίσω does not 
occur in bibl. Grk.); 1 aor. ἤλπισα; pt. ἤλπικα : [ pres. 
pass. ἐλπίζομαι] ; (ἐλπίς, q. v-) ; Sept. for r123 to trust; 
non to flee for refuge; Sm to wait, to hope; to hope 
(in a religious sense, to wait for salvation with joy and 
full of confrleneele τί, Ro. viii. 24 sq.; 1 Co. xiii. 7; 
(τὰ) ἐλπιζόμενα. things hoped for, Heb. xi. 1 [but WH 
mrg. connect ἐλπ. with the foll. πραγμ.}: once with dat. 
of the DE on which the hope rests, hopefully to trust 
in: τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ (as in prof. auth. once τῇ τύχη, 
Thue. 3, 97, 2), Mt. xii. 21 GL T Tr WH [εἴ B. 176 
(153)]; καθώς, 2 Co. viii. 5. foll. by an inf. relating to 
the subject of the verb ἐλπίζω [cf. W. 331 (311); B. 
259 (223)]: Lk. vi. 34; xxiii. 8; Acts xxvi. 7; Ro. xv. 
24; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Phil. ii. [19], 23; 1 Tim.iii. 14; 2 Jn. 
12; 3Jn. 14; foll. by a pf. inf. 2 Co. v. 11; foll. by ὅτε 
with a pres. Lk. xxiv. 21; ὅτε with a fut., Acts xxiv. 26; 
2 Co.i.13; xiii. 6; Philem. 22. Peculiar to bibl. Grk. 
is the constr. of this verb with prepositions and a case 
of noun or pron. (ef. B. 175 (152) sq. [cf. 337 (290); 
W.$33,d.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. iv. 10]): εἴς τινα, to direct 
hope unto one, Jn. v. 45 (pf. ἠλπίκατε, in whom you have 
put your hope, and rely upon it [W. $ 40, 4 a.]); 1 
Pet. ii. 5 L T Tr WH; with addition of ὅτε with fut. 
2 Co. i. 10 [L txt. Tr WH br. ὅτι, and so detach the foll. 
clause]; ἐπί τινι, to build hope on one, as on a foundation, 
(often in Sept.), Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10); 1 Tim. iv. 
10; vi. 17; ἔν zum, to repose hope in one, 1 Co. xv. 19; 
fol. by inf. Phil. ii. 19; ἐπί with aec. to direct hope 
towards something: ἐπί rt, to hope to receive something, 
1 Pet. i. 13; ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, of those who hope for some- 
thing from God, 1 Pet. iii. 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and 
often in Sept.). [Comp.: ἀπ-, προ-ελπίζω. * 

ἐλπίς [sometimes written ἑλπίς : so WH in Ro. viii. 
20: Tdf.in Acts ii. 26; see (in 2 below, and) the reff. 
s. v. ἀφεῖδονἼ. -ίδος, 7j, (ἔλπω to make to hope), Sept. for 
moa and M29, trust; nory? that in which one confides 
or to which he flees for refuge; mpn expectation, hope; 
in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of 
good or of ill; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation 
of evil, fear; as,» τῶν κακῶν ἐλπίς, Leian. Tyrannic. c. 
3; τοῦ φόβου ἐλπίς. Thue. 7, 61; κακὴ ἐλπίς, Plat. rep. 
1 p. 330 e. [cf. lege. 1 p. 644 c. fin.]; πονηρὰ ἔλπ. Is. 
xxviii. 19 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classies, 
and always in the N. T., in a good sense: expectation of 
good, hope; and in the Christian sense, joyful and con- 
fident expectation of eternal salvation: Acts xxiii. 6; 


᾿Ελύμας 


xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4 sq.; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 18; 1 
Pet. i. 3; iii. 15; ἀγαθὴ ἐλπίς (often in prof. auth., as 
Plat. Phaedo67c.; plur. ἐλπίδες ἀγαθαί. lege. 1 p. 649 b. ; 
Xen. Ages. 1, 27), 2 Th. ii. 16; ἐλπὶς βλεπομένη, hope 
whose object is seen, Ro. viii. 24; ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος, 
God, the author of hope, Ro. xv. 13; ἡ πληροφορία τῆς 
ἐλπίδος. fulness i. e. certainty and strength of hope, Heb. 
vi. 11; ἡ ὁμολογία τῆς ἐλπ- the confession of those things 
which we hope for, Heb. x. 23; τὸ καύχημα τῆς eX. hope 
wherein we glory, Heb. iii. 6; ἐπεισαγωγὴ κρείετονος ἐὰ- 
πίδος, the bringing in of a better hope, Heb. vii. 19; 
ἐλπίς with gen. of the subj., Acts xxviii. 20; 2 Co. i. 7 
(6); Phil. i. 20; with gen. of the obj., Acts xxvii. 20; 
Ro. v. 2; 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. v. 8; Tit.ii.7; with gen. 
of the thing on which the hope depends, ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς épya- 
σίας αὐτῶν, Acts xvi. 19; τῆς κλήσεως, Eph. i. 18; iv. 4; 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Col. i. 23; with gen. of the pers. in whom 
hope is reposed, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. 155 (136)]. ἐπ᾽ [or ἐφ᾽ 
— so Actsii. 26 LT; Ro. iv. 18 L; viii. 20 (21) T WH; cf. 
Scrivener, Introd. ete. p.565 ; (but see above, init.) ] ἐλπίδι, 
relying on hope, having hope, in hope, (Eur. Here. fur. 
804; Diod. Sic. 13, 21; ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι ἀγαθῇ. Xen. mem. 2, 
1, 18) [W. 394 (368), cf. 425 (396); B. 337 (290)]: 
Acts ii. 26 (of a return to life); Ro. iv. 18; with gen. 
of the thing hoped for added: ζωῆς αἰωνίου, Tit. i. 2; 
τοῦ μετέχειν, 1 Co. ix. 10 [G LT Tr WH]; in hope, foll. 
by ὅτι, Ro. viii. 20 (21) [but Tdf. reads 8r]; on ac- 
count of the hope, for the hope [B. 165 (144)], with gen. 
of the thing on which the hope rests, Acts xxvi. 6. παρ᾽ 
ἐλπίδα. beyond, against, hope [W. 404 (377)]: Ro. iv. 18 
(i. e. where the laws of nature left no room for hope). 
ἔχειν ἐλπίδα (often in Grk. writ.): Ro. xv. 4; 2 Co. 
iii. 12; with an inf. belonging to the person hoping, 2 
Co. x. 15; ἐλπίδα ἔχειν εἰς [Tdf. πρὸς θεόν, foll. by acc. 
with inf. Acts xxiv. 15, (eis Χριστὸν ἔχειν τὰς ἐλπίδας, 
Acta "Thomae § 28; [τ. ἐλπίδα eis τ. ᾿Ιησοῦν ἐν τ. mvei- 
ματι ἔχοντες, Barn. ep. 11, 11]) ; ἐπί with dat. of pers. 1 
Jn. iii. 3; ἐλπίδα μὴ ἔχοντες, (of the heathen) having no 
hope (of salvation), Eph. ii. 12; 1 Th. iv. 13; ἡ ἐλπίς 
ἐστιν eis θεόν, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21. By meton. 
it denotes — a. the author of hope, or he who is its foun- 
dation, (often so in Grk. auth. as Aeschyl choéph. 
776; Thue. 3, 57; [cf. Ignat. ad Eph. 21, 2; ad Magn. 
11 fin. ; ad Philad. 11, 2; ad Trall. inser. and 2, 2, etc.]): 
l'Tim.i.1; 1 Th. ii. 19; with gen. of obj. added, τῆς 
δόξης, Col. i. 27. b. the thing hoped for: προσδέ- 
χεσθαι τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, Tit. ii. 13; ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης 
ἀπεκδέχεσθαι, the thing hoped for, which is righteous- 
ness [cf. Mey. ed. Sieffert ad 1.], Gal. v. 5, (προσδοκῶν 
τὰς ὑπὸ θεοῦ ἐλπίδας. 2 Mace. vii. 14)5 διὰ ἐλπίδα τὴν ἀπο- 
κειμένην ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, Col. i. 5; κρατῆσαι τῆς προκειμέ- 
vns ἐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 18 (cf. Bleek ad loc.). — Zóckler, 
De vi ac notione vocis ἐλπίς in N. T. Gissae 1856.* 
"EXópas, ὁ, ( B. 20 (18)], Elymas, an appellative name 
which Luke interprets as μάγος, --- derived either, as is 
commonly supposed, fr. the Arabic z (elymon), 


z 
l. e. wise; or, acc. to the more probable opinion of De- 


206 











ἐμβατεύω 


litzsch (Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. 1877, p. 7), fr. the 
Aramaic 7°98 powerful: Acts xiii. 8. [BB.DD. s. Weill 
ot (LT 'EAot, [WH eda; see 1, 17), Eloi, Syriac 


form (mS. ‘TO8)for Hebr. "ow (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2): 
Mk. xv. 34. [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 11.] * 


ἐμαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -ov, (fr. ἐμοῦ and αὐτοῦ), reflexive pro- 
noun of Ist pers., of myself, used only in gen., dat., and 
aec. sing. [cf. B. 110 (96) sqq.]: ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ, see ἀπό, 11. 
2 d.aa.; ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτόν, under my control, Mt. viii. 9; Lk. 
vii. 8; ἐμαυτόν, myself, as opp. to Christ, the supposed 
minister of sin (vs. 17), Gal. ii. 18; tacitly opp. to an 
animal offered in sacrifice, Jn. xvii. 19; negligently for 
αὐτὸς ἐμέ, 1 Co. iv. 3 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. As in Grk. 
writers (Matthiae $ 148 Anm. 2, i. p. 354; Passow s. v. 
p. 883), its force is sometimes so weakened that it 
scarcely differs from the simple pers. pron. of the first 
person [yet denied by Meyer], as Jn. xii. 32; xiv. 21; 
Philem. 13. 

ἐμ-βαίνω [see ἐν, ITI. 3]; 2 aor. ἐνέβην, inf. ἐμβῆναι, 
ptep. ἐμβάς ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, step into: Jn. 
v.4 RL; eis τὸ πλοῖον, to embark, Mt. viii. 23, and 
often. 

ἐμ-βάλλω [see ἐν, ITI. 3]: 2 aor. inf. ἐμβαλεῖν: to throw 
in, cast into: eis, Lk. xii. 5. [From Hom. down. Comp.: 
παρ-εμβάλλω.]} * 

ἐμ-βάπτω [see ἐν, IIT. 3]: 1 aor. ptep. ἐμβάψας; to dip 
in: ri, Jn. xiii. 265 Lehm., 26^ RG Ltxt.; τὴν χεῖρα ἐν 
τῷ τρυβλίῳ, Mt. xxvi. 23; mid. 6 ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ 
[Lehm. adds τὴν χεῖρα] εἰς τὸ [WH add ἕν in br.] τρυ- 
βλίον, Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Xen., al.) * 

ἐμβατεύω [see ἐν, ITI. 3]; (ἐμβάτης stepping in, going 
in); to enter; 1. prop.: πόλιν, Eur. El. 595; πατρί- 
dos, Soph. O. T. 825; eis τὸ ὄρος, Joseph. antt. 2, 12, 1; 
to frequent, haunt, often of gods frequenting favorite 
spots, as νῆσον, Aeschyl. Pers. 449; τῷ χωρίῳ, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 77; often to come into possession of a thing; 
thus εἰς ναῦν, Dem. p. 894, 7 [6 Dind.]; τὴν γῆν, Josh. 
xix. 51 Sept.; to invade, make a hostile incursion into, eis 
with ace. of place, 1 Mace. xii. 25, ete. — 2. tropically, 
(cf. Germ. eingehen); a. to go into details in narrating: 
absol. 2 Mace.ii.30. b. to investigate, search into, scru- 
tinize minutely: ταῖς ἐπιστήμαις, Philo, plant. Noé § 19; 
ἃ μὴ ἑώρακε ἐμβατεύων, things which he has not seen, i. e. 
things denied to the sight (cf. 1 Jn. iv. 20), Col. ii. 18, — 
where, if with GL [in ed. min., but in ed. maj. rein- 
serted, yet in br.] T Tr WH Huther, Meyer, we expunge 
μή, we must render, “going into curious and subtile 
speculation about things which he has seen in visions 
granted him”; but ef. Baumg.-Crusius ad loc. and W. 
§ 55, 3 e.; [also Reiche (Com. erit.), Bleek, Hofm., al., 
defend the py. But see Tdf. and WH. ad loc., and Bp. 
Lehtft.’s «detached note’; cf. B. 349 (300). Some in- 
terpret *(conceitedly) taking his stand on the things 
which” ete.; see under 1]; Phavor. ἐμβατεῦσαι: ἐπιβῆναι 
τὰ ἔνδον ἐξερευνῆσαι i) σκοπῆσαι ; [similarly Hesych. 2293, 
vol. ii. p. 73 ed. Schmidt, cf. his note; further see reff. 
in Suidas, col. 1213 d. ].* 


ἐμβιβάξω 


ἐμ-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ἐνεβίβασα; to put in or on, lead in, 
cause to enter; as often in the Greek writ. τινὰ eis τὸ 
πλοῖον : Acts xxvii. 6.* ^ , 

ἐμ-βλέπω [see ἐν, IIT. 3]; impf. ἐνέβλεπον ; 1 aor. évé- 
BXeyra, ptep. ἐμβλέψας ; to turn one’s eyes on; look at; 
1. prop.: with acc. Mk. viii. 25, (Anth. 11, 3; Sept. 
Judg. xvi. 27 [Alex.]); τινί (Plat. rep. 10, 608 d. ; Polyb. 
15, 28, 3, and elsewhere), Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x. 21, 27; 
xiv. 67; Lk. xx. 17; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 36, 42 (43), (in all 
these pass. ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ or αὐτοῖς λέγει or εἶπεν, cf. Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 3, 2 ἐμβλέπων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν). εἰς τ. οὐρανόν, Acts i. 
11 RGL, (eis τ. γῆν, Is. v. 30; viii. 22; eis ὀφθαλμόν, 
Plat. Ale. 1 p. 132 e.). Absol., οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον I beheld 
not, i. e. the power of looking upon (se. surrounding 
objects) was taken away from me, Acts xxii. 11 [Tr mrg. 
WH mrg. ἔβλεπ.], (2 Chr. xx. 24 [Ald.]; Xen. mem. 3, 
11, 10). 2. fig. to look at with the mind, to consider: 
Mt. vi. 26, (Is. li. 1 sq.; Sir. ii. 10; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 15; 
with ace. only, Is. v. 12; with dat., 2 Macc. xii. 45).* 

ἐμ-βριμάομαι [see ἐν, ITI. 3], τῶμαι, depon. verb, pres. 
ptep. ἐμβριμώμενος (Jn. xi. 38, where Tdf. ἐμβριμού pe- 
vos; see ἐρωτάω, init.); impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐνεβριμῶντο 
(Mk. xiv. 5, where Tdf. -μοῦντο, cf. époráo τι. s.); 1 
aor. ἐνεβριμησάμην, and (Mt. ix. 30 L'T Tr WH) ἐνε- 
βριμήθην [B. 52 (46)]; (βριμάομαι, fr. βρίμη, to be 
moved with anger); to snort in (of horses; Germ. darein 
schnauben) : Aeschyl. sept. 461; to be very angry, to be 
moved with indignation: τινί (Liban.), Mk. xiv. 5 (see 
above); absol, with addition of ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Jn. xi. 38; 
with dat. of respect, ib. 33. In a sense unknown to 
prof. auth. to charge with earnest admonition, sternly to 
charge, threateningly to enjoin: Mt. ix. 30; Mk. i. 43.* 

ἐμέω, -ὦ [(cf. Skr. vam, Lat. vom-ere; Curtius § 452; 
Vaniéek p. 886 sq.)]: 1 aor. inf. ἐμέσαι ; to vomit, vomit 
forth, throw up, fr. Hom. down: twa ἐκ τοῦ στόματος. i. e. 
to reject with extreme disgust, Rev. iii. 16.* 

ἐμ-μαίνομαι [see ev, III. 3]; τινί, to rage against [ A. V. 
to be exceedingly mad against] one: Acts xxvi. 11; be- 
sides only in Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5.* 

"EppavoviA, 6, Immanuel, (fr. 3385! and Ss, God with 
us), i. q. savior, a name given to Christ by Matthew, i. 
23, after Is. vii. 14. Acc. to the orthodox interpreta- 
tion the name denotes the same as θεάνθρωπος, and has 
reference to the personal union of the human nature 
and the divine in Christ. [See BB. DD. s. v.]* 

*Eppaots (in Joseph. also’Appaovs), ἡ, Emmaus (Lat. 
gen. -untis), a village 30 stadia from Jerusalem (acc. 
to the true reading [so Dind. and Bekk.] in Joseph. b. j. 
7, 6, 6 ; not, as is com. said, foll. the authority of Luke, 
60 stadia), apparently represented by the modern Kulo- 
nieh (cf. Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel, 2te Ausg. 
vi. p. 675 sq.; [Caspari, Chronolog. and Geograph. 
Intr. to the Life of Christ $ 191; Sepp, Jerus. u. d. heil. 
Land, 1. 537): Lk. xxiv. 13. There was a town of the 
same name in the level country of Judza, 175 stadia 
from Jerusalem, noted for its hot springs and for the 
slaughter of the Syrians routed by Judas Maccabaeus, 
1 Macc. iii. 40, 57; afterwards fortified by Bacchides, 


207 





ἐμπαίζω. 


the Syrian leader, 1 Mace. ix. 50, and from the 3d cent.. 
on called Nicopolis [B. D. s. v. Emmaus or Nicopolis]. 
A third place of the same name was situated near Tibe- 
rias, and was famous for its medicinalsprings. Cf. Keim 
lii. p. 555 sq. (Eng. trans. vi. 306 sq.) ; Wolff in Riehm p. 
376 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D. Am. ed. p. 731].*. * 

ἐμμένω [Τα]. ἐνμένω. Acts xiv. 22; see ἐν, III. 3]; 1 
aor. évéuewa ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; (Augustine; 
immaneo), to remain in, continue; a. prop. in a place: ἔν: 
τινι, Acts xxviii. 30 T Tr ΝῊ. b. to persevere in 
anything, a state of mind, ete.; to hold fast, be true to, 
abide by, keep: τῇ πίστει, Acts xiv. 22 (νόμῳ, ὅρκοις, ete. 
in the Grk. writ.); ἔν τινε (more rarely so in the classies, 
as ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς, Thue. 4, 118; ἐν τῇ πίστει, Polyb. 3, 
70, 4): ἐν [so RG only] rots γεγραμμένοις, Gal. iii. 10 fr. 
Deut. xxvii. 26 ; ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ, Heb. viii. 9 fr. Jer. xxxviii. 
(xxx1)) 89. IGERWISR ose SE 

ἐμμέσῳ, i. q. ἐν μέσῳ, (see μέσος, 2): Rev. i. 13; ii. 15. 
iv. 6; v. 6; xxii. 2, in Tdf. ed. 7; [see his Proleg. p. xlviii.,. 
(but nowhere in ed. 8, see the Proleg. p. 76 sq.); cf. 
WH. App. p. 150; B. 8]. 

Ἔϊμμόρ (Ἑμμώρ LT Tr, [but WH 'Eugóp, see their 
Intr. $408] ), 6, (WWM i. e. ass), Emmor [or Hamor, 
acc. to the Hebr.], proper name of a man: Acts vii. 16 ; 
see concerning him, Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sq.* 

ἐμός, 7, -ov, (fr. ἐμοῦ), possess. pron. of the first pers., 
mine; a. that which I have; what I possess: Jn. iv. 34; 
xiii. 35; [xv. 11 ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ (see μένω, I. 1 b. a.)]; xviii. 
36; Ro. x. 1; Philem. 12, and often; τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί, with 
my own hand [B. 117 (102) note], 1 Co. xvi. 21; Gal. 
vi. 11; Col. iv. 18; as a predicate, Jn. vii. 16; xiv. 24; 
xvi. 15; substantively, τὸ ἐμόν that which is mine, mine 
own, esp. my money, Mt. xxv. 27; divine truth, in the 
knowledge of which I excel, Jn. xvi. 15; univ. in plur. 
rà ἐμά my goods, Mt. xx. 15; Lk. xv. 31. b. proceeding 
from me: oí ἐμοὶ λόγοι, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 [here 
Tr mrg. br. Aóy.] ; ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμός, Jn. viii. 37 ; ἡ ἐντολὴ: 
ἡ ἐμή, Jn. xv. 125 ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχή, Jn. vii. 16, and in other 
exx. c. pertaining or relating to me; — e. appointed 
for me: ὃ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμός, Jn. vii. 6. B. equiv. to a gen- 
of the object: ἡ ἐμὴ ἀνάμνησις, Lk. xxii. 19; 1 Co. xi. 
24; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by W. $ 22, 7; [Küh- 
ner $454, Anm. 11; Krüger $47, 7, 8]. y. ἔστιν ἐμόν 
it is mine, equiv. to, it rests with me: Mt. xx. 23; Mk. 
x. 40. In connecting the article with this pron. the 
N. T. writ. do not deviate fr. Attic usage; cf. B. 
§ 124, 6. 

ἐμπαιγμονή [see ev, III. 3], -7s, 7. (ἐμπαίζω), derision. 
mockery: 2 Pet. iii. 3G LT Tr WH. Not found else- 
where.* 

ἐμ-παιγμός [see ἐν, ITI. 3], -οὔ, 6, (ἐμπαίζω), unknown 
to prof. auth., a mocking, scoffing: Heb. xi. 36; Ezek. 
xxii. 4; Sir. xxvii. 28; Sap. xii. 25 ; [ Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 
8]; torture inflicted in mockery, 2 Mace. vii. 7 [ete.].* 

ἐμ-παίζω [see ev, ΠῚ. 3]; impf. ἐνέπαιζον : fut. ἐμπαίξω 
(Mk. x. 34 for the more com. -ξοῦμαι and -ξομαι) ; 1 aor. 
ἐνέπαιξα (for the older ἐνέπαισα) ; Pass., 1 aor. ἐνεπαίχθην 
(Mt. ii. 16, for the older ἐνεπαίσθηνν ; 1 fut. ἐμπαιχθήσομαι: 


ἐμπαίκτης 


(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 240 sq.; Krüger § 40 s. v. παίζω ; 
[Veitch ibid.]; B. 64 (56) sq.); to play in, τινί, Ps. 
ciii (civ.) 26; Eur. Bacch. 867. to play with, trifle with, 
(Lat. illudere) i.e. a. to mock: absol, Mt. xx. 19; 
xxvii 41; Mk. x. 34; xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 11; τινί (Hdt. 
4, 134), Mt. xxvii. 29, [31]; Mk. xv. 20; Lk. xiv. 29; 
xxii.63; xxiii. 36; in pass. Lk. xviii. 32. b. fo delude. 
deceive, (Soph. Ant. 799); in pass. Mt. ii. 16, (Jer. x. 
15).* 

ἐμ-παίκτης [see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, ὁ, (éuzai(o), a mocker, 
a scoffer: 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 18; playing like children, 
Is. iii. 4. Not used by prof. auth.* 

ἐμ-περι-πατέω [T WH ev-, see ἐν, ITI. 3], -ὦ : fut. ἐμπε- 
,»ιπατήσω ; to go about in, walk in: ἔν τισι, among per- 
sons, 2 Co. vi. 16 fr. Lev. xxvi. 12. (Jobi. 7; Sap. xix. 
20; [Philo, Plut.], Lcian., Achill. Tat., al.) * 

ἐμ-πίπλημι [not éuz cp. 7A. (see ἐν, III. 3) ; for eupho- 
ny's sake, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95; Veitch p. 536] and 
ἐμπιπλάω (fr. which form comes the pres. ptep. ἐμπιπλῶν, 
Acts xiv. 17 [W. $ 14,1 f.; B. 66 (58)]) ; 1 aor. ἐνέπλησα; 
1 aor. pass. ἐνεπλήσθην; pf. pass. ptep. ἐμπεπλησμένος ; 
Sept. for xD and in pass. often for y2w to be satiated; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to fill up, fill full: τινά 
τινος, to bestow something bountifully on one, Lk. i. 53; 
Acts xiv. 17, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 14; Ps. evi. (evii.) 9; 
Is. xxix. 19; Sir. iv. 12); to fill with food, i. e. satisfy, 
satiate ; pass., Lk. vi. 25; Jn. vi. 12, (Deut. vi. 11; viii. 
10; Ruth ii. 14; Neh. ix. 25, etc.) ; to take one's fill of, 
glut one's desire for: pass. with gen. of pers., one's inter- 
course and companionship, Ro. xv. 24; cf. Kypke ad 
loc. ; τοῦ κάλλους αὐτῆς, gazing at her beauty, Sus. 32.* 

ἐμ-πιπράω [see ev, IIT. 3], (for the more com. ἐμπίπρημι, 
fr. πίμπρημι to burn ; on the dropping of the μ cf. ἐμπίπλημι, 
init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; to burn, set on fire; pres. infin. 
pass. ἐμπιπρᾶσθαι fo be (inflamed, and so) swollen (Hesych. 
πιμπρᾶν ... φυσᾶν, Etym. Magn. 672, 23 πιμπρᾶσαι: φυ- 
“σῶσαι ; Joseph. antt. 3, 11, 6; ete.) ; of the human body 
io swell up: from the bite of a viper, Acts xxviii. 6 
Tadf., for RG etc. πίμπρασθαι, q. v. [and Veitch s. v. 
πίμπρημι)." 

ἐμ-πίπτω [see ἐν, IIL. 3]; fut. ἐμπεσοῦμαι; 2 aor. ἐν- 
ἔπεσον ; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall into: εἰς βόθυνον, Mt. 
xii. 11, and Ltxt. T Tr WH in Lk. vi. 39; εἰς φρέαρ, 
Lk. xiv. 5 [RG]; to fall among robbers, eis τοὺς ληστάς, 
Lk. x. 36, and in metaph. phrases, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; vi. 
9: εἰς χεῖράς τινος. into one's power: τοῦ θεοῦ, to incur 
divine penalties, Heb. x. 31, as in 2 S. xxiv. 14; 1 Chr. 
xxi. 13; Sir. ii. 18.* 

ἐμ-πλέκω [see ev, ITI. 3]: Pass., [pres. éuzAékopac]: 2 
aor. ptep. ἐμπλακείς ; to inweave; trop.in pass., with dat. 
of thing, to entangle, involve in: 2 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 
20. (From Aeschyl. down.)* 

ἐμ-πλοκή [see ev, III. 3], -5s, 7, (ἐμπλέκω), an inter- 
weaving, braiding, a knot: τριχῶν [Lchm. om.], an elab- 
orate gathering of the hair into knots, Vule. capillatura, 
ΓΑ. V. plaiting], 1 Pet. iii. 3 (κομῆς, Strab. 17 p. 828).* 

ἐμ-πνέω [ WH ev, see ἐν, III. 3]; 1. to breathe 
in or on, [fr. Hom. down]. 2. to inhale, (Aeschyl., 


208 





ἔμπροσθεν 


Plat. al.); with partitive gen., ἀπειλῆς x. φόνου, threat- 
ening and slaughter were so to speak the element from 
which he drew his breath, Acts ix. 1; see Meyer ad loc., 
cf. W. 8 30, 9 οὐ: [B. 167 (146)]; ἐμπνέον ζωῆς, Sept. 
Josh. x. 40.* 

ἐμ-πορεύομαι [see ev, III. 3]: depon. pass. with fut. mid. 
ἐμπορεύσομαι; (fr. ἔμπορος, q. v.) ; (o go a trading, to travel 
Sor business, to traffic, trade, (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.) : Jas. 
iv. 13 [R* G here give the 1 aor. subj. -σώμεθα] ; with 
the ace. of a thing, to import for sale (as ἔλαιον εἰς Αἴγυ- 
πτον, Sept. Hos. xii. 1 ; πορφύραν ἀπὸ Φοινίκης. Diog. Laért. 
7, 2; γλαῦκας, Leian. Nigrin. init.) ; to deal in; to usea 
thing or a person for gain, [A. V. make merchandise of], 
(ὥραν τοῦ σώματος, Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8; ᾿Ασπασία ἐνεπο- 
pevero πλήθη γυναικῶν, Athen. 13 p. 569 f.) : 2 Pet. ii. 3; 
cf. W. 223 (209); [B. 147 (129)].* 

ἐμπορία [see ἐν. III. 3], -as, ἡ, (ἔμπορος), trade, mer- ΄ 
chandise : Mt. xxii. 5. (Hesiod, sqq.; Sept.) * 

ἐμπόριον [see ev, IIT. 3], -ov, τό, (ἔμπορος), a place 
where trade is carried on, esp. a seaport ; a inart, emporium ; 
(Plin. forum nundinarium): οἶκος ἐμπορίου a market 
house (epexeget. zen. [W. ὃ 59, 8 a.; A. V. a house of 
merchandise]), Jn. ii. 16. (From Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

ἔμ-πορος [see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, 6, (πόρος) ; τὰ ἢ: ἃ 
ἐπ᾽ ἀλλοτρίας νεὼς πλέων μισθοῦ, ὁ ἐπιβάτης 50 Hesych., 
with whom agree Phavorinus and the Schol. ad Arstph. 
Plut. 521; and so the word is used by Homer. 2. 
after Hom. one on a journey, whether by sea or by land, 
esp. for traffic; hence 3. a merchant, (opp. to κάπηλος 
a retailer, petty tradesman): Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23; 
ἄνθρωπος ἔμπορος (see ἄνθρωπος, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH 
txt. om. dv6p.]. (Sept. for 7M and 535.) * 

ἐμ-πρήθω: 1 aor. évérpnoa; fr Hom. down; Sept. for 
Hw and mn; to burn; destroy by fire: τὴν πόλιν, Mt. 
xxi. 7.* 

ἔμ-προσθεν (Tdf. in Rev. iv. 6 ἔνπρ. [see ev, III. 3; cf. 
Bttm. 87). adv. of place and of time, (fr. ἐν and πρόσθεν, 
prop. in the fore part); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly 
for ^35; before. In the N. T. used only of place; 
1. adverbially, in front, before: Rev. iv. 6 (opp. to ὄπι- 
σθεν. as in Palaeph. 29, 2). before: πορεύεσθαι, to pre- 
cede, to go before, Lk. xix. 28; προδραμὼν ἔμπροσθεν, ib. 
4 [T WH eis τὸ &yzp., cf. Hdt. 4, 61 (8, 89)], like zpo- 
πορεύεσθαι ἔμπροσθεν. Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 23 [fig. Plato, Gorg. 
p. 497 a. πρόϊθι eis τὸ €ump.]; τὰ ἔμπροσθεν the things 
which lie before one advancing, the goal set before one, 
Phil. iii. 13 (14) (opp. to ra ὀπίσω). 2. itserves as a 
prep., with the zen. [B. 319 (274) ; W. $ 54,6]; a. be- 
fore, i. e. in that local region which is in front of a per- 
son or a thing : Mt. v. 24; vii. 6; Lk. v. 19; xiv. 2; to 
prostrate one's self ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ποδῶν twos, Rev. xix. 
10; xxii. 8; yovvzereiv ἔμπρ. twos, Mt. xxvii. 29; πορεύ- 
εσθαι ἔμπ. τινος, to go before one, Jn. x. 4; ἀποστέλ- 
λεσθαι Cuz. τινος, to be sent before one, Jn. iii. 28; 
σαλπίζειν €um. twos, Mt. vi. 2; τὴν ὁδὸν κατασκευάσαι, 
where ἔμπρ. twos is nearly equiv. to a dat. [cf. B. 172 
(150)], Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2 Rec.; Lk. vii. 27. Ῥ. be- 
fore, in the presence of, i.q. opposite to, over against 


ἐμπτύω 


one: στῆναι, Mt. xxvii. 11; ὁμολογεῖν and ἀρνεῖσθαι [ B. 
176 (153) ], Mt. x. 32 sq.; xxvi. 70; Lk. xii. 8, [9 Lehm. ]; 
also Gal. ii. 14; 1 Th.i.3; ii. 19; iii. 9, 13; before one, 
i.e. at his tribunal: Mt. xxv. 32; xxvii. 11; Lk. xxi. 
36; Acts xviii. 17; 2 Co. v. 10; 1 Th. ii. 19; [1 Jn. iii. 
19]. Here belong the expressions εὐδοκία, θέλημά ἐστι 
ἔμπροσθεν θεοῦ, it is the good pleasure, the will of God, Mt. 
xi. 26; xviii. 14; Lk. x. 21, formed after Chald. usage; 
for in 1 S. xii. 22 the words 71m win, God wills, Jona- 
than the targumist renders " np xy; cf. Fischer, De 
vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 329 sq.; [cf. B. 172 (150)]. c. 
before i. e. in the sight of one: Mt. v. 16; vi. 1; xvii. 2; 
xxiii. 13 (14); Mk. ii. 12 T Trmrg. WH; ix. 2; Lk. xix. 
27; Jn. xii. 37; Aets x. 4 L T Tr WH. d. before, de- 
noting rank: γεγονέναι ἔμπρ. twos, to have obtained 
greater dienity than another, Jn. i. 15, 30, also 27 R L 
br.; (Gen. xlviii. 20 ἔθηκε τὸν '"Edpaip ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ 
Μανασσῆ; [cf. Plat. lege. 1, 631 d.; 5, 743 e.; 7, 805 d. ]).* 

ἐμ-πτύω [see ἐν, III. 3]; impf. ἐνέπτυον ; fut. ἐμπτύσω ; 
1 aor. ἐνέπτυσα; fut. pass. ἐμπτυσθήσομαι; [fr. Hat. 
down]; to spit upon: τινί, Mk. x. 34; xiv. 65; xv. 19; 
«is τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος, Mt. xxvi. 67 (Num. xii. 14; Plut. 
ii. p. 189 a. [i. e. reg. et imper. apotheg. Phoc. 17]; κατὰ 
τὸ πρόσωπ. τινι, Deut. xxv. 9); ets τινα, Mt. xxvii. 30; 
Pass. to be spit upon: Lk. xviii. 32. Muson. ap. Stob. 
floril. 19, 16. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. x. 17; [Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 66].* 

ἐμφανής [see ev, IIT. 3], -és, (ἐμφαίνω to show in, ex- 
hibit), manifest: γίνομαι τινί, in its literal sense, Acts 
x. 40; fig., of God giving proofs of his saving grace and 
thus manifesting himself, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. lxv. 1. [From 
Aeschyl. down. | * 

ἐμφανίζω [see ev, III. 3]; fut. ἐμφανίσω [B. 37 (32)]; 
1 aor. ἐνεφάνισα ; 1 aor. pass. ἐνεφανίσθην ; fr. Xen. and 
Plato down; (ἐμφανής) ; 1. to manifest, exhibit to 
view: ἑαυτόν τινι, prop. to present one’s self to the sicht of 
another, manifest one’s self to (Ex. xxxiii. 13), Jn. xiv. 
22; metaph. of Christ giving evidence by the action of 
the Holy Spirit on the souls of the disciples that he is 
alive in heaven, Jn. xiv. 21. Pass. to show one’s self, 
come to view, appear, be manifest: τινί (of spectres, Sap. 
xvii. 4; αὐτοῖς θεοὺς ἐμφανίζεσθαι λέγοντες, Dios. Laért. 
prooem. 7; so of God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13, 1), Mt. xxvii. 
53; τῷ προσώπῳ τοῦ θεοῦ, of Christ appearing before God 
in heaven, Heb. ix. 24; (of God imparting to souls the 
knowledge of himself, Sap. i. 2; Theoph. Ant. ad Αὐτοὶ. 
1.9. 4). 2. to indicate, disclose, declare, make known: 
foll. by ὅτι, Heb. xi. 14; with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 15; 
τὶ πρός τινα. ib. 22; τὶ κατά τινος. to report or declare 
a thing against a person, to inform against one, Acts 
xxiv. 1; xxv. 2; περί τινος, about one, Acts xxv. 15. 
[Sy¥n. see δηλόω.] " 

ἔμτφοβος [see ἐν, IIT. 3], -ov, (φόβος). thrown into fear, 
terrified, affrighted: Lk. xxiv. 5, [87]; Acts x.4; (xxii. 
9 Rec.) ; xxiv. 25; Rey. xi. 13. Theophr. char. 25 (24), 
1; [1 Macc. xiii. 2; in a good sense, Sir. xix. 24 (21)]. 
(Actively, inspiring fear, terrible, Soph. O. C. 39.) * 

ἐμ-φυσάω, -ó [see ev, IIT. 3]: 1 aor. ἐνεφύσησα; to blow 

14 











209 ἐν 


or breathe on: τινά, Jn. xx. 22, where Jesus, after the 
manner of the Hebrew prophets, expresses by the sym- 
bolic act of breathing upon the apostles the communi- 
cation of the Holy Spirit to them, — having in view the 
primary meaning of the words 1 and πνεῦμα [cf. e. g. 
Ezek. xxxvii. 5]. (Sept.; Diosc., Aret., Geop., al; [to 
inflate, Aristot., al.].) * 

£p-$vros [see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, (ἐμφύω to implant), in 
prof. auth. [fr. Hdt. down] inborn, implanted by nature; 
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdb. on Sap. [xii. 10] p. 224; im- 
planted by others’ instruction: thus Jas. i. 21 τὸν ἔμφυτον 
λόγον, the doctrine implanted by your teachers [al. by 
God; cf. Brückner in De Wette, ot. Huther ad loc.], 
δέξασθε ἐν πραὔτητι, receive like mellow soil, as it were.* 

év, a preposition taking the dative after it; Hebr. 3; 
Lat. in with abl; Eng. in, on, at, with, by, among. [W. 
§ 48 ἃ.; B. 328 (282) sq.] It is used 

I. LocArry; 1. of Place proper; a. in the in- 
terior of some whole; within the limits of some space: 
ἐν γαστρί, Mt. i. 18; ἐν Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 1; ἐν τῇ πόλει, 
Lk. vii. 37; ἐν τῇ ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ, ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ἐν τῷ 
οὐρανῷ, and innumerable other exx. ^ b. in (on) the 
surface of a place, (Germ. auf): ἐν τῷ ὄρει, Jn. iv. 20 
sq.; Heb. viii. 5; ἐν πλαξί, 2 Co. iii. 3; ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ, Mt. 
xx. 3; ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, Mt. v. 25, ete. c. of proximity, at, 
near, by: ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν, Mt. vi. 5; ἐν τῷ 
Σιλωάμ, at the fountain Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; ἐν τῷ γαζο- 
φυλακίῳ, Jn. viii. 20 [see B.D. Am.ed. s. v. Treasury : 
and on this pass. and the preceding cf. W. 385 (360)]; 
καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ θεοῦ etc., at the right hand: Heb. i. 
3; viii. 1; Eph. i. 20. d. of the contents of a writ- 
ing, book, ete.: ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ, 1 Co. v. 9; ἐν κεφαλίδι 
βιβλίου γράφειν, Heb. x. 7; ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ, τῷ βιβλίῳ, Rev. 
xiii. 8; Gal. iii. 10; ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, Lk. xxiv. 44; Jn. i. 45 
(46); ἐν τοῖς προφήταις, in the book of the prophets, 
Acts xiii. 40; ἐν Ἡλίᾳ, in that portion of Scripture 
which treats of Elijah, Ro. xi. 2, ef. Fritzsche ad loc. ; 
[ Delitzsch, Brief a.d. Romer, p.12; W. 385 (360) ; B. 331 
(285)]; ἐν Δαυΐδ, in the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [see 
Δαβίδ, fin.]; ἐν τῷ ‘Qoné, in the prophecies of Hosea, 
Ro. ix. 25. e. trop. applied to things not perceived 
by the senses, as ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις, Mt. v. 28; 
xiii. 19; 2 Co. iv. 6, and often; ἐν rats συνειδήσεσι, 2 Co. 
v. 11. 2. with dat. of a Person, in the person, 
nature, soul, thought of any one: thus ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται 
ἡ ζωὴ ópóv.it lies hidden as it were in the bosom of 
God until it shall come forth to view, Col. iii. 3, ef. Eph. 
lii. 9; ἐν αὐτῷ. i. e. in the person of Christ, κατοικεῖ πᾶν 
τὸ πλήρωμα ete., Col. i. 19; ii. 3 [(2), 9]. phrases in 
which ἡ ἁμαρτία is said to dwell in men, Ro. vii. 17 sq.; 
or ὁ Χριστὸς (the mind, power, life of Christ) εἶναι, [Jn. 
xvii. 26]; Ro. viii. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 5; μένειν, Jn. vi. 56; 
[xv. 4,5]; ζῆν, Gal. ii. 20; μορφοῦσθαι, Gal. iv. 19; λαλεῖν. 
2 Co. xiii. 3; ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι, 1 Jn. i. 10 : μένειν, 
Jn. v. 38; ἐνοικεῖν Or οἰκεῖν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ. Col. iii. 
16; τὸ πνεῦμα (of God, of Christ), Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co. 
iii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 14; τὸ ἔν τινε χάρισμα. 1 Tim. iv. 14; 
2 Tim. i. 6; ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι, Mt. xiv. 2; Eph. ii. 2; 1 Co. 


ἐν 2 


xii. 6, ete:; ἐνεργεῖσθαι, Col. i. 29; 
vii. 8. after verbs of revealing, manifesting: aro- 
καλύψαι ἐν ἐμοί, in my soul, Gal. i. 16; φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν 
αὐτοῖς, Ro. i. 19. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς. within one's self 
i.e. in the soul, spirit, heart: after the verbs εἰδέναι. 
Jn. vi. 61; εἰπεῖν, Lk. vii. 39; xviii. 4; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, Jn. 
xi. 38; στενάζειν, Ro. viii. 23; διαλογίζεσθαι, Mk. ii. 8 
(alternating there with ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις, cf. vs. 6); Lk. 
xii. 17; διαπορεῖν, Acts x. 17; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; 
Lk. vii. 49; also 2 Co. i. 9; for other exx. of divers 
kinds, see εἰμί, V. 4 e. 3. it answers to the Germ. an 
[on; often freely to be rendered in the case of; with, ete. 
W.$48,2a.3a.],^vhen used — a. of the person or 
thing on whom or on which some power is oper- 
ative: iva οὕτω γένηται ἐν ἐμοί, 1 Co. ix. 155 ποιεῖν τι ἔν 
τινι, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1341; 
[W.u.s. and 218 (204 sq.); B. 149 (130)]. b. of that 
in which something is manifest [W.u.s.]: μανθάνειν 
ἔν τινι, 1 Co. iv. 6; γινώσκειν, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35; 
1 Jn. iii. 19 (exx. fr. the classics are given by Passow 
i. 2 p. 908°; [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. ITI. ]) ; likewise of that 
in which a thing is sought: ζητεῖν ἔν τινι, 1 Co. iv. 2. 
c. after verbs of stumbling, striking: προσκόπτειν, 
Ro. xiv. 21; πταίειν, Jas. ii. 10; σκανδαλίζεσθαι, 4. v. in 
its place. 4. with, among, in the presence of, with dat. 
of pers. (also often in the classics ;. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 
1340; W.385 (860) and 217 sq. (204)) : 1 Co. ii. 6; ἐν 
ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, Mt. xxi. 42; ἐν ἐμοί, in my judgment, 
1 Co. xiv. 11; [perh. add Jude 1 LT Tr WH; but cf. 
6 b. below]. To this head some refer ἐν ὑμῖν, 1 Co. vi. 
2, interpreting it in your assembly, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; 
but see 5 d. y. 5. used of that with which a person 
is surrounded, equipped, furnished, assisted, 
or acts, [W.$48,a.1b.]; a. ini q. among, with col- 
lective nouns: ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ, Mk. v. 30 [W. 414 (386)]; 
ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, among the men of this age, Mk. viii. 
38; ἐν τῷ γένει pov, in my nation i. e. among my country- 
men, Gal.i 14; esp. with dat. plur. of persons, as ἐν 
ἡμῖν, ἐν ὑμῖν, among us, among you, ἐν ἀλλήλοις, among 
yourselves, one with another: Mt. ii. 6; xi. 11; Mk. ix. 
50; Lk.i.1; Jn.i.14; xiii. 35; Actsii. 29; 1 Co. iii. 18; 
v.l,and often. b. of the garments with (in) which 
one is clad: ἐν ἐνδύμασι and the like, Mt. vii. 15; Mk. 
xii. 38; Lk. xxiv. 4; Jn. xx. 12; Acts x. 30; Heb. xi. 
37; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. iii. 4; ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν ἱματίοις, Mt. 
xi. 8 [T Tr WH om. L br. igar.]; Lk. vii. 25; περιβάλλε- 
σθαι ἐν ἱματίοις, Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4 [L WH txt.om.év]. c. 
of that which one either leads or brings with him, or 
with which he is fur nished or equipped; esp. after 
verbs of coming, (ἐν of accompaniment), where we 
often say with: ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντᾶν, Lk. xiv. 31; 
ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι, Jude 14; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 17; 
εἰσέρχεσθαι ἐν αἵματι, Heb. ix. 25; ἐν τῷ ὕδατι x. ἐν τῷ 
αἵματι. 1 Jn. v. 6 (i. e. with the water of baptism and 
the blood of atonement, by means of both which he has 
procured the pardon of our sins, of which fact we are 
assured by the testimony of the Holy Spirit); ἐν ῥάβδῳ. 
1 Co. iv. 21; ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας, Ro. xv. 29; φθάνειν 









10 ev 


κατεργάζεσθαι, No. | ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ. 2 Co. x. 14; ἐν πνεύματι x. δυνάμει Ἡλίου; 


imbued or furnished with the spirit and power of Elijah, 
Lk. i. 17; ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ, furnished with the regal 
power of the Messiah, possessed of his kingly power, 
[B. 330 (284)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [WH txt. L 
mrg. Trmrg. es τὴν B.]. Akin is its use ἃ. of the 
instrument ormeans by or with which anything is 
accomplished, owing to the influence of the Hebr. prep. 
3 much more common in the sacred writ. than in prof. 
auth. (cf. W. § 48, a. 3 d.; B. 181 (157) and 329 (283) 
sq-), where we say with, by means of, by (through); a. 
in phrases in which the primitive force of the prep. is 
discernible, as ἐν πυρὶ κατακαίειν, Rev. xvii. 16 [T om. 
WH br. ev]; ἐν Gate ἁλίζειν or ἀρτύειν, Mt. v. 13; Mk. 
ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 34; ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκάνειν, Rev. vii. 14; 
ev αἵματι καθαρίζειν, Heb. ix. 22; ἐν ὕδατι βαπτίζειν. Mt. 
iii. 11, etc. (see βαπτίζω, 11. b. bb.). β. with the dat., 
where the simple dat. of the instrument might have been 
used, esp. in the Revelation: ἐν μαχαίρᾳ, ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ 
ἀποκτείνειν, Rev. vi. 8; xiii. 10; πατάσσειν, Lk. xxii. 49; 
ἀπόλλυσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 52; καταπατεῖν ἐν τοῖς ποσίν, Mt. 
vii. 6; ἐν βραχίονι αὐτοῦ, Lk. i. 51; ἐν δακτύλῳ θεοῦ, Lk. 
xi. 20, and in other exx.; of things relating to the soul, 
as ἐν ἁγιασμῷ, 2 Th. ii. 13 [W. 417 (388)]; 1 Pet. i. 2; 
ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει, 2 Co. vii. 7; ἐν προσευχῇ. Mt. xvii. 21 
[T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ, Eph. 
i. 3; δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι, Ro. v. 9. — y. more rarely 
with dat. of pers., meaning aided by one, by the interven- 
tion or agency of some one, by (means of) one, [cf. W. 
389 (364); B. 329 (283) sq.]: ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμο- 
viov, Mt. ix. 34; ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις, 1 Co. xiv. 21; κρίνειν 
T. οἰκουμένην ev ἀνδρί, Acts xvii. 31; ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται 6 
κόσμος (preceded by οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν), 1 Co. 
vi 2; ἐργάζεσθαι ἕν τινι, Sir. xiii. 4; xxx. 13, 34, δ. 
foll. by an inf. with the article, in that (Germ. dadurch 
dass), or like the Lat. gerund [or Eng. participial noun; 
cf. B. 264 (227)]: Acts iii. 26; iv. 30; Heb. ii. 8; viii: 
13. 6. of the state or condition in which anything 
is done or any one exists, acts, suffers; out of a great 
number of exx. (see also in γίνομαι, 5 f., and εἰμί, V.4 
b.) it is sufficient to cite: ἐν βασάνοις, Lk. xvi. 23; ἐν 
τῷ θανάτῳ, 1 Jn. iii. 14; ἐν ζωῇ, Ro. v. 10; ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς, 
Philem. 13; ἐν πειρασμοῖς. 1 Pet. i. 6; ἐν ὁμοιώματι 
σαρκός, Ro. vill. 3; ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι, 1 Th. ii. 2; ἐν δόξη, 
Phil. iv. 19; 2 Co. iii. 7 sq.; σπείρεται ἐν φθορᾷ κτλ. it 
(se. that which is sown) is sown in a state of corrup- 
tion, sc. ὄν, 1 Co. xv. 42 sq.; ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν, to be pre- 
pared, in readiness, 2 Co. x. 6; ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts xi. 5; 
xxii. 17; very often so used of virtues and vices, as ἐν 
εὐσεβείᾳ x. σεμνότητι, 1 Tim. ii. 2; ἐν ἁγιασμῷ, 1 Tim. ii. 
15; ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς. Ro. vi. 4; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Ro. iii. 26 (25); ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ. Tit. iii. 3; ἐν πανουρ- 
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2; also with an adverbial force: as ἐν 
δυνάμει, powerfully, with power [W. § 51, 1 e.; B. 330 
(284)], Mk. ix. 1; Ro. i. 4; Col. i. 29; 2 Th.i. 11; κρίνειν. 
ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ. Acts xvii. 31; Rev. xix. 11; ἐν χαρᾷ, in joy, 
joyful, Ro. xv. 32; ἐν ékreveía, Acts xxvi. 7; ἐν σπουδῇ. 
Ro. xii. 8; ἐν χάριτι, Gal.i.6; 2 Th. ii. 16; ἐν τάχει, Lk. 


EV 


ἐν 211 : , ἐν 


xviii. 8; Ro. xvi. 20; Rev.i.1. [Here perh: may be 
introduced the noteworthy adv. phrase ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις, 
with all this, Lk. xvi. 26 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH for RG 
ἐπὶ m. τ. (see ἐπί, B. 2 d.) ; also ἐν πᾶσιν, in all things 
[R. V. withal], Eph. vi. 16 Ltxt. T Tr WH.] A similar 
use occurs in speaking — f. of the form in which any- 
thing appears or is exhibited, where év may be repre- 
sented by the Germ. a/s [Eng. as]; twice so in the 
N. T.: σοφίαν λαλεῖν ἐν μυστηρίῳ (as a mystery [here 
A. V. in]), 1 Co. ii. 7; ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ὑποδείγματι πίπτειν. 
Heb. iv. 11 [(A. V. after); al. regard this as a preg- 
nant constr., the ἐν marking rest after motion (R. V. mrg. 
into) ; cf. Kurtz or Lünem. ad loc.; B. 329 (283) ; and 
7 below]; (διδόναι τι ἐν δωρεᾷ, 2 Macc. iv. 30; Polyb. 23, 


3,4; 26, 7,5; ἐν μερίδι, Sir. xxvi. 3; λαμβάνειν τι ev | 


φέρνῃ, Polyb. 28, 17, 9; exx. fr. Plato are given by Ast, 
Lex. Plat. i. p. 702; Lat. in mandatis dare i.e. to be 
considered as orders, Caes. b. g. 1, 43). [Here perhaps 
may be noticed the apparent use of ἐν to denote “the 
measure or standard" (W. § 48,a. 3 b.; Bnhdy. 
p. 211): ἐν μέτρῳ, Eph. iv. 16 (see μέτρον, 2); ἔφερεν ἐν 


ἑξήκοντα ete. Mk. iv. 8 WH txt. (note the eis, q. v. B. II. | 
| φρονεῖν, Phil.iv. 2; ὑπακούειν, Eph. vi.1 [Lom. Tr WH 


3a.); καρποφοροῦσιν ev τριάκοντα etc. ibid. 20 T Tr txt. 
WHtxt.; but some would take ἐν here distributively, 
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 8.] g. of the thines in (with) 
which one is busied: 1 Tim. iv. 15; Col. iv. 2; ἐν ois, 
Acts xxvi. 12; ἐν αὐτῷ, in preaching the gospel, Eph. 
vi. 20; ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23 
[L Tr br. ἐν]; ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, in giving instruction, while 
teaching, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; see εἰμί, V. 4 d.; Passow 
i p.910"; [L. and S. s. v. II- 1]. — h. of that in which 
anything is embodied or summed up: ἐν αὐτῷ ζωὴ 
jv, i. e. that life of which created beings were made par- 
takers was comprehended in him, Jn. i. 4; ἐν rovro τῷ 
λόγῳ ἀνακεφαλαιοῦται, Ro. xiii. 9, (on Eph. i. 10 see dva- 
κεφαλαιόω) ; πᾶσαν τ. συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα 
πέντε. comprised in, consisting of, seventy-five souls, Acts 
vii. 14 [W. 391 (366) ]. 6. of that in which any per- 
son or thing is inherently fixed, implanted, or 
with which it isintimately connected; a. of the 
whole in which a part inheres: prop., μένειν ἐν τῇ 
ἀμπέλῳ. Jn. xv. 4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλά, Ro. xii. 4; 
fig. κρεμᾶσθαι ἔν τινι, Mt. xxii. 40. — b. of a person to 
whom another is wholly joined and to whose power 
and influence he is subject, so that the former may be 
likened to the place in which the latter lives and 
moves. So used in the writings of Paul and of John 
particularly of intimate relationship with God or with 
Christ, and for the most part involving contextually the 
idea of power and blessing resulting from that union; 
thus, εἶναι or μένειν ἐν τῷ “πατρί or ἐν τῷ θεῷ, of Christ, 
Jn. x. 38; xiv. 10 sq.; of Christians, 1 Jn. iii. 24; iv. 13, 
15 sq.; εἶναι or μένειν in Christ, of his disciples and wor- 
shippers, Jn. xiv. 20; xv.4 sq.; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ Kk. ἐν TO 
πατρί. 1 Jn. ii. 24; ἐν θεῷ, i. e. amplified and strength- 
ened in the fellowship of God and the consciousness of 
that fellowship, ἐργάζεσθαί τι, Jn. iii. 21; παρρησιάζεσθαι, 








ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (cf. Fritzsche, Com. 
on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 sqq.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafted as it were in 
Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord : 
Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1 Co. 1.4; 2 Co. 11: ΤῊΣ 
Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph. i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; 
ii. 6 sq. 10, 13; 1 Tim.i:14; 2 Tim. i. 1, 13; ii. 1; 1 Pet. 
iii.16; v. 10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; tva εὑρεθῶ ἐν 
αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most 
intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ 
"Ino. 1 Co. 1.80; of ἐν Xp. Ἴησ. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; 
κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to 
die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in 
it [W. u. s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rev. xiv. 13. Since such 
union with Christ is the basis on which actions and 
virtues rest, the expression is equivalent in meaning 
to by virtue of spiritual fellowship or union with Christ; 
in this sense it is joined to the following words and 
phrases: πέπεισμαι, Ro. xiv. 14 [ W. u. s. and 390 note]; 
πεποιθέναι, Gal. v. 10; Phil.i.14; 2 Th. iii. 4; παρρησίαν 
ἔχειν, Philem. 8; ἐλπίζειν, Phil. ii. 19; καύχησιν ἔχειν, 
Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co. xv. 31; ἀνῆκεν, Col. iii. 18; τὸ αὐτὸ 


br. ἐν κι]; φῶς, Eph. v. 8; αὔξει, ii. 21; ζωοποιεῖσθαι, 1 
Co. xv. 22; 6 κόπος οὐκ ἔστι κενός, ib. 58; ^ ἅγιος, Phil. 
i. 1; ἡγιασμένος, 1.Co. i. 2; λαλεῖν, 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19; 
ἀλήθειαν λέγειν, Ro. ix. 1; λέγειν x. μαρτύρεσθαι, Eph. iv. 
17. Hence it denotes the Christian aim, nature, 
quality of any action or virtue; thus, εὐάρεστον ἐν 
κυρίῳ, Col. iii. 20 GL T Tr WH; προσδέχεσθαί τινα, Ro. 
xvi. 2; Phil. ii. 29; ἀσπάζεσθαί twa, Ro. xvi. 8, 22; 1 Co. 
xvi. 19; κοπιᾶν, Ro. xvi. 12 [W. 390 note; L br. the cl.]; 
γαμηθῆναι, 1 Co. vii. 39; χαίρειν, Phil. iii. 1; iv. 4, 10; 
παρακαλεῖν, 1 Th. iv. 1; προΐστασθαί twos, 1 Th. v. 12; — 
or is equiv. to in things pertaining to Christ, in the cause 
of Christ: νήπιος, 1 Co. iii. 1; φρόνιμος, 1 Co. iv. 10; 
παιδαγωγοί, 15; ὁδοί. μου, 17; θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν 
κυρίῳ, in the kingdom of the Lord, 2 Co. ii. 12. δικαι- 
οὔσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, by faith in Christ, Gal.ii. 17. Finally, 
it serves as a periphrasis for Christian (whether 
person or thing): τοὺς ἐκ τῶν Ναρκίσσου τοὺς ὄντας ἐν 
κυρίῳ (opp. to those of the family of Narcissus who were 
not Christians), Ro. xvi. 11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Xp. a Chris- 
tian, 2 Co. xii. 2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι ai ἐν Xp. Gal. i. 22; 1 Th. 
ii. 14; of νεκροὶ ἐν Xp. those of the dead who are Chris- 
tians, 1 Th. iv. 16; ἐκλεκτὸς ἐν x. a Christian of mark, 
Ro. xvi. 13; δόκιμος ἐν Xp. an approved Christian, Ro. 
xvi. 10; δέσμιος ἐν κυρ. a Christian prisoner (tacitly opp. 
to prisoners of another sort [W. 388 (363)]), Eph. iv. 
1; πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν x. Eph. vi. 21; Col iv. 7; διακονία, 
17; ἐν Xp. γεννᾶν twa, to be the author of one's Christian 
life or life devoted to Christ, 1 Co. iv. 15; δεσμοὶ ἐν Xp. 
bonds oceasioned by one's fellowship with Christ, Phil. 
i. 13 [al. connect ἐν Xp. here with φανερούς}; it might 
be freely rendered as Christians, as a Christian, in 1 Co. 
ix. 1 sq.; Philem. 16. ἐν πνεύματι (ἁγίῳ) εἶναι, to be in 
the power of, be actuated by, inspired by, the Holy Spirit: 


1 Th. ii. 2. Of frequent use by Paul are the phrases | Ro. viii. 9 (here in opp. to ἐν σαρκί) ; γίνεσθαι, Rev. i. 


* 


év 21 


10; iv. 2; ἐν πνεύματι θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xii. 3; ἐν πνεύ- 
part or ἐν πν. τῷ ἁγίῳ or ev mv. θεοῦ sc. dv, (being) ini. e. 
under the power of the Spirit, moved by the Spirit [ef. D. 
330 (283 sq.); W. 390 (364 sq.)]: Mt. xxii. 43; Mk. xii. 
36; Lk. ii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10. ἄνθρω- 
ros ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ, sc. dv, in the power of an un- 
clean spirit, possessed by one, Mk. i. 23; ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ 
κεῖσθαι, to be held in the power of Satan, 1 Jn. v. 19. οἱ 
ἐν νόμῳ, subject to the control of the law, Ro. iii. 19. ἐν 
τῷ ᾿Αδὰμ ἀποθνήσκειν, through connection with Adam, 1 
Co. xv. 22. c. of that in which other things are con- 
tained and upheld, as their cause and origin: ἐν 
αὐτῷ (i. e. in God) ζῶμεν κτλ. in God is found the cause 
why we live, Acts xvii. 28; ἐν αὐτῷ (in Christ, as the 
divine hypostatic λόγος) ἐκτίσθη rà πάντα, in him resides 
the cause why all things were originally ereated, Col. i. 16 
(the cause both instrumental and final as well, for 
ἐν αὐτῷ is immediately afterwards resolved into à αὐτοῦ 
k. els αὐτόν [cf. W. $ 50, 6 and Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]) ; rà 
πάντα ἐν αὐτῷ συνέστηκε. Col. i. 17; ἐν Ισαὰκ κληθήσεταί 
σοι σπέρμα, Ro. ix. 7; Heb. xi. 18, fr. Gen. xxi. 12; ἁγιά- 
ζεσθαι ἐν with dat. of thing, Heb. x. 10, ef. 1 Co. vi. 11; 
ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν, in this lies the reason why we be- 
lieve, Jn. xvi. 30, ef. 1 Co. iv. 4; ἐν à equiv. to ἐν τούτῳ, 
ὅτι, [in that], since: Ro. viii. 3; Heb. ii. 18; vi. 17, [see 
Se. below]. Closely related is the use of ἐν d. of 
that which gives opportunity, the occasion: ἔφυγεν 
ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ (on i. 6. at this word; cf. W. § 48, a. 
3 c), Acts vii. 29. e. after certain verbs denoting an 
affection, because the affection inheres or resides, as 
it were, in that to which it relates, [cf. B. 185 (160 sq.) ; 
W. 232 (217 sq.)]; see εὐδοκέω, εὐδοκία, εὐφραίνομαι. kav- 
χάομαι, χαίρω, etc.; likewise sometimes after ἐλπίζω, 
πιστεύω, πίστις, (which see in their prop. places), be- 
cause faith and hope are placed in what is believed or 
hoped for. 7. after verbs implying motion ἐν w. 
the dat. is so used as to seem, according to our laws of 
speech, to be employed for eis with the ace.; but it in- 
dicates the idea of rest and continuance succeeding the 
motion; ef. W. § 50, 4; B. 328 (282) sq.: thus after 
ἀποστέλλω, Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; εἰσέρχεσθαι, Lk. ix. 46 ; 
Rev. xi. 11 [not R Tr; WH br. ev]; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Lk. vii. 
17; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 8, (but not after ἔρχεσθαι in Lk. xxiii. 42, 
on which pass. see 5 c. above); καταβαίνειν, Jn. v.4 [R L; 
cf. W. 8 50,4 a.]; ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων, 
that they may abide in ete. Lk. i. 17; καλεῖν ἐν εἰρήνῃ, ἐν 
ἁγιασμῷ, ἐν μιᾷ ἐλπίδι, equiv. to eis τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς (ὑμᾶς) 
ἐν οἷς. : 1 Co. vii. 15; 1 Th. iv. 7; Eph. iv. 4; esp. after 
τιθέναι and ἱστάναι, which words see in their places. On 
the same use of the prep., common in Homer, somewhat 
rare in the classic auth., but recurring freq. in writ. of 
a later age, see W.1. c.; Passow i. 2 p. 909"; [ef. L. and 
S. s. v. I. 8]. 8. Constructions somewhat pecul- 
iar: a. ἐν Αἰγύπτου sc. γῇ (by an ellipsis com. in Grk. 
writ., cf. Passow i. 2 p. 908*; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2]; W. 
384 (359); [B. 171 (149)]) : Heb. xi. 26 [Lchm.]; but 
see Αἴγυπτος. — b. expressions shaped by the Ilebr. 
idiom: dyopátew év with dat. of price (for the price is 








2 I ἐν 


the means by which a thing is bought [cf. W. § 48, a. 
3 e.]), Rev. v. 9, (ἐν ἀργυρίῳ, 1 Chr. xxi. 24). ἀλλάσε 
σειν τι ἔν τινι (see ἀλλάσσω), to exchange one thing for 
another (prop. to change something and have the ex- 
change in [cf. W. 388 (363) note; 206 (194)]): Ro. i. 
23, 25 [here μετήλλαξαν]. ὄμνυμι ἔν τινι (3 paws, cf. 
Gesenius, "Thesaur. iii. p. 1355; [W. § 32, 1 b.; B. 
147 (128)]), to swear by (i.e. the name of some one 
being interposed), or as it were relying on, supported 
by, some one [cf. W. 389 (364)]: Mt. v. 34-36; xxiii. 
16, 18-22; Rev. x. 6. C. ὁμολογῶ ἔν τινι after the 


Syriac (c. woh {not the Hebr., see Fritzsche on Mt. 


p. 386; B.176 (153); W. § 32, 3 b., yet cf. ὃ 4, 8.7), 
prop. to confess in one’s case (or when one’s cause is at 
stake [cf. W.1.¢.; Fritzsche]. e.; Weiss, Das Matthiius- 
evang. p. 278 note! (and in Mey. on Mt. ed. 7)]), the 
nature of the confession being evident from the context; 
as, to confess one to be my master and lord, or to be my 
worshipper: Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; [οἷς Westcott, Canon, 
p. 805 note 1]. ἃ. on the very com. phrase ἐν ὀνόματί 
Twos, see ὄνομα (esp. 2). [6. the phrase ἐν à varies in 
meaning acc. to the varying sense of ἐν. It may be, a. 
local, wherein (i.q. ἐν τούτῳ ἐν à): Ro.ii. 1; xiv. 22; 
2 Co. xi. 12. — B. temporal, while (cf. II. below; W. 
8 48, ἃ. 2): Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v. 34; Jn. v. 7; Lk. xix. 
13 (Ree. ἕως, q. v.). vy. instrumental, whereby: Ro. xiv. 
21. $. causal, Eng. in that (see Mátzner, Eng. Gram., 
trans. by Grece, iii. 452, — concomitance passing over 
into causal dependenee, or the substratum of the ac- 
tion being regarded as that on which its existence 
depends; cf. ‘in those circumstances I did so and so’), 
on the ground of this that, because: Ro. viii. 3, etc.; see 
in 6 6. above. Ace. to the last two uses, the phrase 
may be resolved into ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι or ἐν τούτῳ 6 (cf. W. 
§ 23, 2 b. and b.); on its use see W. 387 (362) note; B. 
331 (284 sq.) ; Bnhdy. p. 211; esp. Fritzsche on Rom. 
vol. ii. p. 93 sq.] 

II. With the notion of TrwE ἐν marks a. periods 
and portions of time in which anything occurs, in, on, 
at, during: ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, ev τῇ νυκτί, Jn. xi. 9 sq., ete. ; 
ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις, Mt. iii. 1, ete.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mt. 
xii. 2, and in many other exx.; ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ, at the sec- 
ond time, Acts vii. 13; ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς, Lk. viii. 1; ἐν τῷ 
μεταξύ, in the meantime LW. 592 sq. (551)], Jn. iv. 31; 
[ἐν ἐσχάτῳ χρόνῳ, Jude 18 Rec.]. ^ b. before substan- 
tives signifying an event, it is sometimes equiv. to at the 
time of this or that event, (Germ. bei); thus ἐν τῇ παλιγ- 
yeveoia, Mt. xix. 28; ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ or pov, 1 Co. 
xv. 295 {ΠῚ ti 9/ H5: [WS 19075] 5S Bhrio 25 
Jn. ii. 28 ; ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk. 
xiv. 14; xx. 333 ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι, at (the sounding 
of) the last trumpet, 1 Co. xv. 52; ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει of 
Christ; 25Eho1: 73 Peta, 195 ave 19. c. before in- 
finitives with the article [B. 263 (226) sq.; W. § 44, 6]; 
before the inf. present it signifies while, as: Mt. xiii. 4 
(ἐν τῷ σπείρειν), 25 (ἐν τ. καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους) ; Mt. 
xxvii. 12; Mk. vi.48; Lk. i. 21 [ef. B. l. c.]; xxiv. 51; 


ἐναγκαλίζομαι 2 
1 Co. xi. 21; Gal. iv. 18, etc.; before the inf. aorist, 
when, after that: Lk. ix. 36; xix.15,ete. — d. within, in 
the course of: ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις, Mt. xxvii. 40; Mk. xv. 
29 [L T Tr om. WH br. ἐν]; Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. ev], 
20; cf. W. § 48, a. 2; [B. § 133, 26]. 

III. In CourosirTION. Prefixed to Adjectives ἐν 
denotes lying or situated in some place or cendition, 
possessed of or noted for something; as in ἐνάλιος, ἔνδο- 
fos, ἔμφοβος. Prefixed to Verbs it signifies 1. re- 
maining, staying, continuing in some place, state, or con- 
dition; as, ἔνειμι, ἐμμένω, ἐνοικέω. 2. motion into 
something, entering into, mingling in; as, ἐμβαίνω, ἐμ- 
Barevo, ἐγκαλέω (summon to court), ἐγγράφω, ἐγκρύπτω. 
3. in ἐμφυσάω, ἐμπρήθω, ἐμπτύω it answers to Germ. an 
(on). 

Before B, u, 7, $, V, ἐν changes to ἐμ-, before γ, x, E, x, to 
éy-, before A to éA-, although this assimilation is neglected 
also in the older codd. [in x “ not often changed," Scrivener, 
Collation etc. p. lvi.; “in some words assimilation is con- 
stant acc. to all or at least all primary Mss. while in a com- 
paratively small number of cases authority is divided. Speak- 
ing generally, assimilationis the rule in compounds of ἐν, re- 
tention of vin those of σύν (Prof. Hort). Following manu- 
script authority T WH write ἐνγράφω, ἐνκάθετος, évkaívia, 
ἐνκαινίζω, ἐνκατοικέω, ἐνκαυχάομαι, ἐνκεντρίζω, ἐνκρίνω, ἐνπε- 
ριπατέω, ἐνπνέω; Τ' ἐνκόπτω; WH ἐνκοπή, ἔνκυος ; but L T 
Tr WH retain ἐγκαλέω, ἔγκλημα, ἐἔγκομβόομαι, ᾿ ἐγκράτεια, 
ἐγκρατεύομαι, ἐγκρατής, ἐγχρίω, ἐλλογέω (-dw), ἐμβαίνω, ἐμ- 
βάλλω, ἐμβάπτω, ἐμβατεύω, ἐμβλέπω, ἐμβριμάομαι, ἐμμαίνομαι, 
ἐμπαιγμονή, ἐμπαιγμός, ἐμπαίζω, ἐμπαίκτης, ἐμπίπλημι, ἐμ- 
πίπτω, ἐμπλέκω, ἐμπλοκή, ἐμπορεύομαι, ἐμπορία, ἐμπόριον, ἔμ- 
πορος, ἐμπτύω, ἐμφανής, ἐμφανίζω, ἔμφοβος, &upvros; L'T Tr 
ἔγκυος; 1, Tr WH ἐμμένω, ἔμπροσθεν; 1, Tr ἐγγράφω, 
ἐγκάθετος, ἐγκαίνια, ἐγκαινίζω, ἐγκακέω, ἐγκαταλείπω, ἐγκατ- 
οικέω, ἐγκαυχάομαι, ἐγκεντρίζω, ἐγκοπή, ἐγκόπτω, ἐγκρίνω, 
ἐμπεριπατέω, ἐμπνέω; T ἐμπιπράω; Τ WH are not uniform 
in ἐγκακέω, ἐγκαταλείπω ; nor T in ἐμμένω, ἔμπροσθεν ; nor 
WH in éykórre.— Add L T Tr WH ἀνέγκλητος, παρεμ- 
βάλλω, παρεμβολή. See Gregory in the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, 
p. 76 sqq.; Hortin WH. App. p.149; Bttm.in Stud. τι. Krit. 
for 1862, p. 179 sq.; esp. Meisterhans p. 46.] 


ἐν-αγκαλίζομαι : 1 aor. ptep. ἐναγκαλισάμενος ; (mid. 
i. q. eis τὰς ἀγκάλας δέχομαι, Lk. ii. 28) ; to take into the 
arms, embrace: τινά, Mk. ix. 36; x. 16. (Prov. vi. 10; 
xxiv. 48 (33) ; Meleag. in Anth. 7, 476, 10; Plut.; AI- 
ciphr. epp. 2, 4; al.) * : 

ἐν-άλιος, -ov, or ἐνάλιος, -a, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, 1], (avs 
the sea), that which is in the sea, marine ; plur. τὰ ἐνάλια 
marine animals, Jas. iii. 7. (Often in Grk. writ.; the 
Epic form εἰνάλιος as old as Hom.) * 

ἔν-αντι, adv., (ἐν and ἀντί, prop. in that part of space 


which is opposite), before: as a prep. foll. by a gen. [B. . 


319 (273)]; ἔναντι τοῦ θεοῦ, MT 325, before God, i. e. 
in the temple, Lk. i. 8 [Tr mrg. ἐναντίον] ; in the judg- 
ment of God, Acts viii. 21 GL T Tr WH; [ἔναντι Φαραώ, 
Acts vii. 10 Tdf.; cf. B. 180 (156)]. (Very often in 
Sept., and in the Palestin. Apocr. of the O. T.; but no- 
where in prof. auth.) * 

€v-ayríos, -a, -ov, (ἀντίος set against), [fr. Hom. down], 
prop. that which is over against; opposite; used it 


13 





self [ cf. B. 192 (166)]; 


ἕνδεκα 


primarily of place; opposite, contrary: of the wind 
(Xen. an. 4, 5, 3), Mt. xiv. 24; Mk. vi. 48; Acts xxvii. 
4; ἐξ ἐναντίας [W.591 (550) ; B. 82 (71)], opposite, over 
against (see ἐκ, I. 4), with gen. Mk. xv. 39. 2. me- 
taph. opposed as an adversary, hostile, antagonistic in feel- 
ing or act : 1 Th. ii. 15 (on which pass. [for confirmatory 
reff. to anc. auth.] cf. Grimm on 3 Mace. vii. 4 [on the 
other hand, see Lünem. on 1 Thess. l. c.]) ; ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας, 
an opponent [ A. V. he that is of the contrary part], Tit. ii. 
8; ἐναντίον ποιεῖν τί τινι, to do something against one, 
Acts xxviii. 17 ; ἐναντία πράττειν πρὸς τὸ ὄνομά Twos, Acts 
xxvi. 9. Neutr. ἐναντίον, adv., as a prep. is constr. with 
the gen. [B. 319 (273) ], before, in the sight of, in the pres- 
ence of, one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often 
for 1137 and "Yy3 also for ^yy5) : Mk. ii. 12 (T Tr mre. 
WH ἔμπροσθεν); Lk. xx. 26; Acts vii. 10 (ἐναντίον 
Φαραώ, when he stood before Pharaoh [here Tdf. ἔναντι, 
q. V.]); Acts viii. 32; Hebraistically, in the judgment, 
estimation, of one, Lk. xxiv. 19; [i. 6 T Tr WH], (Gen. 
x. 9,etc.). [τὸ ἐναντίον i. e. τοὐναντίον see in its place. ] * 

ἐν-άρχομαι : 1 aor. ἐνηρξάμην ; to begin, make a begin- 
ning: with dat. of the thing fr. which the beginning is 
made, Gal. iii. 3; τί, Phil. i. 6; 2 Co. viii. 6 Lchm. ed. 
min. (Polyb. Dion. Hal, Plut., Lcian.; generally with 
gen. of the thing begun, as in Sir. xxxvi. 29 (26) ; xxxviii. 
16; 1 Maec.ix. 54. in Eur. with acc., of beginning sac- 
rificial rites; at length, to govern, rule, with gen. Josh. 
x. 24 Sept.) [Cowr.: προ-ενάρχομαι. * 

ἔνατος, see évvaros. 

ἐν-γράφω, see ev, III. 2 and 3. 

ἐνδεής, -és, (fr. ἐνδέω to lack, mid. to be in need' of), 
needy, destitute: Acts iv. 34. (From [Soph.], Hat. 
down ; Sept.) * 

ἔν-δειγμα, ros, τό, (ἐνδείκνυμι), token, evidence, proof, 
ΓΑ. V. manifest token]: 2 Th. i. 5 [ef. B. 153 (134)]. 
(Plat. Critias p. 110 b.; Dem. 423, 13.) * 

ἐν-δείκνυμι : fo point out, (Lat. indicare; Germ. anzei- 
gen), fr. Pind. down; in mid. first in Hom. ; in the N. T. 
only in Mid. : [ pres. ἐνδείκνυμαι]; 1 aor. éveüeifápmv; prop. 
to show one’s self in something, show something in one's 
1. to show, demonstrate, prove, 
whether by arguments or by acts: τί, Ro. ix. 22 (joined 
with γνωρίσαι) ; Eph. ii. 7; Tit. ii. 10; iii. 2; Heb. vi. 
11; with two acc., the one of the object, the other of 
the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; τὶ ἔν τινι, dat. of the pers., Ro. 
ix. 17 (fr. Ex. ix. 16 [cf. W. 254 (238)]) ; 1 Tim. i. 16; τὲ 
eis τὸ ὄνομά τινος, Heb. vi. 105 τὴν ἔνδειξιν ἐνδείκνυσθαι (as 
in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b.; cf. W. 225 (211)); εἴς τινα, 
2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth: τινὶ 
(dat. of pers.) κακά, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. l. 15, 17.* 

ἔν-δειξις, -eos, 7, (ἐνδείκνυμι), demonstration, proof: i.e. 
manifestation, made in act, τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Ro. iii. 25 sq. ; 
τῆς ἀγάπης, 2 Co. viii. 24; i. q. sign, evidence, [A. V. 
evident token], ἀπωλείας, Phil. i. 28. [Plat., al.] * 

ἕν-δεκα, oi, ai, τά, eleven: of ἕνδεκα, the eleven apostles 
of Christ remaining after the death of Judas the traitor, 
Mt. xxviii. 16; Mk. xvi. 14; Lk. xxiv. 9, 33; Acts i. 26; 
ii. 14. [From Hom. down.]* 


HER 
ἑνδέκατος 


ἐἑν-δέκατος, -ἄάτη. -arov, eleventh: Mt. xx. 6,9; Rev. xxi. 
[From Hom. down.] * 

év-5éxopar; to receive, approve of, admit, allow, (as τὸν 
λόγον, lldt. 1, 60). Impersonally, ἐνδέχεται it can be 
allowed, is possible, may be, (often thus in Grk. prose fr. 
Thue. down): foll. by ace. w. inf. Lk. xiii. 33, ef. xvii. 1. 
[ CE. δέχομαι, fin.] * 


20. 


ἐνδημέω. -@; 1 aor. inf. ἐνδημῆσαι; (ἔνδημος one who is , 


among his own people or in his own land, one who does 
not travel abroad; opp. to ἔκδημος), prop. to be among 
one’s own people, dwell in one’s own country, stay at home 
(opp. to ἐκδημέω, ἀποδημέω ; see those words); ‘i. q. to 
have a fixed abode, be at home, ἐν τῷ σώματι, of life on 
earth, 2 Co. v. 6, 9 ; πρὸς τὸν κύριον, of life in heaven, ib. 
8. (Rare in the classies, as Lys. p. 114, 36.) * 

ἐνδιδύσκω (i.q. ἐνδύω [cf. D. 56 (49)]); impf. mid. 
ἐνεδιδυσκόμην ; to pul on, clothe: twa πορφύραν, Mk. xv. 
17 L T Tr WH; mid. to put on one's self, be clothed in 
[w. ace. B. 191 (166); W.§ 32,5]: ἱμάτιον, Lk. viii. 27 
[R G L Tr mrg.]; πορφύραν, βύσσον, Lk. xvi. 19; (2 S. 
i. 24; xiii. 18; Prov. xxix. 39 (xxxi. 21); Judith ix. 1; 
Sir. l. 11; Joseph. b. j. 7, 2).* 

ἔνδικος, -ov, (δίκη), according to right, righteous, just : 
Ro. iii. 8; Heb.ii.2. (Pind., Trag., Plat.) * 

ἐν-δόμησις (ἐνδομέω to build in), and ἐνδώμησις T Tr WH 
([see WH. App. p. 152] δωμάω to build), -eos, 7, that 
which is built in, (Germ. Einbau): τοῦ τείχους, the mate- 
rial built into the wall, i. e. of which the wall was com- 
posed, Rev. xxi. 18; elsewhere only in Joseph. antt. 15, 
9, 6, of a mole built into the sea to form a breakwater, 
and so construct a harbor.* 

ἐν-δοξάζω : 1 aor. pass. ἐνεδοξάσθην ; to. make ἔνδοξος, to 
glorify, adorn with glory, (Vulg. glorifico, clarifico) : in 
pass. 2 Th. i. 12; ἐνδοξασθῆναι ev rois ἁγίοις, that his glory 
may be seen in the saints, i. e. in the glory, blessedness, 
conferred on them, 2 Th. i. 10. (Ex. xiv. 4; Ezek. 
xxviii. 22, ete.; Sir. xxxviii. 6. Not found in prof. auth.) * 


ἔνδοξος, -ov, (δόξα), held in good or in great esteem, of 


high repute; a. illustrious, honorable, esteemed, (Xen., 
Plat., sqq-}: 1 Co. iv. 10, (thus in Sept. for 132), 1 S. ix. 
6; xxii. 14; Is. xxiii. 8, ete. ; Sir. xi. 6; xliv. 1, etc.). 
b. notable, glorious: τὰ ἔνδοξα, wonderful deeds, [ A. V. 
glorious things], Lk. xiii. 17; (for nis 223, Ex. xxxiv. 10). 
c. splendid: of clothing, [ A. V. gorgeous], Lk. vii. 25; 
figuratively i. q. free from sin, Eph. v. 27.* 

&yBvpa, -τος, τό, (ἐνδύω), garment, raiment, (Gell., Lact. 
indumentum) : Mt. vi. 25, 28; Lk. xii. 23; spec. a cloak, 
an outer garment: Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 11 sq. (ἔνδ. γάμου ἃ 
wedding garment) ; Mt. xxviii. 3; ἔνδ. προβάτων, sheep's 
clothing, i. e. the skins of sheep, Mt. vii. 15 [al. take 
the phrase figuratively: ‘with a lamb-like exterior ']. 
([Strab. 3, 3, 7]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 7; [antt. 3, 7, 2]; 
Plut. Sol. 8; Sept. for 022.) cs 

ἐν-δυναμόω, -à; 1 aor. ἐνεδυνάμωσα ; Pass., [ pres. impv. 
2 pers. sing. ἐνδυνάμου, 2 pers. plur. ἐνδυναμοῦσθε] ; impf. 
3 pers. sing. ἐνεδυναμοῦτο; 1 aor. ἐνεδυναμώθην; (fr. ἐν- 
δύναμος equiv. to ὁ ἐν δυνάμει dv); to make strong, endue 
with strength, strengthen: τινά, Phil. iv. 13; 1 Tim.i.12; 2 


214 


ἐνδώμησις 


Tim. iv. 17; passively, fo receive strength, be strengthened, 
increase in strength: Acts ix. 22; ἕν τινι, in anything, 2 
Tim. ii. 1; ἐν κυρίῳ, in union with the Lord, Eph. vi. 10; 
with dat. of respect, τῇ πίστει, Ro. iv. 20; ἀπὸ ἀσθενείας, 
to recover strength from weakness or disease, Heb. xi. 
34 RG; (in a bad sense, be bold, headstrong, Ps. li. (lii.) 
9; [Judg. vi. 34 Alex., Ald., Compl; 1 Chr. xii. 18 
Alex.; Gen. vii. 20 Aq.]; elsewhere only in eccl. writ.).*. 

ἐν-δύνω [2 Tim. iii. 6] and ἐν-δύω [Mk. xv. 17 RG]; 
1 aor. ἐνέδυσα ; 1 aor. mid. ἐνεδυσάμην ; pf. ptep. mid. or 
pass. ἐνδεδυμένος ; Sept. for 37; as in the classics, T. 
trans. (prop. fo envelop in, to hide in), to put on: τινά τι, 
a. in a literal sense, /o put on, clothe with a garment : Mt. 
xxvii. 31; [with τινά alone, ib. 28 L WH mrg.]; Mk. xv. 
17RG, 20; Lk. xv. ?2. Mid. to put on one's self, be 
clothed with: τί [10.191 (166) ; cf. W. $32,5], Mt. vi. 25; 
Lk. xii. 22; [viii. 27 T WH Tr txt.]; Mk. vi. 9; Acts 
xii. 21; ἐνδεδυμένος with acc. of a thing, Mk. i. 6; Mt. 
xxii, 11 [B. 148 (129); ef. W..$32, 2]; Rev.1.18; xv. 
6; xix. 14; ἐνδυσάμενος (opp. to γυμνός) clothed with a 
body, 2 Co. v. 3, on which pass.see γέ, 3 c., (Aristot. de 
anima 1, 3 fin. p. 4075, 23 ψυχὴν . . . ἐνδύεσθαι σῶμα). 
b. in metaphorical phrases: of armor fig. so called, 
ἐνδύεσθαι τὰ ὅπλα [L mrg. ἔργα] τοῦ φωτός, Ro. xiii. 12; 
τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ, τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Eph. 
vi. 11, 14; θώρακα πίστεως, 1 Th. v. 5 (with double acc., 
of obj. and pred., θώρακα δικαιοσύνην, Sap. v. 19 (18), 
[cf. Is. lix. 17]; prop. ὅπλα, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 18; τὸν θώ- 
paka, am. 1,8,3). tobefurnished with anything, adorned 
with a virtue, as if clothed with a garment, ἐνδύεσθαι 
ἀφθαρσίαν, ἀθανασίαν, 1 Co. xv. 53 sq.: [σπλάγχνα οἰκτιρ- 
pod, Col. iii. 12]; δύναμιν, Lk. xxiv. 49, (ἰσχύν, Is. li. 9; 
[lii. 1; δύναμιν, εὐπρέπειαν, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 1; αἰσχύνην, 
Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; exxxi. (exxxii.) 18; 1 Mace. i. 
29; δικαιοσύνην, Job xxix. 14; Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 9; 
σωτηρίαν, ibid. 16; ete.]; δύειν ἀλκήν, Hom. Il. [9, 231]; 
19, 36; ἕννυσθαι and ἐπιέννυσθαι ἀλκήν, Il. 20, 381; Od. 
9, 214 etc.; many similar exx. in Hebr. and Arabie, 
cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. 742; Lat. induere novum in- 
genium, Liv. 3, 33) 3 τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον, i. e. a new pur- 
pose and life, Eph. iv. 24; Col. iii. 10; Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, 
to become so possessed of the mind of Christ as in 
thought, feeling, and action to resemble, him and, as it 
were, reproduce the life he lived, Ro. xiii. 14; Gal. iii. 
27; (similarly the Greeks and Romans said [cf. W. 30], 
tov Ταρκύνιον ἐνδύεσθαι, Dion. Hal. 11, 5, 5; ῥίψας τὸν 
στρατιώτην ἐνέδυ τὸν σοφιστήν, Liban. ep. 968; prodi- 
torem et hostem induere, Tac. ann. 16, 28; cf. Fritzsche 
on Rom. iii. p. 143 sq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 317 sqq. ; 
[Gataker, Advers. mise. 1, 9 p. 223 sqq.]). 2. in- 
trans. to creep into, insinuate one's self into; to enter: év- 
δύνοντες εἰς τὰς οἰκίας, 2 Tim. iii. 6. [Cowr.: ἐπ-ενδύω.} " 

éy-Bucts, -ews, 7), (ἐνδύω), a putting on, (Germ. das An- 
ziehen, der Anzug): τῶν ἱματίων, 1 Pet. iii. 3; (clothing, 
Job xli. 4; Athen. 12 p. 550 c.; Dio Cass. 78, 3; an 
entering, Plat. Crat. p. 419 c.).* 

ἐν-δύω, see ἐνδύνω. 

| ἐν-δώμησις. see ἐνδόμησις. 





ἐνέγκω 2 


ἐνέγκω, see φέρω. 

ἐν-έδρα, -as, 7, (fr. ἐν and ἕδρα a seat), a lying in wait, 
ambush: Acts xxiii. 16 [Rec τὸ ἔνεδρον, q. v.]; ἐνέδραν 
ποιεῖν, Acts xxv. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., sqq.) * 

ἐνεδρεύω ; (ἐνέδρα) ; to lie in wait for, to lay wait for, 
prepare a trap for : τινά, a person, Lk. xi. 54 [G om. éved. 
abr. T om. αὐτόν]; Acts xxiii. 21. (Thue., Xen., sqq.; 
Sept.) * 

ἔνεδρον, -ov, τό, i. q. ἐνέδρα, a lying in wait, an ambush : 
Acts xxiii. 16 Rec." (Sept.; Sap. xiv. 21; Sir. xi. 29; 1 
Mace. ix. 40, ete.; not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἐν-ειλέω, -@: 1 aor. eveiAnoa; to roll in, wind in: τινά 
τινι; one in anything, Mk. xv. 46. (1 S. xxi. 9; [ Aristot. 
mund. 4 p. 396%, 14; Philo], Plut., Artemid., Philostr., 
al.) * 

ἔν-ειμι ; (εἰμί) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to be in: τὰ ἐνόντα 
what is within, i. e. the soul, Lk. xi. 41 (equiv. to τὸ 
ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν, vs. 39); this is to be regarded as an ironi- 
eal exhortation (similar to that in Amos iv. 4) adjusted 
to the Pharisees’ own views: ‘as respects your soul (τὰ 
ἐνόντα ace. absol.), give alms (to the needy), and behold 
all things are clean unto you (in your opinion)’; cf. 
Bornemann ad loc. Most interpreters think τὰ ἐνόντα 
to be the things that are within the cup and the platter [00]. 
acc. after δότε, with eAenu. as pred. ace. ], and to be spoken 
of unjustly acquired riches to be expended in charity. 
[Still others (following the same construction) take τὰ 
“ἐνόντα (sc. δοῦναι) in the sense of the things within your 
power, (R. V. mrg. which ye can); ef. Steph. Thesaur. 
s. v. col. 1055 a.; but see Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.] More- 
over, in the opinion of many éw, [1 Co. vi. 5 GL T Tr 
WH; Jas.i.17;] Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11 ete., is con- 
tracted from ἔνεστι; but see below under ἔνι." 

ἕνεκα (only before consonants [ Rec. three times (Grsb. 
twice) out of twenty-five]), and ἕνεκεν [R G 19 times, L 
(out of 26) 21 times, Tr 20, WH 18, T 17], or in a form 
at first Ionic εἵνεκεν (Lk. iv. 18 [Rec. &.; xviii. 29 T 
WH; Acts xxviii. 20 TWH]; 2 Co. iii. 10 [R GL mrg. 
éy.]; vii. 12 [R G]], both the last forms alike before con- 
sonants and vowels [cf. s. v. N,v; W. $5,1d.1; B. 10 
(9); Krüger (dialects) ὃ 68, 19, 1; WH. App. p. 173]), 
a prep. foll. by the genitive, on account of, for the sake 
of, for: Mt. v. 10 sq.; xvi. 25; xix. 29; Mk. viii. 35; Lk. 
vi. 22; Acts xxviii. 20; Ro. viii. 36; 2 Co. iii. 10; ἕνεκεν 
τούτου, for this cause, therefore, Mt. xix. 5; τούτων, Acts 
xxvi. 21; τίνος ἕνεκεν, for what cause, wherefore, Acts 
xix. 32; before rod with inf. expressing purpose [W. 329 
(309); B. 266 (228)], 2 Co. vii. 12; οὗ εἵνεκεν, because, 
Lk. iv. 18; ef. Meyer ad loc. 

ἐνενήκοντα, 566 ἐννενήκοντα. 

ἐνεός, see ἐννεός. 

ἐνέργεια, -as, ἧ, (evepyns, q- v-), working, efficiency; in 
the N. T. used only of superhuman power, whether of 
God or of the devil; of God: Eph. iii. 7; Col. ii. 12; 
ἡ ἐνέργεια ἡ ἐνεργουμένη, Col. i. 29; with a relative inter- 
vening, ἐνεργεῖν ἐνέργειαν, Eph. i. 19 sq.; κατ᾽ ἐνέργειαν 
€v μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους, ace. to the working which 
agrees with the measure of (is commensurate with) 


15 








ἐνευλογέω 


every single part, Eph. iv. 16; κατὰ τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ 
δύνασθαι αὐτόν κτὰ. according to the efficiency by which 
he is able to subject all things to himself, Phil. iii. 21. 
ἐνέργ. τοῦ Σατανᾶ, 2 Th. ii. 9; πλάνης, the power with 
which error works, vs. 11. (Sap. vii. 17, ete.; 2 Macc. 
ii. 29; τῆς προνοίας, 3 Mace. iv. 21; not found in Sept. ; 
in the classies first in Aristot. ; [on ἐνέργεια, ἐνεργεῖν, 
of diabolie influences, cf. Müller on Barn. ep. 19, 6].) 
[SyN. see δύναμις, fin.] ἢ 

évepyéo, τῶ; 1 aor. évnpynoa; pf. ἐνήργηκα (Eph. i. 20 
LT WHtxt. Trmrg.); (ἐνεργός [see évepyjs]) ; qu 
intrans. to be operative, be at work, put forth power: foll. 
by ev with dat. of pers., Mt. xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14; Eph. ii. 
2; foll. by the dat. of advantage (dat. com.; [ef. Bp. 
Lghtft. on Gal. as below ]), to work for one, aid one, ets τι, 
unto (the accomplishing of) something [W. 397 (371)]: 
eis ἀποστολήν, unto the assumption [or discharge] of the 
apostolic office; eis rà ἔθνη, i. q. eis ἀποστολὴν [cf. W. 
$66,2d.; B. $ 147, 8] τῶν ἐθνῶν, Gal. ii. 8. 2. trans. 
to effect: τί, 1 Co. xii. 11; [Eph. i. 11]; ἐνεργεῖν évép- 
γειαν, Eph. i. 19 sq.; ri ἔν τινι, dat. of pers., 1 Co. xii. 6 
[B. 124 (109)]; Gal ii 5; Philii.13.  -3. ΜΙ, 
pres. ἐνεργοῦμαι ; [impf. ἐνηργούμην] ; (not found in the 
O. T. or in prof. auth., and in the N. T. used only by 
Paul and James [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below]) ; it 
is used only of things (cf. W. $ 38,6 fin.; [B. 193 (167) ]), 
to display one's activity, show one's self operative: [2 'Th. 
ii. 7 (see μυστήριον, 2 fin.)]; foll. by ἐν with dat. of the 
thing, where, Ro. vii. 5; ἐν with dat. of the condition, 
2 Co. i.6; ἐν with dat. of pers. in whose mind a thing 
shows itself active, 2 Co. iv. 12; Eph. iii. 20; Col.i. 29; 
1 Th. it. 13; foll by διά with gen. of thing, Gal. v. 6. 
In Jas. v. 16 ἐνεργουμένη does not have the force of an 
adj., but gives the reason why the δέησις of a righteous 
man has outward success, viz. as due to the fact that 
it exhibits its activity [*works"] (inwardly), i. e. is 
solemn and earnest. (The act. [and pass.] in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aristot. down.) [Onthis word cf. (besides Bp. Lehtft. 
on Gal. ii. 8; v. 6) Fritzsche and Vauchan on Ro. vii. 5; 
Ellie. on Gal. ii. 8.]* 

ἐνέργημα, ros, τό, (evepyéw), thing wrought; effect, op- 
eration: plur. [ R. V. workings], 1 Co. xii. 6 3’ with the ad- 
dition of the epexeget. gen. δυνάμεων, ibid. 10. (Polyb., 
Diod., Antonin., [al.].) * 

ἐνεργής, -és, (i. q. ἐνεργός, equiv. to 6 dv ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ 
[ Eng. at work]), active: Heb. iv. 12; by a somewhat in- 
congruous fig., in 1 Co. xvi. 9 ἃ θύρα évepyrs is spoken 
of, ‘an opportunity for the working of the gospel’; 
€vepy. γίνομαι ἔν τινι, in something, Philem. vs. 6. ([Aris- 
tot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) * 

ἐν-εστώς, see ἐνίστημι. 

ἐν-ευλογέω, -ῶ : 1 fut. pass. ἐνευλογηθήσομαι:; (the prep. 
seems to refer to the pers. on whom the blessing is 
conferred ; cf. Germ. einsegnen); to confer benefits on, 
to bless: pass. foll. by ἐν with dat. of that in which lies 
the ground of the blessing received or expected, Acts 
iii. 25 (where the Ree. gives τῷ σπέρμ., dat. of the in- 
strument; [WH read the simple εὐλογ.7); Gal. iii. 8, 


sa. 4 
ε νέχω 


where Rec."** has the simple εὐλογ. (Gen. xii. 3; 
xviii 18; xxvi 4 Alex.; [Ps. lxxi. (Ixxii.) 17 Ald., 
Compl.]; Sir. xliv. 21; not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἐν-έχω ; impf. evetyov; [pres. pass. evéyouar]; to have 
within, to hold in; a. pass. to be held, be entangled, 
be held ensnared, with a dat. of the thing in which one 
is held captive, — very often in Grk. writ., both lit. (as 
τῇ πάγῃ, Hat. 2, 121, 2) and fig. (as ἀγγελίᾳ, Pind. Pyth. 
8, 69; φιλοτιμίᾳ, Eur. Iph. A. 527; κακῷ, Epict. diss. 3, 
22,,93): ζυγῷ δουλείας, Gal. v. 1; [θλίψεσιν, 2 Th. i. 4 
Wlimrg.], (ἀσεβείαις, 3 Mace. vi. 10). 
to be enraged with, set one's self against, hold a grudge 
against some one: Mk. vi. 19; Lk. xi. 53, (Gen. xlix. 23); 
the expression is elliptical, and occurs in full (χόλον τινί 
to have anger in one’s self against another) in Hat. 1, 118; 
8, 27; 6,119; see a similar ellipsis under προσέχω. [In 
this last case the ellipsis supplied is τὸν νοῦν, W. 593 
(552); B. 144 (126); Meyer et al. would supply the 
same after ἐνέχειν in Mk. and Lk. ll. cc. and render the 
phrase to have (an eye) on, watch with hostility ; but 
De Wette, Bleek, al. agree with Grimm. Many take the 
expression in Lk. l. c. outwardly, to press upon (R. V. 
txt.); see Steph. Thes.s. v.; L. and S. s. v.; Hesych. 
ἐνέχει: μνησικακεῖ. ἔγκειται. ἢ 

ἐνθά-δε, adv., (fr. ἔνθα and the enclitic δέ; Krüger $ 9, 
8, 1 and 2; [ef. W. 472 (440); B. 71 (62)]), [fr. Hom. 
down]; a. here: Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts x. 18; xvi. 28; xvii. 
6; xxv. 24. b. hither: Jn.iv. 15 sq.; Acts xxv. 17.* 

ἔνϑεν, adv., (fr. ev and the syllable θεν, indicating the 
place whence), hence: Mt. xvii. 20 L'T Tr WH; Lk. 
xvi. 26 GL T Tr WH. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἐνθυμέομαι, -οὔμαι; à depon. pass.; 1 aor. ptep. évév- 
nx8eis; fr. Aeschyl. down, with the object now in the 
gen. now in the ace.; cf. Matthiae § 349, ii. p. 823; 
Kühner $ 417 Anm. 9, ii. p. 310; [Jelf $ 485]; Krüger 
$47, 11, 1 and 2; (fr. ἐν and θυμός) ; to bring to mind, 
revolve in mind, ponder: τί, Mt. i. 20; ix. 4; to think, 
to deliberate: περί τινος, about anything, Acts x. 19 
Rec. (So also Sap. vi. 16; Plat. rep. 10 p. 595 a.; Isoc. 
ep. 9 p. 614, § 9 Bekk.)  [Cowr.: dc-evOupéopa. ] * 

ἐνθύμησις, -ews, 7, α thinking, consideration: Acts,xvii. 
29 [A. V. device]; plur. thoughts: Mt. ix. 4; xii. 25; 
Heb. iv. 12 [here Lmrg. sing.]. (Rare in the classies; 
Hippoer., Eur., Thue., Leian.) * 

ἔνι i. q. evi, the accent being thrown back, same as ἐν, 
used adverbially [W. § 50, 7 N. 2] for ἔνεστι, is in, is 
among, has place, is present, (Hom. Od. 21, 218; Thue. 
2,40): Gal. iii. 28 (three times); Col. iii. 11; Jas. i. 17; 
with addition of ἐν ὑμῖν, 1 Co. vi. 5 (where Rec. ἔστιν); 
in prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. on very often, it can 
be, is possible, is lawful; [here some would place Jas. l. c. ]. 
The opinion of many (e. g. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 642; 
Meyer on Gal.l.c.; cf. Ellie. ibid.] that é is a con- 
tracted form for ἔνεστι is opposed by the like use of 
πάρα, dva, which can hardly be supposed to be con- 
tracted from πάρεστι, ἄνεστι; cf. Krüger $ 9, 11,4; W. 
80 (77); Güttlling, Lehre v. Accent ete. p. 380; [Chan- 
dler ὃ 917 sq.; B. 72 (64); Lob. Path. Element. ii. 315].* 


b. évéyo τινί, 


216 





€vvevnkovraevvéa. 


ἐνιαυτός, -o0, 6, a year: Jn. xi. 49, 51; xviii. 13; Acts 
xi. 26; xviii. 11; Jas. v. 17; Rev. ix. 15; plur., of the 
Jewish years of Jubilee, Gal. iv. 10 [cf. Ellie. ad loc.]; 
ποιεῖν ἐνιαυτόν, to spend a year, Jas. iv. 135 ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνι- 
avro), Heb. ix. 7 (like ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας, Lk. xvii. 4), 
[cf. W. $30, 8 N. 1; Krüger $47, 10, 4]; κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν, 
yearly, Heb. ix. 25; x. 1,3, (Thue. 1, 93; Xen. oec. 4,6 ; 
an. 3, 2, 12) ; in a wider sense, for some fixed and defi- 
nite period of time: Lk. iv. 19 (fr. Is. Ixi. 2), on which 
pass. see δεκτός. [From Hom. down.] * 

[SxN. ἐνιαυτός, ἔτος: originally ἐν. seems to have de- 
noted (yet cf. Curtius $ 210) a year viewed as a cycle or 
period of time, ἔτ. as a division or sectional portion of time.] 

ἐν-ίστημι : pf. ἐνέστηκα, ptep. ἐνεστηκώς (Heb. ix. 9), 
and by syncope évegrós; fut. mid. ἐνστήσομαι ; to place 
in or among; to put in; in pf., plpf., 2 aor., and in mid. 
(prop. as it were to stand in sight, stand near) to be upon,. 
impend, threaten: 2 Th. ii. 2; fut. mid. 2 Tim. iii. 1. 
pf. ptep. close at hand, 1 Co. vii. 26; as often in Grk. 
writ. (in the grammarians ὁ ἐνεστώς sc. χρόνος is the 
present tense [cf. Philo de plant. Noé § 27 τριμερὴς χρόνος, 
ὃς εἰς τὸν παρεληλυθότα καὶ ἐνεστῶτα Kal μέλλοντα τέμνε- 
σθαι πέφυκεν |), present: 6 καιρὸς ὁ ἐνεστώς, Heb. ix. 9; τὰ 
ἐνεστῶτα opp. to τὰ μέλλοντα, Ko. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; 
ὁ ἐνεστὼς αἰὼν πονηρός in tacit contrast with τῷ μέλλοντι 
αἰῶνι, Gal. i. 4, (Basil. ep. 57 ad Melet. [iii. p. 151 c. ed. 
Benedict. ] ὠφέλιμα διδάγματα 1) ἐφόδια πρός re τὸν ἐνεστῶτα 
αἰῶνα καὶ τὸν μέλλοντα). [Many (so R. V.) would adopt 
the meaning present in 2 Th. ii. 2 and 1 Co. vii. 26 also ;. 
but cf. Mey. on Gal. l. c.] * 

ἐντισχύω; 1 aor. ἐνίσχυσα; [cf. D. 145 (127)]; 1. 
intrans. to grow strong, to receive strength: Acts ix. 19 
[here WH Tr mrg. ἐνισχύθη ] ; ( Aristot., Theophr., Diod., 
Sept.). 2. trans. to make strong, to strengthen, (2 S. 
xxii. 40; Sir. 1. 4; Hippocr. leg. p. 2, 26 ὁ χρόνος ταῦτα: 
πάντα ἐνισχύει) ; to strengthen one in soul, to inspirit: 
Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ].* 

év-, see ἐγκ- and s. v. ἐν, ITI. 3. Í 

[ἐν-μένω, see ἐμμένω and s. v. ev, ITI. 3.] 

ἔννατος or ἔνατος (which latter form, supported by the 
authority alike of codd. and of inserr., has been every- 
where restored by L T Tr WH; cf. [s. v. N,v; Tf. 
Proleg. p. 80]; Krüger § 24, 2,12; W. 43; [found once 
(Rev. xxi. 20) in Ree."]), -árr, -arov, [fr. Hom. down], 
ninth: Rev. xxi. 205 the ἐνάτη ὥρα, spoken of in Mt. xx. 
5; xxvii. 45 sq.; Mk. xv. 33 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 44; Acts iii. 
1; x. 3, 30, corresponds to our 3 o'clock in the after- 
noon; for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the 
twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the 
first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth. 
with us. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Hour.]* 

ἐννέα, of, ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], nine: Lk. xvii. 17; 
see the foll. word. 

tvvevqkovra-evvéa, more correctly ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα (i. e. 
written separately, and the first word with a single v, as 
by LT Tr WH; cf. [s. v. N,v; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; WH- 
App. p. 148]; W. 43 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc. 
p. 95). ninety-nine: Mt. xviii. 12 sq.; Lk. xv. 4, 7.* 


> , 
€VVEOS 


ἐννεός, more correctly ἐνεός (LT Tr WH [cf. the pre- 
ceding word ]), -ov, ὁ, (it seems to be identical with ἄνεως 
i. q. unused dvavos, dvaos, fr. dw, αὔω to cry out, hence 
without sound, mute), dumb, mute, destitute of the power 
of speech, (Plat., Aristot.): Is. lvi. 10, cf. Prov. xvii. 28; 
€veàv μὴ δυνάμενον λαλῆσαι, of an idol, Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 
40; unable to speak for terror, struck dumb, astounded : 
80 εἱστήκεισαν éveot, stood speechless (Vulg. stabant stupe- 
facti), Acts ix.7; Hesych. ἐμβροντηθέντες: ἐνεοὶ γενόμενοι. 
Cf. Alberti, Glossar. in N. T. p. 69. In the same sense 
ἀπηνεώθη, Dan. iv. 16 Theodot., fr. dzeveóo.* 

ἐν-νεύω : impf. évévevov; to nod to, signify or express by 
a nod or sign: τινί τι, Lk. i. 62. (Arstph. in Babyloniis 
frag. 58 [i.e. 22 ed. Brunck, 16 p. 455 Didot]; Lcian. 
dial. meretr. 12, 1; with ὀφθαλμῷ added, Prov. vi. 13; x. 
10.)* 

ἔννοια, -as, 7, (νοῦς); 1. the act of thinking, consid- 
eration, meditation; (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a thought, no- 
tion, conception; (Plat. Phaedo p. 78 ¢., etc.; esp. in phil- 
osoph. writ., as Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; Acad. 2, 7 and 10; 
Epict. diss. 2, 11, 2 sq., ete.; Plut. plac. philos. 4, 11, 1; 
Dios. Laért. 3, 79). 3. mind, understanding, will ; 
manner of thinking and feeling ; Germ. Gesinnung, (Eur. 
Hel. 1026; Diod. 2, 30 var. ; τοιαύτην ἔννοιαν ἐμποιεῖν τινι, 
Isoc. p. 112 d. ; τήρησον τὴν ἐμὴν βουλὴν kai ἔννοιαν, Prov. 
iii. 21; φυλάσσειν ἔννοιαν ἀγαθήν, v. 2): so 1 Pet. iv. 1; 
plur. with καρδίας added (as in Prov. xxiii. 19), Heb. 
iv. 12 [ A. V. intents of the heart], cf. Sap. ii. 14.* 

ἔν-νομος, -ov, (νόμος) ; 1. bound to the law; bound 
by the law: Χριστῷ, or more correctly Χριστοῦ LT Tr 
WH, 1 Co. ix. 21 [cf. B. $132, 23]. 2. as in Grk. writ. 
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl. down, lawful, regular: Acts xix. 39 
[on which see Bp. Lyhtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 
1878, p. 295; Wood, Ephesus etc., App. p. 38].* 

€vvvxos, -ov, (νύξ), nightly, nocturnal, (Hom., Pind., 
Trags.). Neut. adverbially, by night: Mk. i. 35, where 
L' TTr WH have neut. plur. évvvxa [cf. W. 463 (432) ; 
B. § 128, 2].* 

ἐν-οικέω, -à; fut. ἐνοικήσω ; 1 aor. ἐνῴκησα; Sept. for 
aw; to dwell in; in the N. T. with ἔν τινι, dat. of pers. 
in one, everywhere metaphorically, to dwell in one and 
influence him ( for good) : ἔν τινι, in a. person's soul, of the 
Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 11; 2 Tim. i. 14; of πίστις, 2 Tim. 
i. 5; [of sin, Ro. vii. 17 T WH (for simple oikeiv)]; ἐν 
ὑμῖν, in your assembly, of Christian truth, Col. iii. 16; ἐν 
αὐτοῖς, in a Christian church, of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 
Co. iii. 16 ; [al. understand the phrase in Col. and Co. 
ll. ec. internally, “in your hearts"; but see Meyer].* 

ἐν-όντα, Td, see ἔνειμι. 

tv-opk(to ; to adjure, put under oath, solemnly entreat, 
with two acc., one of him who is adjured, one of him by 
whom he is adjured [B. 147 (128)]: 1 Th. v. 27 L T Tr 
WH, for RG ὁρκίζω, [on the inf. foll. cf. B. 276 (237)]. 
Elsewhere not found except once [twice] in mid. évop- 
κίζομαι in Boeckh, Inserr. ii. p. 42, no. 1933 ; [and Joseph. 
antt. 8, 15, 4 Dind., also Bekk.]; the subst. ἐνορκισμός 
occurs in Synes. [1413 b. Migne]; once also ἐνορκέω in 
Schol. ad Leian. Catapl. c. 23 évopkà σε κατὰ τοῦ πατρός: 


21T 





ἔνοχος 


[to which Soph. Lex. 5. v. adds Porph. Adm. 208, 18 
ἐνορκῶ σε εἰς τὸν θεὸν ἵνα ἀπέλθῃς." 

ἑνότης, τητος, ἡ, (fr. εἷς, ἑνός, one), unity (Aristot., 
Plut.) ; i. q. unanimity, agreement: with gen., τῆς πίστεως, 
Eph. iv. 13; τοῦ πνεύματος, ib. vs. 3." 

ἐν-οχλέω, -ῶ ; [pres. pass. ptep. evoyovpevos]; (ὀχλέω, 
fr. ὄχλος a crowd, annoyance); in the classies fr. Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat. on; to excite disturbance, to trouble, 
annoy, (ἐν, ina person) ; in Grk. writ. foll. by both τινά 
and τινί; pass. with ἀπό twos, Lk. vi. 18 T Tr WH; 
absol. of the growth of a poisonous plant, fig. represent- 
ing the man who corrupts the faith, piety, character, of 
the Christian church: Heb. xii. 15 fr. Deut. xxix. 18 
after cod. Alex. which gives ἐνοχλῇ for ἐν χολῇ, which 
agreeably to the Hebr. text is the reading of cod. Vat. 
(Gen. xlviii.1; 1S. xix. 14, ete.) [Cowr.: map-evoydéw.]* 

ἔνοχος, -ov, 1. q. 6 evexdpevos, one who is held in any- 
thing, so that he cannot escape; bound, under obligation, 
subject to, liable: with gen. of the thing by which one is 
bound, δουλείας, Heb. ii. 15 ; used of one who is held by, 
possessed with, love and zeal for anything; thus ràv 
βιβλίων, Sir. prolog. 9; with dat. rots ἐρωτικοῖς, Plut. ; 
[on supposed distinetions in meaning betw. the constr. 
w. the gen. and w. the dat. (e. ¢. ‘the constr. with the dat. 
expresses liability, that with the gen. carries the mean- 
ing further and implies either the actual or the right- 
ful hold.’ Green) see Schdfer on Demosth. v. p. 323; 
cf. W. $28, 2; B. 170 (148)]. As in Grk. writ., chiefly 
in a forensie sense, denoting the connection of a person 
either with his crime, or with the penalty or trial, or with. 
that against whom or which he has offended; so — a. 
absol. guilty, worthy of punishment: Lev. xx. 9, 11,13, 16, 
27; 1 Mace. xiv. 45. — b. with gen. of the thing by the 
violation of which guilt is contracted, guilty of anything: 
τοῦ σώματος κ. TOU αἵματος τοῦ κυρίου, guilty of a crime 
committed against the body and blood of the Lord, 1 Co. 
xi. 27 [see Meyer; W. 202 (190sq.)]; πάντων, sc. ἐνταλ-- 
μάτων, Jas. ii. 10; οἱ ἔνοχοί σου, Is. liv.17. | c. with gen. 
of the crime : αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος [an eternal sin], Mk. iii. 
29 L T Tr txt. WH; (τῶν βιαίων, Plat. lege. 11, 914 e. ; 
κλοπῆς, Philo de Jos. § 37; ἱεροσυλίας, 2 Mace. xiii. 6; 
Aristot. oec. 2 [p. 1349*, 19], and in other exx.; but much 
oftener in the classics with dat. of the crime; cf. Passow or 
[L.and S.] s.v.). d. with gen. of the penalty: θανάτου, 
Mk. xiv. 64; Mt. xxvi. 66 ; Gen. xxvi. 11; αἰωνίου κρίσεως, 
Mk. iii. 29 Rec.; δεσμοῦ [al. dat.], Dem. p. 1229, 11. 6. 
with dat. of the tribunal; liable to this or that tribunal i. e. 
to punishment to be imposed by this or that tribunal: 
τῇ κρίσει, τῷ συνεδρίῳ, Mt. v. 21 sq.; ἔνοχος γραφῇ; to he 
indicted, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 64; cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. 
ii. 1 p. 340 sq.; [W.210 (198)]. — f. by a use unknown 
to Grk.,writ. it is connected with εἰς and the ace. of the 
place where the punishment is to be suffered: εἰς τ. γέεν- 
vav τοῦ πυρός, ἃ pregn. constr. [W. 213 (200) ; 621 (577) ] 
(but cf. B. 170 (148) [who regards it as a vivid cireumlo- 
cution for the dat.; ef. Green, Crit. Notes (ad loc.) ‘liable 
as far’ in respect of penal consequence ‘as the fiery ἃ.» 
viz. to vo away or be cast into ete. Mt. v. 22.* 


ἔνταλμα 


ἐνπ- see ἐμπ- and s. v. ἐν, IIT. 3 fine print. 

ἔνταλμα, -ros, τό, (ἐντέλλομαι [see ἐντέλλω]), a precept: 
plur, Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; Col. ii. 22. (Is. xxix. 13 
διδάσκοντες ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων ; [Job xxiii. 11,12]. Not 
found in prof. auth.; [W. 25].)* 

ἐνταφιάζω ; 1 aor. inf. ἐνταφιάσαι ; (0 see to τὰ ἐντάφια 
(fr. ἐν and τάφος), i. e. to prepare a body for burial, by 
the use of every requisite provision and funereal adorn- 
ment, to wit, baths, vestments, flowers, wreaths, per- 
fumes, libations, ete.; to lay out a corpse (Lat. pollin- 
gere): Mt. xxvi. 12; Jn. xix. 40, (Gen.1. 2 sq.; Anthol. 
11, 125, 5; Plut. de esu earn. 1, 5, 7 mor. p. 995 e.) * 

ἐνταφιασμός, -ov, 6, (ἐνταφιάζω, q. v.), preparation of a 
body for burial: Mk. xiv. 8; Jn. xii. 7. (Schol ad Eur. 
Phoen. 1654; [Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1009].) * 

ἐν-τέλλω : (τέλλω equiv. to τελέω) ; several times in 
the poets (Pind. Olymp. 7, 73) and the later writers 
(évréraAxe, Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 5 [but Bekk. évrerdA6a: ] ; 
καθὼς ἐντέταλταί σοι, passively, Sir. vii. 31); generally, 
and so always in the N. T., depon. mid. ἐντέλλομαι; fut. 
ἐντελοῦμαι; 1 aor. ἐνετειλάμην ; pf. 3 pers. sing. ἐντέταλται 
(Acts xiii. 47) ; Sept. very often for YWY; to order, com- 
mand to be done, enjoin: περί twos, Heb. xi. 22; éverec- 
λατο λέγων, Mt. xv. 4 [ἢ T]; τινί, Actsi. 2; [with λέγων 
added, Mt. xvii. 9]; with οὕτω added, Acts xiii. 47; καθώς, 
[Mk. xi. 6 RL mrg.]; Jn. xiv. 31 RGT; foll. by inf. Mt. 
xix. 7; τινί, foll. by inf. [B. $ 141, 2; 275 (237) ], Jn. viii. 
5 Ree.; τινί, tva [cf. D. 237 (204)], Mk. xiii. 34 (Joseph. 
antt. 7, 14, 5; 8,14, 2); τινί τι, Mt. xxviii. 20; Mk. x. 3; 
Jn. xv. 14, 17; τινὶ περί τινος, gen. of pers., Mt. iv. 6; Lk. 
iv. 10, fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11 sq. διαθήκην ἐντέλλεσθαι πρός 
twa, to command to be delivered to one, Heb. ix. 20; cf. 
ἐνετείλατο αὐτῷ πρὸς λαὸν αὐτοῦ, Sir. xlv. 3; the phrase 
ἐντέλλεσθαι (τινί) διαθήκην occurs also in Josh. xxiii. 16 ; 
Judg. ii. 20; Jer. xi. 4; Ps. ex. (exi.) 9, but in another 
sense, as appears from the full expression διαθήκην, ἣν 
ἐνετείλατο ὑμῖν ποιεῖν, Deut. iv. 13. [SYN. see κελεύω, 
fin.] * 

ἐντεῦθεν, adv. of place, from this place, hence, (as ἐκεῖ- 
θεν thence): Mt. xvii. 20 RG; Lk. iv. 9; xiii. 31; xvi. 
26 Rec.; Jn. ii. 16; [vii. 3]; xiv. 315 xviii. 36 ; ἐντεῦθεν 
x. ἐντεῦθεν, on the one side and the other, on each side: Jn. 
xix. 18; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. [cf. Num. xxii. 24; Dan. xii. 
5 Theodot.]; metaph. hence, i. e. from that cause or ori- 
gin, from this source, i. q. ἐκ rovrov [see ἐκ, II. 8],.Jas. iv. 
1 [W. 161 (152); B. 400 (342)].* 

ἔν-τενξις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐντυγχάνω, q. v.), a falling in with, 
meeting with, (ai τοῖς λῃσταῖς ἐντεύξεις, Plat. politic. 
p. 298 d.) ; an interview, a coming together, to visit, con- 
verse, or for any other cause; that for which an interview 
is held, a conference or conversation (Polyb., Diod., al.), a 
petition, supplication (Diod. 16, 55; Joseph. antt. 15, 3, 
8; Plut. Tib. Gracch. 11); used of prayer to God: 1 
Tim. iv. 55 plur. [A. V. intercessions], 1 Tim. ii. 1, (Plut. 
Num. 14 ποιεῖσθαι τὰς πρὸς τὸ θεῖον ἐντεύξεις). [SYN. see 
δέησις, fin.] * 

ἔντιμος, -ov, (τιμή), held in honor, prized; hence, pre- 
cious: λίθος, 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, (Is. xxviii. 16); honorable, 


218 





ἐντός 


noble, Lk. xiv. 8; τινί, dear to one, Lk. vii. 25 ἔντιμον 
ἔχειν τινά to hold one dear or in honor, to value highly, 
Phil. ii. 29. [(Soph., Plat., al.)]* 

ἐντολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐντέλλω or ἐντέλλομαι, q. v.), fr. Pind. 
and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 7131, in the Pss. the 
plur. ἐντολαί also for D'mp3; an order, command, charge, 
precept: 1. univ. a charge, injunction: Lk. xv. 29; 
ἐντολὴν λαμβάνειν παρά twos, Jn. x. 185 πρός τινα, Acts 
xvii. 15; λαβεῖν ἐντολὰς περί twos, Col. iv. 10; that which 
is prescribed to one by reason of his oflice, ἐντολὴν ἔχειν 
foll. by inf., Heb. vii. 5; ἐντολὴν διδόναι τινί, Jn. xiv. 31 
L' Tr WH; with τί εἴπῃ added, of Christ, whom God 
commanded what to teach to men, Jn. xii. 49; ἡ ἐντολὴ 
αὐτοῦ, of God, respecting the same thing, vs. 50. 2. 
a commandment, i. e. a prescribed rule in accordance with 
which a thing is done; a. univ. ἐντολὴ σαρκική [-ἰνη G 
LT Tr WH], a precept relating to lineage, Heb. vii. 16 ; 
of the Mosaic precept concerning the priesthood, Heb. 
vii. 18; of a magistrate’s order or edict: ἐντολὴν διδόναι, 
ἵνα, Jn. xi. 57. b. ethically; a. used of the command- 
ments of the Mosaic law: ἡ ἐντολὴ τοῦ θεοῦ. what God 
prescribes in the law of Moses, Mt. xv. 3, (and RG in 
vs. 6); Mk. vii. 8sq.; esp. of particular precepts of this 
law as distinguished from 6 νόμος (the law) their body 
or sum: Mt. xxii. 36,38; Mk. x. 5; xii. 28 sqq.; Ro. vii. 
8-13; xiii. 9; Eph. vi. 2; Heb. ix. 19; κατὰ τ. ἐντολήν, 
according to the precept of the law, Lk. xxiii. 56; plur., 
Mt. [v. 19]; xxii. 40; Mk. x. 19; [Lk. xviii. 20]; τηρεῖν 
τὰς ἐντολάς, Mt. xix. 17; πορεύεσθαι ἐν τ. ἐντολαῖς, Lk. i. 
6; ὁ νόμος τῶν ἐντολῶν, the law containing the precepts, 
Eph. ii. 15 (see δόγμα, 2). β. of the precepts of Jewish 
tradition: ἐντολαὶ ἀνθρώπων, Tit. i. 14. y. univ. of the 
commandments of God, esp. as promulgated in the Chris- 
tian religion: 1 Jn. iii. 23; iv. 21; v. 3; ἐντολὴν διδόναι, 
1 Jn. iii. 23 ; ἐντολὴν ἔχειν, ἵνα, 1 Jn. iv. 21; ἐντολὴν λαβεῖν 
παρὰ τοῦ πατρός, 2 Jn. 4; τήρησις ἐντολῶν θεοῦ, 1 Co. vii. 
19; τηρεῖν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, 1 Jn. ii. 3 sq.; iii. 22, 24; v. 
2 [here L T Tr WH ποιῶμεν], 3; or τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xii. 
17; xiv. 12; ποιεῖν ras ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, Rey. xxii. 14 RG; 
περιπατεῖν κατὰ Tas ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, 2 Jn. 6; of those 
things which God commanded to be done by Christ, Jn. 
xv. 10°; of the precepts of Christ relative to the orderly 
management of affairs in religious assemblies, 1 Co. xiv. 
37 RGL Tr WH; of the moral precepts of Christ and 
his apostles: ἐντολὴν διδόναι, tva, Jn. xiii. 34; ἐντολὴν 
γράφειν. 1 In. ii. ? sq. ; [2 Jn. 5]; τὰς ἐντολὰς τηρεῖν, Jn. 
[xiv. 15]; xv. 10°; ἔχειν τὰς evr. x. τηρεῖν αὐτάς, * habere 
in memoria et servare in vita” (Augustine), Jn. xiv. 21; 
αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ evr. ἵνα, Jn. xv. 12, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 23. ἡ ἐντολή, 
collectively, of the whole body of the moral precepts of 
Christianity: 1, Tim. vi. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 2, (thus 
ἡ ἐντολὴ τοῦ θεοῦ, Polye. ad Phil. 5).* 

ἐντόπιος, -ov, (τόπος). a dweller in a place; a resident or 
native of a place: Acts xxi. 12. (Soph. [?], Plat., al.) * 

ἐντός, adv., ([fr. ἐν], opp. to ἐκτός), within, inside: with 
gen. ἐντὸς ὑμῶν, within you, i. e. in the midst of you, Lk. 
xvii. 21, (ἐντὸς αὐτῶν, Xen. an. 1, 10, 3 [but see the 
pass.]: ἐντὸς τούτων, Hell. 2, 3, 19; al.) ; others, within 


ἐντρέπω 2 


you (i. 6. in your souls), a meaning which the use of the 
word permits (ἐντός μου, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 4; cviii. 
(cix.) 22, ete.; [Hippol. ref. haer. 5, 7. 8; Petrus Alex. 
ep. can. 5]), but not the context; τὸ ἐντός, the inside, 
Mt. xxiii. 26.* 

ἐν-τρέπω ; [ Mid., pres. ἐντρέπομαι ; impf. ἐνετρεπόμην | ; 
2 aor. pass. ἐνετράπην ; 2 fut. mid. [i. e. pass. with mid. 
force, B. 52 (45)] ἐντραπήσομαι ; prop. to turn about, so 
in pass. even in Hom. ; τινά, prop. to turn one upon him- 
self, i. e. to shame one, 1 Co. iv. 14 (Diog. Laért. 2, 29 ; 
Ael. v. h. 3, 17; Sept.); pass. to be ashamed: 2 Th. iii. 
14; Tit. ii. 8. Mid., τινά, to reverence a person: Mt. 
xxi 37; Mk.xii.6; Lk. xviii. 2,4; xx. 13; Heb. xii. 9; 
Ex. x. 3; Sap. ii. 10; Polyb. 9, 36, 10; 30, 9, 2; θεούς, 
Diod. 19, 7; soin Grk. writ., esp. fr. Plut. on; the earlier 
Greeks said ἐντρέπεσθαί τινος ; so also Polyb. 9, 31, 6; [cf. 
W. $32, 1 b. a.; B. 192 (166)].* 

ἐν-τρέφω : [pres. pass. ptep. évrpejópevos]; to nourish 
in: τινά τινι, a person in a thing; metaph. to educate, 
form the mind : τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, 1 Tim. iv. 6; rois 
νόμοις, Plat. lege. 7 p. 798 a.; Philo, vict. offer. $ 10 sub 
fin.; rois ἱεροῖς γράμμασι. Phil. leg. ad Gai. § 29 sub fin.* 

ἔν-τρομος, -ov, (rpópos, cf. ἔμφοβος). trembling, terrified : 
Acts vii. 32 and xvi. 29 ἔντρ. γενόμενος, becoming tremu- 
lous, made to tremble; Heb. xii. 21 ['Tr mrg. WH mrg. 
ἔκτρομος, q. v.]. (Sept.; 1 Mace. xiii. 2; Plut. Fab. 3.) * 

ἐν-τροπή, -ῆς. ἡ, (ἐντρέπω, q. v.), Shame: πρὸς ἐντροπὴν 
ὑμῖν λέγω [or λαλῶ], to arouse your shame, 1 Co. vi. 5; 
xv. 34, (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 8, 20; 
respect, reverence, Soph., Polyb., Joseph., al.) * 

ἐν-τρυφάω, -à; (see rpupaw and τρυφή) ; to live in luz- 
ury, live delicately or luxuriously, to revel in: ἐν ταῖς 
ἀπάταις [L Tr txt. WH mrs. ἀγάπαις, see ἀγάπη, 2] αὐτῶν, 
(on the meaning see ἀπάτη), 2 Pet. ii. 13 [cf. W. $52, 4, 
5]. (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 30; Diod. 19, 71; also to take de- 
light in: ἐν ἀγαθοῖς, Is. lv. 2; with dat. of thing, 4 Mace. 
viii. 7; Hdian. 3, 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.].) ** 

ἐν-τυγχάνω ; 2 aor. ἐνέτυχον; generally with a dat. 
either of pers. or of thing; 1. to light upon a person 
or a thing, fall in with, hit upon, a person or a thing; so 
often in Attic. 2. to go to or meet a person, esp. for 
the purpose of conversation, consultation, or supplication, 
(Polyb., Plut., Aelian, al.) : with the addition περί τινος, 
gen. of person, for the purpose of consulting about a per- 
son, Acts xxv. 24 [R. V. made suit]; to make petition: 
ἐνέτυχον τῷ κυρίῳ kal ἐδεήθην αὐτοῦ, Sap. vili. 21; ἐνέτυχον 
τῷ βασιλεῖ τὴν ἀπόλυσιν . . . αἰτούμενοι, 3 Mace. vi. 37; 
hence, to pray, entreat: ὑπέρ with gen. of pers. to make 
intercession for any one (the dat. of the pers. approached 
in prayer being omitted, as evident from the context), 
Ro. viii. 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, (foll. by περί with gen. of 
person, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 56, 1); τινὶ κατά τινος, [to 
plead with one against any one], to accuse one to any one, 
Ro. xi. 2, cf. 1 Mace. viii. 32; x. 61, 63 sq.; xi. 25. (Not 
found in Sept.) [Comp.: ὑπερ-εντυγχάνω. * 

ἐν-τυλίσσω: 1 aor. ἐνετύλιξα ;. pf. pass. ptep. évrervAcy- 
pévos; to roll in, wrap in: τινὰ σινδόνι, Mt. xxvii. 59 (£v a. 
Tr, [ἐν] e. WH); Lk. xxiii. 53; Ev. Nicod. c. 11 fin. to 


19 








, 
ἐνώπιον 


roll up, wrap together: pass. Jn. xx. 7. (ArStph. Plut. 
692; nub. 987; Athen. 3 p. 106 sq.) * 

ἐν-τυπόω, -à : pf. pass. ptep. ἐντετυπωμένος ; (o engrave, 
imprint (a figure) : [foll. by dat. (Rec. with év)], 2 Co. iii. 
τ [ef. W. 634 sq. (589)]. (Aristot. Dio Cass., Plut., and 
in earlier frag. in Athen.)* 

ἐν-υβρίζω : 1 aor. ptep. ἐνυβρίσας ; to treat with con- 
tumely: Heb. x. 29. (From Soph. on.) * 

ἐνυπνιάζω (ἐνύπνιον; q. v.) : to dream ( Aristot. h. an. 4, 
10, etc.), and dep. ἐνυπνιάζομαι (Hippocr., Plut. Brut. c. 
24); so always in the Bible, for n?n, with fut. pass. 
ἐνυπνιασθήσομαι, and com. with aor. pass. ἐνυπνιάσθην, 
more rarely mid. ἐνυπνιασάμην (Gen. xxxvii.9; Jude. vii. 
13); ἐνύπνια ἐνυπνιάζεσθαι (in Sept. for ni»ion Don), 
io dream (divinely suggested) dreams: Acts ii. 17 fr. 
Joel iii. 1 (ii. 28); but the reading ἐνυπνίοις (ἐνυπνιά- 
ζεσθαι) was long ago restored, which reading also cod. 
Alex. gives in Joel. Metaph. to be beguiled with sensuous 
images and carried away to an impious course of conduct : 
Jude 8.* 

ἐνύπνιον, -ov, τό, (ev and ὕπνος, what appears in sleep; 
fr. Aeschyl. down), a dream (Lat. insomnium), a vision 
which presents itself to one in sleep: Acts ii. 17, on 
which pass. see ἐνυπνιάζω. (Sept. for Dyn.) * 

ἐνώπιον, neut. of the adj. ἐνώπιος, -ov, (i. q. ὁ ἐν ὠπὶ ὦν, 
one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 
11; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29) ; used adverbially it gets 
the foree of a preposition [W. $54, 6; B. 319 (274)], 
and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any 
prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in 
Sept. for ^3j!3 and 335, also for 333 and 7335; among 
N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the 
Rev. but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used 
1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, ov over 
against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns 
his eyes; a. prop.: εἶναι ἐνώπ. twos, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15; 
[xiv. 5 Ree.]; so that εἶναι must be mentally supplied 
before ἐνώπιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix. 13; after στῆναι, 
Acts x. 30; ἑστηκέναι, Rev. vii. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; xii. 4; 
xx. 12; παρεστηκέναι, Lk. i. 19; Acts iv. 10; ἱστάναι, 
Acts vi. 6; καθῆσθαι, Rev. xi 16; θύρα ἀνεῳγμένη ἐν. 
τινος, i. q. a door opened for one (see θύρα, c. y. [B. 173 
(150)]), Rev. iii. 8; after verbs signifying motion to a 
place: τιθέναι, Lk. v. 18 ; ἀναβαίνειν, Rev. viii. 4; βάλλειν, 
Rev. iv. 10; πίπτειν or πεσεῖν (of worshippers), Rev. 
iv.10; v. 8; [vii. 11]; προσκυνεῖν, Lk. iv. 7; Rev. iii.9; 
xv. 4, [ef. B. u. s.; 147 (129); W. 214 (201)] Pb. in 
metaphorieal phrases after verbs signifying motion: 
βαστάζειν τὸ ὄνομα... . ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν (see βαστάζω, 3), 
Acts ix. 15; σκάνδαλα βάλλειν ἐνώπ. τινος, to cast stum- 
bling-blocks (incitements to sin) before one, Rev. ii. 14; 
after προέρχεσθαι, to zo before one like a herald, Lk. i. 
17; [after προπορεύεσθαι. Lk. i. 76 WH]. in phrases in 
which something is supposed to be done by one while 
standing or appearing in the presence of another [cf. 
B. 176 (153)]: after ἀρνεῖσθαι, Lk. xii. 9 (Lehm. ἔμπρο- 
abev) ; [ἀπαρνεῖσθαι, ibid.]; ὁμολογεῖν, Rev. iii. 5 [ Rec. 
é£op.]; κατηγορεῖν, Rev. xii. 10; [dóew, Rev. xiv. 3]; 


B 


' Evos 


καυχᾶσθαι, to come before God and glory, 1 Co. i. 29; 
δικαιοῦν ἑαυτόν, Lk. xvi. 15. — c. i. 4. apud (with); in the 
soul of any one: χαρὰ γίνεται ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων, Lk. 
xv. 10 [al. understand this of God's joy, by reverent 
suggestion described as in the presence of the angels; cf. 
ἐν obp. vs. 1]: ἔσται σοι δόξα ἐνώπ. τῶν συνανακειμένων, Lk. 
xiv. 10 [al. take this outwardly; cf. 2 below]; after 
verbs of remembering and forgetting: εἰς μνημό- 
συνον evar. (L T Tr WI ἔμπροσθεν) τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts x. 4; 
μνησθῆναι ἐνώπ. τ. θεοῦ, Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi, 19; ézie- 
λησμένον ἐνώπ. τ. θεοῦ, Lk. xii. 6 [cf. B. § 134, 5]. 2; 
before one's eyes; in one's presence and sight or hearing; 
a. prop.: φαγεῖν ἐνώπ. τινος, Lk. xxiv. 43; this same 
phrase signifies a living together in Lk. xiii. 26 (2 S. 
xi. 13; 1 Καὶ. i. 25); σημεῖα ποιεῖν, Jn. xx. 30 ; dvakptvew, 
Lk. xxiii. 14; ἐνώπ. πολλῶν μαρτύρων, 1 Tim. vi. 12; add 
Lk.[v.25]; viii. 47; Acts xix. 9, 19; xxvii. 35; [1 Tim. 
v. 20]; 8 Jn. 6; Rev. iii. 5; [xiii. 13; xiv. 10]. ^b. 
metaph. : πίστιν ἔχε ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, have faith, satisfied 
with this that it is not hidden from the sight of God, 
Ro. xiv. 22; ἁμαρτάνειν ἐν. τινος (see ἁμαρτάνω ad fin.), 
Lk. xv. 18, 21; esp. in affirmations, oaths, adjurations: 
ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου, etc., Gal. i. 20; 1 Tim. v. 21; 
vi. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 14; iv. 1. IlIence those are said to do 
something in the presence of one who have him present 
to their thought, who set him before their mind's eye: 
προωρώμην [mpoop. L T Tr WH] τὸν κύριον evar. μου. 
Acts ii. 25; ταπεινοῦσθαι ἐν. τοῦ κυρίου, Jas. iv. 10, (Sir. 
ii. 17). c. atthe instance of any one, by his power and 
authority: Rev. xiii. 12, 14; xix. 20. — d. before the eyes 
of one, i.e. if he turns his eyes thither: Heb. iv. 13 (where 
οὐκ ἀφανὴς ἐνώπ. αὐτοῦ is explained by the following 
γυμνὰ... τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ ; cf. Job xxvi. 6 γυμνὸς ὁ 
ἄδης ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, before his look, to his view). 6. be- 
Sore one i. e. he looking on and judging, in one's judg- 
ment [W. 32; B.172 (150); § 133, 14]: ἐφάνησαν evar. 
αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ λῆρος, Lk. xxiv. 11 (cf. Greek Ἡρακλείδῃ 
λῆρος πάντα δοκεῖ εἶναι) ; 50. esp. ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, τοῦ 
κυρίου, after the foll. words: τὰ ἀρεστά, 1 Jn. iii. 22; 
βδέλυγμα, Lk. xvi. 15; δίκαιος, Lk. i. 6 (T Tr WH ἐναν- 
tiov) ; Acts iv. 19; δικαιοῦσθαι, Ro. iii. 20; εὐάρεστος, 
Heb. xiii. 21; εὐθύς, Acts viii. 21 Rec.; καλόν, ἀπόδεκτον͵ 
1 Tim. ii.3; v.4; Ro. xii.17; 2 Co. viii. 21; μέγας, Lk. 
i.15; πολυτελές, 1 Pet. iii. 4; πεπληρωμένος, Rev. iii. 2; 
ἀρέσκειν, Acts vi. 5 (Deut. i. 23 [Alex.]; 2 S. iii. 36; 
LW. $33, £.]) ; in the sight of God i. e. God looking on 
and approving: Lk.i. 15; Acts x. 33 ; 2 Co. iv. 2; vii. 12. 
in the sight of God, or with God: εὑρίσκειν χάριν (71 NY 
often in the O. T.), to be approved by God, please him, 
Acts vii. 46.* 

"Evós (UV [i.e. man, mortal]), nos, son of Seth 
(Gen. iv. 26) : Lk. iii. 38.* 

ἐνωτίζομαι : in bibl. writ. depon. mid.; 1 aor. impv. 2 
pers. plur. ἐνωτίσασθε ; i. q. ἐν driots δέχομαι (Hesych.), 
to receive into the ear ; give ear to: ri, Acts ii. 14; Sept. 
for rin; elsewhere only in eecl and Byzant. writ., 
and in these also as depon. pass. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis 
lexiec. p. 693 sq.; [Sturz, Dial. Alex. p. 166; W. 33].* 





220 


ἐξώγω 


Ἐνώχ [WII 'Evóx, see their Intr. § 408], (Ανωχος, 
του, 6, Joseph. antt. 1,3,4; Hebr. qr initiated or initi- 
ating, [ef. B. D. s. v.]), Enoch, father of Methuselah (Lk. 
iii. 37); on aecount of his extraordinary piety taken up 
alive by God to heaven (Gen. v. 18-24; Heb. xi. 5; [cf. 
Sir. xliv. 16; Joseph. antt. 1, 3, 4]) ; in the opinion of 
later Jews the most renowned antediluvian prophet; to 
whom, towards the end of the second century before 
Christ, was falsely attributed an apocalyptieal book 
which was afterwards combined with fragments of other 
apoeryphal books, and preserved by the Fathers in 
Greek fragments and entire in an Ethiopie transla- 
tion. This translation, having been found among the 
Abyssinian Christians towards the close of the last cen- 
tury, has been edited by Richard Laurence, archbishop of 
Cashel (* Libri Henoch versio aethiopica." Oxon. 1838), 
and by A. Dillmann (* Liber Henoch, aethiopice." Lips. 
1851); it was translated into English by R. Laurence 
(1st ed. 1821; 3d ed. 1838 [reprinted (Scribners, N. Y.) 
1883; also (with notes) by G. H. Sehodde (Andover, 
1882)], into German by A. G. Hoffman (Jen. 1833-38, 2 
vols.) and by A. Dillmann (Lips. 1853) ; each of the last 
twotranslators added a commentary. From this book is 
taken the * prophecy’ in Jude 14 sq.; [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.), 
also Dict. of Chris. Biog., s. v. Enoch, The Book of ].* 

ef, see ἐκ. 

ἕξ, of, ai, rd, indecl. numeral, sir: Mt. xvii. 1; Lk. 
xiii. 14, etc. 

ἐξ-αγγέλλω : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. ἐξαγγείλητε: 
first in IIom. Il. 5, 390; properly, to tell out or forth 
[see ἐκ, VI. 4], to declare abroad, divulge, publish: [Mk. 
xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion ^]; with He- 
braistie emphasis, to make known by praising or proclaim- 
ing, to celebrate, [A. V. show forth]: 1 Pet. ii. 9. (For 
39D, Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 28; lxxviii. (Ixxix.) 13, cf. Sir. 
xliv. 15»)* 

ἐξιαγοράζω: 1 aor. éfpyópaca; [pres. mid. ἐξαγοράζυ- 
pac] ; 1. to redeem i. e. by payment of a price to re- 
cover from the power of another, to ransom, buy off, [cf. 
ἐκ, VI. 2]: prop. θεραπαινίδα, Diod. 36, 1 p. 530; metaph. 
of Christ freeing men from the dominion of the Mosaic 
law at the price of his- vicarious death (see dyopáto, 
2 b.), τινά, Gal. iv. 55 with addition of ἐκ τῆς κατάρας τοῦ 
νόμου, Gal. iii. 13. 2. to buy up, Polyb. 3, 42, 2; Plut. 
Crass. 2; Mid. τί, to buy up for one's self, for one's use 
[W. § 38, 2 b.; B. 192 (166 sq.)]: trop. in the obscure 
phrase é£ay. τὸν καιρόν, Eph. v. 16 and Col. iv. 5, where 
the meaning seems to be to make a wise and sacred use 
of every opportunity for doing good, so that zeal and 
well-doing are as it were the purchase-money by which 
we make the time our own; (act. ἐξαγοράζειν καιρόν. to 
seek [io gain time (A. V.) 1. 6.1 delay, Dan. ii. 8; mid. 
with ace. of thing, *by ransom to avert evil from one's 
self’, ‘to buy one's self off or deliver one's self from 
evil’: διὰ μιᾶς Spas τὴν αἰώνιον κόλασιν ἐξαγοραζόμενοι, of 
the martyrs, Mart. Polyc. 2, 3).* 

eE-dyo; 2 aor. ἐξήγαγον; Sept. often for wyin; to lead 
out [cf. ἐκ, VI. 1]: twa (the place whence being sup- 


ἐξαιρέω 


plied in thought), Mk. xv. 20 (of the city to punishment 
[but Lehm. ἄγουσιν) ; Acts xvi. 37, 39; v. 19 and xvi. 
39 (from prison); Acts vii. 36 (from Egypt); Jn. x. 3 
(sheep from the fold); with ἔξω added [in R G L br. ], 
Lk. xxiv. 50; ἔξω τῆς κώμης, Mk. viii. 23 R G L Tr mrg. 
[cf. W. 603 (561)]; with the addition of ἐκ w. gen. of 
place, Acts vii. 40; xii. 17; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; foll. 
by eis with ace. of place, Acts xxi. 38.* 

ἐξαιρέω, -9: 2 aor. impv. ἔξελε; Mid., [pres. ptcp. 
ἐξαιρούμενος): 2 aor. ἐξειλόμην and in Alex. form (LT 
Tr WH) ἐξειλάμην (Acts vii. 10 [so Grsb.]; xii. 11 [so 
Grsb.]; xxiii. 27; see reff. in [aipéw and] ἀπέρχομαι), 
inf. ἐξελέσθαι (Acts vii. 34); Sept. usually for x5; to 
take out [cf. ἐκ, VI. 2]; 1. to pluck out, draw out, i. e. 
to root out: τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, Mt. v. 29; xviii. 9. 42. Mid. 
a. to choose out (for one's self), select, one person from 
many: Acts xxvi. 17 (so for 73 in Is. xlix. 7 [but there 
the Sept. has ἐξελεξάμην ; perh. Is. xlviii. 10 is meant] 
and sometimes in Grk. writ.; first in Hom. Od. 14, 232) 
[al. refer Acts l. c. to the next head; (see Hackett ad 
loc.)] ^b. fo rescue, deliver, (prop. to cause to be res- 
cued, but the middle force is lost [cf. W. 253 (238)]): 
τινά, Acts vii. 31; xxiii. 27; τινὰ ἔκ τινος, Acts vii. 10; 
xii. 11; Gal. i. 4; (Ex. iii. 8, ete.; Aeschyl. suppl. 924; 
Hdt. 3, 137; Dem. 256, 3; Polyb. 1, 11, 11).* 

éE-aipw: fut. ἐξαρῶ (1 Co. v. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. impv. 2 
pers. plur. é£dpare (ib. G L T Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. ἐξήρ- 
θην, to lift up or take away out of a place; to remove [cf. 
éx, VI. 2]: τινὰ ἐκ, one from a company, 1 Co. v. 2 Rec. 
[see αἴρω, 3 c.]; vs. 13 fr. Deut. [xix. 19 or] xxiv. 9.* 

ἐξαιτέω, -@: 1 aor. mid. ἐξητησάμην; to ask from, de- 
mand of, [cf. ἐκ, VI. 2]. Mid. to ask from (or beg) for 
one's self: twa, to ask that one be given up to one from 
the power of another, —in both senses, either for good, 


to beg one from another, ask for the pardon, the safety, of 


some one, (Xen. an. 1, 1, 3; Dem. p. 546, 22; Plut. Per. 
32; Palaeph. 41, 2); or in a bad sense, for torture, for 
punishment, (Plut. mor. p. 417 d. de defect. orac. 14; in 
prof. auth. often with this sense in the act.) ; so of Satan 
asking the apostles out of the power and keeping of God 
to be tried by afflictions (allusion being made to Job i. 
1-12): Lk. xxii. 31 (Test. xii. Patr. p. 729 [test. Benj. 
§ 3] ἐὰν τὰ πνεύματα τοῦ Βελίαρ eis πᾶσαν πονηρίαν ÓM- 
eas ἐξαιτήσωνται ὑμᾶς." 

ἐξαίφνης [WH ἐξέφνης (exc. in Acts xxii. 6), see 
their App. p. 151], adv., (αἴφνης, ἄφνω, ἄφνως suddenly), 
of a sudden, suddenly, unexpectedly: Mk. xiii. 36; Lk. 
ii. 13; ix. 39; Actsix.3; xxii. 6. (Hom. et al.; Sept.)* 

ἐξιακολουθέω, -ῶ : fut. ἐξακολουθήσω ; 1 aor. ptep. e£a- 
κολουθήσας:; to follow out or up, tread in one’s steps; — a. 
τῇ δδῷ τινος, metaph., to imitate one’s way of acting: 
2 Pet. ii. 15, ef. Is. lvi. 11. b. to follow one’s author- 
ity: μύθοις, 2 Pet.i.16; Joseph. antt. prooem. 4, (άρχη- 
yois, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14,1; δυσὶ βασιλεῦσι, Test. xii. 
Patr. p. 643 [test. Zeb. § 97). c. to comply with, yield 
to: aoedyeias [Rec. ἀπωλείαις}, 2 Pet. ii. 2, (πνεύμασι 
πλάνης, Test. xii. Patr. p. 665 [test. Napht. § 3; τοῖς 
πονηροῖς διαβουλίοις, xii. Patr. p. 628 test. Is. $ 6]; cf. 


221 








ἐξαποστέλλω 


also Am. ii. 4; Job xxxi. 9; Sir. v. 2). Among prof. 
auth. Polyb., Plut. occasionally use the word; [add Dion. 
Hal. de comp. verb. $ 24 p. 188, 7; Epictet. diss. 1, 22, 
16].* 

ἑξακόσιοι, -at, -a, siz hundred: Rev. [xiii. 18]; xiv. 20.* 

ἐξαλείφω : fut. ἐξαλείψω: 1 aor. ptep. eEadeias; 1 
aor. pass. infin. ἐξαλειφθῆναι [(WH -λιῴθῆναι : see their 
App. p. 154, and s. v. I, « below) ]; 1. (ἐξ denoting 
completeness [cf. ἐκ, VI. 6]), to anoint or wash in 
every part, hence to besmear : i. q. cover with lime (to white- 
wash or plaster), τὸ τεῖχος, Thue. 3, 20; τοὺς τοίχους τοῦ 
ἱεροῦ [here to overlay with gold etc.], 1 Chr. xxix. 4; τὴν 
οἰκίαν, Lev. xiv. 42 (for ro). 2. (e& denoting re- 
moval [cf. ἐκ, VI. 2]), to wipe off, wipe away: δάκρυον 
ἀπὸ [GL T Tr WH ἐκ] τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, Rev. vii. 17; 
xxi. 4 [RG WH mrg., al. ἐκ]; to obliterate, erase, wipe 
out, blot out, (Aeschyl., Hdt., al.; Sept. for nm): τί, Col. 
ii. 14; τὸ ὄνομα ἐκ τῆς βίβλου, Rev. iii. 5 (Ps. Lxviii. 
(Ixix.) 29, cf. Deut. ix. 14; xxv. 6); ras ἁμαρτίας, the 
cuilt of sins, Acts iii. 19, (Ps. cviii. (cix.) 13; τὸ dvó- 
μημα, τὰς ἀνομίας, Is. xliii. 25; Ps. 1. (li.) 11; Sir. xlvi. 
20; τ. ἁμαρτίας ἀπαλείφειν, 3 Mace. ii. 19).* 

ἐξάλλομαι ; to leap up: Actsiii.8. (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 
27, et al.; Sept. Is. lv. 12.) * 

eEavacracts, -ews, 7, (ἐξανίστημι, q. v.), a rising up 
(Polyb. 3, 55,4); a rising again, resurrection: τῶν νεκρῶν 
or (L T Tr WH) ἡ ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν, Phil. iii. 11.* 

ἐξανα-τέλλω: 1 aor. ἐξανέτειλα ; 1. trans. to make 


spring up, cause to shoot forth: Gen. ii. 9, ete. 2. in- 
trans. to spring up: Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5. (Rare in 


prof. auth. [cf. W. 102 (97)].) * 

ἐξιαν-ίστημι: 1 aor. ἐξανέστησα: 2aor.é£svéorgv; 1. 
to make rise up, to raise up, to produce: σπέρμα, Mk. xii. 
19; Lk. xx. 28, (Hebr. »Ὲ pr, Gen. xxxviii. 8). 2. 
2 aor. act. to rise in an assembly to speak (as in Xen. an. 
6, 1, 30): Acts xv. 5.* 

ἐξαπατάω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐξηπάτησα; 1 aor. pass. ptep. 
fem. ἐξαπατηθεῖσα ; (ἐξ- strengthens the simple verb [cf. 
ἐκ, VI. 67). to deceive: Ro. vii. 11; xvi. 18; 1 Co. iii. 18; 
2 Co. xi. 3; 2 Th. ii. 3; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 [L T Tr WH]. 
(From Hom. down ; twice in the O. T. viz. Ex. viii. 29; 
Sus. vs. 56.)* 

ἐξάπινα, (a somewhat rare later Grk. form for ἐξαπίνης, 
ἐξαίφνης, q. v. [W. $ 2, 1 d. ]), adv., suddenly: Mk. ix. 8. 
(Sept.; Jambl., Zonar., al.; Byzant.) * 

ἐξ-απορέω and (so in the Bible) depon. pass. ἐξαπορέο- 
μαι, -odpar; 1 aor. ἐξηπορήθην ; to be uttérly at a loss, be 
utterly destitute of measures or resources, to renounce all 
hope, be in despair, [cf. ἐκ, VI. 6], (Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
al.): 2 Co. iv. 8 (where it is distinguished fr. the simple 
ἀπορέομαι) ; τινός of anything: τοῦ ζῆν, 2 Co. i. 8, on this 
gen. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 828 sq. (τοῦ ἀργυρίου, to be utterly 
in want of, Dion. Hal. 7, 18; act. with dat. of respect, 
τοῖς λογισμοῖς, Polyb. 1, 62, 1; once in the O. T. absol. 
Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 16).* 

ἐξ-απο-στέλλω : fut. ἐξαποστελῶ: 1 aor. ἐξαπέστειλα: 
[2 aor. pass. e£ameordAnv]; Sept. very often for nov; 
prop. to send away from one's self (ἀπό) out of the place 


ἐξαρτίζω 


or out of doors (ἐκ [q. v. VI. 27); 1. to send forth: 
τινά, with commissions, Acts vii. 12; [xii. 11]; Gal. iv. 
4; foll. by inf. of purpose, Acts xi. 22 (but L T Tr WH 
om. the inf.) ; εἰς ἔθνη. unto the Gentiles, Acts xxii. 21 
[WH mrg. dzoor.]; used also of powers, influences, 
things, (see ἀποστέλλω, 1 a.) : τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, the prom- 
ised blessing, Lk. xxiv.49 T Tr WH; τὸ πνεῦμα εἰς τὰς 
καρδίας. to send forth i.e. impart the Spirit to our hearts, 
Gal. iv. 6; [τὸ . . . κήρυγμα τῆς αἰωνίου σωτηρίας, Mk. xvi. 
WH in (rejected) * Shorter Conclusion’]; ὑμῖν 6 λόγος 

. ἐξαπεστάλη, the message was sent forth, i. 6. com- 
manded to be announced, to you, Acts xiii. 26 L T Tr 
WH. 2. to send away: twa eis etc. Actsix. 30; foll. 
by inf. of purpose, Acts xvii. 14; τινὰ κενόν, Lk. i. 53; 
xx. 10,11. (Dem., Polyb., Diod.) * 

eEapritw: 1 aor. inf. ἐξαρτίσαι ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐξηρτι- 
opévos; (see ἄρτιος, 2); rare in prof. auth.; to complete, 
Jinish; a. to furnish perfectly: twa, pass, πρός τι, 2 
Tim. iii. 17 (πολεμεῖν . .. rois ἅπασι καλῶς ἐξηρτισμένοι, 
Joseph.antt.3,2,2). b. ras ἡμέρας, to finish, accomplish, 
(as it were, to render the days complete): Acts xxi. 5 
(so ἀπαρτίζειν τὴν ὀκτάμηνον, Hipp. epid. ii. 180 [ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 447 sq.]).* 

ἐξιαστράπτω. 1. prop. to send forth lightning, to 
lighten. 2. to flash out like lightning, to shine, be ra- 
diant: of garments, Lk. ix. 29; (of gleaming arms, Nah. 
iii. 3; Ezek. i. 4, 7; φόβῳ x. κάλλεϊ πολλῷ Tryphiodor. 
103; [cf. W. 102 (97)]).* 

ἐξ-αυτῆς and ἐξ αὐτῆς [so Rec. Mk. vi. 25], (scil. Spas 
[W. 591 sq. (550) ; B. 82 (71)]), on the instant; forth- 
with: Mk. vi. 25; Acts x. 33; xi. 11; xxi. 32; xxiii. 30 
[RG WH]; Phil. ii. 38. (Cratin. in Bekk. anecd. i. 
p. 94; Theogn., Arat., Polyb., Joseph., al.) * 

ἐξεγείρω [1 Co. vi. 14 Lehm. txt.] ; fut. é£eyepó ; 1 aor. 
ἐξήγειρα ; to arouse, raise up (from sleep; Soph., Eur., 
Xen., al.) ; from the dead (Aeschyl. cho. 495), 1 Co. vi. 
14. to rouse up, stir up, incite: twa, to resistance, Ro. ix. 
17 (τὸν θυμόν τινος, 2 Mace. xiii. 4, cf. 2 Chr. xxxvi. 22), 
where some explain the words ἐξήγειρά σε I have raised 
thee up into life, caused thee to exist, or I have raised thee 
to a public position, set thee up as king (Joseph. antt. 8, 
11, 1 βασιλεὺς yap ἐξεγείρεται ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ) : but the objec- 
tion to these interpretations lies in the fact that Paul 
draws from vs. 17 what he says in vs. 18, and therefore 
ἐξεγείρειν must be nearly synonymous with σκληρύνειν, 
[but see Meyer ].* 

ἔξειμι ; impf. ἐξήεσαν ; (εἶμι) : to go out, go forth: foll. 
in Rec. by ἐκ with gen. of place, Acts xiii. 42; without 
mention of the place, that being known from the context, 
Acts xvii. 15; xx. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν (from the water), to es- 
cape to the land, Acts xxvii. 43.* 

ἔξειμι from εἰμί, see ἔξεστι. 

ἐξτελέγχω : 1 aor. inf. ἐξελέγξαι; (ἐξ strengthens the 
simple verb [cf. ἐκ, VI. 67}; to prove to be in the wrong, 
convict, (chiefly in Attic writ.) : by punishing, τινὰ περί 
twos, Jude 15 Ree. (see ἐλέγχω, 1) of God as judge, as 
in Is. ii. 4; Mic. iv. 3 for m»mn* 


ἐξέλκω : [pres. pass. ptep. é£eAkópevos] ; to draw out, | 


222 


Acts xvi. 13 ; 





ἐξέρχομαι 


(Hom., Pind., Attic writ.) ; metaph. i.q. to lure forth, 
ΓΑ. V. draw away]: ὑπὸ tis... ἐπιθυμίας ἐξελκόμενος, 
Jas. i. 14, where the metaphor is taken from hunting 
and fishing: as game is lured from its covert, so man by 
lust is allured from the safety of self-restraint to sin. 
[The language of hunting seems to be transferred here 
(so elsewhere, ef. Wetst. ad loc.) to the seductions of a 
harlot, personated by ἐπιθυμία ; see ríkro.] * 

ἐξεέλω, sce ἐξαιρέω. 

ἐξέραμα, -τος, τό, (fr. ἐξεράω to eject, cast forth, vomit 
forth; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 64), vomit; what is cast out 
by vomiting: 2 Pet. ii. 22, cf. Prov. xxvi. 11, (Dioscor. 
de venenis c. 19 (p. 29 ed. Spreng.) [an example of the 
verb. Cf. Wetst. on Pet. 1. ¢., and esp. Gataker, Advers. 
miscell. col. 853.sq.].) * 

[ἐξ-εραυνάω T Tr WH for ἐξερευνάω, q. v. ; see épavváo.] 

ἐξεερευνάω, -ὥ : 1 aor. ἐξηρεύνησα ; to search out, search 
anxiously and diligently: περί τινος, 1 Pet. i. 10 [where 
T Tr WH é£epavr. q. v.]. (1 Macc. iii. 48; ix. 26; Sept.; 
Soph., Eur., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. ἐξηρχόμην ; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι ; 2 aor. 
ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in 
LT Tr WH the Alex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλ- 
Gare (Mt. xi. τ, 8,9; xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν 
(1 Jn. ii. 19; 2 Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -ov; 3 Jn. 7, etc.]) ; pf. 
ἐξελήλυθα: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for 
NY) times without number; to go or come out of; ib 
properly; a. with mention of the place out of which 
one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of 
those who leave a place of their own aecord : with the 
gen. alone, Mt. x. 14 (L T Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 
39RG. foll. by ἐκ: Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 
59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, etc. foll. 
by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of eis and ace. of place, 
Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with acc. of place, 
or πρός twa, acc. of pers., Heb. xiii. 13. 
ἐξέρχ. ἀπό with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 RG; Mk. xi. 
12; Lk.ix. 5; Phil. iv. 15; [Heb. xi. 15 RG]; é£épx. 
ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xv. 21; Mk. vi. 1, 10; Lk. ix. 4; [xi. 53 T Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; Jn. iv. 43; ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον, Mt. xii. 44; Lk. 
xi. 24 [yet see B. below]. ἐξέρχ. ἐκ ete. to come forth 


from, out of, a place: .Mt. viii. 25; Rev. xiv. 15, 17, 18 


[L om. WH br. é£7A.]; xv. 6; ἐξελθεῖν ἀπό, to come out 
(towards one) from, Mt. xv. 22. In the Gospel of John 
Christ, who by his incarnation left his place with God 
in heaven, is said ἐξελθεῖν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ : xvi. 27 and RG 
Lmrg.in vs. 28; ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, xiii. 3; xvi. 30; ἐκ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, from his place with God, from God's abode, viii. 42 
and L txt. T Tr WH in xvi. 28. f. of those expelled or 
cast. out (esp. of demons driven forth from a body of 
which they have held possession) : ἔκ twos, gen. of pers.: 
Mk.i.25sq.; v. 8 [Li mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; Lk. iv. 35 R Tr 


| mrg.: or ἀπό τινος, Mt. xii. 43 ; xvii. 18; Lk. iv. 35 L T Tr 


txt. WH; viii. 29, 33, 35; xi. 24 [yet see a. above]; Acts 
xvi 18; [xix. 12 Rec.]. y. of those who come forth, or 
are let go, from confinement in which they have been 
kept (e. v. from prison): Mt. v. 26; Acts xvi. 40. b. 
without mention of the place from which one goes out; 


ἐξέρχομαι 2 


a. where the place from which one goes forth (as a house, 
city, ship) has just been mentioned: Mt. [viii. 12 Tdf.]; 
ix. 31 sq. (from the house, vs. 28); x. 11 (se. ἐκεῖθεν, 1. e. 
ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἢ κώμης ἐκείνης) ; xii. 14 (cf. 9) ; xviii. 28 (cf. 
24); xiv. 14; Mk. i. 45 (cf. 43 ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν) ; Lk. i. 22 
(from the temple) ; viii. 27; x. 35 [ Rec.]; Jn. xiii. 30, 31 
(30), ete.; so also when the verb ἐξέρχεσθαι refers to the 
departure of demons: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; vii. 30; 
ix. 29; Acts viii. 7; xvi. 19 (where for the name of the 
demon itself is substituted the descriptive clause ἡ ἐλπὶς 
τ. ἐργασίας αὐτῶν; see 2e.6.). B. where one is said to 
have gone forth to do something, and it is obvious that he 
has gone forth from his home, or at least from the place 
where he has been staying: foll. by an inf., Mt. xi. 8; 
xiii. 3 [inf. w. τοῦ]; xx.1; Mk. iii. 21; iv. 3 [R G inf. w. 
ToU (Tr br. rov)]; v. 14 Rec.; Lk.vii.25sq.; Acts xx. 1; 
Rev. xx. 8; with the addition of ἐπί τινα (against), Mt. 
xxvi 55; Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; εἰς τοῦτο, Mk. i. 38; 
tva, Rev. vi. 2; also without any inf. or conjunction indi- 
cating the purpose: Mk. vi. 12; viii. 11; xiv. 16; xvi. 20; 
Lk. v. 27; ix. 6; Jn. xxi. 3; Acts x. 23; xx. 11; 2 Co. viii. 
17; foll. by eis with acc. of place: Mt. xxii. 105 xxvi. 30, 
11; Mk. viii. 27; xi. 11; Lk. vi. 12; xiv. 21, 23; Jn. i. 43 
(44); Acts xi. 25; xiv. 20; 2 Co. ii. 13; the place to 
which one goes forth being evident either from what goes 
before or from the context: Mt. xxiv. 26 (sc. eis τὴν ἔρη- 
pov) ; xxvii. 32 (from the city to the place of crucifixion) ; 
ἐξέρχ. alone is,used of a people quitting the land which 
they had previously inhabited, Acts vii. 7, cf. Heb. xi. 8; 
of angels coming forth from heaven, Mt. xiii. 49. ἐξέρχ. 
eis ἀπάντησίν Twos, to meet one, Mt. xxv. 1[L T Tr WH 
ὑπάντ.], 6; [eis dmávr. or imávr.] τινί, Jn. xii. 13; Acts 
xxviii. 15 RG; eis συνάντησίν τινι, Mt. viii. 34 [L T Tr 
WH $mávr.] Agreeably to the oriental redundancy of 
style in description (see ἀνίστημι, II. 1 c.), the participle 
ἐξελθών is often placed before another finite verb of de- 


parture: Mt. viii. 32; xv. 21; xxiv. 1 (ἐξελθών [from the. 


temple, see xxi. 23] ἐπορεύετο ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, he departed 
from its vicinity); Mk. xvi. 8; Lk. xxii. 39; Acts xii. 9, 
17; xvi. 36,40; xxi.5,8. 2. figuratively; a. ἔκ τινων, 
ἐκ μέσου τινῶν, to go out from some assembly, i. e. to for- 
sake it: 1 Jn. ii. 19 (opp. to μεμενήκεισαν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν); 2 
Co. vi. 17. b. to come forth from physically, arise from, 
to be born of: ἐκ with gen. of the place from which one 
comes by birth, Mt. ii. 6 (fr. Mic. v. 2); ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος 
twos, Hebr. mono NY! (Gen. xxxv. 11; 1 K. viii. 19; 
[cf. W. 33 (32)]), Heb. vii. 5. c. ἐκ χειρός Twos, to go 
forth from one’s power, escape from it in safety: Jn. x. 
39. d. eis τὸν κόσμον, to come forth (from privacy) into 
the world, before the public, (of those who by novelty of 
opinion attract attention): 1Jn.iv.1. 6. of things; 
a. of report, rumors, messages, precepts, etc., i. q. to be 
uttered, to be heard: φωνή. Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; i. q. to be 
made known, declared : ὃ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ foll. by ἀπό τινων. 
from their city or church, 1 Co. xiv. 36; i. q. to spread, 
be diffused: ἡ φήμη, Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 14; ἡ ἀκοή, Mk. 
i. 28; [Mt. iv. 24 Tr mrg.]; ὁ φθόγγος, τὰ ῥήματα, Ro. x. 
18; 6 Aóyos the word, saying, Jn. xxi. 23; Lk. vii. 17; 


23 








ἑξῆς 
ἡ πίστις τινός, the report of one’s faith, 1 ΤῊ. 1. 8; i. q- 
to be proclaimed: δόγμα, an imperial edict, παρά twos, gen. 
pers, Lk. ii. 1. B. to come forth i. q. be emitted, as from 
the heart, the mouth, etc.: Mt. xv. 18 sq.; Jas. iii. 10; 
[cf. ῥομφαία ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, Rev. xix. 21 G LT Tr 
WHY]; i.q. to flow forth from the body: Jn. xix. 34; i. q. 
to emanate, issue: Lk. viii. 46; Rev. xiv. 20. y. é£épxe- 
σθαι (am ἀνατολῶν), used of a sudden flash of lightning, 
Mt. xxiv. 27. δ. that ἐξέρχεσθαι in Acts xvi. 19 (on 
which see 1 b. a. above) is used also of a thing's vanish- 
ing, viz. of a hope which has disappeared, arises from 
the cireumstance that the demon that had gone out had 
been the hope of those who complain that their hope 
has gone out. On the phrase εἰσέρχεσθαι x. ἐξέρχεσθαε. 
see in εἰσέρχομαι, 1 ἃ. [Cowr.: δι-εξέρχομαι. 

ἔξεστι, impers. verb, (fr. the unused ἔξειμι), it is law- 
ful; a. foll. by the pres. inf.: Mt. xii. 2, 10 [Tdf. inf. 
aor.], 12; xiv.4; Lk. vi. 2[R GT]; xiv.3 [LT Tr WH 
inf. aor.]; with the aor. inf.: Mt. [xv. 26 L T]; xxii. 
175 xxvii. 6; Mk. iii. 4; xii. 14; Lk. vi. 9; Acts ii. 29 
(ἐξὸν εἰπεῖν scil. ἔστω, allow me, [al. supply ἐστί, B. 318 
(273); W.§ 64, I. 2a., ef. $2, 1d.]) ; with the inf. omitted 
because readily suggested by the context, Mk. ii. 24 and 
Ree. in Acts viii. 37. b. foll. by dat. of pers. and a pres. 
inf.: Mk. vi. 18; Acts xvi. 21; xxii. 25; and an aor. inf. : 
Mt. xix.3 [L T WH om. dat.]; xx. 15;«Mk. ii. 26 [RG 
L Trtxt.]; x.2; Lk. xx. 22 RG L; Jn. v. 10; xviii. 31; 
Acts xxi. 37; ἐξὸν ἦν, Mt. xii. 4; à οὐκ ἐξόν, sc. ἐστί, 2 Co. 
xii. 4’; with the inf. omitted, as being evident from the 
context: πάντα (μοι) ἔξεστιν, se. ποιεῖν, 1 Co. vi. 12 ; x. 23. 
c. foll. by the acc. and inf.: Lk. vi. 4; xx. 22 T Tr WH; 
so here and there even in classie writ.; cf. Rost $ 127 
Anm. 2; Kühner $ 475 Anm. 2; [B. § 142, 2].* 

é-erdtw: 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. ἐξετάσατε, inf. ἐξε- 
τάσαι; to search out; to examine strictly, inquire: περί 
τινος and with the adv. ἀκριβῶς added, Mt. ii. 8; foll. by 
an indir. quest. Mt. x. 11; τινά inquire of some one, foll. 
by a direct question, Jn. xxi. 12. (Sept.; often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Thuc. down.) * 

[ἐξέφνης, see eLaiduns. ] 

ἐξιηγέομαι, -οῦμαι ; impf. ἐξηγούμην ; 1 aor. é&pygodunv ; 
1. prop. to lead out, be leader, go before, (Hom. et al.). 
2. metaph. (cf. Germ. ausführen) to draw out in narra- 
tive, unfold inteaching; a. to recount, rehearse: [w. ace. 
of the thing and dat. of pers., Acts x. 8]; w. acc. of thing, 
Lk. xxiv. 35; Acts xxi. 19; without an acc., foll. by rel.. 
pron. or adv., ὅσα ἐποίησεν; Acts xv. 12; καθώς, 14, (so im 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 150, Judg. vii. 13, 
ete.). b. to unfold, declare: Jn.i. 18 (sc. the things re- 
lating to God; also used in Grk. writ. of the interpreta- 
tion of things sacred and divine, oracles, dreams, ete. ; cf. 
Meyer ad loc. ; Alberti, Observationes etc. p. 207 sq.).* 

ἑξήκοντα, of, ai, τά, sixty: Mt. xiii. 8, 23, ete. 

ἑξῆς, adv., (fr. ἔχω, fut. ἕξω; cf. ἔχομαί τινος to cleave 
to, come next to, a thing), successively, in order, (fr. Hom. 
down); 6, 7, τὸ ἑξῆς, the next following, the next in suc- 
cession: 50 ἡ ἑξῆς ἡμέρα, Lk. ix. 37 ; elliptically ἐν τῇ ἑξῆς, 
sc. ἡμέρᾳ, Lk. vii. 11 (here WH txt. Tr txt. L mrg. e 


ἐξηχέω 


τῷ ἑξῆς sc. χρόνῳ, soon afterwards); τῇ ἑξῆς, sc. ἡμέρᾳ, 
Acts xxi 1; xxv. 17; xxvii. 18.* 

ἐξ-ἠχέω, -ὦ : to sound forth, emit sound, resound; pass. 
ἐξηχεῖταί τι the sound of something is borne forth, is 
propagated : ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τοῦ κυρίου, from 
your city or from your church the word of the Lord 
has sounded forth i. e. has been disseminated by report, 1 
Th. i. 8, ef. De Wette ad loc. (Joel iii. 14 (iv. 19) ; Sir. 
xl.13; 3 Mace. iii. 2. Polyb. 30, 4, 7 [not Dind.]; Philo 
in Flaec. $ 6; [quis rer. div. her. $4]; Byzant.)* 

ἕξις, -ews, ἡ, (ἔχω, fut. ἔξω), a habit, whether of body or 
of mind (Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) ; a power acquired by 
custom, practice, use, (“firma quaedam facilitas, quae apud 
Graecos ἕξις nominatur," Quint. 10, 1 init.); so Heb. 
v. 14, (ἐν τούτοις ἱκανὴν ἕξιν περιποιησάμενος, Sir. prol. 7; 
ἕξιν ἔχειν γραμματικῆς, Polyb. 10,47, 7; ἐν τοῖς πολεμικοῖς, 
21, 7, 8: ἐν ἀστρολογίᾳ μεγίστην ἕξιν ἔχειν, Diod. 2, 31; 
λογικὴν €&v περιποιούμενος, Philo, alleg. legg. 1, 4).* 

ἐξιίστημι: likewise ἐξιστάω and ἐξιστάνω (Acts viii. 9 
ptep. ἐξιστῶν RG, ἐξιστάνων LT Tr WH [see tornpe}) ; 
1 aor. ἐξέστησα ; 2 aor. ἐξέστην ; pf. inf. eEeoraxevar; Mid., 
[pres. inf. ἐξίστασθαι] ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐξίσταντο ; 
1. In pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position, 
to displace: twa τοῦ φρονεῖν, to throw one out of his 
mind, drive one out of his senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; 
φρενῶν, Eur. Baech. 850; hence simply to amaze, astonish, 
throw into wonderment: twa, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9. 
2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to 
be amazed, astounded: Mt. xii. 22; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii. 
56; Actsii.7, 12; vill. 13; ix. 21; x. 45; xii. 16, (Sept. 
for ὙΠ, to tremble, Ex. xix. 18; Ruth iii. 8, ete.) ; ἐξέ- 
omoay ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ, they were amazed with a great 
amazement (see ἔκστασις, 3), Mk. v. 42; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξί- 
σταντο, Mk. vi. 51; with dat. of the thing: μαγείαις e£- 
εστακέναι, had been put beside themselves with magic 
arts, carried away with wonder at them, Acts viii. 11 
[but this form of the perf. is transitive; cf. B. 48 (41) ; 
Veitch 339]; ἐξίσταντο ἐπί with dat. of thing, Lk. ii. 47 
(Ex. xix. 18; Sap.v. 2). b. to be out of one's mind, be- 
side one’s self, insane: 2 Co. v. 13 (opp. to σωφρονεῖν) ; 
Mk. iii. 21 [cf. B. 198 (171); W.$40,5 b.]; (Grk. writ., 
where they use the word in this sense, generally add 
‘rou φρονεῖν, τῶν φρενῶν : Isoc., Eur., Polyb., al.).* 

ἐξ-ισχύω : 1 aor. subjune. 2 pers. plur. ἐξισχύσητε, to 
be eminently able, to have full strength, (et. ἐκ, VI. 6]: 
fol. by an inf. Eph. iii. 18. (Sir. vii. 6; rare in Grk. 
writ., as Dioscor., Strab., Plut.) * 

ἔξοδος, -ov, ἡ, (ὁδός), exit, i. e. departure: Heb. xi. 22; 
metaph. ἡ é£o8ós τινος the close of one's career, one's 
final fate, Lk. ix. 31; departure from life, decease: 2 Pet. 
i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2; vii. 6; [Philo de caritate ὃ 4]; 
with addition of τοῦ ζῆν, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 2; [of τοῦ 
βίου, Just. dial. e. Tryph. § 105].* 

£-oAo8peóo and (acc. to the reading best attested by 
the oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LT Tr WH 
[see ὀλοθρεύω]) ἐξολεθρεύω : fut. pass. ἐξολοθρευθήσομαι; 
to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to extirpate: ἐκ 
ποῦ λαοῦ, Acts iii. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the 


224 





ἐξουδενόω 


O. T. Apoer., and in Test. xii. Patr.; Joseph. antt. 8, 
11, 1; 11, 6, 6; hardly in native Grk. writ.) * 

ἐξομολογέω, -ῶ : 1 aor. ἐξωμολόγησα; Mid., [pres. ἐξ- 
ομολογοῦμαι] ; fut. ἐξομολογήσομαι; [1 aor. subj. 8 pers. 
sing. ~yjonra, Phil. ii. 11 RG Ltxt. Tr txt. WH]; (ἐξ 
either forth from the heart, freely, or publicly, openly (cf. 
W. 102 (97)]) ; act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro- 
Jess; 1. to confess: τὰς ἁμαρτίας, Mt. iii. 6; Mk.i. 5; 
[Jas. v. 16 L T Tr WH), (Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 6; [ef. b. j. 
5, 10, 5; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]); 
τὰς πράξεις, Acts xix. 18; τὰ παραπτώματα, Jas. v. 16 
RG; (ἧτταν, Plut. Eum. c. 17; τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἄνευ βασά- 
vov, id. Anton. c. 59). 2. to profess i. e. to acknowl- 
edge openly and joyfully: τὸ ὄνομά twos, Rev. iii. 5 Rec.; 
foll. by ὅτι, Phil. ii. 11; with dat. of pers. [ef. W. § 31, 
1f.; B. 176 (153)] to one's honor, i. e. to celebrate, give 
praise to (so Sept. for 5 myn, Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 5; ev. 
(evi.) 47; exxi. (exxii.) 4, ete.; [W. 32]): Ro. xiv. 11; 
xv. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 3); 
τινί (dat. of pers.) foll. by ὅτε: Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21. 
to profess that one will do something, to promise, agree, 
engage: Lk. xxii. 6 [Lehm. om.]; (in this sense the 
Greeks and Josephus use ὁμολογεῖν)" 

ἐξόν, see ἔξεστι. 

ἐξ-ορκίζω ; 1. to exact an oath, to force to an oath, 
(Dem., Polyb., Apollod., Diod., Plut., al.), for which the 
earlier Grks. used ἐξορκόω, [cf. W.102(97)]. 2. to ad- 
jure: τινὰ κατά twos, one by a person [c£. κατά, I. 2 a.], 
foll. by tva [ B. 237 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 63; (Gen. xxiv. 3).* 

ἐξιορκιστής, -o), ὁ, (ἐξορκίζω) ; 1. he who exacts an 
oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs 
a formula of conjuration for expelling demons: Aets 
xix. 13. (Joseph. antt. 85,2, 5; Leian. epigr. in Anthol. 
11, 427; often in the church Fathers.) * , 

ἐξορύσσω: 1 aor. ptep. é£opi£avres; fr. Hdt. down; 
1. to dig out: τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς (prop. to pluck out the 
eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Alex.]; 1 S. xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116; 
Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 1; Lcian. dial. deor. 1, 1; al.) καὶ 
διδόναι τινί, metaph. to renounce the most precious things 
for another's advantage, Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions 
see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5, 67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35 ; [Wet- 
stein ad loc.]) ; in opposition to a very few interp. who, 
assuming that Paul suffered from a weakness of the 
eyes, understand the words literally, * Ye would have 
plucked out your sound eyes and have put them into 
me," see Meyer ad loc.; [ef. reff. s. v. σκόλοψ, fin.]. 2. 
to dig through: τὴν στέγην, Mk. ii. 4.* 

ἐξιουδενέω, -ὦ : 1 aor. pass. subjune. 3 pers. sing. é£ov- 
δενηθῇ ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐξουδενημένος ; to hold and treat 
as of no account, utterly to despise: τὸν λόγον, pass., 2 Co. 
x. 10 Lehm. to set at nought, treat with contumely: a 
person, pass., Mk. ix. 12 L Tr WH, (Ezek. xxi. 10). Cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; [B. 28 (25); W. 91 (87); Soph. 
Lex.s. v.; WH. App. p. 166].* 

éE-ovbevóo, -ῶ: [1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. 


| ἐξουδενωθῇ ; i. 4. e£ovüevéo, q. v.: Mk. ix. 12 RG; often 


in Sept, esp. for 713 and pW2. [ΟἿ reff. in the preced- 
ing word.]* 


ἐξουθενέω 2 


ἐξουθενέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ἐξουθένησα ; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐξου- 
Oempévos; [1 aor. ptep. ἐξουθενηθείς); (see οὐδείς) : to 
make of no account, to despise utterly: τινά, Lk. xviii. 9; 
Ro. xiv. 3,10; 1 Co. xvi. 11; τί, 1 Th. v. 20; Gal. iv. 14 
(where it is coupled with ἐκπτύω ) ; in pass. οἱ ἐξουθενη- 
μένοι, 1 Co. vi. 4; τὰ ἐξουθενημένα, 1 Co.i. 28 (see ayevns) ; 
ὁ λόγος ἐξουθενημένος, 2 Co. x. 10 [here Lehm. é£ovó.]; 


6 (λίθος ὁ) ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκοδομούντων, set at | 


noucht, i.e. rejected, cast aside, Acts ἵν. 11. — T^ treat 
with contempt (i. e. ace. to the context, with mockery): 
Lk. xxiii. 11; (for n3, Prov. i. 7; 713, Ezek. xxii. 8, etc.; 
DND, 1S. viii. 7.. Sap. iv. 18; 2 Mace. i. 27; Barn. ep. 7, 
9; and other eccl writ.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; 
[and reff. s. v. ἐξουδενέω, fin. ].* 

ἐξουθενόω, i. q- ἐξουθενέω, q. v.: Mk. ix. 12 Tdf.* 

ἐξουσία, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἔξεστι, ἐξόν, q. v.), fr. Eur., Xen., 
Plato down; Sept. for 29/2 and Chald. oou; power. 
1. power of choice, liberty of doing as one pleases; 
leave or permission: 1 Co. ix. 12, 18; ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν, 
2 Th. iii. 9; with an inf. added indicating the thing to 
be done, Jn. x. 18; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; Heb. xiii. 10 [WH 
br. é£.]; foll. by an inf. with τοῦ, 1 Co. ix. 6 (L T Tr 
WH om. roi); with a gen. of the thing or the pers. with 
regard to which one has the power to decide: Ro. 
ix. 21 (where an explanatory infin. is added [B. 260 
(224)]); 1 Co. ix. 12; ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς, permission 
to use the tree of life, Rev. xxii. 14 [see ἐπί, C. I. 2 6.7; 
ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν περὶ τοῦ ἰδίου θελήματος (opp. to ἀνάγκην 
ἔχειν [cf. W. § 30, 3 N. 5]), 1 Co. vii. 37; ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ 
ἐξουσίᾳ, [appointed, see τίθημι, 1 a. sub fin. ] according to 
his own choice, Actsi. 7; ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν. i. e. at 
thy free disposal, Acts v. 4; used of liberty under the 
gospel, as opp. to the yoke of the Mosaic law, 1 Co. viii. 
Sh 2. physical and mental power; the ability or 
strength with which one is endued, which he either possesses 
or exercises: Mt. ix. 8; Acts viii. 19; Rev. ix: 3, 19; 
xiii. 2, 4; xviii. 1; foll. by an inf. of the thing to be 
done, Mk. iii. 15; Lk. xii.5; Jn.i.12; Rev. ix. 10; xi. 
6; xiii. 5; foll. by rod with the inf. Lk. x. 19; αὕτη ἐστὶν 
ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σκότους, this is the power that darkness 
exerts, Lk. xxii. 53; ποιεῖν ἐξουσίαν to exert power, give 
exhibitions of power, Rev. xiii. 12; ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ εἶναι, to be 
possessed of power and influence, Lk. iv. 32; also ἐξου- 
σίαν ἔχειν (both expressions refer to the ability and 
weight which Jesus exhibited in his teaching) Mt. vii. 
29; [Mk. i. 22]; κατ᾽ ἐξουσίαν powerfully, Mk. i. 27; also 
ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ, Lk. iv. 36. 3. the power of authority 
(influence) and of right: Mt. xxi. 23; Mk. xi. 28; Lk. 
xx. 2; spoken of the authority of an apostle, 2 Co. x. 8; 
xiii. 10; of the divine authority granted to Jesus as 
Messiah, with the inf. of the thing to be done, Mt. ix. 6; 
Mk. ii. 10; Lk. v. 24; Jn. v. 27; ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ; clothed 
in what authority (i. e. thine own or God’s?), Mt. xxi. 
23, 24, 27; Mk. xi. 28, 29, 33; Lk. xx. 2,8; delegated 
authority (Chinn Vollmacht, authorization): παρά twos, 
with gen. of the pers. by whom the authority is given, or 
received, Acts ix. 14; xxvi.10,12[RG]. 4. the power 
of rule or government (the power of him whose will 

15 


25 











ἐξουσιάζω 


and commands must be submitted to by others and 
obeyed, [generally translated authority]); a. univ.: Mt. 
xxviii. 18; Jude 25; Rev. xii. 10; xvii. 13; λαμβάνειν 
ἐξουσίαν ws βασιλεύς, Rev. xvii. 12; εἰμὶ ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν, I 
am under authority, Mt. viii. 9; with τασσόμενος added, 
[Mt. viii. 9 L WH br.]; Lk. vii. 8; ἐξουσία τινός, gen. 
of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as τῶν 
πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων, Mk. vi. 7; with ὥστε ἐκβάλλειν 
αὐτά added, Mt. x. 1; potas πάσης σαρκός, ante 
over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (πάσης σαρκὸς κυρείαν, Bel 
and the Drag. vs. 5); [gen. of the subject, rod Σατανᾶ, 
Acts xxvi. 18]; ἐπί τινα, power over one, so as to be able 
to subdue, drive out, destroy, Rev. vi. 8; ἐπὶ τὰ δαιμόνια, 
Lk. ix. 1; or to hold submissive to one’s will, Rev. xiii. 
7; ἐπὶ τὰς πληγάς, the power to inflict plagues and to 
put an end to them, Rey. xvi. 9; ἐπὶ τῶν ἐθνῶν, over the 
heathen nations, Rey. ii. 26; ἐπί twos, to destroy one, 
Rey. xx. 6; ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν ἐπὶ τοῦ πυρός, to preside, have 
control, over fire, to hold it subject to his will, Rev. xiv. 
18; ἐπὶ τῶν ὑδάτων; Xi. 6; ἐπάνω τινὸς ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν, to 
be ruler over a thing, Lk. xix. 17. — b. specifically, a. 
of the power of judicial decision; ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν 
with an inf. of the thing decided: σταυρῶσαι and ἀπολῦ- 
σαί τινα, Jn. xix. 10; foll. by κατά twos, the power of 
deciding against one, ibid. 11; παραδοῦναί τινα... τῇ 
ἐξουσίᾳ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος, Lk. xx. 20. β. of authority to 
manage domestic affairs: Mk. xiii. 34. c. me- 
tonymically, a. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk. 
iv. 6; jurisdiction: ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας “Hpadov ἐστίν, Lk. 
xxiii. 7 (1 Macc. vi. 11 [ef. Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 2; Is. xxxix. 
2]. f. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use 
of honestates, dignitates, auctoritates [so the Eng. authori- 
ties, dignities, ete.] in reference to persons ) ; aa. ἃ 
ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32): 
Ro. xiii. 1-3; plur.: Lk. xii. 11; Ro. xiii. 1; Tit. iii. 
1. BB. the leading and more powerful among created be- 
ings superior to man, spiritual potentates; used in the 
plur. of a certain class of angels (see ἀρχή. δύναμις. θρόνος, 
kvpiórrs) : Col. i. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. 
vol. ii. p. 226 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l.e.]y; with ἐν 
τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις added, Eph. iii. 10; πᾶσα ἐξουσία, 1 Co. 
xv. 24; Eph. i. 21; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons: 
in the plur., Eph. vi. 12; Col. ii. 15; collectively [cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 469], ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ ἀέρος (see ἀήρ), Eph. ii. 
2; τοῦ σκότους, Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or c. a.) 
above (cf. Lk. xxii. 53 in 2), and regard σκύτος as per- 
sonified ;. see σκότος, b. ]. d. a sign of the husband's 
authority over his wife, i. e. the veil with which propriety 
required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as Ba- 
σιλεία is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal 
power, i.e.a crown). [Syn. see δύναμις, fin. On the inf. 
after ἐξ. and ἐξ. ἔχειν cf. B. 260 (223 sq.).] * 

ἐξουσιάζω: 1 fut. pass. ἐξουσιασθήσομαι;; (e€ovcia) ; 
i. q. ἐξουσίαν ἔχω, to have power or authority, use power: 
[ἐν πλείοσι ἐξ. πολλών μοναρχίων, Aristot. eth. Eud. 1, 5 
p. 1216°, 2]; ἐν ἀτίμοις, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 44; τινός. to 
be master of any one, exercise authority over one, Lk. xxii. 
25; τοῦ σώματος, to be master of the body, i. 6. to have 


ἐξοχή í 
full and entire authority over the body, to hold the body 
subject to one's will, 1 Co. vii. 4. Pass. foll. by ὑπό twos, 
to be brought under the power of any one, 1 Co. vi. 12. 
(Sept. several times in Neh. and Eecl., chiefly for ov» 
and pog.) [Comp.: κατ-εξουσιάζω.] * 

ἐξοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ἐξέχω to stand out, be prominent; cf. 
ὑπεροχή); 1. prop. in Grk. writ. any prominence or 
projection, as the peak or summit of a mountain (ἐπ᾽ 
ἐξοχῇ πέτρας, Job xxxix. 28 Sept.); in medical writ. a 
protuberance, swelling, wart, etc. 2. metaph. eminence, 
excellence, superiority, (Cic. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 ἐξοχή in 
nullo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem exaequat); ἄν- 
Spes of κατ᾽ ἐξοχὴν ὄντες τῆς πόλεως, the prominent men 
of the city, Acts xxv. 23." 

éEvrvitw: 1 aor. subjunc. ἐξυπνίσω ; (ὕπνος) ; to wake 
up, awaken out of sleep: [trans. αὐτόν], Jn. xi. 11. 
([Judg. xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6, 
31; Plut. [de solert. anim. 29, 4]; Test. xii. Patr. [Levi 
$8; Jud. § 25, ete.]; the better Grks. said ἀφυπνίζω, 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 224; [W. § 2; 1 d.].)* 

ἔξυπνος, -ov, (ὕπνος), roused out of sleep: Acts xvi. 27. 
(1 Esdr. iii. 3; [Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 2].) * 

ἔξω, adv., (fr. ἐξ, as ἔσω and εἴσω fr. ἐς and eis); a 
without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi. 4; joined 
with verbs: ἑστάναι, Mt. xii. 46, 47 [WH txt. om. the 
vs.]; Mk.iii.31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. 165 xx. 
11 [Lehm. om.]; καθῆσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 69; or with some 
other verb declaring that the person without is doing 
something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. ὁ ἔξω, 
absol Ae who is without, prop. of place; metaph., in 
plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church (cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; Mey. on Mk. as below]: 
1 Ce. ν. 12, 13; Col. iv. 5; 1 Th.iv. 12; those who are 
not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (cf. Meyer) 
WH mre. ἔξωθεν, q. v.]. With a noun added: ai ἔξω 
πόλεις, foreign, Acts xxvi. 11; ὁ ἔξω ἄνθρωπος, the outer 
man, i. e. the body (see ἄνθρωπος, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16. — b. 
it takes the place of a prep. and is joined with the gen., 
without i. e. out of, outside of, [W. $ 54, 6]: Lk. xiii. 33; 
Acts xxi^5; Heb. xiii. 11, 12. 2. after the verbs of 
going, sending, placing, leading, drawing, etc., 
which commonly take prepositions or adverbs signifying 
rest in a place rather than those expressive of motion 
toward a place, ἔξω has the force of the Lat. foras (Germ. 
hinaus, heraus), forth out, out of; a. adverbially, after 
the verbs ἐξέρχομαι, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 68; Lk. xxii. 
62; Jn. xix. 4,5; Rev. iii. 12; ἄγω, Jn. xix. 4,13; mpodya, 
Acts xvi. 30; ἐξάγω, Lk. xxiv. 50 [ R GL br.]; βάλλω and 
ἐκβάλλω, Mt. v. 13; xiii. 48; Lk. viii. 4 RG; xiii. 28; 
xiv. 35 (34); Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34, 35; xii. 81; xv. 6; Acts 
ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; δεῦρο ἕξω, Jn. xi. 
43; ἔξω ποιεῖν τινα, Acts v. 34. — b. as a prep. with the 
gen.: after ἀπελθεῖν, Acts iv. 15; ἀποστέλλειν, Mk. v. 
10; ἐκβάλλειν, Mk. xii. 8; Lk. iv. 29; xx. 15; Acts vii. 
58; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Mt. xxi. 17; Acts xvi.13; Heb. xiii. 13; 
ἐκπορεύεσθαι, Mk. xi. 19; ἐξάγειν, Mk. viii. 22 [R G L Tr 
mrg.]: σύρειν τινά, Acts xiv. 19; ἕλκειν τινά, Acts xxi: 30. 

ἔξωθεν, adv., (fr. ἔξω, opp. to ἔσωθεν fr. ἔσω; cf. 


226 








ἐπαγγελία. 


ἄνωθεν, πόρρωθεν), from without, outward, [cf. W. 472 
(440)]; 1. adverbially: (outwardly), Mt. xxiii. 27 sq.; 
Mk. vii. 18; 2 Co. vii. 5; τὸ ἔξωθεν, the outside, the exte- 
rior, Mt. xxiii. 25; Lk. xi. 39 sq. ; ἐκβάλλειν ἔξωθεν (for 
RG ἔξω), Rev. xi. 2? LT Tr WH; οἱ ἔξωθεν for οἱ ἔξω, 
those who do not belong to the Christian church, 1 Tim. 
iii. 7; [cf. Mk. iv. 11 WH mrg. and s. v. ἔξω, 1 a.]; ὁ ἔξωθεν 
κόσμος the outward adorning, 1 Pet. iii.3. 2. as a prep- 
osition with the gen. [ef. W. § 54, 6]: Mk. vii. 15; Rev. 
xi. 22 (Rees GL T Tr WH; xiv. 20 where Ree. ἔξω]." 

ἐξ-θέω, -@: 1 aor. ἔξωσα [so accented by G T ed. 7 Tr, 
but L WH ἐξῶσα] and in 'Tdf. ἐξέωσα [ WH. App. p. 162] 
(cf. W. p. 90 (86); [B. 69 (61); Steph. "Thesaur. and 
Veitch s. v. 60éo]) ; lo thrust out; expel from one’s abode: 
Acts vii. 45, (Thuc., Xen., al). to propel, drive: τὸ 
πλοῖον εἰς αἰγιαλόν, Acts xxvii. 39 [WH txt. ἐκσῶσαι; 
see ἐκσώζω], (the same use in Thuc., Xen., al.).* 

ἐξώτερος, -épa, -epov, (a comparative fr. ἔξω, cf. ἐσώτερος, 
ἀνώτερος, κατώτερος), Ouler: τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον, the 
darkness outside the limits of the lighted palace (to 
which the Messiah’s kingdom is here likened), Mt. viii. 
12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30. [(Sept.; Strabo, al.)]* 

ἔοικα, see EIKQ. 

ἑορτάζω ; (ἑορτή); to keep a feast-day, celebrate a fes- 
tival; 1 Co. v. 8, on which pass. see ἄζυμος. (Sept. for 
Ap); Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.; ὁρτάζω, Hat.) * 

ἑορτή, -ῆς, 7, Sept. for 3; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 
in Hat. ὁρτή; α feast-day, festival: Lk. ii. 42; Jn. v. 1; 
vi. 4; vii. 2, 37; Col. ii. 16; ἡ ἑορτὴ rod πάσχα: Lk. ii. 
41 [W. 215 (202); B. 186 (161)]; Jn. xiii. 1; i.q.» 
ἑορτὴ τῶν ἀζύμων, Lk. xxii. 1; ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, during the 
feast, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; Jn. iv. 45; vii. 11; xii. 
20; εἶναι ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, to be engaged in celebrating the 
feast, Jn. ii. 23, ef. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc. ; 
εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; ἀναβαίνειν (to 
Jerusalem) εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν, Jn. vii. 8, 10; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν 
ἑορτήν, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; xii. 12; τῆς ἑορτῆς μεσούσης. 
in the midst of the feast, Jn. vii. 14; κατὰ ἑορτήν, at 
every feast [see κατά, II. 3 a. B.], Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. xv. 
6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Ree.]; τὴν ἑορτὴν ποιεῖν to keep, cele- 
brate, the feast, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xarà τὸ ἔθος τῆς 
ἑορτῆς. after the custom of the feast, Lk. ii. 42.* 

ἐπ-αγγελία, -as, 7, (ἐπαγγέλλω) ; 1. announcement: 
1 Jn. i. 5 (Rec., where ἀγγελία was long since restored) ; 
κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ "Ico, to proclaim life 
in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 [W. 402 (376); 
cf. κατά, II. fin. But others give ézayy. here as else- 
where the sense of promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise; 
a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given: 
προσδέχεσθαι τὴν ἀπό τινος ἐπαγγελίαν (assent; the ref- 
erence is to ἃ promise to surrender Paul to the power 
and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 21; [add, ἐπαγγε- 
Nias ὁ λόγος οὗτος, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the 
divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva- 
tion by Christ, [ef. Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. iii. 14]: Acts vii. 
17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gal. iii. 17 sq. 21; 
iv. 23; Heb. xi. 17 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see βραδύνω, 2) ; 
Heb. viii. 6; xi. 9; foll. by the inf. Heb. iv. 1; γίνεταί 


ἐπαγγέλλω 


τινι, Ro. iv. 13; πρός τινα, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6; ἐρρήθη 
τινί, Gal. iii. 16; ἐστί τινι, belongs to one, Acts ii. 39; 


ἐπαγγέλλεσθαι τὴν ἐπ. 1 Jn. 11. 25; ἔχειν ἐπαγγελίας, to | 


have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [οἵ. W. 177 
(166)]; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8; εἶναι ἐν ἐπαγγε- 
Xa, joined with a promise [8]. al.; cf. W. 391 (366) ], 
Eph. vi. 2; ἡ γῆ τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, the promised land, Heb. 
xi. 9; τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, born in accordance with 
the promise, Ro. ix. 8; Gal. iv. 28; τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἐπαγ- 
γελίας τὸ ἅγιον, the promised Spirit, Eph. i. 13; αἱ d:a67- 
και τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, covenants to which was united the 
promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12; 
ἡ ἐπαγγελία τοῦ θεοῦ, given by God, Ro. iv. 20; in the 
plur. 2 Co. i. 20; af ἐπαγγελίαι τῶν πατέρων, the promises 
made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8; with the gen. of the 
object, τῆς ζωῆς, 1 Tim. iv. 8; τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ, 2 
Pet. iii. 4; κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν according to promise, Acts 
xiii. 23; Gal. iii. 29; δ ἐπαγγελίας, Gal. iii. 18. ^b. by 
meton. a promised good or blessing (cf. ἐλπίς, sub fin.) : 
Gal. iii. 22; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic.]; 
ἀποστέλλειν τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ πατρός pov, the blessing 
promised by my Father, Lk. xxiv. 49; περιμένειν, Acts 
ἴ. 4; κομίζεσθαι τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, Heb. x. 36; xi. [13 T Tr 
WH, προσδέχεσθαι L], 39; λαμβάνειν τὰς ἐπαγγελίας. 
Heb. xi. 13 [RG]; ἐπιτυγχάνειν ἐπαγγελιῶν, ib, vs. 33; 
κληρονομεῖν τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, Heb. vi. 12; ἐπιτυγχάνειν τῆς 
ἐπαγγελίας, jb. 15 ; κληρονόμοι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, vs. 17 — (to 
reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 15, 17 with xi. 13, 39, which at 
first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac- 
cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the 
expiatory sacrifice offered at length to God by Christ, 
were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before 
Christ's return from heaven; [al explain the appar- 
ent contradiction by the difference between the initial 
and the consummate reception of the promise; see 
the Comm. ad l.]) ; with the epexeget. gen. λαβεῖν τὴν 
ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, the promised blessing, 
which is the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33; Gal. iii. 14, [cf. 
W. § 34,8 a. fin.]; τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονο- 
pias, Heb. ix. 15. ([Dem. 519, 8; Aristot. eth. Nic. 10, 
1 p. 1104", 29]; Polyb. 1, 43, 6, and often; Diod. 1, 5; 
Joseph. antt. 3, 5,1; 5, 8,11; 1 Maec. x. 15.) * 
ἐπ-αγγέλλω : [pres: mid. érayyéANopac]; pf. pass. and 
mid. ἐπήγγελμαι:; 1 aor. mid. ἐπηγγειλάμην : from Hom. 
down; 1. to announce. 2. to promise: pass. à 
ἐπήγγελται, to whom the promise hath been made, Gal. 
iii. 19. Mid. to announce concerning one's self; i. e. 
1. to announce that one is about to do or to furnish some- 
thing, i.e. to promise (of one's own accord), to engage 
(voluntarily) : ὁ ἐπαγγειλάμενος, Heb. x. 23 ; xi. 11; ἐπήγ- 
yeArat, he hath promised, foll. by λέγων, Heb. xii. 26; 
τινί, to give a promise to one, Heb. vi. 13; ri, Ro. iv. 21; 
Tit.i.2; τινί τι, Jas. i. 12; ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 19; ἐπαγγελίαν, 
to give a promise, 1 Jn. ii. 25 (Esth. iv. 7; [cf. W. 225 
(211) ; B. 148 (129)]); foll. by the inf. [cf. W. $ 44, 7 c.]: 
Mk. xiv. 11; Acts vii. 5. 2. to profess; τί, e. g. an art, 
to profess one’s self skilled in it (τὴν ἀρετήν, Xen. mem. 
1, 2, 7; τὴν στρατιάν, Hell. 3, 4, 3; σοφίαν, Dios. Laert. 


2 





27 ἐπαίρω 


prooem. 12; σωφροσύνην, Clem. Al. paedag. 3, 4 p. 299, 
21 ed. Klotz; [cf. L. and S. s. v. 5]): θεοσέβειαν, 1 Tim. 
li. 10; γνῶσιν, vi. 21. [Cowr. προ-τεπαγγέλλω.] * 

ἐπ-άγγελμα. -τος, τό, (ἐπαγγέλλω), a promise: 2 Pet. i. 
4;ii 13. (Dem., Isoc., al.) * 

ém-áyo, [ pres. ptep. ἐπάγων]; 1 aor. ptep. ἐπάξας (W. 
p. 82 (78); [Veitch s. v. @yw]); 2 aor. inf. ἐπαγαγεῖν ; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 8°29; to lead or bring upon: 
τινί τι, lo bring a thing on one, i. e. to cause something to 
befall one, usually something evil, 2 Pet. ii. 1, 5, (πῆμα, 
Hesiod. opp. 240; ἄταν, Soph. Ajax 1189; γῆρας νόσους 
ἐπάγει. Plat. Tim. 33 a.; ἑαυτοῖς δουλείαν, Dem. p. 424, 9 ; 
δεινά, Palaeph. 6, 7; κακά, Bar. iv. 29; ἀμέτρητον ὕδωρ. 3 
Macc. ii. 4, and in other exx.; in the Sept. ἐπί τινά τι, as 
κακά, Jer. vi. 19; xi. 11, etc.; πληγήν, Ex.xi.1; also in a 
good sense, as ἀγαθά, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 42; τινὶ edppo- 
σύνην, Bar. iv. 29). ἐπάγειν τὸ αἷμά τινος ἐπί wa, to bring 
the blood of one upon any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt 
of, make him answerable for, the violent death inflicted 
on another: Acts v. 28, (like ἐπάγειν ἁμαρτίαν ἐπί twa, 
Gen. xx. 9; Ex. xxxii. 21, 34; ἁμαρτίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα, 
Ex. xxxiv. 7).* 

ἐπ-αγωνίζομαι ; fo contend: τινί, for a thing, Jude 3. 
(τῷ ᾿Αννίβᾳ, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2; ταῖς 
νίκαις. added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13, 
4; by others in diff. senses.) * 

ἐπ-αθροίζω: [ pres. pass. ptep. ἐπαθροιζόμενος |; to gather 
together (to others already present): pass. in Lk. xi. 29. 
(Plut. Anton. 44, 1.) * 

"Emaíveros [so W. ὃ 6, 11. (cf. Chandler § 335): Ἔπαι- 
veros Rec** T ; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Lipsius, Gram. 
Unters. p. 30 sq.; Roehl, Inserr. index iii.]. (ἐπαινέω), 
-ov, 6, Epenetus, the name of a Christian mentioned in 
Ro. xvi. 5.* 

ἐπ-αινέω, -à ; fut. ἐπαινέσω (1 Co. xi. 22, for the more 
com. ἐπαινέσομαι, cf. W. 86 (82) ; [B. 53 (46)]: L txt. Tr 
mrg. ἐπαινῶ) ; 1 aor.émpvera; (ἔπαινος) ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 55n and maz; to approve, to praise, (with the 
ἐπί cf. Germ. be- in beloben [Passow 8. v. ἐπί, IV. C. 3 
cc.]) : τινά, Ro. xv. 11; 1 Co. xi. 22; τινά, foll. by ὅτε [ef. 
W.$30,9 b.], Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2; absol, foll. by 
ὅτι, 1 Co. xi. 17.* 

ἔπ-αινος, -ov, 6, (ἐπί and αἶνος [as it were, a tale for an- 
other; cf. Bitm. Lexil. § 83, 4; Schmidt ch. 155]) ; ap- 
probation, commendation, praise: Phil. iv. 8; ἔκ τινος, 
bestowed by one, Ro. ii. 29; ἔπαινον ἔχειν ἔκ τινος, gen. 
of pers., Ro. xiii. 3; 6 ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, 1 Co. iv. 5; with gen. of the pers. to whom the 
praise is given, Ro. ii. 29; 2 Co. viii. 18; εἰς ἔπαινον, to 
the obtaining of praise, 1 Pet. i. 7; εἰς ἔπαινόν twos, that 
a pers. or thing may be praised, Eph. i. 6,14; Phil. 1.11; 
[πέμπεσθαι cis ἔπ. τινος, 1 Pet. ii. 14]; εἶναι εἰς ἔπαινόν 
τινος to be a praise to a pers. or thing, Eph. i. 12.* 

ém-a(po ; 1 aor. ἐπῆρα, ptep. ἐπάρας, impv. 2 pers. plur. 
ἐπάρατε. inf. ἐπᾶραι ; pf. ἐπῆρκα (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.); [Pass. 
and Mid., pres. ἐπαίρομαι] ; 1 aor. pass. ἐπήρθην ; (on the 
om. of iota subscr. see αἴρω init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. 
chiefly for 873, also for p; to lift up, raise up, raise 


ἐπαισχύνομαι 


onhigh: τὸν ἀρτέμονα, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (τὰ ἱστία. 
Plut. mor. p. 870 [de Herod: malign. § 39]); τὰς χεῖρας, 
in offering prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6; Ps. exxxiii. 
(exxxiv.) 2); in blessing, Lk. xxiv. 50 [cf. W. § 65, 4 c.] 
(Lev. ix. 22 [yet here ἐξάρας]; Sir. l. 20) ; ras κεφαλάς, 
of the timid and sorrowful recovering spirit, Lk. xxi. 
28 (so αὐχένα, Philo de prof. § 20); τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, to 
look up, Mt. xvii. 8; Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. iv. 35; vi. 5; εἴς 
τινα, Lk. vi. 20; eis τὸν οὐρανόν, Lk. xviii. 13; Jn. xvii. 
1; τὴν φωνήν, Lk. xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22, 
(Dem. 449, 13; Sept. Judg. ii. 4; ix. 7; 2 S. xiii. 36); 
τὴν πτέρναν ἐπί τινα, to lift the heel against one (see 
πτέρνα), Jn. xiii. 18. Pass. ἐπήρθη, was taken up (of 
Christ, taken*up into heaven), Acts i. 9; reflex. and 
metaph. to be lifted up with pride, to exalt one’s self: 2 
Co. xi. 20 (Jer. xiii. 15; Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4; 
xxxv. (xxxii.) 1; 1 Mace. i. 3; ii. 63; Arstph. nub. 810; 
Thue. 4, 18; Aeschin. 87, 24; with dat. of the thing of 
which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zeph. i. 11; Hat. 9, 
49; Thue. 1, 120; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24); —on 2 Co. x. 
5 see ὕψωμα." 

ἐπ-αισχύνομαι ; fut. ἐπαισχυνθήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἐπῃησχύνθην, 
and with neglect of augm. ἐπαισχύνθην (2 Tim. i. 16 L T 
Tr WH; ef. [ WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30) ; [W. $ 12 
fin.]) ; fr. Aeschyl. down; to be ashamed (ἐπί on account 
of [ef. Is. i. 29 Alex.; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8]; see αἰσχύνω) : 
absol. 2 Tim. i. 12 ; τινά [on the accus. cf. W. $ 32, 1 b. a.; 
D. 192 (166)], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 ; ri, of 
a thing, Ro. i. 16; 2 Tim.i. 8, 16 ; ἐπί τινι, dat. of a thing, 
Ro. vi. 21; foll. by the inf. Heb. ii. 11; with the acc. of 
a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Heb. xi. 16. (Twice in 
the Sept.: Is. i. 29 [Alex. 7; Job xxxiv. 19.) * 

ἐπ-αιτέω, -ὦ ; 1. to ask besides, ask for more: Hom. 
Il. 23, 593. 2. to ask again and again, importunately : 
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3; 
[xviii. 35 LT Tr WH]; (Ps. eviii. (cix.) 10; Sir. xl. 28; 
Soph. Oed. Col. 1364).* 

ἐπ-ακολουθέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. ἐπηκολούθησα ; to follow (close) 
upon, follow after; in the N. T. only metaph. τοῖς ἴχνεσί 
twos, to tread in one’s footsteps, i. e. to imitate his ex- 
ample, 1 Pet. ii. 21; with the dat. of a pers. 1 Tim. v. 
24 (opp. to mpodye, to go before; the meaning is, ‘ the 
sins of some men are manifest now, even before they are 
called to account, but the misdeeds of others are exposed 
when finally judgment is held’; cf. Huther [or Ellic.] 
ad loc.) ; ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ, to be devoted to good works, 1 Tim. 


v. 10; used, with the dat. of the pers. to be mentally sup- 


plied, of the miracles accompanying the preaching of 
Christ's ministers, Mk. xvi. 20. (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., 
Plato, sqq.; occasionally in Sept.) * 

ἐπ-ακούω : laor. ἐπήκουσα ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. often 
for 3p and pow; 1. to give ear to, listen to; to per- 
ceive by the ear. 2. to listen to i. e. hear with favor, 
grant one's prayer, (Xeschyl. choéph. 725; τῶν εὐχῶν, 
Leian. Tim. 34): τινός, to hearken to one, 2 Co. vi. 2 fr. 
Is. xlix. 8; often so in Sept.* 


ἐπ-ακροάομαι, -ῶμαι : 3 pers. plur. impf. ἐπηκροῶντο; to | 


listen to: with the gen. of a pers. Acts xvi. 25. 


(Plat. 


228 








PLL AZ 
e ave 


comic. in Bekk. anecd. p. 360; Leian. Icarom. 1; Test. 
xii. Patr. p. 710, test. Jos. § 8.) * 

&r-áv, conj. (fr. ἐπεί and dv), after, when: with the sub- 
june. pres. Lk. xi. 34; with the subjunc. aor., answering 
to the Lat. fut. exact. (fut. perf.), Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xi. 22. 
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 547.*— 

ἐπάναγκες, (ἀνάγκη. [hence lit. on compulsion]), neces- 
sarily: πλὴν τῶν ἐπάναγκες rovrov, besides these things 
which are necessarily imposed, Acts xv. 28 [B. 27 (24)]. 
(Hdt., Andoc., Plato, Dem., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., 
Aelian, Epict.) * 

tm-av-&áyo ; 2 aor. inf. ἐπαναγαγεῖν, impy. ἐπανάγαγε, 
[ptep. ἐπαναγαγών, Mt. xxi. 18 T ΝῊ txt. Tr mrg.]; 1. 
lit. fo lead up upon, se. τὸ πλοῖον, a ship upon the deep, 
i.e. to put out, Lk. v. 3 (Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 28; 2 Macc. 
xii. 4) ; with eis τὸ βάθος added, into the deep, ibid. 4. 
2. to lead back; intrans. to return [cf. B. 144 (126)]: 
Mt. xxi. 18; (2 Macc. ix. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 3; Polyb., 
Diod., Joseph., Hdian., al.).* 

ἐπ-ανα-μιμνήσκω ; fo recall to mind again: twa, remind- 
ing one, Ro. xv. 15. (Rare; Plato, legg. 3 p. 688 a.; 
Dem. 74, (7) 9; [Aristot.].) * 

ἐπ-ανα-παύω: 1. to cause to rest upon anything: 
Sept. in Judg. xvi. 26 ace. to cod. Alex.; Greg. Nyss. 
2. Mid., [pres. ἐπαναπαύομαι ; fut. ἐπαναπαύσομαι, and 
(Lk. x. 6 T WH after codd. NB) ἐπαναπαήσομαι (see 
ἀναπαύω) ; lo rest upon anything: τινί, metaph. τῷ vope, 
to lean upon, trust to, Ro. ii. 17 (Mie. iii. 11; 1 Mace. viii. 
12). to settle upon, fix its abode upon ; ἐπί twa, with the 
included idea of antecedent motion towards (see eis, C. 2 
p. 186") : ἡ εἰρήνη ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν i. e. shall rest, remain, upon 
him or it, Lk. x. 6 (τὸ πνεῦμα ἐπί twa, Num. xi. 25; 2 K. 
ii. 15 ; ἐπί τινι, Num. xi. 26 var.).* 

ἐπ-αν-έρχομαι ; 2 aor. ἐπανῆλθον; to return, come back 
again: Lk.x.35; xix. 19. (Hdt.; freq. in Attie writ.)* 

ém-ay-Grrque: fut. mid. ἐπαναστήσομαι; to cause lo rise 
up against, to raise up against; Mid. to rise up against 
(Hdt., Arstph., Thue., Polyb., al.) : ἐπί τινα, Mt. x. 21; 
Mk. xiii. 12, as in Deut. xix. 11; xxii. 26; Mic. vii. 6.* 

ἐπ-αν-όρθωσις, -ews, 7, (ἐπανορθόω), restoration to an up- 
right or a right state; correction, improvement, (in Grk. 
writ. fr. Dem. down): of life and character, 2 Tim. iii. 
16 [ef. τὸν θεὸν . . - xpóvov ye πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν (αὐτοῖς) 
προσιζάνειν, Plut. de sera num. vind. 6]; with τοῦ βίου 


| added, Polyb. 1, 35, 1; Ejpict. diss. 3, 21,15; σεαυτοῦ, 


id. ench. 51, 1; [ἠθικὴ δὲ τὰ πρὸς ἀνθρωπίνων ἐπανόρθωσιν 
ἠθῶν, Philo de ebriet. § 22; cf. de confus. lingg. § 36 fin.]; 
(cf. ἐπανορθοῦν καὶ εἰς μετάνοιαν ἀπάγειν, Joseph. antt. 4, 
6, 10).* 

ἐπ-άνω, adv., (ἐπί and ἄνω [cf. W. 102 (97); B. 319 
(273)]), Hdt. et sqq.; often in the Sept.; above; at 
adverbially, a. of place: Lk. xi. 44; b. of number; 
beyond, more than: πραθῆναι ἐπάνω τριακοσίων δηναρίων, 
sold for more than three hundred denaries, Mk. xiv. 5; 
ὥφθη ἐπάνω πεντακοσίοις ἀδελφοῖς, by more than five hun- 
dred brethren, 1 Co. xv. 6; cf. W. § 37, 5; [B. 168 
(146)]. 2. as a preposition it is joined with the gen. 
[W. § 54,6], a. of place: Mt. ii. 9; v. 14; xxi. 7 Βα; 


, ΄ 2 
ezraparos 


xxiii. 18, 20, [22]; xxvii. 37; xxviii. 2; Lk. iv. 39; [x. 
19]; Rev. vi. 8 [WH br. the gen.]; xx. 3, [11 Tr txt. ]. 
b. of dignity and power: ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπάνω τινός, Lk. 
xix. 17, [19]; ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστί, Jn. iii. 31*, [31" (but 
here G T WH mrg. om. the cl.) ].* 

ἐπ-άρατος, -ov, (ἐπαράομαι [to call down curses upon ]), 
accursed: Jn. vii. 49 L'T Tr WH.  (Thuc., Plato, Aes- 
chin., Dio Cass., al.) * 

ém-apkéo, -à; 1 aor. [ἐπήρκεσα], subjunc. ézapkéco; 
properly, to avail or be strong enough for . . . (see ápkéo) ; 
hence a. to ward off or drive away, τί τινι, a thing for 
another's advantage i. q. a thing from any one (Hom.), 
to defend. b. to aid, give assistance, relieve, (Hdt., 
Aeschyl., al.): τινί, 1 Tim. v. 10; Mid. to give aid from 
one’s own resources, 1 Tim. v. 16 acc. to the reading 
ἐπαρκείσθω (L txt. 'T Tr WH mrg.) for ἐπαρκείτω (RK GL 
mrg. WH txt.); (κατὰ δύναμιν ἀλλήλοις ἐπαρκεῖν, Xen. 
mem. 2, 7, 1).* 

ἐπάρχειος, -ov, belonging to an ἔπαρχος or prefect; 7] 
ἐπάρχειος sc. ἐξουσία, i. q. ἡ ἐπαρχία (see the foll. word), 
a prefecture, province: Acts xxv. 1 T WH mrg. So ἡ 
ἐπάρχιος, Euseb. h. e. 2, 10, 3 (with the var. émápxetov) ; 
Ὁ 96..2.; 8, 55; 5; de mart: Bale 5: 17 159. 11 Ὁ . 

ἐπαρχία [-xeía T WH (see et, £)], -as, ἡ, (fr. ἔπαρχος 
i.e. 6 ἐπ᾿ ἀρχῇ ὧν the one in command, prefect, goy- 
ernor), prefecture; i. e. 1. the office of ἔπαρχος or 
prefect. 2. the region subject to a prefect; a province 
of the Roman empire, either a larger province, or an ap- 
pendage to a larger province, as Palestine was to that 
of Syria [cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. p. 144 sqq.]: Acts xxiii. 
34; xxv. 1 [see the preced. word]; (Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Dio Cass.). Cf. Krebs, Observv. ete. p. 256 sqq.; Fischer, 
De vitiis Lexx. N, T. p. 432 sqq.; [BB.DD. (esp. Kitto) 
8. v. Province ].* 

ἔπ-αυλις, -εως, 7, (ἐπί and αὖλις tent, place to pass the 
night in; hence a country-house, cottage, cabin, fold), 
a farm; a dwelling, (A. V. habitation]: Acts i. 20 fr. Ps. 
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 26. (Diod., Plut., al.; also a camp, military 
quarters, Plato, Polyb.) * 

ἐπ-αύριον, adv. of time, i. q. ἐπ᾽ αὔριον, on the morrow; 
in the N. T. τῇ ἐπαύριον, sc. ἡμέρᾳ, the next day, on the 
morrow: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xi. 12; Jn. i. 29; Acts x. 
9, etc.; Sept. for NINN. 

ἐπ-αυτοφώρῳ, see αὐτόφωρος, p. 87°. 

*Eradpas, -à [ B. 20 (17 sq.) ], 6, Epaphras, a Christian 
man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23. The 
conjecture of some that the name is contracted from 
᾿Ἐπαφρύδιτος (q. v. [cf. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that 
these two names belong to one and the same man, is not 
probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epaphras; Bp. Lehtft. 
Com. on Phil p. 61 note *]. The name is com. in 
inscriptions.* 

ἐπ-αφρίζω; to foam up (Mosch. 5, 5): (o cast out as 
foam, foam out: ri, Jude 13 calls the godless and grace- 
less set of whom he speaks κύματα ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν 
αἰσχύνας, i. 6. (dropping the figure) impelled by their 
restless passions, they unblushingly exhibit, in word and 
deed, their base and abandoned spirit; cf. Is. lvii. 20.* 








9 ἐπείπερ 


᾿Επαφρόδιτος, -ov, ὅ, (fr. ᾿Αφροδίτη, prop. ‘charming’), 
Epaphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry : 
Phil. ii. 25; iv. 18. See "Ezadpàs above.* 

ἐπ-εγείρω:: 1 aor. ἐπήγειρα ; to raise or excite against: 
τὶ ἐπί τινα, Acts xiii. 50 (διωγμόν) ; κατά τινος, to stir up 
against one: τὰς ψυχὰς . . . κατὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν, Acts xiv. 2.* 

ἐπεί, [fr. temporal ἐπί and εἰ, lit. thereupon when; Cur- 
tius, Erliut. etc. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 356, 7], conjune- 
tion, (Lat. cum), when, since, [cf. W. $ 53, 1]; used 1. 
of time, after; so once in the N. T.: Lk. vii. 1 (where 
LT Tr txt. WH txt. ἐπειδή). 2. of cause, ete., since, 
seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 T Tr WH]; 
xxvii. 6; Mk. xv. 42; Lk.i. 34; Jn. xiii. 29; xix. 31; 
1Co.xiv.12; 2 Co. xi. 18; xiii. 3; Heb. v. 2, 11; vi. 13; 
ix. 17; xi. 11; ἐπεὶ οὖν since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6. 
Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech, 
we must often supply in thought between ἐπεί and the 
proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it 
is (or were) otherwise; so that the particle, although 
retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other- 
wise, else, or for then, (Germ. sonst) ; so in Ro. xi. 6, 22; 
Heb. ix. 26; ἐπεὶ dpa, 1 Co. v. 10; vii. 14, [cf. W. § 53, 
8 a.]; ἐπεί alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (447); 
B. 233 (200)]: Ro.iii.6; 1 Co. xiv. 16; xv. 29; Heb. x. 
2; (4 Macc.i. 33; ii. 7,19; vi. 34 (35); vii. 21; viii. 8). 
Cf. Matthiae $ 618; [B. $ 149, 5].* 

ἐπει-δή, conjunction, (fr. ἐπεί and δή), Lat. cum jam, 
when now, since now, [cf. W. 434 (404), 448 (417); Ellic. 
on Phil. ii. 26]; 1. of time; when now, after that; 
so once in the N. T.: Lk. vii. 1 LT Trtxt. WH txt. 2 
of cause; since, seeing that, forasmuch as: Mt. xxi. 46 
[RGL]; Lk.xi.6; Acts xiii. 46; xiv. 12; xv. 24; 1 Co. 
i. 21, 22; xiv. 16; xv. 21; [2 Co. v. 4 Rec.*t]; Phil. ii. 26.* 

ἐπει-δή-περ [ἐπειδή περ Lchm.], conjunction, (fr. ἐπεί, 
δή and πέρ), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg. 
quoniam quidem, since now, [ef. W. 448 (417)]: Lk.i. 1. 
(Aristot. phys. 8, 5 [p. 256^, 25]; Dion. Hal. 2, 72; Philo 
ad Gai. § 25, and Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.) * 

ἐπ-εῖδον [ Tdf. 7 ἐφεῖδον] ; impv. ἔπιδε (Lehm. ἔφιδε, cf. 
W.$5,1d. 14; B. 7; [reff. s. v. ἀφεῖδον] ; besides see 
edo, I.); to look upon, to regard: foll. by a telic inf., 
ἐπεῖδεν ἀφελεῖν τὸ ὄνειδός μου ([R. V. looked upon me to 
take away ete.], Germ. hat hergeblickt), Lk. i. 25; ἐπί τι, 
to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, cf. Lat. ani- 
madvertere), Acts iv. 29.* 

ἔπ-ειμι ; (ἐπί, and εἶμι to 20); to come upon, approach ; 
of time, (o.come on, be at hand; ptep. ἐπιών, -οὔσα; -óv, 
next, following: τῇ ἐπιούσῃ, sc. ἡμέρᾳ, on the following 
day, Acts xvi. 11; xx.15; xxi. 18, (Polyb. 2, 25, 11; 
5, 13, 10; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,6; [Prov. xxvii. 1]; ete.); 
with ἡμέρᾳ added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down), 
Acts vii. 26; τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτί, Acts xxiii. 11. Cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 464.* 

ἐπεί-περ, conjunction, (ἐπεί, mép), since indeed, since at 
all events; [it introduces a * known and unquestioned 
certainty 7: Ro. iii. 30 RG (but L Tr εἴ περ, TWH 
εἴπερ). Cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 784; [Büumlein p. 204; 
W.448 (417). Fr.the Tragg. down.]* 


ἐπεισαγωγή 


ἐπ-εισ-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ, α bringing in besides or in addition 
to what is or has been brought in: κρείττονος ἐλπίδος, Heb. 
vii.19. (In Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 2 used of the introduction 
of a new wife in place of one repudiated; ἑτέρων ἰητρῶν, 
Hippocr. p. 27 [vol. i. p. 81 ed. Kühn]: προσώπων, of 
characters in a play, Dion. Hal. ser. cens. 2, 10; in the 
plur. of places for letting in the enemy, Thue. 8, 92.) * 

ἐπ-εισ-έρχομαι : fut. ἐπεισελεύσομαι ; 1. to come in 
besides or to those who are already within; to enter after- 
wards, (Hat., Thue., Plato, al.). 2. to come in upon, 
come upon by entering; to enter against: ἐπί τινα, acc. of 
pers. Lk. xxi. 35 L T Tr txt. WH; with simple dat. of 
pers. 1 Macc. xvi. 16.* 

ἔπειτα, adv., (emi, εἶτα), thereupon, thereafter, then, 
afterwards; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 RG; Lk. 
xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21; Jas. iv. 14; pera τοῦτο is added re- 
dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.; W. ὃ 65, 2; 
[B. 397 (340)]) ; a more definite specification of time is 
added epexegetically, pera ἔτη τρία, Gal. i. 18; διὰ δε- 
κατεσσάρων ἐτῶν, Gal. ii. 1. b. in enumerations it is 
used a. of time and order: πρῶτον .. . ἔπειτα, 1 Co. 
xv. 46; 1 Th. iv. 17; πρότερον . . . ἔπειτα, Heb. vii. 27; 
ἀπαρχὴ - - - ἔπειτα, 1 Co. xv. 23; εἶτα [but T Tr mrg. WI 
mrs. ἔπειτα] . . . ἔπειτα, 1 Co. xv. 5, 6; ἔπειτα. . . ἔπειτα, 
ib. 7 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH mrg. 8. of order alone: 
πρῶτον... . ἔπειτα, Heb. vii. 2; τρίτον . . - ἔπειτα - . . ἔπει- 
ra (RG εἶτα). 1 Co. xii. 28." 

ἐπ-έκεινα (i. q. ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα sc. μέρη [cf. W. $6, 11. fin.]), 
adv., beyond: with the gen., Βαβυλῶνος, Acts vii. 43. 
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down both with and without 
the gen.; in the Sept. Am. v. 27; Gen. xxxv. 16; Jer. 
xxu 19.* 

ém-k-re(vo : [pres. mid. ptep. ézekrewópevos]; to 
stretch. out to or towards; Mid. to stretch (one's self) for- 
ward to: with dat. of thing indicating the direction [W. 
§ 52,4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see ἔμπροσθεν, 1 fin.).* 

ἐπενδύτης, -ov, 6, (ἐπενδύνω or ἐπενδύω, q. v., [cf. W. 25 ; 
94 (90) ]), an upper garment, (Tertull. superindumentum) : 
Jn. xxi. 7, where it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse 
or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work. 
(Soph. frag. 391 Dind. [(248 Ahrens) ; Poll. 7,45 p. 717]; 
Sept. twice [thrice] for yp, 1 S. xviii. 4 [Alex.]; 2 S. 
xiii. 18; [add Lev. viii. 7 Alex.].) * 

én-ev-Stw: 1 aor. mid. inf. ἐπενδύσασθαι; to put on over 
[A. V. te be clothed upon]: 2 Co. v. 2, 4. (Plut. Pelop. 
11; actively, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 12.) * 

ἐπ-έρχομαι ; fut. ἐπελεύσομαι: 2 aor. ἐπῆλθον (3 pers. 
plur. ἐπῆλθαν, Acts xiv. 19 L 'T Tr WH); Sept. chiefly 
for N33; 1. to come to, to arrive; a. univ., foll. by 
ἀπό with a gen. of place, Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; /o 
come on, be at hand, be future: ἐν rois αἰῶσι rois ἐπερχο- 
μένοις, Eph. ii. 7, (Is. xli. 4, 22, 23; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down); of that which time will bring, to impend : ἡ τα- 
λαιπωρία ἡ ἐπερχομένη, Jas. v. 15; τινί, Lk. xxi. 26, (Is. 
lxiii.4; also of things favorable, ἡ εὐλογία, Sir. iii. 8). 
2. to come upon, overtake, one; so even in Hom., as of 
sleep, τινά, Od. 4, 793; 10, 31; τινί, 12, 311; of disease, 


11, 200; ἐπί τινα, a. of calamities: Lk. xxi. 35 RG; 


230 











ἐπερώτημα 


| Acts viii. 24; xiii. 40 [L T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. 


ἐφ᾽ ὑ.7, (Gen. xlii. 21; Mie. iii, 11; Zeph. ii. 2; 2 Ch. xx. 
9; Jer. v. 12 [here 7£e&]). b. of the Holy Spirit, de- 
scending and operating in one: Lk. i. 35; Acts i. 8. c. 
of an enemy attacking one: ἐπελθὼν νικήσῃ αὐτόν, Lk. xi. 
22; (Hom. Il. 12, 136 ; 1 S. xxx. 23; w. dat. of pers. 
IIdian. 1, 8, 12 [6 Bekk.]).* 

ἐπ-ερωτάω, -ὦ ; impf. ἐπηρώτων; fut. ἐπερωτήσω; 1 aor. 
ἐπηρώτησα; 1 aor. pass. ptep. ἐπερωτηθείς ; Sept. mostly 
for ony, sometimes for $77; 1. to accost one with an 
inquiry, pul a question to, inquire of, ask, interrogate, 
[ἐπί directive, uniformly in the N. T.; Mey. on Mk. 
xi. 29 (cf. ἐπί, D. 2)]: τινά, Mk. ix. 32; xii.34; Mt. xxii. 
46; Lk. ii. 46 ; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Jn. xviii. 21 RG; τινά τι; 
ask one any thing, Mk. vii. 17 L T Tr WH; xi. 29; Lk. 
xx. 40; τινὰ περί τινος. one about a thing, Mk. vii. 17 RG; 
[Lk. ix. 45 Lehm.], (Hdt. 1, 32; Dem. 1072, 12) : foll. 
by Aéyov with the words used by the questioner, Mt. xii. 
10; xvii. 10; Mk.ix.11; xii. 18; Lk. 11.10, 14; xx. 27; 
xxiii. 3 [R.G L], and often in the Synoptic Gospels; foll. 
by ei, whether, Mk. viii. 23; xv. 44 ; Lk. xxiii. 6; or some 
other form of the indirect question, Acts xxiii. 34; ἐπηρώ- 
τῶν λέγοντες [LT Tr WH om. AMéy.], τίς ein, Lk. viii. 9; 
ἐπερωτᾶν θεόν to consult God (Num. xxiii. 3; Josh. ix. 20 
(14); Judg.i.1; xviii.5; Is. xix. 3, ete.; Thuc. 1, 118, 
[ete.]), hence to seek to know God's purpose and to do his 
will, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. ]xv. 1. 2. by a usage foreign 
to the Greeks, to address one with a request or demand ; 
to ask of or demand of one: foll. by the inf. Mt. xvi. 1 (so 
ἐπερ. τινά τι, Hebr. Onw, in Ps. exxxvi. (exxxvii.) 3; [this 
sense is disputed by some; see Zezschwitz as referred to 
at end of next word; ef. Weiss on Mt. l. c., and see 
ἐρωτάω, 2]). 

ἐπ-ερώτημα, -ros, τό, (ἐπερωτάω) ; 1. an inquiry, a 
question: Hat. 6,67; Thue. 3, 53. 68. 2. a demand; 
so for the Chald. NONU in Dan. iv. 14 "Theod. ; see ézepo- 
τάω, 2. 3. As the terms of inquiry and demand often 
include the idea of desire, the word thus gets the signi- 
fication of earnest seeking, i. e. a craving, an intense de- 
sire (80 ἐπερωτᾶν εἴς τι, to long for something, 2 S. xi. 7 — 
[but surely the phrase here (like 5 Ds) means simply 
to ask in reference to, ask about]). If this use of the 
word is conceded, it affords us the easiest and most con- 
gruous explanation of that vexed passage 1 Pet. iii. 21: 
“which (baptism) now saves us [you] not because in re- 
ceiving it we [ye] have put away the filth of the flesh, 
but because we [ye] have earnestly sought a conscience 
reconciled to God ” (συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς gen. of the obj., 
as opp. to σαρκὸς ῥύπου). It is doubtful, indeed, whether 
εἰς θεόν is to be joined with ἐπερώτημα, and signifies a 
craving directed unto God [W.194 (182) — yet less fully 
and decidedly than in ed. 5, p. 216 sq.], or with συνείδησις, 
and denotes the attitude of the conscience towards (in 
relation to) God; the latter construction is favored by a 
comparison of Acts xxiv. 16 ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν 
πρὸς τὸν Oesv. The signification of ézep. which is ap- 
proved by others, viz. stipulation, agreement, is first met 
with in the Byzantine writers on law; “moreover, the 


formula κατὰ τὸ ἐπερώτημα τῆς σεμνοτάτης βουλῆς: common 
in inscriptions of the age of the Antonines and the follow- 
ing Cesars, exhibits no new sense of the word ἐπερώτημα; 
for this formula does not mean ‘ace. to the decree of the 
senate’ (ex senatus consulto, the Grk. for which is xara 
τὰ δόξαντα τῇ βουλῇ); but ‘after inquiry of or application 
to the senate,’ i. e. ‘ with government sanction.”” Ze- 
zschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten- 
tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; [.Farrar, Early Days of Christi- 
anity,i. 138 n.; Kühler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 1878) 
pp. 331-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana- 
logical) passive sense of ἐπερ. viz. ‘the thing asked 
(the demand) of a good conscience towards God’ i. q. 
the avowal of consecration unto him ].* 
ἐπ-έχω ; impf. ἐπεῖχον; 2 aor. ἐπέσχον ; 
or hold upon, apply: se. τὸν νοῦν, to observe, attend to, foll. 
by an indir. quest., Lk. xiv. 7; τινί, dat. of pers., to give 
attention to one, Acts iii. 5; 1 Tim. iv. 16, (with dat. of a 
thing, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 2; 2 Mace. ix. 25; Polyb. 3, 43, 
2, etc. ; fully ὀφθαλμόν τινι, Leian. dial. mar. 1, 2). 2 
lo hold towards, hold forth, present : λόγον ζωῆς, asa light, 
by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Phil. ii. 
16 [al. al., cf. Mey. or Ellic. ad loc. ]. 3. to check ([cf. 
Eng. hold up], Germ. anhalten) : se. ἐμαυτόν, to delay, 
stop, stay, Acts xix. 22, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; 
[cf. W. $38, 1; B. 144 (126); Fritzsche on Sir. v. 1].* 

ἐπηρεάζω ; (ἐπήρεια [spiteful abuse, cf. Aristot. rhet. 2, 
2, 4]) ; to insult; to treat abusively, use despitefully ; to re- 
vile: τινά, Mt. v. 44 RG; Lk. vi. 28, (with dat. of pers., 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 31; 3, 5, 16) ; in a forensic sense, to 
accuse falsely: with the ace. of a thing, 1 Pet. iii. 16. 
(Xen., Isaeus, Dem., Philo, Plut, Leian., Hdian.; to 
threaten, Hdt. 6, 9 [but ef. Cope on Aristot. u. s.].) * 

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. 
€m ; see e. g. Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some in- 
stances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts 
ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects 
elision before proper names beginning with a vowel 
(exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s 
txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq. ; 
cf. W. $5, 1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. 
local prefix épi; Curtius $ 335], joined to the gen., the 
dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. 
super; (ef. W. 374 (350) note]). 

A. with the GrENrTIVE [ef. W. 8 47, g.; B. 336 
(289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on 
which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with 
the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abid- 
ing, remaining, standing, going, coming, ete.; 
of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 
34; ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, Mt. xxiv. 17; Lk. xvii. 31; ἐπ᾽ ἐρη- 
μίας (cf. ona desert), Mk. viii. 4; ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν, Mt. 
xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; ἐπὶ (τῆς) γῆς: Mt. vi. 10; ix. 6; xxiii. 
9; xxviii. 18; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 19, and very often; 
ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης. on (the surface of) the sea, Mt. xiv. 
25 RG; 26 L T Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, [49]; Rev. v. 13, 
and, ace. to the interp. of many, Jn. vi. 19; but cf. Baumg.- 
‘Crusius ad loc. [per contra, cf. Lücke ad loc.; Meyer on 


1. to have 


ἐπέχω 2 


91 





Sy 
et 


Mt. 1. c.], (Jobix.8; βαδίζειν ἐφ᾽ ὕδατος, Leian. philops. 
13; ἐπὶ τοῦ πελάγους διαθέοντες, v. h. 2,4 ; [ Artem. oneir. 
3, 16]; on a different sense of the phrase ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσ- 
ons see 2 a. below [W. 374 (351)]) ; ποιεῖν σημεῖα ἐπὶ τῶν 
ἀσθενούντων, to be seen upon the bodies of men, exter- 
nally, (on the sick [ef. W.375 (351)]), Jn. vi. 2; ἐκάθισα 
and κάθημαι [καθέζομαι] ἐπί, Mt. xix. 28; xxiii. 2; xxiv. - 
3; xxv. 31; xxvii. 19; Jn. xix. 13; Acts xx. 9 ; Rev. ix. 
17, etc. ; ἔστην, ἔστηκα ἐπί, Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi.40; Rey. 
x. 5,8; where parts of the body are spoken of : ἐπὶ χειρῶν, 
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11 ; ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Jn. xx. 7; 1 Co. 
xi. 10; Rev. x. 1 RG [Δ]. ace.]; xii. 1 ; σινδόνα ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ, 
Mk. xiv. 51; ἐπὶ τοῦ μετώπου [or -πων], Rev. vii. 3; ix. 
4; xiii.16 [Ree., al. ace.]; xiv. 9. — b. Like the prep. ev 
(see the exposition s. v. ἐν, I. 7 p. 212*), so also ἐπί with 
the gen. is used after verbs expressing motion to indi- 
cate the rest following the motion; thus after βάλλειν, 
Mk. iv. 26; Mt. xxvi. 12; σπείρειν, Mk. iv. 31; τιθέναι, 
Jn. xix. 19; Aets v. 15; [Lk. viii. 16 L T Tr WH]; 
ἐπιτιθέναι, Lk. viii. 16 [RG]; καθιέναι, Acts x. 11; πίπτειν, 
Mk.ix.20; xiv. 35; ἐπιγράφειν, Heb. x. 16 RG; ἑλκύειν, 
Jn. xxi. 11 RG; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb. vi. 7; Rev. iii. 10; [dva- 
τέλλειν, Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH]; γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ 
τόπου (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Lk. xxii. 40, 
[ef. W. p. 376 (352) and see below, C. I. 1 b.fin.]. κρεμᾶν 
τινα ἐπί (Hebr. oy nn, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 22, etc.), 
for which the Latin has suspendere ez, de, a, and alicui, 
Actsv.30; x.39; Gal.iii.13. c. fig. used of that upon 
which any thing rests, (like our upon) [cf. W. 375 
(351); B. 336 (289); Ellie. on 1 Tim. as below]: tva 
σταθῇ ἐπὶ στόματος ete. (3-0! Dip’, Deut. xix. 15), rest- 
ing on the declaration, etc., Mt. xviii. 16 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1; 
more simply ἐπὶ μαρτύρων, 1 Tim. v. 19; in the adv. phrase 
ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (on the ground of truth), see ἀλήθεια, I. 1. 
[c'. akin is its use (with a personal or a reflex. pron.) to 
denote dependence, as in λογιζέσθω ἐφ᾽ (al. ἀφ᾽ q. v. 
II. 2 d. aa.) ἑαυτοῦ. 2 Co. x. 7 T Tr WH (for himself, 1. e. 
apart from and independently of others; R. V. with him- 
self); cf. Kühner ii. 432; L. and S.s.v.A.L 1d.] dd. 
fiv. used of things, affairs, persons, which one is 
setover, over which he exercises power; Lat. 
supra, our over [cf. below, B. 2 b. and C. I. 2 e.]: ézi 
πάντων, Ro. ix. 5; Eph. iv. 6 (where ἐπί, διά and ἐν are 
distineuished); καθίστημί twa ἐπί twos, Mt. xxiv. 45; 
XXY. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42; Acts vi. 3, (Gen. xxxix. 4, 5; 
1 Mace. vi. 14; x. 37, ete.; Plat. rep. 5 p. 460 b., ete.) ; 
δίδωμί τινι ἐξουσίαν ἐπί τινος, Rev. ii. 26; ἔχω ἐξουσίαν 
ἐπί τινος, Rev. xx. 6; βασιλεύειν ἐπί τινος, Mt. ii. 22 RG 
Tr br.; Rev. v. 10; ἔχειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ βασιλέα, Rev. ix. 11; 
ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐπὶ τῶν βασιλέων, Rev. xvii. 18; ὃς ἢν ἐπὶ 
τῆς γάζης, who was over the treasury, Acts viii. 27; ὁ ἐπὶ 
τοῦ κοιτῶνος. he who presided over the bed-chamber, the 
chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (Passow i. 2 p. 1035" gives 
many exx. fr. Grk. auth. [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. III. 1; Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 474; Soph. Lex. s. v.]; for exx. fr. the O. T. 
Apoer. see Wakl, Clavis Apoer. p. 3185). e. of that to 
which the mental act looks or refers: λέγειν ἐπί 
τινος, to speak upon (of) a thing, Gal. iii. 16 (Plato, 


say 
ἐπὶ 


Charm. p. 155 d.; legg. 2 p. 662 d.; Ael. v. h. 1, 30; 
scribere super re, Cie. ad Att. 16, 6; disserere super, Tac. 
ann. 6, 28; cf. W. 375 (351); [B. 336 (289)]). f. of 
one on whom an obligation has been laid: εὐχὴν ἔχειν 
ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, have (taken) on themselves a vow, have 
bound themselves by a vow, Acts xxi. 23 [WH txt. ἀφ᾽ 
éavr. (see ἀπό, 11. 2 d. aa.) ]. 2. used of vicinity, 
i. e. of the place at, near, hard by, which, (Germ. bei, an) ; 
a. prop. κόλπος ὁ ἐπὶ ποσιδηΐου, lldt. 7, 115; ἐπὶ τῶν 
θυρῶν, [Acts v. 23 LT Tr WH] (1 Mace. i. 55; [Plut. 
G. Graech. 14, 3 p. 841 c.]) ; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1366 
§ 584; Passow s. v. p. 1034"; [L. and S. s. v. I. 1 a. sub 
fin.]. But the exx. of this signification adduced from 
the N. T. [with the exception of Acts l. 9.1 (and most 
of those fr. Grk. auth. also) are such as to allow the ren- 
dering of ἐπί by super also, over or above [so W. 374 sq. 
(351)]: ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης at the sea, upon the shore, or 
above the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, Jn. vi. 19 
(?[ef. 1 a. above]) ; xxi. 1, (Ex. xiv. 2; Deut. i. 40; 1 
Macc. xiv. 34; xv. 11; Polyb. 1, 44, 4; cf. the French 
Boulogne sur mer, Chálons sur Marne, [Eng. Stratford 
on Avon], ete.; ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, Ezek. i. 1; [Xen. an. 
4, 3, 28]; ἐπὶ τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, 2 K. ii. 7); ἐσθίειν ἐπὶ τῆς 
τραπέζης τινός (Germ. über Jemands Tische essen, [ οἵ. 
Eng. over one's food, over one's cups, ete.]), food and 
drink placed upon the table, Lk. xxii. 30 ef. 21; συκῆν 
ἐπὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ, a fig-tree above (i. e. higher than) the way, 
Mt. xxi.19. b. before, with gen. of a pers., in the pres- 
ence of one as spectator, or auditor, [W. 375 (351) ;- B. 
336 (289)]: Mt. xxviii. 14 [L Tr WH mrg. ὑπό]; Mk. 
xiii. 9; Acts xxiv. 19, 20; xxv. 9; xxvi. 2; 1 Co. vi. 1, 
6; 9 Co. vii. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [some bring this under II. 
below; see paprvpéo]: ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος, Acts 
xxv.10. c. ἐπὶ τοῦ (Rec. τῆς) βάτου at the bush, i. e. at 
the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken 
of, Mk. xii. 26 (see ἐν, T. 1 d.). II. of Time when; 
with gen. of a pers. in the time or age of a man, [* in the 
days of"]; at the time when an office was held by one; 
under the administration of, [cf. W. 375 (352) ; B. 336 
(289)]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 2; iv. 27; Acts xi. 28; (1 
Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this 
phrase is equiv. to “in or of the reign ete. of,” and is 
preceded by a specification of the year etc., see D. D. 
Am. ed. p. 651 note]; 2 Mace. viii. 19; xv. 22; for 
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 2 p. 1035, 
[less fully in L. and S. s. v. A. II.]). with the gen. of a 
thing, at the time of any occurrence: ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικεσίας 
Βαβυλῶνος, at the time of the deportation to Babylon, 
Mt. i. 11; [on Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH see δυσμή]: of 
the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on: ἐπὶ 
τῶν προσευχῶν pov, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers, 
when I am praying, Ro. i. 10 (9); Eph. i. 16; 1 Th. i. 
2; Philem. 4. of time itself, ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτων and (aec. to 
another reading) ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν (lit. at the end of 
the days): 2 Pet. iii. 3; Heb. i. 2 (1), (for the Hebr. 
D'»n mons, Gen. xlix. 1; Num. xxiv. 14; Jer. xxxvii. 
(xxx.) 24 ; Mic.iv. 1; Dan. x. 14) ; ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου, 


Jude18 LT TrWH ; [τῶν χρόνων, 1 Pet.i.20 LT TrWH J. 








232 : ἐπί 


TU 


B. with the Darrvr, used of Place [W. 392 (366) 
sq.; B. 336 (289) sq.] ; and 1. properly; a. of the 
place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl., 
Germ. auf with the dat.) [ Eng. on, ete.], where contin- 
uance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of: ed’ ᾧ (L 
txt. T Tr WH ὅπου) κατέκειτο, Mk. ii. 4; λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ 
[-θον Τ᾿ Tr WH], Mk. xiii. 2; ἐπὶ πίνακι, Mt. xiv. 8, 11; 
Mk. vi. 25; ἐπὶ τοῖς κραββάτοις, Mk. vi. 55; ἀνακλῖναι 
πάντας ἐπὶ τῷ χόρτῳ, Mk. vi. 39; ἐπέκειτο ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, lay 
upon it, Jn. xi. 38; ἐφ᾽ ἵπποις. Rev. xix. 14. b. of the 
place in which (Lat. in with the abl, Germ. auf 
with the ace.), after verbs expressing motion towards 
a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the 
motion, [ Eng. upon, at, ete.] : βάλλειν λίθον ἐπίτινι, dat. of 
pers., Jn. viii. 7 Rec. ; οἰκοδομεῖν, Mt. xvi. 18 ; ἐποικοδομεῖν, 
Eph. ii. 20; ἐπιβάλλειν, Mt. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 36 ἐπιβάλλειν 
ἐπί TL); ἐπιρράπτειν, Mk. ii. 21 (where L T Tr WH have 
ἐπί with acc.); ἐπιπίπτειν, Acts viii. 16. c. of the 
place above which (Lat. super, Germ. über, [ Eng. 
over]): ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which 
Mt. xxvii. 37 ἐπάνω τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ). | d. of the 
place at, or by, or near which: ἐπὶ θύραις and ἐπὶ τῇ 
θύρᾳ, Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Acts v. 9. (and often 
in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1037*; [L. and S. s. v. 
B. I.1a.; cf. A. I. 2 a. above]) ; ἐπὶ τῇ προβατικῇ, Jn. 
v. 2; ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ, Rev. ix. 14; ἐπὶ τῇ oroa, Acts iii. 
11; ew [L T Tr WII παρ᾽] αὐτοῖς ἐπιμεῖναι, Acts xxviii. 
14. 2. Metaph.; a. of that upon which any action, 
effect, condition, rests as a basis or sup port; prop. 
upon the ground of; and α. of that upon which any- 
thing is sustained or upheld: ζῆν ἐπί τινι, to sus- 
tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where L Tr, the sec- 
ond time, ἐν; [cf. W. 389 (364) note]) ; Lk. iv. 4, (Deut. 
viii. 3 for by mm; Plat. Aleib. 1 p. 105 e.; Plut. de 
cup. divit. 7 p. 526 d.; Aleiphr. epp. 3, 7, etc.) ; συνιέναι 
ἐπὶ rois ἄρτοις, to understand by reasoning built upon 
the loaves, Mk. vi. 52 [cf. W. 392 (367) ; B. 337 (290)]. 
B. of that upon which anything rests (our upon): 
em ἐλπίδι [see in ἐλπίς, 2], supported by hope, in hope, 
[cf. W. $51, 2f.], Actsii. 26; Ro. iy. 18; 1 Co. ix. 10, 
[differently in e. below]; to do any thing ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί 
twos, relying upon the name i. e. the authority of any 
one [ef. W. 393 (367) ]: ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί pov, 
appropriating to themselves the name of Messiah, which 
belongs to me, Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in 
which pass. λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ Χριστός is added by 
way of explanation) ; βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ [1, Tr WH ἐν] τῷ 
ὀν. Χριστοῦ, 50 as to repose your hope and confidence in his 
Messianic authority, Acts ii. 38; δέχεσθαί τινα ἐπὶ τῷ dv. 
pov, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted 
to my authority and instruction, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; 
Lk.ix.48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his. 
name being introduced, appeal being made to his authority 
and command : as κηρύσσειν. διδάσκειν, ete., Lk. xxiv. 47; 
Acts iv. 17, 18; v. 28, 40 ; δύναμιν ποιεῖν, δαιμόνια exBar- 
Aew, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [cf. W. 
393(367)], Mk. ix.39; Lk.ix. 49 [WH Tr mrg.év] y. 
of that upon which as a foundation any super- 


επι 


structure is reared: νομοθετεῖσθαι, Heb. vii. 11 (ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτῇ, for which L T Tr WH have ἐπ᾽ αὐτῆς); viii. 6 ; after 
verbs of trusting, believing, hoping, ete.: ἀρκεῖ- 
σθαι ἐπί τινι, 3 Jn. 10 ; παρρησιάζεσθαι, Acts xiv. 35 πεποι- 
θέναι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WH mrg.; Lk. xi. 22; xviii. 
9; Mk. x. 24 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; 2 Co. i. 
9; Heb. ii. 13; πιστεύειν, Lk. xxiv. 25; Ro.ix. 33; x. 11, 
etc. ; ἐλπίζειν (see ἐλπίζω), [cf. C. I. 2g. a. below]. δ. of 
the reason or motive underlying words and deeds, 
so that ἐπί is equiv. to for, on account of, [W. 394 (368); 
B. 337 (290)]: Mt. xix. 9 RG T Tr WH txt.; Lk. v. ὅ 
(ἐπὶ τῷ ῥήματί σου, at thy word, Germ. auf; [ef. W. § 48, 
c. d.; in reliance on]); Acts iii. 16 [WH om.]; iv. 9; 
xi. 19 [L Tr mre. have the gen.] ; xxi. 24; 1 Co. viii. 11 
(ἀπόλλυσθαι ἐπί τινι, Germ. zu Grunde gehen über ete. 
[ef. W. 394 (368) note, but L T Tr WH read £»]) ; Phil. 
iii. 9; after αἰνεῖν, Lk. ii. 20; δοξάζειν, Actsiv.21; 2 Co. 
ix. 13 [cf. W. 381 (357)]; μαρτυρεῖν, Heb. xi. 4; εὐχαρι- 
στεῖν etc. to give thanks for, 1 Co. i. 4; 2 Co. ix. 15; Phil. 
i5; 1 Th.ii.9. ἐφ᾽ à (equiv. to ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ὅτι for that, 
on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Ro. v. 
12 (on the various interpp. of this pass. see Dietzsch, 
Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50 sqq.) ; 2 Co. v. 4 
[ Rec*t ἐπειδή]; Phil. iii. 12, (ἐφ᾽ 6—6 σατανᾶς ---οὐκ ἴσχυσε 
θανατῶσαι αὐτούς. Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 29 p. 138 ed. Otto ; 
ἐφ᾽ à Τεννάδιον ἔγραψεν, for the reason that he had ac- 
cused Gennadius, Synes. ep. 73; οἵ. Hermann ad Vig. 
p. 710; the better Greeks commonly used ἐφ᾽ ots in the 
same sense, cf. W. 394 (368); [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro. 
l. c.; Ellie. on Phil.l. c.]). Used esp. after verbs sig- 
nifying a mental affection or emotion, where we 
also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 
2, p. 1039; Krüger § 68, 41, 6; [cf. W.393 (368) e.]): 


as ἀγαλλιᾶν, Lk. i. 47; χαίρειν, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i. 14; 


xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, ete.; χαρὰ ἔσται, Lk. xv. 7; χαρὰν 
(Ree. χάριν) ἔχω, Philem. 7; παρακαλεῖν, παρακαλεῖσθαι, 
2 Co. 1. 4: vii. 18; 1 Th. iii. τ; κλαίειν, Lk. xix. 41 RG; 
κοπετὸν ποιεῖν, Acts viii. 2; κόπτεσθαι, Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr 
WH txt. the ace.]; ὀδυνᾶσθαι, Acts xx. 38; ὀλολύζειν, 
Jas. v. 1; στυγνάζειν, Mk. x. 22; συλλυπεῖσθαι, Mk. iii. 
5; μετανοεῖν ἐπί, to grieve over, repent of, 2 Co. xii. 21; 
σπλαγχνίζεσθαι, Mt. xiv. 14 GLT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 34 
RG; Lk. vii. 13 [Tdf. the ace.]; μακροθυμεῖν, Mt. xviii. 
26 [Tr the aec.], 29 [L Tr the ace.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see 
μακροθυμέω, 2]; Jas. v. 7 ; ὀργίζεσθαι, Rev. xii. 17 [Lehm. 
om. ἐπί]; ἐκπλήσσεσθαι, Mt. vii. 28; Mk. i. 22; Lk. iv. 32; 
Acts xiii. 12; διαταράσσεσθαι, Lk. i. 29 ; ἐξίστασθαι, Lk. ii. 
41; θαμβεῖσθαι, Mk. x. 24 ; θάμβος, Lk. v.9; Acts iii. 10; 
θαυμάζειν, Mk. xii. 17; Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26; 
Acts iii. 12 ; καυχᾶσθαι, Ro. v. 2; ἐπαισχύνεσθαι, Ro. vi. 21; 
παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν τινὰ ἐπί τινι, Ro. x. 19. — €. of 
the rule, orcondition [W. 394 (368) d.]: ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι, a 
hope being held out or given, Ro. viii. 20; Tit. i. 2, (differ- 
ently in 8. above) ; ἐπὶ duc . . . μάρτυσιν, on condition 
that two witnesses testify to the matter in question, [at 
(the mouth of) two etc. ; cf. W. 392 (367)], Heb. x. 28; 
ἐπὶ νεκροῖς, equiv. ἴο ὄντων νεκρῶν (in the case of the dead), 
if any one has died, Heb. ix. 17. — t. of the purpose 








233 ἐπί 


and end [unto, for; W. 394 (368) e.] : ἐπ᾽ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ; 
to worship and profess his name, Acts xv. 14 Ree. ; καλεῖν 
τινα ἐπί τινι, Lat. ad aliquid, Gal. v. 13; 1 Th. iv. 7, (ἐπὲ 
ξενίᾳ, Xen. an. 7, 6, 3; cf. W. τι. 5.}; κτισθέντες ἐπὶ ἔργοις 
ἀγαθοῖς, Eph. ii. 10; φρονεῖν ἐπί τινι to take thought for 
a thing, Phil. iv. 10; ἐφ᾽ à (by a later Grk. impropriety 
for ἐπὶ τίνι, cf. W. § 24, 4; [B. $139, 59; but on the ex- 
treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of és in direct 
questions, see Pres. T. D. Woolsey in the Bibliotheca 
Sacra for Apr. 1874, p. 314 sqq.]) πάρει; for what pur- 
pose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid [al. quod ] venisti? 
Mt. xxvi. 50 R [but G L T Tr WH ἐφ᾽ 6, see C. I. 2 g. y. 
aa. below] (Theoph. ἐπὶ ποίῳ σκοπῷ; cf. Hdt. 7, 146 
πυθόμενος, ex οἷσι ἦλθον ; [but the view of many ancient 
expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis : 
“that for which thou hast come—do” is thoroughly es- 
tablished by Dr. Woolsey u.s.]). of the issue or unde- 
signed result: λογομαχεῖν ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν dkovóv- 
rov, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; (τοῖς ἐπὶ ὠφελείᾳ πεποιημένοις ἐπὶ βλάβη 
χρῆσθαι, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 19). yy. of the pattern or 
standard [A. V. after; W. 394 (368) f.]: καλεῖν τινα 
ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί Twos, to call one after the name of another, 
Lk. i. 59 (Neh. vii. 63 [W. 410 (382)]) ; ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματί 
twos after the likeness of a thing, Ro. v. 14. b. of that 
over which one is placed, for its care or adminis- 
tration: ἐπὶ τοῖς ὑπάρχουσί τινα καθιστάναι, Lk. xii. 44 
(cf. A. I. 1 d. above, [also C. I. 2 e. below]; Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 474 sq.; Bnhdy. p. 249; [W. 393 (367) a.]). 
c. used of a hostile aim, against (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down, see Passow i. 2 p. 1080"; [cf. L. and S. s. v. 
B. 1.1 ¢.; W. 392 (367) ; B. 337 (290)]) : Lk. xii. 52 sq.; 
θλίψις γενομένη ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ [-vov, L Tr mrg.], Acts xi. 19 
[A. V.about]. d. of that to which anything is added 
(so that it is, as it were, upon it) ; in addition to; over and 
above, [W. 393 (367 sq.) b.]: 2 Co. vii. 13 (L T Tr WH 
ἐπὶ δὲ τῇ παρακλήσει ὑμῶν [but L T Tr WH ἡμῶν] περισ- 
σοτέρως κτλ. but in addition to the comfort given (us) by 
you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly ete. [ A. V. in ete. 
(of condition) ]); κερδαίνειν τι ἐπί τινι, Mt. xxv. 20, 22 
RG; ἔχειν λύπην ἐπὶ λύπῃ, Phil. ii. 27 Rec. (Eur. Iph. T. 
197 φόνος ἐπὶ φόνῳ, Troad. 596 ἐπὶ δ᾽ ἄλγεσιν ἄλγεα. Soph. 
O. C. 544 ἐπὶ νόσῳ νόσον; [cf. Mey. on Phil. l. c.; but 
GLT Tr WH give the ace., see C. I. 2 c. below]) ; προσ- 
τιθέναι ἐπί, Lk. iii. 20; ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις, besides all this, 
Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. T Tr mrg. WH ἐν; see ἐν, I. 5 e. 
p. 211°]; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. T Tr WH ἐν (and there is 
no τούτοις) ; see ev, τι. s.]; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15; 1 
Mace. x. 42; [classic exx. in Wetst. on Lk. 1. 9.7); add also 
Heb. viii. 1 [see Lünem. ad loc.]; ix. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 16. 
e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of 
time) with the principal matter under consideration, (in 
Germ. generally bei, i. e. at, on, ete.) [W. 392 (367)]: 
εὐχαριστῶ τῷ θεῷ μου ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν, at every men- 
tion of you, as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but 
see Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. ad 1., and s. v. πᾶς, I. 2] ; σπέν- 
δομαι ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ. while engaged in (busied over) the 
sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν αἰώνων, Heb. ix. 
26; ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ, ib. 15; σπείρειν and θερίζειν» 


ἐπί 254 ἐπί 


ἐπ᾽ εὐλογίαις, so that blessings attend, i. e. bountifully, 
freely, 2 Co. ix. 6; ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ, 1 Th. iii. 7 ; ἐπὶ τῷ 
παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν while your anger lasts, Eph. iv. 26 ; ἐπὶ 
τούτῳ meanwhile, i.e. while this was going on [(?), upon 
this],Jm.iv.27. f. of the object of anaction,and a. 
where the Germ. uses an, [ Eng. on (nearly i.q. to) ]: πράσ- 
σειν τι ἐπί τινι, Acts v. 35 (like δρᾶν τι ἐπί τινι, Hat. 3, 14; 
Ael. n. an. 11, 11) ; ef. Bnhdy. p. 250 bot.; [but see B. 
337 (290)]; ὃ γέγονεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ, Mk. v. 33 [T Tr WH om. 
Lbr. ἐπί]; ἀναπληροῦσθαι, Mt. xiii. 14 Rec. — f. where 
the Germ. says über, [Eng. upon, of; concerning], after 
verbs of writing, speaking, thinking: γεγραμμένα 
ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, Jn. xii. 16 (HIdt. 1,66) ; προφητεύειν, Rev. x. 11; 
μαρτυρεῖν, xxii. 16 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. [see paprvpéo, 
a.], (δόξα ἐπὶ τῇ εὐσεβείᾳ, an opinion about, on, piety, 4 
Mace. v. 17 (18)). 

C. with the AccusaTIVE [W. $ 49,1.; B. 337 (290) 
sq.]; I of Place; 1. properly; a. of the place 
above, over, which, our up on, on to: after verbs 
signifying motion and continuance, ἐλθεῖν, περιπα- 
τεῖν ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, ib. 
25 LT Tr WH, 26 R G, (πλεῖν ἐπὶ πόντον, Hom. Od. 1, 
183); ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Mt. xv. 35; ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθός 
τινος, Jn. xxi. 205 ἀνακλιθῆναι ἐπὶ τοὺς χόρτους, Mt. xiv. 
19 RG; κατοικεῖν ἐπὶ πᾶν τὸ πρόσωπον (LT Tr WH παν- 
τὸς προσώπου [οἷ. πᾶς, I. 1 ¢.]) τῆς γῆς, Acts xvii. 26; 
καθῆσθαι, Lk. xxi. 35; ἦλθε λιμὸς ἐφ᾽ ὅλην τὴν γῆν, Acts 
vii. 11; σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, Mt. xxvii. 45. 
over i. e. along: εἱστήκει ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλόν, Mt. xiii. 2 [W. 
408 (380); differently in ἃ. below]. b. of motion to 
a place whose surface is oceupied or touched (Germ. 
auf with the ace.), upon, unto, ete. ; after verbs of going, 
coming, ascending, descending, falling, ete.: 
πορεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν ὁδόν, Acts vili. 26; ix. 11; ἐπὶ τὰς 
διεξόδους. Mt. xxii. 9; προέρχεσθαι, Acts xx. 13 [here Tr 
WH mre. zpocépy.]; φεύγειν, Mt. xxiv. 16 (where L Tr 
WH txt. eis) ; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Lk. viii. 27; ἐξιέναι, Acts xxvii. 
433 ἐπιβαίνειν, Mt. xxi. 5; ἀναβαίνειν, Lk. v.19; xix. 4; 
Acts x. 9; Rev. xx. 9; καταβαίνειν, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. 
WH reject the pass.]; Rev. xvi. 21; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Lk. 
xxiii. 33 [L Tr WH ἔρχεσθαι] ; πίπτειν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας, 
Acts x. 253 ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, to fall upon the face, Mt. xvii. 
6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 25; Rev. vii. 11. 
After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, build- 
ing, laying, throwing, ete.: τιθέναι, Mt. v. 15; Lk. 
xi. 33; ἐπιτιθέναι, Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk.xv.5; Acts xv. 10, etc.; 
τιθέναι τὰ yovara,eni, Acts xxi. 5; οἰκοδομεῖν, Mt. vii. 24, 
26; Lk. vi. 49; Ro. xv. 203 ἐποικοδομεῖν, 1 Co. iii. 12; 
θεμελιοῦν, Lk. vi. 48; βάλλειν, Jn. viii. 59; Rev. ii. 24; 
xiv. 16 ; xviii. 19 ; ἐπιβάλλειν, Lk. v. 36 (ἐπιβ. ἐπί τινι, Mt. 
ix. 16) ; ἐπιβάλλειν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπί τινα, Mt. xxvi. 50, ete. 
(see ἐπιβάλλω, 1 a.) ; ἐπιρρίπτειν, Lk. xix. 35 and tropi- 
cally 1 Pet. v. 7; pami¢ew, Mt. v. 39 [L T Tr txt. WH 
els]; τύπτειν, Lk. vi. 29 ['Tdf. eis]; ἀναβιβάζειν, Mt. xiii. 
48 [not Lehm. txt.] ; ἐπιβιβάζειν, Lk. x. 34 ; κατάγειν, Lk. 
v. 11; copevew, Ro. xii. 20; διδόναι, Lk. vii. 44 ; xix. 23; 
Rev. viii. 3; ἀναφέρειν, 1 Pet. ii. 24; κρεμᾶν, Mt. xviii. 6 
[LT Tr WH περί]; γράφειν, Rev. ii. 17; iii. 12; xix. 16; 








ἐπι 


ἐπιγράφειν, Heb. viii. 10. After verbs which include an- 
other verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance 
into, (where Germ. uses auf or über; our on, to, ete.) : 
ἀνατέλλειν, Mt. v. 45; βρέχειν, ibid. ; mvéew, Rev. vii. 1 
(here we see the difference betw. ἐπί with the gen. to 
blow over a thing, Germ. über, and ἐπί with the ace. to 
blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it, Germ. einen 
anwehen, wehend auf einen kommen); [apparently nearly 
the same view of the distinction betw. the cases is taken 
by 'Phierseh $274, 6; Hermann on Eur. Alcest. 845. 
But Krüger (8$ 68, 40, 3), Kuühner (ii. § 438, I. 1 b.), al., 
regard é. with the ace. as denoting merely movement 
towards a place, while é. with the gen. involves the idea 
of actual or intended arrival; cf. L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1. 
Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially 
synonymous: e.g. Bitm. Gram. § 147 (p. 417 Eng. 
trans.); Matthiae $ 584; Passow p. 1034^; —esp. in 
the N. T., see W. 409 sq. (382) ; 408 (381) note; B. 338 
(291). On the variations of case with this prep. in the 
Rev. ef. Alford on iv. 2]; διασωθῆναι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Acts 
xxvii.44. c. It is used of persons over whom anything 
is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them, 
(Germ. über with the dat.) [ W. 408 (381) note]: ὀνομά- 
(ew τὸ ὄνομα ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπί τινα, to name the name of Jesus 
(as a spell, a magie formula) over one, sc. that help 
may come to him from that name, Acts xix. 13; mpoo- 
εύχεσθαι ἐπί τινα, Jas. v. 14. d. As eis (q. v. C. 2 p. 
186"), so ἐπί also stands after verbs of rest and con- 
tinuance [B. 337 (290) sq.; W. § 49, 1. 1]: καθεύδειν 
ἐπί τι, Mk. iv. 38; στῆναι, Rev. xi. 11; σταθῆναι ἐπί τι, 
Rev. xii. 18 (xiii. 1); ἑστηκέναι, Jn. xxi. 4 (ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλόν 
LT Tr mrg. WH mrg.; otherwise where many are 
spoken of; see a. fin. above); Rev. xiv. 1; καθῆσθαι, 
Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [Rec. dat.]; xi. 16; xiv. 
14, 16 [L T Tr WH txt. gen.]: xvii. 3; xix. 11; κεκα- 
θικέναι, καθίσαι, Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 80; Jn. xii. 14; 
Rev. xx. 4; καθίσεσθαι, Mt. xix. 28; σκηνοῦν, Rev. vii. 
15; κεῖσθαι, 2 Co. iii. 15 ; κατακεῖσθαι, Lk. v. 25 'T Tr 
WII; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, to be together, assembled, in 
the same place: Lk. xvii. 35; Actsi. 15; ii. 1, 44, — 
to come together, of sexual intercourse, 1 Co. vii. 5 GL 
T Tr WH; συνελθεῖν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό have convened, come 
together, to the same place, 1 Co. xiv. 23 [L txt. ἐλθεῖν] ; 
simply ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό se. ὄντες, together, Acts iii. 1 [but LT 
Tr WH (so R. V.) connect ἐπὶ v. a. here with ii. 47]; 2 S. 
ii. 13 [ef. B. 338 (291)]. 6. used of motion or arrival 
into the vicinity of a place (not to the place itself) ; 
near; to, as far as; (Germ.an, bei, zu, hin. . . zu) : ἐπὶ τὸ 
μνημεῖον [or μνῆμα], Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 12 [L Tr br. T 
om. WH reject the vs.], 22, 24; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, Acts 
xxi. 35 ; ἔρχεσθαι ἐπί τι ὕδωρ, Acts vili. 305 ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην, 
Acts xii. 10; ἐπιστῆναι ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα, Acts x. 17; κατα- 
βαίνειν ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν; Jn. vi. 16, οἴο., ete. ; with the ace. 
of a pers. to, near to one: Jn. xix. 33; Acts xxv. 12; 2 Th. 
i1; Rey. xvi. 14; esp. to judges, kings, ete., i. q. to their 
tribunal: Mt. χ. 18; Lk. xii. 58; xxi. 12; xxiii. 1; Acts 
ix. 21; xvi. 19. alsoin pregn. constr. after verbs of sit- 
ting, standing, etc.: καθῆσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον, Mt. ix. 


> , 
επι 


9; Mk. ii. 14; ἑστηκέναι ἐπί, Rev. iii. 20; xv. 2; ἐπιστῆναι 
ἐπί, Acts x. 17; xi. 113 ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν on the right hand, 
Rev.v.1l. f. of mere direction towardsa terminus 
(so that the terminus itself is not reached) : πορεύεσθαι ἐπὶ 
τὸ ἀπολωλός, to recover it (where we say afler), Lk. xv. 
4; ἐκτείνειν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπί, against one, to take him, Lk. 
xxii. 53; towards one, in pointing him out, Mt. xii. 49; 
ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐπὶ λῃστήν, to take a robber, Mt. xxvi. 55; 
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52, cf. Lk. xiv. 31. 2. It is 
used metaphorically, a. with the ace. of a pers. after 
verbs of coming, falling, bringing, ete. a. of 
evils befalling (falling *upon?) one, and of pert ur- 
bations coming upon the mind: τὸ αἷμά τινος (the 
penalty for slaying him) ἥκει or ἔρχεται ἐπίτινα, Mt. xxiii. 
35 sq.; xxvii. 25; ἐπάγειν τὸ αἷμά τινος ἐπί twa, Acts v. 
28 ; ἔρχεσθαι and ἥκειν ἐπί twa, of other evils, Jn. xviii. 
4; Eph. v. 6; Rev. iii. 3; after γίνεσθαι, Lk. i. 65 ; iv. 
36; Acts v. 5; ἐπέρχεσθαι [ἐπεισέρχ. LT Tr WH], Lk. 
xxi. 35; ἐπιπίπτειν, Lk. i. 12; Acts xiii. 11[LT Tr WH 
πίπτειν]; xix.17[L Tr πίπτειν] ; Ro. xv. 3 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. 
(Ixix.) 10); Rev. xi. 11 [Ree. πίπτειν] ; ἐπιστῆναι, Lk. 
xxi. 34. f. of blessings coming upon one: after ἔρχεσθαι, 
Mt. x. 18; ἐπιπίπτειν, of a trance, Acts x. 10 [L T Tr 
WH γίνεσθαι] ; ἐπισκηνοῦν, 2 Co. xii. 9; ἔφθασεν and 
ἤγγικεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς (upon you sc. fr. heaven, [cf. W. 407 
(380) note]) ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. x. 9; 
xi. 20. the Holy Spirit is said at one time ἐπί τινα 
ἐκχεῖσθαι, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45; Tit. iii. 6; at another, 
ἀποστέλλεσθαι [or ἐξαποστέλ. T Tr WH], Lk. xxiv. 49; 
again, ἐπέρχεσθαι, Acts i. 8; once more, καταβαίνειν, Mk. 
i. 10 [Ltxt. T Tr WH eis]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. 1. 88; ἔπεσεν 
ὁ κλῆρος ἐπί τινα, Acts i. 26; after words of rest and 
continuance : χάρις ἢν ἐπί twa, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; 
ἐπαναπαύεσθαι, Lk. x. 65 the Holy Spirit issaid at one 
time ἐπί τινα μένειν, descending upon one to remain on 
him, Jn. i. 32 sq. [B. 338 (291) ]; and again ἀναπαύεσθαι, 
1 Pet. iv. 14. b. of one upon whom anything is im- 
posed, as a burden, office, duty, ete.: τὴν μέριμναν ἐπιρ- 
ρίπτειν ἐπὶ θεόν, 1 Pet. v. 7; συντελεῖν διαθήκην ἐπί τινα, to 
put a covenant upon one, to be kept by him, Heb. viii. 8, 
(in Ps. Ixxxii. (IxxxiiL) 6 "8 5y mga nD istomake a 
covenant against one). c. of that to which anything is 
added, [Eng. upon (nearly i. q. after)]: λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, 
Phil. ii. 27 GL Τ Tr WH (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 27; Ezek. 
vii. 26 ; [esp. Is. xxviii. 10, 13; cf. Lat. super in Liv. 1, 
50; 22, 54 etc.]; see above, B. 2 d.) ; [so some take 
οἶκος ἐπ᾽ οἶκον, Lk. xi. 17, B. 338 (291) ; see οἶκος, 2]; ἐπι- 
καλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί τινα (see ἐπικαλέω, 2 [and B. 338 (291)]), 
to call (put) a name upon one, Acts xv. 17; Jas. ii. 7. 
d. of the number or degree reached; Lat. usque ad 
[W. $49, l. 3 a.]: ἐπὶ σταδίους δώδεκα, Rev. xxi. 16 [R* 
T Tr WH txt. gen.] (Xen. mem. 1, 4, 17; an. 1, 7, 15; 
Polyb. 3, 54, 7; Song of the Three 23); ἐπὶ τρίς, Vulg. 
per ter, for three times, thrice: Acts x. 16; xi. 10 (so eis 
τρίς, Hdt. 1, 86; Xen. an. 6, 4, 16. 19; Cyr. 7, 1, 4 etc. 
[cf. W. 422 (394)]) ; ἐπὶ πλεῖον more widely, to a greater 
degree, further, the more, [differently below, II. 1]: Aets 
iv. 17; [xx. 9 WH mrg.]; 2 Tim. ii. 16; iii. 9; ἐφ᾽ 


235 








er 
ἐπι 


ὅσον, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, [differently II. 1 be- 
low]: Mt. xxv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13. e. of care, pow- 
er, control over anything, (Germ. über with the acc.) 
[W. § 49,1. 3 b.], (cf. above, A. I. 1 d. and B. 2 b.): Ba- 
σιλεύειν ἐπί τινα (Hebr. Oy oU»), Lk.i.33; xix. 14, 27; 
Ro. v. 14 ; ἡγούμενον em Αἴγυπτον, Acts vii. 10; καθίστημι, 
Heb. ii. 7 R [ (fr. Ps. viii. 7), L Tr WH br.]; ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον 
αὐτοῦ sc. ἐστί, Heb. iii. 6 ; ἱερέα μέγαν ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ 
sc. καθεστηκότα, Heb. x. 21; καθιστάναι δικαστὴν ἐπί, Lk. 
xii. 14 (ἄρχοντα, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 fin.) ; ἐξουσία, Lk. x. 19; 
Rev. vi. 8; xvi. 9; xxii. 14; φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, Lk. ii. 8 ; 
of usurped dignity : ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐπὶ πάντα λεγόμενον θεόν, 
2 Th. ii. 4 cf. Dan. xi. 36 sq. [4]. refer the use in Th. l. c. to 
δ. γι BB. below]. Akin to this is the expression πιστὸς ἐπί 
τι (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things 
intrusted toits care), Mt. xxv.21. f. ofthe end which 
the mind reaches or to which it is led; Lat. ad, to, 
unto: ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐπί τινα, esp. to God, 
Lk.i.17; Acts ix. 35; xi. 21; xiv. 15; xxvi. 20; Gal. iv. 
9; 1 Pet.ii.25. 6. of direction towards a person 
orathing; 4. after verbs of trusting and hoping, 
(Germ. auf, upon; see above, B.2 a. y.) : after ἐλπίζειν, 
1 Pet.i.13; iii. 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.) ; 
πιστεύειν, Acts ix. 42; xi. 17; xvi.31; xxii. 19; Ro. iv. 
24; πίστις, Heb. vi. 15; πεποιθέναι, Mt. xxvii. 43 (where 
L txt. WH mrg. ἐπί with dat.). 8. of the feelings, 
affections, emotions, Germ. über, over: kómropat, 
Rev. i. 7; xviii. 9 [RG L WH mrg. w. dat.]; κλαίω, Lk. 
xxiii. 28; Rev. xviii. 9; εὐφραίνεσθαι, Rev. xviii. 20 [GL 
T Tr WH w.dat.]. unto, towards, Lat. erga: σπλαγχνί- 
Gopa, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ix. 22; [μακροθυμέω, Mt. 
xviii. 26 Tr, 29 L Tr]; χρηστός, Lk. vi. 35; χρηστότης, Ro. 
xi 22; Eph.ii.7. «y. of the direction of the will and 
action; aa. of purpose and end [ W. § 49,1. 3d.] : ἐπὶ 
τὸ βάπτισμα αὐτοῦ, to receive his baptism, Mt. iii. 7; 
θεωρίαν ταύτην, Lk. xxiii. 48; ἐφ᾽ ὃ πάρει, Mt. xxvi. 50 G L 
T Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. €.) ; where aim and result 
coalesce: ἐπὶ τὸ συμφέρον, Heb. xii. 10. — f. of things 
done with hostility; against: after ἀποτομία, Ro. xi. 
22; ἀναστῆναι, Mk. iii. 26; ἐγείρεσθαι, Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk. 
xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 10 ; ἐπεγείρειν διωγμόν, Acts xiii, 505 μερι- 
σθῆναι, Mt. xii. 26; Mk. iii. 24 sq. ; ἐπαίρειν τι ἐπί, Jn. 


9 
€zt 


xiii. 18 ; ndprvp, 2 Co. i. 22; μαρτύριον, Lk. ix. 5; ἀσχη- 
poveiv, 1 Co. vii. 36 (ets τινα, Dion.Hal. 2, 26) ; μοιχᾶσθαι, 
Mk. x. 11; τολμᾶν, 2 Co. x. 2; βρύχειν ὀδόντας, Acts vii. 
54. yy. of that to which one refers in writing or 
speaking [cf. W. $ 49,1. 3 d.]: after λέγειν. Heb. vii. 
13; ὁ οὖν pakapicpos . . . ἀκροβυστίαν, sc. λέγεται [W. 
587 (546), cf. B. 394 (338) ], Ro. iv. 9; προφητεία, 1 Tim. 
1. 18; on Mk. ix. 12 sq. see γράφω, 2 c. — $5. upon i. e. 
in reference to; for: after βάλλειν κλῆρον, Mk. xv. 24; 
Jn. xix. 24; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 686 [who com- 
pares Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19, and remarks that an Attic 
writ. would have said ἐπί reve]. II. of Time [W. 
$49,1.2]; 1. of time during or for [‘for the space οἵ ἢ 
which (Germ. auf, wührend): ἐπὶ ἔτη τρία, Lk. iv. 25 
[R GT WH mrg.]; ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους, Acts xiii. 31 ; add 
also xvi. 18; xvii. 2; xviii. 20; xix. 10; Heb. xi. 30, etc., 


ἐπιβαίνω 


and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. 
p. 1044, [L. and S. s. v. C. IL.] ; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον χρόνον for so 
long time as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; and 
simply ἐφ᾽ ὅσον as long as [differently in I. 2 d. above], 
Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13; ἐφ᾽ ikavovlong enough, for a con- 
siderable time, Acts xx. 11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον somewhat long, 
too long [differently in I. 2 d. above]: Acts xx. 9 [not 
WH mre. see u. s.]; xxiv. 4. 2. about, towards, 
(Germ. gegen): ἐπὶ τὴν αὔριον on the morrow, Lk. x. 35; 
Acts iv. 5; ἐπὶ τὴν ὥραν τῆς προσευχῆς, Acts iii. 1; ἐπὶ 
τὸ πρωΐ, Mk. xv. 1 [R G]; rarely so in Grk. writ., as 
Arr. exp. Al. 3, 18, 11 (7) ἐπὶ [al. ὑπὸ] τὴν ἕω. 

D. In Composition ἐπί denotes 1. continuance, 
rest, influence upon or over any person or thing: ἐπί- 
yetos, ἐπουράνιος, ἐπιδημέω. ἐπαναπαύομαι, etc. 2. mo- 
tion, approach, direction towards or to anything: ἐπα- 
κούω, emtBoaw, ἐπιβλέπω. ἐπεκτείνω, ete. 3. imposi- 
tion: ἐπικαθίζω. ἐπιτίθημι, ἐπιβιβάζω, émiBapéo, ἐπιγράφω, 
ἐπιρρίπτω. ἐπιτάσσω, etc. 4. accumulation, increase, 
addition: ἐπεισαγωγή, ἐπισυνάγω, ἐπισωρεύω, ἐπικαλέω 
(by acognomen), οἷον 5. repetition: ἐπαιτέω. ἐπαναμι- 
μνήσκω. ete. 6. τιρ, upward: ἐπαίρω. ἐπανάγω. ἐπαφρίζω. 
ete. 7. against: ἐπιβουλή, ἐπανίστημι. ἐπίορκος, ἐπι- 
ορκέω. etc. 8. superintendence: ἐπιστάτης. 

ém-Balvw; 2 aor. ἐπέβην : pf. ptep. ἐπιβεβηκώς; HS 
to get upon, mount: ἐπί τι, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 1, 
ete.; Gen. xxiv. 61); τῷ πλοίῳ [to embark in], Acts 
xxvii. 2 (Thue. 7, 70); eis τὸ πλοῖον, Acts xxi. 6 RG; 
used without a case, of going aboard (a ship), Acts xxi. 
2; to go up: eis Ἱεροσόλ. Acts xxi. 4 L T Tr WH, [yet 
al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter: eis with 
the acc. of place, Aets xx. 18; with the dat. of place 
(as also in Grk. writ.), Acts xxv. 1.* 

ἐπι-βάλλω ; impf. ἐπέβαλλον ; fut. ἐπιβαλῶ ; 2 aor. ézé- 
BaXov, [3 pers. plur.-Aav, Acts xxi. 27 T Tr WH; Mk. xiv. 
46 TWH,(seeamépxonpaninit.)]; 1. Transitively, a. 
to cast upon: τινὶ βρόχον, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; τινὶ rà ἱμάτια, Mk. 
xi. 7; [χοῦν ἐπὶ tas κεφ. Rev. xviii. 19 WH mrg.]; to lay 
upon, ἐπί τινα τὴν χεῖρα or Tas χεῖρας, used of seizing one 
to lead him off asa prisoner: Mt. xxvi. 50; Mk. xiv.46 
RGL; Lk. xx. 19; xxi.12; Jn. vii. 30 [L mrg. ἔβαλεν], 
44 (L Tr WH the simple βάλλειν) ; Acts v. 18; xxi. 27, 
(for the Hebr. "3 ow v n^v, Gen. xxii. 12); also ras 
χεῖράς τινι, Mk. xiv. 46 T Tr WH; Acts iv. 3, (Polyb. 3, 
2,8; 5,5; Leian. Tim. 4) ; ἐπιβάλλειν τὰς χεῖρας foll. by 
the inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xii. 1; τὴν χεῖρα 
ἐπ᾽ ἄροτρον. to put the hand to the plough (to begin 
work), Lk. ix. 62. b. to put (i.e. sew) on: ἐπίβλημα 
ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36 ; ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ, Mt. ix. 16. 2. In- 
trans. (asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, [cf. W. 251 (236) ; 
B. 144 (126) sq.]) to throw one's self upon, rush upon: 
εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, of waves rushing into a ship, Mk. iv. 37 ; to 
put one's mind upon a thing, attend to, with the' dat. of 
the thing: τούτῳ yap ἐπιβάλλων for if you think thereon, 
Antonin. 10, 30; μηδενὶ yap ἐπιβάλλειν μηδετέραν (i. e. 
τὴν αἴσθησιν καὶ τὴν νόησιν) χωρὶς τοῦ προσπίπτοντος εἰδώ- 
Xov, Plut. plac. phil. 4, 8; absol. ἐπιβαλών, sc. τῷ ῥήματι 
τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, when he had considered the utterance of 


256 














ἐπίγειος 


Jesus, Mk. xiv. 72; ef. Kypke, [Wetst., McClellan] ad 
loc.; B. 145 (127); [and for the diff. interpp. see Mey. 
and esp. Morison ad loc. ]. 3. Impersonally, ἐπιβάλλει 
μοι it belongs to me, falls to my share: τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (sc. 
pot) μέρος τῆς οὐσίας. Lk. xv. 12 (κτημάτων τὸ ἐπιβάλλον, 
Hdt. 4, 115; τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτοῖς μέρος, Diod. 14, 17, and 
the like often in other writ. [see Meyer; σοὶ ἐπιβάλλει ἡ 
κληρονομία, Tob. vi. 12 (ef. iii. 17; 1 Mace. x. 30, ete.) ]).* 

ἐπι-βαρέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἐπιβαρῆσαι : to put a burden 
upon, to load, [ οἵ. ἐπί. D. 3]; trop. to be burdensome ; so in 
the N. T.: τινά, 1 Th.ii.9; 2 Th. iii. 8; absol. tva μὴ ἐπι- 
Bape * that I press not too heavily ’ i. e. lest I give pain by 
too severe language, 2 Co. ii. 5. (Dion. Hal., Appian.) * 

ἐπι-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ἐπεβίβασα: to cause to mount; to 
place upon, (cf. ἐπί, D. 3]: τινὰ or τὶ ἐπί τι, Lk. x. 34; 
xix. 35; Acts xxiii. 24. (Thue., Plat., Diod., al.; Sept. 
several times for 259.) ἢ 

ἔπι-βλέπω: 1 aor. ἐπέβλεψα; in the Sept. often for 
wan and 733, also for AN; to turn the eyes upon, to 
look upon, gaze upon, (ἐπί upon [cf. ἐπί, D. 2]) : ἐπί τινα, 
contextually, to look upon one with a feeling of admira- 
tion and respect, to look up to, regard, Jas. ii. 3; contextu- 
ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid, i. q. 
to have regard for, to regard, Lk. ix. 38 (where for émi- 
βλεψον [RL] and ἐπίβλεψαι [G T ] write [with Tr WH] 
ἐπιβλέψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. ; ef. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc., 
and above in δέομαι. 3 a., [also D. 273 (234) note]) ; ἐπὶ 
τὴν ταπείνωσίν twos, Lk. i. 48; often in the O. T. in the 
same sense, as 1 S. i. 11; ix. 16; Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 16; 
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 17; Tob.iii.3,ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph. 
and Plato down, both lit. and fig.) * 

ἐπί-βλημα, -τος, τό, (ἐπιβάλλω), that which is thrown or 
put upon a thing, or that which is added to it ; an addition ; 
spec. that which is sewed on to cover a rent, a patch ; Vulg. 
assumentum [(also commissura)], (i.q. ἐπίρραμα) : Mt. 
ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; Lk. v. 36. [Sept., Plut., Arr.]* 

ἐπι-βοάω, -à; lo cry out to [cf. ἐπί, D. 2], ery out: foll. 
by aec. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 RG, [but L T Tr WH 
Bode, q. v. 2, and fin. From Hom., Hdt. down].* 

ἐπι-βουλή, -ῆς, ἡ, α plan formed against one [cf. ἐπί, D. 
7], a plot: Acts ix. 24; γίνεταί τινι ἐπιβουλὴ ὑπό τινος, 
Acts xx. 3; εἴς τινα, Acts xxiii. 30; plur. Acts xx. 19. 
(From [Hdt.], Thue. down.) * 

ἐπι-γαμβρεύω : fut. ἐπιγαμβρεύσω ; to be related to by 

marriage, enter into affinity with; 1. Sept. for JW? to 
become any one’s father-in-law or son-in-law: τινί, Gen. 
xxxiv. 9; 1 S. xviii. 22sqq.; 2 Chr. xviii. 1; 2 Esdr. ix. 
14; 1 Macc. x. 54, 56. 2. τινά. for D3^, to marry the 
widow of a brother who has died childless: Gen. xxxviii. 
8; Mt. xxii. 24, where allusion is made to the levirate 
law recorded in Deut. xxv. 5-10; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. 
Leviratsehe; [BB. DD. s. v. Marriage]. (Not found in 
native Grk. auth. [exe. schol. ad Eur. Or. 574 sqq.; cf. 
W. 26].)* 

ἐπί:γειος, -ov, (ἐπί and γῆ). existing upon the earth, 
earthly, terrestrial: οἰκία, the house we live in on earth, 
spoken of the body with which we are clothed in this 
world, 2 Co. v. 1; σώματα ἐπίγεια, opp. to ἐπουράνια, 1 


ἐπιγίνομαι 


Co. xv. 40; absolutely, of ἐπίγειοι (opp. to οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 
and οἱ καταχθόνιοι). those who are on earth, the inhabit- 
ants of the earth, men, Phil. ii. 10; τὰ ἐπίγεια, things 
done on earth, spoken of the new birth wrought by the 
. Holy Spirit, Jn. iii. 12; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. 
p. 212 sq.; rà ἐπίγεια φρονεῖν, to set the mind on the 
pleasures and good things of earth, Phil. iii. 19; σοφία 
ἐπίγειος (opp. to 7 ἄνωθεν κατερχομένη), the wisdom of 
man, liable to error and misleading, Jas.iii. 15. (From 
Plato down; nowhere in the O. T.) * 
ἐπι-γίνομαι : 2 aor. ἐπεγενόμην ; 1. to become or 
happen afterwards; to be born after. 2. to come to, 
arrive: of time, τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐπεγένετο. Acts 
xxvii. 27 L [ed. ster.], T [edd. 2, 7]; (ἔαρος ἐπιγίγνεται 
ὥρη. Hom. Il. 6, 148). 3. to arise, spring up, come on: 
ἐπιγενομένου νότου, a south wind having sprung up, Acts 
xxviii. 13; (Thue. 3, 74; 4, 30).* 
ἐπι-γινώσκω; [impf. ézeyiveokov] ; fut. ἐπιγνώσομαι ; 2 
aor. ἐπέγνων ; pf. éméyveka; [Pass., pres. ἐπιγινώσκομαι ; 
1 aor. ἐπεγνώσθην); (ἐπί denotes mental direction tow- 
ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept. 
chiefly for yt and 3), v 3; 1. to become thorough- 
ly acquainted with, to know thoroughly; to know accu- 
rately, know well, [see reff. s. v. ἐπίγνωσις, init.]: 1 Co. 
xiii. 12 (where γινώσκω ἐκ μέρους and ἐπιγιν. i. e. to know 
thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [W. 
§ 39, 3 N.2]); with an ace. of the thing, Lk. i. 4; 2 Co. i. 


13; τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, Col. i. 6 ; τὴν ἀλήθειαν, 1 Tim. iv. 3;- 


τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [ef. B. 305 (262)]; 
τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. i. 32; τὶ foll. by ὅτε (by the fa- 
miliar attraction [W. 626 (581); B. 376 (322); some 
bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge ]), 
1 Co. xiv. 37; τινά, one's character, will, deeds, deserts, 
etc., 1 Co. xvi. 18; 2 Co.i. 14; [pass. opp. to ἀγνοούμενοι, 
2 Co. vi. 9]; τινὰ ἀπό τινος (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20 
[Lchm. ἐκ] (“a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cogno- 
scere," for the more common ez, Caes. b. v. 1, 22, 2 [cf. B. 
324 (278sq.); W. 372 (348)]) ; by attraction τινά, ὅτι 
etc. 2 Co. xiii. 5; ἐπιγινώσκει τὸν υἱόν, τὸν πατέρα, Mt. xi. 
21. 2. univ. io know; a. to recognize: τινά, i. e. by 
sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person 
is, Mt. xiv. 35 ; Mk. vi. 54; Lk. xxiv. 16,31; Mk. vi. 33 
[R T, but G WH mrz. without the accus.]; by attrac- 
tion, τινά, ὅτι, Acts iii. 10; iv. 13; τινά, his rank and 
authority, Mt. xvii. 12; with aec. of the thing, to recog- 
nize a thing to be what it really is: τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ Πέτρου. 
Acts xii. 145; τὴν γῆν, Acts xxvii. 39. — b. to know i. q. 
to perceive: τί, Lk. v. 22; ἐν ἑαυτῷ. foll. by acc. of the 
thing with a ptep. [B. 301 (258)], Mk. v. 30; foll. by ὅτι, 
Lk. i. 22; rà πνεύματι foll.by ὅτι. Mk.ii.8. c. to know 
i.e. to find out, ascertain: sc. αὐτό, Acts ix. 30 ; foll. by 
ὅτι, Lk. vii. 37; xxiii. 7; Acts xix. 34 ; xxii. 29 ; xxiv. 11 
LT Tr WH; xxviii. 1; ri, foll. by an indirect quest., 
Acts xxiii. 28 L T Tr WH; [60 ἣν αἰτίαν ete. Acts xxii. 
24]; mapa τινος (gen. of pers.) περί twos (gen. of thing), 
Acts xxiv. 8. d. to know i. e. to understand : Acts xxv. 
10. [From Hom. down.]* 

énl-yvwors, -ews, 7. (ἐπιγινώσκω, q. v. [ cf. also Bp. Lehtft. 


237 








ἐπιδημέω 


on Col. i. 9; Trench $Ixxv. ad fin.]), precise and cor- 
rect knowledge; used in the N. T. of the knowledge of 
things ethical and divine: absol, Phil.i.9; Col. iii. 10; 
kar’ ἐπίγνωσιν, Ro. x. 2; with gen. of the thing known, 
Col. i. 9; ii. 2; Philem. 6; τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 
Tim. ii. 25; iii. 7; Tit. i 1; Heb. x. 26; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, 
Ro. iii. 20; with gen. of the person known ;— of God, 
esp. the knowledge of his holy will and of the blessings 
which he has bestowed and constantly bestows on men 
through Christ: Eph. i. 17; Col.i.10; 2 Pet.i.2; of 
Christ, i.e. the true knowledge of Christ's nature, dig- 
nity, benefits: Eph. iv. 13; 2 Pet. i. 8; ii. 20; of God 
and Christ : 2 Pet. i. 2; θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει; i. e. to keep 
the knowledge of the one true God which has illumined 
the soul, Ro. i. 28. (Polyb., Plut., Hdian., [al.]; Sept. 
occasionally for nyt; 2 Mace. ix. 11.) * 

ἐπι-γραφή, -5s, 7, (ἐπιγράφω), an inscription, title: in 
the N. T. of an inscription in black letters upon a - 
whitened tablet [ B. D. s. v. Cross], Lk. xxiii. 38; with 
the gen. τῆς αἰτίας, i. e. of the accusation, Mk. xv. 26, 
(γράμματα τὴν αἰτίαν τῆς θανατώσεως αὐτοῦ δηλοῦντα, Dio 
Cass. 54, 3; cf. Sueton. Calig. 32; Domit. 10); of the 
inscription on a coin : Mt. xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx. 
24. (From Thuc. down.) * 

ἐπι-γράφω : fut. ἐπιγράψω ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐπιγεγραμ- 
μένος ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπεγέγραπτο; to write upon, in- 
scribe: ἐπιγραφήν, Mk. xv. 26 and L Tr br. in Lk. xxiii. 
38; ὀνόματα, Rev. xxi. 12; ἔν τινι, Acts xvii. 23; fig. to 
write upon the mind, i. e. to fix indelibly upon it, cause 
to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it : 
νόμους ἐπὶ καρδίας [-δίαν T WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; ἐπὶ 
τῶν διανοιῶν, Heb. x. 16 RG, ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν, ibid. L T 
Tr WH, (τοὺς λόγους ἐπὶ τὸ πλάτος τῆς καρδίας, Prov. 
vii. 3). [From Hom. down.]* 

ἐπι-δείκνυμι ; 1 aor. ἐπέδειξα ; [pres. mid. ἐπιδείκνυμαι] ; 
to exhibit, show, [as though for ex position or exami- 
nation (Schmidt ch. 127, 5); fr. Pind., Hdt. down.]; 
a. to bring forth to view: τί, Mt. xxii. 19; and Lk. xx. 24 
Rec.; τί τινι, Lk. xxiv. 40 RG; ἑαυτόν τινι, Lk. xvii. 14 ; 
to show i. e. bid to look at, ri τινι, Mt. xxiv. 1; to show 
i. e. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked 
at: σημεῖον, Mt. xvi. 1; Mid. with ace. of the thing, to 
display something belonging to one’s self: χιτῶνας, the 
tunics as their own, Acts ix. 39 [see Meyer]. b. to prove, 
demonstrate, set forth to be known and acknowledged: 
Heb. vi. 17; foll. by the ace. and inf. Acts xviii. 28.* 

ἐπι-δέχομαι ; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to receive hospi- 
tably: twa, 3 Jn. 10 (Polyb. 22, 1, 3). 2. to admit, i. e. 
not to reject: twa, one's authority, 3 Jn. 9 (robs λόγους, 
1 Mace. x. 46; παιδείαν, Sir. li. 26). [Cf. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

ἐπιδημέω. -@; (ἐπίδημος) ; 1. to be present among 
one's people, in one’s city or in one’s native land, [cf. ἐπί, 
D. 17, (Thue., Plato, al.; opp. to ἀποδημεῖν, Xen. Cyr. 
7,5, 69 ; ἐπιδημεῖν ἐν τῷδε τῷ βίῳ, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 12 
[p. 88 ed. Otto]). 2. to be a sojourner, a foreign resi- 
dent, among any people, in any country: Acts ii. 10; of 
ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι, Acts xvii. 21; (Xen., Plato, Theophr., 
Leian., Aelian, al.).* 


ἐπιδιατάσσομαι 


ἐπι-δια-τάσσομαι ; to ordain besides, to add something to 
what has been ordained, [cf. ἐπί, D. 4]: Gal. iii.15. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

ἐπι-δίδωμι : 3 pers. sing. impf. ἐπεδίδου ; fut. ἐπιδώσω ; 
1 aor. ἐπέδωκα; 2 aor. ptep. plur. emdovres; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐπεδόθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to give over; 1. to hand, 
give by handing: τινί τι, Mt. vii. 9 sq.; Lk. xi. 11 sq. ; 
xxiv. 30, 42; Jn. xiii. 26 [R G L]; Acts xv. 30; pass. 
Lk. iv. 17. 2. to give over, i. e. give up to the power or 
will of one (Germ. preisgeben) : Acts xxvii. 15 (sc. ἑαυτούς 
or τὸ πλοῖον τῷ ἀνέμῳ." 

ἔπι-δι-ορθόω (see διόρθωσις) : to set in order besides or 
further (what still remains to be set in order, [cf. ἐπί, D. 
47}: Tit. i. 5, where, for the common reading ἐπιδιορθώσῃ 
(1 aor. mid. subjunc.), Lchm. has adopted ἐπιδιορθώσῃς 
(1 aor. act. subjunc.). Found also in inscriptions 
(Boeckh ii. 409, 9), and in eccl. writ.* 

ἐπι-δύω ; 10 go down, set (of the sun): Eph. iv. 26, on 
which see ἐπί, B. 2 e. (Deut. xxiv. 17 (15); Jer. xv. 9; 
[Philo de spec. legg. 28]; and with tmesis, Hom. Il. 2, 
413.)* 

ἐπιείκεια [WHI -κία, see I, c], -as, 75 (ἐπιεικής, q: V-), 
mildness, gentleness, fairness, [sweet reasonableness’ 
(Matthew Arnold)]: Acts xxiv. 4; joined with πραότης 
[q. v.], 2 Co. x. 1; Plut. Pericl. 39; with φιλανθρωπία, 
Polyb. 1, 14, 4; Philo, vit. Moys. i. $ 36 ; with χρηστότης, 
Hdian. 5,1, 12 [6 ed. Bekk.]. Cf. Plato, defin. p. 412 b.; 
Aristot.eth. Nic. 5, 10. (Bar.ii. 27; Sap. ii. 19 ; xii. 18; 
2 Macc. ii. 22; 3 Macc. iii. 15.) * 

[SYN. ἐπιείκεια, πραότης: “mp. magis ad animum, 
ἐπι. vero magis ad exteriorem conversationem pertinet" 
(Estius on 2 Co. x. 1). “xp. virtus magis absoluta; ἐπι. 
magis refertur ad alios" (Bengel, ibid.). See at length 
Trench § xliii.] 

ἐπιεικής, -€s, (εἰκός, what is reasonable) ; 1. seemly, 
suitable, (fr. Hom. down). 2. equitable, fair, mild, 
gentle : 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. iii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Jas. iii. 17. 
Neut. τὸ ἐπιεικὲς (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down) 
ὑμῶν i.q. ἡ ἐπιείκεια ὑμῶν, Phil. iv. 5. 
fin.]* 

ἐπι-ζητέω, -0; impf. ἐπεζήτουν ; 1 aor. ἐπεζήτησα ; fr. 
Hdt. down ; Sept. for $3 and in 1 S. xx. 1; Eccl. vii. 29 
(28) for Up; to inquire for, seek for, search for, seek 
diligently, (Germ. herbeisuchen [the émt- seems to be di- 
rective rather than intensive]) : τινά, Lk. iv. 42 (for Rec. 
ἐζήτουν) ; Acts xii. 19; i. q. to desire, wish for, crave: τί, 
Mt. vi. 32; Lk. xii. 30; Ro.xi. 7; Phil. iv.17; Heb. xi. 
14; xiii. 14; περί τινος, Acts xix. 39 [RG T] (but if 
your inquiry or desire has reference to other matters) ; 
with the inf. Acts xiii. 7 (as in Polyb. 8, 57, 7; Diod. 19, 
8) ; 1. q. to demand, clamor for: σημεῖον, Mt. xii. 39; xvi. 
4; Mk. viii. 12 RG; Lk. xi. 29 (where T Tr WH (rei 
[as L'T Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.]).* 

ἔπιθανάτιος, -ov, (θάνατος), doomed to death: 1 Co. iv. 
9. (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 35.) * 

ἔπίθεσις, -ews, 7, (ἐπιτίθημι), a laying on, imposition: 
τῶν χειρῶν, Acts viii. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim.i. 6; Heb. 
vi. 2. The imposition of hands, χειροθεσία, was a sacred 


[See ἐπιείκεια, 


238 


, , 
ἐπιθυμία 


rite transmitted by the Jews to the Christians, and em- 
ployed in praying for another, or in conferring upon him 
divine blessings, especially bodily health, or the Holy 
Spirit (at the administration of baptism and the inaugu- 
ration to their office of the teachers and ministers of the 
church): Gen. xlviii. 14; Num. xxvii. 18, 23; Deut. 
xxxiv. 9; 2 K. v. 11, etc.; Mt. xix. 13; Mk. xvi. 18; Acts 
vi.6; xiii. 3; xix. 6, ete. [See D. D. s. v. Baptism (sup- 
plement) ; McCl. and Strong and Dict. of Chris. Antiq. 
s. v. Imposition of Hands.] * 

ἐπιθυμέω. -ὦ ; [impf. ἐπεθύμουν ; fut. ἐπιθυμήσω ; 1 aor. 
ἐπεθύμησα; (θυμός); fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for rim 
and 327); prop. to keep the θυμός turned upon a thing, 
hence [cf. our to set one's heart upon] to have a desire for, 
long for; absol. to desire [.A. V. lust], Jas. iv. 2; to lust 
after, covet, of those who seek things forbidden, Ro. vii. 
7; xiii. 9 (fr. Ex. xx. 17); 1 Co. x. 6, (4 Macc. ii. 6); 
kara twos, to have desires opposed to [ A.V. lust against] a 
thing, Gal. v. 17 [B. 335 (288)]; τινός, to long for, covet 
a thing, Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1; of sexual desire, 
γυναικός, Mt. v. 28 Ree. [see below] (παιδὸς ἢ γυναικός, 
Xen. an. 4, 1, 14; with the gen. also in Ex. xxxiv. 24; 
Prov. xxi. 26; xxiii. 3, 65 Sap. vi. 125 Sir. xxiv. 19 (18), 
etc.); contrary to the usage of the better Grk. writ. with 
the ace. of the object, Mt. v. 28 L Tr (WH br.), and with- 
out an obj. Tdf. (Ex. xx. 17; Deut. v. 21; Mic. ii. 2; Sap. 
xvi. 3; Sir. i. 26 (23), etc. ; cf. W. $30, 10 b.) ; as often 
in Grk. writ., foll. by the inf.: Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. xv. 16; 
[xvi. 21]; xvii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 12; Rev. ix. 6; foll. by the 
acc. with the inf. Heb. vi. 11; ἐπιθυμίᾳ ἐπεθύμησα I have 
greatly desired, Lk. xxii. 15; cf. W. $54, 3; B. $133, 
22 a.” 

ἐπιθυμητής, -o), 6, (ἐπιθυμέω), one who longs for, a 
craver, lover, one eager for: κακῶν, 1 Co. x. 6 (Num. xi. 
4). In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.* 

ἐπιθυμία, -as, ἡ, (ἐπιθυμέω), [fr. Hdt. on], Sept. chiefly 
for TINA, mw, mon; desire, craving, longing: Lk. xxii. 
15 (on which see in ἐπιθυμέω, fin.); Rev. xviii. 14; τὴν 
ἐπιθυμίαν ἔχειν ets τι, the desire directed towards, Phil. i. 
23; ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ with great desire, 1 Th. ii. 17; 
plur. ai περὶ rà λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mk. iv. 19 [W. $30, 3 N. 
5]; spec. desire for what is forbidden, lust, (Vulg. con- 
cupiscentia) : Ro. vii. 7 sq.; Jas. i. 14 sq. ; 2 Pet. i. 4 ; πάθος 
ἐπιθυμίας, 1 ΤῊ. iv. 55 ἐπιθυμία κακή, Col. iii. 5, (Prov. xxi. 
26; [xii. 12]; Plat. legg. 9 p. 854 a.; πονηρά, Xen. mem. 
1, 2, 64; ἀγαθή, Sir. xiv. 14 where see Fritzsche, [who 
cites also Prov. xi. 23; xiii. 12]) ; plur., Gal. v. 24; 1 
Tim. vi. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iv. 3; 1 Pet.i. 14; iv. 2; with 
a gen. of the object, ἐπιθυμία μιασμοῦ, for unclean inter- 
course, 2 Pet. ii. 10 [4]. with W. § 34, 3 b. take μιασμ- as 
gen. of quality]; with a gen. of the subject, ai ἐπιθυμίαι 
τῶν καρδιῶν, Ro. i. 24; with a gen. of the thing by which 
the desire is excited, ἡ ἐπιθυμία τοῦ κόσμου, 1 Jn. ii. 
17; τοῦ σώματος, Ro. vi. 12; τῆς ἀπάτης (see ἀπάτη), 
Eph. iv. 22; τῆς σαρκός, τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (cf. 
Huther ad loc.); 2 Pet. ii. 18; τελεῖν ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκός, 
Gal. v. 16; αἱ σαρκικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. ii. 11 (ψυχικαί, 
σωματικαί, 4 Mace. i. 32); ai κοσμικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι, Tit. 11. 


ἐπικαθίζω 


12; εἰς ἐπιθυμίας to arouse lusts, Ro. xiii. 14; ποιεῖν τὰς 
ἐπιθυμίας, Jn. viii. 44; ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις, Ro. vi. 
12 [LT Tr WH]; δουλεύειν ἐπιθυμίαις (see δουλεύω, 2 
b.), Tit. iii. 3; ἄγεσθαι ἐπιθυμίαις, 2 Tim. iii. 6; πορεύε- 
σθαι ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις, 1 Pet. iv. 3; πορεύεσθαι κατὰ τὰς ἐπι- 
θυμίας, Jude 16, 18; 2 Pet. iii. 3; ἀναστρέφεσθαι ἐν ταῖς 
ἐπιθυμίαις τῆς σαρκός, Eph. ii. 3. [SvN. cf. πάθος, and 
see Trench § Ixxxvii.] * 

ἐπι-καθ-ίζω: 1 aor. ἐπεκάθισα; 1. to cause to sit 
upon, to set upon: Mt. xxi. 7 Rec. 2. intrans. to sit 
upon: Matt. l.c. [Rec.*] GL T Tr WH al.* 

ἐπι-καλέω, -ὦ : laor. emexadeoa; [Pass. and Mid., pres. 
ἐπικαλοῦμαι]; pf. pass. ἐπικέκλημαι ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐπεκέκλητο, and with neglect of augm. [cf. W. $12, 9; D. 
33 (29)] ἐπικέκλητο (Acts xxvi. 32 Lehm.) ; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐπεκλήθην ; fut. mid. ἐπικαλέσομαι ; 1 aor. mid. ézekaAe- 
σάμην ; Sept. very often for N0D ; 1. to put a name 
upon, to surname: τινά (Xen., Plato, al.), Mt. x. 25 G 
T Tr WH (Rec. ἐκάλεσαν) ; pass. 6 ἐπικαλούμενος, he who 
is surnamed, Lk. xxii. 3 KR GL; Acts x. 18; xi. 13; xii. 
12; xv. 22 RG; also os ἐπικαλεῖται, Acts x. 5, 32; ὁ ἐπι- 
κληθείς, Mt. x. 3 [RG]; Acts iv. 36; xii. 25; i. q. ὃς ἐπε- 
κλήθη, Acts i. 23. Pass. with the force of a mid. [ef. W. 
§ 38, 3], to permit one’s de be surnamed: Heb. xi. 16; 
Mid. w. τινά : 1 Pet. i. 17 εἰ πατέρα ἐπικαλεῖσθε τὸν etc. i. e. 
if ye call (for yourselves) on him as father, i. e. if ye sur- 
name him your father. 2. ἐπικαλεῖται τὸ ὄνομά τινος 
ἐπί τινα, after the Hebr. 3 5y “3 DU NIP}, the name 
of one is named upon some one, i. 6. he is called by his 
name or declared to be dedicated to him (cf. Gesenius, 
"Thesaur. iii. p. 1232"): Acts xv. 17 fr. Am. ix. 12 (the 
name referred to is the people of God); Jas. ii. 7 (the 
name of τοῦ Χριστοῦ). 3. τινί with the ace. of the 
object; prop. to call something to one [cf. Eng. to cry out 
upon (or against) one]; to charge something to one as a 
crime or reproach; to summon one on any charge, prose- 
cute one for a crime; to blame one for, accuse one of, 
(Arstph. pax 663; Thue. 2, 27; 3, 36; Plat. lege. 6, 
761 e.; 7,809 e.; Dio Cass. 36, 28; 40,41 and often in 
the orators [cf. s. v. κατηγορέω )) : εἰ τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ BeeA- 
ζεβοὺλ ἐπεκάλεσαν (i. 6. accused of commerce with Beel- 
zebul, of receiving his help, cf. Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24; Mk. 
iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15), πόσῳ μᾶλλον rois οἰκιακοῖς αὐτοῦ, Mt. 
x. 25 L WH mrg. after cod. Vat. (see 1 above), ἃ read- 
ing defended by Rettig in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1838, 
p. 477 sqq. and by Alex. Bttm. in the same journal for 
1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132); 
[also by Weiss in Mey. ed. 7 ad loc.]. But this expres- 
sion (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard 
not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant 
scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of 
this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the 
Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelze- 
bul. 4. to call upon (like Germ. anrufen), to invoke; 
Mid. to call upon for one's self, in one's behalf: any one 
as a helper, Acts vii. 59, where supply τὸν κύριον Ἰησοῦν 
(βοηθόν, Plat. Euthyd. p. 297 c.; Diod. 5, 79); τινὰ 
μάρτυρα, as my witness, 2 Co. i. 23 (Plat. lege. 2, 664 c.) ; 


239 








' ἐπικουρία: 


as a judge, i. e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto: Kat- 
capa, Acts xxv. 11 sq. ; xxvi. 32; xxviii. 19; [τὸν SeBa- 
στόν, Acts xxv. 25]; foll. by the inf. pass. Acts xxv. 21 (to 
be reserved). 52 Hebraistically (like mim v3 wp 
to call Eo i pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Gen. 
26; xii. 8; 2 K. v. 11, etc.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 

1281" [or Hebr. Lex. s. v. Np]; an expression finding 
its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God. 
ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name: 
Ps. iii. 2; vi. 2; vii. 2, ete.) ἐπικαλοῦμαι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου, 
I call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i.e. to 
invoke, adore; worship, the Lord, i. e. Christ: Acts ii. 21 
(fr. Joel ii. 32 Git yy SEX 49d: 16; Ro. x. 18 
sq-; 1 Co. i. 2; τὸν κηρίου, Ro. x. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 22; 
(often in Grk. writ. ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τοὺς θεούς, as Xen. Cyr. 
7,1, 35; Plat. ‘Tint. p. 27 e.; Polyb. 15, 1, 13).* 

ἐπι-κάλυμμα, -ros, τό, (ἐπικαλύπτω), a covering, veil; 
prop. in Sept.: Ex. xxvi 14; xxxvi 19 Compl. [cf. 
xxxix. 21 Tdf.]; metaph. i. q. a pretext, cloak: τῆς κακίας, 
1 Pet. ii. 16 (πλοῦτος δὲ πολλῶν ἐπικάλυμμ᾽ ἐστὶ κακῶν, 
Menand. ap. Stob. flor. 91, 19 [iii 191 ed. Gaisf.]; 
*quaerentes libidinibus suis patrocinium et velamen- 
tum," Seneca, vita beata 12).* 

ἐπι-καλύπτω : [1 aor. érexadktpOnv]; to cover over: αἵ 
ἁμαρτίαι ἐπικαλύπτονται, are covered over so as not to 
come to view, i. e. are pardoned, Ro. iv. 7 fr. Ps. xxxi. 
(xxxii.) 1.* 

émt-Kat-dpatos, -ov, (ἐπικαταράομαι to imprecate curses 
upon), only in bibl. and 666]. use, accursed, execrable, ex- 
posed to divine vengeance, lying under God’s curse: Jn. 
vii. 49 RG; Gal. iii. 10 (Deut. xxvii. 26) ; ibid. 13 (Deut. 
xxi. 23); (Sap. iii. 12 (13) ; xiv. 8; 4 Mace. ii. 19; in 
Sept. often for *0«).* 

émt-Kepor; impf. ἐπεκείμην ; to lie upon or over, rest 
upon, be laid or placed upon; a. prop.: ἐπί τινι, Jn. xi. 
38; sc.on the burning coals, Jn. xxi.9. b. figuratively, 
a. of things: of the pressure of a violent tempest, χει- 
μῶνος ἐπικειμένου, Acts xxvii. 20 (Plut. Timol. 28, 7) ; 
ἀνάγκη μοι ἐπίκειται, is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hom. 
Tl. 6, 458) ; ἐπικείμενα. of observances imposed on a man 
by law, Heb. ix. 10 [cf. W. 635 (589)]. f. of men; ta 
press upon, to be urgent: with dat. of pers. Lk. v. 1; 
23 (πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐπέκειτο 
μᾶλλον ἐπέκειντο βλάσφη- 


xxii. 


ἐπέκειντο αἰτούμενοι, Lk. xxiii. 
ἀξιῶν, Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; 
μοῦντες, 20, 5, 3).* 

ἐπι-κέλλω : [1 aor. ἐπέκειλα] ; fo run a ship ashore, to 
bring to land; so fr. Hom. Od. 9, 148 down; ἐπέκειλαν 
(RG ἐπώκειλαν) τὴν ναῦν, Acts xxvii. 41 L T Tr WH; 
but in opposition see Meyer ad loc. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. 
p. 3009.]* 

[ἐπι-κεφάλαιον, -ov, τό, head-money, poll-taz, (Aristot. oec. 
2 p. 1346, 4 and 13487, 32) : Mk. xii. 14 WH (rejected). 
mre. for κῆνσον (al.).*] 

᾿Ἐπικούρειος [-ριος T WH; see I, 1], -ov, 6, Epicurean,. 
belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the philosopher: Acts. 
xvii. 18.* 

ἐπικουρία, -as, 7, (ἐπικουρέω to aid), aid, succor: Acts: 


xxvi 22. (Sap. xiii. 18; fr. Thue. and Eur. down.) * 


, 
ἐπικρίνω 


ἐπι-κρίνω: 1 aor. ἐπέκρινα ; to adjudge, approve by one's 
decision, decree, give sentence: foll. by the ace. with inf., 
Lk. xxiii. 24. (Plato, Dem., Plut., Hdian., al.) * 

ἐπι-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. mid. ἐπελαβόμην ; to take in addi- 
tion (ef. ἐπί, D. 4], to take, lay hold of, take possession 
of, overtake, attain to. In the Bible only in the mid.; 
Sept. for M8 and pim a. prop. to lay hold of or to 
seize upon anything with the hands (Germ. sich an etwas 
anhalten) : τῶν ἀφλάστων νηός, Hdt. 6, 114; hence, univ. 
to take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. xiv. 
31; Lk. ix. 47 [Tr WH acc.]; (xxiii. 26 RG); Acts 
xvii.19; xxi. 30, 33; with acc. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L 
T Tr WH, but in opposition see Meyer; for where the 
ptep. ἐπιλαβόμενος is in this sense joined with an acc., 
the ace., by the σχῆμα ἀπὸ κοινοῦ, depends also upon the 
accompanying finite verb (cf. B. § 132, 9; [so W. (ed. 
Lünem.) 202 (190)]): Actsix. 27; xvi. 19; xviii. 17, cf. 
Lk. xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing: τῆς χεῖρός τινος, 
Mk. viii. 23; Acts xxiii. 19; of a leader, and thus met- 
aph. of God, Heb. viii. 9 [cf. W. 571 (531); B. 316 
(271)]; with gen. of a pers. and of a thing: ἐπιλ. τινος 
λόγου. ῥήματος, to take any one in his speech, i. e. to lay 
hold of something said by him which can be turned 
against him, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr λόγον], 26 [WH Tr mrg. τοῦ 
for αὐτοῦ]; émA. τῆς αἰωνίου [al. ὄντως] ζωῆς, to seize 
upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life, 
1 Tim. vi. 12, 19, [cf. W. 312 (293)]. b. by a metaph. 
drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from 
peril, fo help, to succor, (cf. Germ. sich eines annehmen) : 
τινός, Heb. ii. 16; in this sense used besides only in Sir. 
iv. 11 and Schol. ad Aeschyl. Pers. 739. In Appian.bel. 
«iv. 4, 96 the-act. is thus used with the dat.: ἡμῖν τὸ 
δαιμόνιον ἐπιλαμβάνει." 

ἐπι-λανθάνομαι ; pf. pass. ἐπιλέλησμαι ; 2 aor. mid. ἐπε- 


λαθόμην; Sept. often for NSW; to forget: foll. by the inf. - 


Mt. xvi. 5; Mk. viii. 14; foll. by an indir. quest. Jas. 
i 24; in the sense of neglecting, no longer caring for : 
with the gen., Heb. vi. 10; xiii. 2, 16; with the acc. (cf. 
W.$30,10 c.; Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2, ii. p. 820 sq.), 
Phil. iii. 13 (14) ; with a pass. signification (Is. xxiii. 16; 
Sir. ii. 14; xxxii. (xxxv.) 9; Sap. ii. 4, etc. [cf. B. 52 
(46)]) : ἐπιλελησμένος forgotten, given over to oblivion, 
i.e. uncared for, ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ before God i. e. by 
God (Sir. xxiii. 14), Lk. xii. 6. [(From Hom. on.)]* 
ἐπι-λέγω: [pres. pass. ptep. ἐπιλεγόμενος}; 1 aor. mid. 
ptep. ἐπιλεξάμενος ; 1. to say besides [cf. ἐπί, D. 4], 
(Hdt. et al.) ; to surname (Plato, legg. 3 p. 700 b.): in 
pass. Jn. v. 2 [Td£? τὸ Xey.], unless the meaning to name 
(put a name upon) be preferred here; cf. ἐπονομάζω. 
2. to choose for (Hdt. et sqq. ; Sept.) ; mid. to choose for 


one's self: Acts xv. 40 (2 S. x. 9; Hdt. 3, 157; Thue. | 
73 (74); 14, 12; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4, | 


7, 19; Diod. 3, 
and others).* 


ἐπιλείπω : fut. ἐπιλείψω ; to fail, not to suffice for (any | 


purpose, for the attainment of an end): τινὰ ὁ χρόνος, 


time fails one, Heb. xi. 32 and many like exx. in Grk. | 
writ. fr. Dem. down; see Bleck, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 | 


p. 818.* 


240 





ἐπιμένω 


ἐπι-λείχω : impf. ἐπέλειχον ; to lick the surface of, lick 
over ([cf. ἐπί, D. 1]; Germ. belecken) : with the ace. of a 
thing, Lk. xvi. 21 L T Tr WH; (in Long. past. 1, 24 
(11) a var. for ἐπιτρέχω)." 

ἐπιλησμονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιλήσμων forgetful [W. 93 (89)]), 
Jorgetfulness : ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς, a forgetful hearer 
[cf. W. $34, 3b.; B. 101 (140)], Jas. i. 25. (Sir. xi. 27 
(25))* à; 

ἐπίτλοιπος, -ov, (λοιπός), remaining besides, left over, 
[ef. ἐπί, D. 4]: 1 Pet.iv. 2. (Sept.; Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down.) * j 

ἐπί-λυσις, -eos, ἡ, (ἐπιλύω, q. v-), a loosening, unloosing 
(Germ. A u f lüsung) ; metaph. interpretation: 2 Pet. i. 
20, on which pass. see γίνομαι, ὃ 6. a. (Gen. xl. 8 Aq.; 
Heliod. 1, 18; but not Philo, vita contempl. $ 10, where 
ἐπιδείξεως was long ago restored.) * 

ém-Aiw: impf. ἐπέλυον ; 1 fut. pass. ἐπιλυθήσομαι; a. 
properly, to unloose, untie (Germ. auflésen) anything 
knotted or bound or sealed up; (Xen., Theocr., Hdian.). 
b. to clear (a controversy), to decide, settle: Acts xix. 
39; to explain (what is obscure and hard to understand) : 
Mk. iv. 34 (as in Gen. xli. 12 var. ; Philo, vita contempl. 
S 10; de agricult. § 3; Sext. Empir. 2, 246 ; ypidous, 
Athen. 10 p. 449 e.; also in mid., Athen. 10 p. 450 f. ; 
Joseph. antt. 8, 6, 5, and often by the Scholiasts).* 

ἐπι-μαρτυρέω, -@; to bear witness to, establish by testi- 
mony: foll. by the ace. with inf. 1 Pet. v. 12. (Plato, 
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) [Comp.: συν-επιμαρτυρέω. * 

ἐπιμέλεια. -as, 7, (ἐπιμελής careful), care, attention : Acts 
xxvii. 8. (Prov. iii. 8; 1 Macc. xvi. 14; 2 Macc. xi. 23; 
very com. in Grk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)* 

ἐπι-μελέομαι, -odpar, and ἐπιμέλομαι : fut. ἐπιμελήσομαι ; 
1 aor. ἐπεμελήθην ; with gen. of the object, to take care of 
a person or thing (ἐπί denoting direction of the mind 
toward the object cared for [ef. ἐπί, D. 2]) : Lk. x. 34 sq.; 
1 Tim. iii. 5. (Gen. xliv. 21; 1 Macc. xi. 37; 1 Esdr. 
vi. 26; used by Grk. writ. esp. of prose fr. Hdt. down.) * 

ἐπιμελῶς, adv., diligently, carefully: Lk. xv. 8.* 

ἐπι-μένω ; [impf. ἐπέμενον) ; fut. ἐπιμενῶ; 1 aor. émé- 
pewa ; to stay at or with; to tarry still; still to abide, to 
a. prop. of tarrying in a place: ἐν 
᾿Ἐφέσῳ. 1 Co. xvi. 8; ἐν τῇ σαρκί, to live still longer on 
earth, Phil. i. 24 (GT WII om. ἐν); αὐτοῦ, there, Acts xv. 
34 [Rec.]; xxi. 4 [Lchm. αὐτοῖς 1; with dat. of thing: τῇ 
σαρκί, to abide as it were a captive to life on earth, Phil. © 
1.24 GT WH; ἐπί τινι, with one, Acts xxviii. 14 [L T 
Tr WH παρ᾽]; πρός twa, with one, 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal. i. 
18; with specification of time how long: Acts x. 48; 
xxi. 4, 10; xxviii. 12, 14; 1 Co.xvi. 7. b. trop. to per- 
severe, continue; with dat. of the thing continued in 
[cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 10 sq.] : τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, 
Ro. vi. 1; τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ, Ro. xi. 23; τῇ πίστει, Col. i. 23; in 
the work of teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 16 (rà μὴ ἀδικεῖν, Xen. 
oec. 14, 7; τῇ μνηστείᾳ, Ael. v. h. 10,15) ; with dat. of the 
blessing for which one keeps himself fit: τῇ χάριτι, Acts 
xii. 43 Rec.; τῇ χρηστότητι, Ro. xi. 22; with a ptep. 
denoting the action persisted in: Jn. viii. 7 Rec.; Acts 
xii. 16; cf. B. 299 sq. (257) ; [W. $54, 4].* 


continue, remain; 


, 4 
€T Livevo 


ἐπι-νεύω: 1 aor. ἐπένευσα; fr. Hom. down; to nod to; 
trop. (by a nod) to express approval, to assent: Acts xviii. 
20, as often in Grk. writ.* 

ἐπίνοια, -as, 7, (ἐπινοέω to think on, devise), thought, 
purpose: Acts viii. 22. (Jer. xx. 10; Sap. vi. 17, etc. ; 
often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. down.) * 

ἐπιορκέω, -ὦ : fut. ἐπιορκήσω, cf. Krüger $40 s. v., and 
$39, 12, 4; [Veitch s.v.; B. 53 (46)]; (ἐπίορκος, q.v.) ; 
to swear falsely, forswear one's self: Mt. v. 33. (Sap. 
xiv. 28; 1 Esdr. i. 46; by Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

&m-opkos, -ον, (Ir. ἐπί [q. v. D. 7] against, and ὅρκος) ; 
[masc. as subst. ] a false swearer, a perjurer : 1 Tim.i.10. 
(From Hom. down.) * 

ἐπιοῦσα, see ἔπειμι. 

ἐπιούσιος, -ον, a word found only in Mt. vi. 11 and Lk. xi. 

o td 
3, in the phrase ἄρτος ἐπιούσιος ([Pesh.] Syr. [dows 
«ἴδιο; the bread of our necessity, i. e. necessary for 
us [but the Curetonian (earlier) Syriac reads Lado} 
continual ; cf. Bp. Lehtft. as below, I. 3 p. 214 sqq.; Tay- 
lor, Sayings of the Jewish Fathers, p. 139 sq.]; Itala 
[Old Lat.] panis quotidianus). Origen testifies [de orat. 
21] that the word was not in use in ordinary speech, and 
accordinely seems to have been coined by the Evange- 
lists themselves. Many commentators, as Beza, Kui- 
noel, Tholuck, Ewald, Bleek. Keim, Cremer, following 
Origen, Jerome (who in Mt. only translates by the bar- 
barous phrase panis supersubstantialis), Theophylact, 
Euthymius Zigabenus, explain the word by bread for 
sustenance, which serves to sustain life, deriving the word 
from οὐσία, after the analogy of ἐξούσιος, ἐνούσιος. But 
οὐσία very rarely, and only in philosophie language, is 
equiv. to ὕπαρξις» as in Plato, Theaet. p. 185 c. (opp. to 
τὸ μὴ εἶναι), Aristot. de part. anim. i. 1 (7 yàp γένεσις 
ἕνεκα τῆς οὐσίας ἐστίν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ἡ οὐσία ἕνεκα τῆς γενέσεως; 
for other exx. see Bonitz’s Index to Aristot. p. 544), and 
generally denotes either essence, real nature, or sub- 
stance, property, resources. On this account Leo Meyer 
(in Kuhn, Zeitschr. f. vergleich. Sprachkunde, vii. pp. 
401—430), Kamphausen (Gebet des Herrn, pp. 86-102), 
with whom Keim (ii. 278 sq. [ Eng. trans. iii. 340]), Weiss 
(Mt. 1. e.), Delitzsch (Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. 1876 p. 
402), agree, prefer to derive the word from ἐπεῖναι (and 
in particular fr. the ptep. ἐπών, ἐπούσιος for ἐπόντιος, see 
below) to be present, and to understand it bread which is 
ready at hand or suffices, so that Christ is conjectured to 
have said in Chald. spn] som? (cf. "pn on? my allow- 
ance of bread, Prov. xxx. 8) or something of the sort. 
But this opinion, like the preceding, encounters the great 
objection (to mention no other) that, although the ¢ in ἐπί 
is retained before a vowel in certain words (as ἐπίορκος, 
ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιόσσομαι, ete. [cf. Bp. Lehtft., as below, I. 
$ 1]), yet in ἐπεῖναι and words derived from it, ἐπουσία, 
ἐπουσιώδης. it is always elided. Therefore much more cor- 
rectly do Grotius, Scaliger, Wetstein, Fischer (De vitiis 
lexx. ete. p. 306 sqq.). Valekenaer, Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 
267 sqq.), Winer (97 (92)), Bretschneider, Wahl, Meyer, 
[Bp. Lghtft. (Revision ete., App.) ] and others, compar- 
16 


241 





> , 
ἐπιποθέω 


ing the words ἑκούσιος, ἐθελούσιος, γερούσιος, (fr. ἑκών, ἐθέ- 
λων, γέρων, for ἑκόντιος, ἐθελόντιος, γερόντιος, cf. Kiihner i. 
§ 63, 3 and § 334, 1 Anm. 2), conjecture that the adjec- 
tive ἐπιούσιος is formed from ἐπιών, ἐπιοῦσα, with refer- 
ence to the familiar expression ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (see ἔπειμι)» 
and ἄρτος ἐπιούσιος is equiv. to ἄρτος τῆς ἐπιούσης ἡμέρας, 


food for the morrow, i.e. necessary or sufficient food. 


Thus ἐπιούσιον and σήμερον admirably answer to each 
other, and that state of mind is portrayed which, piously 
contented with food sufficing from one day to the next, in 
praying to God for sustenance does not go beyond the 
absolute necessity of the nearest future. This explana- 
tion is also recommended by the fact that in the Gospel 
according to the Hebrews, as Jerome testifies, the word 
ἐπιούσιος was represented by the Aramaic ^T, “ quod 
dicitur crastinus;” hence it would seem that Christ him- 
self used the Chaldaie expression 31125 Ἴ jpm?. Nor 
is the prayer, so understood, at variance with the mind 
of Christ as expressed in Mt. vi. 34, but on the contrary 
harmonizes with it finely; for his hearers are bidden 
to ask of God, in order that they may themselves be 
relieved of anxiety for the morrow. [See Bp. Lehttt., 
as above, pp. 195-234; McClellan} The New Test. etc. 
pp. 632-647; Tholuck, Bergpredigt, Mt. l. c., for earlier 
reff.]* 

ἐπι-πίπτω : 2 aor. ἐπέπεσον, 3 pers. plur. ἐπέπεσαν, Ro. 
xv. 3 L T Tr WH [cf. ἀπέρχομαι init.]; pf. ptep. ézuze- 
πτωκώς ; [see πίπτω]; Sept. for 221; to fall upon; to 
rush or press upon; a. prop.: τινί, upon one, Mk. iii. 
10; to lie upon one, Acts xx. 10; ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλόν τινος, 
to fall into one's embrace, Lk. xv. 20; Acts xx. 37, (Gen. 
xlvi. 29; Tobit xi. 8, 12; 3 Mace. v. 49); to fall back 
upon, ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθός τινος, Jn. xiii. 25 R G T. b. metaph. 
ἐπί twa, to fall upon one, i. e. to seize, take possession of 
him: φόβος, Lk.i. 12; Acts xix. 17 [L ΤῪ ἔπεσεν]; Rev. 
xi. 11 L T Tr WH; ἔκστασις, Acts x. 10 Rec.; ἀχλύς, 
Acts xiii. I1[R G]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its 
inspiration and impulse: ἐπί τινι, Acts viii. 16; ἐπί τινα, 
x. 44 Lehm. ἔπεσε] ; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5) ; of reproaches 
east upon one: Ro. xv. 3. [Noteworthy is the absol. 
use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. ἐπέπεσεν (al. ἐγένετο) στά- 
σις. (From Hdt. down.)]* 

ἐπι-πλήσσω: laor. ἐπέπληξα; a. prop. to strike 
upon, beat upon: Hom. 1]. 10, 500. b. trop. to chas- 
tise with words, to chide, upbraid, rebuke: 1 Tim. v. 1. 
(Hom. Il. 12, 211; Xen., Plato, Polyb., al.) * 

ἐπι-ποθέω. -@; 1 aor. ἐπεπόθησα ; prop. πόθον ἔχω ἐπί 
τι [i. e. ἐπί is directive, not intensive; cf. ἐπί, D. 2] 
(cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq.) ; to long for, de- 
sire: foll. by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2; ἰδεῖν twa, Ro. i. 11; 1 
Th. iii. 6; 2 Tim. i. 4; Phil. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br.; ri, 
1 Pet. ii. 2 (ἐπί τι, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2); τινά, to be possessed 
with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30. 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26 
RGT Tr WH mrg. ; to pursue with love, to long after: 
2 Co. ix. 14; Phil.i. 8, (τὰς ἐντολὰς θεοῦ, Ps. exviii. 
(exix.) 131) ; absol. to lust [i. e. harbor forbidden desire]: 
Jas. iv. 5, on which pass. see φθόνος.  (Hdt., Plat., Diod., 
Plut., Lcian.) * 


ἐπιπόθησις 


ἐπι-πόθησις, -εως, 7, longing: 2 Co. vii. 7,11. (Ezek. 
xxiii. 11 Aq.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 21, 131 p. 527 a.) * 

ἔπι-πόθητος, -ov, longed for: Phil.iv.1. ([Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 65, 1; Barn. ep. 1, 3]; App. Hisp. 43; Eustath. ; 
[cf. W. § 34, 3].)* 

ἐπιποϑία [ WH -πόθεια, see s. v. et, «],-as, 7, longing: Ro. 
xv. 23; ἅπαξ Aeyóp. [On the passage cf. B. 294 (252).]* 

ἐπι-πορεύομαι ; /0 go or journey to: πρός τινα, Lk. viii. 
4; (foll. by ἐπί with the acc. Ep. Jer. 61 (62); Polyb. 4, 
9, 2: freq. used by Polyb. with the simple acc. of place: 
both fo go to, traverse regions, cities (so τὴν γῆν, Ezek. 
xxxix. 14 for 33j! ; τὰς δυνάμεις, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also 
to make a hostile inroad, overrun, march over).* 

ἐπι-ρράπτω (T Tr WH ἐπιράπτω, see P, p); (pámro to 
sew); lo sew upon, sew to: ἐπί τινι [R G ; al. τινα], Mk. 
"n ss 

ἐπι-ρρίπτω (1, Τ Tr WH ἐπιρίπτω, see P, p): 1 aor. 
ἐπέρριψα; (ῥίπτων : to throw upon, place upon: τὶ ἐπί τι, 

k. xix. 35; (Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) : 
τὴν μέριμναν ἐπὶ θεόν, i. 6. to cast upon, give up to, God, 
1 Pet. v. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (lv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Hom. 
Od. 5, 310 down.] * 

ἐπίσημος, -ov, (σῆμα ἃ sign, mark) ; 1. prop. having 
a mark on it, marked, stamped, coined : ἀργύριον, χρυσός, 
(Hdt., Thue., Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. marked 
(Lat. insignis). both in a good and bad sense ; in a good 
sense, of note, illustrious: Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.) ; 
in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. 16 (Eur. 
Or. 249; Joseph. antt. 5, 7, 1; Plut. Fab. Max. 14 ; al.).* 

ἐπισιτισμός, -o0, ὁ, (ἐπισιτίζομαι to provision one's 
self) ; 1. a foraging, providing food, (Xen., Plut., 
al.). 2. supplies, provisions, food [A. V. victuals]: Lk. 
ix. 12 (Sept., Xen., Dem., Hdian., al.).* 

ἐπι-σκέπτομαι ; fut. 3 pers. sing. ἐπισκέψεται, Lk. i. 78 
Tr mrg. WH; 1 aor. ἐπεσκεψάμην; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. 
often for Ἴρ3; to look upon or after, to inspect, examine 
with the eyes; a. τινά, in order to see how he is, i. e. to 


visit, go to see one: Acts vii. 23; xv. 36, (Judg. xv. 1);: 


the poor and afflicted, Jas. i. 27; the sick, Mt. xxv. 36, 
43, (Sir. vii. 35; Xen. mem. 3, 11, 10 ; Plut. mor. p. 129 c. 
[de sanitate praecept. 15 init.]; Leian. philops. 6, and in 
med. writ.). Ὁ. Hebraistically, to look upon in order to 
help or to benefit, i. q. to look after, have a care for, pro- 
vide for, of God: τινά, Lk. vii. 16; Heb. ii. 6, (Gen. xxi. 
1; Ex. iv. 31; Ps. vui. 5; lxxix. (lxxx.) 15; Sir. xlvi. 
14; Jud. viii. 33, etc.) ; foll. by a telic inf. Acts xv. 14; 
absol. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 21) yet with a statement of 
the effect and definite blessing added, Lk. i. 68; ἐπε- 
σκέψατο [WH Tr mre. ἐπισκέψεται] ἡμᾶς ἀνατολὴ ἐξ 
ὕψους a light from on hich hath looked [al. shall look] 
upon us (ef. our the sun looks down on us, ete.), i. e. sal- 
vation from God has come to us, Lk. i. 78. (In the O. T. 
used also in a bad sense of God as punishing, Ps. 
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 33; Jer. ix. 25; xi. 22, etc.) c. to 
look: (about) for, look out (one to choose, employ, etc.) : 
Aets vi. 3.* 

ἐπι-σκευάζω:: fo furnish with things necessary; Mid. to 
Jurnish one's self or for one's self: ἐπισκευασάμενοι, hay- 


242 


€rLG KO 1) 


ing gathered and made ready the things necessary for 
the journey, Acts xxi. 15 L'T Tr WH, for R G ἀποσκευ- 
ασάμενοι (which see in its place).* 

ἐπι-σκηνόω, -ὥ: 1 aor. ἐπεσκήνωσα; to fix a tent or habi- 
tation on: ἐπὶ τὰς οἰκίας, to take possession of and live 
in the houses (of the citizens), Polyb. 4, 18, 8; ταῖς 
οἰκίαις, 4, 72,1; trop. ἐπί τινα, of the power of Christ 
descending upon one, working within him and giving 
him help, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. 9.* 

ἐπι-σκιάζω ; [impf. ἐπεσκίαζον, Lk. ix. 34 L mrg. T Tr 
txt. WH]; fut. ἐπισκιάσω ; 1 aor. ἐπεσκίασα; to throw a 
shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow: τινί, 
Acts v. 15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a 
shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud 
surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness: 
τινά, Mt. xvii. 5; Lk. ix. 34; τινί, Mk. ix. 7. Tropi- 
cally, of the Holy Spirit exerting ereative energy upon 
the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a 
use of the word which seems to have been drawn from 
the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the 
immediate presence and power of God): with the dat. 
Lk.i.35. (In prof. auth. generally w. an aec. of the 
object and in the sense of obscuring: Hdt. 1,209; Soph., 
Aristot. Theophr., Philo, Leian., Hdian., Geop. Sept. 
for 130 to cover, Ps. xe. (xci.) 4; exxxix. (exl) 8; for 
jaw, Ex. xl. 29 (35) ἐπεσκίαζεν ἐπὶ τὴν σκηνὴν ἡ νεφέλη ; 
fet. W. § 52, 4, 7].)* 

ἔπι-σκοπέω, -à ; fo look upon, inspect, oversee, look after, 
care for: spoken of the care of the church which rested 
upon the presbyters, 1 Pet. v. 2 [TWH om.] (with τὴν 
ἐκκλησίαν added, Ignat. ad Rom. 9, 1); foll. by μή [q. v. 
IL. 1 a.] i. q. Lat. caveo, to look carefully, beware: Heb. 
xii. 15. (Often by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἐπι-σκοπή, -je, ἡ, (ἐπισκοπέω), inspection, visitation, 
(Germ. Besichtigung); a. prop.: eis émurk. τοῦ παιδός 
to visit the boy, Leian. dial. deor. 20, 6; with this ex- 
ception no example of the word in prof. writ. has yet 
been noted. b. In biblical Grk., after the Hebr. 
ma, that aet by which God looks into and searches 
out the ways, deeds, character, of men, in order to ad- 
judge thein their lot accordingly, whether joyous or sad; 
inspection, investigation, visitation, (Vulg. usually visita- 
lio) : so univ. ἐν ἐπισκοπῇ ψυχῶν, when he shall search 
the souls of men, i. e. in the time of divine judgment, 
Sap. iii. 13; also ἐν ὥρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς, Sir. xviii. 20 (19) ; 
so perhaps ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [see below]; 
in a good sense, of God’s gracious care: τὸν καιρὸν τῆς 
ἐπισκοπῆς σου, i. e. τὸν καιρὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεσκέψατο σε ὁ Beds, 
in which God showed himself gracious toward thee and 
offered thee salvation through Christ (see ἐπισκέπτομαι, 
b.), Lk. xix. 44; ἐν καιρῷ ἐπισκοπῆς, in the time of divine 
reward, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lehm.; also, in the opinion of many 
commentators, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [al. associate this pass. with 
Lk. xix. 44 above; οἵ. De Wette (ed. Briickner) or 
Huther ad loc.]; fr. the O. T. cf. Gen. 1. 24 sq.; Job 
xxxiv. 9; Sap. ii. 20; iii. 7, ete. with a bad reference, 
of divine punishment: Ex.ii.16; Is.x.3; Jer.x.15; 
Sap. xiv. 11; xix. 14 (15); [ete.; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 


' 


ἐπίσκοπος 


.c. after the analogy of the Hebr. ry3p3 (Num. iv. 16; 
1 Chr. xxiv. 19 [here Sept. ἐπίσκεψις], etc.), oversight 
i. e. overseership, office, charge; Vulg. episcopatus: Acts 
i. 20, fr. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 8; spec. the office of a bishop 
(the overseer or presiding officer of a Christian 
church): 1 Tim. iii. 1, and in eccl. writ.* 

ἐπίσκοπος, -ov, ó, (ἐπισκέπτομαι), an overseer, a man 
charged with the duty of seeing that things to be done 
by others are done rightly, any curator, guardian, or 
superintendent; Sept. for p3, Judg. ix. 28; Neh. xi. 
9,14, 22; 2 K. xi. 15, ete. ; 1 Mace.i. 51. The word 
has the same comprehensive sense in Grk. writ. fr. 
Homer Odys. 8, 163; Il. 22, 255 down; hence in the 
N. T. ἐπίσκ. τῶν ψυχῶν guardian of souls, one who 
watches over their welfare: 1 Pet. ii. 25 ([τὸν παντὸς 
πνεύματος κτίστην κ. ἐπίσκοπον, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3]; 
ἀρχιερεὺς kai προστάτης τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Xp. ibid. 
61, 3; [cf. Sir. i. 67), cf. Heb. xiii. 17. spec. the super- 
intendent, head or overseer of any Christian church; Vulg. 
episcopus: Acts xx. 28; Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i. 
7; see πρεσβύτερος, 2 b.; [and for the later use of the 
word, see Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Bishop].* 

ἐπι-σπάω, -ὦ : fr. Aeschyl. down; to draw on: μὴ ἐπι- 
σπάσθω, sc. ἀκροβυστίαν, let him not draw on his fore- 
skin (Hesych. μὴ ἐπισπάσθω : μὴ ἑλκυέτω τὸ δέρμα) [ A. V. 
let him not become uncircumcised], 1 Co. vii. 18. From 
the days of Antiochus Epiphanes [5. c. 175-164] down 
(1 Maec. i. 15; Joseph. antt. 12, 5, 1), there had been 
Jews who, in order to conceal from heathen persecutors 
or scoffers the external sign of their nationality, sought 
artificially to compel nature to reproduce the prepuce, 
by extending or drawing forward with an iron instru- 
ment the remnant of it still left, so as to cover the 
glans. The Rabbins called such persons p'2155, from 
quU to draw out, see Buztorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1274 [(ed. 
Fischer ii. 645 sq.). Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Circumcision, 
esp. McC. and S. ibid. II. 2.]* 

ἐπι-σπείρω: 1 aor. ἐπέσπειρα ; to sow above or besides: 
Mt. xiii. 25 LT Tr WH. (Hdt., Theophr., [al.].) * 

ériorapat.(seems to be the Ionic form of the Mid. of 
ἐφίστημι. Isocrates, Aristot., al., also use ἐπιστῆσαι τὴν 
διάνοιαν, τὸν νοῦν, ἑαυτόν for to put one’s attention on, fix 
one’s thoughts on; indeed, the simple ἐπιστῆσαι is used 
in the same sense, by an ellipsis analogous to that of 
τὸν νοῦν with the verbs προσέχειν, ἐπέχειν, and of τὴν ὄψιν 
with προσβάλλειν; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 281 sq. 
Hence ἐπίσταμαι is prop. to turn one’s self or one’s mind 
to, put one’s thought upon a thing); fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. chiefly for yp; (cf. Germ. sich worauf verstehen) ; 
a. to be acquainted with: ri, Acts xviii. 25; Jas. iv. 14; 
Jude 10; τινά, Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is 
said or is to be interpreted, to understand: Mk. xiv. 68; 
1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to know: περί twos, Acts xxvi. 26; 
foll.-by an ace. with a ptep. Acts xxiv. 10 [W. 346 (324); 
B. 301 (258)]; foll by ὅτι, Acts xv. 7; xix. 25; xxii. 
19; foll. by ὡς, Acts x. 28; by πῶς, Acts xx. 18; by ποῦ, 
Heb. xi. 8. [Svw. see ywaokw.]* 

ἐπίστασις, -ews, 7, (ἐφίστημι, ἐφίσταμαι), an advanc- 


243 








> , 
ἐπιστρέφω 


ing, approach; incursion, onset, press: τῆς κακίας (Vulg. 
malorum incursio), 2 Mace. vi. 3, where cf. Grimm; used 
of the pressure of a multitude asking help, counsel, etc., 
τινί (on which dat. cf. W. § 31,3; [B. 180 (156)]; Kühner 
§ 424, 1) to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 L'T Tr WH (but others 
would have us translate it here by oversight, attention, 
care, a com. meaning of the word in Polyb.); used of a 
tumultuous gathering in Acts xxiv. 12 LT Tr WH. Cf. 
ΒΞ τ Ἐπ 

ἐπιστάτης, -ου, 6, (ἐφίστημι), any sort of a superintend- 
ent or overseer (often so in prof. writ., and several times 
in Sept., as Ex. i. 11; v. 14; 1 K. v. 16; 2 K. xxv. 19; 
Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii. 2; xxxi. 12); a master, 
used in this sense for 13 by the disciples [cf. Lk. xvii. 
13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus “not 
from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his 
authority" (Bretschneider); found only in Luke: v. 5; 
viii. 24, 45; ix. 33, 49; xvii. 13.* 

em-oreddw: 1 aor. ἐπέστειλα ; prop. to send to one a 
message, command, (Hdt. et sqq.); ἐπιστολάς, to send 
by letter, write a letter, Plato, epp. p. 363 b., hence 
simply to write a letter [cf. W. $ 3, 1 b.]: τινί, Heb. xiii. 
22 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 1; 47, 3; 62, 1; and often in 
Grk. writ.) ; to enjoin by letter, to write instructions: Acts 
xxi. 25 RGT Tr mrg. WH mrg.; foll by τοῦ with an 
inf. expressing purpose [cf. W. 326 (306); B. 270 
(232)] : Acts xv. 20.* 

ἐπιστήμων, -ov, gen. -ovos, (ἐπίσταμαι), intelligent, ex- 
perienced, [ esp. one having the knowledge of an ex pert; 
cf. Schmidt ch. 13 $$ 10, 13]: Jas.iii.13. (From Hom. 
down; Sept.) * 

ἐπι-στηρίζω; 1 aor. ἐπεστήριξα; a later word; to estab- 
lish besides, strengthen more; to render more firm, confirm: 
τινά, one's Christian faith, Acts xiv. 22; xv. 32, 41; 
xviii. 23 R G.* 

ἐπι-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιστέλλω), a letter, episile: Acts xv. 
30; Ro. xvi. 22; 1 Co. v. 9, etc.; plur., Acts ix. 2; 2 Co. 
X. 10, etc. ; ἐπιστολαὶ συστατικαί, letters of commendation, 
2 Co. iii. 1 [W. 176 (165). On the possible use of the 
plur. of this word interchangeably with the sing. (cf. 
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 113, 8), see Bp. Lehtft. and 
Meyer on Phil. iii. 1. (Eur., Thuc., al.)] 

ἐπι-στομίζω ; (στόμα) ; prop. to bridle or stop up the 
mouth; metaph. to stop the mouth, reduce to silence: Tit. 
i 11. (Plato, Gorg. p. 482 e.; Dem. 85, 4; often in 
Plut. and Leian.) * 

ἐπι-στρέφω ; fut. ἐπιστρέψω ; 1 aor. ἐπέστρεψα; 2 aor. 
pass. émeorpádmv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 429, 33D 
and 3973, 732, and times without number for 335 and 
TUn; 1. transitively, a. to turn to: ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, to 
the worship of the true God, Acts xxvi. 20. b. to cause 
to return, to bring back; fig. τινὰ ἐπὶ κύριον τὸν θεόν, to the 
love and obedience of God, Lk.i. 16; ἐπὶ τέκνα, to love 
for the children, Lk. i. 17; ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων, that they 
may bein [R. V. to walk in] the wisdom of the righteous, 
Lk. i. 17; τινὰ ἐπί twa, supply from the context ἐπὶ τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν and ἐπὶ τὴν ὁδόν, Jas. v. 19 sq. 2. intrans. 
(W. $38, 1 [cf. p. 26; B. 144 (126 sq.)]); a. to turn, 


ἐπιστροφή 


to turn one’s self: ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον and ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, of Gen- 
tiles passing over to the religion of Christ, Acts ix. 35; 
xi 21; xiv. 15; xv. 19; xxvi. 20, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 25; πρός 
τι, Acts ix. 40; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 9; 2 Co. iii. 16; 
ἀπό twos εἴς τι, Acts xxvi. 18. b. to turn one's self about, 
turn back: absol. Acts xvi. 18; foll. by an inf. express- 
ing purpose, Rev. i. 12. ὁ. to return, turn back, come 
back; a. properly: Lk. ii. 20 Rec.; viii.55; Acts xv. 36 ; 
with the addition of ὀπίσω (as in Ael. v. h. 1, 6 [var.]), 
foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mt. xxiv. 18; foll. by εἰς with 
ace. of place, Mt. xii. 44; [Lk. ii. 39 TWH Tr mrg.]; eis 
rà ὀπίσω, Mk. xiii. 16; Lk. xvii. 31; ἐπί τι, to, 2 Pet. ii. 
22. f. metaph.: ἐπί τι, Gal. iv. 9; ἐπί τινα, Lk. xvii. 4 
Rec., but G om. ἐπί ae; πρός twa, ibid. L'T Tr WH; ἐκ 
τῆς ἐντολῆς, to leave the commandment and turn back to 
a worse mental and moral condition, 2 Pet. ii. 21 RG; 
absol. to turn back morally, to reform: Mt. xiii. 15; Mk. 
iv. 12; Lk. xxii. 32; Actsiii.19; xxviii. 27. In the mid. 
and 2 aor. pass. a. fo turn one's self about, to turn 
around: absol, Mt. ix. 22 RG; Mk. v. 30; viii. 33; Jn. 
xxi. 20. b. to return: foll. by πρός [WH txt. ἐπί] τινα, 
Mt. x. 13 (on which pass. see εἰρήνη, 3 fin.) ; ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, 
1 Pet. ii. 25 (see 2a. above) ; toreturn to a better mind, 
repent, Jn. xii. 40 [R G ].* 

ἐπι-στροφή, -js, 7. (ἐπιστρέφων, conversion (of Gentiles 
fr. idolatry to the true God [ef. W. 207) : Acts xv. 3. 
(C£. Sir. xlix. 2; xviii. 21 (20); in Grk. writ. in many 
other senses.) * 

ἐπι-συν-άγω ; fut. émvvá£o ; 1 aor. inf. ἐπισυνάξαι; 2 
aor. inf. ἐπισυναγαγεῖν; Pass. pf. ptep. ἐπισυνηγμένος ; 
1 aor. ptep. ἐπισυναχθείς ; [fut. ἐπισυναχθήσομαι, Lk. xvii. 
37'T Tr WH]; Sept. several times for Dx, Y3p, np; 
1. to gather together besides, to bring together to others 
already assembled, (Polyb.). 2. to gather together 
against (Mie. iv. 11; Zech. xii. 3; 1 Mace. iii. 58, ete.). 
3. to gather together in one place (ἐπί to): Mt. xxiii. 37; 
xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk. xiii. 34; Pass.: Mk. 1.33; Lk. 
xii. 1; xvii. 37 T Tr WH, (Ps. ci. (cii.) 23; ev. (evi.) 47; 
2 Mace. i. 27, etc.; Aesop 142).* 

ἐἔπι-συν-αγωγή. -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπισυνάγω, q. v.); a. a gather- 
ing together in one place, i. q. τὸ ἐπισυνάγεσθαι (2 Macc. 
li. 7): ἐπί τινα, to one, 2 Th. ii. 1. b. (the religious) 
assembly (of Christians): Heb. x. 25. * 

ἐπι-συν-τρέχω ; to run together besides (i. e. to others 
already gathered): Mk. ix. 25. Not used by prof. 
writ.* 

ἐπι-σύστασις, -ews, 7, (ἐπισυνίσταμαι to collect togeth- 
er, conspire against) a gathering together or combining 
against or at. Hence 1. a hostile banding together or 
concourse: ποιεῖν ἐπισύστασιν, to excite a riotous gather- 
ing of the people, make a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 RG; 1 
Esdr. v. 70 Alex.; Sext. Empir. adv. eth. p. 127 [p.571, 
20 ed. Bekk. ; cf. Philo in Flac. $ 17; τινός, against one, 
Num. xxvi. 9; a conspiracy, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20. 2: 
a troublesome //rong of persons seeking help, counsel, 
comfort: τινός, thronging to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 R G (see 
ἐπίστασις) ; Luther, dass ich werde angelaufen.* 

ἐπισφαλής, és, (σφάλλω to cause to fall), prone to fall: 


244 





ἐπιτίθημε 


πλοῦς, ἃ dangerous voyage, Actsxxvii.9. (Plato, Polyb., 
Plut., al.) * 

ἐπ-ισχύω : [impf. ἐπίσχυον ; 1. trans. to give addi- 
tional strength ; to make stronger, (Sir. xxix. 1; Xen. oec. 
11, 13). 2. intrans. to receive greater strength, grow 
stronger, (4 Mace. vi. 6; Theophr., Diod.): ἐπίσχυον 
λέγοντες, they were the more urgent saying, i. 6. they 
alleged the more vehemently, Lk. xxiii. 5.* 

ἐπι-σωρεύω : fut. ἐπισωρεύσω; to heap up, accumulate 
in piles: διδασκάλους, to choose for themselves and run 
after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut., 
Athen., Artemid., al.) * 

ἐπι-ταγή, -5s, ἡ, (ἐπιτάσσω), an injunction, mandate, 
command: Ro. xvi. 26; 1 Co. vii. 25; 1 Tim.1.1; Tit. i. 3; 
μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς. with every possible form of author- 
ity, Tit. ii. 15; κατ᾽ ἐπιταγήν, by way of command, 1 Co. 
vii.6; 2 Co. viii. 8. (Sap. xiv. 16, ete.; Polyb., Diod.) * 

ἐπι-τάσσω; laor. ἐπέταξα; (τάσσω) ; to enjoin upon, 
order, command, charge: absol. Lk. xiv. 22; τινί, Mk. i. 
27; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36 ; viii. 25; τινὶ τὸ ἀνῆκον, Philem. 8; 
τινί foll. by the inf., Mk. vi. 39; Lk. viii. 31; Acts xxiii. 
2; foll. by ace. and inf. Mk. vi. 27; foll. by direct dis- 
course, Mk. ix. 25. (Several times in Sept. ; Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt. down.) [Syn. see κελεύω, fin. ]* 

ἐπι-τελέω, -@; fut. ἐπιτελέσω ; 1 aor. ἐπετέλεσα ; [pres. 
mid. and pass. ἐπιτελοῦμαι]} ; 1. to bring to an end, 
accomplish, perfect, execute, complete: substantively, τὸ 
ἐπιτελέσαι, 2 Co. viii. 11; τί, Lk. xiii. 32[R G]; Ro. xv. 
28; 2 Co. vii. 1; viii. 6, 11; Phil.i.6; Heb. viii. 5; ras 
Aarpeías, to perform religious services, discharge relig- 
ious rites, Heb. ix. 6 (similarly in prof. writ., as θρησκείας, 
Hat. 2, 37; óprás, 4, 186; θυσίαν, θυσίας, 2, 63; 4, 26; 
Hdian. 1. 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]; λειτουργίας, Philo de som. 
i. 8.37). Mid. (in Grk. writ. to take upon one's self: ra 
τοῦ γήρως, the burdens of old age, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 8; 
θάνατον, Xen. apol. 33; with the force of the act.: τί, 
Polyb. 1, 40, 16; 2, 58, 10) to make an end for one's self, 
i. e. to leave off (cf. παύω) : τῇ σαρκί, so as to give your- 
selves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it, Gal. iii. 3 [oth- 
ers take it passively here: are ye perfected in etc., cf. 
Meyer ]. 2. to appoint to, impose upon : τινὶ παθήματα, 
in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9 (τὴν δίκην, Plat. legg. 10 fin.).* 

ἐπιτήδειος, -eía, -euov, also -os, -ov, [cf. W. $11, 1], (éme- 
τηδές, adv., enough; and this acc. to Buttmann fr. ἐπὶ 
τάδε [ὃ cf. Vaniéek p. 2717); 1. fit, suitable, conven- 
ient, advantageous. 2. needful; plur. τὰ ἐπιτήδεια esp. 
the necessaries of life (Thue. et sqq.): with addition of 
τοῦ σώματος, Jas. ii. 16.* 

ἐπι-τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. ἐπιτιθέασι (Mt. xxiii. 4; ef. W. 
$14, 1 b.; B. 44 (38) ; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505; Küh- 
ner i. p. 643; [Jelf § 274; and on this and foll. forms 
see Veitch s. vv. τίθημι, ri8éo ]), impv. ἐπιτίθει (1 Tim. 
v. 22; see Matthiae $ 210, 2 and 6; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. 
p.508; Kühner § 209, 5; [Jelf §°274 obs. 4]) ; impf. 3 
pers. plur. ἐπετίθουν (Acts viii. 17 RG), ἐπετίθεσαν (ib. 
LT Tr WH; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509; B. 45 (39)) ; 
fut. ἐπιθήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπέθηκα ; 2 aor. ἐπέθην, impv. ἐπίθες 
(Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. 18; Jude. xviii. 19); Mid., 


ἐπιτιμάω 


[pres. ἐπιτίθεμαι] : fut. ἐπιθήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐπεθέμην ; [1 
aor. pass. ἐπετέθην (Mk. iv. 21 RG)]; in Sept. chiefly 
for i, ow and aen; 1. Active: a. to put or lay 
upon: τὶ ἐπί τι, Mt. xxiii. 4; xxvii. 29 RGL; Mk. iv. 21 
RG; Lk. xv. 5; Jn. ix. [6 WH txt. Tr mrg.], 15; [xix. 2 
L mrg., see below]; Acts xv. 10 [cf. W. 318 (298) ; B. 
261 (224)]; xxviii. 3; τὲ ἐπί τινος, gen. of thing, Mt. 
xxvii. 29 T Tr WH; ἐν with dat. of thing, Mt. xxvii. 29 
L T Tr WH; τὴν χεῖρα [or τὰς χεῖρας or χεῖρας] ἐπί τινα, 


Mt. ix. 18; Mk. viii. 22 [(QWH Tr txt. €6nxev)]; xvi. 185- 


Acts viii. 17; [ix. 17]; Rev.i.17 Rec.; ἐπί τινα πληγάς, 
calamities, Rev. xxii. 18 [but see b. below]; ἐπάνω τινός, 
Mt. xxi. 7 RG; xxvii. 37; ἐπί τινος, Lk. viii. 16 RG; τί 
τινι, Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 2 [not L mrg., see above]; 
Acts xv. 28; τινὶ ὄνομα, Mk. iii. 16 sq. ; τινὲ τὰς χεῖρας, Mt. 
xix. 13 [ef. B. 233 (201) ; W. 288 (270 sq.)], 15; Mk. v. 
23; [viii. 23, here Tr mrg. airo]; Lk. iv. 40; xiii. 13; 
Acts vi. 6; viii. 19; xiii. 3; xix. 6; xxviii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 
22; [τινὶ τὴν χεῖρα, Mk. vii. 32]; χεῖρα [RK G, χεῖρας or 
τὰς χεῖρας LT Tr WH], Acts ix. 12; rui πληγάς, to in- 
flict blows, lay stripes on one, Lk. x. 30; Acts xvi. 
23. b. toadd to: Rev. xxii. 18 (opp. to ἀφαιρεῖν vs. 19). 
2. Middle; a. tohave put on, bid to be laid on; τὶ ἐπί τι 
(Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,4): τὰ πρὸς τὴν χρείαν, sc. τινί, to provide 
one with the things needed [al. put on board se. the ship], 
Acts xxviii. 10. Db. to lay or throw one’s self upon; with 
dat. of pers. to attack one, to make an assault on one : 
Acts xviii. 10; Ex. xxi. 14; xviii. 11; 2 Chr. xxiii. 13, 
and often in prof. writ.; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 593 
(552). Cowr.: συν-επιτίθημι.} * 

ἐπι-τιμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπετίμα, 3 pers. plur. 
ἐπετίμων; 1 aor. ἐπετίμησα; Sept. for 1; in Grk. 
writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor: τινά, Hat. 6, 39. 
2. to raise the price of: 6 σῖτος ἐπετιμήθη, Dem. 918, 22; 
al. 3. to adjudge, award, (fr. τιμή in the sense of 
merited penalty): τὴν δίκην, Hdt. 4, 43. 4. to taz with 
fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so 
'Thuc., Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2; τινί, 
charge one with wrong, Lk. [ix. 55]; xvii. 3; xxiii. 40; 
to rebuke — in order to curb one's ferocity or violence 
(hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to re- 
strain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), Mt. 
viii. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39, 41; viii. 94; ix. 
42; Jude 9 [where Rec." strangely ἐπιτιμῆσαι (1 aor. 
act. inf.) for -μήσαι (opt. 3 pers. sing.)]; or to keep one 
away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Mk. x. 
13; foll. by tva (with a verb expressing the opposite of 
what is censured): Mt. xx. 31; Mk. x. 48; LK. xviii. 
39; with the addition of λέγων [καὶ λέγει, or the like] 
and direct discourse: Mk. i. 25 [T om. WH br. λέγων]; 
viii.33; ix. 25; Lk.iv.35; xxiii. 40, (cf. Ps. cv. (evi.) 9; 
cxyiii. (exix.) 21; Zech. iii. 2; and the use of *y1 inNah. 
i4; Mal. iii. 11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to ad- 
monish or charge sharply: τινί, Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 30; 
Lk. ix. 21 (ἐπιτιμήσας αὐτοῖς παρήγγειλεν, foll. by the inf.), 
xix. 39; with ἵνα added, Mt. xvi. 20 L WH txt.; Mk. 
viii. 30; tva μή, Mt. xii. 16; Mk. iii. 12. [Cf. Trench 
$ iv: Schmidt ch. 4, 11.]* 


245 





ἐπιφάνεια 


ἐπιτιμία, -ας, 4, (ἐπιτιμάω), punishment (in Grk. writ. τὸ 
ἐπιτίμιον) : 2 Co. ii. 6 [B. $147, 29]. (Sap. iii. 10; [al.].) * 

[ém-ro-avré, Rec.* in Acts i. 15; ii. 1, ete.; see αὐτός, 
III. 1, and cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Unters. p. 125 sq.] 

ἐπι-τρέπω ; 1 aor. ἐπέτρεψα; Pass., [ pres. ἐπιτρέπομαι]:; 
2 aor. énerpamnv; pf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπιτέτραπται (1 Co. 
xiv. 34 RG); fr. Hom. down; 1. to turn to, transfer, 
commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave: 1 Co. 
xvi.7; Heb. vi. 3; τινί, Mk. v.13; Jn. xix. 38; with an 
inf. added, Mt. viii. 21; xix. 8; Lk. viii. 32; ix. 59, 61; 
Acts xxi. 39 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and without the dat. Mk. 
x. 4; foll. by acc. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L T Tr 
WH πορευθέντι) ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7, 8; Plato, legg. 5 p. 
130 d. Pass. ἐπιτρέπεταί τινι, with inf.: Acts xxvi. 1; 
xxviii. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 34.* 

[ἐπιτροπεύω; (fr. Hdt. down); to be ἐπίτροπος or proc- 
urator: of Pontius Pilate in Lk. iii. 1 WH (rejected) 
mrg.; see their App. ad loc.* ] 

ἐπι-τροπή, -ῆς, 7), (ἐπιτρέπω), permission, power, commis- 
sion: Acts xxvi. 12. (From Thuc. down.) * 

ἐπίτροπος, -ov, 6, (ἐπιτρέπω), univ. one to whose care or 
honor anything has been intrusted ; a curator, guardian, 
(Pind. Ol. 1, 171, et al.; Philo de mundo ὃ 7 6 θεὸς καὶ 
πατὴρ kai τεχνίτης καὶ ἐπίτροπος τῶν ἐν οὐρανῷ τε kai ἐν 
κόσμῳ). Spec. 1. a steward or manager of a house- 
hold, or of lands ; an overseer: Mt. xx. 8; Lk. viii. 3; 
Xen. oec. 12, 2; 21, 9; (Aristot. oec. 1, 5 [p. 13445, 26] 
δούλων δὲ εἴδη δύο, ἐπίτροπος καὶ ἐργάτης). 2. one who 
has the care and tutelage of children, either where the 
father is dead (a guardian of minors: 2 Mace. xi. 1; 
; ἐπίτροπος ὀρφάνων, Plato, lege. 6 p. 766 c.; Plut. 
3; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael. 
vy. h. 8, 26): Gal. iv. 2.* 

ἐπι-τυγχάνω: 2 aor. ἐπέτυχον ; 1. to light or hit 
upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thue., Xen., Plato). 
2. to attain to, obtain: Jas. iv. 2; with gen. of thing, 
Heb. vi. 15; xi. 33; with ace. of thing : τοῦτο, Ro. xi. 7 
(where Rec. τούτου). Cf. Matthiae ὃ 328; [W. 200 
(188)].* 

ἐπι-φαίνω; 1 aor. inf. ἐπιφᾶναι (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
24 sqq.; W.89 (85); B.41 (35); [Sept. Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 
17; exvii. (exviii.) 27, cf. Ixvi. (Ixvii.) 2]); 2 aor. pass. 
ἐπεφάνην; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to show to or 
upon; to bring to light. 2. intrans. and in Pass. to 
appear, become visible; a. prop.: of stars, Acts xxvii. 
20 (Theocr. 2, 11); τινί, to one, Lk. i. 79. b. fig. i. q. 
to become clearly known, to show one’s self: Tit. iii. 4; 
rwt, Tit. ii. 11." 

ἐπιφάνεια, -as, 7, (ἐπιφανής), an appearing, appearance, 
(Tertull. apparentia); often used by the Greeks of a 
glorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad- 
vent to help; in 2 Mace. of signal deeds and events 
betokening the presence and power of God as helper; 
ef. Grimm on Mace. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough 
exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Note B) in 
the Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq. 
(1882)]. In the N. T. the ‘advent’ of Christ, — not 
only fhat which has already taken place and by which 


ἐπιφανής 


his presence and power appear in the saving light he 
has shed upon mankind, 2 Tim. i. 10 (note the word 
φωτίσαντος in this pass.) ; but also that illustrious return 
from heaven to earth hereafter to occur: 1 Tim. vi. 14; 
2 Tim. iv. 1,8; Tit. ii. 13 [on which see esp. Prof. Abbot 
τι. 5.7; ἡ ἐπιφάνεια (i. e. the breaking forth) τῆς παρου- 
σίας αὐτοῦ, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.]* 

ἐπιφανής, -és, (ἐπιφαίνω), conspicuous, manifest, illus- 
trious: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the 
Sept. here and in Judg. xiii. 6 [Alex.]; Hab. i. 7; Mal. 
i. 14 thus render the word NW terrible, deriving it in- 
correctly from ri? and so confounding it with my." 

ἐπι-φαύσκω (i.q. the ἐπιφώσκω of Grk. writ., cf. W. 
90 (85); B. 67 (59)): fut. émufpaóco; to shine upon: 
τινί, Eph. v. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will pour 
upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light 
to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5; xxxi. 26; 
[xli. 9]; Acta Thomae ὃ 34.) * 

ἐπι-φέρω ; [impf. ἐπέφερον); 2 aor. inf. ἐπενεγκεῖν ; 
[pres. pass. ἐπιφέρομαι] ; 1. to bring upon, bring for- 
ward : αἰτίαν, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic 
writ. fr. Thue. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5, 2; Joseph. 
antt. 2, 6, 7; 4, 8, 38; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)), 
Acts xxv. 18 (where L T Tr WH ἔφερον) ; κρίσιν, Jude 
9. 2. to lay upon, to inflict: τὴν ὀργήν, Ro. iii. 5 
(πληγήν, Joseph. antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring upon i. e. 
in addition, to add, increase: θλίψιν τοῖς δεσμοῖς, Phil. i. 
16 (17) Ree., but on this pass. see ἐγείρω, 4 ¢.; (πῦρ 
ἐπιφέρειν πυρί, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [ef. W. § 52, 
4: 1}. 4. to pul upon, cast upon, impose, (φάρμακον, 
Plat. ep. 8 p. 354 b.): τὶ ἐπί τινα, in pass, Acts xix. 12, 
where L T Tr WH ἀποφέρεσθαι, q. v.* 

ἐπι-φωνέω, -@: [impf. ereavovy]; to call out to, shout: 
foll. by direct disc., Lk. xxiii. 21; Acts xii. 22; foll. by 
the dat. of a pers. Acts xxii. 24; ri, Acts xxi. 34 L T 
Tr WII. [(Soph. on.)]* 

ἐπι-φώσκω ; [impf. ἐπέφωσκον] ; to grow light, to dawn 
[cf..B. 68 (60)]: Lk. xxiii. 54; foll. by eis, Mt. xxviii. 
1, on which see eis, A. II. 1.* 

€mxepéo, -@: impf. ἐπεχείρουν; 1 aor. ἐπεχείρησα; 
(xetp) 3 1. prop. to put the hand to (Hom. Od. 24, 
386, 395). 2. often fr. Hdt. down, to take in hand, 
undertake, attempt, (anything to be done), foll. by the 
inf.: Lk.i.1; Actsix.29; xix. 18; (2 Mace. ii. 29; vii. 
19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the 
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.* 

em-xéw; fr. Hom. down; to pour upon: τί, Lk. x. 34 
(sc. ἐπὶ τὰ rpaópara; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. v. 11).* 

ἐπι-χορηγέω, à; 1 aor. impv. ἐπιχορηγήσατε; Pass. 
[ pres. emtyopnyotpar]; 1 fut. ἐπιχορηγηθήσομαι; (see χορη- 
yew); to supply, furnish, present, (Germ. darreichen) : 
τινί τι, 2 Co. ix. 10; Gal. iii. 55 i. q. to show or afford 
by deeds: τὴν ἀρετήν, 2 Pet. i. 5; in pass., εἴσοδος, fur- 
nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. 11; Pass. to be supplied, min- 
istered unto, assisted, (so the simple χορηγεῖσθαι in Xen. 
rep. Athen. 1, 13; Polyb. 3, 75,3; 4, 77,2; 9, 44,1 4 
Sir. xliv. 6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, where Vulg. 
subministratum. (Rare in prof. writ. as Dion. Hal. tl. 


246 





» 
επος 


42; Phal ep. 50; Diog. Laért. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr. 
probl. 1, 81].)* 

ἐπι-χορηγία, -as, 7, (ἐπιχορηγέω, q. V-), (Vulg. submin- 
istratio), a supplying, supply: Eph. iv. 16; Phil. i. 19. 
(Eccl. writers.) * 

émexplo: 1 aor. ἐπέχρισα;; to spread on, anoint: τὶ ἐπί 
τιν anything upon anything, Jn. ix. 6 [WH txt. Tr mre. 
ἐπέθηκεν] ; τί, to anoint anything (se. with anything), 
ibid. 11. (Hom. Od. 21,179; Leian. hist. scrib. 62.) * 

ἐπ-οικοδομέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐπῳκοδόμησα, and without 
auem. ἐποικοδόμησα (1 Co. iii. 14 Ὁ Tr WH; cf. 'Tdf.'s 
note on Acts vii. 47, [see oixodopéw]); Pass., pres. ἐποι- 
κοδομοῦμαι; 1 aor. ptep. ἐποικοδομηθέντες ; in the N. T. 
only in the fig. which likens a company of Christian 
believers to an edifice or temple; to build upon, build up, 
(Vulg. superaedifico) ; absol. [like our Eng. build up] 
viz. *to finish the structure of which the foundation has 
already been laid,’ i. e. in plain language. to give con- 
stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con- 
formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where L T Tr WII οἰκοδ. 
[Vulg. aedifico]); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Td£.); ἐπὶ 
τὸν θεμέλιον, 1 Co. iii. 12; τί, ibid. 14; ἐν Χριστῷ, with 
the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual 
life, Col. ii. 7; ἐποικοδομηθ. ἐπὶ θεμελίῳ τῶν ἀποστόλων, 
on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping 
the fig.) gathered together into a church by the apostles’ 
preaching of the gospel, Eph. ii. 20; ἐποικοδομεῖν ἑαυτὸν 
τῇ πίστει, Jude 20, where the sense is, ‘resting on your 
most holy faith as a foundation, make progress, rise like 
an edifice higher and higher.’ (Thue., Xen., Plato, al.) * 

ἐπ-οκέλλω: 1 aor. ἐπώκειλα; to drive upon, strike 
against: τὴν ναῦν [i. e. to run the ship ashore], Acts 
xxvii 41 RG; see ἐπικέλλω. (dt. 6, 16; 7, 182; 
Thue. 4, 26.)* 

ἐπ-ονομάζω : [pres. pass. ἐπονομάζομαι]; fr. dt. down; 
Sept. for Np; to put a name upon, name; Pass. to be 
named: Ro. ii. 17; ef. Fritzsche ad loc.* 

ἐπ-οπτεύω [ptep. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LT Tr WH]; 1 aor. 
ptep. ἐποπτεύσαντες ἃ 1. to be an overseer (Homer, 
Hesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attentively; to 
watch (Aeschyl., Dem., al): τί, 1 Pet. iii. 2; ἔκ τινος, 
se. τὴν ἀναστροφήν, 1 Pet. ii. 12." 

ἐπόπτης, -ov, 6, (fr. unused ἐπόπτω) ; 1. an over- 
seer, inspector, see ἐπίσκοπος; (Aeschyl., Pind., al.; of 
God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39; vii. 35; 3 Mace. ii. 21; Add. 
to Esth. v. 1; ἀνθρωπίνων ἔργων, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59. 
3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything: so in 2 
Pet.i.16; inasmuch as those were called ἐπόπται by 
the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high- 
est] grade of the Eleusinian mysteries (Plut. Alcib. 22, 
and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig- 
nate those privileged to be present at the heavenly spec- 
tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.* 

ἔπος. -eos, (τους). τό, @ word : ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν (see εἶπον, 
1 a. p. 1815), Heb. vii. 9." 


[Sxx. ἔπος seems primarily to designate a word as an ar- 
ticulate manifestation of a mental state, and so to differ from 
ῥῆμα (q. v., the mere vocable; for its relation to λόγος see 
λόγος 1. 1.] 


ἐπουράνιος 


ἐπ-ουράνιος, -oy, (οὐρανός), prop. existing in or above 
heaven, heavenly ; 1. existing in heaven: ó πατὴρ émov- 
ράνιος, i. e. God, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. (θεοί, θεός, Hom. Od. 
17,484; Il. 6, 131, ete.; 3 Mace. vi. 28; vii. 6) ; οἱ ἐπου- 
ράνιοι the heavenly beings, the inhabitants of heaven, 
(Leian. dial. deor. 4, 3; of the gods, in Theocr. 25, 5): 
of angels, in opp. to ἐπίγειοι and καταχθόνιοι, Phil. ii. 10 ; 
Ienat. ad Trall. 9, [ef. Polye. ad Philipp. 2]; σώματα, 
the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, acc. to the 
universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as 
animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 376; Gfrérer, Philo 
ete. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq.; Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p. 
306; yet cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loc.], cf. Job xxxviii. 7; 
Enoch xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. xv. 40; ἡ 
βασιλεία ἡ ἐπουρ. (on which see p. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; su b- 
stantially the same as 7 πατρὶς ἡ ἐπουρ. Heb. xi. 16 
and Ἱερουσαλὴμ émovp. xii. 22; κλῆσις, a calling made 
(by God) in heaven, Heb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref. 
toits end as well asto its origin; cf. Lünem. ad loc.], 
cf. Phil. iii. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noé 
$6]. The neut. rà ἐπουράνια denotes [cf. W. § 34, 2] 
a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes 
of God to grant salvation to men through the death of 
Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see ἐπίγειος). b. the heavenly re- 
gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels: 
Eph. i. 3, 20 (where Lehm. txt. οὐρανοῖς) ; ii. 6; iii. 10; 
the lower heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi. 
12[cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air]. c. the heavenly temple 
or sanctuary: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly 
origin and nature: 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to xoixos) ; ἡ 
δωρεὰ ἡ ἐπουρ. Heb. vi. 4.* 

ἑπτά, oi, at, τά, seven: Mt. xii. 45; xv. 34; Mk. viii. 5 
&q.; Lk. ii. 36; Acts vi. 3, ete.; often in the Apocalypse; 
οἱ ἑπτά, SC. διάκονοι, Acts xxi. 8. In Mt. xviii. 22 it is 
joined (instead of ἑπτάκις) to the numeral adv. ἑβδομη- 
kovráxts, in imitation of the Hebr. yaw, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 
164; Prov. xxiv. 16; [see ἑβδομηκοντάκις, and cf. Keil, 
Com. on Mt. l. c.]. 

ἑπτάκις, (ἑπτά), seven times: Mt. xviii. 21 sq.; Lk. xvii. 
4. [(Pind., Arstph., al.)]* 

émrakis-x vot, -at, -a, seven thousand: Ro. xi. 4. [(Hdt.)]* 

Erro, see εἶπον. 

"Epacros, -ov, 6, Hrastus, (ἐραστός beloved, [cf. Chan- 
dler $ 325; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 30]), the name 
of two Christians: 1. the companion of the apostle 
Paul, Acts xix. 22; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth, 
Ro. xvi. 233. Which of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv. 
20 cannot be determined.* 

épavvaw, a later and esp. Alexandrian [cf. Sturz, Dial. 
Maced. et Alex. p. 117] form for ἐρευνάω, q. v. Cf. Tdf. 
ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. xxxvii.; [ed. maj. p. xxxiv.; esp. 
ed. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.]; B. 58 (50). 

ἐργάζομαι ; depon. mid.; impf. εἰργαζόμην (ἠργαζόμην, 
Acts xviii. 3 LT Tr WH; [so elsewh. at times; this 
var. in augm. is found in the aor. also]; cf. W. $ 12, 8; 
B. 33 (29 sq.); Steph. 'Thesaur. iii. 1970 c.; [Curtius, Das 
Verbum, i. 124; Cramer, Anecd. 4, 412; Veitch s. v.]) ; 
1 aor. εἰργασάμην (qpyac. Mt. xxv. 16; [xxvi. 10]; Mk. 


247 








ἐργασία 


xiv. 6, in T WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 T 
Tr WH; cf. reff. as above]) ; pf. εἴργασμαι, in a pass. 
sense [cf. W. § 38, 7e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk. 
writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.]; (έργον) ; Sept. for oy, "3y; 
sometimes for TWy ; l. absol a. to work, labor, do 
work: it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14; 
Jn. v. 17; ix. 4; 2 Th. iii.10; with addition of ταῖς 
χερσί, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 11; with acc. of time: 
νύκτα kai ἡμέραν, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but Ltxt. T' Tr WH the 
gen. as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see ἡμέρα, 1a.); cf. W. § 30, 11 
and Ellie. on 1 Tim. v. 5]; with the predominant idea 
of working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 (ἐν τῷ ἀμπελῶνι); Acts 
xviii. 3; 1 Co. ix. 6; 2 Th. iii. 12; acc. to the concep- 
tion characteristic of Paul, 6 ἐργαζόμενος he that does 
works conformed to the law (Germ. der Werkthátige) : 
Ro.iv.4sq. b. to trade, to make gains by trading, (cf. 
our “do business”): ἔν τινι, with a thing, Mt. xxv. 16 
(often so by Dem.). 2. trans. a. (to work i. e.) to 
do, work out: τί, Col. iii. 23; 2 Jn. 8 (with which [ace. 
to reading of L T Tr txt.] cf. 1 Co. xv. 58 end); μηδέν, 
2 Th. iii. 11; ἔργον, Acts xiii. 41 (Opa dpa, Hab. i. 5); 
ἔργον καλὸν εἴς τινα, Mt. xxvi. 10; ἔν τινι (dat. of pers. 
[cf. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Rec. εἰς ἐμέ]; ἔργα, 
wrought, pass., Jn. iii. 21; τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ, what God 
wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28; ix. 4; τοῦ κυρίου, to give 
one's strength to the work which the Lord wishes to 
have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; τὸ ἀγαθόν, [ Ro. ii. 10]; Eph. 
iv. 28; πρός twa, Gal. vi. 10; κακόν τινί τι, Ro. xiii. 10 
(twa τι is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kühner $ 411, 5]); 
τί εἴς twa, 3 Jn. 5. with ace. of virtues or vices, (to work 
i.e.) to exercise, perform, commit: δικαιοσύνην, Acts x. 
35; Heb. xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2; Zeph. ii. 8); τὴν avo- 
μίαν, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; ἁμαρτίαν, 
Jas.ii.9. σημεῖον, bring to pass, effect, Jn. vi. 30; τὰ 
ἱερά, to be busied with the holy things i. e. to administer 
those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi- 
ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also, 
1 Co. ix. 13; τὴν θάλασσαν lit. work the sea (mare exerceo, 
Justin. hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [cf. * do busi- 
ness on," Ps. cvii. 23] and make one's living from it, Rev. 
xviii. 17 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk. 
writ. as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966°, 26]: Dion. Hal. 
antt.3,46; App. Punic. 2; [Lcian. de elect. 5; W. 223 
(209)]). to cause lo exist, produce: τί, so (for R G xa- 
τεργάζεται) 2 Co. vii. 10 LT Tr WH; Jas. i. 20 LT Tr 
WH. b. to work for, earn by working, to acquire, (cf. 
Germ. erarbeiten) : τὴν βρῶσιν, Jn. vi. 27 (χρήματα, Hat. 
1, 245 τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2; Dem. 1358, 12; 
ἀργύριον, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d.; βίον, Andoc. myst. 
[18, 42] 144 Bekk.; θησαυρούς, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6; 
βρῶμα, Palaeph. 21, 2; al); acc. to many interpreters 
also 2 Jn. 8; but see 2a. above. [Comp.: κατ-, mepr, 
προσ-εργάζομαι.} * 

ἐργασία, -as, 7, (ἐργάζομαι) ; 1. i. q. τὸ ἐργάζεσθαι, 
a working, performing: ἀκαθαρσίας, Eph. iv. 19. 2: 
work, business: Acts xix. 25 (Xen. oec. 6, 8 et al). 
3. gain got by work, profit: Acts xvi. 19; παρέχειν epya- ' 
σίαν τινί, ib. 165 xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above]; 


ἐργάτης 


(Xen. mem. 3, 10,1; eyneg. 3,3; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4. 
endeavor, pains, LA. V. diligence]: δίδωμι ἐργασίαν, after 
the Latinism operam do, Lk. xii. 58 (Hermog. de invent. 
8, 5, 7).* 

ἐργάτης, -ov, 6, (ἐργάζομαι) ; 1. as in Grk. writ. a 
workman, alaborer: usually one who works for hire, Mt. 
x. 10; Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer, 
Mt.ix.37sq.; xx. 1sq.8; Lk. x. 2; Jas. v. 4, (Sap. xvii. 
16); those whose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen 
in the restricted sense], Acts xix. 25 (opp. to rois rexvc- 
ταις [ A. V. craftsmen], ib. 24), cf. Bengel ad loc.; those 
who as teachers labor to propagate and promote Christi- 
anity among men: 2 Co. xi. 13; Phil. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 
15, cf. Mt. ix. 37 sq.; Lk. x. 2. 2. one who does, a 
worker, perpetrator : τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. xiii. 27 (τῆς ἀνομίας, 
1 Macc. iii. 6 ; τῶν καλῶν καὶ σεμνῶν. Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).* 

ἔργον, -ov, τό, anciently Fépyov, (Germ.Werk, [ Eng. work; 
ef. Vanitek p. 922]); Sept. for 95, 773, and count- 
less times for nawop and ny»; work i. e. 1. busi- 
ness, employment, that with which any one is occupied : 
Mk. xiii. 34 (διδόναι τινὶ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ) ;. Acts xiv. 26 
(πληροῦν) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1; thus of the work of salvation 
committed by God to Christ: διδόναι and τελειοῦν, Jn. 
xvii.4; of the work to be done by the apostles and other 
Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of 
the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v. 
13; Phil.i.22; τὸ ἔργον τινός, zen. of the subj., the work 
which one does, service which one either performs or 
ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; ἔργον ποιεῖν τινος to do 
the work of one (i. e. incumbent upon him), εὐαγγελι- 
στοῦ, 2 Tim.iv.5; τὸ ἔργον τινός i. e. assigned by one and 
to be done for his sake: τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ τελειοῦν, used 
of Christ, Jn. iv. 34; (rod) Χριστοῦ (WH txt. Tr mre. 
κυρίου), Phil. ii. 30; τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Co. xv. 58; xvi. 10; with 
gen. of thing, eis ἔργον διακονίας. Eph. iv. 12, which means 
either to the work in which the ministry consists, the 
work performed in undertaking the ministry, or to the 
execution of the ministry. of that which one under- 
takes to do, enterprise, undertaking : Acts v. 38 (Deut. 
xv. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, any 
thing accomplished by hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. ποί- 
nua, κτίσμα) : 1 Co. iii. 13-15; with the addition of τῶν 
χειρῶν, things formed by the hand of man, Acts vii. 41; 
of the works of God visible in the created world, Heb. 
i. 10, and often in Sept.; τὰ ἐν τῇ γῇ ἔργα. the works of 
nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10; of the arrange- 
ments of God for men’s salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec.; τὸ 
ἔργ. τοῦ θεοῦ what God works in man, i. 6. a life dedi- 
cated to God and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20; to the same effect, 
substantially, ἔργον ἀγαθόν. Phil. i. 6 (see ἀγαθός, 2); τὰ 
ἔργα τοῦ διαβόλου. sins and all the misery that springs 
from them, 1 Jn. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done: 
the idea of working is emphasized in opp. to that which 
is less than work, Jas. i. 25; Tit.i. 16; τὸ ἔργον is dis- 
tinguished fr. ὁ λόγος : Lk. xxiv. 19; Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. 
x. 115 Col. iii. 17; 2 Th. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 18, (Sir. iii. 8) ; 


plur. ἐν λόγοις kai ἐν ἔργοις. Acts vii. 22 (4 Macc. v. 38 | 


(37); for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk. 


248 








ἔργον 


writ., see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 268 sq.; Bergler on 
Alciphr. p. 54; Bornemann and Kiihner on Xen. mem. 
2, 3,6; Passow s. v. p. 1159; [L.and S. s. v. 1, 4; Lob. 
Paralip. pp. 64 sq., 525 sq.]). ἔργα is used of the acts 
of God both as creator, Heb. iv. 10; and as gov- 
ernor, Jn. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41; Rev. xv. 3; of sundry 
signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him 
and to accomplish their salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [cf. ἔργα 
τῆς σοφίας ib. 19 T WH Tr txt.], and esp. in the Gosp. of 
John, as v. 20, 36; vii. 3; x.38; xiv. 11 sq. ; xv. 24, (cf. 
Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2); they are 
called τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρός, i. 6. done at the bidding and 
by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37; ix. 8 56.» cf. x. 25, 32; 
xiv. 10; καλά, as beneficent, Jn. x. 32 sq. ; and connected 
with the verbs δεικνύναι, ποιεῖν, ἐργάζεσθαι, τελειοῦν. ἔργα 
is applied to the conduct of men, measured by the 
standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad, 
Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. xi. 48; Jn. iii. 20; Rev. ii. 6; xvi. 11, 
ete.; or good, Jn. iii. 21 ; Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20-22, 24-26 ; 
iii. 13; Rev. ii. 5, 9 [Rec.], 19; iii. 8; νόμος ἔργων, the 
law which demands good works, Ro. iii. 27; with a 
suggestion of toil, or struggle with hindrances, in the 
phrase καταπαύειν ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ, Heb. iv. 10; to. 
recompense one xara τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ, Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. 
14; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. lxi. (1xii.) 13), ef. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev. 
xviii. 6; xx.12sq.; the sing. τὸ ἔργον is used collectively 
of an aggregate of actions (Germ. das Handeln), Jas. i. 
4; τινός, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling 
and acting, his aims and endeavors: Gal. vi.4; 1 Pet. i. 
17; Rev. xxii. 12; τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου. the course of action 
demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: ἀγαθὸν 
ἔργον, i.e. either a benefaction, 2 Co. ix. 8; plur. Acts 
ix. 36; or every good work springing from piety, Ro. ii. 
Zs Col. 15105 ὙΠῸ: ἢ 7: πὰρ ἢ: Gene meio τ 
17; Heb. xiii. 21 [T WH om. épy.]; plur. Eph. ii. 10; 
or what harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii. 
3; Tit.iii.1; ἔργον καλόν, a good deed, noble action, (see 
καλός, b. and c.) : Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; plur. (often 
in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25; vi. 18; Tit. 
ii. 7; iii. 8, 14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. ii. 12; τὰ ἔργα rà ev 
δικαιοσύνῃ equiv. to rà δίκαια, Tit. iii. 5; rà ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 28 
(Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same 
sense ἔργα pov i. e. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26; ἔργον πίστεως, 
wrought by faith, the course of conduct which springs 
from faith, 1 Th. i. 3; 2 Th.i.11; ἔργα ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας, 
Acts xxvi. 20; ἔργα πεπληρωμένα ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. 
iii. 2; ἔργα πονηρά, Col. i. 21; 2 Jn. 11, cf. Jn. iii. 19; vii. 
7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; ἔργα νεκρά, works devoid of that life 
which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrouglt, 
which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of 
God and of all reward: Heb. vi. 1; ix. 14; ἄκαρπα, Eph. 
v. 11 (ἄχρηστα, Sap. iii. 11; the wicked man pera τῶν 
ἔργων αὐτοῦ συναπολεῖται, Barn. ep. 21, 1) ; ἄνομα, 2 Pet. 
ii. 8; ἔργα ἀσεβείας, Jude 15; τοῦ σκότους, done in dark- 
ness, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11; [opp. to ἔργ. τοῦ φωτός, 
Ro. xiii. 12 L mrg.]; in Paul's writ. ἔργα νόμου, works 
demanded by and agreeing with the law (cf. Wieseler, 


ἐρεθίζω 


Com. üb. d. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.): Ro. iii. 20, 28; 
ix. 32 Rec. ; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 2, 5, 10; and simply ἔργα: 
Rov iv. 25 θ᾽ ix. 19 GB sabre Go DoD Tie ΓΕ: αἱ: 67; 
Eph. ii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see δικαιόω, 3 b.). τὰ ἔργα τινὸς 
sroteiv, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth- 
er, to follow in action another's example: Abraham's, 
Jn. viii. 39; that of the devil, Jn. viii. 41. 

ἐρεθίζω ; 1 aor. ἠρέθισα ; (ἐρέθω to excite); to stir up, 
excite, stimulate: τινά, in a good sense, 2 Co. ix. 2; as 
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, in a bad sense, to pro- 
voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lehm. παροργίζετε. ἢ 

ἐρείδω: to fix, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptep. ἐρεί- 
caca (ἡ mpgpa), stuck [R. V. struck], Acts xxvii. 41. 
(From Hom. down.) * 

épevyopar: fut. ἐρεύξομαι; 1. fo spit or spue out, 
(Hom.). 2. to be emptied, discharge ilself, used of 
streams (App. Mithr. c. 103); with the ace. to empty, 
discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters: Ley. xi. 10 
Sept. S. by a usage foreign to classie Greek [W. 23 
(22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter: Mt. xiii. 
35 (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2; cf. xviii. (xix.) 3; exliv. 7 
[Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Lobeck 
ad Phryn. p. 63; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].* 

ἐρευνάω, -à ; 1 aor. impv. ἐρεύνησον ; (ἡ ἔρευνα a search) ; 
fr. Hom. down; to search, examine into: absol. Jn. vii. 
52; ri, Jn. v. 39; Ro. viii. 27; 1 Co. ii. 10; Rev. ii. 23 
with which passage cf. Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; xx. 12; foll. 
by an indir. quest. 1 Pet. i. 11 (2 S. x. 3; Prov. xx. 27). 
The form ἐραυνάω (q. v. in its place) T Tr WH have 
received everywhere into the text, but Lehm. only in 
Rev.ii.23. [Cowr.: é£ epevváo.] * 

ἐρημία, -as, 7, (ἔρημος), a solitude, an uninhabited re- 
gion, a waste: Mt. xv. 33; Mk. viii.4; Heb. xi. 38; opp. 
to πόλις, 2 Co. xi. 26, as in Joseph. antt. 2, 3, 1.* 

ἔρημος, -ov, (in classic Grk. also-os, -n, -ov, cf. W. § 11, 
1; [B. 25 (23); on its accent ef. Chandler §§ 393, 394; 
W. 52 (51)]); 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin- 
habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 32; Lk. 
iv. 42; ix. JO [RGL], 12; Acts i. 20, οἷο. ; ἡ ὁδός, leading 
through a desert, Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see (a, 
sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid 
and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances, 
kindred ; bereft; (so πὰ by Grk. writ. of every age, as 
Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 112; ἔρημός 
Te καὶ ὑπὸ πάντων ΕΑΝ Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed. 
Bekk.]; of a flock deserted by the shepherd, Hom. Il. 5, 
140): γυνή, a woman neglected by her husband, from 
whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is. 
liv. 1; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ's presence, in- 
struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 [L and WH txt. om.]; 
Lk. xiii. 35 Rec.; cf. Bleek, Erkliir. d. drei ersten Evv. 
ii. p. 206, (cf. Bar. iv. d Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ; 
2 Macc. viii. 35). 2. subst. ἡ ἔρημος, sc. χώρα ; Sept. 
often for 3372 ; a desert, wilderness, (Hdt. 3, 102) : Mt. 
xxiv. 26 ; Rev. xii. 6,14; xvii. 3; at ἔρημοι, desert places, 
lonely regions: Lk. i. 80; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti- 
vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the 
desert of Judza [ef. W. $ 18, 1], Mt. iii. 1; Mk. i. 3 sq.; 


249 








ἐρίφιον 


Lk. i. 80; iii. 2, 4; ὅπ. i. 23; of the desert of Arabia, 
Acts vii. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44; 1 Co. x. 5; Heb. iii. 8, 17. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wüste; Furrer in Schenkel v. 680 
sqq. ; [B. D. s. vv. Desert and Wilderness (Am. ed.)]. 

ἐρημόω, -ῶ : Pass. [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33)) 
ἐρημοῦται] ; pf. ptep. ἠρημωμένος ; 1 aor. ἠρημώθην ; (ἔρη- 
pos); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. usually for 31, DING, oDU'; 
to make desolate, lay waste; in the N.T. only i in the Pass. : 
πόλιν, Rev. xviii. 19; to ruin, bring to desolation: Ba- 
σιλείαν, Mt. xii. 25; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught: 
πλοῦτον, Rev. xviii. 17 (16) ; ἠρημωμένην καὶ γυμνὴν ποιεῖν 
τινα; to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rev. xvii. 
16.* 

ἐρήμωσις, -ews, 7, (ἐρημόω), a making desolate, desola- 
tion: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see βδέ- 
Avypa, 6. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9, 13; Sept. several times 
for MAIN, n'2U, ete.) * 

ἐρίζω: [fut. ἐρίσω, cf. B. 37 (32)]; (Epes) 5 to wrangle, 
engage in strife, (Lat. riz ari): Mt. xii. 19, where by the 
phrase οὐκ ἐρίσει the Evangelist seems to describe the 
calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of 
the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and 
practices. [(From Hom. down.) ]* 

ἐριθεία, (not ἐρίθεια, cf. W. $6, 1 g.; [Chandler § 99]) 
[-θία WH; see I, cand. df. Proleg. p. 88], -eías, ἡ, (ἐριθεύω. 
to spin wool, work in wool, Heliod. 1, 5 ; Mid. in the same 
sense, Tob. ii. 11 ; used of those who electioneer for office, 
courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar- 
istot. polit. 5, 3; the verb is derived from ἔριθος working 
for hire, ἃ hireling; fr. the Maced. age down, a spinner 
or weaver, a worker in wool, Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a 
mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office, 
Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302», 4 and 13035, 14]; hence, 
apparently, in the N. T. a courting distinction, a desire 
to put one’s self forward, a partisan and factious spirit 
which does not disdain low aris: partisanship, factiousness: 
Jas. iii. 14, 16; κατ᾽ ἐριθείαν, Phil. ii. 3; Ienat. ad Phila- 
delph. ὃ 8; οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας (see ἐκ, TT. 7), Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet 
see ἐκ, II. 12 b.]; i. q. contending against God, Ro. ii. 8 
[yet cf. Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]; in the plur. αἱ ἐριθεῖαι 
[W. § 27,3; B. $123, 2]: 2 Co. xii. 203 Gal. v. 20. See 
the very full and learned discussion of the word by 
Fritzsche in his Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq.; [of which a 
summary is given by Ellic. on Gal. v. 20. See further 
on its derivation, Lobeck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365; cf. W. 
94 (89)].* 

ἔριον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of τὸ ἔρος or etpos), wool: Heb. 
ix. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἔρις, «80s, 7, acc. ἔριν (Phil. i. 15), pl. ἔριδες (1 Co. i. 
11) and ἔρεις (2 Co. xii. 20 Rap Trtxt.; Gal. v. 20 αὶ G 
WHmrg.]; Tit. ii. 9 [R GL Tr]; see [ WH. App. p. 
157]; Lob.ad Phryn. p. 326; Matthiae $ 80 note 8 ; Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq. ; [W. 65 (63); B. 24 (22)]); conten- 
tion, strife, wrangling: Ro. i. 29; xiii. 13; 1 Co. i. 11; 
iii. 3; 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; Phil.i.15; 1 Tim. vi. 4; 
Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἐρίφιον, -ov, τό, and ἔριφος, -ov, 6, a kid, a young goat: 
Mt. xxv. 32 sq.; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14, p. 661 b.]* 


Ἑρμᾶς 


Ἑρμᾶς, acc. Ἑ, μᾶν [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, (Doric for 
Ἑρμῆς), Hermas, a certain Christian (whom Origen and 
others thought to be the author of the book entitled 
“The Shepherd” [cf. Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog. 
s. v. Hermas 27) : Ro. xvi. 14." 

ἑρμηνεία [WH -via; see I, c], τας, ἥ, (ἑρμηνεύω), interpre- 
tation (of what has been spoken more or less obscurely 
by others) : 1 Co. xii. 10 [L txt. depp. q. v.]; xiv. 26. 
[From Plato down.]* 

ἑρμηνευτής, -o), 6, (ἑρμηνεύω, q. v.), an interpreter: 1 
Co. xiv. 28 L Tr WH mre. (Plat. politic. p. 290 c.; for 
qy?2 in Gen. xlii. 23.) * 

ἑρμηνεύω : [pres. pass. ἑρμηνεύομαι] ; (fr. Ἑρμῆς, who 
was held to be the god of speech, writing, eloquence, 
learning) ; 1. to explain in words, expound: [Soph., 
Eur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans- 
late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue 
into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4, 4) : Jn.i. 88 (39) RG 
T, 42 (43); ix. 7; Heb. vii. 2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for D22A.) 
[Cowr.: d:-, μεθ-ερμηνεύω.} * 

Ἑρμῆς, acc. “Ἑρμῆν, 6, prop. name, Hermes; 1. a 
Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury): 
Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14." 

‘Eppoyévys, [i. e. born of Hermes; Tdf.’Eppoy.], -ovs, 6, 
Hermogenes, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 15.* 

ἑρπετόν, -od, τό, (fr. ἕρπω to creep, crawl, [Lat. serpo ; 
hence serpent, and fr. same root, reptile; Vaniéek p. 
1030 sq.]), « creeping thing, reptile; by prof. writ. used 
chiefly of serpents; in Hom. Od. 4, 418; Xen. mem. 1, 
4, 11 an animal of any sort; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad- 
rupeds and birds, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro. i. 23; and to 
marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7; on this last pass. cf. Gen. 
they 8. (Sept. for wD) and yj.) * 

ἐρυθρός, -d, -óv, red; fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only 
in the phrase ἡ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα the Red Sea (fr. Hat. 
down [ef. ἘΣΊΠ ἢ ΟΕ, Herod. vol. i. p. 1437), i. e. the 
Indian Ocean washing the shores of Arabia and Persia, 
with its two gulfs, of which the one lying on the east is 
called the Persian Gulf, the other on the opposite side 
the Arabian. Inthe N. T. the phrase denotes the upper 
part of the Arabian Gulf (the Heroópolite Gulf, so called 
[i. e. Gulf of Suez]), through which the Israelites made 
their passage out of Eeypt to the shore of Arabia: Acts 
vii. 36; Heb. xi. 29. (Sept. for ἢ) -:Ὁ", the sea of sedge or 
sea-weed [cf. B. D. as below]. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. 
Meer rothes; Pressel in Herzog ix. p. 239 sqq.; urrer 
in Schenkel iv. 150 sqq.; [B. D.s. vv. Red Sea and Red 
Sea, Passage of; T'rumbull, Kadesh-Barnea, p. 352sqq. Bie 

ἔρχομαι, impv. ἔρχου. ἔρχεσθε, (for the Attic ἴθι, ἴτε fr. 
εἶμι); impf. ἠρχόμην (for ἤειν and ya more com. in Attic) ; 
fut. ἐλεύσομαι; -- (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 103 sqq. ; ; Veitch s. v.]; Matthiae $ 234; 
Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq.; Krüger $40 s.v.; Kühner 
W.§ 15s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]) ; pf. ἐλήλυθα; plpf. 
ἐληλύθειν; 2 aor. ἦλθον and (occasionally by LT Tr WH 
[together or severally ]—as Mt. vi. 10; [vii. 25, 275 x. 13; 
xiv. 34; xxv. 36; Mk. i. 29; τ κλῦθι; αι 0. 1: 
vi. 17; 11.985; x1. 2 , 23]; Jn. [1.39 (40); 


§ 343; 


vi. 29; 
; Xxill. 33; xxiv. 1 


250 





ἔρχομαι 


iii. 26]; iv. 27; [xii. 9]; Acts xii. 10; [xiv. 24]; xxviii. 
14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form ἦλθα (see ἀπέρχομαι 
init. for reff.); Sept. for $13, rarely for WAS and 7; 
[fr. Hom. down]; I. to come ; 1. prop. a. of 
persons; a. univ. to come from one place into another, 
and used both of persons arriving,—as in Mt. viii. 9; xxii. 
3; Lk. vii. 8; xiv. 17 [here WH mre. read the inf., see 
their Intr. $ 404], 20; Jn. v. 7; Acts x. 29; Rev. xxii. 7, 
and very often; oí ἐρχόμενοι x. oi ὑπάγοντες, Mk. vi. 31; 
—and of those returning, as in Jn. iv. 27; ix. 7; Ro. ix. 
9. Constructions: foll. by ἀπό w. gen. of place, Mk. 
vii. 1 ; xv. 21; Acts xviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 9; w. gen. of pers., 


Mk. v. 355 Jn. iii. 2; Gal. ii. 12, ete. ; foll. by ἐκ w. gen. of 
place, Lk. v. 17 [L txt. συνέρχ.]; Jn. iii. 31, ete. ; foll. by 


eis w. ace. of place, to come into: as els τ. οἰκίαν, τὸν οἶκον, 
Mt. ii. 11; viii. 14; Mk. i. 29; v. 38, ete. ; eis τὴν πόλιν, 
Mt.ix.1, and many other exx.; foll. by eis to, towards, 
Jn. xx. 3sq.; eis τὸ πέραν, of persons going in a boat, 
Mt. viii. 28; of persons departing ék . . . eis, Jn. iv. 54; 
διά w. gen. of place foll. by eis (Ree. πρός) to, Mk. vii. 31; 
eis τ. ἑορτήν, to celebrate the feast, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; ἐν 
w. dat. of the thing with which one is equipped, Ro. xv. 
29; 1 Co. iv. 21; foll. by ἐπί w. ace. of place, (Germ. 
über, over), Mt. xiv. 28; (Germ. auf), Mk. vi. 53; (Germ. 
an), Lk. xix. 5; [xxiii. 33 L Tr]; Acts xii. 10, 12; to 
w. acc. of the thing, Mt. iii. 7; xxi. 19; Mk. xi. 13; xvi. 
2; Lk. xxiv. 1; w. acc. of pers., Jn. xix. 33; to one's 
tribunal, Acts xxiv. 8 Rec.; against one, of a military 
leader, Lk. xiv. 31; κατά w.acc., Lk. x93; Acts xvi. 7; 
mapa w. gen. of pers. Lk. viii. 49 [Lehm. ἀπό]; w. aec. 
of place, to [the side of], Mt. xv. 29, πρός to, w. acc. of 
pers., Mt. iii. 14 ; vii. 15; [xiv. 25 L T Tr WII]; Mk. ix. 
14; Lk. i. 43; Jn. i. 29; 2 Co. xiii. 1, and very often, esp. 
in the Gospels; ἀπό τινος (gen. of pers.) πρός τινα, 1 Th. 


lii. 6; with simple du of e (prop. dat. commodi or 
incommodi [ef. bus § 22,7 N. 2; B. 179 (155)]) : Mt. 
xxl 5; Rev. ii. 5,16, ἘΞ fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v 


p. E bot. ; τῇ and S. s. v. II. 47). with adverbs 
of place: πόθεν, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; Rev. vii. 13; ἄνωθεν, 
Jn. iii..31; ὄπισθεν, Mk. v. 27; ὧδε, Mt. viii. 29; Acts 
ix. 21; ἐνθάδε, Jn. iv. 15 [ἢ G L Tr], 16; ἐκεῖ, Jn. 
xviii. 3 [ef. W. 472 (440)]; ποῦ, Heb. xi. 8; ἕως τινός, 
Lk. iv. 42; ἄχρι τινός, Acts xi. 5. The purpose for 
which one comes is indicated — either by an inf., Mk. 
[v. 14 L T Tr WH]; xv. 36; Lk-i. 59; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15 
[T WH διέρχ.], and very often; or by a fut. ptep., Mt. 
xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27; or by a foll. tva, Jn. xii. 9; εἰς 
τοῦτο, tva, Acts ix. 21; or by διά τινα, Jn. xii. 9. As 
one who is.about to do something in a place must neces- 
sarily come thither, in the popular narrative style the 
phrases ἔρχεται kat, ἦλθε καί, ete., are usually placed be- 
fore verbs of action: Mt. xiii. 19, 25; Mk.ii. 18; iv. 15; 
v. 83; vi. 29; xii. 9; xiv. 87; Lk. viii. 12, 47; Jn. vi. 15; 
xi.48; xii.99; xix. 88; xx. 19, 96; xxi. 195 3!0n095 
lev. v. 7; xvii. 1; xxi.9; ἔρχου x. ἴδε (or βλέπε), Jn. i. 
46 (47); xi. 34; [and Rec. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also 
Grsb. exe. in vs. 3]; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ((T Tr WH 
ὄψεσθε], see eid, I. 1e.) ; — or ἐλθών is used, foll. by a 


ἔρχομαι 


finite verb: Mt. ii. 8; viii. 7; ix. 10, 18 ; xii. 44; xiv. 12, 
33 [RG L] ; xviii. 31 ; xxvii 64 ; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25 
[T df. εἰσελθ.1: xii. 14, 42 ; xiv. 45; xvi. 1; Acts xvi. 37, 
39 ;— or ἐρχόμενος, foll. by a finite verb : Lk. xiii. 14 ; xvi. 
21; xviii. 5. in other places ἐλθών must be rendered 
when I (thou, he, ete.) am come: Jn. xvi. 8; 2 Co. xii. 20; 
Phil. i. 27 (opp. to dav). f. to come i. e. to appear, 
make one's appearance, come before the public: so kar 
ἐξοχήν of the Messiah, Lk. iii. 16; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 27, 31; 
Heb. x. 37, who is styled pre-eminently ὁ ἐρχόμενος, i. e. 
he that cometh (i. e. is about to come) acc. to prophetic 
promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W. 
341 (320); B. 204 (176 sq.)]: Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 19 sq. ; 
with eis τὸν κόσμον added, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 
Tov κυρίου, he who is already coming clothed with divine 
authority i. e. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy- 
fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, — 
taken fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 25 sq.: Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; 
Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38 [ Tdf. om. ἐρχ. (so WH 
in their first mrg.)]; Jn. xii. 13. ἔρχεσθαι used of Elijah 
who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the 
Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11-13; of John 
the Daptist, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. i. 31; with eis 
μαρτυρίαν added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of 
* false Christs" and other deceivers, false teachers, ete. : 
Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass. with 
the addition ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, relying on my name, i. e. 
arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic 
dignity); Jn. x. 8; 2 Co. xi. 4; 2 Pet.iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 
10; with the addition ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ in his own 
authority and of his own free-will, Jn. v. 43. of the Holy 
Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the 
invisible helper of Christ's disciples after his departure 
from the world: Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 7sq. 13. of the ap- 
pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious 
teacher and the author of salvation: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 
34; Jn. v. 43; vii. 28; viii. 42; with the addition of εἰς 
τ. κόσμον foll. by iva, Jn. xii. 46; xviii. 37: eis κρίμα, tva, 
Jn. ix. 39; foll. by a telic inf. 1 Tim. i. 15 ; ἔρχεσθαι ὀπίσω 
twos, after one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30; 
ὁ ἐλθὼν Sv ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος, a terse expression for, ‘he 
that publicly appeared and approved himself (to be 
God’s son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation 
through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death 
which he underwent '[cf. p. 210* bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6; ἔρχε- 
σθαι foll. by a telie inf., Mt. v. 17; x. 34 sq.; Lk. xix. 10; 
foll. by tva, Jn. x. 10; ἐληλυθέναι and ἔρχεσθαι ἐν σαρκί 
are used of the form in which Christ as the divine Logos 
appeared among men: 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3[Rec.]; 2 Jn. 7. of 
thereturn of Jesus hereafter from heaven in 
majesty: Mt. x. 23; Actsi.11; 1 Co.iv.5 ; xi. 26; 1 
Th. v. 2; 2 Th. i. 10; with ἐν τῇ δόξῃ avro? added, Mt. 
xvi. 27; xxv. 31; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν 
(borne on the clouds) μετὰ δυνάμεως x. δόξης, Mt. xxiv. 
30; ἐν νεφέλαις, ἐν νεφέλῃ κτὰλ., Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; 
ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ (see ἐν, I. 5 c. p. 210° top), Mt. xvi. 
28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [eis τὴν 8. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.] 
b. of time, like the Lat. venio: with nouns of time, as 


251 








ἔρχομαι 


ἔρχονται ἡμέραι, in a fut. sense, will come [cf. B. 204 (176 
sq-); W. § 40, 2a.], Lk. xxiii. 29; Heb. viii. 8 fr. Jer. 
xxxviii. (xxxi.) 315 ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 
20; Lk.v. 35; xvii. 22; xxi. 65 ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα, Lk. xxii. 
7; Rev. vi. 17 ; ἔρχεται dpa, dre, Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; 
xvi. 25; foll. by tva, Jn. xvi. 2,32; ἦλθεν, is come, i. e. is 
present, Jn. xvi. 4, 21; Rev. xiv. 7, 15; ἐλήλυθε ἡ Spa, 
tva, Jn. xii. 23; xiii. 1 (LT Tr WH ἦλθεν) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii. 
1; ἐληλύθει ἡ Spa αὐτοῦ, had come (Lat. aderat), Jn. vii. 
30; viii. 20; ἔρχ- νύξ, Jn. ix. 4; ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Th. 
v. 2; καιροί, Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc- 
cur at a definite time: ὁ θερισμός, Jn. iv. 35 ; ó γάμος τοῦ 
dpviov, Rev. xix. 7 ; ἦλθεν ἡ κρίσις, Rev. xviii. 10. in imi- 
tation of the Hebr. san, 6, 7, τὸ ἐρχόμενος, -évy, -ενον, is 
i. q. to come, future [cf. B. and W.u. s.]: ὁ αἰών, Mk. x. 30; 
Lk. xviii. 30; ἡ ἑορτή, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; ἡ ὀργή, 1 Th. 
i. 10; rà ἐρχόμενα, things to come, Jn. xvi. 13 (nw271 the 
times to come, Is. xxvii. 6); in the periphrasis of the 
name of Jehovah, ὁ ὧν καὶ 6 ἢν kai ὁ ἐρχόμενος, it is 
equiv. to ἐσόμενος, Rev. i.4; iv. 8. ὁ. of things and 
events (so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent 
of natural events: ποταμοί, Mt. vii. 22 [RG]; κατακλυ- 
opos, Lk. xvii. 27; λιμός, Acts vii. 11; of the rain coming 
down ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Heb. vi. 7; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii. 
4, 32; Mk. iv. 4; of a voice that is heard (Hom. Il. 10, 
139), foll. by ἐκ with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 17 [?] ; Mk. ix. 
7 [T WH Tr mrg. éyévero]; Jn. xii. 28; of things that are 
brought: 6 λύχνος, Mk. iv. 21 (ἐπιστολή, Liban. ep. 
458; other exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Kypke, Kui- 
noel, al., on Mk. l. e.). 2. metaph. a. of Christ's 
invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power 
which through the Holy Spirit he will exert in the souls 
of his disciples: Jn. xiv. 18, 23; of his invisible advent 
in the death of believers, by which he takes them to 
himself into heaven, Jn. xiv. 3. — b. equiv. to to come 
inta being, arise, come forth, show itself, find place or in- 


fluence : τὰ σκάνδαλα, Mt. xviii. 7; Lk. xvii. 1; rà ἀγαθά, 


Ro. iii. 8 (Jer. xvii. 6) ; τὸ τέλειον, 1 Co. xiii. 10; ἡ πίστις, 
Gal. iii. 23, 25; ἡ ἀποστασία, 2 Th. ii. 3; ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ 
θεοῦ, i. q. be established, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20, 
ete.; ἡ ἐντολή, i. q. became known, Ro. vii. 9. ὁ. with 
Prepositions: ἐκ τῆς [ Lehm. ἀπὸ] θλίψεως, suffered 
tribulation, Rev. vii. 14. foll. by eis, to come (fall) into 
or unto: eis τὸ χεῖρον, into a worse condition, Mk. v. 26; 
eis πειρασμόν, Mk. xiv. 38 T WH; εἰς ἀπελεγμόν (see 
ἀπελεγμός), Acts xix. 27; εἰς τὴν ὥραν ταύτην, Jn. xii. 27; 
εἰς κρίσιν, to become liable to judgment, Jn. v. 24; εἰς 
ἐπίγνωσιν, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim.ii.4; 2 Tim. 
li. 7; eis τὸ φανερόν, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22; ets 
προκοπὴν ἐλήλυθε. has turned out for the advancement, 
Phil. i. 12; ἔρχ. ets τι, to come to a thing, is used of a 
writer who after discussing other matters passes on to 
a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1; εἰς ἑαυτόν, to come to one's 
senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17 
(Epict. diss. 3, 1, 15; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. $ 3, p. 
702 ed. Fabric.). px. ἐπί twa fo come upon one: ina 
bad sense, of calamities, Jn. xviii. 4; in a good sense, of 
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Acts xix. 6: to devolve 


ἐρῶ 2 


upon one, of the guilt and punishment of murder, Mt. 
xxiii. 35. py. πρὸς τὸν Ἰησοῦν, to commit one’s self to 
the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with 
him, Jn. v. 40; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, 65; πρὸς τὸ φῶς, to sub- 
mit one’s self to the power of the light, Jn. iii. 20 sq. 
II. (ogo: ὀπίσω τινός (INS 307), to follow one, Mt. xvi. 
24; [Mk. viii. 34 R L Tr mrg. WH]; Lk. ix. 23; xiv. 
27, (Gen. xxiv. 5, 8; xxxvii. 17, and elsewhere); zpos 
twa, Lk. xv. 20; σύν τινι, to accompany one, Jn. xxi. 3 
[cf. B. 210 (182)]; ὁδὸν ἔρχεσθαι, Lk. ii. 44 [cf. W. 
226 (212)]. [Cowr.: ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, áz-, 0c, eia-, ἐπ-εις-, παρ- 
εἰσ-, συν-εισ-, é£, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, kar-, Tap-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-; 
προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.] 

[Syn.: ἔρχεσθαι, (Balvery,) πορεύεσθαι, χωρεῖν: 
with the N.T. use of these verbs and their compounds it may be 
interesting to compare the distinctions ordinarily recognized 
in classic Grk., where ἔρχεσθαι denotes motion or progress 
generally, and of any sort, hence to come and (esp. ἐλθεῖν) 
arrive at, as well as to go (βαίνειν). βαίνειν primarily signi- 
fies to walk, take steps, picturing the mode of motion; to go 
away. πορεύεσθαι expresses motion in general, — often con- 
fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the 
bearing; hence the regular word for the march of an 
army. χωρεῖν always emphasizes the idea of separation, 
change of place, and does not, like e. g. πορεύεσθαι, note the 
external and perceptible motion,— (a man may be recog- 
nized by his πορεία). Cf. Schmidt ch. xxvii.] 

ἐρῶ, see εἶπον. 

ἐρωτάω, -à, [ (inf. -τᾶν L T Tr, -τᾷν R G WH; 5661, 0]; 
impf. 3 pers. plur. ἠρώτων and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH, 
Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) ἠρώτουν, cf. B. 44 (38); [W. 85 (82) ; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Soph. Lex. p.41; WH. App. p. 166; 
Mullach, Griech. Vulgarspr. p. 252]; fut. ἐρωτήσω; 1 aor. 
ἠρώτησα; Sept. for OWw; to ask, i. e. 1. as in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down to question: absol., Lk. xxii. 68 ; Jn. 
viii. 7 [RJ]; τινά, Jn. ix. 21; xvi. 19, 30 ; [xviii. 21 where 
Rec. ézep.], ete.; with the addition of λέγων and the 
words of the questioner: Mt. xvi. 13; Lk. xix. 31 [om. 
λέγων" xxiii. 3 T Tr WH]; Jn.i.19, 21; v. 12; ix. 19; 
xvi. 5; τινά τι [cf. W. $32, 4 a.], Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. iv. 10; 
Lk. xx. 3; Jn. xvi. 23 [al. refer this to 2]; τινὰ περί τινος, 
Lk. ix. 45 [Lehm. ézep.]; Jn. xviii. 19. 2. to ask i. e. 
to request, entreat, beg, beseech, after the Hebr. 5wU, in a 
sense very rare in prof. auth. (Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14 [but 
here the text is uncertain; substitute antt. 7, 8, 1; cf. 
Dr. Ezra Abbot in No. Am. Rev. for 1872, p. 173 note]; 
Babr. fab. [42, 3]; 97, 3; Apoll. synt. p. 289, 20; cf. W. 
pp. 30 and 32): τινά, Jn. xiv. 16; with the addition of 
Aéyov and the words of the asker, Mt. xv. 23; Jn. xii. 
21; foll. by impv. alone [B. 272 sq. (234)], Lk. xiv. 18 
sq.; Phil. iv. 3; foll. by tva [cf. W. § 44, 8 a.; B. 237 
(204)], Mk. vii. 26; Lk. vii. 30; xvi. 27; Jn. iv. 47; 
xvii. 155 xix. 31,38; 2 Jn. 5; 1 Th. iv. 1; by ὅπως, Lk. 
vii.3; xi. 37; Acts xxiii. 20; by the inf. [B. 258 (222); 
ef. W. 335 (315)], Lk. v. 3; viii. 37; Jn. iv. 40; Acts 
ii. 3; x. 48; xxiii. 185 1 Th. v. 12; τινὰ περί τινος, Lk. 
iv. 38; Jn. xvii. 9, 20; 1 Jn. v. 16 ; ὑπέρ twos [foll. by 
eis w. inf.; cf. B. 265 (228)], 2 Th. ii. 1 sq.; ἐρωτᾶν τὰ 
[WH txt. om. τά] πρὸς εἰρήνην (see εἰρήνη, 1), Lk. xiv. 32. 
[S¥N. see aizéo, fin. Cor. : &-, em-eporáo. | 








2 ἐσθίω 


ἐσθής, -ῆτος, ἡ, (fr. ἕννυμι, ἔσθην, hence it would be 
more correctly written ἑσθής [so Rec." in Lk.], cf. 
Kühner i. p. 217, 3), formerly βεσθής (cf. Lat. vestis, 
Germ. Weste, Eng. vest, etc.), clothing, raiment, apparel : 
Lk. xxiii. 11; xxiv. 4 L T Tr WH; Actsi. 10 RG; x. 30; 
xii. 21; Jas. ii. 2 sq. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἔσθησις [ Rec.** ἔσθ.1, -ews, ἡ, (fr. ἐσθέω, and this fr. 
ἐσθής, q. v.), clothing, apparel: plur., Lk. xxiv. 4 R G; 
Acts i. 10 L T Tr WH; [cf. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 818; 
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 7 and Heinichen'snote]. (Rare in prof. 
writ. [ Aristot. rhet. 2, 8, 14 var.]; cf. W. $2, 1c.) * 

ἐσθίω and ἔσθω. q. v., (lengthened forms of ἔδω [cf. 
Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. p. 429]) ; impf. ἤσθιον; 2 aor. 
ἔφαγον (fr. PATO); fut. φάγομαι (2 pers. φάγεσαι, Lk. 
xvii. 8 [reff. s. v. κατακαυχάομαι, init.]), for the classic 
ἔδομαι, see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 185; Kühner i. p. 824; 
[W. 89 (85); B. 58 (51); but esp. Veitch s. v.]; Sept. 
for Doe; [fr. Hom. down]; to eat; Vulg. manduco, [edo, 
ete.]; (of animals, to devour); a. absol.: Mt. xiv. 20 
sq.; xv. 37, 38; xxvi. 26; Mk. vi. 31; viii. 8; Jn. iv. 31, 
and often; ἐν τῷ φαγεῖν, in eating (the supper), 1 Co. 
xi. 21; διδόναι τινὶ φαγεῖν, to give one (something) to 
eat, Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35, 42; Mk. v.43; vi.37; Lk.ix. 
13, (and with addition of an acc. of the thing to be eaten, 
Jn. vi. 31, 52; ἔκ τινος, Rev. ii. 7; [cf. W. 198 (187) sq.]); 
φέρειν τινὶ φαγεῖν, to bring one (something) to eat, Jn. 
iv. 33; spec. in opp. to abstinence from certain kinds of 
food, Ro. xiv. 3, 20; ἐσθίειν x. πίνειν (and φαγεῖν x. πιεῖν), 
to use food and drink to satisfy one's hunger and thirst, 
1 Co. xi. 22; contextually, to be supported at the ex- 
pense of others, 1 Co. ix. 4; not to shun choice food and 
in a word to be rather a free-liver, opp. to the narrow 
and serupulous notions of those who abstain from the 
use of wine and certain kinds of food, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. 
vii. 34; opp. to fasting (τὸ νηστεύειν), Lk. v. 33; of 
those who, careless about other and esp. graver matters, 
lead an easy, merry life, Lk. xii. 19; xvii. 27 sq.; 1 Co. 
xv. 32, (Ts. xxii. 13) ; of the jovial use of a sacrificial 
feast, 1 Co. x. 7 fr. Ex. xxxii. 6; preceded by a nega- 
tive, to abstain from all nourishment, Acts xxiii. 12, 21; 
to use a spare diet, spoken of an ascetic mode of life, 
Mt. xi. 18; of fasting, Acts ix. 95 ἐσθίειν (x. πίνειν) μετά 
twos, to dine, feast, (in company) with one, Mt. ix. 11; 
Mk.ii.16; Lk. v. 30; with one (he providing the enter- 
tainment), i. e. at his house, Lk. vii. 36; μετὰ τῶν μεθυόν- 
Tov ete., of luxurious revelling, Mt. xxiv. 49; Lk. xii. 
45; ἐπὶ τραπέζης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the food and drink spread 
out on Christ’s table, i. e. to enjoy the blessings of the 
salvation procured by Christ (which is likened to a ban- 
quet), Lk. xxii. 30; ἐσθίειν τινί, to one’s honor, Ro. xiv. 
6. b. construed w. an ace. of the thing, to eat (con- 
sume) a thing [W. 198 (187) note]: Mt. vi. 25; Mk.i. 
6; Jn. iv. 32; vi. 31; Ro. xiv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 18; x- 25, 
ete.; ἄρτον, to take food, eat a meal, (after the Hebr. 
on? 528, Gen. xliii. 25; Ex. ii. 290; 1 S. xx. 24; Prov. 
xxiii. 7), Mt. xv. 2; Mk. iii. 20; Lk. xiv. 1, 15; τὸν éav- 
τοῦ ἄρτον, obtained by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; ἄρτον 
παρά τινος (gen. of pers.) to be supported by one, 2 Th. 


ἔσθω 


iii. 8; τὰ παρά τινος, the things supplied by one, Lk. x. 
7, i. q. τὰ παρατιθέμενα in vs. 8 [cf. W. 366 (343) ]; 1 Co. 
x. 27; μήτε ἄρτον ἐσθ. μήτε οἶνον πίνειν. to live frugally, 
Lk. vii. 33; τὸ κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν. to celebrate the 
Lord’s supper, 1 Co. xi. 20; τὸ πάσχα, to eat the paschal 
lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi.17; Mk. 
xiv. 12,14; Lk. xxii. 8, 11, 15, 16 L' T Tr WH; Jn. 
xviii. 28; ras θυσίας, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts, 
said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16 
(where ὧν stands by attraction for d, because ἐσθίειν 
with a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the N. 
T. [W. 198 (187) note]). by a usage hardly to be met 
with in class. Grk. (W. $ 28, 1; [B. 159 (139) ]), ἔκ τινος, 
to (take and) eat of a thing: Lk. xxii. 16 [RG]; Jn. vi. 
26, 50 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 28; on the other hand, ἐκ τοῦ καρποῦ 
(L T Tr WH τὸν καρπόν), ἐκ τοῦ γάλακτος ἐσθίειν, in 1 Co. 
ix. 7, is to support one's self by the sale of the fruit and 
the milk [but cf. B. as above, and Meyer ad loc.]. ἐκ 
with gen. of place: ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, draw their support from 
the temple, i. e. from the sacrifices and offerings, 1 Co. 
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read τὰ ἐκ τ. i]; also ἐκ θυσιαστη- 
ρίου, i. e. from the things laid on the altar, Heb. xiii. 10 
[W.366 (344)]. by a Hebraism (} 928), ἀπό τινος [cf. 
W. 199 (187)]: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28. — Metaph. to 
devour, consume: twa, Heb. x. 27; τί, Rev. xvii. 16; of 
rust, Jas. v. 3. [Comp.: κατ-, συν-εσθίω.] 

ἔσϑω, i. q. ἐσθίω, a poetic form in use fr. Hom. down, 
very rare in prose writ.; from it are extant in the N. T. 
the ptep. ἔσθων in Mk. i. 6 T Tr WH; [Lk. x. Z L T Tr 
WH]; Lk. vii. 33 L Tr WH, [also 34 WH]; the pres. 
subj. 2 pers. plur. ἔσθητε in Lk. xxii. 30 LT Tr WH; 
[cf. κατεσθίω]. It occurs several times in the Sept., as 
Lev. xvii. 10; Judg. xiv. 9 [ Alex.]; Is. ix. 20; Sir. xx. 
16; ἔσθετε, Lev. xix. 26. C£. [ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 81]; B. 
58 (51). 

Ἔσλεί (T Tr WH, [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. 
εἰ, 11) or Ἔσλί, 6, Esli, one of Christ's ancestors: Lk. 
iii. 25.* 

ἔσ-οπτρον, -ov, τό, (OHTO), a mirror: 1 Co. xiii. 12; 
Jas.i.23. (Sap. vii. 26; Sir. xii. 11; Pind. Nem. 7, 20; 
Anacr. 11, [7 (6)] 3; Plut.; al.) The mirrors of the 
ancients were made, not of glass [cf. B.D. s. v. Glass, 
fin.], but of steel; Plin. h. n. 33, (9) 45; 34, (17) 48 
[but see the pass. just referred to, and B.D. s. v. mirror ].* 

ἑσπέρα, -as, 7], (ἔσπερος of or at evening), evening, even- 
tide: Acts iv. 3; xxviii. 23; πρὸς éor. ἐστίν, it is towards 
evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. [From Pind. and Hdt. down.]* 

[ἑσπερινός, -7, -óv, belonging to the evening, evening: 
φυλακή, Lk. xii. 38 WH (rejected) mrg. (Sept.; Xen., 
Dio Cass., Athen., al.)*] : 

Ἔσρώμ [or 'Ecpóv in Lk. R** Ltxt. Tr mrg.; WH 
‘Eop., see their Intr. § 408], 6, Esrom or Hezrom or Hes- 
ron, one of Christ's ancestors: Mt. i. 3; Lk. iii. 33.* 

['Ecpóv or'Ecp. see the preceding word.] 

ἔσχατος. -η. -ον. (fr.£xo, ἔσχον adhering, clinging close; 
[ace. to al. (Curtius $ 583 b.) superl. fr. e£ the outer- 
most]), Sept. for ΣΥΝ, WINN; [fr. Hom. down]; ez- 
treme, last in time or in place; 1. joined to nouns: 


253 











ἔσχατος 


τόπος, the last in a series of places [A. V. lowest], Lk. 
xiv. 9 sq.; ina temporal succession, the last: ἔσχατος 
ἐχθρός. that remains after the rest have been conquered, 
1 Co. xv. 26; xodpavrns, that remains when the rest 
have one after another been spent, Mt: v. 26; so λεπτόν, 
Lk. xii. 59; ἡ éoy. σάλπιγξ, the trumpet after which no 
other will sound, 1 Co. xv. 52, cf. Meyer ad loc.; αἱ ἔσχ. 
πληγαί, Rev. xv. 1; xxi. 9; ἡ ἐσχάτη ἡμέρα τῆς ἑορτῆς, 
Jn. vii. 37. When two are contrasted it is i. q. the 
latter, opp. to 6 πρῶτος the former (Deut. xxiv. 1-4): 
thus τὰ ἔργα (opp. to τῶν πρώτων), Rev. ii. 19; ἡ πλάνη, 
Mt. xxvii. 64 (where the meaning is, ‘lest the latter 
deception, caused by the false story of his resurrection, 
do more harm than the former, which was about to pro- 
duce belief in a false Messiah’); ὁ ἔσχατος "Addu, the 
latter Adam, i.e. the Messiah (see ᾿Αδάμ, 1), 1 Co. xv. 
45. ἡ ἐσχ. ἡμέρα, the last day (of all days), denotes 
that with which the present age (nn Dom see αἰών, 
3) which precedes the times of the Messiah or the glori- 
ous return of Christ from heaven will be closed: Jn. vi. 
39 sq.44, [54]; xi. 24; xii. 48. of the time nearest the 
return of Christ from heaven and the consummation of 
the divine kingdom, the foll. phrases are used: ἐσχάτη 
ὥρα, 1 Jn. ii. 18; ἐν καιρῷ éax. 1 Pet. i. 5; ἐν éox. χρόνῳ, 
Jude 18 Rec., ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου χρόνου ibid. Tr WH; ἐν ἐσχά- 
ταις ἡμέραις, Acts 11. 17; Jas. v. 3; 2 Tim. iii. 1; for other 
phrases of the sort see 2 a. below; ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτων τῶν xpó- 
vov, 1 Pet. i. 20 R G, see below. 2. 6, 1, τὸ ἔσχ. absol. 
or with the genitive, a. of time: of ἔσχατοι, who had 
come to work last, Mt. xx. 8, 12, [14]; the meaning of 
the saying ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι is not 
always the same: in Lk. xiii. 30 it signifies, those who 
were last invited to enter the divine kingdom will be 
first to enter when the opportunity comes, i. e. they will 
be admitted forthwith, while others, and those too who 
were first among the invited, will be shut out then as 
coming too late; in Mt. xix. 30; xx. 16 it means, the 
same portion in the future kingdom of God will through 
his goodness be assigned to those invited last as to 
those invited first, although the latter may think they 
deserve something better; cf. Mk. x. 31. ὁ πρῶτος x. 6 
ἔσχ. i. e. the eternal, Rev. i. 11 Ree., 17; ii. 8; xxii. 
13. ἔσχατος as a predicate joined to a verb adverbially 
[cf. W. 131 (124); § 54, 2]: Mk. xii. 6; ἐσχάτη (RG; 
but see below) πάντων ἀπέθανε, Mk. xii. 22. ἔσχατον, 
ἔσχατα, used substantively [cf. B. 94 (82) § 125, 6] 
in phrases, of the time immediately preceding Christ’s 
return from heaven and the consummation of the divine 
kingdom: ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτου or ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, Heb. i. 2 
(1); 2 Pet. iii. 3, (Barn. ep. 16, 5); τῶν χρόνων, 1 Pet. 
1. 20; ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου. Jude 181, T (see 1 above, and 
ἐπί, A. IT. fin.), cf. Riehm, Lehrbegr. d. Hebrierbriefes, 
p. 205 sq. τὰ ἔσχατα with gen. of pers. the last state of 
one: Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. ii. 20 [but without 
gen. of pers.]. Neut. ἔσχατον, adv., lastly: [w. gen. of 
pers., Mk. xii. 22 LT Tr WH]; 1 Co. xv. 8. b. of 
space: τὸ ἔσχατον τῆς γῆς, the uttermost part, the end, 
of the earth, Actsi. 8; xiii. 47. C. of rank, grade of 


ἐσχάτως 


worth, last i. e. lowest: Mk. ix. 35; Jn. viii. 9 Rec. ; 1Co. 
s 

ἐσχάτως, adv., extremely, [ Xen. an. 2, 6, 1; Aristot., 
al]; ἐσχάτως ἔχειν (in extremis esse), to be in the last 
gasp, at the point of death: Mk. ν. 23. Diod. exerpt. 
Vales. p. 242 [i. e. fr. 1. 10 § 2,4 Dind.]; Artem. oneir. 
3, 60. The phrase is censured by the Atticists; cf. 
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 704 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
389; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 178 sq.; [ Win. 26 ].* 

ἔσω, adv., (fr. és, for εἴσω [fr. Hom. on] fr. eis; cf. W. 
52; [B. 72 (63); Rutherford, New Phryn. p.432]); 1. 
to within, into: Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; with gen. 
Mk. xv. 16 [W. $ 54, 6]. 2. within: Jn. xx. 26; Acts 
v. 23; ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος, the internal, inner man, i. e. the 
soul, conscience, (see ἄνθρωπος, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16 L T Tr 
WH; Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; of ἔσω, those who belong 
to the Christian brotherhood (opp. to of ἔξω [q. v. in 
ἔξω, 1 a.]), 1 Co. v. 12.* 

ἔσωθεν, (ἔσω), adv. of place, fr. Aeschyl and Hat. 
down; [1. adverbially;] a. from within (Vulg. de 
intus, ab intus, intrinsecus, [ete.]) : Mk. vii. 21, 23; Lk. 
xi 7; 2 Co. vii. 5. b. within (cf. W. $ 54, 7): Mt. 
vii. 15; xxiii. 25, 27, 28; Rev.iv. 8; v. 1 [cf. γράφω, 3]; 
ὁ ἔσωθεν ἄνθρωπος, 2 Co. iv. 16 RG (see ἔσω, 2); τὸ 
ἔσωθεν, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40; with 
gen. of pers. i.q. your soul,ibid.39. [2. as a prep. with 
the gen. (W § 54,6): Rev. xi. 2 Ree." (see ἔξωθεν, 2).]* 

ἐσώτερος, -épa, -epov, (compar. of ἔσω, [cf. B. 28 (24 
sq-)]), inner: Acts xvi 24; τὸ ἐσώτερον τοῦ karamerá- 
cparos, the inner space which is behind the veil, i. e. the 
shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn 
from the earthly temple, Heb. vi. 19.* 

ἑταῖρος, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 1; a comrade, 
mate, partner, [A. V. fellow]: Mt. xi. 16 (where T Tr 
WH τοῖς ἑτέροις [q. v. 1 b., and ef. WH. Intr. $ 4047); 
voc. in kindly address, friend (my good friend): Mt. xx. 
13; xxii.12; xxvi. 50.* 

ἑτερό-γλωσσος, -ov, ὁ, (ἕτερος and γλῶσσα), one who 
speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to ὁμόγλωσ- 
cos): Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 1 Aq.; Polyb. 24, 9, 5; Strab. 
8 p. 333; [Philo, confus. lings. $ 3; al.]; but different- 
ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly 
strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ; 
see what is said about ‘speaking with tongues’ under 
γλῶσσα, 2 

ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω, -ῶ; (ἕτερος and διδάσκαλος, cf. κακο- 
διδασκαλεῖν, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 10, 5); to teach other or 
different doctrine i. e. deviating from the truth: 1 Tim. 
i. 3; vi. 3. (Ignat. ad Polyc. 3, and al. eccl. writ.) * 

ἑτερο-ζυγέω, -&; (érepótvyos yoked with a different 
yoke; used in Lev. xix. 19 of the union of beasts of 
different kinds, e.g. an ox and an ass), to come under 
an unequal or different yoke (Beza, impari jugo copulor), 
to be unequally yoked : τινί (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10 
N.4; B. $133, 8), trop. to have fellowship with one who is 
not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid- 
ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.* 

ἕτερος. -épa, -epov, the other; another, other; [fr. Hom. 


254 








E] 
ετί 


on]; Sept. chiefly foram. Itrefers 1. tonumber, 
as opp. to some former pers. or thing; a. without the 
article, other : joined to a noun (which noun denotes some 
number or class within which others are distinguished 
from the one), Mt. xii. 45 and Lk. xi 26, ἑπτὰ ἕτερα 
πνεύματα, i. e. from the number of the πνεύματα or demons 
seven others, to be distinguished from the one already 
mentioned; add, Mk. xvi. 12; Lk. vi. 6; ix. 56, ete. ; Jn. 
xix. 37 ; Acts ii. 40; iv. 12, etc. ; Ro. vii. 3; viii. 39; xiii. 9; 
ἕτεραι yeveat, other than the present, i. e. past generations, 
Eph. iii. 5; as in class. Grk. ἄλλος, so sometimes also 
érepos is elegantly joined toa noun that is in apposition: 
twice so in Lk., viz. ἕτεροι δύο κακοῦργοι two others, who 
were malefactors [Bttm. differently $ 150, 3], Lk. xxiii. 
32; ἑτέρους ἑβδομήκοντα equiv. to ἑτέρους μαθητάς. οἵτινες 
ἦσαν ἐβδ. Lk. x. 1; reliqua privata aedificia for ‘ the rest 
of the buildings, which were private’ Caes. b. g. 1, 5; ef. 
Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. p. 147 sq.; W. 530 (493); 
[Joseph. c. Ap.1,15,3 and Miiller’s note]. simply, with- 
out a noun, i. q. ἄλλος τις another, Lk. ix. 59; xxii. 58; 
Acts i. 20; Ro. vii. 4; ἕτεροι πολλοί, Mt. xv. 30 ; Lk. viii. 
3; Acts xv. 35 ; οὐδὲν ἕτερον, Acts xvii. 21; ἕτερα, other 
matters, Acts xix. 39 RGT; πολλὰ καὶ ἕτερα; many 
other things also [hardly “also,” see καί, I. 3; cf. remark 
8. v. πολύς, d. a. fin.], Lk. iii. 18 ; ἕτερος with gen. of pers. 
Gal. i. 19; τὰ ἑτέρων (opp. to rà ἑαυτοῦ), Phil. ii. 4; ér. 
with ris added, Acts viii. 34; neut. 1 Tim. i. 10; [ἐν 
érépo, introducing a quotation, Heb. v. 6, cf. Win. 592 
(551) —but in Acts xiii. 35 supply Ψψαλμῷ]. in partitive 
formulas: @ or. . . ἕτεροι δέ, Heb. xi. 36 cf. Acts ii. 13; 
ὁ πρῶτος ... ἕτερος, Lk. xiv. 19 sq.; xvi. 7; "ὁ δεύτερος 
... ἕτερος, Lk. xix. 20 (where L T Tr WH ὁ ἕτερος); 
ἕτεροι δέ, Lk. xi. 16; ᾧ né... ἄλλῳ be... 
ἑτέρῳ δὲ ... ἄλλῳ 8€, 1 Co. xii. 9 54.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι [ L οἱ] 
dé... ἕτεροι δέ, Mt. xvi. 14. — b. with the article, the 
other (of two) : οἱ ἕτεροι, the others, the other party, Mt. 
xi. 16 T Tr WH (see ἑταῖρος). distinctively : εἷς or 6 
eis ... 6 ἕτερος, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 13; xvii. 
34sq.; xviii. 10; xxiii. 40; τὸ ἕτερον πλοῖον, Lk. v. 7; 
τῇ δὲ ἑτέρᾳ sc. ἡμέρᾳ, the next day, the day after, Acts 
xx. 15; xxvii. 3, (Xen. Cyr. 4,6, 10, [al.]). ὁ ἕτερος, the 
other, when the relation of conduct to others is under 
consideration is often put by way of example for any 
other person whatever, and stands for *the other affected 
by the action in question’ [and may be trans. thy neigh- 
bor, thy fellow, etc]: Ro. ii. 15 xiii. 8; 1 Co. vi. 15 x. 24, 
29; xiv. 17; Gal. vi. 4; [Jas. iv. 12 RG]; plur. oi, ai, 
τὰ ἕτεροι, -at, -a, the others i. e. the rest, Lk. iv. 43. It re- 
fers 2. to quality; another i. e. one not of the same 
nature, form, class, kind; different, (so in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down): Ro. vii. 23; 1 Co. xiv. 21; xv. 40; 2 Co. 
xi. 4; Gal. i. 6; Heb. vii. 11, 13, 15; Jas. ii. 25; Jude 7. 
[Syn. see ἄλλος. 


D 
τινες «+ © 


ἑτέρως, adv., otherwise, differently: Phil.iii.15. [From 
Hom. (apparently) down.] * 
ἔτι, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; . a. ofa 


thing which went on formerly, whereas now a differ- 
ent state of things exists or has begun to exist: added 


ἑτοιμάζω. 


to a ptep., Mt. xxvii. 63; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44; Acts ix. 1; 
xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol.: ἔτι (δὲ) αὐτοῦ 


λαλοῦντος, Mt. xii. 46; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 435, 


Lk. viii. 49 ; xxii. 47; add, Lk. ix. 42; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx. 
1; Acts x. 44; Ro. v. 8; Heb. ix. 8; with a finite verb, 
Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning 
of a sentence: ἔτε yàp Χριστὸς ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθ. . . . ἀπέ- 
Qave, Ro. v. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 p. 553 (515); [B. 389 
(333)]; with another notation of time, so that it may be 
trans. even (cf. Lat. jam) : ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός, Lk. i. 15 
(ἔτι ἐκ βρέφεος, Anthol 9, 567, 1; ἔτι dm ἀρχῆς, Plut. 
consol ad Apoll 6 p. 104 d.). b. of a thing which 
continues at present, even now: Mk. viii. 17 RG; Lk. 
xiv. 22; Gal. i. 10; 1 Co. xv. 17; with νῦν added, 1 Co. 
iii. 2 [L WH br. ἔτι]; further, longer, (where it is 
thought strange that, when one thing has established 
itself, another has not been altered or abolished, but is 
still adhered to or continues): Ro. iii. 7; vi. 2; ix. 19; 
Gal. v. 11. c. with negatives: ov... ἔτι, οὐκ ἔτι, no 
longer, no more, Lk. xvi. 2; xx. 36; xxi. 1, 4; xxii. 3; 
ἵνα μὴ ἔτι lest longer, that . . . no more, Rev. xx. 35 οὐ μὴ 
ἔτι, Rev. iii. 12; xviii. 21—23 ; οὐδείς, μηδείς, -δεμία, -δὲν 
ἔτι, nobody, nothing more, Mt. v. 13; Heb. x. 2, (see μηκέτι, 
οὐκέτι). 2. of degree and increase; with the 
comparative, even, yet: Phil. i. 9; Heb. vii. 15, (W. 
240 (225)). of what remains, [yet]: Jn. iv. 35; vii. 33; 
xii. 35; xiii. 33; Mt.xix. 20; Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xviii. 22; 
of what is added, besides, more, further: ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb. 
xii. 26 sq. ; ἔτι ἕνα ἢ δύο, Mt. xviii. 16 ; add, Mt. xxvi. 65; 
Heb. xi. 32; ἔτι δέ yea moreover, and further, (Lat. prae- 
terea vero), Heb. xi. 36 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1; Diod. 1, 
74; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 4); ἔτι δὲ καί (but or) yea 
moreover also (Lat. praeterea vero etiam), Lk. xiv. 26 R 
GT L mrg.; Acts ii. 26 ; ἔτι τε kat and moreover too (Lat. 
insuperque adeo), Lk. xiv. 26 L txt. Tr WH; Acts xxi. 
28, [cf. B. $149, 8; W. 578 (537) note]. 

ἑτοιμάζω ; fut. ἑτοιμάσω ; laor.zroípaga; pf. ἡτοίμακα 
(Mt. xxii. 4& L' T Tr WH); Pass., pf. ἡτοίμασμαι; 1 aor. 
ἡτοιμάσθην ; (ἔτοιμος) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often 
for 1213 and pous to make ready, prepare: absol. to 
make the necessary preparations, get everything ready, Lk. 
xii. 47; of preparing a feast, Lk. xxii. 9, 12, (Gen. xliii. 
15; 1 Chr. xii. 39); w. dat. of pers., for one: of prepar- 
ing a lodging, Lk. ix. 52 [W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5]; 
a supper, Mk. xiv. 15; also w. a telic inf. added, Mt. xxvi. 
17; fol. by ἵνα [cf. B. 237 (205)], Mk. xiv. 12; τ΄. 
acc. of the thing: ἃ ἡτοίμασας the things which thou hast 
prepared (as a store), Lk. xii. 20; [τί δειπνήσω, Lk. xvii. 
8]; τὸ ἄριστον, Mt. xxii. 4; τὸ πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 19; Mk. 
xiv. 16; Lk.xxii.3, 13; ἀρώματα, Lk. xxiii. 56; xxiv. 1; 
τόπον Twi, Jn. xiv.2 sq.; ξενίαν, Philem. 22 ; [συμβούλιον, 
Mk. xv.1 TWH mrzg., cf. evu-]; τὴν ὁδὸν κυρίου (by a 
fig. drawn from the oriental custom of sending on before 
kings on their journeys persons to level the roads and 
make them passable), to prepare the minds of men to 
give the Messiah a fit reception and secure his blessings: 
Mt.iii.3; Mk.i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, (fr. Is. xl. 3); i. 76; [tva éroc- 
μασθῇ ἡ ὁδὸς τῶν βασιλέων, Rev. xvi. 12]; w. acc. of pers., 


25 








- 


Ὁ ἔτος 


στρατιώτας, Acts xxiii. 23; τινί τινα, one for one, Lk. i. 
17; ἑαυτόν, Rev. xix. 7; foll. by iva [cf. B. 237 (205)], 
Rev. viii 6; ἡτοιμασμένη ὡς νύμφη, i. e. beautifully 
adorned, Rev. xxi. 2; nromacp. εἴς τι, prepared i. e. fit 
for accomplishing any thing, 2 Tim. ii. 21; Rev. ix. 7; 
prepared i.e. kept in readiness, εἰς τὴν ὥραν x. ἡμέραν 
etc., for the hour and day sc. predetermined, Rev. ix. 15. 
In a peculiar sense God is said ἑτοιμάσαι τι for men, i. e. 
to have caused good or ill to befall them, almost i. q. to 
have ordained ; of blessings: τί, Lk. ii. 31; Rev. xii. 6; 
τινί τι, Mt. xx. 23; xxv. 34; Mk. x. 40; [it Gorg 
Heb. xi. 16; of punishment: τινί τι, Mt. xxv. 41. 
[Comp.: mpo-eroiiá(o. ] * 

ἑτοιμασία, -as, 7, (ἑτοιμάζω, cf. θαυμασία, εἰκασία, ép- 
yacia) ; 1. the act of preparing : τῆς τροφῆς, Sap. xiii. 
12; τῶν κλιναρίων, Artem. oneir. 2, 57. 2. i. q. ἕτοι- 
porns, the condition of a pers. or thing so far forth as pre- 
pared, preparedness, readiness: Hipp. p. 24 [i. 74 ed. 
Kühn]; Joseph. antt. 10, 1, 2; readiness of mind (Germ. 
Bereitwilligkeit), τῆς καρδίας, Ps. ix. 38 (x. 17): 
pagía τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, with the promptitude and alacrity 
which the gospel produces, Eph. vi. 15.* 

ἕτοιμος (on the accent cf. [Chandler § 394]; W. 52 
(51)), τ (2 Co. ix. 5; 1 Pet. i. 5), -ov, and -os, -ov (Mt. 
xxv. 10 [cf. WH. App. p. 151"; W. $11,1; B. 25 (22)]); 
fr. Hom. down; prepared, ready; a. of things: Mt. 
xxii. 4, 8, [(Lk. xiv. 17)]; Mk. xiv. 15 [L br. é7.]; 2 Co. 
ix. 5; ready to hand: ra ἕτοιμα, the things (made) ready 
(in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches al- 
ready founded by them, 2 Co. x. 16; i. q. opportune, 
seasonable, 6 καιρός, Jn. vii. 6; σωτηρία ἑτοίμη ἀποκαλυ- 
φθῆναι, on the point of being revealed, 1 Pet.i.5. ^b. of 
persons ; ready, prepared : to do something, Acts xxiii. 
21; to receive one coming, Mt. xxiv. 44; xxv. 10; Lk. 
xii. 40; πρός τι, for (the doing of) a thing, Tit. iii. 1; 
1 Pet. iii. 15; foll by the inf. [cf. B. 260 (224)], Lk. 
xxii.33; by τοῦ with inf., Acts xxiii. 15 [B. § 140, 15; 
W. § 44,4a.]; ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχω, to be in readiness, foll. by 
the inf. (Philo, lex. ad Gai. ὃ 34 sub fin.): 2 Co. x. 6 
[cf. W. 332 (311)]. (For 113), Ex. xix. 11, 15; Josh. 
viii. 4, etc.) * 

ἑτοίμως, adv., [fr. Thuc. on], readily; ἑτοίμως ἔχω to 
be ready: fol. by inf, Acts xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1 
Pet. iv. 5 [(not WH)]. (Sept. Dan. iii. 15; Diod. 16, 
28; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 2; 13, 1, 1.) * 

ἔτος, -ovs, [gen. plur. ἐτῶν, cf. B. 14 (13)], o, [fr. 
Hom. down], Hebr. 73, a year: Lk. iii. 1; Acts vii. 
30; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet.iii.8; Rev. xx. 3, etc.; ἔτη ἔχειν, 
to have passed years, Jn. viii. 57; with ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ 
added, Jn. v. 5 [cf. W. $32, 6]; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, yeyove- 
ναι ἐτῶν, e. g. δώδεκα, to be twelve years old [cf. Eng. (a 
boy) of twelve years]: Mk.v.42; Lk.ii.42; iii. 23 [ef. 
W. 349 (328)]; viii.42; Actsiv.22; γεγονυῖα ἔλαττον 
ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 
590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which 
a thing is done [W. § 31, 9 a.; B. $ 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20; 
Acts xiii. 20; acc. in answer to the quest. how long?: 
Mt.ix.20; Mk. v. 25; Lk. ii. 36; xiii. 7 sq. 11, 16 ; xv. 


xe 
€v €TOL- 


εὖ 


29; Acts vii. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17; Rev. xx. 2, 
4,6. preceded by a prep.: ἀπό, from . . . on, since, Lk. 
viii. 43; Ro. xv. 23; in the same sense ἐκ, Acts ix. 33; 
xxiv. 10 [ A. V. of many years]; διά with gen., . . . years 
having intervened, i. e. after [see διά, 11. 2]: Acts xxiv. 
17; Gal. ii. 1; εἰς, for... years, Lk. xii. 19; ἐπὶ with 
ace. (see ἐπί, C. II. 1 p. 235" bot.), for (the space of), 
Acts xix. 10; μετά with acc., afler, Gal. i. 18; iii. 17; 
πρό with gen., before [Eng. ago; cf. πρό, b.], 2 Co. xii. 2; 
«ar ἔτος, yearly, Lk. ii. 41. [Svw. ef. éwavrós.] 

ev, adv., (prop. ev, the unused neut. of the adj. eis in 
Hom.), well: εὖ πράσσω, not as many interp. take it, 
contrary to ordinary Grk. usage, to do well i.e. act 
rightly (which in Greek is expressed by ὀρθῶς or καλῶς 
πράσσω). but to be well off, fare well, prosper, Acts xv. 
29 [R. V. it shall be well with you] (Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8; 
2,4, 6; 4, 2,26; 0ec. 11, 8; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 1; ὅστις 
καλῶς πράττει, οὐχὶ kai εὖ πράττει; Plat. Alc.i. p. 116 b.; 
εἰ εὖ πράττουσι ἀδικοῦντες, Prot. p. 333 d. ; et τις ἄλλος εὖ 
μὲν ἐποίησεν ὑμᾶς εὖ πράττων, Dem. 469, 14; and some 
began their letters with εὖ πράττειν, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 19; 
Diog. Laért. 3, 61 and Menagius (Ménage) in loc. In 
one passage alone, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 14, the drift of the 
discussion permits Socrates to deviate from common 
usage by attaching to the phrase the notion of right con- 
duet, acting well; [yet this sense occurs in eccles. Grk., 
see e. g. Justin M. apol. 1, 28 and Otto's note; cf. L. 
and S. s. v. πράσσω, IV.]); ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it 
may be well, things may turn out well, with thee, Eph. 
vi. 3 (Gen. xii. 13; [Ex. xx. 12]; Deut. iv.40; [v. 16]; 
Orat. Az. [i. e. Song of the Three Children] vs. 6); εὖ 
ποιεῖν τινα, to do one good, Mk. xiv. 7 [here T om. the 
ace.; L Tr WH read dat.], (Judith x. 16; Bar. vi. (i. e. 
Ep. Jer.) 37 (38); Sir. xiv. 11; Xen. Cyr. 1,0, 80). In 
commendations, εὖ (δοῦλε ἀγαθέ), well! well done! Mt. 
xxv. 21, 22; Lk. xix. 17 RG; Xen. venat. 6, 20; see 
εὖγε." 

Eva [WH Efa (see their Introd. $408); Rec. Eda, so 

+ Tr in 1 Tim. ii. 13, where R* Eóa], -as [B. 17 (15)], 

7, (mn, explained Gen. iii. 20), Eve, the wife of Adam: 
2/(70:x1595 1 "Tim. 3:135 

εὐαγγελίζω : 1 aor. εὐηγγέλισα (Rev. x. 7; xiv. 6; 1 S. 
xxxi. 9; 2 S. xviii. 19; W. 71 (69); [B. 35 (30)]); Pass., 
pres. εὐαγγελίζομαι : pf. ptep. εὐηγγελισμένοι (Heb. iv. 
2); 1 aor. εὐηγγελίσθην; Mid., pres. εὐαγγελίζομαι ; impf. 
εὐηγγελιζόμην (Acts viii. 25 L T Tr WH); 1 aor. εὐηγγε- 
λισάμην ; (εὐάγγελος bringing good news); Sept. for 
Wa; to bring good news, to announce glad tidings; Vulg. 
evangelizo [etc.]; used in the O. T. of any kind of good 
news: 1S.xxxi 9; 2 5.1. 20; 1 Chr. x. 9; of the joyful 
tidings of God's kindnesses, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 10; τὸ σω- 
τήριον θεοῦ, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 2; in particular, of the 
Messianic blessings: Is. xl. 9; lii. 7; 1x. 6; lxi. 1, etc.; 
in the N. T. used esp. of the glad tidings of the coming 
kingdom of God, and of the salvation to be obtained in 
it through Christ, and of what relates to this salvation. 

L Inthe Active (rarein Grk. auth. also, infact found 
only in later Grk., as Polyaen. 5, 7; εὐηγγελίκει αὐτῷ, 


256 





εὐαγγελίζω 


Dio Cass. 61, 13; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268; [W. 347}: 
w. dat. of the pers. to whom the news is brought, Rev. 
x. 7 Ree.; w. ace. of the pers. to whom the announce- 
ment is made, ibid. GL T Tr WH; Rev. xiv. 6 RG; by a 
construction not found elsewhere, ἐπί twa (cf. Germ. die 
Botschaft an einen bringen), ibid. GL T Tr WH. XI. 
Passive [cf. W. 229 (215); B. 188 (163)]; of persons, 
glad tidings are brought to one, one has glad tidings pro- 
claimed to him: Mt. xi.5; Lk. vii. 22; Heb.iv.2,6; of 
things, to be proclaimed: εὐαγγελίζεται ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ 
θεοῦ, the glad tidings are published of the kingdom of 
God close at hand, Lk. xvi. 16; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, the joyful 
announcement of man’s salvation is delivered, Gal. i. 11 
[B. 148 (129 sq.)]; τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν εἰς ὑμᾶς, the 
word of good tidings brought unto you (see eis, A. I. 5 
b. [ef. W. 213 (200) ]), 1 Pet. i. 25; impers. εὐηγγελίσθη 
τινί, the good news of salvation was declared, 1 Pet. iv. 
6. III. as deponent Middle (in Grk. writ. fr. 
Arstph. eqq. 643 down), to proclaim glad tidings; spec. 
to instruct (men) concerning the things that pertain to 
Christian salvation: simply, Lk. ix. 6; xx. 1; Acts xiv. 
7; Ro. xv. 20; 1 Co.i.17; ix. 16,18; rim λόγῳ εὐηγγε- 
λισάμην ὑμῖν εἰ karéxere, if ye hold fast in your minds 
with what word (i. e. with what interpretation; for he 
contrasts his own view of Christian salvation with his 
opponents' doctrine of the resurrection) I preached to 
you the glad tidings of salvation, 1 Co. xv. 2. w. dat. 
of pers. (as com. in Grk. writ.), to any one: Lk. iv. 18 
fr. Is. lxi. 1; spec. to bring to one the good tidings con- 
cerning Jesus as the Messiah: Gal.i.8; iv. 13; Ro. i. 
15; evayy. w. acc. of the thing: univ., τὴν πίστιν τινός, 
to bring good tidings of the faith in which one excels, 
1 Th. iii. 6; of Messianic blessings: εἰρήνην, Acts x. 36; 
Ro. x. 15 [R G Tr mrg. br.] (fr. Is. lii. 7) ; τὴν βασιλείαν 
T. θεοῦ, Lk. viii. 1; τὰ περὶ τῆς Bac. τ. θεοῦ, Acts viii. 12 
(where GL T Tr WH om. τά ; cf. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 2 
ὁ μὲν... τῇ γυναικὶ περὶ τούτων εὐηγγελίζετο) ; τὴν πίστιν, 
the necessity of having faith in Christ, Gal. i. 28, τί 
τινι [B. 150 (131)], Lk. i. 19; ii. 10; Acts xvii. 18 ['T Tr 
WHom. dat.]; Eph. ii. 17; τινὶ τ. Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. iv. 
43; ebayy. ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν Χριστόν or (so L'T Tr WH) τὸν 
Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, to proclaim the glad news of Jesus the 
Christ, Acts ν. 42, and (which comes to the same thing) 
τὸν κύριον Ἰησοῦν, Acts xi. 20; τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τοῖς 
ἔθνεσι, among the Gentiles, Gal. i. 16; τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν τινι; 
Acts viii. 35; with καὶ τὴν ἀνάστασίν τινι added, Acts 
xvii. 18 (where T Tr WH om. αὐτοῖς) ; τὸν λόγον, to an- 
nounce the glad tidings of the Messiah, or of the king- 
dom of God, or of eternal salvation offered through 
Christ, Acts viii. 4; τὸν λόγον τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xv. 35; 
τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, 1 Co. xv. 1; w. dat. of the pers. added to 
whom it is preached, 2 Co. xi. 7; τὸν πλοῦτον [τὸ πλοῦ- 
τος] τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι, among the Gentiles [but 
LT Tr WHom. ἐν], Eph. 111. 8, By a constr. unknown 
to the earlier Grks. (ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268), with 
ace. of the pers. to whom the announcement is made 
[W. 223 (209)]: Lk. iii. 18; Acts xvi. 10; Gal. i. 9 
(where it is interchanged with edayy. tux vs. 8); 1 Pet. 


εὐαγγέλιον 2 


i. 12, (Justin M. apol. 1, 33); τινά τι, ace. of the thing 
(Alciphr. epp. 3, 12; Heliod. 2, 10; Euseb. h. e. 3, 4; 
[cf. W. 227 (213); B. 150 (131) ]), foll. by ὅτε ete. Acts 
xiii. 32; τινά foll. by inf. Acts xiv. 15; τὰς κώμας, τὰς 
πόλεις, Acts viii. 25, 40; xiv. 21; [eis rà ὑπερέκεινα, 
2 Co. x. 16 (cf. W. 213 (200), and IL. above). Cowr.: 
“προ-ευαγγελίζομαι. ἢ 

εὐαγγέλιον, -ov, τό, (εὐάγγελος [cf. εὐαγγελίζω]), Hebr. 
ΤῊ and 173; 1. a reward for good tidings (cf. 
τὰ διδασκάλια, the fees given the διδάσκαλος), Hom. Od. 
14, 152; Cie. ad Att. 2,3 and 12; 13,40; Plut. Demetr. 
17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2 S. iv. 10. 2. good tidings: 
Leian. asin. 26; App. b. civ. 4, 20; Plut.; al; plur. 
Sept. 2 S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt.; but in each place evay- 
-yeMa should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20 
ἀνὴρ εὐαγγελίας. Inthe N. T.spec. 8. the glad tidings 
of the kingdom of God soon to be set up, and subsequently 
also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom: 
Mk.i.15; viii.35; x. 29; xiii. 10; xiv.9; xvi.15; Mt. 
xxvi.13; w.a gen. of the obj. added: τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. 
iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; Mk.i.14 RLbr. After the 
death of Christ the term τὸ εὐαγγέλιον comprises also 
the preaching of (concerning) Jesus Christ as having 
suffered death on the cross to procure eternal salvation 
for men inthe kinzdom of God, but as restored to life 
and exalted to the right hand of God in heaven, thence 
to return in majesty to consummate the kingdom of God; 
so that it may be more briefly defined as the glad tidings 
of salvation through Christ; the proclamation of the grace 
of God manifested and pledged in Christ; the gospel 
[A-S. god-spell (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.)]: Acts 
xy. 7; Ro.i.16 GL T Tr WH ; x. 16; xi. 285; 1 Co. iv. 
15; ix. 14,18[GLTTrWH], 23; xv. 1; 2 Co. viii. 18; 
Gal. ii. 2; Eph. iii. 6; vi. 19 [L WH br. evay.]; Phil. i. 5, 
7. 12) 17: (16): [ind22 ΟΕ εἰς B- DT. » ὉΠ] τ ν- 9. [15; ef 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2]; 1 ΤῊ. ii. 4; 2 Tim. i. 8,10; w. 
gen. of the obj., the gospel concerning ete.: τοῦ Χριστοῦ 
{cf. W. 186 (175) sq.], Ro. i. 16 Rec.; xv. 19, 29 Rec.; 
1 Co. ix. 12, 18 [Rec.]; 2 Co. ii. 12; ix. 13; x. 14; Gal. 
i 7; Phil i. 27; 1 Th. iii. 2; rod κυρίου ἡμῶν “Inc. Xp. 
2 Th. i. 8 [T Tr WH om. L br. Χριστοῦ]; τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
cov, Ro. 1. 9 ef. Mk.i.1; τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, Eph. i. 13; 
τῆς εἰρήνης, Eph. vi. 15; τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xx. 
24; τῆς δόξης τοῦ μακαρίου θεοῦ, 1 Tim. i. 11; τῆς δόξης 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. iv. 4. ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, the 
truth contained in the gospel [cf. W. 236 (221 sq.)], 
Gal. ii. 5, 14; Col. i. 5; ἡ ἐλπὶς τοῦ evayy. the hope which 
the gospel awakens and strengthens, Col. i. 23; ἡ πίστις 
ToU evayy. the faith given the gospel, Phil. i. 27; oí 
δεσμοὶ τ. ebayy. (see δεσμός. fin.), Philem. 13; ἕτερον 
evayy. of another sort, i. e. different from the true doc- 
trine concerning Christian salvation, Gal. i. 6; 2 Co. xi. 
4; αἰώνιον evayy. the contents of which were decreed by 
God from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. with gen. of the au- 
thor; and that ^ a. of the author of the subject-matter 
or facts on which the glad tidings of man’s salvation 


rest, and who wished these glad tidings to be conveyed | minded: compar. εὐγενέστερος, Acts xvii. 11. 


to men: τὸ evayy. τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. xi. 7; 1 Th. 
17 


D 








T εὐγενής 


ii. 2, 8 sq.; 1 Pet. iv. 17; more fully τοῦ θεοῦ περὶ τοῦ 
υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, Ro. i. 1-3. B. of the author of the partic- 
ular mode in which the subject-matter of the gospel is 
understood (conception of the gospel) and taught to 
others; thus Paul calls his exposition of the gospel (and 
that of the teachers who agree with him), in opposition 
to that of those teaching differently, τὸ εὐαγγ. ἡμῶν: 
2 Co. iv. 3, [ef. τὸ ev. τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, Gal. i. 
11]; κατὰ τὸ evayy. pov, as I expound it, Ro. ii. 16; xvi. 
25; 2 Tim.ii.8. ^ y. of him who preaches the gospel: 
ἡμῶν, 1 Th.i.5; 2 Th.ii.14. with gen. of those to 
whom it is announced: τῆς περιτομῆς (1. 6. τῶν περιτετμη- 
μένων). to be preached to the cireumcised or Jews; and 
τὸ εὐ. τῆς ἀκροβυστίας, to be carried to the Gentiles, Gal. 
ii. 7. ^ b. As the Messianie rank of Jesus was proved 
by his words, his deeds, and his death, the narrative of 
the sayings, deeds, and death of Jesus Christ came to be 
called εὐαγγέλιον : so perhaps in Mk. i. 1; for the pas- 
sage may also mean, ‘glad tidings concerning Jesus 
Christ began to be prociaimed even as it is written,’ viz. 
by John the Baptist; ef. De Wette ad loc. At length 
the name was given to a written narrative of the glad 
tidings; so in the titles*of the Gospels, on which see 
κατά, II. 3 c. a. [On the ecel. senses of the word, see 
Soph. Lex. s. v.]* : 

εὐαγγελιστής, -00, 6, (εὐαγγελίζω), a bibl. and eecl. word, 
a bringer of good tidings, an evangelist (Vulg. evangelis- 
ta). This name is given in the N. T. to those heralds of 
salvation through Christ who are not apostles: Acts xxi. 
8; Eph. iv. 11; 2 Tim. iv. 5. [B. D. s. v. Evangelist.]* 

εὐαρεστέω, -@: 1 aor. inf. εὐαρεστῆσαι : pf. inf. εὐηρε- 
otnxevat, and without augm. εὐαρεστηκ. Heb. xi. 5 L WH 
[cf. WH. App. p. 162; B. 35 (30)]; to be well-pleasing : 
τῷ θεῷ (Sept. for p'riownDn-nw yum, Gen. v. 22, 24; 
vi. 9), Heb. xi. 5 sq. (Sir. xliv. 16; Philo de Abr. $ 6; 
de exsecr. $ 9; τινί, Diod. 14, 4). Pass. pres. evape- 
στοῦμαι ; τινί [B. 188 (163); W. § 39, 1 a.], to be well 
pleased with a thing: Heb. xiii. 16 (Diod. 3, 55; 20, 79; 
Diog. Laért. 10, 137).* 

εὐ-άρεστος, -ov, (fr. ed and dpearós), well-pleasing, ac- 
ceptable: Ro. xii. 2; τινί, to one, Ro. xii. 1; xiv. 18; 2 Co. 
v. 9; Eph. v. 10; Phil. iv. 18; ἔν τινι, in anything, Tit. ii. 
9; ἐν κυρίῳ (see ἐν I. 6 b., p. 211° mid.), Col. iii. 20 (R om. 
év); ἐνώπιον with gen. of pers., in one's judgment: Heb. 
xiii. 31. (Sap.iv. 10; ix. 10; Clem. Al. [strom. 2, 19 p. 
481, 21 etc.; Just. M. apol. 1, 44 sub fin.; Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 49, 5].) See the foll. word.* 

εὐ-αρέστως, adv., in a manner well-pleasing to one, ac- 
ceptably: τῷ θεῷ. Heb. xii. 28. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; 
gladly, willingly, Epict. diss. 1, 12, 21; frag. 11.)* 

EvfovAos, -ov, 6, [lit. of good counsel], Eubulus, a 
Christian : 2 Tim. iv. 21." 

ev-ye, used in commendation, well done ! Lk.xix.17 LT 
Tr WH. (Arstph., Plat., al.; Sept.for msn.) Cf. εὖ, fin.* 

εὐγενής, -es, (fr. εὖ and γένος) ; 1. well-born, of noble 
race: Lk. xix. 12 (of a prince) ; 1 Co. i. 26. 2. noble- 
(Sept.; 
often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. and Tragg. down.) * 


εὐδία 2 


εὐδία, -as, 7, (fr. εὔδιος, -ov, and this fr. εὖ and Ζεύς, 
gen. Διός, Zeus, the ruler of the air and sky), a serene 
sky, fair weather: Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the 
passage]. (Sir. iii. 15; Pind., Aeschyl., Hippocr., Xen., 
and sqq.) * 

εὐ-δοκέω, -@; impf. 1 pers. plur. εὐδοκοῦμεν (1 Th. ii. 8 
[where WI after cod. Vat. ηὐδοκ.; W.and B. as below ]); 
1 aor. εὐδόκησα and (in Heb. x. 6, 8, L T Tr; 1 Co. x. 5 
LTrWH ; Ro. xv. 26, 27 and 1 Th. iii. 1 T Tr WH; Mt. 
xii. 18 T Tr; Mt. iii. 17 T ; Col.i. 19 L mrg.) ηὐδόκησα, 
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 456 and 140; W. 71 (69); [B. 
34 (30); Tdf. Proleg. p. 120; WH. App. p. 162]; (fr. 
εὖ and δοκέω, cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 370, who treats 
of the word fully and with his usual learning [cf. W. 
101 (95)] ; Sept. mostly for ry; among Grk. writ. 
used esp. by Polyb., Diod., and Dion. Hal.; 1. as in 
prof. auth., foll. by an infin., it seems good to one, is one's 
good pleasures to think it good, choose, determine, decide : 
Lk. xii. 32; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal. i.15; once foll. by acc. w. 
inf., Col. i. 19 [cf. Bp. Lehtft.; W. $64, 3b.; B. § 129, 16]; 
with the included idea of kindness accompanying the de- 
cision, Ro. xv. 26 sq.; to do willingly what is signified by 
the inf., to be ready to, 1 Th. ii. 85 to prefer, choose rather, 
[A. V. we thought it good], 1 Th. iii. 1; Sir. xxv. 16; 
more fully μᾶλλον εὐδοκῶ, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. by a usage 
peculiar to bibl. writ., foll. by ἔν τινι, to be well pleased 
with, take pleasure in, a pers. or thing [cf. W. 38, 232 
(218); B. 185 (160)]: Mt. iii. 17; xii. 18 Tr; xvii. 
5; Mk.i.11; Lk.iii. 22, [on the tense in the preceding 
pass. cf. W. 278 (261); BJ198 (171)]; 1 Co.x. 5; 2 Co. 
xii. 10; 2 Th. ii. 12 RGLbr.; Heb.x.38, (3 ydn, 2 S. 
xxii. 20; Mal. ii. 17; 3 nx^, Ps. exlix. 4). foll. by ets 
τινα (i.e. when directing the mind, turning the thoughts, 
unto), to be favorably inclined towards one [cf. W. $31, 
5; B. $133, 23]: Mt. xii. 18 RG; 2 Pet. 1. 17; w. sim- 
ple aec. of pers. to be favorable to, take pleasure in [cf. 
W. 222 (209)]: Mt. xii. 18 L T WH; with acc. of the 
thing : Heb. x. 6, 8, (Ps. 1. (li.) 18, 21; Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 2; 
Gen. xxxiii. 10; Lev. xxvi. 34, 41); as in Grk. writ. 
also, w. the dat. of the pers. or thing with which one is 
well pleased: 2 Th. ii. 12 T Tr WH (see above); 1 
Mace. i.43; 1 Esdr. iv. 39. [Comp.: συν-ευδοκέω.] * 

εὐδοκία, -as, ἡ, (fr. εὐδοκέω, as εὐλογία fr. evdoyew), 
unknown to prof. auth. [ Boeckh, Inserr. 5960], found in 
the O. T. in some of the Pss. (for 1*2) and often in Sir.; 
on it ef. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 371 sq. ; [esp. Bp. Lghtft. 
on Phil.i.15]; prop. beneplacitum (Vulg. [ ed. Clement. ] 
Eph. i. 9); 1. will, choice: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21, 
(on both pass. see ἔμπροσθεν, 2 b.); Sir. i. 27 (24); 
xxxvi. 13, ete. ; in particular, good-will, kindly intent, be- 
nevolence: Eph. i. 5,9; Phil. ii. 13, (Ps. 1. (li.) 20; Sir. ii. 
16; xi. 17 (15) etc.) ; àv εὐδοκίαν, prompted by good will, 
Philos. 15. 2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction: with 
gen. of the thing that pleases, 2 Th. i. 11; ἐν ἀνθρώποις 
εὐδοκία, either among men pleasure produced by salva- 
tion, or God's pleasure in men, Lk. ii. 14 RG Tr mrg. 
WH mre.; ἄνθρωποι εὐδοκίας, men in whom God is well 
pleased [i.e. not a particular class of men (viz. believ- 


58 








εὐθύνω 


ers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in 
Christ's birth], ibid. L T Tr txt. WH txt. [see WT. 
App. ad loc.; Field, Otium Norv. iii. ad loc.], (Ps. exliv. 
(exlv.) 16; Sir. ix. 12). S. desire (for delight in any 
absent thing easily begets a longing for it): Ro. x. 1; 
cf. Philippi and Tholuck ad loc.* 

εὐεργεσία, -as, ἡ, (εὐεργέτης); a good deed, benefit: 1 
Tim. vi. 2 (on which see ἀντιλαμβάνω, 2); with gen. 
of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [W. 185: 
(174)], Actsiv.9. (2 Macc. vi. 13; ix. 26 ; Sap. xvi. 11. 
24; in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down.) * 

εὐεργετέω, -à ; (εὐεργέτης), to do good, bestow benefits = 
Acts x. 38. (Sept.; often in Attic writ.) * 

εὐεργέτης, -ov, 6, a benefactor (fr. Pind. and Hat. 
down); it was also a title of honor, conferred on such 
as had done their country service, and upon princes; 
equiv. to Soter, Pater Patriae: Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hdt. 
8,85; Thuc. 1, 129; Xen. vect 3, 11; Hell. 6, 1, 4; 
Plat. de virt. p. 379 b.; al.; cf. 2 Macc. iv. 2; joined 
with σωτήρ, Joseph. b. j. 3, 9, 8; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12 
[Tdf. viii. 1. 25]; Diod. 11, 26.)* | 

€U-Beros, -ov, (fr. εὖ and &erós), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hippoer. down; prop. well-placed; a. fit: εἴς τι, 
Lk. ix. 62 RG; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 et al.) ; witlr 
dat. of the thing for which: Lk. ix. 62 L T Tr WH (τῷ: 
πράγματι, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149, 4]). — b. useful: 
τινί, Heb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend 
on the ptep.]; (of time, seasonable, Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 65 
Susan. 15).* 

εὐθέως, adv., (fr. εὐθύς), straightway, immediately, forth- 
with: Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks., 
esp. Mark’s Gospel [where, however, Τ Tr WH have 
substituted εὐθύς in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere 
only in Gal. i. 16 ; Jas. i. 24; Rev. iv. 2, (for o8n3, Job 
v. 3). shortly, soon: 8 Jn. 14. [From Soph. down. ] 

εὐθυδρομέω, -@: 1 aor. εὐθυδρόμησα [see εὐδοκέω] ; (εὐ- 
θυδρόμος, 1. e. εὐθύς and δρόμος) ; to make a straight course, 
run a straight course: foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts: 
xvi. 11; εὐθυδρομήσας ἦλθον eis, Acts xxi. 1. (Philo, 
alleg. lege. iii. $ 79; de agricult. § 40.) * 

εὐθυμέω, -ὦὥ : (εὔθυμος) ; 1. trans. fo put in good 
spirits, gladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat. de rep. 
2, 383 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen., 
Plat.). 2. intrans. to be joyful, be of good cheer, of 
good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v. 13. (Eur. 
Cycl. 530; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) * 

εὔ:θυμος, -ov, (εὖ and θυμός); 1. well-disposed, kind, 
(Hom. Od.14,63). 2. of good cheer, of good courage: Acts 
xxvii. 36; [compar. as adv. xxiv. 10 Rec. (see εὐθύμως], 
(Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down ; 2 Macc. xi. 26).* 

εὐθύμως, adv., [Aeschyl, Xen., al.], cheerfully: Acts 
xxiv. 10 LT Tr WH, for Rec. εὐθυμότερον the more con- 
Jidently.* 

εὐθύνω ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. εὐθύνατε ; (εὐθύς) ; 
a. to make straight, level, plain: τὴν ὁδόν, Jn. i. 23 (Sir. 
ii. 6; xxxvil. 15). b. to lead or guide straight, to keep 
straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : 6 εὐθύνων, the 
steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cycl- 


εὐθύς 


15; of a charioteer, Num. xxii. 23; Isoer. p. 9; al.) 
[Cowr. : xat-evdive.]* 

εὐθύς, -cia, -ó, Sept. for Iw», [fr. Pind. down], straight; 
a. prop. straight, level: of a way, [Mt. iii. 3]; Mk. i. 3; 
Lk. iii. 4; Actsix.11; εἰς εὐθεῖαν (1, T Tr WH εἰς εὐθείας), 
sc. ὁδόν (an ellipsis com. also in class. Grk. ef. W. § 64, 
5), Lk. iii. 5; εὐθεῖα ὁδός the straight, the right way, is fig. 
used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal 
i.e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ai ὁδοὶ κυρίου, the, right 
and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the 
Three vs. 3). b. trop. straightforward, upright, true, 
sincere, (as often in prof. auth.): καρδία, Acts viii. 21 
(εὐθεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ often in the Pss. as vii. 11; xxxi. 
(xxxii.) 11; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 11).* 

εὐθύς, adv., [fr. Pind. down], i. q. εὐθέως, with which it 
is often interchanged in the Mss. [see εὐθέως ; straight- 
way, immediately, forthwith: Mt. ii. 16; xiii. 20; Jn. 
xiii. 32, ete. [Cf. Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 145.] 

εὐθύτης, -ητος, 7, (fr. the adj. εὐθύς), rectitude, upright- 
ness: trop. ῥάβδος εὐθύτητος, an impartial and righteous 
government, Heb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7.* 

εὐκαιρέω, -@: impf. εὐκαίρουν [so L T Tr WH in Mk. 
vi 31; RG in Acts xvii. 21] and ηὐκαίρουν [RG in 
Mk. I. c.; L T Tr WH in Acts l. c.], (betw. which the 
Mss. vary, see εὐδοκέω, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. εὐκαιρήσω ; 
(εὔκαιρος) ; a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p.125sq.; [Autherford, New Phryn. p. 205; 
Soph. Lex. s. v.]); to have opportunity: 1 Co. xvi. 12; to 
have leisure, foll. by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31 
[(Plut. ii. p. 223 d. Cleom. Anax. $9)]; to give one’s 
time to a thing, εἴς τι, Acts xvii. 21.* 

εὐκαιρία, -as, 7, (εὔκαιρος), seasonable time, opportunity : 
Gyreiv eix., foll. by [ἵνα B. 237 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 16; 
[Lk. xxii. 6 Lehm. mrg.]; by τοῦ with inf. Lk. xxii. 6. 
(Sept.; in Grk. writ. first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) * 

εὔ-καιρος, -ov, (εὖ and καιρός), seasonable, timely, oppor- 
tune: βοήθεια, Heb. iv. 16; ἡμέρα εὔκ. a convenient day, 
Mk.vi.21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29; [Ps. ciii. (civ.) 27; Soph. 
O. C. 32]; Theophr., Polyb., al.) * 

εὐκαίρως, adv., seasonably, opportunely ; when the op- 
portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 11; opp. to ἀκαίρως (q. v.), 
2'lTim.iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8,3; Plat. and sqq.; Sir. 
xviii. 22.) * 

εὔτκοπος, -ov, (εὖ and κόπος), that can be done with 
easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al.; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace. 
iii. 18; in the N. T. only in the phrase εὐκοπώτερόν, ἐστι. 
—foll. by inf., Mt. ix.5; ΜΚ. 11. 9; Lk. v. 23; by ace. w. 
inf., Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25; Lk. xvi. 17; xviii. 25.* 

εὐλάβεια, -efas, 7j, the character and conduct of one who 
is εὐλαβής (q. v.); 1. caution, circumspection, dis- 
cretion: Soph., Eur. Plat, Dem., sqq.; Sept. Prov. 
xxviii. 14; joined w. πρόνοια. Plut. Marcell. 9; used of 
the prudent delay of Fabius Maximus, Polyb. 3, 105, 8; 
ἡ εὐλ. σώζει πάντα, Arstph. av. 377; i. q. avoidance, 
πληγῶν, Plat. legg. 7 p. 815 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno 
the Stoic contrasts ἡ εὐλάβ. caution, as a εὔλογος ἔκκλισις 


a, reasonable shunning, with ὁ φόβος, Dios. Laért. 7, 116, | 


cf. Cic. Tusc. 4, 6, 13). 2. reverence, veneration: ἡ 


259 








εὐλογέω 


πρὸς τὸ θεῖον εὐλ. Diod. 13, 12; Plut. Camill. 21; de ser. 
num. vind. c. 4, and elsewh.; πρὸς τοὺς νόμους, Plut. Ages. 
15; θεοῦ, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § 9; simply reverence 
towards God, godly fear, picty: Heb. xii. 28 and, in the 
opinion of many, also v. 7 [cf. ἀπό, II. 2 b.; see below]. 
3. fear, anxiety, dread: Sap. xvii. 8; for nass, Josh. 
xxii. 24; Joseph. antt. 11, 6,9; Plut. Fab. 1 (the εὐβουλία 
of Fabius seemed to be εὐλάβεια) ; so, most probably, in 
Heb. v. 7 (see [above and] ἀπό, I. 3 d.), for by using 
this more select word the writer, skilled as he was in the 
Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of 
God than if he had used φόβος. [Syn. see δειλία, fin.; 
cf. Trench $ xlviii.; Delitzsch on Heb. v. 7.]* 

εὐλαβέομαι, -οῦμαι : 1 aor. ptep. εὐλαβηθείς ; prop. to 
show one’s self εὐλαβής, i. 6. 1. to act cautiously, cir- 
cumspectly, ('Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be- 
ware, fear: as in 1 Macc.iii. 30; xii. 40 [ Alex. ete.] and 
often in prof. auth., foll. by μή lest [ B. 241 sq. (208)], 
Acts xxiii. 10 RG (Deut. ii. 4; 1 S. xviii. 29; Job xiii. 
25; Jer. v. 22; Dan. iv. 2; 2 Macc. viii. 16; Sir. xli. 3). 
3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (τὸν θεόν, Plat. lero. 9 
Ῥ- 879 e.; Sept. Prov. ii. 8; xxiv. 28 (xxx. 5); Nah. i. 
7): God’s declaration, Heb. xi. 7.* 

εὐλαβής, -és, (εὖ and λαβεῖν), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. 
down ; 1. taking hold well, i. e. carefully and surely 
cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [ A. V. 
devout]: Acts ii. 5; viii. 2, (Mic. vii. 2 [ Alex. ete.]); 
joined with δίκαιος (as in Plat. polit. p. 311 b.) : Lk. ii. 
25; εὐλ. κατὰ τὸν νόμον, Acts xxii. 12 L'T Tr WH.  [Cf. 
reff. s. v. εὐλάβεια, fin.] * ; 

evhoyéw,-@; fut. εὐλογήσω ; impf. εὐλόγουν and ηὐλόγουν 
(Mk. x. 16, where the Mss. fluetuate betw. the two forms 
[cf. WH. App. p. 162]) ; 1 aor. evAdynaa (ηὐλόγησα, Mt. 
xiv. 19 L Tr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L; Heb. xi. 20 and 21 L); 
pf. εὐλόγηκα (ηὐλόγηκα, Heb. vii. 6 L ; see εὐδοκέω init. [cf. 
Veitch s. v.; Tdf. on Lk. 1. c.]) ; Pass., pf. ptep. εὐλογη- 
μένος; 1 fut. εὐλογηθήσομαι; (εὔλογος): Sept. very often 
for 712 and 353; Vulg. benedico; mostly w. ace. of the 
obj., to bless one ; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele- 
brate with praises: τὸν θεόν, Lk. i. 64; ii. 28; xxiv. 
51,53 [Tdf. om.]; Jas. iii. 9; absol in the giving of 
thanks: Mt. xiv. 195 xxvi. 26 [cf. 3 below]; Mk. vi. 41; 
viii. 7 RG T [?]; xiv. 22 [cf. 3 below]; Lk. xxiv. 30; 
1Co.xiv. 16. (When used in this sense εὐλογεῖν differs 
from εὐχαριστεῖν in referring rather to the f or m, edx. to 
the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage 
purely bibl. and ecel. like the Hebr. 3^3, 2. to in- 
voke blessings : τινά, upon one, Mt. v.44 Rec.; Lk. vi. 28; 
Ro. xii. 14; absol, 1 Cociv. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 9; of one tak- 
ing leave, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq.; of one at the point of death, 
Heb. xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9); in congratulations, Heb. 
vii. 1, 6 sq. (Gen. xiv. 19); Mk. x. 16 R GL; Lk. ii. 34; 
εὐλογημένος (133), praised, blessed, [cf. εὐλογητός]: Mt. 
xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9 sq.; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38; Jn. 
xii. 13, (in all which pass. it is an acclamation borrowed 
fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 26). 3. with acc. of a thing, to 
consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God's bless- 
ing on a thing, pray him to bless it to one’s use, pronounce 


^ 


εὐλογητός 


a consecratory blessing on: ἰχθύδια, Mk. viii. 71, Tr WH; 
τοὺς ἄρτους, Lk. ix. 16; τὸ ποτήριον, 1 Co. x. 16; τὴν 
θυσίαν, 1 S. ix. 13; and perh. τὸν ἄρτον, Mt. xxvi. 26; 
Mk. xiv. 22, (but see above under 1); cf. Ztückert, Das 
Abendmahl, p. 220 sq. 4. of God, to cause to prosper, 
to make happy, to bestow blessings on, [cf. W. 32]: τινά, 
Acts iii. 26; foll. by ἐν with dat. of the blessing, ἐν πάσῃ 
εὐλογίᾳ, with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 (ἐν ἀγαθοῖς, 
Test. xii. Patr. [test. Jos. § 18] p. 722 [ἐν εὐλογίαις γῆς, 
ἐν πρωτογενήμασι καρπῶν, test. Isach. ὃ 5 p. 626 sq.]); 
εὐλογῶν εὐλογήσω σε (after the Hebr., Gen. xxii. 17; see 
εἴδω, I. 1 a. [for reff.]), I will bestow on thee the greatest 
blessings, Heb. vi. 14; Gal. iii. 8 Rec. ?*'* (see ἐνευλο- 
γέω), 9; εὐλογημένος favored of God, blessed, Lk. i. 42^ 
(cf. Deut. xxviii. 4); ἐν γυναιξί, blessed among women, 
i. e. before all other women, Lk. i. 28 R GL Tr txt. br. ; 
42^, (ef. W. 246 (231); [B. 83 (73)]) ; εὐλογημένοι τοῦ 
πατρός (i. q. ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός, like edd. ὑπὸ θεοῦ, Ts. lxi. 9; 
Ixv. 23; cf. W. 189 (178) and $ 30, 4; [cf. B. $ 132, 287), 
appointed to eternal salvation by my father, Mt. xxv. 34. 
[Comp.: év-, kar-evAoyéo.] * 

εὐλογητός, -óv, (εὐλογέω), Sept. for 7373, a bibl. and 
eccl. word; blessed, praised, Vulg. benedictus: applied 
to God, Lk. i. 68; Ro. i. 25; ix. 5 [on its position here 
ef. W. 551 (512 sq.) ; Ps. Ixviii. (Ixvii.) 20; Gen. xxvii. 
29; Pss. of Sol. 8, 40. 41; also 1 K. x. 9; 2 Chr. ix. 8; Job 
i. 21; Ps. exii. (exiii.) 2; Ruthii. 19; Dan. ii. 20, and esp. 
the elaborate discussion of Ro. l. c. by Professors Dwight 
and Abbot in Journ. Soe. Bibl. Lit. ete. i. pp. 22-55, 
87-154 (1882)]; 2 Co. i. 3; xi. 31; Eph. i. 3; 1 Pet. i. 
3; cf. B. $ 129, 22 Rem. [contra, W. 586 (545); Mey. on 
Gal. i. 5]; absol. ὁ εὐλογητός, of God: Mk. xiv. 61. [The 
distinction betw. εὐλογητός and εὐλογημένος is thus stated 
by Philo (de migr. Abr. § 19, i. 453 Mang.) : εὐλογητύς, 
ov μόνον εὐλογημένος - ... τὸ μὲν yap τῷ πεφυκέναι, τὸ δὲ 
τῷ νομίζεσθαι λέγεται póvov . . . τῷ πεφυκέναι εὐλογίας 
ἄξιον... ὅπερ εὐλογητὸν ἐν τοῖς χρησμοῖς ἄδεται. CF. 
Gen. xiv. 19, 20; 1 S. xxv. 32, 33; Tob. xi. 16 cod. 
Sin.; contra, Jud. xiii. 18.  EAoygrós is applied to 
men in Gen. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 29; Deut. vii. 14; Judg. 
xvii. 2; 1 S. xv. 13; Ruthii. 20; Jud. and Tob. τι. s. etc. 
See Prof. Abbot's careful exposition u. s. p. 152 sq.]* 

εὐλογία, -as, ἡ, (εὔλογος) ; Sept. for 11223; Vulg. bene- 
dictio; as in class. Grk. 1. praise, laudation, pane- 
gyric: of God or Christ, Rev. v. 12, 13; vii. 12. 2. 
fine discourse, polished language: Plat. rep. 3 p. 400 d.; 
Luc. Lexiph. 1; in a bad sense, language artfully adapted 
to eaptivate the hearer, fair speaking, fine speeches: 
Ro. xvi. 18 (joined with χρηστολογία, the latter relating 
to the substance, εὐλογία to the expression); plur. in 
Aesop, fab. 229 p. 150 ed. Cor. ἐὰν σὺ εὐλογίας εὐπορῇς; 
ἔγωγέ σου ov κήδομαι, [but why not gen. sing.?]. Bya 
usage unknown to native Grks. 3. an invocation of 
blessings, benediction: Heb. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 10, (Gen. 
xxvii. 35 sq. 38, al.; Sir. iii. 8; xxxvii. 24; Joseph. antt. 
4.8,44); see ebAoyéo, 2. 4. consecration: τὸ ποτήριον 
τῆς εὐλογίας, the consecrated cup (for that this is the 
meaning is evident from the explanatory adjunct à εὐλο- 


260 











εὐοδόω 


γοῦμεν, see εὐλογέω 8 [al. al.; cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad 
loc.; W. 189 (178)]), 1 Co. x. 16. 5. a (concrete) 
blessing, benefit, (Deut. xi. 26, etc. ; Sir. vii. 32; xxxix. 
22, etc.) ; univ. 1 Pet. iii. 9; of the blessings of Chris- 
tianity, Ro. xv. 29; Eph. i. 3; ἡ εὐλογία τοῦ 'Afp. the 
salvation (by the Messiah) promised to Abraham, Gal. 
iii. 14; of the continual fertility of the soil granted by 
God, Heb. vi. 7 (Lev. xxv. 21; ὑετὸς εὐλογίας, Ezek. 
xxxiv. 26 ; cf. εὐλογεῖν ἀγρόν, Gen. xxvii. 27) ; of the bless- 
ing of a collection sent from Christians to their brethren, 
2 Co. ix. 5 (of the gifts of men, Gen. xxxiii. 11; Judg. i. 
15; 1 S. xxv. 27); ἐπ᾽ εὐλογίαις, that blessings may ac- 
crue, bountifully (opp. to φειδομένως), 2 Co. ix. 6 (see ἐπί, 
B. 2 6. p. 284" top).* 

εὐ-μετά-δοτος, -ον, (εὖ and μεταδίδωμι), ready or free to 
impart; liberal: 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. ready to distribute]. 
(Antonin. 1, 14; 6, 48.) * 

Hivikn [R* -νείκη (see et, c); lit. conquering well], -5s, 
ἡ, Eunice, the mother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.* 

εὐ-νοέω, -@; (εὔνοος) ; to wish (one) well; to be well-dis- 
posed, of a peaceable spirit: τινί, towards any one, Mt. 
y. 25. (3 Mace. vii. 11; Soph., Arstph., Xen., Polyb., 
Plut., Hdian.) * 

εὔνοια, -as, ἡ, (evvoos), good-will, kindness: 1 Co. vii. 3 
Rec.; μετ᾽ εὐνοίας, Eph. vi. 7. [From Aeschyl. down. ] * 

ebvoux({o: 1 aor. εὐνούχισα ; 1 aor. pass. εὐνουχίσθην ; 
[on the augm. cf. B. 34 (30); WH. App. p. 162]; to cas- 
trate, unman: pass. ὑπό twos, Mt. xix. 12*; metaph. 
εὐνουχ. ἑαυτόν to make one’s self a eunuch, viz. by ab- 
staining (like a eunuch) from marriage, Mt. xix. 125 (Jo- 
seph. antt. 10, 2, 2; Leian., Dio Cass., al.) * 

εὐνοῦχος, -ov, ὁ, (Ir. εὐνή a bed, and ἔχω), Sept. D°70; 
fr. Hdt. down; prop. a bed-keeper, bed-quard, superin- 
tendent of the bedchamber, chamberlain, in the palace of 
oriental monarchs who support numerous wives; ‘he 
superintendent of the women’s apartment or harem, an 
office held by eunuchs; hence a. an emasculated 
man, a eunuch: Mt. xix. 12". But eunuchs in ori- 
ental eourts held other oflices of greater or less impor- 
tance, like the oversight of the treasury, held by the 
Ethiopian eunuch mentioned in Aets viii. 27, 34, 36, 38 
sq.; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 973; [B. D. s. v. Eunuch]. 
b. one naturally incapacitated — either for marriage, Mt. 
xix. 12*; or for begetting children, Sap. iii. 14, ef. Grimm, 
exgt. Hdb. ad loc. c. one who voluntarily abstains 
from, marriage: Mt. xix. 12°. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. 
N. T. ete. p. 485 sqq. treats of the word more fully.* 

Eo8(a [(lit. prosperous journey), τωδία RK (lit. fra- 
grant) ], -as, ἡ, Zuodia, a Christian woman [transformed 
by A. V. into a man, Huodias]: Phil. iv. 2 [see Bp. 
Lghtf. ad loc. ].* 

εὐ-οδόω. -@: [ Pass., pres. evododpar; fut. εὐυδωθήσομαι; 
1 aor. subj. εὐοδωθῇ, 1 Co. xvi. 2 WH mrg. who regard 
the εὐοδῶται of the text here as perf. (either ind. or 
subj.) see their App. p. 172]; (eto89os) ; Sept. principally 
for nox and m^xn; to grant a prosperous and expedi- 
tious journey, to lead by a direct and easy way: Gen. 
xxiv. 48; much more freq. tropically, to grant a success- 


εὐπάρεδρος 


ful issue, to cause to prosper: τί, as τὴν ὁδόν τινος, Gen. 
xxiv. 21, 40; Is. lv. 11, etc. ; τὰ ἔργα τινός, Sap. xi. 1; in 
the Pass. always trop. to prosper, be successful : of per- 
sons, Josh. i. 8; Prov. xxviii. 13 ; 2 Chr. xiii. 12; xviii. 
11, ete.; 3 Jn. 2; εἴπως εὐοδωθήσομαι ἐλθεῖν if haply I 
shall be so fortunate as to come, Ro. i. 10; of things: 2 
Esdr. v. 8; Tob. iv. 19; 1 Mace. iii. 6, ete. ; τῷ Κλεο- 
μένεϊ εὐωδώθη τὸ πρῆγμα; Hdt. 6, 73; 6, τε ἂν εὐοδῶται 
[see above, init.] whatever (business) has prospered, 
i. e. (contextually) its gains, 1 Co. xvi. 2.* 

εὐ-πάρ-εδρος, -ov, (εὖ, and πάρεδρος [sitting beside]), 
sitting constantly by; assiduous: πρὸς τὸ εὐπάρεδρον τῷ 
κυρίῳ, that ye may be constantly devoted to the Lord 
and his cause, 1 Co. vii. 35, for Ree. εὐπρόσεδρον, which 
does not differ in sense, [ A.V. attend upon]. (Hesych. 
εὐπάρεδρον: καλῶς παραμένον.) * 

εὐ-πειθής, -és, (εὖ, and πείθομαι to comply with, obey), 
easily obeying, compliant, [ A. V. easy to be intreated]: 
Jas. iii. 17. (Aeschyl, Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * 

εὐ-περίτστατος, -ov, (fr. εὖ and περιΐστημι), skilfully 
surrounding i. e. besetting, sc. to prevent or retard run- 
ning: Heb. xii. 1 [some passively (cf. Isocr. 135 e.), 
well or much admired (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. (Not found 
elsewhere.) * 

εὐ-ποιΐα [oua WH (cf. I, « fin.)], -as, 7, (εὐποιός), a 
doing good, beneficence: Heb. xiii. 16; Arr. exp. Alex. 
7, 28,8; Alciphr. 1, 10; Leian. imag. 21; a benefit, 
kindness, Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 2; (plur. ib. 19, 9, 1).* 

et-ropéw, and (esp. in later Grk.) mid. εὐπορέομαι, 
-ovpar: impf. 3 pers. sing. ηὐπορεῖτο (ἢ, G) and εὐπορ. (L 
T Tr WH ; for reff. see εὐδοκέω, init.) ; (εὔπορος well 
off) ; to be well off, have means: Acts xi. 29 [A. V. acc. 
to his ability]. (Lev. xxv. 26, 28, 49; often in the 
classics.) * 

εὐ-πορία, -as, 7], (εὔπορος, see the preced. word), riches, 
means, wealth: Acts xix. 25. (Xen., Plat., al.; in diff. 
senses in diff. auth.) * 

εὐ-πρέπεια, -as, 7, (εὐπρεπής well-looking), goodly ap- 
pearance, shapeliness, beauty, comeliness: τοῦ προσώπου, 
Jas.i.11. (Thue., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Plut.; Sept.) * 

εὐ-πρόσ-δεκτος, -ov, (εὖ and προσδέχομαι), well-received, 
accepted, acceptable: Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. vi. 2; viii. 12; 
τινί, Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 5. (Plut. praecept. rei publ. 
ger. c. 4, 17 p. 801 c.; eccl. writ.)* 

εὐ-πρόσ-εδρος, -ov, (ev, and πρόσεδρος [sitting near]), 
see εὐπάρεδρος. 

εὐ-προσωπέω, -à : 1 aor. inf. εὐπροσωπῆσαι ; (εὐπρόσωπος 
fair of face, of good appearance); to make a fair show; 
to please [a weak trans. (?); yet Vulg. placere]: év 
σαρκί, in things pertaining to the flesh, Gal. vi. 12. 
(Elsewh. only in Chrysost. hom. ad Eph. xxii. $ 5, Opp. 
xi. 173 c. ed. Montf. [var.] and several times in Byzant. 
writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]-) * 

εὐρ-ακύλων, -wvos, 6, (fr. εὖρος and Lat. aquilo, like 
εὐρόνοτος, and euroauster [ B. 16 (15) ]), Vulg. ewroaquilo; 
the Euraquilo, a N. E. wind: Acts xxvii. 14 L T Tr 
WH, for Rec. εὐροκλύδων (Grsb. εὐρυκλ.) q. v. (Not 
found elsewhere.) [B. D. s. v. Euroclydon.] * 


261 





εὑρίσκω 


εὑρίσκω ; impf. εὕρισκον (Mk. xiv. 55 [RGT]; Lk. 
xix. 48 [RG T]; Acts vii. 11 [exc. Tr WH]) and more 
rarely ηὕρισκον (cf. Kühner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Veitch 
s. v. fin. ] and reff. under evéoxéw) ; fut. εὑρήσω; pf. εὕρηκα; 
1 aor. e¥pyoa (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks., 
occurs in Aesop. f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.]; 
Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ.; cf. Lol. ad Phryn. 
p. 721; W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14 
tec.; 2 aor. εὗρον, 1 pers. plur. in Alex. form | WH. App. 
p. 164; B. 39 (34); W. $13,1 (see dmépyouac) εὕραμεν, 
Lk. xxiii. 2 T Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. eópav, Lk. viii. 35 
Tr WH; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often εὕροσαν) ; Pass., 
pres. εὑρίσκομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. εὑρίσκετο, Heb. xi. 
5 RG, ηὑρίσκετο LT Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and Delitzsch 
ad loc. [Veitch u. s.]) ; 1 aor. εὑρέθην ; fut. εὑρεθήσομαι; 
2 aor. mid. εὑρόμην and later εὑράμην (Heb. ix. 12, [cf. 
reff. above (on 2 aor. act.) ]) ; Sept. numberless times for 
NXD, sometimes for WT to attain to, and for Chald. 
naw; [fr. Hom. down]; to find; i. e. 

a prop. to come upon, hit upon, to meet with; a. after 
searching, /o find a thing sought: absol., opp. to ζητεῖν, Mt. 
vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (ζήτει kai εὑρήσεις, Epict. diss. 4, 1, 
51); τινά, Mt. ii. 8; Mk. 1. 387; Lk. ii. 45; Acts xi. 26 
(25); xiii. 22; 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); 2 Tim.i.17; Rev. xx. 
15, etc.; οὐχ εὑρίσκετο, he had vanished, Heb. xi.5; with a 
specification of place added: πέραν w. gen. Jn. vi. 25; ἐν 
w. dat. Acts v. 225 εὑρέθη εἰς, Acts viii. 40 (see eis, C. 2); 
w. acc. of the thing, Mt. vii. 14; xiii. 46 ; xviii. 13 ; 
Lk. xxiv. 3; Jn. x. 9; Acts vii. 11; Ro. vii. 18 Rec., 
etc.; foll. by indir. dise., Lk. v. 19; οὐχ εὑρέθησαν, had 
disappeared, Rev. xvi. 20, cf. xviii. 21; w. dat. of ad- 
vantage, Rev. xx. 11; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Mt. 
xxi 19; Rev. xii. 8. τινὰ or rl ζητεῖν x. οὐχ εὑρίσκειν : 
Mt. xii. 43; xxvi. 60; Mk. xiv. 55; Lk. xi. 24; xiii. 6 sq.; 
Jn. vii. 34; Rev. ix. 6,(2 K. ii. 17; Neh. vii. 64; Ps. ix. 
36 [x. 15]; Eccl vii. 29; Ezek. xxii. 30; xxvi. 21 Ald. 
Comp.; Hos. ii. 7); γῆ kai τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 
shall be found sc. for destruction, i. 6. will be unable to 
hide themselves from the doom decreed them by God, 
2 Pet. iii. 10 Tr WH, after the strange but improbable 
reading of codd. NB and other authorities; [see WH. 
Intr. 8 365 and App. ad loc.]. b. without previous 
search, to find (by chance), to fall in with: τινά, Mt. 
xviii. 28 ; xxvii. 32 ; Jn. i. 41 (42), 45 (46) ; v. 14; ix. 35; 
Acts xiii. 6; xviii. 2; xix. 1; xxviii. 14; foll. by ἐν w. 
dat. of place, Jn. ii. 14. τί, Mt. xiii. 44; xvii. 27; Lk. 
iv. 17; Jn. xii. 14; Acts xvii. 23; foll. by ev w. dat. of 
place, Mt. viii. 105 Lk. vii. 9. 
with a pred. ace. is used of those who come or return to 
a place, the predicate ptep. or adj. describing the state 
or condition in which the pers. or thing met with is 
found, or the action which one is found engaged in: 
w. an adj, Acts v. 10; 2 Co. ix. 4; xii. 20; w. ἃ 
ptep. [ef. B. 301 (258)], Mt. xii. 44; xx. 6; xxi. 2; 
xxiv. 46; xxvi. 40, 43; Mk. xi. 2; xiii.36; xiv. 37, 40; 
Lk. ii. 12; vii. 10; viii.35; xi.25; xii. 37, 43; xix. 30; 
xxi. 2; xxiv. 2, 38: Acts v. 985 1x. 95 X497 ἈΞῚ 9. 
xxiv. 12, 18; xxvii. 6; fall. by καθώς, Mk. xiv. 16; Lk. 


C. εὑρίσκω τινά OY τι 


εὐροκλύδων 


xix. 32; xxii. 13; foll. by a pred. substantive to which 
ὄντα must be supplied, Acts xxiv. 5 [cf. W. § 45, 6 b.; B. 
304 (261)]. 2. tropically, to find by inquiry, thought, 
examination, scrutiny, observation, hearing; to find out 
by practice and experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un- 
derstand: κατηγορίαν, Lk. vi. 7 ['T Tr txt. WH κατηγο- 
pev]; τινά foll. by ptep. in the predicate, Acts xxiii. 29; 
by ὅτι, Ro. vii. 21; after an examination (πειράζειν), τινά 
[ri] w. a pred. adj. [ptep.], Rev. iii. 2; of a judge: αἰτίαν 
θανάτου, Acts xiii. 28; αἰτίαν, κακόν, ἀδίκημα ἕν τινι, Jn. 
xviii. 38; xix. 4,6; Acts xxiii. 9; xxiv. 20; after ἃ com- 
putation, w. an ace. of the price or measure, Acts xix. 
19 ; xxvii. 28 ; after deliberation, τὸ τί ποιήσωσι, Lk. xix. 
48; τὸ πῶς κολάσωνται αὐτούς, Acts iv. 21. Pass. ebpi- 
σκομαι to be found, i.e. to be seen, be present: Lk. ix. 36 
(Gen. xviii. 31); often like the Hebr. wYm2 to be dis- 
covered, recognized, detected, to show one's self out, of 
one’s character or state as found out by others (men, 
God, or both), (cf. W. $65, 8) : εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα, 
Mt. i. 18; tva εὑρεθῶσι καθὼς κ. ἡμεῖς, 2 Co. xi. 12; ei- 
ρέθη μοι ἡ ἐντολὴ els θάνατον sc. οὖσα, the commandment, 
as I found by experience, brought death to me, Ro. vii. 
10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none showed themselves as hay- 
ing returned); Actsv. 39; 1 Οὐ. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co. v. 
3; Gal. ii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. v. 4; rui, dat. of the 
pers. taking cognizance and judging [W.$31, 10; B. 
187 (162) ], 2 Pet. iii. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet cf. B. 
l.c. and $133, 14; W.$31,4a.]; ἵνα εὑρεθῶ ev αὐτῷ i. e. 
ἐν Χριστῷ, sc. ὦν, Phil. iii. 9; σχήματι εὑρεθεὶς ὡς ἄνθρω- 
mos, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph. b. 1. 3, 6, 1; so the Lat. 
invenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; reperior, "Tuscul. i. 39, 94). 
εὑρίσκειν θεόν (opp. to ζητεῖν αὐτόν, see ζητέω, 1 c. [cf. 
ἐκζητέω, a.]), to get knowledge of, come to know, God, Acts 
xvii. 27; εὑρίσκεταί (ὁ θεός) τινι, discloses the knowledge 
of himself to one, Sap. i. 2; cf. Grimm, exgt. Hdb. ad 
loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch. i. $ 5; Orig. c. Cels. 
7,42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. εὑρίσκεται ὁ 
θεός is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im- 
plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4, 15; Jer. xxxvi. 
(xxix.) 13); hence εὑρέθην [L and Tr in br. WH mre. 
add ἐν] τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσι, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixv. 1, means, 
acc. to Paul's conception, I granted the knowledge and 
deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ., 
to find for one's self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure : 
λύτρωσιν, Heb. ix. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage, 
the Aet. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense 
[cf. B. 193 (167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.]: τὴν ψυχήν, Mt. x. 
39; xvi 25; ἀνάπαυσιν (Sir. xi. 19) ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν, 
Mt. xi. 29; μετανοίας τόπον, place for recalling the de- 
cision, changing the mind, (of his father), Heb. xii. 17 
[οἵ W. 147 (139)]; σκήνωμα τῷ θεῷ, opportunity of 
building a house for God, Acts vii. 46 ; εὗρ. χάριν, grace, 
favor, Heb. iv. 16; χάριν παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, Lk. i. 30; ἐνώπιον 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts vii. 46; ἔλεος mapa κυρίου, 2 Tim. i. 18; 
CY»3 n Ny, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3; xxx. 27; xxxii. 6; 
Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, οἷοι; 1 Esdr. viii. 4). 
[Comp. : ἀν-ευρίσκω.ἢ 

εὐρο-κλύδων, -ovos, ó, (fr. εὖρος the S. E. wind, and 


262 


εὐσχημοσύνη 


. 
κλύδων a wave), a S. E. wind raising mighty waves: Acts 
xxvii. 14 Ree. But respectable authorities read εὐρυ- 
κλύδων, preferred by Griesbach et al., from εὐρύς broad, 
and κλύδων, a wind causing broad waves (Germ. der 
Breitspiilende, the Wide-washer) ; Etym. Magn. p. 772, 
30 s. v. τυφών * “τυφὼν yap ἐστιν ἡ τοῦ ἀνέμου σφοδρὰ πνοή, 
Others εὐρακύλων, q. v.* 

εὐρύ-χωρος, -ον, (εὐρύς broad, and χώρα), spacious, 
broad: Mt. vii. 13. (Sept. ; Aristot. h. anim. 10, 5 [p. 
637%, 32]; Diod. 19, 84; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3; 
c. Ap: 1, 18, 2].) * 

εὐσέβεια, -as, ἡ, (εὐσεβής), reverence, respect; in the 
Bible everywhere piety towards God, godliness : Acts iii. 
125.1 Dim. 31.25 iv..7,.8 ; vi. disq, 11502 Damage 
Pet. i. 8, 6 sq.; ἡ κατ᾽ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία, the doctrine 
that promotes godliness, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [see κατά, II. 8 d.]; 
ἡ ἀλήθεια ἡ κατ᾽ εὐσέβειαν, the truth that leads to godli- 
ness, Tit. i. 1; τὸ μυστήριον τῆς εὐσεβείας, the mystery 
which is held by godliness and nourishes it, 1 Tim. iii. 
16 ; in plur., aims and acts of godliness, 2 Pet. iii. 11; cf. 
Pfleiderer, Paulinism. p. 477 sq. [ Eng. trans. ii. 209 sq. ]. 
(Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat. sqq.; often in Joseph. ; 
Sept. Prov. i. 7; xiii. 11; Is. xi. 2; Sap.x.12; often in 
4 Mace.; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2; [περὶ τὸ 
θεῖον) c. Ap. 1, 22, 2; εἰς θεοὺς καὶ γονέας, Plat. rep. 10 
p. 615 ὁ.) * 

εὐ-σεβέω, -ó; (εὐσεβής); to be εὐσεβής (pious), to act 
piously or reverently (towards God, one’s country, magis- 
trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rey- 
erence is due); in prof. auth. foll. by eis, περί, πρός τινα; 
rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (τοὺς θεούς) and 
in the Bible: τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον, 1 Tim. v. 4; θεόν, to wor- 
ship God, Acts xvii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var.; xi. 5; 
[Joseph. e. Ap. 2, 11, 1].* 

εὐσεβής, -és, (εὖ and σέβομαι), pious, dutiful (towards 
God [ A.V. devout, godly]; εὐσεβέω): Acts x. 2, 7; xxii. 
12 RG; 2 Pet. ii. 9. ((Theogn.], Pind. Tragg. Ar- 
stph., Plat. al.; thrice in Sept. for 273 noble, gener- 
ous, Isa. xxxii. 8; for pas, Is. xxiv. 16; xxvi. 7; often 
in Sir. and 4 Mace.) [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] * 

εὐσεβῶς, adv., piously, godly: ζὴν, 2 Tim. ii. 12; Tit. 
ii. 12. (Pind. [-8ées], Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; 4 Mace. 
vii. 21 [Fritzsche om.].) * 

evonpos, -ov, (εὖ and σῆμα a sign), well-marked, clear 
and definite, distinct: λόγος, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to 
be understood]. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb., 
Plut.) * 

εὔσπλαγχνος, -ov, (εὖ and σπλάγχνον, q. V-), prop. hav- 
ing strong bowels ; once so in Hippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foés., 
i. 197 ed. Kühn]; in bibl. and eccl. lang. compassionate, 
tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32; 1 Pet. iii. 8; prec. Manass. 
7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. $ 29); Test. xii. Patr. test. 
Zab. $9; cf. Harnack's note on Herm. vis. 1, 2].* 

εὐσχημόνως, adv., (see εὐσχήμων), in a seemly manner, 
decently: 1 Co. xiv. 405 περιπατεῖν, Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th. 
iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4; Cyr. 
1, 8, 8 86:} 81.» 

εὐσχημοσύνη, -ης; 7, (εὐσχήμων, q. V.), charm or elegance 


ὃς καὶ εὐρυκλύδων καλεῖται." 


εὐσχήμων 


of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesty, seemliness 
(Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.); of external charm, 
comeliness: 1 Co. xii. 23.* 

εὐσχήμων, -ov, (εὖ, and σχῆμα the figure, Lat. habitus) ; 
1. of elegant figure, shapely, graceful, comely, bearing 
one’s self becomingly in speech or behavior, (Eur., Arstph., 
Xen., Plat.): rà εὐσχήμονα ἡμῶν, the comely parts of the 
body that need no covering (opp. to rà ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν, 
vs. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24; of morals: πρὸς τὸ εὔσχημον, to 
promote decorum, 1 Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in- 
Jluential, wealthy, respectable, [R. V. of honorable estate]: 
Mk. xv.43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph. de vita 
sua $ 9; Plut. parallel. Graec. et Rom. c. 15.p. 309 b.) * 

εὐτόνως, adv., (fr. evrovos, and this fr. εὖ and revo to 
stretch [cf. at full stretch, well strung, ete.]), vehemently, 
forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8; 
2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9,6; Arstph. Plut. 1095; 
Diod., al.) * 

εὐτραπελία. -as, ἡ, (fr. εὐτράπελος, fr. εὖ, and τρέπω to 
turn: easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas- 
antry, humor, facetiousness, ([Hippoer.], Plat. rep. 8 p. 
563a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 3; 
Plut., al.); in a bad sense, scurrility, ribaldry, low jesting 
(in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4; in a mild- 
er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 13; [ἡ εὐτραπελία πεπαιδευμένη 
ὕβρις ἐστίν, rhet. 2, 12, 16 (cf. Cope in loc.) ; cf. Trench 
§ xxxiv.; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays ete. p. 187 sqq. 
(Speech at Eton) 1882].* 

Εἰὔτυχος [i. e. fortunate; on accent cf. W. 51; Chan- 
dler $ 331 sq.], -ov, 6, Eutychus, a young man restored 
to life by Paul: Acts xx. 9.* 

εὐφημία, -as, ἡ, (εὔφημος, q. V-), prop. the utterance of 
good or auspicious words; hence good report, praise: 
2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to δυσφημία), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed. 
Dind.]; Ael v.h. 3, 47. (In diff. senses in other auth. 
fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat. down.) * 

εὔφημος, -ov, (εὖ and φήμη), sounding well; uttering 
words of good omen, speaking auspiciously: neut. plur. 
εὔφημα, things spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will 
to others, Phil. iv. 8[ A. V. of good report, (R. V. mre. 
gracious)]. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

€ü-bopéo, -ῶ: 1 aor. εὐφόρησα (Lchm. ηὐφόρησα, see 
reff. in εὐδοκέω, init.) ; (εὔφορος [bearing well]); to be 
fertile, bring forth plentifully: Lk.xii.16. (Joseph. b. j. 
2, 21, 2; Hippocr., Geop., al.) * 

evppaivw; Pass. pres. εὐφραίνομαι; impf. εὐφραινόμην 
(Acts vii. 41, where a few codd. nidp. [cf. WH. App. 
p. 162]); 1 aor. εὐφράνθην and L T Tr WH ηὐφρ. (Acts 
ii. 26; see reff. in εὐδοκέω, init.) ; 1 fut. εὐφρανθήσομαι ; 
(εὖ and φρήν) ; in Sept. very often actively for rY3i" to 
make joyful, and pass. for rot? to be joyful, sometimes 
for 12) to sing; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to glad- 
den, make joyful: τινά, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to λυπεῖν). Pass. 
to be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32; 
Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut. 
xxxii. 43); Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); Rev. xi. 105 xii. 


263 





εὐχαριστέω 


12; ἔν τινι, to rejoice in, be delighted with, a thing, Acts 
vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); ἐπί τινι, Rev. xviii. 20 L T 
Tr WH (for Rec. ἐπ᾽ αὐτήν) ; of the merriment of a feast, 
Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxvii. 7); 
with λαμπρῶς added, to live sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19 
(Hom. Od. 2, 311; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 12).* 

Εὐφράτης, -ov, 6, Euphrates, a large and celebrated 
river, which rises in the mountains of Armenia Major, 
flows through Assyria, Syria, Mesopotamia and the 
city of Babylon, and empties into the Persian Gulf, 
(Hebr. ΠῚ [i. e. (prob.) ‘the great stream’ (Gen. i. 
18); ef. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag d. Par. p. 169]): Rev. 
ix. 14; xvi. 12. [B. D. s. v. and reff. there.]* 

εὐφροσύνη, -ης, ἡ; (εὔφρων [well-minded, cheerful ]), fr. 
Hom. down; good cheer, joy, gladness: Acts ii. 28 (Ps. 
xv. (xvi.). 11);- xiv. 17.* 

εὐχαριστέω, -9; 1 aor. εὐχαρίστησα (Acts xxvii. 35) 
and ηὐχαρίστησα (Ro. i. 21 GL'T Tr WH ; see reff. in 
εὐδοκέω, init.); 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. εὐχαριστηθῇ 
(2 Co. i. 11); (εὐχάριστος, q. v.) ; 1. to be grateful, 


feel thankful; so in the decree of the Byzantines in Dem. 


pro cor. p. 257, 2; 2. to give thanks (so Posid. ap. 
Athen. 5 p. 213 e.; Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., 
Epictet., al.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18 [W. 23 (22)]): 
τινί, esp. τῷ θεῷ, Lk. xvii. 16; Acts xxvii. 35; xxviii. 15; 
Ro. xiv. 6; xvi. 4; 1 Co. xiv. 18 [see below]; Phil.-i. 3; 
Col.i.3, 12; Philem. 4; (w. the acc. [hence as nom.] 
in the passive, iva... ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀγαθῶν 6 θεὸς εὐχαριστῆ- 
ται, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 36). simply, so that τῷ 
θεῷ must be added mentally: Ro. i. 21; [1 Co. xiv. 17]; 
1 Th. v. 18; esp. where the giving of thanks customary 
at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating, 
is spoken of: Mt. xv. 36; xxvi. 27; ΜΚ. viii. 6; xiv. 23; 
Lk. xxii. 17,19; Jn. vi. 11, 23; 1 Co. xi. 24; εὐχαριστεῖν 
τῷ θεῷ διὰ “Ino. Χριστοῦ, through Christ i. e. by Christ's 
help (because both the favors for which thanks are 
given and the gratitude which prompts the thanks are 
due to Christ [cf. W. 378 (354) note]): Ro. i. 8; vii. 25 
R WH mre.; Col. ii. 17; τῷ θεῷ ev ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ 
(see ὄνομα, 2 e.), Eph. v. 20. Of that for or on account 
of which thanks are given to God, we find —zepi τινος, 
gen. of pers., concerning, with regard ‘to one, [1 Th. 
i. 2]; 2 Th. i. 3 [ef. Ellic. in loc.]; w. ὅτε added epex- 
egetically, Ro. i. 8 (where R G ὑπέρ); 2 Th. ii. 13; w. 
addition of ἐπί and dat. of the thing for, on account 
of, which, 1 Co. 1. 4; ὑπέρ twos, gen. of pers., Eph. 1. 
16; ὑπέρ w. gen. of the thing, for, on account of, 1 Co. 
x. 30; Eph. v. 20; the matter or ground of the thanks- 
giving is expressed by a foll. ὅτε : Lk. xviii. 11; Jn. xi. 
41; 1Co.i.14; 1 Th. ii. 13; Rev. xi.17; or is added 
asyndetically without ὅτι, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (λαλῶ L T Tr 
WH, for which R G λαλῶν, the ptep. declaring the cause 
which prompts to thanksgiving [W. 345 sq. (324); B. 
300 (258)]). Once εὐχαρ. τι, for a thing, in the pass. 
2 Co. i. 11 [cf. B. 148 (130); W. 222 (209)]; in the 
Fathers εὐχαριστεῖν τι is to consecrate a thing by giving 
thanks, to ‘bless’: 6 εὐχαριστηθεὶς ἄρτος x. οἶνος, Justin 
M. apol. 1, 65 fin.; εὐχαριστηθεῖσα τροφή, ibid. c. 66; 


εὐχαριστία 


εἰσὶν of εὐχαριστοῦσι ψιλὸν ὕδωρ, Clem. Al. strom. i. p. 
317 ed. Sylb.; [ef. Suicer, Thesaur. i. 1269. “The 
words εὐχάριστος, εὐχαριστεῖν, εὐχαριστία, occur in St. 
Paul's writings alone of the apostolic Epistles" (Bp. 
Lehtft.; cf. Ellic. on Col. i. 12) J.* 4 

εὐχαριστία, -as, 7, (εὐχάριστος, q. V-) ; 1. thankful- 
ness: decree of the Byzantines in Dem. p. 256, 19; 
Polyb. 8, 14, 8; Add. to Esth. vi. 4 ed. Fritz.; 2 Macc. 
ii. 27; Sir. xxxvii. 11; πρός τινα, Diod. 17, 59; Joseph. 
antt. 3, 3. 2. the giving of thanks: Acts xxiv. 3; for 
God's blessings, 1 Co. xiv. 16; 2 Co. iv. 15; Eph. v. 4 
(cf. 1 Th. v. 18) ; Phil. iv. 6; Col. ii. 7; iv. 2; 1 Th. iii. 
9; 1 Tim.iv.3sq.; Rev.iv.9; vii. 12; τ΄. dat. of the 
pers. to whom thanks are given: τῷ θεῷ (cf. W. § 31, 3; 
[B. 180 (156)]; Kühner § 424, 1), 2 Co. ix. 11 (ro θεοῦ, 
Sap. xvi. 28); in plur., 2 Co. ix. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 1.* 

εὐχάριστος, -ov, (εὖ and χαρίζομαι), mindful of favors, 
grateful, thankful: to God, Col. iii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 
49; Plut.; al.); pleasing, agreeable [cf. Eng. grateful in 
its secondary sense]: εὐχάριστοι λόγοι, pleasant conver- 
sation, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 1; acceptable to others, winning : 
γυνὴ εὐχάριστος ἐγείρει ἀνδρὶ δόξαν, Prov. xi. 16; liberal, 
beneficent, Diod. 18, 28.* 

εὐχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (εὔχομαι), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a pray- 
er to God: Jas. v. 15. 2. a vow (often so in Sept. for 
rn and 433, also for Ἢ) consecration, see ἁγνίζω) : εὐχὴν 
ἔχειν, to have taken a vow, Acts xviii. 18; with ἐφ᾽ 
ἑαυτῶν added (see ἐπί, A. I. 1 f. p. 232*), Acts xxi. 28." 

εὔχομαι ; impf. ηὐχόμην (Ro. ix. 3) and εὐχόμην (Acts 
xxvii. 29 T Tr, see evdoxéw init. [cf. Veitch s. v.; ΤᾺΣ 
Proleg. p. 121]) ; [1 aor. mid. εὐξάμην Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf., 
where others read the opt. -aiugv; depon. verb, cf. W. 
$ 38, 7]; 1. to pray to God (Sept. in this sense for 
Sbann and AY): τῷ θεῷ (as very often in class. Grk. 
fr. Hom. down [cf. W. 212 (199); B. 177 (154) ]), foll. 
by ace. w. inf., Acts xxvi. 29; πρὸς τὸν θεόν (Xen. mem. 
1, 3, 2; symp. 4, 55; often in Sept.), foll. by ace. w. inf. 
2 Co. xiii. 7; ὑπέρ w. gen. of pers. for one, Jas. v. 16 
where L WH txt. Tr mrg. προσεύχεσθε (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 
10). [Svw. see airéo, fin.] 2. to wish: τί, 2 Co. xiii. 
9; foll. by acc. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re- 
ligious sense, to pray, pray for, in both the preceding 
pass.]; Acts xxvii. 29; ηὐχόμην (on this use of the impf. 
ef. W. 283 (266); B. $139, 15; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 
13]) εἶναι, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [Comp.: προσ- 
evxopat. | * 

εὔτχρηστος, -ov, (εὖ and ypdopar), easy to make use of, 
useful: w. dat. of pers. 2 Tim. ii. 21; opp. to ἄχρηστος, 
Philem. 11; εἴς τι, for a thing, 2 Tim.iv.11. (Diod. 5, 
40; Sap. xiii. 13; πρός τι, Xen. mem. 3, 8, 5.) * 

εὐψυχέω, -ῶ; (εὔψυχος) ; to be of good courage, to be of 
a cheerful spirit: Phil. ii. 19. (Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 9; 
[Poll. 3, 28 § 135 fin.]; in epitaphs, edpiye! i. q. Lat. 
have pia anima !)* 

εὐωδία, -as, ἡ, (fr. εὐώδης ; and this fr. εὖ and ὄξω, pf. 
90o0a); 8. a sweet smell, fragrance, (Xen., Plat., Plut., 
Hdian., al.) ; metaph. Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ θεῷ, i. e. 
(dropping the fig.) our efliciency in which the power of 


264 





"Edecos 


Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to God, 2 Co. 
li. 15. b. a fragrant or sweet-smelling thing, incense τ 
Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, ete.; hence ὀσμὴ εὐωδίας, an 
odor of something sweet-smelling, in Sept. often for 
ΠΤ) Τὴ, an odor of acquiescence, satisfaction; a sweet 
odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex. 
xxix. 18; Lev. i. 9, 13, 17, ete., agreeably to the ancient 
[anthropopathie] notion that God smells and is pleased 
with the odor of sacrifices, Gen. viii. 21; in the N. T. 
by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a@ thing well- 
pleasing to God : Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. 605 (562) 
cf. 237 (222)].* 

[Εἰὐωδία, -as, Phil. iv. 2 Rec." for Edo8ía, q. v.] 

εὐώνυμος, -ov, (εὖ and ὄνομα) ; 1. of good name 
(Hes., Pind.), and of good omen (Plat. polit. p. 302 d.; 
legg. 6 p. 754 e.); in the latter sense used in taking 
auguries; but those omens were euphemistically called 
εὐώνυμα which in fact were regarded as unlucky, i. e. 
which came from the left, sinister omens (for which 
a good name was desired); hence 2. left (so fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down): Acts xxi. 3; Rey. x. 2; ἐξ 
εὐωνύμων [cf. W. $ 27, 3; § 19 s. v. δεξιά; B. 89 (78)], 
on the left hand (to the left): Mt. xx. 21, 23; xxv. 33, 
41; xxvii. 38; Mk. x. 37 [R GL], 40; xv. 27.* 

ἐφ-άλλομαι ; 2 aor. ptep. ἐφαλόμενος LT Tr WIL; (ἐπί 
and ἄλλομαι, q. v.); fr. Hom. down; to leap upon, spring 
upon: emi twa, Acts xix. 16 [here RG pres. ptep.]; 
(Sox, 6/3 2155 xvas) 

ἐφ-άπαξ [Treg.in Heb. ἐφ᾽ ἅπαξ ; cf. Lipsius, gram. 
Unters. p. 127], adv., (fr. ἐπί and ἅπαξ [cf. W. 422 
(393); B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. e. a. our all 
at once: 1 Co. xv. 6. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 105. 
Heb. vii. 27; ix. 12; x. 10. (Lcian., Dio Cass., al.) * 

ἐφεῖδον, see ἐπεῖδον. 

Ἔφεσῖνος, -5, -ov, Ephesian: Rev. ii. 1 Rec.* 

᾿Εφέσιος, -a, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. e. a native or in- 
habitant of Ephesus: Acts xix. 28, 34 sq.; xxi. 29.* 

Ἔφεσος, -ov, 7, Ephesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor, 
capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular 
Asia [see "Acía], situated on the Icearian Sea between 
Smyrna and Miletus. Its chief splendor and renown 
came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned 
one of the wonders of the world. It was burned down 
B. C. 356 by Herostratus, rebuilt at the common expense 
of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan. 
7, 2, 6 sq. ; Liv. 1, 45; Plin. h. n. 5, 29 (31) ; 36,14 (21)), 
and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly 
destroyed by the Goths. At Ephesus the apostle Paul 
founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise 
is awarded in Rev. ii. 1 sqq. The name of the city oc- 
curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24; xix. 1, 17, 26; xx. 16 sq.; 
1 Co. xv. 32; xvi. 8; Eph. i. 1 (where ἐν ᾿Εφέσῳ is omitted 
by cod. Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by T 
WH Tr mrg.; see WH. App. ad loc. ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Ephesians, The Ep. to the]) ; 1 Tim. i. 3; 2 Tim. i. 185 
iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (acc. to GL T Tr WH) ii. 1. 
Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena. 
1874; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877) ].* 


ἐφευρετής 


ἐφ-ευρετής, -οὔ, 6, (ἐφευρίσκω to find out), an inventor, 
contriver, (Anacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 
1499): κακῶν, Ro. i. 30 (κακῶν eóperat, Philo in Flacc. 
$ 4 mid.; 6 καινῶν ἀδικημάτων εὑρετής, ibid. § 10; πάσης 
κακίας εὑρετής, 2 Mace. vii. 31; Sejanus facinorum om- 
nium repertor, Tacit. ann. 4, 11).* 

ἐφ-ημερία, -as, 7, (ἐφημέριος, -ov, by day, lasting or act- 
ing for a day, daily), a word not found in prof. auth.; 
Sept. in Chron. and Neh.; 1. a service limited to 
a stated series of days (cf. Germ. Tagdienst, Wochen- 
dienst); so used of the service of the priests and Levites: 
Neh. xiii. 30; 1 Chr. xxv. 8; 2 Chr. xiii. 10, etc. 2. 
the class or course itself of pr vue who for a week at a time 
performed the duties of the priestly office (Germ. Woch- 
nerzunft): 1 Chr. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 13, ete.; 1 Esdr. i. 2, 
15; so twice in the N. T.: Lk. i. 5, 8. For David di- 
vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which 
in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en- 
tire week from sabbath to sabbath, 1 Chr. xxiv. 4; 2 Chr. 
viii. 14; Neh. xii. 24; these classes Josephus calls πατριαί 
and ἐφημερίδες, antt. 7, 14, 7; de vita sua 1; Suidas, ἐφη- 
pepía* 1 πατριά. λέγεται δὲ καὶ ἡ τῆς ἡμέρας λειτουργία. 
Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD. s. v. 
Priests; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii.] * 

ἐφ-ήμερος, -ov, (i. q. ὁ ἐπὶ ἡμέραν àv) ; 1. lasting for 
a day (Pind., Hippocr., Plut., Galen.; al.). 2. daily: 
ἡ τροφή (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hal.8,41; Aristid. ii. p. 
398 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15.* 

ἔφιδε, see ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐφ-ικνέομαι, -οὔῦμαι ; 2 aor. inf. Scouts [fr. pies 
down]; to come to: ἄχρι w. gen. of pers. 2 Co. x. 13; 
reach: εἴς twa, ibid. 14.* 

ἐφ-ίστημι: 2 aor. ἐπέστην; ptep. ἐπιστάς, impv. ἐπίστηθι; 
pf. ptep. ἐφεστώς; to place at, place upon, place over; in 
the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indic. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐπίσταται (for ἐφίστ.), 1 Th. v. 3 T Tr WH; see reff. 
s. v. ἀφεῖδον] and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf. 
and 2 aor. (see aviornur); to stand by, be present: Lk. ii. 
38; Acts xxii. 20; ἐπάνω w.gen.of pers. to stand over 
one, place one’s self above, Lk. iv. 39; used esp. of per- 
sons coming upon one suddenly: simply, Lk. x. 40; xx. 
1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii. 
7; w. dat. of pers., Acts iv. 1; xxiii. 11; of the advent 
of angels, Lk. ii. 9; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Leian. dial. 
deor. 17, 1; freq. of dreams, as Hom. Il. 10, 496; 23, 
106; Hdt.1,34; al); w. dat. of place, Acts xvii. 5; 
foll. by ἐπί with acc. of place, Acts x. 17; xi. 11; of 
evils coming upon one: w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see 
above]; emt τινα, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9; xix. 1; Soph. 
O. R. 777; Thue. 3, 82).  i.q.to be at hand i. e. be 
ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, cf. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547; 
Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand i. e. 2 of time, 2 
Tim. iv. 6. to come on, of rain, Acts xxviii. 2. [Cowr.: 
κατ-, cvv-ebiarnye. | * 

[ἐφνίδιος, see αἰφνίδιος. 

Ἔφραίμ or (so R Tr) Ἐφραΐμ [cf. I, & fin.], (8 LH 
Ἐφρέμ, Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop. name of 
a city situated ace. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow 


265 








ἔχω 


and Parthey, p. 190,18, twenty], acc. to Jerome twenty 
miles from Jerusalem; ace. to Joseph. b. j. 4, 9, 9 not 
far from Bethel; conjectured by Robinson (Palest. i. 
444 sq. [cf. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald 
et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called 
et-Taiyibeh, a short day's journey N. E. of Jerusalem: 
Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim iii. p. 7 sq. 
[ Eng. trans. v. 9].* 

ἐφφαθά, ephphatha, Aram. HDDNS (the ethpaal impy. 
of the verb nda, Hebr. rin3, to open), be thou opened 
(i. e. receive the power of heari ing; the ears of the deaf 
and the eyes of the blind being considered as closed) : Mk. 
vii. 34. [See Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.] * 

ἐχθές and (Rec., so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) χθές (on 
which forms cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq.; [esp. Ruth- 
erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.]; Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. 
ii. 2 p. 1000; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81; W. pp. 24, 45; B. 72 
(63) ]), adv., yesterday: Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28; of time 
just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph. down.]* 

ἔχθρα, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. ἐχθρός), enmity: Lk. xxiii. 
12; Eph.ii.14 (15), 16; plur. Gal. v. 20 ; ἔχθρα (Lchm. 
ἐχθρά fem. adj. [ Vulg. inimica]) θεοῦ, towards God, Jas. 
iv. 4 (where Tdf. τῷ θεῷ) ; eis θεόν, Ro. viii. 7; by meton. 
i. q. cause of enmity, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer. 
(From Pind. down.)]* 

ἐχθρός, -d, -óv, (€xos hatred) ; Sept. numberless times 
for 3N, also for Ἢν, several times for N3j9 and Nj, a. 
hater; 1. passively, hated, odious, hateful (in Hom. 
only in this sense): Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to ἀγαπητός). 2. 
actively, hostile, hating and opposing another: 1 Co. xv. 
25; 2 Th. iii. 15; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed, 
Jas. iv. 4 Lchm.; Gal. iv. 16, ef. Meyer or Wieseler on 
the latter pass. used of men as at enmity with God by 
their sin: Ro. v. 10 (ef. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21; Jas. iv. 4) 
[but many take exp. here (as in xi. 28, see 1 above) pas- 
sively; cf. Meyer]; τῇ διανοίᾳ, opposing (God) in the 
mind, Col. i. 21; ἐχθρὸς ἄνθρωπος, a man that is hostile, 
a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28; ὁ ἐχθρός, the hostile one 
(well known to you), i. e. κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν the devil, the most 
bitter enemy of the divine government : Lk. x. 19, cf. 
Mt. xiii. 39 (and eccl. writ.). ὁ ἐχθρός (and ἐχθρός) sub- 
stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst., 
is trans. in A. V., exc. twice (R. V. once) foe: 
ἐχθρός, 1 Co. xv. 26]: w. gen. of the pers. to whom one 
is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq. ; x. 36; xiii. 25; Lk. i.[71], 74; 
vi. 27, 35; xix. 27,43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in 
the words of Ps. cix. (ex.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44; Mk. 
xii. 36; Lk. xx. 43; Actsii.35; 1 Co. xv. 25 [L br.; al. 
om. gen. (see above)]; Heb.i.13; x. 13. w. gen. of 
the thing: Acts xiii. 10; tod σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, who 
given up to their evil passions evade the obligations 
imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.* 

ἔχιδνα, -ns, 7, α viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hdt., 
Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.) ; γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν offspring 
of vipers (anguigenae, Ovid, metam. 3, 531), addressed to 
Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34; 


» 
εσχατος 


cunning, malignant, wicked men: 
xxii 33; Lk. ii. 7.* 
ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. etyapev, 2 Jn. 


» 
exo 


5 T Tr WH], 3 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; 
Rev. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but cf. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; 
Τὰ Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) 
and εἴχοσαν (L 'T Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24 ; but ef. Bttm. 
in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his 
N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; cf. δολεόω]) ; pres. 
mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,— with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; 
pi. ἔσχηκα; 

I. Transitively. 1. to have i.q.to hold; a. to 
have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; 
x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, 
etc.; Heb. viii. 3. b. in the sense of wearing (Lat. 
gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. 
lii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. ri, having a cov- 
ering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head 
covered [B. $130, 5; W. $ 47, k. cf. 594 (552)], 1 Co. 
xi.4; θώρακας, Rev. ix. 17; μάχαιραν, Jn. xviii. 10; add, 
Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3; of a tree having (bearing) 
leaves, Mk. xi. 13; ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχειν. sc. ἔμβρυον, to be 
pregnant [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. 144 (126)], (see yaornp, 
2). Metaph. ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἔχειν τὸ ἀπόκριμα, 2 Co. i. 95 τὴν 
μαρτυρίαν, 1 Jn. v. 10; ἐν καρδίᾳ ἔχειν τινά, to have (carry) 
one in one's heart, to love one constantly, Phil.i.7. c. 
trop. to have (hold) possession of the mind ; said of alarm, 
agitating emotions, ete.: εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος κ. ἔκστασις. 
Mk. xvi. 8 (Job xxi. 6; Is. xiii. 8, and often in prof. 
auth.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1294 sq.; [L. and S. 5. v. A. I. 
8]. d. to hold fast, keep: ἡ μνᾶ cov, ἣν εἶχον ἀποκει- 
μένην ev covdapio, Lk. xix. 20; trop. τὸν θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν 
ἐπιγνώσει, Ro. i. 28; to keep in mind, τὰς ἐντολάς, Jn. 
xiv. 21 (see ἐντολή, sub fin.) ; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, Rev. vi. 9; 
xii. 17 ; xix. 10 ; τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως ἐν καθαρᾷ συνει- 
δήσει, 1 Tim. iii. 9; ὑποτύπωσιν ὑγιαινόντων λόγων, 2 Tim. 
1.18. 6. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com- 
prise, involve: ἔργον, Jas. i. 4; ii. 17; κόλασιν, 1 Jn. iv. 
18; μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. x. 35 (Sap. viii. 16). See exx. 
fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. 
A.I.8 and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aestimo, to re- 
gard, consider, hold as, [but this sense is still denied by 
Meyer, on Lk. as below; Mt. xiv. 5]: τινά w. ace. of the 
predicate, ἔχε ue παρῃτημένον, have me excused, Lk. xiv. 
18; τινὰ ὡς προφήτην, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, (ἔχειν Ἰαννῆν k. 
᾿Ιαμβρῆν ὡς θεούς. Ev. Nicod. 5) ; τινὰ ἔντιμον (see ἔντιμος), 
Phil. ii. 29; τὴν ψυχήν μου [G om. μου] τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ. Acts 
xx. 34 RG; τινὰ εἰς προφήτην (ἃ Hebraism [see eis, B. IT. 
3 c. y. fin. ]), for a prophet, Mt. xxi. 461, T Tr WH, cf. B. 
§ 131, 7; τινά, ὅτι ὄντως | T Tr WH ὄντως, ὅτι etc.] zpo- 
φήτης ἦν, Mk. xi. 32, cf. B. $ 151, 1 a.; [W. $66, 5 8.1. 
2. to have i.q./o own, possess; a. external things 
such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils, 
goods, food, ete.: as τὸν βίον, Lk. xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17; 


x. 21; ἀγαθά, Lk. xii. 19; πρόβατα, Lk. xv. 4; Jn. x. 16; 
δραχμάς, Lk. xv. 8; πλοῖα, Rev. xviii. 19; κληρονομίαν, 
Eph. v. 5; [ef. Mt. xxi. 38 LT Tr WH, where R G kará- 
cxopev|; μέρος foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xx. 
6 ; θυσιαστήριον, Heb. xiii. 10; ὅσα ἔχεις, Mk. x. 21; xii. 


266 








» 
ἔχω 


44; Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xviii. 25; μηδέν, 2 Co. vi. 10; τί δὲ 
ἔχεις, 6 etc. 1 Co. iv. 7; with a pred. ace. added, εἶχον 
ἅπαντα κοινά, Acts ii. 44 ; absol. ἔχειν, to have property, 
to be rich: οὐκ and μὴ ἔχειν [A. V. to have not], to be 
destitute, be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; Mk. iv. 25; Lk. 
viii. 18; xix. 26; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Co. viii. 12, (Neh. viii. 
10; 1 Esdr. ix. 51, 54; Sir. xiii. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth. 
in Passow s. v. p. 1295^; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1; cf. W. 
594 (552)]); ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, in proportion to your means 
[see ἐκ, II. 13 fin.], 2 Co. viii. 11. — b. Under the head 
of possession belongs the phrase ἔχειν τινά as com- 
monly used of those joined to any one by the bonds of 
nature, blood, marriage, friendship, duty, law, compact, 
and the like : πατέρα; Jn. viii. 41; ἀδελφούς, Lk. xvi. 28; 
ἄνδρα (a husband), Jn. iv. 17 sq. ; Gal. iv. 27; γυναῖκα, 1 
Co. vii. 2, 12 sq. 29; τέκνα, Mt. xxi. 28; xxii. 24; 1 Tim. 
Hi.4; Tit.i.6; υἱούς, Gal. iv. 22; σπέρμα, offspring, Mt. 
xxii. 25; χήρας, 1 Tim. v. 16; ἀσθενοῦντας, Lk. iv. 40; 
φίλον, Lk. xi. 5; παιδαγωγούς. 1 Co. iv. 15 ; ἔχειν κύριον, 
to have (be subject to) a master, Col. iv. 1; δεσπότην, 1 
Tim. vi. 2; βασιλέα, Jn. xix.15; with ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν added, 
Rey. ix. 11; ἔχει τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν, Jn. xii. 48; ἔχειν 
οἰκονόμον, Lk. xvi. 1; δοῦλον, Lk. xvii. 7; ἀρχιερέα, Heb. 
iv. 14; viii. 1; ποιμένα, Mt. ix. 36; ἔχων ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν στρα- 
τιώτας, Lk. vii. 8; ἔχειν τὸν υἱὸν x. τὸν πατέρα, to be in 
living union with the Son (Christ) and the Father by 
faith, knowledge, profession, 1 Jn. ii. 23; (v. 12); 2 Jn. 9. 
With two accusatives, one of which serves as a predicate: 
πατέρα τὸν ᾿Αβραάμ, Abraham for our father, Mt. 111. 9; 
add, Acts xiii. 5; Phil. iii. 17; Heb. xii. 9; ἔχειν τινὰ 
γυναῖκα, to have (use) ἃ woman (unlawfully) as a wife, 
Mt. xiv. 4; Mk. vi. 18; 1 Co. v. 1 [ where see Meyer], (of 
lawful marriage, Xen. Cyr. 1,5, 4). c. of attend- 
ance or companionship: ἔχειν τινὰ μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Mt. 
xy. 30; xxvi: 11. ΜΕΠῚ Πῦρ Exiv ὅν UT καὶ 5. ἫΝ 
ἔχειν τι to have athing in readiness, have at hand, have in 
store: οὐκ ἔχομεν εἰ μὴ πέντε ἄρτους, Mt. xiv. 17; add, xv. 
34; Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.]; iv. 11; xii. 35; 1 Co. xi. 22; xiv. 
26; οὐκ ἔχω, ὃ παμαθήσω αὐτῷ, Lk. xi. 6; ποῦ συνάξω 
τοὺς καρπούς μου. Lk. xii. 17; τί (ef. B. § 139, 58) φάγωσι, 
Mk. viii. 1 sq. ; ἔχειν τινά, to have one at hand, be able to 
make use of : Μωῦσέα x. τ. προφήτας, Lk. xvi. 29; mapa- 
κλητον, 1 Jn.ii. 1; μάρτυρας, Heb. xii. 1; οὐδένα ἔχω etc. 
Phil. ii. 20; ἄνθρωπον, ἵνα ete. Jn. v. €. 6. a person or 
thing is said ἔχειν those things which are its parts or 
are members of his body: as χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς, 
Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47 ; οὖς, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 
ete.; ὦτα, Mt. xi. 15; Mk. vii. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the 
vs.]; viii. 18; μέλη, Ro.xii.4; 1 Co. xii. 12; σάρκα x. 
ὀστέα, Lk. xxiv. 39; ἀκροβυστίαν, Acts xi. 3; an animal 
is said ἔχειν head, horns, wings, ete.: Rev. iv. 7 sq.; v. 
6; viii. 9; ix. 8 sqq.; xii. 3, ete.; a house, city, or wall, 
ἔχειν θεμελίους, Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14; στάσιν, Heb. 
ix. 8; [add ἐπιστολὴν ἔχουσαν (RG περιέχ.) τὸν τύπον 
τοῦτον, Acts xxiii. 25]. f. one is said to have the dis- 
eases or other ills with which he is affected or af- 
flicted: μάστιγας, Mk. iii. 10; ἀσθενείας, Acts xxviii. 9; 
wounds, Rey. xiii. 14; θλίψιν, Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28; 


“ἢ 
ἔχω 


Rey. ii. 10. Here belong the expressions δαιμόνιον ἔχειν, 
to be possessed by a demon, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; viii. 
27; Jn. vii. 20; viii. 48 sq. 52; x. 20; BeeACeBovd, Mk. 
iii. 22; πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον, Mk. 111. 30; vii. 25; Lk. iv. 33; 
Acts viii. 7; πνεῦμα πονηρόν, Acts xix. 13; πνεῦμα. ἀσθε- 
vetas, i. e. ademon causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 11; πνεῦμα 
ἄλαλον, Mk. ix. 17; λεγεῶνα, Mk. v. 15. — g. one is said 
to have intellectual or spiritual faculties, endow- 
ments, virtues, sensations, desires, emotions, 
affections, faults, defects, ete. : σοφίαν, Rev. xvii. 
9; γνῶσιν. 1 Co. viii. 1, 10; χαρίσματα, Ro. xii. 6 ; προ- 
φητείαν, 1 Co. xiii. 2; πίστιν, Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21; Mk. 
xi, 22; Lk. xvii. 6; Acts xiv. 9; Ro. xiv. 22; 1 Tim. i. 
19; Philem. 5; πεποίθησιν, 2 Co. iii. 4; Phil. iii. 4; παρ- 
ρησίαν, Philem. 8; Heb. x. 19; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; iii. 21; iv. 17; 
v. 14; ἀγάπην, Jn. v. 42; xiii. 35 ; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iv. 16; 
1 Co. xiii. 1 sqq. ; 2 Co. ii. 4; Phil. ii. 2; Philem. 5; 1 
Pet. iv. 8; ἐλπίδα (see ἐλπίς, 2 p. 206* mid.) ; ζῆλον, zeal, 
Ro. x. 2; envy, jealousy (ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ), Jas. iii. 14 ; χάριν 
τινί, to be thankful to one, Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2 
Tim. i. 3; θυμόν, Rev. xii. 12; ὑπομονήν, Rev. ii. 3; 
φόβον, 1 Tim. v. 20; χαράν, Philem. 7 [ Rec." χάριν]; 3 
Jn. 4 [WH txt. χάριν]; λύπην, Jn. xvi. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3; 
Phil. ii. 27; ἐπιθυμίαν, Phil. i. 23; ἐπιποθίαν, Ro. xv. 23; 
μνείαν twos, 1 Th. ii. 6. συνείδησιν καλήν, ἀγαθήν, 
ἀπρόσκοπον: Acts xxiv. 16; 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16; 
lieb. xiii. 18; συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν, Heb. x. 2; ἀγνωσίαν 
θεοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 34; ἀσθένειαν, Heb. vii. 28; ἁμαρτίαν, Jn. 
ix. 41; xv. 22, etc.  h. of age and time: ἡλικίαν, 
mature years (A. V. to beof age), Jn. ix. 21, 23; ἔτη, to 
have (completed) years, be years old, Jn. viii. 57; with 
ἔν τινι added: in a state or condition, Jn. v. 5 [W. 256 
(240) note?; B. $ 147, 11]; in a place, τέσσαρας ἡμέρας 
ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ, Jn. xi. 17; beginning or end, or both, Heb. 
vii. 3; Mk. iii. 26; Lk.xxii.37 [see τέλος, 1a.]. 1. ἔχειν 
τι is said of opportunities, benefits, advantages, 
conveniences, which one enjoys or can make use of: 
βάθος γῆς. Mt. xiii. 5 ; γῆν πολλήν, ΜΕ. iv. 5; ἰκμάδα, Lk. viii. 
6; καιρόν, Gal. vi. 10; Heb. xi. 15; Rev. xii. 12; ἐξουσίαν, 
see ἐξουσία, passim; εἰρήνην διά τινος, Ro. v. 1 (where we 
must read ἔχομεν, not [with T Tr WH L mrg. (cf. WH. 
Intr. § 404) ] ἔχωμεν) ; ἐλευθερίαν, Gal. ii. 4 ; πνεῦμα θεοῦ, 
1 Co. vii. 40; πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ, Ro. viii. 9; νοῦν Χριστοῦ, 
1 Co. ii. 16 ; ζωήν, Jn. v. 40; x. 10; xx. 81; τὴν ζωήν, 1 
Jn. v. 12; ζωὴν αἰώνιον, Mt. xix. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36 
[cf. W. 266 (249)]; v. 24, 39; vi.40, 47, 54; 1 Jn. v. 13; 
ἐπαγγελίας, 2 Co. vii. 1; Heb. vii. 6; μισθόν, Mt. v. 46; 
vi.1; 1 Co. ix. 17; rà αἰτήματα, the things which we have 
asked, 1 Jn. v. 15; ἔπαινον, Ro. xiii. 2; τιμήν, Jn. iv. 44; 
Heb. iii. 3; λόγον σοφίας, a reputation for wisdom, Col. 
ii. 23 [see λόγος, I. 5 fin.]; καρπόν, Ro. i. 12; vi. 21sq.; 
χάριν, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. WH txt. χαράν]; 
7; προσαγωγήν, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12; 
8; xiv. 11; ἀπόλαυσίν τινος, Heb. xi. 
25; πρόφασιν, Jn. xv. 22; καύχημα, that of which one 
may glory, Ro. iv. 2; Gal. vi. 4; καύχησιν, Ro. xv. 17. 
k. ἔχειν τι is used of one on whom something has been 
laid, on whom it is incumbent as something to be 


χάρισμα, 1 Co. vii. 
ἀνάπαυσιν, Rev. iv. 


267 








Y 
EX@ 


borne, observed, performed, discharged: ἀνάγκην, 1 Co. 
vii. 37; ἀνάγκην foll. by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 [RL 
br. Tr mre. br.]; Heb. vii. 27; χρείαν τινός (see χρεία, 1); 
εὐχὴν ep ἑαυτῶν, Acts xxi. 23 ; νόμον, Jn. xix. 7; ἐντολήν, 
2 Jn. 5; Heb. vii. 5; ἐπιταγήν, 1 Co. vii. 25; διακονίαν, 
2 Co. iv.1; πρᾶξιν, Ro. xii. 4; ἀγῶνα, Phil.i.30; Col. ii. 
1; ἔγκλημα, Acts xxiii. 29; κρίμα, 1 Tim. v. 12. 1. 
ἔχειν τι is used of one to whom something has been in- 
trusted: τὰς κλεῖς, Rev.i. 18; iii. 7; τὸ γλωσσόκομον, 
Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29. m. in reference to complaints 
and disputes the foll. phrases are used: ἔχω τε [or 
without an acc., cf. B. 144 (126)] κατά τινος, to have 
something to bring forward against one, to have some- 
thing to complain of in one, Mt. v. 22; Mk. xi. 25; foll. 
by ὅτι, Rev. ii. 4; ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ ὀλίγα, ὅτι etc. ib. 14 [here 
L WH mre. om. ὅτι], 20 [here G L T Tr WH om. 2A.]; 
ἔχω τι πρός twa, to have some accusation to bring against 
one, Acts xxiv. 19; συζήτησιν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, Acts xxviii. 29 
[Ree.]; ζητήματα πρός twa, Acts xxv. 19; λόγον ἔχειν 
mpos twa, Acts xix. 38; πρᾶγμα πρός τινα, 1 Co. vi. 1; 
μομφὴν πρός τινα, Col. iii. 13 ; κρίματα μετά Twos, 1 Co. vi. 
7. π᾿ phrases of various as ἔχειν τινὰ κατὰ πρόσω- 
πον, to have one before him, in his presence, [ A. V. face to 


Jace; see πρόσωπον, 1 a.], Acts xxv. 16; κοίτην ἔκ τινος, 


to conceive by one, Ro. ix. 10; τοῦτο ἔχεις, ὅτι etc. thou 
hast this (which is praiseworthy [ef. W. 595 (553) ]) that 
ete. Rev. ii. 6; ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν, hath nothing in me 
which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ. er 
hat mir nichts an), Jn. xiv. 30; 6 ἐστιν . . . σαββάτου ἔχον 
ὁδόν, a sabbath-day’s journey distant (for the distance is 
something which the distant place has, as it were), Acts 
i.12; cf. Kypke ad loc. — o. ἔχω with an inf. [ W. 333 
(313); B.251(216)], a. like the Lat. habeo quod w. the 
subjunc., i. q. to be able: ἔχω ἀποδοῦναι. Mt. xviii. 25; Lk. 
vii. 42; xiv. 14; τὶ ποιῆσαι, Lk. xii. 4; οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν, 
they had nothing to oppose (could say nothing against 
it), Acts iv. 14; κατ᾽ οὐδενὸς εἶχε μείζονος ὁμόσαι, Heb. 
vi. 13; add, Jn. viii. 6 (Rec.); Acts xxv. 26 [cf. B. as 
above]; Eph. iv. 28; Tit. ii. 8; 2 Pet. i. 15; the inf. is 
om. and to be supplied fr. the context: ὃ ἔσχεν, sc. 
ποιῆσαι, Mk. xiv. 8; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow 
s. v. p. 1297*; [L. and S. s. v. A. III. 1]. B. is used of 
what there is a certain necessity for doing: βάπτισμα 
ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι, Lk. xii. 50; ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν, vii. 40; 
ἀπαγγεῖλαι, Acts xxiii. 17, 19; λαλῆσαι. 18; κατηγορῆσαι, 
Acts xxviii. 19; πολλὰ γράφειν, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13. 

II. Intransitively. a. (Lat. me habeo) to hold one's 
self or find one's self so and so, to be in such or such a 
condition: ἑτοίμως ἔχω, to be ready, foll. by inf., Acts 
xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1 Pet. iv. 5 [not WH]; ἐσχάτως 
(see ἐσχάτως), Mk. v. 23; ᾿κακῶς, to be sick, Mt. iv. 24; 
viii. 16; ix. 12; [xvii. 15 L Trtxt. WH txt.], etc.; καλῶς, 
to be well, Mk. xvi. 18; κομψότερον, to be better, Jn. iv. 
52; πῶς, Acts xv. 36; ἐν ἑτοίμῳ, foll. by inf., 2 Co. x. 6. 
b. impersonally: ἄλλως ἔχει, it is otherwise, 1 Tim. v. 
25; οὕτως, Acts vii. 1; xii. 10; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9; τὸ νῦν 
ἔχον, as things now are, for the present, Acts xxiv. 25 
(Tob. vii. 11, and exx. fr. later prof. auth. in Kypke, 


Observv. ii. p. 124; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 9; [cf. W. 463 
(432)]). 

III. Mid. ἔχομαί τινος (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down), 
prop. to hold one's self to a thing, to lay hold of a thing, 
to adhere or cling to; to be closely joined to a pers. or 
thing [ef. W. 202 (190); B. 192 (166 sq.), 161 (140)]: 
τὰ ἐχόμενα τῆς σωτηρίας, Vulg. viciniora saluti, connected 
with salvation, or which lead to it, Heb. vi. 9, where cf. 
Bleek; 6 éxópevos, near, adjoining, neighboring, border- 
ing, next: of place, κωμοπόλεις, Mk. i. 38 (νῆσος, Isocr. 
paneg. § 96; of ἐχόμενοι, neighbors, Hdt. 1, 134); of 
time, τῇ ἐχομένῃ sc. ἡμέρᾳ, the following day, Lk. xiii. 33 ; 
Acts xx. 15, (1 Mace. iv. 28; Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 18, 9); 
with ἡμέρᾳ added, Acts xxi. 26; σαββάτῳ, Acts xiii. 44 
(where R Τ Tr WII txt. ἐρχομένῳ) ; ἐνιαυτῷ, 1 Mace. iv. 
28 (with var. ἐρχομένῳ ev.) ; τοῦ ἐχομένου ἔτους, Thuc. 6, 
3. [Cowr.: dy-, προσ-αν-, avt-, ár-, €v-, €r-, kar-, μετ-) rap-, 
περι-, Tp0-, προσ-, συν-, vrep-, ὑπ-έχω.] 

ἕως, a particle marking a limit, and 

I. as a Consuncrion signifying 1. the tempo- 
ral terminus ad quem, Zi//, until, (Lat. donee, usque 
dum); asin the best writ. a. with an indic. pret., 
where something is spoken of which continued up to a 
certain time: Mt. ii. 9 (os. . . ἔστη [ἐστάθη L T TrWH ]) ; 
xxiv. 39, (1 Mace. x. 50; Sap. x. 14, etc.). — b. with av 
and the aor. subjunc. (equiv. to the Lat. fut. perf.), where 
it is left doubtful when that will take place till which it 
is said a thing will continue [cf. W. $ 42, 5]: ἴσθι ἐκεῖ, 
ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι, Mt. ii. 13; add, v. 18; x. 11 ; xxii. 44; Mk. 
vi 10; xii.36 ; Lk.xvii.8; xx. 43; Actsii. 35; Heb. i. 
13; after a negative sentence: Mt. v. 18, 26; x. 23 [T 
WH om. ἄν]; xii. 20; xvi. 28; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 34; Mk. 
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; xxi. 32; 1 Co.iv. 5; with the aor. subj. 
without the addition of dv: Mk. vi. 45 RG; xiv. 32 [here 
Tr mrg.fut.]; Lk. xv.4; [xii. 59 T Tr WH ; xxii. 34 L T 
Tr WH]; 2 Th. ii. 7; Heb. x. 13; Rev. vi. 11 [Rec. ἕως 
ob]; οὐκ ἀνέζησαν ἕως τελεσθῇ τὰ χίλια ἔτη, did not live 
again till the thousand years had been finished (elapsi 
Juerint), Rev. xx. 5 Rec. Cf. W. $41 b. 3. |. c. more 
rarely used with the indic. pres. wherethe aor. subj. might. 
have been expected [ W. u. s.; B. 231 (199)]: so four times 
ἕως ἔρχομαι, Lk. xix. 13 (where L T Tr WH evo for ἕως, 
but cf. Bleek ad loc.); Jn. xxi. 22 sq.; 1 Tim. iv. 13; ἕως 
ἀπολύει, Mk. vi. 45 L T Tr WH, for R G ἀπολύσῃ (the 
indic. being due to a blending of dir. and indir. disc.; as 
in Plut. Lycurg. 29, 3 δεῖν οὖν ἐκείνους ἐμμένειν τοῖς Kabe- 
στῶσι νόμοις... ἕως ἐπάνεισιν). — d. once with the indic. 
fut., acc. to an improbable reading in Lk. xiii. 35: ἕως ἥξει 
Tdf., ἕως àv ἥξει Lehm., for RG ἕως àv £y; [but WI 
(omitting ἂν £r ὅτε) read ἕως εἴπητε; Tr om. ἄν and br. 
5. 0.; cf. B. 231 (199) sq.]. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down, as long as, while, foll. by the indic. in all 
tenses, —in the N. T. only in the pres. : ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν, 
Jn. ix. 4 [Tr mre. WH mre. és]; gos (1, Τ Tr WH ὡς) 
τὸ φῶς ἔχετε, Jn. xii. 35 sq., (ξως Ere φῶς ἐστιν, Plat. 
Phaedo p. 89 c.) ; [Mk. vi. 45 (ef. c. above)]. 

11. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an 
ADvERB, Lat. usque ad; and 1. used of a tempo- 


ἕως 2 


68 d 








eu 
€@S 


ralterminus ad quem, until (unto); a. like a prep- 
osition, w. a gen. of time [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]: 
ἕως αἰῶνος, Lk. i. 55 Grsb. (Ezek. xxv. 15 Alex.; 1 Chr. 
xvii. 16; Sir. xvi. 26 Fritz.; xxiv. 9, ete.); τῆς ἡμέρας, 
Mt. xxvi. 29; xxvii. 64; Lk. i. 80; Acts i. 22 [Tdf. ἄχρι]: 
Xo. xf. 8, οἴο.; ὥρας, Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. xxiii. 
44; τῆς πεντηκοστῆς, 1 Co. xvi. 8; τέλους, 1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co. 
1.13; τῆς σήμερον 80. ἡμέρας, Mt. xxvii. 8; τοῦ νῦν, Mt. 
xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19, (1 Mace. ii. 33); χήρα ἕως ἐτῶν 
ὀγδοήκ. τεσσάρων a widow (who had attained) even unto 
eighty-four years, Lk. ii. 37 LT Tr WH; before the 
names of illustrious men by which a period of time 
is marked: Mt.i.17; xi. 13; Lk. xvi. 16 (where T Tr WH. 
μέχρι); Acts xiii. 20; before the names of events: 
Mt. i. 17 (ἕως μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος) : ii. 15; xxiii. 35; 
xxviii. 20; Lk. xi. 51; Jas. v. 7; ἕως τοῦ ἐλθεῖν, Acts viii. 
40 [B. 266 (228); cf. W. § 44. 6; Judith i. 10; xi. 19, 


etc.]. b. with the gen. of the neut. rel. pron. οὗ or ὅτου 
it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time 


when); a. ἕως οὗ (first in Hdt. 2, 143; but after that 
only in later auth., as Plut. et al. [W. 296 (278) note; 
B. 230 sq. (199)]): foll. by the indic., Mt. i. 25 [WI 
br. o]; xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21; Acts xxi. 26 [Β.]. c.]; foll. 
by the subj. aor., equiv. to Lat. fut. pf., Mt. xiv. 22; xxvi. 
36 (where WH br. οὗ and Lehm. has ἕως οὗ av); Lk. xii. 
50 [Rec.; xv. 8 Tr WH]; xxiv. 49; Acts xxv. 21; 2 Pet. 
i. 19; after a negative sentence, Mt. xvii. 9; Lk. xii. 59 
[RGL; xxii. 18 Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12, 
14,21. f. ἕως ὅτου, aa. until, till (the time when): 
foll. by the indic., Jn. ix. 18; foll. by the subj. (without 
av), Lk. xiii. 8; xv. 8[R GL T]; after a negation, Lk. 
xxii. 16, 18 [RG L T]. ββ. as long as, whilst (Cant. i. 
12), foll. by the indic. pres., Mt. v. 25 (see ἄχρι, 1 d. fin.). 
c. before adverbs of time (rarely so in the earlier and 
more elegant writ., as ἕως ὀψέ, Thuc. 3, 108; [cf. W. $54, 
6 fin.; D. 320 (275)]): ἕως ἄρτι, up to this time, until 
now [ Vig. ed. Herm. p. 388], Mt. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v. 
17; xvi. 24; 1 Jn:11:9/; 1100: av. 13's) villa 75 δ, δ. ξῶν 
more; how long? Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; 
Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (xiii.) 2.sq.; 2 S. ii. 26; 
1 Mace. vi. 22); ἕως σήμερον, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. acc. to 
a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, employed of the local 
terminus ad quem, unto, as far as, even to; a. like a 
prep., with a gen. of place [W. $ 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]: 
ἕως ddou, ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15; add, Mt. 
xxiv. 31; xxvi. 58; Mk.xiii.27; Lk.ii.15; iv. 29; Acts 
i.8; x119,22/: xvn 155 x11: 25. 2 (70551102: 510b. 
gen. of pers., to the place where one is: Lk. iv. 42; Acts 
ix. 38, (ἕως Ὑπερβορέων, Ael. v.h. 3, 18). — b. with ad- 
verbs of place [W. and B. as in c. above]: ἕως ἄνω, Jn. 
li.7; ἕως ἔσω, Mk. xiv. 54; ἕως κάτω, Mt. xxvii. 51; 
Mk. xv. 38; ἕως ὧδε, Lk. xxiii. 5 [cf. W. § 66, 1 c.]. 
c. with prepositions: ἕως ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts xxi. 5; 
ἕως eis, Lk. xxiv. 50 [RGLmreg., but Ltxt. T Tr WH 
fos πρός as far as to (Polyb. 3,82,6; 12,17,4; Gen. 
xxxviii 1)]; Polyb. 1, 11, 14; Ael. v. h. 12, 22. 3. 
of the limit (terminus) of quantity; with an adv. of 
number: ἕως ἑπτάκις, Mt. xviii. 21; with numerals: Mt. 


Zt 


xxii. 26 (ἕως τῶν ἑπτά) ; cf. xx. 8; Jn. viii. 9 (Rec.) ; 
Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός, there is 
not so much as one, Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1. 4. 
of the limit of measurement: ἕως ἡμίσους, Mk. vi. 23; 
Esth. v. 3, 6 Alex. 5. of the end or limit in acting 


[Z, £&, on its substitution for c see Z, c, s.] 

Ζαβουλών, ὁ, indecl., (mor [but on the Hebr. form see 
B. D.] habitation, dwelling, Gen. xxx. 20), Vulg. Zabu- 
lon; Zebulun, the tenth son of Jacob; by meton. the 
tribe of Zebulun: Mt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.* 

Ζακχαῖος, -ov, 6, (^2; pure, innocent; cf. 2 Esdr. ài. 9; 
Neh. vii. 14), Zaccheus, a chief tax-collector: Lk. xix. 
2) 5XRSIB-D S ssv.]* 

Zapá, 6, (MN a rising (of light)), indecl., Zarah [better 
Zerah], one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3; cf. Gen. 
xxxylii. 30.* 

Ζαχαρίας, -ov, ὁ, (121 and 377937 i. e. whom Jehovah 
remembered), Zacharias or Zachariah or Zechariah ; 
1. a priest, the father of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5, 
12 sq. 18, 21, 40, 59, 67; iii. 2. 2. a prophet, the son 
of Jehoiada the priest, who was stoned to death in the 
mid. of the 1x. cent. before Christ in the court of the 
temple: 2 Chr.xxiv. 19 sqq.; Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51. 
Yet this Zachariah is called in Mt. l. c. the son not of 
Jehoiada but of Barachiah. But most interpreters now 
think (and correctly) that the Evangelist confounded 
him with that more noted Zachariah the prophet who 
lived a little after the exile, and was the son of Bara- 
chiah (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose prophecies have a place 
inthe canon. For Christ, to prove that the Israelites 
throughout their sacred history had been stained with 
the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first 
and the last example of the murders committed on good 
men; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew 
canon. But opinions differ about this Zachariah: For 
according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek 
church follows (and which has been adopted by Chr. W. 
Müller in the "Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq., 
and formerly by Hilgenfeld, krit. Untersuchungen üb. die 
Evangg. Justins, ete., p. 155 and die Evangg. nach ihrer 
Entstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the 
Baptist is meant (cf. Protev. Jac. c. 23) ; others think 
(so quite recently Keim, iii. 184 [ Eng. trans. v. 218], ef. 
Weiss, das Matthüusevang. p. 499) a certain Zachariah 
son of Baruch (acc. to another reading Bapwatov), who 
during the war between the Jews and the Romans was 
slain by the zealots ἐν μέσῳ τῷ ἱερῷ, as Joseph. b. 1. 4, 
5,4 relates. "Those who hold this opinion believe, either 
that Jesus divinely predieted this murder and in the 


269 





Caw 


and suffering: ἕως τούτου, Lk. xxii. 51 [see édo, 2]; 
ἕως Tov θερισμοῦ, Mt. xiii. 30 L Tr WH txt.; ἕως θανάτου, 
even to death, so that I almost die, Mk. xiv. 34; Mt. 
xxvi. 38, (Sir. iv. 28; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 13; xxxvii 2; 
4 Macc. xiv. 19). 


Z 


prophetic style said ἐφονεύσατε for φονεύσετε [cf. B. 
$137, 4; W. 273 (256) n.; $40,5 b.], or that the Evange- 
list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an 
anachronism put this murder into the discourse of Jesus. 
These inventions are fully refuted by Fritzsche on Mt. 
1. c, and Bleek, Erklür. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p.177 
sqq.; cf. Hilgenfeld, Einl. in d. N. T. p. 487 sq.; [and 
Dr. James Morison, Com. on Mt., l. c.; B. D. s. v. Zech- 
ariah 6 and s. v. Zacharias 11].* 

táo, -à, (5s, ζῇ, inf. Gv [so L T, but RG WH -ἢ-, Tr 
also (exc. 1 Co. ix. 14; 2 Co.1. 8); cf. W. $5,4 c.; WH. 
Intr. ὃ 410; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 5 sq.], ptep. ζῶν; 
impf. ἔζων (Ro. vii. 9, where cod. Vat. has the inferior 
form é(nv [found again Col. iii. 7 éGjre]; cf. Fritzsche 
on Rom. ii. p. 38; [ WH. App. p.169; Veitch s. v.]) ; fut. 
in the earlier form ζήσω (Ro. vi. 2 [not L mrg.]; Heb. 
xii. 9; L T Tr WH also in Jn. [v. 25]; vi. [31 TWH], 
51,58 [not L; xiv. 19 T Tr WH]; 2 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv. 
15), and much oftener [(?) five times, quotations ex- 
cepted, viz. Mt. ix. 18; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xi. 25; Ro. viii. 
13; x.5; cf. Moulton's Winer p. 105] the later form, 
first used by [ Hippocr. 7, 536 (see Veitch s. v.)] Dem., 
ζήσομαι; 1 aor. (unused in Attie [Hippoer., Anth. Pal., 
Plut. al. (see Veitch)]) ἔζησα (Acts xxvi. 5, etc.) ; cf. 
Bitm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. 191 sq.; B. 58 (81); Kriiger i. 
p.172; Kiihner i. 829; W.86 (83); [Veitch s. v.]; Hebr. 
mn; [fr. (Hom.) Theogn., Aeschyl. down]; to live; 

I. prop. 1. to live, be among the living, be alive (not 
lifeless, not dead): Acts xx. 12; Ro. vii. 1-3; 1 Co. vii. 
39; 2 Co. 1. 8; iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 15, 17; Rev. xix. 20, ete.; 
Ψυχὴ ζῶσα, 1 Co. xv. 45 and R Tr mrg. Rev. xvi. 3; διὰ 
παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, during all their life (on earth), Heb. ii. 
15 (διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον, Diod. 1, 74 [cf. B. 
262 (225)]); ἔτι ζῶν (ptep. impf. [cf. W. 341 (320) ]), 
while he was yet alive, before his death, Mt. xxvii. 63; 
with ἐν σαρκί added, of the. earthly life, Phil. i. 22; ὃ δὲ 
νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί, that life which I live in an earthly body, 
Gal. ii. 20 [B. 149 (130); W. 227 (213)]; ἐν αὐτῷ ζῶμεν, 
in God is the cause why we live, Acts xvii. 28; ζῶσα 
τέθνηκε, 1 Tim. v. 6; ἐμοὶ τὸ ζῆν Χριστός, my life is de- 
voted to Christ, Christ is the aim, the goal, of my life, 


Phil. i. 21; ζῶντες are opp. to νεκροί, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. 
xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ζῶντες kal νεκροί, Acts x. 42; Ro. 


; 2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; in the sense of living 


and thriving, 2 Co. vi. 9; 1 Th. iii. 8; (y ἐν ἐμοὶ 
Χριστός, Christ is living and operative in me, i. e. the 
holy mind and energy of Christ pervades and moves me, 
Gal. ii. 20; ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ ζῆν εἴς twa, through the 
power of God to live and be strong toward one (sc. in 
correcting and judging), 2 Co. xiii. 4; in the absol. sense 
God is said to be 6 ζῶν: Mt. xvi. 16; xxvi. 63; Jn. vi. 
57; vi.69 Rec.; Actsxiv.15; Ro.ix.26; 2 Co.iii. 3; 
vi.16; 1 Th.i.9; 1 Tim. iii. 15; iv. 10; vi. 17 RG; 
Heb. iii. 12; ix. 14; x. 31; xii. 22; Rev. vii. 2, (Josh. iii. 
10; 2 K. xix. 4, 16; Is. xxxvii. 4, 17; Hos.i.10; Dan. 
vi. 20 Theod., 26, etc.) ; with the addition of eis τοὺς 
αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων, Rev. iv. 9; xv. 7; ζῶ ἐγώ CIS—N, 
Num. xiv. 21; Is. xlix. 18, ete.) as / live, (by my life), 
the formula by whieh God swears by himself, Ro. xiv. 
11. i. 4. to continue to live, to be kept alive, (ὅστις Civ 
ἐπιθυμεῖ, πειράσθω νικᾶν, Xen. an. 3, 2, 26 (39)) : ἐὰν ὁ 
κύριος θελήσῃ kai ζήσωμεν [-σομεν L T Tr WEL], Jas. iv. 
15 [B. 210 (181); W. 286 (268 sq.)]; ζῆν ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ (Mt. 
iv.4, ete.) see ἐπί, D. 2 a. a. (Tob. v. 20) ; ζῆν ἔκ twos, to 
get a living from a thing, 1 Co. ix. 14; also when used 
of convalescents, Jn. iv. 50 sq. 53; with ἐκ τῆς áppo- 
στίας added, 2 K. i. 2; viii. 8 sq. figuratively, to live 
and be strong: ἐν τούτοις (for Ree. ἐν αὐτοῖς) in these 
vices, opp. to the ethical death by which Christians are 
wholly severed from sin (see ἀποθνήσκω, II. 2 b.), Col. iii. 
7; cf. Meyer ad loc. 1. q. to be no longer dead, to recover 
life, be restored to life: Mt. ix.18; Acts ix. 41; so of 
Jesus risen from the dead, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv. 5, 23; 
Actsi. 8; xxv. 19; Ro. vi. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 4; opp. to 
νεκρός, Rev. i. 18; ii. 8; ἔζησεν came to life, lived again, 
Ro. xiv. 9 GLT Tr WH (opp. to ἀπέθανε) ; Rév. xiii. 
14; χχ. 4, ὅ [Rec. dvé(.], (Ezek. xxxvii. 9 sq.; on the 
aorist as marking entrance upon a state see βασιλεύω, 
fin.) ; ὧν ἐκ νεκρῶν, trop. out of moral death to enter 
upon a new life, dedicated and acceptable to God, Ro. vi. 
13; [similarly in Lk. xv. 32 T Tr WH]. 1. q. not to be 
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 (where ἄνθρωποι ἀποθνήσκοντες dying 
men i. e. whose lot it is to die, are opp. to ὁ ζῶν). 2 
emphatieally, and in the Messianie sense, to enjoy real 
life, i.e. to have true life and worthy of the name,— active, 
blessed, endless in the kingdom of God (or ζωὴ αἰώνιος ; see 
ζωή, 2b.): Lk. x. 28; Jn. v. 25; xi. 25; Ro.i.17; viii. 
13; xiv. 9[(?) see above]; Gal. iii. 12; Heb. xii. 9; with 
the addition of ἐκ πίστεως, Heb. x. 38; of εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, Jn. 
vi. 51, 58; σὺν Χριστῷ, in Christ’s society, 1 Th. v. 10; 
this life in its absolute fulness Christ enjoys, who owes it 
to God; hence he says ζῶ διὰ τὸν πατέρα, Jn. vi. 57; by 
the gift and power of Christ it is shared in by the faith- 
ful, who accordingly are said ζήσειν 80 αὐτόν, Jn. vi. 57; 
δι᾽ αὐτοῦ, 1Jn.iv. 9. ‘with a dat. denoting the respect, 
πνεύματι, 1 Pet. iv. 65 ὄνομα ἔχεις ὅτι ζῇς καὶ νεκρὸς εἶ, thou 
art said to have life (i. e. vigorous spiritual life bringing 
forth good fruit) and (yet) thou art dead (ethically), 
Rey. iii. 1. In the O. T. ζῆν denotes to live most happily 
in the enjoyment of the theocratic blessings: Lev. xviii. 5; 
Deut.iv.1; viii.1; xxx. 16. 3. to live i. e. pass life, 
of the manner of living and acting; of morals or char- 


Caw 2 


70 





ζεῦγος. 


acter: μετὰ ἀνδρός with acc. of time, of a married woman, 
Lk. ii. 86; χωρὶς νόμου, without recognition of the law, 
Ro. vii. 9; Φαρισαῖος, Acts xxvi. 5; also ἐν κόσμῳ, Col. ii. 
20; with ἐν and a dat. indicating the act or state of the 
soul: ἐν πίστει, Gal. ii. 20; ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, to devote life 
to sin, Ro. vi. 2; with adverbs expressing the manner: 
εὐσεβῶς, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. ii. 12; ἀσώτως, Lk. xv. 13; 
ἐθνικῶς, Gal. ii. 14; ἀδίκως, Sap. xiv. 28; ζῆν τινι (dat. 
of pers., a phrase com. in Grk. auth. also, in Lat. vivere 
alicui; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 176 sqq.), to 
devote, consecrate, life to one; so to live that life results 
in benefit to some one or to his cause: τῷ θεῷ. Lk. xx. 
38; Ro. vi 10 sq.; Gal. ii. 19, (4 Mace. xvi. 25); τῷ 
Χριστῷ. 2 Co. v. 15; that man is said ἑαυτῷ (5v who 
makes his own will his law, is his own master, Ro. xiv. 
7; 2 Co. v. 15; w. dat. of the thing to which life is de- 
voted: τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, 1 Pet. ii. 24; πνεύματι, to be actu- 
ated by the Spirit, Gal. ν. 25; κατὰ σάρκα, as the flesh 
dictates, Ro. viii. 12 sq. 

II. Metaph. of inanimate things; ^ a. ὕδωρ ζῶν, Ὁ 
n"n (Gen. xxvi. 19; Lev. xiv. 5; ete.), living water, i. e. 
bubbling up, gushing forth, flowing, with the suggested 
idea of refreshment and salubrity (opp. to the water of 
cisterns and pools, [ef. our spring water ]), is figuratively 
used of the spirit and truth of God as satisfying the 
needs and desires of the soul: Jn. iv. 10 sq.; vii. 38; 
ἐπὶ ζώσας πηγὰς ὑδάτων, Rey. vii. 17 Rec. — b. having 
vital power in itself and exerting the same upon the soul: 
ἐλπὶς ζῶσα, 1 Pet. i. 3; λόγος θεοῦ, 1 Pet.i. 23; Heb. iv. 
12; λόγια sc. τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts vii. 38, cf. Deut. xxxii. 47; 
ὁδὸς ζῶσα, Heb. x. 20 (this phrase describing that char- 
acteristic of divine grace, in granting the pardon of sin 
and fellowship with God, which likens it to a way lead- 
ing to the heavenly sanetuary). Inthe same manner the 
predicate ὁ ζῶν is applied to those things to which 
persons are compared who possess real life (see I. 2 
above), in the expressions λίθοι ζῶντες, 1 Pet. ii. 4; ὁ 
ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν (see ἄρτος, fin.) Jn. vi. 51; θυσία ζῶσα 
(tacitly opp. to slain victims), Ro. xii.1. [Cowr.: dva-, 
συ-ζάω.] 

ἵβέννυμι, see σβέννυμι and s. v. Σ, v, s. 

Ζεβεδαῖος, -ov, 6, Zebedee, ("131 for "731 [i. e. my gift], 
a form of the prop. name which occurs a few times in 
the O. T., as 1 Chr. xxvii. 27 (Sept. Ζαβδί), munificent, 
[others for 7.21 gift of Jehovah]; fr. 33: to give), a 
Jew, by occupation a fisherman, husband of Salome, fa- 
ther of the apostles James and John: ΜΠ ἀν. 21. ἡ: ὦ 
(3); xx. 20; xxvi. 37; xxvii. 56; Mk. i. 19 sq.; iii. 17; x. 
35; Lk. v. 10; Jn. xxi. 2.* 

ζεστός, -ή, -àv, (Céw), boiling hot, hot, [Strab., App., 
Diog. Laért., al.]; metaph. of fervor of mind and zeal : 
Rev. iii. 15 56." 

ζεῦγος, -εος (τους), τό, (ζεύγνυμι to join, yoke), two 
draught-catile (horses or oxen or mules) yoked together, 
a pair or yoke of beasts: Lk. xiv. 19 (ΠΝ, 1 Kings xix. 
19, ete.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. ΤΙ. 18, 543 down). 
2. univ. a pair: Lk. ii. 24 (Hdt. 3, 130; Aeschyl. Ag. 
44; Xen. oec. 7, 18, and often in Grk. writ.).* 


ζευκτηρία, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. ζευκτήριος, fit for joining 
or binding together), a band, fastening: Acts xxvii. 40. 
Found nowhere else.* 

Ζεύς, [but gen. Διός, (dat. Au), ace. Δία (or Aíav), (fr. 
old nom. Ais), Zeus, corresponding to Lat. Jupiter (A. 
V.): Acts xiv. 12 (see Ais); 6 ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς τοῦ ὄντος 
πρὸ τῆς πόλεως, the priest of Zeus whose temple was be- 
fore the city, ibid. 13 (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. See Ais.* 

téw; to boil with heat, be hot; often in Grk. writ.; thus 
of water, Hom. Il. 18, 349; 21, 362 (365); metaph. 
used of ‘boiling’ anger, love, zeal for what is good or 
bad, ete. (Tragg., Plat., Plut., al.) ; ζέων (on this uncon- 
tracted form ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. [or his School Gram. 
(Robinson's trans.)] $ 105 N. 2, i. p. 481; Matthiae i. 
p. 151; [Hadley $ 371 b.]) τῷ πνεύματι, fervent in spirit, 
said of zeal for what is good, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 11; 
cf. esp. Rückert and Fritzsche on Ro. l. c.* 

ζηλεύω; i. q- ζηλόω, q. v. ; 1. to envy, be jealous: 
Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [c. 19, 2 p. 
56, 34 Didot] οὐδεὶς τῶν τ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τὸ ἀνθρώπινον ζητούντων 
φθονεῖ ἢ ζηλεύει ποτέ. 2. in a good sense, to imitate 
emulously, strive afier: ἔργα ἀρετῆς. οὐ λόγους, Democr. 
ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf.; intrans. to 
be full of zeal for good, be zealous: Rev: iii. 19 LT Tr 
txt. WH, for Rec. ζήλωσον [cf. WH. App. p. 171].* 

ζῆλος, -ov, ὁ, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L T Tr WH; [2 Co. 
ix. 2 T Tr WH ]) τὸ ὥλος (Ignat. ad Trall. 4; διὰ ζῆλος, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [* in Clem. Rom. §§ 3, 4,5,6 the 
masc. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any 
law" (Lghtft.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2 
Hilgenfeld (1876) p. 7; cf. WH. App. p. 158; W. 89, N. 
2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. (éo [Curtius ὃ 567; Vanicek p. 
757]); Sept. for DNO: excitement of mind, ardor, fervor 
of spirit ; 1. zeal, ardor in embracing, pursuing, de- 
fending anything: 2 Co. vii. 11 ; ix. 2; κατὰ ζῆλος, as re- 
spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6; with 
gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of, for a pers. or thing, 
Jn. ii. 17 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; Ro. x. 2, (1 Mace. ii. 
58; Soph. O. C. 943) ; ὑπέρ twos, gen. of pers, 2 Co. 
vii. 7; Col iv. 13 Rec. with subject. gen. ζήλῳ θεοῦ, 
with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and 
solicitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2; the flerceness 
of indignation, punitive zeal, πυρός (of penal fire, which 
is personified [see πῦρ, fin.]), Heb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11; 
Sap. v. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry, 
jealousy : Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Co. iii. 3; Jas. iii. 14, 16 ; ἐπλή- 
σθησαν ζήλου, Acts v. 17; xiii. 45; plur. ζῆλοι, now the 
stirrings or motions of ζῆλος, now its outbursts and man- 
ifestations: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; but in both pass. 
L T Tr (WH, yet in Gal. l. e. WH only in txt.] have 
adopted ζῆλος (ζῆλοί re καὶ φθόνοι, Plat. legc. 3 p. 679 c.). 


[On the distinction between ζῆλος (which may be used - 


in a good sense) and φθόνος (used only in a bad sense) 
ef. Trench, Syn. $ xxvi.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 11, 
1 (διὸ καὶ ἐπιεικές ἐστιν ὁ ζῆλος καὶ ἐπιεικῶν, τὸ δὲ φθονεῖν 
φαῦλον καὶ φαύλων).} * 

ἵηλόω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐζήλωσα; pres. pass. inf. ζηλοῦσθαι; 
(Gros, 4: v-); Sept. for 83D; to burn with zeal; — 1. 


ζευκτηρία 2 


ἯΙ 








ζημία 


absol. to be heated or to boil [A.V..to be moved] with envy, 
Acts vii. 9; xvii. 5 (where Grsb. om. 
(nddo-.) ; 1 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv. 2; in a good sense, to be 
zealous in the pursuit of good, Rev. iii. 19 R G Tr mrg. 
(the aor. ζήλωσον marks the entrance into the mental 
state, see βασιλεύω, fin.; ἐζήλωσε, he was seized with 
indignation, 1 Mace. ii. 24). 2. trans.; τί, to desire 
earnestly, pursue: 1 Co. xii. 31; xiv. 1, 39, (Sir. li. 185 
Thue. 2, 37; Eur. Hec. 255; Dem. 500, 2; al); μᾶλλον 
δέ, sc. ζηλοῦτε, foll. by ἵνα, 1 Co. xiv. 1 [B. 237 (205); cf. 
W.. 577 (537)]. τινά, a. to desire one earnestly, to strive 
afier, busy one's self about him : to exert one’s self for one 
(that he may not be torn from me), 2 Co. xi. 2; to seek 
to draw over to one's side, Gal. iv. 17 [cf. tva, IIT. 1 d.]; 
to court one's good will and favor, Prov. xxiii. 17; xxiv. 
1; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1; soin the pass. to be the object 
of the zeal of others, to be zealously sought after: Gal. iv. 
18 [here Tr mrg. ζηλοῦσθε, but cf. WH. Intr. § 4041. 
b. to envy one: Gen. xxvi. 14; xxx.1; xxxvii. 11; Hes. 
opp. 310; Hom. Cer. 168, 223; and in the same sense, 
acc. to some interpp., in Acts vii. 9; but there is no 
objection to considering ζηλώσαντες here as used absol. 
(see 1 above [so A.V. (not R.V.)]) and τὸν Ἰωσήφ as 
depending on the verb ἀπέδοντο alone. [Comp.: zapa- 
Gobo. ]* 

ζηλωτής, -οὔ, ὁ, (ζγλόω), one burning with zeal; a zealot; 
1. absol, for the Hebr. ND. used of God as jealous of 
any rival and sternly vindicating his control: Ex. xx. 
5; Deut. iv. 24, ete. From the time of the Maccabees 
there existed among the Jews a class of men, called 
Zealots, who rigorously adhered to the Mosaic law and 
endeavored even by a resort to violence, after the ex- 
ample of Phinehas (Num. xxv. 11, ζηλωτὴς Φινεές 4 Macc. 
xviii. 12), to prevent religion from being violated by 
others; but in the latter days of the Jewish common- 
wealth they used their holy zeal as a pretext for the basest 
crimes, Joseph. b. j. 4, 3,9; 4,5,1; 4,6,3; 7,8,1. To 
this class perhaps Simon the apostle had belonged, and 
hence got the surname 6 ζηλωτής: Lk. vi. 15; Actsi.13; 
[ef. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch., Index s. v. Zeloten; 
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 237 sqq.]. 2. with 
gen. of the obj. : w. gen. of the thing, most eagerly desirous 
of, zealous for, athing; a. to acquire a thing, [zealous 
of | (see (Ado, 2): 1 Co. xiv. 12; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 
13 L T Tr WH, (ἀρετῆς, Philo, praem. et poen. $2; τῆς 
εὐσεβείας, de monarch. l. i. $ 3; εὐσεβείας x. δικαιοσύνης, 
de poenit. $1; τῶν πολεμικῶν ἔργων, Diod. 1, 73; περὶ 
τῶν ἀνηκόντων eis σωτηρίαν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45,1). b. 
to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend- 
ing for a thing, [zealous for]: νόμου, Acts xxi. 20 (2 
Mace. iv. 2); τῶν πατρικῶν παραδόσεων, Gal. i. 14 (τῶν 


hatred, anger : 


αἰγυπτιακῶν πλασμάτων, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 8. 19 ; τῆς 
ἀρχαίας x. σώφρονος ἀγωγῆς, Diod. excerpt. p. 611 [fr. l. 
37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers.: θεοῦ, intent on 
protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend- 
ing for the Mosaic law, Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth. 
also an emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)* 

ζημία, -as, 7, damage, loss, [Soph., Hdt. down]: Acts 


ζημιόω 
xxvii. 10, 21; ἡγεῖσθαι ζημίαν (Xen. mem. 2, 4, 3; τινά, 
acc. of pers., 2, 3, 2), τί, to regard a thing as ἃ loss : Phil. 
iii. 7 (opp. to κέρδος), 8 

ζημιόω, -@: (ζημία), to affect with damage, do damage 
to: twa ((Thuc.] Xen., Plat.) ; in the N. T. only in 
Pass., fut. ζημιωθήσομαι ([ Xen. mem. 3,9, 12, al. ; but “as 
often"] in prof. auth. [fut. mid.] ζημιώσομαι in pass. 
sense; ef. Krüger $ 39, 11 Anm.; Kühner on Xen. 
mem. u.s.; [L. and S. s. v.; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. ἐζημιώ- 
£v ; absol. to sustain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss : 
1 Co. iii. 15 ; ἔν τινι ἔκ τινος, in a thing from one, 2 Co. 
vii. 9; with ace. of the thing: (one from whom another 
is taken away [as a penalty] by death, is said τὴν ψυχήν 
τινος ζημιοῦσθαι, Hdt. 7, 39), τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, to forfeit 
his life, i. e. acc. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 26 ; 
Mk. viii. 36, for which Luke, in ix. 25, ἑαυτόν i. e. him- 
self, by being shut out from the everlasting kingdom of 
God. πάντα ἐζημιώθην, reflexive [yet see Meyer], I for- 
feited, gave up all things, I decided to suffer the loss of 
all these [(?)] things, Phil. iii. 8.* 

Znvas [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. iv. 15 ; W. $ 16 N. 1], -ἂν, 
[B. 20 (18)], 6, Zenas, at first a teacher of the Jewish 
law, afterwards a Christian: Tit. iii. 13. [B.D. s. v.]* 

tyréw, -9; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐζήτει, plur. ἐζήτουν ; fut. 
ζητήσω; 1 aor. ἐζήτησα; Pass, pres. ζητοῦμαι; impf. 3 
pers. sing. ἐζητεῖτο (Heb. viii. 7); 1 fut. ζητηθήσομαι 
(Lk. xii. 48); [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for w3, and much 
oftener for wpa; to seek, i. e. 1. to seek in order to 
Jind ; a. univ. and absol. : Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq. 
(see εὑρίσκω. 1 a.); τινά, Mk. i. 37; Lk. ii. [45 R Lmre.], 48; 
[iv. 42 Rec.]; Jn. vi. 24; xviii. 4, 7; Acts x. 19, and 
often; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Acts ix. 11; w. acc. of 
the thing (μαργαρίτας), of buyers, Mt. xiii. 45; something 
lost, Mt. xviii.12; Lk. xix. 10; τὶ ἔν τινι, as fruit on a 
tree, Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; ἀνάπαυσιν, a place of rest, Mt. xii. 
43; Lk. xi. 24; after the Hebr. (8 υ5)- ns wpa [ef. 
W. 33 (32); 18]) ψυχήν τινος, to seek, plot against, the 
life of one, Mt. ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3, (Ex. iv. 19, ete.); univ. 
τί ζητεῖς; What dost thee seek? what dost thou wish? 
Jn. i. 38 (39); [iv. 27]. b. to seek [i. e. in order to find 
out] by thinking, meditating, reasoning; to inquire into: 
περὶ Tivos ζητεῖτε μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων; Jn. xvi. 19; foll. by indi- 
Mk: S185 acre pte sec sri. 
29; xxii. 2; 1 Pet. v. 8; τὸν θεόν, to follow up the traces 
of divine majesty and power, Acts xvii. 27 (univ. to seek 
the knowledge of God, Sap. i. 1; xiii. 6; [Philo,monarch. 
i $5]. c. to seek after, seek for, aim at, strive after: 
εὐκαιρίαν, Mt. xxvi. 16; Lk. xxii. 6; ψευδομαρτυρίαν, Mt. 
xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv. 55; τὸν θάνατον, an opportunity to die, 
Rev. ix. 6; λύσιν, 1 Co. vii. 27; τὴν Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. 
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; τὰ ἄνω, Col. iii. 1; εἰρήνην, 1 Pet. iii. 
11; ἀφθαρσίαν etc. Ro. ii. 7; δόξαν ἔκ τινος, 1 Th. ii. 6: τὴν 
τά Twos, the property of 
one, 2 Co. xii. 14; τὴν δόξαν θεοῦ, to seek to promote the 
glory of God, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; τὸ θέλημά τινος, to at- 
tempt to establish, Jn. v. 30; τὸ σύμφορόν τινος, to seek 
to further the profit or advantage of one, 1 Co. x. 33, i. q. 
ζητεῖν τά τινος, ib. x. 24; xiii.5; Phil.ii.21; ὑμᾶς, to seek 


rect disc., πῶς, τί, τίνα: 


δόξαν τὴν παρά τινος. Jn. v. 44: 


9 


212 ζυγός 





to win your souls, 2 Co. xii. 14; τὸν θεόν, to seek the favor 
of God (see ἐκζητέω, a.), Ro. x. 20; [iii. 11 Trmrg. WH 
mrg.]. foll. by inf. [B. 258 (222); W. § 44, 3] to secki.e. 
desire, endeavor: Mt. xii. 46, [47 (WH in mrg. only)]; 
xxi. 46; Mk. [vi. 19 L Tr mrg.]; xii. 12; Lk. v. 18; vi. 19; 
ix. 9; Jn. v. 18; vii. 4 [Β. 8 142, 4], 19 sq.; Acts xiii. 8; 
xvi. 10; Ro. x. 3; Gal. i. 10; ii. 17; foll. by tva [B. 237 
(205)], 1 Co. xiv. 12. 2. to seck i. e. require, demand: 
[σημεῖον, Mk. viii. 12 LT Tr WH; Lk. xi. 29 T Tr WH]; 
σοφίαν, 1 Co. i. 22; δοκιμήν, 2 Co. xiii. 3; τὶ παρά τινος, 
to crave, demand something from some one, Mk. viii. 
1; Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; ἔν τινι, dat. of pers., to seek in 
one i. e. to require of him, foll. by tva, 1 Co. iv. 2. 
[Comp.: ava-, ék-, ἐπι-, συ-ζητέω. 
ζήτημα, -τος, τό, (ζητέω), a question, debate : Acts xv. 2; 
xxvi. 3; νόμου, about the law, Acts xxiii. 29; περί twos, 
Acts xviii. 15; xxv. 19. [From Soph. down.] * 
ζήτησις, -ews, 7, (ζγτέω); | a. a seeking: [Hdt.], Thue. 
8,57; ἃ]. Ὁ. inquiry (Germ. die Frage): περί τινος, Acts 
xxv. 20. c. a questioning, debate: Acts xv. 2 (for Rec. 
συζήτησις); 1 T Trtxt. WH; περί τινος, Jn. iii. 25. ἃ. 
a subject of questioning or debate, matter of controversy: 
1 Tim. i.4 RGL; vi. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Tit. iii. 9.* 
ζιζάνιον, -ov, τό, (doubtless a word of Semitic origin; 


ws o o0 

Arab. ol» Syr. Lp} [see Schaaf, Lex. s. v. p. 148], 
Talmud py or p3y; Suid. ᾧζάνιον: ἡ ἐν τῷ σίτῳ aipa), 
zizanium, ΓΑ. V. tares], a kind of darnel, bastard wheat 
[but see reff. below], resembling wheat except that the 
grains are black: Mt. xiii. 25-27, 29 sq. 36, 38, 40. 
(Geop. [for reff. see B. D. Am. ed. p. 3177 note]). Cf. 
Win. RWB. s. v. Loleh; Furrer in Schenkel B. L. iv. 57; 
[B.D., and Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Tares ].* 

Ζμύρνα, so 'Tdf. in Rev. i. 11, etc., for Σμύρνα, 4: ν. 

Ζοροβάβελ, in Joseph. Ζοροβάβηλος, -ου, 6, (533; i. e. 
either for 923371 dispersed in Babylonia, or for o3 yn 
begotten in Babylonia), Zerubbabel, Vulg. Zorobabel, a 
descendant of David, the leader of the first colony of the 
Jews on their return from the Babylonian exile: Mt. i. 
12:sq.; Lk. im. 27:* 

ζόφος, -ov, 6, (akin to γνόφος, δνόφος, νέφος, κνέφας. see 
Bttm. Lexil. ii. p. 266 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 378]; cf. Cur- 
tius p. 706), darkness, blackness: Heb. xii. 18 L T Tr 
WH; as in Hom.Il. 15,191 ; 21,56, etc., used of the dark- 
ness of the nether world (cf. Grimm on Sap. xvii. 14), 
2 Pet. ii. 4; Jude 6; Coos τοῦ σκότους (cf. n?sw-qpn, 
Ex. x. 22), the bideknass of (i.e. the densest) darkness, 
2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 18. [Cf. Trench ὃ c.]* 

ζυγός, -ov, 6, for which in Grk. writ. before Polyb. τὸ 
ζυγόν was more com., (fr. Cevyvupe) ; 1. ayoke; a. 
prop. such as is put on draught-cattle. b. metaph. 
used of any burden or bondage: as that of, slavery, 1 
Tim. vi. 1 (Lev. xxvi. 13), δουλείας, Gal. v. 1 (Soph. Aj. 
944; δουλοσύνης, Dem. 322, 12); of troublesome laws 
imposed on one, esp. of the Mosaic law, Acts xv. 10; 
Gal. v. 1; hence the name is so transferred to the com- 
mands of Christ as to contrast them with the commands 
of the Pharisees which were a veritable ‘yoke’; yet 


ζύμη 


even Christ's commands must be submitted to, though 
easier to be kept : Mt. xi. 29 sq. (less aptly in Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 16, 17 Christians are called οἱ ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγὸν τῆς 
χάριτος ἐλθόντες [cf. Harnack ad loc.]). 2. a balance, 
pair of scales: Rev. vi. 5 (as in Is. xl. 12; Lev. xix. 36; 
Plat. rep. 8, 550 e. ; Ael. v. h. 10, 6; al.).* 
ζύμη, της; ἡ, (Céw [but cf. Curtius p. 626 sq.; Vanicek, 
p. 1007), leaven : Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21, (Ex. xii. 15; 
Lev. ii. 11; Deut. xvi. 3, etc.; Aristot. gen. an. 3, 4; Jo- 
seph. antt. 3, 10, 6; Plut. mor. p. 289 sq. [quaest. Rom. 
1097): τοῦ ἄρτου, Mt. xvi. 12; metaph. of inveterate 
mental and moral corruption, 1 Co. v. [7], 8, (Ignat. ad 
Magnes. 10); viewed in its tendency to infect others, 
ζύμη τῶν Φαρισαίων : Mt. xvi. 6, 11; Mk. viii. 15; Lk. xii. 
1, which fig. Mt. xvi. 12 explains of the teaching 
of the Phar., Lk. l.c. more correctly [definitely ?] of their 
hypocrisy. It is applied to that which, though small 
in quantity, yet by its influence thoroughly pervades a 
thing: either in a good sense, as in the parable Mt. xiii. 
33; Lk. xiii. 21, (see ζυμόω) ; or in a bad sense, of a per- 
nicious influence, as in the proverb μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ 
φύραμα ζυμοῖ a little leaven leaveneth the whole lump, 
which is used variously, ace. to the various things to which 
it is applied, viz. a single sin corrupts a whole church, 
1 Co. y. 6; a slight inclination to error (respecting the 
necessity of circumcision) easily perverts the whole con- 
ception of faith, Gal. v. 9; but many interpp. explain 
the passage ‘even a few false teachers lead the whole 
church into error.’ * 
ζυμόω, -6; 1 aor. pass. ἐζυμώθην ; (ζύμη) ; to leaven (to 
mix leaven with dough so as to make it ferment) : 1 Co. 
v. 6; Gal. v. 9, (on which pass. see ζύμη) ; ἕως ἐζυμώθη 
ὅλον, sc. τὸ ἄλευρον, words which refer to the saving 
power of the gospel, which from a small beginning will 
gradually pervade and transform the whole human race: 
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. (Sept., Hipp., Athen., Plut.) * 
twypéw, -ῶ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐζωγρημένος ; (ζωός alive, 
and dypéo [poet. form of ἀγρεύω, q. v.]) ; 1. to take 
alive (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., Xen?, al.; Sept.). 2. univ. 
to take, catch, capture: éCwypnuevor ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ (1.6. τοῦ δια- 
Bodov) εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα, if they are held captive to 
do his will, 2 Tim. ii. 26 [al. make ἐξ. im adr. paren- 
thetic and refer ἐκείνου to God; see ἐκεῖνος, 1 c.; cf. Ellie. 
in loc.]; ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν, thou shalt catch men, 
i. e. by teaching thou shalt win their souls for the king- 
dom of God, Lk. v. 10.* 
ton, -ns, 7, (fr. Caw, ζῶ), Sept. chiefly for on; life; 
1. univ. life, i. e. the state of one who is possessed of vital- 
ity or is animate : 1 Pet. iii. 10 (on which see ἀγαπάω) ; 
Heb. vii. 3,16; αὐτὸς (ὁ θεὸς) διδοὺς πᾶσιν ζωὴν K. πνοήν, 
Acts xvii. 25; πνεῦμα ζωῆς ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ, the vital spirit, 
the breath of (i. e. imparting) life, Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek. 
xxxvii. 5) ; πᾶσα Ψυχὴ ζωῆς, gen. of possess., every living 
soul, Rev. xvi. 3 GL'T Trtxt. WH; spoken of earthly 
life: ἡ ζωή τινος, Lk. xii. 15; Acts viii. 33 (see αἴρω, 3 h.); 
Jas. iv. 14; ἐν τῇ ζωῇ cov, whilst thou wast living on 
earth, Lk. xvi. 25 (ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ, Sir. xxx. 5; 1. 1); ἐν 
τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ, 1 Co. xv. 19; πᾶσαι ai ἡμέραι τῆς ζωῆς τινος, 
18 


273 





ζωή 


Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. exxvii. (exxviii.) 5; Sir. 
xxii.12(10)). ἐπαγγελία ζωῆς τῆς νῦν x. τῆς μελλούσης, 2 
promise looking to the present and the future life, 1 Tim. 
iv.8; ζωή and θάνατος are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38; 
1 Co. iii. 22; Phil. i. 20; of alife preserved in the midst 
of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the 
life of Paul is meant here, which exerts a saving power 
on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic 
duties); of the life of persons raised from the dead: ἐν 
καινότητι Cons, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life, 
dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4; of the life of Jesus after his 
resurrection, Acts ii. 28; Ro. v. 10; of the same, with 
the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used 
emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both 
essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through 
him both to the hypostatic X éyos and to Christ in whom the 
λόγος put on human nature: ὥσπερ ὁ πατὴρ ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν 
ἑαυτῷ, οὕτως ἔδωκεν καὶ τῷ υἱῷ ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Jn. v. 
26; ἐν αὐτῷ (sc. τῷ λόγῳ) ζωὴ ἦν καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἦν τὸ φῶς τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, in him life was (comprehended), and the life 
(transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the 
light (i. e. the intelligence) of men (because the life of 
men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence 
springs up), Jn.i.4; ὁ λόγος τῆς ζωῆς, the Logos having 
life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 Jn.i.1; 7 
ζωὴ ἐφανερώθη, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh, 
ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth 
that life which is next to be defined: viz. b. life real 
and genuine, * vita quae sola vita nominanda” (Cic. de 
sen. 21, 77), a life active and vigorous, devoted to God, 
blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their 
trust in Christ, but after the resurrection to be consummated 
by new accessions (among them a more perfect body), and 
to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated 
the conception, in their way, by employing 2"T! to de- 
note a happy life and every kind of blessing: Deut. xxx. 
15,19; Mal.ii.5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35; 
xii. 28, etc.) : Jn. vi. 51, 63; xiv. 6; Ro. vii. 10; viii. 6, 
10; 2 Co. ii. 16; Phil. ii. 16; [Col. iii. 4]; 2 Pet. i. 3; 
1 Jn. v. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of τοῦ θεοῦ, sup- 
plied by God [W. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ, 
to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1; 
μεταβεβηκέναι ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου eis ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 
14; ὄψεσθαι τὴν ζωήν, Jn. iii. 36; ἔχειν ζωήν, Jn. v. 405 
x.10; 1 Jn. v. 12; with ἐν ἑαυτῷ (or -rois) added, Jn. v. 
26; [yi. 53]; διδόναι, Jn. vi. 335 χάρις ζωῆς, the grace of 
God evident in the life obtained, 1 Pet. iii. 7; τὸ πνεῦμα 
τῆς Cons ἐν Χριστῷ “Inaod, the Spirit, the repository and 
imparter of life, and which is received by those united 
to Christ, Ro. viii. 2; 6 ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς (see ἄρτος, fin.), 
Jn. vi. 35,48; τὸ φῶς τῆς ¢ the light illumined by which 
one arrives at life, Jn. viii. 12. more fully ζωὴ αἰώνιος 
and ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος [(cf. B. 90 (79)); see below]: Jn. iv. 
36; [xii.50]; xvii. 3; 1 Jn. i. 2; ii. 25; [ῥήματα ζωῆς 
αἴων. Jn. vi. 68]: eis ζωὴν ai. unto the attainment of eter- 
nal life [cf. eis, B. IT. 3 c. 8. p. 185*], Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27; 
διδόναι ζωὴν al., Jn. x. 285 xvii. 2; 1 Jn. v. 11; ἔχειν ζωὴν 
ai., Jn. iii. 15, [and 16], (opp. to ἀπόλλυσθαι), 36; v. 24, 


Seon 


39; vi.40,47,54; xx.31Lbr.; 1 ὅπ. ν. 18: οὐκ ἔχειν 
ωὴν al. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, 1 Jn. iii. 15; (in Enoch xv. 4, 6 the 
wicked angels are said before their fall to have been 
spiritual and partakers of eternal and immortal life). ζωή 
and ἡ ζωή, without epithet, are used of the blessing of 
real life after the resurrection, in Mt. vii. 14; Jn. 
xi. 25; Acts iii 15; v. 20; xi. 18; Ro. v. 17, 18 (on 
which see δικαίωσις, fin.); 2 Co. v. 4; Col. iii. 3; 2 Tim. 
i 10; Tit. i. 2; iii. 7; ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν, life breaking forth 
from the abode of the dead, Ro. xi. 15; εἰσελθεῖν eis 
T. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45; avá- 
στασις ζωῆς i. q. εἰς Conv (2 Mace. vii. 14), Jn. v. 29 (on 
the gen. cf. W. 188 (177)) ; στέφανος τῆς ζωῆς 1. q. ἡ ζωὴ 
ὡς στέφανος, Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς, the 
tree whose fruit gives and maintains eternal life, Rev. 
ii. 7; xxii. 2, 14, 19 [GL T Tr WH], (cf. Gen. ii. 9; 
Prov. iii. 18; δένδρον ζωῆς, Prov. xi. 30; xiii.12); cf. 
Bleek, Vorless. üb. d. Apokalypse, p. 174 sq.; ὕδωρ ζωῆς, 
water the use of which serves to maintain eternal life, 
Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 1, 17; in the same sense ζωῆς πηγαὶ 
ὑδάτων, Rev. vii. 17 GL T Tr WH; ἡ βίβλος and τὸ βι- 
BMov τῆς ζωῆς, the book in which the names of those are 
recorded to whom eternal life has been decreed: Phil. 
iv.3; Rev.iii.5; xiii.8; xvii8; xx.12, 15; xxi 27; 
[xxii. 19 Ree.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.l.c.]. more fully 
ἡ ὄντως [ Rec. atóv.] ζωή, 1 Tim. vi. 19; ζωὴ αἰώνιος [cf. 
above] (Justin. de resurr. 1 p. 588 c. 6 λόγος . . . διδοὺς 
ἡμῖν ἐν ἑαυτῷ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν kai τὴν μετὰ ταῦτα 
ζωὴν αἰώνιον). Mt. xxv. 46 (opp. to κόλασις αἰών.) ; Acts 
xiii. 46, 48; Ro. ii. 7; vi. 22 sq.; Gal. vi. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 
12; after ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, Mk. x. 30; Lk. xviii. 
30; ἔχειν ζωὴν ai. Mt. xix. 16; κληρονομεῖν, Mt. xix. 29; 
Mk. x. 17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, unto the 
attainment of life eternal, Jn. xii. 25; Ro. v. 21; 1 Tim. 
i.16; Jude 21, (Dan. xii. 2; 4 Mace. xv. 2; ἀένναος ζωή, 
2 Mace. vii. 36; ἀΐδιος ζωή, Ignat. ad Eph. 19). Cf. Kést- 
lin, Lehrbegriff des Ev. Johann. ete. pp. 234 sqq. 338 
sqq.; Reuss, Johann. Theologie (in Beitráüge zu d. theol. 
Wissenschaften, vol. i.) p. 76 sqq. [cf. his Hist. de la 
Théol. Chrét. bk. vii. ch. xiv.]; Lipsius, Paulin. Recht- 
fertigungslehre, pp. 152 sqq. 185 sq.; Güder in Herzog 
viii. 254 (ed. 2, 509) sqq.; B. B. Brückner, De notione 
vocis ζωή in N. T. Lips. 1858; Huther, d. Bedeut. d. Be- 
griffe ζωή τι. πιστεύειν im N. T., in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
'Theol.1872,p.1 sqq. [For the relations of the term to 
heathen conceptions cf. G. T'eichmüller, Aristot. Forsch. 
ii. p.127 sqq.] Some, as Bretschneider, Wahl, Wilke, 
esp. Küuffer (in his book De biblica ζωῆς αἰωνίου notione. 
Dresd. 1838), maintain that ζωὴ αἰώνιος everywhere even 
in John's writings refers to life after the resurrection; but 
in this way they are compelled not only to assume a 
prophetie use of the perf. in the saying ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου 
μεταβεβηκέναι εἰς 7. ζωήν (Jn. v. 245. 1 Jn. iii. 14), but 
also to interpret the common phrase ἔχει ζωὴν al. as 
meaning he has eternal life as his certain portion though | 








274 


ζωοποιέω 


as yet only in hope, as well as to explain (wip ai. οὐκ 
ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ μένουσαν (1 Jn. iii. 15) of the hope of 
eternal life. [SvN. see βίος, fin.]* 

ζώνη, -5s, 7, (ζώννυμι), [fr. Hom. down], a girdle, belt, 
serving not only to gird on flowing garments, Mt. iii. 4 ; 
Mk.i.6; Acts xxi. 11; Rev.i.13; xv. 6; but also, since 
it was hollow, to carry money in [A. V. purse]: Mt. x. 
9; Mk. vi. 8; Plut. mor. p. 665 b. quaest. conviv. iv. 2, 
3,2; * argentum in zonis habentes," Liv. 33, 29. [B. D. 
s. v. Girdle.]* 

ζώννυμι and. Covvóo : impf. 2 pers. sing. ἐζώννυες ; fut. 
ζώσω; 1 aor. mid. impv. ζῶσαι; to gird: twa, Jn. xxi. 
18; Mid. to gird one’s self: Acts xii. 8 LT Tr WH. 
(Ex. xxix. 9; Hom. et al) [Comp.: ἀνα-, δια-, wept, 
ὑπο-ζώννυμι.} * 

twoyovew, -@; fut. ζωογονήσω ; pres. inf. pass. Cwoyovel- 
σθαι; (fr. ζωογόνος viviparous, and this fr. ζωός and 
TENQ); 1. prop. to bring forth alive (Theophr., 
Diod., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to give life (Theophr. de 
caus. pl. 4, 15,4; Ath. 7 p. 298 c.) : τὰ πάντα, of God, 1 
Tim. vi. 138 LT Tr WH, [(1 8. ii. 6)]. — 3. in the Bible 
to preserve alive: τὴν ψυχήν, Lk. xvii. 33; pass. Acts vii. 
19. (For;vmm, Ex.i.17; Judg. viii. 19; [158. xxvii. 9, 
11; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 31].) * 

ζῶον [or ζῷον (so L WH uniformly, Treg. in Heb. and 
Rev.; see Etym. Magn. 413, 24, and reff. s. v. I, 1) ], του, 
τό, (Cwds alive) ; 1. a living being. 2. an animal, 
brute, beast: Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10; Rev. 
iv. 6-9 [on vs. 8 cf. B. 130 (114)], etc. 

[Svw.: ζῶον differs from θηρίον (at least ety mologi- 
cally; but cf. Schmidt as below) in giving prominence to 
the vital element, while θηρίον emphasizes the bestial 
element. Hence in Rev. as above ¢ is fitly rendered living 
creature in contradistinction to the θηρίον beast, cf. xi. 7; xiii. 
l,ete. See Trench $ Ixxxi.; Schmidt ii. ch. 70.] 

ἵωο-ποιέω, -@; fut. Cworoujow; 1 aor. inf. ζωοποιῆσαι ; 
Pass. pres. ζωοποιοῦμαι; 1 fut. ζωοποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor. 
ptep. ζωοποιηθείς ; (ζωοποιός making alive); 1. to 
produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot., 
Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give life: 
τὰ πάντα, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 18 RG [cf. Neh. ix.6; 2 K. 
y.7; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.]; by spiritual power to arouse and 
invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6; Gal. iii. 21; to give ζωὴ αἰώνιος: 
(in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63; of the dead, to re- 
animate, restore to life: 1 Co. xv. 45; τινά, Jn. v. 21; Ro. 
iv.17; viii. 11; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22; i. q. to give increase 
of life: thus of physical life, πρῶτον τὸ παιδίον μέλιτι, 
εἶτα γάλακτι ζωοποιεῖται, Barn. ep. c. 6,17; of the spirit, 
ζωοποιηθεὶς πνεύματι, quickened as respects the spirit, 
endued with new and greater powers of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18, 
on which cf. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitalter, 
p. 182 ed. 2; [Zezschwitz, De Christi ad inferos de- 
scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 20]. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7) 
of seeds quickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing 
up, growing: 1 Co. xv. 36. [Comp.: συ-ζωοποιέω.] * 


275 


H 


ἤ 


ἡγεμών 


3, ἃ disjunctive conjunction [cf. W. § 53,6]. Used | positive notions, to which in this way a comparative 
1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu- | force is given: after καλόν ἐστι [it is good . . . rather 
tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the | than] i. q. it is better, Mt. xviii. 8sq.; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47; 


place of the other: or (Lat. aut, vel); 
guish one thing from another in words of the same con- 


a. to distin- | 


| 
| 


struction: Mt. v. 17 (τὸν νόμον ἢ τοὺς προφήτας), 36 | 
| exvii. (exviii.) 8; Jon. iv. 3, 8; Tob. vi.13; xii. 8; Sir. 


(λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν) ; vi. 31; vii. 16; Mk. vi. 56; vii. 11 
sq.; Lk. ii. 24; ix. 25; Jn. vii. 48; xiii. 29; Actsi. 7; 
ii. 12; iv. 7; Ro. i. 21; ἘΠ 2 1 Co. iv. 3; v. 10 sq. ; x. 
19; Gal.i.10, etc. ^b. after an interrogative or ἃ de- 
clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove 
the same thing in another way: Mt. vii. 4, 9; xii. 29; 
xvi. 26; xxvi.53; Mk. viii. 37; Lk.xiii.4; xiv. 31; xv. 
8; Ro. ix. 21; xiv. 10; 1 Co. vi. 16. c. before a sen- 
tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate 
that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand: 
Mt. xx. 15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye 
etc.); Ro. iii. 29; 1 Co.ix. 6; x. 22; xi. 14 [ Rec. ] ; xiv. 
36; 2 Co. xi. 7; ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε etc., Ro. vi. 3; vii. 1 (cf. vi. 
14); ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε etc., Ro. xi. 2; 1 Co. vi. 9, 16,19. — d. 
9)... ἢ, either... or, Mt. vi. 24; xii. 33; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts 
xxiv. 20 sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques- 
tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrum; ^ a. pre- 
ceded by πότερον, Jn. vii. 17; cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 574 
sq.; preceded by the interrog. μή, 1 Co. ix. 8; preceded 
by μήτι, 2 Co.i.17. b. without an interrog. particle 
in the first member of the interrogation: τί ἐστι εὐκοπώ- 
τερον, εἰπεῖν ... ἢ εἰπεῖν, Mt. ix. 5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; 
add, Mt. xxi. 25; xxiii. 17,19 ; xxvii. 17; Mk. iii.4; Lk. 
wit. 195 Acts vni345 | Οὲ ἢ... «ἢ. - -ἢ, ΜΕ: xiii. 35. 
3. as a comparative conj, than; a. after compara- 
tives: Mt. x. 15; xi. 22; Lk.ix.13; xvi. 17; Jn. iii. 19; 
iv. 1 [Trmrg. om. WH br. 7]; Acts iv. 19; Ro. xiii. 11, 
and often. 7 is wanting after πλείους foll. by a noun of 
number: Mt. xxvi.53 T Tr WH; Actsiv. 22; xxiii. 13, 
21; xxiv. 11 (where Rec. adds 7); cf. Matthiae ὃ 455 
note 4; Kühner ii. p. 847; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1]; W. 595 
(554) ; [B. 168 (146)]; Lob.ad Phryn. p.410 sq. b. 
afterérepov: Acts xvii.21. ο. πρὶν 7, before that, before, 
foll. by acc. with inf. [cf. B. $139, 35; W. $44, 6, also p. 
297 (279)]: Mt.i.18; Mk. xiv. 30; Actsii.20 RGWH 
mrg.; vii.2; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Lk. ii. 26 Tr txt. 
om. WH br. 7; xxii. 34 RG [al. ἕως]; foll. by pres. optat. 
Acts xxv. 16. — d. after θέλω i. q. to prefer: 1 Co. xiv. 
19 (foll. by ἤπερ, 2 Macc. xiv. 42); exx. fr. Grk. auth. are 
given in Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq.; W. $ 35, 2c.; 
[B. § 149, 7]; Kühner ii. p. 841; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 3]. 
e. after ov: Jn. xiii. 10 RG, where after οὐ χρείαν ἔχει 
the sentence goes on as though the writer had said οὐκ 
ἄλλου τινὸς χρείαν ἔχει; [cf. W. 508 (473)]. 





cf. Menander's saying καλὸν τὸ μὴ ζῆν, ἢ ὧν ἀθλίως, and 
Plaut. rud. 4, 4, 70 tacita mulier est bona semper, quam 
loquens; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. xlix. 12; Ps. 


xx. 25; xxii. 15; 4 Mace. ix. 1; also after λυσιτελεῖ [it 
is gain . . . rather than] i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. 6), Lk. 
xvii. 2; after χαρὰ ἔσται [there will be joy... more than], 
Lk. xv. 7 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bitm. Gram. $149, 7; 
[B. p. 360 (309)]; Winer, Kühner, al., as above. 4. 
with other particles; a. ἀλλ᾽ 7, see ἀλλά, I. 10 p. 28". 
b. ἢ yap, see yap, I. fin. — c. ἢ καί [cf. W. § 53, 6 note], 
a. or even, or also, (Lat. aut etiam, vel etiam): [Mt. vii. 
10 L'T Tr WHi; ker Ge WIES 2 VT 
11; Ro.ii.15; 1 Co. xvi. 6; 2 Co. i. 13. β. or also (Lat. 
an etiam), (in a disjunctive question): Lk. xii. 41; Ro. 
iv.9. d. ἤπερ, than at all (Lat. quam forte; Germ. 
als etwa), after a compar. [cf. Jelf $ 779 Obs. 5]: Jn. xii. 
43 [L 7 περ, WH mrg. ὑπέρ], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Hom., 
Hes). 6. ἤτοι... ἤ, either indeed [cf. Kühner § 540, 
5]... 0r: Ro. vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19; Hdt. and sqq.). 

ἦ μήν, assuredly, most certainly, full surely, (a particle 
used in asseverations, promises, oaths [cf. W. $53, 7 b.; 
Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 38sq.]) : Heb. vi.14 R G ; see ei, 
III.9. (Sept.; very often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἡγεμονεύω ; (ἡγεμών) ; [fr. Hom. down]; a. to be 
leader, to lead the way. — b. to rule, command: with gen. 
of a province [cf. B. 169 (147)], to be governor of a prov- 
ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2; of a procurator, Lk. 
male 

ἡγεμονία, -as, 7, (ἡγεμών), [Hdt., Thue., Plat., al.], 
chief command, rule, sovereignty: of the reign of a Ro- 
man emperor, Lk. iii. 1; Joseph. antt. 18, 4, 2.* 

ἡγεμών, -dvos, ó, (ἡγέομαι), in class. Grk. a word of 
very various signification: a leader of any kind, a guide, 
ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover- 
eign; in the N. T. spec. 1. a *legatus Caesaris, an 
officer administering a province in the name and with the 
authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov- 
ince: Mt. x. 18; Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 14. 
2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an 
officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor 
and had charge of the imperial revenues; in causes re- 
lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called 
ἐπίτροπος, διοικητής, in prof. auth.). In the smaller 
provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of 
the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of 


f. after | the province; and such was the relation of the procu- 


ἡγέομαι 


rator of Judea to the proconsul of Syria (cf. Krebs, 
Observv. p. 61 sqq.; Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 432 
sqq.; Win. RWB. s. v. Procuratoren; Sieffert in Herzog 
2 s. v. Landptleger; Krenkel in Schenkel iv. 7; [BB. 
DD. s. v. Procurator]); so of Pilate, Felix, Festus: Mt. 
xxvii. 2, 11, 14 sq. 21, 23 [R G L Tr mrg.], 27; xxviii. 
14; Lk.xx. 20; Acts xxiii. 24, 26, 33; xxlv. 1, 10; xxvi. 
30; Πιλᾶτος 6 τῆς Ιουδαίας ἡγεμών, Joseph. antt. 18, 3, 1; 
(Tacit. ann. 15, 44 Christus Tiberio imperitante per 
procuratorem Pontium Pilatum supplicio adfectus 
erat). 3. first, leading, chief: so of a principal town 
as the capital of the region, Mt. ii. 6, where the meaning 
is, ‘Thou art by no means least among the chief cities 
of Judah;’ others less aptly (Bleek also [(where?) ; 
in his (posthumous) Synopt. Erklürung ete. i. 119 
he repudiates this interp. (ascribed by him to Hof 
mann, Weiss. u. Erfüll. ii. 56)]), ‘Thou shalt by no 
means be regarded as least among i. e. by the princes, 
the nobles, of the state.’ The saying is taken fr. Mic. v. 
2 (1), where the Hebr. "35wa3 (which the Sept. give cor- 
rectly, ἐν χιλιάσι) seems to have been read "a5w3 by the 
Evangelist [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 2067." 

ἡγέομαι, -οὔμαι ; pf. ἥγημαι; 1 aor. ἡγησάμην; (fr. ἄγω 
[cf. Curtius p. 6881); dep. mid.; fr. Hom. down; ab 
to lead,i.e. a. to go before;  b. to be a leader; to 
rule, command; to have authority over: in the N. T. 
so only in the pres. ptep. ἡγούμενος, a prince, of regal 
power (Ezek. xliii. 7 for 322; Sir. xvii. 17), Mt. ii. 6; a 
(royal) governor, viceroy, Acts vii. 10; chief, Lk. xxii. 
26 (opp. to 6 διακονῶν) ; leading as respects influence, 
controlling in counsel, €v τισι, among any, Acts xv. 22; 
with gen. of the pers. over whom one rules, so of the 
overseers or leaders of Christian churches: Heb. xiii. 
7, 17, 24, (οἴκου, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; τῶν πατριῶν, 1 Esdr. 
v. 65 (66), 67, (68); τῆς. πόλεως, Judg. ix. 51 Alex.; a 
military leader, 1 Mace. ix. 30; 2 Mace. xiv. 16; used 
also in Grk. writ. of any kind of a leader, chief, com- 
mander, Soph. Phil. 386; often in Polyb.; Diod. 1, 4 and 
72; Leian. Alex. 44; al.); with gen. of the thing, τοῦ λόγου, 
the leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman: Acts 
xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also τοῦ λόγου ἡγεμών 
in Jamblich. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. duco) 
i. 4. to consider, deem, account, think: with two ace., one 
of the obj., the other of the pred., Acts xxvi. 2; Phil. ii. 
3, 6 (on which see ἁρπαγμός, 2 [W. § 44, 3 c.]) ; iii. 7 [cf. 
B. 59 (51); W. 274 (258)]; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1; Heb. 
x.29; xi 11, 96 ; 2 Pet. i. 19; ἢ 19, πὶ 9. 15. "τινὰ 
ὥς τινα, 2 Th. iii. 15 [ef. W. $65, 1a.]; τινὰ ὑπερεκπερισ- 
σῶς, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. v. 13 (περὶ πολλοῦ, 
Hdt. 2, 115; περὶ πλείστου, Thuc. 2, 89) ; w. ace. of the 
thing foll. by ὅταν, Jas. i. 2; ἀναγκαῖον, foll. by an inf., 
2 Co. ix. 5; Phil. ii. 25; δίκαιον, foll. by an inf.. 2 Pet. i. 
13; foll. by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii.8.. [Comp.: &:-, éx- 
δι-, é£-, προτηγέομαι." 

Sys.: δοκέω 1, ἡγέομαι 3, νομίζω 2, οἴομαι: Fy. 
and-vou. denote a belief resting not on one's inner feeling or 
sentiment, but on the due consideration of external grounds, 
the weighing and comparing of facts; Sox. and of., on the 


9 


τι 


276 


" 
ἥκω 


other hand, describe ἃ subjective judgment growing out of 
inclination or a view of facts in their relation to us. jy. 
denotes a more deliberate and careful judgment than vou. ; 
οἴ. ἃ subjective judgment which has feeling rather than 
thought (Box.) for its ground. Cf. Schmidt ch. 17.] 

ἡδέως, adv., (fr. ἡδύς sweet, pleasant), with pleasure, 
gladly: Mk.vi.20; xii. 37; 2 Co. xi. 19. [From Soph., 
Plat. down.]* 

ἤδη, adv., [fr. Hom. down; on deriv. see Vaniéek p. 
745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. everywh. of time, now, al- 
ready, (Lat. jam): Mt. iii. 10; v. 28; xiv. 15; Mk. iv. 37; 
xi.11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 T WH Trtxt., L Tr 
mrg. br.]; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51; xix. 28 (that all things 
were now finished and that nothing further remained 
for him to do or to suffer) ; Acts xxvii. 9; Ro. xiii. 11 
(that it is already time to wake up and indulge no 
longer in sleep); 1 Co. iv. 8, and often; viv... ἤδη, now 
already (Lat. jam nunc): 1 Jn. iv. 3; ἤδη ποτέ, now at 
last, at length now: with fut. Ro. i. 105 [with aor. Phil. 
iv. 10. Sv. see ἄρτι, fin.] 

ἥδιστα (neut. plur. of the superl. ἥδιστος fr. ἡδύς), adv., 
most gladly (cf. ἡδέως) : 2 Co. xii. 9,15. (Soph., Xen., 
Plat., al.) * 

ἡδονή, -ῆς, ἡ. (ἥδομαι), [Simon. 117, Hdt. down], pleas- 
ure: 2 Pet. ii. 13; plur., Lk. viii. 14 (αἱ ἡδοναὶ τ. βίου) ; 
Tit. iii. 3; Jas. iv. 3; by meton. desires for pleasure 
(Grotius, cupiditates rerum voluptariarum), Jas. iv. 1." 

ἡδύτοσμος, -ov, (ἡδύς and ὀσμή), sweet-smelling (Plin. 
jucunde olens); neut. τὸ 58. as subst. garden-mint (i. q. 
μίνθη, Strab. 8, 3, 14 p. 344; "Theophr. hist. plant. 7, 7; 
cf. caus. plant. 6, 22 (20)), a kind of small odoriferous 
herb, with which the Jews used to strew the floors of 
their houses and synagogues; (it was called by them 
nD, see Buztorf, Lex. talm. s. v. p. 1228 [p. 623 ed. 
Fischer]): Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. [BB.DD.]* 

ἦθος, -εος (-ovs), τό, (akin to ἔθος, prob. fr. EQ, whence 
jua ἕζω, [cf. Vaniéek p. 379]); 1. a customary 
abode, dwelling-place, haunt, customary state, (Hom., 
Hes., Hdt., al.). 2. custom, usage, (cf. Germ. Sitzen, 
Sitte) ; plur. τὰ ἤθη morals, character, (Lat. mores): 1 Co. 
xv. 33 fr. Menander; cf. Menand. fragm. ed. Meineke 
p. 75. (Sir. xx. 26 (25); 4 Macc. i. 29; ii. 7, 21.)* 

ἥκω impf. ἧκον (Acts xxviii. 23, where LT Tr WH 
ἦλθον); fut. £o; 1 aor. j£a (Lk. xiii. 35 RG; Rey. ii. 
25; iii. 9 Rec.) ; pf. ἧκα (often in Sept., as Gen. xlii. 7, 
9; xlv. 16; [xlvii. 4]; Josh. ix. 12 (7); Job xvi. 22, 
ete.; in the N. T. once, Mk. viii. 3 R*L T Trtxt., see 
WH. App. p. 169; the older and more elegant writ. 
[ Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc., al.] use only the pres. impf. and 
fut.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 743 sq.; Bttm. Aust. Spr. ii. 
205; [Veitch s. v.]; W. 87 (83); [B. 59 (51)]) ; Sept. 
for &i3; to have come, have arrived, be present, [W. 274 
(258); B. 203 (176)]; hence impf. with force of plupf. 
(cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1136; Krüger $ 53, 1, 4) : absol. of 
persons, Mt. xxiv. 50; Mk. viii. 3; Lk. xii. 46; xv..27; 
Jn. viii. 42; Heb. x. 7, 9, 37; 1Jn. v. 20; Rev. ii. 25; 
iii. 9; xv.4; foll. by ἀπό with gen. of place, Mt. viii. 11; 

| Lk. xiii. 29; by éx with gen. of place, Ro. xi. 26; with 


gui 


addition of εἰς w. acc. of place, Jn. iv. 47; μακρόθεν, Mk. 
viii. 3; πρός τινα, Acts xxviii. 23 Rec. ; metaph. to come 
to one i. 6. seek an intimacy with one, become his fol- 
lower: Jn. vi. 37; ἐπί τινα, to come upon one (unexpect- 
edly), Rey. iii. 3. of time and events: absol., Mt. xxiv. 
14; Jn. ἢ. 4: 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xviii. 8; éos ἂν ἥξη [L 
T WH Tr in br. £e; see above and D. 291 (199) ] (sc. 
ὁ καιρός). ὅτε εἴπητε; Lk. xiii. 35; ἐπί τινα, metaph. to 
come upon one, of things to be endured (as evils, ealami- 
tous times): Mt. xxiii. 36; Lk. xix.43. [Comp.: 
καθ-ήκω.} * 

ἠλί (L ἡλί, T ἡλεί [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. et 
εἴ on the breathing cf. ΤᾺ, Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. 


$408; WH ἐλωΐ]), a Hebr. word, "ow, my God: Mt. 


xxvii. 46. [Cf. ἐλωξ, and the ref. there.] * 

*HAC (R* "HA£ [on the breathing in codd. see 7f. 
Proleg. p. 107], T Tr WH “Hiei [see WH. App. p. 155, 
and s. v. et, «]), indecl, Heli, the father of Joseph, the 
husband of Mary: Lk. iii. 23.* 

Ἡλίας ([so RG; WIL Ἠλείας cf. WH. App. p. 
155; Tf. Proles. p. 84 and see εἰς ε, but] L Tr Ἡλίας, 
TTdf. *HAeías, [on the breathing in codd. see Td/: Proleg. 
p.107; WH. Intr. $ 408; current edd. are not uni- 
form]), του [B. 17 (16), 8; but once (viz. Lk. i. 17 T Tr 
mrg. WH) τ 6, (7298 or 37998 i. e. either ‘strength of 
Jehoyah’ or ‘my God is Jehovah’), Elijah, a prophet 
born at Thisbe [but see B. D. s. v., also s. v. Tishbite ], the 
unflinching champion of the deseen in the reigns of 
the idolatrous kings Ahab and Ahaziah. He was taken 
up to heaven without dying, whence the Jews expected 
he would return just before the advent of the Messiah, 
whom he would prepare the minds of the Israelites to 
receive (1 K. xvii —xix.; 2 K. ii. 6 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 12; 
Mal. iv. 4 (iii. 22); Sir. xlviii. 1, 4, 12 [cf. Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, App. viii.]) : Mt. xi. 14; xvi. 14; 
xvii. 3 sq. 10-12; xxvii. 47, 49; Mk. vi. 15; viii. 28; ix. 
4 sq. 11-13; xv. 35 sq.; Lk. i. 17; iv. 25 sq.; ix. 8, 19, 30, 
33,54 [R GL]; Jn.i. 21,25; Jas. v.17; ἐν Ἡλίᾳ, in the 
narrative concerning Elijah, Ro. xi. 2 [see ἐν, I. 1 d. ].* 

ἡλικία, -as, 7, (ἧλιξ mature, of full age, Hom. Od. 18, 
373 [al. of the same age; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; 
Pape, Lex. s. v.]) ; fr. Hom. down; 
life; a. univ.: Mt.vi.27; Lk. xii. 25, [in these pass. 
‘term or length of life’: but others refer them to 2 
below; see Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. p. 4; Jas. Mori- 
son, Com. on Mt. l. c.] ef. πῆχυς, and De Wette, Meyer, 
Bleek on Mt. 1. c.; παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, beyond the proper 
stage of life [ A. V. past age], Heb. xi. 11 (2 Macc. iv. 
40; 4 Maec. v. 4). b. adult age, maturity: ἔχειν Arc 
κίαν [A. V. to be of age], Jn. ix. 21, 23. — c. suitable age 
for anything; with gen. of the thing for which it is fit: 
Tov γάμου, Dem.; τοῦ ἤδη φρονεῖν, Plat. Eryx. p. 396 b.; 
metaph. of an attained state of mind fit for a thing: 
Tov πληρώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the age in which we are 
fitted to receive the fulness (see πλήρωμα, 1) of Christ, 
Eph. iv. 13 [al. refer this to 2; cf. Ellic. in loc. ]. 2. 
stature (Dem., Plut, al): τῇ ἡλικίᾳ μικρός, Lk. xix. 3; 
προκύπτειν ἡλικίᾳ, i. e. in height and comeliness of stature 


1. age, time of 


217 . ἡμέρα 


(Bengel, justam proceritatem nactus est et decoram), Lk. 
ii. 52; cf. Meyer, Bleek, ad loc.* 

ἡλίκος, -η, -ov, (ἧλιξ, see ἡλικία), prop. as old as, as tall 
as; univ. (Lat. quantus): how great, Col. ii. 1; Jas. iii. 
5 [cf. B. 253 (217) ] ; how small (Lcian. Hermot. 5), ἡλίκον 
πῦρ, Jas. iii. 5 L'T Tr WH [B. l. c.].* 

ἥλιος, του, 6 [often anarthrous, W. 120 (114); B. 89 
(78) ], (ἕλη [root us to burn, cf. Curtius $ 612]); Sept. for 
wow; the sun: Mt. v. 45; xiii. 43; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. iv. 
40; xxi. 25; Acts xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. i. 16, etc. 
i. q. the rays of the sun, Rev. vii. 16; i. q. the light of 
day: μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον, of a blind man, Acts xiii. 11. 

ἦλος, -ov, 6, a nail: Jn. xx. 25. [(From Hom. on.)]* 

ἡμεῖς, see ἐγώ. 

ἡμέρα, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἥμερος, -ov, prop. ἡμέρα ὥρα the mild 
time, c£. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.; 
Vanicek p. 943]); Hebr. py; day; used 1. of the 
natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sun- 
set, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a. 
prop. ἡμέρας, by day, in the daytime, [cf. colloq. Eng. 
of a day; W.§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 25; ἡμέ- 
pas x. νυκτός, day and cs [cf. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob. 
Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v. 5; Lk. 
xviii. 7; Actsix.24; 1 Th.ii.9; iii.10; [2 Th. ii. 8L 
txt. T Tr WH]; 1 Tim. y. 5; 2 Tim.i.3; Rev. iv. 8; vii. 
15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; xx.10; ἡμέρας μέσης, at midday, 
Acts xxvi. 13; νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν [ W. 230 (216) ; B. $ 131, 
11] Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx.31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyper- 
bolically i. q. without intermission, λατρεύειν, Lk. ii. 37; 
Acts xxvi 7; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Lk. ii. 44 
(Gen. xxxi. 23 [μιᾶς ἡμέρας ὁδόν, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 2, 9; 
cf. W. 188 (177); B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Day's Journey ]) ; 
τὰς ἡμέρας, acc. of time [W. and B. as above], during the 
days, Lk. xxi. 37; ἐκείνην τ. ἡμέραν, In. i. 39 (40); πᾶσαν 
ἡμέραν, daily, Acts v. 42; ἐκ δηναρίου τὴν ἡμέραν. so some- 
times we say, for a shilling the day, Mt. xx. 2; δώδεκά 
εἰσιν ὧραι τῆς ἡμέρας, Jn. xi. 9; to the number of days 
are added as many nights, Mt. iv. vio 
ἡμέρα, day dawns, it grows light. Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii. 
66; Actsxii. 18; xvi 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39, 
(Xen. an. 2, 2, 13; 7, 2, 34) ; περιπατεῖν ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ, Jn. 
xi. 9; ἡ ἡμέρα φαίνει, Rev. viii. 12; ἡ ἡμέρα κλίνει, the day 
declines, it is towards evening, Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29. b. 
metaph. the ‘day’ is regarded as the time for abstaining 
from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are 
perpetrated at night and in darkness: 1 Th. v. 5, 8; 
hence ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος (see αἰών, 3) is likened to the night, 
αἰὼν μέλλων to day, and Christians are admonished to 
live decorously as though it were light, i. e. as if 6 aiàv 
ὁ μέλλων were already come, Ro. xiii. 12 sq. ἕως ἡμέρα 
ἐστίν while it is day, i. e. while life gives one an oppor- 
tunity to work, Jn. ix. 4. οὗ the light of knowledge, 
2 Pet. i. 19. 2. of the civil day, or the space of 
twenty-four hours (thus including the night): Mt. vi. 34; 
Mk. vi. 21; Lk. xiii. 14, ete.; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv. 
13; to hours. months, years, Rev. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10; 
ἡ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφή; the revelling of a day, i. e. ephemeral, 
very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above]; 


xii. 40; γίνεται 


ἡμέρα 


ἑπτάκις τῆς Hw. seven times in the (space of a) day, Lk. 
xvii. 4; the dat. ἡμέρᾳ of the day on (in) which [cf. W. 
§ 31,9; B. § 133 (26)]: as τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, Mt. xvi. 21; Mk. 
ix. 31 [Rec.]; Lk. xvii. 29 sq.; Acts ii. 41, ete.; ἡμέρᾳ x. 
ἡμέρᾳ, day by day, every day, 2 Co. iv. 16 (after the 
IIebr. pi DY Esth. iii. 4, where Sept. καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέ- 
pav, and py oy Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. ἡμέραν 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν : [cf. W. 463 (432)]) ; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας (see 
ἐκ, IV. 2), 2 Pet. ii. 8; as an ace. of time [W. 230 (215 
sq.); B. $ 131, 11]: ὅλην τ. ἡμέραν, Ro. viii. 36; x. 21; 
μίαν ἡμέραν, Acts xxi. 7; and in the plur., Jn. ii. 12; iv. 
40; xi. 6; Actsix. 19; x.48; xvi. 12; xx. 6; xxi.4, 10; 
xxv. 6,14; xxviii. 7, I2 [L dat.], 14; Gal.i.18; Rev. xi. 
3,9. joined with Prepositions: ἀπό with gen. from 
... forth, from ... on, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi. 53; Acts x. 
30; xx. 18; Phil.i.5; ἄχρι w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv. 
885 Dk: 1-205 xvii. 97. "Acts 3:25 [22 ΠΟΙ ΤῈ 0) 
xxiii 1; xxvi 22; ἄχρι πέντε ἡμερῶν, until five days had 
passed, i. e. after five days, Acts xx. 6; μέχρι w. gen. until, 
Mt. xxviii. 15 [L Tr, WH in br.]; ἕως w. gen. until, Mt. 
xxvii. 64; Acts i. 22 [Ὁ ἄχρι]; Ro. xi. 8; διά w. gen., see 
διά, A. IT. ; πρό w. gen. before, Jn. xii. 1 (on which see πρό, 
b.); ἐν w. dat. sing., Mt. xxiv. 50; Lk. i. 59; Jn. v.9; 1 Co. 
x.8[L' T Tr WH txt. om. ev]; Heb. iv. 4, ete.; ἐν w. dat. 
plur., Mt. xxvii.40; Mk. xv. 29 [L T Trom. WH br. ἐν]; 
Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. ἐν], 20, etc. ; eis, unto, (against), Jn. 
xii. 7; Rev. ix. 15; ἐπί w. acc. for, (Germ. auf... hin), 
Acts xiii. 31 (for many days successively) ; xvi. 18; xxvii. 
20; Heb. xi. 30; καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily [ W. 401 (374 sq.)], 
Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 49; Lk.xvi.19; xxii. 53; Acts 
li. 46 sq.; iii. 2; xvi. 5; xix. 9; 1 Co. xv. 31; 2 Co. xi: 
28; Heb. vii. 27; x. 11; also τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, Lk. xi. 3; 
xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [L T Tr txt. om. WEH br. τὸ], (Polyb. 
4, 18, 2; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 734; [Jelf $456]; Bnhdy. p. 
329; B. 96 (84)); καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, every day, Heb. 
ii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2,12); also κατὰ πᾶσαν np. Acts 
xvii.17; μετά, afler, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 63; Mk. 
vili. 31; Lk.i. 24; Jn.iv.43; xx. 26; Actsi.5; xv. 36, 
ete. οὐ πλείους εἰσὶν ἐμοὶ ἡμέραι ἀφ᾽ ἧς. sc. ἡμέρας, Acts 
xxiv. 11. A specification of the number of days is 
thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were 
adverbially and without any grammatical connection, 
(ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 310 sq.; W. 516 (481) and § 62, 
2; [B. 139 (122) ]) : ἤδη ἡμέραι (Rec. ἡμέρας, by correc- 
tion) τρεῖς, Mt.xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ὡσεὶ ἡμέραι ὀκτώ, Lk. 
ix. 28. ἡμερῶν διαγενομένων τινῶν, certain days having 
intervened, Acts xxv. 13. ἡμέρα and ἡμέραι are used w. 
the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity 
usually celebrated on a fixed day: τῶν ἀζύμων, Acts xii. 
3: τῆς πεντεκοστῆς, Actsii.1; xx. 16; τοῦ σαββάτου, 
Lk. xiii. 14, 16; Jn. xix. 31 ; καὶ κυριακὴ ἡμέρα, the Lord's 
day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, Sun- 
day therefore, Rev. i. 10; the foll. phrases also have 
reference to sacred or festival days: κρίνειν ἡμέραν παρ᾽ 
ἡμέραν. to exalt one day above another, and κρίνειν πᾶσαν 
ἡμέραν. to esteem every day sacred, Ro. xiv. 5; φρονεῖν 
τὴν ἡμέραν, to regard a particular day that is selected for 
religious services, Ro. xiv. 6; ἡμέρας παρατηρεῖσθαι, to 


278 








ἡ , 
NEPA 
observe days, Gal. iv. 10. After the Hebr. usage, which 
in reference to a definite period of time now elapsed 
speaks of a certain number of days as fulfilled or 
completed (see Gesenius s. v. 852), we have the 
phrases ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας, the days 
spent in priestly service, Lk. i. 23 (when he had been 
employed in sacred duties for the appointed time); τοῦ 
περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν, for him to be cireumcised, Lk. ii. 21; 
τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ αὐτῶν, ib. 22; συντελεσθεισῶν ἡμερῶν, Lk. 
iv. 2; τελειωσάντων τὰς ἡμέρας, when they had spent 
there the time appointed, Lk. ii. 43; ἐν τῷ συμπληροῦ- 
σθαι τὰς Hu. τῆς ἀναλήψεως αὐτοῦ, when the number of 
days was now being completed which the reception of 
Jesus into heaven required, i. e. before which that re- 
ception could not occur, Lk. ix. 51; ἡ ἐκπλήρωσις τῶν 
ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ, the fulfilment of the days required 
for the purification, Acts xxi. 26; συντελοῦνται al ἡμέραι, 
ib. 27; ἐν τῷ συμπληροῦσθαι τ. ἡμέραν τῆς πεντεκοστῆς. 
when the measure of time needed for the day of Pente- 
cost was being completed, i. e. on the very day of Pen- 
tecost, Acts ii. 1. As in some of the exx. just adduced 
ἡμέρα is joined to the gen. of a thing to be done or to 
happen on a certain day, so also in yp. τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ, 
Jn. xii. 7; dvaüe(feos, Lk. i. 80. with gen. of pers. ἐν 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ cov [but LT Tr WH om. cov] in the day favor- 
able for thee, the day on which salvation is offered thee 
and ean be obtained, Lk. xix. 42 (Polyb. 18, 5, 8 μὴ, 
παρῇς τὸν καιρόν... σὴ νῦν ἐστιν ἡμέρα, σὸς ὁ καιρός; 
* meus dies est, tempore aecepto utimur" Sen. Med. 
1017). 3. of the last day of the present age (see 
αἰών, 3), the day in which Christ will return from heaven, 
raise the dead, hold the final judgment, and perfect his 
kingdom, the foll. expressions are used : ἡ ἡμέρα, simply, 
Ro. xiii. 12; Heb. x. 25, cf. 1 Th. v. 4; (ἡ) ἡμέρα τοῦ 
κυρίου, Χριστοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, 
Lk. xvii. 24 RG T Tr WH mrg.; 1 Co. 1.8; ν. 5; 2 Co. 
j. 14; Phil. i. 6, 10; 1 Th. v. 2; 2 Th. 1i. 2; 2 Pet. iii. 105 7 
ἡμέρα κυρίου ἡ μεγάλη, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)); 
ἡμέμα ἧ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται, Lk. xvii. 305 ἡ 
ἡμέρα τ. θεοῦ, 2 Pet. iii. 12; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη ἡ μεγάλη τοῦ 
παντοκράτορος, Rey. xvi. 14, (even in the prophecies of 
the O.T. the day of Jehovah is spoken of, in which Jehovah 
will exeeute terrible judgment upon his adversaries, as 
Joel i. 15; ii. 1,115 Is. ii. 12; xiii. 6, 9; Am. v. 18,20; 
Jer. xxvi. 10 (xlvi. 10); Ezek. xiii. 5; xxx. 2sqq.; Ob. 
15; Zeph. i. 7 sqq.; Mal. iii. 17) ; ἡ ἡμ- ἐκείνη and ἐκείνη 
ἢ ἥμ., Mt. vii. 22; Lk. vi. 23; x.12; xxi. 34; 2 Th.i. 10; 
2 Tim. i. 12,18; iv. 8; ἡ ἐσχάτη ἡμ.» Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; 
xi. 24; xii.48; yu. ἀπολυτρώσεως, Eph. iv. 30; ἐπισκοπῆς 
(see ἐπισκοπή, b.), 1 Pet. ii. 12; κρίσεως, Mt. x. 15; xi. 
22, 24; xii. 36; Mk. vi. 11 RLbr.; 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7, cf. 
Acts xvii. 315; τῆς κρίσεως, 1 Jn. iv. 17; ὀργῆς x. ἀποκα- 
λύψεως δικαιοκρισίας 7. θεοῦ, Ro. ii. 5 (Opi-Dy, Ezek. 
xxii. 245 TMA OY, Zeph. ii. 3 sq.; [m3y-bv, Prov. 
xi.4: Zeph. i.15,18,01c.]); ἡ ἡμ. ἡ μεγάλη τῆς ὀργῆς 
αὐτοῦ, Rev. vi. 17; ju. σφαγῆς, of slaughter (of the 
wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(Jer. xii. 8, ete.)]. Paul, in allusion 
to the phrase ἡμέρα κυρίου, uses the expression ἀνθρωπίνη 


ἡμέτερος 


ἡμέρα for a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of 
trial [A. V. man’s judgment] (cf. the Germ. Landtag, 
Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 3. 4. By a Hebraistie usage 
(though one not entirely unknown to Grk. writ.; cf. 
Soph. Aj. 131, 623; Eur. Ion 720) it is used of tme in 
general, (as the Lat. dies is sometimes): Jn. xiv. 20; 
xvi. 23, 26; Heb. viii. 9 [cf. B. 316 (271); W. 571 
(531) ]; τὴν ἐμὴν ἡμέραν, the time when I should appear 
among men as Messiah, Jn. viii. 56; ἐν τῇ zu. τῇ πονηρᾷ, 
in the time of troubles and assaults with which demons 
try Christians, Eph. vi. 13; 7. σωτηρίας, the time when 
any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2; eis ἡμέραν αἰῶνος, 
for all time, forever (see αἰών, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 18; much 


oftener in the plur.: ἡμέραι πονηραί, Eph. v. 16: ἀφ᾽ zue- | 


ρῶν ἀρχαίων, Acts xv. 7; ai πρότερον ny. Heb. x. 32; 
πᾶσας τὰς ἡμέρας, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20 
(τι -Ὁ3, Deut. iv. 40; v. 26 (29), and very often; ἤματα 
πάντα, Hom. Il. 8, 539; 12, 133; 13, 826, etc.) ; ai ἔσχα- 
ται Hu. (see ἔσχατος, 1 sub fin.), Actsii. 17; 2 Tim. iii. 1; 
Jas. v. 3; ai jp. αὗται, the present time, Acts iii. 24; the 
time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, etc. ; 
ἐν ταῖς Hp. ἐκείναις (see ἐκεῖνος, 2 b. p. 195*) ; πρὸ τούτων 
τῶν ἡμερῶν, Acts v. 36; xxi.38; πρὸς ὀλίγας Hp. for a 
short time, Heb. xii. 10; ἐλεύσονται ἡμ. ὅταν etc., Mt. ix. 
15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk. v. 35; ὅτε ete. Lk. xvii. 22; ἥξουσιν 
ἡμ. ἐπὶ σέ, καί Toll. by a fut. Lk. xix. 43; ἔρχονται 7u., kat 
foll. by fut. Heb. viii. 8; ἐλεύσονται or ἔρχονται np., ἐν ais 
ete., Lk. xxi. 6; xxiii. 29. with a gen. of the thing done 
or to happen: τῆς ἀπογραφῆς, Acts v. 37; τῆς φωνῆς, 
Rev. x. 7; τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ. of his earthly life, Heb. v. 
7. ai yp. with the gen. of a pers., one’s time, one's days, 
i. e. in which he lived, or held office: Mt. ii. 1; xi. 12; 
xxiii.30; xxiv. 37; Lk. i. 5; iv. 25; xvii. 26,28; Acts 
vii. 45; xiii. 41; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xxvi. 1; 1 S. xvii. 
10; 29 S.xxl 1; IR. x21: Esth. i. 1; Sir. xliv. 7; xlvi. 
7; Tob.i.2; 1 Mace. xiv. 36, etc.) ; αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ υἱοῦ 
τοῦ dvÓp. the time immediately preceding the return of 
Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. xvii. 26; μίαν τῶν zu. τοῦ 
vi. τ. avOp. a single day of that most blessed future time 
when, all hostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign, 
Lk. xvii. 22. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists 
who imitate them measure the duration and length also 
of human life by the number of days: πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας 
{Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH dat.] τῆς ζωῆς [G LT Tr WH om.] 
ἡμῶν, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq.; 
Judith x. 3; Tob. i. 2 (3); Sir. xxii. 12; xxx. 32 (24); 
1 Mace. ix. 71); προβεβηκὼς ἐν rais ἡμέραις αὐτοῦ, far 
advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36 (p'^3 N3, [Sept. 
mpoB. ἡμερῶν or ἡμέραις, Gen. xviii. 11; xxiv. 1; Josh. 
xiii. 1; [xxiii. 1; 1 K. i. 1; see προβαίνω, fin:]) ; ἀρχὴ 
ἡμερῶν, beginning of life, Heb. vii. 3 (ai ἔσχαται ἡμέραι 
τινός, one’s last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. c. 1); 
“ἡμέραι ἀγαθαί, 1 Pet. iii. 10. 

Tjpérepos, -épa, -epov, (ἡμεῖς), possess. pron. of the 1 
pers. plur., [fr. Hom. down], our : with a subst., Acts ii. 
11; xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi.5; Ro. xv. 4; [1. Co. xv. 81 
Rec. "-]; 2 Tim. iv. 15; 1 Jn. ji. 3; ii. 2; of ἡμέτεροι, 
substantively, ‘our people,’ (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14. 





TIPE HOS 


[Neut. τὸ ἡμέτερον, substantively: Lk. xvi. 12 WH txt. 
Cf. W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. § 127, 19 sqq.]* 

ἡ μήν, see 7. 

ἡμιθανής, -és, (fr. jue half, and θνήσκω, 2 aor. €bavov), 
half dead: Lk. x. 30. ([Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62; 
Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Macc. iv. 11]; 
als)i* 

ἥμισυς, -ea, -v; gen. ἡμίσους (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex. 
xxv. 9; ete.], for the uncontr. form ἡμίσεος which is more 
com. in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Hdt. 
down ]); neut. plur. ἡμίση, Lk. xix. 8 RG, a form in use 
from Theophr. down, for the earlier ἡμίσεα adopted by 
Lehm. (cf. Passow [also L. and S.] s. v.; W. § 9, 2d.; 
ἡμίσεια in T Tr [ἡμίσια WH] seems due to a corruption of 
the copyists, see Steph. Thes. iv. p. 1705 Bttm. Ausf. Spr. 
i. p. 248; Alex. Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 194 
sq.; [N. T. Gram. 14 (13); Tf. Proleg. p. 118; but esp. 
WH. App. p. 158]); Sept. for myn, much oftener 
"*nm; half; it takes the gender and number of the 
annexed substantive (where τὸ ἥμισυ might have been 
expected): rà ἡμίση τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk. 
writ. say 6 ἥμισυς ToU βίου, of ἡμίσεις τῶν ἱππέων, see 
Passow s. v.; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2; Kühner § 405, 5c.]; 
τὰς ἡμίσεις τῶν δυνάμεων, 1 Mace. iii. 34, 37) ; neut. τὸ 
ἥμισυ, substantively, the half; without the art. a half: 
ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου (Esth. v. 3; vii. 2), Mk. vi. 


| 23; ἥμισυ καιροῦ, Rev. xii. 14; as in class. Grk., καὶ 


ἥμισυ is added to cardinal numbers even where they are 
connected with masc. and fem. substantives, as τρεῖς 
ἡμέρας καὶ ἥμισυ, three days and a half, Rev. xi. 9, 11, 
(ὀψωνεῖν δυοῖν δραχμῶν καὶ ἡμίσους, Ath. ὃ p. 274 c. ; δύο 
or ἑνὸς πήχεων καὶ ἡμίσους, Ex. xxv. 16; xxvi. 16; 
xxxviii. 1 [Alex.]); with καὶ omitted: Rev. xi. 9 Tdf. 
ed. 7 (μυριάδων ἑπτὰ ἡμίσους, Plut. Mar. 34).* 

ἡμιώριον and (1, Τ Tr WH) ἡμίωρον (cf. Kühner § 185, 
6, 2; [Jelf $ 165, 6, 1 a.]), του, τό, (fr. ἥμι and ὥρα, cf. τὸ 
ἡμικοτύλιον, ἡμιμοίριον, ἡμικόσμιον, ἡμιχοινίκιον, ἡμιωβόλιον, 
etc.), half an hour : Rev. viii. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133; Geop.; 
al. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]-) * 

ἡνίκα, a rel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom. down], at which 
lime; when: fol. by the indie. pres, of a thing that 
actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 RG; foll. by av with 
subj. pres., whensoever: ibid. L T Tr WH; foll. by av 
and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., at 
length when (whensoever it shall have ete.) : 2 Co. iii. 16; 
Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr. 
see W. 296 (278) sq.; 308 (289); B. § 139, 33.]* 

ἤπερ, see jj, 4 d. 

amos, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently 
derived fr. ἔπος, εἰπεῖν, so that it prop. means affable [so 
Etym. Magn. 434, 20; but cf. Vanicek p. 32]); fr. Hom. 
down; mild, gentle: 1 ΤῊ. ii. 7 (where L WH νήπιος, q. v. 
fin.) ; πρός τινα, 2 Tim. ii. 24.* 

“Hp, Lehm. “Hp [on the breathing in codd. see 7f. 
Proleg. p. 107], (33! watchful, fr. 139 to be awake), Er, 
one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.* 

ἤρεμος, -ov, quiet, tranquil: ἤρεμον x. ἡσύχιον βίον, 1 
Tim.ii.2. (Leian.trag.207; Eustath., Hesych.; com- 


“Ἡρώδης 


parat. ἠρεμέστερος, fr. an unused ἠρεμής, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 
63; more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. is the adv. 
ἠρέμα. [Cf. W.$11 fin. ; B. 28 (24).])* . 

Ἡρώδης, -ου, 6, (equiv. to Ηρωΐδης, sprung from a hero; 
hence the Etym. Magn. pp. 165, 43; 437, 56 directs it to 
be written Ἡρῴδης [so WI], as it is found also in certain 
inscriptions [cf. Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 9; WH. Intr. 
§ 410; Tf. Proleg. 109; Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]), 
Herod, the name of a royal family that flourished among 
the Jews in the time of Jesus and the apostles. In the 
N. T. are mentioned, 1. the one who gave the family 
its name, /Zerod surnamed the Great, a son of Antipater 
of Idum:a. Appointed king of Juda n. c. 40 by the 
Roman senate at the suggestion of Antony and with the 
consent of Octavian, he at length overcame the great 
opposition which the country made to him and took 
possession of the kingdom n. €. 37 ; and, after the battle 
of Actium, he was confirmed in it by Octavian, whose 
favor he ever after enjoyed. Ile was brave and skilled 
in war, learned and sagacious; but also extremely sus- 
picious and eruel. Hence he destroyed the entire royal 
family of the Hasmonzans, put to death many of the 
Jews that opposed his government, and proceeded to 
kill even his dearly beloved wife Mariamne of the Has- 
mon:ean line and the two sons she had borne him. By 
these acts of bloodshed, and especially by his love and 
imitation of Roman eustoms and institutions and by the 
burdensome taxes imposed upon his subjects, he so 
alienated the Jews that he was unable to regain their favor 
by his splendid restoration of the temple and other acts 
of munificence. He died in the 70th year of his age, the 
37th of his reign, the 4th before the Dionysian era. Cf. 
Joseph. antt. 14, 14, 4; 15, 6, 7; 7,4; 8, 1; 16, 5,4; 
11,6, etc. In his closing years John the Baptist and 
Christ were born, Mt.ii.1; Lk. i. 5; Matthew narrates 
in ch. ii. (cf. Macrob. sat. 2, 4) that he commanded the 
male children in Bethlehem from two years old and under 
to be slain. Cf. especially Keim in Schenkel iii. 27 
sqq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. $ 15, and the books 
there mentioned. 2. Herod surnamed Antipas, son 
of Herod the Great and Malthace, a Samaritan woman. 
After the death of his father he was appointed by the 
Romans tetrach of Galilee and Perma. His first wife 
was a daughter of Aretas, king of Arabia; but he sub- 
sequently repudiated her and took to himself Herodias, 
the wife of his brother Herod (see Φίλιππος, 1) ; and in 
consequence Aretas, his father-in-law, made war against 
him and conquered him. He cast John the Baptist into 
prison because John had rebuked him for this unlaw- 
ful connection ; and afterwards, at the instigation of 
Herodias, he ordered him to be beheaded. Induced by 
her, too, he went to Rome to obtain from the emperor 
the title of king. But in consequence of accusations 
brought against him by Herod Agrippa I., Caligula 
banished him (A.D. 39) to Lugdunum in Gaul, where he 
seems to have died. [On the statement of Joseph. (b. 
j- 2, 9, 6) that he died in Spain see the conjecture in 
B. D. s. v. Herodias.] He was light-minded, sensual, 


280 





Ἡρωδιάς. 


vicious, (Joseph. antt. 17, 1,3; 8,1; 11, 4; 18,5,1; 7, 
lsq.; b.j. 2,9, 6). In the N. T. he is mentioned by 
the simple name of /erod in Mt. xiv. 1, 3, 6; Mk. vi. 
16-18, 20-22; viii. 15; Lk. iii. 1, 19; viii. 3; ix. 7, 9; 
xiii. 31; xxiii. 7 sq. 11 sq. 15; Actsiv. 27; xiii. 1; once, 
Mk. vi. 14, he is called βασιλεύς, either improperly, or 
in the sense of royal lineage (see βασιλεύς). Cf. 
Keim 1. c. p. 42 sqq.; Schiirer l. c. p. 232 sqq. 3. 
Herod Agrippa I. (who is called by Luke simply Herod, 
by Josephus everywhere Agrippa), son of Aristobulus 
apd Berenice, and grandson of Herod the Great. After 
various changes of fortune, he gained the favor of the 
emperors Caligula and Claudius to such a degree that 
he gradually obtained the government of all Palestine, 
with the title of king. He died at Cesarea, A.D. 44, 
at the age of 54, in the seventh [or 4th, reckoning from 
the extension of his dominions by Claudius] year of his 
reign (Joseph. antt. 17, 1, 25 18, 6; 19, 4,5; 6,1; 7, 
3; b. j. 2, 11, 6), just after having ordered James the 
apostle, son of Zebedee, to be slain, and Peter to be cast 
into prison: Acts xii. 1, 6, 11, 19-21. Cf. Keim 1. c. p. 
49 sqq.; Schürer l.c. p. 290 sqq.; [Farrar, St. Paul, 
vol. ii. Excurs. vi.]. 4. (Herod) Agrippa II., son of 
the preceding. When his father died he was a youth of 
seventeen. In A.D. 48 he received from Claudius Cesar 
the government of Chaleis, with the right of appointing 
the Jewish high-priests, together with the care and over- 
sight of the temple at Jerusalem. Four years later 
Claudius took from him Chalcis and gave him instead a 
larger dominion, viz. Batanwa, Trachonitis, and Gaul- 
anitis, with the title of king. ‘To these regions Nero, in 
A.D. 53, added Tiberias and Tarichaeae and the Perzan 
Julias, with fourteen neighboring villages. Cf. Joseph. 
antt. 19, 9, 1 sq-; 20; 1 9. 5,25 7, 15:8; 45 bz 9. ἃ, 12, 
land 8. In the N. T. he is mentioned in Acts xxv. 13, 
22-26; xxvi 1 sq. (7), 19, 27 sq. 32. In the Jewish 
war, although he strove in vain to restrain the fury of 
the seditious and bellicose populace, he did not desert 
the Roman side. After the fall of Jerusalem, he was 
vested with praetorian rank and kept the kingdom en- 
tire until his death, which took place in the third year 
of the emperor Trajan, [the 73d of his life, and 52nd of 
his reign]. He was the last representative of the IIe- 
rodian dynasty. Cf. Keim l. e. p. 56 sqq.; Schiirer 1. c. 
p.315sqq. [Less complete accounts of the family may 
be found in BB.DD.; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 s. v.; 
an extended narrative in Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 
vol. i. Abschn. v. Cf. also Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, bk. ii. ch. ii. and App. iv.] 

Ἡρωδιανοί [WII *Hpo8., see Ηρώδης and I, «; cf. W. 
816, 2 y.], τῶν, of, Herodians, i. e. Herod's partisans (ot 
rà Ἡρώδου φρονοῦντες, Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 10): Mt. 
xxii. 16; Mk. iii. 6; xii. 13. Cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz. 
iii. 130 sqq. [ Eng. trans. v. p. 156 sq.], and in Schenkel 
iii. 65 sqq.; [ef. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim, Index s. v.].* 

Ἥρωδιάς [WH Ἡρῳδιάς, sce 'Hpórns and I, c], -ddos, ἡ, 
Herodias, daughter of Aristobulus and granddaughter 
of Herod the Great. She was first married to Herod 


'Hpo8íov 


[Philip (see Φίλιππος, 1)], son of Herod the Great, a 
man in private life; but she afterwards formed an un- 
lawful union with Herod Antipas, whom she induced 
not only to slay John the Baptist but also to make the 
journey to Rome which ruined him; at last she followed 
him into exile in Gaul (see ἫἩρώδης, 2): Mt. xiv. 3, 6; 
Mk. vi. 17, 19, 22; Lk. iii. 19.* 

Ἡρωδίων [WH *Hpo8., see *Hpóórs and I, t], -wvos, 6, 
Herodion, a certain Christian, [ Paul's * kinsman " (see 
ovyyevns)]: Ro. xvi. 11.* 

Ἡσαΐας (Lchm. ’Ho. [cf. Τὰ Proleg. p. 107; WH 
"Haaías, see I, εἾ), του [B. 17 (16), 8], ὁ, (so Sept. for 
Yu, Jehovah's help, fr. yw. and m), Isaiah (Vulg. 
Isaias, in the Fathers also Esaias), a celebrated Hebrew 
prophet, who prophesied in the reigns of Uzziah, Jo- 
tham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah: Mt. iii. 3; iv. 14; viii. 17; 
xii. 17; xiii. 14; (xiii. 35 ace. to the reading of cod. 
Sin. and other authorities, rightly approved of by Bleek 
[Hort (as below), al.], and received into the text by Tdf. 
[noted in mrg. by WH, see their App. ad loc.; per con- 
tra cf. Meyer or Ellicott (i. e. Plumptre in N. T. Com.) ad 
loc]; xv. 7; Mk.vii.6; Lk. iii. 4; iv. 17; Jn. i. 23; 
xii. 38 sq. 41; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. ix. 27,29; x. 16, 20; 
xv. 12; i. q. the book of the prophecies of Isaiah, Acts 
viii. 28, 30; ἐν (τῷ) “Hoag, Mk. i. 2G L txt. T Tr WH.* 

Ἠσαῦ [‘Ho. Ro. ix. 13 R* Tr; Heb. xii. 16 R*; Heb. 
xi. 20 Re], ὁ, (wy i. e. hairy [Gen. xxv. 25; Joseph. 
antt. 1, 18, 1]), indecl., Esau, the firstborn son of Isaac : 
Rojix. 135) Hebo πὶ 205 xq. 6 

ἡσσάομαι, see ἡττάω and s. v. 5, a, s. 

[ἥσσων, see ἥττων. 

ἡσυχάζω; 1 aor. ἡσύχασα; (ἥσυχος [i. q. ἡσύχιος ) ; 
as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, to keep quiet,i.e. a. 
to rest, to cease from labor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead 
a quiet life, said of those who are not running hither 
and thither, but stay at home and mind their business: 
4 Ππ τν" 115 c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold 
one’s peace: Lk. xiv. 4 (3); Acts xi. 18; xxi. 14, (Job 
xxxii. 7; ἡσύχασαν καὶ οὐχ εὕροσαν λόγον, Neh. v. 8).* 

[Syn. ἡσυχάζειν, σιγᾶν, σιωπᾶν: jo. describes a quiet 
condition in the general, inclusive of silence; ovy. de- 
scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially 
in speechlessness (silence from fear, grief, awe, etc.) ; σίωπ., 
the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence 
from speech, esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i. 
ch. 9.] 

ἡσυχία, -as, ἡ, (fr. the adj. ἡσύχιος, q. v.; the fem. ex- 
presses the general notion [ W. 95 (90) ], cf. αἰτία, ἀρετή, 


281 








Φ 
ἦχος 


ἐχθρά, etc.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. quietness: descrip- 
tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own 
work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of 
others, 2 Th. iii. 12. 2. silence: Acts xxii. 2; 1 Tim. 
li. 11 sq.* 

ἡσύχιος, -a; -ov, [(perh. akin to ἧμαι ἴο sit, Lat. sedatus; 
cf. Curtius $ 568; Vanicek p. 77)]; fr. Hom. down; 
quiet, tranquil: 1 Pet. iii. 4; βίος, 1 Tim. ii. 2; Joseph. 
antt. 13, 16, 1.* 

ἤτοι, see 7, 4 e. 

ἡττάω: (ἥττων) ; to make less, inferior, to overcome 
(the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1 
[other exx. in Veitch s. v.]); Pass. ἡττάομαι, fr. [Soph. 
and] Hdt. down; pf. ἥττημαι; 1 aor. ἡττήθην (ἡσσώθην, 
2 Co. xii. 13 LT Tr WH; in opp. to which form cf. 
Fritzsche, De conform. N. T. crit. quam Lehm. ed. p. 32 
[yet see Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ad fid. cod. Vat. p. xe.; 
WH. App. p. 166; B. 59 (52); Veitch s. v.]); to be made 
inferior; to be overcome, worsted: in war, ὑπό τινος, 
2 Mace. x. 24; univ. τινί [cf. B. 168 (147); W. 219 
(206)], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one, 
2 Pet. ii. 19; absol ib. 20. τὶ ὑπέρ τινα, i. 4. ἧττον ἔχω 
tt, to hold a thing inferior, set below, [on the ace. (6) cf. 
B. § 131, 10; and on the compar. use of ὑπέρ see ὑπέρ, 
II. 2 b.], 2 Co. xii. 13.* 

ἥττημα [cf. B. 7; WH. App. p. 166], -ros, τό, (ἡττάο- 
pat) 1. a diminution, decrease: i. e. defeat, Is. xxxi. 
8; αὐτῶν, brought upon the Jewish people in that so few 
of them had turned to Christ, Ro. xi. 12 [R. V. loss]. 
2. loss, sc. as respects salvation, 1 Co. vi. 7 [R. V. txt. 
defect]. Cf. Meyer [but cf. his 6te Aufl.] on each pass. 
(Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) * 

ἥττων or [so L T Tr WH, see Z, o, s] ἥσσων, -ov, infe- 
rior; neut. adverbially [fr. Hom. down] /ess, 2 Co. xii. 
15; εἰς τὸ ἧσσον, for the worse (that ye may be made 
worse; opp. to eis τὸ κρεῖττον), 1 Co. xi. 17.* 

ἠχέω (-); (ἦχος, q- v.) ; [fr. Hesiod down]; to sound: 
1 Co. xiii. 1; used of the roaring of the sea, Lk. xxi. 25. 
Ree. [Comp.: é£&, kar-jxéo. ] * 

ἦχος [cf. Lat. echo, vox, Germ. sprechen, etc.; Vaniéek 
p- 858], -ov, 6, and (Lk. xxi. 25 GL T Tr WH) τὸ ἦχος, 
-ous (cf. W. 65 (64); [B. 23 (20)]; Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 
19 p. 638; [or ἤχους may come fr. ἠχώ, -oüs, see esp. WH. 
App. p. 158*; Mey. on Lk. as below]) ; 1. a sound, 
noise: Acts ii. 2; Heb. xii. 19; spoken of the roar of 
the sea’s waves, Lk. xxi. 25 GL T Tr WH. 2. rumor, 
report: περί twos, Lk. iv. 37.* 


282 


0 


Θαδδαῖος 


Θαδδαῖος, -ov, 6, (IN, perh. large-hearted or coura- 
geous, although it has not been shown that 3A equiv. to 
the Hebr. tw can mean pectus as well as mamma: [some 
would connect the terms by the fact that the ‘child of 
one’s heart’ may be also described as a ‘bosom-child’; but 
see B.D. s. v. Jude]), Thaddeus, a surname of the 
apostle Jude; he was also called Lebbeus and was the 
brother of James the less: Mt.x.3 RGLTr WH; Mk. 
ii. 18. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Keil on Mt.1.¢.; WH. App. 
p.11* The latter hold the name Λεββαῖος to be due to 
an early attempt to bring Levi (Aeveis) the publican 
(Lk. v. 27) within the Twelve.]* 

θάλασσα [cf. B. ΤΊ, -ns, 7, (akin to dds [better, allied 
io ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanicek, p. 303]; 
Sept. for p»), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinc- 
tion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: 
Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2, 6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 
27; 2 Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12; Jas. i. 6; Jude 13; Rev. 
vii. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν Od. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), 
Rev. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θαλ. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. 
xviii. 6; joined with yj and οὐρανός it forms a periph- 
rasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 
13; x. 6 [D WH br.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. 
(exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [c. Ap. 2, 10, 1]); among 
the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass 
is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this 
is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used 
[even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); B. $ 124, 8 b.] 
of the Mediterranean Sea: Actsx.6,32; xvii.14; of 
the Red Sea (see ἐρυθρός), ἡ ἐρυθρὰ θάλ.. Acts vii. 36; 
1Co.x.1sq.; Heb.xi.29. Bya usage foreign to native 
Grk. writ. [cf. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351%, 8 ἡ ὑπὸ 
τὸν Καύκασον λίμνη ἣν καλοῦσιν of ἐκεῖ θάλατταν, and 
Hesych. defines λίμνη: ἡ θάλασσα καὶ ὁ ὠκεανός) em- 
ployed like the Hebr. Ὁ" [e. σ. Num. xxxiv. 11], by Mt. 
Mk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the Lake of Τεννησα- 
per (α: ν.): ἡ θάλ. τῆς Ταλιλαίας, Mt. iv. 18; xv. 29; Mk. 
1.16; vii. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is 
called mare Suebicum, the Suabian Sea); τῆς Τιβεριάδος, 
Jn. xxi. 1; τῆς Γαλιλ. τῆς Τιβεριάδος (on which twofold 
gen. ef. W. $ 30, 3 N. 3; [B. 400 (343)]), Jn. vi.1; more 
frequently simply ἡ θάλασσα: Mt.iv. 15,18; viii. 24, 26 
Sq. 32's xiii. 1; ete. : Mk. 7:13:01. 7: ἵν. 05:995 v. 19, 
xxi 7. Cf. Furrer in Schen- 


ete.; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25; 


kel ii. 322 sqq. ; [see T'evvgcapér ]. 

θάλπω; 1. prop. to warm, keep warm, (Lat. foveo) : 
Hom. et sqq. 2. like the Lat. foveo, i.q. to cherish 
with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29; 
1 Th.ii.7; ((Theoer. 14, 38]; Aleiphr. 2, 4; Antonin. 
5, 1).* 








θάνατος 


Θάμαρ ['Trez. Θαμάρ], 7. (WA [i. e. palm-tree]), Ta- 
mar, prop. name of ἃ. woman, the daughter-in-law of 
Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. xxxviii. 6): Mt. 
1:8:* 

θαμβέω, -@; Pass. impf. ἐθαμβούμην:; 1 aor. ἐθαμβήθην ; 
(θάμβος, q. v.) ; 1. to be astonished: Acts ix. 6 Rec. 
(Hom., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify: 28. xxii. 
5; pass. to be amazed: Mk. i. 27; x. 32; foll. by ἐπί w. 
dat. of the thing, Mk. x. 24; to be frightened, 1 Mace. 
vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Plut. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp.: 
ἐκ-θαμβέω. * 

θάμβος [allied with τάφος amazement, fr. a Sanskrit 
root signifying /o render immovable; Curtius § 233; 
Vanicek p. 1130], -ovs, τό; fr. Hom. down; amazement: 
Lk. iv. 36; v. 9; Acts iii. 10.* 

θανάσιμος. -ov, (θανεῖν, θάνατος). deadly: Mk. xvi. 18. 
([Aeschyl.], Soph., Eur., Plat., sqq.) * 

θανατη-φόρος, -ov, (θάνατος and φέρων, death-bringing, 
deadly: Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22; Job xxxiii. 23; 
4 Macc. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl, Plat. Arist., 
Diod., Xen., Plut., al.) * 

θάνατος, -ov, ὁ, (θανεῖν); Sept. for mi and nv», also 
for 523 pestilence [ W. 29 note]; (one of the nouns often 
anarthrous, cf. W. $ 19, 1s. v.; [B. § 124, 8 6.7; Grimm, 
Com. on Sap. p. 59); deat; 1. prop. the death of 
the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent) 
of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is 
ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Tr mrz. ἅδου] (on 
this see div); Phil. ii. 27,30; Heb. vii. 23; ix. 15 sq.; 
Rey. ix. 6; xviii. 8; opp. to ζωή, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 
22: 2 Co. i. 9; Phil. i. 20; with the implied idea of future 
misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21; 2 Tim. i. 10; 
Heb. ii. 14 sq.; i.q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12. 
Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was con- 
ceived of as being very dark, χώρα kai σκιὰ θανάτου 
(ns) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e. 
ficuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of igno- 
rance and sin: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is. ix. 2); θάνα- 
ros is used of the punishment of Christ, Ro. v. 10; vi. 
3-5; 1 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 10; Col. i. 22; Heb. ii. [9], 
14; σώζειν τινὰ ἐκ θανάτου, to free from the fear of death, 
to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Heb. v. 7 [but 
al. al.]; ῥύεσθαι ἐκ θανάτου, to deliver from the danger 
of death, 2 Co. i. 10; plur. θάνατοι, deaths (i. e. mortal 
perils) of various kinds, 2 Co. xi. 23; περίλυπος ἕως 
θανάτου. even unto death, i. e. so that I am almost dying of 
sorrow, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34, (λελύπημαι ἕως θανά- 
rov, Jonah iv. 9; λύπη ἕως θανάτου, Sir. xxxvii. 2, cf. 
Jude. xvi. 16); μέχρι θανάτου, so as not to refuse to un- 
dergo even death, Phil. ii. 8; also ἄχρι θανάτου, Rev. ii. 


θάνατος 


10; xii. 11; ἐσφαγμένος εἰς θάνατον, that has received 
a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 3; πληγὴ θανάτου, a deadly 
wound [death-stroke, cf. W. § 34, 3 0.1, Rev. xiii. 3, 12; 
ἰδεῖν θάνατον, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26; Heb. xi. 
5; also γεύεσθαι θανάτου [see yevo, 2], Mt. xvi. 28; Mk. 
Yx-- 1 Db cerco 82/705 
struction, Acts xxii. 4; κατακρίνειν τινὰ θανάτῳ, to con- 
demn one to death (ad mortem damnare, Tacit.), Mt. xx. 
18 [here Tdf. εἰς 0áv.]; Mk. x. 33, (see κατακρίνω, a.) ; 
πορεύεσθαι eis Óáv. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 23; mapa- 
διδόναι τινὰ els θάν. that he may be put to death, Mt. 
x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; pass. to be given over to the peril 
of death, 2 Co. iv. 11; zapa8. eis κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 
20; ἀποκτεῖναί twa ἐν θανάτῳ (a Uebraism [ef. B. 184 
(159 sq.)]), Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, [cf. W. 29 note]; αἰτία 
θανάτου (see αἰτία, 2), Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18; ἄξιόν τι 
θανάτου, some crime worthy of the penalty of death, 
Acts xxiii. 29; xxv. 11, 25; [xxvi. 31]; Lk. xxiii. 15, 22 
[here αἴτιον (4. v. 2 b.) Gav.]; ἔνοχος θανάτου, worthy of 
punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. 66; Mk. xiv. 64; θανάτῳ 
τελευτάτω, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xv. 4; 
Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 17 Sept. (Hebr. nov nid); cf. 
W. § 44 fin. N. 3; [B. u. s.]; θάν. σταυροῦ, Phil. ii. 8; 
ποίῳ θανάτῳ, by what kind of death, Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 
32; xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared 
alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination 
the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to 
his power and confining them in his dark dominions: 
Ro. vi. 9; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54, 56; Rev. xxi. 4; Hades 
is associated with him as his partner: 1 Co. xv. 55 RG; 
Rev. i. 18 (on which see κλείς); vi. 8; xx. 13, [14*], (Ps. 
xvii. (xviii) 5; exiv. (exvi.) 3; Hos. xiii. 14; Sir. xiv. 
12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone is 
worthy of the name, i. e. the misery of soul arising from 
sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the 
death of the body: 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom. 
2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, 6 Bios 
ἡμῶν ὅλος ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἢν εἰ μὴ θάνατος [cf. Philo, praem. 
et poenis $ 12, and reff. in 4 below]); opp. to ἡ ζωή, Ro. 
vii. 10, 13; 2 Co. ii. 16; opp. to σωτηρία, 2 Co. vii. 10; 
i.q. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; σώζειν ψυχὴν ἐκ 
Θανάτου, Jas. v. 20; μεταβεβηκέναι ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου eis τ. 
ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14; μένειν ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ, 1 Jn. 
iii. 14; θεωρεῖν θάνατον, Jn. viii. 51; γεύεσθαι θανάτου, 52 
(see 1 above); ἁμαρτία and ἁμαρτάνειν πρὸς θάνατον (see 
ἁμαρτία, 2 b.), 1 Jn. v. 16 sq. (in the rabbin. writers 
min? won after Num. xviii. 22, Sept. ἁμαρτία θανατη- 
φόρος -- is a crimen capitale). 3. the miserable state 
of the wicked dead in hell is called —now simply θάνατος, 
Ro. i. 32 (Sap. i. 12 sq.; ii. 24; Tatian or. ad Graec. c. 
13; the author of the ep. ad Diognet. c. 10, 7 distin- 
cuishes between ὁ δοκῶν ἐνθάδε θάνατος. the death of the 


διώκειν τινὰ ἄχρι θανάτου, even to de- 





body, and ὁ ὄντως θάνατος. ὃς φυλάσσεται τοῖς κατακριθη- 
σομένοις εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον) ; now ó δεύτερος θάνατος 
and 6 θάν. ὁ δεύτ. (as opp. to the former death, i. 6. to 
that by which life on earth is ended), Rev. ii. 11; xx. 6, 
14°; xxi. 8, (as in the Targums on Deut. xxxiii. 6; Ps. 
xlviii. (xlix.) 11; Is. xxii. 14; Ixvi. 15; [for the Grk. 


283 





θαῦμα 


‘use of the phrase οἵ. Plut. de facie in orbe lunae 27, 6 


p. 942 £.]; θάνατος αἰώνιος, Barn. ep. 20, 1 and in eccl. 
writ. [ὁ ἀΐδιος θάνατος, Philo, post. Cain. § 11 fin.; see 
also Wetstein on Rev. ii. 117}. 4. [In the widest 
sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin, 
as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to 
God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. legg. i. § 33 
ὁ ψυχῆς θάνατος ἀρετῆς μὲν φθορά ἐστι, κακίας δὲ ἀνάληψις, 
[de profug. § 21 θάνατος ψυχῆς 6 μετὰ κακίας ἐστὶ βίος, 
esp. $8 10, 11; quod det. pot. insid. $$ 14, 15; de poster. 
Cain. $ 21, and. de praem. et poen. as in 2 above]), to 
be followed by wretehedness in the lower world (opp. to 
ζωὴ αἰώνιος) : θάνατος seems to be so used in Ro. v. 12; 
vi.16,21, [23; yet al. refer these last three exx. to 3 
above]; vii. 24; viii. 2,6; death, in this sense, is per- 
sonified in Ro. v. 14, 17, 21 ; vii. 5. Others, in all these 
pass. as well as those cited under 2, understand physical 
death; but see Philippi on Ro. v. 12; Messner, Lehre 
der Apostel, p. 210 sqq.* 

θανατόω, -4; fut. Gavaroow; 1 aor. inf. θανατῶσαι. [3 
pers. plur. subjune. θανατώσωσι, Mt. xxvi. 59 RG]; 
Pass. [pres. Óavaro)pat]; 1 aor. ἐθανατώθην ; (fr. θάνα- 
ros); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for 4, ΔΤ, 
ete. 1. prop. to put to death: twa, Mt. x. 21; xxvi. 
9. sxocvir. dls) Mik ΚΠ a SEES θῸ; I e ἘΣ ΤΟ: 2. Oo; 
vi. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 18; pass, by rhetorical hyperbole, to 
be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro. 
viii. 36. 2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy, 
render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifico [A. 
V. mortify]: τί, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass. with dat. of the 
thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything 
[lit. to be made dead in relation to; οἵ. W. 210 (197); B. 
178 (155)]: Ro. vii. 4.* 

θάπτω: 1 aor. ἔθαψα; 2 aor. pass. ἐτάφην ; fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. for VAP; to bury, inter, [BB.DD. s. v. Bur- 
ial; ef. Becker, Charicles, sc. ix. Exeurs. p. 390 sq.]: 
τινά, Mt. viii. 21 sq.; xiv. 12; Lk. ix. 59sq.; xvi. 22; Acts 
ii. 29; v. 6, 9sq.; 1 Co. xv. 4. [Comp.: συν-θάπτω.] * 

Θάρα [WH Capa], ὁ, (MIA a journey, or a halt on a 
journey [8]. ‘loiterer’]), indecl. prop. name, Tera, the 
father of Abraham: Lk. iii. 34.* 

θαρρέω (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and 
earlier Attic θαρσέω). -ὦ ; 1 aor. inf. θαρρῆσαι ; [fr. Hom. 
on]; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, confident : 2 Co. 
v. 6, 8; Heb. xiii. 6; to be bold: τῇ πεποιθήσει, with the 
confidence, 2 Co. x. 2; eis twa, towards (against) one, 
2 Co. x. 1; ἔν τινι, the ground of my confidence is in one, 
I am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii. 16. [Svx. 
see roApae. | * 

θαρσέω, -ὦ ; (see θαρρέω) ; to be of good courage, be of 
good cheer; in the N. T. only in the impv.: θάρσει, Lk. 
viii. 48 R G; Mt. ix. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49; Acts xxiii. 11, 
(Sept. for &Yn-oN, Gen. xxxv. 17, ete.) ; θαρσεῖτε, Mt. 
xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for πεν τις, 
Ex. xiv. 13; Joel ii. 22, ete.). [Syn. see τολμάω.] * 

θάρσος, -ovs, τό, courage, confidence: Acts xxviii. 15.* 

θαῦμα, -ros, τό, (OAOMAI [to wonder at], to gaze at, 
cf. Bitm. Gram. § 114 s.v.; Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 196 ; Curtius 


θαυμάζω 


§ 308); 1. a wonderful thing, a marvel: 2 Co. xi. 14 
LTTrWH. 42. wonder: θαυμάζειν θαῦμα μέγα (cf. W. 
§ 32, 2; [B. 8 131, 5]), to wonder [with great wonder 
i. e.] exceedingly, Rev. xvii. 6. (In both senses in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. Job xvii. 8; xviii. 20.) * 

θαυμάζω ; impf. ἐθαύμαζον : fut. θαυμάσομαι (Rev. xvii. 
SRGT Tr, a form far more com. in the best Grk. writ. 
also than θαυμάσω ; cf. Krüger $40 s. v.; Kühner $343 
s. v. 5 [Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. ἐθαύμασα ; 1 aor. pass. ἐθαυ- 
μάσθην in ἃ mid. sense (Rev. xiii. 3 R^ L Tr txt.) ; also 
1 fut. pass., in the sense of the mid., θαυμασθήσομαι (Rev. 
xvii. 8 L WH ; but the very few exx. of the mid. use in 
prof. auth. are doubtful; ef. Stephanus, "Thesaur. iv. p. 
259 sq.; [yet see Veitch s. v.]); to wonder, wonder at, 
marvel: absol, Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec., 33; xv. 31; 
xxi. 20; xxii. 22; xxvii. 14; Mk. v. 20; vi. 51 [Ree.; L 
br. Tr mrg. br.]; xv. 5; Lk. i. 21 [see below], 63; viii. 
xi. 14; xxiv. 41; Jn. v. 20; vii. 15; Acts ii. 7; iv. 13; 
xiii. 41; Rev. xvii. 7 sq. ; with acc. of the pers. Lk. vii. 
9; with acc. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [ T om. L Tr br. 
WH reject the vs. (see zpós, I. 1 a. init. and 2 b.)]; Jn. v. 
28; Acts vii. 31; θαῦμα μέγα (sce θαῦμα, 2), Rev. xvii. 
65 πρόσωπον, to admire, pay regard to, one's external 
appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16 
(Sept. for 25 N73, Deut. x. 17; Job xiii. 10; Prov. 
xviii. 5; Is. ix. 14, etc.) ; foll. by διά τι, Mk. vi. 6 ; Jn. vii. 
21 where διὰ τοῦτο (omitted by 'Tdf.) is to be joined to vs. 
21 [so G L Tr mrg.; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc. ; W. 
$7, 3], (Isocr. p. 52 d.; Ael. v. h. 12, 6; 14, 36); [foll. 
by ἐν w. dat. of object, acc. to the constr. adopted by 
some in Lk. i. 21 ἐθαύμ. ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν αὐτόν, at his tarry- 
ing; οἵ. W. § 33, b.; B. 264 (227); 185 (160 sq.) ; Sir. 
xi. 19 (21); evang. Thom. 15, 2; but see above]; foll. 
by ἐπί w. dat. of pers. Mk. xii. 17 [R GL Tr]; by ἐπί w. 
dat. of the thing, Lk. ii. 33; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26; [Acts 
iii. 12], (Xen., Plat., Thuc., al.; Sept.) ; περί twos, Lk. 
ii. 18; by a pregnant constr. [ef. B. 185 (161) ] ἐθαύμασεν 
ἡ γῆ ὀπίσω τοῦ θηρίου, followed the beast in wonder, Rev. 
xiii. 3 [cf. B. 59 (52)]; foll. by ὅτι, to marvel that, ete., 
Lk. xi. 38 ; Jn. iii. 7; iv. 27; Gal. 1. 6 ; by εἰ (see ei, I. 4), 
Mk. xv. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 13. Pass. to be wondered at, to be 
had in admiration, (Sir. xxxviii. 3; Sap. viii. 11; 4 Macc. 
xviii. 3), foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the pers. whose lot and 
condition gives matter for wondering at another, 2 Th. 
i. 10; ἐν with dat. of the thing, Is. lxi. 6. [Cowr.: ἐκ- 
θαυμάζω. * 

θαυμάσιος, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (θαῦμα), 
[fr. Hes., Hom. (h. Mere. 443) down], wonderful, mar- 
vellous; neut. plur. θαυμάσια (Sept. often for mw221, 
also for N53), wonderful deeds, wonders: Mt. xxi. 15. 
[Cf. Trench § xci.] * 

θαυμαστός, -ή, -óv, (θαυμάζω), in Grk. writ. fr. [ Hom. 
(h. Cer. ete.)], Hdt., Pind. down; [interchanged in Grk. 
writ. with θαυμάσιος, cf. Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 341]; won- 
derful, marvellous; i.e. a. worthy of pious admiration. 
admirable, excellent: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 
2; for aN, Ps. viii. 2; xcii. (xciii.) 4, (5)). — b. passing 
human comprehension: Mt. xxi. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, (fr. 


25; 





284 





θεῖον 


Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22 sq., where for x53, as Job xlii. 3; 
Mic. vii. 15, ete.). ο. causing amazement joined with 
terror: Rev. xv. 1, 3, (so for 813, Ex. xv. 11, ete.). d. 
marvellous i. e. extraordinary, striking, surprising: 2 Co. 
xi. 14 RG (see θαῦμα, 1); Jn. ix. 80." 

θεά, -Gs, ἡ, (fem. of θεός), [fr. Hom. down], a goddess: 
Acts xix. 27, and Rec. also in 35, 37.* 

θεάομαι, -ὥῶμαι : 1 aor. ἐθεασάμην ; pf. τεθέαμαι; 1 aor. 
pass. ἐθεάθην in pass. sense (Mt. vi. 1; xxiii. 5; Mk. 
xvi. 11; Thue. 3, 38, 3; cf. Krüger § 40 s. v.; [but 
Krüger himself now reads δρασθέν in Thue. l.c.; see 
Veitch s. v.; W. $38,7 c.; B. 52 (46)]); depon. verb; 
(fr. θέα, OAOMALT, with which θαῦμα is connected, q. v.) ; 
to behold, look upon, view attentively, contemplate, (in Grk. 
writ. often used of public shows; ef. θέα, θέαμα. θέα- 
tpov, θεατρίζω, etc. [see below]) : τί, Mt. xi. 7; Lk. vii. 245 
Jn. iv. 35 ; xi. 45; of august things and persons that are 
looked on with admiration: τί, Jn. i. 14, 32; 1 Jn. i. 1; 
Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36) ; τινά, with a ptep., Mk. 
xvi. 14; Acts i. 115 foll. by ὅτε, 1 Jn. iv. 14; θεαθῆναι ὑπό 
twos, Mk. xvi. 11; πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς, in order to 
make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1; xxiii. 5; to view, take a 
view of: τί, Lk. xxiii. 555 τινά, Mt. xxii. 11; in the sense 
of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr. 
xxii. 6; Joseph. antt. 16, 1, 2) ; to learn by looking: foll. 
by ὅτι, Acts viii. 18 Rec.; to see with the eyes, 1 Jn. iv. 
12; i.q. (Lat. conspicio) to perceive: twa, Jn. viii. 10 
RG; Aets xxi. 27; foll. by acc. with ptep., Lk. v. 27 
[not Lmrg.]; Jn. i. 38; foll. by ὅτι, Jn. vi. 5.* 

Cf. ὁ. F. Fritzsche, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 295 sqq. 
[ Acc. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, θεᾶσθαι in its earlier classic 
use denotes often a wonderin g regard, (cf. even in Strabo 
14, 5, τὰ ἑπτὰ θεάματα ἱ. η. θαύματα). This specific shade of 
meaning, however, gradually faded out, and left the more 
general signification of such a looking as seeks merely the 
satisfaction of the sense of sight. Cf. θεωρέω.] 


θεατρίζω : (θέατρον, q.v-) ; prop. to bring upon the stage ; 
hence to set forth as a spectacle, expose to contempt; Pass., 
pres. ptep. θεατριζόμενος [A. V. being made a gazing- 
stock], Heb. x. 33. (Several times also in eccl. and 
Byzant. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]; but in the same sense 
ἐκθεατρίζω in Polyb. 3, 91, 105 al.; [cf. W. 25 (24) note; 
also Tdf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. lix. sq.]-) * 

θέατρον. -ov, τό, (θεάυμαιλ) ; 1. a theatre, a place in 
which games and dramatic spectacles are exhibited, and 
public assemblies held (for the Greeks used the theatre 
also as a forum): Acts xix. 29, 31. 2. i. q. θέα and 
θέαμα, a public show (Aeschin. dial. soer. 3, 20; Achill. 
Tat. 1, 16 p. 55), and hence, metaph., a man who is ex- 
hibited to be gazed at and made sport of: 1 Co. iv. 9 [ A. 
V. a spectacle ].* 

θεῖον, -ov, τό, (apparently the neut. of the adj. θεῖος i. q- 
divine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded 
as having power to purify, and to ward off contagion 
[but Curtius $320 allies it w. θύω; cf. Lat. fumus, 
Eng. dust]), brimstone : Lk. xvii. 29; Rev. ix. 17 sq.; xiv. 
10; xix. 20; [xx. 10]; xxi. 8. (Gen. xix. 24; (Psexe (xis) 
6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Hom. Il. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481, 


θεῖος 


493; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 c.; Ael. v. h. 13, 15[16]; 
Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) * 


285 


θέλω 


θέλησις, -ews, 7, (θέλω), i. q. τὸ θέλειν, a willing, will: 
Heb. ii. 4. (Ezek. xviii. 23; 2 Chr. xv. 15; Prov. viii. 35; 


θεῖος, -eía, -etov, (Geos), [fr. Hom. down], divine: ἡ θεία | Sap. xvi. 25; [Tob. xii. 18]; 2 Macc. xii. 16; 3 Macc. ii. 


δύναμις, 2 Pet. i. 3; φύσις (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4; neut. τὸ 
Θεῖον, divinity, deity (Lat. numen divinum), not only 
' used by the Greeks to denote the divine nature, power, 
providence, in the general, without reference to any 
individual deity (as Hdt. 3, 108; Thuc. 5, 70; Xen. Cyr. 
4, 2, 15; Hell. 7, 5, 13; mem. 1, 4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p. 
242 c.; Polyb. 32, 25, 7; Diod. 1, 6; 13, 3; 12; 16, 60; 
Lcian. de sacrif. 1; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by 
Philo (as in mundi opif. $ 61; de agric. 17; leg. ad Gai. 
1), and by Josephus (antt. 1,3, 4; 11, 1; 2,12, 4; 5, 2, 
ἘΠ 2, 6595 7 0: 032822 2010205 7142975: 1, 
2,4; 20,11, 2; b. j. 3,8, 3; 4, 3, 10), of the one, true 
God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of 
regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.* 

θειότης, -nTos, 7, divinity, divine nature: Ro. i. 20. 
(Sap. xviii. 9; Philo in opif. $61 fin.; Plut. symp. 665 a.; 
Leian. calumn. c. 17.) [Syn. see θεότης." 

θειώδης. -es, (fr. θεῖον brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone, 
sulphurous: Rev. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 228; [ Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

θέλημα, -ros, τό, (θέλω), a word purely bibl. and eccl. 
[yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815%, 21]; 
Sept. for yan and mo will,i.e. a. what one wishes 
or has determined shall be done, [i. e. objectively, thing 
willed]: Lk. xii.47; Jn. v.30; 1 Co. vii.37; 1 Th. v. 
18; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb.x.10; Rev.iv.11; θέλημα τοῦ 
θεοῦ is used —of the purpose of God to bless mankind 
through Christ, Acts xxii. 14; Eph.i.9; Col.i.9; of what 
God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2; Col. iv. 12 [W. 
111 (105)]; 1 Pet. iv. 2; and simply τὸ θέλημα, Ro. ii. 18 
[W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17), [but here the better 
txt. now adds αὐτοῦ, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how- 
ever, θέλημα is so used even without the art.; cf. Ienat. 
ad Rom. 1,1; ad Eph. 20,1, ete.]); τοῦ κυρίου, Eph. v. 
17; plur. commands, precepts: [Mk. iii. 35 WH. mre.]; 
Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7; 2 Macc. i. 3); ἐστὶ τὸ θέ- 
λημά twos, foll by ἵνα, Jn. vi. 39 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 12, cf. 
Mt. xviii. 14; foll. by inf., 1 Pet. ii. 15; by ace. with inf., 
1 Th.iv.3. [Cf. B.237 (204); 240 (207); W.$ 44, 8.] 
b. i.q. τὸ θέλειν, [i. e. the abstract act of willing, the 
subjective] will, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [cf. W. 604 (562)]; 
2 Pet. i. 21; ποιεῖν τ. θέλ. τινος (esp. of God), Mt. vii. 
21; xii. 50; xxi. 31; Mk. iii. 35 [here WH mre. the plur., 
see above]; Jn. iv. 34: vi. 38; vii. 17; ix. 31; Eph. vi. 
6; Heb. x. 7, 9,36; xiii. 21; 1 Jn.ii. 17; τὸ θέλ: (LT Tr 
WH βούλημα) τινος κατεργάζεσθαι, 1 Pet. iv.3; γίνεται τὸ 
θέλ. τινος. Mt. vi. 10; xxvi. 42; Lk. xi. 2 LR; xxii. 42; 
Acts xxi. 14; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ θελήματος, Eph. i. 11; ἡ εὐδο- 
kia τοῦ θελ. ib. 5; ἐν τῷ Ged. τοῦ θεοῦ, if God will, Ro. i. 
10; διὰ θελήματος θεοῦ, Ro. xv. 32; 1 Co.i.1; 2 Co.i.1; 
viii. 5; Eph.i.1; Col. 1.1; 2 Tim.i. 1; κατὰ τὸ θέλ. 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. i. 4; [1 Pet. iv. 19]; 1Jn.v.14. i.q. 
pleasure: Lk. xxiii. 25; i.q. inclination, desire : σαρκός, 
ἀνδρός, Jn. i. 13; plur. Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. see θέλω, 
fin.]* 





26 ; [plur. in] Melissa epist. ad Char. p. 62 Orell.; acc. to 
Pollux [l. 5 e. 47] a vulgarism (ἰδιωτικόν) ; [cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 353].) * 

θέλω (only in this form in the N. T.; in Grk. auth. also 
ἐθέλω [Veitch s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]); 
impf. ἤθελον ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. θελήσει, Rev. xi. 5 WH 
mrg.]; 1 aor. ἠθέλησα; (derived apparently fr. ἑλεῖν 
with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop. to seize 
with the mind; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its 
root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of 
Pott, Fick, Vaniéek and others, which connects it with 
a root meaning to hold to]); Sept. for 738 and yan; To 
WILL, (have in mind,) intend ; i. e. 1. to be resolved 
or determined, to purpose: absol, 6 θέλων, Ro. ix. 16; 
τοῦ θεοῦ θέλοντος if God will, Acts xviii. 21; ἐὰν ὁ κύριος 
θελήσῃ (in Attic ἐὰν θεὸς θέλῃ, ἣν οἱ θεοὶ θέλωσιν [cf. Lob. 
u. s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. ἵν. 15; καθὼς ἠθέλησε, 1 Co. xii. 
18; xv. 38; ri, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal. 
v. 17; with the aorist inf., Mt. xx. 14; xxvi. 15; Jn. vi. 
21 (where the meaning is, they were willing to receive 
him into the ship, but that was unnecessary, because 
unexpectedly the ship was nearing the land; cf. Lücke, 
B-Crusius, Ewald, [Godet], al. ad loc.; W. ὃ 54, 4; [B. 
375 (321)]); Jn. vii. 44; Acts xxv.9; Col.i.27; 1 Th. 
ii. 18; Rev. xi. 5, etc.; with the present inf., Lk. x. 29 
RG; Jn. vi. 67; vii. 17; viii. 44; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; 
Ro. vii. 21; Gal. iv. 9 [here T Trtxt. WH txt. 1 aor. inf.]; 
with an inf. suggested by the context, Jn. v. 21 (obs θέλει, 
Sc. ζωοποιῆσαι); Mt. viii. 2; Mk. iii. 13; vi. 22; Ro. ix. 
18; Rev. xi. 6, ete. οὐ θέλω to be unwilling: with the 
aorist inf., Mt. ii. 18; xv. 32; xxii. 3; Mk. vi. 26; Lk. 
xy. 28; Jn. v.40; Acts vii. 39; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Rev. ii. 21 
[not Rec.], ete.; with the present inf. Jn. vii. 1; Acts 
xiv. 13; xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, ete.; with the inf. om. 
and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30; xxi. 
29; Lk. xviii. 4, etc. ; θέλω and ov θέλω foll. by the ace. 
with inf., Lk. i. 62; 1 Co. x. 20; on the Pauline phrase οὐ 


-θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, see dyvoéw, a.; corresponding to θέλω 


ὑμᾶς εἰδέναι, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii. 1. θέλειν, used of a 
purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry- 
ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to ποιεῖν, πράσ- 
σειν, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter 
pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. $ 61, 7 b.) ; to évep- 
yew, Phil. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19; Jn. vii. 44. One is said 
also θέλειν that which he is on the point of doing: Mk. 
vi. 48; Jn. i. 43 (44); and it is used thus also of things 
that tend or point to some conclusion [cf. W. § 42, 1 b.; 
B. 254 (219)]: Actsii.12; xvii. 20. 
τοῦτο θέλοντας this (viz. what follows, ὅτε ete.) escapes 
them of their own will, i. e. they are purposely, wilfully, 
ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows: 
this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. e. 
holding as their opinion [for exx. of this sense see Soph. 
Lex. s. v. 4]), they are ignorant etc.; but cf. De Wette 
ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. $ 150, 8 Rem.]. ras 


λανθάνει αὐτοὺς 


θέλω 


ἐπιθυμίας τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν θέλετε ποιεῖν it is your purpose 
to fulfil the lusts of your father, i. e. ye are actuated by 
him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44 
[W. u. s.; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to desire, to wish: 
ri, Mt. xx. 21; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.]; 
Jn. xv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 21; 2 Co. xi. 12; foll. by the aorist 
inf, Mt. v. 40; xii. 38; xvi. 25; xix. 17; Mk. x. 43 sq. ; 
Lk. viii. 20; xxiii.8; Jn. v. 6,35 (ye were desirous of 
rejoicing) ; xii. 21; Gal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20; 1 Pet. iii. 10; 
foll. by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27; Gal. iv. 20 (ἤθελον J 
could wish, on which impf. see εὔχομαι, 2); the inf. is 
wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb, 
Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk.ix.13; Jn. xxi. 18; foll. by 
the ace. and inf, Mk. vii. 24; Lk. i. 62; Jn. xxi. 22 sq. ; 
Ro. xvi. 19; 1 Co. vii. 7, 32; xiv. 5; Gal. vi. 135 οὐ θέλω 
to be unwilling, (desire not): foll. by the aor. inf., Mt. 
xxiii. 4; Lk. xix. 14, 27; 1 Co. x. 20; foll. by tva, Mt. vii. 
12; Mk. vi. 25; ix. 80; x.35; Lk.vi.31; Jn. xvii. 24; 
cf. W. § 44, 8 b.; [B. $ 139, 46]; foll. by the delib. subj. 
(aor.) : θέλεις συλλέξωμεν αὐτά (cf. the Germ. willst du, 
sollen wir zusammenlesen? [Goodwin § 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ; 
add, Mt. xx. 32 [where L br. adds va]; xxvi.17; xxvii. 
17, 21; Mk. x. 51; xiv. 12; xv. 9, 12 [Tr br. 6€A.]; Lk. ix. 
54; xviii. 41; xxii. 9, (cf. W. $41a.4b.; B. $139,2); 
foll. by ei, Lk. xii. 49 (see ei, I. 4); foll. by 5, to prefer, 
1 Co. xiv. 19 (see ἤ, 3 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foll. by an 
inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing: Mk. xii. 38; 
Lk. xx. 46; cf. W. $ 54, 4; [B. $ 150, 8]. 4. in imi- 
tation of the Hebr. yn, to take delight, have pleasure 
[opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem.; cf. W. $33,a.; but see exx. 
below]: ἔν τινι, in a thing, Col. ii. 18 (ἐν καλῷ, to delight 
in goodness, Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1; (cf. eis 
ζωήν, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3); Ps. cxi. (exii.) 1; exlvi. 
(exlvii.) 10]; & τινι, dat. of the pers., 1 S. xviii. 22; 2 S. 
xv. 26; [1 K.x. 9]; 2 Chr.ix.8; for 3 nw» 1 Chr. 
xxviii. 4). τινά, to love one: Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi. 
(xxii) 9; [xvii. (xviii.) 20; xl. (xli.) 12]; Ezek. xviii. 
32, cf. 23; Tob. xiii. 6; opp. to μισεῖν, Ignat. ad Rom. 
8, 3; θεληθῆναι is used of those who find favor, ibid. 8, 
1). τί, Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; Heb. x. 5, 
8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xL) 7). — As respects the distinction 
between βούλομαι and θέλω, the former seems to desig- 
nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter 
the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap- 
pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that 
the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the 
verb θέλειν (see just above). The reverse of this dis- 
tinction is laid down by Bitm. Lexil. i. p. 26 ( Eng. trans. 
p.194]; Delitzsch on Heb. vi. 17. Ace. to Tittmann 
(Syn. i. p. 124) θέλειν denotes mere volition, βούλεσθαι 
inclination; [ef. Whiston on Dem. 9,5; 124, 13]. 
[Philip Buttmann’s statement of the distinction between 
the two words is quoted with approval by Schmidt (Syn. iii. 
ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (besides many exx.) 
the assumed relationship between B. and βελπίς, ἐλπίς ; the 
use of θ. in the sense of ‘resolve’ in such passages as Thuc. 
5,9; of θέλων i. q. ἡδέως in the poets; of B. as parallel to 
ἐπιθυμεῖν in Dem. 29, 45, etc.; and pass. in which the two 
words occur together and B. is apparently equiv. to ‘wish’ 





286 


θεμέλιος 


while 6. stands for ‘ will,’ as Xen. an. 4, 4, 5; Eur. Alc. 281, 
etc, ete. At the same time it must be confessed that scholars 
are far from harmonious on the subject. Many agree with 
Prof. Grimm that 6. gives prominence to the emotive ele- 
ment, 8. to the rational and volitive; that 0. signifies the 
choice, while 8. marks the choice as deliberate and intelligent ; 
yet they acknowledge that the words are sometimes used 
indiscriminately, and esp. that 8. as the less sharply defined 
term is put where 8. would be proper; see Lilendt, Lex. 
Soph.; Pape, Handworterb. ; Seiler, Worterb. d. Hom., s. v. 
βούλομαι; Suhle und Schneidewin, Handwoürterb.; Crosby, 
Lex. to Xen. an., s. v. ἐθέλω; (Arnold’s) Pillon, Grk. Syn. 
§ 129; Webster, Synt. and Syn. of the Grk. Test. p. 197; 
Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii. 603; Schleusner, N. T. Lex. 
s. v. BotA.; Munthe, Observy. phil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. ete. 
p.3; Valckenaer, Scholia ete. ii. 23; Westermann on Dem. 
20, 111; the commentators generally on Mt. as above; Bp. 
Lghtft. on Philem. 13,14; Riddle in Schaff's Lange on Eph. 
p. 42; this seems to be roughly intended by Ammonius 
also: βούλεσθαι μὲν ἐπὶ μόνου λεκτέον τοῦ λογικοῦ" τὸ δὲ 
θέλειν καὶ ἐπὶ ἀλόγου ζώου ; (and Eustath. on Iliad 1, 112, p. 
61, 2, says obx’ ἁπλῶς θέλω, ἀλλὰ βούλομαι, ὅπερ ἐπίτασις TOD 
θέλειν ἐστίν). On the other hand, L. and S. (s. v. ἐθέλω) ; 
Passow ed. 5; Rost, Worterb. ed. 4: Schenkl, Schulworterb. ; 
Donaldson, Crat. § 463 sq. ; Wahl, Clav. Apocr., s. v. Bova. ; 
Cremer s. vv. βούλομαι and θέλω; esp. Siallb. on Plato’s de 
repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (ef. too Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 19, 
19); Franke on Dem. 1, 1, substantially reverse the distinc- 
tion, as does Zl/licott on 1 Tim. v. 14; Wordsworth on 1 Th. 
ii. 18. Although the latter opinion may seem to be favored 
by that view of the derivation of the words which allies Bova. 
with voluptas (Curtius § 659, cf. p. 726), and makes θέλ. sig- 
nify ‘to hold to something, ‘form a fixed resolve’ (see 
above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T. 
will be evident to one who looks out the pass. referred to 
above (Fritzsche’s explanation of Mt. i. 19 is hardly natu- 
ral); to which may be added such as Mt. ii. 18; ix. 13; xii. 
38; xv. 28; xvii. 4 (xx. 21, 32) ; xxvi. 15, 39 (cf. Lk. xxii. 
42); Mk. vi. 19; vii. 24; ix. 30; x. 35; xii. 38; xv. 9 (cf. Jn. 
xviii. 39), 15 (where R. V. wishing is questionable; cf. Lk. 
xxiii. 20); Lk. x. 24; xv. 28; xvi. 26; Jn. v. 6; vi.11; xii. 
91; Acts x. 10; xviii. 15; Ro. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to μισῶ, 
and indeed the use of θέλω throughout this chapter) ; 1 Co. vii. 
36,39; xiv.35; Eph.i.11; 2 Th.iii. 10, ete. Such passages 
as 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one side, 
now on the other; cf. 1 Co. xii. 11, 18. θέλω occurs in the 
N. T. about five times as often as βούλομαι (on the relative 
use of the words in classie writers see Tycho Mommsen in 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept. 
(beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to 
afford little light; see e. g. Gen. xxiv. 5, 8; Deut. xxv. 7; 
Ps. xxxix. (xl) 7, 9, ete. In modern Greek θέλω seems 
to have nearly driven βούλομαι out of use; on θέλω as an 
auxiliary cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson's Handbook, App. 
8860,64. For exx. of the associated use of the words in 
classic Grk., see Steph. "Thesaur. s. v. βούλομαι p. 366 d. ; Bp. 
Lehtft., Cremer, and esp. Schmidt, as above.] 

θεμέλιος, -ov, (θέμα [i. e. thing laid down]), laid down 
as a foundation, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 66; 
θεμέλιοι λίθοι, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst., 
ὁ θεμέλιος [sc. λίθος] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq.; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev. 
xxi. 19), and τὸ θεμέλιον (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [A1r- 
istot. phys. auscult. 2, 9 p. 200*, 4]; Paus. 8, 32,1; [al.]), 
the foundation (of a building, wall, city): props Lk. vi. 


θεμελιόω 


49; τιθέναι θεμέλιον, Lk. vi. 48; xiv. 29; plur. οἱ θεμέλιοι 
(chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14, 19; 
neut. τὸ dew. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.) ; 
metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of 
an institution or system of truth: 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; the 
rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl- 
edge, Heb. vi. 1 (μετανοίας gen. of apposition [ W. 531 
(494)]); a course of instruction begun by a teacher, 
Ro. xv. 20; Christ is called θεμέλ. i. e. faith in him, 
which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is 
built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth, 
1 Co. iii. 11; τῶν ἀποστόλων (gen. of appos., on account 
of what follows: ὄντος . . . Χριστοῦ, [al. say gen. of origin, 
see ἐποικοδομέω; cf. W. $ 30, 1; Meyer or Ellicott ad 
loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon 
which foundation the Christian church has been built, 
Eph. ii. 20; a solid and stable spiritual possession, on 
which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay 
hold on eternallife, 1 Tim.vi.19; the church is appar- 
ently called dey. as the foundation of the ‘city of God,’ 
2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several 
times also for Doo, a palace, Is. xxv. 2; Jer. vi. 5; 
Amos i. 4, etc.) * 

θεμελιόω : fut. θεμελιώσω ; 1 aor. ἐθεμελίωσα ; Pass., pf. 
ptep. τεθεμελιωμένος ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. τεθεμελίωτο 
(Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48 RG; without auem. cf. W.§ 12, 
9; [B. 33 (29) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]); Sept. for 3" ; [fr. 
Xen. down]; to lay the foundation, to found : prop., τὴν 
γῆν, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26; Prov. iii. 19; Is. xlviii. 13, 
al); τὶ ἐπί τι, Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48. metaph. (Diod. 
11, 68; 15, 1) to make stable, establish, [ A. V. ground]: 
of the soul, [1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing.] 1 Pet. v. 10 [Rec.; 
but T, Tr mrg. in br., the fut.]; pass., Eph. iii. 17 (18); 
Col. i. 23.* 

θεο-δίδακτος, -ov, (θεός and διδακτός), taught of God: 1 
Th. iv. 9. ([Barn. ep. 21, 6 (cf. Harnack's note)]; 
eccles. writ.)* 

θεο-λόγος, -ov, 6, (θεός and λέγω), in Grk. writ. [fr. Aris- 
tot. on] one who speaks (treats) of the gods and divine 
things, versed in sacred science ; (Grossmann, Quaestiones 
Philoneaeji. p. 8, shows that the word is used also by Philo, 
esp. of Moses [cf. de praem. et poen. §9]). This title is 
given to John in the inscription of the Apocalypse, acc. 
to the Rec. text, apparently as the publisher and interpre- 
ter of divine oracles, just as Lucian styles the same per- 
son θεολόγος in Alex. 19 that he calls προφήτης in c. 22. 
The common opinion is that John was called θεολόγος in 
the same sense in which the term was used of Gregory 
of Nazianzus, viz. because he taught the θεότης of the 
λόγος. But then the wonder is, why the copyists did 
not prefer to apply the epithet to him in the title of the 
Gospel* 

θεομαχέω, -ῶ; (θεομάχος); to fight against God: Acts 
xxiii. 9 Ree. (Eur., Xen., Diod., al.; 2 Macc. vii. 19.) * 

θεομάχος, -ov, 6, (θεός and μάχομαι), fighting against 
God, resisting God: Acts v. 89. (Symm.,Job xxvi. 5; 
Prov. ix. 18; xxi. 16; Heracl. Pont. alleg. Homer. 1; 
Leian. Jup. tr. 45.) * 


287 











θεός 


θεόπνευστος, -ον, (θεός and πνέω), inspired by God: 
γραφή; i. e. the contents of Scripture, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [see 
más, 1.1 6.1; σοφίη, [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; ὄνειροι, Plut. 
de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f. ; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (cf. 
308); Nonn. paraphr. ev. Ioan-1, 99]. (ἔμπνευστος also 
is used passively, but ἄπνευστος, εὔπνευστος, πυρίπνευστος, 
ἰδυσδιάπνευστος), actively, [and δυσανάπνευστος appar. 
either act. or pass.; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)* : 

θεός, -od, 6 and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 
46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 
S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 13 3 
Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. 
h. e. 2, 23, 16; [5, 20, 7 ; vit. Const. 2, 55, 1. 59]; cf. W. 
8 8, 2 c.; [B. 12 (11)]; ([on the eight or more proposed 
derivations see Vanicek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after 
Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean- 
ing to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per con- 
tra cf. Max Müller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and S. s. v. 
fin.]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ow, oW and mm; 
a god, a goddess ; 1. a general appellation of deities 
or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; 
once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ 
οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν 
θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles: Acts 
xiv. 11; xix. 26; λεγόμενοι θεοί, 1 Co. viii. 59; of φύσει μὴ 
ὄντες θεοί, Gal. iv. 8; τοῦ θεοῦ ‘Peay [q. v.], Acts vii. 43 ; 
of angels: eigi θεοὶ πολλοί, 1 Co. viii. 5^ (on which cf. 
Philo de somn. i. § 39 ὁ μὲν ἀληθείᾳ θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν, οἱ δ᾽ ἐν 
καταχρήσει λεγόμενοι πλείους). [On the use of the sing. 
θεός (and Lat. deus) as a generic term by (later) heathen 
writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit. 
note D; οἵ. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam. for Nov. 
1848, p. 389 sqq.; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i. 
&ii. ; see Bib. Sacr. for July 1856, p.666 sq., and for addit. 
exx. Nügelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 123; also his Nachho- 
merische Theol. p. 139 sq. ; Stephanus, Thes. s. v.; and 
reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl Lit. and 
Exeg. i. p. 120 note. | 2. Whether Christ is called 
God must be determined from Jn. i.1; xx. 28; 1 Jn. v. 
20; Ro. ix. 5; Tit.ii. 13; Heb. i. 8 sq., etc.; the matter 
is still in dispute among theologians; ef. Grimm, Insti- 
tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq. [and the 
discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab- 
bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. ete. u. s., esp. pp. 42 sqq. 
113 sqq.]. 3. spoken of the only and true Gop: with 
the article, Mt. iii. 9; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts 
ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: ἐκ rod 6. Jn. 
viii. 42, 47 and often in John’s writ.; ὑπὸ τοῦ 6. Lk. i. 
26 [T Tr WH ἀπό]; Acts xxvi. 6; παρὰ τοῦ θ. Jn. viii. 
40; ix. 16 [L T Tr WH here om. art.]; παρὰ τῷ 6. Ro. 
ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mre. br. the art.]; ix. 
14; ἐν τῷ 0. Col. iii. 3; ἐπὶ τῷ 8. Lk. i.47; εἰς τὸν 6. Acts 
xxiv. 15 [Tdf. πρός] ; ἐπὶ τὸν 6. Acts xv. 19; xxvi. 18, 
20; πρὸς τὸν 6. Jn. i. 2; Acts xxiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and 
many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. 
ili. 2; xx.38; Ro. viii. 8, 33; 2 Co. i. 21; v. 195 vi. 7; 
1 Th. ii. 5, etc.; with prepositions: ἀπὸ θεοῦ, Jn. iii. 2; 
xvi. 30; Ro. xiii. 1 [L T Tr WH ὑπό]; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jn. i. 6; 


θεός 


ἐκ θεοῦ, Acts v. 39; 2 Co. ν. 1; Phil. iii. 9; παρὰ θεῷ, 2 
Th. i. 6; 1 Pet. ii..4; κατὰ θεόν, Ro. viii. 27; 2 Co. vii. 
9sq.; cf. W. $ 19s. v. ὁ θεός τινος (gen. of pers.), the 
(guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him : 

Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 26 sq. [22 WH mrg. (see below)]; 
Lk. xx. 37; Jn. xx. 17; Acts iii. 13; xiii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 

16; Heb. xi. 16; Rev. xxi. 3 [without 6; but GT Tr Wi 
txt. om. the phrase]; ὁ θεός μου, i. q. οὗ εἰμί, à καὶ λατρεύω 
(Acts xxvii. 23): Ro. i. 8; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr mrg. br. the 
gen.]; 2 Co. xii. 21; Phil. i. 3; iv. 19; Philem. 4; κύριος ὁ 
Beós cov, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν (in imit. of Hebr. 77 mos mm, 

avos /^, py riw /^, ormriow 77): Mt. iv. 7 ; xxii. 87; 

Mk. xii. 29 [see above]; ; Lk. iv. 8, 12;-x. 27; Acts ii. 

39; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. δ Nov. Test. 3 169; jana Bp. 

Lehtft. as quoted 8. V. κύριος, C. a. init.]; ὁ bbs Kk. πατὴρ 
τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ : Ro. xv. 6; 2 Co. i. 3; xi. 

31 [L T Tr WH om. jy. and Xp.]; Eph. i. 3; Col.i.3 [L 
WH om. καί]; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words 
the gen. depends on ὁ θεός as well as on πατήρ, cf. Fritz- 
sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq.; [Oltramare on Ro. l.c.; 
Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. i. 4; but some would restrict it to 
the latter; cf. e. g. Meyer on Ro. l. c., Eph. Le.; Ellie. 
on Gal.l.c., Eph. 1. c.]; ὁ θεὸς rod κυρ. ἡμ- Ing. Xp. Eph. 
i. 17; ὁ θεὸς x. πατὴρ ἡμῶν, Gal. i.4; Phil iv. 20; 1 Th. 
1. 3; iii. 11, 13; θεὸς ὁ πατήρ, 1 Co. viii. 6 ; ὁ θεὸς κ' πατήρ, 
1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. v. 20; Jas. i. 27; iii. 9 [ Rec.; al. κύριος 
«. T.]; ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Ro.i. 7; 1 Co. 1.8; 2 Co. i. 
2; Eph.i.2; Phil 1. 2; €oli.2; 2 Th.i 2; 1 Tim. i. 
2 [Rec., al. om. ἡμ.7; Philem. 3; [ὁ θεὸς πατήρ, Col. iii. 
17 LT Tr WH (ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; elsewhere with- 
out the art. as] θεοῦ πατρός (in which phrase the two 
words have blended as it were into one, equiv. to a prop. 
name, Germ. Gottvater [ A. V. God the Father]) : Phil. ii. 
11; 1 Pet. i. 2; ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρός, Gal. i. 3; Eph. vi. 23; 
2 Tim. i. 2; Tit. 1. 4; mapa θεοῦ πατρός, 2 Pet. i. 17; 2 
Jn. 3; cf. Wieseler, Com. üb. d. Brief a. d. Galat. p. 10 
sqq. ὁ eds w. gen. of the thing of which God is the au- 
thor [ef. W. $ 30, 1]: τῆς ὑπομονῆς x. τῆς παρακλήσεως, Ro. 
xv. 5; τῆς ἐλπίδος, ib. 13; τῆς εἰρήνης, 33; 1 Th. v. 23; 
Tis παρακλήσεως, 2 Co. i. 3. τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things of 
God,i.e. a. hiscounsels, 1 Co.ii. 11. — f. his interests, 
Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. — y. things due to God, Mt. 
xx1421: Mk: xii» 175 ok xx. 25. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 
things respecting, pertaining to, God, — contextually i. q. 

the sacrificial business of the priest, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii. 

17; v. 1; ef. Xen. rep. Lac. 13, 11; Fritzsche on Rom. 
ii. p. 262 sq. Nom. ὁ θεός for the voc.: Mk. xv. 34; 
Lk. xviii.11, 13; Jn. xx. 28; Actsiv.24[RG; Heb. i. 87]; 
x. 7; ef. W.$ 29, 2; [B. 140 (123)]. τῷ θεῷ, God being 
judge [ef. W. $ 31, 4 a.;: 248 (232 sq.); B. $ 133, 14]: 
after δυνατός, 2 Co. x. 4 ; after ἀστεῖος, Acts vii. 20, (after 
ἄμεμπτος, Sap. x. 5; after μέγας, Jon. lii. 3; see ἀστεῖος, 2). 
For the expressions ἄνθρωπος θεοῦ, δύναμις θεοῦ, vids θεοῦ, 
ete., θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος οἴο., ὁ ζῶν θεός etc., see under ἄνθρω- 
πος 6, δύναμις ἃ., υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, ἐλπίς 2, Caw I. 1, ete. 
4. θεός is used of whatever can in any respect be likened 
to God, or resembles him in any way: Hebraistically i. q. 
God’s representative or vicegerent, of magistrates and 


288 


| hom. 1, 





θεραπεύω 


judges, Jn. x. 84 sq. after Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6, (of the 
wise man, Philo de mut. nom. § 22; quod omn. prob. lib. 
§ 7; [ὁ σοφὸς λέγεται θεὸς τοῦ ἄφρονος . . . θεὸς πρὸς φαν- 
τασίαν x. δόκησιν, quod det. pot. insid. § 44]; πατὴρ κ. 
μήτηρ ἐμφανεῖς εἰσι θεοὶ, μιμούμενοι τὸν ἀγέννητον ἐν τῷ 
ζωοπλαστεῖν, de decal. § 23; ὠνομάσθη (i. 6. Moses) ὅλου 
τοῦ ἔθνους θεὸς x. βασιλεύς, de vita Moys. i. $ 28; [de migr. 
Abr. § 15; de alleg. leg. i. $13]); of the devil, ὁ θεὸς 
τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (see αἰών, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4; the pers. or 
thing to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone 
he lives, 6. g. ἡ κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19. 

θεοσέβεια, -as, 7, (θεοσεβής), reverence towards God, 
godliness: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin. 
p. 985 d.; Sept. Gen. xx. 11; Job xxviii. 28; Bar. v. 4; 
Sir. i. 25 (22); 4 Mace. i. 9 (Fritz.); vii. 6, 22 (var.).)* 

θεοσεβής, -és, (θεός and σέβομαι), worshipping God, 
pious: Jn. ix. 31. (Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen., 
Plat., al.; (cf. Trench ὃ ἘΠῚ ΠΣ 

θεοστυγής, -és, (θεός and στυγέω ; cf. θεομισής, θεομυσής, 
and the subst. θεοστυγία, omitted in the lexx., Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5), hateful to God, exceptionally impious 
and wicked ; (Vulg. deo odibilis) : Ro.i. 30 (Eur. Troad. 
1213 aps yea 396, 602; joined with ἄδικοι in Clem. 
2, where just before occurs οἱ θεὸν μισοῦντες). 
Cf. d ful discussion of the word by Fritzsche, Com. on 
Rom. i. p. 84 sqq.; [and see W. 53 sq. (53) ].* 

θεότης, τητος, ἡ, (deitas, Tertull., Augustine [de civ. 
Dei 7, 17}, deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead: 
Col. ii. 9. (Leian. Icar. 9; Plut. de defect. orac. 10 p. 
415 c.)* 

[Svx. 6eór ms, θειότη 5: θεότ. deity differs from 6eiór. 
divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf. 
Trench $ ii.; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. on Col. l.c.; ; Fritzsche on 
Ro. i. 20.] 

Θεόφιλος, -ov, (θεός and φίλος), Theophilus, a Christian 
to whom Luke inscribed his Gospel and Acts of the 
Apostles: Lk. i. 3; Acts i.1. The conjectures concern- 
ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among 
others) Win. RWB. s. v.; Bleek on Lk. i. 3; [B. D. s.v.]; 
see also under κράτιστος." 

θεραπεία, -as, 7, (θεραπεύω) ; 1. service, rendered by 
any one to another. 2. spec. medical service, curing, 
healing: Lk. ix. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ([Hippocr.], Plat., 
Isocr., Polyb.). 3. by meton. houschold, i. e. body of 
attendants, servants, domestics: Mt. xxiv. 45 RG; Lk. 
xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
469 ; for a"23y, Gen. xlv. 16).* 

Beso. impf. ἐθεράπευον ; fut. θεραπεύσω ; 1 aor. ἐθε- 
ράπευσα; Pass. pres. Éepamevopat ; impf. ἐθεραπευόμην ; 
pf. ptep. τεθεραπευμένος ; 1 aor. ἐθεραπεύθην ; (θέραψ, i. q. 
θεράπων ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to serve, do service: 
τινά, to one; pass. θεραπ. ὑπό twos, Acts xvii. 25. 2 
to heal, cure, restore to health: Mt. xii.10; Mk. vi.5; Lk. 
vi. 7; ix. 6; xili.14; xiv. 3; τινά, Mt.iv. 24; viii. 7, 16, 
etc.; Mk. i. 34; iii. 10; Lk. iv. 23; x. 9; pass., Jn. v. 10; 
Acts iv. 14; v. 16, etc. ; τινὰ ἀπό Tivos, to cure one of any 
disease, Lk. vii. 21; pass., Lk. v.15; viii. 2; θεραπεύειν 
νόσους, μαλακίαν: Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; Mk. iii. 15 


θεράπων 


[R GL, Tr mrg. in br.]; Lk. ix.1; a wound, pass., Rev. 
xiii. 3, 12. 

θεράπων, -ovros, 6, [perh. fr. a root to hold, have about 
one; cf. Eng. retainer; Vanitek p. 396; fr. Hom. down], 
Sept. for 32y, an attendant, servant: of God, spoken of 
Moses discharging the duties committed to him by God, 
Heb. iii. 5 as in- Num. xii. 7sq.; Josh. i. 2; viii. 31, 33 
(ix. 4, 6); Sap. x. 16. [Svx. see dudkovos. ἢ 

Mp fut. θερίσω [B. 37 (32), cf. WH. App. p. 163 
sq-]; 1 aor. ἐθέρισα; 1 aor. pass. ἐθερίσθην; (O€pos) ; 
Sept. * WP; [fr. Aeschyl., Hat. down]; to reap, har- 
vest; a. 2 vH Mt. vi. 26; Lk. xii. 24; Jas. v. 4; [fig. 
Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. — b. in RET expressions about 
sowing and reaping: 4AAos...ó θερίζων, one does the 
work, another gets the reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the 
meaning is *ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater 
number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will 
enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now com- 
menced among them’ [al. do not restrict the reference 
to converted Samaritans]); θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπει- 
pas, unjustly appropriating to thyself the fruits of oth- 
ers’ labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; ὃ ἐὰν... 
θερίσει, as aman has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by 
God) will he be requited, either with reward or pen- 
alty, (his deeds will determine his doom), Gal. vi. 7 
(a proverb: ut sementem feceris, ita metes, Cic. de orat. 
2, 65; [σὺ δὲ ταῦτα αἰσχρῶς μὲν ἔσπειρας κακῶς δὲ ἐθέ- 
ρισας, Aristot. rhet. 3, 3,4; cf. Plato, Phaedr. 260 d.; see 
Meyer on Gal.l.c.]); τί, to receive a thing by way of 
reward or punishment: rà σαρκικά, 1 Co. ix. 11; φθοράν, 
ζωὴν αἰώνιον, Gal. vi. 8, (σπείρειν πυρούς, θερίζειν ἀκάνθας, 
Jer. xii. 13; ὁ σπείρων φαῦλα θερίσει κακά, Prov. xxii. 8; 
ἐὰν σπείρητε κακά, πᾶσαν ταραχὴν καὶ θλίψιν θερίσετε, 
Test. xii. Patr. p. 576 [i.e. test. Levi 8. 137); absol.: of 
the reward of well-doing, Gal. vi. 9; 2Co. ix. 6. c. As 
the crops are cut down with the sickle, θερίζειν is fig. 
used for to destroy, cut off: Rev. xiv. 15 ; with the addi- 
tion of τὴν γῆν, to remove the wicked inhabitants of the 
earth and deliver them up to destruction, ib. 16 [τὴν 
᾿Ασίαν, Plut. reg. et. imper. apophthegm. (Antig. 1), p 
182 a. ].* 

θερισμός, -ov, 6, ΓΟ harvest: i.q.theact of reap- 
ing, Jn. iv. 35; fig. of the gathering of men into the 
kingdom of God, ibid. i.q. the time of reaping, i. e. 
fig. the time of final judgment, when the righteous are 
gathered into the kingdom of God and the wicked are 
delivered up to destruction, Mt. xiii. 30, 39; Mk. iv. 29. 
i. q. the crop to be reaped, i. e. fig. a multitude of men to 
be taught how to obtain salvation, Mt. ix. 37 sq.; Lk. x. 2; 
ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμός, the crops are ripe for the harvest, 
i. e. the time is come to destroy the wicked, Rey. xiv. 
15. (Sept. for VSP5 rare in Grk. writ., as Xen. oec. 
18, 3; Polyb. 5, 95, 5.) * 

θεριστής, -o0, 0, (θερίζω), a reaper: Mt. xiii. 
(Bel and the Dragon 33; Xen., Dem., Aristot., 
al.)* 

θερμαίνω : Mid., pres. θερμαίνομαι; impf. ἐθερμαινόμην:; 
(θερμός) ; fr. Hom. down; to make warm, to heat; mid. 

19 


30, 39. 
Plut., 


289 








θεωρέω 


to warm one’s self: Mk. xiv. 54, 67; Jn. xviii. 18, 25; 
Jas. ii. 16.* 

θέρμη (and θέρμα; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 331, [Ruther- 
ford, New Phryn. p. 4147), -gs, 9, heat: Acts xxviii. 3. 
(Keel. iv. 11; Job vi. 17; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 7; Thuc., Plat., 
Menand., al.) * 

θέρος, -ovs, τό, (θέρω to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 32; 
Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi 30. (From Hom. down; Hebr. 
rp Prov. vi. 8; Gen. viii. 22.) * 

Θεσσαλονικεύς, -éos, ὁ, α Thessalonian: 
xxvir25 1 ΤῊ. lho ΤᾺ 

Θεσσαλονική, -ῆς, ἡ, Thessalonica (now Saloniki), a 
celebrated and populous city, situated on the Thermaic 
Gulf, the capital of the second [(there were four; cf. Liv. 
xly. 29)] division of Macedonia and the residence of a 
Roman governor and quaestor. It was anciently called 
Therme, but was rebuilt by Cassander, the son of Anti- 
pater, and called by its new name [which first appears 
in Polyb. 28, 11, 2] in honor of his wife Thessalonica, 
the sister of Alexander the Great; cf. Strabo 7, 330. 
Here Paul the apostle founded a Christian church: Acts 
Xvil. 1, 11, 13; Phil. iv. 16; 2 Tim. iv.10. [BB. DD. 
S. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 225 sqq.]* 

Θευδᾶς [prob. contr. fr. Aedd@pos, W. 103 (97); esp. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15; on its inflection cf. B. 20 (18) ], 
6, Theudas, an impostor who instigated a rebellion which 
came to a wretched end in the time of Augustus: Acts 
v. 36. Josephus (antt. 20, 5, 1) makes mention of one 
Theudas, a magician, who came into notice by pretend- 
ing that he was a prophet and was destroyed when 
Cuspius Fadus governed Judza in the time of Claudius. 
Accordingly many interpreters hold that there were two 
insurgents by the name of Theudas; while others, with 
far greater probability, suppose that the mention of 
Thendas is ascribed to Gamaliel by an anachronism on 
the part of Luke. On the different opinions of others 
cf. Meyer on Acts lc.; Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim in 
Schenkel v. 510 sq. ; [esp. Hackett in B. D. s. v.].* 

θεωρέω, -ὦ ; impf. ἐθεώρουν ; [fut. θεωρήσω, Jn. vii. 3 T 
Tr WH]; 1 aor. ἐθεώρησα ; (θεωρός a spectator, and this 
fr. θεάομαι, q. v. [cf. Vaniéek p. 407; L. and S.s. v.; 
Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.]); [fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. for 789 and Chald. nn; 
1. to be a. spectator, look at, behold, Germ. schauen, (the 
θεωροί were men who attended the games or the sacri- 
fices as publie deputies ; cf. Grimm on 2 Macc. iv. 19); 
absol.: Mt. xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. xxiii. 35; foll. 
by indir. disc., Mk. xii. 41; xv. 47; used esp. of persons 
and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy : 
τινά, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10, 16 sq. 19; Actsiii. 16; xxv. 24; 
Rev. xi. 11 sq.; 6 θεωρῶν τὸν υἱὸν θεωρεῖ τὸν πατέρα, 
the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn. 
xii. 45; τινά with ptep. [B. 301 (258) : Mk. v. 15]; Lk. 
χ: 18: Jn: vi..193 [exe Lise 12, CCS ote mom een] 
τί, Lk. xiv. 29; xxi.6; xxiii. 48; Actsiv. 13; τὰ σημεῖα, 
Jn.ii.23; vi. 2 L Tr WH; Acts viii. 13, (θαυμαστὰ τέρατα, 
Sap. xix. 8); τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Jn. vii. 3; τί with 
ptep., Jn. xx. 6; Acts vii. 56; x. 11; foll. by ὅτι, Acts 


Acts xx. 4; 


θεωρία 


xix. 26; to view attentively, take a view of, survey: τί, 
Mt. xxviii. 1; to view mentally, consider: foll. by orat. 
obliq., Heb. vii. 4. 2. to see; i.e. a. to perceive 
with the eyes : πνεῦμα, Lk. xxiv. 37; τινά with a ptep., ibid. 
39; τινά, ὅτι; Jn. ix. 8; τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος (after the Hebr. ; 
see πρόσωπον, 1 a.), i. gq. to enjoy the presence of one, 
have intercourse with him, Acts xx. 38; οὐκέτι θεωρεῖν 
Twa, used of one from whose sight a person has been 
withdrawn, Jn. xiv. 19; οὐ θεωρεῖ ὁ κόσμος τὸ πνεῦμα, i. 6. 
so to speak, has no eyes with which it can see the Spirit; 
he cannot render himself visible to it, cannot give it his 
presence and power, Jn. xiv. 17. — b. to discern, descry: 
τί, Mk. v. 38; τινά, Mk. ii. 11; Acts ix. 7. c. to ascer- 
tain, find out, by seeing : rwa with a pred, ace., Acts xvii. 
22; τί with ptep., Acts xvii. 16; xxviii. 6; ὅτι, Mk. xvi. 
4; Jn. iv. 19; xii. 19; Acts xix. 26; xxvii. 10; foll. by 
indir. disc., Acts xxi. 20; Hebraistically (see εἴδω, I. 5) 
i. q. to get knowledge of: Jn. vi. 62 (τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου 
ἀναβαίνοντα the Son of Man by death ascending; cf. Lücke, 
Meyer [yet cf. Weiss in the 6te Aufl.], Baumg.-Crusius, 
in loc.) ; τὸν θάνατον i. e. to die, Jn. viii. 51; and on the oth- 
er hand, τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Χριστοῦ, to be a partaker of the 
glory, i. e. the blessed condition in heaven, which Christ 
enjoys, Jn. xvii. 24, cf. 22. [Comp.: dva-, παρα-θεωρέω. ] * 

[ϑυν. θεωρεῖν, θεᾶσθαι, ὁρᾶν, σκοπεῖν: Bewp. is 
used primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one 
who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose; θεωρ. 
would be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting 
an army, θεᾶσθ. of a lay spectator looking at the parade. 
θεωρ. as denoting the careful observation of details can even 
be contrasted with*épay in so far as the latter denotes only 
perception in the general; so used θεωρεῖν quite coincides 
with σκοπ. Schmidt i.ch. 11; see also Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on 
Mt. vii. 3. Cf. s. vv. dpdw, σκοπέω.] 

θεωρία, -as, 7, (θεωρός, on which see θεωρέω init.) ; fr. 
[Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. aviewing,beholding. 2. 
that which is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. xxiii. 48 (3 
Mace. v. 24).* 

θήκη, -ης, ἡ, (τίθημι) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; that 
in which a thing is put or laid away, a receptacle, reposi- 
tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. xviii. 
11; Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144.* 

θηλάζω; 1 aor. ἐθήλασα;; (Andy a breast, [cf. Peile, 
Etym. p. 124 sq.]) ; 1. trans. to give the breast, give 
suck, to suckle: Mt. xxiv. 19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23, 
(Lys. Aristot, al.; Sept. for prm; μαστοὶ ἐθήλασαν, 
Lk. xxiii. 29 RG. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. xxi. 16 
(Aristot., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. for pr); μαστούς, Lk. 
xi. 27; Job iii. 12; Cant. viii. 1; Joel ii. 16; Theocr. 
rie Us 

θῆλυς, -eva, τυ, [cf. θηλάζω, init.], of the female sex; ἡ 
θήλεια, subst. a woman, a female: Ro. i. 26 sq.; also τὸ 
θῆλυ, Mt. xix. 4; Mk. x. 6; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27; 
vii. 2; Ex. i. 16, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

θήρα [Lat. fera; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey, 
Vaniéek p. 415; cf. Curtius $314], -as, ἡ; fr. Hom. 
down; a hunting of wild beasts to destroy them ; hence, 
figuratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V. a 
trap], Ro. xi. 9, on which cf. Fritzsche.* 


290 





θησαυρός. 


θηρεύω: 1 aor. inf. θηρεῦσαι : (fr. θήρα, as ἀγρεύω fr. 
ἄγρα [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]); fr. Hom. down; to go a 
hunting, to hunt, to catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wait 


Jor, strive to ensnare; to catch artfully: τὶ ἐκ στόματός 


τινος, Lk. xi. 54.* 
θηριομαχέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐθηριομάχησα; (Onpropaxos) ; lo 


Sight with wild beasts (Diod. 3,48, 7; Artem. oneir. 2, 54; 


5, 49); ef ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, 1 Co. xv. 32 — these 
words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con- 
demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain them 
tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious 
men (so θηριομαχεῖν in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [ete.]; οἵοις 
θηρίοις μαχόμεθα says Pompey, in App. bell. civ. 2, 61; 
see θηρίον). ‘The former opinion encounters the objec- 
tion that Paul would not have omitted this most terrible 
of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. xi. 23 sqq.* 

θηρίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of 0p; hence a little beast, little 
animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171 e.; of bees, "Theocr. 19, 6; 
but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi- 
tive; the later dimin. is θηρίδιον [cf. Epictet. diss. 2, 9, 
67); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for rmn and 7973, an ani- 
mal; a wild animal, wild beast, beast: prop., Mk. i. 13; 
Acts x. 12 Rec.; xi. 6; xxviii. 4sq.; Heb. xii. 20; [Jas. 
iii. 7]; Rev. vi. 8; in Rev. xi. 7 and chh. xiii.-xx., under 
the fig. of a ‘beast’ is depicted Antichrist, both his 
person and his kingdom and power, (see ἀντίχριστος); 
metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious, Tit. i. 
12 [colloq. ‘ugly dogs’], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273; Plut. 
439; nub. 184; [ef. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never 
with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other 
exx. are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 379; θηρία 
ἀνθρωπόμορφα, Ignat. Smyrn. 4, cf. ad Ephes. 7). [Syn. 
see ζῶον. ] * 3 

θησαυρίζω ; 1 aor. ἐθησαύρισα ; pf. pass. ptep. τεθησαυ- 
ρισμένος ; (θησαυρός) ; fr. Hdt. down; to gather and lay 
up, to heap up, store up: to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3; 
τινί, Lk. xii. 21; 2 Co. xii. 14; τί, 1 Co. xvi. 2; θησαυροὺς 
ἑαυτῷ, Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; 1. 4. to keep in store, store up, reserve: 
pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7; inetaph. so to live from day to day as 
to increase either the bitterness or the happiness of one's 
consequent lot: ὀργὴν ἑαυτῷ, Ro. ii. 55 κακά, Prov. i. 18; 
ζωήν, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, (εὐτυχίαν, App. Samn. 4, 3 [i. e. 
vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.]; τεθησαυρισμένος κατά τινος 
φθόνος, Diod. 20, 36). [Cowr.: dro- θησαυρίζω.} * 

θησαυρός, -ov, 6, (fr. ΘΕΩ [τίθημι] with the paragog. 
term.-avpos); Sept.often for *YiN ; Lat. thesaurus; i. e. 
1. the place in which goods and precious things are col- 
lected and laid up; — a. a casket, coffer, or other recep- 
tacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt.ii. 1d. b. @ 
treasury (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ; 
1 Mace. iii. 29). ο. storehouse, repository, magazine, 
(Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, ete.; App. Pun. 88, 95): 
Mt. xiii. 52 [cf. παλαιός, 1]; metaph. of the soul, as the 
repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, etc. : [Mt. xii. 
35 GL T Tr WH, 35°]; with epex. gen. τῆς καρδίας, ibid. 
xii. 35* Rec.; Lk. vi. 45. 2. the things laid up in a 
treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. xii. 
88 sa.; Heb. xi. 26. θησαυρὸν ἔχειν ἐν οὐρανῷ, to have 


θυγγάνω 


treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those 
to whom God has appointed eternal salvation: Mt. xix. 
21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xviii. 22; something precious, Mt. 
xiii. 44; used thus of the light of the gospel, 2 Co. iv. 7; 
with an epex. gen. τῆς σοφίας (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 9; Plat. 
Phil. p. 15 e.) «. γνώσεως, i. q. πᾶσα 7j σοφία κ. γνῶσις ὡς 
θησαυροί, Col. ii. 3.* 

θιγγάνω [prob. akin to τεῖχος, fingo, fiction, etc. ; Cur- 
tius $ 145]: 2 aor. ἔθιγον ; to touch, handle: μηδὲ Otyns 
touch not sc. impure things, Col. ii. 21 [cf. ἅπτω, 2 c.]; 
τινός, Heb. xii. 20 ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Trage., al.); 
like the Hebr. y23, to do violence to, injure: τινός, Heb. 
xi. 28 (Eur. Iph. Aul. 1351; ὧν ai βλάβαι αὗται θιγγά- 
vovot, Act. Thom. ὃ 12). [Sxw. see dzro, 2 c.] ἢ 

6X(go; Pass, pres. θλίβομαι; pf. ptep. τεθλιμμένος ; 
[allied with flagrum, affliction; fr. Hom. down]; to press 
(as grapes), press hard upon: prop. twa [ A. V. throng], 
Mk. iii. 9; ὁδὸς τεθλιμμένη a compressed way, i. e. nar- 
row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. to trouble, 
afflict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo) : τινά, 2 Th. i. 6; pass. 
(Vulg. tribulor, [also angustior]; tribulationem. patior) : 
2 Co.i.6; iv. 8; vii. 5; [1 Th. iii. 4; 2 Th.i. 7]; 1 Tim. 
v. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (οἱ θλίβοντες for D'x in Sept.) 
[Comp. : dro; συν-θλίβω. * 

θλίψις, or θλῖψις [so L Tr], (cf. W. $ 6, 1 e.; Lipsius, 
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -eos, ἡ, (Me), prop. a 
pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga- 
len); in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afjlic- 
tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vule. tribulatio, also 
pressura (2 Co. i. 4°; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17); 
and in Col. i. 24 passio]) ; (Sept. for ny, also for WW, 
yn», etc.): Mt. xxiv. 9; Acts vii. 11; xi. 19; Ro. xii. 12; 
2 Co.i.4,8; iv.17; vi 4; vii.4; viii. 2; 2 Th. i. 6; 
Rev.i.9; ii. 9, 22; vii. 14; joined with στενοχωρία [cf. 
Trench $ lv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq.; 
Is. [viii. 22]; xxx. 6); with ἀνάγκη, 1 Th. iii. 7; with 
διωγμός, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv. 17; 2 Th.i.4; of the afflic- 
tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities 
of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24; of the straits 
of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the 
word a wider reference]; Jas. i. 27; of the distress of 
a woman in child-birth. Jn. xvi. 21. θλίψιν ἔχω (i. q. 
θλίβομαι), Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28; Rev.ii. 10; θλίψις 
ἐπί τινα ἔρχεται, Acts vii. 11; ἐν θλίψει, 1 Th. i. 6. plur.: 
Acts vii. 10; xiv. 22; xx. 23; Ro. v. 3; Eph. iii. 13; 1 
Th. iii. 3; Heb.x.33; roo Χριστοῦ, the afflictions which 
Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, his fol- 
lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see ἀνταναπλη- 
póo); θλίψις τῆς καρδίας (x. συνοχή), anxiety, burden of 
heart, 2 Οο. 11. 4; θλίψιν ἐπιφέρειν (LT Tr WH ἐγείρειν, 
see ἐγείρω, 4 c.) τοῖς δεσμοῖς τινος, to increase the misery 
of my imprisonment by causing me anxiety, Phil. i. 16 
(17).* 

θνήσκω: pf. τέθνηκα, inf. τεθνάναι and L T Tr WH 
τεθνηκέναι (in Acts xiv. 19), ptep. τεθνηκώς: plupf. 3 
pers. sing. ἐτεθνήκει (Jn. xi. 21 Rec.); [fr. Hom. down]; 
Sept. for mp; to die; pf. to be dead: Mt. ii. 20; Mk. xv. 
44; Lk. vii. 12 [L br.]; viii. 49; Jn. xi. 21, Rec. in 39 


291 





θρῆνος 


and 41, 44; xii.1[T WH om. L Tr br.]; xix. 33; Acts 
xiv. 19; xxv. 19; metaph., of the loss of spiritual life: 
ζῶσα τέθνηκε, i. e. κἂν δοκῇ ζῆν ταύτην τὴν αἰσθητὴν ζωήν, 
τέθνηκε κατὰ πνεῦμα (Theoph.): 1 Tim. v. 6 (Philo de 
prof. $ 10 ζῶντες ἔνιοι τεθνήκασι καὶ τεθνηκότες ζῶσι). 
[Cowr.: ἀπο-, συν-απο-θνήσκω. * 

θνητός, -7, -óv, (verbal adj. fr. θνήσκω), [fr. Hom. 
down], liable to death, mortal: Ro. vi. 12; viii. 11; 1 Co. 
xv. 53 sq.; 2Co.iv.11; v.4. [θνητός subject to death, 
and so still living; νεκρός actually dead.] * 

θορυβάζω: (θόρυβος, «. v.); to trouble, disturb, (i. e. 
τυρβάζω, q. V.); Pass. pres. 2 pers. sing. θορυβάζῃ in Lk. 
x.41 LT Tr WH after codd. καὶ BCL ete. (Not found 
elsewh. [ Soph. Lex. s. v. quotes Euseb. of Alex. (Migne, 
Patr. Graec. vol. Ixxxvi. 1) p. 444 c.].) * 

θορυβέω, -d: impf. ἐθορύβουν; pres. pass. θορυβοῦμαι; 
(θόρυβος) ; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to make a noise or up- 
roar, be turbulent. 2. trans. to disturb, throw into con- 
fusion: τὴν πόλιν, to “set the city on an uproar,” Acts 
xvii. 5; pass. to be troubled in mind, Acts xx. 10 [al. here 
adhere to the outward sense]; to wail tumultuously, 
Mt. ix. 23; Mk. v. 39.* 

θόρυβος, -ov, 6, (akin to θρόος, τύρβη, τυρβάζω, [but 
τύρβη etc. seem to come from another root; cf. Curtius 
$ 250]), a noise, tumult, uproar: of persons wailing, Mk. 
v. 38; of a clamorous and excited multitude, Mt. xxvii. 
24; of riotous persons, Acts xx. 1; xxi. 34; a tumult, 
as a breach of publie order, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; 
Acts xxiv. 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 
several times in Sept.) * 

θραύω: pf. pass. ptep. τεθραυσμένος; fr. [Hdt.], Aes- 
chyl. down, to break, break in pieces, shatter, smite through, 
(Ex. xv. 6; Num. xxiv. 17, etc.; 2 Mace. xv. 16): τε- 
θραυσμένοι, broken by calamity [A. V. bruised], Lk. iv. 
18 (19) fr. Is. lviii. 6 for Dy3¥4. [Sxw. see ῥήγνυμι.] * 

θρέμμα, -ros, τό, (τρέφω), whatever is fed or nursed; 


hence 1. a ward, nursling, child, (Soph., Eur., Plat., 
als): 2. a flock, cattle, esp. sheep and goats: Jn. iv. 
12. (Xen. oec. 20, 23; Plat, Diod. Joseph., Plut., 


Lcian., Aelian, al.)* 

6pnvéo, -à : impf. éOprvovv; fut. θρηνήσω ; 1 aor. ἐθρή- 
moa; (θρῆνος. q. v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for >on, 
pp» ete. ; 1. to lament, to mourn: Jn. xvi. 20; of the 
singers of dirges, [to wail], Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32. 2: 
to bewail, deplore: twa, Lk. xxiii. 27.* 

[On θρηνέω to lament, κόπτομαι to smite the breast in grief, 
λυπέομαι to be pained, saddened, πενθέω to mourn, cf. Trench 
§ Ixv. and see κλαίω fin.; yet note that in classic Grk. Aur. 
is the most comprehensive word, designating every species 
of pain of body or soul; and that wev@éw expresses a self- 
contained grief, never violent in its manifestations; like our 
Eng. word * mourn ” it is associated by usage with the death 
of kindred, and like it used pregnantly to suggest that event. 
See Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 83.] 

θρῆνος, -ov, 6, (θρέομαι to cry aloud, to lament; cf. 
Germ. Thréne [(?), rather drónen; Curtius $ 8177), a 
lamentation: Mt.ii.18 Ree. (Sept. for mp also 2; 
O. T. Apocr.; Hom., Pind., Tragg., Xen. Ages. 10, 3; 
Plat., al.)* 


θρησκεία 


θρησκεία Tdf. -ia [see I, «], (a later word; Ion. θρησκίη 
in Hat. [2, 18. 817), -as, ἡ, (fr. θρησκεύω, and this fr. 
θρῆσκος, d. V.; hence apparently primarily fear of the 
gods); religious worship, esp. external, that which consists 
in ceremonies: hence in plur. θρησκίας ἐπιτελεῖν μυρίας, 
Hat. 2, 37; καθιστὰς ἁγνείας re kai θρησκείας καὶ καθαρ- 
povs, Dion. Hal. 2, 63; univ. religious worship, Jas. i. 
26 sq.; with gen. of the obj. [W. 187 (176)] ràv ayyé- 
Xov, Col. ii. 18 (τῶν εἰδώλων, Sap. xiv. 27; τῶν δαιμόνων, 
Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 2; τῶν θεῶν, ib. 9, 9, 14; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Hdian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.]; often in Josephus [cf. 
Krebs, Observv. ete. p. 339 sq.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 
7); religious discipline, religion: ἡμετέρα θρησκεία, of 
Judaism, Acts xxvi. 5 (τὴν ἐμὴν θρησκείαν καταλιπών, put 
into the mouth of God by Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 1; with 
gen. of the subj. τῶν "Iovdaiwv, 4 Macc. v. 6, 13 (12); 
Joseph. antt. 12, 5, 4; 6p. κοσμική, i. 6. worthy to be 
embraced by all nations, a world-religion, b. j. 4, 5, 
2; piety, περὶ τ. θεόν, antt. 1, 13, 1; κατὰ τὴν ἔμφυτον 
θρησκείαν τῶν βαρβάρων πρὸς τὸ βασιλικὸν ὄνομα, Charit. 
7, 6 p. 165, 18 ed. Reiske; of the reverence of An- 
tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Joseph. antt. 
13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. 6; [esp. Trench 
§ xlviii.]." 

θρῆσκος (T WH θρησκός, cf. [Τὰ Proleg. p. 101]; 
W.§6,1¢e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 28), του, 6, 
fearing or worshipping God; religious, (apparently fr. 
tpew to tremble; hence prop. trembling, fearful; cf. J. G. 
Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121; on the 
different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur- 
tius $ 316 connects with 6pa; hence ‘to adhere to,’ ‘be 
a votary of’; cf. Vanitek p. 395]): Jas. i. 26. [Cf. 
Trench § xlviii.]* 

θριαμβεύω: 1 aor. ptep. θριαμβεύσας ; (θρίαμβος, a hymn 
sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus; among 
the Romans, a triumphal procession [ Lat. triumphus, with 
which word it is thought to be allied; cf. Vaniéek p. 
317]); 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion. 
ITal, App., Plut., Hdian., al.) ; τινά, over one (as Plut. 
"Thes. and Rom. comp. 4): Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies 
the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers 
through Christ's death). 2. by a usage unknown to 
prof. auth., with a Hiphil or causative force (cf. W. p. 23 
and § 38, 1 [cf. B. 147 (129) ]), with the acc. of a pers., to 
cause one to triumph, i. e. metaph. to grant one complete 
success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative 
sense; see Mey. ad loc.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.].* 

θρίξ, τριχός, dat. plur. θριξί, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], the 
hair; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44; 
xxi 18; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3; Acts xxvii. 34; 1 Pet. iii. 3 
[Lehm.om.]; Rey. i. 14; with τῆς κεφαλῆς added (Hom. 
Od. 13, 399. 431), Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 38; xii. 17. b. 
the hair of animals: Rev. ix. 8; ἐνδεδυμ. τρίχας καμήλου, 
with a garment made of camel’s hair, Mk. i. 6, cf. Mt. 
lil. 4; év... τριχῶν καμηλείων πλέγμασιν περιεπάτησαν, 
Clem. Alex. strom. 4 p. 221 ed. Sylb.* 

θροέω, -@: (Apods clamor, tumult); in Grk. writ. to cry 
aloud, make a noise by outcry; in the N. T. to trouble, 


292 


θυγάτηρ 


frighten; Pass. pres. @poodpat; to be troubled in mind, to 
be frightened, alarmed: Mt. xxiv. 6 [B. 243 (209)]; Mk. 
xiii. 7; 2 Th. ii. 2; [1 aor. ptep. θροηθέντες, Lk. xxiv. 37 
Trmrg. WH mrg.]. (Cant. v. 4.) * 

θρόμβος, -ov, ὁ, [allied with τρέφω in the sense to 
thicken; Vaniéek p. 307], a large thick drop, esp. of 
clotted blood ( Aeschyl. Eum. 184) ; with αἵματος added 
(Aeschyl. choeph. 533, 546; Plat. Critias p. 120 a.), 
Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass. (see WH. App. 
ad loc.) ].* 

θρόνος, -ov, 6, (OPA to sit; cf. Curtius § 316), [fr. 
Hom. down], Sept. for N93, a throne, seat, i. e. a chair of 
state having a footstool; assigned in the N. T. to kings, 
hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52; 
Actsii.30. metaph.to God, the governor of the world: 
Mt. v. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts vii. 49 (Is. lxvi.1); Rev.i.4; 
iii. 21; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, etc.; Heb. iv. 16; viii. 1; xii. 2. to 
the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine 
administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21; xx. 
11; xxii. 3; hence the divine power belonging to Christ, 
Heb.i.8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor. 
p. 807 b.): Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to 
elders: Rev.iv.4; xi. 16. to Satan: Rev. ii. 13; cf. 
Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see 
θηρίον) : Rev. xvi. 10. θρόνος is used by meton. of one 
who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in plur. 
of angels: Col. i. 16 [see Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]. 

Ovárepa, -ov, τά, (and once -as, 7, Rev. i. 11 Lehm. 
Θυάτειραν [ cf. Tdf. ad loc; W H.A pp. p. 156 ; B. 18 (16) ]), 
Thyatira, a city of Lydia, formerly Pelopia and Euhippia 
(Plin. h. n. 5, 31), now Akhissar, a colony of Macedonian 
Greeks, situated between Sardis and Pergamum on the 
river Lycus; its inhabitants gained their living by 
traffic and the art of dyeing in purple: Acts xvi. 14; 
Rev.i.11; 1.18, 24. [B.D.s.v.]* 

θυγάτηρ, gen. θυγατρός, dat. θυγατρί, acc. θυγατέρα, voc. 
θύγατερ, plur. θυγατέρες, ace. -épas, ἡ, (of the same root 
as Gothic dauhtar, Eng. daughter, Germ. Tochter [ Curtius 
$318; Vanicek p. 415]); Hebr. n3; [fr. Hom. down]; 
a daughter: prop., Mt. ix. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts 
vii.21,ete. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc. 
cf. W. $29,2; B. 8129 ἃ. 5; WH. App. p. 158] in kindly 
address: Mt. ix. 22; Mk. v. 34 [L Tr WH θυγάτηρ] ; Lk. 
viii. 48 [Tr WH 6vyárgp], (see υἱός 1a. fin., τέκνον b. a.). 
b. in phrases modelled after the Hebr.: a. a daughter 
of God i. e. acceptable to God, rejoicing in God's pecu- 
liar care and protection: 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap. 
ix. 7; see υἱὸς τ. θεοῦ 4, τέκνον b. y-). B. withthe name 
of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its 
inhabitants and citizens (very often so in the O. T., as 
Is. xxxvii. 22; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 19; Zeph. iii. 14, ete.) ; 
in the N. T. twice ἡ 6vy. Xiówi. e. inhabitants of Jeru- 
salem: Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15, (Is. i. 8; x. 32; Zech. ix. 
9, etc. ; see Σιών, 2). — v. θυγατέρες Ἱερουσαλήμ, women 
of Jerusalem: Lk. xxiii. 28. δ. female descendant: at 
θυγατέρες ' Aapóv, women of Aaron's posterity, Lk. i. 5; 
θυγάτηρ ᾿Αβραάμ daughter of Abraham, i.e. a woman 
tracing her descent from Abraham, Lk. xiii. 16, (4 Macc. 


xv. 28 (25); Gen. xxviii. 8; xxxvi. 2; Judg. xi. 40; Is. 
xvi. 2, etc.). 

θυγάτριον, -ov, τό, a little daughter: Mk. v. 23; vii. 25. 
[Strattis Incert.5; Menand., Athen., Plut. reg. et imper. 
Apophtheg. p. 179 e. (Alex. 6); al.]* 

θύελλα, -ns, 7, (θύω to boil, foam, rage, as ἄελλα fr. do, 
dnp), a sudden storm, tempest, whirlwind: Heb. xii. 18. 
(Deut. iv. 11; v. 22; Hom., Hes. Tragg. al) .[Cf. 
Schmidt ch. 55, 11; Trench § xxiii. fin.] * 

θύϊνος [WH om. the dizer. (cf. I, «, fin.) ], n, τον, (fr. 6vía 
or Ova, the citrus, an odoriferous North-African tree 
used as incense [and for inlaying; B. D. s.v. Thyine 
wood; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 401 sq. ]), 
thyine (Lat. citrinus): ξύλον, Rev. xviii. 12 as in Diosc. 
1, 21; cf. Plin. h. n. 13, 30 (16).* 

θυμίαμα, -ros, τό, (θυμιάω), Sept. mostly for mop, an 
aromatic substance burnt, incense: generally in plur., 
Rey. v. 8; viii. 3 sq.; xviii. 13; POM τοῦ @., when the 
incense is burned, Lk. i. 10; θυσιαστήριον τοῦ θυμ. ib. 11. 
(Soph., Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Joseph. ; Sept.) * 

θυμιατήριον, -ov, τό, (θυμιάω), prop. a utensil for fumi- 
gating or burning incense [cf. W. 96 (91)]; hence 1. 
a censer: 2 Chr. xxvi. 19; Ezek. viii. 11; Hdt. 4, 162; 
Thue. 6, 46; Diod. 13,3; Joseph. antt. 4,2,4; 8,3, 8; Ael. 
vh: 1951; 2. the altar of incense: Philo, rer. div. 
haer. $46 ; vit. Moys. iii. $ 7; Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 8; 3, 8 
3; b.j.5,5,5; Clem. Alex.; Orig.; and so in Heb. ix. 
4 [ where Tr mre. br.), also 2 Tr mrg. in br.], where see 
Bleek, Lünemann, Delitzsch, Ue in opp. to those 
[(A. V. ineluded)] who think it means censer; [yet cf. 
Harnack in the Stud. τι. Krit. for 1876, p. 572 sq.].* 

θυμιάω, -@: 1 aor. inf. θυμιᾶσαι [RG -doa]; (fr. θῦμα, 
and this fr. θύω, q. v.); in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Hdt., 
Plat. down; Sept. for "ep and vb Opn; to burn incense: 
ΤῈ τ 95 

θυμομαχέω, -ῶ; (θυμός and μάχομαι) ; to carry on war 
with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.); to 
be very angry, be exasperated [ A. V. highly displeased]: 
τινί, with one, Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. 
p. 62 sq.* 

θυμός, -o, ὁ, (fr. θύω to rush along or on, be in a heat, 
breathe violently; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl. 
p. 419 e., θυμὸς ἀπὸ τῆς θύσεως x. ζέσεως τῆς ψυχῆς; ac- 
cordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were 
in the body, and the rage with which the man pants and 
swells), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. often for ‘8 anger, and 
72M) excandescentia; alsofor }17M aestus. In the N. T. 
1. passion, angry heat, (excandescentia, Cic. Tuse. 4, 9, 
21), anger forthwith boiling up and soon subsiding again, 
(ὀργή. on the other hand, denotes indignation which has 
arisen gradually and become more settled; [cf. (Plato) 
deff. 415 e. θυμός: ὁρμὴ βίαιος ἄνευ λογισμοῦ: νόσος τάξεως 
ψυχῆς ἀλογίστου. ὀργή παράκλησις τοῦ θυμικοῦ εἰς τὸ 
τιμωρεῖσθαι, Greg. Naz. carm. 34 θυμὸς μέν ἐστιν ἀθρόος 
ζέσις φρενός, ὀργὴ δὲ θυμὸς ἐμμένων, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4 
ἐκ δὲ τῆς πικρίας θυμός, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ θυμοῦ ὀργή; cf. Aristot. 
rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope’s note]; hence we read in Sir. 
xlviii. 10 κοπάσαι ὀργὴν πρὸ θυμοῦ, before it glows and 


2 


θυγάτριον 293 


θύρα 


bursts forth; [see further, on the distinction betw. the 
two words, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. iii. 
ch. 142]): Lk. iv. 28; Acts xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col. 
iii. 8; Heb. xi. 27; ὁ 6. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xiv. 19; xv.1, 7; 
xvi. 1; ἔχειν θυμόν, to be in a passion, Rev. xii. 12 (Ael. 
v. h. 1, 14); ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός (as Sept. Mic. v. 15; Isoer. 
p. 249 c.; Hdian. 8, 4,1; al.): Ro. ii. 8 (Ree. in the in- 
verse order; so Deut. ix. 19; xxix. 23, 28, [ef. Trench 
τι. s.]); plur. θυμοί impulses and outbursts of anger [W. 
176 (166); B. 77 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20, (2 
Mace. iv. 25, 38; ix. 7; x. 35; xiv. 45; 4 Mace. xviii. 
20; Sap. x. 3; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.]; Plat. Pro- 
tag. p. 323 e.; [Phileb. p. 40 e. ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13]; 
Polyb. 3, 10, 5; Diod. 13, 28; Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 2; Plut. 
Cor. 1; al.). 2. glow, ardor: 6 οἶνος τοῦ θυμοῦ [see 
oivos, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine, Germ. 
Glutwein (which either drives the drinker mad or kills 
him with its deadly heat; cf. Is. li. 17, 22; Jer. xxxii. 1 
(xxv. 15) sqq.): Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3; with rod θεοῦ 
added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10 ; with 
τῆς ὀργῆς Tov θεοῦ added [ A. V. fierceness], Rev. xvi. 19 ; 
xix. 15; ef. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269 
note.* 

θυμόω, -G: 1 aor. pass. ἐθυμώθην; (θυμός); to cause 
one to become incensed, to provoke to anger; pass. (Sept. 
often for 19M) to be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ. 
fr. [ Aeschyl.], Hdt. down.) * 

θύρα, -as, ἡ, (fr. θύω to rush in, prop. that through 
which a rush is made; hence Germ. Thiir [ Eng. door ; 
Curtius $ 319]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for n73 and 
13, sometimes also for jj; a (house) door; [in plur. 
i.q. Lat. fores, folding doors; cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 
(21); ef. πύλη]; a. prop.: κλείειν etc. τὴν θ., Mt. vi. 
6; Lk.xiii.25; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19, 
26; Acts xxi. 30; ἀνοίγειν, Acts v. 19; pass. Acts xvi. 
26 sq. ; κρούειν, Acts xii. 13; διὰ τῆς θ. Jn. x. 1 sq. ; πρὸς 
τὴν θ., Mk. i. 33; xi.4 [Tr WH om. τήν; cf. W. 123 
(116)]; Acts ili. 2; rà πρὸς τὴν 6. the vestibule [so B. 
§ 125, 9; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Mk. 
li. 2; πρὸς τῇ O. Jn. xviii. 16; ἐπὶ τῇ 0. Acts v. 9; πρὸ 
τῆς 0. Acts xii. 6; ἐπὶ τῶν θυρῶν, Acts v. 23 [RG πρό]. 
b. θύρα is used of any opening like a door, an entrance, 
way or passage into: ἡ €. τοῦ μνημείου, of the tomb, Mt. 
xxvii. 60; xxviii. 2RG; Mk. xv. 46; xvi. 3, (Hom. Od. 
9, 243 ; 12, 256; al.). c. in parable and metaph. we 
find a. ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων, the door through which 
the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings 
salvation to those who follow his guidance, Jn. x. 7, 9; 
ef. Christ. Fr. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusec. p. 20 
sqq.; (in Ignat. ad Philad. 9 Christ is called ἡ θύρα τοῦ 
πατρός. du’ Hs εἰσέρχονται ABpadp . . . καὶ οἱ προφῆται; cf. 
Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 3sq.). — f. ‘anopen 
door’ is used of the opportunity of doing something: τῆς 
πίστεως, of getting faith, Acts xiv. 27; open to a 
teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co. 
ii. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and 
literal language, the phrase θύρα μεγάλη κ. evepyns [A. V. 
a great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity 


θυρεός 


of teaching a great multitude the way of salvation, and 
one encouraging the hope of the most successful results: 
1 Co. xvi. 9. γ. the door of the kingdom of heaven 
(likened to a palace) denotes the conditions which 
must be complied with in order to be received into the 
kingdom of God: Lk. xiii. 24 (for Rec. πύλης); power 
of entering, access into, God's eternal kingdom, Rev. iii. 
8 cf. 7, [but al. al.; add here Rev.iv.1] δ. he whose 
advent is just at hand is said ἐπὶ θύραις εἶναι, Mt. xxiv. 
33; Mk. xiii. 29, and πρὸ θυρῶν ἑστηκέναι, Jas. v. 9. €. 
ἑστηκὼς ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν x. κρούων is said of Christ seeking 
entrance into souls, and they who comply with his en- 
treaty are said ἀνοίγειν τ. θύραν, Rev. iii. 20.* 

θυρεός, -o), ó, (fr. θύρα, because shaped like a door [cf. 
W. 23]), a. shield (Lat. scutum); it was large, oblong, 
and four-cornered : τὸν 6. τῆς πίστεως, i. q. THY πίστιν ὡς 
θυρεόν, Eph. vi. 16. It differs from ἀσπίς (Lat. clipeus), 
which was smaller and cireular. [Polyb., Dion. Hal., 
Plut., al.]* 

θυρίς, -iSos, ἡ, (dimin. of θύρα, prop. a litile door; Plat., 
Dio Cass.), a window: Acts xx. 9; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph., 
Theophr., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

θυρωρός, -οὔ, 6, 7, (fr. θύρα, and dpa care; cf. ἀρκυωρός, 
πυλωρός, τιμωρός ; cf. Curtius $ 501, cf. p. 101; [Vanicek 
p. 900; Allen in Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 129]), a door- 
keeper, porter; male or female janitor: masc., Mk. xiii. 
34; Jn. x. 3; fem. Jn. xviii. 16 sq. ((Sappho], Aeschyl., 
Hdt., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Joseph., al.; Sept.) * 

θυσία, -as, ἡ, (θύων), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for 
nmn32 an offering, and ΤΊΣ]; a sacrifice, victim; a. 
prop.: Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, fr. Hos. vi. 6; Mk. ix. 49 
([R GL Tr txt. br.], see ἁλίζω) ; Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5, 
26; plur, Mk. xii. 33; Lk.xiii.1; Heb.ix.23; [x.1,8 
(here Ree. sing.)]; ἀνάγειν θυσίαν τινί, Acts vii. 41; dva- 
φέρειν, Heb. vii. 27, (see ἀνάγω, and ἀναφέρω 2); [δοῦναι 
6. Lk. ii. 24]; προσφέρειν, Acts vii. 42; Heb. v. 1; viii. 
3; x. [11], 12; [xi. 4]; pass. Heb. ix. 9; διὰ τῆς θυσίας 
αὐτοῦ, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he 
offered (not, by offering up himself; that would have 
been expressed by διὰ τῆς θυσίας τῆς ἑαυτοῦ, or διὰ τῆς 
ἑαυτοῦ θυσίας), Heb. ix. 26; ἐσθίειν τὰς θυσίας, to eat the 
flesh left over from the victims sacrificed (viz. at the 
sacrificial feasts; cf. [Lev. vii. 15 sqq.; Deut. xii. 7 sq. 
17 sq., etc.] Win. RWB. s. v. Opfermahlzeiten), 1 Co. x. 
18. b. in expressions involving a comparison: θυσίαι 
πνευματικαί (see πνευματικός, 3 a.), 1 Pet. ii. 5; θυσία, a 
free gift, which is likened to an offered sacrifice, Phil. 
iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 16 (τοιαύταις θυσίαις, i.e. with such 
things as substitutes for sacrifices God is well pleased) ; 
θυσία ζῶσα (see (áo, II. b. fin.), Ro. xii. 1; ἀναφέρειν 
θυσίαν αἰνέσεως, Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can 
mean, αἴνεσιν ὡς θυσίαν, the author would not have 


294 








θώραξ 


added, as he has, the explanation of the words; he 
must therefore be supposed to have reproduced the 
Hebr. phrase ΤΙ ΓΙ ΤΊΣ], and then defined this more 
exactly; Lev. vii. 3 (13) [ef. 2 (12)]; Ps. evi. (cvii.) 22; 
see αἴνεσις); ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ . . . τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν (epex. 
gen.), in the work of exciting, nourishing, increasing, 
your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to 
God [cf. ἐπί, p. 233" bot.], Phil. ii. 17." 

θυσιαστήριον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. θυσιαστήριος 
[cf. W. 96 (91)], and this fr. θυσιάζω to sacrifice), a word 
found only in Philo [e. g. vita Moys. iii. § 10, cf. § 7; 
Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 1] and the bibl. and eccl. writ.; Sept. 
times without number for M319; prop. an altar for the 
slaying and burning of victims; used of 1. the altar 
of whole burnt-offerings which stood in the court of the 
priests in the temple at Jerusalem [B. D. s. v. Altar]: 
Mt. v. 23 sq.; xxiii. 18-20, 35; Lk. xi. 51; 1 Co. ix. 13; 
x. 18; Heb. vii. 13; Rev. xi. 1. 2. the altar of incense, 
which stood in the sanctuary or Holy place [B. D. u. s.]: 
τὸ θυσιαστ. τοῦ θυμιάματος, Lk. i. 11 (Ex. xxx. 1); [sym- 
bolically] in Heaven: Rev. vi. 9; viii. 3, 5; ix. 13; xiv. 
18; xvi. 7. 3. any other altar, Jas. ii. 21; plur. Ro. 
xi. 3; metaph., the cross on which Christ suffered an 
expiatory death: to eat of this altar i. e. to appropriate 
to one's self the fruits of Christ's expiatory death, Heb. 
xiii. 10.* 

θύω ; impf. ἔθυον ; 1 aor. ἔθυσα; Pass., pres. inf. θύε- 
σθαι; pf. ptep. τεθυμένος; 1 aor. ἐτύθην (1 Co. v. 7, wheré 
Rec."*** ἐθύθην, cf. W. 8 δ, 1 ἃ. 12); [fr. Hom. down]; 
Sept. mostly for Ni, also for uMw, to slay ; 1. to sac- 
rifice, immolate:' absol. Acts xiv. 13; τινί, dat. of pers. 
(in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18; τινί τι, 1 Co. x. 20. 2. 
to slay, kill: absol., Acts x. 135 xi. 7; τί, Lk. xv. 23, 27, 
30; pass. Mt. xxii. 4; τὸ πάσχα, the paschal lamb, Mk. 
xiv. 12; pass, Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, 6). 
3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x. 105 τινά, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 
24; 1 Macc. vii. 19.* 

Θωμᾶς, -à, ὁ, (DINN [i. e. twin], see δίδυμος), Thomas, 
one of Christ's apostles : Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 
15; Jn. xi. 16;.xiv. 5; xx. 24-29 [in 29 Rec. only]; xxi. 
25 Actsa. 18. ΓΒ. DS sve? 

θώραξ, -akos, 6; 1. thé breast, the part of the body 
from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot. 
hist. an. 1, 7 [οἷ 8, p. 491°, 28]: Eur., Plat., al): Rev. 
ix. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast- 
plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting 
the body on both sides from the neck to the middle, 
(Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat. al.): Rev. ix. 9, 17; ἐνδύεσθαι 
T. θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης, i. e. δικαιοσύνην ὡς θώρακα, 
Eph. vi. 14; θώρακα πίστεως, i. 6. πίστιν ὡς θώρακα, 1 Th. 
v. 8, (ἐνδύεσθαι δικαιοσύνην ὡς θώρακα, Is. lix. 17; ἐνδ. 
θώρακα δικαιοσύνην, Sap. ν. 19 (18)).* 


295 


Te 


[L «: on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 3 sqq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc. 
p. 42, and Index IL s. v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. Vat., 
praef. p. xi.sq.; df. Proleg. p. 109; WH. Intr. $410; W. 
ἃ δ, 4; B. pp. 11, 44 sq., 69; and s. vv. ἀθῷος, ζῷον, Ἡρῴδης 
ete., πρῷρα, Τρῳάς, φόν. ἰδ often substituted for εἰ, esp. in 
nouns ending in ea (ca; on their accent see Chandler § 95 
sqq.), in proper names, etc.; cf. WH. App. p. 153; Intr. 
8399; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 83, 86 sq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 
10sq.; Soph. Lex. s.v. ΕἸ; B. 5; W. 48 (47 sq.); (on the 
usage of the Mss. cf. T'df. Conlatio critica cod. Sin. c. text. 
Elz. etc. p. xviii. ; Scrivener, Full Collation of the cod. Sin. 
etc. 2d ed. p. lii.). Examples of this spelling in recent edi- 
tions are the following: &yvía WH, ἀλαζονία T WH, ἀναιδία T 
WH, ἀπειθία WH (exc. Heb. iv. 6, 11), ἀρεσκία T WH, δουλία 
TT, ἐθελοθρησκία T WH, εἰδωλολατρία WH, εἰλικρινία T Wd, 
ἐπιεικία WH, ἐριθία WH, épunvia WH, θρησκία T, ἱερατία 
WH, κακοηθία WH, κακοπαθία WH, κολακία T WH, κυβία T 
WH, payla T WH, μεθοδία T WH, ὀφθαλμοδουλία T WH, 
παιδία T (everywhere; see his note on Heb. xii. 5), πραγματία 
T WH, rpaüra8(a T WH, φαρμακία T WH (exc. Gal. v. 20), 
ὠφελία WH, 'ArraA(a TWH, Καισαρία TWH, Λαοδικία T 
WH, Σαμαρία T WH (Σαμαρίτης, Xauapiris, T ),SeAcuk(a TWH, 
Φιλαδελφία T WH; occasionally the same substitution occurs 
in other words: e.g. afytos WH, “Aptos (πάγος) T, δανίζω T 
WH, δάνιον WH, danorhs T WH, εἰδώλιον T WH, ἐξαλιφθῆναι 
WH, Ἐπικούριος T WH, ἡμίσια WH (see ἥμισυς), καταλελιμ- 
μένος WH, λίμμα WH, Νεφθαλίμ WH in Rev. vii. 6, ὀρινός 
WH, πιθός WH, σκοτινός WH, ὑπόλιμμα WH, φωτινός WH, 
χρεοφιλέτης (Τ 1) WH; also in augm., as ἱστήκειν WH, ἴδον 
(see εἴδω I. init.); cf. WH. App. p. 162». On é as a dem- 
onst. addition to adverbs etc., see νυνί ad init. On the use 
and the omission of the mark of dizresis with ὁ in certain 
words, see T'df. Proleg. p. 108; Zipsius, Gram. Untersuch. 
p. 136 sqq.] 


Ἰάειρος, -ov [cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (vw [i. e. whom Jeho- 
vah enlightens], Num. xxxii. 41), Jairus [pron. Ja-i'-rus], 
a ruler of the synagogue, whose daughter Jesus restored 
tolife: Mk. v. 22; Lk. viii. 41. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* 

Ἰακώβ, ὁ, (3p5" [i e. heel-catcher, supplanter]), Ja- 
cob ; 1. the second of Isaac’s sons: Mt.i.2; viii. 11; 
Jn.iv.5 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. ix. 13, ete. Hebraistically 
i.q. the descendants of Jacob: Ro. xi. 26, (Num. xxiii. 7; 
Is.xli.8; Jer. [Hebr. txt.] xxxiii. 26; Sir. xxiii. 12; 1 
Macc. iii. 7, and often). 2. the father of Joseph, 
the husband of Mary the mother of the Saviour: Mt. i. 
15 sq. 

"Iákoflos, -ov, 6, (see the preceding word [and cf. B. 6, 
18 (16) ]), James; 1. son of Zebedee, an apostle, and 
brother of the apostle John, (commonly called James the 
greater or elder). He was slain with the sword by the 
command of king Herod Agrippa I. (c. A. D. 44): Mt. iv. 
21; x. 2 (3); xvii. 1; Mk. i. 19, 29; iii. 17; v. 37; ix. 








᾿Ιαμβρῆς 


2; x. 35,41; xiii. 3; xiv. 33; Lk. v. 10; vi. 14; viii. 51; 
ix. 28, 54; Actsi.13; xi. 2. 2. James (commonly 
called the less), an apostle, son of Alphzus: Mt. x. 3; 
Mk. iii. 18; Lk.vi.15; Actsi.13; apparently identical 
with Ἰάκωβος ὁ μικρός James the little | A. V. the less], the 
son of Mary, Mk. xv. 40 (Mt. xxvii. 56); xvi. 1, wife of 
Cleophas [i. e. Clopas q. v.] or Alphzeus, Jn. xix. 25; see 
in ᾿Αλφαῖος, and in Μαρία, 3. 3. James, the brother 
of our Lord (see ἀδελφός, 1): Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3; Gal. 
i. 19 (where εἰ μή is employed acc. to a usage illustrated 
under ei, III. 8 c. 8.) ; ii. 9,12; Acts xii. 17; xv. 18; xxi. ' 
18; 1 Co. xv. 7 (?) ; Jas. i. 1, the leader of the. Jewish 
Christians, and by them surnamed ὁ δίκαιος the Just, the 
overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to 
the year 62 or 63 (or acc. to Hegesippus in Euseb. h. e. 2, 
23 [trans. in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly 
probable [see Heinichen's note ad loc.]), in which year 
he suffered martyrdom, Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1. In opposi- 
tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in B. D. s. v. 
James], which identifies this James with James the son 
of Alphzeus, and understands 6 ἀδελφὸς τοῦ κυρίου to mean 
his cousin, cf. esp. Clemen in Winer's Zeitschr. f. wis- 
sensch. Theol. for 1829, p. 351 sqq.; Blom, Diss. de τοῖς 
ddedgois ... τοῦ κυρίου. Lugd. 1839; Wilib. Grimm in 
Ersch u. Gruber's Encycl, Sect. 2, vol. 23 p. 80 sqq.; 
Schaff, Das Verhültniss des Jacobus, Bruders des Herrn, 
zu Jacobus Alphii. Berl. 1842 [also his Church Hist. 
(1882) i. 272sq.]; Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief etc. p. 138 
sqq.; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq.; [Sieffert in 
Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq.; and reff. s. v. ἀδελφός, 1 (esp. 
Bp. Lghtft.) ]. 4. Anunknown James, father of the 
apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to 
the opinion of those interpreters who think that not 
ἀδελφόν but υἱόν must be supplied in the phrase ᾿Ιούδαν 
᾿Ιακώβου; see Ἰούδας, 8. 

ἴαμα, -ros, τό, (idopat) ; 1. a means of healing, rem- 
edy, medicines (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hdt. 3, 130; Thuc. 
2,51; Polyb. 7, 14, 2; Plut., Leian., al.). 2. a heal- 
ing: plur., 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; (Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 6, ete. ; 
Plat. lege. 7 p. 790 d.).* 

Ἰαμβρῆς, 6, and 6 Ἰαννῆς [cf. B. 20 (18)], Jambres 
(for which the Vulg. seems to have read Μαμβρῆς, as in 
the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menach. c. 9 in the Ge- 
mara; cf. Buztorf, Lex. Talm. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed. 
Fischer]), and Jannes, two Egyptian magicians who in 
the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron 
in order to destroy his influence with the king: 2 Tim. 
iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de- 
rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists 
and the Rabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and Jambres]. 


?Iavvá 


These Magi are mentioned not only in the tract of the 
Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ. 
of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 11; the book Sohar on Num. xxii. 
22; Numenius περὶ τἀγαθοῦ in Orig. c. Cels. 4, 51; Euseb. 
praep. evang. 9, 8; Evang. Nicod. c. 5, and other writ. 
enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. apoer. p. 552 sq. ; [and 
Wetstein on 2 Tim.l.c.; Holtzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].* 

'Iavvá, (L T Tr WH "Iavvat) ; Jannai, Vulg. Janne 
[Tdf. txt. (cod. Amiat.) Jannae], indecl. prop. name of 
one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 24.* 

"Iavvfis, 6, see 'IauBprs. 

ἰάομαι, -ὥμαι : [ perh. fr. ἰός, Lob. Technol. p. 157 sq.; 
cf. Vanicek p. 87]; a depon. verb, whose pres., impf. 
ἰώμην, fut. ἰάσομαι, and 1 aor. mid. ἰασάμην have an act. 
signif., but whose pf. pass. tapar 1 aor. pass. ἰάθην, and 
1 fut. pass. ἰαθήσομαι have a pass. signif. (cf. Krüger § 40 
S. v. ; [Veitch s. v.; B. 52 (46); W. $38, 7 c.]); [fr. Hom. 
down]; Sept. for 8575 to heal, cure: τινά, Lk. iv. 18 R 
L br.; v. 17; vi. 195 ix. 2 [here T WH om. Tr br. the 
800,1, 11, 42; xiv. 4; xxii. 51; Jn. iv. 47; Acts ix. 34; 
x. 38; xxviii. 8; pass., Mt. viii. 8, 13; xv. 28; Lk. vii. 7; 
viii.47; xvii. 15; Jn. v. 13 [ Tdf. ἀσθενῶν]: and Acts iii. 
11 Ree.; τινὰ ἀπό twos, to cure (i. e. by curing to free) 
one of [lit. from; ef. B. 322 (277)] a disease: pass., Mk. 
v. 29; Lk. vi. 18 (17). trop. to make whole i. e. to free 
from errors and sins, to bring about (one's) salvation: 
Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; 
pass. 1 Pet. ii. 24; Jas. v. 16 ; in fig. discourse, in pass. : 
Heb. xii. 13.* 

Ἰαρέδ (T WH 'Idper, Lchm. 'Iápe8; [on the accent in 
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), 6, (Heb. Y. descent), 
Jared, indecl. prop. name ('Iapáógs ['Iapé8es, ed. Bekk.] 
in Joseph. antt. 1, 2, 2), the father of Enoch (Gen. v. 
15, 18; 1 Chr. i. 2 [here A. V. Jered]) : Lk. iii. 81." 

ἴασις, -ews, 7, a healing, cure: Lk. xiii. 32; Actsiv. 22, 
30. (Prov. iii. 8; iv. 22; [Archil.], Hippocr., Soph., 
Plat., Lcian., al.) * 

lacis, -ἰδος, 7, [fr. Plato down], jasper; a precious 
stone of divers colors (for some are purple, others blue, 
others green, and others of the color of brass; Plin. h. n. 
37,37(8)): Rev. iv. 3; xxi. 11,18sq. [But many think 
(questionably) the diamond to be meant here; others the 
precious opal; see Riehm, HW B. s. v. Edelsteine, 8 and 
10; B. D. s. v. Jasper; cf. ‘Bible Educator" ii. 352.] * 

Ἰάσων, -ovos, 6, Jason, a Thessalonian, Paul's host : 
Acts xvii. 5-7, 9; whether he is the same who is men- 
tioned in Ro. xvi. 21 as a kinsman of Paul is uncertain.* 

ἰατρός, -ov, ὁ, (ἰάομαι), [fr. Hom. down], a physician: 
Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17; v. 26; Lk. v. 31; viii. 43 [here 
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Col. iv. 14 ; iarpé, θεράπευ- 
cov σεαυτόν, a proverb, applied to Christ in this sense: 
* come forth from your lowly and mean condition and 
create for yourself authority and influence by perform- 
ing miracles among us also, that we may see that you 
are what you profess to be,’ Lk. iv. 23.* 

ἰδέ [so occasionally Grsb. and Rec.****; e. g. Gal. v. 
2; Ro. xi. 22] and (later) ἴδε (18€ ἀττικῶς ὡς τὸ εἰπέ, 
λαβέ, εὑρέ: ἴδε ἑλληνικῶς, Moeris [p. 193 ed. Pierson]; 


296 


ἴδιος: 


cf. W. § 6,1a.; [B. 62 (54)]), impv. fr. εἶδον, q. v.; [fr. 
Hom. down]. In so far as it retains the force of an 
imperative it is illustrated under eid, I. 1 e. and 3. 
But in most places in the N. T. it stands out of con- 
struction like an interjection, even when many are ad- 
dressed, [cf. B. 70 (61); and esp. 139 (121 sq.)]; Lat. 
see! behold ! lo! a. at the beginning of 
sentences: as the utterance of one who wishes that 
something should not be neglected by another, Mt. xxvi. 
65; Mk.ii.24; xi.21; xiii 1; Jn.v.14; xviii. 21; Ro. 
ii. 17 Rec.; equiv. to Germ. sich’ doch [see, pray; yet 
see], Jn. xi. 86; xvi. 29; xix. 4; Gal. v. 2; or of one 
who brings forward something new and unexpected, Jn. 
vii. 26; xi. 3; xii. 19; or of one pointing out or show- 
ing, Germ. hier ist, da ist, dieses ist: ἴδε ὁ τόπος (French, 
voici le lieu), Mk. xvi. 6; add, Mk. iii. 34 (L Tr mrg. 
ἰδού) ; Jn.i.29, 36,47 (48); xix. 5 [T Tr WH ἰδού], 14, 
26 sq. (where some ἰδού) ; where we [might] use simply 
here, Mt. xxv. 25; with adverbs of place: ἴδε [RG L 
ἰδοὺ} ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε [RG ἰδοὺ] ἐκεῖ, Mk. xiii. 21. — b. 
inserted into the midst of a sentence, in such a way that 
the words which precede it serve to render the more evi- 
dent the strangeness of what follows: Mt. xxv. 20, 22; 
Jn. iii. 26. 

ἰδέα, -as, ἡ, (fr. εἶδον, ἰδεῖν), form, external appearance; 
aspect, look: Mt. xxviii. 3 (T Tr WH εἰδέα, q. v.), cf. 
Alberti, Observv. ad loc.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81]. (Grk. 
writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 2 Mace. iii. 16; for nY23 
Gen. v. 3.) * 

ἴδιος, -a, -ov, (in prof. auth. [esp. Attic] also of two: 
term.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. pertaining to one's self, 
one's own; used a. univ. of what is one’s own as opp. 
to belonging to another: rà ἴδια πρόβατα, Jn. x. 3 sq. 12; 
τὰ ἱμάτια τὰ ἴδια, Mk. xv. 20 RG Tr (for which T ra ἴδ. 
ip. αὐτοῦ, L WH τὰ ip. αὐτοῦ) ; τὸ ἴδιον (for his own use) 
κτῆνος, Lk. x. 34; διὰ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος, Heb, ix. 12; xiii. 
12, (ἰδίῳ αἵματι, 4 Mace. vii. 8) ; πὸ ἴδιον μίσθωμα, which 
he had hired for himself (opp. to ἡ £evía [q. v. ], 23), Acts. 
xxviii. 30; add, Jn. v. 43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiii. 36; 
Ro. xi. 24; xiv. 4 sq.; 1 Co. iii. 8 (ἴδιον κόπον) ; vi. 185 
vii.4, 37; ix. 7; xi. 21; Gal. vi. 5; 1 Tim.11.4,12; v. 
4; 2 Tim.i.9; iv. 3; πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, to do one's own 
business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others), 
1 Th. iv. 11; ἰδία ἐπίλυσις, an interpretation which one 
thinks out for himself, opp. to that which the Holy Spirit 
teaches, 2 Pet. i. 20 [see γίνομαι, 5 e. a.]; τὴν ἰδίαν Owato- 
σύνην, which one imagines is his due, opp. to δικαιοσύνη 
θεοῦ, awarded by God, Ro. x. 3; ἰδία ἐπιθυμία, opp. to di- 
vine prompting, Jas. i. 14; κατὰ ras ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, opp. 
to God's requirements, 2 Tim. iv. 3; with the possess. 
pron. αὐτῶν added [B. 118 (103); cf. W. 154 (146)], 2 
Pet. iii. 3; ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης, Tit. i. 12; with αὐτοῦ 
added, Mk. xv. 20 Tdf. (see above) ; τὰ ἴδια [cf. B. $ 127, 
24], those things in which one differs from others, his nat- 
ure and personal character,— in the phrase ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων, 
λαλεῖν, Jn. viii. 44; [cf. the fig. τὰ ἴδια τοῦ σώματος, 2 Co. 
v. 10 L mrg. (cf. Tr mrg.); see διά, A. I. 2]; ἴδιος, my 
own: ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσί (unassisted by others), 1 Co. iv. 


en, ecce; 


ἰδιώτης 


12; thine own: ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ, Lk. vi. 41. b. οἵ 
what pertains to one’s property, family, dwelling, country, 
etc.; of property, οὐδὲ εἷς τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν 
ἴδιον εἶναι, Acts iv. 32; τὰ ἴδια, res nostrae, our own things, 
i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 LT Tr WH [cf. 
B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; τῇ ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ, in his own 
generation, i. e. in the age in which he lived, Acts xiii. 36 ; 
ἡ ἰδία πόλις, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi- 
tant, Lk. ii. 3 [R G Tr mrg.]; Mt. ix. 1; τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ, 
in their native tongue, Acts i. 19 [WH om. Tr br. ἰδίᾳ]; 
ii. 6, 8; ἡ ἰδία δεισιδαιμονία, their own (national) religion, 
Acts xxv. 19; οἱ ἴδιοι, one’s own people (Germ. die An- 
gehürigen), one's fellow-countrymen, associates, Jn. i. 11, 
cf. 2 Macc. xii. 22; one's household, persons belonging to 
the house, family, or company, Jn. xiii. 1; Acts iv. 23; 
xxiv. 23; 1 Tim. v. 8; eis rà ἴδια (Germ. in die Heimat), 
to one's native land, home, Jn. i. 11 (meaning here, the 
land of Israel) ; xvi. 32; xix. 27, (3 Macc. vi. 27; 1 Esdr. 
v. 46 (47); for ya-5ow, Esth. v. 10; vi. 12) ; ὁ ἴδιος ἀνήρ, 
a husband, 1 Co. vii. 2 [B. 117 (102) note; cf. W. 154 
(146)]; plur., Eph. v. 22; Tit. ii. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 5; Eph. 
v. 24 RG; Col. iii. 18 R; of ἴδιοι δεσπόται (of slaves), Tit. 
ii. 9. of a person who may be said to belong to one, 
above all others: vids, Ro. viii. 32; πατήρ, Jn. v. 185 pa- 
Onrai, Mk. iv. 34 T WH Tr mrg. c. harmonizing with, 
or suitable or assigned to, one's nature, character, aims, 
acts; appropriate: τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ, Actsi. 7; τὸν ἴδιον 
μισθόν, due reward, 1 Co. iii. 8; τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα, 1 Co. xv. 
38; κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, Mt. xxv. 15; ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ 
τάγματι, 1 Co. xv. 38 ; τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον, Jude 6; εἰς τὸν 
τόπον τὸν ἴδιον, to the abode after death assigned by God 
to one acc. to his deeds, Acts i. 25 (Ignat. ad Magnes. 5; 
Baal Turim on Num. xxiv. 25 Balaam ivit in locum suum, 
i.e. in Gehennam; see τόπος, 1 a. fin.) ; καιρῷ ἰδίῳ, at a 
time suitable to the matter in hand [A. V. in due season], 
Gal. vi. 9; plur, 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit. i. 3. d. By 
a usage foreign to the earlier Greeks, but found in the 
church Fathers and the Byzant. writ. (see W. § 22, 7; 
cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 208 sq.; [B. 117 sq. (103)]), 
it takes the place of the poss. pron. αὐτοῦ: Mt. xxii. 5; 
xxv. 14; Jn. i. 41 (42), (Sap. x. 1). 2. private (in 
class. Grk. opp. to δημόσιος, κοινός) : ἰδίᾳ [cf. W. 591 
(549) note] adv. severally, separately, 1 Co. xii. 11 (often 
in Grk. writ.). κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (sc. χώραν), a. apart: Mt. 
xiv. 13; xvii. 19; xx. 17; xxiv. 3; Mk. vi. 31 sq. ;- vii. 
933; ix. 2, 298; ΧῊΠ 35 Lk. ix. 10 ; x. 2335: Acts xxii.) 19, 
(Polyb. 4, 84, 8); with μόνος added, Mk. ix. 2; β. in 
private, privately: Mk. iv. 34; Gal. ii. 2, (Diod. 1, 21, 
opp. to κοινῇ, 2 Mace. iv. 5; Ignat. ad Smyrn. 7, 2). 
The word is not found in Rev. 

ἰδιώτης, -ov, ó, (ἴδιος), very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down; prop. a private person, opp. to a magistrate, ruler, 
king; but the noun has many other meanings also, each 
one of which is understood from its antithesis, as e. g. 
a common soldier, as opp. to a military officer; a writer 
of prose, as opp. to a poet. In the N. T. an unlearned, 
illiterate, man, opp. to the learned, the educated: Acts 
iv. 13; as often in class. Grk., unskilled in any art: in 





297 





᾿Ιδουμαία. 


eloquence (Isoer. p. 43 a.), with dat. of respect, τῷ λόγῳ, 
2 Co. xi. 6 [A. V. rude in speech]; a Christian who is 
not a prophet, 1 Co. xiv. 24; destitute of the ‘gift of 
tongues,’ ibid. 16, 23. [Cf. Trench § Ixxix.]* 

ἰδού, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. 
down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew 
and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Hebr. 
man, and giving a peculiar vivacity to the style by bid- 
ding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said: be- 
hold! see! lo! It is inserted in the discourse after a 
gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13 ; ix. 18; xii. 46 ; xvii. 5; 
xxvi 47; xxviii ll. καὶ ἰδού is used, when at the close 
of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9; 
iii. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29,32, 34 ; ix. 2 sq. 20; xii. 10; 
xv.22; xvii. 3; xix. 16; xxvi. 51; xxvii. 51; xxviii. 2, 
7; Lk.i. 20, 31, 36; ii. 9 [R GL Tr br.], 25; ix. 30, 38 sq.;. 
x. 25; xiv. 2; xxiv. 13; Acts xii. 7; xvi. 1; when a thing 
is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9 
(καὶ ἰδοὺ ζῶμεν, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4; 
when a thing is specified which seems impossible and 
yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41; Acts xxvii. 24. "The simple (dov- 
is the exclamation of one pointing out something, 
Mt. xii. 2, 47[ WH here in mrg. only]; xiii. 3; xxiv. 26 5. 
Mk.iii.32; Lk.ii.34; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35 
[T Tr WH ἴδε]; Lk. xxii. 10; Jn. iv. 35; 1 Co. xv. 51; 
2, Co. v. 17} Jas: v.96) Jude 14:5 Rev. 1 73) 1x. 125. 
xi 14; xvi. 15; xxii. 7 [Rec.]; in other places it is i. q. 
observe or consider: Mt. x. 16; xi. 8; xix. 27; xx. 185 
xxii. 4; Mk. x. 28, 33; xiv. 41; Lk. ii. 48; vii. 25; xviii. 
28, 31, etc. ; also καὶ ἰδού, Mt. xxviii. 20; Lk. xiii. 80: 
ἰδοὺ yap, Lk. i. 44, 48; ii. 10; vi. 23; xvii. 21; Acts ix. 
11; 2 Co. vii. 11; ἰδού where examples are adduced: 
Jas. ii. 4 sq. ; v. 4, 7, 11; for the Hebr. 1337, so that it 
includes the copula: Lk. i. 38; i. q. here 1 am: Acts 
ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. ἰδού is inserted in the midst of a 
speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. Ἰδοὺ (see the 
Comm.)]; Lk. xiii. 16; Acts ii. 7; xiii 11; xx. 22, 25. 
The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which 
are quoted in the New are these: Mt.i. 23; xi. 10 ; xii. 
18; xxi.5; Mk.i. 2; Lk. vil. 27; Jn. xii.15; Ro.ix. 33; 
Heb. ii. 13; viii. 8; x. 7,9; 1 Pet.ii.6. Like the Hebr. 
mn, ἰδού and καὶ ἰδού stand before a nominative which 
is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in- 
clude the copula or predicate [cf. B. 139 (121 sq.)]: e. g. 
was heard, Mt. iii. 17; is, is or was here, ezists, etc., Mt. 
xii. 10 L T Tr WH, 41; Mk. xiii. 21 RGL; Lk. v.12, 
18; vii. 37; xi.31; xiii. 11 (RG add ἦν) ; xvii. 21; xix. 
2, 20; xxii. 38, 47; xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec., 27 RG]; 
Acts viii. 27, 36; 2 Co. vi. 2; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8; vii. 9 [not 
L]; xii3; xiv. 14; xix. 11; xxi. 3; is approaching, Mt. 
xxv. 6 GL T Tr WH (Rec. adds ἔρχεται) ; but also in 
such a way as to have simply a demonstrative force: 
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. 

Ἰδουμαία, -as, 7, Jdumea, the name of a region be- 
tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petrza, inhabited 
by Esau or Edom (Gen. xxxvi. 30) and his posterity 
(the Edomites), (Josh. xv..1, 21; xi 17; xii. 7). The 
Edomites were first subjugated by David; but after 


ἱδρώς : 


his death they disputed Solomon's authority and in the 
reign of Joram recovered their liberty, which they main- 
tained, transmitting from generation to generation their 
hatred of Israel, until they were conquered again by 
IIyrcanus and subjected to the government of the Jews : 
Mk. iii. 8. [For details of boundary and history, see 
Bertheau in Schenkel and Porter in B. D.s. v. Edom; 
also the latter in Kitto’s Cycl. s. v. Idumzea.] * 

ἱδρώς, -Gros, ὁ, [allied w. Lat. sudor, Eng. sweat ; Cur- 
tius $ 283; fr. Hom. down], sweat: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. 
WH reject the pass.; (Tr accents ἱδρῶς, yet cf. Chandler 
§ 667)].* 

Ἰεζάβελ ([so GT WH,L ‘Teg.; Tr -βέλ 1; Rec. Ἰεζα- 
Bnd), ἡ, (ΟΞ [perh. intact, chaste; cf. Agnes’ (Ge- 
senius) ]), Jezebel [mod. Isabel], wife of Ahab ([e.] n. c. 
917-897; 1 K. xvi. 29), an impious and cruel queen, 
who protected idolatry and persecuted the prophets (1 
K. xvi. 31-2 K. ix. 30); in Rev. ii. 20 i. q. a second Jez- 
ebel, the symbolic name of a woman who pretended to 
be a prophetess, and who, addicted to antinomianism, 
claimed for Christians the liberty of eating things sacri- 
ficed to idols, Rev. ii. 20.* 

Ἱεράπολις [WH Ἱερὰ Πόλις ; cf. B. 74; Lob. ad Phryn. 
604 sq.], -ews, ἡ, Hierapolis, a city of Greater Phrygia, 
near the river Mander [or rather, near the Lycus a few 
miles above its junction with the Meander], not far 
from Colosse and Laodicea, now Pambuck Kulasi, [for 
reff. see Bp. Lehtft. on Col. p. 1sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]: 
Col. iv. 13.* 

ἱερατεία [ WH -ria; cf.I, c]. -as, 7. (ἱερατεύω), the priest- 
hood, the office of priest: Lk.i.9; Heb. vii. 5. (Sept. for 
71:12; Aristot. pol. 7, 8; Dion. Hal.; Boeckh, Inserr. ii. 
pp- 127, 23; 363, 27.)* 

ἱεράτευμα, -τος, τό, (ἱερατεύω), [ priesthood i. 6.1 a. 
the office of priest. b. the order or body of priests (see 
adApsrns, αἰχμαλωσία, διασπορά, θεραπεία) ; so Christians 
are called, because they have access to God and offer 
not external but ‘spiritual’ (πνευματικά) sacrifices: 1 
Pet. ii. 5; also ἱεράτ. βασίλειον, ib. 9 (after Ex. xix. 6 
Sept.), priests of kingly rank, i. e. exalted to a moral 
rank and freedom which exempts them from the control 
of every one but God and Christ. ([Ex. xxiii. 22, ete.; 
2 Mace. ii. 17]; not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἱερατεύω ; (fr. ἱεράομαι and the verbal adj. íeparós, 
though this adj. does not occur); to be priest, discharge 
the priest’s office, be busied in sacred duties: Lk. i. 8. 
(Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 1; Hdian. 5, 6, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; Pau- 
san., Heliod., Inserr. [see L. and S.]; Sept. for 112.) * 

"Iepex à, see Ἱεριχώ. 

“Ἱερεμίας [WH Ἴερ. (see their Intr. $408); so Rec." 
in Mt. xxvii. 9], -ov [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (WAT or My, 
i.q. m TY ‘Jehovah casts forth’ (his enemies ?), or 
‘Jehovah hurls’ (his thunderbolts ?); cf. Bleek, Einl. in 
das A. T. $ 206 p. 469, [cf. B. D. s. v. Jeremiah ]), Jere- 
miah [A. V. also Jeremias, Jeremy], a famous Hebrew 
prophet, who prophesied from [c] B. c. 627 until the de- 
struction of Jerusalem [B.c. 586]. He afterwards de- 
parted into Egypt,where he appears to have died; [cf. 


298 





e , 
tepov 


B. D. s. v. Jeremiah, I. 6]: Mt. ii. 17; xvi. 14; xxvii. 9 (in 
the last pass. his name is given by mistake, for the words 
quoted are found in Zech. xi. 12 sq.; [cf. Prof. Brown in 
Journ. of Soc. for Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. for Dec. 1882, p. 
101 sqq.; Toy, Quot. in N. T. p. 68 sqq.; for a history 
of attempted explanations, see Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. 
on Mt. 1. c.]).* 

ἱερεύς, -és, 6, (ἱερός). [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 513, a 
priest; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied 
with saered rites ; a. prop., of the priests of the 
Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13; of the priests of the Jews, Mt. 
viii. 4; xii. 4 sq.; Mk. i. 44; [ii. 26]; Lk. i. 5; v. 14; 


Jn. i. 19; Heb. vii. [14 L T Tr WH], 20 (21) ; viii. 4, 


etc.; of the high-priest, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxv. 18; 
1 K.i.8; 1 Macc. xv. 1 ; Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 1) ; and 
in the same sense Christ is called ἱερεύς in Heb. v. 6 (fr. 
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also ἱερεὺς μέγας, Heb. 
x. 21 (see ἀρχιερεύς, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as 
blending with fep. into a technical or official appellation, 
but as descriptive, great; cf. iv. 14]. — b. metaph. of 
Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and 
brought into close intercourse with God, they devote 
their life to him alone (and to Christ): Rev.i.6; v. 10; 
πᾶς, IG, Ch. 1:552 197 

Ἱεριχώ (Τα. Ἱερειχώ [see his Proleg. p. 85; WH. 
App. p. 155, and s. v. e, «; WH Ἴερ. see their Intr. 
$408; on its accent in codd. cf. Τὰ Proleg, p. 103]), 
T» indecl. (on its declens. in other writ. cf. W. .8 10,2; in 
Strabo Ἱερικούς -oüvros ; Ἱεριχοῦς, -oüvros in Joseph., cf. 
W.1. ¢.; Hebr. Yr, fr. rr^ to smell, so called from its 
fertility in aromatics), Jericho. a noted city, abounding 
in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum ; ef. Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. ete. p. 337; B. D. s. v. Balm], honey, cyprus 
[prob. Arab. “el-henna”; cf. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam- 
phire], myrobalanus [ Arab. * zukkum "'], roses, and other 
fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the 
northern shore of the Dead Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin, 
between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150 
stadia from the former and 60 from the latter. Joseph. 
b. j. 4, 8, 3 calls its territory θεῖον χωρίον. It is mentioned. 
in the N. T. in Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46; Lk. x. 30; xviii. 
35; xix. 1; Heb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence 
to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that τελῶναι were 
stationed there, with an ἀῤχιτελώνης, for the purpose of 
collecting the revenues. Fora fuller account of the city 
see Win. RWB. s. v.; Arnold in Herzog vi. p. 494 sq.; 
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 209 sq.; Keim iii. 17 sq. [Eng. 
trans. v. 21 sq.; BB.DD. s. v.; cf. also Robinson, Re- 
searches etc. i. 547 sqq.].* 

Lepó8vros, -ov, (fr. ἱερός and θύω, cf. εἰδωλόθυτος), sac- 
rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods; as in Plut. symp. 
8, 8, 3 init., used of the flesh of animals offered in sac- 
rifice: 1 Co. x. 28 Ltxt. T Tr WH. On the use of the 
word in Grk. writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 159.* 

ἱερόν, -οὔ, τό, (neut. of the adj. ἱερός, -d, -óv; cf. τὸ 
ἅγιον), [fr. Hdt. on], a sacred place, temple: of the tem- 
ple of Artemis at Ephesus, Acts xix. 27; of the temple 
at Jerusalem twice in the Sept., Ezek. Zn 19; 1 Chr. 


ε », 9 
ἱεροπρεπῆς 2 


᾿ xxix. 4; more freq. in the O. T. Apocr.; in the N. T. 
often in the Gospels and Acts; once elsewhere, viz. 1 Co. 
ix.13. τὸ ἱερόν and ὁ ναὸς differ, in that the former 
designates the whole compass of the sacred enclosure, 
embracing the entire aggregate of buildings, balconies, 
porticos, courts (viz. that of the men or Israelites, 
that of the women, that of the priests), belonging to 
the temple; the latter designates the sacred edifice prop- 
erly so called, consisting of two parts, the ‘sanctuary’ 
or‘Holy place’ (which no one except the priests was 
allowed to enter), and the‘ Holy of holies’ or ‘most 
holy place’ (see ἅγιος, 1 a.) (which was entered only 
on the great day of atonement by the high-priest alone) ; 
[cf. Trench, Syn. § iii]. ἱερόν is employed in the N. 
T. either explicitly of the whole temple, Mt. xii. 6; 
xxiv. 1; Mk. xiii. 3; Lk. xxi 5; xxii. 52; Acts iv. 1; 
xxiv.6; xxv.8; 1 Co. ix. 13, ete.; or so that certain 
definite parts of it must be thought of, as the courts, 
esp. where Jesus or the apostles are said to have gone up, 
or entered, ‘into the temple,’ to have taught or encoun- 
tered adversaries, and the like, ‘in the temple,’ Mt. xxi. 
12,14; xxvi 55; Mk. xiv. 49; Lk.xix. 47; xxi. 37; 
xxii. 53; xxiv. 53; Jn. v. 143 vii. 14, 28; viii. 20; xviii. 
20; Acts iii. 2; v.20; xxi. 26, ete.; of the courts and 
sanctuary, Mt. xii.5; of thecourt of the Gentiles, 
out of which Jesus drove the buyers and sellers and 
money-changers, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; 
Jn. ii. 14 sq.; of the court of the women, Lk. ii. 37; 
of any portico or apartment} Lk. ii. 46, cf. Jn. x. 23. 
On the phrase τὸ πτερύγιον τοῦ ἱεροῦ see πτερύγιον, 2. 

ἱεροπρεπής, -és, (fr. ἱερός, and πρέπει it is becoming), 
befitting men, places, actions or things sacred to God; rev- 
erent: Tit. ii.3. (4 Mace. ix. 25; xi.19; Plat., Philo, 
Joseph., Leian.al.)  [Cf. Trench § xcii. sub fin.]* 

ἱερός, -d, -όν, [its primary sense is thought to be mighty; 
cf. Curtius $ 614; Vanicek p. 88; L. and S. s. v. init.; fr. 
Hom. down], sacred, consecrated to the deity, pertaining to 
God : ἱερὰ γράμματα, sacred Scriptures, because inspired 
by God, treating of divine things and therefore to be de- 
voutly revered, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Joseph. antt. prooem. 3; 
[10, 10, 4 fin.]; b.j. 6,5, 4; c. Ap. 1, [10, 3; 18,6]; 26, 
1; ἱεραὶ βίβλοι, antt. 2, 16, 55 fe. Ap. 1, 1; 23, 4], etc. ; 
οὐκ ἐνετράφης οὐδὲ ἐνησκήθης rois ἱεροῖς γράμμασι, Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium § 29, ed. Mang. ii. p. 574); [κήρυγμα, Mk. 
xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; neut. plur. 
as subst. 7a iepa, the holy things, those which pertain to 
the worship of God in the temple, 1 Co. ix. 13, cf. ἐργάζο- 
pat, 2 a. [See reff. s. v. ἅγιος, fin.] * 

Ἱεροσόλυμα [WH "Iep., see their Intr. § 408], -ov, τά, 
(the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere 
in Mt. and Joseph. [c. Ap. 1, 22, 13, ete.; Philo, leg. ad 
Gaium § 36; (cf. Polyb. 16, 39, 4) ; al.]), and Ἱερουσαλήμ 
[WHIep. (see ref. u. s.) ], 7, indecl., (the invariable form 
in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, ete.; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ; 
so Aristot. in Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Müller)]; 
in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to speak, 
resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp. 
Lghtft. ad loe.]; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10; 


99 











ἱεροσυλέω 


thus in direct address: Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; both 
forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked pref- 
erence for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apoer., 
and in the writ. of Luke and of Paul; [cf. ΤᾺ Proleg. 
p.119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a 
third and unusual form Ἱεροσόλυμα, -ης, 7, in Mt. ii. 3; 
iii. 5, is extremely doubtful; for in the phrase ἐξεπο- 
pevero ... Ἱεροσόλυμα, iii. 5, the noun can be taken as 
a neut. plur. with a sing. verb, cf. W. § 58,3a.; and in 
the former passage, ii. 3, the unusual coupling of the 
fem. πᾶσα with the neut. plur. Ἱεροσόλυμα is easily ex- 
plained by the supposition that the appellative idea, ἡ 
πόλις, was in the writer’s mind; see Fritzsche and Bleek 
ad loc.; cf. B. 18 (16); [yet see Pape, Eigennamen, s. 
v.) Hebr. p?Urv and povAv, Chald. povrv, Syr. 


^ => t 

$esa50]. Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com- 
posed of vj possession, and Dv, so that it signifies tran- 
quil possession, habitation of peace; but the matter is very 
uncertain and conjectures vary; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. 
p. 628 sq.; [B. D. s. v.]; on the earlier name of the city 
see below in Sadnp; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [Vulg. 
e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. xxiii. 37; but esp.] in 
the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma, 
-ae, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1, 
3],—Jerusalem [A. V. Hierusalem and Jerusalem], 
the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of 
the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin 
and Judah, in a region so elevated that ἀναβαίνειν, 
my, to go up, fitly deseribes the approach to it from any 
quarter. The name is used in the N. T. 1. to de- 
note, either the city itself, Mt. ii. 1; Mk.iii. 8; Jn. i. 19, 
ete.; or its inhabitants, Mt.ii.3; ii. 5; xxiii.37; Lk. 
xiii. 34. 2. ἡ νῦν Ἵερουσ. [the Jerusalem that now 
is], with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic 
system, so designated from its primary external location, 
Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted ἡ ἄνω 'Iep. (after the 
rabbin. phrase noyp bw m*owYv, Jerusalem that is above, 
i. e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which 
the earthly Jerusalem ΓΘ Sw n'owYv was supposed to 
be built [ef. Schéttgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), i. e. 
metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing 
the form of the church, but after Christ's return to put on 
the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom, Gal. iv. 26; 
Ἵερουσ. ἐπουράνιος, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heav- 
enly abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as 
well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens 
of which true Christians are to be regarded while still liv- 
ing on earth, Heb. xii. 22; ἡ καινὴ ‘Tep. in the visions of 
John ‘the Revelator,’ the new Jerusalem, a splendid visi- 
ble city to be let down from heaven after the renoyation 
of the world, the future abode of the blessed: Rev. iii. 
IAS xr. 92x10: 

“Ἱεροσολυμίτης [ Tdf. -μείτης, see eu +; WH Ἰεροσολυ- 
peizns, see their Intr. ὃ 408], -ov, 6, a citizen or inhabitant 
of Jerusalem: Mk.i.5; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 
17, etc.] * 

ἱερο-συλέω, -à; (ἱερόσυλος, q. v.) ; to commit sacrilege, 


᾿ 
ἑερόσυλος 


to rob a temple: Ro. ii. 22, where the meaning is, ‘thou 
who abhorrest idols and their contamination, dost yet 
not hesitate to plunder their shrines’; οἵ. Fritzsche [and 
Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) * 

ἱερόσυλος, -ov, (fr. ἱερόν and evAdo), guilty of sacrilege: 
Acts xix. 37 [A. V. robbers of temples; cf. Bp. Lghtft. in 
The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.]. (2 Mace. iv. 
42; Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 

iepoupyéw, -à; (fr. tepovpyos, and this fr. ἱερός and 
EPTQ); to be busied with sacred things; to perform sacred 
rites, (Philo, Hdian.); used esp. of persons sacrificing 
(Joseph. antt. 7, 13, 4, ete.); trans. to minister in the man- 
ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: τὸν νόμον, of 
those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing 
a violent death, 4 Mace. vii. 8; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, of the 
preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. 16 (where Fritzsche 
treats of the word fully; [ef. W. 222 sq. (209)]).* 

Ἱερουσαλήμ, see Ἱεροσόλυμα. 

ἱερωσύνη [on the o see ἀγαθωσύνη, init. ], -ης, ἡ; (ἱερός), 
priesthood, the priestly office: Web. vii. 11 sq. 14 RG, 24. 
(Sir. xlv. 24; 1 Esdr. v. 38; 1 Mace. ii. 54; iii. 49; 4 
Mace. v. 34; Hdt., Plat, Dem., Diod., Joseph., Plut., 
Hdian., al.) * 

Terral (Ἰεσσαῖος in Joseph.), 6, Cw [cf. B. D. Am. 
ed. s. v.]), Jesse, the father of David the king (1 S. xvi. 
1, 10; xvii. 12 Alex.; xx. 27): Mt.i.5sq.; Lk. iii. 32; 
Acts xiii. 22; Ro. xv. 12.* 

Ἰεφθάε (Ἰεφθής, -ov, in Joseph.) 6, ( MAD [fut. 3 sing. 
masc.], fr. nn3 to open), Jephthah, the son of Gilead 
[ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gilead, 4], and a judge of Israel 
(Judg. xi. sq.) : Heb. xi. 32.* 

Ἰεχονίας, -ov, 6, (P71 Jehoiakin, i. e. whom Jehovah 
appointed; Sept. Ἰωαχίν [(?) see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Jehoiachin]), Jechoniah, king of Judah, carried off into 
exile by Nebuchadnezzar [6.7 5. c. 600 after a reign of 
three months, 2 K. xxiv. 8-17; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 9 sq.; Jer. 
li. 31. He is mentioned Mt. i. 11 sq. But he was not, 
as is there stated, the son of Josiah, but of Jehoiakim ; 
nor had he ‘brethren,’ but his father had. Accordingly 
in the Evangelist’s genealogy the names p'p" and 
r2 have been confounded; [cf. B. D. u. s., and reff. 
there ].* 

Ἰησοῦς, -o), dat. -o0, acc. -vdv, voc. -o9, [W. § 10, 1], 
6, Jesus (ywin and ace. to a later form piw?, Syr. 


MÀ 
Naas, 1. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; 


but later writ. gave the name the force of ny, see 
Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ 
ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of 
Joshua, the suecessor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 
᾿Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very com. prop. 
name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, 
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or 
Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully 
Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ 
successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son 


300 


© , 
ucavoa» 


mankind: Mt.i. 21, 25; Lk.i. 31; ii. 21, and very often ; 
see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus Barabbas; see 
Βαραββᾶς. 5. Jesus, surnamed Justus, a Jewish 
Christian, an associate with Paul in preaching the gos- 
pel: Col. iv. 11. 

ἱκανός, -7, -όν, (fr. (ko, ἱκάνω ; prop. * reaching to’, *at- 
taining to’; hence ‘adequate’); as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
and Thue. down, sufficient; a. of number and 
quantity; with nouns, many enough, or enough with a 
gen. : ὄχλος ἱκανός, a great multitude [A. V. often much 
people], Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix. 
26; Aaós, Acts v. 37 RG; κλαυθμός, Acts xx. 37; ἀργύ- 
ρια ἱκανά, [ A. V. large money, cf. the colloq. ‘money 
enough], Mt. xxviii. 12; λαμπάδες, Acts xx. 8; Aóyot, 
Lk. xxiii. 9; φῶς ἱκανόν, a considerable light [A. V. a 
great light], Acts xxii. 6. οὗ time: ἱκανῷ χρόνῳ [cf. 
W.$31,9; D. $ 133, 26] for a long time, (Lk. viii. 27 
T'Trtxt. WH]; Acts viii. 11; also ἱκανὸν χρόνον, Acts 
xiv. 3; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; ἐξ ἱκανοῦ, of a long time, 
now for a long time, Lk. xxiii. 8 RG; also ἐκ χρόνων: 
ἱκανῶν, Lk. viii. 27 RG L Tr mrg.; xxiii. 8 L'T Tr WH; 
[ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ἐτῶν, these many years, Ro. xv. 23 WII Tr 
txt.]; ἱκανοῦ χρόν. diayev. much time having elapsed, 
Acts xxvii. 9; ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν, for a long while, Acts xx. 11 
(2 Mace. viii. 25; Diod. 13, 100; Palaeph. 28); ἡμέραι 
[cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. p. 89 n.], Acts ix. 23, 43; xviii. 
18; xxvii. T. absol. ἱκανοί, many, a considerable num- 
ber: Lk. vii. 11 [R G L br. T Tr mrg. br.]; Acts xii. 12; 
xiv. 21; xix. 19; . 1 Co. xi. 30, (1 Macc. xiii. 49, etc.), 
ἱκανόν ἐστιν, it is enough, i. q. enough has been said on 
this subject, Lk. xxii. 38 (for Jesus, saddened at the 
paltry ideas of the disciples, breaks off in this way the 
conversation; the Jews, when a companion uttered any 
thing absurd, were wont to use the phrase 022 she; Me 
let it suffice thee, ete.], as in Deut. iii. 26, where Sept. ἱκα- 
νούσθω) ; ἱκανὸν τῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη. sc. ἐστί, sufli- 
cient ...is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6; after the Lat. 
idiom satisfucere alicui, τὸ ik. ποιεῖν tur, to take away 
from one every ground of complaint [A. V. to content], 
Mk. xv. 15 (Polyb. 32, 7,13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. Toll. 
[S 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.]; Diog. Laért. 4, 50); τὸ 
ix. λαμβάνω (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either 
by accepting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until 
the ease had been decided), Acts xvii. 9. b. sufli- 
cient in ability, i. e. meet, fit, (Germ. tüchtig [ A. V. 
worthy, able, ete.]) : πρός τι, for something, 2 Co. ii. 16; 
foll. by an inf. [B. 260 (223 sq.)], Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; 
Lk. iii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 9; 2 Co. iii. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 2; foll. 
by tva with subjune. [B. 240 (207); cf. W. 335 (314)]: 
Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6.* 

ἱκανότης, -nTos, 7, Sufficiency, ability or competency to 
do a thing: 2 Co.iii. 5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll.; 
[a1.]-) * 

ἱκανόω, τῶ: 1 aor. ἱκάνωσα; (ἱκανός); to make suffi- 
cient, render fit; with two acc., one of the obj. the other 
of the predicate: to equip one with adequate power to 


of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 LT Tr | perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. 65 τινὰ εἴς τι; Col. i. 


WH. 


3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of | 12. [Sept.; Dion. Hal, al.]* . 


ἑκετήριος 


ἱκετήριος, -a, -ov, (ἱκέτης a suppliant), pertaining to a 
suppliant, fit for a suppliant; ἡ ἱκετηρία, as subst., sc. 
ἐλαία or ῥάβδος ; 1. an olive-branch; for suppliants 
approached the one whose aid they would implore hold- 
ing an olive-branch entwined with white wool and fillets, 
to signify that they came as suppliants [cf. Trench § li. 
sub fin.]: λαμβάνειν ἱκετηρίαν, Hdt. 5, 51; ἱκετηρίαν τιθέ- 
vat Or προβάλλεσθαι παρά τινι; etc. 2. i. 4. ἱκεσία, 
supplication (Isocr. p. 186 d. var.; Polyb.; 2 Macc. ix. 
18): plur. joined with δεήσεις (Polyb. 3, 112, 8; sing. Job 
xl. 22 Sept.), Heb. v. 7.* 

lkpás, -ddos, 7, moisture: Lk. viii. 6. (Sept. Jer. xvii. 
8; Hom. Il. 17, 392; Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 3, and often in 
other auth.) * 

Ἰκόνιον, -ov, τό, Iconium, a celebrated city of Asia 
Minor, which in the time of Xen. (an. 1, 2, 19) was *the 

* last city of Phrygia,’ afterwards the capital of Lycaonia 
(Strab. 12 p. 568; Cic. ad divers. 15, 4); now Konia 
[or Konieh]: Acts xiii. 51; xiv. 1, 19, 21; xvi. 2; 2 Tim. 
ii. 11. Cf. Overbeck in Schenkel iii. 303 sq.; [B. D. 
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 144 sqq. ].* 

ἱλαρός, -d, -óv, (ἵλαος propitious), cheerful, joyous, 
prompt to do anything: 2 Co. ix. 7; Prov. xix. 12; xxii. 
8; Sir. xiii. 26 (25); xxvi. 4; 3 Mace. vi. 35; Arstph., 
Xen., al.* 

ἱλαρότης, τητος, 7, cheerfulness, readiness of mind: Ro. 
xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noé 
§ 40), Plut., al.]; Acta Thom. § 14.) * 

ἱλάσκομαι ; (see below); in class. Grk. the mid. of an 
act. ἱλάσκω (to render propitious, appease) never met 
with ; 1. to render propitious to one’s self, to ap- 
pease, conciliate to one’s self (fr. ἵλαος gracious, gentle) ; 
fr. Hom. down; mostly w. ace. of a pers., as θεόν, ᾿Αθή- 
νην, ete. (τὸν θεὸν ἱλάσασθαι, Joseph. antt. 6, 6,5); very 
rarely w. ace. of the thing, as τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Cat. min. 
61 (with which cf. ἐξιλάσκεσθαι θυμόν, Prov. xvi. 14 
Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to become propitious, 
be placated or appeased; in 1 aor. impv. ἱλάσθητι, be pro- 
pitious, be gracious, be merciful, (in prof. auth. ἵληθι and 
Dor. ἵλαθι, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an 
unused verb ἵλημι, to be propitious; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sp. 
ii. p. 206; Kühner $ 343, i. p. 839; Passow [or L. and 
S., or Veitch] s. v. ἵλημι). with dat. of the thing or the 
pers.: Lk. xviii. 13 (rais ἁμαρτίαις, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 
9; [Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 38]; τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 
11; ἱλάσθη ὁ κύριος περὶ τῆς κακίας, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex.; 
ἱλασθήσεται κύρ. τῷ δούλῳ σου, 2 K. ν. 18). 2. by 
an Alexandrian usage, to expiate, make propitiation for, 
(as ἐξιλάσκεσθαι in the O. T.): τὰς ἁμαρτίας, Heb. ii. 17 
(ἡμῶν τὰς ψυχάς, Philo, alles. les. 3, 61). [Cf Kurtz, 
Com. on Heb.1.c.; W.227 (213); Westcott, Epp. of S. Jn. 
p. 83 sq.]* 

ἱλασμός, -o0, ὁ, (iAdcKopat) ; 1. an appeasing, 
propitiating, Vulg. propitiatio, (Plut. de sera num. vind. 
€. 17; plur. joined with καθαρμοί, Plut. Sol. 12; with 
gen. of the obj. τῶν θεῶν, Orph. Arg. 39; Plut. Fab. 18; 
θεῶν μῆνιν ἱλασμοῦ kai χαριστηρίων δεομένην, vit. Camill. 
7 fin. ; ποιεῖσθαι ἱλασμόν, of a priest offering an expia- 


901 








᾿Γλλυρικόν 


tory sacrifice, 2 Mace. iii. 33). 2. in Alex. usage the 
means of appeasing, a propitiation: Philo, alleg. leg. iii. 
§ 61; προσοίσουσιν ἱλασμόν, for NNOM, Ezek. xliv. 27; 
περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10, (κριὸς 
tov ἱλασμοῦ, Num. v. 8; [cf. ἡμέρα τ. ἱλασμοῦ, Lev. xxv. 
9]; also for nrv?o, forgiveness, Ps. exxix. (exxx.) 4; 
Dan. ix. 9 Theodot.). (Cf. Trench § Ixxvii.]* 
ἱλαστήριος, -a, -ov, (ἱλάσκομαι, q. v.), relating to ap- 
peasing or expiating, having placating or expiating force, 
expiatory: μνῆμα ἱλαστήριον, a monument built to propi- 
tiate God, Joseph. antt. 16, 7, 1; ἱλαστήριος θάνατος, 
4 Macc. xvii. 22; χεῖρας tkernpious, ei βούλει δὲ ἱλαστη- 
pious, ἐκτείνας θεῷ, Niceph. in act. SS. ed. Mai, vol. v. 
p- 335,17.  Neut. τὸ ἱλαστήριον, as subst., a means af 
appeasing or expiating, a propitiation, (Germ. Verséh- 
nungs- oder Sühnmittel); cf. W. 96 (91); [592 (551)]. 
So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of 
the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled 
with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual 
day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of 
the people, the loss of which they had merited by their 
sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the 
vietim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased 
and their sins were expiated); hence the lid of expia- 
tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propitiatorium; Luth. Gna- 
denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seat]: Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv. 


18sqq.; Lev. xvi. 2, ete.; more fully ἱλαστήριον ἐπίθεμα, 
Ex. xxv. 17; xxxvii. (xxxvii) 7 (6), for the Hebr. 


nD, fr. 523 to cover, sc. sins, i. e. to pardon). Theod- 
oret, Theophyl., Oecum., ine Grotius, Tholuck, 
Wilke, Philippi, Umbreit, [Cremer (4te Aufl.)] and others 
give this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz. 
that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly 
that which the cover or *mercy-seat' had been ty pi- 
cally, i. e. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in 
opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, Van 
Hengel, [Godet, Oltramare] and others ad loc. = 
an expiatory sacrifice; a piacular victim (Vulg. propitia- 
tio) : Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words χαρι- 
στήρια sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-offerings, 
σωτήρια sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other 
hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 355 ed. Reiske, the 
reference is not to a sacrifice but toa monument, 
as the preceding words show: καταλείψειν yap αὐτοὺς 
ἀνάθημα κάλλιστον καὶ μέγιστον τῇ ᾿Αθηνᾷ καὶ ἐπιγρά- 
ψειν, ἱλαστήριον ᾿Αχαιοὶ τῇ Ἰλιάδι). [See the full discus- 
sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. Exposition of 
the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]* 

Yecws, των, (Attic for ἵλαος [cf. W. 22], fr. Hom. 
down). propitious, merciful: ἔσομαι ἵλ. ταῖς ἀδικίαις, 1. e. 
I will pardon, Heb. viii. 12; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34; 
xliii. (xxxvi.) 3; also rats ἁμαρτίαις, 1 K. viii. 34; 2 Chr. 
vi. 25, 27, etc. ; ἵλεώς σοι, sc. ἔστω [or εἴη, B. § 129, 22] 
6 θεός, i. e. God avert this from thee, Mt. xvi. 22; Sept. 
for n»n foll by 5, be it far from one, 2 S. xx. 20; 
xxiii. 17.* 

Ἰλλυρικόν, -οὔ, τό, Illyricum, a region lying between 
Italy, Germany, Macedonia and Thrace, having on one 


ἱμάς 
side the Adriatic Sea, and on the other the Danube: Ro. 
xv. 19 [cf. B. D. Am. ed.].* 

ἱμάς, -ávros, 6, (fr. jue to send; sc. a vessel, which was 
tied to thongs of leather and let down into a well for the 
purpose of drawing water; hence ἱμάω also, to draw 
something made fast to a thong or rope [recent etymol. 
connect it w. Skt. si to bind; cf. Curtius § 602; Vanicek 
p. 1041]); fr. Hom. down; a thong of leather, a strap ; 
in the N. T. of the thongs with which captives or crimi- 
nals were either bound or beaten (see προτείνω), Acts 
xxii. 25 (4 Mace. ix. 11; Sir. xxx. 35); of the thongs 
or ties by which sandals were fastened to the feet, Mk. 
i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27, (so also in Is. v. 27; Xen. 
anab. 4, 5, 14; Plut. symp. 4, 2, 3; Suid. ἱμάς - σφαιρω- 
τὴρ σανδαλίου, ζανίχιον, otov τὸ λώριον τοῦ Urodnparos).* 

ἱματίζω: pf. pass. ptep. ἱματισμένος ; (ἱμάτιον): to 
clothe: Mk. v. 15; Lk. viii. 35. (Found neither in Sept. 
nor in prof. auth. [cf. W. 26 (25)].) * 

ἱμάτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of μα i. q. εἷμα, an article of 
clothing, garment; and this fr. &vuj to clothe, cf. Germ. 
Hemd); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for 733, also 
for mow, mow, etc; 1. a garment (of any sort) : 
Mt. ix. 16; xi. 8 [RG Lbr., al. om.; ef. W. 591 (550); 
B. 82 (72)]; Mk. ii. 21; xv. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb. 
i. 11; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the 
tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv. 
18[Rec.]; xxvii.31, 35; Jn. xix. 23; Acts vii. 58; Jas. 
v. 2, etc.; to rend τὰ iu. (see διαρρήγνυμι), Mt. xxvi. 65; 
Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the 
cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, ó 
χιτών) [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 22]: Mt. ix. 20; 
[xxiv. 18 L T Tr WH]; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; Jn. xix. 
2; Rev. xix. 16; it is distinguished from the χιτών in 
Mt. v.40; Lk. vi. 29; [cf. Jn. xix. 23]; Actsix.39. [Cf 
Trench $1, ; BB. DD. s. v. Dress; Edersheim, Jewish So- 
cial Life, ch. xiii.; esp. ‘Jesus the Messiah,’ i. 620 sqq.] 

ἱματισμός, -οὔ, 6, (ἱματίζω), clothing, apparel: univ., 
Lk. vii. 25; Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 9; of the tunic, Mt. 
xxvii. 35 Rec.; Jn. xix. 24; of the cloak or mantle, Lk. 
ix. 29. (Sept.; Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Athen.) 
[C£. Trench 8 1.]* 

ipelpw : mid. ἱμείρομαι ; (ἵμερος desire, longing, [allied w. 
ἵλεως ; Vanicek p. 88]; cf. οἰκτείρω) ; to desire, long for, 
esp. of the longing of love: ὑμῶν [ W. $ 30, 10 b.] i. e. your 
souls, to win them to Christ, 1 Th. 11. 8 Rec. ; see ὁμείρο- 
μαι. (Sept. Job iii. 21; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in 
the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what 
place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. 
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum 
Opusce. p. 186 sqq.) thought he had found two examples 
in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. 
The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain 
thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have 
learned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) 
the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the 
second, ἵνα αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye 
zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. 


302 





“ 
Wa 


II. a final Conjunction (for from local direc- 
tion, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy to 
mental direction or intention) denoting purpose and 
end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα 
μή, that not, lest; it is used 

1. prop. of the purpose or end; a. foll. by the 
Optative; only twice, and then preceded by the pres. 
of a verb of praying or beseeching, where the wish 
(optatio) expressed by the prayer gave occasion for the 
use of the optat.: Eph. i. 17 but WH mrg. subj.; iii. 16 
RG; cf. W. 290 (273); B. 233 (201); and yet in both 
instances the telic force of the particle is so weakened 
that it denotes the substance rather than the end of 
the prayer; see 2 below. b. foll. by the Subjune- 
tive, not only (according to the rule observed by the 
best Grk. writ.) after the primary tenses (pres., pf., fut.) 
or the imperative, but (in accordance with that well- 
known negligence with which in later times and esp. by 
Hellenistic writers the distinction between the subjunc. 
and the optat. was disregarded) after preterites even 
where the more elegant Grk. writ. were wont to use the 
optat.; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 847 sqq. ; Klotz ad Dev. 
ii. 2 p. 616 sqq. ; W.287 (270) sqq.; B. 233 (201). a. 
after a Present: Mk. iv. 21; vii. 9; Lk. vi. 34 ; viii. 12; 
xvi. 28; Jn.iii. 15; v. 34; vi.30; Acts ii. 25; xvi. 30; Ro. 
1. 11; iii. 19; xi. 25; 1 Co. vii. 295 ix. 12; 2:0. 1. 17; Gal. 
vi. 18; Phil iii.8; Heb. v. 1; vi. 12; ix. 25; 1 Jmn.1.3; 
Rev. iii. 18; xi. 6, and often. B. after a Perfect: 
Mt: 1..225 xxi. Ai 98: νὉ 25:; [86 DEBT IWIES sch ας τὰ 
38; xii. 40,46; xiv. 29; xvi. 1,4; xvii.4; xx. 31; 1 Co. 
ix. 22; 1 Jn. v. 20 [here T Tr WH pres. indic.; see d.]. 
y. after an Imperative (either pres. or aor.) : Mt. vii. 
1; ix. 6; xiv. 15; xvii. 27; xxiii. 26; Mk. xi. 25; xiii. 18; 
Jn.iv.15; v.14; vii. 3 [R GL]; x. 385 1 Co. vii. 5; xi. 
34; 1 Tim. iv. 15; Tit. iii. 13, ete.; also after a horta- 
tive or deliberative subjune.: Mk. i. 38; Lk. xx. 
14; Jn. vi. 5 [R** L T Tr WH]; xi. 16; Heb. iv. 16, 
ete. 8. aftera Future: Lk. xvi. 4; xviii. 5; Jn. v. 20 
[here Tdf. indic. pres.; see d.]; xiv. 3, 13, 16; 1 Co. xv. 
28; Phil. i. 26. e. after Historic tenses: after the 
impf., Mk. iii. 2 [here L Tr fut. indic.; see 6.7; vi. 41; 
viii. 6; Lk. vi. 7; xviii. 15, etc. ; after the plupf., Jn. iv. 
8; after the aor., Mt. xix. 13; Mk. iii. 14; xi. 28; xiv. 
10 [B. § 139, 37]; Lk. xix. 4, 15; Jn. v. 36 [RGL; cf. 
B.]; vii. 32; xii. 9; Acts xix. 4 [?]; Ro. vi. 4; 2 Co. viii. 
9; Heb.ii.14; xi. 35; 1 Tim.i.16; 1Jn.iii.5,8,etc. c. 
As prof. auth. join the final particles ὄφρα, μή, and esp. 
ὅπως, also with the future Indicative (cf. Matthiae 
§ 519, 8 ii. p. 1186 sqq.), as being in nature akin to the 
subjune., so the N. T. writ., acc. to a usage extremely 
doubtful among the better Grk. writ. (cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 
629 sq.), also join ἵνα with the same [cf. WH. App. p. 
171° sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. ἵνα, 17]: tva θήσω, 1 Co. ix. 18; 
LT Tr WH in the foll. instances: σταυρώσουσιν, Mk. 
xv. 20 [not WH (see u. s.) ], δώσουσιν, Lk. xx. 105 xevó- 
cet, 1 Co. ix. 15 [not Lehm.], [καταδουλώσουσιν, Gal. ii. 
4 (but cf. Hort in WH u. s. p. 167*)]; κερδηθήσονται, 
1 Pet. iii. 1; σφάξουσιν, Rev. vi. 4; δώσει, Rev. viii. 3; 


eu 
tva 


προσκυνήσουσιν, [ Rev. ix. 20]; xiii. 12 [(cf. 2 a. fin. be- 
low)]; [ἀναπαήσονται, Rev. xiv. 13 (see ἀναπαύω) cf. 4 b.]; L 
Tr in the foll.: κατηγορήσουσιν, Mk. iii. 2, (cf. b. e. above) ; 
προσκυνήσουσιν, Jn. xii. 20; T Tr WH in [θεωρήσουσιν, 
Jn. vii. 3]; ξυρήσονται, Acts xxi. 24; LT WH Tr mrg. 
in ἀδικήσουσιν, Rev. ix. 4 [ (cf. 2 b. below)]; [add, ἐρεῖ, 
Lk. xiv.10 T WH Tr txt.; ἐξομολογήσεται, Phil. ii. 11 T 
L mrg. Tr mrg.; καυθήσομαι, 1 Co. xiii. 3 T; δώσει; Jn. 
xvii. 2 WH Tr mrg.; ἀναπαύσονται, Rey. vi. 11 WH; 
δώσει, Rev. xiii. 16 WH mrg.], (iva καταργήσει τὸν Oáva- 
Tov καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξει, Barn. ep. 5, 6 [so cod. 
N, but Hilgenf., Müller, Gebh., al, adopt the subjune. ; 
yet see Cunningham’s note ad loc.]); so that the fut. al- 
ternates with the subjune.: tva ἔσται . . . καὶ εἰσέλθωσιν, 
Rev. xxii. 14 ; γένηται kai ἔσῃ (Vulg. sis), Eph. vi. 3; in 
other pass. L T Tr WH have restored the indic., as ἵνα 
ἥξουσι k. προσκυνήσουσιν ...k. γνῶσιν, Rev. iii. 9; wa 
«ον πίνητε... καὶ καθίσεσθε or καθήσεσθε [but WH txt. 
καθῆσθε] (Vuls. et sedeatis), Lk. xxii. 80; κάμψῃ x. ἐξο- 
μολογήσεται, Phil. ii. 11 [ T Lmrg. Tr mrg.]; cf. B. § 139, 
38; W. $ 41b.1b. d. By a solecism freq. in the 
eccles. and Byzant. writ. ἵνα is joined with the indic. 
Present: 1 Co. iv. 6 (φυσιοῦσθε); Gal iv. 17 ((y- 
λοῦτε) ; [cf. Test. xii. Patr., test. Gad ὃ 7; Barn. ep. 6, 
5; 7, 11; Ignat. ad Eph. 4, 2; ad Trall. 8, 2, and other 
exx. in Win. and Bttm. as below; but see Hort in WH. 
App. p. 167%, cf. pp. 169°, 171 sq.]; but the indic. is very 
doubtful in the foll. passages: [Jn. iv. 15 Trtxt.]; v. 
20 (Τα. θαυμάζετε); xvii. 3 T Trtxt.; Gal.vi.12 TL 
mrg.; [1 Th. iv. 13 L mrg.]; Tit. ii. 4 T Tr L mrg.; 2 Pet. 
i. 10 L; [1 Jn. v. 20 T Tr WH (cf. b. 8. above)]; Rev. 
xii. 6 (T Tr τρέφουσιν) ; [xiii. 17 WH mrg.]; cf. W. $41 
b.1c.; B.$139,39; Meyer on 1 Co. iv. 6; Wieseler on 
Gal. iv. 17; [Soph. τι. s.]. (In the earlier Grk. writ. tva 
is joined with the indic. of the past tenses alone, ‘to 
denote something which would have been, if something 
else had been done, but now has not come to pass? Her- 
mann ad Vig. p. 847, cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 630 sq. ; 
Kühner $ 553, 7 ii. 903; [Jelf § 813; cf. Jebb in App. to 
Vincent and Dickson’s Modern Greek, § 79].) e. 
the final sentence is preceded by preparatory demon- 
strative expressions [W. $ 23, 5]: eis τοῦτο, to this end, 
Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. 111. 8; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. 
ii. 21; iii. 9; iv. 6, (Barn. ep. 5, 1, 11; [14,5]); εἰς αὐτὸ 
τοῦτο, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; διὰ τοῦτο, Jn. i. 31; 2 Co. 
xiii. 10; Philem. 15; 1 Tim. i. 16 ; τούτου χάριν, Tit. i. 5. 

2. In later Grk., and esp. in Hellenistie writers, the 
final force of the particle tva is more or less weakened, 
so that it is frequently used where the earlier Greeks 
employed the Infinitive, yet so that the leading and 
the dependent sentence have each its own subject. The 
first extant instance of this use occurs in the Amphic- 
tyonic decree in [pseudo-] Dem. p. 279, 8 [i. e. de coron. 
8 155]: πρεσβεῦσαι πρὸς Φίλιππον kai ἀξιοῦν tva βοηθήσῃ. 
[ef. Odyss. 3, 327 λίσσεσθαι . . . ἵνα νημερτὲς ἐνίσπῃ (cf. 
3, 19)], but it increased greatly in subsequent times; cf. 
W.§ 44, 8; B. 237 (204) ; [Green 171 sq. ; Goodwin § 45 
N.5 b.; Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson’s Modern 


303 





e 
tva- 


Greek, $55]. Accordingly tva stands with the subjunc.. 
in such a way that it denotes the purport (or object) 
rather than the purpose of the action expressed by 
the preceding verb. This occurs a. after verbs of 
caring for, deciding, desiring, striving: βλέ- 
mew, 1 Co. xvi. 10; Col. iv. 17; 2 Jn. 8; (yr, 1 Co. iv. 
2; xiv. 12; φυλάσσομαι, iva μή, 2 Pet. iii. 17; μεριμνάω, 
1 Co. vii. 34; ζηλόω, 1 Co. xiv. 1; βουλεύομαι, Jn. xi. 53- 
[RG Tr mrg. συμβου.]; xii. 105 ἀφίημι, Mk. xi. 16; Jn. 
xii. 7 L'T Tr WH; θέλημά ἐστι, Mt. xviii. 14; Jn. vi. 39 
Sq.; θέλω, Mt. vii. 12; Mk. vi. 25; ix. 30; x. 35; Lk. vi- 
31; so that it alternates with the inf., 1 Co. xiv. 5 ; δίδωμι, 
to grant, that, Mk. x. 37; Rev. ix. 5, ete.; ποιῶ, Rev. xiii. 
12 [here L T Tr WH indic. fut. (cf. 1 c. above)]. b. 
after verbs of saying (commanding, asking, exhorting; 
but by no means after κελεύειν [cf. B. 275 (236)]): 
εἰπεῖν, in the sense of to bid, Mt.iv. 3; Mk. iii. 9; Lk. iv. 
3; also λέγειν, Acts xix. 4; 1 Jn. v. 16; ἐρρήθη, Rev. vi. 11 
[WH indic. fut.]; ix. £[L T Tr mrg. WH indic. fut. (see 
1 c. above)]; διαμαρτύρομαι, 1 Tim. v. 21 (otherwise [ viz. 


| telic] in Lk. xvi. 28); époró, to ask, beseech, Mk. vii. 26; 


Lk. vii. 80; xvi. 27; Jn.iv.47; xvii 15, 21; xix. 31; 
2 Jn. 5; παρακαλῶ, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. v. 10, 18; vii. 32; 
viii. 22; Lk.viii.32; 1 €0.1.10; xvi.12, 15 sq.; 2 Co. 
viii. 6; ix.5; x18; 1 Th.iv.1; 2 Th.iH. 12, (Joseph. 
antt. 12, 3, 2); προσεύχομαι [q. v.], Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. 
[sili 18]; xiv. 35; δέομαι, Lk. ix. 40; xxii. 32, (Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 83); ἐπιτιμῶ, Mt. xii. 165 [xvi. 20 LWH 
ixt.]; xx.31; Mk. iij. 12; viii. 30; x.48; Lk. xviii 39; 
ἐντέλλομαι, Mk. xiii. 34; Jn. xv. 17; ἐντολὴν δίδωμι or 
λαμβάνω, Jn. xi. 57; xiii. 34; xv. 12; γράφω, with the 
involved idea of prescribing, Mk. ix. 12 [cf. W. 462 
(430) and the txt. of LT]; xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28; δια- 
στέλλομαι, Mt. xvi. 20 [L WH txt. ἐπιτιμῶ (see above)]; 
Mk. v. 43; vii. 36; ix. 95 παραγγέλλω, Mk. vi. 8 [cf. W. 
518 (538)]; συντίθεμαι, Jn. ix. 22; dyyapevo, Mt. xxvii. 
32; Mk. xv. 21; κηρύσσω, Mk. vi. 12; ἀπαγγέλλω, Mt. 
xxviii. 10; ἐξορκίζω, Mt. xxvi. 63. [For exx. (of its use 
with the above verbs and others) drawn from the later- 
Grk. writ. see Sophocles, Glossary ete. $ 88, 1.] c. 
after words by which judgment is pronounced con- 
cerning that which some one is about to do (or which is 
going to happen), as to whether it is expedient, be- 
fitting, proper, or not; as συμφέρει, Mt. xviii. 6; v. 
29 sq.; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7; λυσιτελεῖ. Lk. xvii. 2; dpkeróv 
ἐστι, Mt. x. 25; also after ἄξιος, Jn. i. 27; ἱκανός, Mt. 
viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6; ἐλάχιστόν μοί ἐστιν, iva, 1 Co. iv. 3; 
ἠγαλλιάσατο, ἵνα iby, Jn. viii. 56; χρείαν ἔχω, Jn. ii. 25; 


xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 27; ἔδει, ἵνα ἐπὶ ξύλου πάθη, Barn. 
ep. 5, 13. [For other exx. see Soph. as above § 88, 
3, 4.] d. after substantives, to which it adds a 


more exact definition of the thing; after subst. of 
time: χρόνον, tva ueravoray, Rev. ii. 21; after ὥρα, Jn. 
xii. 93; xiii. 1; xvi. 2, 32, (elsewhere ὅτε, Jn. iv. 23; v. 
25); in these exx. the final force of the particle is still 
apparent; we also can say *time that she should re- 
pent ” [cf. W. 339 (318) ; B. 240 (207)]; but in other 
expressions this force has almost disappeared, as in 


er 
tva 


ἔστιν συνήθεια ὑμῖν, va... ἀπολύσω, Jn. xviii. 39; after 
μισθός, 1 Co. ix. 18. e. it looks back to a de- 
monstrativepronoun; cf. W. 338 (317); [B. $ 139, 
45]: πόθεν μοι τοῦτο, iva ἔλθῃ krÀ. for τὸ ἐλθεῖν τὴν etc. 
Lk. i. 48; esp. in John, cf. vi. 29,50; xv. 18; xvii. 3 
[here T Tr txt. indic.; see 1 d. above]; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23; 
v.3; 2Jn.6; Phil i.9; ἐν τούτῳ, Jn. xv. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 
17, (θεοῦ δὲ rà δυνατὸν ἐν τούτῳ δείκνυται, va... ἐξ οὐκ 
ὄντων ποιῇ τὰ γινόμενα, Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 13; after 
τόδε, Epict. diss. 2, 1, 1; [other exx. in Soph. Lex. 
s. v. 6]). 

3. According to a very ancient tenet of the gramma- 
rians, accepted by Kiihner, ὃ 553, 2 Anm. 3; [7. S. 
Green, N. T. Gram. p. 172 sq.], and not utterly rejected 
by Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 238 sq. (206), iva is alleged to 
be used not only τελικῶς, i. e. of design and end, but also 
frequently ἐκβατικῶς, i. e. of the result, signifying with 
the issue, that; with the result, that; so that (equiv. to 
ὥστε). But C. F. A. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 836 sqq. and 
Win. 338 (317) and 457 (426) sqq. have clearly shown, 
that in all the passages adduced from the N. T. to prove 
this usage the telic (or final) force prevails: thus in 
iva μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωῦσέως, that the law of Moses may 
not be broken (which directs a man to be cireumcised 
on the eighth and on no other day), Jn. vii. 23; οὐκ 
ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει, ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς . . . καταλάβῃ, that the day 
should overtake you (cf. the final force as brought out by 
turning the senténce into the pass. form in Germ. wm 
vom Tage erfasst zu werden), 1 Th. v. 4; προσευχέσθω, 
ἵνα διερμηνεύῃ, let him pray (intent on this, or with this 
aim), that (subsequently) he may interpret, 1 Co. xiv. 
13; likewise ἐπενθήσατε, iva ete. 1 Co. v. 2, and μετενόη- 
cav, tva uj, Rev. ix. 20; μετάθεσιν, . .. iva etc. that the 
change may be to this end, that etc. Heb. xii. 27; iva μὴ 
... ποιῆτε, that ye may not do, Gal. v. 17 (where ἡ σάρξ 
and τὸ πνεῦμα are personified antagonistic forces con- 
tending for dominion over the will of the Christian; cf, 
Wieseler ad loe.); the words tva... φραγῇ κτλ. in Ro. 
iii. 19 describe the end aimed at by the law. In many 
passages where iva has seemed to interpreters to be used 
ἐκβατικῶς, the sacred writers follow the dictate of piety, 
which bids us trace all events back to God as their au- 
thor and to refer them to God's pur poses (Jo. Dama- 
scen. orthod. fid. 4, 19 ἔθος τῇ γραφῇ. twa ἐκβατικῶς 
ὀφείλοντα λέγεσθαι, αἰτιολογικῶς λέγειν) ; so that, if we 
are ever in doubt whether fva is used of design or of 
result, we can easily settle the question when we can 
interpret the passage ‘that, by God's decree,’ or ‘that, 
according to divine purpose’ etc.; passages of this 
sort are the following: Mk. iv. 12; Lk. ix. 45; xi. 50; 
xiv. 10; Jn. iv. 36; ix. 2; xii. 40; xix. 28; Ro. v. 20; vii. 
13; viii. 17; xi.31sq.; 1 Co. vii. 29; 2 Co. iv. 7; vii. 9; 
also the phrase ἵνα πληρωθῇ, wont to be used in refer- 
ence to the O. T. prophecies: Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; iv. 14; 
xii. 17 L T Tr WH; xxi. 4; xxvi. 56; xxvii. 35 Rec. ; Jn. 
xiii. 18; xvii. 12; xix. 24, 36; tva πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος, Jn. 
xii. 38; xv. 25, cf. xviii. 9, 32. [Cf. Win. 461 (429). 
Prof. Sophocles although giving (Lex. s. v. (va, 19) a co- 


904 





ἵνα 


pious collection of exx. of the ecbatic use of the word, 
defends its telic sense in the phrase iva wAnp., by calling 
attention not merely to the substitution of ὅπως πληρ. 
in Mt. viii. 17; xiii. 35, (cf. ii. 23), but esp. to 1 Esdr. i. 
54 (εἰς ἀναπλήρωσιν ῥήματος τοῦ κυρίου ev στόματι 'lepe- 
píov) ; ii. 1 (εἰς συντέλριαν ῥήματος κυρ. κτλ.) ; 2 Esdr. 1.1 
(τοῦ τελεσθῆναι λόγον κυρίου ἀπὸ στόματος ἹἹερεμίου) ; Jo- 
seph. antt. 8, 8, 2 fin. ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐπράττετο κατὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ 
βούλησιν ἵνα λάβῃ τέλος ἃ προεφήτευσεν ᾿Αχίας ; cf. Bib. 
Sacr. 1 p. 729 sqq. ; Luthardt’s Zeitschr. '83 p. 632 sqq.] 

4. The elliptical use of the particle; a. the 
telie tva often depends on a verb not expressed, but to 
be repeated or educed from the context (cf. Fritzsche 
on Mt. p. 840sq.; W. 316 (297) ; [B. 8139, 47]) : ἀλλ᾽ 
(sc. ἦλθεν, cf. vs. 7) tva μαρτυρήσῃ, Jn. i. 8; ἀλλ᾽ (sc. 
ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον) tva els φανερὸν ἔλθῃ, Mk. iv. 22; ἀλλ᾽ 
(se. kpareiré pe) tva etc. Mk. xiv. 49; add, Jn. xv. 25; 
1 Jn. ii. 19. b. the weakened tva (see 2 above) 
with the subjunc. (or indic. fut. [cf. 1 c.], Rev. xiv. 
13 L T Tr WH) denotes something which one 
wishes to be done by another, so that before the tva 
a verb of commanding (exhorting, wishing) must 
be mentally supplied, (or, as is commonly said, it 
forms a periphrasis for the imperative): ἵνα 

. . ἐπιθῆς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ, Mk. v. 23; ἡ γυνὴ tva φύόβηται 
τὸν ἄνδρα, Eph. v. 83; Gal. ii. 10; add 2 Co. viii. 7; ἵνα ava- 
παύσωνται [L T Tr WH -παήσονται (see ἀναπαύω init.) ], 
Germ. sie sollen ruhen [A. V. that they may rest ete.], 
Rey. xiv. 13; [perh. also Col. iv. 16, cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc.], (2 Mace. i. 9; Epict. ench. 23 (17); diss. 4, 1, 41; 
among the earlier Greeks once so, Soph. O. C. 155; in 
Latin, Cic. ad divers. 14, 20 ‘ibi ut sint omnia parata"; 
in Germ. stern commands: ‘dass du gehest!’ ‘dass du 
nicht séumest!’ cf. W. § 43,5 a.; [B. 241 (208)]). c. 
iva without a verb following, — which the reader is left 
to gather from the context; thus we must mentally sup- 
ply εὐαγγελιζώμεθα, εὐαγγελίζωνται in Gal. ii. 9, cf. W. 
587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; tva κατὰ χάριν, sc. 7, that 
the promise may be a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [W. 598 
(556); B. 392 (336) ]; tva ἄλλοις ἄνεσις sc. γένηται, 2 Co. 
viii. 13 [W. 586 (545); B. $129, 22]; ἵνα sc. γένηται, 1 
Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco- 
luthon [W. 599 (557); B. 234 (201)]: wa. -. καυχάσθω 
for καυχᾶται. (iva ὡς ἄνθρωπος, sc. ἐργάζῃ; Epict. diss. 3, 
23, 4.) 

5. Generally ἵνα stands first in the final sentence; 
sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in 
which the main force of the sentence lies [W.550 (511); 
B. $151, 18]: Acts xix. 4; Ro. xi. 31 (join τῷ ὑμετέρῳ 
ἐλέει Wa); 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [R G]; 2 Co. ii. 4; xii. 7; Gal. 
11: 10: τὸ λοιπὸν Ive κιλ. (δὴ vals 29 Recess ee EO DAI 
Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke 
more rarely, than the rest; [on Jn.’s use see W. 338 
(317) sq.; 461 (480); B. 236 (203); 244 (210) note; 
8140, 10 and 12; on Luke’s cf. B. 235 sq. (203)]. It 
is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Schaeffer’s 
reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy’s) 
ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488.] 


a. 


ἅνα τί 


ἵνα τί [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exe. (by mistake?) 
jn Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly ἱνατί [so Rec.*t bez 
G T uniformly; see W. $5, 2]; Lat. ut quid? i. e. for what 
purpose? wherefore? why? am elliptical formula, due to 
the fact that a questioner begins an answer to his own 
question with the word ἵνα, but not knowing how to com- 
plete it reverts again to the question, as if to ask what 
will complete the answer: that (what?) may or might 
happen, (ut (quid 2) fiat or fieret); see Herm. ad Vig. p. 
847; Kühner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25, 1 fin.; [B. 
8 149, 2]: Mt. ix.4; xxvii. 46; Lk. xiii. 7; Acts iv. 25; 
vii. 26; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6; 
xxv.32; xxvii.46; Num.xiv.3; xxii. 32 [Ald.]; Judg. 
vi. 13 [Alex, Ald., Compl.]; 1 5.1. 8; 2 S. iii. 24; xv. I9; 
Job iii. 12; x.18; Jer. ii. 29; xiv. 19; xv. 18; Dan. x. 
20 [Theodot.]; Ps.ii.1; x. 1 (ix. 22); xxi. (xxii.) 2, 
ete.; Sir. xiv. 3; 1 Maec. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192; 
Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 c.; al.) * 

Ἰόππη (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra- 
phers prefer Ἰόπη, cf. Movers, Phonizier, ii. 2 p. 176 
Anm.), -5s, 7, (Hebr. 32? i. e. beauty, fr. nz to shine, be 
beautiful; [al. make the name mean ‘an eminence’; al. 
al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean, 
lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim. 
Tt was subject to the Jews from the time of the Macca- 
bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car- 
ried on a flourishing trade; now Yáfa (not Jaffa): Acts 
ix. 36, 38, 42 sq. ; x. 5, 8, 23,32; xi. 5, 13. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Joppe; Riietschi in Herzog vii. p. 4 sq.; Fritzsche 
in Schenkel iii. 376 sq.; [BB.DD.]. * 

Ιορδάνης, -ov [B. 17], 6 [ef. W. $ 18,5 8.1, (1, fr. 9 
to descend; for other opinions about the origin of the 
name see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.’s Kitto s. v. 
-Jordan]), the Jordan, the largest and most celebrated 
river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor- 
rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon, 
flows at first into Lake Samochonitis (Merom so-called ; 
[mod. ei-Hüleh; see BB.DD. s. v. Merom (Waters of) ]), 
and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the 

"Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented 
during its course by many smaller streams, and finally 
empties into the Dead Sea: Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13 ; iv. 15, 25; 
xix.1; Mk.i.5,9; 11.8; x. 1; Lk. iii. 8; iv. 1; Jn.i.28; 
iii. 26; x. 40; ef. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. Jordan; 
Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iii. 
p. 378 sqq.; [ Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land, 
pp- 144-186].* 

ids, -od, 6, (on its very uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in 
Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591; [Vaniéek p. 9697); 1l: 
poison (of animals): ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ rà χείλη αὐτῶν, the 
poison of asps is under their lips, spoken of men given to 
reviling and calumniating and thereby injuring others, 
Ro. iii. 13 (fr. Ps. exxxix. (exl.) 3 (4)); by the same fic. 
(γλῶσσα) μεστὴ ἰοῦ θανατηφόρου, Jas. iii. 8 ; (in Grk. writ. 
fr. Pind. down). 2. rust: Jas. v. 3; (Ezek. xxiv. 
6. 11 sq. ; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24) ; Theogn., 
Theoer., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Leian., al.).* 

Ἰούδα, (see Ἰούδας, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop. 

20 


805 








᾿Ιουδαῖος 


name; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch 
Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang from him. 3. 
the region which this tribe occupied (cf. W. 114 (108)); so 
in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice); πόλις Ἰούδα (Judg. xvii. 
8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a 
matter of dispute what city is meant; the most probable 
conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, — a. 
city assigned to the priests, situated ‘in the hill country’ 
(Χεβρὼν ἐν τῷ ὄρει ᾿Ιούδα, Josh. xxi. 11), the native place 
of John the Baptist ace. to Jewish tradition. [Cf. B. D. 
Am. ed. s. v. Juda, a City of.]* 

᾿Ιουδαία, -as, ἡ [ cf. W. $ 18, 5 a. ], (sc. γῆ, which is added 
Jn. iii. 22, or χώρα, Mk.i.5; fr. the adj. ᾿Ιουδαῖος, q. v-), 
Judea (Hebr. rymim) ; in the O. T. a region of Palestine, 
named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it: 
Judg. xvii. 7-9; Ruth i.1sq.; 2 5. ii. 1, ete. Its bound- 
aries are laid down in Josh. xv. 1 sqq. After the time 
of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the 
name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were 
reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer- 
tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with 
the metropolis of Jerusalem: 1 K. xiv. 21, 29; xv. 7, etc. 
In the N. T. the name is given 1. in a narrower 
sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side 
of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from 
Samaria, Galilee, Perea, Idumsa (Mk. iii. 8): Mt. ii. 1, 
5,22; iii.5; iv.25; xxiv.16; Mk. iii. 7; xiii. 14; Lk. ii. 
4; Jn. iv. 3, 47, 54; Acts i. 8; viii. 1, etc.; it stands for 
its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33; 
xxxv. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to a// Palestine: 
Lk.i.5; [iv. 44 WH Trmrg.]; vii. 17; xxiii. 55; Acts ii. 
9; x. 37; xi. 1, 29, (and perh. 2 Co. i. 16; Gal. i. 22); 
πᾶσα ἡ χώρα τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20; eis τὰ ὅρια τῆς 
᾿Ιουδαίας πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, into the borders of Judea (in 
the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Perea, 
Mt. xix. 1; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x. 
1 RG, εἰς τὰ Sp. τῆς Ἰουδ. διὰ τοῦ πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ἰορδ., Jesus is 
said to have come into the borders of Judea (in the nar- 
rower sense) through Perea; but ace. to the reading of 
LT Tr WH, viz. καὶ πέραν τοῦ 'Iop8. and (in particular 
that part of Judea which lay) beyond the Jordan, Mark 
agrees with Matthew ; [others regard πέραν τοῦ “Iopéd. 
here as parall. with τῆς "Iov8. and like it dependent upon 
ὅρια]. 

Ἰουδαίζω ; (fr. Ἰουδαῖος, cf. “Ἑλληνιστής [ W. 92 (87) ]), 
to adopt Jewish customs and rites, imitate the Jews, Juda- 
ize: of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal. 
ii.14. (Esth. viii. 17; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10, 3; Evang. 
Nicod. c. 2; Plut. Cie. 7; to favor the Jews, Joseph. b. j. 
2185195) * 

"Tov8aikés, -/j, -όν, Jewish: Tit.i.14. (2 Mace. viii. 11; 
xiii. 21; Joseph. antt. 20, 11, 1; Philo [in Flac. $ 8].) * 

Ιουδαϊκῶς, adv., Jewishly, after the manner of the Jews: 
Gal.ii.14. [(Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 3.)]* 

Ἰουδαῖος, -aia, -atov, (Ἰούδα); Aristot. (in Joseph. c. Ap. 
1, 22, 7 where see Müller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut., 
al.; Sept.; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.) ], Jewish ; a. joined to 
nouns, belonging to the Jewish race: ἀνήρ, Acts x. 285 xxii. 


*Tovédaicpos 


3, (1 Mace. ii. 23); ἄνθρωπος, Acts xxi. 39; ψευδοπρο- 
φήτης, Acts xiii. 6; ἀρχιερεύς, Acts xix. 14; γυνή, Acts 
xvi 1; xxiv. 24; γῇ, Jn. iii. 22; χώρα, Mk.i. 5. b. 
without a noun, substantively, Jewish as respects birth, 
race, religion; aJew: Jn. iv.9; Acts xviii. 2,24; Ro. ii. 
28 sq-; plur. Rey. ii. 9; iii. 9; οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (omm, be- 
fore the exile cilizens of the kingdom of Judah; after the 
exile ail the Israelites [cf. Wright in B.D. s. v. Jew]), the 
Jews, the Jewish race: Mt. ii. 2; xxvii. 11, 29; Mk. vii. 
3; xv. 2; Jn. ii. 6; iv. 22; v.1; xviii. 33, ete.; Ἰουδαῖοί 
τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Acts xiv. 1; xviii. 4; xix. 105; 1 Co. i. 24; 
*Jovdaioi τε καὶ προσήλυτοι, Acts ii. 11 (10); ἔθνη τε καὶ 
Ἰουδαῖοι, Acts xiv. 5; sing., Ro. i. 16; ii. 9; of κατὰ τὰ 
ἔθνη ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, who live in foreign lands, among the Gen- 
tiles, Acts xxi. 21; Ἰουδαῖοι is used of converts from 
Judaism, Jewish Christians (see ἔθνος, 5) in Gal. ii. 13. 
[Svs. Ἑβραῖος, Ἰουδαῖος, Ἰσραηλίτης: “restricting our- 
selves to the employment of these three words in the N. T. we 
may say that in the first is predominantly noted language; 
in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title 
of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation” 
(Trench § xxxix.); cf. B.D. s. vv. Hebrew, Israelite, Jew.] 
The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state 
of things in his day he looked upon the Jews as a body 
of men hostile to Christianity, with whom he had come 
to see that both he and all true Christians had nothing 
in common as respects religious matters, even in his 
record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis- 
tinction between the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to 
Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin- 
guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter 
sprang from an alien race: Jn. xi. 8; xiii. 33. And 
those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, cf. 
vi. 41, 52) opposed his divine Master and his Master’s 
cause, — esp. the rulers, priests, members of the Sanhe- 
drin, Pharisees, — he does not hesitate to style oi "Iov- 
Saior, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the 
hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus: i. 19; ii. 18, 
20; v.10,15sq. 18; vi. 41,52; vii. 1, 11, 135 ix. 18, 22; 
x. 24, 31, 223; xviii. 14. [Cf. Westcott in B.D. s. v. Jew, 
and Com. on John, Intr. I. r. i. a. sub fin.] 

᾿Ιουδαϊσμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (ἰουδαΐζω), the Jewish faith and wor- 
ship, the religion of the Jews, Judaism: Gal. i. 13 sq. 
(2 Mace. ii. 21, ete.; ef. Grimm, Com. on 2 Mace. p. 61. 
[B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Judaism].) * 

"Toó8as, -a, dat. -a, acc. -av, [ B. 20 (18)], 6, (AWM, fr. 
the Hoph. of 7, praised, celebrated; see Gen. xxix. 
35), J'udah or Judas (see below) ; 1. the fourth son 
of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. i. 2 sq.; Lk. iii, 33; Rev. v. 
5; vii. 5; by meton., the tribe of Judah, the descendants 
of Judah: Heb. vii. 14; 6 οἶκος Ἰούδα, citizens of the 
kingdom of Judah, Heb. viii. 8. 2. Judah (or Judas) 
an unknown ancestor of Christ: Lk. iii. 26 RG L. 3. 
another of Christ's ancestors, equally unknown: Lk. iii. 
30. 4. Judas surnamed the Galilean, a man who 
at the time of the census under Quirinus [better Quiri- 
nius], excited a revolt in Galilee: Acts v. 37 (Joseph. 
antt. 15, 1, 1, where he is called ὁ TavAavízgs because he 


306 


Ἰσαάκ 


came from the city Gamala, near the Lake of Galilee in 
lower Gaulanitis; but he is called also 6 Γαλιλαῖος by 
Joseph. antt. 18, 1, 6; 20, 5, 2; b. j. 2, 8, 1). 5. [Ju- 
das] a certain Jew of Damaseus: Acts ix. 11. 6. 
Judas surnamed Ἰσκαριώτης (q. ν.), of Carioth (from the 
city of Kerioth, Josh. xv. 25; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 41; Amos 
ii. 2; [but see BB.DD. s. v. Kerioth]; some codd. in Jn. 
vi. 71 [ef. Tdf.’s note in loc.]; xii. 4, read ἀπὸ Kaptórov 
instead of ᾿ἸΙσκαριώτης), the son of one Simon (who in 
Jn. vi. 71 LT Tr WH; xiii. 26 T Tr WH, is himself sur- 
named Ἰσκαριώτης), one of the apostles of Jesus, who 
betrayed him: Mt. x. 4; xxvi. 14, 25, 47; xxvii. 3; Mk. 
iii. 19; xiv. 10, 43; Lk. vi. 16; xxii. 3, 47 sq.; Jn. vi. 71; 
xii.4; xiii. 2, 96, 29; xviii. 2sq.5; Actsi.16,25. Mat- 
thew (xxvii. 5), Luke (Acts i. 18), and Papias [cf. Wendt 
in Meyer's Apostelgesch. 5te Aufl. p. 23 note] in a frag. 
quoted by Oecum. on Acts i. 18 differ in the account of 
his death, [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]; on his avarice cf. 
Jn. xii. 6. 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas [or Bar- 
sabbas, see the word], a prophet of the church at Jeru- 
salem: Acts xv. 22, 27, 32. 8. Judas, an apostle, 
Jn. xiv. 22, who is called Ἰούδας ᾿Ιακώβου in Lk. vi. 16; 
Acts i. 13 (see Ἰάκωβος, 4), and, as it should seem, was 
surnamed Lebbaus or Thaddeus (see Θαδδαῖος). Ac- 
cording to the opinion of the church he wrote the Epistle 
of Jude. 9. Judas, the brother of our Lord: Mt. 
xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3, and very probably Jude 1; see Ἰάκω- 
Bos, 3.* 

Ἰουλία, -as, 7, Julia, a Christian woman [ef. Bp. Lghtft. 
on Philip. p. 177]: Ro. xvi. 15 [L mrg. "Iovíav].* 

᾿Ιούλιος, -ov, 6, Julius, a Roman centurion: Acts xxvii. 
1, 8." 

᾿Ιουνίας [Δ]. -νιᾶς, as contr. fr. Junianus ; cf. W. 102 sq. 
(97)], -a [but cf. B. 17 sq. (16) ], 6, Junias, a convert from 
Judaism, Paul's kinsman and fellow-prisoner: Ro. xvi. 7 
[(here A. V. Junia (a woman's name) which is possi- 
ble). The name oceurs again as the name of a Christian 
at Rome in Ro. xvi. 15 Lehm. mrg. (where al. 'IovAav).]* 

Ἰοῦστος, -ov, 6, Justus [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 11], 
the surname 1. of Joseph, a convert from Judaism, 
who was also surnamed Barsabas [better Barsabbas q. 
v.]: Acts i. 23. 2. of Titus, a Corinthian [a Jew- 
ish proselyte]: Acts xviii. 7. 3. of a certain Jesus, 
[a Jewish Christian]: Col. iv. 11.* 

ἱππεύς, -éos, 6, (ἵππος), a horseman: Acts xxiii. 23, 32. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

ἱππικός, -7, -óv, equestrian ; τὸ ἱππικόν, the horse (-men), 
cavalry: Rev. ix. 16 (as Hdt. 7, 87; Xen., Plat., Polyb., 
al.; more fully τὸ ἱππικὸν στράτευμα, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26; 
so τὸ πεζικόν, the foot (forces), infantry, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 
38).* 

ἵππος, -ov, 6, [Curtius § 624; Peile, Grk. and Lat. 
Etymol, Index s. v.], a horse: Jas. iii. 3; Rev. vi. 2, 4 sq. 
8; ix. 7, 9,17,[19 GLT Tr WH]; xiv. 20; xviii. 13; xix. 
11-21. [From Hom. down.]* 

Ipts, 90s, ἡ, (Iris), a rainbow: Rev. iv.3; x.1. (Hom., 
Aristot., Theophr., al.) * 

Ἰσαάκ, 6, indecl. (pr^, fr. pny to laugh: Gen. xxi. 6; 


᾿ἰσάώγγελος 


xvii. 17; in Joseph. "Icaxos, -ov), Isaac, the son of Abra- 
ham by Sarah: Mt. i. 2; viii. 11; xxii. 32; Ro. ix. 7, 10; 
Gal. iv. 28; Heb. xi. 9,17 sq. 20; Jas. ii. 21, ete. 

ἰσάγγελος, -ov, (ἴσος and ἄγγελος, formed like tad@cos 
[ef. ἰσάδελφος (Eur. Or. 1015), ἰσάστερος (4 Macc. xvii. 
5), and other compounds in Koumanoudes, Svvaywyn «rh. 
p. 166 sq.]), like the angels: Lk. xx. 36. (Eccl. writ. ; 
[ef. ἴσος ἀγγέλοις γεγονώς, Philo de sacer. Ab. et Cain. § 2; 
W. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100 (95) ].) * 

Ἰσασχάρ [Rec.*%] and Ἰσαχάρ [R* GL] (Ioodxap 
Tdf., Ἰσσαχάρ Tr WH), 6, (ve, fr. v^ there is, and 
*3U a reward [(cf. Jer. xxxi. 16) yet cf. Mühlau u. Volek 
s. v.]; Joseph. Ἰσάσχαρις [᾿Ἰσάχαρις]), Issachar, the son 
of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18): Rev. 
vii 

ἴσημι, found only in the Dorie form ἴσαμι, to know; 
from which some derive the forms ἔστε and ἴσμεν, con- 
tracted from icare and ἴσαμεν ; but these forms are more 
correctly derived from εἴδω, ἴσμεν i. q. ἴδμεν, etc., (cf. 
Bitm: Aust. Spr. i. p. 548); on the phrase ἴστε [ R ἐστε] 
γινώσκοντες, Eph. v. 5, see γινώσκω, I. 2 b. 

Ἰσκαριώτης, and (Lchm. in Mt. x. 4; TWH in Mk. 
xiv. 10; L T Tr WH in Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 16) Ἰσκαριώθ, 
i e. NIIP WN; see Ἰούδας, 6 and Σίμων, 5. 

ἴσος (not ἶσος [yet often so ΒΝ εἰς G Tr], which is Epic; 
ef. Bornemann, Scholia in Lue. p. 4; Géttling, Lehre 
vom Accent p. 305; [Chandler § 406]; Lipsius, Gram- 
mat. Untersuch. p. 24; [L. and S. s. v. fin.; W.52]), -7, 
τον, equal, in quality or in quantity: ἡ ton δωρεά, the same 
gift, Acts xi. 17; ἴσαι μαρτυρίαι, agreeing testimonies, 
Mk. xiv. 56, 59; ἴσον ποιεῖν τινά τινι, to make one equal 
to another, in the payment of wages, Mt. xx. 12; éavróv 
τῷ θεῷ, to claim for one’s self the nature, rank, author- 
ity, which belong to God, Jn. v. 18; τὰ ἴσα ἀπολαβεῖν, Lk. 
vi. 34. The neuters ἴσον and ἴσα are often used adver- 
bially fr. Hom. down (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1505*; [L. and 
S. s. v. IV. 1]; W.§ 27, 3 fin.): ἴσα εἶναι (B. § 129, 11), 
of measurement, Rev. xxi. 16; of state and condition, τῷ 
θεῷ. Phil. ii. 6 (on which see in μορφή)" 

ἰσότης, -jros, 7, (ἴσος); 1. equality: ἐξ ἰσότητος 
[cf. ἐκ, V. 3] by equality, 2 Co. viii. 13 (14), i. q. ὅπως 
γένηται ἰσότης, 14. 2. equity, fairness, what is equi- 
table, joined with τὸ δίκαιον : Col. iv. 1. (Bur., Plat., 
Aristot., Polyb., al.; [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. l. c., yet per 
contra Meyer].) * 

ἰσότιμος, -ov, (ἴσος and τιμή), equally precious ; equally 
honored: τινί, to be esteemed equal to, ἰσότιμον ἡμῖν 
πίστιν [a like precious faith with us], concisely for πίστιν 
τῇ ἡμῶν πίστει ἰσότιμον [W. $ 66,2f.; B. § 133, 10]: 2 
Pet. i. 1. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) * 

ἰσόψυχος, -ov, (ἴσος and ψυχή), equal in soul [A. V. 
like-minded], (Vulg. unanimus): Phil. ii. 20. (Bs. liv. 
(lv.) 14; Aeschyl. Ag. 1470.) * 

Ἰσραήλ (Joseph. Ἰσράηλος, -ov), 6, indecl., Onin, fr. 
by and nv, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28; Hos. xii. 
4, cf. Gen. xxxv. 10), Israel, a name given m the pa- 
triarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former 
name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on): ὁ οἶκος Ἰσραήλ, the family 


907 | 





eu 
ἱστημι 


or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [A. V. the 
house of Israel], Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; Acts vii. 42, (Ex. xvi. 
31; 1S. vii. 2, and often) ; of υἱοὶ Ἴσρ. the [sons i. e. the 
children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk.i.16; Acts v. 21; 
vil. 23,37; Ro. ix. 27; ai φυλαὶ τοῦ 'Icp., Mt. xix. 28; 
LK. xxii. 30; Rev. vii.4. — By meton. for the posterity of 
Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because 
it made reference to the promises of salvation through 
the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference 
to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see Ἰουδαῖος, 
b.]): Mt. ii. 6; viii. 10; ix.33; Lk. i. 54, 68, 80; Acts 
iv.8 [RG]; Eph. ii.12; Ro. xi. 2, 7, 26, etc. (Ex. v. 2; 
xi. 7, and often); ὁ λαὸς Ἰσρ., Acts iv. 10, 27; γῆ Ἰσρ. 
i.e. Palestine [( S. xiii. 19, etc.)], Mt. ii. 20 sq.; βασι- 
λεὺς “Iop., Mt. xxvii. 42; Jn. 1. 49 (50); ἡ ἐλπὶς τοῦ “lop. 
Acts xxviii. 20; 6 Ἶσρ. τοῦ θεοῦ (gen. of possession), i. e. 
Christians, Gal. vi. 16; ὁ Ἰσρ. κατὰ σάρκα, Israelites by 
birth, i. e. Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; in an emphat. sense, οὐ yap 
πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἴσρ. κτλ. for not all those that draw their 
bodily descent from Israel are true Israelites, i. e. are 
those whom God pronounces to be Israelites and has 
chosen to salvation, Ro. ix. 6. 

Ἰσραηλίτης (T WH Ἰσραηλείτης, Tr only in Jn. i. 47 
(48); [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 86, and cf. s. v. et, ]), του; 6, 
(Ἰσραήλ, q. ν.), an Israelite (Hebr. Serb; Sept. "Te(pag- 
Airs, 2 S. xvii. 25), one of the race of Israel, a name 
held in honor (see Ἰσραήλ) : Jn. i. 47 (48) ; Ro. ix. 4; 
xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; ἄνδρες Ἰσραηλῖται [W. ὃ 65, 5 d.; B. 
82 (72) ], Acts ii. 22; ili. 12; v. 35; xiii. 16; [xxi. 28], 
(4 Mace. xviii. 1; Joseph. antt.2,9,1). [Cf. B. D. (Am. 
ed.) s. v. Syn. see Ἰουδαῖος, b.] * 

Γ[Ἰσσάχαρ, Ἰσσαχάρ, see "Ica xdp.] 

torque, more rarely ἱστάω ([(fr. Hdt. down; cf. Veitch 
s. v.)] terópev, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and ἱστάνω ([(late; cf. 
Veitch s. v.)] ἱστάνομεν, Ro. iii. 31 L T Tr WH), [cf. B. 
44 (38) sq.; W. $14, 1£.; 87 (83); WH. App. p. 168; 
Veitch p. 337 sq.]; fut. στήσω; 1 aor. ἔστησα; 2 aor. ἔστην; 
impv. στῆθι, inf. στῆναι, ptep. rds; pf. ἔστηκα [with pres. 
force; W. 274 (257)], inf. ἑστάναι [| R?2***ez G Tr -avac 
in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere ἑστηκέναι), ptcp. masc. ἑστηκώς 
with neut. ἑστηκός, and in the shorter form ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα 
(Jn. viii. 9), with neut. ἑστώς and (LT Tr WH in Mt. 
xxiv. 15 [here R* also]; Rev. xiv. 1) ἑστός, (cf. Bim. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 208; [ Rutherford, Babrius p. 39 sq.; W. 
$14,1i.; B.48 (41)]); plupf. εἱστήκειν [(but WH uni- 
formly ior.; see I, 1) with force of impf. W. 274 (257)], 
3 pers. E εἱστήκεισαν (Mt. xii. 46; Jn. xviii. 18; Acts 
ix. 7 and L T Tr WH in Rev. vii. 11) and E 
(Rev. vii. 11 R G [cf. W. $ 14, 1a.; yet B. 43 (38)]); 
Pass., 1 aor. ἐστάθην ; 1 fut. σταθήσομαι; 1 fut. mid. στήσο- 
μαι (Rev. xviii. 15) ; 

I. TRANSITIVELY in the Pres., Impf., Fut., and 1 
Aor. act.; likewise in the tenses of the Pass. [cf. B. 
47 (41) contra W. 252 (237)], (Sept. for 127, DPA, 
2x7); [fr. Hom. down]; to cause or make to stand; to 
place, put, set; 1. univ. a. prop. τινά, to bid to 
stand by, [set up]: Actsi. 23; vi. 13; in the presence of 
others: ἐν μέσῳ, in the midst, Jn. viii. 3, and ev τῷ μέσῳ, 


ἵστημί 


Acts iv. 7; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Acts vi. 6; before judges: εἰς 
αὐτούς. before the members of the Sanhedrin, Acts xxii. 
30; ἐν τῷ συνεδρίῳ, Acts v. 27; ἐπί with gen. of the judge, 
pass. σταθήσεσθε, Mk. xiii. 9; τινὰ ἄμωμον κατενώπιόν 
τινος, to [set one i. 6.7 cause one to make his appearance 
faultless before ete. Jude 24; to place (i. e. designate 
the place for one to oceupy): ἐν μέσῳ τινῶν, Mt. xviii. 2; 
Mk. ix. 36; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Lk. ix. 47; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mt. xxv. 33; 
ἐπί τι (ace. of place), Mt. iv.5; Lk. iv. 9. Mid. to place 
one’s self, to stand (Germ. sich hinstellen, hintreten) : ἀπὸ 
μακρόθεν, Rev. xviii. 15; likewise in the passive: σταθείς, 
Lk. xviii. 11,40; xix. ὃ; [ἐστάθησαν σκυθρωποί they stood 
still, looking sad, Lk. xxiv. 17 T WH Tr txt. (cf. II. 1b. 
B.)]; Actsii.14; xi. 13; with ἐν μέσῳ τινός, τινῶν, added, 
Acts xvii. 22; xxvii. 21; σταθέντες, when they had ap- 
peared (before the judge), Acts xxv. 18. B. trop. to 
make firm, fix, establish: τί, τινά, to cause a pers. or thing 
to keep his or its place; pass. to stand, be kept intact (of 
a family, a kingdom) : Mt. xii. 25 sq.; Lk. xi. 18; i. 4. to 
escape in safety, Rev. vi. 17; with éumpoa6ev τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
ἀνθρ. added, Lk. xxi. 36; στῆσαίτινα, to cause one to pre- 
serve a right state of mind, Ro. xiv. 4 [see Meyer]; 
pass. σταθήσεται, shall be made to stand, i. e. shall be 
kept from falling, ibid. τί, to establish a thing, cause it 


to stand, i. e. to uphold or sustain the authority or force of 


any thing: Web. x. 9 (opp. to ἀναιρεῖν) ; τὴν παράδοσιν, 
Mk. vii. 9; τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιοσ. Ro. x. 3; τὸν νόμον (opp. to 
karapy®), Ro. iii. 31, (τὸν ὅρκον, Gen. xxvi. 3; τὴν διαθή- 
κην, Ex. vi. 4; 1 Mace. ii. 27). — i. q. to ratify, confirm : 
σταθῇ, σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα, Mt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1. 
to appoint, [cf. colloq. Eng. set]: ἡμέραν, Acts xvii. 31; 
cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. iv. 59. 2. to set or place in 
a balance; to weigh: money to one (because in very early 
times, before the introduction of coinage, the metals used 
to be weighed) i. e. to pay, Mt. xxvi. 15 (so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1508”; [L. and S. s. v. 
A. IV.]; Sept. for pU, Is. xlvi. 6; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 
9 sq.; Zech. xi. 12; 2 Esdr. viii. 25 sq.; etc.); this fur- 
nishes the explanation of the phrase μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς τὴν 
ἁμαρτίαν ταύτην. do not reckon to.them, call them to ac- 
count for, this sin [A. V. lay not this sin to their charge], 
Acts vii. 60 [(cf. Meyer ad loc.) ]. 

II. INTRANSITIVELY in the Perf. and Plupf. (hav- 
ing the sense of a pres. and an impf. [see above ]), also 
in 2 A or. ac t., to stand; Sept. for 3x, Wy, Dp; ib 
prop. a. foll. by prepositions or adverbs of place: 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place [cf. B. 329 (283) ], Mt. vi. 5; 
xx.3; xxiv.15; ΓΚ. χχῖν. 86; Jn. vill.9; xi.56; Acts 
v.25; vii. 33[L T Tr WH emi w. dat.]; Rev. v. 65; xix. 
17; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Acts x. 30; Rev. vii. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; 
xii.4; πρός w. dat. of place, Jn. xviii. 16; ἐπί w. gen. 
of place (Germ. auf, upon), Lk. vi. 175 Acts xxi. 40; 

lev. x. 5, 8; w. gen. of the judge or tribunal, before [cf. 
ἐπί, A. I. 2 b.], Acts xxiv. 205 xxv. 10; πέραν with gen. 
of place, Jn. vi. 22; πρό, Acts v. 23 [R G; but LT Tr WH 
ἐπὶ τῶν θυρῶν (at, Germ. an; cf. above and see ἐπί, A. I. 
22.)]; xii. 14; ἔμπροσθέν τινος, before one as judge, Mt. 
xxvii. 11; κύκλῳ (τινός), around, Rev. vii. 11; μέσος ὑμῶν, 


908 








t ΄ 
ἐστορέω 


in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 26; ἐκ δεξιῶν 
τινος, Lk. 1. 11; Acts vii. δῦ sq.; ἐν μέσῳ, Jn. viii. 9; πρός 
w.ace.(GLT Tr WII w. dat. [see πρός, 11.1) of place, Jn. 
xx. 11; ἐπί w. ace. of place (see ἐπί, C. I.), Mt. xiii. 2; 
Rev. 111. 20; vii. 1; xiv. 1; xv. 2; ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας, to stand 
upright, Acts xxvi. 16; Rev. xi. 11; παρά w. aec., Lk. v. 
2; vii. 38; eis, Jn. xxi. 4 (L T Tr mrg. WH mrg. ἐπί [see 
ἐπί, C. I. 1d.]) ; ἐκεῖ, Mt. xxvii. 47; Mk. xi. 5; Jas. ii. 3; 
ὧδε, Mt. xvi. 28; xx. 6; Mk. ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27[here T Tr 
WI αὐτοῦ, q. v.]; ὅπου, Mk. xiii. 14; ἔξω, Mt. xii. 46, 47 
[here WH in mrg. only]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 
25; μακρόθεν, Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Tr txt.]; ἀπὸ 
μακρόθεν, Rey. xviii. 10, 17; [Lk. xxiii. 49 L TWH Tr 
mrg. (but ἀπό in br.)]; πόρρωθεν, Lk. xvii. 12. * b. ab- 
solutely ; a. lo stand by, stand near, (in a place al- 
ready mentioned, so that the reader readily understands 
where): Mt. xxvi. 73; Jn.i. 35; iii. 29; vii. 37; xii. 29; 
XViii. 18, 25; xx.14; Acts xvi. 9; xxii. 25; with a ptep. 
or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of 
the one standing): Mt. xx. 6; Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts i. 11; 
ix. 7; xxvi. 6; opp. to καθίζειν, Heb.x.11sq. — B. if what 
is said to stand had been in motion (walking, flowing, 
etc.), to stop, stand still: Mt. ii. 9 (Ree. ἔστη, L T Tr WH 
ἐστάθη [cf. I. 1a.]) ; Mt. xx. 32; Mk. x. 49; Lk. viii.44 ; 
Acts vii.38. ^x. contextually, to stand immovable, stand 
Jirm, of the foundation of a building: 2 Tim. ii. 19. 2. 
metaph. a. to sland, i. e. continue safe and sound, 
stand unharmed: Acts xxvi. 22. b. to stand ready or 
prepared: with a ptep., Eph. vi. 14. c. to be of a 
steadfast mind; so in the maxim in 1 Co. x. 12. d. 
foll. by a ptep. of quality, Col. iv. 12; ὃς ἕστηκεν ἑδραῖος, 
who does not hesitate, does not waver, 1 Co. vii. 37; in 
a fig., of one who vanquishes his adversaries and holds 
the ground, Eph. vi.13; also of one who in the midst of 
the fight holds his position πρός τινα, against the foe, 
Eph. vi.11, (cf. Ex. xiv. 13; Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 13). to 
persist, continue, persevere: τῇ πίστει, dat. commodi (so 
as not to fall from thy faith [al. take the dat. instru- 
mentally, by thy faith; cf. W. $31,6 c.; B. $133, 247), 
1o. xi. 20; ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, Jn. viii. 44 (where the meaning 
is, his nature abhors, is utterly estranged from, the truth; 
Vulg. incorrectly, in veritate non stetit; Luther, ist nicht 
bestanden. [A. V. abode not etc.] ; but the Zürich version 
correctly, besteht nicht [WH read ἕστηκεν, impf. of στήκω, 
q. ν.7); ἐν τῇ χάριτι, Ro. v.2; ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, 1 Co. xv. 
1; εἰς ἣν (sc. χάριν) ἑστήκατε, into which ye have entered, 
that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v. 12 [but L T Tr WH 
read στῆτε (2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur.) enter and 
stand fast; B. $ 147, 16, cf. p. 329 (283)]. Ν. B. From 
ἕστηκα is formed the verb στήκω, which see in its place. 
[Cowr.: av, éz-av-, é£-av-, dv6-, dd, δι-, év-, ἐξ-, ἐπ- (-pat), 
ἐφ-. κατ-εφ-, avv-ed-, καθ-, ἀντιτκαθ-, ἀπο-καθ-, μεθ-, map-, 
περι-, Tpo-, συν-ίστημι.] 
ἱστορέω: 1 aor. inf. ἱστορῆσαι ; (ἵστωρ [allied with οἶδα 
(ἴστω), videre (visus), etc.; Curtius § 282], -opos, one 
that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in); fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down; 1. to inquire into, examine, inves- 
tigate. 2. to find out, learn, by inquiry. 3. to 


> , 
to AXUpos 


gain knowledge of by visiting: something (worthy of 
being seen), τὴν χώραν, Plut. Thes. 30; Pomp. 40; τινά, 
some distinguished person, to become personally ac- 
quainted with, know face to face: Gal. i. 18; so too in 
Joseph. antt. 1, 11, 4; b. j. 6, 1, 8 and often in the Clem. 
homilies; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 122 note; [El- 
licott on Gal. 1. c.].* 

ἰσχυρός, -d, -óv, (icxvc), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. 
mostly for 5s, 33, pin, 0355, and Chald. NPA; strong, 
mighty; a. of living beings: strong eitherin body or in 
mind, Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xi. 21 sq.; Rev. v. 2; x. 
1; xviii. 21; ἐν πολέμῳ, mighty i. e. valiant, Heb. xi. 34, cf. 
Rev. xix. 18; of one who has strength of soul to sustain 
the assaults of Satan, 1 Jn. ii. 14 ; univ. strong, and 
therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp. 
to ἀσθενής); compar., Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; 
mighty, — of God, 1 Co. i. 25; Rev. xviii. 8, (Deut. x. 17; 
2 Macc. i. 24, etc.) ; of Christ raised to the right hand of 
God, 1 Co. x. 22; of those who wield great influence 
among men by their rank, authority, riches, etc., rà ἰσχυρά 
i.q. robs ἰσχυρούς (on the neut. cf. W. $ 27,5), 1 Co. i. 27 
(οἱ ἰσχυροὶ τῆς γῆς, 2 K. xxiv. 15) ; joined with πλούσιοι, 
Rev. vi. 15 (Rec. of δυνατοί). ^ b. of inanimate things: 
strong i. q. violent, ἄνεμος, Mt. xiv. 30 [T WH om. icy.]; 
forcibly uttered, φωνή, Rev. xviii. 2 [Rec. μεγάλη] (Ex. 
xix. 19); κραυγή, Heb. v. 7; βρονταί, Rev. xix. 6 ; λιμός, 
great, Lk. xv. 14; ἐπιστολαί (stern, [forcible]), 2 Co. x. 
10; strong i. q. firm, sure, παράκλησις, Heb. vi. 18; fitted 
to withstand a forcible assault, πόλις, well fortified, Rev. 
xviii. 10 (τεῖχος, 1 Macc. 1. 88; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 7; πύργος, 
Judg. ix. 51). [Cf. δύναμις, fin.]* 

ἰσχύς, -vos, ἡ, (ἴσχω [allied w. ἔσχον; to hold in check ]), 
[fr. Hes. down], Sept. esp. for n3, n, iy, 19933; abil- 
ity, force, strength, might: 2 Pet. ii. 11 (joined w. δύναμις) ; 
Rev. v. 12; vii. 12; τὸ κράτος τῆς ἰσχύος, power (over ex- 
ternal things) afforded by strength, Eph. i. 19; vi. 10, 
(Is. xl. 26) ; ἡ δόξα τῆς icy. (see δόξα, III. 3 b. a. fin.), 
2 ΤῊ. 1. 9; κράζειν ἐν ἰσχύει, with strength, mightily, Rev. 
xviii. 2 Rec.; ἐξ ἰσχύος, of one's strength, to the extent 
of one’s ability, 1 Pet. iv. 11; with ὅλης added, Mk. xii. 
30, 33; Lk. x. 27 [here L txt. T Tr WH read ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ 
ἰσχύϊ]. [Svw. see δύναμις, fin.]* 

ἰσχύω ; impf. ἴσχυον ; fut. ἰσχύσω; 1 aor. ἴσχυσα; 
(ἰσχύς) ; Sept. for pin, YDS, ὍΣ»), ete.; to be strong, i. e. 
1. to be strong in body, to be robust, to be in sound health : 
οἱ ἰσχύοντες, as subst., Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17, (Soph. Tr. 
234; Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 24; joined with ὑγιαίνειν, id. mem. 
207507): 2. to have power, [fr. Aeschyl. down], i. e. 
a. to have a power evinced in extraordinary deeds, i. e. 
to exert, wield, power: so of the gospel, Acts xix. 20; 
Hebraistically, to have strength to overcome: οὐκ ἴσχυσαν, 
[A. V prevailed not i. 6.1 succumbed, were conquered, 
(so VEN x5, Gen. xxxii. 26 (25)), Rev. xii. 8; κατά τινος, 
against one, i.e. to use one's strength against one, to 
treat him with violence, Acts xix. 16. b. i. q. to be 
of force, avail (Germ. gelten) : Heb. ix. 17; τί, Gal. v. 6, 
and Ree. in vi. 15. C. to be serviceable: εἴς τι [ A. V. 
good for], Mt. v. 13. d. foll. by inf. to be able, can: 


909 





Ἰωάννης 


Mt. viii. 28; xxvi.40; Mk. v. 4; [ix. 18 (inf. to be sup- 
plied) ]; xiv. 37; Lk. vi. 48; viii. 43; [xiii. 24]; xiv. 6, 29 
Sq.; xvi.3; xx. 26; Jn. xxi.6; Acts vi. 10; xv. 10; xxv. 
7; xxvii. 16, (Plut. Pomp.58). with acc., πάντα, Phil. iv. 
13; πολύ, Jas. v. 16. [Cowr.: ἐν-, ἐξ-, ἐπ-, kara xóo.]* 

ἴσως, (ἴσος, q. v.), adv., [fr. Soph. down]; als 
equally, in like manner. 2. agreeably to expecta- 
tion, i. e. it may be, probably ; freq. an urbane expression 
of one’s reasonable hope (Germ. wohl, hoffentlich) : Lk. 
xx. 13, and often in Attic writ.* 

Ἰταλία, -as, 7, Italy: Acts xviii. 2; xxvii. 1, 6; Heb. 
xiii. 24.* 

Ἰταλικός, -ἡ, τόν, (Ἰταλία), [fr. Plat. down], Italian: 
σπεῖρα ᾿Ιταλική, the Italian cohort (composed of Italian, 
not provincial, soldiers), Acts x. 1; cf. Schiirer, in the 
Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Theol. for 1875, p. 422 sqq.; 
(Hackett, in B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Italian Band].* 

"Irovpaía, -as, 7, /tur@a, a mountainous region, lying 
northeast of Palestine and west of Damascus (Strabo 
16 p. 756 $18; Plin.h.n. 5, (23) 19). Ace. to Luke (iii. 
1) at the time when John the Baptist made his publie 
appearance it was subject to Philip the tetrarch, son of 
Herod the Great, although it is not mentioned by Joseph. 
(antt. 17, 8,1; 11,4, 18; 4,6 and b. j. 2, 6,3) among the 
regions assigned to this prince after his father’s death; 
(on this point ef. Schiirer in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. 
Theol. for 1877, p.577 sq.). It was brought under Jew- 
ish control by king Aristobulus c. B.c. 100 (Joseph. antt. 
13, 11, 3). Its inhabitants had been noted for robbery 
and the skilful use of the bow (Verg. geor. 2, 448; Cic. 
Phil. 13, 8, 18; Strabo 16 p. 755 sq.; Lucan, Phar. 7, 230, 
514). Cf. Münter, Progr. de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafn. 
1824; Win. RWB. s. v. Ituraea; Kneucker in Schenkel 
iii. p. 406 sq. ; [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.].* 

ἰχθύδιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ἰχθύς), a little fish: Mt. xv. 
34; Mk. viii. 7. [From Arstph. on.]* 

ἰχθύς, -vos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a fish: Mt. vii. 10; Mk. 
vi. 38; Lk. v. 6; Jn. xxi. 11, etc.; 1 Co. xv. 39. 

ἴχνος, -εος (τους); τό, (fr. ἵκω i. q. ikvéopat, to go), [fr. 
Hom. down], a footprint, track, footstep: in the N. T. 
metaph., of imitating the example of any one, we find 
στοιχεῖν τοῖς ἴχνεσί τινος, Ro. iv. 12; περιπατεῖν τοῖς txv. 
τ. 2 Co. xii. 18; ἐπακολουθεῖν τ. ἴχν. τιν. 1 Pet. ii. 21, (ἐν 
ἴχνεσί τινος ἑὸν πόδα νέμειν, Pind. Nem. 6, 27); cf. Lat. 
insistere vestigiis alicuius.* 

Ἰωάθαμ, 6, (DNi i. e. Jehovah is perfect or upright), 
indecl, Jotham [A. V. (1611) Joatham], king of Judah, 
son of Uzziah, B.c. 758-7 to 741, or 759 to 743: Mt. i. 9.* 

Ἰωάννα [Tr WH Ἰωάνα ; cf. ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 79; WH. 
App. p. 159; s. v. N, v], 5s, 7, (see Ἰωάννης), Joanna, the 
wife of Chuzas, Herod's steward, and a follower of Jesus: 
Lk. vir 3; xxiv. 10.* 

"Ioavvás, -à, and (acc. to L T Tr WH) Ἰωανάν, indecl., 
(see Ἰωάννης), 6, Joannas [or Joanan], one of the ances- 
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 27.* 

*Twdvyys and ([so WH uniformly, exe. in Acts iv. 6; 
xiii. 5; Rev. xxii. 8] Trin the Gospels of Lk. and Jn., [in 
the Acts, exc. iv. 6] and the Rev. [exe. xxii. 8]) Ἰωάνης 


᾿Ιωάννης 


[cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.79; WH. App. p. 159; Scrivener, Intr. 
p. 562 (ef. s. v. N,v)], gen. -ov, dat. -7 and (in [Mt. xi. 
4 WH; Rev.i.1 WH]; Lk.vii.18 T Tr WH, [22 T Tr 
WH -& [cf. WH. App. p. 158; B.17 (16), 7]), ace. την, 
6, (am and. jan, to whom Jehovah is gracious, [al. 
EY Jehovah has graciously given], Germ. Gotthold ; 

Sept. Ἰωαννάν [Tdf. 'Icaváv], 1 Chr. iii. 24; 'Iová, 2 K. 
xxv. 23; Ἰωάνης, 2 Chr. xxviii. 12, [cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Johanan]), John; in the N. T. the men of this name are, 
1. John the Baptist, the son of Zacharias the priest and 
Elisabeth, the forerunner of Christ. By order of Her- 
od Antipas he was cast into prison and afterwards be- 
headed: Mt. iii. 1; xiv. 3, and often in the histor. bks. 
of the N. T.; Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2, [B.D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Macheerus ]. 2. John the apostle, the writer of the 
Fourth Gospel, son of Zebedee and Salome, brother of 
James the elder: Mt. iv. 21; x. 2 (3); Mk.i.19; ix. 2, 
38; Lk. v. 10; vi. 14; Acts i. 13, and often; Gal. ii. 9. 
He is that disciple who (without mention by name) is 
spoken of in the Fourth Gospel as esp. dear to Jesus (Jn. 
xiii. 23; xix. 26; xxi. 7, 20), and acc. to the traditional 
opinion is the author of the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 1, 4, 9; 
xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii. 8. In the latter part of his life he had 
charge of the churches in Asia Minor, and died there at a 
very advancedage. That he never came into Asia Minor, 
but died in Palestine somewhat in years, the following 
writers among others have attempted to prove, though by 
considerations far from satisfactory: Lützelberger, Die 
kirehl. Tradition üb. d. Ap. Johannes τι. s. Schriften. 
Lpz. 1840; Keim, i. p. 161 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. 218 sqq.]; 
Holtzmann in Schenkel iii. p. 832 sqq.; Scholten, Der 
Ap. Johannes in Kleinasien. Aus. d. Hollünd. deutsch v. 
Spiegel. Berl. 1872. On the other side cf., besides oth- 
ers, Grimm in Ersch u. Gruber's Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. 
xxii. p. 6 sqq. ; Steitz, Die Tradition üb. die Wirksam- 
keit des Joh. in Ephesus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 
for 1868, 3d Heft; Krenkel, Der Apost. Johannes. Berl. 
1868; Hilgenfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1872, p. 372 sqq., and for 1877, p. 508 sqq.; [also Einl. in 
d. N. T. p. 394 sqq.]; Luthardt, Der johann. Ursprung 
des 4ten Evang. (Lpz. 1874) p. 93 sqq. [ Eng. trans. p. 115 
sqq-; Godet, Commentaire ete. 3d ed. vol. i. Intr. l.i. § iv. 


p. 57 sqq.; Bleek, Einl. in d. N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 167 
sqq.; Fisher, The Beginnings of Christianity, p. 327 
sqq. ]. 3. the fathef of the apostle Peter: Tdf. in 


Jn. i. 42 (43) and xxi. 15 sqq. (in both pass. R ἃ Ἰωνᾶ, L 
Tr WH Ἰωάνου) [see Ἰωνᾶς, 2]. 4. a certain man 
ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ, a member of the Sanhedrin [cf. 
ἀρχιερεύς, 2]: Acts iv. 6. 5. John surnamed Mark, 
the companion of Barnabas and Paul: Acts xii. 12, 25; 
xiii. 5, 13; xv. 37, [Tr everywh. with one v; so WH exc. 
in xiii. 5]; see Μάρκος. 6. John, acc. to the testi- 
mony of Papias in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39 [cf. Westcott; Canon, 
5th ed. p. 70], a disciple of Christ and afterwards a Chris- 
tian presbyter in Asia Minor, whom not a few at the 
present day, following the opinion of Dionysius of Alex- 
andria [in Euseb. h. e. 7, 25] regard as the author of the 
Apocalypse, and accordingly esteem him as an eminent 


310 


᾿Ιωσῆς 


prophet of the primitive Christians and as the person 
referred to in Rev. i. 1,4, 9; xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii.8. Full 
articles respecting him may be found—by Grimm in 
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. xxiv. p. 217 
sq.; Gass in Herzog vi. p. 763 sqq.; Holtzmann in Schen- 
kel iii. p. 352 sq.; [Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog. iii. 
398 sqq.; ef. C. L. Leimbach, Das Papiasfragment (Gotha, 
1875), esp. p. 114 sqq.]. 

"Ióf, ὁ, indecl., (38 i. e. harassed, afflicted [but ques- 
tioned ; see Gesenius, Lex. (8th ed., by Mühlau and Volck) 
s. v.]), Job, the man commended in the didactic poem 
which bears his name in the canon of the O. T. (cf. Ezek. 
xiv. 14, 20) for his piety, and his constancy and fortitude 
in the endurance of trials: Jas. v. 11.* 

᾿Ἰωβήδ, ὁ, indecl, Jobed : Mt. i. 5 and Lk. iii. 32 in L 
T Tr (WH; (yet WH in Lk. 1. c. -87A)] for RG '0878, 
q. v.* 

[Ιωβήλ, see the preceding word.] 

'Io5á, o, indecl., Joda: Lk. iii. 26 T Tr WH, for RGL 
Ἰούδα, see Ἰούδας, 2.* 

'Io$A, ὁ, indecl, (Oxi) whose God is Jehovah, i. 4. ἃ 
worshipper of God, [al. ‘Jehovah is God’]), Joel, the 
eminent prophet who ace. to the opinion of very many 
recent writers prophesied in the reign of Uzziah [ef. 
B. D. s. v. Joel, 3]: Acts ii. 16.* 

"Iováv and (so T Tr WH) ᾿Ιωνάμ, ὁ. indecl., (see ᾿Ιωάν- 
vns), Jonan [or Jonam], one of the ancestors of Christ: 
Lk. iii. 30.* 

Ἰωνᾶς, -à [B. 20 (17 sq-)], 6, (31 a dove), Jonah (or 
Jonas) ; 1. Jonah, the O. T. prophet, a native of 
Gath-hepher in the tribe of Zebulun. He lived during 
the reign of Jeroboam II., king of Israel (2 K. xiv. 25). 
The narrative of his miraculous experiences, constructed 
for a didactie purpose, is given in the book which bears 
his name [on the historie character of which cf. B.D. 
(esp. Am. ed.) or McC. and S. s. v.; also Ladd, Doctr. of 
Sacer. Seript. i. 65 sqq.]: Mt. xii. 39-41; xvi. 4; Lk. xi. 
29 sq. 32. 2. Jonah (or Jonas), a fisherman, father 
of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17 [LT WH here Βαριωνᾶ, 
see Baptwvas]; Jn. i. 42 (43) [R G L mrg. Tr mrg., and 
RG in] xxi. 15, [16, 17], (see Ἰωάννης, 3).* 

Ἰωράμ, 6, indecl., (Dim i. e. whom Jehovah exalted), 
Joram, the son and successor of Jehoshaphat on the 
throne of Judah, fr. [c.] B. c. 891 to 884 (2 K. viii. 16 
sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 2 544.) : Mt. i. 8.* 

"Iopety,, 6, indecl., Jorim, one of the ancestors of Christ : 
Lk. iii. 29.* 

'"Iocedár, 6, indecl, (Dav, i.e. Jehovah judges), 
Jehoshaphat, king of πηι fr. [ς.7 B. c. 914 to 889 (1 K. 
xxii. 41 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xvii—xx.): Mt. i. 8.* 

ΓΙωσή (A. V. Jose, incorrectly), see Ἰωσῆς, init.] 

"Ioc s, zen. Ἰωσῆ [RG in Lk. iii. 29 Ἰωσή (which A. 
V. incorrectly takes as nom. Jose)] and (L T Tr WH in 
Mk. vi. 3; xv. 40, 47) Ἰωσῆτος (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 
199; B.19 (17) sq.; W. $10, 1; [ WH. App. p. 159*]), 
6, J'oses 1. one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 
29 ([see above]; L T Tr WH''Iyco?, q. v. 2). 2. the 
own brother of Jesus: Mk. vi. 3, and RG in Mt. xiii. 


᾿Ιωσήφ 


55 (where L T Tr W « Ἰωσήφ, 4: v. 6); see ᾿Ιάκωβος, 
3: 3. the son of Mary, the sister of the mother of 
Jesus [see Mapidp, 3]: Mt. xxvii. 56 (where T Tr mrg. 
WH txt. Ἰωσήφ [Ἰωσῆς and Ἰωσήφ seem to have been 
diff. forms of one and the same name; ef. Renan in 
the Journ. Asiat., 1864, ser. vi. T. iv. p. 536; Frankel, 
Hodeget in Misch. p. 31 note; Bohl, Volksbibel τι. s. w. 
p.15]; Mk. xv. 40, 47. 4. a Levite, surnamed 
Βαρνάβας (q. v-): Acts iv. 36 (where LT Tr WH Ἰω- 
of) 

Ἰωσήφ, indecl., (in Joseph. [e. g. c. Ap. 1, 14, 16; 32, 
3; 33, 5] ᾿Ιώσηπος)»; 6, (D1, fr. o" to add, Gen. xxx. 
23 sq. [cf. B. D. s. v. Joseph ]), Joseph ; 1. the pa- 
triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob: Jn. iv. 5; Acts vii. 
9,13 sq. 18; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; φυλὴ Ἰωσήφ; i. e. the tribe 
of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or 
Jonam], one of Christ's ancestors: Lk. iii. 30. 3. 
the son of Judah [or Judas; better Joda] another an- 
cestor of Jesus: Lk. iii. 26 (where L mrg. T Tr WH Ἰω- 
ax; 4. ν.). 4. the son of Mattathias, another of the 
same: Lk. iii. 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the 


311 


καθαιρέω 


mother of Jesus: Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 245 ii. 13, 19; Lk. i. 
27; ii. 4,10, 858 RL, 43 RG L mrg.; iii. 23; iv. 22; Jn. 
i.45 (46); vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord: 
Mt. xiii.55 LT Tr WH (for R ἃ Ἰωσῆς [q. v. 27). 7: 
Joseph of Arimaihea, a member of the Sanhedrin, who 
favored Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 57, 59; Mk. xv. 43, 45; Lk. 
xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 38. 8. Joseph, surnamed Bapva- 
Bas (q. v.): Acts iv. 36 LT Tr WH (for RG Ἰωσῆς [q. 
v. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsabas [better Barsab- 
bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23. 
[See Ἰωσῆς, 3.] 

ἸἸωσήχ, Josech, see Ἰωσήφ, 3. 

Ἰωσίας (L T Tr WH Ἰωσείας [see WH. App. p. 155; 
s. V. € (]); ov, 6, GW i. e. whom ‘Jehovah heals”), 
Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the 
worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one 
years was slain in battle c. B. c. 611 (2 K. xxii. sq. ; 2 
Chr. xxxiv. sq.) : Mt. i. 10 sq.* 

ἰῶτα, τό, iota [ A. V. jot], the Hebr. letter *, the small- 
est of them all; hence equiv. to the minutest part: Mt. 
ys 18. [Cf 5 cie 


K 


κἀγώ [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the κἀγώ 
etc. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Vig. p. 526; W. $ 5,4a.; 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4; cf. 1, «)], (by erasis fr. 
καὶ ἐγώ [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi. 15 T; Lk. ii. 48 WH; 
xvi. 9 T Tr WH; Acts x. 20 T Tr WH; xxvi. 29 WH, 
etc.; cf. B. 10; W.§ 5,3; WH. App. p. 145; esp. Tf. 
Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for the first time in Hom. Il. 21, 108 
[var., cf. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Merc. 17, 3) ; c£. Ebeling, 
Lex. Hom. p. 6197), dat. κἀμοί [kat ἐμοί Acts x. 28 RG], 
acc. κἀμέ; 1. and I, the καί simply connecting: Jn. 
x.97,ete.; and I (together), Lk. ii. 485 distributively, 
and I (in like manner): Jn. vi. 56; xv. 4; xvii. 265 and 
I (on the other hand), Jas. ii. 18 (κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω) ; Lk. 
xxii. 29; Acts xxii. 19; and I (indeed), Jn. vi. 57; Ro. 
xi.3. at the beginning of a period, Lat. et equidem, and 
I (to speak of myself): Jn. i. 31, 33 sq.; xii. 32; 1 Co. ii. 
1; with the καί used consecutively (see under καί, I. 2 d.), 
cf. our and so: Mt. xi. 28; Jn. xx. 15; Acts xxii. 13; 2 
Co. vi. 17; Kay... καί, bot... and: κἀμὲ οἴδατε, kai 
οἴδατε πόθεν εἰμί, both me (my person) and my origin, 
Jn. vii. 28. 2. I' also; I as well; I likewise; in like 
manner I: so that one puts himself on a level with 
others, Mt. ii. 8; x. 32; Lk. xi. 9; xvi. 9; Jn. xv. 9, [10 
Tdf.]; xvii.18; Acts x. 26; 1 Co.vii.40; 2 Co. xi. 16, 
18, 21 sq.; in the second member of a comparison, after 
$motos, ὡς, καθώς, Acts xxvi. 29; 1 Co. vii. 8; xi. 1; Rev. 








ii. 28 (27); see under καί, IT. 1 ἃ. with a suppression of 
the mention of those with whom the writer compares 
himself: Eph. i. 15 (as well as others); 1 Th. iii. 5 (as 
well as my companions at Athens; cf. Lünemann ad 
loc.). κἀμοί: Lk.i.3; Acts viii.19; 1 Co. xv. 8; κἀμέ: 
lCo.xvi.4. i. q./ in turn: Mt. xvi. 18; xxi. 24; Lk. 
xx.3; Gal. vi. 14. 3. even I, this selfsame I, the kat 
pointing the statement: Ro. iii. 7; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
835. 

καθά, adv. for καθ᾽ a, according as, just as: Mt. xxvii. 
10. (Xen. Polyb., Diod., al.; O. T. Apocr.; Sept. for 
*U/N2, Gen. vii. 9, 16, etc., and for 3, Gen. xix. 8; Ex. 
xii. 35, etc.) * 

καθ-αίρεσις, -ews, 7, (καθαιρέω, q. v.), a pulling down, 
destruction, demolition: ὀχυρωμάτων, [ A. V. of strong- 
holds], 2 Co. x. 4 (τῶν τειχῶν, Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 15; 5, 1, 
35; Polyb. 23, 7,6; Diod. excerpt. leg. 13; destructio 
murorum, Suet. Galba 12); eis oiko8. . . . καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν, 
for building up (increasing) not for casting down (the 
extinction of) the godly, upright, blessed life you lead in 
fellowship with Christ (see οἰκοδομή, 1): 2 Co. x. 8; xiii. 
10. [From Thue. down.]* 

καθ-αιρέω, -@; fut. καθελῶ (Lk. xii. 18 [see ἀφαιρέω, 
init.]) ; 2 aor. καθεῖλον, (fr. obsol. ἔλω) ; pres. pass. κα- 
θαιροῦμαι; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for n, to cause to 
go down; 019, 1M, 172; 1. to take down: with- 


E 


καθαίρω 
p 


out the notion of violence, τινά, to detach from the cross 
one crucified; Mk. xv. 36, 46 ; Lk. xxiii. 53, (Polyb. 1, 86, 
6; Philo in Flacc. $ 10); τινὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου, Acts xiii. 
29 (Sept. Josh. viii. 29; x. 27); with the use of force, to 
throw down, cast down: τινὰ ἀπὸ θρόνου, Lk. i. 52. 2: 
to pull down, demolish: τὰς ἀποθήκας, opp. to οἰκοδομεῖν, 
Lk. xii. 18; λογισμούς, the (subtle) reasonings (of op- 
ponents) likened to fortresses, i. q. to refute, 2 Co. x. 4 
(5); to destroy, ἔθνη, Acts xiii. 19 (Jer. xxiv. 6; Thue. 1, 
4; Ael.v. h. 2, 25) ; τὴν μεγαλειότητά τινος, Acts xix. 27, 
where if preference is given (with LT Tr WH) to the 
reading τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς, it must be taken as a 
partitive gen. somewhat of her magnificence; cf. B. 158 
(138) note [so Meyer; ef. Xen. Hell. 4, 4,13. Al. trans- 
late that she should even be deposed from her magnifi- 
cence; cf. W. § 30, 6; B. § 132, 5].* 

καθαίρω; pf. pass. ptep. κεκαθαρμένος ; (καθαρός) ; to 
cleanse, prop. from filth, impurity, ete.; trees and vines 
(from useless shoots), to prune, Jn. xv. 2 (δένδρα . . . ὑπο- 
τεμνόμενα καθαίρεται, Philo de agric. $ 2 [cf. de somniis 
ii. § 9 mid.]) ; metaph. from guilt, to expiate: pass. Heb. 
x. 2 R G [see καθαρίζω, init.], (Jer. xiii. 27; and so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down). [Comp.: &a-, ἐκ-καθαίρω.} * 

καθάπερ, (καθ᾽ ἅπερ), according as, just as, even as, [ (“ka- 
θά marking the comparison, πέρ (akin to the prep. περί) 
the latitude of the application”): Ro.ix.13 WH txt.; x. 
15 WH txt.; also] xi. 8and 1 Co. x. 10 in T Tr WH; 2 Co. 
iii. 13, 18 [here WH mrg. καθώσπερ]; 1 Th. ii. 11; καθά- 
περ καί, Ro. iv. 6; 2 Co.1. 14; 1 Th. iii. 6, 12; iv. 5; Heb. 
iv. 2, and RG in Heb. v. 4; καθάπερ foll. by οὕτω (or 
οὕτως), Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11. ([From 
Arstph. down]; Sept. for Wwss2, Ex. vii. 6, 10.)* 

καθ-άπτω: 1 aor. καθῆθψα; 1. to fit or fasten to, 
bind on. 2. to lay hold of, fasten on (hostilely) : 
τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, Acts xxviii. 3 [ef. W. 257 (241)]; τοῦ 
τραχήλου, Epict. diss. 3, 20, 10. [In Mid. fr. Hom. down, 
(w. gen. fr. Hdt. on).]* 

καθαρίζω (Hellenistic for καθαίρω, which classic writ. 
use); Attic fut. [ef. B. 37 (32); W. § 13,1¢.; WH. App. 
p. 163] καθαριῶ (Heb. ix. 14); 1 aor. ἐκαθάρισα [see be- 
low]; pres. pass. καθαρίζομαι; 1 aor. pass. ἐκαθαρίσθην ; 
pf. pass. ptep. κεκαθαρισμένος (Heb. x. 2 T Tr WH; on 
the forms ékaOepic6y, T WH in Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42, 
[ἐκαθέρισεν, "Tr in Acts x. 155. xi. 9] and κεκαθερισμένος 
Lchm. in Heb. x. 2, cf. [ Tf. Proleg. p. 82; WH. App. 
p. 150]; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 118; Delitzsch on 
Heb. x. 2; Krüger Pt. ii. $2, 2, 6 p.4; [B. 29 (25sq.) ; W. 
43]); (καθαρός) ; Sept. mostly for ὙΠῸ ; 1. to make 
clean, to cleanse; a. from physical stains and dirt: 
e.g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 26]; Lk. xi. 39; food, 
Mk. vii. 19; τινά, a leper, to cleanse by curing, Mt. viii. 2 
sq-; x.8; xi.5; Mk.i. 40-42; Lk. iv. 27; v. 12sq.; vii. 22; 
xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv. 8) ; to remove by cleansing : ἡ λέπρα 
ἐκαθαρίσθη, Mt. viii. 3 (καθαριεῖς τὸ αἷμα τὸ ἀναίτιον ἐξ 
Ἰσραήλ, Deut. xix.13; ἐκαθάριζε τὴν περὶ ταῦτα συνήθειαν, 
the custom of marrying heathen women, Joseph. antt. 11, 
5, 4; καθαίρειν αἷμα, Hom. Il. 16,667; cf. ἐκκαθαίρω). — b. 
in amoral sense; a. to free from the defilement of sin 


312 





καθαρός 


and from faults; to purify from wickedness: ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ" 
μολυσμοῦ σαρκός, 2 Co. vii. 1; τῇ πίστει τὰς καρδίας, Acts 
xv. 9 (καρδίαν ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας, Sir. xxxviii. 10); τὰς χεῖρας, 
to abstain in future from wrong-doing, Jas.iv.8. f. fo 
Sree from the quilt of sin, to purify: τινὰ ἀπὸ πάσης ápap- 
tias, 1 Jn. i. 7; [τ΄ d. zr. ἀδικίας, ibid. 91; τὴν συνείδησιν amd: 
νεκρῶν ἔργων, Heb. ix. 14; τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τῷ λουτρῷ τοῦ 
ὕδατος (instrumental dat.), Eph. v. 26; λαὸν ἑαυτῷ, Tit. 
ii. 14. — vy. to consecrate by cleansing or purifying: τὶ €v 
τινι, dat. of instr. [W. 388 (363)], Heb. ix. 22; i.q. to: 
consecrate, dedicate, τί τινι (dat. of instr.), ibid. 28. 2 
to pronounce clean in a levitical sense: Acts x. 15; xi. 9,. 
(Lev. xiii. 13, 17, 23, 28). [Comp.: δια-καθαρίζω.] * 

καθαρισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (καθαρίζω), a cleansing, purification y 
aritual purgation or washing, (Vulg. purgatio, purificatio, 
emundatio): used with a gen. of the subj., τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων,. 
of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals, 
Jn. ii. 6; without a gen. of baptism (a symbol of 
moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25; with a gen. of the obj., and’ 
that a person, — of the levitical purification of women 
after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22; and of lepers, Mk.i. 44; Lk. 
v. 14; with a gen. of the thing, ἁμαρτιῶν or ἁμαρτημά- 
rov, a cleansing from the quilt of sins (see καθαρίζω, 1 b. 
B.): wrought now by baptism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex- 
piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on which cf. Kurtz, 
Com. p. 70; (Ex. xxx. 10; τῆς ἁμαρτίας pov, Job vii. 21; 
of an atonement, Leian. asin. 22).* 

καθαρός, d, -dv; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng 
chaste, chasten; Curtius $ 26; Vanicek p. 177]; fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. mostly for Wn ; clean, pure, (free from the 
admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter- 
ates, corrupts) ; a. physically: Mt. xxiii. 26 ; xxvii. 
59; Heb. x. 22 (23); Rev. xv. 6 ; xix. 8, 14, and Rec. in 
xxii.1; χρυσίον, purified by fire, Rev. xxi. 18, 21; in # 
similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted 
to bear fruit, Jn. xv. 3; ὁ AeXovp. . . - καθαρὸς ὅλος (where: 
the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows: 
*he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not: 
need radieal renewal, but only to be cleansed from. 
every several fault into which he may fall through inter-- 
course with the unrenewed world’), Jn. xiii. 10. b: 
in a levitical sense; clean, i. e. the use of which is not for-- 
bidden, imparts no uncleanness: πάντα καθαρά, Ro. xiv. 
20; ΤῊ. 1. 15. c. ethically; free from corrupt desire;. 
from sin and guilt: "Tit.i.15; ὑμεῖς καθαροί, Jn. xiii. 10, 
[11]; of x. τῇ καρδίᾳ (as respects heart [W. § 31, 6 a.]), 
Mt. v. 8 (καθαρὸς χεῖρας, Hdt. 1, 35; κατὰ τὸ σῶμα κ. κατὰ: 
τὴν ψυχήν, Plat. Crat. p. 405 b.); free from every admix- 
ture of what is false, sincere, ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας, 1 Tim. i. 
5; 2 Tim. ii. 22, and R Gin 1 Pet. i. 22; ἐν καθαρᾷ συνει- 
δήσει, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3; genuine (joined with ἀμί- 
avros) θρησκεία, Jas. i. 27; blameless, innocent, Acts xviii. 
6. Hebraistieally with the addition of ἀπό τινος, pure 
from, i. e. unstained with the guilt of, any thing [ W. $ 30,. 
6a.; B. 157 (137) sq.]: ἀπὸ τ. αἵματος, Acts xx. 26; Sus. 
46 Alex., cf. Gen. xxiv. 8; Tob. iii. 14; καθαρὰς ἔχειν τὰς 
χεῖρας ἀπὸ τοῦ φόνου, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 16; in class. Grk. 
with a simple gen., as φόνου, Plat. legg. 9 p. 864 e.; cf. 


καθαρότης 


Passow s. v. p. 1528" ; [L. and S. s. v. 3]; Kühner § 421, 
4 ii. p. 344. d. in a levitical and ethical sense: πάντα 
καθαρὰ ὑμῖν, Lk. xi. 41, on which see éveuu. [SYN. see 
εἴλικρινής ; cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]* * 

καθαρότης, -jros, 7, (καθαρός), cleanness, purity; in a 
levitical sense, τινός, Heb. ix. 13. (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 22; 
Plato, al.) * , 

καθ-έδρα, -as, 7, (κατά and ἔδρα), a chair, seat: Mt. xxi. 
12; Mk. xi. 15, (Sir. xii. 12; Hdian. 2, 3, 17 [7 ed. 
Bekk.]); of the exalted seat occupied by men of eminent 
rank or influence, as teachers and judges: ἐπὶ τῆς Μωῦ- 
σέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν, sit on the seat which Moses for- 
merly occupied, i. e. bear themselves as Moses' succes- 
sors in explaining and defending his law, Mt. xxiii. 2. 
(Sept. for 3/35 and naw. [Xen., Aristot., al.]) * 

xa0-fopar; impf. ἐκαθεζόμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to sit 
down, seat one’s self, sit: Jn. xx. 125 foll. by ἐν with dat. 
of place, Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Lk. ii. 46; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15; 
foll. by ἐπί with gen., Acts xx. 9 L T Tr WH ; by ἐπί with 
dat., Jn. iv. 6; ἐκεῖ, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf. ; [οὗ where, Acts ii. 2 
Lehm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56 
(49); 60 (52). Conr.: παρα-καθέζομαι. ]* 

καθ-εῖς, more correctly καθ᾽ ets, see ets, 4 c. p. 1875. 

καθ-εξῆς, (κατά and ἑξῆς, q. v.), adv., one after another, 
successively, in order: Lk.i. 3; Acts xi. 4; xviii. 23; ot 
καθεξ. those that follow after, Acts iii. 24 [cf. W. 633 
(588)]; ἐν τῷ καθ. sc. χρόνῳ [R. V. soon afterwards], Lk. 
viii. 1. (Ael. v. h. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier 
Grk. ἑξῆς and ἐφεξῆς are more usual.) * 

καθ-εύδω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐκάθευδον ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. mostly for 252; 1. to fall asleep, to drop off 
to sleep: Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop.: Mt. 
viii. 24 ; ix. 24 [on this and its paral. cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 
1198*]; xiii. 25; xxvi.40,43, 45 ; Mk. iv. 27,38; v. 39; 
xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 sq. ; Lk. viii. 52; xxii. 46; 1 Th. v. 
7: b. euphemistically, to be dead: 1 ΤῊ. v. 10 : (Ps. 
Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 6; Dan. xii. 2). ^ c. metaph. to 
yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one’s salvation : 
Eph. v. 14; 1 Th. v. 6.* 

καθηγητής, -οὔ, 6, (καθηγέομαι to go before,lead); 4. 


prop. a guide: Numen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a 
master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8 R G, 10. (Dion. H. jud. de 


Thue. 3,4 ; several times in Plut. [cf. Wetst. on Mt. Le.]) * 

καθ-ήκω ; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph. down]; 1. to come 
down. 2. to come to, reach to; impers. καθήκει, it is 
becoming, it is fit (cf. Germ. zukommen), Ezek. xxi. 27; 
ov καθῆκεν (Rec. καθῆκον), foll. by the ace. with inf., Acts 
xxii. 22 [W. 282 (265); B. 217 (187)]; τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα, 
things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, shameful, Ro. i. 28; 2 
Mace. vi. 4. Cf. avqjxo.* 

κάθ-ημαι, 2 pers. sing. κάθῃ a later form for κάθησαι 
(Acts xxiii. 3), impv. κάθου for κάθησο [yet cf. Kühner 
as below] (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359; Krüger $38, 6 sq. 
i. p. 147; Kühner ὃ 301 i. p. 671; W. $ 14, 4; [B. 49 
(42)]), [subjune. 2 pers. plur. κάθησθε, Lk. xxii. 30 Tr 
mrg.; but WH txt. καθῆσθε ; see Veitch s. v.; Krüger 
$28, 6, 1 (cf. καθίζω), inf. καθῆσθαι, ptep. καθήμενος ; impf 
ἐκαθήμην ; and once the rare [cf. Veitch p. 347] fut. ka67- 


313 








καθίζω 
gopa, Lk. xxii. 30 T Tr txt. WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix. 
28 also; cf. καθίζω, fin.]; (jpar); a verb of which only 
the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [ef. B. 60 
(52) ]; Sept. for aw; 1. to sit down, seat one’s self: 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place [cf. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv.1; 
Lk. xxii. 55 [here T Tr WH μέσος]; εἰς, Mk. xiii. 3 [B. 
§ 147, 16]; μετά w. gen. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 58; κάθου ἐκ 
δεξιῶν μου, i. 6. be a partner of my power, Mt. xxii. 44; 
ΜΕ. xii. 36 [Tr txt. WH mrg. κάθισον]; Lk. xx. 42; Acts 
i. 54; Heb. i. 13 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); κάθου ὧδε ὑπό with 
acc. Jas. 11. 3. παρά w. ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 1; ἐπάνω 
w. gen. of place, Mt. xxviii. 2; with ἐκεῖ, Mt. xv. 29; Jn. 
vi. 3 [Tdf. ἐκαθέζετο] ; the place to be supplied fr. the 
context, Mt. xiii. 2. 2. to sit, be seated, of a place 
occupied : foll. by ἐν with dat. of place [W. as under 1], 
Mt.xi.16; xxvi.69; ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Col. iii. 1; ἐν 
τοῖς δεξιοῖς, Mk. xvi. 5; ἐπί τινος, Mt. xxiv. 35 xxvii. 19: 
[Acts xx. 9 RG]; ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου [but also, esp. in the 
crit. edd., with the dat. and the acc. (see below); cf. 
Alford on the foll. pass.], Rev. iv. 2 ete.; τῆς νεφέλης [or 
w. the acc.], Rev. xiv. 15, and in other exx.; ἐπί τινε, 
Acts iii. 10; ἐπί τι [cf. B. 338 (291)], Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii. 
14; Lk. v. 27; Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2[R dat. (as. 
in foll.)] 4 sq.; xi.16; xvii. 3; xix. 11; παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, 
Mt.xx.30; Mk.x.46; Lk.xviii.35; πρὸς τὸ φῶς, Lk. 
xxii. 56; ἐπάνω twos, Mt. xxiii. 22; Rev. vi. 8; περί τινα, 
Mk.iii.32,34; ἀπέναντί τινος, Mt. xxvii. 61; ἐκ δεξιῶν 
twos, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; Lk. xxii. 69; ἐκεῖ, Mk. 
li. 6; οὗ, where, Acts ii. 2[L καθεζόμενοι]; Rev. xvii. 15; 
without specification of place, Mk. v. 15; Lk. v. 17; viii. 
35; Jn.ii. 14; ix. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 30. κάθημαι as descrip- 
tive of a certain state or condition is used of those who 
sit in discharging their office, as judges, κάθη κρίνων, Acts. 
xxiii. 3; of a queen, i. q. to occupy the throne, to reign 
ΓΑ. V. I sit a queen], Rev. xviii. 7; of money-changers, 
Jn.ii.14; of mourners and penitents: ἐν σάκκῳ, clothed 
in sackcloth, ἐν σποδῷ, covered with ashes, Lk. x. 13; 
of those who, enveloped in darkness, cannot walk about, 
ΜῈ. ἵν. 16; Lk. i. 79 (Is. xlii. 7); of alame man, Acts xiv. 
8. i.q.to have a fixed abode, to dwell: ἐπὶ πρόσωπον τῆς 
γῆς, Lk. xxi. 35; Rev. xiv. 6 (where Rec. κατοικοῦντας) ;. 
ἐπὶ θρόνον, Rev. xx. 11 GT [WH mrg.; but see above]; 
ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ, Neh. xi. 6; [ἐν ὄρει Σαμαρείας, Sir. 1. 26. 
Come. : συγ-κάθημαι!. 

καθημέραν, i. q. καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, see ἡμέρα, 2 p. 278°. 

καθημερινός, -7, -όν, (fr. καθ᾽ ἡμέραν), daily: Acts vi. 1. 
(Judith xii. 15; Theophr., Athen., Plut., Aleiphr. epp. 
i.5; Joseph. antt. 3, 10, 1; [11, 7, 1]; Polyaen. 4, 2, 
10.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53 [(yet see L. and S.); W. 
25 (25 sq.)]-* 

xa8-(to; fut. καθίσω [ B. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. ἐκάθισα (impv. 
2 sing. κάθισον once, Mk. xii. 36 Trtxt. WH mrg.); pt. 
κεκάθικα (Mk. xi. 2 [not WH Tr mrg.; Heb. xii. 2 LT 
Tr WH; a late form, see Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. mid. 
subjunc. 2 pers. plur. καθίσησθε (Lk. xxii. 30 Rec.) ; fut. 
mid. καθίσομαι; fr. Hom. down; [cf. B. 60 (52)]; x 
trans. to make to sit down (κατά; q. v. III. 1), to set, ap- 
point; Sept. for DWN: τινὰ ἐπὶ θρόνου [L T Tr WH τὸν. 


Kab input 


4pévov], to confer the kingdom upon one, Acts ii. 30; τινὰ 
ev δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, Eph. i. 20; τινά, to appoint one to act as 
judge, 1 Co. vi. 4 (δικαστήν, Plat. lege. 9 p. 873 e.; Polyb. 
40, 5, 3; συνέδριον κριτῶν, Joseph. antt. 20, 9, 1). 2. 
intrans. ; Sept. for 32^; a. to sit down: univ., Mt.v.1; 
xiii. 48; Mk. ix. 35; n n iv. 20; v. 3; xiv. 28, 81; xvi. 6; 
Jn. viii. 2; Acts xiii. 14; xvi. 13; with a telic inf. 1 Co. x. 
7; with specification of the place or seat: ἐν δεξιᾷ τινος, 
Heb. i. 3; viii. 1; x. 12; xii. 2; ἐπί τινι, Mk. xi. 7 [Rec.]; 
εἰς τὸν ναόν, 2 Th. ii. 4 [B. $ 147, 16; W. 415 (386) ]; ἐπί 
with ace. [cf. B. 338 (290)], Rev. xx. 4; Jn. xii. 14; Mk. 
xi.2,[7 L T Tr WH]; Lk.xix. 30; [add Acts ii. 3, see 
B. $129, 17; W.516 (481)]; ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος, of a judge, 
Jn. xix. 13; Acts xii. 21; xxv. 6, 17; karévavri [or amé- 
ναντί Tr ete.] τινος, Mk. xii. 41; with adverbs of place, 
Mk. xiv. 32; Mt. xxvi. 36. b. fo sit: [absol. (of a 
dead man restored to life) ἐκάθισεν sat, sat up, Lk. vii. 15 
L mrg. WH mrg.]; ἐν τῷ θρόνῳ, Rev. iii. 21; ἐπί w. gen. 
of the seat, Mt. xxii. 2; xxv.31; ἐκ δεξιῶν x. ἐξ ebov., 
Mt.xx.21,23; Mk.x.37,40. 1. q. to have fixed one's 
abode, i. e. to sojourn [ef. our settle, settle down], Acts 
xviii. 11; foll. by ἐν with dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 49 [here 
A.V. tarry], (Ex. xvi. 29; Jer. xxx. 11 (xlix. 33); [ Neh. 
xi. 25]). Mid. [Pass.? cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 
336 sq.] lo sit: ἐπὶ θρόνων, Lk. xxii. 30 [ἢ G L: see κά- 
θημαι); ἐπὶ θρόνους, Mt. xix. 28 [WH καθήσεσθε; see 
κάθημαι. COMP.: dva-, ἐπι-, παρα-, mepi-, cvy-Kabiga. | 

καθ-ίημι : 1 aor. καθῆκα ; [fr. Hom. on]; to send down, 
let down: eis, Lk. v. 195 διά w. gen. of place, ibid. and 
Acts ix. 25; pres. pass. ptcp. καθιέμενος let down, ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς» Acts x. 11; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Acts xi. 5.* 

καθ-ίστημι (also καθιστάω, whence the ptep. καθιστῶν- 
Tes Acts xvii. 15 RG; and καθιστάνω, whence καθιστά- 
νοντες ibid. LT Tr WH ; see ἵστημι; init.) ; fut. καταστήσω; 
laor. κατέστησα; Pass., pres. καθίσταμαι; 1 aor. κατεστά- 
θην; 1 fut. κατασταθήσομαι; Sept. for wn, DPA, VPI, 
AYN, VAY, ms (prop. to set down, put down), to set, 
place, put: a. τινὰ ἐπί Twos, to set one over a thing 
(in charge of it), Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42; 
Acts vi. 3; also ἐπί τινι, Mt. xxiv. 47; Lk. xii. 44; ἐπί τι, 
Heb. ii. 7 Rec. fr. Ps. viii. 7. b. τινά, to appoint one 
to administer an office (cf. Germ. bestellen): πρεσβυτέ- 
ρους, Tit. i.5; τινὰ εἰς τό with inf, to appoint to do 
something, Heb. viii. 3; τὰ πρὸς τ. θεόν to conduct the 
worship of God, Heb. v. 1; foll. by iva, ibid. ; τινά with 
a pred. ace. indicating ie office to be administered [to 
make one so and so; cf. W, $ 32, 4 b.; B: $ 131, 1], (so 
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), Lk. xii. 14; Acts 
vii. 10, 27, 35; Heb. vii. 28. c. to set down as, con- 
stitute (Lat. sisto), i. q. to declare, show to be: pass. with 
ἁμαρτωλός, δίκαιος, Ro. v. 19 [ef. Prof. T. Dwight in New 
Englander for 1867, p. 590 sqq.; Dietzsch, Adam τι. 
Christus (Bonn, 1871) p.188]. d. to constitute (Lat. 
sisto) i. 4. to render, make, cause to be: τινὰ οὐκ ἀργόν, 
οὐδὲ ἄκαρπον, i. 6. (by litotes) laborious and fruitful, 2 
Pet. i. 8. e. to conduct or bring to a certain place: 
τινά, Acts xvii. 15 (2 Chr. xxviii. 15 for $927; Josh. vi. 
23; 18. v. 3; Hom. Od. 13, 274; Xen. an. 4, 8, 8 and in 


3814 








Just as: 





καθώς 


f. Mid. to show or exhibit one’s 
with a pred. nom., Jas. iv. 4; ἡ 
[Cowr.: ἀντι-, ἀπο- 


other prof. auth.). 
self; come forward as: 
y^àcca ... ἡ σπιλοῦσα, Jas. iii. 6. 
καθίστημι.} ** 

καθό (i. e. καθ᾽ 6), adv., [fr. Lys. and Plat. down], ac- 
cording to what, i. e. 1. as: Ro. viii. 26. 2! 
according as; in so far as, so far forth as: 1 Pet. iv. 13 
(Rec.* καθώς) ; 2 Co. viii. 12 [W. 307 (288); cf. B. $139, 
807." 

καθολικός, -ή, -óv, (καθόλου, q. v.), general, universal (oc- 
casionally in prof. auth. fr. [ Aristot. and] Polyb. down, 
as καθ. kal κοινὴ ἱστορία, Polyb. 8, 4, 11; often in eccl. 
writ.; the title ἡ καθολικὴ ἐκκλησία first in Ignat. ad 
Smyrn. c. 8 and often in Polye. martyr. [see ed. (Gebh. 
Harn.) Zahn, p. 133 note]; cf. καθολικὴ ἀνάστασις, [Justin 
6. Tryph. 81 sub fin.]; "Theoph. ad Autol. [l. i. § 13] 
p. 40 ed. Otto) ; ἐπιστολαὶ καθολικαί, or simply καθολικαί, 
in the title of the Epp. of James. Peter, John, and Jude 
(R GL; ef. τῶν ἑπτὰ λεγομένων καθολικῶν sc. ἐπιστολῶν, 
Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most prob. because they seemed to 
be written not to any one church alone, but to all the 
churches. [Cf. Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Catholic.] * 

καθόλου (i. e. καθ᾽ ὅλου [** as it is written in auth. before 
Aristot." (L. and S.) ]), wholly, ἜΣ at all: Acts iv. 
18. ([Ex. xxii. 11]; Ezek. xiii. 8, 22; Am. iii. ὃ, 4; 
Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot. and sqq.) * 

καθ-οπλίζω : pf. pass. ptep. καθωπλισμένος ; t0 arm [ fully 
(cf. κατά, III. 1 fin.)], furnish with arms: Lk. xi. 21. 


(Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 
καθ-οράω, -à : 1. to look down, see from above, 
view from on high, (Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2 


to see thoroughly [ οἴ. κατά, IIL. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un- 
derstand (Germ. erschauen): pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. κα- 
Oopara, Ro. i. 20 (3 Mace. iii. 11, and often in class. 
Grk.). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61.* 

καθότι (i. e. καθ᾽ ὅ τι), according to what, i. e. a 
so far as, according as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18, 
19 (36), 5; for wd, Ex. i. 12, 17). 2. because 
that, because, [ οἵ. W.§ 58, 8]: LK. i. 7; xix. 9; Acts ii. 
24, and L'T Tr WH (for Rec. διότι) in Acts xvii. 31, 
(Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4; Polyb. 18, 21 (38), 6). 3. as, 
Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1; Judith ii. 13, 15; x. 9, and 
often in Thue. et al.* 

καθώς (i. e. καθ᾽ ὡς), a particle found occasionally in 
prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic καθά and καθό, 
but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ; 
cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 74 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p.425 sq.; [W.26 (25)]; 1. according as, just as, 
even as : in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31; 
1 Jn.ii.27; foll. by οὕτως in the second member [cf. W. 
§ 53,5], Lk. xi. 30; xvii. 26; Jn.iii. 14; 2C0.i.5; x. 7; 
Col. iii. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 6 ; foll. by καί also, Jn. xv. 9; xvii. 18; 
xx.21; 1 Jn. ii. 18; iv. 17; 1 Co. xv. 49; itis annexed to 
preceding words after the demonstrative οὕτως, Lk. xxiv. 
24; with οὕτως unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6; xxviii. 6; Mk. 
xvi. 7: Lk. i 2,55, 70; xis Jn. i. 23); v. 285 Actix. 
47 [here L T Tr WH ós]; xv. 8; Ro.i.13; xv. 7; 1 Co. 
viii. 2; x. 6; 2 C0. i. 14; ix. 3; xi. 12; Eph. iv. 17, and 


καθώσπερ 


often; καθὼς διδάσκω, agreeably to my method of teach- 
ing, 1 Co. iv. 17 ; καθὼς γέγραπται, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix. 
13; Acts vii. 42; xv. 15; Ro. i. 17, and often in Paul; 
the apodosis wanting, and to be gathered fr. the con- 
text: καθὼς παρεκάλεσά σε. . . ἐν πίστει; sc. οὕτω καὶ νῦν 
παρακαλῶ, 1 Tim. 1. 8, cf. W.570 (530); [B. 386 (331)]; 
ἤρξατο αἰτεῖσθαι (sc. οὕτω ποιεῖν αὐτοῖς), καθὼς krÀ. Mk. 
xv. 8 [B. $ 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 sq.)]; in com- 
parison by contrary we find the negligent use: ἀγαπῶμεν 
ἀλλήλους, οὐ καθὼς Κάϊν krÀ. 1 Jn. iii. 11 sq., cf. De 
Wette ad loc. and W. 623 (579); οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος 
-.. οὐ καθὼς etc., not such as they ate etc., Jn. vi. 58. 
with the verb εἰμί, equiv. to Lat. qualis, such as, 1 Jn. 
ii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth). 
2. according as i. e. in proportion as, in the degree that : 
Mk. iv. 33; Acts vii. 17 (cf. Meyer ad loc.); xi. 29; 1 
Co. xii. 11, 18; 1 Pet. iv. 10. S. since, seeing that, 
agreeably to the fact that, [cf. W. $ 53, 8; 448 (417)]: 
Jn. xvii. 2; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al regard καθ. as cor- 
responsive rather than causal or explanatory]; 1 Co. 
1.6; v.7; Eph.i.4; Phil. i. 7. 4. it is put for the 
simple ós, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. disc., 
Acts xv. 14; it serves to add an epexegesis, 3 Jn. 3 
(to σου τῇ ἀληθείᾳ). b. of time, when, after that, (cf. 
Lat. ut): 2 Macc.i. 31; [Neh. v.6]; here many bring in 
Acts vii. 17; but see 2 above. 

καθώσ-περ, [ Tr καθώς περ]. just as, exactly as: Heb. v. 
4 T Tr WH [also 2Co. iii. 18 WH mrg.]. (Himer., Psell., 
Tzetz.) * 

καί, ἃ conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the par- 
ticles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. $53, 3sqq.; B. 
361 (310) sqq., and cf. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the 
difference between it and τέ see s. v. ré ad init.] 

I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. ef, 
atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words 
or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, 
Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father 
(see θεύς, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πυλυ- 
μερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, Heb.i. 1; it is repeated before 
single terms, to each of which its own force and weight 
is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ 
νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4; ἁγία 
καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. 
xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; 
Rev. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; cf. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it 
connects numerals; and so that (contrary to the more 
com. usage) the greater number precedes: δέκα x. ὀκτώ, 
Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WH om. 
καί; Tdf. δεκαοκτώ], 16; τεσσαράκοντα x. ἕξ, Jn. ii. 20; 
add, Jn. v. 5 GT; Acts xiii. 20; cf. W. $37, 4; [Bp. 
Lehtft. on Gal.i.18; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co. 
xiii. 1 (ef. Deut. xix. 15 Sept.) ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων 
καὶ τριῶν (in Mt. xviii. 16 jj rp. cf. W. 440 (410) note) at 
the mouth of two witnesses and (should there be so many) 
of three; a similar use of καί, to lend a certain indefinite- 
ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with other 
than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 σήμερον καὶ 


(R*G; but L TTr WH 3) αὔριον; cf. Kühner § 521, 2; 


915 


t 





E 
και 


Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 6142]. c. it joins to par- 
titive words the general notion; so that it is equiv. 
to and in general, and in a word, in short: 6 Πέτρος x. of 
ἀπόστολοι, Acts v. 29; oi ἀρχιερεῖς [kai of πρεσβύτεροι 
tec. | καὶ τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον, Mt. xxvi. 59; καὶ δικαιώμασι 
σαρκός, Heb. ix. 10. Rec. Tr br. WH mrg.; καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν 
Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ.; ef. 
W. 437sq. (407); 520sq. (485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400 
(343)]; with τέ preceding, 7 re... αὐτοῦ δύναμις kai 
θειότης, Ro. i. 20 [see τέ, 2 a.]; and, on the other hand, 
it joins to a general idea something particular, which is 
already comprised indeed in that general notion but by 
this form of expression is brought out more emphatically 
(which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls συνκαταλέγειν τὸ μέρος 
τῷ ὅλῳ) ; 80 that itis equiv. to and especially [cf.W. u. s.] : 
τὰ πάντα καὶ τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομένων, Mt. viii. 33; τοῖς μα- 
θηταῖς αὐτοῦ k. τῷ Πέτρῳ, Mk. xvi. 7; ai φωναὶ αὐτῶν x. 
τῶν ἀρχιερέων, Lk. xxiii. 22 [RG]; σὺν γυναιξὶ καὶ Μαριάμ, 
Acts i. 14; ἐν Ἰούδᾳ x. Ἱερουσαλήμ, 1 Mace. ii. 6; πᾶς 


so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and 
sentences; a. univ., as διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ 
κι συνάξει τὸν σῖτον κτλ. Mt. iii. 12; εἰσῆλθον . .. καὶ ἐδί- 
δασκον, Acts v. 21; and in innumerable other exx. b. 
In accordance with the simplicity of the ancient popular 
speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement 
to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul- 
tivated language expresses either by more exact parti- 
cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con- 
struction (cf. W. $ 60, 3; B. 288 (248) sqq.; 361 (310) 
sq.): e. g. that very freq. formula ἐγένετο ... καί (see 
γίνομαι. 2 b.) ; kai εἶδον καὶ (equiv. to ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο, 
lev. vi. 12: τέξεται υἱὸν x. καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (equiv. 
to οὗ ὄνομα καλέσεις). Mt. i. 31 ; καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι, 
καὶ (equiv. to ὅθεν) ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς, Mk.ix.5; clauses 
are thus connected together in clusters; as, Mt. vii. 25, 
27 (an example of six clauses linked together by καί) ; 
Mt. xiv. 9 sqq.; Mk. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ii. 
13-16; x.3; 1Co. xii. 5-6; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16; ix. 1—4 
(where nine sentences are strung together by καί), ete. 
after a designation of time καί annexes what will be 
or was done at that time: ἤγγικεν ἡ Spa καὶ παραδίδοται 
κτὰ. Mt. xxvi. 45; ἦν δὲ Spa τρίτη καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν, 
Mk. xv. 25; ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ πάσχα... . κι ἀνέβη εἰς Ἵεροσ. ὁ 
Ἰησοῦς, Jn. ii. 13; ἡμέραι ἔρχονται καὶ συντελέσω, Heb. 
viii. 8; add, Lk. xxiii. 44; ὅπ. iv. 35; v.1; xi. 55; Acts 
y. 7; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as ἤδη δὲ ἦν ὀψὲ καὶ 
of Κορίνθιοι ἐξαπίνης πρύμναν ἐκρούοντο, Thuc. 1, 50; cf. 
Matthiae § 620, 1 a. p. 1481; W. 436 (405 sq.) ; [B. 361 
(310)]. c. it joins aflirmative to negative sentences, 
as μὴ συκοφαντήσατε καὶ dpkeig Ge, Lk. iii. 14 ; οὔτε ἄντλημα 
ἔχεις καὶ τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ, Jn. iv. 11; οὔτε . - - ἐπιδέχεται 
kat... κωλύει, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ., as Eur. 
Iph. Taur. 578; ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much 
oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding 
negative: μήποτέ σε mapabQ ... καὶ 6 κριτῆς σε παραδῷ 
... kai εἰς φυλακὴν βληθήσῃ. Mt. v. 25; add, Mt. vii. 6; 
x. 88; xiii. 15; xxvii. 64; Lk. xii. 58; xxi. 34; Jn. vi. 


, 
Kat 


53; xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27; 1 Th. iii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 1; 
Heb. xii. 15; Rev. xvi. 15; [see B. 368 (315) d.; cf. W. 
$56. 2a.]. d. it annexes what follows from something 
said before (xat consecutive), so as to be equiv. to and 
so: Mt. v. 15 (καὶ λάμπει) ; Mt. xxiii. 32 (kal πληρώσατε) ; 
2 Co. xi. 9 (καὶ ἐν παντί) ; Heb. iii. 19; 1 Jn. iii. 19 (xai 
ἔμπροσθεν); 2 Pet. i. 19 (καὶ ἔχομεν) ; so in statements 
after imperatives and words having the force of an im- 
perative: δεῦτε ὀπίσω pov, kai ποιήσω ὑμᾶς ete. Mt. iv. 
19; εἰπὲ λόγῳ, καὶ ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς pov, Mt. viii. 8; Lk. 
vii. 7; ἀντίστητε τῷ διαβόλῳ καὶ φεύξεται ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν, Jas. 
iv. 7; add, Mt. vii. 7; Mk. vi. 22; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xiv. 16; 
Rey. iv. 1; ef. Fritzsche on Mt. pp. 187 (and 416), [cf. 
Sir. ii. 6; iii. 17]. e. with a certain rhetorical em- 
phasis, it annexes something apparently at variance with 
what has been previously said; so that it is equiv. to 
and yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.); so the 
Lat. atque (cf. Beier on Cic. de off. 3, 11, 48) : Mt. iii. 14 
(kai σὺ ἔρχη πρὸς pe); Mt.vi.26; x.29; Mk.xii.12; 
Jn. i. 5 (kai ἡ σκοτία krA.), 10 (καὶ ὁ κόσμος) ; Jn. iii. 11, 
32; v.40 (xai οὐ θέλετε) ; Jn. vi. 70; vii. 28; viii. 49, 55 
(kai οὐκ ἐγνώκατε) ; Jn.ix.30; 1 Co.v.2; 2 Co. vi. 9; 
Heb. iii. 9; Rev.iii.1 (... ὥς, kai νεκρὸς et), etc. when 
a vain attempt is spoken of: Mt. xii. 43 (ζητεῖ καὶ οὐχ ei- 
picket); xiii. 175 xxvi. 60; Lk. xiii. 7; 1 Th. ii. 18. f. 
like the Hebr. Ὁ (see Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 396%), it begins 
an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis, 
ef. the Germ. da [or Eng. then], (in class. Grk. some- 
times δέ; see δέ, 8) [cf. B. 362 (311) d.; W. § 53, 3£.; 
Ellie. on Phil. i. 22]: with óre or a temporal ós preced- 
ing in the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g. 
Thue. 2, 93, where see Krüger)], Lk. ii. 21; Acts xiii. 
18 sq. [here WH txt. om. kai; see ὡς, ΤῊ τς τς Καὶ 
ἰδού, Lk. vii. 12; Actsi. 10; x. 17 [R G Tr mrg. br.]; ἐὰν 
... καὶ εἰσελεύσ. Rev. iii. 20 T WH mrg., although here 
καί may be rendered also (I also will come in, ete.), de- 
claring that, if the first thing (expressed in the protasis) 
be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be 
done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question 
thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and 
containing an urgent rejoinder to another’s speech (cf. 
W. § 53,3a.; Matthiae $620, 1 d.; Kühner § 521, 3 ii. 
p. 791 sq.): καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι; Mk. x. 26; καὶ ris 
ἐστί pov πλησίον; Lk. x. 29; καὶ tls ἐστιν κτὰ. Jn. ix. 36 
[GT Tr WH]; add, Jn. xiv. 22 [G T]. Peculiar is 2 Co. 
li. 2: ei yàp ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, καὶ τίς... ἐμοῦ (a swarm of 
exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem. homil. 2, 43, 
,@ g. εἰ 6 θεὸς ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει :), where the 
writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him- 


self as it were, utters the substance of the negative | 


apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is 
he that ete., for then there is no one who ete. h. it 
introduces parentheses [cf. W. 8. 62, 1]: καὶ ἐκωλύθην 
ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the 
Lat. et, e. g. praeda — et aliquantum ejus fuit — militi 
concessa, Liv. 27, 1); cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 
35 sq. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words 
and sentences (xat epexegetical or ‘explicative’), so 


316 : 





καί 


that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [W. § 58, 3 ¢.; cf. 
§ 66, 7 fin.]: χάριν καὶ ἀποστολήν, Ro. i. 5, where cf. 
Fritzsche ; περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, Acts xxiii. 
6; πολλὰ... k. ἕτερα, Lk. iii. 18; πολλὰ... καὶ ἄλλα 
σημεῖα, Jn. xx. 30; πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα, Acts xxv. 
7; πολλοὶ k. ἀνυπότακτοι, Tit. 1.10 [R G; on the preceding 
use of καί cf. πολύς, d. a. fin.]; καὶ [L br. x.] ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ, 
and indeed [i. e. viz. ] when he shall be taken away ete. Lk. 
v. 35 [others find here an aposiopesis; cf. Meyer ad loc. 
(ed. Weiss)]3 kai χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος, n.i. 16; καὶ περισ- 
σὸν ἔχωσιν, Jn. x. 10, add 33 (where the words καὶ ὅτε 
κτὰ. show what kind of blasphemy is meant); Acts v. 
21 (on which see γερουσία) ; Ro. ii. 15 (where καὶ μεταξὺ 
krÀ. adds an explanation respecting the testimony of 
conscience); 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 38, ete.; cf. Bornemann, 
Scholia, p. 38; Fritzsche, Quaest. Lcian. p. 9 sqq.; so the 
Lat. et in Cic. Tusc. 3, 20, 48 laudat, et saepe, virtutem ; 
pro Mil. 25 te enim jam appello et ea voce ut me exau- 
dire possis; cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. ii. p. 809; [Har- 
pers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. et, II. A.]; i. q. and indeed, to 
make a climax, for and besides: καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, Acts 
xxii. 25; καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον, 1 Co. ii. 2; καὶ τοῦτο, 
Lat. idque (Cic. off. 1, 1, 1 te. . . audientem Cratippum 
idque Athenis), our and this, and that, and that too, i.q. 
especially: Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, and L'T Tr WH in 
8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9); also καὶ ταῦτα (com. in Grk. writ.), 
1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; cf. Klotz, Devar. i. p. 108; 
ii. 2 p. 652 sq.; [cf. W. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects 
whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran- 
sition to new matters: Mt. iv. 23; viii. 14, 23, 28; ix. 1, 
9,27,35; x. 1; Mk. v. 1, 21; vi. 1,6; Lk. viii. 26; Jn. i. 
19 (cf. 15); 1 Jn. i. 4, etc. ; esp. in the very com. xal éyé- 
vero, Mt. vii. 28; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 1, etc. (see γίνομαι, 

2 b.). . kat, à repetition which indicates 
that of two things one takes place no less than the other: 
both ... and, as well ... as, not only ... but also, [W. $ 53, 
4]: it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as kai 
LL br. κι ψυχὴν kat σῶμα, Mt. x. 28; add, Mk.iv.41; Jn. 
iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first x.]; Ro. xi. 83; Phil. n. 18; 
iv. 12, etc.; καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν πολλῷ [LT Tr WH μεγάλῳ] 
both with little effort and with great [but see μέγας, 1 ἃ- 
y- fin.], Acts xxvi. 29; but also clauses and sentences, as 
Mk.ix.13; Jn. vii. 28; ix.37; xii. 28; 1 Co. i. 22; and 
even things that are contrasted [cf. W. τι. s.; B. $149, 
8b.]: Jn. xv. 24; Acts xxiii. 3; καί . . . kai ov, Lk. v. 
36; Jn.vi.365 mow...now, Mk. ix. 22; καὶ ob... kat, 
Jn. xvii. 25. 6. τέ. . . kat, see τέ, 2. 

II. It marks something added to what has already 
been said, or that of which something already said holds 
ood; accordingly it takes on the nature of an ad verb, 
also (Lat. etiam, quoque, Germ. auch [cf. W. and B. as 
ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis 
upon the word which immediately follows it; cf. Klotz, 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 638:]) ; 1. used simply, a. also, 
likewise: Mt. v. 39 sq.; xii. 45; Mk. ii. 28; Lk. iii. 14; 
Jn. viii. 19; Ro. viii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 29 ; xi. 6, ete.; very 
freq. with pronouns: καὶ ὑμεῖς, Mt. xx. 4, 7; Lk. xxi. 
31: Jn. vii. 47, etc. ; κἀγώ, kai ἐγώ, see κἀγώ, 2; καὶ 


5. kat .. 


, 
καὶ 


αὐτός, see αὐτός, 1. Ta. preceded by an adverb of com- 
parison in the former part of the sentence: καθὼς... 
καί, Lk. vi. 31 [WH txt. om., L Tr mrg. br., καὶ ὑμεῖς]; 
Jn. vi. 57; xiii. 15, 33; 1Jn.ii. 18; iv. 17; 1 Co. xv. 49; 
. οὕτω καί, Ro. xi. 30 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 22; Gal. iv. 
29; καθάπερ ... οὕτω καί, 2 Co. viii. 11; . kat, Mt. 
vi.10; Lk.xi.2 RLbr.; Acts vii. 51 [L e 2 Co. 
xiii. 2 see ὡς, I. 1 fin.]; Gal.i.9; Phil.i. 20, (Thuc. 8, 1; 

ὥσπερ. - . kat, Xen. mem. [2, 2, 2 (and Kühner ad loc. yl; 
3,1, 4; [4, 4, 7; cf. B. 362 (311) c.]) ; with εἰ preceding, 
Gal. iv. 7. sometimes καί stands in each member of the 
comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace. 
ii. 105 vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 
635; Kühner on Xen. mem. 1, 1, 6 [also in his Grk. Gram. 
§ 524,2 vol. ii. 799; cf. Ellie. on Eph. v. 23; W. $ 53, 
5]. b. i. q. even [ A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel, 
adeo ; Der sogar, selbst): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 30; Mk. 
i27; Lk.x.17; 1 Co.ii. 10; Gal ii. 17; Eph. v. 12, 
etc. C. before a comparative it augments the gra- 
dation, even, still, (Germ. noch): Mt. xi. 9; [Jn. xiv. 12]; 
‘Heb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g.; al. regard the καί in this 
pass. as corresponsive (also) rather than ascensive, 
and connect it with ὅσῳ]. d. with a ptep. i. q. al- 
though [cf. Krüger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see 
μακροθυμέω, 2]. 2. joined with pronouns and par- 
ticles, also; a. with comparative adverbs: ὡς καί, 
Acts xi. 17; 1 Co. vii. 7; ix. 5, ete.; καθὼς καί, Ro. xv. 7; 
1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co.i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, ete.; οὕτω 
καί, Ro. v. 15 [WH br. καί], 18 sq.; vi. 1: 1 Co. xi. 12, 
etc.; ὁμοίως καί, Jn. vi. 11; ὡσαύτως καί, Lk. xxii. 20 [R 
GLTrmrg., T Trtxt. WH «. óc. (but WH reject the 
pass.)]; 1 Co. xi. 25; καθάπερ καί (see καθάπερ). b. 
added to words designating the cause, it marks some- 
thing which follows of necessity from what has been 
previously said: διὸ καί, Lk. 1. 85; Actsx.29; Ro.i.24 
Rec.; Heb. xiii. 12; [1 Pet. ii. 6 R.] ; διὰ τοῦτο xat, Lk. xi. 
49; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. καί]. e 
after the interrog. ri, καί (which belongs not to ri, but 
to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather; 
cf. Büumlein, Partikeln, p. 152]) points the significance 
of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover, 
(Germ. noch) [cf. W. $ 53, 3 a. fin.; esp. Krüger § 69, 
32, 16]: τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; [ A. V. why then etc.], 1 Co. 
xv. 29; τί καὶ ἐλπίζει ; (prop. why doth he also or yet 
hope for, and not rest in the sight ?), Ro. viii. 24 [R GT]; 
tva τί kat, Lk. xiii. 7. d. ἀλλὰ xat, but also: Lk. 
xxiv.22; Jn.v.18; Ro.i.32; v. 8,11; viii. 23; ix. 10; 
2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 10, 19, 21; ix. 12; 1Jn.ii. 2, etc. ; i.q. 
Lat. at etiam (in an apodosis after εἶν : Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442 
(412)]. 6. δὲ καί, and 8é . . . kat, but also, and also: 
Mt. iii. 10 [R G]; xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [WH 
br. δέ]; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61; xiv. 12, 26 [L txt. Tr WH ἔτι 
τε καί, see ἔτι, 2 fin.]; xviii. 1 [RG], 9 [L br. καί]; Jn. ii. 
2; 111. 23; xviii. 2,5; Actsv.16; 1 Co.i.16; iv. 7; xiv. 
15; xv.15; 2 Co.iv.3,etc. kal... ydp, ἐὰν καί, el καί, 
ἢ καί, kalye, καὶ . . . δέ, see γάρ II. 10, ἐάν 1. 3, ei III. 6 sq., 
34c.,yé3e., 869. The examples of crasis with καί in 
the N. T., viz. κἀγώ (κἀμοί, κἀμέ), κἀκεῖ, κἀκεῖθεν, κἀκεῖνος, 


E 
ὥσπερ . - 


511 





καινός 


κἄν, are noticed each in its place; for references see 
especially κἀγώ, init. 

Καϊάφας [ WH Καιάφας (cf. I, v fin.) ; Lehm. in Lk. iii. 2 
Kaidas ], -a [B. 20 (18) ; W. $ 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many 
to be the same as N2^2, a stone, a rock; others more cor- 
rectly i. g. 8573, depression, Targ. on Por xvi. 26 [acc. 
to Delitzsch (Brief and. Rom. ins Hebr. etc. P- 28) 8D? Pp); 
Caiaphas ; acc. to Joseph. (apti: 18, 2, 2) Ἰώ hc 
kai Καϊάφας (Ἰώσηπον, τὸν καὶ Καϊάφαν ἐπικαλούμενον, 
antt. 18, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap- 
pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of 
Judza, after the removal of Simon, son of Camith, a.p. 
18 [ef. Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and was re- 
moved A.D. 36 by Vitellius, governor of Syria, who ap- 
pointed Jonathan, son of the high-priest Ananus [i. e. 
Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc- 
cessor (Joseph. antt. 18,4, 3) : Mt. xxvi. 3, 57; Lk. iii. 2; 
Jn. xi. 49; xviii. 13 sq. 24, 28; Actsiv.6. Cf. Hausrath 
in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.* 

καίγε, see γέ, 3 e. 

Κάϊν [WH Καίν (cf.I, ¢ fin.) ], -ὅ, indecl., (in Joseph.with 
a Grk. ending, Kdis, tos; Hebr. ΠΡ i.e. a spear, although 
the author of Genesis, iv. 1, derives it fr. 13D to produce, 
beget, acquire, so that it isi. q. 13» Ps. civ. 24 [cf. B.D. 


Am. ed. s. v.]), Cain, the fratricide, the first-born son of 
Adam: Heb. xi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 12; Jude 11.* 


Kaivéy [so RG L both 1 and 2; Tr Kaiváv in 1 and 
Tr txt.in 2, but Tr mrg. Καινάμ in 2, WH Καινάν 1, Kawap 
2; T Kaivap both 1 and 2], 6, (Hebr. ppa lance-maker 
[al. * possessor’ or * possession ']), Cainan; 1. son 
of Enos (Gen. v. 9sq.): Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar- 
phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24; xi. 12; [1 Chr. 
i. 18 Alex.j, which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. D. 
SERO [es 

καινός, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. 
for vn; new, Pe a. as respects form; recently 
made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιός old, 
antiquated): as ἀσκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 [T om. Tr 
WH br. the cl.]; Lk. v. 38; ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36; πλήρωμα, 
Mk. ii. 21 ; μνημεῖον, Mt. xxvii. 60; with ἐν à οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς 
ἐτέθη added, Jn. xix. 41; καινὰ x. παλαιά, Mt. xiii. 52; 
new, which as recently made is superior to what it suc- 
ceeds: διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi. 28 (T WH om. kaw.) ; Mk. xiv. 
24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25; 
2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8, 13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 
31); καινοὶ οὐρανοί, καινὴ γῆ, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1, 
(Is. Ixy. 17 ; lxvi. 22) ; Ἱερουσαλήμ (see Ἱεροσόλυμα, fin.), 
Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2; ἄνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. 
ii. 15; iv. 24, (καρδία, πνεῦμα, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ; 
καινὰ πάντα ποιῶ, I bring all things into a new and better 
condition, Rev. xxi. 5 ; γέννημα τῆς ἀμπέλου, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; 
Mk. xiv. 25 b. asrespects substance ; of a new kind ; 
unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unheard of, (ἕτερα καὶ 
καινὰ δαιμόνια, Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1) : διδαχή, Mk. i. 27; Acts 
xvii. 19; ἐντολή, given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34 ; 
1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; 2 Jn. 5; ὄνομα, with the added explana- 
tion 6 οὐδεὶς οἶδεν (ἔγνω Rec.), Rev. ii. 17 (Is. xii. 2; Ixv. 
15); ὠδή, Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3, (Ps. exliii. (exliv.) 9; ὕμνος, 


KAWOTNS 


Is. xlii. 10; dopa, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (xl.) 4, 
ete.) ; λέγειν τε kai [ἢ L Τ Tr WH] ἀκούειν καινότερον, 
Acts xvii. 21 (newer sc. than that which is already; [cf. 
W. 244 (228 sq.)])5 κτίσις, Gal. vi. 15; καινὰ τὰ πάντα, 
all things are new, previously non-existent, begin to be 
far different from what they were before, 2 Co. v. 17 [L 
T Tr WH om. τὰ πάντα] ; μηκέτι οὔσης τῆς ἀνομίας, καινῶν 
δὲ γεγονότων πάντων ὑπὸ κυρίου, Barn. ep. 15, 1. γλῶσσαι 
(see γλῶσσα, 2): Mk. xvi. 17 [Tr txt. WH txt. om. Tr 
mrg. br. kaw. | * 

[Syn. καὶν ὅς, ν ἐο ς: v. denotes the new primarily in refer- 
ence to time, the young, recent; «. denotes the new prima- 
rily in reference to quality, the fresh, unworn; 'véos ad 
tempus refertur, καινός ad rem;’ see Trench § Ix.; Tittmann 
i.p. 59 sq.; Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt. ix. 17 (where the 
words occur together). The same distinction, in the main, 
holds in classic usage; cf. Schmidt ii. ch. 47.] 

καινότης, 70s, ἡ, (kawós), newness: ἐν καινότητι πνεύ- 
ματος, in the new state (of life) in which the Holy Spirit 
places us, Ro. vii. 6; ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς in a new condition 
or state of (moral) life, Ro. vi. 4 (εἰς καινότητα ἀϊδίου ζωῆς, 
so as to produce a new state which is eternal life, 
Ignat. ad Eph. 19; among prof. writ. it is used by Thuc. 
3, 38; Isocr., Athen., al.; often by Plut., [applied to the 
‘novelties’ of fashion (French nouveauté) ]).* 

καίπερ [Treg. καί wep in Heb.; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 224 
down], conjunc., [originally even very much, ef. Donald- 
son $ 621; Baumlein p. 200 sq.; Krüger $ 56, 13, 2; B. 
§ 144, 23; W. $ 45, 2 fin.], although; it is joined to a ptep. 
(in Grk. writ. sometimes also to an adj., so that dv must 
be supplied) : Phil. iii. 4; Heb. v. 8; vii. 5 ; xii. 17 ; 2 Pet. 
i.12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in 
Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, καίπερ ἐστίν, Rev. xvii. 8 
Rec.; but since Grsb. kai πάρεσται [correctly παρέσται 
(see in πάρειμι) has been restored after the best codd.* 

καιρός, -ov, 6, (derived by some fr. κάρα or κάρη: τό, the 
head, summit, [al. al.; cf. Vanicek p. 118]); Sept. for ny 
and 3532; in Grk. writ. [fr. Hes. down] 1. due 
measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure 
of time; a larger or smaller portion of time; hence a. 
univ. a fixed and definite time: Ro. xiii. 11; 2 Co. vi. 2; 
ὕστεροι καιροί, 1 Tim. iv. 1; ἄχρι καιροῦ, up to a certain 
time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in ἄχρι, 1 b. referred 
apparently to b. below; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 809 sq. ]; 
Acts xiii. 11; πρὸς καιρόν, for a certain time only, for a 
season, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας, for the 
season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 17; 
κατὰ καιρόν, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v. 
4[RGL]; at the (divinely) appointed time, Ro. v. 6 [al. 
bring this under b.]; before the time appointed, Mt. viii. 
29; 1 Co. iv. 5; ἔσται καιρός, ὅτε etc. 2 Tim. iv. 35 ὀλίγον 
καιρὸν ἔχει; a short time (in which to exercise his power) 
has been granted him, Rev. xii. 12; ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ, 
Mt. xi. 25; xii. 1; xiv. 1; Eph. ii. 12; κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τ. k., 
Acts xii. b; xix. 23; κατὰ τ. k. τοῦτον, Ro. ix. 9; ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ 
x. Lk. xiii. 1; ἐν dx. Acts vii. 20; ἐν τῷ νῦν k., Ro. iii. 26 ; 
xi. 5; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); ἐν παντὶ x. always, at every 
season, [ Aristot. top. 3, 2, 4 p. 117%, 35], Lk. xxi. 36; Eph. 
Vi. 18; eis τίνα καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a 


318 





καιρός 


thing, the time of ete. i. 6. at which it will occur: τῆς 
ἐμῆς ἀναλύσεως, 2 Tim. iv. 6; τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς, 1 Pet. v. 6 
Lehm.; Lk. xix. 44; πειρασμοῦ, Lk. viii. 13; τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 
τὸ κρίμα, for judgment to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17 ; καιροὶ τῶν 
λόγων, of the time when they shall be proved by the event, 
Lk. i. 20; — or when a thing usually comes to pass: τοῦ 


᾿θερισμοῦ, Mt. xiii. 30; τῶν καρπῶν, when the fruits ripen, 


Mt. xxi. 34, 41; σύκων, Mk. xi. 13. with the gen. of a 
pers.: καιροὶ ἐθνῶν, the time granted to the Gentiles, 
until God shall take vengeance on them, Lk. xxi. 24; 
ὁ ἑαυτοῦ (T Tr WH αὐτοῦ) x. the time when antichrist 
shall show himself openly, 2 Th. ii. 6; ὁ καιρός pov, the 
time appointed for my death, Mt. xxvi. 18; τῶν νεκρῶν 
κριθῆναι, the time appointed for the dead to be recalled 
to life and judged, Rev. xi. 18 [B. 260 (224)]; ὁ ἐμός, ὁ 
ὑμέτερος, the time for appearing in public, appointed 
(by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6,8; καιρῷ ἰδίῳ, the 
time suited to the thing under consideration, at its 
proper time, Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit. 
i.3. 6 καιρός alone, the time when things are brought to a 
crisis, the decisive epoch waited for: so of the time when 
the Messiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii. 
33; 6 καιρὸς ἤγγικεν, Lk. xxi. 8; ἐγγύς ἐστιν, Rev. i. 3; 
xxii. 10. b. opportune or seasonable time: with verbs 
suggestive of the idea of advantage, καιρὸν μεταλαμ- 
Bávew, Acts xxiv. 25; ἔχειν, Gal. vi. 10 (Plut. Luc. 16) ; 
ἐξαγοράζεσθαι, Eph. v. 16; Col. iv. 5, see ἐξαγοράζω, 2; 
foll. by an inf., opportunity to do something, Heb. xi. 15; 
παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, past the opportunity of life [ A. V. 
past age], Heb. xi. 11 (simply παρὰ καιρόν, Pind. Ol. 8, 32; 
several times in Plato, cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 126). [e 
the right time: ἐν καιρῷ (often in class. Grk.), in due sea- 
son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster- 
eotyp. only)]; 1 Pet. v. 65; also καιρῷ, Lk. xx. 10L T 
Tr WH; τῷ καιρῷ, Mk. xii. 2. d. a (limited) period 
of time: [1 Co. vii. 29]; plur. the periods prescribed by 
God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall, 
Acts xvii. 20; καιροί καρποφύροι, the seasons of the year 
in which the fruits grow and ripen, Acts xiv. 17 [cf. 
Gen. i. 14 Sept.]; καιρὸν kai καιροὺς kai ἥμισυ καιροῦ, a 
year and two years and six months [ A. V. a time, and 
times, and half a time; cf. W. § 27, 4], Rev. xii. 14 (cf. 6; 
fr. Dan. vii. 25; xii. 7); stated seasons of the year sol- 
emnly kept by the Jews, and comprising several days, as 
the passover, pentecost, feast of tabernacles, Gal. iv. 10 
[2 Chr. viii. 13; cf. Bar. i.14]. in the divine arrange- 
ment of time adjusted to the economy of salvation: 6 
καιρὸς (πεπλήρωται), the preappointed period which acc. 
to the purpose of God must elapse before the divine 
kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur., 
the several parts of this period, Eph. i. 10; ὁ καιρὸς 6 
ἐνεστώς, the present period, i. q. 6 αἰὼν οὗτος (see αἰών, 
3), Heb. ix. 9, opp. to καιρὸς διορθώσεως, the time when 
the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. αἰὼν μέλ- 
λων), ib. 10; 6 καιρὸς οὗτος, i. q. 6 αἰὼν οὗτος (see αἰών, 
3), Mk. x. 30; Lk. xviii. 30; ὁ viv kaip. Ro. viii. 18; ἐν 
καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ, the last period of the present age, the time 
just before the return of Christ from heaven (see ἔσχατος, 


Καῖσαρ 


1 sub fin., ete.), 1 Pet. 1. δ ; καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώ- 
που τοῦ κυρίου, denotes the time from the return of Christ 
on, the times of the consummated divine kingdom, Acts 
iii. 20 (19). e. as often in Grk. writ., and like the 
Lat. tempus, καιρός is equiv. to what time brings, the state 
of the times, the things and events of time : Lk. xii. 56 ; δου- 
λεύειν τῷ καιρῷ, Lat. tempori servire (see δουλεύω, 2 a.), 
Ro. xii. 11 Rec.*; τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν, i. q. à οἱ καιροὶ 
σημαίνουσι, Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. WH reject the pass.]; 
καιροὶ χαλεποί, 2 Tim. iii. 1; χρόνοι ἢ καιροί (times or 
seasons, Germ. Zeitumstünde), Acts i. 7; οἱ xpov. καὶ of 
carp. 1 Th. v. 1; and in the opp. order, Dan. ii. 21 Sept.; 
Sap. viii. 8.* 

[SyN. καιρός, χρόνος: xp. time, in general; «op. a defi- 
nitely limited portion of time, with the added notion of suit- 
ableness. Yet while, on the one hand, its meaning may be 
so sharply marked as to permit such a combination as χρόνου 
καιρός ‘the nick of time,’ on the other, its distinctive sense 
may so far recede as to allow it to be used as nearly equiv. 
to xpóvos; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. ZütscAl p. 206, 15 sqq. (after 
Ammonius s. v.) ; p. 215, 10 sqq. καιρός οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ χρόνου 
ἁπλῶς τίθεται, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἁρμοδίου kai πρέποντος, KTA. ; 
Schmidt ch. 44; Trench § lvii.; Tittmann i. 41 sqq.; Cope 
on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 32. “In modern Grk. καιρός means 
weather, χρόνος year. In both words the kernel of meaning 
has remained unaltered; this in the case of καιρ. is change- 
ableness, of xp. duration." Curtius, Etym. p. 110 sq.] 


Καῖσαρ, -apos [ Bttm. 16 (15) ], 6, Cesar (prop. the sur- 
name of Julius Caesar, which being adopted by Octavia- 
nus Augustus and his successors afterwards became an 
appellative, and was appropriated by the Roman empe- 
rors as a part of their title [cf. Dict. of Biogr. and 
Mythol. s. v. Caesar]) : Mt. xxii. 17, 21; Mk. xii. 14, 
16 sq.; Lk. ii. 1; iii. 1; xx. 22; xxiii. 2; Jn. xix. 12; Acts 
xi. 28 [Rec.]; xvii. 7, etc. ; Phil. iv. 22.* 

Καισάρεια [-ía Tdf. (cf. his note on Acts ix. 30), WH; 
see I, 1], -as, 7, C«sarea; there were two cities of this 
name in Palestine: 1. Caesarea Philippi (Καισά- 
peta ἡ Φιλίππου). situated at the foot of Lebanon near 
the sources of the Jordan in Gaulanitis, and formerly 
called Paneas (ἣν Πανεάδα Φοίνικες προσαγορεύουσιν, Eus. 
h.e. 7,17); but after being rebuilt by Philip the te- 
trarch, it was called by him Cesarea in honor of Tibe- 
rius Caesar (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.) ; subsequently it 
was called Neronias by Agrippa IL, in honor of Nero 
(Joseph. antt. 20, 9,4); now Banids, a village of about 
150 [(?) * about 50” (Züdeker), “some forty” (Mur- 
ray) | houses: Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27. 2. Casa- 
rea (more fully Cesarea of Palestine [mod. Kaisariyeh]), 
built near the Mediterranean by Herod the Great on 
the site of Strato's Tower, between Joppa and Dora. 
It was provided with a magnificent harbor and had con- 
ferred upon it the name of Caesarea, in honor of Augus- 
tus. It was the residence of the Roman procurators, 
and the majority of its inhabitants were Greeks (Joseph. 
antt. 13, 11, 2; 15,9,6; 19,8, 2; b. j. 2, 9, 1): Acts viii. 
40; ix. 30; x. 1, 24; xi. 11; xii. 19; xviii. 22; xxi. 8, 16; 
xxiii. 23, 33; xxv. 1, 4, 6,13. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB. 
DD.]s.v. Czsarea; Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 486 sqq.; 


319 


> ^ 
KQAKELWOS 


Overbeck in Schenkel i. p. 499 sq. [and for other reff. 
cf. Me. and S. s. v.].* : 

καίτοι, (fr. καί and τοί), conjunction, with a ptep. [but 
in class. Grk. with a finite verb also (as in Acts below) ; 
Krüger $ 56, 13, 2; cf. reff. s. v. καίπερ], and yet, al- 
though: Heb.iv.3 (although the work of creation had 
been finished long ago, so that the rest spoken of cannot 
be understood to be that of God himself resting from 
that work [ef. Kurtz in loe.]); [Acts xiv. 17 L'T Tr WH 
(but Tr καί ror) ].* 

καίτοιγε, see γέ, 3 f. 

[Καΐφας, see Kaiadas. | 

καίω [ Vanicek p. 98]; Pass., pres. καίομαι ; pf. ptep. κε- 
καυμένος ; 1 fut. καυθήσομαι (1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf., where R 
G L Tr give the solecistie fut. subjunc. καυθήσωμαι, on 
which cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; W. $13, 1e.; B. 
35 sq. (31)); [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 40; WH. App. p. 172; 
Τὰ. Proleg. p. 122. WH txt. Lchm. ed. ster. read xav- 
χήσωμαι (with A B ete.) ; on this reading see WH. App. 
ad loc.; A. W. Tyler in Bib. Sacr. for July 1873, p. 502 
sq-; cf. Scrivener, Introd. ete. p. 629 sq.; Tregelles, 
Printed Text ete. p. 191 sq.; Tdf. ad loc.]; Sept. for 
03, Ww ete. ; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to set fire to, 
light: λύχνον, Mt. v. 15; pass. ptep. καιόμενος, burning, 
Lk. xii. 35; Rev. iv. 5; viii. 10; xix. 20; with πυρέ added, 
Heb. xii. 18; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; in fig. disc. λύχνος καιό- 
μενος, à, light showing the right way, Jn. v. 35 (a com- 
parison pointed at the Jews, to whom John the Dap- 
tist had been as a torch lighted for a merry-making) ; 
metaph. ἡ καρδία ἢν καιομένη was glowing, burning, i. e. 
was greatly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32 [W. $ 45, 5; B. $ 144, 
28]. 2. to burn, consume with fire: pass., Jn. xv. 65 
1 Co. xiii. 3 [see above]; with πυρί added (ef. 7gni cre- 
mare, Caes. b. g. 1, 4), Mt. xiii. 40 G Tr for RL'T WH 
κατακαίεται. [COMP.: ék-, kara-xato. ] * 

κἀκεῖ [ Grsb. κἀκεῖ ; cf. κἀγώ and reff.], (by erasis fr. καί 
and ἐκεῖ [cf. W. $ 9,3; B. p. 105 esp. 7f. Proleg. p. 
96]); 1. and there: Mt. v. 28 [ Tr mrg. kai ἐκεῖ]; 
x. 11; xxviii. 10 [Tdf. καὶ ἐκεῖ]; Mk.i. 35 (Lehm. kat 
ἐκεῖ) ; Jn. xi. 54; Acts xiv. 7; xxli.10; xxv.20; xxvii. 
6. 2. there also: Mk.i.38 (G WH xal ἐκεῖ); Acts 
xvii. 13.* 

κἀκεῖθεν [ Grsb. κάκ- ; see κἀγώ and reff.], (by crasis fr. 
καί and ἐκεῖθεν [cf. W. $ 5, 3; B. 10; esp. Tdf. Proleg. 
96 sq.]) ; Lat. et inde ; ‘a. of place, and from thence, 
and thence: Mk.ix. 30 (R G καὶ ἐκεῖθεν); x. 1 [L T Tr 
WH καὶ éx.; Lk.xi.53 T Trtxt. WH]; Acts vii. 4; xiv. 
26; xvi. 12 [ἐκεῖθέν τι RG]; xx. 15; xxi. 1; xxvii. 4, 12 
[L T Tr WH ἐκεῖθεν]; xxviii. 15. b. of time, and 
thereafter, and afterward [ef. Bornem. Scholia in Luc. p. 
90 sq.]: Acts xiii. 21.* 

κἀκεῖνος [Grsb. kdx-; see κἀγώ and reff.], -είνη, -eivo, 
(by crasis fr. καί and. ἐκεῖνος [cf. W. $ 5, 3; esp. Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 917); 1. ἐκεῖνος referring to the more 
remote subject; a. and he (Lat. et ille): Lk. xi. 7; 
xxii. 12; Acts xviii. 19; ταῦτα . . . κἀκεῖνα [ A. V. the 
other], Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. b. he also: Acts xv. 
11; Ro. xi. 23 [Rec.* καὶ ék.]; 1 Co. x. 6. 2. ἐκεῖνος 


κακία 


referring to the nearer subject [ οἵ. ἐκεῖνος, 1 6.7; a. 
and he (Lat. et is, Germ. und selbiger): Mt. xv. 18; Jn. 
vii. 29; xix. 35 [L Tr WH καὶ éx.]. b. he also (Germ. 
auch selbiger) : Mt. xx. 4 [T WH καὶ éx.]; Mk. xii. 4 sq.; 
xvi. 11,13; Lk. xxii. 12; Jn. xiv. 12; xvii. 24. 

κακία, -as, ἡ, (κακός), [fr. Theognis down], Sept. chiefly 
for y^, and Ty; 1. malignity, malice, ill-will, de- 
sire to injure: Ro.i. 29; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Tit. iii. 
Sas 1 2.1 ΒΘ. 11. 1.9 2. wickedness, depravity : 
1 Co. v. 8 [cf. W. 120 (114)]; xiv. 20; Acts viii. 22 (cf. 
21); wickedness that is not ashamed to break the laws, 
1 Pet. ii. 16. 3. Hellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt. 
vi. 34 (as Amos iii. 6; [1 S. vi. 9]; Eccl. vii. 15 (14) ; xii. 
1; Sir. xix. 6; 1 Macc. vii. 23, etc.).* 

[ϑυν. κακία, πονηρία: associated Ro. i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8. 
Acc. to Trench, Syn. § xi., endorsed by Ellic. (on Eph. iv. 31) 
and Bp. Lghtft. (on Col. iii. 8), κακία denotes rather the vi- 
cious disposition, πονηρία the active exercise of the same; cf. 
Xen. mem. 1,2, 28 ei μὲν αὐτὸς (1. 6. Σωκράτη") ἐποίει τι φαῦλον, 
εἰκότως ἂν ἐδόκει πονηρὸς εἶναι" εἰ δ᾽ αὐτὸς σωφρονῶν διετέλει, 
πῶς ἂν δικαίως τῆς οὐκ ἐνούσης αὐτῷ κακίας αἰτίαν ἔχοι; But 
Fritzsche, Meyer (on Ro. 1. c.; yet cf. Weiss in ed. 6), al. dis- 
sent, —seeming nearly to reverse this distinction; ef. Suidas 
8.0. κακία: ἔστιν jj TOU κακῶσαι τὸν πέλας σπουδή, παρὰ τῷ 
ἀποστόλῳ; see πονηρός, 2 b.] 


κακοήθεια [-Oia WH; see I, εἾ, -as, ἡ, (fr. κακοήθης, and 
this fr. κακός and ἦθος), bad character, depravity of heart 
and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al.; 4 Mace. i. 4, where cf. 
Grimm p. 299; spec. used of malignant subtlety, malicious 
craftiness: Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22; Add. to Esth. viii. 
1. 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5; Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 4; 16, 
3,1; [e. Ap. 1, 24, 4]; Polyb. 5, 50, 5, etc.). On the 
other hand, Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, [3 p. 81] defines it τὸ ἐπὶ 
τὸ χεῖρον ὑπολαμβάνειν πάντα, [taking all things in the evil 
part, Genevan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].* 

kakoAoyéo, -@; 1 aor. inf. κακολογῆσαι; (kakoAóyos) ; 
i. q. κακῶς λέγω (which the old grammarians prefer, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200); 1. to speak ill of, revile, 
abuse, one; to calumniate, traduce: twa, Mk. ix. 39; τί, 
Acts xix. 9; (2 Macc. iv. 1; Lys., Plut., al.). 2. 
Hellenistically, to imprecate evil on, curse: τινά, Mt. xv. 
4; Mk. vii. 10, (so for 9p» Prov. xx. 20; Ezek. xxii. 7; 
Ex. xxii. 28).* 

κακοπάθεια [-θία WH; see I, «], -as, ἡ, (kakoza6rs suffer- 
ing evil, afflicted), prop. the suffering of evil, i. e. trouble, 
distress, affliction: Jas. v. 10 (Mal.i.13; 2 Macc.ii. 26 
sq.; [Antipho]; Thuc. 7, 77; Isocr., Polyb., Diod., al.).* 

κακοπαθέω, -@; 1 aor. impv. 2 sing. κακοπάθησον; (Ka- 
xora87s); to suffer (endure) evils (hardship, troubles); to 
be afflicted: 2 Tim. ii. 9; Jas. v. 13 [W. $ 41 a. 3 fin. ; cf. 
8 60, 4 ο.; B. $ 139, 28], (Sept. Jon. iv. 10; Xen., Plut., 
al); used freq. of the hardships of military service 
(Thue. 4, 9; Polyb. 3, 72,5; Joseph. antt. 10, 11, 1; b. j- 
1, 7, 4); hence elegantly κακοπάθησον (L T Tr WH ovy- 
[T WH συν- (q. v. fin.) ] κακοπάθησονῚ) ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης, 
2 Tim. 11. 3; ib. iv.5. [Comp.: συγ-κακοπαθέω. * 

κακο-ποιέω, -@ ; 1 aor. inf. κακοποιῆσαι; (κακοποιός); — 1. 
to do harm: Mk. iii. 4; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do 


920 











κακόω 


wrong: 1 Pet. 11.117: 83 ὅπ. 11. ([Aeschyl, Arstph.], 
Xen., Polyb., Antonin., Plut.; Sept.) * 

κακοποιός, -óv, (κακόν and ποιέω), doing evil; subst. an 
evil-doer, malefactor : Jn. xviii. 30 [but Lmrg. T Tr WH 
κακὸν ποιῶν); 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14 ; iii. 16 ['T Tr mrg. WH om. 
the cl]; iv. 15. (Prov. xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb., 
Plut.) * 

κακός, -ἡ, τόν, Sept. for y^, [fr. Hom. down], bad, [ A.V. 
(almost uniformly) evil]; 1. univ. of a bad nature; 
not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a 
mode of thinking, feeling, acting; base, wrong, wicked: 
of persons, Mt. xxi. 41 [cf. W. 637 (592); also B. 143 
(126)]; xxiv. 48; Phil. iii. 2; Rev.ii.2. διαλογισμοί, Mk. 
vii. 21; ὁμιλίαι, 1 Co. xv. 33; ἐπιθυμία, Col. iii. 5 (Prov. 
xii. 12); ἔργα [better ἔργον], Ro. xiii. 3. neut. κακόν, τὸ 
κακόν, evil i. e. what is contrary to law, either divine or 
human, wrong, crime: [Jn. xviii. 23]; Acts xxiii. 9; Ro. 
vii. 21; xiv. 20; xvi. 19; 1 Co. xiii. 5; Heb. v. 14; 1 Pet. 
iii. 10 sq. ; 3 Jn. 11; plur. [evil things]: Ro.i. 30; 1 Co. 
x. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 10 [πάντα rà κακά all kinds of evil]; Jas. 
i. 13 [W. § 30, 4; D. § 132, 24]; κακὸν ποιεῖν, to do, com- 
mit evil: Mt. xxvii. 23; Mk. xv. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co. 
xiii. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 12; τὸ κακόν, Ro. xiii. 4; τὰ κακά, 111. 8; 
κακόν, τὸ κακὸν πράσσειν, Ro. vii. 19; ix. 11. [Rec.]; xiii. 
4; [2 Co. v. 10 R G L Tr mrg.]; τὸ κακὸν κατεργάζεσθαι, 
Ro.ii.9. spec. of wrongs inflicted: Ro. xii. 21; κακὸν 
ἐργάζομαί τινι [to work ill to one], Ro. xiii. 105 ἐνδείκνυμι, 
2 Tim. iv. 14; ποιῶ, Acts ix. 13; ἀποδίδωμι κακὸν ἀντὶ ka- 
κοῦ, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. 3. trouble- 
some, injurious, pernicious, destructive, baneful: neut. 
κακόν, an evil, that which injures, Jas. iii. 8 [W. § 59, 8b.; 
B. 79 (69) ]; with the suggestion of wildness and ferocity, 
Onpia, Tit. i. 12; substantially i. q. bad, i. e. distressing, 
whether to mind or to body : ἕλκος κακὸν x. πονηρόν [ A.V. 
a noisome and grievous sore], Rev. xvi. 2; κακὸν πράσσω 
ἐμαυτῷ, Lat. vim mihi infero, to do harm to one’s self, Acts 
xvi. 28; κακόν τι πάσχω, to suffer some harm, Acts xxviii. 
5; τὰ κακά, evil things, the discomforts which plague one, 
Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to τὰ ἀγαθά, the good things, from which 
pleasure is derived). [Syn. cf. κακία.] * 

κακοῦργος, -ov, (contr. from xaxóepyos, fr. κακόν and 
EPTO; cf. πανοῦργος, and on the accent of both see 
Güttling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 321; [Chandler $ 445]), as 
subst. a malefactor: 2 Tim. ii. 9; of a robber, Lk. xxiii. 
32 sq. [ef. W. 530 (493); B.§ 150, 3], 39. (Prov. xxi. 15; 
in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down.) * 

kakovxéo, -à : (fr. obsol. kakoUxos, fr. κακόν and ἔχω) ; 
to treat ill, oppress, plague: twa; pres. pass. ptep. kakov- 
xovpevor, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii.3. (1 
K. ii. 26; xi. 89 Alex.; Diod. 8, 23; 19, 11; Dio C. 35 
(36), 9 (11); Plut. mor. p. 114 68.) [Cowr.: συγ-κακου- 
xeéo.]* 

kakóo, -@: fut. κακώσω; 1 aor. ἐκάκωσα; (κακός); 1. 
to oppress, afflict, harm, maltreat: τινά, Acts vii. 6, 19 ; xii. 
1; xviii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 13, (Ex. v. 22; xxiii. 9 Alex.; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. by a usage foreign 
to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concito); 
render evil affected, (Ps. cv. (evi.) 32; Joseph. antt. 16, 


κακῶς 


1, 2; 7,3; 8, 6): τὴν Ψυχήν τινος κατά τινος, against one, 
Acts xiv. 2.* 

κακῶς, (κακός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], badly, ill,i.e. a. 
{in a physical sense] miserably: ἔχειν, to be ill, sick [see 
ἔχω, II. a.], Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16 ;.ix. 12; xiv. 35; [xvil. 15 
LTrtxt. WH txt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 17; [vi. 55]; 
Lk. v. 31; vii. 2, ete.; πάσχειν, Mt. xvii. 15 [R G T Tr 
mrg. WH mrg.]; δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mt. xv. 22; κακοὺς κακῶς 
᾿(ἀπολέσει, Mt. xxi. 41, on this combination of words with 
verbs of destroying, perishing, etc., which is freq. in Grk. 
writ. also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; W. § 68, 1. b. [mor- 
ally] improperly, wrongly: Jn. xviii. 23 ; κακῶς εἰπεῖν wa, 
to speak ill of, revile, one, Acts xxiii. 5; with bad in- 
tent, αἰτεῖσθαι, Jas. iv. 3.* 

κάκωσις, -ews, 7), (kakóo), ill-treatment, ill-usage, (Vulg. 
afilictio): Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19; Ex. iii. 7, 
17; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.]; Thuc., Xen., Plut., al.) * 

καλάμη, -ης, 7, α stalk of grain or of a reed, the stalk 
(left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12. 
(Ex. v. 12; xv. 7; Is. xvii. 6; Hom. et sqq.) * 

κάλαμος, -ου, 6, fr. Pind. down, Lat. calamusi. e. a.a 
reed : Mt. xi. 7 ; xii. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b. 
a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21): 
Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48; Mk. xv. 19, 36. C. a measuring 
reed or rod: Rev. xi. 1; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii. 
16-19). d. a writer's reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see 
Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq.].* 

καλέω, -ῶ; impf. ἐκάλουν; fut. καλέσω (W. § 13, 3 c.); 
1 aor. ἐκάλεσα; pf. κέκληκα; Pass., pres. καλοῦμαι; pf. 
3 pers. sing. κέκληται (1 Co. vii. 18 L'T Tr WH; [Rev. 
xix. 13 L T Tr WH ]), ptep. κεκλημένος ; 1 aor. ἐκλήθην; 
1 fut. KAnOnoopac; [fr. Hom. down]; Hebr. wp; Lat. 
voco; i. e. 1. to call (Germ. rufen [cf. Bodo, 
fin.) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice: ἄχρις οὗ 
τὸ σήμερον καλεῖται, as long as the word ‘to-day’ is called 
out or proclaimed, Heb. iii. 13; τινά, to call one to ap- 
proach or stand before one, Mt. xx. 8; xxii. 3 (where 
eis τοὺς γάμους seems to belong to rods KexAnpeévous); Mt. 
xxv.14; [Mk. iii. 31 L T'Tr WH]; Lk. xix. 13; τὰ iia 
πρόβατα kar ὄνομα, his own sheep each by its name, Jn. 
x. 3 (where L'T'Tr WH φωνεῖ); used of Christ, calling 
certain persons to be his disciples and constant compan- 
ions, Mt. iv. 21 (note what precedes in 19: δεῦτε ὀπίσω 
pov); Mk.i.20; to order one to be summoned, Mt. ii. 15 
[see just below]; before the judges, Acts iv. 18; xxiv. 
2; foll. by ἐκ with gen. of place, i. q. to call out, call forth 
from: Mt. ii. 15, ef. Heb. xi. 8. metaph. fo cause to pass 
from one state into another: twa ἐκ σκότους εἰς τὸ φῶς, 
1 Pet. ii. 9. b. like the Lat. voco i. q. to invite; — a. 
prop.: eis τοὺς γάμους, Mt. xxii. 3, 9; Lk. xiv. 8 sq.; Jn. 
ii. 2; to a feast, Lk. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 27 [cf. W. 593 
(552)]; Rev. xix. 9; 6 καλέσας, Lk. vii. 39; xiv. 9; ὁ 
κεκληκώς τινα, ibid. 10, 12; of κεκλημένοι, Mt. xxii. 8; Lk. 
xiv. 7,17, 24; (2 Sam. xiii. 23; Esth. v.12; and often 
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 532; 11,187 down). f. 
metaph.: 1o invite one, εἴς τι, to something i. e. to par- 
ticipate in it, enjoy it; used thus in the Epp. of Paul 
and Peter of God as inviting men by the preaching of 

21 


921 











, 
καλέω 


the gospel (διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, 2 Th. ii. 14) to the bless- 
ings of the heavenly kingdom: εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, 
1 Th. ii. 12; εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, 1 Tim. vi. 12; εἰς δόξαν 
αἰώνιον, 1 Pet. v. 10; εἰς τὴν κοινωνίαν τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, 1 Co. 
1.9; so καλεῖν τινα used alone: Ro. viii. 30; ix. 24 sq.; 
1 Co. vii. 17 sq. 20-22, 24; τινὰ καλεῖν κλήσει, 2 Tim. i. 9; 
ἐν ᾧ ἐκλήθημεν, in whom lies the reason why we were 
called, who is the ground of our having been invited, 
Eph. i. 11 Lehm.; ἄξιος τῆς κλήσεως, js (by attraction 
for 7 [or perh. ἥν; cf. W. $ 24, 1; B. 287 (247); Elli- 
cott in loe.]) ἐκλήθητε, Eph. iv. 1; God is styled ὁ καλῶν 
twa (he that calleth one, the caller, cf. W. $ 45, 7), Gal. 
v. 8; 1 Th. v. 24; and ὁ καλέσας τινά, Gal.i.6; Col. i. 12 
Lehm.; 1 Pet.i.15; 2 Pet.i.3. οἱ κεκλημένοι, Heb. ix. 
15; καλεῖν and καλεῖσθαι are used with a specification of 
the mediate end (for the highest or final end of the call- 
ing is eternal salvation): ἐπ᾿ ἐλευθερίᾳ, Gal. v. 13; οὐκ 
ἐπ᾿ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ, 1 "Th. iv. 7; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 1 Co. 
vii. 15; ἐν ἑνὶ ἐλπίδι, that ye might come into one hope, 
Eph. iv. 4 (see ev, I. 7 [yet cf. W. 417 (389); B. 329 
(283); esp. Ellicott in loc.], and ἐπί, B. 2 a. €): εἰς εἰρή- 
νην τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, that ye may be in one 
body i. e. be members of one and the same body, Col. iii. 
15; eis τοῦτο (which refers to what precedes) foll. by 
ἵνα, 1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 9; (but everywhere in the N. T. 
Epp. only those are spoken of as called by God who have 
listened to his voice addressed to them in the gospel, 
hence those who have enlisted in the service of Christ — 


“see Ro. viii. 30 and Riickert’s Com. in loc. p. 464. ef. 1 


Co. i. 24; those who have slighted the invitation are not 
reckoned among the called); Christ also is said καλεῖν 
τινα, sc. to embrace the offer of salvation by the Messiah, 
in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17 (in both which pass. Rec. 
adds εἰς μετάνοιαν). God is said to call those who are 
not yet born, viz. by promises of salvation which have 
respect to them, so that καλεῖν is for substance equiv. to 
to appoint one to salvation, Ro. ix. 12 (11); καλοῦντος τὰ 
μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα, Ro. iv. 17, where ef. Fritzsche, [al. al., 
cf. Meyer (esp. ed. Weiss) adloe.]. to call (1. q. to select) 
1o assume some office, τινά, of God appointing or commit- 
ting an office to one, (Germ. berufen): Gal. i. 15; Heb. 
y. 4, (Is. xlii. 6; xlix.1; li. 2). “to invite i. q. to rouse, 
summon: to do something, εἰς μετάνοιαν, Lk. v. 32, added 
in Ree. also in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17. 2. to call 
1- e. to name, call by name; a. to give a name to; with 
two acc., one of the object the other of the name as a 
predicate [to call one (by) a name: Mt. x. 25 Rec. ; cf. 
W. § 32, 4 b.; B. 151 (132) note]; pass. w. the nom. of 
the name, fo receive the name of, receive as a name: Mt. 
ii. 23: xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 32, 60, 62; ii.4, etc.; καλούμενος, 
called, whose name or surname is, Lk. vii. 115; ix. 105 x. 
39; Acts vii. 58; xxvii. 8, 165 ὁ καλούμενος [on its posi- 
tion cf. B. § 144, 19]: Lk.vi.15; viii. 2; [xxii. 8 T Tr 
WH); xxiii.33; Acts 1. QBs χα» xiii. 1) [xve 22N 
Tr WH]; xxvii. 14; Rev. xii. 9; xvi. 16; with ὀνόματι 
added, Lk. xix. 2; καλεῖσθαι ὀνόματί τινι, to be called 
by a name, Lk. i. 61; καλεῖν twa ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος, 
Lk. i. 59 (see ἐπί, B. 2 a. η. p. 238°); after the Hebr. sp 


καλλιέλαιος 3 


JDW-NN, καλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά twos, with the name in the acc., 
to give some name to one, call his name: Mt. i. 21, 23, 25; 
Lk. i. 13, 31; pass, Lk. ii. 21; Rev. xix.13; Gen. xvii. 
19; 1 S. i. 20, ete. (similarly sometimes in Grk. writ., cf. 
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 45 [B. 151 (132))). b. Pass. 
καλοῦμαι with predicate nom. to be called i. 6. to bear a 
name or title (among men) [cf. W. § 65, 8]: Lk. i. 35; 
xxii. 25; Acts viii. 10 (Rec. om. καλ.}; 1 Co. xv. 9; to be 
said to be (i. q. to be acknowledged, pass as, the nomina- 
tive expressing the judgment passed on one): Mt. v. 9, 
19; Lk.i. 32, 35, 76; ii. 23; xv.19; Ro.ix.26; Jas. ii. 
23; opp. to εἶναι, 1 Jn. iii. 1 L T Tr WH; Hebraistically 
(Gen. xxi. 12) ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα, through 
[better in, cf. ἐν, I. 6 c. and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad Ro. 1. 
c.] Isaae shall a seed be called for thee, i. e. Isaac (not 
Ishmael) is the one whose posterity shall obtain the name 
and honor of thy descendants, Ro. ix. 7 and Heb. xi. 
18. C. καλῶ τινα. with an acc. of the predicate or a 
title of honor, fo salute one by a name: Mt. xxiii. 9; 
Pass, ib. 7 sq. 10; Rev. xix. 11 [but Tr mrg. WH br. x.]; 
to give a name to one and mention him at the same time, 
Mt. xxii. 43, 45; Lk. xx. 44. [Comp.: ἀντι-, ev, εἰσ- 
(μαι). ἐπι-, peta-, Tapa-, συν-παρα-. Tpo-, προσ-; Tvy-Kaéw. | 

καλλι-έλαιος. -ov, 7), (fr. κάλλος and ἐλαία), the garden 
olive, [ A. V. good olive tree], (opp. to ἀγριέλαιος the wild 
olive): Ro. xi. 24. Aristot. de plant. 1, 6 p. 820°, 40.* 

καλλίων. see καλός, fin. 

καλο-διδάσκαλος, -ov, 6, 7, (διδάσκαλος and καλόν, cf. 
ἱεροδιδάσκαλος. νομοδιδάσκαλος, χοροδιδάσκαλος), teaching " 
that which is good, a teacher of goodness: Tit. ἢ. 8. Νο- 
where else.* 

καλοὶ λιμένες (καλός and λιμήν), Fair Havens (Germ. 
Schónhafen; Luth. Gutfurt), a bay of Crete, near the 
city Laswa; so called because offering good anchorage; 
now Limenes kali [BB.DD.]: Acts xxvii. 8.* 

καλο-ποιέω, -ὥ; (i. q. καλῶς ποιῶ, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
199 sq. [W. 25]); to do well, act uprightly: 2 Th. iii. 13. 
(Etym. Magn. 189, 24; [Lev. v. 4 Ald. (as quoted in) 
Philo de somn. l. ii. $ 447.) * 

καλός, -7, -óv, [ prob. primarily ‘sound,’ * hale,’ ‘whole ; * 
cf. Vanicek p. 140 sq. ; Curtius $ 31], Sept. for 73) beau- 
tiful, but much oftener for 33D good; beautiful, applied 
by the Greeks to everything so distinguished in form, ex- 
cellence, goodness, usefulness, as to be pleasing; hence 
(aec. to the context) i. q. beautiful, handsome, excellent, 
eminent, choice, surpassing, precious, useful, suitable, com- 
mendable, admirable ; a. beautiful to look at, shapely, 
magnificent: λίθοις καλοῖς κεκόσμηται [ A. V. goodly], Lk. 
b. good, excellent in its nature and character- 
istics, and therefore well-adapted to its ends: joined to the 
names of material objects, univ. 1 Tim. iv. 4 (i. q. pure) ; 
esp. of things so constituted as to answer the purpose for 
which that class of things was created; good of its kind: 
τὰ καλά, of fish, opp. to such as are thrown away (rà 
cazpá), Mt. xiii. 48; σπέρμα, Mt. xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq.; 
καρπός, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 17-19; xii. 33; Lk. iii. 9 [L WH 
br. kaA.]; vi. 43; δένδρον, opp. to σαπρόν, Mt. xii. 33; 
Lk. vi. 43; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20; Lk. viii. 15; 


XXL 5. 


22 





κάλυμμα 


καλὸν τὸ ἅλας (is an excellent thing), Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 
34; so too ὁ νόμος, good in its substance and nature, and 
fitted to beget good, Ro. vii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 8; διδασκαλία, 
true and approved teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 6; καρδία καλὴ κ. 
ἀγαθή, Lk. viii. 1 ; παραθήκη [q. v.] (containing [rather, 
consisting of] καλά), 2 Tim. i. 14; μέτρον, ample meas- 
ure (rabbin. 7210 n5; Eng. good measure), Lk. vi. 38; 
βαθμός (firm [but see βαθμός), 1 Tim. iii. 13; also θεμέ- 
Auos, 1 Tim. vi. 19; i. q. genuine, approved, πάντα δοκιμά- 
(ere, τὸ καλὸν karéxere, 1 Th. v. 21; i. q. precious [ A.V. 
goodly), papyapira, Mt. xiii. 45 ; i. q. superior to other 
kinds, οἶνος, Jn. ii. 10; joined to names of men desig- 
nated by their oflice, competent, able, such as one ought to 
be: ποιμήν. Jn. x. 11, 14 ; διάκονος, 1 Tim. iv. 6; οἰκονόμος, 
1 Pet. iv. 10; στρατιώτης, 2 Tim. ii. 3; joined to nouns 
denoting an effect estimated by the power it involves, 
or by its constancy, or by the end aimed at by its author, 
i. q. praiseworthy, noble: στρατεία, 1 Tim. i. 18; ἀγών, 1 
Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7; ὁμολογία, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq.; 
ἔργον, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Jn. x. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1; 
plur. Jn. x. 32. καλόν ἐστιν, it is expedient, profitable, 
wholesome : foll. by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1; w. τινί 
added [so in 1 Co. l. c. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [ef. W. 241 
(226); B. $ 149, 7]; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, RG [also L Tr 
mre. in 47]; 1 Co. vii. 26; ix. 15; x. ἐστιν foll. by the acc. 
and inf., Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, L (but see above) T Tr (but. 
not mrg., see above) WH; Heb. xiii. 9; foll. by ei [cf. 
B. 217 (187 sq.); W. 282 (265)], Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix. 
42; xiv. 21; foll. by ἐάν [B. and W. τι. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8; 
it is pleasant, delightful, foll. by acc. with inf.: Mt. 
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea- 
son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy ; 
morally good, noble, (Lat. honestus; [cf. Aristot. τὸ καθ᾽ 
αὑτὸ Kadov]): διάκρισις καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ, Heb. v. 14; 
ἔργα, Μι.ν.1θ; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25; vi.18; Tit. ii. 7, 14 ; iii. 
8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. ii. 12, and Lehm. in 2 Pet. i. 10; 
ἀναστροφή, Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 12; καλὴ συνείδησις, con- 
sciousness of good deeds, [ A.V. a good conscience], Heb. 
xiii. 18; καλά, καλὸν ἐνώπιόν Twos, in one's judgment, Ro. 
xii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Tim. ii. 3 and Rec. in v. 4 ; ζηλοῦ- 
σθαι ἐν καλῷ. Gal. iv. 18 ; τὸ καλὸν κατεργάζεσθαι, Ro. vii. 
18 : ποιεῖν, ib. 21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 17; καλόν 
ἐστιν, it is right, proper, becoming, foll. by an inf.: Mt. xv. 
26 (L T ἔξεστιν) ; [ Mk. vii. 27]; Gal. iv. 18[here Tr mrg. 
impv.]; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor: 
μαρτυρία, 1 Tim. iii. 7; ὄνομα, Jas. ii. 7; οὐ καλὸν τὸ kav- 
xnpa ὑμῶν, 1 Co. v. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably, 
comforting and confirming : θεοῦ ῥῆμα (Sept. for 21 35, 
which is spoken of the divine promises, Josh. xxi. 45; 
Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its promises full of consola- 
tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. καλλίων, -ov, better: neut. 
adverbially, σὺ κάλλιον ἐπιγινώσκεις, i. e. better than by 
thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242 
(227)]. The wordis not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf. 
Trench ὃ evi. fin.; Zezschwitz, Profangrücitüt u. s. w. p. 
60 sq. (cf. ἀγαθός, fin.); Westcott on Jn. x. 11.]* 
κάλυμμα, -τος; τὸ, (καλύπτω), a veil, a covering: 2 Co. iii. 
13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33); [xdAvppa, or its equiv., is suggested 


καλύπτω 9 


to the reader by the context in 1 Co. xi. 4 κατὰ κεφαλῆς 
ἔχων; see ἔχω, I. 1 b.]; metaph., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that 
which prevents a thing from being understood. (Hom., 
Tragg., Arstph., al.; Sept.) * 

καλύπτω ; fut. καλύψω; 1 aor. ἐκάλυψα ; Pass., pres. inf. 
καλύπτεσθαι ; pf. ptep. κεκαλυμμένος ; [allied with κρύπτω ; 
Vaniéek p. 1091; Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept. 
for 122; often in Hom., Tragg. and other poets, more 
rarely in prose; to cover, cover up; prop.: τινά, Lk. xxiii. 
30; τί τινι, a thing with anything, Lk. viii. 16; pass. Mt. 
viii. 24; trop. to hide, veil, i. e. to hinder the knowledge 
of a thing: pf. pass., Mt. x. 26; 2 Co.iv. 3; πλῆθος ápap- 
τιῶν, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them, 
1 Pet. iv. 8; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas. 
v. 20; cf. Ps. Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 3 (2) ; xxxi. (xxxii.) 1 sq. 
[Cowr.: dva-, ἀπο-; ἐπι-, kara-, Tapa-, περι-, cvy-kaMon ro. | * 

καλῶς, (καλός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], beautifully, fine- 
ly, excellently, well: [univ. διὰ τὸ καλῶς οἰκοδομῆσθαι 
(Tr -μεῖσθαι, q. v-), Lk. vi. 48 T Tr WH]; spec. a. 
rightly, so that there shall be no room for blame: joined to 
verbs of speaking (ἀποκρίνεσθαι, λαλεῖν, λέγειν, προφη- 
τεύειν, etc.), well, truly, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. xx. 39; 
Jn. ἵν. 17; viii. 48; xiii. 13; [xviii. 23]; Acts xxviii. 25; 
fiily, i. e. agreeably to the facts and words of the case, 
Mk. xii. 28; καλῶς right! well! an expression of approv- 
al: Mk. xii. 32; Ro. xi. 20; of deeds: k. ποιεῖν, to do 
well, act uprightly, Jas. ii. 19; 1 Co. vii. 37 sq. (where the 
teaching is, that one can do καλῶς, but another κρεῖσσον); 
καλῶς ποιεῖν with ptep. to do well that, etc. [B. § 144, 15 a.; 
W. 345 (323)], Acts x. 33; Phil.iv.14; 2 Pet.i.19; 3 
Jn. 6. (1 Mace. xii. 18, 22; 2 Mace. ii. 16, etc.) ; with 
verbs denoting a duty or office which one fulfils well : 
1 Tim. iii. 4, 12 sq. ; v. 17; spec. honestly, uprightly: 
Gal. iv. 17; ἀναστρέφεσθαι, Heb. xiii. 18; ποιεῖν, Jas. ii. 
8. b. excellently, nobly, commendably: 1 Co. xiv. 17; 
Gal. v. 7; καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκε, Mk. vii. 37; with bitter 
irony, Mk. vii. 9 (where cf. Fritzsche p. 271 sq.); 2 Co. 
xi. 4. c. honorably, in honor: Jas. ii. 3 [al. give it 
here an outward reference, i. q. in a good place, comfort- 
ably). d. καλῶς εἰπεῖν τινα, to speak well of one, Lk. 
vi. 26; x. ποιεῖν τινα, to do good to, benefit one, Mt. v. 44 
Rec.; τινί [W.§ 32,1 8.; B. 146 (128)], Lk. vi. 27; καλῶς 
ποιεῖν, simply, to do good: Mt. xii. 12. 6. καλῶς ἔχειν, 
to be well (of those recovering health): Mk. xvi. 18.* 

[κἀμέ, see kayo. | 

κάμηλος. -ov, ὁ, 7, Hebr. 593, [fr. Hdt. down], a camel 
[BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 58 sqq.]: 
Mt.iii.4; Mk.i.6; in proverbs, Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25; 
Lk. xviii. 25, (meaning, * something almost or altogether 
impossible’ [cf. Farrar in The Expositor for 1876 i. p. 
369 sqq.; esp. Wetzstein in the Sitzungsberichte d. Akad. 
d. Wissensch. zu München, 1873, pp. 581-596]); Mt. 
xxiii. 24 (of one who is careful not to sin in trivial mat- 
ters, but pays no heed to the more important matters).* 

κάμιλος, -ov, 6, a cable; the reading of certain Mss. in 
Mt. xix. 24 and Lk. xviii. 25, [see Tdf.’s notes]. The 
word is found only in Suidas [1967 c.] and the Schol. on 
Arstph. vesp. [1030]: * kdjuXos τὸ παχὺ σχοινίον διὰ τοῦ 





3 κἄν 


i.” Cf. Passow [or L. and 5.7 s. v.; [WH. App. p. 
151*].* 

κάμινος, -ov, 6, ἡ, [ Hom. ep. 14, 2 ete., Hdt. on], a furnace 
(either for smelting, Xen. vectig. 4, 49, or for burning 
earthen ware, or baking bread, Gen. xix. 28; Ex. xix. 
18; Jer. xi. 4; Dan. iii. 6): Mt. xiii. 42,50; Rev. i. 155 
qx 

καμμύω, a form which passed over from the Epic (cf. 
Hom. batrach. 191) and com. language [Apoll. Dyse. 
synt. 323, 22; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying 
Greek; condemned by Phryn. [as below]; derived by 
syncope and assimilation from καταμύω (which the earlier 
and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. kaupév, καμμονή, κάμ- 
opos, fr. κατὰ μέν, καταμονή, karápopos, cf. Bttm. Gram. 
§ 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De 
vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. 
p. 173 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq.; Schafer ad Lamb. 
Bos p. 368; [ef. B. 62 (55); W.24,46]): 1 aor. ἐκάμ- 
pvca; to shut the eyes, close the eyes: often w. τοὺς ὀφθαλ- 
povs added; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept. 
15. vi. 10, for y Un, i.e. to besmear), in both which pass. 
the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob- 
stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel. 
(Is. xxix. 10; Lam. iii. 43; καμμύειν τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ὄμμα, 
Philo de somn. i. § 26.)* 

κάμνω; 2 aor. ἔκαμον ; pf. κέκμηκα; 1. to grow 
weary, be weary, (so fr. Hom. down): Rev. ii. 3 Rec.; 
Heb. xii. 3. 2. to be sick: Jas. v. 15 (Soph., [Hdt.], 
Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Leian. al.).* 

[κἀμοί, see Kiyo. | 

κάμπτω;: fut. κάμψω: 1 aor. ἔκαμψα: a. to bend, 
bow: τὸ γόνυ (and τὰ γούνατα), the knee (the knees), used 
by Hom. of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest 
(Il. 7, 118; 19, 72); in bibl. Grk. with dat. of pers. to 
one i.e. in honor of one, in religious veneration; used 
of worshippers: Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 18 (where for 
ya foll. by 5); πρός τινα, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii. 
14. b. reflexively, to bow one's self: κάμψει πᾶν 
γόνυ ἐμοί, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall 
worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr. Is. xlv. 23); ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 
Ἰησοῦ, in devout recognition of the name (of κύριος) 
which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [cf. W. 390 
(365) ; Bp. Lghtft., Meyer, in loc.; also ὄνομα, esp. sub 
fin. Cowr.: dva-, cvy-Kaunto ].* 

κἄν [Grsb. κἄν ; see κἀγώ, init.], by crasis for καὶ ἐάν 
[cf. W. $5, 3; B. p. 10; Tdf. Proleg. p. 97; WH. App. 
p. 145°]; hence joined with the subjunctive; 1. 
and if: Mt. x. 22 GL; Mk. xvi. 18; [Lk. xii. 38 (bis) 
T Tr txt. WH; Jn. viii. 55 L T Tr WH; 1 Co. xiii. 2* 
L WH, 2° Tr txt. WH, 3* L Tr WH, 3° L WH]; Jas. 
v.15; by aposiopesis with the suppression of the apodo- 
sis, κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπόν, sc. εὖ ἔχει it is well (or some 
such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9; ef. W. 600 (558); [B. § 151, 
261. 2. also or even if; a. if only, at least, in 
abridged discourse: κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, sc. ἅψωμαι, 
Mk. v. 28; also tva (sc. ἅψωνται αὐτοῦ) κἂν τοῦ κρασπέδου 

οὖς ἅψωνται, Mk. vi. 56; ἵνα ἐρχομένου Πέτρου (sc. τὶ 
αὐτοῦ ἐπισκιάσῃ αὐτῶν) κἂν ἡ σκιὰ etc. Acts v. 15; κἂν ὡς 


Kava 


ἄφρονα sc. δέξησθέ pe, 2 Co. xi. 16; (Sap. xiv. 4; xv. 2). 
Cf. B. § 149, 6; [W. 584 (548); Green, Gram. of the 
N. T. p. 230; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 139 sq.; L. and S. 
s. V. 5 Soph. Lex. s. v.]. b. even if: Mt. xxi. 21; xxvi. 
35; Jn. viii. 14; x. 38; [xi. 25]; Heb. xii. 20.* 

Kava [-νἀ WH; ef. Τὰ Proleg. p. 103; W.$6,1m.], 
ἡ [B. 21 (19)], Cana, indecl. [W. 61 (60); but dat. -νᾷ 
Rec." in Jn. ii. 1, 11], prop. name of a village of Galilee 
about three hours distant from Nazareth towards the 
northwest, surviving at present in a place (partly unin- 
habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-Jelil; cf. 
Robinson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 346 sq.; also his Later 
Bibl. Researches, p. 108; cf. Mwald, Gesch. Christus 
τι. s. w. p. 147 (ed. 1); Riietschi in Herzog vii. 234; [Por- 
ter in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in- 
clined to reopen the question of the identification of 
Cana; see e. g. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.; Zeller, in Quart. 
Statem. of Palest. Expl. Fund, No. iii. p. 71 sq.; Arnaud, 
Palestine p. 412 sq.; Conder, Tent Work ete. i. 150 sq.]: 
Jn dds y 410); xx]. 2.* 

Kavavaios LT Tr WH in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18 (for 
RG Kavavirns, q. v.) ; acc. to the interp. of Bleek (Erklir. 
d. drei ersten Evy. i. p. 417) et al. a native of Cana (see 
Kava); but then it ought to be written Kavaios. The 
reading Kavavatos seems to be a clerical error occasioned 
by the preceding Θαδδαῖος [or Ae88aíios]; cf. Fritzsche 
on Mt. x.4. [But -aios is a common ending of the Gre- 
cized form of names of sects (cf. ᾿Ασσιδαῖος, Φαρισαῖος, 
Σαδδουκαῖος, Eccaios). Hence the word is prob. derived 
fr. the Aramaic }N3p (see next word) and corresponds 
to ζηλωτής, 4: V. (cf. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp. 
Lghtft. Fresh Revision etc. p. 138 sq.]* 

Kavavirns, -ov, 6, (fr. Chald. IP, Hebr. N3D), i. ἢ: ὁ 
ζηλωτής (acc. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acts i. 
13), q. v. the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon : 


KR G (the latter with small x) in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18." 


Kav6axn, 75, ἡ, Can'dace, a name common to the queens 
of a region of Ethiopia whose capital was Napata; just 
as the proper name Ptolemy was common to the Egyp- 
tian kings, and Henry to the Reuss princes (Strabo 17, 
1, 54 p. 820; Plin. h. n. 6, 35; Dio Cass. 54, 5): Acts viii. 
27; ef. Laurent, Die Konigin Kandake, in the Zeitschr. 
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1862, p. 632 sqq. [reprinted in his 
N. T. Studien p. 140 sq.; cf. esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.].* 

κανών. -dvos, ὁ, (kavva, Hebr. "mp a cane, reed; Arab. 
SU a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff 
[cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter etc. p. 21]), prop. a rod or 
straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is 
fastened to keep it straight; used for various purposes 
(see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.); a measuring rod, rule; 
a carpenter's line or measuring tape, Schol on Eur. 
lMippol. 468; hence i. q. τὸ μέτρον ro) πηδήματος (Pol- 
lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the 
Olympie games; accordingly in the N. T. l.a 


definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which | 


one’s power or influence is confined; the province assigned 
one; one’s sphere of activity: 2 Co. x. 18, 15 sq. 2. 


324 





καπηλεύω 


Metaph. any rule or standard, a principle or law of in- 
vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class. 
Grk., as rod καλοῦ, Eur. Hee. 602; ὅροι τῶν ἀγαθῶν x. 
κανόνες, Dem. pro cor. p. 324, 27): Gal. vi. 16; Phil. iii. 
16 Rec. Cf. Credner, Zur Gesch. des Kanons (Hal. 
1847), p. 6 sqq.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T., 
App. A; briefly in B. D. s. v. Canon of Seripture; for 
exx, of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

Καπερναούμ or more correctly (with LT Tr WH [ef. 
WH. App. p. 160; Scrivener, Introd. p. 561]) Καφαρ- 
ναούμ, (223 a village, and DM) consolation; hence ‘the 
village of consolation,’ [al. ‘village of Nachum’ (a 
prop. name)]; Καπαρναούμ, Ptol. 5, 16,4), ἡ, Capernaum 
or Capharnaum, a flourishing city of Galilee (Mt. xi. 23; 
Lk. x. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of 
Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24; hence ἡ 
παραθαλασσία, Mt. iv. 13), near the place where the Jor- 
dan flows into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in 
the O. T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf. 
also B. D.s. v. Caphar]. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10, 
8)a fountain in Galilee called by the neighboring 
residents Καφαρναούμ, and (vita 72) “κώμην Κεφαρνώμην᾽, 
and it is quite probable that he meant the town we are 
speaking of. It is mentioned in the N. T. (besides the 
pass. already cited) in Mt. viii. 5; xvii. 24; Mk. i. 21; ii. 
1; ix. 33; Lk. iv. 28, 31; vii. 1; Jn. ii. 12; iv. 46; vi. 59. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Vaihinger in Herzog vii. 369; 
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 493 sq.; [the last named writ. 
gives at length (see also Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Palaest.- 
Vereins for 1879, p. 63 sqq.) his reasons for preferring 
(contra Robinson, Sepp, etc.) to identify C. with Tell 
Hum; so (after earlier writ.; cf. Arnaud p. 414), Winer 
τι. , Dr. Wilson, Lynch, Ritter, Delitzsch, Tristram 
(Land of Israel, ed. 3, p. 428 sqq.) and more recently 
Capt. Wilson (*Our Work in Palestine’ p. 186 sq. and 
‘Recovery of Jerusalem’ p. 266 sq. (292 sqq.)). But Con- 
der-(Tent Work in Palestine ii. 182 sqq.) argues fr. 
Jewish author. in favor of Khan Minyeh; see D. D. Am. 
edges 

καπηλεύω ; (κάπηλος, 1.6. a. an inn-keeper, esp. a vint- 
ner; b. a petty retailer, a huckster, pedler; cf. Sir. 
xxvi. 29 οὐ δικαιωθήσεται κάπηλος ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας); a. 
to be a retailer, to peddle; b. with acc. of the thing, 
to make money by selling anything; to get sordid gain by 
dealing in anything, to do a thing for base gain (oi τὰ pa- 
θήματα περιάγοντες κατὰ πόλεις Kal πωλοῦντες kK. καπηλεύ- 
ovres, Plat. Prot. p. 818 ἃ. ; μάχην, Aeschyl Sept. 551 
(545); Lat. cauponari bellum, i. e. to fight for gain, trade 
in war, Enn. ap. Cic. offic. 1, 12, 38; ἑταίραν τὸ τῆς Spas 
ἄνθος καπηλεύουσαν, Philo de caritat. § 14, cf. lez. ad 
Gaium § 30, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence 
some suppose that καπηλεύειν τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ in 2 Co. ii. 
17 is equiv. to to trade in the word of God, i. e. to try to 
get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as ped- 
lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities 
for the sake of gain (of κάπηλοί σου μίσγουσι τὸν οἶνον 
ὕδατι, Is. i. 22 Sept.; κάπηλοι, of τὸν οἶνον κεραννύντες, 
Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; of φιλόσοφοι ἀποδίδονται τὰ μα- 


καπνός 
θήματα, ὥσπερ οἱ κάπηλοι, κερασάμενοί γε οἱ πολλοὶ καὶ 
δολώσαντες καὶ κακομετροῦντες, Lucian. Hermot. 59), καπη- 
λεύειν τι was also used as synonymous with to corrupt, to 
adulterate (Themist. or. 21 p. 247 ed. Hard. says that 
the false philosophers τὸ θειότατον τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων ἀγαθῶν 
κιβδηλεύειν τε καὶ αἰσχύνειν K. καπηλεύειν) ; and most in- 
terp. rightly decide in favor of this meaning (on account 
of the context) in 2 Co. ii. 17, cf. δολοῦν τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
θεοῦ, ib. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii.]* 

καπνός, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], smoke: Rev. viii. 4; ix. 
2sq.17,18; xiv. 11; xv.8; xviii 9, 18; xix. 2; ἀτμὶς 
καπνοῦ, A. V. vapor of smoke, Acts ii. 19 after Joel ii. 30 
(iii. 3).* 

Καππαδοκία, -as,7, Cappadocia, a region of Asia Minor, 
bounded under the Roman empire on the N. by Pontus, 
on the E. by Armenia Minor, on the S. by Cilicia and 
Commagene, on the W. by Lycaonia and Galatia [ BB. 
DD Masala Acts. 9; 3 Bates 

καρδία, -as, 7, poetic xpaóía and καρδίη (in the latter 
form almost always in Hom. [only at the beginning of a 
line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis «pa- 


δίη: Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.]), [fr. a root signifying | 


to quiver or palpitate; cf. Curtius $ 39; Vanicek p. 
1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 παρὰ τὸ κραδαίνω, τὸ ceto 
ἀεικίνητος yap ἡ καρδία): allied with Lat. cor; Eng. 
heart]; Sept. for 39 and 3205 the heart ; 1. prop. 
that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the 
circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the 
seat of physical life: 2 S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tob. 
vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq, 17(16). Hence 2. univ. καρδία 
denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual 
life; and a. the vigor and sense of physical life (Ps. 
ci. (cii.) 5; στήρισον τὴν καρδίαν cov ψωμῷ ἄρτου, Judg. 
xix. 5; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 15): τρέφειν τὰς kap- 
δίας, Jas. v. 5; ἐμπιπλῶν τὰς καρδίας τροφῆς, Acts xiv. 17; 


b. 8. below] ; b. the centre and seat of spiritual life, 
the soul or mind, as it is the fountain and seat of the 
thoughts, passions, desires, appetites, affections, purposes, 
endeavors [so in Eng. heart, inner man, etc.]; a. 
univ.: Mt. v.8; vi.21; Mk. vii.19; Lk. 1. 51; ii. 51; 
viii. 12,15; Actsv.3; Ro. x.9sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 2 Co. 
vi.11; Eph. vi.5; Col. iii. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 4, etc.; Plur.: 
Mt. ix.4; Mk. ii. 6,8; iv. I5 [R L txt. Trmrg.]; Lk. i. 
17; 1i.35; v. 22; [xxiv. 38 RGLi mrg.; Acts vii. 51 LT 
Tr WH txt.]; Ro. ii. 15; xvi.18; 2 Co. iii. 2; Gal. iv. 6; 
Phil. iv. 7; Eph. v. 19 Lehm.; Heb. viii. 10 [T WH mrg. 
sing.]; x. 16, etc. ἡ καρδία is distinguished fr. τὸ στόμα or 
fr. rà χείλεα: Mt. xv. 8, 18 sq.; Mk. vii. 6; 2 Co. vi. 11; 
Ro.x.8sq.; fr. τὸ πρόσωπον : 2 Co. v. 12; 1 Th. ii. 17; 
περιτομὴ καρδίας, Ro. ii. 29; ἀπερίτμητοι τῇ καρδίᾳ, Acts 
vii. 531[L T Tr WH txt. -δίαις, WH mrg. gen. -δίας, cf. B. 
170 (148)]. of things done from the hearti.e. cordially or 
sincerely, truly (without simulation or pretence) the foll. 
phrases are used : ἐκ καρδίας (Arstph. nub. 86), Ro. vi. 17; 
and L T Tr WH in 1 Pet. i. 22, where RG ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρ- 
δίας, as in 1 Tim.i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22° ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν, Mt. 


325 








καρδία 


3); ἐν ὅλῃ τ. x. and ἐξ ὅλης τ. «., Mt. xxii. 37; ΜΕ. xii. 
30,33; Lk. x. 27, and Rec. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5; 
Xxvi. 16; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 34); per ἀληθινῆς καρδίας, 
Heb. x. 22. ἐρευνᾶν τὰς καρδίας, Ro. viii. 27; Rev. ii. 23; 
δοκιμάζειν, 1 Th. ii: 4; γινώσκειν, Lk. xvi. 15, (ἐτάξειν, Jer. 
xvii. 10; Ps. vii. 10); διανοίγειν τὴν x. (see διανοίγω, 2), 
Acts xvi. 14; ἦν ἡ καρδία x. ἡ ψυχὴ μία, there was perfect 
unanimity, agreement of heart and soul, Acts iv. 32; 
τιθέναι τι ἐν τῇ x. (323 and 39 Sy Dii, 1 S. xxi. 12; Mal. 
ii.2; Dan.i.8; τιθέναι ἐν στήθεσσιν, ἐν φρεσίν, ete., in 
Hom.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered 
more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66; to fiz in the heart 
i. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V. 
conceived in thy heart]; also eis τ. καρδίαν [LT Tr WH 
ἐν τ. k.] foll. by the inf, Lk. xxi. 14; βάλλειν εἰς τὴν kK. 
twos, foll. by va, to put into one's mind the design of 
doing a thing, Jn. xiii. 2; also διδόναι foll. by an inf., 
Rev. xvii. 17; ἀναβαίνει ἐπὶ τὴν x. τινός, foll. by an inf., 
the purpose to do a thing comes into the mind, Acts vii. 
23; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ joined to verbs of thinking, reflect- 
ing upon, doubting, ete.: ἐνθυμεῖσθαι, διαλογίζεσθαι, 
Mt. ix.4; Mk. ii.6,8; Lk. iii. 15; v. 22; λέγειν, εἰπεῖν 
(i353 ^55), to think, consider with one's self, Mt. xxiv. 
48; Lk.xii45; Ro.x.6; Rev. xviii. 7, (Deut. viii. 17; 
ix. 4); συμβάλλειν, to revolve in mind, Lk. ii. 19; óta- 
κρίνεσθαι, to doubt, Mk. xi. 23; διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσι, 
of persons in doubt, Lk. xxiv. 38 [R G L mrg. plur.]; 
ἀναβαίνει τι ἐπὶ καρδίαν, the thought of a thing enters the 
mind, 1 Co. ii. 9. B. spec. of the understanding, the 
faculty and seat of intelligence (often so in Hom. also [cf. 
Néigelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 319 sq.; Zezschwitz, Pro- 
fangrücitüt u.s. w. pp. 25 sq. 50]; “cor domicilium sapi- 
entiae,”’ Lact. de opif. dei c. 10, cf. Cie. Tusc. 1, 9; 30: 
1 K. x. 2; Job xii. 3; xvii. 4, etc. ; [cf. Meyer on Eph. 


| i. 18 and reff.]): Ro. i. 21; 2 Co. iv. 6; Eph. i. 18 [ Rec. 
Bapeiv τ. καρδίας κραιπάλῃ καὶ μέθη, Lk. xxi. 345 [but see | 


διανοίας}; 2 Pet.i. 19; συνιέναι τῇ καρδίᾳ, Mt. xiii. 15; 
Acts xxviii. 27; νοεῖν τῇ x. Jn. xii. 40. of the- dulness 
of a mind incapable of perceiving and understanding 
divine things the foll. expressions occur: ἐπαχύνθη ἡ «. 
Mt.xiii.15; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10); πωροῦν τὴν 
καρδίαν, Jn. xii. 40; πεπωρωμένη καρδία, Mk. vi. 52; viii. 
17; ἡ πώρωσις τῆς kx. Mk. iii. 5; Eph. iv. 18; βραδὺς τῇ x. 
slow of heart, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν kK. κεῖται, 2 
Co. iii. 15. vy. of the will and character: ἁγνίζειν καρ- 
δίας, Jas. iv. 8; καθαρίζειν τὰς x. Acts xv. 9 peppavrt- 
σμένοι τὰς x. Heb. x. 22; καρδία εὐθεῖα [cf. W. 32], Acts 
viii. 21; πονηρά, Heb. iii. 12 [cf. B. § 132, 24; W. 194 
(183)]; ἀμετανόητος, Ro. ii. 5; yeyupvacpern πλεονεξίας, 
2 Pet. ii. 14; στηρίζειν τὰς kx. 1 Th. iii. 13; βεβαιοῦν, in 
pass., Heb. xiii. 9; σκληρύνειν, Heb. iii. 8; ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς 
x. Acts viii. 22; ai βουλαὶ τῶν κ- 1 Co. iv. 5; προαιρεῖσθαι 
τῇ x. 2 Co. ix. 7 ; κρίνειν (to determine) and ἑδραῖος ἐν τῇ 
k.lCo.vii.37. δ. of the soul so far forth as it is affected 
and stirred in a bad way or good, or of the soul as the seat 
of the sensibilities, affections, emotions, desires, appetites, 
passions: ἡ καρδία καιομένη ἦν, of the soul as greatly and 
peculiarly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32; αἱ ἐπιθυμίαι τῶν καρδιῶν, 


xviii. 35 (ἀπὸ καρδίας εὐχάριστος τοῖς θεοῖς, Antonin. 2, | Ro. i. 24 ; στηρίζειν τὰς x. of the cultivation of constancy 


καρδιογνώστης 3 


and endurance, Jas. v. 8. in ref. to good-will and love: 
ἔχειν τινὰ ἐν τῇ κ' (o have one in one’s heart, of constant re- 
membrance and steadfast affection, Phil. i. 7 (‘te tamen 
in toto pectore semper habet’ Ovid. trist. 5, 4, 24); εἶναι 
ἐν τῇ k. τινός, to be cherished in one's heart, to be loved 
by one perpetually and unalterably, 2 Co. vii. 3; εὐδοκία 
τῆς x. Ro. x. 1. in ref. to joy and pleasure: ηὐφράνθη ἡ 
x. Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9) ; χαρήσεται ἡ x. Jn. xvi. 
22; ἀνὴρ κατὰ τὴν x. τοῦ θεοῦ, i. e. in whom God delights, 
Acts xiii. 22 ; of the pleasure given by food, Acts xiv. 17 
([W. 156 (148) note] see 2 a. above). in ref. to grief, 
pain, anguish, ete.: ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκε τὴν x. Jn. xvi. 6; 
ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου, Ro. ix. 2; ἡ κι ταράσσεται, Jn. xiv. 1, 
27; συνοχὴ καρδίας, 2 Co. 11. 4 ; βαρεῖν τ. καρδίας μεριμναῖς 
βιωτικαῖς, Lk. xxi. 34 [ef. 2 a. above]; διαπρίομαι τῇ x. Acts 
vii. 54; συντετριμμένος τὴν x. Lk. iv. 18 Τὸ Τῷ br. : κατενύγη- 
cav τῇ k. Acts ii. 37 [L T Tr WH τὴν x]; συνθρύπτειν τὴν 
x. Acts xxi. 13. €. of a soul conscious of good or bad deeds 
(our conscience): 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq. (Eccl. vii. 22; so 233, 
Job xxvii. 6; ἡ καρδία πατάσσει τινά, 1 S. xxiv. 6; 2 S. 
xxiv. 10). 9. used of the middle or central or inmost 
part of any thing, even though inanimate: τῆς γῆς (which 
some understand of Hades, others of the sepulchre), Mt. 
xii. 40 (τῆς θαλάσσης, Jon. ii. 4 for 35; and for the same 
ἐν μέσῳ θαλάσσης, Ex. xv. 8, 195; add Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 
19; τῆς κλεψύδρας, Aristot. probl. 16, 8 [al. κωδία]). Cf. 
Beck, Bibl. Seelenlehre, ch. iii. § 20 sqq. p. 64 sqq. ; De- 
litzsch, Bibl. Psychologie (Leipz. 1861) iv. $ 12 p. 248 sqq. 
[also in Herzog 2, vi. 57 sqq.]; OeAler in Herzog vi. p. 
15 sqq. [also in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) $ 71]; Wit- 
lichen in Schenkel iii. 71 sq. 

καρδιο-γνώστης, -ov, 6, (καρδία, γνώστης), knoter of 
hearts: Actsi. 24; xv. 8. (Eccl. writ. [W. 100 (94)].)* 

Kápmos [cf. W. p. 51], -ov, 6, Carpus, the name of an 
unknown man: 2 Tim. iv. 13.* 

καρπός, -od, 6, [cf. Lat. carpo; A-S. hearf-est (harvest 
i.e. the ingathering of crops); Curtius $42]; Hebr. 
5235 fr. Hom. down; fruit; 1. prop.: the fruit of 
trees, Mt. xii. 33; xxi. 19; Mk. xi. 14; Lk. vi. 44; xiii. 
6 sq.; of vines, Mt. xxi. 34; Mk. xii. 2; Lk. xx. 10; 1 Co. 
ix. 7; of the fields, Lk. xii. 17; Mk. iv. 29; 2 Tim. ii. 6; 
[Jas. v. 7]; βλαστάνειν, Jas. v. 18; ποιεῖν, to bear fruit 
(after the Hebr. 15 ni/y [see ποιέω, I. 1 e.]), Mt. iii. 
10; vii. 17-19 ; xiii. 26; Lk. iii. 9; vi. 43; viii.8; xiii. 9; 
Rev. xxii. 2; διδόναι, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7 sq.; φέρειν, 
Mt. vii. 18 TWH; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2,4 sq.; (trop. xv. 8, 
16); ἀποδιδόναι, to yield fruit, Rev. xxii. 2; to render 
(pay) the fruit, Mt. xxi.41; by a Hebraism, 6 καρπὸς τῆς 
κοιλίας, i. e. the unborn child, Lk. i. 42 (153 143, Deut. 
xxviii. 4, where Sept. τὰ ἔκγονα τῆς κοιλίας); τῆς ὀσφύος 
the fruit of one’s loins, i. 6. his progeny, his posterity, 
Acts ii. 30 (Gen. xxx. 2; Ps. exxvi. (exxvii.) 3; exxxi. 
(exxxii.) 11; Mic. vi. 7); ef. W. 33 (32). 2. Me- 
taph. that which originates or comes from something; an 
effect, result; a. i. q. ἔργον, work, act, deed: with gen. 
of the author, τοῦ πνεύματος, Gal. v.22; τοῦ φωτός, Eph. 
v. 9 (Ree. τ. πνεύματος) ; τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Phil. i. 11 [cf. 
b. below]; of Christian charity, i. e. benefit, Ro. xv. 28; 


26 





fruitful, productive: Acts xiv. 17. 





κατά 


καρπὸν πολὺν φέρειν, to accomplish much (for the propa- 
gation of Christianity and its furtherance in the souls of 
men), Jn. xv. 8, 16; used of men’s deeds as exponents 
of their hearts [cf. W. 372 (348)], Mt. vii. 16, 20; dya- 
Goi, Jas. iii. 17; καρποὶ τῆς Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, deeds required 
for the attainment of salvation in the kingdom of God, 
Mt. xxi. 43 ; ποιεῖν καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας, to exhibit 
deeds agreeing with a change of heart, Mt. iii. 8; Lk. iii. 
8, (cf. ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσειν, Acts xxvi. 20). 
b. advantage, profit, utility: Phil.i. 22; iv. 17; ἔχειν καρ- 
mov, to get fruit, Ro. i. 13; vi. 21 sq.; τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 
benefit arising from righteousness [al. make it gen. of | 
apposition, W. $59, 8 a.], Heb. xii. 11; which consists in 


| righteousness (gen. of appos.), Jas. iii. 18 [ef. Phil. i. 11 


in a. above, and Meyer ad loc.; Prov. xi. 30; Amos vi. 
12j]- c. by a Hebraism οἱ καρποὶ τῶν χειλέων, praises, 
which are presented to God as a thank-offering: lleb. 
xiii. 15 (Hos. xiv. 2; Prov. xii. 14; xxix. 49 (xxxi. 31)). 
Cf- W. 33 (32) note 1. d. συνάγειν καρπὸν eis ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον, to gather fruit (i. e. a reaped harvest) into life 
eternal (as into a granary), is used in fig. discourse of 
those who by their labors have fitted souls to obtain eter- 
nal life, Jn. iv. 86." 

καρπο-φορέω, -@; 1 aor. éxaproddpnaa; pres. pass. ptep. 
καρποφορούμενος ; (καρποφόρος, q. v.) ; to bear fruit; (Vulg. 
fructifico ; Colum., Tertull.) ; a. prop. ([Xen., Aris- 
tot.], Theophr. de hist. plant. 3, 3, 7; Diod. 2, 49) : xóp- 
rov, Mk. iv. 28 (φυτά, Sap. x. 7). b. metaph. to bear, 
bring forth, deeds: thus of men who show their knowl- 
edge of religion by their conduct, Mt. xiii. 23; Mk. iv. 
20; Lk. viii. 15; ἐν (for RG L Tr mrg. WH mre. ἕν [ef. 
B. 103 (90), see eis, 4 a.]) τριάκοντα etc. sc. καρποῖς, Mk. 
iv. 20 T Tr txt. WH txt. [see ἐν, I. 5 1.1; -ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ 
ἀγαθῷ, Col. i. 10; τινί (dat. commodi) to one who reaps 
the fruit, i.e. fruit acceptable to him, τῷ θεῷ, Ro. vii. 4 ; 
τῷ θανάτῳ, i.e. (without the fig.) to produce works re- 
warded with death, Ro. vii. 5; in mid. to bear fruit of 
one's self, Col. i. 6 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* 

καρπο-φόρος, -ov, (καρπός and φέρω), fruit-bearing, 
(Pind., Xen., Theo- 
phr., Diod., Sept.) * 

καρτερέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐκαρτέρησα; (καρτερός [fr. κάρτος 
i. e. κράτος; ‘strong’]); to be steadfast: Heb. xi. 27 [A.V. 
endured]. (Job ii. 9; Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. down.) [Comp.: προσ-καρ- 
Tepew. | * 

κάρφος, -εος (-ovs), τό, (fr. κάρφω to contract, dry up, 
wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff, [ A. V. mote]: 
Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41sq., where it figuratively denotes 
asmaller fault. (Gen. viii. 11; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down.) * 

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see 7f. 
Proleg. p. 95; cf. W.$ 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 146%], 
a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction 
from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined 
with the gen. and the ace. 

I. With the Genitive (W. $47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. 
$147,20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down : karà 


κατά 


τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 33; Mk. v. 13 ; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν 
κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head 
[cf. W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to 
omit κατά with L'T Tr WH; see karaxéo), Mk. xiv. 3; 
hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) 
ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([A. V. having his head covered] cf. κα- 
ταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but see ἔχω, 1. 1 b. ]). 
b. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 
381 (357) note!; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Crete]; trop. 7 
κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down into the depth, i. e. 
deep or extreme poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 (cf. Strabo 9, 5 
p- 419 ἐστὶ τὸ μαντεῖον ἄντρον κοῖλον κατὰ βάθους). Ὁ; 
used of motion or extension through a space from top to 


bottom; hence through, throughout: in the N. T. [and in } 


Luke’s writ.; B. § 147, 20] everywh. with the adj. ὅλος, 
as καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, τῆς ᾿Ιόππης, Lk. 
iv. 14; xxiii. 5; Actsix. 31; x. 37, (διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τῆς 
νήσου, Polyb. 3,19, 7; ἐσκεδασμένοι κατὰ τῆς χώρας, 1, 17, 
10; 3, 76,10; μὴ παραβαίνειν tas ἁρματοτροχίας, ἀλλὰ 
κατ᾽ αὐτῶν ἰέναι, Ael. v. h. 2, 27). 2. metaph. a. 
after verbs of swearing, adjuring, (the hand being, 
as it were, placed down upon the thing sworn by [cf. 
Bnhdy. p. 238; Kühner § 433 fin.]), by: Mt. xxvi. 63; 
Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Is. xlv. 23; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 13; Judith i. 
12; Dem. 553,17; 554, 23). b. against (prop. down 
upon [W. 382 (358)]; Hebr.5y) : opp. to ὑπέρ, Mk. ix. 
40; 2 Co. xiii. 8; Ro. viii. 31; opp. to pera, Mt. xii. 30; 
Lk. xi. 23; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal. v. 17; εἰπεῖν πονηρὸν 
(pjpa), Mt. v. 11; λαλεῖν, Acts vi. 13; Jude 15; μαρτυρία. 
Mk. xiv. 55; Mt. xxvi. 59; μαρτυρεῖν, 1 Co. xv. 15 [here 
many take x. i. q. with regard to, of; cf. De Wette ad loc. ; 
Lob.ad Phryn. p. 272]; ψευδομαρτυρεῖν, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. ; 

!yoyyütew, Mt. xx. 11 (Ex. xv. 24 Alex.) ; διδάσκειν, Acts 

_ Xxi. 28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas. iii. 14 (Xen. apol. 13) ; συμβούλιον 
λαβεῖν or ποιεῖν, Mt. xxvii. 1; Mk. iii. 6; αἰτεῖσθαί τι, Acts 
xxv.3,15; after verbs of accusing, etc. : ἔχειν τι, Mt. 
v. 23; Mk. xi. 25; Rev. ii. 4, 14, 20; κατηγορεῖν, Lk. xxiii. 
14; κατηγορία, Jn. xviii. 29 [Tdf. om. κατά] ; ἐγκαλεῖν, Ro. 
viii. 33; ἐντυγχάνειν τινί, Ro. xi. 2; add, Acts xxiv. 1; 
xxv. 2; Jas. v. 9; τὸ χειρόγραφον, Col. ii. 14; κρίσιν ποιεῖν, 
Jude 15; after verbs of rebelling, fighting, pre- 
vailing: Mt. x. 35; xii. 25; Acts xiv. 2; 1 Co. iv. 6; 
2 Co. x. 5; 1 Pet. ii. 11; [Rev. xii. 7 Rec.]; ἰσχύειν, Acts 
xix. 16; ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν, Jn. xix. 11. 

II. With the Accusative; cf. W. § 49d.; Bnhdy. p. 
239 566. 1. of Place; a. of the place through 
which anything is done or is extended (prop. down 
through; opp. to ἀνά, up through): καθ᾽ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν 
"κηρύσσειν, Lk. viii. 39; ἐκφέρειν κατὰ τὰς πλατείας, Acts 
v.15 [RG]; add, Lk. ix. 6; xiii. 22; xv. 14; Acts viii. 
1; xi 1; xv. 23; xxi. 21; xxiv. 5,12; xxvii. 2; τοὺς κατὰ 
τὰ ἔθνη (throughout Gentile lands) πάντας ᾿Ιουδαίους, Acts 
xxi. 21, ef. Grimm on 2 Mace. i. 1; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, along 
the way i. e. on the journey [W. 400 (374) note 1], Lk. 
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; along (Lat. secun- 
dum or praeter [R. V. off ]), πέλαγος τὸ κατὰ τὴν Κιλικίαν, 
Acts xxvii. 5. b. of the place to which one is brought 
(down): γενόμενος [Tr WH om. y.] κατὰ τὸν τόπον [ ἐλ- 


: 3 





tif κατά 


θών etc.], Lk. x. 32 [ef. Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad 
loc.]; ἐλθόντες κατὰ τὴν Μυσίαν, Acts xvi. 7; κατὰ τὴν 
Κνίδον, Acts xxvii. 7; κατ᾽ αὐτόν, (came) to him, i. 6. to 
the place where he was lying, Lk. x. 33. c. of direc- 
tion; towards: Λιβύη ἡ κατὰ Κυρήνην, that Libya which 
lay towards Cyrene, i. e. Libya of Cyrene (i. e. the chief 
city of which was Cyrene), Acts ii. 10; βλέπειν, to look, lie 
towards (see βλέπω, 3), Acts xxvii. 12; πορεύεσθαι κατὰ 
μεσημβρίαν, Acts vili. 26; κατὰ σκοπόν, towards the goal, 
my eye on the goal, Phil. iii. 14. against (Lat. adversus 
w. the acc.); over against, opposite: κατὰ πρόσωπον, to 
the face, Gal. ii. 11 (see πρόσωπον, 1a.); i.q. present, 
Acts xxv. 16 [ A. V. face to face]; 2 Co. x. 15 w. gen. of 
pers. added, before the face of, in the presence of, one: 
Lk.ii.31; Acts iii. 13; rà κατὰ πρόσωπον, the things 
that are open to view, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7; xar 
ὀφθαλμούς, before the eyes, Gal. iii. 1; here, too. acc. to 
some [cf. W. 400 (374) note?] belongs κατὰ θεόν, Ro. 
viii. 27, but it is more correctly referred tc 3 c. a. be- 
low. d. of the place where: κατ᾽ οἶκον (opp. to 
ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ), at home, privately [W. 400 (374) note], 
Acts ii. 46; v. 42. e. of that which so joins itself 
to one thing as to separate itself from another; our for, 
by: kar ἰδίαν, apart, see ἴδιος, 2; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, alone (by 
himself), Acts xxviii. 165 Jas. ii. 17 [ R. V. in itself ], (2 
Mace. xiii. 13; of καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς Ἕλληνες, Thuc. 1, 138; of 
Βοιωτοὶ καθ᾽ αὑτούς, Diod. 13, 72; other exx. are given 
by Alberti, Observv. ete. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e 
Philone p. 460 sq.) ἔχειν τι καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, to have a thing 
by and to one's self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one's mind, 
Ro. xiv. 22 (Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 1; Heliod. 7, 16; [cf. W. 
401 (375) note!]); hence, of that which belongs to 
some pers. or thing: κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν, belonging 
to [A. V. in] the church that was there, Acts xiii. 1; 7 
ἐκκλησία κατ᾽ οἶκόν twos, belonging to one's household 
(see ἐκκλησία, 4 b. aa.) ; hence it forms a periphrasis — 
now for the gen., as rà κατὰ "IovOatovs ἔθη (i. q. τῶν 'Iov- 
δαίων). Acts xxvi. 3; now for the possessive pron., oi 
καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς ποιηταί, your own poets, Acts xvii. 28 [here 
WH mre. καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς, see their Intr. § 404]; νόμου τοῦ 
καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς, [a law of your own], Acts xviii. 15; τὸ κατ᾽ ἐμὲ 
πρόθυμον, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see πρόθυμος]; ἡ καθ᾽ 
ὑμᾶς πίστις. Eph. i. 15, (ἡ κατὰ τὸν τύραννον ὠμύτης τε καὶ 
δύναμις, Diod. 14, 12; μέχρι τῶν καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς χρόνων, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 2,1; οἵ. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 21 p. 88; a 
throng of exx. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schweighaeuser, 
Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [ef. W. 154 (146); 400 (374) 
note 2; esp. B. § 132, 2]). 2. of Time [cf. W.401 
(374)]; during, about; Lat. tempore: κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον or τοῦ- 
τον τὸν καιρόν, Acts xii. 1; xix. 23; Ro. ix. 9; Heb. ix. 9 
[RG]; xarà τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 
xiv. 1 (see αὐτός, III. 1); κατὰ τὸ μεσονύκτιον, Acts xvi. 
25; κατὰ μέσον THs νυκτός, Acts xxvii. 27; [possibly also 
κατὰ μεσημβρίαν, at noon, Acts viii. 26 (see μεσημβρία, b.) ]: 
κατὰ καιρόν. see καιρός, 32 a. ; κατ᾽ ἀρχάς (Hat. 3, 153), in 
the beginning (of things), Heb. i. 10; κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ 
πειρασμοῦ, Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this pass. have ren- 
dered the prep. 3 in the context by ὡς (ἐν τῷ mapamtxpa- 


κατά 

σμῷ, Ps. xciv. (xev.) 8), some would take it and κατά here 
i.q. like asin the day ete.; Vulg. secundum]; κατὰ πᾶν σάβ- 
Baroy, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21; xviii. 4; καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, 
Heb. iii. 13; κατὰ μῆνα (ἕνα) ἕκαστον, Rev. xxii. 2; κατ᾽ 
évap, during a dream, see óvap. 3. it denotes ref- 
erence,relation, proportion, of various sorts; a. 
distributively, indicating a succession of things fol- 
lowing one another [W. 401 (374); Β. 8 147,20]; a. 
in ref. to place: κατὰ πόλιν, in every city, (city by city, 
from city to city), Lk. viii. 1, 4; Acts xv. 21; xx. 23; Tit. 
1.5, (Thuc. 1, 122) ; κατ᾽ ἐκκλησίαν, in every church, Acts 
xiv. 23; w. the plur., κατὰ πόλεις, Lk. xiii. 22; κατὰ τὰς 
κώμας, Lk. ix. 6 (Hat. 1, 96); κατὰ τόπους, Mt. xxiv. 7; 
Mk. xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 11; κατὰ τὰς συναγωγάς, in every 
synagogue, Acts xxii. 19; [ef. κατὰ τ. οἴκους εἰσπορευόμε- 
vos, Acts viii. 3]. B. in ref. totime: κατ᾽ ἔτος, yearly, 
year by year, Lk. ii. 41; also κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν (see ἐνιαυτός) ; 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν etc., see ἡμέρα, 2 p. 278°; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 
[R G -rov], on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2; 
κατὰ ἑορτήν, at any and every feast, Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. 
xv. 6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Rec.; cf. D. $ 133, 26. Others un- 
derstand the phrase in these pass. (contextually) at or 
during (see 2 above) the feast, viz. the Passover; cf. W. 
401 (374)]. — y. univ.: καθ᾽ ἔνα πάντες, all one by one, 
successively, 1 Co. xiv. 31, see more fully in εἷς, 4 c.; 
κατὰ δύο, by two, 1 Co. xiv. 27; κατὰ ἑκατὸν x. κατὰ πεντή- 
κοντα, by hundreds and by fifties, Mk. vi. 40 LT Tr WH; 
xarà μέρος, severally, singly, part by part, Heb. ix. 5 
(Hdt. 9,25; Xen. anab.3,4, 22); κατ᾽ ὄνομα, by name 
i e. each by its own name (Vulg. nominatim [or per 
nomen]): Jn.x.3; 3Jn.15 (14); cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
858 sq. b. equiv. to the Lat. ratione habita alicuius 
rei vel personae; as respects; with regard to; in reference 
105 so far as relates to; as concerning; [W. 401 (375)]: 
κατὰ σάρκα Or κατὰ τὴν o., as to the flesh (see σάρξ [esp. 
2 b.]), Ro. i. 3; ix. 3,5; 1 Co.i. 265 x. 18; 2 Co. xi. 18; 
οἱ κύριοι κατὰ o. (Luther well, die leiblichen Herren), in 
earthly relations, acc. to the arrangements of society, 
Eph. vi. 5; κατὰ τὸ ebayy., κατὰ τὴν ἐκλογήν, Ro. xi. 28; 
add, Ro.i.4; vii.22; Phil. iii. 5 sq.; Heb. ix. 9; rà κατά 
twa, one’s affairs, one's case, Acts xxiv. 22; xxv. 14; 
Eph. vi. 21; Phil. i. 12; Col. iv. 7, (and very often in 
class. Grk.) ; κατὰ πάντα τρόπον, in every way, in every re- 
spect, Ro. iii. 2; the opp. κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον, in no wise, 
2 Th. ii. 3; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, in all things, Acts 


xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb. ii.17; iv. 15, (Thuc. 4, | 


81). c. according to, agreeably to; in reference to 
agreement or conformity to a standard, in various ways 
[W. 401 (375)]; a. according to anything as a stand- 
ard, agreeably to: περιπατεῖν κατά τι, Mk. vii. 5; Ro. viii. 1 
[Rec.], 4; xiv. 15; 2 Th. iii. 6; Eph. ii. 2; ζῆν κατά, Acts 
xxvi. 5; Ro. viii. 12 sq.; πορεύεσθαι, 2 Pet. iii. 3; ἀποδι- 
δόναι τινί, Mt. xvi. 27, etc. (see ἀποδίδωμί, [esp. 47); 
λαμβάνειν, 1 Co. iii. 8; so with many other verbs a thing 
is said to be done or to occur κατά, as in Lk. ii. 27, 29; 
Jn. vii. 24; Col. ii. 8; iii. 10; 1 Tim.i. 18; Heb. vii. 15; 
viii. 5, 9; 1 Jn. v. 14, ete.; (on the phrase κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον, 
See ἄνθρωπος, esp. 1 c.; [cf. e. below; W. 402 (376)]); 


328 





κατά 


κατὰ τὴν γραφήν, τὰς γραφάς, Jas. ii. 8; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq.; 
κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον, 3 Co. iv. 13; κατὰ τὸ εἰρημένον, Ro. 
iv. 18; κατὰ τὸν νόμον, Lk. ii. 39; Jn. xviii. 31; xix. 7; 
Heb. ix. 22; κατὰ τὸ evayy. μου, Ro. ii. 16; xvi. 25; 2 Tim. 
ii. 8, ef. 1 Tim. i. 11; κατὰ τὸ ὡρισμένον, Lk. xxii. 22; 
καθ᾽ ὁμοίωσιν θεοῦ, Jas. iii. 9; κατὰ λόγον rightly, justly, 
[A. V. reason would etc.], Acts xviii. 14; κατά τινα. agree- 
ably to the will of any one, as pleases him, [ W. 401 sq. 
(375)]: so xarà θεόν, Ro. viii. 27 [cf. 1 c. above]; 2 Co. 
vii. 9, 11; κατὰ Χριστὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, Ro. xv. 5; κατὰ κύριον, 
2 Co. xi. 17; κατὰ τὸν καθαρισμόν, after the manner of 
purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii. 
6; of κατὰ σάρκα ὄντες, who bear, reflect, the nature of 
the flesh, i. q. of σαρκικοί, and of κατὰ πνεῦμα ὄντες i. q. οὗ 
πνευματικοί, Ro. viii. 9; κατὰ τί γνώσομαι ; in accordance 
with what criterion i. e. by what sign shall I know? Lk. 
i.18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the 
titles of the records of the life of Christ: ebayy. (which. 
word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) κατὰ Ματθαῖον, Μάρκον, 
ete., as Matthew ete. composed or wrote (it). This use 
of the prep. was not primarily a mere periphrasis for 
the gen. (Ματθαίου, ete., see IT. 1 e. above), but indicated. 
that the same subject had been otherwise handled by 
others, οἵ. ἡ παλαιὰ διαθήκη κατὰ τοὺς ἑβδομήκοντα 
(in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also 
to the Greek translations made by others); οἱ ὑπομνη- 
ματισμοὶ οἱ κατὰ Νεεμίαν, 2 Mace. ii. 13 [see Grimm ad 
loc.]. Subsequently κατά with an ace. of the writer came 
to take the place of the gen., as 7 κατὰ Μωῦσέα πεντάτευ- 
xos in Epiphanius [haer. 8, 4. Cf. W. 402 (375); B. 
3; 157 (137); and see, further, Soph. Lex.s. v. εὐαγγέλιον, 
Jas. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4]. B. in proportion 
to, according to the measure of: χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν 
τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα, Ro. xii. 6; κατὰ τὸ μέτρον, 2 
Co. x. 13; Eph. iv. 7; κατὰ τὴν σκληρότητά σου, Ro. ii. 5; 
κατὰ τὸν χρόνον, Mt.ii.16; ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, 
Mt.xxv.15; without the art. κατὰ δύναμιν, 2 Co. viii. 3 
(opp. to ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, as Hom. Il. 3, 59 κατ᾽ αἶσαν, οὐδ᾽ 
ὑπὲρ αἶσαν); καθ᾽ ὅσον, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb. 
iii. 3; vii. 20; ix. 27; κατὰ τοσοῦτο, by so much, Heb. vii. 
22. y. used of the cause; through, on account of, 


Jvom, owing to, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence 


of, by virtue of) [W. 402 (376) ]: κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν, [ for 
every cause], Mt. xix. 3; κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Co: 
iii. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, (xara τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ πρό- 
νοιαν, Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6); κατὰ χάριν, Ro. iv. 16; also. 
opp. to κατὰ ὀφείλημα [ R. V. as of . . . as 67, Ro. iv. 4; 
of κατὰ φύσιν κλάδοι, the natural branches, Ro. xi. 21 [ef- 
B. 162 (141)]; ἡ κατὰ φύσιν ἀγριέλαιος, the natural wild 
olive tree, ib. 24; ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύνη, righteousness: 
proceeding from faith, Heb. xi. 7; add, Ro. viii. 28; ix. 
11; xi. 5; xvi. 25 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 8; 2 Co. xiii. 10; Gal. ii. 
2; iii. 29; Eph. i. 5, 7, 9, 11, 19; iii. 7, 11, 16, 20; Col. i.. 
11,29; Phil.i.20; iii.21; iv.11, 19; 2 Th.i. 12; 11-95 
2 Tim. i. 8 sq.; Heb. ii. 4; vii. 16; Tit.i.3; 1 Pet. i. 3; 2 
Pet. iii. 15. adverbial phrases [W. § 51, 3 σ.}: κατ᾽ ἐξου- 
ciav [with authority], Mk. i. 27; κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην, κατὰ ἑκού- 
σιον (q. v), [of necessity, of free will], Philem. 14; κατὰ. 


κατά 


γνῶσιν, 1 Pet. iii. 7; κατ᾽ ἐπίγνωσιν, Ro. x. 2 [cf. W. 403 
(376)]; κατὰ ἄγνοιαν, [in ignorance], Acts iii. 17. 8. 
of likeness; as, like as: συντελέσω -. . διαθήκην καινήν, 
ov κατὰ τὴν διαθήκην κτὰ. Heb. viii. 8 sq. (1 K. xi. 10); so 
with the ace. of a pers. [cf. under a. above], Gal. iv. 28; 
1 Pet. i. 15; κατὰ θεόν, after the image of God, Eph. iv. 
24; κρίνεσθαι κατὰ ἀνθρώπους, ζῆν κατὰ θεόν, to be judged 
as it is fit men should be judged, to live as God lives, 1 
Pet. iv. 6. Hence it is used «e of the mode in 
which a thing is done; of the quality: ἄνδρες οἱ κατ᾽ 
ἐξοχὴν τῆς πόλεως, the principal men of the city, Acts 
xxv. 23; καθ᾽ ὑπομενὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, i. 4. ὑπομένοντες ἐν 
ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ. [by constancy in well-doing], Ro. ii. 7; esp. 
in adverbial phrases: κατὰ ταῦτα in [or after] the same 
[or this] manner, Lk. vi. 23 (Ltxt. T Tr WH x. τὰ αὐτά, 
L.mrg. x. ταὐτά), [26 (edd. as before)]; Lk. xvii. 30 (Ὁ 
Tr WH x. τὰ αὐτά, G L x. ταὐτά) ; καθ᾽ ὑπερβολήν, Ro. vii. 
13; 1 Co. xii. 31, etc., [cf. W. 466 (434); B. 96 (84)]; 
κατὰ πίστιν i. q. πιστεύοντες [A. V. in faith; cf. W. 403 
(376) ], Heb. xi. 13; κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατ᾽ ἐπιταγήν, by 
way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co. 
vii. 6, cf. 2 Co. viii. 8; κατὰ κράτος, Acts xix. 20; καθ᾽ 
ὁμοιότητα, Heb. iv. 15; on the phrase κατὰ ἄνθρωπον see 
ἄνθρωπος, 1 c. [cf. a. above]. d. of the end aimed 
at; the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad 
[W. 402 sq. (376)]): kar ἐπαγγελίαν ζωῆς, to proclaim 
life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see ἐπαγγελία, 1]; κατ᾽ εὐσέβειαν, 
tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. 1] (see εὐσέ- 
Bea; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to 
the use set forth above, in c.]) ; κατὰ πίστιν, to awaken, 
produce faith, Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of xara fr. Hom., 
Hdt., Thuc., Xen., may be seen in Passow s. v. II. 3 p. 
1598^; [L. and S. s. v. B. III. 1]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
632; Kühner ii. p. 412) ; many refer to this head also 
xar ἀτιμίαν (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (376)]) λέγω, 
2 Co. xi. 21 (xara τὴν τιμὴν τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν, to the 
honor of God, Joseph. antt. 3, 11, 4) ; but see ἀτιμία. 
Iii. In Composition κατά denotes, 1. from, 
down from, from a higher to a lower place: with special 
ref. to the terminus from which, as karaBatvo, καταβιβάζω, 
etc. [cf. W. 431 (401 sq.)]; with more prominent ref. to 
the lower terminus (down), as karaBaAAo, karazaréc, etc. 
[ef. W.u.s.]; also of the situation or local position,- 
as κατάκειμαι. καθεύδω, κατατίθημι, καθίζω, etc. from top 
to bottom, metaph. of things done with care, thoroughly, 
as καταμανθάνω, καθοράω, etc. 2. in succession, in 
course: καθεξῆς ; one part after another, καταρτίζω, κατευ- 
diva, etc. S. under, underneath: καταχθόνιος ; the 
idea of putting under resides in verbs denoting victory, 
rule, etc., over others, as καταδυναστεύω, κατακυριεύω, κα- 
τεξουσιάζω, καταδουλόω ; likewise in verbs naming that 
with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed, 
ete., as κατακαλύπτω. karaMÜá(o, κατασφραγίζω, κατα- 
σκιάζω, καταισχύνω. (where the Germ. uses the prefix über 
[Eng. over], as überschatten, überdecken, or the syllable 
be, as beschatten, besiegeln); also in adjj. denoting an 
abundance of that with which a thing is filled up or as 
it were covered up; see below in κατείδωλος. 4. 


929 








καταβάλλω. 
like the Germ. ver-, zer-, it denotes separation, dissolu- 
tion, in verbs of wasting, dissolving, etc., as κατα- 
κόπτω, κατάγνυμι. κατακαίω, κατακλάω, καταλύω, κατακλύζω, 
5. i. q. after, behind: 
καταδιώκω, καταλείπω, κατακολουθέω. etc. 6. used 
of proportion and distribution, as κατακληροδοτέω,. 
κατακληρονομέω. etc. 7. of hostility, against ete.: 
καταδικάζω, κατακρίνω, καταλαλέω, καταγινώσκω, etc. Cf. 
Herm. ad Vig. p. 637 sqq. [On the constr. of verbs com- 
pounded w. κατά, see W. τι. s.; cf. B. 165 (143 sq.).] 

κατα-βαίνω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. κατέβαινον ; fut. καταβή-- 
cogar; 2 aor. κατέβην, impy. κατάβηθι (Mt. xxvii. 40; Lk. 
xix. 5; Jn.iv. 49; Acts x. 20) and κατάβα (Mk. xv. 30 
[RG (where L T Tr WH ptep. karaBás) ], see ἀναβαίνω): 
pf. καταβέβηκα; [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for TY; to go down, 
come down, descend ; DT of persons; eal prop.: 
absol, the place from which one has come down being 
evident from the context, καταβὰς ἔστη. Lk. vi. 17 (cf. 
12) ; xvii. 31 [foll. here by inf., so Mt. xxiv. 17]; Lk. xix. 
5sq.; Jn. v. 5; Acts xx. 10; Eph. iv. 10; foll. by ἀπό w. 
gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1; xiv. 29; xvii. 9 Rec. ; xxvii- 
40,42; Mk. ix. 9 [L Trmrg. WH txt. ἐκ]; xv. 30, 32: by 
ἐκ w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 GL'T Tr WH [see ek, I. 
3]; by eis w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [R GL br. Tr; 
al. om. εἰς ete.]; Acts viii. 38; [Ro.x. 7]; Eph.iv.9. b. 
to come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city 
of Jerusalem; also of celestial beings coming down to 
earth: absol, Mt. iii. 16; Lk.ii.51; x.31; Jn. iv. 47, 
49, 51; Acts [vii. 34]; viii. 15; x. 20; [xxiii. 10]; xxiv. 
1,22; foll. by azó w. gen. of the place, Mk. iii. 22; Lk. 
x. 30; Acts xxv. 7; 1 ΤῊ. ἵν. 16; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. 
xxviii. 2; Jn.i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33, 88 [R α; al. ἀπό], 41 
sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. ef. B. 297 (255)]; Rev. x. 
1; xviii.1; xx. 1. foll. by eis w. acc. of place, Lk. x. 30; 
xviii.14; Jn.ii. 12; Acts vil. 15; xiv. 25; xvi.8; xviii 
22; xxv.6; by ἐπί w. aec. of place, Jn. vi. 16; w. acc. 
of the pers, Mk. i. 10[R GL mrg.]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. i. 
33, 51 (52); by év w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [R L] (see 
ἐν, I. 7) ; by πρός w. ace. of pers, Acts x. 21; xiv. 11; 
contextually i. q. to be cast down, of the devil, Rev. xii. 
12. 2. of things, fo come (i. e. be sent) down: Acts 
x. 11 (Rec. adds ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν) ; xi. 5; foll. by ἀπό w. a gen. 
of pers., Jas. i. 17; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. iii. 
12; xxi. 2, 10; to come (i. e. fall) down: fr. the upper 
regions of the air; as βροχή: Mt. vii. 25, 27; λαῖλαψ. Lk. 
viii. 23; πῦρ ἀπὸ [Lchm. ἐκ] τοῦ οὐρ. Lk. ix. 54; ἐκ τοῦ 
οὐρ. εἰς τ. γῆν, Rev. xiii. 13; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρ. ἀπὸ τ. θεοῦ, Rev. 
xx. 9 [R G Tr]; χάλαζα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρ. ἐπί τινα, Rev. xvi. 21; 
θρόμβοι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the 
pass.]; of a way leading downwards, Acts viii. 26. 3. 
figuratively, καταβ. ἕως ἅδου, to (go i. e.) be cast down 
to the lowest state of wretchedness and shame: Mt. xi. 
23 L Tr WH; [Lk. x. 15 WH txt. Tr mrg. Comp.: συγ- 
karaBaíivo. | * 

'kara-BáAAo: Pass. and Mid. pres. ptep. καταβαλλό- 
pevos; 1 aor. pass. κατεβλήθην : [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. 
for "2n; 1. to cast down: τινά, pass., Rev. xii. 10 
Ree. ; to throw to the ground, prostrate: pass., 2 Co. iv. 9 


καταναλίσκω. καταφθείρω, etc. 


καταβαρέω 


(where the metaph. is taken from an athlete or combat- 
ant). 2. to put in a lower place: in the phrase 6e- 
μέλιον καταβάλλομαι, to lay (down) a foundation (Joseph. 
antt. 11, 4, 4; 15, 11, 3; Dion. H. antt. 3, 69; al.), Heb. 
1231 ise 

kara-Bapéo, -@: 1 aor. κατεβάρησα: prop. lo press down 
by an imposed weight; to weigh down; metaph. to bur- 
den: twa, any one, 2 Co. xii. 16. (Polyb., Diod., App., 
Lcian.) * 

κατα-βαρύνω : i. q. καταβαρέω (q. v.) ; pres. pass. ptep. 
xaraBapvvóuevos, Mk. xiv. 40 L'T Tr WH ; see Bapéw. 
(Sept.; Theophr. et al.) * 

kará-Bacis, -ews, 7, (καταβαίνω), [fr. Hdt. down], de- 
scent; a. the act of descending. b. the place 
of descent: τοῦ ὄρους, i.e. that part of the mountain 
where the descent is made, Lk. xix. 37; so Josh. x. 11 
Sept.; Diod. 4, 21; opp. to ἀνάβασις. the place of ascent, 
way up, 1 Mace. iii. 16, 24; Xen. Cyr. 7,2, 3. So Lat. 
«descensus; cf. Herzog on Sall. Cat. 57, ὃ." 

κατα βιβάζω: 1 fut. pass. καταβιβασθήσομαι; to cause 
to go down (Hdt. 1, 87; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 18; Sept. several 
times for Tn; to bring down, Bar. ii. 29); to cast 
down, thrust down: pass., ἕως ἅδου (see adns, 2), Mt. xi. 
23 RG T; Lk. x. 15 ['Tr mre. WH txt. καταβήσῃ (q. v. 
3)]: εἰς d8ov, Ezek. xxxi. 16.* 

κατα-βολή, -75, 7. (καταβάλλω, q. v.) ; 1. a throw- 
ing or laying down: τοῦ σπέρματος (sc. els τὴν μήτραν), 
the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the 
womb, Leian. amor. 19; Galen, aphorism. iv. $ 1; of the 
seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. $$ 22, 
45; σπέρματα τὰ eis γῆν ἢ μήτραν καταβαλλόμενα, Anto- 
nin. 4, 36; accordingly many interpret the words Σάρρα 
“δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβε in Heb. xi. 11, she 
received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs 
to the male καταβάλλειν τὸ σπέρμα, not to the female, 
this interpretation cannot stand [(acc. to the reading of 
WH mrg. αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ, Abr. remains the subj. of ἔλαβεν ; 
but see 2 below)]; cf. Bleek [and, on the other side, 
Kurtz] ad loc. 2. a founding (laying down a foun- 
dation): els karaB. σπέρματος, to found a posterity, Heb. 
xi. 11 [but cf. above] (τυραννίδος, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; ἅμα τῇ 
“πρώτῃ καταβολῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Plut. aquae et ignis comp. 
€.2). ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, from the foundation of the 
world: Mt. xiii. 35 [L T Tr WH om. κόσμου]; xxv. 34; 
Lk. xi. 50; Heb.iv.3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8; πρὸ 
καταβολῆς κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i.4; 1 Pet. i. 20.* 

κατα-βραβεύω, impv. 3 pers. sing. karaBpaBevéro ; (prop. 
βραβεύω to be an umpire in a contest, κατά SC. τινός, 
against one) ; to decide as umpire against one, to declare 
him unworthy of the prize; to defraud of the prize of vic- 
tory: twa, metaph., to deprive of salvation, Col. ii. 18, 
where cf. Meyer, [Bp. Lehtft., esp. Field, Otium Norv. 
Pars iii.]. (Eustath. ad Il. 1, 93, 33 (vss. 402 sq.) xara- 
BpaBever αὐτόν. ὥς φασιν of παλαιοί; but in the earlier 
Grk. writ. that have come down to us, it is found only 
in [pseudo-] Dem. adv. Mid. p. 544 end, where it is used 
of one who by bribing the judges causes another to be 
condemned.) * 


330 





καταγωνίζομαι 


καταγγελεύς, -éos, ὅ, (καταγγέλλω, q. v.), announcer 
(Vulg. annuntiator), proclaimer: with gen. of the obj., 
Acts xvii. 18. (Eccles. writ.) * 

κατ-αγγέλλω; impf. κατήγγελλον; 1 aor. κατήγγειλα; 
Pass., pres. καταγγέλλομαι; 2 aor. κατηγγέλην ; to an- 
nounce, declare, promulgate, make known; to proclaim 
publicly, publish: τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xiii. 5; xv. 36; ~ 
pass. Acts xvii. 13; ἔθη, Acts xvi. 21; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, 1 Co. 
ix. 14; τὴν ἀνάστασιν τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts iv. 2; τὰς ἡμέρας 
ταύτας, Acts iii. 24 GL T Tr WI; θεόν [al. 0], Acts xvii. 
23; ᾿Ιησοῦν, ib. 3; Christ, Phil. i. 16 (17), 18; Col. i. 28; 
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 38; xvi. 17; 1 Co. ii. 1; with the in- 
cluded idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising 
(Lat. praedicare) : ri, Ro. i. 8 [A.V. is spoken of]; 1 Co. 
xi.26. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 5, 38 
where it means to denounce, report, betray; twice in the 
O. T. viz. 2 Mace. viii. 36; ix. 17. [Cf. Westcott on 
1Jn.i.5.]) [Cowr.: zpo-karayyéAXo.] * 

κατα-γελάω. -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. κατεγέλων; to de- 
ride, [ A. V. laugh to scorn]: τινός, any one [ef. D. $ 132, 
15], Mt.ix. 24; Mk. v. 40; Lk. viii. 53. (From [Aeschyl. 
and] Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

κατα-γινώσκω ; pf. pass. ptep. κατεγνωσμένος ; to find 
Sault with, blame: κατεγνωσμένος ἦν, he had incurred the 
censure of the Gentile Christians; Luther rightly, es war 
Klage über ihn kommen [i. e. a charge had been laid against 
him; but al. he stood condemned, see Meyer or Ellic. 
in loc.; cf. Bttm. $ 134, 4, 8], Gal.ii. 11; to accuse, con- 
demn : τινός, any one, 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq., with which cf. Sir. 
xiy. 2 μακάριος, οὗ οὐ κατέγνω ἡ ψυχὴ avrov. (In these 
and other signif. in Grk. writ. fr. [ Aeschyl. and] Hat. 
down; [see Ellicott u. s.].) * 

κατ-άγνυμι : fut. κατεάξω ; 1 aor. κατέαξα (impv. κάταξον, 
Deut. xxxiii. 11) ; Pass., 2 aor. κατεάγην, whence subjunc. 
3 pers. plur. κατεαγῶσιν ; 1 aor. κατεάχθην in Sept. Jer. 
xxxi. (xlviii.) 25; (on the syllabic augment of these forms 
cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., cf. i. p. 323 sq.; Matthiae 
i. p. 520 sq.; W. $12, 2; [Curtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118; 
Veitch s. v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. Ixxix.]) ; 
fr. Hom. down; to break: ri, Mt. xii. 20; Jn. xix. 31-33. 
[Syn. see Schmidt ch. 115, 5 and cf. pyyvupe.]* 

κατα-γράφω : impf. 3 pers. sing. karéypadev; to draw 
(forms or figures), to delineate: Jn. viii. 6 cod. D ete. 
which T Tr WH (txt.) would substitute for RG ἔγραφεν. 
(Pausan. 1, 28, 2. Differently in other Grk. writ.) 
[Perh. it may be taken in Jn. 1:c. in a more general sense: 
to mark (cf. Pollux 9, 7, 104, ete.).]* 

κατ-άγω : 2 aor. κατήγαγον ; 1 aor. pass. κατήχθην ; Sept. 
for "n, to make to descend; to lead down, bring down: 
τινά, Acts xxii. 30; Ro. x. 6; τινά foll. by εἰς w. ace. of 
place, Acts ix. 30; xxiii. [15 L'T Tr WH], 20, 28; τινά 
foll. by πρός w. ace. of pers., Acts xxiii, 15 [R Ὁ]; τὸ πλοῖον 
ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν to bring the vessel (down from deep water) to 
the land, Lk. v. 11; κατάγεσθαι, to be brought (down) in 
a ship, to land, touch at: foll. by eis w. acc. of place, Acts 
xxi. 3 [LT Tr WH κατήλθομεν]; xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12; 
often so in Grk. writ.* 

κατ-αγωνίζομαι : deponent mid.; 1 aor. ka?pyerucá- 


καταδέω 


μην; 1. to struggle against (Polyb. 2, 42, 3, ete.). 2. 
to overcome (cf. Germ. niederkümpfen): Heb. xi. 33. 
(Polyb., Joseph., Leian., Plut., Aelian.) * 

κατα-δέω, -@: 1 aor. κατέδησα; fr. Hom. down; to bind 
up: τὰ τραύματα, Lk. x. 34. (Sir. xxvii. 21 acc. to the true 
reading τραῦμα.) 

κατά-δηλος, -ov, (δῆλος), thoroughly clear, plain, evident : 
Heb. vii. 15. ({Soph.], Hdt., Xen., Plat.,al.) [Cf. δῆλος, 
fin. ἐν 

κατα-δικάζω ; 1 aor. κατεδίκασα ; 1 aor. pass. κατεδικά- 
σθην; 1 fut. pass. καταδικασθήσομαι; to give judgment 
against (one), to pronounce guilty; to condemn; in class. 
Grk. [where it differs fr. κρίνειν in giving prominence 
to the formal and official as distinguished from the 
inward and logical judging (cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 18, 
6) ] it is foll. by the gen. of the pers., in the N. T. by the 
acc. [B. § 132, 16]: Mt. xii. 7; Lk. vi. 37 [here Tr mrg. 
the simple verb]; Jas. v.6; pass., Mt. xii. 37; [Lk.vi.37> 
(not Trmrg.)]. (Sept. Lam. iii. 35; Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 
8)* 

κατα-δίκη, -ης, 7; 1. damnatory sentence, condem- 
nation: Acts xxv. 15 LT Tr WH; ([Epicharm. in Ath. 
2, 3 p. 36 d.], Polyb., Plut., Iren. 1, 16, 3). 2. pen- 
alti, esp. a fine; (Thue., Dem., Lcian.).* 

κατα-διώκω: 1 aor. κατεδίωξα ; Sept. often for 17; to 
follow afier, follow up, (esp. of enemies [ Thuc. et al.]) ; 
in a good sense, of those in search of any one: τινά, Mk. 
1.36. (τὸ ἔλεός σου καταδιώξεταί με, Ps. xxii. (xxiii.) 6; 
οὐ κατεδίωξαν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, 1 S. xxx. 22; ὀπίσω τινός, to fol- 
low after one in order to gain his favor, Sir. xxvii. 17.) * 

κατα-δουλόω, -@; fut. καταδουλώσω; 1 aor. mid. κατε- 
δουλωσάμην ; (κατά under [see κατά, II. 3]); [fr. Hat. 
down]; to bring into bondage, enslave: τινά, Gal. ii. 4.1, T 
Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 20 [ef. W. 255 sq. (240) ]; mid. to en- 
slave to one’s self, bring into bondage to one’s self: Gal. 
ii. 4 RG* 

κατα-δυναστεύω ; pres. pass. ptep. καταδυναστευόμενος ; 
Sept. for na, p2xs etc.; with gen. of pers. [W. 206 
(193); B. 169 (147)], to exercise harsh control over one, 
to use one's power against one: Jas. ii. 6 [not Tdf. (see 
below)] (Diod. 13, 73) ; τινά, to oppress one (Xen. conv. 
5, 8; often in Sept.): Jas. ii. 6 Tdf.; pass. Acts x. 38.* 

κατάτθεμα, -ros, τό, 1. q. κατανάθεμα (q. v.), of which it 
seems to be a vulgar corruption by syncope [ef. Kou- 
manoudes, Συναγωγὴ λέξεων ἀθησαύρ. κτλ. s. V. κατάς]; à 
curse; by meton. worthy of execration, an accursed thing: 
Rey. xxii. 3 [ Rec. karavá&eua; cf. Just. M. quaest. et 
resp. 121 fin.]. Not found in prof. auth.* 

κατα-θεματίζω; (κατάθεμα, ἡ. v-); to call down direst evils 
on, to curse vehemently: Mt. xxvi. 74 (Rec. καταναθεματί- 
¢ew). (Iren. adv. haer. 1, 13, 4 and 16, 3.) * 

κατ-αισχύνω ; Pass. impf. κατῃσχυνόμην ; 1 aor. karg- 
σχύνθην ; fut. καταισχυνθήσομαι; Sept. chiefly for wan 
and v3n; asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. to dis- 
honor, disgrace: τὴν κεφαλήν, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (σποδῷ τὴν 
κεφαλήν, Joseph. antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame, 
make ashamed : rwá,1 Co. 1.27; xi. 22; pass. tobeashamed, 
blush with shame: Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vii. 14; ix. 45 1 Pet. 


931 





κατακληροδοτέω 


iii. 16; by a Hebr. usage one is said to be put to shame 
who suffers a repulse, or whom some hope has deceived ; 
hence ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, does not disappoint: Ro. ν. 5 
(cf. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6; xxiv. (xxv.) 2sq.; exviii. (exix.) 
116); pass, Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 6, (Is. xxviii. 
16; Sir. ii. 10).* 

κατα-καίω : impf. 3 pers. plur. karékatov; fut. karakava o; 
1 aor. inf. κατακαῦσαι; Pass., pres. κατακαίομαι; 2 aor. 
κατεκάην; 2 fut. κατακαήσομαι [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; 
WH. App. p. 1105]; 1 fut. κατακαυθήσομαι (Kühner i. 841; 
[Veitch s.v. καίω; B. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept. 
chiefly for 43£7; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see κατά, 
III. 4], consume by fire: τί, Mt. xiii. 30; Acts xix. 19; 
pass. 1 Co. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH 
εὑρεθήσεται, see εὑρίσκω, 1 a. fin.]; Rev. viii. 7; with πυρί 
added, Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 40 RL' T WH, but G Tr καίω; Lk. 
iii. 17, (Ex. xxix. 14; xxxii. 20 Alex., etc.; see καίω) ; 
ev πυρί (often so in Sept.), Rev. xvii. 16; xviii. 8. (καίω 
and κατακαίω are distinguished in Ex. iii. 2.) * 

kara-Kahvmrw : Sept. for 703; fr. Hom. down; to cover 
up [see κατά, III. 3]; Mid. pres. κατακαλύπτομαι, to veil 
or cover one's self: 1 Co. xi. 6; τὴν κεφαλήν, one's head, 
10: 7.5 

κατα-καυχάομαι, -ὥμαι, 2 pers. sing. κατακαυχᾶσαι (contr. 
fr. κατακαυχάεσαι) for the Attic κατακαυχᾷ (Ro. xi. 18; cf. 
W.§ 13, 2b.; [B. 42 (37); Soph. Lex., Introd. p. 40 sq.; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 sq.]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360), impv. 2 
pers. sing. karakavxó (Ro. xi. 18) ; (κατά against [cf. κατά, 
III. 7); prop. to glory against, to exult over, to boast one's 
self to the injury of (a person or a thing): τινός, Ro. xi. 
18; Tdf. in Jas. iii. 14; κατά twos, ibid. RG L Tr WH 
[B.185 (160); W. § 30, 9 b. (cf. 432 (402))]; ἔλεος (i. q. 
ὁ ἐλεῶν) κατακαυχᾶται κρίσεως, mercy boasts itself supe- 
rior to judgment, i. e. full of glad confidence has no fear 
of judgment, Jas. ii. 13. (Zech. x. 12; Jer. xxvii. (1.) 
10, 38; not found in prof. auth.) * 

κατά-κειμαι; impf. 3 pers. sing. κατέκειτο; (κεῖμαι; to 
lie [see xara, III. 1]); to have lain down i. e. to lie pros- 
trate ; a. of the sick [ef. colloq. ‘down sick*] (Hat. 7, 
229; Lcian. Icarom. 31; [Plut. vit. Cic. 43, 3]) : Mk. i. 
30; Jn.v.6; Acts xxviii. 8; foll by ἐπί w. dat. of the 
couch or pallet, Mk. ii. 4 RG Lmrg.; [Acts ix. 33 RG]; 
Lk.v.25 RL; ἐπί τινος, Acts ix. 33 [L T Tr WH]; ἐπί 
τι, Lk. v. 25 T Tr WH [B. § 147, 24 note; W. 408 (381) 
note]; ἐν w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 3. b. of those at 
meals, £o recline (Athen. 1, 42 p. 23 c.; Xen. an. 6, 1, 4; 
conv. 1, 14; Plat. conv. p. 177 d.; rep. ii. p. 372 d., ete. ; 
Diog. Laért. 7, 1, 19; see ἀνάκειμαι) : absol., Mk. xiv. 3; 
Lk. v. 29; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Mk. ii. 15; 1 Co. 
viii. 10; Lk. vii.37 L T Tr WH.* 

κατα-κλάω, -@: 1 aor. κατέκλασα; fr. Hom. down; to 
break in pieces (cf. Germ. zerbrechen [see xara, IIT. 4]) : 
τοὺς ἄρτους, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16.* 

κατα-κλείω: 1 aor. κατέκλεισα; fr. [Hdt.], Thue. and 
Xen. down; to shut up, confine: τινὰ ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ, Lk. 
jii. 20; ἐν (which Rec. om.) φυλακαῖς, Acts xxvi. 10 (Jer. 
xxxix. (xxxii.) 3).* 

κατα-κληροδοτέω, - (see κατά, ITI. 6) : 1 aor. karekArpo- 


κατακληρονομέω 


δότησα;: to distribute by lot; to distribute as an inheritance: 
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 19 Rec.; see the foll. word. (Deut. i. 
38; xxi. 16; Josh. xix. 51 Ald.,Compl.; 1 Macc. iii. 36, 
— in all with the var. κατακληρονομεῖν. Not found in 
prof. auth.) * 

κατα-κληρονομέω, -ὦ [see κατά, ITI. 6]: 1 aor. κατεκληρο- 
νόμησα; to distribute by lot, to distribute as an inheritance: 
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 19 GL'T Tr ΜῊ. (Num. xxxiv. 18; 
Deut. iii. 28; Josh. xiv. 1; Judg. xi. 24 Alex.; 1S. ii. 8; 
1 Esr. viii. 82. Also often intrans. fo receive, obtain, ac- 
quire as an inheritance; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21. 
Not found in prof. auth.) * 

κατα-κλίνω: 1 aor. κατέκλινα ; 1 aor. pass. κατεκλίθην ; 
fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. in ref. to eating, to make 
to recline: twa, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 T Tr WH], (ἐπὶ τὸ 
δεῖπνον, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 21); mid., with 1 aor. pass., to 
recline (at table): Lk. vii. 36 L'T Tr WH; xxiv. 30; eis 
τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν, Lk. xiv. 8, (eis τὸ ἐσθίειν, Judith xii. 15; 
els τὸ δεῖπνον, Joseph. antt. 6, 8, 1 [var.]).* 

κατα-κλύζω : 1 aor. pass. ptep. κατακλυσθείς ; fr. [Pind., 
Hdt.], Aeschyl. down; to overwhelm with water, to sub- 
merge, deluge, (cf. κατά, ITI. 4]: 2 Pet.ii.6. (Sept. sev- 
eral times for zbg.)* 

κατα-κλυσμός, -00, 6, (κατακλύζω), inundation, deluge: of 
Noah's deluge, Mt. xxiv. 38 sq.; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 
5. (Sept. for 5339; Plato, Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.) * 

κατ-ακολουθέω, -@; 1 aor. ptep. κατακολουθήσας ; to fol- 
low after [see κατά, III. 5]: Lk. xxiii. 55; τινί, Acts xvi. 
17. [Sept., Polyb., Plut., Joseph., al.] * 

κατα-κόπτω; 1. to cut up, cut to pieces, [see κατά, 
ILI. 4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, ete.; Hdt. 
et sqq. 2. to beat, bruise: ἑαυτὸν λίθοις, Mk. v. 
5; [al retain here the primary meaning, to cut, gash, 
mangle].* 

κατα-κρημνίζω : 1 aor. inf. κατακρημνίσαι; to cast down 
a precipice; to throw down headlong: Lk.iv.29. (2 Chr. 
xxv. 12; 2 Macc. xiv. 43; 4 Macc. iv. 25; Xen. Oyr. 1, 4, 
7; 8,3, 41; Dem. 446, 11; Diod. 4, 31; [Philo de agric. 
Noé § 15]; Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 2; 9, 9, 1.)* 

κατά-κριμα, -ros, τό, (xarakptvo), damnatory sentence, 
condemnation: Ro. v. 16 (on which see κρίμα, 2), ib. 18; 
viii. l. (κατακριμάτων ἀφέσεις, Dion. Hal. 6, 61.) * 

κατα-κρίνω; fut. κατακρινῶ: 1 aor. karékpwa ; Pass., pf. 
κατακέκριμαι; 1 aor. κατεκρίθην:; 1 fut. κατακριθήσομαι; to 
give judgment against (one [see κατά, III. 7]), to judge 
worthy of punishment, to condemn; a. prop.: Ro. 
viii. 34; τινά, Jn. viii. 10 sq.; Ro. ii. 1, where it is dis- 
ting. fr. κρίνειν, as in 1 Co. xi. 32; pass., Mt. xxvii. 3; 
Ro. xiv. 23; τινὰ θανάτῳ, to adjudge one to death, con- 
demn to death, Mt. xx. 18 [Tdf. eis @avarov]; Mk. x. 33, 
(κεκριμμένοι θανάτῳ, to eternal death, Barn. ep. 10, 5) ; 
τῇ καταστροφῇ, 2 Pet. ii. 6 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. xara- 
orpopn |, (the Greeks say xarakp. τινὰ θανάτου Or θάνα- 
Tov; cf. W. 210 (197 sq.); B. $ 132, 16; Grimm on Sap. 
ii. 20); w. the acc. and inf., red ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου, Mk. 
xiv. 64; simply, of God condemning one to eternal mis- 
ery: pass., Mk. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xi. 32; Jas. v. 9 Rec. b. 
improp. i.e. by one's good example to render another's 


932 





καταλαμβάνω 


wickedness the more evident and censurable: Mt. xii. 41 
sq.; Lk. xi. 31 sq.; Heb. xi. 7. In a peculiar use of the 
word, occasioned by the employment of the term xard- 
κριμα (in vs. 1), Paul says, Ro. viii. 3, ὁ θεὸς κατέκρινε τὴν 
ἁμαρτίαν ἐν τῇ σαρκί, 1. 6. through his Son, who partook 
of human nature but was without sin, God deprived sin 
(which is the ground of the κατάκριμα) of its power in 
human nature (looked at in the general), broke its 
deadly sway, (just as the condemnation and punishment 
of wicked men puts an end to their power to injure or 
do harm). [(From Pind. and Hat. down.)] * 

κατά-κρισις, -ews, 7, (κατακρίνων), condemnation: 2 Co. 
iii. 9 (see διακονία, 2 a.) ; πρὸς κατάκρισιν, in order to con- 
demn, 2 Co. vii. 3. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

Kara-kvpeóo ; 1 aor. ptep. κατακυριεύσας ; (κατά [q. v- 
IIT. 3] under) ; a. to bring under one's power, to sub- 
ject to one's self, to subdue, master: τινός, Acts xix. 16 
(Diod. 14, 64; for wad Gen. i. 28; Sir. xvii. 4). b. 
to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over: 
twos, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign 
government of God, Jer. iii. 14). * 

κατα-λαλέω, -@; to speak against one, to criminate, tra- 
duce: τινός (in class. Grk. mostly w. the acc.; in the 
Sept. chiefly foll. by κατά τινος). Jas. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 12; 
iii. 16 [here T Tr mrg. WH ἐν à καταλαλεῖσθε, wherein ye 
are spoken against ].* 

κατα-λαλιά, -ás, 7, (κατάλαλος. q. v.), defamation, evil- 
speaking: 2 Co. xii. 205 1 Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. cf. W. 
176 (166); D. 77 (67)]. (Sap.i.11; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
30,1; 35,5, and eecl. writ.; not found in class. Grk.) * 

κατά-λαλος, -ov, ὁ, α defamer, evil speaker, [.A. V. back- 
biters): Ro. 1.30. (Found nowhere else [Herm. sim. 6, 
5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7, 2; 9, 26, 7].)* 

κατα-λαμβάνω: 2 aor. κατέλαβον; pf. inf. κατειληφέναι; 
Pass, pf. 3 pers. sing. κατείληπται (Jn. viii. 4 as given 
in LT Tr WH txt.), pf. ptep. κατειλημμένος ; 1 aor. ka- 
τειλήφθην (Jn. viii. 4 R* 97 G) [on the augm. cf. W. 
8 12, 6], and κατελήφθην (Phil. iii. 12 RG), and xare- 
λήμφθην (ibid. L'T Tr WH; on the μ see s. v. M, i) ; 
Mid., pres. καταλαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. κατελαβόμην; cf. 
Kühner i. p. 856; [Veitch, s. v. λαμβάνω]: Sept. for 
run, 3B also for NY, ete.; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay 
hold of; i. e. 1. to lay hold of so as to make one’s : 
own, to obtain, attain to: w. the aec. of the thing; the 
prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; Phil. iii. 12 sq. ; τὴν δικαιο- 
σύνην, Ro. ix. 30; i.q. to make one's own, to take into 
one's self, appropriate: ἡ σκοτία αὐτὸ (i. e. τὸ φῶς) οὐ Ka- 
τέλαβεν, Jn. i. 5. 2. to seize upon, take possession of, 
(Lat.occupare); ^ a. of evils overtaking one (soin Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down): vwd, σκοτία, Jn. xii. 35; [so physi- 
cally, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the 
wicked with destruction, 1 Th. v. 4; of a demon about 
to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of 
Christ by his holy power and influence laying hold of 
the human mind and will, in order to prompt and govern 
it, Phil. iii. 12. 3. to detect, catch: twa ἔν τινι, in. 
pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH ἐπί v.]; with a ptep. indicating 
the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the minds 


καταλέγω 


to understand, perceive, learn, comprehend, (Plat. Phaedr. 
p. 250 d.; Axioch. p. 370a.; Polyb. 8, 4, 6; Philo, vita 
contempl. § 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46); Mid. (Dion. 
Hal. antt. 2, 66; [cf. W. 253 (238) ]), foll. by ὅτι, Acts 
iv. 13; x. 34; foll. by the acc. w. inf., Acts xxv. 25; foll. 
by indir. disc., Eph. iii. 18.* 


κατα-λέγω : pres. pass. impv. karaAeyéa 6o ; 1. prop. 
to lay down; mid. to lie down (Hom.). 2. to narrate 
at length, recount, set forth, [£r. Hom. on]. 3. to set 


down in a list or register, to enroll, (esp. soldiers; see 
Passow s. v. 5; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2 (yet the latter connect 
this use with the signif. to choose) ]) : of those widows 
who held a prominent place in the church and exercised 
a certain superintendence over the rest of the women, 
and had charge of the widows and orphans supported at 
publie expense, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 590 (549)]; cf. De Wette 
[or Ellicott] ad loc.* 

κατά-λειμμα, -ros, τό, (καταλείπω), @ remnant, remains : 
‘Ro. ix. 27 RG, where it is equiv. to a few, a small part ; 
see ὑπόλειμμας — (Sept., Galen.) * 

κατα-λείπω ; fut. καταλείψω ; 1 aor. κατέλειψα (in later 
auth.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 713 sqq. ; [Veitch s. v. λείπω; 
WH. App. p. 169 sq.]) ; 2 aor. κατέλιπον ; Pass., pres. κα- 
ταλείπομαι; pf. ptep. καταλελειμμένος [ W H. -A cp μένος, see 
(their App. p. 154°, and) s. v. I, «]; 1 aor. κατελείφθην; (see 
κατά, III. 5); Sept. for vnin, ww, 277; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to leave behind ; with acc. of place or pers. ; ει. 
i q. to depart from, leave, a pers. or thing :*Mt. iv. 13; 
xvi. 4; xxi. 17 ; Heb. xi. 27 ; metaph. εὐθεῖαν ὁδόν, to for- 
sake true religion, 2 Pet.ii. 15. pass. to be left: Jn. viii. 
9; i.q. to remain, foll. by ἐν with dat. of place, 1 Th. iii. 
1. b. i. q. to bid (one) to remain: twain a place, Acts 
xviii. 19; Tit. i. 5 [R G; al. ἀπολείπω]. c. to forsake, 
leave to one’s self a pers. or thing, by ceasing to care for 
it, to abandon, leave in the lurch: τὸν πατέρα k. τὴν μητέρα, 
Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x. 7; Eph. v. 31, fr. Gen. ii. 24; pass. to 
be abandoned, forsaken: eis ἄδου [or ἄδην (q. v. 2)], Acts 
ii. 31 Rec. (see ἐγκαταλείπω, 1); w.acc.of the thing, Mk. 
xiv. 52; Lk. [v. 28]; xv. 4; τὸν λόγον, to neglect the 
office of instruction, Acts vi. 2. d. to cause to be left 
over, to reserve, to leave remaining: ἐμαυτῷ, Ro. xi. 4 (1 
K. xix. 18); καταλείπεται, there still remains, ἐπαγγελία, a 
promise (to be made good by the event), Heb. iv. 1 (μάχη; 
Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 11; σωτηρίας ἐλπίς, Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 4); 
twa with inf. (to leave any business to be done by one 
alone), Lk. x. 40. e. like our leave behind, it is used 
of one who on being called away cannot take another 
with him: Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 14; spec. of the dying (to 
leave behind), Mk. xii. 19, [21 Lmrg.T Tr WH]; Lk. 
xx. 31, (Deut. xxviii. 54; Prov. xx. 7; and often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. Il. 24, 726; Od. 21,33 on). f. like our 
leave i. q. leave alone, disregard : of those who sail past a 
place without stopping, Acts xxi. 3. [Cowr.: éy-kara- 
Aetzo.]* 

κατα-λιθάζω : fut. καταλιθάσω ; (see kara, III. 3 [cf. W. 
102 (97)]); to overwhelm with stones, to stone: Lk. xx. 6. 
(Eccles. writ.) * 


κατ-αλλαγή, -5s, 7, (καταλλάσσω, 4. V-) ; 1. ez- 


938 








κατάλυμα 


change; of the business of money-changers, exchang- 
ing equiv. values [(Aristot., al.)]. Hence 2. ad- 
justment of a difference, reconciliation, restoration to favor, 
[fr. Aeschyl. on]; in the N. T., of the restoration of the 
favor of God to sinners that repent and put their trust 
in the expiatory death of Christ: 2 Co. v. 18sq.; w.the 
gen. of the one received into favor, τοῦ κόσμου (opp. to 
ἀποβολή), Ro. xi. 155 καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν, we received 
the blessing of the recovered favor of God, Ro. v. 11; w. 
the gen. of him whose favor is recovered, 2 Macc. v. 20. 
(Cf. Trench § Ixxvii.] * 

κατ-αλλάσσω; 1 aor. ptep. karaAAáfas; 2 aor. pass. 
κατηλλάγην ; prop. to change, exchange, as coins for others 
of equal value; hence to reconcile (those who are at vari- 
ance): τινάς, as τοὺς Θηβαίους καὶ τοὺς Πλαταιέας, Hat. 6, 
108; κατήλλαξάν σῴεας οἱ Πάριοι, 5, 29; Aristot. oecon. 
2, 15, 9 [p. 1348", 9] κατήλλαξεν αὐτοὺς πρὸς ἀλλήλους ; 
pass. τινί, to return into favor with, be reconciled to, one, 
Eur. Iph. Aul. 1157; Plat. rep. 8 p. 566 e.; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, 
Thue. 4, 59; but the Pass. is used also where only one 
ceases to be angry with another and receives him into 
favor; thus καταλλαγείς, received by Cyrus into favor, 
Xen. an. 1, 6, 1; καταλλάττεται πρὸς αὐτήν, regained her 
favor, Joseph. antt. 5, 2, 8; and, on the other hand, God 
is said καταλλαγῆναί τινι, with whom he ceases to be of- 
fended, to whom he grants his favor anew, whose sins he 
pardons, 2 Mace. i. 5; vii. 33; viii. 29; Joseph. antt. 6, 
7, 4 cf. 7, 8, 4, (so ἐπικαταλλάττεσθαί τινι, Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 48, 1). In the N. T. God is said καταλλάσσειν 
ἑαυτῷ twa, to receive one into his favor, [ A. V. reconcile 
one to himself], 2 Co. v. 18 sq. (where in the added pteps. 
two arguments are adduced which prove that God has 
done this: first, that he does not impute to men their 
trespasses; second, that he has deposited the doctrine 
of reconciliation in the souls of the preachers of the 
gospel) ; καταλλαγῆναι τῷ θεῷ, to be restored to the favor 
of God, to recover God's favor, Ro. v. 10 [but see ἐχθρός, 
2]; καταλλάγητε τῷ θεῷ, allow yourselves to be recon- 
ciled to God; do not oppose your return into his favor, 
but lay hold of that favor now offered you, 2 Co. v. 20. 
of a woman: καταλλαγήτω τῷ dr»Ópi,let her return into 
harmony with [ A. V. be reconciled to] her husband, 1 Co. 
vii. 11. Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [who 
shows (in opp. to T'ttmann, N. T. Syn. i. 102, et al.) that 
καταλλάσσω and διαλλάσσω are used promiscuously ; the 
prepp- merely intensify (in slightly different modes) the 
meaning of the simple verb, and there is no evidence 
that one compound is stronger than the other; διαλλ. 
and its derivatives are more common in Attic, karaAA. 
and its derivatives in later writers. COMP.: dzo-karaA- 
λάσσω.] * 

κατά-λοιπος, -ov, (Aourds), lef? remaining: [oi κατάλοι- 
ποι T. ἀνθρώπων A. V. the residue of men], Acts xv. 17. 
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sept.) * 

κατά-λυμα, -7os, τό. (fr. καταλύω, c ; q.v.), an inn, lodg- 
ing-place: Lk. ii. 7 (for no, Ex. iv. 24); an eating-room, 
dining-room, [ A.V. guest-chamber]: Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 
11; in the same sense for naw), 1S. ix. 22.- (Polyb. 2, 


καταλύω 


86,1 [plur.]; 32,19, 2; Diod. 14, 93, 
93 (89)].)* 

κατα-λύω ; fut.xata\vow; 1 aor. κατέλυσα; 1 aor. pass. 
κατελύθην ; 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. καταλυθήσεται ; to dis- 
solve, disunite, [see xara, III. 4] ; a. (what has been 
joined together) i. q. to destroy, demolish: λίθους [ A. V. 
throw down], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi. 6; τὸν 
ναόν, Mt. xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58; xv. 29; Acts 
vi. 14; οἰκίαν, 2 Co. v. 1; univ. opp. to οἰκοδομεῖν, Gal. ii. 
18 (2 Esdr. v. 12; Hom. Il. 9, 24sq.; 2, 117; τεύχη, Eur. 
Tro. 819; γέφυραν, Hdian. 8, 4, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]). b. 
metaph. to overthrow i. e. render vain, deprive of success, 
bring to naught: τὴν βουλὴν ἢ τὸ ἔργον, Acts v. 38 (ras 
ἀπειλάς, 4 Mace. iv. 16); τινά, to render fruitless one's 
desires, endeavors, ete. ibid. 39 G L T Tr WH (Plat. 
lege. 4 p. 714 c.) ; to subvert, overthrow: τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ 
(see ἀγαθός, 2), Ro. xiv. 20. As in class. Grk. fr. Hdt. 
down, of institutions, forms of government, laws, ete., to 
deprive of force, annul, abrogate, discard: τὸν νόμον, Mt. 
v. 17 (2 Mace. ii. 22; Xen. mem. 4, 4, 14; Isocr. panem 
$55; Philost. v. Apoll. 4, 40). c. of travellers, to halt 
on & journey, to put up, lodge, (the fig. expression origi- 
nating in the circumstance that, to put up for the night, 
the straps and packs of the beasts of burden are unbound 
and taken off; or, perh. more correctly, fr. the faet that 
the traveller's garments, tied up when he is on the jour- 
ney, are unloosed at its end; cf. ἀναλύω, 2): Lk. ix. 12; 
xix. 7; so in Grk. writ. fr. Thue., Xen., Plat. down; 
Sept. for n5, Gen. xix. 2; xxiv. 23, 25, etc.; Sir. xiv. 25, 
27; xxxvi. 31; [cf. B. 145 (127)].* 

κατα-μανθάνω: 2 aor. κατέμαθον; met with fr. Hdt. 
down; esp. freq. in Xen. and Plat.; to learn thoroughly 
[see xara, III. 1], examine carefully; to consider well: τί 
fol. by πῶς, Mt. vi. 28. (Gen. xxiv. 21; Job xxxv. 5, 
55 κάλλος ἀλλότριον, ibid. 8.) * 

κατα-μαρτυρέω, -à; 10 bear witness against: τί twos, 
testify a thing against one [B. 165 (144), cf. 178 (154)], 
Mt.xxvi.62; xxvii. 13; Mk. xiv. 60, and RG in xv. 4. 
(1 K. xx. (xxi.) 10, 13; Job xv. 6; among Grk. writ. esp. 
by the Attic orators.) * 

kata-pévw; (0 remain permanently, to abide: Acts i. 13. 
(Num.xxii.8; Judith xvi. 20; Arstph., Xen., Philo de 
gigant. § 5.) * 

καταμόνας, and (as it is now usually written [so L T 
Tr WH ]) separately, κατὰ μόνας (sc. χώρας). apart, alone: 
Mk.iv.10; Lk.ix. 18. (Thue. 1,32. 37; Xen. mem. 3, 
7, 4; Joseph. antt. 18, 3, 4; Sept. for 773 and 1125, Ps. 
iv. 9; Jer. xv. 17, ete.) * 

κατ-ανάτθεμα, -ros, τό, once in Rev. xxii. 3 Rec.; see 
ἀνάθεμα and κατάθεμα. Not found in prof. auth.* 

κατ-ανα-θεματίζω ; (κατανάθεμα, q. V.); 1. q. καταθεμα- 
τίζω (q. ν.) : Mt. xxvi. 74 Rec. (Just. M. dial. c. Tr. c. 
47, and other eccl. writ.) * 

kat-av-adlokw; (see ἀνηλίσκω, and xara, III. 4); to 
consume: of fire, Heb. xii. 29 after Deut. iv. 24; ix. 8. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down; Sept. several 
times for box. Js. 


kara-vapkáo, -: fut. καταναρκήσω; 1 aor. κατενάρκησα; 


5; [al.; cf. W. 25, 


ete.; παρθένον, Sir. ix. 


884 





κατανύσσω 


(vapkae to become numb, torpid; in Sept. trans. to 
affect with numbness, make torpid, Gen. xxxii. 25, 32 
Job xxxiii. 19; fr. νάρκη torpor); prop. to cause to grow 
numb or torpid ; intrans. to be torpid, inactive, to the det- 
riment of one; to weigh heavily upon, be burdensome to : 
τινός (gen. of pers.), 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); xii. 13 sq. (Hesych. 
κατενάρκησα - κατεβάρησα [al. é8ápvva]) ; Jerome, ad Al- 
gas. 10 [ (iv. 204 ed. Benedict.) ], discovers a Cilicism in 
this use of the word [cf. W. 27]. Among prof. auth. 
used by Hippocr. alone, and in a pass. sense, to be quite 
numb or stiff.” 

κατα-νεύω : 1 aor. κατένευσα; fr. Hom. down; to nod 
to, make a sign to: τινί, foll. by τοῦ w. aor. inf., to indi- 
cate to another by a nod or sign what one wishes him to 
do [ A. V. beckoned to . . . that they should come, ete.], Lk. 
Xf 

κατα-νοέω, -ὦ ; impf. κατενόουν ; 1 aor. κατενόησα; fr. 
Hdt. down; Sept. here and there for janv 0°37, 
nw; 1. to perceive, remark, observe, understand : ri, 
Mt. vii.3; Lk. vi. 41; xx. 23; Acts xxvii. 39. 2. to 
consider attentively, fix one's eyes or mind upon: τί, Lk. 
xii. 24, 27; Acts xi. 6; Ro.iv.19; w. the ace. of the thing 
omitted, as being understood fr. the context, Acts vii. 31 
sq.; τινά, Heb. iii. 1; x. 245 Jas. i. 23 sq.” 

κατ-αντάω, -G: 1 aor. κατήντησα; pf. κατήντηκα (1 Co. 
x. 11 LT Tr WH); to come to, arrive at; a. prop.: 
foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts xvi. 1; xviii. 19, 24 ; 
xxi 7; xxv.13; xxvii. 12; xxviii. 13, (2 Macc. iv. 44); 
ἀντικρύ τινος, to a place over against, opposite another, 
Acts xx. 155 ets twa rà τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν, i. e. 
whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Co. x. 
11. b. metaph. εἴς τι, like the Lat. ad aliquid per- 
venio, i. e. to attain to a thing: Acts xxvi. 7; Eph. iv. 13; 
Phil.iii.11; καταντᾷ τι εἴς τινα, to one, that he may be- 
come partaker of it, 1 Co. xiv. 36. (Polyb. Diod.; 
eccl. writ.) * 

κατά-ννξις, -eos, 7, (κατανύσσω, q. V.) 5 1. a prick- 
ing, piercing, (Vulg. compunctio). 2. severe sorrow, 
extreme grief. 3. insensibility or torpor of mind, 
such as extreme grief easily produces; hence πνεῦμα 
κατανύξεως, a spirit of stupor, which renders their souls 
torpid, i.e. so insensible that they are not affected at 
all by the offer made them of salvation through the Mes- 
siah, Ro. xi. 8 fr. Is. xxix. 10 Sept. (where the Hebr. 
npn rm, a spirit of deep sleep, is somewhat loosely so 
rendered ; οἶνος κατανύξεως for nnn p» wine which 
produces dizziness, reeling, Germ. Taumelwein, Ps. lix. 
(Ix.) 5). Notfound in prof. auth. Cf. Fritzsche's full 
discussion of the word in his Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 558 
sqq.; [ef. W. 94 (90); Bp. ZgAtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete. 
p. 139 note].* 

xara-vócco : 2 aor. pass. κατενύγην [B. 63 (55)]; to 
prick, pierce; metaph. to pain the mind sharply, agitate it 
vehemently: used esp. of the emotion of sorrow; κατενύγη- 
cav τῇ καρδίᾳ (τὴν καρδίαν LT Tr WH), they were smit- 
ten in heart with poignant sorrow [A. V. lit. pricked], 
Acts ii. 37 (karavevvypevov τῇ καρδίᾳ, Ps. cviii. (cix.) 16; 
add, Gen. xxxiv. 7; Sir. xii. 12; xiv. 1, etc.; of lust, Sus. 


καταξιόω 


10; of violent pity, Joann. Malal. chronogr. 1, 18, ed. 


Bonn. p. 460). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 558 sqq.* 

κατ-αξιόω, -à: 1 aor. pass. karnEw@Onv; to account worthy, 
judge worthy : τινά τινος, one of a thing, 2 ΤῊ. i. 5 (Polyb. 
1, 23, 3, etc.; Diod. 2, 60; Joseph. antt. 15, 3, 8) ; foll. 
by an inf, Lk. xx. 35; xxi. 36 [T Tr txt. WH κατισχύ- 
onre]; Acts v. 41, (Dem.1 383, 11 [cf. Plat. Tim. 30 c. ]).* 

kara-raréo, -6; fut. καταπατήσω (Mt. vii. 6 LT Tr 
WH); 1 aor. κατεπάτησα; Pass, pres. karazarobpat ; 
1 aor. κατεπατήθην ; to tread down [see κατά, III. 1], tram- 
ple under foot: ri and τινά, Mt. v. 13; vii. 6; Lk. viii. 5; 
xii. 1, (Hdt. et sqq.; Sept.); metaph., like the Lat. con- 
culco, to trample on i. q. to treat with rudeness and insult, 
2 Macc. viii. 2, etc.; cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. p. 61 [where 
its use to denote desecration is illustrated]; to spurn, 
treat with insulting neglect: τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. x. 29; 
ὅρκια, Hom. Il. 4, 157; τοὺς νόμους, Plat. lege. 4, 714a.; τὰ 
γράμματα, Gorg. p. 484 ἃ.; τοὺς λόγους, Epict. 1, 8, 10; 
τὰ ῥήματά μου, Job vi. 3 Aq.* 

κατά-παυσις, -eos, 7, (karazavo, q. V-); 1. actively, 
a putting to rest: τῶν πνευμάτων, a calming of the winds, 
Theophr. de ventis 18; τυράννων, removal from office, 
Hat. 5, 38. 2. In the Grk. Scriptures (Sept. sev- 
eral times for 1132) intrans. a resting, rest: ἡμέρα τῆς 
καταπ. the day of rest, the sabbath, 2 Mace. xv. 1; τόπος 
τῆς καταπ. μου, where I may rest, Acts vii. 49. Metaph. 
ἡ κατάπ. Tov θεοῦ, the heavenly blessedness in which God 
dwells, and of which he has promised to make persever- 
ing believers in Christ partakers after the toils and trials 
of life on earth are ended: Heb. iii. 11, 18; iv. 1, 3, 5, 
10 sq., (after Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11, where the expression 
denotes the fixed and tranquil abode promised to the 
Israelites in the land of Palestine).* 

kara-raóo: laor. κατέπαυσα; (xara, like the Germ. 
nieder, down) ; 1. trans. (Sept. for rv an, maw) 
to make quiet, to cause to be at rest, to grant rest; i. e. a. 
lo lead to a quiet abode: twa, Heb. iv. 8 (Ex. xxxiii. 14; 
Deut. iii. 20; v. 33; xii. 10; Josh.i. 13, 15; 2 Chr. xiv. 
7; xxxli. 225 Sir, xxiv. 11): b. to still, restrain, to 
cause (one striving to do something) /o desist: foll. by 
τοῦ μή and an inf, Acts xiv. 18 [ef. B. § 140, 16 β.; 
W. 325 (305)]. 2. intrans. to rest, take rest (Hebr. 
Tm, NAW): ἀπό τινος, Heb. iv. 4, 10, (Gen. ii. 2). In the 
same and other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.* 

κατα-πέτασμα, -ros, τό, (καταπετάννυμι to spread out 
over, to cover), an Alex. Grk. word for παραπέτασμα, 
which the other Greeks use fr. Hdt. down; a veil spread 
out, a curtain, —the name given in the Grk. Scriptures, 
as well as in the writings of Philo and Josephus, to the 
two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem (τὰ xarazerá- 
σματα, 1 Mace. iv. 51; [yet cf. Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, ii. 611]): one of them (Hebr. 355) at the 
entrance of the temple separated the Holy place from 
the outer court (Ex. xxvi.37; xxxviii. 18; Num. iii. 26; 
Joseph. b. 1. 5, 5, 4; it is called also τὸ κάλυμμα by the 
Sept. and Philo, Ex. xxvii. 16; Num.iii. 25; Philo, vit. 
Moys. iii. $$ 5 and 9), the other veiled the Holy of holies 
from the Holy place (in Hebr. the 253; ἐνδότερον xa- 


935 





κατάρα. 


ταπέτασμα;, Joseph. antt. 8,3, 3; τὸ ἐσώτατον καταπέτασμα: 
Philo de gig. § 12; by the Sept. and Philo this is called 
pre-eminently τὸ καταπέτασμα, Ex. xxvi. 31 sqq.; Lev. 
xxi. 23; xxiv. 3; Philo, vit. Moys. u. s.). This latter 
καταπέτασμα is the only one mentioned in the N. T.: τὸ: 
Mk. xv. 38; Lk. 
τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα, Heb. ix. 3; τὸ ἐσώτε- 
pov τοῦ καταπετάσματος (cf. Lev. xvi. 2, 12, 15; Ex. xxvi. 
33) the space more inward than the veil, equiv. to ‘the 
space within the veil,’ i.e. the Holy of holies, ficura- 
tively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Heb. vi. 
19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is 
called καταπέτασμα, in (Heb.) x. 20, because, as the veil 
had to be removed in order that the high-priest might 
enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the 
body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the 
cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellow- 
ship of God in heaven.* 

κατα-πίνω ; 2 aor. κατέπιον; 1 aor. pass. κατεπόθην; [fr. 
Hes. and Hdt. down]; prop. to drink down, swallour 
down: Mt. xxiii. 24; Rev. xii. 16; to devour, 1 Pet. v. 8 
[here Tr -riew by mistake; (see πίνω, init.)]; to swallow 
up, destroy, pass., 1 Co. xv. 54; 2 Co. v. 4; Heb. xi. 29; 
trop. λύπῃ καταποθῆναι, to be consumed with grief, 2 Co. 
TEE 

κατα-πίπτω; 2 aor. κατέπεσον; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall 
down: Acts xxviii. 6; εἰς τὴν γῆν, Acts xxvi. 14; ἐπὶ Thy 
πέτραν, Lk. viii. 6 T Tr WH.* 

κατα-πλέω : 1 aor. κατέπλευσα ; [fr. Hom. on]; fo sail 
down from the deep sea to land; to put in: eis τὴν χώραν, 
Lk. viii. 26.* 

κατα-πονέω, -@: pres. pass. ptep. καταπονούμενος ; prop. 
to tire down with toil, exhaust with labor; hence to afflict 
or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly: 
τινά, in pass, Acts vii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis- 
tressed]. (3 Mace. ii. 2, 13; Hippoer., Theophr., Polyb.,. 
Diod., Joseph., Aelian., al.) * 

κατα-ποντίζω : Pass., pres. καταποντίζομαι; 1 aor. kare- 
ποντίσθην ; to plunge or sink in the sea; Pass. in the in- 
trans. sense, to sink, to go down: Mt. xiv. 30; a grievous 
offender for the purpose of killing him, to drown: pass. 
Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph. 
antt. 10, 7, 5; 14, 15, 10: c. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al.; Sept. ; 
[ef. W. 24; Lob. Phryn. p. 361 note].) * 

kar-ápa, -as, 7, (kara and apa, cf. Germ. Ver fluchung, 
Verwiinschung, [cf. κατά, III. 4]); Sept. chiefly for 
mop; an execration, imprecation, curse: opp. to εὐλογία 
(q. v.), Jas. iii. 10; γῆ κατάρας ἐγγύς, near to being cursed 
by God i.e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu- 
sion is to Gen. iii. 17 sq.), Heb. vi. 8; ὑπὸ κατάραν εἶναι, 
to be under a eurse i. e. liable to the appointed penalty 
of being cursed, Gal. iii. 10; é£ayopá(ew τινὰ ἐκ τῆς x. to 
redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse, 
ib. 13; τέκνα κατάρας, men worthy of execration, 2 Pet. 
ii. 14 ; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse 
is exhibited, i. e. undergoing the appointed penalty of 
cursing, Gal.iii.13; ἐγὼ κατάρα ἐγενήθην, Protev. Jac. 
c.3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) * 


καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ, Mt. xxvii. 51; 
xxiii. 45 ; 


KaTapaopat 


κατ-αράομαι, -ὥῶμαι; (dep. mid. fr. κατάρα) ; 1 aor. 2 pers. 
sing. κατηράσω; [pf. pass. ptep. κατηραμένος (see below) ]; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for 79) and 378; to curse, 
.doom, imprecate evil on: (opp. to εὐλογεῖν) absol. Ro. xii. 
14; w. dat. of the obj. (as in the earlier Grk. writ.), Lk. 
vi. 28 Rec. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. 65] 66; [Joseph. e. Ap. 
1, 22, 16]) ; w. ace. of the obj. (as often in the later Grk. 
writ., as Plut. Cat. min. 32, 1 var. [B. $ 133, 9; W. 222 
(208)]), Mt. v. 44 Rec. ; Lk. vi. 28 GLtxt. T Tr WH; 
Jas. iii. 9; a tree, i. e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. xi. 21 
(see Heb. vi. 8 in κατάρα). pf. pass. ptep. κατηραμένος 
in a pass. sense, accursed (Sap. xii. 11; [2 K. ix. 34]; 
Plut. Lue. 18; and xexarnpap. Deut. xxi. 23; [Sir iii. 
16]): Mt. xxv. 41 (also occasionally kekarápavrat, Num. 
xxii. 6; xxiv. 9; [but Tdf. etc. -77p-; see Veitch s. v. 
:apáopat]).* 

κατ-αργέω, -à; fut. καταργήσω; 1 aor. κατήργησα; pi. κα- 
thpynka; Pass., pres. καταργοῦμαι; pf. κατήργημαι; 1 aor. 
κατηργήθην: 1 fut. καταργηθήσομαι; causative of the verb 
dpyée, equiv. to ἀργὸν (i. e. depyov [on the accent cf. 
Chandler § 444]) wo; freq. with Paul, who uses it 25 
times [elsewhere in N. T. only twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept. 
4 times (2 Esdr., see below) ]; 1. to render idle, un- 
employed, inactive, inoperative : τὴν γῆν, to deprive of its 
strength, make barren [A. V. cumber], Lk. xiii. 7; to 
cause a pers. or a thing to have no further efficiency ; to 
deprive of force, influence, power, [A. V. bring to nought, 
make of none effect]: ri, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; τινά, 1 Co. 
ii. 6 [but in pass.]; diabolie powers, 1 Co. xv. 24 (Justin, 
apol. 2, 6) ; Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8; τὸν θάνατον, 2 'Tim. i. 
10 (Barnab. ep. 5, 6) ; τὸν διάβολον, Heb. ii. 14; pass. 1 
Co. xv. 26; to make void, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, Gal. iii. 17; 
pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to, 
do away with, annul, abolish: τί, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11; 
“τὸν νόμον, Ro. iii. 31; Eph.ii. 15; τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ ἀνόμου, 
Barnab. ep. 15, 5; pass. πόλεμος καταργεῖται ἐπουρανίων 
καὶ ἐπιγείων, lgnat. ad Eph. 13, 2; ἵνα καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας. that the body of sin might be done away, 
i. e. not the material of the body, but the body so far 
forth as it is an instrument of sin; accordingly, that the 
body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6. 
Pass. to cease, pass away, be done away: of things, Gal. 
v. 11; 1 Co. xiii. 8, 10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 13 sq.; of persons, 
foll. by ἀπό twos, to be severed from, separated from, dis- 
charged. from, loosed from, any one; to terminate all in- 
tercourse with one [a pregn. constr., cf. W. 621 (577); 
B. 322 (271)]: ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. cf. 
W.§ 40,5 b.]; ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου, Ro. vii. [2 (R™ om. z. v.) ], 6. 
The word is rarely met with in prof. auth., as Eur. Phoen. 
753 karapy. χέρα, to make idle, i. e. to leave the hand 
unemployed; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. kargpyrkevat] τοὺς 
καιρούς, in the sense of to let slip, leave unused; in Sept. 
four times for Chald. 5:53, to make to cease, i. e. restrain, 
check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 5; vi. 8.* 

κατ-αριθμέω, - : fo number with: pf. pass. ptep. κατη- 
ριθμημένος ἐν (for Rec. σὺν) ἡμῖν, was numbered among 
us, Actsi.17; cf. 2 Chr. xxxi. 19; [Plat. politicus 266 a. 
ete. ].* 


336 





κατασκευάζω 


kat-apritw; fut. καταρτίσω (1 Pet. v. 10 L'T Tr WH 
[B. 37 (32); but Rec. καταρτίσαι, 1 aor. optat. 3 pers. 
sing.]); 1 aor. inf. καταρτίσαι; Pass., pres. καταρτίζομαι; 
pf. κατήρτισμαι; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. κατηρτίσω; prop. 
to render ἄρτιος i. e. fit, sound, complete, [see xara, III. 2]; 
hence a. to mend (what has been broken or rent), 
to repair: rà δίκτυα, Mt. iv. 21; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these 
exx. to next head]; i. q. (o complete, ra ὑστερήματα, 1 Th. 
iii. 10. b. /o fit out, equip, pul in order, arrange, ad- 
just: robs αἰῶνας, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, for 
1.31, ἥλιον, Ps. Ixxiii. (Ixxiv.) 10; σελήνην, Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 38); σκεύη κατηρτισμένη els ἀπώλειαν, of men 
whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es- 
cape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loc.], Ro. 
ix. 22 (πλοῖα, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the 
mind: κατηρτισμένος ὡς ete. so instructed, equipped, as 
ete. [cf. D. 311 (267); but al. take kargpr. as a cireum- 
stantial ptep. when perfected shall be as (not * above") 
his master (see Mey. in loc.) ; on this view the passage 
may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40; mid. to 
fit or frame for one’s self, prepare: αἶνον, Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. 
Ps. viii. 3; Sept. for 127) ; σῶμα, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi- 
cally, to strengthen, perfect, complete, make one what he 
ought to be: τινά, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above) ]; Gal. vi. 1 
(of one who by correction may be brought back into the 
right way); pass. 2 Co. xiii. 11; τινὰ ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ [(T 
WH om.)] ἀγαθῷ, Heb. xiii. 21; κατηρτισμένοι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ 
νοΐ κτὰ. of those who have been restored to harmony 
(so πάντα εἰς τωὐτό, Hdt. 5, 106; ἵνα καταρτισθῇ ἡ στασιά- 
ζουσα πόλις. Dion. Hal. antt. 3,10), 1 Co. i. 10. [Comp.: 
mpo-karapriCo. ] * 

κατ-άρτισις, -eos, 7), (καταρτίζω, α- v.), a strengthening, 
perfecting, of the soul, (Vulg. consummatio) : 2 Co. xiii. 
9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2, 
7 [var.]; Alex. 7, ΤῸΝ 

καταρτισμός, -0v, 6, i. q. κατάρτισις, q. V.: τινὸς εἴς τι, 
Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)]* 

kata-celw: 1 aor. κατέσεισα; 1. to shake down, 
throw down, [ef. κατά, III. 1; (fr. Thuc. on)]. 2 
to shake: τὴν χεῖρα, to make a sign by shaking (i. e. rap- 


idly waving) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaium $ 28; ras 


χεῖρας, ib. de Josepho § 36); of one about to speak who 
signals for silence, Acts xix. 33; hence simply κατασείειν 
τινί, to make a sign, to signal with the hand to one, Xen. 
Cyr. 5, 4. 4; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a disre- 
gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument. dat. τῇ 
χειρί was added, Polyb. 1, 78, 3; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 48; 
so of one about to make an address: Acts xii. 17; xiii. 
16; xxi. 40; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2.* 
kora-ckámro: 1 aor. κατέσκαψα; pf. pass. ptep. kare- 
cxappévos; to dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy: τί, 
to. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. xix. 10; pass. Acts xv. 16 [Β GL], fr. 
Amos ix. 11 [(but see καταστρέφω)}.- (Tragg., Thuc., 
Xen., sqq.)-* 
xara-ckeváto : fut. κατασκευάσω ; 1 aor. κατεσκεύασα; 
Pass., pres. κατασκευάζομαι; pf. ptep. κατεσκευασμένος; 
1 aor. κατεσκευάσθην; to furnish, equip, prepare, make 
ready ; a. of one who makes any thing ready for a 


, 
KATAaCKnVOW 


pers. or thing: τὴν ὁδόν, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 
27; pf. pass. ptep. prepared in spirit, Lk. i. 17 (Xen. 
Cyr. 5, 5, 10). b. of builders, to construct, erect, 
"with the included idea of adorning and equipping with 
all things necessary, (often so in Grk. auth.; cf. Bleek, 
Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 398 sq.): οἶκον, Heb. iii. 3 sq. ; 
κιβωτόν, Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 20; σκηνήν, Heb. ix. 2, 6; 
Sept. for 873, Is. xl. 28; xliii. 7.* 

κατα-σκηνόω, -à, inf. -cxnvoiv (Mt. xiii. 32 LT Tr WH, 
Mk. iv. 32 WH, see dzo80exaróo; [but also -σκηνοῦν, Mt. 
le. RG; Mk.l.c. RGL TT Tr; cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 123]); 
fut. κατασκηνώσω; 1 aor. κατεσκήνωσα; prop. to pitch 
one's tent, to fix one's abode, to dwell: ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 
26 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9; foll. by év w. dat. of place, Mt. 
xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; ὑπό w. acc. of place, Mk. iv. 32. 
(Xen., Polyb. Diod.. al; κατεσκήνωσεν 6 θεὸς τῷ ναῷ 
τούτῳ, Joseph. antt. 3, 8,5; add, Sir. xxiv. 4, 8; Sept. 
mostly for 130.) * 

κατα-σκήνωσις. -ews, 7, (κατασκηνόω, q. v.), prop. the 
pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp- 
ment, abode: of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 
58; (for 1303, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; cf. Sap. ix. 8; Tob. i. 
-4; Polyb. 11, 26, 5; Diod. 17, 95).* 

κατα-σκιάζω ; 10 overshadow, cover with shade, [see κατά, 
IIL.3]: τί, Heb.ix.5. (Hes., Eur., Plato, al.; κατασκιάω, 
Hom. Od. 12, 436.)* 

κατα-σκοπέω, -@: 1 aor. inf. κατασκοπῆσαι; to inspect, 
view closely, in order to spy out and plot against: rt, Gal. 
ii. 4; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2 S. 


x.3; Josh. ii. 2 sq.; 1 Chr. xix. 3; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623); 


so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen. 
-down).* 

κατά-σκοπος, -ov, 6, (κατασκέπτομαι [1]. q- κατασκοπέω ]); 
an inspector, a spy: Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xlii. 9,11; 1 S. 
xxvi. 4; 1 Mace. xii. 26; in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

κατα-σοφίζομαι: 1 aor. ptep. κατασοφισάμενος ; (co- 
-pi¢w); dep. mid., in prof. auth. sometimes also pass.; to 
circumvent by artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices; 
to outwit, overreach ; to deal craftily with: τινά, Acts vii. 
19 fr. Ex.i.10. (Judith v. 11; x.19; Diod., Philo, 
Joseph., Leian., al.) * 

kara-cTéÀAo : 1 aor. ptep. καταστείλας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
KATETTAALEVOS ; a. prop. to send or put down, to 
lower. b. to put or keep down one who is roused or 
incensed, fo repress, restrain, appease, quiet: τινά, Acts 
xix. 35 sq.; 3 Macc. vi. 1; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 7; b. it 
4, 4, 4; Plut. mor. p. 207 e.* 

κατά-στημα, -ros, τό, (καθίστημι), (Lat. status, habitus), 
[demeanor, deportment, bearing]: Tit. ii. 3. (3 Mace. v. 
45; Joseph. b. j. 1, 1, 4 [of a city; cf. ἀτρεμαίῳ τῷ kara- 
στήματι πρὸς τ. θάνατον ἀπήει: Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 5; Plut. 
Marcell. 23, 6; cf. Tib. Gracch. 2,2. See Wetst. on 
Tit. l e.; cf. Ignat. ad Trall. 3, 2 (and Jacobson or 
Zahn in loc.) ].) * 

κατα-στολή. 7s, 7, (καταστέλλω, q. v.) ; 1. prop. 
-a lowering, letting down; hence 2. in bibl. Grk. 
twice, a garment let down, dress, attire: 1 Tim. ii. 9, 
Vulg. habitus, which the translator, acc. to later Lat. 

22 


337 





κατατίθημι 


usage, seems to understand of clothing (cf. the French 
Uhabit); [ef. Joseph. b. j. 2, 8, 4]; for Ὁ}, Is. lxi. 3, 
with which in mind Hesych. says καταστολήν - περιβολήν 
[cf. W. 23, but esp. Ellicott on i Tim. l. c.].* 

Kata-oTpépw : 1 aor. karégrpevra; pf. pass. ptep. κατε- 
στραμμένος (Acts xv. 16 T [ WH, but Tr -orpeupévos; cf. 
WH. App. p. 170 sq.]) ; l. to turn over, turn un- 
der: the soil with a plow, Xen. oec. 17, 10. 2. to 
overturn, overthrow, throw down: τί, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 
15; [rà karearp. ruins], Acts xv. 16 T Tr WH [(cf. kara- 
ckámro)]; so Hag. ii. 22; Job ix. 5; Joseph. antt. 8, 7, 
6; Anthol. 11, 163, 6; Dios. L. 5, 82." 

κατα-στρηνιάω: 1 aor. subjunc. καταστρηνιάσω [(fut. 1 
Tim. v. 11 Lchm. mrg.)]; (see στρηνιάω) ; to feel the im- 
pulses of sexual desire, [A. V. to grow wanton]; (Vulg. 
luzurior): τινός, to one's loss [ A. V. against], 1 Tim. v. 
11; Ignat. ad Antioch. c. 11.* 

κατα-στροφή, -js, ἡ, (καταστρέφω), (Vulg. subversio, 
[eversio]), overthrow, destruction: of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6- 
[WH om. Tr mre. br. καταστρ.] (Gen. xix. 29); metaph. 
of the extinction of a spirit of consecration to Christ, 
[A. V. the subverting]: 2 Tim.ii. 14. (Aeschyl. Eum. 
490.)* 

κατα-στρώννυμι: 1 aor. pass. κατεστρώθην:; to strew over 
(the ground) ; to prostrate, slay, (c£. our to lay low]: 1 Co. 
x. 5[ A. V. overthrown]. (Num. xiv. 16; Judith vii. 14; 
xiv. 4; 2 Mace. v. 26, etc.; Hdt. 8,53; 9, 76; Xen. Cyr. 
3, 3, 64.)* 

κατα-σύρω; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. prop. to draw 
down, pull down, [see xara, III. 1]. 2. to draw along, 
drag forcibly, (τινὰ διὰ μέσης ἀγορᾶς, Philo in Flace. § 20; 
lez. ad Gaium $ 19): τινὰ πρὸς τὸν κριτήν, Lk. xii. 58. 
(Cie. pro Mil. c. 14, 38 quom in judicium detrahi non 
posset.) * 

κατα-σφαζω [or-c$drro]: 1 aor. κατέσφαξα; to kill off 
[ef. κατά, III. 1], to slaughter: Lk. xix. 27.  (Sept.; 
Hdt., Trags., Xen., Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 4; Ael. v. h. 13, 
2; Hdian. 5, 5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) * 

κατα-σφραγίζω: pf. pass. ptep. κατεσφραγισμένος ; to 
cover with a seal [see xara, III. 3], to seal up, close with 
a seal: βιβλίον σφραγῖσιν, Rev. v. 1. (Job ix. 7; Sap. 
ii. 5; Aeschyl, Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

κατάσχεσις, eos, 7, (κατέχω), Sept. often for ANN, 
possession ; 1. a holding back, hindering: anonym. 
in Walz, Rhetor. i. p. 616, 20. 2. a holding fast, 
possession: γῆν δοῦναι εἰς κατάσχ. to give in possession 
the land, Acts vii. 5, as in Gen. xvii. 8; Deut. xxxii. 49 
Alex.; Ezek. xxxiii. 24; xxxvi. 2 sq. 5; Joseph. antt. 
9, 1, 2; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Benj. $ 10]; w. gen. of the 
subj. τῶν ἐθμῶν, of the territory possessed by [the pos- 
session of ] the nations, Acts vii. 45; (a portion given to 
keep, Philo, rer. div. haer. $ 40 [cf. Ps. ii. 8]).* 

κατα-τίθημι : 1 aor. κατέθηκα ; 2 aor. mid. inf. καταθέ- 
σθαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay down [see κατά, III. 1], 
deposit, lay up: act. prop. twa ἐν μνημείῳ, Mk. xv. 46 
[L Tr WH ἔθηκεν]; mid. to lay by or lay up for one's 
self, for future use: τινί, with any one; χάριν [better ra; 
see χάρις, init.] and χάριτας κατατ. τινι, to lay up favor 


κατατομή 


Jor one's self with any one, to gain favor with (to do sume- 
thing for one which may win favor), Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 
9; so Hdt. 6,41; Thuc. 1, 33; Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 26; Dem. 
193, 22 (20) ; φιλίαν τινί, 1 Mace. x. 23; εὐεργεσίαν τινί, 
Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 5; [cf. Dem. τι. 5.1. [Come.: συγ- 
κατατίθημι. * 

κατα-τομή, -ῆς, ἡ. (fr. κατατέμνω [cf. κατά, IIT. 4] to cut 
up, mutilate), mutilation (Lat. concisio): Phil. iii. 2, 
where Paul sarcastically alludes to the word περιτομή 
which follows in vs. 3; as though he would say, Keep 
your eye on that boasted circumcision, or to call it by its 
true name ‘concision ' or ‘mutilation.’ Cf. the similar 
passage, Gal. v. 12; see ἀποκόπτω.ἢ 

xara-rofeóo : 1 fut. pass. κατατοξευθήσομαι; to shoot 
down or thrust through with an arrow: twa βολίδι, Heb. 
xii. 20 Rec. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Num. xxiv. 8; Ps. x. (xi.) 
2; Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.) * ὃ 

κατα-τρέχω: 2 aor. κατέδραμον; to run down, hasten 
down : ἐπί twas, to quell a tumult, Acts xxi. 32. [Hdt. on.]* 

[κατ-αυγάζω: 1 aor. inf. καταυγάσαι; to beam down 
upon; to shine forth, shine brightly: 2 Co. iv. 4 Lmrg. 
Tr mrg., where al. αὐγάσαι q. v.; cf. φωτισμός, b.; (trans. 
Sap. xvii. 5, ete.; intrans. 1 Macc. vi. 39; Heliod. 5, 31).*] 

καταφάγω, see κατεσθίω. 

κατα-φέρω; 1 aor. κατήνεγκα; Pass., pres. καταφέρομαι:; 
1 aor. κατηνέχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bear down, bring 
down, cast down: ψῆφον, prop. to cast a pebble or calcu- 


lus se. into the urn, i. 6. to give one's vote, to approve, | 


Acts xxvi. 10; αἰτιώματα κατά τινος (see xara, I. 2 b. [but 
the crit. edd. reject κατὰ xzÀ.]), Acts xxv. 7 L'T Tr WH. 
Pass. to be borne down, to sink, (from the window to the 
pavement), ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, from sleep (fram the effect of 
his deep sleep [cf. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348) ]), Acts 
xx. 9^; metaph. to be weighed down by, overcome, carried 
avay, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, sunk in a deep sleep, 
Acts xx. 92; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401)] is 
the expression in prof. auth. καταφέρομαι eis ὕπνον. to 
sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 5; Hdian. 
2,1,3[2]; 9,6 [5]; τοῖσιν ὕπνοισιν, Hipp. p. 1137 c. 
[(Kühn iii. p. 539)], and in the same sense simply xara- 


φέρομαι; cf. [L and S. s. v. I. 2 d.] ; Steph. Thes. iv. col. | 


1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed J.* 

κατα-φεύγω: 2 aor. κατέφυγον; [fr. Hdt. down]; to 
flee away, flee for refuge: foll by eis w. acc. of place, 
Acts xiv. 6; οἱ καταφυγόντες, we who [cf. B. ὃ 144, 9 c.] 
have fled from sc. the irreligious mass of mankind. foll. 
by an infin. of purpose, Heb. vi. 18; cf. Delitzsch ad loc.* 

κατα-φθείρω: pf. pass. ptep. κατεφθαρμένος ; 2 fut. pass. 
καταφθαρήσομαι ; [see kara, III. 4]; 1. to corrupt, 
deprave; κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν, corrupted in mind, 2 
Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy; pass. to be destroyed, to 
perish: foll. by ἐν w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii. 
12 RG. [From Aeschyl. down.]* 

κατα-φιλέω, -@; impf. κατεφίλουν:; 1 aor. κατεφίλησα: to 
kiss much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e- 
osculor, etc.) : τινά, Mt. xxvi. 49; Mk. xiv. 45; Lk. vii. 
38,45; xv.20; Aetsxx.37. (Tob. vii.6; 3 Macc. v. 49; 
Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 10; 7,5,32; Polyb. 15, 1, 7; Joseph. antt. 


338 








κατέναντι. 


7,11, 7; Ael v. h. 13, 4; Plut. Brut. 16; Leian. dial. 
deor. 4, 5; 5,3; φιλεῖν and καταφιλεῖν are distinguished 
in Xen. mem. 2, 6, 33; Plut. Alex. c. 67. Sept. for pw, 
prop. to join mouth to mouth.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 
780; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 18, note 31," 

κατα-φρονέω, -@; fut. καταφρονήσω ; 1 aor. κατεφρόνησα; 
[fr. Hdt. down]; to contemn, despise, disdain, think little 
or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. 8 132, 15], Mt. vi- 
24; xviii. 10; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ii. 4; 1 Co. xi. 22; 1 Tim. 
iv. 12; vi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Heb. xii. 2.* 

καταφρονητής, -οὔ, 6, (καταφρονέω), a despiser: Acts. xiii. 
41. (Hab.i.5; ii.5; Zeph.iii.4; Philo, leg. ad Gaium 
§ 41; Joseph. antt. 6, 14, 4; b. 1. 2, 5,3; Plut. Brut. 12, 
and in eccl. writ.) * 

κατα-χέω: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. κατέχεεν (see ἐκχέων; fo 
pour down upon; pour over, pour upon: ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν 
(LT Tr WH ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς), Mt. xxvi. 7; κατὰ τῆς κεφα- 
λῆς (Plat. rep. 3 p. 398 a.; Epict. diss. 2, 20, 29), Mk. 
xiv. 3 (where LT Tr WH om. κατά [cf. W. 381 (357) sq.; 
Hat. 4, 62; Plat. lege. 7 p. 814 b.; Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 36, 
2. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 66 sq.]).* 

κατα-χθόνιος, -ov, (κατά [see κατά, III. 3], χθών [the 
earth]), subterranean, Vulg. infernus: plur., of those who 
dwell in the world below, i. e. departed souls [cf. W. $ 34, 
2; but al. make the adj. a neut. used indefinitely; see 
Bp. Lghtft. in loc.], Phil. ii. 10. (Hom., Dion. H., An- 
thol., ete., Inserr.) * 

κατα-χράομαι, -Gpar; 1 aor. mid. inf. καταχρήσασθαι: 
in class. Grk. 1. to use much or excessively or ill. = 
to use up, consume by use, (Germ. verbrauchen). 3. 
to use fully, the κατά intensifying the force of the simple 
verb (Germ. g ¢brauchen), (Plato, Dem., Diod., Joseph., 
al.): 1 Co. vii. 31 [cf. B. § 133, 18; W. 209 sq. (197)]; 
τινί, ib. ix. 18." 

κατα-ψύχω: 1 aor. κατέψυξα ; to cool off, (make) cool = 
Lk.xvi.24. (Gen.xviii.4; Hippocr., Aristot., Theophr., 
Plut., al.) * 

κατείδωλος, -ov, (κατά and εἴδωλον ; after the analogy of 
κατάμπελος, κατάγομος, κατάχρυσος, karáüevüpos, etc., [see 
κατά, III. 3, and cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 638]), full of idols: 
Acts xvii. 16. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. § 34, 


[Spr 


κατ-έναντι, adv.; not found in prof. auth. [W. 102 
(37)]; in Sept. mostly for 733, 3229, 219, (see ἔναντι and 
ἀπέναντι) ; prop. over against, opposite, before : foll. by the 


| gen. [B. 319 (273) ; cf. W. $ 54, 6], Mk. xi. 2; xii. 41 


[Tr txt. WH mrg. ἀπέναντι]; xiii. 3, and L T Tr WH in 
Mt. xxi. 2; L Tr WH txt. also in xxvii. 24; ἡ κατέναντι 
κώμη, the village opposite, Lk. xix. 30. Metaph., w. gen. 
of pers., before one i. e. he being judge (see ἐνώπιον [esp. 
2 e. and 1 c.]) : τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. iv. 17 (which, by a kind of 
attraction somewhat rare, is to be resolved κατέναντι θεοῦ, 
ᾧ ἐπίστευσε, who is the father of us all acc. to the judg- 
ment and appointment of God, whom he believed, — 
the words καθὼς . - . τέθεικα forming a parenthesis; cf. « 
Fritzsche ad loc.; [B. 287 (247); but al. resolve it, 
κατέναντι τ. θεοῦ κατέν. οὗ ἐπίστ.. cf. Meyer (per contra 
ed. Weiss) ad loc.; W. 164 (155)]); or, he being witness 


κατενώπιον 


[in the sight of]: τοῦ θεοῦ, L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ii. 17 and 
X 19: 

κατ-ενώπιον. adv., not met with in prof. auth. ((W. 102 
(97) ] see ἐνώπιον), over against, opposite, before the face of, 
before the presence of, in the sight of, before: foll. by the gen. 
[B. 319 (273 sq.) ; cf. W. § 54, 6]; a. prop. of place, 
Jude 24 (Lev. iv. 17; Josh. i. 5; iii. 7; xxiii. 9). b: 
metaph. having one as it were before the eyes, before one 
as witness: τοῦ θεοῦ, Rec. in 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19, (see 
κατέναντι) ; before God as judge, Eph. i. 4; Col. i. 22 [cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. in loe.; also B. 173, 180, 188].* 

κατ-εξουσιάζω ; not found in prof. aüth.; /o exercise au- 
thority, wield power, [see κατά, III. 3]: τινός, over one, 
Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x 42.* 

κατ-εργαΐζομαι : pf. inf. κατειργάσθαι (1 Pet. iv. 3 LT 
Tr WH); 1 aor. mid. κατειργασάμην, and. κατηργασάμην 
(Ro. vii. 8 T Tr.; [2 Co. vii. 11 T]); 1 aor. pass. κατειρ- 
yác8nv, and κατηργάσθην (2 Co. xii. 12 Tdf.); see ἐργά- 
Copat, init.; adepon. mid. verb; [ace. to Fritzsche, Rom. 
i. p. 107 the κατά is either intensive (Lat. p er ficere) or 
descensive (Lat. per petrare)]; a. to perform, ac- 
complish, achieve, [R. V. often work]: Ro. vii. 15, 17 sq. 
20; τὶ διά τινος (gen. of pers.), Ro. xv. 18; ἅπαντα xa- 
τεργασάμενοι having gone through every struggle of the 
fight, Eph. vi. 13 [cf. Meyer in loc.]; σημεῖα, pass. 2 Co. 
xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. to perpetrate, Ro. i. 
21 τ 5: 1. C9. v.36 1 Retard: b. to work out 
(Lat. efficere), i. e. to do that from which something results; 
of man: τὴν σωτηρίαν, make every effort to obtain salva- 
tion, Phil. ii. 12; of things: bring about, result in, Ro. iv. 
15; v. 8; vii. 8; 2 Co. vii. 10 (where LT Tr WH 
epyát-) ; Jas. i. 3, and RG in 20; ri τινι, Ro. vii. 13; 2 
Cos iv. 17; vn. 115 ᾿ξ tte C. karepy. Twa εἴς τι, to 
fashion, i. e. render one fit for a thing: 2 Co. v. 5. (Often 
in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; several times in 
Sept.)* : 

κατ-έρχομαι ; 2 aor. κατῆλθον, 1 pers. plur. κατήλθαμεν 
(Acts xxvii.5 T Tr WH; on which form see ἀπέρχομαι, 
init.); [fr. Hom. down]; to come down, go down; prop. of 
one who goes from a higher to a lower locality: foll. by 
εἰς w. acc. of place, Lk. iv. 31; Acts viii. 5; xiii. 4; [xix. 
1 T Tr mrg.]; and L T Tr WH in xv. 30; foll. by ἀπό 
w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 37; Acts xv. 1; xviii. 5; xxi. 
10; foll. by ἀπό and eis, Acts xi. 27; xii. 19; of those 
who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Hom.) 1408, 
29 (Od. 1, 183) κατελθεῖν, οὐ μόνον τὸ ἁπλῶς κάτω mov 
ἐλθεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ ἐς λιμένα ἐλθεῖν, ὥσπερ καὶ καταβῆναι κ. 
καταπλεῦσαι k. καταχθῆναι κ. κατᾶραι. τὸ ἐλλιμενίσαι λέγεται; 
also 1956, 35 (Od. 24, 115) κατῆλθον ἢ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐνελιμενί- 
σθην, ὡς πολλαχοῦ ἐρρέθη, ἢ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἁπλῶς ἦλθον ; cf. 
Ebeling, Lex. Homer. 8. v.]: foll. by εἰς, Acts xviii. 22; 
xxi. 3 LT Tr WH; xxvii. 5; πρός τινα, Acts ix. 32. 
Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God: Jas. 
iii. 15.* 

κατ-εσθίω, ptep. plur. κατέσθοντες (Mk. xii. 40 Tr WH; 
see ἐσθίω and &so; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. d. Apokry- 
phen, i. p. 150 [who says, * The shorter form occurs freq. 
in the Sept., Lev. xix. 26; Sir. xx. 15, (16), elsewh. almost 


339 


κατέχω 


exclusively poetic; see Bitm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p. 185" 
(cf. Veitch s. v. éo6iw)]); fut. καταφάγομαι (Jn. ii. 17 GL 
T Tr WH; see ἐσθίω); 2 aor. κατέφαγον; Sept. for 
228; 1. prop. to consume by eating, to eat up, de- 
vour: τί, of birds, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4; Lk. viii. 5; of 
a dragon, Rev. xii. 4; of a man, eating up the little book, 
i.e. eagerly taking its entire contents into his inmost soul, 
and, as we say, digesting it (borrowed fr. the fig. in Ezek. 
H. 10; iii. 1-3, cf. Jer. xv. 16): Rev. x. 9 sq. 2; 
Metaph. in various uses ; a. to devour i. e. squander, 
waste, substance: Lk. xv. 30 (often so in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. Od. 3, 315; 15, 12 down; devorare patrimonium, 
Catull. 29, 23). b. to devour i. e. forcibly appro- 
priate: τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν, widows’ property, Mt. xxiii. 
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. B. 79 (69); W. $ 29, 
2]; Lk. xx. 47. c. with an acc. of the pers. a. 
to strip one of his goods: 2 Co. xi. 20. B. to ruin (by 
the infliction of injuries): Gal. v. 15. d. of fire, to 
devour i. e. utterly consume, destroy : twa, Rev. xi. 55 xx. 
9: e. of the consumption of the strength of body 
and mind by strong emotions: τινά, Jn. ii. 17 (Ps. Ixviii. 
(Ixix.) 10; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1).* 

κατ-ευθύνω: 1 aor. inf. κατευθῦναι ; 3 pers. sing. opt. 
κατευθύναι; (see κατά, III. 2); Sept. mostly for Ww and 
1232, PI; to make straight, guide, direct: τοὺς πόδας εἰς 
ὁδὸν eip. Lk. i. 79; τὴν ὁδὸν πρός τινα, of the removal of 
the hindrances to coming to one, 1 Th. iii. 11; τὰς καρ- 
δίας (1 Chr. xxix. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 3) eis τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ 
θεοῦ, 2 Th. iii. 5. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

κατ-ευλογέω : impf. 3 pers. sing. karevAóye. (T WH) 
and κατηυλόγει (Tr), [cf. εὐδοκέω, init.]; to call down 
blessings on: twa, Mk.x.16 T Tr WH. (Tob. [x. 13]; 
xi. 16; Plut. amator. 4.) * 

kaT-ó-(eTqge: fo se! up against; [2 aor. act. 3 pers. 
plur.] κατεπέστησαν τῷ Παύλῳ, they rose up against Paul, 
i. e. with hostile intent, Acts xviii. 12. Found nowhere 
else.* 

xar-xo; impf. κατεῖχον; 2 aor. subjunc. κατάσχω ; 
impf. pass. κατειχύμην ; 1. to hold back, detain, re- 
tain; a. τινά, from going away, foll. by rod μή w. inf., 
Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 8.; cf. W. 604 (561)]; τινὰ πρὸς 
ἐμαυτόν, Philem. 13. Pass. (as often in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1677*; [L. and S. s. v. 
II. 6]), of some troublesome condition or circumstance 
by which one is held as it were bound: νοσήματε, Jn. v. 
4[G T Tr WH om. the passage] ; ἔν τινι, Ro. vii. 6. b. 
to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of): τ. ἀλή- 
θειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ, Ro. i. 18; absol. τὸ κατέχον, that which 
hinders, 56. Antichrist from making his appearance (see 
ἀντίχριστος); the power of the Roman empire is meant; 
6 κατέχων he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Anti- 
christ, denotes the one in whom that power is lodged, the 
Roman emperor: 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (cf., besides De Wette 
and Lünemann ad loc., [Bp. Lghtft. in B.D. s. v. Thess. 
Second Ep. to the], esp. Schneckenburger in the Jahr- 
bücher f. deutsche Theol. for 1859 p. 421 sq.). κατέχω 
(sc. τὴν ναῦν) eis τὴν αἰγιαλόν, to check the ship’s head- 
way [better (cf. the preceding context) to hold or head 


κατηγορέω 


the ship, ef. Hdt. 7, 59.188 ete.; Bos, Ellips. (ed. Schaefer) 
p. 318; see, too, Od. 11, 455 sq. (cf. Eustath. 1629, 18; 
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 310, 7 sqq.) ; but Passow (as 
below) et al. take the verb as intrans. in such a connec- 
tion, viz. to make for; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. 144] in 
order to land, Acts xxvii. 40 (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 29 xara- 
σχὼν ἐπὶ τὴν 'ABepv(óa; many other exx. are given in 
Passow s. v. II. 3; [L. and S. s. v. B. 2]). c. to hold 
fast, keep secure, keep firm possession of: with aec. of the 
thing, τὸν λόγον, Lk. viii. 15; foll. by the orat. obliq., 1 Co. 
xv. 2 [B. $8 139, 58; 150, 20; W. 561 (522)]; ras zapa- 
δόσεις, 1 Co. xi. 2; τὸ καλόν, 1 Th. v. 21; τὴν παρρησίαν 
[7- ἀρχήν ete.] μέχρι τέλους βεβαῖαν κατασχεῖν, Heb. iii. 6, 
14; τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος ἀκλινῆ, Heb. x. 23. 2 
equiv. to Lat. obtinere, i. e. a. to get possession of, 
take: Mt. xxi. 38 RG; Lk, xiv. 9. b. to possess: 1 
Co. vii. 30; 2 Co. vi. 10." 

κατηγορέω, -à ; impf. κατηγόρουν ; fut. κατηγορήσω; 1 
aor. exaTnydpnoa; pres. pass. κατηγοροῦμαι; (κατά and ayo- 
pevw, prop. to speak against [cf. xara, III. 7] in court, in 
the assembly of the people), to accuse; a. before a 
judge: absol. [fo make accusation], Acts xxiv. 2, 19; 
τινός, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2; Lk. vi. 7 T 
Trtxt. WH; xi.54 R L Trbr.; xxiii. 2, 10; Jn. viii. 6; 
Acts xxv. 5; xxviii. 19; with the addition of a gen. of 
the thing of which one is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.) : 
Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. 11, (unless it be thought preferable 
to rezard the relative in these instances as in the gen. 
by attraction [so B. $ 132, 16 fin.], since the com. constr. 
in Grk. authors is κατηγ. τί τινος, cf. Matthiae § 370 
Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 378 p. 859; cf. W. $30,9a.); 
τινὸς περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thue. 8, 85; Xen. Hell. 1, 
7, 2); w. gen. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3 
(unless πολλά should be taken adverbially: much, vehe- 
mently); πόσα, ib 4 LT Tr WH (Eur. Or. 28); foll. 
by xara w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 
9 [cf. W. § 28, 1; p. 431 (402); B. $ 132, 107); pass. 
to be accused (as 2 Mace. x. 13; Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 25; cf. 
B. § 134, 4): ὑπό τινος, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 LT 
Tr WH for Ree. παρά (τὸ τί κτλ. why [A. V. wherefore] 
he was accused; unless it is to be explained, what accu- 
sation was brought forward ete.) ; 6 κατηγορούμενος, Acts 
xxv. 16. b. of an extra-judicial accusation (Xen. 
mem. 1, 3,4): absol. Ro. ii. 15; τινός, Jn. v. 45 [cf. B. 
295 (254)]; Rev. xii. 10 Τὰ ἃ Tr; solecistically τινά, Rev. 
xii. 10 L T WH [ef. B. § 132, 16].* 

[S¥N. αἰτιᾶσθαι, διαβάλλειν, ἐγκαλεῖν, ἐπικαλεῖν, 
κατηγορεῖν: αἰτιᾶσθαι to accuse with primary reference to 
the ground of accusation (αἰτία), the crime; κατηγορεῖν to 
accuse formally and before a tribunal, bring a charge against 
(κατά suggestive of animosity) publicly; ἐγκαλεῖν to accuse 
with publicity (καλεῖν), but not necessarily formally or before 
a tribunal; ἐπικαλεῖν ‘to ery out upon’, suggestive of public- 
ity and hostility; διαβάλλειν prop. to make a verbal assault 
which reaches its goal (διά) ; in distinction from the words 
which allude to authorship (αἰτιάομαι), to judicial procedure 
(karnyopéw), or to open averment (ἐγκαλέω, ἐπικαλέω), δια- 
βάλλω expresses the giving currency to a damaging insinua- 
tion. διάβολος a secret and calumnious, in distinction from 
κατήγορος an open and formal, accuser. Schmidt ch. 5.] 


940 


i 


κατισχύω 


κατηγορία, -as, ἥ, (κατήγορος), [fr. Hdt. down], accusa- 
tion, charge: w. gen. of the pers. accused, Lk. vi. 7 R G 
LTrmrg.; [Jn. xviii. 29 T WH]; κατά τινος, Jn. xviii. 
29 [R GL Tr]; 1 Tim. v. 19; w. gen. of the crime, Tit. 
no Ce 

κατήγορος, -ov, 6, (κατηγορέω [q. v. ad fin.]), an ac- 
cuser: Jn. viii. 10; Acts xxiii. 30, 35; xxiv. 8 [R]; xxv. 
16, 18; Rev. xii. TOR Tr. [(Fr. Soph. and Hdt. down.)]* 

κατήγωρ, 6, an accuser: Rev. xii. 10 GL'T WH. It 
is a form unknown to Grk. writ., a literal transcription 
of the Hebr. sr Op, a name given to the devil by the 
Rabbins; cf. Buztorf, Lex. Chald. talm. et rabb. p. 2009 
(p. 997 ed. Fischer); [ScAóttgen, Horae Hebr. i. p. 1121 
sq.; cf. B. 25 (22) ].* 

κατήφεια, -as, 7, (fr. κατηφής, of a downeast look; and 
this fr. κατά, and τὰ φάη the eyes; Etym. Magn. [496, 53] 
κατήφεια: ἀπὸ τοῦ κάτω τὰ φάη βάλλειν τοὺς ὀνειδιζομένους 
ἣ λυπουμένους ; because, as Plut. de dysopia [al. de vitioso 
pudore (528 e.)] c. 1 says, it is λύπη κάτω βλέπειν ποι- 
ovea), prop. a downcast look expressive of sorrow; hence 
shame, dejection, gloom, [A. V. heaviness]: Jas. iv. 9. 
(Hom. Il. 3, 51; 16, 498 ete.; Thuc. 7, 75; Joseph. 
antt. 13, 16, 1; Plut. Cor. 20; [Pelop. 33, 3, and often; 
Dion. Hal., Char., ete.]; often in Philo.) * 

κατ-ηχέω, -@: 1 aor. κατήχησα; Pass., pres. κατηχοῦμαι; 
Ρΐ. κατήχημαι ; 1 aor. κατηχήθην ; nowhere met with in the 
O. T.; very rare in prof. auth. ; 1. prop. to sound, 
towards, sound down upon, resound: ἁρμονία κατηχεῖ τῆς 
θαλάττης, Philostr. p. 791 [icon. 1, 19]; to charm with re- 
sounding sound, to fascinate, τινὰ μύθοις, Leian. Jup. 
trag. 39. 2. to teach orally, to instruct: Leian. asin. 
$48; Philopatr. 17. In the N. T. only used by Luke 
and Paul: τινά, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pass. ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, by 
hearing the law, wont to be publicly read in the syna- 
gogues, Ro. ii. 18; w. ace. of the thing, αὐτός σε πολλὰ xa- 
τηχήσω τῶν ἀγνοουμένων, Joseph. de vita sua § 65 fin.; w. 
ace. of a thing and of a pers., rod ἀληθοῦς λόγου βραχέα 
κατηχήσας με, Clem. hom. 1, 13; pass. w. aec. of the 
thing: τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xviii. 25; τὸν λόγον, Gal. 
vi. 6; hence some [(see Meyer in loc.)] resolve Lk. i. 4 
thus: περὶ τῶν λόγων, ods κατηχήθης (see below). 3. 
to inform by word of mouth; pass. to be orally informed : 
foll. by ὅτι, Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 30; περί τινος (gen. ' 
of pers.), foll. by ὅτι, Acts xxi. 21; w. acc. of the thing, ὧν 
κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ i. e. τούτων, ἃ κτλ. ibid. 24 (κατηχηθεὶς 
περὶ τῶν συμβεβηκότων, [pseudo-] Plut. de fluviis [7, 2]; 
8,1; 7,1). Tothis construction the majority refer Lk. 
i.4, construing it thus: τὴν ἀσφάλ. τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν 
κατηχήθης [W. 165 (156); B. $143, 7; (see above)]. Cf. 
Gilbert, Dissertatio de christianae catecheseos historia 
(Lips. 1836) Pt. i. p.1 sqq.; Zezschwitz, System der christl. 
Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for 600]. 
usage, Suicer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

kat’ ἰδίαν, see ἴδιος, 2. 

κατ-ιόω. -@: pf. pass. κατίωμαι; (see ἰός, 2); to rust over 
[ef. κατά, III. 3], cover with rust: Jas. v. 3. (Epictet. 
diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11].) * 

kar-wX$o: impf. κατίσχυον; fut. κατισχύσω; 1 apr. 


κατοικέω 


subjune. 2 pers. plur. κατισχύσητε (Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt. 
WH); Sept. mostly for pir; among Grk. writ. esp. by 
Polyb., Diod., Dion. H.; prop. to be strong to another's 
detriment, to prevail against; to be superior in strength; 
to overpower: foll. by an inf., Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt. WH 
[ prevail (i. e. have full strength) to escape etc.]; to over- 
come, τινός (Jer. xv. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (meaning, ‘not even 
the gates of Hades — than which nothing was supposed 
to be stronger — shall surpass the church in strength") ; 
absol. to prevail (i. e. succeed, accomplish one's desire) : 
Lk. xxiii. 23.* 

κατ-οικέω,-ῶ; 1 aor. κατῴκησα; [fr. Soph. and Hat. 
down]; Sept. times uncounted for 207), more rarely for 
1225 1. intrans. to dwell, settle; 8. prop.: foll. by 
ev w. dat. of place, Lk. xiii. 4 [Tr WHom. ἐν]; Acts i. 20; 
5 [T WH mre. eis (see below)]; vii. 2, 4, 48; ix. 22; xi. 
29; xiii. 27; xvii. 24; Heb.xi.9; Rev.xiii.12; foll. by 
εἰς (a pregnant construction; see εἰς, C. 2 p. 186"), Mt. ii. 
23; iv. 18; Acts vii. 4; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Rev. iii. 105 vi. 10; 
viii. 13; xi. 10; xiii. 8, 14; xiv. 6 Rec.; xvii. 8, (Num. 
xii. 33; xiv. 14; xxxv. 32, 34); ἐπὶ πᾶν τὸ πρόσωπον 
[παντὸς προσώπου L T Tr WH (ef. ἐπί, €. I. 1a.) ] τῆς γῆς, 
Acts xvii. 26; ὅπου, Rey. ii. 13; sothat ἐκεῖ must be added 
mentally, Acts xxii. 12; demons taking possession of the 
bodies of men are said κατοικεῖν ἐκεῖ, Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 
26. b. metaph., divine powers, influences, ete., are 
said κατοικεῖν ἔν τινι (dat. of pers.), or ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τινός, 
to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it: 6 
θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν, Barn. ep. 16,8; ὁ Χριστός, Eph. iii. 17; the 
Holy Spirit, Jas. iv. 5 RG (Herm. past., mand. 5, 2; [sim. 
5, 5 ete.; cf. Harnack’s reff. on mand. 3,1]); τὸ πλήρωμα 
τῆς θεότητος in Christ, Col. ii. 9, cf. i. 19 ; ἡ σοφία ἐν σώ- 
ματι, Sap. 1. 4; δικαιοσύνη is said to dwell where right- 
eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. iii. 13. 2 
trans. to dwell in, inhabit: with ace. of place, Acts i. 19; 
li. 9,14; iv. 16; 1x. 32, 35; xix. 10,17; Rev.xii. 12 Rec. ; 
xvii.2; Godis said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always 
present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Cowr.: éy- 
κατοικέω.} * 

[Sxw. κατοικεῖν, in the Sept. the ordinary rendering of 37 
to settle, dwell, differs from «m a p o κ ety, the common represen- 


tative of 114 to sojourn, as the permanent differs from the 


transitory; e.g.Gen. xxxvii. 1 κατῴκει δὲ Ιακὼβ ἐν τῇ γῇ 
οὗ παρῴκησεν ὃ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, ἐν γῇ Χαναάν; Philo de sacrif. Ab. 
et Cain. § 10 ὁ γὰρ τοῖς ἐγκυκλίοις μόνοις ἐπανέχων παροικεῖ 
σοφίᾳ, οὐ κατοικεῖ. Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 19 and on Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 1.] 

κατ-οίκησις, -ews, 7, (κατοικέω), dwelling, abode: Mk. v. 
8. (Gen. x. 30; Num. xv. 2, etc.; Thuc., Plat., Plut.) * 

κατ-οικητήριον, -ov, τό, (karowéo), an abode, a habita- 
tion: Eph. ii. 22; Rev. xviii. 2. (Sept.; Barn. ep. [6, 
15]; 16, 7. 8, and other eccl. writ.) * 

κατ-οικία, -as, 7. (κατοικέω), dwelling, habitation: Acts 
xvii. 26. (Sept.; Polyb. 2, 32, 4; Strab., Plut., al.)* 

κατ-οικίζω ; 1 aor. κατῴκισα; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
mui to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode ; 
to give a dwelling to: metaph. τὸ πνεῦμα, ὃ κατῴκισεν ἐν 
ἡμῖν, i. e. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade 
and prompt us (see κατοικέω; 1 b.), Jas. iv. 5 LT Tr WH.* 


341 


καῦσις 


κατοπτρίζω: (κάτοπτρον a mirror), to show in a mirror, 
to make to reflect, to mirror: κατοπτρίζων ó ἥλιος τὴν ἶριν, 
Plut. mor. p. 894 f. [i. e. de plac. philos. 8, 5,11]. Mid. 
pres. κατοπτρίζομαι; to look at one's self in a mirror (Ar- 
tem. oneir. 2, 7; Athen. 15 p. 687 c.; Diog. Laért. 2, 33; 
[7, 17]) ; to behold for one's self as in a mirror [W. 254 
(238); B. 193 sq. (167)]: τὴν δόξαν τοῦ κυρίου, the glory 
of Christ (which we behold in the gospel as in a mirror 
from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainly so in 
Philo, alleg. leg. iii. $ 33 μηδὲ κατοπτρισαίμην ev ἄλλῳ τινὶ 
τὴν σὴν ἰδέαν ἢ ἐν σοὶ τῷ θεῷ." 

κατόρθωμα, -τος, τό, (κατορθόω to make upright, erect), 
a right action, a successful achievement: plur. of whole- 
some publie measures or institutions, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) 
[R G; see διόρθωμα] ; (3 Mace. iii. 23; Polyb., Diod., 
Strab. Joseph., Plut, Leian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
251; [Win. 25].* 

κάτω (fr. κατά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. κατω- 
τέρω; [cf. W. 472 (440)]; 1. down, downwards: 
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; Jn. viii. 6, 8; Acts xx. 9. 2. 
below, beneath, [cf. W. τι. 5.1; a. of place: Mk. xiv. 
66; Actsii. 19; ἕως κάτω [ A. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii. 
51; Mk. xv.38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2) ; rà κάτω, the parts 
or regions that lie beneath (opp. to rà dvo, heaven), i. e. 
the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: ἀπὸ 
διετοῦς kal κατωτέρω, from a child of two years and those 
that were of a lower age [cf. W. 370 (347)], Mt. ii. 16; 
ἀπὸ εἰκοσαετοῦς kai κάτω, 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.* 

κατώτερος, -épa, -ερυν, (compar. of κάτω, see ἀνώτερος), 
[ Hippoer., Theophr., Athen., al.], /ower: (ὁ Χριστὸς) κα- 
τέβη eis rà karórepa μέρη τῆς γῆς. Eph. iv. 9, which many 
understand of Christ's descent into Hades (τὸν τόπον τὸν 
κάτω καλούμενον, Plat. Phaedo p.112 c.), taking τῆς γῆς asa 
partit. gen. (see ἄδης, 2). But the mention of this fact 
is at variance with the connection. Paul is endeavoring 
to show that the passage he has just before quoted, Ps. 
Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, must be understood of Christ, not of 
God, because ‘ an ascent into heaven’ necessarily presup- 
poses a descent to earth (which was made by Christ in 
the incarnation), whereas God does not leave his abode 
in heaven. Accordingly rà karór. τῆς γῆς denotes the 
lower parts of the universe, which the earth constitutes, — 
τῆς γῆς being a gen. of apposition; cf. W. § 59, 8a.; 
Grimm, Institutio theol. dogmat. ed. 2, p. 355 sqq.* 

κατωτέρω. see κάτω, esp. 2 b. 

Καῦδα, see Κλαύδη. 

καῦμα, -ros, τό, (καίω), heat: of painful and burning 
heat, Rev. vii. 16; xvi. 9. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

καυματίζω: 1 aor. inf. καυματίσαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἐκαυμα- 
τίσθην ; (xadpa); to burn with heat, to scorch: τινά, with 
ἐν πυρί added, Rev. xvi. 8; pass., Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. iv. 6; 
w. addition of καῦμα μέγα (566΄ ἀγαπάω sub fin. for exx. 
and reff.), to be tortured with intense heat, Rey. xvi. 9. 
(Antonin. 7, 64; Epict. diss. 1, 6, 26; 3, 22, 52; of the 
heat of fever, Plut. mor. p. 100 d. [de virt. et vit. 1], 
691 e. [quaest. conviv. vi. 2, 6].)* 

καῦσις, -ews, 7, (καίω), burning, burning up: ἧς τὸ τέλος 


καυσόω 


εἷς καῦσιν, the fate of which land (appointed it by God) 
is, to be burned up (by fire and brimstone from heaven ; 
cf. Deut. xxix. 23), Heb. vi. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. (Hdt., 
Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

καυσόω, -: (καῦσος); lo burn up, set fire to; pres. ptep. 
pass. καυσούμενος, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12, [A. V. with fervent 
heat]. (Elsewhere only [chiefly ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.] in 
Diose. and Galen: to suffer from feverish burning, be 
parched with fever.) * 

καυστηριάζω : pf. pass. ptep. cexavgrnptacpevos, to burn 
in with a branding iron (ras ἵππους λύκον, a figure of a wolf, 
Strab. 5, 1, 9 p. 215): 1 Tim. iv:2 L ed. ster. T Tr WH, 
on which pass. see καυτηριάζω. (Not found elsewhere.) * 

καύσων, -wvos, ὁ; 1. burning heat of the sun: Mt. 
xx.12; Lk. xii.55; Jas.i. 11, [al. refer all these pass. to 
the next head]; (Is. xlix. 10; [Gen. xxxi. 40 Alex.; cf. 
Judith viii.3]; Sir.xviii. 16; Athen. 3 p. 73 b.). 2. 
Eurus, a very dry, hot, east wind, scorching and drying 
up everything; for op, Job xxvii. 21; Hos. xii. 1; 
ἄνεμος καύσων, Jer. xviii. 17; Ezek. xvii. 10; Hos. xiii. 
15; πνεῦμα καύσων, Jon. iv. 8, [cf. Hos. xii. 1]; (on this 
wind ef. Schleusner, Thes. ad Sept. iii. p. 297; Win. 
RWB. [also BB. DD.] s. v. Wind). Many suppose it 
to be referred to in Jas. i. 11; yet the evils there men- 
tioned are ascribed not to the καύσων, but to the ἥλιος." 

καυτηριάζω : (καυτήριον [(cf. kaíe)] a branding-iron) ; 
to mark by branding, to brand: [pf. pass. ptep.] κεκαυτη- 
ριασμένοι τὴν ἰδίαν συνείδησιν, i. €. κεκαυτηριασμένην ἔχοντες 
τὴν ἰδ. συν. [cf. W. 230 (216)] (cf. καταφθείρω), [branded 
in their own conscience i. e.] whose souls are branded with 
the marks of sin, i. e. who carry about with them the per- 
petual consciousness of sin, 1 Tim. iv. 2 R G L ed. maj., 
see kavo7npidtw; [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would give it 
here the sense of seared, cf. Eph. iv. 19]. (In Hippocr. 
in a medical sense, to cauterize, remove bi) cautery.) * 

καυχάομαι, -ῶμαι, 2 pers. sing. kavyaoa (Ro. ii. 17, 23; 
1 Co. iv. 7; see κατακαυχάομαι) ; fut. καυχήσομαι; 1 aor. 
ἐκαυχησάμην; pf. κεκαύχημαι; (καύχη ἃ boast); [fr. Pind. 
and Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for Oban; in the N. T. 
often used by Paul [some 35 times; by Jas. twice]; to 
glory (whether with reason or without): absol, 1 Co. i. 
31°; iv. 7; xiii. 3 L [ed. ster. WH (see xaiw)]; 2 Co. 
x. [18], 17°; xi. 16, 18; xii 1, 6, 11 Rec.; Eph. 9; 
Jas. iv. 16; τί (acc. of the thing [cf. W. 222 (209)]), to 
glory (on account) of a thing: 2 Co. ix. 2 (ἣν καυχῶμαι 
ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν Μακεδόσιν, which I boast of on your behalf 
unto the Macedonians [B. $ 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see 
below]); 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii.1; Leian. ocyp. 120); 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the obj. [: W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23], 
to glory in a thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk.; but 
the Lat. says glorior in aliquo) : Ro. ii. 23; v. 3; 1 Co. 
lii. 21; 2 Co. v. 12; x.15; xi. 12 [cf. B: 105 (92)]; xii. 
5, 95 Gal. vi. 13 sq.; 2 Th. i. 4 RG; Jas. i. 9, (Jer. ix. 
23 sq.; 1 Chr. xvi-35); ἐν θεῷ, ἐν τῷ θεῷ, in God, i. e. 
the knowledge of God, intimacy with him, his favors, ete. 

Ro. ii. 17 ; v. 11, (ἐν rots θεοῖς, Theoph. ad Autol. 1,1, 1) ; 

ἐν κυρίῳ, 1 Co. i. 31^; 2 Co. x. 17^; ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿ἸΙησοῦ, 
Phil. iii. 3; foll. by ἐπί w. dat. of the obj. [cf. W. $33 d.; 


942 








Κεδρών 


Β: 8 188, 23]; Ro. v. 2 (Prov. σαν. 14.: 0 Sin xxx. 2: 
Diod. xvi. 70); περί twos, 2 Co. x. 8; ets τι, in regard 
of, in reference to, 2 Co. x. 16 (Aristot. pol. 5, 10 p. 1311, 
4). ὑπέρ w.gen. of pers., to one's advantage, to the praise 
of one, [on one's behalf] : 2 Co. vii. 14; xii. ὅ, ἐνώπιον 
τοῦ θεοῦ, as though standing in his presence, 1 Co. i. 29 
[cf. B. 173 (150). Cowr.: ev, κατα-καυχάομαι.} * 

καύχημα, ros, τό, (kavyáopat), very rare in prof. auth. ; 
Sept. for nnn praise, and 785A ornament, beauty; 
several times in Sir. 1. that of which one glories or 
can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro.iv.2; 1 Co. 
ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. ii. 165 τὸ καύχημα ἔχειν els 
ἑαυτὸν μόνον, his glorying confined to himself [ R. V. in 
regard of himself alone], Gal. vi. 4; τὸ x. τῆς ἐλπίδος, the 
matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, of 
which we glory, Heb. iii. 6. 2. As γέννημα, δίωγμα, 
θέλημα, ἴαμα, κήρυγμα (2 Tim. iv. 17), κλαῦμα, πλήρωμα, 
φρόνημα, ete., are used for γέννησις, δίωξις, θέλησις, κτλ. 
[ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 6], so also (which H. A. W. Meyer 
persists in denying [as respects the New Testament 
(see his note on Ro. iv. 2); so Ellicott and Bp. Lghtft. 
on Gal. vi. 4; Lünem. on Heb. u: 5.7) is καύχημα used 
for καύχησις (Pind. Isthm. 5, 65 [ef. Meyer on Phil. i. 26 
note; on the apparent use of nouns in pa in an active 
sense see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 257 sq.]), a glorying, 
boasting: 1 Co. v. 6; Phil. i. 26; ὑπέρ τινος (see kavxdopat, 
sub fin.), 2 Co. v. 125 ix. 8.* 

καύχησις, -ews, 7, (καυχάομαι), the act of glorying: Ro. 
iii. 27; 2 Co. ix. 4 Rec.; 2Co. xi. 10, 17; Jas. iv. 16; 
στέφανος καυχήσεως, crown of which we can boast, 1 Th. 
ii. 19; Ezek. xvi. 12; Prov. xvi. 31; ὑπέρ τινος, (on be- 
half) of one [cf. καυχάομαι, sub fin.], 2 Co. vii. 4; viii. 24; 
ἐπί τινος, before one, 2 Co. vii. 14; ἔχω [τὴν crit. edd.] 
καύχησιν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, the glorying which I have I 
ascribe to Christ, or I owe it to Christ that I am per- 
mitted to glory (see ἐν, I. 6 b. p. 211*), Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co. 
xv.31; that of which one glories, cause of glorying, 2 Co. 
i.12. (Sept. several times for n?w2m; [Diog. Laért. 10, 
7 fin.]; Philod. in Vol. Hercul. Oxfort. i. p. 16.) * 

Kadapvaoóp, see Καπερναούμ. 

Keyxpeat [T WH Kevyp. (cf. WH. App. p. 150)], τῶν, 
ai, Cenchree or Kenchree, a port of Corinth, about 60 
[70; Strabo (as below)] stadia from the city, on the 
eastern side of the isthmus, the emporium of its trade 
with Asia (Strabo 8 p. 380): Acts xviii. 18; Ro. xvi. 1. 
[It still retains the ancient name; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.; 
Lewin, St. Paul, i. 299 sq.]* 

κέδρος, -ov, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], a cedar, a well-known 
tree, the wood of which is fragrant: χείμαρρος τῶν κέ- 
pov, Jn. xviii. 1 R Tr txt. WH (so also 2 S. xv. 23; 1 K. 
xv. 13, [ef. ii. 37]); τοῦ (sic!) κέδρου, ibid. Tdf.; but see 
the foll. word.* 

KeSpév, 6 [B. 21 (19)], indecl. (in Joseph. Kedpav, 
-avos [see below]), Cedron [or Kidron], (Hebr. mp 
i. e. dark, turbid), the name of a [winter-] torrent, rising 
near Jerusalem and flowing down through a valley of 
the same name (having the Mt. of Olives on the E.) into 
the Dead Sea: χείμαρρος τοῦ Κεδρών, Jn. xviii. 1 GL Tr 


“κεῖμαι 


arg., acc. to the more correct reading [but see WH. 
App. ad loc.]; (χείμαρρος Κεδρῶνος, Joseph. antt. 8, 1, 
5; φάραγξ Κεδρῶνος, ib. 9, 7, 3; b.j. 5, 6, 1; φάραγγι 
βαθείᾳ... 7 Κεδρὼν ὠνόμασται, ib. 5, 2,3). [B. D. s. v. 
Kidron, ef. Cedron, 2; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the 
Holy Land, p. 96 sq.]* 

κεῖμαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἔκειτο; to lie; 1. prop.: 
of an infant, foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 ['Tdf. 
om. κείμ.], 16; of one buried: ὅπου or οὗ, Mt. xxviii. 6; 
Lk. xxiii. 53; Jn. xi. 41 Rec.; xx. 12; of things that 
‘quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R GL br.]; Jn. 
xx. 5-7; xxi. 9; with ἐπί τε added, 2 Co. iii. 15; ἐπάνω 
τινός (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14; also of 
things put'or set in any place, in ref. to which we often 
use fo stand: thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6; xix. 29, (χύτρας 
“κειμένας, Xen. oec. 8, 19); of a throne, Rev. iv. 2 (Jer. 
xxiv. 1; Hom. Il. 2, 777; Od. 17, 331); κεῖσθαι πρός τι, 
to be brought near to a thing [see πρός, I. 2 a.], Mt. iii. 
10; Lk. iii. 9; absol, of the site of a city, τετράγωνος 
κεῖται, Rey. xxi. 16; of grain and other things laid up, 
gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co. 
jii. 11. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God's intent) 
set, i. e. destined, appointed: foll. by eis w. acc. indicating 
the purpose, Lk. ii. 34; Phil.i.17 (16); 1 Th.iii.3. b. 
as very often in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1694"; 
[ L. and S. s. v. IV. 27), of laws, to be made, laid down: 
τινί, 1 "Tim. i. 9. C. ὁ κόσμος ὅλος ἐν TO πονηρῷ κεῖται. 
lies in the power of the evil one, i. 6. is held in subjec- 
tion by the devil, 1 Jn. v. 19. [Comp.: ἀνά-, συν-ανά-, 
“ἀντί-, árró-, ἐπί-, kará-, παρά-, περί-, πρό-κειμαι. * 

κειρία, -ας, 7, α band, either for a bed-girth (Schol. ad 
Arstph. av. 817 κειρία - εἶδος ζώνης ἐκ σχοινίων, παρεοι- 
xos ἱμάντι, jj δεσμοῦσι τὰς κλίνας, cf. Prov. vii. 16; [Plut. 
Alcib. 16, 1]), or for tying up a corpse after it has been 
swathed in linen: in the latter sense in Jn. xi. 44; [al. 
take it here of the swathings themselves ].* 

Ke(po ; [1 aor. ἔκειρα (Acts viii. 32 T WH mrg.)]; 1 aor. 
mid. ἐκειράμην ; fr. Hom. down; to shear: a sheep, Acts 
viii. 32 ([cf. above] fr. Ts. liii. 7). Mid. to get or let be shorn 
LW. § 38, 2b.; B. $ 135, 4]: τὴν κεφαλήν, Acts xviii. 18; 
absol. of shearing or cutting short the hair of the head, 
1 Co. xi. 6 [cf. W. $ 43, 1].* 

Kets, see Kis. 

κέλευσμα, -ros, τό, (κελεύω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt. 
down, an order, command, spec. a stimulating cry, either 
that by which animals are roused and urged on by man, 
as horses by charioteers, hounds by hunters, ete., or that 
by which a signal is given to men, e. g. to rowers by the 
master of a ship (Leian. tyr. or catapl. c. 19), to sol- 
diers by a commander (Thuc. 2, 92; Prov. xxiv. 62 
(xxx. 27)): ἐν κελεύσματι, with a loud summons, a trum- 
pet-call, 1 Th. iv. 16.* 

κελεύω ; impf. ἐκέλευον : 1 aor. ἐκέλευσα; to command, 
order: twa, foll. by an aor. inf., Mt. xiv. 19, 28; Acts iv. 
15; by the ace. with aor. inf., Mt. xviii. 25; xxvii. 58 
ΓΒ GL], 64; Lk. xviii. 40; Acts v. 34; viii. 38; xxii. 30; 
xxiii. 10; xxv. 6, 17; the acc. is wanting because evident 
fr. the context, Mt. viii. 18; xiv. 9; [xxvii. 58 TWH 


343 





κενοφωνία 


(Trin br.)]; Acts xii. 19; xxi. 33; foll. by ace. with 
pres. inf., Acts xxi. 34; xxii. 24; xxiii. 3,35; xxiv. 8 
RG; xxv. 21; xxvii. 43; the acc. is wanting because 
easily discernible fr. the context, Acts xvi. 22 [ef. B. 201 
(174); W.§ 40, 3 d.]; by a use not infreq. in Hom., but 
somewhat rare in prose writ., with the dat. of a pers. 
(Plat. rep. 3 p. 396 a.; Thue. 1, 44; Diod. 19, 17; Jo- 
seph. antt. 20, 6, 2; Tob. viii. 18; cf. Poppo on Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 3, 9 var.), foll. by an inf., Mt. xv. 35 RG; cf. B. 
275 (236). κελεύσαντός twos, at one's command, Acts 
xxv. 23. [On the constr. of xeA., esp. with the pass. inf. 
and ace., see B. $ 141, 5 cf. p. 237 (204) note; also W. 
336 (315), 332 (311).]* 

[SxN.: κελεύειν, παραγγέλλειν, ἐντέλλεσθαι, τάσ- 
σειν (and its comp.): κελ. to command, designates verbal 
orders, emanating (usually) from a superior; παραγγέλλω 
to charge, etc., is used esp. of the order of a military com- 
mander which is passed along the line by his subordinates, 
(Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 2); ἐντέλλεσθαι to enjoin, is employed 
esp. of those whose office or position invests them with 
claims, and points rather to the contents of the command, 


cf. our “instructions”; τάσσω lit. assign a post to, with a 


suggestion of duties as connected therewith; often used of a 
military appointment (cf. τάξις) ; its compounds ἐπιτάσσειν 
and προστάσσειν differ from évr. in denoting fixed and abid- 
ing obligations rather than specific or occasional instruc- 
tions, duties arising from the office rather than emanating 
from the personal will of à superior. Schmidt ch. 8.] 

κενοδοξία, -as, 7), (κενόδοξος, q. v), vain-glory, groundless 
self-esteem, empty pride: Phil.ii.3. (4 Macc.ii.15; viii. 
18; Polyb., Plut., Leian. ; [Philo de mut. nom. $ 15; leg. 
ad Gaium § 16; ete.]; eccl. writ. ; univ. a vain opinion, 
error, Sap. xiv. 14.) * lj 

κενόδοξος, -ov, (κενός, δόξα), glorying without reason, con- 
ceited, vain-glorious, eager for empty glory: Gal. v. 26. 
(Polyb. Diod.; Antonin. 5, 1; [cf. Philo de trib. virt. 
§ 2 fin.]; eccl. writ.) * 

κενός, -7, -óv, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for bp", p*, p 
ete., empty 5 1. prop. of places, vessels, etc., which 
contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii.24); met- 
aph. empty, vain; devoid of truth: Xóyow Eph. v. 6 (Ex. v. 
9); ἀπάτη, Col.ii. 85 κήρυγμα, πίστις, 1 Co. xv. 14. 2. 
of men, emply-handed ; without a gift: ἀποστέλλειν and 
ἐξαποστέλλειν τινὰ κενόν (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13; 
xvi.16), Mk. xii. 3; Lk.i.53; xx. 10 sq.; metaph. desti- 
tute of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as 
a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of 
faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors, 
acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without effect: 
ἡ χάρις, 1 Co. xv. 10; κόπος, ib. 58; ἡ εἴσοδος, 1 Th. ii. 1; 
neut. plur. κενά, things that will not succeed, Acts iv. 25 
(fr. Ps. ii. 1); εἰς κενόν, in vain, to no purpose, [cf. W. 
592 (551)]: 2 Co. vi. 1; Gal. i. 2; Phil. ii. 16; 1 Th. 
iii. 5, (Is. Ixv. 23; Jer. vi. 29, ete.; Diod. 19, 9; Heliod. 
10, 30). [Cf. Trench, Syn. 8 xlix.]* í 

κενοφωνία, -as, 7. (κενόφωνος uttering emptiness), (va- 
niloquium, Vulg. [ed. Clem. (in 2 Tim. ii. 16)]), empty 
discussion, discussion of vain and useless matters, [A. V. 
babbling]: 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. ii. 16. ([Dioscor. 1 
prooem. p. 3, 1]; eccles. writ.) * 


Kevoo 


xevóo, -à: [fut. κενώσω, 1 Co. ix. 15 L txt. T Tr WH]; 
1 aor. ékévoca; Pass, pf. κεκένωμαι; 1 aor. ἐκενώθην ; 
(κενός) ; 1. to empty, make empty: ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσε, 
sc. τοῦ εἶναι ἴσα θεῷ or τῆς μορφῆς τοῦ θεοῦ, i. e. he laid 
aside equality with or the form of God (said of Christ), 
Phil. ii. 7 (see a fuller exposition of this passage in 
μορφή). 2. to make void i. 6. deprive of force, ren- 
der vain, useless, of no effect: pass., Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. i. 
IV: 3. to make void i. e. cause a thing to be seen to 
be empty, hollow, false: τὸ καύχημα, 1 Co. ix. 15; pass. 
2 Co. ix. 3. (Twice in Sept. viz. Jer. xiv. 25 xv. 9; 
often in Attic writ.) * 

κέντρον, -ov, τό, (kevréo to prick) ; 1. a sting, as 
that of bees (4 Mace. xiv. 19), scorpions, locusts, Rev. ix. 
10. Since animals wound by their sting and even cause 
death, Paul in 1 Co. xv. 55 (after Hos. xiii. 14 Sept.) 
attributes to death, personified, a κέντρον, i. 6. a deadly 
weapon, and that κέντρον is said to be ἡ ἁμαρτία [56], be- 
cause sin is death’s cause and punishment [?] (Ro. v. 
12). 2. as in the Grk. writ. an iron goad, for urg- 
ing on oxen, horses and other beasts of burden; hence 
the proverb πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν, to kick against the 
goad, i. e. to offer vain and perilous or ruinous resist- 
ance: Acts ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14; cf. Pind. Pyth. 2, 173; 
Aeschyl. [ Ag. 1624, cf.] Prom. 323; Eurip. Bacch. 795; 
"Terent. Phorm. 1, 2, 28; Ammian. 18, 5.* 

κεντυρίων, -ovos, 6, ἃ Lat. word, a centurion: Mk. xv. 
39, 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 5.]* 

[ Kevxpeat, see Keyxpeat. ] 

κενῶς, adv., vainly, in vain, [W. 463 (431); Aristot. 
on]: Jas. iv. 5.* 

κεραία [WII xepéa (see their ‘App. p. 151)], -as, ἡ, 
(κέρας), a little horn ; extremity, apex, point; used by the 
Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacritical points. 
In Mt. v. 18 [(where see Wetstein; cf. also Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 sq.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little 
lines, or projections, by which the Hebr. letters in other 
respects similar differ from each other, as n and ΤΊ, Ἢ and Ἢ, 
3 and 5, [A.V. tittle]; the meaning is, ‘not even the mi- 
nutest part of the law shall perish.’ [(Aeschyl.,Thuc.,al.) ]* 

κεραμεύς, -€ws, 6, (κεράννυμι), a potter: Mt. xxvii. 7,10; 
Ro. ix. 21. (Hom., Hes., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al. ; Sept. 
several times for *3Y.) * 

κεραμικός, 77, -óv, (κέραμος) : 1. in class. Grk. of 
or belonging to a potter: hence x. yj, such as a potter 
uses, Hippoer.; τέχνη, Plat. polit. p. 288 a. 2. in 
the Bible made of clay, earthen: Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41), 
for which the Greeks use κεραμεοῦς, -à, -odv, and κεράμιος 
[al. -μειος], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94)].* 

κεράμιον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. κεράμιος, see the 
preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. κέραμος), an 
earthen vessel, a pot, jar; a jug or pitcher: with ὕδατος 
added, a water-pitcher, Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. (The- 
ophr. caus. plant. 3, 4, 3; οἴνου, Jer. xlii. (xxxv.) 5; 
Xen. anab. 6, 1, 15; Dem. p. 934, 26; Polyb. 4, 56, 3; 
ἐλαίου, Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2.) * 

κέραμος, -ov, 6, (κεράννυμι) 5 
2. anything made of clay, earthen ware. 


1. clay, potter's earth. 
3. spec.a 


944 





κεράτιον" 


(roofing) tile (Thue., Athen., Hdian., al.) ; the roof itself 
(Arstph. fr. 129 d.): so διὰ τῶν κεράμων, through the roof, 
i. e. through the door in the roof to which a ladder or 
stairway led up from the street (accordingly the Rabbins 
distinguish two ways of entering a house, ‘the way 
through the door’ and ‘the way through the roof’ [ LgAtft. 
Horae Hebr. p. 601]; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Dach; Keim 
li. p. 176 sq. [Eng. trans. iii. 215; Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, i. 501 sq. ; Jewish Social Life, p. 93 sqq.]), Lk. 
v. 19. Mark (ii. 4) describes the occurrence differently 
(see ἀποστεγάζω), evidently led into error by misappre- 
hending the words of Luke. [But, to saynothing of the 
improbability of assuming Mark's narrative to be de- 
pendent on Luke's, the alleged discrepance disappears. 
if Luke’s language is taken literally, “through the 
tiles" (see διά, A. I. 1); he says nothing of * the door 
in the roof.’ On the various views that have been taken 
of the details of the occurrence, see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 
s. v. House; Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 1. ¢.]* 

κεράννυμι (κεραννύω) : 1 aor. ἐκέρασα ; pf. pass. κεκέρα-- 
σμαι (for the more com. κέκραμαι, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
582; Bim. Ausf. Sprehl. ii. p. 214; Krüger § 40 s. v. 
i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to: 
mix, mingle. 2. to mix wine and water. 3. to 
pour out for drinking: τινί τι, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle]; 
pass., Rey. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11; Anthol. 
11,137, 12). [Comp.: συγ-κεράννυμι. ]* 

[Syn. κεράννυμι, μίγνυμι : in strict usage cep. denotes such a. 
mixing as combines the ingredients into a new compound, 
chemical mixture; μίγν. such a mixing as merely blends: 
or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture.] 

κέρας, -aros, plur. κέρατα, gen. -άτων (W. 65 (63); B. 
15 (13)), τό, [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. pp horn; a. 
prop.: of animals, Rev. v. 6; xii. 3; xiii. 1, 115 xvii. 3, 7,. 
12, 16. b. Since animals (esp. bulls) defend them- 
selves with their horns, the horn with the Hebrews (and. 
other nations) is a symbol of strength and courage, and 
is used as such in a variety of phrases (Ps. xxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 18; exxxi. (exxxii.) 17; exlviii. 14; 1 S. ii. 
10; Sir. xlvii. 5, 7, 11; 1 Macc. ii. 48, etc. ; cf. Gesenius, 
Thes. iii. p. 1238; [B. D. s. v. Horn]); hence xépas- 
σωτηρίας (of God, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3; 2 S. xxii. 3), i. q. 
a mighty and valiant helper, the author of deliverance, of 
the Messiah, Lk. i. 69. C. trop. a projecting extremity 
in shape like a horn, a point, apez: as, of an altar, Rev. 
ix. 13; (Ex. xxix. 12; Lev. iv. 7, 18; xvi. 18; Am. iii. 
14; Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 27).* 

κεράτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κέρας); 1. a little 
horn. 2. the name of the fruit of the xeparéa or 
xepareía [or -ría], the Ceratonia siliqua (Linn.) or carob- 
tree (called also St. John's Bread, [from the notion that 
its pods, which resemble those of the ‘locust’, constituted 
the food of the Baptist]). This fruit is shaped like a 
horn and has a sweet taste; it was [and is] used not 
only in fattening swine, but as an article of food by the 
lower classes: Lk. xv. 16 [A. V. husks]; cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Johannisbrodbaum; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v- 
Husks].* 


κερδαίνω 


κερδαίνω: [fut. κερδήσω, Jas. iv. 18 Rec? LT Tr 
WH; see also below]; 1 aor. ἐκέρδησα (an Ionic form fr. 
κερδάω, which later writ. use for the earlier ἐκέρδανα, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 740; Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 215; 
W. 87 (83); [Veitch s. v.]), once 1 aor. subj. κερδάνω (1 
Co. ix. 21 L T Tr [but WH (cf. also Grsb. note) read the 
fut. κερδανῶ, cf. B. 60 (53); § 139, 38]); 1 fut. pass. 
κερδηθήσομαι (the subjune. κερδηθήσωνται, 1 Pet. iii. 1 
R G is a clerical error [cf. reff. s. v. καίω, init.], for which 
LT Tr WH have restored κερδηθήσονται [cf. B. $ 139, 
38]; [fr. Hes. down]; (fr. κέρδος) ; to gain, acquire ; 
(Vulg. passim /ucrifacio [also lucro, etc.]) ; a. prop.: 
τὸν κόσμον, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; money, 
Mt. xxv. 16 [DT WH], 17, 20, 22; absol. to get gain, 
Jas. iv. 13. b. metaph. a. with nouns signify- 
ing loss, damage, injury, it is used of the gain arising 
from shunning or escaping from the evil (where 
we say to spare one’s self, be spared): τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην 
x. ζημίαν, Acts xxvii. 21; τό ye μιανθῆναι τὰς χεῖρας κερδαί- 
νειν, to avoid the crime οἵ fratricide, Joseph. antt. 2, 3, 
2; ζημίαν, to escape a loss, Eur. Cycl. 312; other exx. in 
Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 139 sq. B. τινά, to gain any one 
i.e.to win him over to the kingdom of God, which none 
but the placable enter, Mt. xviii. 15; to gain one to faith 
in Christ, 1 Pet. iii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 19-22; Χριστόν, to gain 
Christ's favor and fellowship, Phil. iii. S. Not found in 
the O. T.* 

κέρδος, -eos (-ovs), τό, gain, advantage: Phil.i.21 (with 
which cf. Ael. v. h. 4, 7 rots κακοῖς οὐδὲ τὸ ἀποθανεῖν Kép- 
dos); Tit.i.11; plur. Phil. iii. 7. [From Hom. down.]* 

[κερέα, see Kepaia. | 

κέρμα, -ros, 70, (κείρω to cut into bits), small pieces of 
money, small coin, change; generally and collectively, τὸ 
κέρμα money: Jn. ii. 15, where Lmrg. Tr WH τὰ κέρματα: 
(Arstph., Dem., Joseph., al.). Cf. the full exhibition of 
the use of the word given by Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum 
N. T. ete. p. 264 sqq.* 

κερματιστής, -οὔ, 6, (κερματίζω [to cut into small pieces, 
to make small change ]), a money-changer, money-broker : 
Jn. ii. 14. In the court of the Gentiles [(see ἱερόν, and 
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 244 sq.)] in the temple 
at Jerusalem were the seats of those who sold such ani- 
mals for sacrifice as had been selected, examined, and 
approved, together with incense, oil, and other thines 
needed in making offerings and in worship; and the 
magnitude of this traffic had introduced the banker's or 
broker's business; [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Money-changers ; 
esp. Edersheim τι. s. p. 367 sqq.]. (Nicet. annal. 7, 2 p. 
266 ed. Bekk.; Max. Tyr. diss. 2 p. 15 ed. Markland.)* 

κεφάλαιον, -ov, τό. (neut. of the adj. κεφάλαιος, belong- 
ing to the head); 1. the chief or main point, the 
principal thing, (Vulg. capitulum) : Heb. viii. 1 [cf. B. 
154 (134)]; (freq. so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Thuc. and 
Plat. down). 2. the pecuniary sum total of a reck- 
oning, amount, (Plut. Fab. 4); the principal, capital, as 
distinguished fr. the interest (Plat. lege. 5, 742 c.) ; univ. 
a sum of money, sum, (Vulg. summa): Acts xxii. 28; so 
Lev.vi.5; Num. v. 7; xxxi. 26; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3; 


945 








κῆνσος 


Artem. oneir. 1, 17; see other exx. in Kypke, Observv. 
li. p. 116; [L. and S. s. v. 5 b.].* i 

κεφαλαιόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐκεφαλαίωσα [T WII ἐκεφαλίωσα: 
(see below) ]; (κεφάλαιον) ; 1. to bring under heads, 
10 sum up, to summarize, (Thue., Aristot., al.). 2. in 
an unusual sense, fo smite or wound in the head: Mk. xii. 
4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb: 
γναθόω, which means εἰς γνάθους τύπτω to smite on the 
cheek, since κεφάλαιον is nowhere used of the head of the 
body.. Tdf. [WH] (after codd. καὶ BL) have adoptéd 
ἐκεφαλίωσαν (fr. κεφάλιον, i. 4. keadis, 4. ν.). But nei- 
ther κεφαλιόω nor κεφαλίζω has yet been noted in any 
Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [Comp.: 
ἀνα-κεφαλαιόω.] ἢ 

κεφαλή, -ῆς, 7, Sept. for ὗν; the head, both of men: 
Mt. v. 36; Mk. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [ Rec.], 46; Jn. xiii. 
9; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4; Rev. i. 14; iv. 4, and often; 
and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, ete.; on the phrases 
κλίνειν τὴν k., ἐπαίρειν THY K-, See κλίνω, 1 and éraipw; on 
the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under ἄνθραξ. Since the 
loss of the head destroys the life, κεφαλή is used in 
phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments: 
so in τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κ- ὑμῶν (see αἷμα, 2 a. p. 15"), 
Acts xviii. 6, and similar phrases in class. Grk.; see 
Passow s. v. p. 1717*; Pape s. v. 3; [L. and S. s. v. I. 
3and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent ; 
of persons, master, lord: τινός, of a husband in relation 
to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3; Eph. v. 23; of Christ, the lord 
of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [cf. B. 124 sq. (109)]; of the 
church, Eph. iv. 155 v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [cf. B. $ 143,4 c.]; 
τοῦ σώματος τῆς ekkA. Col. i. 18; πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας. 
Col. ii. 10; so Judg. xi. 11; 2 S. xxii. 44, and in Byzant. 
of things: κεῴ. γωνίας, the corner-stone, see γω- 
via, a. [(From Hom. down.) ]* 

κεφαλιόω : Mk. xii. 4 T WH (approved also by Weiss, 
Volkmar, al.), for κεφαλαιόω, q. v. 

κεφαλίς, -idos, 7, (dimin. of κεφαλή, formed after the 
analogy of duagis, πινακίς, ete.; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 
p.443; Kühner $ 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708); 1. alittle 
head (Lat. capitellum, capitulum). 2. the highest part, 
extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column, 
1 K. vii. 9, 31 ete.; Geop. 14. 6, 6; hence the tips or 
knobs (the umbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua ; 
see Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52 sq.; Rich, Dict. 
s. v. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod around which parch- 
ments were rolled seem to have been called κεφαλίδες, be- 
cause they resembled little heads; so that 3. the 
Alexand. writ. transferred the name κεφαλίς to the roll 
or volume itself: ἐν κεφαλίδι βιβλίου, Heb. x. 7 (fr. Sept. 
of Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 8 for 320-303, as in Ezek. ii. 9,. 
and without βιβλίου, iii. 1-3; 2 Esdr. vi. 2 [cf. Birt, An- 
tikes Buchwesen, (Berl. 1882), p. 116]), Itala: in volu- 
mine libri, in the roll of the book [cf. W. 23 (22)]. The 
different opinions are noticed by Bleek ad loc.* 

κημόω, -@: fut. κημώσω ; (κημός a muzzle) ; to stop the 
mouth by a muzzle, to muzzle: βοῦν, 1 Co. ix. 9 T Tr 
WHmrz. (Xen. r. eq. 5, 3); see φιμόω." 

κῆνσος, -ov, 6, the Lat. word census (among the Ro- 


writ. 


κῆπος 


mans, denoting a register and valuation of property in 
accordance with which taxes were paid), in the N. T. (as 
in Cod. Just. 4, 47) the taz or tribute levied on individuals 
and to be paid yearly (Hesych. κῆνσος- εἶδος νομίσματος, 
ἐπικεφάλαιον, our capitation or poll taz): Mt. xvii. 25; 
xxii. 17; Mk. xii. 14; τὸ νόμισμα τοῦ κήνσου, the coin 
with which the tax is paid, tribute money, Mt. xxii. 19.* 

κῆπος, -ov, 6, [thought to be allied with σκάπτω, Lat. 
campus, ete.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 733, 734, na 
garden: Lk. xiii.19; Jn.xviii.1, 26; xix. 41. [BB. DD. 
s. v. Garden.]* 

κηπ-ουρός, -o), ὁ, (κῆπος and οὖρος), a keeper of a gar- 
den, a gardener: Jn. xx. 15 [BB.DD. s. v. Garden]. 
(Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Epictet., al.) * 

κηρίον, -ov, τό, (κηρός wax), fr. Iles. and Hdt. down, 
honeycomb : κηρίον μελίσσιον, a honeycomb (still contain- 
ing the honey), Lk. xxiv. 42 RGTrbr. (1 S. xiv. 27; 
Prov. xvi. 24; xxiv. 13).* 

κήρυγμα, -τος, τό, (knpvcow),in Grk. writ. esp. Attic, that 
which is promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla- 
mation by herald; in the N. 'T. the message or proclama- 
tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc- 
lamation of the necessity of repentance and reformation 
made by the prophet Jonah [ A.V. preaching], τὸ κήρυγμα 
"Iova, Mt. xii. 41; Lk. xi. 32, (Jon. iii. 4) ; the announce- 
ment of salvation procured by Christ and to be had 
through him: absol, 1 Co. i. 21; Tit. i. 3; w. gen. of 
the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4; xv. 14; w. gen. of the 
obj. Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, concerning Jesus Christ, Ro. xvi. 25, 
cf. Philippi ad loc.; [τῆς αἰωνίου σωτηρίας, Mk. xvi. WH 
in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion']; the act of publish- 
ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 17 [but R. V. that the message might 
be fully proclaimed ; see πληροφορέω, a.].* 

κήρυξ, less correctly [yet so L WH] κῆρυξ (on the ac- 
cent see W. $ 6,1 ο.; [B. 13 (12)]; Lipsius, Gramm. 
Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler $ 622; Gottling p. 254 sq.; 
Lob. Paralip. p. 411; W. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. s. v.; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -vkos, 6, (akin to γῆρυς a voice, a 
sound, γηρύω to utter a sound, to speak; [yet cf. Vanicek 
p. 140]) ; com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a herald, a 
messenger vested with publie authority, who conveyed the 
official messages of kings, magistrates, princes, military 
commanders, or who gave a publie summons or demand, 
and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen. 
xli.43; Dan.iii.4; Sir. xx.15. Inthe N. T. God's am- 
bassador, and the herald or proclaimer of the divine word : 
δικαιοσύνης, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah, 
2 Pet. ii. 5; used of the apostles, as the divine messen- 
gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em- 
braced through him, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11.* 

xnpócco; impf. ἐκήρυσσον; fut. κηρύξω; 1 aor. ἐκή- 
pv£a, [inf. κηρύξαι Τὶ G^ Tr WH, κηρῦξαι L T ; cf. Lipsius, 
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101; W. 
§ 6, 1 f. (see reff. s. v. κήρυξ)] ; Pass., pres. κηρύσσομαι; 
1 aor. éexnpdxOnv; 1 fut. κηρυχθήσομαι; (κήρυξ, α- v-) ; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for &5p; to be a herald; to officiate as 
herald ; to proclaim after the manner of a herald; always 
with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority 


346 





κιβωτός 


which must be listened to and obeyed; a. univ. 
to publish, proclaim openly: something which has been 
done, Mk. vii. 36; τὸν λόγον, Mk.i. 45 (here joined with 
διαφημίζεινν ; foll. by indir. dise., Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39; 
something which ought to be done, foll. by the inf. (ef. 
W. 322 (302); [B. § 141, 2]), Ro. ii. 21; Μωῦσῆν, the 
authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21; περιτομήν, 
the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec. 
used of the public proclamation of the gospel and mat- 
ters pertaining to it, made by John the Baptist, by Jesus, 
by the apostles and other Christian teachers: absol., Mt. 
xi. 1; Mk. i. 38; iii. 14; xvi. 20; Ro. x. 15 ; w. dat. of 
the pers. to whom the proclamation is made, 1 Co. ix. 27 ; 
1 Pet. iii. 19; eis [R ἐν w. dat.] ras συναγωγάς (see eis, 
A. I. 5 b.; ef. W. 213 (200)), Mk. i. 39; [Lk. iv. 44 T Tr 
txt. WH]; (6) κηρύσσων, Ro. x. 14; κηρύσσειν w. acc. of 
the thing, Mt. x. 27; Lk.[iv. 19]; xii. 3; τινί τι, Lk. iv. 
18 (19); τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλ., Mt. iv.23; ix. 35; Mk. 
i. 14 (where G L br. T Tr WH τὸ εὐ. τοῦ θεοῦ) ; τὸ etayy. 
simply, Mk. xvi. 15; Gal. ii. 2; τὸ ebayy. τοῦ θεοῦ εἴς 
τινας (see above), 1 Th. ii. 9; pass, Mt. xxiv. 14; xxvi. 
13; Col.i.23; with eis πάντα rà ἔθνη or eis ὅλον τ. κόσμον 
added, Mk. xiii. 10; xiv. 9; τὸν λόγον, 2 Tim. iv. 2; τὸ 
ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως, Ro. x. 8; τὴν βασιλ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. viii. 
1; ix. 3; Acts xx. 25 [here GL T Tr WI om. τοῦ θεοῦ]; 
xxviii. 31; βάπτισμα, the necessity of baptism, Mk. i. 4; 
Lk. iii. 3; Acts x. 37; μετάνοιαν καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν, by 
public proclamation to exhort to repentance and promise 
the pardon of sins, Lk. xxiv. 47; tva μετανοῶσιν [RG 
μετανοήσωσι (see tva, II. 2b.; [B. 237 (204) ]), Mk. vi. 12. 
τινά τισι, to proclaim to persons one whom they are to 
become acquainted with in order to learn what they ought 
to do: Χριστόν, or τὸν Ἰησοῦν, Acts viii. 5; xix. 13; Phil. 
i. 15; 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. iv. 5 (where it is opp. to ἑαυτὸν 
knp. to proclaim one's own excellence and authority); 2 
Co. xi. 4; pass., ó kgpvxOeís, 1 Tim. iii. 16; with διά and 
gen. of pers. added, 2 Co. i.19; with the epexegetic addi- 
tion, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ vids τ. θεοῦ, Acts ix. 20; ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν 
ἐγήγερται, 1 Co. xv. 125 τινί foll. by ὅτι, Acts x. 42; np. 
foll. by λέγων with direct disc., Mt. [iii.1 L TWH]; x. ?; 
Mk. i. 7; κηρύσσειν x. λέγειν foll. by direct disc., Mt. iii. 
1[RGTrbr.]; iv. 17; «yp. ἐν (omitted in Rec.) φωνῇ 
μεγάλῃ. foll. by direct disc. (of an angel as God's herald), 
Rev. v. 2; κηρ. with οὕτως added, 1 Co. xv. 11. On this 
word see Zezschwitz, Petri apost. de Christi ad inferos 
descensu sententia. (Lips. 1857) p. 31 sqq.; [ Campbell, 
Dissert. on the Gospels, diss. vi. pt. v. — CoMr.: mpo- 
κηρύσσω.} * 

κῆτος, -eos (τους), τό, @ sea-monster, whale, huge fish, 
(Hom., Aristot., al.): Mt. xii. 40, fr. Jon. ii. 1 where Sept. 
κήτει μεγάλῳ for om 4.” E 

Κηφᾶς, -à [ B. 20 (18) ], 6, (Chald. «2^3 a rock), Cephas 
(i. q. Πέτρος [cf. B.D. (Am. ed.) p. 2459]), the surname 
of Simon the apostle: Jn. i.42 (43) ; 1 Co. i. 12; iii. 22; 
ix. 5; xv. 5; Gal.ii. 9; and L T Tr WH also in Gal. i. 
18; ii. 11, 14.* 

κιβωτός, -ov, ἡ, (κίβος [cf. Suidas 2094 c.]), a wooden 
chest, box, ((Hecatae. 368 (Miiller’s Frag. i. p. 30), Si- 


κιθάρα 


* 
mon.], Arstpb., Lysias, Athen., Ael., al.) : in the N. T., 
the ark of the covenant, in the temple at Jerusalem, 
Heb. ix. 4 (Philo, Joseph.; Sept. very often for rw); in 
the heavenly temple, Rev. xi. 19; of Noah’s vessel, built 
in the form of an ark, Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. xvii. 27; Heb. xi. 
7; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (4 Mace. xv. 31; Sept. for 112).* 

κιθάρα, -as, 7, α harp [cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. 
iv.; B.D. s. v. Harp]: 1 @o. xiv. 7; Rev. v. 8; xiv. 2; 
τοῦ θεοῦ. to which the praises of God are sung in heaven, 
Rev. xv. 2; cf. W. $ 36, 3 b. [From Hom. h. Merc., 
Hdt. on.]* 

κιθαρίζω ; pres. pass. ptep. κεθαριζόμενος ; to play upon 
the harp [ (see the preceding word) ]: with ἐν rais κιθάραις 
added, [ A.V. harping with their harps], Rev. xiv. 2; τὸ 
κιθαριζόμενον, what is harped, 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Is. xxiii. 16; 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 18, 570 down.) * 

κιθαρ-ῳδός, -o), ὁ, (κιθάρα [q. v.], and dds, contr. fr. 
ἀοιδός, a singer), a harper, one who plays on the harp and 
accompanies it with his voice: Rev. xiv. 2; xviii. 22. 
([Hdt., Plat., al.], Diphil. in Athen. 6 p. 247 d.; Plut. 
mor. 166 a.; Ael. v. h. 4, 2; superl. (extended form) 
κιθαραοιδότατος, Arstph. vesp. 1278. Varro der. r. 2, 1, 
3 *non omnes, qui habent citharam, sunt citharoedi.") * 

Κιλικία, -as, ἡ, Cilicia, a province of Asia Minor, bound- 
ed on the N. by Cappadocia, Lyeaonia and Isauria, on 
the S. by the Mediterranean, on the E. by Syria, and on 
the W.by Pamphylia. Its eapital, Tarsus, was the birth- 
place of Paul: Acts vi.9; xv. 23, 41; xxi. 39; xxii. 3; 
xxiii. 34; xxvii. 9; Gal.i.21. [Cf. Conybeare and How- 
son, St. Paul, i. 19 sqq.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq.]* 

κινάμωμον, more correctly [so L T Tr WH] κιννάμωμον, 
του, τό, Hebr. 7133p, [(see L. and S. s. v.)], cinnamon: 
Rev. xviii. 13. (ildt., Theophr., Strab., Diod., Joseph., 
al.; Sept.) Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Zimmt; [B.D. s. v. Cin- 
namon; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Kinnamon].* 

κινδυνεύω ; impf. ἐκινδύνευον ; (κίνδυνος) ; to be in jeop- 
ardy, to be in danger, to be putin peril:'Lk. viii. 23; 1 
Co. xv. 30; τοῦτο τὸ μέρος κινδυνεύει els ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν, 
this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute, Acts xix. 
27; κινδ. ἐγκαλεῖσθαι, we are in danger of being accused, 
ib. 40. (From [Pind.] and Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

κίνδυνος, -ov, 6, danger, peril: Ro. viii. 35; ἔκ τινος, 
prepared by one, [ from one], 2 Co. xi. 26; ibid. with a 
gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [of, cf. 
W.$ 30,2 a.]; so τῆς θαλάσσης. Plat. Euthyd. p. 279 e. ; 
de rep. i. p. 232 e. ; θαλασσῶν, Heliod. 2, 4, 65.* 

κινέω, -@; fut. κινήσω; 1 aor. inf. κινῆσαι; Pass., pres. 
κινοῦμαι: 1 aor. ἐκινήθην; (fr. κίω, poetic for IO, εἶμι, 
Curtius $ 57; hence) 1. prop. to cause to go, i. e. 
to move, set in motion, [fr. Hom. down]; a. prop. in 
pass. [e£f. W. 252 (231)] to be moved, move: of that motion 
whichis evidence of life, Acts xvii. 28 (Gen. vii. 21); κινεῖν 
δακτύλῳ φορτία, to move burdens with a finger, Mt. xxiii. 
4; τὴν κεφαλήν, to move to and fro [ A.V. wag], (expres- 
sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xv. 29, (Sept. for 
UNT yon, Ps. xxi. (xxii) 8; Job xvi. 4; Sir. xii. 18, 
ete.); ^ b. to move from a place, lo remove: τὶ ἐκ τοῦ 
τόπου. Rev. ii.5; ἐκ τῶν τόπων, pass., Rev. vi. 14. 2 


347 





τ 


Metaph. to move i. e. excite: στάσιν, a riot, disturbance, 
Acts xxiv. 5 ([see στάσις, 2]; ταραχήν, Joseph. b. j. 2, 9, 
4); τὴν πόλιν, lo throw into commotion, pass., Acts xxi. 30. 
[Comp.: pera-, συγ-κινέω. * 

κίνησις, -ews, 7), (κινέω), [fr. Plato on], a moving, agita- 
tion: τοῦ ὕδατος, Jn. v. 3 [RL].* 

Κίς (LT Tr WH Keis [ef. WH. App. p. 155; Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 84; B. 6 note!, and see εἰ; :]), 6, indecl., (wp 
[perh. ‘a bow’ (Gesen.)] fr. wip to lay snares), Kish, the 
father of Saul, the first king of Israel: Acts xiii. 21.* 

κίχρημι: 1 aor. act. impv. χρῆσον ; to lend: rivi τι, Lk 
xi. 5. (From Hdt. down.) [Syn. see δανείζω, fin.] * 

κλάδος, -ov, ὁ, (kdo) ; a. prop. a young, tender 
shoot, broken off for grafting. b. univ. a branch : 
Mt. xiii. 32; xxi.8; xxiv.32; Mk.iv. 32; xiii. 28; Lk. 
xiii. 19; as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root, 
so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19, 
21; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25; xl.15; Menand. frag. ed. Meineke 
p. 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg., 
Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) * 

κλαίω ; impf. ἔκλαιον ; fut. κλαύσω (Lk. vi. 25; Jn. xvi. 
20; and Tr WHtxt. in Rev. xviii. 9, for κλαύσομαι; more 
com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and found in Lev. x. 
6; Joel ii. 17, and ace. to most edd. in Rev. xviii. 9; cf. 
Krüger $40 s. v., i. p. 175 sq.; Kühner § 343 s. v., i. p. 
847; [Veitch s. v.]; B. 60 (53) ; [W. 87 (83)]); 1 aor. 
ἔκλαυσα; Sept. freq. for 7123; [from Hom. down]; to 
mourn, weep, lament ; a. intrans.: Mk. xiv. 72; xvi. 
10; LK. vii. 13,38; Jn. xi. 81, 33; xx. 11, 13, 15; Acts 
ix. 39; xxi. 13; Rev.[v. 5]; xviii. 15, 19; πολλά, for 
which L T Tr WH πολύ, Rev. v. 4; πικρῶς, Mt. xxvi. 75; 
Lk. xxii.62; weeping as the sign of pain and grief for 
the thing sienified (i. e. for pain and grief), Lk. vi. 21, 
25, (opp. to yedav); Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. xii. 15, (opp. to 
χαίρειν) ; Phil. iii. 18; 1 Co. vii. 30; Jas.iv.9; v.1; of 
those who mourn the dead: Mk. v. 38 sq. ; Lk. vii. 32: 
viii. 52; ἐπί τινι, over any one, Lk. xix. 41 RG (Sir. xxii. 
11); also joined with πενθεῖν, Rev. xviii. 11 RGL; xA. 
ἐπί τινα, Lk. xix. 41 LT Tr WH; xxiii. 28; joined with 
κόπτεσθαι foll. by ἐπί τινα, Rev. xviii. 9 T Tr WH. b. 
trans. τινά, to weep for, mourn for, bewail, one [cf. B. $ 131, 
4; W. 32, 1 y.]: Mt. ii. 18, and Rec. in Rev. xviii. 9.* 

[SYN. δακρύω, κλαίω, ὀδύρομαι, θρηνέω, ἄλαλάζω 
(ὀλολύζω), στενάζω: strictly, δ. denotes to shed tears, 
weep silently ; KA. to weep audibly, to cry as a child ; 65. to give 
verbal expression to grief, to lament; @p. to give formal 
expression to grief, to sing a dirge; àA. to wail in oriental 
style, to howl in a consecrated, semi-liturgical fashion; orev, 
to express grief by inarticulate or semi-articulate sounds, to 
groan. Cf. Schmidt chh. 26, 126.] 

κλάσις, -εως, ἡ, (κλάω, q- v.), a breaking: τοῦ ἄρτου, Lk. 
xxiv. 35; Acts ii. 42. (Plat., Theophr., al.) * 

κλάσμα, -τος, τό, (κλάω). a fragment, broken piece: 
plur., of remnants of food, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 
43; viii. 8,19 sq.; Lk.ix.17; Jn. vi.12sq. (Xen. cyn. 
10,5; Diod.17,13; Plut. Tib.Gr.19; Anthol.; Sept.) * 

Κλαύδη (L Tr WH Καῦδα [see WH. App. p. 160], 
T Κλαῦδα). -ης, ἡ, Clauda or Cauda the name of a small 
island lying near Crete on the south, called by Ptolem. 


Κλαυδία 


3, 17, 11 Κλαῦδος, by Pomp. Mela 2, 7 and Plin. h. n. 4, 
20 (12), 61 Gaudos, [(now Gaudo-nesi or Cleuda-nesa)] : 
Acts xxvii. 16.* 

KAav8(a, -as, 7, Claudia, a Christian woman: 2 Tim. 
iv.21. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v., also reff. s. v. 
Tlovdns. | * 

Κλαύδιος. -ov, 6, Claudius. 1. Tiberius Claudius 
Drusus Nero Germanicus, the Roman emperor, who 
came into power A.D. 41, and was poisoned by his wife 
Asrippina in the year 54: Acts xi. 28; xviii. 2. 2. 
Claudius Lysias, a Roman military tribune: Acts xxiii. 
26 [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lysias].* 

κλαυθμός, -o0, 6, (κλαίω) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for *53; 
weeping, lamentation: Mt. ii. 18; [viii. 12]; xiii. 42, 50; 
xxii. 18; xxiv.51; xxv. 80; Lk. xiii. 28; Acts xx. 37.* 

κλάω; 1 aor. ἔκλασα; Pass., [ pres. ptep. κλώμενος, 1 Co. 
xi. 24 RG (see below)]; 1 aor. ἐκλάσθην (Ro. xi. 20 L 
Tr); [fr. Hom. down]; £o break: used in the N. T.of the 
breaking of bread (see ἄρτος, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36; 
xxvi 26; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; [xxiv. 30]; 
Acts 11. 418... xx. 7, 115 xxvii. 85: 1 ΘΟ. χ 16: πὶ 28:: 
with εἴς τινας added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ‘to 
break and distribute among’ etc. (see eis, C. 1), Mk. viii. 
19; metaph. τὸ σῶμα, shattered, as it were, by a violent 
death, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG. [Cowr.: ék-, kara-kAdo. ] * 

κλείς, -δός, ace. κλεῖδα and κλεῖν (Lk. xi. 52; Rev. iii. 
7), aec. plur. κλεῖδας and κλεῖς (Mt. xvi. 19; Rev. i. 
18; ef. Kühner $ 130, i. p. 357; W. 65 (63), cf. B. 24 
(22); [W'H. App. p. 157]), ἡ, [fr. Hom. down]; a key. 
Since the keeper of the keys has the power to open and 
to shut, the word κλείς is fig. used in the N. T. to denote 


power and authority of various kinds [cf. B. D. s. v. Key], - 


viz. τοῦ φρέατος, to open or unlock the pit, Rev. ix. 1, 
cf. 2; τῆς ἀβύσσου, to shut, Rev. xx. 1, cf. 3; τοῦ θανά- 
Tov kai τοῦ ἅδου, the power to bring back into life from 
Hades and to leave there, Rev. i. 18; τῆς γνώσεως, the 
ability and opportunity to obtain knowledge, Lk. xi. 52; 
τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν (see βασιλεία, 3 e. p. 97” sub 
fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; rod Δαυΐδ, the power of David (who 
is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re- 
ceiving into the Messiah's kingdom and of excluding 
from it, Rev. iii. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where 
ἡ KX. οἴκου Δαυΐδ is given to the steward of the royal 
palace).* 

κλείω ; fut. κλείσω, Rev. iii. 7 L T Tr WH; 1 aor. 
ἔκλεισα ; Pass., pf. κέκλεισμαι, ptep. κεκλεισμένος ; 1 aor. 
ἐκλείσθην; Hebr. 130; [fr. Hom. down]; to shut, shut 
up; prop.: τὴν θύραν, Mt. vi. 6; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. 
xi. 7; plur., Jn. xx. 19, 26; Acts xxi. 30; a prison, pass. 
Acts v. 23; πυλῶνας, pass. Rev. xxi. 25; τὴν ἄβυσσον, 
Rev.xx.3 GL T Tr WH. metaph. : τὸν οὐρανόν. i. e. to 
cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi. 
6; τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ ἀπό τινος, to shut up compassion 
so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid 
of pity towards one [W. § 66, 2 d., cf. B. 322 (277)], 1 Jn. 
li.17; τὴν βασιλ. τῶν οὐρανῶν, to obstruct the entrance 
into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14) ; so used 
that τὴν Bac. rod θεοῦ must be understood, Rev. iii. 7; τ. 


948 








κληρονομέω 


θύραν, sc. τῆς Bac. τ. θεοῦ, ibid. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. 
[Cowr.: dzo-, ἐκ-, kara-, avy-kAeto.] * 

κλέμμα, -ros, τό, (κλέπτω) : a. thing stolen [ Aris- 
tot. ]. b. i. q. κλοπή theft, i. e. the act committed [Eur., 
Arstph., al.]: plur. Rev. ix. 21.* 

Κλεόπας [on the decl. cf. B. 20 (18) ], (apparently contr. 
fr. Κλεόπατρος, see ᾿Αντίπας [cf. Letronne in the Revue 
Archéologique, 1844—45, i. p. 485 sqq.]), 6, Cleopas, one 
of Christ's disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf. Bp. LgAtft. 
Com. on Gal. p. 267; B. D. s. v.]* 

κλέος, -ous, τό. (κλέω equiv. to καλέω) ; 1. rumor, 
2. glory, praise: 1 Pet. ii. 20. (In both 
senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; for yov, Job 
xxviii. 22.) * 

κλέπτης, -ov, 6, (κλέπτω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 333, 
a thief: Mt. vi.19 sq. ; xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 33, 39; Jn. x. 
1,10; 1 Co. vi. 105; 1 Pet. iv. 15; an embezzler, pilferer, 
Jn. xii. 6; ἔρχεσθαι or ἥκειν ws KX. ἐν νυκτί, i. q. to come 
unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2, 4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3; 
xvi.15; the name is transferred to false teachers, who do 
not eare to instruct men, but abuse their confidence for 
their own gain, Jn. x. 8. [Svw. see λῃστής, fin.]* 

κλέπτω; fut. κλέψω (Sept. also in Ex. xx. 145. Lev. xix. 
11; Deut. v. 19, for κλέψομαι more com. [(?) ef. Veiteh 
s. v.; Kühner § 343 s. v., i. 848] in prof. auth.) ; 1 aor. 
ἔκλεψα:; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 532; a. to 
steal; absol. to commit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq.; xix. 18; 
Mk. x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; Jn. x. 10; Ro. ii. 21; xiii. 9; 
Eph. iv. 28. b. trans. to steal i. e. take away by 
stealth: twa, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64; xxviii. 
13.* 

κλῆμα, -aros, τό, (fr. κλάω, q. V.), 1. q. κλάδος, a lender 
and flexible branch; spec. the shoot or branch of a vine, a 
vine-sprout: Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031; Aes- 
chin. in Ctes. p. 77, 27; "Theophr. ἢ. pl. 4, 13, 55 ἀμπέλου 
κλῆμα, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept. Ezek. xv. 2; xvii. 
6 sq. ; Joel i. 7).* . 

Κλήμης [cf. B. 16 sq. (15)], -evros, 6, Clement, a com- 
panion of Paul and apparently a member of the church 
at Philippi: Phil. iv. 3. Acc. to the rather improbable 
tradition of the catholie church, he is identical with that 
Clement who was bishop of Rome towards the close of the 
first century; [but see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. l. c. 
‘Detached Note’; Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biogr. i. 
555 sq. ].* 

κληρονομέω, -à; fut. κληρονομήσω; 1 aor. ἐκληρονόμησα: 


report. 


pf. κεκληρονόμηκα ; (κληρονόμος, q. V-; Cf. οἰκονόμος) ; Sept. 
for 5m3 and much oftener for v; 1. to receive a 
lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive a part of an inheritance, 
receive as aninheritance, obtain by right of inheritance; so, 
particularly in the Attie orators, w. a gen. of the thing; 
in later writ. not infreq. w. an ace. of the thing (ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 129; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p.140; W. 
200 (188); [B. $ 132,8]); absol. to be an heir, to inherit : 
Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ. to receive the 
portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive 
as one’s own or as a possession; to become partaker of, to 
obtain [cf. Eng. “ inherit”], (as φήμην, Polyb. 18, 58 


κληρονομία 


(55), 8; τὴν ἐπ᾽ εὐσεβείᾳ δόξαν, 15, 22, 3); in bibl. Grk. 
everywh. w. the acc. of the thing; so very freq. in the 
O. T. in the phrase κληρ. γῆν and τὴν γῆν, of the occupa- 
tion of the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as Lev. xx. 
24; Deut. iv. 22, 26; vi. 1, ete. But as the Israelites 
after taking possession of the land were harassed almost 
perpetually by their hostile neighbors, and even driven 
out of the country for a considerable period, it came to 
pass that the phrase was transferred to denote the tran- 
quil and stable possession of the holy land crowned with 
all divine blessings, an experience which pious Israel- 
ites were to expect under the Messiah: Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 13; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 9, 11, 22, 29, 34 Alex.; Is. 
lx. 21; Tob. iv. 12; ἐκ δευτέρας κληρονομήσουσι τὴν γῆν, 
Is. lxi. 7; hence it became a formula denoting to partake 
of eternal salvation in the Messiah’s kingdom: Mt. v. 5 
(4) (fr. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 11), where see Bleek. ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον, Mt. xix. 29; Mk. x. 17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; τὴν 
βασιλείαν, Mt. xxv. 34; βασιλείαν θεοῦ, 1 Co. vi. 9 sq.; xv. 
50; Gal v.21; σωτηρίαν, Heb. i. 14; τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, 
Heb. vi. 12; ἀφθαρσίαν, 1 Co. xv. 50; ταῦτα [ Rec. πάντα], 
tev. xxi. 7; ὄνομα, Heb. i. 4; τὴν εὐλογίαν, Heb. xii. 17; 
1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: κατα-κληρονομέω. * 
κληρονομία, -as, 7, (κληρονόμος), Sept. time and again 
for nom, several times for Nw, noy, ete. ; 1. 
an inheritance, properly received (or to be received) by 
inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.): Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. 
sabe ἦν ΤΩ Soils 19; Soe, 11: 2. what is given to 
one as a possession ([cf. Eng. “inheritance”]; see κλη- 
ρονομέω, 2): διδόναι τί τινι κληρονομίαν, Acts vii. 5; λαμ- 
Bavew τι εἰς κληρ. Heb. xi. 8 [ (ef. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14 
p- 1153”, 33)]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em- 
ploys nm now of the portion of the holy land allotted 
to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, etc.), now 
of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession 
(Deut. iv. 38; xv.4, etc. — and nothing appeared to the 
Israelites more desirable than the quiet, prosperous, per- 
manent possession of this land, see κληρονομέω, 2), the 
noun κληρονομία, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is 
used to denote a. the eternal, blessedness in the con- 
summated kingdom of God which is to be expected after the 
visible return of Christ: Gal.ii.18; Col. iii. 24 (τῆς κληρ. 
gen. of appos. [W. ὃ 59, 8a.]); Heb. ix. 15; 1 Pet.i.4; 
ἡμῶν, destined for us, Eph. i. 14; τοῦ θεοῦ, given by God, 
18. b. the share which an individual will have in that 
eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 32; Eph. v. 5.* 
κληρο-νόμος, -ου; ὁ, (κλῆρος, and νέμομαι to possess), prop. 
one who receives by lot; hence 1. an heir (in Grk. 
writ. fr. Plat. down) ; a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. 
xii 7; Lk. xx.14; Gal. iv. 1. b. in Messianic usage, 
one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship : 
so of Christ, as κληρονόμος πάντων, all things being sub- 
jected to his sway, Heb. i. 2; of Christians, as exalted 
by faith to the dignity of sons of Abraham and so of 
sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of God’s 
kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii.17; Gal. 
iii. 29; with rod θεοῦ added, i. 6. of God’s possessions, 
equiv. to τῆς δόξης (see δόξα, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 17; θεοῦ 


949 








κλῆσις 


διὰ Χριστοῦ, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through 
him we have obtained ἡ υἱοθεσία), Gal. iv. 7 Rec., for which 
LT Tr WH read διὰ θεοῦ [see διά, A. III. 1] (cf. C. F. A. 
Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 148 [who advocates 
the Rec. as that reading in which the others prob. origi- 
nated (but ef. Meyer in loc.; WH in loc.)]); To? κό- 
σμου, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq.; ζωῆς 
αἰωνίου, Tit. iii. 7; τῆς βασιλείας, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the 
idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac- 
quired or obtained the portion allotted him: w. gen. of the 
thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7; τοῦ σκότους, used of the devil, 
Ev. Nicod.c. 20 [or Descens. Chr. ad Inferos 4,1]. (Sept. 
four times for v5 : Judg. xviii. 7; 2S. xiv. 7; Jer. viii. 
10; Mic. i. 15.)* 

κλῆρος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for ow» 
and nm; a lot ; i. e. 1. an object used in casting 
or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd, 
or a bit of wood, (hence κλῆρος is to be derived fr. κλάω 
icf. Ellicott on Col. i. 12]): Acts i. 26 (see below); βάλ- 
New κλῆρ., Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. xxiii. 34; Jn. 
xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; Jon. i. 7, ete.) ; the lots of the 
several persons concerned, inscribed with their names, 
were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken, 
and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the 
one chosen (Hom. Il. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, ete.; Liv. 23, 
3 [but cf. B. D. Am.ed. s. v. Lot]) ; hence 6 κλῆρος πίπτει 
ἐπί twa, Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6; Jon. i. 7). 2 
what is obtained by lot, allotted portion: λαγχάνειν and 
λαμβάνειν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας, a portion in the min- 
istry common to the apostles, Acts i. 17, 25 RG; ἔστι 
μοι κλῆρος €v τινι, dat. of the thing, Acts viii. 21; like 
κληρονομία (q. v.) it is used of the part which one will 
have in eternal salvation, λαβεῖν τὸν KX. ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις, 
among the sanctified, Acts xxvi. 18 (Sap. v. 5); of eter- 
nal salvation itself, κλῆρος τῶν ἁγίων, i. 6. the eternal sal- 
vation which God has assigned to the saints, Col. i. 12 
[where ef. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, οἱ κλῆροι, those 
whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al- 
lotted charge], used of Christian churches, the adminis- 
tration of which falls to the lot of the presbyters: 1 Pet. 
v. 3, cf. Acts xvii. 4; [for patristic usage see Soph. Lex. 
s. v., cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 246 sq.].* 

κληρόω, -@: 1 aor. pass. ἐκληρώθην ; (κλῆρος) ; in class. 
Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to 
choose by lot: τινά [IHdt. 1, 94; al.]. 3. to allot, as- 
sign by lot: τινά τινι, one to another as a possession, Pind. 
Ol. 8, 19. 4. once in the N. T., to make a κλῆρος i. 
e. a heritage, private possession: τινά, pass. ἐν à ἐκληρώ- 
θημεν [but Lehm. ἐκλήθημεν} in whom lies the reason why 
we were made the κλῆρος τοῦ θεοῦ (a designation trans- 
ferred from the Jews in the O. T. to Christians, cf. Add. 
to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. line 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in 
loc.; [ef. Deut. iv. 20; ix. 297), the heritage of God 
Eph. i. 11 [see Ellicott in loc.]. (In eccles. writ. it sig- 
nifies to become a clergyman [see reff. s. v. κλῆρος, fin.].) 
[Comp. : προσ-κληρόω.} * 

κλῆσις, -ews, 7, (καλέω) ; 1. a calling, calling to, 
[ CXen., Plat., al.)]. 2. a call, invitation: to a feast 


κλητός 


(3 Mace. v. 14; Xen. symp. 1, 7); in the N. T. every- 
where in a technical sense, the divine invitation to embrace 
salvation in the kingdom of God, which is made esp. through 
the preaching of the gospel: with gen. of the author, τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Eph. i. 18; ἀμεταμέλ. . . . ἡ KX. τοῦ θεοῦ, God does 
not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de- 
cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which 
he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Ro. xi. 
29; ἡ ἄνω [q. v. (a.)] κλῆσις τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ, which 
was made in heaven by God on the ground of Christ, 
Phil. iii. 14; also ἡ ἐπουράνιος κλῆσις, Heb. iii. 1; καλεῖν 
τινα κλήσει, 2 Tim. i. 9; pass. Eph. iv. 1; ἀξιοῦν τινα 
κλήσεως is used of one whom God declares worthy of the 
calling which he has commanded to be given him, and 
therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call, 
2 Th. i. 11; w. gen. of the obj., ὑμῶν, which ye have 
shared in, Eph. iv. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10; what its character- 
istics have been in your case, as having no regard to 
learning, riches, station, ete. 1 Co. i. 26; used somewhat 
peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds 
one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or 
freeman, 1 Co. vii. 20.* . 

κλητός, -7), -όν, (καλέω), [fr. Hom. down], called, invited, 
(to a banquet, [1 K. i. 41, 49]; 3 Mace. v. 145; Aeschin. 
50,1); inthe N. T. a. invited (by God in the proc- 
lamation of the gospel) to obtain eternal salvation in the 
kingdom of God through Christ (see καλέω, 1 b. B. [cf. 
W.35(34)]): Ro-viii. 28; 1 Co. i. 24; Jude 1; κλητοὶ 
k. ἐκλεκτοὶ x. πιστοί, Rev. xvii. 14; κλητοί and ἐκλεκτοί 
are distinguished (see ἐκλεκτός, 1 a.) in Mt. xx. 16 [T 
WH om. Trbr. the cl.]; xxii. 14, a distinetion which does 
not agree with Paul's view (see καλέω, τι. s. ; [ Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. ὃ 88; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. iii. 12]) ; κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, gen. of possessor [W. 195 (183); B. § 132, 23], 
devoted to Christ and united to him, Ro.i. 6; κλητοὶ ἅγιοι, 
holy (or * saints") by the calling of God, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co. 
1. b. called to (the discharge of) some office: 
κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, i. e. divinely selected and appointed 
(see καλέω, τι. s.), Ro. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 1 [L br. «A.J; cf. 
Gal. i. 15.* 

κλίβανος, -ov, 6, (for κρίβανος, more com. in earlier [yet 
«MB. in Hdt. 2, 92 (cf. Athen. 3 p. 110 c.)] and Attic 
Grk.; see Lob.ad Phryn. p. 179; Passow s. v. κρίβανος ; 
[W. 22]); 1l. a clibanus, an earthen vessel for 
baking bread (Hebr. 1331, Ex. viii. 3 (vii. 29 Hebr.) ; 
Lev.ii.4; xxvi. 26; Hos. vii. 4). It was broader at the 
bottom than above at the orifice, and when sufficiently 
heated by a fire kindled within, the dough was baked by 
being spread upon the outside [but acc. to others, the 
dough was placed inside and the fire or coals outside, the 
vessel being often perforated with small holes that the 
heat might the better penetrate; cf. Rich, Dict. of Grk. 
and Rom. Antiq. s. v. clibanus; see Schol. on Arstph. 
Acharn. 86 (iv. 2 p. 339, 20 sq. Dind.)]. 2. 1. q. 
imvos, a furnace, an oven: so Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28.* 

κλίμα or κλῖμα (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. κρίμα), -ros, 
τό, (κλίνων ; 1. an inclination, slope, declivity: τῶν 
ὀρῶν, Polyb. 2,16, 3; [al.]. spec. 2. the [supposed] 


350 


κλυδωνίζομαι 


sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards the poles, a 
zone: Aristot., Dion. H., Plut., al.; Joseph. b. 1. 5, 12, 
2; 3. a tract of land, a region: Ro. xv. 23; 2 Co. 
xi. 10; Gal.i.21; (Polyb. 5, 44, 6; 7, 6, 1; Hdian. 2, 
11, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] ; al.).* 

κλινάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κλίνη ; see γυναικάριον), a 
small bed, a couch: Acts v.15 L'TTr WH. (Arstph. 
frag. 33 d.; Epict. diss. 3, 5,13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57; 
[cf. κλινίδιον, and Pollux as there referred to].)* 

κλίνη, -ης, ἡ, (κλίνω) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for nun, 
also for way; a bed: univ., Mk. vii. 30; Lk. xvii. 34; 
a couch to recline on at meals, Mk. iv. 21; vii. 4 [T 
WHom.]; Lk. vii. 16; a couch on which a sick man 
is carried, Mt.ix.2, 6; Lk.v. 18; plur. Acts v. 15 RG; 
βάλλειν eis κλίνην, to cast into a bed, i. e. to afflict with 
disease, Rev. ii. 22.* 

κλινίδιον, -ov, τό, (κλίνη), a small bed, a couch: Lk. v. 
19, 24. (Dion. H. antt. 7, 68; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An- 
tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut.; [cf. Pollux 10, 7].) * 

κλίνω; 1 aor. ἔκλινα ; pf. κέκλικα; 1. trans. a 
to incline, bow: τὴν κεφαλήν, of one dying, Jn. xix. 30; 
τὸ πρόσωπον εἰς τ. γῆν; Of the terrified, Lk. xxiv. 5. b. 
i. q. to cause to fall back: παρεμβολάς, Lat. inclinare acies, 
i.e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (μάχην, Hom. Il. 14, 
510; Τρῶας, 5, 37; ᾿Αχαιούς, Od. 9, 59). C. to recline: 
τὴν κεφαλήν, in a place for repose [ A. V. lay one's head], 
Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. 2. intrans. to incline one's 
self [cf. B. 145 (127); W. $ 38, 1]: of the declining day 
[A. V. wear away, be far spent], Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29; 
Jer. vi. 4; dua τῷ κλῖναι τὸ τρίτον μέρος τῆς νυκτός, Polyb. 
3, 93, 7; ἐγκλίναντος τοῦ ἡλίου ἐς ἑσπέραν, Arr. anab. 3, 
4,2. [Cowr.: ava-, ἐκ-» kara-, s poc-kAivo. ] * 

κλισία, -as, 7, (κλίνω) ; fr. Hom. down; prop. a place 
for lying down or reclining; hence 1. a hut, erect- 
ed to pass the night in. 2. a tent. 3. any 
thing to recline on; a chair in which to lean back the 
head, reclining-chair. 4. a company reclining; a 
row or party of persons reclining at meal: so in plur., Lk. 
ix. 14, on which cf. W. 229 (214) ; likewise in Joseph. 
antt. 12, 2, 12; Plut. Sert. 26.* 

κλοπή, -ῆς, 7, (κλέπτω), theft: plur. [cf. B. 77 (67); 
W. 176 (166)], Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21 (22). [From Aes- 
chyl. down.] * ( 

κλύδων, -wvos, 6, (κλύζω, to wash against); fr. Hom. 
down; a dashing or surging wave, a surge, a violent agi- 
tation of the sea: τοῦ ὕδατος, Lk. viii. 24; τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Jas. i. 6 (Jon. i. 4, 12; Sap. xiv. 5).* 

[SxN. κλύδων, κῦμα: κῦμα a wave, suggesting uninter- 
rupted succession; κλύδων a billow, surge, suggesting size 
and extension. So too in the fig. application of the words. 
Schmidt ch. 56.] 

κλυδωνίζομαι, ptep. κλυδωνιζόμενος ; (κλύδων); to be tossed 
by the waves; metaph. to be agitated (like the waves) 
mentally [A. V. tossed to and fro]: with dat. of instrum. 
παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκαλίας, Eph. iv. 14 (cf. Jas. i. 65 oi 
ἄδικοι κλυδωνισθήσονται καὶ ἀναπαύσασθαι ov δυνήσονται, 
Is. lvii. 20; 6 δῆμος ταρασσόμενος καὶ κλυδωνιζόμενος 
οἰχήσεται φεύγων, Joseph. antt. 9, 11, 3; κλυδωνιζόμενος 


Κλωπᾶς 


ἐκ τοῦ πόθου, Aristaenet. epp. 1, 26, p. 121 ed. Boisson- 
ade [ep. 27, 14 ed. Abresch]).* 

Κλωπάς, -a [B 20 (18); W.§ 8,1], 6, (sadn; appar. 
identical with Alphzus, see ᾿Αλφαῖος, 2 [cf. Heinichen's 
note on Euseb. h. e. 3, 11, 2]), Clopas (Vulg. [ Cleopas 
and] Cleophas), the father of the apostle James the less, 
and husband of Mary the sister of the mother of Jesus : 
Jn. xix. 25 (ἡ τοῦ Κλωπᾶ se. γυνή [cf. W.131 (125) note ])* 

Kvfjoo: pres. pass. κνήθομαι; (fr. κνάω, inf. κνᾶν and 
Attic kvv) ; to scratch, tickle, make to itch; pass. io itch : 
κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν (on the ace. cf. W. § 32,5), i. e. de- 
sirous of hearing something pleasant (Hesych. κνήθ. τ. 
ἀκοήν" ζητοῦντές τι ἀκοῦσαι καθ᾽ ἡδονήν), 3 2 i'm ἀν; 8. 
(Mid. τὸν ὄνον κνήθεσθαι εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας τὰ ἕλκη, its sores, 
Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 p. 609°, 32; κνῆν ᾿Αττικοὶ, κνήθειν Ἕλλη- 
ves, Moeris p. 234; [cf. Veitch s. v. kváo ].)* 

Κνίδος, -ov, 7, Cnidus or Gnidus, a peninsula [now Cape 
Crio] and a city of the same name, on the coast of Caria: 
Acts xxvii. 7 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B.D. s. v. Cnidus; 
Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 190.] * 

κοδράντης, -ov [ D. 17 (16)], 6; a Lat. word, quadrans 
(i. e. the fourth part of an as); in the N. T. a coin equal 
to one half the Attic chaleus or to two λεπτά (see λεπτόν): 
Mk. xii. 42; Mt. v. 26. The word is fully discussed by 
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 447 sqq. [A. V. far- 
thing; see BB. DD. s. v.] * 

κοιλία, -as, 7), (κοῖλος hollow); Sept. for 153 the belly, 
ayn the bowels, 335 the interior, the midst of a thing, 
on? the womb; the belly: and 1. the whole eil. 
the entire cavity; hence ἡ dvo and ἡ κάτω κοιλία, the upper 
[i. e. the stomach] and the lower belly are distinguished ; 
very often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the 
lower belly, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex- 
crement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. εἴπερ eis κοιλίαν 
ἐχώρει διὰ στομάχου πᾶν τὸ πινόμενον) : Mt. xv. 17; Mk. 
vii. 19. 3. the gullet (Lat. stomachus) : Mt. xii. 40 ; 
Lk. xv. 16 [WH Tr mrg. χορτασθῆναι ἐκ etc.] ; 1 Co. vi. 
13; Rev. x. 9 sq. ; δουλεύειν τῇ κοιλίᾳ, to be given up to 
the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see δουλεύω, 2 
b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also ὧν ὁ θεὸς ἡ κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19; 
κοιλίας ὄρεξις. Sir. xxiii. 6. 4. the womb, the place 
where the foetus is conceived and nourished till birth: 
Tk. 1541/80: 44; 11. 21: xi exis 29. 10 ἯΙ 4. 
(very often so in Sept.; very rarely in prof. auth.; 
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2, 
16, 43) 3G (beginning from [see e IV.1]) κοιλίας μητρός, 
Mt. xix. 12; Lk.i.15; Acts iii. 2; xiv.8; Gal. i. 15, 
(for pw jD32, Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 11; pe (Ixxi.) 6; Job i. 

1; Is. xlix. 1; Judg. xvi. 17 [Vat. ἀπὸ x. p. ; cf. W. 33 
(32) ]). 5. in imitation of the Hebr. 123, tropi- 
cally, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the 
seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35; xxxii. 18 
[Sept. γαστήρ]; Prov. xviii. 8 [Sept. ψυχή]; xx. 27, 30; 
xxvi. 22 [Sept. σπλάγχνα]; Hab. iii. 16; Sir. xix. 12; li. 
21): Jn. vii. 38.* 

κοιμάω, -@: Pass, pres. κοιμάομαι, κοιμῶμαι; pf. ke- 
κοίμημαι [cf. W. 274 (257)]; 1 aor. ἐκοιμήθην; 1 fut. 
κοιμηθήσομαι ; (akin to κεῖμαι ; Curtius $ 45); to cause 


951 








κοινωνέω 


to sleep, put to sleep, (Hom. et al.) ; metaph. to still, calm, 
quiet, (Hom., Aeschyl., Plat.) ; Pass. to sleep, fall asleep : 
prop. Mt. xxvii. 13; Lk. xxii. 45; Jn. xi- 12; Acts 
xii.6; Sept.for 33U. metaph. and euphemistically i. q- 
to die [cf. Eng. to fall asleep] : Jn. xi. 11; Acts vii. 60; 


| xiii. 36; 1 Co. vii. 39; xi. 30; xv. 6, 51 [cf. W. 555 


(517); B. 121 (106) note]; 2 Pet. iii. 4; of κοιμώμενοι, 
κεκοιμημένοι, κοιμηθέντες, i. q. the dead: Mt. xxvii. 52; 1 
Co. xv. 20; 1 Th. iv. 13-15 ; with ἐν Χριστῷ added (see 
ev, I. 6 b. p. 211»), 1 Co. xv. 18; in the same sense Is. 
xiv. 8; xliii. 17; 1 K. xi. 43; 2 Macc. xii. 45; Hom. Il. 
11, 241; Soph. Electr. 509.* 

κοίμησις, -ews, 7, α reposing, taking rest: Jn. xi. 13 [οἷς 
W. $59,8a.]; of death, Sir. xlvi. 19; xlviii. 13; ὦ 
lying, reclining, Plat. conv. p. 183 a.* 

κοινός, -ή, -óv, (fr. ξύν, σύν, with; hence esp. in Epie 
£vvós for κοινός, whence the Lat. cena [(?); see Vanicek 
p. 1065]) ; 1. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod. (opp. 721) 
down (opp. to ἴδιος) common (i. e. belonging to several, 
Lat. communis): Acts ii. 44; iv. 32; κοινὴ πίστις, Tit. 1. 
4; σωτηρία, Jude 3. 2. by a usage foreign to class. 
Grk., common i. e. ordinary, belonging to the | generality 
(Lat. vulgaris); by the Jews opp. to ἅγιος, 7yvacpevos, 
καθαρός: hence unhallowed, Lat. profanus, levitically 
unclean, (in class. Grk. βέβηλος, q. v. 2): Mk. vii. 2, 5 
(where R Lmrs. dvízrois);. Ro. xiv. 14; Heb. x. 29; 
Rev. xxi. 27 [ Rec. κοινοῦν], (1 Mace. i. 47; φαγεῖν κοινά, 
ib. 62; κοινοὶ ἄνθρωποι; common people; profanum vulg gus, 
Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 14; oí τὸν κοινὸν βίον προηρημένοι, i. 
e. a life repugnant to the holy law, ibid. 13, 1, 1; οὐ yap 
ὡς κοινὸν ἄρτον οὐδὲ ὡς κοινὸν πόμα ταῦτα (i. e. the bread 
and wine of the sacred supper) λαμβάνομεν, Justin Mart. 
apol. 1, 66; (οἱ Χριστιανοὶ) τράπεζαν κοινὴν παρατίθενται. 
ἀλλ᾽ οὐ κοινήν, a table communis but ποῦ profanus, Ep. ad 
Diogn. 5, on which cf. Otto's note); κοινὸν καὶ [RG ἢ] 
ἀκάθαρτον, Acts x. 14; κοιν. ἢ ἀκάθ., ib. x. 285 xi. 8, (κοινὰ 
ἢ ἀκάθαρτα οὐκ ἐσθίομεν, Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 20). 
[Cf. Trench ὃ ci.]* 

Kowóo, -ῶ; 1 aor. inf. κοινῶσαι [cf. W. 91 (86)]; pf. 
κεκοίνωκα: pf. pass. ptep. κεκοινωμένος ; (κοινός) ; il 
in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see 
κοινός, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un- 
hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by βεβη- 
how, cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33 
[where he calls attention to Luke's accuracy in putting 
κοινοῦν into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts 
xxi. 28) and βεβηλοῦν when they address Felix (xxiv. 
6)]): Rev. xxi. 27 Rec.; Mt. xv. 11,18, 20; Mk. vii. 15, 
18,20, 23; pass. Heb. ix. 13; τί, Acts xxi. 28; γαστέρα 
puapopayia, 4 Macc. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un- 
clean: Acts x. 15 (cf. 28) ; xi. 9; see δικαιόω, 3.* 

κοινωνέω, -à ; 1 aor. ἐκοινώνησα;: Ῥΐ. κεκοινώνηκα : (κοινω- 
vos) } a. to come into communion or fellowship, to 
become a sharer, be made a partner: as in Grk. writ. w. 
gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. i. 11; 2 Mace. 
xiv. 25)]; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.), 
Ro. xv. 27; [1 Pet. iv. 13]. b. to enter into fellow- 
ship, join one's self as an associate, make one's self a sharer 


κοινωνία 


or partner: as in Grk. writ., w. dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. 
v. 22; 2 Jn. 11; ταῖς χρείαις τινός, so to make another's 
necessities one's own as to relieve them [A. V. communi- 
cating to the necessities ete.], Ro. xii. 13; w. dat. of pers. 
foll. by eis τι (as in Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 a.), Phil. iv. 15; 
foll by ἐν w. dat. of the thing which one shares with 
another, Gal. vi. ὃ (κοινωνήσεις ἐν πᾶσι τῷ πλησίον σου 
καὶ οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἴδια εἶναι, Barnab. ep. 19, 8); cf. W. § 30, 
8a.; [B. § 132, 8; Bp. Lghtft. or Ellicott on Gal. 1. c. 
Comp. : συγ-κοινωνέω.] ἢ 

κοινωνία, -as, 7, (κοινωνός), fellowship, association, com- 
munity, communion, joint participation, intercourse; in 
the N. T. as in class. Grk. 1. the share which one 
has in anything, participation; w. gen. of the thing in 
which he shares: πνεύματος, Phil. ii. 1; τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύμα- 
os, 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) ; τῶν παθημάτων τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Phil. 
ii. 105 τῆς πίστεως, Philem. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.]; τοῦ 
αἵματος Tov Χριστοῦ, i. e. in the benefits of Christ's death, 
1 Co. x. 16 [ef. Meyer ad loc.]; τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Xp. in the 
(mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; τῆς δια- 
κονίας, 2 Co. viii. 4; τοῦ μυστηρίου, Eph. iii. 9 Ree. εἰς 
κοινωνίαν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ, to obtain fellowship in the 
dignity and blessings of the Son of God, 1 Co. i. 9, where 
‘ef. Meyer. 2. intercourse, fellowship, intimacy: 
δεξιὰ κοινωνίας, the right hand as the sign and pledge 
of fellowship (in fulfilling the apostolic office), Gal. ii. 9 
[where see Bp. Lehtft.]; τίς cow. φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος; what 
in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (ris οὖν 
κοινωνία πρὸς ᾿Απόλλωνα τῷ μηδὲν οἰκεῖον ἐπιτετηδευκύτι, 
Philo, lex. ad Gaium § 14 fin.; εἰ δέ τις ἔστι κοινωνία πρὸς 
“θεοὺς ἡμῖν, Stob. serm. 28 [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]); used of 
the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians : 
absol Acts ii. 42; with eis τὸ εὐαγγέλιον added, Phil. i. 
5; κοινωνίαν ἔχειν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, per ἀλλήλων, 1 Jn. i. 3, 7; 
of the fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, pera 
TOU πατρὸς kK. μετὰ TOU υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, 1 Jn. 1. 3, 6, (which fel- 
lowship, ace. to John’s teaching, consists in the fact that 
Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as 
God and Christ, and of the blessings arising therefrom). 
By a use unknown to prof. auth. κοινωνία in the N. T. 
denotes 3. a benefaction jointly contributed, a col- 
lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and 
proof of fellowship (ef. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wisd. 
viii. 18, p. 176): 2 Co. viii. 4; ets twa, for the benefit of 
one, 2 Co. ix. 13; ποιεῖσθαι kow. (to make a contribu- 
tion) ets τινα, Ro. xv. 20 ; joined with εὐποιΐα, Heb. xiii. 
16. [ΟΕ B. § 132, 8.]* 

κοινωνικός, -7, -όν, (κοινωνία) ; 1. social, sociable, 
ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel- 
lowship: Plat. def. p. 411 e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 1283", 
38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242*, 26 κοινωνικὸν ἄνθρωπος 
ζῷον]; Polyb. 2,44,1; Antonin. 7,52. 55; often in Plut.; 
πράξεις kow. actions having reference to human society, 
Antonin. 4, 33; 5, 1. 2. inclined to make others 
sharers in one's possessions, inclined to impart, free in giv- 
ing, liberal, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [ where, however, see 
Cope]; Leian. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.* 

κοινωνός, -7, -óv, (κοινός), [as adj. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1173; 


95 








2 κολάζω 


commonly as subst. ]; a. a partner, associate, com- 
rade, companion: 2 Co. viii. 23; ἔχειν τινὰ κοινωνόν, 
Philem. 17; εἰμὶ κοινωνός τινι, to be one's partner, Lk. v. 
10; τινός (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing 
something, Heb. x. 33; τινὸς ἐν τῷ αἵματι, to be one's 
partner in shedding the blood ete. Mt. xxiii. 30. b. 
a partaker, sharer, in any thing; w. gen. of the thing: 
τῶν παθημάτων, 2 Co.i. 7; τῆς δόξης, 1 Pet. v. 1; θείας 
φύσεως, 2 Pet. i. 4; τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου, of the altar (at 
Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing 
in the worship of the Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; τῶν δαιμονίων, 
partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fellow- 
ship with them, because they are the authors of the 
heathen worship, ibid. 20; (ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ κοινωνοὶ . .. 
ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς, joint partakers in that which is imper- 
ishable ...in the blessings which perish, Barnab. ep. 
19, 8: see κοινωνέω, fin.).* 

κοίτη. 7s, 7, (KEQ, KEIQ, κεῖμαι, akin to κοιμάω) ; fr. 
Hom. Od. 19, 341 down; Sept. chiefly for 35/5, also 
for 1322U ete. ; a. a place for lying down, resting, 
sleeping in; a bed, couch: els τὴν κοίτην (see εἰμί, V. 2a.) 
εἰσίν, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec. the marriage-bed, as in the 
Trage.: m. κοίτην μιαίνειν, of adultery (Joseph. antt. 2, 
4, 5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), IIeb. xiii. 4. c. cohabita- 
tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4 sq. 21-25, 
ete.; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur. 
sexual intercourse (see περιπατέω, b. a.), Ro. xiii. 13 [ A.V. 
chambering]; by meton. of the cause for the effect we 
have the peculiar expression κοίτην ἔχειν ἔκ τινος, to have 
conceived by a man, Ro. ix. 105 κοίτη σπέρματος, Lev. xv. 
16; xxii. 4; xviii. 20, 23 [here k. eis σπερματισμόν] ; on 
these phrases ef. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.* 

kovráv, -vos, 6, (fr. κοίτη ; cf. νυμφών ete.), a sleeping- 
room, bed-chamber: 6 ἐπὶ τοῦ kowr. the officer who is over 
the bed-chamber, the chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7; 
Ex. viii. 3; 1 Esdr. iii. 3; the Atticists censure the word, 
for which Attie writ. generally used δωμάτιον; cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).* 

κόκκινος, -7, -ov, (fr. κόκκος a kernel, the grain or berry 
of the ilex coccifera; these berries are the clusters of 
eges of a female insect, the kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine, 
crimson) |, and when collected and pulverized produce a 
red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9, 41, 65; 16, 
8, 12; 24, 4), erimson, scarlet-colored : Mt. xxvii. 28; 
Heb. ix. 19; Rev. xvii. 3. neut. as a subst. i. q. scarlet 
cloth or clothing: Rev. xvii.4; xviii. 12, 16, (Gen. xxxviii. 
28; Ex. xxv.4; Lev. xiv. 4, 6 ; Josh. ii. 18; 2 S. i. 24; 
2 Chr. ii. 7, 14; Plut. Fab. 15; φορεῖν κόκκινα, scarlet 
robes, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 34; ἐν κοκκίνοις περιπατεῖν, 3, 22, 
10). Cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Carmesin; Roskoffin Schenkel 
i. p. 501 sq.; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [B. D. s. v. 
Colors, II. 3].* 

κόκκος, -ov, 6, [cf. Vanitek, Fremdwórter ete. p. 26], 
a grain: Mt. xiii. 31; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 51; Lk. xiii. 
19; xvii. 6; Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 37. [Hom. h. Cer., 
Hdt., down. ] * 

κολάζω : pres. pass. ptep. κολαζόμενος ; 1 aor. mid. sub- 
junc. 3 pers. plur. κολάσωνται ; (κόλος lopped); in Grk. 


κολακεία 


writ. 1. prop. to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2. 
to check, curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun- 
ish: soin the N. T.; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lchm. in 4; 
mid. to cause to be punished (3 Macc. vii. 3): Actsiv. 21.* 

κολακεία (I WH -xia [see I, «]), -as, 7, (koAakevo), 
flattery : λόγος κολακείας, flattering discourse, 1 Th. ii. 5. 
(Plat., Dem., Theophr., Joseph., Hdian., al.) * 

κόλασις, -ews, ἧ, (κολάζω), correction, punishment, pen- 
alty: Mt. xxv. 46; κόλασιν ἔχει, brings with it or has con- 
nected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18. 
(Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., ete.; 2 Mace. iv. 38; 4 Macc. viii. 8; 
Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, ete.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77, 
(9); 4, 44, (8); Ael. v. h. 7, 15; al.) * 

[Syn. κόλασις, τιμωρία: thenoted definition of Aristotle 
which distinguishes κόλασις from τιμωρία as that which (is 
disciplinary and) lias reference to him who suffers, while the 
latter (is penal and) has reference to the satisfaction of him 
who inflicts, may be found in his rhet. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cope, 
Intr.to Arist. Rhet. p. 232. To much the same effect, Plato, 
Protag. 324 a. sq., also Deff. 416. But, as in other cases, 
usage (esp. the later) does not always recognize the distinc- 
tion; see e. g. Philo de legat. ad Gaium § 1 fin. ; frag. ex 
Euseb. prep. evang. 8, 13 (Mang. ii. 641); de vita Moys. i. 16 
fin.; Plut. de sera num. vind. $8 9, 11, ete. Plutarch (ibid. 
ὃ 25 sub fin.) uses κολάζομαι of those undergoing the penalties 
of the other world (cf. Just. Mart. 1 apol. 8; Clem. Rom. 
2 Cor. 6,7; Just. Mart. 1 apol. 43; 2 apol. 8; Test. xii. Patr., 
test. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polyc. 2, 3; 11,2; 
Ign. ad Rom. 5,3; Mart. Ign. vat. 5 etc.). See Trench, Syn. 
§ vii.; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s.; 
Bartlett, Life and Death Eternal Note G.; C. F. Hudson, 
Debt and Grace, p. 188 sqq.] 

Kodacoaets, see Κολοσσαεύς. 

KoXaccaí, see KoAoccat. 

κολαφίζω ; 1 aor. ἐκολάφισα:: pres. pass. κολαφίζομαι ; 
(kóXados a fist, and this fr. κολάπτω to peck, strike); to 
strike with the fist, give one a blow with the fist (Terence, 
colaphum infringo, Quintil. col. duco), [A. V. to buffet]: 
twa, Mt. xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65; as a specific term for 
a general, i. q. to maltreat, treat with violence and con- 
tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 
20. (Elsewhere only in ecel. writ.) The word is fully 
discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 67 
sqq.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175 sq.* 

KoAAdw, -à: Pass, pres. κολλῶμαι; 1 aor. ἐκολλήθην; 
1 fut. κολληθήσομαι (Mt. xix. 5 LT TrWH); (κόλλα 
gluten, glue); prop. to glue, glue to, glue together, cement, 
fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to- 
gether; in the N. T. only the pass. is found, with reflex- 
ive force, to join one's self to, cleave to; Sept. for p37; 
ὁ κονιορτὸς ὁ κολληθεὶς ἡμῖν, Lk. x. 11; ἐκολλήθησαν αὐτῆς 
αἱ ἁμαρτίαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, her sins were sucha heap as 
to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl- 
edge of heaven), Rev. xviii. 5 GL T Tr WH (έἐκολλ. ἡ 
Ψυχή μου ὀπίσω cov, Ps. Ixii. (Ixiii.) 9; αἱ ἄγνοιαι ἡμῶν 
ὑπερήνεγκαν ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, 1 Esdr. viii. 72 (74); ὕβρις 
τε βίη τε οὐρανὸν ἵκει, Hom. Od. 15, 329; 17, 565). οἵ 
persons, w. dat. of the thing, κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι join 

. thyself to etc. Acts viii. 29; w. dat. of pers., to form an 
intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations 
23 


303 











κόλπος 


with, unite one's self to, (so Barn. ep. c. 10, 3sq. 5. 8; 
also with μετά and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11; 19, 2. 6; 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 1; 30,3; 46, 2 [cf. Bp. Lehtft.’s 
note], 4): τῇ γυναικί, Mt. xix. 5 LT Tr WH; τῇ πόρνῃ, 
1 Co. vi. 16 (Sir. xix. 2); τῷ κυρίῳ, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K. 
xviii. 6; Sir. ii. 3) ; to join one's self to one as an asso- 
ciate, keep company with, Acts v. 13; ix. 26; x. 28; to 
follow one, be on his side, Acts xvii. 34 (2 S. xx. 2; 1 
Mace. iii. 2; vi. 21); to join or attach one's self to a 
master or patron, Lk. xv. 15; w. dat. of the thing, to 
give one's self steadfastly to, labor for, [ A.V. cleave to]: 
τῷ ἀγαθῷ, Ro. xii. 9, ἀγαθῷ, κρίσει δικαίᾳ, Barn. ep. 20, 2; 
τῇ evAoyia,so cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
31, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat, Diod., Plut, al.) 
[Cowr.: zpoc-«oAMdo.  * 

κολλούριον (1 Tr κολλύριον, the more common form 
in prof. auth. [ef. Lob. Pathol. proleg. p. 461; WH. App. 
p. 152]), -ov, τό, (dimin. of κολλύρα, coarse bread of a 
cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as 
Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium [ A.V. eye-salve], a prepa- 
ration shaped like a κολλύρα, composed of various mate- 
rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor. 
sat. 1,5, 30; Epict. diss. 2, 21, 20; 3, 21, 21; Cels. 6, 6, 
7): Rev. iii. 18.* 

κολλυβιστής, -ov, ὁ, (fr. κόλλυβος i.q. a. a small coin, 
cf. κολοβός clipped; b. rate of exchange, premium), a 
money-changer, banker: Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 
15. Menand.,Lys. in Poll. 7, 33, 170; 6 μὲν κόλλυβος 
δόκιμον, τὸ δὲ κολλυβιστὴς ἀδόκιμον, Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 
440. Cf. what was said under κερματιστής." 

κολλύριον, see κολλούριον. 

κολοβόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐκολόβωσα: Pass. 1 aor. ἐκολο- 
βώθην; 1 fut. κολοβωθήσομαι ; (fr. κολοβός lopped, mu- 
tilated); to cut off (ras χεῖρας, 2 S. iv. 12; τοὺς πόδας, 
Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24]; τὴν ῥῖνα, Diod. 1, 78) ; 
to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80, 13); hence in the N. T. of time, 
(Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail: Mt. xxiv. 22: 
Mk. xiii. 20.* 

Κολοσσαεύς, and (so L Tr WH) Κολασσαεύς (see the 
foll. word; in Strabo and in Inserr. Κολοσσηνός), -€ws, ὃ, 
Vulg. Colossensis, Pliny Colossinus; Colossian, a Colos- 
sian; in the heading [and the subscription (R Tr)] of 
the Ep. to the Col.* 

Κολοσσαί (ἢ T WH, the classical form), and KoAaccat 
(R* L Tr, apparently the later popular form; [see WH. 
Intr. $423, and esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. p. 16 sq.]; cf. 
W. p.44; and on the plur. W. $ 27, 3), -ày, ai, Colossc, 
anciently alarge and flourishing city, but in Strabo's time 
a πόλισμα [i. e. “small town” (Bp. Lghtft.)] of Phrygia 
Major situated on the Lycus, not far from its junction 
with the Mzander, and in the neighborhood of Laodicea 
and Hierapolis (Hdt. 7, 30; Xen. an. 1, 2, 6; Strab. 12, 
8,13 p. 576; Plin. h. n. 5, 41), together with which cities 
it was destroyed by an earthquake [about] A. p. 66 
([Euseb. chron. Ol. 210]; Oros. 7, 7 [see esp. Bp. Lghtft. 
u.s. p. 38]): Col.i.2. [See the full description, with 
copious reff., by Bp. Lghtft. u. s. pp. 1-72.]* 

κόλπος, -ov, 6, (apparently akin to κοῖλος hollow, [yet 


κολυμβάω 


ef. Vanitek p. 179; L. and S. s. v.]), Hebr. pn the 
bosom (Lat. sinus), i.e. as in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down 1. the front of the body between the arms: 
hence ἀνακεῖσθαι ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τινός, of the one who so re- 
clines at table that his head covers the bosom as it were, 
the chest, of the one next him [cf. B. D. s. v. Meals], Jn. 
xiii.23. Hence the figurative expressions, ἐν rois κόλποις 
(on the plur., which occurs as early as Hom. Il. 9, 570, 
cf. W. $ 27, 3; [B. 24 (21)]) rod ᾿Αβραὰμ εἶναι, to obtain 
the seat next to Abraham, i. e. to be partaker of the same 
blessedness as Abraham in paradise, Lk. xvi. 23 ; ἀποφέ- 
ρεσθαι εἰς τὸν k.' ABp. to be borne away to the enjoyment 
of the same felicity with Abraham, ibid. 22 (οὕτω yap 
παθόντας --- ace. to another reading θανόντας ---᾿Αβραὰμ 
καὶ ᾿Ισαὰκ καὶ ᾿Ιακὼβ ὑποδέξονται εἰς τοὺς κόλπους αὐτῶν, 4 
Mace. xiii. 16; [see B. D. s. v. Abraham’s bosom, and] 
on the rabbin. phrase nr?3W Ow Y»n3, in Abraham’s 
bosom, to designate bliss in paradise, cf. Lightfoot, Hor. 
Hebr. et Talmud. p. 851 sqq.) ; ὁ àv eis τὸν x. τοῦ πατρός, 
lying (turned) unto the bosom of his father (God), i. e. 
in the closest and most intimate relation to the Father, 
Jn. i. 18 [W. 415 (387)]; cf. Cic. ad div. 14, 4 iste vero 
sit in sinu semper et complexu meo. 2. the bosom 
of a garment, i. e. the hollow formed by the upper fore- 
part of a rather loose garment bound by a girdle, used 
for keeping and carrying things [the fold or pocket; cf. 
B. D. s. v. Dress], (Ex. iv. 6 sq.; Prov. vi. 27); so, figu- 
ratively, μέτρον καλὸν διδόναι els τ. x. τινός, to repay one 
liberally, Lk. vi. 38 (ἀποδιδόναι eis τ. x. Is. Ixv. 6; Jer. 
xxxix. (xxxii.) 18). S. a bay of the sea (cf. Ital. 
golfo [ Eng. gulf, — which may be only the mod. repre- 
sentatives of the Grk. word]): Acts xxvii. 39.* 
κολυμβάω, -; (o dive, to swim: Acts xxvii.43. (Plat. 
Prot. p. 350 a.; Lach. p. 193 ¢., and in later writ.) 
[Comp. : éc-koAvuBáo. ] * 
κολυμβήθρα. -as, 7, (κολυμβάω), a place for di ving, a swim- 
ming-pool [ A. V. simply pool]: Jn. ix. 7, and Ree. in 11; 
a reservoir or pool used for bathing, Jn. v. 2, 4 [(acc. to 
txt. of RL), 7]. (Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 d.; Diod., Joseph., 
al.; Sept., 2 K. xviii. 17; Neh. ii. 14; Nah. ii. os) 
κολώνια (RG Tr), κολωνία (1, T WH KC [ef. Chandler 
8 95]), [Tdf. edd. 2, 7 -νεια ; see his note on Acts as be- 
low, and cf. e, 1], -as, ἡ, (a Lat. word), a colony: in Acts 
xvi. 12 the city of Philippi is so called, where Octavianus 
had planted a Roman colony (cf. Dio Cass. 51,4; Digest. 
50, tit. 15, 8). The exegetical difficulties of this pass. 
are best removed, as Meyer shows, by connecting κολωνία 
closely with πρώτη πόλις, the chief city, a [Roman] colony 
, (a colonial city); [but cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip. 
p- 50 sq. ].* 
κομάω, -ῶ; (κόμη) ; to let the hair grow, have long hair, 
[cf. κόμη fin.]: 1 Co. xi. 14 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 
κόμη, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down], hair, head of hair: 1 Co. 
Xi. 15. [ Acc. to Schmidt (21, 2) it differs fr. θρίξ (the 
anatomical or physical term) by designating the hair as 
an ornament (the notion of length being only sec- 
ondary and suggested). ]* 


354 





KOVLd.O- 


κομίζω : 1 aor. ptep. fem. κομίσασα ; Mid., pres. ptep. 
κομιζόμενος: 1 fut. κομίσομαι (Eph. vi. 8 LT Tr WH; 
Col. iii. 25 Ltxt. WH) and Attic κομιοῦμαι (Col. iii. 25 R. 
GLmrg. T Tr; [Eph.vi.8 RG]; 1 Pet. v.4; ef. [WH. 
App. p.163 sq.]; B. 37 (33); [W. $ 13, 1 ¢.; Veitch 
s. v.]), ptep. κομιούμενος (2 Pet. ii. 13 [here WH Trmrg. 
ἀδικούμενοι; see ἀδικέω, 2 b.]); 1 aor. ἐκομισάμην [ B. 
§ 135, 1]; rare in Sept., but in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 
freq. in various senses ; 1. to care for, take care of, 
provide for. 2. to take up or carry away in order- 
to care for and preserve. 3. univ. fo carry away, 
bear off. 4. to carry, bear, bring to: once so in the- 
N. T., viz. ἀλάβαστρον, Lk. vii. 37. Mid. (as often in 
prof. auth.) to carry away for one's self; to carry off what 
is one’s own, to bring back; i. e. a. to receive, obtain: 
τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, the promised blessing, Heb. x. 36; xi. 39 
[ras érayy. L ; so T Tr WI in xi.13]; σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν, 
1 Pet.i.9; τῆς δόξης στέφανον, 1 Pet. ν. 4 ; μισθὸν ἀδικίας, 
2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], (τὸν ἄξιον τῆς δυσσεβείας μισθόν, 
2 Mace. viii. 33; δόξαν ἐσθλήν [al. καρπίζεται], Eur. Hipp. 
432; τὴν ἀξίαν παρὰ θεῶν, Plat. lege. 4 p. 718 a., and other 
exx. elsewh.). b. to receive what was previously one’s. 
own, to get back, receive back, recover: τὸ ἐμὸν σὺν τόκῳ, 
Mt. xxv. 27; his son (of Abraham after he had con- 
sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29; 
τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἀνύβριστον, Philo de Josepho § 35; οἱ δὲ παρ᾽ 
ἐλπίδας ἑαυτοὺς κεκομισμένοι, having received each other 
back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expecta-. 
tions, οἵ Abraham and Isaae after the sacrifice of the 
latter had been prevented by God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13, 
4; τὴν ἀδελφήν, Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery 
of hostages, captives, ete., Thuc. 1, 113; Polyb. 1, 83, 8; 
3, 51, 12; 3,40, 10; the city and temple, 2 Maec. x. 1; 
a citadel, a city, often in Polyb.; τὴν βασιλείαν, Arstph.. 
av. 549; τὴν πατρῴαν ἀρχήν, Joseph. antt. 13, 4, 1). 
Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the 
deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given. 
back to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one 
is said κομίζεσθαι that which he has done, i. e. either the 
reward or the punishment of the deed [W. 620 sq. 
(576)]: 2 Co. v. 10; Col.iii.25; with παρὰ κυρίου added, 
Eph. vi. 8; ([ápapríav, Lev. xx. 17]; ἕκαστος, καθὼς 
ἐποίησε, κομιεῖται, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [Cowr.: ἐκ-, συγ- 
κομίζω.) * 

κομψότερον, neut. compar. of the adj. κομψός (fr. κομέω. 
to take care of, tend) neat, elegant, nice, fine; used ad- 
verbially, more finely, better : κομψότ. ἔχω to be better, of 
a convalescent, Jn. iv. 52 (ὅταν ὁ ἰατρὸς εἴπῃ" κόμψως 
ἔχεις, Epict. diss. 3, 10,13; so in Latin belle habere, Cie. 
epp. ad div. 16, 15; [cf. Eng. ‘he’s doing nicely,’ ‘he’s 
getting on finely’; and] Germ. er befindet sich hübsch; 
es geht hübsch mit ihm). The gloss. of Hesych. refers 
to this pass. : κομψότερον " βελτιώτερον, ἐλαφρότερον." 

κονιάω, -@: pf. pass. ptcp. κεκονιαμένος ; (fr. κονία, 
which signifies not only ‘dust’ but also ‘lime’); to cover 
with lime, plaster over, whitewash: τάφοι κεκονιαμένοι (the 
Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to 
their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement by 


κονιορτός 


touching them [B. D. s. v. Burial, 1 fin.; cf. Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sqq.]), Mt. xxiii. 27; τοῖχος 
kexov. is applied to a hypocrite who conceals his malice 
under an outward assumption of piety, Acts xxiii. 3. 
(Dem., Aristot., Plut., al.; for i», Deut. xxvii. 2, 4.) * 

κονιορτός. -ov, 6, (fr. κονία, and ὄρνυμι to stir up) ; i 
prop. raised dust, flying dust, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb., 
al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x. 14; Dk. ix.5; x. 11; 
Acts xiii. 51; xxii.23. (For paw, Ex. ix. 9; Nah.i. 3; 
for 33y, Deut. ix. 21.)* 

κοπάζω: 1 aor. ἐκύπασα; (κόπος) ; prop. lo grow weary 
or tired; hence to cease from violence, cease raging: 6 
ἄνεμος (Hat. 7, 191), Mt. xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 39; vi. 51. 
(Gen. viii. 1; Jon.i. 11 sq.; [ef. esp. Philo, somn. ii. 35].)* 

κοπετός, -ov, 6, (fr. κόπτομαι, see κόπτω), Sept. for 
3200; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation with beating of the 
breast as a sign of grief: κοπετὸν ποιεῖσθαι ἐπί τινι, Acts 
viii. 2; ἐπί twa, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker's an- 
nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31; 
Plut. Fab. 17.) * 

Kor]. -7s. 7. (κόπτωλ) 5 1. prop. several times in 
Grk. writ. the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk. 
a cutting in pieces, slaughter: Heb. vii. 1; Gen. xiv. 17; 
Deut. xxviii. 25; Josh. x. 20; Judith xv. 7.* 

κοπιάω, -à, [3 pers. plur. κοπιοῦσιν (for -óow), Mt. vi. 
28 Tr; cf. ἐρωτάω, init.] ; 1 aor. ἐκοπίασα; pf. κεκοπίακα 
(2 pers. sing. κεκοπίακες, Rev. ii. 3 LT Tr WH, ef. [W. 
§ 13, 2¢.]; B. 43 (38) [and his trans. of Apollon. Dysk. p. 
54n.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. 
p. 397); (κόπος, q. Vv.) ; 1. as in Arstph., Joseph., 
Plut., al., to. grow weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or 
burdens or grief): Mt. xi. 28; Rev. ii. 3; κεκοπιακὼς ἐκ 
τῆς ὁδοιπορίας, Jn. iv. 6 (ὑπὸ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας. Joseph. antt. 
2, 15, 3; δραμοῦνται kai ov κοπιάσουσι, Is. xl. 31). 2. 
in bibl. Grk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil 
(Sept. for y»); of bodily labor: absol, Mt. vi. 28; 
Lk. v. 5; xii. 27 [not Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38; Acts xx. 35; 
1 Co. iv.12; Eph. iv. 28; 2 Tim. ii. 6 [cf. W.556.(517) ; 
B. 390 (334)]; τί, upon a thing, Jn. iv. 38. of the toil- 
some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot- 
ing the kingdom of God and Christ: 1 Co. xv. 10; xvi. 
16, (cf. Jn. iv. 38) ; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the thing in 
which one labors, ἐν λόγῳ x. διδασκαλίᾳ, 1 Tim. v. 17; ἐν 
ὑμῖν, among you, 1 Th. v.12; ἐν κυρίῳ (see ἐν, I. 6 b. p. 
211» mid. [L br. the cl.]), Ro. xvi. 12; ets τινα, for one, 
for his benefit, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11 [ef. B. 242 (209); 
W. 503 (469)]; eis τοῦτο, looking to this (viz. that piety 
has the promise of life), 1 Tim. iv. 10; eis 6, to which end, 
Col. i. 29; eis κενόν, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 (κενῶς ἐκοπίασα, 
of the frustrated labor of the prophets, Is. xlix. 4).* 

κόπος, -ov, 6, (κόπτω) ; 1. i. q. τὸ κόπτειν, a beat- 
ing. 2. i. q. κοπετός, a beating of the breast in grief, 
sorrow, (Jer. li. 33 (xlv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often 
for Sy), 1: δὲ a. trouble (Aeschyl., Soph.) : κόπους 
παρέχειν τινί, to cause one trouble, make work for him, 
Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; Gal. vi. 17; κόπον 
παρέχ. τινί, Lk. xviii. 5. b. intense labor united with 
trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5; 


955 














κορβᾶν 


xi. 23; of manual labor, joined with μόχθος [(see below) ], 
1 Th. ii. 9; ἐν κόπῳ x. μόχθῳ, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi. 
27 (where L T Tr WH om. ev); 2 Th. iii. 8; of the la- 
borious efforts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58; Rey. ii. 
2; plur. Rev. xiv. 13; ὁ κόπος τῆς ἀγάπης, the labor to 
which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and 
endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1 
Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Ree.; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv. 
38 (on which see eis, B. I. 3) ; 1 Th. iii. 5; of that which 
such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8; plur. 2 
Co. x. 15 (ef. Sir. xiv.-15).* 

[Syw. κόπος, μόχθος, πόνος: primarily and in general 
classic usage, πόνος gives prominence to the effort (work as 
requiring force), κόπος το the fatigue, μόχθος (chiefly poetic) 
to the hardship. But in the N. T. πόνος has passed over 
(in three instances out of four) to the meaning pain (hence 
it has no place in the ‘new Jerusalem’, Rev. xxi. 4); cf. the 
deterioration in the case of the allied πονηρός, πένης. Schmidt, 
ch. 85; cf. Trench ὃ cii. (who would trans. v. ‘toil’, x. *wea- 
riness ’, y. * labor?).] 

κοπρία | Chandler § 96], -as, 7. i. q. ἡ κόπρος, dung: Lk. 
xiii. 8 Rec."; xiv. 35 (34). (Jobii.8; 1 5.1.8; Neh. 
li. 13; 1 Macc. ii. 62; [Strab., Poll., al.].) * 

κόπριον, -ov, Td, i. q. 7] κόπρος, dung, manure: plur. Lk. 
xiii. 8 [Rec." κοπρίαν]. (llevaclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669 
[quaest. conviv. lib. iv. quaest. iv. $ 3, 6]; Strab. 16, 
§ 26 p. 784; Epict. diss. 2, 4, 5; Plut. Pomp. c. 48; [Is. 
v. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other 
later writ.) * 

kómro: impf. 3 pers. plur. ἔκοπτον ; 1 aor. ptep. κόψας 
(Mk. xi. 8 T Tr txt. WH); Mid., impf. ékorróugv; fut. 
κόψομαι; 1 aor. ἐκοψάμην: [fr. Hom. down]; to cut, 
strike, smite, (Sept. for AST, NID, etc.) : ri ἀπό or ἔκ 
twos, to cut from, cut off, Mt. xxi. 8; Mk. xi. 8. Mid. 
to beat one's breast for grief, Lat. plango [ R. V. mourn]: 
Mt. xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al.; 
Sept. often so for 19D); τινά, to mourn or bewail one 
[cf. W. $ 32, 1 y.]: Lk. viii. 52; xxiii. 27, (Gen. xxiii. 2; 
1 S.xxv.1,ete.; Arstph. Lys. 396; Anthol. 11, 135, 1); 
ἐπί twa, Rev.i. 7; [xviii. 9 T Tr WH], (2 S. xi. 26); ἐπί 
τινι, Rev. xviii. 9 [R GL], ef. Zech. xii. 10. [Comp.: ava-, 
ἀπο-, ἐκ-, €v-, kara-, ypo-, προσκόπτω. SYN. cf. Opnvew. | * 

κόραξ, -akos, 6, a raven: Lk. xii. 24. [ Fr. Hom. down. ] * 

κοράσιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κόρη). prop. a collog. word 
used disparagingly (like the Germ. Mddel), a little girl 
(in the epigr. attributed to Plato in Diog. Laert. 3, 33; 
Lcian. as. 6) ; used by later writ. without disparagement 
LW. 24 (23) ], a girl, damsel, maiden: Mt. ix. 24 sq.; xiv. 

1; Mk. v. 41 sq.; vi. 22, 28; (occasionally, as in Epie- 
tet. diss. 2, 1, 28; 3, 2, 8; 4, 10, 83; Sept. for iy»; 
twice also for 1317, Joel iii. 3 (iv. 3) ; Zech. viii. 5; [Tob. 
vi.12: Judith xvi. 12; Esth.ii.2]). The form and use 
of the word are fully diseussed in Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 
13 sq., cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 42 sq.* 

κορβᾶν [-βάν WH; but see Tf. Proleg. p. 102], in- 
decl., and κορβανᾶς, acc. -àv [ B. 20 (18)], ὁ, (Hebr. mp 
i.e. an offering, Sept. everywh. δῶρον, a term which com- 
prehends all kinds of sacrifices, the bloody as well as the 
bloodless) ; 1. κορβᾶν. a gift offered (or to be of- 


Κορέ 


fered) to God: Mk. vii. 11 (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 4, of the 
Nazirites, of κορβᾶν αὑτοὺς ὀνομάσαντες τῷ θεῷ, δῶρον δὲ 
τοῦτο σημαίνει κατὰ Ἑλλήνων γλῶτταν ; cf. contr. Apion. 
1, 22, 4; [BB.DD. s. v. Corban; Ginsburg in the Bible 
Educator, i. 155]). 2. xopBavas, -à [see DB. u. s.], 
the sacred treasury: Mt. xxvii. 6 [L mrg. Tr mrg. κορβᾶν] 
(τὸν ἱερὸν θησαυρόν, καλεῖται δὲ kopBavàs, Joseph. b. j. 2, 
9, 4).* 

Kopé (in Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 2 sqq. with the Grk. ter- 
minations -éov, 7-, τῆν), 6, (Hebr. mp i. e. ice, hail), Ko- 
rah (Vulg. Core), a man who, with others, rebelled against 
Moses (Num. xvi.): Jude 11.* 

κορέννυμι; (Kdpos satiety); to satiate, sale, satisfy: 1 
aor. pass. ptep. κορεσθέντες, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down, w. gen. of the thing with which one is filled [B. 
§ 132, 19], τροφῆς, Acts xxvii. 38; trop. (pf.) κεκορεσμέ- 
νοι ἐστέ, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the 
consummate Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.* 

Κορίνθιος, -ov, 6, a Corinthian, an inhabitantof Corinth: 
Acts xviii. 8; 2 Co. vi. 11. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)]* 

Κόρινθος, -ov, 7, Corinth, the metropolis of Achaia 
proper, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be- 
tween the /Ezean and Ionian Seas (hence called bimaris, 
Hor. car. 1, 7, 2; Ovid. metam. 5, 407), and having two 
harbors, one of which called Cenchrez (see Keyypeat) 
was the roadstead for ships from Asia, the other, called 
Lechzon or Lechzeum, for ships from Italy. It was utterly 
destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the 
Achzan war, B. €. 146; but after the lapse of a century 
it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [Β. c. 44]. It was emi- 
nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts, 
especially the study of rhetorie and philosophy; but it 
was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption, 
particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came to 
the city in his second missionary journey, [c.] A. p. 53 
or 54, and founded there a Christian ehureh : Acts xviii. 
1: x1x-:51 602322: 7210071715 287022 m»17:920 [88 
DD. s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 269 
sqq.] * 

Κορνήλιος, -ov, 6, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman 
centurion living at Cesarea, converted to Christianity 
by Peter: Acts x. 1 sqq.* 

κόρος, -ov, 6, (Ilebr. 33), a corus or cor [cf. Ezek. xlv. 
14], the largest Hebrew dry measure (i. e. for wheat, 
meal, ete.); ace. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to 
ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. s. v. Weights and Meas- 
ures sub fin.; F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii. 
10 sq.]: Lk. xvi. 7 [A. V. measure]. (Sept. [Lev. xxvii. 
16; Num. xi. 32]; 1 K. iv. 22; v. 11; 2 Chr. ii. 10; 
[xxvii. 5].) * 

κοσμέω, -0; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἐκόσμουν; 1 aor. ékó- 
σμησα; pf. pass. κεκόσμημαι; (κόσμος) ; 1. to put 
in order, arrange, make ready, prepare: às λαμπάδας, put 
in order [ A. V. trim], Mt. xxv. 7 (δόρπον, Hom. Od. 7, 
13; τράπεζαν, Xen. Cyr. 8,2,6 ; 6,11; Sept. Ezek. xxiii. 
41 for q5j'; Sir. xxix. 26; προσφοράν, Sir. 1. 14, and 
other exx. elsewhere). 2. to ornament, adorn, (so 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down; Sept. several times for 


956 





κόσμος 


033); prop.: οἶκον, in pass., Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25; τὰ 
μνημεῖα, to decorate [ A.V. garnish], Mt. xxiii. 29 (τάφους, 
Xen. mem. 2, 2, 13) ; τὸ ἱερὸν λίθοις καὶ ἀναθέμασι, in 
pass. Lk. xxi. 5; τοὺς θεμελίους τοῦ τείχους λίθῳ τιμίῳ, 
Rey. xxi. 19; τινά (with garments), νύμφην, pass. Rev. 
xxi. 2; ἑαυτὰς ἔν τινι, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this pass. see κατα- 
στολή. 2). metaph. i. q. to embellish with honor, gain honor, 
(Pind. nem. 6. 78; Thuc. 2, 42; κεκοσμ. τῇ ἀρετῇ, Xen. 
Cyr. 8, 1, 21): ἑαυτάς, foll. by a ptep. designating the aet 
by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iii. 5; τὴν διδα- 
σκαλίαν ἐν πᾶσιν, in all things, Tit. ii. 10.* 

κοσμικός, 7. -óv, (κόσμος), of or belonging to the world 
(Vulg. saecularis) ; i. e. 1. relating to the universe : 
τοὐρανοῦ τοῦδε καὶ τῶν κοσμικῶν πάντων, Aristot. phys. 2, 
4 p.196*, 25; opp. to ἀνθρώπινος, Lcian. paras. 11; κοσμικὴ 
διάταξις, Plut. consol. ad Apoll. c. 34 p. 119 e. 2. 
earthly: τὸ ἅγιον κοσμικόν, [its] earthly sanctuary [ R.V. 
of this world], Heb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. e. having 
the character of this (present) corrupt age: ai κοσμικαὶ 
ἐπιθυμίαι, Tit. ii. 12; (so also in eccles. writ.).* 

κόσμιος. -ov, of three term. in class. Grk., cf. WH. 
App. p. 157; W.§ 11, 1; [B. 25 (22 sq.)], (κόσμος), 
well-arranged, seemly, modest: 1 "Tim. ii. 9[WH mrg. 
-piws|; of a man living with decorum, a well-ordered 
life, 1 Tim. iii. 2. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isoer., Lys., 
al) [Cf. Trench § xcii.]* 

[κοσμίως, adv. (decently), fr. κόσμιος, q. v.: 1 Tim. ii. 
9 WlImrg. (Arstph., Isocr., al.)*] 

koc 'okp&rop, -opos, ὁ, (κόσμος and kpareo), lord of the 
world, prince of this age: the devil and demons are called 
in plur. of κοσμοκράτορες τοῦ σκότους τοῦ αἰῶνος [but crit. 
edd. om. τ. ai@y.| τούτου [R. V. the world-rulers of this 
darkness), Eph. vi. 12; cf. 11; Jn. xii. 31; 2 Co. iv. 4; 
see ἄρχων. (The word occurs in Orph. 8, 11; 11, 11; 
in eccl. writ. of Satan; in rabbin. writ. ὙΠ ΡΥ]. is used 
both of human rulers and of the angel of death; ef. Buz- 
torf, Lex. talm. et rabb. p. 2006 [p. 996 ed. Fischer].)* 

κόσμος, -ου, ὁ; 1. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, 
an apt and harmonious arrangement or constitution, or- 
der. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, ornament, 
decoration, adornment: ἐνδύσεως ἱματίων, 1 Pet. ii. 3 
(Sir. vi. 30; xxi. 21; 2 Mace. ii. 2: Sept. for Nay of 
the arrangement of the stars, ‘the heavenly hosts,’ as 
the ornament of the heavens, Gen. ii. 1; Deut. iv. 19; 
xvii. 3; Is. xxiv. 21; xl. 26; besides occasionally for 
ΣΡ; twice for nw2n, Prov. xx. 29; Is. iii. 19). 3. 
the world, i. e. the universe (quem κόσμον Graeci nom- 
ine ornamenti appellarunt, eum nos a perfecta absolu- 
taque elegantia mundum, Plin. h. n. 2, 3; in which 
sense Pythagoras is said to have been the first to use the 
word, Plut. de plae. philos. 2, 1, 1 p. 886 c.; but acc. to 
other accounts he used it of the heavens, Diog. L. 8, 48, 
of which it is used several times also by other Grk. writ. 
[see Menag. on Diog. Laért.l. c.; Bentley, Epp. of Phalar. 
vol. i. 391 (Lond. 1836) ; M. Anton. 4, 27 and Gataker's 
notes; cf. L. and S. s. v. IV.]) : Acts xvii. 24; Ro. iv. 13 
(where ef. Meyer, Tholuck, Philippi); 1 Co. iii. 22; viii. 
4; Phil. ii. 15; with a predominant notion of space, in 


, 12) 
KOO 0S 9 


hyperbole, Jn. xxi. 25 (Lap. vii. 17; ix. 3; 2 Macc. viii. 
18; κτίζειν T. κόσμον, Sap. xi. 18; ὁ τοῦ κόσμου κτίστης, 
2 Mace. vii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 25 (24) ; — a sense in which 
it does not occur in the other O. T. books, although there 
is something akin to it in Prov. xvii. 6, on which see 8 
below); in the phrases πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι, Jn. xvii. 
5; ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου [ Mt. xiii. 35 RG; xxy.34; Lk. 
xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8] and πρὸ 
κατ. κόσμου [Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i.4; 1 Pet. i. 20], (on 
which see καταβολή, 2); ἀπὸ κτίσεως κόσμου, Ko. i. 20 ; 
an’ ἀρχῆς x. Mt. xxiv. 21; (on the om. of the art. cf. W. 
p. 123 (117); B. $ 124, 8 b.; [cf. Ellicott on Gal. vi. 
14). 4. the circle of the earth, the earth, (very rarely 
so in Grk. writ. until after the age of the Ptolemies; so 
in Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. i. pp. 413 and 643, nos. 334 and 
1306): Mk.xvi.15; [Jn.xii.25]; 1 Tim. vi. 7; βασιλεία 
τοῦ κόσμου, Rey. xi. 15; βασιλεῖαι (plur.) τ. κόσμου, Mt. iv. 
8 (for which Lk. iv. 5 τῆς οἰκουμένης) ; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου 
τούτου. of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ x., properly, Mt. 
xxvi. 13; hyperbolically, i. q. far and wide, in widely sep- 
arated places, Ro. i. 8; [so ἐν παντὶ τῷ κόσμῳ, Col. i. 6]; 
ὁ τότε Koopos, 2 Pet. iii. 6; the earth with its inhabitants: 
Cv ev κόσμῳ, opp. to the dead, Col. ii. 20 (λῃστὴς ἦν καὶ 
κλέπτης ἐν τῷ κύσμῳ, i. e. among those living on earth, 
Ev. Nicod. 26). By a usage foreign to prof. auth. 5. 
the inhabitants of the world: θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν τῷ κόσμῳ 
καὶ ἀγγέλοις k. ἀνθρώποις, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121) ]; par- 
ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race 
(first so in Sap. [e.g. x. 17): Mt. xiii. 38; xviii. 7; Mk. 
xiv. 9; Jn. i. 10, 29, [36 Lin br.]; iii. 16 sq.; vi. 33,51; 
viii. 26; xii. 47; xiii 1; xiv. 31; xvi. 28; xvii. 6, 21, 23; 
Ro. iii. 6, 19; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. [cf. W. 189 (178)]; iv. 13; v. 
10; xiv. 10; 2 Co. v. 19; Jas. ii. 5 [cf. W. u. 5.1; 1 Jn. ii. 2 
[cf. W. 577 (536)]: ἀρχαῖος κόσμος, of the antediluvians, 
2 Pet. ii. 5; γεννᾶσθαι eis v. x. Jn. xvi. 21; ἔρχεσθαι eis τὸν 
κόσμον (Jn. ix. 39) and εἰς τ. κι τοῦτον, to make its appear- 
ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the 
light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn. i. 9; iii. 19, cf. 
xii. 46 ; of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; of Jesus as the 
Messiah, Jn. ix. 39; xvi. 28; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. i. 15 ; also 
εἰσέρχεσθαι eis τ. x. Heb. x. 5; of false teachers, 2 Jn. 
7 (yet here L T Tr WH e£épx. eis τ. κι; [so all texts in 
1 Jn. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence 
among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin 
and death, Ro. v. 12 (of death, Sap. ii. 24; Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 3, 4; of idolatry, Sap. xiv. 14). ἀποστέλλειν τινὰ 
eis τ. κι» Jn. iii. 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9; φῶς τ. k., 
Mt. v. 14; Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5; σωτὴρ T. k, Jn. iv. 42; 1 
Jn. iv. 14, (σωτηρία τοῦ x. Sap. vi. 26 (25); ἐλπὶς τ. «. 
Sap. xiv. 6; πρωτόπλαστος πατὴρ τοῦ k. of Adam, Sap. 
X. 1); στοιχεῖα τοῦ x. (see στοιχεῖον, 9 and 4) ; ἐν τῷ koopa, 
among men, Jn. xvi. 33; xvii. 13; Eph. ii. 12; ἐν κόσμῳ 
(see W. 123 (117)), 1 Tim. iii. 16; εἶναι ἐν τῷ x., to dwell 
among men, Jn. i. 10; ix. 5; xvii. 11,12 RG; 1.Jn. 
iv. 3; εἶναι ἐν κόσμῳ, to be present, Ro. v. 13; ἐξελθεῖν 
ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, to withdraw from human society and seek 
an abode outside of it, 1 Co. v. 10; ἀναστρέφεσθαι ἐν τῷ 
κα, to behave one’s self, 2 Co. i. 12; likewise εἶναι ἐν τῷ 


oT 








κόσμος 


K. τούτῳ, 1 Jn. iv. 17. used spec. of the Gentiles collec- 
tively, Ro. xi. 12 (where it alternates with τὰ ἔθνη), 15; 
[the two in combination: τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κόσμου, Lk. xii. 
30]. hyperbolically or loosely i. q. the majority of men 
in a place, the multitude or mass (as we say the public) : 
Jn. vii. 4; xii. 19 [here Tr mrg. adds ὅλος in br.]; xiv. 
19,22; xviii. 20. 1. 4. the entire number, ἀσεβῶν, 2 Pet. 
li. 5. 6. the ungodly multitude; the whole mass of 
men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause 
of Christ [cf. W. 26]: Jn. vii. 7; xiv. [17] 97/5 τς 18 
sq.; xvi. 8, 20, 33; xvii. 9, 14 sq. 25; 1 Co.i. 21; vi. 2 
xi. 32; 2 Co. vii. 10; Jas.i.27; 1 Pet. v. 9; 2 Pet. i. 4; 
ii. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 1, 13; iv. 55 v. 19; of the aggregate of 
uugodly and wicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 38; in 
Noah’s time, ibid. 7; with οὗτος added, Eph. ii. 2 (on 
which see αἰών, 3); εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ k. and ἐκ τοῦ k. τούτου 
(see εἰμί, V. 3 d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 
1 Jn. iv. 9; λαλεῖν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, to speak in accordance 
with the world's character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn. 
lv. 5; ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ x. rovrov, i. e. the devil, Jn. xii. 31; 
xiv. 30; xvi. 11; 6 ἐν τῷ x. he that is operative in the 
world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 4; 76 πνεῦμα τοῦ K. 
1 Co. ii. 12; ἡ σοφία τοῦ x. τούτου, ibid. i. 20 [here 
GL T Tr WH om. rovr.]; iii. 19. [τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κό- 
σμου, Gal. iv. 3; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and στοι- 
χεῖον, 3 and 4). | 7. worldly affairs; the aggregate 
of things earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow- 
ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, ete., which, although 
hollow and frail and fleeting, stir desire, seduce from God 
and are obstacles to the cause of Christ: Gal. vi. 14; 1 
Jn. ii. 16 sq.; iii. 17; εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ x., to be of earthly 
origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36; somewhat differently 
in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on which see εἰμί, V. 3 d.) ; κερδαίνειν τὸν 
k. ὅλον, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; oí χρώμενοι 
τῷ K. τούτῳ [crit. txt. τὸν κόσμον : see χράομαι, 2], 1 Co. 
Vil. 31; μεριμνᾶν τὰ τοῦ k. 33 sq. 5 φίλος and φιλία τοῦ κ. 
Jas. iv. 4; ἀγαπᾶν τὸν κι 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; νικᾶν τὸν x., the in- 
centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 Jn. v. 4 sq. ; 
the obstacles to God's cause, Jn. xvi. 33 ; [cf. ἐλθέτω χάρις 
k. παρελθέτω ὁ κόσμος οὗτος, Teaching of the Twelve 
Apostles, c. 10]. 8. any aggregate or general col- 
lection of particulars of any sort [cf. Ens. “a world of 
curses " (Shakspere), etc.]: ὁ κόσμος τῆς ἀδικίας, the sum 
of all iniquities, Jas. iii. 6 ; rod πιστοῦ ὅλος ὁ κόσμος τῶν 
χρημάτων. τοῦ δὲ ἀπίστου οὐδὲ ὀβολός (a statement due 
to the Alex. translator), Prov. xvii. 6. Among the N. T. 
writers no one uses xécpos oftener than John; it occurs 
in Mark three times, in Luke's writings four times, and 
in the Apocalypse three times. Cf. Kreiss, Sur le sens 
du mot κόσμος dans le N. T. (Strasb. 1837); Diisterdieck 
on 1 Jn. ii. 15, pp. 247-259; Zezschwitz, Profangriicitit 
u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 21 sqq.; JDiestel in Herzog xvii. 
p. 676 sqq.; [ Trench, Syn. § lix.]; on John’s use of the 
word cf. Reuss, Histoire de la théologie chrétienne au 
siecle apostolique, ii. p. 463 sqq. [1. e. livre vii. ch. viii.]; 
cf. his Johanneische Theologie, in the Beitrige zu den 
theol. Wissenschaften, Fase. i. p. 29 sqq.; [Westcott on 
Jn. i. 10, * Additional Note '].* 


Kovaptos 


Kovapros, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Quartus, an unknown 
Christian: Ro. xvi. 23.* 

κοῦμι, Tr txt. κοῦμ, T WH κούμ, (the Hebr. 3p [impv. 
fem.; the other (masc.) form must be regarded as hav- 
ing become an interjection ]), arise: Mk. v. 41.* 

κουστωδία, -as [ B. 17 (16)], ἡ, (a Lat. word), guard: 
used of the Roman soldiers guarding the sepulchre of 
Christ, Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; xxviii. 11. (Ev. Nie. c. 13.) * 

κουφίζω : impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐκούφιζον ; (κοῦφος light) ; 
1. intrans. fo be light (Hes., Eur., Dio C.). Zh ie 
Hippoer. down generally trans. to lighten: a ship, by 
throwing the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 38. (Sept. 
Jonah i. 5, and often in Polyb.) * 

κόφινος, -ov, 6, a basket, wicker basket, [ef. B. D. s. v. 
Basket]: Mt. xiv. 20; [xvi. 9]; Mk. vi. 48; [viii 19]; 
Lk. ix.17; Jn.vi. 13. (Judg. vi. 19; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 
7; Arstph. av. 1310; Xen. mem. 3, 8, 6; al.) * 

κράββατος (1, Τ Tr WII xpáBarros; cod. Sin. κράβακτος 
[exe. in Acts v.15; cf. KC. Nov. Test. ad fid. cod. Vat. 
praef. p. Ixxxi.sq.; Tf. Proleg. p. 807), -ov, 6, (Lat. 
grabatus), a pallet, camp bed, (a rather mean bed, hold- 
ing only one person, called by the Greeks σκίμπους, 
σκιμπόδιον) : Mk. ii. 4, 9, 11 sq. ; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-12 [in 
12 T WH om. Tr br. the cl]; Acts v.15; ix.38. Cf. 
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 175sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 62; Volkmar, Marcus u. d. Synopse u.s.w. p. 131; 
[.McClellan, New Testament etc. p. 106; W. 25].* 

κράζω (with a long; hence ptep. κρᾶζον, Gal. iv. 6 L 'T 
Tr WH [(where RG kpá£ov); cf. B. 61 (53)]) ; impf. éxpa- 
Gov; fut. κεκράξομαι (Lk. xix. 40 R G L Tr mre.), and 
κράξω (ibid. '" WH Trtxt.), the former being more com. 
in Grk. writ. and used by the Sept. (cf. Mic. iii. 4; Job 
xxxv. 12, ete. [but ἀνα-κράξομαι, Joel iii. 16 Alex.; cf. W. 
219 (262); esp. B. as below]); 1 aor. ἔκραξα (once viz. 
Acts xxiv. 21 T Tr WII ἐκέκραξα, a reduplieated form 
freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6; Judg. iii. 15; 1 
Mace. xi. 49, ete.; see Veitch s. v.]; more com. in native 
Grk. writ. is 2 aor. ἔκραγον [ * the sim ple ἔκραγον seems 
not to oceur in good Attic” (Veitch s. v.) ]); pf. kékpaya, 
with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); ef. Brim. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 223; B.61(53); Kühneri.p. 851; [esp. 
Veitch s. v.]; Sept. for piu PRY, wop, yaw; [fr. Aes- 
chyl. down]; 1. prop. [onomatopoetie] fo croak 
(Germ. krüchzen), of the ery of the raven ( Theophr.) ; 
hence univ. to ery out, cry aloud, vociferate: particularly 
of inarticulate cries, Mk. v. 5; ix. 26; xv. 39 [here T 
WH om. Tr br. xp.]; Lk. ix. 39; Rev. xii. 2; ἀπὸ τοῦ 
φόβου, Mt. xiv. 26; with φωνῇ μεγάλῃ added, Mt. xxvii. 
50; Mk. i. 26 [here T Tr WH $ovgcav]; Acts vii. 57; 
Rev. x. 3; ὄπισθέν τινος. to ery after one, follow him up 
with outeries, Mt. xv. 23; like ὉΡῚ and prx (Gen. iv. 
10; xviii. 20), i. q. to ery or pray for vengeance, Jas. v. 
4. 2. to cri i.e. call out aloud, speak with a loud voice, 
[ Germ. laut rufen] : ri, Acts xix. 32; xxiv. 21; foll. by 
direct discourse, Mk. x. 48; xv.14; Lk. xviii. 39; Jn: 
xii. 13 RG; Acts xix. 34; xxi. 28, 36; xxiii 6; with 
the addition φωνῇ μεγάλῃ foll. by direct disc., Mk. v. 7; 
Acts vii. 60; ἐν φωνῇ pey. Rev. xiv. 15; κράζω λέγων, to 


358 





, 
Kparatow 


cry out saying, ete., Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 30; [xv. 22 (where 
RG éxpavyacev) ]; xx. 30 sq.; xxi. 9; xxvii. 23; Mk. iii. 
11; xi. 9 [1 Tr WH om. L br. Aéy.]; Jn. xix. 12 [here 
LT Tr WH éxpavy.] ; Acts xvi. 17; xix. 28; Rev. xviii. 
18; κράζω φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγων, Rev. vi. 10; vii. 10; xix. 
17 [here T WH br. add ἐν); κράξας ἔλεγε, Mk. ix. 24; 
κράζειν x. λέγειν, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk. iv. 
41 RGTrtxt. WH; Acts xiv. 14; of those who utter or 
teach a thing publicly and solemnly, Ro. ix. 27; κέκραγε 
and ἔκραξε λέγων, foll. by direct disc., Jn. i. 15 ; vii. 37; 
ἔκραξε διδάσκων k. λέγων, Jn. vii. 28; ἔκραξε x. εἶπεν, Jn. 
xii. 44: of those who offer earnest, importunate, prayers 
to God, foll. by direct disc., Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6, (often 
so in O. T., as Job xxxv. 12; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 7; 
commonly with πρὸς κύριον, πρὸς τὸν θεόν added, Jude. 
x. 12 [Alex.]; Ps. iii. 5; evi. (evii.) 13, ete.). τινί, to 
ery or call to: Rev. vii. 25 xiv. 15, (cf. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 
145; ἕτερος πρὸς ἕτερον, Is. vi. 3). [Cowr.: dva-kpá(o. 
Syn. see Boda, fin.]* 

κραιπάλη [ WII κρεπάλη, see their App. p. 151], -ης, 7, 
(fr. KPAS the head, and πάλλω to toss about; so ex- 
plained by Galen and Clem. Alex. Paedag. 2, 2, 26 and 
Phryn. in Dekker, Anecd. p. 45, 13 [cf. Vaniéek p. 1487), 
Lat. crapula (i. e. the giddiness and headache caused by 
drinking wine to excess): Lk. xxi. 34 [ A. V. surfeiting ; 
ef. Trench $]1xi.]. (Arstph. Acharn. 277; Aleiphr. 3, 
24; Plut. mor. p. 127 f. [de sanitate 11]; Lcian., Hdian. 
2, 5, 1.)* 

κρανίον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of the noun κρᾶνον [i. e. κάρα; 
Curtius $ 38]), a skull (Vulg. calvaria) : Mt. xxvii. 33; 
Mk. xv. 22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 17; see Γολγοθά. 
(Jude. ix. 53; 2 K. ix. 35; Hom. Il. 8, 84; Pind., Eur., 
Plat., Leian., IH dian.) * 

κράσπεδον, -ov, τύ, in class. Grk. the extremity or promi- 
nent part of a thing, edge, skirt, margin; the fringe of a 
garment; in the N. T. for Hebr. my, i. e. a little ap- 
pendage hanging down from the edge of the mantle or 
cloak, made of twisted wool; a tassel, tuft : Mt. ix. 20; 
xiv. 36; xxiii. 5; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. vii. 44. The Jews 
had such appendages attached to their mantles to remind 
them of the law, ace. to Num. xv. 37 sq. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Saum; [B.D.s. v. Hem of Garment; Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 624; esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto 
s. v. Fringes ].* 

κραταιός, -d, -óv, (κράτος), Sept. mostly for prm, mighty: 
ἡ Kp. χεὶρ τοῦ θεοῦ. i.e. the power of God, 1 Pet. v. 6; 
τοῦ κυρίου, Bar. ii. 11; 1 Esdr. viii. 46 (47), 60 (61), and 
often in Sept. (In earlier Grk. only poetic [Hom., al.] 
for the more com. kparepós; but later, used in prose also 
[ Plut., al.].)* 

κραταιόω, -@: Pass., pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. κραταιοῦσθε 
impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐκραταιοῦτο ; 1 aor. inf. κραταιωθῆναι ; 
(kpáros); only bibl. and eccles., for the classic κρατύνω ; 
Sept. mostly for pins in pass. several times for YON; to 
strengthen, make strong, (Vulg. conforto [and in Eph. 
iii. 16 conroboro]); Pass. to be made strong, to increase 
in strength, to. grow strong: pass. with dat. of respect, 
πνεύματι, Lk. i. 80: ii. 40 [here GL T Tr WH om. πνεύ- 


Kpavréa 


part]; δυνάμει, Eph. iii. 16, (cf. ἰσχύειν rots σώμασι, Xen. 
mem. 2, 7, 7); ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε, i. e. show your- 
selves brave [ A. V. be strong], 1 Co. xvi. 13 (ἀνδρίζεσθε 
k. κραταιούσθω ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν, Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 25; xpa- 
ταιοῦσθε k. γίνεσθε eis ἄνδρας, 1 S. iv. 9; ἀνδρίζου k. κρα- 
ταιωθῶμεν, 2 S. x. 12).* 

kparéw; impf. 2 pers. plur. ékpareire, Mk. xiv. 49 Tr 
mre. WH mrg.; fut. κρατήσω; 1 aor. ἐκράτησα; pf. inf. 
κεκρατηκέναι; Pass. pres. κρατοῦμαι; impf. ἐκρατούμην ; 
pf. 3 pers. plur. κεκράτηνται; (κράτος [q. v.]); Sept. 
chiefly for pin, also for rw (to seize), etc.; fr. Hom. 
down ; 1. to have power, be powerful; to be chief, 
be master of, to rule: absol. for 372, Esth.i. 1; 1 Esdr. 
iv. 38; ὁ κρατῶν, Sap. xiv. 19; οἱ κρατοῦντες, 2 Macc. iv. 
50; τινός, to be ruler of one, Prov. xvi. 32; xvii. 2, (for 
oU); Sap. iii. 8; never so in the N. T. 2. to get 
possession of; i. e. a. to become master of, to obtain : 
"τῆς προθέσεως, Acts xxvii. 13 [(Diod. Sie. 16, 20; al.) ef. 
B. 161 (140); on the tense, W. 334 (313) . b. to take 
hold of: τῆς χειρός τινος [cf. W. $ 30, 8d.; B. u. 5.1, Mt. 
ix. 25; Mk.i.31; v.41; ix. 27 L'T Tr WH; Lk. viii. 
54; τινὰ τῆς χειρός, to take one by the hand, Mk. ix. 27 
RG, ef. Matthiae ὃ 331; τινά, to hold one fast in order 
not to be sent away, Acts iii. 11, cf. Meyer ad loc.; τοὺς 
πόδας τινός, to embrace one's knees, Mt. xxviii. 9; trop. 
τὸν λόγον, to lay hold of mentally [cf. our ‘catch at’; but 
al. refer this ex. to 3 b. below], Mk. ix. 10 (join πρὸς 
“ἑαυτούς with evé(mroüvres). c. to lay hold of, take, 
seize: twa, to lay hands on one in order to get him into 
one's power, Mt. xiv. 3; xviii. 28; xxi. 46; xxii. 6; xxvi. 
4,48, 50, 55, 57; Mk. iii. 21; vi. 17; xii. 12; xiv. 1, 44, 
46, 49. 51; Acts xxiv. 65. Rev. xx. 2, (2)S. vi. 6; Ps. 
exxxvi. (exxxvii.) 9); τί, Mt. xii. 11. 3. to hold; 
i. e. a. to hold in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ, Rev. ii. 1 
(τῇ ἀριστερᾷ τὸν ἄρτον, Plut. mor. p. 99 d.). b. to 
hold fast, i. e. trop. not to discard or let go; to keep care- 
Sully and faithfully: ὃ ἔχετε, ἔχεις, Rev. ii. 255 iii. 11; τὸ 
ὄνομά pou, Rev. ii. 13; one's authority, τὴν κεφαλήν, i. e. 
ἐκεῖνον ὅς ἐστιν ἡ κεφαλή, Christ, Col. ii. 195 τὴν παρά- 
δοσιν, Mk. vii. 3 sq. 8; τὰς παραδόσεις, 2 Th. ii. 15; τὴν 
διδαχήν, Rev. ii. 14 sq.; also with a gen. of the thing, of 
blessings in which different individuals are participants: 
τῆς ὁμολογίας, Heb. iv. 14; τῆς ἐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 18 [al. 
refer this ex. to 2 above], (cf. 2 S. iii. 6). C. lo con- 
tinue to hold, to retain: of death continuing to hold one, 
pass. Acts ii. 24; τὰς ἁμαρτίας (opp. to ἀφίημι), to re- 
tain sins, i. e. not to remit, Jn. xx. 23; to hold in check, 
restrain: foll. by tva μή, Rev. vii. 1; by τοῦ μή [ W. 325 
(305); B. § 140, 16 8.], Lk. xxiv. 16. On the constr. 
of this verb with gen. and acc. cf. Matthiae $ 359 sq. ; 
W. § 30, 8 d.; B. 161 (140).* 

κράτιστος, -7, -ov, superl. of the adj. κρατύς, (κράτος), 
[fr. (Hom.) Pind. down], mightiest, strongest, noblest, most 
illustrious, best, most excellent: voc. κράτιστε used in ad- 
dressing men of conspicuous rank or office, Acts xxiii. 
26; xxiv.3; xxvi. 25, (Otto, De ep. ad Diognetum etc. 
Jena 1845,p. 79 sqq. and in his Epist. ad Diognet. 
Leips. ed. p. 53 sq., has brought together exx. fr. later 


959 








κρεμάννυμι 


writ.). Perhaps also it served simply to express friend- 
ship in Lk. i. 3 (as in Theophr. char. 5; Dion. Hal. de 
oratt. 1; Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8), because in Acts i. 1 it is 
omitted in addressing the same person. Cf. Grimm in 
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 50 sq.* 

κράτος, -eos (τους), [fr. a root meaning ‘to perfect, 
complete’ (Curtius § 72); fr. Hom. down], τό, Hebr. 
iD; 1. force, strength. 2. power, might: τὸ 
κράτος τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ, the might of his strength, Eph. 
i. 19; vi. 10; τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, Col. i. 11; κατὰ κράτος, 
mightily, with great power, ηὔξανε, Acts xix. 20; meton. 
a mighty deed, a work of power: ποιεῖν kp. (cf. ποιεῖν Suva- 
pecs), Lk. i. 51. 3. dominion: in the doxologies, 
1 Tim. vi. 16; 1 Pet.iv.11; v.11; Jude 25; Rev.i.6; 
v. 135 τινός (gen. of obj.), Heb. ii. 14 (τὸ Περσέων κράτος 
ἔχοντα, Hdt. 3, 69). [Sy¥N. see δύναμις, fin. ] * 

κραυγάζω; impf. 3 pers. plur. expavyagov; fut. κραυ- 
yáco; laor. ἐκραύγασα; (κραυγή); to cry out, cry aloud, 
(i. q- κράζω [see Bodo, fin., and below]): Mt. xii. 19; 
Acts xxii. 23; to shout, foll. by direct disc., Jn. xix. 15 
and L T Tr WH in xii. 13; with λέγων added, to ery out 
in these words, foll. by direct disc.: Jn. xviii. 40; xix. 6 
(where Tom. λέγοντες), and L T Tr WH also in 12; 
kpavyá(ew x. λέγειν, Lk. iv. 41 LT Tr mrg.; κραυγάζ. 
φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, foll. by direct dise., Jn. xi. 43. τινί, to cry 
out to, call to, one (see κράζω, 2 and fin.), foll. by direct disc. 
Mt.xv.22 RG. The word is rare in Grk. writ.: Dem. 
p. 1258, 26; of the shouts in the theatres, Epict. diss. 3, 
4,4; of araven, ib. 3, 1, 37; Galen, al.; first in a poetice 
fragm. in Plat. rep. 10 p. 607 b.; once in the O. T. viz. 
2 Esdr. iii. 13. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 337.* 

κραυγή, -ῆς, 7, [cf. κράζω ; on its class. use see Schmidt, 
Syn. i. ch. 3 § 4; fr. Eur. down]. Sept. for TPMT, MPVS, 
AW, nj, ete.; a erying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv. 
6; Lk. i. 42 TWH Trtxt.; Acts xxiii. 9; Eph. iv. 31, 
and RG in Rev. xiv. 18; of the wailing of those in dis- 
tress, Heb. v. 7; Rev. xxi. 4.* 

κρέας, τό, [cf. Lat. caro, cruor; Curtius § 74], plur. κρέα 
(cf. W. 65 (63); [B. 15 (13) ]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. 
very often for 573; (the) flesh (of a sacrificed animal): 
Ro. xiv. 21; 1 Co. viii. 13.* 

κρείττων and (1 Co. vii. 38; Phil.i.23; in other places 
the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co. 
vii. 9 [here T Tr WH Ltxt. -r7-]; xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9 
[here and in the preced. pass. LT Tr WH -oo-; see 
WH. App. p. 148 sq.; cf. Z, o, s]) κρείσσων, -ovos, neut. 
τον, (compar. of κρατύς, see κράτιστος, cf. Kühner i. p. 436; 
[ B. 27 (24)]), [fr. Hom. down], better; i. e. a. more 
useful, more serviceable: 1 Co. xi. 17; xii. 31 RG; Heb. 
xi.40; xii. 24; with πολλῷ μᾶλλον added, Phil. i. 23 (cf. 
μᾶλλον, 1 b.]; κρεῖσσον (adv.) ποιεῖν, 1 Co. vii. 38; xpeir- 
τόν ἐστιν, it is more advantageous, foll. by an inf., 1 Co. vii. 
9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [cf. B. 217 (188); W. $ 41 a. 2a]. b. 
more excellent: Heb.i.4; vi. 9; vii. 7, 19, 22; viii. 6; 
ix. 23; x. 34; xl. 16, 35 ; xp. ἐστι, foll. by an inf., 1 Pet. 
nbus 

κρέμαμαι, see the foll. word. 

κρεμάννυμι, also kpegavrvo [scarcely classic” (Veitch 


κρεπάλη 


s. v.)], κρεμάω -ὦ [“51}}} later" (ibid.)], and (Sept. Job 
xxvi. 7 and Byzant. writ.) κρεμάζω, (in the N. T. the 
pres. does not occur): 1 aor. ἐκρέμασα; 1 aor. pass. éxpe- 
μάσθην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nom; to hang up, 
suspend: τὶ ἐπί τι (Rec.), περί τι (LT Tr WH), [ets τι, 
Tdf. edd. 2, 7], Mt. xviii. 6; τινὰ ἐπὶ ξύλου, Acts v. 30; 
x. 39, (Gen. xl. 19, 22; Deut. xxi. 22; Esth. vi. 4, etc.) ; 
simply κρεμασθείς, of one crucified, Lk. xxiii. 39. Mid. 
κρέμαμαι (for κρεμάννυμαι, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 224); 
intrans. to be suspended, to hang: foll. by ἐκ with gen. of 
the thing, Acts xxviii. 4 (see ἐκ, I. 3); ἐπὶ ξύλου, of one 
hanging on a cross, Gal. iii. 13; trop. ἔν τινι, Mt. xxii. 
40, where the meaning is, all the Law and the Prophets 
(i. e. the teaching of the O. T. on morality) is summed 
up in these two precepts. [Cowr.: ἐκ-κρέμαμαι. | * 

[κρεπάλη, see κραιπάλη.] 

κρημνός, -ov, 6, (fr. κρεμάννυμι), a steep (place), a preci- 
pice: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; Lk. viii. 33. (2 Chr. xxv. 
12; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

Κρής, 5, plur. Κρῆτες. « Cretan, an inhabitant of the 
island of Crete: Acts ii. 11; Tit. i. 12 [cf. Farrar, St. 
Paul, ii. 534 ].* 

Ἐρήσκης [cf. B. 17 (15)], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un- 
known man: 2 Tim. iv. 10.* 

Κρήτη. -ης. ἡ. Crete, the largest and most fertile island 
of the Mediterranean archipelago or ZEgean Sea, now 
called Candia: Acts xxvii. 7, 12 sq. 21; Tit.i.5. [Dict. 
of Geog. or MeC. and S. s. v.]* 

κριθή, -ῆς, ἡ, (in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] only in 
plur. ai κριθαί), Sept. for NAPY, barley: Rev. vi. 6 κριθῆς 
RG, κριθῶν 1, T Tr ΝῊ." 

κρίθινος, -7, -ov, (κριθή), of barley, made of barley: ἄρτοι 
(2 K. iv. 42, cf. Judg. vii. 13), Jn. vi. 9,13. [(Hippon., al.)]* 

κρίμα [GT WH] or κρῖμα [L Tr (more commonly)] 
(on the accent cf. W. p. 50; Lipsius, Grammat. Unter- 
such. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to κρίμα, as do 
Bttm. 73 (64); Cobet (N. T. ad fid. ete. p. 49 sq.); 
Fritzsche (Rom. vol. i. 96,107); al.; * videtur? antiquitati 
Graecae, i Alexandrinae aetati placuisse," Tf. Proles. 
to Sept. ed. 4 p. xxx. ; on the accent in extant codd. see 
Tf. Proleg. p. 101; cf. esp. Lobeck, Paralip. p. 418 ]), -ros, 
τό, (fr. κρίνω, q. v. ; as κλίμα fr. κλίνω), [ Aeschyl. down], 
Sept. very often for 5317/2; 1. a decree: plur., τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Ro. xi. 33 [al. here (with A. V.) judgments; cf. 
Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 75). 2 
judgment; i. e. condemnation of wrong, the decision 
(whether severe or mild) which one passes on the faults 
of others: κρίματί τινι κρίνειν, Mt. vii. 2. In a forensic 
sense, the sentence of a judge: with a gen. of the pun- 
ishment to which one is sentenced, θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 
20; esp. the sentence of God as judge: τὸ κρίμα . . . eis 
κατάκριμα, the judgment (in which God declared sin to 
be punishable with death) issued in condemnation, i. e. 
was eondemnation to all who sinned and therefore paid 
the penalty of death Ro. v. 16; esp. where the justice 
of God in punishing is to be shown, κρίμα denotes 
condemnatory sentence, penal judgment, sentence, 2 Pet. 


ii. 3; Jude 4; with gen. of the one who pronounces 


960 








κρίνω 


judgment, τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. ii. 2 sq.; λαμβάνεσθαι κρίμα, Mt. 
xxiii. 13 (14) Ree.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Ro. xiii. 
2; Jas. iii. 1; the one on whom God passes judgment is 
said ἔχειν κρίμα, 1 Tim. v. 12; βαστάζειν τὸ κρίμα, to bear 
the force of the condemnatory judgment in suffering 
punishment (see βαστάζω, 2), Gal. v. 10; κρίμα ἐσθίειν 
ἑαυτῷ, so to eat as to incur the judgment or punishment 
of God, 1 Co. xi. 29; εἰς κρίμα συνέρχεσθαι, to incur the 
condemnation of God, 34; εἶναι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι, to lie 
under the same condemnation, pay the same penalty, 
Lk. xxiii. 40; with gen. of the one on whom condemna- 
tion is passed, Ro. iii. 8; 1 Tim. iii. 6; Rev. xvii. 1. the 
Judgment which is formed or passed: by God, through 
what Christ accomplished on earth, εἰς κρίμα ἐγὼ εἰς τ. 
κόσμον τοῦτον ἦλθον, where by way of explanation is added 
ἵνα κτλ. to this end, that ete. Jn. ix. 39; τὸ κρίμα ἄρχεται, 
the execution of judgment as displayed in the infliction 
of punishment, 1 Pet. iv. 17; the last or jinal judgment 
is called τὸ xp. τὸ μέλλον, Acts xxiv. 25; Kp. αἰώνιον, eter- 
nally in force, Heb. vi. 2; the vindication of one’s right, 
κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα τινὸς ἔκ τινος, to vindicate one’s right by 
taking vengeance or inflicting punishment on another, 
Rey. xviii. 20 (LR. V. God hath judged your judgment on 
her], see ἔκ, I. 7) ; i. q. the power and business of judging: 
kp. διδόναι τινί, Rev. xx. 4. 3. a matter to be judi- 
cially decided, a lawsuit, a case in court: κρίματα éyew 
μετά τινος, 1 Co. vi. 7.* 

κρίνον, -ov, τό, α lily: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. 
Hdt. down.]* 

κρίνω; fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα ; pf. κέκρικα ; 3 pers. 
sing. plupf., without augm. (W. $ 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]), xe- 
κρίκει (Acts xx. 16 GL'T Tr WH); Pass., pres. κρίνομαι; 
impf. ἐκρινόμην; pf. κέκριμαι; 1 aor. expiOny [cf. B. 52 
(45)]; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; Sept. for Dav, and also for 
p? and m3; Lat. cerno, i. e. 1. to separate, put 
asunder; to pick out, select, choose, (Hom., Hdt., Aeschyl., 
Soph., Xen., Plat., ἃ]. ; μετὰ νεανίσκων ἀρίστων kexpiyevon 
[chosen. picked], 2 Mace. xiii. 15; κεκριμένοι ἄρχοντες, 
Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 10); hence 2. to approve, es- 
teem: ἡμέραν map’ ἡμέραν, one day above another, i. e. 
to prefer [see παρά, III. 2 b.], Ro. xiv. 5 (so ri πρό rwos;. 
Plat. Phil. p. 57 e.; τὸν ᾿Απόλλω πρὸ Μαρσύου, rep. 3 p. 
399 e.); πᾶσαν jp. to esteem every day, i. e. hold it 
sacred, ibid. 3. to be of opinion, deem, think: ὀρθῶς. 
ἔκρινας, thou hast decided (judged) correctly, Lk. vii. 43 5. 
fol. by an inf. Acts xv. 19; foll. by a direct quest. 1 
Co. xi. 13; τοῦτο, ὅτε etc. to be of opinion ete. 2 Co. v. 
14; foll. by the ace. with inf. Acts xvi. 155 τινά or ri 
foll. by a predicate acc., κρίνειν τινὰ ἄξιόν τινος, to judge: 
one (to be) worthy of a thing, Acts xiii. 46; ἄπιστον 
4. to determine, resolve, de- 


[From 


κρίνεται, Acts xxvi. 8. 
cree: τί, 1 Co. vii. 37 (kpivat τι καὶ προθέσθαι, Polyb. 3, 
6, 7; τὸ κριθέν, which one has determined on, one's re- 
solve, 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; τοῖς κριθεῖσι ἐμμένειν δεῖ, Epict. 
diss. 2, 15, 7 sqq.) : δόγματα, pass. [the decrees that had 
been ordained (cf. A. V.)], Acts xvi. 4; τοῦτο κρίνατε, 
foll. by an inf. preceded by the art. τό, Ro. xiv. 13; also 
with ἐμαυτῷ added, for myself i. e. for my own benefit 


κρίνω 


(lest I should prepare grief for myself by being com- 
pelled to grieve you), 2 Co. ii. 1; foll. by an inf., Acts xx. 
16; xxv. 25; 1 Co. ii. 2 GL T Tr WH [(see below) ]; 
v. 3; Tit. iii. 12, (1 Mace. xi. 33; 3 Mace. i. 6; vi. 30; 
Judith xi. 13; Sap. viii. 9; Diod. 17, 95; Joseph. antt. 
7, 1, 5; 12, 10, 4; 13,6, 1); with τοῦ prefixed, 1 Co. ii. 
2 Rec. [(see above)]; foll. by the acc. with inf. Acts xxi. 
25 (2 Mace. xi. 36); with τοῦ prefixed, Acts xxvii. 1 [cf. 
B. $ 140, 16 6.]; (kpiverat τινι; it is one's pleasure, it seems 
good to one, 1 Esdr. vi. 20 (21) sq.; viii. 90 (92)). 5. 
to judge; a. to pronounce an opinion concerning right 
and wrong ; a. in a forensic sense [(differing from 
δικάζειν, the of ficial term, in giving prominence to the 
intellectual process, the sifting and weighing of evi- 
dence) ], of a human judge: τινά, to give a decision re- 
specting one, Jn. vii. 51; κατὰ τὸν νόμον, Jn. xviii. 31; 
Acts xxiii. 3; xxiv. 6 Ree.; the substance of the de- 
cision is added in an inf., Acts iii. 13; pass. to be judged, 
i. e. summoned to trial that one’s case may be examined 
and judgment passed upon it, Acts xxv. 10; xxvi. 6; 
Ro. iii. 4 (fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6 (4)); περί w. gen. of the thing, 
Acts xxiii. 6; xxiv. 21; [xxv. 20]; with addition of ἐπί 
and the gen. of the judge, before one, Actsxxv. 9. Where 
the context requires, used of a condemnatory judgment, 
i. q.to condemn: simply, Acts xiii. 27. β. of the judg- 
ment of God or of Jesus the Messiah, deciding between the | 
righteousness and the unrighteousness of men: absol., Jn. 
v. 30; viii. 50; δικαίως, 1 Pet. ii. 23; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, Rev. 
xix. 11; τινά, 1 Co. v. 13; pass. Jas. ii. 12; ζῶντας κι νεκρούς, 
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv.5; νεκρούς, pass., Rev. xi. 18 [ D. 
260 (224)]; τὴν οἰκουμένην, the inhabitants of the world, 
Acts xvii. 31 [ef. W. 389 (364)]; τὸν κόσμον, Ro. 111. 6 ; 
τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Ro. ii. 16 ; κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα twos | 
ἔκ τινος (see κρίμα, 2 sub fin.), Rev. xviii. 20, cf. vi. 10; 
κρίνειν κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον, 1 Pet. i. 17; robs νεκροὺς 
ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν, 
pass., Rev. xx. 12 sq.; with ace. of the substance of the | 
judgment, thou didst pronounce this judgment, ταῦτα 
ἔκρινας, Rey. xvi. 5; contextually, used specifically of 
the act of condemning and decreeing (or inflicting) pen- 
alty on one: τινά, Jn. ili. 18; v. 22; xii. 47 sq.; Acts 
vil. 7; Ro. i. 12: 1 0: ΣΙ 91. sq-; ΦΊΠΗ: ἨΞ 19... Efeb- 
x. 30; xiii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 6 [ef. W. 630 (585)]; Jas. v. 
9 (where Rec. κατακρ.) ; Rev. xviii. 8; xix. 2, (Sap. xii. 
10, 22); τὸν κόσμον, opp. to σώζειν, Jn. iii. 17; xii. 47; 
of the devil it is said 6 ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται, 
because the vietorious cause of Christ has rendered the 
supreme wickedness of Satan evident to all, and put 
an end to his power to dominate and destroy, Jn. xvi. 
11. y. of Christians as hereafter to sit with Christ 
at the judgment: τὸν κόσμον, 1 Co. vi. 2; ἀγγέλους, ib. 
3 [ef. ἄγγελος, 2 sub fin.; yet see Meyer ed. Heinrici ad 
ll. cc.]. b. to pronounce judgment ; to subject to cen- 
sure; of those who act the part of judges or arbiters in 
the matters of common life, or pass judgment on the 
deeds and words of others: univ. and without case, Jn. 
Vili. 16, 26; κατά rt, Jn. viii. 15; κατ᾽ ὄψιν, Jn. vii. 24; 
ἐν κρίματί τινι κρίνειν, Mt. vii. 2; τινά, pass. [with nom. 





361 


κρίσις 


of pers.], Rom. iii. 7; ἐκ τοῦ στόματός σου κρινῶ σε, out 
of thine own mouth (i. 6. from what thou hast just said) 
will I take the judgment that must be passed on thee, 
Lk. xix. 22; τί, 1 Co. x. 15; pass. ib. 29; τὸ δίκαιον, Lk. 
xii. 57; foll. by εἰ, whether, Acts iv. 19; with ace. of the 
substance of the judgment: τί i. e. κρίσιν τινά, 1 Co. iv. 
5; κρίσιν κρίνειν (Plat. rep. 2 p. 360 d.) δικαίαν [cf. B. 
§ 131, 5], Jn. vii. 24 (ἀληθινὴν x. δικαίαν, Tob. iii. 2; 
κρίσεις ἀδίκους, Sus. 53); of the disciplinary judgment 
to which Christians subject the conduct of their fellows, 
passing censure upon them as the facts require, 1 Co. v. 
12; of those who judge severely (unfairly), finding fault 
with this or that in others, Mt. vii. 1; Lk. vi. 37; Ro. 
ii. 1; τινά, Ro. ii. 1, 3; xiv. 3 sq. 10, 13; foll. by ἐν with 
dat. of the thing, Col. ii. 16; Ro. xiv. 22; hence i. q. to 
condemn: Ro. ii. 27; Jas. iv. 11 sq. 6. Hebraisti- 
cally i. q. to rule, govern; to preside over with the power of 
giving judicial decisions, because it was the prerogative 
of kings and rulers to pass judgment: Mt. xix. 28; Lk. 
xxii. 30, (τὸν λαόν, 2 K. xv. 5; 1 Mace. ix. 73; Joseph. 
antt. 5, 3,33; of κρίνοντες T. γῆν, Ps. ii. 10; Sap. i. 1; 
cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1463 sq.). 7. Pass. and 
mid. to contend together, of warriors and combatants 
(Hom., Diod., al.) ; to dispute (Hdt. 3, 120; Arstph. nub. 
66); in a forensic sense, to go to law, have a suit at law: 
with dat. of the pers. with whom [W. $ 31, 1 g.], Mt. v. 
40 (Job ix. 3; xiii. 19; Eur. Med. 609); foll. by pera 
with gen. of the pers. with whom one goes to law, and 
ἐπί with gen. of the judge, 1 Co. vi. (1), 6... [Comp.: 
dva-, àzo-, dvr-amo- (uat), δια-, €v-, ἐπι-, kara-, συν-, vmo- 
(μαι). συν- ὑπο-(-μαι). * 

κρίσις, -εως, 7, Sept. for P3, 2) (a suit), but chiefly 
for D2/2; in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down) ] 1. a separating, sundering, separation; a 
trial, contest. 2. selection. 8. judgment; i. e. 
opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. con- 
cerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a. 
univ.: Jn. viii. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see ἐπακολου- 
θέων: Jude 9; 2 Pet. ii. 11; κρίσιν κρίνειν (see κρίνω, ὃ b.), 
Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment 
of God or of Jesusthe Messiah: univ., Jas. ii. 13; 
9/Th2i. 5; Heb.x.27:9plur jj ον αν 7; xix EE 
the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; ἡ ἡμέρα κρίσεως [ Mt. x. 
15; xi. 22,24; xii. 36; Mk. vi.11 RLin br.; 2 Pet. i. 
9; iii. 7] or τῆς κρίσεως [1 Jn. iv. 17], the day appointed 
for the judgment, see ἡμέρα, 3; eis κρίσιν μεγάλης ἡμέρας, 
Jude 6; ἡ ὥρα τῆς κρίσεως αὐτοῦ, i. e. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xiv. 
7; ἐν τῇ κρίσει, at the time of the judgment, when the 
judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq.; Lk. x. 14; 
xi. 31 sq.; κρίσιν ποιεῖν κατὰ πάντων, to execute judgment 
against (i. e. to the destruction of) all, Jude 15. spec. 
sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem- 
nation and punishment: Heb. x. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 4; with 
gen. of the pers. condemned and punished, Rev. xviii. 
10; ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη, the punishment appointed him 
was taken away, i. e. was ended, Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. liii. 
8 Sept.; πίπτειν εἰς κρίσιν [R* eis ὑπόκρισιν]. to become 
liable to condemaation, Jas. v. 12; αἰώνιος κρίσις, eternal 


Κρίσπος 


damnation, Mk. iii. 29 [Rec.]; ἡ κρίσις τῆς γεέννης, the 
judgment condemning one to Gehenna, the penalty of 
Gehenna, i. e. to be suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 33. — In 
John's usage κρίσις denotes a. that judgment 
which Christ occasioned, in that wicked men rejected 
the salvation he offered, and so of their own accord 
brought upon themselves misery and punishment: αὕτη 
ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι etc. judgment takes place by the en- 
trance of the light into the world and the hatred which 
men have for this light, iii. 19; κρίσιν ποιεῖν, to execute 
judgment, v. 27; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς xp. to come into the state 
of one condemned, ib. 24; xp. τοῦ κόσμου τούτου, the 
condemnatory sentence passed upon this world, in that 
it is convicted of wickedness and its power broken, xii. 
31; περὶ κρίσεως, of judgment passed (see κρίνω, 5 a. B. 
fin.), xvi. 8, 11. B. the last judgment, the damna- 
tion of the wicked: ἀνάστασις κρίσεως, followed by con- 
demnation, v. 29 [cf. W. $30, 2 8.]. y. both the 
preceding notions are combined in v. 30; ἡ κρίσις πᾶσα, 
the whole business of judging [cf. W. 548 (510)], ib. 22. 
Cf. Groos, Der Begriff der κρίσις bei Johannes (in the 
Stud. u. Krit. for 1868, pp. 244-273). 4. Like the 
Chald. &y*3 (Dan. vii. 10, 26; ef. Germ. Gericht) i: q. 
the college of judges (a tribunal of seven men in the sev- 
eral cities of Palestine; as distinguished from the Sa n- 
hedrin, which had its seat at Jerusalem [ef. Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeiteesch. § 23, ii.; Zdersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, ii. 287]): Mt. v. 21 sq. (cf. Deut. xvi. 18; 2 Chr. 
xix. 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 14; b. j. 2, 20, 5). 5; 
Like the Hebr. vawn (cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1464” 
[also Sept. in Gen. xviii. 19, 25; Is. v. Ws 1 ἜΣ, 8) 
Jer. xvii. 11; 1 Mace. vii. 18; and other pass. referred 
to in Gesenius l. c.]), right, justice: Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 
42; what shall have the force of right, ἀπαγγέλλειν τινί, 
Mt. xii. 18; ἃ just cause, Mt. xii. 20 (on which see éx- 
βάλλω, 1 g.).* 

Kpíc'ros, -ov, 6, Crispus, the ruler of a synagogue at 
Corinth, Acts xviii. 8; baptized by Paul, 1 Co. i. 14.* 

κριτήριον, -ov, τό, (fr. κριτήρ, i. q. κριτής); ab 
prop. the instrument or means of trying or judging 
anything; the rule by which one judges, (Plat., Plut., 
al.). 2. the place where judgment is given; the tri- 
bunal of a judge; a bench of judges: plur., 1 Co. vi. 2; 
Jas. ii. 6, (Sept.; Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.). 3. in 
an exceptional usage, the matter judged, thing to be de- 
cided, suit, case: plur. 1 Co. vi. 4 [this sense is denied by 
many; cf. e. g. Meyer on vs. 2].* 

κριτής. -ov, ὁ, (κρίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], 
Sept. chiefly for b3U ; a judge; 1. univ. one who 
passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything: 
w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11; w. gen. of quality (see 
διαλογισμός, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensie sense, of the one 
who tries and decides a case [ef. δικαστής, fin.]: Mt. v. 
25; Lk. xii. 14 L T Tr WH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of 
quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. § 34, 3 b.], τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. 
xviii. 6; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter, Acts 
xviii. 15; of a Roman procurator administering justice, 
Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the charac- 


362 





κρύπτω 


ter and deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb. 
xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; also of Christ returning to sit in judg- 
ment, Acts x. 42; 2 Tim. iv. 8; Jas. v. 9; in a peculiar 
sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard 
for judging another and convicting him of wrong: w. 
gen. of the object (a pers.), Mt. xii, 27; Lk. xi. 19. 2. 
like the Hebr. wd’, of the leaders or rulers of the Israel- 
ites: Acts xiii. 20 (Judg. ii. 16,18 sq.; Ruth i. 1; Sir. 
X. 1 Βα. 24; etc.).* 

κριτικός, -7, -óv, (κρίνω), relating to judging, fit for judg- 
ing, skilled in judging, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.): with 
gen. of the obj., ἐνθυμήσεων x. ἐννοιῶν καρδίας, tracing 
out and passing judgment on the thoughts of the mind, 
Heb. iv. 12.* 

κρούω; 1 aor. ptep. κρούσας ; lo knock: τὴν θύραν, to 
knock at the door, Lk. xiii. 25; Acts xii. 13, (Arstph. 
eccles. 317, 990; Xen. symp. 1, 11; Plat. Prot. p. 310a.; 
314 d.; symp. 212¢.; but κόπτειν τὴν θύραν is better, 
aec. to Phryn. with whom Lobeck agrees, p. 177 [cf. 
Schmidt (ch. 113, 9), who makes κόπτειν to knock with 
a heavy blow, κρούειν to knock with the knuckles]) ; 
without τὴν θύραν [cf. W. 593 (552)], Mt. vii. 7 sq.; 
Lk. xi. 9, 10; xii. 36; Acts xii. 16; Rev. iii. 20 (on which 
see θύρα, c. e.).* 

κρυπτή [so R?*G L T Tr KC], (but some prefer to write 
it κρύπτη [so WH, Meyer, Bleek, etc., Chandler $ 183; cf. 
Tdf. on Lk. as below]), -ῆς, 7, a crypt, covered way, vault, 
cellar: eis κρυπτήν. Lk. xi. 33 (Athen. 5 (4), 205 a. equiv. 
to κρυπτὸς περίπατος p. 206; [ Joseph. b. 1. 5, 7, 4 fin. ; 
Strab. 17, 1, 37]; Sueton. Calig. 58; Juvenal 5, 106; 
Vitruv. 6, 8 (5); al). Cf. Meyeradl.c.; W. 238 (223).* 

κρυπτός, -7, -dv, (kpumrw), [fr. Hom. down], hidden, con- 
cealed, secret: Mt. x. 26; Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2 
[cf. W. 441 (410)]; ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος, the 
inner part of man, the soul, 1 Pet. iii. 4; neut., ἐν τῷ 
κρυπτῷ, in secret, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 Ree.; ἐν κρυπτῷ, pri- 
vately, in secret, Jn. vii. 4, 10; xviii. 20; 6 ἐν κρυπτῷ 
Ιουδαῖος, he who is a Jew inwardly, in soul and not in 
circumcision alone, Ro. ii. 29; τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους, 
[the hidden things of darkness i. 6.1 things covered by 
darkness, 1 Co. iv. 5; rà kp. τῶν avOp. the things which 
men conceal, Ro. ii. 16; τὰ xp. τῆς καρδίας, his secret 
thoughts, feelings, desires, 1 Co. xiv. 25; τὰ xp. τῆς 
αἰσχύνης (see αἰσχύνη. 1), 2 Co. iv. 2; eis κρυπτόν into 
a secret place, Lk. xi. 33 in some edd. of Rec., but see 
κρυπτή." 

κρύπτω: 1 aor. ἔκρυψα ; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. κέκρυπται, 
ptep. κεκρυμμένος : 2 aor. ἐκρύβην (so also in Sept., for the 
earlier ἐκρύφην, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 377; Fritzsche 
on Mt. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [ef. καλύπτω ; fr. Hom. 
down]; Sept. for w'3ryj, "mon, j2*, |20, 3712, 7); 
to hide, conceal; a. prop.: ri, Mt. xiii. 44 and LT Tr 
WHI in xxv. 18; pass. Heb. xi. 23; Rev. ii. 17; κρυβῆναι 
i. 4. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v. 14; 1 Tim. v. 25; 
ἐκρύβη (quietly withdrew [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]) «. ἐξῆλθεν, 
i. e. departed secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; 
κρύπτω τι ἐν with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 25; pass. xiii. 
44; κεκρ. ἐν τῷ θεῷ, is kept laid up with God in heaven, 


«ρυσταλλίζω 3 


Col. iii. 3; τὶ εἴς τε, Lk. xiii. 21 [R G L évékpvyrev]: ἑαυτὸν 
eis with ace. of place, Rev. vi. 15; τινὰ ἀπὸ προσώπου 
τινός to cover (and remove [cf. W. $ 30, 6 b.; 66, 2 d.]) 
from the view of any one, i. e. to take away, rescue, from 
the sight, Rev. vi. 16; ἐκρύβη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, withdrew from 
them, Jn. xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally «p. τινά τι; cf. 
dnokpvmro, b.). b. metaph. to conceal (that it may 
not become known): κεκρυμμένος, clandestine, Jn. xix. 
38; τὶ ἀπό twos (gen. of pers.), Mt. xi. 25 L T Tr WH; 
(Lk. xviii. 34]; κεκρυμμένα things hidden i. e. unknown, 
used of God's saving counsels, Mt. xiii. 35; dz ὀφθαλμῶν 
τινος, Lk. xix. 42 (cf. B. $ 146, 1 fin. Comp.: ἀπο-, ἐν-, 
περι-κρύπτω. * 

κρυσταλλίζω ; (κρύσταλλος, 4. v.); to be of crystalline 
brightness and transparency; to shine like crystal: Rev. 
xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.) * 

κρύσταλλος, -ov, 6, (fr. κρύος ice; hence prop. anything 
congealed (cf. Lat. crusta) and transparent), [fr. Hom. 
down], erystal: a kind of precious stone, Rev. iv. 6 ; xxii. 1; 
[cf. B. D. s. v. Crystal. On its gend. cf. L. and S. s. v. IT.]* 

kpvóatos, -aía, -atov, (κρύφα), hidden, secret: twice in 
Mt.vi.18 LTTr WH. (Jer. xxiii. 24; Sap. xvii. 3; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) * 

κρυφῆ [L WH -φῇ; cf. εἰκῆ, init. ], adv., (kpumra), secret- 
ly, in secret: Eph. v.12. (Pind., Soph., Xen.; Sept.) * 

κτάομαι, -ὥμαι ; fut. κτήσομαι (Lk. xxi. 19 L Tr WH) ; 
1 aor. éxtnoauny; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for np; to 
acquire, get or procure a thing for one's self [cf. W. 260 
(244)]; (pf. κέκτημαι, to possess [cf. W. 274 (257) note]; 
not found in the N. T.): τί, Mt.x. 9; Acts viii. 20; ὅσα 
xr@pat, all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price 
added [W. 206 (194)], πολλοῦ, Acts xxii. 28; with ἐκ 
and gen. of price (see ἐκ, II. 4), Acts i. 18; τὸ ἑαυτοῦ 
σκεῦος ἐν ἁγιασμῷ x. τιμῇ; to procure for himself his owr 
vessel (i. e. for the satisfaction of the sexual passion; 
see σκεῦος, 1) in sanctification and honor, i. e. to marry a 
wife (opp. to the use of a harlot; the words ἐν dy. x. τιμῇ 
are added to express completely the idea of marrying 
in contrast with the baseness of procuring a harlot as 
his ‘vessel’; cf. κτᾶσθαι γυναῖκα, of marrying a wife, 
Ruth iv. 10; Sir. xxxvi. 29 (xxxiii. 26); Xen. symp. 2, 
10),1 Th.iv.4; ras ψυχὰς ὑμῶν, the true life of your souls, 
your true lives, i. e. eternal life (cf. the opp. ζημιοῦσθαι 
τὴν Y. αὐτοῦ under ζημιόω), Lk. xxi. 19; cf. Meyer ad 
loc. and W. p. 274 (257).* 

κτῆμα, -ros, τό, (fr. κτάομαι, as χρῆμα fr. χράομαι), a 
possession : as in Grk™writers, of property, lands, estates, 
ete.. Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; Acts ii. 45; v. 1.* 

κτῆνος, -ovs, τύ, (fr. «ráoua.; hence prop. a possession, 
property, esp. in cattle); «a beast, esp. a beast of burden: 
Lk. x. 34; plur., Acts xxiii. 24; Rev. xviii. 13; it seems 
to be used for quadrupeds as opp. to fishes and birds in 
1 Co. xv. 39; so for nona, Gen. i. 25 sq.; ii. 20. [Cf£. 
Hom. hymn. 30, 10; of swine in Polyb. 12, 4, 14.]* 

κτήτωρ, -opos, 6, (krdogat), a possessor: Acts iv. 34. 
(Diod. exept. p. 599, 17; Clem. Alex.; Byzant. writ.) * 

κτίζω: 1 aor. ἔκτισα; pf. pass. ἔκτισμαι: 1 aor. pass. 
é€xriaOnv; Sept. chiefly for 813 ; prop. to make habitable, 


3 κτίσμα 


to people, a place, region, island, (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., 
Diod., al.); hence to found, a city, colony, state, ete. 
(Pind. et sqq.; 1 Esdr. iv. 53). In the Bible, to create: 
of God creating the world, man, etc., Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co. 
xi. 9; Col. i. 16 [cf. W. 272 (255)]; iii. 10; Eph. iii. 9; 
1 Tim. iv. 3; Rev. iv. 11; x. 6, (Deut. iv. 32; Eccl. xii. 
1; often in O. T. Apoer., as Judith xiii. 18; Sap. ii. 23; 
xi. 18 (17); 3 Macc. ii. 9; [Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 1; Philo 
de decal. $ 20]); absol. à κτίσας, the creator, Ro. i. 25; 
[Mt. xix. 4 Tr WH]; i. q. to form, shape, i. e. (for sub- 
stance) completely to change, to transform (of the moral 
or new creation of the soul, as it is called), κτισθέντες 
ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπὶ ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς, in intimate fellow- 
ship with Christ constituted to do good works [see ἐπί, 
B. 2 a. (.], Eph. ii. 10; τοὺς δύο εἰς ἕνα καινὸν ἄνθρωπον, 
ibid. 15; τὸν κτισθέντα κατὰ θεόν, formed after God's like- 
ness [see κατά, II. 3 e. 6.], Eph. iv. 24, (καρδίαν καθαρὰν 
κτίσον ev ἐμοί, Ps. 1. (li.) 12).* 

κτίσις, -ews, 7, (kri(o), in Grk. writ. the act of founding, 
establishing, building, etc.; in the N. T. (Vulg. everywhere 
creatura [yet Heb. ix. 11 ereatio]) 1. the act of cre- 
ating, creation: τοῦ κόσμου, Ro. i. 20. 2. i.q. κτίσμα, 
creation i. e. thing created, [ οἵ. W. 32]; used a. of in- 
dividual things and beings, a creature, a creation: Ro. i. 
25; Heb. iv. 13; any created thing, Ro. viii. 39; after a 
rabbin. usage (by which a man converted from idolatry 
to Judaism was called WIN 7193 [cf. Schéttgen, Horae 
Hebr.i. 328, 704 sq.]), καινὴ κτίσις is used of a man regen- 
erated through Christ, Gal. vi. 15; 2 Co. v. 17. b. col- 
lectively, the sum or aggregate of created things: Rev. iii. 
14 (on which see ἀρχή; 3; [ἡ κτίσις τ. ἀνθρώπων, Teach- 
ing of the Twelve ete. c. 16]) ; ὅλη 7 κτίσις, Sap. xix. 6; 
cn ἡ κτίσις, Judith xvi. 14; and without the art. (cf. 
Grimm on 3 Mace. [ii. 2] p. 235; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as 
below]), πᾶσα κτίσις, Col. i. 15; 3 Mace. ii. 2; Judith ix. 
12; σωτὴρ πάσης κτίσεως, Acta "Thomae p. 19 ed. Thilo 
[8 10 p. 198 ed. Tdf. ], (see πᾶς, 1. 1 ¢.); ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, 
Mk. x. 6; xiii. 19; 2 Pet. iii. 4; οὐ ταύτης τῆς κτίσεως, not 
of this order of created things, Heb. ix. 11; acc. to the 
demands of the context, of some particular kind or class 
of created things or beings: thus of the human race, πάσῃ 
τῇ kr. Mk. xvi. 15; ἐν πάσῃ (Rec. adds τῇ) κτίσει τῇ ὑπὸ 
τὸν ovp. among men of every race, Col. i. 23; the aggre- 
gate of irrational creatures, both animate and inanimate, 
(what we eall nature), Ro. viii. 19-21 (Sap. v. 17 (18) ; 
xvi. 24) ; πᾶσα ἡ xr. ibid. 22; where cf. Reiche, Philippi, 
Meyer, Rückert, al, [Arnold in Bapt. Quart. for Apr. 
1867, pp- 143-153]. 3. an institution, ordinance: 
1 Pet. ii. 13; cf. Huther ad loc. [(Pind., al.)]* 

κτίσμα. -ros, τό, (κτίζων ; thing founded; created thing; 
(Vulg. creatura) [A. V. creature]: 1 Tim. iv. 4; Rev. 
v.13; viii. 9, (Sap. ix. 2; xiii. 5); contextually and met- 
aph. kr. θεοῦ, transformed by divine power to a moral 
newness of soul, spoken of true Christians as created 
anew by regeneration [al. take it here unrestrictedly], 
Jas. i. 18 (see ἀπαρχή: metaph. a.; also κτίζω sub fin., 
κτίσις. 2 a.) : τὰ ἐν ἀρχῇ κτίσματα θεοῦ, of the Israelites, 
Sir. xxxvi. 20 (15). [(Strab., Dion. H.)]* 


κτίστης 


κτίστης (on the accent cf. W. $ 6, 1h. [ef. 94 (89); esp. 
Chandler $8 35, 36 ]), -ov, 6, (κτίζω), a founder; a creator 
[Aristot., Plut., al.]: of God, 1 Pet. iv. 19 [cf. W. 122 
(116)]; (Judith ix. 12; Sir. xxiv. 8; 2 Macc. i. 24, etc.).* 

κυβεία [-βία T WH; see I, c], -as, 7. (fr. κυβεύω, and this 
fr. κύβος a cube, a die), dice-playing ( Xen., Plat., Aristot., 
21.) ; trop. 7 «. τῶν avOp. the deception [ A. V. sleight] of 
men, Eph. iv. 14, because dice-players sometimes cheated 
and defrauded their fellow-players.* 

κυβέρνησις. -ews, ἡ, (κυβερνάω [Lat. gubernare, to gov- 
ern]), a governing, government: 1 Co. xii. 28 [al. would 
take it tropically here, and render it wise counsels (R. 
V. mrg.); so Hesych.: κυβερνήσεις - mpovonrixat ἐπιστῆ- 
μαι καὶ φρονήσεις ; cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. in Sept. s. v., 
and to the reff. below add Prov. xi. 14; Job xxxvii. 12 
Symm.]; (Prov. i. 5; xxiv. 6; Pind.. Plat., Plut., al.).* 

κυβερνήτης, -ov, 6, (κυβερνάω [*to steer’; see the pre- 
ceding word]); fr. Hom. down; steersman, helmsman, 
sailing-master ; [A. V. master, ship-master]: Acts xxvii. 
11; Rev. xviii. 17. (Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27 sq.) * 

κυκλεύω: 1 aor. ékóxAevga; fo go round (Strabo and 
other later writ.); to encircle, encompass, surround : τὴν 
παρεμβολήν, Rev. xx. 9 (where R ἃ Tr ἐκύκλωσαν); [τινά, 
Jn. x. 24 Trmrg. WH mrg.; (see WH. App. p. 171)].* 

κυκλόθεν. (κύκλος [sce kóxAo]), adv. round about, from 
all sides, all round: Kev. iv. 8; κυκλ. τινός, Rev. iv. 3 sq., 
and Rec. in v. 11. (Lys. p. 110, 40 [olea saer. 28]; 
Qu. Smyrn. 5, 16; Nonn. Dion. 36, 325; Sept. often for 
£355, 23D 23D, and simply 320; many exx. fr. the 
Apoer. are given in Wak/, Clavis Apocryphorum etc. 
Sav.) 

κυκλόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐκύκλωσα ; Pass., pres. ptep. κυκλού- 
μενος: 1 aor. ptep. κυκλωθείς ; (κύκλος); Sept. chiefly 
for 33D; 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur., 
Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass: of 
persons standing round, τινά. Jn. x. 24 ['Tr mrz. WH mre. 
ἐκύκλευσαν (q.v.)]; Acts xiv. 20; of besiegers (often so 
in prof. auth. and in Sept.), Lk. xxi. 20; Heb. xi. 30, 
and RG Trin Rev. xx. 9. [Comp.: περι-κυκλόω.] * 

κύκλῳ (dat. of the subst. κύκλος, a ring, circle [cf. Eng. 
cycle]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. times without number 
for $30, also for 292 and DID 22D; inacirele, around, 


round about, on all sides : Mk. iii. 34; vi. 6; οἱ kixA@aypol, | 


the eireumjacent country [see ἀγρός, c.], Mk. vi. 36 [here 
WIL (rejected) mrg. gives ἔγγιστα]; Lk. ix. 12; ἀπὸ 
Ἵερουσ. kai κύκλῳ, and in the region around, Ro. xv. 19; 
τινός, around anything (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 5; Polyb. 4, 21, 
9, al.; Gen. xxxv. 5; Ex. vii. 24, etc.) : Rev. iv. 6; v. 
11 [here R κυκλόθεν] ; vii. 11.* 

κύλισμα, -ros, τό. (κυλίω. q. v.). thing rolled: with 
epexeget. gen. βορβόρου, rolled (wallowed) mud or mire, 
2 Pet. ii. 22 [R GL Tr mrg.]. The great majority take 
the word to mean ‘wallowing-place’, as if it were the 
same as κυλίστρα, (Vulg. in volutabro luti). But just as 
τὸ ἐξέραμα signifies the vomit, thing vomited, and not the 
place of vomiting; so τὸ κύλισμα denotes nothing else 
than the thing rolled or wallowed. But see [the foll. 
word, and] βόρβορος." 


904 








Κυρήνη 


κυλισμός, -οὔ, ὁ, i. 4. κύλισις, a. rolling, wallowing, (Hip- 
piatr. p. 204, 4; [ef. Prov. ii. 18 Theod.]): εἰς κυλισμ. 
βορβόρου, to a rolling of itself in mud, [to wallowing in 
the mire), 2 Pet. ii. 22 T Tr txt. WH. See the preceding 
word.* 

κυλίω : (for κυλίνδω more com. in earlier writ.), to roll ; 
Pass. impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐκυλίετο ; to be rolled, to wallow: 
Mk. ix. 20. ([Aristot. h. a. 5, 19, 18, ete.; Dion. Hal. ; 
Sept.]; Polyb. 26, 10, 16; Ael. n. a. 7, 33; Epict. diss. 
4, 11, 29.) [Cowr.: dva- ázo-, rpockvAto. ]* 

κυλλός, -7, -óv. [akin to κύκλος, kvAto, Lat. circus, cur- 
vus, ete. ; Curtius $ 81]; 1. crooked; of the mem- 
bers of the body (Hippoer., Arstph. av. 1379): as dis- 
tinguished fr. χωλός, it seems to be injured or disabled 
in the hands [but doubted by many], Mt. xv. 30, 31 
[but here Tr mrg. br. κυλ. and WH read it in mrg. 
only]. 2. maimed, mutilated, (ots, Hippocr. p. 805 
[iii. p. 186 ed. Kühn]): Mt. xviii. 8; Mk. ix. 43.* 

κῦμα, -ros, τό, [ fr. kvéo to swell; Curtius § 79; fr. Hom. 
down], a wave [cf. Eng. swell], esp. of the sea or of a lake: 
Mt. viii. 24; xiv. 24; Mk. iv. 37; Acts xxvii. 41 [RG 
"Trtxt.br.]; κύματα ἄγρια, prop., Sap. xiv. 1; with θαλάσ- 
ons added, of impulsive and restless men, tossed to and 
fro by their raging passions, Jude 13. [Svw. cf. chvdav. |* 

κύμβαλον. -ου. τό, (fr. κύμβος. 6, a hollow [cf. eup, cupola, 
ete.; Vanicek p. 1047), a cymbal, i. e. a hollow basin of 
brass, producing (when two are struck together) a musi- 
cal sound [see B. D. s. v. Cymbal; Stainer, Music of the 
Bible, ch. ix.]: 1 Co. xiii. 1. (1 Chr. xiii. 8; xv. 16,19, 
28; Ps.cl 5. Pind., Xen., Diod., Joseph., al.) * 

κύμινον, -ov, τό, cumin (or cummin), Germ. Kiimmel, 
(for 152, Is. xxviii. 25, 27): Mt. xxiii. 23. (Theophr., 
Diosc. Plut, al) [ Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 443.]* 

κυνάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κύων, i. q. κυνίδιον, which 
Phryn. prefers; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; cf. γυναικά- 
piov), a. little dog: Mt. xv. 26 sq. ; Mk. vii. 27sq. (Xen., 
Plat., Theophr., Plut., al.) * - 

Kumpvos, -ov, 0, a Cyprian or Cypriote, i.e. a native or 
an inhabitant of Cyprus: Acts iv. 36; xi. 20; xxi. 16, 
(2 Mace. iv. 29). [(Hdt., al.)]* 

Κύπρος. -ov, 7, Cyprus, a very fertile and delightful 
island of the Mediterranean, lying between Cilicia and 
Syria: Acts xi 19; xiii 4; xv. 39; xxi. 3; xxvii. 4, 
(1 Mace. xy. 23; 2 Mace. x. 18). [BB.DD.s.v.; Lewin, 
St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]* 

κύπτω: 1 aor. ptep. κύψας; (fr. κύβη the head [cf. 
Vaniéek p. 164; esp. Curtius, index s. v.]); fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. chiefly for TIP; to bow the head, bend for- 
ward, stoop down: Mk. i. 7; with κάτω added (Arstph. 
vesp. 279), Jn. viii. 6, 8. [Comp.: dva, mapa-, ovy- 
κύπτω.} * 

Κυρηναῖος, -ov, 6, (Κυρήνη; q. v.), @ Cyrenwan [A.V. 
(R. V. Acts vi. 9) Cyrenian], a native of Cyrene: Mt. 
xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts vi. 95 xi. 20; 
xiii. 1. [(Hdt., al.)]* 

Κυρήνη, -ns, 7, Cyrene, a large and very flourishing city 
of Libya Cyrenaica or Pentapolitana, about 11 Roman 
miles from the sea. Among its inhabitants were great 


Κυρήνιος 


numbers of Jews, whom Ptolemy I. had brought thither, 
and invested with the rights of citizens: Acts ii. 10. 
[BB. DD. s. v.]* 

υρήνιος (Lchm. Kupivos [-peivos Tr mrg. WH mrg. 
(see εἰ; c) ]), -ov, 6, Quirin[-i-]us (in full, Publius Sulpicius 
Quirinus [correctly Quirinius ; see Woolsey in Bib. Sacr. 
for 1878, pp. 499-513]), a Roman consul A. v. c. 742; 
afterwards (not before the year 759) governor of Syria 
(where perhaps he may previously have been in com- 
mand, 751—752). While filling that office after Arche- 
laus had been banished and Judza had been reduced to 
a province of Syria, he made the enrolment mentioned 
in Acts v. 37 (cf. Joseph. antt. 18, 1,1). Therefore Luke 
in his Gospel ii. 2 has made a mistake [yet see added 
reff. below] in defining the time of this enrolment. For 
in the last years of Herod the Great, not Quirinius but 
Sentius Saturninus was governor of Syria. His suc- 
cessor, A. U. C. 750, was Quintilius Varus; and Quiri- 
nius (who died in the year 774) sueceeded Varus. Cf. 
Win. RW B. s. vv. Quirinius and Schatzung; Strauss, 
Die Halben τι. die Ganzen (Berl. 1865) p. 70 sqq. ; Hil- 
genfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. "Theologie for 1865, 
p- 480 sqq.; Keim i. 399 sq. [ Eng. trans. ii. 115]; Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgeschichte, p. 161 sq.; Weizsücker in Schen- 
kel v. p. 23 sqq.; [ Keil, Com. üb. Mark. u. Luk. p. 213 
sqq.; McClellan, New Testament etc., i. p. 392 sqq.; and 
Woolsey in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Cyrenius, and at length 
in Bib. Saer. for Apr. 1870, p. 291 sqq. ].* 

Kvpía, -as, 7, Cyria, a Christian woman to whom the 
second Ep. of John is addressed: 2 Jn. 1,5, [(GL T KC 
(and WH mrg. in vs. 1)]. This prop. name is not un- 
common in other writers also; cf. Lücke, Comm. üb. die 
Brr. des Joh. 3d ed. p. 444. [But R Tr al. κυρία. rezard- 
ing the word as an appellative, lady; (ai γυναῖκες εὐθὺς 
ἀπὸ τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα ἐτῶν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνδρῶν κυρίαι καλοῦν- 
rat, Epictet. enchir. 40). Cf. Westcott on 2 Jn. τι. 5.7 

κυριακός, -7, -όν, a bibl. and eccles. word [cf. W. § 34, 
3 and Soph. Lex. s. v. ], of or belonging to the Lord; abs 
i.q. the gen. of the author rod κυρίου, thus κυριακὸν δεῖπνον, 
the supper instituted by the Lord, 1 Co. xi. 20; λόγια 
κυριακά, the Lord’s sayings, Papias ap. Eus. ἢ. e. 3, 39, 
ile 2. relating to the Lord, ἡ κυριακὴ ἡμέρα, the day 
devoted to the Lord, sacred to the memory of Christ's 
resurrection, Rev. i. 10 [ef. * κυριακὴ kuptov', Teaching 
14, 1 (where see Harnack) ; cf. B. D. s. v. Lord's Day; 
Bp. Lghift. Ign. ad Magn. p. 129; Müller on Barn. ep. 15, 
9]: γραφαὶ κυρ. the writings concerning the Lord, i.e. 
the Gospels, Clem. Alex. al. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]* 

κυριεύω ; fut. κυριεύσω; 1 aor. subjune. 3 pers. sing. 
κυριεύσῃ ; (κύριος): to be lord of, to rule over, have do- 
minion over: with gen. of the obj. [cf. B. 169 (147)], Lk. 
xxii.25; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. i. 24; absol oí κυριεύοντες, 
supreme rulers, kings, 1 Tim. vi. 15; of things and forces 
i. q. to exercise influence upon, to have power over: with 
gen. of the obj., ὁ θάνατος, Ro. vi. 9; ἡ ἁμαρτία, 14; ὁ νόμος. 
Ro. vii. 1. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb., sqq.; Sept. for 5v» 
[ete.]. [Comp.: κατα-κυριεύω. * E 

κύριος, -ov, 6, (prop. an adj. κύριος, -a, -ov, also of two 


365 





κύριος 


term.; prop. i. q. ὁ ἔχων κῦρος, having power or author- 
ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing be- 
longs, about which he has the power of deciding; master, 
lord; used a. univ. of the possessor and disposer of 
a thing, the owner, (Sept. for aW, 5y3): with gen. of 
the thing, as rod ἀμπελῶνος, Mt. xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii. 
9; Lk. xx. 15; rod θερισμοῦ, Mt.ix.38; Lk. x. 2; τῆς 
οἰκίας, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Jude. xix. 12); τοῦ πώλου, 
Lk. xix. 33; rod σαββάτου, possessed of the power to 
determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releas- 
ing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8; 
Mk. ii. 28; Lk. vi. 5. with gen. of a pers., one who has 
control of the person, the master [A. V. lord]; in the 
household: δούλου, παιδίσκης, οἰκονόμου, Mt. x. 24; Lk. 
xii. 46 sq.; xiv. 21; xvi. 3,5; Acts xvi. 16, 19, ete.; ab- 
sol, opp. to of δοῦλοι, Eph. vi. 5,9; Col. iv. 1, ete.; in 
the state, the sovereign, prince, chief: the Roman em- 
peror [(on this use of κύριος see at length Woolsey in 
Bib. Saer. for July 1861, pp. 595-608)], Acts xxv. 26; 
once angels are called κύριοι. as those to whom, in the 
administration of the universe, departments are in- 
trusted by God (see ἄγγελος, 2): 1 Co. viii. 5. b. 
κύριος is a title of honor, expressive of respect and rev- 
erence, with which servants salute their master, Mt. xiii. 
27; xxv.20, 22; Lk.xiii.8; xiv. 22, etc.; the disciples 
salute Jesus their teacher and master, Mt. viii. 25; xvi. 
22; Lk. ix. 543x175 405 x1: 15: xx11 55,98; ἘΠῚ ΣΙ 19; 
xiii. 6, 9, 13; xxi. 15-17, 20 sq., etc., cf. xx. 13; Lk. xxiv. 
34; his followers salute Jesus as the Messiah, whose 
authority they acknowledge (by its repetition showing 
their earnestness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a. ]), κύριε, κύριε, Mt. vii. 
21; and RG in Lk. xiii. 25; employed, too, by a son in 
addressing his father, Mt. xxi. 30; by citizens towards 
magistrates, Mt. xxvii. 63; by any one who wishes to 
honor a man of distinction, Mt. viii. 2, 6,8; xv. 27; Mk. 
vii. 28; Lk. v. 12; xiii. 25; Jn.iv.11, 15, 19; v. 7; xii. 
21; xx.15; Acts ix.5; Xyli305; xxi: c. this 
title is given a. to Gop, the ruler of the universe 
(so the Sept. for °358, now, OTN, nj and m; [the 
term κύριος is used of the gods from Pind. and Soph. 
down, but “the address κύριε, used in prayer to God, 
though freq. in Epiet. does not occur (so far as I am 
aware) in any heathen writing before the apostolic 
times; sometimes we find κύριε ὁ θεός, and once (2, 7, 12) 
he writes κύριε ἐλέησον" (Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 314 
note ?) ]), — both with the art., 6 κύριος : Mt. i. 22 [RG]; 
γ. 38; Mk.v.19; Lk.i. 6,9, 28,46; Actsvii.33; viii. 
24; xi. 21; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18, [but see ἔλεος, 3]; Heb. viii. 
2; Jas.iv.15; v.15; Jude5[RG], ete.; and without 
the art. (ef. W. 124 (118); B. 88 (77) sq.): Mt. xxi. 9; 
xxvii. 10; Mk. xiii. 20; Lk. i. 17, 38, 58, 66; ii. 9, 23, 26, 
39; Acts vii. 49; Heb. vii. 21; xii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 25; 2 Pet. 
ii. 9; Jude [5 T Tr txt. WH txt.], 9; κύριος tod οὐρανοῦ 
x. τῆς γῆς, Mt.xi.25; Lk.x.21; Acts xvii. 24; κύριος 
τῶν kvpievovrov, 1 Tim. vi. 15; κύριος ὁ θεός. see θεός, 3 
p. 288* [and below]; κύριος 6 θεὸς ὁ παντοκράτωρ, Rev. 
iv. 8; κύριος σαβαώθ, Ro. ix. 29; ἄγγελος and ὁ ἄγγελος 
κυρίου, Mt. i. 20; ii.13,19; xxviii 2; Lk.i.11; ii.9; 


κύριος 


Acts v. 195. viii. 26; xii. 7; πνεῦμα κυρίου, Lk. iv. 18; 
Acts viii. 39; with prepositions: ὑπὸ (R G add the art.) 
κυρίου, Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; παρὰ κυρίου, Mt. xxi. 42 and 
Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 23 ; mapa κυρίῳ, 2 Pet. 
iii. 8. B. to the Mxssran; and that aa. to 
the Messiah regarded univ.: Lk. i. 43; ii. 11; Mt. xxi. 
3; xxii. 45; Mk. xi. 8; xii. 36; Lk. xix. 34; xx. 44. — pg. 
to Jesus as the Messiah, since by his death he aequired 
a special ownership in mankind, and after his resurrec- 
tion was exalted to a partnership in the divine adminis- 
tration (this force of the word when applied to Jesus 
appears esp. in Acts x. 36; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. vii. 22; viii. 
6; Phil. ii. 9-11): Eph. iv. 5; with the art. 6 κύρ., Mk. 
xvi. 19 sq.; Actsix. 1; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. iv. 5; vi. 13 sq.; 
Vii. 10, 12, 34 sq.; ix. 5,14; x.22; xi. 26; [xvi. 22 GL 
T Tr WH); Phil. iv. 5; [2 Tim. iv. 22 TTrWH]; Heb. 
ii. 3 (cf. 7 sqq.); Jas. v. 7, ete. after his resurrection 
Jesus is addressed by the title ὁ κύριός pou καὶ ὁ θεός μου, 
Jn. xx. 28. ἀπὸ τοῦ κυρ.» 1 Co. xi. 23; 2 Co. v. 6; πρὸς 
τὸν k. 2 Co. v. 8; ὁ κύριος "Ingots, Acts i. 21; iv. 33; xvi. 
81: xx. 85; 1 Co. xi. 29. [xvi- 28 T Tr Ὑ ΕΙΣ 50:1: 
14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.]; Rev. xxii. 20; ὁ κύρ. “Ine. 
Χριστός. 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 22 RGL]; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) 
[WH br. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 22 [RG], ete.; ὁ 
κύριος ἡμῶν, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 14; 2 Pet. 
11.15; Rev. xi. 15, ete.; with Ἰησοῦς added, [L T Tr 
WH in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13]; Heb. xiii. 20; Rev. xxii. 21 
[LT Tr (yet without 74.)]; so with Χριστός, Ro. xvi. 18 
[GL T Tr WH); and Ἰησοῦς Χριστός, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. 
155 (136)]; iii. 11 [R G], 13 [Rec.]; v. 23; 2 Th. ii. 1, 
14, 16; iii. 6 [(ἡμῶν)}; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 3; Gal. vi. 18 
[WH br. ἡμῶν]; Eph.i.3; vi 24; Ro. xvi. 24 [RG]; 
1 Tim. vi. 3,14; Philem. 25[T WH om. ἡμῶν] ; Phil. iv. 
23 [GL T Tr WH om. ny. ], εἴς. ; Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 6 κύριος 
ἡμῶν, Ro.i.4; and Xp. Ἴησ. 6 kup. (ἡμῶν. Col. ii. 6; Eph. 
iii. 11; 1 Tim.i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; ὁ κύρ. καὶ ὁ σωτήρ, 2 Pet. 
iii. 2 [ef. B. 155 (136)]; with Ἰησοῦς Χριστός added, 2 Pet. 
iii. 18; without the art., simply κύριος : 1 Co. vii. 22, 25; 
x.21; xvi. 105 9/Co.11.17; x1.1; 2 Tim 1024s) Jas. v. 
11; 2 Pet. iii. 10; κύριος κυρίων i. e. Supreme Lord (cf. W. 
§ 36, 2; [B. $ 123, 12]) : Rev. xix. 16 (cf. in a. above; 
of God, Deut. x. 17); with prepositions: ἀπὸ κυρίου, Col. 
iii. 24; κατὰ κύριον, 2 Co. xi. 17; πρὸς κύριον, 2 Co. iii. 16 ; 
σὺν κυρ. 1 Th. iv. 17; ὑπὸ κυρ. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase 
ἐν κυρίῳ. freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found 
only in Rev. xiv. 13, see ἐν, I. 6 b. p. 211". The appel- 
lation 6 κύριος, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke 
and John even into historie narrative, where the words 
and works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related : 
Lk. vii. 13; x.1; xi.39; xii.42; xiii. 15; xvii. 5 sq.; 
xxii. 31 [R GL Trbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here T Tr mrg. Ἰη- 
cous]; vi 23; xi.2. There is nothing strange in the 
appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences 
after his resurrection: Lk. xxiv. 31; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20, 
DU 55 κυσὶν “5 ΠΩΣ ἃ. There are some who hold that 
Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro. 
iv. 8; ix. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16; iii. 20; x. 26; 
2 Co. vi. 17 sq.; x. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title κύριος 


366 








κωλύω. 


everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit 
instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co. 
vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Th. iv. 6; 2 Th. iii. 16 (6 κύριος: 
τῆς εἰρήνης, cf. ὁ θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης, 1 Th. v. 23; but most 
of the blessings of Christianity are derived alike from 
God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words 
ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ κύριος ἔδωκεν, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God 
as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac- 
count of the words κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν 
μοι ἴῃ vs. 10. On the other hand, κρινόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρ. 
in 1 Co. xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of 
Christ, on account of x. 22, ef. 21. Cf. Gabler, Klei- 
nere theol. Schriften, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq.; Winer, De sensu 
vocum κύριος et ὁ κύριος in actis et epistolis apostolorum. 
Erlang. 1828; Wesselus Scheffer, diss. theol. exhibens 
disquisitionem de vocis κύριος absolute positae in N. T. 
usu. Lugd. 1846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [Stuart 
in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss, 
Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. 8 76; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v. ; 
Abbot in the Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for June 
and Dec. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dec. 1883 p. 101 sq. 
On the use of a capital initial, see WH. Intr. § 414]. 
The word does not oceur in the [ Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.), 
the] 1 Ep. of John, [nor in the Second or the Third; for 
in 2 Jn. 3 κυρίου is dropped by the critical editors. Sw. 
see δεσπότης, fin. |. 

κυριότης. -ητος. 7, (ὁ κύριος), dominion, power, lordship s 
in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see ἐξουσία, 4 c. 
B.; cf. Germ. Herrschaft, [or Milton's ** dominations "]5 
in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dominantes), 
so used of angels (κύριοι, 1 Co. viii. 5; see κύριος, a. fin.) : 
Eph.i.21; 2 Pet. ii. 105 Jude 8; plur. Col.i.16. (Eccles. 
[e. g. ‘Teaching’ e. 4] and Byzant. writ.) * 

κυρόω. -@: 1 aor. inf. κυρῶσαι; pf. pass. ptep. kekupo- 
μένος ; (κῦρος the head, that which is supreme, power, 
influence, authority); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to 
make valid; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify: 
διαθήκην, pass. Gal. iii. 15; ἀγάπην εἴς τινα, to make a 
public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by 
granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : zpo-kvpóo. ] * 

κύων, κυνός; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the 
N. T. mase.; Hebr. 393; a dog; prop.: Lk. xvi. 21; 
2 Pet. ii. 22; metaph. (in various [but always reproach- 
ful] senses; often so even in Hom.) a man of impure 
mind, an impudent man, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. 5.1: 
Mt. vii. 6; Phil.iii.2; Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass. 
others less probably understand sodomites (like 0253 in 
Deut. xxiii. 18 (19)) [cf. B. D. s. v. Dog].* 

κῶλον, -ov, τό; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; a mem- 
ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi- 
nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30; 
Num. xiv. 29, 32 sq. ; 1 S. xvii. 46 ; Is. Ixvi. 24) for ^32 
and 0°919, a dead body, carcase, inasmuch as the mem- 
bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart: so the plur. in 
Heb. iii. 17 fr. Num. xiv. 29, 32, [ A. V. carcases].* 

κωλύω; impf. 1 pers. plur. ἐκωλύομεν (Mk. ix. 38 T Tr 
txt. WH); 1 aor. ἐκώλυσα; Pass., pres. κωλύομαι ; 1 aor. 
ἐκωλύθην ; (fr. κόλος, lopped, clipped; prop. to cut off, cut 


κώμη 


short, hence) to hinder, prevent, forbid ; [fr. Pind. down]; 
Sept. for $73, twice (viz. 1 S. xxv. 26; 2 S. xiii. 13) for 
y22: τινά foll. by an inf. us 865,28. ; cf. B. $148, 13], 
Mt. xix. 14; Lk. xxiii. 2; Acts xvi. 6; xxiv. 23; 1 Th. 
ii. 16; Heb. vii. 23; τί κωλύει pe βαπτισθῆναι; what doth 
hinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36 ; 
the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone 
before, Mk. ix. 38 sq. ; x. 14; Lk. ix. 49; xi. 52; xviii. 
16; Acts xi. 17; Ro. i. 13; 3 Jn. 10; αὐτόν is wanting, 
because it has preceded, Lk. ix. 50; the acc. is wanting, 
because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3; 
as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. τινά τινος, to keep one 
from a thing, Acts xxvii. 435; with acc. of the thing, τὴν 
παραφρονίαν, to restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii. 16; τὸ λαλεῖν 
γλώσσαις, 1 Co. xiv. 39; τί, foll. by τοῦ μή, can any one 
hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should 
not be baptized? Acts x.47; in imitation of the Hebr. 
Ν 3 foll. by 15 of the pers. and the ace. of the thing, to 
withhold a thing, from any one, i. e. to deny or napa one 
a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (τὸ μνημεῖον ἀπὸ σοῦ, 
Gen. xxiii. 6). [Cowr.: d:axodvo.]* 

κώμη. -ης; 7, (akin to κεῖμαι, κοιμάω, prop. the common 
sleeping-place to which laborers in the fields return; 
Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. home]), [fr. Hes., Hat. 
down], a village: Mt. ix. 35; x. 11; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. v. 
17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. πόλιν], and often in the Synopt. 
Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near 
which the villages lie and to whose municipality they 
belong: Καισαρείας, Mk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for 
ΓΞ with the name of a city; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 
220° [B. D. s. v. Daughter, 7]; also for "$T and nin 
with the name of a city); by meton. the inhabitants of 
villages, Acts viii. 25; used also of a small town, as Beth- 
saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22; Jn.i. 45; of Bethlehem, 
Jn. vii. 42; for Vy, Josh. x. 39; xv. 9 [Compl.]; Is. xlii. 
11. [B. D. s. v. Villages.] 

κωμό-πολις, -ews, 7, a village approximating in size and 
number of inhabitants to a city, a village-city, a town 
(Germ. Marktflecken): Mk. i. 38. (Strabo; [Josh. 
xviii. 28 Aq., Theod. (Field)]; often in the Byzant. writ. 
of the middle ages.) * 


96 





ij λάθρα 
κῶμος, -ov, 6, (fr. κεῖμαι ; accordingly i. q. Germ. Ge- 
lag; cf. Curtius $ 45); fr. [Hom. h. Mere., Theozn.] 
Hdt. down; a revel, carousal, i. e. in the Grk. writ. prop. 
a nocturnal and riotous procession of half-drunken and 
frolicsome fellows who after supper parade through the 
streets with torches and music in honor of Bacchus or 
some other deity, and sing and play before the houses 
of their male and female friends; hence used generally, 
of feasts and drinking-parties that are protracted till late 
at night and indulge in revelry; plur. [revellings]: Ro. 
xiii. 13; Gal.v. 21; 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Sap. xiv. 23; 2 Macc. 
vi. 4.) [Trench ὃ Ixi.]* 

κώνωψ, -ωπος, 6, a gnat ([Aeschyl.], Hdt., Hippoer.,. 
al.) of the wine-gnat or midge that is bred in (ferment- 
ing and) evaporating wine (Aristot. h. an. 5, 19 [p. 552°, 
5; ef. Bochart, Hierozoicon, iii. 444; Buztorf, Lex. talm. 
etc. 927 (474° ed. Fischer) ]): Mt. xxiii. 24.* 

Kós, gen. Κῶ, ἡ, Cos [A. V. Coos] (now Stanco or 
Stanchio [which has arisen from a slurred pronuncia- 
tion of és τὰν Κῶ (mod. Grk.) like Stambul fr. ἐς τὰν" 
πόλιν. (Hackett) ]), a small island of the Agean Sea, 
over against the cities of Cnidus and Halicarnassus, 
celebrated for its fertility and esp. for its abundance of 
wine and corn: Acts xxi. 1, where for the Rec. Kav: 
Grsb. [foll. by subsequent editors] has restored Ka, as 
in 1 Mace. xv. 23; see Matthiae § 70 note 3; W. § 8, 
2a.; [B. 21 (19); WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester, 
De Co insula, Hal. 1833; [*but the best description is 
in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u.s. w. (Halle 1852)” (How- 
son); cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 96].* 

Kocáp, 6, (fr. nop to divine, [but cf. B. D.]), Cosam,. 
one of Christ's ancestors: Lk. iii. 28.* 

κωφός, -7, -óv, (kórre to beat, pound), blunted, dull; 
prop. βέλος, Hom. Il. 11, 390; hence a. blunted 
(or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq.; xii. 22; 
xv.30sq.; Lk.i.22; xi. 14, (Hat. et sqq.; Sept. for obs 
Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull,in hearing; deaf: 
Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Hom. 
h. Mere. 92; Aeschyl, Xen. Plat, sqq.; Sept. for 
Un, Ex. iv. 11; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14, 
etc.).* 


A 


λαγχάνω : 2 aor. ἔλαχον ; 1. to obtain by lot (fr. 
Hom. down): with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [cf. B. 269 
(231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment, 
τί, Acts 1. 17; 2 Pet. i.1; on the constr. of this 
verb w. gen. and acc. of the thing, see Matthiae $ 328; 
W. 200 (188); fief. B. $ 132, 8]. 2. to cast lots, 
determine by lot, (Isoer. p. 144 b.; Diod. 4, 63, [cf. ps.- 
Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]) : περί τινος, Jn. xix. 24.* 


obtain : 


Λάζαρος, -ov, ó, (rabb. 379, apparently the same as 
ays, whom God helps [cf. Philo, quis haeres $ 12]. 
acc. to others, i. q. 3! Ν without help), Lazarus; qu 
an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised. 
from the dead by him: Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 43; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq. 
ἘΠ᾿ 2. an imaginary person, extremely poor and 
wretched: Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.* 

λάθρα [so R G T Tr] (in Hom. λάθρῃ, fr. λανθάνω,. 


λαῖλαψ 


λαθεῖν), and L [WII KC (see the latter’s Praef. p. xii. and 
s. v. elx]) ] λάθρᾳ (fr. λάθρος, -a, -ov, cf. Passow [esp. L. 
and S.] s. v.; W. 47; B. 69 (61)), adv. secretly: Mt. 
i 19; ii. 7; Jn. xi. 28; Acts xvi. 37. (From Hom. 
down; Sept.) * 

λαῖλαψ ([1, T Tr WIT] not λαίλαψ [Grsb.], cf. W. § 6, 
le.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 sq.; [Chandler 
§ 620; Τὰ Proleg. p. 101), -azos, ἡ [masc. in N* Mk. iv. 
37; ef. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 226, 4], a whirlwind, 
tempestuous wind: 2 Pet. ii. 17; λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου (cf. Germ. 
Sturmwind ; ἄνεμος σὺν λαίλαπι πολλῇ, Hom. Il. 17, 57), 
a violent attack of wind [A. V. a storm of wind], a squall 
[(see below)], Mk. iv.37; Lk. viii. 23. (Sept. Job xxi. 
18; xxxviii. 1; Sap. v. 15, 24; Sir.xlviii. 9.) [Acc. to 
Schmidt (ch. 55 8 13), X. is never a single gust, nor a 
steadily blowing wind, however violent; but a storm 
breaking forth from black thunder-clouds in furious gusts, 
with floods of rain, and throwing everything topsy-turvy ; 
ace. to Aristot. de mund. 4 p. 395%, 7 it is ‘a whirlwind 
revolving from below upwards."] * 

AAKX and λακέω, see λάσκω. 

λακτίζω ; (fr. adv. Aaé, with the heel); [fr. Hom. down]; 
lo kick, strike with the heel: Acts xxvi. 14, and Rec. in 
ix. 5; see κέντρον, 2." 

AaMéo, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐλάλει, plur. ἐλάλουν; 
fut. λαλήσω ; 1 aor. ἐλάλησα; pf. λελάληκα; Pass., pres. 
λαλοῦμαι; pf. λελάλημαι; 1 aor. ἐλαλήθην; 1 fut. λαληθή- 
gopat; [fr. Soph. down]; found in bibl. Grk. much more 
freq. than in prof. auth., in Sept. times without number for 
35 or 535, more rarely for 328; prop. to utter a sound 
(cf. [onomatop. /a-/a, ete.] Germ. allen), to emit a voice, 
make one's self heard ; hence to utter or form words with 
the mouth, to speak, having reference to the sound 
and pronunciation of the words and in general the 
form of what is uttered, while λέγω refers to the 
meaning and substance of what is spoken; hence 
λαλεῖν is employed not only of men, esp. when chatting 
and prattling, but also of animals (of birds, Mosch. 3, 47 ; 
of locusts, Theoer. 5, 34; λαλοῦσι μέν, οὐ φράζουσι δέ, of 
dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani- 
mate thines (as trees, Theocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo, 
Dio C. 74, 21, 14). Accordingly, everything λεγόμενον 


is also λαλούμενον, but not everything λαλούμενον is also | 


λεγόμενον ( Eupolis in Plut. Ale. 13 λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνα- 
τώτατος λέγειν) ; [the difference between the words is 
evident where they occur in proximity, e. v. Ro. iii. 19 
ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει, rois ἐν τῷ νόμῳ λαλεῖ, and the very com. 
ἐλάλησεν ... λέγων, Mt. xiii. 3, etc.]. Moreover, the 
primary meaning of λαλεῖν, to utter one’s self, enables us 
easily to understand its very frequent use in the sacred 
writers to denote the utterances by which God indicates 


or gives proof of his mind and will, whether immediately | 
| i.e. what the words uttered by him mean [WH br. τί 


or through the instrumentality of his messengers and 
heralds. [Perhaps this use may account in part for the 


fact that, though in classic Grk. Aad. is the term for | 


light and familiar speech, and so assumes readily a dis- 
paraging notion, in bibl. Grk. it is nearly if not quite free 


from any such suggestion.] Cf. Dav. Schulz die Geis- | 


368 








λαλέω 


tesgaben der ersten Christen, p. 94 sqq.; Tittmann de 
Synonymis N. T. p. 79 sq.; Z'rench, Syn. § Ixxvi.; [and 
on class. usage Schmidt, Syn. i.ch. 1]. But let us look 
at the N. T. usage in detail : 

1. 10 uller a voice, emit a sound: of things inanimate, 
as βρονταί, Rev. x. 4; with ras ἑαυτῶν φωνάς added, each. 
thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean- 
ing of which the prophet understood, cf. Jn. xii. 28 sq.), 
ib. 3; σάλπιγγος λαλούσης per’ ἐμοῦ, λέγων (Ree. λέγουσα) 
foll. by direct dise. Rev. iv. 1; of the expiatory blood of 
Christ, metaph. to crave the pardon of sins, Heb. xii. 24 ; 
of the murdered Abel, long since dead, i. q. to call for 
vengeance (see Gen. iv. 10, and cf. κράζω, 1 fin.), Heb. 
xi. 4 ace. to the true reading λαλεῖ [ἃ LT Tr WH; the 
Rec. λαλεῖται must be taken as pass., in the exceptional 
sense to be talked of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (πρᾶγμα 
κατ᾽ ἀγορὰν λαλούμενον, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. πάντες 
αὐτὴν λαλοῦσιν, Aleiphro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. Wag- 
ner)]. 2. to speak, i. e. to use the tongue or the faculty 
of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absol. 1 Co. xiv. 11; 
of the dumb, receiving the power of speech, Mt. ix. 33; 
xii. 22; xv. 31; Lk. xi. 14; Rev. xiii. 15; (τοὺς [T Tr WH 
om. |) ἀλάλους λαλεῖν, Mk. vii. 37; ἐλάλει ὀρθῶς, ib. 35; of a 
dumb man, μὴ δυνάμενος λαλήσαι, Lk. i. 20 (of idols, στόμα 
ἔχουσι k. ov λαλήσουσι, Ps. exiii. 13 (exv. 5) ; exxxiv. 16; 
cf. 3 Macc.iv. 16); to speak, i. e. not to be silent, opp. to 
holding one’s peace, λάλει x. μὴ σιωπήσῃς, Acts xviii. 
9; opp. to hearing, Jas.i. 19; opp. to the soul’s inner 
experiences, 2 Co. iv. 13 fr. Ps. exv. 1 (exvi. 10); opp. to 
ποιεῖν (as λόγος to ἔργον q. v. 3), Jas. ii. 12. 3. to 
talk; of the sound and outward form of speech: τῇ ἰδίᾳ 
διαλέκτῳ, Acts ii. 6; ἑτέραις kawats γλώσσαις, ib. 4; Mk. 
xvi. 17 [here Tr txt. WH txt. om. kaw.], from which the 
simple γλώσσαις λαλεῖν, and the like, are to be distin- 

4. to ulter, tell: with acc. 
of the thing, 2 Co. xii. 4. 5. to use words in order 
to declare one's mind and disclose one's thoughts; to speak: 
absol., ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, Mt. xii. 46; xvii.5; xxvi. 47; 
Mk. v. 35; xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47, 60; with the 
advs. κακῶς, καλῶς, Jn. xviii. 22; ὡς νήπιος ἐλάλουν, 1 Co. 
xiii. 11; ὡς δράκων, Rev. xiii. 11; στόμα πρὸς στόμα, face 
to face (Germ. miindlich), 2 Jn. 12 (after the Hebr. of 
Num. xii. 8); εἰς ἀέρα λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xiv. 9; ἐκ τοῦ περισ- 
σεύματος τῆς καρδίας τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ, Out of the abundance 
of the heart the mouth speaketh, sc. so that it expresses 
the soul’s thoughts, Mt. xii. 34 ; Lk. vi. 45; ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων 
λαλεῖν, to utter words in accordance with one’s inner 
character, Jn. viii. 44. with ace. of thething: τί λαλήσω, 
λαλήσητε, etc., what I shall utter in speech, ete., Jn. xii. 
50; Mt. x. 19; Mk. ix. 6 [here T Tr WH ἀποκριθῇ]; 
xiii. 11; τί, anything, Mk. xi. 23 L T Trtxt. WH; Ro. 
xv. 18; 1 Th. i. 8; οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί λαλεῖ, what he says, 


guished, see γλῶσσα, 2. 


AaA.], Jn. xvi. 18; ταῦτα, these words, Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. 
viii. 30; xvii. 1, 13; 1 Co. ix. 8; τὸ λαλούμενον, 1 Co. 
xiv. 9; plur. Acts xvi. 14 (of the words of a teacher) ; 
τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον, Mk. v. 36 [see B. 302 (259) note]; 
λόγους, 1 Co. xiv. 19; ῥήματα, Jn. viii. 20; Acts x. 44; 


λαλέω 


παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 33; βλασφημίας, Mk. ii. 7 [L T Tr 
WH βλασφημεῖ]; Lk. v. 21; ῥήματα βλάσφημα ets τινα, 
Acts vi. 11; ῥήματα (Rec. adds βλάσφημα) κατά τινος, 
Acts vi. 13; σκληρὰ κατά twos, Jude 15; ὑπέρογκα, ib. 16 
(Dan. [Theodot.] xi. 36) : rà μὴ δέοντα, 1 Tim. v. 13 (à 
μὴ θέμις, 2 Mace. xii. 145; εἴς τινα τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα, 3 
Mace. iv. 16; [cf. W. 480 (448)]); διεστραμμένα, Acts 
xx. 30; τὸ ψεῦδος, Jn. viii. 44; δόλον, 1 Pet. iii. 10 fr. 
Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; ἀγαθά, Mt. xii. 31; σοφίαν, 1 Co. 
li. 6 sq.; μυστήρια, ib. xiv. 2; foll. by ὅτε (equiv. to περὶ 
τούτου. ὅτι ete. to speak of this, viz. that they knew him 
[see ὅτι, I. 2 sub fin.]), Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 41; contrary 
to classie usage, foll. by direct dise., Mk. xiv. 31 L txt. 
T Tr WH; Heb.v.5; xi. 18, (but in these last two pass. 
of the utterances of God); more correctly elsewhere 
ἐλάλησε λέγων (in imitation of Hebr. 35x? Det 
above (init.)]), foll. by direct disc.: Mt. xiv. 27; xxiii. 
1; xxvii. 18; Jn. vid. 12; Acts vii. 26; xxvi. 31; 
xxvii. 25; Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; λαλοῦσα k. λέγουσα, 
Rev. x. 8. λαλῶ with dat. of pers. to speak to one, ad- 
dress him (esp. of teachers): Mt. xii. 46; xxiii. 1; Lk. 
xxiv. 6; Jn. ix. 29; xv. 22; Acts vii. 38, 44; ix. 27; 
ἘΝῚ 19; XX15.195 xxl. 9. ΒΟ νὴ. SNO O mb xiv. 
21,28; 1 Th. ii. 16; Heb. i. 2 (1); of one commanding, 
Mt. xxviii. 18; Mk. xvi. 19; to speak to, i. e. converse 
with, one [ef. B. $ 133, 1]: Mt. xii. 46, [47 but WH mre. 
only]; Lk. i. 22; xxiv. 32; Jn. iv. 26; xii. 29; ἑαυτοῖς 
(dat. of pers.) ψαλμοῖς x. ὕμνοις (dat. of instrument), 
Eph. v. 19; οὐ λαλεῖν τινι is used of one who does not 
answer, Jn. xix. 10; to accost one, Mt. xiv. 27; λαλῶ τί 
tun, lo speak anything to any one, to speak to one about 
a thing (of teaching): Mt. ix.18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which 
see ἀρχή, 1 b.); x. 6; xiv. 25; xv. 11; xviii. 20 sq.; 2 
Co. vii. 14; ῥήματα, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; Acts xiii. 42; 
οἰκοδομὴν κ- παράκλησιν, things which tend to edify and 
comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promulgating a 
thing to one, τὸν νόμον, pass. Heb. ix. 19; λαλῶ πρός τινα, 
to speak unto one: Lk. i. 19; [ii. 15 Lmre. TWH]; 
Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi 14 [RG], 
26, 31; Heb. v. 5, (ON 731, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11, 
17, 22); λόγους πρός twa, Lk. xxiv. 44; ἐλάλησαν πρὸς 
αὐτοὺς εὐαγγελιζόμενοι . .. Ἰησοῦν, Acts xi. 20; ὅσα àv 
λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Acts ili. 22; σοφίαν ἔν τισιν, wisdom 
among ete. 1 Co. ii. 65 Aad. μετά τινος, to speak, converse, 
with one [cf. B. § 133, 3]: Mk. vi. 505 Jn. iv. 27; ix.37; 
xiv. 30; Rev. 1. 12; x. 8; xvii 1; xxi. 9, 15; λαλεῖν 
ἀλήθειαν μετὰ ete. to show one's self a lover of truth in 
conversation with others, Eph. iv. 25 [ef. Ellicott]; 
λαλεῖν περί Twos, concerning a person or thing: Lk. ii. 33; 
ix. 11; Jn. vii. 13; viii. 26; xii. 41; Acts ii. 31; Heb. 
ii. 5; iv. 8; with τινί, dat. of pers., added, Lk. ii. 38; 
Acts xxii. 10; τὶ περί τινος, Acts xxviii. 21; Lk. ii. 17; 
εἴς τινα περί τινος (gen. of the thing), to speak something 
as respects a person concerning a thing, Heb. vii. 14 
RG; εἴς twa περί w. gen. of pers, ibid. L T Tr WH. 
Many of the exx. already cited show that λαλεῖν is freq. 
used in the N. T. of teachers, — of Jesus, the apostles, 
and others. To those pass. may be added, Lk. v. 4; Jn. 
21 


569 








λαλιά 


i. 87; vii. 46; viii. 30, 38; xii. 50; Acts vi. 10; xi. 15; 
xiv. 1, 9; xvi. 14; 1 Co. xiv. 34 sq.; 2 Co. ii. 17; Col. 
iv. 3; 1 Th. ii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 11; with παρρησίᾳ added, 
Jn. vii. 26; xvi. 29; ἐπὶ ὀνόματι ᾿Ιησοῦ, Acts v. 40, cf. 
iv. 17, see ἐπί, B. 2 a. 8.; rà ὀνόματι κυρίου [where LT 
Tr WH prefix ἐν], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see ὄνομα, 
2 f.); τινὶ (to one) ἐν παραβολαῖς. Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34; 
ἐν παροιμίαις, Jn. xvi. 25; ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ, to speak from my- 
self (i.e. utter what I myself have thought out), Jn. xii. 
49; dm ἐμαυτοῦ (see ἀπό, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59"), Jn. vii. 17 
Sq.; xiv. 10; xvi.13; ἐκ τῆς γῆς (see ἐκ, II. 2 sub fin.), 
Jn. iii. 31; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, 1 Jn. iv. 5 (see κόσμος, 6) ; ἐκ 
θεοῦ, prompted by divine influence, 2 Co. ii. 17; λαλεῖν 
τὸν λόγον, to announce or preach the word of God or the 
doctrine of salvation: Mk. viii. 32; Acts xiv. 25 [here 
in T WH mre. foll. by eis τὴν Πέργην ; see eis, A. I. 5 b.]; 
xvi. 6; Phil. i. 14, ete.; τὸν Noy. τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts iv. 29, 
31; τινὶ τ. λόγον, Mk. ii. 2; Acts xi.19; with παραβολαῖς 
added, Mk. iv. 33; τινὶ τὸν Ady. τοῦ κυρίου [WH txt. 
θεοῦ], Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9) ; τινὶ τ. Noy. τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Acts xiii. 46; Heb. xiii. 7; τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. 
ii. 34; τὰ pny. τῆς ζωῆς, Acts v. 20; πρός τινα τὸ evayy. 
τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Th. ii. 2; λαλεῖν x. διδάσκειν τὰ περὶ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ 
[RG κυρίου], Acts xviii. 25; τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
Col. ἵν. 8. λαλεῖν is used of the O. T. prophets utter- 
ing their predictions: Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24; 
xxvi. 22 [cf. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)]; 2 Pet. i. 
21; Jas. v. 10; of the declarations and prophetic an- 
nouncements of God: Lk.i.45,55; Jn.ix. 29; Acts vii. 
6; esp. in the Ep. to the Heb.: i. 1, 2 (1); iii. 5; iv. 8; 
xi. 18; xii. 25; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are 
said λαλεῖν ἔν τινι : Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co. 
xiii. 3; διὰ στόματός twos, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; διὰ 
Ἡσαΐου, Acts xxviii, 25; of the sayings of angels: Lk. 
1. 11, 20; Jn. xit 295 "Acts ΧΟ ἢ; xx1i. 19 xxvii ans 
the Holy Spirit is said AaAcew what it will teach the 
apostles, Jn. xvi. 135 ὁ νόμος as a manifestation of 
God is said λαλεῖν τινε what it commands, Ro. iii. 19; 
finally, even voices are said λαλεῖν, Acts xxvi. 14 
[RG]; Rev.i.12; x. 8. iq. to make known by speak- 
ing, to speak of, relate, with the implied idea of extolling: 
Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 86; Acts iv. 20; 
[cf. Heb. xi. 4 Ree. (see 1 fin. above)]. 6. Since 
λαλεῖν strictly denotes the act of one who utters words 
with the living voice, when writers speak of them- 
selves or are spoken of by others as λαλοῦντες, they are 
conceived of as present and addressing their readers 
with the living voice, Ro. vii. 15 1 Co. ix. 8; 2 Co. xi. 
17,23; xii. 19; Heb. ii. 5; vi.9; 2 Pet. iii. 16, or λαλεῖν 
is used in the sense of commanding, Heb. vii. i4. The 
verb λαλεῖν is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess. 
[Comp.: δια-, ἐκτ-, xara-, προσ-, συλ-λαλέω; cf. the cat- 
alogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.] 

λαλιά, -ᾶς, 7, (λάλος, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119 
Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity, 
talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see λαλέω, init.]; in 
a good sense conversation ; in the N. T. 1. speech, 


i.q. story: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro- 


Napa 


nunciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec.; Mt. xxvi. 73; 
speech which discloses the speaker's native country : hence 
of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hav- 
ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer].* 

λαμά [RG (on the accent see Td: Proleg. 102)] in 
Mt. xxvii. 46 and λαμμᾶ [RG] Mk. xv. 34, (the Hebr. 
word n2»? fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 1), why; in the former 
pass. Lehm. reads λημά, in the latter λεμά, Tdf. λεμά in 
both, Tr WH λεμά in Mt. but λαμά in Mk.; the form in 
ἢ or e reproduces the Chald. 3999 or 729; on the re- 
markable diversity of spelling in the codd. cf. Tdf. on 
each pass., [WH on Mt. 1. c.], and Fritzsche on Mk. p. 
698." 

λαμβάνω; impf. ἐλάμβανον; fut. λήψομαι, (LT Tr WH 
λήμψομαι, an Alexandrian form; see s. v. M, p); 2 aor. 
ἔλαβον (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B *] ἐλάβατε, 
1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. ἀπέρχομαι, init.), impv. λάβε 
(Rev. x. 8 sq.), not λαβέ (W. $ 6, 1 a.; B. 62 (54)); 
pf. εἴληφα, 2 pers. εἴληφας [and εἴληφες (Rev. xi. 17 
WH; see xomidw); on the use of the pf. interchangeably 
with an aor. (Rev. v. 7; viii. 5, ete.) cf. B. 197 (170); 
W. 272 (255); Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Mod. 
Grk. 2d ed. App. 88 67, 68], ptep. εἰληφώς ; [Pass., pres. 
ptep. λαμβανόμενος ; pf. 3 pers. sing. εἴληπται, Jn. viii. 4 
WHmrz. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times 
for np), very often for wi»3, also for 329 and several 
times for ims; [fr. Hom. down]; 

I. to take, i. e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold 
of, any pers. or thing in order to use it: absol, where 
the context shows what is taken, Mt. xxvi. 26; Mk. xiv. 
22; (τὸν) ἄρτον, Mt. xxvi. 26; Acts xxvii. 35; τὸ βιβλίον, 
Rev. v. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. 5.7; μάχαιραν (grasp, 
lay hand to), Mt. xxvi. 52, and in many other exx. 
After a circumstantial style of description (see a» 
iornut, I. 1c.) in use from Hom. down (cf. Passow s. v. 
C.; [L. and S. s. v. 1.11]; Matthiae § 558, Anm. 2; tW. 
§ 65, 4 c.]), the ptep. λαβών with ace. of the object is 
placed before an act. verb where it does not always seem 
to us necessary to mention the act of taking (as λαβὼν 
κύσε χεῖρα [cf. our ‘he took and kissed ᾽, Hom. Od. 24, 
398): Mt. xiii. 31, 33; xvii. 27; Mk. ix. 36; Lk. xiii. 19, 
21; Jn.xii.3; Acts ii. 23 Rec.; ix. 25; xvi.3; λαβὼν τὸ 
αἷμα... τὸν λαὸν ἐρράντισε (equiv, to τῷ αἵματι . . . τὸν 
A. ἐρρ.), Heb. ix. 19; or the verb λαβεῖν in a finite form 
foll. by καί precedes, as ἔλαβε τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν, 
Jn. xix.1; add, 10. 40; xxi.13; Rev. νη]. 5; also λαβεῖν 
τὸν ἄρτον . - - καὶ βαλεῖν etc., Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii. 27; 
ἔλαβον ... καὶ ἐποίησαν, Jn. xix. 23. metaph., ἀφορμήν 
(see the word, 2), Ro. vii. 8, 11 ; ὑπόδειγμά τινός (gen. 
of the thing) twa, to take one as an exaniple of a thing, 
for imitation, Jas. v. 10; to take in order to wear, τὰ 
ἱμάτια, i. e. to put on: Jn. xiii. 12 (ἐσθῆτα, ὑποδήματα, 
Hat. 2, 37; 4, 78); μορφὴν δούλου, Phil. ii. 7. to take 
in the mouth: something to eat, Jn. xiii. 30; Acts ix. 19; 
1 Tim. iv. 4, (cf. Lat. cibum capio, to take food) ; to take 
anything to drink, i. e. drink, swallow, ὕδωρ, Rev. xxii. 
17; to drink, τὸ ὄξος, Jn. xix. 30; οὐκ ἔλαβε, he did not 
take it, i. e. refused to drink it, Mk. xv. 23. to take 


370 











λαμβάνω 


up a thing to be carried; to take upon one’s self: τὸν 
σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, Mt. x. 38 [L mre. apn]; to take with one for 
Suture use: ἄρτους, Mt. xvi. 5,7; λαμπάδας, Mt. xxv. 1; 
ἔλαιον μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ibid. 3. 2. to take in order to carry 
away: without the notion of violence, ras ἀσθενείας, i. 6. 
to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 17; with the notion of 
violence, to seize, take away forcibly: Mt. v. 40; Rev. iii. 
11; τὴν εἰρήνην ἐκ [ Rec. ἀπὸ, (WH br. ix) ] τῆς γῆς, Rev. 
vi. 4. 3. to take what is one's own, to take to one's 
self, to make one's own; a. lo ciaim, procure, for one's 
self: τί, Jn. iii. 27 (opp. to what is given); ἑαυτῷ βασι- 
λείαν, Lk. xix. 12; with ace. of the pers. to associate with 
one's self as companion, attendant, etc. : λαβὼν τ. σπεῖραν 
ἔρχεται. taking with him the band of soldiers (whose aid 
he might use) he comes, Jn. xviii. 3 (στρατὸν λαβὼν 
ἔρχεται, Soph. Trach. 259); λαμβ. γυναῖκα, to take i. e. 
marry a wife, Mk. xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, (Gen. iv. 
19, ete.; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16; Eur. Ale. 324; with ἑαυτῷ 
added, Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that 
which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q. 
to seize, lay hold of, apprehend: τινά, Mt. xxi. 35, 39; 
Mk. xii. 3, 8, and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; trop. τί, i. e. to. get possession of, obtain, a thing, 
Phil. iii. 12 [cf. W. 276 (259)]; metaph., of affections 
or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, occupo) : τινὰ ἔλα- 
Bev ἔκστασις, Lk. v. 26; φόβος, Lk. vii. 16 (very often so 
even in Hom., as τρόμος ἔλλαβε γυῖα, Il. 3, 34; μὲ ἵμερος 
αἱρεῖ, 3, 446; χόλος, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sap. xi. 
13 (12)) ; πνεῦμα (i. e. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; πειρασμός, 
1 Co. x. 13. c. to take by craft (our catch, used of 
hunters, fishermen, ete.) : οὐδέν, Lk. v. 5; trop. τινά, to 
circumvent one by fraud, 2 Co. xi. 20; with δόλῳ added, 
ib. xii. 16. d. to take to one's self, lay hold upon, take 
possession of, i.e. to appropriate to one’s self: ἑαυτῷ τὴν 
τιμήν, Heb. v. 4. e. Lat. capto, catch at, reach after, 
strive to obtain: τὶ παρά twos (gen. of pers.), Jn. v. 34, 
41; alternating with ζητεῖν, ib. 44. f. to take a thing 
due aec. to agreement or law, /o collect, gather (tribute) : 
τὰ δίδραχμα, Mt. xvii. 24; τέλη ἀπό τινος, ib. 25; δεκάτας, 
Heb. vii. 8 sq.; καρπούς, Mt. xxi. 34; παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν 
ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i. e. to admit, 
receive: twa ῥαπίσμασιν, Mk. xiv. 65 L'T Tr WH [ef. 
Lat. verberibus aliquem accipere], but see βάλλω, 1; τινὰ 
eis τὰ ἴδια, unto his own home [see ἴδιος, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27; 
εἰς οἰκίαν, 2 Jn. 10; εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, Jn. vi. 21. to receive 
what is offered; not to refuse or reject: τινά, one, in 
order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20; τί, prop., 
lo-reccive, Mt. xxvii. 6; trop. : τὸν λόγον, to admit or re- 
ceive into the mind, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16, (for which 
in Lk. viii. 13 δέχονται) ; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, to believe the testi- 
mony, Jn. iii. 11,32 sq.; τὰ ῥήματά τινος, Jn. xii. 48; xvii. 8. 
In imitation of the Hebr. 0.35 N72 (on the various senses 
of which in the O. T. ef. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 915 sq.), 
πρόσωπον λαμβάνω. to receive a person, give him access 
to one's self, i. e. to regard any one's power, rank, external 
circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice 
or neglect something: used of partiality ΓΑ. V. to ac- 
cept the person], Lk. xx. 21; with ἀνθρώπου added, Gal. 


λαμβάνω 


ji. 6, (Lev. xix. 15; Mal. ii. 9, etc.; θαυμάζειν τὸ πρόσωπ.: 
Deut. x. 17; Job xxxii. 22); [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. 
c.]- 5. to take, i. q. to choose, select: τινὰ ἔκ τινων, 
pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification to take may 
be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow 
s. v. B. d. fin.; [L. and S. II. 3]), by which λαμβάνειν 
joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose 
idea is expressed by the subst. : Nap. ἀρχήν to take be- 
ginning, i. q. ἄρχομαι to begin, Heb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9, 
and often; Ael. v. h. 2, 28; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ; 
λήθην τινός, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph. antt. 2, 6, 10; 
9,1; 4, 8, 44; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 sub fin.; h. anim. 4, 35) ; 
ὑπόμνησίν twos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5; 
πεῖράν τινος, to prove anything, i. e. either to make trial of: 
ἧς se. θαλάσσης, which they attempted to pass through, 
Heb. xi. 29; or to have trial of, to experience: also with 
gen. of the thing, ib. 36, (in both senses often also in 
class. Grk.; see πεῖρα, and Bleck, Br. a. d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 
811); συμβούλιον AapB. to take counsel, i. q. συμβουλεύ- 
εσθαι, to deliberate (a combination in imitation apparently 
of the Lat. phrase consilium capere, although that sig- 
nifies to form a plan, to resolve): Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; 
xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; θάρσος, to take, receive, courage, 
Acts xxviii. 15; τὸ χάραγμά τινος, i. q. χαράσσομαί τι, to 
receive the mark of, i. e. let one’s self be marked or 
stamped with: Rev. xiv. 9,11; xix. 20; xx. 4. 

II. to receive (what is given) ; to gain, get, obtain: 
absol., opp. to αἰτεῖν, Mt. vii.8; Lk. xi. 10; Jn. xvi. 24; 
opp. to διδόναι, Acts xx. 35; Mt. x. 8; with ace. of the 
thing, Mt. xx. 9sq.; Mk. x. 30; [Lk. xviii. 30 L txt. 
WHtxt. Tr mrg.]; Jn. vii. 39; Acts ii. 38; x. 43; Ro. 
1.5; v. 11. Το: τῷ 12 01x24: 30::02 ὁ; x1. 4:5 Gal: 
iii 14; Heb. ix. 15; [xi. 13 RG, see ἐπαγγελία, 2 b.; 
cf. W. 237 (222)]; Jas. 1.12; v. 7; 1 Pet. iv. 10; Rev. 
iv. 11; v. 12, and many other exx.; μισθόν, Mt. x. 41; 
Jn.iv.36; 1 Co. iii. 8, 14 ; ἐλεημοσύνην, Acts iii. 3; ἔλεος, 
Heb. iv. 16; τόπον ἀπολογίας, Acts xxv. 16; τὴν ἐπισκο- 
πήν, Acts i. 20; διάδοχον, Acts xxiv. 27 (successorem ac- 
cipio, Plin. ep. 9, 13); τὸ ἱκανὸν παρά twos (zen. of pers.), 
Acts xvii. 9 (see ἱκανός, a. fin.) ; of punishments: κρίμα, 
Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. W. 183 (172)]; 
Lk.xx.47; Jas. iii. 1; with dat. incommodi added, ἑαυτῷ, 
Ro. xiii. 2 (δίκην, Hdt. 1, 115; Eur. Bacch. 1312; ποινάς, 
Eur. Tro. 360). οἰκοδομήν, to receive edifying, i. q. oiko- 
δομοῦμαι, 1 Co. xiv. 5; περιτομήν, i. q. περιτέμνομαι, Jn. 
vii. 23; τὶ ἔκ twos, Jn. i. 16; ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκρούς, 
substantially i. q. to receive, get back, Heb. xi. 35 [see ἐκ, 
II.6]; ἐκ, a part of a thing [see ἐκ, II. 9], Rev. xviii. 4; 
τὶ παρά τινος (gen. of pers.), [Lk. vi. 34 T Trtxt. WH]; 
Jn. x. 18; Acts ii. 33; iii. 5; xx. 24; xxvi. 10; Jas. i. 
7; 1Jn.iii. 22 RG; 2 Jn.4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); ἀπό τινος 
(gen. of pers.), 1 Jn. ii. 27; [iii. 22 L T Tr WH]; on 
the difference betw. παρά and ἀπό τινος λαμβ. cf. W. 
370 (347) note; [B. § 147, 5; yet see Bp. Lehtft. on 
Gal.i.12]; ὑπό twos, 2 Co. xi. 24; πῶς εἴληφας, how thou 
hast received by instruction in the gospel, i. e. hast learned, 
Rev. iii. 3. The verb λαμβάνω does not occur in the 
Epp. to the Thess., Philem., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude. 


511 





“αοδικεία 


[Come.: ἀνα-γ ἄντι-, συν-αντι- (μαι), ἀπο-; ἐπι-; kara-, μετα-, 
παρα-, συν-παρα-; προ-, προσ-, συν-γ συν-περι-»; ὑπο-λαμβάνω. 
Syn. see δέχομαι, fin.] 

Λάμεχ, 6, (Hebr. 327), Lamech, the father of Noah 
(Gen. v. 25 sqq.): Lk. iii. 36.* 

Aappa, see Naud. 

λαμπάς, -ddos, 7. (λάμπω, cf. our lamp), [fr. Aeschyl. 
and Thuc. down], Sept. for 72; 1. atorch: Rev. 
iv. 5 [where A. V. lamps]; viii. 10. 2. a lamp, the 
flame of which is fed with oil: Mt. xxv. 1, 3 sq. 7 sq.; Jn. 
xviii 3; Aetsxx.8. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlvi.; Eders- 
heim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 455 sqq.; Becker, Charicles, 
Sc. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 153).]* 

λαμπρός, -d, -óv, (λάμπω) ; a. shining; brilliant: 
ἀστήρ, Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. Il. 4, 77, ete.) ; clear, transpar- 
ent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V. 
gorgeous, bright (see below) |: ἐσθής, Lk. xxiii. 11; Acts 
x. 30; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; λίνον [L Tr WH λίθον], Rev. xv. 
6; βύσσινος, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumpt- 
uous) | things, i.e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and 
style, Rev. xviii. 14. The word is sometimes used of 
brilliant and glistening whiteness (hence λαμπρὰ τήβεννα, 
toga candida, Polyb. 10, 4, 8; 10,5, 1); accordingly the 
Vule. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by 
candidus; and some interpreters, following the Vulg. 
(“indutum veste alba”), understand ‘white apparel’ to 
be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see 
above) ]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans. vi. 104 ].* 

λαμπρότης, -jros, 7, brightness, brilliancy: τοῦ ἡλίου, 
Acts xxvi. 13. [From Hdt. (metaph.) down.]* 

λαμπρῶς, adv., splendidly, magnificently: of sumptuous 
living, Lk. xvi. 19. [From Aeschyl. down.]* 

AMápmo; fut. λάμψω (2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. T Tr WH)? 1 
aor. ἔλαμψα:; [fr. Hom. down]; to shine: Mt. v. 15 sq.; 
xvii. 2; Lk. xvii. 24; Acts xii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 6. [Come.: 
ἐκ-, περι-λάμπω.] * 

λανθάνω (lengthened form of λήθω) ; 2 aor. ἔλαθον, 
(whence Lat. latere) ; Sept. several times for n5j3, ete.; 
[fr. Hom. down]; to be hidden: Mk. vii. 24; Lk. viii. 47; 
τινά, to be hidden from one, Acts xxvi. 26; 2 Pet. iii. 5 
(on which see θέλω, 1 sub fin.), 8; acc. to the well- 
known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptep. 
i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. Matthiae 
ὃ 552 B.; Passow s. v. ii. p. 18°; [L. and S. s. v. A. 2]; 
W. § 54,4; [B. $ 144, 14]): ἔλαθον ξενίσαντες, have un- 
awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [Comp.: ἐκ-, ἐπι- 
(μαι).1" 

λαξευτός, -7, -óv, (fr. λαξεύω, and this fr. λᾶς a stone, 
and ξέω to polish, hew), cut out of stone: μνῆμα, Lk. xxiii. 
53, and thence in Evang. Nicod. c. 11 fin.; (once in 
Sept., Deut. iv. 49; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14; 
Deut. xxxiv. 1; [Josh. xiii. 20]; nowhere in Grk. auth.).* 

Λαοδικεία [-κία TWH (see I, ); R GL Tr accent 
-dixeca, cf. Chandler $ 104], -as. 7, Laodicea, a city of 
Phrygia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co- 
loss. After having been successively called Diospolis 
and Rhoas, it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice, 
the wife of Antiochus II. [B. c. 261-246]. It was de- 


Aaoébixets 


stroyed by an earthquake, A. n. 66 [or earlier, see Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 38 sq.], together 
with Coloss and Hierapolis (see Κολοσσαί) ; and after- 
wards rebuilt by Marcus Aurelius. It was the seat of a 
Christian church: Col. ii. 1; iv. 13, 15 sq. [(on the * Ep. 
to (or *from") the Laodiceans' see Bp. LgAtft. Com. 
τι. 5. pp. 274-300)]; Rey. i. 11; iii. 14, and in the [Rec.] 
subscription of the 1 Ep. to Tim. [See Bp. ZgAtft. Com. 
on Col. and Philem. Intr. $ 1; Forbiger, Hndbch. d. 
alten Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 347 sq.]* 

Aaobikets, -éos, ὁ, a Laodicean, inhabitant of Laodicea : 
Col. iv. 16, and Rec. in Rev. iii. 14.* 

λαός, -o0, ὁ, [(cf. Curtius § 535)]; Sept. more than 
fifteen hundred times for DY; rarely for *j and Ds); 
(fr. Hom. down]; people; 1. a people, tribe, nation, 
all those who are of the same stock and language : univ. 
of any people; joined with γλῶσσα, φυλή, ἔθνος, Rev. v. 
9; vii. 9; x. 11; xi. 9; xiii. 7 [Rec. om.]; xiv. 6; xvii. 15, 
(see γλῶσσα, 2); πάντες of λαοί, Lk. ii. 31; Ro. xv. 11; 
esp. of the people of Israel: Mt. iv. 23; xiii. 15; Mk. vii. 
6; Lk. ii. 10; Jn. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ἔθνος) ; 
xviii. 14; Acts iii. 23; Heb. ii. 17; vii.ll, etc.; with 
Ἰσραήλ added, Acts iv. 10; distinguished fr. τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, 
Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. λαοὶ Ἰσραήλ 
[R. V. the peoples of Is.] seems to be used of the tribes 
of the people (like oy, Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8; 
Is. iii. 13, ete.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap- 
parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ, 
cf. 25); oi πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3, 
47; xxvii. 1; of γραμματεῖς τοῦ λαοῦ, Mt. ii. 4; of πρῶτοι 
ToU λαοῦ, Lk. xix. 47; τὸ πρεσβυτέριον τοῦ λαοῦ, Lk. xxii. 
665 ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ, Acts iy. 8. with a gen. of the 
possessor, τοῦ θεοῦ, airo), μοῦ (i. e. τοῦ θεοῦ, Mebr. 
nmm oy, own Dy), the people whom God has chosen 
for himself, selected as peculiarly his own: Heb. xi. 25; 
Mt.ii.6; Lk.i.68; vii.16; without the art. Jude 5 (Sir. 
xlvi. 7; Sap. xviii. 13) ; cf. W. $19, 1; the name is trans- 
ferred to the community of Christians, as that which 
by the blessing of Christ has come to take the place of 
the theocratic people of Israel, Heb. iv. 9; Rev. xviii. 4; 
particularly to a church of Christians gathered from 
among the Gentiles, Acts xv. 14; Ro. ix. 25 sq.; 1 Pet. 
ii. 10; with eis περιποίησιν added, 1 Pet. ii. 9; περιού- 
ows, Tit. ii. 14, cf. Acts xviii. 10; Lk.i.17. ὁ λαός the 
people (of Israel) is distinguished from its princes and 
rulers [(1 Esdr. i. 10; v. 45; Judith viii. 9, 11; etc.)], 
Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xi. 32 [here WH Tr mrg. read ὄχλος] ; 
xiv. 2; Lk. xx. 19; xxii. 2; xxiii. 5; Acts v. 26, etc.; from 
the priests, Heb. v. 3; vii. 5, 27. 2. indefinitely, 
of a great part of the population gathered together any- 
where: Mt.xxvii.25; Lk.i.21; ii1.15; vii.1, 29; viii. 
47; ix. 13; xviii. 43, ete.; τὸ πλῆθος τοῦ λαοῦ, Lk. i. 10. 
[The Gospels of Mk. and Jn. use the word but three 
times each. Syn. see δῆμος, fin.] 

λάρυγξ, ~yyos, 6, the throat (Etym. Magn. [557, 16]: 
λάρυγξ μὲν SC οὗ λαλοῦμεν ... φάρυγξ δὲ δι’ οὗ ἐσθίομεν 
k. πίνομεν) : of the instrument or organ of speech (as 
Ps. v. 10; Prov. viii. 7; Sir. vi. 5 (4)), Ro. iii. 13, where 


912 





λατρεύω 


the meaning is, their speech threatens and imprecates 
destruction to others. (Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Galen, 
al.; Sept. several times for j03; oftener for 3n, the 
palate.) * 

Aacata, -as, ἡ, (Lchm.”A\aooa, Tr WH Λασέα [see 
WH. App. p. 160], Vulg. Thalassa), Laswa, Acts xxvii. 
8, acity of Crete not mentioned by any ancient geograph- 
ical or other writer. But this need not excite surprise, 
since probably it was one of the smaller and less impor- 
tant among the ninety or a hundred cities of the island; 
cf. Kuinoel ad loc. [Its site was discovered in 1856, 
some five miles to the E. of Fair Havens and close to 
Cape Leonda; see Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul, 
(3d ed. p. 259 sq.) 4th ed. p. 262 sq.; Alford, Grk. Test. 
vol. ii. Proleg. p. 27 sq.]* 

λάσκω: 1 aor. edaxnoa; (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sprehl. ii. p. 
233; Krüger ii. 1, p. 134; Kühner § 343, i. p. 858; 
[Veitch s. v.]; W. 88 (84)); 1. to crack, crackle, 
crash: Hom., Hes. Tragg., Arstph. 2. to burst 
asunder with a crack, erack open: Acts i. 18; ὃ δράκων 
φυσηθεὶς (after having sucked up the poison) ἐλάκησε 
καὶ ἀπέθανε καὶ ἐξεχύθη ὁ ids αὐτοῦ kai ἣ χολή, Act. 
Thomae ὃ 33, p. 219 ed. Tdf.* 

λατομέω. -@: 1 aor. ἐλατόμησα ; pf. pass. ptep. λελατο- 
μημένος ; (fr. λατόμος a stone-cutter, and this fr. λᾶς a 
stone, and τέμνω) ; to cut stones, to hew out stones: Mt. 
xxvii. 60; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for 23m; 
once for 1322, Ex. xxi. 33 sqq.; Diod., [Dion. H., Strab., 
al. (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Justin Mart.) * 

λατρεία, -as, 7, (λατρεύω, q. V-) ; 1. in Grk. auth. 
service rendered for hire; then any service or ministra- 
tion (Tragg., Plut., Leian.); the service of God: τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Plat. apol. 23 b. ; καταφυγεῖν πρὸς θεῶν εὐχάς τε kai 
λατρείας, ibid. Phaedr. p. 244 e. ; servitus religionis, quam 
λατρείαν Graeci vocant, August. civ. dei 5, 15. 2: 
in the Grk. Bible, the service or worship of God acc. to 
the requirements of the levitical law (Hebr. 172, Ex. xii. 
25 sq., etc.) : Ro. ix. 4; Heb. ix. 1, (1 Macc. ii. 19, 22); 
λατρείαν προσφέρειν τῷ θεῷ [to offer service to God] i. q. 
θυσίαν προσφέρειν els λατρείαν [to offer a sacrifice in 
service], Jn. xvi. 2; ἐπιτελεῖν τὰς λατρείας, to perform the 
sacred services (see ἐπιτελέω, 1), spoken of the priests, 
Heb. ix. 6; univ. of any worship of God, ἡ λογικὴ A. Ro. 
xii.1 [ef. W. § 59,9 a.]; (of the worship of idols, 1 Mace. 
i. 43).* 

λατρεύω; fut. λατρεύσω; 1 aor. ἐλάτρευσα; (λάτρις a 
hireling, Lat. /atro in Enn. and Plaut.; Aárpov hire); 
in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. fo 
serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of 
slaves and of freemen; in the N. T. to render religious 
service or homage, to worship, (Hebr. 12), Deut. vi. 13; 
x. 12; Josh. xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, λατρ. θεῷ: Mt. 
iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7; 
xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix.14; Rev. vii.15; xxii. 3; 
of the worship of idols, Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx. 
5; xxii. 24; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the 


| manner of worshipping are these: θεῷ [so R G]Aarpeóew 


πνεύματι (dat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3, 


λάχανον 


but LT Tr WH have correctly restored πνεύματι θε οὔ, 
i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that 
the dat. of the pers. (τῷ θεῷ) is suppressed; ἐν τῷ πνεύ- 
pati μου ἐν τῷ evayy., in my spirit in delivering the glad 
tidings, Ro. i.9; τῷ θεῷ ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει, 2 Tim. i. 3; 
μετὰ αἰδοῦς καὶ εὐλαβείας or [so 1, T Tr WH] per εὐλαβ. 
x. δέους, Heb. xii. 28; ἐν ὁσιότητι x. δικαιοσύνῃ, Lk. i. 74; 
(without the dat. θεῷ) νηστείαις x. δεήσεσι, Lk. ii. 37; 
λατρεύειν, absol., to worship God [cf. W. 593 (552)], Acts 
xxvi 7. in the strict sense; to perform sacred services, 
to offer gifts, to worship God in the observance of the rites 
instituted for his worship: absol, Heb. ix. 9; x. 25 spec. 
of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office: 
with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is 
rendered, Heb. viii. 5; xiii. 10. [(Eur., al.) ]* 

λάχανον, -ov, τό, (fr. Nayaivw to dig; hence herbs:grown 
on land cultivated by digging; garden-herbs, as opp. to 
wild plants); any potherb, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 33; Mk. 
iv. 32; Lk. xi.42; Ro. xiv. 2. (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 2; Gen. 
ix. 3; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2, etc. 5; Arstph., Plat., Plut., 
als) 

AcBBaios, see Θαδδαῖος. 

λεγεών and (so T, Tr [but not in Mt. xxvi. 53], WH 
[see fin.], also Lehm. in Mk. v. 9, 15) λεγιών (cf. T'df. ed. 
7 Proleg. p. 1.; [esp. ed. 8 p. 83; B. 16 (15)]; so, too, 
in inserr. in Boeckh; [Diod., Plut., al. ]), -àvos, ἡ, (a Lat. 
word), a legion (a body of soldiers whose number differed 
at different times, and in the time of Augustus seems to 
have consisted of 6826 men [i. e. 6100 foot, and 726 
horse]): Mt. xxvi. 53; Mk. v. 9, 15; Lk. viii. 30 [here 
WH (ex errore?) λεγίων (cf. Chandler 8 593)].* 

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and 
pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 
56 Tdf. [cf. ἔχω, init.]); I. in its earliest use in 
Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; cf. J. G. Mül- 
ler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius 
§ 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, 
gather; to pick out. 2. to lay with, count with; to enu- 
merate, recount, narrate, describe; [cf. Eng. tale, Germ. 
zühlen ]. II. to put word to word in speaking, join 
words together, i. e. /o say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see 
under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in Il. 2, 222 
[yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48,2; L. and S. 
s. v. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. 
use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 
8; often also for DN) (saying, dictum); very rarely for 
537; and so in N. T. 1. univ. a. absol. to speak: 
Acts xiii. 15; xxiv. 10; to say, foll. by direct dise., Mt. ix. 
34; xii. 44; xvi. 2 [here T br. WH reject the pass.]; Mk. 
iii. 30; Lk. v. 39 [WH br. the cl.]; Jn.i.29,38; [1 Co. 
xii. 3 L T Tr WH]; Jas. iv. 13, and very often; the di- 
rect discourse is preceded by ὅτε recitative, Mt. ix. 18 [T 
om. ὅτι]: Mk. i. 15 [Tom. WH br. Aéy.]; ii. 12 [L and 
WH br. Méy.]; iii. 21 sq.; v. 28; vi. 14 sq. 35; vii. 20; Lk. 
i.24; iv. 41 ; xvii. 105 Jn. vi. 14; vii. 12; viii. 33; ix. 9, 
41; xvi. 17; Acts ii. 13; xi. 3; Heb. x. 8; Rev. iii. 17, 
ete.; foll. by ace. with inf Lk. xi. 18; xxiv. 23; Jn. xii. 
29; Actsiv.32; xxviii. 6, ete.; foll. by ὅτι, Lk. xxii. 70; 


913 





ee 
Jn. viii. 48; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. iv. 1, (for other exx. see 
2 a. below); foll. by an indir. question, Mt. xxi. 27; . 
Mk. xi. 33; Lk. xx. 8. b. The N. T. writers, par- 
ticularly the historical, are accustomed to add the verb 
λέγειν foll. by direct disc. to another verb which already 
contains the idea of speaking, or which states an opin- 
ion concerning some person or thing; as τὸ pyOév... 
προφήτου λέγοντος, Mt. ii. 17; viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 355 
κηρύσσων x. [LT WII om. Tr br. kai] λέγων, Mt. iii. 2; 
κράζειν καὶ λέγειν, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk. 
iv. 41 [here L T Tr mrg. «pavyá(ew]; Acts xiv. 15; zpoa- 
φωνεῖν x. λέγειν, Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32; ἀπεκρίθη xal 
λέγει, Mk. vii. 28; αἰνεῖν τ. θεὸν x. λέγειν, Lk. ii. 13; 
“γογγύζειν x. λέγειν, Jn. vi. 42. to verbs of speaking, 
judging, ete., and those which denote in general the 
nature or the substance of the discourse reported, 
the ptep. λέγων is added (often so in Sept. for *oN3 
[W. 535 sq. (499), cf. 602 (560)]) foll. by direct disc. : 
ἀπεκρίθη λέγων, Mt. xxv. 9, 44 sq.; Mk. ix. 38 [T WH 
om. λέγων]; Acts xv. 135 Rev. vii. 13, etc. (see dzoxpt- 
νομαι, 1 c.); εἶπε À., Mk. [viii. 28 T WH Tr mre.]; xii. 
26; Lk. xx. 2, (in Grk. writ. ἔφη λέγων) ; ἐλάλησε λέγων 
(see λαλῶ, 5); ἐμαρτύρησε, Jn. i. 32; κέκραγε A. ib. 15; 
ἐδίδασκε A. Mt. v. 2; [ἐβόησε or] ἀνεβόησε X., Mt. xxvii. 
46; Lk. ix. 38; ἀνέκραξε À., Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34 [T 
WH om. Tr br. Aéy.]; also after ᾷδειν, Rev. v. 9; xv. 3; 
αἴρειν [or ἐπαίρ.] φωνήν, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts xiv. 11; θαυ- 
μάζειν, Mt. viii. 27; ix. 33; xxi. 20; after προφητεύειν, 
Mt. xv. 7; γογγύζειν, Mt. xx. 12; εἶπεν ἐν παραβολαῖς, 
Mt. xxii. 1; παρέθηκε παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24; διεμαρτύ- 
paro, Heb. ii. 6; ἐπήγγελται, Heb. xii. 26, and a great 
many other exx. It is likewise added to verbs of every 
kind which denote an act conjoined with speech; as 
ἐφάνη, φαίνεται λέγων, Mt. i. 20; ii.13; προσεκύνει λέγων, 
Mt. viii. 25 ix. 18; xiv. 33; xv. 25; add, Mt. viii. 8; ix. 
29; xiv.15; Mk.v. 35; Lk.i.66; v. 85 viii. 38; x.17; 
xv. 9; xviii. 3; xix. 18; Acts viii. 10, 18 sq.; xii. 7; 
xxvii. 23 sq. 1 Co. xi. 25, ete. On the other hand, the 
verb Aéyo in its finite forms is added to the participles 
of other verbs: Mt. xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 12; xiv. 45, 63, 
67; xv. 35; Lk. vi. 20; Jn.i. 36; ix. 8; Acts ii. 18; 
Heb. viii. 8; ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει, Mk. viii. 29; ix. 5,19; x, 
24,51; xi. 22, 32[L Tr mrg. br. T Tr WH om. az.] ; Lk. 
ii. 11; xi. 45; xiii. S, (nowhere so in Acts. nor in Mt. 
nor in Jn.); κράξας λέγει, Mk. v. 7 [Rec. εἶπε] ; ix. 24. 
ἔγραψε λέγων (TIN? JAD, 2 Ie x36: 918 x» 15: ete.), 
he wrote in these words, or he wrote these words [. A. V. 
retains the idiom, he wrote saying (cf. e. below)]: Lk. 
i 63; 1 Mace. viii. 31; xi. 57; Joseph. antt. 11, 2, 
2; 13,4, 1; exx. fr. the Syriae are given by Gesenius in 
Rosenmiiller’s Repertor. i.p. 135. ἔπεμψε or ἀπέστειλε 
λέγων, i. e. he ordered it to be said by a messenger: Mt. 
xxii 16; xxvii. 19; Lk. vii. 19sq.; xix. 14; Jn. xi, 8: 
Acts xiii. 15; xvi. 35, (see in εἶπον, 3 b.) ; otherwise in 
Mt. xxi. 37; Mk. xii. 6. C. ἡ φωνὴ λέγουσα: Mt. iii. 
17; xvii. 5; Lk. iii. 22 [G LT Tr WH om. Aéy.] ; Rev. 
vi. 6; x. 4, 8; xii. 10; xiv. 13, ete. λέγειν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ; 
Rev. v. 12; viii. 13; ἐν φωνῇ p. ib. xiv. 7, 9. d. In 


λέγω 


accordance with the Hebr. conception which regards 
thouzht as internal speech (see εἶπον, 5), we find λέγειν 
ἐν ἑαυτῷ, to say within one’s self, i. e. to think with one's 
self: Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; Lk. iii. 8; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, 
Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said to speak, λέγειν, not only 
when he uses language orally, but also when he ex- 
presses himself in writing {(cf. b. sub fin.)]: 2 Co. vii. 
3; viii. 8; ix. 3, 4; xi. 16, 21; Phil. iv. 11, and often in 
Paul; so of the writers of the O. T.: Ro. x. 16, 20; xi. 9; 
xv. 12; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Ro. iv. 35 x. 115 xi. 25 Jas. ii. 23, 
ete.; and simply λέγει, se. ἡ λέγουσα, i. 6. ἡ γραφή (our it is 
said): Ro.xv. 10, [11 L Tr mrg.]; Gal. iii. 16; Eph. iv. 
8; v. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and 588 (547); B. ὃ 129, 
16; λέγει; sc. ὁ θεός, 2 Co. vi. 2; λέγει Aavid ἐν ψαλμῷ," 
Acts xiii. 35; λέγει ὁ θεός, Heb. v. 6; 'ev τῷ ‘Qoné, Ro. 
ix. 25; ἐν Ἡλίᾳ, Ro. xi. 2; ἐν Δαυΐδ, Heb. iv. 7; λέγει 
τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, Heb. iii. 7; ὁ νόμος λέγει, 1 Co. xiv. 
_ 84; τί, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 19. f. λέγειν is used of 
every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix. 
14; xv.1; xvii. 25; xviii. 1; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq.; Lk. 
iv. 22+ vii. 20; Jn. vii. 11; ix. 10; xix. 10; Ro. x. 18 
sq.; xi. 1, 11, etc.; foll. by ei interrog. [see ei, IT. 2], Acts 
xxi. 37; λέγει τις, i. q- one bids the question be asked, 
Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11; of reply, Mt. xvii. 25; xx. 
7; Mk. viii. 24 [L mrg. εἶπεν ; Jn. i. 21; xviii 17; of 
acclaim, Rev.iv. 8, 10; of exclamation, Rev. xviii. 
10, 16; of entreaty, Mt. xxv. 11; Lk. xiii. 25; i.q. 
to set forth in language, make plain, Heb. v. 11. g. 
λέγω w. ace. of the thing. to say a thing: 6, Lk. ix. 33 (i. 
e. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate 
or not); Lk. xxii. 60; to express in words, Philem. 21 ; 
τοῦτο, Jn. viii. 6; xii. 33; τοιαῦτα, lleb. xi. 14; ταῦτα, 
Lk. vii. 8; xi 27,45; xiii. 17; Jn. v. 34; Acts xiv, 
18; 1 Co. ix. 8; τάδε (referring to what follows), Acts 
xxi 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7,14; τέ, what? Ro. 
x. 8; xi. 4; Gal. iv. 30; 1 Co. xiv. 16; πολλά, Jn. xvi. 
12; τὰ λεγόμενα, Lk. xviii.34; Acts xxviii. 24: Heb. viii. 
1; ὑπό twos, Acts viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LT Tr WII AaXov- 
μένοις}: xxvii. 11; λέγω ἀλήθειαν, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; Ro. 
ix. 1; 1 Tim. ii. 7; ἀληθῆ, Jn. xix. 35; ἀνθρώπινον, Ro. 
vi. 19; σὺ λέγεις, sc. αὐτό, prop. thou sayest, i. e. thou 
grantest what thou askest, equiv. to it is justas thou sayest ; 
to be sure, certainly, [see εἶπον, 1 c.]: Mt. xxvii. 11; Mk. 
xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3, cf. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 37, [(all these 
pass. WH mrg. punctuate interrogatively)]; παραβολήν, 
to put forth, Lk. xiv. 7; τὸ αὐτό, to profess one and the 
same thing, 1 Co. i. 10 cf. 12. h. with dat. of the 
pers. to whom anything is said: foll. by direet discourse, 
Mt. viii. 20; xiv. 4; xviii. 32; xix. 10; Mk. ii. 17, 27; 
vii. 9; viii. 1; Jn. i. 43 (44); ii. 10, and scores of other 
exx. ; λέγειν τινί - κύριε, κύριε, to salute any one as lord, 
Mt. vii. 21; impv. Aéye por, Acts xxii. 27 (generally 
εἶπέ pot, ἡμῖν) ; plur. Lk. x. 9; ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, I solemnly 
declare to you, (in the Gospels of Mt. Mk. and Lk.) ; for 
which the Greek said ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας λέγω ὑμῖν, Lk. iv. 25, 
and λέγω ὑμῖν ἀληθῶς. ib. ix. 27; in Jn. everywhere 
[twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] ἀμὴν 
ἀμὴν λέγω cot (ὑμῖν), I most solemnly declare to thee 


914 











λέγω 


(you), i. 51 (52); iii. 11, ete.; with the force of an 
asseveration λέγω τινί, without dujv: Mt. xi. 22; 
xii. 36; xxiii. 89; Lk. vii. 9, 28; x. 12; xii. 8; xvii. $4; 
xviii. 8,145 vai λέγω ὑμῖν, Mt.xi.9; Lk. vii. 26; xi. 51; 
xii. 5; λέγω oot, Lk. xii. 59. with a dat. of the thing, 
in the sense of commanding (see 2 c. below), Mt. 
xxi. 19; Lk. xvii. 6; inthesense of asking, implor- 
ing, Lk.xxiig0; Rev.vi.16. λέγω τινί τι; to tell a thing 
lo one: Mt. x. 27; 2 Th. ii. 5; τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Jn. xvi. 7; 
μυστήριον, 1 Co. xv. 51; παραβολήν, Lk. xviii. 1; of a 
promise, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6; i. q. to unfold, ex- 
plain, Mk. x. 32 ; foll. by indireet dise., Mt. xxi. 27 ; Mk: 
xi. 33; Lk. xx. 8; τινί τινα, to speak to one about one, 
Jn. viii. 27; Phil. iii. 18. i. Aéyo foll. by preposi- 
tions: πρός τινα, which denotes — either to one (equiv. to 
the dat.): foll. by direct dise., Mk. iv. 41; x. 26; Lk. 
Vill. 25% ix. 29; xvi. 15 πὶ 11: δ. 11:45 3v. 1155 evi. δ. 
viii. 31; Acts ii. 7 [R G], 12; xxviii. 4, 17; foll. by ὅτι 
recitative, Lk. iv. 21; πρός τινά τι, Lk. xi. 53 RG L Tr 
mrg.; xxiv 10;— oras respects one, in reference to one [ef. 
B.8133,3; W. $31,5; 405 (378); Krüger § 48, 7, 13; 
Bleek on Heb. i. 7: Meyer on Ro. x. 21]: Lk. xii. 41; 
Heb. i. 7, [al. add 8, 13; vii.21]; μετά τινος, to speak 
with one, Jn. xi. 56; περί τινος, of, concerning, one [cf. 
W. § 47, 4], Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. i. 47 (48); ii. 21; xi. 13; 
xiii. 18, 22; Heb. ix. 5; περί twos, ὅτι, Lk. xxi. 5; τὶ 
περί τινος, Jn.i. 22; ix. 17; Acts viii. 34 ; Tit. ii. 8; rut 
περί τινος, Mt. xi. 7; Mk.i. 30; viii. 30 [Lchm. εἴπωσιν ; 
πρός τινα περί τινος, Lk. vii. 24; ὑπέρ τινος, to speak for, 
on behalf of, one, to defend one, Acts xxvi. 1 [L T Tr 
WH mre. περί]; ἐπί twa, to speak in reference to, of 
[see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. yy.; B. § 147, 23], one, Heb. vii. 13 ; 
cis τινα (τὶ βλασφημῶν), against one, Lk. xxii. 65; in 
speaking to have reference to one, speak with respect to 
one, Acts ii. 25 [ef. W. 397 (371)]; in speaking to refer 
(athing) to one, with regard to, Eph. v. 32; eis τὸν κόσμον, 
to the world (see eis, A. I. 5 b.), Jn. viii. 26 [L T Tr WH 
λαλῶ]. k. with adverbs, or with phrases having ad- 
verbial force: καλῶς, rightly, In. viii.48; xiii.13; ὡσαύ- 
tos, Mk. xiv. 31; τὶ κατὰ συγγνώμην, ἐπιταγήν, by way of 
advice [concession (see συγγνώμη)], by way of command, 
1 Co. vii. 6; 2 Co. viii. 8; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον [see ἄνθρωπος, 
1 c.], Ro. iii. 5; Gal. iii. 15; 1 Co.ix. 8; Λυκαονιστί, Acts 
xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where 
it is used, λέγω, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi- 
cally a. i. q. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain: 
foll. by an ace. with inf., Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. xii. 18; Lk. 
xx. 41; xxiii 2; xxiv. 23; Acts v. 36; viii 9; xvii. 7; 
xxviii.6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ii 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9; 
with the included idea of insisting on, περιτέμνεσθαι (that 
you must be [cf. W. $ 44, 3 b.; B. $ 141, 2]), Acts xv. 
24 Rec. ; with the simple inf. without a subject-ace., Lk. 
xxiv. 23; Jas. ii. 14; 1 Jn.ii. 6, 9; foll. by ὅτι (where 
the ace. with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10; 
Mk. ix. 11; xii.35; Lk.ix. 7; Jn.iv. 20; xii. 34; 1 Co. 
xv. 12; λέγω τινὶ ὅτι etc. to declare to one that ete. [cf. B. 
$141,1]: Mt.iii.9; v. 20,22; xii. 36; xiii. 17; xvii. 12; 
xxi. 43 [WH mrg. om. ὅτε] : xxvi. 21; Mk. ix. 13; xiv. 18, 


λεῖμμα 


25, 30; Lk. 111. 8; x.12; xiii. 35 [Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι; 
xiv. 24; xviii. 8; xix. 26, 40 [WH txt. om. Tr br. ὅτι]; 
XXL. 33 xxii. 16, 37, etc.; Jn. iii. 11; v. 24sq.; viii. 34; 
x. 7 [Tr WH om. Lbr. ὅτι]; xvi. 20; Gal. v. 2; λέγω 
τινά, ὅτι, by familiar attraction [cf. W. § 66, 5a.; B. 
§ 151, 1] for λέγω, ὅτι τις: Jn. viii. 54; ix.19; x. 36 
(where for ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι οὗτος, Ov . . . ἀπέστειλε, βλα- 
σφημεῖ; the indirect discourse passes into the direct, and 
βλασφημεῖς is put for βλασφημεῖ [B. $ 141, 1]). b. 
i. q. to teach: with dat. of pers. foll. by direct disc., 1 Co. 
vii. 8, 12; τί tem, Jn. xvi. 12; Actsi. 3; τοῦτο foll. by 
ori, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to command, 
direct: with an acc. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46; λέγουσι (sc. 
αὐτά) k. ov ποιοῦσιν, Mt. xxiii. 3; τί τινι, Mk. xiii. 37; 
Jn. ii. 5; τινί foll. by an imperative, Mt. v. 44; Mk. ii. 
11; Lk: vii. 14; xi. 9; xii.4; xvi.9; Jn.n.8; xiii. 29; 
1 Co. vii. 12; Aéyo with an inf. of the thing to be done 
or to be avoided [cf. W. $ 44, 3 b.; B. $ 141, 2]: Mt. 
v. 34, 39; Acts xxi. 4, 21; Ro.ii.22; xii. 3; foll by 
iva, Acts xix. 4; περί τινος (gen. of the thing) foll. by 
iva, 1 Jn. v. 16, (see tva, IT. 2 b.); foll. by μή with subjunc. 
2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of asking, seeking, entreating : 
with dat. of pers. foll. by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15; 2 Co. 
vi. 13; foll. by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.) ; B. u. s.], Rev. 
x. 9 [Rec. impv.]. χαίρειν τινὶ λέγω, to give one a greet- 
ing, bid him welcome, salute him, 2 Jn. 10 sq. (see χαίρω, 
fin.). ἃ. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean 
to say, (often so in Grk. writ.; ef. Passow s. v. p. 30°; 
[L. and S. s. v. C. 10]) : τινά, Mk. xiv. 71; “Jn. vi. 71; 
τί, 1 Co. x. 29; τοῦτο foll. by direct dise., Gal. iii. 17; 
τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. i. 12. e. to call by a name, to 
call, name; i. q. καλῶ τινα with acc. of pred.: τί pe λέγεις 
ἀγαθόν; Mk.x.18; Lk.xviii. 19; add, Mk. xii. 37; Jn. v. 
18; xv.15; Actsx.28; [1 Co. xii. 3 RG]; Rev. ii. 20; 
pass. with predicate nom.: Mt. xiii. 55; 1 Co. viii. 5 ; 
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 4; Heb. xi. 24; ὁ λεγόμενος, with 
pred. nom. he that is surnamed, Mt. i. 16 (so xxvii. diy 
x. 2; Jn. xx. 24; Col. iv. 11; he that is named: Mt. ix. 
9; xxvi.3, 14; xxvii. 16; Mk.xv. 7; Lk. xxii. 47; Jn. 
ix. 11; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 31 sq.; of things, places, 
cities, ete. : τὸ ὄνομα λέγεται, Rev. viii. 11; ptep. called, 
Mt. ii. 23; xxvi 36; xxvii. 33; Jn. iv. 5; xi. 54; xix. 
13; Aetsiii.2; vi. 9; Heb. ix.3; with ἑβραϊστί added, 
Jn. xix. 13, 17; [οι v. 2 Tdf.]; applied to foreign words 
translated into Greek, in the sense that is: Mt. xxvii. 
33; ὅπ. ἵν. 25; xi. 16; xxi. 2; also ὃ λέγεται, Jn. xx. 16; 
ὃ λέγεται ἑρμηνευόμενον [L Tr W H pe6epp. ], Jn. i. 38 (39); 
διερμην. λέγεται, Acts ix. 36. f. to speak out, speak 
of, mention: τί, Eph. v. 12 (with which cf. ὀκνῶ καὶ λέγειν, 
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 c.); [Mk. vii. 36 T Trtxt. WH. On 
the apparent ellipsis of Aéyo in 2 Co. ix. 6, cf. W. 596 


sq. (555); B. 394 (338). Comp.: ἀντι-, δια- (-pat), ἐκ-," 


ἐπι-, kara-, mapa- (-pat), προ-, συλ-λέγω ; cf. the catalosue 
of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1, 60.] 
λεῖμμα [WIT λίμμα, see their App. p. 154 and ef. I, c], 
-ros, τό, (λείπω), a remnant: Ro.xi.5. (Hdt. 1, 119; 
Plut. de profect. in virtut. c. 5; for mw, 2 K. xix. 4)* 
λεῖος, -e(a, -eiov, [(cf. Lat. levis)], smooth, level: opp. 


915 





λευτουργία 


to τραχύς, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. χ]. 4 Alex.; Prov. ii. 
20; 158. xvii. 40; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

λείπω; [2 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. λίπη, Tit. iii. 13 TWH 
mrg.; pres. pass. λείτομαι; fr. Hom. down]; dz 
trans. to leave, leave behind, forsake; pass. to be left be- 
hind (prop. by one’s rival in a race, hence), a. to 
lag, be inferior: ἐν μηδενί, Jas. i. 4 (Hdt. 7, 8, 1); [al. 
associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be 
destitute of, to lack: with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5; ii. 
15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be wanting or 
absent, to fail: λείπει τί τινι, Lk. xviii. 22; Tit. iii. 13, 
(Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al); τὰ λείποντα, the things that re- 
main [so Justin Mart. apol. 1, 52, ef. 32; but al. are 
wanting], Tit.i.5. [Comp.: ἀπο-, δια-, éx-, em, κατα-, 
€v-KaTa-, περι-; ὑπο-λείπω. * 

λειτουργέω, ptep. λειτουργῶν: 1 aor. inf. λειτουργῆσαι; 
(fr. λειτουργός, q. ν.); 1. in Attic, esp. the orators, 
to serve the state at one’s own cost; to assume an office 
which must be administered at one’s own expense; to dis- 
charge a public office at one's own cost; to render public 
service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes. 
August. p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat. ed. Bindseil (post 
Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and FF. Francke, Conf. Luth., 
Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1846)]; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p. 
Ixxxv. sqq.; Bóckh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 sqq. ; 
Liibker, Reallex. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Dict. of 
Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] s. v. λειτουργία). 2. univ. 
to do a service, perform a work; Vulg. ministro, [ A. V. 
to minister]; a. of the priests and Levites who were 
busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the 
temple (so Sept. often for Nw; as Num. xviii. 2; Ex. 
xxviii. 31, 39; xxix. 30; Joeli. 9, ete.; several times for 
3723j, Num. iv. 37, 39; xvi.9; xviii. 6 sq. ; add, Sir. iv. 14 
[xlv. 15; 1. 14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 Mace. x. 42; [Philo, 
vit. Moys. iii. 18; cf. ὑμῖν λειτουργοῦσι k. αὐτοὶ τὴν Aet- 
Tovpyíav τῶν προφητῶν x. διδασκάλων (of bishops and 
deacons), Teaching of the Twelve A post. c. 15 (cf. Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 etc.) ]) : Heb. x. 11. b. A. τῷ κυρίῳ, 
of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by 
instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in 
some other way: Acts xiii. 2; ef. De Wette adloc. ο. 
of those who aid others with their resources, and re- 
lieve their poverty: τινὶ ἔν ru, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25.* 

λειτουργία. -as, 7, (fr. Necroupyéa, 4. v.) ; 1. prop. 
a public office which a citizen undertakes to administer at 
his own expense: Plat. legg.12 p.949 c.; Lys. p. 163, 22; 
Isocr. p. 391 d.; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5; 23 (29), 4, 
and others. 2. univ. any service: of military ser- 
vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1,63. 73; of the service of work- 
men, e. 21; of that done to nature in the cohabitation 
of man and wife, Aristot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343°, 20. 3. in 
biblieal Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests 
relative to the prayers and sacrifices offered to God: Lk. i. 
23; Heb. viii. 6; ix. 21, (for rrn2y , Num. viii. 22; xvi. 9; 
xviii.4; 2 Chr. xxxi. 2; Diod. 1, 21; Joseph.; [Philo de 
caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al; see Soph. Lex. s. v.]); hence 
the phrase in Phil. ii. 17, explained s. v. θυσία, b. fin. 
[(cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44)]. b. a 


λειτουργικός 


gift or benefaction, for the relief of the needy (see λει- 
roupyew, 2 c.): 2 Co. ix. 12; Phil. ii. 30.* 

Aevrovpytkós, -7, -dv, (λειτουργία), relating to the perform- 
ance of service, employed in ministering: σκεύη, Num. iv. 
[12], 26, ete.; orodai, Ex. xxxi. 10, etc. ; πνεύματα, of 
angels executing God's behests, Heb. i. 14; also αἱ Aer. 
TOU θεοῦ δυνάμεις. Ienat. ad Philad. 9 (longer recension) ; 
τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος τῶν ἀγγέλων αὐτοῦ, πῶς τῷ θελήματι αὐτοῦ 
λειτουργοῦσι παρεστῶτες, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 5, cf. 
Dan. (Theodot.) vii. 10. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

Aevrovpyós, -ov, ὁ. (fr. EPTQ i. e. ἐργάζομαι, and unused 
λεῖτος i. q. λήϊτος equiv. to δημόσιος public, belonging to 
the state (Hesych.), and this from λεώς Attic for Aaós), 
Sept. for Nw (Piel ptep. of Nw); 1. a public 
minister; a servant of the state: τῆς πόλεως, Inserr.; of 
the lictors, Plut. Rom. 26; (it has not yet been found in 
its primary and proper sense, of one who at Athens as- 
sumes a public oflice to be administered at his own ex- 
pense [cf. L. and S. s. v. 1.1: see λειτουργέω). 2: 
univ. a minister, servant: so of military laborers, often 
in Polyb.; of the servants of a king, 1 K. x. 5; Sir. x. 2; 
[of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2 S. xiii. 18 (cf. 17)]; 
of the servants of the priests, joined with ὑπηρέται, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 2, 73; τῶν ἁγίων. of the temple, i. e. one busied 
with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, cf. [ Philo, alleg. 
leg. iii. $8 46]; Neh. x. 39; Sir. vii. 30; τῶν θεῶν, of 
heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.417 a.; 
ἸΙησοῦ Χριστοῦ. of Paul likening himself to a priest, Ro. 
xv. 16; plur. τοῦ θεοῦ, those by whom God administers 
his affairs and executes his decrees; so of magistrates, 
Ro. xiii. 6; of angels, Heb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [cf. 
Philo de caritat. § 3]; τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, those whose 
ministry the grace of God made use of for proclaiming 
to men the necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah: 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. c. 7; τὸν ἀπόστολον kai Aet- 
Toupyov ὑμῶν τῆς χρείας pov, by whom ye have sent to 
me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil. 
ne epee 

[λεμά, see Aaya. | 

λέντιον, -ov, τό, (a Lat. word, linteum), a linen cloth, 
towel (Arr. peripl. mar. rubr. 4): of the towel or apron, 
which servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig. 
26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq.; with which it was supposed the 
nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was cov- 
ered, Ev. Nicod. c. 10; cf. Thilo, Cod. A poer. p. 582 sq.* 

λεπίς, -ίδος. ἡ, (λέπω to strip off the rind or husk, to 
peel to scale), a scale: Actsix.18. (Sept.; Aristot. al. 
[ef. Hdt. 7, 61].)* 

λέπρα, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. λεπρός, q. v.), Hebr. Nyy, 
leprosy [lit. morbid scaliness], a most offensive, annoy- 
ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which 
generally pervades the whole body; common in Ezypt 
and the East (Lev. xiii. sq.): Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42; Lk. 
Y. 12 sq. (Hdt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf Orelli 
in Herzog 2 s. v. Aussatz; Greenhill in Bible Educator 
iv. 76 sq. 174 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; Eders- 
heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 sqq.; McCl. and S. s. v.]* 


376 





λευκός 


τό, a scale, husk, bark); 1. in Grk. writ. scaly, 
rough. 2. specifically, leprous, affected with leprosy, 
(Sept. several times for y sp and yy»; [Theophr. 
c. p. 2, 6, 4] see λέπρα) : Mt. viii. 2; x. 8; xi. 5; Mk. i. 
40; Lk.iv.27; vii. 22; xvii. 125 of one [(Simon)] who 
had formerly been a leper, Mt. xxvi. 6; Mk. xiv. 3.* 

λεπτός. -7, -óv, (Aéro to strip off the bark, to peel), 
thin; small; τὸ λεπτόν, a very small brass coin, equiv. to 
the eighth part of an as, [ A. V. a mite; cf. Alex.'s Kitto 
and B.D. s. v. ; cf. F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, 
iii. 179]: Mk. xii. 42; Lk. xii. 59; xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp. 
1, 9 adds κέρμα; Pollux, onom. 9, 6, sect. 92, supplies 
νόμισμα)" 

Aet and Λευΐς (T Tr (yet see below) WH Λευείς [but 
Lehm. -is; see et, ε7). gen. Λευΐ (T Tr WII Aevet), acc. 
Aeviy (T WH Λευείν, so Tr exc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21 
(19); W. $ 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. 19 a joining, fr. m9, cf. 
Gen. xxix. 34), Levi ; 1. the third son of the patri- 
arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of 
Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5, 9; [ Rev. vii. 
1]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ's ancestors : 
Lk. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor 
of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alphzus, a col- 
lector of customs [(A. V. publican)]: Mk. ik 14 [here 
WH (rejected) mrg. Ἰάκωβον (see their note ad loc., cf. 
Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)]; Lk. v. 27, 29; 
acc. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the 
apostle (Mt. ix. 9); but cf. Grimm in the Theol. Stud. 
u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq.; [their identity is denied 
also by Nicholson on Matt. ix. 9; yetsee Patritius, De 
Evangeliis, l. i.c. i. quaest. 1; Venables in Alex.’s Kitto, ° 
s. v. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. $ 1].* 

Acvirns (T WH Λευείτης [so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36; see 
et,t]),-ov,6,a Levite; 8. oneof Levi's posterity. ^ b. 
in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr. 
32 23, m5) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for 
whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as- 
sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the 
sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the 
sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temple, 
to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other 
things; so Lk. x. 32; Jn. i. 19; Actsiv. 36; [(Plut. quaest. 
conv. l. iv. quaest. 6, 5; Philo de vit. Moys. i. $58). See 
BB.DD. s. v. Levites; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed. 
p. 63 sqq.]* 

Acvirixés [T WH Aevetr.; see et, c], τή, τόν, Levitical, 
pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit. 
Moys. iii. $ 20.]* 

λευκαίνω: 1 aor. ἐλεύκανα [cf. W. $ 13, 1 d.; D. 41 
(35)]: (λευκός) : fr. Hom. down; Sept. for r2; to 
whiten, make white: ri, Mk. ix. 3; Rev. vii. 14.* 

[λευκοβύσσινον : Rev. xix. 14 WH mrg., al. βύσσινον 
Aevk. see in βύσσινος.] 

λευκός, -7, -óv, (λεύσσω to see, behold, look at; akin to 
Lat. luceo, Germ. leuchten; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87; 
[Vanitek p. 817]), Sept. for 125; 1. light, bright, 


brilliant: và ἱμάτια . . . λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς. Mt. xvii. 2; esp. 





λεπρός, -οὔ, 6, (as if for λεπερός. fr. λεπίς, λέπος -eos, | bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white: 


λέων 


spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted 
to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi.5; Lk. 
ix. 29; Actsi.10; Rev. iii.5; iv.4; vi.11; vii. 9,13; 
xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive 
and state occasions, Eccles. ix. 8; ef. Heindorf on Hor. 
sat. 2, 2, 61); with ὡσεὶ or ὡς ὁ χιών added: Mk. ix. 3 
RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, (Gor λευκότεροι χιόνος, Hom. Il. 10, 
431); ἐν λευκοῖς sc. ἱματίοις (added in Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4), 
Jn. xx. 12; Rev. iii. 4; cf. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]; 
used of white garments as the sign of innocence and purity 
of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx. 
11. 2. (dead) white: Mt. v. 36 (opp. to μέλας) ; 
Rev. i. 14; ii. 17; iv.4; vi. 2; xiv. 14; xix. 11; spoken 
of the whitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.* 

λέων, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for “8, 7.78, 
"5D (a young lion), ete.; alion; a. prop.: Heb. xi. 
33; 1 Pet. v.8; Rev. iv. 7; ix. 8, 17; x. 85 xiii. 2. b. 
metaph. ἐρρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος, I was rescued out 
of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 17 (the 
fi. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole 
phrase); equiv. to a brave and mighty hero: Rev. v. 5, 
where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9; cf. Nah. ii. 13.* 

λήθη. -ης. 7. (λήθω to escape notice, λήθομαι to forget), 
[fr. Hom. down], forgetfulness: λήθην twos λαβεῖν (see 
λαμβάνω, I. 6), 2 Pet. i. 9.* 

[λημά. see Aapa.] 

Anvés, -οὔ. 7, (also 6, Gen. xxx. 38, 41 [ef. below]), 
[Theoer., Diod., al.]; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped 
receptacle, vat, in which grapes are trodden [A. V. wine- 
press] (Hebr. n3): Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15; τὴν ληνὸν . . . 
τὸν μέγαν (for R Tr mrg. τὴν μεγάλην), Rev. xiv. 19—a 
variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew, 
see Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in 
Grk. writ.; cf. W. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p. 
153 sq.; B. 81 (71). 2. i. q. ὑπολήνιον (Is. xvi. 10; 
Mk. xii. 1) or προλήνιον (Is. v. 2), Hebr. ap? the lower 
vat, dug in the ground, into which the must or new wine 
flowed from the press: Mt. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Kelter; Koskoff in Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. s. v. 
Wine-press ].* 

λῆρος, -ov, 6, idle talk, nonsense: Lk. xxiv. 11. (4 Mace. 
v. 10; Xen. an. 7, 7, 41; Arstph., al.; plur. joined with 
παιδιαί, Plat. Protag. p. 347 d.; with φλυαρίαι, ib. Hipp. 
maj. p. 304 b.) * 

λῃστής, -o0, 6, (for ληϊστής fr. ληΐζομαι. to plunder, and 
this fr. Ion. and Epic Anis, for which the Attics use λεία, 
booty), [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down], a robber; a plun- 
derer, freebooter, brigand : Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; 
Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. xxi. 13; xxvii. 
38,44; Mk. xi.17; xv.27; Lk. x. 30,36; xix.46; Jn. 
x.8; 2Co.xi. 26. [Not to be confounded with κλέπτης 
thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the 
distinction is obseured in A. V.); cf. Trench ὃ xliv.]* 

λῆψις (LT Tr WH λῆμψις, see M, p); -εως ἧ. (λαμβάνω, 
λήψομαι), [fr. Soph. and Thuc. down], a receiving: Phil. 
iv. 15, on which pass. see δόσις, 1.* 

λίαν (in Hom. and Ion. λίην), [for AcAav, Ado to desire; 
ef. Curtius § 532], adv., greatly, exceedingly: Mt. ii. 16; 


9TT 











λιθάζω 


iv. 8; viii. 28; xxvii. 14; Mk.i.35; ix.3; xvi.2; Lk. 
xxiii. 8; 2 Tim.iv.15; 2Jn. 4; 3Jn. 3; (2 Mace. xi.1; 
4 Mace. viii. 16 ; Tob. ix. 4, etc. ; for 3&2, Gen. i. 31; iv. 
5; 1S. xi. 15); λίαν ἐκ περισσοῦ, exceedingly beyond 
measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr br. ἐκπερισ.].. See ὑπερ- 
Aiav.* 

λίβανος, -ov, 6, (more rarely ἡ [cf. Lob. u. 1.7); τις 
the frankincense-tree (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Theophr., 
al.). 2. frankincense (Hebr. 7329; Lev. ii. 1 sq.; 
16; Is. lx. 6, ete.): Mt.ii.11; Rev. xviii. 13; (Soph., 
Theophr. al). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 187; [Vanicek, 
Fremdworter, s. v. On frankincense see esp. Birdwood 
in the Bible Educator, i. 328 sqq. 374 sqq-]* 

λιβανωτός. -o0, 6, (λίβανος) ; 1. in prof. auth. 


frankincense, the gum exuding ἐκ τοῦ λιβάνου, (1 Chr. ix. 


29; Hdt., Menand., Eur., Plat, Diod., Hdian.,al.). 42. 
a censer (which in prof. auth. is 7 λιβανωτίς [or rather 
-rpts, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 255]): Rev. viii. 3, 5.* 

λιβερτῖνος. -ov, 6, a Lat. word, libertinus, i. e. either one 
who has been liberated from slavery, a freedman, or the son 
of a freedman (as distinguished fr. ingenuus, i. e. the son 
of a free man): 7 συναγωγὴ ἡ λεγομένη (or τῶν λεγομένων 
Tdf.) λιβερτίνων, Acts vi.9. Some suppose these liber- 
tini [ A.V. Libertines] to have been manumitted Roman 
slaves, who having embraced Judaism had their syna- 
gogue at Jerusalem ; and they gather as much from Tac. 
Ann. 2, 85, where it is related that four thousand libertini, 
infected with the Jewish superstition, were sent into Sar- 
dinia. Others, owing to the names Κυρηναίων kai ' AAe- 
ξανδρέων that follow, think that a geographical mean- 
ing is demanded for Adgepr., and suppose that Jews are 
spoken of, the dwellers in Libertum, a city or region 
of proconsular Afriea. But the existence of a city or 
region called Libertum is a conjecture which has 
nothing to rest on but the mention of a bishop with the 
prefix *libertinensis" at the synod of Carthage A.D. 
411. Others with far greater probability appeal to Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium $ 23, and understand the word as denot- 
ing Jews who had been made captives by the Romans 
under Pompey but were afterwards set free; and who, 
although they had fixed their abode at Rome, had built 
at their own expense a synagogue at Jerusalem which 
they frequented when in that city. The name Libertines 
adhered to them to distinguish them from the free-born 
Jews who had subsequently taken up their residence at 
Rome. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Libertiner; Hausrath in 
Schenkel iv. 38 sq. ; [B. D. s. v. Libertines. Evidence 
seems to have been discovered of the existence of a 
* synagogue of the libertines " at Pompeii; cf. De Rossi, 
Bullet. di Arch. Christ. for 1864, pp. 70, 92 sq.]* 

Λιβύη, -ns, 7. Libya, a large region of northern Africa, 
bordering on Egypt. In that portion of it which had 
Cyrene for its capital and was thence called Libya Cy- 
renaica (ἡ πρὸς Κυρήνην Λιβύη. Joseph. antt. 16, 6, 1; 7 
A. ἡ κατὰ Κυρήνην [q. v.], Acts ii. 10) dwelt many Jews 
(Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 2; 16, 6, 1; b.j. 7, 11; c. Apion. 
2, 4 [where cf. Müller's notes]) : Acts ii. 10.* 

λιθάζω ; 1 aor. ἐλίθασα ; 1 aor. pass. ἐλιθάσθην; (Mos) ; 


λίθινος 


to stone; i. 6. a. to overwhelm or bury with stones, 
(lapidibus cooperio, Cic.) : twa, of stoning, which was a 
Jewish mode of punishment, (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Steini- 
gung; [B. D. s. v. Punishment, III. a. 1]) : Jn. x. 31- 
33 (where λιθάζετε and λιθάζομεν are used of the act of 
beginning; [cf. W. $ 40,2 a.; D. 205 (178)]) ; Jn. xi. 8; 
Heb. xi. 37. b. to pelt one with stones, in order either 
to wound or to kill him: Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v. 26 
[cf. W.505 (471); B.242(208)]; 2 Co.xi.25. (Aristot., 
Polyb., Strab.; λιθάζειν ἐν λίθοις, 2 S. xvi. 6.) [Cowr.: 
κατα-λιθάζω. * 

At uos, -7, -ov, (λίθος) ; fr. Pind. down; of stone: Jn. 
1.6; 2 Co. iii. 3; Rev. ix. 20.* 

λιθο-βολέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐλεθοβόλουν; 1 aor. 
ἐλιθοβόλησα ; Pass. pres. λεθοβολοῦμαι ; 1 fut. λιθοβολη- 
θήσομαι ; (λιθοβόλος, and this fr. λέθος and βάλλω [ef. W. 
102 (96); 25, 20]) ; Sept. for 9p9 and n1? ; i.q. λιθάζω 
(q. v), to stone; i. e. a. to kill by stoning, to stone 
(of a species of punishment, see λιθάζω) : τινά, Mt. xxi. 
35; xxii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Acts vii, 58 sq.; pass., Jn. 
viii. 5; Heb. xii. 20. b. to pelt with stones: τινά, 
Mk. xii. 4 [Ree.]; Acts xiv. 5. ([Diod. 17, 41, 8]; Plut. 
mor. p. 1011 e.)* 

λίθος, -ov, 6, Sept. for 72, [fr. Hom. down]; a stone: 
of small stones, Mt. iv. 6; vii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; iv. [iS]: 
xi. 11; xxii. 41; Jn. viii. 7; plur., Mt. iii. 9; iv. 3; Mk. 
v. 5; Lk. iii. 8; xix. 40; Jn. viii. 59; x. 31; of a large 
stone, Mt. xxvii. 60, 66; xxviii.2; Mk.xv.46; xvi.3 50. 
Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41; xx.1; of building stones, 
Mt. xxi. 42, 44 [T om. LWH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; xxiv. 
25; Mk.xii.10; xiii. 1sq.; Lk.xix.44; xx. 17sq.; xxi. 
5 sq.; Acts iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 7; metaph. of Christ : λίθος 
ἀκρογωνιαῖος (q. v.), ekXekrós (cf. 2 Esdr. v. 8), ἔντιμος, 1 
Pet. ii. 6 (Is. xxviii. 16); ζῶν (see (to, IT. b.), 1 Pet. ii. 4; 
λίθος προσκόμματος, one whose words, acts, end, men (so 
stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him 
and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7); Ro. 
ix. 33; of Christians: λίθοι ζῶντες, living stones (see 
(do, u. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii. 
5; of the truths with which, as with building materials, 
a teacher builds Christians up in wisdom, λίθοι τίμιοι, 
costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 12. λίθος μυλικός, Mk. ix. 42 R G; 
Lk. xvii. 2 L'T Tr WH, cf. Rev. xviii. 21. οὗ precious 
stones, gems : Aid. τίμιος, Rev. xvii. 45; xviii. 12,16; xxi. 
11, 19, (2 S. xii. 30; 1 K. x. 2, 11) ; taoms, Rev. iv. 3; 
ἐνδεδυμένοι λίθον (for RG T λίνον) καθαρόν, Rev. xv. 6 
LTrtxt. WH (Ezek. xxviii. 13 πάντα [or πᾶν] λίθον 
χρηστὸν ἐνδέδεσαι; [see WH, Intr. ad l. 6.7}; but (against 
the reading λίθον) [ef. Scrivener, Plain Introduction etc. 
p. 658]. spec. stones cut in a certain form: stone tab- 
lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7; statues of idols, 
Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Ezek. xx. 32).* 

λιθόστρωτος, -ov, (fr. λίθος and the verbal adj. στρωτός 
fr. στρώννυμι), spread (paved) with stones (νυμφεῖον, Soph. 
Antig. 1204-5); τὸ λιθ., substantively, a mosaic or tes- 
sellated pavement: so of a place near the praetorium or 
palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 13 (see Ta88a68); of places 
in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3; Joseph. 


378 








λίψ' 
b. 7. 6, 1, 8 and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement 
consists of tessellated work, Epict. diss. 4, 7, 37, cf. Esth. 
i. 6; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46; Plin. h. n. 36,.60 cf. 64.* 

λικμάω, -G: fut. λικμήσω ; (λικμός a winnowing-van) ; 
1. to winnow, cleanse away the chaff from grain by win- 
nowing, (Hom., Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.). 2. in a 
sense unknown to prof. auth., to scatter (opp. to συνάγω, 
Jer. xxxi. (or xxxviii.) 10; add, Is. xvii. 13; Am. ix. 
9). 3. to crush to pieces, grind to powder: τινά, Mt. 
xxi. 44 [R G L br. WH br.]; Lk. xx. 18; cf. Dan. ii. 44 
[Theodot.]; Sap.xi.19 (18). [But in Dan. 1. c. it repre- 
sents the Aphel of *1o finem facere, and on Sap. l. c. see 
Grimm. Many decline to follow the rendering of the 
Vulg. (conterere, comminuere), but refer the exx. under 
this head to the preceding.] * 

Awd, so Tdf. ed. 7, for λαμά, q. v. 

λιμήν, -evos, 6, [allied with λίμνη. q. v.; fr. Hom. down], 
a harbor, haven: Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see καλοὶ λιμένες, p. 
322*.* 

λίμνη, -5s. 7, (fr. λείβω to pour, pour out [cf. Curtius 
§ 541]), [fr. Hom. down], a lake: A. Τεννησαρέτ [q. v.], 
Lk. v. 1; absol, of the same, Lk. v. 2; viii. 22 sq. 33; 
τοῦ πυρός, Rey. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14 sq.; καιομένη πυρί, 
Rev. xxi. 8.* 

λιμός, -ov, 6, (and ἡ in Dorie and later writ.; so L'T 
Tr WH in Lk. xv. 14; Acts xi. 28; so, too, in Is. viii. 
21; 1 K. xviii. 2; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188; [L. and S. 
s. v. init.; W'H. App. p. 157*]; B.12 (11); W. 63 (62) 
[ef. 36], and 526 (490)) ; Sept. very often for 355; hun- 
ger: Lk. xv. 17; Ro. viii. 35; ἐν λιμῷ x. δίψει, 2 Co. xi. 
27; Xen. mem. 1, 4, 13; i. 4. scarcity of harvest, famine: 
Lk. iv. 25; xv.14; Acts vii. 11; xi. 28 [cf. B. 81 (71)]; 
Rev. vi. 8; xviii. 8; Auot, famines in divers lands, Mk. 
xiii. 8; λιμοὶ x. λοιμοί, Mt. xxiv. 7 [L T Tr txt. WH om. 
κι λοιμ.7; Lk. xxi. 11; "Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 9; the two 
are joined in the sing. in Hes. opp. 226; Hdt. 7, 171; 
Philo, vit. Moys. i. $ 19; Plut. de Is. et Osir. 47.* 

λίνον (Treg. Aivov [so R Gin Mt. as below], incorrect- 
ly, for « is short; [ef. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 
42 ]), -ov, τό, Sept. several times for HAW], in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down, far: Ex. ix. 31; linen, as clothing, Rev. 
xv. 6 R G T Tr mrg.; the wick of a lamp, Mt. xii. 20, after 
Texas 

Λίνος (not Atvos [with R G Tr]; see Passow [or L. 
and S.] s. v.; cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 42), -ov, 
ó, Linus, one of Paul's Christian associates ; acc. to eccl. 
tradition bishop of the church at Rome (cf. Hase, Po- 
lemik, ed. 3 p. 131 ; Lipsius, Chronologie d. róm. Bischofe, 
p. 146; [Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. v.]) : 2 Tim. iv. 21.* 

Avrapós, -d, -dv, (λίπα [or rather, λίπος grease, akin to 
dAe(o]); fr. Hom. down; fat: rà λιπαρά (joined with 
τὰ λαμπρά, q. v.) things which pertain to a sumptuous 
and delicate style of living [A. V. dainty], Rev. xviii. 
14.* ? 

Arpa, -as, ἡ, a pound, a weight of twelve ounces: Jn. 
xii. 3; xix. 39. [Polyb. 22, 26, 19; Diod. 14, 116, 7; Plut. 
"Tib. et G. Grac. 2, 3; Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 1; al.]* 

Abb, λιβός, ὁ, (fr. λείβω [to pour forth], because it 


e2 


λογία 
brings moisture) ; 1. the SW. wind: Hdt. 2, 25; 
Polyb. 10, 10, 3; al. 2. the quarter of the heavens 
whence the SW. wind blows: Acts xxvii. 12 [on which 
see βλέπω, 3 and κατά, ll. 1 c.] (Gen. xiii. 14; xx. 1; 
Num. ii. 10; Deut. xxxiii. 23).* 

λογία, -as, 7, (fr. λέγω to collect), (Vule. collecta), a col- 
lection: of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1 
Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. 25].)* 

λογίζομαι; impf. ἐλογιζόμην; 1 aor. ἐλογισάμην ; a depon. 
verb with 1 aor. pass. ἐλογίσθην and 1 fut. pass. λογισθή- 
sonar; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in 
prof. auth. the pres. ptep. is once used so, in Hdt. 3, 95; 
[cf. Veitch s. v.; W. 259 (243); Β. 52 (46)]) ; (λόγος) ; 
Sept. for 2m; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul, 
being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his 
Epp., and only four times in the rest of the N. T.]; ule 
(rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate, 
count over ; hence a. to take into account, to make ac- 
count of: τί τινι, Ro. iv. 3, [4]; metaph. to pass to one's 
account, to impute, [ A. V. reckon]: τί, 1 Co. xiii. 5; τινί 
τι, 2 Tim. iv. 16 [ A. V. lay to one’s charge]; τινὶ δικαιο- 
σύνην, ἁμαρτίαν, Ro. iv. 6, [8 (yet here L mre. T Tr WH 
txt. read ov) ]; τὰ παραπτώματα, 2 Co. v. 19; in imitation 
of the Hebr. 9 avim3, λογίζεταί τι (or τις) εἴς τε (equiv. 
to εἰς τὸ or ὥστε εἶναί τι), a thing is reckoned as or to be 
something, i. e. as availing for or equivalent to something, 
as having the like force and weight, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. 
vol. i. p. 1387; [cf. W. § 29, 3 Note a.; 228 (214); B. 
§ 131, 7 Rem.]): Ro. ii. 26; ix. 8; εἰς οὐδέν, Acts xix. 
27; Is. xL. 17; Dan. [(Theodot. os) ] iv. 32; Sap. iii. 17; 
ix. 6; ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην, Ro. iv. 3, 5, 9-11, 22 sq. 
24; Galiii.6; Jas. ii. 23; Gen.xv.6; Ps. ev. (cvi.) 31; 
1 Macc.ii. 52. b. i. q. to number among, reckon with: 
τινὰ μετά τινων, Mk. xv. 28 [yet GT WH om. Tr br. the 
vs.] and Lk. xxii. 37, after Is. liii. 12, where Sept. ἐν 
τοῖς ἀνόμοις. c. to reckon or account, and treat accord- 
ingly : τινὰ ὥς τι, Ro. viii. 36 fr. Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23 ; cf. 
B. 151 (132); [W. 602 (560)]; [Ro. vi. 11 foll. by 
acc. w. inf, but G Lom. Trbr. the inf.; cf. W. 321 
(302)]. 2. (in animo rationes conferre) to reckon 
inwardly, count up or weigh the reasons, to deliberate, [ A. 
V. reason]: πρὸς ἑαυτούς, one addressing himself to an- 
other, Mk. xi. 31 R G (πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, with myself, in my 
mind, Plat. apol. p. 21 d.). 3. by reckoning up all the 
reasons to gather or infer; i.e. a. to consider, take ac- 
‘count, weigh, meditate on: ri, a thing, with a view to obtain- 
ing it, Phil. iv. 8; foll. by ὅτι, Heb. xi. 19; [Jn. xi. 50 
(Ree. QtaXoy.)]; τοῦτο fell. by ὅτι, 2 Co. x. 11. b. to 
suppose, deem, judge: absol. 1 Co. xiii. 11; ὡς λογίζομαι, 
1 Pet. v. 12; τί, anything relative to the promotion of the 
gospel, 2 Co. iii. 5; ri εἴς τινα (as respects one) ὑπὲρ 
(τοῦτο) 6 ete. to think better of one than agrees with 
what ete. [* account of one above that which’ ete.], 2 Co. 
xii. 6; foll. by ὅτε, Ro. viii. 18; τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, Ro. ii. 
3; 2 Co. x. 7; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject, 
2 Co. xi. 5; foll. by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 28; xiv. 
14; Phil. iii. 13 [cf. W. 321 (302)]; τινὰ ὥς τινα, to hold 
ΤΑ. V. *count'] one as, 2 Co. x. 2 [cf. W. 602 (560)]; 





λόγιος 


with a preparatory οὕτως preceding, 1 Co. iv. 1. c 
to determine, purpose, decide, [cf. American * calculate], 
foll. by an inf. (Eur. Or. 555): 2 Co. x. 2. [Comp.: 
dva-, 0ta-, zrapa-, συλ-λογίζομαι. * 

λογικός, -7, -ov, (fr. λόγος reason), [ Tim. Locr., Dem., 
al], rational (Vulg. rationabilis) ; agreeable to reason, 
following reason, reasonable: λατρεία λογική, the worship 
which is rendered by the reason or soul, [* spiritual"], 
Ro. xii. 1 (λογικὴ kal ἀναίμακτος προσφορά. of the offer- 
ing which angels present to God, Test. xii. Patr. [test. 
Levi ὃ 3] p. 547 ed. Fabric.; [cf. Athenas. suppl. pro 
Christ. $ 13 fin.]) ; τὸ λογικὸν γάλα, the milk which nour- 
ishes the soul (see yada), 1 Pet. ii. 2 (λογικὴ τροφή, Eus. 
h. e. 4, 23 fin.).* 

λόγιον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of λόγος [so Bleek (on Heb. v. 
12) et al.; al. neut. of λόγιος (Mey. on Ro. iii. 2) ]), prop. 
a little word (so Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 969 (973)), a brief 
utterance, in prof. auth. a divine oracle (doubtless because 
oracles were generally brief); Hdt. Thue., Arstph., 
Eur.; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; 8,30, 6; Diod.2,14; Ael. v. h. 
2, 41; of the Sibylline oracles, Diod. p. 602 [fr. 1. 34]; 
Plut. Fab. 4; in Sept. for tn the breast-plate of the high 
priest, which he wore when he consulted Jehovah, Ex. 
xxvii. 15; xxix. 5, ete.; [once for 1%, of the words of 
a man, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 15]; but chiefly for 7728 of 
any utterance of God, whether precept or promise; [cf. 
Philo de congr. erud. grat. $ 24; de profug. $ 11 sub 
fin.]; of the prophecies of God in the O. T., Joseph. 
b. 1. 6, 5, 4; νόμους kai λόγια θεσπισθέντα διὰ προφητῶν 
καὶ ὕμνους, Philo vit. contempl. § 3; τὸ λόγιον τοῦ προ- 
φήτου (Moses), vit. Moys. iii. 35, ef. [23, and] de praem. 
et poen. § 1 init.; τὰ δέκα λόγια, the ten commandments 
of God or the decalogue, in Philo, who wrote a special 
treatise concerning them (Opp. ed. Mang. ii. p. 180 
sqq. [ed. Richter iv. p. 246 sqq.]); [Constit. Apost. 2, 
36 (p. 63, 7 ed. Lagarde)]; Euseb. h. e. 2, 18. In the 
N. T. spoken of the words or utterances of God: of the 
contents of the Mosaic law, Acts vii. 38; with τοῦ θεοῦ 
or θεοῦ added, of his conimands in the Mosaic law and 
his Messianie promises, Ro. iii. 2, cf. Philippi and Um- 
breit ad loc.; of the substance of the Christian religion, 
Heb. v. 12; of the utterances of God through Christian 
teachers, 1 Pet. iv. 11. (In ecel. writ. λόγια τοῦ κυρίου 
is used of Christ’s precepts, by Polye. ad Philipp. 7, 1; 
κυριακὰ λόγια of the sayings and discourses of Christ 
which are recorded in the Gospels, by Papias in Euseb. 
h. e. 3, 39; Phot. c. 228 p. 248 [18 ed. Bekk.]; [τὰ λόγια 
T. θεοῦ] of the words and admonitions of God in the 
sacred Scriptures, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 1 [where par- 
allel with ai ἱεραὶ γραφαί], cf. 62, 3; [and rà Aóy. simply, 
like ai γραφαί, of the New T. in the interpol. ep. of Ign. 
ad Smyrn. 3]. Cf. Schwegler [(also Heinichen)], Index 
iv. ad Euseb. h. e. s. v. λόγιον; [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. and 
Lghtft. in the Contemp. Rev. for Aug. 1875, p. 399 sqq. 
On the general use of the word cf. Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebr. 
iii. pp. 114-117].) * 

λόγιος, -ov, (λόγος), in class. Grk. 1. learned, a man 
of letters, skilled in litérature and the arts; esp. versed 


λογισμός 


in history and antiquities. 2. skilled in speech, elo- 
quent: so Acts xviii. 24 [which, however, al. refer to 1 
(finding its explanation in the foll. δυνατὸς x«rA.)]. The 
use of the word is fully exhibited by Lobeck ad Phryn. 
p.198. [(Hdt., Eur., al.)]* 

λογισμός, -ov, ὁ, (λογίζομαι); 1. areckoning, com- 
putation. 2. a reasoning: such as is hostile to the 
Christian faith, 2 Co. x. 4 (5) [ A. V. imaginations}. 3. 
a judgment, decision: such as conscience passes, Ro. ii. 
15 [A. V. thoughts]. (Thuc. Xen., Plat, Dem., al.; 
Sept. for Naw, as Prov. vi. 18; Jer. xi. 19; Ps. xxxii. 
(xxxiii.) 10.)* 

Xoyogaxéo, -à; (fr. Aoyouáxos, and this fr. λόγος and 
μάχομαι): to contend about words; contextually, to wrangle 
about empty and trifling matters: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Not 
found in prof. auth.) * 

Aoyopax (a, -as, 7. (λογομαχέω)),, dispute about words, war 
of words, or about trivial and empty things: plur. 1 Tim. 
vi. 4. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

λόγος, -ov, ὁ, (λέγω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for 
92317, also for 28 and 1152; prop. a collecting, collection, 
(see Aéyo), — and that, as well of those things which 
are put together in thought, as of those which, having 
been thought i. e. gathered together in the mind; are 
expressed in words. Accordingly, a twofold use of 
the term is to be distinguished: one which relates to 
speaking, and one which relates to thinking. 

I. As respects SPEECH: 1. a word, yet not in 
the grammatical sense (i. q. vocabulum, the mere name 
of an object), but language, voz, i. e. a word which, ut- 
tered by the living voice, embodies a conception or 
idea; (hence it differs from ῥῆμα and ἔπος [q. v.; cf. 
also λαλέω, ad init.]): Heb. xii. 19; ἀποκριθῆναι λόγον, 
Mt. xxii. 46; εἰπεῖν λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 8 [Rec. λόγον (ef. 
εἶπον, 3 a. fin.)]; Lk. vii. 7; λαλῆσαι πέντε, μυρίους, λό- 
yous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; διδόναι λόγον εὔσημον, to utter a dis- 
tinet word, intelligible speech, 1 Co. xiv. 9; εἰπεῖν λόγον 
κατά τινος, to speak a word against, to the injury of, one, 
Mt. xii. 32; also ets twa, Lk. xii. 10; to drive out de- 
mons λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 16; ἐπερωτᾶν twa ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς. 
Lk. xxiii. 9; of the words of a conversation, dvr¢BadXewv 
λόγους. Lk. xxiv. 17. 2. what some one has said ; 
a sayings a. univ.: Mt. xix. 22 [T om.]; Mk. v. 36 
[cf. B. 302 (259) note]; vii. 29; Lk.i. 29; xx. 20; xxii. 
61 [Tr mre. WH ῥήματος]; Jn.ii.22; iv. 39, 50; vi. 60; 
vii. 36; xv. 20; xviii. 9; xix. 8; Acts vii. 29; ὁ λόγος 
οὗτος, this (twofold) saying (of the people), Lk. vii. 17, 
cf. 16; τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών, Mt. xxvi. 44; [Mk. xiv. 
39]; παγιδεύειν τινὰ ἐν λόγῳ, in a word or saying which 
they might elicit from him and turn into an accusation, 
Mt. xxii. 15; dypevew τινὰ λόγῳ, i. e. by propounding a 
question, Mk. xii. 13; plur. Lk. i. 20; Acts v. 5, 24; 
with gen. of the contents: ó A. ézayyeMas, Ro. ix. 9; 
ὁ À. τῆς ὁρκομωσίας, Heb. vii. 28; X. παρακλήσεως, Acts 
xiii. 15; 6 X. τῆς μαρτυρίας, Rev. xii. 11; of A. τῆς προ- 


φητείας. Rev. i. 3 [Tdf. τὸν A.]; xxii. 6 sq. 10, 18; 6 zpo- | 


φητικὸς λόγος, the prophetic promise, collectively of the 
sum of the O. T. prophecies, particularly the Messianic, 


380 











λόγος 


2 Pet. i. 19; of the sayings and statements of teachers: 
οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι, the sayings previously related, Mt. vii. 24 
[here L Tr WH br. rovr.], 26; Lk. ix. 28; οἱ λόγοι τινός, 
the words, commands, counsels, promises, etc., of any 
teacher, Mt. x. 14; xxiv. 35; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 44; 
Jn. xiv. 24; Acts xx. 35; λόγοι ἀληθινοί, Rev. xix. 9; xxi. 
5; πιστοί, Rev. xxii. 6; κενοί, Eph. v. 6: πλαστοί, 2 Pet. 
i. 8 [feta ἥν. 2h? {2084}}} b. of the sayings of 
God; a. i. q. decree, mandate, order: Ko. ix. 28; 
with τοῦ θεοῦ added, 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7 [R* G Trtxt.]; ὁ λ. 
ToU θεοῦ ἐγένετο πρός τινα (a phrase freq. in the O. 'T.), 
Jn. x. 35. B. of the moral precepts given by God in 
the O. T.: Mk. vii. 13; [Mt. xv. 6 L Tr WH txt.]; Ro. 
xiii. 9; Gal. v. 14, (cf. of δέκα λόγοι. [ Ex. xxxiv. 28; Deut. 
x. 4 (cf. ῥήματα, iv. 13); Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 35; 
de decalog. $ 9]; Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 5 [ef. 5, 5]). Y- 
i. q. promise: ὃ X. τῆς ἀκοῆς (equiv. to ὁ ἀκουσθείς), Heb. 
iv. 2; ὁ X. τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. ix. 6; plur. Ro. iii. 4; univ. a 
divine declaration recorded in the O. T., Jn. xii. 38; xv. 
25; 1 Co. xv. 54. 8. διὰ λόγου θεοῦ etc. through 
prayer in which the language of the O. T. is employed : 
1 Tim. iv. 5; ef. De Wette and Huther ad loc. €. 
ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ, as Y: 23 often in the O. T. prophets, 
an oracle or utterance by which God discloses, to the proph- 
ets or through the prophets, future events: used collec- 
tively of the sum of such utterances, Rev. i. 2, 9; cf. 
Diisterdieck and Bleek ad 1]. ce. c. what is de- 
clared, a thought, declaration, aphorism, (Lat. sententia) : 
τὸν Aóyov τοῦτον (reference is made to what follows, so 
that ydp in vs. 12 is explicative), Mt. xix. 11; a dictum, 
maxim or weighty saying: 1 Tim. i.15; iii. 1; 2 Tim. ii. 
11; Tit. iii. 8; i. q. proverb, Jn. iv. 37 (as sometimes in 
class. Grk., e. g. [Aeschyl. Sept. adv. Theb. 218]; 6 za- 
Aaiós λόγος, Plat. Phaedr. p. 240 c.; conviv. p. 195 b.; 
lege. 6 p. 757 a.; Gorg. p. 499 c.; verum est verbum 
quod memoratur, ubi amici, ibi opes, Plaut. True. 4, 4, 32; 
add, Ter. Andr. 2, 5, 15; al.). 3. discourse (Lat. ora- 
tio); a. the act of speaking, speech: Acts xiv. 12; 2 
Co. x. 10; Jas. iii. 2; διὰ λόγου, by word of mouth, Acts 
xv. 27; opp. to δὲ ἐπιστολῶν, 2 Th. ii. 15; διὰ λόγου ποὰ- 
Ao), Acts xv. 32; λόγῳ πολλῷ, Acts xx. 2; περὶ ob πολὺς 
ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος, of whom we have many things to say, Heb. 
v. 11; ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν, Mt. v. 37; Col. iv. 6; A. κολακείας, 1 
Th. ii. 5. λόγος is distinguished from σοφία in 1 Co. ii. 
1; fr. ἀναστροφή, 1 Tim. iv. 12; fr. δύναμις, 1 Co. iv. 19 
sq.; 1 Th. i. 5; fr. ἔργον, Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. x. 11; Col. 
iii. 17; fr. ἔργον x. ἀλήθεια, 1 Jn. iii. 18 (see ἔργον, 3 
p- 3485 bot.); οὐδενὸς λόγου τίμιον, not worth mentioning 
(λόγου ἄξιον, Hdt. 4, 28; cf. Germ. der Rede werth), i. e. 
a thing of no value, Acts xx. 24 T Tr WH (see II. 2 
below). b. i. q. the faculty of speech: Eph. vi. 19; 
skill and practice in speaking: ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
τῇ γνώσει, 2 Co. xi. 6; δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ x. λόγῳ, Lk. xxiv. 
19 (ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς, Diod. 13, 101); λόγος σοφίας 
or γνώσεως, the art of speaking to the purpose about 
things pertaining to wisdom or knowledge, 1 Co. xii. 
8. c. a kind (or style) of speaking: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ, 
1 Co. i. 5 [ A. V. utterance]. d. continuous speak- 


λόγος 


ing, discourse, such as in the N. T. is characteristic of 
teachers: Lk. iv. 32, 36; Jn. iv. 41; Acts iv. 4 (cf. 
iii. 12-26); xx. 7; 1 Co. i. 17; ii.1; plur., Mt. vii. 28; XIX, 
1; xxvi. 1; Lk. ix. 26; Acts ii. 40; δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις x. 
ἔργοις αὐτοῦ, Acts vii. 22. Hence, the thought of the 
subject being uppermost, e. instruction: Col. iv. 
3; Tit. ii. 8; 1 Pet. iii. 1; joined with διδασκαλία, 1 Tim. 
v.17; with a gen. of the teacher, Jn. v. 24; viii. 52; xv. 
20; xvii. 20; Actsii.41; 1 Co. ii. 4; 2 Co. i. 18 (cf. 19); 
ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμός, Jn. viii. 31, 37, 43, 51; xiv. 23; τίνι λόγῳ, 
with what instruction, I Co. xv. 2 (where construe, ei 
κατέχετε, τίνι λόγῳ etc.; cf. B. $8 139, 58; 151, 20); 
i.q. κήρυγμα, preaching, with gen. of the obj.: A. ἀλη- 
θείας, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 18; ὁ A. τῆς ἀληθείας, Col. i. 5; 
Eph.i.13; 2 Tim.ii.15; τῆς καταλλαγῆς, 2 Co. v. 19; ὁ 
A. τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης, concerning this salvation (i. e. the 
salvation obtained through Christ) [cf. W. 257 (223); B. 
162 (141)], Acts xiii. 26; ὁ λόγος τῆς βασιλείας (τοῦ θεοῦ), 
. Mt. xiii. 19; τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co.i. 18; ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ λόγος, the first instruction concerning Christ [cf. 
B. 155 (136); W.188 (177)], Heb. vi.1. Hence 4. 
in an objective sense, what is communicated by instruc- 
tion, doctrine: univ. Acts xviii. 15; 6 Ady. αὐτῶν, 2 Tim. 
ii. 17; plur. ἡμέτεροι λόγοι, 2 Tim. iv. 15; ὑγιαίνοντες 
λόγοι, 2 Tim. i. 13; with a gen. of obj. added, τοῦ κυρίου, 
1 Tim. vi. 3; τῆς πίστεως, the doctrines of faith [see 
πίστις, 1 ο. β.1,1 Tim. iv. 6. specifically, the doctrine con- 
cerning the attainment through Christ of salvation in the 
kingdom of God- simply, Mt. xiii. 20-23; Mk. iv. 14-20; 
viii.32; xvi.20; Lk.i.2; vi.12; Acts vill4; x.44; 
ΧΙ. 19s xiv. 25: xvii 11: Gabown6; Phileas 45 1 ΤῊ. 1: 
6; 2 Tim.iv. 2; 1 Pet. 1i. 8; τὸν λόγον, ὃν ἀπέστειλε τοῖς 
ete. the doctrine which he commanded to be delivered 
to ete. Acts x. 36 [but L WH txt. om. Tr br. ὅν ; cf. W. 
§ 62, 3fin.; B. $ 131, 13]; τὸν λόγον ἀκούειν, Lk. viii. 15; 
Jn. xiv. 24; Actsiv.4; 1 Jn. ii. 7; λαλεῖν, Jn. xv. 3 (see 
other exx. s. v. λαλέω, 5 sub fin.) ; ἀπειθεῖν τῷ À., 1 Pet. 
ii. 8; iii. 1; διδαχὴ πιστοῦ λόγου, Tit. i. 9; with gen. of 
the teacher: 6 A. αὐτῶν, Acts ii. 41; with gen. of the 
author: τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. v. 1; viii. 11, 21; xi. 28; Jn. xvii. 
6,14; 1 Co. xiv. 36; 2 Co. iv. 2; Col.i.25; 2 Tim. ii. 9; 
Tit.i.3; 1.5; Heb.xii.7; 1Jn.i.10; ii.5,14; Rev. 
vi. 9; xx. 4; very often in the Acts: iv. 29, 31; vi. 2, 7; 
viii. 14; xi. 1, 19; xii. 24; xiii. 5, 7, 44, 46 ; xvii. 13; xviii. 
11; opp. to À. ἀνθρώπων [ D. ὃ 151, 14], 1 Th. ii. 13; λόγος 
ζῶν θεοῦ. 1 Pet. i. 23; 6 A. τοῦ κυρίου, Acts viii. 25; xiii. 
48 [(WH txt. Tr mrg. θεοῦ] sq.; xv. 35 sq.; xix. 10, 20; 
1 Th.i.8; 2 Th. iii. 1; rod Χριστοῦ, Col. iii. 16; Rev. iii. 
8; with gen. of apposition, rod εὐαγγελίου, Acts xv. 7; 
with gen. of the obj., τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xiv. 3; 
xx. 32; δικαιοσύνης (see δικαιοσύνη, 1a.), Heb. v. 13; 
with gen. of quality, τῆς ζωῆς, containing in itself the 
true life and imparting it to men, Phil. ii. 16. ἘΣ 
anything reported in speech; a narration, narrative: of 
a written narrative, a continuous account of things 
done, Acts i. 1 (often soin Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down [cf. 
L. and S. s. v. A. IV.]); a fictitious narrative, a story, 
Mt. xxviii. 15, ef. 13. report (in a good sense): 6 Ady. 


981 








λόγος 


the news concerning the success of the Christian cause, 
Acts xi. 22; περί twos, Lk. v.15; rumor, i.e. current 
story, Jn. xxi. 23 ; λόγον ἔχειν τινός, to have the (unmer- 
ited) reputation of any excellence, Col. ii. 23 (so λόγον 
ἔχει τις foll. by an inf., Hdt. 5, 66; Plat. epin. p. 987b.; 
[see esp. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. 1. c. (cf. L. and S. s. v. A. 
III. 3)]). 6. matter under discussion, thing spoken 
of, affair: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. xi. 29; Lk.xx.3; Acts viii. 
21; xv.6, and often in Grk. writ. [L. and S. s. v. A. 
VIIL]; a matter in dispute, case, suit at law, (as 32 in 
Exod. xviii. 16; xxii. 8): ἔχειν Aóyov πρός τινα, to have 
a ground of action against any one, Acts xix. 38, ef. 
Kypke ad loc.; παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας ([cf. II. 6 below] 
mr 323 [-Ὁ» 13 or] 12972 Delitzsch), Mt. v. 32; [xix. 
9LWHmrg.]. 7. thing spoken of or talked about ; 
event; deed, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): &a- 
φημίζειν τὸν λόγον, to blaze abroad the occurrence, Mk. 
i.45; plur. Lk. 1. 4 (as often in the O. T.; pera τοὺς 
λόγους τούτους, 1 Mace. vii. 33). 

II. Its use as respects the ΜΙΝ alone, Lat. ratio; rh 
6. 1. reason, the mental faculty of thinking, medi- 
tating, reasoning, calculating, etc. : once so in the phrase 
ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ, of the divine mind, pervading and not- 
ing all things by its proper force, Heb. iv. 12. 2. 
account, i. e. regard, consideration : λόγον ποιεῖσθαί τινος, 
to have regard for, make account of a thing, care for 
a thing, Acts xx. 24 RG (Job xxii. 4; ἘΠῚ 1: 2h 215} 
ete.; Aeschyl. Prom. 231; Theocr. 3, 33; Dem., Joseph., 
Dion. H., Plut., al. [ef. L. and S. s. v. B. IT. 1]) ; also Aó- 
γον ἔχειν τινός; Acts I. c. Lehm. (Tob. vi. 16 (15)) [ef. 13 
a. above]. 3. account, i.e. reckoning, score: δύσεως 
x. λήψεως (see δόσις, 1), Phil. iv. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lehtft.]; 
eis λόγον ὑμῶν, to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan- 
tage, ib. 17; συναίρειν λόγον (an expression not found in 
Grk. auth.),'to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt. 
xviii. 23; xxv. 19. 4. account, i. e. answer or ex- 
planation in reference to judgment: λόγον διδόναι (as 
often in Grk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro. 
xiv.12R GT WH L mre. Tr mrg.; also ἀποδιδόναι, Heb. 
xiii. 17; 1 Pet. iv. 5; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2; 
Acts xix. 40 [RG]; περί twos, Mt. xii. 36; [Acts xix. 40 
LT Tr WH); τινὶ περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, Ro. xiv. 12 Ltxt. br. Tr 
txt.; αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί Twos, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (Plat. polit. 
p. 285 e.). 5. relation: πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος, with 
whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do], 
Heb. iv. 13; κατὰ λόγον, as is right, justly, Acts xviii. 
14 [A. V. reason would (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4. 5; 5, 110, 
10)], (παρὰ λόγον, unjustly, 2 Maec. iv. 36; 3 Macc. vii. 
8). 6. reason, cause, ground: rin λόγῳ, for what 
reason? why? Acts x. 29 (ἐκ τίνος λόγου; Aeschyl. 
Choeph. 515; ἐξ οὐδενὸς λόγου, Soph. Phil. 730; τίνι 
δικαίῳ λόγῳ κτλ. ; Plat. Gorg. p. 512 6.) ; παρεκτὸς λόγου 
πορνείας (Vulg. exceptá fornicationis causa) is generally 
referred to this head, Mt. v. 32; [xix. 9 L WH mrg.]; 
but since where λόγος is used in this sense the gen. is not 
added, it has seemed best to include this passage among 
those mentioned in I. 6 above. 

III. In several passages in the writings of John ὁ λόγος 


λόγχη 


denotes the essential Worp of God, i. e. the personal 
(hypostatic) wisdom and power in union with God, his 
minister in the creation and government of the universe, 
the cause of all the world’s life both physical and ethical, 
which for the procurement of man’s salvation put on hu- 
man nature in the person of Jesus the Messiah and shone 
forth conspicuously from his words and deeds: Jn. i. 1, 
14; (1 Jn. v. 7 Rec.) ; with τῆς ζωῆς added (see ζωή, 2 
a.), 1 Jn. i. 1; τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xix. 13 (although the in- 
terpretation which refers this passage to the hypostatic 
λόγος is disputed by some, as by Baur, Neutest. Theolo- 
gie p. 216 sq.). Respecting the combined Hebrew and 
Greek elements out of which this conception originated 
among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. Lücke, Com. üb. 
d. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 249-294; [ef. esp. B. D. 
Am. ed. s. v. Word (and for works which have appeared 
subsequently, see Weiss in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6; Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 34 IL.) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 15 p. 
143 sq.; and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen, 
Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 10]. 

λόγχη, -ἡς. ἡ; 1. the iron point or head of ἃ 
spear: Hdt. 1, 52; Xen. an.4, 7,16, ete. 2. alance, 
spear, (shaft armed with iron): Jn. xix. 34. (Sept. ; 
Pind., Tragg., sqq.) * 

Aoigopéo, -G; 1 aor. ἐλοιδόρησα ; pres. pass. ptep. λοιδο- 
povpevos; (λοίδορος) ; to reproach, rail at, revile, heap 
abuse upon: twa, Jn. ix. 28; Acts xxiii. 4; pass., 1 Co. 
iv. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Pind. and Aeschyl. down ; 
Sept. several times for 3.) [Comp.: ἀντι-λοιδορέω.] * 

λοιδορία, -as, 7, (λοιδορέω), railing, reviling : 1 Tim. v. 
14; 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept.; Arstph., Thuc., Xen., sqq.) * 

λοίδορος, -ov, 6, a railer, reviler: 1 Co. v. 115; vi. 10. 
(Prov. xxv. 24; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj. ], Plut., al.) * 

λοιμός, -o), ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], pestilence; plur. a 
pestilence in divers regions (see λιμός), Mt. xxiv. 7 [ἢ G 
Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. xxi. 11; metaph., like the Lat. pestis 
(Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 35; Cic. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow, 
pest, plague: Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5; Ael. v. h. 
14, 11; Prov. xxi. 24; plur., Ps.3. D; 1 Maec. xv. 21; 
ἄνδρες λοιμοί, 1 Macc. x. 61, cf. 1 S. x. 27; xxv. 17, ete.).* 

λοιπός, -j, -óv, (λείπω, AéAovra), [fr. Pind. and Hat. 
down], Sept. for Sy, ^r», Ww, left; plur. the remain- 
ing, the rest: with substantives, as οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, 
Acts ii. 37; 1 Co. ix. 5; add, Mt. xxv. 11; Ro. i.13; 2 
Co. xii. 13; Gal. ii. 13; Phil. iv. 3; 2 Pet. iii. 16; Rev. 
viii. 13; absol. the rest of any number or class under con- 
sideration: simply, Mt. xxii. 6; xxvii. 49; Mk. xvi. 13; 
Lk. xxiv. 10; Aets xvii. 9; xxvii. 44; with a descrip- 
tion added: oí λοιποὶ of etc., Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Th. iv. 
13; Rev. ii. 24; of λοιποὶ πάντες, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Phil. i. 
13; πᾶσι rois À. Lk. xxiv. 9; with a gen.: of λοιποὶ τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, Rev. ix. 20; τοῦ σπέρματος, ib. xii. 17; τῶν 
νεκρῶν, ib. xx. 5; with a certain distinction and contrast, 
the rest, who are not of the specified class or number: Lk. 
viii. 10; xviii. 9; Acts v.13; Ro. xi. 7; 1 Co. vii. 12; 
1 Th. ν. 6; 1 Tim. v. 20; Rev. xi. 13; xix. 21; τὰ λοιπά, 
the rest, the things that remain: Mk. iv. 19; Lk. xii. 26 ; 
1 Co. xi. 34; Rev. iii. 2. Neut. sing. adverbially, τὸ 


382 





λούω 


λοιπόν what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. 6. a. 
hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Pind. down): Mk. xiv. 41 R T WH (but τό in br.); 
Mt. xxvi. 45 [WH om. Tr br. τό]; 1 Co. vii. 29; Heb. x. 
13; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 GL Tr [WH 
(but see above)]; 2 Tim. iv. 8; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
τοῦ. τοῦ λοιποῦ, henceforth, in the future, Eph. vi. 10 
LT Tr WH; Gal. vi. 17; Hdt. 2, 109; Arstph. pax 
1084; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10; oec. 10, 9; al; cf. Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 706; often also in full rod A. χρόνου. [Strictly, τὸ 
A. is ‘for the fut.’ rod A. ‘in (the) fut.’; τὸ A. may be used 
for τοῦ Δ.» but not τοῦ A. for τὸ λ.; cf. Meyer and Ellicott 
on Gal. τι. s.; B. $8 128, 2; 132, 26; W. 463 (432).] b. 
at last; already: Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see 
Passow or L. and S. s. v.). C. τὸ λοιπόν, dropping the 
notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover, 
[ A. V. often finally], forming a transition to other things, 
to which the attention of the hearer or reader is directed: 
Eph. vi. 10 RG; Phil ii. 1; iv. 8; 1 Th. iv. 1 Rec.; 
2 Th. iii. 1; ὃ δὲ λοιπόν has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2 
RG; λοιπόν inl Co. i. 16; iv. 2 LT Tr WH; 1 Th. iv. 
1GLTTrWH. 

Aovkás, -à, 6, (contr. fr. Aovkavós; [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on 
Col. iv. 14], W. 103 (97) [cf. B. 20 (18); on the diverse 
origin of contr. or abbrev. prop. names in ἃς cf. Lobeck, 
Patholog. Proleg. p. 506; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]), 
Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the 
apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his 
journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17; xx. 5-15; xxi. 1-18; xxviii. 
10-16); he was ἃ physician, and acc. to the tradition of 
the church from Irenzus [3, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has 
been recently assailed with little success, the author of the 
third canonical Gospel and of the Acts of the Apostles: 
Col. iv. 14; 2 Tim. iv. 11; Philem. 24.* 

Λούκιος, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of Cyrene, a 
prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch: Acts 
xiii. 1; perhaps the same Lucius that is mentioned in 
Ro. xvi. 21.* 

λουτρόν. -o0, τό, (Aovw), fr. Hom. down (who uses 
Xoerpóv fr. the uncontr. form AXoéo), a bathing, bath, i. e. 
as well the act of bathing [a sense disputed by some 
(cf. Ellicott on Eph. v. 26)], as the place; used in the 
N. T. and in eccles. writ. of baptism [for exx. see SopA. 
Lex.s.v.]: with τοῦ ὕδατος added, Eph. v. 26; τῆς παλιγ- 
yeveoias, Tit. iii. 5.* 

λούω: laor.éAovca; pf. pass. ptep. λελουμένος and (in 
Heb. x. 23 T WH) λελουσμένος, a later Greek form (cf. 
Lobeck on Soph. Aj. p. 324; Steph. Thesaur. v. 397 οὕ; 
cf. Kühner $ 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v., who cites Cant. v. 
12 Vat.]); 1 aor. mid. ptep. λουσάμενος : fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for ym); to bathe, wash: prop. twa, a dead person, 
Acts ix. 37; τινὰ ἀπὸ τῶν πληγῶν, by washing to cleanse 
from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [W.372 (348), 
cf. 8 30, 6a.; B. 322 (277)]; ὁ AeXoupévos, absol., he that 
has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage 
see καθαρός, a. [and cf. Syn. below]); AeA. τὸ σῶμα, 
with dat. of the instr., ὕδατι, Heb. x. 22 (23) ; mid. to 
wash one’s self [cf. W. $ 38, 2 a.]: 2 Pet. ii. 22; trop. 


Avdia 


Christ is described as ὁ λούσας ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν 
ἡμῶν, i. 6. who by suffering the bloody death of a vicari- 
ous sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev. 
1. 5 RG [al. λύσας (4. v. 2 fin.). Comp. : dzo-ovo. | * 

[Sxv. λούω, νίπτω, πλύνω: mA. is used of things, 
esp. garments; A. and v. of persons,—v. of a part of the 
body (hands, feet, face, eyes), A. of the whole. All three 
words occur in Lev. xv. 11. Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. $ xlv.] 

Λύδδα, -ns [Acts ix. 38 RG L, but -as T Tr WH; see 
WH. App. p. 156], ἡ, and Λύδδα, -ov, τά ([L'T Tr WH 
in] Acts ix. 32,35; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 116; B. 18 (16) sq. 
[cf. W. 61 (60)]); Hebr. 15 (1 Chr. viii. 12; Ezra ii.33; 
Neh. xi. 35); Lydda, a large Benjamite [cf. 1 Chr.l. c.] 
town (Λύδδα κώμη, πόλεως τοῦ μεγέθους οὐκ ἀποδέουσα, 
Joseph. antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the 
Roman empire, about nine [‘eleven’ (Ordnance Survey p. 
21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd: 
Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp. 
244—248; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 627 sq. ; [BB. DD. 
s. v.].* 

«Λυδία, -as, 7, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of 
purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith: Acts 
xvi. 14,40. The name was borne by other women also, 
Horat. carm. 1, 8; 3; 9* . 

Avkaovia, -as, 7, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Minor, 
situated between Pisidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia 
and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and 
Iconium [cf. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in- 
habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char- 
acter of which cannot be determined: Acts xiv. 6. Cf. 
Win. RWB.s.v.; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. 
Gesellsch. x. (56) p. 378; [ Wright, Hittites ('84) p. 56 ].* 

“Λυκαονιστί, (λυκαονίζω, to use the language of Lyca- 
onia), adv., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts xiv. 11 (see 
Avkaovía ).* 

Λυκία, -as, 7, Lycia, a mountainous region of Asia 
Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the 
Mediterranean: Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D. 
s. v. ; Diet. of Geogr. s. v. ; reff. in Bp. Lehtft. on Col. 
[ei dll 

λύκος, -ov, 6, Hebr. ast, a wolf: Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; 
Jn. x. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa- 
cious, destructive men: Mt. vii. 15; Acts xx. 29; (used 
trop. even in Hom. Il. 4, 471; 16, 156; in the O. T., 
Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).* 

λυμαίνομαι : impf. ἐλυμαινόμην ; dep. mid.; (λύμη injury, 
ruin, contumely); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 1. 
to affix a stigma to, to dishonor, spot, defile, (Ezek. xvi. 25; 
Proy. xxiii. 8; 4 Mace. xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame- 
fully or with injury, to ravage, devastate, ruin: ἐλυμαίνετο 
τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per- 
secutor, [A. V. made havock of], Acts viii. 3.* 

λυπέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐλύπησα; pf. λελύπηκα ; Pass., pres. 
λυποῦμαι; 1 aor. ἐλυπήθην; fut. λυπηθήσομαι; (λύπη); 
[fr. Hes. down]; to make sorrowful; to affect with sad- 
ness, cause grief; to throw into sorrow: twa, 2 Co. ii. 2, 
5; vii. 8; pass., Mt. xiv. 9; xvii. 23; xviii. 31; xix. 22; 
xxvi22; Mk.x.22; xiv. 19; Jn. xvi. 20; xxi. 17; 2 Co. 


988 





Avoavias 


ii. 4; 1 Th.iv. 13; 1 Pet. i. 6; joined with ἀδημονεῖν, 
Mt. xxvi. 37; opp. to χαίρειν, 2 Co. vi. 10; κατὰ θεόν, in 
a manner acceptable to God [οἵ. W. 402 (375)], 2 Co. 
vii, 9, 11; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend: τὸ πνεῦμα 
τὸ ἅγιον, Eph. iv. 30 (see πνεῦμα, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one 
uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv.15. [Comp.: συλ- 
λυπέω. Syn. see θρηνέω, fin. |* 

λύπη, -ης; 7, [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], sorrow, pain, 
grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. ii. 7; opp: 
to χαρά, Jn. xvi. 20; Heb. xii. 11; λύπην ἔχω (see Exo, 
I. 2g. p. 2675), Jn. xvi. 21 sq.; Phil. ii. 27; with addition 
of ἀπό and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3; X. pot ἐστι, Ro. ix. 
2; ἐν λύπῃ ἔρχεσθαι, of one who on coming both saddens 
and is made sad, 2 Co. ii. 1 (cf. λυπῶ ὑμᾶς," vs. 2; and 
λύπην ἔχω, VS. 3); ἀπὸ τῆς λύπης, for sorrow, Lk. xxii. 
45; ἐκ λύπης, with a sour, reluctant mind [ A. V. grudg- 
ingly], (opp. to ἱλαρός), 2 Co. ix. 7; ἡ κατὰ θεὸν λύπη, 
sorrow acceptable to God, 2 Co. vii. 10 (see λυπέω), and 
ἡ Tov κόσμου λύπη, the usual sorrow of men at the loss of 
their earthly possessions, ibid.; objectively, annoyance, 
afjliction, (Hdt. 7, 152) : λύπας ὑποφέρειν [ R. V. griefs 1, 
1 Ῥοί. 11. 19." 

“Λυσανίας, -ov, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy, 
who from rz. c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot 
of Mount Lebanon, and was put to death n. c. 34 at the 
instance of Cleopatra: Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3; 
155451; bz js: 90 ΠΡ ΟΠ ΡΣ ἢ 8. τ 2. ἃ tetrarch 
of Abilene (see ᾿Αβιληνή), in the days of John the Bap- 
tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned 
by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa 
I. and Herod Agrippa II., Josephus mentions ἡ Λυσανίου 
rerpapxía (antt. 18, 6, 10, ef. 20, 7, 1), βασιλεία ἡ τοῦ 
Λυσανίου καλουμένη (b. 1. 2, 11, 5), ᾿Αβίλα ἡ Λυσανίου 
(antt. 19, 5, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that 
in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be 
meant, and that the region which he governed continued 
to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred- 
ner, Strauss, Gfrórer, Weisse), denying that there ever 
was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into 
error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly- 
sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that 
he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of 
Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by 
the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8, 
expressly distinguishes Chaleis from the tetrarchy of 
Lysanias; nor is it probable that the region which Ly- 
sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only six years” 
took its name from him everafter. Therefore it is more 
correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where 
the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly- 
sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be 
meant; and that he is identical with the one spoken of 
by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Abilene; Wieseler in 
Herzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitriige zur richtig. Würdi- 
gung d. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204]; Bleek, Synopt. Er- 
klür. u. s. w. i. p. 154 sq.; Aneucker in Schenkel i. p. 26 sq.; 
Schürer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. $ 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in 
Riehm s. v. ; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 79 sqq.; 


«υσίας 


Renan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d’ Abilene (in the Mé- 
moires de I’ Acad. des inscrip. et belles-lettres for 1870, 
Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 49-84); BB.DD. s. v.].* 

“Λυσίας, -ov, 6, (Claudius) Lysias, a Roman chiliarch 
[ A. V. ‘chief captain]: Acts xxiii. 26; xxiv. 7 [Rec.], 
[B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* 

λύσις, -ews, 7, (Ava), [fr. Hom. down], a loosing of any 
bond, as that of marriage; hence once in the N. T. of 
divorce, 1 Co. vii. 21." 

λυσιτελέω, -@; (fr. λυσιτελής, and this fr. λύω to pay, 
and τὰ τέλη [ef. τέλος, 2]) ; [fr. Hdt. down]; prop. to 
pay the taxes; to return expenses, hence to be useful, ad- 
impers. λυσιτελεῖ, it profits; foll. by ἤ (see 
gj, 3 £.), it is better: τινί foll. by εἰ, Lk. xvii. 2.* 

Avertpa, -as, 7, and [in Acts xiv. 8; xvi. 2; 2 Tim. iii. 
11] -ov, τά, (see Λύδδα), Lystra, a city of Lycaonia: Acts 
xiv. 6,8, 21; xvi 1 sq.; 2 Tim. iii. 11. [Cf ref. in 
Bp. Lehtft. on Col. p. 1.]* 

λύτρον, -ov, τό, (AUw), Sept. passim for 795, now, ir, 
ete.; the price for redeeming, ransom (paid for slaves, 
Lew. xix. 20; for captives, Is. xlv. 13; for the ransom 
of a life, Ex. xxi. 30; Num. xxxv. 31 sq.): ἀντὶ πολλῶν, 
to liberate many from the misery and penalty of their 
sins, Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45. (Pind. Aeschyl, Xen., 
Plat., al.) * 


λυτρόω, -@: 


vantageous 5 


Pass, 1 aor. ἐλυτρώθην; Mid., pres. inf. 
λυτροῦσθαι; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. λυτρώσηται; (λύτρον, 
q. v.) ; Sept. often for bea and 175; 1. to release 
on receipt of ransom: Plat. Theaet. p. 165 e.; Diod. 19, 
73; Sept., Num. xviii. 15, 17. 2. to redeem, liberate 
by payment of ransom, [ (Dem., al.)], generally expressed 
by the mid.; univ. fo liberate: twa ἀργυρίῳ, and likewise 
ex with the gen. of the thing; pass. ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ἀνα- 
στροφῆς, 1 Pet.i. 18; Mid. to cause to be released to one's 
self [cf. W. 254 (238)] by payment of the ransom, i. e. to 
redeem; univ. to deliver: in the Jewish theocratic sense, 
τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ, viz. from evils of every kind, external and 
internal, Lk. xxiv. 21; ἀπὸ πάσης ἀνομίας, Tit. ii. 14 [cf. 
W. § 30, 6 a.]; τινὰ ἐκ, spoken of God, Deut. xiii. 5; 
2S. vii. 23; Hos. xii. 14.* 

λύτρωσις, -ews, 7, (Avrpóo), a ransoming, redemption : 
prop. αἰχμαλώτων, Plut. Arat. 11; for ΤΙ), Lev. xxv. 
[29], 48; univ. deliverance, redemption, in the theocratie 
sense (see Avrpóo, 2 [cf. Graec. Ven. Lev. xxv. 10, ete. ; 
Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9]) : Lk. i. 68; ii. 38; specifically, re- 
demption from the penalty of sin: Heb. ix. 12. [(Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 12, 7; ‘Teaching’ 4, 6; etc.)]* 

λυτρωτής, -00, 6, (Avrpóco), redeemer; deliverer, liber- 
ator: Acts vii. 35; [Sept. Lev. xxv. 31, 32; Philo de 
sacrif. Ab. et Cain. $ 37 sub fin.]; for 5x3, of God, Ps. 
xviii. (xix.) 15; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 35. Not found in prof. 
auth.* 

λυχνία, -as, 7, a later Grk. word for the earlier Avyviov, 
see Lob.ad Phryn. p. 313 sq. ; [Wetst. on Mt. v.15; W. 
24]; Sept. for W431; @ (candlestick) lampstand, cande- 


984 





labrum: Mt.v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33]; Heb. | 


ix.2; thetwo eminent prophets who will precede Christ's 
return from heaven in glory are likened to * candlesticks,’ 





Avo 


Rev. xi. 4 (B. 81 (70); W. 536 (499)]; to the seven 
ig ipee: ! (Ex. xxv. 37 [ A. V. lamps ; cf. B. D. (esp. 
Am. ed.) s Candlestick]) also the seven more con- 
spicuous did hes of Asia are compared in Rev. i. 12 sq. 
20; 1.1; κινεῖν τὴν λυχνίαν τινὸς (ἐκκλησίας) ἐκ TOU τόπου 
αὐτῆς, to move a church out of the place which it has 
hitherto held among the churches; to take it out of the 
number of churches, remove it altogether, Rev. ii. 5.* 
λύχνος, -ov, ὁ, Sept. for Ἢ, [fr. Hom. down]; a lamp, 
candle [?], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat. 
candelabrum), [ef. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlvi.; Tecta 
Charicles, Sc. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 156 n. 5)]: Mt. v. 15 
Mk. iv. 21; [Lk. xi 36]; xii 35; Rev. xxii 5; φῶς 
λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to φῶς ἡλίου, xxii. 5 LT Tr 
WI; ἅπτειν λύχνον ([Lk. viii. 16; xi. 33; xv. 8], see 
ἅπτω, 1). Toa *lamp" are likened — the eye, ὁ λύχνος 
τοῦ σώματος, i. e. which shows the body which way to 
move and turn, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34; the prophecies of 
the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowl- 
edge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven 
down even to the time when by the Holy Spirit that same 
light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts 
of men, the licht by which the prophets themselves had 
been enli&htened and which was necessary to the full per- 
ception of the true meaning of their prophecies, 2 Pet. 
i. 19; to the brightness of a lamp that cheers the be- 
holders a teacher is compared, whom even those rejoiced 
in who were unwilling to comply with his demands, Jn. 
Christ, who will hereafter illumine his follow- 
ers, the citizens of the heavenly kingdom, with his own 
glory, Rev. xxi. 23.* 
tw; impf. €Avov; 1 aor. €Avoa; Pass., pres. Avopar; 
impf. édvdunv; pf. 2 pers. sing. λέλυσαι, ptep. λελυμένος; 1 
aor. eAvOnv; 1 fut. λυθήσομαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. sev- 
eral times for MND to open, WAT and Chald. yyw (Dan. 
iii. 25; v. 12); to Loose; i.e. 1. to loose any person 
(or thing) tied or fastened: prop. the bandages of the 
the shoes, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27; Acts 
25]; vii. 33, (so for 5v) to take off, Ex. iii. 5; Josh. 
15); πῶλον (δεδεμένον), Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2, [3 L 
EO 4sq.; Lk. xix. 30 sq. 33; bad angels, Rey, ix. 
14 sq.; τὸν βοῦν ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης, Lk. xiii. 15; trop. of 
husband and wife joined together by the bond of matri- 
mony, λέλυσαι ἀπὸ γυναικός (opp. to δέδεσαι γυναικί), 
spoken of a single man, whether he has already had ἃ 
wife or has not yet married, 1 Co. vii. 27. 2. to loose 
one bound, i. e. to unbind, release from bonds, set free: 
one bound up (swathed in bandages), Jn. xi. 44; bound 
with chains (a prisoner), Acts xxii. 30 (where Rec. adds 
ἀπὸ τῶν δεσμῶν) ; hence i. q. to discharge from prison, 
let go, Acts xxiv. 26 Ree. (so as far back as Hom.); in 
Apocalyptic vision of the devil (κεκλεισμένον), Rey. xx. 
35 ἐκ τῆς φυλακῆς αὐτοῦ, 7; metaph. to free (ἀπὸ δεσμοῦ) 
from the bondage of disease (one held by Satan) by 
restoration to health, Lk. xiii. 16 ; to release one bound 
by the chains of sin, ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, Rev. i. 5 L T Tr 
WHI (see λούω fin. [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.]). 3. to loosen, 
undo, dissolve, anything bound, tied, or compacted to- 


v. 35; 


feet, 
ers 


λύω 


gether: the seal of a book, Rev. v. 2, [5 Rec.]; trop., 
τὸν δεσμὸν τῆς γλώσσης τινός, to remove an impediment 
of speech, restore speech to a dumb man, Mk. vii. 35 
(Justin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nomen Battos propter linguae 
obligationem fuit; 6 linguae nodis solutis loqui primum 
coepit); an assembly, i. e. to dismiss, break up: τὴν 
συναγωγήν, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (dyoprjv, Hom. Il. 1, 305; 
Od. 2, 257, ete.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; τὴν στρατιάν, Xen. 
Cyr. 6,1, 2); of the bonds of death, λύειν τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ 
“Θανάτου, Acts ii. 24 (see ὠδίν). Laws, as having bind- 
ing force, are likened to bonds; hence λύειν is i. q. to 
annul, subvert; to do away with; to deprive of authority, 
whether by precept or by act: ἐντολήν, Mt. v. 19; τὸν 
νόμον, Jn. vii. 23; τὸ σάββατον, the commandment con- 
cerning the sabbath, Jn. v. 18; τὴν γραφήν; Jn. x. 35; cf. 
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 17; [on the singular reading λύει τὸν 
Ἰησοῦν, 1 Jn. iv. 3 WH mre. see Westcott, Com. ad loc.]; 
iby a Chald. and Talmud. usage (equiv. to TAX, Sw [cf. 


385 





μάγος 


W. 32]), opp. to δέω (q. v. 2 c.), to declare lawful: Mt. 
Xvi. 19; xviii. 18, [but cf. Weiss in Meyer 7te Aufl. ad 
ll. ce.]. to loose what is compacted or built together, 
to break up, demolish, destroy: prop. in pass. éAvero 7j 
πρύμνα, was breaking to pieces, Acts xxvii. 41; τὸν ναόν, 
Jn. ii. 19; τὸ μεσότοιχον τοῦ φραγμοῦ, Eph. ii. 14 (τὰ τείχη, 
1 Esdr.i. 52; γέφυραν, Xen. an. 2, 4, 17 sq.) ; to dissolve 
something coherent into parts, to destroy: pass., [τούτων 
πάντων λυομένων, 2 Pet. iii. 11]; τὰ στοιχεῖα (καυσούμενα), 
2 Pet. iii. 10; οὐρανοί (πυρούμενοι), ib. 12; metaph. to 
overthrow, do away with: τὰ ἔργα τοῦ διαβόλου, 1 Jn. iii. 
8. [Cowr.: ἀνα-, dro-, δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-λύω. * 

ots [WH Aots], -idos, ἡ, Lois, a Christian matron, the 
grandmother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.* 

«Λώτ, 6, (01? a covering, veil), [indecl.; cf. B.D.], Lot, 
the son of Haran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27, 
31; xii. 4 sqq.; xiii. 1 sqq.; xiv. 12 sqq.; xix. 1 sqq.): 
Lk. xvii. 28 sq. 32; 2 Pet. ii. 7.* 


M 


[M, i: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et 
Alex. p. 130 sq.) retention in such forms as λήμψομαι, &ve- 
Anupen, προσωπολήμπτης, ἀνάλημψις, and the like, see (the 
several words in their places, and) W. 48; B. 62 (54); esp. 
T'df. Proleg. p. 72; Kuenen and Cobet, Praef. p. Ixx.; Scriv- 
ener, Collation etc. p. lv. sq., and Introd. p. 14; Fritzsche, Rom. 
vol. i. p. 110; on -μ- or -uu- in pf. pass. ptcps. (e. g. διεστραμ- 
“μένος, Tepipepaupevos, etc., see each word in its place, and) 
cf. WH. App. p. 170sq.; on the dropping of μ in ἐμπίπλημι, 
ἐμπιπράω, see the words.] 

Madé, 6, (Dy ta be small), Maath, one of Christ's 
ancestors: Lk. iii. 26.* 

Mayaddy, see the foll. word. 

Μαγδαλά, a place on the western shore of the Lake of 
Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards 
the north; according to the not improbable conjecture 
of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 267) identical with 59-5332 
(i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of 
Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38) ; in the Jerus. Talmud 54:5 
(Magdal or Migdal); now Medschel or Medjdel, a 
wretched Mohammedan village with the ruins of an an- 
cient tower (see Win. RWB. s. v.; Robinson, Palest. ii. 
p.396 sq.; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 661; Kneucker in 
Schenkel iv. p. 84; [Hackett in B.D. s. v.; Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]) : Mt. xv. 39 RG, with 
the var. reading (adopted by L T Tr WH [cf. WH. App. 


»oyvy 
p. 160]) Maya8áv, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. c δ ist ae 


either of these forms was the one used by the Evangelist 
it could very easily have been changed by the copyists 
into the more familiar name Μαγδαλά." 

25 





Μαγδαληνή, -js, 7, (Maydada, q. v.), Magdalene, a 
woman of Magdala: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61; xxviii. 1; Mk. 
xv.40,47; xvi.1,9; Lk.vii.2; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25; 
xx 1. 18.* 

[Maye&óv (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see “Αρμαγεδών. 

μαγεία (T WH  payía, see I, ι), -as, 7, (μάγος, q. V-), 
magic; plur. magic arts, sorceries: Acts vii. 11. (The- 
ophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

μαγεύω; (μάγος); (o be a magician; to practise magical 
arts: Acts viii. 9. (Eur. Iph. 1338; Plut. Artax. 3, 6, 
and in other auth.) * 

μαγία, see μαγεία. 

μάγος, -ov, ὁ, (Hebr. 15, plur. 295; a word of Indo- 
Germanie origin; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 766; J. G. 
Müller in Herzog viii. p. 678; [ Vanicek, Fremdworter, 
5. v.; but the word is now regarded by many as of Baby- 
lonian origin; see Schrader, Keilinschriften u.s.w. 2te 
Aufl. p. 417 sqq.]); fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; Sept. 
Dan. ii. 2 and several times in Theodot. ad Dan. for 
WN; a magus; the name given by the Babylonians 
(Chaldzans), Medes, Persians, and others, to the wise 
men, teachers, priests, physicians, astrologers, seers, in- 
terpreters of dreams, augurs, soothsayers, sorcerers etc. ; 
cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; J. G. Müller in Herzog 1. c. pp. 
675-685; Holtzmann in Schenkel iv. p. 84 sq.; [BB.DD. 
s. v. Magi]. In the N. T. the name is given al 
to the oriental wise men (astrologers) who, having dis- 
covered by the rising of a remarkable star [see ἀστήρ, 
and cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 209 sqq.] that 
the Messiah had just been born, came to Jerusalem to 


Mayoy 


worship him: Mt. ii. 1, 7, 16. 2. to false prophets 
and sorcerers: Acts xiii. 6, 8, cf. viii. 9, 11.* 

Mayday, 6, see Toy. 

Μαδιάμ, ἡ, (Hebr. 1.12 [i. e. ‘strife’}), Midian [in 
A. V. (ed. 1611) N. T. Madian], prop. name of the ter- 
ritory of the Midianites in Arabia; it took its name 
from Midian, son of Abraham and Keturali (Gen. xxv. 
1 sq.): Acts vii. 29.* 

pats, -οὔ, 6, the breast: of a man, Rev. i. 13 Lchm. 
[(see μαστός). From Hom. down.]* 

μαθητεύω: 1 aor. ἐμαθήτευσα; 1 aor. pass. ἐμαθητεύθην ; 
(μαθητής); 1. intrans. τινί, to be the disciple of 
one; lo follow his precepts and instruction: Mt. xxvii. 57 
RGWIH mrg., cf. Jn. xix. 38 (so Plut. mor. pp. 832 b. 
(vit. Antiph. 1), 837 c. (vit. Isocr. 10) ; Jamblichus, vit. 
Pythag. c. 23). 2. trans. (cf. W. p. 23 and $ 38, 
1; [B. § 131, 4]) to make a disciple; to teach, instruct: 
τινά, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21; pass. with a dat. of 
the pers. whose disciple one is made, Mt. xxvii. 57 L'T 
Tr WH txt. ; μαθητευθεὶς eis τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν oip. (see 
γραμματεύς, 3), Mt. xiii. 52 Rec., where long since the 
more correct reading τῇ Sac. τῶν ovp. was adopted, but 
without changing the sense; [yet Lehm. inserts év].* 

μαθητής, -0v, 6, (μανθάνω), a learner, pupil, disciple: 
univ., opp. to διδάσκαλος, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 40; τινός, 
one who follows one's teaching: Ἰωάννου, Mt. ix. 14; 
Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; τῶν Φαρισ., Mt. xxii. 16; 
Mk.ii.18; Lk. v. 33; Μωῦσέως, Jn. ix. 28; of Jesus,— 
in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews 
who favored him, joined his party, became his adher- 
ents: Jn.vi.66; vii.3; xix. 38; ὄχλος μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, 
Lk. vi. 17; οἱ μ. αὐτοῦ ἱκανοί, Lk. vii. 11; ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος 
τῶν μαθ. Lk. xix. 37; but especially the twelve aposiles : 
Mt. x. 1; xi. 1; xii. 1; Mk. viii. 27; Lk. viii. 9; Jn. ii. 
2; iii. 22, and very often; also simply of μαθηταί, Mt. 
xiii. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [Rec.], 
etc.; in the Acts of μαθηταί are all those who confess 
Jesus as the Messiah, Christians: Acts vi.1 sq. 7; ix. 19; 
xi. 26, and often; with τοῦ κυρίου added, Actsix.1. The 
word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the 
N. T., nor in the Apocalypse; in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt.], 
Arstph., Xen., Plato, down. 

μαθήτρια, -as, 7, (a fem. form of μαθητής; cf. ψάλτης, 
ψάλτρια, etc.,in Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 425), a female dis- 
ciple; i.q. α Christian woman: Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2, 
52; Diog. Laért. 4, 2; 8, 42.)* 

[Ma80a9(as, see Ματταθίας. 

Μαθθαῖος, Μαθθάν, see Ματθαῖος, Ματθάν. 

Μαθθάτ, see Ματθάτ. 

Μαθουσάλα, T WH Μαθουσαλά [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
103], 6, (novnp man of a dart, fr. 32, construct form 
of the unused Π a man, and ndw a dart [ef. B. D. s. 
v.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of 
Noah (Gen. v. 21): Lk. iii. 37.* 

Moiváv (T Tr WH Μεννά). indecl, (Lchm. Mévvas, 
gen. Mewa), 6, Menna or Menan, [ A. V. (1611) Menam], 
the name of one of Christ's ancestors: Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm. 
br. τοῦ M.].* 


986 





μακράν 


μαίνομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to be mad, to rave: said of 
one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right 
mind, Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to 
σωφροσύνης ῥήματα ἀποφθέγγεσθαι, Acts xxvi. 25; joined 
with δαιμόνιον ἔχειν, Jn. x. 20. [COMP.: ἐμ-μαίνομαι. * 

μακαρίζω; Attic fut. μακαριῶ [cf. B. 37 (32)]; (μακά- 
pws); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for WwW; to pronounce 
blessed : τινά, Lk. i. 48; Jas. v. 11 (here Vulg. beatifico).* 

μακάριος, -a, -ov, (poetic μάκαρ), [fr. Pind., Plat. down], 
blessed, happy: joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 11; 
vi. 15 (cf. μάκαρες θεοί in Hom. and Hes.); ἐλπίς, Tit. 
ii. 13; as a predicate, Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 14; iv. 
14; ἡγοῦμαί τινα pax. Acts xxvi. 25 paxdp. ἔν τινι, Jas. i. 
25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be 
pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptep. 
taking the place of the subject, μακάριος ὁ ete. (Hebr. 
“3 "wn, Ps. i. 1; Deut. xxxiii. 29, etc.) blessed the man, 
who etc. [W. 551 (512 sq.)]: Mt. v. 3-11; Lk. vi. 20— 


14; by the addition to the noun of a ptep. which takes. 
the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq.; 
Rev. xiv. 13; foll. by és with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6; 
Lk. vii. 23; xiv. 15; Ro. iv. 7 sq. ; the subject noun in- 
tervening, Lk. xii. 37, 43; xxiii. 29; Jas.i.12; pax.... 


| ὅτι, Mt. xiii. 16; xvi. 17; Lk. xiv. 14; foll. by ἐάν, Jn. 


xiii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 40. 

pakapurpós, -ov, 6, (μακαρίζω), declaration of blessed- 
ness: Ro. iv. 9; Gal.iv. 15; λέγειν τὸν pak. τινος, to utter 
a declaration of blessedness upon one, a fuller way of say- 
ing μακαρίζειν τινά, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6. 
(Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d.; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34]; Plut. 
mor. p. 471 c. ; eccles. writ.) * 

Μακεδονία, -as, 7 [on use of art. with cf. W. $ 18, 5 a. 
c. ], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly 
and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the ZEgean Sea, 
on the W. by Illyria, and on the N. by Dardania and 
Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)]: Aets xvi. 9 sq. 12; 
xviii. 5; xix. 21 sq.; xx. 1,8; Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 5; 
2.Co. 4. 16; 11:195 Μ11: 5, v^ 11: Χ1. 9: ἘΠῚ ἂν. db s 1 
ΤῊ... 7 85:5 av. 10.: elim. τ 95» 

Μακεδών, -dvos, 6, « Macedonian: Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B. 


| $123, 8 Rem:]; xix. 29; xxvii. 2; 2 Co. ix. 2, 4.* 


μάκελλον, -ov, τό, ἃ Lat. word, macellum [prob. akin to 
μάχ-η; Vaniéek p. 687 (cf. Plut. as below) ], a place where 
meat and other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro- 
vision-market, [A. V.shambles]: 1 Co. x. 25. (Dio Cass. 
61, 18 τὴν ἀγορὰν τῶν ὄψων, τὸ pákeAXov; [ Plut.ii. p. 277 d. 
(quaest. Rom. 54) ].) * 

μακράν (prop. fem. acc. of the adj. μακρός, sc. ὁδόν, a 
long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept. 
for pi^, [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a great way: absol., 
ἀπέχειν, Lk. xv. 20; of the terminus to which, far hence, 
ἐξαποστελῶ ce, Acts xxii. 21; with ἀπό τινος added, Mt. 
viii. 30; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. ἀπό]; Jn. xxi. 8; τὸν Oedv..- 
οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα, i. 6. who is 
near every one of us by his power and influence (so that 
we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from with- 
out), Acts xvii. 27; of εἰς μακράν [cf. W. 415 (387)] 


μακρόθεν 


those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions, 
i. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, cf. Is. ii. 2 sqq.; Zech. vi. 
15. metaph. o? μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, but little 
is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God, 
or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine king- 
dom, Mk. xii. 34; οἱ ποτὲ ὄντες μακράν (opp. to οἱ ἐγγύς), 
of heathen (on the sense, see ἐγγύς, 1 b.), Eph. ii. 13; 
also of μακράν, ib. 17.* 

μακρόθεν, (μακρός), adv., esp. of later Grk. [Polyb., 
al; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93]; Sept. for Pinte, Pim, 
ete.; from afar, afar: Mk. viii. 3; xi. 13; Lk. xviii. 12; 
xxii. 54; xxiii. 49; with the prep. ἀπό prefixed (cf. W. 
422 (393); § 65,2; B. 70 (62)): Mt. xxvi. 58 [here 
T om. WH br. ἀπό]; xxvii. 55; Mk. v. 6; xiv. 54; xv. 
40; Lk. xvi. 23; Rev.xviii.10, 15, 17; also LT Tr WH 
in Mk. xi. 13; L T Trmrg. WH in Lk. xxiii. 49; T Tr 
WH in Mk. viii. 3, (Ps. exxxvii. (exxxviii.) 6; 2 K. xix. 
25 cod. Alex.; 2 Esdr. iii. 13).* 

μακροθυμέω, -à; 1 aor., impv. μακροθύμησον, ptep. μακρο- 
θυμήσας ; (fr. μακρόθυμος, and this fr. μακρός and θυμός) ; 
to be of a long spirit, not to lose heart; hence 1. to 
persevere patiently and bravely (i. q. καρτερῶ, so Plut. de 
gen. Socr. c. 24 p. 593 f.; Artem. oneir. 4, 11) in endur- 
ing misfortunes and troubles: absol, Heb. vi. 15; Jas. 
v. 8; with the addition of ἕως and a gen. of the desired 
event, ib. 7; with éz and a dat. of the thing hoped for, 
ibid.; add, Sir. ii. 4. 2. to be patient in bearing the 
offences and injuries of others; to be mild and slow in 
avengings to be long-suffering, slow to anger, slow to pun- 
ish, (for AS PINT, to defer anger, Prov. xix. 11): absol. 
1 Co. xiii. 4; πρός τινα, 1 Th. v. 14; ἐπί with dat. of pers. 
(see ἐπί, B. 2 a. 8.), Mt. xviii. 26, 29 [here L Tr with the 
acc., so Tr in 26; see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. 8.]; Sir. xviii. 11; 
xxix. 8; hence spoken of God deferring the punishment 
of sin: ets τινα, towards one, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [here L T Tr 
mrg. διά (q. v. B. II. 2 b. sub fin.)]; ἐπί with dat. of 
pers. Lk. xviii. 7; in this difficult passage we shall nei- 
ther preserve the constant usage of μακροθυμεῖν (see just 
before) nor get a reasonable sense, unless we regard the 
words ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς as negligently (see αὐτός, IT. 6) referring 
to the enemies of the ἐκλεκτῶν, and translate καὶ μακροθυ- 
μῶν ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς even though he is long-suffering, indulgent, 
to them; —this negligenee being occasioned by the cir- 
cumstance that Luke seems to represent Jesus as speak- 
ing with Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22 (18) in mind, where ἐπ᾿ 
αὐτοῖς must be referred to ἀνελεημόνων. The reading [of 
LT Tr WH] kai μακροθυμεῖ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς ; by which τὸ paxpo- 
θυμεῖν is denied to God [ef. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac- 
cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands 
the notion of slowness on God’s part in avenging the right ; 
cf. De Wette ad loc.; [but to this it is replied, that the 
denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as- 
sumption of apparent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) 
ad loc.].* 

μακροθυμία, -as, ἡ, (μακρόθυμος [cf. μακροθυμέω). (Vulc. 
longanimitas, ete.), i. e. 1. patience, endurance, con- 
stancy, stead fasiness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear- 
ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq.; ἄνθρωπος ὧν 


387 





μᾶλλον 


μηδέποτε τὴν ἀλυπίαν αἰτοῦ παρὰ θεῶν, ἀλλὰ μακροθυμίαν, 
Menand. frag. 19, p. 203 ed. Meineke [vol. iv. p. 238 
Frag. comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]): Col. 1. 11; 2 Tim. 
iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; 
Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. lvii. 15; Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 5; cf. 1 
Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer- 
ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for DIDS 3s, Jer. xv. 
a Ro. ii. 4; ix. 22; 2 Co. vi. 6; Gal. v. 22; Eph. iv. 
2; Col. iii. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [cf. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim. 
iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
13, 1; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).* 

[Sxs. μακροθυμία, ὕπομον ἠ (occur together or in the 
same context in Col. i.11; 2 Cor. vi. 4,6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jas. v. 
10, 11; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Ignat. ad Eph.3, 1): Bp. 
Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. c.), “The difference of meaning 
is best seen in their opposites. While ὕπο. is the temper 
which does not easily succumb under suffering, uax. is the 
self-restraint which does not hastily retaliate a wrong. The 
one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to 
wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18; xvi. 32)... This distinc- 
tion, though it applies generally, is not true without excep- 
tion”. «ὡς cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at 
length) Trench, N. T. Syn. § liii.] 

μακροθύμως, adv., with longanimity (Vulg. longanimiter, 
Heb. vi. 15), i. e. patiently : Acts xxvi. 3.* 

μακρός, -d, -óv, [fr. Hom. down], long; of place, remote, 
distant, far off: χώρα, Lk. xv. 13; xix. 12. of time, long, 
lasting long: μακρὰ προσεύχομαι, to pray long, make long 
prayers, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 
47.* 

μακρο-χρόνιος, -ov, (μακρός and xpóvos), lit. ‘long-timed’ 
(Lat. longaevus), long-lived: Eph. vi. 3. (Ex. xx. 12; 
Deut. v. 16; very rare in prof. auth.) * 

μαλακία, -as, 7, (μαλακός): 1. prop. softness [fr. 
Hat. down]. 2. in the N. T. (like ἀσθένεια, ἀρρω- 
στία) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept. 
for ‘2M, disease, Deut. vii. 15; xxviii. 61; Is. xxxviii. 9, 
etc.); joined with νόσος, Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1.* 

μαλακός, -7, -dv, soft; soft to the touch: ἱμάτια, Mt. xi. 
8 RGLbr.; Lk. vii. 25, (ἱματίων πολυτελῶν κ- μαλακῶν, 
Artem. oneir. 1,78; ἐσθής, Hom. Od. 23, 290; Artem. 
oneir. 2,33 χιτών, Hom. Il. 2,42); and simply τὰ μαλακά, 
soft raiment (see λευκός, 1): Mt. xi.8 TTrWH. Like 
the Lat. mollis, metaph. and in a bad sense: effeminate, of 
a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural 
lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.; 
[Diog. Laért. 7, 173 fin.]).* 

Μαλελεήλ (Μελελεήλ, Tdf.), ὁ, CONST praising God, 
fr. Soap and 5s), Mahalaleel [A. V. Maleleel], son of 
Cainan: Lk. iii. 37.* 

μάλιστα (superlative of the adv. μάλα), [fr. Hom. down], 
adv., especially, chiefly, most of all, above all: Acts xx. 
38; xxv. 26; Gal. vi. 10; Phil. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 10; 
v. 8,17; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. i. 10; Philem. 16; 2 Pet. 
li. 10; μάλιστα γνώστης, especially expert, thoroughly 
well-informed, Acts xxvi. 3.* 

μᾶλλον (compar. of μάλα, very, very much), [fr. Hom. 
down], adv., more, to a greater degree; rather ; 1. 
added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a 


μᾶλλον 


greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree, 
more, more fully, (Germ. in hóherem Grade, Maasse); a. 
words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the 
ablative (dat.): πολλῷ much, by far, Mk. x. 48; Lk. 
xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the under- 
lying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we 
are indebted to Christ is far greater than that of the 
ruin which came from Adam; for the difference between 
the consequences traceable to Adam and to Christ is not 
only one of quality, but of quantity also; cf. Riickert, Com. 
on Rom. vol. i. 281 sq. [al. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Godet) 
content themselves here with a logical increase, far 
more certainly]) ; 2 Co. iii. 9, 11; Phil. ii. 12; πόσῳ how 
much, Lk. xii. 24; Ro. xi. 12; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; 
τοσούτῳ by so much, ὅσῳ by as much, (sc. μᾶλλον), Heb. 
x. 25. b. in comparison it often so stands that than 
before must be mentally added, [ A. V. the more, so much 
the more], as Mt. xxvii. 24 (μᾶλλον θόρυβος γίνεται [but al. 
refer this to 2 b. a. below]); Lk. v. 15 (διήρχετο uuo): 
Jn. v. 18 (μᾶλλον ἐζήτουν) ; xix. 8; Acts v. 14 ; ix. 22; 
xxii. 25 2/00.:v11. 7: 1 ΤῊ: iv. 1, 10509 7Bet31310^ Ἐτὶ 
μᾶλλον καὶ μᾶλλον, Phil.i. 9; or the person or thing with 
which the comparison is made is evident from what pre- 
cedes, as Phil. iii. 4; it is added to comparatives, Mk. 
vii. 36; 2 Co. vii. 13; πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρεῖσσον, Phil. i. 23 ; 
see [ Wetstein on Phil. l. c.]; W. $ 35, 1 cf. 603 (561); 
[B. $ 123, 11]; to verbs that have a comparative force, 
μᾶλλον διαφέρειν τινός, to be of much more value than one, 
Mt. vi. 26. μᾶλλον 5j, more than, Mt. xviii. 18; μᾶλλον 
with gen., πάντων ὑμῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Xen. mem. 3, 12, 
1). joined to positive terms it forms a periphrasis for a 
comparative [cf. W. § 35,2 a.], foll. by 5, as μακάριον p. 
for μακαριώτερον, Acts xx. 35; add, 1 Co. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 
27; πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἀναγκαία, 1 Co. xii. 22; sometimes μᾶλ- 
Xov seems to be omitted before 7; see under 7, 3 f. o. 
μᾶλλον δέ, what moreover is of greater moment, [.X. V. yea 
rather]: Ro. viii. 34 (2 Maec. vi. 23). 2. it marks 
the preference of one thing above another, and is to be 
rendered rather, sooner, (Germ. eher, vielmehr, lieber — a. 
it denotes that which occurs more easily than something 
else, and may be rendered sooner, (Germ. eher): thus 
πολλῷ μᾶλλον in arguing from the less to the greater, Mt. 
vi.30; Ro. v. 9sq.; Heb. xii. 9 [here LT Tr WH πολὺ p]; 
also πολὺ [R G πολλῷ] μᾶλλον sc. οὐκ ἐκφευξόμεθα, i. c. 
much more shall we not escape (cf. W. p. 633 (588) note 
[ B. $ 148, 3 b.]), or even ἔνδικον μισθαποδοσίαν ληψόμεθα 
(Heb. ii. 2), or something similar (cf. Matthiae $ 634, 3), 
Heb. xii. 25. πόσῳ μᾶλλον, Mt. vii. 11; x. 25; Lk. xii. 
28; Ro.xi.12,24; Philem.16. ina question, o? μᾶλλον; 
(Lat. nonne potius?) [do not... more],1 Co. ix. 12. b. 
it is opposed to something else and does away with 
it; accordingly it may be rendered the rather (Germ. 
vielmehr); a. after a preceding negative or prohibi- 
tive sentence: Mt. x.6, 28; xxv. 9; Mk. v. 26; Ro.xiv. 
13; 1 Tim. vi. 2; Heb. xii. 13; μᾶλλον δέ, Eph. iv. 28; v. 
ll. οὐχὶ μᾶλλον; (nonne potius ?) not rather etc.? 1 Co. 
0 iy VIT. B. so that μᾶλλον belongs to the thing 
which is preferred, consequently to a noun, not toa 


388 





μανθάνω 


verb: Jn. iii. 19 (ἠγάπησαν μᾶλλον τὸ σκότος ἣ τὸ φῶς, 
i. e. when they ought to have loved the light they (hated 
it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20); xii. 43; Acts iv. 
19; v. 29; 2 Tim. iii.4. that which it opposes and sets 
aside must be learned from the context [cf. W. § 35, 4]: 
Mk. xv. 11 (se. ἢ τὸν Ἰησοῦν) ; Phil. i. 12 (where the mean- 
ing is, ‘so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis- 
advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of 
disciples is increased in consequence of it"). γ. by 
way of correction, μᾶλλον δέ, nay rather; to speak more 
correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (Joseph. antt. 15, 11, 8; Ael. v. h. 
2, 13 and often in prof. auth. ; cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. 
on Sap. p. 176 sq.). c. it does not do away with that 
with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the 
preference: more willingly, more readily, sooner 
(Germ. Lieber), θέλω μᾶλλον and εὐδοκῶ μᾶλλον, to prefer, 
1 Co. xiv. 5;°2 Co. v. 8, (βούλομαι μᾶλλον, Xen. Cyr. 1, 
1, 1); ζηλοῦν, 1 Co. xiv. 1 (μᾶλλον sc. ζηλοῦτε) ; χρῶμαι, 
1 Co. vii. 21. 

Μάλχος (J 52 Grecized ; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. 
f. Luth. Thea 1876, p. 605), -ov, 6, Malchus, a servant 
of the high-priest: Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf. Hackett in B. D. 
Seville 

μάμμη, -ης, 7), 1. in the earlier Grk. writ. mother 
(the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2. 
in the later writ. ((Philo], Joseph., Plut., App., Hdian., 
Artem.) i. q. τήθη, grandmother (see Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 
133-135 [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5; 4 Mace. xvi. 9.* 

papovas (GL T Tr WH), incorrectly μαμμωνᾶς (Rec. 
[in Mt.]),-a [B. 20 (18); W.$8,1], 6, mammon (Chald. 
wi/DN1, to be derived, apparently, fr. 5X; hence what is 
trusted in [cf. Buxtorf, Lex. chald. talmud. et rabbin. col. 
1217 sq. (esp. ed. Fischer p. 613 sq.); ace. to Gesénius 
(Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. 132152 treasure (Gen. xliii. 23); 
cf. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 269]), 
riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi- 
fied and opposed to God; cf. Phil. iii. 19); Lk. xvi. 9, 
ll. (*lucrum punice mammon dicitur," Augustine [de 
serm. Dom. in monte, l. ii. c. xiv. ($ 47)]; the Sept. 
trans. the Hebr. 13128 in Is. xxxiii. 6 θησαυροί, and in 
Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 3 πλοῦτος.) * 

Mavaty, 6, (07132 consoler), Manaen, a certain prophet 
in the church at Antioch: Acts xiii. l. [See Hackett 
in Β. ΤῸ: ἘΣ ΗΝ 

Μανασσῆς [Trez. Μανν. in Rev.], gen. and ace. -ἢ 
[B: 19 (17); W. $10, 1; but see WH. App. p. 159*], 
ὁ, (NID causing to faeces fr. Nw) to forget), Manas- 
seh; 1. the firstborn son of ‘Joseph (Gen. xli. 51): 
Rev. vii. 6. 2. the son of Hezekiah, king of Judah 
(2 K. xxi. 1-18) : Mt. i. 10.* 

μανθάνω; 2 aor. ἔμαθον; pf. ptep. μεμαθηκώς ; Sept. 
for NIBH [fr. Hom. down]; to learn, be apprised ; n 
univ.: absol. to increase one's knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 11; 
2 Tim. iii. 7; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv. 
31; τί, Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 355; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim. 
ii. 14; Rev. xiv. 3; in Jn. vii. 15 supply αὐτά; foll. by 
an indir. quest., Mt.ix. 13; Χριστόν, to be imbued with 
the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20; τί foll. by ἀπό w. 


ῃ 


μανία 


gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Mt. xxiv. 32; 
Mk. xiii. 28; ἀπό w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Mt. xi. 
29; Col. i. 7; as in class. Grk. (cf. Krüger ὃ 68, 34, 1; 
B. § 147, 5 [cf. 167 (146) and ἀπό, II. 1 d.]); foll. by 
παρά w. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 cf. Jn. vi. 45; 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of pers., in one i. e. by his example [see 
év, I. 3 b.], 1 Co. iv. 6 [cf. W. 590 (548 sq.); B. 394 sq. 
(338)]. b. i. q. to hear, be informed: foll. by ὅτι, Acts 
xxiii. 27; ri ἀπό twos (gen. of pers.), Gal. iii. 2 [see ἀπό, 
wea Tb c. to learn by use and practice; [in the Pret.] 
to be in the habit of, accustomed to: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. 
v. 4; Tit. iii. 14; Phil. iv. 11, (Aeschyl. Prom. 1068; Xen. 
an. 3, 2, 25); ἔμαθεν ἀφ᾽ àv ἔπαθε τὴν ὑπακοήν, Heb. v. 8 
[ef. W. § 68, 1 and ἀπό, τι. 5.1. In the difficult passage 
1 Tim. v. 13, neither dpyai depends upon the verb pavéa- 
νουσι (which would mean “they learn to be idle", or 
“learn idleness”; so Bretschneider [ Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and 
W. 347 (325 sq.); [cf. Stallbaum's note and reff. on 
Plato’s Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor περιερχόμενοι (“ they 
learn to go about from house to house," — so the majority 
of interpreters; for, acc. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptcp. 
joined to the verb μανθάνειν and belonging to the subject 
denotes what sort of a person one learns or perceives him- 
self to be, as ἔμαθεν ἔγκυος οὖσα, “she perceived herself 
to be with child," Hdt. 1, 5); but μανθάνειν must be taken 
absolutely (see a. above) and emphatically, of what they 
learn by going about from house to house and what it is 
unseemly for them to know; cf. Bengel ad loc., and B. 
§ 144, 17; [so Wordsworth in loc.]. [Cowr.: xara- 
μανθάνω." * 

μανία, -as, 7, (μαίνομαι), madness, frenzy: Acts xxvi. 
24. [From Theognis, Hdt., down.] * 

μάννα, τό, indecl.; [also] ἡ μάννα in Joseph. (antt. 3, 
13,1 [ete. ; ἡ μάννη, Orac. Sibyll. 7, 149]; Sept. τὸ μάν [also 
τὸ μάννα, Num. xi. 7] for Hebr. t5 (fr. the unused 135, 


Arab. Que to be kind, beneficent, to bestow liberally ; 
whence the subst. > Prop. a gift [al. prefer the deriv. 
given Ex. xvi. 15,31; Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 6. "The word 
mannu is said to be found also in the old Egyptian; -Ebers, 
Durch Gosen u.s.w. p. 226; cf. * Speaker's Commentary " 
Exod. xvi. note]); manna (Vulg. in N. T. manna indecl. ; 
in O. T. man; yet manna, gen. -ae, is used by Pliny [12, 
14, 32, etc.] and Vegetius [ Vet. 2, 39] of the grains of 
certain plants); according to the accounts of travellers 
a very sweet dew-like juice, which in Arabia and other 
oriental countries exudes from the leaves [acc. to others 
only from the twigs and branches; ef. Robinson, Pal. 
i. 115] of certain trees and shrubs, particularly in the 
summer of rainy years. It hardens into little white 
pellucid grains, and is collected before sunrise by the in- 
habitants of those countries and used as an article of food, 
very sweet like honey. The Israelites in their journey 
through the wilderness met with a great quantity of food 
of this kind; and tradition, which the biblical writers 
follow, regarded it as bread sent down in profusion from 
heaven, and in various ways gave the occurrence the dig- 


389 








Μαριάμ 


nity of an illustrious miracle (Ex. xvi. 12 sqq.; Ps. 
Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 24; civ. (ev.) 40; Sap. xvi. 20); “οἴ. 
Win. RWB. s. v. Manna; Knobel on Exod. p. 171 sqq.; 
Furrer in Schenkel iv. 109 sq.; [Robinson as above, 
and p.590; T'ischendorf, Aus dem heil. Lande, p. 54 sqq. 
(where on p. vi. an analysis of diff. species of natural 
manna is given after Berthelot (Comptes rendus heb- 
dom. d. séances de l'acad. des sciences. Paris 1861, 2de 
sémestre (30 Sept.) p. 583 sqq.) ; esp. Ritter, Erdkunde 
Pt. xiv. pp. 665-695 (Gage's trans. vol. i. pp. 271-292, 
where a full list of reff.is given); esp. E. Renaud and 
E. Lacour, De la manne du désert etc. (1881). Against 
the identification of the natural manna with the miracu- 
lous, see DB.DD. s. v.; esp. Richm in his HWB.; Car- 
ruthers in the Bible Educator ii. 174 sqq.]. In the N. T. 
mention is made of a. that manna with which the 
Israelites of old were nourished: Jn. vi. 31, 49, and R 
L in 58; b. that which was kept in the ark of the 
covenant: Heb. ix. 4 (Ex. xvi. 33) ; ο. that which 
in the symbolic language of Rev. ii. 17 is spoken of as 
kept in the heavenly temple for the food of angels and 
the blessed; [see δίδωμι, B. I’. p. 146*].* 

μαντεύομαι ; (μάντις [a seer; allied to μανία, μαίνομαι ; 
cf. Curtius § 429]) ; fr. Hom. down; to act as seer; de- 
liver an oracle, prophesy, divine: Acts xvi. 16 μαντευομένη, 
of a false prophetess [A. V. by soothsaying]. Sept. for 
DOP, to practise divination; said of false prophets. [On 
the heathen character of the suggestions and associa- 
tions of the word, as distinguished fr. προφητεύω, see 
Trench, N. T. Syn. $ vi.]* 

μαραίνω: 1 fut. pass. μαρανθήσομαι; fr. Hom. Il. 9, 
212; 23,228 on; to extinguish (a flame, fire, light, ete.) ; 
to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass. 
to wither, wilt, dry up (Sap. ii. 8 of roses; Job xv. 30). 
Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, (νόσῳ, Eur. 
Ale. 203; τῷ λιμῷ, Joseph. b. 1. 6, 5, 1); i. q. to havea 
miserable end : Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig. 
suggested by what.he had just said (10) ; [B. 52 (46) ].* 

μαραναθά [so Lchm., but uapàv dda RG T Tr WH], the 
Chald. words TAS N2102. i.e. our Lord cometh or will 
come: 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB.DD. ; cf. Klostermann, Pro- 
bleme etc. (1883) p. 220 sqq.; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 174 ; 
Nestle in Theol. Stud. aus Würtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]* 

μαργαρίτης, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt. xiii. 45 sq. ; 1 Tim. ii. 
9; Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereL T WH 
accent -pirat, RG Tr -pira (cf. Τὰ Proleg. p. 101)]; 
τοὺς μαργαρίτας βάλλειν ἔμπρυσθεν χοίρων, a proverb, i. e. 
to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the 
gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in- 
competent as they are, through their hostility to the 
gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt. 
vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq.; Job xxviii. 18 sq.).* 

Μάρθα, -as (Jn. xi. 1 (cf. B. 17 (15); WH. App. p. 156]), 
ἡ, (Chald. 3779 mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis- 
ter of Lazarus of Bethany: Lk. x. 38, 40 sq.; Jn. xi. 1, 
5, 19-39; xii. 2. [On the accent cf. Kautzsch p. 8.]* 

Μαριάμ. indecl, and Μαρία, -as, 7, (0°77) ‘obstinacy,’ 
* rebelliousness '; the well-known prop. name of the sister 


Μάρκος 


of Moses; in the Targums Ὁ. ef. Delitzsch, Zeitschr. 
f. luth. Theol. for 1877 p. 2 [Maria is a good Latin name 
also]), Mary. The women of this name mentioned in 
the N. T. are the foll. 1. the mother of Jesus Christ, 
the wife of Joseph; her name is written Mapía [in an 
oblique case] in Mt. i. 16, 18; ii. 11; Mk. vi. 3; Lk. i. 
41; Aetsi. 14[R GL]; Μαριάμ in Mt. xiii. 55; Lk. i. 27, 
30-56 [(in 38 L mrg. Mapía)]; ii. 5, 16,34; [Acts i. 14 
T Tr WH]; the reading varies between the two forms 
in Mt. i. 20 [WH txt. -píav]; Lk. ii. 19 [L'T Tr WH txt. 
-pía]; so where the other women of this name are men- 
tioned, [see T'7f. Proleg. p. 116, where it appears that 
in his text the gen. is always (seven times) -pías; the 
nom. in Mk. always (seven times) -pia; that in Jn. -ριάμ 
occurs eleven times, -pia (or -av) only three times, etc. ; 
for the facts respecting the Mss., see (Tdf. u. s. and) 
WH. App. p. 156]; ef. B. 17 (15). 2. Mary Mag- 
dalene (a native of Magdala): Mt. xxvii. 56,61; xxviii. 
1; Mk. xv. 40, 47; xvi. 1, 9; Lk. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn. 
x1x91255 3x: 15115. 16; (18: 3. the mother of James 
the less and Joses, the wife of Clopas (or Alphzus) and 
sister of the mother of Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61; xxviii. 
1: Mk: xv. 40:47; xvi« 15 Lk. xxiv. 10: ἀπ εχ, 90 
(see Ἰάκωβος, 2). There are some, indeed, who, think- 
ing it improbable that there were two living sisters of 
the name of Mary (the common opinion), suppose that 
not three but four women are enumerated in Jn. xix. 25, 
and that these are distributed into two pairs so that ἡ 
ἀδελφὴ τῆς μητρὸς Ἰησοῦ designates Salome, the wife of 
Zebedee; so esp. Wieseler inthe Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 
1840, p. 648 sqq., [ef. Bp. Lghtft. com. on Gal., Dissert. 
ii. esp. pp. 255 sq. 264] with whom Lücke, Meyer, Ewald 
and others agree; in opp. to them cf. Grimm in Ersch 
and Gruber's Encykl. sect. 2 vol. xxii. p. 1 sq. In fact, 
instances are not wanting among the Jews of two living 
brothers of the same name, e. g. Onias, in Joseph. antt. 
12, 5,1; Herod, sons of Herod the Great, one by Mari- 
amne, the other by Cleopatra of Jerusalem, Joseph. antt. 
17,1, 3; b. j. 1, 28, 4; [cf. B. D. s. v. Mary of Cleophas; 
Bp. Lghtft. u. s. p. 264]. 4. the sister of. Lazarus 
and Martha: Lk. χ. 39, 49; Jn.xi. 1-45; xii.3. 5. 
the mother of John Mark: Acts xii. 12. 6. a cer- 
tain Christian woman mentioned in Ro. xvi. 6.* 
Mápkos, -ov, 6, Mark; ace. to the tradition of the church 
the author of the second canonical Gospel and identical 
with the John Mark mentioned in the Acts (see Ἰωάννης, 
5). He was the son of a certain Mary who dwelt at Je- 
rusalem, was perhaps converted to Christianity by Peter 
(Acts xii. 11 sq.), and for this reason called (1 Pet. v. 13) 
Peter's son. He was the cousin of Barnabas and the 
companion of Paul in some of his apostolie travels; and 
lastly was the associate of Peter also: Acts xii. 12, 25; 
xv. 37, 39; Col.iv. 10; 2 Tim. iv. 11; Philem. 24 (23); 
1 Pet v. 13, cf. Euseb. h. e. 2, 15 sq.; 3,39. Some, as 
Grotius, [ Tillemont, Hist. Eccl. ii. 89 sq. 503 sq.; Patri- 
tius, De Evangeliis l. 1, c. 2, quaest. 1 (ef. Cotelerius, Patr. 
Apost. i. 262 sq.) ], Kienlen (in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, 
p. 423), contend that there were two Marks, one the 


990 


μαρτυρέω 


disciple and companion of Paul mentioned in the Acts 
and Pauline Epp., the other the associate of Peter and 
mentioned in 1 Pet. v. 13; [ef. Jas. Morison, Com. on 
Mk. Introd. § 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 10].* 

μάρμαρος, -ov, 6, 7, (uappaipw to sparkle, glisten); 1. 
a stone, rock, (Hom., Eur.). 2. marble ([cf. Ep. Jer. 
71], Theophr., Strabo, al.): Rev. xviii. 12.* 

páprvp, -upos, 6, see μάρτυς. 

μαρτυρέω, -; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμαρτύρουν ; fut. pap- 
τυρήσω; 1 aor. ἐμαρτύρησα; pf. μεμαρτύρηκα; Pass., pres. 
μαρτυροῦμαι; impf. ἐμαρτυροῦμην ; pf. μεμαρτύρημαι; 1 aor. 
ἐμαρτυρήθην ; fr. [Simon., Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down ; 
to be a witness, to bear witness, testify, i. e. to affirm that 
one has seen or heard or experienced something, or that 
(so in the N. T.) he knows it because taught by divine 
revelation or inspiration, (sometimes in the N. T. the 
apostles are said μαρτυρεῖν, as those who had been eye- 
and ear- witnesses of the extraordinary sayings, deeds 
and sufferings of Jesus, which proved his Messiahship ; 
so too Paul, as one to whom the risen Christ had visibly 
appeared; cf. Jn. xv. 27; xix. 35; xxi. 24; Acts xxiii. 
11; 1 Co.xv. 155 1Jn.X 2; ch Actsi. 22 sq. ; 11. 825; iii. 
15; iv. 33; v. 92; x. 89, 41; xil. 31; xxvi. 16; [of. 
Westcolt, (* Speaker's") Com. on Jn., Introd. p. xlv. 
sq-] 5 a. in general; absol. to give (not to keep 
back) testimony: Jn. xv. 27; Acts xxvi. 5; foll. by ὅτε 
recitative and the orat. direct., Jn. iv. 39; also preceded 
by λέγων, Jn. i. 32; μαρτυρεῖν eis with an acc. of the place 
into (unto) which the testimony (concerning Christ) is 
borne, Acts xxiii. 11 [see eis, A. I. 5 b.]; μαρτυρῶ, in- 
serted parenthetieally (W. $ 62, 2), 2 Co. viii. 3; i. q. 
to prove or confirm by testimony, 1 Jn. v. 6 sq.; used of 
Jesus, predieting what actually befell him, Jn. xiii. 21; 
of God, who himself testifies in the Scriptures that a 
thing is so (viz. as the author declares), foll. by the reci- 
tative ὅτι, Heb. vii. 17 R.  papr. foll. by περί w. gen. of 
a pers., to bear witness concerning one: Jn.i. 7 sq.; περὶ 
ToU ἀνθρώπου, concerning man, i. e. to tell what one has 
himself learned about the nature, character, conduct, of 
men, Jn. ii. 25 [see ἄνθρωπος, 1 a.]; περί τινος, foll. by 
direct disc., Jn. i. 15; the Scriptures are said to testify 
περὶ Ἰησοῦ, i. e. to declare things which make it evi- 
dent that he was truly sent by God, Jn. v. 39; God is said 
to do the same,— through the Scriptures, ib. 37 cf. viii. 
18; through the expiation wrought by the baptism and 
death of Christ, and the Holy Spirit giving souls assur- 
ance of this expiation, 1 Jn. v. 6-9; so John the Baptist, 
as being a ‘prophet’, Jn. v. 32; so the works which he 
himself did, ib. 36 (there foll. by ὅτι); x. 25; so the 
Holy Spirit, Jn. xv. 26; the apostles, 27; so Christ him- 
self περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. 18. περί w. gen. 
of the thing, Jn. xxi. 24; περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ, to bring for- 
ward evidence to prove τὸ κακόν, Jn. xviii. 23. with the 
ace. of a cognate noun, μαρτυρίαν μαρτυρεῖν περί W. à gen. 
of the pers., Jn. v. 32; 1 Jn. v. 9 Rec.; 10, (τὴν αὐτὴν 
μαρτυρίαν μαρτυρεῖν, Plat. Eryx. p. 399 b.; τὴν μαρτυρίαν 
αὐτοῦ ἣν τῇ ἀρετῇ μαρτυρεῖ, Epict. diss. 4, 8, 32 [cf. W. 
| 925 (211); B. 148 (129)]) ; w. an ace. of the thing, to 





μαρτυρέω 


testify a thing, bear witness to (of) anything: Jn. iii. 11, 
32; supply αὐτά in Jn. xix. 35; τινί τι, 1 Jn. i. 2; ὃς 
ἐμαρτύρησε. . - Χριστοῦ, who has borne witness of (viz. 
in this book, i. e. the Apocalypse) what God has spoken 
and Jesus Christ testified (56. concerning future events; 
see λόγος, I. 2 b. e.), Rev. i. 2; 6 μαρτυρῶν ταῦτα he that 
testifieth these things i. e. has caused them to be testified 
by the prophet, his messenger, Rev. xxii. 20; ματυρῆσαι 
ὑμῖν ταῦτα ἐπὶ [L Trmrg. WH mre. ἐν] ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις, to 
cause these things to be testified to you im the churches 
or for, on account of, the churches, Rev. xxii. 16, — 
unless ἐπί be dropped from the text and the passage 
translated, (o you, viz. the (seven) churches (of Asia 
Minor), the prophet reverting again to i. 4; cf. De 
Wette, Bleek, Diisterdieck, ad loc.; [al., retaining ἐπί, 
render it over, concerning, cf. x. 11; W. 393 (368) c.; see 
ἐπί, B. 2 f. 8. fin.]. of testimony borne not in word but 
by deed, in the phrase used of Christ μαρτυρεῖν τὴν καλὴν 
ὁμολογίαν, to witness the good confession, to attest the 
truth of the (Christian) profession by his sufferings and 
death, 1 Tim. vi. 13, where οἵ. Hofmann. Pass.: Ro. 
iii. 21 (a righteousness such as the Scriptures testify 
that God ascribes to believers, ef. iv. 3). apr. foll. by 
ὅτι that, Jn. i. 34 [cf. W. 273 (256)]; [iv. 44]; xii. 17 
[here R* Tr txt. WH ὅτε]; 1 Jn.iv. 14 ; περί w. gen. of 
a pers. foll. by ὅτι, Jn. v. 36; vii. 7; κατά τινος, against 
[so W. 382 (357), Mey., al.; yet see κατά, I. 2 b.] one, 
foll by ὅτι, 1 Co. xv. 15. w. a dat. of the thing i. e. 
for the benefit of, in the interests of, a thing [cf. B. 
§ 133, 11]: τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, Jn. v. 33; xviii. 37; σοῦ τῇ ἀλη- 
θείᾳ (see ἀλήθεια, IT.), to bear witness unto thy truth, 
how great it is, 3 Jn. 3, 6; used of the testimony which 
is given in deeds to promote some object: τῷ λόγῳ, 
Acts xiv. 3 [T prefixes ἐπί]; with a dat. (of a thing) 
incommodi: μαρτυρεῖτε (T Tr WH μάρτυρές ἐστε) τοῖς 
ἔργοις τῶν πατέρων, by what ye are doing ye add to the 
deeds of your fathers a testimony which proves that 
those things were done by them, Lk. xi. 48. w. a dat. 
of the person: to declare to one by testimony (by sug- 
gestion, instruction), Heb. x. 15; foll. by direct dis- 
course, Rev. xxii. 18 GLTTr WH; to testify to one 
what he wishes one to testify concerning him: Acts xxii. 5; 
foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. iii. 28; Ro. x. 2; Gal. iv. 
15; Col. iv. 13; foll by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 43; to 
give testimony in one's favor, to commend [W. § 31, 4 b.; 
B. as above]: Jn. ii. 26; Acts xiii. 22; xv. 8; pass. 
μαρτυροῦμαι wilness is borne to me, it is witnessed of me 
ΟΥ̓. § 39, 1; B. $ 134, 4): foll. by ὅτι, Heb. vii. 8; foll. 
by ὅτι recitative and direct disc., Heb. vii. 17 LT Tr 
WH; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject, Heb. xi. 
4 sq. b. emphatically; to utter honorable testimony, 
give a good report: w. a dat. of the pers., Lk. iv. 22; ἐπί 
τινι, on account of, for a thing, Heb. xi. 4 [here L Tr read 
pap. ἐπὶ krÀ. τῷ θεῷ (but see the Comm.)]; μεμαρτύρηταί 
τινι ὑπό τινος, 3 Jn. 12; pass. μαρτυροῦμαι lo be borne 
(good) witness to, to be well reported of, to have (good) 
testimony borne to one, accredited, attested, of good report, 
approved: Acts vi. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1 sq.; 18, 


591 





μαρτύριον 


1; 19,1; 47,4); foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of the thing in 
which the commended excellence appears, 1 Tim. v. 10; 
Heb. xi. 2, (ἐπί τινι, for a thing, Athen. 1 p. 25 f.; [yet 
cf. W. 387 (362) note]) ; διά τινος, to have (honorable) 
testimony borne to one through (by) a thing, Heb. xi. 
39; ὑπό w. gen. of the pers. giving honorable testimony, 
Acts x. 22; xvi. 2; xxii. 12, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 38, 2; 
44, 3; Ignat. ad Philad. c. 5, 2 cf. 11, 1 and ad Eph. 12, 
2; Antonin. 7, 62) ; w. dat. of the pers. testifying (i. q. 
ὑπό twos), Acts xxvi. 22 RG. c. Mid., ace. to a 
false reading, to conjure, implore: 1 Th. ii. 12 (11), where 
T Tr WH have rightly restored μαρτυρόμενοι. [Comp.: 
ἐπι-, συν-επι-: kara-, συμ-μαρτυρέω.} * 

μαρτυρία, -as, 7, (μαρτυρέω, q. v.), [ἔν. Hom. down]; 1. 
a testifying: the office committed to the prophets of tes- 
tifying concerning future events, Rev. xi. 7. 2. 
what one testifies, testimony: univ. Jn. v. 34; in a legal 
sense, of testimony before a judge: Lk. xxii. 71; Mk. 
xiv. 56; w. gen. of the subj., Mk. xiv. 59; Jn. viii. 17; 
1 Jn. v. 9; κατά τινος, against one, Mk. xiv. 55; in an 
historical sense, of the testimony of an historian: Jn. 
xix. 35; xxi. 24; in an ethical sense, of testimony con- 
cerning one's character: 3 Jn. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Tit. i 
13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting mat- 
ters relating to the truth of Christianity : of the testi- 
mony establishing the Messiahship and the divinity of 
Jesus (see μαρτυρέω, a.), given by —John the Bap- 
tist: Jn. i. 7; v. 325 ἡ papr. τοῦ Ἰωάννου, i. 19; Jesus 
himself, w. a gen. of the subj., Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. ; 
God, in the prophecies of Seripture concerning Jesus 
the Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him, 
in the works done by him, Jn. v. 36; through the Holy 
Spirit, in the Christian's blessed consciousness of eternal 
life and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism 
[(cf. reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3)] and the expiatory death 
of Christ, w. a subject. gen. τοῦ θεοῦ. 1 Jn. v. 9-11, cf. 6-8; 
the apostles, ood τὴν gapr. περὶ ἐμοῦ, Acts xxii. 18 
[W. 137 (130)]; the other followers of Christ: Rev. 
vi. 9; w. a gen. of the subj. αὐτῶν, Rev. xii. 11; w. a 
gen. of the obj. Ἰησοῦ, ib. 17; xix. 10; xx. 4 (ἔχειν this 
μαρτ. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in 
bearing it, Rev. vi. 9; xii. 17; xix. 10, [see ἔχω, I. 1 d.]; 
others, however, explain it to have the duty of testifying 
laid upon one’s self); elsewhere the “testimony” of 
Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things, 
of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11, 
32 sq.; ἡ μαρτ. Ἰησοῦ, that testimony which he gave 
concerning future events relating to the consummation 
of the kingdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20); διὰ 
τὴν p. Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, to receive this testimony, ib. 9." 

μαρτύριον, -ov, τό, (udprvp [cf μάρτυς), [fr. Pind., 
Hdt. down]. Sept. for ty, n3, oftener for n11y (an or- 
dinance, precept); most freq. for 355 (an assembly), 
as though that came fr. *y to testify, whereas it is fr. 
yy to appoint; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the 
subj.: τῆς συνειδήσεως, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj.: dzo- 
διδόναι τὸ p. τῆς ἀναστάσεως ᾿Ιησοῦ, Acts iv. 33. b. 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30, 


μαρτύρομαι 


1 4.7: the proclamation of salvation by the apostles 
is so called (for reasons given under paprvpéo, init.), 
1 Co.i.6; also τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν, 2 Tim. i. 8; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
concerning God [W. u. s.], i. e. concerning what God 
has done through Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co. 
ii. 1 [here WH txt. μυστήριον); w. the subject. gen. ἡμῶν, 
given by us, 2 Th. i. 10. eis μαρτ. τῶν λαληθησομένων, 
to give testimony concerning those things which were 
to be spoken (in the Messiah's time) i. e. concerning the 
Christian revelation, Heb. iii. 5; cf. Delitzsch ad loc. 
[al. refer it to the Mosaic law (Num. xii. 7, esp. 8); 
cf. Riehm, Lehrbegriff d. Heb. i. 312]. C. els pup- 
τύριον αὐτοῖς for a testimony unto them, that they may 
have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or that: 
e. g. that a leper has been cured, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; 
Lk. v. 14; that persons may get knowledge of something 
the knowledge of which will be for their benefit, Mt. x. 
18; xxiv. 14; Mk. xiii. 9; that they may have evidence 
of their impurity, Mk. vi. 11; in the same case we find 
eis μαρτ. ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, for a testimony against them [cf. ἐπί, 
C. I. 2 g. y. B8.], Lk. ix. 5; ἀποβήσεται ὑμῖν εἰς papr. it 
will turn out to you as an opportunity of bearing testi- 
mony concerning me and my cause. Lk. xxi. 13; eis p. 
ὑμῖν ἔσται, it will serve as a proof of your wickedness, 
Jas. v. 3; by apposition to the whole preceding clause 
ΟὟ. § 59, 9 a.), τὸ μαρτ. καιροῖς ἰδίοις, that which (to wit, 
that Christ gave himself as a ransom) would be (the sub- 
stance of) the testimony i. q. was to be testified (by the 
apostles and the preachers of the gospel) in the times 
fitted for it, 1 Tim. ii. 6 [where Lehm. om. τὸ papr.]; cf. 
the full exposition of this pass. in Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. 
iii. p. 12 sqq. ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου, Acts vii. 44; Rev. 
xy. 5; in Sept. very often for 3jy2-5n& (see above), 
and occasionally for ΠΥ Sak, as Ex. xxxviii. 26; 
Lev. xxiv. 3, etc.* , 

μαρτύρομαι (fr. μάρτυρ [cf. μάρτυς); 1. to cite a 
witness, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Tragg., 
Thuc., Plato, sqq.) ; to affirm by appeal to God, to declare 
solemnly, protest: ravra, Plat. Phil. p. 47 c.; ὅτι, Acts xx. 
26; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God’s 
name, exhort solemnly: τινί, Acts xxvi. 22 L T Tr WH; 
foll. by the acc. w. inf., Eph. iv. 17; εἰς τό foll. by acc. 
w. inf. [cf. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) T Tr WH. 
[Comp.: δια-, προ-μαρτύρομαι. * 

μάρτυς ( Aeolie μάρτυρ, a form not found in the N. T.; 
[etymologically one who is mindful, heeds; prob. allied 
with Lat. memor, cf. Vanitek p. 1201; Curtius $ 4667), 
-vpos, acc.-vpa,ó; plur. μάρτυρες, dat. plur. μάρτυσι; Sept. 
for 3j; [Hes., Simon., Theogn., al.]; a witness (one who 
avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or 
knows by any other means) ; a. ina legal sense: 
Mt. xviii. 16; xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii. 
58; 2 Co. xiii. 1; 1 Tim. v. 19; Heb. x. 28. b. in 
an historical sense: Acts x. 41; 1 Tim. vi. 12; (2 Tim. 
ii. 2]; one who is a spectator of anything, e. g. of a con- 
test, Heb. xii. 1; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48; 


992 


μάταιος 


who testifies for one’, Actsi.8 LT Tr WH; xiii. 31; w. 
a gen. of the possessor and of the obj., Acts v. 32 Ree. ;. 
μάρτυρα εἶναί τινι, to be a witness for one, serve him by 
testimony, Acts i. 8 RG; xxii. 15; [Lk. xi. 48 T Tr 
WH]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation 
appeal is made; hence the formulas μάρτυς pov ἐστιν 6 
θεός, Ro. i. 9; Phil. i. 8; θεὸς μαρτύς, 1 Th. ii. 5; μάρτυρα 
τὸν θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι, 2 Co. i. 23; ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες k. ὁ θεός, 
1 Th. ii. 10; the faithful interpreters of God’s counsels 
are called God’s witnesses: Rev. xi. 3; Christ is reck- 
oned among them, Rev. i.°5 ; iii. 14. c. in an ethi- 
cal sense those are called μάρτυρες Ἰησοῦ, who after his 
example have proved the strength and genuineness of 
their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [cf 
B. D. Am. ed. and Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Martyr]: 
Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13; xvii. 6.* 

pac 06s, Doric for μαστός (q. v.): Rev. i. 13 Tdf. [*this 
form seems to be Western " (Hort, App. p. 149)]. 

μασσάομαι (RG) more correctly μασάομαι (LT Tr 
WH): impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμασῶντο; (MAQ, μάσσω, to 
knead) ; to chew, consume, eat, devour, (κρέας, Arstph- 
Plut. 321; ra δέρματα τῶν θυρεῶν, Joseph. b. 1. 6, 3, 3 5. 
ῥίζας ξύλων, Sept. Job xxx. 4, and other exx. in other 
auth.) : ἐμασῶντο τὰς γλώσσας αὐτῶν, they gnawed their 
tongues (for pain), Rev. xvi. 10.* 

μαστιγόω, -, 3 pers. sing. μαστιγοῖ ; fut. μαστιγώσω ;. 
1 aor. ἐμαστίγωσα; (μάστιξ); fr. Hdt.down; Sept. chiefly 
for 737; to scourge; prop.: τινά, Mt. x. 17; xx.19; xxiil.. 
84; Mk.x.34; Lk. xviii. 33; Jn. xix.1; [cf. B. D. s. v. 
Scourging; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. excurs. xi.]. metaph. 
of God as a father chastising and training men as chil- 
dren by afflictions: Heb. xii. 6; cf. Jer. v. 3; Prov. iii 
12; Judith viii. 27.* 

pacT(o; i. q. μαστιγόω, 4. V.; τινά, Acts xxii. 25. 
(Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. 11, and often in Hom.) * 

μάστιξ, -ryos, ἡ, a whip, scourge, (for vw, 1 K. xii. 11, 
14; Prov.xxvi 3): Acts xxii. 24; Heb. xi.36; metaph. 
a scourge, plague, i. e. a calamity, misfortune, esp. as sent 
by God to discipline or punish (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.), 
33; with Διός added, Hom. Il. 12, 37; 13, 812; θεοῦ, 
Aeschyl. sept. 607): of distressing bodily diseases, Mk. 
lii. 10; v. 29, 34; Lk. vii. 21; 2 Macc. ix. 11.* 

μαστός, -00, 6, (μάσσω to knead [more prob. akin to. 
paddw, Lat. madidus, etc.; cf. Vaniéek p. 693; Curtius 
8 4567), fr. Soph., Hdt. down; the breast (for ww, Job 11... 
12; Cant. i. 13, etc.); plur., the breasts (nipples) of ἃ man,. 
Rev.i.13 RG Tr WH [here Tdf. μασθοῖς (cf. WH. App. 
p. 149*), Lehm. pa£ois]; breasts of a woman, Lk. xi. 27; 
xxiii. 29.* 

[Mara8(as, see Ματταθίας. 

ματαιολογία, -as, 7, (ματαιολόγος), vain talking, empty 
talk, (Vulg. vaniloquium) : 1 Tim.i.6. (Plut. mor. p. 6 f. ;. 
Porphyr. de abstin. 4, 16.) * 

ματαιολόγος, -ov, 6, (μάταιος and λέγω), an idle talker, 
one who utters empty, senseless things: Tit. i. 10.* 

μάταιος, -aía (1 Co. xv. 17; [1 Pet. i. 187), -awov, also 


Acts i. 22; ii. 32; iii. 15; v. 32 GL T Tr WH; x. 39; | -os, -ov, (Jas.i. 26; Tit. iii. 9), [cf. WH. App. p.157; W. 
xxvi 16; 1 Pet. v.1; w. a gen. of the possessor ‘one | $ 11, 1], (fr. μάτην), Sept. for 5353, NY, 312 (a lie), etc. ; 


ματαιότης 


as in prof. auth. (Lat. vanus) devoid of force, truth, suc- 
cess, result, [ A.V. uniformly vain]: univ.: ἡ θρησκεία, Jas. 
i. 26; useless, to no purpose, ἡ πίστις. 1 Co. xv. 17; fool- 
ish, διαλογισμοί, 1 Co. iii. 20; ζητήσεις, Tit. iii. 9; given 
to vain things and leading away from salvation, ava- 
στροφή, 1 Pet. i.18. τὰ μάταια, vain things, vanilies, of 
heathen deities and their worship (Gan, Jer. ii. 5; x. 3; 
53nn ns 32 πορεύεσθαι ὀπίσω τῶν ματ. 2 K.: xvii. 
15; ἘΠ 935, μάταια, Jer. viii. 19; εἴδωλα, Deut. ἘΣ ΧΙ DI 
Jer. xiv. 22): Acts xiv. 15. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.]* 

ματαιότης, -ητος, 7, (μάταιος, q. V-), ἃ purely bibl. and 
eccles. word [(Pollux 1. 6 c. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for San 
(often in Eccles.), also for WW, ete. ; vanity; a. what 
is devoid of truth and appropriateness: ὑπέρογκα ματαιό- 
τητος (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18. b. perverse- 
ness, depravation: τοῦ νοός, Eph. iv. 17. c. frailty, 
want of vigor: Ro. viii. 20.* 

ματαιόω : (μάταιος); 1 aor. pass. ἐματαιώθην: to make 
empty, vain, foolish: ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς 
αὐτῶν, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell 
into error, Ro. i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 15; Jer. ii. 5; 1 Chr. 
xxi. 8; [etc.]; nowhere in Grk. auth.) * 

μάτην (accus. [cf. W. 230 (216) ; B. $ 131, 12] of parm, 
i. q. paría, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Pind., 
Aeschyl. down, in vain, fruitlessly: Mt. xv. 9 and Mk. 
vii. 7, after Isa. xxix. 13 Sept.* 

Ματθαῖος (L T Tr WH Μαθθαῖος, cf. B. 8 (7); [ WH. 
App. 159^; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. $ 5 p. 562]), -ov 
[B. 18 (16) ], 6, (commonly regarded as Hebr. MAD gift 
of God, fr. jm and i; but ivo is in Greek Maróías, 
and the mE of the names "n (fr. i a festival) in 
Greek *Ayyaios, ^31 Ζακχαῖος, and others, as well as the 


Ss 
Syriac form of the name before us «A Sc, [and its form 


in the Talmud, viz. ^2 or wn»; Sanhedrin 48": Meu- 
schen, N. T. ex Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to 
adopt the Aramaic form ^52, and to derive that from 
the unused sing. i2, a man, plur. O°; hence i. q. 
manly, cf. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723 
sqq-), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards 
an apostle of Jesus: Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. Mk. ii. 14; Lk. v. 
27 sqq.; see Aevi, 4); Mt.x.3; Mk.iii. 18; Lk. vi. 155 Acts 
1.13. Acc. to Papias (in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39) he wrote down 
ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ rà (κυριακὰ) λόγια, i. e. the sayings of our 
Lord ; this collection of discourses, perhaps already re- 
touched by some one else and translated into Greek, the 
author of our first canonical Gospel combined with ac- 
counts of the acts and sufferings of Christ, and so it came 
to pass that this Gospel was ascribed by the church to 
Matthew asitsauthor. [Butthis theory seems to be ren- 
dered unnecessary by the fact that λόγια had already 
come to denote “sacred oracles” i: q. ἱερὰ γράμματα, 
Joseph. b. j. 6, 5, 4, or ἱεραὶ γραφαί, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
53,1; see the added reff. s. v. λόγιον. Cf. Fisher, Super- 
nat. Origin of Christianity, pp. 160-167; and reff. in 
Schaff, Hist. of the Christ. Church, i. 622 sq.; Bleek, 
Einl. ins N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 115 sq.]* 

Ματθάν (L'T Tr WH Μαθθάν [see reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος ]), 


998 








μάχαιρα 


6, (195 a gift), Matthan, one of Christ's ancestors: Mt. 
1915:* 

Ματθάτ (Tdf. Ma6640, [see reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος), 6, 
(Ann, fr. 13), Matthat; 1. one of Christ’s ances- 
tors, the son of Levi: Lk. iii 2. one of the 
ancestors of the man just spoken of: Lk. iii. 29 [here 
Tr WH Μαθθάτ (see as above) ].* 

Ματθίας (T Tr WH Μαθθίας [sce reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος ]), 
-a [yet cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (see Ματθαῖος), Matthias, the 
apostle who took the place of Judas Iscariot: Acts i. 
23, 26.* 

Ματταθά, ὁ, (see the preceding names), Mattatha, the 
son of Nathan and grandson of David : Lk. iii. 31.* 

Ματταθίας, -ου [ B. 18 (16)], 6, Mattathias; 1. one of 
Christ's ancestors: Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. Μαθθαθίου (cf- 
reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος. init.) ]. 2. one of the ancestors 
of the man just mentioned : Lk. iii. 26 ['Tr mre. Mara6(ov].* 

μάχαιρα, zen. -as [so (with RG) Lehm. in Lk. xxi. 24] 
and -ns, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lehm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts: 
xii. 2] and -y (betw. which forms the codd. vary, cf. [| Scriv- 
ener, Collation, ete. p. lvi.; T4f. Proleg. p. 117; WH- 
App. p- 156°]; W. 62 (61); B.11; Delitzsch on Heb. xi- 
34 p. 584 note), 7, (akin to μάχη and Lat. mactare); ole 
a large knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh = 
Hom., Pind., Hdt.,al.; hence Gen. xxii. 6, 10; Judg. xix. 
29 Alex.,for nboxn. 2. asmall sword, distinguished 
fr. the large sword, the ῥομφαία (Joseph. antt. 6, 9,5 ἀπο- 
τέμνει THY κεφαλὴν τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ τῇ ἐκείνου (Goliath’s), pa- 
χαιραν οὐκ ἔχων αὐτός), and curved, for a cutting stroke; 
distinct also fr. ξίφος, a straight sword, for thrusting, Xen- 
r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq- 
used interchangeably. Inthe N. T. univ. a sword (Sept- 
often for 321) : as a weapon for making or repelling an 
attack, Mt. xxvi. 47, 51, 52, [25]; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq.; 
Lk. xxii. 36, 38, 49, 52; Jn. xviii. 10sq. ; Acts xvi. 27; 
Heb. xi. 37; Rev. vi. 4; xiii. 10, [14]; by a Hebraism, 
στόμα μαχαίρας, the edge of the sword (39%) ^8, Gen. xxxiv. 
26; Josh. viii. 24; 1S. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, ete. [but in 
the Sept. the rendering στ. ξίφους or or. ῥομφαίας is more 
com.]): Lk. xxi. 24; Heb.xi.34; μάχαιρα δίστομος (see 
δίστομος), Heb. iv. 12. of the sword as the instrument 
of a magistrate or judge: death by the sword, Ro. viii. 
35; ἀναιρεῖν τινα μαχαίρᾳ, Acts xii. 2; τὴν μ. φορεῖν; to 
bear the sword, is used of him to whom the sword has been 
committed, viz. to use when a malefactor is to be pun- 
ished; hencei. q. to have the power of life and death, Ro- 
xiii. 4 (so ξίφος, ξίφη ἔχειν, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 7, 16 ; 
vit. sophist. 1, 25, 2 (3), cf. Dion Cass. 42, 27; and in 
the Talmud the king who bears the sword, of the Hebrew 
king). Metaph. pdy., a weapon of war, is used for zwar, 
or for quarrels and dissensions that destroy peace; soin 
the phrase βαλεῖν μάχαιραν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, to send war on 
earth, Mt. x. 34 (for which Lk. xii. 51 says διαμερισμόν) ; 
ἡ μάχ. τοῦ πνεύματος, the sword with which the Spirit 
subdues the impulses to sin and proves its own power and 
efficacy (which sword is said to be ῥῆμα θεοῦ [cf. B. 128 
(112)]), Eph. vi. 17 [on the gen. in this pass. ef. Ellicott 
or Meyer].* 


μάχη 


μάχη, -ης, ἡ, [μάχομαι; fr. Hom. down], Sept. several 
times for 3°), iv», ete.; a Sight, combat ; 1. of 
those in arms, a. battle. 2. of persons at variance, 
disputants, ete., strife, contention; a quarrel: 2 Co. vii. 
5; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Jas. iv. 1; μάχαι νομικαί, contentions 
about the law, Tit. iii. 9." 

μάχομαι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμάχοντο ; [allied with μά- 
χαιρα; Curtius $459; Vanicek p. 687; fr. Hom. down]; 
to fight: prop. of armed combatants, or those who engage 
in a hand-to-hand struggle, Acts vii. 26; trop. of those 
who engage in a war of words, to quarrel, wrangle, dis- 
pute: 2 Tim. ii. 24; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, In. vi. 52 [ef. W. 
§ 31,5; B.§ 133, 8]; of those who contend at law 
for property and privileges, Jas. iv. 2. [Comp.: δια- 
μάχομαι. SYN. see πόλεμος, b.] * 

μεγαλ-αυχέω, -@ ; (μεγάλαυχος, and this fr. μεγάλα and 
abxéo); to be grandiloquent; to boast great things, to bear 
one’s self loftily in speech or action: ἡ γλῶσσα μεγαλαυχεῖ 
(LT Tr WH μεγάλα αὐχεῖ), Jas. iii. 5, where it seems 
to denote any kind of haughty language which wounds 
and provokes others, and stirs up strife. (Aeschyl. Ag. 
1528; Polyb. 12, 13, 10; 8, 23,11; Diod. 15, 16, al.; 
mid. γυναῖκα πρὸς θεοὺς ἐρίζουσαν καὶ μεγαλαυχουμένην, 
Plat. rep. 3 p. 395 d.; for 723, to exalt one's self; carry 
one's self haughtily, Ezek. xvi. 50; Zeph.iii. 11; add, 2 
Mace. xv. 32; Sir. xlviii. 18.) * 

μεγαλεῖος, -εία, -etov, (μέγας), magnificent, excellent, splen- 
did, wonderful, (Xen., Joseph., Artem., al); absol. pe- 
γαλεῖα (ποιεῖν τινι) to do great things for one (show him 
conspicuous favors), Lk. i. 49 RG; τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ θεοῦ 
(Vulg. magnalia dei [A. V. the mighty works of God), 
i.e. the glorious perfections of God and his marvellous 
doings (753, Ps. lxx. (Ixxi.) 19; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 
205 xln. 21), Acts i. 11.* 

μεγαλειότης, -jros, 7, (fr. the preceding word), great- 
ness, magnificence, (Athen. 4, 6 p. 130 fin.; for nw2n, 
Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 9); the majesty of God, Lk. ix. 43; τῆς 
᾿Αρτέμιδος, Acts xix. 27; of the visible splendor of the 
divine majesty as it appeared in the transfiguration of 
Christ, 2 Pet. i. 16.* 

μεγαλοπρεπής, -és, sen. -ovs, (μέγας, and zpézeit is be- 
coming [see zpézo]), befitting a great man, magnificent, 
splendid ; full of majesty, majestic: 2 Pet.i.17. (2 Macc. 
viii. 15; xv. 13; 3 Macc. ii. 9; Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) * 

μεγαλύνω ; impf. ἐμεγάλυνον ; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐμεγαλύνετο] : 1 aor. inf. μεγαλυνθῆναι ; 1 fut. μεγαλυνθή- 
cogat; (μέγας) ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Thuc. down; Sept. 
mostly for 5337; 1. to make great, magnify, (Vulg. 
magnifico): τινά or ti, prop. of dimension, Mt. xxiii. 5 
[here A.V. enlarge]; pass. to increase: of bodily stature, 
ἐμεγαλύνθη τὸ παιδάριον, 1 S. ii. 21; so in a figure, 2 Co. 
x. 15, of Paul, that his apostolic efficiency among the 
Corinthians may increase more and more and have more 
abundant results [al. refer this to 2; see Meyer (ed. 
Heinrici) in loc.]. metaph. to make conspicuous: Lk. i. 
58 (on which see ἔλεος, 2 a.). 2. to deem or declare 
great, i. e. to esteem highly, to extol, laud, celebrate: Lk. i. 
46; Acts v. 12; x. 46; xix. 17, (often so in class. Grk. 


994 





, μέγας 


also); pass. i. q. to get glory and praise: ἔν τινι, in a 
thing, Phil. i. 20.* 
μεγάλως, adv., greatly: Phil.iv. 10. [Fr. Hom. down.]* 
μεγαλωσύνη, -ns, 7, only in bibl. and eccl. writ. [cf. 
W. 26,95 (90); B. 73, and see ἀγαθωσύνη], (μέγας), Sept. 
for 53i and 72332; majesty: of the majesty of God, Heb. 
i. 3; viii. 1; Jude 25, (so 2 S. vii. 23; Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 
3, 6; Sap. xviii. 24; Sir. ii. 18, and often).* 
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [ (related to Lat. magnus, magister, 
Goth. maist (cf. τὸ πλεῖστον). ete.; Vanicek p. 682; Cur- 
tius § 462) ], acc. μέγαν, μεγάλην, μέγα; plur. μεγάλοι, -at, 
-a; compar. μείζων (acc. masc. and fem. μείζονα, once 
contr. μείζω, Jn. v. 36 [R G T WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf. 
Taf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μείζονα, once contr. 
μείζω, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and μειζότερος, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the com- 
par. μείζων), a poet. compar., on which see the remark 
quoted under ἐλαχιστότερος, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl. 
μέγιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down]; 
Sept. for 5m ; also for 33; great; 1. predi- 
cated ^ a. of the external form or sensible appearance 
of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its 
dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight: 
λίθος, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; ὄρος, 
Rev. viii. 8; ἀστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκων Rev. xii. 3, 9; ἀετός, 
ibid. 14; δένδρον, Lk. xiii. 19 [T WH om. L Tr br. uéy.]; 
κλάδοι. Mk. iv. 32; ἐχθύες, Jn. xxi. 11; B. compass 
and extent; large, spacious: σκηνή (μείζων), Heb. ix. 
11; dv&yatov [ K ἀνώγεον, q. v.], Mk. xiv. 15; ἀποθήκη, Lk. 
xii. 18; κάμινος, Rev. ix. 2; πόλις, Rev. xi. 8; xvi. 19; 
xvii. 18; xviii. 2, 16, 18, 19; ποταμός, Rev. ix. 14; xvi. 125 
θύρα, 1 Co. xvi. 9; Agvós, Rev. xiv. 19; ὀθόνη, Acts x. 11; 
xi 5; χάσμα, Lk. xvi. 26 (2 S. xviii. 17). Ὑ- meas- 
ure and height: οἰκοδομαί, Mk. xiii. 2; θρόνος, Rev. xx. 
11; long, μάχαιρα, Rev. vi.4; as respects stature and age, 
μικροὶ καὶ μεγάλοι, small and great, young and old, Acts 
viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Heb. viii. 11; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix. 
5,18; xx. 12, (Gen. xix. 11; 2 K. xxiii..2; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 
30). [neut. sing. used adverbially : ἐν μεγάλῳ, Acts xxvi. 
29 L'T Tr WH (for R G ἐν πολλῷ, q. v. in πολύς, d.) in 
greatsc.degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa's words 
ἐν ὀλίγῳ (q. v.) in a little (time) thou wouldst fain ete. .. . I 
would to God that both in little and in great i. e. in all re- 
spects ete.; cf. the use of ὀλίγον x. μέγα or σμικρόν k. μέγα 
(yet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g. 
Plat. Phileb. 21 e.; Apol. 19 c.; 21b.; 26 b.; but see d. 
below.] b. of number and quantity, i. q. nu- 
merous, large: ἀγέλη, Mk. v. 11; abundant, πορισμός, 1 
Tim. vi. 6; μισθαποδοσία, Heb. x. 35. c. of age: ó 
μείζων, the elder, Ro. ix. 12 after Gen. xxv. 23, (Σκιπίων ὁ 
μέγας, Polyb. 18, 18 (35), 9; 32,12, 1). d. used of in- 
tensity and its degrees: δύναμις, Acts iv. 33; viii. 10; 
neut. ἐν μεγάλῳ, with great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 L T Tr 
WH [but see y. above]; of the affections and emotions of 
the mind: χαρά, Mt. ii. 10; xxviii. 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxiv. 52; 
Acts xv. 3; φόβος, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; viii. 37; Acts v. 
5,11; Rev. xi. 11; θυμός, Rev. xii. 12; λύπη, Ro. ix. 2; 
ἔκστασις, Mk. v. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); πίστις, Mt. xv. 28; 
χάρις, Acts iv. 33; ἀγάπη, Jn. xv. 13. of natural events 


μέγας 


powerfully affecting the senses, i. q. violent, mighty, strong : 
ἄνεμος, Jn. vi. 18; Rev. vi.13; βροντή, Rev. xiv. 2; χάλαζα, 
Rev. xi. 19; xvi. 21; σεισμός, Mt. viii. 24; xxviii.2; Lk. 
xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi. 12; xi. 13; xvi. 18; λαίλαψ, 
Mk.iv.37; πτῶσις, Mt. vii. 27. of other external things, 
such as are perceived by hearing: κραυγή, Acts xxiii. 9; 
Rev. xiv. 18 [R 67; μεῖζον κράζειν, to cry out the louder, 
Mt. xx. 31; φωνή, Mt. xxiv. 31 [ T om. ¢., WH only in 
mrg.]; xxvii. 46, 50; Lk. xxiii. 23; Jn. xi. 43; Acts viii. 
7; Rev.i.10; v.2,12; vi. 10; vil. 2, 10; viii. 13; x. 3; 
xi. 12,15; [xiv. 18 LT Tr WH; xviii. 2 Rec. ], and else- 
where; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39. of objects of 
sight which excite admiration and wonder: φῶς, Mt. 
iv. 16; σημεῖον, Mt. xxiv. 24; Lk. xxi 11; Acts vi. 8; 
viii. 13; Rev. xiii. 13; ἔργα, Rev. xv. 3; μείζω, μείζονα 
τούτων, greater things than these, i.e. more extraordinary, 
more wonderful,Jn.i.50 (51); v.20; xiv.12. of things 
that are felt: καῦμα, Rev. xvi. 9; πυρετός, Lk. iv. 38; 
of other things that distress: ἀνάγκη, Lk. xxi. 23; θλίψις, 
Mt. xxiv. 21; Acts vii. 11; Rev.ii.22; vii. 14 ; διωγμός, 
Acts viii. 1; λιμός, Lk. iv. 25; Acts xi. 28; πληγή, Rev. 
xvi. 21. 2. predicated of rank, as belonging to 8. 
persons, eminent for ability, virtue, authority, power; 
as God, and sacred personages: θεός, Tit. ii. 13 [(on which 
see Prof. Abbot, Note C. in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete. 
i. p. 19, and ef. éemupdvera)]; Ἄρτεμις, Acts xix. 27 sq. 
34 sq.; ἀρχιερεύς, Heb. iv. 14; ποιμήν, Heb. xiii. 20; 
προφήτης, Lk. vii. 16 ; absol. of μεγάλοι, great men, lead- 
ers, rulers, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; univ. eminent, dis- 
tinguished : Mt. v. 19; xx. 26; Lk. i. 15, 32 ;, Acts viii. 
9. μείζων is used of those who surpass others — either 
in nature and power, as God: Jn. x. 29 [here T Tr 
WH txt. give the neut. (see below)]; xiv. 28; Heb. vi. 
13; 1 Jn. iv. 4; add, Jn. iv. 12; viii. 53; or in excel- 
lence, worth, authority, etc.: Mt. xi. 11; xviii. 1; 
xxiii 11; Mk. ix. 34; Lk. vii. 28; ix. 46; xxii. 26 sq. ; 
Jn. xiii. 16; xv.20; 1 Co. xiv. 5; δυνάμει μείζονες, 2 Pet. 
ii. 11; neut. μεῖζον, something higher, more exalted, more 
majestic than the temple, to wit the august person of 
Jesus the Messiah and his preéminent influence, Mt. xii. 
6 LT Tr WH; (ef. Jn. x. 29 above]; contextually i. q. 
strict in condemning, of God, 1 Jn. iii. 20. b. things 
to be esteemed highly for their importance, i. q. Lat. 
gravis; of great moment, of great weight, important ; ἐπαγ- 
γέλματα, 2 Pet. i. 4; ἐντολή, Mt. xxii. 36,38 ; μυστήριον, 
Eph. v. 32; 1 Tim. iii. 16; ἁμαρτία, Jn. xix. 11; μείζων 
μαρτυρία, of greater proving power, Jn. v. 36 [see above 
adinit.]; 1 Jn. v. 9, (μαρτυρίαν μείζω x. σαφεστέραν, Isocr. 
Archid. § 32). μέγας i. q. solemn, sacred, of festival days 
[cf. Is. i. 13 Sept.]: ἡμέρα, Jn. vii. 37; xix. 31; notable, 
august, ἡμέρα, of the day of the final judgment, Acts ii. 
20; Jude 6; Rev. vi. 17; xvi. 14. neut. μέγα, a great 
matter, thing of great moment: 1 Co. ix. 11 (Gen. xlv. 
28; Is. xlix. 6); od péya, 2 Co. xi. 15. c. athing 
to be highly esteemed for its excellence, i. q. excel- 
lent: -1 Co. xiii. 13 [cf. W. $ 35, 1; B. $ 123, 13]; rà 
χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα (RG κρείττονα), 1 Co. xii. 31 LT 
Tr WH. S. splendid, prepared on a grand scale, 


395 





μεθοδεία 


stately: δοχή, Lk. v. 29 (Gen. xxi. 8); δεῖπνον, Lk. xiv. 16; 
Rev. xix. 17 [GL T Tr WH], (Dan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ; 
οἰκία, 2 Tim. ii. 20 (Jer. lii. 13; [οἶκος], 2 Chr. ii. 5, 
9). 4. neut. plur. μεγάλα, great things: of God’s 
preéminent blessings, Lk. i. 49 L T Tr WH (see peya- 
λεῖος); of things which overstep the province of a 
created being, proud (presumptuous) things, full of 
arrogance, derogatory to the majesty of God : λαλεῖν pey- 
joined with βλασφημίας, Rev. xiii. 5; Dan. vii. 8,11, 20; 
like μέγα εἰπεῖν, Hom. Od. 3, 227; 16, 243; 22, 288. 

μέγεθος, -ous, τό, (μέγας), [fr. Hom. down], greatness: 
Eph. i. 19." 

μεγιστάν, -avos, 6, (fr. μέγιστος, as νεάν fr. νέος, ξυνάν 
fr. £uvos), a later Grk. word (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 196), 
once in sing. Sir. iv. 7; commonly in plur. οἱ μεγιστᾶνες, 
the grandees, magnates, nobles, chief men of a city or a 
people, the associates or courtiers of a king, (Vulg. 
principes) : Rev. vi. 15; τῆς γῆς, xviii. 23; τοῦ “Hpwdov, 
Mk. vi. 21. (Sept. for os, Jer. xiv. 3; Nah. ii. 6; 
Zech. xi. 2; n^i, Jon. iii. 7; Nah. iii. 10; 2727, Dan. 
Theodot. iv. 33, etc. ; ow, Is. xxxiv. 12; Jer. xxiv. 8, 
etc.; 1 Macc. ix. 37; often in Sir. Manetho 4, 41; Jo- 
seph., Artem. In Lat. megistanes, Tac. ann. 15, 27; Suet. 
Calig. 5.)* 

μέγιστος, see μέγας, init. 

μεθ-ερμηνεύω : Pass., 3 pers. sing. μεθερμηνεύεται. ptep. 
μεθερμηνευόμενον ; to translate into the language of one with 
whom I wish to communicate, to interpret: Mt.i. 23; Mk. 
v. 41; xv. 22, 34; Jn. i. 38 (39) LTr WH, 41 (42); 
Acts iv. 36; xiii. 8. (Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Sir. prol. 1. 
digas 

μέθη. -ns, 7; (akin to μέθυ, wine; perh. any intoxicating 
drink, Lat. temetum; cf. Germ. Meth [mead ]), intoxication; 
drunkenness: Lk. xxi. 34; plur., Ro. xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21. 
(Hebr. ^32 intoxicating drink, Prov. xx. 1; Is. xxviii. 
7; and i327, intoxication, Ezek. xxiii. 32; xxxix. 19; 
[Antipho], Xen., Plat, al) [Cf. Trench § lxi.]* 

μεθ-ίστημι and (in 1 Co. xiii. 2 RG WH [ef. toerguc]) 
μεθιστάνω; 1 aor. μετέστησα; 1 aor. pass. subj. pera- 
σταθῶ; fr. Hom. down; prop. to transpose, transfer, 
remove from one place to another: prop. of change of 
situation or place, ὄρη, 1 Co. xiii. 2 (Isa. liv. 10); τινὰ 
ets τι, Col. 1. 13; twa [T Tr WH add ἐκ, so L in br.] τῆς 
οἰκονομίας, to remove from the office of steward, pass. Lk. 
xvi. 4 (τῆς χρείας, 1 Macc. xi. 63) ; τινὰ ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν, to re- 
move from life, Diod. 2, 57, 5; 4, 55, 1; with ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν 
omitted, Acts xiii. 22 (in Grk. writ. also in the mid. and 
in the intrans. tenses of the act. to depart from life, to 
die, Eur. Ale. 21; Polyb. 32, 21, 3; Heliod. 4, 14). met- 
aph. τινά, without adjunct (cf. Germ. verrücken, [ Eng. 
pervert ]),1i. e. to lead aside [ A. V.turn away] to other ten- 
ets: Acts xix. 26 (τὴν καρδίαν τοῦ λαοῦ, Josh. xiv. 8).* 

μεθ-οδεία (T WH μεθοδία, see I, t,), -as, ἡ, (fr. μεθοδεύω, 
i.e. 1. to follow up or investigate by method and set- 
tled plan; 2. to follow craftily, frame devices, deceive: 
Diod. 7, 16; 2 S. xix. 27; [Ex. xxi. 13 Aq.; (mid.) Charit. 
7, 6 p. 166, 21 ed. Reiske (1783) ; Polyb. 38, 4, 10]), a 
noun occurring neither in the O. T. nor in prof. auth, 


μεθόριον 


cunning arts, deceit, craft, trickery: ἡ μεθ. τῆς πλάνης, 
which ἡ πλάνη uses, Eph. iv. 14; τοῦ διαβόλου, plur. ib. vi. 
11 [A.V. wiles. Cf. Bp. LgAtft. Polyc. ad Phil. 7 p. 918.]* 

μεθ-όριον, -ov, τό, (neut. of adj. μεθόριος, -a, -ov; fr. 
μετά with, and ὅρος a boundary), a border, frontier: rà 
μεθόριά Twos, the confines (of any land or city), i. e. the 
places adjacent to any region, the vicinity, Mk. vii. 24 
RG. (Thuc. Xen., Plat., al.) * 

peOtockw: Pass, pres. μεθύσκομαι; 1 aor. ἐμεθύσθην ; 
(fr. μέθυ, see μέθην fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for im^, imn, 
(Kal 719), and 33U, to intoxicate, make drunk; pass. 
[cf. W. 252 (237)] to get drunk, become intoxicated: Lk. 
xii. 45; Jn. ii. 10; 1 Th. v. 7 [B. 62 (54)]; οἴνῳ [W. 
217 (203)], Eph. v. 18; ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου, Rev. xvii. 2 (see ἐκ, 
IL. 5); τοῦ νέκταρος, Plat. symp. p. 203 b.; Leian. dial. 
deor. 6, 3; ἀπό twos, Sir. i. 16; xxxv. 18." 

μέθυσος, -ύση. σον, in later Grk. also of two termi- 
nations, (μέθυ, see μέθη), drunken, intoxicated: 1 Co. 
v.11; vi. 10. (Phryn.: μέθυσος ἀνήρ, οὐκ ἐρεῖς, ἀλλὰ pe- 
θυστικός - γυναῖκα δὲ ἐρεῖς μέθυσον καὶ μεθύσην [ Arstph. | ; 
but Menand., Plut., Lcian., Sext. Empir., al., [Sept. Prov. 
xxiii. 21, etc. ; Sir. xix. 1, etc.] use it also of men; cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151.) * 

μεθύω (fr. μέθυ, see μέθη) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
M1 and 3327; to be drunken: Mt. xxiv. 49; Actsii. 15; 
1 Co. xi. 21; 1 Th. v. 7 [cf. B. 62 (54)]; ἐκ ro? αἵματος 
[see ἐκ, ITI. 5; "Tr mrg. τῷ αἵματι], of one who has shed 
blood profusely, Rev. xvii. 6 (Plin. h. n. 14, 28 (?2) 
ebrius jam sanguine civium et tanto magis eum sitiens).* 

μειζότερος, -a, -ov, see μέγας, init. 

μείζων, see μέγας, init. 

μέλαν, -avos, τό, see the foll. word. 

μέλας, -awva, -av, gen. -avos, -aivns, -avos, [fr. Hom. down], 
Sept. several times for ΓΙ, black: Rev. vi. 5, 12 ; opp. 
to λευκός, Mt. v.36. Neut.7d μέλαν, subst. black ink(Plat. 
Phaedr. p. 276 c.; Dem. p. 313,11; Plut. mor. p. 841 e.; 
al.): 2 Co. iii. 3; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13; [ef. Gardthausen, 
Palaeographie, Buch i. Kap. 4; Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, ii. 270 sq.; B. D. s. v. Writing, sub fin.]* 

Meis, gen. -ἃ [B. 20 (17) sq.], (T Tr WH Med, 
indecl., [on the accent in codd. cf. 7f. Proleg. p. 103]), 
ó, (πὸ abundance), Melea, one of king David's descend- 
ants: Lk. iii. 31.* 

μέλει, 3 pers. sing. pres. of μέλω used impers.; impf. 
ἔμελεν: itis a care: τινί, to one; as in Grk. writ. with 
nom. of the thing, οὐδὲν τούτων, Acts xviii. 17; with gen. 
of the thing (as often in Attic), μὴ τῶν Body μέλει τῷ 
θεῷ; 1 Co. ix. 9 [B. $ 132, 15; cf. W. 595 (554)]; the 
thing which is a care to one, or about which he is solicit- 
ous, is evident from the context, 1 Co. vii. 21; περί τινος, 
gen. of obj., to care about, have regard for, a pers. or a 
thing: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. x. 135; xii. 6; 1 
Pet. v. 7, (Hdt. 6, 101; Xen. mem. 3, 6, 10; Cyr. 4, 5, 
17; Hier. 9, 10; 1 Macc. xiv. 43; Sap. xii. 13; Barnab. 
ep.1,5; cf. W. $ 30, 10 d.); foll. by ὅτι, Mk: iv. 38; 
Lk. x. 40.* 

[Μελελεήλ : Lk. iii. 37 Tdf., see MaA.] 

μελετάω, -9; 1 aor. ἐμελέτησα ; (fr. μελέτη care, prac- 


596 





μέλλω 


tice) ; esp. freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. down ; 
Sept. chiefly for 133; te care for, attend to carefully, 
practise: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 15 [R. V. be diligent in]; to medi- 
tate i. 4. to devise, contrive: Acts iv. 25 fr. Ps. ii. 1; used 
by the Greeks of the meditative pondering and the prac- 
tice of orators and rhetoricians, as μ. τὴν ἀπολογίαν ὑπὲρ. 
ἑαυτῶν, Dem. p. 1129, 9 (cf. Passow s. v. d. [L. and S. 
s. v. II. 2 and III. 4 b.]), which usage seems to have 
been in the writer’s mind in Mk. xiii. 31 [RL br. Comp.: 
προ-μελετάω |." 

μέλι, -ros, τό, Sept. for wa, [fr. Hom. down], honey: 
Rev. x. 9 sq. ; ἄγριον (q. v.), Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6.* 

μελίσσιος. -a, -ov, (fr. μέλισσα a bee, as θαλάσσιος fr. 
θάλασσα; μέλισσα is fr. μέλι), of bees, made by bees: Lk. 
xxiv. 42 [RG Trin br.]. (Not found elsewh. [cf. W. 
24]: μελισσαῖος, -a, -ov is found in Nic. th. 611, in Eust. 
μελίσσειος.) * 

Μελίτη. -ης, ἡ, Melita, the name of an island in the 
Mediterranean, lying between Africa and Sicily, now 
called Malta; (this Sicula Melita must not be confounded 
with Melita Illyrica in the Adriatic, now ealled Meleda 
[see B. D. s. v. Melita; Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of 
St. Paul, Diss. ii.]): Acts xxviii. 1 [where WH Μελιτήνη ; 
see their App. p. 160].* 

ΓΜελιτήνη, see the preceding word.] 

pedro; fut. μελλήσω (Mt. xxiv. 6; and L T Tr WIL 
in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. ἔμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31 
(exc. T); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG); vii. 39 (exe. T); 
xi. 51 (exc. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R 
pres.); x.4 (exc. L Tr)] and ἤμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. 
vii. 2; x. 1 (exc. RG); xix. 4; Jn. iv. 47; xii. 33; xviii. 
32; Acts xii. 6 (exc. R G L) ; xvi. 27 (exc. RG); xxvii. 
33 (exc. Βα T); Heb. xi. 8 (exc. L) ; cf. reff. s. v. 
βούλομαι, init. and Rutherford's note on Babrius 7, 15], 
to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptep., ὁ μέλ- 
λων, absol.: τὰ μέλλοντα and ra ἐνεστῶτα are contrasted, 
Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; εἰς τὸ μέλλον, for the future, 
hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see eis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm 
supplies éros)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; rà μέλλοντα, things future, 
things to come, i. e., acc. to the context, the more perfect 
state of things which will exist in the αἰὼν μέλλων, Col. 
ii. 17; with nouns, 6 αἰὼν ὁ μέλλων, Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 
21; ἡ μέλλ. Con, 1 Tim. iv. 8; ἡ οἰκουμένη ἡ ped. Heb. 
1i. 5; ἡ p. ὀργή, Mt. iii. 7; τὸ κρίμα τὸ μέλλον, Acts xxiv. 
25; πόλις, Heb. xiii. 14; rà μέλλοντα ἀγαθά, Heb. ix. 11 
[but L Tr mre. WH txt. γενομένων ; x. 1; τοῦ μέλλοντος 
sc. ᾿Αδάμ, i. e. the Messiah, Ro. v. 14. 2. joined to an. 
infin. [cf. W. 333 sq. (313); B. $140,2], a. to be onthe 
point of doing or suffering something: w. inf. present, 
ἤμελλὲν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, Acts xvi. 27; τελευτᾶν, Lk. vii. 2; 
ἀποθνήσκειν, Jn. iv. 47; add, Lk. xxi. 7; Aetsiii.3; xviii. 
14; xx. 3; xxii. 26; xxiii. 27; w.inf. passive, Acts xxi. 
27; xxvii. 99, etc. b. to intend, have in mind, think 
to: w.inf. present, Mt.ii. 13; Lk.x.1; xix.4; Jn. vi. 6, 
15; vii. 85; xii. 4; xiv. 22; Acts v. 35; xvii. 81; xx- 
7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 30; Heb.viii.5; [2 Pet. 
1. 121, T Tr WH]; Rev.x.4; w.inf. aorist (a constr. cen- 
sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently 


μέλος 


by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. W. 
333 (313) sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 745 sqq.; [but see 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 420 sqq.]) : Acts xii. 6 L T 
WH; Rev. ii. 10 (βαλεῖν RG); iii. 16; xii. 4; w. fut. 
inf. ἔσεσθαι, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. Cc. as in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down, of those things which will come to pass 
(or which one will do or suffer) by fixed necessity or 
divine appointment (Germ. sollen [are to be, des- 
tined to be, ete.]) ; w. pres. inf. active: Mt. xvi. 27; xvii. 
12; xx.22; Lk.ix.31; Jn.vi. 71; vii. 39; xi.51; xii. 33; 
xviii. 32; Acts xx. 38; xxvi. 22, 23; Heb.i. 14 ; xi. 8; 
Rev. ii. 10^; iii. 10; viii. 13, etc. ; Ἠλίας 6 μέλλων épxe- 
σθαι, Mt. xi. 14; ὁ μέλλων λυτροῦσθαι, Lk. xxiv. 21; κρί- 
vew, 2 Tim. iv. 1[ WH mre. κρῖναι] ; w. pres. inf. passive: 
Mt. xvii. 22; Mk. xiii. 4; Lk.ix. 44; xix. 11; xxi. 36; 
Acts xxvi. 22; Ro.iv. 24; 1 Th. 111. 4; Jas.ii.12; Rev. 
i. 19 [Tdf. γενέσθαι]; vi. 11; τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτε- 
σθαι δόξης, 1 Pet. v. 1; w. aor. inf.: τὴν μέλλουσαν δόξαν 
ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, Ko. viii. 18; τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀπο- 
καλυφθῆναι, Gal. iii. 23 ; used also of those things which 
we infer from certain preceding events will of necessity 
follow: w. inf. pres., Acts xxviii. 6; Ro. viii. 13; w. inf. 
fut., Acts xxvii. 10. d. in general, of what is sure to 
τ ΕΝ w. inf. pres., Mt. xxiv. 6; Jn. vi. 71; 1 Tim. i. 
16; Rev. xii.5; xvii. 8; w. inf. fut. ἔσεσθαι. Acts xi. 28 ; 
cum 15. e. to be alwayson the point of doing with- 
out ever doing, i. e. to delay: τί μέλλεις; Acts xxii. 16 
(Aeschyl. Prom. 36; τί μέλλετε; Eur. Hec. 1094; Leian. 
dial. mort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth.; 4 Macc. vi. 
23; ix. 1). 

μέλος, -ous, τό, [fr. Hom. down], a member, limb: prop. 
a member of the human body, Ro. xii. S1 Có. xii. 12, 
14, 18-20, 25 sq.; Jas: iii. 5; τὰ p. τοῦ σώματος, 1 Co. 
xii.12, 22; μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Ro. vi. 
13, 19; vii. 5, 23; Col. id. 5; Jas. iii. 6; iv. 1; πόρνης 
μέλη is said of bodies given up to criminal intercourse, 
because they are as it were members belonging to the 
harlot's body, 1 Co. vi. 15. Since Christians are closely 
united by the bond of one and the same spirit both among 
themselves and with Christ as the head, their fellowship 
is likened to the body, and individual Christians are 
metaph. styled »éAn—now one of another, ἀλλήλων: 
Ro. xii. 5; Eph. iv..25; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 7, (cf. 
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. iii. p. 45), —now of the mys- 
tical body, i.e. the church: 1 Co. xii. 27; Eph. v. 30, [cf. 
iv. 16 WH mrg.]; rà σώματα of Christians are called 
μέλη of Christ, because the body is the abode of the spirit 
of Christ and is consecrated to Christ's service, 1 Co. 
wi. 15.* 

Μελχί (T Tr WH Μελχεί ; see et, 0), ó, (395 my king), 

,Melchi; 1. one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk.iii. 24. 2. 
another of the same: ib. iii. 28.* 

Μελχισεδέκ (in Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 Μελχισεδέκης, 
του); 0; (pis7390 king of zu e Melchizedek, 
king of Salem (see under Σαλήμ) and priest of the most 
high God, who lived in the days of Abraham: Heb. v. 6, 
10; vi 20; vii. 1, 10 sq. 15, 17, 22 [RG L]; cf. Gen. 
xiv. 18 sqq.; Ps. cix. (ex.) 4. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]* 





397 μέν 


μεμβράνα [Soph. Lex. -ava; cf. Chandler § 136], -ας 
[B. 17 (15)], ἡ, Lat. membrana, i. e. parchment, first made 
of dressed skins at Pergamum, whence its name: 2 Tim. 
iv. 13 [Act. Barn. 6 fin. Cf. Birt, Antikes Buchwesen, 
ch. ii.; Gardthausen, Palaeographie, p. 39 sq.].* 

μέμφομαι; 1 aor. ἐμεμψάμην; in class. Grk. fr. Hesiod 
(opp. 184) down; to blame, find fault: absol. Ro. ix. 19; 
the thing found fault with being evident from what pre- 
cedes, Mk. vii. 2 Rec. ; αὐτούς. “Heb. viii. 8 L T Trmrg. 
WHtxt., where R G Tr txt. WH mrg. αὐτοῖς, which many 
join with μεμφόμενος (for the person or thing blamed is 
added by Grk. writ. now in the dat., now in the acc.; 
see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v., cf. Krüger $ 46, 7, 3); 
but it is more correct to supply αὐτήν, i. e. διαθήκην, 
which the writer wishes to prove was not “faultless” 
(cf. 7), and to join αὐτοῖς with λέγει; [B. ὃ 133, 9].* 

μεμψίμοιρος, -ov, (μέμφομαι, and. μοῖρα fate, lot), com- 
plaining of one's lot, querulous, discontented : Jude 16. 
(Isoer. p. 234 c. [p. 387 ed. Lange]; Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 
[p. 608*, 10]; "Theophr. char. 17, 1; Lcian. dial. deor. 
20, 4; Plut. de ira cohib. c. 13.) * 

μέν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence properly a 
particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, in- 
deed,— its affirmative force being weakened, yet re- 
tained most in lonie, Epic, and Herodotus, and not 
wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (μέν *con- 
firmative'; cf. 4 Macc. xviii. 18). Owing to this its 
original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms 
and phrases with which it is connected, and thus con- 
trasts them with or distinguishes them from others. 
Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive 
and véry often of a merely distinctive particle, which 
stands related to a following δέ or other adversative con- 
junction, either expressed or understood, and in a sen- 
tence composed of several members is so placed as to 
point out the first member, to which a second, marked by 
an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corre- 
sponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed, Germ. zwar (i. e. prop. 
zu Wahre, i. e. in Wahrheit [in truth ]) ; but often its force 
cannot be reproduced. Its use in classic Greek is exhib- 
ited by Devarius i. p. 122 sqq., and Klotz on the same ii. 
2 p. 656 sqq.; Viger i. p.531 sqq., and Hermann on the 
same p. 824 sq.; al.; Matthiae $ 622; Kühner ii. p. 806 
sqq. $8 527 sqq.; p. 691 sqq.; $ 503; [Jelf $ 729, 1, 2; 
$8 764 sqq.]; Passow, and Pape, [and L. and S.] s. v. 

I. Examples in which the particle μέν is followed in 
another member by an adversative particle expressed. 
Of these examples there are two kinds: 1. those 
in which μέν has a concessive force, and δέ (or ἀλλά) in- 
troduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of 
what has been said in the former member, indeed . 
but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predi- 
cations about either, are thus correlated : Mt. iii. 11, cf. 
Mk. i. 8 (where T Tr WHom.L br. μέν); Lk. iii. 16 
(where the meaning is, ‘I indeed baptize as well as he 
who is to come after me, but his baptism is of greater ~ 
efficacy’; cf. Acts i. 5); Mt. ix. 37 and Lk. x. 2 (al- 
though the harvest is great, yet the laborers are few) ; 


μέν 


Mt. xvii. 11 sq. (rightly indeed is it said that Elijah will 
come and work the ἀποκατάστασις, but he has already 
come to bring about this very thing); Mt. xx. 23; xxii. 
8; xxiii. 28; Jn. xvi. 22; xix. 32sq.; Acts xxi. 39 (al- 
though I am a Jew, and not that Egyptian, yet etc.) ; 
Acts xxii. 3 [R]; Ro. ii. 25; vi. 11; 1 Co.i.18; ix. 24; 
xi.14 sq.; xii. 20 [R GL br. Trbr. WH mrg.]; xv. 51 [R 
GLbr.]; 2 Co.x.10; Heb. iii. 5 sq.; 1 Pet. i. 20, and 
often. μέν and δέ are added to articles and pronouns: 
οἱ pev... oi δέ, the one indeed ... but the other (al- 
though the latter, yet the former), Phil. i. 16 sq. [ace. to 
crit. txt.]; ὃς uev... ὃς δέ, the one indeed, but (yet) 
the other etc. Jude 22 sq.; τινὲς pev... τινὲς δὲ καί, Phil. 
i 15; with conjunctions: εἰ μὲν οὖν, if indeed then, if 
therefore . . . εἰ δέ, but if, Acts xviii. 14 sq. RG; xix. 
38 sq.; xxv. 11 L T Tr WH [e μὲν oov . . . νυνὶ δέ, Heb. 
viii. 4 sq. (here RG εἰ μὲν ydp)]: εἰ pev... vov δέ, if 
indeed (conceding or supposing this or that to be the 
case) ... but now, Heb. xi. 15; κἂν μὲν. . . ef δὲ μήγε, 
Lk. xiii.9; μὲν yap... δέ, 1 Co. xi. 7; Ro. ii. 25; μὲν 
οὖν . . . δέ, Lk. iii. 18; εἰς μὲν . . . εἰς δέ, Heb. 1x. 6 sq.; 
μὲν . « . ἀλλά, indeed ... but, although . . . yet, Ro. xiv. 
20; 1C0.xiv.17; μὲν... πλήν, Lk. xxii. 22. [Cf. W. 
443 (413); B. $ 149, 12 a.] 2. those in which μέν 
loses its concessive force and serves only to distin- 
cuish, but δέ retains its adversative power: Lk. xi. 48; 
Acts xiii. 36 sq.; xxiii. 8 [here WH txt. om. Tr br. μέν]; 
1 Co. i. 12, 23; Phil. iii. i; Heb. vii. 8; ἀπὸ pev.. . ἐπὶ 
δέ, 2 Tim. iv. 4; ὁ μὲν οὖν (Gann er nun [he, then,]) κῶς 
οἱ δέ, Acts xxviii. 5 sq.; ὃς μὲν - «. ὃς δέ, and one... and 
another, 1 Co. xi. 21; οἱ pev...6 δέ (he, on the con- 
trary), Heb. vii. 20 sq. 23 sq.; ἐκεῖνοι μὲν ody... ἡμεῖς 
δέ, 1 Co. ix. 25; εἰ μὲν οὖν... εἰ δέ, Acts xviii. 14 sq. 
[RG]; xix. 38; xxv. 11 [LT Tr WH]; and this hap- 
pens chiefly when what has already been included in the 
words immediately preceding is separated into parts, so 
that the adversative particle contrasts that which the 
writer especially desires to contrast : 
ᾧητοῦσιν ... τοῖς δὲ ἐξ ἐριθείας etc. Ro. ii. 6-8; was... 
ἐκεῖνοι μὲν . . . ἡμεῖς δέ ete. 1 Co. ix. 25; add, Mt. xxv. 
14 sq. 33; Ro. v. 16; xi. 22. 3. pev... δέ serve only 
to distribute a sentence into clauses: both... and ; not 
only ... but also; as well. .. as: Jn. xvi. 9-11; Ro. viii. 
17; Jude 8; πρῶτον μὲν . . . ἔπειτα δέ, Heb. vii. 2; ὃ μὲν 
...0 06... ὃ δέ, some... some... some, Mt. xiii. 8; 
[ἕκαστος . - - ὅ pev...6 δέ, each... one ... another, 
1 Co. vii. 7 LT Tr WH]; ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ, one... an- 
other, Mt. xxi. 35; Acts xvii. 32; 1 Co. vii. 7 [R G]; οἱ 
pev... ἄλλοι [L of] be... ἕτεροι δέ, Mt. xvi. 14; ᾧ μὲν 
yap... ἄλλῳ be... ἑτέρῳ δέ [here T Tr WH om. L br. δέ], 
1 Co. xii. 8-10; à uev... foll by ἄλλα δέ three times, 
Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7 54. ; ἄλλος μέν, ἄλλος δέ, 1 Co. xv. 39; 
τοῦτο £v . . . τοῦτο δέ, on the one hand... on the other; 
partly... partlj, Heb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth. 
cf. W. 142 (135). μέν is followed by another particle : 
ἔπειτα, Jn. xi. 6; 1 Co. xii. 28; Jas. iii. 17; kal νῦν, Acts 
xxvi 4, 6; rà νῦν, Acts xvii. 30; πολὺ [RG πολλῷ] 
μᾶλλον, Heb. xii. 9. 


eor - Ἢ 
εκαστῷ ... τοις μεν 


998 





μέν 


II. Examples in which μέν is followed neither by δέ 
nor by any other adversative particle (μέν * solitarium ") ; 
cf. W. 575 (534) sq.; B. 365 (313) sq. These exx. are 
of various kinds; either 1. the antithesis is evi- 
dent from the context; as, Col. ii. 23 (‘have indeed a 
show of wisdom’, but are folly (cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc.]) ; 
ἡ μὲν... σωτηρίαν, sc. but they themselves prevent their 
own salvation, Ro. x. 1; rà μὲν . . . δυνάμεσιν, sc. but ye 
do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 12; 
ἄνθρωποι μὲν [LT Tr WH om. μὲν . . . ὀμνύουσιν, sc. ὁ δὲ 
θεὸς καθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ ὀμνύει, Heb. vi. 16. Or 2. the 
antithetic idea is brought out by a different turn of the 
sentence: Acts xix. 4 [ Rec.], where the expected second 
member, Ἰησοῦς δέ ἐστιν ὁ ἐρχόμενος, is wrapped up in 
τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν; Ro. xi. 13 ἐφ᾽ ὅσον μὲν κτλ.» 
where the antithesis παραζηλῶ δὲ κτλ. is contained in 
εἴπως παραζηλώσω; Ro. vii. 12 ὁ μὲν νόμος κτὰ., where 
the thought of the second member, ‘ but sin misuses the 
law,’ is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an 
anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive 
to a conjunctive construction (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), 
we find uév . .. τέ, Acts xxvii. 21; pév...xai, 1 Th. ii. 
18; in distributions or partitions, Mk. iv. 4-8 [here RG 
μὲν. -. 06... kai... καί]; Lk. viii. 5-8; or, finally, that 
member in which δέ would regularly follow immediately 
precedes (Herm. ad Vig. p. 889), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet 
see Meyer ad loc.; cf. B.§ 149, 12d.]. Or 3. the 
writer, in using μέν, reine had in mind a second mem- 
ber to be introduced by δέ, but was drawn away from 
his intention by explanatory additions relating to the 
first member: thus Acts iii. 13 (ὃν ὑμεῖς μέν ---- Rec. om. 
this pev — etc., where 6 θεὸς δὲ ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν, cf. 15, 
should have followed); esp. (as occasionally in class. 
Grk. also) after πρῶτον μὲν : Ro. i. 8; iii. 2; 1 Co. xi. 
18; τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον κτλ. where the antithesis τὸν 
δὲ δεύτερον λόγον κτὰ. ought to have followed, Acts i. 
1; 4. μὲν οὖν [in Lk. xi. 28 T Tr WH pevoov], Lat. 
quidem igitur, [Eng. so then, now therefore, verily, ete. ], 
(where μέν is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and 
οὖν marks an inference or transition, ef. K/otz ad Devar. 
i.2 p. 662 sq.; [Herm. Vig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. $ 149, 
16]): Actsi.18; v. 41; xiii. 4; xvii. 20; xxiii. 225 xxvi. 
9; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here T om. Tr br. ov]; ἀλλὰ μὲν ov, 
Phil. iii. 8 GL Tr; εἰ μὲν οὖν, Heb. vii. 11. 5. pev 
solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed, 
verily, (Germ. freilich), [cf. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p. 522; Har- 
tung, Partikeln, ii. 404]: εἰ μέν, 2 Co. xi. 4; μὲν οὖν now 
then, (Germ. nun freilich), Heb. ix. 1 [ef. B. u.s. On the 
use of μὲν οὖν in the classics cf. Cope's note on Aristot. 
rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. μενοῦνγε, q. v. in its place. 

III. As respects the Position of the particle: it 
never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as 
near the beginning as possible; generally in the second 
or third place, by preference between the article and 
noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are 

Acts iii. 21; 2 Co. x. 15 Col. ii. 23; Acts xiv. 12 Rec. ; 
the fifth place, Eph. iv. 11; Ro. xvi. 19 RWH br.; 1 Go: 
ii. 15 RG; (Jn. xvi. 22, see below)]; moreover, in the 


Mevva 


midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the 
force of which is to be strengthened, as καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν λύπην 
μὲν νῦν ἔχετε [but LT Tr WH . . . οὖν viv μὲν diz], Jn. 
xvi. 22; ef. W. $ 61, 6. The word is not found in the 
Rev. or in the Epp. of John. 

Mevvá or Mévvas, see Matváv. 

pev-oty i. q. μὲν οὖν, sce μέν, IT. 4 sq. 

pev-odv-ye [pevoüv ye L Tr], (μέν, οὖν, γέ), nay surely, 
nay rather; three times in answers by which what was 
previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin- 
ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where pev 
οὖν is never so placed; cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. et Alex. 
p- 203 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342; [B. 370 sq. (318) ; W. 
§ 61, 6]) : Lk. xi. 28 [where T Tr WH μενοῦν]; Ro. ix. 
20; x.18; also Phil. iii. 8 [where LG Tr μὲν οὖν, WH 
μὲν οὖν ye], and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed. 
Bekk. ].* 

μέν-τοι, (μέν, τοί), [Tr μέν τοι in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par- 
ticle of aflirination, and hence also often of opposition 
(on its various use in class. Grk. cf. Devar. p. 124 sq. and 
Klotz's comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq.; Herm. 
ad Vig. p. 840 sq.), but yet, nevertheless, howbeit: Jn. iv. 
27; vii 13; xx. 5; xxi. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Jude 8 (the 
connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows : 
*although these examples were set forth as warnings, 
nevertheless’ etc.); ὅμως μέντοι, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii. 
42; μέντοι, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. 8 (if ye do not have re- 
spect of persons, but rather observe the law of love, 
with which προσωποληψία is incompatible; [if however, 
howbeit if ])-* 

μένω; impf. ἔμενον ; fut. μενῶ: 1 aor. ἔμεινα; plupf. 
μεμενήκειν without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19; cf. ἐκβάλλω, [and 
see Tf. Proleg. p. 120 sq.]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. 
chiefly for 32; and Dip, also for ΤΊΣΙ, 3)», ete.; to re- 
main, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference ale 
to PLACE; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn, 
tarry: ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27; x. 7; Jn. vii. 9; 
xi. 6; Acts xx. 15; xxvii. 31; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2 
Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: ἐκεῖ, Mt. x. 11; Jn. 
ii. 12; x. 40; [xi. 54 WH Trtxt.]; ὧδε, Mt. xxvi. 38; 
Mk. xiv. 34; παρά τινι, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40); xiv. 25; 
Acts xviii. 20 [RG]; xxi 7; σύν τινι, Lk. 1. 56; καθ᾽ 
ἑαυτόν, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30. 
i. q. tarry as a guest, lodge: ποῦ, Jn. i. 38 (39) ; ἐν w. dat. 
of place, Lk. xix. 5; Actsix.43; παρά τινι, in one’s house, 
Acts ix. 43; xviii. 3; xxi. 8; of tarrying for a night, 
pera τινος, σύν τινι, Lk. xxiv. 29. i. q. to be kept, to remain: 
dead bodies ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ, Jn. xix. 31; τὸ κλῆμα ἐν τῇ 
ἀμπέλῳ, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. q. not to 
depart, not to leave, to continue to be present: μετά twos 
(gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with 
one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. ii, 19; to be constantly 
present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv. 16 RG; 
also παρά w. dat. of pers. Jn. xiv. 17; ἐπί twa, to put 
forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit, 
Jn. i. 32 sq.; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 36; τὸ 
κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει, of that which continually pre- 
vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii. 


999 


μερίζω 


14. Inthe mystic phraseology of John, God is said μένειν 
in Christ, i. 6. to dwell as it were within him, to be con- 
tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en- 
ergy. Jn. xiv. 10; Christians are said μένειν ἐν τῷ θεῷ, to 
be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they 
have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27; iii.6; hence 
one is said pévew in Christ or in God, and conversely 
Christ or God is said μένειν in one: Jn. vi. 56; xv. 4 sq.; 
1 Jn. iii. 24; iv. 13, 16 ; 6 θεὸς μένει ἐν αὐτῷ x. αὐτὸς ev 
τῷ θεῷ. 1 Jn. iv. 15; cf. Kückert, Abendmahl, p. 268 sq. 
μένει τι ἐν ἐμοί, something has established itself perma- 
nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in 
me: τὰ ῥήματά μου, Jn. xv. 7; ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. ii. 
14; ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμή (not joy in me i. e. of which I am the 
object, but the joy with which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11 
Rec. ; ὃ ἠκούσατε, 1 Jn. ii. 24; the Holy Spirit, Jn. ii. 17; 
iii. 9; ἡ ἀλήθεια, 2 Jn. 2; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 17; 
in the same sense one is said ἔχειν τι μένον ἐν ἑαυτῷ, as 
τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. v. 38; ζωὴν αἰώνιον, 1 Jn. iii. 15. 
i. q. to persevere; ἔν τινι, of him who cleaves, holds fast, 
toathing: ἐν τῷ λόγῳ, Jn. viii. 31; ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ, 1 Jn. iv. 
16; ἐν πίστει, 1 Tim. ii. 15; ἐν οἷς (ἐν τούτοις, à) ἔμαθες, 
2 Tim. iii. 14; ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, 2 Jn. 9, (ἐν τῷ ᾿Ιουδαϊσμῷ, 2 
Mace. viii. 1); differently ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τινός, i. e. to keep 
one’s self always worthy of his love, Jn. xv. 9 sq. β. 
to be held, or kept, continually: ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ, in the state 
of death, 1 Jn. iii. 14; ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ, Jn. xii. 46; ἐν τῷ 
φωτί, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to TIME; (o continue to be, 1. e. 
not to perish, to last, to endure: of persons, to survive, live, 
(exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 415 
sq.): Phil. i. 25 [so ἐμμένειν, Sir. xxxix. 11]; with eis τὸν 
αἰῶνα added, Jn. xii. 34; Heb. vii. 24; also of him who 
becomes partaker of the true and everlasting life, opp. 
to παράγεσθαι, 1 Jn. ii. 17; ἕως ἄρτι; opp. to οἱ κοιμηθέντες, 
1 Co. xv. 6 ; ὀλίγον, Rev. xvii. 10; ἕως ἔρχομαι, Jn. xxi. 
22 sq.; of things, not to perish, to last, stand: of cities, 
Mt. xi. 23; Heb. xiii. 14; of works, opp. to κατακαίεσθαι, 
1 Co. iii. 14 ; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 11 ; 
1 Co. xiii. 13; Heb. xiii. 1; λόγος θεοῦ, 1 Pet. i. 23; 
(where Rec. adds eis τ. αἰῶνα) ; of institutions, Heb. xii. 
27. ὁ καρπός, Jn. xv. 16; ὕπαρξις, Heb. x. 34; ἁμαρτία, 
Jn.ix.41; βρῶσις, opp. to ἡ ἀπολλυμένη, Jn. vi. 27; one's 
δικαιοσύνη with εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα added, 2 Co. ix. 9; τὸ ῥῆμα. 
κυρίου, 1 Pet.i.25. things which one does not part with 
are said μένειν to him, i. e. fo remain to him, be still in 
(his) possession: Acts v. 4 (1 Maec. xv. 7). 3. to 
STATE or CONDITION; to remain as one is, not to become 
another or different: with a predicate nom. μόνος, Jn. 
xii. 24; ἀσάλευτος, Acts xxvii. 41; ἄγαμος, 1 Co. vii. 11; 
πιστός, 2 Tim. ii. 13; ἱερεύς, Heb. vii. 3; with adverbs, 
οὕτως, 1 Co. vii. 40; ὡς κἀγώ, ibid. 8; ἐν w. dat. of the 
state, ibid. 20, 24. II. transitively ; τινά, to wait 


for, await one [cf. B. $ 131, 4]: Acts xx. 23; with ἐν and. 


dat. of place added, ibid. 5. 
kara-, Tapa-, συν-παρα-, Tept-, προσ-, ὑπο-μένω.] 

μερίζω: 1 aor. ἐμέρισα; pf. μεμέρικα (1 Co. vii. 17 T 
Tr txt. WH txt.) ; Pass, pf. μεμέρισμαι ; 1 aor. ἐμερί- 
anv; Mid., 1 aor. inf. μερίσασθαι; (fr. μέρος, as μελίζω 


[Cowr.: dva-, d:a-, év-, ἐπι-» 


μέριμνα 


fr. μέλος) ; fr. Xen. down; Sept. for pam to divide; 
1.0. a. lo separate into parts, cut into pieces: pass. 
μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός ; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye 
claim as yours, been like yourselves divided into parts, 
so that one has one part and another another part? 1 
Co. i. 13 [L WH txt. punctuate so as to take it as an ex- 
clamatory declaration; see Meyer in loc.]; trop. pepe- 
ρισται ἡ γυνὴ καὶ ἡ παρθένος, differ in their aims, follow 
different interests, [A. V. there is a difference between; 
but L Tr WH connect pep. with what precedes], 1 Co. 
vii. 33 (34); to divide into parties, i. e. be split into fac- 
tions (Polyb. 8, 23, 9) : καθ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ to be at variance with 
one’s self, to rebel [A. V. divided] against one’s self, Mt. 
xii. 25; also ἐπ᾽ ἐμαυτόν, ib. 26; Mk. iii. 24-26. b. 
to distribute : τί τισι, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 41; 
to bestow, impart: τινί, 1 Co. vii. 17; τί τινι, Ro. xii. 35 2 
Co. x. 13; Heb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9); 
mid. pepi¢opai τι μετά τινος, to divide (for one’s self) a 
thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Dem. p. 913, 1). [Cour.: 
(δια-, συμ-μερίζω. | * 

μέριμνα, -as, 7, (fr. μερίζω, μερίζομαι, to be drawn in 
different directions, cf. [ Eng. * distraction’ and * eurae 
«quae meum animum divorse trahunt] Ter. Andr. 1,5, 25; 
Verg. Aen. 4, 285 sq.; [but acc. to al. derived fr. a root 
meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to μάρτυς, memor, 
etc.; cf. Vaniéek p. 1201; Curtius § 466; Fick iv. 283; 
see μάρτυς), care, anzietjj: 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. liv. (lv.) 
23); Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34; w. gen. of the obj., care to 
be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28; τοῦ αἰῶνος 
(rovrov), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly 
life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Hom. h. Merc.), Hes., 
Pind., al.] * 

μεριμνάω, -à; fut. μεριμνήσω ; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. 
μεριμνήσητε; (μέριμναλ ; a. to be anxious; to be 
troubled with cares: absol, Mt. vi. 27, 31; Lk. xii. 25; 
μηδὲν pep. be anxious about nothing, Phil. iv. 6; with 
dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit- 
ous [ef. W. § 31, 1 b.]: τῇ ψυχῇ, about sustaining life, 
τῷ σώματι, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; περί τινος, about a 
thing, Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 26; eis τὴν αὔριον, for the 
morrow, i. e. about what may be on the morrow, Mt. vi. 
34; foll. by an indir. quest. πῶς ἣ τί, Mt. x. 19; Lk. xii. 
11 [here Tr mre. om. Tr txt. WH br. jj τί] ; joined with 
τυρβάζεσθαι (θορυβάζ.) foll. by περὶ πολλά, Lk. x. 41 [WH 
mrg. om. ] b. tocare for, look out for, (a thing) ; to 
seek to promote one’s interests: τὰ ἑαυτῆς, Mt. vi. 34 Rec. ; 
τὰ τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; τὰ τοῦ κόσμου, 1 Co. vil. 34; 
ἑαυτῆς, Mt. vi. 34 L T Tr WH (a usage unknown to Grk. 
writ., although they put a gen. after other verbs of caring 
or providing for, as ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, φροντίζειν, προνοεῖν, cf. 
Kriiger § 47, 11; W. 205 (193) ; B. $ 133, 25) ; rà περί 
τινος, Phil. ii. 20; ἵνα τὸ αὐτὸ ὑπὲρ ἀλλήλων μεριμνῶσι τὰ 
μέλη, that the members may have the same care one for 


xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 19; 137 to be disturbed, annoyed in 
spirit, 2 S. vii. 10; 1 Chr. xvii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. 
and Soph. down.) [Comp.: προ-μεριμνάω.] * 

μερίς, -ἰδος, 7, (see μέρος), Sept. chiefly for pon np?n, 


400 





μέρος 


732; [fr. Antipho and Thue. down]; a part, i. q. 1. 
a part as distinct from the whole: (τῆς) Μακεδονίας, Acts 
xvi. 12 [on which see Hort in WH. App. ad loc.]. 2. 
an assigned part, a portion, share: Lk. x. 42 (see ayaós, 
2); ἔστι μοι μερὶς μετά twos, I have a portion, i. e. fellow- 
ship, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. οὐκ ἔστι μοι μερὶς ἣ κλῆρος 
ἔν τινι, | have neither part nor lot, take no share, in a 
thing, Acts viii. 21; ἱκανοῦν τινα εἰς τὴν μερίδα τινός, to 
make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen.; 
al. gen. of apposition], Col. i. 12.* 

μερισμός, -o0, 6, (μερίζω), a division, partition, (Plat., 
Polyb., Strab., [al.]) ; 1. a distribution; plur. dis- 
tributions of various kinds: πνεύματος ἁγίου, gen. of the 
obj. Heb. ii. 4. 2. a separation: ἄχρι μερισμοῦ 
Ψυχῆς k- πνεύματος, which many take actively: ‘up to the 
dividing' i. e. so far as to cleave asunder or separate; 
but it is not easy to understand what the dividing of the 
‘soul’ is. Hence it is more correct, I think, and more 
in aecordance with the context, to take the word pas- 
sively (just as other verbal subst. ending in μός are used, 
e. g. ἁγιασμός, πειρασμός), and translate even to the divi- 
sion, ete., i. e. to that most hidden spot, the dividing line 
between soul and spirit, where the one passes into the 
other, Heb. iv. 12; [ef. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. 
p. 325 sq. ].* 

μεριστής, -o), 6, (μερίζω), a divider: of an inheritance, 
Lk. xii. 14. (Pollux [4, 176].) * 

μέρος, -ovs, τό, (μείρομαι to share, receive one's due por- 
tion), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down], a part; ie. 1, 
a part due or assigned to one, (Germ. Antheil) : ἀφαιρεῖν 
τὸ μέρος τινὸς (gen. of pers.) ἀπό or ἔκ τινος (gen. of the 
thing), Rev. xxii.19; ἔχειν μέρος ἐν with dat. of the thing, 
Rev. xx. 6; μέρος ἔχειν μετά τινος, (participation in the 
same thing, i. e.) to have part (fellowship) with one, Jn. 
xiii. 8; hence, as sometimes in class. Grk. (Eur. Ale. 477 
[474]), lot, destiny, assigned to one, Rev. xxi. 85 τιθέναι 
τὸ μέρος τινὸς μετά τινων, to appoint one his lot with cer- 
tain persons, Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 2. one of 
the constituent parts of a whole; a. univ.: ina con- 
text where the whole and its parts are distinguished, Lk. 
xi. 36; Jn. xix. 23; Rev. xvi. 19; w. agen. of the whole, 
Lk. xv. 12; xxiv. 42; where it is evident from the con- 
text of what whole it is a part, Acts v. 2; Eph. iv. 16; 
τὸ ἕν μέρος, sc. τοῦ συνεδρίου, Acts xxiii. 6; τοῦ μέρους 
τῶν Φαρισαίων, of that part of the Sanhedrin which con- 
sisted of Pharisees, Acts xxiii. 9 [not Lehm.]; τὰ μέρη; 
w. gen. of a province or country, the divisions or regions 
which make up the land or province, Mt. ii. 22; Acts ii. 
10; w. gen. of a city, the region belonging to a city, 
country around it, Mt. xv. 21; xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 10; 
τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, the upper districts (in tacit contrast 
with τὰ κατώτερα, and with them forming one whole), 


| Acts xix. 1; τὰ μέρη ἐκεῖνα, those regions (which are 
another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for 384, to be anxious, Ps, 


parts of the country just mentioned, i. e. Macedonia), Acts 
xx. 2; τὰ κατώτερα μέρη w. gen. of apposition, τῆς γῆς» 
Eph. iv. 9 (on which see κατώτερος); εἰς τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη τοῦ 
πλοίου, i. e. into the parts (i. e. spots se. of the lake) on 
the right side of the ship, Jn. xxi. 6. Adverbial phrases: 


μεσημβρία 


ava μέρος (see ἀνά, 1), 1 Co. xiv. 27; κατὰ μέρος, sever- 
ally, part by part, in detail, Heb. ix. 5 [see κατά, II. 3 
a. y]; μέρος τι (acc. absol.) in part, partly, 1 Co. xi. 18 
(Thue. 2, 64; 4, 30; Isocr. p. 426 d.); ἀπὸ μέρους, in 
part, i. e. somewhat, 2 Co. i. 14 ; in a measure, to some de- 
gree, ib. ii. 5; [Ro. xv. 24]; as respects a part, Ro. xi. 25 ; 
here and there, Ro. xv. 15; ἐκ μέρους as respects indi- 
vidual persons and things, severally, individually, 1 Co. 
xii. 27; in part, partially, i. e. imperfectly, 1 Co. xiii. 9, 
12; τὸ ἐκ μέρους (opp. to τὸ τέλειον) [A. V. that which 
is in part] imperfect (Luth. well, das Stückwerk), ibid. 10. 
[Green (Crit. Note on 2 Co. i. 14) says “ ἀπὸ p. differs in 
Paul's usage from ἐκ p. in that the latter is a contrasted 
term in express opposition to the idea of a complete whole, 
the other being used simply without such aim"; cf. 
Bnhdy. Syntax, p. 230; Meyer on 1 Co. xii. 27.] b. 
any particular, Germ. Stück, (where the writer means to 
intimate that there are other matters, to be separated 
from that which he has specified): ἐν τῷ μέρει τούτῳ, 
in this particular i.e. in regard to this, in this respect, 
1 Pet. iv. 16 R ; 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 3; w. a gen. of the thing, 
Col. ii. 16 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; τοῦτο τὸ μέρος, sc. 
τῆς ἐργασίας ἡμῶν (branch of business), Acts xix. 27, 
CT 

μεσημβρία, -as, ἡ, (μέσος and nuépa), fr. Hdt. down, mid- 
day [on the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (115)]; a. 
(as respects time) noon: Acts xxii. 6. b. (as re- 
spects locality) the south: Acts viii 26 [al. refer this also 
to a.; see xard, II. 2].* 

μεσιτεύω: 1 aor. ἐμεσίτευσα; (μεσίτης [cf. W. p. 25 
e.]); 1. to act as mediator, between litigating or 
covenanting parties; trans. to accomplish something by 
interposing between two parties, to mediate, (with ace. of 
the result): τὴν διάλυσιν, Polyb. 11, 34,3; τὰς συνθήκας, 
Diod. 19, 71; Dion. Hal. 9,59; [cf. Philo de plant. Noé, 
ii. 2 fin. ]. 2. as a μεσίτης is a sponsor or surety (Jo- 
seph. antt. 4, 6, 7 ταῦτα ὀμνύντες ἔλεγον’ kai τὸν θεὸν μεσί- 
την ὧν ὑπισχνοῦντο ποιούμενοι [cf. Philo de spec. lege. iii. 
7 dopárg δὲ πράγματι πάντως ἀόρατος μεσιτεύει θεός etc. ]), 
so μεσιτεύω comes to signify to pledge one’s self, give 
surety: ὅρκῳ, Heb. vi. 17.* 

μεσίτης, του, ὁ, (μέσος), one who intervenes between 
two, either in order to make or restore peace and friend- 
ship, or to form a compact, or for ratifying a covenant ; 
a medium of communication, arbitrator, (Vulg. [and A. V.] 
mediator): ὁ μεσίτης [generic art. cf. W. $ 18, 1 sub fin.], 
i.e. every mediator, whoever acts as mediator,-évós οὐκ 
«ἔστι, does not belong to one party but to two or more, 
Gal.iii.20. Used of Moses, as one who brought: the 
commands of God to the people of Israel and acted as 
mediator with God on behalf of the people, ib. 19 (cf. 
Deut. v. 5; hence he is called μεσίτης καὶ διαλλακτής by 
Philo also, vit. Moys. iii. $ 19). Christ is called pec. 
θεοῦ k. ἀνθρώπων. since he interposed by his death and 
restored the harmony between God and man which 
human sin had broken, 1 Tim. ii. 5; also μεσ. διαθήκης, 
Heb. viii. 6; ix. 15; xii. 24. (Polyb. 28, 15, 8; Diod. 4, 
.54; Philo de somn. i. $ 22; Joseph. antt. 16, 2, 2; Plut. 

26 


401 











μέσος 


de Is. et Os. 46; once in Sept., Job ix. 33.) Cf. Fischer, 
De vitiis legx. N. T. p. 351 sqq.* 

μεσο-νύκτιον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. μεσονύκτιος in 
Pind. et al., fr. μέσος and νύξ, νυκτός), midnight: peco- 
νυκτίου, at midnight [W. $ 30, 11; B. § 132, 26], Mk. 
xiii. 35 [here T Tr WH acc.; cf. W. 230 (215 sq.); B. 
§ 131,11]; Lk. xi. 5; κατὰ τὸ p. about midnight, Acts 
xvi 25; μέχρι pg. until midnight, Acts xx. 7. (Sept.; 
Hippocr., Aristot., Diod., Strabo, Leian., Plut.; cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 53, [W. p. 23 e.].) * 

Μεσοποταμία, -as, 7, (fem. of μεσοποτάμιος, -a, -ov, sc. 
χώρα; fr. μέσος and ποταμός), Mesopotamia, the name, 
not so much political as geographical (scarcely in use 
before the time of Alexander the Great), of a region in 
Asia, lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris 
(whence it took its name; cf. Arrian. anab. Alex. 7, 7; 
Tac. ann. 6, 37; gà DIN, Aram of the two rivers, Gen. 
xxiv. 10), bounded on the N. by the range of Taurus 
and on the S. by the Persian Gulf; many Jews had 
settled in it (Joseph. antt. 12, 3, 4): Acts ii. 9; vii. 2. 
[Cf. Socin in Encycl. Brit. ed. 9 s. v.; Rawlinson, He- 
rodotus, vol. i. Essay ix.]* 

μέσος, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius, 
-a, -um) ; 1. as an adjective: μέσης νυκτός, at mid- 
night, Mt. xxv. 6; μέσης ἡμέρας, Acts xxvi. 13 (aec. to 
Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ. said μέ- 


| cov ἡμέρας, μεσοῦσα ἡμέρα, μεσημβρία) ; w. gen.: [ἐκά- 


θητο ὁ Πέτρος μέσος αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii. 55 (Β ΟἿ, ἐν μέσῳ)]; 
μέσος ὑμῶν ἕστηκε [ἃ]. στήκει], stands in the midst of 
you, Jn. i. 26, (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 580 b.; polit. p. 303 a.) ; 
ἐσχίσθη μέσον, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii. 
45 [W. 131 (124) note]; ἐλάκησε μέσος, Acts i. 18; 
(ἐσταύρωσαν) μέσον τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, Jn. xix. 18. 2. the 
neut. τὸ μέσον or (without the art. in adverb. phrases, 
as διὰ μέσου, ev μέσῳ, cf. W. 123 (117); [cf. B. § 135,67) 
μέσον is used as a substantive; Sept. for qn (constr. 
state qn), and 2\p; the midst: ἀνὰ μέσον (see avd, 1 
[and added note below]); διὰ μέσου (τινός), through the 
midst (Am. v. 17; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 4): αὐτῶν, through 
the midst of them, Lk. iv. 30; Jn. viii. 59 [Rec.]; Σαμα- 
petas, Lk. xvii. 11 [R G, but L'T Tr WH διὰ μέσον (see 
διά, D. I.); others take the phrase here in the sense of 
between (Xen. an. 1, 4,4; Aristot. de anim. 2, 11 vol. 
i. p. 423*, 12; see L. and S. s. v. III. 1 d.) ; cf. Meyer 
ed. Weiss in loc. and added note below]; εἰς τὸ μέσον, 
into the midst, i. e., acc. to the context, either the mid- 
dle of a room or the midst of those assembled in it: 
Mk. iii. 3; xiv. 60 Rec.; Lk. iv. 35; v.19; vi. 8; Jn. 
xx. 19, 26; εἰς μέσον (cf. Germ. mittenhin), Mk. xiv. 60 
GL'T Tr WH; ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, in the middle of the apart- 
ment or before the guests, Mt. xiv. 6; ἐν μέσῳ, in the 
midst of the place spoken of, Jn. viii. 3,9; in the middle 
of the room, before all, Acts iv. 7; w. gen. of place, 
Rev. ii. 7 Rec.; Lk. xxi. 21; (i.q. Germ. mittenauf) τῆς 
πλατείας, Rey. xxii. 2 [but see below]; add, Lk. xxii. 55^; 
Acts xvii. 22; τῆς θαλάσσης; in the midst (of the surface 
of) the sea, Mk. vi. 47; w. gen. plur. in the midst of, 
amongst: w. gen. of things, Mt. x. 16; Lk. viii. 7; x. 3; 


μεσότοιχον 


Rev. i. 18; ii. 1; w. gen. of pers., Mt. xviii. 2; Mk. ix. 
36; Lk. ii. 46; xxii. 55> [here T Tr WH μέσος ; see 1 
above]; xxiv. 36; Acts 1. 15; 11. 22; xxvii. 21; Rev. v. 
6 [°? (see below); vi. 6]; trop. ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἰμι, I am 
present with them by my divine power, Mt. xviii. 20; 
w. gen. of a collective noun, Phil. ii. 15 Τὶ [see 3 below]; 
Heb. ii. 12; where association or intercourse is the topic, 
equiv. to among, in intercourse with: Lk. xxii. 27; 1 Th. 
ii. 7. in the midst of, i. e. in the space within, τοῦ θρόνου 
(which must be conceived of as having a semicircular 
shape): Rev. iv. 6; v. 6 [*?] where cf. De Wette and 
Bleek ; [but De Wette's note on v. 6 runs * And J saw 
between the throne and the four living creatures and the 
elders (i. e. in the vacant space between the throne and 
the living creatures [on one side] and elders [pn the 
other side], accordingly nearest the throne” ete.); ἀνὰ 
μέσον in vii. 17 also he interprets in the same way; fur- 
ther see xxii. 2; cf. Kliefoth, Com. vol. ii. p. 40. For ἐν 
μέσῳ in this sense see Xen. an. 2, 2, 3; 2, 4, 17. 21; 
5, 2, 27, etc.; Hab. iii. 2; ἀνὰ μέσον Polyb. 5, 55, 7; often 


in Aristot. (see Bonitz's index s. v. μέσος) ; Num. xvi. 


48; Deut. v. 5; Josh. xxii. 25; Jude. xv. 4; 1 K. v. 12; 
Ezek. xlvii. 18; xlviii. 22; cf. Gen. i. 4; see Meyer on 
1 Co. vi. 5; cf. ἀνά, 1]. κατὰ μέσον τῆς νυκτός, about 
midnight, Acts xxvii. 27 [see κατά, II. 2]. ἐκ τοῦ μέσου, 
like the Lat. e medio, i.e. out of the way, out of sight: 
αἴρω τι, to take out of the way, to abolish, Col. ii. 14 
[Plut. de curiositate 9; Is. lvii. 2]; γίνομαι ἐκ μέσου, to 
be taken out of the way, to disappear, 2 Th. ii. 7; w. 
gen. of pers., ἐκ μέσου τινῶν, from the society or company 
of, out from among: Mt. xiii. 49; Acts xvii. 33; xxiii. 10; 
1 Co. v. 2; 2 Co. vi. 17, (Ex. xxxi. 14; Num. xiv. 44 
Alex.). 3. the neut. μέσον is used adverbially with 
a gen., in the midst of anything: ἦν μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Mt. xiv. 24 [otherwise Tr txt. WH txt.; yet cf. W. § 54, 
6] ([so Exod. xiv. 27]; Τέων yàp μέσον εἶναι τῆς ᾿Ιωνίης, 
Hat. 7,170); γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, Phil. ii. 15 LT Tr WH (τῆς 
ἡμέρας, the middle of the day, Sus. 7 Theodot.); οἵ. B. 
123 (107 sq.), [cf. 319 (274) ; W. as aboye].* 

μεσότοιχον, -ov, τό, (μέσος, and τοῖχος the wall of a 
house), a partition-wall : τὸ μ. τοῦ φραγμοῦ (i. e. τὸν ppay- 
μὸν τὸν μεσότοιχον ὄντα [ A. V. the middle wall of parti- 
tion; W. $ 59, 8a.]), Eph. ii. 14. (Only once besides, 
and that too in the masc. : τὸν τῆς ἡδονῆς K. ἀρετῆς μεσό- 
roov, Eratosth. ap. Athen. 7 p. 281 d.) * 

μεσουράνημα, -ros, τό, (fr. μεσουρανέω ; the sun is said 
μεσουρανεῖν lo be in mid-heaven, when it has reached the 
meridian), mid-heaven, the highest point in the heavens, 
which the sun occupies at noon, where what is done can be 
seen and heard by all: Rev. viii. 13 (cf. Düsterdieck ad 
loc.); xiv. 6; xix. 17. (Manetho, Plut., Sext. Emp.) * 

μεσόω; (μέσος); to be in the middle, be midway: τῆς 
ἑορτῆς μεσούσης [where a few codd. μεσαζούσης (νυκτὸς 
μεσαζ. Sap. xviii. 14)], when it was the midst of the 
feast, the feast half-spent, Jn. vii. 14 (μεσούσης τῆς 
νυκτός, Ex. xii. 29; Judith xii. 5; τῆς ἡμέρας, Neh. viii. 3 
[Ald., Compl.]; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl and Hdt. 
down; θέρους μεσοῦντος, Thuc. 6, 30).* 


402 


μετά 


Μεσσίας. -ov [cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, Messiah; Chald. 
wrrün, Hebr. rrij2, i. q. Grk. χριστός, q. v.: Jn. i. 41 
(42); iv. 25. Cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. 
Theol, 1876, p. 603; [Lagarde, Psalt. vers. Memphit., 
1875, p. vii. On the general subject see esp. Abbot's 
supplement to art. Messiah in B. D. Am. ed. and reff. 
added by Orelli (cf. Schaff-Herzog) in Herzog 2 s. v. to 
Oehler's art.] * 

μεστός, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. [i. e. Epigr.] down, Sept. for 
8525, full; w. gen. of the thing: prop., Jn. xix. 29; xxi. 
11; Jas. iib. 8; trop. in reference to persons, whose 
minds are as it were filled with thoughts and emotions, 
either good or bad, Mt. xxiii. 28; Ro. i. 29; xv. 14; 
2 Pet. ii. 14; Jas. iii. 17, (Prov. vi. 34).* 

peo Tóo, -ῶ; (μεστός); to fill, fill full: γλεύκους uépearo- 
μένος, Acts ii. 13. (Soph., Plat., Aristot. al.; 3 Mace. 
v. 1, 10.) * 

μετά, [on its neglect of elision before proper names be- 
ginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at 
least in Tdf.’s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. WH. Intr. 
p.146; W.§ 5,1a.; D. p. 10], a preposition, akin to 
μέσος (as Germ. mit to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop. in 
the midst of, amid, denoting association, union, accom- 
paniment; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship 
to μέσος ; some connect it rather with ἅμα, Germ. sammt, 
cf. Curtius § 212; Vanicek p. 972]. It takes the gen. and 
acc. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distinc- 
tion between μετά and σύν, see σύν, init. | 

I. with the Genitive (Sept. for nS, Dy, IMs, ete.), 
among, with, [ef. W. 376 (352) sq.]; 1. amid, 
among ; a. prop.: μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, among the dead, 
Lk. xxiv. 5 (μετὰ νεκρῶν κείσομαι, Eur. Hec. 209; θάψετέ 
με μετὰ τῶν πατέρων μου, Gen. xlix. 29 Sept.; μετὰ ζώντων 
εἶναι, to be among the living, Soph. Phil. 1312); λογί- 
ζεσθαι μετὰ ἀνόμων, to be reckoned, numbered, among 
transgressors, Mk. xv. 28 [ἃ T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] 
and Lk. xxii. 37, fr. Is. liii. 12 (where Sept. ἐν ἀνόμοις) ; 
μετὰ τῶν θηρίων εἶναι, Mk. i. 13; γογγύζειν per ἀλλήλων, 
Jn. vi. 48; σκηνὴ τοῦ θεοῦ μετὰ τ. ἀνθρώπων, Rev. xxi. 3; 
add, Mt. xxiv. 51; xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xii. 46; Jn. 
xviii. 5, 18; Acts i. 26, etc. b. trop.: μετὰ διωγμῶν, 
amid persecutions, Mk. x. 30 (μετὰ κινδύνων, amid perils, 
Thue. 1, 18); ἡ ἀγάπη μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, love among us, mutual 
love, 1 Jn. iv. 17 [al. understand μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν here of the 
sphere or abode, and connect it with the verb; cf. De 
Wette, or Huther, or Westcott,inloc.]. Henceused 2. 
of association and companionship, with (Lat. 
cum; Germ. mit, often also δεῖ) ; a. after verbs of 
going, coming, departing, remaining, etc., w. 
the gen. of the associate or companion: Mt. xx. 20; 
xxvi. 86; Miksa 20... 1|1- 7/5 x1: Lee XY 105, ΤῊΣ Ὑ ἢ τ: 
xiv. 31; Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54; Gal. ii. 1; Jesus the Mes- 
siah it is said will come hereafter pera τῶν ἀγγέλων, Mt. 
xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Th.i. 7; on the 
other hand, w. the gen. of the pers. to whom one joins 
himself as a companion: Mt. v. 41; Mk. v. 24; Lk. ii. 
51; Rey. xxii. 12; ἄγγελοι per’ αὐτοῦ, Mt. xxv. 315 pera 
τινος, contextually i. q. with one as leader, Mt. xxv. 10; 


μετά 403 


xxvi 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Acts vil. 45. περιπατεῖν μετά 
twos, to associate with one as his follower and adherent, 
Jn. vi. 66; γίνομαι p. Twos, to come into fellowship and 
intercourse with, become associated with, one: Mk. xvi. 
10; Acts vii. 38; ix. 19; xx. 18. παραλαμβάνειν τινὰ 
μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, to take with or to one's self as an attend- 
ant or companion: Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33; 
ἄγειν, 2 Tim. iv. 11; ἔχειν μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, to have with one's 
self: τινά, Mt. xv. 30; xxvi 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7; 
Jn. xii. 8; τί, Mk. viii. 14; λαμβάνειν, Mt. xxv. 3; ἀκο- 
λουθεῖν μετά τινος, see ἀκολουθέω, 1 and 2, [cf. W. 233 
sq. (219)]. b. εἶναι μετά twos is used in various 
senses, a. prop. of those who associate with one and 
accompany him wherever he goes: in which sense the 
disciples of Jesus are said to be (or to have been) with 
him, Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxvi. 69, 71; Lk. xxii. 59, cf. Mk. 
v.18; with ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς added, Jn. xv. 27; of those who at 
a particular time associate with one or accompany him 
anywhere, Mt. v. 25; Jn. iii. 26; ix. 40; xii. 17; xx. 
24, 26; 2 Tim.iv.11; sometimes the ptcp. ὦν, ὄντα, etc., 
must be added mentally: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. ix. 8; Jn. 
xviii. 26; of (ὄντες) μετά τινος, his attendants or com- 
panions, Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 25; Lk. vi 3; Acts xx. 34; 
sc. ὄντες, Tit. iii. 15. Jesus says that he is or has been 
with his disciples, Jn. xiii. 33; xiv. 9; and that, to ad- 
vise and help them, Jn. xvi. 4; Mt. xvii. 17, (Mk. ix. 
19 and Lk. ix. 41 πρὸς ὑμᾶς), even as one whom they could 
be said to have with them, Mt. ix. 15; Lk. v. 34; just 
as he in turn desires that his disciples may hereafter be 
with himself, Jn. xvii. 24. ships also are said to be with 
one who is travelling by vessel, i. e. to attend him, Mk. 
iv. 36. B. trop. the phrase [to be with, see b.] is used 
of God, if heis present to guide and help one: Jn. iii. 2; 
viii.29; xvi.32; Actsvii.9; x.38; 2 Co.xiii. 11; Phil. 
iv. 9; with εἶναι omitted, Mt. i. 23; Lk. i. 28; Ro. xv. 
33; here belongs ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μετ᾽ αὐτῶν sc. àv, by 
being present with them by his divine assistance [cf. W. 
376 (353); Green p. 218], Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [cf. h. 
below]; and conversely, πληρώσεις pe εὐφροσύνης μετὰ 
τοῦ προσώπου σου Sc. ὄντα, i. e. being in thy presence [yet 
cf. W. 376 (352) note], Acts ii. 28 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11; 
ἡ χεὶρ κυρίου is used as a substitute for God himself (by 
a Hebraism [see χείρ, sub fin.]) in Lk. i. 66; Acts xi. 21; 
of Christ, who is to be present with his followers by his 
divine power and aid: Mt. xxviii. 20; Acts xviii. 10, (μέ- 
νειν pera is used of the Holy Spirit as a perpetual helper, 
Jn. xiv.16 RG); at the close of the Epistles, the writers 
pray that there may be with the readers (i. e. always 
present to help them) — 6 θεός, 2 Co. xiii. 11; —6 κύριος, 
2 Th. iii. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 22; — ἡ χάρις τοῦ x. Ἰησοῦ Xp. 
(where ἔστω must be supplied [cf. W. $64, 2b.; B. $129, 
22]), Ro. xvi. 20, 22 [RG]; 1Co. xvi. 23; 2 Co. xiii. 13 
(14); Gal. vi.18; Phil.iv.23; 1 Th. v. 28; 2 Th. iii. 18; 
Philem. 25; Rev. xxii. 21; —7) χάρις simply, Eph. vi. 24; 
Col. iv. 18; 1 Τίπι. νἱ. 21 (32); Tit.iii.15; Heb. xiii. 25; 
2 Jn. 3; — 5 ἀγάπη pov, 1 Co. xvi. 24; the same phrase 
is used also of truth, compared to a guide, 2 Jn. 2. —— wy. 
opp. to εἶναι κατά τινος, to be with onei. e. on one's side: 


μετά 


Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 238, (and often in class. Grk.); simi- 
larly μένειν μετά τινος, to side with one steadfastly, 1 Jn. 
neg: c. with the gen. of the person who is another's 
associate either in acting or in his experiences; so after 
verbs of eating, drinking, suppine, ete. : Mt. viii. 11; ix. 
11; xxiv. 49; xxvi. 18, 23, 29; Mk. xiv. 18, 20; Lk. v. 
30; vii. 36; xxii. 11, 15; xxiv.30; Jn. xiii. 18; Gal. ii. 
12; Rev. iii. 20, etc. ; γρηγορεῖν, Mt. xxvi. 38,40 ; χαίρειν, 
κλαίειν, Ro. xii. 15; εὐφραίνεσθαι, Ro. xv. 10; παροικεῖν, 
Heb. xi. 9; δουλεύειν, Gal. iv. 25; βασιλεύειν, Rev. xx. 4, 
6; ζῆν, Lk. ii. 36; ἀποθνήσκειν, Jn. xi. 165 βάλλεσθαι eis 
τὴν γῆν, Rev. xii.9; κληρονομεῖν, Gal. iv. 30 ; συνάγειν, Mt. 
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, and other exx. d. with a gen. of the 
pers. with whom one (of two) does anything mutually 
or by turns: so after ovvaipew λόγον, to make a reckon- 
ing, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23; xxv. 19; συνάγεσθαι, 
Mt. xxviii. 12; Jn. xviii.2; συμβούλιον ποιεῖν, Mk. iii. 6 ; 
λαλεῖν (see λαλέω, 5); συλλαλεῖν, Mt. xvii. 3; Acts xxv. 
12; μοιχεύειν, Rev. ii. 22; μολύνεσθαι, Rev. xiv. 4; πορ- 
νεύειν, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 8, 9; μερίζομαι, Lk. xii. 13; 
after verbs of disputing, waging war, contend- 
ing at law: πολεμεῖν, Rev. ii. 16; xii. 7 (where Rec. 
κατά); xiii.4; xvii. 14, (so for /3 Dy DTY23, 1 S. xvii. 33; 
1 K. xii. 24, a usage foreign to the native Greeks, who 
say πολεμεῖν τινι, also πρός τινα, ἐπί τινα, to wage war 
against one; but πολεμεῖν μετά τινος, to wage war with one 
as an ally, in conjunction with, Thue. 1, 18; Xen. Hell. 
7,1, 27; [cf. B. $ 133, 8; W. $ 28, 1; 214 (201); 406 
(379) note]) ; πόλεμον ποιεῖν, Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 
7; xix. 19, (soin Lat. bellare cum ete. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33; 
bellum gerere, Cic. de divinat. 1, 46); ζήτησις ἐγένετο, Jn. 
iii. 255 ζητεῖν, Jn. xvi. 19; κρίνεσθαι, κρίματα ἔχειν, 1 Co. 
vi. 6 sq.; after verbs and phrases which indicate mutual 
inclinations and pursuits, the entering into agreement 
or relations with, ete.; as εἰρηνεύειν, εἰρήνην διώκειν, Ro. 
xii. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 22; Heb. xii. 14; φίλος, Lk. xxxiii. 
12; συμφωνεῖν, Mt. xx. 2; μερὶς" μετά τινος, 2 Co. vi. 15; 
ἔχειν μέρος, Jn. xiii. 8; συγκατάθεσις, 2 Co. vi. 163 κοινω- 
νίαν ἔχειν, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6 54.; αἰτία (see the word, 3), Mt. 
xix. 10. e. of divers other associations of persons 
or things; — where the action or condition expressed 
by the verb refers to persons or things besides those 
specified by the dat. or acc. (somewhat rare in Grk. auth., 
as ἰσχύν re kai κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας λαμβάνειν, Plat. rep. 9, 
p. 591 b. [ef. W. § 47, h.]) : εἶδον (Rec. εὗρον) τὸ παιδίον 
μετὰ Μαρίας, Mt. ii. 11; ἀνταπυδοῦναι . . . tpiv... μεθ᾽ 
ἡμῶν, 2 ΤῊ. 1. 6 sq. ; after ἐκδέχεσθαι, 1 Co. xvi. 11; after 
verbs of sending, Mt. xxii. 16; 2 Co. viii. 18. ἀγάπη μετὰ 
πίστεως, Eph. vi. 23; ἐν πίστει ... μετὰ σωφροσύνης, 1 
Tim. ii. 15; ἡ εὐσέβεια μετὰ αὐταρκείας, 1 Tim. vi. 6; in 
this way the term which follows is associated as sec- 
ondary with its predecessor as primary; but when καί 
stands between them they are co-ordinated. Col. i. 
11; 1 Tim.i. 14. of mingling one thing with another, 
μίγνυμί τι μετά τινος (in class. auth. τί rem [cf. B. § 133, 
8]): Lk. xiii. 1; pass. Mt. xxvii. 34. f. with the gen. 
of mental feelings desires and emotions, of bodily move- 
ments, and of other acts which are so to speak the at- 


μετά 


tendants of what is done or occurs; so that in this way 
the characteristic of the action or occurrence is de- 
scribed, — which in most cases can be expressed by a 
cognate adverb or participle [cf. W. u. s.]: pera αἰδοῦς, 
1 Tim. ii. 9; Heb. xii. 28 [Rec.]; αἰσχύνης, Lk. xiv. 9; 
ἡσυχίας, 2 Th. iii. 12; χαρᾶς, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16; 
Lk. vii 18; x17; xxiv. 52; ἘΠῚ). 1... 29. ΠΥ ΠΝ ἧς δ᾽, 
Heb. x. 34; προθυμίας, Acts xvii. 11; φόβου κ. τρόμου, 2 
Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12; φόβου κ. χαρᾶς, Mt. 
xxviii. 8; πραὔτητος x. φόβου, 1 Pet. iii. 16 (15); παρρησίας, 
Acts ii. 29; iv. 29, 31; xxviii. 31; Heb. iv. 16; εὐχαρι- 
στίας, Acts xxiv. 3; Phil iv. 6; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq.; ἀλη- 
θινῆς καρδίας, Heb. x. 22; ταπεινοφροσύνης krÀ., Eph. iv. 
2; Acts xx. 19; ὀργῆς, Mk. iii. 5; εὐνοίας, Eph. vi. 7; 
Bias, Acts v. 26; xxiv. 7 Rec.; μετὰ δακρύων, with tears, 
Mk.ix.24[R GWH (rejected) mrg.]; Heb.v. 7; xii.17, 
(Plat. apol. p. 34 c.); εἰρήνης, Acts xv. 33; Heb. xi. 31; 
ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν, 1 Tim. iv. 14 [W. u. s.]: φωνῆς peyd- 
Ans, Lk. xvii. 15; νηστειῶν, Acts xiv. 23; ὅρκου or ópkopo- 
σίας, Mt. xiv. 7; xxvi. 72; Heb. vii. 21; θορύβου, Acts 
xxiv. 18; παρακλήσεως, 2 Co. viii. 4; παρατηρήσεως, Lk. 
xvii. 20; σπουδῆς, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39; ὕβρεως x. ζημίας, 
Acts xxvii. 10; φαντασίας, xxv. 23; ἀφροῦ, Lk. ix. 39; to 
this head may be referred μετὰ κουστωδίας, posting the 


guard, Mt. xxvii. 66 [so W. (l. c.) et al. (cf. Meyer ad loc); | 


others ‘in company with the guard’; cf. Jas. Morison ad 
loc.; Green p. 218]. g. after verbs of coming, depart- 
ing, sending, with gen. of the thing with which one is fur- 
nished or equipped: μετὰ δόξης x. δυνάμεως, Mt. xxiv. 30; 
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; ἐξουσίας x. ἐπιτροπῆς, Acts 
xxvi. 12; μαχαιρῶν xk. ξύλων, Mt. xxvi. 47, 55; Mk. xiv. 
43, 48; Lk. xxii. 52; φανῶν x. ὅπλων, Jn. xviii. 3; μετὰ 
σάλπιγγος, Mt. xxiv. 31 [ef. B. § 132,10]. where an in- 
strumental dat. might have been used [cf. W. § 31, 8 d.], 
μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ ἐξάγειν τινά, Acts xiii. 17. n 
in imitation of the Hebr.: ἔλεος ποιεῖν μετά τινος, to show 
mercy toward one, and μεγαλύνειν ἔλ. p. τ. to magnify, 
show great, mercy toward one; see τὸ ἔλεος, 1. To this 
head many refer ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ beds μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, Acts xiv. 
27; xv. 4, but see above, 2 b. β. 

II. with the Accusative [W. § 49, f.]; 1. prop. 
into the midille of, into the midst of, among, after verbs of 
coming, bringing, moving; so esp. in Hom. 
denotes (following accompaniment), sequence, i. e. the 
order in which one thing follows another ; a. inorder 


of Place; after, behind, (so fr. Hom. down); once in | 


the N. T. [W. u. 5.7: Heb. ix. 3 (Judith ii. 4). b. in 
order of Time; after (Sept. for IHS, “NN, vp? ete.): 
μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας ἕξ, after six days (had passed), Mt. xvii. 1; 
Mk. ix. 2; add, Mt. xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1; Lk: i. 24; ii. 
46, ete., ef. Fritzsche, Com. on Mt. p. 22 sq.; μετ᾽ ov zoA- 
Aas ἡμέρας, Lk. xv. 13; μετά τινας ἡμ., Acts xv. 365 xxiv. 
21; ov μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας, not long after these 
days [ A. V. not many days hence], Actsi. 5, cf. De Wette 
ad loc. and W. 161 (152); [B. $ 127, 4]; p. τρεῖς μῆνας, 
Acts xxviii. 11; p. ἔτη τρία, Gal. i. 18, etc.; p. χρόνον 
πολύν, Mt. xxv. 19; p. τοσοῦτον xp. Heb. iv. 7. added to 
the names of events or achievements, and of festivals: p. 


2:3 | 
| eis τὴν ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14.* 


404 





μεταδίδωμε 


τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβ. Mt. i. 13; p. τὴν θλίψιν, Mt. xxiv. 
29; ΜΚ. xiii. 24; add, Mt. xxvii. 53; Acts x. 37; xx. 293 
2 Pet. 1. 15; p. τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν, Acts xiii. 15; p. μίαν x. 
δευτέραν νουθεσίαν, Tit. iii. 10; μ. τὸ πάσχα, Acts xii. 4 
cf. xx. 6; with the names of persons or things having the 
notion of time associated with them: μετὰ τοῦτον, αὐτόν, 
ete., Acts v. 37; vii. 5; xiii. 25; xix. 4; p. τὸν νόμον, 
Heb. vii. 28; μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον, after the morsel was taken, 
Jn. xiii. 27 [ef. B. $ 147, 26]; foll. by the neut. demonstr. 
pron. [ef. W. 540 (503)]: μετὰ τοῦτο, Jn. ii. 12 ; xi. 7, 115 - 
xix. 28; Heb.ix.27; [Rev. vii. 1 L T Tr WII]; pera 
ταῦτα [cf. W.162 (153)], Mk.xvi.12; Lk.v.27; x.1; xii. 
4 [W. u.,s.]; xvii. 8; xviii. 45 Acts vii. 7; xiii. 20; xv. 
16; xviii. 15. Jn. iii..225«v. d; 14.5 vi: 1; vir 15 X147 
xix. 38; xxi. 1; Heb.iv.8; 1 Pet. i. 11; Rev.i. 19; iv. 
I ir-T [Rec]; 9; 3x42 5x v35 yl 1; δὺς SS. 
3, and very often in Grk. writ. it stands before the neut. 
of adjectives of quantity, measure, and time: μετ᾽ οὐ πολύ, 
not long after [R. V. after no long time], Acts xxvii. 14; 
μετὰ μικρόν, shortly after [A. V. after a little while], Mt. 
xxvi. 73; Mk.xiv. 70; pera βραχύ, Lk. xxii. 58; also be- 
fore infinitives with the neut. art. (Lat. postquam with a 
finite verb, [cf. B. $ 140, 11; W. $ 44, 6]) ; — the aorist 
inf.: Mt. xxvi. 32; Mk.i.14; xiv. 28; xvi.19; Lk. xii: 
5; xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; Actsi.3; vii.4; x. 
41; xv. 19; xx. ΤῸ 1 Co: x1) 9551 Hebi 26 

III In COMPOSITION, μετά denotes 1. associa- 
tion, fellowship, participation, wi/h: as in μεταδιδόναι, 
μεταλαμβάνειν, μετέχειν, μετοχή. 2. exchange, trans- 
fer, transmutation; (Lat.trans,Germ. um): μεταλλάσσω, 
μεταμέλομαι [ Prof. Grimm prob. means here μετανοέω ; see 
3 and in μεταμέλομαι], μετοικίζω, μεταμορφόω, etc. 3. 
afler: perapédopa. Cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 639. 

peta-Baivw; fut. μεταβήσομαι; 2 aor. μετέβην, impv. 
μετάβηθι and (in Mt. xvii. 20 L T Tr WH) μετάβα (see 
ἀναβαίνω, init.); pf. μεταβέβηκα; fr. Hom. down; to pass 
over from one place to another, to remove, depart: toll. by 
ἀπό w. a gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 34 ; ἐξ οἰκίας eis οἰκίαν 
[cf. W.§ 52, 4. 10], Lk. x. 7; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου πρὸς τὸν πα- 
τέρα, Jn. xiii. 1; ἐντεῦθεν, Jn. vii. 3; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xi. 1; 
xii.9; xv. 29; Acts xviii. 7; évreüfev[L T Tr WH ἔνθεν] 
ἐκεῖ (for ἐκεῖσε [cf. W. § 54, 7; B. 71 (62) ]), of a thing, 
i. q. to be removed, Mt. xvii. 20; metaph. ἐκ τοῦ Üavarov 


pera-BáAAo : prop. to turn round ; to turn about; pass. 
and mid. to turn one's self about, change or transform one's 
self; trop. to change one's opinion; [Mid., pres. ptep.] 
μεταβαλλόμενοι [ (2 aor. ptep. βαλόμενοι Tr WH)] ἔλεγον, 
they changed their minds and said, Acts xxviii. 6 (μετα- 
βαλόμενος λέγεις, having changed your mind you say, Plat. 
Gorg. 481 e.; in the same sense, Thuc., Xen., Dem.).* 

μετ-άγω ; pres. pass. μετάγομαι; to transfer, lead over, 
(Polyb., Diod., al.) ; hence univ. to direct [ A. V. to turn 
about]: Jas. iii. 3 sq.* 

μετα-δίδωμι ; 2 aor. subj. μεταδῶ, impv. 3 pers. sing. 
μεταδότω, inf. μεταδοῦναι ; [fr. Theogn., Hat. down]; to 
share a thing with any one [see μετά, III. 1], to impart: 
absol. 6 μεταδιδούς, he that imparteth of his substance, Ro. 


μετάθεσις 


xii. 8, cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; τινί, Eph. iv. 28; τινί τε (a 
constr. somewhat rare in Grk. auth. [Hdt. 9, 34 etc.], 
with whom gera. τινί τινος is more common; cf. Mat- 
thiae ii. p. 798; [W. $ 30, 7 b.; B. $132, 8]), Ro. i. 11; 
1 Th. ii. 8; the acc. evident from the preceding context, 
Lk. iii. 11.* 

μετάτθεσις, -eos, ἡ, (μετατίθημι); 1. a transfer: from 
one place to another (Diod. 1, 23); τινός (gen. of obj.), 
the translation of a person to heaven, Heb. xi. 5. 2; 
change (of things instituted or established, as ἱερωσύνης, 
νόμου) : Heb. vii. 12; τῶν σαλευομένων, Heb. xii. 27. 
(Thue. 5, 29; Aristot., Plut.) * 

μετ-αίρω: 1 aor. perzpa ; 1. trans. to lift up and 
remove from one place to another, to transfer, (Eur., 
Theophr., al.). 2. inthe N. T. intrans. (cf. W. § 38, 
1; [B. $ 130, 4]) to go away, depart, (Germ. auf brechen) : 
ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xiii. 53 (Gen. xii. 9 Aq.) ; foll. by ἀπό νυ. gen. 
of place, Mt. xix. 1.* 

pera-kaAéo, -@: Mid., 1 aor. μετεκαλεσάμην ; 1 fut. μετα- 
καλέσομαι; (o call from one place to another, to summon, 
(Hos. xi. 1 sq.; Plat. Ax. fin.) ; mid. to call to one's self, 
to send for: twa, Acts vii. 14; x. 32; xx. 17; xxiv. 25.* 

μετα-κινέω, -@: 0 move from a place, to move away: 
Deut. xxxii. 30; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; Pass. pres. 
ptep. peraxwovpevos; trop. ἀπὸ τῆς ἐλπίδος, from the hope 
which one holds, on which one rests, Col. i. 23.* 

μετα-λαμβάνω : impf. μετελάμβανον ; 2 aor. inf. μετα- 
λαβεῖν, ptep. μεταλαβών ; [see μετά, III. 1; fr. Pind. and 
Hdt. down]; to be or to be made a partaker: gen. of the 
thing, 2 Tim. ii. 6; Heb. vi. 7; xii. 10; τροφῆς, to par- 
take of, take [some] food, Acts ii. 465 xxvii. 33 sq. [in 
34 Rec.zpocAaBeiv]; w. acc. of the thing, to get, find (a 
whole) : καιρόν, Acts xxiv. 25; on the constr. w. gen. and 
ace. see Kriiger § 47, 15; ef. W. § 30, 8.* 

μετάληψις (LT Tr WH -λημψις [see M, μ7). -ews, 7, 
(μεταλαμβάνω), a taking, participation, (Plat., Plut., al.) : 
of the use of food, εἰς μετάλ. to be taken or received, 1 
Tim. iv. 3.* 

μετ-αλλάσσω: 1 aor. μετήλλαξα: fr. Hdt. down; [not 
in Sept., yet nine times in 2 Macc.; also 1 Esdr. i. 31]; 
to exchange, change, (cf. μετά, ITI. 2]: ri ἔν τινι, one thing 
with (for) another (on this constr. see ἀλλάσσω), Ro. i. 
25; τὶ ets τι, one thing into another, Ro. i. 36." 

μετα-μέλομαι ; impf. μετεμελόμην ; Pass., 1 aor. perepe- 
λήθην; 1 fut. μεταμεληθήσομαι; (fr. μέλομαι, mid. of pede); 
fr. Thue. down: Sept. for 093; a depon. pass.; prop. it 
is a care to one afterwards [see pera, III. 2], i. e. it repents 
one; to repent one’s self [in R. V. uniformly with this 
reflexive rendering (exc. 2 Co. vii. 8, where regret) |: 
Mt. xxi. 29, 32; xxvii. 3; 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. vii. 21 fr. 
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4.* 

[Syx. μεταμέλομαι, ueravoéco: The distinctions so 
often laid down between these words, to the effect that the 
former expresses a merely emotional change the latter a 
change of choice, the former has reference to particu- 
lars the latter to the entire life, the former signifies 
nothing but regret even though amounting to remorse, 
the latter that reversal of moral purpose known as repent- 
ance—seem hardly to be sustained by usage. But that 


405 








μετάνοια 


μετανοέω is the fuller and nobler term, expressive of moral 
action and issues, is indicated not only by its derivation, but 
by the greater frequency of its use, by the fact that it is often 
employed in the impv. (μεταμέλομαι never), and by its con- 
struction with ἀπό, ἐκ, (cf. ἡ eis θεὸν μετάνοια, Acts xx. 21). 
Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. $ lxix; Green, * Crit. Notes,’ p. 3 sq.] 

μετα-μορφόω, -@: Pass, pres. μεταμορφοῦμαι; 1 aor. 
μετεμορφώθη ; to change into another form [cf. pera, ITI. 
2], to transfigure, transform: μετεμορφώθη, of Christ, his 
appearance was changed [| A. V. he was transfiqured ], i. e. 
was resplendent with a divine brightness, Mt. xvii.2; Mk. 
ix. 2 (for which Lk. ix. 29 gives ἐγένετο τὸ εἶδος τοῦ προσ- 
oov αὐτοῦ ἕτερον); of Christians: τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μετα- 
μορφούμεθα, we are transformed into the same image (of 
consummate excellence that shines in Christ), reproduce 
the same image, 2 Co. iii. 18; on the simple acc. after 
verbs of motion, change, division, cf. Bos, Ellips. (ed. 
Schaefer), p. 679 sqq.; Matthiae $ 409; [Jelf $ 636 obs. 
2; cf. B. 190 (164); 396 (339); W. $ 32, 5]; used of 
the change of moral character for the better, Ro. xii. 2; 
with which compare Sen. epp. 6 init., intelligo non emen- 
dari me tantum, sed transfigurari. ([Diod.4,81; Plut. 
de adulat. et amic. 7; al.]; Philo, vit. Moys. i. $ 10 sub 
fin.; lez. ad Gaium $ 13; Athen. 8 p. 334 c.; Ael. v. h. 
1, 1; Leian. as. 11.) [Syn. ef. μετασχηματίζω.] * 

pera-voéo, -@; fut. μετανοήσω: 1 aor. éueravógga; fr. 
[Antipho], Xen. down; Sept. several times for 01}; to 
change one’s mind, i. e. to repent (to feel sorry that one 
has done this or that, Jon. iii. 9), of having offended 
some one, Lk. xvii. 3 sq.; with ἐπί τινε added (dat. of 
the wrong, Hebr. by, Am. vii. 3; Joel ii. 13; Jon. iii. 
10; iv. 2), of (on account of) something (so Lat. me 
paenitet alicuius rei), 2 Co. xii. 21; used esp. of those 
who, conscious of their sins and with manifest tokens 
of sorrow, are intent on obtaining God's pardon; to 
repent (Lat. paenitentiam agere): petavo® ἐν σάκκῳ 
καὶ σποδῷ, clothed in sackcloth and besprinkled with 
ashes, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13. to change one’s mind for 
the better, heartily to amend with abhorrence of one’s past 
sins: Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15, (cf. Mt. iii. 6 ἐξομο- 
λογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν; ib. 8 and Lk. iii. 8 καρποὺς 
ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας, i. 6. conduct worthy of a heart 
changed and abhorring sin) ; [Mt. xi. 20; Mk. vi. 12]; 
Lk. xiii. 3,5; xv. 7,10; xvi. 30; Acts ii. 38; iii. 19; 
xvii. 30; Rev. ii. 5, 16; iii. 3,19; on the phrase μετανοεῖν 
els TO κήρυγμά τινος, Mt. xii. 41 and Lk. xi. 32, see eis, B. 
IL. 2 d.; [W. 397 (371)]. Since τὸ μετανοεῖν expresses 
mental direction, the ter mini from which and to which 
may be specified: ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας, to withdraw or turn 
one’s soul from, etc. [ef. W. 622 (577); esp. B. 322 
(277)], Acts viii. 22; ἔκ τινος, Rev. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 20 sq.; 
xvi. 11 (see ἐκ, I. 6; [cf. B. 327 (281), and W. u. s.]); 
μετανοεῖν K. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, Acts xxvi. 20; foll. 
by an inf. indicating purpose [W. 318 (298) ], Rev. xvi. 
9. [Svw. see μεταμέλομαι.] * 

μετάνοια, -olas, 7, (μετανοέω). a change of mind: as it 
appears in one who repents of a purpose he has formed 
or of something he has done, Heb. xii. 17 on which see 
εὑρίσκω. 3 ([Thue. 3, 36, 3]; Polyb. 4, 66, 7; Plut. Peric. 


μεταξύ 


c. 10; mor. p. 30 ἃ. ; τῆς ἀδελφοκτονίας μετάνοια, Joseph. 
antt. 13, 11, 3); esp. the change of mind of those who 
have begun to abhor their errors and misdeeds, and 
have determined to enter upon a better course of life, 
so that it embraces both a recognition of sin and sorrow 
for it and hearty amendment, the tokens and effects of 
which are good deeds (Lact. 6, 24, 6 would have it ren- 
dered in Lat. by resipiscentia), [A. V. repentance]: Mt. 
ii. 8, 11; Lk. iii. 8, [16 Lehm.]; xv. 7; xxiv. 47; Acts 
Xxvi. 20; βάπτισμα μετανοίας, a baptism binding its sub- 
jects to repentance [W. § 30, 2 β.1, Mk. 1. 45. Lk. iii. 
3; Acts xiii. 24; xix.4; [ἡ εἰς (τὸν) θεὸν per. Acts xx. 
21, see peravoéw, fin.] ; διδόναι τινὶ μετάνοιαν, to give one 
the ability to repent, or to cause him to repent, Acts v. 
31; xi 18; 2 Tim. ii. 25; τινὰ εἰς μετάνοιαν καλεῖν, Lk. v. 
32, and Rec. in Mt. ix. 13; Mk. ii. 17; ἄγειν, Ro. ii. 4 
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 10 fin.) ; ἀνακαινίζειν, Heb. vi. 65 χω- 
ρῆσαι eis ueráv. to come to the point of repenting, or be 
brought to repentance, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [but see χωρέω, 1 fin.]; 
μετ. ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων, that change of mind by which we 
turn from, desist from, etc. ITeb. vi. 1 [B. 322 (277)]; 
used merely of the im proved spiritual state re- 
sulting from deep sorrow for sin, 2 Co. vii. 9 sq. (Sir. 
xliv. 16; Sap. xi. 24 (23) ; xii. 10, 19; Or. Man. 7 sq. [(cf. 
Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. p. Ixii. sq.)]; Philo, quod det. pot. 
insid. § 26 init.; Antonin. 8, 10; [Cebes, tab. 10 fin.].) * 
μεταξύ, (fr. pera and ξύν, i. q. σύν), adv. ; 1. be- 
tween (in the midst, Hom. Il. 1, 156; Sap. xviii. 23), — a. 
adverbially of time, ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, in the mean 
time, cf. ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς (see καθεξῆς): Jn. iv. 31 (Xen. 
symp. 1, 14; with χρόνῳ added, Plat. rep. 5 p. 450 c.; 
Joseph. antt. 2, 7, 1; ὁ μεταξὺ χρόνος, Hdian. 3, 8, 20 
[10 ed. Bekk.; cf. W.592 sq. (551)]). ^ b. likea prep. 
w. a gen. [cf. W. 54, 6]: of place [fr. Hdt. 1, 6 down], 
Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; xvi. 26; Acts xii. 6; of par- 
ties, Mt. xviii. 15; Actsxv.9; Ro. ii. 15. 2. acc. 
to a somewhat rare usage of later Grk. (Joseph. c. Ap. 
1,21,2 [(yet see Müller ad loc.)]; b.j. 5, 4, 2; Plut. 
inst. Lac. 42; de discr. amici et adul. c. 22; "Theoph. 
κὰ Autol. 1,8 and Otto in loc.; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2. 
; Barn. ep. 13, 57), after, afterwards: τὸ μεταξὺ σάββ. 
ae next (following) sabbath, Acts xiii. 42 [(where see 
Meyer)].* 
μετα-πέμπω: 1 aor. pass. ptep. μεταπεμφθείς; Mid., 
pres. ptep. μεταπεμπόμενος; 1 aor. μετεπεμψάμην; 1. 
to send one afler another [see pera, IIT. 3; cf. Herm. 
ad Vig. p. 639]. 2. like our to send after i. q. to 
send for: μεταπεμφθείς, sent for, Acts x. 29*. Mid. to 
send afler for one's self, cause to be sent for: Acts x. 5, 
29°; xi. 13; [xx. 1 T Tr WH]; xxiv. 24, 26; foll. by eis, 
w. an ace. of place, Acts x. 22; xxv. 3. (Gen. xxvii. 45; 
Num. xxiii. 7; 2 Mace. xv. 31; 4 Mace. xii. 3, 6; in prof. 
auth. fr. Hdt. down.) * 
μετα-στρέφω: 1 aor. inf. μεταστρέψαι; Pass., 2 aor. 
impv. 3 pers. sing. μεταστραφήτω; 2 fut. μεταστραφήσο- 
pac; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1275; to turn about, turn 
around, [cf. μετά, III. 2]: vi εἴς τι [to turn one thing 
into another], pass, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31); Jas. 


406 





μετέχω 


iv. 9 [cf. B. 52 (40): (WH txt. μετατρέπω, q. v-)]; i. 4. 
to pervert, corrupt, τί (Sir. xi. 31; Aristot. rhet. 1, 15, 
24 [cf. 30 and 3, 11, 6]) : Gal. i. i: 

μετα-σχηματίζω : fut. μετασχηματίσω [cf. B. 37 (32)]; 
1 aor. μετεσχημάτισα; Mid. pres. μετασχηματίζομαι; to 
change the figure of, to transform, [see pera, III. 2]: τί, 
Phil. iii. 21 [see below]; mid. foll. by εἴς τινα, to trans- 
form one’s self into some one, to assume one’s appearance, 
2 Co. xi. 13 sq.; foll. by ὥς τις, so as to have the appear- 
ance of some one, 2 Co. xi. 15; μετασχηματίζω τι εἴς τινα, 
to shape one’s discourse so as to transfer to one’s self 
what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs, 
i. e. so as to illustrate by what one says of himself what 
holds true of all: 1 Co. iv. 6, where the meaning is, ‘by 
what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown - 
what holds true of all Christian teachers.’ (4 Mace. 
ix. 22; Plat. legg. 10 p. 903 e.; [Aristot. de caelo 3, 1 
p. 298°, 31, etc.]; Joseph. antt. 7, 10, 5; 8, 11, 1; Plut. 
Ages. 14; def. orac. c. 30; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11]; 
Sext. Empir. 10, p. 688 ed. Fabric. [p. 542, 23 ed. 
Bekk.].) * 

[SvN. μεταμορφόω, μετασχηματίζω: (cf. Phil. iii. 21) 
“ἐμετασχημ. would here refer to the transient condition from 
which, μεταμορῴ. to the permanent state to which, the change 
takes place. Abp. Trench [N. T. Syn. § Ixx.], however, sup- 
poses that μετασχημ. is here preferred to μεταμορφ. as ex- 
pressing ‘transition but no absolute solution of continuity’, 
the spiritual body being developed from the natural, as the 
butterfly from the caterpillar” (Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. * De- 
tached Note’ p. 131). See μορφή, fin.] 

μετα-τίθημι ; 1 aor. μετέθηκα; pres. mid. μετατίθεμαι; 1 
aor. pass. μετετέθην ; to transpose (two things, one of which 
is put in place of the other, [see μετά, III. 2]); i.e. 1. 
to transfer: τινά foll. by eis w. ace. of place, pass., Acts 
vii. 16; without mention of the place, it being well 
known to the readers, Heb. xi. 5 (Gen. v. 24; Sir. 
xliv. 16, cf. Sap. iv. 10). 2. to change (Hat. 5, 68); 
pass. of an office the mode of conferring which is 
changed, Heb. vii. 12; zi εἴς τι, to turn one thing into 
another (τινὰ εἰς πτηνὴν φύσιν, Anth. 11, 367, 2) ; figura- 
tively, ry... χάριν eis ἀσέλγειαν, to pervert the grace 
of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of God 
an argument in defence of licentiousness, Jude 4 [cf. 
Huther in loc.]. 3. pass. or [more commonly ] mid., 
to transfer one's self or suffer one's self to be transferred, 
i. e. (0 go or puss over: ἀπό twos eis τι, to fall away or 
desert from one person or thing to another, Gal. i. 6 (cf. 
2 Mace. vii. 24; Polyb. 5, 111, 8; 26, 2, 6; Diod. 11, 
4; [6 pera8épevos, turncoat, Diog. Laért. 7, 166 cf. 37; 
Athen. 7, 281 d.]).* 

[pera-rpémo: 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. μετατρα- 
πήτω; to turn about, fie. to transmute: Jas. iv. 9 WH txt. 
From Hom. down; but *seems not to have been used 
in Attic” (L. and S.).*] 

per-émevra, adv., fr. Hom. down, afterwards, after that: 
Heb. xii. 17. (Judith ix. 5; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) * 

pero; 2 aor. μετέσχον; pf. μετέσχηκα; to be or 
become partaker; to partake: rhs ἐλπίδος αὐτοῦ, of the 


thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Rec., but GL T Tr WH 


μετεωρίζω 


have rightly restored ἐπ᾿ ἐλπίδι τοῦ μετέχειν, in hope of 
partaking (of the harvest); with a gen. of the thing 


added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21; Heb. ii. 14; φυλῆς ἑτέρας, to 
belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii. 


13; sc. τῆς τροφῆς; to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; γά- 
Aakros, to partake of, feed on, milk, Heb. v. 13; ἐκ τοῦ 
ἑνὸς ἄρτου se. τί or τινός (see ἐκ, I. 2 bj), 1 Co: x17; cf. 
B. 8 132, 8; [W. 8$ 28, 1; 30, 8a.].* 

μετ-εωρίζω : [pres. impv. pass. 2 pers. plur. μετεωρί- 
tebe; (see below)]; (fr. μετέωρος in mid-air, high; 
raised on high; metaph. ἃ. elated with hope, Diod. 13, 
46; lofty, proud, Polyb. 3, 82, 2; 16, 21, 2; Sept. Is. v. 
15. b. wavering in mind, unsteady, doubtful, in sus- 
pense: Polyb. 24, 10, 11; Joseph. antt. 8, 8, 2; b. 1. 4, 2, 
5; Cic. ad Att. 5, 11, 5; 15, 14; hence μετεωρίζω) ; 1. 
prop. to raise on high (as ναῦν eis τὸ πέλαγος, to put a 
ship [out to sea] up upon the deep, Lat. propellere in 
altum, Philostr. v. Ap. 6, 12, 3 [cf. Thuc. 8, 16, 2]; τὸ 
ἔρυμα, to raise fortifications, Thue. 4, 90): ἑαυτόν, of 
birds, Ael. h. a. 11, 33; pass. μετεωρίζεσθαι ἢ καπνὸν ἢ 
κονιορτόν, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 5; of the wind, ἄνεμος ξηρὸς 
μετεωρισθείς, Arstph. nub. 404; and many other exx. 
also in prof. auth. ; in.Sept. cf. Mic. iv. 1; Ezek. x. 16; 
Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one's soul, 
raise his spirits; to buoy up with hope; to inflate with 
pride: Polyb. 26, 5, 4; 24,3, 6 ete.; joined with φυσᾶν, 
Dem. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [quis rer. div. 
her. $8 14,54; cong. erud. grat. § 23]; pass. to be elated ; 
to take on airs, be puffed up with pride: Arstph. av. 1447; 
often in Polyb.; Diod. 11, 32,41; 16, 18 etc.; Ps. exxx. 
(exxxi.) 1; 2 Mace. vii. 34; with the addition of τὴν 
διάνοιαν, V. 17. Hence μὴ μετεωρίζεσθε, Lk. xii. 29, some 
(following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should 
be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek great 
things, (Luth. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation 
does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta- 
phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep 
by winds and waves, to cause one to waver or fluctuate 
in mind, Polyb. 5, 70,10; to agitate or harass with cares; 
to render anxious: Philo de monarch. § 6; Schol. ad 
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914; ad Eur. Or. 1537; hence Lk. xii. 
29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither 
be ye anxious, or and waver not between hope and fear 
ΓΑ. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live 
not in careful suspense) ]. Kuinoel on Lk. 1. c. discusses 
the word at length; and numerous exx. from Philo are 
given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.* 

μετοικεσία, -as, 7, (for the better form μετοίκησις, fr. 
μετοικέω [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to 
another, esp. a forced removal: with the addition Ba- 
βυλῶνος (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby- 
lonian exile, Mt.i.11 sq. 17. (Sept. for 793 i. e. mi- 
gration, esp. into captivity; of the Babylonian exile, 2 
K.xxiv. 16; 1 Chr. v. 22; Ezek. xii. 11; for ni», Obad. 
20; Nah. iii 10. Elsewh. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.) * 

μετ-οικίζω : fut. (Attic) μετοικιῶ [cf. B. 37 (32); W. 
$13,10.]; 1 aor. μετῴκισα ; to transfer settlers; to cause 
to remove into another land [see μετά, III. 2]: τινά foll. by 


407 








μετρίως 


εἰς w. acc. of place, Acts vii. 4; ἐπέκεινα w. gen. of place 
(Amos v. 27), Acts vii. 43. (Thuc. 1,12; Arstph., Aris- 
tot., Philo, [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 19, 3], Plut., Ael.; Sept. 
several times for man.) i 

μετοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (μετέχω), (Vulg. participatio) ; a sharing, 
communion, fellowship: 2 Co. vi. 14. (Ps. exxi. (exxii.) 
3; Hdt., Anthol., Plut., al.) * 

μέτοχος, -ov, (μετέχω) ; 1. sharing in, partaking 
of, w. gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 8 a.]: Heb. iii. 1; vi. 4; 
xii. 8; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, of his mind, and of the salvation pro- 
cured by him, Heb. iii. 14; ef. Bleek ad loc. 2a 
partner (in a work, office, dignity): Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. 
xliv. (xlv.) 8); Lk. v. 7. (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) * 

perpéo, -@; 1 Δοτ. ἐμέτρησα; 1 fut. pass. μετρηθήσομαι:; 
(μέτρον) ; fr. Hom. Od. 3,179 down; Sept. several times 
for TWD; to measure; 1. 6. 1. to measure out or 
off, a. prop. any space or distance with a measurer's 
reed orrule: τὸν ναόν, τὴν αὐλήν, etc., Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15, 
17; with τῷ καλάμῳ added, Rev. xxi. 16; ἐν αὐτῷ, i. e. 
b. metaph. to judge according 
to any rule or standard, to estimate: ἐν à μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, 
by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru- 
mental év seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf. 
W. 388 (363); B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur- 
ther below], Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24; pass. to be judged, 
estimated, ibid.; μετρεῖν ἑαυτὸν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, to measure one's 
self by one's self, to derive from one's self the standard 
by which one estimates one's self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cf. W. $31; 
8 fin.]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. e. to give 
by measure: in the proverb τῷ αὐτῷ μέτρῳ ᾧ μετρεῖτε 
[or (so LT Tr WH) ᾧ μέτρῳ perp-], i. e., dropping the 
fig., ‘in proportion to your own beneficence,’ Lk. vi. 38. 
[Cowr.: ἀντι-μετρέω.] * 

μετρητής [on the accent see Chandler $ 51 sq.], -οῦ, 6, 
(μετρέω), prop. a measurer, the name of a utensil known 
as an amphora, which is a species of measure used for 
liquids and containing 72 sextarii or ξέστοι [i. e. some- 
what less than nine Eng. gallons; see B. D. s. v. Weights 
and Measures, sub fin. (p. 3507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. n3, 2 
Chr. iv. 5): Jn.ii.6. (Polyb.2, 15, 1; Dem. p. 1045, 
1; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.)* 

μετριοπαθέω, -&; ([cf. W. 101 (95)]; fr. μετριοπαθής, 
adhering to the true measure in one's passions or emo- 
tions; ἔφη (viz. Aristotle) τὸν σοφὸν μὴ εἶναι μὲν ἀπαθῆ, 
μετριοπαθῆ δέ, Diog. Laért. 5, 31; μετριοπάθεια, modera- 
tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp. 
to the ἀπάθεια of the Stoies; fr. μέτριος and πάθος) ; i.q. 
μετρίως or κατὰ τὸ μέτρον πάσχω; to be affected moderately 
or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions, 
esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44; de Josepho 
§ 5; [Joseph. antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]) ; hence of one who is 
not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others, 
but bears with them gently; like other verbs of emotion 
(cf. Kriiger § 48, 8), with a dat. of the pers. toward whom 
the feeling is exercised: Heb. v. 2; cf. the full discus- 
sion by Bleek ad loc.* 

μετρίως, (μέτριος), adv., [fr. Hdt. down]; a. in 
due measure. b. moderately: οὐ μετρίως, [A. V. 


τῷ καλάμῳ, Rev. xi. 1. 
: c 


μέτρον 


* not a little], exceedingiy, (Plut. Flam. 9, et al.), Acts 
xx. 12.* 

μέτρον, -ov, τό, Sept. chiefly for 7579, [cf. μήτηρ], meas- 
ure; 1. an instrument for measuring; — a. avessel for 
receiving and. determining the quantity of things, whether 
dry or liquid: in proverb. disc. μετρεῖν μέτρῳ, of the 
measure of the benefits which one confers on others, Lk. vi. 
38; μέτρον πεπιεσμένον kai σεσαλευμένον, fig. equiv. to most 
abundant requital, ibid. ; πληροῦν τὸ μέτρον τῶν πατέρων, 
to add what is wanting in order to fill up their ancestors’ 
prescribed number of crimes, Mt. xxiii. 32 [see πληρόω, 
22a.]; ἐκ μέτρου [A. V. by measure; see ἐκ, Y. 3] i. e. 
sparingly, Jn. iii. 34 (also ἐν μέτρῳ, Ezek. iv. 11). ὉὌ. 
a graduated staff for measuring, measuring-rod : Rey. xxi. 
15; with ἀνθρώπου added [man's measure], such as men 
use, Rev. xxi. 17; hence in proverb. disc. the rule or stand- 
ard of judgment: Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24. 2. deter- 
mined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit: with 
a gen. of the thing received, Ro. xii. 3; 2 Co. x. 13; 
[ Eph. iv. 7]; ἐν μέτρῳ, in proportion to the measure [cf. 
W. § 48, a. 3 b. and see ἐνέργεια ; al. in due measure], 
Eph. iv. 16; the required measure, the due, fit, measure : 
τῆς ἡλικίας, the proper i. e. ripe, full age [see ἡλικία, 1 c.] 
(of a man), Eph: iv. 13 (ἥβης, Hom. Il. 11, 225; Od. 11, 
317; Solon 5, 52 [ Poet. Min. Gr. (ed. Gaisford) iii. 135 ]).* 

μέτωπον, -ov, τό, (μετά, ovr ‘eye’), fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for ΠΥ, [lit. the space between the eyes] the fore- 
head: Rev. vii. 3; ix.4; xiii.10; xiv.1,9; xvii 5; xx. 
Ἄν xxi. 4.* 

μέχρι and μέχρις (the latter never stands in the N. T. 
before a consonant, but μέχρι stands also before a vowel 
in Lk. xvi.16 T Tr WH; see ἄχρι, init.; and on the dis- 
tinction betw. ἄχρι and μέχρι see ἄχρι, fin.), a particle 
indicating the terminus ad quem: as far as, unto, 
until ; 1. it has the force of a preposition with 
the gen. [(soevenin Hom.) W. $54,6],andisused — a. 
of time: Mt. xiii. 30 RG T WH mre.; Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr 
WH; Acts xx. 7; 1 Tim. vi. 14; Heb. ix. 10; p. θανά- 
του, Phil. ii. 30; μέχρι τῆς σήμερον sc. ἡμέρας, Mt. xi. 23; 
xxviii. 15; μέχρι τέλους, Heb. iii. 6 [here WH Tr mre. 
br. the clause], 145 dzó . . . μέχρι, Acts x. 30; Ro. v. 14; 
μέχρις οὗ (see ἄχρι, 1 d.; [B. 230 (198) sq.; W. 296 
(278 sq.) ]) foll. by an aor. subjune. having the force of a 
fut. pf. in Lat.: Mk.xiii30; Gal.iv.19 TTrWH. b. 
of place: ἀπὸ ..: μέχρι, Ro. xv. 19. c. of measure 
and degree: μέχρι θανάτου, so that he did not shrink even 
from death, Phil. ii. 8 (2 Macc. xiii. 14; Plat. de rep. p. 
361 c. fin.; p. φόνου, Clem. hom. 1, 11); κακοπαθεῖν p. 
δεσμῶν, 2 Tim. ii. 9; μέχρις αἵματος ἀντικατέστητε, Heb. 
xii. 4. 2. with the force of a conjunction: till, 
foll. by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.* 

μή, Sept. for os, PS, PS a particle of negation, which 
differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that οὐ 
denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies 
simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively), 
but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing 
according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref- 


408 





μή 


directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinetion 
holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, 
ete. But pyis either an adverb of negation, not (Lat. 
non, ne); or a conjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. 
ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. 
(generally) implying a neg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether 
not (suggesting apprehension)]. Cf. Herm. ad Vie. $ 267 
p. 802 sqq.; Matthiae § 608; Bttm. Gram. § 148 (cf. 
Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kühner ii. 
$8412 sq. p. 739 sqq.; [Jelf $$ 738 sqq.]; Rost ἃ 135;. 
Win. §§ 55,56; J. Franke, De particulis negantibus. 
(two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq.; G. F. Gayler, Particu- 
larum Graeci sermonis negativarum accurata disputatio, 
etc. Tub. 1836; E. Prüfer, De μή et ob particulis epi- 
tome. Vratisl. 1836; [ Gildersleeve in Am. Jour. of Philol. 
vol. i. no. i. p. 45 sqq.; Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s: 
Hdbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. $8 82 sqq.]. 

I. As a negative ADVERB; 1. univ.: à μὴ πά- 
ρεστι ταῦτα, where μή is used because reference is made 
merely to the thought that there are those who lack these 
things, 2 Pet. i. 9; ἃ μὴ ἑώρακεν, which (in my opinion): 
he hath not seen (because they are not visible), Col. ii. 18 
[but here GT Tr WH om.L br. uj; cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad: 
loc.; W.480sq. (448)]; ἤδη κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν, be- 
cause he hath not believed, represented by the writer as the- 
thought τοῦ κρίναντος, Jn. iii. 18 (differently in I Jn. v. 10, 
where the faith denied is considered as something positive: 
and actual); ἃ μὴ δεῖ, in the judgment of the writer, Tit. 
1 11: 2. in deliberative questions with the 
subjunctive: daper ἢ μὴ δῶμεν, Mk. xii. 14 (πότερον' 
βίαν φῶμεν ἢ μὴ φῶμεν eivai, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 45); μὴ: 
ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακά (for so it would have run had there 
been no anacoluthon; but Paul by the statement which 
he interposes is drawn away from the construction with 
which he began, and proceeds ὅτι ποιήσωμεν κτλ.» so that 
these words depend on λέγειν in the intervening statement 
[W. 628 (583); B.§ 141, 3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con- 
ditional and final sentences (ef. W. § 55, 2; [B. 344 
(296) sqq.]) : ἐὰν μή, unless, if not, see exx. in ἐάν, I. 3 c. 
ἐὰν etc. καὶ μή, Mk. xii. 19; ἐὰν ete. δὲ μή, Jas. ii. 14; ἐάν 
τις ἴδῃ... μὴ πρὸς θάνατον, 1 Jn. v. 16; εἰ μή, εἰ δὲ μή, 
εἰ δὲ μήγε, ete., see εἰ, III. p. 171 sq. To this head be-- 
long the formulae that have ἄν or ἐάν as a modifier (W. 
§ 55,3 e.; [B. § 148, 4]), ὅς, ὅστις, ὅσοι ἄν or ἐὰν μή : Mt. 
x.145 xi. 6; Mk: vi- 11; x: 15; uk vin. 25. 1x» 02 va 
17; Rev.xiii. 15; ὃς ἂν ete. καὶ μή, Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. x. 10; 
ὃς àv . . . μὴ ἐπὶ πορνείᾳ, Mt. xix. 9 GT Tr WH txt.; of 
the same sort is πᾶν πνεῦμα, ὃ μὴ ὁμολογεῖ, 1 Jn. iv.3. ἵνα 
py, Mt. vii.1; xvii.27; Mk.iii.9; Ro.xi. 25; Gal.v.17; 
vi. 12, etc.; tva . . . καὶ μή, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 12; Jn. 
vi.50; xi. 50; 2Co. iv. 7, etc. ; iva... μή; 2 Co. xiii. 10; 
ἵνα ὁ .. . μή, Jn. xii. 46; tva (weakened ; see tva, II. 2) 
pj: after διαστέλλομαι [here L WH txt. ἐπιτιμάω], Mt. 
xvi. 20; τὸ θέλημά ἐστιν, tva py, Jn. vi. 39; οὕτως etc. tva 
ὁ... prj, Jn. iii. 16; παρακαλῶ, tva . . . kai μή, 1 Co. i. 105 
ὅπως μή, Mt. vi. 18; Actsxx. 165; 1 Co.1. 29; ὅπως οἱ - - - 
μή, Lk. xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infinitive (W. 


erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in- | §55,4f.; [B.§§ 140,16; 148,6; cf. Prof. Gildersleeve- 


μή 


τι. 5. Ῥ. 48 54.}; a. after verbsof saying, declaring, 
denying, commanding, etc.: ἀποκριθῆναι, Lk. xx. 7; 
ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον μὴ ἰδεῖν, that he should not see, Lk. 
li. 26; χρηματισθέντες μὴ ἀνακάμψαι, Mt. ii. 12; ὦὥμοσε (αὐ- 
τοῖς) μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι, Heb. iii. 18; after λέγω, Mt. v. 34, 
39; xxii. 23; Mk xii.18; Actsxxi.4; xxiii. 8; Ro. ii. 22; 
xii. 3; κηρύσσω, Ro. ii. 21; γράφω, 1 Co. v. 9,11; mapay- 
γέλλω, Actsi.4; iv.18; v. 28,40; 1 Co. vii. 10 sq.; 1 Tim. 
1. 8; vi.17; παρακαλῶ, Actsix. 38 RG; xix. 31; 2Co.vi. 
1; αἰτοῦμαι, Eph. iii. 13; διαμαρτύρομαι, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; εὔχο- 
pat, 2 Co. xiii. 7; παραιτοῦμαι, Heb. xii. 19[here WH txt. 
om. py; cf. W.and B.as below]; ἀξιῶ, Acts xv. 38; ἐπι- 
Boe [L'T Tr WH βοῶ], Acts xxv. 24; ἀντιλέγω (cf. W. §65, 
2 β.; [B. $ 148, 13]), Lk. xx. 27 [Tr WH L mrg. λέγω]; 
ἀπαρνοῦμαι(α. v.), Lk. xxii. 34; also after verbs of decid- 
ing: Lk. xxi. 14; κρίνω, Acts xv. 19; κρίνω τοῦτο, τὸ μή, 
Ro. xiv. 13; 2 Co. ii. 1; θέλω, Ro. xiii. 3; after verbs of 
hindering, avoiding, etc.: ἐγκόπτω (Rec. ἀνακόπτω) 
τινὰ μή. Gal. v. 7 (cf. W. [and B. u. s.; also § 140, 16]) ; 
τοῦ μή, that . . . not, (Lat. ne), after κατέχω, Lk. iv. 42; 
κρατοῦμαι, Lk. xxiv. 16; κωλύω, Acts x. 47; καταπαύω, 
Acts xiv. 18; παύω, 1 Pet. iii. 10; ὑποστέλλομαι, Acts xx. 
20, 27; προσέχω μή, Mt. vi. 1; but ro) μή is added also 
to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ut ne, thal... not: 
Ro. vii. 3; ὀφθαλμοὶ τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, ὦτα ToU μὴ ἀκούειν, 
Ro. xi. 8,10. After clauses denoting necessity, ad- 
vantage, power, fitness, μή is used with an inf. 
specifying the thing [ B. $ 148, 6], καλόν ἐστι py, 1 Co. vii. 
1; Gal.iv. 18; foll. by τὸ μή, Ro. xiv. 21; ἄλογον μή. Acts 
xxv. 27; κρεῖττον ἦν, 2 Pet. ii. 21; ἐξουσία τοῦ [L T Tr 
WH om. τοῦ] μὴ ἐργάζεσθαι, a right to forbear working, 
1 Co. ix. 6; δεῖ, Acts xxvii. 21; οὐ δύναμαι μή, 1 cannot 
but, Acts iv. 20; dvévOekróv ἐστι τοῦ μή, Lk. xvii. 1 [cf. 
ἀνένδεκτος |. b. μή with an inf. which has the article 
follows a preposition, to indicate the purpose or end : as, 
πρὸς τὸ μή, that... not, 2 Co. iii. 135 1 Th.ii.9; 2 Th. iii. 
8; eis τὸ μή (Lat. in id . . ne), to the end (or intent) that 
... not, Acts vii. 19; 1 Co. x. 6; 2 Co. iv. 4; foll. by an 
acc. and inf., 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 7; διὰ τὸ μή, because 

. . not, Mt. xiii. 5 sq.; Mk. iv. 5 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jas. 
iv. 2 [cf. W. 482 (449) ], (2 Mace. iv. 19). c. in other 
expressions where an infin. with the art. is used substan- 
tively: τῷ μή (dat. of the cause or reason [cf. W. § 44, 
5; B. 264 (227)]), 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; in the accus., τὸ μή: 
Ro-xiv. 13; 1 Co. iv.6[R G]; 2Co.ii.1; x.2; 1 Th. iv. 
6, cf. 3. d. in sentences expressing consequence 
orresult: ὥστε py, so that . . . not, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. iii. 
90: 1 Ὁ: ΣῊ Σ᾽ 1 69021159 τν 1 ΠῚ TS 5. μή is 
joined with a Participle(W. § 55, ὃ g.; [B. $ 148, 7; 
cf. Gildersleeve as above p. 55 sq.]), a. in sentences 
expressing a command, exhortation, purpose, ete.: Lk. 
iii.11; Jn. ix. 39; Actsxv.38; xx. 29; Ro. viii. 4; xiv. 
3; 2 Co. xii. 21; Eph. v. 27; Phil. i. 28; ii. 4 [here Rec. 
impv.]; 1 Th.iv.5; 2 Th.i. 8; 1 Pet. ii.16; Heb. vi. 1; 
xiii. 17, etc. b. in general sentences, in which no defi- 
nite person is meant but it is merely assumed that there 
issome one of the character denoted by the participle: as 
ὁ μὴ ὧν per ἐμοῦ, he tal is not on my side, whoever he is, 


or if there is any such person, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23; 
ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων, whoever believeth not, Jn. iii. 18; of μὴ 
ὁμολογοῦντες ᾿Ιησοῦν Xp. if any do not confess, or belong 
to the class that do not confess, 2 Jn. 7; add, Mt. x. 28; 
Lk.vi.49; xii.21, 47 sq.; xxii. 36; Jn. v. 23; x. 15 xii. 
48; xiv.24; Ro.iv.5; v.14; x.20; 1Co. vii. 385 xi. 22; 
2 Th.i.8; Jas.ii. 13; 1 Jn.ii. 4, ete. ; πᾶς ὁ μή, Mt. vii. 
26; (πᾶν δένδρον μή, Mt.iii.10; vii. 19); 1 Jn. iii. 10; 2 
Jn. 9; 2 Th. ii. 12 [here Lmrg. T Tr WH mrz. ἅπαντες 
οἱ μή etc.]; μακάριος 6 μή, Jn. xx. 29; Ro. xiv. 22. c. 
where, indeed, a definite person or thine is referred to, but 
in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by 
the participle) is denied in thethoucht or judgment either 
of the writer or of some other person [ef. esp. W. 484 
(451)]: rà μὴ ὄντα, that are deemed as nothing, 1 Co. i. 28 ; 
ὡς μὴ λαβών. as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv. 7; ὡς 
μὴ ἐρχομένου pov, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv. 
18; ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. x. 14; add, 1 Co. 
vii. 29. Oe... τίνες εἰσὶν ot μὴ πιστεύοντες (acc. to the 
opinion of ὁ εἰδώς), Jn. vi. 64; the same holds true of 
Acts xx. 29; τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα (in the opinion of οἱ μὴ 
σκοποῦντες), 2 Co. iv. 18 (on the other hand, in Heb. xi. 
1, οὐ βλεπόμ. actually invisible) ; τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν: 
ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (μὴ γνόντα is said agreeably 
to the judgment of ὁ ποιήσας), 2 Co. v. 31 (τὸν οὐ γνόντα 
would be equiv. to ἀγνοοῦντα). in predictions, where it 
expresses the opinion of those who predict: ἔσῃ σιωπῶν 
καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, Lk. i. 20; ἔσῃ τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων, 
Acts xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does ποῦ re- 
gard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing, 
which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader 
or hearer ( Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered. 
without etc. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [cf. B. $ 148, 7 b.]: 
ἐξῆλθε μὴ ἐπιστάμενος, ποῦ ἔρχεται, Heb. xi. 8; add. Mt. 
xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but cf. B. § 148, 7 c.)]; Acts v. 
7; xx.22; Heb.ix.9. wherethe participles have a con- 
ditional,causal,orconcessive force, and may be 
resolved into clauses introduegd by if, on condition that, 
ete. : θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι, Gal. vi. 95 μὴ ὄντος νόμου, 
Ro. v. 13; although: νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες, Ro. ii. 14; μὴ ὧν 
αὐτὸς ὑπὸ νόμον, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Rec. om.]; we have both 
the negative particles in ὃν οὐκ εἰδύτες [or (with LT Tr 
WH) ἰδόντες] - . - μὴ ὁρῶντες, whom being ignorant of 
(in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen] ... . 
although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8; also with the article: 
τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα (Germ. die doch nicht haben, they that 
have not, ete.), Ro. ii. 14 ; ὁ δὲ μὴ yeveaXoyoüpevos, but he, 
although not etc. Heb. vii. 6;—or since, because, inasmuch 
as: μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει ov [but GL'T Tr WH om. οὐ; 
cf. B. § 148, 14] κατενόησε τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα νενεκρωμ. (οὐκ 
ἀσθενήσας would be equiv. to δυνατός, strong), Ro. iv. 19; 
πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἷδε μὴ μεμαθηκώς ; since he has not 
learned [W. 488 (450)], Jn. vii. 15; add, Mt. xviii. 25; 
xxii. 25, 29; Lk. 11. 45; vii. 30; xi. 24; xii. 47; xxiv. 
23;, Actsix.26; xvii.6; xxi. 34; xxvii. 7; 2 Co. iii. 14; 
v. 195; also with the article: ὁ μὴ γινώσκων τὸν νόμον, since 
it knoweth not the law, Jn. vii. 49; add, Jude 5. d. 
where (with the ptep.) it can be resolved by (being) such 


μή 


(a person) as not, of such a sort as not: μὴ ζητῶν τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ 
σύμφορον, 1 Co. x. 33; add, Actsix. 9; Gal.iv.8. nent. 
plur. as subst. : τὰ μὴ ὄντα, Ro. iv. 17; rà μὴ σαλευόμενα, 
Heb. xii. 27; τὰ μὴ δέοντα, 1 Tim. v. 13; τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα, 
Ro. i, 28; 2 Macc. vi. 4, (on the other hand, in rà οὐκ 
ἀνήκοντα, Eph. v. 4 [where L T Tr WH ἃ οὐκ ἀνῆκεν], the 
οὐκ coalesces with ἀνήκοντα and forms a single idea, un- 
seemly, unlawful). 6. in independent sentences of 
forbidding, dehorting, admonishing, desiring, ete., μή is 
Prohibitive (cf. W. $ 56,1), Lat. ne, not; a. with 
the 1 pers. plur. of the subjune. present: p; γινώμεθα 
κενόδοξοι, Gal. v. 26; add, Gal. vi. 9; 1 Th. v. 6; 1 Jn. 
iii. 18; aorist: Jn. xix. 24; before the word depending 
on the exhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. with a present im- 
perative, generally where one is bidden to cease from 
something already begun, or repeated, or continued: Mt. 
vi.16,19; vii.1; xix. 6; Mk. ix. 39; xiii.11; Lk. vi. 30; 
vii. 6,13; viii. 49, 52; χ. 4, 7, 20; Jn. ii. 16; v. 28, 45; 
vi.48; vii.24; xiv.1,27; xix.21; Actsx.15; xi.9; xx. 
10; Ro. vi. 12; xi. 18, 20; xii. 2[here L Tr mrg. WH 
mrg. give the inf.], 14; 1 Co. vi. 9; vii. δ; 2 Co. vi. 14,17; 
Gal. v.1; vi. 7; Eph. iv. 30; Col. iii. 9,19, 21; 1 Th. v. 
19; 2 Th. fii. 15; 1 Tim.iv.14; v. 16,19; Heb. xii. 5; 
xii.2; Jas.i.7,16; 1 Pet.iv.12, 15 sq.; 1dn.ii. 15; iii. 
13; Rev. v. 5, and very often. c. with the third per- 
son (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist 
impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to 
be begun, and where things about to be done are forbid- 
den: μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω, Mt. xxiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 31; μὴ xa- 
ταβάτω, Mk. xiii. 15, and L T Tr WH in Mt. xxiv. 17 
(where RG badly karagawéro); μὴ γνώτω, Mt. vi. 3; 
γενέσθω [but. T Tr WH γινέσθω], Lk. xxii. 42; cf. Xen. 
Cyr. 7,5, 13; Aeschyl. Sept. c. Theb. 1036. d. as in 
the more elegant Grk. writ. where future things are for- 
bidden (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the 
aorist subjunctive: μὴ δόξητε, Mt. iii. 9; v. 175 μὴ φο- 
AnOjs, Mt.i. 20; x. 26, 31 [here L T Tr WH pres. impv. 
φοβεῖσθε], (alternating with the impv. pres. φοβεῖσθε in 
Mt. x. 28 [GL T Tr]) ; μὴ ἅψῃ, Col. ii. 21; μὴ ἀποστρα- 
φῇς, Mt. v. 42; μὴ κτήσησθε, Mt. x. 9; add, Mt. vi. 2, 7, 
18,91; Mk.v.7; x.19; Lk.vi.29; vili.28; xiv.8; Jn. 
iii. 7; Acts vii.60; Ro. x. 6; 1 Co.xvi. 11; 2 Co. xi. 16; 
2 Th. ii. 3, —[in the last three exx. with the third pers., 
contrary to W. 502 (467)]; 1 Tim.y.1; 2 Tim. i. 8; Rev. 
vi. 6; x. ἀ(μὴ γράψης, for ἔμελλον γράφειν precedes ; but 
in Jn. xix. 21 μὴ γράφε is used, because Pilate had already 
written) ; Rev. xi. 2; xxii. 10, and very often. We have 
the impv. pres. and the aor. subj. together in Lk.x.4; Acts 
xviii. 9. e. with the 2 pers. of the present subjunc. : 
μὴ σκληρύνητε, Heb. iii. 8, 15, (a rare constr. though not 
wholly unknown to Grk. writ. [* more than doubtful” (L. 
and S. s. v. A. I.2)]; see Delitzsch on the latter passage, 
and Schaefer ad Greg. Corinth. p. 1005 sq.; [SopA. Lex. 
βεν. μή. Others regard the above exx.as subjunc. aorist; 
cf. 2 K. ii. 10; Is. Ixiii. 17; Jer. xvii. 23; xix. 15, ete;p.- f. 
with the optative, in wishes: in that freq. formula μὴ 
γένοιτο, far be it! see γίνομαι, ? a.; μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη, 2 
Tim. iv. 16 (Job xxvii. 5). 


410 





μή 


II. As a Consuncrion, Lat. ne with the subjunc- 
tive; 1. our that, that not or lest, (cf. W. § 56, 2; 
[B. § 139, 48 sq.; Goodwin § 46]); after verbs of fear- 
ing, caution, etc. a. with the subjunc. present, 
where one fears lest something now exists and at the 
same time indicates that he is ignorant whether it is so 
or not (Hermann on Soph. Aj. 272): ἐπισκοποῦντες, μὴ 
εὐ €voxAj, Heb. xii. 15. b. with the subjunc. aorist, 
of things which may occur immediately or very soon: pre- 
ceded by an aor., εὐλαβηθεὶς (L'T Tr WH φοβηθεὶς) μὴ δια- 
σπασθῇ, Acts xxiii. 10; by a pres.: φοβοῦμαι, Acts xxvii. 
17; βλέπω, Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts 
xiii. 40; 1 Co. x. 12; Gal. v. 15; Heb. xii. 255 σκοπέω 
ἐμαυτόν, Gal. vi. 1 [B. 243 (209) would refer this to 2 b. 
below; ef. Goodwin p. 66]; ὁράω, Mt. xviii. 10; 1 Th. v. 
15; elliptically, ὅρα μή (se. τοῦτο ποιήσῃς [cf. W. $ 64, 7 a.; 
B. 395 (338)]): Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. c. with the 
indicative fut. (as being akin to the subjunc. [cf. gram. 
reff. at the beginning]): φοβοῦμαι, μὴ ταπεινώσει pe ὁ θεός 
pov, 2 Co. xii. 20 sq. [L txt. T Tr]; add, Col. ii. 8. 2. 
in order that not (Lat. eo consilio ne) ; a. with the op- 
tative: τῶν στρατιωτῶν βουλὴ ἐγένετο, ἵνα τοὺς δεσμώτας 
ἀποκτείνωσι, μή tis. . - διαφύγοι, Acts xxvii. 42 Rec. (the 
more elegant Greek to express the thought and purpose 
of the soldiers; but the best codd. read διαφύγῃ, which 
GL'T Tr WH have adopted). ^ b. with the subjunc- 
tive aor.: preceded by the pres., Mk. xiii. 36; 2 Co. viii. 
20 [ef. Goodwin $ 43 Rem.]; xii.6; Col. ii. 4 (where 
LT Tr WH tva μηδείς for R G μή τις [— an oversight ; 
in R Gas well as in the recent crit. edd. the purpose is 
expressed by an inserted iva]). 

III. As an ITERROGA TIVE particle it is used when 
a negative answer is expected, Lat. num; (W.$57,3b.; 
[B. 248 (213)]); 1. ina direct question: Mt. vii. 
9sq.; ix. 15; Mk.ii. 19; Lk. xvii. 9; Jn. iii.4; iv. 12, 
33; vi. 67; vii. 35, 51 sq.; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 3; ix. 
20; 1Co.i. 13; ix. 8 sq.; x. 22; Jas. ii.[1 WH], 14 ; iii. 12, 
ete. ; μὴ γάρ (see γάρ, I.), Jn. vii. 41; μὴ οὐκ (where οὐκ be- 
longs to the verb, and μή is interrogative), Ro. x. 18 sq.; 
1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; μὴ yàp . - . οὐ, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. inan 
indirect question with the indicative (Germ. ob etwa, 
ob wohl, whether possibly, whether perchance), where in ad- 
monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is 
as we fear [cf. B. 8139, 57; W. $41 b. 4 a.]: Lk. xi. 
35, ef. D. 243 (209) ; Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334 sq.; [Aid- 
dell, Plato's Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138]. 

IV. The particles o? μή in combination augment the 
force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise, 
by. no means; (this formula arose from the fuller. ex- 
pressions οὐ δεινόν or δέος or φόβος, μή, which are still 
found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kühner ii. $ 516, 9 
p. 773 sq.; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost 
sight of that od μή is used even of things not at all to be 
feared, but rather to be desired; so in the N. T. in Mt. 
v. 18, 26; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 17; xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 48; xx. 
25; 1 Th. v. 3); cf. Matthiae § 517; Kühner ii. p. 775; 
Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq.; [Gildersleeve in the Amer. Jour. of 
Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq.; Goodwin § 89]; W. § 56, 3; 


μήγε 


[B. 211 (188) sq.]. 1. with the fut. indicative: οὐ 
μὴ ἔσται σοι τοῦτο, this shall never be unto thee, Mt. xvi. 


22; add, Mt. xxvi.35; Lk. xxii. 34 RG L; x. 19 (where | 
R* G WH mre. ἀδικήσῃ) ; Jn. vi. 35 [here L Tr mrg. zec- | 


νάσει, and LT Tr WH διψήσει]; xiii. 38 RG; Mk. xiii. 
31 T Tr WH; Heb. x. 17 L T Tr WH; in many pas- 
sages enumerated by W. 506 (472); [cf. B. 212 (183), 
the manuscripts vary between the indic. fut. and the 
subjune.aor. Ina question, o? μὴ ποιήσει τὴν ἐκδίκησιν ; 
Lk. xviii. 7 RG. 2. with the aor. subjunctive (the 
use of which in the N. T. scarcely differs from that of 
the fut.; cf. W. § 56, 3; [B. $ 139, 7]), in confident as- 
sertions: — subjune. of the 1 aor. Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. 
xiii. 2; Lk. vi. 37; Jn.xiii. 8; Heb. viii. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 6; 
Rev.ii.11; vii. 16; xviii. 21, 22, 23; xxi.27,etc.; 1 aor. 
mid. subj., Jn. viii. 52 (where Ree. γεύσεται) ; thus these 
N. T. exx. prove that Dawes made a great mistake in 
denying (in his Miscellanea Critica, p. 221 sqq. [ed. (Th. 
Kidd) 2, p. 408 sq.]) that the first aor. subjunc. is used 
after οὐ μή: [cf. Goodwin in Transactions of Am. Philol. 
Assoc. for 1869-70, pp. 46-55; L. and S. s. v. o? μή, T 
ib.; B.$ 139, 8]; — subjunc. of 2 aor., Mt. v. 18, 20, 
26; Mk. x. 15; Lk. i. 15; xii. 59; Jn. x. 28; xi. 26; 1 Co. 
viii. 13; Heb. xiii. 5; Rev. iii. 3[R GL Tr mre. WH txt. ], 
and often. in questions: with 1 aor., Lk. xviii. 7 LT 
Tr WH; Rev. xv. 4 (in L T Tr WH with the subj. aor. 
and the fut.); with 2 aor., Jn. xviii. 11. in declarations 
introduced by ὅτε: with 1 aor., 1 Th. iv. 15; with 2 aor., 
Mt. xxiv. 34 [here RG T om. ὅτι); xxvi. 29 [LT Tr WH 
om. ὅτι}; Lk. xiii. 35 [T WH om. L br. ὅτι); xxii. 16; 
Jn. xi. 56; in relative clauses: with 1 aor., Mt. xvi. 28; 
Mk.ix.1; Acts xiii.41; Ro.iv.8; with 2 aor., Lk. xviii. 
30. 3. with the present subjunc. (as sometimes in 
Grk. auth., cf. W. 507 (473)): οὐδὲ ov μή σε ἐγκαταλείπω, 
Heb. xiii. 5 Tdf. (for ἐγκαταλίπω Rec. et al.), [cf. B. 213 
(184)]. 

μήγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see γέ, 3 d. 

μηδαμῶς, (adv. fr. μηδαμός, and this fr. μηδέ, and ἀμός 
some one [perh. allied w. ἅμα, q. v-]), [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt. 
down], by no means, not at all: sc. τοῦτο γένοιτο, in re- 
plies after an impv. [A. V. Not so], Acts x. 14; xi. 8. 
(Sept. for n»*on.) * 

μηδέ, (μή, q. v., and δέ), [fr. Hom. down], a negative 
disjunctive conjunction; [cf. W. § 55, 6; B. § 149, 
13]; 1. used in continuing a negation or prohibi- 
tion, but not, and not, neither; preceded by uj, — either 
so that the two negatives have one verb in common : 
preceded by μή with a participle, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii. 
24; by pnw. a pres. subjunc., 1 Co. v. 8 [here L mrs. 
pres. indic.]; 1 Jn. iii. 18; by μή w. impv., Mt. vi. 25; 
Lk.x.4; xii.22; xiv. 12; 1 Jn. ii. 15; by μή w. an aor. 
subj. 2 pers. plur., Mt. x. 9 sq.; by eis τὸ μή, 2 Th. ii. 2 
LT Tr WH; —or so that μηδέ has its own verb: pre- 
ceded by ὃς ἐὰν (ἂν) μή, Mt. x. 14; Mk. vi. 11; by ἵνα 
μή; Jn. iv. 15; by ὅπως μή, Lk. xvi. 26; w. a ptep. after 
μή w.a ptep., Lk. xii. 47; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after 
μή w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq.; Heb. xii. 5; 
μηδενὶ ἐπιτίθει, foll. by μηδέ w. impv. 1 Tim. v. 22; w. 


411 





μηδείς 


2 pers. of the aor. subj. after μή w. 2 pers. of the aor. 
subj., Mt. vii. 6; xxiii. 9sq.; Lk. xvii. 23; Col. ii. 21; 
1 Pet. iii. 14; after μηδέ w. an aor. subj. Mk. viii. 26 [T 
reads μή for the first μηδέ, T WH Tr mrg. om. the sec- 
ond clause]; after μηδένα w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14 
[ T df. repeats μηδένα]; μηδὲ... μηδέ w. 1 pers. plur. pres. 
subj. 1 Co. x. 8 sq. [see below]; παραγγέλλω foll. by μή 
w. inf... . μηδέ w. inf., Actsiv. 18; 1 Tim.i.4; vi. 17; 
καλὸν τὸ μὴ . . . μηδέ with inf. Ro. xiv. 21; w. gen. absol. 
after μήπω w. gen. absol. Ro. ix. 11; w. impv. after eis 
τὸ μή, 1 Co. x. 7; μηδέ is repeated several times in a neg- 
ative exhortation after eis τὸ μή in 1 Co. x. 7-10. 2. 
not even (Lat. ne... quidem): w. an inf. after ἔγραψα, 
1 Co. v. 11; after ὥστε, Mk. ii. 2; iii. 20 (where RG T 
badly μήτε [cf. W. 489 sq. (456); B. pp. 367, 369]); w. 
a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3; 2 Th. iii. 10. 

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν (and μηθέν, Acts xxvii. 33 LT 
Tr WH, — a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as 
early as B. c. 378, cf. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 
73]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. $5, 1d. 11; [B. 28 
(25)]; Kühner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and εἷς), 
[fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a 
noun, n0, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, 
neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; ac- 
cordingly a. with an imperative: μηδείς being 
the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 
18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi. 17; Eph. ν. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. 
iv.12; Tit. 11.156; Jas.i.13; 1 Jn. iii. 7; neut. 'μηδέν, 
sc. ἔστω [A. V. have thou nothing to do with ete.], Mt. 
xxvii. 19; μηδείς in the dat. or the acc. depending on 
the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; μηδέν (accusative), 
Lk.ii.13; ix.3; μ. φοβοῦ, Rey. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH 
txt. μή]. b. μηδείς with the optative: once in 
the N. T., Mk. xi. 14 (where Ree. οὐδείς) [cf. W. 476 
(443)]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc., 
the μηδείς depending on the verb; as, μηδενὶ εἴπῃς, Mt. 
viii.4; xvii. 9; accus., Lk. iii. 14; x. 4; μηδέν (ace.), Acts 
xvi. 28; κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον, 2 Th: ii. 3. d. with the 
particles tva and ὅπως (see μή, I. 3): with tva, Mt. xvi. 
20; Mk. v. 43; vi. 8; vil. 36; 1x. 9; ΤΊ 11]. 13; Rev. iii. 
11; with ὅπως, Acts viii. 24. e. with an infini- 
tive; a. with one that depends on another verb : — 
as on παραγγέλλω, Lk. viii. 56; ix. 21; Acts xxiii. 22; 
δείκνυμι. Acts x. 28; διατάσσομαι, Acts xxiv. 23; dva- 
θεματίζω ἐμαυτόν, Acts xxiii. 14; κρίνω (acc. w. inf.), 
Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; εὔχομαι, 2 Co. xiii. 7; βούλομαι (acc. 
w. inf.), 1 Tim. v. 14; ὑπομιμνήσκω τινά, Tit. iii. 2, etc.; 
παρακαλῶ τινα foll. by τὸ μή w. ace. and inf., 1 Th. iii. 
3 L (ed. ster.) T Tr WH. B. with an inf. depend- 
ing on διὰ τό: Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with 
a participle (see μή, I. 5) ; in dat., Acts xi. 19; Ro. xii. 
17; accus. μηδένα; Jn. viii. 10; Acts ix. 7; μηδέν, Acts iv. 
21; xxvii. 33; 1 Co.x. 25,27; 2 Co. vi. 10; 2 Th. iii. 115 
1 Tim. vi. 4; Tit.i.8; Jas.1.6; 8 Jn. 7; μηδεμίαν προ- 
σκοπήν, 2 Co. vi. 3; μηδεμίαν πτόησιν, 1 Pet. iii. 6; μηδε- 
μίαν αἰτίαν, Acts xxviii. 18; ἀναβολὴν μηδ. xxv. 17. g 
noteworthy are — μηδείς with a gen., Acts iv. 17; xxiv. 
23; μηδέν sc. rovrov, Rey. ii. 10 [R GT WH mrg.]; ἐν 


μηδέποτε 


μηδενί, in nothing, 1 Co. i. 7 [but χαρίσματι is expressed 
here]; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)]; vii. 9; Phil. i. 28; 
Jas.i.4. μηδὲν εἶναι, to be nothing i. e. of no account, 
opp. to εἶναί τι, Gal. vi. 3 (Soph. Aj. 754; other exx. fr. 
Grk. auth. see in Passow ii. p. 231"; [L. and S. s. v. II; 
cf. B. § 129, 5]) ; μηδέν (acc.), nothing i. e. not at all, in 
no respect: Acts x. 20; xi. 12, (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 4; 
Tim. 43); as aecus. of the obj. after verbs of harm, loss, 
damage, advantage, care, [cf. W. 227 (213); B. § 131, 
10]: as, βλάπτειν, Lk. iv. 35 [cf. W. 483 (450)]; ὠφε- 
λεῖσθαι, Mk. v. 26; ὑστερεῖν, 2 Co. xi. 55. μεριμνᾶν, Phil. 
iv. 6. h. examples of a double negation, by which 
the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. quisquam fol- 
lows a negation (cf. W. $ 55, 9 b.) : μηκέτι μηδείς, Mk. 
xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; μηδενὶ μηδέν, Mk. i. 44 [L om. Tr 
br. μηδέν]; Ro. xiii. 8; μηδεμίαν ἐν μηδενί, 2 Co. vi. 3; 
μὴ - - - ev μηδενί, Phil. i. 285; μὴ . . . μηδέν, 2 Co. xiii. 7; 
py... μηδεμίαν, 1 Pet. iii. 65 μή tes: . . κατὰ μηδένα τρό- 
πον, 2 Th. ii. 8. 

μηδέποτε, (μηδέ and ποτέ), adv., never: 2 Tim. iii. 7.* 

μηδέπω, (μηδέ and πώ), adv., not yet: Heb. xi. 7.” 

Μῆδος, -ov, ὁ, a Mede, a native or an inhabitant of 
Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief eity was 
Ecbatana [see B. D. s. v.]: Acts ii. 9. [Cf. B. D. and 
Schaff-Herzog s. v. Media.]* 

μηθέν, see μηδείς. 

μηκέτι, (fr. μή and ἔτι), adv., employed in the same 
constructions as μή; no longer; no more; not here- 
after: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 
RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with 
1 pers. plur. pres. subj- Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres. 
imperative: [Lk. viii. 49 L T Trtxt. WH]; Jn. v. 14; 
viii. 11; Eph. iv. 28; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta- 
tive: Mk. xi. 14. e. tva μηκέτι: 2 Co. v. 15; Eph. iv. 
14. f. with an infin. depending —on another verb: 
on βοῶ (ἐπιβοῶ), Acts xxv. 24; on ἀπειλῶ, Acts iv. 17; 
on λέγω x. μαρτύρομαι, Eph. iv. 17; on eis τό, 1 Pet. iv. 
2; on ὥστε, Mk. i. 45; ii. 2; τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν, Ro. vi. 
6. g. with a ptep.: Acts xiii. 34 [cf. W. $ 65, 10]; 
Ro. xv. 23; 1 Th. iii. 1. h. οὐ μηκέτι (see μή, IV. 
2): with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 LT Tr mrg. WH.* 

μῆκος, -eos (τους), τό, fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often 
for 8; length: Rev. xxi. 16; τὸ πλάτος kai μῆκος καὶ 
βάθος kai ὕψος, language used in shadowing forth the 
greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received 
from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.* 


μηκύνω : (μῆκος) ; fr. Hdt. and Pind. down; to make | 


long, to lengthen; in the Bible twice of plants, i.q. to cause 
(0 grow, increase: ὃ ἐφύτευσε κύριος kai ὑετὸς ἐμήκυνεν 
(732), Is. xliv. 14; hence Pass. [al. Mid.] pres. μηκύνο- 
μαι; to grow up: Mk. iv. 27 [μηκύνηται (Tr mre. -erat) |.” 

μηλωτή, -7s; 7. (fr. μῆλον a sheep, also a goat; as καμη- 
Aor! [*camlet'] fr. κάμηλος [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 332]), 
a sheepskin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 17,1. For 58 an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in 
1 K. xix. 13, 19; 2 K. ii. 8, 13 sq., doubtless because 
these mantles were made of skins; hence more closely 
"yb nas, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept. 


412 





| 





μήποτε 


δέρρις τριχίνη). In the Byzant. writ. [ Apoll. Dysk. 191, 
9] μηλωτή denotes a monk's garment.* 

μήν, [(fr. Hom. down)], a particle of affirmation, 
verily, certainly, truly, (Sap. vi. 25); ἢ μήν, see under 
7 fin. 

μήν, cen. μηνός, 6, (w. Alex. acc. μῆναν, Rev. xxii. 2 
Lehm.; on which form see reff. under ἄρσην, fin.); [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. a month: Lk.i.24, 26, 36,56; iv. 25; 
Acts vii. 20; xviii. 11; xix. 8; xx. 3; xxviii. 11; Jas. v. 
17: Rey. τς. 5; 10. 15; x1-2* exp ees 2. the 
time of new moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium ; 
after the use of the Hebr. wan, which denotes both a 
‘month’ and a ‘new moon,’ as in Num. xxviii. 11; xxix. 
1): Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. Ixvi. 23] (the 
first day of each month, when the new moon appeared, 
was a festival among the Hebrews; cf. Lev. xxiii. 24; 
Num. xxviii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 4); [al refer the 
passage to 1 (see Mey. ad loc.) ].* 

μηνύω [cf. Curtius $ 429]: 1 aor. ἐμήνυσα: 1 aor. pass. 
ptep. fem. μηνυθεῖσα: as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Pind. 
down; 1. to disclose or make known something 
secret; in a forensic sense, to inform, report: foll. by ποῦ 
ἐστίν, Jn. xi. 57; τινί τι, pass., Acts xxiii. 30. 2: 
univ. (o declare, tell, make known: 1 Co. x. 28. 3. 
to indicate, intimate: of a teacher; foll. by ὅτι, Lk. xx. 
37. [A. V. uniformly show.]* 

μὴ οὐκ, see μή, IIT. 1. 

μήποτε, (fr. μή and ποτέ), [μή ποτε (separately) L WH 
(exc. Mt. xxv. 9, see below) Tr (exc. 2 Tim. ii. 25)], dif- 
fering from οὔποτε as μή does from ov; [fr. Hom. down]. 
Accordingly it is 1. a particle of Negation; not 
ever, never: ἐπεὶ μήποτε ἰσχύει, since it is never of force, 
because the writer thinks that the very idea of its hav- 
ing force is to be denied, Heb. ix. 17 [where WH txt. μὴ 
tore], on which see W. 480 (447), cf. B. 353 (304); but 
others refer this passage to 3 a. below. 2. apro- 
hibitory Conjunction; Jest ever, lest at any time, lest 
haply, (also written separately μή ποτε [ (see init.), esp. 
when the component parts retain each its distinctive 
force; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 129 sq.; Ellendt, 
Lex.Soph.ii.107. Inthe N. T. use of this particle the no- 
tion of time usual to zoré seems to recede before that of 
contingency, lest perchance]), so that it refers to the pre- 
ceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated 
action [W. § 56, 2]: w. a subj. pres. Lk. xii. 58; w. a 
subj. ao r., Mt. iv. 6 and Lk. iv. 11, fr. Ps. xc. (xei.) 12 
(where Sept. for 12); Mt. v. 25 [(cf. below)]; vii. 6 [R 
G]; xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27 (both from Is. vi. 10, 
where Sept. for }5); Mt. xiii. 29 (ov sc. θέλω); xv. 32; 
xxvii.64; Mk.iv.12; Lk. xiv.12; withtva prefixed, ibid. 
29; w.afut. indic. [see B. § 139, 7, cf. also p. 368 (315) 
d.]: [Mt. vii. 6 L T Tr WH; (cf. v. 25)]; Mk. xiv. 2; 
[Lk. xii. 58 L'T Tr WH]. after verbs of fearing, 
taking care, [W.u.s.; B. $ 139, 48]: w. subj. aor., — 
so after προσέχω, to take heed, lest ete., Lk. xxi. 34; Heb. 
ii. 1, (Sir. xi. 33); so that an antecedent φοβούμενοι or 
προσέχοντες must be mentally supplied, Acts v.39; μήποτε 
οὐκ ἀρκέσῃ, lest perchance there be not enough (so that οὐκ 


μήπου 


dpxéon forms one idea, and φοβούμεθα must be supplied 
before μήποτε), Mt. xxv. 9 RT WH mrg.; but L Tr WH 
txt., together with Meyer et al., have correctly restored 
μήποτε (sc. τοῦτο γενέσθω [ W. § 64, 7 a.])- οὐ μὴ apKeon, 
i.e. not so! there will in no wise be enough (see μή, IV. 2); 
cf. Bornemann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 143 sq.; 
[but all the editors above named remove the punctua- 
tion mark after μήποτε ; in which case it may be connect- 
ed directly with the words which follow it and translated 
(with R. V.) ‘peradventure there will not be enough’; 
cf. B. § 148, 10, esp. p. 354 (304) note. For additional 
~ exx. of μήποτε in this sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 10, 
10 p. 1179?*, 24; with indic., ibid. pp. 1172*, 33; 1173* 
22, etc.), see Soph. Lex. s. v.; Bitm. in his trans. of A poll. 
Dysk., index s. v.; (cf. L. and S. s. v. uj, B. 9)]. after 
φοβοῦμαι, w. pres. subjune. Heb. iv. 1; so that φοβού- 
μενος must be supplied before it, Lk. xiv. 8. after βλέπειν 
w. a fut. indic. [cf. W. $ 56, 2 b. a.; B. 243 (209) ], Heb. 
iii. 12. 3. a particle of Interrogation accom- 
panied with doubt (see μή, III.), whether ever, whether at 
any time ; whether perchance, whether haply, (Germ. doch 
nicht etwas ob nicht etwa); a. in a direct question in- 
troduced by ἐπεί, for, else, (see ἐπεί, 2 sub fin.): so ace. to 
the not improbable interpretation of some [e. g. L WH 
mrg., Delitzsch] in Heb. ix. 17, see in 1above. Inthere- 
maining N. T. passages so used that the inquirer, though 
he doubts and expects a negative answer, yet is inclined 
to believe what he doubtfully asks about; thus, in a direct 
question, in Jn. vii. 26. b. inindirect questions; ^ a. 
w. the optative (where the words are regarded as the 
thoucht of some one [W. $ 41 b. 4c.; B. $139,60]): Lk. 
iii. 15. [See B.] B. w.the subjunctive: 2 Tim. ii. 25 
[R GL (cf. B. 46 (40)) ; but IT Tr WH txt. give the 
optative], where μήποτε κτλ. depend on the suppressed 
idea διαλογιζόμενος [cf. B. $ 139, 62 fin.; W. τι. s.].* 

μήπου [T Tr] or μή zov [WH], that nowhere, lest any- 
where, [lest haply]: Acts xxvii.29T Tr WH. (Hom. et 
al.)* 

μήπω [or μή πω, L Tr in Ro. ix. 11], (μή and πώ). [fr. 
Hom. down], adv.; 1. not yet: in construction 
with the acc. and inf., Heb. ix. 8; w. a ptep., μήπω yap 
γεννηθέντων, though they were not yet born, Ro. ix. 11, 
where ef. Fritzsche. 2. lest in any way [?]: Acts 
xxvii. 29 Lchm.* 

μήπως [G T, or μή πως L Tr WH], (μή and πώς), [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. a conjunction, /est in any way, lest 
perchance ; a. in final sentences, w. an aor. subj., pre- 
ceded by a pres. 1 Co. ix. 27; preceded by an aor., 2 
Co. 11. 7; 1x. 4. b. after verbs of fearing, taking 
heed: w.an aor. subj. — after βλέπειν, 1 Co. viii. 9; 
after φοβεῖσθαι, Acts xxvii. 29 R; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20; 
w. a perf. indie., to indicate that what is feared has actu- 
ally taken place [W. § 56, 2 b. a.; B. 242 (209)], Gal. 
iv. 11; w. an aor. subj., the idea of fearing being sup- 
pressed, Ro. xi. 21 Ree. [B. § 148, 10; ef. W. 474 
(442)]. . 2. an interrogative particle, whether in 
any way, whether by any means: in an indirect question, 
with an indic. present (of a thing still continuing) and 


413 








μήτι 


aorist (of a thing already done), Gal. ii. 2 (7 laid before 
them the gospel ete., sc. inquiring, whether haply ete.; Paul 
expects a negative answer, by which he wished his teach- 
ing concerning Christ to be approved by the apostles at 
Jerusalem, yet by no means because he himself had any 
doubt about its soundness, but that his adversaries might 
not misuse the authority of those apostles in assailing this 
teaching, and thereby frustrate his past and present en- 
deavors ; cf. Hofmann ad loe. [B. 353 (303). Others, 
however, take τρέχω as a subjunctive, and render lest 
haply I should be running ete. ; see W. 504 sq. (470), ef. 
Ellicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps 
already done, but which the writer wishes had not been 
done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and 
uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the 
same sentence, 1 Th. iii. 5 (where μήπως depends on γνῶναι; 
cf. Schott, Liinemann, [Ellicott],ad loe.; [B. 353 (304) ; 
W. 505 (470) ]).* 

μηρός, -ov, ὁ, the thigh: Rev. xix. 16. (From Hom. down; 
Sept. for 31.)* 

μήτε, (μή and the enclitie τέ), [fr. Hom. down], a cop- 
ulative, conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing 
fr. οὔτε as μή does fr. od. It differs fr. μηδέ in that μηδέ 
separates different things, but μήτε those which are of the 
same kind or which are parts of one whole; cf. W. § 55, 
6; [B. $149, 13 b.]) : pyre... μήτε, neither . . . nor, Lk. 
vir. 33 [,T py... μηδέ]; ix. 3 (five times); Acts xxiii. 
12, 21; xxvii. 20; Heb. vii. 3 ; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for 
μὴ - - pare we must with LT ΤῊ WH substitute μὴ . . . 
μηδέ). μὴ... μήτε... - μήτε, Mt. v. 34-36 (four times); 
1 Tim.i.7; Jas. v. 12; Rev. vii. 3; ἵνα py... pyre... 
μήτε, Rev. vii. 1; μηδὲ Sor μήτε cheno μήτε, ΟΝ oos 
Tr WH; μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μηδὲ ἄγγελον (for that is 
something other than ἀνάστασις), μῆτε πνεῦμα (because 
angels belong to the genus πνεύματα), Acts xxiii. 8 RG; 
cf. W. 493 (459) ; [B. 367 (314) sq.]." 

μήτηρ, gen. μητρός, dat. μητρί, acc. μητέρα, 7, [fr. Hom. 
down; fr. Skr. ma *to measure' ; but whether denoting 
the ‘moulder,’ or the ‘manager’ is debated; cf. Vanicek 
p.657; Curtius § 472; (cf. nérpov)], Hebr. DN, a mother; 
prop.: Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often; trop. of that which 
is like a mother: Mt. xii. 49 sq.; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. xix. 
27; Ro. xvi. 13, cf. 1 Tim. v. 2; a city is called ἡ μήτηρ 
τῶν πορνῶν, that produces and harbors the harlots, Rev. 
xvii. 5; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians] 
originated, Gal. iv. 26 [here GT Tr WH om. L br. πάντων 
(on the origin of which cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ]. 

μήτι [so ἃ T WH R (commonly), but μή τι L (exe. 1 
Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25; Mk. iv. 21)], (μή 
and τί), whether at all, whether perchance, an interroga- 
tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question 
(Germ. doch nicht etwa? [in Eng. generally untranslated; 
cf. W. § 57,3 b.; B. 248 (213)]): Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22, 
25; Mk. iv. 21; xiv. 19; Lk. vi. 39; Jn. vii. 31[R 6]; 
viii. 22; xviii. 35; xxi. 5 [here all texts μή τε (properly)]; 
Acts x. 47; 2 Co. xii. 18; Jas. iii. 11; μήτι dpa, 2 Co.i. 
17; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe 
what he asks about (see μήποτε, 3 a.): Mt. xii. 23; Jn. 


μήτυγε 


414 


μιμέομαι 


iv. 29. εἶ μήτι, see εἰ, III. 10. μήτιγε (or μήτι γε) see in | p. 398 c.; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. 17; test. Benj. 8; 


its place.* 

μήτιγε [so G T WH; but pyre ye RL, μή τι ye Tr], 
(fr. μή, τί, γέ), to say nothing of, not to mention, which 
ace. to the context is either a. much less; or b. 
much more, much rather; so once in the N. T., 1 Co. vi. 
3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 801 sq.* 

paris [so R G Jn. iv. 33], more correctly μή τις; τι 
prohibitive, Jet no one [cf. B. 31 (28)]: [w. 1 aor. subj. 
1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter- 
rogative, (Lat. num quis ?) hath any one etc. : Jn. vii. 48; 
[2 Co. xii. 17, cf. B. § 151,7; W.574 (534)]; where one 
would gladly believe what he asks about doubtfully (see 
μήτι, sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33.* 

μήτρα, -as, 7), (μήτηρ); the womb: Lk. ii. 23 (on which 
see διανοίγω, 1); Ro. iv.19. (Hdt., Plat., al.; Sept. for 
om* 

᾿μητραλῴας (also μητραλοίας), L'T Tr WH [see WH. 
App. p. 152] μητρολῴας, -ov, 6, (μήτηρ, and ἀλοιάω to 
thresh, smite), a matricide: 1'Tim.i.9. (Aeschyl., Plat., 
Lcian., al.) * 

μητρό-πολις, -ews, 7, (μήτηρ and πόλις), a metropolis, 
chief city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22) 
fin.; [in this sense fr. Xen. down ].* 

pla, see under eis. 

μιαίνω ; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. μιανθῶσιν; pf. 3 
pers. sing. μεμίανται (unless it be better to take this form 
asa plur.; cf. Krüger 8 38, 3 Anm. 9; Bitm. Gram. § 101 
Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. 8 101 Anm. 13; B. 41 (86); [W. 
§ 58, 6 b. 8.]), ptep. μεμιασμένος (Tit. i. 15 RG) and 
μεμιαμμένος (ibid. L'T Tr WH; also Sap. vii. 25; Tob. 
ii. 9; Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk.; cf. Matthiae i. p. 
415; Krüger § 40 s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on 
Theophil. ad Autol.1,1p.2sq.; [Veitchs.v.]); fr. Hom. 
down ; 1. to dye with another color, to stain: ἐλέ- 
φαντα φοίνικι, Hom. Il. 4, 141. 2. to defile, pollute, 
sully, contaminate, soil, (Sept. often for N20) : in a physi- 
cal and a moral sense, σάρκα (of licentiousness), Jude 8; 
in a moral sense, τὴν συνείδησιν, τὸν νοῦν, pass. Tit. i. 15; 
absol. to defile with sin, pass. ibid. and in Heb. xii. 15; for 
wüonn, Deut: xxiv. 6 (4); in aritual sense, of men, pass. 
Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5, 8; Num. xix. 13, 20; Tob. 
ii. 9).* 

[Sxs. μιαίνω, μολύνω: acc. to Trench (N. T. Syn. 
ὃ xxxi.) μιαίνω to stain differs from μολύνω to smear not only 
in its primary and outward sense, but in the circumstance 
that (like Eng. stain) it may be used in good part, while joa. 
admits of no worthy reference.] 

μίασμα, -ros, τό, (ptatvo), that which defiles [cf. kav- 
χημα, 2]; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio): trop. μιάσματα 
τοῦ κόσμου, vices the foulness of which contaminates one 
in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind, 


2 Pet. ii. 20. (Trage., Antiph. Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 


Plut.; Sept., Lev. vii. 8 (18); Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 34; ! 


Judith ix. 2; 1 Macc. xiii. 50.) * 

μιασμός, -o0, 6, (μιαίνω), the act of defiling, defilement, 
pollution: ἐπιθυμία μιασμοῦ, defiling lust [ W. § 34, 3 b.], 
2 Pet. ii. 10. 





(Sap. xiv. 26; 1 Macc. iv. 43; Plut. mor. | 


Graec. Ven. (passim); Herm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].)* 

μίγμα or (so L T) μῖγμα, (on the accent cf. Lipsius, 
Gramm. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [ef. W. § 6,1 e.; 
κρίμα, init.]), -ros, τό, (μίγνυμι), that which has been pro- 
duced by mixing, a mixture: Jn. xix. 39 [WH txt. &Acypa, 
q. v-J]. (Sir. xxxviii. 8; Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

μίγνυμι and μίσγω: 1 aor. ἔμιξα ; pf. pass. ptep. pepey- 
μένος ; fr. Hom. down; to mix, mingle: ri τινι, one thing 
with another, Rev. viii. 7 Rec.; xv. 2; also τὶ ἔν τινι [ef. 
B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 GL T Tr WH; μετά τινος, with 
a thing, Mt. xxvii, 34; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see αἷμα, 
2a.). [SYN. see κεράννυμι, fin. COMP.: ouv-ava-piyvupt. |* 

μικρός, -d, -óv, compar. μικρότερος, -épa, -epov, [fr. 
Hom. down], Sept. for 18, 18, Oy, small, little; 
used a. of size: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 31; hence 
of stature, τῇ ἡλικίᾳ, Lk. xix. 3; of length, Jas. iii.5. ^b. 
of space: neut. προελθὼν [προσελθ. T Tr WH mrg. in 
Mt., Tr WH mrg. in Mk. (see προσέρχομαι, a-)] μικρόν, 
having gone forward a little, Mt. xxvi. 39; Mk. xiv. 35, 
[ef. W. § 32,6; B. $ 131, 11 sq.]. c. of age: less 
by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat- 
ure]; ot μικροί; the little ones, young children, Mt. xviii. 
6,10, 14; Mk.ix. 42; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου [ A. V. from 
the least to the greatest], Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11, (Jer. 
vi 13; xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34); μικρός re kai μέγας, [both 
small and great] i. e. all, Acts xxvi. 22; plur., Rev. xi. 
1850x116; x1x)0 4085 Ἐν ΤΟΣ d. of time, short, 
brief: neuter — nom., ἔτε [or ἔτε om.] μικρὸν (sc. ἔσται) 
kai, (yel) a little while and ete. i. e. shortly (this shall come 
to pass), Jn. xiv. 19; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)]; 
ἔτι μικρὸν ὅσον ὅσον (see ὅσος, a); without xat, Heb. x. 
37 (Is. xxvi. 20); τὸ μικρόν [Tr WH om. τό], Jn. xvi. 18; 
— μικρόν ace. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2); 
μικρὸν χρόνον, Jn. vii. 33; xii.35; Rev. vi 11; xx. 3; 
μετὰ μικρόν. after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 
70, (πρὸ μικροῦ, Sap. xv. 8). e. of quantity, i. e. 
number or amount: μικρὰ ζύμη, 1 Co. v. 6; Gal. v. 9; 
of number, μικρὸν ποίμνιον, Lk. xii. 32; of quantity, . 
μικρὰ δύναμις, Rey. iii. 8; neut. μικρόν (τι), a little, 2 Co. 
ἘΠ 126: f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42; Lk. 
ix. 48; xvii. 2; 6 μικρότερος ev τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν ovp. he 
that is inferior to the other citizens of the kingdom of 
heaven in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. but little in 
etc.; cf. W. 244 (229); B. § 123, 13], Mt. xi. 11; Lk. 
vii. 28.* 

Μίλητος, -ov, ἡ, Miletus, a maritime city [now nearly 
ten miles fr. the coast (cf. Acts xx. 38)] of Caria or 
lonia, near the mouths of the Meander and not far [e. 
35 m.S.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many 
[some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales, 
Anaximander, and other celebrated men: Acts xx. 15, 
17; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [Zewin, St. Paul, ii. 90 sq.]* 

μίλιον, -ov, τό, (a word of Lat. origin [cf B. 18 (16)]), 


| a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand 


paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile]: 
Mt. v. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) * 
μιμέομαι, -οὔμαι ; (pipos [an actor, mimic]); to imitate: 


μιμητής 
τινά, any one, 2 ΤῊ. iii. 7, 9; τί, Heb. xiii. 7; 3 Jn. 11. 
[Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., al.] * 

μιμητής, -οὔ, ὁ, an imitator: γίνομαί twos (gen. of pers.), 
1Co. iv. 16; xi. 1; Eph. v. 1; 1 Th.i.6; ii. 14; Heb. vi. 
12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where LT 
Tr WH (gerat). [Plat., Isoer., al.]* 

μιμνήσκω: (MNAQ [allied w. μένω, μανθάνω; cf. Lat. 
maneo, moneo, mentio, etc.; c£. Curtius $ 429]); to remind: 
Hom., Pind., Theogn., Eur., al.; Pass. and Mid., pres. 
μιμνήσκομαι (Heb. ii. 6; xiii. 3; rare in Attic); 1 aor. 
ἐμνήσθην; pf. μέμνημαι; 1 fut. pass. in a mid. sense, 
μνησθήσομαι (Heb. x. 17 L'T Tr WH); Sept. for 321; 
to be recalled or to return to one's mind, to remind one's 
self of, to remember; ἐμνήσθην, with a pass. signif. [cf. 
B. 52 (46)], to be recalled to mind, to be remembered, had 
in remembrance: ἐνώπιόν twos, before i. e. in the mind of 
one (see ἐνώπιον, 1 c.), Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19, (pas- 
sively also in Ezek. xviii. 22; [Sir. xvi. 17 Rec.]; and 
ἀναμνησθῆναι, Num. x. 9; Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16) ; — with a 
mid. signif., foll. by a gen. of the thing [.W. § 30, 10 c.], 
to remember a thing: Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxiv. 8; Aets 
xi. 16; 2 Pet. iii. 2; Jude 17; μνησθῆναι ἐλέους, to call 
to remembrance former love, Lk. i. 54 (cf. Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 6); τῆς διαθήκης, Lk. i. 72 (Gen. ix. 15; Ex. ii. 24; 
1 Mace. iv. 10; 2 Macc. i. 2); μὴ μνησθῆναι τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν 
twos, [A. V. to remember no more] i. e. to forgive, Heb. 
viii. 12; x. 17, (after the Hebr.; see Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 7; 
Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; Is. xliii. 25; and on the other hand, 
to remember the sins of any one is said of one about to 
punish them, Jer. xiv. 10; 1 Macc. v. 4; vi. 12); w. gen. 
of a pers. to remember for good, remember and care 
for: Lk. xxiii. 42; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. v. 23; xxvii. 63; Lk. 
xvi.25; Jn.ii.17, 22; xii. 16; by ὡς, Lk. xxiv. 6. pf. 
μέμνημαι, in the sense of a present [cf. W. 274 (257)], 
to be mindful of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4; πάντα 
μου μέμνησθε, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co. 
xi. 2; pres. μιμνήσκομαι, w. gen. of the pers., to remem- 
ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii. 
5); xiii. 3. [Cowr.: ἀνα-, ἐπ-ανα-, ὑπο-μιμνήσκω.} * 

μισέω, -ó; impf. ἐμίσουν; fut. μισήσω; 1 aor. ἐμίσησα; 
pf. μεμίσηκα; Pass, pres. ptep. μισούμενος ; pf. ptep. 
μεμισημένος (Rev. xviii. 2); Sept. for N37; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest; pass. to be 
hated, detested: twa, Mt. v. 43 and Rec. in 44; xxiv. 10; 
Lk. 1.71; vi. 22,27; xix.14; Jn. vii. 7; xv. 18 sq. 23— 
25; xvii. 14; Tit. iii. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [11]; iii. 13, 15 ; 
20; Rev. xvii. 16 ; pass. ., Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 9; [Mk. xiii. 
13]; Lk. xxi. 17; τί: Jn. iii. 20; Ro. vii. 15; Eph. v. 29; 
Heb.i.9; Jude 23; Rev.ii.6 and Rec. in 15; pass. ib. 
xvii. 2. Not a few interpreters have abet to 
μισεῖν in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30) ; Deut. xxi. 15 sq.; Mt. 
vi. 24; Lk. xiv. 26; xvi. 13; [Jn. xii. 25]; Ro. ix. 13, 
the signification to love less, to postpone in love or esteem, 
to slight, through oversight of the cireumstance that *the 
Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability, 
are wont both to feel and to profess /ove and hate where 
we Oecidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and 
express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and 


415 





Μιχαήλ 


indifference to a thing’; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 
304; οἵ. E Nun f. Exegese u. Dosen des 
N. T. p. 27 sqq.* 

μισθαποδοσία, -as, 7, (μισθός and ἀποδίδωμι; cf. the 
μισθοδοσία of the Grk. writ. [W. 24]), payment of wages 
due, recompense: of reward, Heb. x. 35; xi. 26; of pun- 
ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in eccles. writ.) * 

μισθ-απο-δότης, -ov, 6, (μισθός and ἀποδίδωμι; cf. the 
μισθοδότης of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator) ; one 
who pays wages, a rewarder: Heb. xi.6. (Several times 
in eccles. writ.) * : 

μίσθιος, -a, -ov, also of two terminations [cf. W. § 11, 
1], (μισθός), employed for hire, hired: as subst. [A. V. 
hired servant], Lk. xv. 17, 19, [21 WH in br.], (Sept. 
for 1a¥, Lev. xxv. 50; Job vii. 1. Tob. v.12; Sir. 
vil. 20; xxxi.27; xxxvii 11. Anth. 6, 283, 3; Plut.).* 

μισθός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. d down], Sept. for ?5?/, also for 
n3Un, ete. ; 1. dues paid for work; wages, hire: 
Ro. iv. 4 (κατὰ ὀφείλημα); in a prov., Lk. x. 7 and 1 Tim. 
v. 18; Mt. xx. 8; Jas. v. 4; Jude 11 (on which see 
ἐκχέω, fin.) ; μισθὸς ἀδικίας, wages obtained by iniquity, 
Acts i. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [cf. W. § 30, 1 a.]. 2. re- 
ward: used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils. 
and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18; — of divine 
recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun- 
ishments: Rev. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which 
God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en- 
deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss, 
Die Lehre Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr. 
für christl. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mehlhorn, 
d. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol., 
1876, p. 72 ZEIT ; [ef. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-- Mp: 
Mt. v. 12; vi. 2, 5,165 x. 41 sq.; Mk. ix.41; Lk. vi. 23, 
85; 1 Co. i. 8, 14; 2 Ju 8; Rev. xi. 18; PY μισθόν, to 
have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is 
reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mt. v. 
46; 1 Co.ix. 17; with παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τ. op. 
added, Mt. vi. 1. c. of punishments: μισθὸς ἀδικίας, 
2 Pet. ii. 13; τῆς δυσσεβείας, 2 Mace. viii. 33.* 

μισθόω: (μισθός) ; 1 aor. mid. ἐμισθωσάμην ; to let out 
for hire; to hire [cf. W. § 38, 3]: twa, Mt. xx. 1, 7. 
(Hat., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for nav, Deut. 
xxiii. 4; 2 Chr xxiv. 12.) * 

μίσθωμα, -ros, τό, (μισθόω) ; 1. the price for which any- 
thing is either let or hired (Hdt., Isoer., Dem., Ael., al. ; 
of a harlot’s hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mie. i. 7; 
Prov. xix. 13; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [cf. 
Philo in Flac. $ 16 fin.]). 2. that which is either let 
or hired for a price, as a house, dwelling, lodging [(cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip. p. 9 note3)]: Acts xxviii. 
30.* 

μισθωτός, -0), 6, (μισθόω), one hired, a hireling: Mk. i. 
20; Jn. x. 12 sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. for 
Yob)* 

Μιτυλήνη. -ns, 7, Mitylene, the chief maritime town 
of the island of Lesbos in the ZEgean: Acts xx. 14. 
[Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.]* 

Μιχαήλ, ὁ, (0822, i. e. “who like God?’), Michael, 


μνᾶ 


the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the 
guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1; x. 13, 21): 
Jude 9; Rev. xii. 7. [BB.DD. s. v.]* 


μνᾷ, -ás, ἡ, ἃ word of Eastern origin [cf. Schrader, Keil- 
o Vv 


Las, 
Hebr. 332 (fr. n32 to appoint, mark out, count, ete.), 
Lat. mina; 1. in the O. T.a weight, and an imaginary 
coin or money of account, equal to one hundred shekels: 
1 K. x. 17, cf. 2 Chr. ix. 16; 2 Esdr. ii. 69, (otherwise in 
Ezek. xlv. 12 [cf. Bible Educator, index s. v. Maneh ; 
Schrader in Riehm s. v. Mine p. 1000 sq. ]). 2. In 
Attic a weight and a sum of money equal to one hun- 
dred drachmae (see δραχμὴ [and B. D. s. v. Pound; esp. 
Schrader in Riehm τι. s.]) : Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.* 

pvdopat, see μιμνήσκω. 

Μνάσων, -evos, 6, (MNAQ), Mnason, a Christian of 
Cyprus: Acts xxi. 16. (The name was com. also among 
the Grks.; [cf. Benseler's Pape's Eigennamen, s. v.].) * 

μνεία, -as, 7, (μιμνήσκω), remembrance, memory, mention : 
ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν, as often as I remember you [lit. 
‘on all my remembrance’ etc. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3; 
ποιεῖσθαι μνείαν τινός, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9; 
Eph.i.16; 1 Th.i.2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 254 a.; 
Diog. Laért. 8, 2, 66; Sept. Ps. ex. (exi.) 4); gv. ἔχειν 
τινός, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph., 
Eur., al.) ; ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχειν τὴν περί Twos μνείαν, 2 Tim. 
oss 

μνῆμα, -ros, τό, (μνάομαι, pf. pass. μέμνημαι) ; 1. 
a monument or memorial to perpetuate the memory of any 
person or thing (Hom., Pind., Soph., al.). 2. a se- 
pulchral monument (Hom., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.). 3. 
a sepulchre or tomb (receptacle where a dead body is de- 
posited [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sq.]) : 
Mk.v.3 GL T Tr WH; v.5; [xv.46 TWH]; Lk. viii. 
27; xxiii. 53; xxiv. 1; Acts 11.29; vii. 16; Rev. xi. 9, 
(Joseph. antt. 7, 1, 3; Sept. for ?3p)-* 

μνημεῖον, -ov, τό; 1. any visible object for preserv- 
ing or recalling the memory of any person or thing; a me- 
amorial, monument, ( Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., sqq.) ; in bibl. 
"Grk. so in Sap. x. 7; specifically, a sepulehral monument : 
οἰκοδομεῖν μνημεῖα, Lk. xi. 47; Joseph. antt. 13, 6,5. p 
in the Scriptures a sepulchre, tomb: Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvii. 
52,60; xxviii. 8; Mk. v.2; vi.29; Lk. xi.44; Jn. v.28; 
xi. 17, 31, and often in the Gospels; Acts xiii. 29; Sept. 
for "3p: Gen. xxiii. 6, 9; 1.5; Is. xxii. 16, etc. 

μνήμη, s. ἡ, (μνάομαι); a. memory,remembrance; b. 
mention: μνήμην ποιεῖσθαί τινος, to remember a thing, call 
it to remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 15; the same expression oc- 
curs in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, but in the sense of Lat. 
mentionem facere, to make mention of a thing.* 

μνημονεύω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμνημόνευον ; 1 aor. ἐμνη- 
μόνευσα ; (μνήμων mindful); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
?315 1. to be mindful of, to remember, to call to 
mind: absol. Mk. viii. 18; τινός, Lk. xvii. 32; Jn. xv. 20; 

.Xvi. 4,21; Actsxx. 35; 1 Th.i.3; [Heb. xiii. 7]; con- 
textually i. q. to think of and feel for a person or thing: 
w. gen. of the thing, Col. iv. 18; τῶν πτωχῶν, Gal. ii. 10 


inschriften u. s. w. p. 143], Arab. ^ Syr. 


416 





μοιχαλίς 


(see μιμνήσκω, fin.) ; w. an ace. of the obj. to hold in mem- 
ory, keep in mind: twa, 2 Tim. ii. 8; τί, Mt. xvi. 9; 1 
Th. ii. 9; τὰ ἀδικήματα, of God as punishing them, Rev. 
xviii. 5 (see μιμνήσκω). Cf. Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2; W. 
p. 205 (193); [B. § 132, 14]. foll. by ὅτι, Acts xx. 31; 
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th.ii. 5; foll. by an indir. question, Rev. 
n2» Ἐν ὃς 2. to make mention of : τινός, Heb. xi. 
15 [but al. refer this to 1 above] (Plut. Them. 32; ri, 
Plat. de rep. 4 p. 441 d. ; lege. 4 p- 723 D») περί τινος 
(as μνᾶσθαι in classic Grk., see Matthiae $ 347 Anm. 1), 
Heb. xi. 22; so in Lat. memini de aliquo; cf. Ramshorn, 
Lat. Gr. $111 note 1; [Harpers' Lat. Dict. s. v. memini, 
I. 3; ef. Eng. remember about, etc.]. * 

μνημόσυνον, -ov, τό, (μνήμων), a memorial (that by which 
the memory of any person or thing is preserved), a remem- 
brance: εἰς μνημόσυνόν τινος, to perpetuate one's memory, 
Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; αἱ προσευχαί σου . . . ἀνέβησαν 
eis pnp. ἐνώπιον τ. θεοῦ, (without the fig.) have become 
known to God, so that he heeds and is about to help thee, 
Acts x. 4. (Hdt., Arstph., Thuc., Plut. al.; Sept. for 
"37, 1721; also for ΓΞ ΝΣ, i. e. that part of a sacrifice 
which was burned on the altar together with the frank- 
incense, that its fragrance might ascend to heaven and 
commend the offerer to God's remembrance, Lev. ii. 9, 
16; v.12; Num. v. 26; hence εὐωδία eis μνημόσυνον, Sir. 
xlv. 16; and often in Siracid., 1 Macc., etc.) * 

μνηστεύω: Pass, pf. ptep. μεμνηστευμένος (RG) and 
ἐμνηστευμένος (LT Tr WH) [cf. W. $12, 10; Veitch s. 
y.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; 1 aor. ptep. μνηστευθείς ; (μνη- 
στός betrothed, espoused); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
WAN; τινά (γυναῖκα), (0 woo her and ask her in marriage; 
pass. to be promised in marriage, be betrothed: τινί, Mt. i. 
15. sks 1/27: 05518 

μογγι-λάλος, (fr. μόγγος [ἃ]. μογγός, cf. Chandler § 366] 
one who has a hoarse, hollow voice, and λάλος), speaking 
with a harsh or thick voice: Mk. vii. 32 Tdf. ed. 2, Tr txt. ; 
but the common reading μογιλάλος deserves the prefer- 
ence; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 302 sq. (Etym. Magn. [s. 
v. Barrapitew ].) * 

μογι-λάλος [on its accent cf. Τ᾽, Proleg. p. 101], -ov, 
(udyes and λάλος), speaking with difficulty, [A. V. having 
an impediment in his speech]: Mk. vii. 32 [not Tr txt. ]. 
(Aét. 8, 38; Schol. ad Leian. Jov. trag. c. 27; Bekker, 
Anecd: p. 100, 22; Sept. for DN, dumb, Is. xxxv. 6.)* 

μόγις, (μόγος toil), fr. Hom. down, hardly, with diffi- 
culty: Lk.ix.39 [yet WH Tr mrg. μόλις, q. v.]. (3 Mace. 
vii. 6.) * 

μόδιος, -ov, 6, the Lat. modius, a dry measure holding 
16 sextarii (or one sixth of the Attic medimnus; Corn. 
Nep. Att. 2 [i. e. about a peck, A. V. bushel; cf. BB. DD. 
s. v. Weights and Measures]) : Mt.v.15; Mk.iv.21; Lk. 
xi. 33.* ' 

μοιχαλίς, -idos, 7, (μοιχός), ἃ word unknown to the 
earlier writ. but found in Plut., Heliod., al.; see Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 452; [W. 24]; Sept. for nasi (Ezek. xvi. 38; 
xxiii. 45) and n3w32 (Hos. iii. 1; Prov. xxiv. 55 (xxx. 
20)); an adulteress; ^ a. prop.: Ro. vii. 3; ὀφθαλμοὶ 
μεστοὶ μοιχαλίδος, eyes always on the watch for an adul- 


poLrXyaw 


411 


* 
μονογενής 


teress, or from which adulterous desire beams forth, 2 | arms. It was heated red-hot by fire from within, and the 


Pet. ii. 14. b. As the intimate alliance of God with 
the people of Israel waslikened to a marriage, those who 
relapse into idolatry are said to commit adultery or play 
the harlot (Ezek. xvi. 15 sqq.; xxiii. 43 sqq., ete.); hence 
potyaNis is fig. equiv. to faithless to God, unclean, apostate : 
Jas. iv. 4 [where cf. Alford]; as an adj. (cf. Matthiae 
§ 429, 4), γενεὰ μοιχ- : Mi. xii. 39; xvi.4; Mk. viii. 38. 
[C£. Clem. Alex. strom. vi. c. 16 § 146 p. 292, 5 ed. Sylb.]* 

μοιχάω, -@: to have unlawful intercourse with another's 
wife, to commit adultery with: τινά. in bibl. Grk. mid. 
μοιχῶμαι; to commit adultery: of the man, Mt. v. 32° [yet 
WH br.]; xix. 9° [yet not WH mrg.], 9» [RGL Tr 
br. WH mrg.]; ἐπ᾽ αὐτήν, commits the sin of adultery 
against her (i. e. that has been put away), Mk. x. 11; of 
the woman, Mt. v. 32* (where LT Tr WH μοιχευθῆναι 
for μοιχᾶσθαι) ; Mk.x.12. (Sept. for 82, Jer. iii. 8; v. 
7; ix. 2, ete.; in Grk. writ. fig. in the active, with τὴν 
4áXaccav, to usurp unlawful control over the sea, Xen. 
Hell. 1, 6, 15; τὸ λεχθέν, to falsify, corrupt, Ael. n. a. 
7, 39.)* 

μοιχεία, -as, 7, (μοιχεύω), adultery: Jn. viii. 3; Gal. v. 
19 Rec.; plur. [W. $ 27, 3; B. $ 123, 2]: Mt. xv. 19; 
Mk. vii. 21. (Jer. xiii. 27; Hos. ii. 2; iv. 2; [ Andoc., 
Lys.], Plat., Aeschin., Leian., al.) * 

μοιχεύω ; fut. poryevow; 1 aor. ἐμοίχευσα; Pass., pres. 
ptep. μοιχευομένη ; 1 aor. inf. μοιχευθῆναι ; (μοιχός) ; fr. 
Arstph. and Xen. down; Sept. for 82; 10 commit adul- 
tery; a. absol. (to be an adulterer): Mt. v. 27; xix. 
18; Mk. x. 19; Lk. xvi. 18; xviii. 20; Ro. ii. 22; xiii. 
9 A ECE its b. τινά (γυναῖκα), to commit adultery 
with, have unlawful intercourse with another's wife: Mt. 
v. 28 (Deut. v. 18; Lev. xx. 10; Arstph. av. 558; Plat. 
rep. 2 p. 360 b.; Leian. dial. deor. 6,3; Aristaenet. epp. 
1, 20; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 2, 14); pass. of the wife, to 
suffer adultery, be debauched: Mt. v. 32 L T Tr WH; 
[xix. 9 WH mrg.]; Jn. viii. 4. By a Hebraism (see 
μοιχαλίς. b.) trop. pera τινος (γυναικός) μοιχεύειν is used 
of those who at a woman’s solicitation are drawn away 
to idolatry, i. e. to the eating of things sacrificed to idols, 
Rev. ii. 22; cf. Jer. iii. 9, ete.* 

μοιχός, -ov, 6, an adulierer: Lk. xviii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 9; 
Heb. xiii. 4. Hebraistically (see μοιχαλίς, b.) and fig. 
faithless toward God, ungodly: Jas. iv. 4 RG. (Soph., 
Arstph., Xen., Plut., sqq.; Sept.) * 

μόλις, (μόλος toil); an adv. used by post-Hom. writ. in- 
discriminately with μόγις ; a. with difficulty, hardly, 
(cf. Sap. ix. 16, where μετὰ πόνου corresponds to it in the 
parallel member) : [ Lk. ix. 39 Tr mrg. WH (al. μόγις, q. 
v.)]; Acts xiv. 18; xxvii. ? sq. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. 
not easily, i. e. scarcely, very rarely: Ro. v. 7.* 

MoXéx, ὁ, (Hebr. 175, D37D, also 0352; cf. Gesenius, 
Thes. ii. p. 794 sq.), indecl, Moloch, name of the idol- 
god of the Ammonites, to which human victims, particu- 
larly young children, were offered in sacrifice. Ac- 
cording to the description in the Jalkut ([Rashi (vule. 
Jarchi) ] on Jer. vii. [31]), its image was a hollow brazen 
figure, with the head of an ox, and outstretched human 

27 


little ones placed in its arms to be slowly burned, while 
to prevent their parents from hearing their dying cries 
the sacrificing-priests beat drums (see yéevva) : Acts vii. 
43 fr. Am. v. 26 Sept., where Hebr. 02372, which ought 
to have been translated βασιλέως ὑμῶν, i. e. of your idol. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Moloch; J. G. Müller in Herzog 
ix. 714 sq.; Merz in Schenkel v. 194 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v. 
Molech, Moloch; W. Robertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. ed. 
9, s. v.; Baudissin, Jahve et Moloch etc. and esp. in 
Herzog 2 vol. x. 168-178].* 

μολύνω : 1 aor. act. ἐμόλυνα ; Pass. pres. μολύνομαι; 1 
aor. ἐμολύνθην ; fr. Arstph. down ; to pollute, stain, con- 
taminate, defile; in the N. 'T. used only in symbolic and 
fig. discourse : οὐκ ἐμόλυναν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, of those who 
have kept themselves pure from the defilement of sin, 
Rev. iii. 4 (cf. Zech. iii. 3 sq.); μετὰ γυναικῶν οὐκ épo- 
λύνθησαν, who have not soiled themselves by fornication 
and adultery, Rev. xiv. 4; ἡ συνείδησις μολύνεται, of a 
conscience reproached (defiled) by sin, 1 Co. viii. 7 (in- 
explebili quodam laedendi proposito conscientiam pol- 
luebat, Amm. Marcell. 15, 2; opp. to καθαρὰ συνείδησις, 
1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3; μολύνειν τὴν ψυχήν, Sir. xxi. 
28; but see μιαίνω, 2). [SYN. see μιαίνω, fin.]* 

μολυσμός, -o), 6, (μολύνω), defilement (Vulg. inquina- 
mentum); an action by which anything is defiled: with 
gen. of the thing defiled, σαρκὸς kai πνεύματος, 2 Co. vii. 
1. (Jer.xxiii.15; 1 Esdr.viii. 80; 2 Mace. v. 27; Plut. 
mor. p. 779 c.; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1,32, 2; 2, 24, 5; etc.]; 
often in eccl. writ.) * 

μομφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (μέμφομαι), blame: ἔχειν μομφὴν πρός 
twa, to have matter.of complaint against any one, Col. 
ii. 13. (Pind., Tragg., al.) * 

povn, -ῆς. ἡ, (μένω), [fr. Hdt. down], a staying, abiding, 
dwelling, abode: Jn. xiv. 2; μονὴν ποιεῖν (L T Tr WH 
ποιεῖσθαι, as in Thuc. 1, 131; Joseph. antt. 8,13, 7; 13, 
2, 1),to make an (one’s) abode, παρά τινι metaph. of God 
and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most 
blessed influence on the souls of believers, Jn. xiv. 23; 
see ποιῶ, 1 c.* 

μονογενής, -és, (μόνος and γένος), (Cic. unigena; Vulg. 
[in Lk. unicus, elsewh.] and in eccl. writ. unigenitus), 
single of its kind, only, [ A.V. only-begotten] ; used of only 
sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents), 
Hes. theog. 426, 448; Hdt. 7, 221; Plat. Critias 113 d. ; 
Joseph. antt. 1, 13, 1; 2, 7, 4; povoyevés τέκνον πατρί, 
Aeschyl. Ag. 898. Soin the Scriptures: Heb. xi. 17; 
μονογενῆ εἶναί τινι (to be one's only son or daughter), Judg. 
xi. 34; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42; ix. 38; [ef. 
Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex- 
pression 6 povoy. υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ and vids τοῦ θεοῦ ὁ povoy., 
Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below]; 1 Jn. iv. 9; μονογενὴς 
παρὰ πατρός, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owing to 
the omission of the art. (ef. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of 
Christ, denotes te only son of God or one who in the sense 
in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren. 
He is so spoken of by John not because 6 Aóyos which 
was ἐνσαρκωθείς in him was eternally generated by God 


μόνος 


the Father (the orthodox interpretation), or came forth 
from the being of God just before the beginning of the 
world (Subordinationism), but because by the incarna- 
tion (ἐνσάρκωσις) of the λόγος in him he is of nature 
or essentially Son of God, and so in a very different 
sense from that in which men are made by him τέκνα τοῦ 
θεοῦ (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the 
title ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ is given only to the historic Christ 
so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone, 
but ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐνσαρκωθείς or Jesus through the λόγος 
united with God, is 6 povoy. vids τοῦ θεοῦ. ‘The reading 
μονογενὴς θεὸς (without the article before povoy.) in Jn. 
i. 18, — which is supported by no inconsiderable weight 
of ancient testimony, received into the text by Tregelles, 
and Westcott and Hort, defended with much learning 
by Dr. Hort (* On μονογενὴς θεός in Scripture and Tra- 
dition” in his “Two Dissertations" Camb. and Lond. 
1876), and seems not improbable to Harnack (in the 
Theol. Lit.-Zeit. for 1876, p. 541 sqq.) [and Weiss (in 
Meyer 6te Aufl. ad loc.) ], but is foreign to John's mode 
of thought and speech (iii. 16, 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9), dissonant 
and harsh, — appears to owe its origin to a dogmatic zeal 
which broke out soon after the early days of the church ; 
[see articles on the reading by Prof. Abbot in the Bib. 
Saer. for Oct. 1861 and in the Unitarian Rev. for June 
1875, (in the latter copious reff. to other discussions of 
the same passage are given); see also Prof. Drummond 
inthe Theol. Rev. for Oct. 1871]. Further, see Grimm, 
Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 152 sq. ; [Westcott u. s.].* 
μόνος, -7,-ov, Sept. chiefly for 127, [fr.Hom.down]; 1. 
an adjective, alone (without a companion); ^ a. with 
verbs: εἶναι, εὑρίσκεσθαι, καταλείπεσθαι, etc., Mt. xiv. 23 ; 
Mk.vi.47; Lk. ix. 36; Jn. viii. 9; 1 Th. iii. 1; added to 
the pronouns ἐγώ, αὐτός, ov, etc.: Mt. xviii. 15; Mk. ix. 
2; Lk. xxiv. 18; Ro. xi. 3; xvi. 4, etc. b. it is joined 
with its noun to other verbs also, so that what is predi- 
cated may be declared to apply to some one person alone 
[cf. W. 131 (124) note]: Mt. iv. 10; Lk.iv.8; xxiv. 
12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Jn.vi.22; Heb. 
ix. 7; 2 Tim. iv. 11; with a neg. foll. by ἀλλά, Mt. iv. 4. 
ὁ μόνος θεός, he who alone is God: Jn. v.44; xvii.3; Ro. 
xvi. 27; ὁ μόνος δεσπότης. Jude 4. οὐκ... el μὴ μόνος: 
Mt. xii. 4; xvii. 8; xxiv. 36; Lk. vi.4; οὐδεὶς . - . εἰ μὴ 
μόνος, Phil. iv. 15. i. q. forsaken, destitute of help, Lk. 
x. 40; Jn. viii. 16; xvi. 32, (Sap. x. 1). 2. Neut. 
μόνον as adv., alone, only, merely : added to the obj., Mt. 
v.47; x. 42; Acts xviii. 25; Gal. iii. 2; to the gen. Ro. 
iii. 29 [here WH mrg. μόνων] ; referring to an action ex- 
pressed by a verb, Mt. ix. 21; xiv. 36; Mk. v. 36; Lk. 
viii. 50; Acts viii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 19; Gal. i. 23; ii. 10. 
μόνον μή, Gal. v. 135 οὐ (μὴ) μόνον, Gal. iv. 18; Jas. i. 22; 
ii. 24; foll. by ἀλλά, Acts xix. 26 [L ἀλλὰ kat; cf. W. 498 
(464); B.370 (317)]; by ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μᾶλλον, Phil. ii. 
12; by ἀλλὰ xat, Mt. xxi. 21 ; Jn. v. 18; xi. 52; xii. 9; 
xiii. 9; xvii. 20; Acts xix. 26 [ Lehm. (seeas above, esp. 
B.)]; xxi. 13; xxvi.29; xxvii. 10; Ro.i. 32; iv. 12,16, 
23; 2 Co. vii. 7, etc. ; ov μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καί: Acts xix. 27; 
and often by Paul (cf. W. 583 (543)], Ro. v. 3, 11 ; viii. 


418 


Hoppow 


23; ix. 10; 2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 19; Phil. ii. 27 [here οὐ δὲ 
μόνον ete.]; 1 Tim. v.13; [2 Tim. iv. 8. 
xópas), see καταμόνας]. 

μον-όφθαλμος, -ov, (μόνος, ὀφθαλμός), (Vulg. /uscus, Mk. 
ix. 47), deprived of one eye, having one eye: Mt. xviii. 9; 
Mk. ix. 47. (Hdt. Apollod., Strab., Diog. Laért., al. ; 
[Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136: Bekk. Anecd. i. 280; Ruther- 
ford, New Phryn. p. 209; W. 24].)* 

povdw, -à : (μόνος) ; fr. Hom. down; to make single or 
solitary; to leave alone, forsake: pf. pass. ptep. xnpa 
μεμονωμένη, i. e. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, cf. 4.* 

μορφή. -ῆς. ἡ, [fr. root signifying ‘to lay hold of’, ‘seize’ 
(cf. Germ. Fassung); Fick, Pt.i.p.174; Vanicek p. 719], 
fr. Hom. down, the form by which a person or thing strikes 
the vision; the external appearance: children are said to 
reflect ψυχῆς re καὶ μορφῆς ὁμοιότητα (of their parents), 
4 Mace. xv. 3 (4) ; ἐφανερώθη ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ, Mk. xvi. 12; 
ev μορφῇ θεοῦ ὑπάρχων, Phil. ii. 6; μορφὴν δούλου λαβών, 
ibid. 7; this whole passage (as I have shown more 
fully in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33 
sqq:, with which compare the different view given by 
Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449 
sqq-) is to be explained as follows: who, although (for- 
merly when he was λόγος ἄσαρκος) he bore the form (in 
which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God 
(the sovereign, opp. to pop. Sov ov), yet did not think 
that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re- 
tained (see ἁρπαγμός, 2), but emptied himself of it (see 
κενόω, 1) so as to assume the form of a servant, in that he 
became like unto men (for angels also are δοῦλοι τοῦ: 
θεοῦ, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion 
asaman. (God μένει ἀεὶ ἁπλῶς ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ μορφῇ. Plat. 
de rep. 2 p. 381 c., and it is denied that God φαντάζεσθαι. 
ἄλλοτε ἐν ἄλλαις ἰδέαις . . . καὶ ἀλλάττοντα τὸ αὐτοῦ εἶδος: 
εἰς πολλὰς μορφὰς... καὶ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ ἰδέας ἐκβαίνειν, p. 
380 d.; ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν πολλὰς μορφὰς ἴσχοι 6 θεός, p. 381 b.; 
ἑνὸς σώματος οὐσίαν μετασχηματίζειν καὶ μεταχαράττειν εἰς: 
πολυτρόπους μορφάς, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 11; οὐ yap 
ὥσπερ τὸ νόμισμα παράκομμα καὶ θεοῦ μορφὴ γίνεται, ibid. 
$ 14 fin.; God ἔργοις μὲν καὶ χάρισιν ἐναργὴς καὶ παντὸς 
οὑτινοσοῦν φανερώτερος, μορφὴν δὲ καὶ μέγεθος ἡμῖν ἀφανέ- 
στατος, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 22, 2.)* 

[Svv. μορφή, σχῆμα: acc. to Bp. Lghtft. (see the 
thorough discussion in his ‘Detached Note’ on Phil. ii.) and 
Trench (N. T. Syn. § Ixx.), μορφή form differs from σχῆμα. 
figure, shape, fashion, as that which is intrinsic and essential, 
from that which is outward and accidental. So inthe main 
Bengel, Philippi, al, on Ro. xii. 2; but the distinction is re- 
jected by many; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsche in loc. Yet 
the last-named commentator makes μορφὴ δούλου in Phil. l. c. 
relate to the complete form, or nature, of a servant; and 
σχῆμα to the external form, or human bod y.] 

μορφόω, -@: 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. μορφωθῇ ; 
[cf. μορφή, init.]; in figurative discourse ἄχρις [T Tr 
WH μέχρις, q- v. 1 a.] οὗ μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, i. e. 

| literally, until a mind and life in complete harmony with 
the mind and life of Christ shall have been formed in 
you, Gal.iv.19. (Arat. phaen. 375; Anth. 1, 33, 1; Sept. 
Is. xliv. 13.) [Cowr.: pera-, cvp-poppda. ] * 


κατὰ μόνας (sc. 


μόρφωσις 


1. a forming, shap- 
2. form; 


μόρφωσις, -ews, 7, (μορφόωλ) ; 
ing: τῶν δένδρων, Theophr. c. pl. 3, 7, 4. 


i. e. a. the mere form, semblance: εὐσεβείας, 2 Tim. 
iii. 5. b. the form befitting the thing or truly express- 


ing the fact, the very form: 
Ro. ii. 20.* 

μοσχο-ποιέω, -À: 
motew, [cf. W. 26]) ; 
vii. 41, for which Ex. xxxii. 4 ἐποίησε μόσχον. 
writ.) * 

μόσχος, -ov, 6, [cf. Schmidt ch. 76, 12; Curtius p. 
593]; 1. a tender, juicy, shoot; a sprout, of a plant 
or tree. 2. ὃ, ἡ, p. offspring; a. of men [(cf. fig. 
Eng. scion) ], a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. — b. 
of animals, a young one. 3. a calf, a bullock, a heifer; 
so everywhere in the Bible, and always masc.: Lk. xv. 
23, 27, 30; Heb. ix. 12, 19; Rev.iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly 
for ^3 a bull, esp. a young bull; then for 303 cattle; for 
^D an ox or a cow; also for ox a calf). [(Eur. on.)]* 

μουσικός, -ή, -óv, (μοῦσα [music, eloquence, etc.]) ; freq. 
in Grk. writ.; prop. devoted to and skilled in the arts 
sacred to the muses; accomplished in the liberal arts; 
specifically, skilled in music; playing on musical instru- 
ments; so Rev. xviii. 22 [R. V. minstrels].* 

μόχθος, -ov, 6, hard and difficult labor, toil, travail; 
hardship, distress: 2 Co. xi. 27; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8; 
see κόπος, 3b. (Hes. scut. 306; Pind., Tragg., Xen., al.; 
Sept. chiefly for 9p.) [Svx. see κόπος, fin.]* 

μυελός, -οὔ, 6, ΤΙ within, fr. μύω to close, shut), 
marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Hom. down; Sept. Job 
xxi. 24.) * 

μνυέω, -ῶ: pf. pass. μεμύημαι; (fr. μύω to close, shut 
(cf. Lat. mutus) ;: Curtius $ 4787) ; a. to initiate 
into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; 3 Macc. 
li. 30). b. univ. to teach fully, instruct; to accustom 
one to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with 
a thing: ἐν παντὶ x. ἐν πᾶσι μεμύημαι, to every condition 
and to all the several circumstances of life have I be- 
come wonted; I have been so disciplined by experience 
that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12; 
[but others, instead of connecting ἐν παντί ete. here (as 
object) with pep. (a constr. apparently without prece- 
dent; yet cf. Lünemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the 
infinitives that follow as explanatory of the ἐν παντί 
ete., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere 
(see was, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epexegetic (W. 
§ 44, 1) : in everything and in all things have I learned 
the secret both to be filled etc.].* 

μῦθος, -ov, ὁ, fr. Hom. down; 


τῆς γνώσεως x. τῆς ἀληθείας, 
1 aor. ἐμοσχοποίησα; (μόσχος and 


to make (an image of) a calf: Acts 
(Eccles. 


1. a speech, word, 


saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. a true narra- 
tive. b. a fiction, a fable; univ. an invention, false- 
hood: 2 Pet. i.16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso- 


phists and Gnosties, esp. concerning the emanations and 
orders of the ons, are called μῦθοι [ A. V. fables] in 
1 Tim.i.4; iv.7; 2 Tim.iv.4; Tit.i.14. [Cf Trench 
§ xc., and reff. s. v. yeveaAoyía.] * 

μυκάομαι, -ῶμαι; (fr. μύ or pd, the sound which a cow 
utters [Lat. mugio]), to low, bellow, prop. of horned 


419 


μύρον 


cattle (Hom., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat, al); to roar, of a 
lion, Rev. x. 3.* 

μυκτηρίζω: (μυκτήρ the nose); pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. 
μυκτηρίζεται; prop. to turn up the nose or sneer at; to 
mock, deride: τινά, pass. οὐ μυκτηρίζεται, does not suffer 
himself to be mocked, Gal. vi. 7. (For 15, Job xxii. 
19; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 7; Jer. xx. 7; 783, Prov. i 1.80; 713, 
Prov. xv. 20; [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 39, 1(and Harnack's 
note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp. 
adv. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.]. [Comp.: 
pokrrpito. | * 

μυλικός, -7, τόν, (μύλη a mill), belonging to a mill: Mk. 
ix. 42 RG; Lk. xvii. 2 L T Tr WH.* 

μύλινος, -7, -ov ; 1. made of mill-stones: Boeckh, 
Inserr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. μυλικός (see 
the preceding word): Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.* 

μύλος, -ov, 6, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; al 
a mill-stone [(Anthol. ete.) ]: Rev. xviii. 21 [L WH μύ- 
Awos, q- V.]; μύλος ὀνικός, Mt. xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 LT 
Tr WH; LK. xvii. 2 Rec.; a large mill consisted of two 
stones, an upper and an under one; the “nether” stone 
was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass, 
whence the name μ. ὀνικός. 2. equiv. to μύλη, a mill 
[ CDiod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt.xxiv.41 LT Tr WH: φωνὴ 
μύλου, the noise made by a mill, Rev. xviii. 22.* 

μυλών [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. § 584], 
-àvos, 6, place where a mill runs; mill-house: Mt. xxiv. 
41 RG. (Eur., Thue., Dem., Aristot., al.) * 

Mipa (LT Tr WH Muppa (Tr -pp- see P, p) [cf. Tdf. 
on Acts as below and WH. App. p. 1607), των, τά, Myra, 
a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half 
(20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region 
of Asia Minor between Caria and Pamphylia [B. D. s. v. 
Myra; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.]: Acts xxvii. 5.* 

puptds, -ados, ἡ, (μυρίος), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept. for 
133? and j55;, a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on 
which pass. see ἀργύριον, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen. 
i. q. an innumerable multitude, an unlimited number, ( [like 
our myriads], the Lat. sexcenti, Germ. Tausend): Lk. 
xii.1; Acts xxi. 20; Rev. v. 11 [not Rec: ]; ix. 16 [here 
LT δισμυριάδες, q. v.]; used simply, of innumerable hosts 
of angels: Heb. xii. 22 [here GL Tr put a comma after 
μυριάσιν]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxiii. 2; Dan. vii. 10.* 

μυρίζω : 1 aor. inf. μυρίσαι; (μύρον) ; fr. Hdt. down; 
to anoint: Mk. xiv. 8.* 

μυρίος, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down]; 1. innumer- 
able, countless, [A. V. ten thousand]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv. 
19. 2. with the accent drawn back (cf. Brim. Ausf. 
Sprehl. $ 70 Anm. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L. 
and S. s. v. III. ]). μύριοι, «at, ^a, ten thousand: Mt. xviii. 
24.* 

μύρον, -ov, τό, (the grammarians derive it fr. μύρω to 
flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap; but prob. 
more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to 
μύρρα, Hebr. 19, 9; [Fick (i. 836) connects it with r. 
smar ‘to smear’, with which Vaniéek 1198 sq. associates 
σμύρνα, μύρτος, ete.; cf. Curtius p. 714]), ointment: Mt. 
xxvi. 7, 9 Rec., 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq.; xxiii. 


, 
εκ- 


Mucia 


56; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3,5; Rev. xviii. 13; distinguished fr. 
ἔλαιον [q. v. and see Trench, Syn. $ xxxviii.], Lk. vii. 46. 
([From Aeschyl., Hdt. down]; Sept. for jpw fat, oil, 
Prov. xxvii. 9; for 33D 128, Ps. exxxii. (cxxxiii.) 2.) * 

Moca, -as, 7, M jsia, a province of Asia Minor on the 
shore of the Mgean Sea, between Lydia and the Pro- 
pontis; it had among its cities Pergamum, Troas, and 
Assos: Acts xvi. 7 sq.* 

μυστήριον, -ov, τό, (μύστης [one initiated; fr. μυέω, 
q. v.]), in class. Grk. a hidden thing, secret, mystery: 
μυστήριόν cov μὴ κατείπῃς τῷ φίλῳ, Menand.; plur. gen- 
erally mysteries, religious secrets, confided only to the 
initiated and not to be communicated by them to ordi- 
nary mortals; [cf. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter- 
thümer der Griechen, $ 32]. In the Scriptures iE 
a hidden or secret thing, not obvious to the understanding: 
1 Co. xiii. 2; xiv. 2; (of the secret rites of the Gentiles, 
Sap. xiv. 15, 23). 2. a hidden purpose or counsel; 
secret will: of men, τοῦ βασιλέως, Tob. xii. 7, 11; τῆς 
βουλῆς αὐτοῦ, Judith ii. 2; of God: μυστήρια θεοῦ, the 
secret counsels which govern God in dealing with the 
righteous, which are hidden from ungodly and wicked 
men but plain to the godly, Sap. ii. 22. In the N. T., 
God's plan of providing salvation for men through 
Christ, which was once hidden but now is revealed: 
Ro. xvi. 25; 1 Co. ii: 7 (on this see ἐν, I. 5 £.) ; Eph. iii. 
9; Col. i. 26 sq.; with τοῦ θελήματος αὐτοῦ added, Eph. 
i. 9; τοῦ θεοῦ, which God formed, Col. ii. 2; [1 Co. ii. 1 
WH txt.]; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, respecting Christ, Col. iv. 3; τοῦ 
εὐαγγελίου, which is contained and announced in the 
gospel, Eph. vi. 19; ἐτελέσθη τὸ μυστ. τοῦ θεοῦ, said of 
the consummation of this purpose, to be looked for when 
Christ returns, Rev. x. 7; τὰ p. τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρ. or 
τοῦ θεοῦ, the secret purposes relative to the kingdom of 
God, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; Lk. viii. 10; used of cer- 
tain single events decreed by God having reference to 
his kingdom or the salvation of men, Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co. 
xv. 51; of God's purpose to bless the Gentiles also with 
salvation through Christ [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 26], 
Eph. iii. 3 cf. 5; with rod Χριστοῦ added, ibid. vs. 4; oiko- 
νόμοι μυστηρίων θεοῦ, the stewards of God's mysteries, 
i.e. those intrusted with the announcement of God's 
secret purposes to men, 1 Co. iv. 1; used generally, of 
Christian truth as hidden from ungodly men: with the 
addition of τῆς πίστεως, τῆς εὐσεβείας, which faith and 
godliness embrace and keep, 1 Tim. iii. 9, 16; τὸ pvor. 
τῆς ἀνομίας the mystery of lawlessness, the secret pur- 
pose formed by lawlessness, seems to be a tacit antithesis 
to God’s saving purpose, 2 Th. ii. 7. 3. Like wi? 
and 7D in rabbinic writers, it denotes the mystic or 
hidden sense: of an O. T. saying, Eph. v. 32; of a 
name, Rev. xvii. 5; of an imaze or form seen in a vision, 
Rev. i. 20; xvii. 5; of a dream, Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 18 sq. 
21-30, where the Sept. so render 7}. (The Vulg. trans- 
lates the word sacramentum in Dan. ii. 18; iv. 6; Tob. 
xii. 7; Sap. ii. 22; Eph. i. 9; iii. 8,9; v.32; 1 Tim. iii. 
16; Rey.i. 20.) [On the distinctive N. T. use of the 
word cf. Campbell, Dissertations on the Gospels. diss. ix. 


420 





Μωσῆς 


pt. i.; Kendrick in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mystery; Bp. 
Lghtft. on Col. i. 26.]* 

μυ-ωπάζω ; (μύωψ, and this fr. μύειν τοὺς Gras to shut 
the eyes); to see dimly, see only what is near: 2 Pet. i. 9 
[some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would make it mean here closing 
the eyes; cf. our Eng. blink]. (Aristot. problem. 31, 
16, 25.) * 

μώλωψ, -omos, 6, (Hesych. τραῦμα καὶ ὁ ἐκ πληγῆς 
αἱματώδης τόπος ἣ καὶ τὰ ἐξερχόμενα τῶν πληγῶν ὕδατα), 
a bruise, wale, wound that trickles with blood: 1 Pet. ii. 
24 fr. Is. liii. 5 [where A. V. stripes]. (Gen. iv. 23; Ex. 
xxi. 25; 15.1.0. Aristot., Plut., Anthol, al.) * 

μωμάομαι, -ὥμαι: 1 aor. mid. ἐμωμησάμην ; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐμωμήθην ; (μῶμος, q. v-) ; fr. Hom. down; to blame, find 
fault with, mock at: 2 Co. vi. 3; viii. 20. (Prov. ix. 7; 
Sap. x. 14.) * 

μῶμος, -ov, 6, [perh. akin to uóo, Curtius $ 478; cf. 
Vaniéek p. 732], blemish, blot, disgrace; 1. cen- 
sure. 2. insult: of men who are a disgrace to a 
society, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [A. V. blemishes]. (From Hom. 
down; Sept. for 039, of bodily defects and blemishes, 
Lev. xxi. 16 sqq.; Deut. xv. 21; Cant. iv. 7; Dan. i. 4; 
of a mental defect, fault, Sir. xx. 24 (23).) * 


popalvw: 1 aor. égópava; 1 aor. pass. ἐμωράνθην; 
(μωρός) ; 1. in class. Grk. to be foolish, to act fool- 
ishly. 2. in bibl. Grk. a. to make foolish: pass. 


Ro. i. 22 (Is. xix. 11; Jer. x. 14; 2 S. xxiv. 10); i. q. to 
prove a person or thing to be foolish: τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ 
κόσμου, 1 Co. i. 20 (τὴν βουλὴν αὐτῶν, Is. xliv. 25). b. 
to make jlat and tasteless: pass. of salt that has lost its 
strength and flavor, Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34.* 

μωρία, -as, 7, (μωρός), first in Hdt. 1, 146 [Soph., al.], 
foolishness: 1 Co. i. 18, 21, 23; ii. 14; iii. 19, (Sir. xx. 
31).* 

μωρολογία, -as, 7, (uwpodoyos), (stultiloquium, Plaut., 

Vulg.), foolish talking: Eph. v. 4. (Aristot. h. a. 1, 11; 
Plut. mor. P SUB) (Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. $ xxxiv.]* 

μωρός, -a, -dv, [on the accent cf. W. 52 (51); Chandler 
§§ 404, 405], foolish: with τυφλός, Mt. xxiii. 17, 19 [here 
T Tr WH txt. om. L br. uop.]; τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, an act 
or appointment of God deemed foolish by men, 1 Co. i. 
25; i. q. without learning or erudition, 1 Co. i. 27; iii. 
18; iv. 10; imprudent, without forethought or wisdom, 
Mt. vii. 26; xxiii. 17, 19 [see above]; xxv. 2 sq. 8; i.q. 
empty, useless, ζητήσεις, 2 Tim.ii.23; Tit. ii. 9; in 
imitation of the Hebr. 523 (cf. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1; Job 
ii. 10) i. q. impious, godless, ‘(because such a man bee 
and despises what relates to salvation), Mt. v. 22; [some 
take the word here as a Hebr. term (113 rebel) ex- 
pressive of condemnation; cf. Num. xx. 10; Ps. Ixviii. 
8; but see the Syriac; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad 
loc.; Levy, Neuhebriisch. ἃ. Chald. Worterbuch s. v. 
Dn]. (Sept. for 523, Deut. xxxii. 6; Is. xxxii. 5 sq.; 
for 92, Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 8. [Aeschyl., Soph., al.])* 

Μωσῆς (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo 
(16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in 
Philo [cf. his * Buch v. d. Weltschópf." ed. Müller p. 117 
(but Richter in his ed. has adopted Moic7s)], after the 


“Μωσῆς 


Hebr. form 7, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. Tw to 
draw out), and Μωσῆς (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s 
4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [**in Josephus the 
readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the 
classic form (Μωσῆς); which moreover is the common 
form in his writings,” Müller's note on Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 
31, 4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt 
Μωῦσῆς uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. cf. Otto's 
note on Justin Mart. apol. i. $ 32 init.], and in the N. T. 
ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian water- 
saved, i. e. *saved from water'; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. vol. 
ii. p. 313; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 824; Knobel 
on Ex. ii. 10; [but its etymol. is still in dispute; many 
recent Egyptologists connect it with mesu i. e. ‘child’; 
on the various interpretations of the name cf. Müller on 
Joseph. c. Ap. l. c.; Stanley in B. D. s. v. Moses; Schenkel 
in his BL.iv.240sq.]. From the remarks of Fritzsche, 
Gesenius, etc., it is evident also that the word is a trisyl- 
lable, and hence should not be written Μωυσῆς as it is 
by L Tr WH, for ov is a diphthong, as is plain from 
ἑωυτοῦ, τωὐτό, Ionic for éavroü, ταὐτό; [cf. Lipsius, 


[N, v: v (ἐφελκυστικόνῚ), cf. W. §5,1b.; B.9(8); Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 97 sq.; WH. App. p-146sq.; Thiersch, De Pentat. 
vers. Alex. p. 84 sq. ; Scrivener, Plain Introd. etc. ch. viii. 
§ 4; Collation of Cod. Sin. p. liv.; see s. vv. δύο, εἴκοσι, πᾶς. 
Its omission by the recent editors in the case of verbs (esp. 
in 3 pers. sing.) is rare. In WH, for instance, (where “the 
omissions are all deliberate and founded on evidence ἢ) it is 
wanting in the case of ἐστι five times only (Mt. vi. 25; Jn. 
yi. 55 bis; Acts xviii. 10; Gal. iv. 2, — apparently without 
principle); in Tdf. never; see esp. Tdf. u.s. In the dat. plur. 
of the 3d decl. the Mss. vary; see esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 98 and 
WH. App. p.146sq. On appended to accus. sing. in a or 7 
(5) see ἄρσην. On the neglect of assimilation, particularly in 
compounds with σύν and ἐν, see those prepp. and Tdf. Pro- 
leg. p. 73 sq.; WH. App. p. 149; cf. B. 8; W.48. On the 
interchange of y and v» in such words as ἀποκτέννω (àro- 
κτένω), ἐκχύννω (ἐκχύνω), ἔνατος (Évvaros), ἐνενήκοντα (évve- 
νήκοντα), ἐνεός (évveós), ᾿Ιωάννης (Ἰωάνης), and the like, see 
the several words.] 

Ναασσών, (Un [i. e. ‘diviner’, ‘enchanter’]), 6, in- 
decl, Naasson [or Naashon, or (best) Nahshon], a man 
mentioned in (Ex. vi. 23; Num. i. 7; Ruth iv. 20) Mt. 
i. 4 and LK. iii. 32.* 

Nayyat, (fr. 423 to shine), 6, indecl., (Vule. [.Naggae, 
and (so A. V.)] Nagge), Naggai, one of Christ's ances- 
tors: Lk. iii. 25.* 

Ναζαρέτ [(so Rec.* everywhere; Lchm. also in Mk. 
1.9; Lk.ii.39,51; iv.16; Jn.i.45 (46) sq.; Tdf. in Mk. 


4 











1 Ναζαρέτ 


Gramm. Untersuch. p. 140]; add, W. p. 44; [B. 19 
(17)]; Ewald; Gesch. des Volkes Israel ed. 3 p. 119 
note), -ées, ὁ, Moses, (Itala and Vulg. Moyses), the 
famous leader and legislator of the Israelites in their 
migration from Egypt to Palestine. As respects its de- 
clension, everywhere in the N. T. the gen. ends in -éws 
(as if from the nominative Moüacs), in Sept. 5, as Num. 
iv. 41, 45, 49, etc. dat. -7 (as in Sept., cf. Ex. v. 20; 
xii. 28; xxiv. 1; Lev. viii. 21, etc.) and -et (for the 
Mss. and accordingly the editors vary between the 
two [but TWH - only in Acts vii. 44 (influenced by 
the Sept. ?), Tr in Acts l. c. and Mk. ix. 4, 5,; L in Acts 
l.c. and Ro.ix.15txt.; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 119; WH. 
App. p. 158]), Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 4; Jn. v. 46; ix. 
29; Acts vii. 44; Ro. ix. 15; 2 Tim. iii. 8. ace. -ἣν (as 
in Sept.), Acts vi. 11; vii. 35; 1 Co. x. 2; Heb. iii. 3; 
once -éa, Lk. xvi. 29; cf. [Tdf. and WH. u. 5.1; W. $10, 
1; B.u.s.; [Etym. Magn. 597, 8]. By meton. i. q. the 
books of Moses: Lk. xvi. 29; xxiv. 27; Acts xv. 21; 
2 Co. iii. 15. 


N 


1.9; Jn.i.45 (46) sq.; Trtxt.in Lk. i. 26; ii. 4; iv. 16; 
Jn.i.45 (46) sq.; Trmrg.in Mk. i. 9; Lk. ii. 39, 51; 
and WH everywhere except in four pass. soon to be 
mentioned), Ν αἵ αρέθ (so Rec."* ten times, Rec.'*cz six 
times, T and Tr except in the pass. already given or about 
to begiven; Lin Mt.ii. 23; xxi.11(so WH here); Lk. i. 
26; Acts x. 38 (so WH here)), Nafapaé (L in Mt. iv. 
13 and Lk. ii. 4, after cod. A but with “little other at- 
testation” (Hort)), Nafapé (Mt. iv.13 T Tr WH; Lk. 
iv. 16 TWH)], 7, indecl., (and τὰ Ná£apa, Orig. and Jul. 
African. in Euseb. h. 6.1, 7, 14; cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz. 
i. p. 319 sq. [ Eng. trans. ii. p. 16] and ii. p. 421 sq. [ Eng. 
trans. iv. p. 108], who thinks Nazara preferable to the 
other forms [but see WH. App. p. 160*; ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 
120; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. $ 5; Alford, Greek Test. 
vol. i. Proleg. p. 97]), Nazareth, a town of lower Galilee, 
mentioned neither in the O. T., nor by Josephus, nor in 
the Talmud (unlessit is to be recognized in the appellation 
*X2 13, given there to Jesus Christ). It was built upon 
a hill, in a very lovely region (cf. Renan, Vie de Jésus, 
14e éd. p. 27 sq. [Wilbour’s trans. (N. Y. 1865) p. 69 
sq.; see also Robinson, Researches, ete. ii. 336 sq.]), and 
was distant from Jerusalem a three days' journey, from 
Tiberias eight hours [or less]; it was the home of Jesus 
(Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 1); its present name is en Nazi- 
rah, a town of from five to six thousand inhabitants (cf. 


Nafapnvos 


Baedeker, Palestine and Syria, p. 359) : Mt. ii. 23; iv. 
18; xxi 11; Mk.i.9; Lk.i. 26; ii. 4, 89, 51; iv. 16; 
Jn.i. 45 (46) sq.; Acts x. 39. As respects the He- 
brew form of the name, it is disputed whether it was 
531a sprout’, ‘shoot’, (so, besides others, /Tengstenberg, 
Christol. des A. T. ii. 124 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 106 sq.]; but 
cf. Gieseler in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1831, p. 588 sq.), or 
7733 f protectress ^, *guard", (cf. 2 K. xvii. 9; so Keim 
u. s.), or 33 ‘sentinel’ (so Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. 
Luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 401), or mx * watch-tower ἢ 
(so Ewald in the Gotting. gelehrt. Anzeiger for 1867, 
p- 1602 sq.). Fora further account of the town ef. Rob- 
inson, as above, pp. 333-343; Tobler, Nazareth in Palüs- 
tina. Berl. 1868; [Hackett in B. D. s. v. Nazareth J.* 

Notopnvós, -οῦ, ὁ, a Nazarene, of Nazareth, sprung from 
Nazareth, a patrial name applied by the Jews to Jesus, 
because he had lived at Nazareth with his parents from 
his birth until he made his publie appearance: Mk. i. 24; 
xiv. 67; xvi. 6; Lk. iv. 34; [xxiv. 19 L mrg. T Tr txt. 
WH]; and E T Tr WH in Mk. x. 47.* 

Ναζωραῖος, -ov, 6, i. q. Ναζαρηνός, q. V.; Jesus is so 
called in Mt. ii. 23 [ef. B. D. s. v. Nazarene; Bleek, 
Synopt. Evang. ad loc.]; xxvi. 71; Mk. x. 47 RG; Lk. 
xviii. 37; xxiv. 19 RG Ltxt. Tr mrg.; Jn. xviii. 5, 7; xix. 
19; Aetsii.92; iii.6; iv. 10; vi. 14; [ix. 5 L br.]; xxii. 
8; xxvi.9. οἱ Ναζωραῖοι [ A.V. the Nazarenes], followers 
of Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, was a name given to the Christians 
by the Jews, Acts xxiv. 5.* 

No8&v or (so L mrg. T WH) Ναθάμ, 6, (103 [‘given’ se. 
of God]), Nathan: a son of David the king (2 S. v. 14), 
Lk. iii. 31.* 

Na0avasA, ó, (7830) gift of God), Nathanael, an inti- 
mate disciple of Jesus: Jn. i. 45-49 (46-50); xxi. 2. 
He is commonly thought to be identical with Bartholo- 
mew, because as in Jn. i. 45 (46) he is associated with 
Philip, so in Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14 Bartholo- 
mewis; Nathanael, on this supposition, was his personal 
name, and Bartholomew a title derived from his father 
(see Βαρθολομαῖος). But in Acts i. 13 Thomas is placed 
between Philip and Bartholomew ; [see B. D. s. v. Na- 
thaniel]. Spéáthin the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. "Theologie, 
1868, pp. 168 sqq. 309 sqq. [again 1880, p. 78 sqq.] 
acutely but vainly triesto prove that the name was formed 
by the Fourth Evangelist symbolically to designate ‘the 
disciple whom Jesus loved’ (see Ἰωάννης, 2).* 

ναί, a particle of assertion or confirmation [akin to 
vij; cf. Donaldson, Cratylus § 189], fr. Hom. down, yea, 
verily, truly, assuredly, even so: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21; 
Philem. 20; Rev. i. 7; xvi. 7; xxii 20; ναί, λέγω ὑμῖν 
κτὰλ., Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 26; xi.51; xii. 53 vai, λέγει τὸ 
πνεῦμα, Rev. xiv. 13; it is responsive and confirmatory 
of the substance of some question or statement: Mt. ix. 
28; xiii.51; xv.27; xvii. 25; xxi.16; Mk. vii. 28; Jn. 
xi. 27; xxi.15 sq.; Acts v.8 (9); xxii. 27; Ro. iii. 29; 
a repeated vat, most assuredly, [A. V. yea, yea], expresses 
emphatic assertion, Mt. v. 37 ; ἤτω ὑμῶν τὸ vai vai, let your 
vat be ναί, i. 6. let your allegation be true, Jas. v. 12 [B. 
163 (142); W. 59 (58)]5 εἶναι or γίνεσθαι ναὶ καὶ οὔ, to 


42 








2 Naodp 


be or show one’s self double-tongued, i. e. faithless, waver- 
ing, false, 2 Co. i. 18 sq.; ἵνα map’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ vat καὶ τὸ οὗ 
ov, that with me should be found both a solemn affirma- 
tion and a most emphatic denial, i. e. that I so form my re- 
solves as, at the dietate of pleasure or profit, not to carry 
them out, ibid. 17[cf. W.460 (429)]; ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν, 
in him what was promised has come to pass, ibid. 19; 
ἐπαγγελίαι ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί sc. γεγόνασιν, have been fulfilled, 
have been confirmed by the event, ibid. 20 [cf. Meyer 
ad loc.]. It is a particle of appeal or entreaty, like the 
[ Eng. yea] (Germ. ja) : with an imperative, vat - . . cvA- 
λαμβάνου αὐταῖς, Phil. iv. 3 (where Rec. has καί for vat); 
vai ἔρχου, Rev. xxii. 20 Ree.; so vai vat, Judith ix. 12. 
[A classification of the uses of vai in the N. T. is given 
by Ellicott on Phil. iv. 3; ef. Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt. 
xi. 26.]* 

Ναιμάν, see Νεεμάν. 

Naty [ WI Natr, (cf. I, )], (2 a pasture; οἵ. Simonis, 
Onomast. N. T. p. 115), ἡ, Nain, a town of Galilee, situ- 
ated at the northern base of Little Hermon; modern 
Nein, a petty village inhabited by a very few families, 
and not to be confounded with a village of the same name 
beyond the Jordan (Joseph. b. 1. 4, 9, 4): Lk. vii. 11. 
[Cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 552 sq.]* 

ναός, -oi, 6, (ναίω to dwell), Sept. for 271, used of the 
temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice 
(or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and 
the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or 
cell of a temple, where the image οἵ the god was placed, 
called also δόμος, σηκός, which is to be distinguished from 
τὸ ἱερόν, the whole temple, the entire consecrated en- 
closure; this distinetion is observed also in the Bible; 
see ἱερόν, p. 299°): Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; xxvii. 40; Mk. 
xiv. 58; xv. 29; Jn.ii. 19 sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt. 
xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we sup- 
pose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place, 
which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [ (note 
the εἰς (al. ἐν) of TTrWH)]. with θεοῦ, τοῦ θεοῦ, 
added: Mt. xxvi. 61; 1 Co. iii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16; 2 Th. 
ii. 4; Rev. xi. 1; used specifically of the Holy place, 
where the priests officiated: Lk. i. 9, 21 sq.; of the Holy 
of holies (see καταπέτασμα), Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; 
Lk. xxiii. 45. in the visions of the Revelation used of 
the temple of the ‘ New Jerusalem’: Rev. iii. 12; vii. 15; 
xi. 19; xiv. 15, 17; xv. 5 sq. 8; xvi. 1, 17; of any temple 
whatever prepared for the true God, Acts vii. 48 Ree. ; 
xvii.24. of miniature silver temples modelled after the 
temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis (q. v.)] of Ephesus, Acts 
xix. 24. ὁ θεὸς ναὸς αὐτῆς ἐστιν, takes the place of a tem- 
ple in it, Rev. xxi. 22. metaph. of a company of Chris- 
tians, a Christian church, as dwelt in by the Spirit of 
God: 1 Co. iii. 16; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21; for the same 
reason, of the bodies of Christians, 1 Co. vi. 19. of the 
body of Christ, 6 ναὸς rod σώματος abro) (epexeget. gen. 
[W. 531 (494) ]), Jn. ii. 21, and acc. to the Evangelist’s 
interpretation in 19 also. [(From Hom. on.)]* 

Naoóp, (Di) consolation), 6, Nahum, a certain Is- 


raelite, one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 25." 


vapoos 


νάρδος, -ov, ἡ, (a Sanskrit word [cf. Fick as in Low 
below]; Hebr. 373, Cant. i. 12; iv. 13 sq.); a. 
nard, the head or spike of a fragrant East Indian plant 
belonging to the genus Valeriana, which yields a juice 
of delicious odor which the ancients used (either pure 
or mixed) in the preparation of a most precious oint- 
ment; hence b. nard oil or ointment; so Mk. xiv. 
3; Jn. xii. 3. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Narde; Riictschi 
in Herzog x. p. 203; Furrer in Schenkel p. 286 sq. ; 
[Lów, Aramüische Pflanzennamen (Leip. 1881), $ 316 
p. 368 sq. ; Royle in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Nerd; Birdwood 
in the * Bible Educator’ ii. 152 ].* 

Νάρκισσος, -ov, 6, Narcissus [i. e. * daffodil*], a Roman 
mentioned in Ro. xvi. 11, whom many interpreters with- 
out good reason suppose to be the noted freedman of the 
emperor Claudius (Suet. Claud. 28; Tac. ann. 11, 29 sq. ; 
12, 57 ete.) [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 175]; in op- 
position to this opinion cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Riietschi 
in Herzog x. 202 sq. ; [B. D. s. v.].* 

vavayéo, -ῶ: 1 aor. evavaynoa; (fr. vavayós ship- 
wrecked ; and this fr. ναῦς, and ἄγνυμι to break); freq. 
in Grk. writ. from Aeschyl. and Hat. down, to suffer ship- 
wreck: prop. 2 Co. xi. 25; metaph. περὶ τὴν πίστιν (as 
respects [A. V. concerning, see περί, I. b.] the faith), 
i Athan 105€ 

ναύ-κληρος, -ov, 6, (ναῦς and κλῆρος), fr. Hdt. [and Soph. | 
down, a ship-owner, ship-master, i. e. one who hires out his 
vessel, or a portion of it, for purposes of transportation : 
Acts xxvii. 11.* E 

vais, acc. ναῦν, 7, (fr. νάω or véo, to flow, float, swim), 
a ship, vessel of considerablesize: Acts xxvii.41. (From 
Hom. down; Sept. several times for 138 and 7738.) * 

ναύτης, -ov, 6, à. sailor, seaman, mariner: Acts xxvii. 
27, 30; Rev. xviii. 17. (From Hom. down.) * 

Ναχώρ, ὁ, (^13 fr. 19m to burn; [Philo de cong. erud. 
grat. ὃ 9 N. ἑρμηνεύεται φωτὸς ἀνάπαυσις; al.al.; see B. D. 
Am. ed. s. v. ]), the indecl. prop. name, Nachor [or (more 
com. but less accurately) Nahor] (Gen. xi. 22), of one of 
the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 34.* 

νεανίας, -ov, 6, (fr. veáv, and this fr. véos; cf. μεγιστάν 
{q. ν.], Evvav), fr. Hom. down; Hebr. 3y3 and 43n3; a 
youngman: Acts xx. 9; xxiii. 17, and RGin 18 [so here 
WH txt.], 22; it is used as in Grk. writ., like the Lat. adu- 
lescens and the Hebr. 3y3 (Gen. xli. 12), of men between 
twenty-four and forty years of age [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
213; Diog. Laért. 8, 10; other reff. in Steph. "Thesaur. 
8. VV. νεᾶνις, νεανίσκος}: Acts vii. 58.* 

νεανίσκος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. vedv, see veavias; on the ending 
-ἴσκος, -(ckr, which has dimin. force, as ἀνθρωπίσκος, 
BaciXioxos, παιδίσκη, ete., cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443), 
fr. Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for ὍΤΙ and 53y3; a young 
man, youth: Mt. xix. 20, 22; Mk. xiv. 51°; xvi. 5; Lk. 
vii. 14; Acts ii. 17; [and L T Tr WH in xxiii. 18 (here 
WH mrg. only), 22]; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; like ^y3 (2 S. ii. 
14; Gen. xiv. 24, etc. ; cf. Germ. Bursche, Knappe i. q. 
Knabe, (ef. our colloquial “boys”, *lads"]) used of a 
young attendant or servant: so the plur. in Mk. xiv. 51 
Reec.; Acts v. 10.* 


423 











νεκρός 


Νεάπολις, -εως, 7, Neapolis, a maritime city of Mace- 
donia, on the gulf of Strymon, having a port [cf. Lewin, 
St. Paul, i. 203 n.] and colonized by Chalcidians | see B. D. 
s. v. Neapolis; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip., Introd. § iii.]: 
Acts xvi. 11 [here 'Tdf. Νέαν πόλιν, WH Νέαν Πόλιν, Tr 
Νεὰν πόλιν; cf. B. 74; Lob.ad Phryn. p. 604 sq.]. (Strab. 
7 p. 330; Plin. 4, (11) 18.) * 

Νέεεμάν and (so L T Tr WH after the Sept. [see WH. 
App. p. 159 sq. ]) Natpay, 6, (1253 pleasantness), Naaman 
(so Vulg. [also Neman]), a commander of the Syrian 
armies (2 K. v. 1): Lk. iv. 27.* 

νεκρός, -d, -óv, (akin to the Lat. neco, nez [fr. a r. sig- 
nifying ‘to disappear’ ete.; cf. Curtius $ 93; Fick i. p. 
123; Vanicek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for ry2; dead, 
i. e. 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last, 
lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v. 
10; xx.9; xxvii.6; Heb.xi.35; Rev.i.17; ἐπὶ νεκροῖς, 
if men are dead (where death has occurred [see ἐπί, B. 
2 a. e. p. 233* fin. ]), Heb. ix. 17; ἐγείρειν νεκρούς, Mt. x. 8; 
xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; hyperbolically and proleptically i. q. as 
if already dead, sure to die, destined inevitably to die: và 
σῶμα, Ro. viii. 10 (τὸ σῶμα and τὸ σωμάτιον φύσει νεκρόν, 
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 15 and 3, 22, 41; in which sense Luther 
called the human body, although alive, einen alten Maden- 
sack [cf. Shakspere's thou -worms-meat /]) ; said of the 
body of a dead man (so in Hom. often; for 7733, a corpse, 
Deut. xxviii. 26; Is. xxvi. 19; Jer. vii. 33; ix. 22; xix. 
7): μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, among the dead, i. e. the buried, Lk. 
xxiv. 5; θάψαι τοὺς νεκρούς, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60; 
ὀστέα νεκρῶν, Mt. xxiii. 27; of the corpse of a murdered 
man, αἷμα ὡς νεκροῦ, Rev. xvi. 3 (for 39979, Ezek. xxxvii. 
9; for 557, thrust through, slain, Ezek. ix. 7; xi 6). — b. 
deceased, departed, one whose soul is in Hades: Rev. i. 18; 
ii. 8; νεκρὸς ἦν, was like one dead, as good as dead, Lk. 
xv. 24, 32; plur., 1 Co. xv. 29; Rev. xiv. 13; ἐν Χριστῷ, 
dead Christians (see ἐν, I. 6 b. p. 211"), 1 Th. iv. 16; very 
often of νεκροί and νεκροί (without the art.; see W. p. 123 
(117) and cf. B. 89 (78) note) are used of the assembly 
of the dead (see ἀνάστασις, 2 and ἐγείρω, 2) : 1 Pet. iv. 6; 
Rev. xx. 5, 12 sq.5 ris ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, one (returning) 
from the dead, the world of spirits, Lk. xvi. 305 ἐκ νεκρῶν, 
from the dead, occurs times too many to count (see avá- 
στασις, ἀνίστημι, ἐγείρω) : ἀνάγειν τινὰ ἐκ v., Ro. x. 1; Heb. 
xiii. 20; ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν, life springing forth from death, 
i. e. the return of the dead to life [see ἐκ, I. 5], Ro. xi. 
15; πρωτύτοκος ἐκ τῶν vexp. who was the first that returned 
to life from among the dead, Col. i. 18; also zporór. τῶν 
νεκρ. Rev. i. 5; ζωοποιεῖν τοὺς v. Ro. iv. 175 ἐγείρειν τινὰ 
ἀπὸ τῶν v. to rouse one to quit (the assembly of) the dead, 
Mt. xiv.2; xxvii.64; xxviii. 7; κρίνειν ζῶντας x. νεκρούς, 
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; κριτὴς ζώντων x. νεκρῶν, Acts 
x. 42; νεκρῶν x. ζώντων κυριεύειν, Ro. xiv. 9. C. desti- 
tute of life, without life, inanimate (i. q. ἄψυχος) : τὸ σῶμα 
χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν; Jas. ii. 26; οὐκ ἔστιν (6) θεὸς 
νεκρῶν ἀλλὰ ζώντων, God is the guardian God not of the 
dead but of the living, Mt. xxii.32; Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 
38. 2. trop. 8. [spiritually dead i. e.] destitute of 
a life that recognizes and is devoted to God, because given 


νεκρόω 


up to trespasses and sins; inactive as respects doing right: 
Jn. v. 25; Ro. vi. 13; Eph. v. 14; Rev. iii. 1; with τοῖς 
παραπτώμασιν (dat. of cause [cf. W. 412 (384 sq.)]) added, 
Eph. ii. 1, 5; ἐν [but T Tr WH om. ἐν] τοῖς παραπτ. Col. 
ii. 13; in the pointed saying ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς 
ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς, leave those who are indifferent to the sal- 
vation offered them in the gospel, to bury the bodies of 
their own dead, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60. b. univ. desti- 
tute of force or power, inactive, inoperative: τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, 
unaffected by the desire to sin [cf. W. 210 (199); B. 
§ 133, 12], Ro. vi. 11; of things: ἁμαρτία, Ro. vii. 8; 
πίστις, Jas. ii. 17, 20 [R 61, 26; ἔργα, powerless and fruit- 
less (see ἔργον, 3 p. 248* bot.), Heb. vi. 1; ix. 14. [Cf. 
θνητός, fin.] 

vekpóo, τῶ: 1 aor. impv. νεκρώσατε; pf. pass. ptep. 
νενεκρωμένος ; to make dead (Vulgate and Lat. Fathers 
mortifico), to put to death, slay: τινά, prop., Anthol. app. 
313,5; pass. vevexpwpevos, hyperbolically, worn out, of an 
impotent old man, Heb. xi. 12; also σῶμα vevekp. Ro. iv. 
19; equiv. to lo deprive of power, destroy the strength of: 
τὰ μέλη, i. e. the evil desire lurking in the members (of 
the body), Col. iii. 5. (rà δόγματα, Antonin. 7, 9; τὴν 
ἕξιν, Plut. de primo frig. 21; [ἄνθρωπος, of obduracy, 
Epictet. diss. 1, 5, 7].) * 

νέκρωσις, -eos, 7, (vekpóo) ; 1. prop. a putting to 
death (Vulg. mortificatio in 2 Co. iv. 10), killing. 2. 
i.q. τὸ νεκροῦσθαι, [the being put to death], with τοῦ 
Ἰησοῦ added, i. e. the (protracted) death [A. V. the 
dying] which Jesus underwent in God's service [on the 
gen. cf. W. 189 (178) note], Paul so styles the marks of 
perpetual trials, misfortunes, hardships attended with 
peril of death, evident in his body [cf. Meyer], 2 Co. 
dv. 10. 3. i. q. τὸ νενεκρωμένον εἶναι, the dead state 
[A. V. deadness], utter sluggishness, (of bodily members 
and organs, Galen): Ro. iv. 19.* 

νεο-μηνία, see νουμηνία. ' 

νέος, -a,-ov, [allied with Lat. novus, Germ.neu, Eng. new; 
Curtius $ 433], as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down, ak 
recently born, young, youthful: Tit. ii. 4 (for 193, Gen. 
xxxvii.2; Ex. xxxiii. 11); οἶνος νέος, recently made, Mt. 
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37-39 [but 39 WH in br.], 
(Sir. ix. 10). 2. new: 1Co.v.7; Heb. xii. 24; 
i. q. born again, ἄνθρωπος (q. v. 1 f.), Col. iii. 10. [Svx. 
see καινός, fin.]* 

νεοσσός and (so TWH, see νοσσιά) νοσσός, -ov, ὃ, 
(véos), a young (creature), young bird: Lk. ii. 24. 
form νοσσός appears in the Vat. txt. of the Sept.; but 
in cod. Alex. everywhere νεοσσός ; cf. Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. p. 185 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq.; [cf. W. 
24]. (In Οὐκ. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often for 13, 


of the young of animals, as Lev. xii. 6, 8; Job xxxviii. | 


41.)* 

νεότης, -yTos, 7, (νέος), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly 
for D393; youth, youthful age: 1 Tim. iv. 12; ἐκ vedrn- 
τός μου, from my boyhood, from my youth, Mt. xix. 20 
[Β 61; Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4; Gen. viii. 
21; Job xxxi. 18, etc.* 

νεό-φυτος, -ov, (νέος and dia), newly-planted (Job xiv. 


424 


'The | 


νεωκόρος 


9; Ts. v. 7, etc.) ; trop. a new convert, neophyte, [A. V. 
novice, i. 6.1 (one who has recently become a Christian) > 
1 Tim.iii.6. (Eccles. writ.) * 

Νέρων [by etymol. ‘brave’, *bold'], -ovos, 6, Nero, the 
well-known Roman emperor: 2 Tim. iv. 23 Rec. [i. e. in 
the subscription ].* 

veóo ; 1 aor. ptep. νεύσας; to give a nod; to signify by a 
nod, [ A. V. to beckon]: τινί, foll. by an inf. of what one 
wishes to be done, Jn. xiii. 24; Acts xxiv. 10. (From 
Hom. down; Sept. Prov.iv. 25.) [Cowr.: d:a-, ék-, év», 
€zt^, Kara-vevo. | * 

νεφέλη. -ης. ἡ, (νέφος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for 
1227; but also for 3j! and pnw; a cloud: [v. φωτεινή, Mt. 
xvii.5]; Mt.xxiv.30; xxvi. 64; Mk.ix.7; xiii. 26; xiv. 
62; Lk. ix.34sq.; xii. 94; xxi.27; Actsi.9; 1 Th. iv.. 
17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev.i. 7; x. 1; xi. 
12; xiv. 14 sqq. ; of that cloud in which Jehovah is said 
(Ex. xiii. 21 sq., ete.) to have gone before the Israelites 
on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul 
represents as spread over them (ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, 
cf. Ps. civ. (ev.) 39; Sap. x. 17): 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [Sxx. 
see védos.] * 

Νεφθαλείμ [and (so T edd. 2, 7, WH in Rev. vii. 6) 
Νεφθαλίμ; see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. I, 1], 6, (5na3, 
i. e. *my wrestling' [cf. Gen. xxx. 8], or aec. to what. 
seems to be a more correct interpretation *my crafti- 
ness’ [ef. Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8; Test. xii. Patr. test. 
Neph. § 1], fr. ona unused in Kal; cf. Riietschi in Herzog 
x. p. 200 sq.), Naphtali, the sixth son of the patriarch 
Jacob, by Bilhah, Rachel’s maid: Rev. vii. 6; by meton.. 
his posterity, the tribe of Naphtali, Mt. iv. 13, 15.* 

νέφος, -ovs, [allied with Lat. nubes, nebula, etc.], τό, 
Sept. for 3j and 43}, a cloud; in the N. T. once trop. 
a large, dense multitude, a throng: μαρτύρων, Heb. xii. 1; 
often so in prof. auth., as νέφ. Ἡρώων, πεζῶν, ψαρῶν, κο- 
λοιῶν, Hom. Il. 4, 274; 16,66; 17, 755; 23,133; ἀνθρώ- 
πων, Hdt. 8, 109; στρουθῶν, Arstph. av. 578; ἀκρίδων, 
Diod. 3, 29; peditum equitumque nubes, Liv. 35, 49.* 

[SvN. νέφος, νεφέλη: νέφος is general, νεφέλη specific ; 
the former denotes the great, shapeless collection of vapor: 
obscuring the heavens; the latter designates particular and 
definite masses of the same, suggesting form and limit. Cf. 
Schmidt vol. i. ch. 36.| 

νεφρός, -ov, 6, a kidney (Plat. Arstph.); plur. the kid- 
neys, the loins, as Sept. for ni53, used of the inmost 
thoughts, feelings, purposes, of the soul: with the addi- 
| tion of καρδίας, Rev. ii. 23, with which cf. Ps. vii. 10; 
Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; Sap. i. 6." 

veo-kópos, -ov, 6, 7, (νεώς or ναός, and κορέω to sweep; 
[questioned by some; a hint of this deriv. is found in 
Philo de sacerd. honor. § 6 (cf. vewxopia, de somniis 2, 
42), and Hesych. s. v. defines the word ὁ τὸν ναὸν κοσμῶν" 
κορεῖν yap τὸ σαίρειν ἔλεγον (cf. s. v. σηκοκόρος : so Etym. 
Magn. 407, 27, cf. s. v. νεωκόρος) ; yet Suidas s. v. κόρη" 
p. 2157 c. says v. οὐχ ὁ σαρῶν τ. v. GAN ὁ ἐπιμελούμενος" 
αὐτοῦ (cf. s. vv. νεωκόρος, amkokópos) ; hence some connect 
| the last half with root kop, «oA, cf. Lat. curo, colo]); ale 


! prop. one who sweeps and cleans a temple. 2. one 








VEWTEPLKOS 


who has charge of a temple, to keep and adorn it, a sac- 
ristan: Xen. an. 5, 3, 6; Plat. lege. 6 p. 759 a. 3. 
the worshipper of a deity (ods i. e. the Israelites 6 θεὸς 
ἑαυτῷ νεωκόρους ἦγεν through the wilderness, Joseph. b. 1. 
5,9, 4); as appears from coins still extant, it was an 
honorary title [temple-keeper or temple-warden (cf. 2 
above) | of certain cities, esp. of Asia Minor, in which 
the special worship of some deity or even of some deified 
human ruler had been established (cf. Stephanus, Thes. v. 
p- 1472 sq.; [cf. B. D. s. v. worshipper]); so v. τῆς ᾿Αρτέ- 
μιδος, of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35; [see Bp. Lehtft. in Con- 
temp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.; Wood, Discoveries at 
Ephesus (Lond. 1877), App. passim ].* 

νεωτερικός, -7j, -óv, (νεώτερος, q. V-), peculiar to the age 
of youth, youthful: ἐπιθυμίαι, 2 Tim. ii. 22. (3 Mace. iv. 
8; Polyb. 10, 24, 7; Joseph. antt. 16, 11, 8.) * 

νεώτερος, -a, -ον, (compar. of νέος, q. v.), [fr. Hom. 
down], younger ; i. e. a. younger (than now), Jn. 
xxi. 18. b. young, youthful, [A. V. younger (rela- 
tively)]: 1 Tim. v. 11, 14; Tit. ii. 6; opp. to πρεσβύτε- 
pot, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq.; 1 Pet. v. 5. c. [strietly] younger 
by birth: Lk. xv. 12 sq. (4 Macc. xii. 1). d. an 
attendant, servant, (see νεανίσκος, fin.) : Acts v. 6; infe- 
rior in rank, opp. to ὁ μείζων, Lk. xxii. 26.* 

vf, a particle employed in affirmations and oaths, 
(common in Attic), and joined to an acc. of the pers. 
(for the most part, a divinity) or of the thing affirmed 
or sworn by [B. ὃ 149, 17]; by (Lat. per, Germ. bei): 
1 Co. xv. 31 (Gen. xlii. 15 sq.).* 

vfdo; to spin: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. (Plat. polit. 
p. 289 c.; Anthol; for m0, Ex. xxxv. 25 sq.) * 

νηπιάζω [cf. W. 92 (87)]; (νήπιος, q. v-); to be a babe 
(infant): 1 Co. xiv. 206. (Hippocr.; eccles. writ.) * 

νήπιος, -a, -ov, (fr. vy, an insep. neg. prefix [Lat. ne- 
Sas, ne-quam, nisi, ete. cf. Curtius $ 437], and ἔπος); as 
in Grk. writers fr. Hom. down, a. an infant, little 
child: Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3); 1 Co. xiii. 11; Sept. 
esp. for 55jy and ooiy. b. a minor, not of age: Gal. 
iv. 1 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. c. metaph. childish, 
untaught, unskilled, (Sept. for ^3, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; 
exviii. (exix.) 130; Prov. i. 32): Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; 
Ro. ii. 20; Gal. iv. 3; Eph. iv. 14; opp. to τέλειοι, the 
more advanced in understanding and knowledge, Heb. 
v. 13 sq. (Philo de agric. $ 2); vam. ἐν Χριστῷ, in things 
pertaining to Christ, 1 Co. iii. 1. In 1 Th. ii. 7 L WH 
[ef. the latter’s note ad loc.] have hastily received νήπιοι 
for the common reading ἤπιοι. ἢ 

Nmpeós [(cf. Vaniéek p. 1158)], -ées, 6, Nereus, a 
Christian who lived at Rome: Ro. xvi. 15 [where Lmrg. 
Nmnpéav ].* 

Νηρί and (so T Tr WH) Nrpe [see εἰ; «], 6, (fr. 13 a 
lamp), Neri, the grandfather of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.* 

νησίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of νῆσος), a small island: Acts 
xxvii. 16 [ (Strabo) ]. * 

νῆσος, -ov, 7, (véo to swim, prop. ‘floating land’), an 
island: Acts xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9, 11; Rev. 
i9; vi.14; xvi. 20. (Sept. for^w; [fr. Hom. down].)* 

νηστεία, -as, ἡ, (νηστεύω, q. v.), a fasting, fast, i. e. ab- 


425 





νικάω 


stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a religious 
exercise: of private fasting, Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr 
br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. ii. 
37; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast. 
prescribed by the Mosaie Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq.; xxiii. 
27 sqq: [BB.DD. s. v. Fasts, and for reff. to Strab., Philo, 
Joseph., Plut., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 1]) and kept yearly 
on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month 
Tisri: Acts xxvii. 9 (the month Tisri comprises a part 
of our September and October [cf. D.D. s. v. month (at 
end)]; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, 7 
χειμέριος Spa, when navigation was usually dangerous 
on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage 
referred to). b. a fasting lo which one is driven by 
want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi.27; (Hippocr. Aristot, Philo, 
Joseph., Plut., Ael, Athen., al.; Sept. for pix).* 

νηστεύω : fut. νηστεύσω ; 1 aor. [inf. νηστεῦσαι (Lk. v. 
34 T WH Tr txt.)], ptep. νηστεύσας ; (fr. νῆστις, q- v-) ; 
to fast (Vulg. and eccles. writ. jejuno), i. e. to abstain as 
a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely, 
if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-18; ix. 
14 sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. v. 33, [34, 35]; xviii. 12; Acts 
x.30 RG; xiii. 2, [3]; or from customary and choice 
nourishment, if it continued several days, Mt. iv. 2, cf. 
xi. 18; νηστεύει συνεχῶς kai ἄρτον ἐσθίει μόνον μετὰ ἅλα- 
τος καὶ τὸ ποτὸν αὐτοῦ ὕδωρ, Acta Thom. ὃ 20. (Arstph., 
Plut. mor. p. 626 sq.; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph. c. Ap. 
1, 34, 5 (where see Müller)]; Sept. for ax.) * 

νῆστις, acc. plur. νήστεις and (so Tdf. [cf. Proleg. p. 
1187) νήστις (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326; Fritzsche, Com. 
on Mk. p. 796 sq.; ef. [ WH. App. p. 157°]; B. 26 (23)), 
ó, 7, (fr. m and ἐσθίω, see νήπιος), fasting, not having 
eaten: Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3.  (Hom., Aeschyl., Hip- 
pocr., Arstph., al.) * 

νηφάλεος (so Rec.* in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11, [where Rec.*e 
-λαιος], after a later form) and νηφάλιος [* alone well 
attested” (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three 
term.; fr. νήφω), sober, temperate; abstaining from wine, 
either entirely (Joseph. antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least from its 
immoderate use: 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11; Tit.ii.2. (In prof. 
auth. esp. Aeschyl and Plut., of things free from all 
infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.) * 

vfj$o; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. mare; fr. Theogn., 
Soph., Xen. down; io be sober; in the N. T. everywh. 
trop. to be calm and collected in spirit; to be temperate, 
dispassionate, circumspect: 1 Th. v. 6,8; 2 Tim. iv. 5; 
1 Pet.i.13; v. 8; eis τὰς προσευχάς, unto (the offering 
of) prayer, 1 Pet.iv. 7. [SYN. see dypumvéw; and on the 
word see Ellie. on Tim. 1. 6. Comp.: dva-, ἐκκνήφω. ἢ 

Νίγερ, 6, (a Lat. name [* black ’]), Niger, surname of 
the prophet Symeon: Acts xiii. 1.* hi 

Νικάνωρ, [ (i. e. conqueror’) ], τορος, 6, Nicanor, of An- 
tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je- 
rusalem: Acts vi. 5.* 

νικάω, -@; pres. ptep. dat. »xoü vri Rev. ii. 7 Lchm. 17 
LT Tr, [yet all u«óvras in xv. 2] (cf. épordo, init.); 
fut. νικήσω; 1 801. ἐνίκησα; pf. νενίκηκα ; (νίκη); [fr. Hom. 
down]; to conquer [A. V. overcome] ; a. absol. to 


νίκη 4 


carry off the victory, come off victorious: of Christ, vic- 
torious over all his foes, Rev. iii. 21; vi. 2; ἐνίκησεν . .. 
ἀνοῖξαι κτὰ. hath so conquered that he now has the right 
and power to open etc. Rev. v. 5; of Christians, that hold 
fast their faith even unto death against the power of their 
foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rev. ii. 7, 
11, 17, 26; iii. 5, 12, 21; xxi. 7; w. ἐκ τοῦ θηρίου added, 
to conquer and thereby free themselves from the power 
of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from; cf. W. 367 
(344 sq.); B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when ‘one is ar- 
raigned or goes to law, to win the case, maintain one’s 
cause, (so in the Attic orators; also νικᾶν δίκην, Eur. El. 
955): Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li.) 6). b. with 
ace. of the obj.: τινά, by force, Lk. xi. 22; Rev. xi. 7; 
xiii. 7 [L om. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; of Christ the 
conqueror of his foes, Rev. xvii.14; τὸν κόσμον, to deprive 
it of power to harm, to subvert its influence, Jn. xvi. 33 ; 
ψικᾶν τινα or τι is used of one who by Christian constancy 
and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from 
his adversary’s devices, solicitations, assaults: the devil, 
1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; Rev. xii. 11; false teachers, 1 Jn. iv. 43 τὸν 
κόσμον, ibid. v. 4 sq. νικᾶν τὸ πονηρὸν ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ, by the 
force which resides in goodness, i. e. in kindness, to cause 
an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro. 
xii. 21; νικᾶσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, to be disturbed by an in- 
jury and driven to avengeit, ibid. [CoMr.: ὑπερ-νικάω.] " 

νίκη, -ns, ἡ» [fr. Hom. down], victory: 1 Jn. v. 4 [ef. 
vios ].* . 

Νικόδημος, (νίκη and δῆμος [i. e. *conqueror of the 
people ']), -ov, 6, Nicodemus, (rabbin. 1132. 12), a member 
of the Sanhedrin who took the part of Jesus: Jn. iii. 1, 
4. 9; vii. 50; xix. 39.* 

Νικολαΐτης, -ov, 6, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola’itan: 
plur., Rev. ii. 6, 15, — a name which, it can scarcely be 
doubted, refers symbolieally to the same persons who in 
vs. 14 are charged with holding τὴν διδαχὴν Βαλαάμ, i. e. 
after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block 
before the church of God (Num. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding 
the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well 
as of committing fornication; for the Grk. name Νικό- 
Aaos coincides with the Hebr. Dj^3 acc. to the interpre- 
tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc- 
tion of the people. See in Βαλαάμ; [cf. BB. DD. s. vv. 
Nicolaitans, Nicolas; also Comm. on Rev. ll. cc. ].* 

Νικόλαος, -ov, ὁ, (νίκη and λαός), Nicolaus [ A. V. Nico- 
Jas], a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons 
of the chureh at Jerusalem: Aets vi. 5.* 

Νικόπολις, -ews, 7, (city of victory), Nicopolis: Tit. iii. 
12. There were many cities of this name — in Armenia, 
Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace — which were generally 
built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to 
commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems 
to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory 
of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory 
he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the 
spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had 
in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?) 
€f. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.] on the river Nestus (or 








6 : νοέω 
Nessus), since he calls it a city ‘of Macedonia.’ 
Suv" 

νῖκος, -ous, τό, à later form i. q. νίκη (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 647; [B. 23 (20); W. 24]), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57, 
(2 Mace. x. 38; [1 Esdr. iii. 9]) ; εἰς νῖκος, until he have 
gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20; κατεπόθη ὁ θάνατος εἰς 
νῖκος, [A. V. death is swallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly 
vanquished, 1 Co. xv. 54. (The Sept. sometimes trans- 
late the Hebr. ns i.e. to everlasting, forever, by ets 
νῖκος, 2 S.ii. 26; Job xxxvi. 7; Lam. v. 20; Am.i.11; viii. 
7, because M¥} denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and 
in Syriae victory.) * 

Νινευΐ, ἡ, Hebr. rmr3 (supposed to be compounded of 
ΤΣ and r3 the abode of Ninus; [cf. Fried. Delitzsch as 
below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the Grk. 
and Rom. writ. ἡ Nivos [on the accent cf. Pape, Eigen- 
namen, s. v.], Nineveh (Vulg. Ninive [so A. V. in Lk. as 
below 7), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar- 
ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris 
opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed 
[about] n.c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable 
monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca- 
vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the 
labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay- 
ard; cf. Layard, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849, 
2 vols.; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh 
and Babylon, Lond. 1853; [also his art. in Smith's Diet. 
of the Bible]; H. J. C. Weissenborn, Ninive u. s. Gebiet 
ete. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe, Lips. 
1844; Spiegel in Herzog x. pp. 361-381; [esp. Fried. 
Delitzsch in Herzog 2 (cf. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587—603; 
Schrader, Keilinschriften u.s. w. index s. v.; and in Riehm 
s. v.; W. Robertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. s. v.]; Hitzig 
in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq.; [Rawlinson, Five Great Mon- 
archies ete.; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond. 
1875)]. Inthe N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 R G.* 

[Νινευίτης RG (so Tr in Lk. xi. 32), or] Νινευΐτης [L 
(so Tr in Lk. xi. 30)] or Nwevetzgs T WH (so Tr in Mt. 
xii. 41) [see e, « and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WH. App. p. 
154"], -0v, Ó, (Nuwevt, q. v3 i. q. Νίνιος in Hdt. and Strabo; 
a Ninevite, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41; Lk. 
xi. 30, and L T Tr WH in 32.* 

νιπτήρ, -ῆρος, ὁ, (viro), a vessel for washing the hands 
and feet, a basin: Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) * 

viro; (alater form for vito; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 241 
[Veitch s. v. vita; B. 63 (55); W.88(84)]); 1 aor. ἔνιψα; 
Mid., pres. νίπτομαι; 1 aor. ἐνιψάμην ; Sept. for yn to 
wash: τινά, Jn. xiii. 8; τοὺς πόδας τινός, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 12, 
14; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. to wash one’s self [cf. B. § 135, 
5; W. $ 38, 2b.]: Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15; τὰς χεῖρας, to wash 
one's (own) hands, Mk. vii. 3; rods πόδας, Jn. xiii. 10 
[T om. WH br. τοὺς 7.]: νίψαι τὸ πρόσωπόν cov, Mt. vi. 
[Comp.: dmo- 


[B. D. 


17; νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν, Mt. xv. 2. 
vimro. SYN. see Aovo, fin.]* 

νοέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. ἐνόησα ; [pres. pass. ptcp. (neut. plur.) 
νοούμενα]; (vods); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 731 and 
nn, and for Sun; 1. to perceive with the mind, 
to understand : absol., with the addition τῇ καρδίᾳ, Jn. xii. 


vónua 4 


40 (Ts. xliv. 18) ; w.an acc. of the thing, Eph. iii. 4, 20; 
1 Tim. i.7; pass.: Ro. i. 20; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xv. 17; 
xvi 11; Mk. vii 18; foll by acc. w. inf., Heb. xi. 3; 
absol. i. q. to have understanding: Mt. xvi. 9; Mk. viii. 
17. 2. to think upon, heed, ponder, consider: νοείτω, 
sc. let him attend to the events that occur, which will show 
the time to flee, Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; [similarly 
νόει ὃ (RG à) λέγω, 2 Tim. ii. 7]. [COMP.: ev-, kara 
μετα-, προ-, vmro-voeo. | * 

νόημα, -7os, τό, fr. Hom. down ; 1. a mental per- 
ception, thought. 2. spec. (an evil) purpose: aiypa- 
λωτίζειν πᾶν νόημα eis THY ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ, to cause 
whoever is devising evil against Christ to desist from his 
purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him 
forth), 2 Co. x.5; plur.: 2 Co.ii. 11 (τοῦ διαβόλου, Ignat. 
ad Eph. [interpol.] 14 ; τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν πονηρᾶς, Bar. 
ii. 8). 3. that which thinks, the mind: plur. (where 
the minds of many are referred to), 2 Co. iii. 14; iv. 4, 
and perh. [xi. 3]; Phil. iv. 7, for here the word may mean 
thoughts and purposes; [others would so take it also in 
all the exx. cited under this head (cf. καύχημα, 2) ].* 

νόθος, -7. -ov, illegitimate, bastard, i. e. born, not in law- 
ful wedlock, but of a concubine or female slave: Heb. 
xii.8; cf. Bleek adloc. (Sap.iv.3; from Hom. down.) * 

νομή, -7s, 7, (νέμω to pasture), fr. Hom. [i. e. batrach. ] 
down; 1. pasturage, fodder, food: in fig. discourse 
εὑρήσει νομήν, i. e. he shall not want the needful sup- 
plies for the true life, Jn. x. 9; (Sept. for ΠΡ, mp7, 
712). 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen, 
Umsichgreifen): of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2 
Tim. ii. 17 (of ulcers, νομὴν ποιεῖται ἕλκος, Polyb. 1, 81, 6; 
of a conflagration, τὸ πῦρ λαμβάνει νομήν, 11, 4 (5), 4 cf. 
1, 48, 5; Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 9).* 

νομίζω; impf. ἐνόμιζον: 1 aor. ἐνόμισα ; impf. pass. évo- 
μιζόμην 5 (vopos); asin Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus- 
tom or usage; to follow custom or usage; pass. νομίζεται 
it is the custom, it is the received usage: οὗ ἐνομίζετο mpoo- 
εὐχὴ εἶναι, where acc. to custom was a place of prayer, 
Acts xvi. 13 [but L T Tr WH read οὗ ἐνομίζομεν προσευ- 
χὴν εἶν. where we supposed there was, etc.; cf. 2 below], 
(2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose: foll. 
by an inf., Acts viii. 20; 1 Co. vii. 36; foll. by an ace. w. 
inf Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv. 19; xvi. [13 (see 1 
above)], 27; xvii. 29; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Tim. vi. 5; foll. 
by ὅτι, Mt. v. 17; x. 34[W.§ 56, 1b.]; xx.10; Acts xxi. 
29; ὡς ἐνομίζετο, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23. 
(Syn. see ἡγέομαι, fin.]* 

νομικός, -7, -óv, (νόμος), pertaining to (the) law (Plat., 
Aristot., al.) : μάχαι, Tit. iii. 9; ὁ νομικός, one learned in 
the law, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the 
Mosaic law [A. V. a lawyer; cf. γραμματεύς, 2]: Mt. 
xxii. 35; Lk. x. 25; Tit. iii. 13; plur. Lk. vii. 30; xi. 
45 sq. 52; xiv. 3.* 

νομίμως, adv., (νόμιμος). lawfully, agreeably to the law, 
properly: 1 Tim.i.8; 2 Tim.ii. 5. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., 
41." 


νόμισμα, -Tos, τό, (νομίζω, q.V.); 1. anything received 





27 νόμος 


gg., Arstph.). 2. 

money, (current) coin, [ef. our lawful money]: Mt. xxii. 
19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).* 

νομο-διδάσκαλος, -ου, 6, (νόμος and διδάσκαλος, cf. érepo- 
διδάσκαλος, ἱεροδιδάσκαλος, χοροδιδάσκαλος), a teacher and 
interpreter of the law: among the Jews [cf. γραμματεύς, 
2], Lk. v.17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris- 
tians also went about as champions and interpreters of 
the Mosaic law, 1 Tim.i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exc. 
in 6060]. writ. ]) * 

νομοθεσία, -as, 7j, (νόμος, τίθημι), law-giving, legislation : 
Ro. ix. 4. (Plat, Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, al.) * 

νομοθετέω, -ῶ: Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. νενομοθέτηται; 
plupf. 3 pers. sing. νενομοθέτητο (on the om. of the augm. 
see W. 72 (70); B.33(29)); (νομοθέτης); fr. [Lys.], Xen. 
and Plat. down; Sept. several times for mm; 35 
to enact laws; pass. laws are enacted or prescribed for one, 
to be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato; 
cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for exx.]); ὁ λαὸς ἐπ᾽ αὐτῆς 
(R G ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ) νενομοθέτηται (R ἃ νενομοθέτητο) the people 
received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation 
of the priesthood, Heb. vii. 11 [W. § 39,1 b.; cf. B. 337 
(290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V. 
under it); see ἐπί, A. IL, cf. B. 2a. y.]. 2. to sanc- 
tion by law, enact: τί, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [cf. W. and B. 
u. s.].* 

νομο-θέτης, -ov, 6, (νόμος and τίθημι), a lawgiver: Jas. iv. 
12. ([Antipho, Thuc.]; Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al.; 
Sept. Ps. ix. 21.) * 

νόμος, -ov, 6, (νέμω to divide, distribute, apportion), in 
prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything 
received by usage, a custom, usage, law; in Sept. very often 
for nin, also for npn, nm, ete. Inthe N. T. a command, 
law; and 1. of any law whatsoever: διὰ ποίου 
νόμου; Ro. iil. 27; νόμος δικαιοσύνης, a law or rule pro- 
ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance 
of which we are approved of God, Ro. ix. 31, cf. Meyer 
[see ed. Weiss], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loc.; a precept or 
injunction: κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκ. Heb. vii. 16; plur. of 
the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x. 
16; νόμος τοῦ νοός, the rule of action prescribed by reason, 
Ro. vii. 23; the mention of the divine law causes those 
things even which in opposition to this law impel to 
action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law, 
to be designated by the term νόμος, as ἕτερος νόμος ἐν rois 
μέλεσί pov, a different law from that which God has given, 
i. e. the impulse to sin inherent in human nature, or 6 
νόμος τῆς ἁμαρτίας (gen. of author), Ro. vii. 23, 25; viii. 2, 
also ὁ v. τοῦ θανάτου, emanating from the power of death, 
Ro. viii. 2; with which is contrasted ὁ νόμος τοῦ πνεύματος, 
the impulse to (right) action emanating from the Spirit, 
ibid. 2. of the Mosaic law, and referring, acc. to 
the context, either to the volume of the law or to its 
contents: w.thearticle, Mt. v.18; xii.5; xxii.36; Lk. 
ii. 27; x.26; xvi17; Jn.i.17,45 (46); vii.51; viii. 17; 
x. 34; xv. 95; Acts vi 13; vii. 53; xviii 13, 15; xxi. 
20; xxiii. 3; Ro. ii. 13 [(bis) here L T Tr WH om. art. 
(also G in 13^) ], 15, 18, 20, 23%, 26 ; iv. 15"; vii. 1°, 5, 14, 


and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg 


νόμος 


21 (on the right interpretation of this difficult passage 
ef. Knapp, Scripta varii Argumenti, ii. p. 385 sqq. and 
Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. ii. p. 57; [others take νόμ. here 
generally, i. q. controlling principle; see 1 above sub 
fin. and ef. W. 557 (578); B. $ 151, 15]); Ro. viii. 3 sq. ; 
1 Co. ix. 8; xv. 56; Gal. iii. 13, 24; Eph. ii. 15 (on 
which pass. see δόγμα, 2); 1 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 19, 
28; x. 1, etc.; with the addition of Motcéws, Lk. ii.22; 
Jn. vii. 23; vili.5; Acts xiii. 38 (39) [here L T Tr WH 
om.art.]; xv.5; xxviii. 23; 1Co.ix.9 ; of κυρίου, Lk. ii. 
39; of τοῦ θεοῦ, [Mt. xv. 6 T Wii mrz.]; Ro. vii. 22; viii. 
7. κατὰ τὸν νόμον, acc. to the (standard or requirement 
of the) law, Acts xxii. 12; Heb. vii. 5; ix. 22. νόμος 
without the art. (in the Epp. of Paul and James and 
the Ep. to the Heb.; cf. W. p. 123 (117); B. 89 (78); 
[some interpreters contend that νόμος without the art. 
denotes not the law of Moses but law viewed as *a prin- 
ciple’, ‘abstract and universal’; cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. 
ii. 19; also * Fresh Revision," etc. p. 99; Vaughan on 
Ro. ii. 23; esp. Van Hengel on Ro. ii. 12; Gifford in 
the Speaker's Com. on Rom. p. 41 sqq. (cf. Cremer s. v.). 
This distinction is contrary to usage (as exhibited e. g. 
in Sap. xviii. 4; Sir. xix. 17; xxi. 11; xxxi. 8; xxxii. 1; 
XXXV. (xxxii.) 15, 24; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2, 3; 1 Mace. ii. 
21; 4 Macc. vii. 7, and many other exx. in the Apocr.; 
see Wail, Clavis Apoerr. s. v. p. 343), and to the con- 
text in such Pauline pass. as the foll.: Ro. ii. 17, 25, 27; 
vii. 1 (7); xiii. 8, 10; Gal. iii. 17, 18, 23, 24, (cf. Ro. ii. 
12 and iii. 19; v. 13 and 14); ete. It should be added, 
perhaps, that neither the list of pass. with the art. nor 
of those without it, as given by Prof. Grimm, claims to be 
complete]): Ro.ii.23* 25; iii. 31; iv. 15, v. 135 vii. 1", 
2°; x.4; xiii. 105 Gal. iii. 21°; v. 23; 1 Tim.i.9; Heb. 
vii. 12, etc.; with the addition of κυρίου, Lk. ii. 23 [here 
L has theart.], 22 [LT Tr WH add the art.]; of θεοῦ, Ro. 
vii. 25; of Moüséos, Heb. x. 28; esp. after prepositions, 
as διὰ νόμου, Ro. ii. 12; iii. 20; Gal. ii. 21; χωρὶς νόμου, 
without the co-operation of the law, Ro. iii. 21; destitute 
or ignorant of the law, Ro. vii. 9; where no law has been 
promulged, Ro. vii. 8; of ἐκ νόμου, those who rule their 
life by the law, Jews, Ro. iv. 14, 16 {here all edd. have 
the art.]; of ἐν νόμῳ, who are in the power of the law, i. e. 
bound to it, Ro. iii. 19 [but all texts here ἐν τῷ ».]; ὑπὸ 
νόμον, under dominion of the law, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; Gal. iii. 
23; iv. 4, 21; v. 18; of ὑπὸ νόμον, 1 Co. ix. 20; δικαιοῦ- 
σθαι ἐν νόμῳ, Gal. v. 4; ἔργα νόμου (see ἔργον, sub fin.) ; 
ἐν νόμῳ ἁμαρτάνειν, under law i. 6. with knowledge of the 
law, Ro. ii. 12 (equiv. to ἔχοντες νόμον, cf. vs. 14); they 
to whom the ‘Mosaic law has not been made known are 
said νόμον μὴ ἔχειν, ibid. 14; ἑαυτοῖς εἰσι νόμος. their natu- 
ral knowledge of right takes the place of the Mosaic law, 
ibid. ; νόμος ἔργων, the law demanding works, Ro. iii. 27; 
διὰ νόμου νόμῳ ἀπέθανον, by the law itself (when I became 
convineed that by keeping it I could not attain to salva- 
tion, cf. Ro. vii. 9-24) I became utterly estranged from 
the law, Gal. ii. 19 [cf. W. 210 (197) ; B. $133, 12]. xarà 
νόμον, as respects the interpretation and observance of 
the law, Phil. ii. 5. The observance of the law is 


428 





νόος 


designated by the foll. phrases: πληροῦν νόμον, Ro. xiii. 
8; τὸν v. Gal. v. 14; πληροῦν τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου, Ro. 
viii. 4; φυλάσσειν (τὸν) v., Acts xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13; τὰ 
δικαιώμ. τοῦ v. Ro. 11. 26; πράσσειν νόμον, Ro. ii. 25; ποιεῖν 
τὸν v., Jn. vii. 19; Gal. v.3; τηρεῖν, Acts xv. 5, 24 [Rec.]; 
Jas. ii. 10; τελεῖν, Ro. ii. 27 (cf. Jas. ii. 8) ; [on the other 
hand, ἀκυροῦν τὸν νόμ. Mt.xv. 6 Τ WII mrg.]. ὁ νόμος is 
used of some particular ordinance of the Mosaic law in 
Jn. xix. 7; Jas. ii. 8; with a gen. of the obj. added, τοῦ 
ἀνδρός, the law enacted respecting the husband, i. e. bind- 
ing the wife to her husband, Ro. vii. 2 where Rec.** om. 
τοῦ vóp. (SO ὁ νόμος τοῦ πάσχα, Num. ix. 12; τοῦ λεπροῦ, 
Lev. xiv. 2; other exx. are given in Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. 
ii. p. 9; cf. W. $ 30, 2 β.). Although the Jews did not 
make a distinction as we do between the moral, the 
ceremonial, the civil, precepts of the law, but thought 
that all should be honored and kept with the same con- 
scientious and pious regard, yet in the N. T. not infre- 
quently the law is so referred to as to show that the 
speaker or writer has his eye on the ethical part of it 
alone, as of primary importance and among Christians 
also of perpetual validity, but does not care for the cere- 
monial and civil portions, as being written for Jews 
alone: thus in Gal. v. 14; Ro. xiii. 8, 105 ii. 26 sq.; vii. 
21, 25; Mt. v. 18, and often; rà τοῦ νόμου, the precepts, 
moral requirements, of the law, Ro. ii.14. In the Ep. of 
James νόμος (without the article) designates only the 
ethical portion of the Mosaie law, confirmed by the au- 
thority of the Christian religion: ii. 9-11; iv. 11; in the 
Ep. to the Heb., on the other hand, the ceremonial 
part of the law is the prominent idea. 3. of tle 
Christian religion: νόμος πίστεως, the law demanding 
faith, Ro. iii. 27; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the moral instruction given 
by Christ, esp. the precept concerning love, Gal. vi.2; τῆς 
ἐλευθερίας (see ἐλευθερία, a.), Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; cf. ὁ καινὸς 
νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης 
àv, Barn. ep. 2, 6 [see Harnack's note in loc.]. 4. 
by metonymy ὁ νόμος, the name of the more important 
part (i. e. the Pentateuch), is put for the entire collection of 
the sacred books of the O. T.: Jn. vii. 495; x. 34 (Ps. Ixxxi. 
(Ixxxii.) 6); Jn. xii. 34 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 4; Dan. (Theodot.) 
ii. 44; vii. 14); Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; xviii. 
(Ixix.) 15); Ro.iii.19; 1 Co. xiv. 21 (Is. xxviii. 11 sq.; so 
2 Macc. ii. 18, where cf. Grimm); ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται, 
Mt.xi.13; Jn.i.46; Acts xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; 
Ro. iii. 21, (2 Macc. xv. 9); i.q.the system of morals 
taught in the O. T., Mt. v. 17 ; vii. 12; xxii. 40; 6 voy. (of) 
mpop. kai ψαλμοί, the religious dispensation contained 
in the O. T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (ὁ νόμος, of προφ. x. τὰ ἄλλα 
πάτρια βιβλία, prol. to Sir.). Paul's doctrine concerning 
ὁ νόμος is exhibited by (besides others) Weiss, Bibl. Theol. 
88 71, 72; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 69 sq. [Eng. trans. i. 
p. 68 sq.; A. Zahn, Das Gesetz Gottes nach d. Lehre u. 
Erfahrung d. Apostel Paulus, Halle 1876; 2. Tiling, Die 
Paulinische Lehre vom νόμος nach d. vier Hauptbriefen, 
u.s.w. Dorpat, 1878]. νόμος does not occur in the foll. N. 
T. books: 2 Co., Col., Thess., 2 Tim., Pet., Jude, Jn., Rev. 


νόος, see vous. 


΄ 
ypoceo 


vocéo, -6 ; (vdcos); fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; to be 
sick; metaph. of any ailment of the mind (ἀνηκέστῳ 
πονηρίᾳ νοσεῖν ᾿Αθηναίους, Xen. mem. 3, 5, 18 and many 
other exx. in Grk. auth.) : περί τι, to be taken with such 
an interest in a thing as amounts to a disease, to have 
a morbid fondness for, 1 Tim. vi. 4 (περὶ δόξαν, Plat. mor. 
p- 546 d.).* 

νόσημα, -ros, τό, disease, sickness: Jn. v. 4 Rec. Lehm. 
(Trage., Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., sqq.) * 

νόσος, -ov, 7, disease, sickness: Mt. iv. 23 sq.; viii. 17; 
ix. 35; x.1; Mk.i.84; iii. 15 [RG@L]; Lk. iv. 40; vi. 
18 (17); vii. 21; ix. 1; Acts xix. 12. (Deut. vii. 15; 
xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, ete. [Hom., Hdt., al.])* 

νοσσιά, -as, 7, (for νεοσσιά, the earlier and more com- 
mon form [cf. WH. App. p. 145], fr. νεοσσός, q. v-), Sept. 
for ip; 1. a nest of birds. 2. a brood of birds: 
Lk. xiii. 34 [but L txt. νοσσία, see the foll. word]. (Deut. 
xxxii. 11 [Gen. vi. 14; Num. xxiv. 22; Prov. xvi. 16, 
etc. ]-) * 

νοσσίον, -ov, τό, (see νοσσιά), a brood of birds: Mt. 
xxiii. 37 and Lchm. txt. in Lk. xiii. 34 [where al. νοσσιά, 
see the preced. word]. (Arstph., Aristot., Ael.; for D758 
Ps. Ixxxiii. (Ixxxiv.) 4.) * 

νοσσός, see νεοσσός. 

νοσφίζω: Mid., pres. ptep. νοσφιζόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐνο- 
σφισάμην; (νόσφι afar, apart); to set apart, separate, 
divide; mid. to set apart or separate for one’s self, i. 6. to 
purloin, embezzle, withdraw covertly and appropriate to 
one'z own use: χρήματα, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 42; Plut. Lucull. 
37; Aristid. 4; μηδὲν τῶν ἐκ τῆς διαρπαγῆς, Polyb. 10, 
16, 6; χρυσώματα, 2 Mace. iv. 32; ἀλλότρια, Joseph. 
antt. 4, 8, 29; absol. Tit. ii. 10; (τὶ) ἀπό τινος, Acts v. 
2, 3 [here A. V. keep back]; Sept. Josh. vii. 1; ἔκ τινος, 
Athen. 6 p. 234 a.* 

νότος, -ov, 6, the south wind; a. prop.: Lk. xii. 
55; Acts xxvii. 13; xxviii. 13. b. the South (cf. 
Boppas): Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13. 
(From Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 333, the southern 
quarter, the South; and for am, the southern (both) 
wind and quarter; v», the same; np, the eastern 
(both) quarter and wind.) * 

νουθεσία, -as, 7, (vovÜeréo, q. v.) ; admonition, exhorta- 
tion: Sap. xvi. 6; 1 Co. x. 11; Tit. iii. 10; κυρίου, such 
as belongs to the Lord (Christ) or proceeds from him, 
Eph. vi. 4 [cf. W. 189 (178)]. (Arstph. ran. 1009; 
Diod. 15, 7; besides in Philo, Joseph. and other recent 
writ. for νουθέτησις and vovderia, forms more com. in the 
earlier writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 512; [W. 24].) [CE. 
Trench ὃ xxxii.]* 

νουθετέω, -à; (νουθέτης, and this fr. νοῦς and τίθημι; 
hence prop. i. q- ἐν τῷ νῷ τίθημι, lit. ‘put in mind’, Germ. 
‘an das Herz legen’); to admonish, warn, exhort: τινά, 
Acts xx. 31; Ro. xv. 14; 1 Co. iv. 14; Col.i. 28; iii. 16; 
1 Th.v.12,14; 2 Th.ii.15. ([1S.iii.13]; Jobiv. 3; 
Sap. xi. 11; xii. 2; Trage., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.)* 

νουμηνία, and acc. to a rarer uncontr. form (ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 148 [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; WH. 
App. p. 145]) veounvia (so L txt. Tr WH), -as, ἡ, (νέος, 


429 








νυμφίος 


μήν a month), new-moon (Vulg. neomenia; barbarous 
Lat. novilunium): of the Jewish festival of the new 
moon [BB.DD. s. v. New Moon], Col. ii. 16. (Sept. 
chiefly for wn; also for win Ms, Ex. xl. 2; and wx 
wan, Num. x. 10; xxviii. 11; see μήν, 2. Pind., Arstph., 
Thue., Xen., al.) * 

νουνεχῶς, (νοῦς and ἔχω [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599]), 
adv. wisely, prudently, discreetly: Mk. xii. 84. ([ Aristot. 
rhet. Alex. 30 p. 1436”, 33 νουνεχῶς x. δικαίως]: Polyb. 
1, 83, 8 νουνεχῶς k. φρονίμως; [2, 13, 1]; 5, 88, 2 νουνεχῶς 
k. πραγματικῶς ; [al.].) * 

νοῦς (contr. fr. vdos), 6, gen. νοός, dat. vot, (so in later 
Grk. for the earlier forms νοῦ, νῷ, contr. fr. νόου, νόῳ ; cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 453; W. $ 8, 2 b.; [B. 12 sq. (12)]), 
acc. νοῦν (contr. fr. νόον), Sept. for sim and 235, [fr. 
Hom. down]; mind (Germ. Sinn), i.e. 1. the mind, 
comprising alike the faculties of perceiving and under- 
standing and those of feeling, judging, determining; 
hence spec. a. the intellective faculty, the under- 
standing: Lk. xxiv. 45 (on which see διανοίγω, 2); Phil. 
iv. 7; Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; opp. to τὸ πνεῦμα, the spirit 
intensely roused and completely absorbed with divine 
things, but destitute of clear ideas of them, 1 Co. xiv. 
14 sq. 19; ἔχειν τὸν νοῦν κυρίου [L txt., al. Χριστοῦ], to be 
furnished with the understanding of Christ, 1 Co. ii. 
1525 b. reason (Germ. die Vernunft) in the nar- 
rower sense, as the capacity for spiritual truth, the 
higher powers of the soul, the faculty of perceiving divine 
things, of recognizing goodness and of hating evil: Ro. i. 
28; vii. 23; Eph. iv.17; 1 Tim. vi.5; 2 Tim. iii. 8 [cf. 
W. 229 (215); B. $ 134, 7]; Tit. i. 15; opp. to ἡ σάρξ, 
Ro. vii. 25; ἀνανεοῦσθαι τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ νοός, to be so 
changed that the spirit which governs the mind is re- 
newed, Eph. iv. 23; [ef. ἡ ἀνακαίνωσις τοῦ νοός, Ro. xii. 
27. c. the power of considering and judging soberly, 
calmly and impartially : 2 Th. ii. 2. 2. a particular 
mode of thinking and judging: Ro. xiv. 55 1 Co. i. 10; 
i. q. thoughts, feelings, purposes: rod κυρίου (fr. Is. xl. 
13), Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16*; i.q. desires, τῆς σαρκός, 
Col. ii. 18 [cf. Meyer ad loc. ].* 

Νυμφᾶς, -à, 6, [perh. contr. fr. Νυμφόδωρος ; cf. W. 
102 sq. (97) ; on accent ct. Chandler § 32], NympAas, a 
Christian inhabitant of Laodicea: Col.iv.15 [L WH Tr 
mrg. read Νύμφαν i. e. Nympha, the name of a woman; 
see esp. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc., and p. 256 ].* 

νύμφη, 5s, 9, (appar. allied w. Lat. nubo; Vanicek p. 
429 sq.), Sept. for 153; 1. a betrothed woman, a 
bride: Jn. iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23; xxi. 2, 9; xxii. 17. 2: 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a recently married 
woman, young wife; a young woman; hence in bibl. and 
eccl. Grk., like the Hebr. 73 (which signifies both a 
bride and a daughter-in-law (cf. W. 32]), a daughter-in- 
law: Mt.x.35; Lk.xii.53. (Mice.vii.6; Gen. xi. 31; 
[xxxviii. 11]; Ruth i. 6, [ete.]; also Joseph. antt. 5, 
Gb la 

νυμφίος, -ov, ó, (νύμφη), a bridegroom: Mt. ix. 15; xxv. 
1,5 sq. 10; Mk. ii. 19,sq.; Lk. v. 34 sq.; Jn. ii. 9; iii. 29; 
Rev.xviii.23. (From Hom. down; Sept for inn.) * 


νυμφών 


γυμφών, -dvos, ó, (νύμφη), the chamber containing the 
bridal bed, the bride-chamber: οἱ viol τοῦ νυμφῶνος (see 
υἱός, 2), of the friends of the bridegroom whose duty it 
was to provide and care for whatever pertained to the 
bridal chamber, i. e. whatever was needed for the due 
celebration of the nuptials: Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. 
v. 84, ([W. 33 (32)]; Tob. vi. 13 (14), 16 (17); eccles. 
writ.; Heliod. 7, 8) ; the room in which the marriage cere- 
monies are held : Mt. xxii. 10 'T WII Tr mrg.* 

viv, and νυνί (which see in its place), adv. now, Lat. 
nunc, (Sept. for WAY ; [fr. Hom. down]); 1. adv. of 
Time, now, 1. e. at the present time ; a. so used that 
by the thing which is now said to be or to be done the 
present time isopposed to past time: Jn. iv.18 ; ix. 21; 
Acts xvi. 37; xxiii. 21; Ro. xiii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 6; 2 Co. 
vii. 9; xiii. 2; Phil. i.30; ii. 12; iii. 18; Col. i. 24, etc. ; 
freq. it denotes a somewhat extended portion of present 
time as opp. to a former state of things: Lk. xvi. 25; 
Acts vii. 4; Gal. i. 23; iii. 3; spec. the time since certain 
persons received the Christian religion, Ro. v. 9, 11; vi. 
19, 21; viii. 1; Gal. ii. 20; iv. 29; 1 Pet. ii 10, 25; or 
the time since man has had the blessing of the gospel, 
as opp. to past times, 1. 4. in our times, our age: Acts vii. 
52; Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Co. vi. 2; Eph. iii. 5,10; 2 Tim. i. 
10; 1 Pet. i. 125 iii. 21, [cf. ep. ad Diogn. 1]. b. opp. 
to future time: Jn. xii. 27; xiii. 36 (opp. to ὕστερον) ; 
xvi. 22; Ro. xi. 31; 1 Co. xvi. 12 ; νῦν x. eis πάντας τοὺς 
aióvas, Jude 25; used to distinguish this present age, 
preceding Christ's return, from the age which follows 
that return: Lk. vi. 21,25; Eph.ii.2; Heb.ii.8; 2 Pet. 
ii. 18; 1Jn. ii. 28; with ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ added, Mk. 
x. 30. c. Sometimes νῦν with the present is used of 
what will occur forthwith or soon, Lk. ii. 29; Jn. xii. 31; 
xvi. 5; xvii 13; Acts xxvi 17. with a preterite, of 
what has just been done, Mt. xxvi. 65; Jn. xxi. 10; or 
very lately (but now, just now, hyperbolically i. q. a short 
time ago), νῦν ἐζήτουν σε λιθάσαι οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, Jn. xi. 8; cf. 
Kypke ad loe.; Vig. ed. Herm. p. 425 sq. with a future, 
of those future things which are thought of as already 
begun to be done, Jn. xii. 31; or of those which will be 
done instantly, Acts xiii. 11 [here al. supply ἐστί; W.§ 64, 
2a.]; or soon, Acts xx. 22 [here zop. merely has inherent 
fut. force; cf. B. $137, 10a. ]. d. with the imperative 
it often marks the proper or fit time for doing a thing: 
Mt. xxvii. 42 sq.; Mk. xv. 32; Jn.ii.8. Hence it serves 
to point an exhortation in ἄγε νῦν, come now: Jas. iv. 13; 
v. 1, (where it is more correctly written ἄγε νυν, cf. Pas- 
sow ii. p. 372). e. with other particles, by which the 
contrast in time is marked more precisely: καὶ νῦν, even 
now (now also), Jn. xi. 22; Phil. i. 20; and now, Jn. xvii. 
5; Acts vii. 34 [cf. 2 below]; x. 5 [W. § 43, 8 a.]; xx. 
25; xxii 16; ἀλλὰ νῦν, Lk. xxii. 36; ἀλλὰ καὶ νῦν, but 
even now, Jn. xi. 22 [T Tr txt. WH om. L Trmrg. br. 
ἀλλά]; ἔτι νῦν, 1 Co. iii. 2 (3) [L WH br. ἔτι]; viv δέ 
(see νυνί below) but now, Jn. xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Heb. ii. 8; 
νῦν δέ, Gal. iv. 9; Ro. vi. 21 sq. [here νυνὶ δέ]; 
Heb. xii. 26; ποτὲ... νῦν δέ, Ro. xi. 30[WH mrg. νυνί] ; 
Eph. v. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 10; νῦν ἤδη, now already, 1 Jn. iv. 8. 


τότε... 


480 


νυνί 


νῦν οὖν, now therefore, Acts x. 33; xv. 10; xvi. 36; xxiii. 
15, (Gen. xxvii. 8, 43; xxxi. 13,30; xlv. 8; 1 Macé. x. 71). 
τὸ νῦν ἔχον, see ἔχω, II. b. f. with the article; a. 
w. neut. ace, absol. of the article, ra viv, as respects the 
present; at present, now (in which sense it is written also 
τανῦν [so Grsb. always, Ree. twice; classic edd. often 
τανύν; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 13431; Chandler, Accent, § 826]): 
Acts iv. 29; xvii. 80; xx. 32; xxvii. 22, (2 Macc. xv. 8; 
often in class. Grk.; also τὸ viv, 1 Mace. vii. 35 ; ix. 9; 
cf. Kriiger § 50, 5, 13; Bnhdy. p. 328; Bitm. Gram. 
§ 125, 8 Anm. 8 (5)) ; the things that now are, the present 
things, Judith ix. 5; ace. absol. as respects the things now 
taking place, equiv. to as respects the case in hand, Acts v. 
38. B. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν, the present, joined to substantives : 
as ὁ νῦν αἰών, 1 Tim. vi. 17; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. ii. 12; 
καιρός, Ro. iii. 26; viii. 18; xi.5; [2 Co. viii. 14 (13)]; ἡ 
νῦν Ἱερουσαλήμ, Gal.iv. 25; of viv οὐρανοί, 2 Pet. ili. 7; μοῦ 
τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς viv (or νυνί) ἀπολογίας, Acts xxii. 1. — y. 
τὸ νῦν with prepositions: ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν (Sept. for MAY), 


from this time onward, [ A. V. from henceforth], Lk. i. 48 ; 


v.10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16; ἄχρι 
τοῦ νῦν, Ro. viii. 22; Phil i.5; ἕως τοῦ viv (Sept. for 
nny. 37), Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our 
now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or 
sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ; 
under these circumstances; in the present state of affairs ; 
since these things are so; as itis: Lk. xi. 39 (νὸν 1. e. since 
ye are intent on observing the requirements of tradition ; 
[but al. take νῦν here of time —a covert allusion to a 
former and better state of things]); Col. i. 24 [al. of 
time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lghtft., Ellie. ad loc.]; καὶ νῦν, 1 Jn. 
ii. 28; 2 Jn. δ; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, Acts vii. 34. νῦν δέ (and 
νυνὶ δέ see vuvi), but now; now however; but as itis; (often 
in class. Grk.; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426 ; Matthiae ii. p. 
1434 sq.; Kühner § 498, 2 [or Jelf § 719, 2]): 1 Co. 
vii. 14; Jas.iv. 16, and RG in Heb. ix. 26; esp. after a 
conditional statement with εἰ and the indie. preterite, 
Lk. xix. 42; Jn. viii. 40; ix. 41; xv. 22, 24; xviii. 86; 
1 Co. xii. 20; [cf. B. § 151, 26]. In Rev. νῦν does not 
occur. [Syn. see ἄρτι. 

νυνί (νῦν with iota demonstr. [Krüger § 25, 6, 4 sq.; 
Kiihner § 180, e. (Jelf § 160, e.) ; Bttm. Gram. $ 80, 2]), 
in Attic now, at this very moment (precisely now, neither 
before nor after; Lat. nunc ipsum), and only of Time, 
almost always with the pres. very rarely with the fut. 
(ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 19). Not found in the N. T. 
exc. in the writ. of Paul and in a few places in Acts and 
the Ep. to the Heb.; and it differs here in no respect 
from the simple vàv; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 182; [W. 
23]; 1. of Time: with a pres. (Job xxx. 9), Acts 
xxiv.13 LT Tr WH; Ro. xv. 23, 25; 1 Co. xiii. 13 (ἄρτι 

.. τότε 86 ... νυνὶ δέ); 2 Co. viii. 11, 22; Philem. 9, 11 
(sc. ὄντα) ; with a perf. indicating continuance, Ro. iii. 
21 [al. refer this to 2]; with a preterite (Ps. xvi. (xvii.) 
11), Ro. vi. 22 (opp. to τότε); vii. 6; Eph. ii. 13 (opp. 
to ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ); Col. i. 22 (21) [and iii. 8; also Ro. 
xi. 30 WH mrg.], (opp. to wore); Col. i. 20 [Τὸ GL mrg. ; 
cf. W. 863 L2 b.; B. 382 (328)] (opp. to ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων) ; 


νύξ : 431 ξενίζω. 
with a fut., Job vii. 21; Bar. vi.4 (Ep. Jer. 3) ; 2 Mace. | when the weary and also the drunken give themselves up- 
x.10; τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ ἀπολογίας, Acts xxii. 1. 2. | to slumber, put for torpor and sluggishness, 1 Th. v. 5. 


contrary to Grk. usage, in stating a conclusion (see 
νῦν, 2), but since the case stands thus, [as it is]: 1 Co. [v. 11 
RGTLmre.]; xiv. 6 RG (i. e. since 6 γλώσσῃ λαλῶν 
without an interpretation cannot edify the church) ; but 
now (Germ. so aber), Heb. ix. 26 LT Tr WH; after a 
conditional statement with ei (see νῦν, fin.), Ro. vii. 17; 
1 Co. xii. 18 [RGT WH mrg.]; xv. 20; Heb. viii. 6 
[here L Tr mrg. WH txt. νῦν], cf. 4; xi. 16 Rec., cf. 15; 
[B. § 151, 26].* 

νύξ, gen. νυκτός, ἡ; [fr. a root meaning ‘to disappear’; 
cf. Lat. noz, Germ. nacht, Eng. night; Curtius § 94], (Sept. 
for 5"? and 11222); [fr. Hom. down], night: Mk. vi. 48; 
Acts xvi. 333 xxiii. 23; Jn.'xiii. 30; Rev. xxi. 25; xxii. 
55 ἵνα ἡ νὺξ μὴ φαίνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, i. e. that the night 
should want a third part of the light which the moon and 
the stars give it, Rev. viii. 12 [al. understand this of the 
want of the light ete. for a third part of the night’s du- 
ration]; gen. νυκτός, by night [W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 
26], Mt. ii. 14; xxviii. 13; Lk. ii. 8 [but note here the 
article; some make τῆς νυκτός depend on φυλακάς] ; 
Jn. iii. 2; Acts ix. 25; 1 ΤῊ. ν. 7; νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, Mk. 
v.53 1Th.ii.9; iii. 10; 1 Tim. v. 5, [where see Ellicott 
on the order]; ἡμέρας k. νυκτός, Lk. xviii. 7; Acts ix. 
24; Rev. iv.8; vil. 15; xii. 10, ete.; μέσης νυκτός, at mid- 
night, Mt. xxv. 6; in answer to the question when: 
ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτί, this night, Lk. xii. 20; xvii.34; Acts xxvii. 
23; τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ, Acts xii. 65 τῇ ἐπιούσῃ v. Acts xxiii. 
11; in answer to the question how long: νύκτα καὶ 
ἡμέραν, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xx. 31; xxvi. 7; differently in 
Mk. iv. 27 (night and day, sc. applying himself to what 
he is here said to be doing) ; τὰς νύκτας, during the nights, 
every night, Lk. xxi. 37; νύκτας τεσσαράκ. Mt. iv. 2; 
τρεῖς, ib. xii. 40 ; διὰ τῆς νυκτός, see διά, A. IT. 1 b. ; δ ὅλης 
(τῆς) νυκτός, the whole night through, all night, Lk. v. 5; 
ἐν νυκτί, when he was asleep, Acts xviii. 9; (κλέπτης) ἐν 
νυκτί, 1 Th. v. 2, and Rec. in 2 Pet. iii. 10; ἐν τῇ νυκτί, 
in (the course of) the night, Jn. xi. 10; ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ταύτῃ, 
Mt. xxvi. 31, 34; Mk. xiv. 30; ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ 7 κτλ. 1 Co. xi. 
23; κατὰ μέσον τῆς νυκτός, about midnight, Acts xxvii. 27. 
Metaph. the time when work ceases, i. e. the time of death, 
Jn.ix. 4; the time for deeds of sin and shame, the time 
of moral stupidity and darkness, Ro. xiii. 12; the time 


νύσσω (-r9): 1 aor. éwvfa; to strike [?], pierce; to 
pierce through, transfix; often in Hom. of severe or even 
deadly wounds given one; as, τὸν μὲν ἔγχεϊ WE . . . στυ- 
γερὸς δ᾽ ἄρα μιν σκότος εἷλε, Il. 5, 45. 41; φθάσας αὐτὸν 
ἐκεῖνος νύττει κάτωθεν ὑπὸ τὸν βουβῶνα δόρατι καὶ παραχρῆμα. 
διεργάζεται, Joseph. b. 1. 3, 7, 353 so τὴν πλευρὰν λόγχην 
Jn. xix. 34,cf. xx. 25, 27. On the further use of the word. 
cf. Fritzsche, Rom. ii. p. 559. [Comp.: κατα-νύσσω.} * 

νυστάζω ; 1 aor. ἐνύσταξα ; (NYQ, cf. veo, vevará(o) ; 
Sept. for 033; 1. prop. fo nod in sleep, to sleep, 
(Hippoer., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.); to be overcome or 
oppressed with sleep; to fall asleep, drop off to sleep, [ (cf- 
Wiclif) to nap it]: Mt. xxv. 5; Sept. for 0393, Ps. Ixxv. 
(Ixxvi.) 7. 2. like the Lat. dormito [ef. our to be 
napping |, trop. i. q. to be negligent, careless, (Plat., Plut., 
al.): of a thing i. q. to linger, delay, 2 Pet. ii. 3.* 

νυχθήμερον, -ov, τό, (νύξ and ἡμέρα), a night and a day, 
the space of twenty-four hours: 2 Co. xi. 25. (Alex. 
Aphr.; Geopon.) Cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. etc. p. 186; 
[Soph. Lex. s. v.; ef. W. 25].* 

Νῶε (Nóeos, -ov, in Joseph. [antt. 1, 3, 1 sqq.]), 6, (n3 
rest), Noah, the second father of the human race: Mt. 
xxiv. 37 sq.; Lk. iii. 36; xvii. 26 sq.; Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet. 
iil. 20; 2 Pet. ii. 5.* 

νωθρός, -d, -óv, (i. q. vabns, fr. νη [cf. νήπιος] and ὠθέω. 
[to push; al. ὄθομαι to care about (cf. Vanicek p. $79) ], 
cf. νώδυνος, νώνυμος, fr. vy and ὀδύνη, ὄνομα), slow, slug- 
gish, indolent, dull, languid: Heb. vi. 12; with a dat. of 
reference [W. § 31,6 a.; B. 8. 133, 21], ταῖς ἀκοαῖς, of one 
who apprehends with difficulty, Heb. v.11; νωθρὸς καὶ 
παρειμένος ἐν τοῖς ἔργοις, Sir. iv. 29; νωθρὸς x. παρειμένος 
ἐργάτης, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34,1. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., 
Dion. Hal, Anthol., al.) [SyN. see ἀργός, fin.]* 

νῶτος, -ov, 6, [fr. root ‘to bend,’ ‘curve,’ akin to Lat. 
natis; Ficki. 128; Vaniéek p. 420], the back: Ro. xi. 10 
fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. (In Hom. 6 νῶτος [* the gend. 
of the sing. is undetermined in Hom. and Hes.” (L. and 
S.)], plur. τὰ νῶτα; in Attic generally τὸ νῶτον, very 
rarely 6 νῶτος ; plur. always τὰ νῶτα; Sept. 6 νῶτος, plur. 
of νῶτοι; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 290; [Rutherford, New 
Phryn. p. 351]; Passow [L. and 8.] s. v.)* 


ΠῚ 


Γξ, on its occasional substitution for c see Z, a, s.] 

tevia, -as, 9, (ξένιος, -a, -ov, and this fr. £évos), fr. Hom. 
down, hospitality, hospitable reception; i.q. alodging-place, 
lodgings: Acts xxviii. 23 (i. q. τὸ μίσθωμα in vs. 30 [but 
this is doubtful; the more prob. opinion receives the 
preference s. v. ἴδιος, 1a.]); Philem. 22. [See esp: Bp. 
Lghtft. on Phil. p. 9, and on Philem. l. c.]* 


tevitw; 1 aor. ἐξένισα ; Pass. pres. ξενίζομαι ; 1 aor. 
ἐξενίσθην ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to receive as a guest, 
to entertain hospitably : twa, Acts x. 23; xxviii. 7; Heb. 
xiii. 2; pass. to be received hospitably; to stay as a guest, 
to lodge (be lodged): ἐνθάδε, Acts x. 18; ἐν οἰκίᾳ τινός, 
Acts x. 82; παράτινι, Acts x. 6; xxi. 16 [cf. B. 284 (244); 
W. 214 (201)], and sundry codd. in 1 Co. xvi. 19; (Diod. 


ξενοδοχέω 


14, 80). 2. to surprise or astonish by the strangeness 
and novelty of a thing (cf. Germ. befremden): &evigovra 
twa, Acts xvii. 20 (ξενίζουσα πρόσοψις καὶ καταπληκτική, 
Polyb. 3, 114, 4; τὸν θεὸν ἐξένιζε τὸ πραττόμενον, Joseph. 
antt. 1, 1,4; ξενίζουσαι συμφοραί, 2 Mace. ix. 6); pass. 


to be surprised, astonished at the novelty or strangeness of 


athing; to think strange, be shocked: w. dat. of the thing 
[W. § 31, 1 f.], 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Polyb. 1, 23, 5; 8,08, 9); 
ἐν w. dat. of the thing [cf. B. § 133, 23], 1 Pet. iv. 4." 

ξενοδοχέω (for the earlier form ξενοδοκέω in use fr. Hdt. 
down; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307),-@: 1 aor. ἐξενοδόχησα; 
(ξενοδόχος, i. e. ξένους δεχόμενος) ; to receive and entertain 
hospitably, to be hospitable: 1'lim.v. 10. (Dio Cass. 78, 
3; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xxvi. 17; eccl. writ.].) * 

ξένος, -n, -ov, fr. Hom. down, masc. a guest-friend (Lat. 
hospes, [of parties bound by ties of hospitality]),i.e. 1. 
a foreigner, stranger, (opp. to ἐπιχώριος, Plat. Phaedo c. 2 
p. 99 b.; Joseph. b. j. 5, 1, 3); a. prop.: Mt. xxv. 
35, 38,43 sq. ; xxvii. 7; 3 Jn. 5; ξένοι κι παρεπίδημοι ἐπὶ 
tis γῆς, Heb. xi. 13; οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι, Acts xvii. 21 ; 
opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. 19; (Sept. for MS a travel- 
ler, 2 S. xii. 4 cod. Alex.; for 2, Job xxxi. 32; sev- 
eral times for ^323). [as adj. with] δαιμόνια, Acts xvii. 
18. b. trop. a. alien (from a person or thing) ; 
without knowledge of, without a share in: with a gen. of 
the thing, τῶν διαθηκῶν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, Eph. ii. 12 [cf. W. 
§ 30, 4, 6] (ro) λόγου, Soph. O. T. 219). B. new, un- 
heard of: διδαχαί, Heb. xiii. 9; ξένον τι, a strange, won- 
derful thing, 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Aeschyl. Prom. 688; Diod. 
3, 15 and 52; al.). 2. one who receives and enter- 
tains another hospitably; with whom he stays or lodges, a 
host: ὁ ξένος pov, Ro. xvi. 23, where καὶ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 
ὅλης is added, i. e. either ‘who receives hospitably all 
the members of the church who cross his threshold,’ or 
‘who kindly permits the church to worship in his house’ 
(Fritzsche).* 

ξέστης, -ov, 6, (a corruption of the Lat. sextarius); 215 
a sextarius, i. e. a vessel for measuring liquids, holding 
about a pint (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9— see βάτος; Epict. 
diss. 1, 9, 33; .2, 16, 22; [Dioscor.], Galen and med. 
writ.). 2. a wooden pitcher or ewer (Vulg. urceus 
[ A. V. pot]) from which water or wine is poured, whether 
holding a sextarius or not: Mk. vii. 4, 8 [here T WH 
om. Tr br. the cl. ].* 

ξηραίνω: 1 aor. é£jpava (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. £npat- 
vonat; pf. 3 pers. sing. ἐξήρανται (Mk. xi. 21), ptep. ἐξη- 
pappevos; 1 aor. ἐξηράνθην ; cf. B. 41 (36); (fr. ξηρός, q. 
v.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for wa. and win; to 
make dry, dry up, wither: act., τὸν χόρτον, Jas.i.11; pass. 
to become dry, to be dry, be withered [cf. B. 52 (45)] (Sept. 
for V2): of plants, Mt. xiii. 6; xxi. 19 sq. ; Mk. iv. 6; 
xi. 20 sq. ; Lk. viii. 6; Jn. xv. 6; [1 Pet. i. 24]; of the 
ripening of crops, Rev. xiv. 15; of fluids: ἡ πηγή, Mk. 
v. 29; τὸ ὕδωρ, Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. viii. 7; Is. xix. 5) ; of 


432 





: Evpaw 
members of the body, to waste away, pine away: Mk. ix. 
18; ἐξηραμμένη χείρ, a withered hand, Mk. iii. 1, and RG 
in 3.* 

ξηρός, -á, -óv, fr. Hdt. down, dry: τὸ ξύλον, Lk. xxiii. 
31 (in a proverb. saying, ‘if a good man is treated so, 
what will be done to the wicked ?' cf. Ps. i. 3; Ezek. xx. 
47. Is.lvi. 3; Ezek. xvii. 24) ; of members of the body 
deprived of their natural juices, shrunk, wasted, withered : 
as χείρ, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. 11. 81, Ὁ Tr WH; Lk. vi. 6,8; 
men are spoken of as €npoi, withered, Jn. v. 3. of the 
land in distinction from water, ἡ ξηρά sc. γῆ (Sept. for 
nwa, Gen. i. 9 sq.; Jon. i. 9; ii. 11, and often [W. 18: 
592 (550)]): Mt. xxiii. 15; Heb. xi. 29 where L T Tr 
WH add γῆς." 

ξύλινος, -ivn, -wov, (ξύλον), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, 
wooden, made of wood: σκεύη, 2 Tim. ii. 20; neut. plur. 
εἴδωλα, Rev. ix. 20 (θεοί, Bar. vi. 30 [Ep. Jer. 29]).* 

ξύλον, -ov, τό, (fr. ξύω to scrape, plane), fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 15; 1. wood: univ.1 Co.iii. 12; £. θύϊνον, 
Rev. xviii. 12; that which is made of wogd, as a beam from 
which any one is suspended, a gibbet, a cross, [ A. V. tree, 
q. v. in B. D. Am. ed.], Acts v. 30; x. 39; xiii. 29; Gal. 
ii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 24, (yy, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 23; 
Josh. x. 26; Esth. v. 14), — a use not found in the classies 
[οἷν L. and S. s. v. I. 4]. A log or timber with holes in 
which the feet, hands, neek, of prisoners were inserted 
and fastened with thongs (Gr. xaXov, ξυλοπέδη, ποδοκάκη, 
ποδοστράβη, Lat. nervus, by which the Lat. renders the 
Ilebr. 10, a fetter, or shackle for the feet, Job [xiii. 27] ; 
xxxiii. 11; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 458 sqq. ; 
[B. D. s. v. Stocks]): Acts xvi. 24 (Hdt. 6, 75; 9,37; 
Arstph. eq. 367, 394, 705); a cudgel, stick, staff: plur., 
Mt. xxvi. 47, 55; Mk. xiv. 43, 48; Lk. xxii. 52, (Hdt. 
2, 63; 4, 180; Dem. p. 645, 15; Polyb. 6,37, 3; Joseph. 
b. j. 2, 9,4; Hdian. 7, 7, 4). 2. a tree: Lk. xxiii. 
31 (Gen. i. 29; ii. 9; iii. 1; Is. xiv. 8, etc.) ; & τῆς ζωῆς, 
see ζωή, 2 b. p. 314". 

[&v, older form of σύν, retained occasionally in com- 
pounds, as ξυμβαίνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 ed. Bezae ; see Meister- 
hans $49, 11; L. and S. s. v. σύν, init. ; and cf. 3, c s.] 

£vpáo (a later form, fr. Diod. [1, 84] down, for ξυρέω, 
which the earlier writ. used fr. Hdt. down; [W. 24; B. 
63 (55); esp. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 53]), τῶ: pf. pass. 
ptep. éfvpguévos; Mid., pres. inf. ξυρᾶσθαι [for which 
some would read (1 Co. xi. 6) ξύρασθαι (1 aor. mid. inf. 
fr. ξύρω) ; see WH. App. p. 166]; 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. 
plur. ξυρήσωνται [but T Tr WH read the fut. -covrac] ; 
(fr. ξυρόν a razor, and this fr. io); Sept. for nhi; to 
shear, shave: pass.1 Co. xi. 5; mid. to get one's self shaved, 
ibid. vs. 6; 1 Co. xi. 6; with an acc. specifying the obj. 
more precisely [cf. B. $134, 7; W. 832,5]: τὴν κεφαλήν, 
Acts xxi. 24 (Sept. Num. vi. 9, 19; Lev. xxi. 5; ras 
ὀφρύας, Hdt. 2, 66; τὸ σῶμα, 2, 37).* 


433 


O 


0 


6, ἡ, τό, originally rds, τή, τό, (as is evident from the 
forms τοί, rai for οἱ, ai in Hom. and the Ionie writ.), cor- 
responds to our definite article the (Germ. der, die, das), 
which is properly a demonstrative pronoun, which we 
see in its full force in Homer, and of which we find cer- 
tain indubitable traces also in all kinds of Greek prose, 
and hence also in the N. T. 

I. As a DEMONSTRATIVE Pronoun; Lat. hic, haec, 
hoc; Germ. der, die, das, emphatic; cf. W. $ 17, 1; B. 
101 (89) sq. ; 1. in the words of the poet Aratus, rod 
yap καὶ γένος ἐσμέν, quoted by Paul in Acts xvii. 28. 2. 
in prose, where it makes a partition or distributes into 
parts: ὁ μὲν... ὁ δέ, that... this, the one... the other: 
Mt. xiii. 23 R G Tr [here the division is threefold] ; Gal. 
iv. 23 [here L WH Tr mre. br. μέν] ; ot péev. . . of δέ, Acts 
xxviii 24; Phil. 1. 16 sq.; of pev... ὁ δέ, Heb. vii. 5 sq. 
20 (21), 23 sq.; τοὺς μὲν . . . τοὺς δέ, Mk. xii. 5 RG; 
Eph. iv. 11; of μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δὲ (Lehm. of δὲ) . . . ἕτεροι 
δέ, Mt. xvi. 14 cf. Jn. vii. 12; τινές foll. by of δέ, Acts 
xvii. 18; ds (see ὅς I.) μέν foll. by ὁ δέ, Ro. xiv. 2; of δέ 
stands as though οἱ μέν had preceded, Mt. xxvi. 67; xxviii. 
17. 3. in narration, when either two persons or 
two parties are alternately placed in opposition to each 
other and the discourse turns from one to the other; 6 
δέ, but he, and he, (Germ. er aber): Mt. ii. 14; iv.4; xxi. 
29 sq.; Mk. i. 45; xii. 15; Lk. viii. 21, 30, 48; xxii. 10, 
34; Jn. ix. 38, and very often; plur., Mt. ii. 5, 9; iv. 20; 
Mk. xii. 14 [RG L mrg.], 16 [L br. of δέ]; Lk. vii. 4; 
xx. 5,12; xxii. 9, 38, 71; Actsiv. 21; xii. 15, and often ; 
oi μὲν oiv, in the Acts alone: i.6; v. 41; xv. 3, 30; ὁ 
μὲν οὖν, xxiii. 18; xxviii. 5. 

IL As the DErrNrTE or PREPOsITIVE ARTICLE (to 
be distinguished from the postpositive article, — as 
it is called when it has the force of a relative pro- 
noun, like the Germ. der, die, das, exx. of which use are 
not found in the N. T.), whose use in the N. T. is ex- 
plained at length by W. $$ 18-20; B. 85 (74) sqq.; 
[Green p. 5sqq.]. Asin all languages the article serves 
to distinguish things, persons, notions, more exactly, it 
is prefixed 1. to substantives that have no mod- 
ifier; and a. those that designate a person or a 
thing that is the only one of its kind ; the art. thus dis- 
tinguishes the same from all other persons or things, as 
ὁ ἥλιος, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, 7) θάλασσα, ὁ θεός, ὁ λόγος (Jn. i. 
1 sq-), ὁ διάβολος, τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἣ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος, 
ete. b. appellative names of persons and things defi- 
nite enough in themselves, or made so by the context, 
or sufficiently well-known from history; thus, to the 
names of virtues and vices, as ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία, ἡ 
'δύναμις, ἡ ἀλήθεια, ete. ὁ ἐρχόμενος, the well-known per- 

28 











ε 
o 


sonage who is to come, i. e. the Messiah, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 
19; ὁ προφήτης, the (promised and expected) prophet, 
Jn. i. 21; vii. 40; ἡ σωτηρία, the salvation which all 
good men hope for, i. e. the Messianic salvation; ἡ 
γραφή, ete.; ἡ νεφέλη, the cloud (well known from the 
O. T.), 1 Co. x. 1 sq.; rois ἀγγέλους, Jas. ii. 25; τῷ 
ἐκτρώματι, 1 Co. xv. 8. to designations of eminent per- 
sonages: 6 vids τοῦ θεοῦ, ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, (see vids) ; 
ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, Jn. iii. 10; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. 
p- 613. The article is applied to the repeated name of 
a person or thing already mentioned or indicated, and 
to which the reader is referred, as τοὺς μάγους, Mt. ii. 7 
cf. 1; of doxoi, Mt. ix. 17; of δαίμονες, Mt. viii. 31 cf. 28; 
τὴν ὄνον καὶ τὸν πῶλον, Mt. xxi. 7 cf. 2, and countless 
other exx. The article is used with names of things 
not yet spoken of, in order to show that definite things 
are referred to, to be distinguished from others of the 
same kind and easily to be known from the context; as 
τὰ βρέφη, the babes belonging to the people of that 
place, Lk. xviii. 15; ἀπὸ τῶν δένδρων, sc. which were 
there, Mt. xxi. 8; τῷ ἱερεῖ, to the priest whose duty it 
will be to examine thee, when thou comest, Mt. viii. 4; 
Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; τὸ πλοῖον, the ship which stood 
ready to carry them over, Mt. viii. 23 [R G T, cf. 18]; 
ix. 1 [RG]; xiii. 2 [R 617; τὸ ὄρος, the mountain near 
the place in question (der an Ort u. Stelle befindliche 
Berg) [but some commentators still regard τὸ ὄρος as 
used here generically or Hebraistically like ἡ ὀρεινή, the 
mountain region or the highlands, in contrast with the 
low country, (cf. Sept. Josh. xvii. 16; xx. 7; Gen. 
xix. 17, 19, etc.) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete. 
p. 111 sq.; Weiss, Matthüusevangelium, p. 129 note; and 
in Meyer's Mt. 7te Aufl.], Mt. v. 1; Mk. iii. 13; Lk. 
ix. 28; Jn. vi. 3, 15, (1 Mace. ix. 38, 40); ἡ οἰκία, the 
house in which (Jesus) was wont to lodge, Mt. ix. 10, 
28; xiii. 36; xvii. 25; ὑπὸ "τὸν μόδιον, sc. that is in the 
house, Mt. v. 15; also ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν, ibid. ; ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ, 
in the manger of the stable of the house where they 
were lodging, Lk. ii. 7 RG; ὁ ἔπαινος, the praise of 
which he is worthy, 1 Co. iv. 5; so.everywhere in the 
doxologies: ἡ δόξα, τὸ κράτος, 1 Pet. iv. 11; Rev. v. 13, 
etc. c. The article prefixed to the Plural often 
either includes all and every one of these who by the 
given name are distinguished from other things having 
a different name, — as οἱ ἀστέρες, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 
25; ai ἀλώπεκες, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58, etc. ;— or de- 
fines the class alone, and thus indicates that the whole 
class is represented by the individuals mentioned, how- 
ever many and whosoever they may be; as in of Φαρι- 
caio, of γραμματεῖς, οἱ τελῶναι, οἱ ἄνθρωποι, people, the 


ὁ 434 ὃ 


multitude, (Germ. die Leute); οἱ ἀετοί, Mt. xxiv. 28; 
τοῖς κυσίν, Mt. vii. 6. d. The article prefixed to the 
Singular sometimes so defines only the class, that all and 
every one of those who bear the name are brought to 
mind; thus, ὁ ἄνθρωπος, Mt. xv. 11; ὁ ἐθνικὸς x. τελώνης, 
Mt. xviii. 17; ὁ ἐργάτης, Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. ν. 18; ὁ μεσίτης, 
Gal. iii. 20; ὁ κληρονόμος, Gal. iv. 1; ὁ δίκαιος, Ro. i. 17; 
Heb. x. 38; τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου, the signs required 
of any one who claims to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12, 
and other exx. e. The article is prefixed to the 
nominative often put for the vocative in addresses [ef. 
W. § 29, 2; B. § 129 ἃ. 57]: χαῖρε ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδ. 
(prop. σὺ ὁ Bac., thou who art the king), Jn. xix. ὃ; ναί, ὁ 
πατήρ, Mt. xi. 26; ἄγε viv οἱ πλούσιοι, κλαύσατε, Jas. ν. 1; 
οὐρανὲ καὶ of ἅγιοι, Rey. xviii. 20; add, Mk. ν. 41; x. 47; 
Lk. xii. 32; xviii. 11, 13; Jn. viii. 10; xx. 28; Acts xiii. 
41; Ro. viii. 15; Eph. v. 14, 22, 25; vi.1,4sq.; Rev. xii. 
12. f. The Greeks employ the article, where we 
abstain from its use, before nouns denoting things that 
pertain to him who is the subject of discourse: εἶπε or 
φησὶ μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ, Acts xiv. 10 [RG]; xxvi. 24, (Prov. 
Xxvi. 25); γυνὴ προσευχομένη ... ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κε- 
φαλῇ, 1 Co. xi. 5; esp. in the expression ἔχειν τε, when 
the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an 
adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else 
which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, il a 
les épaules larges); so, ἔχειν τὴν χεῖρα ξηράν, Mt. xii. 10 
RG; Mk. iii. 1; τὸ πρόσωπον ὡς ἀνθρώπου [(Rec. ἄνθρω- 
mos) |, Rev. iv. 7; τὰ αἰσθητήρια γεγυμνασμένα, Heb. v. 
14; ἀπαράβατον τὴν ἱερωσύνην, Heb. vii. 24; τὴν κατοίκησιν 
krÀ. Mk. v. 3; τὴν εἰς ἑαυτοὺς ἀγάπην ἐκτενῆ, 1 Pet. iv. 8. 
Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron. 
αὐτοῦ, ὑμῶν, is added to the substantive: Mt.iii.4; Mk. 
viii. 17; Rev. ii. 18; 1 Pet. ii. 12, cf. Eph. i. 18; cf. W. 
$ 18, 2; [B. $125, 5]. g Proper Names some- 
times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous; cf. 
W. $ 18, 5 and 6; B. $ 124. 3 and 4; [Green p. 28 
sq.]; a. as respects names of Persons, the person 
without the article is simply named, but with the article 
is marked as either well known or as already mentioned ; 
thus we find Ἰησοῦς and ὁ 'Ins., Παῦλος and ὁ Παῦλ., etc. 
Πιλᾶτος has the article everywhere in John's Gospel and 
also in Mark's, if xv. 43 (in R GL) be excepted (but T 
Tr WH insert the article there also); Τίτος is every- 
where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons 
in the oblique cases almost always have the article, 
unless the case is made evident by a preposition: τῷ 
Ἰωσήφ, Mk. xv. 45; τὸν Ἰακὼβ καὶ rov’Hoad, Heb. xi. 20, 
and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1 
sqq.; Lk. iii. 23; but where perspicuity does not require 
the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as τῶν 
υἱῶν Ἰωσήφ, Heb. xi. 21; τῶν υἱῶν ᾿Ἐμμώρ, Acts vii. 16; 
ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ, Mt. xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; ὅταν ὄψησθε 
᾿Αβραὰμ. κ. ᾿Ισαὰκ.... καὶ πάντας τοὺς προφήτας, Lk. xiii. 
28. "The article is commonly omitted with personal 
proper names to which is added an apposition indicating 
the race, country, office, rank, surname, or something 
else, (cf. Matthiae § 274); let the foll. suffice as exx.: 





᾿Αβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν, Jn. viii. 56; Ro. iv. 1; ᾿Ιάκωβον 
τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, Mt. iv. 
215 Mapía 7 Μαγδαληνή, Mt. xxvii. 56, ete. ; ᾿ἸΙωάννης ὃ 
βαπτιστής, Mt. iii. 1; Ἡρώδης ὁ τετράρχης, Lk. ix. 7; 
᾿Ιησοῦς ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός, Mt. i. 16; Saddos δὲ ὁ καὶ 
Παῦλος 80. καλούμενος, Acts xiii. 95 Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, 
Mk. xiv. 3; Βαρτίμαιος ὁ τυφλός, Mk. x. 40 [RG]; Zaxa- 
ρίου τοῦ ἀπολομένου, Lk. xi.51. But there are excep- 
tions also to this usage: ὁ δὲ “Hpwdns ὁ τετράρχης, Lk. iii. 
19; τὸν Σαούλ, υἱὸν Kis, Acts xiii. 21; in the opening 
of the Epistles: Παῦλος ἀπόστολος, Ro. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 
1, etc. B. Proper names of countries and re- 
gions have the article far more frequently than those 
of cities and towns, for the reason that most names of 
countries, being derived from adjectives, get the force of 
substantives only by the addition of the article, as ἡ 
"Axata (but cf. 2 Co. ix. 2), ἡ Γαλατία, ἡ Γαλιλαία, ἡ 'Ira- 
Ala, ἡ ᾿Ιουδαία, ἡ Μακεδονία (but cf. Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 
5), ete. Only Αἴγυπτος, if Acts vii. 11 L T Tr WH be 
excepted, is everywhere anarthrous. ‘Phe names of 
cities, esp. when joined to prepositions, particularly ἐν, 
εἰς and ἐκ, are without the article; but we find ἀπὸ (RG 
ἐκ) τῆς Ῥώμης in Acts xviii. 2. y. Names of rivers 
and streams have the article in Mt. iii. 13; Mk. i. 5; 
Lk. iv. 1; xiii. 4; Jn. i. 28; τοῦ Κεδρών, Jn. xviii. 1 GL 
Tr mrg. 2. The article is prefixed to substan- 
tives expanded and more precisely defined by modi- 
fiers; a. to nouns accompanied by a gen. of the 
pronouns μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτῶν, αὐτῶν: Mt. 
i. 21, 25; v.45; vi. 10-12; xii.49; Mk.ix.17; Lk. vi. 
27; x.7; xvi.6; Acts xix. 22 [LT Tr WH ἡμῖν]; Ro. 
iv. 19; vi. 6, and in numberless other places; it is rarely 
omitted, as in Mt. xix. 28; Lk. i. 72; ii. 32; 2 Co. viii. 
23; Jas. v. 20, ete.; cf. B. § 127, 27. b. The pos- 
sessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος, joined to 
substantives (if Jn. iv. 34 be excepted) always take the 
article, and John generally puts them after the substan- 
tive (ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή, Jn. v. 30; ὁ λόγος ὁ σός, xvii. 17; ἡ 
κοινωνία ἡ ἡμετέρα. 1 Jn. i. 3; ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος, Jn. vii. 
6), very rarely between the article and the substantive 
(τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν, Jn. v. 47; ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχή, vii. 16; τὴν 
σὴν λαλιάν, iv. 42), yet this is always done by the other 
N. T. writ., Mt. xviii. 20; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; Acts 
xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. iii. 7, etc. c. When 
adjectives are added to substantives, either the ad- 
jective is placed between the article and the substantive, 
— as τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον, Gal. vi. 5; ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mt. 
xii. 35; τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν, Jn. vii. 24; ἡ ἀγαθὴ μέρις, Lk. 
X.42: τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα, Lk. xii. 105 Acts i. 8; ἡ αἰώνιος 
ζωή, Jn. xvii. 3, and many other exx.; —or the adjective 
preceded by an article is placed after the substantive 
with its article, as τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, Mk. iii. 29; Jn. 
xiv. 26; Actsi.16; Heb.ii.7; ix.8; x.15; ἡ ζωὴ 7 
αἰώνιος, 1 Jn. i. 2; ii. 255 ὁ ποιμὴν 6 καλός, Jn. x. 11; τὴν 
πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν, Acts xii. 10, and other exx.; — very 
rarely the adjective stands before a substantive which 
has the article, as in Acts [xiv. 10 RG]; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. 
xi. 5, [cf. B. § 125, 5; W. $20,1c.]. As to the adjec- 


ὁ 485 é 


tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own 
place. d. What has been said concerning adjec- 
tives holds true also of all other limitations added to 
substantives, as 7 Kar ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ 
παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. 
i. 185 ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, 
ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς 
εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each 
usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. E 
The noun has the article before it when a demonstra- 
tive pronoun (οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either pre- 
cedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. $ 127, 29-31]; as, 6 
ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. L Tr mrg. WH]; 
Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; ὁ vids σου 
οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless 
other exx.; οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ λαός, 
Mk. vii. 6 [ὁ A. oór. L WH mrg.]; οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου, Lk. 
xv. 24; οὗτος ὁ τελώνης, Lk. xviii. 11 [6 τελ. oór. L mrg.]; 
οὗτος ὁ λόγος, Jn. vii. 36 [ὁ Aoy. οὗτ. LT Tr WH], and 
many other exx. on ἐκεῖνος, see ἐκεῖνος, 2; on αὐτὸς ὁ 
ete., see αὐτός (I. 1 b. etc.) ; on 6 αὐτός etc., see αὐτός, 
III. 3. The neuter article prefixed to ad jec- 
tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. $ 34, 2; B. 
§ 128, 1]; as, τὸ ἀγαθόν, τὸ καλόν (which see each in its 
place); τὸ ἔλαττον, Heb. vii. 7; with a gen. added, τὸ 
γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. i. 19; τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, Ro. 
Vili. 3; τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Co. i. 25; αὐτῆς, Heb. vii. 
18; τὰ ἀόρατα τ. θεοῦ, Ro. i. 20; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης, 
2 Co. iv. 2, ete. 4. The article with cardinal nu- 
merals: εἷς one; ὁ eis the one (of two), see εἷς, 4 a. ; 
but differently 6 eis in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So 
also οἱ δύο (our the twain), Mt. xix. 5; of δέκα the (those) 
ten, and οἱ ἐννέα, Lk. xvii. 17; ἐκεῖνοι of δέκα (καὶ) ὀκτώ, 
Lk. xiii. 4. 5. The article prefixed to partici- 
ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W. 
§§ 18,3; 45, 7; B. $$ 129, 1 b.; 144, 9]; as, ὁ πειράζων, 
Mt. ἵν. 8; 1 Th. iii. 5; ὁ βαπτίζων, Mk. vi. 14 (for which 
Mt. xiv. 2 ὁ βαπτιστής); ὁ σπείρων, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii. 
5; ὁ ὀλοθρεύων, Heb. xi. 28; οἱ βαστάζοντες, Lk. vii. 14; 
οἱ βόσκοντες, Mt. viii. 33; Mk. v. 14; of ἐσθίοντες, the 
eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21; τὸ ὀφειλόμενον, Mt. xviii. 
30, 34; τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (see ὑπάρχω, 2). b. the ptep. 
with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin. 
verb; cf. B. $144, 9]: Mt. x. 40; Lk. vi. 29; xi. 23; Jn. 
xv. 23; 2 Co. i. 21; Phil. ii. 13, and very often. πᾶς ὁ 
foll. by a ptep. [W. 111 (106) ], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26; Lk. vi. 
30 [T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. art.]; xi. 10; Ro. ii. 1; 1 Co. 
xvi 16; Gal. iii. 13, etc.; μακάριος ὃ w. a ptep., Mt. v. 4 
(5), 6, 10, etc.; οὐαὶ ὑμῖν oi w. a ptep., Lk. vi. 25; the 
neut. τό with a ptep. must be resolved into that which 
[with a fin. verb], τὸ γεννώμενον, Lk. i. 35 ; τὸ γεγεννημέ- 
vov, Jn. iii. 6. c. the article with ptep. is placed in 
apposition: Mk. iii. 22; Acts xvii. 24; Eph. iii. 20; iv. 
22, 24; 2 'Tim. i. 14; 1 Pet. i. 21, etc. 6. The neut. 
τό before infinitives 8. gives them the force of 
substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [cf. W. $ 44, 2a.; 3 c.]); 
as, τὸ καθίσαι, Mt. xx. 22; Mk.x.40; τὸ θέλειν, Ro. vii. 
18; 2 Co. viii. 105 τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι, 2 Co. viii. 11, 


and other exx.; τοῦτο κρίνατε" τὸ μὴ τιθέναι krÀ. Ro. xiv. 
13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi- 
tion (ἀντὶ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, εἰς τό, etc.), see under each prep. in 
its place. b. Much more frequent in the N. T. than 
in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., esp. in the 
writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John's Gospel 
and Epistles), is the use of the gen. rod w. an inf. (and 
in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N. T.), which is 
treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the 
end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq.; W. $ 44, 4; B. 266 
(228) sqq. ‘The examples fall under the foll. classes: 
τοῦ with an inf. is put a. after words which natu- 
rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them; 
thus after ἄξιον, 1 Co. xvi. 4; ἔλαχε, Lk. i. 9 (1 S. xiv. 47); 
ἐξαποροῦμαι, 2 Co. i. 8. B. for the simple expletive 
[i. e. *complementary"] or (as it is commonly called) 
epexegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom- 
plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase, 
(where in Germ. zu is commonly used) ; thus after προ- 
Oupia, 2 Co. viii. 11; βραδεῖς, Lk. xxiv. 25; ἐλπίς, Acts 
xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [not Rec.]; ἐζήτει εὐκαιρίαν, Lk. 
xxii. 6 [not L mrg.]; ὁ καιρὸς (sc. ἐστί) τοῦ ἄρξασθαι, to 
begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17 (καιρὸν ἔχειν w. the simple inf. Heb. 
xi 15); διδόναι τὴν ἐξουσίαν, Lk. x. 19 (ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν 
with simple inf, Jn. xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); ὀφειλέται 
ἐσμέν (equiv. to ὀφείλομεν), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone, 
Gal. v. 3); ἕτοιμον εἶναι, Acts xxiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58; 
v. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 33); χρείαν 
ἔχειν, Heb. v.12; ἔδωκεν ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν kai 
ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, that they should not see . . . that they 
should not hear [cf. B. 267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8 (ἔχειν ὦτα 
elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see ods, 2); ἐπλήσθη 
6 χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν, at which she should be deliv- 
ered [cf. B. 1. c.], Lk. i. 57; ἐπλήσθ. ἡμέραι . . . τοῦ περι- 
τεμεῖν αὐτόν, that they should circumcise him [cf. B. l. c.], 
Lk.ii.21; after avévdexrov ἐστιν, Lk. xvii. 1 [so B. § 140, 
15; (W.328 (308) otherwise)]; quite unusually after 
ἐγένετο [cf. B. $ 140, 16 8.5 W. 1. c.], Acts x. 25 [Rec. 
om. art. |. y. after verbs of deciding, entreat- 
ing, exhorting, commanding, etc.: 


Θ᾽ Θ᾽ Θ᾽ 


after κρίνειν 
(see κρίνω, 4); ἐγένετο γνώμη [-μης T Tr WH (see γίνομαι, 
5e.a.)], Acts xx. 3; τὸ πρόσωπον ἐστήριξεν, Lk. ix. 51; 
συντίθεσθαι, Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5); 
προσεύχεσθαι, Jas. v. 17; παρακαλεῖν, Acts xxi. 12; ἐν- 
τέλλεσθαι, Lk. iv. 10; ἐπιστέλλειν, Acts xv. 20 (with inf. 
alone, xxi. 25[R GT, but L’Tr txt. WH here ἀποστέλ.;; B. 
270 (232)]); κατανεύειν, Lk. v. 7. δ. after verbs of 
hindering, restraining, removing, (which natu- 
rally require the genitive), and according to the well- 
known pleonasm with μή before the inf. [see μή, I. 4 a. ; 
B. § 148,13; W. 325 (305)]; thus, after κατέχω τινά, Lk. 
iv. 42; κρατοῦμαι, Lk. xxiv. 16; κωλύω, Acts x. 47; ὑπο- 
στέλλομαι, Acts xx. 20, 27; παύω, 1 Pet. iii. 10; κατα- 
παύω, Acts xiv. 18; without μή before the inf. after 
ἐγκόπτομαι, Ro. xv. 22. €. τοῦ with an inf. is added 
as a somewhat loose epexegesis: Lk. xxi. 22; Acts ix. 
15; xiii. 47; Phil. iii. 21; εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 
τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν, to the uncleanness of their bodies’ be- 


ὁ 480 ὃ 


ing dishonored, Ro. i. 24 [ef. B. § 140, 14]; W. 325 
(305) sq. f. it takes the place of an entire final 
clause, in order that [W. $44, 4 b.; B. $140, 17]; esp. 
after verbs implying motion: Mt. ii. 13; iii. 13; xiii. 3; 
xxiv. 45; Mk. iv. 3 (where LT WH om. Tr br. τοῦ); Lk. 
i. 77, 79; ii. 24, 97; v. 1 [R GL txt. Trmrg.]; viii. 5; 
xii. 42 (here Lom. Tr br. τοῦ); xxii. 31; xxiv. 29; Acts 
iii. 2; xx. 80; xxvi. 18; Ro. vi. 6; xi. 10; Gal. iii. 10; 
Phil. iii. 10; Heb. x. 7,9; xi. 5. T. used of result, 
so that: Acts vii. 19; Ro. vii. 3; after ποιῶ, to cause that, 
make to, Acts iii. 12; [cf. W. 326 (306); B. § 140, 
16 à.]. 7. The article with adverbs [B. $ 125, 
10 sq.; W. $18, 3], a. gives them the force of sub- 
stantives; as, τὸ πέραν, the region beyond; τὰ dvo, rà 
κάτω, τὸ νῦν, rà ἔμπροσθεν, rà ὀπίσω, etc.; see these 
words in their proper places. b. is used when they 
stand adjectively, as ἡ ἄνω Ἱερουσαλήμ, 6 τότε κόσμος, ὁ 
ἔσω ἄνθρωπος, ὁ νῦν αἰών, etc., on which see these several 
words. c. the neut. τό is used in the ace. absol., esp. 
in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, τὸ 
πάλιν, 2 Co. xiii. 2; τὰ νῦν or τανῦν, and with neuter ad- 
jectives used adverbially, as τὸ λοιπόν, τὸ πρότερον (Jn. 
vi. 62; Gal. iv. 13); τὸ πρῶτον (Jn. x. 40; xii. 16; xix. 
39); τὸ πλεῖστον (1 Co. xiv. 27); see these words them- 
selves. 8. The article before pre positions with 
their cases is very often so used that ὦν, ὄντες, ὄντα, 
must be supplied in thought [cf. B. $ 125, 9; W.§ 18,3]; 
thus, of ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης, Acts xvii. 13; 
Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. $ 66, 6]; ὁ ἔν τινι, Mt. vi. 9; Ro. 
viii. 1; neut. rà πρός, Mk. ii. 2; oí ἔκ τινος, Ro. ii. 8; iv. 
14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 etc.; οἱ παρά τινος, Mk. iii. 21 (see 
παρά, 1. e.). τὰ περί twos, Lk. xxiv. 19; Acts xxiv. 10; 
Phil. i. 27; [add, τὰ (T Tr WH τὸ) περὶ ἐμοῦ, Lk. xxii. 
37], ete. (see περί, I. b. B.) ; τὰ περί τινα, Phil. ii. 23 [see 
περί, 11. b.]; of μετά twos, those with one, his compan- 
ions, Mt. xii. 3; οἱ περί τινα, and many other exx. which 
are given under the several prepositions. the neut. τό 
in the acc. absol. in adverbial expressions [cf. W. 230 
(216); B. $8125, 12; 131, 9]: τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, day 
by day, Lk. xi. 3; xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [RG WH br.]; 
τὸ καθόλου, at all, Acts iv. 18 [LT ΝῊ om. τό]; besides, 
in τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on 
the force of the art. here see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. 
Lit. ete. for 1883, p. 108]; τὰ κατ᾽ ἐμέ, as respects what 
relates to me, my state, my affairs, Col. iv. 7; Eph. vi. 
21; τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18; 
τὸ ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν, as far as respects you, if I regard you, Ro. 
xvi. 19 RG; rà πρὸς (τὸν) θεόν, acc. absol, as respects 
the things pertaining to God, i. e. in things pertaining 
to God, Ro. xv. 17; 
θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, Xen. resp. 
Laced. 13, 11; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 262 sq.) ; 
τὸ ἐκ μέρους sc. ὄν, that which has been granted us in 
part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. xiii. 10. 9. 
The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni- 
tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some 
kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen- 
eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing 


Heb. ii. 17; v. 1, (ἱερεῖ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς 





[ef. W. § 30, 3; B. $125, 7]; a. the masc. and the 
fem. article: Ἰάκωβος 6 τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, ὁ τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου, 
the son, Mt. x. 2 (3), 3; Μαρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου, the 
mother, Mk. xvi. 1 [T om. Tr br. rov]; Lk. xxiv. 10 [L 
T Tr WH]; Ἐμμὸρ τοῦ Συχέμ, of Hamor, the father of 
Shechem, Acts vii. 16 RG; ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου, the wife, Mt. 
i. 6; of Χλόης, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes- 
ties, or work-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co. i. 11; also 
οἱ ᾿Αριστοβούλου, οἱ Ναρκίσσου, Ro. xvi. 10 sq.; of τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, the followers of Christ [A. V. they that are 
Christ's], 1 Co. xv. 23 GL T Tr WH; Gal. v. 24; of τῶν 
Φαρισαίων, the disciples of the Pharisees, Mk. ii. 18* Rec., 
18 R G L; Καισαρεία ἡ Φιλίππου, the city of Philip, Mk. 
viii. 27. b. τό and rd τινος : as rà τοῦ θεοῦ, the cause 
or interests, the purposes, of God, opp. to rà τῶν ἀνθρώ- 
πων, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; in the same sense rà τοῦ 
κυρίου, Opp. to rà τοῦ κόσμον, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; τὰ τῆς 
capkós, τὰ ToU πνεύματος, Ro. viii. 5; rà ὑμῶν, your pos- 
sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14; ζητεῖν τό or τά τινος, 1 Co. x. 24; 
xiii. 5; Phil. ii. 21; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, τῆς οἰκοδομῆς, which 
make for, Ro. xiv. 19; rà τῆς ἀσθενείας μου, which per- 
tain to my weakness, 2 Co. xi. 30; τὰ Καίσαρος, rà 
ToU θεοῦ, due to Cesar, due to God, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. 
xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25; τὰ τοῦ νηπίου, the things wont 
to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 11; ra 
twos, the house of one (rà Λύκωνος, Theocr. 2, 76; [eis 
τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ, Lysias c. Eratosth. $ 12 p. 195]; cf. ἐν 
τοῖς πατρικοῖς, in her father's house, Sir. xlii. 10; [Chry- 
sost. hom. lii. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. col. 
458 ed. Migne; Gen. xli. 51; Esth. vii. 9, (Hebr. 173); 
Job xviii. 19 (Hebr. 512)]); with the name of a deity, 
the temple (rà τοῦ Διός, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 18, 2; also τὸ 
τοῦ Διός, Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167, 
15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 100). 
τὰ τοῦ νόμου, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii. 
14; τὸ τῆς παροιμίας, the (saying) of (that which is said 
in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22; τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομένων, 
what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viii. 
33; τὸ τῆς συκῆς, what has been done to the fig-tree, Mt. 
xxi. 21. 10. The neuter τό is put a. before 
entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception 
[B. § 125, 13; W. 109 (103 sq.)]: εἶπεν αὐτῷ τό Ei δύνα- 
σαι πιστεῦσαι, said to him this: ‘If thou canst believe’, 
Mk. ix. 23 [but L T Tr WH τό Εἰ δύνῃ * If thou canst!']; 
cf. Bleek ad loe.; [Riddell, The Apology etc. Digest of 
Idioms 8.19 .]. before the sayings and precepts of the 
O. T. quoted in the New: τό Οὐ φονεύσεις, the precept, 
‘Thou shalt not kill’, Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37 
(where Lehm. ὅτε for 76); Ro. xiii. 9; [1 Co. iv. 6 LT 
Tr WH]; Gal. v.14. before indir. questions: τὸ τίς etc., 
τὸ τί etc., τὸ was etc., Lk. i. 62; ix.46; xix. 48; xxii. 2, 
4, 23 sq.; Actsiv.21; xxii. 30; Ro. viii. 26; 1 Th. iv. 1; 
cf. Matthiae § 280; Krüger § 50, 6, 10; Passow ii. 
p. 395^; [L. and S. s. v. B. I. 3 sq. ]. b. before single 
words which are explained as parts of some discourse 
or statement [reff. as above]: 7d”Ayap, the name "Ayap, 
Gal. iv. 25 [T L txt. WH mrg. om. Tr br. "Ayap]; TÓ 
* dvé8n’, this word ἀνέβη, Eph. iv. 9, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 


ὀγδοήκοντα 


Gal. 1. 6.7; τὸ “ἔτι ἅπαξ᾽, Heb. xii. 27; cf. Matthiae ii. 
p. 731 sq. 11. We find the unusual expression 7 
οὐαί (apparently because the interjection was to the 
writer a substitute for the term ἡ πληγή or ἡ θλίψις [W. 
179 (169) ]), misery, calamity, ( A. V. the Woe], in Rev. 
ix. 125 xi. 14. 

Iil. Since it is the business, not of the lexicographer, 
but of the grammarian, to exhibit the instances in which 
the article is omitted in the N. T. where according to the 
laws of our language it would have been expected, we 
refer those interested in this matter to the Grammars of 
Winer ($ 19) and Alex. Buttmann (§ 124, 8) [cf. also 
Green ch. ii. $ iii. ; Middleton, The Doctrine of the Greek 
Article (ed. Rose) pp. 41 sqq., 94 sq.; and, particularly 
with reference to Granville Sharp's doctrine (Remarks 
on the uses of the Def. Art. in the Grk. Text of the N. T., 
3d ed. 1803), a tract by C. Winstanley (A Vindication 
ete.) republished at Cambr. 1819], and only add the foll. 
remarks : 1. More or less frequently the art. is 
wanting before appellatives of persons or things of which 
only one of the kind exists, so that the art. is not needed 
to distinguish the individual from others of the same 
kind, as ἥλιος, γῆ. θεός, Χριστός, πνεῦμα ἅγιον, ζωὴ αἰώνιος, 
θάνατος, νεκροί (of the whole assembly of the dead [see 
νεκρός, 1 b. p. 423"]) ; and also of those persons and 
things which the connection of discourse clearly shows 
to be well-defined, as νόμος (the Mosaic law [see νόμος, 
2 p. 428*]), κύριος, πατήρ. υἱός, ἀνήρ (husband), γυνή 
(wife), ete. 2. Prepositions which with their cases 
designate a state and condition, or a place, or a mode 
of acting, usually have an anarthrous noun after them; 
as, εἰς φυλακήν, ἐν φυλακῇ, eis ἀέρα, ἐκ πίστεως, κατὰ 
σάρκα, ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι, παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, ἀπ᾽ ἀγορᾶς, ἀπ᾽ ἀγροῦ, ἐν 
ἀγρῷ, εἰς ὁδόν, ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρώδου, εἰς ἡμέραν ἀπολυτρώ- 
σεως, and numberless other examples. 

ὀγδοήκοντα, eighty: Lk. ii. 37; xvi. 7. [(Thuc., al.)] * 

ὄγδοος, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], the eighth: Lk. i. 59; 
Acts vii. 8; Rev. xvii. 11; xxi. 20; one who has seven 
other companions, who with others is the eighth, 2 Pet. ii. 
5; so δέκατος, with nine others, 2 Mace. v. 27; cf. Matthiae 
§ 469,9; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 72 sq. and 720sq.; W. § 37, 
2; [B. 30 (26)].* 

ὄγκος, -ov, 6, (apparently fr. ETKQ, ἐνεγκεῖν, i. 4. φόρτος, 
see Buttmann, Lexil. i. 288 sqq. [Fishlake’s trans. p. 
151 sq.], whatever is prominent, protuberance, bulk, mass, 
hence), a burden, weight, encumbrance: Heb. xii.1. (In 
many other uses in Grk. writ. of all ages.) * 

[Syn. ὄγκος, βάρος, φορτίον: B. refers to weight, o. to 
bulk, and either may be oppressive (contra Tittmann); 8. a 
load in so far as it is heavy, φορτίον a burden in so far as it 
is borne; hence the gopr. may be either ‘heavy’ (Mt. xxiii. 
4; Sir. xxi. 16), or ‘light’ (Mt. xi. 30).] 

ὅδε. ἥδε, τόδε, (fr. the old demonstr. pron. 6, 4, τό, and 
the enclit. δέ), [fr. Hom. down], this one here, Lat. hicce, 
haecce, hocce; a. it refers to what precedes: Lk. x. 
39 and Rec. in xvi. 25; τάδε πάντα, 2 Co. xii. 19 Grsb.; 
to what follows: neut. plur. τάδε, these (viz. the following) 
things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken, Acts 


437 


ὁδός 


xv. 23 RG; τάδε λέγει ete., Acts xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 
18; ii.1, 7, 14. b. εἰς τήνδε τὴν πόλιν, [where we say 
into this or that city] (the writer not knowing what par- 
ticular city the speakers he introduces would name), Jas. 
iv. 13 (cf. W. 162 (153), who adduces as similar τήνδε 
τὴν ἡμέραν, Plut. symp. 1, 6, 1; [but see Lünemann's ad- 
dition to Win. and esp. B. $127, 2]).* 

ὁδεύω; (ὁδός) ; to travel, journey: Lk. x. 33. (Hom. 
Il. 11, 569; Xen. an. 7, 8, 8; Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 2; b. j. 
3, 6,3; Hdian. 7,3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]; Plut., al.; Tob. vi. 
6.) [Comp.: 8t συν-οδεύω.} * 

ὁδηγέω, -ó; fut. ὁδηγήσω; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. 
ὁδηγήσῃ : (ὁδηγός, q. v.) ; Sept. chiefly for rim, also for 
Tom, Tom, ete-; a. prop. to be a guide, lead on 
one's way, to guide: twa, Mt. xv. 14; Lk. vi. 39; τινὰ ἐπί 
τι, Rev. vii. 17; (Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Alciphr., Babr., 
al.). b. trop. to be a guide or teacher; to give guid- 
ance to: τινά, Acts viii. 31 (Plut. mor. 954 b.); eis τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν, Jn. xvi. 13 [RG L Tr WH txt. (see below)] 
(ὁδήγησόν pe ἐπὶ τὴν ἀλήθειάν cov καὶ δίδαξόν pe, Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 5 [foll by eis and πρός in * Teaching of the 
Apostles” ch. 3]) ; foll. by ἐν νυ. dat. of the thing in which 
one gives guidance, instruction or assistance to another, 
ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, Jn. xvi. 13 T WH mrg. [see above] (687- 
γησόν pe ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ σου k. πορεύσομαι ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ aov, Ps. 
Ixxxv. (Ixxxvi.) 11; ef. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 35; Sap. ix. 11; 
gms 

ὁδηγός, -o), 6, (ὁδός and ἡγέομαι; cf. χορηγός): a leader 
of the way, a guide; a. prop.: Acts i. 16 (Polyb. 5, 
5,15; Plnt. Alex. 27; 1 Mace. iv. 2; 2Maec.v.15). b. 
in fig. and sententious discourse 68. τυφλῶν, i. e. like one 
who is literally so called, namely a teucher of the ignorant 
and inexperienced, Ro. ii. 19 ; plur. 68. τυφλοὶ τυφλῶν, i. e. 
like blind guides in the literal sense, in that, while them- 
selves destitute of a knowledge of the truth, they offer 
themselves to others as teachers, Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 16, 24.* 

ὁδοιπορέω, -@; (ὁδοιπόρος a wayfarer, traveller); to 
travel, journey: Acts x. 9. (IIdt., Soph., Xen., Ael. v. 
h. 10, 4; Hdian. 7, 9, 1, al.) * 

ὁδοιπορία, -as, ἡ, (ὁδοιπόρος), a journey, journeying: Jn. 
iv.6; 2Co. xi. 26. (Sap. xiii. 18; xviii. 3; 1 Macc. vi. 41; 
Hdt., Xen., Diod. 5, 29; Hdian. al.) * 

ὁδο-ποιέω, -ῶ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down, to make a 
road ; to level, make passable, smooth, open, a way; and 
so also in the Sept.: ὡδοποίησε τρίβον τῇ ὀργῇ αὐτοῦ, for 
Dba, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; for 270, to construct a level 
way by casting up an embankment, Job xxx. 12; Ps. Ixvii. 
(Ixviii.) 5; for 1123, Ps. xxix. (Ixxx.) 10; for 977 733, 
Ts. Ixii. 10; — and so, at least apparently, in Mk. ii. 23 
L Tr mrg. WH mrg. [see ποιέω, 1. 1 a. and c.] (with ὁδόν 
added, Xen. anab. 4, 8, 8).* 

ὁδός, -οὔ, 7, [appar. fr. τ. EA to go (Lat. adire, accedere), 
allied w. Lat. solum ; Curtius $ 281]; Sept. numberless 
times for 377, less frequently for Nis; [fr. Hom. down]; 
a ways 1. prop. a. a travelled way, road: 
Mt. ii. 12; vii. 13 sq. ; xiii. 4, 19; Mk. iv. 4, 15; x. 46; 
Lk. viii. 5, 12; x. 31; xviii. 35; xix. 36; Acts viii. 26; 
ix. 17; Jas. ii. 25, ete.; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν (as ye pass along 


ὁδός 


the way [see κατά, II. 1 a.]) by the way, on the way, Lk. 
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; σαββάτου ὁδός, 
[A. V. a sabbath-day’s journey] the distance that one is 
allowed to travel on the sabbath, Acts i. 12 (see σάββατον, 
la.) ἡ ὁδός with a gen. of the object, the way leading 
to a place (the Hebr. 1*3 also is construed with a gen., 
cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 676 [Gr. $112, 2; cf. W.§ 30, 
2]): ἐθνῶν, Mt. x. 5; τῶν ἁγίων into the holy place, Heb. 
ix. 8, cf. x. 20, where the grace of God is symbolized by 
a way, ef. (áo, II. b., (rod ξύλου, Gen. iii. 24; Αἰγύπτου 
. ᾿Ασσυρίων, Jer. ii. 18; γῆς Φιλιστιείμ, Ex. xiii. 17; 
τοῦ Σινᾶ, Judith v. 14; Lat. via mortis, Tibull. 1, 10, 4; cf. 
Kiihner ii. p. 286,4). in imitation of the Hebr. 353, the 
aec. of which takes on almost the nature of a preposition, 
in the way to, towards, (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 352"), we 
find ὁδὸν θαλάσσης in Mt. iv. 15 fr. Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1), (so 
ὁδὸν [τῆς θαλάσσης, 1 K. xviii. 43]; γῆς αὐτῶν, 1 K. viii. 
48; 2 Chr. vi. 38; ὁδὸν δυσμῶν ἡλίου, Deut. xi. 30; more- 
over, once with the acc., ὁδὸν θάλασσαν ἐρυθράν, Num. 
xiv. 25; [Deut. ii. 1]; ef. Thiersch, De Alex. Pentateuchi 
versione, p. 145 sq.; [B. § 131, 12]). with a gen. of the 
subject, the way in which one walks: ἐν rais ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν, 
Ro. iii. 16 ; ἑτοιμάζειν τὴν ὁδὸν τῶν βασιλέων, Rev. xvi. 
12; in metaph. phrases, κατευθύνειν τὴν ὁδόν τινος, to re- 
move the hindrances to the journey, 1 Th. iii. 11; ἑτοι- 
μάζειν (and εὐθύνειν, Jn. i. 23; κατασκευάζειν, Mt. xi. 10; 
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27) τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ κυρίου, see ἑτοιμάζω. 
b. atraveller's way, journey, travelling : ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, on the 
journey, on the road, Mt. v. 25; xv. 32; xx. 17; Mk. viii. 
27; ix. 38: x. 82, 52; Lk. xii. 58; xxiv. 32, 35; Acts ix. 
21; ἐξ ὁδοῦ, from a journey, Lk. xi. 6; αἴρειν or κτᾶσθαί 
τι εἰς ὁδόν, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8, and eis τὴν ὁδόν, Lk. ix. 
3; πορεύομαι τὴν ὁδόν, to make a journey (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 
22), w. αὐτοῦ added [A. V. to go on one's way], to con- 
tinue the journey undertaken, Acts viii. 39; ὁδὸς ἡμέρας, 
a journey requiring a (single) day for its completion, 
used also, like our a day's journey, as a measure of dis- 
tance, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxx. 36; xxxi. 23; Ex. iii. 18; 
Judith ii.21; 1 Mace. v. 24; vii. 45; ἀπέχειν παμπόλλων 
ἡμερῶν ὁδόν, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3, cf. Hdt. 4, 101 LW. 188 
(177)]); on the phrase ὁδὸν ποιεῖν, Mk. ii. 23 see ποιέω, 
I. 1 a. and c. 2. Metaph. a. according to the 
familiar fig. of speech, esp. freq. in Hebr. [cf. W. 32] and 
not unknown to the Greeks, by which an action is 
spoken of as a proceeding (cf. the Germ. Wandel), ὁδός 
denotes a course of conduct, a way (i. e. manner) of think- 
ing, feeling, deciding: a person is said ὁδὸν δεικνύναι τινί, 
who shows him how to obtain a thing, what helps he 
must use, 1 Co. xii. 31; with a gen. of the obj., i. e. of 
the thing to be obtained, εἰρήνης, Ro. iii. 17; ζωῆς. Acts 
ii. 28; σωτηρίας, Acts xvi. 17; with a gen. of the subj., τῆς 
δικαιοσύνης. the way which ἡ δικαιοσ. points out and which 
is wont to characterize ἡ δικ., so in Mt. xxi. 32 (on which 
see δικαιοσύνη, 1 b. p. 149* bot.) ; used of the Christian 
religion, 2 Pet. ii. 21; likewise τῆς ἀληθείας, ibid. 2; with 


gen. of the person deciding and acting, Jas. v. 20; rod | 


Κάϊν, Jude 11; τοῦ Βαλαάμ, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ἐν πάσαις ταῖς 
ὁδοῖς αὐτοῦ, in all his purposes and actions, Jas. 1. 8; τὰς 


438 





ὄζω 


ὁδούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ, the methods which I as Christ’s min- 
ister and apostle follow in the discharge of my office, 1 Co. 
iv. 17; those are said πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν [to walk 
in their own wajs]who take the course which pleases them, 
even though it be a perverse one, Acts xiv. 16 [on the dat. 
see πορεύω, sub fin.]; ai ὁδοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ or κυρίου, the purposes 
and ordinances of God, his ways of dealing with men, 
Acts xiii. 10; Ro. xi. 33; Rev. xv. 3, (Hos. xiv. 9; Ps. 
xciv. (xev.) 10; exliv. (exlv.) 17; Sir. xxxix. 24; Tob. 
iii. 2, etc.). ἡ ὁδὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, the course of thought, feel- 
ing, action, prescribed and approved by God: Mt. xxii. 
16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21; used of ‘the Christian re- 
ligion, Acts xviii. 26; also ἡ 6. τοῦ κυρίου, ibid. 25; ὁδός 
used generally of a method of knowing and worshipping 
God, Acts xxii. 4; xxiv. 14; ἡ ὁδός simply, of the Chris- 
tian religion [cf. B. 163 (142)], Acts ix. 2; xix. 9, 23; 
xxiv. 22. ^ b. in the saying of Christ, ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ 6865 [ 
am the way by which one passes, i. e. with whom all who 
seek approach to God must enter into closest fellowship, 
Jn. xiv. 6. [On the omission of ὁδός in certain formulas 
and phrases (Lk. v. 19; xix. 4), see W. 590 (549) sq.; B. 
$123, 8; Bos, Ellipses ete. (ed. Schaefer) p. 331 sq.] 

ὀδούς, [ace. to Etym. Magn. 615, 21 (Pollux 6, 38) fr. 
ἔδω, Lat. edere, ete., cf. Curtius $ 289; al. fr. root da to 
divide, cf. δαίω, Odkvo; (Lat. dens); Fick i. p. 100], 
-óvros, ὁ, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for jw; a tooth: Mt. v. 
38; Mk. ix. 18; Acts vii. 54; plur. Rev. ix. 8° 6 βρυγμὸς 
τῶν ὀδόντων, see βρυγμός." 

óbvváo, -ὦ : pres. indic. pass. ὀδυνῶμαι ; pres. ind. mid. 
2 pers. sing. ὀδυνᾶσαι (see κατακαυχάομαι), ptep. ὀδυνώμε- 
vos; (ὀδύνη) ; to cause intense pain; pass. to be in anguish, 
be tormented : Lk. xvi. 24 sq. ; mid. to torment or distress 
one's self, [A. V. to sorrow], Lk. ii. 48; ἐπί τινι, Acts xx. 
38. (Arstph., Soph., Eur., Plat., al.; Sept.) * 

ὀδύνη, [perh. allied w. &8e ; consuming grief; cf. Lat. 
curae edaces ], τῆς, 1), pain, sorrow: Ro. ix. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 10. 
(From Hom. down; Sept.) * 

ὀδυρμός, -ov, 6, (ὀδύρομαι to wail, lament, [see κλαίω, 
fin.]), @ wailing, lamentation, mourning: Mt. ii. 18 (fr. 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15 for Ὁ) 211); 2 Co. vii. 7. (2 
Mace. xi. 6; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat. Joseph., Plut., Ael. 
v. h. 14, 22.) * 

Ὀζίας (L T Tr WI 'O£eías [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; 
WH. App. p. 155, and see et, «]), του [but cf. B. 18 (16)], 
6, (my and sry strength of Jehovah, or my strength 
is Jehovah), Ozias or Uzziah, son of Amaziah, king of 
Judah, [e.] B.c. 811-759 (2 K. xv. 30 sqq.) : Mt. i. 8 sq., 
where the Evangelist ought to have preserved this order: 
Ἰωράμ. 'Oxottas, Ἰωάς, ᾿Αμαζίας, 'Ot(as. He seems 
therefore to have confounded 'Oyotías and 'O£ías; see 
another example of [apparent] confusion under Ἰεχονίας. 
[But Matthew has simply omitted three links; such 
omissions were not uncommon, cf. e.g. 1 Chr. vi. 3 sqq. 
and Ezra vii. 1sqq. See the commentators.] * 

oto; [fr. root 68, cf. Lat. and Eng. odor ete. ; Curtius 

§ 288]; fr. Hom. down; to give out an odor (either good 
or bad), to smell, emit a smell: of a decaying corpse, Jn. 
xi. 89; cf. Ex. viii. 14.* 


ὅθεν 


ὅθεν, (fr. the rel. pron. à and the enclitic ev which de- | 
notes motion from a place), [fr. Hom. down], adv., from | 
which; whence; it is used a. of the place from which: | 
Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; Acts xiv. 26; xxviii. 13; by at- 
traction for ἐκεῖθεν ὅπου etc., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; cf. D. $143. 
12; [W. 159 (150)]. b. of the source from which a 
thing is known, from which, whereby: 1 Jn. ii. 18. c. 
of the cause from which, for which reason, wherefore, on 
which account, [ A. V. whereupon (in the first two in- 
stances)]: Mt. xiv. 7; Acts xxvi 19; Heb. ii. 17; iii. 
1; vii. 25; viii. 3; ix. 185 xi. 19; often in the last three 
books of Macc.* 

ὀθόνη, -ης, 7, [fr. Hom. down]; a. linen [i. e. fine 
white linen for women’s clothing; ef. Vanicek, Fremd- 
worter, s. v. ]. b. linen cloth (sheet or sail); so Acts 
Kees xs Ὁ: A 

ὀθόνιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ὀθόνη, q. V-), a piece of linen, | 
small linen cloth: plur. strips of linen eloth for swathing | 
the dead, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the 
vs.]; Jn. xix. 40; xx. 5-7. (In Grk. writ. of ships’ sails 
made of linen, bandages for wounds, and other articles ; 
Sept. for 710, Judg. xiv. 13; for AAWS or Nw, Hos. ii. 
5 (7), 9 (11).)* 

οἶδα, see εἴδω, II. p. 174. 

οἰκειακός, -7, -óv, see οἰκιακός. 

οἰκεῖος, -a, -ov, (οἶκος), fr. Hes. down, belonging to a 
house or family, domestic, intimate: belonging to one's 
household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8; οἰκεῖοι 
tov θεοῦ, belonging to God's household, i. e. to the theoc- 
racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the 
thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, ot οἰκεῖοι 
τῆς πίστεως, professors of the (Christian) faith, Gal. vi. 
10 [but al. associate this pass. with that fr. Eph. as above; 
see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; so otk. φιλοσοφίας, Strab. 1 p. 
13 b. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.]; γεωγραφίας, p. 25 a. [1, 34,ed. 
Sieben.]; ὀλιγαρχίας, Diod. 13, 91; τυραννίδος, 19, 70. 
(Sept. for 1sw related by blood; 737, 1 S. x. 14 sqq.; 
TRU, consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 17; oik. τοῦ σπέρματος 
for 73, Is. lviii. 7.) * 

οἰκέτεια [ al. -εία, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq. ], -as, 4, (οἰκέτης; 
q. v-), household i. e. body of servants (Macrob., Appul. 
famulitium, Germ. Dienerschaft) : Mt. xxiv. 45 L T Tr 
WH. (Strab., Lcian., Inserr.; plur. Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 
3.)* 

οἰκέτης, του, 0, (οἰκέω), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down, 
Lat. domesticus, i. e. one who lives in the same house with 
another, spoken of all who are under the authority of 
one and the same householder, Sir. iv. 30; vi. 11, esp. 
a servant, domestic ; so in Lk. xvi. 13; Acts x. 7; Ro. xiv. 
4; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Sept.for t2y. See more fully on the 
word, Meyer on Rom. l. c. [where he remarks that oix. 
is a more restricted term than δοῦλος, designating a 
house-servant, one holding closer relations to the family 
than other slaves; ef. διάκονος fin., and Trench § ix.]* 

olkéo, -; (οἶκος) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 35^, a few 
times for 131 ; Lat. habito, [trans.] to dwell in: τί (Hat. 
and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 16; [intrans. to dwell], 
pera τινος. with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii. 











439 


> , 
οἰκοδομέω 


12 sq.; trop. ἔν τινε, to be fixed and operative in one's 
soul: of sin, Ro. vii. 17 sq. 20; of the Holy Spirit, Ro. 
viii. [9], 11; 1 Co. iii. 16. 
Tap-, περι-; συν-οικέω.] * 

οἴκημα, -ros, τό, fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down, a dwelling- 
place, habitation; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. cell], 
Acts xii. 7, as in Thuc. 4, 47 sq.; Dem., Leian. Tox. 29; 
Plut. Agis 19; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.* 

οἰκητήριον. -ov, τό, (οἰκητήρ), « dwelling-place, habita- 
tion: Jude 6; of the body as the dwelling-place of the 
spirit, 2 Co. v. 2 (2 Mace. xi. 2; 3 Mace. ii. 15; [Joseph. 
c. Ap. 1, 20, 7]; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).* 

οἰκία, -as, 7, (οἶκος), Sept. for ma, [fr. Hdt. down], a 
house; a. prop. an inhabited edifice, a dwelling: Mt. 
li. 11; vii. 24-27; Mk.i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3; Acts 
iv. 34; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often; οἱ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 
se. ὄντες, Mt. v. 15; οἱ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας with gen. of pers., 
Phil. iv. 22; ἡ οἰκία τοῦ (πατρός pov) θεοῦ, i. 6. heaven, 
Jn. xiv. 2; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2 
Co. v. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii. 
25; ἡ οἰκία τινός, the household, the family of any one, 
Jn. iv. 53; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [cf. W. $58, 4; B. $129, 8a.]; 
univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. e. 
property, wealth, goods, [c£. Lat. res familiaris]: τινός, Mt. 
xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. [cf. Wetst. ad loc.]; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. 
xx. 47; so οἶκος in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 κατέδουσι βιαίως 
οἶκον ᾿Οδυσσῆος, cf. 4, 318), in Hdt. 3, 53 and in Attic; 
Hebr. 73, Gen. xlv. 18 (Sept. rà ὑπάρχοντα) ; Esth. viii. 
1 (Sept. ὅσα ὑπῆρχεν). Not found in Rev. [Syn. see 
οἶκος. fin. ] 

οἰκιακός (in prof. auth. and in some N. T. codd. also 


[Comp.: fév. κατ-, ἐν-κατ-, 


| οἰκειακός [ οἷ. et, c] fr. οἶκος), -00, 6, (οἰκία), one belonging to 


the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the 
master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x. 
36; opp. to ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης, ib. 25. (Plut. Cic. 20.) * 

οἰκο-δεσποτέω, -ῶ; (οἰκοδεσπότης) ; tobe master (or head) 
of a house; to rule a household, manage family affairs: 1 
Tim. v. 14. (A later Grk. word; see Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 373.) * 

οἰκο-δεσπότης, -ov, 6, (οἶκος. δεσπότης), master of a house, 
householder: Mt.x. 25; xiii. 27; xx. 11; xxiv.43; Mk. 
xiv. 14; Lk. xii. 39; xiii. 25 ; xiv. 21; ἄνθρωπος οἰκοδ. (see 
ἄνθρωπος. 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 15 xxi. 33; οἰκοδεσπ. τῆς 
οἰκίας, Lk. xxii. 11, on this pleonasm ef. Bornemann, Schol. 
ad loc.; W. § 65, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent. 
B. C. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21; Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 11, 8; Plut. 
quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. 6. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
373 shows that the earlier Greeks said οἴκου Or οἰκίας 
δεσπότης.) * 

οἰκοδομέω, -9; impf. φκοδόμουν ; fut. οἰκοδομήσω ; 1 aor. 
φκοδόμησα [oix. Tr WH in Acts vii. 47; see Tdf. ad loc.; 
Proleg. p.120; WH. App. p. 161; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153; 
W. $12, 4; B. 34 (30)]; Pass., [pres. οἰκοδομοῦμαι (inf. 
-μεῖσθαι, Lk. vi. 48 Tres.) ; pf.inf. οἰκοδομῆσθαι (Lk. vi. 
48 T WH)]; plupf. 3 pers. sing. ὠκοδόμητο; 1 aor. dxodo- 
μήθην [oix. T WH in Jn. ii. 20]; 1 fut. οἰκοδομηθήσομαι ; 
(οἰκοδόμος, q. v.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 33; to build 
a house, erect a building; a. prop. a. to build (up 


οἰκοδομὴ 


from the foundation): absol., Lk. xi.48 GT WH Trtxt.; 
xiv. 30; xvii. 28; οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, subst., the builders [cf. 
W. $45, 7; B. § 144, 11], Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. 
xx. 17; Actsiv. 11 Rec.; 1 Pet. ii. 7, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 
22; ἐπ᾿ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον, to build upon a foundation 
laid by others, i. e. (without a fig.) to carry on instruction 
begun by others, Ro. xv. 20; οἰκοδομεῖν τι, Gal. ii. 18; 
πύργον, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 28; ἀποθήκας, 
Lk. xii. 18; ναόν, Mk. xiv. 58; pass. Jn. ii. 20 [on the aor. 
cf. 2 Esdr. v. 16]; οἶκον, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 ([here T ἐποικ., 
cf. W. 603 (561), and add oixovpyeiv rà κατὰ τὸν οἶκον, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3); [οἰκίαν, Lk. vi. 48 (cf. W.1.c.)]; 
συναγωγήν or οἶκόν τινι; for the use of or in honor of one, 
Lk. vii. 5; Acts vii. 47, 49, (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ; 
οἰκίαν ἐπί τι, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi. 49; πόλιν ἐπ᾽ ὄρους, 
Lk. iv. 29. β. contextually i. q. to restore by building, to 
rebuild, repair: τί, Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk. 
xv. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [Lbr. Trmrg.] in 48. b. 
metaph. a. i. q.to found: ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω 
μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, i. 6. by reason of the strength of thy 
faith thou shalt be my principal support in the establish- 
ment of my church, Mt. xvi. 18. β. Since both a Chris- 
tian chureh and individual Christians are likened 
to a building or temple in which God or the Holy Spirit 
dwells (1 Co. iii. 9, 16 sqq. ; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21), the 
erection of which temple will not be completely finished till 
the return of Christ from heaven, those who, by action, 
instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian 
wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent 
life are regarded as taking part in the erection of that 
building, and hence are said οἰκοδομεῖν, i. e. (dropping the 
fiz.) to promote growth in Christian wisdom, affection, grace, 
virtue, holiness, blessedness: absol, Acts xx. 32 LTTr 
WH; 1 Co. viii. 1; x. 23; τιψά, xiv.4; 1 Th. v. 11; pass. 
to grow in wisdom, piety, etc., Acts ix. 31; 1 Co. xiv. 17; 
univ. to give one strength and courage, dispose to: eis τὴν 
πίστιν, Polyc. ad. Philip. 3, 2 [yet here to be built up into 
(in) ete.]; even to do what is wrong [A. V. embolden], 
εἰς τὸ τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα ἐσθίειν, 1 Co. viii. 10 [cf. W. § 39, 3 
N. 3]. This metaphorical use of the verb Paul, in the 
opinion of Fritzsche (Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 205 sq.), did not 
derive from the fig. of building a temple, but from the 
O. T., where “i733 and 077 with an aec. of the pers. (to 
build one up and to pull one down) denote to bless and to 
ruin, to‘prosper and to injure, any one”; cf. Ps. xxvii. 
(xxviii.) 5; Jer. xxiv. 6; xl. (xxxiii) 7. [Comp.: av, 
ἐπ-, συν-οικοδομέω.} * 

οἰκο-δομή, -ῆς; ἡ, (οἶκος, and δέμω to build), a later Grk. 
word, condemned by Phryn., yet used by Aristot., 
Theophr., [(but both these thought to be doubtful) ], 
Diod. (1, 46), Philo (vit. Moys. i. § 40; de monarch. 
ii. $ 2), Joseph., Plut., Sept., and many others, for oixo- 
δόμημα and οἰκοδόμησις ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 sqq. 
cf. p. 421; [W. 24]; 1. (the act of) building, build- 
ing up, i. q. τὸ οἰκοδομεῖν ; as, τῶν τειχέων, 1 Macc. xvi. 
23; τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the N. T. 
metaph., edifying, edification, i. e. the act of one who 
promotes another's growth in Christian wisdom, piety, 


440 





οἰκονόμος. 


holiness, happiness, (see οἰκοδομέω, b. B. [cf. W. 35 (34)]) : 
Ro. xiv. 19; xv. 2; [1 Co. xiv. 26]; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be- 
low]; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29; with a gen. of the person 
whose growth is furthered, ὑμῶν, 2 Co. xii. 19, [cf. x. 8]; 
ἑαυτοῦ [ T'df. αὐτοῦ]. Eph. iv. 16; τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
ibid. 12; τῆς ἐκκλησίας, 1 Co. xiv. 12; i. q. τὸ οἰκοδομοῦν, 
what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, ete. 
λαλεῖν, λαβεῖν, οἰκοδομήν, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 5. 214g: 
οἰκοδόμημα. a building (i. e. thing built, edifice): Mk. xiii. 
1 sq.; τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Mt. xxiv. 1; used of the heavenly body, 
the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1; trop. of 
a body of Christians, a Christian church, (see οἰκοδομέω, 
b. 8.), Eph. ii. 21 [cf. πᾶς, I. 1c.]; with a gen. of the 
owner or occupant, θεοῦ, 1 Co. iii. 9.* 

οἰκοδομία, -as, 7, (οἰκοδομέω), (the act of) building, 
erection, ('Thuc., Plat., Polyb., Plut., Leian., ete.; but 
never in the Sept.); metaph. οἰκοδομίαν θεοῦ τὴν ἐν 
πίστει, the increase which God desires in faith (see 
οἰκοδομή). 1 Tim. i. 4 Rec. *** **; but see οἰκονομία. Not 
infreq. οἶκον. and oixo8. are confounded in the Mss.; see 
Grimm on 4 Mace. p. 365, cf. Hilgenfeld, Barn. epist- 
p. 28; [D’Orville, Chariton 8, 1 p. 5997." 

οἰκο-δόμος, -ov, ὁ, (οἶκος, δέμω to build; cf. οἰκονόμος), 
a builder, an architect: Acts ἵν. 111 Ὁ Tr WH. (Hadt.,. 
Xen., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

olkovopew, -@; (οἰκονόμος) ; to be a steward; to manage 
the affairs of a household: absol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to 
manage, dispense, order, regulate: Soph., Xen., Plat., 
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.; 2 Macc. iii. 14.) * 

οἰκονομία, -as, 7, (οἰκονομέω), fr. Xen. and Plat. down, 
the management of a household or of household affairs ; 
specifically, the management, oversight, administration, of 
others’ property; the office of a manager or overseer, stew- 
ardship: Lk. xvi. 2-4; hence the word is transferred: 
by Paul in a theocratie sense to the office (duty) in- 
trusted to him by God (the lord and master) of proclaim- 
ing to men the blessings of the gospel, 1 Co. ix. 17; ἡ 
οἰκονομία τοῦ θεοῦ, the office of administrator (stewardship) 
intrusted by God, Col.i.95. univ. administration, dis- 
pensation, which in a theocratie sense is ascribed to: 
God himself as providing for man's salvation: αἵτινες. 
... ἢ οἰκονομίαν θεοῦ τὴν ἐν πίστει, which furnish matter 
for disputes rather than the (knowledge of the) dispen- 
sation of the things by which God has provided for and 
prepared salvation, which salvation must be embraced 
by faith, 1 Tim.i.4 L T Tr WH; ἣν προέθετο . . . καιρῶν, 
which good-will he purposed to show with a view to 
(that) dispensation (of his) by which the times (sc. of 
infancy and immaturity cf. Gal. iv. 1-4) were to be ful- 
filled, Eph. i. 9 sq.; ἡ olx. τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ τῆς δοθεί- 
σης μοι, that dispensation (or arrangement) by which 
the grace of God was granted me, Eph. iii. 2; ἡ οἶκ. τοῦ 
μυστηρίου. the dispensation by which he carried out his 
secret purpose, Eph. iii. 9 GL T Tr WH.* 

οἰκονόμος, -ov, 6, (οἶκος, νέμω [*to dispense, manage]; 
Hesych. ὁ τὸν οἶκον veuópevos), the manager of a house- 
hold or of household affairs; esp. a steward, manager, 
superintendent, (whether free-born, or, as was usually 


5 
OLKOS 


the case, a freed-man or slave) to whom the head of 
the house or proprietor has intrusted the managerhent 
of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and 
the duty of dealing out the proper portion to every ser- 
vant and even to the children not yet of age: Lk. xii. 
42; 1 Co: iv. 2; Gal.iv. 2; the manager of a farm or 
landed estate, an overseer, [ A. V. steward]: Lk. xvi. 1, 
3, 8; ὁ olx. τῆς πόλεως, the superintendent of the city's 
Jinances, the treasurer of the city (Vulg. arcarius civitatis) : 
Ro. xvi. 23 (of the treasurers or quaestors of kings, 
Esth. viii. 9; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7; 11, 
6, 12, 8,6, 4). Metaph. the apostles and other Chris- 
tian teachers (see οἰκονομία) are called oix. μυστηρίων τοῦ 
θεοῦ, as those to whom the counsels of God have been 
committed to be made known to men: 1 Co. iv.1; a 
bishop (or overseer) is called οἰκονόμος θεοῦ, of God as 
the head and master of the Christian theocracy [see 
οἶκος, 2], Tit. i. 7; and any and every Christian who 
righily uses the gifts intrusted to him by God for the 
good of his brethren, belongs to the class called καλοὶ 
οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος θεοῦ, 1 Pet. iv. 10. (Aeschyl., 
Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; for m3a-by Sept. 1 K. iv. 6; xvi. 
9; efc.)* 

οἶκος, -ov, ὁ, [cf. Lat. vicus, Eng. ending -wich; Cur- 
tius $ 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless HESS 
for m3, also for oan a palace, Sms a tent, ete.; 3. 
a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus 
fr. δόμος the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix. 16; τινός, Mt. ix. 
6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56; viii. 39, 41, 
ete.; ἔρχεσθαι eis οἶκον, to come into a house (domum 
venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19) ; eis τὸν οἶκον, into the (i. e. his 
or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, in 
the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ἐν οἴκῳ, at home, 1 Co. xi. 
34; xiv. 35; οἱ eis τὸν οἶκον (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61; 
κατ᾽ οἶκον, opp. to ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, in a household assembly, 
in private, [R. V. at home; see κατά, IT. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46; 
v. 42; κατ᾽ οἴκους, opp. to δημοσίᾳ, in private houses, 
ΓΑ. V. from house to house; see κατά, IT. 3 a.], Acts xx. 
20; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος, entering house after 
house, Acts viii. 3; ἡ κατ᾽ οἶκόν τινος ἐκκλησία, see ἐκκλη- 
σία, 4 Ὁ. 88. Ὄ. any building whatever: ἐμπορίου, Jn. 
ii. 16; προσευχῆς, Mt. xxi.13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; 
ToU βασιλέως, τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, the palace of ete., Mt. xi. 8; 
Lk. xxii. 54 [here T Tr WH oikia]; τοῦ θεοῦ, the house 
where God was regarded as present, — of the tabernacle, 
Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; of the temple at Jerusa- 
lem, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn. ii. 16 sq., 
(Is. lvi. 5, 7); cf. Lk. xi. 51; Acts vii. 47, 49; of the heav- 
enly sanctuary, Heb. x. 21 (οἶκος ἅγιος θεοῦ, of heaven, 
Deut. xxvi. 15; Bar. ii. 16); a body of Christians (a 
church), as pervaded by the Spirit and power of God, is 
called οἶκος πνευματικός, 1 Pet. ii. 5. c. any dwelling- 
place: of the human body as the abode of demons that 
possess it, Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 24; (used in Grk. auth. also 
of tents and huts, and later, of the nests, stalls, lairs, of 
animals). univ. the place where one has fixed his resi- 
dence; one’s settled abode, domicile: οἶκος ὑμῶν, of the city 
of Jerusalem, Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35. 2. by me- 


441 


| 
| 


οἰκουμένη 


ton. the inmates of a house, all the persons forming one 


family, a household: Lk. x. 5; xi. 17 [al. refer this to 1, 


and take ἐπί either locally (see ἐπί, C. I. 1), or of succes- 


.sion (see ἐπί, C. I. 2c.)]; xix.9; Acts vii. 10; x.2; xi. 


14; xvi. 31; xviii. 8; 1 Co.i.16; 1 Tim. iii. 4 sq.; v.4; 
2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19; Heb. xi. 7; plur. 1 Tim. iii. 12; 
Tit.i. 11, (so also Gen. vii. 1; xlvii. 12, and often in 
Grk. auth.); metaph. and in a theocratic sense 6 οἶκος 
τοῦ θεοῦ, the family of God, of the Christian church, 
1 Tim. iii. 15; 1 Pet.iv.17; of the church of the Old and 


New Testament, Heb. iii. 2; 5 sq. (Num. xii. 7). 3. 
stock, race, descendants of one, [A. V. house]: ὁ οἶκος: 
Δαυΐδ, Lk. i. 27, 69; 11. 4, (1 K. xii. 16); oix. Ἰσραήλ, 


Mt.x.6; xv.24; Lk.i.33; Aetsii.36; vii. 42; [(6 oix- 
Ἰακώβ), 46 L T Tr mrg.]; Heb. viii. 8, 10, (Jer. xxxviii. 
(xxxi) 31; Ex. vi. 14; xii. 3; xix. 3; 1S. ii. 30; [ef. 6 
σεβαστὸς οἶκος, Philo in Flac. $ 4]). The word is not 
found in the Apocalypse. 

[Syn. οἶκος, οἰκία: in Attic (and esp. legal) usage, 
vixos denotes one's household establishment, one's entire prop- 
erty, οἰκία, the dwelling itself; and in prose οἶκος is not used 
in the sense of οἰκία. In the sense of family οἶκος and οἰκία. 
are alike employed; Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 80. In relation to 
distinctions (real or supposed) betw. οἶκος and οἰκία the foll. 
pass. are of interest (cf. Valekenaer on Hdt. 7, 224): Xen. 
oecon. 1, 5 οἶκος δὲ δὴ ví δοκεῖ ἡμῖν εἶναι; apa ὅπερ οἰκία, 
ἢ καὶ ὅσα τις ἔξω τῆς οἰκίας κέκτηται, πάντα τοῦ οἴκου 
ταῦτά ἐστιν... πάντα τοῦ οἴκου εἶναι ὅσα τις κέκτηται. 
Aristot. polit. 1, 2 p. 1252", 9 sqq. ἐκ μὲν οὖν τούτων τῶν δύο 
κοινωνιῶν (viz. of a man with wife and servant) oix (a πρώτη, 
καὶ ὀρθῶς Ἡσίοδος εἶπε ποιήσας “οἶκον μὲν πρώτιστα γυναῖκά. 
τε βοῦν 7 àporijpa-" ... ἡ μὲν οὖν εἰς πᾶσαν ἡμέραν συνεστη- 
κυῖα κοινωνία κατὰ φύσιν olxós ἐστιν. ibid. 3 p. 12535, 2 sqq. 
πᾶσα πόλις ἐξ οἰκιῶν σύγκειται" οἰκίας δὲ μέρη, ἐξ ὧν αὖθις οἰκία 
συνίσταται" οἰκία δὲ τέλειος ἐκ δούλων κ. ἐλευθέρων. ... πρῶτα. 
δὲ καὶ ἐλάχιστα μέρη οἰκίας δεσπότης k. δοῦλος k. πόσις K. 
ἄλοχος κ. πατὴρ κ. τέκνα etc. Plut. de audiend. poetis ὃ 6 καὶ 
γὰρ Olkóv ποτε μὲν τὴν οἰκίαν καλοῦσιν, “ οἶκον és ὑψόροφον " - 
ποτὲ δὲ τὴν οὐσίαν, “ ἐσθίεταί μοι οἶκος" - (see οἰκία, c.) 
Hesych. Lex. s. v. οἰκία- οἶκοι. s. v. οἶκος" ὀλίγη οἰκία. 

. καὶ μέρος τι τῆς oikas . . . καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ. In the 
N. T., although the words appear at times to be used with 
some discnminabon (e.g. Lk. x. 5,6, 7; Acts xvi. 31, 32, 34; 
cf. Jn. xiv. 2), yet other | pass. seem to show that no distine- 
tion can be insisted upon: e. g. Mt. ix.23; Mk. v. 38; Lk. vii. 
36,37; Acts x. 17, (22,32); XY eke LG XX1 85 x1» 
19, 13; xvi. 15; (1 Co. i. 16; xvi. 15). ] 

Dcum της, 7, (fem. of the pres. pass. ptep. fr. oikéo, 
[se. γῆ; c£. W. $64, 5; D. $123,8]); 1. the inhab- 
ited earth; a. in Grk. writ. often the portion of the 
earth inhabited by the Greeks, in distinction from the lands 
of the barbarians, cf. Passow ii. p. 415°; [L. and S. s. v. 
I.]. b. in the Grk. auth. who wrote about Roman 
affairs, (like the Lat. orbis terrarum) i. q. the Roman em- 
pire: so πᾶσα ἡ oix. contextually i. q. all the subjects of 
this empire, Lk. ii. 1. C. the whole ithabited earth, 
the world, (so in [Hyperid. Eux. 42 (“probably " L. and 
S.)] Sept. for 5am and rw: Lk.iv.5; xxi.26; Acts 
xxiv.5; Ro.x. 18; Rev. xvi. 14; Heb. i. 6, (πᾶσα ἡ oix. 
Joseph. b. j. 7, 3, 3); ὅλη ἡ oix., Mt. xxiv. 14; Acts xi. 
28, (in the same sense Joseph. antt. 8, 12, 4 πᾶσα ἡ oix. 5 


oikoupyos 


cf. Bleek, Erklür. d. drei ersten Evv. i.p. 68); by meton. 
the inhabitants of the earth, men: Acts xvii. 6, 31 (Ps. ix. 
9); xix. 27; ἡ oix. ὅλη, all mankind, Rev. iii. 10; xii. 
9. 2. the universe, the world: Sap. i. 7 (alternating 
there with τὰ πάντα) ; ἡ oix. ἡ μέλλουσα, that consum- 
mate state of all things which will exist after Christ’s 
return from heaven, Heb. ii. 5 (where the word alter- 
nates with πάντα and τὰ πάντα, vs. 8, which there is taken 
in an absolute sense).* 

olkovpyoós, -óv, (oikos, EPT'Q. [cf. ἔργον], cf. duzeXovpyós, 
γεωργός, ete.), caring for the house, working at home: ‘Tit. 
ii. 5 LT Tr WH; see the foll. word. Not found else- 
where.” 

οἰκ-ουρός, -o0, 6, ἡ, (οἶκος, and οὖρος a keeper; see 
θυρωρός and κηπουρός) ; a. prop. the (watch or) 
keeper of a house (Soph., Eur., Arstph., Paus., Plut., 
al.). b. trop. keeping at home and taking care of 
household affairs, domestic: Vit. ii. 5 RG; ef. Fritzsche, 
De conformatione N. T. critica ete. p. 29; [W. 100 sq. 
(95)]; (Aeschyl. Ag. 1626; Eur. Hec. 1277; σώφρονας, 
οἰκουροὺς καὶ φιλάνδρους, Philo de exsecr. $ 4).* 

οἰκτείρω ; fut. (as if fr. oikreipéo, a form which does 
not exist) as in the Sept. οἰκτειρήσω, for the earlier 
olkreipó, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 741; [Veitch s. v.; W. 
88 (84); B. 64 (56)]; (fr. οἶκτος pity, and this fr. the 
interjection οἵ, oh 4); to pity, have compassion on: τινά, 
Ro. ix. 15 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Hom., Tragg., Arstph., 
Xen., Plat., Dem., Leian., Plut., Ael.; Sept. for pn and 
pn). [Svw. see ἐλεέω, fin.]* 

οἰκτιρμός, 200, ὁ, (οἰκτείρω), Sept. for ODM (the vis- 
cera, which were thought to be the seat of compassion 
[see σπλάγχνον, b.]), compassion, pity, mercy: σπλάγχνα 
οἰκτιρμοῦ (Ree. οἰκτιρμῶν), bowels in which compassion 
resides, a heart of compassion, Col. iii. 12; in the Seript- 
ures mostly plural (conformably to the Hebr. D2), 
emotions, longings, manifestations of pity, [ Eng. compas- 
sions] (cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq.; [W. 176 
(166); B. 77 (67)]), rod θεοῦ, Ro. xii. 1; Heb. x. 28; 
ὁ πατὴρ τῶν oikr. (gen. of quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. 
237 (222)]), the father of mercies i. e. most merciful, 
2 Co.i.3; joined with σπλάγχνα, Phil. ii. 1. (Pind. 
Pyth. 1, 164.) [SvN. see ἐλεέω, fin.]* 

οἰκτίρμων, -ov, gen. -ovos, (οἰκτείρω). merciful: Lk. vi. 
36; Jas.v. 11. (Theocr. 15, 75; Anth. 7, 359, 1 [Epigr. 
Anth. Pal. Append. 223, 5]; Sept. for ps.) [*In 
classic Grk. only a poetic term for the more common 
Schmidt iii. p. 580.] * 

οἶμαι, see οἴομαι. 

οἰνο-πότης, -ου, 6, (οἶνος, and πότης a drinker), a wine- 
bibber, given to wine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. (Prov. 
xxiii. 20; Polyb. 20, 8, 2; Anacr. frag. 98; Anthol. 7, 


28, 2.)* 


ἐλεήμων. 


οἶνος, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for p also for 
VIVA (must, new wine), WM, ete.; wine; a. prop.: 
Mt. ix. 17; [xxvii. 34 Ltxt. T Tr WH]; Mk. xv. 23; 
Lk.i.15; Jn. ii.3; Ro.xiv.21; Eph.v.18; 1 Tim. v. 
23; Rev. xvii. 2, etc. ; οἴνῳ προσέχειν, 1 Tim. iii. 8; Sov- 
λεύειν, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph.: οἶνος rot θυμοῦ (see 


442 





ὀκταήμερος 


θυμός, 2), fiery wine, which God in his wrath is repre- 
sented as mixing and giving to those whom he is about 
to punish by their own folly and madness, Rev. xiv. 10; 
xvi. 19; xix. 15; with τῆς πορνείας added [cf. W. § 30, 
3 N. 1; D. 155 (136) ], a love-potion as it were, wine excit- 
ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices 
others to idolatry, Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3 [here L om. Tr 
W 11 br. otv. ], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers 
himself to be enticed, Rev. xvii. 2. C. by meton. 
i. q. a vine: Rev. vi. 6. 

olvoddvyla, -as, ἡ, (οἰνοφλυγέω, and this fr. οἰνόφλυξ, 
which is compounded of οἶνος and Ave, to bubble up, 
overflow), drunkenness, [A. V. wine-bibbing]: 1 Pet. iv. 
3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 5, 15; Polyb. 
2, 19, 4; Philo, vita Moys. iii. $ 22 [for other exx. see 
Siegfried, Philo ete. p. 102]; Ael v.h. 3, 14.) [Cf. 
Trench § Ixi.]* 

οἴομαι, contr. οἶμαι ; [fr. Hom. down]; to suppose, 
think: fol. by an ace. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [T om. vs.]; 
by the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the 
same, Phil. i. 16 (17); by ὅτι, Jas. i. 7. [SvNw. see 
ἡγέομαι, fin.]* 

olos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], relat. pron. (correlative 
to the demonstr. rotos and τοιοῦτος), what sort of, what 
manner of, such as (Lat. qualis): οἷος . . . τοιοῦτος, 1 Co. 
xv. 48; 2 Co. x. 11; τὸν αὐτὸν . . . οἷον, Phil. i. 305 with 
the pron. τοιοῦτος suppressed, Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. ix. 3; 
xiii. 19 [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely 
attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for 
rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. $ 143, 8; W. 148 (140) ; see 
τοιοῦτος, b.]; 2 Co. xii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Rev. xvi. 185 
οἱῳδηποτοῦν νοσήματι, of what kind of disease soever, Jn. 
v. 4 Lehm. [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.]; in indir. 
quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.]; 1 Th. i.5. οὐχ otov δὲ ὅτι ἐκ- 
πέπτωκεν, concisely for οὐ τοῖόν ἐστιν otov ὅτι éxm. but the 
thing (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word 
of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God 
hath by no means come to nought (A. V. but not as though 
the word of God hath etc.], Ro. ix. 6; ef. W. § 64 I. 6; 
B. § 150, 1 Rem.* 

οἱοσϑηποτοῦν, Jn. v. 4 Lehm., see οἷος. 

οἴσω, see φέρω. 

ὀκνέω. -@: 1 aor. ὥκνησα; (ὄκνος [perh. allied w. the 
frequent. cunc-tari (cf. Curtius p. 708} delay); fr. Hom. 
down; to feel loath, to be slow; to delay, hesitate: foll. by 
an inf. Acts ix. 38. (Num. xxii. 16; Judg. xviii. 9, ete.) * 

ὀκνηρός, -ά, -óv, (ὀκνέω), sluggish, slothful, backward : 
Mt. xxv. 26; with a dat. of respect [cf. W. $ 31, 6 a.; 
B. § 133, 21], Ro. xii. 11; οὐκ ὀκνηρόν μοί ἐστι, foll. by 
an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1 
[cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Pind. Soph., Thue., Dem., 
Theoer., ete.; Sept. for Oxy.) d 

ὀκταήμερος, -ov, (ὀκτώ, ἡμέρα). eight days old; passing 
the eighth day: περιτομῇ [cf- W. 8. 31,6 a.; B. $ 133,21; 
but Rec. -μή] ὀκταήμερος, circumcised on the eighth day, 
Phil iii 5; see τεταρταῖος : [‘the word denotes prop. 
not interval but duration’ (see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
lc.). Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.]." 


, ^ 
OKT@ 


ὀκτώ, eight: Lk. ii. 21; Jn. xx. 26; Acts ix. 33, ete. 
[(From Hom. on.) ] 

ὀλεθρεύω (Lchm. in Heb. xi. 28), see ὀλοθρεύω. 

ὀλέθριος, -ov, (in prof. auth. also of three term., as in 
Sap. xviii. 15), (ὄλεθρος), fr. [Hom.], Hdt. down, de- 
structive, deadly: δίκην, 2 Th. i. 9 Lehm. txt.* 

ὄλεθρος, -ov, (ὄλλυμε to destroy [perh. (ὄλνυμι) allied 
to Lat. vulnus]), fr. Hom. down, ruin, destruction, death : 
1 Th. v. 3; 1 Tim. vi. 9; eis ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός, for the 
destruction of the flesh, said of the external ills and 
troubles by which the lusts of the flesh are subdued and 
destroyed, 1 Co. v. 5 [see παραδίδωμι, 2]; i.q. the loss 
of a life of blessedness after death, future misery, αἰώνιος 
(as 4 Mace. x. 15): 2 Th. i 9 [where Ltxt. ὀλέθριον, 
4: v.], c£. Sap. 1. 12.* 

ὀλιγοπιστία, -as, 7, littleness of faith, little faith: Mt. 
xvii. 20 LT Tr WH, for RG ἀπιστία. (Several times 
in eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * 

ὀλιγό-πιστος, -ov, 6. 7), (ὀλίγος and πίστις), of little faith, 
trusting too litile: Mt. vi. 30; viii. 26; xiv. 31; xvi. 8; 
Lk. xii. 28. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

ὀλίγος, -7, τον, [on its occasional aspiration (0A.) see 
WH. App. p. 143; Τα. Proleg. pp. 91, 106; Scrivener, 
Introd. p. 565, and reff. s. v. οὐ init.], Sept. for oyn, [fr. 
Hom. down], little, small, few, of number, multitude, 
quantity, or size: joined to nouns [ef. W. $ 20, 1 b. note; 
B. § 125, 6], Mt. ix. 37; xv. 34; Mk. vi.5; viii. 7; Lk. 
x. 2; xii. 48 (ὀλίγας se. πληγάς [cf. B. § 134,6; W. § 32, 
5, esp. $ 64, 4], opp. to πολλαί, 47); Acts xix. 24; 1 Tim. 
v. 23; Heb. xii.10; Jas.ii.5 RG; 1 Pet. iii. 20RG; 
Rev. iii. 4; of time, short: χρόνος, Acts xiv. 28; καιρός, 
Rev. xii. 12; of degree or intensity, light, slight: τάραχος, 
Acts xii. 18; xix. 23; στάσις, XV. 2; χειμών, xxvii. 20. 
plur. w. a partitive gen.: γυναικῶν, Acts xvii. 4; ἀνδρῶν, 
ib. 12. ὀλίγοι, absol.: Mt. vii. 14; xx. 16; [T WH om. 
Tr br. the cl]; xxii.14; Lk. xiii. 23; 1 Pet. iii. 20 LT 
Tr WH; neut. sing.: Lk. vii. 47; τὸ ὀλίγον, 2 Co. viii. 
15; πρὸς ὀλίγον ὠφέλιμος, profitable for little (Lat. parum 
utilis); [cf. W. 213 (200); some, for a little (sc. time) ; 
see below], 1 Tim. iv. 8; ἐν ὀλίγῳ, in few words [οἵ. 
Shakspere's in a few], i. e. in brief, briefly (ypapeyv), 

' Eph. iii. 3; easily, without much effort, Acts xxvi. 28 sq. 

on other but incorrect interpretations of this phrase cf. 
Meyer ad loc. [see μέγας, 1 a. y.]; πρὸς ὀλίγον, for a little 
time, Jas. iv. 14; simply ὀλίγον, adverbially: of time, a 
short time, a (little) while, Mk. vi. 31; 1 Pet. i. 6; v. 10; 
Rev. xvii. 10; of space, a little (further), Mk. i. 19; Lk. 
v. 3. plur. ὀλίγα, a few things: [Lk. x. 41 WH]; Rev. 
ii. 14, 20 [Rec.]; ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγα ([see init. and] ἐπί, C. I. 2 e.), 
Mt. xxv. 21, 23; δ ὀλίγων, briefly, in few words, ypa- 
dev, 1 Pet. v. 12 [see διά, A. III. 3] (ῥηθῆναι, Plat. Phil. 
p. 31 d.; legg. 6 p. 778 c.).* 

ὀλιγόψυχος, -ov, (ὐλίγος, ψυχή), faint-hearted : 1 'Th. v. 
14. (Prov. xiv. 29; xviii. 14; Is. lvii. 15, etc.; Artem. 
oneir. 3, 5.) * 

ὀλιγωρέω, -@; (ὀλίγωρος, and this fr. ὀλίγος and ὥρα 
care); to care little for, regard lightly, make small account 


of: twos (see Matthiae $ 348; [W. § 30, 10 d.]), Heb. 


443 





ὅλος 


xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris- 
tot., Philo, Joseph., al.) * 

ὀλίγως, (ὐλίγος). adv., a little, scarcely, [R: V. just (es- 
caping)]: 2 Pet. ii. 18 GL'T Tr WH [for Rec. ὄντως]. 
(Anthol. 12, 205, 1; [Is. x. 7 Aq.]-) * 

ὀλοθρευτής [ Rec. 9A.], -od, ὁ, (ὀλοθρεύω, q. v.), a. de- 
stroyer ; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.* 

ὀλοθρεύω and, acc. to a preferable form, ὀλεθρεύω 
(Lehm.; see Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p. 809; ef. Delitzsch, 
Com. on Heb. as below; [7f. Proleg. p. 81; WH. App. 
p. 152]); (ὄλεθρος); an Alex. word [W. 92 (88)]; to 
destroy: twa, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23; Josh. iii. 10; 
vii. 25; Jer. ii. 30; Hag. ii. 22, etc.; [Philo, alleg. ii. 
91.) [Comp.: ἐξεολοθρεύω.} * 

ὁλοκαύτωμα, -ros, τό, (óXokavróo to burn whole, Xen. 
Cyr. 8, 3, 24; Joseph. antt. 1, 13, 1; and this fr. ὅλος 
and kavrós, for kava vos, verbal adj. fr. καίω, cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 524; [W. 33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat. 
holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other 
vietims only a part) of which is burned: Mk. xii. 33; 
Heb. x. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for "ny; also for nw, Ex. 
xxx. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Macc. i. 45; 
2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [exc. Philo de 
sacr. Ab. et Cain. $ 33]; Joseph. antt. 3, 9, 1 and 9, 7, 
4 says ὁλοκαύτωσις.) * 

ὁλοκληρία, -as, 7, (ὁλόκληρος, q. v.), Lat. integritas ; 
used of an unimpaired condition of body, in which all 
its members are healthy and fit for use; Vulg. integra 
sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness]: Acts iii. 16 (joined 
with ὑγίεια, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f.; with τοῦ σώματος 
added, ibid. p. 1047 e.; cf. Diog. Laért. 7, 107 ; corporis 
integritas, i. q. health, in Cie. de fin. 5, 14,40; Sept. for 
nnn, Is. i. 6).* 

ὁλό-κληρος, -ov, (ὅλος and κλῆρος, prop. all that has 
fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting 
or unsound, complete, entire, whole: λίθοι, untouched by 
a tool, Deut. xxvii. 6; Josh. ix. 4 (viii. 31); 1 Macc. iv. 
47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of 
a priest or of a victim, Philo de viet. § 12; Joseph. antt. 
3, 12, 2 [(cf. Havercamp’s Joseph. ii. p. 321)]. Ethi- 
cally, free from sin, faultless, [ R. V. entire]: 1 Th. v. 23; 
plur., connected with τέλειοι and with the addition of 
ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι, Jas. 1. 4; complete in all respects, con- 
summate, δικαιοσύνη, Sap. xv. 3; εὐσέβεια, 4 Mace. xv. 
17. (Plat. Polyb. Leian., Epict., al; Sept. for Dow, 
Deut. xxvii. 6; ODA, Lev. xxiii. 15; Ezek. xv. 5.)* 

[Synx. ὁλόκληρος, τέλειος (cf. Trench § xxii.): ‘in 
the ὁλόκληρος no grace which ought to be in a Christian 
man is deficient; in the τέλειος no grace is merely in its 
weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain 
ripeness and maturity.’] 

ὀλολύζω ; an onomatopoetic verb (ef. the similar οἰμώ- 
(ew, αἰάζειν, ἀλαλάζειν, πιπίζειν, κοκκύζειν, τίζειν. Com- 
pare the Germ. term. -zen, as in grunzen, krüchzen, üch- 
zen), to howl, wail, lament : Jas. v. 1. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down of a loud ery, whether of joy or of grief; 
Sept. for rn.)  [Svx. cf. κλαίω, fin.]* 

ὅλος, -, -ov, Sept. for 53, [fr. Pind. (Hom.) down], 


ONOTEANS 


whole, (all): with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times 
in the N. T., viz. ὅλον ἄνθρωπον, Jn. vii. 23; ἐνιαυτὸν 
ὅλον, Acts xi. 26; ὅλη ἹΙερουσαλήμ, xxi. 31; διετίαν ὅλην, 
xxviii. 30; ὅλους οἴκους, Tit. i. 11; [to which add, δὲ 
ὅλης νυκτός, Lk. v. 5 LT Tr WH]. usually placed before 
a substantive which has the article: ὅλη ἡ Γαλιλαία, Mt. 
iv. 23; ὅλη ἡ Συρία, 24; καθ᾽ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν, Lk. viii. 
39; ὅλον τὸ σῶμα, Mt. v. 29 sq.; vi. 22. sq.; Lk. xi. 34; 
1 Co. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 2, ete.; [ὅλη ἡ ἐκκλησία, Ro. xvi. 
23 LT Tr WH]; ὅλην τ. ἡμέραν, Mt. xx. 6; Ro. viii. 36; 
ὅλος ὁ νόμος, Mt. xxii. 40; Gal. v. 3; Jas. ii. 10; ἐν ὅλῃ 
τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, Mt. xxii. 37; ἐξ ὅλης τ. καρδίας gov, Mk. 
xii. 30, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub- 
stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B. 
§ 125, 6]: ἡ πόλις ὅλη, Mk. i. 33; Acts xix. 29 [Rec.]; 
xxi. 30 — (the distinction which Krüger § 50, 11, 7 makes, 
viz. that 7 ὅλη πόλις denotes the whole city as opp. to 
its parts, but that ὅλη ἡ πόλις and ἡ πόλις ἡ ὅλη denotes 
the whole city in opp. to other ideas, as the country, the 
fields, etc., does not hold good at least for the N. T., 
where even in ἡ πόλις ὅλη the city is opposed only to its 
parts); add the foll. exx.: Mt. xvi. 26; xxvi. 59; Lk. 
ix. 25; xi. 362; Jn. iv. 53; Ro. xvi. 23 [RG]; 1 Jn. v. 
19; Rev.ii.10; vi. 12 GL T TrWH ; xii. 9; xvi. 14. 
It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that 
the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the 
whole person or thing under consideration: Mt. xiii. 33; 
Lk. xi. 36^; xiii. 21; Jn. ix. 34; xiii. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 
6,28).  Neut. τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4 (where 
GL'T' Tr WH om. ὅλον); xxvi. 56; 8€ ὅλου, through- 
out, Jn. xix. 23. 

ὁλοτελής, -és, (ὅλος, τέλος). perfect, complete in all re- 
spects: 1 Th. v. 23. (Plut. plac. philos. 5, 21; [Field, 
Hexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. l. 21]; eccles. writ.) * 

᾿Ολυμπᾶς [perh. contr. fr. ᾿Ολυμπιόδωρος, ΥΥ͂. 103 (97) ; 
cf. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. 63 sq. 201], -ἃ, [ B. 20 
(18)], 6, Olympas, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15.* 

ὄλυνθος, -ov, 7, an unripe fig (Lat. grossus), which grows 
during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls 
off in the spring [cf. B. D. s.v. Fig]: Rev. vi.13. (Hes. 
fr. 14; Hdt. 1, 193; Dioscorid. 1, 185; Theophr. caus. 
plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) * 

ὅλως, (ὅλος), adv., wholly, altogether, (Lat. omnino), 
[with a neg. at all]: Mt. v.34 (with which compare Xen. 
mem. 1, 2, 35) ; 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually]; vi. ? [R. V. 
quite a fault etc.]; xv. 29. [(Plat., Isoer., al.)] * 

ὄμβρος, -ov, 6, (Lat. imber) a shower, i. e. a violent rain, 
accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning: 
Lk. xii. 54. (Deut. xxxii. 2; Sap. xvi. 16; in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down.) * 

ὁμείρομαι [or du., see below] i. q. fuetpopat; to desire, 
long for, yearn after, LA. V. to be affectionately desirous |: 
τινός, 1 Th. ii. 8 GL T Tr WH [but the last read óp., cf. 
their App. p. 144 and Lob. Pathol. Element. i. 72], on 
the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for 
Ree. ἱμειρόμενοι. The word is unknown to the Grk. writ., 
but the commentators ad loc. recognize it, as do Hesychius, 

+ Phavorinus,and Photius, and interpret it by ἐπιθυμεῖν. It 


LH 


> ΄ 
ομνύω 


is found in Ps. xii. 2 Symm., and ace. to some Mss. in Job 
iii. 21. Ace. tothe conjecture of Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. 
p. 792, it is composed of ὁμοῦ and εἴρειν, just as Photius 
[p- 331, 8 ed. Porson] explains it óuoU ἡρμόσθαι [so Theo- 
phylaet (ef. Tdf.’s note)]. But there is this objection, 
that all the verbs compounded with ὁμοῦ govern the da- 
tive, not the genitive. Since Nicander, ther. vs. 402, 
uses μείρομαι for ἱμείρομαι, some suppose that the original 
form is μείρομαι, to which, after the analogy of κέλλω and 
ὀκέλλω, either { or ὁ is for euphony prefixed in ἱμείρ. and 
ὁμείρ. But as ἱμείρομαι is derived from ἵμερος, we must 
suppose that Nicander dropped the syllable i to suit the 
metre. Accordingly ὁμείρεσθαι seems not to differ at all 
from ἱμείρεσθαι, and its form must be attributed to a vul- 
gar pronunciation. Cf. [WH. App. p. 152]; W. 101 
(95); [B. 64 (56); Ellic. on 1 Th. l. ο.; (Kuenen and 
Cobet, N. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].* 

ὁμιλέω. -ὦ ; impf. ὡμίλουν ; 1 aor. ptep. ὁμιλήσας ; (ὅμι- 
Nos, q. v-); freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to be in 
company with; to asssociate with; to stay with; hence to 
converse with, talk with : τινί, with one (Dan. i. 19), Acts 
xxiv. 26 ; sc. αὐτοῖς, Acts xx. 11 [so A. V. talked], unless 
one prefer to render it when he had stayed in their com- 
pany; πρός τινα, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3, 2; Joseph. 
antt. 11, 6, 11; [ef. W. 212 sq. (200); B. 8133, 8]) ; ἐν τῷ 
ὁμιλεῖν αὐτούς sc. ἀλλήλοις, ibid. 15.. [Comp. : mvr-ojitAéo. ]* 

ὁμιλία, -as, ἡ, (ὅμιλος), companionship, intercourse, com- 
munion: 1 Co. xv. 33, on which see ἦθος. ((Tragg., Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * 

ὅμιλος, -ov, 6, (duds, ὁμοῦ, and ἴλη a crowd, band, [Cur- 
tius $660; Vaniéek p. 897; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root mil 
‘to be associated,’ ‘to love']), fr. Hom. down, a multitude 
of men gathered together, a crowd, throng : Rev. xviii. 17 
Rec.* 

ὁμίχλη, -5s, 7, (in Hom. ὀμίχλη, fr. ὀμιχέω to make 
water). a mist, fog: 2 Pet. ii. 17 G L T Tr WH. (Am. 
iv. 13; Joel ii. 2; Sir. xxiv. 3; Sap. ii. 4.)* 

ὄμμα, ros, τό, (fr. ὄπτομαι [see ópáco ], pf. ὥμμαι), fr. Hom. 
down, an eye: plur., Mt. xx. 34 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii. 
23. (Sept. for n» Prov. vi. 4; vii. 2; x. 26.)* 

ὀμνύω (Mt. xxiii. 20sq.; xxvi. 74; Heb. vi. 16; Jas. v. 
12; [W. 24]) and ὄμνυμε (ὀμνύναι, Mk. xiv. 71 GL T Tr 
WH (ef. B. 45 (39)]) form their tenses fr. 0M09; hence 
1 aor. ὥμοσα; Sept. for paw}; to swear; to affirm, prom- 
ise, threaten, with an oath: absol, foll. by direct discourse, 
Mt. xxvi. 74; Mk. xiv. 71; Heb. vii. 21; foll. by εἰ, Heb. 
iii. 11; iv. 3; see εἰ, I. 5. ὀμν. ὅρκον (often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down [W. 226 (212)]) πρός τινα, to one (Hom. 
Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk. i. 73; ὀμνύειν with dat. of the 
person to whom one promises or threatens something 
with an oath: foll. by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23; by an inf. 
[W. 331 (311)], Heb. iii. 18; with ὅρκῳ added, Acts ii. 30 
[W. 603 (561)]; τινί τι, Acts vii. 17 [ Rec. i. e. gen. by at- 
traction; ef. B. $143, 8; W. $24, 1]. that by which one 
swears is indicated by an acc., τινά or τί (so in class. Grk. 
fr. Hom. down [ef. W. § 32, 1 b. γι; B. 147 (128)]), in 
swearing to call a person or thing as witness, to invoke, 
swear by, (Is. lxv. 16; Joseph. antt. 5, 1,2; 7, 14, 5); τὸν 


ὁμοθυμαδόν 


οὐρανόν, τὴν γῆν, Jas. v. 125 with prepositions [cf. B.u.s.]: 
κατά τινος (see κατά, I. 2 a.), Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii. 
16; xxxi. 54; 1 S. xxviii. 10[Comp.]; Is. xlv. 23; xii. 8; 
Am. iv. 2; Dem. p. 553, 17; 553, 26 [al. dmop.], etc.; 
κατὰ πάντων ὥμνυε θεῶν, Long. past 4, 16); in imitation 
of the Hebr. yaw foll. by 3, ἔν τινι is used [W. 389 
(364); B.Le.; see év, I. 8.1: Mt. v. 34, 36; xxiii. 16, 18, 
20-22; Rev. x. 6; εἴς τι, with the mind directed unto 
[W. 397 (371); B. as above; see eis, D. 11. 2 a. ], Mt. v. 35.* 

ὁμοθυμαδόν (fr. ὁμόθυμος, and this fr. ὁμός and θυμός ; 
on advs. in -δόν [chiefly derived fr. nouns, and designating 
form or structure] as γνωμηδόν, ῥοιζηδόν, ete., cf. Dttm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one mind, of one accord, (Vulg. 
unanimiter [etc.]) : Ro. xv. 6; Acts i. 14; 11. 46 ; iv. 24; 
vii. 57; viii. 6; xii. 20; xv. 25; xviii. 12; xix. 29, and RG 
in ii. 1, (Arstph., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian., 
Sept. Lam. ii.8; Job xvii. 16; Num. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with 
ἅπαντες [LT WH πάντες] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in 
class. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [cf. ii. 1 above].* 

ὁμοιάζω; (ὅμοιος, [cf. W. 25]); to be like: Mt. xxiii. 
21 L'Tr txt. WII mrg.; Mk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz- 
sche p. 658sq. ; [on the dat. cf. W. $31, 1h.]. Notfound 
elsewhere. [Come. : παρ-ομοιάζω. | * 

ὁμοιοπαθής, -és, (ὅμοιος, πάσχω), sufferi ang, the like with 
another, of like feelings or affections : τινί, Acts xiv. 15; 
Jas. v. 17. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 c.; Theophr. 
h. pl. 5, 8 (7, 2); Philo, conf. trs $3; 4 Macc. xii. 13; 
yii; i.e. trodden alike by all, Sap. vii. 3; see exx. fr. eccles. 
writ. [viz. Ignat. (interpol.) ad Trall. 10; Euseb. h. e. 1, 
2, 1, (both of the incarnate Logos) | in Ca on 4 Mace. 
p. 344.) * 

ὅμοιος (on the accent cf. [Chandler $8 384, 385]; W. 
52 (51); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -oía, -otov, also 
of two term. (once in the N. T., Rev. iv.3 R* GL T Tr 
WH; cf. W. $11, 1; [B. 26 (23) ]), (fr. ópós [akin to ἅμα 
(q. v.), Lat. similis, Eng. same, ete.]), [fr. Hom. down], 
like, similar, resembling : a. like i. e. resembling: τινί, 
in form or look, Jn. ix. 9; Rev. i. 13, 15; ii. 18; iv. 
6 sq.; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. WH mrg. ὁμοίοις], 19; 
xi. 1; xiii. 2, 11; xiv. 14 [but here T WH w. the accus. 
(for dat.)]; xvi 13 Rec.; ὁράσει, in appearance, Rev. 
iv. 3; in nature, Acts xvii. 29; Gal. v. 21 ; Rev. xxi. 11, 18; 
in nature and condition, 1 Jn. iii. 2; in mode of thinking, 
feeling, acting, Mt. xi. 16; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii. 
31sq.; xii. 36, and LWH Tr txt. (see below) in Jn. viii. 
55; i.q. may be compared to a thing, so in parables: Mt. 
xiii. 31, 33, 44 sq. 47; xx. 1; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b. 
like i.e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as: ὅμοιον 
τούτοις τρόπον, Jude 7; equal in strength. Rev. xiii. 4; in 
power and attractions, Rev. xviii. 18; in authority, Mt. 
xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 31 [here T WH om. Tr mrg. br. óp.]; 
in mind and character, τινός (cf. W. 195 (183), [cf. § 28, 
2]; B. ὃ 132, 24), Jn. vili.55 RG T Tr mrg. (see above).* 

ὁμοιότης, -7ros, 7, (ὅμοιος), likeness: καθ᾽ ὁμοιότητα, in 
like manner, Heb. iv. 15 [ef. W. 143 (136)]; κατὰ τὴν 
ὁμοιότητα (Μελχισεδέκ), after the likeness, Heb. vii. 15. 
(Gen. i. 11; 4 Maec. xv. 4 (3); Plat, Aristot., Isocr., 
Polyb., Philo, Plut.) * 


445 














ὁμοίωσις 


ὁμοιόω, -@: fut. ὁμοιώσω; Pass., 1 aor. ὡμοιώθην, and 
without augm. ὁμοιώθην (once Ro. ix. 29 Lmrg. T edd. 
2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161]; cf. B. 34 (30) ; Sturz, 
De dial. Maced. etc. p. 124; [ef.] Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153); 
1 fut. ὁμοιωθήσομαι; (ὅμοιος); fr. [Hom. and] Hdt. down; 
Sept. esp. for 1323; a. to make like: τινά τινι; pass. to 
be or to become like to one: Mt. vi. 8; Acts xiv. 11; Heb. 
li. 17; ὡμοιώθη ἡ Baci. τῶν ovp., was made like, took the 
likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Messiah appeared), 
Mt. xiii. 24 ; xviii. 23; xxii.2; ὁμοιωθήσεται (fut. of the 
time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1; ὥς τι, to be made 
like and thus to become as a thing [i. e. a blending of 
two thoughts; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31; B. $ 133, 10; 
W. $65, 1 8.1, Ro. ix. 29 (3 17) Ezek. xxxii. 2). b. 
to liken, compare: τινά τινι; or τί τινι, Mt. vii. 24 [RG 
(see below)]; xi. 16; Mk. iv. 30 RLtxt.Trmrg.; Lk. 
Vii. 31; xiii. 18, 20; pass. Mt. vii. [24 L T WH Tr txt.], 
26 ; to illustrate by comparison, πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Bac. 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Mk. iv. 30 T WH Tr txt. Lmrg. [Cour.: ἀφ- 
sete) Fal ie 

ὁμοίωμα, -ros, τό, (ὁμοιόω), Sept. for 1131273, 123, Dos, 
T33n; prop. that which has been made after the likeness 
of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness, 
representation: Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; 1 Mace. iii. 48; of the 
image or shape of things seen in a vision, Rey. ix. 7 [ef. 
W. 604 (562) ] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28, etc. Plato, in Parmen. 
p. 132 d., calls finite things ὁμοιώματα, likenesses as it 
were, in which τὰ παραδείγματα, i.e. ai ἰδέαι or τὰ εἴδη, 
are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas- 
much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such 
as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: τινός, Ro. vi. 
5; viii. 3 (on which see σάρξ, 3 fin. [cf. Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. ete. §§ 69 c. note, 78 c. note]) ; Phil. ii. 7 (see 
μορφή); εἰκόνος, a likeness expressed by an image, i. e. 
an image like, Ro. i. 23; ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως 
᾿Αδάμ, in the same manner in which Adam transgressed 
a command of God [see ἐπί, B. 2 a. n.], Ro. v. 14. Cf. 
the different views of this word set forth by Holsten, 
Zum Evangel. des Paulus u. Petrus, p. 437 sqq. and [esp. 
for exx.] in the Jahrbüch. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 
451 sqq., and by Zeller, Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1870, p. 301 sqq. [S¥N. ef. εἰκών, fin.] * 

ὁμοίως, (ὅμοιος), adv., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise, 
equally, in the same way: Mk.iv. 16 (Tr mrg. br. op.) ; Lk. 
ii. 11; x. 37; xiii. 8 LT Tr WH; 5 RG L Tr mrg.; 
xvi. 25; xvii.31; Jn. v. 19; xxi. 13; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7; v. 5; 
Heb. ix. 21; Rev. ii. 15 (for Ree. ὃ μισῶ); viii. 12; 
ὁμοίως καί, Mt. xxii. 20 ; xxvi. 35; ΜΚ. χν. 81 [here Rec. 
ou. δὲ καί 1; Lk. v. 33; xvii. 23RGL; xxii. 80 ; Jn. vi. 
11; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G; ὁμοίως μέντοι καί, Jude 8; ὁμοίως 
δὲ real Mt. xxvii. 41 RG (where T om. L br. δὲ καί, Tr 
br. δέ, WH om. δέ and br. καί); Lk. v. 10; x. 32; 1 Co. 
vii. 3 (where Lbr. δέ), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly 
restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R T Tr txt. WH 
ὁμοίως τε καί ; οἵ. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77 ; [W. 571 (531); 
B.$149,8]; ὁμοίως preceded by καθώς, Lk. vi. 31.* 

ὁμοίωσις, -ews, 7, (ὁμοιόω ) ; 1. a making like: 
opp. to ἀλλοίωσις, Plat. rep. 5, 454 c. 2. likeness, 


ὁμολογέω 


440 


* , 
ὀνειδισμὸς 


(Plat., Aristot., Theophr.) : καθ᾽ ὁμοίωσιν θεοῦ, after the | ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. ἡ εἰς τὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 


likeness of God, Jas. iii. 9 fr. Gen. i. 26. 
ὃ xv.]* 

ὁμολογέω, -@; impf. ὡμολόγουν ; fut. ὁμολογήσω ; 1 aor. 
ὡμολύγησα; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ὁμολογεῖται ; (fr. ὁμο- 
λόγος, and this fr. ὁμόν and λέγω) ; fr. [Soph. and] Hat. 
down ; 1. prop. fo say the same thing as another, 
i. e. to agree with, assent, both absol. and w. a dat. of the 
pers.; often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; hence 2. 
univ. fo concede; i. e. a. not to refuse, i. e. to promise : 
τινὶ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, Acts vii. 17 LT Tr WH [here R. V. 
vouchsafe]; foll. by an object. inf., Mt. xiv. 7 (Plat., Dem., 
Plut., al.). b. not to deny, i. e. to confess; declare: 
joined νυ. οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, foll. by direct disc. with recitative 
ὅτι, Jn. i. 20; foll. by ὅτι, Heb. xi. 13; τινί τι, ὅτι, Acts 
xxiv. 143 to confess, i. e. to admit or declare one’s self 
guilty of what one is accused of : ras ἁμαρτίας, 1 Jn. i. 9 
(Sir. iv. 26). 3. to profess (the diff. betw. the Lat. 
profiteor [*to declare openly and voluntarily’] and 
confiteor [*to declare fully, implying the yielding or 
change of one's conviction; cf. professio fidei, con fes- 
sio peccatorum] is exhibited in Cic. pro Sest. 51, 109), 
i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely, [ A. V. generally 
confess; on its constr. see B. $ 133, 7]: [foll. by an 
inf., εἰδέναι θεόν, Tit. i. 16]; τινί [cf. B. u.s.; W. $31, 1f.] 
foll. by direct dise. with ὅτε recitative, Mt. vii. 23; one 
is said ὁμολογεῖν that of which he is convinced and which 
he holds to be true (hence ὁμ. is disting. fr. πιστεύειν in 
Jn. xii. 42; Ito. x. 9 sq.) : pass. absol., with στόματι (dat. 
of instrum.) added, Ro. x. 10; ri, Acts xxiii. 8; τινά with 
a predicate acc. [ B. u. s.], αὐτὸν Χριστόν, Jn. ix. 22; κύ- 
ριον (pred. ace.) Ἰησοῦν, Ro. x. 9 [here WH τὸ ῥῆμα... 
ὅτι κύριος etc., L mrg. Tr mrg. simply ὅτε etc. ; again with 
ὅτι in 1 Jn. iv. 15]; Ἰησοῦν Xp. ἐν σαρκὶ ἐληλυθότα [Tr 
mre. WH mre. ἐληλυθέναι], 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Rec. also in 
3 [see below]; ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί, 2 Jn. 7, [cf. B. u. s.; 
W. 346 (324)]; τινά, to profess one's self the worshipper 
of one, 1 Jn. iv. 3 [here WH mrg. λύει, cf. Westcott, Epp. 
of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and G L T Tr WH in ii. 23; ἐν with 
a dat. of the pers. (see ἐν, I. 8 c.), Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; 
with cognate acc. giving the substance of the profession 
[ef. B. $131, 5; W. $32, 2], ὁμολογίαν, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also 
foll. by περί τινος, Philo de mut. nom. $ 8) ; τὸ ὄνομά Twos, 
to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be 
the name of a follower of me, Rev. iii. 5 G L T Tr 
WH. 4. Acc. to a usage unknown to Grk. writ. 10 
praise, celebrate, (see ἐξομολογέω, 2; [B. § 133, 7]) : τινί, 
Heb. xiii. 15. [Cowr.: dvÓ-(-pat), é£-opoXoyéo. | * 

ὁμολογία, -as, ἡ, (ὁμολογέω, q. v. [cf. W. 35 (34)]), in 
the N. T. profession [ A. V. generally confession] ; a. 
subjectively: ἀρχιερέα τῆς ὁμολ. ἡμῶν, i. e. whom we pro- 
fess (to be ours), Heb. iii. 1 [but al. refer this to b. J. b. 
objectively, profession [confession ] i. e. what one professes 
[confesses]: Heb. iv. 14; 1 Tim: vi. 12 (see ὁμολογέω, 3) ; 
13 (see paprupéw, a. p. 391"); τῆς ἐλπίδος. the substance 
of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Heb. x. 
23; εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, relative to the gospel, 
2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, for the obedience ye render to what 


(Cf. Trench 


Jessedly, without controversy: 1 Tim. iii. 16. 








Χριστὸν ὁμολογία; Justin M. dial. c. Tryph. c. 47, — a con- 
str. occasioned perhaps by ἡ eis τὸν Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 
5; [ef. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hdt., Plat., al.)]* 

ὁμολογουμένως, (ὁμολογέω), adv., by consent of all, con- 
(4 Macc. 
vi. 31; vii. 16; xvi. 1; in prof. auth. fr. Thue., Xen., Plat. 
down; with ὑπὸ πάντων added, Isoer. paneg. ὃ 33, where 
see Baiter’s note.)* 

ὁμότεχνος, -ov, (duds and τέχνη), practising the same 
trade or craft, of the same trade: Acts xviii. 3. (Hdt. 2, 
89; Plat., Dem., Joseph., Leian., al.) * 

ὁμοῦ, (duds), [fr. Hom. down], adv., together: Jn. iv. 
36; xx. 4; εἶναι ὁμοῦ, of persons assembled together, 
Acts ii. 11, Ὁ ΤΥ WH; xx. 18 Lehm.; Jn. xxi. 2. [Syn. 
see ἅμα, fin.]* 

ὀμόω, sce ὀμνύω. 

ὁμόφρων, -ον, (ὁμός, φρήν), of one mind, [ A. V. like- 
minded], concordant: 1 Pet. 111. 8. (Hom., Hes., Pind., 
Arstph., Anthol., Plut., al.) * 

ὅμως, (duds), fr. Hom. down, yet; it occurs twice in 
the N. T. out of its usual position [cf. W. § 61, 5f.; B. 
§ 144, 23], viz. in 1 Co. xiv. 7,,where resolve thus: rà 
ἄψυχα, καίπερ φωνὴν διδόντα, ὅμως, ἐὰν διαστολὴν . . . πῶς 
krÀ. instruments without life, although giving forth a 
sound, yet, unless they give a distinction in the sounds, 
how shall it be known ete., Fritzsche, Conject. spec. i. 
p. 52; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W. 344 (323)]; again, ὅμως 
ἀνθρώπου ... οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ for ἀνθρώπου kekvp. διαθήκην, 
καίπερ ἀνθρώπου οὖσαν, ὅμως οὐδεὶς krÀ. a man’s estab- 
lished covenant, though it be but a man’s, yet no one 
ete. Gal. iii. 15; ὅμως μέντοι, but yet, nevertheless, [cf. 
W. 444 (413)], Jn. xii. 42." 

ὄναρ, τό, (an indecl. noun, used only in the nom. and 
acc. sing.; the other cases are taken from Óóveipós), [fr. 
Hom. down], a dream: κατ᾽ ὄναρ, in a dream, Mt. i. 20; 
ii. 12 sq. 19, 22; xxvii. 19, —a later Greek phrase, for 
which Attic writ. used ὄναρ without xara [q. v. IT. 2]; 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 422 sqq.; [Photius, Lex. p. 149, 
25 sq. ].* 

ὀνάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of óvos; cf. [W. 24 and] yv- 
vawápuov), a little ass: Jn. xii. 14. (Machon ap. Athen. 
13 p. 582¢.; [Epictet. diss. 2, 24, 18].) * 

ὀνειδίζω ; impf. ὠνείδιζον ; 1 aor. ὠνείδισα ; pres. pass. 
ὀνειδίζομαι ; (ὄνειδος, q. v.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. esp. 
for 971; to reproach, upbraid, revile; [on its constr. cf. 
W. 8 32,1b.8.; B.§ 133, 9]: of deserved reproach, τινά, 
foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xi. 20; τί (the fault) τινος, foll. by ὅτι, 
Mk. xvi. 14. of unjust reproach, to revile: τινά, Mt. v. 11; 
Mk. xv. 32; Lk. vi. 22; Ro. xv. 3 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; 
pass. 1 Pet. iv. 14; foll. by ὅτι, 1 Tim. iv. 10 R G Tr mrg. 
WH mrg.; τὸ αὐτὸ ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν (Rec. αὐτῷ), Mt. xxvii. 
44 (see αὐτός, III. 1). to upbraid, cast (favors received) 
in one’s teeth: absol. Jas. i. 5; μετὰ τὸ δοῦναι μὴ ὀνείδιζε, 
Sir. xli. 22, cf. xx. 14 ; τινὶ σωτηρίαν, deliverance obtained 
by us for one, Polyb. 9, 31, 4.* 

ὀνειδισμός, -ov, 6, (ὀνειδίζω), [cf. W. 24], a reproach: 
Ro. xv. 3; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Heb. x. 33; ὁ ὀνειδισμὸς τοῦ Xpc 


ὄνειδος 


στοῦ i.e. such as Christ suffered (for the cause of God, 
from its enemies), Heb. xi. 26; xiii. 13; cf. W. 189 (178). 
(Plut. Artax. 22; [Dion. Hal.]; Sept. chiefly for 7371.) * 

ὄνειδος, -ovs, τό, (fr. ὄνομαι to blame, to revile), fr. Hom. 
down, reproach; i. q. shame: Lk. i. 25. (Sept. chiefly for 
nan; three times for 1272 disgrace, Is. xxx. 3; Mich. 
ii. 6; Prov. xviii. 13.) * 

᾿Ονήσιμος, -ov, ó, (i. e. profitable, helpful; fr. ὄνησις 
profit), Onesimus, a Christian, the slave of Philemon: 
Philem. 10; Col. iv. 9. [Cf. Bp. Lghtfi. Com. Intr. $4; 
Hackett in B. D.]* 

"OvqeiQopos, -ov, 6, [i. e. * profit-bringer '], Onesiphorus, 
the name of a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19.* 

ὀνικός, -7, -óv, (ὄνος). of or for an ass: μύλος ὀνικός i. e. 
turned by an ass (see μύλος, 1), Mk. ix. 42 L T Tr WH; 
Lk. xvii. 2 Ree.; Mt. xviii. 6. Not found elsewhere.* 

ὀνίνημι : fr. Hom. down; to be useful, to profit, help, 
(Lat. juvo); Mid., pres. ὀνίναμαι; 2 aor. ὠνήμην (and later 
ὠνάμην, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12sq.; Kühner ὃ 343 s. v., 
i. p. 880; [Veitch s. v.]), optat. ὀναίμην ; to receive profit 
or advantage, be helped [or have joy, (Lat. juvor ) ] : τινός, 
of one, Philem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh. 


ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 
1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but 
see Curtius $ 446 ]), Sept. for ow, [fr. Hom. down], the 
name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis- 
tinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, 
Mk. iii. 16; vi.14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων rà 
ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14 ; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ ᾧ ὄνομα, 
πόλις 7 Ov. , sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. 
[ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26 sq.; ii. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 
13, 18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L à] τὸ 
ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, etc., Lk. i. 5, 27; 
ὄνομα αὐτῷ sc. ἦν or ἐστίν [ B. u. s.], Jn. 1.6 ; iii. 1; xviii. 10; 
Rev. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 
8; W. 182) (171) |; Mt. xxvii: 32; "Mk. v. 22 ; Lk. 1: δ: x. 
38; xvi. 20; xxiii. 50; Acts v. 1, 34; viii. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 
36; x. 1; xi. 28; xii. 13; xvi. 1, 14; xvii. 34 ; xviii. 2, 7, 
924; xix. 24; xx. 9; xxi. 10; xxvii. 1; xxviii. 7; Rev. ix. 
11, (Xen. anab. 1, 4, 11); τοὔνομα (i. e. τὸ ὄνομα), acc. 
absol. [B. § 131, 12; cf. W. 230 (216)], i.e. by name, Mt. 
xxvii. 57; ὄνομά μοι SC. ἐστίν, my name is, Mk. v. 9; Lk. 
viii. 30, (Odrus ἐμοίγ᾽ ὄνομα, Hom. Od. 9, 366); ἔχειν ὄνομα, 
foll. by the name in the nom., Rev. ix. 11 ; καλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά 
twos, foll. by the acc. of the name, see καλέω, 2 ἃ. ; καλεῖν 
τινα ὀνόματί τινι, Lk. i. 61; ὀνόματι καλούμενος, Lk. xix. 2; 
καλεῖν τινα ἐπὶ τῷ ov. Lk. i. 59 (see ἐπί, B. 2 a. ἡ. p. 233°) ; 
κατ᾽ ὄνομα (see κατά, II. 3 a.y. p. 328°); τὰ ὀνόματα ὑμῶν 
ἐγράφη [evyéypanrac T WH Tr] ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, your 
names have been enrolled ‘by God in the register of the 
citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20; τὸ ὄνομά 
twos (ἐγράφη) ἐν βίβλῳ (τῷ βιβλίῳ) ζωῆς, Phil. iv. 3; 
Rev. xiii. 8; ἐπὶ τὸ βιβλίον τῆς €. Rev. xvii. 8; ἐκβάλλειν 
(q. v. 1 h.) τὸ ὄνομά τινος ὡς πονηρόν, since the wicked- 
ness of the man is called to mind by his name, Lk. vi. 
225 ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου, see ἐπικαλέω, 5 ; ἐπι- 
κέκληται τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐπί τινα, see ἐπικ. 2; ὀνόματα (ὄνομα) 


447 





ὄνομα 


βλασφημίας i.q. βλάσφημα (-μον) [cf. W. $ 34, 3 b.; B. 
§ 132, 10], names by which God is blasphemed, his maj- 
esty assailed, Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [R G Tr, see yéuo]. so 
used that the name is opp. to the reality: ὄνομα ἔχεις, 
ὅτι Gis, kai νεκρὸς ei, thou art said [ A. V. hast a name] to 
live, Rev. iii. 1 (ὄνομα εἶχεν, ὡς ἐπ᾿ ᾿Αθήνας ἐλαύνει, Hat. 
7,188). i.q. title: περὶ ὀνομάτων, about titles (as of the 
Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; κληρονομεῖν ὄνομα, Heb. i. 4; 
χαρίζεσθαί τινι ὄνομά τι, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title ὁ κύριος: 
is meant [but crit. txts. read τὸ ὄνομα eic., which many 
take either strictly or absolutely; cf. Meyer and Bp. 
Lghtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]); spec. a title 
of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer]; ἐν 
τῷ ὀνόματι ᾿Ιησοῦ, in devout recognition of the title con- 
ferred on him by God (i. e. the title 6 κύριος), Phil. ii. 10 
[but the interp. of ὄνομα here follows that of ὄνομα in 
vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Lghtft., and cf. W. 390 
(365)]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistie the name 
is used for everything which the name covers, everything 
the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by 
mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for 
one’s rank, authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel= 
lences, deeds, etc.; thus, eis ὄνομα προφήτου, out of regard 
for [see eis, B. II. 2 d.] the name of prophet which he 
bears, i. q. because he is a prophet, Mt. x. 41; βαπτίζειν 
τινὰ eis ὄνομά twos, by baptism to bind any one to recog- 
nize and publicly acknowledge the dignity and authority 
of one [cf. βαπτίζω, 11. b. (aa.) ], Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii. 
16; xix.5; 1 Co.i.13, 15. to do a thing ἐν ὀνόματί τινος, 
i. e. by one's command and authority, acting on his behalf, 
promoting his cause, [ef. W. 390 (365); B. § 147, 10]; as, 
ὁ ἐρχύμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου (fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 26), 
of the Messiah, Mt. xxi. 9 ; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii. 
35; xix. 38; Jn. xii. 13; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρός μου, Jn. 
v. 43; x. 25; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ, of his own free-will 
and authority, Jn. v. 43; todoa thing ἐν τῷ dv. of Jesus, 
Acts x. 48; 1Co. v. 4; 2 Th. iii. 6; and L T Tr WH in 
Jas. v. 10 [but surely κ᾿ here denotes God; cf. 2 f. below]. 
Ace. to a very freq. usage in the O. T. (cf. rm Ow), the 
name of God in the N. T. is used for all those qualities 
which to his worshippers are summed up in that name, 
and by which God makes himself known to men; it is 
therefore equiv. to his divinity, Lat. numen, (not his na- 
ture or essence as it is in itself), the divine majesty and 
perfections, so far forth as these are apprehended, named, 
magnified, (cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 993; Oeh- 
ler in Herzog x. p. 196 sqq.; Wiltichen in Schenkel iv. 
p. 282 sqq.); so in the phrases ἅγιον τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ sc. 
ἐστίν, Lk. i. 49 ; ἁγιάζειν τὸ dv. τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xi. 
2; ὁμολογεῖν τῷ dv. αὐτοῦ, Heb. xiii. 15 ; ψάλλειν, Ro. xv. 
9; δοξάζειν, Jn. xii. 28; [Rev. xv. 4]; φανεροῦν, γνωρί- 
(ew, Jn. xvii. 6, 26; φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xi. 18; 
xv. 4 [G L T Tr WH]; διαγγέλλειν, Ro. ix. 17 ; ἀπαγγέλ- 
Aew, Heb. ii. 12; βλασφημεῖν, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi.1; Rev. 
xiii. 6; xvi. 9; ἀγάπην ἐνδείκνυσθαι els τὸ ὄν. τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. 
vi. 10; τήρησον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου, à (by attraction 
for 6 [cf. B. § 148, 8 p. 286; W. § 24, 1; Rec. incorrectly 
ods |) δέδωκάς pot, keep them consecrated and united to 


ὄνομα 


thy name (character), which thou didst commit to me to 
declare and manifest (cf. vs. 6), Jn. xvii. 11; [ef. ὑπὲρ τοῦ 
ἁγίου ὀνόματός σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, 
‘Teaching’ ete. ch. 10, 2]. After the analogy of the pre- 
ceding expression, the name of Christ (Ἰησοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χρισ- 
TOU, τοῦ κυρίου Ἴησ.» τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν, etc.) is used in the 
N.T. of all those things which, in hearing or recalling that 
name, we are bidden to recognize in Jesus and to profess, 
accordingly, of his Messianic dignity, divine authority, 


"oe . . . I 
memorable sufferings, in a word the peculiar services and 


blessings conferred by him on men, so far forth as these 
are believed, confessed, commemorated, [cf. Westcott on 
the Epp. of Jn. p. 232]: hence the phrases εὐαγγελίζε- 
Oat τὰ περὶ τοῦ dv. I. Xp. Acts viii. 12; μεγαλύνειν τὸ ὄν. 
Acts xix. 17 ; τῷ ὀνόμ. [ Rec. ἐν τ. óv.] αὐτοῦ ἐλπίζειν, Mt. 
xii. 21 [B. 176 (153)]; πιστεύειν, 1 Jn. iii. 23; aor. εἰς 
τὸ ὅν.) Jn. i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1 Jn. v. 18" [Rec., 13°]; 
πίστις τοῦ ov. Acts iil. 16; ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου, who- 
ever nameth the name of the Lord sc. as his Lord (see 
“ὀνομάζω, a.), 2 Tim. ii. 19; κρατεῖν, to hold fast i. e. per- 
severe in professing, Rev. ii. 13; οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, Rev. iii. 
8; τὸ dv. ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐνδοξάζεται ἐν ὑμῖν, 2 Th.i.12; βαστάζειν 
τὸ ὄν. ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν (see βαστάζω, 3), Acts ix.15; to do 
or to suffer anything ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Xp. see ἐπί, B. 2 a. β. 
p. 232". The phrase ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Xp. is used in various 
senses : a. by the command and authority of Christ: 
see exx. just above. b. in the use of the name of Christ 
i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance, 
Mk. ix. 38 R*" L T Tr WH (see f. below); Lk. x. 17; 
Acts iii. 6; iv. 10; xvi. 18; Jas. v. 14 ; univ. ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόμα- 
τι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο; Acts iv. 7. c. through the power 
of Christ’s name, pervading and governing their souls, 
Mk. xvi. 17. d. in acknowledging, embracing, profess- 
ing, the name of Christ: σωθῆναι, Acts iv. 12; δικαιωθῆναι, 
1 Co. vi. 11 ; Cor ἔχειν, Jn. xx. 31; in professing and pro- 
claiming the name of Christ, παρρησιάζεσθαι, Acts ix. 27, 
28 (29). e. relying or resting on the name of Christ, 
rooted (so to speak) in his name, i. e. mindful of Christ: 
ποιεῖν 7t, Col. iii. 17 ; εὐχαριστεῖν, Eph. v. 20; αἰτεῖν τι; i. e. 
(for substance) to ask a thing, as prompted by the mind of 
Christ and in reliance on the bond which unites us to him, 
Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; xv. 16; xvi. 24, [26], and RGLin 23; 
cf. Ebrard, Gebet im Namen Jesu, in Herzog iv. 692 sqq. 
God is said to do a thing ἐν àv. Xp. regardful of the name 
of Christ, i. e. moved by the name of Christ, for Christ's 
sake, διδόναι the thing asked, Jn. xvi. 22 T Tr WH; zép- 
mew τὸ πνεῦμα TO ay. Jn. xiv. 26. f. ἐν ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ, 
[ A. V. for the name of Christ] (Germ. auf Grund Namens 
Christi), i. e. because one calls himself or is called by the 
name of Christ: ὀνειδίζεσθαι, 1 Pet. iv. 14 (equiv. to as 
Χριστιανός, 16). The simple dat. τῷ dv. Xp. signifies by 
the power of Christ's name, pervading and prompting 
souls, Mt. vii. 22; so also τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου (i. e. of 
God) λαλεῖν, of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 RG; τῷ dv. σου, 
by uttering thy name as a spell, Mk. ix. 38 Rstbe G (see 
Ὁ. above). εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Χριστοῦ συνάγεσθαι is used of 
those who come together to deliberate concerning any 
matter relating to Christ’s cause, (Germ. auf den Na- 


448 











" 
οντῶς 


men), with the mind directed unto, having regard unto, 
his name, Mt. xviii. 20. ἕνεκεν τοῦ dv. [A. V. for my 
name's sake], i. e. on account of professing my name, Mt. 
xix. 29; also διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου, αὐτοῦ, etc.: Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 
9; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. xxi. 17; Jn. xv. 21; 1 Jn. ii. 12; Rev. 
li.3. διὰ τοῦ dv. τοῦ κυρ. παρακαλεῖν twa, to beseech one 
by employing Christ's name as a motive or incentiye [cf. 
W. 381 (357)], 1 Co. i. 10; by embracing and avowing 
his name, ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν, Acts x.43. ὑπὲρ τοῦ dv. 
αὐτοῦ. i. q. for defending, spreading, strengthening, the au- 
thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. 16; xv. 26; 
xxi. 13; Ro.i.5; 3 Jn. 7; — [but ace. to the better txts. 
in Acts v. 41; 3 Jn. 7,76 ὄνομα is used absolutely, the 
Name, sc. κυρίου, of the Lord Jesus; so cod. Vat. Jas. v. 
14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad 
Eph. 3,1; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (553). So Bp. 
Lghtft. in Phil.ii.9; (see 1 above)]. πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα ᾿Ιησοῦ 
ToU Nat. ἐναντία πρᾶξαι, Acts xxvi. 9. 3. In imita- 
tion of the Hebr. ὺ (Num. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43 ; 
xxvi. 53), the plur. ὀνόματα is used i.q. persons reckoned 
up by name: Actsi.15; Rev.iii.4; xi. 13. 4. Like 
the Lat. nomen, i.q. the cause or reason named : ἐν rà óvó- 
ματι τούτῳ, in this cause. i. e. on this account, sc. because 
he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L T Tr WH [al. 
more simply take oy. here as referring to Χριστιανός pre- 
(3d 

ceding]; ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι (as in Syriae 9 ina) Χριστοῦ 
ἐστε, in this name, i. 6. for this reason, because ye are 
Christ’s (disciples), Mk. ix. 41. 

ὀνομάζω: 1 aor. ὠνόμασα; Pass. pres. ὀνομάζομαι; 1 
aor. ὠνομάσθην ; (ὄνομα); fr. Hom. down; to name [cf. 
W. 615 (572)]; a. τὸ ὄνομα, to name i. e. to ulter: 
pass. Eph. i. 21; rod κυρίου [ Rec. Χριστοῦ], the name of 
the Lord (Christ) se. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (Sept. 
for rm DY amm, to make mention of the name of Jeho- 
vah in praise, said of his worshippers, Is. xxvi. 13; Am. 
vi. 10); τὸ ὄνομα ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπί twa, Acts xix. 13, see ἐπί, 
C. I. 1 c. p. 234" mid. b. τινά, with a proper or an 
appellative name as pred. acc., to name, i. e. give name 
to, one: Lk. vi. 13 sq.; pass. to be named, i. e. bear the 
name of, 1 Co. v. 11; ἐκ w. gen. of the one from whom 
the received name is derived, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. Il. 10, 
68; Xen. mem. 4, 5, 12). C. τινά Or τί, to ulter the 
name of a person or thing: ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός, of 
the lands into which the knowiedge of Christ has been 
carried, Ro. xv. 20 (1 Mace. iii. 9); ὀνομάζεσθαι of things 
which are called by their own name because they are 
present or exist (as opp. to those which are unheard 
of), 1 Co. v. 1 Rec.; Eph. v. 3. [Cowr.: ἐπ-ονομάζω.] * 

ὄνος, -ov, ὁ, 7, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for *$br and 
nrw, an ass: Lk. xiv. 5 Rec.; Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15; — 
6, Lk. xiii. 15; 7, Mt. xxi. 2, 7.* 

ὄντως (fr. dv; on advs. formed fr. pteps. cf. Bttm. Ausf. 
Spr. $ 115a. Anm. 3; Kühner § 335 Anm. 2), adv., 
truly, in reality, in point of fact, as opp. to what is pre- 
tended, fictitious, false, conjectural: Mk. xi. 32 [see 
ἔχω, I. 1 £.]; Lk. xxiii. 47; xxiv. 34; Jn. viii. 36; 1 Co. 
xiv. 25; Gal. iii. 21 and Rec. in 2 Pet. ii. 18; 0, 7, τὸ 


ὄξος 


ὄντως foll. by a noun, that which is truly ete., that which 
is indeed, (rà ὄντως ἀγαθὰ ἢ καλά, Plat. Phaedr. p. 
260 ἃ. ; τὴν ὄντως καὶ ἀληθῶς φιλίαν, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e.; 
οἱ ὄντως βασιλεῖς, Joseph. antt. 15, 3,5): as ἡ ὄντως ( Rec. 
αἰώνιος) Con, 1 Tim. vi. 19; ἡ ὄντως χήρα, a widow that 
is a widow indeed, not improperly called a widow (as 
παρθένος ἡ λεγομένη χήρα, i. e. a virgin that has taken 
a vow of celibacy, in lgn. ad Smyrn. 13 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in 
loc.]; ef. Baur, Die sogen. Pastoralbriefe, p. 46 sqq.), 
1 Tim. v. 8, 5, 16. (Eur, Arstph. Xen., Plat., sqq.; 
Sept. for naps, Num. xxii. 37; for 13}, Jer. iil. 23; for 
8, Jer. x. 195y* 

ὄξος, -eos (-ovs), τό, (ὀξύς), vinegar (Aeschyl, Hip- 
poer., Arstph., Xen., sqq.; for Yon, Ruth ii. 14; Num. 
vi. 3, etc.) ; used in the N. T. for Lat. posca, i. e. the 
mixture of sour wine or vinegar and water which the 
Roman soldiers were accustomed to drink: Mt. xxvii. 
34 RLmrg.,48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix. 
29!sq** 

ὀξύς, -eia, -v, [allied w. Lat. acer, acus, ete.; cf. Curtius 
§ 2]; 1. sharp (fr. Hom. down): ῥομφαία, δρέπα- 
vov, Rev. i. 16; ii. 12; xiv. 14, 17 sq.; xix. 15, (Is. v. 
98; Ps. lvi. (lvii.) 5). 2. swifl, quick, (so fr. Hdt. 
5,9 down; cf. ὠκύς fleet): Ro. iii. 15 (Am. ii. 15; Prov. 
xxii. 29).* 

ὀπή, -ῆς, 7, (perh. fr. dy [root ὁπ (see opaw); cf. Cur- 
tius $ 627 ]), prop. through which one can see (Pollux [2, 
53 p. 179] ὀπή, δ ἧς ἔστιν ἰδεῖν, cf. Germ. Luke, Loch 
[?2]), an opening, aperture, (used of a window, Cant. v. 
4) : of fissures in the earth, Jas. iii. 11 (Ex. xxxiii. 22); 
of caves in rocks or mountains, Heb. xi. 38 [here R. V. 
holes]; Obad. 3. (Of various other kinds of holes and 
openings, in Arstph., Aristot., al.) * 

ὄπισθεν, (see ὀπίσω), adv. of place, from behind, on the 
back, behind, after: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; 
Rev. iv. 6; v. 1 (on which see γράφω, 3). As a prepo- 
sition it is joined with the gen. (like ἔμπροσθεν, ἔξωθεν, 
ete. [W. $ 54, 6; B. $ 146, 1]): Mt. xv. 23; Lk. xxiii. 
26; [Rev. i. 10 WH mrg.]. (From Hom. down; Sept. 
for ‘78, sometimes for nw.) ἢ 

ὀπίσω, ([perh.] fr. ἡ ὄπις ; and this fr. &zo, ἕπομαι, to 
follow [but ef. Vanicek p. 530]), adv. of place and time, 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3r, Ws and esp. for Ms; 
(at the) back, behind, after; 1. adverbially of 
place: ἑστᾶναι, Lk. vii. 38; ἐπιστρέψαι ὀπίσω, back, 
Mt. xxiv. 18 (ὑποστρέφειν ὀπίσω, Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 3); 
τὰ ὀπίσω, the things that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 (14); 
εἰς Ta ὀπίσω ἀπέρχεσθαι, to go backward, Vulg. abire re- 
trorsum, Jn. xviii. 6 ; to return home, of those who grow 
recreant to Christ's teaching and cease to follow him, 
Jn. vi. 665; στρέφεσθαι, to turn one's self back, Jn. xx. 
14; ἐπιστρέφειν, to return back to places left, Mk. xiii. 
16; Lk. xvii. 31; ὑποστρέψαι eis rà ὀπίσω, trop., of those 
who return to the manner of thinking and living already 
abandoned, 2 Pet. ii. 21 Lehm.; βλέπειν (Vulg. [aspicere 
or] respicere retro [ A. V. to look back ]), Lk. ix. 62. 2. 
By a usage unknown to Grk. auth., as a prep. with the 
gen. [W. $54, 6; B. $146, 1]; a. of place: Rev. 

29 


449 








eu 
οπου 


i. 10 [WH mrg. ὄπισθεν]; xii. 15, (Num. xxv. 8; Cant. 
ii. 9); in phrases resembling the Hebr. [cf. W. 30; B. 
τι. s. and 172 (150)]: ὀπίσω τινὸς ἔρχεσθαι to follow any 
one as a guide, to be his disciple or follower, Mt. xvi. 
24; Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34 RL Tr mrg. WH; [ct. Lk. 
xiv. 27]; also ἀκολουθεῖν, Mk. viii. 34 GT Tr txt.; Mt. 
x. 38, (see ἀκολουθέω, 2 fin.) ; πορεύεσθαι, to join one's 
self to one as an attendant and follower, Lk. xxi. 8 (Sir. 
xlvi. 10); to seek something one lusts after, 2 Pet. ii. 
10 [ef. W. 594 (553); B. 184 (160)]; ἀπέρχομαι ὀπίσω 
τινός, to go off in order to follow one, to join one's party, 
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; to run after a thing which one 
lusts for [cf. B. τι. 5.1, ἑτέρας σαρκός, Jude 7; δεῦτε ὀπίσω 
μου (see δεῦτε, 1), Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17; ἀποστέλλειν 
τινὰ ὀπίσω τινός, Lk. xix. 14; ἀφιστάναι, ἀποσπᾶν τινα 
ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ, to draw one away to (join) his party, Acts 
v.37; xx. 30; ἐκτρέπεσθαι, to turn out of the right path, 
turn aside from rectitude, 1 Tim. v. 15; by a pregnant 
construction, after θαυμάζειν, to wonder after i. e. to be 
drawn away by admiration to follow one [B. 185 (160 
sq.) ], Rev. xiii. 3 (πᾶς ὁ λαὸς ἐξέστη ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ, 1 S. 
xiii. 7); ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, [A. V. get thee behind me], out 
of my sight: Lk. iv. 8 RLbr.; Mt. iv. 10 [GL br.]; 
xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. b. of time, afler: ἔρχεσθαι 
ὀπίσω τινός, to make his publie appearance after (sub- 
sequently to) one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 
30, (ὀπίσω τοῦ σαββάτου, Neh. xiii. 19).* 

ὁπλίζω: [1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. ὁπλίσασθε] ; 
(ὅπλον); fr. Hom. down; to arm, furnish with arms; 
univ. to provide; mid. ri, to furnish one's self with a thing 
(as with arms); metaph. τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε, 
[A. V. arm yourselves with i. e.] take on the same mind, 
1 Pet. iv. 1 (θράσος, Soph. Electr. 995). [Comp.: ka6- 
οπλίζω.} * 

ὅπλον [allied to éra, Lat. sequor, socius, etc. ; Curtius 
§ 621], -ov, 7d, as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, any tool 
or implement for preparing a thing, (like the Lat. arma) ; 
hence 1. plur. arms used in warfare, weapons: 
Jn. xviii. 3; 2 Co. x. 4; metaph. τῆς δικαιοσύνης, which 
ἡ δικ. furnishes, 2 Co. vi. 7; τοῦ φωτός, adapted to the 
light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 12 [here L mrg. 
ἔργα]. 2. an instrument: ὅπλα ἀδικίας, for commit- 
ting unrighteousness, opp. to ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης, for prac- 
tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.* 

ὁποῖος, -οία, -otov, (ποῖος w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down], 
of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13; 
Gal. ii. 6; 1 Th. i. 9; Jas. i. 24; preceded by τοιοῦτος, 
[such as], Acts xxvi. 29.* 

ὁπότε, (πότε w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down], when [cf. 
B. § 139, 34; W. $41 b. 3]: Lk. vi. 3 RG T (where L 
Tr WH ére).* 

ὅπου, (from ποῦ and the rel. 6), [from Hom. down], 
where ; 1. adv. of place, a. in which place, 
where ; a. in relative sentences with the Indica- 
tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place; 
as, ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. ὅπου ete. Mt. vi. 19; add, ib. 20; xiii. 5; 
xxvii. 6; Mk. vi. 55; ix. 44, 46, [which verses TWH 
om. Trbr.], 48; Lk.xii.33; Jn.i.28; iv. 20, 46; vi. 23; 


> , 
oTTaVv@ 


vii. 42; x. 40; xi.30; xii.1; xviii. 1, 20; xix. 18, 20, 41; 
xx.12; Acts xvii 1; Rev.xi.8; xx.10. it refers to 
ἐκεῖ or ἐκεῖσε to be mentally supplied in what precedes 
or follows: Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Mk. ii. 4; iv. 15; v. 40; 
xiii 14; Jn.iii. 8; vi.62; vii. 34; xi.32; xiv.3; xvii. 
24; xx.19; Ro.xv.20; Heb.ix.16; x. 18; Rev. ii. 13. 
it refers to ἐκεῖ expressed in what follows: Mt. vi. 21; 
Lk.xii.34; xvii. 37; Jn. xii. 26; Jas.iii. 16. in imita- 
tion of the Hebr. τυ (Gen. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10, 
ete.) : ὅπου ἐκεῖ, Rev. xii. 6 [G T Tr WH], 14, (see ἐκεῖ, 
a.); ὅπου... ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Rev. xvii. 9. ὅπου also refers 
to men, so that it is equiv. to with (among) whom, in 
whose house: Mt. xxvi. 57; [add, Rev. ii. 13; ef. W. $ 54, 
7 fin.]; in which state (viz. of the renewed man), Col. iii. 
11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which 
it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. whereas], 
2 Pet. ii. 11 (in the same sense in indir. quest., Xen. 
mem. 3, 5, 1). ὅπου ἄν, wherever, — with impf. indic. 
(see ἄν, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [ Tdf. ἐάν]; with aor. sub- 
june. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mk. ix. 18 (where L T Tr WH ózov 
ἐάν); Mk. xiv. 9 [here too T WH ὅπ. ἐάν; also ὅπου ἐάν 
(see ἐάν, IL), Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14", (in 
both which last pass. L Tr ὅπου àv); with subj. pres. 
Mt. xxiv. 28. B. in indir. questions [yet cf. W. $ 57, 
2 fin], with subjunc. aor.: Mk. xiv. 14°; Lk. xxii. 
duc b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a 
place instead of ὅποι, into which place, whither, (see 
ἐκεῖ, b.): foll. by the indic., Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36; 
xiv. 4; xxi. 18; [Jas. iii. 4 T Tr WH (see below)]; ózov 
av, where(whither)soever, w. indie. pres, Rev. xiv. 4 L 
Tr WH [cf. below], cf. B. § 139,30; with subjunc. pres., 
Lk.ix.57 RG TWH [al. ὅπ. ἐάν, see below]; Jas. iii. 4 
[RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RG T (see above); ὅπου ἐάν, w. 
subjunc. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 2. 
It gets the force of a conditional particle if (in case 
that, in so far as, [ A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 11 above)]): 
1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 43, 1, and often in Grk. 
writ.; cf. Grimm on 4 Macc. ii. 14; Meyer on 1 Co. iii. 
3; [Müller on Barn. ep. 16, 6]).* 

ὀπτάνω (OIITO): to look at, behold; mid. pres. ptep. 
omravópevos; to allow one's self to be seen, to appear: τινί, 
Aetsi.3. (1 K.viii. 8; Tob. xii. 19; [Graec. Ven. Ex. 
xxxiv. 24].) ^ 

ὀπτασία. -as, 7, (ὀπτάζω) ; 1. the act of exhibiting 
one's self to view: ὀπτασίαι κυρίου, 2 Co. xii. 1 [ A. V. 
visions; cf. Meyer ad loc.] (ἐν ἡμέραις ὀπτασίας pov, Add. 
to Esth. iv. ]. 44 (13); [cf. Mal. iii. 2]; ἥλιος ἐν ὀπτασίᾳ, 
coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sight, a vision, 
an appearance presented to one whether asleep or 
awake: οὐράνιος ont. Acts xxvi. 19; ἑωρακέναι ὀπτασίαν, 
Lk. i. 22; w. gen. of appos. ἀγγέλων, Lk. xxiv. 23. A 
later form for ὄψις [cf. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for 
132, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23; x. 1, 7 sq.* 

ὀπτός, -ἤ, -óv, (ὀπτάω [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled: 
Lk. xxiv. 42. (Ex. xii. 8, 9; in class. Grk. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

ὄπτω, see opda. 

ὀπώρα, -as, ἡ, (derived by some fr. ὄπις [cf. ὀπίσω], 


450 








ὅπως 


ἕπομαι, and ὥρα; hence, the time that follows the ὥρα 
[Curtius § 522]; by others fr. ózós [cf. our sap] juice, 
and ópa, i.e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when 
fruits become ripe), fr. Hom. down; 1. the season 
which succeeds θέρος, from the rising of Sirius to that of 
Arcturus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days 
(the year being divided into seven seasons as follows: 
fap, θέρος, ὀπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπορητός, χειμών, φυτα- 
λιά). 2. ripe fruits (of trees): σοῦ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας: 
τῆς ψυχῆς for ὧν ἡ ψυχή σου ἐπιθυμεῖ, Rev. xviii. 14. 
(Jer. xlvii. (xl.) 10, and often in Grk. writ.) * 

ὅπως, (fr. πῶς and the relat. 6), with the indicative, a. 
relat. adverb but, like the Lat. ut, assuming also the 
nature of a conjunction [ef. W. 449 (418 sq.)]. Ι. 
As an Adverb; as, in what manner, how; once so in 
the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indic.: οὐκ 
ἔγνως. ὅπως κτλ. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann, 
Scholia etc. IL A Conjunction, Lat. uf, an- 
swering to the Germ. dass, that; in class. Grk. with the: 
optat. and subjunc., and fut. indie.; cf. esp. Klotz ad 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 sqq. But the distinction observed 
between these constructions by the more elegant Grk. 
writ. is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except 
Mt. xxvi. 59 L T Tr (ὅπως θανατώσουσιν), [1 Co. i. 29 
Rec.?7], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for 
in Mk. v. 23, for ὅπως . . . ζήσεται, L txt. T Tr WH have 
correctly restored tva . . . ζήσῃ) ; cf. W. 289 (271); B. 
233 (201) sq.; [214 (185)]. 1. It denotes the pur- 
pose or end, in order that; with the design or to the 
end that; that; a. without dv, — after the present, 
Mt. vi. 2, 16; Philem. 6; Heb. ix. 15; after ἐστέ to be 
supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts ix. 17; 
Heb. ii. 9; ὅπως μή, Lk. xvi. 26; after the imper- 
fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [RG (see above)]; Acts ix. 24; 
after the aorist, Acts ix. 2, 12; xxv. 26; Ro. ix. 17; 
Gal.i.4; ὅπως μή, Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29; after the 
pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57; after the future, Mt. xxiii. 
35; and Rec. in Acts xxiv. 26; after an aor. sub- 
june. by which something is asked for, Mk. v. 23 Rec. ; 
after imperatives, Mt. ii. 8; v. 16, 45; vi. 4; Acts 
xxiii. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 11; ὅπως μή, Mt. vi. 18; after 
clauses with tva and the aor. subjunc., Lk. xvi. 28; 2 Co. 
viii. 14; 2 Th. i. 12. Noteworthy is the phrase ὅπως 
πληρωθῇ, i. e. that acc. to God's purpose it might be 
brought to pass or might be proved by the event, of O. T. 
prophecies and types (see ἵνα, II. 3 fin.): Mt. ii. 23; 
viii. 17; xii. 17 (where L T Tr WH ἵνα); xiii. 35. b. 
ὅπως àv, that, if it be possible, Mt. vi. 5 RG; that, if what 
I have just said shall come to pass, Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii. 
20 (19) [R. V. that so]; xv. 17; Ro. iii. 4 [B. 234 (201)]; 
exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. $ 42, 6. 2. As 
in the Grk. writ. also (cf. W. 338 (317); [B. $ 139, 41]), 
ὅπως with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray- 
ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote 
what one wishes to be done: Mt. viii. 34 [here L ἵνα] ; 
ix. 38; Lk. vii. 3; x.2; xi. 37; Acts viii. 15, 24; ix. 2; 
xxiii. 20; xxv.3; Jas.v.16; after a verb of deliber- 
ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Mk. iii. 6, (fr. which exx. 


ὅραμα 


it is easy to see how the use noted in II. arises from 
the original adverbial force of the particle; for συμβούλ. 
ἔλαβον, ὅπως ἀπολέσωσιν αὐτόν, they took counsel to de- 
stroy him is equiv. to how they might destroy him, and 
also to to this end that they might destroy him; cf. Kiihner 
§ 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. 892).* 

ὅραμα, ros, τό, (ὁράω), that which is seen, a sight, spec- 
tacle: Acts vii. 31; Mt. xvii. 95 a sight divinely granted 
in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision, Acts x. 17, 19; δ ὁρά- 
ματος, Acts xviii. 9; ἐν δράματι, Acts ix. 10, 12 [RG]; 
x. 3; ὅραμα βλέπειν, Acts xii. 9; ἰδεῖν, Acts xi. 5; xvi. 
10. (Xen, Aristot, Plut, Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. εἰκών] ; 
Sept. several times for 72, [Wr Chald. Nr ete.; see 
ὀπτασία.) 

ὅρασις, -eos, 7, (ὁράω) ; 1. the act of seeing: óp- 
μάτων χρῆσις εἰς ὅρασιν, Sap. xv. 15; the sense of sight, 
Aristot. de anima 3, 2; Diod. 1, 59; Plut. mor. p. 440 sq.; 
plur. the eyes, ἐκκόπτειν τὰς ὁράσεις, Diod. 2, 6. 2. 
appearance, visible form: Rev. iv. 8 (Num. xxiv.4; Ezek. 
i. 5, 26, 28; Sir. xli. 20, etc.). S. a vision, i. e. an 
appearance divinely granted in an eestasy: Rev. ix. 17; 
ὁράσεις ὄψονται, Acts ii. 17 fr. Joelii. 28. (Sept. chiefly 
for ANT) and in.) * 

ὁρατός, -7, -óv, (ópdc), visible, open to view: neut. plur. 
substantively, Col. i. 16. (Xen., Plat., Theocr., Philo; 
Sept.) * 

ópáo, -&; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἑώρων (Jn. vi. 2, where 
L Tr WH ἐθεώρουν) ; pf. ἑώρακα and (T WH in Col. ii. 1, 
18; [1 Co. ix. 1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in Jn. ix. 37; xv. 24; xx. 
25; 1 Jn. iii. 6; iv. 20; 3Jn. 11) ἑόρακα (on which form 
cf. [WH. App. p.161; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The- 
saur. s. v. 2139 d.]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325; [B. 64 
(56); Veitch s. v.]), [2 pers. sing. -kes (Jn. viii. 57 Tr 
mrg.) see κοπιάω, init.], 3 pers. plur. ἑωράκασιν (and -kav 
in Col. ii. 1 L Tr WH; Lk. ix. 36 T Tr WH; see yivo- 
μαι, init.); plupf. 3 pers. sing. ἑωράκει (Acts vii. 44) ; fut. 
ὄψομαι (fr. ΟΠΤΩ), 2 pers. sing. ὄψει (cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. i. p. 347sq.; Kühner ὃ 211, 3, i. p. 536), Mt. xxvii. 
4; Jn.i.50 (51); xi. 40; but L T Tr WH [G also in Jn. 
i. 50 (51)] have restored ὄψῃ (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq. 
(37)), 2 pers. plur. ὄψεσθε, Jn. i. 39 (40) T Tr WH, etc.; 
Pass., 1 aor. ὥφθην ; fut. ὀφθήσομαι ; 1 aor. mid. subjunc. 
2 pers. plur. ὄψησθε (Lk. xiii. 28 [R G L WH txt. Tr 
mre.]) fr. a Byzant. form ὠψάμην (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
734, cf. Bttm. Aust. Spr. ii. 258 sq. ; [ Veitch s. v.]) ; Sept. 
for M87 and rmn; [fr. Hom. down]; ΤΟ SEE, i. e. 1. 
to see with the eyes: τινὰ ὁρᾶν, ἑωρακέναι, Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. 
viii. 57; xiv. 7, 9; xx. 18, 25, 29; 1 Co. ix. 1, etc. ; fut. 
ὄψομαι, Mt. xxviii. 7, 10; Mk. xvi. 7; Rev. i. 7, ete.; τὸν 
θεόν, 1 Jn. iv. 20; ἀόρατον ὡς ὁρῶν, Heb. xi. 27; with a 
ptep. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258); W. § 45, 4], 
Mt. xxiv. 30; Mk. xiii. 26; xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 27; Jn. i. 
51(52); ἑωρακέναι or ὄψεσθαι τὸ πρόσωπόν twos, Col. ii. 
1; Acts xx. 25; ὃ (which divine majesty, i. e. rod θείου 
λόγου) ἑωράκαμεν rois ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν (on this addition ef. 
W. 607 (564) ; [B. 398 (341)]), 1 Jn. i. 1; ὄψεσθαί τινα 
i. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23; ἑωρακέναι Christ, 
ie. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity 


451 








€ , 
opao 


and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36; ix. 37; xv. 24; ὁρᾶν and 
ὄψεσθαι with an acc. of the thing, Lk. xxiii. 49; Jn.i. 50 
(51) ; iv. 45; vi. 2 [L Tr WH ἐθεώρουν ; xix. 35; Acts 
li. 17; vii. 44 ; Rev. xviii. 18 [ Rec. ], etc.; [épy. x. ὄψεσθε 
(se. ποῦ μένω), Jn. i. 40 (39) T TrWH ; cf. B. 290 (250)]; 
ὄψῃ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ, the glory of God displayed in a 
miracle, Jn. xi. 40. metaph. ὄψεσθαι τὸν θεόν, τὸν κύριον, 
to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with 
God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14 ; also 
τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xxii. 4 — (a fig. borrowed 
from those privileged to see and associate with kings; 
see βλέπω, 1 b. B.) ; οὐκ εἶδος θεοῦ ἑωράκατε, trop. i. q. his 
divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye 
have not recognized, Jn. v. 37 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. 2. 
to see with the mind, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. xv. 21; 
τινά foll. by a ptep. in the acc. [B. $144, 15 b.; W.§ 45, 4], 
Acts viii. 23; τί, Col. ii. 18; with a ptep. added, Heb. ii. 
8; foll. by ὅτι, Jas. ii. 24 ; to look at or upon, observe, give 
attention to: εἴς twa, Jn. xix. 37 (Soph. El. 925; Xen. Cyr. 
4, 1, 20; ets τι, Solon in Diog. Laért. 1, 52) ; ἑωρακέναι 
παρὰ τῷ πατρί, to have learned from [see παρά, II. b.]the 
father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who 
learn what they see their fathers doing), Jn. viii. 38 
(twice in Rec. ; once in L T Tr WH); Christ is said to 
deliver to men à ἑώρακεν, the things which he has seen, 
i.e. which he learned in his heavenly state with God be- 
fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of 
God, Jn. iii. 11, 32; ἑωρακέναι θεόν, to know God's will, 
3 Jn. 11; from the intercourse and influence of Christ 
to have come to see (know) God's majesty, saving pur- 
poses, and will [cf. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7, 9; in an 
emphatie sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and 
perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an- 
other, Jn. i.18; vi. 46; ὄψεσθαι θεὸν καθώς ἐστιν, of the 
knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future 
kingdom, 1 Jn. iii. 2; ὄψεσθαι Christ, is used in refer- 
ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres- 
ence among them by his influence upon their souls 
through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is 
said ὄψεσθαι the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of 
them, ibid. 22. 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted 
with by experience, to experience: ζωήν; i. 4. to become a 
partaker of, Jn. iii. 36; ἡμέραν, (cf. Germ. erleben; see 
εἴδω, I. 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see 
to, look to; i. e. a. i. q. to take heed, beware, [see esp. 
B. $139, 49; cf. W. 503 (469)]: ὅρα μή, with aor. sub- 
june., see that . . . not, take heed lest, Mt. viii. 4 ; xviii. 10; 
Mk.i.44; 1 Th. v. 15; supply τοῦτο ποιήσῃς in Rev. xix. 
10 ; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338) ], (Xen. Cyr. 3, 
1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; El. 
1003) ; foll. by an impv., Mt. ix. 30; xxiv. 6; ὁρᾶτε καὶ 
προσέχετε ἀπό, Mt. xvi. 6; ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε ἀπό, Mk. viii. 
15; ὁρᾶτε, καὶ φυλάσσεσθε ἀπό, Lk. xii. 15; ὅρα, τί μέλ- 
λεις ποιεῖν, i. 4. weigh well, Acts xxii. 26 Rec. (ὅρα τί ποιεῖς, 
Soph. Philoct. 589). b. i.q. to care for, pay heed to: 
σὺ ὄψη [RG ὄψει (see above)], see thou to it, that will 
be thy concern, [ οἴ. W. § 40, 6], Mt. xxvii. 4; plur., 24; 
Acts xviii. 15, (Epict. diss. 2, 5, 30; 4, 6, 11 sq.; [An- 


ὀργή 


tonin. 5, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. 1 
aor. ὥφθην, I was seen, showed myself, appeared [cf. B. 52 
(45)]: Lk. ix. 31; with dat. of pers. (cf. B. u. s., [also 
§ 134, 2; cf. W. $31, 10]) : of angels, Lk. i. 11 ; xxii. 43 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii. 
2); of God, Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the 
dead, Mt. xvii. 3; Mk. ix. 4, cf. Lk. ix. 31; of Jesus after 
his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 34; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31; xxvi. 
16; 1 Co. xv. 5-8; 1 Tim.iii.16; of Jesus hereafter to 
return, Heb. ix. 28; of visions during sleep or ecstasy, 
Acts xvi. 9; Rev. xi. 19; xii. 1, 3; in the sense of com- 
ing upon unexpectedly, Acts ii. 3; vii. 26. fut. pass. àv 
ὀφθήσομαί σοι, on account of which I will appear unto 
thee, Acts xxvi. 16; on this pass. see W. $ 39, 3 N. 1; 
cf. B. 287 (247). [Cowr.: d$-, καθ-, mpo-opda. | 

[Syn. ὁρᾶν, βλέπειν, both denote the physical act: dp. 
in general, BA. the single look; óp. gives prominence to the 
discerning mind, BA. to the particular mood or point. When 
the physical side recedes, dp. denotes perception in general 
(as resulting principally from vision), the prominence in the 
word of the mental element being indicated by the constr. of 
the ace. w. inf. (in contrast with that of the ptep. required 
w. βλέπειν), and by the absol. ópas; βλέπ. on the other hand, 
when its physical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense, 
look (i. 6. open, incline) towards, Lat. spectare, vergere. 
Schmidt ch. xi. ΟἿ. θεωρέω, σκοπέω, εἴδω, I. fin.] 

ὀργή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἔν. ὀργάω to teem, denoting an internal 
motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice 
[Curtius $ 152]; ef. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicui 
in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5, 17; Most. 3, 2, 10; cf. Germ. arg, 
Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural dis- 
position, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul, 
impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly 
in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna- 
tion, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός, 
1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas.i. 19 sq.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς; in- 
dignant, [A. V. with anger], Mk. iii. 55. χωρὶς ὀργῆς, 1 
Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for 
the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. $43): of the 
punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4; διὰ τὴν 
ὀργήν, i. e. because disobedience is visited with punish- 
ment,ib.5. The ὀργή attributed to God in the N. T. is 
that in God which stands opposed to man’s disobedience, 
obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, and man- 
ifests itself in punishing the same: Jn. iii. 36; Ro. i. 18; 
iv. 15; ix. 22°; Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3; Rev. xiv. 10; xvi. 19; 
xix. 15; absol ἡ ὀργή, Ro. xii. 19 [ef. W. 594 (553)]; 
σκεύη ὀργῆς, vessels into which wrath will be poured (at 
the last day), explained by the addition κατηρτισμένα eis 
ἀπώλειαν, Ro. ix. 22°; ἡ μέλλουσα ὀργή, which at the 
last day wil be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7; Lk. 
iii. 7, [al. understand in these two pass. the (national) 
judgments immediately impending to be referred 
to—at least primarily]; also ἡ ὀργὴ 7j ἐρχομένη, 1 Th. 
i. 10; ἡμέρα ὀργῆς: the day on which the wrath of God 
will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked 
[cf. W. § 30, 2 a.], Ro. ii. 5; and ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς 
ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ (Rev. vi. 17; see ἡμέρα, 3 ad fin.) ; ἔρχεται 
ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐπί τινα, the wrath of God cometh upon 


452 











ὀρθοποδέω 


one in the infliction of penalty [cf. W. § 40, 2 4.1, Eph. 
v. 6; Col. iii. 6 [T Tr WH om. L br. ἐπί etc.]; ἔφθασε 
[κεν L txt. WH mrg.] ἐπ᾿ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργή, 1 Th. ii. 16; 
80 ἡ ὀργή passes over into the notion of retribution and 
punishment, Lk. xxi. 23; Ro. [ii. 8]; iii. 5; v. 9; Rev. 
xi. 18; τέκνα ὀργῆς, men exposed to divine punishment, 
Eph. ii. 3; εἰς ὀργήν, unto wrath, i.e. to undergo pun- 
ishment in misery, 1 Th. v. 9. ὀργή is attributed to 
Christ also when he comes as Messianic judge, Rev. vi. 
16. (Sept. for 1133, wrath, outburst of anger, Dyi, TN, 
pn, ὭΣ» ete.; but chiefly for ἢν.) Cf. Ferd. Weler, 
Vom Zone Gottes. Erlang. 1862; Ritschl, Die christl. 
Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Versioni ii. p. 118 sqq.* 

ὀργίζω : Pass., pres. ὀργίζομαι ; 1 aor. ὠργίσθην; (ὀργή); 
fr. Soph., Eur., and Thue. down; to provoke, arouse to 
anger; pass. to be provoked to anger, be angry, be wroth, 
(Sept. for 771), ὭΣ}, also for 2s ror etc.) : absol., Mt. 
xviii. 34; xxii. 7; Ln xiv. 21; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 26 [B. 
290 (250); cf. W. 88 43, 2; 55, 7]; Rev. xi. 18; τινί, 
Mt. v. 22; ἐπί τινι, Rev. xii. 17 [L om. ἐπί] as in 1 K. xi. 
9; [Andoc. 5, 10]; Isocr. p. 230c.; [cf. W. 232 (218)]. 
[Comp.: παρ-οργίζω. * 

ὀργίλος, -η, -ov, (ὀργή), prone to anger, irascible, [A. V. 
soon angry]: Tit.i. 7. (Prov. xxii. 24; xxix. 22; Xen. 
de re equ. 9, 7; Plat.[e.g. de rep. 411 b.]; Aristot. [e.g. 
eth. Nic. 2, 7, 10]; al.) * 

ὀργνιά, -Gs, ἡ, (Opéyo to stretch out), the distance 
across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to 
the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched ; 
five or six feet, a fathom: Acts xxvii. 28. (Hom., Hdt., 
Xen., al.) * 

épéyw: (cf. Lat. rego, Germ. recken, strecken, reichen, 
[Eng. reach; Curtius $ 153]); fr. Hom. down; to stretch 


forth, as χεῖρα, Hom, Il. 15, 371, ete.; pres. mid. [cf. W. 


p. 252 (237) note], to stretch one’s self out in order to 
touch or to grasp something, to reach after or desire some- 
thing:.with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1; Heb. xi. 
16; φιλαργυρίας, to give one's self up to the love of 
money (not quite accurately since duAapy. is itself the 
ὄρεξις; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.]), 1 Tim. vi. 10.* 

ὀρεινός, -7, -óv, (pos), mountainous, hilly; ἡ ὀρεινή [WH 
ὀρινή, see I, c] sc. χώρα [cf. W. 591 (550)] (which is 
added in Hdt. 1, 110; Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 3), the mountain- 
district, hill-country: Lk. i. 39, 65, (Aristot. ἢ. a. 5, 28, 
4; Sept. for ὙΠ, Gen. xiv. 10; Deut. xi. 11; Josh. ii. 
16, ete.).* 

ὄρεξις, -ews, 7, (ὀρέγομαι, q. v.), desire, longing, craving, 
for; eager desire, lust, appetite: of lust, Ro. i. 27. It is 
used both in a good and a bad sense, as well of natural 
and lawful and even of proper cravings (of the appetite 
for food, Sap. xvi. 2 sq.; Plut. mor. p. 635 ¢.; al.; ἐπι- 
στήμης, Plat. de fin. p. 414 b.), as also of corrupt and 
unlawful desires, Sir. xviii. 30; xxiii. 6; ἄλογοι and λο- 
γιστικαὶ ὀρέξεις are contrasted in Aristot. rhet. 1, 10, 7. 
[Cf. Trench § Ixxxvii.] * 

ὀρθο-ποδέω, -ῶ; (ὀρθόπους with straight feet, going 
straight; and this fr. ὀρθός and πούς) ; to walk in a 
straight course; metaph. to act uprightly, Gal. ii. 14 [cf. 


ὀρθός 


πρός, Τ 9.6}: 
(96)].* 

ὀρθός, -7, -óv, (OPQ, ὄρνυμι [to stir up, set in motion; 
ace. to al. fr. r. to lift up; ef. Fiek iii. p. 775; Vaniéek 
p. 928; Curtius p. 8487), straight, erect; i.e. a. 
upright: ἀνάστηθι, Acts xiv. 10; so with στῆναι ἴῃ 1 Esdr. 
ix. 46, and in Grk. writ., esp. Hom. b. opp. to 
σκολιός, straight i. 6. not crooked: τροχιαί, Heb. xii. 13 
(for U^, Prov. xii. 15 ete. ; [Pind., Theogn., al.]).* 

ὀρθοτομέω, -ῶ; (ὀρθοτόμος cutting straight, and this fr. 
ὀρθός and vépvo) ; 1. to cut straight: τὰς ὁδούς, to 
cut straight ways, i.e. to proceed by straight paths, 
hold a straight course, equiv. to to do right (for à), 
Prov. iii. 6; xi. 5, (riam secare, Verg. Aen. 6, 899). 2: 
dropping the idea of cutting, to make straight and smooth; 
Vulg. recte tracto, to handle aright: τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀλη- 
θείας, i. e. to teach the truth correctly and directly, 
2 Tim. ii. 15; τὸν ἀληθῆ λόγον, Eustath. opusce. p. 115, 
41. (Not found elsewhere [exc. in eccles. writ. (W. 26) ; 
e. g. constt. apost. 7, 31 ἐν τ. τοῦ κυρίου δόγμασιν; cf. 
Suicer ii. 508 sq.]. Cf. καινοτομέω, to cut new veins in 
mining; dropping the notion of cutting, to make some- 
thing new, introduce new things, make innovations or 
changes, etc.) * 

ὀρθρίζω: 3 pers. sing. impf. ὥρθριζεν; (ὄρθρος); not 
found in prof. auth. ([cf. W. 26; 33; 91 (87)]; Moeris 
[ p. 272 ed. Pierson] dp@pever ἀττικῶς, ὀρθρίζει ἑλληνικῶς) ; 
Sept. often for Dw; (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 52 
and on Sap. vi. 14); to rise early in the morning: πρός 
twa, to rise early in the morning in order to betake one's 
self to one, to resort to one early in the morning, (Vulg. 
manico ad aliquem), Lk. xxi. 38, where see Meyer.* 

ὀρθρινός, -7, -óv, (fr. ὄρθρος ; cf. ἡμερινός, ἑσπερινός, 
ὀπωρινός, πρωϊνός), a poetic [Anth.] and later form for 
ὄρθριος (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51; Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. et Alex. p. 186; [W. 25]), early: Rev. xxii. 16 
Rec.; Lk. xxiv. 22 L' T Tr WH. (Hos. vi. 4; Sap. xi. 
23 (22).)* 

ὄρθριος, -a, -ov, (fr. ὄρθρος, q. v. ; cf. ὄψιος, rpdios), early; 
rising at the first dawn or very early in the morning: Lk. 
xxiv. 22 RG (Job xxix. 7; 3 Maec. v. 10, 23). Cf. the 
preced. word. [Hom. (h. Merc. 143), Theogn., al.] * 

ὄρθρος, -ov, ó, (fr. OPQ, ὄρνυμι to stir up, rouse; cf. 
Lat. orior, ortus), fr. Hes. down; Sept. for *àrwj dawn, 
and several times for ΡΞ; daybreak, dawn: ὄρθρου Ba- 
θέος or βαθέως (see βαθέως and βαθύς [on the gen. cf. W. 
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1; 
ὄρθρου, at daybreak, at dawn, early in the morning, Jn. 
viii. 2 (Hes. opp.575; Sept. Jer. xxv. 4; xxxiii. (xxvi.) 
5, etc.); ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον, Acts v. 21 (Dio Cass. 76, 17).* 

ὀρθῶς, (ὀρθός), adv., rightly: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 43; 
x. 28; xx. 21. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.]* 

ὁρίζω; 1 aor. ὥρισα; Pass., pf. ptep. ὡρισμένος ; 1 aor. 
ptep. ὁρισθείς ; (fr. ὅρος a boundary, limit) ; fr. [ Aeschyl. 
and] Hdt. down; to define; i. e. 1. to mark out the 
boundaries or limits (of any place or thing): Hdt., Xen., 
Thuc., al.; Num. xxxiv. 6; Josh. xiii. 27. 2. to de- 


Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 26; 102 


458 


ὅρμημα 


iv. 7; καιρούς, Acts xvii. 26, (numerous exx. fr. Grk. 
auth. are given in Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 1 p. 538 sq.); 
pass. ὡρισμένος, ‘determinate,’ settled, Acts ii. 23; τὸ 
ὡρισμ. that which hath been determined, acc. to appointment, 
decree, Lk. xxii. 22; with an ace. of pers. Acts xvii. 31 
(ᾧ by attraction for ὅν [W. § 24,1; B. § 143, 8]); pass. 
with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the 
Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly 
appointed [A.V. declared] such among men by this tran- 
scendent and crowning event) ; ὁρίζω, to ordain, determine, 
appoint, Acts x. 42; foll. by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr. 
19 d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. Bed. Brunck]). [Cour.: 
dd-, ἀπο-δι-, mpo-opito. ]* 

[0pwós, see ὀρεινός.] 

ὅριον, -ov, τό, (fr. ὅρος [boundary ]), [fr. Soph. down], 
a bound, limit, in the N. T. always in plur. (like Lat. 
fines) boundaries, [R. V. borders], i. q. region, district, land, 
territory: Mt.ii.16; iv. 13; viii. 34; xv. 22, 39; xix. 1; 
Mk. v. 17; vii. 24 L T Tr WH, 31; x. 1; Acts xiii. 50. 
(Sept. very often for 5323; several times for 714333.) x 

ὁρκίζω ; (ὅρκος); 1. to force to take an oath, to 
administer an oath to: Xen. conviv. 4, 10; Dem., Polyb.; 
οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 361. 2. to adjure, (solemnly 
implore), with two ace. of pers., viz. of the one who is 
adjured and of the one by whom he is adjured (cf. Mat- 
thiae § 413, 10; [B. 147 (128)]): 1 Th. v. 27 RG (see 
évopk((o) ; Mk. v. 7; Acts xix. 13. (Sept. for j"àvw, 
τινά foll. by κατά w. gen., 1 K. ii. (iii.) 42; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 
13; ἐν, Neh. xiii. 25.) [Cowr.: ἐν- ἐξορκίζω. * 

ὅρκος, -ov, 6, (fr. ἔργω, εἴργω ; i. q. ἕρκος an enclosure, 
confinement; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 
for ΠΡ), an oath: Mt. xiv. 7,9; xxvi. 72; Mk. vi. 26; 
Lk. i. 73 [W. 628 (583); B. $144, 13]; Acts ii. 30 [W. 
226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16sq.; Jas. v. 12; by 
meton. that which has been pledged or promised with an 
oath; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(cf. Wünsche ad loc.) ].* 

ὁρκωμοσία, -as, 7, (ὁρκωμοτέω [ὅρκος and ὄμνυμι}; cf. 
ἀπωμοσία, ἀντωμοσία), affirmation made on oath, the tak- 
ing of an oath, an oath: Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek. 


xvii. 18; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92); Joseph. antt. 16,6, 2. Cf. 
Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. 1. c.) * 
ὁρμάω, -@: 1 aor. ὥρμησα; (fr. ὁρμή); 1. trans. 


to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Hom, 
down. 2. intrans. fo start forward impetuously, to 
rush, (so fr. Hom. down): εἴς τι; Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; 
Lk. viii. 33; Acts xix. 29; ἐπί τινα, Acts vii. 57.* 

ὁρμή, -ῆς, 7j, [fr. r. sar to go, flow; Fick i. p. 227; Cur- 
tius $ 502], fr. Hom. down, a violent motion, impulse : Jas. 
iii. 4; a hostile movement, onset, assault, Acts xiv. 5 [ef. 
Trench § Ixxxvii. ].* 

ὅρμημα, -ros, τό, (óppác), a rush, impulse: Rev. xviii. 
21 [here A. V. violence]. (For 5133, outburst of wrath, 
Am. i. 11; Hab. iii. 8, cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. iv. p. 123 ; 
an enterprise, venture, Hom. Il. 2, 356, 590, although in- 
terpreters differ about its meaning there [cf. Ebeling, 
Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.] ; that to which one is impelled 
or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus], 


termine, appoint: with an acc. of the thing, ἡμέραν, Heb. | Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. $ 12] p. 452c.) * 


ὄρνεον 


ὄρνεον, -ov, τό, a bird : Rev. xviii. 2; xix. 17, 21. (Sept.; 
Hom., Thuc., Xen., Plat., Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 5.) * 

ὄρνιξ [so codd. x D], i. q. ὄρνις (q. v-) : Lk. xiii. 34 Tdf. 
The nom. is not found in prof. writ., but the trisyllabie 
forms ὄρνιχος, ὄρνιχι for ὄρνιθος, etc., are used in Doric ; 
[Photius (ed. Porson, p. 348, 22) Ἴωνες ὄρνιξ .. . καὶ 
Δωριεῖς ὄρνιξ. Cf. Curtius p. 495].* 

ὄρνις, -Éos, ὁ, ἡ, (OPQ, ὄρνυμι [see ὄρθρος}: 1. ἃ 
bird ; so fr. Hom. down. 2. spec. a cock, a hen: Mt. 
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 [Tdf. ὄρνιξ, q. v.]; (so Aeschyl. 
Eum. 866; Xen. an. 4, 5, 25; Theocr., Polyb. 12, 26,1; 
[al.]).* 

ὁροθεσία, -as, 7), (fr. ὁροθέτης ; and this fr. ὅρος [a boun- 
dary; see ὅριον], and τίθημι) ; a. prop. a setting of 
boundaries, laying down limits. b. a definite limit; 
plur. bounds, Acts xvii. 26. (Eccl. writ.; [W. 25].) * 

ὄρος, -ovs, τό, (OPQ, ὄρνυμι [i. e. a rising; see dpOpos]), 
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for ^r» a mountain: Mt. v. 14; 
Lk. iii. 5; Rev. vi. 14, and often; τὸ ὄρος, the moun- 
tain nearest the place spoken of, the mountain near by 
[but see 6, II. 1 b.], Mt. v. 1; Mk.iii. 13 ; Lk. ix. 28; Jn. 
vi. 3, 15; plur. ὄρη, Mt. xviii. 12; xxiv. 16; Mk. v. 5; Rev. 
vi. 16, etc.; gen. plur. ópéov (on this uncontracted form, 
used also in Attic, cf. Bitm. Gram. § 49 note 3; W. $9, 
2 οὐ; [B. 14 (13) ; Dindorf in Fleckeisen's Jahrb. for 
1869 p. 83]), Rev. vi. 15; ὄρη μεθιστάνειν a proverb. phrase, 
used also by rabbin. writ., to remove mountains, i. e. to 
accomplish most difficult, stupendous, incredible things: 1 
Co. xiii. 2, cf. Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23. 

ὀρύσσω: 1 aor. ópv£a; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 15n, 
7122, ete. ; to dig: to make ri by digging, Mk. xii. 1; ri 
ἔν rri, Mt. xxi. 33; i.q. to make a pit, ἐν τῇ yj, Mt. xxv. 
18 [here T Tr WII ὀρ. γῆν]. [Conr.: 8t, é£opócco.]* 

ὀρφανός, -ή, -óv, (OPSOS, Lat. orbus; [Curtius $ 404 ]), 
fr. IIom. Od. 20, 68 down, Sept. for nim; bereft (of a 
father, of parents), Jas. i. 27 [ A. V. fatherless] ; of those 
bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. xiv. 18 (Lam. 
y: 3)." 

ὀρχέομαι, -odpar: 1 aor. ὠρχησάμην ; (fr. χορός, by trans- 
position ὀρχός ; cf. ἅρπω, ἁρπάζω, and Lat. rapio, μορφή 
and Lat. forma; [but these supposed transpositions are 
extremely doubtful, cf. Curtius § 189; Fick iv. 207, 167. 
Some connect ὀρχέομαι with τ. argh ‘to put in rapid mo- 
tion’; cf. Vanicek p. 59]); to dance: Mt. xi. 17 ; xiv. 6; 
Mk.vi.22; Lk. vii. 33. (From Hom. down; Sept. for 
3p? 1 Chr. xv. 29; Ecclus. iii. 4; 2 S. vi. 21.)* 

és, 7, 6, the postpositive article, which has the force of 

I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that, (Lat. hic, 
haec, hoc ; Germ. emphat. der, die, das) ; inthe N. T. only 
in the foll. instances: és δέ, but he (Germ. er aber), Jn. v. 
11L Tr WH; [Mk. xv. 23 T Trtxt. WH; cf. B. $126, 2]; 
in distributions and distinctions: ὃς μὲν - - - ὃς δέ, this 
... that, one ... another, the one... the other, Mt. xxi. 35; 
xxii. 5 L T Tr WH; xxv. 15; Lk. xxiii. 33; Acts xxvii. 
44; Ro. xiv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 7 R G ; xi. 21; 2Co. ii. 16; Jude 
22; ὃ μὲν... . ὃ δέ, the one... the other, Ro. ix. 21; [ὁ μὲν 
...66€...68 δέ, some... some... some, Mt. xiii. 23 L 
TWH); ὃ δὲ... ὃ δὲ... ὃ δέ, some... some... some, 


454 





a 
os 


Mt. xiii. 8; à (mase.) pev . . . ἄλλῳ (δὲν... ἑτέρῳ δέ [but 
LT Tr WH om. this δέ] κτλ. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; ὃ μὲν... ἄλλο 
δέ [L txt. T Tr WH καὶ ἄλλο], ΜΚ. iv. 4; with a variation 
of the construction also in the foll. pass.: ὃ uev . . . καὶ 
ἕτερον, Lk. viii. 5; ods μέν with the omission of ods δέ by 
anacoluthon, 1 Co. xii. 28; ὃς pev... ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν ete. 
one man... but he that is weak etc. Ro. xiv. 2. On this 
use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from De- 
mosth. down, cf. Matthiae $ 289 Anm. 7; Kühner $518, 
4 b. ii. p. 780; [Jelf § 816, 3 b.]; DBitn. Gram. $ 126, 3; 
B. 101 (89) ; W. 105 (100); Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507. 
II. arelative pronoun who, which, what; 3: 
in the common constr., acc. to which the relative 
agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pron. 
which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed 
by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition : 
ὁ ἀστὴρ ὃν εἶδον, Mt. ii. 9; 6. . ᾿Ιουδαῖος, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος κτλ. 
Ro. ii. 29; οὗτος περὶ οὗ ἐγὼ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα, Lk. ix. 9 ; ἀπὸ 
τῆς ἡμέρας, ἀφ᾽ ἧς, Acts xx. 18; θεὸς δι οὗ, ἐξ οὗ, 1 Co. viii. 
6, and numberless other exx. it refers to a more remote 
noun in 1 Co. i. 8, where the antecedent of ὅς is not the 
nearest noun Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, but τῷ θεῷ in 4; yet cf. W. 
157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere 
the relative is the subject of its own clause: ἀνὴρ ὅς etc. 
Jas. i. 12; πᾶς ὅς, Lk. xiv. 33 ; οὐδεὶς ὅς, Mk. x. 29; Lk. 
xviii. 29, and many other exx. 2. in constructions 
peculiar in some respect ; a. the gender of the rel- 
ative is sometimes made to conform to that of the follow- 
ing noun: τῆς αὐλῆς, 0 ἐστι πραιτώριον, Mk. xv. 16; λαμ- 
mades, ἅ εἰσι (L ἐστιν) τὰ πνεύματα, lev. iv. 5 [LT WH]; 
σπέρματι, ὅς ἐστι Χριστός, Gal. iii. 16; add, Eph. i. 14 [L 
WH txt. Tr mre. 6]; vi. 17; 1 Tim.iii. 15; Rev. v. 8 [T 
WH mre. d]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 708; Matthiae § 440 
p. 989sq.; W. $24, 3; B. $143, 3. b. in construc- 
tions ad sensum [cf. B. $143, 4]; α. the plural of 
the relative is used after collective nouns in the sing. [cf. 
W. 821,3; B. u. s.] : πλῆθος πολύ, oi ἦλθον, Lk. vi. 17; 
πᾶν τὸ πρεσβυτέριον, παρ᾽ ὧν, Acts xxii. 5; γενεᾶς, ἐν οἷς, 
Phil. ii. 15. β. κατὰ πᾶσαν πόλιν, ἐν ais, Acts xv. 36; 
ταύτην δευτέραν ὑμῖν γράφω ἐπιστολήν, ἐν ais (because the 
preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles), 
2Pet.iii.1. y. the gender of the relative is conformed 
not to the grammatical but to the natural gender of 
its antecedent [cf. W. § 21,2; B.u.s.]: παιδάριον ὅς, Jn. 
vi. 9 LT Tr WH; θηρίον ὅς, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev. 
xiii. 14 L T Tr WH; κεφαλὴ ὅς. of Christ, Col. ii. 19; [add 
μυστήριον ὅς etc. 1 Tim. iii. 16 GL T Tr WH; cf. B.u.s.; 
W. 588 sq. (547)] ; σκεύη (of men) οὕς, Ro. ix. 24; ἔθνη 
ot, Acts xv. 17; xxvi. 17 ; τέκνα, rekvía ot, Jn. i. 13; Gal. iv. 
19; 2Jn. 1, (Eur. suppl. 12) ; τέκνον ds, Philem. 10. — c. 
Inattractions[B.$143,8; W. §§ 24,1; 66, 4 sqq.]; 
a. the accusative of the rel. pron. depending on a trans. 
verb is changed by attraction into the oblique case of its 
antecedent: κτίσεως ἧς ἔκτισεν ὁ θεός, Mk. xiii. 19 [RG]; 
τοῦ ῥήματος οὗ εἶπεν, Mk. xiv. 72 [Rec.]; add, Jn. iv. 14; 
vii. 31, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. 6]; xv. 20; xxi. 10; 
Acts iii. 21, 25; vii. 17, 45; ix. 36 ; x. 39; xxii. 10; Ro. 
xv. 18; 1 Co. vi. 19; 2Co.i. 6; x. 8,13; Eph. i. 8; Tit. 


ὅς 45 


iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 Jn. iii. 
24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώ- 
aei, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; 
add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 43; xii.46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; 
Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii.21;.2 Th.i. 4; Rev. 
xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attrac- 
tion occurs where the verb governs the dative [but see 
below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for κατέναντι 
θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (see κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς. ἧς 
“ἔκραξα (for 7 [al. ἥν, cf. W. 164 (154 54.) Β. 281 (247)7), 
Acts xxiv. 21, cf. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε 
πιστῶν, ois ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς 
τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. 9, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα 
οὐδείς, for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 a.; 
Protag. p. 361 e.; de rep. 7 p.531e.; map’ ὧν βοηθεῖς, ov- 
δεμίαν λήψει χάριν, for παρὰ τούτων, οἷς κτὰ. Aeschin. f. 
lez. p. 43 (117); ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237; 
[B. $143, 11; W. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to 
recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. T.; cf. 
Meyer on Eph. i. 81). The foll. expressions, however, 
ean hardly be brought under this construction: τῆς χάρι- 
τος ἧς ἐχαρίτωσεν (as if for 7), Eph. i. 6 LT Tr WH; τῆς 
KAnoews, ἧς ἐκλήθητε, Eph. iv. 1; διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς 
παρακαλούμεθα, 2 Co. i. 4, but must be explained agree- 
ably to such phrases as χάριν χαριτοῦν, κλῆσιν καλεῖν, etc., 
[(i. e. accus. of kindred abstract subst.; cf. W. $32, 2; B. 
§ 131, 5)]; ef. W.[and B.u.s.] β. The noun to which 
the relative refers is so conformed to the case of the rela- 
tive clause that either aa. it is itself incorporated 
into the relative construction, but without the article [ B. 
§143,7; W. $24, 2b.]: ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα ᾿Ιωάννην, οὗτος 
ἠγέρθη, for "Ioávvgs, ὃν κτὰ. Mk. vi. 16; add, Lk. xxiv. 1; 
Philem. 10; Ro. vi. 17; εἰς ἣν οἰκίαν, ἐκεῖ, i.q. ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, εἰς 
ἥν, Lk. ix. 4; or BB. it is placed before the rela- 
tive clause, either with or without the article [ W. § 24, 
2a.; B.§ 144, 13]: τὸν ἄρτον ὃν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ 
σώματος, 1 Co. x. 16; λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦν- 
τες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη (for ὁ λίθος, ὃς κτλ.), Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. 
xii. 105 Dkoxx, 12: 1, Retin 7- y. Attraction in the 
phrases ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας for ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, 7 [ W. § 24, 1 
fin.]: Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; ἀφ᾽ 
ἧς ἡμέρας for ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμέρας, ἧ, Col. i. 6, 9; ὃν τρόπον, as, 
just as, for τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ὅν or ᾧ, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 
34; Acts vii. 28; [preceded or] foll. by οὕτως, Acts i. 11; 
2 Tim. iii. 8. 8. A noun common to both the principal 
clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause 
after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι 
κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε, for κριθ. ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, 
Mt. vii. 2; xxiv. 44; Mk. iv. 24; Lk. xii. 40, ete. 3. 
The Neuter ó a. refers to nouns of the masculine 
and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which 
is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing [ef. 
B. $129, 6]: λεπτὰ δύο, 6 ἐστι κοδράντης, Mk. xii. 42; 
ἀγάπην, 6 ἐστι σύνδεσμος, Col. iii. 14 L T Tr WH; ἄρτους, 
6 etc. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. T Tr WH. b. is used in the 
phrases [B. u. s.] — ὅ ἐστιν, which (term) signifies: Boa- 
νεργὲς ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ Bp. Mk. iii. 17 ; add, v. 41; vii. 11, 34; 
Heb. vii. 2; 6 ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, and the like: Mt. 





5 ὅς 
i. 23; ΜΚ. xv. 34; Jn. i. 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; ix. 7; xx. 
16. c. refers to a whole sentence [B. u.s.]: τοῦτον 


ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ ... ἐσμὲν μάρτυρες, Acts ii. 32; iii. 
15; περὶ ov . . . ὁ λόγος, Heb. v. 11; ὃ καὶ ἐποίησαν (and 
the like), Acts xi. 30; Gal. ii. 10; Col. i. 29; 6 (which 
thing viz. that I write a new commandment [cf. B. $143, 
3]) ἐστιν ἀληθές, 1 Jn. ii. 8; 6 (sc. to have one's lot as- 
signed in the lake of fire) ἐστιν ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερος, Rev. 
xxi. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Hom. 
down, in the second of two coordinate clauses a pro- 
noun of the third person takes the place of the relative 
(cf. Passow ii. p. 552^; [L. and S. s. v. B. IV.1]; Β. 8 143, 
6; [W. 149 (141)]): ὃς ἔσται ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος kai rà σκεύη 
αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ μὴ καταβάτω, Lk. xvii. 31; ἐξ οὗ rà πάντα 
καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a 
usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun 
αὐτός is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ; 
as, ἧς τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς, Mk. vii. 25; see αὐτός, IT. 5. 6. 
The relative pron. very often so includes the demonstra- 
tive οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος that for the sake of perspicuity a 
demons. pron. must be in thought supplied, either in 
the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which 
follows it [W. § 23, 2; B. §127, 5]. The foll. examples 
may suflice: a. a demons. pron. must be added in 
thought in the preceding clause: οἷς ἡτοίμασται, for 
τούτοις δοθήσεται, ois Hr. Mt. xx. 23; δεῖξαι (sc. ταῦτα), 
à δεῖ γενέσθαι, Rev. 1.1; xxii. 6; ᾧ for ἐκεῖνος ᾧ, Lk. vii. 
43,41; οὗ for τούτῳ ov, Ro. x. 14; with the attraction of 
ὧν for τούτων d, Lk. ix. 36 ; Ro. xv. 18 ; ὧν for ταῦτα ὧν, 
Mt. vi. 8; with a prep. intervening, ἔμαθεν ἀφ᾽ ὧν (for 
ἀπὸ τούτων ἃ) ἔπαθεν, Heb. v. 8. b. a demons. pron. 
must be supplied in the subsequent clause: Mt. x. 38; 
Mk. ix. 40; Lk. iv. 6; ix. 50; Jn. xix. 22; Ro. ii. 1, and 
often. 7. Sometimes the purpose and end is ex- 
pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. qui 
for ut is): ἀποστέλλω ἄγγελον, ὃς (for which Lehm. in Mt. 
has kat) κατασκευάσει, who shall ete. i. q. that he may ete., 
Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; [1 Co. ii. 16]; so also in 
Grk. auth., cf. Passow s. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553; [L. and 
S. s. v. B. IV. 4]; Matthiae § 481, d.; [ Kühner $ 563, 3 b.; 
Jelf § 836, 4; B. $139, 32];—or the cause: ὃν παρα- 
δέχεται, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb. 
xii. 6; — or the relative stands where ὥστε might be used 
(cf. Matthiae $ 479 a.; Krüger § 51, 13, 10; [Kühner 
$563,3 6.7; Passow s. v. VIII. 2, ii. p. 553^; [L. and S. 
τι. 5.7) : Lk. v. 21; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. ris, 
τί, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372; 
[cf. B. $139, 58]) : οὐκ ἔχω ὃ παραθήσω, Lk. xi. 6; by a 
later Grk. usage, in a direct quest. (cf. W. § 24, 4; B. 
$139, 59): ἐφ᾽ ὃ (or Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ) πάρει, Mt. xxvi. 50 (on 
which [and the more than doubtful use of és in direct 
quest.] see ἐπί, B. 2 a. €. p. 233” and C. I. 2 g. y. aa. p. 
235°). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a 
periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)]: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, for 
ἀντὶ τούτων ort, — because, Lk. i. 20; xix. 44; Acts xii. 23; 
2 Th. ii. 10; for which reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see 
ἀντί, 2 d.); ἐφ᾽ à, for that, since (see ἐπί, B. 2 a. 8. p. 233°); 
ag’ ov, (from the time that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25; 


er 
οσακις 


xxiv. 21, [see ἀπό, I. 4 b. p. 58°]; ἄχρις οὗ, see ἄχρι, 1 ἃ.; 
ἐξ οὗ, whence, Phil. iii. 20 cf. W. $21,3; [B.$143,4 a.]; 
ξως ob, until (see ἕως, IL. 1 b. a. p. 268"); also μέχρις ov, 
Mk. xiii. 30; ἐν 6, while, Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v. 34; Jn. v. 7; 
ἐν ots, meanwhile, Lk. xii. 1; [cf. ἐν, I. 8 6.1. 10. 
With particles: ὃς dv and ὃς ἐάν, whosoever, if any one 
ever, see ἄν, II. 2 and ἐάν, II. p. 163*; οὗ ἐάν, whereso- 
ever (whithersoever) with subjunc., 1 Co. xvi. 6 [cf. B. 105 
(92)]. ὅς ye see γέ, 2. ὃς kat, who also, he who, (cf. 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 636) : Mk. iii. 195; Lk. vi. 13 sq. ; 
x. 39 [here WH br. 7]; Jn. xxi. 20; Acts i. 11; vii. 45; 
x. 39 [ Rec. om. xac]; xii. 4; xiii. 22; xxiv. 6; Ro. v. 2; 1 
Co. xi. 23; 2 Co. iii. 6; Gal. ii. 10; Heb. i. 2, ete.; ὃς καὶ 
αὐτός, who also himself, who as well as others: Mt. xxvii. 
57. ὃς δήποτε, whosoever, Jn. v. 4 Rec.; ὅσπερ [or ὅς περ 
L Tr txt.], who especially, the very one who (cf. Klotz ad 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 724): Mk. xv. 6 [but here TWH Tr mrg. 
now read ὃν παρῃτοῦντο, q. v. ]. 11. The genitive o, 
used absolutely [ef. W. 590 (549) note; Jelf § 522, Obs. 1], 
becomes an adverb (first so in Attic writ., cf. Passow II. 
p. 546°; [Meisterhans § 50, 1]); a. where (Lat. 
ubi): Mt.ii.9; xviii.20; Lk. iv. 16sq.; xxiii. 53; Acts 
1.18; xii. 12; xvi. 13; xx. 6[ T Tr mre. ὅπου]; xxv. 10; 
xxviii. 14; Ro. iv. 15; ix. 26; 2 Co. iii. 17; Col. iii. 15 
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. xvii. 15; after verbs denoting motion 
(see ἐκεῖ, b. ; ὅπου, 1 b.) it can be rendered whither [cf. 
W. $54, 7; B. 71 (62)], Mt. xxviii. 16; Lk. x. 15; xxiv. 
28; 1 Co. xvi. 6. b. when (like Lat. ubi i.q. eo 
tempore quo, quom) : Ro. v. 20 (Eur. Iph. Taur. 320), 
[but al. take οὗ in Ro. l.c. locally]. 

ὁσάκις, (ὅσος), relative adv., as often as; with the ad- 
dition of ἄν, as often soever as, 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. [RG; cf. 
W. $42,5a.; B. $ 139, 34]; also of ἐάν, [LT Tr WH 
in 1 Οο.1]. 6.7; Rev. xi. 6. [(Lys., Plat., al.)]* 

ὅσγε, for ὅς ye, see ye, 2. 

ὅσιος, -a, -ov, and once (1 Tim. ii. 8) of two termina- 
tions (as in Plato, legg. 8 p. 831 d.; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 
71 fin.; cf. W. $ 11, 1; B. 26 (23); the fem. occurs in 
the N. T. only in the passage cited); fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for mon (cf. Grimm, Exgt. 
Hdbch. on Sap. p. 81 [and reff. s. v. ἅγιος, fin.]) ; un- 
defiled by sin, free from wickedness, religiously observing 
every moral obligation, pure, holy, pious, (Plato, Gorg. 
p. 907 b. περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους τὰ προσήκοντα πράττων 
δίκαι᾽ ἂν πράττοι. περὶ δὲ θεοὺς ὅσια. The distinction 
between δίκαιος and ὅσιος is given in the same way by 
Polyb. 23, 10,8; Schol. ad Eurip. Hee. 788; Charit. 1, 
10; [for other exx. see Trench § Ixxxviii.; Wetstein on 
Eph. iv. 24; but on its applicability to N. T. usage see 
Trench u. s.; indeed Plato elsewh. (Euthyphro p. 12 e.) 
makes δίκαιος the generic and dows the specific 
term]); of men: Tit. i. 8; Heb. vii. 26; οἱ ὅσιοι τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the pious towards God, God's pious worshippers, (Sap. 
iv. 15 and often in the Psalms); so in a peculiar and 
pre-eminent sense of the Messiah [ A. V. thy Holy One]: 
Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35, after Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10; χεῖρες (Aes- 
chyl. cho. 378; Soph. O. C. 470), 1 Tim. ii. 8. of God, 
holy: Rev. xv. 4; xvi. 5, (also in prof. auth. occasion- 


456 





ὅσος 


ally of the gods; Orph. Arg. 27; hymn. 77, 2; of God 
in Deut. xxxii. 4 for Ww; Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 17 for Ton, 
cf. Sap. v. 19); rà ὅσια Δαυΐδ, the holy things (of God) 
promised to David, i.e. the Messianie blessings, Acts: 
xiii. 34 fr. Is. lv. 3.* 

ὁσιότης, -nros, ἡ, (ὅσιος), piety towards God, fidelity in 
observing the obligations of piety, holiness: joined with 
δικαιοσύνη (see ὅσιος [and δικαιοσύνη, 1 b.]) : Lk. i. 75; 
Eph. iv. 24; Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4. (Xen. 
Plat., Isocr., al.; Sept. for qv, Deut. ix. 5; for D, 1 K. 
ἀπ: 4.) : 

ὁσίως, (ὅσιος), [fr. Eur. down]. adv., piously, holily : 
joined with δικαίως, 1 Th. ii. 10 (ἁγνῶς kai ὁσίως x. δι- 
καίως, Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7).* 

ὀσμή, -7s, ἡ, (ὄζω [q. v.]), a smell, odor: Jn. xii. 8; 
2 Co. ii. 14; θανάτου (LT Tr WH ἐκ 6av.), such an odor 
as is emitted by death (i.e. by a deadly, pestiferous 
thing, a dead body), and itself causes death, 2 Co. ii. 
16; ζωῆς (or ἐκ ζωῆς) such as is diffused (or emitted) by 
life, and itself imparts life, ibid. [A. V. both times 
savor]; ὀσμὴ εὐωδίας, Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18; see εὐω- 
dia, Ὁ. (Tragg. Thue., Xen., Plat., al.; in Hom. ὀδμή; 
Sept. for m7.) * 

ὅσος, -ἡ, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], a relative adj. corre- 
sponding to the demon. τοσοῦτος either expressed or un- 
derstood, Lat. quantus, -a, -um; used a. of space 
[as great as]: τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς (Rec. adds τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν) 
ὅσον kai [ἃ T Tr WH om. καί] τὸ πλάτος, Rev. xxi. 16; 
of time [as long as]: ἐφ᾽ ὅσον χρόνον, for so long time 
as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; also 
without a prep., ὅσον χρόνον, Mk. ii. 19; neut. ἐφ᾽ door, 
as long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 8, 25); 
ἔτι μικρὸν ὅσον ὅσον, yet a litlle how very, how very, (Vulg. 
modicum [ali |quantulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Heb. 
x. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp- 
213; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; W. 247 (231) 
note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul- 
titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as: 
neut. ὅσον, Jn. vi. 11; plur. ὅσοι, as many (men) as, all 
who, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. iii. 10; Acts iv. 6, 34; xiii. 48; 
Ro. ii. 12; vi. 3; Gal. iii. 10, 27; Phil. iii. 15; 1 Tim. vi.. 
1; Rey. ii. 24; ὅσαι ἐπαγγελίαι, 2 Co. i. 20; ὅσα ἱμάτια, 
Acts ix. 39; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often whatsoever], 
Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 3; Ro. iii. 19; xv. 
4; Jude10; Rev.i.2. πάντες ὅσοι, [all as many as], 
Mt. xxii. 10 [here T WH π. ovs]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8; 
Acts v. 36 sq.; neut. πάντα ὅσα [all things whatsoever, all 
that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Lk. 
xviii. 22; Jn.iv. 29 [T WH Tr mrg. z. d], 39 [T WH Tr 
txt. z. d]; πολλὰ ὅσα, Jn. xxi. 25 R G, (Hom. 1]. 22, 380; 
Xen. Hell 3, 4, 3). dao... οὗτοι, Ro. viii. 14; ὅσα. 

.. ravra, Phil. iv. 8; 60a... ἐν τούτοις, Jude 10; ὅσοι 

ον αὐτοί, Jn. i. 19; Gal. vi. 16. ὅσοι ἄν or ἐάν, how many 
soever, as many soever as [cf. W. § 42, 3]; foll. by an 
indic. pret. (see ἄν, IT. 1), Mk. vi. 56; by an indic. pres. 
Rev. iii. 19; by a subjunc. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28; 
vi.11; Lk. ix. 5 [Rec.]; Acts ii. 39 [here Lehm. ods av]; 
Rev. xiii. 155 ὅσα dv, Mt. xviii. 18; Jn. xi. 22; xvi. 13, 


a 
οσπερ 


[R 61; πάντα ὅσα ἄν, all things whatsoever : foll. by sub- 
junc. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjunc. aor., Mt. xxi. 22; 
xxiii. 3; Acts iii. 22. ὅσα in indirect disc.; how many 
things: Lk. ix. 10; Acts ix. 165; xv. 12; 2 Tim. i. 18. CG: 
of importance: ὅσα, how great things, i.e. how ex- 
traordinary, in indir. disc., Mk. iii. 8 [Lmrg. d]; v. 
19 sq.; Lk. viii. 39; Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [al. take it of 
num ber in these last two exx. how many; cf. b. above]; 
how great (i. 6. bitter), κακά, Acts ix. 13. d. of 
measure and degree, in comparative sentences, acc. 
neut. ὅσον . .. μᾶλλον περισσότερον, the more . . . so much 
the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 36; καθ᾽ ὅσον 
with a compar., by so much as with the compar. Heb. iii. 
3; καθ᾽ ὅσον ... κατὰ τοσοῦτον [τοσοῦτο L'T Tr WH], 
Heb. vii. 20, 22; καθ᾽ ὅσον (inasmuch) as foll. by οὕτως, 
Heb. ix. 27; τοσούτῳ with a compar. foll. by ὅσῳ with 
a compar. by so much...as, Heb. i. 4 (Xen. mem. 1, 
4,40; Cyr. 7,5, 5 sq.); without τοσούτῳ, Heb. viii. 6 
ΓΑ. V. by how much]; τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ (without 
μᾶλλον), Heb. x. 25; dca... τοσοῦτον, how much . . . so 
much, Rev. xviii. 7; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον, for as much as, in so far 
as, without ἐπὶ τοσοῦτο, Mt. xxv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13. 

ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ, see ὅς, 7j, 6, 10. 

ὀστέον, contr. ὀστοῦν, gen. -ov, τό, [akin to Lat. os, 
ossis; Curtius § 213, cf. p. 41], a bone: Jn. xix. 36; plur. 
ὀστέα, Lk. xxiv. 39; gen. ὀστέων, (on these uncontr. 
forms cf. [ WH. App. p. 157]; W. 8. 8, 2 d.; [B. p. 13 
(12)]), Mt. xxiii. 27; Eph. v. 30 [R G Tr mrg. br.]; Heb. 
xi. 22. (From Hom. down; Sept. very often for Dy.) * 

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ,τι (separated by a hypodiastole [comma], 
to distinguish it from ὅτε; but L T Tr write 6 τι, without 
a hypodiastole [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 111], leaving a little 
space between 6 and τι; [WH ὅτι]; cf. W. 46 (45 sq.); 
LLipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr. 
§ 411]), gen. ovrwos (but of the oblique cases only the 
acc. neut. 6,7. and the gen. ὅτου, in the phrase éos ὅτου, 
are found in the N. T.), [fr. Hom. down], comp. of és 
and tis, hence prop. any one who; i.e. 1. whoever, 
every one who: ὅστις simply, in the sing. chiefly at the 
beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in 
Matt.; w. an indic. pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice) ; Mk. viii. 
34 (where L Tr WH e τις); Lk. xiv. 27; neut. Mt. xviii. 
28 Rec.; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RG Tr mrg.], 41; xxiii. 
12, ete.; Jas. ii. 10 RG; plur. οἵτινες, whosoever (all those 
who): w. indic. pres., Mk. iv. 20; Lk. viii. 15; Gal. v. 4; 
w. indic. aor., Rev. i. 7; ii. 24; xx. 4; πᾶς ὅστις, w. indic. 
pres. Mt. vii. 24; w. fut. Mt. x. 32; ὅστις w. subjunc. 
(where ἄν is wanting very rarely [cf. W. $ 42, 3 (esp. 
fin.); B. $ 139, 31]) aor. (having the force of the fut. 
pf. in Lat.), Mt. xviii. 4 Rec.; Jas.ii. 10 L T Tr WH. 
ὅστις ἄν w. subjunc. aor. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mt. x. 33 [RG 
T]; xii. 50;-w. subjunc. pres. Gal. v. 10 [ἐάν T Tr WH]; 
neut. w. subjune. aor., Lk. x. 35; Jn. xiv. 13 [ Tr mrg. 
WH mrg. pres. subjunc.]; xv. 16 [Tr τσ. WH mrz. 
pres. subjune.]; with subjunc. pres., Jn. ii. 5; 1 Co. xvi. 
2 [Tr WH ἐάν; WH mrg. aor. subjunc.]; ὃ ἐάν τι for ὅ,τι 
dv w. subjunc. aor. Eph. vi. 8 [RG]; πᾶν ὅ,τι dv or ἐάν 
w. subjunc. pres., Col. iii. 17, 23 [Rec.; cf. B. $ 139, 19; 


457 








ὀσφύ: 


W. § 42, 51. 2. it refers to a single person or thing, 
but so that regard is had to a general notion or 
class to which this individual person or thing belongs, 
and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as, 
of such a nature that, (cf. Kühner § 554 Anm. 1, ii. p. 
905; [Jelf § 816, 5]; Lücke on 1 Jn. i. 2, p. 210 sq.): 
ἡγούμενος, ὅστις ποιμανεῖ, Mt. ii. 6; add, Mt. vii. 26; xiii. 
52; xvi. 28: χὰ ἢν, πεν τ: ΜΕ χυ- ἢ: Dico: T EVITE 
37; vill. 8; Jn. viii. 25; xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.]; Acts 
xl. 28: xvi. 19: πεῖν ἢ EOS ΣΤ 4... Co, τ, ἢ: ΜΙ ΤΡ 
[Tdf. εἴ τις7; Gal. iv. 24, 26; v. 19; Phil. ii. 20; Col. ii. 
23; 2 Tim.i.5; Heb. ii. 3; viii. 5; x. 11; xii. 5; Jas. iv- 
14; 1 Jn.i. 2; Rev. i. 12; ix. 4; xvii. 12; ὁ ναὸς τοῦ θεοῦ 
ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς (where οἵτινες makes refer- 
ence to ἅγιος) and such are ye, 1 Co. iii. 17 [some refer it 
to ναός]. 3. Akin to the last usage is that whereby 
it serves to give a reason, such as equiv. to seeing 
that he, inasmuch as he: Ro. xvi. 12 [here Lchm. br. the 
cl.]; Eph. iii. 13 ; [Col. iii. 5]; Heb. viii. 6; plur., Mt. vii. 
15; Acts x. 47; νεῖ 1} 021225, 325 11-15: wis 2.» “1 
4; xvi 7; 2 Co. viii. 10; [Phil. iv. 3 (where see Bp. 
Lghtft.)]; 1 Tim. i. 4; Tit. i.11; 1 Pet. ii. 11. 4. 
Acc. to a later Greek usage it is put for the interroga- 
tive τίς in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57; 
Lachmann, larger ed., vol. i. p. xliii; B. 253 (218); cf. 
W. 167 (158)); thus in the N. T. the neut. 6, τι stands 
for τί i. q. διὰ (in Mk. ii. 16 T Tr WH [cf. 7 WH mrz.]; 
ix. 11, 28, (Jer. ii. 36; 1 Chr. xvii. 6 — for which in the 
parallel, 2 S. vii. 7, tva τί appears; Barnab. ep. 7, 9 
[(where see Müller); cf. Tf. Proleg. p. 125; Evang. 
Nicod. pars i. A. xiv. 3 p. 245 and note; cf. also Soph. 
Lex. s. v. 4]); many interpreters bring in Jn. viii. 25 
here; but respecting it see ἀρχή, 1 b. 5. It differs 
scarcely at all from the simple relative ὅς (cf. Matthiae 
p- 1073; D. § 127,18; [Krüger § 51, 8; Ellicott on Gal. 
iv. 24; ef. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to 
Modern Greek, App. $ 24]; but cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche 
in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 182 sq., who stoutly denies. 
it): Lk. ii. 4; ix. 30; Acts xvii. 10; xxiii. 14; xxviii. 
18; Eph. i. 23. 6. ἕως ὅτου, on which see ἕως, II. 
1 b. B. p. 268° mid. 

ὀστράκινος, -ἡ, -ov, (ὄστρακον baked clay), made of 
clay, earthen: σκεύη ὀστράκινα, 2 Tim. ii. 20; with the 
added suggestion of frailty, 2 Co. iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1, 11; 
xxxix. (xxxii.) 14; Is. xxx. 14, ete. ; Hippoer., Anthol., 
[als] yr 

ὄσφρησις, -eos, 7, (ὀσφραίνομαι [to smell]), the sense of 
smell, smelling: 1 Co. xii. 17. (Plat. Phaedo p. 111 b. 
[(yet c£. Stallbaum ad loc-)]; Aristot., Theophr.) M 

ὀσφύς [or -φῦς, so R Tr in Eph. vi. 14; G in Mt. iii. 4; 
cf. Chandler $8 658, 659; Tf. Proleg. p. 101], -vos, 7, fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 1. the hip (loin), as that. 
part of the body where the ζώνη was worn (Sept. for 
pnd): Mt. iii, 4; Mk. i. 6; hence περιζώννυσθαι τὰς 
ὀσφύας, to gird, gird about, the loins, Lk. xii. 35; Eph. 
vi. 14; and ἀναζώνν. ras ὀσφ. [to gird up the loins], 1 Pet. 
i. 13; on the meaning of these metaph. phrases see ava- 


ζώννυμι. 2. a loin, Sept. several times for o-¥9n, 


“ 
orav 


the (two) loins, where the Hebrews thought the genera- 
tive power (semen) resided [?]; hence καρπὸς τῆς ὀσφύος, 
fruit of the loins, offspring, Acts ii. 30 (see καρπός, 
1 fin.); ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος τινός, to come forth out 
of one’s loins i. e. derive one’s origin or descent from 
one, Heb. vii. 5 (see ἐξέρχομαι, 2 b.); ἔτι ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ 
τινός, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor), 
Heb. vii. 10.* 

ὅταν, a particle of time, comp. of ὅτε and ay, at the time 
that, whenever, (Germ. dann wann; wann irgend); used 
of things whieh one assumes will really occur, but 
the time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fix 
(in prof. auth. often also of things whieh one assumes 
can occur, but whether they really will or not he does 
not know; hence like our in case that, as in Plato, Prot. 
p. 360 b.; Phaedr. p. 256 e.; Phaedo p. 68 d.); [ef. W. 
§ 42,5; B. $139, 33]; a. with the subjunctive 
present: Mt. vi. 2,5; x. 23; Mk. xiii. 11 [here Rec. 
aor.]; xiv. 7; Lk. xi. 36; xii. 11; xiv. 12 sq.; xxi. 7; 
Jn. vii. 27; xvi. 21; Acts xxiii. 35; I Co. iii. 4; 2 Co. 
xiii. 9; 1 Jn. v. 2; Rev. x. 7; xviii. 9; preceded by a 
specification of time: ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅταν etc., 
Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; foll. by τότε, 1 Th. v. 3; 1 Co. 
xv. 28; i. q. as oflen as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2; 
Jn. viii. 44; Ro. ii. 14; at the time when i. q. as long as, 
Lk. xi. 34; Jn. ix. 5. b. with the subjunetive 
aorist: i.q. the Lat. quando acciderit, ut w. subjunc. 
pres, Mt. v. 11; xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32; 
Mk. iv. 15 sq. 22 [R G], 31 sq.; xiii. 28; Lk. vi. 22, 26; 
viii. 13; xi. 24; xii. 54 sq.; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 4; xvi. 
21; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Lmrg. fut.]; Rev. ix. 9. i.q. 
quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Mk. viii. 38; 
ix. 9; xii. 23 [ἃ Tr WH om. L br. the cl.], 25; Lk. ix. 
26; xvi.4,9; xvii. 10; Jn.1v.25; vii 31; xil 195 xiv. 
29; xv. 26; xvi. 4, 13, 21; xxi. 18; Acts xxiii. 35; xxiv. 
22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv. 24 [here LT Tr WH pres. ], 27 
(where the meaning is, ‘when he shall have said that 
the ὑπόταξις predicted in the Psalm is now accom- 
plished’; ef. Meyer ad loc.); xvi. 2 sq. 5, 12; 2 Co. x. 
6; Col.iv.16; 1 Jn. ii. 29[L T Tr WH ἐάν]; 2 Th. i. 10; 
Heb. i. 6 (on which see εἰσάγω, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4; 
xvii. 10; xx. 7. foll. by τότε, Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 15; xxv. 
31; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; xxi. 20; Jn. viii. 28; 
1 Co. xiii. 10 [G L T Tr WH om. τότε]; xv. 28, 54; Col. 
iii. 4. c. Acc. to the usage of later authors, a 
usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more 
elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.); B. 222 (192) sq.; 
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq.; WH. App. p. 171; for exx. 
additional to these given by W. and B. u. s. see Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; ef. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to 
Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; a. 
future: when, (ὄψεσθε), Lk. xiii. 28 T Tr txt. WH 
mrg.; [1 Tim. v. 11 Lmrg.]; as often as, Rev. iv. 9 (cf. 
Bleek ad loc.). B. present: Mk. xi. 25 L T Tr 
WH; xii. 7 Trtxt.; [Lk. xi. 2 Tr mrg.]. y. very 
rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as often as, [when- 
soever], ὅταν ἐθεώρουν, Mk. iii. 11 (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex. 
xvii. 11; 1 S. xvii. 34; see ἄν, II. 1). δ. As in Byz- 


458 








“ 
οτι 


antine auth. i. q. ὅτε, when, with the indic. aorist: ὅταν 
ἤνοιξεν, Rey. viii. 1 LT Tr WH; [add ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο, 
Mk. xi. 19 T Tr txt. WH, cf. B. 223 (193); but al. take 
this of customary action, whenever evening came (i. e. 
every evening, R. V.)]. ὅταν does not occur in the Epp. 
of Peter and Jude. 

ὅτε, a particle of time, [fr. Hom. down], when; τις 
with the Indicative [W. 296 (278) sq.]; indic. pres- 
ent (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 913 sq.), while: Jn. ix. 4; Heb. ix.17; w. an his- 
torical pres. Mk. xi. 1. w. the imperfect (of a thing 
done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41; 
Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xii. 6; xxii. 20; Ro. vi. 
20; vii. 5; 1 Co. xiii. 11; Gal. iv. 3; Col. iii. 7; 1 Th. iii. 
4; 2 Th. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. an indic. aorist, Lat. 
quom w. plupf. ΟΥ̓́. § 40, 5; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25; 
xiii. 26, 48; xvii. 25 [R 6]; xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10; 
viii. 19; xv. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3 LT WH], 
13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where 
Tdf. ὡς], etc.; Acts i. 13; viii. 12, 39; xi. 2; xxi. 5, 35; 
xxvii.39; xxviii. 16; Ro. xiii. 11 (“than when we gave 
in our allegiance to Christ;" Lat. quom Christo nomen 
dedissemus, [R. V. than when we first believed ])) ; Gal. i. 
15; ii. 11, 12, 14; iv. 4; Phil.iv.15; Heb. vii. 10; Rev. 
i. 17; vi. 8, 5, 7,9, 12; viii. 1, etc.; so also Mt. xii. 3; 
Mk.ii.25; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mrg. ὅτε εἶδεν. when it had 
presented itself to his sight [but best texts ὅτι : because 
he saw ete.]). ἐγένετο, ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν, a common phrase 
in Mt., viz. vii. 28; xi. 1; xiii. 58; xix.1; xxvi. l. dre 
... τότε, Mt. xxi. 1; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indic. perfect, 
since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11; w. 
the indic. future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; 
xvi. 25; Ro. ii. 16 [R G T Tr txt. WH mrg.] (where 
Lehm. 7 [al. al.]); 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor. 
Subjunetive: ἕως àv ἥξη, ὅτε εἴπητε (where ὅταν 
might have been expected), until the time have come, 
when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 35 [RG (cf. Tr br.)]; cf. 
Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae 
evang. p. 92; W.298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400; cf. B. 231 
sq. (199)]. 

6, re, ἥ, Te, τό, Te, see τέ 2 a. 

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. 
down], (Lat. quod [cf. W. § 53,8 b.; B. $139,51; $149, 
3]), marking 

I. the substance or contents (of a statement), 
that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring 
(where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, 
Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 27; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; 
xxviii. 7, 13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. 
iii. 9; viii. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv. 7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 
9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ore]; ix. 2, and very often; mpo- 
εἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 sup- 
ply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες 
[cf. B. $151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Jn. ii. 
12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34 ; iii. 28; iv. 44; 
ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 
Co.i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν, Heb. 
xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co. xv.27; Gal. iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 


ὅτι 


7 (where LT Tr WH om. δῆλον [and then ὅτι simply 
introduces the reason, because (B. 358 (308) to the con- 
trary) ]); φανεροῦμαι (for φανερὸν γίνεται περὶ ἐμοῦ), 2 Co. 
ili. 8; 1Jn.ii.19. It isadded—to verbs of swearing, 
and to forms of oath and affirmation: ὄμνυμι, Rev. 
x.6; ζῶ ἐγώ (see (do, I. 1 p. 2705), Ro. xiv. 11; μάρτυρα 
τὸν θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι, 2 Co. i. 38 ; πιστὸς 6 θεός, 2 Co. i. 18; 
ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοί, 2 Co. xi. 10; ἰδοὺ ἐνώπιον 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. i. 20; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 242 
sq.; [W. § 53, 9; B. 394 (338) ];—to verbs of perceiv- 
ing, knowing, remembering, etc. : dxovewv, Jn. xiv. 
28; βλέπειν, 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22; θεᾶσθαι, 
Jn. vi. 55 γινώσκειν, Mt. xxi. 45; Lk.x. 11; Jn.iv.53; 2 
Co. xiii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 5, etc. ; after rovro, Ro. vi. 6; εἰδέναι, 
Mt. vi. 32; xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 10; Lk. ii. 49; Jn. iv. 42; ix. 
20, 24 sq. ; Ro. ii. 2; vi. 9; Phil. iv. 15 sq., and very often ; 
γνωστόν ἐστιν, Acts xxviii. 28; ἐπιγινώσκειν, Mk. ii. 8; 
Lk. i. 22; Actsiv.13; ἐπίστασθαι, Acts xv. 7; νοεῖν, Mt. 
xv. 17; ὁρᾶν, Jas. ii. 24; καταλαμβάνειν, Acts iv. 13; x. 
34; συνιέναι, Mt. xvi. 12; ἀγνοεῖν, Ro. 1.13; ii. 4; vi. 3, 
etc.; ἀναγινώσκειν, Mt. xii. 5; xix. 4; μνημονεύειν, Jn. xvi. 
4: μνησθῆναι, Mt. v. 23; Jn. ii. 22; ὑπομιμνήσκειν, Jude 
5;—to verbs of thinking, believing, judging, 
hoping: λογίζεσθαι, Jn. xi. 50 L'T Tr WH; after τοῦτο, 
Ro. ii. 3; 2 Co. x. 11 ; νομίζειν, Mt. v. 17; οἶμαι, Jas. i. 7; 
πέπεισμαι, Ro. viii. 38; xiv. 14; xv. 14; 2 Tim. i.5, 12; 
πεποιθέναι, Lk. xviii. 9; 2 Co. ii. 3; Phil. ii. 24; Gal. v. 10; 
2 Th. iii. 4; Heb. xiii. 18; πιστεύειν, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi. 
23; Ro.x.9; ὑπολαμβάνειν, Lk. vii. 43; δοκεῖν, Mt. vi. 7; 
xxvi.53; Jn.xx. 15; ἐλπίζειν, Lk. xxiv. 21; 2 Co. xiii. 6 ; 
κρίνειν τοῦτο ὅτι, 2 Co. v. 14 (15) ; —to verbs of emotion 
(where in Lat. now the acc. and inf. is used, now quod): 
θαυμάζειν, Lk. xi. 38; χαίρειν, Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16; 
Phil.iv. 10; 2Jn.4; ἐν τούτῳ, ὅτι, Lk. x. 20; συγχαίρειν, 
Lk. xv. 6,9; μέλει μοι (cot, αὐτῷ), Mk. iv. 38; Lk. x. 40; 
—to verbs of praising, thanking, blaming, (where 
the Lat. uses quod): ἐπαινεῖν, Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2, 17; 
ἐξομολογεῖσθαι, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; εὐχαριστεῖν, Lk. 
xviii. 11; χάρις τῷ θεῷ, Ro. vi. 17 ; χάριν ἔχω τινί, 1 Tim. 
i. 12; ἔχω κατά twos, ὅτι etc. Rev. ii. 4; ἔχω τοῦτο ὅτι, I 
have this (which is praiseworthy) that, Rev. ii. 6; add, 
Jn. vii. 23 [but here ὅτι is causal; ef. W. § 53, 8 b.]; 
1 Co. vi. 7;— to the verb εἶναι, when that precedes with 
a demons. pron., in order to define more exactly what a 
thing is or wherein it may be seen: αὕτη ἐστὶν ὅτι (Lat. 
quod), Jn. iii. 195 ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, 1 Jn. iij. 16; iv. 9 sq. 13, 
ete. ; περὶ τούτου ὅτι, Jn. xvi. 19 ; οὐχ οἷον δὲ ὅτι (see οἷος), 
Ro. ix. 6; —to the verbs γίνεσθαι and εἶναι with an in- 
terrog. pron., as τί γέγονεν ὅτι etc., what has come to pass 
that? our how comes it that? Jn. xiv. 22; τί [L mrg. ris] 
ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι, Heb. ii. 6 fr. Ps. viii. 5. τίς ὁ λόγος 
οὗτος (sc. ἐστίν), ὅτι, Lk. iv. 36; ποταπός ἐστιν οὗτος, ὅτι, 
Mt. viii. 27; τίς ἡ διδαχὴ αὕτη, ὅτι, Mk. i. 27 Rec.; add 
Mk. iv. 41. 2. in elliptical formulas (B. 358 
(307); [W.585 (544) note]): τί ὅτι etc., i.q. τί ἐστιν ὅτι, 
[ A. V. how is it that], wherefore? Mk. ii. 16 R GL [8]. om. 
τί; cf. 5 below, and see ὅστις, 4]; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v. 4, 
9. οὐχ ὅτι for οὐ λέγω ὅτι, Our not that, not as though, ef. 


459 


“ 
οτι 


B. $150, 1; [W. 597 (555)]; thus, Jn. vi. 46; vii. 22; 2 
Co. i. 24; iii. 5; Phil. iii. 12; iv. 11. ὅτι is used for eis 
ἐκεῖνο ὅτι (in reference to the fact that [ Eng. seeing that, in 
that]) : thus in Jn. ii. 18; [Meyer (see his note on 1 Co. 
i. 26) would add many other exx., among them Jn. ix. 17 
(see below)]; for ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, Ro. v. 8; for περὶ τούτου 
ὅτι, concerning this, that: so after λαλεῖν, Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 
41 [al. take ὅτι in these exx. and those after διαλογ. which 
follow in a causal sense; cf. W. as below (Ellicott on 
2 Thess. iii. 7)]; after λέγειν, Jn. ix. 17 [see above]; after 
διαλογίζεσθαι, Mt. xvi. 8; Mk. viii. 17, (after ἀποστέλλειν 
ἐπιστολάς, 1 Mace. xii. 7). See exx. fr. classic authors in 
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 248 sq. ; [Meyer, u. s.; cf. W. $ 53, 
8b.]. 3. Noteworthy is the attraction, not un- 
common, by which the noun that would naturally be the 
subject of the subjoined clause, is attracted by the verb 
of the principal clause and becomes its object [cf. W. 
§ 66,5; B $151, 1 a.]; as, οἴδατε τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ, ὅτι 
ἐστὶν ἀπαρχή. for οἴδατε, ὅτι ἡ οἰκία Στ. krÀ., 1 Co. xvi. 15; 
also after εἰδέναι and ἰδεῖν, Mk. xii. 34; 1 ΤῊ. ii. 1; so 
after other verbs of knowing, declaring, etc.: Mt. 
xxv. 24; Jn. ix. 8; Acts iii. 10; 1x. 20; 1 Co. 111. 20; 2 Th. 
ii. 4; Rev. xvii. 8, ete.; ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι θεὸς ὑμῶν 
ἐστι, for περὶ οὗ (cf. Lk. xxi. 5) ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι, Jn. viii. 
54. 4. As respects construction, ὅτε is joined 
in the N. T. a. to the indicative even where the 
opinion of another is introduced, and therefore accord- 
ing to class. usage the optative should have been used; 
as, διεστείλατο ... tva μηδενὶ εἴπωσιν, ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ 
Χριστός, Mt. xvi. 20; add, 21; iv. 12; xx. 30, etc. b. 
to that subjunctive after od μή which differs scarcely 
at all from the future (see μή, IV. 2 p. 411*; [cf. W. 508 
(473)]): Mt. v. 20; xxvi. 29 [R G; al. om. ὅτε); Mk. xiv. 
25; Lk. xxi. 32; Jn. xi. 56 (where before ὅτε supply 8o- 
eire, borrowed from the preceding δοκεῖ); but in Ro. iii. 
8 ὅτι before ποιήσωμεν (hortatory subjunc. [cf. W. $ 41 a. 
4a.; B. 245 (211)]) is recitative [see 5 below], depend- 
ing on λέγουσι [W. 628 (583); B. ὃ 141, 3]. c. to 
the infinitive, by a mingling of two constructions, 
common even in classic Grk., according to which the 
writer beginning the construction with ὅτε falls into the 
construction of the ace. with inf.: Acts xxvii. 10; cf. 
W. 339 (318) N.2; [$63,2c.; B. 383 (328)]. On the 
anacoluthon found in 1 Co. xii. 2, acc. to the reading ὅτε 
ὅτε (which appears in eod. Sin. also [and is adopted by 
L br. T Tr WH (yet cf. their note)]), cf. B. 383 (328) 
sq. 5. ὅτι is placed before direct discourse (‘re- 
citative’ ὅτι) [B. $139, 51; W.§ 65, 3¢.; 8 60,9 (and 
Moulton’s note) ]: Mt. ii. 23 [?]; vii. 23; xvi. 7; xxi. 16; 
xxvi. 72, 74; xxvii. 43; Mk.[ii. 16 T Tr WH (see 2 
above); but see ὅστις, 4]; vi. 23; xii. 106 Ba 2a 
(204)]; Lk. i. 61; ii. 23; iv. 43; xv. 27; Jn. i. 20; iv. 
17; xv.25; xvi. 17; Acts xv. 1; Heb. xi. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 
20; Rev. iii. 17, ete.; most frequently after λέγω, q. v. 
IL 1 a., p. 373* bot. [Noteworthy is 2 Thess. iii. 10, cf. 
B. § 139, 53.] 

II. the reason why anything is said to be or to be 
done, because, since, for that, for, (a causal conjune.; Lat. 


> 
ou 


quod, quia, quom, nam) ; [on the diff. betw. it and yap 
cf. Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 70]; a. it is added to 
a speaker's words to show what ground he gives for his 
opinion; as, μακάριος ete. ὅτι, Mt. v. 4-12; xiii. 16; 
Lk. vi. 20 sq.; xiv. 14; after οὐαί, Mt. xi. 21; xxiii. I3— 
15, 23, 25, 27, 29; Lk.vi.24sq.; x. 13; xi.42-44, 46, 
52; Jude 11; ef. further, Mt. vii. 13; xvii. 15; xxv. 8; 
Mk. v. 9; ix. 38 [G Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; Lk. 
vii. 47; xxiii. 40; Jn.i. 80; v. 27; ix. 16; xvi. 9-11, 14, 
16 [Ὁ Tr WH om. L br.cl.]; Aetsi.5, and often ;—or is 
added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own 
opinion: Mt.ii.18; ix. 36; Mk. iii. 30; vi.34; Jn. ii. 
25; Acts i. 17;—or, in general, by a teacher, and often 
in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or 
views: Mt. v.45; 1Jn.iv.18; 2 Jn. 7; Rev. iii. 10. b. 
ὅτι makes reference to some word or words that precede 
or immediately follow it [cf. W. $ 23, 5; $ 53, 8 b.; D. 
§ 127, 6]; as, διὰ τοῦτο, Jn. viii. 47; x.17; xii. 39; 1Jn. 
ii.l,etc. διὰ τί; Ro.ix.32; 2 Co. xi. 1l. χάριν τίνος ; 
1 Jn. iii. 12. οὕτως, Rev.iii. 10. ἐν τούτῳ, 1 Jn. iii. 20. 
ὅτι in the protasis, Jn. i. 50 (51); xx. 29. It is followed 
by διὰ τοῦτο, Jn. xv. 19. οὐχ Gre... ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, not be- 
cause . . . but because, Jn. vi. 26; xii. 6. 

III. On the combination ὡς ὅτε see ὡς, I. 3. 

[ὅτι interrog., i. e. 6, Te or 6 τι, see ὅστις, 4 (and ad 
init.).] 

ὅτου, see ὅστις ad init. 

οὗ, sce ὅς, 7, 6, 11. 11. 

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a 
smooth breathing, and οὐχ before an aspirated vowel; 
but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before 
a smooth breathing; accordingly L'T WH mrg. have 
adopted ody ἰδού, Actsii.7; L T οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 
14 (see WH. Introd. $ 409) ; L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; 
οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before 
an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 
2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, 
Acts iii. 6] in cod. § [also C *; cf. cod. Alex. in 1 Esdr. 
iv. 2, 12; Job xix. 16; xxxviii. 11, 26]); cf. W.$5,1d. 
14; B. 7; [A. v. Schütz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, 
pp. 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, 
p. 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tf. Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. 
pp. xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. 
no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (cf. p. xlii. no. 5); 
Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. etc. p. Ixxxvii. sq.; Tf. Proleg. 
p.90 sq.; WH. Intr. 8$ 405 sqq., and App. p. 143 sq.]; 
Sept. for N^, r'N, TW; a particle of negation, not (how 
it differs fr. μή has been explained in py, ad init.); it is 
used 1. absol. and accented, οὔ, nay, no, [W. 476 
(444)]: in answers, 6 δέ φησιν: ov, Mt. xiii. 29; ἀπε- 
κρίθη - ov, Jn. i. 21; [xxi. 5], cf. vii. 12; repeated, od o, 
it strengthens the negation, nay, nay, by no means, Mt. 
v. 37; ἤτω ὑμῶν τὸ οὗ οὔ, let your denial be truthful, Jas. 
v. 12; on 2 Co. i. 17-19, see ναί. 2. It is joined to 
other words,— to a finite verb, simply to deny that 
what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of 
the sentence: Mt. i. 25 (οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτήν) ; Mk. iii. 
25; Lk. vi. 43; Jn. x. 28; Acts vii. 5; Ro. i. 16, and 








460 οὐ 


times without number. It has the same force when 
conjoined to participles: ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων, 1 Co. ix. 
26; οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ τέκνου, at the time when he had no 
child, Acts vii. 5 (μὴ ὄντος would be, although he had no 
child); add, Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 14; 2 Co. iv. 8; Gal. 
iv. 8, 27; Col.ii. 19; Phil.iii.3; IIeb. xi. 85; 1 Pet. i. 8; 
6... οὐκ àv ποιμήν, Jn. x. 12 (where ace. to class. usage 
μή must have been employed, because such a person is 
imagined as is not a shepherd; [ef. B. 351 (301) and 
pj, l.5b.]). in relative sentences: εἰσὶν... τινὲς of οὐ 
πιστεύουσιν, Jn. vi. 64; add, Mt. x. 38; xii. 2; Lk. vi. 2; 
Ro. xv. 21; Gal. iii. 10, ete. ; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅς and οὐδέν ἐστιν 
6 foll. by a fut.: Mt. x. 26; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2; ris ἐστιν, 
és οὐ foll. by a pres. indic.: Acts xix. 35; Heb. xii. 7; cf. 
W. 481 (448); B. 355 (305); in statements introduced 
by ὅτι after verbs of understanding, perceiving, saying, 
ete.: Jn. v. 42; viii. 55, ete.; ὅτι οὐκ (where οὐκ is pleo- 
nastic) after ἀρνεῖσθαι, 1 Jn. ii. 22; cf. B. $148, 13; [W. 
§ 65, 2 8.]; — to an infin., where μή might have been ex- 
pected: ris ere χρεία κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισ. ἕτερον ἀν- 
ίστασθαι ἱερέα καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν ' Aapóv λέγεσθαι, Ieb. 
vii. 11 (where the difficulty is hardly removed by saying 
[e. z. with W. 482 (449)] that o? belongs only to κατὰ τὴν 
τάξιν 'Aap., not to the infin.). it serves to deny other 
parts of statements: οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου, 1 Co. i. 17; οὐ 
μέλανι, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶ λιθίναις, 2 Co. iii. 3, and many other 
exx.;—to deny the object, ἔλεος (RG ἔλεον) θέλω, οὐ 
θυσίαν, Mt.ix. 13; xii. 7; οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, Mk. ix. 37. It 
blends with the term to which it is prefixed into a single 
and that an aflirmative idea [W. 476 (444); cf. B. 347 
(298)]; as, οὐκ édw, to prevent, hinder, Acts xvi. 7; xix. 
30, (cf., on this phrase, Herm. ad Vig. p. 887 sq.) ; οὐκ 
ἔχω; (o be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 25, (see ἔχω, I. 2 a. 
p. 266") ; rà οὐκ ἀνήκοντα [or à οὐκ ἀνῆκεν, LT Tr WIL], 
unseemly, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (see μή, I. 5 d. fin. p. 
410°; [cf. B. § 148, 7 a.; W. 486 (452)]); often so as to 
form a litotes; as, οὐκ ἀγνοέω, to know well, 2 Co. ii. 11 
(Sap. xii. 10) ; οὐκ ὀλίγοι, not a few, i. e. very many, Acts 
xvii. 4, 12; xix. 23 sq.; xv. 2; xiv. 28; xxvii. 20; ov 
πολλαὶ ἡμέραι, a few days, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. ii. 12; Acts i. 
5; οὐ πολύ, Acts xxvii. 14; οὐ μετρίως, Acts xx. 12; οὐκ 
ἄσημος, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean ete.], Acts 
xxi. 39; οὐκ ἐκ μέτρου, Jn. iii. 34. it serves to limit the 
term to which it is joined: οὐ πάντως, not altogether, not 
entirely (see πάντως, c. B.) ; οὐ mas, not any and every one, 
Mt. vii. 21; plur. o? πάντες, not all, Mt. xix. 11; Ro. ix. 
6; x. 165 οὐ πᾶσα σάρξ, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. xv. 
39; ob παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, not to all the people, Acts x. 41; 
on the other hand, when ov is joined to the verb, πᾶς 

- οὐ must be rendered no one, no, (as in Hebrew, now 
D3/- ΜΝ τον ἈΠ 535 cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et 
Chald. p. 513 sq.): Lk. 1.87; Eph. v. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 21; 
Rev.xxii.3; πᾶσα σὰρξ ... οὐ w. a verb, no flesh, no 
mortal, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro.iii.20; Gal. ii. 
16; cf. W. $26, 1; [B. 121(106)]. Joined to a noun 
it denies and annuls the idea of the noun; as, τὸν οὐ 
λαόν, a people that is not a people (Germ. ein Nichtvolk, 
a no-people), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; ἐπ᾽ οὐκ ἔθνει, 


οὐ 401 


{R. V. with that which is no nation], Ro. x. 19 (so Ὁ» ΠΣ 
Os xb, a no-zod, Deut. xxxii. 21; yy x5, a not-wood, Is. 
x. 15; οὐκ ἀρχιερεύς, 2 Mace. iv. 13; ἡ od διάλυσις, Thuc. 
1, 137, 4; ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις 3, 95, 2; ἡ οὐκ ἐξουσία 5, 50, 
3; δύ ἀπειροσύναν . .. κοὐκ ἀπόδειξιν, Eur. Hippol. 196, 
and other exx. in Grk. writ.; non sutor, Hor. sat. 2, 3, 
106; non corpus, Cic. acad. 1, 39 fin.) ; cf. W. 476 (444); 
[B. $148, 9]; ἡ οὐκ ἠγαπημένη, Ro. ix. 25; of οὐκ ἤλεη- 
μένοι, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega- 
tive, 8. it strengthens the negation: οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα, 
Jn. viii. 15; add, Mk. v. 37; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); οὗ οὐκ ἦν 
οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς κείμενος, Lk. xxiii. 53 [see οὐδέπω]; οὐκ. - - 
οὐδέν, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2; Jn. vi. 63; xi. 49; xii. 19; 
xv. 5; ob μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός, Mt. xxii. 16 ; οὐκ. . . οὐκέτι, 
Acts viii. 39 ; cf. Matthiae $609, 3; Kühner ii. $516; W. 
8 55,9 b.; [B. $148, 11]. b. as in Latin, it changes 
a negation into an affirmation (cf. Matthiae § 609, 2; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 sq.; W.$55,9a.; B. $148, 
12); οὐ παρὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ ToU σώματος, not on this 
account is it not of the body, i. 6. it belongs to the body, 
does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15; οὐ duva- 
μεθα ἃ εἴδομεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν μὴ λαλεῖν, we are unable not 
to speak [ A.V. we cannot but speak], Acts iv. 20. 4. 
It is used in disjunctive statements where one 
thing is denied that another may be established [W. 
§ 55, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)]: οὐκ... ἀλλά, Lk. viii. 52; 
xxiv. 6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. i. 33; vii. 10, 12, 16; 
viii. 49; Acts x. 41; Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii. 
3; viii. 5; Heb. ii. 16, ete. ; see ἀλλά, IT. 1; οὐχ va... 
ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα, Jn. iii. 17; οὐχ wa... ἀλλά, Jn. vi. 38; οὐ μόνον 

. . ἀλλὰ kat, see ἀλλά, II. 1 and μόνος, 2; οὐκ. . . €i μή. 
see εἰ, III. 8 c. p. 171"; οὐ μή w. subjunc. aor. foll. by 
εἰ μή, Rev. xxi. 27 [see εἰ as above, β.1. 5. It is 
joined to other particles: οὐ μή, not at all, by no means, 
surely not, in no wise, see μή, IV.; od μηκέτι w. aor. sub- 
june. Mt. xxi. 19 L'T Tr mrg. WH. μὴ οὐ, where μή is 
interrog. (Lat. num) and o? negative [cf. B. 248 (214), 
354 (304); W.511 (476)]: Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; 
xi. 22. εἰ οὐ, see εἰ, III. 11 p. 172*. οὐ yap (see γάρ, I. 
p. 109"), Acts xvi. 37. 6. Asin Hebr. xb w. impf., 
so in bibl. Grk. οὐ w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatie 
prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; ef. W. § 43, 
5 c.; also 501 sq. (467); [B. § 139, 64]; Fritzsche on Mt. 
p. 259 sq. [ef. p. 252 sq.] thinks otherwise, but not cor- 
rectly): Mt. vi. 5; and besides in the moral precepts 
of the O. T., Mt. iv. 7; xix. 18; Lk. iv. 12; Acts xxiii. 
5; Ro. vii. 7; xiii. 9. 7. ob is used interroga- 
tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat. 
nonne; [W. $ 57, 3a.; B. 247 (213)]): Mt. vi. 26, 30; 
xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii. 
25; Actsix. 21; Ro.ix.21; 1 Co.ix. 1, 6 sq. 12; Jas. ii. 
4, and often; οὐκ οἴδατε xrÀ.; and the like, see etc, II. 
1 p. 174"; ἀλλ᾽ ob, Heb. iii. 16 (see ἀλλά, I. 10 p. 285); 
οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν; answerest thou nothing at all? Mk. 
xiv. 60; xv. 4; — where an exclamation of reproach or 
wonder, which denies directly, may take the place of a 
negative question: Mk. iv. 13, 38; Lk. xvii. 18; Acts 
xiii. 10 [cf. B. $139, 65]; xxi. 38 (on which see dpa, 1); 








οὐδέ 


cf. W. u.s.; οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό; shall I not drink it? Jn. 
xviii. 11; cf. W. p. 512 (477); [cf. B. § 139, 2]. 

οὐά, Tdf. ova [see Proleg. p. 101; cf. Chandler § 892], 
ah! ha! an interjection of wonder and amazement: 
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 34; 3, 23,24; Dio Cass. 63, 20; called 
out by the overthrow of a boastful adversary, Mk. xv. 29.* 

ovat, an interjection of grief or of denunciation ; Sept. 
chiefly for 77 and *j ; alas! woe! with a dat of pers. 
added, Mt. xi. 21; xviii. 7; xxiii. 13-16, 23, 25, 27, 29; 
xxiv. 19; xxvi. 24; Mk.xiii. 17; xiv. 21; Lk. vi. 24-26 ; 
X. 13; xi. 42-44, 46 sq. 52; xxi. 23; xxii. 22; Jude 11; 
Rev. xii. 12 R G Led. min. [see below], (Num. xxi. 29; 
Is. iii. 9, and often in Sept.); thrice repeated, and foll. 
by a dat., Rev. viii. 13 RGL WH mrg. [see below]; the 
dat. is omitted in Lk. xvii. 1; twice repeated and foll. 
by a nom. in place of a voc., Rev. xviii. 10, 16, 19, (Is. i. 
24; v. 8-22; Hab. ii. 6, 12, etc.) ; exceptionally, with an 
acc. of the pers., in Rev. viii. 13 T Tr WH txt., and xii. 
12 LT Tr WH; this accus., I think, must be regarded 
either as an acc. of exclamation (cf. Matthiae $ 410), or 
as an imitation of the constr. of the acc. after verbs of 
injuring, (B. § 131, 14 judges otherwise); with the ad- 
dition of ἀπό and a gen. of the evil the infliction of which 
is deplored [cf. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348)], Mt. xviii. 7; 
also of ἐκ. Rev. viii. 13. Asa substantive, ἡ οὐαί (the 
writer seems to have been led to use the fem. by the 
similarity of ἡ θλίψις or ἡ ταλαιπωρία ; cf. W.179 (169)) 
woe, calamity: Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14; δύο οὐαί, Rev. ix. 19, 
(οὐαὶ ἐπὶ ovat ἔσται, Ezek. vii. 26 ; οὐαὶ ἡμᾶς λήψεται, 
Evang. Nicod. c. 21 [Pars ii. v. 1 (ed. Tdf.)]); so also 
in the phrase οὐαί μοί ἐστιν woe is unto me, i. e. divine 
penalty threatens me, 1 Co. ix. 16, cf. Hos. ix. 12; [Jer. vi. 
4]; Epict. diss. 3, 19, 1, (frequent in eccles. writ.).* 

οὐδαμῶς (fr. οὐδαμός, not even one; and this fr. οὐδέ and 
ἀμός [allied perh. w. dpa; cf. Vaniéek p. 972; Curtius 
§ 600]), adv., fr. Hdt. [and Aeschyl.] down, by no means, 
in no wise : Mt. ii. 6.* 

οὐδέ, [fr. Hom. down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction, 
compounded of ov and 8é, and therefore prop. i. q. but 
not; generally, however, its oppositive force being lost, 
it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of e 
when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by 
Taf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see T«f. 
Proleg. p. 96; cf. WH. App. p. 146; W. $5, 1a.; B. p. 
lOsq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a nega- 
tion, yet differently from οὔτε ; for the latter connects 
parts or members of the same thing, since ré is adjunc- 
tive like the Lat. que; but οὐδέ places side by side things 
that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?). 
There appears to be some mistake here in what is said 
about ‘mutual exclusion’ (cf. W. § 55, 6): οὐδέ, like δέ, 
always makes reference to something preceding; οὔτε 
to what follows also; the connection of clauses nega- 
tived by οὔτε is close and internal, so that they are mu- 
tually complementary and combine into a unity, whereas 
clauses negatived by οὐδέ follow one another much more 
loosely, often almost by accident as it were; see W. I. c., 
and esp. the quotations there given from Benfey and 


οὐδείς 


Klotz.] It differs from μηδέ as οὐ does from μή [q. v. ad 
init.]; after οὐ, where each has its own verb: Mt. v. 15; 
vi. 28; Mk. iv. 22; Lk.vi.44; Actsii. 27; ix. 9; xvii. 24 
sq. ; Gal. i. 17; iv. 14; οὐκ οἶδα οὐδὲ ἐπίσταμαι, Mk. xiv. 68 
RG Lmrg. [al. ore... οὔτε] (Cie. pro Rose. Am. 48 
“non novi neque scio"); cf. W. 490 (456) ο.; [B. 367 
(315) note]; od... odd... οὐδέ, nol... nor .. . nor, Mt. 
vi. 26; ovdels... οὐδὲ . . . ode... οὐδέ, Rev. v. 3[R G; 
cf. B. 367 (315) ; W. 491 (457)]; od... οὐδέ foll. by a 
fut.... οὐδὲ μή foll. by subjunc. aor. . . . οὐδέ, Rev. vii. 
16. οὐ... οὐδέ, the same verb being common to both: 
Mt.x.24 ; xxv. 13; Lk. vi. 43 ; viii. 17 [ef. W. 300 (281); 
B. 355 (305) cf. $139, 7]; Jn. vi. 24; xiii. 16; Acts viii. 
21; xvi. 21; xxiv. 18; Ro. ii. 28; ix. 16; Gal.i. 1; iii. 28; 
1 Th.v.5; 1 Tim. ii. 12; Rev. xxi. 23. preceded by 
οὔπω, Mk. viii. 17; — by οὐδείς, Mt. ix. 17; — by tva μή, 
which is foll. by οὐδὲ... οὐδέ, where μηδὲ . . . μηδέ might 
have been expected (cf. D. $148, 8; [W. 474 (442)]) : 
Rey. ix. 4. οὐδὲ γάρ, for neither, Jn. viii. 42; Ro. viii. 
7; 2. also not [ A. V. generally neither]: Mt. vi. 15; 
xxi. 27; xxv. 45; Mk. xi. 26 [RL]; Lk. xvi. 31; Jn. xv. 
4; Ro.iv. 15; xi. 21; 1 Co. xv. 13, 16; Gal. i. 12 (οὐδὲ 
yap ἐγώ [cf. B. 367 (315) note; 492 (458) ]); Heb. viii. 4, 
ete.; ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, Lk. xxiii. 15; ἢ οὐδέ, in a question, or 
doth not even etc. ? 1 Co. xi. 14 Rec.; the simple οὐδέ, 
num ne quidem (have ye not even etc.) in a question 
where a negative answer is assumed (see ov, 7): Mk. xii. 
10; Lk. vi.3; xxiii. 40; and GL T Tr WH in 1 Co. xi. 
14. 3. not even [B. 369 (31611: Mt. vi. 29; viii. 
10; Mk. vi. 31; Lk. vii. 9; xii. 27; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. 
the vs.]; 1 Co. v. 1; xiv. 21; οὐδὲ ets [W. 173 (163) ; B. 
§ 127, 32], Acts iv. 32; Ro. iii. 10; 1 Co. vi. 5 [L T Tr 
WH ovdeis]; οὐδὲ ἕν, Jn. i. 3; ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, Acts xix. 2; 1 
Co. iii. 2 (Ree. ἀλλ᾽ οὔτε) ; iv. 3; Gal. 11. 3. ina double 
negative for the sake of emphasis, ovx . . . οὐδέ [B. 369 
(316); W. 500 (465) ]: Mt. xxvii. 14; Lk. xviii. 13; Acts 
vii. 5. 

οὐδείς, οὐ Sepia (the fem. only in these pass. : Mk. vi. 
5; Lk.iv. 26; Jn.xvi. 29; xviii. 38; xix. 4; Aets xxv. 
18; xxvii. 22; Phil. iv. 15; 1 Jn. i. 5, and Rec. in Jas. iii. 
12), οὐ δέν (and, acc. to a pronunciation not infreq. fr. 
Aristot. and "Theophr. down, οὐθείς, οὐθέν : 1 Co. xiii. 2 
R* LT Tr WH; Acts xix. 27 L T Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 8 
(9)LTTrWH; Lk. xxii. 35 T Tr WH; xxiii. 14 T Tr 
WH; Acts xv. 9 T Tr WH txt.; Acts xxvi. 26 TWH 
Tr br.; 1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf.; see μηδείς init. and Gottling 
on Aristot. pol. p. 278; [Meisterhans, Grammatik d. At- 
tisch. Inschriften, § 20,5; see L. and S. s. v. οὐθείς; cf. 
Lob. Pathol. Elem. ii. 344]; B/tm. Ausf. Spr. § 70 Anm. 
7), (fr. οὐδέ and εἷς), [fr. Hom. down], and not one, no 
one, none, no; it differs from μηδείς as ov does from μή 
[q. v. ad init.]; 1. with nouns: masc., Lk. iv. 24; 
xvi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 4; οὐδεὶς ἄλλος, Jn. xv. 24; οὐδεμία 
in the passages given above; neut., Lk. xxiii. 4; Jn. x. 
41; Acts xvii. 21 ; xxiii. 9; xxviii. 5; Ro. viii. 1; xiv. 14; 
Gal. v. 10, etc. 2. absolutely: οὐδείς, Mt. vi. 24; 
ix. 16; Mk. iii. 27; v. 4; vii. 24; Lk.i.61; v. 39 [WH 
in br.]; vii. 28; Jn. i. 18; iv. 27; Acts xviii. 10; xxv. 115 


462 





S4 
OUKETL 


Ro. xiv. 7, and very often. with a partitive gen.: Lk. 
iv. 26; xiv. 24; Jn. xiii. 28; Acts v. 13; 1Co.i.14; ii. 
8; 1Tim.vi.16. οὐδεὶς εἰ μή, Mt. xix. 17 Rec.; xvii. 8; 
Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19; Jn. iii. 13; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. 
xix. 12, etc. ; ἐὰν μή, Jn. iii. 2; vi. 44,65. otk... οὐδείς: 
(see ov, 3 a.), Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. v. 37; vi. 5; xii. 14; Lk. 
viii. 43 ; Jn. viii. 155 xviii. 9, 31; Acts iv. 12; 2 Co. xi. 
9 (8); ovkere. . . οὐδείς, Mk. ix. 8; otüézo . . . οὐδείς, Lk. 
xxiii. 53 [ df. οὐδεὶς... οὐδέπω; L'Tr WH οὐδεὶς οὔπω]; 
Jn. xix. 41; Acts viii. 16 [L T Tr WH]; οὐδεὶς... οὐκέτι, 
Mk.xii.34; Rev. xviii. ll. neut. οὐδέν, nothing, Mt. x. 
26 [ef. W. 300 (281); B. 355 (305)]; xvii. 20; xxvi. 62; 
xxvii. 12, and very often; with a partitive gen., Lk. ix. 
36; xviii. 34; Acts xviii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 15; xiv. 10 [RG]; 
οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mt. v. 135 xxi. 19; Mk. ix. 29; xi. 13; μή 
τινος; with the answer οὐδενός, Lk. xxii. 35; οὐδὲν ἐκτός 
w. gen., Acts xxvi. 22; οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει, Gal. ii. 6; it 
follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne- 
gation (see ov, 3 a.) : Mk. xv. 4 sq. ; xvi. 8; Lk. iv. 2; ix. 
36; xx. 40; Jn. iii. 27; v. 19, 30; ix. 33; xi. 49; xiv. 
30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.]; 1 Co. viii. 2 [R G]; ix. 
15 [G L T Tr WH]; οὐδὲν ov μή w. aor. subjunc. Lk. x. 
19 [R* ἃ WH mrg.; see uj, IV. 2]. οὐδέν, absol., not- 
ing whatever, not at all, in no wise, [cf. B. $131, 10] : a&- 
κεῖν (see ἀδικέω, 2 b.), Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; οὐδὲν 
διαφέρειν τινός, Gal. iv. 1; ὑστερεῖν, 2 Co. xii. 11; ὠφελεῖν, 
Jn. vi. 63; 1 Co. xiii. 3. οὐδέν ἐστιν, it is nothing, of no 
importance, etc. [cf. B. $129, 5]: Mt. xxiii. 16, 18; Jn. 
viii. 54; 1 Co. vii. 19; with a gen., none of these things 
is true, Acts xxi. 245 xxv. 11 ; οὐδέν εἶμι, I am nothing, 
of noaccount: 1 Co. xiii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 11, (see exx. fr. Grk. 
auth. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s.v. II. 2; Meyer on 1 
Co. 1. c.]); eis οὐδὲν λογισθῆναι (see λογίζομαι, 1 a.), Acts 
xix. 27; εἰς οὐδὲν γίνεσθαι, to come to nought, Acts v. 36 
[W. $29, 3a.5 ἐν οὐδενί, in no respect, in nothing, Phil. 
i. 20 (cf. μηδείς, g.)]. 

οὐδέποτε, adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr. 
οὐδέ and ποτέ, prop. not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never: 
Mt. vii. 23; ix. 33; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv. 29 
(bis)]: Jn. vii. 46; Acts x. 14; xi. 8; xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 
8; Heb. x. 1, 11. interrogatively, did ye never, ete.: 
Mt. xxi. 16, 42; Mk. ii. 25.* 

οὐδέπω, adv., simply negative, (fr. οὐδέ and the enclitie 
m), [fr. Aeschyl. down], not yet, not as yet: Jn. vii. 39 
(where L Tr WH οὔπω); xx. 9. οὐδέπω οὐδείς, never 
any one ΓΑ. V. never man yet], Jn. xix. 41; [ov0ézo . . - 
ex’ οὐδενί, as yet... upon none, Acts viii. 16 L T Tr 
WI]: οὐκ... οὐδέπω οὐδείς (see ov, 3 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L 
Tr WH οὐκ... οὐδεὶς οὔπω; Tdf. οὐκ. . . οὐδεὶς οὐδέπω]; 
οὐδέπω οὐδέν (1, T Tr WH simply οὔπω) not yet (any- 
thing), 1 Co. viii. 2.* 

οὐθείς, οὐθέν, see οὐδείς, init. 

οὐκέτι [also written separately by Rect (generally), 
Tr (nine times in Jn.), Tdf. (in Philem. 16)], (οὐκ, ἔτι), 
an adv. which denies simply, and thus differs from μηκέτι. 
(q. v), no longer, no more, no further: Mt. xix. 6; Mk. 
x. 8: Lk. xv. 19, 21; Jn. iv. 42; vi. 66; Acts xx. 25, 88; 
Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2 Co. v. 16; Gal.iji.25; iv. 7; Eph. 


οὐκοῦν 


ii. 19; Philem. 16; Heb. x. 18, 26, etc. ; οὐκέτι ἦλθον, I 
came not again [R.V. 7 forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23. 
with another neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne- 
gation: οὐδὲ . . . οὐκέτι, Mt. xxii. 46 ; οὐκ . . . οὐκέτι, Acts 
viii. 39; οὐδεὶς . . . οὐκέτι, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11; 
οὐκέτι . . . οὐδέν, Mk. vii. 12; xv. 5; Lk. xx. 40; οὐκέτι 
.. . οὐδένα, Mk. ix. 8; οὐκέτι ov μή, Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii. 
16 [WH om. L Tr br. οὐκέτι]; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr om.]; 
οὐδὲ... οὐκέτι οὐδείς, Mk. v. 3 LT WH Trtxt. οὐκέτι 
is used logically [cf. W. $65, 10]; as, οὐκέτι ἐγώ for it 
cannot now be said ὅτι ἐγὠ ete., Ro. vii. 17, 20; Gal. ii. 
20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Hom., Hes., Hdt., al.)] 
οὐκοῦν, (fr. οὐκ and οὖν), adv., not therefore; and since 
a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion 
[see Krüger as below], the particle is used affirmatively, 
therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing. 
Hence the saying of Pilate οὐκοῦν βασιλεὺς εἶ σύ must 
be taken affirmatively : ‘hen (since thou speakest of thy 
βασιλείαν thou art a king! (Germ. also bist du doch ein 
Künig !), Jn. xviii. 37 [cf. B. 249 (214)] ; but it is better 
to write οὔκουν, so that Pilate, arguing from the words 
of Christ, asks, not without irony, art thou not a king 
then ? or in any case, thou art a king, art thou not? cf. W. 
512 (477). The difference between οὐκοῦν and οὔκουν is 
differently stated by different writers; cf. Herm. ad Vig. 
p- 792sqq.; Krüger § 69, 51, 1 and 2; Kühner § 508, 5 
ii. p. 715 sqq., also the 3d excurs. appended to his ed. of 
Xen. memor. ; [Bdumlein, Partikeln, pp. 191—198 ].* 
οὐ μή, see μή, IV. 
οὖν ἃ conj. indicating that something follows from an- 
other necessarily; [al. regard the primary force of the 
particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than 
illative; cf. Passow, or L. and S. s. v.; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii. 
p. 707 sqq.; Biumlein p. 173 sqq.; Krüger $ 69, 52; Don- 
aldson p. 571; Rost in a program * Ueber Ableitung " 
u.s. w. p. 2; Klotz p. 717; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is 
used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sen- 
tences together logically, then, therefore, accordingly, 
consequently, these things being so, [ (Klotz, Rost, al., have 
wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptep. dv (cf. 
ὄντως) ; but see Biumlein or Kühner u. s.); cf. W. $53, 
8]: Mt. iii. 10; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be 
dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denying 
me [cf. W. 455 (424) ]); Mt. xviii. 4; Lk.iii.9; xvi. 27; 
Jn. viii. 38 (καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν, and ye accordingly, i. e. ‘since, 
asis plain from my case, sons follow the example of their 
fathers'; Jesus says this in sorrowful irony [W. 455 
(424)]); Acts i. 21 (since the office of the traitor Judas 
must be conferred on another) ; Ro. v. 9; vi. 4; xiii. 10; 
1 Co. iv. 16 (since I hold a father's place among you) ; 2 
. Co. v. 20; Jas.iv. 17, and many other exx. As respects 
details, notice that it stands a. in exhortations 
(to show what ought now to be done by reason of what 
has been said), i. q. wherefore, [our transitional there- 
fore]: Mt. iii. 8; v. 48; ix. 38; Lk. xi. 35 ; xxi. 14, 36 
[R G L mrg. Tr mrg.]; Acts iii. 19; xiii.40; Ro. vi. 12; 
xiv. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 11; 2 Co. viii. 24; Eph. v. 1; vi. 14; 
Phil. ii. 29; Col. ii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. iv. 1, 11; x. 


463 





οὖν 


35; Jas. iv. 7; v. 7; 1 Pet.iv. 7; v.6; Rev. i. 19 [GL 
T Tr WH); iii. 3, 19, and often ; viv οὖν, now therefore,. 
Acts xvi. 36. b. in questions, then, therefore, 
(Lat. igitur) ; a. when the question is, what follows 
or seems to follow from what has been said: Mt. xxii. 
28; xxvii. 22 [W. 455 (424)]; Mk. xv. 12; Lk. iii. 10;. 
xx. 15, 33; Jn. viii. 5; τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν ; Ro. vi. 1; vii. 7; 
ix. 14; τί οὖν φημί; 1 Co. x. 19; τί οὖν; what then? i. e. 
how then does the matter stand? [cf. W. § 64, 2 a.], Jn- 
i. 21 [here WH mre. punct. ri οὖν σύ ;] Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15; 
xi. 7; also τί οὖν ἐστίν ; [what is it then?] Acts xxi. 22; 
1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. B. when it is asked, whether 
this or that follows from what has just been said : Mt. 
xiii. 28; Lk. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 39; Ro. iii. 31; Gal. iii. 
21. γ when it is asked, how something which is true 
or regarded as true, or what some one does, can be rec- 
onciled with what has been previously said or done: Mt. 
xii. 26; xiii. 27; xvii. 10 (where the thought is, *thou 
commandest us to tell no one about this vision we have 
had of Elijah; what relation then to this vision has the 
doctrine of the scribes concerning the coming of Elijah? 
Is not this doctrine confirmed by the vision ?") ; Mt. xix. 
7; xxvi. 54; Lk. xx. 17; Jn. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. οὖν] ; Acts 
xv. 10 (νῦν οὖν, now therefore, i. e. at this time, therefore, 
when God makes known his will so plainly); Acts xix. 
3; Ro. iv. 1 (where the meaning is, * If everything de- 
pends on faith, what shall we say that Abraham gained 
by outward things, i.e. by works?’ [but note the crit. 
texts]); 1 Co. vi. 15; Gal. iii. 5. δ. in general, it 
serves simply to subjoin questions suggested by what 
has just been said: Ro. iii. 27; iv. 9sq.; vi.21; xi. 11; 
1 Co. iii. 5, etc. c. inepanalepsis, i. e. it serves 
to resume a thought or narrative interrupted by inter- 
vening matter (Matthiae ii. p. 1497; [W. 444 (414)]), 
like Lat. igitur, inquam, our as was said, say I, to pro- 
ceed, etc.: Mk. iii. 31 [R G] (cf. 21); Lk. iii. 7 (cf. 3) ; 
Jn. iv.'45 (cf. 43) ; vi. 24 (cf. 22) ; 1 Co. viii. 4; xi. 20 
(cf. 18) ; add, Mk. xvi. 19 [ Tr mrg. br. ov]; Acts viii. 
25; xii. 5; xiii. 4: xv. 9, 305 xxiii. 31; xxv. 1; xxviii. 5. 
It is used also when one passes at length to a subject 
about which he had previously intimated an intention to 
speak: Acts xxvi. 4, 9. d. it serves to gather up 
summarily what has already been said, or even what. 
cannot be narrated at length: Mt. i. 17; vii. 24 (where 
no reference is made to what has just before been said 
[?], but all the moral precepts of the Serm. on the Mount 
are summed up in a sinele rule common to all) ; Lk. iii. 
18; Jn. xx. 30; Acts xxvi. 22. e. it serves to adapt 
examples and comparisons to the case in hand : Jn. iii. 
29; xvi. 22; —or to add examples to illustrate the sub- 
ject under consideration: Ro. xii. 20 Rec. f. In 
historical discourse it serves to make the transition 
from one thing to another, and to connect the several 
parts and portions of the narrative, since the new uccur- 
rences spring from or are occasioned by what precedes 
[cf. W. § 60, 3]: Lk. vi. 9 RG; numberless times so in 
John, as i. 22 [Lchm. om.]; ii. 18; iv. 9 [ Tdf. om.]; vi. 60,. 
67; vii. 6 [G T om.], 25, 28, 33, 35, 40; viii. 13, 19, 22, 25,. 


v 
οὕπω 


31,57; ix. 7 sq. 10, 16; xi. 12, 16, 21, 32, 36; xii. 1-4; xiii. 
12; xvi. 17, 22; xviii. 7,11 sq. 16, 27-29; xix. 20-24, 32, 38, 
40; xxi. 5-7, etc. g. with other conjunctions: ἄρα 
οὖν, so then, Lat. hinc igitur, in Paul; see ἄρα, 9. εἰ οὖν, if 
then (where what has just been said and proved is carried 
over to prove something else), see ei, III. 12; [ei μὲν οὖν, 
see μέν, II. 4 p. 398"]. εἴτε oiv . . . etre, whether then... 
or: 1 Co. x. 31; xv. 11. ἐπεὶ οὖν, since then: Meb. ii. 
14; iv. 6; for which also a participle is put with οὖν, as 
Acts ii. 30; xv. 2[T Tr WH δέ]; xvii. 29; xix. 36; xxv. 
IT;xxvi 22; Ro.v.1;xv.98; 2'Co. i. 125 yd eva ἢ" 
Heb. iv. 14; x.19; 1 Pet. iv. 1; 2 Pet. iii. 11 [WH Tr 
anrg. οὕτως]. ἐὰν οὖν, if then ever, in case then, or rather, 
therefore if, therefore in case, (for in this formula, οὖν, al- 
though placed in the protasis, yet belongs more to the 
apodosis, since it shows what will necessarily follow from 
what precedes if the condition introduced by ἐάν shall 
ever take place): Mt. v. 23 [cf. W. 455 (424)]; vi. 22 
[here Tdf. om. οὖν] ; xxiv. 26; Lk. iv. 7; Jn. vi. 62; viii. 
36; Ro. ii. 26; 1 Co. xiv. 11, 23; 2 Tim. ii. 21; ἐὰν oiv 
py, Rev. iii. 3; so also ὅταν οὖν, when therefore: Mt. vi. 2; 
xxi. 40; xxiv. 15, and RGin Lk. xi. 84. ὅτε οὖν, when 
(or after) therefore, so when: Jn. xiii. 12, 31 [(80) 
Rec.*e ez L T Tr WH]; xix. 30; xxi. 15; i. q. hence it 
came to pass that, when etc., Jn. ii. 22; xix.6, 8. ὡς οὖν, 
when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. 6; xviii. 6; 
xx. 11; xxi. 9; ὡς οὖν, as therefore, Col. ii. 6. ὥσπερ οὖν, 
Mt. xiii. 40. μὲν οὖν, foll. by δέ [cf. B. § 149, 16], Mk. 
xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. οὖν] ; Jn. xix. 25; Actsi. 6; viii. 4, 
25; 1 Co. ix. 25, ete.; without an adversative conjunc. 
following, see μέν, II. 4. νῦν οὖν, see above under a., and 
b. y. h. As to position, it is never the first word 
in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the 
third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. § 61, 6]; as, 
[περὶ τῆς βρώσεως οὖν etc. 1 Co. viii. 4]; οἱ μὲν οὖν, Acts 
ii. 41, and often; πολλὰ μὲν οὖν, Jn. xx. 30. i. John 
uses this particle in his Gospel far more frequently 
[(more than two hundred times in all)] than the other 
N. T. writers; in his Epistles only in the foll. passages: 
1 Jn. ii. 24 (where GL T Tr WH have expunged it) ; iv. 
19 Lehm.; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Hom. down.)] 

οὔπω, (fr. οὐ and the enclitic πώ), adv., [fr. Hom. 
down], (differing fr. μήπω, as οὐ does fr. μή [q. v. ad 
init. ]), not yet ; a. in a negation: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. 
xiii. 7; Jn.1i.4 ; iii. 24; vi. 17 Ltxt. T Tr WH; vii. 6, 85 
RL WH txt., 8, 30,39; viii. 20, 57; xi. 30; xx. 17; 1 
Co.ii.2; Heb. ii. 8; xii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 2; Rev. xvii. 10, 
12 (where Lehm. οὐκ) ; οὐδεὶς οὔπω, no one ever yet (see 
οὐδείς, 2, and cf. οὐ, 3 a.), Mk. xi. 2 L T Tr WH; Lk. 
xxiii. 53 L Tr WH ; Acts viii. 16 Rec. b. in ques- 
tions, nondumne? do ye not yet ete.: Mt. xv. 17 RG; 
xvi.9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WH; viii. 17, [21 L txt. T Tr 
WH}. 

οὐρά, -às, 7, a tail: Rev. ix. 10, 19 ; xii. 4. 
down; Sept. several times for 251.) * 

οὐράνιος, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term. 
[W. $11, 1; B. 25 (23)], (οὐρανός), heavenly, i. e. a. 
dwelling in heaven: ὃ πατὴρ ὁ ovp., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32; xv. 


(From Hom. 


464 





, 
ovpavos 


13; besides LT Tr WII in v. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9; 
στρατιὰ ovp. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WH mrg. οὐρα- 


νοῦ). b. coming from heaven: ὀπτασία οὐρ. Acts 
xxvi. 19. (Hom. in Cer. 55; Pind., Tragg., Arstph., 
al.) * 


οὐρανόθεν, (οὐρανός), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17; 
xxvi. 13. (Hom., Hes., Orph., 4 Mace. iv.10.) Cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.* 

οὐρανός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. a root meaning ‘ to cover,' *encom- 
pass’; cf. Vaniéek p. 895; Curtius $509], heaven; and, 
in imitation of the Hebr. p'o? (i. e. prop. the heights 
above, the upper regions), οὐρανοί, -àv, oi, the heavens [W. 
§ 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the 
art. cf. W. 121 (115)), i. e. 1. the vaulted expanse 
of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. gener- 
ally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 
12; ὁ oip. κι ἡ yr, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the 
world, (acc. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, 
inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the 
name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv. 19; Tob. vii. 17 (18); 
1 Macc. ii. 37, etc.) : Mt. v. 18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 
81; Lk. x. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 83; Actsiv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 
24; Rev.x.6; xiv. 75; xx. 11. The ancients conceived of 
the expanded sky as an arch or vault the outmost edge of 
which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D. 
s. v. Firmament, cf. Heaven]; hence such expressions as 
ἀπ᾽ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν, Mt. xxiv. 31; am 
ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ, Mk. xiii. 27; ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 
(moUn nnn, Eccl. i. 13; ii. 3, ete.), under heaven, i. e. 
on earth, Acts ii. 5; iv. 12; Col.i. 23; ἐκ τῆς (sc. χώρας, 
ef. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.) ]) ὑπ᾽ [here L T Tr WH 
ὑπὸ τὸν ovp. | οὐρανὸν eis τὴν ὑπ᾽ οὐρανόν, out of the one part 
under the heaven unto the other part under heaven i. e. from 
one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24 ; as by 
this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance 
is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven 
stands as the extreme measure of altitude; hence, xoA- 
λᾶσθαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Rev. xviii. 5 [L T Tr WH] (on - 
which see κολλάω) ; ὑψωθῆναι ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, metaph. of 
a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and 
prosperity, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15, (κλέος οὐρανὸν ἵκει, Hom. 
Il. 8, 192; Od. 19, 108; πρὸς οὐρανὸν βιβάζειν τινά, Soph. 
O. C. 382 (381) ; exx. of similar expressions fr. other 
writ. are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 62); καινοὶ οὐρανοί 
(kai γῆ καινήν. better heavens which will take the place of 
the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii. 
13; Rey. xxi. 1; of νῦν οὐρανοί, the heavens which now 
are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7; also 
ὁ πρῶτος οὐρανός, Rev. xxi. 1, cf. Heb. xii. 26. But the 
heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded 
curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2; Is. xl. 22), and to . 
an unrolled scroll ; hence, ἑλίσσειν [ T Tr mrg. ἀλλάσσειν] 
τοὺς οὐρ. ὡς περιβόλαιον, Heb. i. 12 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci. 
(cii.) 26 eod. Alex.); kai ὁ op. ἀπεχωρίσθη ὡς βιβλίον 
ἑλισσόμενον [or eQuac.], Rev. vi. 14. b. the aerial 
heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests 
gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced: 
ὁ οὐρ. πυρράζει, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.]5 


οὐρανός 


΄σστυγνάζων, ib. 3 [see last ref.]; ὑετὸν ἔδωκε, Jas. v. 18; 
add Lk. ix. 54; xvii. 29; Actsix. 3; xxii. 6; Rev. xiii. 13; 
xvi. 21; xx. 9; σημεῖον ἐκ or ἀπὸ τοῦ ovp., Mt. xvi. 1; Mk. 
viii. 11; Lk. xi. 16; xxi. 11; τέρατα ἐν τῷ oip. Acts ii. 
19; κλείειν τὸν οὐρανόν, to keep the rain in the sky, hin- 
der it from falling on. the earth, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi. 6, 
(συνέχειν τὸν oip. for DW ^xy, Deut. xi. 17; 2 Chr. 
vi.26; vii. 13; ἀνέχειν τὸν ovp. Sir. xlviii. 3) ; ai νεφέλαι 
τοῦ o)p., Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; τὸ πρόσω- 
πον τοῦ ovp., Mt. xvi. 3[ T br. WH reject the pass.]; Lk. 
xii. 56; τὰ πετεινὰ τ. ovp. (gen. of place), that fly in the 
air (Gen. i. 26; Ps. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7), 
Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 
58; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12. These heavens are opened by 
being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or 
abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth — now 
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Mk. i. 10; Lk. iii. 21 sq.; Jn. 
i.32; now angels, Jn. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap- 
pear to human sight some of the things within the high- 
est heaven, Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16; through the aerial 
heavens sound voices, which are uttered in the heavenly 
abode: Mt. iii. 17; Mk.i. 11; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. xii. 28; 2 
Pet. i. 18. c. the sidereal or starry heavens: 
τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρ. Heb. xi. 12 (Deut. i. 10; x. 22; Eur. 
Phoen. 1) ; of ἀστέρες τ. ovp., Mk. xiii. 25; Rev. vi. 13; 
Xii. 4, (Is. xiii. 10; xiv. 13) ; ai δυνάμεις τῶν ovp. the 
heavenly forces (hosts), i. e. the stars [al. take Suv. in this 
phrase in a general sense (see δύναμες, f.) of the powers 
which uphold and regulate the heavens]: Mt. xxiv. 29; 
Lk. xxi. 26; ai ἐν τοῖς oip. Mk. xiii. 25, (Hebr. N2x 
DOW, Deut. xvii. 3; Jer. xxxiii. 22; Zeph. i. 5) ; so ἡ 
"στρατιὰ Tov οὐρανοῦ, Acts vii. 42. 2. the region above 
the sidereal heavens, the seat of an order of things eternal 
and consummately perfect, where God dwells and the other 
heavenly beings: this heaven Paul, in 2 Co. xii. 2, seems 
to designate by the name of ὁ τρίτος ovp., but certainly 
not the third of the seven distinct heavens described by 
the author of the Test. xii. Patr., Levi § 3, and by the 
Rabbins [(cf. Wetstein ad loc. ; Hahn, Theol. d. N. T. i. 
247 sq.; Drummond, Jewish Messiah, ch. xv.)]; ef. De 
Wette ad loc. Several distinct heavens are spoken of 
also in Eph. iv. 10 (ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν ovp.) ; cf. Heb. 
vii. 26, if it be not preferable here to understand the nu- 
merous regions or parts of the one and the same heaven 
where God dwells as referred to. The highest heaven 
is the dwelling-place of God: Mt. v. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts 
vii. 49; Rev. iv. 1 sqq., (Ps. x. (xi.) 4; exiii. 24 (exv. 16 
:sq.)); hence θεὸς ro) oip., Rev. xi. 13; xvi. 11, (Gen. 
xxiv. 3); ὁ ἐν (rois) oip., Mt. v. 16, 45; vi. 1,9; vii. 21; 
x.33; xii. 0; xvi. 17; xviii. 10 [here L WH mrg. ἐν τῷ 
"οὐρανῷ in br.], 14, 19; Mk. xi. 25 sq., ete. From this 
heaven the πνεῦμα dy. is sent down, 1 Pet. i. 12 and the 
pass. already cited [cf. 1 b. sub fin.]; and Christ is said 
to have come, Jn. iii. 13, 31; vi. 38, 41 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 47; 
it is the abode of the angels, Mt. xxiv. 36; xxii. 30; xviii, 
10; xxviii. 2; Mk. xii. 25; xiii. 32; Lk. ii. 15; xxii. 43 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Gal. i. 8; 1 Co. viii. 5; Eph. 
iii. 15; Heb. xii. 22; Rev.x.1; xii. 7; xviii. 1; xix. 14, 
30 


465 


ous 


(Gen. xxi. 17; xxii. 11); τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς καὶ τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς» the things and beings in the heavens (i. 6. angels) 
and on the earth, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 16, 20; γίνεται τὸ 
θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν οὐρανῷ, i.e. by the inhabitants of 
heaven, Mt. vi. 10; χαρὰ ἔσται ἐν τῷ ovp., God and the 
angels will rejoice, Lk. xv. 7. this heaven is the abode, 
to which Christ ascended after his resurrection, Mk. 
xvi. 19; Lk. xxiv. 51 [T om. WH reject the cl.]; Acts i. 
l0sq.; 11. 34; iii. 21; Ro. x. 6; [Eph. i. 20 Lchm. txt.]; 1 
Pet. iii. 22; Heb. i. 4 (ἐν ὑψηλοῖς) ; viii. 1; ix.24; Rev. 
iv. 2. and from which he will hereafter return, 1 Th. i. 
10; iv. 16; 2 Th. i. 7; into heaven have already been 
received the souls (πνεύματα) both of the O. T. saints 
and of departed Christians, Heb. xii. 23 (see ἀπογράφω, 
b. fin.), and heaven is appointed as the future abode of 
those who, raised from the dead and clothed with supe- 
rior bodies, shall become partakers of the heavenly king- 
dom, 2 Co. v. 1, and enjoy the reward of proved virtue, 
Mt. v. 12; Lk. vi. 23; hence eternal blessings are called 
θησαυρὸς ἐν οὐρανῷ, Mt. vi. 20; Lk. xii. 33, and those on 
whom God has conferred eternal salvation are said ἔχειν 
θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ (-vois), Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. 
xviii. 22, cf. Heb. x. 34 [RG]; or the salvation awaiting 
them is said to be laid up for them in heaven, Col. i. 5; 
1 Pet. i.4; or their names are said to have been written 
in heaven, Lk. x. 20; moreover, Christ, appointed by 
God the leader and lord of the citizens of the divine 
kingdom, is said to have all power in heaven and on 
earth, Mt. xxviii. 18; finally, the seer of the Apocalypse 
expects a new Jerusalem to come down out of heaven as 
the metropolis of the perfectly established Messianic 
kingdom, Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2,10. By meton. 6 οὐρανός is 
put for the inhabitants of heaven : εὐφραίνου οὐρανέ, Rev. 
xviii. 20, cf. xii. 12, (Ps. xev. (xcvi.) 11; Is. xliv. 23; Job 
xv. 15) ; in particular for God (Dan. iv. 23, and often by 
the Rabbins, influenced by an over-scrupulous reverence 
for the names of God himself ; cf. Schiirer in the Jahrbb. 
f. protest. Theol., 1876, p. 178 sq.; [Keil, as below]): 
ἁμαρτάνειν εἰς τὸν ovp., Lk. xv. 18, 21; ἐκ τοῦ ovp., i.q. by 
God, Jn. iii. 27; ἐξ ovp., of divine authority, Mt. xxi. 25; 
Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4; ἐναντίον τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, 1 Mace. iii. 
18 (where the rod θεοῦ before rod ovp. seems question- 
able); ἐκ τοῦ ovp. ἡ ἰσχύς, ib. 19; ἡ ἐξ ovp. βοήθεια, xii. 
15; xvi. 3, cf. iii. 50-53, 59; iv. 10, 24, 30, 40,55; v. 31; 
vii. 37, 41; ix. 46; cf. Keil, Comm. üb. d. Büch. d. Mace. 
p.20. Onthe phrase ἡ βασιλεία τῶν obp. and its meaning, 
see βασιλεία, 3; [Cremer s. v. Bac. ; Edersheim i. 265]. 
Oipfavós, -o?, 6, [a Lat. name; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 
Philip. p. 174], Urbanus, a certain Christian : Ro. xvi. 9.* 
Οὐρίας, -ov [ B. 17 sq. (16) no. 8], 6, (ww light of Je- 
hovah [or, my light is Jehovah]), Uriah, the husband of 
Bathsheba the mother of Solomon by David : Mt. i. 6.* 
οὖς, gen. ards, plur. ὦτα, dat. ὠσίν, τό, [cf. Lat. auris, 
ausculto, audio, etc.; akin to die, αἰσθάνομαι ; cf. Curtius 
$619; Vanicek p. 67]; fr. Hom. down; Hebr. p; the 
ear; 1. prop.: Mt. xiii. 16; Mk. vii. 33; Lk. xxii. 
50; 1Co.ii. 9; xii. 16; ὦτά τινος eis δέησιν, to hear sup- 
plication, 1 Pet. iii. 12; ἡ γραφὴ πληροῦται ἐν τοῖς ὠσί 


* 


Y 
ovcia 


τινος, while present and hearing, Lk. iv. 21 (Bar. i. 3 
sq.); those unwilling to hear a thing are said συνέχειν 
[q. v. 2a.] rà Gra, to stop their ears, Acts vii. 57 ; ἠκούσθη 
τι els τὰ ὦτά Twos, something was heard by, came to the 
knowledge of [A. V. came to the ears of ] one, Acts xi. 22; 
likewise εἰσέρχεσθαι, Jas. v. 4; γίνεσθαι, to come unto the 
ears of one, Lk. i. 44; ἀκούειν eis τὸ οὖς, to hear [A. V. 
in the ear i. e.] in familiar converse, privately, Mt. x. 27 
(cis οὖς often so in class. Grk.; οἵ. Passow [L. and S.] 
s. v. 1) ; also πρὸς τὸ οὖς λαλεῖν, Lk. xii. 3. 2. met- 
aph. i. q. the faculty of perceiving with the mind, the fac- 
ulty of understanding and knowing: Mt. xiii. 16; ὁ ἔχων 
(or et τις ἔχει) Sra (or οὖς, in Rev.) [sometimes (esp. in 
Mk. and Lk.) with ἀκούειν added; cf. B. $ 140, 3] ἀκουέτω, 
whoever has the faculty of attending and understanding, 
let him use it, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, 43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vii. 
16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Lk. viii. 8; xiv. 35 (34); 
Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22; xiii. 9; rois ὠσὶ Ba- 
péws ἀκούειν, to be slow to understand or obey [A. V. 
their ears are dull of hearing], Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 
27, (fr. Ts. vi. 10) ; dra ἔχοντες οὐκ ἀκούετε, Mk. viii. 18; 
ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, [ears that they should not hear; cf. B. 
267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8; θέσθε τ. λόγους τούτους els rà ὦτα. 
[A. V. let these words sink into your ears i.e.] take them 
into your memory and hold them there, Lk. ix. 44; ἀπε- 
pirpyros rois ὠσίν (see ἀπερίτμητος), Acts vii. 51.* 

οὐσία, -as, ἡ, (fr. àv, οὖσα, dv, the ptep. of εἰμί), what 
one has, i.e. property, possessions, estate, [A.V. substance]: 
Lk. xv. 12sq. (Tob. xiv. 18; Hdt. 1, 92; Xen., Plat., 
Attic oratt., al.) * 

οὔτε, (οὐ and ré), an adjunctive negative conj., [fr. 
Hom. down], (differing fr. μήτε as οὐ does fr. μή [q. v. ad 
init.], and fr. οὐδέ as μήτε does fr. μηδέ; see μήτε and 
οὐδέ), neither; and not. 1. Examples in which οὔτε 
stands singly : a. οὐ... οὔτε, Rev. xii. 8 Rec. (where 
GL T Tr WH οὐδέ); xx. 4 RG (where L T Tr WH 
οὐδέν) ; οὐδεὶς ἄξιος εὑρέθη ἀνοῖξαι τὸ βιβλίον οὔτε βλέπειν 
αὐτό, Rev. v. 4; cf. W.491 (457); B. 367 (315); ov... 
οὐδὲ ... οὔτε, 1 Th. ii. 3 RG (where L T Tr WH more 
correctly οὐδέ) [W.493 (459); B. 368 (315)]; οὐδὲ... 
οὔτε (so that οὔτε answers only to the ov in οὐδέ), Gal. i. 
12R G T WH txt. [W. 492 (458) ; B. 366 (314) ]. b. 
οὔτε... καί, like Lat. neque ... et, neither . . . and: Jn. iv. 
11; 3 Jn. 10, (Eur. Iph. T. 591; but the more common 
Grk. usage was ov... τέ, οἵ. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 
714; Passow s. v. B. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II. 4]; W. $ 55, 
7; [B. $ 149, 13 c.]). c. By a solecism οὔτε is put 
for οὐδέ, not... even: 1 Co. iii. 2 Rec. (where G L T Tr 
WH οὐδέ) [W. 493 (459); B. 367 (315) ; § 149, 13 17; 
Mk. v. 3 RG (where L T Tr WH have restored οὐδέ 
[W. 490 (456); B. u. s.]) ; Lk. xii. 26 RG (where LT 
Tr WH οὐδέ [W. u. s. and 478 (445); B. 347 (298)]); 
οὔτε μετενόησαν, Rev. ix. 20 R L Tr (where G WH txt. 
ov, T οὐδέ not . . . even; WH mrg. οὔτε or οὐδέ [cf. B. 367 
(315)]); after the question μὴ δύναται . . . σῦκα ; follows 
οὔτε ἁλυκὸν γλυκὺ ποιῆσαι ὕδωρ, Jas. iii. 12 G L'T Tr WH 
(as though οὔτε δύναται . .. σῦκα had previously been in 
the writer’s mind [cf. W. 493 (459); B.u. 5.7). 2: 


466 





οὗτος 


used twice or more, neither... nor, (Lat. nec... nec ; 
neque . . . neque) : Mt. vi. 20; xxii. 30; Mk. xii. 25; [xiv. 
68 L txt. T Tr WH]; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. iv. 21; v. 
387; viii. 19; ix. 3; Acts xv. 10; xix. 37; xxv. 8; xxviii. 
21; Ro. viii. 38 sq. (where οὔτε occurs ten times) ; 1 Co. 
iii. 7; vi. 9sq. (οὔτε eight times [yet T WH Tr mrg. the 
eighth time οὐ); xi. 11; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15; 1 Th. ii. 6; 
Rev. iii. 15 sq.; ix. 20; xxi. 4; οὔτε. .. ore... οὐδέ 
(Germ. auch nicht, also not), L. Tr WH in Lk. xx. 35 sq., 
and L Τ Tr mrg. WH in Acts xxiv. 12 sq.; cf. W. 491 
(457 sq.) ; B. 368 (315) note. 

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pron. [cf. Curtius p- 
543], Hebr. 71, ANI, this; used 

T. absolutely. ale a. this one, visibly present 
here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq. ; ix. 
85; 2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 88; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk. 
ii. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25; ix. 8 sq. 19; xviii. 
21,30; xxi. 21; Actsii.15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to 
the nature and character of the person or thing men- 
tioned, it is used with a suggestion — either of con- 
tempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.: Lk. v. 21; vii. 
39, 49; Jn. vi. 42, 52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt. 
xxi.11; Aetsix.21; ef. Wahl, Clavis apoeryphor. V. T. 
p. 370. b. it refers to a subject immediately pre- 
ceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RG 11; 
Jn.i.2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6, 8, etc. ; at the beginning of 
a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk. 
xvi.1; Jn. 1. 41 (42); iii. 2; xii. 21; xxi. 21; Acts vii. 
19; xxi.24. this one just mentioned and no other: Jn. 
ix. 9; Acts iv. 10 (ἐν τούτῳ) ; ix. 20; 1 Jn. v. 6; such as 
I have just described, 2 Tim. iii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 17. καὶ 
οὗτος, this one just mentioned also, i.e. as well as the 
rest, Lk. xx. 30 R GL; Heb. viii. 3. καὶ τοῦτον, and 
him too, and him indeed, 1 Co. ii. 2. c. it refers to 
the leading subject of a sentence although in position 
more remote (W. § 23, 1; [B. $ 127, 3]): Aetsiv. 11; 
vii. 19; viii. 26 (on which see Taga sub fin.); 1 Jn. v. 20 
(where οὗτος is referred by [many] orthodox interpre- 
ters incorrectly [(see Alford ad loc.; W. and B. ll. cc.)] 
to the immediately preceding subject, Christ); 2 Jn. 
7: d. it refers to what follows; οὗτος, αὕτη ἐστί, in 
this appears . . . that ete.; on this depends . . . that ete. : 
foll. by ὅτι, as αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία, ὅτι, 1 Jn. i. 5; add, 
v. 11, 14; —by ἵνα, Jn. xv. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23; v. 3; 2 Jn. 
6; τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ ἔργον, τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, ἵνα, Jn. vi. 29, 
39 sq. e. it serves to repeat the subject with em- 
phasis: οὐ πάντες of ἐξ Ἰσραήλ, οὗτοι Ἰσραήλ, Ro. ix. 6; 
add, ib. 8; ii. 14 [L mre. οἱ τοιοῦτοι] ; vii. 10; Gal. iii. 7; 
it refers, not without special force, to a description given 
by a participle or by the relative ὅς, ὅστις ; which de- 
seription either follows, as Mk. iv. 16, 18; Lk. viii. 15, 
21; ix. 9; Jn. xi. 37; foll. by a relative sentence, Jn. i. 
15; 1 Pet. v. 12;— or precedes: in the form of a parti- 
ciple, Mt. x. 22; xiii. 20, 22 sq. ; xxiv. 13; xxvi. 23; Mk. 
xii. 40; Lk. ix. 48 (6... ὑπάρχων, otros); Jn. vi. 46; 
vii. 18; xv.5; 2 ὅπ. 9; Acts xvii. 7; (and RG in Rev. 
iii. 5); or of the relative ὅς, Mt. v.19; Mk. iii. 35; Lk. 
ix. 24, 26; Jn. i. 33 [here L mrg. αὐτός}; 111. 26; v. 98; 


οὗτος 


Ro. viii. 30; 1 Co. vii. 20; Heb. xiii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 5; 2 Pet. 
ii. 19; in the neut., Jn. viii. 26; Ro. vii. 16. 1 Co. vii. 24; 
Phil iv. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 2; or of a preceding ὅστις, Mt. 
xviii. 4; in the neut. Phil. iii. 7. ὅσοι . . - οὗτοι, Ro. viii. 
14; Gal vi. 12; also preceded by εἴ τις, 1 Co. iii. 17 
[here Lehm. αὐτός]; viii. 3; Jas.i.23; iii. 2; by ἐάν τις; 
Jn. ix. 81; cf. W. 8 23, 4. f. with αὐτός annexed, 
this man himself, Acts xxv. 25; plur. these themselves, 
Acts xxiv. 15,20; on the neut. see below, 2a.b.etc. ^g. 
As the relat. and interrog. pron. so also the demonstra- 
tive, when it is the subject, conforms in gender and 
number to the noun in the predicate : οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ 
τῆς Bac. Mt. xiii. 38; add, Mk. iv. 15 sq. 18; αὕτη ἐστὶν 
ἡ μεγάλη ἐντολή, Mt. xxii. 38; οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος (Germ. 
diese sind), 2 Jn. 7. 2. The neuter τοῦτο a. 
refers to what precedes: Lk. v.6; Jn. vi. 61; Acts xix. 
17; τοῦτο εἰπών and the like, Lk. xxiv. 40 [T om. Tr br. 
WH reject the vs.]; Jn. iv. 18; viii. 6; xii. 33; xviii. 
38; διὰ τοῦτο, see διά, D. IT. 2a.5 εἰς τοῦτο, see eis, D. II. 
3 c. B.; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this very cause, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. 
αὐτοί]; cf. Matthiae $ 470, 7; Passow s. v. C. 1 a. fin. ; 
[L. and S. s. v. C. IX. 1 fin.; W. $21,3note 2; Kühner 
§ 410 Anm. 6]; μετὰ τοῦτο, see perd, ITI. 2b. ἐκ τούτου, 
Jor this reason [see ἐκ, II. 8], Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; from 
this, i. e. hereby, by this note, 1 Jn. iv. 6 [ef. Westcott ad 
loc.]. ἐν τούτῳ, for this cause, Jn. xvi. 30; Acts xxiv. 
16; hereby, by this token, 1 Jn. iii. 19. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, in the 
meanwhile, while this was going on [but see ἐπί, B. 2 6. 
fin. p. 234°], Jn. iv. 27. τούτου χάριν, Eph. iii. 14. plur. 
ταῦτα, Jn. vii. 4 (these so great, so wonderful, things); 
pera ταῦτα, see μετά, ll. 2b. κατὰ ταῦτα, in this same 
manner, Ree. in Lk. vi. 28, and xvii. 30, [al. τὰ αὐτά or 
ταὐτά]. it refers to the substance of the preceding dis- 
course: Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27; xxiv. 26; Jn. v.34; xv. 11; xxi. 
24, and very often. xaos... ταῦτα, Jn. viii. 28. b. 
it prepares the reader or hearer and renders him atten- 
tive to what follows, which thus gets special weight (W. 
§ 23,5): 1Jn. iv. 2; αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅτι, Phil. i. 6; τοῦτο λέγω 
foll. by direct discourse, Gal. iii. 17 [see λέγω, II. 2 d.]. 
it is prefixed to sentences introduced by the particles 
ὅτι, wa, etc.: τοῦτο λέγω or φημί foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. i. 12 
[(see λέγω u. s.); 1 Co. vii. 29]; xv. 505 γινώσκεις τοῦτο 
foll. by ὅτι; Ro. vi. 6; 2 Tim. iii. 1; 2 Pet. i. 20; iii. 3; 
λογίζεσθαι τοῦτο ὅτι, Ro. ii. 3; after ὁμολογεῖν, Acts xxiv. 
14; after εἰδώς, 1 Tim.i.9; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, 1 Jn. iii. 16, 24 ; 
iv.9 sq.; τοῦτο, tva, Lk. i. 43; eis τοῦτο, tva, Acts ix. 21; 
Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 9; iv. 6; 1 Jn. iii. 8; dea 
τοῦτο, tva, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15; τούτων 
(on this neut. plur. referring to a single object see W. 
162 (153); [ef. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41]), iva, 3 
Jn. 4; ἐν τούτῳ, ἐάν, 1 Jn. ii. 3; ὅταν, 1 Jn. v. 2; τοῦτο 
αὐτὸ, tva, on this very account, that (see a. above [but oth- 
ers take it here as acc. of obj.; see Meyer ad loc. (for 
instances of αὐτὸ τοῦτο see D. § 127, 12)]), 2 Co. ii. 3; 
eis αὐτὸ τοῦτο, ἵνα, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; ὅπως, Ro. ix. 
17. In the same manner τοῦτο is put before an infin. 
with τό for the sake of emphasis [W. § 23, 5; B. § 140, 
7,9, etc.]: 2 Co. ii. 1; before a simple infin. 1 Co. vii. 37 


467 





οὗτος 


[here R G prefix τοῦ to the inf.]; before an acc. and inf. 
Eph. iv. 17; before nouns, as τοῦτο εὔχομαι, τὴν ὑμῶν 
κατάρτισιν, 2 Co. xiii. 9, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 24; v. 4. C. kai 
τοῦτο. and this, and that too, and indeed, especially: Ro. 
xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, L T Tr WH also in 8; Eph. ii. 8; 
καὶ ravra, and that too, 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; (so 
καὶ ταῦτα also in class. Grk. ; cf. Devar. ed. Klotz i. p. 108; 
Viger. ed. Herm. p. 176 sq.; Matthiae § 470, 6). d. 
ravra, of this sort, such, spoken contemptuously of men, 
1 Co. vi. 11 (cf. Soph. O. R. 1329; Thuc. 6, 77; Liv. 30, 
30; cf. Bnhdy. p. 281; [W. 162 (153) ]). €. τοῦτο 
μὲν... τοῦτο δέ, partly... partly, Heb. x. 33 (for exx. 
fr. Grk. auth. see W. 142 (135); Matthiae ii. $ 288 
Anm. 2; [Kühner $ 527 Anm. 37). 
see εἰμί, II. 3 p. 176^. 

11. Joined to nouns itis used like an adjective ; a. 
so that the article stands between the demonstrative and 
the noun, οὗτος 6, αὕτη 7j, τοῦτο τό, [cf. W. § 23 fin.; B. 
$127, 29]: Mt. xii. 32; xvi. 18; xvii. 21 [Ἐ WH om. Tr 
br. the vs.]; xx. 12; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. vii. 44 ; x. 
36; xiv. 30; xv. 24; Jn. iv. 15; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr 
br. the cl.]; viii. 20; x. 65 xi. 47; xii. 5; Actsi. 11; Ro. 
xi.24; 1 Tim.i.18; Heb. vii. 1; viii. 105 [1 Jn. iv. 21]; 
Rev. xix. 9; xx. 14; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, etc. ; τοῦτο τὸ παιδίον, 
such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48; ef. Borne- 
mann adloc. [who takes τοῦτο thus as representing the 
class, ‘this and the like;’ but cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad 
loc. ]. b. so that the noun stands between the arti- 
cle and the demonstrative [cf. W. 548 (510) ]; as, of λίθοι 
οὗτοι, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9; iv. 
3; add, Mt.v.19; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. τούτους], 26, 28 ; 
ix. 26 [Tr mrg. WH mre. αὐτῆς] ; x. 23, etc. ; Mk. xii. 16; 
xiii. 30; Lk. xi. 31; xxiii. 47; Jn. iv. 13, 21; vii. 49; xi. 9; 
xviii. 29; Acts vi.13; xix. 26; Ro. xv. 28; 1 Co. i. 20; 
ii.6; xi. 26; 2 Co.iv.1, 7; viii.6; xi. 10; xii. 13; Eph. 
ii. 8; v. 32; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev. ii. 24, and very often — 
(which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other 
[see W. u. 5.7}; it is added to a noun which has another 
adjective, 7 χήρα ἡ πτωχὴ αὕτη, Lk. xxi. 3; πάντα τὰ 
ῥήματα ταῦτα, Lk. ii. 19, 51 [(T WH L mrg. om. Ltxt. Tr 
mrg. br. ταῦτα) ; ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης, Acts 
ii. 401. c. Passages in which the reading varies 
between οὗτος ὁ and 6... bros: ΥἱΖ. οὗτος ὁ, Mk. xiv. 
30 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn. ἵν. 20R Lmrg.; Jn. vi. 6ORG; 
Jn. vii. 86 RG; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg.; Jn. xxi. 23 
LT Tr WH. ὁ... οὗτος, Mk. xiv. 30 R GL mrg.; Jn. 
iv. 20 GLtxt. T Tr WH ; Jn. vi. 60 L T Tr WH ; Jn. vii. 
36L T Tr WH; Jn. ix. 24 GT Trtst.; Jn. xxi. 23 RG; 
ete. d. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical 
specifications [W. $37, 5 N. 1]: τρίτον τοῦτο, this third 
time, 2 Co. xiii. 1; τοῦτο τρίτον, Jn. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi. 
15; δεύτερον τοῦτο, Gen. xxvii. 36; τοῦτο δέκατον, Num. 
xiv. 22; τέταρτον τοῦτο, Hat. 5, 76). [The passages which 
follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are 
(with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the 
predicative use of οὗτος ; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B. 
$127,31; Rost § 98, 3 A.c. a. sq.]: τοῦτο πάλιν δεύτερον 
σημεῖον ἐποίησεν, Jn. iv. 54; τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει; 


Í. τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, 


ovTO 


this is the third day that Israel is passing [but see ἄγω, 
3], Lk. xxiv. 21 (κεῖμαι τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν, this is 
now the thirtieth day that I lie (unburied), Lcian. dial. 
mort. 13, 3); οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας (see μετά, 1]. 
2b. [W. 161 (152); B. $ 127, 4]), Acts i. 5; οὗτος μὴν 
ἕκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ, this is the sixth month with her ete. Lk. 
i. 36; αὕτη ἀπογραφὴ πρώτη ἐγένετο, Lk. ii. 2 L (T) Tr 
WH; ταύτην ἐποίησεν ἀρχὴν τῶν σημείων, Jn. ii. 11 L T 
Tr WH. 

οὕτω and οὕτως (formerly in printed editions οὕτω 
appeared before a consonant, οὕτως before a vowel; but 
[recent critical editors, following the best Mss. (“cod. 
Sin. has -ro but fourteen times in the N. T." Scrivener, 
Collation ete. p. liv.; cf. his Introduction ete. p. 561), 
have restored οὕτως; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times; 
'T df. 203 times, 4 times -re ; Lehm. 196 times, 7 times-ro 
(all before a consonant); WH 196 times, 10 times -ro 
(all before a consonant); cf. 7f. Proleg. p. 97; WH. 
App. p. 146 sq.]; ef. W. $5,1b.; B. 9; [Lob. Pathol. 
Elementa ii. 213 sqq.]; cf. Krüger $ 11, 12, 1; Kühner 
$72, 3 a.), adv., (fr. οὗτος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 
13» in this manner, thus, so; 1. by virtue of its na- 
tive demonstrative force it refers to what precedes; in 
the manner spoken of; in the way described; in the way 
it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so: 
Mt. vi. 30; xi. 26; xvii.12; xix. 8; Mk. xiv. 59; Lk. i. 
25; 11. 48: xii.28; Ro. xi.5; 1 Co. viii. 12; xv. 11; Heb. 
vi. 9; [2 Pet. iii. 11 WH Tr mrg.]; οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται [L 
Tr WH ἐστὶν (so also T in Mk.) ] ἐν ὑμῖν, it will not be 
so among you (I hope), Mt. xx. 26; Mk. x. 43; ὑμεῖς οὐχ 
οὕτως sc. ἔσεσθε, Lk. xxii. 26; ἐὰν ἀφῶμεν αὐτὸν οὕτως sc. 
ποιοῦντα, thus as he has done hitherto [see ἀφίημι, 2 b.], 
Jn. xi. 48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and 
serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Mt. v. 16 (even 
so, i. e. as the lamp on the lamp-stand) ; Mt. xii. 45; xiii. 
49; xviii. 14; xx. 16; Lk. xii. 21 [WH br. the vs.]; xv. 
7,10; Jn. iii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 24; likewise οὕτως kat, Mt. xvii. 
12; xviii. 35 ; xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. xvii. 10. οὕτως 
ἔχειν, to be so (Lat. sic or ita se habere): Acts vii. 1; xii. 
15; xvii 11; xxiv. 9. it serves to resume participles 
(Joseph. antt. 8, 11,1; b.j. 2, 8, 5; seeexx. fr. Grk. auth. 
in Passow s. v. 1 h.; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]) : Acts xx. 11; 
xxvii. 17; but Jn. iv. 6 must not [with W. $ 65, 9 fin.; B. 
§ 144, 21] be referred to this head, see Meyer [and 5 d. 
below]; on Rev. iii. 5, see 5 c. below. it takesthe place 
of an explanatory participial clause, i. q. matters being 
thus arranged, under these circumstances, in such a con- 
dition of things, [B. § 149,1; cf. W. § 60, 5]: Ro. v. 12 
(this connection between sin and death being established 
[but this explanation of the οὕτως appears to be too gen- 
eral (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]); Heb. vi. 15 (i.e. sinee God 
had pledged the promise by an oath) ; i. q. things having 
been thus settled, this having been done, then: Mt. xi. 26; 
Acts vii. 8; xxviii. 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 1 Th.iv.17; 2 Pet. 
i. 11; cf.. Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. i. p. 298. Closely 
related to this use is that of οὕτως (like Lat. ita for itaque, 
igitur) in the sense of consequently [cf. Eng. so at the 
beginning of a sentence]: Mt. vii. 17; Ro. i. 15; vi. 11; 


468 





“ 
ovTO 


Rev. iii. 16, ({ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 220]; Passow s. v. 
2; [L. and S. s. v. IL]). 2. it prepares the way 
for what follows : Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xix. 31; Jn. xxi. 1; οὕτως 
ἦν, was arranged thus, was on this wise, [W. 465 (484); 
B. $129, 11], Mt. i. 18; οὕτως ἐστὶ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ foll. 
by an infin., so is the will of God, that, 1 Pet. ii.15. be- 
fore language quoted from the O. T.: Mt. ii. 5; Acts vii. 
6; xiii. 34, 47; 1 Co. xv. 45; Heb. iv. 4. 3. with 
adjectives, so [Lat. ‘am, marking degree of intensity]: 
Heb. xii. 21; Rev. xvi. 18; postpositive, ri δειλοί ἐστε 
οὕτως; Mk. iv. 40 [L Tr WH om.]; in the same sense 
with adverbs, Gal. i. 6; or with verbs, so greatly, 1 Jn. 
. ὥστε, Jn. iii. 16. οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως, 
it was never seen in such fashion, i. e. such an extraor- 
dinary sight, Mt. ix. 33 (ἐφάνη must be taken imperson- 
ally; ef. Bleek, Synopt. Erklür. i. p. 406 [or Meyer ad 
loc.]); οὐδέποτε οὕτως εἴδομεν, we never saw it so, i. e. 
with such astonishment, Mk. ii. 12. 4. οὕτως or 
οὕτως καί in comparison stands antithetie to an adverb 
or a relative pron. [W. § 53,5; cf. B. 362 (311) ¢.]: xa- 
θάπερ . . . οὕτως, Ro. xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 
11; καθὼς... οὕτως, Lk. xi. 30; xvii. 26; Jn. iii. 14; 
xii. 50; xiv. 81; xv. 4; 2.00.1.5; x. 7; 1 Th.i1.4; Heb. 
v. 3; οὕτως . .. καθώς, Lk. xxiv. 24; Ro. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 
17; os... οὕτως, Acts viii. 32; xxiii. 11; Ro.v. 15, 18; 
1Co.vii.17; 2 Co. vii. 14; 1 Th. ii. 8; v. 2; οὕτως . . . ds, 
Mk. iv. 26; Jn. vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; 1 Co, 
iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26; Eph. v. 28; Jas. ii. 12; οὕτως as... 
μὴ ὡς, 2 Co. ix. 5 [G L T Tr WH]; ὥσπερ. . . οὕτως, Mt. 
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27, 37, 39; Lk. xvii. 24 ; .Jn. v. 
21, 26; Ro. v.12, 19,215 v1: ἈΦ x1. 915 1 (.ὔὅὃς ΣΙ 10. cv 
22; xvi. 1; 2Co.i. 7 RG; Gal. iv. 29; Eph.v. 24. R G; 
after καθ᾽ ὅσον, Heb. ix. 27 sq.; οὕτως . . . ὃν τρόπον, Acts 
1.11 ; xxvii. 25; ὃν τρόπον . . . οὕτως, 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Is. lii. 
14); κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν ἣν λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν οὕτω κτλ. after the 
Way (i. e. as it requires [cf. ὁδός, 2 a. fin.]) so ete. Acts 
xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foll. special uses deserve 
notice : a. (ἔχει) ὃς [better 6] μὲν οὕτως ὃς [better 
6] δὲ οὕτως, one after this manner, another after that, i. e. 
different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (ποτὲ μὲν 
οὕτως καὶ ποτὲ οὕτως φάγεται 1) μάχαιρα, 2 S. xi. 25). b. 
οὕτως, in the manner known to all, i. e. ace. to the context, 
so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 3. c. in that state in which 
one finds one's self, such as one is, [cf. W. 465 (434)]: τί 
με ἐποίησας οὕτως, Ro. ix. 20; οὕτως εἶναι, μένειν, of those 
who remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40; ὁ νικῶν οὕτως 
περιβαλεῖται viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor [al. in the 
manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii. 5 L T Tr WH. ἃ.. 
thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [cf. Eng. off-hand, 
without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just]: Jn. iv. 
6; cf. Passow s. v. 4; [L.and S. s. v. IV.; see 1 above; 
add Jn. xiii. 25 TWH Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes 
ad loc.)] e. in questions (Lat. sicine?) [Eng. ex- 
clamatory so then, what]: Mk. vii. 18 (Germ. sonach) [al. 
take οὕτως here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi. 
40, however, many give it the sense spoken of ; cf. too 1 
Co. vi. 5]; οὕτως ἀποκρίνῃ ; i. e. so impudently, Jn. xviii. 
22; with an adjective, so (very), Gal. iii. 3. [But these 


iv. 11; οὕτως .. 


οὐχ 
exx., although classed together by Fritzsche also (Com. 
on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination. 
The passage from Gal, for instance, does not seem to 
differ essentially from examples under 3 above.] f. 
In class. Grk. οὕτως often, after a conditional, concessive, 
or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow 
s. v. 1 h. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]).. 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev. 
xi.5 have been referred to thishead ; B. 357 (307); [cf. 
W.$860,5 (esp.a.)]. But questionably; for in the first 
passage οὕτως may also be taken as equiv. to under these 
circumstances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better 
cf. W.u.s.]; in the second passage οὕτως denotes in the 
manner spoken of, i. 6. by fire proceeding out of their 
mouth. 

οὐχ, see ov. 

οὐχί, i. 4- od, not, but stronger [ef. νυνί ad init.] ; ‘as 
in simple negative sentences, by no means, not at all, 
[A. V. not]: Jn. xiii. 10 sq.; xiv. 22; 1 Co. v. 2; vi.1; 
foll. by ἀλλά, 1 Co. x. 29; 2 Co. x. 13 (L T Tr WH οὐκ); 
in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not so], Lk. i. 
60; xii. 51; xii.3,5; xvi.30; Ro. ii 27. b. ina 
question, Lat. nonne? (asking what no one denies to be 
true): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 29; xiii. 27; xx. 13; Lk. vi. 39; 
xvii. 17[L Tr WH οὐχ]; xxiv. 26; Jn. xi. 9; Acts ii. 7 
Tr WH txt.; Ro. ii. 26 (L T Tr WH οὐχ); 1 Co. i. 20; 
Heb. i. 14, etc.; (Sept. for x5n, Gen. xl. 8; Judg. iv. 
6); ἀλλ᾽ οὐχί, will he not rather, Lk. xvii. 8. 

ὀφειλέτης, -ov, 6, (ὀφείλω), one who owes another, a 
debtor: prop. of one who owes another money (Plat. 
legs. 5, 736 d. ; Plut.; al); with a gen. of the sum due, 
Mt. xviii. 24. Metaph. a. one held by some obliga- 
tion, bound to some duty: ὀφειλέτης εἰμί, i. q. ὀφείλω, foll. 
by an inf., Gal. v. 3 (Soph. Aj. 590); ὀφειλ. εἰμί τινος, 
to be one’s debtor i.e. under obligations of gratitude to 
him for favors received, Ro. xv. 27; τινί (dat. commodi), 
to be under obligation to do something for some one, 
Ro. i. 145 viii. 12. b. one who has not yet made 
amends to one whom he has injured: Mt. vi. 12; in imi- 
tation of the Chald. $^» oné who owes God penalty or 
of whom God can demand punishment as something due, 
i. e. a sinner, Lk. xiii. 4.* 

ὀφειλή, -7s, ἡ, (ὀφείλω), that which is owed; prop. a 
debt: Mt. xviii. 32; metaph. plur. dues: Ro. xiii. 7; 
spec. of conjugal duty [R. V. her due], 1 Co. vii. 3 GL 
TTrWH. Found neither in the Grk. O. T. nor in 
prof. auth.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90.* 

ὀφείλημα, -ros, τό, (ὀφείλω), that which is owed ; a. 
prop. that which is justly or legally due, a debt; so for 
mw, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10); ἀφιέναι, 1 Mace. xv. 8; ἀπο- 
τίνειν, Plat. lege. 4 p. 717 b.; ἀποδιδόναι, Aristot. eth. 
Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p. 1165*, 3]. κατὰ ὀφείλημα, as of debt, Ro. 
iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 3yn or s2in 
(which denotes both debt and sin), metaph. offence, sin, 
(see ὀφειλέτης, b.); hence, ἀφιέναι τινὶ τὰ ὀφειλ. αὐτοῦ, to 
remit the penalty of one’s sins, to forgive them, (Chald. 
pain paw); Mt. vi. 12. [Cf W. 30,32, 33.]* 

ὀφείλω ; impf. ὥφειλον ; pres. pass. ptcp. ὀφειλόμενος ; 
fr. Hom. down ; 10 owe; a. prop. to owe money, be 


469 














ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 


in debt for: τινί τι, Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. xvi. 5; without a 
dat., Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 7; Philem. 18; τὸ 
ὀφειλόμενον, that which is due, the debt, Mt. xviii. 30; 
αὐτῷ (which L Tr WHom.), that due to him, ib. 34. b. 
metaph.: ri, pass. τὴν εὔνοιαν ὀφειλομένην, the good-will 
due [A. (not R.) V. due benevolence], 1 Co. vii. 3 Rec. ; 
μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε (here ὀφείλετε, on account of what 
precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest 
sense, both literal and tropical), εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους dya- 
πᾶν, owe no one anything except to love one another, be- 
cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love 
can never be paid, Ro. xiii. 8. absol. to be a debtor, be 
bound: Mt. xxiii. 16,18; foll. by an inf. to be under obli- 
gation, bound by duty or necessity, to do something; it be- 
hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed 
either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or 
by the nature of the matter under consideration [acc. to 
Westcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli- 
gationin its special and personal aspects]: Lk. xvii. 10; 
Jn. xiii. 14 ; xix. 7 (ὀφείλει ἀποθανεῖν, he ought to die) ; 
Acts xvii. 29; Ro.xv. 1, 27; 1 Co. v. 10; [vii. 36 (A. V. 
need so requireth) |; ix. 105 xi. 7, 105 2 Co. xii. 14; Eph. 
v. 28 2 ΤῊΣ 1. 5.11. 18} Heb εἰ. τ 2 εν. 5. 125 1 dn9146/ 
iii. 16; iv. 11; 3 Jn. 8; ὥφειλον συνίστασθαι, I ought to 
have been commended, i. e. I can demand commenda- 
tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. c. after the Chaldee (see ὀφειλέ- 
της, Ὁ.» ὀφείλημα, b.), ὀφείλω τινί, to have wronged one 
and not yet made amends to him [ A. V. indebted], Lk. 
xi.4. [Cowr.: mpoo-odeiha. ]* 

ὄφελον (for ὥφελον, without the augm., 2 aor. of ὀφείλω; 
in earlier Grk. with an inf., as ὥφελον θανεῖν, I ought to 
have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. would that I were 
dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter- 
jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes 
that a thing had happened which has not happened, or 
that a thing be done which probably will not be done 
[cf. W. 301 sq. (283); B. $150, 5]: with an optative 
pres. Rev. iii. 15 Rec.; with an indicative impf., Rev. 
ibid. GL T Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15; 
Isnat. ad Smyrn. c. 12); with an indic. aorist, 1 Co. iv. 
8 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 5; ὄφελον ἀπεθάνομεν, Ex. xvi. 3; 
Num. xiv. 2; xx. 3) ; with the future, Gal. v. 12 (Leian. 
soloec. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is 
classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 603*; [L. and 
S. s. v. ὀφείλω, II. 3].* 

ὄφελος, -ovs, τό, (ὀφέλλω to increase), advantage, profit: 
1Co.xv.32; Jas.ii.14, 16. (From Hom. down; Sept. 
Job xv. 3.) * 

ὀφθαλμο-δουλεία [T WH -Aía; see I, εἾ, -as, 7, (ὀφθαλ- 
μόδουλος, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i. 
p. 299*; and this fr. ὀφθαλμός and δοῦλος), [ A. V. eye- 
service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master's 
eye (μὴ κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοδ.. τουτέστι μὴ μόνον παρόντων τῶν 
δεσποτῶν καὶ ὁρώντων. ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀπόντων, Theophyl. on 
Eph. vi. 6; “for the master’s eye usually stimulates to 
greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren- 
ders sluggish.”” H. Stephanus): Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22. 
Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 100 (94) ].* 


ὀφθαλμός 


ὀφθαλμός, -οὔ, ὁ, [fr. r. ὁπ to see; allied to ὄψις, ὄψο- 
μαι, ete.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for py, [fr. Hom. down], 
the eye: Mt. v. 38; vi. 22; Mk.ix.47; Lk. xi. 34; Jn. 
ix. 6; 1 Co. xii. 16; Rev. vii. 17; xxi. 4, and often; ῥιπὴ 
ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 52; of ὀφθαλμοί μου εἶδον (see the 
remark in γλῶσσα, 1), Lk. ii. 30; cf. iv. 20; x. 23; Mt. 
xiii. 16; 1 Co.ii.9; Rev.i.7; [ἀνέβλεψαν of ὀφθαλμοί 
Mt. xx. 34 RG]; ἰδεῖν rois 0$0., Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; 
Acts xxviii. 27; ὁρᾶν rois ὀφθ. (see ópáo, 1), 1 Jn. i. 1; 
ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθ. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16. 
Since the eye is the index of the mind, the foll. phrases 
have arisen: 0j. cov πονηρύς ἐστιν, i. e. thou art envious, 
Mt. xx. 15; ὀφθ. πονηρός, envy, Mk. vii. 22 (py yr, an 
envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 22; cf. Sir. xxxiv. 
13; JMS Wy. ny thine eye is evil toward thy 
brother, i. e. thou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut. 
xv. 9; of. πονηρὸς φθονερὸς ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ, Sir. xiv. 10; μὴ 
φθονεσάτω cov ὁ ὀφθ. Tob. iv. 7; the opposite, ἀγαθὸς 
ὀφθαλμός, is used of a willing mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 
10, 12); on the other hand, ὀφθαλμὸς πονηρός in Mt. vi. 
23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye, 
a bad finger [see πονηρός, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. κρα- 
τεῖν τοὺς ὀφθ. τοῦ μή κτλ. [ A. V. to hold the eyes i. e.] 
to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. 16 ; 
ὑπολαμβάνω τινὰ ἀπὸ τῶν oO. τινος, by receiving one to 
withdraw him from another's sight [ A. V. received him 
out of their sight], Acts i.9. Metaph. of the eyes of the 
mind, the faculty of knowing: ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθ. σου, 
hid from thine eyes, i. e. concealed from thee [cf. B. 320 
(274)], Lk. xix. 42; διδόναι τινὶ ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, 
to cause one to be slow to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [ef. B. 
267 (230)]; τυφλοῦν τοὺς op. τινας, Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. 
li. 11; σκοτίζονται οἱ ὀφθ. Ro. xi. 10; πεφωτισμένοι ὀφθαλ- 
μοὶ τῆς διανοίας [cf. B. $ 145, 6], Eph. i. 18 Rec.; τῆς 
καρδίας (as in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2), ibid. GL T Tr 
WH; ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος (^3 ^Yj3 [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin.]), 
in the judgment [cf. our view] of one, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. 
Xii. 11; οὐκ ἔστι τι ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθ. Twos, to neglect a 
thing (cf. our leave, put, out of sight), Ro. iii. 18; γυμνόν 


ἐστί τι τοῖς op. τινος (see γυμνός, 2a.), Heb. iv. 13; of | 
OPO. τοῦ κυρίου ἐπὶ δικαίους (sc. ἐπι- [or dzro-] Berovcy, | 


which is added in Ps. x. (xi.) 4), are (fixed) upon the 
righteous, i. e. the Lord looks after, provides for them, 
1 Pet. iii. 12. Other phrases in which ὀφθαλμός occurs 
may be found under ἀνοίγω p. 48°, ἁπλοῦς, διανοίγω 1, 
ἐξορύσσω 1, ἐπαίρω p. 238", καμμύω, μοιχαλίς ἃ.» προγρά- 
$o 2. 

ὄφις, -ews, 6, [perh. named fr. its sight; cf. δράκων, 
init., and see Curtius as s. v. ὀφθαλμός ; fr. Hom. Il. 12, 
208 down; Sept. mostly for vr; a snake, serpent: Mt. 
vii. 10; Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. x. 19; xi. 11; Jn. iii. 14 ; 1 Co. 
x.9; Rev.ix. 19; with the ancients the serpent was an 
emblem of cunning and wisdom, 2 Co. xi. 3, cf. Gen. iii. 
1; hence, φρόνιμοι ὡς oi ὄφεις, Mt. x. 16 [here WH mrg. 
ὁ odis]; hence, crafty hypocrites are called ὄφεις, Mt. 
xxiii. 33. The serpent narrated to have deceived Eve 
(see Gen. u. s.) was regarded by the later Jews as the 
devil (Sap. ii. 23 sq. cf. 4 Mace. xviii. 8); hence he is 





470 ὄχλος 


called ὁ ὄφις ὁ ἀρχαῖος, ὁ ὄφις: Rev. xii. 9, 14 sq. ; xx. 
2; see [Grimm on Sap. u.s.; Fr. Lenormant, Beginnings 
of History ete. ch. ii. p. 109 sq., and] δράκων." 

ὀφρύς, -vos, ἡ, 1. the eyebrow, so fr. Hom. down. 
2. any prominence or projection; as [Eng. the brow] of 
a mountain (so the Lat. supercilium, Verg. georg. 1, 
108; Hirt. bell. afr. 58; Liv. 27,18; 34, 29): Lk. iv. 29 
(Hom. Il. 20, 151; often in Polyb., Plut., al.).* 

[ὀχετός, -ov, 6, 1. a water-pipe, duct. 2. the 
intestinal canal: Mk. vii. 19 WH (rejected) mrg. (al. 
ἀφεδρών)."} 

ὀχλέω, -@ : pres. pass. ptep. ὀχλούμενος : (ὄχλος) ; prop. 
to excite a mob against one; [in Hom. (Il. 21, 261) to dis- 
turb, roll away]; univ. to trouble, molest, (τινά, Hdt. 5, 41; 
Aeschyl., al.); absol. to be in confusion, in an uproar, (3 
Mace. v. 41); pass. to be vexed, molested, troubled: by 
demons, Lk. vi. 18 R G L (where T Tr WH evoyA., — the 
like variation of text in Hdian. 6, 3, 4) ; Acts v. 16; 
Tob. vi. 8 (7); Acta Thomae $12. [Comp.: ἐν-» rap- 
€v-oxAéo. | * 

ὀχλο-ποιέω, -à : 1 aor. ptep. ὀχλοποιήσας ; (ὄχλος, ποιέων; 
to collect a crowd, gather the people together : Acts xvii. 5. 
Not found elsewkere.* 

ὄχλος, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks. 
and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and 
Aeschyl down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collec- 
tion of people; a multitude of men who have flocked to- 
gether in some place, a throng: Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, ete. ; 
Mk. ii. 4 ; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1, 19; vii. 9, etc. ; Jn. 
v. 13; vi. 22, 24 ; vii. 20, 32, 49, etc. ; Acts xiv. 145 xvii. 
8; xxi. 34; τὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or ἀπὸ 
ToU ὄχλου, xix. 39; ix. 38; ἀπὸ (for i.e. on account of 
[cf. ἀπό, 11. 2 b.]) v. ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ἡ βία τ. ὄχλου, 
Acts xxi. 35 ; πολὺς ὄχλος and much oftener ὄχλος πολύς, 
Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi. 47 ; Mk. v. 21,24; vi. 34; ix. 14; 
xiv. 43 [here T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. zoA.] ; Lk. vii. 
11; viii. 4; ix. 37; Jn. vi. 2, 5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg. 


| br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with 


the art. ὁ πολὺς ὄχλ.» the great multitude present, Mk. xii. 
37 ; [6 ὄχλος πολύς (the noun forming with the adj. a sin- 
ele composite term, like our) the common people, Jn. xii. 9 
T WH Tr mrg.; cf. B. u.s. ; some would give the phrase 
the same sense in Mk. 1. c.]; πάμπολυς, Mk. viii. 1 [Ree.]; 
ἱκανός, Mk. x. 46 ; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26 ; xix. 26; ὁ 
πλεῖστος ὄχλ. [the most part of the multitude], Mt. xxi. 8; 
πᾶς 6 ὄχλ., Mt. xiii. 2; Mk. ii. 12; iv. 1; vii. 14 [Rec.]; ix. 
15; xi. 18; Lk. xiii. 17; Acts xxi. 27; ὄχλ. τοσοῦτος, Mt. 
xv. 33; αἱ μυριάδες ToU ὄχλ. Lk. xii. 1; οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, not 
having a crowd with me, Acts xxiv. 18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, in the 
absence of the multitude [(see drep) ], Lk. xxii.6. plur. 
οἱ ὄχλοι, very often in Mt. and Lk., as Mt. v.1; vii. 28; 
ix. 8, 33, 36 ; xi. 7; xii. 46; xiii. 34, 36, etc. ; Lk. iii. 7, 
10; iv. 42; v. 35 viii. 42, 45; ix. 11; xi. 14, etc. ; Acts 
viii. 6; xiii. 45 ; xiv. 11, 13, 18 sq. ; xvii. 13; once in Jn. 
vii. 12 [where Tdf. the sing.]; in Mk. only vi. 33 Rec.; 
and without the art. Mk. x. 1; ὄχλοι πολλοί, Mt. iv. 25; 
viii. 1; xii. 15 [RG]; xiii. 2; xv. 30; xix. 2; Lk. v. 15; 
xiv. 25; πάντες οἱ ὄχλοι, Mt. xii. 23. 2. the multi- 


ὀχύρωμα 
tude i. e. the common people, opp. to the rulers and lead- 
ing men: Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26; Mk. xii. 12; [Jn. vii. 12° 
(provided the plur. is retained in the first part of the 
vs.)]; with contempt, the ignorant multitude, the populace, 
Jn. vii. 49; ἐπισύστασις ὄχλου, a riot, a mob, Acts xxiv. 
12 [L T Tr WH ἐπίστασις (q- v-) ὄχ.]. S. univ. a 
multitude : with a gen. of the class, as τελωνῶν, Lk. v. 29 ; 
μαθητῶν, Lk. vi. 17; ὀνομάτων (see ὄνομα, 3), Acts i. 15; 
τῶν ἱερέων, Acts vi. 7; the plur. ὄχλοι; joined with Aaoí 
and ἔθνη, in Rev. xvii. 15 seems to designate troops of 
men assembled together without order. (Sept. chiefly 
for i55.) 

ὀχύρωμα, -ros, τό, (ὀχυρόω [to make strong, to fortify]) ; 
1. prop. a castle, stronghold, fortress, fastness, Sept. for 
7¥10, etc.; very often in 1 and 2 Macc.; Xen. Hellen. 
3,2:8: 2. trop. anything on which one relies: κα- 
cide τὸ ὀχύρωμα, ἐφ᾽ à ἐπεποίθεισαν, Prov. xxi. 22; ὀχύ- 
popa ὁσίου φόβος κυρίου, Prov. x. 29; in 2 Co. x. 4 of 
the arguments and reasonings by which a disputant en- 
deavors to fortify his opinion and defend it against his 
opponent.* 

ὀψάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ὄψον [cf. Curtius $ 630] 
i.e. whatever is eaten with bread, esp. food boiled or 
roasted; hence specifically), fish: Jn. vi. 9, 11 ; xxi. 9 sq. 
13. (Comic. ap. Athen. 9, c. 35 p. 385 e. ; Lcian., Geop. 
[cf. Wetstein on Jn. vi. 9]; see γυναικάριον, fin. [W. 23 
(22)])* 

ὀψέ, (apparently fr. àzts ; see ὀπίσω, init.), adv. of time, 
after a long time, long after, late ; a. esp. late in the 
day (se. τῆς ἡμέρας, which is often added, as Thue. 4, 93 ; 
Xen. Hellen. 2, 1, 23), i. e. at evening (Hom., Thuc., 
Plat, al; for 33y ny, Gen. xxiv. 11): Mk. xi. [11 T 
Tr mrg. WH txt. (cf. Plut. Alex. 16,1)], 19; xiii.35. — b. 
with a gen. [W. $ 54, 6], ὀψὲ σαββάτων, the sabbath having 
just passed, after the sabbath, i. e. at the early dawn of the 
first day of the week— (an interpretation absolutely 
demanded by the added specification τῇ ἐπιῴφωσκ. κτλ.), 
Mt. xxviii. 1 ef. Mk. xvi. 1 (ὀψὲ τῶν βασιλέως χρόνων, 
long after the times of the king, Plut. Num. 1; ὀψὲ 
μυστηρίων, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 
4, 18); [but an examination of the instances just cited 
(and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren- 
dering after (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape, 
Schenkl, and other lexicographers) ; ὀψέ foll. by a gen. 
seems always to be partitive,denoting late in the peri- 
od specified by the gen. (and consequently still belong- 
ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kühner $414, 5 c. B. 
Hence in Mt. l. c. */ate on the sabbath']. Keim iii. 
p. 552 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve 
the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vespere 


471 


ὀψώνιον 


sabbati, on the evening of the sabbath], but without suc- 
cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. über Matth. ad loc.)]* 

ὄψιμος, -ον, (ὀψέ), late, latter, (Hom. Il. 2, 325; ὀψιμώ- 
raros σπόρος, Xen. oec. 17, 4 sq.; ἐν rois ὀψίμοις τῶν ὑδά- 
rov, of the time of subsidence of the waters of the Nile, 
Diod. 1, 10; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]): oy. ὑετός, the 
latter or vernal rain, which falls chiefly in the months of 
March and April just before the harvest (opp.to the 
autumnal or mpwipos [cf. B. D. s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but 
LT Tr WH om. ὑετόν, cod. Sin. and a few other authori- 
ties substitute καρπόν]; Sept. for wipon, Deut. xi. 14; 
Jer. v. 24; Hos. vi. 3; Joel ii. 23; Zech. x. 1.* 

ὄψιος, -a, -ov, (ὀψέ), late; 1. as an adjective 
([Pind.,] Thuc., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.; [Zob. ad 
Phryn. p.51 sq.]): ἡ ὥρα, Mk.xi.11 [but T Tr mrg. WH 
txt. ὀψέ, q. v.] (ὀψίᾳ ἐν νυκτί, Pind. Isthm. 4, 59). E 
contrary to the usage of prof. auth. ἡ ὀψία as a subst. 
(sc. ὥρα [cf. W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), evening: 
i.e. either from our three to six o'clock P. w., Mt. viii. 
16; xiv. 15; xxvii. 57; Mk. iv. 35; or from our six o'clock 
P. M. to the beginning of night, Mt. xiv. 23; xvi. 2 
[here T br. WH reject the pass.]; xx. 8; xxvi. 20; Mk. 
1.82; vi.47; xiv.17; xv. 42; Jn. vi. 16 ; xx. 19, (hence 
D30ymn p3, between the two evenings, Ex. xii. 6; xvi. 
12; xxix. 39 [cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1064 sq. (and 
addit. et emend. p. 106); B. D.s.v. Day]). Besides 
only in Judith xiii. 1.* 

ὄψις, -ews, 7, (ONTO, ὄψομαι [cf. ὀφθαλμός), fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. chiefly for 12; 1. seeing, sight. 2. 
face, countenance: Jn. xi. 44; Rev. i. 16. 3. the 
outward appearance, look, [many lexicographers give 
this neuter and objective sense precedence]: κρίνειν κατ᾽ 
ὄψιν, Jn. vii. 24." 

ὀψώνιον, -ov, τό, (fr. ὄψον ---- on which see ὀψάριον, init. 
— and ὠνέομαι to buy), a later Grk. word (cf. Sturz, De 
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 ; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 418), 
prop. whatever is bought to be eaten with bread, as fish, 
flesh, and the like (see ὀψάριον). And as corn, meat, 
fruits, salt, were given to soldiers instead of pay (Caes. 
b. g. 1, 23, 1; Polyb. 1, 66 sq.; 3, 13, 8), ὀψώνιον began 
to signify 1. univ. a soldier’s pay, allowance, 
(Polyb. 6, 39, 12; Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 36), more com- 
monly in the plur. [W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)] ὀψώνια, 
prop. that part of a soldier's support given iu place of 
pay [i. e. rations] and the money in which he is paid 
(Polyb. 1, 67, 1; 6, 39, 15; 1 Macc. iii. 28; xiv. 32; 1 
Esdr. iv. 56 ; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3) : Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co. 
ix. 7 [cf. W. $31, 1 d.]. 2. metaph. wages: sing. 
2 Co. xi. 8; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, the hire that sin pays, Ro. vi. 
23.* 


472 


II 


, 
παγιδεύω 


παγιδεύω: 1 aor. subj. 3d pers. plur. παγιδεύσωσιν; 
(παγίς, q. V.) ; a word unknown to the Greeks; to en- 
snare, entrap : birds, Eccl. ix. 12; metaph., τινὰ ἐν λόγῳ, 
of the attempt to elicit from one some remark which can 
be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15. 
([τοῖς λόγοις, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet.; cf. also Deut. 
vii. 25 ; xii. 30 in the same]; 1 S. xxviii. 9.) * 

παγίς, -i8os, ἡ, (fr. πήγνυμι to make fast, 2 aor. ἔπαγον; 
prop. that which holds fast [cf. Anth. Pal. 6, 5]), Sept. 
for n3, n3, wpin; ete.; a snare, trap, noose; ὩΣ 
prop. of snares in which birds are entangled and 
caught, Prov. vi. 5; vii. 23; Ps. xe. (xci.) 3; exxiii. 
(exxiv.) 7; παγίδας ἱστάναι, Arstph. av. 527; hence ὡς 
παγίς, as a snare, i.e. unexpectedly, suddenly, because 
birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b. 
trop. a snare, i. e. whatever brings peril, loss, destruction: 
of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr. 
Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23; of the allurements and seductions 
of sin, ἐμπίπτειν eis πειρασμὸν k. παγίδα, 1 Tim. vi. 9 (ἐμπί- 
πτει els παγίδα ἁμαρτωλός, Prov. xii. 13, cf. xxix. 6; joined 
with σκάνδαλον. Sap. xiv. 11); τοῦ διαβόλου, the allure- 
ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim. 
ii. 26; 1 Tim. iii. 7. (In Grk. writ. also of the snares 
of love.) * 

πάθημα, -ros, τό, (fr. παθεῖν, πάσχω, as μάθημα fr. pa- 
θεῖν), fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down; 1. that which one 
suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering, 
misfortune, calamity, evil, affliction: plur., Ro. viii. 18; 
2 Co.i.6sq.; Coli.24; 2 Tim.iii 11; Heb.ii.10; x. 
32; 1 Pet. v. 9; τὰ els Χριστόν, that should subsequently 
come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 11; τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1; also the 
afflictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of 
the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are 
called παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ [ W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co. 
i5; Phil iii 10; 1 Pet.iv. 13. | b. of an inward 
state, an affection, passion: Gal. v. 24; τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, 
that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. i. q. τὸ πάσχειν (see 
καύχημα, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suffering, (so the 
plur. in Arstph. thesm. 199) : θανάτου, gen. of the obj., 
Heb. ii.9. [Svw. cf. πάθος, init.]* 

παθητός, -1, -óv, (πάσχω. παθεῖν); 1. passible (Lat. 
patibilis, Cie. de nat. deor. 3, 12, 29), endued with the 


capacity of suffering, capable of feeling ; often in Plut., as | 


παθητὸν σῶμα. 2. subject to the necessity of suffer- 
ing, destined to suffer, (Vulg. passibilis): Acts xxvi. 23 
(with the thought here respecting Christ as παθητός 
compare the similar language of Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. 
cc. 36, 39, 52, 68, 76, 89) ; cf. W. 97 (92); [B. 42 (37)]; 





, 
παιδάριον' 


Christ is said to be παθητός and ἀπαθής in Ignat. ad Eph. 
7, 2; ad Polyc. 8, 2).* 
πάθος, -ous, τό, (παθεῖν, πάσχω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; i.q. πάθημα (q. v.; [the latter differs fr. πάθος (if 
at all) only in being the more individualizing and con- 
crete term; cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 24 § 11]); a 
whatever befalls one, whether it be sad or joyous; spec: 
a calamity, mishap, evil, affliction. 2. a feeling which 
the mind suffers, an affection of the mind, emotion, pas- 
sion; passionate desire; used by the Greeks in either a 
good or a bad sense (ef. Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 4 [ef. Cope, 
Introd. to Aristotle's Rhet. p. 133 sqq.; and his note on 
rhet. 2,22, 16]). In the N. T. in a bad sense, depraved. 
passion: Col. iii. 5; πάθη ἀτιμίας, vile passions, Ro. i. 26 
- (see ἀτιμία) ;- ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας, [in the passion of lust], 
gen. of apposit. [W. $ 59, 8a.], 1 Th. iv. 5.* 


[SxN. πάθος, ἐπιθυμία: m. presents the passive, ἐπ. the: 
active side of a vice; ἐπ. is more comprehensive in meaning- 
than π᾿; ἐπ. is (evil) desire, v. ungovernable desire. Cf. 
"Trench $ Ixxxvii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 5.] 


παιδαγωγός, -o0, 6, (fr. παῖς, and dywyds a leader, es- 
cort), fr. Hdt. 8, 75 down; a tutor (Lat. paedagogus) 
i. e. a guide and guardian of boys. Among the Greeks 
and Romans the name was applied to trustworthy slaves: 
who were charged with the duty of supervising the life 
and morals of boys belonging to the better class. The 
boys were not allowed so much as to step out of the 
house without them before arriving at the age of man- 
hood; cf. Fischer s. v. in index i. to Aeschin. dial. Socr.; 
Hermann, Griech. Privatalterthümer, $ 34, 15 sqq.; 
[Smith, Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Antiq. s. v.; Becker, 
Charicles (Eng. trans. 4th ed.), p. 226 sq.]. They are 
distinguished from oí διδάσκαλοι: Xen. de rep. Lac. 3, 2; 
Plat. Lys. p. 208 c.; Diog. Laert. 3, 92. The name car- 
ries with it an idea of severity (as of a stern censor 
and enforcer of morals) in 1 Co. iv. 15, where the: 
father is distinguished from the tutor as one whose 
discipline is usually milder, and in Gal. iii. 24 sq. where 
the Mosaie law is likened to a tutor because it arouses 
the consciousness of sin, and is called παιδαγωγὸς εἰς" 
Χριστόν, i. e. preparing the soul for Christ, because those: 
who have learned by experience with the law that they ^ 
are not and cannot be commended to God by their 


| works, welcome the more eagerly the hope of salvation 


offered them through the death and resurrection of 
Christ, the Son of God.* 

παιδάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of παῖς, see γυναικάριον), & 
little boy, a lad: Mt.xi.16 Rec.; Jn. vi. 9. (Arstph., 


(so in eccl. writ. also, cf. Otto's Justin, Grk. index s. v.; Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. very often for *y3, also for gs 


παιδεία 


[παιδάριον of an adult youth, Tob. vi. 2, ete. (cf. 11 sq.) ].) 
[Syn. see παῖς, fin. ]* 

παιδεία (Tdf. «a; [see L «]); -as, 7, (παιδεύω), Sept. 
for 3015; 1. the whole training and education of 
children (which relates to the cultivation of mind and 
morals, and employs for this purpose now commands 
and admonitions, now reproof and punishment): Eph. 
vi. 4 [cf. W. 388 (363) note]; (in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
on, it includes also the care and training of the body.) 
[See esp. Trench, Syn. ὃ xxxii.; cf. Jowett's Plato, in- 
dex s. v. Education ]. 2. whalever in adults .also 
cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mistakes and curbing 
the passions; hence a. instruction which aims at the 
increase of virtue: 2 Tim. iii. 16. b. aec. to bibl. 
usage chastisement, chastening, (of the evils with which 
God visits men for their amendment): Heb. xii. 5 (Prov. 
iii. 11), 7 sq. [see ὑπομένω, 2 b.], 11; (Prov. xv. 5, and 
often in the O. T.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. 
p- 51; [cf. (Plat.) defin. παιδεία - δύναμις θεραπευτικὴ 
ψυχῆς)" 

παιδευτής, -oU, 6, (παιδεύω) ; 1. an instructor, pre- 
ceptor, teacher: Ro. ii. 20 (Sir. xxxvii. 19; 4 Mace. v. 34; 
Plat. legg. 7 p. 811 d., ete.; Plut. Lycurg. c. 12, ete.; Diog. 
Laért. 7, 7). 2. a chastiser: Heb. xii. 9 (Hos. v. 2; 
Psalt. Sal. 8, 35).* 

παιδεύω ; impf. éza(8evov; 1 aor. ptep. παιδεύσας ; Pass., 
pres. παιδεύομαι ; 1 aor. ἐπαιδεύθην; pf. ptep. πεπαιδευ- 
μένος ; (mais); Sept for 107; 1. as in class. Grk. 
prop. to train children: twa with a dat. of the thing in 
which one is instructed, in pass., σοφίᾳ [ W. 227 (213) n.], 
Acts vii. 22 RGL WH [cf. B. $ 134, 6] (γράμμασιν, 
Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 4 fin.) ; ἐν σοφίᾳ, ibid. T Tr; τινὰ κατὰ 
ἀκρίβειαν, in pass., Acts xxii. 3. Pass. to be instructed or 
taught, to learn: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. i. 20; to cause 
one to learn: foll. by ἵνα, Tit. ii. 12. 2. to chas- 
tise ; a. to chastise or castigate with words, to cor- 
rect: of those who are moulding the character of others 
by reproof and admonition, 2 Tim. ii. 25 (τινὰ παιδεύειν 
καὶ ῥυθμίζειν λόγῳ, Ael. v. h. 1, 34). b. in bibl. and 
eccl. use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of 
evils and calamities [cf. W. $ 2,1b.]: 1 Co. xi. 32; 2 Co. 
vi. 9; Heb. xii. 6; Rev. iii. 19, (Prov. xix. 18; xxix. 17; 
Sap. iii. 5; xi. 10 (9); 2 Mace. vi. 16; x. 4). c. to 
chastise with blows, to scourge: of a father punishing a 
son, Heb. xii. 7,[10]; of a judge ordering one to be 
scourged, Lk. xxiii. 16, 22, [(Deut. xxii. 18)].* 

παιδιόθεν, (παιδίον), adv., from childhood, from a child, 
(a later word, for which the earlier writ. used ἐκ παιδύς, 
Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 2; or ἐκ παιδίου, mem. 2, 2, 8; or ἐκ παι- 
δίων, oec. 3, 10; [ef. W. 26 (25); 463 (431)]) : Mk. ix. 
21, where LT Tr WH ἐκ παιδιόθεν [cf. Win. § 65,2]. 
(Synes. de provid. p. 91 b.; Joann. Zonar. 4, 184 a.).* 

παιδίον, ov, τό, (dimin. of παῖς), [ ἔν. Hdt. down], Sept. 
for 7D, 773, 13, ete.; a young child, a little boy, a. little 
girl; plur. rà παιδία, infants; children; little ones. In 
sing.: univ., of an infant just born, Jn. xvi. 21; of a 
(male) child recently born, Mt. ii. 8 sq. 11, 13, 14, 20 sq.; 
Lk. i. 59, 66, 76, 80; ii. 17, 21 [Rec.], 27, 40; Heb. xi. 23; 


418. 





παῖς 


of a more advanced child, Mt. xviii. 2, 4 sq.; Mk. ix. 36 
sq.; [x. 15]; Lk. ix. 47 sq.; [Lk. xviii. 17]; of a mature 
child, Mk. ix. 24; τινός, the son of some one, Jn. iv. 49 ; of 
a girl, Mk. v. 39-41; [vii.30 Ltxt.T Tr WH]. In plur. 
of (partly grown) children: Mt. xi. 16 GL T Tr WH; 
xiv.21; xv. 38; xviii. 3; xix. 13 sq. ; Mk. vii. 28: x. 13 
sqq.; Lk. vii. 32; xviii. 16; [Heb. ii. 14]; τινός, of some 
one, Lk. xi. 7, cf. Heb. ii. 13. Metaph. παιδία ταῖς φρεσί, 
children (i. e. like children) where the use of the mind is 
required, 1 Co. xiv. 20; in affectionate address, i. q. Lat. 
carissimi [ A. V. children], Jn. xxi.5; 1Jn.ii. 14 (13), 18; 
[1. 7 WH mrg. Syn. see παῖς, fin.]* 

παιδίσκη, -ns, 7, (fem. of παιδίσκος, a young boy or 
slave; a dimin. of παῖς, see νεανίσκος) ; 1. a young 
girl, damsel, (Xen., Menand., Polyb., Plut., Lcian. ; Sept. 
Ruth iv. 12). 2. a maid-servant, a young female 
slave; cf. Germ. Madchen [our maid] for a young fe- 
male-servant (Hdt. 1, 93; Lys. Dem., al.): Lk. xii. 45; 
Acts xvi. 16; opp. to ἡ ἐλευθέρα, Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 
sq.; spec. of the maid-servant who had charge of the 
door: Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 66, 69; Lk. xxii. 56; Acts: 
xii. 13; ἡ m. ἡ θυρωρός, Jn. xviii. 17; (also in the Sept. 
of a female slave, often for vow, nmawU). Cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 239. [Syn. see παῖς, fin.] * 

παίζω ; fr. Hom. down; prop. to play like a child; 
then univ. to play, sport, jest; to give way to hilarity, esp. 
by joking, singing, dancing; so in 1 Co. x. 7, after Ex. 
xxxii. 6 where it stands for Dmx, as in Gen. xxi. 9; xxvi. 
8; Judg. xvi. 25; also in the Sept. for pne. [Comp. : 
ep-zat(o- | * 

παῖς, gen. παιδός, ὁ, 7, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only 
in the Gospels and Acts; 1. a child, boy or girl; 
Sept. for 2 and ΠῚ») (Gen. xxiv. 28; Deut. xxii. 15, 
etc.) : ὁ παῖς, Mt. xvii. 18; Lk. ii. 43; ix. 42; Acts xx. 
12; ἡ παῖς, Lk. viii. 51, 54 ; plur. infants, children, Mt. ii- 
16 ; xxi. 15 ; ὅ παῖς τινος, the son of one, Jn. iv. 51. 2- 
(Like the Lat. puer, i. q.) servant, slave, ( Aeschyl. cho- 
éph. 652; Arstph. nub. 18, 132; Xen. mem. 3, 13, 6; 
symp. 1, 11; 2, 23; Plat. Charm. p. 155 a.; Protag. p. 
310 c. and often; Diod. 17, 76; al.; so Sept. times with- 
out number for 723) [cf. W. p. 30, no. 3]; cf. the similar 
use of Germ. Bursch, [French garcon, Eng. boy]): Mt. 
viii. 6, 8, 13; Lk.vii.7 cf. 10; xii. 45; xv. 26. an attend- 
ant, servant, spec. a king's attendant, minister: Mt. xiv. 
2 (Diod. xvii. 36; hardly so in the earlier Grk. writ.; 
Gen. xli. 37sq.; 1 S. xvi. 15-17 ; xviii. 22, 26; Dan. ii. 
7; 1 Mace. i. 6, 8; 1 Esdr. ii. 16; v. 33, 35) ; hence, in 
imitation of the Hebr. rrr, 123^, παῖς τοῦ θεοῦ is used of 
a devout worshipper of God, one who fulfils God's will, 
(Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 18; exii. (exiii.) 1; Sap. ii. 13, ete.) ; 
thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xli. 8; xlii. 19; 
xliv. 1 sq. 21, ete.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps. 
xvii. (xviii.) 1; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [ Ald., Compl.], ete.) ; 
likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God 
employs in executing his purposes; thusin the N. T. Jesus 
the Messiah: Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1) ; Acts iii. 13, 26; 
iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6, 1 and Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2]; in the O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7 sq. ; 


παίω 


the prophets, 1 Esdr. viii. 79 (81); Bar. ii. 30, 24; and 
others.* 

[Syn. παῖς, παιδάριον, παιδίον, παιδίσκη, τέκνον: 
The grammarian Aristophanes is quoted by Ammonius (s. v. 
γέρων) as defining thus: παιδίον, τὸ τρεφόμενον ὑπὸ τιθη- 
yoo: παιδάριον δέ, τὸ ἤδη περιπατυῦν καὶ τῆς λέξεως ἀντε- 
xáuevov* παιδίσκος δ᾽, ὁ ἐν τῇ ἐχομένῃ ἡλικίᾳ: παῖς δ᾽ ὁ 
διὰ τῶν ἐγκυκλίων μαθημάτων δυνάμενος ἰέναι. Philo (de mund. 
opif. § 36) quotes the phy: sician Hippocrates as follows: év 
ἀνθρώπου φύσει ἑπτά εἰσιν ὧραι κιτ.λ.- παιδίον μέν ἐστιν ἄχρις 
ἑπτὰ ἐτῶν, ὀδόντων ἐκβολῆς" παῖς δὲ ἄχρι γονῆς ἐκφύσεως, εἰς 
πὰ δὶς ἑπτά: μειράκιον δὲ ἄχρι γενείου λαχνώσεως, ἐς τὰ τρὶς 
ἑπτά. οἴο. According to Schmidt, παιδίον denotes exclusive- 
ly a little child; παιδάριον a child up to its first school years ; 
παῖς achild of any age; (παιδίσκος and) παιδίσκη, in which 
reference to descent quite disappears, cover the years of late 
childhood and early youth. But usage is untrammelled : 
from a child isexpressed either by éx παιδός (most frequently), 
or ἐκ παιδίου, or ἐκ (ἀπὸ) παιδαρίου. παῖς and τέκνον denote a 
child alike as respects descent and age, reference to the latter 
being more prominent in the former word, to descent in 
Tékvov; but the period παῖς covers is not sharply defined; 
and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations 
cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See 
Schmidt ch. 69; Héhne in Luthardt's Zeitschrift u. s. w. for 
1882, p. 57 sqq.] 

malo: 1 aor. ἔπαισα; from Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 
‘Sept. mostly for 737; !o strike, smite: with the fists, 
Mt. xxvi. 68 [cf. ῥαπίζω, 2]; Lk. xxii. 64; with a sword, 
Mk. xiv. 47: Jn. xviii. 10; 10 sting (to strike or wound 
with a sting), Rev. ix. 5.* 

Tlakarttavi, -ῆς, ἡ, Pacatiana (Phrygia). Inthe fourth 
century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia 
Salutaris and Phrygia Pacatiana [later, Capatiana]; Lao- 
dicea was the metropolis of the latter: 1 Tim. vi. 22 (in 
the spurious subscription). [Cf. Forbiger, Hndbch. d. 
alt. Geogr. 2te Ausg.ii. 338, 347 sq. ; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Col., Introd. (esp. pp. 19, 69 sq.).]* 

πάλαι, adv. of time, fr. Hom. down; 1. of old: 
Heb. i. 1; (as adj.) former, 2 Pet.i.9. [πάλαι properly 
designates the past not like πρίν and πρότερον rela- 
tively, i. e. with a reference, more or less explicit, to 
some other time (whether past, pres., or fut.), but sim- 
ply and absolutely.] 2. long ago: Mt. xi. 21; 
Lk. x. 13; Jude 4; so also of time just past, Mk. xv. 44 
[R. V. any while] (where L Tr txt. WH txt. ἤδη); 2 Co. 
xii. 19 L'T Tr WH [R. V. all this time], (so in Hom. Od. 
20, 293; Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 4).* 

παλαιός, -á, -dv, (πάλαι, q. v.), fr. Hom. down ; ἘΠ 
old, ancient, (Sept. several times for 11) and pny): 
οἶνος παλαιός (opp. to νέος), Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.] 
(Hom. Od. 2, 340; Sir. ix. 10); διαθήκη. 2 Co. iii. 14; 
ἐντολή (opp. to REUS given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7; ζύμη 
(opp. to νέον φύρ.), 1 Co. v. 7 sq. ; neut. plur. παλαιά (opp. 
to καινά), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to 
such articles of food as are fit for use only after having 
been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc., 
as referred to; cf. θησαυρός, 1 c.]; dropping the fig., old 
and new commandments; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23; Heb. v. 12 
Sqq-); ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος (opp. to ὁ νέος), our old 


474 


, 
παλιγγενεσία 


man, i. 6. we, as we were before our mode of thought, 
feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22; 
[Col. iii. 9]. 2. no longer new, worn by use, th 
worse Sor wear, old, (for 723, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq. 4 
ἱμάτιον, doxds, Mt. ix. 16 sq. ; Mk. ii. 21 sq.; Lk. v. 39 
sq. [Svw. see ἀρχαῖος, fin.]* 

παλαιότης, -ητος, 7, (παλαιός), oldness: γράμματος, the 
old state of life controlled by ‘the letter’ of the law, Ro. 
vii. 6; see kawdrns, and γράμμα, 2 c. ({Eur.], Plat., Aes- 
chin., Dio Cass. 72, 8.) * 

παλαιόω, -@: pf. πεπαλαίωκα ; Pass., pres. ptep. madat- 
ovpevos ; fut. παλαιωθήσομαι ; (παλαιός) ; a. to make 
ancient or old, Sept. for 1323; pass. to become old, to be 
worn out, Sept. for m3, pna: of things worn out by 
time and use, as βαλάντιον, Lk. xii. 33 ; ἱμάτιον, Heb. i. 11 
(Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxix. 5; Tonks ix. 19 (18); Neh. 
ix. 21; Is. 1. 9; li. 6; Sir. xiv. 17). pass. τὸ παλαιούμε- 
vov, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp. 
p. 208 b.; Tim. p. 59 c.). b. (o declare a thing to be 
old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 18 [see yg- 
ράσκω, fin. ].* 

πάλη, -ης, 7, (fr. πάλλω to vibrate, shake), fr. Hom. 
down, wrestling (a contest between two in which each 
endeavors to throw the other, and whichis decided when 
the victor is able θλίβειν καὶ κατέχειν his prostrate antag- 
onist, i. e. hold him down with his hand upon his neck ; 
cf. Plat. lege. 7 p. 796; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361", 
24; Heliod. aethiop. 10, 31 ; [cf. Krause, Gymn. u. Agon. 
d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq.; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq.; 
Dict. of Antiq. s. v. /ucta]) ; the term is transferred to 
the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil : Eph. 
vi. 12." 

παλιγγενεσία (T WH παλινγεν. [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 77 
bot. ]), -as, 7, (πάλιν and γένεσις), prop. new birth, repro- 
duction, renewal, re-creation, (see Halm on Cic. pro Sest. 
§ 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio; hence, moral 
renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con- 
secrated to God, a radical change of mind for the better, 
ue in baptism [cf. reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]): Tit. 
iii. 5 [cf. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see 
p. 172 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. $8 84, 108; 
cf. Suicer, 'Thes.s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word 
denotes the restoration of a thing to its pristine state, its 
renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after 
death, Philo lez. ad Gaium ὃ 41; de cherub. $32; [de 
poster. Cain. § 36]; Long. past. 3, 4 (2) (παλιγγ.- ἐκ θανά- 
Tov); Leian. encom. muscae 7; Schol. ad Soph. Elec. 62 
(Πυθαγόρας περὶ παλιγγενεσίας éreparevero); Plut. mor. 
p. 998 c. [i. e. de esu carn. ii. 4, 4] (ὅτι χρῶνται κοινοῖς ai 
ψυχαὶ σώμασιν ἐν ταῖς παλιγγενεσίαις [cf. ibid. i. (ἢ d 
also de Is. et Osir. 72; de Ei ap. Delph. 9; ete.]) ; 
renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de er 
Moys. ii. § 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4; the renewal of 
the world to take place after its destruction by fire, as 
the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt. mundi 88 3, 14, 
17]; de mund. $15; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Gataker ad 
loc.); Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 188]; that signal 
and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth) 


“πάλιν 


for the better, that restoration of the primal and perfect 
condition of things which existed before the fall of our 
first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection 
with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi- 
tive Christians expected in connection with the visible 
return of Jesus from heaven: Mt. xix. 28 (where the 


o y o D 

Syriae correctly 12g L&aSSs, in the new age or 
world) ; ef. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 sq. ; 
Gfrürer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p. 272 sqq.; [ Schürer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29, 9; Weber, Altsynagog. Palist. 
Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero’s 
restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile, 
Cic. ad Att. 6,6; of the restoration of the Jewish nation 
after the exile, παλ. πατρίδος, Joseph. antt. 11, 3,9; of the 
recovery of knowledge by recollection, παλιγγ- τῆς γνώ- 
σεώς ἐστιν ἡ ἀνάμνησις, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in 
the Journal des Savans for 1834, p.488.) [Cf Trench 
§ xviii.; Cremer 3te Aufl. s. v.]* 

πάλιν, adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. anew, again, [but 
the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among oth- 
ers) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. ii. p. 485]; a. joined 
to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition 
of the action: Mt.iv.8; xx.5; xxi.36; xxii. 1, 4; Mk. 
ii. 13; iii. 20; Lk. xxiii. 20; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; viii. 2, 8, 12, 
21; ix. 15,17; x. 19; Acts xvii. 32; xxvii. 28; Ro. xi. 23; 
1 Co. vii. 5; 2Co. xi. 16 ; Gal.i.9; 11.18; iv. 19; 2 Pet. 
ii. 20; Phil. ii. 28; iv. 4; Heb.i. 6 (where πάλιν is tacitly 
opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into 
the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus' former life on earth) ; 
Heb. v. 12 ; vi. 1,6; Jas. v. 18; Rev. x. 8, 11 ; πάλιν μικρόν 
sc. ἔσται, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; eis τὸ πάλιν, again (cf. Germ. 
zum wiederholten Male; [see eis, A. IT. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii. 
2; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning, 
where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with 
ἄγωμεν, Jn. xi. 7; ἀναχωρεῖν, Jn. vi. 15 [where Tdf. φεύγει 
and Grsb. om. πάλιν], (cf. ib. 3) ; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Jn. iv. 3; x. 
40; xx. 10; εἰσέρχεσθαι, Mk. ii. 1; iii.1; Jn. xviii. 33; 
xix. 9; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Mk. vii. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Jn. iv. 46 ; xiv. 
3; 2 Co.i. 16; xii. 21 [cf. W. 554 (515) n.; B.$145,2a.]; 
ὑπάγειν, Jn. xi. 8; ἀνακάμπτειν, Acts xviii. 21; διαπερᾶν, 
Mk. v. 21; ὑποστρέφειν, Gal. i. 17; ἡ ἐμὴ παρουσία πάλιν 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς, my presence with you again, i. e. my return to 
you, Phil. i. 26 [cf. B. $125, 2]; also with verbs of tak- 
ing, Jn. x. 17 sq.; Acts x. 16 Rec. ; xi: 10. b. with 
other parts of the sentence: πάλιν eis φόβον, Ro. viii. 15; 
πάλιν ἐν λύπῃ, 2 Co. ii. 1. C. πάλιν is explained by 
the addition of more precise specifications of time [cf. 
W. 604 (562)]: πάλιν ἐκ τρίτου, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mre. 
br. ἐκ rp-] ; ἐκ δευτέρου, Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15; πάλιν 
δεύτερον, Jn. iv. 54; xxi. 16; πάλιν ἄνωθεν, again, anew, 
[ R. V. back again (yet cf. Mey. ad loc.) ], Gal. iv. 9 (Sap. 
xix. 6; πάλιν ἐξ ἀρχῆς, Arstph. Plut. 866; Plat. Eut. p. 
11 b. and 15c.; Isoc. areiop. 6 p. 338 [p. 220 ed. Lange]; 
cf. W. u.s.). 2. again, i.e. further, moreover, (where 
the subject remains the same anda repetition of the action 
or condition is indicated): Mt. v. 33 (πάλιν ἠκούσατε) ; 
xiii. 44 (where T Tr WH om. L br. πάλιν), 45, 47; xix. 


475 


πανοικί 


24; Lk. xiii. 20 ; Jn. x. 7 [not Tdf.]; esp. where to O. T. 
passages already quoted others are added: Mt. iv. 7; 
Jn. xii. 39; xix. 37; Ro. xv. 10-12; 1 Co. iii. 20; Heb. 
i.5; ii 13; iv. 5; x. 30; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 3 sq. and 
often in Philo; cf. Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 108. 3. 
in turn, on the other hand: Lk. vi.43 T WH L br. Tr br.; 
1 Co. xii. 21; 2 Co. x. 7; 1 Jn. ii. 8, (Sap. xiii. 8 ; xvi. 23; 
2 Macc. xv. 39; see exx. fr. prof. auth. in Pape s. v. 2; 
Passow s.v. 3; [Ellendt u. s. (ad init.) ; L. and S. s. v. 
III.; but many (e. g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Mt. iii. 7) 
refuse to recognize this sensein the N. T.]). John uses 
πάλιν in his Gospel far more freq. than the other N. T. 
writ,in his Epp. but once; Luke two or three times; 
the author of the Rev. twice. 

παλινγενεσία, see παλιγγενεσία. 

παμπληθεί (T WH πανπλ. [cf. WH. App. p. 1507), 
adv., (fr. the adj. παμπληθής, which is fr. πᾶς and πλῆθος), 
with the whole multitude, all together, one and all: Lk. 
xxiii. 18 (Dio Cass. 75, 9,1). (Cf. W. $16, 4 B. 4.1" 

πάμπολυς, παμπόλλη, πάμπολυ, (πᾶς and πολύς), very 
great : Mk. viii. 1 Ree. [where L T Tr WH πάλιν πολλοῦ]. 
(Arstph., Plat., Plut., [al.].) * 

TlapdvaAta, -as, 7, Pamphylia, a province of Asia Minor, 
bounded on the E. by Cilicia, on the W. by Lycia and 
Phrygia Minor, on the N. by Galatia and Cappadocia, 
and on the S. by the Mediterranean Sea (there called 
the Sea [or Gulf] of Pamphylia [now of Adalia]): Acts 
ii. 10; xiii. 13; xiv. 24; xv. 38; xxvii. 5. [Conybeare 
and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii.; Lewin, St. Paul, index 
s. v. ; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.]* 

παν-δοκίον, see πανδυχεῖον. 

πανδϑοκεύς, see πανδοχεύς. 

παν-δοχεῖον (-δοκίον, Tdt. [cf. his note on Lk. x. 34, and 
Hesych. s. v.]), του, τό, (fr. πανδοχεύς, q. V-), an inn, a 
publie house for the reception of strangers (modern 
caravansary, khan, manzil): Lk. x. 34. (Polyb. 2, 15, 
5; Plut. de sanit. tuenda c. 14; Epict. enchirid. c. 11; 
but the Attic form πανδοκεῖον is used by Arstph. ran. 
550; Theophr. char. 11 (20), 2; Plut. Crass. 22; Pa- 
laeph. fab. 46 ; Ael. v.h. 14, 14 ; Polyaen. 4, 2, 3; Epict. 
diss. 2, 23, 36 sqq.; 4, 5,15; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307.) * 

παν-δοχεύς, -€ws, 6, (πᾶς and δέχομαι [hence lit. ‘one who 
receives all comers ']), for the earlier and more elegant 
πανδοκεύς (so Tdf.; [cf. W. 25 note]), an inn-keeper, host : 
Lk. x: 35. (Polyb. 2, 15,6; Plut. de sanit. tuenda 
QU 145) * 

πανήγυρις, -eos, ἡ, (fr. πᾶς and ἄγυρις fr. dyeipw), fr. 
Hdt. and Pind. down ; a. a festal gathering of the 
whole people to celebrate public games or other solemni- 
ties. b. univ. a public festal assembly ; so in Heb. 
xii. 22 (23) where the word is to be connected with 
ἀγγέλων [so GL Tr (Tdf.); yet see the Comm.]. (Sept. 
for 3535, Ezek. xlvi. 11; Hos. ii. 11 (13) ; ix. 5 ; Typ, 
Am. v. 21.) [Cf. Trench $i.]* 

πανοικί [so RGL Tr] and πανοικεί (T [WH ; see WH. 
App. p. 154 and ef. ei 17), on this difference in writing cf. 
W.43 sq.; B. 73 (64), (was and οἶκος ; a form rejected 
by the Atticists for πανοικίᾳ, πανοικεσίᾳ, πανοικησίᾳ, [cf. W. 


πανοπλία 


26 (25); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 514 sq. ]), with all (his) house, 
with (his) whole family: Acts xvi. 34. (Plat. Eryx. p. 
392 c.; Aeschin. dial. 2, 1; Philo de Joseph. $42; de 
vita Moys. i. 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 42; 5,1, 2; 3 Macc. 
iii. 27 where Fritzsche -xia.) * 

πανοπλία, -as, 7, (fr. πάνοπλος wholly armed, in full 
armor; and this fr. πᾶς and ὅπλον), full armor, complete 
armor, (i. e. a shield, sword, lance, helmet, greaves, and 
breastplate, [cf. Polyb. 6, 23, 2sqq.]): Lk. xi. 22; θεοῦ, 
which God supplies [W. 189 (178)], Eph. vi. 11, 13, 
where the spiritual helps needed for overcoming the 
temptations of the devil are so called. (Hdt., Plat., 
Isocr., Polyb., Joseph., Sept. ; trop. of the various appli- 
ances at God's command for punishing, Sap. v. 18.) * 

πανουργία, -as, 7), (πανοῦργος. q. V-), crafliness, cunning: 
Lk. xx. 23; 2Co. iv. 2; xi. 3; Eph. iv. 14; contextually 
i.q. a specious or false wisdom, 1 Co. iii. 19. (Aeschyl., 
Soph., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Leian., Ael., al.; πᾶσά τε ἐπι- 
στήμη χωριζομένη δικαιοσύνης καὶ τῆς ἄλλης ἀρετῆς πανουρ- 
γία οὐ σοφία φαίνεται, Plat. Menex. p. 247 ἃ. for 72} 
in a good sense, prudence, skill, pe Mer and carry- 
ing on affairs, Prov. i. 4; viii. 5; Sir. xxxi, (xxxiv. 11) 
10.)* 

πανοῦργος, -ov, (πᾶς and EPTQ i.q. ἐργάζομαι ; on the 
accent, see κακοῦργος), Sept. for 0373); skilful, clever, 
i. e. 1. in a good sense, jit to undertake and accom- 
plish anything, dexterous ; wise, sagacious, skilful, ( Avis- 
tot, Polyb. , Plut. al; Sept. Prov. xiii. 1; xxviii. 2). 
But far more freq. 2. in a bad sense, crafty, cun- 
ning, knavish, treacherous, deceitful, (Tragg., Arstph., 
Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 32 (31) [but here in a good 
sense]; xxi. 12, etc.): 2 Co. xii. 16.* 

πανπληθεί, see παμπληθεί. 

πανταχῆ or πανταχῇ (L Tr; see εἰκῆ), adv., everywhere: 
Acts xxi. 28 L T Tr WH, for πανταχοῦ, --- ἃ variation 
often met with also in the Mss. of prof. auth. [From 
Hat. down; cf. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 64.]* 

πανταχόθεν, adv., from all sides, from every quarter: 
Mk.i.45 Rec. [Hdt., Thuc., Plat., al.]* 

πανταχοῦ, adv., everywhere: Mk. i. 28 T WH Tr br. ; 
xvi. 20; Lk. ix. 6; Acts xvii. 30; xxi. 28 Rec.; xxiv. 
3; xxviii. 22; 1 Co. iv. 17. [Soph., Thuc., Plat., al.] * 

παντελής, -és, (πᾶς and τέλος), all-complete, perfect, 
(Aeschyl., Soph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace. vii. 16) ; 
eis TO παντελές (prop. unto completeness [W. $51, 1 c.]) 
completely, perfectly, utterly: Lk. xiii. 115 Heb. vii. 25, 
(Philo leg. ad Gaium 21; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 5; 3, 11, 
Shand 19.1.0: 6. 5.8. 75-19, 9: ΑΒ ΤΗΣ 012 τ. a. 0/7; 
27).* 

πάντη (Τὶ GL Tr WH πάντῃ, see reff. s. v. εἰκῆ), (más), 
adv., fr. Hom. down, everywhere; wholly, in all respects, 
in every way: Acts xxiv. 3.* 

πάντοθεν, (πᾶς). adv., fr. Hom. down, from all sides, 
Jrom every quarter: Mk. i. 45 L T WH Tr [but the last 
named here παντόθεν; cf. Chandler § 842]; Lk. xix. 
43; Jn. xviii. 20 Rec.*ezetz; Heb. ix. 4.* 

παντοκράτωρ, -opos, 6, (πᾶς and xparéo), he who holds 
sway over all things; the ruler of all; almighty: of God, 


476 





| 
| 





παρά 


2 Co. vi. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 85); Rev.i. 8; iv. 
8; xi. 17; xv. 3; xvi. 7, 14; xix. 6,15; xxi. 22. (Sept. 
for niN2N in the phrase niN2 TIT or MNI¥ "iow Je- 
hovah or God of hosts ; Aa tir ‘1; Sap. vii. 25; Sir. 
xlii. 17; 1. 14; often in Judith and 2 and 3 Mace. ; An- 
thol. Gr. iv. p. 151 ed. Jacobs; Inserr.; -eccles. writ. 
[e. v. Teaching ete. 10,3; cf. Harnack's notes on Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. init. and the Symb. Rom. (Patr. apost. opp. 
i. 2 p. 134)].) * 

πάντοτε, (πᾶς), adv., (for which the Atticists tell us 
that the better Grk. writ. used ἑκάστοτε; cf. Sturz, De 
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 sq. ; [W. 26 (25)]), at all 
times, always, ever: Mt. xxvi. 11; Mk. xiv. 7; Lk. xv. 
31; xviii. 1; Jn. vi. 34; vii. 6; viii. 29; xi. 42; xii. 8; 
xviii. 20» [20° Rec.*]; Ro. i. 10 (9); 1C0.i.4; xv. 58; 
2 Co. ii. 14; iv. 10; v. 65 [vii. 14 L mrg.]; ix. 8; Gal. 
iv. 18; Eph. v. 20; Phil. i. 4, 20; [iv. 4]; Col.i. 3; iv. 
6,[12]; 1 Th.i.2; 11.16; [13. 6]; iv. 17; [v.15, 16]; 2 
Th. i. 3, 11; ij. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 7; Philem. 4; Heb. vii. 
25. (Sap. xi. 22(21); xix. 17 (18) ; Joseph., Dion. Hal., 
Plut., Hdian. 3, 9, 13 [(7 ed. Bekk.)]; Artem. oneir. 4, 
20; Athen., Diog. Laért.) * 

πάντως, (from πᾶς), adv., altogether (Latin omnino), 
i e. a. in any and every way, by all means: 1 Co. 

22 (so fr. Hdt. down). b. doubtless, surely, cer- 

uy: Lk.iv. 23; Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xxi. 22; xxviii. 
4; 1 Co. ix. 10, (Tob. xiv. 8; Ael. v. h. 1, 32; by Plato 
in answers [ef. our colloquial by all means]). c. 
with the negative οὐ, a. where οὐ is postpositive, in 
no wise, not at all: 1 Co. xvi. 12 (often so as far back as 
Hom.). B. when the negative precedes, the force of 
the adverb is restricted : οὐ πάντως, not entirely, not al- 
together, 1 Co. v. 105 not in all things, not in all respects, 
Ro. iii. 9; (rarely i. q. πάντως οὐ, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9 
* God οὐ πάντως ἐφηδόμενος rois ἁμαρτήμασιν ἡμῶν.  Like- 
wise οὐδὲν πάντως in Hdt. 5,34. Butin Theogn. 305 ed. 
Bekk. οἱ κακοὶ οὐ πάντως κακοὶ ἐκ γαστρὸς γεγόνασι κτλ. is 
best translated not wholly, not entirely. Cf. W. 554 
(515) sq.; B. 389 (334) sq. [on whose interpretation of 
Ro. 1. c., although it is that now generally adopted, see 
Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.]).* 

παρά, [it neglects elision before prop. names begin. 
ning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before 
some other words; see 7'7f. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5,1 a.; 
B. 10], a preposition indieating close proximity, 
with various modifications corresponding to the various 
cases with which it is joined; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 
643sqq.; Matthiae $ 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Kühner 
§ 440; Krüger § 68, 34-36. It is joined 

I. with the GENrTIVE; and as in Grk. prose writ. 
always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a 
thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or 
from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or 
store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von . . . her, von neben; French 
de chez; [Eng. from beside, from]; Sept. for 1255, T», 
ὈΧΝῸ (1 S. xvii. 30); cf. W. 364 (342) sq. a. prop- 
erly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence, 
after verbs of coming, departing, setting out, 


Tapa 


ete. (cf. French venir, partir de chez quelqu’un) : Mk. xiv. 
43; Lk. viii. 49 [here Lehm. ἀπό] ; Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 27; 
xvii. 8; [παρ᾽ ἧς ἐκβεβλήκει ἑπτὰ δαιμόνια, Mk. xvi. 9 L Tr 
txt. WH]; εἶναι παρὰ θεοῦ, of Christ, to be sent from God, 
Jn. ix. 16, 33; to be sprung from God (by the nature of 
the Aóyos), vi. 46 ; vii. 29 (where for the sake of the con- 
text κἀκεῖνός pe ἀπέστειλεν [Tdf. ἀπέσταλκεν] is added) ; 
μονογενοῦς mapa πατρός SC. ὄντος, Jn. 1. 14; ἐστί τι παρά 
τινος, is given by one, Jn. xvii. 7 [ef. d. below]. b. 
joined to passive verbs, παρά makes one the author, the 
giver, etc. [W. 365 (343); B. $134, 1]; so after ἀπο- 
στέλλεσθαι, Jn. i. 6 (the expression originates in the 
fact that one who is sent is conceived of as having been 
at the time with the sender, so that he could be selected 
or commissioned from among a number and then sent 
off) ; γίνεσθαι, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 11 (παρὰ κυρίου, 
from the Lord, by divine agency or by the power at 
God's command) ; akin to which is οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ 
ToU θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα, Lk. i.37 L mrg. T Tr WH [see d8vva- 
τέω, b.]: λαλεῖσθαι, Lk. i. 45 (not ὑπό, because God had 
not spoken in person, but by an angel); κατηγορεῖσθαι, 
Acts xxii. 30 Rec. (not ὑπό [yet so L T Tr WH] because 
Paul had not yet been formally accused by the Jews, but 
the tribune inferred from the tumult that the Jews ac- 
cused him of some crime). c. after verbs of seek- 
ing, asking, taking, receiving, buying, [cf. W. 
310 (347) n.; B. $147,5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 
12]; as, αἰτῶ, αἰτοῦμαι, Mt. xx. 20 (where L Tr txt. WH 
txt. dm avrov) ; Jn.iv.9 ; Acts iii.2; ix. 2; Jas.i.5; 1Jn. 
v. 15 (where L T Tr WH ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ); ζητῶ, Mk. viii. 11; 

k. xi. 16; xii. 48; λαμβάνω, Mk. xii. 2; Jn. v. 34, 41, 
44; x.18; Actsii.33; 1.5; xvii.9; xx.24; xxvi. 10; 
Jas. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; 1 Jn.iii. 22 (L T Tr WH ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ); 
2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; παραλαμβάνω, Gal. i. 12; 1 Th. 
ii. 13; iv. 1; ἀπολαμβάνω, Lk. vi. 34 R GL Tr mre. ; 
κομίζομαι, Eph. vi. 8; γίνεταί μοί τι, Mt. xviii. 19; δέχο- 
pa, Acts xxii. 5; Phil. iv. 18; ἔχω, Actsix. 14; ὠνέομαι, 
Acts vii. 16; ἀγοράζομαι, Rev. iii. 18; also after ἄρτον 
φαγεῖν (sc. δοθέντα), 2 Th. iii. 8; εὑρεῖν ἔλεος, 2 Tim. i. 
18; ἔσται χάρις, 2 Jn. 8. after verbs of hearing, as- 
certaining, learning, making inquiry; as, ἀκούω 
τι, Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 45 sq.; vii. 51; viii. 26, 40; xv. 15; 
Acts x. 22; xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. i. 13; ii. 2; πυνθάνομαι, 
Mt.ii.4; Jn. iv. 52; ἀκριβῶ, Mt. ii. 16; ἐπιγινώσκω, Acts 
xxiv. 8; μανθάνω, 2 Tim. iii. 14. d. in phrases in 
which things are said εἶναι or ἐξέρχεσθαι from one: 
Lk.ii.1; vi. 19; Jn. xvii. 7 [see a. above]. 6. ὅ, 
7, τὸ παρά τινος [see ὁ, II. 8; cf. B. $125, 9; W. $18, 
3]; a. absol.: of παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, those of one’s family, 
i. e. his kinsmen, relations, Mk. iii. 21 (Sus. 33; one’s de- 
scendants [yet here Vulg. qui cum eo erant], 1 Mace. xiii. 
52; [Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 5]); cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 
101; [Field, Otium Norv. parsiii.adloc.]; τὰ παρά twos, 
what one has beside him, and so at his service, i. e. one's 
means, resources, Mk. v. 26; τὰ παρά τινων, sc. ὄντα, i. e. 
δοθέντα, Lk. x. 7; Phil. iv. 18; [cf. W. 366 (343); Joseph. 
antt. 8, 6,6; b. j. 2, 8,4; etc.]. B. where it refers 
to a preceding noun : ἡ ἐξουσία ἡ παρά Twos, sc. received, 


ATT 





Tapa 


Acts xxvi. 12 [R G]; ἐπικουρίας τῆς παρὰ (1, T. Tr WH 
ἀπὸ) τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xxvi. 22 (ἡ παρά τινος εὔνοια, Xen. 
mem. 2, 2, 12); ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, of which I am the 
author, Ro. xi. 27 [ef. W. 193 (182)]. 

IL with the Darrve, παρά indicates that something is 
or is done either in the immediate vicinity of some one, 
or (metaph.) in his mind, near by, beside, in the power of, 
in the presence of, with, Sept. for Sys (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 1; 
Prov. viii. 30), T3 (Gen. xliv. 16 sq. ; Num. xxxi. 49), 
Y y3 (see b. below) ; cf. W. $48, d. p. 394 sq. (369) ; [ B. 
339 (291 sq.)]. a. near, by: εἱστήκεισαν παρὰ τῷ 
σταυρῷ, Jn. xix. 25 (this is the only pass. in the N. T. 
where παρά is joined with a dat. of the thing, in all 
others with a dat. of the person). aftera verb of mo- 
tion, to indicate the rest which follows the motion [cf. B. 
339 (292)], ἔστησεν αὐτὸ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Lk. ix. 47. b. 
with, i. e. in one's house; in one’s town; in one's society: 
ξενίζεσθαι [q. v.], Acts x. 6; xxi. 16; μένειν, of guests 
or lodgers, Jn. i. 39 (40); iv. 40; xiv. 17, 25; Acts ix. 
43; xviii.3,20 [R G]; xxi. 7sq.; ἐπιμένειν, Acts xxviii. 
14 LT Tr WH; καταλύειν, Lk. xix. 7 (Dem. de corona 
§ 82 [cf. B. 339 (292)]); ἀριστᾶν, Lk. xi. 37; ἀπολείπειν 
τι, 2 Tim. iv. 13; παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, dwelling with God, Jn. 
viii. 38; i.q.in heaven, Jn. xvii. 5: μισθὸν ἔχειν, to have 
a reward laid up with God in heaven, Mt. vi. 1; εὑρεῖν 
χάριν (there where God is, i. e. God's favor [cf. W. 365 
(343)]), Lk.i. 30; a pers.isalso said to have χάρις παρά 
one with whom he is acceptable, Lk. ii. 52; τοῦτο χάρις 
παρὰ θεῷ, this is acceptable with God, pleasing to him, 
1 Pet. ii. 20 (for *y y3, Ex. xxxiii. 12,16; Num. xi. 15); 
παρὰ θεῷ, in fellowship with God (of those who have 
embraced the Christian religion and turned to God from 
whom they had before been estranged), 1 Co. vii. 24; 
mapa κυρίῳ (in heaven). before the Lord as judge, 2 Pet. 
ii. 11 [G Lom. and Tr WH br. the phrase]; παρ᾽ ὑμῖν, 
in your city, in your church, Col.iv. 16; w. a dat. plur. 
i. q. among, Mt. xxii. 25; xxviii. 15; Rev. ii. 13; παρ᾽ 
ἑαυτῷ, at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2. c. map’ (L Tr WH 
txt. ἐν) ἑαυτῷ, with one’s self i. e. in one’s own mind, δια- 
λογίζεσθαι, Mt. xxi. 25. d. a thing is said to be or 
not to be παρά τινι, with one, a. which belongs to his 
nature and character, or is in accordance with his prac- 
tice or the reverse; as, μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ θεῷ ; Ro. ix. 14; 
add, Ro. ii. 11; 2'Co.i.17; Eph. vi. 9; Jas. i. 17. p. 
which is or is not within one's power: Mt. xix. 26; Mk. 
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27, cf. i. 37 RG L txt. 6. παρά τινι, 
with one i. 6. in his judgment, he being judge, (so in Hat. 
and the Attic writ.; cf. Passow s. v. II. 2, vol. ii. p. 667; 
[L. and S. s. v. B. II. 3]) : παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, Ro. ii. 13; 1 Co. 
nr 19; Gal in. 11; 2 ΤΣ. δ; 9085... δὲ. 1 Pet: 314 42 
Pet. iii. 8 [z. κυρίῳ]; φρόνιμον εἶναι παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, [ A. V. in 
one’s own conceit}, Ro. xi. 25 (where Trtxt. WH txt. ἐν); 
xii. 16. 

III. with an Accusative; Sept. for by, m oy, 
^3y3 (Josh. vii. 7; xxii. 7); cf. W. $49 g. p. 403 (377) 
sq. ; [B. 339 (292)]; 1. prop. of place, at, by, near, 
by the side of, beside, along; so with verbs of motion: 
περιπατεῖν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν (Plat. Gorg. p. 511 e.), Mt. 


παρά 


iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 [here L T Tr WH παράγω]; πίπτειν, 
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4; Lk. viii. 5, 41; xvii.16; Acts v. 
10 (where L T Tr WH πρός); σπαρῆναι, Mt. xiii. 19; 
ῥίπτειν, Mt. xv. 30; τιθέναι, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf. 
πρός]; V. 25 ἀποτιθέναι, Acts vii. 58; ἔρχεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, 
Mt. xv. 29; Mk. ii. 13 [here Tdf. eis] ; Acts xvi. 13; οἱ 
παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, sc. πεσόντες, Mk. iv. 15, cf. 4; Lk. viii. 12, 
οἵ. δ. with verbs of rest: καθῆσθαι, Mt. xiii. 1; xx. 30; 
Lk. viii. 35 ; with εἶναι, Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. with verbs 
denoting the business in which one is engaged, as παιδεύ- 
ew in pass., Acts xxii. 3 [so G L T Tr WH punctuate]; 
διδάσκειν, Mk. iv. 1. without a verb, in specifications of 
place, Acts x. 32; Heb. xi. 12. 2. beside, beyond, 
i. e. metaph. a. i.q. contrary to: παρὰ τὴν διδαχήν, Ro. 
xvi. 17 ; παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, lit. beyond hope, i.e where the laws 
and course of nature left no room for hope, hence i. q. 
without [A. V. against] hope, Ro. iv. 18 (in prof. auth., 
of things which happen against hope, beyond one's ex- 
pectation, ef. Passow s. v. III. 3, vol. ii. p. 669^; Dion. 
Hal. antt. 6, 25); παρὰ τὸν νόμον, contrary to the law, 
Acts xviii. 13 (παρὰ robs νόμους, opp. to κατὰ τοὺς νόμους, 
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 18) ; zap' 6, contrary to that which, i. e. 
at variance with that which, Gal. i. 8sq.; παρὰ φύσιν͵ 
Ro. i. 26; xi. 24, (Thuc. 6, 17; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 d.) ; 
after ἄλλος, other than, different from, 1 Co. iii. 11 (see 
exx. fr. prof. auth. in Passow s. v. IIT. 3 fin. vol. ii. p. 
670*); παρὰ τὸν κτίσαντα, omitting or passing by. the 
Creator, Ro. i. 25, where others explain it before (above) 
the Creator, rather than the Creator, agreeably indeed to 
the use of the prep. in Grk. writ. (cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii. 
p. 28 [ef. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, $165 8.; L. and S. 
s. v. C. I. 5 d.]), but not to the thought of the passage. 
except, save, i. q. if you subtract from a given sum, less: 
τεσσαράκοντα παρὰ μίαν, one (stripe) excepted, 2 Co. xi. 
24 (τεσσαράκοντα ἐτῶν παρὰ τριάκοντα ἡμέρας, Joseph. 
antt. 4,8, 1; παρὰ πέντε ναῦς, five ships being deducted, 
Thue. 8, 29; [παρ᾽ ὀλίγας ψήφους, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 37, 
3]; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258; [W. 
u. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond : 
παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, Heb. xi. 11; παρ᾽ ὃ δεῖ (Plut. mor. 
p. 83 f. [de profect. in virt. $ 13]), Ro. xii. 3; i. q. more 
than: ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ πάντας, Lk. xiii. 2; ἔχρισέ σε ἔλαιον 
παρὰ τοὺς per. more copiously than [A. V. above] thy 
fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; ὑψοῦν τινα παρά 
twa, Sir. xv. 5); κρίνειν ἡμέραν παρ᾽ ἡμέραν, to prefer one 
day to another (see κρίνω, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is 
joined to comparatives: πλέον παρά τ. Lk. iii. 13; δια- 
φορώτερον παρ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὄνομα, Heb.i.4; add, iii. 3; ix. 23; 
xi. 4; xii. 24; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in W. $35, 2 b. [and 
as above]. ἐλαττοῦν τινα παρά r., to make one inferior 
to another, Heb. ii. 7, 9. 3. on account of (cf. Lat. 
propter i. q. ob): παρὰ rovro, for this reason, therefore, 
1 Co. xii. 15 sq.; cf. W. $49 g. c. 

IV. In CowrosrrION παρά denotes 1. situation 
or motion either from the side of, or to the side of ; near, 
beside, by, to: παραθαλάσσιος, παράλιος, παροικέω, παρακο- 
λουθέω, παραλαμβάνω, παραλέγομαι, παραπλέω, mapayo; 
of what is done secretly or by stealth, as παρεισέρχομαι, 


478 


παράβασις 


παρεισάγω, παρεισδύω ; cf. [the several words and] Fritz- 
sche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 346. by the side of i. e. 
ready, present, at hand, (παρά tux): πάρειμι, παρουσία, 
παρέχω, etc. 2. violation, neglect, aberration, [ef. 
our beyond or aside i.q. amiss]: mapaBaiva, παραβάτης, 
παρανομέω, παρακούω, παρίημι, πάρεσις, παραλογίζομαι, 
παράδοξος, παραφρονία, etc. 3. like the Germ. an 
(in anreizen, antreiben, etc.): παραζηλόω, παραπικραίνω, 
παροξύνω, παροργίζω. [Cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 650 sq.] 

Tapa-Ba(vo ; 2 aor. παρέβην ; prop. to go by the side of 
(in Hom. twice παρβεβαώς of one who stands by anoth- 
er's side in a war-chariot, Il. 11, 522; 13, 708 [but here 
of men on foot ]) ; (o go past or to pass over without touch- 
ing a thing; trop. to overstep, neglect, violate, transgress, 
w. an acc. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes- 
chyl. down [ef. παρά, IV. 1 and 27}: τὴν παράδοσιν, Mt. 
xv. 25 τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ θεοῦ, ibid. 3; ὁ παραβαίνων, he that 
transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to 
the true doctrine, opp. to μένειν ev τῇ διδαχῇ; 2 Jn. 9 R G- 
[where L T Tr WH ὁ προάγων (q. v.) ] (so of rapaBatvov- 
τες, transgressors of the law, Sir. xl. 14 [ef. Joseph. c. 
Ap. 2, 18, 2; 29,4; 80,17); (τὴν διαθήκην, Josh. vii. 11, 
15; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often; τὸ ῥῆμα κυρίου, Num. xiv. 
41; 1 S. xv. 24, ete.; ras συνθήκας, Polyb. 7,5, 1; Joseph. 
antt. 4, 6,5; Ael. v. h. 10, 2; besides, παραβ. δίκην, τὸν 
νόμον, τοὺς ὅρκους, πίστιν, etc., in Grk. writ.). in imita- 
tion of the Hebr. 739 foll. by 15, we find zapaf. ἔκ τινος 
and ἀπό twos, so to go past as to turn aside from, i. e. to 
depart, leave, be turned from: ἐκ τῆς ὁδοῦ, Ex. xxxii. 8; 
Deut. ix. 12; ἀπὸ τῶν ἐντολῶν, Deut. xvii. 20; ἀπὸ τῶν 
λόγων, Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once so in the N. T. : 
ἐκ (LT Tr WH ἀπὸ) τῆς ἀποστολῆς, of one who abandons 
his trust, [R. V. fell away], Acts i. 25. (In the Sept. 
also for *2y, VDT to break, rbi to deviate, turn aside.) 
[SvN.: παραβαίνειν to overstep, παραπορεύεσθαι (o proceed 
by the side of, παρέρχεσθαι to go past.]* 

παρα-βάλλω: 2 aor. mapéBaXov ; 1. to throw be- 
fore, cast to, [cf. παρά, IV. 1], (Hom., Plat., Polyb., Dio 
Cass., al. ; as fodder to horses, Hom. Il. 8, 504). σι 
to put one thing by the side of another for the sake of 
comparison, to compare, liken, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Polyb., 
Joseph., Hdian.): τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν παραβολῇ, 
to portray the kingdom of God (in), by the use of, a 
similitude, Mk. iv. 30 R G L mrg. Tr mrg. [cf. B. $133, 
22]. 3. reflexively, to put one’s self, betake one's 
self, into a place or to a person (Plat., Polyb., Plut., 
Diog. Laért.); of seamen (Hat. 7,179; Dem. p. 163, 4; 
εἰς ΠΠοτιόλους, Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 4), εἰς Σάμον, Acts xx. 
15 [ put in at (R. V. touched at)]. For another use of 
this verb in Grk. writ. see παραβολεύομαι." 

παράβασις, -ews, 7, (παραβαίνω, q. v.), prop. @ going 
over; metaph. a disregarding, violating ; Vulg. praevarica- ἡ 
tio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) transgressio ; [A. V. transgres- 
sion]: w. a gen. of the object, τῶν ὅρκων, 2 Macc. xv. 10; 
τῶν δικαίων, Plut. compar. Ages. and Pomp. 1; τοῦ νόμου, 
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph. antt. 18, 8,2); ab- 
solutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified 
law: Ro. v. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but dpapría is wrong-do- 


παραβάτης 


ing which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty 
of [ef. Trench, N. T. Syn. $1xvi.]) ; τῶν παραβ. χάριν. to 
create transgressions, i.e. that sins might take on the 
character of transgressions, and thereby the conscious- 
ness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption 
be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the 
Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15; Heb. ii. 2; ix. 15; Ps. c. (ci.) 
3; w. a gen. of the subj., τῶν ἀδίκων, Sap. xiv. 31.* 
παρα-βάτης, -ov, 6, (zapaBatvo [cf. W. 26]), a trans- 
gressor (Vulg. praevaricator, transgressor) : νόμου; a law- 
breaker (Plaut. legirupa), Ro. ii. 25, 27; Jas. ii. 11; 
absol, Gal. ii. 18; Jas. ii. 9. [Aeschyl. (παρβάτης) ; 
Graec. Ven. Deut. xxi. 18, 20.]* 
παρα-βιάζομαι: 1 aor. παρεβιασάμην; depon. verb, to 
employ force contrary to nature and right [cf. παρά, IV. 2], 
to compel by employing force (Polyb. 26, 1, 3) : τινά, to 
constrain one by entreaties, Lk. xxiv. 29; Acts xvi. 15; 
so Sept. in Gen. xix. 9; 1 S. xxviii. 23, etc.* 
παραβολεύομαι: 1 aor. mid. ptep. παραβολευσάμενος ; 
to be παράβολος i. e. one who rashly exposes himself to dan- 
gers, to be venturesome, reckless, (cf. W. 93 (88); Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 67) ; recklessly to expose one's self to dan- 
ger: with a dat. of respect, τῇ Ψυχῇ, as respects life; 
hence, to expose one’s life boldly, jeopard life, hazard life, 
Phil. ii. 30 G L T Tr WH for the παραβουλευσάμ. of Rec.; 
on the difference between these readings cf. Gabler, 
Kleinere theol. Schriften, i. p. 176 sqq. This verb is 
not found in the Grk. writ., who say παραβάλλεσθαι, now 
absol. to expose one's self to danger (see Passow s.v. 
παραβάλλω, 2; L.and S. ib. I), now with an acc. of the 
thing [fo risk, stake], as ψυχήν, Hom. Il. 9, 322; σῶμα 
καὶ ψυχήν, 2 Mace. xiv. 38 (see other exx. in Passow 
[and L. and S.] l. 6.) ; now w. a dat. of reference, rais 
ψυχαῖς, Diod. 3, 35; τῇ ἐμαυτοῦ κεφαλῇ, ἀργυρίῳ, Phryn. 
ed. Lob. p. 238; [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. 1. c.].* 
παραβολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (παραβάλλω, q. v.), Sept. for Sw; 
1. a placing of one thing by the side of another, juzta- 
position, as of ships in battle, Polyb. 15, 2, 13; Diod. 14, 
60. 2. metaph. a comparing, comparison of one 
thing with another, likeness, similitude, (Plat., Isocr., 
Polyb. Plut.): univ. Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; an 
example by which a doctrine or precept is illustrated, 
Mk. iii. 23; Lk. xiv. 7; a thing serving as a figure of 
something else, Heb. ix. 9; this meaning also very many 


interpreters give the word in Heb. xi. 19, but see 5 be-. 


low; spec. a narrative, fictitious but agreeable to the 
laws and usages of human life, by which either the duties 
of men or the things of God, particularly the nature and 
history of God's kingdom, are figuratively portrayed [ct. 
B. D. s. vv. Fable, Parable, (and reff. there; add Aristot. 
rhet. 2, 20, 2 sqq. and Cope's notes)]: Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 
24, 31, 33-35, 53 ; xxi. 33, 45; [xxii. 1]; Mk. iv. 2, 10, 
[11], 13, 30, 33 sq. ; [vii. 17]; xii. 1, [12]; Lk. viii. 4, 
9-11; xii. 16,41; xiii 6; xiv. 7; xv.3; xviii. 1, 9; xix. 
11; xx.9,19; xxi.29; witha gen. of the pers. or thing 
to which the contents of the parable refer ( W. $ 30, 
1.8.7: τοῦ σπείροντος, Mt. xiii. 18; τῶν ζιζανίων, ib. 36; 
τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν παραβολῇ τιθέναι (lit. to set forth 


419 


παραγίνομαε 


the kingdom of God in a parable), to illustrate (the na- 
ture and history of) the kingdom of God by the use of a . 
parable, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Trtxt. WH. 3. a pithy 
and instructive saying, involving some likeness or compar- 
ison and having preceptive or admonitory force; an 
aphorism, a mazim: Lk. v.36; vi. 39; Mt. xv. 15, (Prov. 
1.6; Eccl. i. 17; Sir. iii. 29 (27) ; xiii. 26 (25), etc.). 
Since sayings of this kind often pass into proverbs, 
παραβολή is 4. a proverb: Lk. iv. 23 (1 S. x. 12; 
Ezek. xii. 22 sq.; xviii. 2 sq.). 5. an act by which 
one exposes himself or his possessions to danger, a ven- 
ture, risk, (in which sense the plur. seems to be used by 
Plut. Arat. 22: διὰ πολλῶν ἑλιγμῶν kal παραβολῶν srepat- 
vovres πρὸς τὸ τεῖχος [cf. Diod. Sic. frag. lib. xxx. 9, 2; 
also var. in Thuc. 1, 131, 2 (and Poppo ad loc.)]) ; & 
παραβολῇ. in risking him, i.e. at the very moment when 
he exposed his son to mortal peril (see παραβολεύομαι), 
Heb. xi. 19 (Hesych. ἐκ παραβολῆς - ἐκ παρακινδυνεύμα- 
ros); others with less probability explain it, in a figure, 
i.e.as a figure, either of the future general resurrection 
of all men, or of Christ offered up to God and raised 
acain from the dead; others otherwise.* 
παρα-βουλεύομαι: 1 aor. ptep. zapafovAevaauevos; to 
consult amiss [see παρά, IV. 2]: w. a dat. of the thing, 
Phil. ii. 30 Ree. Not found in prof. auth. See zapa- 
βολεύομαι." 
παρ-αγγελία, -as, 7, (παραγγέλλω), prop. announcement, 
a proclaiming or giving a message to; hence a charge, 
command: Acts xvi. 24; a prohibition, Acts v. 28; used 
of the Christian doctrine relative to right living, 1 Tim. 
i. 5; of particular directions relative to the same, 18; 
plur.in 1 Th.iv.2. (Ofamilitary orderin Xen., Polyb.; 
of instruction, Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 2 p. 1104s, 7; Diod. 
exc. p. 512, 19 [i. e. frag. lib. xxvi. 1, 1]-)* 
παρ-αγγέλλω ; impf. παρήγγελλον ; 1 aor. παρήγγειλα; 
(παρά and ἀγγέλλω) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down ; ἘΞ 
prop. to transmit a message along from one to another 
[(cf. παρά, IV. 1) ], to declare, announce. 2. to com- 
mand, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [ef. 
Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion ']; foll. by 
λέγων and direct disc. Mt. x. 5; foll. by an inf. aor., 
Mt. xv.35 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii. 6; Lk. viii. 29; Acts 
x. 42; xvi. 18; with μή inserted, Lk. v. 14; viii. 56; Acts. 
xxiii. 22; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lchm. inf. pres.] ; foll. by an 
inf. pres., Acts xvi. 23; xvii. 30 [here T Trmrg. WH have- 
dzayy.]; 2 Th. iii. 6; with μή inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [GL 
T Tr WH]; Acts i. 4; iv. 18; v. 28 (παραγγελίᾳ παραγ- 
γέλλειν, to charge strictly, W. 8.54, 3; B. 184 (159 sq.)), 
40; 1 Tim. i. 3; vi. 17; τινί τι, 2 Th. iii. 4 [but T Tr WH 
om. L br. the dat.]; τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, 2 Th. iii. 10; τινί 
foll by aec. and inf, [Acts xxiii. 30 L T Tr mrg.]; 2 
Th. iii. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [here Tdf. om. dat.]; foll. by an 
inf. alone, Acts xv. 5; by tva (see tva, II. 2 b.), ME. vi. 
8; 2 Th.iii. 12; with an acc. of the thing alone, 1 Co. xi.. 
17; 1 Tim. iv. 11; v. 7. [SxN.see κελεύω, fin.]* 
mapa-yivopat; impf. 3 pers. plur. παρεγίνοντο (Jn. iii. 
23); 2 aor. παρεγενόμην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for i3; 
(prop. to become near, to place one's self by the side of, 


παράγω 


hence) to be present, to come near, approach : absol., Mt. 
iii. 1 [but in ed. 1 Prof. Grimm (more appropriately) asso- 
ciates this with Heb. ix. 11; Lk. xii. 51 below]: Lk. [xiv. 
21]; xix.16; Jn. 111. 23; Acts v. 21 sq. 25; ix. 89; x. 32 
[R G Tr mrg. br.], 33; xi. 23; xiv. 27 ; xvii. 10; xviii. 27; 
xxi. 18; xxiii. 16, 35; xxiv. 17, 24; xxv. 7 ; xxviii. 21; 1 
Co.xvi.3; foll by ἀπό w. gen. of place and εἰς w. acc. of 
place, Mt. ii. 1; Acts xiii. 14; by ἀπό with gen. of place 
and ἐπί w. ace. of place and πρός w. acc. of pers. Mt. iii. 
13; by παρά w. gen. of pers. (i. e. sent by one[ef. W. 365 
(342) , Mk. xiv. 43 ; by πρός τινα, Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; 
Acts xx. 18; πρός twa ἐκ w. gen. of place, Lk. xi. 6; by 
. eis w. acc. of place, Jn. viii. 2; Acts ix. 26 (here Lchm. 
ἐν); xv.4; by ἐπί τινα (against, see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. y. BB.), 
Lk. xxii. 52 [ Tdf. πρός]. i.q. to come forth, make one's 
public appearance, of teachers: of the Messiah, absol. 
Heb. ix. 11; foll. by an inf. denoting the purpose, Lk. xii. 
51; [of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 1 (see above)]. i.q. 
to be present with help [R. V. to take one’s part], w. a 
dat. of the pers. 2 Tim. iv. 16 LTTrWH. [Comp.: 
συμ-παραγίνομαι. * 
Tap-áyo ; impf. παρῆγον (Jn. viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass. 
3 pers. sing. wapayerat; fr. [ Archil., Theogn.], Pind. and 
Hdt. down; Sept. several times for *3y in Kal and 
Hiphil ; 1. trans. [(cf. mapa, IV.)]; a. to lead 
past, lead by. b. to lead aside, mislead; to lead 
away. c. to lead to; to lead forth, bring forward. 
2. intrans. (see ἄγω, 4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt. 
xx. 30; Mk. ii. 14; xv. 21; [Lk. xviii. 39 L mrg.]; foll. 
by zapá w. an acc. of place, Mk. i. 16 L T Tr WH (by 
κατά w. acc. of place, 3 Mace. vi. 16; θεωροῦντες παρά- 
γουσαν τὴν δύναμιν, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. to depart, 
go away: Jn. viii. 59 Rec. ; ix. 15 ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. ix. 9, 27. 
ΓΑΙ. adhere to the meaning pass hy in all these pass.] 
Metaph. to pass away, disappear: 1 Co. vii. 31 (Ps. exliii. 
(exliv.) 5); in the passive in the same sense, 1 Jn. ii. 
8, 17.* 
παρα-δειγματίζω ; 1 aor. inf. παραδειγματίσαι ; (mapa- 
δειγμα [(fr. δείκνυμι) ] an example; also an example in 
the sense of a warning [cf. Schmidt ch. 128]); to set 
forth as an example, make an example of; in a bad sense, 
to hold up to infamy; to expose to public disgrace: τινά, 
Mt.i.19 RG; Heb. vi. 6[A. V. put to open shame]. 
(Num. xxv. 4 ; Jer. xiii. 22; Ezek. xxviii. 17; [Dan. ii. 5 
Sept.]; Add. to Esth. iv. 8 [36]; Evang. Jac. c. 20; often 
in Polyb.; Plut. de curios. 10; Euseb. quaest. ad Steph. 
1, 3 (iv. 884 d. ed. Migne).) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 128.] * 
παράδεισος, -ov, 6, (thought by most to be of Persian 
origin, by others of Armenian, cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. 
p. 1124; [B. D. s. v. ; esp. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag das 
Paradies? Leipzig 1881, pp. 95-97; cf. Maz Müller, 
Selected Essays, i. 129 sq.]), 1. among the Persians 
a grand enclosure or preserve, hunting-ground, park, 
shady and well-watered, in which wild animals were 
kept for the hunt; it was enclosed by walls and furnished 
with towers for the hunters: Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14; [1, 4, 
5];°8, 1, 38; oec. 4, 13 and 14; anab. 1, 2, 7. 9; Theo- 
phr. h. pl. 5, 8, 1; Diod. 16, 41; 14, 80; Plut. Artax. 


480 








παραδίδωμι 


25, cf. Curt. 8, 1, 11. 2. univ. a garden, pleasure- 
ground; grove, park: Leian. v. h. 2, 23; Ael. v.h. 1, 33; 
Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 4; 8, 7,3; 9,10, 4; 10, 3, 2 and 11, 
1; b. j. 6, 1, 1; [c. Apion. 1, 19, 9 (where ef. Miiller)]; 
Sus. 4, 7, 15, etc. ; Sir. xxiv. 30; and so it passed into 
the Hebr. language, 0375, Neh. ii. 8; Eccl.ii. 5; Cant. 
iv. 13; besides in Sept. mostly for ji; thus for that de- 
lightful region, ‘the garden of Eden,’ in which our first 
parents dwelt before the fall: Gen. ii. 8 sqq.; iii. 1 
sqq. 3. that part of Hades which was thought by 
the later Jews to be the abode of the souls of the pious 
until the resurrection: Lk. xxiii. 43, ef. xvi. 23 sqq. But 
some [e. v. Dillmann (as below p. 379)] understand that 
passage of the heavenly paradise. 4. an upper 
region in the heavens: 2 Co. xii. 4 (where some maintain, 
others deny, that the term is equiv. to ὁ τρίτος οὐρανός 
in vs. 2); with the addition of τοῦ θεοῦ, gen. of possessor, 
the abode of God and heavenly beings, to which true 
Christians will be taken after death, Rev. ii. 7 (cf. Gen. 
xiii. 10; Ezek. xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8). According to the 
opinion of many of the church Fathers, the paradise in 
which our first parents dwelt before the fall still exists, 
neither on earth nor in the heavens, but above and be- 
yond the world; cf. Thilo, Cod. apoer. Nov. Test., on 
Evang. Nicod. c. xxv. p. 748 sqq.; and Bleek thinks that 
the word ought to be taken in this sense in Rev. ii. 7. 
Cf. Dillmann s. v. Paradies in Schenkel iv. 377 sqq.; 
also Hilgenfeld, Die Clement. Recogn. und Hom. p. 87 
sq.; Klüpper on 2 Co. xii. 2-4, p. 507 sqq. [(Gottingen, 
1869). Seealso B. D.s. v.; McC. and S. s. v.; Hamburg- 
er, Real-Encyclopidie, Abtheil. ii. s. v.]* 

παρα-δέχομαι; fut. 3 pers. plur. παραδέξονται ; depon. 
mid., but in bibl. and eccles. Grk. w. 1 aor. pass. zape- 
δέχθην (Acts xv. 4 LT Tr WH; 2 Macc. iv. 22; [cf. B. 
51 (44)]); 1. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, prop. 
to receive, take up, take upon one's self. Hence 2. 
to admit i. e. not to reject, to accept, receive: τὸν λόγον, 
Mk. iv. 20; ἔθη, Acts xvi. 21; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, Acts xxii. 
18; κατηγορίαν, 1 Tim. v. 19, (ras δοκίμους Ópáxpas, Epict. 
diss. 1, 7, 6) ; τινά, of a son, to acknowledge as one's own 
[ A. V. receiveth], Heb. xii. 6 (after Prov. iii. 12, where 
for 17); of a delegate or messenger, to give due re- 
ception to, Acts xv.4 L T Tr WH. (Ct. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

παρα-δια-τριβή, -75, ἡ, useless occupation, empty business, 


_misemployment (see παρά, IV. 2): 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec. [cf. 


W. 102 (96)], see διαπαρατριβή. Not found elsewhere; 
[cf. παραδιατυπόω in Justinian (in Koumanoudes, Λέξεις 
ἀθησαύρ. s. v.) ]-* 

παρα-δίδωμι, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. παραδιδῷ (1 Co. xv. 
24 [L mrg. Tr mrg. WH, cod. Sin., etc.]) and παραδιδοῖ 
(ibid. L txt. T Trtxt. ; cf. B. 46 (40) [and δίδωμι, init.]) ; 
impf. 3 pers. sing. παρεδίδου (Acts viii. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 23), 
plur. παρεδίδουν (Acts xvi. 4 RG; xxvii. 1) and zape- 
δίδοσαν (Acts xvi. 4 L T Tr WH; cf. W. $14, 1c.; B. 45 
(39)); fut. παραδώσω ; 1 aor. παρέδωκα ; 2 aor. παρέδων, 
subjune. 3 pers. sing. παραδῷ and several times παραδοῖ 
(so LT Tr WH in Mk. iv. 29; xiv. 10, 11; Jn. xiii.2; 
see δίδωμι, init.); pf. ptep. παραδεδωκώς (Acts xv. 26); 


παραδίδωμι 


plupf. 3 pers. plur. without augm. παραδεδώκεισαν (Mk. | 
xv. 10; W. $12, 9; [B. 33 (29); Tdf. Proleg. p. 120 | 
sq.]); Pass., pres. παραδίδομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. zape- 
δίδετο (1 Co. xi. 22 L T Tr WH for R ἃ παρεδίδοτο, see 
ἀποδίδωμι); pf. 3 pers. sing. παραδέδοται (Lk. iv. 6), 
ptep. παραδεδομένος, Acts xiv. 26; 1 aor. παρεδόθην; 
1 fut. παραδοθήσομαι; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept. 
mostly for jj; to give over; 1. prop. to give 
into the hands (of another). 2. to give over into 
(one's) power or use: τινί τι, to deliver to one something 
to keep, use, take care of, manage, Mt. xi. 27; Lk. iv. 6 
[cf. W. 271 (254)]; x. 22; rà ὑπάρχοντα, τάλαντα, Mt. 
xxv. 14, 20, 22; τὴν βασιλείαν, 1 Co. xv. 24; τὸ πνεῦμα 
sc. τῷ θεῷ, Jn. xix. 30; τὸ σῶμα, tva ete., to be burned, 
1 Co. xiii. 3; τινά, to deliver one upto custody, to be judged, 
condemned, punished, scourged, tormented, put to death, 
(often thus in prof. auth.): τινά, absol., so that to be put 
in prison must be supplied, Mt.iv.12; Mk. i. 14; τηρου- 
μένους, who are kept, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [G T Tr WH; but R 
τετηρημένους, lL κολαζομένους τηρεῖν]; to be put to death 
(cf. Germ. dahingeben), Ro. iv. 25; with the addition of 
ὑπέρ rivos, for one's salvation, Ro. viii. 32; τινά τινι, Mt. 
Vv. 25; xviii. 94: xx. 18; xxvii. 2; Mk. xv. 1; Lk. xii. 58; 
xx. 20; Jn. xviii. 30, 35 sq. ; xix. 11 ete.; Acts xxvii. 1; 
xxviii. 16 Rec.; τῷ θελήματι αὐτῶν, to do their pleasure 
with, Lk. xxiii. 25; τινά τινι, foll by ἵνα, Jn. xix. 16; 
with an inf. of purpose, φυλάσσειν αὐτόν, to guard him, 
Acts xii. 4 ; without the dat., Mt. x. 19; xxiv. 10; xxvii. 
18; Mk. xiii. 11; xv. 10; Acts iii. 13; foll. by tva, Mt. 
xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15; τινὰ εἰς τὸ σταυρωθῆναι, Mt. xxvi. 2 


(σταυροῦ θανάτῳ, Ev. Nicod. c. 26) ; eis χεῖράς τινος, i. e. 
into one's power, Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi. 45; Mk. ix. 31; 
xiv. 41; Lk. ix. 44; xxiv. 7; Acts xxi. 11; xxviii. 17, 
(Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 24 ; xxxix. (xxxii) 4); eis συνέδρια, 
to councils [see συνέδριον, 2 b.] (παραδιδόναι involving 
also the idea of eonducting), Mt. x. 17; Mk. xiii. 9; eis 
cvvayoyyás, Lk. xxi. 12; εἰς θλίψιν, Mt. xxiv. 9; eis φυλα- 
κήν, Acts vill. 3; εἰς φυλακάς, Acts xxii. 4; εἰς θάνατον, 
Mt. x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; 2 Co. iv. 11; εἰς κρίμα θανάτου, 
Lk. xxiv. 20; τὴν σάρκα eis καταφθοράν, of Christ under- 
going death, Barn. ep. 5, 1 ; παραδιδόναι ἑαυτὸν ὑπέρ Twos, 
to give one's self up for, give one's self to death for, to 
undergo death for (the salvation of) one, Gal. ii. 20; 
Eph. v. 25; with the addition of τῷ θεῷ and a pred. ace., 
Eph. v. 2; τὴν ψυχὴν ἑαυτοῦ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος ᾿Ιησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ; to jeopard life to magnify and make known the 
name of Jesus Christ, Acts xv. 26. Metaph. expres- 
sions: τινὰ τῷ Σατανᾷ, to deliver one into the power of 
Satan to be harassed and tormented with evils, 1 Tim. 
i. 20; with the addition of εἰς ὄλεθρον σαρκός (see ὄλε- 
@pos), 1 Co. v. 5 (the phrase seems to have originated 
from the Jewish formulas of excommunication [yet see 
Meyer (ed. Heinrici) ad loc. (cf. B. D. s. vv. Hymenzus 
IL, Exeommunieation IL.)], because a person banished 
from the theocratie assembly was regarded as deprived 
of the protection of God and delivered up to the power 
of the devil). τινὰ eis ἀκαθαρσίαν, to cause one to be- 
come unclean, Ro. i. 24; ef. Fritzsche, Rückert, and 
31 











481 


, 
παράδοσις 


others ad loc. [in this ex. and several that follow A. V. 
renders to give up]; εἰς πάθη ἀτιμίας, to make one a slave 
of vile passions, ib. 26; eis ἀδόκιμον νοῦν, to cause one to 
follow his own corrupt mind, — foll. by an inf. of purpose 
[or epexegetie inf. (Meyer)], ib. 28; ἑαυτὸν τῇ ἀσελγείᾳ, 
to make one’s self the slave of lasciviousness, Eph. iv. 
19; τινὰ λατρεύειν, to cause one to worship, Acts vii. 42. 
to deliver up treacherously, i.e. by betrayal to cause 
one to be taken: τινά τινι, of Judas betraying Jesus, Mt. 
xxvi. 15; Mk. xiv. 10; Lk. xxii. 4, 6; without the dat., 
Mt. xxvi. 16, 21, 23, 25; Mk. xiv. 11, 18; Lk. xxii. 21, 
48; Jn. vi. 64, 71; xii. 4; in the pass., Mk. xiv. 21; Lk. 
xxii. 22; 1 Co. xi. 23; pres. ptep. 6 παραδιδοὺς αὐτόν, of 
him as plotting the betrayal (cf. B. § 144, 11, 3): Mt. 
xxvi. 25, 46, 48; Mk. xiv. 42, 44; Jn. xiii. 11; xviii. 2, 
5. to deliver one to be taught, moulded, ete.: ets τι, in 
pass., Ro. vi. 17 (to be resolved thus, ink. τῷ τύπῳ ete: 
εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε [W. ὃ 24, 2 b.]). 3. i.q. to com- 
mit, to commend : τινὰ τῇ χάριτι τ. θεοῦ, in pass., Acts xiv. 
26; xv. 40; παρεδίδου τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως, sc. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ, 
his cause (B. 145 (127) note? [ef. W. 590 (549)]), 1 Pet. 
ii. 23. 4. to deliver verbally: commands, rites, Mk. 
vii. 13; Acts vi. 14; 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 21 (here in 
pass.); πίστιν, the tenets [see πίστις, 1 c. B.], in pass., 
Jude 3; φυλάσσειν τὰ δόγματα, the decrees to keep, Acts 
xvi. 4; to deliver by narrating, to report, i. e. to perpetu- 
ate the knowledge of events by narrating them, Lk. i. 2; 
1 Co. xi. 23; xv. 3, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow 
[or L. and S.] s. v. 4). 5. to permit, allow : absol. 
ὅταν παραδῷ or παραδοῖ 6 καρπός, when the fruit will allow, 
i. 6. when its ripeness permits, Mk. iv. 29 (so τῆς ὥρας 
παραδιδούσης, Polyb. 22, 24, 9; for other exx. see Passow 
s. v. 3 [L. and S. s. v. IT. ; others take the word in Mk. 1. c. 
intransitively, in a quasi-reflexive sense, gives itself up, 
presents itself, cf. W. 251 (236); B. 145 (127)]). 
παράδοξος, -ov, (παρά contrary to [see παρά, IV. 2], and 
δόξα opinion; hence i.q. 6 mapa τὴν δόξαν àv), unex- 
pected, uncommon, incredible, wonderful : neut. plur. Lk. 
v. 26 [ A. V. strange things, cf. Trench ὃ xci. fin.]. (Ju- 
dith xiii. 13; Sap. v. 2, etc. ; Sir. xliii. 25; 2 Macc. ix. 24; 
4 Macc.ii.14; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Ael. v. h. 4, 25; Leian. 
dial. deor. 20, 7; 9, 2; Joseph.c. Ap. 1, 10, 2; Hdian. 1, 
1, 5 [(4 Bekk.) ].) * | 
παρά-δοσις, -eas, 7, (παραδίδωμι), α giving over, giving 
up; i. e. 1. the act of giving up, the surrender: of 
cities, Polyb. 9, 25, 5; Joseph. b. j. 1, 8, 6; χρημάτων, Ar- 
istot. pol. 5, 7, 11 p. 1309", 10. 2. a giving over 
which is done by word of mouth or in writing, i. e. tradi- 
tion by instruction, narrative, precept, ete. (see mapa- 
δίδωμι, 4); hence i. q. instruction, Epict. diss. 2, 23, 40; 
joined with διδασκαλία, Plat. lege. 7 p. 803 a. objec- 
tively, what is delivered, the substance of the teaching: so 
of Paul's teaching, 2 Th. iii. 6 ; in plur. of the particular 
injunctions of Paul's instruction, 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Th. ii. 
15. used in the sing. of a written narrative, Joseph. 
c. Ap. 1, 9, 2; 10, 2; again, of the body of precepts, esp. 
ritual, which in the opinion of the later Jews were orally 


! delivered by Moses and orally transmitted in unbroken 


παραζηλόω 


succession to subsequent generations, which precepts, 
both illustrating and expanding the written law, as they 
did, were to be obeyed with equal reverence (Joseph. 
antt. 13, 10, 6 distinguishes between τὰ ἐκ παραδόσεως 
τῶν πατέρων and rà γεγραμμένα, i. e. τὰ ἐν τοῖς Maticews 
νόμοις γεγραμμένα νόμιμα) : Mt. xv.2 sq. 6; Mk. vii. 3, 
5,9, 13; with τῶν ἀνθρώπων added, as opp. to the 
divine teachings, Mk. vii. 8; Col. ii. 8 [where see Bp. 
Lghtft.]; πατρικαὶ παραδόσεις, precepts received from 
the fathers, whether handed down in the O. T. books 
or orally, Gal. i. 14 [(al. restrict the word here to the 
extra-biblical traditions; cf. Meyer or Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc.). Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Tradition. ] * 

παρα-ζηλόω, -@; fut. παραζηλώσω ; 1 aor. παρεζήλωσα ; 
to provoke to ζῆλος [see mapa, IV. 3]; a. lo pro- 
voke to jealousy or rivalry: vwa, Ro. xi. 11, 14, (1 K. xiv. 
22; Sir. xxx. 3); ἐπί run (see ἐπί, B. 2 a. 6. fin.), Ro. x. 
19 (Deut. xxxii. 21). b. to provoke to anger: 1 Co. 
x. 22 [on this see Prof. Hort in WH. App. p. 167] (Ps. 
xxxvi. (xxxvil.) 1, 7 sq.).* 

παρα-θαλάσσιος, -a, -ov, (mapa and θάλασσα), beside 
the sea, by the sea: Mt.iv. 13. (Sept.; lIdt,, Xen., 
Thue., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 

παρα-θεωρέω, -@: impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. παρεθεω- 
poüvro; 1. (παρά i. q. by the side of [see παρά, IV. 
17) to examine things placed beside each other, to com- 
pare, (Xen., Plut., Leian.). 2. (rapá i. q. over, be- 
yond, [ Lat. praeter ; see παρά, IV. 2]) to overlook, neglect : 
Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22; Diod., Dion. Hal., al.).* 

παρα-θήκη, -ns, 7, (παρατίθημι, q. v.), a deposit, a trust 
or (hing consigned to one's faithful keeping, (Vulg. de- 
positum) : used of the correct knowledge and pure doc- 
trine of the gospel, to be held firmly and faithfully, and 
to be conscientiously delivered unto others: -2 Tim. i. 12 
(pov possess. gen. [ile trust committed unto me; Rec. 1088 
reads here παρακαταθήκη. q. v.]) ; 6 LP Tr WH in 1 Tim. 
vi. 20 and 2 "Tim. 1. 14, (Lev. vi. 2, 4; 2 Macc. iii. 10,15; 
Hdt. 9,45; [al.]). In the Grk. writ. παρακαταθήκη (q. v-) 
is more common; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312; W. 102 
(96).* 

παρ-αινέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mapyver; to exhort, 
admonish: with the addition of λέγων foll. by direct dis- 
course, Acts xxvii. 9; rwa (in class. Grk. more com- 
monly τινί [W. 223 (209) ; B. $133, 97). foll. by an inf. 
Acts xxvii. 22 [B. $$140, 1; 141,2]. (From Hdt. and 
Pind. down; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq. ; 3 Macc. v. 17.) * 

παρ-αιτέομαι, -οὔμαι, impy. pres. παραιτοῦ ; [impf. 3 
pers. plur. παρῃτοῦντο, Mk. xv. 6 T WH Tr mrg., where 
al. ὄνπερ ἠτοῦντο (q. v.)]; 1 aor. παρῃτησάμην : pf. pass. 
ptep. παρῃτημένος with a pass. signif.; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Pind. down; 1. prop.to ask alongside (mapa [IV.1]), 
beg to have near one; to obtain by entreatys to beg from, to 
ask for, supplicate : [Mk. xv. 6 (see above)]. 2. to 
avert (mapa aside [see mapa, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek 
to avert, to deprecate ; a. prop. foll. by μή and ace. 
w. inf. [to intreat that... not], Heb. xii. 19 (Thuc. 5, 
63) ; cf. W. 604 (561) ; [B. $148,13]. b. i.q. lo re- 
Suse, decline: τὸ ἀποθανεῖν, Acts xxv. 11 (θανεῖν οὐ παραι- 





482 








παρακαλέω. 


τοῦμαι, Joseph. de vita sua 29). c. i.q. to shun, 
avoid: τί, 1 Tim. iv. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 235 τινά, 1 Tim. v. 11; 
Tit. iii. 10; i.q. to refuse, reject, Heb. xii. 25. d. lo 
avert displeasure by entreaty, i. e. to beg pardon, crave in- 
dulgence, to excuse: ἔχε pe παρῃτημένον (see ἔχω, I. 1 f.), 
Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept- 
ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 2).* 

παρα-καθέζομαι : 10 sit down beside [mapa, IV. 1], seat 
one’s self, (Xen., Plat., al.); 1 aor. pass. ptep. mapaxade- 
σθείς (Joseph. antt. 6, 11, 9); πρός τι, Lk. x. 39 T Tr WH 
[ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 269].* 

παρα-καθίζω: 1 aor. ptep. fem. παρακαθίσασα, to make 
to sit down beside [(mapa, IV. 1)]; to set beside, place 
near ; intrans. to sit down beside: παρά τι, Lk. x. 39 RG 
L [but L mrg. πρός} (Sept. Job ii^ 13; Plut. Marius 17; 
Cleom. 37; in this sense the mid. is more com. in the 
Grk. writ.).* 

παρα-καλέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρεκάλει, 1 and 3 
pers. plur. παρεκάλουν ; 1 aor. mapexddeoa; Pass., pres. 
παρακαλοῦμαι ; γ)ἷ. παρακέκλημαι; 1 aor. παρεκλήθην ; 1 fut. 
παρακληθήσομαι; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; I. 
as in Grk. writ. to call to one's side, call for, summon: τινά, 
w. an inf. indieating the purpose, Acts xxviii. 20 [al. 
(less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the acc. the 
subj. of the inf. ]. II. to address, speak to, (call to, 
call on), which may be done in the way of exhortation, 
entreaty, comfort, instruction, ete. ; hence result a varie- 
ty of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2 
p.117 sqq.; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 32 sq. die 
as in Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort; absol., Lk. iii. 18; 
[Acts xx. 1 (RGom.)]; Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb. 
x. 25; 1 Pet. v. 12; foll. by direct disc. 2 Co. v. 20; foll. 
by Aéyov w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40; foll. by an inf. where 
in Lat. wt, 1 Tim. ii. 1; τινά, Acts xv. 32; xvi. 40; 2 Co. 
x- 1: 1 7}: τὲ 15 eub) estes uneven ele Danie si 
τινὰ λόγῳ πολλῷ, Acts xx. 2; τινά foll. by direct dise., 1 
Co. iv. 16; 1 Th.v. 14; Heb. xiii. 22 [here L WII mre. 
inf.]; 1 Pet. v. 1sq.; twa foll. by an inf. where in Lat. 
ut [ef. B. $8140, 1; 141,2; W. 332 (311) ; 335 (315) n.]: 
inf. pres., Acts xi. 23; xiv. 22; Phil iv. 2; 1 Th. iv. 
10; Tit. ii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 11 (here Lchm. adds ὑμᾶς to the 
inf., and WH mrg. with codd. A C L etc. read ἀπέχεσθε); 
Jude 3; inf. aor, Acts xxvii. 33sq.; Ro. xii. 1; xv. 
30; 2Co.ii.8; vi.1; Eph.iv. 1; 1 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xiii. 
19 ; τινά foll. by tva w. subjunc. [cf. B. $139, 42; W. 335 
u.s.] 1 Co. i. 10; xvi. 15sq.; 2 Co. viii. 6; 1 Th. iv. 1; 
2 Th. iii. 12; to enjoin a thing by exhortation [cf. D. 
$141, 2], 1 Tim. vi. 2; Tit. ii. 15. 2. to beg, entreat, 
beseech, (Joseph. antt. 6, 7, 4; [11, 8, 5]; often in Epict. 
cf. Schweightuser, Index graecit. Epict. p. 411; Plut. 
apophth. regum, Mor. ii. p. 30 ed. Tauchn. [vi. 695 ed. 
Reiske; exx. fr. Polyb., Diod., Philo, al, in Soph. Lex. 
s. v.]; not thus in the earlier Grk. auth. exe. where the 
gods are called on for aid, in the expressions, παρακαλεῖν 
θεούς, so θεόν in Joseph. antt. 6, 2, 2 and 7, 4; [cf. W. 
22] : [absol., Philem. 9 (yet see the Comm. ad loc.)]; 
τινά, Mt. viii. 5; xviii. 32 ; xxvi. 53; Mk. i. 40 ; Acts xvi. 
9; 2 Co. xii. 18; πολλά, much, Mk. v. 23; τινὰ περί rwos,. 


, 
παρακαλύπτω 


Philem. 10; foll. by direct disc. Acts ix. 38 LT Tr WH; 
with λέγων added and direct disc., Mt. xviii. 29; Mk. v. 
12; [Lk. vii. 4 (ἀξ. 7pórov)]; without the acc. Acts xvi. 
15; τινά foll. by an inf. [W. and B. τι. s.], Mk. v. 17; Lk. 
viii. 41; Acts viii. 31; xix. 31; xxviii. 14, (1 Macc. ix. 
35) ; twa foll. by ὅπως, Mt. viii. 34 [here Lchm. iva (see 
above)]; Aets xxv. 2, (4 Macc. iv. 11; Plut. Demetr. c. 
38); τινά foll. by tva [W.$44, 8a.; B. $ 139, 42], Mt. xiv. 
36; Mk. v. 18; vi. 56; vii. 32; viii. 22; Lk. viii. 31 sq. ; 
[2 Co. ix. 5]; τινὰ ὑπέρ τινος, tva, 2 Co. xii. 8; πολλά 
(much) τινα; ἵνα, Mk. v. 10; 1 Co. xvi. 12; foll. by rod μή 
w. inf. [B. § 140, 16 6.; W. 325 (305)], Acts xxi. 12; by 
an inf. Acts ix. 38 RG; by an acc. w. inf., Acts xiii. 42 ; 
xxiv. 4; [Ro. xvi. 17]. 10 strive to appease by entreaty: 
absol 1 Co. iv. 13; τινά, Lk. xv. 28; Acts xvi. 39, (2 
Mace. xiii. 23). 3. to console, to encourage and 
strengthen by consolation, to comfort, (Sept. for DN}; very 
rarely so in Grk. auth., as Plut. Oth. 16): absol. 2 Co. ii. 
7; τινά, 2 Co.i.6; vii. 6sq.; ἐν w. a dat. of the thing with 
which one comforts another, 1 Th. iv. 18; τινὰ διὰ zapa- 
κλήσεως, 2 Co. i.4; w. an aec. of the contents, διὰ τῆς 
παρακλ. ἧς (for ἣν, see és, 7, 6, IL. 2 c. a.) παρακαλούμεθα, 
ibid.; in pass. to receive consolation, be comforted, Mt. ii. 
18; 2 Co. xiii. 115 ἐπί run over (in) a thing [see ἐπί, B. 
2 a. 0.], 2 Co. i. 4; of the consolation (comfort) given not 
in words but by the experience of a happier lot or by a 
happy issue, i. q. to refresh, cheer: pass., Mt. v. 4 (5); 
Lk. xvi. 25; Acts xx.12; 2 Co. vii. 13 (where a full stop 
must be put after παρακεκλήμ.) ; ἔν τινι, by the help of a 
thing, 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; ἐπί τινε, 1 Th. iii. 7; with (ἐν) zapa- 
κλήσει added, 2 Co. vii. 7. 4. toencourage, strength- 
en, [i. e. in the language of A. V. comfort (see Wright, 
Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v.) ], (in faith, piety, hope) : 
tas καρδίας, your hearts, Eph. vi. 22; Col. ii. 2; iv. 
8; 2 Th. ii. 17, (also χεῖρας ἀσθενεῖς, Job iv. 3 for pm; 
γόνατα παραλελυμένα, Is. xxxv. 3 sq. [see the Hebr.] for 
you) 5. it combines the ideas of ezhorting and 
comforting and encouraging in Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 31; 1 
Then 2: 6. to instruct, teach: ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ, 
Tit. i. 9. [Comp.: συμ-παρακαλέω.] * 

παρα-καλύπτω : fo cover over, cover up, hide, conceal: 
trop. ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ([it was concealed 
from them), a Hebraism, on which see in ἀποκρύπτω, b.), 
Lk. ix. 45 (Ezek. xxii. 26; Plat., Plut., al.).* 

παρα-κατα-θήκη, -ης, 7, (παρακατατίθημι), a deposit, a 
trust: so Ree. in 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; [ Rec.ttz 1633 jn 
2 Tim.i.12also]. (Hdt., Thue., Xen., Aristot. eth. Nic. 
5, 8, 5 p. 1135," 4; Polyb., Diod. 15, 76; Joseph. antt. 
4, 8, 38; Ael. v. h. 4, 1); see παραθήκη above.* 

mapa-Ketpor; (παρά and κεῖμαι); to lie beside [mapá, IV. 
1], to be near (fr. Hom. down); to be present, at hand : 
to. vii. 18 (where see Meyer), 21.* 

παρά-κλησις, -ews, 7, (παρακαλέω, q. V.) ; 1. prop. 
a calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thuc. 4, 61; 
Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, en- 
treaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581; Joseph. antt. 3, 
1, 5; [c. Ap. 2, 23, 3 s. πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἔστω] ; λόγοι παρα- 
κλήσεως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Maec. 


483 








παρακοή 


χ. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement : 
Acts xv. 81 [al. refer this to 4]; 1 Co. xiv. 3; 2 Co. 
viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 1 Tim. iv. 13; Heb. xii. 5; λόγος 
τῆς παρακλήσεως, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Macc. vii. 24; xv. 9 
(11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thuc. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb., 
al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Co. i. 4-7; 
Heb. vi. 18; [add, Acts ix. 31; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer. 
xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nah. iii. 7]; Phalar. 
ep. 97 init.) ; τῶν γραφῶν, afforded by the contents of the 
Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [W. 189 (178)]; θεὸς τῆς παρακλ., 
God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5; 2 
Co. i. 3; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot 
or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24; 2 Co. vii. 4, 
7, 13 [cf. W. 393 (368)]; Philem. 7; by meton. that 
which affords comfort or refreshment ; thus of the Messi- 
anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes- 
siah the consoler, the comforter, κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν, oro [ef. 
Wünsche, Neue Beitrige u. s. w. ad loc.; Schéttgen, 
Horae Hebr. etc. ii. 18]). 5. univ. persuasive dis- 
course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, consol- 
atory; powerful hortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; Aóyos 
παρακλήσεως [ A. V. word of exhortation], Acts xiii. 15; 
υἱὸς παρ. [a son of exhortation], a man gifted in teaching, 
admonishing, consoling, Acts iv. 36 ; used of the apostles’ 
instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.* 

παρά-κλητος, -ov, 6, (mapakaAéo), prop. summoned, called 
to one's side, esp. called to one's aid ; hence 1. one 
who pleads another's cause before a judge, a pleader, 
counsel for defence, legal assistant ; an advocate: Dem. p. 
341, 11; Diog. Laért. 4, 50, cf. Dio Cass. 46, 20. 2. 
univ. one who pleads another’s cause with one, an inter- 
cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. §59; de Josepho § 40; in 
Flaceum $83 and 4 ; so of Christ, in his exaltation at God's 
right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon 
of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine 
Logos in Philo, vita Moys. iii. $ 14). 3. inthe widest 
sense, a helper, succorer, aider, assistant; so of the Holy 
Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos- 
tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to 
a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the 
divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials 
and persecutions on behalf of the divine kingdom: Jn. 
xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19 sq.; Mk. xiii. 
11; Lk. xii. 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says 
that God in creating the world had no need of a zapá- 
κλητος, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The Targumsand 
Talmud borrow the Greek words opr and ΝΘ ΡῚ9 
and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate; 
ef. Buztorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916) ]; 
so Targ. on Job xxxiii. 23 for 1^5 quo», i. e. an angel 
that pleads man’s cause with God ; [cf. πλουσίων zapa- 
kAnrot in ‘Teaching’ etc. 5 sub fin.; Barn. ep. 20, 2; 
Constitt. apost. 7, 18]). Cf. Knapp, Scripta varii Argu- 
menti, p. 124 sqq. ; Düsterdieck on 1 Jn. ii. 1, p. 147 sqq. ; 
[ Watkins, Excursus G, in Ellicott’s N. T. Com. for Eng. 
Readers; Westeott in the * Speaker's Com." Additional 
Note on Jn. xiv. 16; Schaff in Lange ibid. ].* . 

παρ-ακοή, -js, 7, (mapa Lat. praeter [see mapa, IV. 


παρακολουθέω 


1. prop. a hearing amiss (Plat. epp. 7 p. 341 
b.). 2. [unwillingness to hear i. 6.1 disobedience : 
Ro. v. 19; 2Co. x. 6; Heb. ii. 2. [Cf. Trench $1xvi.]* 

παρ-ακολουθέω, -à : fut. παρακολουθήσω ; 1 aor. παρηκο- 
λούθησα (1 Tim. iv. 6 L mrg. WH mrg.; 2 Tim. iii. 10 L 
T Tr WH txt.) ; pf. παρηκολούθηκα ; 1. to follow 
after; so to follow one as to be always at his side [see 
παρά, IV. 1]; to follow close, accompany, (so fr. Arstph. 
and Xen. down). 2. metaph. a. to be always 
present, to attend one wherever he goes: τινί, Mk. xvi. 
17 [where Tr WH txt. ἀκολουθ., q. v.]. b. to follow 
up a thing in mind so as to attain to the knowledge of it, i.e. 
to understand, [cf. our follow a matter up, trace its course, 
ete.] ; to examine thoroughly, investigate : πᾶσιν (i. e. πράγ- 
μασιν), all things that have taken place, Lk. i. 3 (very 
often so in Grk. auth., as Dem. pro cor. c. 53 [p. 285, 
23]). c. to follow faithfully sc. a standard or rule, to 
conform one's self to: with a dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. iv. 
6; 2 Tim. iii. 10, (2 Mace. ix. 27). Cf. the full diseus- 
sion of this word by Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. for 1871, p. 46 sq.* 

παρ-ακούω: 1 aor. παρήκουσα; 1. to hear aside 
i.e. casually or carelessly or amiss [see παρά, IV. 2] 
(often so in class. Grk.; on the freq. use of this verb by 
Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. (1875) p. 
106). 2. to be unwilling to hear, i. e. on hearing to 
neglect, to pay no heed to, (w. a gen. of the pers., Polyb. 
2, 8,3; 3, 15, 2); contrary to Grk. usage [but cf. Plut. 
Philop. $ 16, 1 καὶ παριδεῖν rt x. παρακοῦσαι τῶν ápapra- 


27); 


νομένων, de curios. § 14 πειρῶ καὶ τῶν ἰδίων ἔνια παρακοῦσαί 
more x. παριδεῖν), w. an accus., τὸν λόγον, Mk. v. 360 T WH 
Tr txt. [4]. ‘overhearing the word as it was being 
spoken’; cf. B. 302 (259)]; to refuse to hear, pay no re- 
gard to, disobey: τινός, what one says, Mt. xviii. 17 (Tob. 
lil. 4; τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως λεγόμενα, Esth. iii. 3).* 

παρα-κύπτω: 1 aor. παρέκυψα; to stoop to [cf. παρά, IV. 
1] a thing in order to look at it; to look at with head 
bowed forwards ; to look into with the body bent; to stoop 
and look into: Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject 
the vs.]; Jn. xx. 5; εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, Jn. xx. 11; metaph. 
to look carefully into, inspect curiously, εἴς τι, of one who 
would become acquainted with something, Jas. i. 25; 1 
Pet.i.12.  (Arstph., Theocr., Philo, Dio Cass., Plut., 
al; Sept.)* 

mapa-Aappávo ; fut.zrapaXnyropatr, in LT Tr WH -λήμψο- 
μαι (Jn. xiv. 3; see M, μ); 2 aor. παρέλαβον, 3 pers. plur. 
παρελάβοσαν (2 Th. iii. 6 GT L mrg. Tr mrg. WH mrz.; 
cf. δολεόω [yet see WH. App. p. 165]); Pass., pres. zapa- 
λαμβάνομαι; 1 fut. παραληφθήσομαι, in L T Tr WH -Anp- 
φθήσομαι (see M, p; Lk. xvii.34—36) fr. Hdt.down; Sept. 
for np?; 1. to take to [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to take with 
one's self, to join to one’s self: twa, an associate, a com- 
panion, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi. 97; Mk. iv. 36 ; v. 40 ; ix.2; 
x.32; Lk. ix. 10,98; xi. 26; xviii. 31; Acts xv. 39; in 
pass., Mt. xxiv. 40, 41; Lk. xvii. 34-36; one to be led 
off as a prisoner, Jn. xix. 16; Acts xxiii. 18; to take 
with one in order to carry away, Mt. ii. 13 sq. 20 sq.; 
τινὰ μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33; 


484 








παραλύω 


παραλαμβάνειν γυναῖκα, to take one’s betrothed to his 
home, Mt. i. 20, 24; τινά foll. by eis w. an acc. of place, 
to take [and bring, ef. W. $66, 2 d.] one with one into 
a place, Mt. iv. 5, 8; xxvii. 27; τινὰ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, Mt. xx. 
17; mid. with πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, to my companionship, 
where I myself dwell, Jn. xiv. 3. "The ptep. is prefixed 
to other act. verbs to describe the action more in detail, 
Acts xvi. 33; xxi. 24, 26, 32 [here L WH mre. λαβών. 
Metaph. i. q. to accept or acknowledge one to be such 
as he professes to bes not to reject, not to withhold obedi- 
ence: τινά, Jn. i. 11. 2. to receive something trans- 
mitted ; a. prop.: παραλ. διακονίαν, an office to be dis- 
charged, Col. iv. 17; βασιλείαν, Heb. xii. 28, (so for the 
Chald. 535 in Dan. v. 31; vii. 18, Theodot.; Hat. 2, 
120; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20, 5 (where see Müller)]; τὴν 
ἀρχήν, Plat., Polyb., Plut.). b. to receive with the 
mind; by oral transmission: ri foll. by ἀπό w. a gen. 
of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Co. 
xi. 23 (on which ef. Paret in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii. p. 48 sqq.; [see reff. in ἀπό, IT. 2 
d. aa.]); by the narration of others, by the instruction 
of teachers (used of disciples) : [τὸν Xp. Ἶ. τὸν κύριον, 
Col. ii. 6]; ri, 1 Co. xv. 1, 3; Gal.i.9; Phil.iv. 9; {τί 
foll. by an infin., Mk. vii. 4]; τὶ παρά twos [see reff. s. v. 
παρά, I. c.], Gal. i. 12; 1 Th. ii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 6; παρά 
τινος, καθὼς . . . τὸ πῶς δεῖ etc. 1 Th. iv. 1, (σοφίαν mapa 
twos, Plat. Lach. p. 197 d. ; Euthyd. p. 304c.). [Comp.: 
συμ-παραλαμβάνω. * 

παρα-λέγομαι ; [zapeAeyóugv]; (παρά beside, and λέγω 
to lay); Vulg.in Acts xxvii. 8 lego, i. e. to sail past, coast 
along: τὴν Κρήτην, Acts xxvii. 8 [here some, referring 
αὐτήν to Σαλμώνην, render work past, weather], 13, (τὴν 
᾿Ιταλίαν, Diod. 13, 35 γῆν, 14, 55; [Strabo] ; Lat. legere 
oram).* 

παρ-ἄλιος, -ov, also of three term. [cf. W. § 11, 1], 
(παρά and dAs), by the sea, maritime: ἡ παράλιος, sc. 
xópa, the sea-coast, Lk. vi. 17 (Polyb. 3, 39, 3; Diod. 3, 
15, 41; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 12; Sept. Deut. xxxiii. 19; 
and the fem. form ἡ παραλία in Deut. i. 7; Josh. ix. 1; 
Judith i. 7 ; iii. 6; v. 2, 23; vii. 8; 1 Macc. xi. 8; xv. 38; 
Hat. 7, 185; often in Polyb.; Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1).* 

παρ-αλλαγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (παραλλάσσω), variation, change: 
Jas. 1. 11. (Aeschyl., Plat., Polyb., al.)* 

mapa-Aoyltopar; (see παρά, IV. 2) ; a. to reckon 
wrong, miscount: Dem. p. 822, 25; 1037, 15. b. to 
cheat by false reckoning (Aeschin., Aristot.) ; to deceive 
by false reasoning (joined to ἐξαπατᾶν, Epict. diss. 2, 20, 
7); hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent: 
τινά, Col. ii.4; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for 1122).* 

παρα-λυτικός, -7, -όν, (fr. παραλύω, q. V-), paralytic, i. e. 
suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side; 
univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the 
palsy]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 6; ix. 2, 6; Mk. ii. 8-5, 9; and 
L WH mrs. in Lk. v. 24.  [Cf. Riehm, HWB. s. v. 
Krankheiten, 5; B. D. Am. ed. p. 1866°.] * 

παραλύω : [pf. pass. ptep. παραλελυμένος ; prop. to 
loose on one side or from the side [cf. παρά, IV. 1]; to 
loose or part things placed side by side ; to loosen, dissolve, 


παραμένω 


hence, to weaken, enfeeble: παραλελυμένος, suffering from 
the relaxing of the nerves, unstrung, weak of limb, [ palsied ], 
Lk. v. 18, 24 ([not L WH mrg.] see παραλυτικός) ; Acts 
viii. 7; ix.33; παραλελ. γόνατα; i. e. tottering, weakened, 


feeble knees, Heb. xii. 12; Is. xxxv. 3; Sir. xxv. 23; | 


χεῖρες παραλελ. Ezek. vii. 27 ; Jer. vi. 24; [xxvii. (1) 15, 
43]; παρελύοντο ai δεξιαί, of combatants, Joseph. b. j. 3, 
8, 6; παρελύθη x. οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἔτι λαλῆσαι λόγον, 1 Macc. 
ix. 55, where cf. Grimm; σωματικῇ δυνάμει παραλελ. 
Polyb. 32, 23, 1; τοῖς σώμασι καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς, id. 20, 10, 
9.* 

παρα-μένω ; fut. παραμενῶ ; 1 aor. ptep. παραμείνας ; fr. 
Hom. down; to remain beside, continue always near, (cf. 
παρά, IV. 1]: Heb. vii. 23; opp. to ἀπεληλυθέναι, Jas. i. 
25 (and continues to do so, not departing till all stains 
are washed away, cf. vs. 24) ; with one, πρός twa, 1 Co. 
xvi. 6; τινί (as often in Grk. auth.), to survive, remain 
alive (Hdt. 1, 30), Phil. i. 25 L T Tr WH [where Bp. 
Lehtft.: *zapapevo is relative, while μενῶ is absolute.” 
Cowr.: συμ-παραμένω. | * 

παρα-μυθέομαι, -οὔμαι ; 1 aor. παρεμυθησάμην ; fr. Hom. 
down; to speak to, address one, whether by way of ad- 
monition and incentive, or to calm and console; hence i. q. 
to encourage, console: τινά, Jn. xi. 31; 1 Th.ii. 12 (11); 
v. 14: τινὰ περί twos, Jn. xi. 19.* 

παραμυθία, -as, 7, (παραμυθέομαι), in class. Grk. any 
address, whether made for the purpose of persuading, 
or of arousing and stimulating, or of calming and consol- 
ing; once in the N. T., like the Lat. allocutio (Sen. ad 
Mare. 1; ad Helv. 1), i. q. consolation, comfort: 1 Co. xiv. 
3. (So Plat. Ax. p. 365 a.; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3; 
Joseph. b. j. 3, 7,15; Lcian. dial. mort. 15, 3; Ael. v. h. 
12, 1 fin.)* 

παραμύθιον, -ov, τό, (παραμυθέομαι), persuasive address : 
Phil.ii.1. (consolation, Sap. iii. 18 and often in Grk. 
writ. [fr. Soph., Thuc., Plat. on].)* 

παρανομέω, -à ; to be a παράνομος, to act contrary to law, 
to break the law: Acts xxiii. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen., 
Plat., sqq.) * 

παρανομία, -as, 7], (παράνομος [fr. παρά (q. v. IV. 2) and 
vópos]), breach of law, transgression, wickedness: 2 Pet. 
ii. 16. (Thuc., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept.) * 

παρα-πικραίνω : 1 aor. παρεπίκρανα; (see παρά, IV.3); 
Sept. chiefly for 1135, 1727, to be rebellious, contuma- 
cious, refractory; also for 320, "3213, ete.; to provoke, 
exasperate; to rouse to indignation: absol. (yet so that 
God is thought of as the one provoked), Heb. iii. 16, 
asin Ps. ev. (cvi) 7; lxv. (Ixvi.) 7; lxvii. (1xviii.) 7; 
Ezek. ii. 5-8 ; with τὸν θεόν added, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 29; 
li. (xliv.) 3, 8; Ps. v. 11; Ezek. xx. 21, and often; in pass., 
Lam. i. 20; joined with ὀργίζεσθαι. Philo de alleg. legg. 
ii. $38; w. πληροῦσθαι ὀργῆς δικαίας, vita Moys. i. $ 55 
[al. πάνυ mixp.]; παραπικραίνειν x. παροργίζειν, de somn. 
ii. § 26.* 

παρα-πικρασμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (παραπικραίνω)., provocation: ἐν 
τῷ παραπικρασμῷ, when they provoked (angered) me by 
rebelliousness, Heb. iii. 8, 15, fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8 (where 
Sept. for n27Y2) ; e£. Num. xvi.* 


485 








Tapappew 


παρα-πίπτω : 2 aor. ptcp. παραπεσών ; prop. to fall be- 
side a pers. or thing; to slip aside ; hence to deviate from 
the right path, turn aside, wander : τῆς ὁδοῦ, Polyb. 3, 54, 
5; metaph. τῆς ἀληθείας, Polyb. 12, 12 (7), 2 [(here ed. 
Didot ἀντέχηται) ; τοῦ καθήκοντος, 8, 13, 8]; 1. q. to err, 
Polyb. 18, 19, 6; ἔν τινι, Xen. Hell. 1, 6,4. In the Scrip- 
tures, to fall away (from the true faith) : from the wor- 
ship of Jehovah, Ezek. xiv. 13; xv. 8 (for Oy) ; from 
Christianity, Heb. vi. 6.* 

παρα-πλέω: 1 aor. inf. παραπλεῦσαι; to sail by, sail past, 
[wapd, IV.1]: w. anace. of place, Acts xx.16. (Thuc. 
2, 25; Xen. anab. 6, 2, 1; Hell. 1,3, 3; Plat. Phaedr. p. 
259 a.) * 

παρα-πλήσιον, (neut. of the adj. παραπλήσιος), adv., 
near to, almost lo: ἠσθένησε παραπὰλ. θανάτῳ [cf. W. $54, 
6], Phil. ii. 27. (Thuc. 7, 19; in like manner, Polyb.) * 

παρα-πλησίως, adv., (παραπλήσιος, see παραπλήσιον), 
similarly, in like manner, in the same way: Heb. ii. 14 
(where it is equiv. to κατὰ πάντα vs. 17, and hence is used 
of a similarity which amounts to equality, as in the 
phrase ἀγωνίζεσθαι mapamA. to fight with equal advan- 
tage, aequo Marte, Hdt. 1, 77 ; so too the adj., σὺ δὲ ἄνθρω- 
πος ὧν παραπλήσιος τοῖς ἄλλοις, πλήν ye δὴ ὅτι πολυπράγμων 
καὶ ἀτάσθαλος krÀ. the words in which an oriental sage 
endeavors to tame the pride of Alexander the Great, 
Arr. exp. Alex. 7, 1, 9 (6)).* 

παρα-πορεύομαι ; impf. παρεπορευόμην ; fr. Aristot. and 
Polyb. down; Sept. for 723’; to proceed at the side, go 
past, pass by: Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xi. 20; xv. 29; διὰ τῶν 
σπορίμων, to go along through the grain-fields so that he 
had the grain on either side of him as he walked [see 
ποιέω, I. 1 a. and c.], Mk. ii. 28 R GT WH mrg.; διὰ 
τῆς Γαλιλαίας, Vulg. praetergredi Galilaeam, i.e. “ obiter 
proficisci per Galilaeam," i. e. *they passed right along 
through, intent on finishing the journey, and not stopping 
to receive hospitality or to instruct the people’ (Fritz- 
sche), Mk. ix. 30 [but L txt. Trtxt. WH txt. ἐπορεύοντο] ; 
διὰ τῶν ὁρίων, Deut. ii. 4. [Svw. cf. παραβαίνω, fin.] *3 

παρά“πτωμα, -τος, τό, (παραπίπτω, q. V.) 5 1. prop. 
a fall beside or near something ; but nowhere found in 
this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth 
and uprightness; a sin, misdeed, [ R. V. trespass, * differ- 
ing from ἁμάρτημα (q. v.) in figure not in force’ 
(Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench 8Ixvi.]: Mt. vi. 14,[15* G T om. 
WH br.], 15^; xviii. 35 Rec.; Mk. xi. 22, 26 RGL; Ro. 
iv. 25; v. 15-18, 20; xi. 11sq.; 2 Co. v. 19; Gal. vi. 1; 
Eph. i. 7; ii. 1,5; Col.ii. 13; Jas. v. 16 (where L T Tr 
WH ἁμαρτίας). (Polyb. 9, 10, 6; Sap. iii. 13; x. 1; 
Sept. several times for Syn, oy, pws, etc.; of liter- 
ary faults, Longin. 36, 2.) * 

παρα-ρρέω ; (παρά and ῥέων ; fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat. 
down; to flow past (mapappéov ὕδωρ, Is. xliv. 4), to glide 
by : μήποτε παραρρυῶμεν (2 aor. pass. subjunc.; cf. Bttm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 287; [Veitch s. v. ῥέω; WH. App. p.170]; 
but LT Tr WH zapapvópev; see P, p), lest we be carried 
past, pass by, [R. V. drift away from them] (missing the 
thing), i. e. lest the salvation which the things heard 
show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii.1. In 


παράσημος 


Grk. auth. παρραρεῖ μοί τι, a thing escapes me, Soph. 
Philoct. 653; trop. slips from my mind, Plat. legg. 6 p. 
781 a.; in the sense of neglect, μὴ παρραρυῇς, τήρησον δὲ 
ἐμὴν βουλήν, Prov. iii. 21." 

παράσημος, -ov, (παρά [q. v. IV. 2], and ojpa[amark)) ; 
1. marked falsely, spurious, counterfeit ; as coin. 2; 
marked beside or on the margin ; so of noteworthy words, 
which the reader of a book marks on the margin; 
hence 3. univ. noted, marked, conspicuous, remark- 
able, (of persons, in a bad sense, notorious) ; marked with 
a sign: ἐν πλοίῳ παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροις, in a ship marked 
with the image or figure of the Dioscuri, Acts xxviii. 11 
[cf. B. D. s. v. Castor and Pollux].* 

mapa-ckeváto ; pf. pass. παρεσκεύασμαι ; fut. mid. zapa- 
σκευάσομαι ; fr. IIdt. down; to make ready, prepare: sc. 
τὸ δεῖπνον (added in Hdt. 9, 82; Athen. 4, 15 p. 138), 
Acts x. 10 (συμπόσιον, IIdt. 9,15; 2 Macc.ii.27). Mid. 
to make one's self ready, to prepare one's self, [cf. W. $ 38, 
2 a.]: eis πόλεμον, 1 Co. xiv. 8 (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 42; εἰς 
μάχην, eis ναυμαχίαν, etc., in Xen.). Pf. pass. in mid. 
sense, to have prepared one’s self, to be prepared or ready, 
2 Co. ix. 2sq. (see Matthiae $493).* 

παρα-σκενή, -7s, 7, fr. Hdt. down; 
ready, preparation, equipping. 2. that which is pre- 
pared, equipment. 3. inthe N. T. in a Jewish sense, 
the day of preparation, i. e. the day on which the Jews 
made the necessary preparation to celebrate a sabbath 
or afeast: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xv. 42; Lk. xxiii. 54 ; Jn. 
xix. 31, (Joseph. antt. 16,6, 2); with a gen. of the E 
τοῦ πάσχα [acc. to W. 189 (177 sq.) a possess. gen.], Jn. 
xix. 14 (cf. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 31sq.); w. a gen. 
of the subj., τῶν Ιουδαίων, ibid. 42. Cf. Bleek, Beitrige 
zur Evangelienkritik, p. 114 sqq.; [on later usage cf. 
* Teaching 8, 1 (and Harnack's note) ; Mart. Polyc. 7, 
1 (and Zahn's note); Soph. Lex. s. v. 3].* 

παρα-τείνω: 1 aor. zapérewa ; fr. Hdt. down; to extend 
beside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong: τὸν 
λόγον, his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (λόγους, Aristot. poet. irt 
5 p. 1455*, 23 μῦθον, 9, 4 p. 1451", 38).* 

mapa-rnpéo, -o : impf. 3 pers. plur. παρετήρουν; 1 aor. 
mapetnpnoa; Mid., pres. παρατηροῦμαι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. 
παρετηροῦντο ; prop. to stand beside and watch [cf. παρά, 
IV. 1]; to watch assiduously, observe carefully ; a. 
to watch, attend to, with the eyes: τὰ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ γι- 
γνόμενα, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13; τινά, one, to see 
what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4); contextu- 
ally in a bad sense, fo watch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr 
mrg. ἀποχωρήσαντες ) (joined with ἐνεδρεύειν, Polyb. 17, 
3, 2); rwa (Polyb. 11, 9, 9; Sept. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12; 
Sus. 16) foll. by the interrog. εἰ, Mk. iii. 2 R GT WH Tr 
txt.; Lk. vi. 7 Rec. ; mid. to watch for one's self: Mk. iii. 
21, Tr mrg.; Lk. vi. ? L T Tr WH, [(in both pass. foll. 
by interrog. €)]; Lk. xiv.1; active w. an acc. of place 
(Polyb. 1, 29, 4): τὰς πύλας [foll. by ὅπως, cf. B. 237 
(205)], Acts ix. 24 R G, where L T Tr WH give mid. 
παρετηροῦντο. b. to observe i.q.to keep scrupulously ; 
to neglect nothing requisite to the religious observance of: 
ἑβδομάδας, Joseph. antt. 3, 5, 5; [τὴν τῶν σαββ. ἡμέραν, 


1. a making 


486 








παραφρονία 


id. 14, 10, 25]; mid. (for one’s self, i. 6. for one’s salva- 
tion), ἡμέρας, μῆνας, καιρούς, Gal. iv. 10 (ὅσα προστάττου- 
σιν οἱ νόμοι, Dio Cass. 53, 10; [rà εἰς βρῶσιν οὐ νενομι- 
σμένα, Joseph. e. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).* 

παρα-τήρησις, -ews, 7, (παρατηρέω), observation ([Polyb. 
16,22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.): μετὰ παρα- 
τηρήσεως, in such a manner that it can be watched with 
the eyes, i. e. in a visible manner, Lk. xvii. 20.* 

παραττίθημι; fut. παραθήσω ; 1 aor. παρέθηκα; 2 aor. 
subjune. 3 pers. plur. παραθῶσιν, infin. παραθεῖναι (Mk. 
viii. 7 R G) ; Pass., pres. ptep. παρατιθέμενος ; 1 aor. infin. 
παρατεθῆναι (Mk. viii. 7 Lehm.) ; Mid., pres. παρατίθεμαι; 
fut. παραθήσομαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. παρέθεντο, impv. 
παράθου (2 Tim. ii. 2); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
Du 1. to place beside, place near (cf. παρά, IV. 1] 
or set before: τινί τι, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii. 
6 sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xi.6; τράπεζαν a table, i. e. food placed 
on a table, Acts xvi. 34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7); τὰ mapa- 
τιθέμενα ὑμῖν, [ A. V. such things as are set before you], of 
food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1,30); sing. 1 Co. x. 27. b. 
lo set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 14; Sept. 
Ex. xix. 7) : τινὶ παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set 
forth (from one's self), to explain: foll. by ὅτι, Acts xvii. 
3. 2. Mid. to place down (from one’s self or for 
one’s self) with any one, to deposit; to intrust, commit to 
one’s charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2, 16 ; Polyb. 33, 12, 
3; Plut. Num. 9; Tob. iv. 1) : τί τινι, a thing to one to 
be cared for, Lk. xii. 48; a thing to be religiously kept 
and taught to others, 1 'Tim.i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 2; τινά 
tut, lo commend one to another for protection, safety, 
etc., Acts xiv. 23; xx. 32, (Diod. 17, 23); ras ψυχάς to 
God, 1 Pet. iv. 19; τὸ πνεῦμά pov εἰς χεῖρας θεοῦ, Lk. 
xxiii. 46; Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 6.* 

mapa-rvyxávo ; fr. Hom. (Il. 11, 74) down; to chance 
to be by [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to happen to be present, to meet 
by chance: Acts xvii. 17.* 

παρ-αυτίκα [cf. B. $146, 4], adv., for the moment: 2 
Co.iv. 17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.) * 

mapa-bépo : [1 aor. inf. παρενέγκαι (Lk. xxii. 42 'Tdf., 
cf. Veitch p. 669)]; 2 aor. inf. zapeveykeiv (Lk. xxii. 42 
RG), impv. zapéveyke [(ibid. L Tr WH); pres. pass. 
mapadépopat ; see reff. s. v. φέρω]; 1. to bear to 
[cf. παρά, IV. 1], bring to, put before: of food. (Hat., 
Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [cf. παρά, IV. 2] from 
the right course or path, to carry away: Jude 12 [R. V. 
carried along] (where Rec. περι φέρ.) ; from the truth, 
Heb. xiii. 9 where Rec. περεφέρ., (Plat. Phaedr. p. 
265 b.; Plut. Timol. 6; Antonin. 4, 43; Hdian. 8, 4, 7 
[4 ed. Bekk. ]). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to 
cause to pass by, to remove: τὶ ἀπό twos, Mk. xiv. 36 ; 
Lk. xxii. 42.* 

Trapa-ppovew, -ὦ ; (παράφρων [fr. παρά (q. v. IV. 2) and 
φρήν, ‘beside one's wits"]) ; to be beside one’s self, out of 
one’s senses, void of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23. 
(From Aeschyl and Hdt. down; once in Sept., Zech. 
vii. 11.) * 

mapa-ppovia, -as, 7, (παράφρων [see the preceding 
word]), madness, insanity: 2 Pet. ii. 16. ‘The Grk. writ. 


“παραχειμάξω 


use not this word but παραφροσύνη [cf. W. 24; 95 
(90)]* 

Tapa-xeq&to: fut. παραχειμάσω; 1 aor. inf. παραχει- 
μάσαι; pf. ptcp. παρακεχειμακώς ; t0 winter, pass the win- 
ter, with one or at a place: Acts xxvii. 12; 1 Co. xvi. 6; 
ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, Acts xxviii. 11; ἐκεῖ, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p. 
909, 15; Polyb. 2, 64, 1; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. 3; 
Dio Cass. 40, 4.) * 

παραχειμασία, -as, 7, (παραχειμάζω), a passing the 
winter, wintering: Acts xxvii. 12. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6; [3, 
35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.) * 

παρα-χρῆμα, (prop. i. 4. παρὰ τὸ χρῆμα; cf. our on the 
spot), fr. Hdt. down; immediately, forthwith, instantly: 
Mt. xxi. 19sq.; Lk. i. 64; iv. 39; v. 25; viii. 44, 47, 55; 
xiii 13; xviii. 43; xix. 11; xxii.60; Actsiii.7; v.10; 
ix. 18 Rec.; xii. 23; xiii. 11; xvi. 26 [WH br. zapaxp.], 
33. (Sap. xviii. 17; 2 Mace. iv. 34, 38, etc. ; Sept. for 
ἘΝΩ5, Num. vi. 9; xii. 4; Is. xxix. 5; xxx. 13.) * 

πάρδαλις, -eas, 7, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 353; a 
pard, panther, leopard; ἃ very fierce Asiatic and African 
animal, having a tawny skin marked with large black 
spots [cf. Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 111 sqq.; BB. DD. 
s. v.]: Rev. xiii. 2.* 

παρ-εδρεύω ; (fr. map-edpos, sitting beside [ef. παρά, 
IV. 1]); tosit beside, attend constantly, (Lat. assidere), 
(Eur. Polyb., Diod., al.) : τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ, to perform 
the duties pertaining to the offering of sacrifices and in- 
cense, [to wait upon], 1 Co. ix. 13 L T Tr WH (for Rec. 
προσ eóp.).* 

πάρ-ειμι ; impf. 3 pers. pl. παρῆσαν ; fut. 3 pers. sing. 
παρέσται (Rev. xvii. 8 L'T [not (as G Tr WH AI, al.) 
πάρεσται ; see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. $108, Anm. 20; Chandler 
$803]); (mapa near, by, [see παρά, IV. 1 fin.] and εἰμί) ; 
Sept. chiefly for N13; as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down 
a. to be by, be at hand, to have arrived, to be present: of 
persons, Lk. xiii. 1; Jn. xi. 28; Actsx.21; Rev. xvii. 8; 
παρών, present (opp. to ἀπών), 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 2, 11; 
xiii. 2, 10; ἐπί τινος, before one (a judge), Acts xxiv. 19; 
ἐπί τινι, for (to do) something, Mt. xxvi. 50 Rec. ; ἐπί τι, 
ibid. GL T Tr WH (on which see ἐπί, B. 2 a. (.); évó- 
mov θεοῦ, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Tr mrg.]; 
ἐνθάδε, ib. xvii. 6; πρός twa, with one, Acts xii. 20; 2 Co. 
xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: ὁ καιρὸς πάρεστιν, 
Jn. vii. 6; τὸ παρόν, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v. 
17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2b.; [L. and 
S.s. v. IL; Soph. Lex. s. v.b.]). of other things: rod εὐαγ- 
-yeMov τοῦ παρόντος eis ὑμᾶς, which is come unto (and so 
is present among) you, Col. i. 6 (foll. by eis w. an ace. of 
place, 1 Macc. xi. 63, and often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 
down ; see eis, C. 2). b. to beready, in store, at com- 
mand: ἡ παροῦσα ἀλήθεια, the truth which ye now hold, 
so that there is no need of words to call it to your re- 
membrance, 2 Pet. i. 12; (μὴ) πάρεστίν τινί τι, ibid. 9 
[A. V. lacketh], and Lehm. in 8 also [where al. ὑπάρ- 
xovra], (Sap. xi. 22 (21), and often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. 
down; cf. Passow u. s.; [L. and S. u. s.]); τὰ παρόντα, 
possessions, property, [.A. V. such things as ye have (cf. 
our ‘ what one has by him’)], Heb. xiii. 5 (ots rà παρόντα 


487 








παρεμβολή 


ἀρκεῖ, ἥκιστα τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ὀρέγονται, Xen. symp. 4, 42). 
(Comp. : συμ-πάρειμι.} * 

παρεισ-άγω : fut. παρεισάξω ; (see παρά, IV. 1); to in- 
troduce or bring in secretly or craftily: αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας, 
2 Pet.ii.1. In the same sense of heretics: ἕκαστος ἰδίως 
kal ἑτέρως ἰδίαν δόξαν παρεισηγάγοσαν, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. 
h.e. 4, 22,5; δοκοῦσι παρεισάγειν τὰ ἄρρητα αὐτῶν... 
μυστήρια, Orig. philos. [i. q. Hippol. refut. omn. haeres.] 
5, 17 fin.; of Marcion, νομίζων καινόν τι παρεισάγειν, ibid. 
7, 29 init. ;— passages noted by Hilgenfeld, Zeitschr. f. 
wissensch. T'heol.1860, p. 125 sq. (oi zpo8óra: τοὺς στρα- 
τιώτας παρεισαγαγόντες ἐντὸς τῶν τειχῶν κυρίους τῆς πόλεως 
ἐποίησαν, Diod. 12, 41 [cf. Polyb. 1, 18, 3; 2, 7, 8]. In 
other senses in other prof. auth.) * 

παρ-είσ-ακτος, -ov, (παρεισάγω), secretly or surreptitiously 
brought in; [ A. V. privily brought in]; one who has stolen 
in (Vulg. subintroductus): Gal.ii.4; cf. C. F. A. Fritz- 
sche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 181 sq.* 

παρ-εισ-δύω or παρεισδύνω : 1 aor. παρεισέδυσα [acc. to 
class. usage trans., cf. üóve ; (see below)]; to enter se- 
cretly, slip in stealthily; to steal in; [A. V. creep in un- 
awares]: Jude 4 [here WH παρεισεδύησαν, 3 pers. plur. 
2aor. pass. (with mid. or intrans. force) ; see their App. 
p. 170, and cf. B. 56 (49); Veitch s. v. δύω, fin.]; cf. the 
expressions παρείσδυσιν πλάνης ποιεῖν, Barn. ep. 2, 10; 
ἔχειν, ibid. 4, 9. (Hippocrs Hdian. 1, 6, 2; 7,9, 18[8 ed. 
Bekk.; Philo de spec. legg. $15]; Plut., Galen, al.) * 

παρ-εισ-έρχομαι : 2 aor. παρεισῆλθον ; 1. to come 
in secretly or by stealth [cf. παρά, IV. 1], to creep or steal 
in, (Vulg. subintroeo) : Gal. ii. 4 (Polyb. 1, 7,3; 1, 8, 4; 
[esp.] 2, 55, 3; Philo de opif. mund. $ 52; de Abrah. 
$ 19, etc.; Plut. Poplic. 17; Clem. homil. 2, 23). 2. 
to enter in addition, come in besides, (Vulg. subintro): Ro. 
v: 20; Che ED 

παρ-εισ-τφέρω: 1 aor. παρεισήνεγκα; a. to bring in 
besides (Dem., al.). b. to contribute besides to some- 
thing: σπουδήν, 2 Pet. i. 5 [R. V. adding on your part |.* 

παρ-εκτός (for which the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down use 
παρέκ, mapé£) ; 1. prep. w. gen. [cf. W. $ 54, 6], ez- 
cept; with the exception of (a thing, expressed by the 
gen.): Mt. v. 32; xix. 9 LWH mrg.; Acts xxvi. 29, 
(Deut. i. 36 Aq.; Test. xii. Patr. p. 631; [*Teaching' 6, 
$1]; Geop. 13, 15, 7). 2. adv. besides : rà παρεκτός 
sc. γινόμενα, the things that occur besides or in addition, 
2 Co.xi. 28 [cf. our ‘extra matters’; al. the things that 
I omit; but see Meyer].* 

παρ-εμ-βάλλω : fut. παρεμβαλῶ ; fr. Arstph. and Dem. 
down; 1. to cast in by the side of or besides [cf. παρά, 
IV. 1], to insert, interpose; to bring back into line. 2. 
from Polyb. on, in military usage, fo assign to soldiers a 
place, whether in camp or in line of battle, to draw up in 
line, to encamp (often in 1 Mace., and in Sept. where for 
Tm) : τινὶ χάρακα, to cast up a bank about a city, Lk. xix. 
43 L mrg. T WH txt.* 

παρ-εμ-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. παρεμβάλλω, q. v.) ; 1. in- 
terpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign 
to the subject in hand, Aeschin.). 2. In the Maced. 
dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 30; Lob. 


παρενοχλέω 


ad Phryn. p. 377; [W. 22]) an encampment (Polyb., 
Diod., Joseph., Plut.) ; a. the camp of the Israel- 
ites in the desert (an enelosure within which their tents 
were pitched), Ex. xxix. 14; xix. 17; xxxii. 17; hence 
in Heb. xiii. 11 used for the city of Jerusalem, inasmuch 
as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encamp- 


ment had been in the desert ; of the sacred congregation | 


or assembly of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly 
in camps in the wilderness, ib. 13. b. the bar- 
racks of the Roman soldiers, which at Jerusalem were in 
the castle Antonia: Acts xxi. 84, 37; xxii. 24; xxiii. 10, 
16, 32. 3. an army in line of battle: Heb. xi. 34; 
Rev. xx. 9 [here A. V.camp], (Ex. xiv. 19, 20; Judg. iv. 
16; viii. 11; 1S. xiv. 16; very often in Polyb. ; Ael. v.h. 
14,46). Often in Sept. for 73M, which signifies both 
camp and army; freq. in both senses in 1 Mace.; cf. 
Grimm on 1 Macc. iii. 3.* 

παρ-εν-οχλέω, -@; (see ἐνοχλέω) ; to cause trouble in a 
matter (παρά equiv. to παρά τινι πράγματι), to trouble, 
annoy: τινί, Acts xv. 19. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Epict., Lcian., al.) * 

παρ-επί-δημος, -ov, (see ἐπιδημέω), prop. one who comes 
Jom a foreign country into a city or land to reside there 
by the side of the natives; hence strangers sojourning in a 
strange place, a foreigner, (Polyb. 32, 22,4; Athen. 5 
p-196a.); inthe N. T. metaph. in ref. to heaven as the 
native country, one who sojourns on earth: so of Chris- 
tians, 1 Pet. i. 1; joined with πάροικοι, 1 Pet. ii. 11, cf. 
i. 17, (Christians πατρίδας οἰκοῦσιν ἰδίας, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς πάροικοι" 
μετέχουσι πάντων ὡς πολῖται, καὶ πάνθ᾽ ὑπομένουσιν ὡς 
ξένοι: πᾶσα ξένη πατρίς ἐστιν αὐτῶν, καὶ πᾶσα πατρὶς ξένη, 
Ep.ad Diogn.c.5); of the patriarchs, ξένοι κι παρεπίδημοι 
ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Heb. xi. 13 (Gen. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 
13; παρεπιδημία tis ἐστιν ὁ Bios, Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3, 
where see Fischer).* 

παρτέρχομαι ; fut. παρελεύσομαι ; pf. παρελήλυθα ; 2 aor. 
παρῆλθον, 3 pers. impv. παρελθάτω (Mt. xxvi. 39 L T Tr 
WH; see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly 
for 73}; 1. (παρά past [cf. παρά, IV. 1]) to go past, 
pass by ; a. prop. a. of persons moving forward: 
to pass by, absol. Lk. xviii. 37; τινά, to go past one, Mk. 
vi.48; w.an acc. of place, Acts xvi. 8 (Hom. Il. 8, 239; 
Xen. an. 4, 2, 12; Plat. Alc. 1 p. 123 b.); διὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ 
ἐκείνης. Mt. viii. 28. B. of time: Mt. xiv. 15; ὁ παρε- 
ληλυθὼς χρόνος [ A. V. the time past], 1 Pet. iv. 3, (Soph., 
Isocr., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.); of an act continuing for 
a time [viz. the Fast], Acts xxvii. 9. (rà παρελθόντα 
and τὰ ἐπιόντα are distinguished in Ael. v.h.14,6.) ^ b. 
metaph. a. (o pass away, perish: ὡς ἄνθος, Jas. i. 10 ; 
ὁ οὐρανός, Mt. v. 18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xvi. 17; 
xxi. 33; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Rev. xxi. 1 Rec.; ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, 
Mt. xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30 sq.; Lk. xxi. 32; οἱ λόγοι pov, 


Mt. xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xxi. 33; rà ἀρχαῖα ma- | 
ρῆλθεν, 2 Co. v. 17, (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 36; Dan. vii. 14 | 


Theodot.; Sap.ii.4; v. 9; Dem. p. 291, 12; Theocr. 27, 
8). Here belongs also Mt. v. 18 (*not even the small- 
est part shall pass away from the law,’ i.e. so as no longer 
to belong to it). B. to pass by ( pass over), i. e. to neg- 


488 





παρηγορία 


lect, omit, (transgress): w. an ace. of the thing, Lk. xi. 
42; xv. 29, (Deut. xvii. 2; Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 18; Judith 
xi. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 22; Διὸς νόον, Hes. theog. 613; νόμον, 
Lys. p. 107, 52; Dem. p. 977, 14). y- to be led by, to 
be carried past, be averted: ἀπό twos, from one i. 6. so 
as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2) ; παρελθάτω 
ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ τὸ ποτήριον, Mt. xxvi. 39; παρελθεῖν, 42 [here G 
T Tr WH om. L br. ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ]; dz αὐτοῦ ἡ Spa, Mk. xiv. 
35. 2. (παρά to [οἷ. mapa, IV. 1]) to come near, 
come forward, arrive: Lk. xii. 37; xvii. 7; Acts xxiv. 
7 Rec. (and in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down). 
[S¥YN. see παραβαίνω, fin. Comp. ἀντι-παρέρχομαι. * 
πάρεσις, -ews, 7), (παρίημι, 4. V-), pretermission, passing 
over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : διὰ τὴν mapeow 
εν dvox τοῦ θεοῦ, because God had patiently let pass 
the sins committed previously (to the expiatory death of 
Christ), i.e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so 
man’s conception of his holiness was in danger of be- 
coming dim, if not extinct), Ro. iii. 25, where cf. Fritz- 
sche; [Trench $ xxxiii. (Hippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].* 
παρέχω; impf. παρεῖχον, 3 pers. plur. παρεῖχαν (Acts 
xxviii. 2L T Tr WH; see ἔχω, init., and ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ; 
fut. 3 pers. sing. παρέξει (Lk. vii. 4 RG; see below); 2 
aor. 3 pers. plur. παρέσχον, ptep. παρασχών ; Mid., [pres. 
παρέχομαι) ; impf. παρειχόμην ; fut. 2 pers. sing. παρέξῃ 
(Lk. vii. 4 L'T Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Plautus's prae- 
hibeo i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the Grk. παραί [but see 
Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. παρά, IV. 1 fin.)]) ; i. e. a. 
to reach forth, offer: τί τινι, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show, 
afford, supply: τινὶ ἡσυχίαν, Acts xxii. 2; φιλανθρωπίαν, 
Acts xxviii. 2; πάντα, 1 Tim. vi. 17. ὁ c. to be the 
author of, or to cause one to have; to give, bring, cause, 
one something — either unfavorable: κόπους, Mt. xxvi. 
10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi 17 (map. 
πόνον, Sir. xxix. 4; ἀγῶνα, Is. vii. 135 πράγματα, very often 
fr. Hdt. down; also ὄχλον, see Passow s. v. ὄχλος, 35 [L. 
and S. s. v. II.]) ; — or favorable : ἐργασίαν, Acts xvi. 10, 
and Lehm. in xix. 24; πίστιν, [A. V. to give assurance], 
Acts xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexic. 
N. T. pp. 37-39 ; i. q. to occasion (ζητήσεις, see οἰκονομία), 
l'lim.i.4. Mid. 1. to offer, show, or present one's 
self: with ἑαυτόν added (W. § 38, 6; [B. $135, 67), w. 
an acc. of the predicate, τύπον, a pattern, Tit. ii. 7; παρά- 
Sevypa... τοιόνδε ἑαυτὸν παρείχετο, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39; 
(Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 15, 4]; in the act., Plut. puer. educ. c. 
20 init. 2. to exhibit or offer on one's own part: τὰ 
δίκαιον τοῖς δούλοις, Col. iv. 1; to render or afford from 
one’s own resources or by one's own power: τινί τι, Lk. 
vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec., παρέξει, it must be 
taken as the 3d pers. sing. of the fut. act. [in opp. to W. 
813, 2a.], the elders being introduced as talking among 
themselves; but undoubtedly the reading παρέξη should 
be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad- 
dressing Jesus; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [and on the construe- 
tion, cf. B. 8 139, 32]). On the mid. of this verb, cf. 
Kriiger §52, 8,2; W.$38, 5 end; [ Ellic. and Lghtft. on. 
Col. u. s.].* 
παρηγορία, -as, 7, (mapyyopew [to address]), prop. an 


παρθενία 


addressing, address; i. 6. a. exhortation (4 Macc. 
v.11; vi. 1; Apoll. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace, 
relief, alleviation, consolation: Col. iv.11 [where see Bp. 
Lghtft.]. (Aeschyl. Ag. 95; Philo, q. deus immort. $14; 
de somn. i. § 18; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 3; often in Plut. ; 
Hierocl)* * 

παρθενία, -as, 7, (παρθένος), virginity: Lk.ii.36. (Jer. 
iii. 4; Pind., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Plut., Hdian., al. [cf. 
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.].) * 

παρθένος, -ov, ἡ; 1. a virgin: Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is. 
vii. 14); xxv. 1, 7, 11; Lk.i.27; Acts xxi.9; 1 Co. vii. 
25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 13213, 
several times for 773; twice for mo oy i. e. either a 
marriageable maiden, or a young (married) woman, Gen. 
xxiv. 43; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word cf. besides 
Gesenius, Thes. p. 1037, Credner, Beitrüge u.s.w. ii. p. 
197 sqq.; παρθένος of a young bride, newly married wo- 
man, Hom. Il. 2, 514) ; ἡ παρθ. τινός, one's marriageable 
daughter, 1 Co. vii. 36 sqq. ; παρθ. ἁγνή, a pure virgin, 
2: Co. xi. 2. 2. a man who has abstained from all 
uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so 
has kept his chastity: Rev. xiv. 4, where see De Wette. 
In eccl. writ. one who has never had commerce with women 
so of Joseph, in Fabricius, Cod. pseudepigr. Vet. Test. ii. 
pp. 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a. 
and 2450 b.]; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus, 
metaph. ev. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xix. 26), ἠνίδε παρθένον 
via." 

Ilápos, -ov, ὁ, « Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a 
district of Asia, bounded on the N. by Hyrcania, on the 
E. by Ariana, on the S. by Carmania Deserta, on the W. 
by Media; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of 
Parthia. [B.D.s. v. Parthians; Geo. Rawlinson, Sixth 
Great Oriental Monarchy, ete. (Lond. 1873).]* 

παρ-ίημι : 2 aor. inf. παρεῖναι (Lk. xi. 42 L T Tr WH); 
pf. pass. ptep. παρειμένος ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to let 
pass; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ. fr. 
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit: ri, Lk. 
xi. 42 [R G ἀφιέναι] (ἁμαρτήματα, to pass over, let go un- 
punished, Sir. xxiii. 2; [τιμωρίαν, Lycurg.148,41]). 2. 
to relax, loosen, let go, [see παρά, IV. 2], (e. g. a bow); 
pf. pass. ptep. παρειμένος, relaxed, unstrung, weakened, 
exhausted, (Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : χεῖρες, Heb. xii. 
12; Sir. ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31; 
ἀργοὶ καὶ παρειμένοι ἐπὶ ἔργον ἀγαθόν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
34, 4 cf. 1. Cf. παραλύω." 

παρ-ιστάνω, see παρίστημι. 

παρ-ίστημι and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro. 
vi. 13, 16) παριστάνω; fut. παραστήσω; 1 aor. παρέστησα; 
2 aor. παρέστην ; pf. παρέστηκα, ptep. παρεστηκώς and 
παρεστώς ; plupf. 3 pers. plur. παρειστήκεισαν (Acts i. 10 
[WH παριστ.:; see ἵστημι, init.]) ; 1 fut. mid. παραστή- 
σομαι; fr. Hom. down. 1. The pres., impf., fut. 
and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for 
VOM), a. to place beside or near [mapd, IV. 1]; 
to set at hand; to present; to proffer; to provide: κτήνη, 
Acts xxiii. 24 (σκάφη, 2 Mace. xii. 3); twa or τί τινι, 
to place a person or thing at one’s disposal, Mt. xxvi. 


489 








παροικέω 


53; to present a person for another to see and question, 
Acts xxiii. 335 lo present or show, τινά or τί with an ace. 
of the quality which the person or thing exhibits: οἷς 
παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, Acts i. 3; add, Ro. vi. 13, 16, 
19; 2 Co. xi.2; Eph. v. 27; 2 Tim. ii. 15, (“te vegetum - 
nobis in Graecia siste," Cie. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) ; τινά with 
a pred. acc. foll. by κατενώπιόν τινος, Col. i. 22; ἑαυτὸν ὥς 
[ὡσεί] τινά τινι, Ko. vi. 135 to bring, lead to, in the sense 
of presenting, without a dat.: Acts ix. 41; Col. i. 28. 
of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God: τὰ σώματα 
ὑμῶν θυσίαν ...7@ θεῷ, Ro. xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. : 
Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Joseph. antt. 4, 6,4; Leian. deor. concil. 
13; Lat. admoveo, Verg. Aen. 12, 171; sisto, Stat. Theb. 
4, 445) ; τινὰ (a first-born) τῷ κυρίῳ, Lk. ii. 22; to bring 
to, bring near, metaphorically, i.e. to bring into one’s fel- 
lowship or intimacy: τινὰ τῷ θεῷ, 1 Co. viii. 8; 56. τῷ θεῷ, 
2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present (show) by argument, to. 
prove: τί, Acts xxiv. 13 (Epict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foll. by 
πῶς, id. 2, 26, 4; τινί τι, Xen. oec. 13,1; τινί, ὅτι, Jo- 
seph. antt. 4, 3, 2; de vita sua § 6). 2. Mid. and 
pf, plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (Sept. 
chiefly for ty, also for 3X3), to stand beside, stand by 
or near, to be at hand, be present ; a. univ. to stand 
by: τινί, to stand beside one, Xctsi. 105 ix. 39; xxiii. 2; 
xxvii. 23; 6 παρεστηκώς, a by-stander, Mk. xiv. 47, 69. 
[here T Tr WH zapearócw]; xv. 35 [here Tdf. zape- 
στώτων, WH mre. ἑστηκότων]. 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg. 
Tr mrg. παρεστώτων] ; 6 παρεστώς, Mk. xiv. 70; Jn. xix. 
26 [here anarthrous]. b. to appear: w. a pred. 
nom. foll. by ἐνώπιόν twos, Acts iv. 10 [ A. V. stand here]; 
before a judge, Καίσαρι, Acts xxvii. 24; mid. τῷ Bnuare 
τοῦ θεοῦ [RG Χριστοῦ], Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at 
hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [ A. V. 
stood up] (fr. Ps. ii. 2) ; to be at hand for service, of ser- 
vants in attendance on their master (Lat. appareo), τινί, 
Esth. iv. 5; ἐνώπιόν τινος, 1 K. x. 8; ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, of 
a presence-angel [A. V. that stand in the presence of 
God], Lk. i. 19, cf. Rev. viii. 2; absol oí παρεστῶτες, 
them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24; with αὐτῷ added (viz. 
the high-priest), Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to 
help, to succor, (Germ. beistehen) : τινί, Ro. xvi. 2; 2 Tim. 
iv. 17, (Hom. 1]. 10, 290; Hes. th. 439; Arstph. vesp. 
1388; Xen.; Dem. p. 366, 20; 1120, 26, and in other au- 
thors). e. to be present; to have come: of time, Mk. 
ἵν. 29:0 

Tlappevds [ prob. contr. fr. Παρμενίδης ‘steadfast’; cf. W. 
103 (97)], aec. -àv [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Parmenas, one of 
the seven “deacons” of the primitive church at Jerusa- 
lem: Acts vi. 5.* 

πάροδος, -ov, 7j, (παρά, near by; ó8ós), a passing by or 
passage: ἐν παρόδῳ, in passing, [ A. V. by the way], 1 Co. 
xvi 7. (Thuc. 1, 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad 
Att. 5, 20, 2; Leian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) * 

παρ-οικέω, -@; 1 aor. παρῴκησα ; 1. prop. to dwell 
beside (one) or in one’s neighborhood [παρά, IV. 1]; to live 
near; (Xen., Thuc., Isocr., al.). 2. in the Scrip- 
tures fo be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn, 
(Sept. for 733, several times also for 35^ and 131) : foll 


παροικία 


by ἐν w. a dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 RL (Gen. xx. 1; 
xxi 34; xxvi 3; Ex. xii 40 cod. Alex.; Lev. xviii. 
3 [Ald.], ete.) ; w. an ace. of place, ibid. GT Tr WH 
(Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi. 4) ; eis w. acc. of place (in pregn. 
constr.; see eis, C. 2), Heb. xi. 9. (Metaph. and absol. 
to dwell on the earth, Philo de cherub. § 34 [ef. Clem. 
tom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lghtft. and Harnack ad loc. Syn. 
see karoikéo. ].)* 

παρ-οικία, -as, 7), (παροικέω, q. v.), a bibl. and eecl. word, 
a dwelling near or with one; hence a sojourning, dwelling 
in a strange land: prop. Acts xiii. 17 (2 Esdr. viii. 35; 
Ps. exix. (exx.) 5; Sap. xix. 10; Prol. of Sir. 21; cf. Fritz- 
sche on Judith v. 9). Metaph. the life of man here on 
earth, likened to a sojourning: 1 Pet. i. 17 (Gen. xlvii. 
9); see παρεπίδημος [and reff. under παροικέω ].* 

πάρ-οικος, -ov, (παρά and οἶκος) ; 1. in class. Grk. 
dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a 
stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place without the 
right of citizenship; [R. V. sojourner]; Sept. for 3a and 
AWIN (see παροικέω 2, and παροικία, [and ef. Schmidt, Syn. 
43, 5; L.and S. s. v.]) : foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Acts 
vii. 6, 29; metaph. without citizenship in God's kingdom : 
joined with ξένος and opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. 19 
(μόνος κύριος ὁ θεὸς πολίτης ἐστί, πάροικον δὲ καὶ ἐπήλυτον 
τὸ γενητὸν ἅπαν, Philo de cherub. $34 [cf. Mangey i. 161 
note]); one who lives on earth as a stranger, a sojourner 
on the earth: joined with παρεπίδημος (q. v-), of Chris- 
tians, whose fatherland is heaven, 1 Pet.ii.11. [Cf. Ep. 
ad Diognet. $5, 5.]* 

παροιμία, -as, 7, (mapa by, aside from [ef. παρά, IV. 2], 
and oipos way), prop. a saying out of the usual course or 
deviating from the usual manner of speaking [ef. Suidas 
654, 15; but Hesych. s. v. et al. ‘a saying heard by the 
wayside’ (παρά, IV. 1), i. e. a current or trite saying, prov- 
erb; οἵ. Curtius $611; Steph. Thes. s. v.], hence ἘΞ 
a clever and sententious saying, a proverb, (Aeschyl. Ag. 
264; Soph., Plat., Aristot., Plut., ἃ]. ; exx. fr. Philo are 
given by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien, p. 292 sq. [as de 
ebriet. § 20; de Abr. § 40; de vit. Moys. i. § 28; ii. $5; 
de exsecrat. § 6]; for own in Prov. i. 1; xxv. 1 cod. 
Alex.; Sir. vi. 35, ete.) : τὸ τῆς παροιμίας, what is in the 
proverb (Leian. dial. mort. 6, 2; 8,1), 2 Pet.ii. 22. 2. 
any dark saying which shadows forth some didactic truth, 
esp. a symbolic or figurative saying : παροιμίαν λέγειν, Jn. 
xvi. 29; ἐν παροιμίαις λαλεῖν, ibid. 25; speech or discourse 
in which a thing is illustrated by the use of similes and 
comparisons; an allegory, i.e. extended and elaborate 
metaphor: Jn. x. 6.* 

Táp-owos, -ov, a later Grk. word for the earlier παρ- 
otvios, (παρά [q. v. IV. 1] and οἶνος, one who sits long at 
his wine), given to wine, drunken: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i. 
7; [al. give it the secondary sense, *quarrelsome over 
wine’; hence, brawling, abusive ].* 

παρ-οίχομαι: pf. ptep. παρῳχημένος ; to go by, pass by: 
as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 10, 252 down, of time, Acts 
xiv. 10." 

παρ-ομοιάζω; (fr. παρόμοιος, and this fr. παρά [q. v. IV. 
1 (?)] and ὅμοιος); to be like; to be not unlike: Mt. xxiii. 


490 





παρουσία 


27RGTTrmrg. WH txt. (Several times also in eccl. 
writ.) * 

παρόμοιος, -ov, (also of three term. [see ὅμοιος, init.]), 
like: Mk. vii. 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13. (Hdt., 
Thue., Xen., Dem., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 

παρ-οξύνω : prop. to make sharp, to sharpeh, [mapa, IV. 
3]: τὴν μάχαιραν, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always 
in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thue., Xen., down), a. lo 
stimulate, spur on, urge, (πρός τι, ἐπί τι). b. to irri- 
tate, provoke, rouse to anger; Pass., pres. παροξύνομαι; 
impf. παρωξυνόμην : Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. 5. Sept. 
chiefly for yW3 to scorn, despise; besides for DI to 
provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18; Ps. ev. (evi.) 29; Is. 
Ixv. 35 for zrxpn to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, etc.; pass. 
for nn to burn with anger, Hos. viii. 5; Zech. x. 3, and 
for other verbs.* 

παροξυσμός, -oD, 6, (παροξύνω, q. v.) ; 1. an incit- 
ing, incitement: els map. ἀγάπης [.A. V. to provoke unto 
love], Heb. x. 24. 2. irritation, [R. V. contention]: 
Acts xv. 39; Sept. twice for ¥p, violent anger, passion, 
Deut. xxix. 28; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 37; Dem. p. 1105, 
24.* 

map-opy(to; Attic fut. [cf. B. 37 (32) ; WH. App. 163] 
παροργιῶ ; to rouse to wrath, to provoke, exasperate, anger, 
[ef. παρά, IV. 3]: Ro. x. 19; Eph. vi.4; and Lehm. in 
Col.iii.21. (Dem. p. 805, 19; Philo de somn. ii. § 26; 
Sept. chiefly for 5'y27.) * 

παρ-οργισμός, -ov, ὁ, (παροργίζω), indignation, exasper- 
ation, wrath: Eph. iv. 26. (1 K. xv. 30; 2K. xxiii. 26; 
Neh. ix. 18; [Jer. xxi. 5 Alex.]; not found in prof. auth.) 
[Syn. ef. Trench ὃ xxxvii.]* 

παρτοτρύνω: 1 aor. παρώτρυνα; [ὀτρύνω to stir up (cf. 
παρά, TV. 3) ]; to incite, stir up : τινά, Acts xiii. 50. (Pind. 
Ol. 3, 68; Joseph. antt. 7, 6, 1; Leian. deor. concil. 4.) * 

παρ-ουσία, -as, 7, (παρών, -oUca, -óv, fr. πάρειμι q. V-), 
in Grk. auth. fr. the Tragg., Thuc., Plat, down; not 
found in Sept. ; 1. presence: 1 Co. xvi. 17; 2 Co. 
x. 10; opp. to ἀπουσία, Phil. ii. 12 (2 Mace. xv. 21; [Ar- 
istot. phys. 2, 3 p. 195*, 14; metaphys. 4, 2 p. 1018", 14; 
meteor. 4, 5 p. 882", 33 ete.]). 2. the presence of 
one coming, hence the coming, arrival, advent, ([ Polyb. 
3, 41,1. 8]; Judith x. 18; 2 Macc. viii. 12; [Herm. sim. 
5,5,3]): 2Co. vii. 6sq.; 2 Th. ii. 9 (ef. 8 ἀποκαλυφθήσε- 
ται); ἡ - - - πάλιν πρός twa, of a return, Phil. i. 26. In 
the N. T. esp. of the advent, i. e. the future, visible, return 
from heaven of Jesus, the Messiah, to raise the dead, 
hold the last judgment, and set up formally and glorious- 
ly the kingdom of God: Mt. xxiv. 3; ἡ παρ. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
ἀνθρώπου, [27], 37, 39 ; τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Th. iii. 135 iv. 155 v. 
23; 2 Th.ii.1; Jas. v. 7 sq. ; 2 Pet. iii. 4; Χριστοῦ, 2 Pet. 
i. 16; αὐτοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 23; [1 Th. ii. 19]; 2 Th. ii. 8; 2 
Pet. iii. 4; [1 Jn. ii. 28]; τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμέρας, 2 Pet. iii. 12. 
It is called in eccles. writ. ἡ δευτέρα παρουσία, Ev. Nicod. 
c. 22 fin.; Justin. apol. 1, 52 [where see Otto's note]; 
dial. c. Tr. cc. 40, 110, 121; and is opp. to ἡ πρώτη παρ. 
which took place in the incarnation, birth, and earthly 
career of Christ, Justin. dial. c. Tr. ec. 52, 121, cf. 14, 32, 
49, ete. ; [cf.Ignat.ad Phil. 9 (and Lghtft.)]; see £Aevais.* 


παροψίς 


παρ-οψίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (παρά [q. v. IV. 1], and ὄψον, on 
which see ὀψάριον) ; 1. a side-dish, a dish of dain- 
ties or choice food suited not so much to satisfy as to gratify 
the appetite; a side-accompaniment of the more solid food ; 
hence i. q. παρόψημα; so in Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4 and many 
Attic writ. in Athen. 9 p.267 d. sq. 2. the dish itself 
in which the delicacies are served up : Mt. xxiii. 25, 26 [here 
T om. WH br. zapoy-.]; Artem. oneir. 1, 74; Alciphr. 3, 
20; Plut. de vitand. aere alien. §2. This latter use of 
the word is condemned by the Atticists ; cf. Sturz, Lex. 
Xen. iii. 463 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 176; [Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 265 sq.]; Poppo on Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.* 

παρρησία, -as, 7, (πᾶν and ῥῆσις; cf. ἀρρησία silence, 
κατάρρησις accusation, πρόρρησις prediction) ; als 
freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Eur., 
Plat, Dem., al.): ἡ z. τινός, Acts iv. 13; χρῆσθαι παρ- 
ρησίᾳ, 2 Co. iii. 12; παρρησίᾳ adverbially,— freely: λαλεῖν, 
Jn. vii. 13, 26; xviii. 20; — openly, frankly, i. e. without 
concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14; — without ambi- 
guity or cireumlocution: εἰπὲ ἡμῖν παρρησίᾳ (Philem. ed. 
Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24; — without the use of figures 
and comparisons, opp. to ἐν παροιμίαις : Jn. xvi. 25, and 
RG in 29 (where L T Tr WH ἐν παρρησίᾳ); ἐν παρρησίᾳ, 
freely, Eph. vi. 19; μετὰ παρρησίας, Acts xxviii. 31; εἰπεῖν, 
Acts ii. 29; λαλεῖν, Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and 
fearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance, 
(1 Mace. iv. 18; Sap. v. 1; Joseph. antt. 9, 10, 4; 15, 2, 
7; [ef. W. 23]) : Phil. i. 20 (opp. to αἰσχύνεσθαι, cf. Wie- 
singer ad loc.) ; ἐν πίστει, resting on, 1 Tim. iii. 13, cf. 
Huther ad loc.; ἔχειν παρρησίαν ets τι, Heb. x. 19 ; πολλή 
μοι (ἐστί) παρρ. πρὸς ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. vii. 4; of the confidence 
impelling one to do something, ἔχειν zapp. with an infin. 
of the thing to be done, Philem. 8 [ Test. xii. Patr., test. 
Rub. 4]; of the undoubting confidence of Christians rela- 
tive to their fellowship with God, Eph. iii. 12; Heb. iii. 
6; x. 35; pera παρρησίας, Heb. iv. 16 ; ἔχειν παρρησίαν, 
opp. to αἰσχύνεσθαι to be covered with shame, 1 Jn. ii. 
28; before the judge, 1 Jn. iv. 17; with πρὸς τὸν θεόν 
added, 1 Jn. iii. 21; v. 14. 3. the deportment by 
which one becomes conspicuous or secures publicity (Philo 
de victim. offer. § 12) : ἐν παρρησίᾳ, before the public, in 
view of all, Jn. vii. 4 (opp. to ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ) ; xi. 54 [with- 
out év]; Col. ii. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lehtft.].* 

παρρησιάζομαι ; impf. ἐπαρρησιαζόμην ; 1 aor. ἐπαρρη- 
σιασάμην ; (παρρησία, q- v.) ; a depon. verb; Vulg. chiefly 
Jiducialiter ago; to bear one's self boldly or confident- 
ly; 1. to use freedom in speaking, be Jfree-spokens to 
speak freely (LA. V. boldly]) : Acts xviii. 26; xix. 8; ἐν 
τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts 
ix. 27, 28 (29) ; alsoézi τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts xiv. 3. 2. to 
grow confident, have boldness, show assurance, assume a 
bold bearing: εἰπεῖν, Acts xiii. 46 [R. V. spake out boldly]; 
λαλεῖν, Acts xxvi. 26; παρρησ.. ἔν τινι, in reliance on one 
to take courage, foll. by an inf. of the thing to be done: 
λαλῆσαι, Eph. vi. 20; 1 Th.ii. 2. (Xen., Dem., Aeschin., 
Polyb., Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 11.) * 

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. 
Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι 


491 





πᾶς 


five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; 
Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -o fourteen times, -guv 
sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 73, [fr. 
Hom. down], all, every; it is used 

I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous 
nouns ; a. any, every one (sc. of the class denoted 
by the noun annexed to was); with the Singular: as 
πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH 
Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v. 11; xv. 13; 
Lk.iv.37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Actsii43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 
11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα 
ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα avOp. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. 
p. 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; πᾶς 
λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 
21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class 
indicated by the noun: as πάντες ἄνθρωποι, Acts xxii. 15; 
Ro. v. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 19; závres 
ἅγιοι, Ro. xvi. 15 ; πάντες ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, Heb. i. 6; πάντα 
[LT Tr WH ra] ἔθνη, Rev. xiv. 8; on the phrase πᾶσα 
σάρξ, see σάρξ, 3. b. any and every, of every kind, 
[ A. V. often all manner of ]: πᾶσα νόσος καὶ μαλακία, Mt. 
iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1 ; εὐλογία, blessings of every kind, Eph. 
1.3; soesp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo- 
tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in 
which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or 
any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the 
noun belongs:— thus, πᾶσα ἐλπίς, Acts xxvii. 20; σοφία, 
Acts vii. 22; Col. i. 28 ; γνῶσις, Ro. xv. 14 ; ἀδικία, ἀσέβεια, 
etc., Ro. i. 18, 29; 2 Co.x. 6; Eph. iv. 19,31; v.3; σπουδή, 
2 Co. viii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 5; ἐπιθυμία, Ro. vii. 8; χαρά, Ro. 
xv. 13; αὐτάρκεια, 2 Co. ix. 8; ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ x. γνώσει, 
1 Co. i. 5; σοφίᾳ x. φρονήσει ete. Eph. 1.8; ἐν z. ἀγαθω- 
σύνῃ x. δικαιοσύνῃ, k. ἀληθείᾳ, Eph. v. 9; αἰσθήσει, Phil. i. 
9; ὑπομονή, θλίψις, etc., 2 Co. i. 4; xii. 12; add, Col. i. 
9—115:un.165 ὉΠ. 15 119 10 9.1 T' Imo 15:65 ee vto 
2 Tim. iv. 2; Tit. ii. 15 (on which see ἐπιταγή); iii. 2; 
Jas.i.21; 1 Pet.ii. 1; v. 10 ; πᾶσα δικαιοσύνη, i. e. ὃ ἂν ἢ 
δίκαιον, Mt. iii. 15; πᾶν θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, everything God 
wills, Col. iv. 12; πᾶσα ὑποταγή, obedience in all things, 
1 Tim. ii. 11; πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ, consciousness of 
rectitude in all things, Acts xxiii.1;—or it signifies the 
highest degree, the maximum, of the thing which the noun 
denotes [cf. W. 110 (105 sq.); Ellicott on Eph. i. 8; 
Meyer on Phil. i. 20; Kriiger § 50, 11, 9 and 10]: as 
pera πάσης παρρησίας, Acts iv. 29; xxviii. 315; μετὰ πάσ. 
ταπεινοφροσύνης, Acts xx. 19; προθυμίας, Acts xvii. 11; 
χαρᾶς, Phil. ii. 29, cf. Jas. i. 2; ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, Acts 
v.23; ἐν παντὶ φόβῳ, 1 Pet. ii. 18; πᾶσα ἐξουσία, Mt. 
xxviii. 18, (πᾶν κράτος, Soph. Phil. 142). c. the 
whole (all, Lat. totus): so before proper names of coun- 
tries, cities, nations; as, πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mt. ii. 3; πᾶς 
Ἰσραήλ, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as πᾶς οἶκος 
Ἰσραήλ, Acts ii. 36; πᾶσα κτίσις (see κτίσις, 2 b.); πᾶσα 
γραφή (nearly equiv. to the ὅσα προεγράφη in Ro. xv. 4), 
2 Tim. iii. 16 (ef. Rothe, Zur Dogmatik, p. 181) ; πᾶσα 
γερουσία υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, Ex. xii. 21; πᾶς ἵππος Φαραώ, Ex. 
xiv. 23; πᾶν δίκαιον ἔθνος, Add. to Esth. i. 9; by a some- 
what rare usage before other substantives also, as [πᾶν 


πᾶς 


πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς, Acts xvil. 26 LT Tr WH]; πᾶσα 
οἰκοδομή. Eph. ii. 21 GL T Tr WH, cf. Harless ad loc. 
p. 262 [al. find no necessity here for resorting to this ex- 
ceptional use, but render (with R. V.) each several build- 
ing (cf. Meyer)]; πᾶν τέμενος, 3 Mace. i. 13 (where see 
Grimm) ; Παύλου . . . ὃς ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ μνημονεύει ὑμῶν, 
Ienat. ad Eph. 12 [(yet cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]; cf. Passow 
s. v. πᾶς, 2; [L.and S. s. v. A. II.]; W.§ 18,4; [B.§ 127, 
29]; Krüger $50, 11, 8to 11; Kühner ii. 545 sq. 2: 
with nouns which have the article, a// the, the whole, (see 
c. just above) : — with the Singular; as, πᾶσα ἡ ἀγέλη, 
the whole herd, Mt. viii. 32; πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος, Mt. xiii. 2; πᾶς 
ὁ κόσμος, Ro. iii. 19; Col. i. 6; πᾶσα ἡ πόλις (i. e. all its 
inhabitants), Mt. viii. 34; xxi. 10, etc. ; πᾶσα ἡ '"IovOata, 
Mt. iii. 5 ; add, Mt. xxvii. 25; Mk. v. 33; Lk.i. 10; Acts 
wits 14: χ' ὃ. xx.9850xx1-55 Eo: IV. 10. ἘΚ 10, 
xiii. 2 (πίστιν καὶ γνῶσιν in their whole compass and ex- 
tent); Eph. iv. 16; Col.i. 19; ii. 9, 19; Phil.i.3; Heb. 
ii. 15; Rev. v.6, etc.; the difference between πᾶσα ἡ θλίψις 
[all] and πᾶσα θλίψις [any] appears in 2 Co. i. 4. πᾶς 
6 Aaós οὗτος, Lk. ix. 13; πᾶσαν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἐκείνην, Mt. 
xviii. 32; was placed after the noun has the force of a 
predicate: τὴν κρίσιν πᾶσαν δέδωκε, the judgment he hath 
given wholly [cf. W. 548 (510)], Jn. v. 22; τὴν ἐξουσίαν 
_ ++. πᾶσαν ποιεῖ, Rev. xiii. 12; it is placed between the 
article and noun [B. $127, 29; W. 549 (510)], as róv 
πάντα χρόνον, i. e. always, Acts xx. 18; add, Gal. v. 14; 
1 Tim.i.16 [here L T Tr WH ἅπας]; — with a Plural, 
all (the totality of the persons or things designated by the 
noun): πάντας τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς, Mt. ii. 4; add, Mt. iv. 8; 
xi. 13; Mk. iv. 13; vi. 33; Lk.i. 6, 48; Acts x. 12, 43; 
Ro.i.5; xv.11; 1 Co. xii. 26; xv. 25 ; 2 Co. viii. 18, and 
very often; with a demonstr. pron. added, Mt. xxv. 7; 
Lk. ii. 19, 51 [here T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the pron.] ; 
πάντες is placed after the noun: τὰς πόλεις πάσας, the cities 
all (of them) [cf. W. τι. s.], Mt. ix. 35; Acts viii. 40; add, 
Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 35 [here L Tr WH txt. πάντων τῶν 
ete.]; xii. 7; Acts viii. 40; xvi.26; Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. vii. 
172. χ 1; x11. 25 xv. 7, πνὶ, 205 2 (ὐἷἦδ᾽ παῖ ὦ, 12 {18}; 
Phil. 1. 18; 1 Th.v. 26; 2 Tim. iv. 21 [WH ὃν: z.]; Rev. 
viii. 3; οἱ πάντες foll. by a noun, Acts xix. 7; xxvii. 37; 
τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας ᾿Ιουδαίους, Acts xxi. 21 [here L 
om. Tr br. z.]. 

II. without a substantive; 1. mase. and fem. 
every one, any one : in the singular, without any addition, 
Mk. ix. 49; Lk. xvi. 16; Heb. ii. 9; foll. by a rel. pron., 
πᾶς ὅστις, Mt. vii. 24; x. 32; πᾶς ὅς, Mt. xix. 29 [LT Tr 
WH ὅστις]; Gal. iii. 10; πᾶς os dv (ἐάν Tr WH), whoso- 
ever, Acts ii. 21; mas ἐξ ὑμῶν ὅς, Lk. xiv. 33; witha 
ptep. which has not the article [W. 111 (106)]: παντὸς 
ἀκούοντος (if any one heareth, whoever he is), Mt. xiii. 19; 


παντὶ ὀφείλοντι ἡμῖν, every one owing (if he owe) us any- | 


thing, unless ὀφείλοντι is to be taken substantively, every 
debtor of ours, Lk. xi. 4; with a ptep. which has the ar- 
ticle and takes the place of a relative clause [W. u.s.]: 
πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος, every one that is angry, Mt. v. 22; add, 
Mt. vii.8; Lk. vi.47; Jn. iii. 8, 20; vi.45; Acts x. 43 sq.; 
xii. 39; Ro. i. 16; ii. 10; xii. 3; 1 Co. ix. 25; xvi. 16; 


492 








πᾶς 


Gal. iii. 13; 1Jn. ii. 23; iii. 8 54. 6, ete. Plural πάντες, 
without any addition, all men: Mt. x. 22; Mk. xiii. 13; 
Lk. xx. 38; xxi. 17; Jn.i. 7; iii. 31* [in 31 G. T WH mrg. 
om. the cl.]; v.23; vi.45; xii. 32; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. x. 
12; 1 Co. ix. 19; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); Eph. iii. 9 [here T 
WH txt.om. L br. z.]; ofa certain definite whole: all 
(the people), Mt. xxi. 26; all (we who hold more liberal 
views), 1 Co. viii. 1; all (the members of the church), 
ibid. 7; by hyperbole i.q. the great majority, the mul- 
titude, Jn. iii. 26; all (just before mentioned), Mt. xiv. 
20; xxii. 27 sq.; xxvii. 22; Mk. i. 27 [here T TrWH 
ἅπαντες, 37; vi. 39, 42; [xi. 32 Lchm.]; Lk. i. 63; iv. 15; 
Jn. ii. 15, 24, and very often; [all (about to be men- 
tioned), διὰ πάντων sc. τῶν ἁγίων (as is shown by the foll. 
καὶ krA.), Acts ix. 32]. οἱ πάντες, all taken together, all 
collectively, [cf. W. 116 (110)]: of all men, Ro. xi. 32; 
of a certain definite whole, Phil. ii. 21; with the 1 pers. 
plur. of the verb, 1 Co. x. 17; Eph. iv. 13; with a definite 
number, in all [cf. B. $ 127, 29]: ἦσαν δὲ of πάντες ἄνδρες 
ὡσεὶ δεκαδύο (or δώδεκα), Acts xix. 7; ἤμεθα ai πᾶσαι 
ψυχαὶ διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ, Acts xxvii. 37, (ἐπ᾽ ἄνδρας 
τοὺς πάντας δύο, Judith iv. 7 ; ἐγένοντο οἱ πάντες ὡς τετρα- 
κόσιοι, Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 3; τοὺς πάντας εἰς δισχιλίους, 
id. 4, 7, 1; ὡς εἶναι τὰς πάσας δέκα, Ael. v. h. 12,35; see 
other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. πᾶς, 5 b.; [L. and 
S. s. v. C.]; “relinquitur ergo, ut omnia tria genera sint 
causarum," Cic. de invent. 1, 9) ; οἱ πάντες, all those I 
have spoken of, 1 Co. ix. 22; 2 Co. v. 14 (15). πάντες 
ὅσοι, all as many as, Mt. xxii. 10; Lk. iv. 40 [here Tr mrg. 
WH txt. dz.]; Jn. x. 8; Acts v. 36 sq.; πάντες οἱ w. a ptep., 
all (they) that: Mt. iv. 24; Mk. i. 32; Lk. ii. 18, 38; Acts 
ii. 44; iv.16; Ro.i. 7; x.12; 1. 00.1.2. 2.00.1. 1; Eph. 
vi.24; 1 Th. i. 7; 2 Th. i. 10; Heb. iii. 16; 2 Jn. 1; Rev. 
xiii. 8; xviii. 19, 24, and often. πάντες οἱ sc. ὄντες : Mt. 
v. 155; Lk. v. 9; Jn, v. 28; Actsii. 39; v. 17; xvi. 32; Ro. 
ix. 6; 2 Tim. i. 15; 1 Pet. v. 14, etc. πάντες with per- 
sonal and demonst. pronouns [compare W. 548 (510)]: 
ἡμεῖς πάντες, Jn. i. 16; Ro. viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 18; Eph. 11. 
8; πάντες ἡμεῖς, Acts ii. 32; x. 33; xxvi. 14; xxviii. 2; Ro. 
iv. 16; of πάντες ἡμεῖς, 2 Co. v. 10; ὑμεῖς πάντες, Acts xx. 
25; πάντες ὑμεῖς, Mt. xxiii. 8; xxvi. 31; Lk. ix. 48; Acts 
xxii. 3; Ro. xv. 33; 2 Co. vii. 15; [Gal. iii. 25 R GL 
WH]; Phil.i.4, 7sq.; 1 Th.i.2; 2 Th. iii. 16, 18; Tit. 
iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25, ete.; αὐτοὶ πάντες, 1 Co. xv. 10; πάντες 
αὐτοί, Acts iv. 33 ; xix. 17 ; xx. 36 ; οὗτοι πάντες, Acts i. 
14; xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 13, 39; πάντες [LT dz.] οὗτοι, Acts 
li. 7; of δὲ πάντες, and they all, Mk. xiv. 64. 2. 
Neuter πᾶν, everything, (anything) whatsoever ; a. 
in the Sing.: πᾶν τό. foll. by a ptep. [on the neut. in a con- 
crete and collective sense ef. B. § 128, 1], 1 Co. x. 25, 27; 
Eph. v. 13; 1 Jn. v. 4 ; πᾶν τό sc. ὄν, 1 Jn. ii. 16; πᾶν 6, 
Ro. xiv. 23; Jn. vi. 37, 39, [R. V. all that]; Jn. xvii. 2; 
πᾶν 6, τι av or ἐάν. whatsoever, Col. iii. 17, and Rec. in 23. 
Joined to prepositions it forms adverbial phrases: διὰ. 
παντός ΟΥ̓ διαπαντός, always, perpetually, see διά, A. IT. 1 
3.; ἐν παντί, either in every condition, or in every matter, 
Phil. iv. 6; 1 Th. v. 18; in everything, in every way, on 
every side, in every particular or relation, 2 Co. iv. 8; vii- 


“πᾶς 


5, 11, 16; xi. 6,9; Eph. v. 24; πλουτίζεσθαι, 1 Co. i. 5; 
[περισσεύειν], 2 Co. viii. 7; ἐν παντὶ καὶ ἐν πᾶσιν (see 
μυέω, b.), Phil. iv. 12. b. Plural πάντα (without the 
article [cf. W. 116 (110); Matthiae $438]) αἰ things; α. 
of a certain definite totality or sum of things, the con- 
text shewing what things are meant : Mk. iv. 34 ; vi. 30; 
Lk.i.3; [v.?28 L T Tr WH]; Jn.iv.25 [here T Tr WH 
áz.]; Ro. viii. 28; 2 Co. vi. 10; Gal. iv. 1; Phil. ii. 14; 
1 Th. v. 21; 2 Tim.ii. 10; Tit.i.15; 1Jn.ii. 27; πάντα 
ὑμῶν, all ye do with one another, 1 Co. xvi. 14; πάντα 
γίνεσθαι πᾶσιν, [ A. V. to become all things to all men], i. e. 
to adapt one's self in all ways to the needs of all, 1 Co. 
ix. 22 L T Tr WH (Rec. τὰ πάντα i. e. in all the ways pos- 
sible or necessary); cf. Kypke, Obs. ii. p. 215 sq. p. 
accusative πάντα [adverbially ], wholly, altogether, in all 
ways, in all things, in all respects: Acts xx. 35; 1 Co. ix. 
25; x. 335 xi. 2; cf. Matthiae $ 425,5; Passow ii. p. 764^; 
[L. and S. s. v. D. II. 4]. Ὑ. πάντα, in an absolute 
sense, all things that exist, all created things: Jn. i. 3; 
1 Co. ii. 10; xv. 27; Heb. ii. 8 (and L T Tr WH in iii. 
4); Eph. i. 22; Col.i.17; 1 Pet.iv.7; Rev. xxi. 5; (in 
' Ro. ix. 5 πάντων is more fitly taken as gen. masc. [but 
see the Comm. ad loc.]). 
(gen. neut.; Rec.zacàv), what commandment is first of 
all (things), Mk. xii. 28 (ἔφασκε λέγων κορυδὸν πάντων 
πρώτην ὄρνιθα γενέσθαι, προτέραν τῆς γῆς, Arstph. av. 472; 


PETI Y " , 
ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων 


τὰς πόλεις . . . ἐλευθεροῦν καὶ πάν των μάλιστα " Avravüpov, 
Thue. 4,52; cf. W.§ 27,6; [B.§150, 6; Green p. 109]; 
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 538). 8. with the article [cf. reff. 
in b. above], τὰ πάντα; αα. in an absolute sense, all 
things collectively, the totality of created things, the uni- 
verse of things: Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6; Eph. iii. 9; iv. 
10; Phil. iii. 21; Col. i. 16 sq.; Heb. i. 3; ii. 10; Rev. iv. 
11; τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσι πληροῦσθαι, to fill the universe of 
things in all places, Eph. i. 23 [ Rec. om. ra; but al. take 
ἐν m. here modally (see 6. below), al. instrumen- 
tally (see Meyer ad loc.) ]. BB. in a relative sense: 
Mk. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. ra] (the whole substance of saving 
teaching); Acts xvii. 25 [not Rec.*] (all the necessities 
of life) ; Ro. viii. 32 (all the things that he can give for 
our benefit) ; all intelligent beings [al. include things ma- 
terial also], Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 20; it serves by its univer- 
sality to designate every class of men, all mankind, [cf. W. 
§ 27,5; B. $128, 1], Gal. iii. 22 (cf. Ro. xi. 32); 1 Tim. 
vi. 13; εἶναι rà [T WH om. rà] πάντα, to avail for, be a 
substitute for, to possess supreme authority, kal ἐν πᾶσιν 
(i. e. either with all men or in the minds of all [al. take 
πᾶσιν as neut., cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]), Col. iii. 11 ; tva 
7 ὁ θεὸς rà [L Tr WH om. τὰ] πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν [neut. ace. 
to Grimm (as below) ], i. e. that God may rule supreme by 
his spiritual power working within all, ‘may be the im- 
manent and controlling principle of life,’ 1 Co. xv. 28, 
(so in prof. auth. πάντα or ἅπαντα without the article: 
πάντα ἦν ev τοῖσι Βαβυλωνίοισι Ζώπυρος, Hdt. 3, 157; cf. 
Herm. ad Vig. p. 727; other exx. fr. prof. auth. are given 
in Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 230 sq.; Palairet, Observv. p. 
407; cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1873, p. 394 sqq.); accus. [adverbially, cf. 8. above] rà 


493 








πάσχα 


πάντα, in all the parts [in which we grow (Meyer)], in all 
respects, Eph. iv. 15. The Article in τὰ πάντα refers— 
in 1 Co. xi. 12 to the things before mentioned (husband 
and wife, and their mutual dependence) ; in 2 Co. iv. 15 
to ‘all the things that befall me’; in 1 Co. xv. 27 sq.; 
Phil. iii. 8, to the preceding πάντα; in Col. iii. 8 τὰ πάντα 
serves to sum up what follows [W. 107 (102)]. €. 
πάντα τά foll. by a ptep. (see πᾶς, πάντες, II. 1 above) : 
Mt. xviii. 31; Lk. xii. 44; xvii. 10; xviii. 31; xxi. 22; 
xxiv.44; Jn.xviii. 4; Acts x. 33; xxiv. 14; Gal. iii. 10; 
τὰ πάντα Ww. ptep., Lk. ix. 7; Eph. v. 13; πάντα τά sc. ὄντα 
(see πᾶς, [πᾶν], πάντες, II. 1 and 2 above), Mt. xxiii. 20; 
Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; πάντα rà ὧδε, sc. ὄντα, Col. 
iv. 9; rà κατ᾽ ἐμέ, ibid. 7 [see κατά, II. 3 b.]. f. πάντα 
and rà πάντα with pronouns: rà ἐμὰ πάντα, Jn. xvii. 10; 
πάντα τὰ ἐμά, Lk. xv. 31; ταῦτα πάντα; these things all taken 
together [W.548 (510); Fritzsche on Mt. xxiv. 33,34; cf. 
Bornemann on Lk. xxi. 36; Lobeck, Paralip. p. 65]: Mt. 
iv.9; vi.33; xiii. 34,51; Lk. xii. 305 xvi. 14; xxi. 36 [g. τ. 
Lmrg.]; xxiv. 9 [Tdf. z. .]; Acts vii. 50; Ro. viii. 37; 
2 Pet. iii. 11; πάντα ravra, all these things [reff. as above]: 
Mt. vi. 32; xxiv. 8,33 [ T Tr txt. τ. 7.], 34 [ Trmrg. τ. 7.]; 
Lk. vii. 18; Acts xxiv. 8; 1 Co. xii. 11; Col. iii. 14; 1 Th. 
iv. 6; the reading varies also between z. τ. andr. z. in Mt. 
xix. 20; xxiii. 36; xxiv. 2; πάντα rà συμβεβηκότα ταῦτα, 
Lk. xxiv. 14; πάντα d, Jn.iv. [29 T WH Trmrg. (see next 
head)]; iv. 45 [here L Tr WH ὅσα (see next head) ]; v. 
20; Acts x.39; xiii. 39. T- πάντα ὅσα: Mt. vii. 12; 
xiii. 46; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Jn. iv. 29 [see ¢ 
above] 45L TrWH; x.41; xvi.15; xvii. 7; Acts iii. 22; 
7. ὅσα ἄν (or ἐάν), Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3; Mk. xi. 24[G L 
T Tr WHom. ἄν]; Acts iii. 22. 9. πάντα with prepo- 
sitions forms adverbial phrases: πρὸ πάντων, before or 
above all things [see πρό, 6.1, Jas. v.12; 1 Pet.iv.8. (But 
περὶ πάντων, 3 Jn. 2, must not be referred to this head, 
as though it signified above all things; it is rather as 
respects all things, and depends on εὔχομαι [apparently a 
mistake for εὐοδοῦσθαι; yet see περί, I. c. a.], cf. Lücke 
ad loc., 2d ed. p. 370 [3d ed. p. 462 sq.; Westcott ad 
loe]; W. 373 (350)). [on διὰ πάντων. Acts ix. 32, see 
1 above.] ἐν πᾶσιν, in all things, in all ways, altogether : 
1 im: ii. 11; iv. 15 [Reet]; 2 Lim: 11: 7; iv. 55 Dito. 
9; Heb. xiii. 4, 18; 1 Pet. iv. 11, [see also 2 a. fin. above]; 
ἐπὶ πᾶσιν, see ἐπί, D. 2 d. p. 233. κατὰ πάντα, in all re- 
spects: Acts xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20,22; Heb. ii. 17; iv. 15. 

III. with negatives; 1. ov πᾶς, not every 
one. 2. πᾶς οὐ (where ov belongs to the verb), no 
one, none, see ov, 2 p. 460°; πᾶς μή (so that μή must be 
joined to the verb), no one, none, in final sentences, Jn. 
iii. 15 sq.; vi. 39; xii. 46; 1Co.i. 29; w.an impv. Eph. 
iv. 29 (1 Mace. v. 42); mas. . . ov μή w. the aor. subjunc. 
(see pn, IV. 2), Rev. xviii. 22. 

πάσχα, τό, (Chald. smo9, Heb. moa, fr. r123 to pass 
over, to pass over by sparing; the Sept. also constant- 
ly use the Chald. form πάσχα, except in 2 Chron. [and 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 8] where it is φασέκ ; Josephus has 
φάσκα, antt. 5,1,45 14, 2, 1; 17, 9, 3; b. j. 2, 1, 3), aninde- 
clinable noun [ W. ὃ 10, 2]; prop. a passing over ; 1- 


πάσχω 


the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered 
for the people's deliverance of old from Egypt),or 2. 
the paschal lamb, i.e. the lamb which the Israelites were 
accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the 
month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory 
of that day on which their fathers, preparing to depart 
from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb, 
and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the 
destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their 
dwellings (Ex. xii. sq.; Num. ix.; Deut. xvi.) : θύειν τὸ m. 
(no»n onw), Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7, (Ex. xii. 21); 
Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Co. 
V. 7; φαγεῖν τὸ 7, Mt. xxvi. 17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14; Lk. 
xxii 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; moan 52w, 2 Chr. xxx. 17 
sq. 3. the paschal supper: ἑτοιμάζειν τὸ m., Mt. 
xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 8, 13 ; ποιεῖν τὸ 7. to cel- 
ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pas- 
chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the 
fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan: Mt. 
xxvi 2; Mk. xiv. 1; Lk. ii. 41; xxii. 1; Jn. ii. 18, 23; 
vi. 4; xi. 55; xii. 1; xiii.1; xviii. 39; xix.14; Acts xii. 
4; πεποίηκε τὸ m. he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Heb. 
xi. 28 [cf. W. 272 (256); B. 197 (170)]; γίνεται τὸ π. 
the Passover is celebrated [R. V. cometh], Mt. xxvi. 2. 
[See BB.DD. s. v. Passover; Dillmann in Schenkel iv. 
p. 392sqq.; and on the question of the relation of the 
* Last Supper" to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition 
to reff. in BB.DD. u. s.) Kirchner, die Jüdische Passah- 
feier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870; Keil, Com. über 
Matth. pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. ete. i. 
pp. 473—494 ; but esp. Schiirer, Ueber φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα, 
akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883).] * 

πάσχω; 2 aor. ἔπαθον ; pf. πέπονθα (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb. 
ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been af- 
fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it 
is a vox media — used in either a good or a bad sense; 
as, ὅσα πεπόνθασι καὶ ὅσα αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, of perils and de- 
liverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for rw); hence 
κακῶς πάσχειν, lo suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick 
person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WH txt. «. ἔχειν (on 
the other hand, ed πάσχειν, to be well off, in good case, 
often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). . 1. in a bad 
sense, of misfortunes, lo suffer, to undergo evils, to be 
afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes.; also in the 
other Grk. writ. where it is used absol.): absol., Lk. 
xxii. 15; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 3; iii. 18; xvii. 3; 1 Co. xii. 
26; Heb. ii. 18; ix. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 28; iii. 17; iv. 
15,19; Heb. xiii. 12; ὀλίγον, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10; 
πάσχειν τι, Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. ix. 12; Lk. xiii. 2; [xxiv. 
26]; Acts xxviii. 5; 2 Tim.i. 12; [Heb. v. 8 cf. W. 166 
(156) a.; B. $143, 10]; Rev. ii. 10; παθήματα πάσχειν, 
2 Co. i. 6; ri ἀπό w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21; Lk. ix. 22; 
xvii. 25; πάσχ. ὑπό w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; τὶ 
ὑπό twos, Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14; πάσχ. ὑπέρ τινος, in 
behalf of a pers. or thing, Actsix. 16; Phil.i. 29; 2 Th. 
i.5; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect 
[cf. W. § 31, 6], σαρκί, 1 Pet. iv. 1*; ἐν σαρκί, ibid. [yet 
GL 'T Tr WH om. ev; cf. W. 412 (384)] ; macy. περί w. 


494 





πατήρ 


gen. of the thing and ὑπέρ w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18 
[IG WH mrg.; cf. W.373 (349) ; 383 (358) note]; πάσχ. 
διὰ δικαιοσύνην, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of 
pleasant experiences ; but nowhere so unless either the 
adv. ed or an ace. of the thing be added (ὑπομνῆσαι, ὅσα 
παθόντες ἐξ αὐτοῦ (i. 6. θεοῦ) καὶ πηλίκων εὐεργεσιῶν μετα- 
λαβόντες ἀχάριστοι πρὸς αὐτὸν γένοιντο, Joseph. antt. 3, 15, 
1; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. II. 5; 
[L. and S.s. v. IT. 2]): Gal. iii. 4, on which see γέ, 3 c. 
[Comp.: zpo-, cup-racxe. | * 

Ilárapa, -apov, ra, [cf. W. 176 (166)], Patara, a mari- 
time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo: 
Acts xxi. 1. [B. D. s. v. Patara; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 99 sq.]* 

πατάσσω: fut. πατάξω; 1 aor. ἐπάταξα; Sept. times 
without number for 11271 (Hiphil of 733, unused in Kal), 
also for 23), ete.; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart; 
fr. Arstph., Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; 1. 
to strike gently : r( (as a part or a member of the body), 
Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol, ἐν μαχαίρᾳ, 
with the sword, Lk. xxii. 49; τινά, Mt. xxvi. 51; Lk. xxii. 
50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils, 
etc.: as with a deadly disease, τινά, Acts xii. 23; τινὰ ἐν 
w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 GL T Tr WH; xix. 15, 
(Gen. viii. 21; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. xii. 23, etc.). 3. 
by a use solely biblical, to smite down, cut down, to kill, 
slay: τινά, Mt. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (after Zech. xiii. 
7); Acts vii. 24.* 

πατέω, -@; fut. πατήσω; Pass., pres. ptep. rarovpevos; 
1 aor. ἐπατήθην ; fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down; 
Sept. for 373, ete. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush 
with the feet: τὴν ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15, (Judg. ix. 
27; Neh.xiii.15; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 33; Lam.i.15). b. 
to advance by setting foot upon, tread upon: ἐπάνω ὄφεων 
kai σκορπίων καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ ἐχθροῦ, to en- 
counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina- 
tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart 
the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. xe. (xci.) 
13). c. to tread under foot, trample on, i. e. treat with 
insult and contempt : to desecrate the holy city by devas- 
tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan. 
viii. 13); see karazarée. [COMP.: kara-, mept-, ἐμ-περι- 
maréo.]* 

πατήρ [fr. r. pa; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder; 
(Curtius § 348) ], πατρός, -rpi, -répa, voc. πάτερ [for which 
the nom. 6 πατήρ is five times used, and (anarthrous) 
πατήρ in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25 LT Tr WH; 
cf. B. $8129, 5; W. 8 29, 2; WH. App. p. 158], plur. 
πατέρες, πατέρων, πατράσι (Heb. i.1), πατέρας, o, [ fr. Hom. 
down], Sept. for a8, a father; 1. prop., i. q. gener- 
ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest 
ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq. ; viii. 21; Lk.i.17; Jn. 
iv. 535 Acts vii. 145 1 Co. v. 1, etc. ; of πατέρες τῆς σαρκός, 
fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to 
6 πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both par- 
ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof. auth., cf. Delitzsch 
ad loc.) ; or b. a more remote ancestor, the founder 
of a race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather: so 
Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. i. 73; xvi. 24; Jn. viii. 


πατήρ 


39,53; Acts vii. 2; Ro. iv. 1 Rec., 17 sq.,ete.; Isaac, Ro. 
ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, Mk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32; 
plur. fathers i. e. ancestors, forefathers, Mt. xxiii. 30, 32 ; 
Lk. vi. 23, 26 ; xi. 47 sq.; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 31; Acts iii. 13, 
25; 1 Co. x. 1, etc., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; so too N38, 1 K. viii. 21; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 etc. ; in 
the stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22; 
Ro. ix. 5; xi. 28. C. i.q. one advanced in years, a 
senior: 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph.; 8. the origi- 
nator and transmitter of anything: πατὴρ περιτομῆς, Ro. 
iv. 12; the author of a family or society of persons ani- 
mated by the same spirit as himself: so π᾿ πάντων τῶν 
πιστευόντων, Ro. iv. 11, cf. 12, 16, (1 Macc. ii. 54) ; one 
who has infused his own spirit into others, who actuates 
and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44; the phrase 
ἐκ πατρός τινος εἶναι is used of one who shows himself as 
like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in- 
herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who 
stands in a father's place, and looks after another in a 
paternal way: 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf. 
Sophocles, Lex. s. v.], applied to a. teachers, as those 
to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training 
they have received: Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K. 
He TE vate Pal) B. the members of the Sanhedrin, 
whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and 
experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the 
interests of others: Acts vii. 2; xxii. 1; cf. Gesenius, 
"Thesaur. i. p. 7*. 3. God is called the Father, — a. 
τῶν φώτων, [ A. V. of lights i. 6.1 of the stars, the heaven- 
ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler, 
Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings, 
whether angels or men, because he is their creator, pre- 
server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GL T 
Tr WH; τῶν πνευμάτων, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9; 
and, for the same reason, of all men (πατὴρ τοῦ παντὸς 
ἀνθρώπων γένους, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 24): so in the Syn- 
optie Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36 ; 
Lk. vi. 36; xi. 2; xii. 30, 32; Jn. iv. 21, 23; Jas. iii. 9; 
6 πατὴρ ὁ ev (rots) οὐρανοῖς, the Father in heaven, Mt. v. 
16, 45, 48; vi. 1,9; vii. 11, 21; xviii. 14 ; Mk. xi. 25, 26 
RGL; Lk. xi. 13 [ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ; cf. B. $151, 2 a.; W. $ 66, 
6]; 6 mar. ὁ οὐράνιος, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26, 
82; xv. 13. c. of Christians, as those who through 
Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti- 
mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread 
him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their 
reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com- 
mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial 
brightness in Ro. viii. 15; Gal.iv. 6; in John's use of the 
term it seems to include the additional idea of one who 
_ by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be- 
gotten them anew to a life of holiness (see γεννάω, 2 d.): 
absol, 2 Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1, 14 (13),-16; 
lii. 1; θεὸς x. πατὴρ πάντων, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6; 
with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. $ 34, 3b.; B. 
8 152, 10], 6 zar. τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν, 2 Co. i. 3; τῆς δόξης, Eph. 
i. 17; on the phrases 6 θεὸς x. πατὴρ ἡμῶν, θεὸς πατήρ, 
ete., see θεός, 3 p. 288%. d. the Father of Jesus Christ, 


495 








πατριά. 


as one whom God has united to himself in the closest 
bond of love and intimacy, made acquainted with his 
purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men 
the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching 
of John) made to share also in his own divine nature ; 
he is so called, a. by Jesus himself: simply 6 πατήρ 
(opp. to ὁ vids), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21sq.; Jn. v. 20- 
23, 26, 36 sq.; x. 15, 30, etc.; 6 πατήρ pov, Mt. xi. 27; 
xxv. 34; xxvi 59; Lk.x.22; Jn.v.17; vii. 19,49; x. 
18, 32, and often in John's Gospel; Rev.ii.28 (27); iii. 
5, 21; with ὁ ἐν rois οὐρανοῖς added, Mt. vii. 11, 21; x. 
32sq.; xii. 50; xvi. 17; xviii. 10, 19; ὁ οὐράνιος, Mt. xv. 
13; 6 ἐπουράνιος, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. — B. by the apostles: 
Ro. xv.65; 2Co.i.3; xi. 31; Eph.i.3;iii.14 Rec.; Col. 
1.3; Heb.i.5; 1 Pet.i.3; Rev. i. 6. See [T holuck 
(Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. 
N. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes. 
als d. Vaters, (Góttingen, 1865) ; Westcott, Epp. of St. 
John, pp. 27-34, and] below in vids and τέκνον. 

Πάτμος, -ov, 7, Patmos, a small and rocky island in the 
JEcean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thue. 3, 
335; Strab. 10 p. 488; Plin. h. n. 4, 23) ; now called Patmo: 
or [chiefly “in the middle ages" (Howson) ] Palmosa and 
having from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants 
(cf. Sehubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425— 
443; Bleck, Vorless. iib. die Apokalypse, p. 157; AKneucker 
in Schenkeliv. p. 408 5αᾳ. ; [BB. DD. s.v.]). Init John, 
the author of the Apocalypse, says the revelations were 
made to him of the approaching consummation of God's 
kingdom: Rev.i.9. It has been held by the church, 
ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. c. Tryph. $81 
p. 308 a. cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon- 
icity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv. haer. 5, 30, that 
this John is the Apostle; see Ἰωάννης, 2 and 6.* 

πατραλῴας (Attic πατραλοίας, Arstph., Plat., Dem. p. 
732, 14; Aristot., Leian.), L T Tr WH πατρολῴας (see 
pyrpaAoas), -ov, 6, a parricide: 1 Tim. i. 9.* 

πατριά, -ds, ἡ, (fr. πατήρ) ; 1. lineage running back 
to some progenitor, ancestry: Hdt. 2,143; 3, 75. 2 
a race or tribe, i.e. a group of families, all those who in a 
given people lay claim to a common origin: εἰσὶ αὐτέων" 
(Βαβυλωνίων) πατριαὶ τρεῖς, Hdt. 1, 200. The Israelites 
were distributed into (twelve) njBD, φυλαί, tribes, de~ 
scended from the twelve sons of Jacob; these were 
divided into nin2UD, πατριαί, deriving their descent 
from the several sons of Jacob's sons; and these in turn 
were divided into ny3Nr M3, οἶκοι, houses (or families) ; 
cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 193 ; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWB. 
s. v. Stimme; [Keil, Archaeol. $140]; hence ἐξ οἴκου: 
καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυΐδ, i. e. belonging not only to the same 
‘house’ (πατριά) as David, but to the very * family ' of 
David, descended from David himself, Lk. ii. 4 (αὗται ai 
πατριαὶ τῶν υἱῶν Συμεών, Ex. vi. 15 ; 6 ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς Μανασσῆς 
τῆς φυλῆς αὐτῆς καὶ τῆς πατριᾶς αὐτῆς, Judith viii. 2; τῶν 
φυλῶν κατὰ πατριὰς αὐτῶν, Num. i. 16; οἶκοι πατριῶν, Ex. 
xii. 3; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 1; 
2514. τ 11555, 10). 3. family in a wider sense, 
i. q. nation, people: Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28; Ps. xxi- 


πατριάρχης 


(xxii.) 28) ; πᾶσα πατριὰ ἐν οὐρανοῖς (i. e. every order of 
angels) xai ἐπὶ γῆς, Eph. iii. 15.* 

πατριάρχης. -ου, 0, (πατριά and ἄρχω ; see ἑκατοντάρχης). 
a Hellenistic word [W. 26], a patriarch, founder of a 
tribe, progenitor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the 
twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of 
Israel, Acts vii. 8sq.; of Abraham, Heb. vii. 4; of the 
same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25; 
used for DYANM We, 1 Chr. xxiv. 31 [but the text here 
is uncertain]; for Ὁ 23 Ww, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22; for 
niw2n Ww, 2 Chr. xxiii. 20.* 

πατρικός, τή, -óv, (πατήρ), paternal, ancestral, i.q. handed 
dowh by or received from one's fathers: Gal. i. 14. 
(Thuc. Xen., Plat. sqq.; Sept.) [SYN. see πατρῷος, 
fin.]* 

πατρίς, -idos, ἡ, (marnp), one's native country; a. 
as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, one's father-land, one's 
(own) country: Jn. iv. 44 [cf. yap, 11. 1]; i. q. a fixed 
abode (home [R. V. a country of their own], opp. to the 
jand where one παρεπιδημεῖ), Heb. xi. 14. b. one's 
native (own) place i.e. city: Mt. xiii. 54, 57; Mk. vi. 1, 
4: Lk. iv. 23, [24]; so Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 (ἔστι δέ 
μοι Ἱεροσόλυμα πατρίς) ; Joseph. antt. 10, 7,3; 6,4,6; 6 
πατρὶς ἡ AxvAnia ἦν, Hdian. 8, 3, 2 (1 ed. Bekk.).* 

ἸΠατρόβας [al.-9ás, as contr. fr. πατρόβιος ; cf. B. D. 
s.v.; Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 176 sq.; Chandler $ 32], 
acc. -av (cf. B. 19 (17) sq.; W. $8, 1], Patrobas, a cer- 
tain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.* 

πατρολῴας, see πατραλῴας. 

πατρο-παρά-δοτος, -ov, (πατήρ and παραδίδωμι), handed 
down from one's fathers or ancestors: 1 Pet. i. 18 [B. 91 
(79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17, 4; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 
48; Theophil ad Autol. 2, 34; Euseb. h. e. 4, 23, 10; 
10, 4, 16.) * 

πατρῷος (poetic and Ionic zarpotos), -a, -ov, (πατήρ), 
fr. Hom. down, descending from father to son or from 
ancestors to their posterity as it were by right of inherit- 
ance; received from the fathers: νόμος, Acts xxii. 3 (2 
Mace. vi.1; Ael. v.h. 6,10); θεός, Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace. 
xii. 19; and often in Grk. writ. θεοὶ πατρ., Ζεῦς arp. 
etc.); τὰ ἔθη rà π. Acts xxviii. 17 (Justin dial. c. Tr. 
€. 62; πατρ. ἔθος, Ael. v.h. 7, 19 var.).* 

[ϑυν. πατρῷος, πατρικός: on the distinction of the 
grammarians (see Photius, Suidas, Ammonius, ete. s. vv.) 
ace. to which πατρῷος is used of property descending from 
father to son, πατρικός of persons in friendship or feud, 
etc. see Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. p. 530 sq.; L. and S. s. v. 
πατρῷος. 

Παῦλος, -ov, 6, (a Lat. prop. name, Paulus), Paul. 
Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T., 
viz. 1. Sergius Paulus, a Roman propraetor [pro- 
consul; cf. Σέργιος, and B. D. s. v. Sergius Paulus], con- 
verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul: 
Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew 
name was Saul (see Σαούλ, SadAos). He was born at 
Tarsus in Cilicia (Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39; xxii. 3) of Jew- 


496 








παύω 


was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28; xvi. 87). 
He was endowed with remarkable gifts, both moral and 
intellectual. He learned the trade of a σκηνοποιός (q. v.). 
Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was thoroughly 
indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by the Pharisee 
Gamaliel (Acts xxii. 3; v. 34). At first he attacked 
and persecuted the Christians most fiercely; at length, 
on his way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to 
Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and 
undaunted preacher of Christ and the founder of many 
Christian churches. And not only by his unwearied la- 
bors did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of 
the friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which 
appears from his immortal Epistles, that he caught per- 
fectly the mind of his heavenly Master and taught most 
unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all 
men who repose a living faith in Jesus Christ, and 
that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly incompatible 


| with the spiritual liberty of which Christ is the author. 


By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon himself the 
deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year 
57 [or 58 ace. to the more common opinion ; yet see the 
chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts; Farrar, 
St. Paul, ii. exeurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment; 
and as a captive he was carried first to Czesarea in Pal- 
estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered 
martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of those 
daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi- 
astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e. 
2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7; can. Murator. (cf. Westcott, Canon, 
5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paul, released 
from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in 
Spain and Asia Minor; and subsequently, imprisoned a 
second time, to have been at length put to death at Rome 
in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On 
this point cf. Meyer on Ro., Introd. $1; Harnack on 
Clem. Rom. 1. c.; Lghtft. ibid. p. 49sq.; Holtzmann, Die 
Pastoralbriefe, Einl. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; reff. in Heini- 
chen’s note on Euseb. h. e. as above; v. Hofmann, Die 
heilige Sehrift Neuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sqq. ; 
Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. exeurs. viii.; Schaff, Hist. of 
Apostolie Christ. (1882) p. 331sq.] Paul is mentioned 
in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his 
pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. respect- 
ing his life and its debatable points see the art. Paulus by 
Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356- 
389.] 

παύω: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. παυσάτω (1 Pet. iii. 
10); Mid., pres. παύομαι; impf. emavouny; fut. παύσομαι 
(see ἀναπαύω and ἐπαναπαύω [and on the forms παῆναι etc. 
cf. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p. 
xviii. note, also his ed. of the * Teaching? 4, 2 note (p. 97)]); 
pf. πέπαυμαι; 1 aor. ἐπαυσάμην ; fr. Hom. down; to make 
to cease or desist: τὶ or twa ἀπό τινος, to restrain [ A. V. 
refrain] athing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10, 


ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee | fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; cf. W. $ 30, 6; [(cf. 326 
(Acts xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen; hence he himself | (305)) ; B. 8132,5]. Mid. Sept. for Sn, 153, nav, 


Πάφος 


ete. to cease, leave off, [cf. W. 253 (238)]: Lk. viii. 24; 
Acts xx. 1; 1 Co. xiii. 8; the action or state desisted 
from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptep. (cf. 
Matthiae $ 551 d.; Passows.v. II. 3; [L. and S. I. 4]; 
W. 845,4; [B.§ 144, 15]): ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν, Lk. v. 4 (Gen. 
xviii. 33; Num. xvi.31; Deut. xx. 9) ; add, Acts v. 42; 
vi. 18; xiii. 10; xx. 31; xxi. 32; Eph. i. 16; Col. i. 9; 
Heb. x. 2; the ptep. is wanting, as being evident fr. the 
context, Lk. xi.1. Pass. [ef. W. § 39, 3 and N.3] πέπαυ- 
ται ἁμαρτίας, hath got release [A. V. hath ceased] from sin, 
i. e. is no longer stirred by its incitements and seduc- 
tions, 1 Pet. iv. 1; cf. Kypke, Observv. ad loc., and W. 
u.s.; [B. $132, 5; but WH txt. ἁμαρτίαις, dat., unto sins. 
Comp. : dva-, éz-ava-, συν-ανα- (-μαι), kara- rave.” 

Πάφος [perh. fr. r. meaning ‘to cozen’; cf. Pape, Ei- 
gennamen, s. v.], του, 7, Paphos [now Baffa], a maritime 
city on the island of Cyprus, with a harbor. It was the 
residence of the Roman proconsul. *Old Paphos" [now 
Kuklia], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of 
Venus [Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S. E. of it 
(Mela 2, 7; Plin. h. n. 5, 31. 35; Tac. hist. 2, 2): Acts 
xiii. 6, 13.  [ Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]* 

παχύνω: 1 aor. pass. ἐπαχύνθην; (fr. παχύς [thick, 
stout]; cf. βραδύνω ; raxóvo) ; to make thick; to make fat, 
fatten: rà σώματα, Plat. Gorg. p. 518 c.; βοῦν, de rep. p. 
343 b.; ἵππον, Xen. oec. 12, 20. Metaph. to make stupid 
(to render the soul dull or callous): τὰς ψυχάς, Plut. mor. p. 
995 d. [i. e. de esu carn. 1, 6, 3]; νοῦν, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 
1, 8; παχεῖς τὰς διανοίας, Hdian. 2, 9, 15 [11 ed. Bekk.]; 
τὴν διάνοιαν, Ael. v. h. 13, 15 (Lat. pingue ingenium) [cf. 
W. 18]; ἐπαχύνθη 5 καρδία (Vulg. incrassatum est cor 
ΓΑ. V. their heart is waxed gross]): Mt. xiii. 15; Acts 
xxviii. 27, after Is. vi. 10 (for 35 ]oun).* 

πέδη, -ns, 7), (fr. πέζα the foot, instep), a fetter, shackle 
for the feet: Mk. v. 4; Lk. viii. 29. (From Hom. down; 
Sept.) * 

πεδινός, -7, -óv, (πεδίον [a plain], πέδον [the ground]), 
level, plain: Lk. vi. 17.  (Xen., Polyb., Plut., Dio Cass., 
al.; Sept.) * 

πεζεύω ; (πεζός, q. v.) ; to travel on foot (not on horse- 
back or in a carriage), or (if opp. to going by sea) by 
land: Acts xx. 13. (Xen., Isoer., Polyb., Strab., al.) * 

πεζῇ (dat. fem. fr. πεζός, q. v.; cf. Matthiae § 400), on 
foot or (if opp. to going by sea) by land: Mt. xiv. 13 


RGTrLtxt. WH txt.; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thuc., Xen., 
Dem., al.)*. 
πεῖός, -ἡ -óv, [πέζα; see πέδη], fr. Hom. down; Ez 


on foot (as opp. to riding). 2. by land (as opp. to 
going by sea): ἠκολούθησαν πεζοί, Mt. xiv. 13 T L mre. 
WH mrg. (so cod. Sin. also) for R G πεζῇ, [cf. W. $54, 
2; B. $123, 9]. (Sept. for "513 and 533.)* 

πειθαρχέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ptep. πειθαρχήσας ; (πείθαρχος; 
and this fr. πείθομαι and ἀρχή) ; to obey (a ruler or a 
superior): θεῷ, Acts v. 29, 32; magistrates, Tit. iii. 1 
[al take it here absol. to be obedient]; τῷ λόγῳ τῆς 
“δικαιοσύνης, Polyc. ad Philipp. 9,1; [A. V. to hearken to] 
one advising something, Acts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen., 
Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al.; on the very freq. use 


32 


497 


πείθω 


of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. 
w. p- 43 [esp. p. 108].)* 

πειθός [WH midds; see I, «], τή, -óv, (fr. πείθω, like 
φειδός fr. φείδομαι [cf.W. 96 (91) ]), persuasive : ἐν πειθοῖς 
λόγοις, 1 Co. ii. 4 [cf. B. 73]. Not found elsewhere [W. 
24]. The Grks. say πιθανός ; as πιθανοὶ λόγοι, Joseph. 
antt. 8, 9, and often in Grk. auth. See Passow s. v. 
πιθανός, 1 6.; [L. and S. ibid. I. 2; WH. App. p. 153].* 

Πειθώ, -ovs, 7, 1. Peitho, prop. name of a goddess, 
lit. Persuasion; Lat. Suada or Suadela. 2. per- 
suasive power, persuasion: 1 Co. ii. 4 ἐν πειθοῖ ---- acc. to 
certain inferior authorities. [On the word, see Müller's 
note on Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 21, 3. (Hes., Hdt., a1.)] * 

πείθω [ (fr. τ. meaning ‘to bind’; allied w. πίστις, fides, 
foedus, ete.; Curtius $327; Vanicek p. 592)]; impf. ἔπει- 
Gov; ἴαϊ. πείσω; 1 δον. ἔπεισα ; 2 pf. πέποιθα; plupf. éze- 
ποίθειν (Lk. xi. 22); Pass. [or Mid., pres. πείθομαι; impf. 
ἐπειθόμην]; pf. πέπεισμαι; 1 aor. ἐπείσθην ; 1 fut. πεισθή- 
copa: (Lk. xvi. 31) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. Active; a. 
to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe: 
absol. πείσας μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον, Acts xix. 26; τί, to 
cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth), Acts xix. 
8 RGT [ef. B. 150 (131) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); περί 
w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH; τινά, one, Acts 
xviii. 4; τινά τι, one of a thing, Acts xxviii. 23 Ree. 
(Hat. 1, 163; Plat. apol. p. 37 a., and elsewhere; [cf. B. 
u.s.]); τινὰ περί τινος, concerning a thing, ibid. G L'T 
Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, w. an 
acc. of a pers., to make friends of, win one's favor, gain 
one's good-will, Acts xii. 205 or to seek to win one, strive 
to please one, 2 Co. v. 11; Gal. i. 10; to conciliate by per- 
suasion, Mt. xxviii. 14 [here T WH om. Tr br. αὐτόν]; 
Acts xiv. 19; i.q. to tranquillize [ A. V. assure], τὰς kap- 
δίας ἡμῶν, 1 Jn. iii. 19. c. to persuade unto i. e. move 
or induce one by persuasion to do something : twa foll. by 
an inf. [B. $139, 46], Acts xiii. 43; xxvi. 28, (Xen. an. 
1,3, 19; Polyb. 4, 64, 2; Diod. 11, 15; 12, 39; Joseph. 
antt. 8, 10, 3) ; τινά foll. by tva [cf. W. 338 (317); B. 
8139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [ Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. 2 
Passive and Middle [cf. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be 
persuaded, to suffer one's self to be persuaded ; to be in- 
duced to believe: absol, Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii 4; to 
have faith, Heb. xi. 13 Rec.; τινί, in a thing, Acts xxviii. 
24; to believe, sc. ὅτι, Heb. xiii. 18 L'T Tr WH. πέπει- 
σμαί τι [on the neut. ace. cf. B. $ 131, 10] περί τινος 
(gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a 
person, Heb. vi. 9 [ A. V. we are persuaded better. things 
of you, εἰς. ; πεπεισμένος εἰμί, to have persuaded one's 
self, and πείθομαι, to believe, [cf. Eng. to be persuaded], 
foll. by acc. w. inf., Lk. xx. 6; Acts xxvi. 26 ; πέπεισμαι 
ὅτι, Ro. viii. 38; 2 Tim. i. 5, 12; with ἐν κυρίῳ added (see 
ἐν, I. 6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14; περί τινος ὅτι, Ro. xv. 14. b. 
to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with: τινί, one, Acts v. 
36 sq. 39 (40); xxiii. 21; xxvii. 11; Ro. ii. 8; Gal. iii. 1 
Rec.; v. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. iii. 3. 3. 2 pf. πέ- 
moda (Sept. mostly for 703, also for NOH, 17:53 Niphal 
of the unused 137), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be 
confident : foll. by ace. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19; by ὅτι, Heb. 


Πειλᾶτος 


xiii. 18 Rec.; by ὅτι with a preparatory αὐτὸ τοῦτο [W. 
§ 23, 5], Phil. i. 6; τοῦτο πεποιθὼς οἶδα ὅτι, ibid. 25; πέ- 
ποιθα w. a dat. of the pers. or the thing in which the confi- 
dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. T. 
see B. § 133, 5; W. 214 (201); § 33, d.]) : Phil. i. 14; 
Philem. 21, (2 K. xviii. 20; Prov. xiv. 16; xxviii. 26; Is. 
xxviii. 17; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24; Sap. xiv. 29); ἑαυτῷ 
foll. by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7; ἔν τινι, to trust in, put confi- 
dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u. s.], Phil. iii. 3, 4; ἐν 
κυρίῳ foll. by ὅτι, Phil. ii. 24; ἐπί τινι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L 
txt. WH mrg.; Mk. x. 24 [where T WH om. Tr mrg. br. 
the cl.]; Lk.xi. 22; xviii. 9; 2 Co. i. 9; Heb. ii. 13, (and 
very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52; 2 Chr. xiv. 11; 
Ps.ii.13; Prov.iii. 5; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); ἐπί τινα, Mt. 
xxvii. 43 where L txt. WH mrg. emi w. dat. (Is. xxxvi. 
5; Hab. ii. 18; 2 Chr. xvi. 7 sq., etc.) ;- ἐπί τινα foll. by 
ὅτι, 2 Co. ii. 3; 2 Th. iii. 4; εἴς twa foll. by ὅτι, Gal. v. 
10. [Comp.: dva-neidw.]* 

Πειλᾶτος, see Πιλάτος [and cf. et, «]. 

πεινάω, -@, inf. πεινᾶν (Phil. iv. 12); fut. πεινάσω (Lk. 
vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16); 1 aor. éwetvaoa, — for the earlier 
forms πεινῆν, πεινήσω, ἐπείνησα ; οἷ. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61 
and 204; W.§13, 3b.; [B. 37 (32) ; 44 (38) ]; see also 
διψάω ; (fr. πεῖνα hunger; [see πένης) ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 21; to hunger, be hungry; a. prop. : 
Mt. iv. 2; xii. 1,8; xxi. 18; xxv. 35, 37,42, 44 ; Mk. ii. 
25; xi. 12; Lk. iv. 2; vi. 3, 25; i. 4. to suffer want, Ro. 
xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34; to be needy, Lk. i. 53; vi. 21; 
Phil. iv. 12; in this same sense it is joined with διψᾶν, 
1 Co. iv. 11; in figurative disc. οὐ πεινᾶν x. οὐ διψᾶν is 
used to describe the condition of one who is in need of 
nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva- 
tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crave 
ardently, to seek with eager desire: w. acc. of the thing, 
τὴν δικαιοσύνην, Mt. v. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a 
gen., as χρημάτων, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 39; συμμάχων, 7, 5, 50; 
ἐπαίνου, oec. 13, 9; cf. W. $ 30, 10, b. fin.; [B. $131, 4]; 
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 6, and see διψάω, 2).* 

πεῖρα, -as, 7, (wetpdw), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi- 
ment, attempt: πεῖραν λαμβάνειν τινός, i. q. to attempt a 
thing, to make trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com- 
mon in prof. auth. ; cf. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18; Cyr.3, 3,38; 
see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488; Plat. 
Protag. p. 342a.; Gorg. p. 448 a.; Joseph. antt. 8,6,5; 
Ael. v. h. 12, 22; often in Polyb., cf. Schweighduser, Lex. 
Polyb. p. 460; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56; [other exx. in 
Bleek on Heb. l. c.; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 1467), 
θαλάσσης, to try whether the sea can be crossed dry-shod 
like the land, Heb. xi. 29; to have trial of a thing, i. e. 
to experience, learn to know by experience, μαστίγων, Heb. 
xi. 36 (often in Polyb.; τῆς προνοίας, Joseph. antt. 2, 
5, 1).* 

πειράζω (a form found several times in Hom. and Apoll. 
Rhod. and later prose, for zetpd@ [which see in Veitch] 
more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. ἐπείραζον ; 1 
aor. ἐπείρασα; Pass., pres. πειράζομαι; 1 aor. ἐπειράσθην; 
pf. ptep. πεπειρασμένος (Heb. iv. 15; see πειράω, 1); 1 
aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. ἐπειράσω (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.); Sept. 


498 





πειρασμός 


for 7D}; to try, i. e. 1. to try whether a thing can 
be done; to attempt, endeavor: with an inf., Acts ix. 26 
LT Tr WH; xvi. 7; xxiv. 6. 2. to try, make trial 
of, test: τινά, for the purpose of ascertaining his quality, 
or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a. 
in a good sense: Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.]; Jn. 
vi. 6; [2Co. xiii. 5]; Rev. ii. 2. b. in a bad sense: 
to test one maliciously, eraftily to put to the proof his 
feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1; xix. 3; xxii.18,35; Mk. 
viii. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 23 (where GT WH 
Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words τί pe πειράζετε) ; Jn. 
viii. 6. c. to try or test one's faith, virtue, charac- 
ter, by enticement to sin; hence acc. to the context i. q. 
to solicit to sin, to tempt: Jas. i. 13 sq.; Gal. vi. 1; Rev. 
ii.10; of the temptations of the devil, Mt.iv.1,3; Mk. 
i.13; Lk. iv.2; 1 Co. vii.5; 1 ΤῊ. 11. δ; hence, 6 πειρά- 
Cav, subst., Vulg. tentator, etc., the tempter: Mt.iv.3; 1 Th. 
iii. 5. d. After the O. T. usage a. of God; 
to inflict evils upon one in order to prove his character 
and the steadfastness of his faith: 1 Co. x. 13; Heb. ii. 18; 
iv. 15 [see πειράω]; xi. 17, 37 [where see WH. App.]; 
Rev. iii. 10, (Gen. xxii. 1; Ex. xx. 20; Deut. viii. 2; Sap. 
iii. 5; xi. 10 (9); Judith viii. 25 sq.). B. Men are 
said πειράζειν τὸν θεόν, ---- by exhibitions of distrust, as 
though they wished to try whether he is not justly dis- 
trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God's 
justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were, 
to give proof of his perfections : Acts xv. 10; Heb. iii. 9 
RG, (Ex. xvii. 2,7; Num. xiv. 22; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 
41, 56; cv. (evi.) 14, ete.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on Sap. 
p. 49); se. τὸν Χριστόν [L T Tr txt. WH τ. κύριον], 1 Co. 
x. 9 [but L mrg. TWH mrg. ἐξεπείρασαν] ; τὸ πνεῦμα 
κυρίου, Acts v. 9; absol. πειράζειν ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ (see δοκιμα- 
cia), Heb. iii.9 L T Tr WH. [On πειράζω (as compared 
with δοκιμάζω), see Trench ὃ lxxiv.; cf. Cremer s. v. 
Cowr.: ἐκ-πειράζω.} * 

πειρασμός, -o0, ὁ, (πειράζω, q. v.), Sept. for MBM, an ez- 
periment, attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tentatio); a. 
univ. trial, proving: Sir. xxvii. 5, 7; τὸν πειρασμὸν ὑμῶν 
ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, the trial made of you by my bodily con- 
dition, since this condition served to test the love of the 
Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 L T Tr WH [cf. b. 
below, and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. b. spec. the trial 
of man’s fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc.: 1 Pet. 
iv. 12; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris- 
ing from the desires or from outward circumstances, 
Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. x. 13; ὑπομένειν πειρασμόν, Jas. i. 12; 
an internal temptation to sin, 1 Tim. vi.9; of the temp- 
tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the 
Messiah from his divine errand, Lk.iv.13; of a condi- 
tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed 
to sin, or to a lapse from faith and holiness: in the 
phrases εἰσφέρειν τινὰ εἰς πειρ., Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4; εἰσ- 
έρχεσθαι eis 7., Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38 [here TWH 
épx-]; Lk. xxii. 40, 46; adversity, affliction, trouble, [cf. 
our trial], sent by God and serving to test or prove one's 
faith, holiness, character: plur. Lk. xxii. 28; Acts xx. 
19; Jas.i.2; 1 Pet. i. 6; τὸν zetp. μου τὸν ἐν τῇ σαρκί pov, 


πειράω 


my temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv. 
14 Rec. [but see a. above]; Spa τοῦ πειρασμοῦ, Rev. iii. 
10; ἐκ m. ῥύεσθαι, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3; 
Sir. ii. 1; vi. 7; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1; 1 Macc. ii. 52). c. 
‘temptation’ (i. e. trial) of God by men, i. e. rebellion 
against God, by which his power and justice are, as it 
were, put to the proof and challenged to show them- 
selves: Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi. 16; ix. 22; Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 
8). Cf. Fried. B. Koester, Die bibl. Lehre von der Ver- 
suchung. Gotha, 1859. “ (The word has not yet been 
found in prof. auth. exc. Diosc. praef. 1: τοὺς ἐπὶ παθῶν 
m. experiments made on diseases.) * 

πειράω : impf. mid. 3 pers. (sing. and plur), ἐπειρᾶτο, 
ἐπειρῶντο; pf. pass. ptep. πεπειραμένος (see below) ; com. 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; to try ; i. e. 1. to make 
a trial, to attempt, [ A. V. to assay], foll. by an infin. ; 
often so fr. Hom. down; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26 
RG; xxvi. 21, (Xen. symp. 4, 7; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, etc. ; often 
in Polyb.; Ael. v. h. 1,34; 2 Macc. ii. 23; 3 Macc.i. 25; 
4 Macc. xii. 2, ete.); hence πεπειραμένος taught by trial, ex- 
perienced, Heb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([ Rec.*], 
Taf. formerly) [see below, and cf. πειράζω, d. a.]. 2. 
In post- Hom. usage with the acc. of a pers. to test, make 
trial of one, put him to the proof: his mind, sentiments, 
temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in- 
duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf. 
Passow s. v. 3a.; [L. and S. s. v. A. IV. 2]. Hence 
πεπειραμένος in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained 
by some [cf. W. § 15 Note ad fin.], tempted to sin; but 
the Pass. in this sense is not found in Grk. writ.; see 
Delitzsch ad loc.* 

πεισμονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πείθω, q. v.; like πλησμονή), persua- 
sion: in an active sense [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as 
below] and contextually, treacherous or deceptive persua- 
sion, Gal. v. 8 [cf W. $68, 1 fin.]. (Found besides in 
Tenat. ad Rom. 3, 3 longer recens.; Justin apol. 1, 53 
init.; [Irenzus 4, 33, 7]; Epiph. 30, 21; Chrysost. on 
1 Th.i.3; Apollon. Dys. syntax p. 195, 10 [299, 17]; 
Eustath. on Hom. 1]. a’. p. 21, 46 vs. 22; 99, 45 vs. 442; 
v. p. 637, 5 vs. 131; and Od. x’. p. 785, 22 vs. 285.) * 

πέλαγος, -ovs, τό, [by some (e. g. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. 
p. 305) connected with πλάξ, i. e. the ‘flat’ expanse (cf. 
Lat. aequor); but by Curtius $ 367 et al. (cf. Vanicek 
p. 515) with m\jooo, i. e. the ‘beating’ waves (cf. our 
‘plash’)], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. the sea i. e. the 
high sea, the deep, (where ships sail; accordingly but a 
part of the sea, θάλασσα, Aristot. Probl. sect. 23 quaest. 
3 [p. 931°, 14 sq.] ἐν τῷ λιμένι ὀλίγη ἐστὶν ἡ θάλασσα, ἐν 
δὲ τῷ πελάγει βαθεῖα. Hence) τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θαλάσσης, 
aequor maris, [A. V.the depth of the sea; cf. Trench 
§ xiii.], Mt. xviii. 6 (so too Apollon. Rhod. 2, 608; πέ- 
Aayos aiyaias ἁλός. Eur. Tro. 88; Hesych. πέλαγος - - - 
βυθός, πλάτος θαλάσσης. Cf. W. 611 (568); [Trench 
u. s. ]). b. univ. the sea : τὸ πέλ. τὸ κατὰ THY Κιλικίαν, 
Acts xxvii. 5 (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. πέ- 
Aayos, 1; [L. and S. s. v. I.]).* 

πελεκίζω : pf. pass. ptep. πεπελεκισμένος ; (πέλεκυς, an 
axe or two-edged hatchet); to cut off with an aze, to 


499 


πένης 


behead: τινά, Rev. xx.4. (Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph. 
antt. 20,5,4; Plut. Ant. 36; [cf. W. 26 (25)].)* 

πέμπτος, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], fift : Rev. vi. 9; ix. 
1; xvi. 10; xxi. 20.* 

πέμπω ; fut. πέμψω; 1 aor. ἔπεμψα [on its epistolary 
use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198 
(172); Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11]; 
Pass., pres. πέμπομαι; 1 aor. ἐπέμφθην (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for nog; to send: twa, absol., one 
to do something, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. vii. 19; xvi. 24; Jn.i. 
22; vii. 18; xiii. 16, 20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. dzocréAA.] ; 
2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, etc. ; τινά or τινάς is omitted 
where the ptep. is joined to another finite verb, as πέμψας 
ἀπεκεφάλισε τὸν Ἰωάννην, he sent (a deputy) and be- 
headed John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31; xxiii. 30, 
(for other exx. see ἀποστέλλω, 1 d.) ; in imitation of the 
Hebr. "3 3 Now (18.xvi. 20; 2S. xi. 14; xii. 25; 1 K. 
ii. 25) we find πέμψας διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, he sent by 
his disciples (unless with Fritzsche, and Bornemann, 
Schol. in Luc. p. lxv., one prefer to take πέμψας absol. 
and to connect διὰ T. pad. with the foll. εἶπεν [so Mey., 
but see (7te Aufl. ed. Weiss), Keil, De Wette, al. ]), Mt. 
xi. 2 LT Tr WH, (so ἀποστείλας διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου, Rev. 
i.1). Teachers who come forward by God's command 
and with his authority are said to be (or to have been) 
sent by God: as, John the Baptist, Jn. i. 33; Jesus, Jn. 
iv. 84; v. 23 sq. 30, 37; vi. 38-40, 44; vii. 16, 28, etc.; 
Ro. viii. 3; the Holy Spirit, rhetorically personified, Jn. 
xiv. 26; xv. 26; xvi.7. τινά, w. dat. of the pers. to whom 
one is sent: 1 Co. iv. 17; Phil. 11. 19 ; τινά τινι παρά τινος 
(prop. to send one to one from one’s abode [see παρά, I. 
a.]), Jn. xv. 26; πρός twa, Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 7; Acts x. 
33; xv. 253; xxiii. 30; [xxv. 21 RG]; Eph. vi. 22; Phil. 
ii. 25 ; Col. iv. 8; Tit. iii. 12; with the ptep. λέγων added 
(Hebr. 2989 now, Gen. xxxviii. 25; 2 S. xiv. 32, etc.), 
said by messenger (Germ. liess sagen), Lk. vii. 6, 19; 
τινὰ εἰς w. an acc. of place, Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xv. 15; xvi. 27; 
Acts x. 5; the end, for which one is sent is indicated — 
by the prep. eis, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 14; 
by an infin., Jn. i. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 3; Rev. xxii. 16. Of 
things, τί τινι; a. to bid a thing to be carried to 
one: Rey. xi. 10; with εἰς and an ace. of place added, 
Rey. i. 11; εἰς w. an acc. indicating the purpose, Acts xi. 
29; Phil. iv. 16 [here Lchm. br. eis; cf. B.329 (288). b. 
to send (thrust or insert) a thing into another : Rev. xiv. 
15, 18, (Ael. hist. an. 12, 5) ; τινί τι eis τό w. an inf., 2 Th. 
ii 11. [Comp.: dva-, ék-, pera-, προ-, συμ- πέμπω. 

[Syw.: πέμπω, ἀποστέλλω: πέμπω is the general term 
(differing from ἴημι in directing attention not to the exit 
but to the advent); it may even imply accompaniment 
(as when the sender is God). ἀποστέλλω includes a refer- 
ence to equipment, and suggests official or authoritative send- 
ing. Cf. Schmidt ch. 104; Westcott on Jn. xx. 21, * Addi- 
tional Note’; also ‘ Additional Note’ on 1 Jn. iii. 5.] 

πένης, τητος, 6, (πένομαι to work for one’s living; the 
Lat. penuria and Grk. πεινάω are akin to it [cf. Vanicek 
p. 1164]; hence πένης i. q. ἐκ πόνου καὶ evepyetas τὸ ζῆν 
ἔχων, Etym. Magn.), poor: 2 Co. ix.9. (From Soph. and 
Hdt. down ; Sept. for 1338, 2}, 53, v^, ete.) * 


πενθερά 


[ϑυν. πένης, πτωχός : “πένης occurs but once in the N.T., 
and then in a quotation fr. the Old, while πτωχός occurs 
between thirty and forty times. . . . The πένης may be so poor 
that he earns his bread by daily labor; the πτωχός that he 
only obtains his living by begging." Trench § xxxvi.; cf. 
Schmidt ch. 85, 4.] 


πενθερά, -ᾶς, ἡ, (fem. of πενθερός, q. v.), a mother-in-law, 
a wife's mother: Mt. viii. 14; x. 35; Mk. i. 30; Lk. iv. 
38; xii. 53. (Dem., Plut., Leian., al.; Sept. for nion.) * 

πενθερός, -ov, ὁ, α father-in-law, a wife's father: Jn. xviii. 
13. (Hom., Soph. Eurip, Plut. al.; Sept. [for on, 
yan].)* 

πενθέω, -à ; fut. mevOnow; 1 aor. ἐπένθησα; (πένθος) ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 528; to mourn ; a. 
intrans.: Mt. v. 4 (5); ix. 15; 1 Co. v. 2 ; πενθεῖν x. κλαίειν, 
Mk. xvi. 10; Lk. vi. 25; Jas. iv. 9; Rev. xviii. 15, 19; 
τινι, over one, Rev. xviii. 11 R GL (Is. Ixvi. 10), 
τινα, ibid. T Tr WH (2 S. xiii. 37; 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, 
etc.). b. trans. /o mourn for, lament, one: 2 Co. xii. 
21 [ef. W. 635 sq. (590); B. $131,4. Syn. see θρηνέω, 
fin.]* 

πένθος, -ovs, τό, (πένθω [ (?) ; akin, rather, to πάθος, πένο- 
μαι (cf. πένης) ; see Curtius p. 53; Vanicek p. 1165), fr. 
Hom. down, Sept. for Sax, mourning: Jas. iv. 9; Rev. 
xvili. 78q.; xxi. 4.* ; 

mevixpds, -a, -dv, (fr. πένομαι, see πένης), needy, poor : 
Lk. xxi. 2. (Occasionally in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Od. 3, 
348 down; for >3) in Ex. xxii. 25; for 2 in Prov. xxix. 
ΤΣ" 

TUN adv., five times: 2 Co. xi. 24. 
Aeschyl., down.] ἢ 

πεντακισ-χίλιοι, -ai, -a, five times a thousand, five thou- 
sand: Mt. xiv. 21; xvi. 9; Mk. vi. 44; viii. 19; Lk. ix. 
14; Jn. vi. 10. [Hdt., Plat., al.]* 

πεντακόσιοι, -at, -a, five hundred: Lk. vii. 41; 1 Co. xv. 
6. [From Hom. (-7y«-) down.] * 

πέντε, οἱ, ai, rd, five: Mt. xiv. 17, and often. 
Hom. down.] 

πεντε-και-δέκατος, -7, -ov, the fifteenth: Lk. iii.1. [Diod., 
Plut., al.]* 

πεντήκοντα, οἱ, ai, Ta, fifly: Lk.vii.41; xvi.65; Jn. viii. 
57; xxi. 11 [ἢ ἃ πεντηκοντατριῶν (as one word)]; Acts 
xii. 20; ἀνὰ πεντήκ. by fifties [see ἀνά, 2], Mk. vi. 40 
[here L T Tr WH xarà z.; see κατά, II. 3 a. y.]; Lk. ix. 
14. [From Hom. down.]* 

πεντηκοστή, -ῆς, ἡ, (sc. ἡμέρα ; fem. of πεντηκοστός fifti- 
eth), [fr. Plat. down.], Pentecost (prop. the fiftieth day 
after the Passover, Tob. ii. 1; 2 Mace. xii. 32; [Philo de 
septen. § 21; de decal. § 30; cf. W. 267), the second of 
the three great Jewish festivals; celebrated at Jerusa- 
lem yearly, the seventh week after the Passover, in 
grateful recognition of the completed harvest (Ex. 
xxii. 16; Lev. xxiii. 15 sq. ; Deut. xvi. 9): Acts ii. 1; 
XX. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 8, (Joseph. antt. 3, 10, 6; [14, 13, 
4; ete.]). [BB. DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto) 
s. v. Pentecost; Hamburger, Real-Encycl. i. s. v. Wochen- 
fest; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiii.] * 

πεποίθησις, -ews, ἡ, (πείθω, 2 pf. πέποιθα). trust, confi- 


ΓΞ 
επι 

sey 
επί 


[From Pind., 


[From 


500 








Πέργαμος 


dence [R. V.], reliance: 2 Co. i. 15; iii. 4; x. 2; Eph. iii. 
12; εἴς τινα, 2 Co. viii. 22; ἔν τινι, Phil. iii. 4. (Philo de 
nobilit. 8 7; Joseph. antt. 1, 3, 1; 3, 2, 2; 10,1, 4; [11, 
7, 1; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 3]; Zosim., Sext. Emp., al.; 
Sept. once for nr12, 2 K. xviii. 19.) The word is con- 
demned by the Atticists; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 295.* 

πέρ, an enclitic particle, akin to the prep. περί [ erm. 
de part. ἄν, p. 6; Curtius $359; cf. Lob. Pathol. Elemen- 
ta, i. 290; al. (connect it directly with πέραν, etc., and) 
give *throughly* as its fundamental meaning; cf. 
DBüumlein, Partikeln, p. 198], showing that the idea of 
the word to which it is annexed must be taken in its 
fullest extent ; it corresponds to the Lat. circiter, cunque, 
Germ. noch so sehr, immerhin, wenigstens, ja; [ Eng. how- 
ever much, very much, altogether, indeed]; cf. Hermann 
ad Vig. p. 791; Klotz ad Devar.ii. 2 p. 722 sqq.; [Donald- 
son, New Crat. $178fin.]. In the N. T. it is affixed to 
the pron. és and to sundry particles, see διόπερ, ἐάνπερ, 
εἴπερ, ἐπείπερ, ἐπειδήπερ, ἤπερ, καθάπερ, καίπερ, ὅσπερ, 
ὥσπερ. [(From Hom. down.) ] 

περαιτέρω, (fr. mepairepos, compar. of πέρα), adv., fr. 
Aeschyl. down, further, beyond, besides: Acts xix. 39 L 
Tr WH, for RG περὶ ἑτέρων. With this compare οὐδὲν 
ζητήσετε περαιτέρω, Plat. Phaedo c. 56 fin. p. 107 b.* 

πέραν, Ionic and Epic πέρην, adv., fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for ay; beyond, on the other side ; a. τὸ 
πέραν, the region beyond, the opposite shore: Mt. viii. 
18, 28; xiv. 22; xvi.5; Mk. iv. 853; v.21; vi. 45; viii. 
13. b. joined (like a prep.) with a gen. [W. § 54, 
6]: πέραν τῆς θαλ. Jn. vi. 22, 25; πέραν τοῦ Ιορδάνου, Mt. 
iv. 15; xix.1; [Mk. x. 1L T Tr WH]; Jn.i. 28; iii. 26; 
with verbs of going it marks direction towards a place 
[over, beyond], Jn. vi.1,17; x.40; xviii.1; of the place 
whence, [Mt. iv. 25]; Mk.iii.8. τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Mk. v. 1; [τοῦ Iopddvov, Mk. x. 1 RG]; τῆς λίμνης, Lk. 
viii. 22, (rod ποταμοῦ, Xen. an. 3, 5, 2). [See Sophocles, 
Lex. s. v.]* 

πέρας, -aros, τό, (πέρα beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ez- 
tremity, bound, end, [see τέλος, 1 a. init.]; a. ofa 
portion of space (boundary, frontier): πέρατα τῆς γῆς» 
[the ends of the earth], i. q: the remotest lands, Mt. xii. 
42; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. Il. 8, 478 [zeipap]; Thuc. 1, 69; 
Xen. Ages. 9, 4; Sept. for y?N "Dds [W. 801); also τῆς 
οἰκουμένης, Ro. x. 18 (Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a 
thing extending through a period of time (termination) : 
ἀντιλογίας, Heb. vi. 16 (τῶν κακῶν, Aeschyl. Pers. 632; 
Joseph. b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).* 

Tlépyapos [ perh. -μον, τό, (the gend. in the N. T. is in- 
determinate ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq.; Pape, Eigen- 
namen, s. vv. )], -ov, 7, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf. 
Curtius $413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor, 
the seat of the dynasties of Attalus and Eumenes, cele- 
brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention 
[(?) ef. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39 sq.; Birt, 
Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch- 
ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the 
Cetius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623; Plin. 5, 30 (33) ; 13, 
11 (21); Taec.ann.3,63). It was the birthplace of the 


Πέργη 


physician Galen, and had a great royal library. Mod- 
ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there: 
ον. ἢ 115 1 125 

Tlépyn, -ης; 7, [cf. the preceding word], Perge or Perga, 
a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven 
miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. On a hill near the 
town was the temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis] (Strab. 14 
p. 667; Mel.1, 14; Liv. 38, 37) : Acts xiii. 13 sq.; xiv. 
25. [BB. DD.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] * 

περί, (akin to πέρα, πέραν; [Curtius $ 359]), prep. 
joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the acc. (in class. 
Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person 
or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated 
is as it were encompassed by this act or state; Lat. cir- 
cum, circa; around, about. à 

I. with the GENrTIVE it denotes that around which 
an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, 
ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) 
[cf. W. 372 sq. (349) ]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. 
de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking, 
teaching, writing, etc., see under ἀναγγέλλω, ἀπαγ- 
γέλλω, ἀπολογοῦμαι, γογγύζω, γράφω, δηλόω, διαβεβαιοῦ- 
μαι, διαγνωρίζω, διαλέγομαι, διδάσκω, διηγοῦμαι (Heb. xi. 
32), διήγησις, εἶπον and προεῖπον, ἐπερωτάω and ἐρωτάω, 
κατηχέω, λαλέω, λέγω, λόγον αἰτέω, λόγον ἀποδίδωμι, λόγον 
δίδωμι, μαρτυρέω, μνεία, μνημονεύω, προκαταγγέλλω, προ- 
φητεύω, ὑπομιμνήσκω, χρηματίζομαι, ἦχος, φήμη, ete. ; 
after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining, 
inquiring, see under ἀκούω, γινώσκω, ἐπίσταμαι, εἶδον, 
ἐξετάζω, ζητέω, ἐκζητέω, ἐπιζητέω, ζήτημα, πυνθάνομαι, etc. ; 
after verbs of thinking, deciding, supposing, 
doubting, ete.; see under διαλογίζομαι, ἐνθυμέομαι, πέ- 
πεισμαι, πιστεύω, διαπορέω, ἐλέγχω, etc. b. as re- 
spects [A. V. often (as) touching]; a. with verbs, 
to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal 
noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con- 
cerned ; with regard to, in reference to: Acts xxviii. 21; 
Heb. xi. 20; ἡ περὶ σοῦ μνεία, 2 Tim. i. 3; ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν, 
1 Co. vii. 37; ἐπιταγὴν ἔχειν, ibid. 25; see ἐντέλλομαι, 
ἐντολή, παρακαλέω. παραμυθέομαι, πρόφασις, ἔκδικος, λαγ- 
χάνω to cast lots. B. with the neut. plur. [and sing. ] 
of the article, τὰ περί twos the things concerning a person 
or thing, i. e. what relates to, can be said about, etc.: τὰ 
περὶ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts i. 3; viii. 12 [Ree.]; 
xix. 8 [here LTr WH om. ra]; τὰ περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ, Acts 
xxiv. 22; with the gen. of a pers. one’s affairs, his con- 
dition or state: Acts xxviii. 15; Eph. vi. 22; Phil. i. 27; 
ii. 19 sq.; Col. iv. 8; in a forensic sense, one’s cause or 
case, Acts xxiv. 10; τὰ περὶ Ἰησοῦ (or τοῦ κυρίου), [the 
(rumors) about Jesus (as a worker of miracles), Mk. v. 
27T Tr mrg. br. WH]; the things (necessary to be known 
and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25; xxiii. 11; 
xxviii. 23 Rec., 31; the things that befell Jesus, his death, 
Lk. xxiv. 19; the things in the O. T. relative to him, the 
prophecies concerning him, ibid. 27; the career, death, 
appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here T Tr WH τὸ 
ete. ]. y- περί twos, absol., at the beginning of sen- 
tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1; viii.1; xvi. 1, 12; 


501 





περί 


but in other places it is more properly taken with the 
foll. verb, Mt. xxii. 31; xxiv. 36; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co. 
yii. 255' Ville Ὁ. Ὧν ἘΠῚ 7 1 Db) ly. 9; viste E WES 
(950). c. on account of ; a. of the subject- 
matter, which at the same time occasions the action 
expressed by the verb: so after verbs of accusing, see 
ἐγκαλέω, κατηγορέω, κρίνω τινὰ περί τινος, etc. ; after verbs 
expressing emotion, see θαυμάζω, ἀγανακτέω, καυχάομαι, 
σπλαγχνίζομαι, εὐχαριστέω, εὐχαριστία, αἰνέω, μέλει μοι, 
μεριμνάω; also after εὔχομαι, 3 Jn. 2, see πᾶς, II. 2 b. 
6. B. of the cause for (on account of) which a 
thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the 
action or oceurrence: Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; Jn. x. 33, 
(περὶ τῆς βλασφημίας λάβετε αὐτόν, Ev. Nic. c. 4, p. 546 
ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]); Acts xv. 2; xix. 23; xxv. 
15, 18, 24; Col: ii. 1 [RG]. y. on account of, i. e. 
for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. 
xiv. 24 RG; Lk. iv. 38; Jn. xvi. 26 ; xvii. 9, 20; Heb. 
v. 3; xi. 40 ; περί and ὑπέρ alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf. 
W. 383 (358) n. also § 50,3; B.§ 147, 21. 22; Wieseler, 
Meyer, Bp. Lghtft., Ellie. on Gal. i. 4]. 8. περί is 
used of the design or purpose for removing something 
or taking it away: περὶ ἁμαρτίας, to destroy sin, Ro. viii. 
3; διδόναι ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, to expiate, atone 
for, sins, Gal. i. 4 (where R WH txt. ὑπέρ [see as in y. 
above, and cf. ὑπέρ, I. 6]); also to offer sacrifices, and 
simply sacrifices, περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν, Heb. v. 3 [RG ὑπέρ; see 
τι. s.] ; x. 18, 26 ; περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν ἔπαθε [ἀπέθανεν], 1 Pet. iii. 
18; περὶ ἁμαρτίας sc. θυσίαι, sacrifices for sin, expia- 
tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xL) 7; cf. Num. 
viii. 8; see ἁμαρτία, 3; rà περὶ τῆς du. Lev. vi. 25; τὸ 
περὶ 7. a. Lev. xiv. 19); ἱλασμὸς περὶ τ. ἁμαρτιῶν, 1 Jn. 
ii. 2; iv. 10. 

II. with the AccusaTIVE (W. 406 (379)) ; a. 
of Place; about, around : as, about parts of the body, 
Mt.dii. 4; [xviii. 6 LT Tr WH]; Mk.i.6; ix. 42; Lk. 
xvii. 2; Rev.xv.6. about places: Lk. xiii. 8; Acts xxii. 
6; Jude 7; rà περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον, the neighborhood of 
that place, Acts xxviii. 7; of περί w. an acc. of place, 
those dwelling about a place or in its vicinity, Mk. iii. 
8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. oi]. οἱ περί τινα, those about one 
i.e. with him, his companions, associates, friends, ete., 
Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xxii. 49 ; [add, Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) 
* Shorter Conclusion "]; acc. to Grk. idiom ot περὶ τὸν 
Παῦλον, Paul and his companions (Germ. die Paulusge- 
sellschaft) [ef. W. 406 (379) ; B. $125, 8], Acts xiii. 13; 
acc. to a later Grk. usage αἱ περὶ Μάρθαν denotes Martha 
herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer, Weiss, 
Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at- 
tendants or domesties; but L Tr WH read πρὸς τὴν (for 
τὰς περὶ) Μάρθαν) ; cf. Matthiae ὃ 583, 2; Bnhdy. p. 263; 
Kühner ii. p. 220 sq.; [W. and B. u. s.]. in phrases the 
underlying notion of which is that of revolving 
about something: of persons engaged in any occupa- 
tion, of περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάται [ A. V. the workmen of like 
occupation], Acts xix. 25; περισπᾶσθαι, τυρβάζεσθαι περί 
τι, Lk. x. 40,41 [but here L T Tr WH txt. θορυβάζῃ q- v- 
(and WH mre. om. περὶ odd) ], (περὶ τὴν γεωργίαν yive- 


περιάγω 


σθαι, 2 Mace. xii. 1). b. as to, in reference to, con- 
cerning: so after ἀδόκιμος, 2 Tim. iii. 8; ἀστοχεῖν, 1 Tim. 
vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 18; vavayeiv, 1 Tim. i. 19; νοσεῖν, 1 Tim. 
vi. 4; περὶ πάντα ἑαυτὸν παρέχεσθαι τύπον, Tit. ii. 7; rà 
περὶ ἐμέ, the state of my affairs, Phil. ii. 23; αἱ περὶ ra 
λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mk. iv. 19 (ai περὶ τὸ σῶμα ἐπιθυμίαι, Ar- 
istot. rhet. 2, 12, 3; τὰ περὶ ψυχὴν x. σῶμα ἀγαθά, eth. 
Nic. 1, 8) ; cf. W. § 30,3 N. 5; [B.§ 125, 9]. c. of 
Time; in a somewhat indefinite specification of time, 
about, near: περὶ τρίτην ὥραν, Mt. xx. 3; add, 5 sq. 9; 
xxvii.46; Mk.vi.48; Actsx.[3 L T Tr WH], 9; xxii. 6. 

III. in Composition περί in the N. T. signifies 1. 
in a circuit, round about, all around, as seputyo, περι- 
βάλλω, περιαστράπτω, περίκειμαι, περιοικέω, etc., ete. 2 
beyond (because that which surrounds a thing does not 
belong to the thing itself but is beyond it): περίεργος, 
περιεργάζομαι, περιλείπω, περιμένω, περιούσιος, περισσύς, 
περισσεύω. 3. through [(?) —intensive, rather 
(cf. περιάπτω, 2)]: περιπείρω. 

περι-άγω ; impf. περιῆγον ; fr. Hdt. down; ἘΣ 
trans. a. to lead around. [cf. περί, III. 1]. b. 
i.q. to lead about with one’s self: τινά (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 
28; τρεῖς παῖδας ἀκολούθους, Dem. p. 958, 16), 1 Co. ix. 
5. 2. intrans. to go about, walk about, (Ceb. tab. c. 
6): absol. Acts xiii. 11; with an acc. of place (depend- 
ing on the prep. in compos., cf. Matthiae $ 426 ; [B. 144, 
(126); W. § 52, 2 c. ; 432 (402) ), Mt. iv. 22 [R 6; (al. 
read the dat. with or without év)]; ix. 35; xxiii. 15; 
Mk. vi. 6.* 

περι-αιρέω, -à : 2 aor. inf. περιελεῖν, [ptep. plur. περι- 
eAóvres; Pass. pres. 3 pers. sing. περιαιρεῖται] ; impf. 3 
pers. sing. zepippeiro; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
Ton; a. to take away that which surrounds or en- 
velops a thing [cf. περί, III. 1]: τὸ κάλυμμα, pass., 2 Co. 
lii. 16 (πορφύραν, 2 Mace. iv. 38; τὸν δακτύλιον, Gen. xli. 
42; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 3) ; ἀγκύρας, the anchors from 
both sides of the ship, [R. V. casting off], Acts xxvii. 
40 ; [2 aor. ptcp., absol., in a nautical sense, to cast loose, 
Acts xxviii. 13 WH (al. zeptieA6óvres) |. b. metaph. 
to take away altogether or entirely: τὰς ἁμαρτίας (with 
which one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e. 
to expiate perfectly, Heb. x. 11; τὴν ἐλπίδα, pass., Acts 
xxvi. 207 

περιάπτω: 1 aor. ptep. περιάψας; [fr. Pind. down]; 
1. to bind or tie around, to put around, [περί, 111. 1]; 
to hang upon, attach to. 2. to kindle a fire around 
[or thoroughly ; see περικρύπτω, περικαλύπτω, περικρατής, 
περίλυπος, etc.] (Phalar. ep. 5, p. 28): Lk. xxii. 55 TWH 
Trtxt* 

περιαστράπτω: 1 aor. περιήστραψα [R= L περιέστρ. 
(see B. 34 sq. (30) and Tdf.’s note)], to flash around, 
shine about, περί, 111. 1] : τινά, Acts ix. 3; περί τινα, Acts 
xxii. 6. ([4 Mace. iv. 10]; eccl. and Byzant. writ.) * 

περι-βάλλω : fut. περιβαλῶ ; 2 aor. περιέβαλον ; pf. pass. 
ptep. περιβεβλημένος ; 2 aor. mid. περιεβαλόμην ; 2 fut. 
mid. περιβαλοῦμαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
1122 to cover, cover up; also for 25 to clothe, and nny 
to veil; to throw around, to put round; a. πόλει 


502 


περιέχω 


χάρακα, to surround a city with a bank (palisade), Lk. 
xix. 43 ([R G Tr L txt. WH mrg.]; see παρεμβάλλω, 
2). b. of garments, τινά, to clothe one: Mt. xxv. 36, 
38,43; τινά τι, (o. put a thing on one, to clothe one with a 
thing [B. 149 (130); W. § 32,4 a.]: Lk. xxiii. 11 [here 
T WII om. L Tr br. ace. of pers.]; Jn. xix. 2; pass., Mk. 
xiv. 515 xvi. 5; Rev. vii. 9; 185 x15 x30:95 ΧΗ 15 van 
4 (where Rec. has dat. of the thing; [so iv. 4 L WH 
txt, but al ἐν w. dat. of thing]); xviii. 16; xix. 13; 
Mid. to put on or clothe one's self: absol. Rev. iii. 18; w. 
acc. of the thing [cf. B. $ 135, 2], Mt. vi. 31; Acts xii. 
8; passively, — in 2 aor., Mt. vi. 29; Lk. xii. 27; in 2 
aor. w. acc. of the thing, Rev. iii. 18; xix. 8; in 2 fut. 
with ἔν ru [B. ἃ. s.; see ἐν, I. 5 b. p. 2105], Rev. iii. δ." 

περι-βλέπω : impf. -mid. 3 pers. sing. περιεβλέπετο; 1 
aor. ptep. περιβλεψάμενος ; to look around. In the N. T. 
only in the mid. (to look round about one's self): absol., 
Mk. ix. 8; x. 23; foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mk. v. 32; 
τινά, lo look round on one (i. e. to look for one's self at 
one near by), Mk. iii. 5, 34; Lk. vi. 10; εἴς τινας, Ev. 
Nic. c. 4; πάντα, Mk.xi.11. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; 
Sept.) * 

περι-βόλαιον, -ov, τό, (περιβάλλω), prop. a covering 
thrown around, a wrapper; in the N. T. 1. a man- 
tle: Heb. i. 12 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Ezek. xvi. 13; xxvii. 7; 
Is. lix. 17; περιβ. βασιλικόν and περιβ. ἐκ πορφύρας, Pa- 
laeph. 52, 4). 2. aveil [A.V.a covering]: 1 Co. xi. 
15. [(From Eur. down.)]* 

περι-δέω : plupf. pass. 3 pers. sing. περιεδέδετο; [fr. Hdt. 
down]; to bind around, tie over, [cf. περί, III. 1]: τινά 
τινι, Jn. xi. 44. (Sept. Job xii. 18; Plut. mor. p. 825 e. 
[i. e. praecepta ger. reipub. 32, 21; Aristot. h. a. 9, 39 
p. 623%, 141." 

περι-δρέμω, see περιτρέχω. 

περι-εργάζομαι ; (see περί, III. 2) ; to bustle about use- 
lessly, to busy one’s self about trifling, needless, useless mat- 
ters, (Sir. iii. 23; Hdt. 3, 46; Plat. apol. p. 19 b.; al): 
used apparently of a person officiously inquisitive about 
others’ affairs [A. V. to be a busybody], 2 Th. iii. 11, as in 
Dem. p. 150, 24 [cf. p. 805, 4 ete.].* 

περίεργος, -ov, (περί and ἔργον; see περί, III. 2), busy 
about trifles and neglectful of important matters, esp. busy 
about other folks’ affairs, a busybody: 1 Tim. v.13 (often 
so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. mem. 1, 3,1 ; περ. καὶ πολυπράγ- 
pov, Epict. diss. 3, 1, 21); of things: τὰ περίεργα, imper- 
tinent and superfluous, of magie ΓΑ. V. curious] arts, 
Acts xix. 19 (so περίεργος practising magic, Aristaen. 
epp. 2, 18,2 [ef. Plut. Alex. 2, 57); cf. Kypke, Observv. 
and Kuinoel, Com. ad loc.* 

περι-έρχομαι ; 2 aor. περιῆλθον; fr. Hdt. down; to go 
about: of strollers, Acts xix. 13; of wanderers, Heb. xi. 
37; of navigators (making a circuit), Acts xxviii. 13 
[here WH περιελόντες, see zeptatpéo, a.]; τὰς οἰκίας, (0 


| go about from house to house, 1 Tim. v. 18." . 


περι-έχω; 2 aor. περιέσχον; fr. Hom. down; in the 
N. T. to surround, encompass; i. e. a. to contain: 
of the subject-matter, contents, of a writing (ἡ βίβλος 
περιέχει τὰς πράξεις, Diod. 2,1; [Joseph. c. Ap. (17:195 


4 
περιζωννύω 


1, 8,2; 2,4,13; 2,38, 17), ἐπιστολὴν περιέχουσαν τὸν τύπον 
τοῦτον, a letter οἵ which this is a sample, or a letter 
written after this form [cf. τύπος, 3], Acts xxiii. 25 [L T Tr 
WH ἔχουσαν (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. as below) ] (τὸν τρό- 
πον τοῦτον, 1 Mace. xv. 2; 2 Macc. xi. 16) ; 
§129,17n.; 144 (126) n.]: περιέχει ev (τῇ) γραφῇ; it is 
contained in (holy) scripture, 1 Pet. ii. 6 RG T Tr WH; 
absol., περιέχει ἡ γραφή (our runs), foll. by direct disc., 
ibid. Lehm. ; likewise 6 νόμος ὑμῶν περιέχει, Ev. Nicod. 
€. 4; with adverbs: περιέχειν οὕτως, 2 Macc. ix. 18; xi. 
22; καθὼς περιέχει βίβλος "Evox, Test. xii. Patr., test. 
Levi 10; ὡς ἡ παράδοσις περιέχει, Euseb. h.e. 3, 1; see 
Grimm on 1 Macc. xi. 29. b. i. q.to take possession 
of, to seize: τινά, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16; Joseph. b. j. 4, 
10, 1).* 

mept-Lovviw, or -ζώννυμι : Mid., 1 fut. περιζώσομαι; 1 
aor. impv. περίζωσαι, ptcp. περιζωσάμενος ; pf. pass. ptep. 
περιεζωσμένος ; to gird around [περί, VI. 1]; to fasten 
garments with a girdle: τὴν ὀσφύν, to fasten one’s cloth- 
ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk. 
xii. 35. Mid. to gird one’s self: absol., Lk. xii. 37; xvii. 


8; Acts xii. 8 Rec. ; τὴν ὀσφὺν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ, with truth as | 


a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one's self with knowl- 
edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14; with an ace. of the thing 
with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as σάκ- 
«ov, Jer. iv. 8; vi. 26; Lam. ii. 10; στολὴν δόξης, Sir. xlv. 
7; and in trop. expressions, δύναμιν, εὐφροσύνην, 1 S. 
ii. 4; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 33; [B. § 135, 2]) : πρὸς τοῖς pa- 
crois ζώνην, Rev. i. 13; ζώνας περὶ rà στήθη, Rev. xv. 6. 
(Arstph. Polyb. Paus. Plut, al; Sept. for 73m and 
is.) Cf. ἀναζώννυμι." 

περίτθεσις, -ews, ἡ, (περιτίθημι), the act of putting around 
[wepi, III. 1], (Vulg. cireumdatio, [A.V.wearing]) : περιθέ- 
σεως χρυσίων κόσμος, the adornment consisting of the gold- 
en ornaments wont to be placed around the head or the 
body, 1 Pet.iii.3. ([Arr.7, 22], Galen, Sext. Empir., al.) * 

περι-ΐστημι: 2 aor. περιέστην; pt. ptep. περιεστώς ; pres. 
mid. impv. 2 pers. sing. περιΐστασο (on which form see 
W.$14,1e.; [B.47 (40), who both callit passive (but 
see Veitch p. 340) ]) ; 1. in the pres., impf., fut., 
1 aor., active, fo place around (one). 2. in the perf., 
plupf., 2 aor. act., and the tenses of the mid., to stand 
around: Jn. xi. 42; Acts xxv. 7 [in L T Tr WH w. an 
acc.; cf. W.§52,4,12]. Mid. to turn one's self about sc. 
for the purpose of avoiding something, hence to avoid, shun, 
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 12; 10, 10, 4; b.j. 2, 8, 6; Antonin. 
3,4; Artem. oneir. 4, 59; Athen. 15 p. 675 e.; Dios. 
Laért. 9, 14; Jambl. vit. Pyth. 31 [p. 392 ed. Kiessl.]; 
Sext. Empir.; joined with φεύγειν, Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 4; 
with ἐκτρέπεσθαι, Leian. Hermot. $ 86; Hesych. περι- 
ἵστασο: ἀπόφευγε, àvárpeme; [cf. further, D'Orville's 
Chariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282]; this use of the verb is 
censured by Leian. soloec. 5): in the N. T. so with an 
acc. of the thing [cf. W. 1. c.], 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit. iii. 9.* 

περι-κάθαρμα, -ros, τό, (περικαθαίρω, to cleanse on all 
sides [zept, III. 1]), off-scouring, refuse: plur. rà περικ. 
τοῦ κόσμου [ A. V. the filth of the world], metaph. the most 
abject and despicable men, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 3, 


503 


intrans. [B. | 
| inals who were maintained at the public expense, that 








περιμένω 


22, 78; purgamenta. urbis, Curt. 8, 5, 8; 10, 2, 7; [see 
Wetstein on 1 Co. l. 6.7; Sept. once for 723, the price 
of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the 
Grks. used to apply the term καθάρματα to victims sacri- 
ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to erim- 


on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they 
might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the 
state.) * 

περι-καθ-ίζω : 1 aor. ptep. περικαθίσας ; 1. in class. 
Grk. trans. to bid or make to sit around, to invest, besiege, 
ἃ city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be seated 
around; so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lehm. txt.* 

περι-καλύπτω ; 1 aor. ptep. περικαλύψας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
περικεκαλυμμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to cover all around 
[wepi, ILL. 1], to cover up, cover over: τὸ πρόσωπον, Mk. 
xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold]; τὶ χρυσίῳ, Heb. 
ix. 4 (Ex. xxviii. 20).* 

περί-κειμαι ; (περί and κεῖμαι) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. 
to lie around [cf. περί, III. 1]: περί [cf. W. § 52, 4, 12] 
τι, [A. V. were hanged, Mk. ix. 42]; Lk. xvii. 2; ἔχοντες 
περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος, [ A. V. are compassed about with 
a cloud ete.], Heb. xii. 1. 2. passively [ef. B. 50 
(44)], to,be compassed with, have round one, [with ace. ; 
cf. W. $32, 5; B. $134, 7]: ἅλυσιν, Acts xxviii. 20 (8e- 
cud, 4 Macc. xii. 3); ἀσθένειαν, infirmity cleaves to me, 
Heb. v. 2 (ὕβριν, Theocr. 23,14; ἀμαύρωσιν, νέφος, Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6).* 

περι-κεφαλαία, -as, 7, (περί and κεφαλή), a helmet: 1 Th. 
v. 8; τοῦ σωτηρίου (fr. Is. lix. 17), i. e. dropping the fig., 
the protection of soul which consists in (the hope of) 
salvation, Eph. vi. 17. (Polyb.; Sept. for 33/3.) * 

περι-κρατής, -és, (κράτος), τινός, having full power over a 
thing: [meptx. γενέσθαι τῆς σκάφης, to secure], Acts xxvii. 
16. (Sus. 39 cod. Alex.; eccl. writ.) * 

περι-κρύπτω : 2 aor. περιέκρυβον (on this form cf. Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. i. p. 400 sq. ; ii. p. 226; [WH. App. p. 170; 
al. make it (in Lk. as below) a late im perfect; cf. B. 
40 (35); Soph. Lex. s. v. κρύβω ; Veitch s. v. κρύπτω ]); 
to conceal on all sides or entirely, to hide : éavróv, to keep 
one's self at home, Lk.i. 24. (Leian., Diog. Laért., 
al)* 

περι-κυκλόω, -à : fut. περικυκλώσω; to encircle, compass 
about: of a city (besieged), Lk. xix. 43. (Arstph. av. 
346; Xen. an. 6,1(3), 11; Aristot. h. a. 4, 8 [p. 5335, 11]; 
Leian., al.; Sept. for 320.) * 

περιλάμπω: 1 aor. περιέλαμψα; to shine around: twa, 
Lk. ii. 9; Acts xxvi 13. (Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

περι-λείπω : pres. pass. ptep. περιλειπόμενος (cf. περί, 
III 2); to leave over; pass. to remain over, to survive: 
1 Th. iv.15, 17. (Arstph., Plat., Eur., Polyb., Hdian.; 
2 Macc. i. 31.) * 

περίλυπος, -ov, (περί and λύπη, and so prop. *encom- 
passed with grief’ [cf. περί, III. 3]), very sad, exceedingly 
sorrowful: Mt. xxvi. 38: Mk. vi. 26; xiv. 34; Lk. xviii. 
23, 24 [where T WH om. Tr br. thecl.]. (Ps.xli. (xlii.) 
6, 12; 1 Esdr. viii. 69; Isocr., Aristot., al.) * 

περι-μένω ; (περί further [cf. περί, III. 2); to wait for: 


πέριξ 


τί, Actsi.4. (Gen. xlix. 18; Sap. viii. 12 
Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

πέριξ [on the formative or strengthening & cf. Lob. 
Paralip. p. 131], adv., fr. Aeschyl. down, round about: 
ai πέριξ πόλεις, the cities round about, the circumjacent 
cities, Acts v. 16.* 

περι-οικέω, -à; to dwell round about : 
4, 12], to be one's neighbor, Lk. i. 65. 
Xen., Lys., Plut.) * 

περί-οικος, -ov, (περί and οἶκος), dwelling around, a 
neighbor: Lk.i.58. (Gen. xix. 29; Deut.i. 7; Jer. xxx. 
(xlix.) 5; Hdt., Thue., Xen., Isocr., al.) * 

περιούσιος, -ov, (fr. περιών, περιοῦσα, ptcp. of the verb 
περίειμι, to be over and above— see ἐπιούσιος ; hence 
περιουσία, abundance, plenty ; riches, wealth, property), 
that which is one's own, belongs to one's possessions: λαὸς 
περιούσιος, a people selected by God from the other nations 
for his own possession, Tit. ii. 14; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; 
in Sept. for n^hip Dy, (Ex. xix. 5) ; Deut. vii. 6; xiv. 2; 
xxvi. 18. [CÉ.' Bp. Lghtft. * Fresh Revision’ ete. App. 
ii.]* 

περιοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (περιέχω, q. V-) ; 1. an encompass- 
ing, compass, circuit, (Theophr., Diod., Plut., al.). 2 
that which is contained ; spec. the contents of any writing, 
Acts viii. 32 (Cic. ad Attic. 13, 25; Stob. eclog. ethic. p. 
164 [ii. p. 541 ed. Gaisford]) [but A. V. place i. e. pas- 
sage; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

περι-πατέω, -@; impf. 2 pers. sing. περιεπάτεις, 3 pers. 
περιεπάτει, plur. περιεπάτουν; fut. περιπατήσω ; 1 aor. περι- 
ἐπάτησα; plupf. 3 pers. sing. περιεπεπατήκει (Acts xiv. 8 
Rec.**), and without the augm. (cf. W. $ 12, 9; [B. 33 
(29) ]) περιπεπατήκει (ibid. Rec. Grsb.) ; Sept. for T7; 
to walk; [walk about A. V. 1 Pet. v. 8]; a. prop. 
(as in Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Joseph., Ael., al.): ab- 
sol., Mt. ix. 5; xi. 5; xv. 31; Mk. ii. 9 [ Tdf. ὕπαγε]; v.42; 
viii. 24 ; xvi. 12; Lk. v. 23; vii. 22; xxiv. 17; Jn.i. 36; v. 
8sq. 11 sq.; xi. 9 sq.; Acts iii. 6, 8sq. 12; xiv. 8, 10; 1 
Pet. v. 8; Rev. ix. 20; i.q. to make one's way. make prog- 
ress, in Br disc. equiv. to to make a due use of opportu- 
nities, Jn. xii. 35°. with additions: zepur. γυμνός, Rev. 
xvi. 15; ἐπάνω (τινός), Lk. xi. 44; διά w. gen. of the thing, 
Rev. xxi. 22 [G LT Tr WH]; ἐν w. dat. of place, i.q. 
to frequent, stay in, a place, Mk. xi. 27; Jn. vii. 1; x. 23; 
Rev. ii. 1; ἔν τισι, among persons, Jn. xi. 54; [π. ὅπου 
ἤθελες, of personal liberty, Jn. xxi. 18]; metaph. ἐν τῇ 
σκοτίᾳ, to be subject to error and sin, Jn. viii. 12; xii. 
35°; 1Jn.i. 6 sq.; ii.11; ἐν with dat. of the garment 
one is clothed in, Mk. xii. 38; Lk. xx. 46; Rev. iii. 4, (ἐν 
xoxkivots, Epict. diss. 3, 22,10); ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, [ Mt. 
xiv. 25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, 49], see ἐπί, 
Α.1.1 ἃ. πα 2a.; ἐπὶ τὴν θάλ.. ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα, | Mt. xiv. 25 
LT Tr WH, 26 RG, 29], see ἐπί, C. I. 1 a.; [παρὰ τὴν 
θάλασσαν, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 Rec., see παρά, III. 1]; 
μετά τινος. to associate with one, to be one's companion, 
used of one's followers and votaries, Jn. vi. 66; Rev. iii. 
4. b. Hebraistically, to live [cf. W.32; com. in Paul 
and John, but not found in James or in Peter (cf. dva- 
στρέφω 3 b., dvaarpod) ], i. e. a. to regulate one's 


; Arstph., Thuc., 


τινά [cf. W. § 52, 
(Hdt., Arstph., 


504 





περιποίησις 


life, to conduct one’s self (cf. 686s, 2 a., πορεύω, b. y.) : 
ἀξίως τινός, Eph. iv. 1; Col.i.10; 1 Th. ii. 12; εὐσχημόνως, 
Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th. iv. 12; ἀκριβῶς, Eph. v. 15; ἀτάκτως, 
2 Th. iii. 6, 11; ὥς or καθώς τις, Eph. iv. 17; v. 8,15; otra 
7. καθώς, Phil. iii. 17; [καθὼς m. οὕτω π. 1 Jn. ii. 6 (L Tr 
txt. WH om. oíro)]; πῶς, καθώς, 1 Th. iv. 1; οὕτως, ὡς, 
1 Co. vii. 17; so that a nom. of quality must be sought 
from what follows, ἐχθροὶ rod σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Phil. 
iii. 18. witha dat. of the thing to which the life is given 
or consecrated : κώμοις, μέθαις, etc., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz- 
sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140sq.; w.a dat. of the standard 
acc. to which one governs his life [ef. Fritzsche u. s. p- 
142; also B. $133, 22 b.; W. 219 (205)]: Acts xxi. 21; 
Gal. v. 16; 2 Co. xii. 18; foll. by ἐν w. a dat. denoting 
either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or 
vice to which he is given [cf. ἐν, I.5 e. p. 210» bot.]: Ro. 
vi.4; 2 Co.iv. 2; Eph. ii. 2,10; iv. 17; v. 2; Col. iii. 77 
iv. 5; 2 Jn. 4, 6; 3 Jn. 3sq.; ἐν βρώμασι, of those who: 
have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, Heb. xiii. 9; ἐν 
Χριστῷ [see ἐν, I. 6 b.], to live a life conformed to the 
union entered into with Christ, Col.ii. 6; κατά w. an acc. 
of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living, 
[Mk. vii. 5]; 2 Jn. 6; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, 1 Co. iii. 3; κατὰ: 
cápxa, Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 4; xiv. 15; 2 Co. x. 2. p. 
i. q. to. pass (one's) life: ἐν σαρκί, in the body, 2 Co. x. 
35 διὰ πίστεως (see διά, A. T. 2),2 Co. v. 1. [Cowr.: ἐμ- 
mepuraréo. | * 

mepi-reipw: 1 aor. περιέπειρα ; to pierce through [see 
περί, III. 3]: τινὰ ξίφεσι, δόρατι, etc., Diod., Joseph., 
Plut., Leian., al.; metaph. ἑαυτὸν . . . ὀδύναις, to torture 
one’s soul with sorrows, 1 Tim. vi. 10 (ἀνηκέστοις κακοῖς, 
Philo in Flace. § 1).* 

περι-πίπτω : 2 aor. περιέπεσον ; fr. Hdt. down; so to 
fall into as to be encompassed by [cf. περί, III. 1]: λῃ- 
σταῖς, among robbers, Lk. x. 30; τοῖς πειρασμοῖς, Jas. i. 2,. 
(αἰκίαις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 2; θανάτῳ, Dan. ii. 9; 
Diod. 1, 77; νόσῳ, Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 7; συμφορᾷ, ibid. 
1, 1, 4; τοῖς δεινοῖς, Aesop 79 (110 ed. Halm); ψευδέσε. 
kx. ἀσεβέσι δόγμασιν, Orig. in Joann. t. ii. § 2; numerous 
other exx. in Passow s. v. 1. c. [L. and S. s. v. II. 3]; to 
which add, 2 Mace. vi.13; x. 4; Polyb. 1, 37, 1 and 9) ; 
εἰς τόπον τινά, upon a certain place, Acts xxvii. 41.* 

περι-ποιέω, -@: Mid., pres. περιποιοῦμαι; 1 aor. περι- 
ἐποιησάμην ; (see περί, III. 2) ; fr. Hdt. down; to make 
to remain over; to reserve, to leave or keep safe, lay by; 
mid. to make to remain for one’s self, i.e. 1. to 
preserve for one’s self (Sept. for 77) : τὴν ψυχήν, life, 
Lk. xvii. 33 T Tr WH (ras ψυχάς, Xen. Cyr. 4, 4, 10). 
2. to get for one’s self, purchase: τί, Acts xx. 28 (Is. 
xliii. 21; δύναμιν, Thue. 1, 9; Xen. mem. 2, 7, 3); τὲ 
ἐμαυτῷ, gain for myself (W. § 38, 6), 1 Tim. iii. 13 (1 
Mace. vi. 44; Xen. an. 5, 6, 17).* 

περι-ποίησις, -ews, ἡ, (περιποιέω): 1. a preserving, 
preservation: εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς; to the preserving of 
the soul, sc. that it may be made partaker of eternal sal- 
vation [A. V. unto the saving of the soul], Heb. x. 39: 


(Plat. deff. p. 415 c.). 2. possession, one's own prop- 
erly: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Is. xliii. 20 sq.) ; Eph. i. 14 (on this 


περιρραίνω 


pass. see ἀπολύτρωσις, 3). 3. an obtaining: with a 
gen. of the thing to be obtained, 1 Th. v. 9; 2 Th. ii. 14.* 

περι-ρραίνω (Tdf. zepip., with one p; see P, p) : pf. pass. 
ptep. meptpepappevos (cf. M, μ) ; (περί and ῥαίνω to sprin- 
kle) ; to sprinkle around, besprinkle: ἱμάτιον, pass., Rev. 
xix. 13 Tdf. [al. βεβαμμένον (exc. WH ῥεραντισμένον, see 
ῥαντίζω, and their App. ad loc.)]. (Arstph., Menand., 
Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.)* 

περι-ρρήγνυμι (L T Tr WH zepip., with one p; see the 
preceding word): 1 aor. ptep. plur. περιρρήξαντες ; (περί 
and ῥήγνυμι) ; to break off on all sides, break off all 
round, [cf. περί, III. 1]: τὸ ἱμάτιον, to rend or tear off all 
around, Acts xvi. 22. So of garments also in 2 Macc. 
iv. 38 and often in prof. auth. ; Aeschyl. sept. 329; Dem. 
p. 403, 3; Polyb. 15, 33, 4; Diod. 17, 35.* 

περι-σπάω, -@: impf: pass. 3 pers. sing. περιεσπᾶτο; fr. 
Xen. down; to draw around [mept, 111. 1], to draw away, 
distract; pass. metaph., to be driven about mentally, to be 
distracted : περί τι, i. e. to be over-occupied, too busy, 
about a thing, Lk. x. 40 [A. V. cumbered]; in the same 
sense with τῇ διανοίᾳ added, Polyb. 3, 105, 1; 4, 10, 
3; Diod. 1, 74; περισπᾶν τὸν ἀργὸν δῆμον περὶ τὰς ἔξω 
στρατείας, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 43; pass. to be distracted 
with cares, to be troubled, distressed, [ cf. W. 23], for my, 
Eccl. i. 13; iii. 10.* 

περισσεία, -as, 7, (περισσεύω, q. v.) ; * 1. abun- 
dance: τῆς χάριτος, Ro. v. 17; τῆς χαρᾶς, 2 Co. viii. 2; εἰς 
περισσείαν, adverbially, superabundanily, superfluously, 
[A. V. out of measure], 2 Co. x. 15, (Boeckh, Corp. in- 
scrr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. writ.). 2. su- 
periority ; preference, pre-eminence: ὙΠ", Eccl. vi. 8; for 
pm, Eccl ii. 13; x. 10. 3. gain, profit: for 
jim, Eecl. i. 3; ii. 11; iii. 9, etc. 4. residue, re- 
mains: κακίας, the wickedness remaining over in the 
Christian from his state prior to conversion, Jas. i. 21, 
see περίσσευμα, 2; [al. adhere in this pass. to the mean- 
ing which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz. 
‘excess’, ‘superabundance,’ (A. V. superfluity)].* 

περίσσευμα, -τος, τό, (περισσεύω) ; 1. abundance, 
in which one delights; opp. to ὑστέρημα, 2 Co. viii. 14 
(13),14; trop. of that which fills the heart, Mt. xii. 34 ; 
Lk. vi. 45, (Eratosth., Plut.). 2. what is left over, 
residue, remains: plur. Mk. viii. 8.* 

περισσεύω ; impf. ἐπερίσσευον (Acts xvi. 5); fut. inf. 
περισσεύσειν (Phil. iv. 12 Rec."7); 1 aor. ἐπερίσσευσα; 
Pass., pres. περισσεύομαι (Lk. xv. 17, see below); 1 fut. 
3 pers. sing. περισσευθήσεται; (περισσός, q. v.) ; Ale 
intrans. and prop. to exceed a fixed number or measure; 
to be over and above a certain number or measure: μύριοί 
εἰσιν ἀριθμὸν ... εἷς δὲ περισσεύει, Hes. fr. 14, 4 [elxix. 
(187), ed. Gottling]; hence a. to be over, to remain: 
Jn. vi. 125 τὸ περισσεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων, i. q. τὰ περισ- 
σεύοντα κλάσματα, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; περισσεύει μοί τι, 
Jn. vi.13 (Tob. iv. 16); τὸ περισσεῦσάν τινι, what remained 
over to one, Lk. ix. 17. b. to exist or be at hand 
in abundance: τινί, Lk. xii. 15; τὸ περισσεῦόν τινι, one's 
abundance, wealth, [(R. V. superfluity) ; opp. to toré- 
ρησις], Mk. xii. 44; opp. to ὑστέρημα, Lk. xxi. 4; to be 


505 





περισσός 


great (abundant), 2 Co. 1. δὴ ; ix.12; Phili 26; περισ- 
σεύει τι εἴς τινα, a thing comes in abundance, or overflows, 
unto one; something falls to the lot of one in large meas- 
ure: Ro. v.15; 2 Co. i. 5°; περισσεύω εἴς τι, to redound 
unto, turn out abundantly for, a thing, 2 Co. viii. 25 5 
ἀλήθεια τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν 
δόξαν αὐτοῦ, i. 6. by my lie it came to pass that God's 
veracity became the more conspicuous, and becoming 
thus more thoroughly known increased his glory, Ro. 
lil. 7; to be increased, τῷ ἀριθμῷ, Acts xvi. 5. c. to 
abound, overflow, i.e. a. to be abundantly furnished 
with, to have in abundance, abound in (a thing): absol- 
[A. V. to abound], to be in affluence, Phil. iv. 18; opp. 
to ὑστερεῖσθαι, ib. 12; in spiritual gifts, 1 Co. xiv. 12; 
with a gen. of the thing in which one abounds (W. § 30, 
8b.; [cf. B. $132, 12]): ἄρτων, Lk. xv. 17RGL T Tr 
mrg. B. to be pre-eminent, to excel, [cf. B. $132, 22]: 
absol. 1 Co. viii. 8; foll. by év w. a dat. of the virtues or 
the actions in which one excels [B. $ 132, 12], Ro. 
xv. 13; 1 Co. xv. 58; 2 Co. iii. 9 [here L T Tr WH om. 
ev]; viii. 7; Col. ii. 7 ; περισσ. μᾶλλον, to excel still more, 
to increase in excellence, 1 Th. iv. 1, 10; μᾶλλον x. μᾶλλον 
περισσ. Phil. i.9 ; περισσ. πλεῖον, to excel more than [ A. V. 
exceed; cf. B. § 132, 20 and 22], Mt. v. 20, (περισσ. ὑπέρ 
τινα, 1 Mace. iii. 30; τί ἐπερίσσευσεν ὃ ἄνθρωπος παρὰ τὸ 
κτῆνος; Eccl. iii. 19). 2. by later Greek usage 
transitively [cf. W. p. 23; § 38,1], to make to abound, 
Le a. to furnish one richly so that he has abun- 
dance: pass., Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; w. gen. of the thing 
with which one is furnished, pass. Lk. xv. 17 WH Trtxt.; 
Ti εἴς Twa, to make a thing to abound unto one, to confer a 
thing abundantly upon one, 2 Co. ix. 8; Eph. i. 8. b. 
to make abundant or excellent: τί, 2 Co. iv. 15; to cause 
one to excel: τινά, w. a dat. of the thing, 1 Th. iii.12. (ras 
&pas, to extend the hours beyond the prescribed time, 
Athen. 2 p. 42 b.) [Cowr.: ὑπερ-περισσεύω. * 
περισσός, -7, -óv, (fr. περί, q. v. III. 2), fr. Hes. down, 
Sept. for ^nv, ^i", ete.; exceeding some number or meas- 
ure or rank or need ; 1. over and above, more than 
is necessary, superadded : τὸ 7. τούτων, what is added to 
[ A. V. more than; c£. B. § 132, 21 Rem.] these, Mt. v. 37; 
ἐκ περισσοῦ, exceedingly, beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 
[WH om. Tr br. ἐκ z. ]; xiv. 31 Rec.; ὑπὲρ ἐκ περισσοῦ 
(written as one word ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ [q. v.]), exceeding 
abundantly, supremely, Eph. iii. 20 [cf. B. u.s.]; 1 Th. 
iii. 10; v. 13 [RG WH txt.]; περισσόν pot ἐστιν, it is 
superfluous for me, 2 Co. ix. 1; περισσὸν ἔχειν, to have 
abundance, Jn. x. 10 (of μὲν ... περισσὰ ἔχουσιν, oi δὲ 
οὐδὲ τὰ ἀναγκαῖα δύνανται πορίζεσθαι, Xen. oec. 20, 1); 
neut. compar. περισσότερόν τι, something further, more, 
Lk. xii. 4 (L Tr mrg. περισσόν) ; περισσότ. the more, ibid. 
48; [περισσότερον πάντων etc. much more than all etc. 
Mk. xii. 33 T Tr txt. WH]; adverbially, somewhat more 
[R. V. somewhat abundantly], 2 Co. x. 8; (Vulg. abun- 
dantius [ A.V. more abundantly]) i. e. more plainly, Heb. 
vi. 17; μᾶλλον περισσότερον, much more, Mk. vii. 36; 
περισσότερον πάντων, more [abundantly] than all, 1 Co. 
xv.10; with an adj. it forms a periphrasis for the com- 


περισσοτέρως 


par. περισσότερον κατάδηλον, more [abundantly] evident, 
Heb. vii. 15 [ef. W. § 35, 1]. 2. superior, extraor- 
dinary, surpassing, uncommon: Mt. v. 47 [A. V. more 
than others]; τὸ περισσόν, as subst., pre-eminence, supe- 
riority, advantage, Ro. iii. 1; compar. περισσότερος, more 
eminent, more remarkable, (οὐκ ἔσῃ περισσότερος, Gen. 
xlix. 3 Symm.; περιττότερος φρονήσει, Plut. mor. p. 57 f. 
de adulatore etc. 14): Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 26, although 
in each pass. περισσότερον can also be taken as neut. 
(something) more excellent (Vulg. plus [R. V. much more 
thanete.]); with substantives : περισσότερον κρίμα, i. e. 
a severer, heavier judgment, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Ree.; 
Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; τιμή. greater honor, more [abun- 
dant] honor, 1 Co. xii. 23°, [24 ; εὐσχημοσύνη, ibid. 23°]; 
λύπη, 2 Co. ii. 7.* 

περισσοτέρως, adv., (fr. περισσῶς, q. v.), [ef. W. $11, 
2c.; B.69 (61)]; 1. prop. more abundantly (so in 
Diod. 13, 108; Athen. 5 p. 192f.); in the N. T. more, 
in a greater degree; more earnestly, more exceedingly, [cf. 
W. 248 (228)]: Mk. xv. 14 Rec.; 2 Co. vii. 15; xi. 23; 
Gal. i. 14; Phil i. 14; 1 Th. ii. 17; Heb. ii. 1; xiii. 19; 
opp- to ἧττον, 2 Co. xii. 15; περισσοτέρως μᾶλλον, much 
more, [ R.V. the more exceedingly], 2 Co. vii. 13. 2. 
especially, above others, [. A. V. more abundantly]: 2 Co. 
ἢ 5 τὰ ΔΝ 

περισσῶς, (περισσός, 4. v.), adv., beyond measure, ex- 
traordinarily (Bur. ; i.q. magnificently, Polyb., Athen.) ; 
i. q. greatly, exceedingly: ἐκπλήσσεσθαι, Mk. x. 26; κράζειν, 
Mt. xxvii. 23 and GL T Tr WH in Mk. xv. 14; ἐμμαίνε- 
σθαι, Acts xxvi. 11.* 

περιστερά, -ás, ἡ, Hebr. 737, a dove: Mt. iii. 16; x. 16; 
xx1.12:; ΜῈ 1: LO se 155 ΠΕ. 11:247; 411522: 002:32:192: 
ii. 14,16. [From Hdt. down.] . 

περι-τέμνω (Lon. περιτάμνω) ; 2 aor. περιέτεμον ; Pass., 
pres. περιτέμνομαι; pf. ptep. περιτετμημένος ; 1 aor. περι- 
«τμήθην; [fr. Hes. down]; Sept. chiefly for 512; to cut 
around [cf. περί, III. 1]: τινά, to circumcise, cut off one's 
prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only 
the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day 
after birth, but subsequently also * proselytes of right- 
eousness’ were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced 
into the number of his people; [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Cir- 
cumeision; Oehler's O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) 88 87, 88; 
Müller, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21; Jn. 
vii. 22; Acts vii. 8; xv. 5; xvi.3; xxi. 21; of the same 
rite, Diod. 1, 28; pass. and mid. to get one's self circum- 
cised, present one's self to be circumcised, receive circum- 
cision [cf. W. $38, 3]: Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec. ; 1 Co. vii. 18; 
Gal.ii.3; v.2sq.; vi. 12 sq.; with rà αἰδοῖα added, Hat. 
2, 36 and 104 ; Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 5; c. Ap. 1, 22. Since 
by the rite of cireumcision a man was separated from 
the unclean world and dedicated to God, the verb is 
transferred to denote the extinguishing of lusts and the 
removal of sins, Col. ii. 11, cf. Jer. iv. 4; Deut. x. 16, and 
eccl. writ. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 3].* 

περι-τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. περιτιθέασιν (Mk. xv. 17 ; see 
reff. in ἐπιτίθημι) ; 1 aor. περιέθηκα; 2 aor. ptep. περιθείς, 
περιθέντες ; fr. Hom. down; a. prop. to place 


506 





| place, Mk. vi. 55. 


περιφέρω 


around, set about, [ef. περί, ITI. 1]: τινί τι, as φραγμὸν τῷ 
ἀμπελῶνι, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; to put a garment on 
one, Mt. xxvii. 28; στέφανον, put on (encircle one’s head 
with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31; Plat. Alcib. 2 
p-151 a.) ; τί τινι, to put or bind one thing around anoth- 
er, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; Mk. xv. 36 ; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop. 
τινί τι, to present, bestow, confer, a thing upon one (so in 
class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down, as ἐλευθερίαν, Hdt. 3, 142; 
δόξαν, Dem. p. 1417, 3 ; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq.; [L. and 
S. s. v. II.]: τὸ ὄνομα, Sap. xiv. 21; Thue. 4, 87) : τιμήν, 
1Co. xii. 28; Esth. i. 20.* 

περι-τομή, -is, ἡ, (περιτέμνω), circumcision (on which 
see περιτέμνω) ; a. prop. a. the act or rite of 
circumcision : Jn. vii. 22 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. iv. 11; Gal. 
v. 11; Phil. iii. 5; of ἐκ τῆς περιτ. (see ἐκ, II. 7), the cir- 
cumcised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ro. 
iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the Jews, 
Acts xi. 2; Gal. ii.12; Tit.i. 105 οἱ ὄντες ἐκ περιτ. Col. 
av. 11. B. the state of circumcision, the being cir- 
cumcised: Ro. ii. 25-28; iii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. 6; 
vi. 15; Col. iii. 11 ; ἐν περιτομῇ ὧν, circumcised, Ro. iv. 
10. y. by meton. ‘the circumcision’ for οἱ περιτμη- 
θέντες the circumcised, i.e. Jews: Ro. iii. 30; iv. 9, 12; 
xv. 8; Gal. ii. 7-9; Eph. ii. 11; οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς πιστοί, 
Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris- 
tians, Acts x. 45. b. metaph. a. of Chris- 
tians: (ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν) ἡ περιτομή, separated from the un- 
clean multitude and truly consecrated to God, Phil. iii. 
3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.) ]. B. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀχειρο- 
ποίητος, the extinction of the passions and the removal 
of spiritual impurity (see περιτέμνω, fin.), Col. ii. 11*; ἡ 
περιτομὴ καρδίας in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing; 
περιτ. Χριστοῦ, of which Christ is the author, Col. ii. 11°. 
(The noun περιτομή occurs three times in the O. T., viz. 
Gen. xvii. 13; Jer. xi. 16 ; for n», Ex. iv. 26 ; besides 
in Philo, whose tract περὶ περιτομῆς is found in Mangey’s 
ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter’s ed. iv. pp. 282-284]; Jo- 
seph. antt. 1, 10,5; [18,11 fin.; c. Ap. 2, 13, 1. 6]; plur., 
anit. 1, 12, 2.) * 

περι-τρέπω ; (o turn about [mept, III. 1], to turn; to 
transfer or change by turning : τὶ or τινὰ εἴς τι, à. pers. or 
thing into some state; once so in the N. T. viz. σὲ eis 
μανίαν περιτρέπει, is turning thee mad, Acts xxvi. 24; 
τοὺς παρόντας eis χαρὰν περιέστρεψε; Joseph. antt. 9, 4. 4; 
τὸ θεῖον εἰς ὀργὴν περιτραπέν, 2, 14, 1. In various other 
uses in Grk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat. on].* ᾿ 

περι-τρέχω : 2 aor. [περιέδραμον T Tr WH], ptep. περι- 
δραμόντες [RGL]; fr. [Hom.], Theogn., Xen., Plat. 
down ; to run around, run round about: with an ace. of 
(Sept. twice for wiv, Jer. v. 1; Am. 
viii. 12.) * 

περι-φέρω ; pres. pass. περιφέρομαι ; fr. Hdt. down; to 
carry round: to bear about everywhere with one, τί, 
2 Co. iy. 10; to carry hither and thither, τοὺς κακῶς 
ἔχοντας, Mk. vi. 55 (where the Evangelist wishes us to 
conceive of the sick as brought to Jesus while he is 
travelling about and visiting different places); pass. to 
be driven [A. V. carried] about: παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκα- 


περιφρονέω 


λίας, i.e. in doubt and hesitation to be led away now to 
this opinion, now to that, Eph. iv. 14. In Heb. xiii. 9 
and Jude 12 for περιφέρ. editors from Griesbach on have 
restored zapadqep.* 

περι-φρονέω, -ῶ ; 1. to consider or examine on all 
sides [mept, III. 1], i. e. carefully, thoroughly, (Arstph. 
nub. 741). 2. (fr. περί, beyond, III. 2), to set one's 
self in thought beyond (exalt one's self in thought above) a 
pers. or thing; to contemn, despise: τινός (cf. Kühner 
$ 419, 1 b. vol. ii. p. 325), Tit. ii. 15 (4 Mace. vi. 9; vii. 
16; xiv. 1; Plut., al. ; rod ζῆν; Plat. Ax. p. 372; Aeschin. 
dial. Socr. 3, 22).* 

περί-χωρος, -ov, (περί and χῶρος), lying round about, 
neighboring, (Plut., Aelian., Dio Cass.); in the Scrip- 
tures 7 περίχωρος, sc. γῆ, the region round about [q. v. in 
B. D.]: Mt. xiv. 35; Mk.i.28; vi. 55[R GL txt.]; Lk. 
iii. 3; iv. 14, 97 ; vii. 17; viii. 37; Acts xiv. 6, (Gen. xix. 
17; Deut. iii. 13, ete. ; τῆς γῆς τῆς περιχώρου, Gen. xix. 
28 cod. Alex.) ; ἡ περίχ. τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii. 
10sq.; for 37° 133, the region of the Jordan [cf. B. D. 
u. s.]); by meton. for its inhabitants: Mt.iii.5. (τὸ 
περίχωρον and τὰ περίχωρα, Deut. iii. 4; 1 Chr. v. 16; 2 
Chr. iv. 17, etc.) * 

περί.ψημα, -ros, τό, (fr. περιψάω ‘to wipe off all round’; 
and this fr. περί [q. v. III. 1], and ψάω ‘to wipe,’ ‘rub’), 
prop. what is wiped off; dirt rubbed off; offscouring, 
scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as περι- 
κάθαρμα, q.v. Suidas and other Greek lexicographers 
s. v. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert public 
calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an 
offering to Poseidon; hence ἀργύριον . . . περίψημα τοῦ 
παιδίου ἡμῶν γένοιτο, (as if to say) let it become an expi- 
atory offering, a ransom, for our child, i. e. in comparison 
with the saving of our son's life let it be to us a despi- 


cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz- | 


sche; [cf. also Müller on Barn. ep. 4, 9]). It is used 
of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire 
trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1; 
18,1; [see Bp. Lghtft.'s note on the former passage ].* 

περπερεύομαι ; (to be zépzepos, i. e. vain-glorious, brag- 
gart, Polyb. 32, 6, 5; 40, 6, 2; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14); to 
boast one’s self [ A. V. vaunt one's self]: 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An- 
tonin. 5,5; the compound ἐμπερπερεύεσθαι is used of 
adulation, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex- 
tolling another excessively, in Cie. ad Attic. 1, 14. 
Hesych. περπερεύεται" κατεπαίρεται) ; cf. Osiander [or 
Wetstein] on 1 Co. l. e. [Gataker on Mare. Antonin. 5, 
5 p. 143].* : 

Περσίς [lit. ‘a Persian woman’], 5, acc. τίδα, Persis, a 
Christian woman: Ro. xvi. 12.* 

πέρυσι, (fr. πέρας), adv., last year; the year just past: 
ἀπὸ πέρυσι, for a year past, a year ago, [W. 422 (393)], 
2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2. ([Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Plut., 
Lcian.) * 

πετάομαι, -ὥμαι; a doubtful later Grk. form for the 
earlier πέτομαι (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 581; Bttm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. p. 271 sq.; ef. W. 88 (84); [B. 65 (58); Veitch 
s. v.]) ; to fly: in the N. T. found only in pres. ptep. πε- 


507 


Πέτρος 


| τώμενος, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xiv. 6; xix. 17, 





where since Griesbach πετόμενος has been restored.* 
πετεινός, -7, -óv, (Attic for πετηνός, fr. πέτομαι), flying, 
winged; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. πετεινά 
and ra πετεινά, as subst., flying or winged animals, birds : 
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4 [GL T Tr WH]; Lk. xii. 24; Ro. i. 
23; Jas. iii. 7; rà mer. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Sept. for D'DUn qi 
see οὐρανός, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i. e. flying in the 
heavens (air), Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 4 
[Rec.], 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 58 ; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12 [here 
LT Tr WH om. τά]; xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]* 
πέτομαι : [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for m; to fly: Rev. 
iv. 7; viii. 13; xii. 14; xiv. 6; xix. 17; see meráopat.^ 
πέτρα, -as, 7j, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for ybp and ὭΣ; 
a rock, ledge, cliff; a. prop. : Mt. vii. 24 sq. ; xxvil. 
51,60; Mk. xv. 46 ; Lk. vi. 48; 1 Co. x.4 (on which see 
πνευματικός, ὃ a.) ; a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.; 
rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6, 13. b. a rock, large stone: 
Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like 
a rock, by reason of his firmness and strength of soul: 
Mt. xvi. 18 [some interpp. regard the distinction (gen- 
erally observed in classie Greek ; see the Comm. and cf. 
Schmidt, Syn. ch. 51, $8 4-6) between πέτρα, the massive 
living rock, and zérpos, a detached but large fragment, 
as important for the correct understanding of this pas- 
sage; others explain the different genders here as due 
first to the personal then to the material reference. 
Cf. Meyer, Keil, al.; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].* 
Πέτρος, -ov, 6, (an appellative prop. name, signifying 
“ἃ stone,' ‘arock,’ ‘a ledge’ or ‘cliff’; used metaph. of a 
soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock, 
Soph. O. R. 334; Eur. Med. 28; Herc. fur. 1397; answer- 
ing to the Chald. Κηφᾶς, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter, the 
surname of the apostle Simon. He was a native of 
Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see 
"Ieávvgs, 3, and ᾿Ιωνᾶς, 2), and dwelt with his wife at 
Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14 ; Mk.i.30; Lk. iv. 38, cf. 1 Co. 
ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol- 
lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 
16; Lk. v. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com- 
panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17; Lk. v. 10; Jn. i. 40-42 
(41-43); and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and 
firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu- 
ture establishment of the kingdom of God, he honored 
with the name of Peter, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; Mt. xvi. 18; Mk. 
ii. 16. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn, 
and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and 
John the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima- 
ey of his divine Master. After having for some time 
presided, in connection with John and James the brother 
of our Lord [see ᾿Ιάκωβος, 3], over the affairs of the 
Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad 
to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii. 9; 1 Co. 
ix.5; 1 Pet. v.13; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; for Papias 
states that Peter employed Mark as ‘interpreter’ (ἑρμη- 
veutns), an aid of which he had no need except beyond 
the borders of Palestine, especially among those who 
spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word 


πετρώδης 


‘interpreter’ here, see Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In- 
trod. p. xxix. sqq.]). But just as, on the night of the 
betrayal, Peter proved so far faithless to himself as thrice 
to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some 
time afterwards at Antioch he made greater conces- 
sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than Christian 
liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul 
for his weakness and ‘dissimulation’ (ὑπόκρισις), Gal. 
ii. 11 sqq. Nevertheless, in the patristic age Jewish 
Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of 
Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence 
of their narrow views and practices. This is not the 
place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions 
concerning Peter’s being the founder of the church at 
Rome and bishop of it for twenty-five years and more; 
the discussion of them may be found in Hase, Protes- 
tant. Polemik gegen die róm.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p. 
123 sqq. ; [ef. Schaff, Church History, 1882, vol. i. $8 25, 
26; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2, vol. xi. p. 524 sqq., and (for 
refi.) p. 537 sq.]. This one thing seems to be evident 
from Jn. xxi. 18 sqq., that Peter suffered death by cru- 
cifixion [cf. Keil ad loc.; others doubt whether Christ's 
words contain anything more than a general prediction 
of martyrdom]. If he was crucified at Rome, it must 
have been several years after the death of Paul [Cf. 
BB. DD. and reff. u. .] He is called in the N. T., at 
one time, simply Σίμων (once Συμεών, Acts xv. 14), and 
(and that, too, most frequently [see B. D. s. v. Peter, sub 
fin. (p. 2459 Am. ed.) ]), Πέτρος and Κηφᾶς (q. v.), then 
again Σίμων Πέτρος, Mt. xvi. 16 ; Lk. v. 8; Jn.[i. 42 (43)]; 
vi. [8], 68; xiii. 6, 9, 24, [36]; xviii. 10, 15, 25 ; xx. 2,6; 
xxi. 2 sq. 7, 11, 15 ; once Συμεὼν Πέτρος (2 Pet. i. 1 where 
L WH txt. Σίμων) ; Σίμων ὁ λεγόμενος Πέτρος, Mt. iv. 18; 
x.2; Σίμων ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος, Acts x. 185 xi. 13; 
Σίμων ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος, Acts x. 5, 32. 

πετρώδης, -es, (fr. πέτρα and εἶδος ; hence prop. * rock- 
like,’ ‘having the appearance of rock’), rocky, stony : τὸ 
πετρῶδες and τὰ πετρώδη, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii. 
5, 20; Mk. iv. 5, 16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45 
(44), Plut., al.) * 

πήγανον, -ov, τό, [thought to be fr. πήγνυμι to make 
solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; cf. Vanicek 
p.457], rue: Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist. plant. 1, 3, 4; 
Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52); Plut., al.) [B. D.s.v.; Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. etc. p.478; Carruthers in the “ Bible Educa- 
tor,” iii. 216 sq.]* 

πηγή, 775, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for 1y5, ἢ», 
po; a fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Rec. in 12; 
2 Pet. ii. 17; ὕδατος ἁλλομένου, Jn. iv. 14; τῶν ὑδάτων, 
Rev. viii. 10; xiv. 7; xvi. 4; of a well fed by a spring, 
Jn.iv.6. ζωῆς πηγαὶ ὑδάτων, Rev. vii. 17; ἡ 7. τ. ὕδατος 
τῆς ζωῆς, Rev. xxi. 6, (on both pass. see in Can, p. 274*) ; 
ἡ π. τοῦ αἵματος, a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29." 

πήγνυμι: 1 aor. ἔπηξα;; fr. Hom. down; to make fast, 
to fix; to fasten together, to build by fastening together : 
σκηνήν, Heb. viii. 2 [A. V. pitched. ΟΟΜΡ.: προσ-πή- 
yvvpa. ] * 

πηδάλιον, -ov, τό, (fr. πηδόν the blade of an oar, an 


508 





πικραίνω 


oar), fr. Hom. down, aship’s rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on 
the plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th 
ed., p. 183 sqq.; B. D. s.v. Ship (2); cf. Graser, Das 
Seewesen des Alterthums, in the Philologus for 1865, 
p. 266 sq.]; Jas. iii. 4.* 

πηλίκος, -7, -ov, (fr. ἧλιξ [?]), interrog., how great, how 
large: in a material reference (denoting geometrical 
magnitude as disting. fr. arithmetical, πόσος) (Plat. Meno 
p. 82d.; p.83e.; Ptol. 1, 3, 3; Zech. ii. 2, [6]), Gal. vi. 
11, where cf. Winer, Rückert, Hilgenfeld, [Hackett in 
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epistle; but see Bp. Lghtft. or Meyer]. 
in an ethical reference, i. q. how distinguished, Heb. vii. 
4.* 

πηλός, -ov, ó, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. 
clay, which the potter uses (Is. xxix. 16; xli. 25; Nah. 
iii. 14) : Ro. ix. 21. b. i. q. mud [wet ‘clay’]: Jn. 
ix. 6, 11, 14 sq.* 

πήρα, -as, 7, «t wallet (a leathern sack, in which travel- 
lers and shepherds carried their provisions) [ A. V. scrip 
(q. v. in B.D.)]: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix.3; x. 4; 
xxii. 35 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., 
Leian., al.; with τῶν βρωμάτων added, Judith xiii. 10.) * 

πῆχυς. gen. πήχεως (not found in the N. T.), gen. plur. 
πηχῶν contr. fr. Ionie πηχέων (Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17; 
1 K.vii.3 (15),39 (2) ; Esth. vii. 9; Ezek. xl. 5) ace. to 
later usage, for the earlier and Attic πήχεων, which is 
common in the Sept. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 245 sq.; [ WH. 
App. p. 157]; W. $9, 2 e.), 6, the fore-arm i. e. that part 
of the arm between the hand and the elbow-joint (Hom. 
Od. 17,38; Il. 21,166, etc.) ; hence a cubit, (ell, Lat. ulna), 
a measure of leneth equal to the distance from the joint 
of the elbow to the tip of the middle finger [i. e. about 
one foot and a half, but its precise length varied and is 
disputed; see B. D. s. v. Weights and Measures, II. 1]: 
Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [on these pass. cf. ἡλικία, 1 a.]; 
Jn. xxi.8; Rev. xxi. 17. (Sept. very often for 78.) * 

máto (Doric for πιέζω, cf. B. 66 (58)): 1 aor. ézíaca; 
1 aor. pass. ἐπιάσθην; 1. to lay hold of: τινὰ τῆς 
χειρός, Acts iii. 7 [Theoer. 4, 35]. 2. to take, cap- 
ture: fishes, Jn. xxi. 3, 10; θηρίον, pass., Rev. xix. 20, 
(Cant. ii. 15). to take i.e. apprehend: a man, in order 
to imprison him, Jn. vii. 30, 32, 44; viii. 20; x. 39; xi. 
57; Acts xii. 4; 2 Co. xi. 32. [Comp.: ὑπο-πιάζω.7" 

πιέζω : pf. pass. ptep. πεπιεσμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to 
press, press together: Lk. vi.38. Sept. once for 173, Mic. 
vi. 157 

πιθανολογία, -as, 7, (fr. πιθανολόγος ; and this fr. πιθανός, 
on which see πειθός, and λόγος), speech adapted to per- 
suade, discourse in which probable arguments are ad- 
duced; once so in class. Grk., viz. Plat. Theaet. p. 162 e.; 
in a bad sense, persuasiveness of speech, specious dis- 
course leading others into error: Col.ii. 4, and several 
times in eccl. writers.* 

[πιθός, see πειθός and cf. I, «] 

πικραίνω: fut. πικρανῶ ; Pass., pres. πικραίνομαι ; 1 aor. 
emtxpavOny; (πικρός, q. ν.) ; 1. prop. to make bitter: 
τὰ ὕδατα, pass., Rey. viii. 11; τὴν κοιλίαν, to produce 
a bitter taste in the stomach (Vulg. amarico), Rev. x. 


πικρία 


9 sq. 2. trop. to embitter, exasperate, i.e. render 
angry, indignant; pass. to be embittered, irritated, (Plat., 
Dem.,al.) : πρός twa, Col. iii. 19 (Athen. 6 p. 242 c.; ἐπί 
τινα, Ex. xvi. 20; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 15; 1 Esdr. iv. 31; 
[£v τινι, Ruth i. 20]); contextually i. q. to visit with bitter- 
ness, to grieve, (deal bitterly with), Job xxvii. 2; 1 Macc. 
iii. 7. [Comp.: παρα-πικραίνω. * 

πικρία, -as, 9, (πικρός), bitterness: χολὴ πικρίας, 1. q. 
χολὴ πικρά [W. 34, 3 b. ; B. § 132, 10], bitter gall, i. q. 
extreme wickedness, Acts viii. 23; ῥίζα πικρίας [reff. as 
above], a bitter root, and so producing bitter fruit, Heb. 
xii. 15 (fr. Deut. xxix. 18 cod. Alex.), οἵ. Bleek ad loc. ; 
metaph. bitterness, i.e. bitter hatred, Eph. iv. 31; of 
speech, Ro. iii. 14 after Ps. ix. 28 (x.7). (In various 
uses in Sept., [Dem., Aristot.], Theophr., Polyb., Plut., 
al.) * 

πικρός, -á, -όν, [fr.r. meaning ‘to cut,’ ‘prick’; Vaniéek 
534; Curtius 8100; Fick i. 145], fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for 7; bitter: prop. Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to τὸ γλυκύ); 
metaph. harsh, virulent, Jas. iii. 14.* 

πικρῶς, ady., [fr. Aeschyl. down], bitterly : metaph. 
ἔκλαυσε, i.e. with poignant grief, Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxii. 
62 [here WH br. the cl.]; cf. πικρὸν δάκρυον, Hom. Od. 
4, 153.* 

Πιλάτος, [L] Tr better Πιλᾶτος ([on the accent in 
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; cf. Chandler § 326; B. 
p. 6n.]; W. $6, 1 m.), T WH incorrectly Πειλᾶτος [but 
see Tf. Proleg. p. 84 sq.; WH. App. p. 155; and cf. e, 
ι7, (a Lat. name, i.q. ‘armed with a pilum or javelin,’ like 
Torquatus i. q. ‘adorned with the collar or neck-chain’; 
[so generally; but some would contract it from pileatus 
i.e. ‘wearing the felt cap’ (pileus), the badge of a manu- 
mitted slave; cf. Leyrer in Herzog as below; Plumptre 
in B. D. s. v. Pilate (note) ]), του, 6 [on the use of the art. 
with the name cf. W. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the 
fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judea and 
Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus 
Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some 
writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s. v.) call Pilate the sixth procura- 
tor, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had 
charge for a time, during the absence of Archelaus at 
Rome, shortly after the death of Herod; cf. Joseph. 
antt. 17, 9, 3.] He was sent into Judea in the year 
26 A. D., and remained in office ten years; (cf. Keim, 
Jesus von Naz. iii. p. 485 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 226 sq.]). 
Although he saw that Jesus was innocent, yet, fearing 
that the Jews would bring an accusation against him be- 
fore Caesar for the wrongs he had done them, and dread: 
ing the emperor's displeasure, he delivered up Jesus to 
their blood-thirsty demands and ordered him to be eru- 
cified. At length, in consequence of his having ordered 
the slaughter of the Samaritans assembled at Mt. Geri- 
zim, Vitellius, the governor of Syria and father of the Vi- 
tellius who was afterwards emperor, removed him from 
office and ordered him to go to Rome and answer their 
accusations; but before his arrival Tiberius died. Cf. 
Joseph. antt. 18, 2-4 and ch. 6,5; b. j. 2, 9, 2 and 4; Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium $38; Tac. ann. 15, 44. Eusebius (h. e. 2, 


509 





πίναξ 


7, and Chron. ad ann. I. Gaii) reports that he died by his 
own hand. Various stories about his death are related 
in the Evangelia apocr. ed. Tischendorf p. 426 sqq. 
[Eng. trans. p. 231 sqq.]. He is mentioned in the N.T. 
in Mt. xxvii. 2 sqq.; Mk. xv. 1 sqq.; Lk. iii. 1; xiii. 15 
xxiii. 1 sqq.; Jn. xviii. 29 sqq.; xix.1sqq.; Acts iii. 13; 
iv. 27; xiii 28; 1 Tim. vi. 13. A full account of him is 
given in Win. RWB.s. v. Pilatus; [BB. DD. ibid.]; 
Ewald, Geschichte Christus’ u. seiner Zeit, ed. 3 p. 82 
sqq. ; Leyrer in Herzog xi. p. 663 sqq. [ed. 2 p. 685 sqq.]; 
Renan, Vie de Jésus, 14me éd. p. 413 sqq. [Eng. trans. 
(N. Y. 1865) p. 333 sqq.]; Alépper in Schenkel iv. p. 
581 sq.; Schürer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. $17 c. p. 252 sqq.; 
[ Warneck, Pont. Pilatus u.s.w. (pp. 210. Gotha, 1867) ].* 

πίμπλημν (a lengthened form of the theme IIAEQ, 
whence πλέος, πλήρης [ef. Curtius § 366 ]): 1 aor. ἔπλησα; 
Pass., 1 fut. πλησθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐπλήσθην ; fr. Hom. on; 
Sept. for N25, also for yar (to satiate) and pass. paw 
(to be full); to fill: τί, Lk. v. 7; τί τινος [W. § 30, 8 b.], 
a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48; [Jn. xix. 29 
RG]; in pass., Mt. xxii. 10; Acts xix. 29; [ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς, 
Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg.; cf. W.u.s.note; B.$132,12]. what 
wholly takes possession of the-mind is said (o fülit: 
pass. φόβου, Lk. v. 26; θάμβους, Acts iii. 10; ἀνοίας, Lk. 
vi. 11; (Xov, Acts v. 17 ; xiii. 45; θυμοῦ, Lk. iv. 28; Acts 
iii. 10; πνεύματος ἁγίου, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67; Acts ii. 4; iv. 
8,31; ix.17; xiii. 9. prophecies are said πλησθῆναι, 
i. e. to come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. xxi. 
22 GL T Tr WH (for Ree. πληρωθῆναι). time is said 
πλησθῆναι, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. finished, 
elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304) ; B. 267 (230)]; ii. 
6, 21sq.; so 8221, Job xv. 32; and xn to (ful-) fill the 
time, i. e. lo complete, fill up, Gen. xxix. 27; Job xxxix. 2. 
[Cowr.: ἐμ-πίπλημι.} * 

πιμπράω (for the more common πίμπρημι [ef. Curtius 
§ 378, Vanicek p. 510 sq.]) : [pres. inf. pass. πιμπρᾶσθαι ; 
but RGL Tr WH πίμπρασθαι fr. the form πίμπρημι (Tf. 
ἐμπιπρᾶσθαι. q. v.)]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [ (yet only the 
aor. fr. πρήθω)] down; to blow, to burn, [onthe connection 
betw. these meanings cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s.v. πρήθω]; 
in the Scriptures four times fo cause to swell, to render 
tumid, [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. ]: γαστέρα, Num. v. 22; pass. to 
swell, become swollen, of parts of the body, Num. v. 21, 27: 
Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in ἐμπιπράω). [Comp. ép- 
πυπράω.)" 

πινακίδιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of πινακίς, -i8os), [Aristot., 
al.]; a. a small tablet. b. spec. a writing-tab- 
let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. mwaxida; see the fol. word]; 
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74.* 

[πινακίς, -ίδος, ἡ, i. 4- πινακίδιον (q. V-) : Lk. i. 63 Trmrg. 
(Epict., Plut., Artem., al.) *] 

πίναξ, -akos, 6, (com. thought to be fr. IIINOZ a pine, 
and so prop. ‘a pine-board’; ace. to the conjecture of 
Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. πνάξ for πλάξ [i. e. 
anything broad and flat (cf. Eng. plank)] with ¢ in- 
serted, as in mwurds for πνυτός [acc. to Fick i. 146 fr. 
Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff ]), fr. Hom. down ; Joa 
board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter : Mt. xiv. 8, 


πίνω 


11; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lchm. br.], 28; Lk. xi. 39; Hom. Od. 
1, 141; 16, 49; al* 

πίνω; impf. ἔπινον ; fut. πίομαι [cf. W. 90 sq. (86)], 2 
pers. sing. πίεσαι (Lk. xvii. 8 [ (see reff. in xataxavydo- 
pa.) ]) ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) πέπωκε R G, but 
LT WH mrg. plur. -καν, for which L ed. ster. Tr txt. 
WH txt. read πέπτωκαν (see γίνομαι) ; 2 aor. ἔπιον, impv. 
mie (Lk. xii. 19), inf. πιεῖν ([Mt. xx. 22; xxvii. 34 (not 
Tdf.); Mk. x. 38]; Acts xxiii. 12 [not WH], 21; Ro. 
xiv. 21 [not WH], etc.), and in colloquial form ziv (Lehm. 
in Jn. iv. 9; Rev. xvi. 6), and πεῖν (T Tr WH in Jn. iv. 
7,9sq.; T WH in 1 Co. ix. 4; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6; Tin Mt. 
xxvii. 34 (bis); WH in Acts xxiii. 12, 21; Ro. xiv. 21, 
and often among the var. of the codd.) — on these forms 
see [esp. WH. App. p. 170]; Fritzsche, De conformatione 
N. T. critica ete. p. 27 sq.; B. 66 (58) sq. ; [Curtius, Das 
Verbum, ii. 103]; Sept. for nw; [fr. Hom. down]; to 
drink: absol, Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi. 25; 
figuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re- 
fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, Jn. vii. 37 ; 
on the various uses of the phrase ἐσθίειν x. πίνειν see in 
ἐσθίω, a.; τρώγειν k. πίνειν, of those living in fancied 
security, Mt. xxiv. 38; πίνω with an acc. of the thing, to 
drink a thing [cf. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [ἃ T om. 
WH br. thecl.], 31; xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; xvi. 18; Rev. 
xvi. 6; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15; xii. 29; Ro. 
xiv. 21; 1 Co. x. 4 [cf. W. $40, 3 b.]; τὸ αἷμα of Christ, 
see αἷμα, fin.; τὸ ποτήριον i. e. what isin the cup, 1 Co. x. 
21; xi. 27, etc. (see ποτήριον, a.). ἡ γῆ is said πίνειν τὸν 
ὑετόν, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Heb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 11; 
Hdt. 3, 117; 4, 198; Verg. ecl. 3, 111 sat prata bibe- 
runt). πίνω ἐκ Ww. a gen. of the vessel out of which 
one drinks, ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 
1 Co. x. 4 [cf. above]; xi. 28, (Arstph. eqq. 1289) ; ἐκ w. 
a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one 
drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, Jn. iv. 
13 sq.; ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου (or θυμοῦ), Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3 [L 
om. Tr WH br. τοῦ οἴνου] ; ἀπό w. a gen. of the drink, 
Lk. xxii. 18. [Cf.B.$132, 7; W. 199 (187). Cour: 
kara-, συμ-πίνω. | 

πιότης. -7ros, 1), (πίων fat), fatness : Ro. xi. 17. 
tot., Theophr., al.; Sept. for 191.) x 

πιπράσκω : impf. ἐπίπρασκον ; pf. mrézpaka; Pass., pres. 
ptep. πιπρασκόμενος ; pf. ptep. πεπραμένος ; 1 aor. ἐπρά- 
θην ; (fr. περάω to cross, to transport to a distant land) ; 
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for 732; to sell: τί, 
Mt. xiii. 46 [on the use of the pf., cf. Soph. Glossary ete. 
Introd. § 82,4]; Acts ii. 45; iv. 34; ν. 4; w. gen. of price, 
Mt. xxvi. 9; Mk. xiv. 5; Jn. xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14); τινά, 
one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25; hence metaph. πεπραμέ- 
vos ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, [ A. V. sold under sin] i. e. entirely 
under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14 
(ἐπράθησαν τοῦ ποιῆσαι τὸ πονηρόν, 2 K. xvii. 17; 1 Mace. 
i. 15, cf. 1 K. xx. (xxi.) 25; w.a dat. of the master to 
whom one is sold as a slave, Lev. xxv. 39; Deut. xv. 12; 
xxviii. 68; Bar. iv. 6; Soph. Trach. 252; ἑαυτόν τινι, of 
one bribed to give himself up wholly to another's will, 
τῷ Φιλίππῳ, Dem. p. 148, 8).* 


(Aris- 


510 








πίπτω 


πίπτω ; [impf. ἔπιπτον (Mk. xiv. 35 T Tr mrg. WH)]; 
fut. πεσοῦμαι; 2 aor. ἔπεσον and ace. to the Alex. form 
(received everywhere by Lehm. [exe. Lk. xxiii. 30], 
Tdf. [exe. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exe. ibid.], WH; and also 
used by R Gin Rev. i. 17; v. 14; vi. 13; xi. 16; xvii. 10) 
ἔπεσα (cf. [ WH. App. p.164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]; Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 724 sq.; Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and 
see ἀπέρχομαι init.) ; pf. πέπτωκα, 2 pers. sing. -«es (Rev. 
ii. 5 T WII; see κοπιάω), 3 pers. plur. τκαν ( Rev. xviii. 
3, Led. ster. Tr txt. WH txt.; see γίνομαι) ; (fr. MET, 
as ríkro fr. TEKQ [ef. Curtius, Etymol. § 214; Ver- 
bum, ii. p. 398]) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for ^2) ; 
to fall ; used 1. of descent from a higher place 
to a lower; a. prop. to fall (either from or upon, 
i.q. Lat. incido, decido): ἐπί w. ace. of place, Mt. x. 29; 
xiii. 5, [7], 8; xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mre. br. the vs.]; 
Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. 6 [here T Tr WH xaraz.], 8 Rec. 
Rey. viii. 10; εἴς τὰ (of the thing that is entered; into), 
Mt. xv. 14; xvii. 15; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. ἐπί] sq.; Lk. vi. ' 
39 R G Lmrg. (but L txt. T Tr WH ἐμπίπτ.); vii. 8GL 
T Tr WH, [14; xiv. 5 L T Tr WH]; Jn. xii. 24; eis 
(upon) τὴν γῆν, Rev. vi. 13; ix. 1; ἐν μέσῳ, w. gen. of the 
thing, Lk. viii. 7; παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4; 
Lk. viii. 5; 10 fall from or down: foll. by ἀπό w. gen. of 
place, Mt. xv. 27; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. ἐκ; Lk. xvi. 21]; 
Acts xx. 9; foll. by ἐκ w. gen. of place, [ Mk. xiii. 25 L T 
Tr WH]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1; i. q. to be thrust down, Lk. 
x. 18. b. metaph.: οὐ πίπτει ἐπί τινα ὁ ἥλιος, i. e. 
the heat of the sun does not strike upon them or in- 
commode them, Rev. vii. 16; [ἀχλὺς x. σκότος, Acts xiii. 
11 L' T Tr WIL]; ὁ κλῆρος πίπτει ἐπί τινα, the lot falls 
upon one, Acts i. 26; φόβος πίπτει ἐπί twa, falls upon or 
seizes one, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; [τὸ 
πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, Acts x. 44 Lehm.] ; πίπτω ὑπὸ κρίσιν, to 
fall under judgment, come under condemnation, James v. 
12 [where Rec." eis ὑπόκρισιν]. 2. of descent from 
an erect to a prostrate position (Lat. labor, ruo; prolabor, 
procido ; collabor, ete.) ; a. properly; a. to full 
down: ἐπὶ λίθον, Lk. xx. 18; λίθος πίπτει ἐπί τινα, Mt. 
xxi. 44 [Tom. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18; 
τὸ ὄρος ἐπί τινα, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi. 16. B. to be . 
prostrated, fall prostrate; of those overcome by terror 
or astonishment or grief : χαμαί, Jn. xviii. 6; εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος, 
Acts xxii. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Acts ix. 4; [ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, 
Mt. xvii. 6]; or under the attack of an evil spirit: ἐπὶ 
τῆς γῆς, Mk. ix. 20; or falling dead suddenly : πρὸς τοὺς 
πόδας τινὸς ὡς νεκρός, Rey. i. 17; πεσὼν ἐξέψυξε, Acts v. 
5; πίπτ. παρὰ (1, Τ Tr WH πρὸς) τοὺς πόδας τινός, ibid. 10; 
absol. 1 Co. x. 8; στόματι μαχαίρας, Lk. xxi. 24; absol. of 
the dismemberment of corpses by decay, Heb. iii. 17 (Num. 
xiv. 29, 32). y- to prostrate one’s self; used now of 
suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship 
to one: ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Mk. xiv. 35; ptep. with προσκυνεῖν, as 
finite verb, Mt. ii. 11; iv. 9; xviii. 26; πίπτειν κι προσ- 
κυνεῖν, Rev. v. 14; xix. 4; ἔπεσα προσκυνῆσαι, Rey. xxii. 8; 
πίπτ. εἰς τοὺς πόδας (αὐτοῦ), Mt. xviii. 29 Rec.; εἰς [T Tr 
WH πρὸς τ. πόδας τινός, Jn. xi. 325 πρὸς τ. πόδας τινός, 
Mk. v. 22; [παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τινός, Lk. viii. 41] ; ἔμπροσθεν 


Πισιδία 


τῶν ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix. 10; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Rev. iv. 10; 
v. 8; ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, Mt. xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; ἐπὶ πρόσ- 
wrov παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τινός, Lk. xvii. 10; πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς 
πόδας προσεκύνησε, Acts x. 25; πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον προσ- 
κυνήσει, 1 Co. xiv. 25; ἐπὶ τὰ πρόσωπα καὶ προσκυνεῖν, 
Rev. vii. 11 [ἐπὶ πρόσωπον Rec.]; xi. 16. 8. to fall 
out, fall from: θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς πεσεῖται, i. q. shall 
perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Rec. e. to fall down, 
fall in ruin: of buildings, walls, etc., Mt. vii. 25, [27]; 
Lk. vi. 49 (where T Tr WH συνέπεσε); Heb. xi. 30; 
οἶκος ἐπ᾽ οἶκον πίπτει, LK. xi. 17 [see emt, C. I. 2 e-]; πύρ- 
yos ἐπί τινα, Lk. xiii.4; σκηνὴ ἡ πεπτωκυῖα, the tabernacle 
that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of 
David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay 
[ef. σκηνή, fin.], Acts xv. 16. of a city : ἔπεσε; i. e. has 
been overthrown, destroyed, Rev. xi. 13; xiv. 8; xvi. 19; 
xviii. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (li.) 8). b. metaph. a. 
to be cast down from a state of prosperity : πόθεν πέπτωκας, 
from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain- 
ment thou hast declined, Rev. ii. 5 G L T Tr WH (see 
above ad init.). B. to fall from a state of upright- 
ness, i.e. to sin: opp. to ἑστάναι, 1 Co. x. 12; opp. to 
στήκειν, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by 
the sinning [ef. W. $31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4; to fall into a 
state of wickedness, Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt. 
[see πίνω]. y- to perish, i.e. to come to an end, dis- 
appear, cease: of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L T Tr WH [R. V. 
fail]; to lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings, 
precepts, ete., Lk. xvi. 17 (Gare οὐ χαμαὶ πεσεῖται 6 τι ἂν 
εἴπῃς, Plat. Euthyphr. § 17; irrita cadunt promissa, Liv. 
2, 31). i.q.to be removed from power by death, Rev. xvii. 
10; to fail of participating in, miss a share in, the Mes- 
sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22]; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see 
ev, L 5 1.)- 
παρα-, περι-, προσ-. συμ- πίπτω. | * 

Πισιδία, -as, 7, Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded 
by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and 
Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; xiv. 24. [B.D. s.v. Pisi- 
dia.]* 

Πισίδιος, -a, -ov, i. q. Πισιδικός, belonging to Pisidia: 
᾿Αψιόχεια ἡ Πισιδία, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia 
(see ᾿Αντιόχεια, 2): Acts xiii. 14 L T Tr WH 

πιστεύω ; impf. ἐπίστευον; fut. πιστεύσω; 1 aor. émi- 
στευσα: pi. πεπίστευκα; plupf. (without augm., cf. W. 
$12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]) πεπιστεύκειν (Acts xiv. 23); 
Pass., pf. πεπίστευμαι; 1 aor. ἐπιστεύθην; (πιστός); Sept. 
for row; in class. Grk. fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Thuc. 
down; to believe, i. e. 1. intrans. to think to be 
true; to be persuaded of; to credit, place confidence 
in; a. univ.: the thing believed being evident 
from the preceding context, Mt. xxiv. 23, [26]; Mk. xiii. 
21; 1 Co. xi. 18; w. an acc. of the thing, Acts xiii. 41 
(LT Tr WH 6 for Rec. 6); to credit, have confidence, 
foll. by ort, Acts ix. 26; τινί, to believe one's words, Mk. 
xvi. 13 sq.; 1 Jn. iv. 1; τινὶ ὅτε, Jn. iv. 21; τῷ ψεύδει, 2 Th. 
ii. 11; περί τινος, ort, Jn. ix. 18. b. spec., in a moral 
and religious reference, πιστεύειν is used in the N. T. of 
the conviction and trust to which a man is impelled by a 


Comp.: dva-, ἀντι-. ἀπο-, €k-, €v-, ἐπι-, κατα-: 


611 





πιστεύω 


certain inner and higher prerogative and law of his soul; 
thus it stands a. absol. to trust in Jesus or in God 
as able to aid either in obtaining or in doing something: 
Mt. viii. 13; xxi. 22; Mk. v. 36; ix. 23sq.; Lk. viii. 50; 
Jn. xi. 40; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi. 23; [Heb. xi. 
6]; τῷ λύγῳ, à (ὃν) εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Jn. iv. 50. β. 
of the credence given to God's messengers and their words, 
w. a dat. of the person or thing: Moücei, Jn. v. 46. to 
the prophets, Jn. xii. 38; Acts xxiv. 14; xxvi. 27; Ro. 
x.16; ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ois ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται, to place reli- 
ance on etc. Lk. xxiv. 25. to an angel, Lk. i. 20; foll. 
by ὅτι, ibid. 45. to John the Baptist, Mt. xxi. 25 
(26), 32; Mk. xi. 31; Lk. xx. 5. to Christ's words, 
Jn.iii.12; v.38,46 sq.; vi. 30; viii. 45 sq.; x. [37], 38*; 
τοῖς ἔργοις of Christ, ibid. 38°. to the teachings of evan- 
gelists and apostles, Acts viii. 12; τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, 2 Th. 
ii. 12; ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον, the testimony was believed, 
2 Th.i. 10 [cf. W. § 39, La.; B. 175 (152)]; τῇ γραφῇ, Jn. 
ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, to put faith in the gospel, Mk. 
i. 15 [B. 174 (151 54.); cf. W. 213 (200 sq.)] (Ignat. ad 
Philad. 8, 2 [(but see Zahn's note) ; cf. Jn. iii. 15 in y. be- 
low]). 4. used especially of the faith by which a 
man embraces Jesus, i.e. a conviction, full of joyful 
trust, that Jesus is the Messiah— the divinely appointed 
author of eternal salvation in the kingdom of God, con- 
joined with obedience to Christ: mor. τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 
εἶναι Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; ἐπιστεύθη (was 
believed on [ef. W. § 39, 1a.; B. 175 (152)]) ἐν κόσμῳ, 
1 Tim. iii. 16. the phrase πιστεύειν εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, εἰς 7. 
υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, etc., is very common; prop. to have a faith 
directed unto, believing or in faith to give one’s self up to, 
Jesus, ete. (cf. W. 213 (200 sq.) ; [B. 174 (151)]): Mt. 
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 [RG L Tr txt.]; Jn. ii. 11; iii. 15 
RG, 16, 18, 36; vi. 29, 35, 40, 47 [R G L]; vii. 5, [38], 
39, 48; viii. 30; ix. 35 sq.; x. 42; xi. 20 sq. 45, 48; xii. 
11, 37, 42, 44, [46] ; xiv. 1, 12; Xvi. 9; xvii. 20; Acts x. 
43; xix.4; Ro. x. 14; Gal.ii.16; Phil. i. 29; 1 Jn. v. 10; 
1 Pet.i.8; εἰς τὸ φῶς, Jn. xii. 36; εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Jn. 
i. 12: ii. 23; iii. 18; 1Jn. v. 13; τῷ ὀνόμ. αὐτοῦ, to com- 
mit one's self trustfully to the name (see ὄνομα, 2p. 448*), 
1 Jn. iii. 23; ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον, to have a faith di- 
rected towards, etc. (see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. a. p. 235° [cf. W. 
and B. u.s., also B. $147, 25]) : Mt. xxvii. 42 T Tr txt. 
WH; Jn. iii. 15 L txt. ; Acts ix. 425 xi. 17; xvi. 31; xxii. 
19, [(cf. Sap. xii. 2)]; ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, to build one’s faith on, 
to place one’s faith upon, [see ἐπί, B. 2 a. y. p. 233°; B. 
u.s.]: Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 6; ἐν 
αὐτῷ, ἴο put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [L mrg.; cf. T Tr 
WH also (who prob. connect ἐν αὐτῷ with the foll. ἔχῃ ; 
cf. Westcott, Com. ad loc., Meyer, al.)] (cf. Jer. xii. 6; 
Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where mot. ἔν τινὲ means to put 
confidence in one, to trust one; [cf. Mk. i. 15 above, 
B. fin.]) ; ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν, on this rests our faith 
[ A. V. by this we believe], Jn. xvi. 30; with the simple 
dative, τῷ κυρίῳ, to (yield faith to) believe [cf. B. 173 
(151)]: Mt. xxvii. 42 RG L Tr mrg.; Aets v. 14; xviii. 
8; supply τούτῳ before o$ in Ro. x. 14; to trust in Christ 
[God], 2 Tim. i. 12; διά τινος, through one's agency to 


112122: 


πιστεύω 


be brought to faith, Jn. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; διὰ Ἰησοῦ εἰς 
Θεόν, 1 Pet. i. 21 RG Trmrg.; διὰ τῆς χάριτος, Acts xviii. 
27; διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτῶν els ἐμέ, Jn. xvii. 20; διά τι; Jn. 
iv. 89, [41], 42; χὶν. 11. πιστεύω foll. by ὅτι with ἃ sen- 
tence in which either the nature and dignity of Christ 
or his blessings are set forth: Jn. vi. 69; viii. 24; x. 38° 
RG; xi. 27, [42]; xiii. 19; [xiv. 10]; xvi. 27, 30; xvii. 
8,21; 1 Jn. v. 1, 5; Ro. vi. 8; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; μοὶ ὅτι, Jn. 
xiv. 11; ri, Jn. xi. 26; πιστεύω σωθῆναι, Acts xv. 11; 
the simple πιστεύειν is used emphatically, of those who 
acknowledge Jesus as the saviour and devote themselves 
to him: Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds avr]; Lk. viii. 12 sq.; 
xxii. 67; Jn.i.50 (51); iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44; vi. 
36, 64; ix. 38; x. 25 sq.; xii. 39, 47 Rec.; xvi. 30; xx. 
31; Acts v. 14 s (xiii. 39]; xv. 5; xviii. 8; [xxi. 25]; Ro. 
i. 16; iii. 22; iv. 11 ; x. 4; xv. 13; 2 Co.iv. 135 Eph. i. 
13,[19]; 2 Th. i. 10; Heb. iv. 3; with ἐξ ὅλης καρδίας 
added, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; νυ. ἃ dat. of instr. καρδίᾳ, Ro. 
X. 10; ptep. pres. of πιστεύοντες, as subst.: Acts ii. 44; 
Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal.iii. 22; [Eph. i. 19]; 1 Th. 
1. 7: i. 10,18; 2 Th.3.10 Ree; 1 Pet. 11; 75 3-070 
are on the point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 94 sq.; aor. 
ἐπίστευσα (marking entrance into a state; see βασιλεύω, 
fin.), 1 became a believer, a Christian, [ A. V. believed]: 
Acts iv. 4; viii. 18; xiii. 12, 48; xiv. 1; xv. 7; xvii. 12, 
34; Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 2, 11; with the addi- 
tion of ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον (see above), Acts ix. 42;  ptep. m- 
orevoas, Acts xi. 21; xix. 2; ὁ πιστεύσας, Mk. xvi. 16; 
plur., ibid. 17; Actsiv.32; of πεπιστευκότες, they that have 
believed (have become believers): Acts xix. 18; xxi. 20; 
[on (John’s use of) the tenses of πιστεύω see Westcott on 
1 Jn. iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul's 
conception of τὸ πιστεύειν εἰς Χριστόν, the prominent ele- 
ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested 
and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus, 
particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap- 
pears esp. in Ro. iii. 25; iv. 24; x. 9;-1 Th. iv. 14; but 
in John’s conception, it is the metaphysical relationship 
of Christ with God and close ethical intimacy with him, 
as well as the true ‘life’ to be derived from Christ as 
its source; ef. Riickert, Das Abendmahl, p. 251. More- 
over, πιστεύειν is used by John of various degrees of 
faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with- 
in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, Jn. 11. 23 (ef. 24) ; 
viii. 31; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus 
as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah, 
Jn. vii. 31; and to signify that one’s faith is preserved, 
strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it 
ought to reach, xi. 15; xiii. 19; xiv. 29; xix. 35; xx. 31; 
1 Jn. v. 13^ Rec.; [ef. reff. s. v. πίστις, fin.]. πιστεύειν 
is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded 
that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by 
that fact God declared him to be his Son and the Mes- 
siah: Jn. xx. 8, 25,29; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ πιστ. ὅτι ὁ θεὸς αὐτὸν 
ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν, Ro. x. 9 [cf. B. § 133, 19]. Since ace. 
to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the 
author of salvation, ὁ πιστεύων repudiates all the various 
things which aside from Christ are commended as means 


512 





πίστις 


of salvation (such 6. g. as abstinence from flesh and 
wine), and understands that all things are lawful to him 
which do not lead him away from Christ; hence πιστεύει 
(ris) φαγεῖν πάντα, hath faith to eat all things or so that. 
he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2; cf. Rückert ad loc.; [W. 
844,3 b.; per contra B. 273 sq. (235) . 8. πιστεύειν 
used in ref. to God has various senses: aa. it de- 
notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence: ὅτι ὁ 
eds εἷς ἐστιν, Jas. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ap- 
propriate trust, absol. Jude 5 ; eis θεόν, Jn. xii. 44 ; xiv. 1; 
i.q.to believe and embrace what God has made known 
either through Christ or concerning Christ: τῷ 
θεῷ, Jn. v. 24; Acts xvi. 34; Tit. iii. 8; 1 Jn. v. 10; ἐπὶ 
τὸν θεόν, Ro. iv. 5; τὴν ἀγάπην, ἣν ἔχει ὁ θεός, 1 Jn. iv. 16; 
εἰς τὴν μαρτυρίαν, ἣν KTA., 1 Jn. v. 10. BB. to trust: 
τῷ θεῷ, God promising a thing, Ro. iv. 8, 17 (on which 
see κατέναντι) ; Gal. iii. 6; [Jas. ii. 23]; absol. Ro. iv. 
18; foll. by ὅτι, Acts xxvii. 25. €. mor. is used in 
an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men: 
ἡ ἀγάπη πιστεύει πάντα, 1 Co. xiii. 7. τὸ πιστεύειν is 
opp. to ἰδεῖν, Jn. xx. 29; to ὁρᾶν, ibid. and 1 Pet. i. 8, 
(Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), cf. 2 Co. v. 7; to διακρίνε- 
σθαι, Ro. iv. 19 sq.; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas.i. 6; to ὁμολογεῖν, 
RO; χ. 9. 2. transitively, τινί vt, to intrust a thing 
to one, i. e. to his fidelity: Lk. xvi. 11; ἑαυτόν τινι, Jn. ii. 
24; pass. πιστεύομαί τι, [0 be intrusted with a thing: Ro. 
1n. 2s L Co. axe dive Gale aie agus lentes ele Det Tut 
Tit. i. 8, (Ignat. ad Philad. 9; exx. fr. prof. auth. are 
given in W. $39, 1a.). . Onthe grammat. constr. of the 
word ef. D. $ 133, 4 [and the summaries in Ellicott on 
1 Tim. i.16; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer 8. v.]. It 
does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and 
3 Jn. [Cf.the reff. s. v. πίστις, fin.]* 

πιστικός, -7, -όν, (πιστός), pertaining to belief; a. 
having the power of persuading, skilful in producing be- 
lief: Plat, Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that , 
can be relied on: γυνὴ πιστ. kai oikovpós kai πειθομένη TO 
ἀνδρί, Artem. oneir. 2, 32; often so in Cedrenus [also (of 
persons) in Epiph., Jn. Mosch., Sophron. ; cf. Soph. Lex. 
s. V.]; of commodities i. q. δόκιμος, genuine, pure, un- 
adulterated: so vapdos πιστική [but A.V. spike- (ὡς e. 
spiked) nard, after the nardi spicati of the SE 
Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul- 
terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26 ; Diosc. de mater. med. 1, 6 
and 7); hence metaph. τὸ πιστικὸν τῆς καινῆς διαθήκης 
κρᾶμα, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9,8 [p. 439 4.1. Cf. the 
full diseussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596 
sqq.; Lücke on Jn. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq.; W. 97 (92) sq.; 
[esp. Dr. Jas. Morison on Mk. 1. c. ].* 

πίστις, -ews, ἡ, (πείθω [q. v. ]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind. ], 
Aeschyl., Hdt. down; Sept. for 73:98, several times for 
Nas and now; faith; i. e. 1. conviction of the 
truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.; 
θαυμάσια καὶ μείζω πίστεως, Diod. 1, 86); in the N. T. of 
a conviction or belief respecting man's relationship to God 
and divine things, generally with the included idea of 
trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with it: 
Heb. xi. 1 (where πίστις is called ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις, 


“πίστις 


πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων) ; Opp. to εἶδος, 2 Co. 
v. 7; joined with ἀγάπη and ἐλπίς, 1 Co. xiii. 13. at 
when it relates to God, πίστις is the conviction that God 
exists and is the creator and ruler of all things, the pro- 
vider and bestower of eternal salvation through Christ: 
Heb. xi. 6; xii. 2; xiii. 7; πίστις ἐπὶ θεόν, Heb. vi. 1; ἡ 
πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, by which ye turned to God, 
1 Th. 1. 8; τὴν m. ὑμῶν x. ἐλπίδα εἰς θεόν, directed unto 
God, 1 Pet. i. 21; with a gen. of the object [faith i] 
{τῶν θεῶν, Eur. Med. 414; τοῦ θεοῦ, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16, 
5; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. vi. 17 sq. p. 132; [ef. 
Meyer on Ro. iii. 22; also Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 
as below; W. 186 (175)]): ἡ m. τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ θεοῦ 
τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν (Christ) ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν, Col. ii. 12; 
διὰ πίστεως, by the help of faith, Heb. xi. 33, 39; κατὰ 
πίστιν, i. q. πιστεύοντες, Heb. xi. 13; πίστει, dat. of means 
or of mode by faith or by believing, prompted, actuated, by 
faith, Heb. xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of 
cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in 
reference to Christ, it denotes a strong and welcome 
conviction or belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom 
we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of Gad (on this 
see more at length in πιστεύω, 1 b. y.): a. univ.: 
w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
Ro. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 10; iii. 22, Eph. iii. 12; ᾿Ιησοῦ, Rev. 
xiv. 12; Χριστοῦ, Phil. iii. 9; τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. ii. 
20; τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Jas. ii. 1; μοῦ (i. e. 
in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in- 
terpretation, faith in God of which Jesus Christ is the 
author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314 
sqq., and H. P. Berlage, Disquisitio de formulae Paulinae 
πίστις ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ significatione. Lugd. Bat. 1856) ; 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Phil. i. 27; ἀληθείας, 2 Th. ii. 13. with 
Prepositions: εἰς (toward [cf. eis, B. II. 2 a.]) τὸν κύριον 
ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦν, Acts xx. 21; eis Χριστόν, Acts xxiv. 24; 
xxvi 18; ἡ eis Χριστὸν πίστις ὑμῶν, Col. ii. 5; [πίστιν 
ἔχειν els ἐμέ, Mk. ix. 42 Tr mrg.]; πρὸς τὸν kip. Philem. 
δ [L Tr WH eis] ([see πρός, I. 1¢.; cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad 
loc.]; unless here we prefer to render πίστιν jidelity [see 
2, below]; cf. Meyerad loc. and W. $50, 2); m. ἡ ἐν Xp. 
*Inco?, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 
15; ἡ m. ὑμῶν ἐν Xp. "Ino. Col. i. 4; ἡ κατά τινα (see κατά, 
II. 1 e.) πίστις ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ, Eph. i. 15; ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, 
Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. Meyer]. πίστις [ef. W. 120 (114)] 
and ἡ πίστις simply: Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8; xiv. 22, 
27; xv.9; xvii. 31; Ro.[iii. 27 (on which see νόμος, 
3)] 31; iv. 14; v. 2[L Tr WH br. τῇ πίστει] ; ix. 32; x. 
'8, 17; xii. 3, 6; 1 Co. [xii. 9 (here of a charism)]; 
xvi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 13; [viii. 7]; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25 
Sq.; νι δ vi. 10; Eph.ii.8; iii.17; iv. 5; vi. 16; 2 Th. 
i.4; 1 Tim. i. 2, 4 (on the latter pass. see οἰκονομία), 
19; ii. 7 (on which see ἀλήθεια, I. 2 c.) ; iii. 9; iv. 1, 6; 
y. 85 v1:10,12, 21; 2 Tim;1/ 55 11: 18; 118. 105 13 75 
Tit. 1. 1, 4, 13; 1. 2; iii. 15; Jas. d. δ᾽ 1 Pet.i. 5;*2 Pet. 
1. 1, ὅ. with a gen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32; Ro. i. 
8, 12; 1 Co.ii. 5; xv. 14, 17; 2 Co. i. 24; Phil. i. 25; ii. 
17; 1 Th. iii. 2, 5-7, 10; 2 Th. i. 3; iii. 2; Philem. 6; 
Jas. i. 3; 1 Pet.i. 7, 9 [here WII om. ven.]; 1 Jn. ν. 4; 
33 


518 











πίστις 


Rev. xiii. 10; πλήρης πίστεως x. πνεύματος, Acts vi. 5; 
πνεύματος k. πίστεως, Acts xi. 24; πίστεως Kk. δυνάμεως, 
Acts vi. 8 Rec.; τῇ πίστει ἑστηκέναι, Ro. xi. 20; 2 Co. i. 
24; ἐν τῇ πίστει στήκειν, 1 Co. xvi. 13; εἶναι, 2 Co. xiii. 5; 
μένειν, 1 Tim. ii. 15; ἐμμένειν τῇ π. Acts xiv. 22; ἐπιμέ- 
νειν, Col. i. 23; στερεὸς τῇ π. 1 Pet. v. 95 στερεοῦμαι τῇ 7. 
Acts xvi. 5; βεβαιοῦμαι ἐν [LT Tr WH om. ἐν] τῇ π. Col. 
ii. 7. Since faith is a power that seizes upon the soul, 
one who yields himself to it is said ὑπακούειν τῇ πίστει, 
Acts vi. 7; hence ὑπακοὴ τῆς πίστεως, obedience ren- 
dered to faith [W. 186 (175)], Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; 6 ἐκ 
πίστεως Sc. ὦν, depending on faith, i.q. ὁ πιστεύων [see 
ex, IL 7], Ro. iii. 26; plur., Gal. iii. 7, 9; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως 
᾿Αβραάμ, he who has the same faith as Abraham, Ro. iv. 
16; ἐκ πίστεως εἶναι, to be related, akin to, faith [cf. ἐκ, 
u. s.], Gal. iii. 12. 
iii. 11; δικαιοσύνη ἡ ἐκ πίστ. Ro. ix. 30; ἡ ἐκ πίστ. dix. 
Ro. x. 6; δικαιοσ. ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν, springing from 
faith (and availing) to (arouse) faith (in those who as 
yet have it not), Ro. i. 17; δικαιοσύνη ἡ διὰ πίστεως 
Χριστοῦ, . . . ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ Six. ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει, Phil. iii.9; pass. 


δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως, Ro. i. 17;' Gal. 


δικαιοῦσθαι πίστει, Ro. iii. 28; δικαιοῦν τινα διὰ πίστεως 
Χριστοῦ, Gal. ii. 16; διὰ v. πίστεως, Ro. iii. 80 ; Ou. τινα 
ἐκ πίστεως, ibid.; Gal. iii. 8; pass., Ro. v. 1; Gal. iii. 24; 
εὐαγγελίζομαι τὴν πίστιν, to proclaim the glad tidings 
of faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23; ἀκοὴ πίστεως, instruction 
concerning the necessity of faith [see ἀκοή, 3 a.], Gal. iii. 
2,5; ἡ πίστις is joined with ἡ ἀγάπη: 1 Th. iii. 6; v. 
8; 1 Tim.i.14; 1.15; iv. 12; vi.11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; with 
a subj. gen. Rev. ii. 19; πίστις δ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη, 
Gal. v. 6; ἀγάπη μετὰ πίστεως, Eph. vi. 23; ἀγάπη ἐκ πί- 
στεως ἀνυποκρίτου, 1 Tim. i. 5; πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἡ ἐν Xpt- 
στῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, 2 Tim. i. 13 ; φιλεῖν τινα ἐν πίστει, Tit. iii. 15 
(where see De Wette); ἔργον πίστεως (cf. ἔργον, 3 p. 
248» near bot.), 1 Th. i. 3; 2 Th. i. 11. B. in an 
ethical sense, persuasion or conviction (which springs 
from faith in Christ as the sole author of salvation; cf. 
πιστεύω, 1 b. y. fin.) concerning things lawful for a Chris- 
tian: Ro. xiv. 1, 23; πίστιν ἔχειν, ibid. 22. c. univ. 
the religious belief of Christians ; a. subjectively : 
Eph. iv. 13, where ef. Meyer; in the sense of a mere 
acknowledgment of divine things and of the claims of 
Christianity, Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20, 22, 24, 26. B. ob- 
jectively, the substance of Christian faith or what is be- 
lieved by Christians: 4 παραδοθεῖσα 7. Jude 3 ; ἡ ἁγιωτάτη 
ὑμῶν πίστις, ib. 20. There are some who think this 
meaning of the word is to be recognized also in 1 Tim. 
1.4, 19; ii. 7; iii. 9; iv. 1, 6; v.85 vi. 10, 21, (cf. Pffei- 
derer, Paulinismus p. 468 [Eng. trans. ii. p. 200]) ; but 
Weiss (Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. $ 107 a. note) correctly ob- 
jects, “ πίστις is rather the form in which the truth (as 
the substance of riecht doctrine) is subjectively appro- 
priated^; [cf. Meyer on Ro. i. 5 (and Prof. Dwight’s 
additional note); Ellicott on Gal. i. 23; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Gal. p. 157]. d. with the predominant idea of 
trust (or confidence) whether in God orin Christ, spring- 
ing from faith in the same: Mt. viii. 10; xv. 28; Lk. vii. 
9, 50; xvii. 5; Heb. ix. 28 Lehm. ed. ster. ; x. 22; Jas. 


πιστός ὃ 
1.6; with a gen. of the subject: Mt. ix. 2, 22, 29; xv. 


28; Mk. ii. 5; v.34; x. 52; [Lk. v. 20]; viii. 25,48; xvii. 
19; xviii 42; ν΄. a gen. of the object in which trust is 
placed: τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, Acts iii. 16; πίστιν ἔχειν, 
[Mt. xvii. 20]; xxi. 21; Mk. iv. 40; Lk. xvii. 6; πᾶσαν 
τὴν πίστιν, (‘all the faith’ that can be thought of), 1 Co. 
xiii. 2; ἔχειν πίστιν θεοῦ, to trust in God, Mk. xi. 22; ἔχειν 
πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι, to be healed (see Fritzsche on Mt. p. 
843 sq.; [cf. W. $44, 4a.; B. 268 (230) ]), Acts xiv. 9; 
ἡ 9 αὐτοῦ z., awakened through him, Acts iii. 16; εὐχὴ 
τῆς πίστεως, that proceeds from faith, Jas. v. 15; of trust 
in the promises of God, Ro. iv. 9, 16, 19 sq.; Heb. iv. 2; 
vi 12; x. 38sq.; w.agen. of the subject, Ro. iv. 5, 12; 
πίστις ἐπὶ θεόν, faith which relies on God who grants the 
forgiveness of sins to the penitent [see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. a.], 
Heb. vi. 1; δικαιοσύνη τῆς πίστεως [cf. W. 186 (175)], 
Ro. iv. 11, 13; ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύνη, Heb. xi. 7. 2 
Jidelity, faithfulness, i. e. the character of one who can be 
relied on : Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal. v. 22; Philem. 5 (? see above 
in b. a.); Tit. ii. 10. of one who keeps his promises: ἡ 
πίστις τοῦ θεοῦ, subj. gen., Ro. iii. 3. objectively, plighted 
faith (often so in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl. down): ἀθετεῖν 
(see aberéw, a.) τὴν πίστιν, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially 
Koolhaas, Diss. philol. I. et IT. de vario usu et construc- 
' tione vocum πίστις, πιστός et πιστεύειν in N. T. (Traj. ad 
Rhen. 1733, 4to.) ; Dav. Schulz, Was heisst Glauben, 
ete. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq.; Rickert, Com. üb. d. Rom., 
2d ed., i. p. 51 sqq.; Lutz, Bibl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqq. ; 
Huther, Ueber ζωή τι. πιστεύειν im N. T., in the Jahrbb. 
f. deutsch. Theol. for 1872, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghtft. Com. 
on Gal. p. 154sqq.]. On Paul's conception of πίστις, 
cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 sqq.; 
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., $82 c. d. (cf. the index s. v. 
Glaube) ; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [ Eng. trans. 
i. p. 161 sqq.; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau- 
lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to 
the Hebrews see Riehm, Lehrbegr. des Hebr.-Br. p. 
700 sqq.; Weiss, as above $125 b.c. On John's con- 
ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei- 
trüge zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [cf. his Histoire 
dela Théol. Chrétienne, etc., 3me éd., ii. p. 508 sqq. (Eng. 
trans. ii. 455 sqq.)]; Weiss, as above $149, and the 
same author's Johann. Lehrbegriff, p. 18 sqq.* 

πιστός, -7, -óv, (πείθω [q. v.]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 
mostly for 1282; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons 
who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi- 
ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of 
official duties: δοῦλος, Mt. xxiv. 45 ; xxv. 21, 23; οἰκονό- 
pos, Lk. xii. 42; 1 Co. iv. 2; διάκονος, Eph. vi. 21; Col. 
i. 7; iv. 7 ; ἀρχιερεύς, Heb. ii. 17; iii. 2; of God, abid- 
ing by his promises, 1 Co.i.9; x.13; 2 Co.i. 18; 1 Th. 
Ve 2452 Th. ai. 35 c Heb.0x.(295 sie ena. 185 
1 Jn. i. 95 1 Pet iv. 19.2 add, 1G 0-1y: 11: G oL ἴν- 9 
1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; πιστὸς ἔν τινι, 
in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11 ; ἐπί 
τι, Mt. xxv. 23; ἄχρι θανάτου, Rev. ii. 10. one who kept 
his plighted faith, Rev. ii. 135 worthy of trust; that can 


be relied on: 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 2; Christ is called 


14 











πλάνη; 


μάρτυς ὁ πιστός, Rev. i. 5; with καὶ ἀληθινός added, 
Rev. iii. 14; [ef. xix. 11]. of things, that can be relied 
on: ὁ λόγος, 1 Tim. iii. 1; 2 Tim. ii. 11; Tit. i. 9; [iii. 
8; οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι, Rev. xxi.5; xxii. 6]; with πάσης ἀπο-- 
δοχῆς ἄξιος added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; rà ὅσια Aavid 
τὰ πιστά (see ὅσιος, fin.), Acts xiii. 34. 2. easily 
persuaded ; believing, confiding, trusting, (Theogn., Ae-- 
schyl., Soph., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. one who trusts in 
God's promises, Gal. iii. 9; is convinced that Jesus has 
been raised from the dead, opp. to ἄπιστος, Jn. xx. 27; 
one who has become convinced that Jesus is the Messiah 
and the author of salvation (opp. to ἄπιστος, see πιστεύω, 
1 b. y. and πίστις, 1 b.), [a believer]: Acts xvi.1; 2 Co. 
vi. 15; 1 Tim. v. 16; with the addition of τῷ κυρίῳ, dat.. 
of the pers. in whom faith or trust is reposed, Acts xvi. 
15; plur. in Col. i. 2 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]; 1 Tim. iv.. 
10; vi. 2; Tit. i. 6; Rev. xvii. 14; of πιστοί, substantively 
[see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x. 45; 1 Tim. iv. 
3, 12; with ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ added [cf. B. 174 (152)],. 
Eph.i.1; εἰς θεὸν κτλ. 1 Pet. i. 21 L T Tr txt. WH : zi- 
στὸν ποιεῖν τι, to do something harmonizing with (Chris- 
tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work], 3 Jn. 5.* 

πιστόω, -@: 1 aor. pass. ἐπιστώθην ; (πιστός): ais 
to make faithful, render trustworthy: τὸ ῥῆμα, 1 K. i. 36 5 
τινὰ ὅρκοις, Thue. 4, 88; univ. to make firm, establish, 1 
Chr. xvii. 14. 2. Pass. (Sept. in various senses for 
]282) and mid. to be Jirmly persuaded of; to be assured 
of: τί (Opp. eyn. 8, 355. 417; Leian. philops. 5), 2 Tim. 
iii. 14; Hesych. ἐπιστώθη - ἐπείσθη, ἐπληροφορήθη. (In 
various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) * 

πλανάω, -à ; fut. πλανήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπλάνησα;; Pass., pres.. 
πλανῶμαι ; pf. πεπλάνημαι; 1 aor. ἐπλανήθην ; (πλάνη); fr- 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for nyrnn; to cause to- 
stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a. 
prop.; in pass., Sept. chiefly for ΠΡ ΓΙ, to go astray, wan-- 
der, roam about, (first so in Hom. Il. 23, 321): Mt. xviii. 
12sq.; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. liii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. 
exviii. (exix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead 
away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive: τινά, 
Mt. xxiv. 4, 5, 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 5, 6; Jn. vii. 12; 1Jn. 
ii. 26; iii. 7; 2 Tim. iii. 13*; Rev. ii. 20 GL T Tr WH ; 
xii.9; xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 3, 8, 10; ἑαυτόν, 1 Jn. i. 8; 
pass. to be led into error, [R.V. be led astray]: Lk. xxi. 8; 
Jn. vii. 47 ; Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; to err, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii- 
24, 27; μὴ πλανᾶσθε. 1 Co. vi. 9; xv. 33; Gal. vi. 7; Jas. 
i 16; esp. through ignorance to be led aside from the 
path of virtue, to go astray, sin: Tit. 11. 3; Heb. ν. 2; r5 
καρδίᾳ, Heb. iii. 10; ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας, Jas. v.19; to wan- 
der or fall away from the true faith, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii. 
13^; 2 Pet. ii. 15; to be led away into error and sin, Rev.. 
xviii. 23. [Comp.: dmo-rAaváo.]* 

πλάνη, -ης, 9, a wandering, a straying about, whereby 
one, led astray from the right way, roams hither and 
thither (Aeschyl., [Hdt.], Eur., Plat, Dem.,al.). In the 
N. T. metaph. mental straying, i.e. error, wrong opinion 
relative to morals or religion: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3; 
2 Th. ii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11 
(on which [cf. W. 189 (177) and] see ἐκχέω, b. fin.) ; er- 


πλάνης 


ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting: 
Ro. i. 27; πλάνη ὁδοῦ τινος, [R. V. error of one’s way 
i. 6.7 the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v. 
20 (πλάνη ζωῆς, Sap. i. 12); as sometimes the Lat. error, 
i.q. that which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. xxvii. 
64.* 

[πλάνης, -7Tos, 6, see πλανήτης.] 

πλανήτης, -ov, 6, (πλανάω), a wanderer: ἀστέρες πλανῆ- 
ται, wandering stars ( Avistot., Plut., al.), Jude 13 [where 
WH mrg. dor. πλάνητες (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)]; see ἀστήρ, 
fin.* 

πλάνος, -ον, wandering, roving; trans. and trop. mis- 
leading, leading into error: πνεύματα πλάνα, 1 Tim. iv. 1 
(πλάνοι ἄνθρωποι, Joseph. b. 1. 2, 13, 4). 6 πλάνος 
substantively (Cic. al. planus), as we say, a vagabond, 
‘tramp,’ impostor, (Diod., Athen., al); hence univ. a 
corrupter, deceiver, (Vulg. seductor) : Mt. xxvii. 63 ; 2 Co. 
vi. 8; 2Jn.7. [Cf. ὁ κοσμοπλάνος, ‘Teaching’ ete. 16, 
4]* 

πλάξ, -akós, ἡ, [ (akin to πλάτος, etc. ; Fick iv. 161)], a 
flat thing, broad tablet, plane, level surface (as of the sea), 
(cf. our plate), (Pind., Trage., al.;'Sept. for rn?) : ai 
πλάκες τῆς διαθήκης (see διαθήκη, 2 p. 136"), Heb. ix. 4; 
οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶ λιθίναις (tables of stone, such as those on 
which the law of Moses was written), ἀλλ᾽ ἐν πλαξὶ xap- 
δίας σαρκίναις, 2 Co. iii. 3.* 

πλάσμα, -ros, TO, (πλάσσω), what has been moulded or 
Sormed, as from wax (Plat. Theaet. p. 197 d. and p. 200b.); 
the thing formed by a potter, earthen vessel, (Vulg. figmen- 
tum): Ro. ix. 20 (with πηλοῦ added, Arstph. av. 686).* 

πλάσσω: laor. ptep. πλάσας; 1 aor. pass. ἐπλάσθην; 
[(perh. akin to πλατύς; Curtius § 367 b)]; fr. Hes. down; 
Sept. chiefly for ?x^; to form, mould, (prop. something 
from clay, wax, etc.): used of a potter, Ro. ix. 20; of 
God as Creator (Gen. ii. 7 sq. 19 ete.), pass. 1 Tim. ii. 13.* 

πλαστός, -j, -óv, (πλάσσω) ; 1. prop. moulded, 
formed, as from clay, wax, stone, (Hes., Plat., Aristot., 
Plut., al.). 2. trop. feigned: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ((Hdt. 1, 
68], Eur., Xen., Lcian., al.).* 

πλατεῖα, -as, 7, (fem. of the adj. πλατύς, sc. ὁδός [cf. 
W. 590 (549)]), a broad way, a street: Mt. vi. 5; xii. 
19; Lk. x. 10; xiii. 26; xiv. 21; Acts v. 15; Rev. xi. 
8; xxi. 21; xxii.2. (Eur., Plut., al. ; in Sept. chiefly for 
313) * 

πλάτος, -ovs, τό, [ (cf. πλάξ), fr. Hdt. down], breadth: 
Eph. iii. 18 (on which see μῆκος); Rev. xxi. 16; carry- 
ing with it the suggestion of great extent, τῆς γῆς, opp. 
to the ends or corners of the earth, Rev. xx. 9; (for 
an», Hab. i. 6).* 

mative; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. πεπλάτυνται (see μι- 
atv); 1 aor. ἐπλατύνθην; (πλατύς) ; to make broad, to 
enlarge: ti, Mt. xxiii. 5; ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται, our 
heart expands itself sc. to receive you into it, i. e. to 
welcome and embrace you in love, 2 Co. vi. 11 (zAarivew 
τὴν καρδίαν for 39 2177, to open the heart sc. to in- 
struction, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 32 [cf. W.30]); πλατύνθητε 
καὶ ὑμεῖς, be ye also enlarged in heart, viz. to receive me 
therein, ibid. 13. (Xen., Plut., Anthol., al.) * 


515 





πλείων 


πλατύς, -εἴα, -v, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 367 b; 
Vanicek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for 
am, broad: Mt. vii. 13.* 

πλέγμα, -τος, τό, (πλέκω), what is woven, plaited, or twisted 
together; a web, plait, braid: used thus of a net, Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 6, 28; of a basket, Eur., Plat.; πλέγμα βύβλινον, 
in which the infant Moses was laid, Joseph. antt. 2, 9,45 
by other writ. in other senses. braided hair (Vulg. crines 
torti, ringlets, curls): 1 Tim. ii. 9 (cf. 1 Pet. iii. 3).* 

πλεῖστος, -7, -ov, (superl. of πολύς), most: plur. Mt. xi. 
20; [ὄχλος πλέϊστος, a very great multitude, Mk. iv. 1 T 
Tr WH]; ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος, the most part of the multi- 
tude, Mt. xxi. 8 (Thuc. 7, 78; Plat. rep. 3 p. 397 d.; 
λαός, Hom. Il. 16, 377); τὸ πλεῖστον, adverbially, at the 
most, 1 Co. xiv. 27.* 

πλείων, -ovos, 6, 7, neut. πλεῖον [eighteen times] and (in 
Lk. iii.13; [Jn. xxi.15 LT Tr WH]; Acts xv. 28) πλέον 
(cf. [WH. App. p. 151]; Matthiae i. p. 333; Krüger § 23, 
7,4; Kühner $156, 3; Passow s. v. πολύς, B. 1; [L. and 
S. s. v. B.]), plur. πλείονες and contr. πλείους, acc. zAet- 
ovas and contr. πλείους (which forms are used indiscrim- 
inately in the N. T.), neut. πλείονα and (L T Tr WH in 
Mt. xxvi. 53; LT in Lk. xxi. 3) contr. πλείω; (compar. 
of πολύς) ; more, i. e. 1. greater in quantity: the 
object with which the comparison is made being added 
in the genitive, as πλείονας τῶν πρώτων, More in number 
than the first, Mt. xxi. 36; πλεῖον (or πλείω) πάντων, 
more than all, Mk. xii. 43; Lk. xxi. 3; πλείονα . . . τούτων, 
more than these, Jn. vii. 31 [here L T Tr WH om. the 
gen. (see below)]; πλείονα τῶν πρώτων, more than the 
first, Rev. ii. 19 ; πλεῖον rovrov, more than these, Jn. xxi. 
15; [πλείονα τιμὴν ἔχειν τοῦ οἴκου, Heb. iii. 3° (cf. W. 190 
(178), 240 (225))]; περισσεύειν πλεῖον, more than, foll. by 
a gen. [A. V. exceed], Mt. v. 20. πλείονες (πλείους) 7, 
Mt. xxvi. 53 R G[L πλείω (br. 7}7; ὅπ. iv.1 [Trmrg. om. 
WH br. 7] πλεῖον jj, more than, Lk. ix. 185 πλέον πλήν 
w. agen. Acts xv. 28; πλέον παρά [re or τινα (see παρά, 
III. 2 b.)], Lk. iii. 13; [Heb. iii. 3°]; ἢ is omitted before 
numerals without change of construction : ἐτῶν ἦν πλειό- 
νων τεσσαράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, Acts iv. 22; οὐ πλείους εἰσίν 
μοι ἡμέραι δεκαδύο, Acts xxiv. 11 (here Rec. inserts 7) ; 
ἡμέρας ov πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα (Rec. πλείους ἢ δέκα), Acts 
xxv. 6; add, Acts xxiii. 13, 21; as in Grk. writ. after 
a neuter: πλείω [Lchm. 7 in br. ] δώδεκα λεγεῶνας, Mt. xxvi. 
53(T Tr WH (but T λεγιώνων)], (7Xetv — Attic for πλεῖον 
--ἑξακοσίους, Arstph. av. 1251 ; ἔτη γεγονὼς πλείω ἑβδομή- 
κοντα, Plat. apol. Socr. p. 17 d.; see 5, 3a.; on the omis- 
sion of quam in Latin after plus and amplius, cf. Rams- 
horn, Lat. Gram. p. 491; [Roby, Lat. Gram. $1273]). 
the objects with which the comparison is made are not 
added because easily supplied from the context: Jn. 
iv. 41; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; ro 
πλεῖον, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk. 
vii. 43; πλεῖον, adverbially, more, i. e. more earnestly, 
Lk. vii. 42; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, more widely, further, διανέμεσθαι, 
Acts iv. 17; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below)]; προκόπτειν, 
2 Tim. iii. 9; ἐπὶ πλεῖον ἀσεβείας, 2 Tim. ii. 16; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, 
longer (than proper), Acts xx. 9 [not WH mre. (see 


πλέκω 


above)]; xxiv. 4; plural πλείονα, more, i.e. a larger re- 
ward, Mt. xx. 10 [but L Tr WH πλεῖον}; without com- 
parison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst. : Acts 
ii. 40; xiii. 31; xvii. 20; xxi 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14; 
xxvii.20; xxviii. 23; neut. περί πλειόνων [ A. V. of many 
things], Lk. xi. 53; withthe article οἱ πλείονες (πλείους), 
the more part, very many: Acts xix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1 Co. 
ix. 19; x.5; xv. 05 2 Co. 11.6; iv. 15 ; 1x. 25 ΕΠ ἀν 
14. 2. greater in quality, superior, more excellent: 
foll. by the gen. of comparison, Mt. vi. 25; xii. 41, 42; 
Mk. xii. 33 [here T WH Tr txt. περισσότερον]; Lk. xi. 
31,32; xii. 23; [πλείονα θυσίαν . . . παρὰ Κάϊν, Heb. xi. 
4 (see παρά, u.s.). From Hom. down.]* 

πλέκω: 1 aor. ptep. πλέξαντες ; [(cf. Curtius § 103; 
Vaniéek p. 519)]; fr. Hom. down; to plait, braid, weave 
together : πλέξαντες στέφανον, Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17; 
Jn. xix. 2. [Comp.: ἐμ-πλέκω.] * 

πλέον, see πλείων. 

πλεονάζω; 1 aor. ἐπλεόνασα ; (πλέον) ; Sept. for ty 
and ΤΙΣ; 1. intrans.: used of one possessing, to 
superabound [ A. V. to have over], 2 Co. viii. 15. of things, 
to exist in abundance [ A. V.be multiplied], 2 Co. iv. 15; 
to increase, be augmented, Ro. v. 20; vi. 1; 2 Th.i. 3; 
Phil. iv. 17; 2 Pet.i. 8. 2. trans. to make to increase : 
τινά τινι, one in a thing, 1 Th. iii. 12; for 7377, Num. 
xxvi 54; Ps.lxx. (Ixxi.) 21; add 1 Mace. iv. 35. By 
prof. writ. [(fr. Hippoer. on)] in various other senses. 
[Cowr.: ὑπερ-πλεονάζω.] * 

πλεονεκτέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. égAeovékrgga; 1 aor. pass. subj. 
1 pers. plur. πλεονεκτηθῶμεν; (πλεονέκτης) ; 1. in- 
trans. fo have more, or a greater part or share: 'Thuc., 
Xen., Plut, al.; to be superior, excel, surpass, have an 
advantage over, τινός (gen. of pers.) τινε (dat. of thing) : 
Xen., Plat., Isocr., Dem., al. 2. trans. to gain or 
take advantage of another, to overreach: [Hdt. 8, 112], 
Plat., Diod., Dion. Hal., Dio Cass., al.; and soin the N. T. 
in 2 Co. vii. 2; xii. 17, 18; 1 Th. iv. 6 (see πρᾶγμα, b.) ; 
pass. [ef. B. $132, 22] ὑπό τινος, 2 Co. ii. 11 (10).* 

πλεονέκτης, -ov, 6, (πλέον and χω) ; 1. one eager 
to have more, esp. what belongs to others ({Thue. 1, 40, 
1 (cf. Hdt. 7, 158)]; Xen. mem. 1, 5, 3); 2. greedy 
of gain, covetous : 1 Co. v. 10, 11; vi. 10; Eph. v. 5; Sir. 
xiv. 9.* 

πλεονεξία, -as, ἡ, (πλεονέκτης, q. v.), greedy desire to have 
more; covetousness, avarice: Lk. xii. 15; Ro.i. 29; Eph. 
iv. 19; v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. ii. δ᾽; 2 Pet. ii. 3, [on the 
om. of the art. in the last two pass. cf. W.120 (114)], 14 ; 
ὡς [ Rec. ὥσπερ] πλεονεξίαν, [as a matter of covetousness], 
i.e. a gift which betrays the giver's covetousness, 2 Co. 
ix. 5 [here R. V. txt. extortion]; plur. various modes in 
which covetousness shows itself, covetings [cf. W. § 27, 
3; B. 77 (67)], Mk. vii. 22. (In the same and various 
other senses by prof. writ. fr. Hdt. and Thue. down.) 
[ Trench, N. T. Syn. $ xxiv., and (in partial correction) 
Bp. Lghift. Com. on Col. iii. 5.]* 

πλευρά, -as, ἡ, fr. Hom. (who always uses the plur.) 
down; the side of the body: Jn. xix. 34; xx. 20, 25, 27; 
Acts xii. 7.* 


516 











πλήκτης 


ΠΛΈΩ, see πίμπλημι. 

πλέω; impf. 1 pers. plur. ἐπλέομεν ; [allied w. πλύνω, 
Lat. pluo, fluo, our float, flow, etc.; Curtius § 369]; fr. 
Hom. down; to sail, navigate, travel by ship: Lk. viii. 23; 
Acts xxvii. 24; foll. by eis with an acc. of place, Acts 
xxi.3; xxvii.6; ἐπὶ τόπον, Rev. xviii. 17 GL T Tr WH; 
by a use common only to the poets (cf. Matthiae § 409, 
4a.; Kuhnerii. $409, 6; [Jelf $559; W. 224 (210)]), with 
a simple ace. indicating the direction: Acts xxvii. 2 (Eur. 
Med. vs. 7), where 1, Τ Tr WII add eis. [Cowr.: dzo-, 
δια-, ék-, kara-, παρα-, ὑπο-πλέω. | * 

πληγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πλήσσω), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
7122, also for 31322 ; 1. a blow, stripe: plur., Lk. x. 
30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2 Co. vi.5; xi. 28; a wound: 
ἡ πληγὴ τοῦ θανάτου, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke], 
Rev. xiii. 3, 12; τῆς μαχαίρας, wound made by a sword 
[sword-stroke], Rev. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omis- 
sion (Lk. xii. 47, ete.) cf. B. 82 (72) ; W. $64, 4.] 2. 
a public calamity, heavy affliction, [cf. Eng. plague], (now 
tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent 
by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Rec. om.], 20; xi. 
6; xv. 1, 6, 8; xvi 9, [21]; xviii. 4,8; xx1.95 xxi 18. 
[Cf md. Διός, Soph. Aj. 137 (cf. 279) ; al.]* 

πλῆθος, -ovs, τό, (IIAEQ), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly 
for 25, often for jim; a multitude, i. e. a. a great 
number, sc. of men or things: Acts xxi. 22 [not Tr WH]; 
Heb. xi. 12 [cf. W. 120 (114) n.]; with πολύ added, Mk. 
lii. 7,8; πλῆθος with a gen., Lk. ii. 13; Jn. xxi. 6; Acts 
v. 14 ; xxviii. 3 [ A. V. bundle (L 'T Tr WH add zi) ]; Jas. 
v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; πολὺ πλῆθος and πλῆθος πολύ [cf. W. 
$59, 2] with a gen., Lk. v. 65 vi. 17; xxiii. 27; Jn. v. 3 
[here L br. GT Tr WH om. πολύ]; Acts xiv. 1; xvii. 
4. b. with the article, the whole number, the whole 
multitude; the assemblage: Acts xv. 80; xxiii. 7; τοῦ λαοῦ, 
Acts xxi. 36; πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος, Acts xv. 12; with a gen., 
Lk. i. 10; [viii. 37 (τῆς περιχώρου) ; xix. 37]; xxiii. 1; 
Acts [iv. 32]; v. 16; [vi. 2, 5]; xxv. 24; the multitude 
of people, Acts ii. 6; xix. 9; with τῆς πόλεως added, 
Acts xiv. 4.* 

πληθύνω ; fut. πληθυνῶ; 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. πληθύ- 
ναι (2 Co. ix. 10 Rec.) ; Pass., impf. ἐπληθυνόμην ; 1 aor. 
ἐπληθύνθην; (fr. πληθύς fulness); Aeschyl., Aristot., 
Hdian. Geop.; Sept. very often for 729, 737, 7377, 
sometimes for 334; 1. trans. to increase, to mulli- 
ply: 2 Co. ix. 10; Heb. vi. 14 (fr. Gen. xxii. 17); pass. 
to be increased, (be multiplied) multiply: Mt. xxiv. 12; 
Acts vi. 7; vii. 17; ix. 31; xii. 24; τινί, [ A. V.be multi- 
plied to one i. e.] be richly allotted to, 1 Pet. i. 2; 2 Pet. 
i. 2; Jude 2, (Dan. iii. 31 (98); Dan. vi. 25 Theodot. ; 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1 inser. [also Mart. Polyc. inscr., 
Constt. Apost. inser.]). 2. intrans. to be increased, 
to multiply: Acts vi. 1.* 

πλήθω, see πίμπλημι. 

πλήκτης, -ου, ὅ, (πλήσσω), (Vulgate percussor), [A. V. 
striker], bruiser, ready with a blow; a pugnacious, con- 
tentious, quarrelsome person: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i. 7. 
(Plut. Marcell. 1; Pyrrh. 30; Crass. 9; Fab. 19; Diog. 
Laért. 6, 38; al.) * 


πλημμύρα 


πλημμύρα [so all edd.] (or πλημύρα [cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. $ 7 Anm. 17 note; Lob. Khemat. p. 264]) [better ac- 
cented as proparoxytone; Chandler $160], -as and (so 
GT Tr WH) -5s (see μάχαιρα), 7, (fr. πλήμμη or πλήμη 
i. e. πλήσμη [fr. πλήθω, πίμπλημι, 4- V-]), a flood, whether 
of the sea or of a river: Lk. vi. 48. (Job xl. 18; [Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 71]; Joseph. antt. 2, 10,2; Plut., Sext. Emp. ; 
with ποταμῶν added, Philo de opif. mund. $19; [ef. de 
vita Moys. i. $36 ; iii. § 24; de Abrah. § 19; de leg. allez. 
i. § 13].)* 

πλήν, adv., (fr. πλέον ‘more’ [Curtius $375; Lob. Path. 
Element. i. 143 ; ii. 93 (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 16)]; 
hence prop. beyond, besides, further) ; it stands 1. 
adverbially, at the beginning of a sentence, serving 
either to restrict, or to unfold and expand what has pre- 
ceded: moreover, besides, so that, according to the re- 
quirements of the context, it may also be rendered but, 
nevertheless ; [howbeit; cf. B. $ 146, 2]: Mt. xi. 22, 24; xviii. 
7; xxvi. 89, 64; Lk. vi. 24,35 ; x. 11, 14, 205 xi. 41; xii. 
31; xiii. 33; xvii. 1 L Tr txt. WH; xviii. 8; xix. 27 ; xxii. 
21,22,42; xxiii. 28; 1 Co. xi. 11; Eph. y. 33; Phil.i.18 
ΓΒ G (see Ellicott)]; iii. 16 ; iv. 14; Rev. ii. 25 ; πλὴν ὅτι, 
except that, save that, (exx. fr. class. Grk. are given by 
Passow s. v. 11.1 e. ; [L. and S. s. v. B. II. 4]): Acts xx. 
23 [(W. 508 (473) ; Phil.i. 18 LT Tr WH (R. V. only 
that) ]. 2. as a preposition, with the gen. (first so 
by Hom. Od. 8, 207; [cf. W. $ 54, 67), besides, except, but: 
Mk. xii. 32; Jn.viii. 10 ; Acts vili. 1; xv. 28; xxvii. 22. 
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 724 sq.* 

πλήρης, -es, (IIAEQ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. 
chiefly for 879; a. full, i. e. filled up (as opp. to 
empty): of hollow vessels, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 
43 [R GL]; with a gen. of the thing, Mk. viii. 19; οἵ 
a surface, covered in every part: λέπρας, Lk. v.12; of 
the soul, thoroughly permeated with: πνεύματος ἁγίου, Lk. 
iv. 1; Acts vi. 3; vii. 55; xi. 24; πίστεως, Acts vi. ὅ ; χάρι- 
ros, Acts vi. 8 [ Rec. πίστεως]; χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας, Jn. 
i. 14; δόλου, Acts xiii. 10 (Jer. v. 27); θυμοῦ, Acts xix. 
28; abounding in, ἔργων ἀγαθῶν, Acts ix. 36. b. 
full i. e. complete; lacking nothing, perfect, (so the Sept. 
sometimes for D2U ; σελήνη πλήρης, Sir. l. 6, cf. Hat. 6, 
106): μισθός, 2 Jn. 8 (Ruth ii. 12); σῖτος, a full grain of 
corn (one completely filling the follicle or hull contain- 
ing it), Mk. iv. 28.* 

πληρο-φορέω, -à: [1 aor. impv. πληροφόρησον, inf. πληρο- 
φορῆσαι (Ro. xv. 13 L mrg.); Pass., pres. impv. πληροφο- 
ρείσθω ; pf. ptep. πεπληροφορημένος ; 1 aor. ptep. πληρο- 
φορηθείς; (fr. the unused adj. πληροφόρος, and this fr. 
πλήρης and φέρω) ; to bear or bring full, to make full; a. 
to cause a thing to be shown to the full: τὴν διακονίαν, i.e. to 
fulfil the ministry in every respect, 2 Tim. iv. 5 (ef. πλη- 
ροῦν τὴν διακονίαν, Acts xii. 25) ; also τὸ κήρυγμα, ibid. 
17. b. to carry through to the end, accomplish: mpay- 
para πεπληροφορημένα, things that have been accomplished, 
(Itala and Vulg. completae), Lk.i.1 (cf. ὡς ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, 
Acts xix. 21) [cf. Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc. ]. C. τινά, 
to fill one with any thought, conviction, or inclination: [Ro. 
xv. 13 L mrg. (foll. by ἐν w. dat. of thing); al. πληρόω, 


51T 











TANpow 


q. v. 1]; hence to make one certain, to persuade, convince, 
one (πολλοῖς οὖν λόγοις kai ὅρκοις πληροφορήσαντες Meyá- 
βυζον, extr. fr. Ctes. in Phot. p. 41, 29 [(ed. Bekk.) ; but 
on this pass. see Bp. Lghtft. as below]) ; pass. to be per- 
suaded, Ro. xiv. 5; πληροφορηθείς, persuaded, fully con- 
vinced or assured, Ro. iv. 21; also πεπληροφορημένοι, Col. 
iv.12 LT Tr WH; οἱ ἀπόστολοι... . πληροφορηθέντες διὰ 
τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ κυρίου “I. Xp. καὶ πιστωθέντες ἐν TO 
λόγῳ τοῦ θεοῦ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 42, 3; freq. so in eccl. 
writ.; to render inclined or bent on, ἐπληροφορήθη καρδία 

++ τοῦ ποιῆσαι τὸ πονηρόν, Eccl. viii. 11, [cf. Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Gad 2]. The word is treated of fully by 
Bleek, Brief an d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 233 sqq.; Grimm in the 
Jahrbb. f. Deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 38 sqq.; [Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Col. iv. 12. Cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v.]* 

πληροφορία, -as, 7, (πληροφορέω, q. v.), fulness, abun- 
dance: πίστεως, Heb. x. 22; τῆς ἐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 11; τῆς 
συνέσεως, Col. ii. 2; full assurance, most certain confi- 
dence, (see πληροφορέω, c. [al. give it the same meaning 
in one or other of the preceding pass. also; cf. Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col.l.c.]), 1 Th.i.5. (Not found elsewh. exc. in eccl. 
writ. [cf. W. 25].) * 

πληρόω -ó, (inf. -ροῦν Lk. ix. 31, see WH. App. p. 166); 
impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπλήρου; fut. πληρώσω; 1 aor. ἐπλή- 
ρωσα; pi. πεπλήρωκα; Pass., pres. πληροῦμαι; impf. 
ἐπληρούμην ; pf. πεπλήρωμαι; 1 aor. ἐπληρώθην ; 1 fut. πλη- 
ρωθήσομαι; fut. mid. πληρώσομαι (once, Rev. vi. 11 Rec.) ; 
(fr. IIAHPOZ equiv. to πλήρης); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; Sept. for NOD Ξ 1. to make full, to fill, to jill 
up: τὴν σαγήνην, pass. Mt. xiii. 48; i. q. to fill to the full, 
πᾶσαν χρείαν, Phil. iv. 19; to cause to abound, to furnish 
or supply liberally: πεπλήρωμαι, I abound, I am liberally 
supplied, 56. with what is necessary for subsistence, Phil. 
iv. 18;  Hebraistically, with the accus. of the thing in 
which one abounds (cf. B. § 134, 7; W. $32, 5]: of spir- 
itual possessions, Phil. i. 11 (where Ree. has καρπῶν) ; 
Col. i. 9, (ἐνέπλησα αὐτὸν πνεῦμα σοφίας, Ex. xxxi. 3; 
xxxv. 31); i.q. to flood, ἡ οἰκία émAgpó0g [Tr mrg. 
ἐπλήσθη] ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς, Jn. xii. 3 (see ἐκ, IL. 5); ἦχος 
ἐπλήρωσε τὸν οἶκον, Acts ii. 2; with a gen. of the thing, 
τὴν Ἱερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς, Acts v. 28 (Liban. epp. 721 
πάσας — i. 6. πόλεις --- ἐνέπλησας τῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν λόγων; 
Justin. hist. 11, 7 Phrygiamreligionibus implevit); τινά, 
i. q. to fill, diffuse throughout one’s soul: with a gen. of the 
thing, Lk. ii. 40 RG L txt. T Tr mrg. (see below); Acts 
ii. 28; pass., Acts xiii. 52 ; Ro. xv. 13 [where L mrg. mAy- 
popopéw, q. v. in c.]. 14; 2 Tim. i. 4; w. a dat. of the thing 
(c£. W. § 31, 7), pass., [Lk. ii. 40 L mrg. Tr txt. WH]; 
Ro.i.29; 2 Co. vii. 4; foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of the instru- 
ment: ἐν πνεύματι, Eph. v. 18; ἐν παντὶ θελήματι θεοῦ, 
with everything which God wills (used of those who 
will nothing but what God wills), Col. iv. 12 RG [but 
see πληροφορέω, c.]; πληροῦν τὴν καρδίαν τινός, to per- 
vade, take possession of, one’s heart, Jn. xvi. 6; Acts v. 
3; Christians are said πληροῦσθαι. simply, as those who 
are pervaded (i. e. richly furnished) with the power and 
gifts of the Holy Spirit: ἐν αὐτῷ, rooted as it were in 
Christ, i. e. by virtue of the intimate relationship en- 


πληρόω 


tered into with him, Col. ii. 10 [ef. ἐν, I. 6 b.]; εἰς πᾶν τὸ 
πλήρωμα Tod θεοῦ (see πλήρωμα, 1), Eph. iii. 19 [not WH 
mrg.]; Christ, exalted to share in the divine adminis- 
tration, is said πληροῦν τὰ πάντα, to fill (pervade) the 
universe with his presence, power, activity, Eph. iv. 10; 
also πληροῦσθαι (mid. for himself, i. 6. to execute his 
counsels [ef. W. 258 (242); B. § 134, 7]) rà πάντα ἐν πᾶ- 
cw, all things in all places, Eph. i. 23 (μὴ οὐχὶ τὸν oipa- 
νὸν Kal τὴν γῆν ἐγὼ πληρῶ, λέγει edat Jer. xxiii. 24 ; 

Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. 15 p. 55, cites exx. fr. 
Philo and other 8; [(but ἐν πᾶσιν here is variously under- 
stood; see πᾶς, IT. 2 b. 8. aa. and the Comm.) ]). 2. 
to render full, i. e. to complete ; a. prop. to fill up 
to the top: πᾶσαν φάραγγα, Lk. 111. 5; so that nothing 
shall be wanting to full measure, fill to the brim, τὸ 
μέτρον (q. v. 1 a.), Mt. xxiii. 32. b. to perfect, con- 
summate ; a. a number: ἕως πληρωθῶσι καὶ of σύν- 
δουλοι, until the number of their comrades also shall have 
been made complete, Rev. vi. 11 L WH txt., ef. Düster- 
dieck ad loc. [see y. below]. by a Hebraism (see πίμ- 
πλημι, fin.) time is said πληροῦσθαι, πεπληρωμένος, either 
when a period of time that was to elapse has passed, or 
when a definite time is at hand: Mk.i.15; Lk. xxi. 24; 
Jn. vii. 8; Acts vii. 23, 30; ix. 23; xxiv. 27, (Gen. xxv. 
24; xxix. 21; Lev.viii.33; xii.4; xxv. 30; Num. vi. 5; 
Joseph. antt. 4,4, 6; 6,4,1; 
Plat. Tim. p. 39 d. ; rods χρόνους, lege. 9 p. 866 a.). B. 
to make complete in every particular; to render perfect: 
πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν krÀ. 2 Th. i. 11; τὴν χαράν, Phil. ii. 2; pass., 
Jn. iii. 29; xv.11; xvi. 24; xvii. 13; 1 Jn. 1. 4; 2 Jn. 12; 
τὰ ἔργα, pass. Rev. iii. 2; τὴν ὑπακοήν; to cause all to obey, 
pass. 2 Co. x. 6; τὸ πάσχα, Lk. xxii. 16 (Jesus speaks 
here allegorically: until perfect deliverance and blessed- 
ness be celebrated in the heavenly state). 4. to 
carry through to the end, to accomplish, carry out, (some 
undertaking): πάντα τὰ ῥήματα, Lk. vii. 1; τὴν διακονίαν, 
Acts xii. 25; Col. iv. 17; τὸ ἔργον, Acts xiv. 26; τὸν 
δρόμον, Acts xiii. 25; sc. τὸν δρόμον, Rev. vi. 11 ace. to 
the reading πληρώσωσι (G'T Tr WH mrg.) or πληρώ- 
σονται (Rec.) [see a. above]; ὡς ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, when 
these things were ended, Acts xix. 21. Here belongs 
also πληροῦν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, to cause to be everywhere 
known, acknowledged, embraced, [A. V. I have fully 
preached], Ro. xv. 19; in the same sense τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Col. i. 25. c. to carry into effect, bring to reali- 
zation, realize ; a. of matters of duty, to perform, 
execute: τὸν νόμον, Ro. xiii. 8; Gal. v. 14; τὸ δικαίωμα 
τοῦ νόμου, pass. ev ἡμῖν, among us, Ro. viii. 4; πᾶσαν 
δικαιοσύνην, Mt. iii. 15 (εὐσέβειαν, 4 Mace. xii. 15); τὴν 
ἔξοδον (as something appointed and prescribed by God), 
Lk. ix. 31. β. of sayings, promises, prophecies, to 
bring to pass, ratify, accomplish; so in the phrases ἵνα or 
ὅπως πληρωθῇ ἡ γραφή, τὸ ῥηθέν, etc. (cf. Knapp, Scripta 
var. Arg. p. 533 sq.): Mt. i.22; ii. 15, 17, 235 iv. 14; 
viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35; xxi. 4; xxvi. 54, 56; xxvii. 9, 35 
Rec.; Mk. xiv. 49; xv. 28 (which vs. G'T WH om. Trbr.); 
Lk. i. 20; iv. 21; xxi. 22 Rec. ; xxiv. 44; Jn. xii. 38; xiii. 
18; xv. 25; xvii. 12; xviii. 9, 32; xix. 24, 386; Actsi. 16; 


zr CINE. ἢ , 
πληροῦν τὸν τέλεον ἐνιαυτόν, 


518 





πλησίον 


iii. 18; xiii. 27; Jas. ii. 23, (1 K. ii. 27; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 
22). y. universally and absolutely, to fulfil, i. e. to 
cause God's will (as made known in the law) to be obeyed 
as it should be, and God's promises (given through the 
prophets) to receive fulfilment: Mt. v. 17; cf. Weiss, 
Das Matthüusevang. u.s.w. p. 146 sq. [Comp.: 
ávr-ava-, προσ-ανα-, ἐκ-, συμ-πληρόω.] * 

πλήρωμα, -ros, τό, (πληρύω), Sept. for N55; a, 
etymologically it has a passive sense, that which is (or 
has been) filled; very rarely so in class. Grk.: a ship, in- 
asmuch as it is filled (i. e. manned) with sailors, rowers, 
and soldiers ; ἀπὸ δύο πληρωμάτων ἐμάχοντο, Leian. ver. 
hist. 2, 37; πέντε εἶχον πληρώματα, ibid. 38. Inthe N. T. 
the body of believers, as that which is filled with the 
presence, power, agency, riches of God and of Christ: 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Eph. iv. 13 (see ἡλικία, 1 c. [cf. W. § 30, 3 
N.1; B. 155 (136)]) ; i. 23; eis πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ θεοῦ, 
that ye may become a body wholly filled and flooded by 
God, Eph. iii. 19 [but WH mrg. reads πληρωθῇ πᾶν τὸ 
mA. |. 2. that which fills or with which a thing is 
Jilled : so very frequently in class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down; 
esp. of those things with which ships are filled, freight 
and merchandise, sailors, oarsmen, soldiers, [ef. our 
‘complement’ (yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 258 sq.) ], 
(of the animals filling Noah's ark, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. 
$12) ; πλήρωμα πόλεως, the inhabitants or population fill- 
ing à a Plat. de rep. 2 p. 371 e.; Aristot. polit. 3, 13 
P 1984^, 5 ; 4, 4p. 1291", 17; al. So in the N. T. ἡ γῆ kai 
TÓ Eu αὐτῆς, whatever fills the earth or is contained 
in it, 1 Co. x. 26, 28 Rec. (Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1; xlix. (1.) 
12; Jer. viii. 16; Ezek. xii. 19, etc.; τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς θαλάσ- 
ons, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 11; 1 Chr. xvi. 32) ; κοφίνων πληρώ- 
para, those things with which the baskets were filled, 
[basketfuls], Mk. vi. 43 T Tr WH [on this pass. cf. Bp. 
Lghtft. as below p. 260]; also σπυρίδων πληρώματα, Mk. 
viii. 20; the filling (Lat. complementum) by which a gap 
is filled up, Mt.ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; that by which a loss is 
repaired, spoken of the reception of allthe Jews into 
the kingdom of God (see ἥττημα, 1), Ro. xi. 12. Of 
time (see πληρόω, 2 b. a.), that portion of time by which 
a longer antecedent period is completed; hence complete- 
ness, fulness, of time: τοῦ χρόνου, Gal. iv. 4; τῶν καιρῶν, 
Eph. i. 10 (on which see οἰκονομία). 3. fulness, 
Jn. i. 16; Col. i. 19; ii. 9; full number, Ro. 

4. i.q. πλήρωσις (see καύχημα, 2), i.e. a 


> 
ava-, 


abundance : 
330525; 


fulfilling, keeping: τοῦ νόμου (see TAnpow, 2 c. a.), Ro. xiii. 


10. For a full discussion of this word see I’ritzsche, Ep. 
ad DU ii. p. 469 sqq.; [esp. Bp. LgAtft. Com. on Col. 
257 sqq. ].* 

em (neut. of the adj. πλησίος, -a, -ov), adv., fr. 
Hom. down, near: with a gen. of place [cf. W. $54, 6], 
Jn. iv. 5; with the article, ὁ πλησίον se. àv [cf. B. $125, 
10; W. 24] (Sept. very often for y*; sometimes for 
I2y), prop. Lat. proximus (so Vulg. in the N. T), a 
neighbor ; i. e. a. friend : Mt. v. 43. b. any 
other person, and Vno two are concerned the other (thy 
fellow-man, thy neighbor) i.e., acc. to the O* T. and 
Jewish conception, a member of the Hebrew race and 


“ππλησμονή 


commonwealth: Acts vii. 27; and Rec. in Heb. viii. 11; 
ace. to the teaching of Christ, any other man irrespec- 
tive of race or religion with whom we live or whom we 
chance to meet (which idea is clearly brought out in the 
parable Lk. x. 25-37): Mt. xix. 19; xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 
31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9, 10; [xv: 2]; Gal. v. 14; 
Eph. iv. 25; Jas. ii. 8 and L T Tr WH in iv. 12; πλησίον 
-etvat rwos, to be near one [one's neighbor ], i.e. in a pass. 
sense, worthy to be regarded as a friend and companion, 
Lk. x. 29; actively, to perform the offices of a friend 
and companion, ibid. 36; [on the om. of the art. in the 
last two exx. see B. § 129, 11; W. $19 fin.].* 

πλησμονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πίμπλημι [cf. W. 94 (89)]), reple- 
tion, satiety, (Vulg. saturitas) : πρὸς πλησμονὴν σαρκός, for 
the satisfying of the flesh, to satiate the desires of the 
flesh (see cáp£, 4), Col. ii. 23, ef. Meyer ad loc.; [others 
(including R. V.) render the phrase against (i. e. for the 
remedy of) the indulgence of the flesh; see Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc., and πρός, 1. 1 c.]. (Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plato, 
Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

πλήσσω [cf. πληγή, (πέλαγος), Lat. plango, plaga; Cur- 
tius § 367]: 2 aor. pass. ἐπλήγην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for 5127) (see πατάσσω, init.); to strike, to smite: pass. 
(of the heav enly bodies smitten by God that they may 
be deprived of light and shrouded in darkness), Rev. 
viii. 12. [Comp.: ék-, ἐπι- πλήσσω.] 

πλοιάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of πλοῖον ; see γυναικάριον, 
fin.), a small vessel, a boat: Mk. iii. 9; iv. 36 Rec.; Lk. 
v. 2 L mrg. T Trmrg. WH mrg.; Jn. vi. [225], 22^ Td 
23 [where τ Tr mrg. “WH mdoia], 24 ΤΗΣ; xxi. 
[Cf. B. Ὁ. s. v. Ship (13).] (Arstph., Xen., Dido al. » E 

πλοῖον, -ov, τό, (πλέω), fr. Hdt. down, cane chiefly for 
TIN, a ship: Mt. iv. 21, 22; ΜΚ. 1. 19; Lk. v. 2[Β6 Τὶ 
txt. Tr txt. WH txt.]; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx.13, and often 
in the historical bks. of the N. T.; Jas. iii. 4; Rev. viii. 
9; xviii. 19. [BB. DD. s. v. Ship.] 

πλόος -οῦς, gen. -óov -ov, and in later writ. πλοός (Acts 
xxvii. 9; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 $61; see νοῦς [and 
ef. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (πλέω), fr. Hom. Od. 3, 
169 down; voyage: Acts xxi. 7; xxvii. 9, 10, (Sap. xiv. 
1).* 

πλούσιος, -a, -ov, (πλοῦτος), fr. Hes. opp. 22 down, Sept. 
for wy, rich; a. prop. wealthy, abounding in ma- 
terial resources: Mt. xxvii. 57; Lk. xii. 165 xiv. 12; xvi. 
1,19; xviii. 23; xix. 2; ὁ πλούσιος, substantively, Lk. 
xvi.21, 22; Jas. i. 10, 11; of πλούσιοι, Lk. vi. 24; xxi.1; 
1 Tim. vi. 17; Jas. ii. 6; v. 1; Rev. vi. 15; num enol 
os, without the art., α rich man, Mt. xix. 23, 24; Mk. x. 
25; xii. 41; Lk. xviii. 25. b. metaph. and univ. 
abounding, abundantly supplied : foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of 
the thing in which one abounds (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note), 
«ἐν ἐλέει, Eph. ii. 4; ἐν πίστει; Jas. ii.5; absol. abounding 
(rich) in Christian virtues and eternal possessions, Rev. 
ii. 9; iii. 17, on which see Düsterdieck. ἐπτώχευσε πλού- 
'σιος àv, of Christ, ‘although as the ἄσαρκος λόγος he for- 
merly abounded in the riches of a heavenly condition, by 
assuming human nature he entered into a state of (earth- 
ly) poverty,’ 2 Co. viii. 9.* 


519 








πλύνω 


πλουσίως, adv., [fr. Hdt. down], abundantly, richly: 
Col. 11. 26500 Mims γι 17; Pit 632) Pet. 3 11:* 

πλουτέω, -@; 1 aor.émAovrgsa; pf. πεπλούτηκα; (πλοῦ- 
tos); fr. Hes. down; Sept. sometimes for ry ; a. 
to be rich, to have abundance : prop. of outward possessions, 
absol., Lk. i. 53; 1 Tim. vi.9; 1 aor. 7 have been made 
rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of 
the aorist see βασιλεύω, fin.), ἀπό twos, Rev. xviii. 15 
(Sir. xi. 18; [ef. ἀπό, II. 2 a.]) ; also ἔκ τινος (see ἐκ, IT. 5), 
Rev. xviii. 3, 195 ἔν ru (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note; the Greeks 
say πλουτεῖν Twos, Or τινι, Or Tr), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b. 
metaph. to be richly supplied : πλουτεῖν eis πάντας, is afflu- 
ent in resources so that he can give the blessings of sal- 
vation unto all, Ro. x. 12; πλουτεῖν εἰς θεόν (see εἰς, B. 
II. 2 b. a.), Lk. xii. 21; aor. ἐπλούτησα, absolutely, I 
became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual posses- 
sions: 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; πεπλού- 
ma, I have gotten riches, Rev. iii. 17.* 

πλουτίζω ; Pass., pres. ptep.mAovri(óuevos ; 1 aor. ἐπλου- 
τίσθην; (πλοῦτος) ; to make rich, to enrich: twa, pass. 
2 Co. ix. 11; used of spiritual riches: teva, 2 Co. vi. 10; 
ἐν with a dat. of the thing (see zAovréc, a.), pass., to be 
richly furnished, 10.1.5. (Aeschyl.,Soph., Xen., Plut.; 
Sept. for vdrm-)* 

πλοῦτος, -ov, 6, and (ace. to L T Tr WH in 2 Co. viii. 2; 
Eph. i. 7; ii. 7; iii. 8, 16; Phil. iv. 19; Col. i. 27; ii. 2, 
but only in the nom. and ace.; cf. [7 7. Proleg. p. 118; 
WH. App. p. 158]; W. 65 (64); B. 22 sq. (20)) τὸ πλοῦτος, 
(apparently i.q. πλέοτος, fr. πλέος full [ef. πίμπλημι]), 
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Wy, and also for jinn a mul- 
titude, n, nmm riches, wealth ; a. prop. and absol. 
abundance of external possessions : Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 
19; Lk. viii. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 17; Jas. v. 2; Rev. xviii. 17 
(16). b. univ. fulness, abundance, plenitude: with 
a gen. of the excellence in which one abounds, as τῆς 
χρηστότητος, Ro. ii. 4; ix. 23; 2 Co. viii. 2; Eph. i. 7, 18; 
ii. 7; iii. 16; Col. i. 27; ii. 2. the πλοῦτος of God is 
extolled, i. e. the fulness of his perfections, — of which 
two are mentioned, viz. copia and γνῶσις, Ro. xi. 33 (for 
σοφίας kai γνώσεως here depend on βάθος, not on πλούτου 
[cf. B. 155 (135) ; W. $30, 3 N. 1]); the fulness of all 
things in store for God's uses, Phil. iv.19; in the same 
sense πλοῦτος is attributed to Christ, exalted at the 
right hand of God, Rey. v. 12; in amore restricted sense, 
πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ is used of the fulness of the things 
pertaining to salvation with which Christ is able to en- 
rich others, Eph. iii. 8. c. univ. i. q. @ good [(to 
point an antithesis)]: Heb. xi. 26; i. q. that with which 
one is enriched, with a gen. of the person enriched, used 
of Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 12.* 

πλύνω; impf. ἔπλυνον ; 1 aor. ἔπλυνα ; [(c£. πλέω)]; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for 533 and y; ¢o wash: τὰ δίκτυα, 
Lk. v. 2 L T Tr ΝΗ [(T WH mrg.-av; see dzozAvo)]; 
used fr. Hom. down esp. in ref. to clothing (Gen. xlix. 

1; Ex. xix. 10, 14; Lev. xiii. 6, 34, ete.) ; hence figura- 
tively πλύνειν τὰς στολὰς αὐτῶν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ ἀρνίου is 
used of those who by faith so appropriate the results of 
Christ’s expiation as to be regarded by God as pure and 


πνεῦμα 


sinless, Rev. vii. 14, and L T Tr WH in xxii. 14; cf. 
Ps. 1. (li.) 4, 9. [CoMr.: ἀπο-πλύνω. SYN. see λούω, 
fin.]* 

πνεῦμα, -τος; τό, (πνέω), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down; Hebr. r^, Lat. spiritus; i. e. 

1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the 
wind: ἀνέμων πνεύματα, Hat. 7, 16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence 
the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45; 
xix. 11; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, ete.; often in Grk. 
writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: πνεῦμα τοῦ στόματος, 2 Th. 
ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4); mv. ζωῆς, the 
breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοὴ ζωῆς, ii. 
7). [πνεῦμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main 
coincident terms; but πνοή became the more poetical. 
Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology. 
Even in class. Grk. πνεῦμα became as freq. and as wide 
in its application as ἄνεμος. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench 
§ lxxiii.)] 

2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body is 
animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.; see below)]: Lk. 
viii. 55; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30; Acts vii. 59; Rev. xiii. 15 
[here R.V. breath]; ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα, to breathe out the 
spirit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 cf. Sir. xxxviii. 23; Sap. 
xvi. 14 (Grk. writ. said ἀφιέναι τὴν ψυ xv, as Gen. xxxv. 
18, see ἀφίημι, 1 b. and Kypke, Observv. i. p. 140; but we 
also find ἀφιέναι πνεῦμα θανασίμῳ σφαγῇ, Eur. Hec. 571); 
σῶμα χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν, Jas. il. 205 τὸ πνεῦμά 
ἐστι τὸ ζωοποιοῦν, ἡ σὰρξ οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν, the spirit is 
that which animates and gives life, the body is of no 
profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in 
turn to the spirit; cf. Chr. Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opusce. 
p. 239), Jn. vi. 63. the rational spirit, the power by 
which a human being feels, thinks, wills, decides; the soul : 
τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ, 1 Co. ii. 11; opp. to 
σάρξ (q. v. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 1 Co. 
v.5; 2 Co. vii. 1; Col. ii.5; opp. to τὸ σῶμα, Ro. viii. 10; 
1 Co. vi. 17, 20 Rec.; vii. 34; 1 Pet. iv. 6. Although for 
the most part the words πνεῦμα and ψυχή are used indis- 
criminately and so σῶμα and ψυχή put in contrast (but 
never by Paul; see ψυχή, esp. 2), there is also recognized 
a threefold distinction, τὸ πνεῦμα kai ἡ ψυχὴ Kal τὸ σῶμα, 
1 Th. v. 23, ace. to which τὸ πνεῦμα is the rational part 
of man, the power of perceiving and grasping divine 
and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of God 
exerts its influence; (πνεῦμα, says Luther, “is the high- 
est and noblest part of man, which qualifies him to 
lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things; 
in short, it is the house where Faith and God’s word are 
at home” [see reff. at end]): ἄχρι μερισμοῦ ψυχῆς καὶ 
πνεύματος (see μερισμός, 2), Heb. iv. 12; ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, 
μιᾷ ψυχῇ, Phil. i. 27 (where instead of μιᾷ ψυχῇ Paul 
acc. to his mode of speaking elsewhere would have said 
more appropriately μιᾷ καρδίᾳ). τὸ πνεῦμά twos, Mk. ii. 
8; vii. 12; Lk. 1. 47; Acts xvii. 16; Ro. i. 9; viii. 16; 
1 Co. v.4; xvi.18; 2 Co. ii. 13; vii. 13; Gal. vi. 18; [Phil. 
iv. 23 LT Tr WH]; Philem. 25; 2 Tim. iv. 22; ὁ θεὸς 
τῶν πνευμάτων (for which Rec. has ἁγίων) τῶν προφητῶν, 


δ20 








πνεῦμα 


who incites and directs the souls of the prophets, Rev. 
xxii. 6, where ef. Diisterdieck. the dative τῷ πνεύματι 
is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or 
suffers something, like our in spirit: ἐπιγινώσκειν, Mk. ii. 
8; avaorevagew, Mk. viii. 12; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, Jn. xi. 33; 
ταράσσεσθαι, Jn. xiii. 21; Céew, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 
11; ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι, Lk. x. 21 (but 1, T Tr WH here add 
ἁγίῳ); dat. of respect: 1 Co. v. 3; Col. 11. 5; 1 Pet. iv. 
6; κραταιοῦσθαι, Lk. i. 80; ii. 40 Ree.; ἅγιον εἶναι, 1 Co. 
vii. 34; ζωοποιηθείς, 1 Pet. iii. 18; ζῆν, 1 Pet. iv. 6; πτω- 
χοί, Mt.v.3; dat. of instrument: δεδεμένος, Acts xx. 22; 
συνέχεσθαι, xviii. 5 Rec.; θεῷ λατρεύειν, Phil. iii. 3 R G;. 
dat. of advantage: ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί pov, 2 Co. ii. 13 
(12); ἐν τῷ πνεύματι, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vi. 
20 Rec. [it is surely better to take ἐν r. z. here locally, 
of the ‘sphere’ (W. 386 (362), cf. vs. 19)]; also ἐν πνεύμα- 
τι, nearly i. q. πνευματικῶς [but see W. § 51, 1 e. note], Jn. 
iv. 23; of the seat of an action, ἐν τῷ πνεύματί pov, Ro. i. 
9; τιθέναι ἐν τῷ mv., to propose to one's self, purpose in. 
spirit, foll. by the infin. Acts xix. 21. πνεύματα προφη- 
τῶν, ace. to the context the souls (spirits) of the prophets 
moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32; in a pecu- 
liar sense πνεῦμα is used of a soul thoroughly roused by 
the Holy Spirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet 
destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under- 
standing; thus in the phrases τὸ πνεῦμά μου προσεύχεται; 
opp. to 6 νοῦς pov, 1 Co. xiv. 14; πνεύματι λαλεῖν μυστή- 
pua, ibid. 2; προσεύχεσθαι, ψάλλειν, εὐλογεῖν, τῷ mv., aS 
opp. to τῷ νοΐ, ibid. 15, 16. 

3. ἃ spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least 
all grosser matter, and possessed of the power of knowing, 
desiring, deciding, and acting ; a. generically: Lk. 
xxiv. 37; Acts xxiii. 8 (on which see μήτε, fin.) ; ibid. 9; 
πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, Lk. xxiv. 39; πνεῦμα 
ζωοποιοῦν, [a life-giving spirit], spoken of Christ as raised 
from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 45 ; πνεῦμα 6 θεός (God is spirit 
essentially), Jn. iv. 24; πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων, of God, 
Heb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of 
men and of angels. b. a human soul that has left the 
body [(Babr. 122, 8)]: plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23; 
1 Pet. iii. 19. c. a spirit higher than man but lower 
than God, i.e. an angel: plur. Heb. i. 14 ; used of demons, 
or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the 
bodies of men: [Mk. ix. 20]; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18 ;. 
plur, Mt. viii. 16; xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; πνεῦμα 
πύθωνος Or πύθωνα, Acts xvi. 16; πνεύματα δαιμονίων, 
Rev. xvi. 14; πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Lk. iv. 33 (see 
δαιμόνιον, 2) ; πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 
11; πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον, Mt. x. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26, 


‘27; iii. 11, 30; v. 2,8,135 vi. 7; vii. 25 ; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36; 


vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 26; Acts v. 16; viii. 7; Rev. 
xvi. 135 xviii. 2; ἄλαλον, κωφόν (for the Jews held that 
the same evils with which the men were afflicted affected 
the demons also that had taken possession of them [ef. 
Wetstein, N. T. i. 279 sqq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, App. xvi.; see δαιμονίζομαι etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix. 
17, 25; πονηρόν, Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; Acts xix. 12, 13, 157 
16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23; 1 S. xvi. 14; xix. 9, ete.) ]. ἃ. 


πνεῦμα 5 


the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an- 
gels, close to God and most intimately united to him (in 
doctrinal phraseology the divine nature of Christ): 1 Tim. 
ii. 16; with the addition of ἁγιωσύνης (on which see 
ἁγιωσύνη, 1 [yet cf. 4 a. below]), Ro. i. 4 [but see Meyer 
ad loc., Ellicott on 1 Tim.lc.]; it is called πνεῦμα aió- 
mov, in tacit contrast with the perishable ψυχαί of sacri- 
ficial animals, in Heb. ix. 14, where cf. Delitzsch [and 
esp. Kurtz]. 

4. The Scriptures also ascribe a πνεῦμα to Gon, i. e. 
God's power and agency, — distinguishable in thought (or 
modalistice, as they say in technical speech) from God's 
essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of 
affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the 
theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts 
and blessings; [cf. the resemblances and differences in 
Philo's use of τὸ θεῖον πνεῦμα, e. g. de gigant. $12 (cf. $5 
sq-); quis rer. div. $53 ; de mund. opif. § 46, etc. ]. a. 
This πνεῦμα is called in the O. T. DTN mo, mm mn; 
in the N. T. πνεῦμα ἅγιον, τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα, τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ 
ἅγιον (first so in Sap. 1. ὃ ; ix. 17; for wap 51, in Ps. 1. 
(li.) 13, Is. Ixiii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by πνεῦμα ἁγιω- 
aums),i.e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora- 
ble, utterly opposed to all impurity): Mt. i. 18, 20; iii. 
11; xii. 32; xxviii. 19; Mk.i.8; iii. 29; xii. 36 ; xiii. 11; 
ἘΠ 155135501525, 26: iO 22) ἵν 7 ee 9.7 ΠῚ 10, 
12; Jn.i. 33; vii. 33[L T WH om. Tr br. dy.]; xiv. 26; 
xx. 225 Actsi.2,5, 8,165 ii. 33,38; 1v. 25 LT Tr WH; 
v. 3, 32; viii. 18 [L T WH om. Tr br. τὸ ay. ], 19; ix. 31; x. 
38, 44, 45,47 ; xi. 15, 16, 24; xiii. 2, 4, 9, 52; xv. 8, 28; 
RVING |x. δ xx. 28. Ros πεν ἢ; χῆν 1; κὺ 13, 10:19 
[b Tr WH in br.]; 1 Co. vi. 19; xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 6; xiii. 
13 (14); Eph.i.13; 1 Th.i.5,6; 2 Tim.i. 14; Tit. iii. 
5; Heb.ii.4; vi.4; ix. 8; 1 Jn. v. 7 Rec.; Jude 20; oth- 
er exx. will be given below in the phrases; (on the use 
and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. 
ii. p. 105 [in opposition to Harless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al. ; 
cf. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v. 5; W. 
122 (116); B. 89 (78)]); τὸ mv. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Eph. 
iv. 30; 1 Th. iv. 8; πνεῦμα θεοῦ, Ro. viii. 9, 14; τὸ τοῦ 
θεοῦ πνεῦμα, 1 Pet. iv. 14; (τὸ) πνεῦμα (rov) θεοῦ, Mt. iii. 
16; xii. 18, 28; 1 Co. ii. 14; iii. 16; Eph. iii. 16; 1 Jn. 
iv. 2; τὸ mv. τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν, 1 Co. vi. 11; τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρός, 
Mt. x. 20; mv. θεοῦ ζῶντος, 2 Co. iii. 3; τὸ mv. τοῦ ἐγείραν- 
tos ᾿Ιησοῦν, Ro. viii. 11; τὸ mw. τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ (emanating 
from God and imparted unto men), 1 Co. ii. 12; πνεῦμα 
and τὸ mv. τοῦ κυρίου, 1. e. of God, Lk. iv. 18; Acts v. 9 
(cf. vs. 4) ; viii. 39 ; κυρίου, i. e. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17, 
18 [ef. B. 343 (295)]; τὸ πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ, since the same 
Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi. 
7 (where Rec. οπι. Ἰησοῦ); Χριστοῦ, Ro. viii. 9; Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, Phil. i. 19; τὸ ἔν τινε (in one's soul [not WH 
mrg.]) πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ, 1 Pet. i. 11; τὸ mw. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Gal. iv. 6; simply τὸ πνεῦμα or πνεῦμα: Mt. iv. 1; 
xii. 31, 325 xxii. 43 ; Mk.i. 10,12; Lk. iv. 1, 14; Jn. i. 
32, 33; iii. 6, 8, 34; vii. 39; Acts ii. 4; viii. 29; x. 19; 
xi.12, 28; xxi. 4; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27; xv. 30; 1 Co. 
ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Rec. adds ἁγίου) ; xii. 4, 7, 8; 2 Co. 








1 πνεῦμα. 


i. 22; 111.6, 8; v.5; Gal. iii. 3, 5, 14: iv. 295 v. 5, 17, 29; 
25; Eph. iv. 3; v. 9 Rec.; vi. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 2 Th. ii. 
13; 1 Tim. iv. 1; Jas. iv. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec.; 1 Jn. iii. 
24; v. 6, 8; Rev. xxii. 17. Among the beneficent and 
very varied operations and effects ascribed to this 
Spirit in the N. T., the foll. are prominent: by it the 
man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Mary 
(Mt. i. 18, 20; Lk. i. 35), and at his baptism by John it 
is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16; Mk. i. 
10; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually (μένον ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτόν) filled with it (Jn. i. 32, 33, cf. iii. 34; Mt. xii. 28; 
Acts x. 38); hence to its prompting and aid the acts and 
words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1; xii. 28; Mk. i. 12; 
Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ's resurrection it was im- 
parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22; Acts ii. Sub- 
sequently other followers of Christ are related to have 
received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instra- 
mentality of baptism (Acts ii. 38; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the 
laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep- 
tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag- 
ical bond, Acts viii. 12, 15; x. 44 sqq. To its agency 
are referred all the blessings of’ the Christian religion, 
such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8; 
Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and. 
reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]) ; all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11; 
hence ἁγιασμὸς πνεύματος, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 2); the 
power of suppressing evil desires and practising holi- 
ness (Ro. viii. 2sqq.; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22 [Rec.], 
etc.); fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu- 
tions, losses, trials, for Christ's sake (Mt. x. 20; Lk. xii. 
11,12; Ro. viii. 26) ; the knowledge of evangelical truth 
(Jn. xiv. 17, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 12, 13; 1 Co. ii.6-16; Eph. 
iii. 5), — hence it is called πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας (Jn. ll. cc. ; 
1 Jn. iv. 6), πνεῦμα σοφίας kai ἀποκαλύψεως (Eph. i. 17) ; 
the sure and joyful hope of a future resurrection, and 
of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5; viii. 11; 2 Co. i. 22; v. 
5; Eph. i. 13 sq.); for the Holy Spirit is the seal and 
pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22; 
Eph.i.13. He is present toteach, guide, prompt, restrain, 
those Christians whose agency God employs in carrying 
out his counsels: Acts viii. 29, 39; x.19; xi. 12; xiii. 2, 
4; xv. 28; xvi. 6, 7; xx. 28. He is the author of char- 
isms or special “gifts” (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see χάρισμα), 
prominent among which is the power of prophesy- 
ing: τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἀναγγελεῖ, Jn. xvi. 13; hence τὸ πνεῦμα 
τῆς προφητείας (Rev. xix. 10) ; and his efliciency in the 
prophets is called τὸ πνεῦμα simply (1 Th. v. 19), and 
their utterances are introduced with these formulas: 
τάδε λέγει TO πνεῦμα TO ἅγιον. Acts xxi. 11; τὸ πνεῦμα 
λέγει, 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 
added, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii.6,13, 22. Since the Holy 
Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O. T. 
Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances 
are cited in the foll. terms: λέγει or μαρτυρεῖ τὸ πνεῦμα 
τὸ ἅγιον, Heb. iii. 7; x. 15; τὸ my. τὸ dy. ἐλάλησε διὰ 
Ἡσαΐου, Acts xxviii. 25, cf. i. 16. From among the 
great number of other phrases referring to the Holy 
Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here: God 


πνεῦμα 


is said διδόναι τινὶ τὸ mv. τὸ ἅγ., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xv. 8; 
pass. Ro. v. 5; more precisely, ἐκ rod πνεύματος αὐτοῦ, i.e. 
a portion from his Spirit’s fulness [B. § 132, 7; W. 366 
(343) ], 1 Jn. iv. 13; or ἐκχεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ, 
Acts ii. 17, 18, (for its entire fulness Christ alone re- 
ceives, Jn. ili, 34); men are said, λαμβάνειν mv. dy., Jn. 
xx. 22; Acts viii. 15, 17, 19; xix. 2; or τὸ mv. τὸ dy. Acts 
X. 47; or τὸ mv. τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ, 1 Co. ii. 12; or τὸ πνεῦμα, Gal. 
iii. 2, cf. Ro. viii. 15 ; av. θεοῦ ἔχειν, 1 Co. vii. 40; πνεῦμα 
μὴ ἔχειν, Jude 19; πληροῦσθαι πνεύματος ἁγίου, Acts xiii. 
52; ἐν πνεύματι, Eph. v. 18; πλησθῆναι, πλησθήσεσθαι, 
πνεύματος ἁγίου, Lk.i. 15, 41, 67; Actsii.4; iv. 8, 31; ix. 
175-x3i. (9): πνεύματος ἁγίου πλήρης; Acts vi. ὅ; vii. 55; 
Xi. 24; πλήρεις πνεύματος (Ree. adds ἁγίου) καὶ σοφίας, 
Acts vi. ὃ; πνεύματι and πνεύματι θεοῦ ἄγεσθαι, to be led 
by the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; φέρεσθαι ὑπὸ 
mv. dy. 2 Pet. i. 21; the Spirit is said to dwell in the 
minds of Christians, Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co. iii. 16; vi. 19; 
2 Tim. i. 14; Jas. iv. 5, (other expressions may be found 
under βαπτίζω, I. b. bb.; yevváo, 1 fin. and 2 d.; ἐκχέω b.; 
Xpto, a.) ; γίνεσθαι ἐν πνεύματι, to come to be in the Spirit, 
under the power of the Spirit, i. e. in a state of inspira- 
tion or eestasy, Rev. i.10; iv. 2. Dative πνεύματι, by the 
power and aid of the Spirit, the Spirit prompting, Ro. 
viii. 13; Gal. v. 5; rà mv. τῷ ἁγίῳ, Lk. x. 21 L Tr WH; 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ, 1 Pet. i. 12 (where RG T have ἐν my. áy.) ; 
πνεύματι θεοῦ, Phil. iii. 3 L Τ Tr WH; also ἐν πνεύματι, 
Eph. ii. 22; iii. 5 (where ἐν πνεύματι must be joined to 
“ἀπεκαλύφθη) ; ἐν πνεύματι, in the power of the Spirit, 
possessed and moved by the Spirit, Mt. xxii. 43; Rev. 
xvii. 3; xxi. 10; also ἐν τῷ πνεύματι, Lk. ii. 27; iv. 1; 
ἐν τῷ mv. τῷ dy. Lk. x. 21 Tdf.; ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ mv. Lk. iv. 
14; ἐν τῷ πνεύματι τῷ dy. εἰπεῖν, Mk. xii. 365 ἐν πνεύματι 
(dy.) προσεύχεσθαι, Eph. vi. 18; Jude 30; ἐν mv. θεοῦ 
λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xii. 3; ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι, love which the 
Spirit begets, Col. i. 8; περιτομὴ ἐν π., effected by the 
Holy Spirit, opp. to γράμματι, the prescription of the 
written law, Ro. ii. 29; τύπος γίνου τῶν πιστῶν ἐν mv., in 
the way in which you are governed by the Spirit, 1 Tim. 
iv. 12 Rec.; [ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, Eph. ii. 18]; ἡ ἑνότης τοῦ 
πνεύματος, effected by the Spirit, Eph. iv. 3; καινότης τοῦ 
zv. Ro. vii. 6. τὸ πνεῦμα is opp. to ἡ σάρξ i. e. human 
nature left to itself and without the controlling influence 
of God’s Spirit, subject to error and sin, Gal. ν. 17, 19, 
22; [vi. S]; Ro. viii. 6; so in the phrases περιπατεῖν κατὰ 
πνεῦμα (opp. to κατὰ σάρκα), Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 4; of κατὰ 
πνεῦμα SC. ὄντες (Opp. tO of κατὰ σάρκα ὄντες), those who 
bear the nature of the Spirit (i. 6. of πνευματικοί), ib. 
5; ἐν πνεύματι εἶναι (opp. to ἐν σαρκί), to be under the 
power of the Spirit, to be guided by the Spirit, ib. 9; 
πνεύματι (dat. of ‘norm’; [cf. B. § 133, 22 b.; W. 219 
(205) ]) περιπατεῖν (opp. to ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς τελεῖν), Gal. 
v.16. The Holy Spirit is a δύναμες, and is expressly 
so called in Lk. xxiv. 49, and δύναμις ὑψίστου, Lk. i. 35 ; 
but we find also πνεῦμα (or zv. dy.) καὶ δύναμις, Acts x. 
38; 1 Co. ii. 4; and ἡ δύναμις τοῦ πνεύματος, Lk. iv. 14, 
where πνεῦμα is regarded as the essence, and δύναμις its 
efficacy; but in 1 Th. i. 5 ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ is epexegetical 


522 








πνεῦμα 


οἵ ἐν δυνάμει. In some pass. the Holy Spirit is rhetori- 
cally represented as a Person [(ef. reff. below)]: Mt. 
xxviii.19; Jn. xiv. 16 sq. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 13-15 (in which 
pass. fr. Jn. the personifieation was suggested by the fact 
that the Holy Spirit was about to assume with the apos- 
tles the place of a person, namely of Christ) ; τὸ zv., καθὼς 
βούλεται, 1 Co. xii. 11; what any one through the help 
of the Holy Spirit has come to understand or decide upon 
is said to have been spoken to him by the Holy Spirit: 
εἶπε τὸ πνεῦμά τινι, Acts viii. 29; x. 19; xi. 12; xiii. 4; τὸ 
my. τὸ dy. διαμαρτύρεταί por, Acts xx. 23. τὸ mv. τὸ dy. 
ἔθετο ἐπισκύπους, i. e. not only rendered them fit to dis- 
charge the ofliee of bishop, but also exercised such an in- 
fluence in their election (xiv. 23) that none except fit per- 
sons were chosen to the office, Acts xx. 28; τὸ πνεῦμα 
ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις in Ro. viii. 26 means, 
as the whole context shows, nothing other than this : *al- 
though we have no very definite conception of what we 
desire (ri προσευξώμεθα), and cannot state it in fit lan- 
guage (καθὸ δεῖν) in our prayer but only disclose it by in- 
articulate groanings, yet God receives these groanings 
as acceptable prayers inasmuch as they come from a soul 
full of the Holy Spirit. Those who strive against the 
sanctifying impulses of the Holy Spirit are said ἀντιπί- 
mrew TO mV. τῷ dy. Acts vii. 915 ἐνυβρίζειν τὸ πν. τῆς χάρι- 
Tos, Ileb. x. 29. πειράζειν τὸ mv. τοῦ κυρίου is applied to 
those who by falsehood would discover whether men full 
of the Holy Spirit can be deceived, Acts v. 9; by anthro- 
popathism those who disregard decency in their speech 
are said λυπεῖν τὸ mv. τὸ dy., since by that they are taught 
how they ought to talk, Eph. iv. 30 (παροξύνειν τὸ mv. Is. 
Ixiii. 10; παραπικραίνειν, Ps. ev. (evi.) 33). Cf. Grimm, 
Institutio theologiae dogmaticae, § 131; [ Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. 8 155 (and Index s. v. * Geist Gottes,’ ‘Spirit of 
God"); Kahnis, Lehre vom Heil. Geiste; Fritzsche, Nova 
opusec. acad. p. 278 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Spirit the Holy; 
Siete in Dict. of Christ. Bios. s. v. Holy Ghost]. b. 
τὰ ἑπτὰ πνεύματα Tov θεοῦ, Rev. [iii. 1 (where Rec.* om. 
énra) |; iv. 5; v. 6 [here Lom. WH br. ἑπτά], which are 
said to be ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ (i. 4) are not seven 
angels, but one and the same divine Spirit manifesting 
itself in seven energies or operations (which are rhetori- 
cally personified, Zech. iii. 9; iv. 6, 10) ; ef. Düsterdieck 
on Rev. i. 4; [ Trench, Epp. to the Seven Churches, ed. 3 
p. 7 54.1. c. by meton. πνεῦμα is used of α. one 
in whom a spirit (πνεῦμα) is manifest or embodied ; hence 
i. q. actuated by a spirit, whether divine or demoniacal ; one 
who either is truly moved by God's Spirit or falsely boasts 
that he is: 2 Th. ii, 2; 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3; hence διακρίσεις 
πνευμάτων, 1 Co. xii. 105 μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, 1 Jn. 
iv. 1; δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα, εἰ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐστίν, ibid. ; 
πνεύματα πλάνα joined with διδασκαλίαι δαιμονίων, 1 Tim. 
iv. 1. But in the truest and highest sense it is said ὁ 
κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν, he in whom the entire fulness of 
the Spirit dwells, and from whom that fulness is diffused 
through the body of Christian believers, 2 Co. iii. 17. — p. 
the plur. πνεύματα denotes the various modes and gifts 
by which the Holy Spirit shows itself operative in those 


πνεῦμα 


- in whom it awells (such as τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς προφητείας, τῆς 
σοφίας, etc.), 1 Co. xiv. 12. 

5. univ. the disposition or influence which fills and gov- 
erns the soul of any one; the efficient source of any power, 
affection, emotion, desire, etc.: τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπα- 
τήσαμεν, 2 Co. xii. 18; ἐν πνεύματι ᾿Ηλίου, in the same 
spirit with which Elijah was filled of old, Lk. i. 17; 
τὰ ῥήματα... . πνεῦμά ἐστιν, exhale a spirit (and fill be- 
lievers with it), Jn. vi. 63; οἵου πνεύματός ἐστε ὑμεῖς, 
[what manner of spirit ye are of] viz. a divine spirit, 
that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.; (cf. 
B. § 132, 11 L; W.$30,5)]; τῷ πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει, 
Acts vi. 10, where see Meyer; mpav καὶ ἡσύχιον πνεῦμα, 
1 Pet. iii. 4; πνεῦμα πραότητος, such as belongs to the 
meek, 1 Co. iv. 21; Gal. vi. 1; τὸ mv. τῆς προφητείας, such 
as characterizes prophecy and by which the prophets 
are governed, Rey. xix. 10; τῆς ἀληθείας, σοφίας καὶ ἀπο- 
καλύψεως, see above p. 521° mid. (Is. xi. 2; Deut. xxxiv. 9; 
Sap. vii. 7) ; τῆς πίστεως, 2 Co. iv. 135 τῆς υἱοθεσίας, such 
as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ, of 
the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2; 
δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ, 2 Tim.i. 7; ἐν πνεῦμα 
εἶναι with Christ, i.q. to be filled with the same spirit as 
Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately 
united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17; ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, by the re- 
ception of one Spirit’s efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; εἰς ἐν 
πνεῦμα, so as to be united into one body filled with one 
Spirit, ibid. RG; ἕν πνεῦμα ποτίζεσθαι, [made to drink 
of i.e.] imbued with one Spirit, ibid. L T Tr WH [see 
mor((o]; ἕν σῶμα καὶ ἕν πνεῦμα, one (social) body filled 
and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4; — in all these 
pass. although the language is general, yet it is clear 
from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten 
of the Holy Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [(cf. 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad 
Magn. 7)]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand, 
τὸ πνεῦμα TO ἐνεργοῦν ἐν rois υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας (a spirit 
that comes from the devil), Eph. ii. 2; also τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ 
κύσμου, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude, 
1 Co, ii. 12; δουλείας, such as characterizes and governs 
slaves, Ro. viii. 15; κατανύξεως, Ro. xi. 8; δειλίας, 2 Tim. 
i. 7; τῆς πλάνης, 1 Jn. iv. 6 (πλανήσεως, Is. xix. 14 ; πορ- 
veias, Hos. iv. 12; ν. 4); τὸ τοῦ ἀντιχρίστου 80. πνεῦμα, 
1 Jn. iv. 8; ἕτερον πνεῦμα λαμβάνειν, i. 6. different from 
the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. xi.4; τὸ zv. τοῦ νοῦς, the govern- 
ing spirit of the mind, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Ackermann, 
Beitrüge zur theol. Wiirdigung u. Abwiigung der Begriffe 
πνεῦμα, νοῦς, u. Geist, in the Theol. Stud. τ. Krit. for 
1839, p. 873 sqq. ; Biichsenschiitz, La doctrine de l'Esprit 
de Dieu selon l'ancien et nouveau testament. Strasb. 
1840; Chr. Fr. Fritzsche, De Spiritu Sancto commenta- 
tio exegetica et dogmatica, 4 Pts. Hal. 1840 sq., included 
in his Nova opuseula academica ( Turici, 1846) p. 233 sqq.; 
Kahnis, Die Lehre v. heil. Geist. Pt. i. (Halle, 1847) ; an 
anonymous publication [by Prince Ludwig Solms Lich, 
entitled] Die biblische Bedeutung des Wortes Geist. 
(Giessen, 1862); H. H. Wendt, Die Bezriffe Fleisch u. 
Geist im bibl. Sprachgebrauch. (Gotha, 1878); [Cremer 


528 








πνευματικῶς 


in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Geist des Menschen; G. L. Hahn, 
Theol. d. N. Test. i. $ 149 sqq.; J. Laidlaw, The Bible 
Doctrine of Man. (Cunningham Lects., 7th Series, 1880); 
Dickson, St. Paul's use of the terms Flesh and Spirit. 
(Glasgow, 1883); and reff. in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) and 
Dict. of Christ. Biog., as above, 4 a. fin.]* 

πνευματικός, -7, -óv, (πνεῦμα), spiritual (Vule. spiritalis); 
in the N. T. 1. relating to the human spirit, or 
rational soul, as the part of man which is akin to God 
and serves as his instrument or organ, opp. to ἡ ψυχή 
(see πνεῦμα, 2): hence τὸ πνευματικόν, that which pos- 
sesses the nature of the rational soul, opp. to τὸ ψυχικόν, 
1 Co. xv. 46 [cf. W. 592 (551)]; σῶμα πνευματικόν, the 
body which is animated and controlled only by the ra- 
tional soul and by means of which the rational life, or 
life of the πνεῦμα, is lived; opp. to σῶμα ψυχικόν, verse 
44. 2. belonging to a spirit, or a being higher 
than man but inferior to God (see πνεῦμα, 3 €.) : τὰ zvev- 
ματικά (i.e. spiritual beings or powers, [R. V. spiritual 
hosts], cf. W. 239 (224)) τῆς πονηρίας (gen. of quality), 
i.e. wicked spirits, Eph. vi. 12. 3. belonging to the 
Divine Spirit; a. in reference to things; 
emanating from the Divine Spirit, or exhibiting its effects 
and so its character: χάρισμα, Ro. i. 11; εὐλογία. Eph. i. 
35 σοφία kai σύνεσις πνευματική (opp. to σοφία σαρκική, 2 
Co. i. 12; ψυχική, Jas. iii. 15), Col. i. 9; ὠδαί, divinely 
inspired, and so redolent of the Holy Spirit, Col. iii. 16; 
[ Eph. v. 19 Lehm. br.]; 6 νόμος (opp. to a σάρκινος man), 
Ro. vii. 14; θυσίαι, tropically, the acts of a life dedicated 
to God and approved by him, due to the influence of the 
Holy Spirit (tacitly opp. to the sacrifices of an external 
worship), 1 Pet. ii. 5; i. q. produced by the sole power of 
God himself without natural instrumentality, supernatural, 
βρῶμα, πόμα. πέτρα, 1 Co. x. 3, 4, [(cf. * Teaching’ ete. 10, 
3)]; πνευματικά, thoughts, opinions, precepts, maxims, 
ascribable to the Holy Spirit working in the soul, 1 Co. 
ii. 13 (on which see συγκρίνω, 1) ; τὰ πνευματικά, spiritual 
gifts, —of the endowments called χαρίσματα (see χάρι- 
cpa), 1 Co. xii. 1; xiv. 1; univ. the spiritual or heavenly 
blessings of the gospel, opp. to τὰ σαρκικά, Ro. xv. 27; [1 
Co. ix. 11]. b. in reference to persons; one who 
is filled with and governed by the Spirit of God: 1 Co. ii. 
15 (cf. 10-13, 16); [iii. 1]; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 1; οἶκος 
πνευματικός, of a body of Christians (see οἶκος, 1 b. fin.), 
1 Pet. ii. 5. (The word is not found in the O: T. [cf. 
W. § 34, 3]. In prof. writ. fr. Aristot. down it means 
pertaining to the wind or breath; windy, exposed to the 
wind; blowing; [but Soph. Lex. s. v. cites rv. οὐσία, Cleo- 
med. 1, 8 p. 46 ; τὸ zv. τὸ πάντων τούτων αἴτιον, Strab. 1, 
3,5 p. 78, 10ed. Kramer; and we find it opp. to σωματικόν 
in Plut. mor. p. 129 c. (desanitate praecepta 14) ; cf. An- 
tho]. Pal. 8, 76. 175].) * 

πνευματικῶς, adv., spiritually, (Vulg. spiritaliter) : i. e. 
by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. [13 WH mrg.], 14; 
in a sense apprehended only by the aid of the Divine 
Spirit, i.e. in a hidden or mystical sense, Rev. xi. 8. Its 
opposite σαρκικῶς in the sense of literally is used by Jus- 
tin Mart. dial. c. Tryph. c. 14 p. 231 d.* 


TVEW 
avéw; 1 aor. ἔπνευσα; fr. Hom. down; to breathe, to 
blow: of the wind, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Lk. xii. 55; Jn. iii. 


8; vi. 18; Rev. vii. 1; τῇ πνεούσῃ sc. αὔρᾳ (ces W. 591 
(550); [B. 82 (72)]), Acts xxvii.40. [Comp.: ék-, év-, 
ὑπο- mvéw. |* 

πνίγω : impf. ἔπνιγον ; 1 aor. ἔπνιξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. 
plur. ἐπνίγοντο; a. to choke, strangle: used of thorns 
crowding down the seed sown in a field and hindering 
its growth, Mt. xiii. 7 T WH mrg.; in the pass. of per- 
ishing by drowning (Xen. anab. 5, 7, 25; cf. Joseph. antt. 
10, 7, 5), Mk. v. 13. b. to wring one's neck, throttle, 
[as V. to take one by the throat]: Mt. xviii. 28. [Cowr.: 
ἀπο-; emt, συμ- πνίγω. ἈΠ 

πνικτός, τή, τόν, (πνίγω), suffocated, strangled: τὸ πνι- 
κτόν, [what is strangled, i. 6.1 an animal deprived of life 
without shedding its blood, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25. 
[(Several times in Athen. and other later writ., chiefly 
of cookery; cf. our * smothered” as a culinary term.) ]* 

πνοή, -s, ἡ, (πνέω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for iY23; 
1. breath, the breath of life: Acts xvii. 25 (Gen. ii. 7; 
Prov. xxiv. 12; Sir. xxx: 29 (21); 2 Macc. iii. 31; vii. 
9): 2. wind: Acts ii. 2 (Job xxxvii. 9). [Cf. 
πνεῦμα, 1 b.]* 

ποδήρης, τες; acc. -pnv, Lehm. ed. ster. Tdf. ed. 7 in Rev. 
1.18; see ἄρσην, (πούς, and dpe ‘to join together,’ *fas- 
ten’), reaching to the feet (Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plut., 
al): 6 ποδήρης (sc. χιτών, Ex. xxv. 65 xxviii. 4; xxxv. 
8; Ezek. ix. 3) or ἡ ποδήρης (se. ἐσθής), a garment reaching 
to the ankles, coming down to the feet, Rev.i. 13 (Sir. xxvii. 
8; xlv. 8; χιτὼν ποδήρης, Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 2; Paus. 5, 19, 
6; ὑποδύτης mo0. Ex. xxviii. 27; ἔνδυμα mod. Sap. xviii. 
24; [Joseph. b. j. 5,5, 7]). [Cf. Trench $1. sub fin.]* 

πόθεν, adv., [fr. Hom. down], whence ; a. of 
place, from what place: Mt. xv. 33; Lk.xiii. 25, 27; Jn. 
iii. 8; vi. 5; viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xix. 9; Rev. vii. 13; 
Jrom what condition, Rev. ii. 5. 
source, i. q. from what author or giver: Mt. xiii. [27], 54, 
56; xxi. 25; Mk. vi. 2; Lk.xx. 7; Jn- 1-9; Jas. iv. 1; 
from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sq. (cf. vi. 42), see Meyer 
ad loc. C. of cause, how is it that? how can it be that? 
Mk. viii. 4; xii. 37; Lk. i. 43; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; iv. 11.* 

ποία, -as, ἡ, [cf. Curtius $387], herbage, grass: ace. to 
some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14;.but ποία there is 
more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. ποῖος (q. v.), 
of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mal. iii. 2; in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down.) * 

ποιέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐποίει. plur. 2 pers. ἐποι- 
εἴτε, 3 pers. ἐποίουν ; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. ἐποίησα, 3 pers. 
plur. optat. ποιήσειαν (Lk. vi. 11 RG; ef. W. § 13, 2d.; 
[B. 42 (37)]) and ποιήσαιεν (ibid. L T Tr WH [see WH. 
App. p. 167]); pf. πεποίηκα; plpf. wemoujxe without 
augm. (Mk. xv. 7; see W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid., 
pres. ποιοῦμαι ; impf. ἐποιούμην ; fut. ποιήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐποι- 
ησάμην ; pf. pass. ptep. πεποιημένος (Heb. xii. 27) ; fr. 
Hom. down; Hebr. ny; Lat. facio, i.e. 

I. to make (Lat. efficio), 1. τί; a. with the 
names of the things made, to produce, construct, form, 
Jüshion, etc.: ἀνθρακιάν, Jn. xviii. 18; εἰκόνα, Rev. xiii. 


b. of origin or | 


24 


| 








ποιέω 


14; ἱμάτια, Acts ix. 39; ναούς, Acts xix. 24; σκηνάς, Mt. 
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33; τύπους, Acts vii. 43; πηλόν, 
Jn. ix. 11, 14; πλάσμα, Ro. ix. 20; acc. to some inter- 
preters (also W. 256 n.! (240 n.?)) ὁδὸν ποιεῖν, to make a 
path, Mk. ii. 23 RG 'T Tr txt. WH txt. (so that the mean- 
ing is, that the disciples of Christ made a path for them- 
selves through the standing grain by plucking the heads; 
see ὁδοποιέω, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we 
must take the ground that Mark does not give us the 
true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the 
narrative received from others; [those who do accept 
it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying 
lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other 
interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex- 
pressed in the participle—an idiom apparently foreign 
to the N. T. (see W. 353 (331)), and to the additional 
circumstance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav- 
ing already expressed the idea of *going', and ex- 
pressed it by substantially the same word (παραπορεύε- 
σθαι) which Matthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) employ 
and regard as of itself sufficient. On the interpretation 
of the pass., the alleged ‘sad corruption,’ etc., see Jas. 
Morison, Com. on Mk. 2d ed. p. 57 sq.; on the other side, 
Weiss, Mareusevangelium, p. 100]. But see just below, 
under ¢.). to create, to produce : of God, as the author 
of all things, τί or τινά, Mt. xix.4; Mk. x. 6; Lk. xi. 40; 
Heb. i. 2; Acts iv. 24; vii.50; xvii. 24; Rev. xiv. 7; pass. 
Heb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13; ix. 9; 2 Macc. vii. 28, and often 
in the O.T. Apocrypha; for πῶ» in Gen. i. 7, 16, 25, ete.; 
for &73 in Gen. i. 21, 27 ; v. 1, etc. ; also in Grk. writ. : 
γένος ἀνθρώπῳν, Hes. op. 109, etc. ; absol. ὁ ποιῶν, the crea- 
tor, Plat. Tim. p. 76 c.); here belongs also Heb. iii. 2, on 
which see Bleek and Lünemann [(ef. below, 2 c. B.) ]. 
In imitation of the Hebr. Xy (cf. Winer [’s Simonis (4th 
ed. 1828)], Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 754; Gesenius, Thes. 
ii. p. 1074 sq.) absol. of men, fo labor, to do work, Mt. xx. 
12 (Ruth ii. 19) ; i. q. to be operative, exercise activity, 
Rev. xiii. 5 R τοὶ οἷς. L,'T Tr WH [cf. Dan. xi. 28; but al. 
render ποιεῖν in both these exx. spend, continue, in ref. 
to time; see II. d. below]. b. joined to nouns de- 
noting a state or condition, it signifies /o be the au- 
thor of, to cause: σκάνδαλα, Ro. xvi. 17; εἰρήνην (to be the 
author of harmony), Eph. ii. 15; Jas. iii. 18; ἐπισύστασιν 
[L T Tr WH ἐπίστασιν], Acts xxiv. 12; συστροφήν, Acts 
xxiii. 12; ποιῶ τινί τι, to bring, afford, a thing to one, Lk. 
i.68; Acts xv. 3, (so also Grk. writ., as Xen. mem. 3, 
10, 8 [ef. L. and S. s. v. A. IT. 1a.]). c. joined to 
nouns involving the idea of action (or of something 
which is accomplished by action), so as to form a peri- 
phrasis for the verb cognate to the substantive, and thus 
to express the idea of the verb more forcibly, —in which 
species of periphrasis the Grks. more commonly use the 
middle (see 3 below, and W. 256 (240); [B. $135, 5]): 
μονὴν ποιῶ παρά τινι, Jn. xiv. 23 (where L T Tr WH zou- 
σόμεθα; cf. Thue. 1, 131) ; ó0óv, to make one’s way, go, 
Mk. ii. 23 (where render as follows : they began, as they 
went, to pluck the ears; cf. ποιῆσαι ὁδὸν αὐτοῦ, Judg. xvii. 
; the Greeks say ὁδὸν ποιεῖσθαι, Hdt. 7, 425 see above, 


ποιέω 5 


under a.) ; πόλεμον, Rey. xiii. 5 Rec.**; with the addi- 
tion of μετά τινος (i. 4. πολεμεῖν), Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 
7 [here L om. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, (see μετά, 
1. 2 d. p. 403") ; ἐκδίκησιν, Lk. xviii. 7, 8; τινί, Acts vii. 
24, (Mie. v. 15) ; ἐνέδραν, i. q. ἐνεδρεύω, to make an am- 
bush, lay wait, Acts xxv. 3; συμβούλιον, i. q. συμβουλεύο- 
pa, to hold a consultation, deliberate, Mk. iii. 6 [RG 
'T Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; xv. 1 [here TWH mrg. συμβ. 
éroipágavres]; συνωμοσίαν, i. 4. συνόμνυμι, Acts xxiii. 13 
(where L 'T Tr WH ποιησάμενοι for Rec. πεποιηκότες ; see 
in 3 below) ; κρίσιν, to execute judgment, Jn. v. 27; Jude 
15. To this head may be referred nouns by which the 
mode or kind of action is more precisely defined; as 
δυνάμεις, δύναμιν, ποιεῖν, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 5; 
Acts xix. 11; τὴν ἐξουσίαν τινός, Rev. xiii. 12; ἔργον (a 
notable work), ἔργα, of Jesus, Jn. v. 36, vii. 3, 21; x. 25; 
xiv. 10, 12; xv. 24; κράτος, Lk. i. 51; σημεῖα, τέρατα kai 
σημεῖα, [ Mk. xiii. 22 Tdf.]; Jn. ii. 23; iii.2; iv. 54; vi. 
9. 11.501 νιῖ: 91; τσ. 10; x 419 Sok Δ7: ΧΠ18. 90) sox 
30; Acts ii. 22; νἱ. 8; vii. 86; vili. 6; xv. 12; Rev. xiii. 
13,14; xvi. 14; xix. 20; θαυμάσια, Mt. xxi. 15; ὅσα ἐποίει, 
ἐποίησαν, etc., Mk. iii. 8; vi. 30; Lk. ix. 10; in other 
phrases it is used of marvellous works, Mt. ix. 28; Lk. 
iv. 23; Jn.iv.45; vii.4; xi. 45,46; xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; 
Acts x. 39; xiv. 11; xxi. 19; ete. d. i.q. to make 
ready, to prepare: ἄριστον, Lk. xiv. 12; δεῖπνον, Mk. vi. 
21; Lk. xiv. 16; Jn. xii. 2, (δεῖπνον ποιεῖσθαι, Xen. Cyr. 
3, 3, 25) ; δοχήν, Lk. v. 29; xiv. 13, (Gen. xxi. 8) ; γάμους, 
Mt. xxii. 2 (γάμον, Tob. viii. 19). e. of things ef- 
fected by generative force, to produce, bear, shoot forth: 
of trees, vines, grass, etc., κλάδους, Mk. iv. 32; καρπούς, 
Mt. iii. 8, ete., see καρπός, 1 and 2 a. (Gen. i. 11, 12; Aris- 
tot. de plant. [1, 4 p. 819^, 31]; 2, 10[829*, 41]; Theophr. 
de caus. plant. 4, 11 [(?) ]) ; ἐλαίας, Jas. iii. 12 (τὸν οἶνον, 
of the vine, Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 5) ; of a fountain yield- 
ing water, ibid. f. ποιῶ ἐμαυτῷ τι, to acquire, to 
provide a thing for one's self (i. e. for one's use) : βαλάντια, 
Lk. xii. 33; φίλους, Lk. xvi. 9; without a dative, to gain: 
of tradesmen (like our colloq. to make something), Mt. 
xxv. 16 [L Tr WH ἐκέρδησεν] ; Lk. xix. 18, (Polyb. 2, 62, 
12; pecuniam maximam facere, Cie. Verr. 2, 2, 6). 2: 
With additions to the accusative which define or limit 
the idea of making: a. τὶ ἔκ τινος (gen. of mate- 
rial), to make a thing out of something, Jn. ii. 15; ix. 
6; Ro. ix. 21; κατά τι, according to the pattern of a 
thing [see κατά, II. 3 c. a.], Acts vii. 44. with the addi- 
tion, to the ace. of the thing, of an adjective with which 
the verb so blends that, taken with the adj., it may be 
changed into the verb cognate to the adj.: εὐθείας ποι- 
«iv (τὰς τρίβους, i. q. εὐθύνειν, Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 35; Lk. 
iii. 4; τρίχα λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν, i. €. Xevkatvew, μελαίνειν, 
Mt. v. 36; add, Acts vii. 19; Heb. xii. 13; Rev. xxi. 
b? b. τὸ ἱκανόν rw; 566 ἱκανός, a. C. ποιεῖν 
τινα with an aceus. of the predicate, a. to (make i.e.) 
render one anything: twa ἴσον τινί, Mt. xx. 12; τινὰ 
δῆλον, Mt. xxvi. 73; add, Mt. xii. 16; xxviii. 14 ; Mk. iii. 
12; Jn. v. 11, 15; vii. 23; xvi. 2; Ro. ix. 28[R G, Tr mre. 
in br.]; Heb. i. 7; Rev. xii. 15; τινὰς ἁλιεῖς, to make 


25 








ποιέω 


them fit (qualify them) for fishing, Mt. iv. 19; [ποιῶν 
ταῦτα γνωστὰ ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Acts xv. 17 sq. G T Tr WH (see 
γνωστός, and cf. IL. a. below) ]; τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν, to make 
the two different things one, Eph. ii. 14; to change one 
thing into another, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; 
Jn. ii. 16; iv. 46; 1 Co. vi. 15. B. to (makei.e.) consti- 
tute or appoint one anything: τινὰ κύριον, Acts ii. 36; Rev. 
v. 10; to this sense some interpreters would refer Heb. iii. 
2 also, where after τῷ ποιήσαντι αὐτόν they supply from the 
preceding context τὸν ἀπόστολον kai ἀρχιερέα krA.; but it 
is more correct to take ποιεῖν here in the sense of create 
(see 1 a. above) ; τινά, tva with the subjunc. to appoint or 
ordain one that etc. Mk. iii. 14. y. to (make i. e.) 
declare one anything: Jn. v. 18; viii. 53; x. 33; xix. 7, 
12; 1 Jn. i. 10; v. 10; τί with an acc. of the pred. Mt. 
xii.33 (on which see Meyer). d. with adverbs: 
καλῶς ποιῶ τι, Mk. vii. 37 [ A. V. do]; τινὰ ἔξω, to put one 


forth, to lead him out (Germ. hinausthun), Acts v. 34 (Xen. 


Cyr. 4, 1, 3). e. ποιῶ τινα with an infin. to make one 
do a thing, Mk. viii. 22 [R GL Tr mrg.]; Lk. v.34; Jn. 
vi. 10; Acts xvii. 26; or become something, Mk. i. 17; 
τινά foll by rod with an infin. /o cause one to etc. Acts 
iii. 12 [W. 326 (306); B. $140, 16 6.]; also foll. by ἵνα 
[B. $139, 43; W. $ 44, 8 b. fin.], Jn. xi. 37; Col.iv. 16; 
Rev. xiii. 15 (here T om. WH br. tva) ; iii. 9; xiii. 12, 16; 
[other exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 8]. 3. Asthe active 
ποιεῖν (see 1 c. above), so also the middle ποιεῖσθαι, joined 
to accusatives of abstract nouns forms a periphrasis for 
the verb cognate to the substantive; and then, while 
ποιεῖν signifies to be the author of a thing (to cause, bring 
about, as ποιεῖν πόλεμον, εἰρήνην), ποιεῖσθαι denotes an 
action which pertains in some way to the actor (for 
one's self, among themselves, etc., as σπονδάς, εἰρήνην ποι- 
εἶσθαι), or which is done by one with his own resources 
([the ‘dynamic’ or ‘subjective’ mid.], as πόλεμον ποιεῖ- 
σθαι [to make, carry on, war]; cf. Passow s. v. I. 2 a. ii. 
p. 974 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. A. IT. 4]; Krüger § 52, 8, 1; 
Blume ad Lycure. p. 55; [W. $38, 5n.; B. $135, 5]; 
although this distinction is not always observed even by 
the Greeks) : ποιεῖσθαι μονήν; [make our abode], Jn. xiv. 
23 L T Tr WH, (see 1 c. above); συνωμοσίαν (Hdian. 7, 
4, 1 [3 ed. Bekk.] ; Polyb. 1, 70,6; 6, 13, 4; in the second 
instance Polyb. might more fitly have said ποιεῖν), Acts 
xxiii. 13 L T Tr WH, see 1 c. above; Aóyov, to compose 
a narrative, Acts i. 1; to make account of, regard, (see 
Aóyos, II. 2 [and cf. I. 3 a.]), Acts xx. 24 [T Tr WH, 
Aóyov]; ἀναβολήν (see ἀναβολή), Acts xxv. 17; ἐκβολήν 
(see ἐκβολή, b.), Acts xxvii. 18; κοπετόν (i. q. κόπτομαι), Acts 
viii. 2 [here L T Tr WH give the active, cf. B. $135, 
5n.]; πορείαν (i. q- πορεύομαι), Lk. xiii. 22 (Xen. Cyr. 5, 
2, 31; anab. 5, 6, 11; Joseph. vit. $8 11 and 52; Plut. 
de solert. anim. p. 971 e.; 2 Macc. iii. 8; xii. 10) ; κοινω- 
νίαν, to make a contribution among themselves and from 
their own means, Ro. xv. 26; σπουδήν, Jude 3 (Hdt. 1, 
4; 9,8; Plat. lege. 1 p. 628e.; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 and often; 
Diod. 1, 75; Plut. puer. educ. 7,13; al.); αὔξησιν (i.q. 
αὐξάνομαιν, to make increase, Eph. iv. 16 ; δέησιν, δεήσεις, 
i. q. δέομαι, to make supplication, Lk. v. 33; Phil. i. 4; 


, 
TTOLE@ 


526 


ποιέω 


1 Tim. ii. 1; μνείαν (4. v-) ; μνήμην (q. v. in b.), 2 Pet.i.15; | (purpose) in acting, ibid. RGT Tr WII; τὸν λόγον τοῦ 


πρόνοιαν (i. q- προνοοῦμαι), to have regard for, care for, 
make provision for, τινός, Ro. xiii. 14 (Isoer. paneg. §§ 2 
and 136 [pp. 52 and 93 ed. Lange]; Dem. p. 1163, 19; 
1429, 8; Polyb. 4, 6, 11 ; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46; Joseph. 
b. 7.4, 5, 2; antt. 5, 7, 9; c. Ap. 1, 2,3; Ael. v. h. 12, 56; 
al.; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 187) ; καθαρισμόν, Heb. i. 3 
(Job vii. 21); βέβαιον ποιεῖσθαΐ τι, i. q. βεβαιοῦν, 2 Pet. 
i. 10. 

II. (o do (Lat. ago), i. e. to follow some method in 
expressing by deeds the feelings and thoughts of the 
mind; a. univ., with adverbs describing the mode 
of action: καλῶς, to act rightly, do well, Mt. xii. 12; 1 Co. 
vii. 37, 38; Jas. ii. 19; καλῶς ποιεῖν foll. by a participle 
[cf. B. $ 144, 15 a.; W. $45, 4 a.], Acts x. 33; Phil. iv. 
14; 2 Pet. i. 19; 3 Jn. 6, (exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given 
by Passow s. v. 11. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 977"; [L. and S. s. v. B. 
I. 3]) ; κρεῖσσον, 1 Co. vii. 38; φρονίμως, Lk. xvi. 8; οὕτω 
(οὕτως), Mt. v. 47 [RG]; xxiv. 46; Lk. ix. 15; xii. 43; 
Jn. xiv. 31; Acts xii. 8; 1 Co. xvi. 1; Jas. ii. 12; ós, 
καθώς, Mt. i. 24; xxi. 6; xxvi.19; xxviii. 15; Lk. ix. 54 
[T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl]; 1 Th. v. 11; 
ὥσπερ, Mt. vi. 2; ὁμοίως, Lk. iii. 11; x. 37; ὡσαύτως, Mt. 
XX.9. κατά τι, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. ii. 27; πρός τι, to do ac- 
cording to a thing [see πρός, I. 3 f.], Lk. xii. 47. with 
a ptep. indicating the mode of acting, ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, I 
acted [A. V. did it] ignorantly, 1 Tim. i. 13. with the 
accus. of a thing, and that the accus. of a pronoun: 
with τί indef. 1 Co. x. 31; with τί interrog., Mt. xii. 3; 
Mk. ii. 25; xi. 3 [not Lehm. mrg.]; Lk. iii. 12, 14; vi. 2; 
x. 25; xvi. 3,4; xviii. 18; Jn. vii. 51; xi. 47, etc.; with 
a ptep. added, τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες ; 1. q. διὰ τί Avere; Mk. 
xi. 53 τί ποιεῖτε κλαίοντες; Acts xxi. 13; but differently 
τί ποιήσουσι krÀ.; 1. e. what must be thought of the con- 
duct of those who receive baptism? Will they not seem 
to act foolishly? 1 Co. xv. 29. τί περισσόν, Mt. v. 47; 
with the relative 6, Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. vi. 3; 
Jn. xiii. 7; 2 Co. xi. 12, etc. ; τοῦτο, i.e. what has just 
been said, Mt. xiii. 28; Mk. v. 32; Lk. v. 6; xxii. 19 
[CWH reject the pass.)]; Ro. vii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim. 
iv. 16; Heb. vi. 3; vii. 27, ete.; τοῦτο to be supplied, Lk. 
vi. 10; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, Gal. ii. 10; ταῦτα, Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal. 
v. 17; 2 Pet. i. 10; [ταῦτα foll. by a pred. adj. Acts xv. 
17sq. G T Tr WH (ace. to one construction; ef. R. V. 
mrg., see I. 2 c. a. above, and cf. yrwords) |; αὐτά, Ro. ii. 3; 
Gal. iii. 10. With nouns which denote a comman d, 
or some rule of action, ποιῶ signifies to carry out, to 
execute as, τὸν νόμον, in class. Grk. to make a law, Lat. 
legem ferre, of legislators; but in bibl. Grk. to do the 
law, meet its demands, legi satisfacere, Jn. vii. 19; Gal. 
v. 3, (Josh. xxii. 5; 1 Chron. xxii. 12; nnn ngy, 2 
Chron. xiv. 3 (4)); τὰ τοῦ νόμου, the things which the law 
commands, Ro. ii. 14; ras ἐντολάς, Mt. v. 19; 1 Jn. v. 2L 
T Tr WH; Rev. xxii. 14 RG; τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. vii. 
21; xii. 50; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. iv. 34; vi. 38; vii. 17; ix. 31; 
Eph. vi. 6; Heb. xiii. 21; rà θελήματα τῆς σαρκός, Eph. ii. 
3; τὰς ἐπιθυμίας τινός, Jn. viii. 44; τὴν γνώμην τινός, Rev. 
xvii. 17; μίαν γνώμην, to follow one and the same mind 


θεοῦ, Lk. viii. 21; robs λόγους τινός, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi. 
47,49; d or 6 or ó, τι etc. λέγει τις, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. vi. 
46 ; Jn. 11. 5; Acts xxi. 23; ἃ παραγγέλλει τις, 2 Th. iii. 4 ; 
τὴν πρόθεσιν, Eph. iii. 11; rà διαταχθέντα, Lk. xvii. 10 (τὸ 
προσταχθέν, Soph. Phil. 1010) ; ὃ αἰτεῖ τις, Jn. xiv. 13 sq.3 
Eph. iii. 20; ὃ ἐντέλλεταί τις, Jn. xv. 14; τὰ ἔθη, Acts 
xvi. 21. With nouns describing a plan or course of 
action, to perform, accomplish: ἔργα, Tit. iii. 5; ποιεῖν 
τὰ ἔργα τινός, to do the same works as another, Jn. viii. 
39,41; τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα, Rev. ii. 5; τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ, de- 
livered by God to be performed, Jn. x. 37 sq.; τὸ ἔργον, 
work committed to me by God, Jn. xvii. 4; τὸ ἔργον 
εὐαγγελιστοῦ. to perform what the relations and duties 
of an evangelist demand, 2 Tim. iv. 5; ἔργον τι, to com- 
mit an evil deed, 1 Co. v. 2 [T WH Tr mrg. πράξας]; 
plur. 3 Jn. 10; ἀγαθόν, to do good, Mt. xix. 16; [ Mk. iii. 
4'Tdf.]; 1 Pet. iii. 11; τὸ ἀγαθόν, Ro. xiii. 3; ὃ ἐάν τι 
ἀγαθόν, Eph. vi. 8; rà ἀγαθά, Jn. v. 29 ; τὸ καλόν, Ro. vii. 
21; 2 Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 17; rà ἀρεστὰ τῷ θεῷ, 
Jn. viii. 29; τὸ ἀρεστὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. xiii. 91; 
1 Jn. iii. 22; τὶ πιστόν, to perform something worthy of 
a Christian [see πιστός, fin.], 3 Jn. 5; τὴν δικαιοσύνην, 
Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. ἐλεημοσύνην) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10 
[not Lehm.; Rev. xxii. 11 GL Τ Tr WH]; τὴν ἀλήθειαν 
(to act uprightly ; see ἀλήθεια, I. 2 ¢.), Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn. 
i. 6; χρηστότητα, Ro. iii. 12; ἔλεος, to show one’s self 
merciful, Jas. ii. 13; with pera τινος added (see ἔλεος, 
τους, 1 and 2 b.), Lk. i. 72; x. 37; ἐλεημοσύνην, Mt. vi. 2 
sq.; plur., Actsix. 36; x. 2 (see ἐλεημοσύνη, 1 and 2). to 
commit: τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 4, 8; ápap- 
ríav, 2 Co. xi. 7; Jas. v. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 22; 1 Jn. iii. 9; τὴν 
ἀνομίαν, Mt. xiii. 41; ἁμάρτημα, 1 Co. vi. 18 ; rà μὴ καθή- 
κοντα, Ro. i. 28 ; 6 οὐκ ἔξεστιν, Mt. xii. 2; Mk. ii. 24; ἄξια 
πληγῶν, Lk. xii. 48; βδέλυγμα, Rev. xxi. 27; φόνον, Mk. 
xv. 7; ψεῦδος, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15 ; κακόν, Mt. xxvii. 
23 ; Mk. xv. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co. xiii. 7; τὸ κακόν, Ro. 
xiii. 4 ; plur. κακά, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; τὰ κακά, Ro. iii. 8. b. 
ποιεῖν τι With the case of a person added ; a. w. an 
accus. of the person: τί ποιήσω Ἰησοῦν; what shall I 
do unto Jesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12; cf. W. 222 
(208); [B.§ 131, 6; Kühner $411, 5]; Matthiae ὃ 415, 
1 ἃ. 8.; also with an adverb, εὖ ποιῶ τινα, to do well i. e. 
show one's self good (kind) to one [see ed, sub fin.], Mk. 
xiv. 7RG; also καλῶς ποιῶ, Mt. v. 44 Rec. B. w. 
a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unto one (to his 
advantage or disadvantage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [cf. 
W. and B u.s.; Kühner u.s. Anm. 6]: Mt. vii. 12; xviii. 
35; xx. 32; xxi. 40; xxv. 40, 45; Mk. v. 19, 205 x. 51; 
Lk. i. 49; vi. 11; viii. 39; xviii.41; xx.15; Jn.ix. 26; 
xii. 16; xiii. 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb: 
καθώς, Mk. xv. 8; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xiii. 15 ; ὁμοίως, Lk. vi. 
31; οὕτως, Lk. i. 25; ii. 48; ὡσαύτως, Mt. xxi. 36; καλῶς 
ποιεῖν τινι, Lk. vi. 27; εὖ, Mk. xiv. 7 L'Tr WH; κακά τινι; 
to do evil to one, Acts ix. 13; τί, what (sc. κακόν), Heb. xiii. 
6 [ace. to punctuation of GL T Tr WH); ταῦτα πάντα, all 
these evils, Jn. xv. 21 R G L mre. ; ποιεῖν τινι κατὰ τὰ αὖ- 
τά [L T Tr WH (Ree. raüra)], in the same manner, Lk. 


ποίημα 


vi. 28, 26. y- ποιεῖν τι with the more remote object 
added by means of a preposition: ἔν τινι (Germ. an 
einem), to do to one, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31 [here A.V. 
‘in the green tree,’ etc.]; also ets τινα, unto one, Jn. xv. 
21 Ltxt. T Tr WH. c. God is said ποιῆσαί τι μετά 
τινος, when present with and aiding [see pera, I. 2 b. B. ], 
Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4. d. with designations of time 
[B. $131, 1], to pass, spend: χρόνον, Acts xv. 335 xviii. 
23; μῆνας τρεῖς, Acts xx. 35 νυχθήμερον, 2 Co. xi. 25; ἐνιαυ- 
τόν Or ἐνιαυτὸν ἕνα, Jas. iv. 13, (Tob. x. 7; Joseph. antt. 6, 
1,4 fin.; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 c., gives exx. 
fr. Grk. writ. [and reff. ; ef. also Soph. Lex. s. v. 9]; in the 
same sense rW7j in Eccl. vi. 12 (vii. 1) ; and the Lat. 
facere : Cie. ad. Att. 5, 20 Apameae quinque dies morati, 
... Iconii decem fecimus; Seneca, epp. 66 [1. 7, ep. 4, ed. 
Haase], quamvis autem paucissimos una fecerimus dies) ; 
some interpreters bring in here also Mt. xx. 12 and Rev. 
xii. 5 Rec."ez.L T Tr WH; but on these pass. see 
I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. ago i. q. to celebrate, 
keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast: τὸ 
πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 18 (Josh. v.10; but in Heb. xi. 28 the 
language denotes fo make ready, and so at the same time 
to institute, the celebration of the passover; Germ. ver- 
anstalten) ; τὴν ἑορτήν, Acts xviii. 21 Rec. ἘΞ 
(Lat. perficio) to perform: as opposed to λέγειν, Mt. xxiii. 
3; to θέλειν, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq.; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24. 
[Come.: mept-, mpoo- ποιέω.] 

[Syn. ποιεῖν, πράσσειν: roughly speaking, v. may be 
said to answer to the Lat. facere or the English do, vp. to 
agere or Eng. practise ; m.to designate performance, zp. in- 
tended, earnest, habitual, performance; 7. to denote merely 
productive action, mp. definitely directed action; 7. to point 
to an actual result, mp. to the scope and character of the result. 
* In Attic in certain connections the difference between them 
is great, in others hardly perceptible” (Schmidt) ; see his 
Syn.'ch. 23, esp. $11; cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. $ xcvi.; Green, 
‘Crit. Note’ on Jn. v. 29; (cf. πράσσω, init. and 2). The 
words are associated in Jn. iii. 20, 21; v. 29; Acts xxvi. 9, 
10; Ro. i. 32; ii. 3; vii. 15 sqq. ; xiii. 4, etc.] 

ποίημα, -ros, τό, (morew), that which has been made ; 
a work: of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20; those 
κτισθέντες by God ἐπὶ ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς are spoken of as 
ποίημα τοῦ. θεοῦ [.A. V. his workmanship], Eph. ii. 10. 
(Hdt., Plat., al.; Sept. chiefly for Nwpn.)* 

ποίησις, -ews, ἡ, (mrotéo) ; 1. a making (Hat. 3, 
22; Thue. 3, 2; Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. several times for 
myyn). 2. a doing or performing: ἐν τῇ ποιήσει 
αὐτοῦ [in his doing, 1. 6.1 in the obedience he renders to 
the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).* 

ποιητής, -οῦ, 6, (ποιέω) ; 1. a maker, producer, au- 
thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulg. 
factor): tod νόμου, one who obeys or fulfils the law, 
Ro.ii.13; Jas.iv. 11; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see ποιέω, II. a.); 
ἔργου, Jas. i. 25; λόγου, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet: 
Acts xvii. 28 ([Hdt. 2, 53, ete.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat., 
Plut., al.).* 

ποικίλος, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, various i. e. a. 
of divers colors, variegated: Sept. b. i.q. of divers 
sorts : Mt. iv. 24; Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 40; 2 Tim. iii. 6; Tit. 


527 





πολεμέω 
iii. 8: Heb. ii. 4; xiii. 9; Jas. i. 2; 1 Pet.i. 6; iv. 10, 
[CA. V.in the last two exx. manifold) ].* 

ποιμαίνω ; fut. ποιμανῶ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. zro:- 
pávare (1 Pet. v. 2) ; (ποιμήν, 4. v.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for mp; to feed, to tend a flock, keep sheep; a. prop. : 
Lk. xvii. 7; ποίμνην, 1 Co. ix. 7. b. trop. a. 
to rule, govern: of rulers, τινά, Mt. ii. 6; Rey. ii. 27; xii. 
5; xix. 15,(2 S. v. 2; Mic. v. 6 (535 vii. 145 etc. ; [ef. W- 
17]), (see ποιμήν, b. fin.) ; of the overseers (pastors) of 
the church, Jn. xxi. 16; Acts xx. 28; 1 Pet. v. 2. g. 
to furnish pasturage or food ; to nourish: ἑαυτόν, to cher- 
ish one's body, to serve the body, Jude 12; to supply 
the requisites for the soul's needs [ R. V. shall be their 
shepherd], Rev. vii. 17. [SyN. see βόσκω, fin.] * 

ποιμήν, -évos, 6, (akin to the noun ποία, q. v.; [or fr. r. 
meaning ‘to protect’; cf. Curtius $372; Fick i. 132]), 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for ny, a herdsman, esp. a shep- 
herd ; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 36; xxv. 32; xxvi. 31; 
Mk. vi. 34; xiv. 27; Lk. ii. 8, 15, 18, 20; Jn. x. 2, 125 in 
the parable, he to whose care and control others have 
committed themselves, and whose precepts they follow, 
Jn. x. 11, 14. b. metaph. the presiding officer, mana- 
ger, director, of any assembly : so of Christ the Head of 
the church, Jn. x. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 25; Heb. xiii. 20, (of the 
Jewish Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23); of the overseers of 
the Christian assemblies [ A. V. pastors], Eph.iv.11; cf. 
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 350 
sq.; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, p.123 sq.]. (OF 
kings and princes we find ποιμένες λαῶν in Hom. and 
Hes.) * 

ποίμνη, -ης; 7), (contr. fr. ποιμένη ; see ποιμήν); [ fr. Hom. 
(Od. 9, 122) on], a flock (esp.) of sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31; 
Lk. ii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 7; trop. [of Christ's flock 1. 6.1 the body 
of those who follow Jesus as their guide and keeper, Jn. 
xe LG. 

ποίμνιον, -ov, τό, (contr. fr. ποιμένιον, i. 4. ποίμνη, see 
ποιμήν; [on the accent cf. W. 52; Chandler § 343 b.]), 
a flock (esp.) of sheep: so of a group of Christ's disci- 
ples, Lk. xii. 32; of bodies of Christians (churches) pre- 
sided over by elders [cf. reff. s. v. ποιμήν, b.], Acts xx. 
28, 29: 1 Pet. v. 3; with a possessive gen. added, τοῦ 
θεοῦ, 1 Pet. v. 2, as in Jer. xiii. 17; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 16,1; 44, 3; 54, 2; 57, 2. (Hdt., Soph., 
Eur., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. chiefly for 35; and jNS .)* 

ποῖος, -a, -ov, (interrog. pron., corresponding to the rel.. 
ofos and the demonstr. rotos), [fr. Hom. down], of what 
sort or nature (Lat. qualis) : absol. neutr. plur. in a di- 
rect question, Lk. xxiv. 19 ; with substantives, in direct 
questions: Mt. xix. 18; xxi. 23; xxii. 36; Mk. xi. 28; 
Lk. vi. 32-34; Jn. x. 32; Acts iv. 7; vii. 49; Ro. iii. 27; 
1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. iv. 14; 1 Pet.ii.20; in indirect dis- 
course: Mt. xxi. 24, 27; xxiv. 43; Mk. xi. 29, 33; Lk. xii. 
39; Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; Acts xxiii. 34; Rev. 
iii. 3; εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 11; ποίας (Rec. διὰ 
ποίας) sc. ὁδοῦ, Lk. v. 19; cf. W. $30, 11; [(also § 64, 5); 
B. $8123, 8; 132, 26; cf. Tob. x. 7]. 

πολεμέω, -ὦ ; fut. πολεμήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπολέμησα ; (πόλε- 
pos); [fr. Scph. and Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly for Dn23; 


πόλεμος δ 


fo war, carry on war; to fight: Rev. xix. 11; μετά τινος 
(on which constr. see μετά, I. 2 d. p. 403"), Rev. ii. 16; 
xii. 7 (where Rec. xara; [cf. on this vs. B. $140, 14 and 
s. Y. μετά as above]); xiii. 4; xvii. 14; i.q. to wrangle, 
quarrel, Jas. iv. 2.* 

πόλεμος, -ov, 6, (fr. IIEAQ, πολέω. to turn, to range 
about, whence Lat. pello, bellum ; [but cf. Fick i. 671; 
Vanicek 513]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.for 2072; 1. 
prop. a. war: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 7; Lk. xiv. 
31; xxi.9; Heb.xi.34; in imitation of the Hebr. rni»; 
112175 foll. by n or DY (Gen. xiv. 2; Deut. xx. 12, 20), 
πόλ. ποιεῖν pera twos, Rey. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 7 [here Lom. 
WH Tr mre. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [ef. werd, I. 3 4.1. b. 
a fight, a battle, [more precisely μάχη ; “in Hom. (where 
Il. 7, 174 it is used even of single combat) and Hes. the 
sense of battle prevails; in Attic that of war” (L. and S. 
s.v.); ef. Trench $Ixxxvi. and (in partial modification) 
Schmidt ch. 138, 5 and 6]: 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xi. 34; Rev. 
IX 0s Os καὶ. ἢ», ΣῪ 145 Ks 8; 2. a dispute, strife, 
quarrel: πόλεμοι καὶ μάχαι, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219; 
Plat. Phaedo p. 66 c.).* 

πόλις, -εως, 7), (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting 
originally ‘ fulness,’ ‘throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, 
etc.; cf. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (oth- 
erwise Fick i. 138) ]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for 
Vy, besides for rp, yw (gate), ete., a city; a. 
univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk.iv.29; Jn.xi. 54; Acts 
v. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; 
κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [ A. V. in; see xara, II. 
1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, TIT. 
3a.a.p.328*; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x. 11; Lk. viii. 
1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι kai dypoi, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, 
see ἴδιος, 1 b. p. 297^; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. 
one's native city, Lk. ii. 4, 11; Jn.i.44 (45) ; or the city in 
which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk.iv.29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 
20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of 
the temple erected there, πόλις τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως, 
i. e. in which the great King of Israel, Jehovah, has his 
abode, Mt. v. 35; Ps. xlvii. (xlviii.) 2, cf. Tob. xiii. 15; 
also ἁγία πόλις (see ἅγιος, 1 a. p. 7*) and ἡ ἠγαπημένη, the 
beloved of God, Rev. xx. 9. — with the gen. of a gentile 
noun: Δαμασκηνῶν, 2 Co. xi. 32; ᾿Εφεσίων, Acts xix. 
35; τῶν Ἰουδαίων, Lk. xxiii. 51; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. x. 23; 
Σαμαρειτῶν, Mt. x. 5; with the gen. of a region: τῆς 
Ταλιλαίας, Lk.i. 26; iv. 31; Ἰούδα, of the tribe of Judah, 
Lk. i. 39; Λυκαονίας, Acts xiv. 6; Κιλικίας, Acts xxi. 39; 
τῆς Σαμαρείας, Jn. iv. 5; Acts viii. 5. As in class. Grk. 
the proper name of the city is added, — either in the 
nom. case, as πόλις Ἰόππη, Acts xi. 5; or in the gen., as 
πόλις Σοδόμων, lopóppas, 2 Pet. ii. 6; Θυατείρων, Acts 
xvi 14. b. used of the heavenly Jerusalem (see 
Ἱεροσόλυμα, 2), i. e. a. the abode of the blessed, in 
heaven: Heb. xi. 10, 16; with θεοῦ ζῶντος added, Heb. 
xii. 22; ἡ μέλλουσα πόλις, Heb. xiii. 14. B. in the 
visions of the Apocalypse it is used of the visible capital 
of the heavenly kingdom, to come down to earth after 
the renovation of the world: Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 14 sqq. ; 
xxii. 14; ἡ πόλις ἡ ἁγία, Rev. xxii. 19; with Ἱερουσαλὴμ 





8 πολίτης 


καινή added, Rev. xxi. 2. c. πόλις by meton. for 
the inhabitants: Mt. viii. 34; Acts xiv. 21; πᾶσα ἡ πόλις, 
Mt. xxi. 10; Acts xiii. 44; ἡ πόλις ὅλη, Mk. i. 33; Acts 
xxi. 30; πόλις μερισθεῖσα καθ᾽ ἑαυτῆς, Mt. xii. 25. 

πολιτάρχης, -ov, ὁ, (i. e. 6 ἄρχων τῶν πολιτῶν ; see ἕκα- 
tovrapxns), a ruler of a city or citizens: Acts xvii. 6, 8. 
(Boeckh, Corp. inserr. Graec. ii. p. 52 sq. no. 1967 [ef. 
Boeckh’s note, and 77f. Proleg. p. 86 note?]; in Grk. 
writ. πολίαρχος was more common.) * 

πολιτεία, -as, 7], (πολιτεύω) ; 1. the administration 
of civil affairs (Xen. mem. 8, 9,15; Arstph., Aeschin., 
Dem., [al.]). 2. astate, commonwealth, (2 Mace. iv. 
11; viii. 17; xiii. 14; Xen., Plat., Thuc., [al.]): with 
a gen. of the possessor, τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, spoken of the theo- 
cratie or divine commonwealth, Eph. ii. 12. 3. 
citizenship, the rights of a citizen, [some make this sense 
the primary one]: Acts xxii. 28 (3 Mace. iii. 21,23; Hat. 
9, 34; Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 26; 1, 2, 10; [4, 4,6, etc.]; Dem., 
Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.).* 

πολίτευμα, -τος, τό, (πολιτεύω), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. 
down; 1. the administration of civil affairs or of a 
commonwealth [R. V. txt. (Phil. as below) citizenship]. 
2. the constitution of a commonwealth, form of govern- 
ment and the laws by which it is administered. 3.a 
state, commonwealth [so Τὶ. V. mrg.]: ἡμῶν, the common- 
wealth whose citizens we are (see πόλις, b.), Phil. iii. 20, 
cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc. ; of Christians it is said 
ἐπὶ γῆς διατρίβουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν οὐρανῷ πολιτεύονται, Epist. 
ad Diogn. c. 5; (τῶν σοφῶν ψυχαὶ) πατρίδα μὲν τὸν οὐρά- 
νιον χῶρον, ἐν ᾧ πολιτεύονται, ξένον δὲ τὸν περίγειον ἐν ᾧ 
παρῴκησαν νομίζουσαι, Philo de confus. ling. $ 17; [γυναῖκες 

ος τῷ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐγγεγραμμέναι πολιτεύματι, de agricult. 


§17fin. Cf. esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. l. c.].* 

πολιτεύω : Mid. [cf. W. 260 (244)], pres. impv. 2 pers. 
plur. πολιτεύεσθε; pf. πεπολίτευμαι ; (πολίτης) ; ik 
to be a citizen (Thue., Xen., Lys., Polyb., al.). 2. 


to administer civil affairs, manage the state, (Thue. 
Xen.). 3. to make or create a citizen (Diod. 11, 72) ; 
Middle a. to be a citizen; so in the passages fr. 
Philo and the Ep. ad Diogn. cited in πολίτευμα, 3. b. 
to behave as a citizen; to avail one's self of or recognize 
the laws; so fr. Thue. down; in Hellenist. writ. to con- 
duct one’s self as pledged to some law of life: ἀξίως τοῦ 
εὐαγγελίου, Phil. i. 27 [R. V. txt. let your manner of life 
be worthy of etc.]; ἀξ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Polyc. ad Philip. 5, 2; 
ἀξ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 1; ὁσίως, ibid. 6, 1; 
κατὰ τὸ καθῆκον τῷ Χριστῷ, ibid. 3, 4; μετὰ φόβου x. ἀγά- 
ans, ibid. 51, 2; ἐννόμως, Justin. dial. c. Tr. c. 67; ἠρξάμην 
πολιτεύεσθαι τῇ Φαρισαίων αἱρέσει κατακολουθῶν, Joseph. 
vit. 2; other phrases are cited by Grimm on 2 Macc. vi. 
1; τῷ θεῷ; to live in accordance with the laws of God, 
Acts xxiii. 1 [ A. V. I have lived etc.].* 

πολίτης, -ov, 6, (πόλις), fr. Hom. down, a citizen; 
i. e. a. the inhabitant of any city or country: πόλεως, 
Acts xxi. 39; τῆς χώρας ἐκείνης, Lk. xv. 15. b. the 
associate of another in citizenship, i. e. a. fellow-citizen, 


fellow-countryman, (Plat. apol. p. 37 c.; al): with the 


gen. of a person, Lk. xix. 14; Heb. viii. 11 (where Rec. 


“πολλάκις 


has τὸν πλησίον) fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34, where it is 
used for p^, as in Prov. xi. 9, 12; xxiv. 43 (28).* 

πολλάκις, (fr. πολύς, πολλά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], 
often, frequently : Mt. xvii. 15 ; Mk. v. 4; ix. 22; Jn. xviii. 
2; Acts xxvi. 11; Ro. i. 13; xv. 22 L Trmrg.; 2 Co. viii. 
22; xi.23,26 sq.; Phil. iii. 18; 2 Tim. 1.16; Heb.vi.7; 
dx. 28 sq.; x. 11.* 

πολλαπλασίων, -ov, zen. -ovos, (πολύς), manifold, much 
more: Mt. xix. 22 LT Tr WH; Lk. xviii. 30. (Polyb., 
Plut., al.; [cf. B. 30 (27)].)* 

πολυ-εύσπλαγχνος, -ov, (πολύ and εὔσπλαγχνος), very 
tender-hearted, extremely full of pity: so a few minusc. 
Mss. in Jas. v. 11, where al. πολύσπλαγχνος, q. v. (Eccles. 
and Byzant. writ.) * 

πολυλογία, -as, 7, (zoAvAóyos), much speaking, (Plaut., 
Vulg., multiloquium) : Mt. vi. 7. (Prov. x. 19; Xen. Cyr. 
1,4, 3; Plat. lege. 1 p. 641 e.; Aristot. polit. 4, 10 [p. 
1295", 2]; Plut. educ. puer. 8, 10.) * 

πολυμερῶς, (πολυμερής), by many portions : joined with 
πολυτρόπως. at many times (Vulg. multifariam [or -rie]), 
and in many ways, Heb. i. 1. (Joseph. antt. 8, 3, 9 [var.; 
Plut. mor. p. 537 d., i. e. de invid. et od. 5]; οὐδὲν δεῖ τῆς 
πολυμεροῦς ταύτης kai πολυτρύπου μούσης τε καὶ ἁρμονίας, 
Max. Tyr. diss. 37 p. 363; [ef. W. 463 (431)].) * 

πολυ-ποίκιλος, -ov, (πολύς and ποικίλος) ; 1. much- 
variegated marked with a great variety of colors: of cloth 
or ἃ painting; $ápea, Eur. Iph. T. 1149; στέφανον πολυ- 
“τοίκιλον ἀνθέων, Eubul. ap Athen. 15 p. 679 d. 2: 
much varied, manifold: σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ, manifesting itself 
in a great variety of forms, Eph. iii. 10; Theophil. ad 
Autol. 1, 6; ὀργή, Orac. Sibyll. 8, 120 ; λόγος, Orph. hymn. 
61, 4, and by other writ. with other nouns.* 

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., 
Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius $ 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 
235; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., 
many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts 
xviii. 10; ὄχλος. Mk. v. 24; vi.34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; 
Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi.2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; 
“πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, etc.; i.q. 
abundant, plenteous [ A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 
24; xv. 5, 8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. 
ix.37; Lk. x. 2; yr, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. 
vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 
10; Mk. ii. 15 ; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; 
“σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 
22; xiii. 58, etc.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but 
here L TWH om. Tr br. oy.]; Lk. v. 15, etc. ; δαιμόνια, 
Mk.i.34; and in many otherexx.; with participles used 
substantively, Mt. viii. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 9, ete. ; with the 
article prefixed: αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αὐτῆς ai πολλαί, her sins 
which are many, Lk. vii. 47; τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα, the great 
learning with which I see that you are furnished, Acts 
xxvi. 24; ὁ πολὺς ὄχλος, the great multitude of common 
people present, Mk. xii. 37 [cf. 6 ὄχλ. πολύς, Jn. xii. 9 T 
Tr mrg. WH; see ὄχλος, 1]. Plur. masc. πολλοί, absol. 
and without the art. many, a large part of mankind: 
πολλοί simply, Mt. vii. 13, 22; xx. 28; xxvi. 28; Mk. ii. 2; 
iii. 10; x. 45; xiv. 24; Lk.i. 1,14; Heb. ix. 28, and very 

34 , 


529 








πολύς 


often; opp. to ὀλίγοι, Mt. xx. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the 
cl.]; ἕτεροι πολλοί, Acts xv. 35; ἄλλαι πολλαί, Mk. xv. 41; 
ἕτεραι πολλαί, Lk. viii. 3; πολλοί foll. by a partit. gen., 
as τῶν Φαρισαίων, Mt. iii. 7; add, Lk. i. 16; Jn. xii. 11; 
Acts iv. 4; xiii. 43; 2 Co. xii. 21; Rev. viii. 11, ete.; foll. 
by ἐκ witha gen. of class, as πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, 
Jn. vi. 60; add, vii. 31,40; x. 20; xi.19,45; Acts xvii. 
12; πολλοὶ ἐκ τῆς πύλεως, Jn. iv. 39. with the article 
prefixed, of πολλοί, the many [ef. W. 110 (105)]: those 
contrasted with 6 εἷς (1. 6. both with Adam and with 
Christ), ace. to the context equiv. to the rest of man- 
kind, Ro. v. 15,19, cf. 12, 18; we the (i. e. who are) many, 
Ro. xii. 5; 1 Co. x. 17; the many whom ye know, 2 Co. 
ii. 17 ; the many i. e. the most part, the majority, Mt. xxiv. 
12; 1 Co. x. 33. b. with nouns denoting an action, an 
emotion, a state, which can be said to have as it were 
measure, weight, force, intensity, size, continuance, or 
repetition, much i. q. great, strong, intense, large: ἀγάπη, 
Eph. ii.4; ὀδύνη, 1 Tim. vi. 10; θρῆνος, κλαυθμός, ὀδυρμός, 
Mt. ii. 18; χαρά [ Rec." χάρις], Philem. 7; ἐπιθυμία, 1 Th. ii. 
17 ; μακροθυμία, Ro. ix. 22; ἔλεος, 1 Pet. 1. 8; γογγυσμός, 
Jn. vii. 12; τρόμος, 1 Co. ii. 3 ; πόνος [ Rec. ζῆλος], Col. iv. 
13; ἀγών, 1 Th. ii. 2; ἄθλησις, Heb. x. 32 ; θλίψις, 2 Co. ii. 
45 1 Th. i. 6; καύχησις, 2 Co. vii. 4; πεποίθησις, 2 Co. viii. 
22; πληροφορία, 1 Th. i. 5; παρρησία, 2 Co. iii. 12; vii. 
4; 1 Tim. iii. 13; Philem. 8; παράκλησις, 2 Co. viii. 4; 
συζήτησις [ T WH Tr txt. ζήτησις], Acts xv. 7; xxviii. 29 
[Rec.]; στάσις, Acts xxiii. 10; dovria, Acts xxvii. 21; 
Bia, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; διακονία, Lk. x. 40; σιγή, deep 
silence, Acts xxi. 40 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 25); φαντασία, Acts 
xxv. 23; δύναμις kai δόξα, Mt. xxiv. 30; Lk. xxi. 27; μι- 
σθός, Mt. v. 12; Lk. vi. 23, 35; εἰρήνη, Acts xxiv. 2 (3); 
περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος, about which [but see λόγος, I. 3 
a.] we have much (in readiness) to say, Heb. v. 11 (πολὺν 
λόγον ποιεῖσθαι περί τινος, Plat. Phaedo p. 115 d. ; cf. Ast, 
Lex. Plat. iii. p. 148). c. of time, much, long: πολὺν 
χρόνον, Jn. v. 6; μετὰ χρόνον πολύν, Mt. xxv. 19; ὥρα 
πολλή, much time (i. e. a large part of the day) is spent 
[see Spa, 2], Mk. vi. 35; ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης [Tdf. 
ywop.], of a late hour of the day, ibid. (so πολλῆς ὥρας, 
Polyb. 5, 8,3; ἐπὶ πολλὴν ὥραν, Joseph. antt. 8,4, 4 ; ἐμά- 
xovro . . - ἄχρι πολλῆς ὥρας, Dion. Hal. 2, 54); πολλοῖς 
χρόνοις, for a long time, Lk. viii. 29 (οὐ πολλῷ χρόνῳ, 
Hdian. 1, 6, 24 [8 ed. Bekk.]; χρόνοις πολλοῖς ὕστερον, 
Plut. Thes. 6; [see χρόνος, sub fin.]) ; εἰς ἔτη πολλά, Lk. 
xii. 19; (ἐκ or) ἀπὸ πολλῶν ἐτῶν, Acts xxiv. 10; Ro. xv. 
23 [here WH Tr txt. ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν er.]; ἐπὶ πολύ, (for) a 
long time, Acts’ xxviii. 6; per ov πολύ, not long after 
[see μετά, II. 2 b.], Acts xxvii. 14. d. Neut. sing. 
πολύ, much, substantively, i.q. many things: Lk. xii. 48; 
much, adverbially, of the mode and degree of an action: 
ἠγάπησε, Lk. vii. 47; πλανᾶσθε, Mk. xii. 27; sc. ὠφελεῖ, 
Ro.iii.2. πολλοῦ asa gen. of price (fr. Hom. down; cf. 
Passow s. v. IV. b. vol. ii. p. 1013* ; [ef. W. 206 (194)]) : 
πραθῆναι, for much, Mt. xxvi. 9. ἐν πολλῷ, in (adminis- 
tering) much (i. e. many things), Lk. xvi. 10; with great 
labor, great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 (where L T Tr WH ἐν 
μεγάλῳ [see μέγας, 1 a. y.])- with a compar. [cf. W. 


πολύσπλαγχνος 


8 35, 1]: πολὺ σπουδαιότερον, 2 Co. viii. 22 (in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down) ; πολλῷ πλείους, many more, Jn. iv. 41; 
πολλῷ [or πολὺ] μᾶλλον, see μᾶλλον, la.sq. with the 
article, τὸ πολύ, Germ. das Viele (opp. to τὸ ὀλίγον), 2 
Co. viii. 15 [cf. B. 395 (338); W. 589 (548)]. Plural 
πολλά a. many things; as, διδάσκειν, λαλεῖν, Mt. 
xiii. 3; Mk. iv. 2; vi. 34 ; Jn. viii. 26; xiv. 30; παθεῖν, Mt. 
xvi. 21; Mk. v. 26; ix. 12; Lk. ix. 22, etc., and often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Ol. 13, 90 down; ποιεῖν, Mk. vi. 20 
[T Tr mrg. WH ἀπορεῖν] ; πρᾶξαι, Acts xxvi. 9; add as 
other exx., Mt. xxv. 21, 23; Mk. xii. 41; xv. 3; Jn. xvi. 
12; 2 Co. viii. 22; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13 ; πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα, Jn. 
xx. 30. [On the Grk. (and Lat.) usage which treats the 
notion of multitude not as something external to a thing 
and consisting merely in a comparison of it with other 
things, but as an attribute inhering in the thing itself, 
and hence capable of being co-ordinated with another 
attributive word by means of xat (q. v. I. 3), see Kuühner 
$523, 1 (or on Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24) ; Büumlein, Partikeln, 
p.146; Krüger $69, 32,3; Lob. Paral. p.60; Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 835; W.§ 59, 3 fin.; B. 362 sq. (311). Cf. Passow 
s. V. I.3a.; L. and S. s. v. II. 2.] B. adverbially 
[cf- W. 463 (432); B. $128, 2], much: Mk. [vi. 20 T Tr 
mrg. (Ὁ) WH (see àázopéo)]; ix. 26; Ro. xvi. 6, 12 [L br. 
the cl]; in many ways, Jas. iii. 2; with many words, 
[R. V. much], with verbs of saying; as, κηρύσσειν, mapa- 
καλεῖν, etc., Mk. i. 45; iii. 12; v. 10, 23, 43; 1 Co. xvi. 
12; many times, often, repeatedly: Mt. ix. 14 [R G Tr 
WH mrg.] (and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; cf. 
Passow s. v. V. 1 a. vol. ii. p. 1018"; [L. and S. III. a.]; 
Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 61 c.) ; with the art. ra 
πολλά, for the most part, [R. V. these many times] (Vulg. 
plurimum), Ro. xv. 22 [L Tr mrg. πολλάκις] (exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. are given by Passow l. c., [L. and S. 1. c.], and by 
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 281). 

πολύσπλαγχνος, -ov, (πολύς, and σπλάγχνον q. v.), full of 
pity, very kind: Jas. v. 11; Hebr. 39m 253, in the Sept. 
πολυέλεος. (Theod. Stud. p. 615.)* — 

πολυτελής, -és, (πολύς, and τέλος cost), [from Hat. 
down], precious; a. requiring great outlay, very 
costly: Mk. xiv. 3; 1 Tim. ii. 9. (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.) 
b. excellent, of surpassing value, [A. V. of great price]: 
1 Pet. iii. 4. [(Plat., al.)]* 

πολύτιμος, -ov, (πολύς, τιμή), Very valuable, of great price : 
Mt. xiii. 46; xxvi. 7 LT Tr mrg.; Jn. xii. 3; compar. 
πολυτιμότερον, 1 Pet. i. 7, where Ree. πολὺ τιμιώτερον. 
(Plut. Pomp. 5; Hdian. 1, 17,5[3 ed. Bekk.]; Anthol. 
al.) * 

πολυτρόπως, (fr. πολύτροπος, in use in various senses fr. 
Hom. down), adv., in many manners: Heb. i. 1 [(Philo 
de incor. mund. § 24)]; see πολυμερῶς." 

πόμα (Attic πῶμα; [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 425 ]), -ros, τό, 
(πίνω, πέπομαι), drink: 1 Co. x. 4; Heb. ix. 10." 

πονηρία, -as, 7, (πονηρός), [fr. Soph. down], Sept. for 
y^ and np, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V. 
almost uniformly)], malice: Mt. xxii. 18; Lk. xi. 39; Ro. 
i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8; Eph. vi. 12; plur. ai πονηρίαι [cf. W. 
§ 27,3; B. $123, 2; R. V. wickednesses], evil purposes 


530 











πονηρός 


and desires, Mk. vii. 22; wicked ways [ A. V. iniquities], 
Acts iii. 26. [SvN. see κακία, fin.] * 

πονηρός (on the accent cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 389; 
Güttling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq. ; [Chandler $$ 404, 
405]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 26), -ά, -óv; com- 
par. πονηρότερος (Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26); (πονέω, πόνος) ; 
fr. Hes., [ Hom. (ep. 15, 20), Theog.] down; Sept. often 
for y*; 1. full of labors, annoyances, hardships ; 
a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Hercules is called 
πονηρότατος kat ἄριστος, Hes. frag. 43, 5. b. bring- 
ing toils, annoyances, perils: (καιρός, Sir. li. 12); ἡμέρα 
πονηρά, of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead- 
fastness, Eph. v. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. ἡμέραι πον. 
Barn. ep. 2, 1); causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev- 
ous], ἕλκος, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. bad, of a bad nature or 
condition ; a. in a physical sense: ὀφθαλμός, dis- 
eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, (πονηρία ὀφθαλμῶν, 
Plat. Hipp. min. p. 374 d.; the Greeks use πονηρῶς ἔχειν 
or διακεῖσθαι of the sick; ἐκ γενετῆς πονηροὺς ὑγιεῖς πε- 
ποιηκέναι, Justin apol. 1, 22 [ (cf. Otto's note) ; al. take πον. 
in Mt. and Lk.u.s. ethically; cf.b.and Meyer on Mt.]); 
καρπός, Mt. vii. 17 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil, 
wicked, bad, ete. [this use of the word is due to its as- 
sociation with the working (largely the servile) class; 
not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for 
such words as ἐργάτης, δραστήρ, and the like, do not take 
on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a 
word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no 
suggestion of results" (cf. Schmidt ch. 85, $1); see 
κακία, fin.]; of persons: Mt. vii. 11; xii. 34 sq.; xviii. 32; 
xxv. 26; Lk. vi. 45; xi. 18; xix. 22; Acts xvii. 5; 2 Th. ii. 
2; 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; γενεὰ πον.» Mt. xii. 39, 45; xvi.4; Lk. xi. 
29; πνεῦμα πονηρόν, an evil spirit (see πνεῦμα, 3 c.), Mt. 
xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 
sq.; substantively οἱ πονηροί, the wicked, bad men, 
opp. to of δίκαιοι, Mt. xiii. 49; πονηροὶ καὶ ἀγαθοί, Mt. v. 
45; xxii. 10; ἀχάριστοι x. πονηροί, Lk. vi. 35; τὸν πονηρόν, 
the wicked man, i. 6. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13; 
τῷ πονηρῷ, the evil man, who injures you, Mt. v. 39. 6 
πονηρός is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one: 
Mt. v. 37; vi. 13; xiii. 19, 88; Lk. xi. 4 RL; Jn. xvii- 
15; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. ; iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see κεῖμαι; 
2c.); Eph.vi.16. of things: αἰών, Gal.i.4; ὄνομα (q. v. 
1 p. 447* bot.), Lk. vi. 22; ῥᾳδιούργημα, Acts xviii. 14; 
the heart as a storehouse out of which a man brings forth. 
πονηρά words is called θησαυρὸς πονηρός, Mt. xii. 35; Lk. 
vi. 45; συνείδησις πονηρά, a soul conscious of wickedness, 
[conscious wickedness; see συνείδησις, b. sub fin. ], Heb. x. 
22; καρδία πονηρὰ ἀπιστίας, an evil heart such as is re- 
vealed in distrusting [cf. B. § 132, 24; W. § 30, 4], Heb. 
iii. 12; ὀφθαλμός (q. v.), Mt. xx. 15; Mk. vii. 22; 0ta- 
λογισμοί, Mt. xv. 195 Jas. ii. 4; ὑπόνοιαι, 1 Tim. vi. 4; 
καύχησις, Jas. iv. 165 ῥῆμα, ἃ reproach, Mt. v. 11 [R G; 
al. om. p.]; λόγοι, 3 Jn. 10; ἔργα, In. iii. 19; vii. 7; 19m. 
iii. 12; 2 Jn. 11; Col. i. 21; ἔργον, (acc. to the context) 
wrong committed against me, 2 Tim. iv. 18 ; αἰτία, charge 
of crime, Acts xxv. 18 L'T Tr mrg. WH mrg. The neuter 
πονηρόν, and τὸ πονηρόν, substantively, evil, that which is 


πόνος 


wicked : εἶδος πονηροῦ (see εἶδος, 2; [8]. take πον. here as 
an adj., and bring the ex. under εἶδος, 1 (R. V. mrg. ap- 
pearance of evil)]), 1 Th. v. 22; 2 Th. iii. 3 (where τοῦ 
πονηροῦ is held by many to be the gen. of the masc. 6 7o; 
νηρύς, but cf. Lünemann ad loc.) ; [τὶ πονηρόν, Acts xxviii. 
21]; opp. to τὸ ἀγαθόν, Lk. vi.45; Ro. xii. 9; plur. [W. 
$34, 2], Mt. ix. 4; Lk. iii. 19; wicked deeds, Acts xxv. 
18 Tr txt. WH txt.; ταῦτα rà πονηρά, these evil things i. e. 
the vices just enumerated, Mk. vii. 23.* 

πόνος, -ov, 6, (πένομαι [see πένης ]); fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for Soy, yi’, ete., labor, toil; 1. i.q. great trouble, 
intense desire: ὑπέρ twos (gen. of pers.), Col. iv. 13 
(where Ree. has ζῆλον [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]). 2. 
pain: Rey. xvi. 10sq.; xxi.4. [SYw. see κόπος, fin.]* 

Tlovrikés, -7, -óv, (Πόντος, q. v-), belonging to Pontus, 
born in Pontus: Acts xviii. 2. [(Hdt., al.)]* 

Πόντιος, -ov, 6, Pontius (a Roman name), the prae- 
nomen of Pilate, procurator' of Juda (see Πιλάτος) : 
Mt. xxvii. 2 [RG L]; Lk. iii. 1; Acts iv. 27; 1 Tim. vi. 
13.* 

Ilóvros, -ov, ó, Pontus, a region of eastern Asia Minor, 
bounded by the Euxine Sea [fr. which circumstance it 
took its name], Armenia, Cappadocia, Galatia, Paphla- 
gonia, [BB. DD. s. v.; Ed. Meyer, Gesch. d. Konigreiches 
Pontos (Leip. 1879)]: Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.* 

TI6rAtos, -ov, ὁ, Publius (a Roman name), the name of 
a chief magistrate [ (Grk. 6 πρῶτος) but see Dr. Woolsey's 
addition to the art. * Publius' in B. D. (Am. ed.)] of the 
island of Melita; nothing more is known of him: Acts 
xxviii. 7, 8.* 

πορεία, -as, 7, (πορεύω), fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for 
nin; a journey: Lk. xiii. 22 (see ποιέω, I. 3); Hebra- 
istically (see ὁδός, 2 a.), a going i. e. purpose, pursuit, un- 
dertaking : Jas. i. 11.* 

πορεύω : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph., 
"Thuc., Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Hdt. down), pres. πορεύομαι; 
impf. ἐπορευόμην ; fut. πορεύσομαι; pf. ptep. πεπορευμένος ; 
1 aor. subjunc. 1 pers. plur. πορευσώμεθα (Jas. iv. 13 
Rec.* Grsb.); 1 aor. pass. ἐπορεύθην ; (πόρος a ford, [cf. 
Eng. pore i. e. passage through ; Curtius $ 356; Vanicek 
p. 479]) ; Sept. often for 325, 3m, qus prop. to lead 
one’s self across ; i. e. to take one’s way, betake one’s self, 
set out, depart ; a. prop.: τὴν ὁδόν pov, to pursue 
the journey on which one has entered, continue one’s 
journey, [A. V. go on one’s way], Acts viii. 39; πορ. foll. 
by ἀπό w. a gen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1 
[R G]; ἀπό w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41; Lk. iv. 
42; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xix. 15; ἐντεῦθεν, Lk. xiii. 31; foll. by 
eis w. an acc. of place, to go, depart, to some place: Mt. 
ii. 20; xvii. 27; Mk. xvi. 12; Lk.i. 39; ii. 41; xxii. 39; 
xxiv.13; Jn. vii. 35; viii. 1; Actsi.11,25; xx.1; Ro. 
xv. 24sq.; Jas. iv. 13, ete.; τ. an acc. denoting the 
state: eis εἰρήνην, Lk. vii. 50; viii. 48, (also ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
Acts xvi. 36; see εἰρήνη, 3); εἰς θάνατον, Lk. xxii. 33 ; 
foll. by ἐπί w. an acc. of place, Mt. xxii. 9; Acts viii. 26; 
ix. 11; ἐπί w. the acc. of a pers. Acts xxv. 12; ἕως with 
a gen. of place, Acts xxiii. 23; ποῦ [q. v.] for ποῖ, Jn. 
vii. 35 ; οὗ [see ὅς, II. 11 a.] for ὅποι, Lk. xxiv. 28; 1 Co. 


591 





πορνεία 


xvi.6; πρός w. the acc. of ἃ pers., Mt. xxv. 9; xxvi. 14; 
Lk. xi. 5; xv. 18; xvi.30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. 28; xx. 
17; Acts xxvii. 3; xxviii. 20; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, Acts viii. 
36; διά w.a gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1; [ Mk. ix. 30 L txt. 
Tr txt. WH txt.]; the purpose of the journey is indi- 
cated by an infinitive: Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec.; Lk.ii. 3; 
xiv. 19, 31; Jn. xiv. 2; by the prep. ézí with an ace. [cf. 
ἐπί, C. I. 1 1.1, Lk. xv. 4; foll. by tva, Jn. xi. 11; by σύν 
w. a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxvi. 
13; 1 Co. xvi. 4; ἔμπροσθέν twos, to go before one, Jn. 
x. 4. absol. i. q. to depart, go one's way: Mt. ii. 9; viii. 
9; xi. 7; xxviii. 11; Lk. vii. 8; xvii. 19; Jn. iv. 50; viii. 
115 xiv. 35; Acts v4 205 vill. 275 xxi. 55 xxi: 21» eters 
i.q.to be on one's way, to journey: [ Lk. viii. 42 L'Tr mrg.]; 
ix. 57; x. 38; xiii. 33; Actsix. 3; xxii. 6. to enter upon 
a journey; to goto do something: 1 Co. x. 27; Lk. x. 37. 
In accordance with the oriental fashion of describing 
an action circumstantially, the ptep. πορευόμενος or zro- 
ρευθείς is placed before a finite verb which designates 
some other action (ef. ἀνίστημι, IL 1 c. and ἔρχομαι, 
1.1 a.a. p. 250^ bot.) : Mt. ii. 8; ix. 13 (on which cf. the 
rabbin. phrase 3573 my [cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein ad 
loc.]) ; xi. 4; xxvii. 66; xxviii. 7; Lk. vii. 22; ix. 13, 52; 
xiii. 32; xiv. 10; xv. 15; xvii. 14; xxii. 8; 1 Pet. iii. 
19. b. By a Hebraism, metaphorically, a. [0 
depart from life: Lk. xxii. 22; so 70a, Gen. xv. 2; Ps. 
xxxix. 14. B. ὀπίσω τινός, to follow one, i.e. become 
lis adherent [cf. B. 184 (160)]: Lk. xxi. 8 (Judg. ii. 12; 
1 K. xi. 10; Sir. xlvi. 10) ; to seek [cf. Eng. run after] 
any thing, 2 Pet. ii. 10. y- to lead or order one’s life 
(see περιπατέω, b. a. and ὁδός, 2 a.) ; foll. by ἐν with a dat. 
of the thing to which one’s life is given up : ἐν ἀσελγείαις, 
1 Pet. iv. 3; ἐν ταῖς ἐντολαῖς τοῦ κυρίου, Lk. i. 6 ; κατὰ τὰς 
ἐπιθυμίας, 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Jude 16, 18 ; ταῖς ὁδοῖς pov, dat. of 
place, [to walk in one’s own ways], to follow one’s moral 
preferences, Acts xiv. 16; τῇ ὁδῷ τινος, to imitate one, 
to follow his ways, Jude 11; τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ κυρίου, Acts 
ix. 31; see W. § 31,9; B. § 133, 22 b.; ὑπὸ μεριμνῶν, to 
lead a life subject to cares, Lk. viii. 14, cf. Bornemann 
ad loc.; [Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc.; yet see ὑπό, I. 2a.; W. 
369 (346) note; B. $ 147, 29; R. V.as they go on their way 
they are choked with cares, ete. Comp.: ua, εἰσ- (pat), 
ἐκ (μαι), ἐν- (μαι), ἐπε- (μαι), παρα- (pat), pos, προσ- 
(μαι), συν- (war). SYN. see ἔρχομαι, fin.] 

mop0éw : impf. ἐπόρθουν ; 1 aor. ptep. πορθήσας ; (πέρθω, 
πέπορθα, to lay waste); fr. Hom. down; to destroy, 
to overthrow, [R. V. uniformly to make havock]: τινά, 
Acts ix. 21; τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Gal. i. 13; τὴν πίστιν, ibid. 
23.* 

πορισμός, -o9, 6, (πορίζω to cause a thing to get on well, 
to carry forward, to convey, to acquire; mid. to bring 
about or procure for one's self, to gain; fr. πόρος [cf. 
mopevo ]) ; a. acquisition, gain, (Sap. xiii. 19; xiv. 
2; Polyb., Joseph., Plut.). b. a source of gain: 1 
Tim. vi. 5 sq. (Plut. Cat. Maj. 25; [Test. xii. Patr., test. 
Is. §4]).* 

Ilópktos, see Φῆστος. 

πορνεία, -as, 7j, (πορνεύω), Sept. for my, nur, or, 


πορνεύω 


fornication (Vulg. fornicatio [and (Rev. xix. 2) prostitu- 
tio]); used a. prop. of illicit sexual intercourse in 
general (Dem. 403, 27; 433, 25): Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 
25, (that this meaning must be adopted in these passages 
will surprise no one who has learned from 1 Co. vi. 12 
sqq. how leniently converts from among the heathen re- 
carded this vice and how lightly they indulged in it; ac- 
cordingly, all other interpretations of the term, such as 
of marriages within the prohibited degrees and the like, 
are to be rejected) ; Ro.i. 29 Rec. ; 1 Co. v. 1; vi. 13, 18; 
vii.2; 2 Co. xii. 21; Eph. v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 3; 
Rey. ix. 21; itis distinguished from μοιχεία in Mt. xv. 
19; Mk. vii. 21; and Gal. v. 19 Rec.; used of adultery 
[(ef. Hos. ii. 2 (4), etc.) ], Mt. v. 32; xix. 9. b. In 
accordance with a form of speech common in the O. T. 
and among the Jews which represents the close rela- 
tionship existing between Jehovah and his people under 
the figure of a marriage (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 422* 
sq.), πορνεία is used metaphorically of the worship of 
idols: Rev. xiv. 8; xvii. 2, 4; xviii. 3; xix. 2; ἡμεῖς ἐκ 
πορνείας ov γεγεννήμεθα (we are not of a people given to 
idolatry), ἕνα πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν θεόν, Jn. viii. 41 (ἄθεος μὲν 
ὁ ἄγονος, πολύθεος δὲ ὁ ἐκ πόρνης, τυφλώττων περὶ τὸν 
ἀληθῆ πατέρα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο πολλὰ οὺ s ἀνθ᾽ ἑνὸς γονεῖς αἰνιτ- 
τόμενος, Philo de mig. Abr. § 12; τέκνα πορνείας, of idol- 
aters, Hos. i. 2; [but in Jn. 1. c. others understand phy- 
sical descent to be spoken of (cf. Meyer)]); of the de- 
filement of idolatry, as incurred by eating the sacrifices 
offered to idols, Rev. ii. 21.* 

πορνεύω ; 1 aor. ἐπόρνευσα ; (πόρνος, πόρνη q. v.) ; Sept. 
for 431; in Grk. writ. ([Hdt.], Dem., Aeschin., Dio Cass., 
Leian., al.) 1. to prostitute one’s body to the lust of 
another. In the Scriptures 2. to give one's self to 
unlawful sexual intercourse ; to commit fornication (Vulg. 
fornicor): 1 Co. vi. 18; x. 8; Rev. ii. 14, 20; [Mk. x. 19 
WH (rejected) mrg. }. 3. bya Hebraism (see πορνεία, 
b.) metaph. to be given to idolatry, to worship idols : 1 Chr. 
v. 25; Ps.Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 27; Jer. iii. 6; Ezek. xxiii. 19; 
Nos. ix. 1, ete.; μετά τινος, to permit one’s self to be 
drawn away by another into idolatry, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 
3,9. [Comp.: ἐκ-πορνεύω. * 

πόρνη, -7s, 7), (fr. περάω, πέρνημι, to sell; Curtius $358), 
properly a woman who sells her body for sexual uses [cf. 
Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13], Sept. for nm; 1. prop. a pros- 
litute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for 
the sake of gain, (Arstph., Dem., al); in the N. T. 
univ. any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse, 
whether for gain or for lust: Mt. xxi. 31sq.; Lk. xv. 30; 
1 Co. vi. 15sq.; Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. 2. Heb- 
raistically (see πορνεία, b. and zopvevo, 3), metaph. an 
idolatress; so of ‘Babylon’ i.e. Rome, the chief seat 
of idolatry: Rev. xvii. 1, 5, 15 sq. ; xix. 2.* 


" e | 
πόρνος, του, 6, (for the etym. see πόρνη), a man who 


prostitutes his body to another’s lust for hire, a male pros- 
titute, ((Arstph.], Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Lcian.); univ. 
a man who indulges in unlawful sexual intercourse, a for- 
nicator, (Vulg. fornicator, fornicarius, [Rev. xxii. 15 im- 
pudicus]): 1 Co. v. 9-11; vi. 9; Eph.v.5; 1 Tim.i.10; 


532 








ποταπός 


Heb. xii. 16; xiii. 4; Rev. xxi.8; xxii. 15. 
16 sq.) * 

πόρρω, [ (allied w. πρό, Curtius $ 380) ], adv., [fr. Plat., 
Xen. down], far, at a distance, a great way off: Mt. xv. 
8; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. xiv. 32 [cf. W. $54, 2a.; B. $129, 11]; 
compar. πορρωτέρω, in L Tr WH πορρώτερον [(Polyb., 
al.)], further: Lk. xxiv. 28.* 

πόρρωθεν, (πόρρω), adv., [fr. Plat. on], from afar, afar 
off: Lk. xvii. 12; Heb. xi. 13; Sept. chiefly for pn» 

πορφύρα, -as, ἡ, Sept. for ΠΝ 1. the purple- 


(Sir. xxiii. 


fish, a species of shell-fish or mussel: [Aeschyl., Soph.], 


Isocr., Aristot., al.; add 1 Maec. iv. 23, on which see 
Grimm; [cf. B. D. s. v. Colors 1]. 2. a fabric col- 
ored with the purple dye, a garment made from purple 
cloth, (so fr. Aeschyl. down): Mk. xv. 17, 205 Lk. xvi. 
19; Rev. xvii. 4 Rec.; xviii. 12.* 

πορφύρεος, -a, -ov, in Attic and in the N. T. contr. -os, 
-à, -οῦν, (πορφύρα), fr. Hom. down, purple, dyed in pur- 
ple, made of a purple fabric: Jn. xix. 2,5; πορφυροῦν sc. 
ἔνδυμα ([Β. 82 (72)]; cf. W. p. 591 (550)), Rev. xvii. 4 
[G L T Tr WH]; xviii. 16.* 

πορφυρόπωλις, -ἰδος, 7, (πορφύρα and πωλέω), a female 
seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur- 
puraria): Acts xvi. 14. (Phot. Suid. al)* . 

ποσάκις, (πόσος), adv., how often: Mt. xviii. 215 xxiii. 
37; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat. ep., Aristot., al.)]* 

πόσις, -ews, 7, (πίνω), fr. Hom. down, a drinking, drink: 
Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. 16, (see βρῶσις)." 

πόσος, -7, -ov, [ (cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down, 
Lat. quantus], how great: Mt. vi. 23; 2 Co. vii. 11; πόσος 
χρόνος, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. ix. 
21; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; πόσῳ, (by) how much, 
Mt. xii. 12; πόσῳ μᾶλλον, Mt. vii. 11; x. 25; Lk. xi. 13; 
xii. 24, 28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; πόσῳ 
χείρονος τιμωρίας, Heb. x. 29; plur. how many: with 
nouns, Mt. xv. 34; xvi.9sq.; Mk. vi. 38; viii. 4, 19 sq. ; 
Lk. xv. 17; Acts xxi. 20; πόσα, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 13; 
Mk. xv. 4.* 

ποταμός, -ov, ὁ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 173 and ^, 
a stream, a river: Mt.iii.6 L'T Tr WH; Mk. i. 5; Acts 
xvi. 13; 2 Co. xi. 26 [W. § 30, 2a.]; Rev. viii. 105 ix. 14; 
xii. 15; xvi.4, 12; xxii. 1sq.; i.q. a torrent, Mt. vii. 25, 
27; Lk. vi. 48 sq. ; Rev. xii. 15 sq.; plur. figuratively 
i. q. the greatest abundance [cf. colloq. Eng. * streams," 
* floods "'], Jn. vii. 88." 

ποταμο-φόρητος, -ov, ὁ, (ποταμός and dopéo; like dve- 
μοφόρητος [cf. W. 100 (94)]), carried away by a stream 
(i.e. whelmed, drowned in the waters): Rev. xii. 15. 
Besides only in Hesych. s. v. ἀπόερσε." 

ποταπός ([in Dion. Hal, Joseph., Philo, al.] for the 
older ποδαπός [cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq.; Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p.129; W. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.]; 
ace. to the Grk. grammarians i. q. ἐκ ποίου δαπέδου, from 
what region; ace. to the conjecture of others i. 4. ποῦ ἀπό 
[ (Buttmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ. wovon)], 
the ὃ being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the 
Lat. prodire, prodesse; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 554 
sq. [still others regard -δαπός merely as an ending; cf. 


πότε 


Apollon. Dysk., ed. Buttmann, index s. v.]),-n, τόν ; 1. 
from what country, race, or tribe? so fr. Aeschyl. down. 
2. from Demosth. down also i. q. ποῖος, of what sort or 
quality ? [what manner of 5] : absol. of persons, Mt. viii. 
27; 2 Pet. iii. 11; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39; w. names 
of things, Mk. xiii. 1; Lk. i. 29; 1 Jn. iii. 1.* 

πότε, [Curtius $ 631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Hom. 
down, when? at what time? Mt. xxv. 31-39, 44; Lk. xxi. 
7; Jn. vi. 25; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic 
writ.) for the relative ὁπότε in indirect questions (W. 
510 (475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33, 35; Lk. xii. 36; 
xvii. 20. ἕως πότε, how long ? in direct questions [cf. W. 
§ 54, 6 fin. ; B. $146, 4]: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 
41; Jn.x. 24; Rev. vi. 10.* 

ποτέ, an enclitie particle, fr. Hom. down; 1l 
once, i. e. at some time or other, formerly, aforetime ; a. 
of the Past: Jn.ix. 13; Ro. vii. 9; xi. 30; Gal.i. 13, 23 
[cf. W. § 45, 7]; Eph. ii. 2 sq. 11, 13; v. 8; Col. i. 21; iii. 
ΤΣ 1 Th, i. 55 Tit. iii. 3; Philen 11. 1 Pet. 1.10; iit. 
5, 20; ἤδη ποτέ, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the 
Future: Lk. xxii. 32; ἤδη ποτέ, now at length, Ro. i. 
10. 2. ever: after a negative, οὐδείς ποτε, Eph. v. 
29 [B. 202 (175)]; ov... ποτέ, 2 Pet. i. 21; μή ποτε 
(see μήποτε); after οὐ μή with tlte aor. subjunc. 2 Pet. 
i.10; ina question, ris ποτε, 1 Co. ix. 7; Heb.i. 5,13; 
ὁποῖοί ποτε; whatsoever, Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render 
ποτέ here formerly, once; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ].* 

πότερος, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], which of two; πότε- 
ρον - «- ἤ, utrum... an, whether... or, [W. $ 57, 1 b.; 
B. 250 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.* 

ποτήριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking 
vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk. 
vii. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39; 
xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ 
ποτηρίου, 1 Co. xi. 28; τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας (see ei- 
Aoyta, 4), 1 Co. x. 16; with a gen. of the thing with 
which the cup is filled : ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42; ὕδατος, Mk. 
ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained, 
the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, 
Lk. xxii. 20° [(WH reject the pass.) cf. Win. 635 (589) 
sq.]; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq.; τὸ ποτήριόν τινος, gen. of the pers. 
giving the entertainment (cf. Rickert, Abendmahl, p. 
217 sq.) : πίνειν, 1 Co. x. 21 [cf. W. 189 (178)]; xi. 27 
[ef. W. 441 (410)]. b. By a figure common to 
Hebrew, Arabie, Syriae, and not unknown to Latin 
writers, one's lot or experience, whether joyous or 
adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable 
or unfavorable, are likened to a cup which God presents 
one to drink [cf. W. 32]: so of prosperity, Ps. xv. (xvi.) 
5; xxii. (xxiii.) 5; exv. (exvi.) 13; of adversity, Ps. x. 
(xi.) 6; Ixxiv. (Ixxv.) 9; Is. li. 17,22. In the N. T. of 
the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ: Mt. xxvi. 39, 
42 Rec.; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. xxii. 42; Jn. xviii. 11; πίνειν 
τὸ ποτ. pov Or ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, to undergo the same calamities 
which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plaut. 
Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego 
bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as 
I was) ; used of the divine penalties: Rev. xiv. 10 ; xvi. 


538 








Πούδης 


19; xviii.6. ([Aleaeus, Sappho], IHdt., Ctes., Arstph., 
Lcian., al.; Sept. for 012.) * 

ποτίζω ; impf. ἐπότιζον; 1 aor. émórwa; pf. πεπότικα 
(Rev. xiv. 8) ; 1 aor. pass. ἐποτίσθην ; (πότος) ; fr. [Hip- 
pocr.], Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for npun; to give to 
drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 13 and Rev. 
xiv. 8 poto [but in Rev. l. c. Tdf. gives potiono; A. V. to 
make to drink ]): τινά, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42; xxvii. 48; Mk. 
xv. 36; Lk. xii. 15; Ro. xii. 20; τινά τι, to offer one 
anything to drink (W. $ 32,4 a.; [B. $ 131, 6]) : Mt. x. 
42; Mk.ix. 41, and often in the Sept.; in fig. discourse 
7. τινὰ γάλα, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended, 
1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma od βρῶμα is added; [cf. 
W. § 66,2 e.; B. $151, 30; A. V. 1 have fed you with 
milk, etc.]); τινὰ ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου, Rev. xiv. 8 (see οἶνος, b. 
andé6vpós,2); i.q.towater, irrigate, (plants, fields, ete.) : 
1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25; Lcian., Athen., Geop., 
[Strab., Philo]; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7); 
metaph. to imbue, saturate, τινά, one's mind, w. the addi- 
tion of an accus. of the thing, ἕν πνεῦμα, in pass., 1 Co. 
xii. 13 L T Tr WH[(W. $32,5; B. $134,5]; eis ἐν πνεῦμα, 
that we might be united into one body which is imbued 
with one spirit, ibid. RG, (τινὰ πνεύματι κατανύξεως, Is. 
xxix. 10 [cf. Sir. xv. 3]).* 

Tloriodot, -ov, of, Puteoli, a city of Campania in Italy, 
situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli: 
Acts xxviii. 18. [Cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218sqq.; Smith, 
Dict. of Geog. s. v.]* 

πότος, -ov, 6, (ΠΟΩ [cf. πίνω]), a drinking, carousing : 
1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.; 
Sept. for nin.) * 

ποῦ, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Hom. 
down, Sept. for 78, 738, ^N, where? in what place? a. 
in direct questions: Mt. ii.2; xxvi.17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14; 
Lk. xvii. 17, 37; xxii. 9, 11; Jn.i. 38 (39) ; vii. 11; viii. 
10, 19; ix.12; xi. 34; ποῦ ἐστιν [(ἐστ. sometimes unex- 
pressed) ], in questions: indicating that a person or thing 
is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to it is nowhere, 
does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 20; xii. 
17,19; xv. 55; Gal. iv. 15 L T Tr WH; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; ποῦ 
φανεῖται, [ Δ. V. where shall . . . appear] i. q. there will be 
no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques- 
tions, for the relative ὅπου [cf. W. $57, 2fin.]: foll. by 
the indic., Mt. ii. 4; Mk. xv. 47; Jn. i.39 (40); xi. 57; 
xx. 2,13, 15; Rev. ii. 13 [cf. W. 612 (569)]; foll. by the 
subjunc., Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; xii. 17. c. joined 
to verbs of going or coming, for ποῖ in direct quest. [cf. 
our colloq. where for whither; see Wa § 54507 ; SB 
(62)]: Jn. vii. 35 [cf. W. 300 (281) ; B. 358 (307)]; xiii. 
36; xvi.5; in indir. question, foll. by the indic. : Jn. iii. 
8; viii. 14; xii. 35; xiv. 5; Heb. xi. 8; 1 Jn. ii. 11.* 

πού, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; aT 
somewhere: Heb. ii. 6; iv. 4. 2. it has a limiting 
force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about, 
(Hat. 1,119; 7,22; Paus. 8, 11, 2; Hdian. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed. 
Bekk.]; Ael v. h. 13, 4; al.): Ro. iv. 19.* 

IToó8ns, [ B. 17 (15)], Pudens, proper name of a Chris- 
tian mentioned in 2 Tim.iv.21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo- 


πούς 534 


gie d. romisch. Bischofe (1869) p. 146; [B. D. s. v., also 
(Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia; Bib. Sacr. for 1875, p. 174 sqq.; 
Plumptre in the * Bible Educator’ iii. 245 and in Elli- 
cott's * New Test. Com." ii. p. 186 sq.].* 

πούς (not ποῦς, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 765; Güttling, 
Accentl. p. 244; [Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, $ 566]; 
W. §6, 1d.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 48), ποδός, 6, 
[allied w. πέδον, πέζα, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius $291; Van- 
itek p. 473], dat. plur. ποσίν, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 535; 
a foot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6 ; vii. 6; xxii. 
13; Mk.ix.45; Lk.i. 79; Jn.xi.44; Acts vii. 5; 1 Co. 
xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental prac- 
tice of placing the foot upon the vanquished (Josh. x. 
24), come the foll. expressions: ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας συντρίβειν 
(q. ν.) τινά, Ro. xvi. 20; ὑποτάσσειν τινά, 1 Co. xv. 27; 
Eph. i. 22; Heb. ii. 8; τιθέναι, 1 Co. xv. 25; τιθέναι τινὰ 
ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν, Mt. xxii. 44 L T Tr WH; ὑποπόδιον 
τῶν ποδῶν, Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH ὑπο- 
κάτω τ. 7.]; Lk. xx. 43; Actsii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 12; dis- 
ciples listening to their teacher's instruction are said παρὰ 
(or πρὸς) τοὺς πόδας τινὸς καθῆσθαι or παρακαθίσαι, Lk. x. 
39; Acts xxii. 3, cf. Lk. vili.35; to lay ἃ thing παρὰ (or 
πρὸς) τοὺς πόδας τινός is used of those who consign it to his 
power and care, Mt. xv. 30; Actsiv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58. 
In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, ete., persons 
are said πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινὸς πίπτειν or προσπίπτειν : Mk. 
v. 22; vii. 25; Lk. viii.41; xvii. 16 παρά]; Rev. i. 17; 
εἰς τοὺς π. τινός, Mt. xviii. 29 [Rec.]; Jn. xi. 32 [here T 
Tr WH πρός]; πίπτειν ἔμπροσθεν τ. ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix. 
10; προσκυνεῖν ἔμπροσθεν (or ἐνώπιον) τῶν ποδῶν τινος, 
Rey. iii. 9; xxii. 8; πίπτ. ἐπὶ τοὺς π. Acts x. 25. By a 
poetic usage that member of the body whichis the chief 
organ or instrument in any given action is put for the 
man himself (see γλῶσσα, 1) ; thus of πόδες τινός is used 
for the man in motion: Lk. i. 79 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 101) ; 
Acts v.95 Ro. iii. 15; x. 15; Heb. xii. 13. 

πρᾶγμα, -ros, τό, (πράσσω), fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hat. 
down, Sept. chiefly for 435; a. that which has been 
done, a deed, an accomplished fact: Lk. i.1; Acts v. 4; 
2 Co. vii. 11; Heb. vi. 18. b. what is doing or being 
accomplished: Jas. iii. 16; spec. business (commercial 
transaction), 1 Th. iv. 6 [so W.115 (109); al. refer this 
example to c. and render in the matter (spoken of, or con- 
ventionally understood; cf. Green, Gram. p. 26 sq.)]. c. 
a matter (in question), affair: Mt. xviii. 19; Ro. xvi. 2; 
spec. in a forensie sense, a matter at law, case, suit, (Xen. 
mem. 2, 9, 1; Dem. 1120, 26; Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 17) : 
πρᾶγμα ἔχειν πρός twa, [A. V. having a matter against, 
ete.], 1 Co. vi. 1. d. that which is or exists, a 
thing: Heb. x. 1; πράγματα οὐ βλεπόμενα, Heb. xi. 1 [see 
ἐλπίζω ].*, 

πραγματεία [T WH -ria; see I, «], -as, 7, (πραγματεύο- 
pat), prosecution of any affair; business, occupation: 
plur. with the addition of τοῦ βίου, pursuits and oceupa- 
tions pertaining to civil life, opp. to warfare [A. V. the 
affairs of this life], 2 Tim. 11. 4. (In the same and other 
senses in Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.], Xen., Plato down.) * 

πραγματεύομαι: 1 aor. mid. impy. 2 pers. plur. πραγ- 


πρᾷος 


ματεύσασθε; (πρᾶγμα) ; in Grk. prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; 
to be occupied in anything; to carry on a business; spec. 
to carry on the business of a banker or trader (Plut. Sull. 
17; Cat. min. 59): Lk. xix. 13 [here WH txt. reads the 
infinitive (see their Intr. 8 404) ; R. V. trade. Cowr.: 
δια- mpayparevonat. ] * 

πραιτώριον, -ov, τό, a Lat. word, praetorium (neut. of 
the adj. praelorius used substantively); the word de- 
notes 1. ‘head-quarters’ in a Roman camp, the 
tent of the commander-in-chief. 2. the palace in 
which the governor or procurator of a province resided, 
to which use the Romans were accustomed to appropri- 
ate the palaces already existing, and formerly dwelt in 
by the kings or princes (at Syracuse *illa domus prae- 
toria, quae regis Hieronis fuit," Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 12, 30); 
at Jerusalem it was that magnificent palace which Her- 
od the Great had built for himself, and which the Ro- 
man procurators seem to have occupied whenever they 
came from Cwsarea to Jerusalem to transact public 
business: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Jn. xviii. 28, 33; 
xix. 9; cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium, § 38; Joseph. b. j. 2, 14, 
8; also the one at Cesarea, Acts xxiii. 35. Cf. Keim 
iii. p. 359 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. p. 79; B. D. s. v. Praeto- 
rium]. 3. the chmp of praetorian soldiers estab- 
lished by Tiberius (Suet. 37): Phil 1. 18. Cf. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Riehthaus; [Bp. Lghtft. (Com. on Philip. 
p. 99 sqq.) rejeets, as destitute of evidence, the various 
attempts to give a local sense to the word in Phil. l. c., 
and vindicates the meaning practorian guard (so R.V.)].* 

πράκτωρ, -opos, 6, (πράσσω); 1. one who does 
anything, a doer, (Soph.). 2. one who does the work 
of inflicting punishment or taking vengeance; esp. the 
avenger of a murder (Aeschyl., Soph.) ; the exactor of a 
pecuniary fine ([Antipho], Dem., al.) ; an officer of jus- 
tice of the lower order whose business it is to inflict punish- 
ment: Lk. xii. 58.* 

πράξις, -ews, ἡ, (πράσσω), fr. Hom. down; a.a 
doing, a mode of acting; a deed, act, transaction: univ. 
πράξεις τῶν ἀποστόλων (Grsb.; Rec. inserts ἁγίων, L Tr 
WHI om. τῶν, Tdf. has simply πράξεις), the doings of (i. e. 
things done by) the apostles, in the inscription of the Acts; 
sing. in an ethical sense: both good and bad, Mt. xvi. 
27; in a bad sense, i. 4. wicked deed, crime, Lk. xxiii. 
51; plur. wicked doings (cf. our practices i. e. trickery ; 
often so by Polyb.): Acts xix. 18; Ro. viii. 13; Col. iii. 
9; (with κακή added, as Ev. Nicod. 1 ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐθεράπευσε 
δαιμονιζομένους ἀπὸ πράξεων κακῶν). b. a thing to 
be done, business, [ A. V. office], (Xen. mem. 2,1, 6) : Ro. 
xii. 4.* 

πρᾷος (so R G in Mt. xi. 29; onthe iota subscr. cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 403 sq.; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 64, 2 i. p. 255; 
[. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 7 sq. ; cf. W. $ 5, 4 d. and 
p. 45 (44)]) or πρᾶος, -a, -ov, and zpavs (L'T Tr WH, so 
RG in Mt. xxi. 5 (4); [cf. Tf. Proleg. p. 827), -εἴα, -v, gen. 
πραέως T Tr WH for the common form zpaéos (so Lehm. ; 
πρᾳέος RG), see βαθέως [cf. B. 26 (23)], plur. πραεῖς L 
T Tr WH, πρᾳεῖς R G; fr. Hom. down; gentle, mild, meek: 
Mt. v. 5 (4) ; xi. 29; xxi. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 4; Sept. several 


“πρᾳύτης 


times for 13) and 32». [Cf. Schmidt ch. 98, 2; Trench 
§ xlii.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 6, 36.]* 

πρᾳότης (Ree. and Grsb. [exe. in Jas. i. 21; iii. 12; 1 
Pet. iii. 15]; see the preceding word), πραότης (so Lchm.), 
and ace. to a later form πραὔτης (so R and G, but with c 
subser. under the a, in Jas. i. 21; iii. 13; 1 Pet. iii. 15; 
Lehm. everywhere exc. in Gal. vi. 1; Eph. iv. 2; Treg. 
everywhere [exc. in 2 Co. x. 1; Gal. v. 23 (22); vi.1; Eph. 
iv. 2], T WH everywhere; cf. D. 26 (23) sq-), τητος; 1, gen- 
lleness, mildness, meekness : 1 Co. iv. 21: 2 Co. x. 1; Gal. 
v. 23 (22) ; vi. 1; Col. iii. 12; Eph. iv.2; 1 Tim. vi. 11 R; 
2 Tim. ii. 25; Tit. iii. 2; Jas.i. 21; iii.13; 1 Pet. iii. 16 
(15). (Xen., Plato, Isoer., Aristot., Diod., Joseph., al. ; 
for 73)’, Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [SYN. see ἐπιείκεια, fin. ; 
Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) $ xlii.; Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col. iii. 13.]* 

πρασιά, -as, ἡ, a plot of ground, a garden-bed, Hom. Od. 
7, 127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist. plant. 4,4, 3; Nicand., 
Diose., al.; Sir. xxiv. 31; ἀνέπεσον πρασιαὶ πρασιαί (a 
Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so 
‘that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate 
plots, Mk. vi. 40; ef. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 669; [Hebr. 
Gram. $106, 4; B. 30(27) ; W. 464 (432) also] $37, 3; 
(where add fr. the O. T. συνήγαγον αὐτοὺς θημωνίας θημω- 
vias, Ex. viii. 14).* 

πράσσω and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RG) πράττω ; fut. 
πράξω; 1 aor. ἔπραξα; pf. πέπραχα; pf. pass. ptep. mempay- 
“μένος ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. several times for ni and 
23; to do, practise, effect, Lat. agere, (but ποιεῖν to make, 
Lat. facere; [see ποιέω, fin.]) ; i.e. 1. to exercise, 
practise, be busy with, carry on: τὰ περίεργα, Acts xix. 19; 
τὰ ἴδια, to mind one’s own affairs, 1 Th. iv. 11 (τὰ ἑαυτοῦ, 
[Soph. Electr. 678]; Xen. mem. 2,9, 1; Plat. Phaedr. p. 
247 a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al); used of performing the 
duties of an office, 1 Co. ix. 17. to undertake to do, μηδὲν 
προπετές, Acts xix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform : 
πεπραγμένον ἐστίν, has been accomplished, has taken 
place, Acts xxvi. 205 etre ἀγαθόν, etre κακόν, 2 Co. v. 10; 
«ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον (κακόν), Ro. ix. 11 (δίκαια ἢ ἄδικα, Plat. 
apol. p. 28b.); ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα, Acts xxvi. 20; 
add, Ro. vii. 15, 19; Phil. iv. 9; νόμον, to do i. e. keep the 
law, Ro. ii. 25; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpetrate, 
(less freq. so in Grk. writ., as πολλὰ καὶ ἀνόσια, Xen. 
symp. 8, 22; with them ποιεῖν [(see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23, 
11, 3; L. and S. s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to 
bad conduct; hence τοὺς ἐπισταμένους μὲν à δεῖ πράττειν, 
“ποιοῦντας δὲ τἀναντία, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 4), Acts xxvi. 9; 
2 Co. xii. 21; τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co. 
v.2 T WH Trmrg.; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts iii. 17; v. 
35; Ro. vii. 19; rà τοιαῦτα, such nameless iniquities, Ro. 
i. 32 (where ποιεῖν and πράσσειν are used indiscriminately 
[but cf. Meyer]); ii. 1-3; Gal. v. 21; φαῦλα, Jn. iii. 20; 
v. 29; τὶ ἄξιον θανάτου, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts xxv. 11, 25; 
xxvi. 31; τὸ κακόν, Ro. vii. 19; xiii. 4; ἄτοπον, Lk. xxiii. 41; 
“τί τινι κακόν, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 8. 
to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen., 
Dem., Plut.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr. 
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue, 


535 














πρεσβύτερος 


debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extort]; τὸ ἀργύριον, Lk. 
xix. 23, (so agere in Lat., ef. the commentators on Suet. 
Vesp.1; [ef. W. § 42, 1a.]). 4. intrans. to act (see 
εὖ p. 256") : ἀπέναντί τινος, contrary to a thing, Acts xvii. 
Ue 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me 
habere: τί πράσσω, how I do, the state of my affairs, 
Eph. vi. 21; εὖ πράξετε (see εὖ), Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300 
(258)]. 

πραὐπάθεια (-θία TWH; see I, 0), -as, 7, (πραὐπαθής 
[(máo xo) ]), mildness of disposition, gentleness of spirit, 
meckness, (i. q. πραὔτης) : 1 Tim. vi.11 L'T Tr WH. (Philo 
de Abrah. $37; Ignat. ad Trall. 8, 1.) * 

πραῦς, see πρᾷος. 

πραὕτης, see πρᾳύτης. 

πρέπω ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἔπρεπε; 1. to stand out, 
to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. Il. 12, 104 
down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, fit, (fr. Pind., 
Aeschyl, Hdt. down) : πρέπει τινί with a subject nom. 
Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 1); ὃ or ἃ πρέπει, which 
becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1; impers. κα- 
θὼς πρέπει τινί, Eph. v. 3; πρέπον ἐστίν foll. by the inf., 
Mt. iii. 15; Heb. ii. 10; foll. by an ace. with the inf. 1 Co. 
xi. 13. On its constr. cf. Bttm. § 142, 2.* 

πρεσβεία, -as, 7, (pea euo) ; 1. age, dignity, right 
of the first born: Aeschyl. Pers. 4; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 509 
b.; Paus. 3, 1, 4; 3, 3, 8. 2. the business wont to 
be intrusted to elders, spec. the office of an ambassador, 
an embassy, (Arstph., Xen., Plat.); abstr. for the con- 
crete, an ambassage i. e. ambassadors, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 
14.* 

πρεσβεύω ; (πρέσβυς an old man, an elder, [ Curtius p. 
479; Vaniéek p. 1867); 1. to be older, prior by 
birth or in age, ((Soph.], Hdt. and sqq.). 2. to be 
an ambassador, act as an ambassador: 2 Co. v. 20; Eph. 
vi. 20, ([Hdt. 5, 93 init.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.).* 

apex Bvréptov, -ov, τό, (πρεσβύτερος, q. V-), body of elders, 
presbytery, senate, council: of the Jewish elders (see avv- 
έδριον, 2), Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xxii. 5; [cf. Dan. Theod. 
init. 50]; of the elders of any body (church) of Chris- 
tians, 1 Tim. iv. 14 (eccl. writ. [cf. reff. s. v. πρεσβύτερος, 
2 0.7)" 

πρεσβύτερος, -a, -ov, (compar. of πρέσβυς), [fr. Hom. 
down], elder ; used 1. of age; a. where two 
persons are’ spoken of, the elder: ὁ vids ὁ πρεσβ. (Ael. 
y. h. 9, 42), Lk. xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in. life, 
an elder, a senior: opp. to νεανίσκοι, Acts ii. 17; opp. to 
νεώτερος, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq. ; Sap. viii. 10; 
Sir. vi. 34 (33) ; vii. 14; 2 Mace. viii. 30). oi πρεσβύ- 
repo, [ A.V. the elders], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; παράδοσις 
(q. v-) τῶν mpeoB., received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2; 
Mk. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such 
borne by, a. among the Jews, δα. members of 
the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times 
the rulers of the people, judges, ete., were selected from 
the elderly men): Mt. xvi. 21; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Ree.; 
xxvii.3,12, 20,41; xxviii.12; Mk.viii.31; xi. 27; xiv. 
43,53; xv. 1; Lk. ix. 22; xx. 1; xxii. 52; Jn. viii. 9; Acts 
iv. 5,23; vi. 12; xxiii. 14 ; xxiv. 1; with the addition of 


πρεσβύτης 


τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Acts iv. 8 RG; οἵ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, Acts xxv. 
15; of τοῦ λαοῦ, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3; xxvii. 1. B. 
those who in the separate cities managed publie affairs 
and administered justice: Lk.vii.3. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. 
Elder.] b. among Christians, those who presided 
over the assemblies (or churches) : Acts xi. 30; xiv. 23; xv. 
2,4, 6,22. sq. ; xvi. 4; xxi. 18; 1 Tim. v. 17, 19; Tit.3. 5; 
2 Jn.1; 3 Jn. 1; 1 Pet. v. 1, 5; with τῆς ἐκκλησίας added, 
Acts xx. 17; Jas. v. 14. That they did not differ at all 
from the (ἐπίσκοποι) bishops or overseers (as is 
acknowledged also by Jerome on Tit. i. 5 [cf. Bp. LgAtft. 
Com. on Phil. pp. 98 sq. 229 sq.]) is evident from the 
fact that the two words are used indiscriminately, Acts 
xx. 17, 28; Tit. i. 5, 7, and that the duty of presbyters 
is described by the terms ἐπισκοπεῖν, 1 Pet. v. 1 sq., and 
ἐπισκοπή, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44,1; accordingly only 
two ecclesiastical officers, oí ἐπίσκοποι and οἱ διάκονοι, 
are distinguished in Phil.i.1; 1 Tim.iii. 1, 8. The title 
ἐπίσκοπος denotes the function, πρεσβύτερος the dig- 
nity; the former was borrowed from Greek institutions, 
the latter from the Jewish; cf. [Bp. Lehtft., as above, 
pp. 95 sqq. 191sqq.]; Ritschl, Die Entstehung der altka- 
thol. Kirche, ed. 2 p. 350 sqq.; Hase, Protest. Polemik, 
ed. 4 p. 98 sqq.; [ Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, Lect. 
iii. and Harnack's Analecten appended to the Germ. 
trans. of the same (p. 229 sqq.) ; also Harnack’s note on 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3 (cf. reff. at 44 init.), and Hatch in 
Dict. of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Priest. Cf. ézioxorros. ]. c. 
the twenty-four members of the heavenly Sanhedrin or 
* court, seated on thrones around the throne of God: Rev. 

iv. 4, 10; v. 5,6,8,11, 14; vii. 11, 13; xi. 16; xiv. 3; xix. 4.* 

πρεσβύτης, -ov, 6, (πρέσβυς [see πρεσβεύω )), an old man, 
anaged man: Lk.i.18; Tit.ii. 2; Philem. 9 [here many 
(cf. R. V. mrg.) rezard the word as a substitute for 
πρεσβευτής, ambassador; see Bp. Lghtft. Com. ad loc. ; 
WH. App. ad loc.; and add to the exx. of the inter- 
change zpeaB ev répois in Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, 
App., Inser. fr. the Great Theatre p. 24 (col. 5, 1. 72)]. 
(Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for pt) * 

πρεσβῦτις, -ιδος, 7, (fem. of πρεσβύτης), an aged woman : 
Tit. ii. 8. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., Hdian. 5, 
3, 6 (9 ed. Bekk.).) * 

πρηνής, -és, [allied w. πρό; Vanicek p. 484], Lat. pro- 
nus, headlong: Acts i. 18. (Sap. iv. 19; 3 Mace. v.43; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, but in Attic more com. 
πρανής, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 431; [W. 22].) * 

πρίζω (or πρίω, q. v.) : 1 aor. pass. ἐπρίσθην ; to saw, to 
cut in two with asaw: Heb. xi.37. Tobe ‘sawn asunder’ 
was a kind of punishment among the Hebrews (? S. xii. 
31; 1 Chr. xx. 3), which according to ancient tradition 
was inflicted on the prophet Isaiah; cf. Win. RWB.s. v. 
Sige; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 135; [B. D. s. v. Saw]. 
(Am. i. 3; Sus. 59; Plat. Theag. p. 124 b. and freq. in 
later writ.) * 

πρίν, [(ace. to Curtius $380 compar. προ- tov, προ -w, 
mptv) |, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 1. an adv. 
previously, formerly, [cf. πάλαι, 1]: 3 Mace. v. 28; vi. 4,31; 
but never so in the N. T. 2. with the force of a 


536 


προ 


conjunction, before, before that: with an acc. and aor. 
infin. of things past [cf. W. § 44, 6 fin.; B. $142,3]; πρὶν" 
᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσθαι, before Abraham existed, came into be- 
ing, Jn. viii. 58; also πρὶν ἤ (cf. Meyer on Mt. i. 18), Mt. 
i 18; [Acts vii. 2]; with an aor. inf. having the force of 
the Lat. fut. perf., of things future [cf. W. 332 (311)]: 
πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι, before the cock shall have crowed, 
Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv. 72; Lk. xxii. 61; add, Jn. iv. 
49; xiv. 29; also πρὶν 7, Mk. xiv. 30; Acts ii. 20 (where: 
L'T Tr WH txt. om. 7); πρὶν 7, preceded by a negative 
sentence [B. § 139, 35], with the aor. subjunc. having 
the force of a fut. pf. in Lat. [B. 231 (199)], Lk. ii. 26. 
[RGL T Tr mrg., but WH br. 7], and R Gin Lk. xxii. 
34; πρὶν 7, foll. by the optat. of a thing as entertained 
in thought, Acts xxv. 16 [W. 297 (279) ; B. 230 (198)]. 
Cf. Matthiae ὃ 522, 2 p. 1201 sq.; Bitm. Gram. $139, 41; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 726 sqq.; W. [and B.] as above.* 

Πρίσκα, 7, [acc. -av], Prisca (a Lat. name [lit. *an- 
cient’]), a Christian woman, wife of Aquila (concern- 
ing whom see ᾽᾿Ακύλας) : Ro. xvi. 3 GL T TrFWH ; 1 Co. 
xvi. 19 L ed. ster. T Tr WH; 2 Tim.iv.19. She is also: 
called by the dimin. name Πρισκίλλα [better (with all 
edd.) Πρίσκιλλα, see Chandler $ 122; Etymol. Magn. 
19, 50 sq.] (cf. Livia, Livilla; Drusa, Drusilla; Quinta;. 
Quintilla; Secunda, Secundilla): Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26 >: 
besides, Ro. xvi. 3 Rec.; 1 Co. xvi. 19 RGL.* 

Πρίσκιλλα, see the preceding word. 

πρίω, see πρίζω. [Comp.: δια- mpto.] 

πρό, a prep. foll. by the Genitive, (Lat. pro), [fr. Hom. 
down], Sept. chiefly for 325, before; used a. of 
Place: πρὸ τῶν θυρῶν, τῆς θύρας, etc., Acts v. 23 RG; 
xii. 6, 14; xiv. 13; Jas. v. 9; by a Hebraism, πρὸ προσώ- 
mov with the gen. of a pers. before (the face of) one (who- . 
is following) [B. 319 (274)]: Mt.xi.10; Mk.i.2; Lk.i. 
76; vii. 27; ix. 52; x. 1, (Mal. iii. 1; Zech. xiv. 20; Deut. 
iii. 18). b. of Time: πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, Acts 
v. 36; xxi. 38; [πρὸ τοῦ πάσχα, Jn. xi. 55]; acc.toalater 
Greek idiom, πρὸ ἕξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ πάσχα, prop. before six 
days reckoning from the Passover, which is equiv. to é£ 
ἡμέρας πρὸ τοῦ πάσχα, on the sixth day before the Pas- 
sover, Jn. xii. 1 (πρὸ δύο ἐτῶν τοῦ σεισμοῦ, Am. i. 1; πρὸ» 
μιᾶς ἡμέρας τῆς Μαρδοχαϊκῆς ἡμέρας, 2 Mace. xv. 36; exx. 
fr. prof. writ. are cited by W. 557 (518) ; [cf. B. $131, 
11]; fr. eccles. writ. by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien eto. 
pp- 298, 302; also his Paschastreit der alten Kirche, p. 221 
sq.; [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v. πρό, 1 and 2]) ; [πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς, 
Jn. xiii. 1]; πρὸ καιροῦ, Mt. viii. 29; 1 Co. iv. 5; τῶν αἰώ-- 
vov, 1 Co. ii. 7; παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος, Jude 25 L T Tr WH; 
ἐτῶν δεκατεσσ. [ fourteen years ago], 2 Co. xii. 2; add, 2 
Tim. i. 9; iv. 21; Tit.i.2; ro? ἀρίστου, Lk. xi. 38; κατα- 
κλυσμοῦ, Mt. xxiv. 38; πρὸ τῆς μεταθέσεως, Heb. xi. ὃ; 
πρὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i. 4; 1 Pet. i.. 
20; πρὸ πάντων, prior to all created things, Col. i. 17; 
[πρὸ τούτων πάντων (Rec. ámávr.), Lk. xxi. 12]; bya 
Hebraism, πρὸ προσώπου with the gen. of a thing is used 
of time for the simple zpó (W. $65, 4b.; [B.319 (274) ]), 
Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)]- 
πρό with the gen. of a pers.: Jn. v. 7; x. 8 [not Tdf.];: 


Tpoayw 


Ro. xvi. 7; of πρό τινος, those that existed before one, 
Mt. v.12; with a pred. nom. added, Gal.i.17. πρό with 
the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quam 
(before, before that) foll. by a fin. verb [B. $140, 11; W. 
329 (309)] : Mt. vi. 8; Lk. ii. 21 ; xxii.15; Jn.i. 48 (49) ; 


xiii. 19; xvii. 5; Acts xxiii. 15; Gal. ii. 12 ; iii. 23. c. 
of superiority or pre-eminence [W. 372 (349)]: 
πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas. v. 12; 1 Pet. iv. 8. d. 


In Composition, πρό marks a. place: προαύ- 
motion forward (Lat. porro), προβαίνω, προβάλλω, 
etc.; before another who follows, in advance, προάγω, πρό- 
Spopos, προπέμπω, προτρέχω, ete.; in public view, openly, 
πρόδηλος, πρόκειμαι. β. time: before this, previously, 
προαμαρτάνω; in reference to the time of an occurrence, 
beforehand, in advance, προβλέπω, προγινώσκω, προθέ- 
σμιος, προορίζω, etc. y- superiority or preference: 
προαιρέομαι. [Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 658.]* 

προ-άγω ; impf. προῆγον ; fut. προάξω ; 2 aor. προήγαγον; 
fr. Hdt. down; 1. trans. to lead forward, lead 
forth : τινά, one from a place in which he has lain hidden 
from view,— as from prison, ἔξω, Acts xvi. 30; [from 
Jason’s house, Acts xvii. 5 L T Tr WH]; in a forensic 
sense, to bring one forth to trial, Acts xii. 6 [WH txt. 
προσαγαγεῖν] ; with addition of ἐπί and the gen. of the 
pers. about to examine into the case, before whom the 
hearing is to be had, Acts xxv. 26 (εἰς τὴν δίκην, Joseph. 
b. j. 1, 27, 2; εἰς ἐκκλησίαν τοὺς ἐν αἰτίᾳ γενομένους, antt. 
16, 11, 7). 2. intrans. (see ἄγω, 4 [and cf. πρό, d. 
a.]), a. to go before: Lk. xviii. 39 [L mrg. παράγ.] ; 
opp. to ἀκολουθέω, Mt. xxi. 9 RG; Mk. xi. 9; foll. by eis 
with an ace. of place, Mt. xiv. 22; Mk. vi. 45; εἰς κρίσιν, 
1 Tim. v. 24 (on which pass. see ἐπακολουθέω) ; ptep. 
προάγων, preceding i. e. prior in point of time, previous, 
1 Tim. i. 18 [see προφητεία fin., and s. v. ἐπί, C. 1. 2 g. y. 
yy: (but R. V. mrg. led the way to, etc.)]; Heb. vii. 18. 
τινά, to precede one, Mt. ii. 9; Mk. x. 32; and LT Tr 
WH in Mt. xxi. 9, [cf. Joseph. b. j.6, 1,6; B. 8180, 47; 
foll. by εἰς with an acc. of place, Mt. xxvi.32; xxviii. 7; 
Mk. xiv. 28; xvi. 7; τινὰ eis τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, to 
take precedence of one in entering into the kingdom of 
God, Mt. xxi. 31 [cf. B. 204 (177)]. b. to proceed, 
go forward: in a bad sense, to go further than is right or 
proper, i.q. μὴ μένειν ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, to transgress the limits 
of true doctrine [ef. our colloq. ‘advanced’ (views, ete.) 
in a disparaging sense], 2Jn. 9 L T Tr WH [but R. V. 
mre. taketh the lead ].* 

προ-αιρέω, -à : by prose writ. fr. Hdt. [rather, fr. Thuc. 
8, 90 fin. (in poetry, fr. Arstph. Thesm. 419)] down, to 
bring forward, bring forth from one's stores; Mid. to bring 
forth for one's self, to choose for one’s self before another 
i. e. to prefer ; to purpose : καθὼς προαιρεῖται (1, T Tr WH 
the pf. προήρηται) τῇ καρδίᾳ, 2 Co. ix. 7.* _ 

προ-αιτιάομαι, -ὥῶμαι : 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. προητιασάμεθα ; 
to bring a charge against previously (i. e.in what has pre- 
viously been said): τινά foll. by an infin. indicating the 
charge, Ro. iii. 9; where the prefix zpo- makes refer- 
ence to i. 18-31; ii. 1-5, 17-29. Not found elsewhere.* 

προ-ακούω: 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. προηκούσατε; to hear 


Acov ; 


537 


πρόβατον 


before: τὴν ἐλπίδα, the hoped for salvation, before its 
realization, Col. i. 5 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. (Hdt., Xen., 
Plat., Dem., al.) * 

προ-αμαρτάνω: pf. ptep. προημαρτηκώς ; to sin before: 
οἱ προημαρτηκότες, of those who before receiving baptism 
had been guilty of the vices especially common among 
the Gentiles, 2 Co. xii. 21 ; xiii. 2; in this same sense also 
in Justin Martyr, apol. i. c. 61; Clem. Al. strom. 4, 12; 
cf. Lücke, Conjectanea Exeget. I. (Gótting. 1837) p. 14 
sqq. [but on the ref. of the zpo- see Meyer on 2 Co. Il. cc. 
(R. V. heretofore)]. (Hdian. 3, 14, 18 [14 ed. Bekk.]; 
eccl. writ.) * 

προ-αύλιον, -ov, Td, (πρό and αὐλή), fure-court, porch z 
Mk. xiv. 68 [(cf. Pollux 1, 8, 77 and see αὐλή, 2) ].* 

mpo-Batvo : pf. ptep. προβεβηκώς ; 2 aor. ptcp. mpoBas ; 
fr. Hom. down; to go forwards, go on, [cf. πρό, d. a-]: 
prop. on foot, Mt.iv. 21; Mk.i.19; trop. ἐν rais ἡμέραις 
προβεβηκώς, advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36, (see 
ἡμέρα, fin. ; τὴν ἡλικίαν, 2 Mace. iv. 40; vi. 18; Hdian. 2, 
7, 1 [5 ed. Bekk.]; τῇ ἡλικίᾳ, Lys. p. 169, 37; [Diod. 12, 
18]; rais ἡλικίαις, Diod. 13, 89; [cf. L. and S. s. v. I. 2]).* 

προ-βάλλω ; 2 aor. προέβαλον ; fr. Hom. down; to throw 
forward [ef. πρό, d. a.]; of trees, to shoot forth, put out, 
sc. leaves; to germinate, [cf. B. $130, 4; W. 593 (552)] 
(with καρπόν added, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 19; Epict. 1, 15,. 
7): Lk. xxi. 30; to push forward, thrust forward, put 
forward: twa, Acts xix. 33.* 

προβατικός, -7, -όν, (πρόβατον), pertaining to sheep: T 
προβατική, sc. πύλη (which is added in Neh. iii. 1, 32; xii. 
39, for {N¥T Iw), the sheep-gate, Jw. v. 2 [(W. 592 
(551) ; B. $123, 8) ; but some (as Meyer, Weiss, Milligan 
and Moulton, cf. Treg. mrg. and see Tdf.’s note ad lor: ) 
would connect zpof. with the uannodistely following 
κολυμβήθρα (pointed as a dat.) ; see Tdf.u. s.; WH. App. 
ad loc. On the supposed locality see B. D. s. v. Sheep 
Gate (Sheep-Market) 1" 

προβάτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of the foll. word), a little 
sheep: Jn. xxi. [16 T Tr mrg. WH txt.], 17 T Tr WH 
txt. (Hippocr., Arstph., Plat.) * 

πρό-βατον, -ov, τό, (fr. προβαίνω, prop. ‘that which walks 
forward’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for tX, then for 
ny, sometimes for $25 and awd (a lab) prop. any 
four-footed, tame animal accustomed to graze, small cattle 
(opp. to large cattle, horses, etc.), most com. a sheep or 
a goat; but esp. a sheep, and so always in the N. T.: Mt. 
vii. 15; x. 16; xii. 11 sq.; Mk. vi. 34; Lk. xv. 4, 6; Jn. ii. 
14 sq.; x. 1-4, 11 sq.; Acts viii. 32 (fr. Is. liii. 7) ; 1 Pet. 
ii. 25; Rev. xviii. 13; πρόβατα σφαγῆς, sheep destined 
for the slaughter, Ro. viii. 36. metaph. πρόβατα, sheep, 
is used of the followers of any master: Mt. xxvi. 31 and 
Mk. xiv. 27, (fr. Zech. xiii. 7) ; of mankind, who as need- 
ing salvation obey the injunctions of him who provides 
it and leads them to it; so of the followers of Christ: 
Jn. x. 7 sq. 15 sq. 26sq.; xxi. 16[R GL Trtxt. WH mrg.], 
17 [RG L ΜῊ mrg.]; Heb. xiii. 20; τὰ πρόβατα ἀπο- 
AeAóra (see ἀπόλλυμι, fin.), Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; τὰ πρόβ. 
in distinction from τὰ ἐρίφια, are good men as distin- 
guished fr. bad, Mt. xxv. 33. 


προβιβάξζω 


προ-βιβάζω: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. προεβίβασαν ; 1 aor. 
pass. ptep. fem. προβιβασθεῖσα; 1. prop. to cause to 
go forward, to lead forward, to bring forward, drag for- 
ward: Acts xix. 33 R G [(fr. Soph. down)]. 2. 
metaph. i. q. προτρέπω, to incite, instigate, urge forward, 
set on; to induce by persuasion: Mt. xiv. 8 (εἴς ru Xen. 
mem. 1, 5,1; Plat. Prot. p. 328 b.; [in Deut. vi. 7 Sept. 
with an accus. of the thing (and of the pers.) 1. q. to 
teach ])-* 

προ-βλέπω : to foresee (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 13; Dion. 
118]. antt. 11, 20); 1 aor. mid. ptep. προβλεψάμενος ; to 
provide: τὶ περί twos, Heb. xi. 40 [W. $ 38, 6; B. 194 
(167)].* 

προ-γίνομαι: pf. ptep. zpoyeyovós ; to become or arise 
before, happen before, (so fr. Hdt. down [in Hom. (Il. 18, 
525) to come forward into view]): προγεγονότα ἁμαρτή- 
para, sins previously committed, Ro. iii. 25.* 

προ-γινώσκω; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. προέγνω ; pf. pass. 
ptep. προεγνωσμένος ; to have knowledge of beforehand ; 
to foreknow : sc. ταῦτα, 2 Pet. iii. 17, cf. 14, 16; τινά, Acts 
xxvi. 55 ods προέγνω, whom he (God) foreknew, se. that 
they would love him, or (with reference to what follows) 
whom he foreknew to be fit to be conformed to the like- 
ness of his Son, Ro. viii. 29 (τῶν εἰς αὐτὸν [Χριστὸν] 
πιστεύειν προεγνωσμένων, Justin M. dial. c. Tr. c. 42; 
προγινώσκει [ὁ θεός] τινας ἐκ μετανοίας σωθήσεσθαι μέλ- 
λοντας, id. apol. i. 28); ὃν προέγνω, whose character he 
clearly saw beforehand, Ro. xi. [1 Lchm. in br.], 2, 
(against those who in the preceding passages fr. Ro. 
explain προγινώσκειν as meaning to predestinate, cf. 
Meyer, Philippi, Van Hengel); προεγνωσμένου, sc. ὑπὸ 
τοῦ θεοῦ (foreknown by God, although not yet ‘made 
manifest’ to men), 1 Pet. i. 20. (Sap. vi. 14; viii. 8; 
xviii. 6; Eur., Xen., Plat., Hdian., Philostr., al.) * 

πρότ-γνωσις, -eos, 7, (προγινώσκω) ; 1. foreknowl- 
edge: Judith ix. 6; xi. 19, (Plut., Leian., Hdian.). D 
Sorethought, pre-arrangement, (see προβλέπωγ: 1 Pet. i. 2; 
Acts ii. 23, [but cf. προγινώσκω, and see Mey. on Acts 1.c.].* 

Trpó-yovos, -ov, ὁ, (mpoyivouac), born before, older: Hom. 
'Od. 9, 221; plur. ancestors, Lat. majores, (often so by 
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down) : ἀπὸ προγόνων, in the spirit 
and after the manner received from (my) forefathers 
(ef. ἀπό, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59* bot.], 2 Tim. i.3; used of a 
mother, grandparents, and (if such survive) great-grand- 
parents, 1 Tim. v. 4 [A. V. parents] (of surviving ances- 
tors also in Plato, legg. 11 p. 932 init.).* 

προ-γράφω: 1 aor. προέγραψα; 2 aor. pass. προεγράφην; 
pf. pass. ptep. mpoyeypappeévos ; 1. to write before 
(of time): Ro. xv. 4^ R GL txt. T Tr WH, 4° Rec. ; Eph. 
lll. 3; οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμ. εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα, of old set 
forth or designated beforehand (in the Scriptures of the 
O. T. and the prophecies of Enoch) unto this condemna- 
tion, Jude 4. 2. to depict or portray openly [cf. πρό, 
d. a.]: ois κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς mpoeypadn ἐν 
ὑμῖν [but ἐν bp. is dropped by 61, T Tr WH] ἐσταυρωμέ- 
vos, before whose eyes was portrayed the picture of Jesus 
Christ erucified (the attentive contemplation of which 
picture ought to have been a preventive against that 


538 


fore; i.e. a. 





προενάρχομαι 


bewitchment), i. e. who were taught most definitely and 
plainly concerning the meritorious efficacy of the death 
of Christ, Gal. iii. 1. Since the simple γράφειν is often 
used of painters, and zpoypádew certainly signifies 
also to write before the eyes of all who can read (Plut. 
Demetr. 46 fin. προγράφει τις αὐτοῦ mpd τῆς σκηνῆς τὴν 
τοῦ Οἰδίποδος ἀρχήν), l see no reason why προγράφειν 
may not mean (0 depict (paint, portray) before the eyes; 
[ R. V. openly set forth]. Cf. Hofmann ad loc. [Farrar, 
St. Paul, ch. xxiv., vol. i. 470 note; al. adhere to the 
meaning to placard, write up publicly, see Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc.; al. al.; see Meyer ].* 

πρό-δηλος. -ov, (πρό [d. a. and] δῆλος), openly evident, 
known to all, manifest: 1 Tim. v. 24 sq.; neut. foll. by ὅτι; 
Heb. vii. 14. [(From Soph. and Hdt. down.)]* 

προ-δίδωμι : 1 aor. 3 pers, sing. προέδωκεν; 1. to 
give before, give first: Ro. xi. 35 (Xen., Polyb., Aris- 
tot.). 2. to betray: Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Plat., al. ; 
τὴν πατρίδα, 4 Mace. iv. 1.* 

προ-δότης, -ov, 6, (προδίδωμι, 2), a betrayer, traitor: Lk. 
vi. 16; Acts vii.52; 2 Tim. iii.4. (From [Aeschyl.], Hdt. 
down; 2 Mace. v. 15; 3 Macc. iii. 24.) * 

πρό-δρομος, -ov, 6, 7), (προτρέχω, mpodpapeiv), a forerun- 
ner (esp. one who is sent before to take observations or 
act as spy, a scout, a light-armed soldier; Aeschyl., Hdt., 
'Thuc., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; cf. Sap. xii. 8); one who 
comes in advance to a place whither the rest are to follow: 
Heb. vi. 20.* 

προ-εῖδον, [fr. Hom. down], 2 aor. of the verb προοράω, 
to foresee: Acts ii. 31 [(here WH προιδών without diaer- 
esis; cf. I, v fin.)]; Gal. iii. 8.* , 

προ-εῖπον [2 aor. act. fr. an unused pres. (see εἶπον, 
init.)], 1 pers. plur. προείπομεν (1 Th. iv. 6 Grsb.), mpo- 
εἰπαμεν (ibid. RL'T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 1047); 
pf. προείρηκα; pf. pass. προείρημαι (see εἶπον, p. 181* top) ; 
fr. Hom. [(by tmesis) ; Hdt. and Plat.] down; to say be- 
to say in what precedes, to say above: 
foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. vii. 3; foll. by direct disc., [ Heb. iv. 7 
LT Tr WH txt]; x. 15 [Rece.]- b. to say before 
i.e. heretofore, formerly: foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal. 
v. 21; foll. by direct dise., Gal. i. 9; [Heb. iv. 7 WH 
mrg.]: καθὼς προείπαμεν ὑμῖν, 1 Th. iv. 6; [in the pas- 
sages under this head (exc. Gal. i. 9) some would give 
mpo- the sense of openly, plainly, (cf. R. V. mrg.) ]. c: 
to say beforehand i.e. before the event; so used in ref. to 
prophecies: τί, Acts i. 16; τὰ ῥήματα τὰ προειρημένα ὑπό 
twos, Jude 17; 2 Pet. iii. 2; προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα, Mk. 
xiii. 23; se. αὐτό, Mt. xxiv. 25; foll. by direct discourse, 
'Ro:dx429 

προ-είρηκα, see προεῖπον. 

προ-ελπίζω : pf. ptep. ace. plur. προηλπικότας ; to hope 
before: ἔν run, to repose hope in a person or thing before 
the event confirms it, Eph.i.12. (Posidipp. ap. Athen. 
9 p. 377 c., Dexipp., Greg. Nyss.) * 

mrpo-ev-&ápxop.av: 1 aor. mpoernpEdunv; to make a begin- 
ning before: 2 Co. viii. 6; τί, ib. 10 [here al. render ‘to 
make a beginning before others,’ ‘to be the first to make a 
beginning, (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.* 


προεπαγγέλλω 


προ-επ-αγγέλλω : 1 aor. mid. προεπηγγειλάμην ; pf. ptep. 
προεπηγγελμένος ; to announce before (Dio Cass.) ; mid. 
to promise before: τί, Ro. i. 2,and L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ix. 
5, ([Arr. 6, 27, 1]; Dio Cass. 42, 32; 46, 40).* 

apo-pxopar: impf. προηρχόμην ; fut. προελεύσομαι ; 2 
aor. προῆλθον; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to go forward, go 
on: μικρόν, a little, Mt. xxvi. 39 [here T Tr WH mrg. 
προσελθών (q. v. in a.)]; Mk.xiv. 35 [Tr WH mrg. προσ- 
ελθ.} ; w.an ace. of the way, Acts xii. 10 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 
18; Plato, rep. 1 p. 328 e.; 10 p. 616 b» 2. to go 
before ; i.e. a. to go before, precede, (locally; Germ. 
vorangehen): ἐνώπιόν twos, Lk. i. 17 [(ἔμπροσθέν τινος, 
Gen. xxxiii. 3), WH mrg. προσέρχ- q. v. in 3.]; τινός, to 


precede one, Lk. xxii. 47 Ree. [(Judith ii. 19)]; rud, | 


ibid. G LT Tr WH (not soconstrued in prof. writ.; cf. B. 
144 (126); Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 70; [W. $52, 
4, 13]; but in Lat. we find antecedere, anteire, praeire, 
aliquem, and in Grk. writ. προθεῖν τινα; see mponyéopat) ; 
to outgo, outstrip, (Lat. praecurrere, antevertere aliquem ; 
for which the Greeks say φθάνειν τινά), Mk. vi. 33. — b. 
to go before, i.e. (set out) in advance of another (Germ. 
vorausgehen): Acts xx. 5 [Tr WH txt. προσελθ.] ; eis 
[L Tr πρὸς ὑμᾶς, unto (as far as to) you, 2 Co. ix. 5; ἐπὶ 
τὸ πλοῖον, to the ship, Acts xx. 13 [Tr WH mrg. προσ- 
ελθόντες ]-* 

προ-ετοιμάζω: 1 aor. zporro(uaga ; to prepare before, to 
make ready beforehand : ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν, i. e. for 
whom he appointed glory beforehand (i.e. from eter- 
nity), and accordingly rendered them fit to receive it, 
Ro. ix. 23; to prepare beforehand in mind and purpose, 
i. 6. to decree, Eph. ii. 10, where ois stands by attraction 
for ἅ [cf. W. 149 (141); B. § 143, 8]1. (Is. xxviii. 24; 
Sap. ix. 8; Hdt., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Geop., al.) * 

προ-ευαγγελίζομαι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προηυαγγελίσατο; 
to announce or promise glad tidings beforehand (viz. be- 
fore the event by which the promise is made good) : Gal. 
iii. 8. (Philo de opif. mund. $9; mutat. nom. $29; By- 
zant. writ.) * 

mpo-éx o [(fr. Hom. down)]: pres. mid. 1 pers. plur. zpo- 
exoueba; to have before or in advance of another, to have 
pre-eminence over another, to excel, to surpass; often so 
in prof. auth. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down; mid. to excel to 
one’s advantage (cf. Kühner § 375, 1); to surpass in ex- 
cellences which can be passed to one’s credit: Ro. iii. 9; 
it does not make against this force of the middle in the 
present passage that the use is nowhere else met with, 
nor is there any objection to an interpretation which has 
commended itself to a great many and which the con- 
text plainly demands. [But on this difficult word see 
esp. Jas. Morison, Crit? Expos. of the Third Chap. of 
Rom. p. 93 sqq-; Gifford in the * Speaker's Com.’ p. 96; 
W.§ 38, 6; $ 39 fin., cf. p. 554 (516).]* 

προ-ηγέομαι, -odpar; to go before and show the way, to 
go before and lead, to go before as leader, (Hdt. 2, 48; 
often in Xen.; besides in Arstph., Polyb., Plut., Sept., 
al): τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι, one going before 
another as an example of deference [ A. V. in honor pre- 
JSerring one another (on the dat. cf. W. $ 31, 6 a.) ], Ro. 


539 





προΐστημι 


xii. 10. The Grk. writ. connect this verb now with the 
dat. (Arstph. Plut. 1195; Polyb. 6, 53, 8; ete.), now with 
the gen. (Diod. 1, 87); see προέρχομαι: 2 ἃ." 

πρόθεσις, -ews, 7, (προτίθημι) ; 1. the setting forth 
of a thing, placing of it in view, (Plat., Dem., Plut.) ; o£ 
ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως (Vulg. panes propositionis), the show- 
bread, Sept. for 0337 ür? (Ex. xxxv. 13; xxxix. 18 
(xxxviii. 36); 1 K. vii. 48 (34)), and na3yn ond (1 
Chr. ix. 32; xxiii. 29); twelve loaves of wheaten bread, 
corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel, 
which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and, 
separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a 
table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of 
the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple (cf. Winer, 
RWB. s. v. Schaubrode; Roskoff in Schenkel v. p. 213 
sq.; [Edersheim, The Temple, ch. ix. p. 152 sqq. ; BB. 
DD.]): Mt. xii.4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4, (οἱ ἄρτοι τοῦ προσ- 
rov, sc. θεοῦ, Neh. x. 33; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); 
ἡ πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων, (the rite of) the setting forth of 
the loaves, Heb. ix. 2. 2. a purpose (2 Macc. iii. 8; 
[ Aristot. ], Polyb., Diod., Plut.): Acts xxvii. 13; Ro. viii. 
285 ix. Τῆς ἘΡΗΝῚ ΤΠ τ 115 2. c T'imt199 7TH προ τὴ 
προθέσει τῆς καρδίας, with purpose of heart, Acts xi. 
23.* 

προ-θέσμιος, -a, -ov, (zpo [q. v. in d. 8.] and θεσμός fixed, 
appointed), set beforehand, appointed or determined be- 


Jorchand, pre-arranged, (Leian. Nigr. 27); ἡ προθεσμία, 


sc. ἡμέρα, the day previously appointed; univ. the pre-ap- 
pointed time: Gal iv. 2. (Lys., Plat., Dem., Aeschin., 
Diod., Philo — cf. Siegfried, Philo p. 113, Joseph., Plut., 
al; eccles. writ.; cf. Kypke and Hilgenfeld on Gal. 
1A) 

προθυμία, -as, 7, (πρόθυμος), fr. Hom. down; als 
zeal, spirit, eagerness ; 2. inclination; readiness of 
mind: so Acts xvii. 11; 2 Co. viii. 11 sq. 19; ix. 2.* 

πρόθυμος, -ov, (πρό and θυμός), fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. 
down, ready, willing: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; neut. τὸ 
πρόθυμον, i. q. 7j προθυμία : Ro. i. 15, as in Thue. 3, 82; 
Plat. lege. 9 p. 859b.; Eur. Med. vs. 178; Joseph. antt. 
4, 8,13; Hdian. 8,3, 15 [6 ed. Bekk.] (on which cf. 
Irmisch) ; 3 Macc. v. 20." 

προθύμως, adv., fr. Hdt. and Aeschyl. down, willingly, 
with alacrity: 1 Pet. v. 2.* 

πρόϊμος, see πρώϊμος. 

προ-ΐστημι : 2 aor. inf. προστῆναι; pf. ptep. προεστώς; 
pres. mid. προΐσταμαι; fr. Hom. Il. 4, 156 down; 1. 
in the trans. tenses to set or place before; to set over. 2. 
in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act. and in the pres. and impf. 
mid. a. to be over, to superintend, preside over, [ A.V. 
rule), (so fr. Hdt. down): 1 Tim. v. 17; with a gen. of 
the pers. or thing over which one presides, 1 Th. v. 12; 
1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. 12. b. to be a protector or guar- 
dian; to give aid, (Eur., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb.): Ro. 
xii. 8 [(al. with A.V. to rule; cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; Stuart, 
Com. excurs. xii.) J. C. to care for, give aitention to: 
w. a gen. of the thing, καλῶν ἔργων, Tit. iii. 8, 14; for 
exx. fr. prof. writ. see Kypke and Losner; [some (cf. R.V. 
mre.) would render these two exx. profess honest occu- 


προκαλέω 


pations (see ἔργον, 1); but cf. ἔργον. 3 p. 248> mid. and 
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad 1. c.].* 

προ-καλέω, -@: pres. mid. ptep. προκαλούμενος ; to call 
forth [cf. mpd, d. a.]; Mid. to call forth to one’s self, esp. 
to challenge to a combat or contest with one; often so fr. 
Hom. down; hence to provoke, to irritate: Gal. v. 26 [ (eie 
ὠμότητα κ. ὀργήν, Hdian. 7, 1, 11, 4 ed. Bekk.) ].* 

προ-κατ-αγγέλλω : 1 aor. προκατήγγειλα ; pf. pass. ptep. 
mpokarnyyeApevos ; to announce beforehand (that a thing 
will be): of prophecies, — foll. by an ace. with inf. Acts 
iii. 18; τί, Acts iii. 24 Rec.; περί twos, Acts vii. 52. To 
pre-announce in the sense of to promise : ri, pass. 2 Co. ix. 
5 Ree. (Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 3; 2, 9,4; eccles. writ.) * 

προ-κατ-αρτίζω : 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. plur. προκαταρ- 
τίσωσι; to prepare [ A. V.make up] beforehand: τί, 2 Co. 
ix. 5. (Hippoer.; eccles. writ.) * 

πρό-κειμαι ; (πρό [q. v. d. a.] and κεῖμαι) ; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. prop. to lie or be placed before (a person 
or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2: 
to be set before, i. e. a. to be placed before the eyes, 
to lie in sight; to stand forth: with a pred. nom., δεῖγμα, 
as an example, Jude 7 (καλὸν ὑπόδειγμά σοι πρόκειται, Jo- 
seph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). b. i. q. to be appointed, destined : 
προκειμένη ἐλπίς, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb. 
vi. 18; used of those things which by any appointment 
are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one; 
80 προκείμενος ἀγών, Heb. xii. 1; προκειμ. χαρά, the des- 
tined joy (see ἀντί, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase rà ἄθλα προ- 
κεῖσθαι occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. down; cf. 
Bleek, Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be 
there, be present, be at hand, (sothat it can become actual 
or available): 2 Co. viii. 12.* 

προ-κηρύσσω: 1 aor. ptep. προκηρύξας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
προκεκηρυγμένος 5 1. to announce or proclaim by 
herald beforehand (Xen. resp. Lac. 11, 2; Isae. p. 60, 2; 
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.). 2. univ. fo announce 
beforehand (of the herald himself, Soph. El. 684) : "I- 
σοῦν Χριστόν, i. 6. his advent, works, and sufferings, pass. 
Acts iii. 20 Rec.; ri, Acts xiii. 24 (Ἱερεμίας τὰ μέλλοντα 
τῇ πόλει δεινὰ προεκήρυξεν, Joseph. antt. 10, 5, 1).* 

προ-κοπή, -7s, ἡ, (προκόπτω, q. v-), progress, advance- 
ment: Phil. i. 12, 25; 1 Tim.iv. 15. (Polyb., Diod., Jo- 
seph., Philo, al.; rejected by the Atticists, οἵ. Phrynich. 
ed. Lob. p. 85; [Sir. li. 17; 2 Mace. viii. 8].) * 

προ-κόπτω : impf. προέκοπτον ; fut. προκόψω; 1 aor. 
mpoexowa; to beat forward ; 1. to lengthen out by 
hammering (as asmith forges metals) ; metaph. to promote, 
Sorward, further: Hdt., Eur., Thuc., Xen., al. 2 
fr. Polyb. on intransitively [cf. B. 145 (127); W. 251 
(236)], to go forward, advance, proceed; of time: ἡ νὺξ 
mpoexower, the night is advanced [ A. V. is far spent], (day 
is at hand), Ro. xiii. 12 (Joseph. b. j. 4, 4, 6; [προκο- 
πτούσης τῆς ὥρας] Charit. 2, 3, 3 [p. 38, 1 ed. Reiske; τὰ 
τῆς νυκτός, ib. 2, 3, 4]; ἡ ἡμέρα προκόπτει, Just. Mart. 
dial. e. Tryph. p. 277 d.; Lat. procedere is used in the 
same way, Livy 28,15; Sallust. Jug. 21, 52, 109). met- 
aph. to increase, make progress: with a dat. of the thing 
in which one grows, Lk. ii. 52 [not Tdf.] (Diod. 11, 87) ; 


540 





προοράω 


ἐν with a dat. of the thing, ibid. Tdf.; Gal. i. 14, (Diod. 
[excerpt. de virt. et vitiis] p. 554, 69; Antonin. 1, 17); 
ἐπὶ πλεῖον, further, 2 Tim. iii. 9 (Diod. 14, 98) ; ἐπὶ πλεῖον 
ἀσεβείας, 2 Tim. ii. 16; ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον, will grow worse, 
i.e. will make progress in wickedness, 2 Tim. iii. 13 
(τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων πάθη mpoükomre καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἐπὶ τὸ 
χεῖρον, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 1).* 

πρό-κριμα, -ros, τό, (πρό and κρίμα), an opinion formed 
before the facts are known, a pre-judgment, a prejudice, 
(Vulg. praejudicium) : 1 Tim. v. 21 (anonym. in Suidas 
s.v.; [Athan. apol. c. Arian. 25 (i. 288 a. ed. Migne); 
Justinian cod. 10, 11, 8, $ €]).* 

mpo-kvpóo, -@: pf. pass. ptep. προκεκυρωμένος ; to sanc- 
tion, ratify, or establish beforehand: Gal. iii.17. ([Euseb. 
praep. evang. 10, 4 (ii. p. 70, 3 ed. Heinichen)]; Byzant. 
writ.) ἢ 

mpo-AapBávo; 2 aor. προέλαβον ; 1 aor. pass. subjunc. 
3 pers. sing. προληφθῇ [-λημφθῇ LT Tr WH; see s. v. 
M, u]; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to take before: ri, 1 Co. 
xi. 21. 2. to anticipate, to forestall: προέλαβε pupi- 
σαι, she has anticipated the anointing, [hath anointed 
beforehand], Mk. xiv. 8; cf. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 54, 
4. 3. to take one by forestalling (him i. e. before he 
can flee or conceal his crime), i. e. surprise, detect, (Sap. 
xvii. 16) : τινὰ ἐν παραπτώματι, pass. Gal. vi. 1; cf. Winer, 
Ep. ad Gal. 1. ον" 

mpo-Aéyo ; impf. προέλεγον ; to say beforehand, to pre- 
dict, (so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) : 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal. 
v. 21; 1 Th. iii. 4; [some (see R. V. mrg.) would give 
mpo- the sense of plainly in all these exx.; cf. L. and S. 
s. v. II. 2, and see πρό, d. a. fin. ].* 

προ-μαρτύρομαι ; 1. antetestor (in the old lexi- 
cons). 2. to testify beforehand, i. e. to make known 
by prediction: 1 Pet. i. 11; so also [Basil. Seleuc. 32 a. 
(Migne vol. Ixxxv.) and] by Theodorus Metochita (c. 75, 
misc. p. 504) — a writ. of the fourteenth century.* 

προ-μελετάω, -à; to meditate beforehand: Lk. xxi. 14 
(Arstph., Xen., Plato).* 

προ-μεριμνάω ; to be anxious beforehand: Mk. xiii. 11 
(Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 9, 72; [Hippol. ref. haer. 6, 52 
p. 330, 69; 8, 15 p. 432, 3]).* 

mpo-voew, -; pres. mid. προνοοῦμαι; fr. Hom. down; 
1. to perceive before, foresee. 2. to provide, think 
of beforehand: τινός (see Matthiae $348, vol. ii. p. 821 
[but cf. 8879 p. 862]; Kühner $419, 1 b. ii. p. 825 ; [Jelf 
§ 496]; W. § 30, 10c.), to provide for one, 1 Tim. v. 8 
(where T Tr txt. WH mrg. zpovoeirat) ; περί τινος, Sap. 
vi. 8. Mid. with an ace. of the thing, i. q. to take thought 


for, care for a thing: Ro. xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21 (where 


LT Tr WH have adopted zpovdbüpev).* 

πρόνοια, -as, 7j, (mpdvoos), fr. [Aeschyl., Soph.], Hat. 
down, forethought, provident care: Acts xxiv. 2 (3) [A. V. 
providence]; ποιοῦμαι πρόνοιάν twos, to make provision Jor 
a thing (see ποιέω, I. 3 p. 526* top), Ro. xiii. 14.* 

mpo-opáo, -; pf. ptep. προεωρακώς ; impf. mid. (Acts 
ii. 25) mpowpopny, and without augm. (see ὁμοιόω, init.) 
προορώμην L'T Tr WH; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to see 
before (whether as respects place or time) : τινά, Acts 


προορίζω 


xxi. 29. 2. Mid. (rare use) to keep before one’s eyes: 
metaph. τινά, with ἐνώπιόν μου added, to be mindful of 
one always, Acts ii. 25 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8.* 

προ-ορίζω: 1 aor. προώρισα; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. mpowpt- 
obévres; to predetermine, decide beforehand, Vulg. [exc. 
in Acts] praedestino, [R. V. to foreordain]: in the N. T. 
of God decreeing from eternity, foll. by an acc. with the 
inf. Acts iv. 28; τί, with the addition of πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων, 
1 Co. ii. 7; τινά, with a pred. acc., to foreordain, appoint 
beforehand, Ro. viii. 29 sq. ; τινὰ εἴς τι, one to obtain a 
thing. Eph. i. 5; προορισθέντες sc. κληρωθῆναι, Eph. i. 11. 
(Heliod. and eccl. writ. [Ignat. ad Eph. tit.]) * 

προ-πάσχω: 2 aor. ptep. προπαθόντες ; to suffer before : 
1Th.ii.2. (Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plat., al.) * 

προ-πάτωρ, -opos, 6, (πατήρ), a forefather, founder of a 
family or nation: Ro. iv.1 L T Tr WH.  (Pind., Hdt., 
Soph., Eur., Plat., Dio Cass. 44, 37; Lcian. al; Plut. 
consol. ad Apoll. c. 10; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4; b. j. 5, 9,4, 
Ev. Nicod. 21. 24. 25 sq. ; eccl. writ.) * 

προ-πέμπω ; impf. προέπεμπον; 1 aor. act. προέπεμψα ; 
1 aor. pass. προεπέμφθην;: fr. Hom. down; 1. to send 
before. 2. to send forward, bring on the way, ac- 
company or escort: twa, 1 Co. xvi. 6, 11, [al. associate 
these exx. with the group at the close]; with ἐκεῖ (for 
ἐκεῖσε) added, Ro. xv. 24; eis with an acc. of place, Acts 
xx. 38; 2 Co. i. 16 [here R. V. set forward (see below) ]; 
ἕως ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts xxi. 5. to set one forward, fit 
him out with the requisites for his journey: Acts xv. 3 
[al. associate this ex. with the preceding]; Tit. iii. 13; 
3 Jn. 6; 1 Macc. xii. 4, cf. 1 Esdr. iv. 47.* 

προπετής, -ἐς, (πρό and πέτω i. e. πίπτω) ; 1. fall- 
ing forwards, headlong, sloping, precipitous: Pind. Nem. 
6, 107; Xen. r. eq. 1, 8; al. 2. precipitate, rash, 
reckless: Acts xix. 36; 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Prov. x. 14; xiii. 
3; Sir. ix. 18; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1; and often in Grk. 
writ.).* 

προ-πορεύω: 1 fut. mid. προπορεύσομαι; to send before, 
to make to precede, (Ael. nat. an. 10, 22 [var.]) ; mid. to 
go before, to precede, [see πρό, d. a-]: τινός (on which cen. 
see W. § 52, 2 c.), to go before one, of a leader, Acts vii. 
40; πρὸ προσώπου τινός (after the Hebr., Ex. xxxii. 34; 
Deut. iii. 18; ix. 3), of a messenger or a herald, Lk. i. 76 ; 
(of the van of an army, 1 Maec. ix. 11; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 
23; Polyb.). [Cf. ἔρχομαι, fin.]* 

πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epie mpori, from πρό and the 
adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius 
$381]); it is joined 

L with the AccusATIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denot- 
ing direction towards a thing, or position and state 
looking towards a thing (W. $49 h. p.404 (378)); it is 
used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a 
movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. 
after verbs of going, departing, running, com- 
ing, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 
17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xviii. 21; 
ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [L Tr mrg. ἀπέρχ.7; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. 
xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc. ; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, 
Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the vs. ; Trreads 


541 





πρός 


mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 b.. 
below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ 
sub fin.) ]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co. ii. 3; 
xvi. 10; διαπεράω, Lk. xvi. 26 ; ἐγγίζω, Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xix. 
29; εἰσέρχομαι, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 28; Acts χ. 8; [πρὸς r. 
Λυδίαν, into the house of L. Acts xvi. 40 (Rec. eis)]; 
ete.; Rev. iii. 20; εἰσπορεύομαι, Acts xxviii. 30; ἐκπορεύ- 
opat, Mt. iii.5; Mk. i. 5; ἐξέρχομαι, Jn. xviii. 29, 38; 2 Co. 
viii. 17; Heb. xiii. 13; ἐπιστρέφω, to turn (one’s self), 
Actsix. 40; 2 Co. iii. 16; 1 Th. i. 9; ἐπισυνάγεσθαι, Mk. 
i. 33; ἔρχομαι, Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15, and often; ἥκω, Jn. vi. 
37; Acts xxviii. 23 [Rec.]; xaraBatve, Acts x. 21; xiv. 
11; Rev. xii. 12; μεταβαίνω, Jn. xiii. 1; ὀρθρίζω, Lk. xxi. 
38; παραγίνομαι, Mt. iii. 13; Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; xi. 
6; [xxii. 52 Tdf.]; πορεύομαι, Mt.x. 6; Lk. xi. 5; Jn. xiv. 
12, etc. ; συνάγεσθαι, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi. 
30; vii. 15; συντρέχειν, Acts iii. 11; ὑπάγω, Mt. xxvi. 18; 
Mk. v. 19; Jn. vii. 33; xiii. 3; xvi. 5, 10, 16 [T Tr WH 
om. L br. the cl.], 17; κατευθύνειν τὴν ὁδόν, 1 Th. iii. 11; 
also after [kindred] nouns: εἴσοδος, 1 ΤῊ. i. 9; ii. 1; προσ- 
aywyn, Eph. ii. 18. after verbs of moving, lead- 
ing, sending, drawing, bringing, directing: 
ἄγω, Mk. xi. 7[ RL]; Lk. xviii. 40; Jn.i.42 (43) ; [xviii. 
13L T Tr WH]; Acts ix. 27, etc.; ἀπάγω, Mt. xxvi. 57 
[R. V. to the house of C. (cf. Acts xvi. 40 above)]; Mk. 
xiv. 53; Jn. xviii. 13 [RG]; Acts xxiii. 17; 1 Co. xii. 
2; [ἐξάγω ἕως πρός (see ews, IT. 2 c.), Lk. xxiv. 50 L txt. 
T Tr WH); κατασύρω, Lk. xii. 58; ápzá(o, Rev. xii. 5; 
ἑλκύω, Jn. xii. 32; παραλαμβάνω, Jn. xiv. 3; φέρω, Mk. i. 
32; ix. 17, 19, 20; [xi. 7 TTr WH]; πέμπω, Lk. vii. 6 
[not T WH], 19; Acts xxv. 21[L T Tr WH avaz.], etc. 
(see πέμπω) ; ἀναπέμπω, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15 ; ἀποστέλλω, Mt. 
xxiii. 34, ete. (see ἀποστέλλω, 1 b. and d.) ; στρέφομαι, 
Lk. vii. 44 ; xxiii. 28. after verbs of falling: πίπτειν 
πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινός, Mk. v. 22; vii. 25; [Actsv.10 LT 
Tr WH]; Rev. i.17. after other verbs and substan- 
tives with which the idea of direction is connected: as 
ἐπιστολὴ πρός τινα, Acts ix. 2; xxii. 5; 2 Co. iii. 1; ἐντολή, 
Acts xvii. 15 ; ἀνάδειξις, Lk. i. 80; κάμπτω τὰ γόνατα, Eph. 
iii. 14; ἐκπετάννυμι tas χεῖρας, Ro. x. 21 (fr. Is. Ixv. 2); 
πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον, face (turned) to face, i. e. in 
immediate presence, 1 Co. xiii. 12 (after the Hebr., Gen. 
xxxii. 30; Judges vi. 22); στόμα πρὸς στόμα, mouth 
(turned) to mouth, i. e. in each other’s presence, 2 Jn. 
12; 3 Jn. 14, (see στόμα, 1) ; λαλεῖν πρὸς τὸ ois, the mouth 
being put to the ear, Lk. xii. 8. after verbs of adding, 
joining to: προστιθέναι τινὰ πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας, to lay 
one unto, i.e. bury him by the side of, his fathers, Acts 
xiii. 36 (after the Hebr., 2 K. xxii. 20; Judg. ii. 10); 
θάπτειν τινὰ πρός τινα, Acts v.10. after verbs of saying 
(because speech is directed towards some one), invok- 
ing, swearing, testifying, making known: w. 
an ace. of the pers., ἀνοίγω τὸ στόμα, 2 Co. vi. 11; εἶπον, 
Lk. i. 13, and very often by Luke; Jn. ἵν. 48; vii. 3, etc. ; 
Heb. i. 13; λαλέω, Lk. i. 19, 55; ii. 18, ete.; 1 Th. ii. 2; 
Heb. v. 5; xi. 18; λέγω, Lk. v. 36, etc. ; Jn. ii. 3; iv. 15, 
etc.; Heb. vii. 21 ; φημί, Lk. xxii. 70; Acts ii. 38 [R GT; 
x. 98, etc. ; διαλέγομαι, Acts xxiv. 12; ἀποκρίνομαι, Lk. 


πρός 


iv. 4; Acts iii. 12; δέομαι, Acts viii. 24; Bodw, Lk. xviii. 
7 [R GL]; αἴρειν φωνήν, Acts iv. 24; εὔχομαι, 2 Co. xiii. 
75 ὄμνυμι, Lk. i. 78: μαρτύς εἶμι, Acts xiii. 31; xxii. 15; 
Snunyopew, Acts xii. 21; κατηγορέω, to accuse to, bring, as 
it were, to the judge by accusation, Jn. v. 45; eudavita, 
Acts xxiii. 22; γνωρίζεται, be made known unto, Phil. iv. 
6. also after [kindred] substantives [and phrases]: 
ἀπολογία, addressed unto one, Acts xxii. 1; λόγος, 2 Co. 
i. 18; λόγος παρακλήσεως, Acts xiii. 15; ὁ λόγος γίνεται 
πρός τινα, Jn. x. 35 (Gen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 11 ; xiii. 8; 
Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1); γίνεται φωνή, Acts vii. 31 Rec.; x. 
13, 15; γίνεται ἐπαγγελία, Acts xiii. 32 and Rec. in xxvi. 
6 [where L T Tr WH eis]; προσευχή, Ro. xv. 30; δέησις, 
Ro. x. 1; προσφέρειν δεήσεις, Heb. v. 7. πρὸς ἀλλήλους 
after ἀντιβάλλειν λόγους, Lk. xxiv. 17; διαλαλεῖν, Lk. vi. 
11; διαλέγεσθαι, Mk. ix. 34; διαλογίζεσθαι, Mk. viii. 16 ; 
εἰπεῖν, Lk. ii. 15 [(L mrg. T WH AaAeiv)]; xxiv. 32; Jn. 
xvi. 17; xix. 24; λέγειν, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. viii. 25; Jn. iv. 
33; Acts xxviii. 4; ὁμιλεῖν, Lk. xxiv. 145 συλλαλεῖν, Lk. 
iv. 36. πρὸς ἑαυτούς i. q. πρὸς ἀλλήλους : after συζητεῖν, 
ΜΚ. i. 27 [Τ WH txt. read simply αὐτούς (as subj.)]; ix. 
16; Lk. xxii. 23; εἰπεῖν, Mk. xii. 7; Jn. xii. 19; λέγειν, Mk. 
xvi. 3; ἀγανακτεῖν, [ R. V. had indignation among them- 
selves, saying], Mk. xiv. 4 T WH (cf. Tr) ; see 2 b. be- 
low. b. of a time drawing towards a given time 
[cf. f. below]: πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν, towards evening, Lk. 
xxiv. 29 (Gen. viii. 11; Zech. xiv. 7; Plato de rep. 1 p. 
328a.; Joseph. antt. 5, 4, 3; πρὸς ἡμέραν, Xen. anab. 4, 
5,21; Plato, conviv. p. 223 c.) ; [πρὸς σάββατον, Mk. xv. 
42 L Trtxt.]. c. metaph. of mental direction, with 
words denoting desires and emotions of the mind, to, 
towards: ἐνδεικνύειν πραὕὔτητα, Tit. iii. 2; μακροθυμεῖν, 1 
Th. v. 14; ἤπιος, 2 Tim. ii. 24 ; ἔχθρα, Lk. xxiii. 12; πεποί- 
θησιν ἔχειν, 2 Co. iii. 4; [ἐλπίδα ἔχ. Acts xxiv. 15 Tdf.]; 
πίστις, 1 Th. i. 8; παρρησία, 2 Co. vii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 21; v. 
14; with verbs signifying the mode of bearing one's self 
towards a pers., ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ ἀγαθόν, Gal. vi. 10; ποιεῖν 
τὰ αὐτά, Eph. vi. 9 (Xen. mem. 1,1,6). of a hostile 
direction, against; so after ἀνταγωνίζεσθαι, Heb. xii. 4 ; 
στῆναι, Eph. vi. 11; λακτίζειν, Acts ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14, 
(see κέντρον, 2) ; πάλη, Eph. vi. 12; μάχεσθαι, Jn. vi. 52 ; 
διακρίνομαι, Acts xi. 2; γογγυσμός, Acts vi. 1; βλασφημία, 
Rev. xiii. 6 ; πικραίνεσθαι, Col. iii. 19; ἔχειν τι, Acts xxiv. 
19; ἔχειν ζήτημα, xxv. 19; μομφήν, Col. iii. 13; πρᾶγμα, 
1 Co. vi. 1; λόγον (see λόγος, I. 6), Acts xix. 38; ἔχειν 
πρός τινα, to have something to bring against one [R. V. 
wherewith to answer], 2 Co. v. 12; τὰ [which Tr txt. WH 
om.] zpós rwa, the things to be said against one, Acts 
xxii. 30 [RG Tr WH; here may be added πρὸς πλη- 
σμονὴν σαρκός, against (1.e.to check) the indulgence of the 
Jlesh, Col. ii. 23 (see πλησμονήν]. d. of the issue 
or end to which anything tends or leads: ἡ ἀσθένεια οὐκ 
ἔστι πρὸς θάνατον, Jn. xi. 4; ἁμαρτάνειν, ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνα- 
τον, l Jn. v. 16 sq.; ἃ στρεβλοῦσι πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν 
ἀπώλειαν, 2 Pet. iii. 16; τὰ πρὸς τὴν εἰρήνην Sc. ὄντα, --- 
now, the things which tend to the restoration of peace 
[A.V. conditions of peace], Lk. xiv. 32; now, which tend 
to the attainment of safety [A.V. which belong unto 


542 


, 
πρὸς 


peace], Lk. xix. 42; τὰ mpis ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν, [ A. V. 
that pertain unto), 2 Pet. i. 35 πρὸς δόξαν τῷ θεῷ, 2 Co. i. 
20; τοῦ κυρίου, 2 Co. viii. 19. e. of an intended 
end or purpose: πρὸς νουθεσίαν τινός, 1 Co. x. 11; 
as other exx. add, Mt. xxvi. 12; Ro. iii. 26; xv. 2; 1 Co. 
vi. 5; vii. 35 ; xii. 7; xiv. 12, 20; xv. 34; 2 Co. iv. 6; vii. 
3; xi. 8; Eph. iv. 12; 1 Tim. i.16; Heb. vi. 11; ix. 
13; πρὸς ri, to what end, for what intent, Jn. xiii. 28 ; 
πρὸς τὴν ἐλεημοσύνην, for the purpose of asking alms, 
Acts iii. 10; πρὸς τό with an inf. in order to, etc.: Mt. 
v. 28; vi.1; xiii.30; xxiii. 5; xxvi. 12; Mk. xiii. 22; 
2 Co. iii. 13; Eph. vi. 11; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8; also 
RG in Jas. iii. 3. f. of the time for which a 
thing has been, as it were, appointed, i.e. during 
which it will last; where we use our for (Germ. für or 
auf) [cf. b. above]: πρὸς καιρόν (Lat. ad tempus, Cic. de 
off. 1,8, 27 ; de amicitia 15, 53; Liv. 21, 25, 14), i. e. for 
a season, for a while, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; πρὸς 
καιρὸν ὥρας, [ R. V. for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17; πρὸς 
ὥραν, for a short time, for an hour, Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8; 
Gal. ii. 5; Philem. 15; πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμέρας, Heb. xii. 10; 
πρὸς τὸ παρόν, for the present, ibid. 11 (Thue. 2, 22; 
Plato legg. 5 p. 736 a.; Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 1; Hdian. 1, 
3, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; Dio Cass. 41, 15); πρὸς ὀλίγον, for 
alittle time, Jas.iv 14 (Lcian. dial. deor.18,1; Aelian 
v. h. 12, 63). 2. itis used of close proximity 
— the idea of direction, though not entirely lost, being 
more or less weakened ; a. answering to our at or by 
(Germ. an); after verbs of fastening, adhering, 
moving (to): δεδέσθαι πρὸς τὴν θύραν, Mk. xi. 4; mpoo- 
κολλᾶσθαι, Mk. x. 7; KG Tr (in mrg. br.); Eph.v. 31 RG 
WH txt. ; προσκόπτειν, Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11 ; κεῖσθαι, i. q. 
to be brought near to, Mt. iii. 10; Lk. iii. 9, [(cf. 2 Mace. 
iv. 33)]; τιθέναι, Acts iii. 2; [1v. 37 Tdf. (al. παραγ]; add, 
βεβλῆσθαι, Lk. xvi. 205 rà πρὸς τὴν θύραν, the fore-court 
[see θύρα, a.], Mk. ii. 2; εἶναι πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν (prop. 
towards the sea [ A. V. by the sea]), Mk. iv. 1; Oeppai- 
νεσθαι πρὸς τὸ φῶς, turned to the light [ R. V. in the light], 
Mk. xiv. 54; καθῆσθαι πρὸς τὸ φῶς, Lk. xxii. 56 ; εἱστήκει 
πρὸς TO μνημεῖον, Jn. xx. 11 Rec.; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. 
p. 201 sq. b. i. q. (Lat. apud) with, with the ace. of a 
person, after verbs of remaining, dwelling, tarry- 
ing, ete. (which require one to be conceived of as always 
turned towards one), cf. Fritzsche u. s.: after εἶναι, Mt. 
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19; xiv. 49; Lk. ix. 41; Jn.i.1sq.; 
lJn.i.2; 1 Th.iii.4; 2 Th. ii. 5; iii. 10; παρεῖναι, Acts 
xii. 20; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal.iv.18, 20; παρουσία, Phil. 
1.26; διαμένειν, Gal.ii.5; παραμένειν, 1 Co.xvi.6; ἐπι- 
μένειν, ibid. 7; (ἀ8]. 1.18; καθέζεσθαι, Mt. xxvi.55 [RG 
L Tr br.]; ἐνδημεῖν, 2Co. v.83; κατέχειν τινὰ πρὸς ἑαυτόν, 
Philem. 13. πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, etc., (apud animum meum), 
with myself, ete., (2 Macc. xi. 13; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are 
given in Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1157"; [L. and S. s. v. C. I. 57), 
συλλογίζομαι, Lk. xx. 5; προσεύχομαι. Lk. xviii. 11 [ Taf. 
om. πρὸς é., Grsb. connects it with era6eís]; ἀγανακτεῖν, 
Mk. xiv. 4 [(ef. 1a. fin.) ; θαυμάζειν, Lk. xxiv. 12 (ace. to 
some; see above, 1 a. ad init.) ]. Further, ποιεῖν τι πρός 
τινα, Mt. xxvi. 18; ἔχω χάριν πρός τινα, Acts ii. 47; καύ- 


πρὸς 


χημα ἔχ. mp. 7. to have whereof to glory with one (prop. 
turned * toward? one), Ro. iv. 2; παράκλητον πρός τινα, 1 
Jn. ii. 1. 3. of relation or reference to any 
person or thing ; thus a. of fitness: joined to 
adjectives, ἀγαθός, Eph.iv.29; ἕτοιμος, Tit. iii. 1; 1 Pet. 
iii. 125 xavós, 2 Co.ii. 16; Svvards,2Co.x.43 ἐξηρτι- 
σμένος, 2 Tim. iii. 17; ὠφέλιμος, 1 ‘Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. 
iii. 16; ἀδόκιμος, Tit. i. 165 ἀνεύθετος, Acts xxvii. 12; 
λευκός, white and so ready for, Jn. iv. 35; rà πρὸς τὴν 
χρείαν se. ἀνάγκαια, [ R. V. such things as we needed ], Acts 
xxviii. 10. b. of the relation or close connec- 
tion entered (or to be entered) into by one person 
with another: περιπατεῖν πρός (Germ. im Verkehr mit, 
[in intercourse with (A. V. toward)]; cf. Bnhdy. p. 265; 
Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1157*; [L. and S. s. v. C. I. 5]) τινα, 
Col. iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; ἀναστρέφεσθαι, 2 Co. i. 12; of 
ethical relationship (where we use with), ἀσύμφωνος πρὸς 
ἀλλήλους, Acts xxviii. 25; κοινωνία, συμφώνησις πρός Twa 
or τι, 2 Co. vi. 15 sq.; εἰρήνην ἔχειν [see εἰρήνη, 5], Ro. v. 
1; συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Acts xxiv. 16 ; διαθήκην 
ἐντέλλομαι πρός τινα, Heb. ix. 20 [see ἐντέλλω, fin.]; δια- 
θήκην διατίθημι, Acts iii. 25, (in Grk. writ. συνθήκας, σπον- 
das, συμμαχίαν ποιεῖσθαι πρός τινα, and similar expres- 
sions; cf. Passow [or L. and S.] u. s.) ; μὴ ταπεινώσῃ . . . 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς, in my relation to you [ R. V. before], 2 Co. xii. 
215 πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν 6, λόγος (see λόγος, II. 5), Heb. iv. 13. 
Here belongs also 2 Co. iv. 2 [ A. V. to every man's con- 
science ]. c. with regard to (any person or thing), 
with respect to, as to; after verbs of saying: πρός twa, 
Mk. xii. 12; Lk. xii.41; xviii. 9; xix. 9; xx. 19; Ro. x. 21; 
Heb. i. 7 sq.; πρὸς τὸ δεῖν προσεύχεσθαι, Lk. xviii. 1; ἐπι- 
τρέπειν, γράφειν τι πρός τι, Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; ἀποκρι- 
θῆναί τι πρός τι, Mt. xxvii. 14 ; ἀνταποκριθῆναι, Lk. xiv. 6 ; 
τί ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ravra, Ro. viii. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12; 
anab. 2, 1, 20). d. pertaining to: τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 
(see θεός, 3 y.), Ro. xv.17; Heb. ii. 17; ν. 1; τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς; 
sc. ἐστίν, what is that to us? i. e. it is none of our busi- 
ness to care for that, Mt. xxvii. 4; also τί πρὸς σέ; Jn. 
xxi. 22, 23 [here Tdf. om.]. e. in comparison (like 
Lat. ad) i.q. in comparison with: so after ἄξιος (q. v. 
in a.), Ro. viii. 18 (οὐ λογισθήσεται ἕτερος πρὸς αὐτόν, 
Bar. iii. 36 (35) ; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666; [B. $147, 
28]). f. agreeably to, according to: πρὸς à (i. e. πρὸς 
ταῦτα à) ἔπραξε, 2 Co. v. 10; ποιεῖν πρὸς τὸ θέλημά τινος, 
Lk. xii. 47; ὀρθοποδεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Gal. ii. 14. 
Here belong Eph. iii. 4; iv. 14. g. akin to this is 
the use of πρός joined to nouns denoting desires, emo- 
tions, virtues, etc., to form a periphrasis of the adverbs 
[cf. W. § 51, 2 h.]: πρὸς φθόνον, enviously, Jas. iv. 5 ([on 
this pass. see φθόνος ; πρὸς ὀργήν i. q. ὀργίλως, Soph. El. 
369; πρὸς βίαν i.q. βιαίως, Aeschyl. [ Prom. 208, 353, ete. ] 
Eum. 5; al.; πρὸς ἡδονὴν καὶ πρὸς χάριν, pleasantly and 
graciously, Joseph. antt. 12, 10, 3; [other exx. in L. and 
Sus τ ΠῚ ΜΠ}: 

II. with the DA TrvE, at, near, hard by, denoting close 
local proximity (W. 395 (369 sq.)); so six times in the 
N. T. (much more freq. in the Sept. and in the O. T. 
Apoer.) : Mk. v. 11 GL T Tr WH [R. V. on the moun- 


548 





προσάγω 


tain side]; Lk. xix. 37; Jn. xviii. 16; xx. 11 (where Ree. 
has πρὸς τὸ μν.), 12; Rev. i. 13. 

III. with the GENITIVE, a. prop. used of that 
from which something proceeds; b. (Lat. a parte 
i.e.) on the side of; hence tropically πρός twos εἶναι or 
ὑπάρχειν, to pertain to one, lie in one’s interests, be to one’s 
advantage: so once in the N. T. τοῦτο πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας 
σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει, conduces to [A. V. is for] your safety, 
Acts xxvii. 34. (Κροῖσος ἐλπίσας πρὸς ἑωυτοῦ τὸν χρη- 
σμὸν εἶναι, Hdt. 1,75; οὐ πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης, it will 
not redound to your credit, Thuc. 3, 59; add, Plat. Gorg. 
p.459 c.; Leian. dial. deor. 20, 3; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 30; 
Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 19, 6; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 659 sq. ; 
Matthiae p. 1385 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. A. IV.]; W. 374 
(350).) 

IV. in CowPOSITION πρός signifies 1. direction 
or motion to a goal: προσάγω, προσεγγίζω, προσέρχομαι, 
προστρέχω. 2. addition, accession, besides: mpoo- 
ανατίθημι, προσαπειλέω, προσοφείλω. 3. vicinity: 
προσεδρεύω, προσμένω. 4. our on, at, as in mpoo- 
κόπτω ; and then of things which adhere to or are fas- 


tened to others, as προσηλόω, προσπήγνυμι. 5. to or 


for, of a thing adjusted to some standard: πρόσκαιρος. 


Cf. Zeune ad Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666. 

προ-σάββατον, -ov, τό, the day before the sabbath: Mk. 
xv.42 RG TWH([LTr txt. πρὸς aa. (cf. πρός, I. 1 b.)]. 
(Judith viii. 6 ; [Ps. xcii. (xciii.) heading; Nonn. paraph. 
Ioan. 19, 66; Euseb. de mart. Pal. 6, 1].)* 

προσ-αγορεύω: 1 aor. pass. ptep. προσαγορευθείς ; to” 
speak to, to address, accost, salute, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Aris- 
tph., Xen., Plat., al.) ; esp. to address or accost by some 
name, call by name: twa with a pred. ace., and in the pass. 
with a pred. nom. (1 Mace. xiv. 40; 2 Macc. xiv. 37), Heb. 
v.10. (to give a name to publicly, to style, τινά or τί with 
a pred. ace., Xen. mem. 3, 2, 1 ; Τάϊος Ἰούλιος Καῖσαρ ὁ διὰ 
τὰς πράξεις προσαγορευθεὶς θεός, Diod. 1, 4; add [Sap- 
xiv. 22]; 2 Macc. iv. 7; x. 9; xiv. 37; φρούριον . . . Kat- 
σάρειαν ὑπ᾽ abro) προσαγορευθέν, Joseph. antt. 15, 8, 5.) 
Cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 97 sq.* 

προσ-άγω; ? aor. προσήγαγον; 1 aor. pass. προσήχθὴν 
(Mt. xviii. 24 L Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
ap, wim, sometimes for S27; 1. transitively, 
to lead to, bring, [see πρός, IV. 1]: τινὰ ὧδε, Lk. ix. 41; 
τινά τινι, one to one [cf. W. $ 52, 4, 14], Mt. xviii. 24 
L Tr WH; Acts xvi. 20; to open a way of access, twa 
τῷ θεῷ, for [ A. V. to bring] one to God, i. e. to render 
one acceptable to God and assured of his grace (a fig. 
borrowed from those who secure for one the privilege of 
an interview with the sovereign), 1 Pet. iii. 18 [note- 
worthy is the use, without specification of the goal, in a 
forensic sense, to summon (to trial or punishment), Acts 
xii. 6 WH txt. (where al. προάγω, q. v. 1)]. 2. in- 
transitively (see ἄγω, 4), to draw near to, approach, (Josh. 
iii. 9; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 3, ete.) : τινί, Acts xxvii. 27 [(not 
WH mre.)], where Luke speaks in nautical style phe- 
nomenally, the land which the sailor is approaching 
seeming to approach him; cf. Kuinoel [or Wetstein] ad 
loc.; [see mpocaréxo 2, and προσαχέω]." 


προσαγωγή 


προσ-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ; 1. the act of bringing to, a 
moving to, (Thue., Aristot., Polyb., al.). 2. access, 
approach, (Hdt. 2, 58; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 45) [al., as Meyer 
on Ro. as below (yet see Weiss in the 6th ed.), Ellic. on 
Eph., insist on the transitive sense, introduction]: εἰς 
τὴν χάριν, Ro. v. 2; to God, i.e. (dropping the figure) that 
friendly relation with God whereby we are acceptable to 
him and have assurance that he is favorably disposed 
towards us, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12." 

Trpoc-avréo, -à ; 1. to ask for in addition [ (see πρός, 
IV. 2); Pind., Aeschyl., al.]. 2. to approach one 
with supplications, (Germ. anbetteln [to importune; cf. 
πρός, IV. 4]), to ask alms, ([Hdt.], Xen., Arstph., Eur., 
Plut, al): Mk. x. 46 RGL; Lk. xviii. 35 (where LT 
Tr WH have ἐπαιτῶν) ; Jn. ix. 8.* 

προσαίτης, -ov, 6, a beggar: Mk. x. 46 T Tr WH; Jn. 
ix. 8 (where for the Rec. τυφλός).  (Plut., Leian., Diog. 
Laért. 6, 56.) * 

mpoc-ava-Baívo : 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. sing. προσανάβηθι; 
to go up farther: with ἀνώτερον added, Lk. xiv. 10 [A. V. 
go up higher; al.regard the προσ- as adding the sugges- 
tion of *motion to' the place where the host stands: 
“come up higher’ (cf. Prov. xxv. 7). Xen., Aristot., al.]* 

προσ-αναλίσκω: 1 aor. ptep. fem. προσαναλώσασα; 
to expend besides [zpos, IV. 2]: ἰατροῖς (i. e. upon physi- 
cians, B. § 133, 1; Rec. eis ἰατρούς [cf. W. 213 (200)]) 
τὸν βίον, Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mrg. br.thecl.]. (Xen., 
Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) * 

προσ-ανα-πληρόω, -ῶ; 1 aor. προσανεπλήρωσα; to fill up 
by adding to (cf. πρός, IV. 2]; to supply: τί, 2 Co. ix. 12; 
xi. 9. (Sap. xix. 4; Aristot., Diod., Philo, al.) * 

προσ-ανα-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. προσανεθέμην; il 
to lay upon in addition [cf. πρός, IV. 2]. 2. Mid- 
«dle, a. to lay upon one's self in addition: φόρτον, 
Poll. 1, 9, 99; to undertake besides: τί, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 
8. b. with a dat. of the pers. to put one’s self upon 
another by going to him (πρός), i. e. to commit or betakg 
one’s self to another se. for the purpose of consulting him, 
hence /o consult, to take one into counsel, [A. V. confer 
with], (Diod. 17, 116 rots μάντεσι προσαναθέμενος περὶ τοῦ 
σημείου ; Lcian. Jup. trag. $1 ἐμοὶ προσανάθου, λάβε pe 
σύμβουλον πόνων), Gal.i.16. ^ c. to add from one's store 
(this is the force of the middle), to communicate, impart: 
τί τινι, Gal. ii. 6.* 

προσ-αν-έχω ; 1. to hold up besides. 2. in- 
trans. to rise up so as to approach, rise up towards : Acts 
xxvii. 27 Lchm. ed. ster. (see προσάγω 2, and zpocaxéo), 
— a sense found nowhere else.* 

προσ-απειλέω, -à: 1 aor. mid. ptep. προσαπειλησάμενος ; 
to add threats, threaten further, [cf. πρός, IV. 2]: Acts 
iv. 21. (Dem. p. 544, 26.)* 

[7poc-axéo, -, Dorie for προσηχέω, to resound: Acts 
xxvii. 27 WH mrg. (see their App. p. 151; al. προσ- 
ἄγειν, q. v.), of the roar of the surf as indicating nearness 
to land to sailors at night.*] 

προσ-δαπανάω, -@: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. sing. zpoc- 
δαπανήσῃς, to spend besides [cf. πρός, IV. 2], Vulg. super- 
erogo: τί, Lk. x. 35.  (Lcian., Themist.) * 


544 








προσεργάζομαι 


προσ-δέομαι ; depon. pass. fo want besides, need in addi- 
tion, [cf. πρός, IV. 2]: προσδεόμενός τινος, **quom nullius 
boni desideret accessionem" (Erasmus), [ A. V. as though 
he needed anything], Acts xvii. 25. (Xen., Plat., sqq. ; 
Sept.; [in the sense /o ask of, several times in Hdt.].)* 

προσ-δέχομαι ; depon. mid. ; impf. προσεδεχόμην ; 1 aor. 
προσεδεξάμην ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down, to receive to one's self, to admit, to give access 
to one'sself: τινά, ἴο admit one, receive into intercourse 
and companionship, τοὺς ἁμαρτωλούς, Lk. xv. 2; to re- 
ceive one (coming from some place), Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. ii. 
29, (1 Chr. xii. 18); τί, to accept (not to reject) athing 
offered: ob προσδ. to reject, Heb. xi. 35; προσδέχονται 
ἐλπίδα, to admit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but 
to entertain, embrace, its substance, Acts xxiv. 15 [al. 
refer this to the next head (R. V. txt. look for)]; not to 
shun, to bear, an impending evil [ A. V. took the spoiling 
etc.], Heb. x. 34. 2. as fr. Hom. down, to expect 
ΓΔ. V. look for, wait for]: twa, Lk. xii. 36; τί, Mk. xv. 
43; Lk. ii. 25, 38 ; xxiii. 51; [Acts xxiii. 21]; Tit. ii. 13; 
Jude 21; τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, the fulfilment of the promises, 
Heb. xi. 13 Lehm.  [Cf. δέχομαι, fin. ] * 

προσδοκάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. προσεδόκων (Acts 
xxviii. 6) ; (the simple verb is found only in the form 
Soxevw; πρός [q. v. IV. 1] denotes mental direction); fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to expect (whether in thought, 
in hope, or in fear); to look for, wait for: when the 
preceding context shews who or what is expected, Mt. 
xxiv.50; Lk.iii.15; xii. 46; Acts xxvii. 33; xxviii. 6; 
τινά, one's coming or return, Mt. xi. 3; Lk.i.21; vii. 19 
sq.; viii. 40; Acts x. 24; τί, 2 Pet. iii. 12-14; foll. by 
an aec. with infin. Acts xxviii. 6; foll. by an infin. be- 
longing to the subject, Acts iii. 5.* 

προσδοκία, -as, 7, (προσδοκάω), fr. Thuc. and Xen. 
down, expectation (whether of good or of evil): joined 
to $óBos (Plut. Ant. 75; Demetr. 15) with a gen. of the 
object added [W. 8 50, 7 b.], Lk. xxi. 26; τοῦ λαοῦ (gen. 
of subject), the expectation of the people respecting 
Peter's execution, Acts xii. 11.* 

προσδρέμω, see προστρέχω. 

προσ-εάω, -@; to permit one to approach or arrive: Acts 
xxvii. 7 [R. V. txt. to suffer further; (cf. πρός, IV. 2; 
Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed., p. 78; 
Hackett ad loc.)].. Not found elsewhere." 

προσ-εγγίζω : 1 aor. inf. προσεγγίσαι; (0 approach unto 
[πρός, IV. 1]: with the dat. of a pers. [ef. W. § 52, 4, 14], 
Mk. ii. 4 [where T Tr mrg. WH προσενέγκαι]. (Sept. ; 
Polyb., Diod., Leian.) * 

προσεδρεύω; (mpdoedpos sitting near, [cf. πρός, IV. 
57); 1. prop. fo sit near [(Eur., al.)]. 2. to 
attend assiduously : τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ (see παρεδρεύω),1 Co. 
ix.13 Ree.; Protev. Jac. 23, 1 (where we also find the var. 
mapedpevo) ; τῇ θεραπείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 7,1; 
ταῖς φιλοπονίαις, Aristot. pol. 8,4, 4 p. 1338", 25; τοῖς πράγ- 
μασι, Dem. p. 14, 15 [i. e. Olynth. 1, 18]; with dat. of 
pers. to be in attendance upon, not to quit one's side, Jo- 
seph. c. Ap. 1, 9, 1; [cf. Dem. 914, 28].* 

προσ-εργάζομαι: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προσειργάσατο 


“προσέρχομαι 


(R G Tr), προσηργάσ. (L TWH; see ἐργάζομαι, init.) ; 
1. to work besides (Eur., Plut.). 2. by working or 
trading to make or gain besides : Lk. xix. 16 (Xen. Hell. 
3, 1, 28).* 

Tpoc-épxogav; impf. 3 pers. plur. προσήρχοντο (Acts 
xxviii. 9) ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. προσελεύσεται, Lk.i.17 WH 
mrg.]; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. προσῆλθον and [so L Tr WH 
in Mt. ix. 28; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; T Tr WH in Mt. v. 1; 
Lk.xiii.31; WH in Mt. xix. 3; xxi. 23; Jn. xii. 21] in 
the Alex. form προσῆλθαν (see ἀπέρχομαι, and ἔρχομαι) ; 
pf. προσελήλυθα (Heb. xii. 18, 22); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down; Sept. for p and Z2); to come to, to approach, 
[7pós, IV. 1]; a. prop. absol, Mt. iv. 11; Lk. 
[i.17 WH mrg.]; ix. 42; xxiii. 36; Acts viii. 29 ; xxviii. 
9; προσῆλθον λέγοντες, Lk. xiii. 31; with rhetorical ful- 
ness of description (see ἀνίστημι, 11. 1 c. [also ἔρχομαι, p. 
250° bot.]) the ptep. προσελθών is joined to a finite verb 
which denotes a different action: Mt. viii. 2 L T Tr WH, 
195255 1x5 20; xin. 10, 275 πιν 15 xv. 12/235 xvi 1; 
xvii. 6[ RG]; xix. 16; xxv. 20, 22, 24; xxvi. 39 T Tr 
WH mrg. (acc. to a reading no doubt corrupt [ef. Scri- 
vener, Introd. p. 16]), 50, 60, 73; xxviii. 2, 9, 18; Mk. i. 
31; x.2; xii. 28; [xiv. 35 Tr WH mre.]; Lk. vii. 14 ; viii. 
24, 44; ix. 12, 42; x. 34; xx. 27; xxiii. 36; Acts xxii. 26 
‘Sq-; προσέρχομαι foll. by an infin. indicating the reason 
why one has drawn near, Mt. xxiv. 1; Acts vii. 31; xii. 
13 [here WH mrz. προῆλθε]; with a dat. of the place 
(exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. 1 a. p. 1190*; 
[L.and S.s.v. I. 1]), Heb. xii. 18, 22; with the dat. of 
a pers. (see Lexx. u. s.), Mt. v. 1; viii. 5; ix. 14, 28; xiii. 
36; xiv. 15; xv. 1, 30; xvii. 14, 24; xviii. 1; xix.3; xx. 
20; xxi. 14,93; xxii; 98; xxiv. 9; xxvL 7, 12,69; Jn. 
xii. 21; Acts x. 28; xviii. 2; xxiv. 23 Rec.; [with ἐπί and 
the ace. Acts xx. 13 Tr WH mrg.]. The ptep. zpoc- 
ελθὼν αὐτῷ with a finite verb (see above) occurs in Mt. 
iv.3; xviii. 21; xxi. 28,30; xxvi.49; xxvii.58; Mk. vi. 
35; xiv. 45; Lk.xx.27; xxii. 52; Acts ix. 1; xxiii. 
14. b. trop. a. προσέρχ. τῷ θεῷ, to draw near to 
God in order to seek his grace and favor, Heb. vii. 25; 
xi. 6; τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος, Heb. iv. 16; without τῷ 
θεῷ, Heb. x. 1, 22, (in the O. T. mpocépx., simply, is used 
of the priests about to offer sacrifices, Lev. xxi. 17, 21; 
Deut. xxi.5; with the addition of πρὸς θεόν, of one about 
to ask counsel of God, 1 S. xiv. 36; with τοῖς θεοῖς, of 
suppliants about to implore the gods, Dio Cass. 56, 9); 
πρὸς Χριστόν, to attach one's self to Christ, to come to a 
participation in the benefits procured by him, 1 Pet. ii. 
4 [cf. W. $52, 3]. B. i. q. to assent to (cf. Germ. 
beitreten [ Lat. accedere; Eng. come (over) to, used fig.]) : 
ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [Tdf. προσέχεται, q. v. 3]. 

προσ-ευχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (προσεύχομαι), Sept. for nban, iq. 
“εὐχὴ πρὸς τὸν θεόν [cf. πρός, IV. 1]; 1. prayer ad- 
dressed to God: Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; 
xxi 22; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. xxii. 45; Acts iii.1; vi 4; x. 
31; Ro. xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 5; Col. iv. 2; plur., Acts ii. 
42; x. 4; Ro.i. 10 (9); Eph.i.16; Col. iv.12; 1 Th. i. 
2; Philem. 4, 22; 1 Pet. iii. 7; iv. 7; Rev.v. 8; viii. 3, 4 
(where ταῖς προσευχαῖς is a dat. commodi, for, in aid of, 

35 


545 











προσεύχομαι 


the prayers [W. $31, 6c.; cf. Green p. 101 sq.]) ; οἶκος 
προσευχῆς, a house devoted to the offering of prayer to 
God, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46, (Is. lvi. 7; 1 
Mace. vii. 37); προσευχὴ καὶ δέησις, Acts i. 14 Rec.; 
Eph. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 6, (1 K. viii. 38; 2 Chr. vi. 29; 1 
Macc. vii. 37; on the distinction between the two words 
see δέησις) ; plur. 1 Tim. ii. 1; v. 5; 7 mp. τοῦ θεοῦ, 
prayer to God, Lk. vi. 12 (εὐχαριστία θεοῦ, Sap. xvi. 28; 
cf. reff. in πίστις, 1 a.); πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ὑπέρ [L T Tr WH 
περί] twos, Acts xii. 5; plur. Ro. xv. 30; προσευχῇ mpoo- 
εύχεσθαι, a Hebraistic expression (cf. W. $54, 3; [B. 
$133, 22 a.]), to pray fervently, Jas. v. 17. 2.a 
place set apart or suited for the offering of prayer;i.e. a. 
à synagogue (see συναγωγή, 2 b.) : 3 Macc. vii. 20 [acc. to 
the reading προσευχήν ; see Grimm, Com. in loc.]; Philo 
in Flaceum ὃ 6 [also $ 14]; leg. ad Gaium $$ 20,43, 46 ; Ju- 
venal, sat. 1,3, 296 ; συνάγονται πάντες eis τὴν προσευχήν, 
μέγιστον οἴκημα πολὺν ὄχλον ἐπιδέξασθαι δυνάμενον, Jo- 
seph. vita § 54. b. a place in the open air where the 
Jews were wont to pray, outside of those cities where they 
had no synagogue; such places were situated upon the 
bank of a stream or the shore of the sea, where there 
was a supply of water for washing the hands before 
prayer: Acts xvi. 13, 16; Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 23, cf. 
Epiph. haer. 80, 1. Tertullian in his ad nationes 1, 13 
makes mention of the * orationes litorales" of the Jews, 
and in his de jejuniis c. 16 says * Judaicum certe jeju- 
nium ubique celebratur, cum omissis templis per omne 
litus quocunque in aperto aliquando jam preces ad caelum 
mittunt." [Josephus (c. Apion. 2, 2, 2) quotes Apion as 
representing Moses as offering αἴθριοι mpocevxat.] Cf. 
De Wette, Archiiologie, § 242; [Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 27 
vol. ii. p. 369 sqq.]. Not used by prof. auth. except in 
the passages cited above from Philo, Josephus, and Ju- 
venal [to which add Cleomedes 71, 16; ef. Boeckh, Corp. 
inserr. ii. 1004 no. 2114 b. and 1005 no. 2114 bb. (A. p. 
81), see Index s. v.].* 

προσ-εύχομαι ; depon. mid.; impf. προσηυχόμην ; fut. 
προσεύξομαι ; 1 aor. προσηυξάμην; [on the augm.see WH, 
App. p. 162; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down ; Sept. for Sbann; to offer prayers, to pray, 
(everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [ef. δέησις, 
fin.]) : absol., Mt. vi. 5—7, 9; xiv. 23; xxvi. 36,39, 44; Mk. 
1.35; vi.46; xi. 24 sq.; xiii. 33 [L T WH om. Tr br. the 
cl.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk.i.10; iit. 21; v. 16; vi 125; ix. 18, 
28sq.; xi. 1sq.; xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject 
the pass.]; Acts i. 24; vi. 6; ix. 11, 40; x. 9,30; xi. 5° 
xii. 12; xiii. 3; xiv. 23; xvi. 25; xx. 36 ; xxi. 5; xxii. 17; 
xxviii. 8; 1 Co. xi 4sq.; xiv. 14; 1 Th. v. 17; 1 Tim. ii. 
8; Jas. v. 13, 18; foll. by λέγων and direet disc. con- 
taining the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk. 
xxii41; προσεύχ. with a dat. indicating the manner or 
instrument, 1 Co. xi.5 [ W. $31, 7 d.]; xiv. 14 sq. [cf. W. 
279 (262) sq-]; μακρά, to make long prayers, Mt. xxiii. 
14 (13) Rec.; Mk.xii.40; Lk.xx.47; ἐν πνεύματι (see 
πνεῦμα, 4 a. p. 522* mid.), Eph. vi. 18; ἐν zv. ἁγίῳ, Jude 
20; προσευχῇ (see προσευχή, 1 fin.), Jas. v.17; προσεύχ. 
with the acc. ef a thing, Lk. xviii. 11; Ro. viii. 26 [cf. W. 


προσέχω 


841 Ὁ. 4 b.; B. $139, 61¢.]; ἐπί τινα, over one, i. e. with 
hands extended over him, Jas. v. 14 [cf. W. 408 (381) 
n.]; se. ἐπί τινα, Mt. xix. 13. as commonly in Grk. writ. 
with the dat. of the pers. to whom the prayers are offered 
[cf. W. § 52, 4, 14]: Mt. vi. ὃ; 1 Co. xi. 13, (Is. xliv. 
17); περί with the gen. of a pers., Col. i. 3 [R G T WH 
txt.]; 1 Th. v. 25; Heb. xiii. 18; ὑπέρ with the gen. of 
a pers., Mt. v. 44; Lk. vi. 28 [where T WH Tr mrg. περί 
(see περί, 1. c. y., also ὑπέρ, I. 6) ; Col. i. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 
(see reff. as above), 9]; προσεύχ. foll. by ἵνα, with the 
design of, 1 Co. xiv. 13, cf. Meyer in loc. [W. 460 (428)]; 
the thing prayed for is indicated by a following tva (see 
tva, II. 2 b.) : Mt. xxiv. 20; xxvi. 41; Mk. xiii. 18; xiv. 
35, 38; Lk. xxii. 46, [but in Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 
(Lk. xxii. 46 ?), tva is more com. regarded as giving the 
aim of the twofold command preceding]; τοῦτο tva, Phil. 
i. 9; περί twos ἵνα, Col. iv. 3; 2 ΤῊ. i. 11; iii. 1; ὑπέρ 
twos iva, Col. i. 9; ὑπέρ twos ὅπως, Jas. v. 16 L WH txt. 
Tr mrg.; περί τινος ὅπως, Acts viii. 15, (ὅπως [q. v. II. 2] 
seems to indicate not so much the contents of the pray- 
er as its end and aim); foll. by an inf. belonging to the 
subject, Lk. xxii. 40; foll. by τοῦ with the inf., Jas. v. 17.* 

προσ-έχω; impf. προσεῖχον; pf. προσέσχηκα; [pres. mid. 
3 pers. sing. προσέχεται (1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf.)]; to turn to 
[ef. πρός, IV. 1], i. e. 1. to bring to, bring near; thus 
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down with ναῦν (quite 
as often omitting the ναῦν) and a dat. of place, or foll. by 
mpos with an ace. of place, to bring a ship to land, and 
simply 10 touch at, put in. 2 a. τὸν νοῦν, to turn 
the mind to, attend to, be attentive: τινί, to a person or 
thing, Arstph. eqq. 503; Plat, Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 
Leian., Plut., al.; once so in the Bible, viz. Job vii. 17. 
The simple προσέχειν τινί (Sept. for mUpn, also for } 187), 
with τὸν νοῦν omitted, is often used in the same sense 
from Xen. down; so in the N. T. [cf. W.593 (552); B. 
144 (126)]: Acts viii. 6 ; xvi. 14 ; Heb. ii. 1; 2 Pet. i. 19, 
(1 Mace. vii. 11; 4 Mace. i.1; Sap.viii. 12) ; in the sense 
of caring for, providing for, Acts xx. 28. b. προσ- 
έχω ἐμαυτῷ, to attend to one’s self, i. e. to give heed to one’s 
self (Sept. for 3173, to guard one’s self, i.e. to beware, 
Gen. xxiv. 6; Ex. x. 28; Deut. iv. 9; vi. 12, etc.) : Lk. 
xvii. 3; Acts v. 35 [cf. B. 337 (290); W.557 (518); yet 
see ἐπί, B. 2 f.a.]; with the addition of ἀπό τινος, to be 
on one’s guard against, beware of, a thing [cf. B. § 147, 
3 (ἀπό, 1. 3 b.)]: Lk. xii. 1 (Tob. iv. 12; [ Test. xii. Patr., 
test. Dan 6]); also without the dat. προσέχ. ἀπό τινος : 
Mt. vii. 15; χ. 17; xvi. 6, 11 sq. ; Lk. xx. 46, (Sir. vi. 13; 
xi. 33; xvii. 14; xviii. 27; [* Teaching" ete. 6,3; 12,57); 
foll. by μή with an inf., to take heed lest one do a thing, 
Mt. vi. 1; ἐμαυτῷ, μήποτε with the subjunc. Lk. xxi. 34 ; 
absol. to give attention, take heed: Sir. xiii. 13; Barn. 
ep. 4, 9; 7,4.6. [9]; foll. by πῶς, Barn. ep. 7, 7; by the 
interrog. τί, ib. 15, 4; tva, ib. 16, 8; tva μήποτε, Barn. ep. 
4, 13 [var.; tva μή, 2 Chr. xxv. 16]; [μήποτε, Barn. ep. 4, 
14]. 3. sc. ἐμαυτόν, to apply one's self to, attach one’s 
self to, hold or cleave to a person ora thing, [R.V. mostly 
give heed]: with the dat. of a pers. to one, Acts viii. 10 sq. ; 
1 Tim. iv. 1; τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ mp. kai τῷ πρεσβυτερίῳ καὶ δια- 


46 


c 


, 
προσκαλέω 


κόνοις, Ignat. ad Philad. 7, 1; ad Polye. 6, 1; with the dat. 
of a thing, μύθοις, 1 Tim. i. 45 Tit.i.14; [mid. ὑγιαίνουσε 
λόγοις, 1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf. (al. προσέρχεται, q. v. b. 8.)]; to 
be given or addicted to: οἴνῳ, 1 Tim. iii. 8 (τρυφῇ; Julian. 
Caes. 22 [p. 326 ed. Spanh.]; τρυφῇ kai μέθῃ, Polyaen. 
strateg. 8, 56) ; to devote thought and effort to: τῇ ἀναγνώ- 
oe κτλ. 1 Tim. iv. 13; τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ, [ A.V. give attend- 
ance], Heb. vii. 13, (ναυτικοῖς, "Thuc. 1, 15; for other 
exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 3 c.; [L. and S. s. v. 
4 b.]).* 

προσ-ηλόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. zpoogAocas; to fasten with 
nails to, nail to, [ οἴ. πρός, IV. 4]: τὶ τῷ σταυρῷ, Col. ii. 
14. (3 Mace. iv. 9; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Philo, 
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

προσήλυτος, -ov, 6, (fr. προσέρχομαι, pf. προσελήλυθα, 
cf. B. 74 (64); [W. 24. 26. 97 (92)]); 1. a new- 
comer [Lat. advena; cf. πρός, IV. 1]; a stranger, alien, 
(Schol. ad Apoll. Rhod. 1, 834; Sept. often for Ἢ [cf. 
Philo de monarch. 1, 7 ad init.]). 2. a proselyte, 
i.e. one who has come over from a Gentile religion to 
Judaism (Luther, Judengenosse): Mt. xxiii. 15; Acts 
ii. 11 (10); vi. 5; xiii. 43. The Rabbins distinguish two 
classes of proselytes, viz. pa proselyles of right- 
eousness, who received circumcision and bound them- 
selves to keep the whole Mosaic law and to comply with 
all the requirements of Judaism, and \pwr "33 prose- 
lytes of the gate (a name derived apparently from Ex. 
xx. 10; Deut. v. 14; [xiv. 21]; xxiv. 16 (14), 21 (19)), 
who dwelt among the Jews, and although uncireumcised 
observed certain specified laws, esp. the seven precepts 
of Noah (as the Rabbins called them), i. e. against the 
seven chief sins, idolatry, blasphemy against God, homi- 
cide, unchastity, theft or plundering, rebellion against 
rulers, and the use of *flesh with the blood thereof." 
[Many hold that this distinction of proselytes into classes 
is purely theoretical, and was of no practical moment in 
Christ's day; ef. Lardner, Works, xi. 306-324; cf. vi. 
522-533; Schürer in Riehm as below.] - Cf. Leyrer in 
Herzog xii. p. 237 sqq. [rewritten in ed. 2 by Delitzsch 
(xii. 293 sqq.)], Steiner in Schenkel iv. 629 sq. ; [BB. 
DD.]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 644 [(whose views 
are somewhat modified, esp. as respects classes of pros- 
elytes, in his 2te Aufl. $31 V. p. 567, and his art. * Pros- 
elyten’ in Riehm p. 1240 sq.) ] and the bks. he refers to.* 

πρόσ-καιρος, -ov, (i. 4- ὁ πρὸς καιρὸν àv), for a season 
[cf. πρός, IV. 5], enduring only for a while, temporary: 
Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv.17; 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 25. (4 
Mace. xv. 2; Joseph. antt. 2, 4,4; Dio Cass., Dion. Hal., 
[Strabo 7, 3, 11], Plut., Hdian.; ὁ παρὼν καὶ πρόσκαιρος 
κόσμος, Clem. homil. 20, 2.) i 

Tpoc-kaMéo, -ῶ : Mid., pres. zpogkaAoUpat; 1 aor.zpoc- 
εκαλεσάμην ; pf. προσκέκλημαι ; from [Antipho, Arstph., 
Thue.], Xen., Plat. down; to call to; in the N. T. found 
only in the mid. [cf. B. $ 135, 4], to call to one’s self; to 
bid to come to one's self: τινά, a. prop.: Mt. x.1; 
xv. 10,32; xviii. 2, 32; xx. 25; Mk. iii. 13, 23 ; vi. 7; vil. 
14; viii. 1,34; x. 42; xii. 43; xv. 44 ; Lk. vii. 18 (19); xv. 
26; xvi.5; xviii. 16; Acts v. 40; vi. 2; xiii. 7; xx. [Βα 


προσκαρτερέω 


L]; xxiii. 17, 18, 23; Jas. v. 14. b. metaph. God 
is said προσκαλεῖσθαι the Gentiles, aliens as they are from 
him, by inviting and drawing them, through the preach- 
ing of the gospel, unto fellowship with himself in the 
Messiah's kingdom, Acts ii. 39; the Holy Spirit and 
Christ are said to call unto themselves [cf. W. § 39,3] 
those preachers of the gospel to whom they have decided 
to intrust a service having reference to the extension of 
the gospel: foll. by an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts 
xvi. 10; foll. by ets τι, Acts xiii. 2 (where 4 is for eis 6, 
ace. to that familiar Grk. usage by which a prep. pre- 
fixed to the antecedent is not repeated before the rela- 
tive; cf. W. 421 sq. (393); [B. 342 (294)]).* 

Tpoc-kaprepéo, -à ; fut. προσκαρτερήσω ; (kaprepeo, fr. 
καρτερός [‘strone,” ‘steadfast ’], of which the root is (τὸ) 
κάρτος for κράτος [‘ strength’; cf. Curtius § 72]) ; to per- 
severe [* continue steadfastly] in any thing [cf. πρός, IV. 
4]: of persons, with the dat. of a thing, to give constant 
attention to a thing, Acts ii. 42 [here Lehm.adds ἐν (once) 
inbr.]; τῇ προσευχῇ, Actsi. 14; vi.4; Ro. xii. 12; Col. 
iv. 2, (rais θήραις, Diod. 3, 17; τῇ πολιορκίᾳ, Polyb. 1, 
55, 4; Diod. 14, 87; τῇ καθέδρᾳ, persist in the siege, 
Joseph. antt. 5, 2, 6) ; with the dat. of a person, to ad- 
here to one, be his adherent ; to be devoted or constant to 
one: Acts viii. 18 ; x. 7, (Dem. p. 1386, 6; Polyb. 24, 5, 
3; Diog. Laért. 8, 1, 14); ets τι, to be steadfastly atten- 
tive unto, to. give unremitting care to a thing, Ro. xiii. 6 [cf. 
Meyer adloc.]; ἐν with a dat. of place, to continue all 
the time in a place, Acts ii. 46 (Sus. 6); absol. to per- 
severe, not to faint (in a thing), Xen. Hell. 7, 5, 14; to 
show one’s self courageous, for p3riry, Num. xiii. 21 (20). 
of a thing, with the dat. of a pers., to be in constant read- 
iness for one, wait on continually : Mk. iii. 9.* 

προσ-καρτέρησις, -eos, 7, (προσκαρτερέω), perseverance : 
Eph. vi. 18. Nowhere else; [Kowmanoudes, Ae£. ἀθησ. 
eb wale: 

προσ-κεφάλαιον, -ov, τό, (fr. πρός [q. v. IV. 3] and the 
adj. κεφάλαιος [cf. κεφάλαιον), a pillow, a cushion: Mk. 
iv. 38. (Ezek. xiii. 18, 20; Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.) * 

προσ-κληρόω, -: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσεκληρώ- 
θησαν; to add or assign to by lot, to allot: προσεκληρώ- 
θησαν τῷ Παύλῳ, were allotted by God to Paul, viz. as 
disciples, followers, Acts xvii. 4 [W. § 39, 2 fin.; al. give 
it a middle force, joined their lot to, attached them- 
selves to, (A. V. consorted with); cf. leg. ad Gaium § 10 
and other exx. fr. Philo as below]. (Plut. mor. p. 738 ἃ. ; 

* Leian. am. 3; freq. in Philo, cf. Loesner, Observv. p. 209 

sqq.) ἢ 

πρόσ-κλησις, -ews, ἡ, 1. a judicial summons: 
Arstph., Plat., Dem. 2. an invitation: μηδὲν ποιῶν 
κατὰ πρόσκλησιν, 1 Tim. v. 21 L Tr mrg. ; this reading, 
unless (as can hardly be doubted) it be due to itacism, 
must be translated by invitation, i. e. the invitation or 
summons of those who seek to draw you over to their 
side [see quotations in Tdf. ad loc. Cf. πρόσκλισις.] * 

προσ-κλίνω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. προσεκλίθη ; 1. 
trans. (to cause) to lean against [cf. πρός, IV, 4] (Hom., 
Pind.). 2. intrans. τινί, lo incline towards one, lean 


54T 





προσκόπτω 


to his side or party: Polyb. 4, 51, 5, ete.; 1 aor. pass. 
προσεκλίθην with a mid. signif. to join one’s self to one: 
Acts v. 36 L T Tr WH [(cf. W. $52, 4, 14)]; 2 Macc. 
xiv. 24; rois δικαίοις προσεκλίθη, Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 
1027; προσεκλίθητε rois ἀποστόλοις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
41, 4 and in other later writ.* 

πρόσ-κλισις, -ews, 7, an inclination or proclivity of mind, 
a joining the party of one, (Polyb., [Diod.]) ; partiality : 
κατὰ πρόσκλισιν, led by partiality (Vulg. in [aliam or] 
alteram partem declinando), 1 'Tim. v. 21 [RGTWHTr 
txt.]; κατὰ προσκλίσεις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 7; δίχα 
προσκλίσεως ἀνθρωπίνης, ib. 50, 2, cf. 47, 3 5ᾳ. (Cf. mpoo- 
kAnots.) ἢ 

προσ-κολλάω, -@: 1 aor. pass. προσεκολλήθην; 1 fut. 
pass. προσκολληθήσομαι; Sept. for ΡΞ; to glue upon, 
glue to, [cf. πρός, IV. 4]; prop. Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 4 ; 
trop. in the pass. with a reflexive force, to join one’s self 
to closely, cleave to, stick to, (Plato): w. dat. of a pers. 
(Sir. vi. 34; xiii. 16), Acts v. 36 Rec. (se& προσκλίνω, 
2); τῇ γυναικί, Mt. xix. 5 Rec. [al. κολληθήσεται, q. v.] ; 
Mk. x. 7 Lchm.; Eph. v. 31 L T Tr WH mrg.; πρὸς τὴν 
γυν. (fr. Gen. ii. 24), Mk. x. 7 RG Tr txt.; Eph. v. 31 
RGWHtxt. [Cf. W. § 52, 4, 14.]* 

πρόσ-κομμα, -aros, TO, (προσκόπτω), a stumbling-block, 
i.e. an obstacle in the way which if one strike his foot 
against he necessarily stumbles or falls; trop. that over 
which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to 
sin: 1 Co. viii. 9 (Sir. xvii. 25 (20); xxxi. (xxxiv.) 19 
(16) ; xxxix. 24) ; τιθέναι πρόσκ. τινι, to put a stumbling- 
block in one's way, i. e. trop. to furnish one an occasion 
for sinning, Ro. xiv. 13 [WH mrg. om.]; ὁ διὰ προσκόμ- 
ματος ἐσθίων, [A.V.] who eateth with offence (see διά, A. T. 
2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats oc- 
casions another to act against his conscience, ibid. 20; 
λίθος προσκόμματος (fr. Is. viii. 14 for 433 1333), prop. a 
stone against which the foot strikes [A. V. stone of 
stumbling], used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard 
to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews 
that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his igno- 
minious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to 
their preconceptions respecting the Messiah ; hence they 
despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought 
upon themselves woe and punishment: Ro. ix. 32, 33; 
1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). (In the Sept. for wpin, Ex. xxiii. 33 ; 
xxxiv. 12; [ef. Judith viii. 22]. «a sore or bruise caused 
by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3 p. 97£.; 
a hindrance [?], Plut. mor. p. 1048 c. [i. e. de Stoic. re- 
pugn. 30, 8 fin.].) * 

προσ-κοπή, -ῆς, 7, (προσκόπτω), an occasion of stum- 
bling [so R.V. (but A.V. offence) ] : διδόναι προσκοπήν (sc. 
ἄλλοις), to do something which causes others to stumble, 
i. e. leads them into error or sin, 2 Co. vi. 3 [cf. W. 484 
(451)]. (Polyb.; [for now» fall, Prov. xvi. 18 Graecus 
Ven.].)* 

προσ-κόπτω; 1 aor. προσέκοψα; to strike against [ef. 
πρός, IV. 4]: absol. of those who strike against a stone 
or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, Jn. xi. 9, 10; 
πρὸς λίθον τὸν πόδα, to strike the foot against a stone, i. e. 


, 
προσκυλίω 


(dropping the fig.) to meet with some harm, Mt. iv.6; Lk. 
iv. 11, (fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 12) ; to rush upon, beat against, oi 
ἄνεμοι τῇ οἰκίᾳ, Mt. vii. 27 [L mrg. προσέρρηξαν, see προσ- 
ρήγνυμι]. ἔν τινι, to be made to stumble by a thing, i. e. 
metaph. to be induced to sin, Ro. xiv. 21 [cf. W. 583 
(542); B. $151, 23 d.]. Since we are angry with an 
obstacle in our path which we have struck and hurt our 
foot against, one is trop. said προσκόπτειν, to stumble at, 
a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the 
Jews are said προσκόψαι τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκ. i. e. to have 
recoiled from Jesus as one who failed to meet their ideas 
of the Messiah (see mpéoxoppa), Ro. ix. 32; the enemies 
of Christianity are said zp. τῷ λόγῳ, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [some (cf. 
R. V. mrg.) take wp. here absolutely, and make τῷ A. 
depend on ἀπειθέω, q. v. in a.]. (Exx.of this and other 
fig. uses of the word by Polyb., Diod., M. Antonin. are 
cited by Passow [L. and S.] s. v. and Fritzsche, Ep. ad 
Rom. ii. p. 362 sq.) * 

προσ-κυλίω : 1 aor. προσεκύλισα; fo roll to: τί τινι, Mt. 
xxvii. 60 [where Lehm. inserts ἐπί] ; τὶ ἐπί τι, Mk. xv. 
46. (Arstph. vesp. 202.) * 

mpoc-kwvéo, -@; impf. προσεκύνουν ; fut. προσκυνήσω ; 
1 aor. προσεκύνησα; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. 
very often for mr (to prostrate one's self) ; prop. 
to kiss the hand to (towards) one, in token of reverence: 
Hat. 1, 134; [cf. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter- 
thümer d. Griech. $ 21; esp. Hoelemann, Die bibl. Ge- 
stalt. d. Anbetung in his ‘ Bibelstudien’ i. 106 sqq.]; hence 
among the Orientals, esp. the Persians, to fall upon the 
knees and touch the ground with the forehead as an expres- 
sion of profound reverence, [to make a * salam]; Lat. 
veneror (Nep. Conon. 3, 3), adoro (Plin. h. n. 28, 5, 25; 
Suet. Vitell. 2); hence in the N. T. by kneeling or pros- 
tration to do homage (to one) or make obeisance, whether 
in order to express respect or to make supplication., It 
is used a. of homage shown to men of superior 
rank: absol, Mt. xx. 20 (the Jewish high-priests are 
spoken of in Joseph. b. j. 4,5, 2 as προσκυνούμενοι) ; πεσὼν 
ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας προσεκύνησεν, Acts x. 25; τινί (acc. to 
the usage of later writ.; cf. W. 36, 210 (197) ; [B. $131, 
4]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 463), Mt. ii. 2, 8; viii. 2; ix. 18; 
xiv. 33; xv. 25; [xviii. 26]; xxviii. 9, 17 [RG]; Mk. v. 6 
[here WH Tr mrg. have the acc.]; xv. 19; Jn. ix. 38; 
with πεσών preceding, Mt. ii. 11; iv. 9; ἐνώπιον τῶν 
ποδῶν τινος, Rev. iii. 9; [it may perh. be mentioned that 
some would bring in here Heb. xi. 21 προσεκύνησεν ἐπὶ τὸ 
ἄκρον τῆς ῥάβδου αὐτοῦ, explaining it by the (Egyptian) 
custom of bowing upon the magistrate’s staff of office in 
taking an oath; cf. Chabas, Mélanges Egypt. III. i. p. 80 
cf. p. 91 sq. ; but see below]. b. of homage rendered 
to God and the ascended Christ, to heavenly beings, and 
to demons: absol. (our to worship) [cf. W. 593 (552)], 
Jn. iv. 20; xii. 20; Acts viii. 27; xxiv. 11; Heb. xi. 21 
[cf. above]; Rev. xi. 1; πίπτειν καὶ προσκυνεῖν, Rev. v. 
14; τινί, Jn. iv. 21, 23; Acts vii.43; Heb.i.6; Rev. iv. 
10; vii. 11; xi. 16; xiv. 7; xvi. 2; xix.4, 20; xxii. 8 sq.; 
Rev. xiii. 4 G L T Tr WH (twice [the 2d time WH txt. 
only]); xiii. 15 GT Tr WHtxt.; xx. 4 Rec.; 


^ DET 
πεσὼν €T 


548 





προσορμίξζω 


πρόσωπον προσκυνήσει τῷ θεῷ, 1 Co. xiv. 25; πίπτειν ἐπὶ 
τὰ πρόσωπα καὶ προσκυνεῖν τῷ θεῷ, Rev. xi. 16; preceded 
by πίπτειν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix.10. — in 
accordance with the usage of the older and better writ. ' 
with τινά or τί (cf. Matthiae $ 412): Mt.iv. 10; Lk. iv. 
8; Rev. ix. 20; xiii. 12; xiv. 9, 11; also xiii. 4 (Rec. 
twice; [WH mrg. once]), 8 [where Rec. dat.], 15 RL 
WH mrg.; xx. 4* (where Rec. dat.), 4" (where R*" dat.); 
Lk. xxiv. 52 R G L Tr br. WH reject; (the Sept. also 
connects the word far more freq. with the dat. than with 
the acc. [cf. Hoelemann u. s. p. 116 sqq.]); ἐνώπιόν τινος, 
Lk. iv. 7; Rev. xv. 4.* 

προσ-κυνητής, -o), 6, (mpooxuvew), a worshipper: Jn. iv. 
23. (Inserr.; [600]. and] Byzant. writ.) * 

προσ-λαλέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. προσλαλῆσαι; w. τινί, lo 
speak to: Acts xiii. 43; se. ὑμῖν [some say poi (see zapa- 
καλέω, L.)], Acts xxviii. 20. (Sap. xiii. 17; Theophr., 
Plut., Lcian.) * 

Tpoc-Aapfávo: 2 aor. inf. προσλαβεῖν (Acts xxvii. 34 
Ree. see below); Mid., pres. προσλαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. 
προσελαβόμην ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to take to, 
take in addition, [ef. πρός, IV. 2]; in the N. T. found 
only in the Middle, to take to one's self [cf. B. § 135, 
4]: τινά [cf. B. 160sq. (140)]; a. to take as one's 
companion [ A. V. take one unto one]: Acts xvii. 5; xviii. 
26. b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside 
[A. V. (simply) take]: Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 32. c 
to take or [so A. V.] receive into one's home, with the 
collateral idea of kindness: Philem. 12 R G, 17; into 
shelter, Acts xxviii. 2. d. to receive, i. e. grant one 
access to one's heart; to take into friendship and inter- 
course: Ro. xiv. 1; xv. 7; God and Christ are said 
προσλαβέσθαι (to have received) those whom, formerly es- 
tranged from them, they have reunited to themselves by 
the blessings of the gospel, Ro. xiv. 3; xv. 7; Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 49, 6, (cf. .Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 10; lxiv. (Ixv.) 5; 
Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 24). e. to take to one's self, to take: 
μηδέν, [ A. V. having taken nothing] i. e. no food, Acts 
xxvii. 335 τροφῆς, (a portion of [ A. V. (not R.V.) *some']) 
food, cf. B. 160 sq. (140), ibid. 36 (in vs. 34 GL T Tr 
WH have restored μεταλαβεῖν [so R. V. (‘to take some 
food’) ] for προσλαβεῖν)" 

πρόσ-ληψις [LT Tr WH -λημψις, see M, μ7, -eos, 7, 
(zpoocdapBavo), Vulg. assumptio, a receiving: τινός, into 


| the kingdom of God, Ro. xi. 16. [(Plat., al.)]* 


προσ-μένω ; 1 aor. ptep. προσμείνας, inf. προσμεῖναι; fr. 
Aeschyl and Hdt. down; a. to remain with [see 
πρός. IV. 3]: with a dat. of the pers. to continue with 
one, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2 [here L WH mrg. om. Tr br. 
the dat.]; τῷ κυρίῳ, to be steadfastly devoted to [ A. V. 
cleave unto] the Lord, Acts xi. 23 (Sap. iii. 9; Joseph. 
antt. 14, 2, 1) ; τῇ χάριτι τοῦ θεοῦ, to hold fast to [ A. V. 
continue in] the grace of God received in the gospel, 
Acts xiii.43 G L T Tr WH; δεήσεσι x. προσευχαῖς, [ A.V. 
to continue in supplications and prayers] 1 Tim.v.5. b. 
to remain still [cf. πρός, IV. 2], stay, tarry: Acts xviii. 18; 
foll. by ἐν with a dat. of place, 1 Tim. i. 3.* 
* προσ-ορμίζω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσωρμίσθησαν; 


mpocopetho 


(ὅρμος a roadstead, anchorage) ; to bring a ship to moor- 
ings (Leian. am. 11); esp. so in the mid., prop. to take 
one’s station near the shore; to moor, come to anchor, 
(Hdt., Dem., Plut., al.) ; the 1 aor. pass. is used in the 
same sense (Arr. exp. Alex. 6,4 and 20; Ael. v. ἢ. 8,5; 
Dio Cass. 41, 48; 64, 1), Mk. vi. 53.* 

προσ-οφείλω ; to owe besides [see πρός, IV. 2]: σεαυτόν, 
i.e. besides what I have just asked of thee thou owest to 
me even thine own self, since it was by my agency that 
thou wast brought to faith in Christ, Philem. 19. (Thuc., 
Xen., Dem., Polyb., Plut.) * 

προσ-οχθίζω: 1 aor. προσώχθισα; to be wroth or dis- 
pleased with : τινί, Heb. iii. 10, 17, (fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10); 
not found besides exc. in the Sept. for 5y3, to loathe; 
Nip, to spue out; 11D, to be disgusted with, ete.; add, Sir. 
vi. 25; xxv. 2; xxxviii. 4; [1. 25; Test. xii Patr., test. Jud. 
$18; Orac. Sibyll.3, 272]. Profane writ. use ὀχθέω, more 
rarely ὀχθίζω. πρός denotes direction towards that with 
which we are displeased [zpós, IV..1]. Cf. Bleek, Br. 
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 441 sq.* 

προσ-παίω (for the more com. zpoomrato) : 1 aor. mpoo- 
ἐπαισα; to beat against, strike upon : intrans. προσέπαισαν 
τῇ οἰκίᾳ, Mt. vii. 25 Lchm.; but cf. B. 40 (34) n. (Schol. 
ad Aeschyl. Prom. 885 ; [Soph. frag. 310 var.]; Byzant. 
writ.) * 

πρόσπεινος, -ov, (πεῖνα hunger [cf. zewdo]), very (lit. 
besides, in accession, [cf. πρός, IV. 2; al. (cf. R. V.) do 
not recognize any intensive force in zpós here]) hun- 
gry: Acts x. 10. Not found elsewhere.* 

προσ-πήγνυμι: 1 aor. ptep. mpoomnéas; to fasten to [see 
πρός, IV. 4]: Acts ii. 23 [here absol, of crucifixion]. 
(Dio Cass., al.) * 

προσ-πίπτω: impf. προσέπιπτον; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. 
προσέπεσε, 3 pers. plur. (Mt. vii. 25) προσέπεσον RG, 
-cav T Tr WH [see πίπτω, init.], ptep. fem. προσπεσοῦ- 
ca; fr. Hom. down; prop. to fall towards, fall upon, 
[7pós, IV. 1] i.e. 1. to fall forward, to fall down, 
prostrate one's self before, in homage or supplication : 
with the dat. of a pers., at one's feet, Mk. iii. 11; v. 33; 
Lk. viii. 28, 47; Acts xvi. 29, (Ps. xciv. (xev.) 6; Polyb., 
Plut., al.) ; rots γόνασί τινος, Lk. v. 8 (Eur. Or. 1332; 
Plut.) ; πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινός, Mk. vii. 25. 2. to 
rush upon, beat against : τῇ οἰκίᾳ (of winds beating against 
a house), Mt. vii. 25 [not Lchm.; cf. προσπαίω ].* 

προσ-ποιέω: Mid., pres. ptep. προσποιούμενος (see be- 
low); impf. 3 pers. sing. προσεποιεῖτο (Lk. xxiv. 28, for 
which L txt. T Tr WH give the 1 aor. προσεποιήσατο); 
in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; to add to [cf. Germ. hinzu- 
machen]; mid. 1. to take or claim (a thing) to 
one's self. 2. to conform one's self to a thing, or rather 
to affect to one’s self; therefore to pretend, foll. by an inf. 
[A. V. made as though he would etc.], Lk. xxiv. 285 xa- 
Téypadev els THY γῆν μὴ προσποιούμενος, Jn. viii. 6 ace. to 
codd. E G H K etc. [cf. Matthaei (ed. 1803) ad loc.]. (So 
in Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.; Diod. 15, 46 ; Philo in 
Flace. $6; [in § 12 foll. by ptep.; Joseph. e. Ap. 1, 1]; 
Ael. v. h. 8,5; Plut. Timol. 5; [ Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. 
831)" 


549 








προστίθημι 


προσ-πορεύομαι ; fo draw near, approach: with a dat. of 
the person approached, Mk. x. 35. (Sept.; Aristot., 
Polyb.) * 

προσ-ρήγνυμι, and in later writ. [W. 22] προσρήσσω; 
1aor.zpocéppn£a RG L, προσέρηξα T Tr WH (see P, p); 
to break against, break by dashing against: παιδία ἀπολεῖς 
προσρηγνὺς πέτραις, Joseph. antt. 9, 4, 6; λέοντα προσ- 
ρήξας τῇ γῇ; 6, 9,3; intrans. (cf. W. $38, 1; [B. $130, 
47): ὁ ποταμὸς τῇ οἰκίᾳ, Lk. vi. 48, [49 ; Mt. vii. 27 Lmrg.]; 
in pass. τῇ ἄκρᾳ 7j τὰ κύματα προσρήσσεται, Antonin. 4, 49." 

προσ-τάσσω: 1 aor. προσέταξα; pf. pass. ptep. προστε- 
ταγμένος ; fr. [ Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ; 1. to as- 
sign or ascribe to, join to. 2. to enjoin, order, pre- 
scribe, command : Sept. for Y ; absol. καθὼς προσέταξε, 
Lk. v. 14; with the dat. of a pers., Mt.i. 24; xxi.6 RG 
T ; ri, Mt. viii. 4 ; Mk.i. 44; τινί re, pass. Acts x. 33 ; foll. 
by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48; to appoint, to define, pass. 
προστεταγμένοι καιροί, Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger 
ed. πρὸς reray.]) T Tr WH, for the Rec. προτεταγμένοι. 
[Svw.: see κελεύω, fin.] * 

προστάτις, 00s, ἡ, (fem. of the noun προστάτης, fr. 
προΐϊστημι) 5 a. prop. a woman set over others. b. 
a female guardian, protectress, patroness, caring for the 
affairs of others and aiding them with her resources 
[A. V. succourer]: Ro. xvi. 2; cf. Passow on the word 
and under προστάτης fin.; [Schiirer, Die Gemeindever- 
fassung der Juden in Rom, u.s.w. (Leip. 1879) p. 31; Hein- 
rici, Die Christengemeinde Korinths, in Hilgenfeld's 
Zeitschr. for 1876, p. 517 sq. ].* 

προσ-τίθημι: impf. 3 pers. sing. προσετίθει (Acts ii. 47) ; 
1 aor. προσέθηκα ; 2 aor. προσέθην, impv. πρόσθες (Lk. 
xvii. 5), inf. προσθεῖναι, ptcp. προσθείς ; Pass., impf. 3 pers. 
plur. προσετίθεντο; 1 aor. προσετέθην ; 1 fut. προστεθή- 
σομαι; 2 aor. mid. προσεθέμην; fr. Hom. Od. 9, 305 down; 
Sept. very often for 557, also for 7pm, ete.; Li 
prop. /o put to. 2. to add, i.e. join to, gather with 
any company, the number of one's followers or compan- 
ions: τινὰ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Acts ii. 47 [RG]; τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts 
v.14; xi. 24; sc. τῷ κυρίῳ, Or τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, Acts ii. 
41; Hebraistically, προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 
(Judg. ii. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 69), he was gathered to his fa- 
thers assembled in Sheol (which is ὙΠ 37 "9 m3, the 
house of assembly for all the living, Job xxx. 23), Acts 
xiii. 36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies of 
his ancestors, buried with them in a common tomb; but cf. 
Knobel on Gen. xxv. 8; [Béttcher, De inferis, p. 54 sqq.]); 
i. q. to add viz. to what one already possesses: τί, Lk. xvii. 
5 [ A.V. here increase] ; pass., Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; Mk. 
iv. 24; Heb. xii. 19 [(μὴ προστεθῆναι αὐτοῖς λόγον, R. V. 
that no word more should be spoken to them) ] ; — to what 
already exists: (6 νόμος) προσετέθη, was added to (su- 
pervened upon) se. the ἐπαγγελία, Gal. iii. 19 R LT Tr 
WII; τὶ ἐπί τινι, some thing to (upon) a thing (which 
has preceded [cf. ἐπί, B. 2 d.]), Lk. iii. 20; ri ἐπί re, to 
a thing that it may thereby be increased, Mt. vi. 27 ; Lk. 
xii. 25. In imitation of the Hebr. (327) the mid. (in 
the Sept. the active also) foll. by an inf. signifies (to add 
i. e.) to go on to do a thing, for to do further, do again, (as 


προστρέχω 


Gen. iv. 2; viii. 12; xviii. 39): προσέθετο πέμψαι (20) 
row), he continued to send (as he had already sent), 
Lk. xx. 11, 12, (i. q. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν, Mk. xii. 4); προσ- 
ἔθετο συλλαβεῖν καὶ IIérpov, he besides apprehended Peter 
also [ A.V. he proceeded ete.], Acts xii. 3; in the same 
way also the ptep. is used with a finite verb: προσθεὶς 
εἶπεν, i. e. he further spake [ A. V. he added and spake}, 
Lk. xix. 11 (προσθεῖσα ἔτεκεν, Gen. xxxviii. 5 ; προσθέμενος 
ἔλαβε γυναῖκα, Gen. xxv. 1) ; cf. W. $54,5; B. $144, 14.* 

προσ-τρέχω ; 2 aor. act. ptep. προσδραμών; to run to: 
Mk. ix. 15; x. 17; Acts viii. 30. (From Arstph. and 
Xen. down; for 115 in Gen. xviii. 2, ete.) * 

προσφάγιον, -ov, τό, (προσφαγεῖν [cf. πρός, IV. 27), i.q. 
ὄψον (on which see ὀψάριον), any thing eaten with bread 
(Moeris [ed. Piers. p. 274, 1]: ὄψον ἀττικῶς, προσφάγιον 
ἑλληνικῶς) : spoken of fish boiled or broiled, Jn. xxi. 5 
(Schol., Lexx., [Moschion 55 p. 26; Roehl, Inserr. graec. 
395 a.12]). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 697 sq.; 
Sturz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 191.* 

πρόσφατος, -ov, (fr. πρό and σφάω or σφάζω; cf. De- 
litzsch, Com. on Hebr. [as below] p. 478; [cf. Lob. Tech- 
nol. p. 106) ; 1. prop. lately slaughtered, freshly 
killed: Hom. Il. 24, 757. 2. univ. recently or very 
lately made, new: ὁδός, Heb. x. 20 (so fr. Aeschyl. down ; 
φίλος πρόσφατος, Sir. ix. 10; οὐκ ἔστι πᾶν πρόσφατον ὑπὸ 
τὸν ἥλιον, Eccl. i. 9). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 374 sq.* 

προσφάτως, adv., (see the preceding word), lately: Acts 
xviii. 2. (Deut. xxiv. 7 (5); Ezek. xi. 3; Judith iv. 3, 
5; 2 Macc. xiv. 36; Polyb., Alciphr., al.)* 

προσ-φέρω; ἱπιρῖ. προσέφερον; 1 aor. mpoonveyxa; 2 aor. 
προσήνεγκον ; pf. προσενήνοχα (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres. 
προσφέρομαι; 1 aor. προσηνέχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φέρω] ; 
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 
ΞΖ ΡΠ also for $377, 211, ete., sometimes also for n»m 
where offering sacrifices i is spoken of (as 1 K. xviii. 36 
Compl.; 2€ m xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring 
to, lead to: τινά τινι, one to a person who can heal him 
or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24; 
viii. 16; ix. 2,32; xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (sc. τινά) 
T WH Tr mrg.; x. 13; Lk.xviii. 15; pass. in Mt. xii. 
22 [where L WII txt. act.]; xviii. 24 R GT; xix. 13; — 
one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; 
τινὰ ἐπὶ Tas συναγωγὰς kai Tas ἀρχάς, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52, 
3] (where T Tr txt. WH εἰσφέρωσιν). προσφέρω τι, to 
bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; τί τινι, to reach or 
hand a thing to one, Mt. xxii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 36 [here A.V. 
offering]; τὶ τῷ στόματί twos, to put to, Jn. xix. 29; a 
thing to one that he may accept it, to offer: χρήματα, 
Acts viii. 18; δῶρα, Mt. ii. 11; used, as often in the 
Sept., of persons offering sacrifices, gifts, prayers to God 
(cf. Kurtz, Brief a. d. Hebr. p. 154 sqq.) : τῷ θεῷ σφάγια 
καὶ θυσίας, Acts νἱῖ. 2; θυσίαν, Heb. xi. 4; Aarpeiay, Jn. 
Xvi. 2; προσφέρειν δῶρον or δῶρα sc. τῷ θεῷ, Mt. v. 23, 
24; viii. 4; Heb. viii. 3, 4; ix. 9 ; θυσίαν, Heb. x. 12; plur., 
Heb. x. 1, 11; [pass. ibid. 2; θυσίας (R G -av) καὶ προσ- 
φορὰς (RG -pàv) kai ὁλοκαυτώματα Kat περὶ ἁμαρτίας, ibid. 
8]; δῶρά re καὶ θυσίας ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν, to expiate [see 


ὑπέρ, I. 4] sins, Heb. v. 1; αἷμα ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τῶν τοῦ 


550 


προσωπολήπτης 


λαοῦ ἀγνοημάτων, Heb. ix. 7; τὴν προσφορὰν ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς 
ἑκάστου, pass. Acts xxi. 26; προσφέρειν used absol. [ef. 
W. 593 (552)]: περί τινος, on account of [see περί, I. c. 
B.], Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; περὶ rod λαοῦ περὶ [RG ὑπὲρ 
(see περί, I. c. 8.) ] ἁμαρτιῶν, to offer expiatory sacrifices 
for the people, Heb. v. 3; τινά, sc. τῷ θεῷ, to offer up, i.e. 
immolate, one, Heb. xi. 17; ἑαυτόν, of Christ, Heb. vii. 27 
T Trmrg. WH mrg.; ix. [14], 25; προσενεχθείς (the pas- 
sive pointing to the fact that what he suffered was due to 
God's will) ibid. 28, (it is hardly to be found in native 
Grk. writ. used of offering sacrifices ; but in Joseph. antt. 
3, 9, 3, we have ἄρνα καὶ ἔριφον) ; πρός τινα (God) δεήσεις 
τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας, Heb. v. 7 (προσφέρειν δέησιν, Achill. Tat. 
7,1; τῷ θεῷ εὐχήν, Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 3,8, 8). 2. The 
pass. with the dat. signifies to be borne towards one, to 
attack, assail; then figuratively, to behave one's self to- 
wards one, deal with one: ὡς υἱοῖς ὑμῖν προσφέρεται ὁ 
θεός, Heb. xii. 7 (very often so in Attie writ. fr. Thuc. 
and Xen. down; Philo de Josepho $ 10; de ebrietate 
$16; Joseph. b. j. 7, 8,1; Aelv.h.12,27; Hdian. 1, 13, 
14 [7 ed. Bekk.]).* 

προσφιλής, -és, (πρός and φιλέω), acceptable, pleasing, 
ΓΑ. V. lovely]: Phil.iv.8. (From [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 
down; Sir. iv. 7; xx. 13.)* 

προσ-φορά, -ás, 7), (προσφέρω), offering; i. e. Hr 
the act of offeri ing, a bringing to, (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.). 
2. that which is offered, a gift, a present, (Soph. O.C. 
1270; "Theophr. char. 30 sub fin.). In the N. T. a sac- 
rifice [.A.V. offering], whether bloody or not: Acts xxi. 
26; xxiv. 17; Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5, 8, 14, (Sir. xiv. 11; 
xxxi. (xxxiv.) 21 (19) ; xxxii. (xxxv.) 1, 6 (8); once for 
717122, Ps. xxxix. (xl) 7) ; περὶ ἁμαρτίας, offering for sin, 
expiatory sacrifice, Heb. x. 18; with the gen. of the ob- 
ject, τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ Xp. Heb. x. 10; τῶν ἐθνῶν, the 
sacrifice which I offer in turning the Gentiles to God, 
Ro. xv. 16.* 

προσ-φωνέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. προσεφώνει; 1 aor. 
προσεφώνησα; 1. to call to; to address by calling: 
absol., Lk. xiii. 12; xxiii. 20 (where L WH add αὐτοῖς) ; 
Acts xxi. 40, (Hom. Od. 5, 159 ete.) ; with the dat. of 
a pers. [cf: W. 36], Mt. xi. 16; Lk. vii. 32; Acts xxii. 2, 
(Diog. Laért. 7, 7). 2. to call to one’s self, summon: 
τινά (so the better Grk. writ. ; see Matthiae $402 b.; [W. 
$ 52, 4, 14]), Lk. vi. 13.* 

πρόσ-χυσις, -ews, 7, (προσχέω to pour on), a pouring 
or sprinkling upon, affusion : τοῦ αἰματοῦ; Heb. xi. 28. 
(Eccles. writ. [e. g. Just. M. apol. 2, 12 p. 50 d.].)* 

προσ-Ψψαύω, (0 UU τινί [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], a thing, 
Lk. xi. 46. (Pind., Soph., Byzant. writ.)* 

προσωποληπτέω (L'T Tr WH -λημπτέω [see M, μ]), τῶ; 
a Hellenistic verb (derived fr. the foll. word [ef. Win. 33, 
101 (96)]), to respect the person (i. e. the external condi- 
tion of a man), to have respect of persons: Jas. ii. 9.* 

προσωπο-λήπτης (LT Tr WH -λήμπτης [see M, μ7), του; 
6, (a Hellenistie formation fr. πρόσωπον and λαμβάνω; 
see λαμβάνω, I. 4 p. 370° bot.), an accepter [A. V. re- 
specter] of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptor): Acts x. 
34. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Chrysost. ].* 


τροσωποληψία 


προσωποληψία (1, T Tr WH -λημψία [see M, μ7), -as, 
7. (a Hellenistic formation; [see προσωπολήπτης |), 76- 
spect of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptio), partiality, 
the fault of one who when called on to requite or to give 
judgment has respect to the outward circumstances of 
men and not to their intrinsic merits, and so prefers, as 
the more worthy, one who is rich, high-born, or power- 
ful, to another who is destitute of such gifts: Ro. ii. 11; 
Eph. vi. 9; Col. iii. 25 ; plur. (which relates to the vari- 
ous occasions and instances in which this fault shows 
itself [cf. W. 176 (166); B. $123, 2, 2]), Jas. ii. 1. (Ee- 
cles. writ.)* 

πρόσωπον, -ov, τό, (fr. πρός and ὦψ, cf. μέτωπον), fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. hundreds of times for 0°32, also for 
DDN, ete. ; d a. the face, i. e. the anterior part 
of the human head: Mt. vi. 16, 17; xvii. 2; xxvi. 67; 
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk.[ix.29]; xxii. 64 [T Tr WH om. Lehm. 
br. the cl.]; Acts vi. 15; 2 Co. iii. 7, 13, 18; [xi. 20]; Rev. 
iv. 7; ix. 7; x. 1 ; τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως, the face with 
which one is born [ A. V. his natural face], Jas. i. 23; 
πίπτειν ἐπὶ πρόσ. [cf. W. $ 27, 1 n.; 122 (116)] and ἐπὶ τὸ 
πρόσ., Mt. xvii. 6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; 1 Co. 
xiv. 25; [Rev. vii. 11 Rec.; int. ἐπὶ rà mpóa., Rev. xi. 
16; vii. 11 GL T Tr WH); ἀγνοούμενός τινι τῷ προσώπῳ, 
unknown to one by face, i.e. personally unknown, Gal. i. 
22; bereaved of one προσώπῳ, οὐ καρδίᾳ [ Δ. V. in pres- 
ence, not in heart], 1 ΤῊ. ii. 17; κατὰ πρόσωπον, in or 
towards (i. e. so as to look into) the face, i. e. before, in 
the presence of, [see κατά, II. 1 c.]: opp. to ἀπών, 2 Co. x. 
1; with τινός added, before (the face of) one, Lk. ii. 31; 
Acts iii. 13; ἔχω τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον, i.e. to have one 
present in person [A. V. face to face], Acts xxv. 16; 
ἀντέστην κατὰ πρόσωπον, I resisted him to the face (with 
a suggestion of fearlessness), Gal. ii. 11, (κατὰ πρόσωπον 
λέγειν τοὺς λόγους, Polyb. 25, 5, 2; add Job xvi. 8; but 
in Deut. vii. 24; ix. 2; Judg. ii. 14; 2 Chr. xiii. 7, ἀντι- 
στῆναι κατὰ πρόσ. τινος simply denotes to stand against, 
resist, withstand); rà κατὰ πρόσ. the things before the 
face, i. e. open, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7. Expressions 
modelled after the Hebrew: ὁρᾶν τὸ πρόσωπόν twos, to 
see one’s face, see him personally, Acts xx. 25; Col. ii. 1; 
ἰδεῖν, 1 Th. ii. 17; iii. 10; θεωρεῖν, Acts xx. 38 [cf. θεωρέω, 
2a.]; particularly, βλέπειν τὸ πρόσ. τοῦ θεοῦ (see βλέπω, 
1 b. 8.), Mt. xviii. 10; ὁρᾶν τ. mp. T. θεοῦ (see ὁράω, 1), 
Rev. xxii. 4; ἐμφανισθῆναι τῷ προσ. τοῦ θεοῦ, lo appear 
before the face of God, spoken of Christ, the eternal 
priest, who has entered into the heavenly sanctuary, 
Heb. ix. 24; in imitation of the Hebr. ma-ow 022 
we have the phrase πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον, face (turned 
[see πρός, I. 1 a. p. 541"]) to face (εἶδόν twa, Gen. xxxii. 
30; Judg. vi. 22): trop. βλέπω se. τὸν θεόν, see God face 
to face, i.e. discern perfectly his nature, will, purposes, 
i Co. xiii. 12; ἃ person is said to be sent or to go πρὸ 
προσώπου τινός (/3 ^32) [cf. W. $65, 4 b. fin.; B. 319 
(214)], i.e. before one, to announce his coming and re- 
move the obstacles from his way, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; 
Lk. i. 76; vii. 27, (Mal. iii. 1); ix. 52; x. 1; πρὸ προσ. 
τινός, (of time) before a thing, Acts xiii. 24 (so 139) in 


551 








πρόσωπον 


Am. i. 1; Zech. viii. 10; where the Sept. simply πρό [ef. 
πρό, b. p. 536” bot.]). πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς 86- 
Ens τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, that we may 
bring forth into the light the knowledge of the glory of 
God as it shines in the face of Jesus Christ, 2 Co. iv. 6 
(Paul really means, the majesty of God manifest in the 
person of Christ; but the signification of πρόσωπον 
is ‘face,’ and Paul is led to use the word by what he had 
said in iii. 13 of the brightness visible in the face of 
Moses). b. countenance, look (Lat. vultus), i. e. the 
face so far forth as it is the organ of sight, and (by its 
various movements and changes) the index of the inward 
thoughts and feelings: κλίνειν τὸ πρόσ. εἰς τὴν γῆν, to bow 
the face to the earth (a characteristic of fear and anx- 
iety), Lk. xxiv. 5;  Hebraistie phrases relating to the 
direction of the countenance, the look: 7ó πρόσωπον TOU 
κυρίου ἐπί τινα, sc. ἐστίν, the face of the Lord is (turned) 
upon one, i.e. he looks upon and watches him, 1 Pet. iii. 12 
(fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 17); στηρίζειν τὸ πρόσ. (Hebr. ns? 
or D'23 12; ef. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1109 on the same 
form of expression in Syriae, Arabic, Persian, Turkish) 
ToU πορεύεσθαι eis with an ace. of the place [ A.V. stead- 


Jüstly to set one's face to go ete. (see στηρίζω. a.) ], Lk. ix. 


51; moreover, even τὸ πρόσ. τινός ἐστι πορευόμενον eis 
with ace. of place, ib. 53 (τὸ πρόσωπόν σου πορευύμενον 
ἀπὸ προσώπου τινὸς φεύ- 
yew, to fice in terror from the face (Germ. Anblick) of 
one enraged, Rev. xx. 11; κρύπτειν τινά etc. (see κρύπτω, 
a.), Rev. vi. 16; ἀνάψυξις ἀπὸ προσώπου θεοῦ, the re- 
freshing which comes from the bright and smiling coun- 
tenance of God to one seeking comfort, Acts iii. 20 (19); 
on 2 Th. i. 9 see ἀπό, p. 59* mid.; μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου, 
sc. ὄντα, in the presence of thy joyous countenance [see 
μετά, I. 2 b. 8.], Acts ii. 28 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11); εἰς 
πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν, turned unto [i. e. in (R.V.)] the 
face of the churches as the witnesses of your zeal, 2 Co. 
viii. 24; ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων . . . διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαρι- 
στηθῇ, that from many faces (turned toward God and ex- 
pressing the devout and grateful feelings of the soul) 
thanks may be rendered by many (accordingly, both ἐκ 
πολλ. προσ. and διὰ πολλῶν belong to εὐχαριστηθῇ [cf. 
Meyer ad loe.; see below]), 2 Co. i. 11. ἀπὸ προσώπου 
τινός ("3 5292), from the sight or presence of one, Acts v. 
41; vii. 45 [here A.V. before the face; Rev. xii.14]; ἐν 
προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ, in the presence of Christ, i. e. Christ 
looking on (and approving), 2 Co. ii. 10 (Prov. viii. 30) ; 
[some would render πρόσωπον here and in i. 11 above 
person (cf. R. V.) : — here nearly i. q. on the part of (Vulg. 
in persona Christi); there i. q. ‘an individual’ (Plut. de 
garrul. 13 p. 509 b.; Epiet. diss. 1, 2,7; Polyb. 8, 13, 5; 
12, 27,10; 27,6, 4; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1; 47,6; Phryn. 
p. 379, and Lobeck’s note p. 380)]. c. IHebrais- 
tically, the appearance one presents by his wealth or pov- 
erty, his rank or low condition; outward circumstances, 
external. condition ; so used in expressions which denote 
to regard the person in one's judgment and treatment of 
men: βλέπειν els πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. 
xii. 14; θαυμάζειν πρόσωπα, Jude 16 ; λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον 


ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν, 2 S. xvii. 11) : 


προτάσσω 


(rwás), Lk. xx. 21; Gal. ii. 6, (on which see βλέπω, 2 c., 
θαυμάζω, λαμβάνω, 1. 4). καυχᾶσθαι ἐν προσώπῳ καὶ οὐ 
καρδίᾳ, to glory in those things which they simulate 
in look, viz. piety, love, righteousness, although their 
heart is devoid of these virtues, 2 Co. v. 12, cf. 1 S. xvi. 
1. 2. the outward appearance of inanimate things 
[A. V. face (exe. in Jas. as below)]: τοῦ ἄνθους, Jas. i. 
11; τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τῆς γῆς, Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. WH reject 
the pass.]; Lk. xii. 56 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 30); (so in Lat., 
naturae vullus, Ovid. metam. 1, 6; maris facies, Verg. 
Aen. 5, 768; on this use of the noun facies see Gell. noc- 
tes atticae 13, 29); surface: τῆς yrs, Lk. xxi. 35; Acts 
xvii. 26 [on the omitted art. here cf. ras, I. 1 c.], (Gen. 
IG 8.6 bite) Fae 

προ-τάσσω : pf. pass. ptep. προτεταγμένος ; 1. to 
place before. 2. to appoint before, define beforehand : 
χρόνον, Soph. Trach. 164; καιρούς, pass. Acts xvii. 26 
Rec. (see προστάσσω, 2); νόμους, pass. 2 Mace. viii. 36.* 

προ-τείνω : 1 aor. προέτεινα ; [fr. Hdt. down]; to stretch 
forth, stretch out: ὡς προέτειναν [ Kec. -vev] αὐτὸν τοῖς ipa- 
ow, when they had stretched him out for the thongs i. e. 
to receive the blows of the thongs, (by tying him up to 
a beam or a pillar; for it appears from vs. 29 that Paul 
had already been bound), Acts xxii. 25 [W. § 31 init. ; 
al. (cf. R. V. txt.) ‘with the thongs’ (cf. iuas) J.* 

πρότερος, -a, -ov, (compar. of mpd), [fr. Hom. down], be- 
Sore, prior ; of time, former: ἡ προτέρα ἀναστροφή, Eph. 
iv. 22. Neut. adverbially, before (something else is or 
was done): Jn. vii. 51 RG; 2 Co. i. 15; opp. to ἔπειτα, 
Heb. vii. 27; before i.e. aforetime, in time past: Jn. vii. 
50 [L Tr WH]; Heb. iv. 6; and RG in 1 Tim. i. 13; also 
τὸ πρότερον (contrasting the past with the present [cf. 
πάλαι, 1 fin.]), Jn. vi. 62; ix. 8, and L T Tr WH in 1 Tim. 
i. 13, (1 Macc. iii. 46; v. 1; xi. 34, 39 ; Deut. ii. 12; Josh. 
xi 10; Hdt. 7, 75; Xen., Plat.) ; i.q. our the first time, 
Gal. iv. 13 (on which cf. Meyer); it is placed between 
the art. and the noun, as αἱ πρότερον ἡμέραι, the former 
days, Heb. x. 32; αἱ πρότ. ἐπιθυμίαι, the lusts which you 
formerly indulged, 1 Pet. i. 14.* 

προ-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. προεθέμην; [fr. Hom. down]; 
1. to place before, to set forth, [cf. πρό, d. a.]; spec. to 
set forth to be looked at, expose to view: Ex. xl. 4; 4 Macc. 
viii. 11; Ael. v.h. 14, 8; and often in the mid. in this 
sense: ποτήρια ἀργύρεά re kai χρύσεα, his own cups, Hat. 
3, 148; to expose to public view, in which sense it is the 
technieal term with profane authors in speaking of the 
bodies of the dead, [to let lie in state], (cf. Passow s. v. I. 2; 
[L. and S. s. v. IT. 1]; Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 115 e.; 
[Krüger on Thuc. 2, 34, 1]) ; the mid. points to the own- 
er of the thing exposed: so with τινά and a pred. acc. 
Ro. iii. 25 (the mid. seems to denote that it was his 
own Son whom he thus “set forth”; cf. viii. 32). 2. 
Mid. to set before one's self, propose to one's self; to 
purpose, determine, (Plato, Polyb., al.) : foll. by the inf. 
Ro. i. 13; with an ace. of the thing and ἐν αὐτῷ [(sic) ; 
see αὑτοῦ] added, in himself (W. $38, 6; [cf. p. 152 
(144)]), Eph. i. 9; [al. (reading ἐν αὐτῷ with L T Tr 
WH) render ‘in him,’ i. e. (probably) Christ].* 


552 








προφητεύω 


προ-τρέπω: 1 aor. mid. ptep. προτρεψάμενος ; lo urge 
Jorwards, exhort, encourage, (often so by Attic writ.,. 
both in the act. and the mid.): Acts xviii. 27. (Sap. 
xiv. 18; 2 Mace. xi. 7. [From Hom. down.]) * 

mpo-rpéxo : 2 aor. προέδραμον; to run before, to outrun: 
Jn. xx. 4; with ἔμπροσθεν added, i. e. ahead, in advance, 
[ R. V. ‘to run on before’), cf. W. 603 (561); [B. $ 151, 
27], Lk. xix. 4; ump. with the gen. of a pers. Tob. xi. 2. 
(1 S. viii. 11; Xen., Isocr., Theophr., al.) * 

mpo-Um-ápxo: impf. προῦπῆρχον; fr. Thuc. and Plato 
down; to be before, exist previously: with a ptep. Acts 
viii. 9; προὐπῆρχον ὄντες, Lk. xxiii. 12; cf. Bornemann, 
Schol. ad h. 1.; W. 350 (328); [B. § 144, 14].* 

πρό-φασις, -ews, 7, (προφαίνω, i. e. prop. ‘to cause to 
shine before’ [or * forth’; "but many derive πρόφασις di- 
rectly fr. πρό-φημι]), fr. Hom. down; a. a pretext 
(alleged reason, pretended cause) : τῆς πλεονεξίας, such as 
covetousness is wont to use, 1 Th. ii. 5 ([A. V. cloak of 
covelousness | the meaning being, that he had never mis- 
used his apostolic office in order to disguise or to hide ava-- 
ricious designs) ; πρόφασιν ἔχειν (a phrase freq. in Grk. 
auth., cf. Passow s. v. mp. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 1251^; [L. and S. 
s. v. I. 3 e.]) περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Jn. xv. 22 [A. V. mrg. R.V. 
excuse ]. b. show: προφάσει ὡς κτλ. [ A. V.] under 
color as though they would ete. Acts xxvii. 30; προφάσει, 
[A. V. for a pretence], in pretence, ostensibly : Mt. xxiii. 
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk.xx. 47; Phil. i. 18.* 

mpo-bépo ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bring forth: τὶ ἔκ τινος, 
Lk. vi. 45.* 

προφητεία, -as, 7, (προφητεύω, q. v.), Hebr. 7812), 
prophecy, i. e. discourse emanating from divine inspira- 
tion and declaring the purposes of God, whether by re- 
proving and admonishing the wicked, or comforting the: 
afflicted, or revealing things hidden; esp. by foretell- 
ing future events. Used in the N. T.— of the utter- 
ances of the O. T. prophets: Mt. xiii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 20, 21 
(on this pass. see γίνομαι, 5 6. a.) ; — of the prediction of 
events relating to Christ's kingdom and its speedy tri-- 
umph, together with the consolations and admonitions 
pertaining thereto: Rev. xi. 6; xxii.19; τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς 
προφητείας, the spirit of prophecy, the divine mind, to. 
which the prophetic faculty is due, Rev. xix. 10; οἱ λόγοι 
τῆς προφητείας, Rev. i.3; xxii. 7, 10, 18; — of the endow- 
ment and speech of the Christian teachers called zpo- 
ira (see προφήτης, II. 1f.): Ro-xii.6; 1 Co. xii. 10; 
xiii.2; xiv.6, 22; plur. the gifts and utterances of 
these prophets, 1 Co. xiii.8; 1 Th. v. 20;— spec. of the 
prognostieation of those achievements which one set 
apart to teach the gospel will accomplish for the king- 
dom of Christ, 1 Tim. iv. 14; plur. i. 18 [see zpoáyo, 2 a. 
and cf. the Comm.]. ([Sept., Joseph.]; among native: 
Grk. writ. used only by Leian. Alex. 40, 60 ; [to which. 
add inserr. (see L. and S. s. v. I.) ].)* 

προφητεύω ; fut. προφητεύσω ; impf. προεφήτευον (Acts: 
xix. 6 RG) and ἐπροφήτευον (ibid. L'T Tr WH; [1 K. 
xxii. 12]; Jer. [ii. 8]; xxiii. 21; xxv. 13); 1 aor. προεφή- 
revoa (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi. 13; xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. i. 
67; [Jn. xi. 51; Jude 14]) and ἐπροφήτευσα (which form 


προφήτης 


cod. Sin. gives everywh., and T Tr WH have everywh. 
restored, and Lchm. also with the single exception of 
Jude 14; add, Sir. xlviii. 13; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii. 
(xxvi.) 9, 11, 20; xxxv. (xxviii.) 8; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31 ; 
the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms 
mpoedrjrevov, προεφήτευσα, pf. ptcp. προπεφητευκώς, Eus. 
h.e. 5, 17; pf. pass. inf. προπεφητεῦσθαι, Clem. Alex. 
strom. p. 603; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto's 
prolege. to his works, I. i. p. Ixxv. ed. 3; cf. [ WH. App. 
p.162; Veitch s. v.]; W. $12, 5; [B. 35 (30 sq.)]; cf. 
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 268; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]); (προφήτης, 
4: V-) ; Sept. for $33 and $3307; Vulg. propheto [three 
times prophetizo]; to prophesy, i.e. to be a prophet, 
speak forth by divine inspiration; to predict (Hdt., Pind., 
Kur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; a. univ. : Mt. vii. 22. b. 
with the idea of foretelling future events pertaining esp. to 
the kingdom of God: Mt. xi. 13; Acts ii. 17, 18; xxi. 9; 
περί twos, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 10; ἐπί τινι, over 
i. e. concerning one (see ἐπί, D. 2 f. 8. p. 234^), Rev. x. 11; 
εἴς τινα (i. e. Christ), Barn. ep. 5,6 ; προφ. foll. by λέγων 
with the words uttered by the prophet, Jude 14; foll. by 
ὅτι, Jn. xi. 51. c. to utter forth, declare, a thing 
which can only be known by divine revelation: Mt. xxvi. 68; 
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64, cf. vii. 39; Jn. iv. 19. d. 
to break forth under sudden impulse in lofty discourse or 
in praise of the divine counsels: Lk. i. 67; Acts xix. 6, (1 
S. x. 10,11; xix. 20, 21, etc.) ; or, under the like prompt- 
ing, to teach, refute, reprove, admonish, comfort others (see 
προφήτης, II. 1 f.), 1 Co. xi. 4, 5; xiii. 9; xiv. 1, 3, 4, 5, 
24, 31, 39. e. to act as a prophet, discharge the 
prophetic office: Kev. xi. 3. [On the word see Trench, 
N. T. Syn. § vi.]* 

προφήτης, -ov, ὁ, (πρόφημι, to speak forth, speak out; 
hence prop. ‘one who speaks forth’; see πρό, d. a.), Sept. 


for w23 (which comes fr. the same root as ΓΞ ‘to di- 


vulge,’ ‘make known,’ ‘announce’ [ef. Fleischer in De- 
litzsch, Com. ii. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore 
prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, cf. iv. 16; hence an in- 
terpreter or spokesman for God; one through whom God 
speaks; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in d. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309 
[B. D. s. v. Prophet and reff. there; esp. also Day's 
note on Oehler's O. T. Theol. $ 161, and W. Robertson 
Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]), 
one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; Dein 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an 
interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or 
the μάντεις), or of other hidden things. 2. a fore- 
teller, soothsayer, seer. II. In the N. T. d. 
one who, moved by the Spirit of God and hence his organ 
or spokesman, solemnly declares to men what he has re- 
ceived by inspiration, esp. future events, and in particular 
such as relate to the cause and kingdom of God and to hu- 
man salvation. "The title is applied to a. the O. T. 
prophets, — and with allusion to their age, life, death, 
deeds: Mt. v. 12; xii. 39; xiii. 17; xxiii. 29-31; Mk. vi. 
15; Lk. iv. 27; x. 24 ; xi. 47; xiii. 28; Jn. viii. 52, 53; 
Acts iii. 25; vii. 52; xiii. 20; Ro. xi. 3; 1 Th. ii. 15; Heb. 


558 











προφήτης 


xi. 32; Jas.v. 10; appeal is made to their utterances as 
having foretold the kingdom, deeds, death, of Jesus the 
Messiah: Mt. 1.22; 11.5, 15, 17, 28; i111. 3; iv. 14; viii. 
17; xi.13; xii. 17; xili.35; xxi. 4; xxiv. 15; xxvi. 56/5 
xxvii. 9; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec. ; Lk. i. 70; iii. 45 iv. 17 ; xviii. 
31; xxiv. 25; Jn. i. 22, 45 (46) ; xii. 38; Actsii. 16; iii. 
18, 21, 24; vii. 37, 48; x.43; xiii. 27; xv. 15; xxvi. 22 sq.; 
Ro.i.2; Heb.i.1; 1 Pet. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 2; Rev. x. 7; 
in the number of prophets David also is reckoned, as one 
who predicted the resurrection of Christ, Acts ii. 30 sq.;. 
so too is Balaam, 2 Pet. ii. 16 (see Βαλαάμ). by meton. 
προφῆται is put for the books of the prophets: Lk. xxiv. 
27,44; Acts viii. 28; xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; ἐν 
rois προφήταις, i. q. ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν mpod. (Acts vii. 42), in 
the volume of the prophets (which in Hebr. has the title 
D'8W22), Jn. vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40; — or for the teaching 
set forth in their books: Mt. v. 17 ; vii. 12; xxii. 40; 
Lk. xvi. 29, 31; Acts xxvi. 27. See vópos, 4. b. 
John the Baptist, the herald of Jesus the Messiah: 
Mt. xxi. 26; Mk. vi. 15; xi. 32; Lk.i. 76; xx. 6, whom 
Jesus declares to be greater than the O. T. prophets, be- 
cause in him the hope of the Jews respecting Elijah as 
the forerunner of the Messiah was fulfilled: Mt. xi. 9— 
11, 14, (cf. xvii. 11, 12; Mk. ix. 12 sq.) ; Lk. vii. 28[R G 
ΠΤ ΡΣ: ο. That illustrious prophet whom the 
Jews (apparently on the ground of Deut. xviii. 15) ex- 
pected to arise just before the Messiah’s advent: Jn. i. 
21, 25; vii. 40. those two illustrious prophets, the one 
Elijah, the other Enoch or Moses [but cf. the Comm. ; 
e. g. Stuart, Com. vol. ii. p. 219 sq.], who according to 
the writer of the Apocalypse will publicly appear shortly 
before the visible return of Christ from heaven: Rey. xi- 
10 (ef. 3). d. the Messiah: Acts iii. 22, 23; vii. 37, 
after Deut. xviii. 15; Jesus the Messiah, inasmuch as he 
is about to fulfil the expectation respecting this Messiah, 
Mt. xxi. 11; Jn. vi. 14. e. univ. a man filled with 
the Spirit of God, who by God's authority and command in 
words of weight pleads the cause of God and urges the sal- 
vation of men: Mt. xxi. 46; Lk. xiii. 33; xxiv. 19; Jn. 
vii. 52; in the proverb that a prophet is without honor in 
his own country, Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; Lk. iv. 24; Jn. 
iv. 44. he may be known — now by his supernatural 
knowledge of hidden things (even though past), Lk. vii. 
39; Jn. iv. 19, (προφήτης ἀληθείας ἐστὶν ὁ πάντοτε πάντα 
εἰδώς, τὰ μὲν γεγονότα ὡς ἐγένετο, τὰ δὲ γινόμενα ὡς γίνεται, 
τὰ δὲ ἐσόμενα ὡς ἔσται, Clem. hom. 2, 6), —now by his 
power of working miracles, Lk. vii. 16; xxiv. 19; Jn. ix. 
17; such a prophet Jesus is shown to have been by the 
passages cited, nor is it denied except by his enemies, Lk. 
vii. 39; Jn. vii. 52. f. The prophets that appeared 
in the apostolic age among the Christians: Mt. x. 41; 
xxiii. 34; Acts xv. 32; 1 Co.xiv. 29, 37 ; Rev. xxii. 6, 9; 
they are associated with apostles in Lk. xi. 49; 1 Co. 
xii. 28, 29; Eph. ii. 20; iii.5; iv. 11; Rev. xviii. 20; they 
discerned and did what was best for the Christian cause, 
Acts xiii. 1sq.; foretold certain future events, Acts xi. 
27sq.; xxi. 10sqq.; and in the religious assemblies of 
the Christians, being suddenly seized by the Spirit (whose 


σροφητικός 


promptings, however, do not impair their self-govern- 
ment, 1 Co. xiv. 32), give utterance in glowing and ex- 
alted but intelligible language to those things which the 
Holy Spirit teaches them, and which have power to in- 
struct, comfort, encourage, rebuke, convict, stimulate, 
their hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 24. [Cf. Harnack, Lehre der 
Zwolf Apostel, Proleg. $5 i. 2 p. 93 sqq. 119 sqq.; Bon- 
wetsch in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissen. u. s. w. 
1884, pp. 408 sqq. 460 sqq.] 8. Prophets both of the 
Old Test. and of the New are grouped together under 
the name προφῆται in Rev. xi. 18; xvi. 6; xviii. 24. 2i 
a poet (because poets were believed to sing under divine 
inspiration) : so of Epimenides, Tit. i. 12. 

προφητικός, -), -óv, (προφήτης), proceeding from a 
prophet; prophetic: Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Pet.i.19. [Philo de 
migr. Abr. § 15, ete.; Leian. Alex. 60; eccles. writ.]* 

προφῆτις, dos, 7, (προφήτης), Sept. for 733, a proph- 
etess (Vulg., Tertull. prophetissa, prophetis), a woman to 
whom future events or things hidden from others are at 
times revealed, either by inspiration or by dreams and 
visions: Lk. ii. 36; Rev.ii.20. In Grk. usage, a female 
who declares or interprets oracles (Eur., Plat., Plut.) : 7 
προφῆτις τῆς ἀληθείας ἱστορία, Diod. 1, 3." 

προ-φθάνω: 1 aor. προέφθασα; to come before, to antici- 
pale: αὐτὸν προέφθασε λέγων, he spoke before him [R.V. 
spake first to him], or anticipated his remark, Mt. xvii. 
25. (Aeschyl, Eur., Arstph., Plut.; Sept.) * 

προ-χειρίζω (πρόχειρυς at hand [cf. πρό, d. a.] or ready): 
1 aor. mid. προεχειρισάμην; pf. pass. ptep. προκεχειρισμέ- 
vos; to put into the hand, to deliver into the hands; far 
more freq. in the mid. to take into one’s hands; trop. to 
set before one’s self, to propose, to determine; with an acc. 
of the pers. to choose, to appoint, (Isocr., Polyb., Dion. 
Hal., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. iii. 7; viii. 9; Ex. iv. 13) : foll. 
by an inf. of purpose, Acts xxii. 14; twa with a pred. 
acc. Acts xxvi. 16; twa with a dat. of the pers. for one's 
use, Josh. iii. 12; for one's salvation, pass. Acts iii. 20 for 
Rec. προκεκηρυγμένον (cf. προκηρύσσω, 2).* 

Trpo-xetpo-rovéo, -à : pf. pass. ptep. προκεχειροτονημένος ; 
(see xe«porovéo) ; to choose or designate beforehand: Acts 
x. 41. (Plat. lege. 6 p. 765 b. c., [Aeschin., Dem.], Dio 
Cass. 50, 4.) * 

Πρόχορος, [-ov, 6, (lit. ‘leader of the dance’)], Proch’- 
orus, one of the seven ‘deacons’ of the church at Jeru- 
salem: Acts vi. 5.* 

πρύμνα, -ης, 7, (fem. of the adj. πρυμνός, -7, -όν, last, 
hindmost; used substantively with recessive accent; [cf. 
W. 22)), fr. Hom. down, the stern or hinder part of a 
ship: Mk. iv. 38; Acts xxvii. 29; opp. to papa, ib. 41." 

πρωΐ [WH πρωί (cf. I, « fin.)] (Attie πρῷ [cf. W. $5, 
4 d. ]), adv., (fr. πρό), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for ὝΡΞ, 
in the morning, early, (opp. to ὀψέ) : Jn. xviii. 28 GL T 
Tr WH; Mt. xvi. 3 (opp. here to ὀψίας γενομένης [but 
T br. WH reject the pass.]) ; [xxi. 18 T Tr txt. WH]; 
Mk.i.35; xi. 20; xvi. 9; [πρωΐ, σκοτίας ἔτι οὔσης, Jn. xx. 
1]: λίαν πρωΐ, foll. [in RG] by a gen. of the day (cf. 
Kühner § 414, 5 c. β. ii. p. 292), Mk. xvi. 2; ἅμα πρωΐ, 
Mt. xx. 1; ἐπὶ τὸ πρωΐ, Mk. xv. 1 [RG]; ἀπὸ mpot ἕως 


554 





πρῶτος 


ἑσπέρας, Acts xxviii. 23. Used spec. of the fourth watch 
of the night, i. e. the time fr. 3 o'elock in the morning 
till 6, ace. to our reckoning [(cf. B. D. s. v. Watches of 
the Night)], Mk. xiii. 35.* 

πρωΐα, see mpwios. 

πρώϊμος (for the more com. πρώϊος ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 52), T Tr WH πρόϊμος (so also cod. Sin.; [see WH. 
App. p- 1527), τη, τον, (πρωΐ), early: ὑετός, the early rain 
(Hebr. rm, Deut. xi. 14; Jer. v. 24), which fell fr. 
October on [(cf. B.D. s. v. Rain)], Jas. v. 7 [LT Tr WH 
om. ver.; cf. W. 592 (550); B. 82 (72)]. (Xen. oec. 
17, 4; Geop., al.) * 

πρωϊνός [WH πρωινός (see their App. p. 152), Tdf. 
ed. 7 mpoivds (cf. I, c) ], (for the older πρώϊος, see ὀρθρινός; 
the same term. in the Lat. serotinus, diutinus), -7, τόν, 
(πρωΐ), pertaining to the morning: ὁ ἀστὴρ «ὁ mp. Rev. 
ii. 28 (on which see ἀστήρ); xxii. 16 (where Rec. ép- 
Opwós). [Sept.; Babr., Plut., Ath., al.]* 

mpdios [ WH mparos], -a, -ov, (πρωΐ), early, pertaining 
to the morning, (fr. Hom. down); asa subst. ἡ zpoia 
(in full ἡ ὥρα ἡ πρωΐα, 3 Macc. v. 24; [Diod., Joseph., 
al.]; see ὄψιος, 2), Sept. several times for ^53, morning : 
Mt. xxvii. 1; Jn. xviii. 28 Rec.; xxi. 4 [πρωΐας ἤδη γινο- 
μένης (T WH Tr txt.), when day was now breaking (R.V.)]; 
πρωΐας, in the morning, Mt. xxi. 18 [R G L Tr mrg.].* 

πρώρα [so R (ἃ, πρῶρα Tr], more correctly πρῷρα (see 
Güttling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 142sq.; [Chandler §164; 
Etym. Magn. p. 692, 34 sq.; cf. 318, 57 sq. ; 61.1, 17)» 
-as (1, Τ WH -ης, cf. μάχαιρα, init.), ἡ, [contr. fr. πρόειρα 
fr. πρό; Lob. Pathol. Element. ii. 136, cf. Paralip. p. 215], 
fr. Hom. down; the prow or forward part of a ship [R.V. 
Joreship]: Acts xxvii. 30; in vs. 41 distinguished fr. ἡ 
πρύμνα." 

πρωτεύω; (πρῶτος); to be first, hold the first place, 
[A. V. have the pre-eminence]: Col. i. 18. (From Xen. 
and Plat. down.) * 

πρωτοκαθεδρία, -as, 7, (πρῶτος and καθέδρα q. v.), a. sit- 
ting in the first seat, the first or chief seat: Mt. xxiii. 6; 
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 43; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.) * 

πρωτο-κλισία, -as, 7, (πρῶτος and κλισία), the first re- 
clining-place, the chief place, at table [cf. Rich, Dict. of 
Rom. and Grk. Antiq. s. v. lectus tricliniaris ; the rela- 
tive rank of the several places at table varied among 
Persians, Greeks, and Romans; and what arrangement 
was currently followed by the Jews in Christ's day can 
hardly, perhaps, be determined; (yet see Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, ii. pp. 207 sq. 494)]: Mt. xxiii. 6; 
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 43 Lehm. in br.; xiv. 7, 8; xx. 46. 
( Eccles. writ.).* 

πρῶτος. n, -ov, (superl. of πρό, contr. fr. πρόατος, whence 
the Dorie zpáros; the compar. πρότερος see in its place), 
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for pow? and often for 7M8 and 
UNA, first; 1. either in time or place, in any 
succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely 
(i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the 
article: 6 πρῶτος kai ὁ ἔσχατος, i. e. the eternal One, Rev. 
i.17; ii. 8; xxii. 13; 6 πρῶτος, sc. τῶν κεκλημένων, Lk. 
xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4 N. 1; [B. 32 


πρῶτος 


(28)]), Jn. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30; plur. opp. to οἱ ἔσχα- 
τοι, Mt. xx. 16, on which see ἔσχατος, 2 a. Neut. τὸ 
πρῶτον, opp. to τὸ δεύτερον, Heb. x. 9; rà πρῶτα, opp. to 
τὰ ἔσχατα, one’s first state, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. 
i. 20; the first order of things, Rev. xxi. 4. p. 
without the article: Mt. x. 2 (πρῶτος, sc. of the apostles 
to be mentioned); plur., Mt. xix. 30; Mk. x. 31; Lk. 
xiii. 30, (on the meaning of which three pass. see ἔσχα- 
Tos, 2a.); neut. ἐν πρώτοις, [A. V. first of all], among 
the first things delivered to you by me, 1 Co. xv. 3. b. 
where it agrees with some substantive; a. anar- 
throus, and in place of an adjective: πρώτῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ) 
σαββάτου, on the first day of the week, Mk. xvi. 9; 
φυλακή, opp. to δευτέρα, Acts xii. 10; as a pred. Lk. ii. 2 
(on which ef. W. § 35, 4 N. 1; [B. $127, 31]). where 
it is added to the subject or the object of the verb (and 
we often use an adv.; W. § 54, 2; [B. $123, 9]) : εὑρίσκει 
οὗτος πρῶτος, Jn. i. 41 (42) (where L Tr WH πρῶτον) ; 
add, Jn. viii. 7; xx. 4, 8; Aets xxvii. 43; Ro. x. 19; 1 
Tim.i.16; 1 Jn.iv. 19; opp. to εἶτα, 1 Tim. ii. 13; ὁ 
πρῶτος euBás, Jn. v. 4 (the art. belongs to ἐμβάς [G T Tr 
WH om. the pass.]); but Acts xxvi. 23 πρῶτος ἐξ ava- 
στάσεως νεκρῶν is to be translated as the first. By a 
later Grk. usage it is put where πρότερος might have 
been expected with the gen. (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 717; 
Passow s. v. πρότερος, D. I. 2 c. ii. p. 1243*; [L. and S. 
ibid. B. I. 4e.]; Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. 420 sq.; W. 
835, 4 N. 1; B. $123, 14): πρῶτός μου ἦν, Jn. i. 15, 30. 
(οἱ πρῶτοί μου ταῦτα ἀνιχνεύσαντες, Ael. nat. anim. 8, 
19}: B. with the article: 6 (7, τό,) πρῶτος (-η; -ov.); 
in a series which is so complete, either in fact or in 
thought, that other members are conceived of as fol- 
lowing the first in regular order; as, τὸν πρῶτον λόγον, 
Acts i. 1; add, Mk. xiv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 16; Rev. iv. 1, 
7; xiii. 12, etc.; (opp. to ὁ ἔσχατος), ἡ mp. πλάνη, Mt. 
xxvii. 64; add, Mt. xx. 8, 10,16; 1 Co. xv. 45, etc. ; also 
*the first” of two, where Lat. usage requires and the 
Vulg. ordinarily employs prior (cf. W. [and B.] u. s.) : 
Mt. xxi. 28, 31 [L Tr WH ὕστερος; ἄλλους δούλους πλείο- 
vas τῶν πρώτων, Mt. xxi. 36; 7 πρώτη διαθήκη, Heb. viii. 
7, 135 ix. 15, 18; ἡ πρώτη, sc. διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 1 GL T 
Tr WH; σκηνή, Heb. ix. 1 Rec., 2, 6, 8; 7 mp. γῆ: ὁ mp. 
οὐρανός, Rev. xxi. 1; ἀνάστασις, Rev. xx. ὅ, 6 ; ἄνθρωπος, 
1 Co. χν. 47; foll. by ὁ δεύτερος, τρίτος, etc.: Mt. xxii. 
25; Mk. xii. 20; Lk. xix. 16; xx. 29; Rev. viii. 7; xvi. 
2; xxi. 19; foll. by ἕτερος, Lk. xvi. 5; ὁ πρῶτος, i. q. the 
former, previous, pristine: τὴν πρώτην πίστιν, the faith 
which they formerly plighted, 1 Tim. v. 12; ἡ πρώτη 
ἀγάπη, Rev. ii. 4; rà mp. ἔργα, ibid. 5. 2. first in 
rank, influence, honor ; chief; principal : without the art., 
and absol, πρῶτος chief, (opp. to δοῦλος), Mt. xx. 27; 
Mk. x. 44; opp. to ἔσχατος and διάκονος, Mk. ix. 35; 
added to a noun, principal, ἐντολή, Mt. xxii. 38; Mk. 
xii. 30 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Eph. vi. 2; with 
a partitive gen., Mk. xii. 28, 29, [see was, II. 2 b. y.]; 
*1 Tim. i. 15; with the art., Lk. xv. 22; Acts xvii. 4; oí 
πρῶτοι τῆς Ταλιλαίας, the chief men of Galilee, Mk. vi. 
21; rov λαοῦ, Lk. xix. 47; τῆς πόλεως, Acts xiii. 50; 


55 


; 
5 πρωτότοκος 


τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, Acts xxv. 2; xxviii. 17; τῆς νήσου, Acts 
xxviii. 7 [ef. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. p. 208 sq., but see Πό- 
mcos |. 3. neut. πρῶτον as adv., first, at the first; a. 
in order of time: Lk. x. 5; Jn. xviii. 18; Acts xi. 26 
[here T Tr WH πρώτως, q. v.]; foll. by etra, ἔπειτα, or 
δεύτερον, Mk. iv. 28; 1 Co. xv. 46; 1 Th.iv.16; 1 Tim. 
ii.10; foll by pera ταῦτα, Mk. xvi. 9 cf. 12; the first 
time, opp. to ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ (the second time), Acts vii. 
12,13; τὲ πρῶτον καί, first and also (or afterwards), 
i.e. as well as, Ro. i. 16 [but here L Tr mrg. WH br. 
Tp.]; ii. 9, 10; without ré, 2 Co. viii. 5; 2 Tim. i. 5. 


first i. e. before anything else is done; first of all: Mt. 


vi. 33; Lk. xi. 1; Invi. ol DD Tr WE Rodos 
Tim. v. 4; 2 Pet. i. 20; iii. 3; πρῶτον πάντων, 1 Tim. ii. 
l. firsti.e. before something else: Mt. viii. 21; Mk. 
vii. 27; ix. 11,12; Lk. xi. 38; xiv. 28; Ro. xv. 24; 2 Th. 
ii. 3; 1 Pet. iv. 17, etc. ; before other nations, Acts iii. 
26; xiii. 46; before others [R. V. the first to partake 
etc.],2 Tim. ii.6; foll. by τότε or καὶ τότε, Mt. v. 24; 
vii.5; xii. 29; Mk.iii. 27; Lk. vi. 42; ὅπ. τι. 10[| T WH 
om. L Tr br. τότε]; ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν ['Tdf. om. óp.] me 
before it hated you, Jn. xv. 18 (see 1 b. a.). τὸ πρῶτον, 
at the first i. e. at the time when one did a thing for the 
first time: Jn. x. 40; xii. 16 ; xix. 39. b. in enumer- 
ating several particulars; first. then, etc.: Ro. iii. 2; 1 
Co. xi. 18; xii. 28; Heb. vii. 2; Jas. iii. 17. 

πρωτοστάτης, -ov, 6, (πρῶτος and ἵστημι), prop. one 
who stands in the front rank, a front-rank man, (Thue., 
Xen., Polyb. Diod., Dion. Hal., al.; ὥσπερ στρατηγὸς 
πρωτοστάτης, Job xv. 24); hence, a leader, chief, cham- 
pion: trop. [ A. V. a ringleader] τῆς αἱρέσεως, Acts xxiv. 
ὯΝ 

πρωτοτόκια, -ων, τά, (πρωτότοκος), in the Sept. also 
πρωτοτοκεία [al. -κεῖα (cf. Chandler § 99), -κία, cod. Venet., 
Aq.], for 13123, primogeniture, the right of the first-born, 
(in class. Grk. ἡ πρεσβεία, and τὸ πρεσβεῖον) : Heb. xii. 
16. (Philorepeats the word after the Sept. in his alleg. 
lege. 3, 69; sacrif. Abel. §5. Occasionally also in By- 
zant. writ.) * 

πρωτότοκος, -ov, (πρῶτος, τίκτω), Sept. for 133, first- 
born; a. prop.: τὸν υἱὸν αὐτῆς τὸν πρωτ. Mt. i. 25 
(where τὸν sporór. is omitted by L T Tr WH but found 
in cod. Sin. [see Tdf., WH., ad loc.]) ; Lk. ii. 7; rà 
πρωτότοκα αὐτῶν (gen. of the possessor [(?) ; αὐτῶν is 
more naturally taken w. θίγῃ (W. $30, 8 c.), as by Prof. 
Grimm himself s. v. 6cyyávo]), the first-born whether of 
man or of beast, Heb. xi. 28 (πᾶν mporórokov .. 
ἀνθρώπου ἕως κτήνους, Ex. xii. 29; Ps. civ. (ev.) 36; [Philo 
de cherub. $16; Poll. 4, 3087). b. trop. Christ is 
called πρωτότοκος πάσης κτίσεως (partit. gen. [see below], 
as in τὰ πρωτότοκα τῶν προβάτων, Gen. iv. 4: τῶν βοῶν, 
Deut. xii. 17; τῶν υἱῶν σου, Ex. xxii. 29), who came into 
being through God prior to the entire universe of created 
things [R. V. the firstborn of all creation] (see κτίσις, 2 
b.), Col. i. 15; —this passage does not with certainty 
prove that Paul reckoned the Adyos in the number of 
created beings (as, among others, Usteri, Paulin. Lehr- 
begriff, p. 315, and Baur, Das Christenthum der drei 


5. 
+ απὸ 


πρώτως 


ersten Jahrhh. 1st ed. p. 295, hold); since even Origen, 
who is acknowledged to have maintained the eternal 
generation of the Son by the Father, did not hesitate 
to call him (cf. Gieseler, Kirch.- Gesch. i. p. 261 sq. ed. 
3; [i. 216 Eng. trans. of ed. 4, edited by Smith ]) τὸν ἀγένη- 
Tov καὶ πάσης γενετῆς φύσεως πρωτότοκον (c. Cels. 6, 17), 
and even κτίσμα (a term which Clement of Alexandria 
also uses of the λόγος) ; οἵ. Joan. Damascen. orthod. fid. 
4, 8 καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ ἡ κτίσις ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ ; [ἃ]. would 
make the gen. in Col. 1. c. depend upon the compar. force 
in (the first half of) πρωτότ. (cf. πρωτότοκος ἐγὼ ἢ σύ, 2 S. 
xix.43); but see Bp. Lehtft. ad loc. (esp. for the patris- 
tic interpretation) ]. In the same sense, apparently, he 
is called simply ὁ πρωτότοκος, Heb. i. 6 ; mp. ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν, 
the first of the dead who was raised to life, Col. i. 18; 
also τῶν νεκρῶν (partit. gen.), Rev. i. 5 [ Rec. inserts ἐκ]; 
πρωτύτοκος ἐν πολλοῖς ἀδελφοῖς, who was the Son of God 
long before those who by his agency and merits are ex- 
alted to the nature and dignity of sons of God, with the 
added suggestion of the supreme rank by which he ex- 
cels these other sons (cf. Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28; Ex. 
iv. 22; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 9), Ro. viii. 29; ἐκκλησία 
πρωτοτόκων, the congregation of the pious Christian dead 
already exalted to. the enjoyment of the blessedness of 
heaven (tacitly opp. to those subsequently to follow them 
thither), Heb. xii. 23; cf. De Wette ad loc. (Anthol. 8, 
34; 9, 913.)* 

πρώτως, adv., first: Actsxi.26 T Tr WH. Cf. Passow 
s. V. πρότερος fin. ; [L. and S. ib. B. IV.; Phryn. ed. Lob. 
p.311sq.5; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 366].* 

πταίω ; fut. πταίσω; 1 aor. ἔπταισα; (akin to IIETO 
and πίπτω [cf. Vanicek p. 466]); fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., 
and Hdt. down; 
ble or fall. 2. intrans. to stumble: δὶς πρὸς τὸν αὐτὸν 
λίθον, Polyb. 31, 19,5. trop. [cf. Eng. trip, stumble] ἃ. 
to err, to make a mistake, (Plat. Theaet. c. 15 p. 160 d.) ; 
to sin: absol. Ro. xi. 11 (ἴδιον ἀνθρώπου φιλεῖν kai τοὺς 
mraiovras, Antonin. 7, 22); πολλά, in many ways, Jas. iii. 
2; ἐν ἑνὶ (sc. νόμῳ), to stumble in, i. e. sin against, one law, 
Jas. ii. 10 [but see εἷς, 2 a. fin.]; ἐν λόγῳ (for the [more 
eom.] simple dat.), to sin in word or speech, Jas. iii. 
2. b. to fall into misery, become wretched, (often 
so in Grk. writ.): of the loss of salvation, 2 Pet. i. 10. 
[C£. προσ-παίω.} * 

πτέρνα, -ης, ἡ, the heel (of the foot): ἐπαίρειν τὴν πτέρναν 
ἐπί τινα, to lift up the heel against one, i. e. dropping the 
fiz. (which is borrowed either from kicking, or from a 
wrestler tripping up his antagonist), fo injure one by 
trickery, Jn. xiii. 18 after Ps. xl. (xli.) 10. (Often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for apr) * 

πτερύγιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of πτέρυξ, q. v.), Sept. for 
m3; 1. a wing, little wing. 2. any pointed 
extremity (of the fins of fishes, 53D, Lev. xi. 9-12; 
Deut. xiv. 9, 10; Aristot., "Theophr. ; of a part of the 
dress hanging down in the form of a wing, Ruth iii. 9; 
1 S. xxiv. 5; [Num. xv. 38]; Poll. 7, 14, 62): τὸ πτερύ- 
yeov τοῦ vao) and τοῦ ἱεροῦ, the top of the temple at Jeru- 
salem, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. h. e. 2, 23, 11; τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Mt. 


556 


1. trans. tuvd, to cause one to stum- 





| Jn. ix. 6. 


πτύω 


iv. 5; Lk. iv. 9; some understand this of the top or 
apex of the sanctuary (rod ναοῦ), others of the top of 
Solomon’s porch, and others of the top of the Royal 
Portico; this last Josephus (antt. 15, 11, 5) says was of 
such great height ὡς εἴ τις dm ἄκρου τοῦ ταύτης τέγους 
ἄμφω συντιθεὶς τὰ βάθη διοπτεύοι σκοτοδινιᾶν, οὐκ ἐξικνου- 
μένης τῆς ὄψεως εἰς ἀμέτρητον τὸν βυθόν; [cf. * Recovery 
of Jerusalem,” esp. ch. ν.7." 

πτέρυξ, -vyos, 7, (πτερόν a wing), fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
often for 332; a wing: of birds, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 
34; Rev. xii. 14; of imaginary creatures, Rev. iv. 8; ix. 
9.° 

πτηνός, -7, -όν, (πέτομαι, πτῆναι), furnished with wings ; 
winged, flying: τὰ πτηνά, birds (often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Co. xv. 39.* 

πτοέω, -@: 1 aor. pass. ἐπτοήθην;; (mroa terror); from 
Hom. down; to terrify; pass. to be terrified (Sept. chiefly 
for nnn): Lk. xxi. 9; xxiv. 37 [Trmrg. WH mrg. θροη- 
θέντες. SYN. see φοβέω, fin. ]* 

πτόησις, -ews, 7), (Wroew), terror: φοβεῖσθαι πτόησιν, i. q. 
φόβον φοβεῖσθαι, to be afraid with terror [al. take mr. 
objectively: R. V. txt. to be put in fear by any terror], 
1 Pet. iii. 6 (Prov. iii. 25); see φοβέω, 2; [W. § 32, 2; 
B. $131, 5. (1 Mace. iii. 25; Philo, quis rer. div. her. 
8 51)]." 

Πτολεμαΐς, -ἴδος, ἡ, Plolemais, a maritime city of Phoe- 
nicia, which got its name, apparently, from Ptolemy 
Lathyrus (who captured it B. c. 103, and rebuilt it more 
beautifully [cf. Joseph. antt. 13, 12, 2 sq.]) ; it is called 
in πᾶσ. i. 31 and in the Talmud jay, in the Sept. 
᾿Ακχώ, by the Greeks "Aky [on the varying accent cf. 
Pape, Eigennam. s. v. IIroAepats], and Romans Ace, and 
by modern Europeans [ Acre or] St. Jean d'Acre (from a 
church erected there in the middle ages to St. John) ; it 
is now under Turkish rule and contains about 8000 in- 
habitants (cf. Baedeker, Pal. and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 356) : 
Acts xxi. 7. (Often mentioned in the books of the Mac- 
cabees and by Josephus under the name of Πτολεμαΐς, 
cf. esp. b. j. 2, 10, 2sq. ; [see Reland, Palaest. p. 534 sqq.; 
Ritter, Palestine, Eng. trans. iv. p. 361 sqq.].) * 

πτύον, -ov, τό, freq. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, Attie 


| πτέον W. 24, [(perh. fr. r. pu ‘to cleanse’; cf. Curtius p. 


498 sq.)], a winnowing-shovel [A. V. fan; cf. B. D. s. v. 
Agriculture, sub fin.; Ach, Dict. of Antiq. s. vv. ventila- 
brum, pala 2, vannus]: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17.* 

πτύρω: [(ef. Curtius p. 706)]; to frighten, affright: 
pres. pass. ptep. zrvpopevos, Phil. i. 28.  (Hippoer., 
Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) * 

πτύσμα, -ros, τό, (πτύω, 4. v.), spittle: Jn. ix. 6 ([Hip- 
poer.], Polyb. 8, 14, 5; Or. Sibyll. 1, 365).* 

πτύσσω: 1 aor. ptep. πτύξας ; in class. Grk. fr. Hom. 
down; to fold together, roll up: τὸ βιβλίον, Lk. iv. 20 
ΓΑ. V. closed]; see ἀναπτύσσω, [and cf. Schlottmann in 


| Riehm s. v. Schrift; Strack in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Schreib- 


kunst, ete. CoMr.: ἀνα-πτύσσω.} " 

πτύω: [(Lat. spuo, our spue; Curtius §382)]; 1 aor-' 
éxtuca; fr. Hom. down; to spit: Mk. vii. 33; viii. 23; 
[Comp.: ék-, éu-rrie.]* 


πτῶμα 


πτῶμα, -τος, τό, (πίπτω, pf. πέπτωκαλ) ; 1. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, a fall, downfall; metaph. a fail- 
ure, defeat, calamity; an error, lapse, sin. 2. that 
which is fallen; hence with the gen. of a pers. or with 
νεκροῦ added, the (fallen) body of one dead or slain, a 
corpse, carcase; later also with νεκροῦ omitted (Polyb., 
Sept., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Hdian.), cf. Thom. Mag. p. 
765 [ed. Ritschl p. 290, 14]; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 375; 
[W. 23], and so in the N. T.: Mt. xiv. 12 LT Tr WH; 
Mk. xv. 45 L T Tr WH; Mt. xxiv. 28; τινός, Mk. vi. 
29’; Rev. xi. 8, 9." 

πτῶσις, -ews, 7, (πίπτω, pf. πέπτωκα), a falling, down- 
fall: prop. τῆς οἰκίας, Mt. vii. 27 (πτώσεις οἴκων, Maneth. 
4, 617); trop. eis πτῶσιν πολλῶν (opp. to εἰς ἀνάστασιν), 
that many may fall and bring upon themselves ruin, i. e. 
the loss of salvation, utter misery, Lk. ii. 34, cf. Ro. xi. 
11. (Sept. chiefly for 11235, plague, defeat.) * 

πτωχεία, -as, 7, (πτωχεύωλ) ; 1. beggary (Hdt. 3, 
14; Arstph. Plut. 549; Plat. lege. 11 p. 936 b.; Lysias 
p.898, 9; Aristot. poet. c. 23 p. 1459”, 6). 2. inthe 
N. T. poverty, the condition of one destitute of riches 
and abundance: opp. to πλουτεῖν, 2 Co. viii. 9; opp. to 
πλούσιος, Rev. ii. 9; ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία (opp. to πλοῦ- 
tos), deep i. e. extreme poverty [see κατά, I. 1 b.], 2 Co. 
viii. 2. (Sept. chiefly for "3y, affliction, misery.) * 

πτωχεύω: 1 aor. ἐπτώχευσα; (πτωχός, q. v.); prop. to 
be a beggar, to beg; so in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down; 
in the N. T. once, to be poor: 2 Co. viii. 9, on which see 
πλούσιος, b. fin. (Tob. iv. 21; Sept. for 553 to be weak, 
afflicted, Judg. vi. 6; Ps. lxxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; for ὃ) 12 to 
be reduced to want, Prov. xxiii. 21; wi to be needy, 
Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 11.) * 

πτωχός, -1, τόν, (πτώσσω, to be thoroughly frichtened, 
to cower down or hide one’s self for fear; hence πτωχός 
prop. one who slinks and crouches), often involving the 
idea of roving about in wretchedness [see πένης, fin.; 
“but it always had a bad sense till it was ennobled 
in the Gospels; see Mt. v. 3; Lk. vi. 20, cf. 2 Co. viii. 
9" (L. and S. s. v. L)]: hence 1. in class. Grk. 
from Hom. down, reduced to beggary, begging, mendi- 
cant, asking alms: Lk. xiv. 13, 21; xvi. 20, 22. 2. 
poor, needy, (opp. to πλούσιος): Mt. xix. 21; xxvi. 9, 11; 
Mk. x. 21; xii.42, 43; xiv. 5, 7; Lk. xviii. 22; xix. 8; 
xxi 3; Jn. xii. 5, 6, 8; xiii. 29; Ro. xv. 26; 2 Co. vi. 10; 
Gal.ii.10; Jas.1i.2,9,6; Rev. xiii. 16; in a broader 
sense, destitute of wealth, influence, position, honors; lowly, 
afflicted: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. iv. 18, (fr. Is. Ixi. 1) ; vi. 20; vii. 
22; of πτωχοὶ τοῦ κόσμου (partit. gen.), the poor of the 
human race, Jas. ii. 5; but the more correct reading is 
that of LT Tr WH viz. τῷ κόσμῳ [unto the world], i. e. 
the ungodly world being judge, cf. W. § 31, 4a.; B. 
§ 133,14; [R. V. as to the world (see next head, and cf. 
κόσμος, 7)]. trop. destitute of the Christian virtues and 
the eternal riches, Rev. iii. 17; like the Lat. inops, i. q. 
helpless, powerless to accomplish an end: στοιχεῖα, Gal. iv. 
9 [*bringing no rich endowment of spiritual treasure’ 
(Bp. Lghtft.)]. 3. univ. lacking in anything, with 
a dat. of the respect: τῷ πνεύματι, as respects their 


55T 








“πύλη 


spirit, i. 6. destitute of the wealth of learning and intel- 
lectual culture which the schools afford (men of this 
class most readily gave themselves up to Christ's teach- 
ing and proved themselves fitted to lay hold of the heay- 
enly treasure, Mt. xi. 25; Jn. ix. 39; 1 Co. i. 26, 27; [al. 
make the idea more inward and ethical: ‘conscious 
of their spiritual need ']), Mt. v. 3; compare with this 
the Ep. of Barn. 19,2: ἔσῃ ἁπλοῦς τῇ καρδίᾳ kai πλούσιος 
τῷ πνεύματι, abounding in Christian graces and the riches 
of the divine kingdom. (Sept. for SWR al wy, 13}, 
ete.) * i 

πυγμή, 5.7, (πύξ, fr. TYKQ, Lat. pungo, pupugi, 
[pugnus; O. H. ἃ. ‘fast’, Eng. ‘fist’; cf. Curtius $ 384]), 
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for rias (Ex. xxi. 18; Is. lviii. 4), 
the fist: πυγμῇ νίπτεσθαι τὰς χεῖρας, to wash the hands 
with the fist, i. e. so that one hand is rubbed with the 
clenched fist of the other [R. V. mrg. (after Theoph., 
al.) up to the elbow; but cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, ii. 11], Mk. vii. 3 (where Tdf. πυκνά, see πυκνός). 
[Cf. Jas. Morison, Com. ad loc.] * 

IIó0ov, -ovos, 6, Python; 1. in Grk. mythology 
the name of the Pythian serpent or dragon that dwelt in 
the region of Pytho at the foot of Parnassus in Phocis, 
and was said to have guarded the oracle of Delphi and 
been slain by Apollo. 2. i. q. δαιμόνιον μαντικόν 
(Hesych. s. v.), a spirit of divination: πνεῦμα πύθωνος or 
more correctly (with LT Tr WH) πνεῦμα πύθωνα (on 
the union of two substantives one of which has the force 
of an adj. see Matthiae p. 962, 4; [Kühner § 405, 1; 
Lob. Paralip. 344 sq.]), Acts xvi. 16; some interpreters 
think that the young woman here mentioned was a ven- 
triloquist, appealing to Plutarch, who tells us (mor. p. 
414 e. de def. orac. 9) that in his time ἐγγαστρίμυθοι were 
called πύθωνες ; [cf. Meyer ].* 

πυκνός, -7, -óv, (IIYKQ, see πυγμή), fr. Hom. down, 
thick, dense, compact; in ref. to time, frequent, often re- 
curring, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Tim. v. 
23; neut. plur. πυκνά, as adv. [W. 463 (432) ; B. § 128, 
2], vigorously, diligently, (? [cf. Morison as in πυγμή])», 
Mk. vii. 3 Tdf.; often, Lk. v. 33; πυκνότερον, more Jre- 
quently, the oftener, Acts xxiv. 26.* 

πυκτεύω ; (πύκτης a pugilist [see πυγμή; init.]); to be a 
boxer, to box, [A. V. fight]: 1 Co. ix. 26. (Eur., Xen., 
Plat., Plut., al.) * 

πύλη, -ns, 7, [perh. fem. of πόλος (cf. Env. pole i. e. 
axis) fr. r. πέλτω to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. very often for 3y'U, occasionally for n23, 
sometimes for rin3; a gate (of the larger sort, in the 
wall either of a city or a palace; Thom. Mag. [p. 292, 4] 
πύλαι ἐπὶ τείχους " θύραι ἐπὶ οἰκίας) : of a town, Lk. vii. 
12; Acts ix. 24; xvi. 13 LT Tr WH; Heb. xiii. 12; of 
the temple, Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison, Acts 
xii. 10; πύλαι adov, the gates of Hades (likened to a 
vast prison; hence the ‘keys’ of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt. 
xvi. 18 (on which see κατισχύω) ; Sap. xvi. 13; 3 Mace. 
v. 51, and often by prof. writ.; see Grimm on 3 Macc. 
v. 51. in fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any 
state: Mt. vii. 13°, 13° RG T br. Tr WH mrg,, 14 RG 


πυλών 


Lbr. Tbr. Tr WH; Lk. xiii. 24 RLmrg. 
omission see mpoSartkds. ] * 

muddy, -àvos, 6, (πύλη), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. 
often for nn3, sometimes for yv; 1. alarge gate: 
of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur. 
(of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 18, 
15:21. 95; xxT. 12. 2. the anterior part of a house, 
into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi. 
71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ἡ θύρα τοῦ m- 
λῶνος, ib. 13.* 

πυνθάνομαι; impf. ἐπυνθανόμην; 2 aor. ἐπυθόμην ; [cf. 
Curtius $ 328]; a depon. verb; as in class. Grk. fr. 
Hom. down 1. to inquire, ask: foll. by an indir. 
quest. — w. the indie. Acts x. 18; with the opt., Jn. xiii. 
24 RG; Lk. xv. 26; xviii. 36; Acts xxi. 33; foll. by 
a dir. quest., Acts iv. 7; x. 29; xxiii. 19; παρά τινός τι 
[B. 167 (146)], Jn. iv. 52; παρά twos foll. by an indir. 
quest. w. the indic. Mt. ii. 4; τὶ περί τινος, Acts xxiii. 
20. 2. to ascertain by inquiry: foll by ὅτι, Acts 
xxiii. 34 [ A. V. understood ].* 

πῦρ, gen. πυρός, τό, [ prob. fr. Skr. pu ‘to purify’ (cf. 
Germ. feuer); Vaniéek p. 541; Curtius $ 385], fr. Hom. 
down; Hebr. ws; fire: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii. 19; xvii. 15; 
Mk.ix.22; Lk.iii.9, 17; ix. 54; Jn. xv. 6; Actsii. 19; 
xxviii. 5; 1 Co. iii. 13; Heb. xi. 34; Jas. iii. 5; v. 3; Rev. 
ὙΠ δ. 7. τσ. 1/75 18:5 31-155 ΧΗΣ 19. XLV 18; ΧΡ 25 ΣΡ. 
8; xx. 9; ἅπτειν πῦρ, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr 
txt. WH περιάπτ.]; ἔβρεξε πῦρ καὶ θεῖον, Lk. xvii. 29; 
κατακαίειν τι ev [. T om. WH br. ἐν] πυρί, Rev. xvii. 16; 
xviii. 8; καίομαι πυρί, Mt. xiii. 40 [R L T WH xarax.] ; 
Heb. xii. 18 [W. $ 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; φλὸξ 
mupos, a fiery flame or flame of fire, Acts vii. 30; 2 Th. 
i. 8 Ltxt. Trtxt.; Heb.i. 7; Rev.i.14; ii. 18; xix. 12, 
(Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex.; Is. xxix. 6); πῦρ φλογός, a flam- 
ing fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i. 8 R GL mrg. T Tr mre. 
WH (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat.; Sir. xlv. 19) ; λαμπάδες πυρός, 
lamps of fire, Rev. iv. 5; στῦλοι πυρός, Rev. x. 1; dvÓpa- 
«es 7. coals of fire, Ro. xii. 20 (see ἄνθραξ) ; γλῶσσαι 
ὡσεὶ πυρός, which had the shape of little flames, Acts ii. 
3; δοκιμάζειν διὰ πυρός, 1 Pet. i. 7; πυροῦσθαι (see πυ- 
pow, b.) ἐκ s. Rev. iii. 18; ὡς «διὰ πυρός, as one who in 
a conflagration has escaped through the fire not unin- 
jured, i. e. dropping the fig. not without damage, 1 Co. 
111. 15; UND 58D, Zech. iii. 2, cf. Am. iv. 11. of the 
fire of hell we find the foll. expressions, — which are 
to be taken either tropically (of the extreme penal tor- 
ments which the wicked are to undergo after their life 
on earth; so in the discourses of Jesus), or literally (so 
apparently in the Apocalypse): τὸ πῦρ, Mk. ix. 44, 46, 
[T WH om. Tr br. both verses], 48; τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον, 
Mt. xviii. 8; xxv. 41, cf. 4 Mace. xii. 12; ἄσβεστον, Mk. ix. 
43, 45 [ἃ T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.]; πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην 
ὑπέχειν, Jude 7; yéevva τοῦ πυρός, Mt. v. 22; xviii. 9; 
Mk. ix. 47 [R G Tr br.]; κάμινος τ. πυρός, Mt. xiii. 42, 
50, (Dan. iii. 6); ἡ λίμνη τοῦ πυρός, Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 
14,15; πυρὶ τηρεῖσθαι, 2 Pet. iii. 7; βασανισθῆναι ἐν πυρὶ, 
Rey. xiv. 10 (cf. Lk. xvi. 24); βαπτίζειν τινὰ πυρί (see Ba- 
πτίζω, II. b. bb.), Mt. iii. 11; Lk.iii.16. The tongue 


[On its 


558 











πυρράξω 


is called πῦρ, as though both itself on fire and setting 
other things on fire, partly by reason of the fiery spirit 
which governs it, partly by reason of the destructive 
power it exercises, Jas. iii. 6; since fire disorganizes 
and sunders things joined together and compact, it is 
used to symbolize dissension, Lk. xii. 49. _Metaphorical 
expressions: ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζειν, to snatch from danger 
of destruction, Jude 23; πυρὶ ἁλίζεσθαι (see ἁλίζω), Mk. 
ix. 49; ζῆλος πυρός, fiery, burning anger [see ζῆλος, 1], 
Heb. x. 27 (πῦρ ζήλου, Zeph. i. 18; iii. 8); God is called 
πῦρ καταναλίσκον, as one who when angry visits the ob- 
durate with penal destruction, Heb. xii. 29.* 

πυρά, -üs, ἡ, (πῦρ), fr. Hom. down, a /ire, a pile of 
burning fuel: Acts xxviii. 2 sq.* 

πύργος, -ov, 6, (akin to Germ. Burg, anciently Purg; 
[yet cf. Curtius $ 413]), as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a 
towers a fortified structure rising to a considerable height, 
to repel a hostile attack or to enable a watchman to see 
in every direction. The πύργος ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ [(q. v.)] 
seems to designate a tower in the walls of Jerusalem 
near the fountain of Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; the tower occu- 
pied by the keepers of a vineyard is spoken of in Mt. 
xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1, (after Is. v. 2); a tower-shaped 
building as a safe and convenient dwelling, Lk. xiv. 28.* 

πυρέσσω; (rip); (Vulg. Cels., Senec., al. febricito) ; 
to be sick with a fever: Mt. viii. 14; Mk. i. 30. (Eur., 
Arstph., Plut., Leian., Galen, al.) * 

πυρετός, -o), 6, (πῦρ); 1. fiery heat (Hom. Il. 22, 
31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of *fever' in 
this pass.; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; Schmidt, Syn. 
ch. 60 § 147). 2. fever: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; 
Lk. iv. 39; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippocr., Arstph., 
Plat., sqq.; Deut. xxviii. 22) ; zvp. μέγας, Lk. iv. 38 (as 
Galen de different. feb. 1, 1 says σύνηθες rois ἰατροῖς óvo- 
μάζειν . . . τὸν μέγαν τε kai μικρὸν πυρετόν ; [cf. Wetstein 
on Lk. I. c.]).* 

πύρινος, -η, -ov, (πῦρ), fiery: θώρακες rip. i. e. shining 
like fire, Rev. ix. 17. (Ezek. xxviii. 14, 16; Aristot., 
Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

Tvpóo: Pass, pres. πυροῦμαι; pf. ptep. πεπυρωμένος ; 
(mip); fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; to burn with fire, 
lo set on fire, to kindle; in the N. T. it is used only in 
the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn: prop. 2 Pet. iii. 
12; trop. of the heat of the passions: of grief, 2 Co. xi. 
29 [Eng. Versions burn (often understood of indig- 
nation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger, 
with τοῖς θυμοῖς added, i. q. to be incensed, indignant, 
2 Mace. iv. 38; x. 35; xiv. 45; to be inflamed with se x- 
ual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptep. πεπυρωμέ- 
vos, made to glow [R. V. refined]: Rev. i. 15 [(cf. B. 80 
(69) n.)]; full of fire; fiery, ignited: τὰ βέλη và mem. 
darts filled with inflammable substances and set on fire, 
Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bibl. 2, 5, 2 $ 3) ; melted by fire 
and purged of dross: χρυσίον πεπυρ. ἐκ πυρός, [refined 
by fire], Rev. iii. 18 (so πυρόω in the Sept. for ^Y ; as 
τὸ ἀργύριον, Job xxii. 25; Zech. xiii. 9; Ps. xi. (xii) 7; 
Ixv. (Ixvi.) 10).* 

πυρράζω ; i. q. πυρρὸς γίνομαι, to become glowing, grow 


πυρρος 


red, be red: Mt. xvi. 2 sq. [but T br. WH reject the pass. ] 
(Byzant. writ. ; πυρρίζω in Sept. and Philo.) * 

πυρρός, -d, -dv, (fr. πῦρ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
having the color of fire, red: Rev. vi. 4; xii. 3. Sept. 
several times for D1N.* 

Ilóppos [(‘fiery-red’; Fick, Griech. Personennamen, 
p. 75)], του, 6, Pyrrhus, the proper name of a man: 
Acts xx. 4 GLT Tr WH.* 

πύρωσις, -eos, 7, (πυρόω), a burning: Rev. xviii. 9, 18; 
the burning by which metals are roasted or reduced ; 
by a fig. drawn fr. the refiner's fire (on which cf. Prov. 
xxvii. 21), calamities or trials that test character: 1 Pet. 
iv. 12 (Tertullian adv. Gnost. 12 ne expavescatis ustio- 
nem, quae agitur in vobis in tentationem), cf. i. 7 [(ἡ 
πύρωσις τῆς Soxiwacias, ‘Teaching’ etc. 16,5)]. (In the 
same and other senses by Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) * 

[πώ, an enclitic particle, see μήπω ete. | 

πωλέω, -ὦ ; impf. ἐπώλουν; 1 aor. ἐπώλησα ; pres. pass. 
πωλοῦμαι ; (πέλω, πέλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius 
§ 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλή; Lob. 
in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] πωλοῦμαι, Lat. versor, 
foll by eis with ace. of place, to frequent a place; cf. 
the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
322; prop. fo barter, i. e. to sell: absol. (opp. to dyyopá- 
(cw), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of πωλοῦντες (opp. to 
οἱ ἀγοράζοντες, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv. 9; Mk. 
xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44; 
xix. 21; xxi. 12; Mk. x. 21; xi. 15; Lk. [xii. 33]; xviii. 
22; xxii. 30; Jn. ii. 14, 16; Acts v.1; supply αὐτόν, 
Acts iv. 37; αὐτά, ib. 34; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen. 
of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.* 

πῶλος, του, 6 (in class. Grk. ἡ also), [Lat. pullus, 
O. H. G. folo, Eng. foal; perh. allied with mais; cf. Cur- 
tius § 387]; 1. a colt, the young of the horse: so 
very often fr. Hom. down. 2. univ. a young crea- 
ture: Ael. v. h. 4, 9; spec. of the young of various ani- 
mals; in the N. T. of a young ass, an ass's colt: Mt. xxi. 
2,5,7; Mk. xi. 2, [3 Lmrg.], 4, 5, 7; Lk. xix. 30, 33, 35; 
Jn. xii. 15, (also in Geopon.); Sept. several times for 
cy; for no a female ibex, Prov. v. 19.* 

πώ-ποτε, adv., ever, at any time: Lk. xix. 30; Jn. i. 18; 
v.37; vi. 35; viii. 33; 1 Jn. iv. 12. [(From Hom. down.)]* 

πωρόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐπώρωσα (Jn. xii. 40 T Tr WH); 
pf. πεπώρωκα; pf. pass. ptep. πεπωρωμένος ; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐπωρώθην ; (mópos, hard skin, a hardening, induration) ; 
to cover with a thick skin, to harden by covering with a 
callus, [R. V. everywhere simply to harden]: metaph., 
καρδίαν, to make the heart dull, Jn. xii. 40; Pass. to 
grow hard or callous, become dull, lose the power of under- 
standing: Ro. xi. 7; τὰ νοήματα, 2 Co. iii. 14; ἡ καρδία, 
Mk. vi. 52; viii.17. Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. p. 78 sq.; 
on Rom. ii. p. 451 sq. [(Hippoer., Aristot., al.)]* 

πώρωσις, -ews, 7, (πωρόω, q. v.), prop. the covering with 
a callus; trop. obtuseness of mental discernment, dulled 
perception: γέγονέ τινι, the mind of one has been blunted 
[R. V. a hardening hath befallen], Ro, xi. 25; τῆς καρδίας 
[hardening of heart], of stubbornness, obduracy, Mk. iii. 
5; Eph. iv 18. [(Hippocr.)]* 


559 





^ 
πως 


πῶς, (fr. obsol. ΠΟΣ, whence ποῦ, ποῖ, ete. [cf. Curtius 
§ 631]), adv., [fr. Hom. down]; I. in interroga- 
tion; how? in what way ? —in a direct question, foll. 
by a. the indicative, it is the expression a. of 
one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Lk. 
134; x. 26; Jn. iii. 9; ix. 26; 1 Co. xv. 35 [cf. W. 266 
(250)]; πῶς οὖν, Jn. ix. 10 Tdf. (but L WH br. οὖν), 19; 
Ro. iv. 10. B. of one about to controvert another, 
and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has 
happened or been done: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 23; Lk. 
xi.18; Jn. iii. 4, 12; v. 44, 47; vi.52; ix.16; 1 Jn. iii. 
17;iv.20; Ro.iii.6; vi. 2; 1 Co. xiv. 7, 9,16; 1 Tim. iii- 
5; Heb. ii. 3; kai πῶς, Mk. iv. 13; Jn. xiv. 5 [here L txt. 
Tr WH om. καί]; πῶς οὖν, Mt. xii. 26; Ro. x. 13 RG; 
πῶς δέ, Ro. x. 143 RGLmrg., 14^ RG T, 15 RG, (on 
this see in b. below). where something is asserted and 
an affirmative answer is expected, πῶς οὐχί is used: Ro. 
viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 8. y- of surprise, intimating that 
what has been done or is said could not have been done 
or said, or not rightly done or said, — being equiv. to how 
is it, or how has it come to pass, that etc.: Gal. ii. 14 GLT 
TrWH; Mt. xxii. 12; Jn.iv.9; vi. 52; vii. 15; πῶς 
λέγεις, λέγουσι; κτλ.» Mk. xii. 35; Lk. xx. 41; Jn. viii. 33; 
kai πῶς, Lk. xx. 44; Actsii. 8; kai πῶς σὺ λέγεις, Jn. xii. 
34; xiv. 9 [here L T ΝῊ om. Tr br. καί]; πῶς ov, Jn. vi. 
42 [here T WH Tr txt. πῶς viv]; Mt. xxii. 43; πῶς ov, 
how is it that . . . not, why not? Mt. xvi. 11; Mk. viii. 21 
RGLmrg.; iv. 40 [RGT]; Lk. xii. 56. b. the 
delib. subjunctive (where the question is, how that 
can be done which ought to be done): πῶς πληρωθῶσιν 
ai γραφαί, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be ful- 
filled) to be fulfilled? Mt.xxvi.54; πῶς φύγητε, how shall 
ye (who wish to escape) escape etc. Mt. xxiii. 33; add, 
mas οὖν, Ro. x. 14 LT Tr WH; πῶς δέ, x. 14° Ltxt. T 
Tr WH; 14°L Tr WH; 15 LT Tr WH, (Sir. xlix. 11); 
cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 405 sq. c. foll. by ἄν 
with the optative: πῶς yàp ἂν δυναίμην; Acts viii. 31 
(on which see ἄν, III. p. 34°). II. By a somewhat 
negligent use, occasionally met with even in Attic writ. 
but more freq. in later authors, πῶς is found in indi- 
rect discourse, where regularly ὅπως ought to have 
stood; cf. W. $ 57, 2 fin.; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]. a. 
with the indicative—pres.: Mt. vi. 28; Mk. xii. 41; 
Lk. xii. 27; Acts xv. 36; 1 Co.iii. 10; Eph. v. 15; Col. 
iv. 6; 1 Tim. iii. 15; τὸ πῶς (on the art. see ὁ, IT. 10 a.); 
with the impf. Lk. xiv.7; with the perf. Rev. iii. 3; 
with the aor., Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26 [here Tr WH br. 
πῶς]; Lk. viii. 36; Acts ix. 27, ete.; after ἀναγινώσκειν, 
Mk. xii. 26 T Tr WH; how it came to pass that, ete. Jn. 
ix.15; with the fut.: μεριμνᾷ, πῶς ἀρέσει (because the 
direct quest. would be πῶς dpéow;), 1 Co. vii. 32-34 [but 
L T Tr WH -σῃ]; ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπολέσουσιν, how 
they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncer- 
tainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliber- 
ating about the way in which they will accomplish it), 
Mk. xi. 18 R G (but the more correct reading here, ace. 
to the best Mss., including cod. Sin., is ἀπολέσωσιν Show 


they should destroy him’ [ef. W. $ 41b. 4 b.; B. $ 139, 


P,p 


61; see next head]). b. with the subjunctive, 
of the aor. and in deliberation: Mk. xi. 18 L' T Tr WH; 
xiv. 1,11 [RG]; Mt. x. 19; Lk. xii. 11; τὸ πῶς, Lk. 
xxii. 2, 4; Acts iv. 21. III. in exclamation, how: 
πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν, Mk. x. 24; πῶς παραχρῆμα, Mt. xxi. 


[P, p: the practice of doubling p (after a prep. or an augm.) 
is sometimes disregarded by the Mss., and accordingly by the 
critical editors; so, too, in the middle of a word; see ἀναντίρη- 
τος, ἀπορίπτω, ἀραβών, ἄραφος, διαρήγνυμι, émipám To, ἐπιρί- 
πτω, παραρέω, ῥαβδίζω, ῥαντίζω, ῥαπίζω, ῥίπτω, ῥύομαι, etc.; 
cf. W. $13, 1b.; B. 32 (38 sq.); WH. App. p. 163; Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 80. Recent editors, L T (cf. the Proleg. to his 7th 
ed. p. ccixxvi.), Kuenen and Cobet (cf. their Praef. p. xevi.), 
WH (but not Treg.), also follow the older Mss. in omitting 
the breathings from pp in the middle of a word; cf. Lipsius, 
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 18 sq.; Greg. Corinth. ed. Bast p. 
732 sq.; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram. p. 16; 
W.48(47). On the smooth breathing over the initial p 
when p begins two successive syllables, see Lipsius u.s.; 
WH.u.s.pp.163,170; Kühner $67 Anm. 4; Goettling, Ac- 
cent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breath- 
ings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. 61. 8 p. 105 sq. and reff. there. 
On the usage of modern edd. of the classics cf. Veitch s. vv. 
ῥῥάπτω, pew, etc.] 

"Paág (and “Ῥαχάβ, Mt. i. 5; Ῥαχάβη, -ys, in Joseph. 
[antt. 5, 1, 2 ete.]), ἡ, (3r ‘broad’, ‘ample’), Rahab, 
a harlot of Jericho: Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. [Cf. B.D. 
s. v-; Bp. Lghtft. Clement of Rome, App. (Lond. 1877) 
p. 413.]* 

ῥαββί, TWH ῥαββεί [cf. B. p. 6; WH. App. p. 155; 
see et, c], (Hebr. ^35, fr. 35 much, great), prop. my 
great one, my honorable sir; (others incorrectly rezard 
the ‘= as the yodh paragogic); Rabbi, a title with which 
the Jews were wont to address their teachers (and also 
to honor them when not addressing them; οὗ. the French 
monsieur, monseigneur): Mt. xxiii. 7; translated into 
Greek by διδάσκαλος, Mt. xxiii. 8 GLT Tr WH; John 
the Baptist is addressed by this title, Jn. iii. 26; Jesus: 
both by his disciples, Mt. xxvi. 25, 49; Mk. ix.5; xi. 
21; Jn.i.38 (39), 49 (50) ; iv. 31; ix. 2; xi. 8; and by 
others, Jn. iii. 2; vi. 25; repeated to indicate earnest- 
ness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.] ῥαββί, ῥαββί, RG in Mt. xxiii. 7 
and Mk. xiv. 45; (so "2 "2 for ‘38 "2 in the Targ. on 
2 K.ii.12). Cf. Lghtft. Horae Hebr. et Talmud. on Mt. 
xxiii 7; Pressel in Herzog ed. 1 xii. p. 471 sq.; [Gins- 
burg in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Rabbi; Hamburger, Real-En- 
cyclopüdie, s. v. Rabban, vol. ii. p. 943 sq.].* 

ῥαββονί (so Rec. in Mk. x. 51) and ῥαββουνί [WH 
~vei, see reff. under ῥαββί, init.], (Chald. 713 lord; 131 


560 








'Payaó 


20; πῶς δυσκόλως, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; with a verb, 
how (greatly): πῶς συνέχομαι, Lk. xii. 50; πῶς ἐφίλα 
αὐτόν, Jn. xi. 36. 

πώς, an ehclitie particle, on which see under εἴπως [i. e. 
ei, III. 14] and μήπως. 


P 


master, chief, prince; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. üb. d. Tar- 
gumim, ii. p. 401), Rabboni, Rabbuni (apparently [yet 
cf. reff. below] the Galilean pronunciation of *3j37), a 
title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is ad- 
dressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to διδάσκαλος: 
Jn. xx. 16; Mk. x. 51, (see ῥαββί). Cf. Keim iii. p. 560 
[Eng. trans. vi. p. 311 sq.]; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. 
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, pp. 409 and 606; also for 
1878, p. 7; [Ginsburg and Hamburger, as in she preced- 
ing word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10].* 

ῥαβδίζω; 1 aor. pass. ἐρραβδίσθην and (so L'T Tr WH) 
ἐμαβδίσθην (see P, p); (ῥάβδος); to beat with rods: Acts 
xvi.22; 2 Co. xi. 25. (Judg. vi. 11; Ruth ii. 17; Arstph., 
Diod., al.) * 

ῥάβδος, -ov, ἡ, [prob. akin to ῥαπίς, Lat. verber; cf. 
Curtius § 513], in various senses fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for n», VAY, pn DAyUD, ete., a staff, walking-stick : 
i.q. a twig, rod, branch, Heb. ix. 4 (Num. xvii. 2 sqq. 
Hebr. text xvii. 16 sqq.); Rev. xi. 1; a rod, with which 
one is beaten, 1 Co. iv. 21 (Plato, legg. 3 p. 700 c.; Plut., 
al; πατάσσειν τινὰ ἐν ῥάβδῳ, Ex. xxi. 20; Is. x. 24); a 
staff: as used on a journey, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix. 
3; or to lean upon, Heb. xi. 21 (after the Sept. of Gen. 
xlvii. 31, where the translators read 1155, for 10r a bed; 
[cf. προσκυνέω, a-]) ; or by shepherds, Rev. ii. 27; xii. 
5; xix. 15, in which passages as ἐν ῥάβδῳ ποιμαίνειν is 
fig. applied to a king, so ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ, with a rod of iron, 
indicates the severest, most rigorous, rule; hence ῥάβδος 
is equiv. to a royal sceptre (like Dav, Ps. ii. 9; xlv. 8; 
for δ᾽ 3), Esth. iv: 11; v. 2): Heb. i. 8 (fr. Ps. xlv. 
8).* 

ῥαβδοῦχος, -ov, 6, (ῥάβδος and ἔχω; cf. εὐνοῦχος), one 
who carries the rods i. e. the fasces, a lictor (a publie offi- 
cer who bore the fasces or staff and other insignia of 
office before the magistrates), [A. V. serjeants]: Acts 
xvi. 35,38. (Polyb.; Diod. 5, 40; Dion. Hal.; Hdian. 
7,8, 10 [5 ed. Bekk.]; διὰ τί λικτώρεις τοὺς ῥαβδούχους 
ὀνομάζουσι; Plut. quaest. Rom. c. 67.) * 

*Paya$ [so WH] or *Paya? [R GL T Tr], ΟΡ [i e. 
* friend'], Gen. xi. 18), 6, Ragau [A. V. Reu; (once 
Hehu)], one of the ancestors of Abraham: Lk. iii. 85. 
[B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Reu.]* 


ῥαδιούργημα 


ῥᾳδιούργημα, -ros, τό, (fr. ῥᾳδιουργέω, and this fr. ῥᾳδι- 
ovpyós, compounded of ῥάδιος and EPTQ. A ῥᾳδιουργός 
is one who does a thing with little effort and adroitly ; 
then, in a bad sense, a man who is facile and forward 
in the perpetration of crime, a knave, a rogue), a piece 
of knavery, rascality, villany: πονηρόν, Acts xviii. 14. 
(Dion. Hal, Plut., Lcian.; eccles. writ.) * 

ῥᾳδιουργία, -as, 7, (see padiovpynpa, cf. zavovpyía); 1. 
prop. ease in. doing, facility. 2. levity or easiness 
in thinking and acting; love of a lazy and effeminate 
life (Xen.). 3. unscrupulousness, Cunning, mischief, 
[A. V. villany]: Acts xiii. 10. (Polyb. 12, 10, 5; often 
in Plut.) * 

[patvw; see ῥαντίζω.] 

ῥακά (Tdf. ῥαχά; [the better accentuation seems to 
be -a; cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl-Aram. p. 8]), a 
Chald. word wp'? [but aec. to Kautzsch (u.s. p. 10) not 
the stat. emph. of p but shortened fr. ip (Hebr. 
p» empty, i. e. a senseless, empty-headed man, a term of 
reproach used by the Jews in the time of Christ [ B. D. 
s. v. Raca; Wünsche, Erlàuterung u.s. w. p. 47]: Mt. v. 22.* 

ῥάκος, -ovs, τό, (ῥήγνυμι), a. piece torn off; spec. a bit 
of cloth; cloth: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21 [here L Tr mrg. 
Dükkos]. (Hom., Hdt., Arstph., Soph., Eur., Joseph., 
Sept., al.) * 

‘Papa [T WH ‘Paya; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ramah, 1 
init.], (7797 i.e. a high place, height), ἡ, [indecl. Win. 
61 (60)], Ramah, a town of the tribe of Benjamin, sit- 
uated six Roman miles north of Jerusalem on the road 
leading to Bethel; now the village of er Ram: Mt. ii. 
18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; 


Graf in the Theol. Stud. τι. Krit. for 1854, p. 851 sqq. ; | 


Pressel in Herzog xii. p. 515 sq.; Furrer in Schenkel 
BL. v. p. 37 ; [BB. DD.].* 

ῥαντίζω ; (fr. ῥαντός besprinkled, and this fr. patvo) ; 
1 aor. ἐρράντισα and (so L T Tr WH) ἐράντισα (see P, p) ; 
[1 aor. mid. subjune. ῥαντίσωνται (sprinkle themselves), 
Mk. vii. 4 WH txt. (so Volkmar, Weiss, al.) after codd. 
8B]; pf. pass. ptep. ἐρραντισμένος (Tdf. pepavr., L Tr 
WH pepavr. with smooth breathing; see P, p); for patvo, 
more com. in class. Grk.; to sprinkle: prop. τινά, Heb. 
ix. 13 (on the rite here referred to cf. Num. xix. 2-10; 
Win. RWB. s. v. Sprengwasser; [B.D. s. v. Purifica- 
tion]) ; ib. 19; τὶ αἵματι, ib. 21; [Rev. xix. 13 WH (see 
mepippatva)]. to cleanse by sprinkling, hence trop. to 
purify, cleanse: ἐρραντισμένοι τὰς καρδίας (on this ace. see 
B. § 134, 7) ἀπό «rd. Heb. x. 22. (Athen. 12 p. 521 a.; 
for Hebr. nor, Ps. 1. (li.) 9; for nm Lev. vi. 27; 2 K. 
ix. 33.)* b 

ῥαντισμός, -od, 6, (ῥαντίζω, q. v.), used only by bibl. and 
eccl. writ, a sprinkling (purification): αἷμα ῥαντισμοῦ, 
blood of sprinkling, i. e. appointed for sprinkling (serving 
to purify), Heb. xii. 24 (ὕδωρ ῥαντισμοῦ for n3 "2, 
Num. xix. 9, 13, 20 sq.) ;. eis ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος ᾿Ιησοῦ Xp. 
ie. εἰς τὸ ῥαντίζεσθαι (or ἵνα ῥαντίζωνται) αἵματι “Inc. 
Xp., that they may be purified (or cleansed from the 
guilt of their sins) by the blood of Christ, 1 Pet. i. 2 [W. 
§ 30, 2 a.].* 

36 











561 peo 


ῥαπίζω; fut. ῥαπίσω [cf. B. 37 (32sq.)]; 1 aor. ἐρράπισα 
and (so L T Tr WH) ἐράπισα (see P, p); (fr. ῥαπίς a 
rod); 1. to smite with a rod or staff (Xenophanes 
in Diog. Laert. 8, 36; Hdt., Dem., Polyb,Plut,al). 2. 
to smite in the face with the palm of the hand, to boz the 
ear: twa, Mt. xxvi 67 (where it is distinguished fr. 
κολαφίζω [ A.V. buffet]; for Suidas says paricat πατάσσειν 
τὴν γνάθον ἁπλῇ τῇ χειρί not with the fist; hence the 
Vulg. renders it palmas in faciem ei dederunt ; [A. V. 
mrg. (R. V. mrg.) adopt sense 1 above]) ; τινὰ ἐπὶ [LT 
Tr txt. WH eis] τὴν σιαγόνα, Mt. v. 39 (Hos. xi. 4). Cf. 
Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. ete. p. 61 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p.175; [Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113,10; Field, Otium Norv. 
pars iii. p. 71].* 

ῥάπισμα, -ros, τό, (ῥαπίζω, q. v.) ; 1. a blow with 
a rod or a staff or a scourge, (Antiph. in Athen. 14 p. 
623b.; Anthol., Lcian.). 2. a blow with the flat of 
the hand, a slap in the face, box on the ear: βάλλειν τινὰ 
ῥαπίσμασιν (see βάλλω, 1), Mk. xiv. 65; διδόναι τινὶ pane 
cya, Jn. xviii. 22; ῥαπίσματα, Jn. xix. 3, [but in all three 
exx. R. V. mrg. recognizes sense 1 (see reff. s. v. pa- 
mila) ].* 

paps, -idos, ἡ, (ῥάπτω to sew), a needle: Mt. xix. 24; 
Mk. x. 25; Lk. xviii. 25 Rec., [(cf. káugXos)]. Class. 
Grk. more com. uses βελόνη (q. v.); see Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 90; [W. 25].* 

[ῥαχά, see paka. | 

ἹῬαχάβ, see Ῥαάβ. 

ἹῬαχήλ, (ὉΠ a ewe or sheep), 4, Rachel [cf. B. D. 
s.v.] the wife of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. ii. 18 (fr. 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15).* 

“‘PeBéxka (152^, fr. P37 unused in Hebrew but in 
Arabie ‘to bind,’ ‘fasten’; hence the subst. i. q. *en- 
snarer, fascinating the men by her beauty), 7, Rebecca, 
the wife of Isaac: Ro. ix. 10.* 

ῥέδη [4]. peda; on the first vowel cf. Tdf.’s note on 
tev. as below; WH. App. p. 151°], (aec. to Quintil. 1, 
5, 57 [cf. 68] a Gallic word [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter, 
s. v. reda ]), της, 7, a chariot, “a species of vehicle having 
four wheels" (Isidor. Hispal. orig. 20, 12 ($ 511), [cf. 
Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Rheda]): Rev. xviii. 13.* 

Ῥεμφάν (RG), or 'Pejáv (1, Tr), or ρομφάν (T), [or 
“Ῥομφά WH, see their App. on Acts as below], Remphan 
[so A.V.], or Rephan [so R.V.], Romphan, [or Rompha], 
a Coptic pr. name of Saturn: Acts vii. 43, fr. Amos 
v. 26 where the Sept. render by 'Patáv [or “Pepay] the 
Hebr. i»2, thought by many to be equiv. to the Syriac 


OQ Q^ fU : u 
ole, and the Arabic ἐς Κ΄, designations of Saturn; 


but by others regarded as an appellative, signifying 
‘stand,’ ‘pedestal’ (Germ. Geriist; so Hitzig), or ‘statue’ 
(so Gesenius), formed from 35 after the analogy of 
such forms as pan, ous, ete. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. 
Saturn; Gesenius, Thes. p. 669°; J. G. Miiller in Her- 
zog xii. 736; Merz in Schenkel i. p. 516 sq.; Schrader 
in Riehm p. 234; [Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sat- 
urn, and reff. there given; B. D. s. v. Remphan].* 

Béo : fut. ῥεύσω (in Grk. writ. more com. ῥεύσομαι, see 


ῥέω 


W.89 (85); [B.67 (59)]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 739); 
[(Skr. sru; ef. Lat. fluo; Eng. stream; Curtius $ 517)]; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 333; to flow: Jn. vii. 38. 
[Cowr.: zapappéo.] * 

*PEQ, see εἶπον. 

Ῥήγιον, -ov, τό, Rhegium (now Reggio), a town and 
promontory at the extremity of the Bruttian peninsula, 
opposite Messana [Messina] in Sicily; (it seems to have 
got its name from the Greek verb ῥήγνυμει, because at that 
point Sicily was believed to have been ‘rent away’ from 
Italy; so Pliny observes, hist. nat. 3, 8, (14); [Diod. Sic. 
4,85; Strabo 6, 258; Philo de incorrupt. mund. $ 26 ; al. 
See Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]) : Acts xxviii. 13.* 

ῥῆγμα, -τος, τό, (ῥήγνυμι), what has been broken or rent 
asunder ; a. a fracture, breach, cleft: Hippocr., Dem., 
[Aristot.], Polyb., al.; for rp Am. vi. 11 Alex. b. 
plur. for oy p, rent clothes: 1 K. xi. 30sq.; 2 K. ii. 
12. c. fall, ruin: Lk. vi..49.* 

ῥήγνυμι (Mt. ix. 17) and ῥήσσω (Hom. Il. 18, 571; 
1 K. xi. 31; Mk. ii. 22 RG L mrg.; ix. 18; [Lk. v. 37 
Lmrg.; (see below)]); fut. ῥήξω ; 1 aor. ἔρρηξα; pres. 
pass. 3 pers. plur. ῥήγνυνται; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
ppa and yop; to rend, burst or break asunder, break up, 
break through; a. univ.: τοὺς ἀσκούς, Mk. ii. 22; 
Lk. v. 37; pass. Mt. ix. 17; i. q. to tear in pieces [A.V. 
rend |: twa, Mt. vii. 6. b. sc. εὐφροσύνην (previously 
chained up, as it were), to break forth into joy: Gal. iv. 
27, after Is. liv. 1 (the full phrase is found in Is. xlix. 
13; lii. 9; [cf. B. 8.180, 5]; in class. Grk. ῥηγνύναι κλαυθ- 
μόν, οἰμωγήν, δάκρυα, esp. φωνήν is used of infants or dumb 
persons beginning to speak; cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 
1882": [L. and S. s. v. I. 4 and 57). C. i. q. eza- 
ράσσω, to distort, convulse: of a demon causing convul- 
sions in a man possessed, Mk. ix. 18; Lk.ix.42; in both 
pass. many [so R. V. txt.] explain it to dash down, hurl to 
the ground. (a common occurrence in cases of epilepsy) ; 
in this sense in Artem. oneir. 1, 60 a wrestler is said 
ῥῆξαι τὸν ἀντίπαλον. Hesych. gives ῥῆξαι καταβαλεῖν. 
Also ῥῆξε- κατέβαλε. Cf. Kuinoel or Fritzsche on Mk. 
ix. 18. [Many hold that ῥήσσω in this sense is quite a 
different word from ῥήγνυμι (and its collat. or poet. 
ῥήσσω), and akin rather to (the onomatopoetic) ἀράσσω, 
ῥάσσω, to throw or dash down; cf. Lobeck in Bttm. 
Ausf. Spr. $ 114, s. v. ῥήγνυμι; Curtius, Das Verbum, 
pp. 162, 315; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113, 7. See as exx. 
Sap. iv. 19; Herm. mand. 11,3; Const. apost. 6, 9 p. 
165,14. Cf. προσρήγνυμι.] (CoMr.: δια-, περι-, προσ- 
ῥήγνυμι.) * 

ἰϑυν.: ῥήγνυμι, κατάγνυμι, θραύω: p. to rend, rend 
asunder, makes pointed reference to the separation of the 
parts; x. to break, denotes the destruction of a thing's unity 
or completeness; 6. to shatter, is suggestive of many fragments 
and minute dispersion. Cf. Schmidt ch. 115.] 


ῥῆμα, -ros, τό, (fr. “PEQ, pf. pass. εἴρημαι), fr. Theogn., 
Hdt., Pind. down; Sept. chiefly for ^33; also for 78, 
155, 13, TINK, ete.; 1. prop. that which is or has 
been uttered by the living voice, thing spoken, word, [cf. 
ἔπος, also λόγος, I. 1]; i.e. a. any sound produced 


562 


ῥῆμα 


by the voice and having a definite meaning: Mt. xxvii. 
14; p. γλώσσης, Sir. iv. 24; φωνὴ ῥημάτων, a sound of 
words, Heb. xii. 19; ῥήματα ἄρρητα, [unspeakable words], 
2 Co. xii. 4. b. Plur. ra ῥήματα, speech, discourse, 
(because it consists of words either few or many [cf. 
Philo, leg. alleg. 3, 61 τὸ δὲ ῥῆμα μέρος Aóyov]) : Lk. vii. 
1; Acts ii. 14 ; words, sayings, Jn. viii. 20; x. 21; Acts 
[x. 44]; xvi. 38; τὰ p. τινος, what one has said, Lk. 
xxiv. 8, 11, or taught, Ro. x. 18; rà p. μου, my teaching, 
Jn. v. 47; xii. 47sq.; xv. 7; rà p. ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ, Jn. vi. 
63; xiv. 10; [ἀληθείας x. σωφροσύνης p. ἀποφθέγγομαι, 
Acts xxvi. 25]; ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου ἔχεις, thy teaching 
begets eternal life, Jn. vi. 68; τὰ f. rod θεοῦ, utterances 
in which God through some one declares his mind, Jn. 
Vili. 47 ; λαλεῖ τις τὰ p. τοῦ 8. speaks what God bids him, 
Jn. iii. 34; λαλεῖν πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης, to de- 
liver the whole doctrine concerning this life, i.e. the 
life eternal, Acts v. 20; ra p. ἃ δέδωκάς μοι, what thou 
hast bidden me to speak, Jn. xvii. 8; ῥήματα λαλεῖν πρός 
τινα, ἐν ois ete. to teach one the things by which etc. 
Acts xi. 14; τὰ ῥήματα τὰ προειρημένα ὑπό τινος, what one 
has foretold, 2 Pet. iii. 2; Jude 17; λαλεῖν ῥήματα βλά- 
σῴημα εἴς twa, to speak abusively in reference to one 
[see eis, B. II. 2 c. 8.], Acts vi. 11; κατά τινος, against 
a thing, ib. 13 [GL T Tr WH om. 8AdcQ-]. δ: ἃ 
series of words joined together into a sentence (a declara- 
tion of one’s mind made in words) ; a. univ. an utler- 
ance, declaration, (Germ. eine Aeusserung) : Mt. xxvi. 
75; Mk. ix. 32; xiv. 72; Lk. ii. 50; ix. 45; xviii. 34; 
xx. 26; Acts xi 16; xxviii. 25; with adjectives, ῥῆμα 
ἀργόν, Mt. xii. 36; εἰπεῖν πονηρὸν ῥῆμα κατά τινος, to assail 
one with abuse, Mt. v. 11 [RG; al. om. ῥ.]. B. a 
saying of any sort, as a message, a narrative: concerning 
some occurrence, λαλεῖν τὸ p. περί τινος, Lk. ii. 17; ῥῆμα 
τῆς πίστεως, the word of faith, i. e. concerning the neces- 
sity of putting faith in Christ, Ro. x. 8; a promise, Lk. 
i. 38; ii. 29; καλὸν θεοῦ ῥῆμα, God's gracious, comforting 
promise (of salvation), Heb. vi. 5 (see καλός, e.); καθα- 
pícas . . . ἐν ῥήματι, acc. to promise (prop. on the ground 
of his word of promise, viz. the promise of the pardon 
of sins; cf. Mk. xvi. 16), Eph. v. 26 [al. take 5. here as 
i.q. ‘the gospel,’ cf. vi. 17, Ro. x. 8; (see Meyer ad 
loc.)]; the word by which some thing is commanded, di- 
rected, enjoined : Mt. iv. 4 [cf. W. 389 (364) n.]; Lk. iv. 
4 RGLTr in br.; Heb. xi. 3; a command, Lk. v. 5; 
ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐπί twa, Lk. iii. 2 (Jer.i.1; πρός τινα, 
Gen. xv. 1; 1 K. xviii. 1); plur. ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ, words 


from thee, i. e. to be spoken by thee, Acts x. 22; ῥῆμα 


τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, his omnipotent command, Heb. i. 
3. doctrine, instruction, [ef. W. 123 (117)]: (τὸ) ῥῆμα 
(rod) θεοῦ, divine instruction by the preachers of the 
gospel, Ro. x. 17 [RG; but L T Tr WH 6. Χριστοῦ ; 
others give p. here the sense of command, commission ; 
(cf. Meyer)]; saving truth which has God for its au- 
thor, Eph. vi 17; also τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Bet. i. 25; words 
of prophecy, prophetic announcement, τὰ p. τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Rev. xvii. 17 Rec. [al. of λόγοι τ. O.]. 2. In imi- 
tation of the Hebr. 533, the subject-matter of speech, thing 


Ρησά 


spoken of, thing; and that a. so far forth as it is 
a matter of narration: Lk. ii. 15; Acts x. 37; plur., 
Lk. i. 65; 11.19, 51; Acts v. 32; xiii. 42. b. in so 
far as it is matter of command: Lk.i. 37 [see ἀδυνατέω, 
b.] (Gen. xviii. 14; Deut. xvii. 8). c. a matter of 
dispute, case at law: Mt. xviii. 16; 2Co. xiii. 1 [ A. iV: 
retains ‘word’ here and in the preceding pass.], (Deut. 
xix. 15).* 

Ῥησά [Lchm. -σᾶ (so Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.) ], 6, 
Rhesa, the son of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.* 

ῥήσσω, see ῥήγνυμι. 

ῥήτωρ, -opos, 6, (ῬΕΩ), a speaker, an orator, (Soph., 
Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.): of a forensic orator or 
advocate, Acts xxiv. 1. [Cf. Thom. Mag. s. v. (p. 324, 
15 ed. Ritschl); B. D. s. v. Orator, 2.] * 

ῥητῶς, (ῥητός), adv., expressly, in express words: ῥητῶς 
λέγει, 1 Tim. iv. 1. (Polyb. 3, 23,5; Strabo 9 p. 426; 
Plut. Brut. 29; [de Stoic. repugn. 15, 10]; Diog. Laért. 8, 
71; [al; cf. Wetstein on 1 Tim.l.c.; W. 463 (431) ].)* 

ῥίζα, -ης, ἡ, (akin to Germ. Reis [cf. Lat. radix; Eng. 
root; see Curtius $515; Fick, Pt. iii. 775]), fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. for JU ; 1. aroot: prop., Mt. iii. 
10; Lk. iii. 9; ἐκ ῥιζῶν, from the roots [cf. W. $51, 1 
d.], Mk. xi. 20; ῥίζαν ἔχειν, to strike deep root, Mt. xiii. 
6; Mk. iv. 6; trop. o? ῥίζαν ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, spoken of one 
who has but a superficial experience of divine truth, 
has not permitted it to make its way into the inmost 
recesses of his soul, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 17 ; Lk. viii. 
13; in fig. disc. ῥίζα πικρίας (see πικρία) of a person dis- 
posed to apostatize and induce others to commit the 
same offence, Heb. xii. 15; the progenitors of a race 
are called ῥίζα, their descendants κλάδοι (see κλάδος, b.), 
Ro. xi. 16-18. Metaph. cause, origin, source: πάντων 
τῶν κακῶν, 1 Tim. vi. 10; τῆς σοφίας, Sir. i. 6 (5), 20 (18); 
τῆς ἀθανασίας, Sap. xv. 3; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, of the devil, Ev. 
Nicod. 23; ἀρχὴ kai ῥίζα παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ, Epicur. ap. Athen. 
12, 67 p. 546 sq. ; πηγὴ καὶ ῥίζα καλοκαγαθίας τὸ νομίμου 
τυχεῖν παιδείας, Plut. de puer. educ. c. 7 b. 2. after 
the use of the Hebr. v9, that which like a root springs 
from a root, a sprout, shoot ; metaph. offspring, progeny : 
Ro. xv. 12; Rev. v. 5; xxii. 16, (Ts. xi. 10).* 

ῥιζόω, -ῶ : pf. pass. ptep. ἐρριζωμένος [see P, p]; (pita); 
fr. Hom. down; to cause to strike root, to strengthen with 
roots; as often in class. writ. (see Passow s. v. 8; [L. and 
S. s. v. L.]), trop. to render firm, to fix, establish, cause a 
person or a thing to be thoroughly grounded: pass. ἐρριζω- 
μένος (Vulg. radicatus) ἐν ἀγάπῃ, Eph. iii. 17 (18) [not 
WH]; ἐν Χριστῷ, in communion with Christ, Col. ii. 7. 
[Conr. éx-piéóo. ] * 

pith, -ῆς, ἡ, (ῥίπτω), used by the Grk. poets fr. Hom. 
down; a throw, stroke, beat: ὀφθαλμοῦ (Vulg. ictus oculi 
* ΓΑ. V. the twinkling of an eye]), a moment of time, 1 Co. 
xv. 52 [L mrg. ῥοπή; 4. v.].* 

ῥιπίζω : pres. pass. ptep. ῥιπιζόμενος ; (fr. puris a bel- 
lows or fan); hence 1. prop. to raise a breeze, put 
air in motion, whether for the sake of kindling a fire or 
of cooling one's self; hence a. to blow up a fire: 
φλόγα, wip, Anthol. 5, 122, 6; Plut. Flam. 21. b. to 


563 


ῥοιζηδόν 


fan i.e. cool with a fan (Tertull. flabello): Plut. Anton. 
26. 2. to toss to and fro, to agitate: of the wind, 
πρὸς ἀνέμων ῥιπίζεται τὸ ὕδωρ, Philo de incorrupt. mundi 
§ 24; ῥιπιζομένη ἄχνη, Dio Cass. 70,4; δῆμος ἄστατον, 
κακὸν καὶ θαλάσσῃ πάνθ᾽ ὅμοιον, ὑπ᾽ ἀνέμου ῥιπίζεται, Dio 
Chr. 32 p. 368 b.; hence joined w. ἀνεμίζεσθαι it is used 
of a person whose mind wavers in uncertainty between 
hope and fear, between doing and not doing a thing, 
Jas. i. 6.* 

ῥιπτέω, see pinta. 

ῥίπτω and ῥιπτέω (ῥιπτούντων, Acts xxii. 23; on the 
diff. views with regard to the difference in meaning 
betw. these two forms see Passow s. v. pita, fin.; [ Veitch 
s. V. ῥίπτω, fin. Hermann held that ῥιπτεῖν differed fr. 
ῥίπτειν as Lat. jactare fr. jacere, hence the former had a 
frequent. force (cf. Lob. Soph. Aj. p. 177; Cope, Aristot. 
rhet. vol. i. p. 91 sq.); some of the old grammarians 
associate with ῥιπτεῖν a suggestion of earnestness or 
effort, others of contempt]); 1 aor. ἔῤῥιψα G Tr, &pp. 
RL, ἔριψα TWH, [ptep. (Lk. iv. 35) ῥίψαν R G Tr 
WH, better (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Veitch p. 512) 
ῥῖψαν LT]; pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἔῤῥιπται [ἃ Tr; al. 
épp. | (Lk. xvii. 2), ptep. ἐρριμμένος G, ἐριμμένος T Tr WH, 
pep. (with smooth breathing) Lehm. (Mt. ix. 36); on the 
doubling of p and the use of the breathing see P, p; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for yowa; to cast, throw; 
i. q. to throw down: τί, Acts xxvii. 195 τὶ ἔκ τινος, ibid. 
29; τινὰ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, Lk. xvii. 2. i. q. to throw 
off: τὰ ἱμάτια (Plat. rep. 5 p. 474 a.), Acts xxii. 23 (they 
cast off their garments that they might be the better 
prepared to throw stones [but cf. Wendt in Mey. 5te 
Aufl]); rà ὅπλα, 1 Macc. v.43; vii. 44; xi. 51; Xen. 
Cyr. 4, 2, 33, and often in other Grk. writ. i. q. to 
cast forward or before: twa [or 7i] εἴς τι, [Mt. xxvii. 5 
(but here RGL ἐν τῷ va@)]; Lk. iv. 35; τινὰς mapa τοὺς 
πόδας Ἰησοῦ, to set down (with the suggestion of haste 
and want of care), of those who laid their sick at the feet 
of Jesus, leaving them at his disposal without a doubt 
but that he could heal them, Mt. xv. 30. i. q. to throw 
to the ground, prostrate : ἐρριμμένοι, prostrated by fatigue, 
hunger, ete., [R. V. scattered], Mt. ix. 36 (καταλαβὼν 
ἐρριμμένους καὶ μεθύοντας, the enemy prostrate on the 
ground, Polyb. 5, 48, 2; of the slain, Jer. xiv. 16; éppua- 
μένα σώματα, 1 Mace. xi. 4; for other exx. see Wahl, 
Clavis Apocr. V.T. s.v.; τῶν νεκρῶν ἐρριμμένων ἐπὶ τῆς 


“ἀγορᾶς, Plut. Galb. 38, 1). [Comp.: ἀπο-, ἐπι- ρίπτω. " 


Ῥοβοάμ, (nj211 i. e. ‘enlarging the people’, equiv. to 
Εὐρύδημος in Grk., fr. 3m and oy), 6, Roboam, Reho- 
boam, the son and successor of king Solomon: Mt. i. 7.* 

“Ῥόδη, -ης, ἡ, Rhoda [i. e. ‘rose”], the name of a certain 
maidservant: Acts xii. 13.* 

Ῥόδος, -ov, ἡ, Zthodes, [(cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v-) ], 
a well-known island of the Cyclades opposite Caria and 
Lycia, with a capital of the same name: Acts xxi. 1. 
([From Hom. down]; 1 Macc. xv. 23.)* 

ῥοιζηδόν, (ῥοιζέω to make a confused noise), adv., ‘with 
aloud noise’: 2 Pet. iii. 10. (Nicand. ther. 556; Geop., 
al.) * 


‘Popa 


ΓῬομφά, ‘Poudav, see *Peudáv.] 

ῥομφαία, -as, ἡ, α large sword; prop. a long Thracian 
Javelin [cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Rhompza]; also a 
kind of long sword wont to be worn on the right shoul- 
der, (Hesych. ῥομφαία - Θράκιον ἀμυντήριον, μάχαιρα, ξίφος 
ἢ ἀκόντιον μακρόν ; [Suidas 3223 c. (cf. ῥέμβω to revolve, 
vibrate)]; cf. Plut. Aemil. 18) ; [A. V. sword]: Rev. i. 
16; ii. 12, 16; vi. 8; xix. 15, 21; σοῦ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴν ψυχὴν 
διελεύσεται ῥομφαία, a fig. for * extreme anguish shall fill 
(pierce, as it were) thy soul’, Lk. ii. 35, where cf. Kuinoel. 
(Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 4; 7, 12, 1; in Ev. Nicod. 26 the 
archangel Michael, keeper of Paradise, is called ἡ $Xo- 
γίνη ῥομφαία. Very often in Sept. for 32r); often also 
in the O. T. Apocr.) * ;n 

[ῥοπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ῥέπω), fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down, inclina- 
tion downwards, as of the turning of the scale: ἐν ῥοπῇ 
ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 52 L mrg. (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) ; 
see ῥιπή."} 

ἱῬουβήν (in Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8 “PovBnXos), 6, (7239, 
i.e. behold ye a son! Gen. xxix. 32 [cf. B. D. s. v.]), 
Reuben, Jacob's firstborn son by Leah: Rev. vii. 5.* 

ἹῬούθ (in Joseph. antt. 5, 9, 2 “Pov, -ns), 7, (nw for 
Map, a female friend), Ruth, a Moabitish woman, one of 
the ancestors of king David, whose history is related in 
the canonical book bearing her name: Mt.i.5. [B.D. 
s. v. Ruth.]* 

Ῥοῦφος, -ov, ὁ, Rufus [i. e. ‘red’, *reddish'], a Lat. 
proper name of a certain Christian: Mk. xv. 21; Ro. 
xvi.13. [B.D. s. v. Rufus.]* ἐ 

ῥύμη, -ys, 7, (fr. PYQ i. q. ἐρύω ‘to draw’ [but Curtius 
§ 517; Vanicek p. 1210, al, connect it with ῥέω ‘to 
flow 7); 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force, 
trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract 
of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides; a 
street, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21; Acts ix. 11; xii. 10; 
cf. Is. xv. 3; Sir. ix. 7; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p.404; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 488; Wetstein on 
Mt. u.s.; W. 22, 28].* 

piopar; fut. ῥύσομαι; 1 aor. ἐῤῥυσάμην G (ἐρρυσ. R, 
so T in 2 Co. i. 10; 2 Pet. ii. 7; L everywh. exc. in 2 
Tim. iii. 11 txt.) and ἐρυσάμην (so Tr WH everywh., T 
in Col. 1. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Ltxt. in 2 Tim. iii. 11); 
a depon. mid. verb, in later Grk. w. the 1 aor. pass. 
ἐῤῥύσθην G (-pp- R), and (so LT Tr WH in 2 Tim. iv. 17) 
ἐρύσθην ; (on the doubling of p, and the breathing, see in 
P, p); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for x53; also for 
omi, vba (to cause to escape, to deliver), yon (to draw 
out), 055, pwn, οἷς. ; fr. PYO to draw, hence prop. to 
draw to one's self, to rescue, to deliver: twa, Mt. xxvii. 
43; 2 Pet.ii. 7; τινὰ ἀπό τινος [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.], Mt. vi. 
13; Lk. xi.4 RL; 1 Th. i. 10 [here T Tr WH ἐκ; 2 Tim. 
iv. 18]; 1aor. pass., Ro. xv. 31; 2 Th. iii. 2; τινὰ ἔκ τινος 
[W. u. s.]: Ro. vii. 24 [cf. W. $ 41a. 5]; 2 Co. i. 10; Col. 
1.13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 9; 1 aor. pass., Lk. i. 74; 
2 Tim.iv.17; ὁ ῥυόμενος, the deliverer, Ro. xi. 26 (after 
Ts. lix. 20).* 

ῥυπαίνω : (ῥύπος, q. v.) ; to make filthy, befoul; to defile, 
dishonor, (Xen., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.); 1 aor. 


564 


Ῥώμη 


pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. ῥυπανθήτω, let him be made filthy, 
i. e. trop. let him continue to defile himself with sins, Rev. 
xxii. 11 L T Tr WH txt.* 

ῥυπαρεύομαι : 1 aor. (pass.) impv. 3 pers. sing. puma- 
ρευθήτω ; (ῥυπαρός, ἢ. V.) ; to be dirty, grow filthy; 
metaph. to be defiled with iniquity: Rev. xxii. 11 G L ed. 
ster. WH mrg. Found nowhere else; see ῥυπαίνω and 
ῥυπόω." 

ῥνπαρία, -ας, 7. (ῥυπαρός), fillhiness (Plut. praecept. 
conjug. c. 28); metaph. of wickedness as moral defile- 
ment: Jas.i.21. [Of sordidness, in Critias ap. Poll. 3, 
116; Plut. de adulat. et amic. $ 19; al.]* 

ῥυπαρός, -d, -óv, (ῥύπος, q. v.), filthy, dirty: prop. of 
clothing [A. V. vile], Jas. ii. 2 (Sept. Zech. iii. 3 sq.; 
Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 3; Plut. Phoc. 18; Dio Cass. 65, 20; 
ῥυπαρὰ kai ἄπλυτα, Artem. oneir. 2, 3 fin.; χλαμύς, Ael. 
v. ἢ. 14, 10) ; metaph. defiled with iniquity, base, [ A. V. 
filthy]: Rev. xxi. 11 GL T Tr ΜῊ.  [(In the sense 
of sordid, mean, Dion: Hal., al.)] * 

ῥύπος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, jilth: 1 Pet. iii. 21 [B. 
8 151, 14; W. § 30, 8 N. 3]* 

ῥυπόω, τῶ; laor. impv. 3 pers. sing. ῥυπωσάτω; iE 
to make filthy, defile, soil: Hom. Od. 6, 59. 2. in- 
trans. for ῥυπάω, to be filthy: morally, Rev. xxii. 11 Rec.* 

ῥύσις, -ews, 7, (fr. an unused pres. ῥύω, from which 
several of the tenses of ῥέω are borrowed), a flowing, 
issue: τοῦ αἵματος, Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, [on the two 
preced. pass. cf. B. $ 147, 11; W. § 29, 3 b.], 44, (Hip- 
poer., Aristot.).* 

ῥυτίς, -(0os, ἡ, (PYQ, to draw together, contract), a 
wrinkle: Eph. v. 27. (Arstph., Plat., Diod. 4, 51; Plut., 
Leian., Anthol., al.) * 

"Popaikós, -7, -óv, Roman, Latin: Lk. xxiii. 38 RGL 
br. Trmrg. br. [(Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.)]* 

Ῥωμαῖος, -ov, ὁ, a Roman: Jn. xi. 48; Actsii.10[R. V. 
here from Rome]; xvi. 21, 37 sq.; xxii. 25-27, 29; xxiii. 
27; xxv.16; xxviii. 17. ([Polyb., Joseph., al.]; often 
in 1 and 2 Mace.) * 

"Popaieri, adv., in the Roman fashion or language, 
in Latin: Jn. xix. 20. [Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 16; Plut., 
App. al.]* 

Ῥώμη, -55, ἡ [on the art. with it cf. W. 8 18, 5 b.; 
(on its derivation ef. Curtius $517; Vaniéek p. 1212; 
Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], Rome, the renowned capital 
of Italy and ancient head of the world: Acts xviii. 2; 
xix. 21; xxiii. 11; xxviii. 14, 16; Ro. i. 7, 15; 2 Tim. i. 
17. (1 Mace. i. 10; vii. 1; [ Aristot. Polyb. al.J.) [On 
Rome in St. Paul's time cf. BB.DD. s. v.; Conybeare and 
Howson, Life and Epp. ete. ch. xxiv.; Farrar, Life and 
Work ete. chh. xxxvii., xliv., xlv. ; Lewin, St. Paul, vol. 
ii. ch. vi.; Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch. iii. 65 sqq.; on 
the Jews and Christians there, see particularly ScAhürer, * 
Die Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d. 
Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargest. (Leipz. 1879) ; 
Seyerlen, Enstehung u.s.w. der Christengemeinde in 
Rom (Tübingen, 1874) ; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, 
2d ed., N. Y. 1877; Schaff; Hist. of the Chris. Church 
(1882) vol. i. $36.]* 


- 


᾿ ῥώννυμι 


565 


σάββατον 


ῥώννυμι: to make strong, to strengthen; pf. pass. ἔρρω- | letter, ἔρρωσο, farewell: Acts xxiii. 30 [RG]; ἔρρωσθε, 


pat [see P, p], to be strong, to thrive, prosper; hence the 


Acts xv. 29 (2 Macc. xi. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 33; Artem. 


2 pers. (sing.) impy. is the usual formula in closing a | oneir. 3, 44, al.; ἔρρωσο καὶ byiawe, Dio Cass. 61, 13).* 


[Z, e, s: the practice (adopted by Griesbach, Knapp, al., 
after H. Stephanus et al.) of employing the character s in 
the mid. of a comp. word has been abandoned by the recent 
crit. editors; cf. W. $5, 1 c.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 
122; Matthiae $ 1 Anm. 5; Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. $2 Anm. 3; 
Kiihner §1 Anm. 1. Tdf. ed. 8 writes c also even at the end 
of a word, after the older Mss. On movable final s see 
&xpis), néxpi(s), obre(s). The (Ionic) combinations po for 
pp, and oo for tr (cf. Fischer, Animadvers. ad Veller. etc. 
i pp.193sq. 203; Kühner ὃ 31 pp. 124, 127), have become 
predominant (cf. ἄρσην, θαρσέω, θάρσος, ἀπαλλάσσω etc., 
γλῶσσα, ἥσσων (α.γ.), θάλασσα, κηρύσσω, περισσός, πράσσω 
(q. ν.), τάσσω, τέσσαρες, φυλάσσω, etc.), except in a few 
words, as κρείττων (q. v.), the derivatives of ἐλάττων (of which 
word both forms are used indiscriminately), ἥττημα, ἡττάω 
(yet see 2 Co. xii. 13), ete.; cf. B. 7. Some prop. names are 
spelled indifferently with one o or with two; as, ᾿ Ἐλισ(σ)αῖος. 
Cis occasionally substituted for c, esp. before μ, see σβέννυμι, 
Σμύρνα (σμύρνα, cf. Soph. Gloss. $58, 3, and Lex. s. v. ; Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 80; WH. App. p. 148; B.5; Bttm. Aust. Sprchl. 
$3 Anm. 6; Bezae cod., ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii. ; L. and S. 
s. v. Z, I. 3, and Z, II. 14 c.) ; so also £, as ξυμβαίνω 1 Pet. iv. 
12 Rez; cf. Kühner $325, 5; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. u.s. ; see £v.] 

σαβαχθανί, -νεί T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and 
s. v. εἰ, t], -kOavi Lehm. [in Mt. only], Cinp3v, fr. the 
Chald. pav), thou hast forsaken me: Mt. xxvii.46; Mk. 
xv. 34 (fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2, for the Hebr. 33:7, which 
is so rendered also by the Chaldee paraphrast). [See 
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. (Leipzig 1884) p. 11.]* 

σαβαώθ (Hebr. nw2s, plur. of N2Y an army): κύριος 
σαβαώθ (wax nr), [A. V. Lord of Sabaoth], i.e. lord 
of the armies sc. of Israel, as those who under the lead- 
ership and protection of Jehovah maintain his cause in 
war (cf. Schrader, Ueber d. ursprüngl. Sinn des Got- 
tesnamens Jahve Zebaoth, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. 
Theol. for 1875, p. 316 sqq., and in Schenkel v. 702 sq.; 
cf. Herm. Schultz, Alttest. Theol. ii. p. 96 sqq. ; [B.D. 
s. v. Sabaoth, the Lord of. But for the other view, acc. 
to which the heavenly “hosts” are referred to, see 
Hackett in B. D., Am. ed., s.v. Tsebaoth Lord of, and 
Delitzsch in the Luth. Zeitschr. for 1874, p. 217 sqq.; so 
Riehm (HWB s. v. Zebaoth) as respects the use of the 
phrase by the prophets]. On the diverse interpreta- 
tions of the word cf. Oehler in Herzog xviii. p. 400 sqq. 
[and in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) 88 195 sq.; cf. T. K. 
Cheyne, Isa., ed. 3, vol. i. 11 sq.]): Ro. ix. 29; Jas. v. 4.* 





σαββατισμός, -o), ὁ, (σαββατίζω to keep the sabbath) ; 
1. a keeping sabbath. 2. the blessed rest from toils 
and troubles looked for in the age to come by the true 
worshippers of God and true Christians [R. V. sabbath 
rest]: Heb. iv. 9. (Plut. de superstit. c. 3; eccl. writ.) * 

σάββατον, -ov, τό, (Hebr. naw), found in the N.T. 
only in the historical bks. exc. twice in Paul's Epp.; 
sabbath; i. e. 1. the seventh day of each week, 
which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were 
required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10; xxxi. 13 
sqq.; Deut. v. 14); a. sing. σάββατον and τὸ σάβ- 
Barov: Mk. vi. 2; [xv. 42 L Tr]; xvi. 1; Jn. v. 9 sq., etc. ; 
i. q- the institution of the sabbath, the law for keeping holy 
every seventh day of the week : Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 27 sq.; 
Lk. vi. 5; λύειν, Jn. v. 18; τηρεῖν, Jn. ix. 16; ἡ ἡμέρα 
τοῦ σαββάτου (Naw OY, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day 
of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; ὁδὸς 
σαββάτου, a sabbath-day’s journey, the distance it is law- 
ful to travel on the sabbath-day, i.e, acc. to the Talmud 
two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer. 
66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, cf. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the 
regulation was derived fr. Ex. xvi. 29); cf. Win. RWB. 
s.v. Sabbathsweg; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 203 sq. [cf. 
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. ix. 379]; Mangold in Schen- 
kel v. 127 sq.; [Ginsburg in Alexander's Kitto s. v. Sab- 
bath Day's Journey; Lumby on Acts i. 12 (in Cambr. 
Bible for Schools) ]. as dat. of time [W. $31, 9 b. ; 
B. $ 133, 26]: σαββάτῳ, Mt. xxiv. 20 [GL T Tr WH]; 
Lk. xiv. 1; τῷ σαββάτῳ, Lk. vi. 9 Ltxt. T Tr WH; 
xiii. 14.sq.; xiv. 3; Acts xiii. 44; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mt. xii. 
2; Jn. v. 16; vii. 22 [here L WH br. ἐν], 23; ἐν τῷ σαβ- 
Bare, Lk. vi. 7; Jn. xix. 31. accus. τὸ σάββ. during 
(on) the sabbath [cf. B. $131, 11; W. $32,6] : Lk. xxiii. 
56; κατὰ πᾶν c. every sabbath, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21; 
xviii. 4. plur. ra σάββατα, of several sabbaths, Acts 
xvii. 2 [some refer this to 2]. b. plur. rà σάββ. 
(for the singular) of a single sabbath, sabbath-day, (the 
use of the plur. being occasioned either by the plur. 
names of festivals, as τὰ ἐγκαίνια, ἄζυμα, γενέσια, or by 
the Chaldaic form xnaw [W. 177 (167); B. 23 (21)]): 
Mt. xxviii. 1; Col. ii. 16, (Ex. xx. 10; Lev. xxiii. 32 etc. ; 
τὴν ἑβδόμην σάββατα καλοῦμεν, Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 6; add, 
1,1,1; [14,10, 25; Philo de Abrah. $5; de cherub. 
$26; Plut. de superstitione 8]; τὴν τῶν σαββάτων ἑορτήν, 


σωγήνη 


Plut. symp. 4, 6, 2; hodie tricesima sabbata, Hor. sat. 
1, 9,69; nowhere so used by John exc. in the phrase 
pia τῶν σαββάτων, on which see 2 below); ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν 
c., Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 14; xvi. 13 (Ex. xx. 8; xxxv. 
3; Deut. v.12; Jer. xvii. 21 sq.) ; rois σάββασιν and ἐν 
rois σάββασιν (so constantly [exe. Lehm. in Mt. xii. 1, 
12] by metaplasm for σαββάτοις, cf. W.63 (62) ; [ B. 23 
(21)]) on the sabbath-day: Mt. xii. 1 [see above], 5, 
10-12 [see above]; Mk.i. 21; ii:23; iii. 2, 4; Lk. iv. 31; 
vi. 9 [ἢ G L mrg.], (1 Mace. ii. 38; the Sept. uses the 
form σαββάτοις, and Josephus both forms). On the 
precepts of the Jews with regard to the observance of 
the sabbath, which were for the most part extremely 
punctilious and minute, cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sabbath ; 
Oehler in Herzog xiii. 192 sqq. [revised by Orelli in ed. 
2 vol. xiii. 156 sqq.]; Schiirer, Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 28 
II.; Mangold in Schenkel v. p. 123 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.; 
Geikie, Life and Words of Christ, ch. xxxviii. vol. ii. 
p. 95 sqq.; Farrar, Life of Christ, ch. xxxi. vol. i. p. 
432 sq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, vol. ii. p. 56 sqq. 
and App. xvii.]. 2. seven days, a week: πρώτῃ σαβ- 
βάτου, Mk. xvi. 9; δὶς τοῦ cap. twice in the week, Lk. xviii. 
12. "The plur. is used in the same sense in the phrase 
ἡ pia τῶν σαββάτων, the first day of the week (see eis, 5) 
[ Prof. Sophocles regards the gen. (dependent on ἡμέρα) 
in such exx. as those that follow (cf. Mk. xvi. 9 above) 
as equiv. to μετά w. an acc., thei first day after the sabbath; 
see his Lex. p. 43 par. 6]: Mt. xxviii. 1; Mk. xvi. 2; 
Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx. 1, 19; Acts xx. 7; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτων 
(LT Tr WH -rov), on the first day of every weék, 1 Co. 
xvi. 2. 

σαγήνη, -ης; 7, (σάσσω to load, fill), a large fishing-net, 
a drag-net (Vulg. sagena [cf. Eng. seine]), used in catch- 
ing fish that swim in shoals [cf. B. D. s. v. Net ; Trench, 
Syn. §lxiv.]: Mt. xiii. 47.  (Sept.; Plut. solert. anim. p. 
977 f.; Leian. pisc. 51; Tim. 22; Artem. oneir. 2, 14; 
Ael. h. a. 11, 12; [βάλλειν cay. Babr. fab. 4, 1; 9,6].)* 

Σαδδουκαῖος, -ov, 6, a Sadducee, a member of the party 
of the Sadducees, who, distinguished for birth, wealth, 
and official position, and not averse to the favor of the 
Herod family and of the Romans, hated the common 
people, were the opponents of the Pharisees, and reject- 
ing tradition (see παράδοσις, 2) acknowledged the au- 
thority of the O. T. alone in matters pertaining to faith 
and morals (Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6) ; they denied not 
only the resurrection of the body (Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. 
xii. 18; Lk. xx. 27; Acts xxiii. 8), but also the immor- 
tality of the soul and future retribution (ψυχῆς re τὴν 
διαμονὴν καὶ τὰς καθ᾽ adov τιμωρίας kai τιμὰς ἀναιροῦσι, 
Joseph. b. j. 2, 8, 14, ef. antt. 18,1, 4), as well as the 
existence of angels and spirits (Acts xxiii. 8). They 
maintained man’s freedom in opposition to the doc- 
trine of divine predestination (ace. to Joseph. b. j. 2, 
8, 14). They are mentioned in the N. T. (in addition 
to the pass. already referred to) in Mt. iii. 7; xvi. 1, 6, 11 
sq. (in which passages they are associated apparently 
with the Pharisees contrary to the truth of history {(?) 
ef. the Comm. ad ll. cc.]) ; Mt. xxii. 34; Acts iv.1; v.17; 


566 











Σαλαθιήλ 


xxiii. 6sq. The Sadducees derived their name appar- 
ently not from the Hebr. prs, as though they boasted 
of being pre-eminently ‘righteous’ or ‘upright’ (since it” 
cannot be shown that the vowel i ever passed over into 
u), but, ace. to a more probable conjecture now ap- 
proved by many, from the Zadok (pins, Sept. Σαδδούκ), 
who was high-priest in the time of David and exhibited 
special fidelity to the king and his house (2 S. xv. 24 sqq.; 
1K.i.32sqq.); hence the posterity of this priest (DYTY 733, 
Ezek. xl. 46; xliii. 19; xliv.15; xlviii. 11) and all their 
adherents seem to have been called Σαδδουκαῖοι (D173). 
Cf., besides others, Win. RWB. s. v. Sadducüer; Reuss 
in Herzog xiii. p. 289 sqq. ; [Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 xiii. 
pp. 210-244]; Geiger, Sadduc. τ. Pharisüer (Brsl. 1863) ; 
Keim i. p. 273 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. (2d ed.) p. 353 sq.]; 
Hausrath in Schenkel iv. p. 518 sqq.; Schiirer, Ntl. Zeit- 
gesch. 2te Aufl. $ 26; Wellhausen, Pharis. u. Sadducüer 
(Greifsw. 1874) ; Oort, De oorsprong van den naam Sad- 
ducéen, in the Theolog. Tijdschrift for 1876, p. 605 sqq.; 
[Ginsburg, in Alexander's Kitto s. v.; dersheim, Jesus 
the Messiah, bk. iii.ch.ii.; Geikie, Life of Christ, ch. xlv. 
(cf. ch. v.); and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. for additional refer- 
ences J.* 

Σαδώκ, (pYà5, a pr. name occurring often in the O. T.), 
Mt. i. 14." 

calyw: pres. inf. pass. σαίνεσθαι; (AQ, aeí(o) ; 1. 
prop. to wag the tail: of dogs, Hom. Od. 16,6; Ael. v. h. 
13, 41; Aesop. fab. 229 ed. Halm [354 ed. Coray]; with 
οὐρῇ added, Od. 17, 302; Hes. theog. 771; οὐράν, Aesop 
l.c.; al.; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. I. 2. metaph. 
a. to flatter, fawn upon, (Aeschyl., Pind.,Soph.,al). b. 
to move (the mind of one), a. agreeably: pass. tr 
ἐλπίδος, Aeschyl., Oppian; ἀληθῆ σαίνει τὴν ψυχήν, Aris- 
tot. metaph. 13, 3 p. 1090*, 37. B. to agitate, disturb, 
trouble : pass. 1 Th. iii. 3 [here A.V. move (B. 263 (226))] 
(here Lehm. ἀσαίνω, q. v.); oí δὲ σαινόμενοι τοῖς Aeyo- 
μένοις ἐδάκρυον, Diog. Laért. 8, 41.* 

σάκκος (Attic σάκος), -ov, ὁ, Hebr. pw [cf. Vanitek, 
Fremdworter, s. v.], a sack (Lat. saccus) i. e. a.a 
receptacle made for holding or carrying various things, 
as money, food, etc. (Gen. xlii. 25, 35; Lev. xi. 32). — b. 
a coarse cloth (Lat. cilicium), a dark coarse stuff made 
especially of the hair of animals [ A. V. sackcloth]: Rev. 
vi. 12; a garment of the like material, and clinging to 
the person like a sack, which was wont to be worn (or 
drawn on over the tunic instead of the cloak or mantle) 
by mourners, penitents, suppliants, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 
13, and also by those who, like the Hebrew prophets, 
led an austere life, Rev. xi. 3 (cf. what is said of the 
dress of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 4; of Elijah, 2 K. i. 
8). More fully in Win. RWB. s. v. Sack; Roskoff in 
Schenkel v. 134; [s. v. Sackcloth in B. D.; also in Me- 
Clintock and Strong. (From Hdt. down.)]* 

Σαλά, (Ndw a missile), 6, Sala [so A. V. (but in Gen. 
Salah); properly Shelah (so R. V.)], prop. name of a 
man mentioned in Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24); [T Tr mrg. 
WH read Sada also in Lk. iii. 32, for Σαλμών, q. v.].* 


ó, Sadoc : 


Σαλαμίς 


thiel [Grk. for Shealtiel (so R.V.)], the father of Zerub- 
babel: Mt. i. 12; [Lk. iii. 27].* 

Σαλαμίς, [on its deriv. see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ], 
-ivos, 7, Salamis, the principal city of the island Cyprus: 
Acts xiii. 5. [BB.DD.; Dict. of Geog. s. v.; Lewin, 
St. Paul, i. 120 sq.]* 

Σαλείμ, τό, Salim, a town which acc. to Eusebius and 
Jerome [Onomast. (ed. Larsow and Parthey) pp. 28, 11; 
29, 14] was eight miles S. of Scythopolis: Jn. iii. 23; cf. 
Pressel in Herzog xiii. 326; [cf. Αἰνών]. See Za Mj." 

σαλεύω ; 1 aor. égdAevca; Pass., pres. ptep. σαλευόμε- 
vos; pf. ptep. σεσαλευμένος ; 1 aor. ἐσαλεύθην ; 1 fut. 
σαλευθήσομαι ; (σάλος, q. v.) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Arstph. 
down; in Sept. pass. σαλεύομαι for DY2 and 333; a. 
prop. of the motion produced by winds, storms, waves, 
etc.; to agitate or shake : 
vii. 245 to cause to totter, ras δυνάμεις τῶν ovp., pass., Mt. 
xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; Lk. xxi. 26; τὴν γῆν, Heb. xii. 
26 (Is. xxiv. 20; Am. ix.5); an edifice, Lk. vi. 48; Acts 
iv. 31; xvi. 26; rà μὴ σαλευόμενα, the things which are 
not shaken, i. e. the perfect state of things which will 
exist after the return of Christ from heaven and will 
undergo no change, opp. to rà σαλευόμενα, the present 
order of things subject to vicissitude and decay, Heb. 
xii. 27. to shake thoroughly, of a measure filled by shak- 
ing its contents together, Lk. vi. 38. b. to shake 


567 


κάλαμον, pass., Mt. xi. 7; Lk. | 


down, overthrow, i. 6. trop. to cast down from one’s (secure | 
and happy) state, Acts 11. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); by a | 


trop. use foreign to prof. auth. to move or agitate the 
mind, to disturb one: τινὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ νοός, so as to throw 
him out of his sober and natural mental state [B. 322 
(277)], 2 Th. ii. 2; τοὺς ὄχλους. to stir up, Acts xvii. 
13.* 

Σαλήμ, ἡ, (Heb. now), Salem: Heb. vii. 1 sq.; cf. Gen. 
xiv. 18, which some (as Gesenius, Winer, Hitzig, Knobel, 
Delitzsch) think is the ancient name of the city of Jer- 
usalem, appealing to the words of Ps. Ixxvi. 3 "ΠῚ 
120 DoU3, and Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 τὴν μέντοι Σόλυμα 
ὕστερον ἐκάλεσαν Ἱεροσόλυμα; cf. b. j. 6,10. But more 
correctly [yet cf. B. D. s. v. Salem, and s. v. Melchizedek 
sub fin.] others (as Rosenmüller, Bleek, Tuch, Roediger 
in Gesen. Thesaur. s. v. p. 1422, Dillmann), relying on 
the testimony of Jerome ([Ep. ad Evangelum $7 i. e.] 
Ep. 73 in Vallarsi's ed. of his Opp. i. p. 446), hold that 
it is the same as Σαλείμ (q.v.). For the ancient name 
of Jerusalem was 033} (Judg. xix. 10; 1 Chr. xi. 4; [ef. 
B. D. Àm. ed. s. v. Jebus]), and the form of the name in 
Ps.Ixxvi. 3 [where Sept. εἰρήνη] is to be regarded as 
poetical, signifying ‘safe.’ * 

Σαλμών, (inde, Ruth iv. 21), 6, indecl, Salmon, the 
name of a man: Mt. i. 4 sq.; Lk. iii. 32 [here TWH 
Tr mrg. Σαλά]." 

Σαλμώνη, -ns, ἡ, Salmone, Salmonium, [also Sammo- 
nium], an eastern and partly northern promontory of 
Crete opposite Cnidus and Rhodes [the identification of 
which is somewhat uncertain; see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Salmone, and Dict. of Geogr. s. v. Samonium]: Acts 
S Sere 


| tionis ; 





Σαμάρεια 


σάλος, -ov, 6, the tossing or swell of the sea [ K- V. bil- 
lows]: Lk. xxi. 25. (Soph., Eur.. al.)* 

σάλπιγξ, -eyyos, ἡ, a trumpet: Mt. xxiv. 31 [ef. B. 161 
(141) ; 343 (295)]; 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xii. 19; Rev. i. 
10; iv. 1 ; viii. 2, 6, 13; ix. 14 ; ἐν σάλπιγγι θεοῦ, a trum- 
pet which sounds at God's command (W. § 36, 3 b.), 1 
Th. iv. 16; ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι, the trumpet which 
will sound at the last day, 1 Co. xv. 52, [4 (2) Esdr. vi. 
23;see Comm. on 1 Th.u.s.]. (From Hom. down; Sept. 
for ^3i2 and rrwsn-)* 

codmitw; fut. σαλπίσω (for the earlier σαλπίγξω, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191; Sept. also σαλπιῶ, as Num. x. [3], 
5, 8,10); 1 aor. ἐσάλπισα (also in Sept.; Ael. v. h. 1, 
26 and other later writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.], for the earlier 
ἐσάλπιγξα, Xen. anab. 1, 2, 17) [cf. W. 89 (85); B.37 
(32); WH. App. p. 170]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly 
for yp also for *XT; to sound a trumpet, [ A.V. (most- 
ly) sound]: Rev. viii. 6-10, 12 sq.; ix. 1, 13; x. 7 ; xi. 15; 
σαλπίσει (strictly sc. ὁ σαλπιστής or ἡ σάλπιγξ), like our 
the trumpet will sound (cf. W. $ 58, 9 b. 8.; [B. $129, 
16]), 1 Co. xv. 52; σαλπίζειν ἔμπροσθεν ἑαυτοῦ, i.e. to 
take care that what we do comes to everybody's ears, 
make a great noise about it, [cf. our do a thing * with a 
flourish of trumpets’], Mt. vi. 2 (Cic. ad div. 16, 21 
quod polliceris, te buecinatorem fore nostrae existima- 
Achill. Tat. 8, 10 αὕτη ody ὑπὸ σάλπιγγι μόνον, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ κήρυκι μοιχεύεται)." 

σαλπιστής (a later form, used by Theophr. char. 25; 
Polyb. 1, 45, 13; Dion. Hal. 4, 18, [al.], for the earlier 
and better σαλπιγκτής. Thuc. 6, 69; Xen. an. 4, 3, 29; 
Joseph. b. j. 3, 6, 2; and σαλπικτής, Dem. p. 284, 26; App. 
hisp. 6, 93; and in the best codd. of Xen., Diod., Plut., 
al.; [ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 279]; fr. σαλπίζω 
[q. v-]). -o9, 6, a trumpeter: Rev. xviii. 22.* * 

Σαλώμη, [ Hebr. ‘peaceful '], -5s, 7, Salome, the wife of 
Zebedee, and the mother of the apostles James the 
elder and John: Mk. xv. 40; xvi. 1.* 

Σαλωμών, see Sooper. 

Σαμάρεια [on the accent cf. Chandler $104 ; B. 17 (15); 
-ἰα T WH (see Taf. Proleg. p. 87; cf. I, t); on the forms 
see Abbot in B.D. Am. ed. s. v.], -as [ef. B. u. 5.1, ἡ [ef. 
W. § 18, 5a.], (Hebr. jou, Chald. 12) pron. Scha- 
me-ra-in, Assyr. ΕΞ ΟΣ [on the deriv. see B. D. s. v.], 
Samaria; 1. the name of a city built by Omri 
king of Israel (1 K. xvi. 24), on ἃ mountain of the same 
name (j/.2Y on, Am. vi. 1), situated in the tribe of 
DEN UN it was the capital of the whole region and 
the residence of the kings of Israel. After having been 
besieged three years by Shalmaneser [IV.], king "of As- 
syria, it was taken and doubtless dev astated by ‘Sargon, 
his son and successor, B. C. 722, who deported the ten 
tribes of Israel and supplied their place with other 
settlers; 2 K. xvii. 5 sq. 24 sq.; xviii. 9 sqq. After its 
restoration, it was utterly destroyed by John Hyreanus 
the Jewish prince and high-priest (see next word). Long 
afterwards rebuilt once more, it was given by Augus- 
tus to Herod [the Great], by whom it was named in 
honor of Augustus Sebaste, i. e. Augusta, (Strab. lib. 16, 


Σαμαρείτης 


p. 760; Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 3; 8, 5). It is now an ob- 
scure village bearing the name of Sebustieh or Sebastiyeh 
(cf. Büdeker, Palüstina, p. 354 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 340 
sqq.; Murray, Undbk. Pt. ii. p. 329 sqq.]). It is men- 
tioned, Acts viii. 5 L T WH, eis τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 
(gen. of apposition, cf. W. $ 59, 8 a.; [B. $ 123, 4), but 
acc. to the better reading eis πόλιν τῆς Sap. the gen. is 
partitive, and does not denote the city but the Samar- 
itan territory; cf. vs. 9. 2. the Samaritan terri- 
tory, the region of Samaria, of which the city Samaria 
was the capital: Lk. xvii. 11; Jn.iv. 4 sq. 7; Actsi. 8; 
viii. 1, 5 (see above), 9; ix. 31; xv. 3; by meton. for the 
inhabitants of the region, Acts viii. 14. Cf. Win. RWB 
s. v. Samaria; Robinson, Palestine ii. 288 sqq.; P'eter- 
mann in Herzog xiii. 359 sqq.; [esp. Mec in (Riehm 
8. v. Samaritaner, and) Herzog ed. 2, xiii. 340 sqq., and 
reff. there and in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Samaria ].* 
Σαμαρείτης (-irns Tdf.; [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 87; WH. 
App. p. 154; cf. I, «]), (Sindatia), του, 6, α Samaritan 
(Samarites, Curt. 4,8,9; Tac. ann. 12, 54; Sines 
Vulg. [(2 K. xvii. 29 * Samaritae")] and eccl. writ.), i. e. 
an inhabitant either of the city or of the province of Sa- 
maria. The origin of the Samaritans was as follows: 
After Shalmaneser [al. say Esarhaddon, cf. Ezr. iv. 2, 10; 
but see Kautzsch in Herzog ed. 2, as referred to under the 
preceding word], king of Assyria, had sent colonists!from 
Babylon, Cuthah, Ava, Hamath, and Sepharvaim into 
the land of Samaria which he had devastated and de- 
populated [see Σαμάρεια, 1], those Israelites who had 
remained in their desolated country [cf. 2 Ch. xxx. 6, 
10; xxxiv. 9] associated and intermarried with these 
heathen colonists and thus produced a mixed race. 
When the Jews on their return from exile were pre- 
paring to rebuild the temple of Jerusalem, the Samari- 
tans asked to be allowed to bear their part in the com- 
mon work. On being refused by the Jews, who were 
unwilling to recognize them as brethren, they not only 
sent letters to the king of Persia and caused the Jews 
to be compelled to desist from their undertaking down 
to the second year of Darius [Hystaspis] (B. c. 520), 
but also built a temple for themselves on Mount Gerizim, 
a place held sacred even from the days of Moses [cf. 
Deut. xxvii. 12, ete.], and worshipped Jehovah there 
according to the law of Moses, recognizing only the 
Pentateuch as sacred. "This temple was destroyed B. c. 
129 by John Hyrcanus. Deprived of their temple, the 
Samaritans have nevertheless continued to worship on 
their sacred mountain quite down to the present time, 
although their numbers are reduced to some forty or 
fifty families. Hence it came to pass that the Samari- 
tans and the Jews entertained inveterate and unap- 
peasable enmity towards each other. Samaritans are 
mentioned in the foll. N. T. pass.: Mt. x. 5; Lk. ix. 52; 
x. 33; xvii. 16; Jn. iv. 9 [here T om. WH br. the cl.], 39 
Sq.; viii. 48; Acts viii. 25. In Hebr. the Samaritans are 
called Dw, 2 K. xvii. 29. Cf. Juynboll, Commentarii 
in historiam gentis Samaritanae (Lugd. Bat. 1846); Win. 
RWB. s. v. Samaritaner; Petermann in Herzog xiii. p. 


568 











campós 


363 sqq.; Schrader in Schenkel v. p. 150 sqq.; [esp. 
Kautzsch in Herzog and Riehm u. s.].* 

Σαμαρεῖτις (-iris Tat. ; [see the preced. word ]), -8os, 
7, (fem. of Σαμαρείτης), a Samaritan woman: Jn. iv. 9. 
(The Samaritan territory, Joseph. b. j. [1, 21, 2, ete.]; 
3, 7, 32; Σαμαρεῖτις χώρα, ib. 3, 3, 4.) * 

Σαμοθρᾷκη [-θρά- KR G (as here and there in prof. 
auth.; see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.); acc. to some ‘height 
of Thrace’, ace. to others ‘Thracian Samos’ (cf. Σάμος); 
other opinions see in Pape l. c.], της, 7, Samothrace, an 
island of the /Egean Sea, about 38 m. distant from the 
coast of Thrace where the river Hebrus empties into: 
the sea (Plin. h. n. 4, 12, (23)), [now Samothraki]: Acts 
xvi 11.* 

Σάμος, [ (prob. ‘height’; cf. Pape, Eigennamen)], -ov, 
ἡ, Samos, an island in that part of the ZEgean which is 
called the Icarian Sea, opposite Ionia and not far from 
Ephesus; it was the birthplace of Pythagoras; [now 
Grk. Samo, Turkish Susam Adassi]: Acts xx. 15.* 

ZXopovfj^, νοῦ, for Onpanw i i. e. Sheard of God’, fr. 
pow and Ὧν; cf. 1 S. i. 20, 27 [see B. D. s. v. Samuel), 
6, [indecl. ; Joseph. (antt. 5, 10, 3) Σαμούηλος, -ov], 
Samuel, the son of Elkanah by his wife Anna [or Han- 
nah], the last of the p'O2P or judges, a distinguished 
prophet, and the founder of the prophetie order. He 
gave the Jews their first kings, Saul and David: Acts: 
ii. 24; xiii. 20; Heb. xi. 32. (1 S. i—xxv., cf. xxviii. ; 
Sir. xlvi. 13 sqq.) * 

Ro (wow fr. ww, ‘sun-like’, ef. Hebr. pow 

r. ws), [B. 15 (14)], 6, Samson (Vulg. Samson), one 
* the Israelite judges (p'à3U), famous for his strength 
and courage, the Hebrew Hercules [cf. BB.DD.; McC. 
and S. s. v. 2, 4; esp. Orelli in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sim- 
son] (Judg. xiii. sqq.) : Heb. xi. 32.* 

σανδάλιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of σάνδαλον [which is prob. 
a Persian word; cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.]), a 
sandal, a sole made of wood or leather, covering the bottom 
of the foot and bound on with thongs: Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii. 
8. (Hadt., Joseph., Diod., Ael, Hdian., al.; for 5y3 in 
Is.xx.2; Judith x.4; xvi. 9. [Inthe Sept. and Joseph. 
cavd. and ὑπόδημα are used indiscriminately ; cf. Is. xx. 
2; Josh. v. 155; Joseph. b. j.6,1,8.]) Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Schuhe; Roskoffin Schenkel v. 255; [ Kamphausen 
in Riehm p. 1435 sqq.; B. D. s. v. Sandal; Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 6211." 

cavls, -ἰδος, ἡ, a board, a plank: Acts xxvii. 44. 
Hom. down; Sept., Cant. viii. 9; Ezek. xxvii. 5.) * 

Σαούλ, (WNW ‘asked for’), 6, indecl. (in Joseph. Σάου- 
dos), Saul; 1. the name of the first king of Israel: 
Acts xiii. 21. 2. the Jewish name of the apostle 
Paul, but occurring only in address [cf. B. 6]: Acts ix. 
4,17; xxii. 7,13; xxvi. 14; in the other pass. of the 
Acts the form Σαῦλος (q. v.) with the Grk. term. is used.* 

c'ampós, -á, -óv, (arre, 2 aor. pass. σαπῆναι) ; ale 
rotten, putrid, ({Hipponax], Hipper., Arstph., al.). 2. 
corrupted by age and no longer fit for use, worn out, 
(Arstph., Dio Chr. al); hence in general, of poor qual- 
ity, bad, unfit for use, worthless, [A. V. corrupt], (πᾶν, 6 


(Fr. 


Σαπφείρη 


μὴ τὴν ἰδίαν χρείαν πληροῖ, σαπρὸν λέγομεν, Chrys. hom. 
4 on 1 Ep. to Tim.) : δένδρον, καρπός, opp. to καλός, Mt. 
vii. 17 sq.; xii. 33; Lk. vi. 43; fishes, Mt. xiii. 48 [here 
A.V.bad]; trop. λόγος, Eph. iv. 29 (ef. Harless ad loc.); 
δόγμα, Epict. 3, 22, 61. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 377 sq.* 
Σαπφείρη, dat. -5 (RG T WH), -a (L Tr; ef. (WH. 
App. p. 156]; B. 11; [W. 62 (61)]), 7, (either Aram. 


e y 
xDD i. e. ‘beautiful’; Peshitto | gaza; or fr. σάπφει- 


pos, q. v.) Sapphira, the name of a woman: Acts v. 1.* 

σάπφειρος, -ov, ἡ, Hebr. 19D, sapphire, a precious 
stone [perh. our /apis lazuli, cf. B. D. s. v. Sapphire; 
Richm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 14]: Rev. xxi. 19. (The- 
ophr., Diose., al.; Sept.) * 

σαργάνη [ (prop. * braided-work’, fr. r. tark ; Fick, Pt. 
iii. p. 598; Vanitek p. 297)], -ys, 7; 1. a braided 
rope, a band, (Aeschyl. suppl. 788). 2. a basket, a 
basket made of ropes, a hamper [cf. B.D. s. v. Basket]: 
2 Co. xi. 33; (Timocl. in Athen. 8 p. 339 e.; 9 p. 407 e.; 
[al.]).* 

Σάρδεις, dat. -εσιν, ai, [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., down], Sar- 
dis [or Sardes], the capital of Lydia, a luxurious city ; 
now an obscure village, Sart, with extensive ruins: Rev. 
i. 11; iii. 1,4. [Cf. McC. and S. s. v.]* 

σάρϑινος, -ov, 6, Rev. iv. 3 Rec., i. q. σάρδιον, q. v.* 

σάρδιον, -ov, τό, [neut. of σάρδιος, see below], sard, sar- 
dius, a precious stone, of which there are two kinds, 
concerning which Theophr. de lapid. 16, 5, $ 30 ed. 
Schneid. says, τοῦ yàp σαρδίου τὸ μὲν διαφανὲς épvOpórepov 
δὲ καλεῖται θῆλυ, τὸ δὲ διαφανὲς μὲν μελάντερον δὲ καὶ 
ἄρσεν, the former of which is called carnelian (because 
Jlesh-colored; Hebr. 038, Sept. σάρδιον, Ex. xxviii. 17; 
xxxvi. 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13; αἱματόεντα σάρδια, 
Orph. de lapid. 16, 5), the latter sard: Rev. iv. 3 (Rec. 
capdivo); xxi. 20 GL T Tr WH. Hence the adj. σάρ- 
duos, -a, -ov, [fr. Σάρδεις, cf. Plin. h. n. 37, 7] sardine sc. 
λίθος (the full phrase occurs Ex. xxxv. 8 [var.]): Rev. 
xxi. 20 Rec. [B.D. s. vv. Sardine, Sardius.] * 

σαρδιόνυξ, i. q. σαρδόνυξ (q. v.): Rev. xxi. 20 Lehm.* 

σαρδόνυξ [ Lchm. capdidvvé], -vxos, 6, (σάρδιον and ὄνυξ), 
sardonyx, a precious stone marked by the red colors of 
the carnelian (sard) and the white of the onyx [B. D. 
s. v. ; Richm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine 12]: Rev. xxi. 20. 
(Joseph., Plut., Ptol, al.; (Gen. ii. 12 Aq. (Montf.)].)* 

Σάρεπτα [Tr mrg. Xápej6a; Tdf. in O. T. Saperra], 
(na^ fr. hY to smelt; hence perh. * smelting-house "), 
τῶν [yet cf. B. 15 (14) ; but declined in Obad.], τά ; Sarep- 
ta [so A. V.; better with O. 'T. Zarephath] a Phenician 
town between Tyre and Sidon, but nearer Sidon, [now 
Surafend; cf. B. D. s. v. Zarephath], (1 K. xvii. 9; Obad. 
20; in Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2 SapepOa): τῆς Σιδωνίας, in 
the land of Sidon, Lk. iv. 26. Cf. Robinson, Palestine 
ii. 474 sqq. ; [B. D. u.s.].* 

σαρκικός, -7, -óv, (cáp£), fleshly, carnal (Vulg. carnalis) ; 
1. having the nature of flesh, i. e. under the control of the 
animal appetites (see σάρξ, 3), Ro. vii. 14 Rec. (see σάρ- 
wos, 3); governed by mere human nature (see σάρξ, 4) 
not by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. iii. 1, 3, also 4 RG; hav- 


569 








σάρξ 
ing its seat in the animal nature or roused by the animal. 
nature, ai σαρκικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. ii. 11; i. q. human: 
with the included idea of weakness, ὅπλα, 2 Co. x. 4; with 
the included idea of depravity, σαρκ. σοφία (i. 6. mavoup- 
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2), 2 Co. i. 12. [(Anthol. Pal. 1, 107; cf. 
ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν kK. σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν, ‘Teaching’ 
οἷο. 1,4). Cf. Trench, Syn. § Ixxi.] 2. pertaining 
to the flesh, i.e. to the body (see σάρξ, 2): relating to 
birth, lineage, ete., ἐντολή, Heb. vii. 16 Rec.; τὰ σαρκικά,. 
things needed for the sustenance of the body, Ro. xv.. 
27; 1 Co. ix. 11, (Aristot. h. anim. 10, 2 p. 635%, 11; Plut. 
de placit. philos. 5, 3, 7; once in Sept., 2 Chr. xxxii. 8: 
Compl.).* 

c'ápkwos, -n, -ov, (σάρξ), [ Arstph., Plat., Aristot., al.], 
fleshy, Lat. carneus, i. e. 1. consisting of flesh, com- 
posed of flesh, (for proparoxytones ending in -wos gen- 
erally denote the material of which a thing is made, 
ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 46 sq; [Donaldson, New 
Crat. $258]); Vulg. carnalis: opp. to λίθινος, 2 Co. iii. 
3 (σάρκ. ἰχθύς, opp. to a fish of gold which has been 
dreamed of, Theoer. id. 21, 66; the word is also found 
in Plato, Aristot., Theophr., Plut. ; Sept., al.). 2j 
pertaining to the body (as earthly and perishable material, 
opp. to ξωὴ ἀκατάλυτος) : Heb. vii. 16 G LT Tr WH (see 
σαρκικός, 2). 3. it is used where σαρκικός might 
have been expected: viz. by G L T Tr WH in Ro. vii. 14 
and 1 Co. iii. 1; in these pass., unless we decide that Paul 
used σαρκικός and σάρκινος indiscriminately, we must 
suppose that σάρκινος expresses the idea of σαρκικός with 
an emphasis: wholly given up to the flesh, rooted in the 
flesh as it were. ΟἿ. W.§16, 3.5 Fritzsche u. s.; Reiche, 
Comment. erit. in N. T. i. p. 138 sqq.; Holsten, Zum 
Evang. des Paulus u. Petrus p. 397 sqq. (Rostock, 1867) ; 
[ Trench, Syn. $1xxii.].* 

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ, (eol. σύρξ; hence it seems to be de- 
rived fr. σύρω, akin to σαίρω, ‘to draw,’ ‘to draw off,’ 
and to signify what can be stripped off fr. the bones [Etym.. 
Magn. 708, 34; “sed quis subsignabit ” (Lob. Paralip.. 
p. 111)]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 13; 

1. prop. flesh (the soft substance of the living body, 
which covers the bones and is permeated with blood) of 
both men and beasts: 1 Co. xv. 39; plur. — of the flesh 
of many beings, Rev. xix. 18, 21; of the parts of the 
flesh of one, Lk. xxiv. 39 Tdf.; Rev. xvii. 16; accord- 
ingly it is distinguished both from blood, σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 
(on which expression see below, 2 a.; 3 bis; 4 fin. [cf. 
W.19]), and from bones, πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, 
Lk. xxiv. 39 (οὐ γὰρ ἔτι σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα ives ἔχουσιν, 
Hom. Od. 11, 219). φαγεῖν τὰς σάρκας τινός : prop., 
Rev. xvii. 16; xix. 18, (Lev. xxvi. 29; κατεσθίειν, 2 K. 
ix. 36, and often in Sept.; in class. Grk. freq. βιβρώσκειν 
σάρκας ; σαρκῶν ἐδωδή, Plut. septem sap. conviv. c. 16); 
trop. to torture one with eternal penal torments, Jas. v. 3, 
cf. Mic. iii. 3; Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 2; φαγεῖν and τρώγειν" 
τὴν σάρκα τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, in fig. disc. to appropri- 
ate to one’s self the saving results of the violent death en- 
dured by Christ, Jn. vi.52-56; ἀπέρχεσθαι or πορεύεσθαι 
ὀπίσω σαρκός, to follow after the flesh, is used of those- 


σάρξ 


who are on the search for persons with whom they can 
gratify their lust [see ὀπίσω, 2 a.], Jude 7; 2 Pet. ii. 
10; τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκός, the body compacted of flesh 
[cf. W. 188 (177) ], Col. i. 22. Since the flesh is the vis- 
ible part of the body, σάρξ is 

2. i. q. the body, not designating it, however, as a 
skilful combination of related parts (ian organism,’ 
which is denoted by the word σῶμα), but signifying the 
material or substance of the living body [ef. Ae- 
schyl. Sept. 622 γέροντα τὸν νοῦν σάρκα δ᾽ ἡβῶσαν φέρει]; 
a. univ.: Jn. vi. 63 (see πνεῦμα, 2 p. 520" mid.); Acts 
ii. 26, 30 Rec.; 2 Co. xii. 7; Gal. iv. 14; Eph. v. 29; Heb. 
ix. 10, 13; [1 Pet.iii. 21]; Jude 8; pia σάρξ, one body, 
of husband and wife, Mk. x. 8; so eis σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen. 
ii. 24), Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x. 8; 1 Co. vi. 16; Eph. v. 31; 
opp. to ψυχή, Acts ii. 31 (ἔδωκεν... . Ino. Xp. .. . τὴν σάρκα 
ὑπὲρ τῆς capkós ἡμῶν kai THY ψυχὴν ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 49, 6 [ef. Iren. 5, 1, 1; but GL T Tr 
WH drop ἡ ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ in Acts l.c.]); ΟΡΡ. ἴο πνεῦμα (the 
human), 1 Co. v. 5; 2Co. vii. 1; Col.ii. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 
iv. δ; σὰρξ x. αἷμα, i. 4. ψυχικὸν σῶμα, 1 Co. xv. 50, cf. 
44; ἡ περιτομὴ ἐν σαρκί, Ro. ii. 28; Eph. ii. 11; τὸ πρό- 
σωπόν pov ev σαρκί, [| A. V. my face in the flesh], my bodily 
countenance, Col. ii. 1; ἀσθένεια σαρκός, of disease, Gal. 
iv. 13; ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν, 2 Co. iv. 11 (cf. ἐν τῷ 
'σώματι ἡμῶν, vs. 10); ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ αὐτοῦ, by giving up his 
body to death, Eph. ii. 14 (15) ; also διὰ τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ, 
Heb. x. 20, cf. Jn. vi. 51, (προσφέρειν τὴν σάρκα pov, to 
offer in sacrifice my flesh — Christ is speaking, Barn. ep. 
7,5; τὴν σάρκα παραδοῦναι els καταφθοράν, ibid. 5,1). life 
on earth, which is passed in the body (flesh), is desig- 
nated by the foll. phrases: ἐν σαρκὶ εἶναι, Ro. vii. 5 (where 
Paul uses this expression with designed ambiguity in or- 
der to involve also the ethical sense, ‘to be in the power 
of the flesh,’ to be prompted and governed by the flesh; 
see 4 below) ; ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, Gal. ii. 20; Phil. i. 22; ἐπι- 
μένειν ἐν σαρκί, Phil. i. 24; ὁ ἐν σαρκὶ χρόνος, 1 Pet. iv. 2; 
ai ἡμέραι τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ, of Christ's life on earth, Heb. 
V. 7. ἐν σαρκί οὐ ἐν τῇ σαρκί, in things pertaining to the 
flesh (body), such as circumcision, descent, etc.: Gal. vi. 
12 sq. ; πεποιθέναι, Phil. iii. 3 sq. ; ἔχειν πεποίθησιν, Phil. 
iii. 4. b. used of naturalor physical origin, 
generation, relationship: οἱ συγγενεῖς κατὰ σάρκα, 
Ro. ix. 8 [cf. W. § 20, 2 a.]; τέκνα τῆς σαρκός, children 
by birth, natural posterity, ibid. 8; ἀδελφὸν ἐν σαρκὶ καὶ 
ἐν κυρίῳ, a natural brother (as it were) and a Christian 
brother, Philem. 16; of τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρες, Our nat- 
ural fathers (opp. to God ὁ πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων, see 
πατήρ, 1 a. and 3 b.), Heb. xii. 9; τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί, Gen- 
tiles by birth, Eph. ii. 11; Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα, 1 Co. x. 
18 (the opposite term Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ, of Christians, is 
found in Gal. vi. 16) ; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as respects the flesh 
i. e. human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [(Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 32, 2; 
Tren. haer. 4, 4, 1 and frag. 17 ed. Stieren p. 836)]; yevd- 
μενος ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ κατὰ c. Ro. i. 3; ὁ κατὰ σάρκα 
γεννηθείς, born by natural generation (opp. to 6 κατὰ 
πνεῦμα γενν. i. 6. by the supernatural power of God, oper- 
ating in the promise), Gal. iv. 29, 23; τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ 


570 


σάρξ 


τῆς σαρκὸς σάρξ ἐστιν, that which has been born of the 
natural man is a natural man (opp. to one who has been 
born again by the power of the Holy Spirit), Jn. iii. 6 ; 
ἡ σάρξ pov, those with whom I share my natural origin, 
my fellow-countrymen, Ro. xi. 14 (ἰδοὺ ὀστᾶ σου καὶ 
σάρκες σου, 2 S. v. 1; add, xix. 13; Gen. xxxvii. 27; Judg. 
ix. 2); εἶναι ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς k. ἐκ τῶν ὀστέων τινός, Which 
in its proper use signifies to be * formed out of one’s flesh 
and bones’ (Gen. ii. 23; to be related to one by birth, 
Gen. xxix. 14), is transferred metaph. to the church, 
which spiritually derives its origin from Christ and 
is united to him, just as Eve drew her origin from her 
husband Adam, Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mre. br.]. c 
the sensuous nature of man, ‘the animal nature’: 
without any suggestion of depravity, τὸ θέλημα τῆς σαρ- 
κός, of sexual desire, Jn. i. 13; the animal nature with 
cravings which incite to sin: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 
Ro. vii. 18 (for which τὰ μέλη is used in 22 sq.); xiii. 
14; Jude 23; opp. to 6 νοῦς, Ro. vii. 25; ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῆς 
σαρκός, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (with its manifestation, ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν 
ὀφθαλμῶν ; [al. regard this last as a new specification ; 
cf. Westcott ad loc.]); plur. 2 Pet. ii. 18, (rà τῆς σαρκὸς 
πάθη, 4 Macc. vii. 18; τὸ μὴ δεδουλῶσθαι a ap ki καὶ rois 
πάθεσι ταύτης διάγειν, ὑφ᾽ ὧν κατασπώμενος ὁ νοῦς τῆς θνη- 
τῆς ἀναπίμπλαται φλυαρίας, εὔδαιμόν τι καὶ μακάριον, Plut. 
consol. ad Apoll. c. 13; τῆς σαρκὸς ἡδονή, opp. to ψυχή, 
Plut. de virt. et vit. c. 3; add, Philo de gigant.§7; Diog. 
Laert. 10, 145 ; animo cum hae carne grave certamen est, 
Sen. consol. ad Mare. 21; animus liber habitat; nunquam 
me caro ista compellet ad metum, Sen. epp. 65 [7, 3, 22]; 
non est summa felicitatis nostrae in carne ponenda, ibid. 
74 [9, 3, 16]). the physical nature of man as subject to 
suffering: παθεῖν σαρκί, 1 Pet. iv. 1; ἐν τῇ σαρκί pov, 
in that my flesh suffers afflictions, Col. i. 24 (where cf. 
Meyer and De Wette [and Bp. Lghtft.]) ; θλίψιν ἔχειν 
τῇ σαρκί, 1 Co. vii. 28. 

3. a living creature (because possessed of a body of 
flesh), whether man or beast: πᾶσα σάρξ (in imitation 
of the Hebr. 3ba-53 LW. 33]), every living creature, 1 
Pet. i. 24; with od preceding (qualifying the verb [W. 
§ 26, 1; B. 121 (106) ]), no living creature, Mt. xxiv. 22 ; 
Mk. xiii. 20; spec. a man (ἄνθρωπος for Ww, Gen. vi. 
13), generally with a suggestion of weakness, frailty, 
mortality: Sir. xxviii. 5; ἐν τῷ θεῷ ἤλπισα, ov φοβηθή- 
copa τί ποιήσει μοι σάρξ, Ps. lv. (lvi.) 5; cf. Jer. xvii. 5; 
ἐμνήσθη, ὅτι σάρξ εἰσιν, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 39; σὰρξ «. 
αἷμα, Eph. vi. 12; γενεὰ σαρκὸς x. αἵματος, ἣ μὲν τελευτᾷ, 
ἑτέρα δὲ γεννᾶται, Sir. xiv. 18; ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο, en- 
tered into participation in human nature, Jn. i. 14 (the 
apostle used σάρξ, not ἄνθρωπος, apparently in order to 
indicate that he who possessed supreme majesty did not 
shrink from union with extreme weakness); εὑρίσκειν rt 
κατὰ σάρκα, to attain to anything after the manner of a 
(weak) man, i. e. by the use of merely human powers, 

to. iv. 1 (for substance equiv. to ἐξ ἔργων in vs. 2); 
Hebraistically (see above), πᾶσα σάρξ, all men, Lk. iii.- 
6; Jn. xvii. 2[W. $ 30, 1a.]; Acts ii. 17; Sir. xlv. 4; 
with οὐ or μή preceding (qualifying the verb [W. and 


σάρξ 


B. as referred to above]), no man, no mortal, Ro. iii. 20; 
1 Co. i. 29; Gal. ii. 16. man as he appears, such as he 
presents himself to view, man's external appearance and 
condition: κατὰ σάρκα κρίνειν, Jn. viii. 15 [cf. W. 583 
(542)] (i. q. κρίνειν κατ᾽ ὄψιν, vii. 24) ; γινώσκειν or εἰδέ- 
ναι τινὰ κατὰ σάρκα, 2 Co. v. 16; oí κατὰ σάρκα κύριοι (see 
κατά, II. 3 b.), Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22. univ. human 
nature, the soul included: ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, in 
a visible form, like human nature which is subject to sin, 
Ro. viii. 3 [ef. ὁμοίωμα, b.]; ἐν σαρκὶ ἔρχεσθαι, to appear 
clothed in human nature, 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Rec. in 3; 2 Jn. 
7, (Barn. ep. 5, 10); φανεροῦσθαι, 1 Tim. iii. 16 (Barn. 
ep. 5, 6; 6, 7; 12, 10) ; κεκοινωνηκέναι αἵματος K- σαρκός, 
Heb. ii. 14. 

4. σάρξ, when either expressly or tacitly opp. to τὸ 
πνεῦμα (τοῦ θεοῦ), has an ethical sense and denotes 
mere human nature, the earthly nature of man apart 
JSrom divine influence, and therefore prone to sin and op- 
posed to God; accordingly it includes whatever in the 
soulis weak, low, debased, tending to ungodliness and 
vice (* Thou must not understand * flesh’, therefore, as 
though that only were ‘flesh’ which is connected with un- 
chastity, but St. Paul uses ‘flesh’ of the whole man, body 
and soul, reason and all his faculties included, because all 
that is in him longs and strives after the flesh” (Luther, 
Pref. to the Ep. to the Rom.); “note that ‘flesh’ signifies 
the entire nature of man, sense and reason, without the 
Holy Spirit" (Melanchthon, Loci, ed. of 1535, in Corpus 
Reform. xxi. p. 277). This definition is strikingly sup- 
ported by these two utterances of Paul: οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν 
ἄνεσιν ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν, 2 Co. vii. 5; οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ 
πνεύματί μου, 2 Co. ii. 13): Ro. viii. 3; Gal. v. 13, 19; 
opp. to τὸ πνεῦμα (τοῦ θεοῦ), Ro. viii. 6 sq. 12 sq.; Gal. 
v. 16 sq.; vi. 8; Col. ii. 13 (on which see ἀκροβυστία, c.) ; 
23 (see πλησμονή); ἐπιθυμία σαρκός, Gal. v. 16; ai ἐπιθυ- 
plac and τὰ θελήματα τῆς gapkós, Eph. ii. 3; ὁ νοῦς τῆς 
σαρκός, Col. ii. 18; σῶμα τῆς σαρκός, a body given up to 
the control of the flesh, i. e. a body whose members our 
nature, estranged from God, used as its instruments (cf. 
Ro. vi. 19), Col. ii. 11 GL'T Tr WH; τὰ τῆς σαρκός (opp. 
to τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος), the things which please the flesh, 
which the flesh craves, Ro. viii. 5; σαρκὶ ἐπιτελοῦμαι, to 
make for one’s self an end [see ἐπιτελέω, 1 fin.] by de- 
voting one's self to the flesh, i. e. by gradually losing the 
Holy Spirit and giving one’s self up to the control of 
the flesh, Gal. iii. 3; σταυροῦν τὴν σάρκα αὐτοῦ (see σταυ- 
ρόω, 3b.), Gal. v. 24; ἐν σαρκὶ εἶναι (opp. to ἐν πνεύματι, 
sc. Tov θεοῦ), to be in the power of the flesh, under the 
control of the flesh, Ro. viii. 8 sq., cf. vii. 5 (see 2 a. 
above); οἱ κατὰ σάρκα ὄντές, who exhibit the nature of 
the flesh, i. q. of σαρκικοί (opp. to of κατὰ πνεῦμα ὄντες), 
Ro. viii. 5; κατὰ σάρκα περιπατεῖν, to live acc. to the 
standard of the flesh, to comply in conduct with the im- 
pulse of the flesh, Ro. viii. 1 Rec.: 2 Co. x. 2; opp. to 
κατὰ πνεῦμα, Ro. viii. 4; βουλεύεσθαι, 2 Co. i. 17; καυ- 
χᾶσθαι, 2 Co. xi. 18 where οἵ. Meyer; (opp. to κατὰ 
πνεῦμα) ζῆν, Ro. viii. 12 sq. (ἐν σαρκὶ τυγχάνουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
κατὰ σάρκα ζῶσιν, of Christians, Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 8); ἐν 


811 








^ 
σαταν 


σαρκὶ περιπατοῦντες οὐ κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα, although 
the nature in which we live is earthly and therefore 
weak, yet we do not carry on our warfare according to 
its law, 2 Co. x. 3, (οὐ κατὰ σάρκα γράφειν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ 
γνώμην θεοῦ, Ignat. ad Rom. 8,3); with the suggestion 
of weakness as respects knowledge: σὰρξ x. 
αἷμα, a man liable to err, fallible man: Mt. xvi. 17; Gal. 
i. 16; ἡ ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός, Ro. vi. 19; σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, 
1 Co. i. 26. Cf. Tholuck, Ueber σάρξ als Quelle der 
Sünde, in the Theol. Stud. τι. Krit. for 1855, p. 477 sqq.; 
C. Holsten, Die Bedeut. des Wortes σάρξ im Lehrbe- 
griffe des Paulus, 4to, Rostock 1855 [reprinted in his 
Zum Evang. des Paul. u. Petr. p. 365 sqq. (Rostock, 
1867); see also (with esp. ref. to Holsten) Lüdemann, 
Die Anthropologie des Apost. Paul. (Kiel, 1872)]; 
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 66 
sqq.; Daur in the Theol. Jahrbb. for 1857, p. 96 sqq., 
and in his Bibl. Theol des N. T. p. 142 sqq. ete.; 
Wieseler, Br. an die Galater, pp. 443 sqq. 448 sqq. [ef. 
Riddle in Schaff's Lange's Com. on Rom. p. 235 sq.]; 
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. (ed. 3) $ 68 p. 243 sqq., 
§ 100 p. 414 sq.; Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christologie, p. 
8 sqq.; Eklund, σάρξ vocabulum quid ap. Paulum apost. 
significet (Lund, 1872); Pj/leiderer, Paulinismus, p. 47 
sqq. [ Eng. trans. vol. i. p. 47 sqq.]; Wendt, Die Begriffe 
Fleisch u. Geist im bibl. Sprachgebr. (Gotha, 1878); 
[Cremer in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Fleisch, but esp. in his 
Bibl.-theol. Worterbuch, 3te (or 4te) Aufl. s. v.; Laid- 
law, The Bible Doctr. of Man (Edinb. 1879), pp. 74 sqq. 
313 sq.; Philippi, Glaubensl. ed. 2, vol. iii. pp. 231-250; 
esp. Dickson, St. Paul's use of the terms Flesh and 
Spirit (Glasgow, 1883)]; and the reff. in Meyer on Ro. 
iv. 1 (6te Aufl.).* 

Zapovx (Rec.), more correctly (G L T Tr WH) Σερούχ, 
(a i. q. yw, ‘vine-shoot”), 6, Serug [so R. V.; but 
A. V. in the N. T. Saruch], the name of a man (Gen. 
xi. 20 sq. etc.) : Lk. iii. 35.* 

σαρόω (for the earlier caipa, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 83 
[W. 24, 91 (87)]), -à; pf. pass. ptep. σεσαρωμένος ; (σάρον 
a broom); ¢o sweep, clean by sweeping: τί, Lk. xv. 8; 
pass. Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25. (Artem. oneir. 2, 33; 
[Apoll. Dysk. p. 253, 7]; Geop.) * 

Σάρρα, -as, 7, (TW ‘princess’, Gen. xvii. 15), Sarah, 
wife of Abraham: Ro. iv. 19; ix. 9; Heb. xi. 11; 1 Pet. 
iii. 6.* 

ZXápov, -wvos [so Tdf.; but L WH ace. -àva, Tr -ovà; 
cf. B. 16 (14)], 6, (Hebr. me for me fr. q^ ‘to be 
straight’; [in Hebr. always with the art. wn ‘the 
level’]), Sharon [so R. V.; but A. V. Saron], a level re- 
gion extending from Cesarea of Palestine (Strato's 
Tower) as far as Joppa [about 30 miles]; it abounded 
in pasturage and was famous for its fertility (Is. xxxiii. 
9; Ixv. 10; 1 Chr. xxvii. 29): Acts ix. 35. [Cf. B.D. 
s. v. Sharon; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. etc. p. 126.]* 

σατᾶν indecl. (2 Co. xii. 7 RG [Tdf. in 1 K. xi. 14 
accents -ráv (Lagarde leaves it unaccented)]), ó, and 
6 σατανᾶς [i.e. with the art. (exc. in Mk. iii. 23; Lk. 
xxii. 3)], -ἃ [cf. B. 20 (18); W. $ 8, 14, ([Aram. «35D, 


σάτον 


stat. emph. of 190] Hebr. yw), adversary (one who op- 
poses another in purpose or act); the appellation is 
given to 1. the prince of evil spirits, the inveter- 
ate adversary of God and of Christ (see διάβολος, and 
in πονηρός, 2b. ): Mk. iii. [23], 26; iv. 15; Lk. x. 18; 
xi 18:1 Cow. 55 οὐδ, si 141 hes elms 
20; Rey. ii. 9,13, 24; iii. 9; he incites to apostasy from 
God and to sin, Mt. iv. 10; Mk.i.13; Lk. iv. S RL 
in br.; xxii. 31; Acts v. 3; 1 Co. vii. 5; 2 Co. ii. 11 (10); 
1 Tim. v. 15; cireumventing men by stratagems, 2 Co. 
xi. 14; 2 Th.ii. 9; the worshippers of idols are said to 
be under his control, Acts xxvi. 18; Rev. xii. 9; he is 
said both himself εἰσέρχεσθαι εἴς τινα, in order to act 
through him, Lk. xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27; and by his de- 
mons to take possession of the bodies of men and to 
afflict them with diseases, Lk. xiii. 16, cf. Mt. xii. 26; 
2 Co. xii. 7; by God's assistance he is overcome, Ro. 
xvi. 20; on Christ's return from heaven he will be 
bound with chains for a thousand years, but when the 
thousand years are finished he will walk the earth in 
yet greater power, Rev. xx. 2, 7, but shortly after will 
be given over to eternal punishment, ibid. 10. 2. 
a Satan-like man: Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. De- 
litzsch in Riehm s. v.; Schenkel in his BL. s. v.;. Ham- 
burger, Real-Encycl. i. 897 sq.; Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, App. xiii. $ ii; and BB.DD. s. v.]* 


E pv 
σάτον, (Hebr. r2, Chald. &nwo, Syr. V1ZLo», του, τό, 


a kind of dry measure, a modius and a half [equiv. to 
about a peck and a half (cf. μόδιος)], (Joseph. antt. 9, 4, 
5 ἰσχύει δὲ τὸ σάτον μόδιον καὶ ἥμισυ ἰταλικόν; cf. Gen. 
xviii. 6 [see Aq. and Symm.]; Judg. vi. 19): Me. xiii. 33; 
Lk. xiii. 21, [in both exx. A.V. ‘three measures of meal’ 
i. e. the common quantity for ‘a baking’ (cf. Gen. xviii. 
6; Judg. vi. 19; 1 S. i. 24)].* 

Σαῦλος, -ov, ó, (see Σαούλ, 2), Saul, the Jewish name 
of the apostle Paul [ef. Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 
2 xi. p. 357 sq.; Conybeare and Howson, St. Paul, i. 150 
sqq. (Am. ed.); Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xix.fin.; B. D. Am. 
ed. s. v. Names]: Acts vii. 58; viii. 1, 3; ix. 1, 8, 11, 19 
Rec., 22, 24, 26 Rec.; xi. 25,30; xii. 25; xiii. 1 sq. 7, 9." 

σβέννυμι (ζβέννυμι, 1 Th. v. 19 Tdf. [cf. Z, e, «]) and 
[in classics] σβεννύω ; fut. σβέσω ; 1aor. ἔσβεσα; Pass., 
pres. σβέννυμαι; 1 fut. σβεσθήσομαι; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 735 and 4p, to extinguish, quench; a. 
prop.: τί, fire or things on fire, Mt. xii. 20; Eph. vi. 16; 
Heb. xi. 34; pass. (Sept. for 1333) to be quenched, to go 
out: Mt. xxv. 8; Mk. ix. 44, 46, [both which vss. TWH 
om. Tr br.], 48. b. metaph. to quench i.e. to sup- 
press, stifle: τὸ πνεῦμα, divine influence, 1 Th. v. 19 
(ἀγάπην, Cant. viii. 7; rà πάθη, 4 Mace. xvi. 4; χόλον, 
Hom. Il. 9, 678; ὕβριν, Plat. legg. 8, 835 d.; τὸν θυμόν, 
ibid. 10, 888 a.).* 

σεαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -ov, reflex. pron. of the 2d pers., used only 
in the gen., dat. and acc.; in the N. T. only in the 
masc.; gen. (of) thyself, (of) thee: Jn. viii. 13; xviii. 
34 L Tr WH; Acts xxvi. 1; 2 Tim.iv.11; dat. σεαυτῷ, 
(to) thyself, (to) thee: Jn. xvii. 5; Acts xvi. 28; Ro. ii. 


572 








σεισμός 


5; 1 Tim. iv. 16; ace. σεαυτόν, thyself, thee: Mt. iv. 6; 
Mk. xii. 31; Lk. iv. 23; Jn. viii. 53; Ro. xiv. 22; Gal. 


vi.1; 1 Tim. iv. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Jas.ii. 8; ete. [Cf. 
B. § 127, 13.] 
σεβάζομαι : (σέβας reverence, awe) ; 1. to fear, 


be afraid: Hom. Il. 6, 167. 417. 2. in later auth. 
i. q. σέβομαι [W. § 2, 1 b.], to honor religiously, to wor- 
ship: with 1 aor. pass. ἐσεβάσθην in an act. sense, Ro. i. 
25 (Orph. Argon. 554; eccl. writ.).* 

σέβασμα, -ros, τό, (σεβάζομαι), whatever is religiously 
honored, an object of worship: 2 Th. ii. 4 (Sap. xiv. 20) ; 
used of temples, altars, statues, etc., Acts xvii. 23; of 
idolatrous images, Bel and the Dragon 27; Sap. xv. 17, 
(Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 30).* 

σεβαστός, -7, -óv, (σεβάζομαιν ; 1. reverend, vener- 
able. 2. ὁ σεβαστός, Lat. augustus, the title of the 
Roman emperors: Acts xxv. 21, 25, (Strabo, Leian., 
Hdian., Dio Cass., al.) ; adj. -ós, τή, τόν, Augustan i. e. 
taking its name fr. the emperor; a title of honor which 
used to be given to certain legions, or cohorts, or battal- 
ions, *for valor" (ala augusta ob virtutem appellata, 
Corpus inserr. Lat. vii. n. 340, 341, 344) : σπείρη σεβ. 
the Augustan cohort, Acts xxvii. 1 (Aeyedv σεβαστή, Ptol. 
2,9,90; 2,9, 185; 4,3, 30). The subject is fully treated 
by Schiirer in the Zeitschr. für wissensch. Theol. for 1875, 
p. 413 sqq.* 

σέβω, and (so everywh. in the Scriptures) σέβομαι ; fr. 
Hom. down; to revere, to worship: τινά (a deity), Mt. xv. 
9; Mk. vii. 7; Acts xviii. 13; xix. 27, (Sap. xv. 18 ete.; 
for wy, Josh. iv. 24; xxii. 25; Jon. i. 9). In the Acts, 
* proselytes of the gate " (see προσήλυτος, 2) are called 
σεβόμενοι τὸν θεόν, [* men that worship God], Acts xvi. 
14; xviii. 7, (Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 2); and simply oí 
σεβόμενοι, [ A. V. the devout persons], Acts xvii. 17; σε- 
Bopevor προσήλυτοι, [ R. V. devout proselytes], Acts xiii. 
43; σεβόμεναι γυναῖκες, ib. 50; of σεβ. Ἕλληνες, [ A. V. 
the devout Greeks], Acts xvii. 4; in the Latin church, 
metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. [exe. Acts. 
xiii. 50] colentes; ef. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. 
p. 521.* 

σειρά, -Gs, 7, (etpo, to fasten, bind together, [akin to. 
Lat. sero, series, servus, etc.]; cf. Curtius § 518), fr. 
Hom. down; a. a line, a rope. b. a chain : 
σειραῖς ζόφου, [ A.V. to chains of darkness, i. e.] to dark- 
ness as if to chains, 2 Pet. ii. 4 RG [but Tr WH have 
σειροῖς, LT σιροῖς, which see in their place]; μιᾷ ἁλύσει 
σκότους πάντες ἐδέθησαν, Sap. xvii. 17 (18).* 

σειρός, -οὔ, 6, 1. q. σειρά, q. v. : 2 Pet. 1.4 Tr WH. But 
σειρός, Lat. sirus, in prof. writ. is a pit, an underground 
granary, [e. g. Dem. p. 100 fin. (where the Schol. τ. θη- 
cavpods x. τ. ὀρύγματα ἐν οἷς κατετίθεντο Ta σπέρματα 
σιροὺς ἐκάλουν οἱ Θρᾷκες k. of Λίβυες); Diod. Sic. 19, 44; 
cf. Suidas s. v. σειροί; Valesius on Harpocr. Lex. s. v. 
Μελίνη. See Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc. Ac- 
cordingly R. V. txt. follows the crit. edd. (cf. σιρός) and 
renders * pits of darkness" ].* 

σεισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (σείω), a shaking, a commotion: ἐν tip 
θαλάσσῃ, a tempest, Mt. viii. 24; as often in Grk. writ. 


σείω 


fr. [Hdt. 4, 28], Soph., Arstph. down, pre-eminently an 
earthquake: Mt. xxiv. 7; xxvii. 54; xxviii. 2; Mk. xiii. 
8; Lk. xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi. 12; viil.5; xi. 13, 
19; xvi. 18; Sept. for wy.* 

σείω ; fut. σείσω (Heb. xii. 26 LT Tr WH); Pass., 
pres. ptep. σειόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐσείσθην;; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. chiefly for wy; to shake, agitate, cause to tremble: 
Rev. vi. 13; τὴν γῆν, Heb. xii. 26 after Hag. ii. 6; ἐσείσθη 
ἡ γῆ: Mt. xxvii. 51 (Judg. v. 4; 2 S. xxii. 8) ; σεισθῆναι 
ἀπὸ φόβου, of men, to be thrown into a tremor, to quake 
Sor fear, Mt. xxviii. 4; metaph. to agitate the mind: 
ἐσείσθη ἡ πόλις, [R. V. was stirred] i. 6. its inhabitants, 
Mt. xxi. 10. [Comp.: dva-, δια-, kara- aeto.] * 

Σεκοῦνδος, T WH Σέκουνδος [Chandler $8 233, 235], -ov, 
6, (a Lat. word), Secundus, a certain man of Thessalo- 
nica: Acts xx. 4.* 

Σελεύκεια [T WH -«ía (see I, 0) ], -as, 7, Seleucia, a city 
of Syria on the Mediterranean, about 5 m. (40 stadia, 
Strabo 16 p. 750) N. of the mouth of the river Orontes, 
about 15 m. (120 stadia) distant fr. Antioch, and oppo- 
site Cyprus: Acts xiii. 4 (1 Maec. xi. 8). [Lewin, St. 
Paul, i. 116 sqq.; Conyb. and Howson, ditto, i. 136 sq.] * 

σελήνη, -ης, 7, (fr. σέλας brightness), fr. Hom. down, 
Hebr. 1, the moon: Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. 
xxi. 25; Acts ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. vi. 12; viii. 12; 
ἘΠῚ Ἐν; XX1329.* 

σεληνιάζομαι ; (σελήνη) ; [lit. to be moon-struck (cf. 
lunatic); see Wetstein on Mt. iv. 24; Suicer, Thesaur. 
ii. 945 sq.; BB. DD. s. v. Lunatic]; to be epileptic (epi- 
lepsy being supposed to return and increase with the 
increase of the moon): Mt. iv. 24; xvii.15. (Manetho 
carm. 4, 81 and 217; [Leian., al.]; eccles. writ.) * 

Zepet, L mrg. Σεμεῖν, T Tr WH Sepeciv [see WH. App. 
p. 155; cf. eu +], Cynwi.e. famous), Semein [so R. V. 
but A. V. Semei], the name of a man: Lk. iii. 26.* 

σεμίδαλις, acc. -ἰν, ἡ, the finest wheaten flour: Rev. xviii. 
13. (Hippocr. Arstph., Joseph., al; Sept. often for 
n9o)* 

'eepyós, -ή, -όν, (σέβω), fr. [Hom. h. Cer., al.], Aeschyl., 
Pind. down, august, venerable, reverend; to be venerated 
for character, honorable: of persons [ A.V. grave], 1 Tim. 
iii. 8,11; Tit. ii. 2; of deeds, Phil. iv. 8. [Cf. Trench 
§ xcii.]* 

σεμνότης, -ητος, 7, (σεμνός), that characteristic of a 
pers. or a thing which entitles to reverence or respect, 
dignity, gravity, majesty, sanctity: ἡ τοῦ ἱεροῦ σεμνότης, 
2 Mace. iii. 12; in an ethical sense, gravity [so R. V. uni- 
formly (cf. Trench p. 347)], honor, probity, purity: 1 Tim. 
ii. 2; iii. 4; Tit. ii. 7. (Eur. Plat., Dem., al.) * 

Σέργιος, -ov, 6, Sergius, surnamed Paulus, proconsul of 
Cyprus, converted to Christianity by the apostle Paul; 
otherwise unknown [cf. Lghtft. in Contemp. Rev. for 
1878, p. 290; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. Excurs. xvi.; Re- 
nan, Saint Paul, p. 14 sq.]: Acts xiii. 7.* 

Σερούχ, see Sapovy. 

Σῆθ, ὁ, (NW ‘put’ [A. V. ‘appointed '], fr. nw to put 
[i. e. in place of the murdered Abel; cf. B. D. s. v. Seth], 
‘Gen. iv. 25), Seth, the third son of Adam: Lk. iii. 38.* 


513 











σημεῖον 


Σήμ (in Joseph. Ξήμας), 6, (OW [΄ name,’ ‘sign,’ *celeb- 
rity’; but variously explained]), Shem, the eldest son 
of Noah: Lk. iii. 36.* 

σημαίνω ; impf. ἐσήμαινον (Acts xi. 28 L WH txt.); 1 
aor. ἐσήμανα, for ἐσήμηνα which is the more com. form in 
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. (see Matthiae 
$185; Kühner ὃ 343s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 24sq.; W.§15s.v.; B.41 (35)); (fr. σῆμα a sign); 
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to give a sign, to sig- 
nify, indicate: τί, Acts xxv. 27; foll. by indir. disc., Jn. 
xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; i.q. to make known: absol. 
Rev. i. 1; foll. by ace. w. inf. Acts xi. 28.* 

σημεῖον, -ov, τό, (σημαίνω [or e7ua]), fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down, Hebr. nis, a sign, mark, token; zl 
univ. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished 
from others and known: Mt. xxvi. 48; Lk.ii.12; 2 Th. 
iii. 17; σημεῖον περιτομῆς (explanatory gen. [cf. B. $ 123, 
4]), equiv. to σημεῖον, 6 ἐστι περιτομή: circumcision which 
should be a sign of the covenant formed with God, Ro. 
iv.11; rà σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου, the tokens by which one 
is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12; a sign by which 
anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. xxi. 
7; τὸ emp. τῆς σῆς παρουσίας, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv. 
3; τοῦ υἱοῦ Tov ἀνθρώπου, the sign which indicates that 
the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven 
in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the 
subj. τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν, i. e. the indications of future 
events which of καιροί furnish, what oí καιροί portend, 
Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; a sign by which 
one is warned, an admonition, 1 Co. xiv. 22. used of 
noteworthy personages, by whom God forcibly 
admonishes men and indicates to them what he would 
have them do: thus σημεῖον ἀντιλεγόμενον is said of Jesus 
Christ, Lk. ii. 34; Ἰωνᾶς ἐγένετο σημεῖον τοῖς Νινευΐταις 
(Jon. iii. 4), Lk. xi. 30; hence, τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ, ib. 29, 
is i.q. τὸ σημεῖον like to that ὃς 7v'Iovas, i.e. to the sign 
which was given by the mission and preaching of Jonah, 
to prompt men to seek salvation [W. 189 (177)]; in the 
same sense, 6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου says that he will be a 
σημεῖον to the men of his generation, ib. 30; but in Mt. 
xii. 39; xvi. 4 τὸ σημεῖον Iwva is the miraculous experi- 
ence which befell Jonah himself, cf. xii. 40; that Luke 
reproduces Christ’s words more correctly than Matthew 
is shown by De Wette and Bleek on Mt. xii. 40, by 
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 265 sq. ed. 1 [Eng. trans. (3d 
ed. N. Y. 1851) $165 p. 245 sq.], and others; [but that 
Luke's report is less full than Matthew's, rather than 
at variance with it, is shown by Meyer, Weiss, Keil, and 
others (on Mt. 1. c.)]. 2. a sign, prodigy, portent, 
i.e.an unusual occurrence, transcending the common 
course of nature ; a. of signs portending remark- 
able events soon to happen: Lk. xxi. 11, 25; Acts ii. 
19; Rev. xii. 1, 35 xv. 1. b. of miracles and wonders 
by which God authenticates the men sent by him, or 
by which men prove that the cause they are pleading is 
God's: Mt. xii. 38 sq.5, xvi. 1, 4; Mk. viii. 11 sq.; xvi. 
17, 20; Lk. xi. 16, 29; xxiii. 8; Jn. ii. 11, 18, 23; iii. 2; 
iv. 54; vi. 2,14, 26, 30; vii. 31; ix. 16; x. 41; xi. 47; xii. 


σημειόω 


18, 87; xx. 80; Acts ii. 22,43; vili.6; 1Co.i.22; but 
the power διδόναι σημεῖα, by which men are deceived, is 
ascribed also to false teachers, false prophets, and to 
demons: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Rev. xiii. 13 sq.; xvi. 
Tae Ὑχιχ ΡΟ. ET ho:09 σημεῖα k. τέρατα (DIAN 
Ὁ 523) or (yet less freq.) τέρατα x. σημεῖα (terms which 
differ not in substantial meaning but only in origin; cf. 
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. iii. p. 270 sq.; [Trench § xci.]) are 
found conjoined: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Jn. iv. 48; 
Acts ii. 19, 435 iv.30; v.12; vi.8; vil. 36; xiv. 3; xv. 
12; Ro. xv. 19; 2 Th. ii. 9, (Deut. xxviii. 465; xxxiv. 11; 
Neh. ix. 10; Is. viii. 18; xx. 3; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 20; 
Sap. viii. 8; x. 16; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; Philo, vit. Moys. i. 
16; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6; b. j. prooem. 11; Plut. Alex. 
75; Ael v.h. 12,57); with x. δυνάμεις added, 2 Co. xii. 
12; Heb. ii. 4; σημεῖα x. δυνάμεις, Acts viii. 13; δυνάμεις x. 
τέρατα k. σημεῖα, Acts ii. 22; διδόναι σημεῖα (see δίδωμι, 
B. II. 1 a.): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 (here Tdf. ποιεῖν 
onp-, See ποιέω, I. 10.) ; σημεῖα are said γίνεσθαι διά τινος 
in Aetsii. 43; iv. [16], 30; v. 12; xiv. 3; xv. 12 [here 
ποιεῖν amp, see above]; τὸ σημεῖον τῆς ἰάσεως, the mira- 
cle, which was the healing, Acts iv. 22.* 

σημειόω, -@: (σημεῖον), to mark, note, distinguish by 
marking; Mid. pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. σημειοῦσθε: to 
mark or note for one’s self [W. $38, 2 b.; B. $135, 4]: 
τινά, 2 ΤῊ. iii. 14 [cf. B. 92 (80); W. 119(113)]. (The- 
ophr., Polyb., Philo, Dion. Hal., al.; [Ps. iv. 7 Sept.].)* 

σήμερον [ Attic τήμερον, i. e. ἡμέρα with pronom. prefix 
(Skr. sa); cf. Vanicek p. 971], adv., fr. Hom. down, 
Sept. for nv, to-day, this day: Mt. vi. 115 xvi. 3 [T br. 
WH reject the pass.]; Lk. iv. 21 ; xix. 5; Actsiv. 9; xiii. 
33, ete.; also where the speaker refers to the night just 
passed, Mt. xxvii. 19; equiv. to this night (now current), 
Lk. ii. 11; σήμερον ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτί, Mk. xiv. 30; ἕως σήμε- 
pov, 2 Co. iii. 15; opp. to αὔριον, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; 
xiii. 32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13; χθὲς καὶ σήμερον xai eis τοὺς 
αἰῶνας, à rhet. periphrasis for ἀεί, Heb. xiii. 8; ἡ σήμερον 
ἡμέρα, this (very) day, Acts xx. 26; ἕως τῆς o. ἡμέρας, 
Ro. xi. 8; μέχρι τῆς σήμερον sc. ἡμέρας, Mt. xi. 23 ; xxviii. 
15; ἕως τῆς a. Mt. xxvii. 8; ἄχρι τῆς o. (where L T Tr 
WH add ἡμέρας), 2 Co. iii. 14; ἡ σήμερον, i. q. what has 
happened to-day [al. render concerning this day's riot ; 
B. $133, 9; but see Meyer ad loc.; W. § 30, 9a.], Acts 
xix. 40; τὸ σήμερον, the word to-day, Heb. iii. 13; asa 
subst.: ὁρίζει ἡμέραν, σήμερον, “a to-day " (meaning, ‘a 
time for embracing the salvation graciously offered" [cf. 
R. V.mrg.]), Heb. iv. 75. 

σήπω: fr. Hom. down; to make corrupt; in the Bible 
also to destroy, Job xl. 7 (12) ; pass. to become corrupt 
or rotten; 2 pf. act. σέσηπα, to (have become i. e. to) be 
corrupted (ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 82) : 6 πλοῦτος σέ- 
σηπεν, has perished, Jas. v. 2.* 

σηρικός (Lchm. ed. maj. T WH σιρικός [cf. WH. App. 
p- 151]), -5, τόν, (Shp, Σῆρες, the Seres, a people of India 
[prob. mod. China; yet on the name cf. Pape, Eigen- 
namen, s.v.; Dict. of Geog. s. v. Serica]) ; 1. prop. 
pertaining to the Seres. 2. silken: τὸ σηρικόν, silk, 
i. e. the fabric, silken garments, Rev. xviii. 12. ([Strabo, 


574 





σικάριος 


Plut., Arr., Leian.]; ἐσθήσεσι σηρικαῖς, Joseph. b. j. 7, 5, 
4.) * 

σής, σητός, 6, (Hebr. 00, Is. li. 8; wy, Job iv. 19; xiii. 
28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D.s. v. Moth; Alex.’s 
Kitto s. v. Ash]: Mt. vi. 19 sq.; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Ar- 
stph., Aristot., Theophr., al.) * 

σητό-βρωτος, -ov, (fr. es a moth, and Bporós fr. βι- 
βρώσκω)Ὶ, moth-caten: ἱμάτιον, Jas. v. 2 (ἱμάτια, Job xiii. 
28; of idol-images, Sibyll. orac. in Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 
36).* 

σθενόω. -ὥ : (σθένος [allied w. στῆναι, hence prop. stead- 
fastness ; Curtius p. 503 sq.] strength), to make strong, 
to strengthen: twa, one’s soul, 1 Pet. v. 10, where for 1 
aor. opt. act. 3 pers. sing. σθενώσαι, we must read the 
fut. σθενώσει, with GLT TrWH. (Pass. in Rhet. Gr. 
ed. Walz, vol. i. e. 15.)* 

σιαγών, -óvos, 7, the jaw, the jaw-bone, [ A. V. cheek]: 
Mt. v. 39; Lk. vi. 29. (Soph., Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; 
Sept. for r35.) * 

σιγάω, -ῶ; laor.écíygsa ; pf. pass. ptep. σεσιγημένος 5 
(σιγήν ; fr. Hom. down; to keep silence, hold one's peace: 
Lk.ix.36; xviii. 39 L'T Tr WH ; [xx. 26]; Acts xii. 
17; xv. 12 sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 28, 30, 34; pass. to be kept in 
silence, be concealed, Ro. xvi. 25. [Svw. see ἡσυχάζω.] " 

σιγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. σίζω [onomatopoetic, Etym. Magn. 712, . 
29] i.e. to command silence by making the sound st or 
sch; [yet σιγή prob. has no connection with σίζω, but is 
of European origin (ef. Germ. schweigen) ; cf. Fick, Pt. 
iii. 845; Curtius $572]), fr. Hom. down, silence: Acts 
xxi. 40; Rev. viii. 1.* 

σιδήρεος, -éa, -eov, contr. -oüs, -d, -oUv, (σίδηρος), fr. 
Hom. down, made of iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev.ii. 27; ix. 
Die exii. 53 ἘΠῚ Woes 

σίδηρος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, iron: Rev. xviii. 12.* 

Σιδών. -àvos [B. 16 (14)], ἡ, (jYv and yrs, fr. ὭΣ ‘to 
hunt’, in Aram. also ‘to fish’; hence prop. taking its 
name from its abundance of fish; cf. Justin 18, 3), Sidon, 
a very ancient Phenician city, formerly distinguished 
for wealth and traffic, situated near the Mediterranean 
on the borders of Judea; it had been assigned to the 
tribe of Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but the Jews vainly en- 
deavored to capture it [Judg. i. 31; iii. 3; x. 12]; now 
Saida, containing about 10,000 [or 9,000, ace. to Porter 
in Murray's Handbook p. 376] inhabitants [Baedeker, 
Palestine p. 433]: Mt. xi. 21 sq.; xv. 21; Mk. iii. 8; vii. 
24 (where Tom. WH Tr mrg. br. the words καὶ Σιδῶνος), 
31; Lk. iv. 26 (where LT Tr WH Sidovias) ; vi. 17; x. 13 
sq.; Acts xxvii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s.v.; Schultz in Herzog 
ed. 2 vol. xiv. 192sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm s. v.] * 

Σιδώνιος, -a, -ov, (3i0óv), belonging to Sidon, of Sidon: 
τῆς Σιδωνίας sc. χώρας, [R.V. in the land of Sidon], Lk. 
iv. 26 L' T Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -8o»-]) ; Se 
δώνιοι, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.* 

σικάριος, -ov, 6, (a Latin word), an assassin, i. e. one 
who carries a dagger or short sword [Lat. sica (cf. Jo- 
seph. as below)] under his clothing, that he may kill 
secretly and treacherously any one he wishes to (a cut- 
throat): Acts xxi. 38. (Joseph. b. 1. 2, 17, 6 σικαρίους 


σίκερα 5 


᾿ἐκάλουν τοὺς Ayatas ἔχοντας ὑπὸ τοῖς κόλποις τὰ ξίφη [cf. 
2,13,3]; also antt. 30, 8, 10 σικάριοι λῃσταί εἰσι χρώμενοι 
ξιφιδίοις παραπλησίοις μὲν τὸ μέγεθος τοῖς τῶν Περσῶν ἀκι- 
νάκαις, ἐπικαμπέσι δὲ καὶ ὁμοίοις ταῖς ὑπὸ Ρωμαίων σίκαις 
καλουμέναις, ap ὧν καὶ τὴν προσηγορίαν οἱ λῃστεύοντες ἔλα- 
Bov πολλοὺς ἀναιροῦντες.) [SYN. see φονεύς. } ἢ 

σίκερα, τό, (Hebr. 35i) [rather, acc. to Kautzsch (Gram. 
p- 11) for 813¥ (prop. cikpa) the stat. emphat. of 337 
(lit. ‘intoxicating’ drink)]), indecl. [W. 68 (66); B. 
24 (21)], (yet Euseb. praep. evang. 6, 10, 8 has a gen. 
σίκερος [and Soph. in his Lex. quotes fr. Cyrill. Alex. 1, 
1041 d. (ed. Migne) a gen. σικέρατος 1), strong drink, an 
intoxicating beverage, different from wine [exc. in Num. 
xxviii. 7 (cf. Is. xxviii. 7)]; it was a factitious product, 
made of a mixture of sweet ingredients, whether derived 
from grain and vegetables, or from the juice of fruits 
(dates), or a decoction of honey: Lk. i. 15 (Lev. x. 9; 
Num. vi. 3; Deut. xiv. 25 (26) ; xxix. 6, etc.; the same 
Hebr. word is rendered also by μέθυσμα, Judg. xiii. 4, 7, 
14; Mic. i. 11). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wein, künst- 
licher ; [B. D. s. v. Drink, Strong ].* 

Σίλας, [gen. not found (exc. Joseph. vita 17 -a)], dat. 
-a, acc. -av, [B. 20 (18), 6, Silas (contr. fr. SiXovavós, 

τα. v.; W. 103 (97)), a Roman citizen (Acts xvi. 37 sq.), 
the companion of the apostle Paul in several of his jour- 
neys, and his associate in preaching the gospel: Acts 
xv. 22, 27, 32, 34 Rec., 40; xvi. 19, 25, 29; xvii. 4, 10, 
14 sy.; xviii. 5. [B. D. s. v. Silas.]* 

Σιλονανός, -οὔ, 6, Silvanus, the same man who in Acts 
is called Σίλας (q. v.) : 2Co.i.19; 1 ΤῊ. 1:1; 2 Th.i.1; 
1 Pet. v.12. [Not infreq. written in the Mss. Σιλβανός, 
Silbanus ; cf. Tdf. on Il. cc.] * 

Σιλωάμ, (Hebr. mw, Is. viii. 6, which in Jn. ix. 7 is 
translated ἀπεσταλμένος, but more correctly [see below] 
‘a sending out,’ ‘gushing forth’ (of water); it is formed 
after the analogy of 3)*8 ‘had in hatred’, * persecuted ’, 
fr. TN; i» ‘born ’, fr. 30 ‘to bring forth’; [*the pure- 
ly passive explanation, ἀπεσταλμένος, Jn. ix. 7, is not so 
incorrect.” Ewald, Ausführl. Lehrbuch d. Hebr. Spr. 
$150, 2 a.; cf. Meyer on Jn. 1. 6.7), 6 (in Joseph. ἡ 5., sc. 
πηγή; b. j. 5, 12, 2; 6, 8, 5; but also μέχρι τοῦ 2. b. 1. 2, 
16, 2; 6, 7, 2; [B. 21 (19) ), [indecl. ; but in Joseph. b. j. 
5, 6, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς Zi Vos], Siloam, a fountain of sweet and 
abundant water (Joseph. b. j. 5, 4, 1), flowing into a basin 
or pool of the same name (Neh. iii. 15), both of which 
seem to have been situated in the southern part of Jer- 
usalem, although opinions vary on this point: Lk. xiii. 
4; Jn. ix. 11, (Is. viii. 6). C£. [B. D. s. v. Siloam]; Win. 
RWB. s. v. Siloah ; Rédiger in Gesen. Thesaur. p. 1416; 
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xiv. p. 371 sqq.; Robinson, Pal- 
estine, i. 333 sqq.; Tobler, Die Siloaquelle u. der Oelberg 
(St. Gallen, 1852); Kneucker, Siloah, Quelle Teich u. 
Thal in Jerus. (Heidelb. 1873); Furrer in-Schenkel v. 
295 sq.; [Ritter, Palestine, etc., Eng. trans. i. 148 sq. ; 

Wilson, Ordnance Survey, ete., 1865; esp. Guthe in the 
Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.-Vereins for 1882, pp. 205 sqq. 
229 sqq.; Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Morgenl.-Gesellsch. for 
1882, p. 725 sqq.].* 


75 σίναπε 


σιμικίνθιον (or σημικίνθιον), -ov, τό, (Lat. semicinctium 
[ef. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v.], fr. semi and cingo), a 
narrow apron, or linen covering, which workmen and 
servants were accustomed to wear: Acts xix. 12 [ A. V. 
aprons ].* 

Σίμων, -avos [B. 16 (14)], 6, (you, ‘a hearing’, fr. 
pnw ‘to hear’; [there was also a Grk. name Σίμων (allied 
Ww. σιμός, i.e. ‘flat-nosed’; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p. 
210), but cf. B. D.s. v. Simon init.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 
p. 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt. 
xvii. 25; Mk. i. 29sq. 36; Lk. iv. 38; v. 4 sq. 10, ete.; 
see Πέτρος. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbzeus [cf. 
s. V. Ἰούδας, 8], an apostle, who is called Kavavtzgs [so RG, 
but L T Tr WH -vaios, q. v.], Mt. x. 4; Mk. iii. 18, and 
ζηλωτής, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of 
Jesus [cf. s. v. ἀδελφός, 1]: Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3. 4. 
a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus: 
Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the 
father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed Ἰσκαρι- 
ὦτης (see Ἰούδας, 6) ] : Jn. vi. 71; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6. 
a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 43 sq., who appears to 
[some, e. g. Grotius, Schleiermacher, Holtzmann, Schen- 
kel, Ewald, Keim, Hug, Bleek (see his Synopt. Erklür. on 
Lk. 1. e.) to] be the same as Simon the leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ;. 
Mk. xiv. 3; [but the occurrence recorded by Lk. 1. c. is 
now commonly thought to be distinct fr. that narrated 
by Mt. and Mk. ll. cc.; cf. Godet or Keil on Lk. J. τᾷ 
a certain tanner, living at Joppa: Acts ix. 43; x. 6, 17, 
32. 8. Simon (‘Magus’), the Samaritan sorcerer : 
Acts viii. 9, 13, 18, 24. The various eccles. stories about 
him, as well as the opinions and conjectures of modern 
theologians, are reviewed at length by Lipsius in Schen- 
kel v. pp. 801-321; [ef. W. Moller in Herzog ed. 2, vol. 
xiv. p. 246 sqq. ; Schaffi Hist. of the Chris. Church, vol. 
ii. (1883) § 121]. 

Σινᾶ [-νά WH; cf. Chandler §§ 135, 138], τό (se. ὄρος, 
cf. B. 21 sq. (19)), indecl., Joseph. τὸ Σιναῖον, antt. 3, 5, 
1, and τὸ Σιναῖον ὄρος, antt. 2, 12, 1; Hebr. ^Yo [perh. 


‘jagged’; al. make it an adj. ‘belonging to (the desert 


of) Sin '], (Sina or) Sinai, a mountain or, rather, a moun- 
tainous region in the peninsula of Arabia Petrza, made 
famous by the giving of the Mosaie law. There are three 
summits: one towards the west, which is called 33r a 
second towards the east, Sinai prop. so called, the third 
towards the south, now Mt. St. Catharine. But the dis- 
tinetion between Horeb and Sinai is given differently 
by different writers; and some think that they were two 
different names of one and the same mountain (ef. Sir. 
xlviii. 7) ; ef. [Mc C. and S. Cycl. s. v. Sinai]; Win. RWB. 
s. v. Sinai; Arnold in Herzog ed. 1 vol. xiv. p. 420 sq. ; 
[Schultz in ed. 2 vol. xiv. p. 282 sqq.]; Furrer in Schen- 
kel v. p. 326 sqq.; [Eng. Ordnance Survey, 1869; Palmer, 
Desert of the Exodus, 1872; also his Sinai from the 
Monuments, 1878; Furrer commends Holland's * Sketch. 
Map" ete. in the Journ. of the Royal Geog. Soc. vol. 
xxxix. (Lond. 1869)]. The name occurs in Acts vii. 30, 
38; Gal. iv. 24 sq.* 

σίναπι (also σίνηπι [but not in the N. T.], both later 


'ivÓov 


for the Attic νάπυ [so accented in late auth., better νᾶπυ], 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 288), [thought to be of Egypt. ori- 
gin; cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v. vàrv], -ews [B. 14 
(13)], τό, mustard, the name of a plant which in oriental 
countries grows from a very small seed and attains to 
the height of ‘a tree" — ten feet and more; hence a very 
small quantity of a thing is likened to a κόκκος σινάπεως 
[A. V. a grain of mustard seed], Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 
6; and also a thing which grows to a remarkable size, 
Mt. xiii. 31 sq.; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii. 19. [Cf. B. D. s. v. 
Mustard; ZLéw, Aram. Pflanzennamen, ὃ 134; Carru- 
thers in the‘ Bible Educator’ vol. i. p.119sq.; Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 472 sq.; Thomson, The Land 
and the Book, ii. 100 sq.]* 

σινδών, -dvos, 7, (of uncertain origin; Skr. sindhu 
[Egypt. ‘schenti’ or ‘sent’; cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter, 
s. v.]; Sept. for 7.10, Judg. xiv. 12 sq.; Prov. xxix. 42 
(xxxi. 24)), fine cloth (Lat. sindon), i. e. 1. linen 
cloth, esp. that which was fine and costly, in which the 
bodies of the dead were wrapped: Mt. xxvii. 59; Mk. 
xv. 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (cf. Hdt. 2, 86 who says of the 
Egyptians, κατειλίσσουσι πᾶν τὸ σῶμα σινδόνος βυσσίνης 
[see Wilkinson’s note in Rawlinson’s Herod. 3d ed. 
l.c.]). 2. thing made of fine cloth: so of alight and 
loose garment worn at night over the naked body, Mk. 
xiv. 51 sq. [others suppose a sheet rather than a shirt to 
be referred to; A. V. linen cloth; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Sheets]. (Besides Hdt., the writers Soph., Thuc., Stra- 
bo, Leian., al., use the word.) * 

σινιάζω: 1 aor. infin. ewidcat; (σινίον ‘a sieve,’ *win- 
nowing-van'; an eccles. and Byzant. word [ef. Macar. 
homil. 5 p. 73 sq. (496 a. ed. Migne) ]) ; to sift, shake in 
à sieve: τινὰ ὡς τὸν σῖτον, i. e., dropping the fig., by in- 
ward agitation to try one's faith to the verge of over- 
throw, Lk. xxii. 31. (Eccles. writ. [cf. W. 92 (87), 26 
(25), and see above].) * 

σιρικός, see σηρικός. 

σιρός, -00, ὁ, i. q. σειρός, q. v.: 2 Pet. ii. 4 L T.* 

σιτευτός, -7), -óv, (σιτεύω, to feed with wheat, to fatten); 
fattened, fatted : Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30. (Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 
21; 1 K. iv. 23, [etc.]; Xen., Polyb., Athen., [al.].) * 

σιτίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of σῖτος) ; 1. corn, grain: 
Acts vii. 12 L T Tr WH. In prof. writ. also 2. 
food made from grain (Hat. 2, 36). 3. eatables, 
victuals, provisions, ([Hdt.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem., 
al.).* 

σιτιστός, -ή, -óv, (σιτίζω, to feed with grain, to fatten), 
fattened, [plur. rà our. as subst., A. V. fatlings], Mt. xxii. 
4. (Joseph.antt. 8, 2, 4; Athen. 14 p. 656 e.) * 

c'vropérptov, -ov, τό, (Attic writ. said τὸν σῖτον μετρεῖν ; 
out of which later writ. formed the compound ocrope- 
tpew, Gen. xlvii. 12, [14]; Polyb. 4, 63, 10; Diod. 19, 
50; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14, 7; ovroperpia, Diod. 2, 41; [cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 383; W. 25]), a measured ‘portion of” 
grain or * food’: Lk. xii. 42. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * 

σῖτος, -ov, ó, [of uncertain origin; cf. Vanicek, Fremd- 
würter, s. v.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for 1 wheat, 
corn: Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 25, 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 28; LK. iii. 17; 


516 








σκανδαλίζω 


[xii. 18 WH Τὰ txt.]; xvi. 7; xxii. 31; Jn. xii. 24; Acts 
xxvii. 38; 1 Οο. χν. 87; Rev. vi.6; xviii 13; plur. τὰ 
σῖτα (cf. W. 63 (62)), Acts vii. 12 Rec., and often in Sept.” 

Σιχάρ, see Συχάρ. 

Σιών, indecl., (its grammat. gend. in the N. T. does 
not appear from the pass. in which it is mentioned; cf. 
B. 21 sq. (19); in the Sept. when it denotes the city of 
Jerusalem ἡ Σιών occurs, as Ps. ci. (cii.) 14, 17; exxxi. 
(cxxxii.) 13; exxxvi. (exxxvii) 1), Hebr. iv [i. e. 
ace. to some, * protected’ or * protecting’; acc. to others, 
‘sunny’; al al]; Sion [so A. V., but properly (with 
R. V.)] Zion; 1. the hill on which the higher and 
more ancient part of Jerusalem was built (11 wy city 
of David, because David captured it) ; it was the south- 
westernmost and highest of the hills on which the city 
stood; [many now would identify it with the eastern 
hill, some with the northern; cf. Furrer in Schenkel 
iii. 216 sqq. ; Mühlau in Riehm s. v.; per contra Wolcott 
in B. D. Am. ed.s. v.; Schultz in Herzog ed. 2 vi. p. 543 
sq.]. 2. used very often for the entire city of Jeru- 
salem itself: Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 6, (after Is. xxviii. 
16); Ro. xi. 26 (fr. Is. lix. 20); ἡ θυγάτηρ Σιών (see θυγάτηρ, 
b. 8.), Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15. 3. Since Jerusalem, 
because the temple stood there, was called the dwelling- 
place of God (ef. Mt. v. 35; κύριος τὴν Σιὼν ἡρετίσατο eis 
κατοικίαν ἑαυτῷ, Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 13), the expression 
τὸ Σιὼν ὄρος is transferred to heaven, as the true dwell- 
ing-place of God and heavenly beings, the antitype of 
the earthly Zion: Heb. xii. 22 ;. Rev. xiv. 1.* 

σιωπάω, -ὥ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐσιώπα, 3 pers. plur. 
ἐσιώπων; fut. σιωπήσω (Lk. xix. 401, Τ Tr WH); 1 aor. 
ἐσιὠπησα; (σιωπή silence); fr. Hom. down; to be silent, 
hold one's peace: prop., Mt. xx. 31; xxvi. 63; Mk.iii. 4; 
ix. 34; x.48; xiv. 61; Lk.xviii 89 RG; xix. 40; Acts 
xviii. 9; used of one silent because dumb, Lk. i. 20; 
4Mace.x.18; like sileoin the Lat. poets, used metaph. 
of a calm, quiet sea [(in rhetorical command)]: Mk. 
iv. 39. [Svw. see ἡσυχάζω.] * 

σκανδαλίζω; 1 aor. ἐσκανδάλισα; Pass., pres. σκανδαλίζο- 
μαι; impf. ἐσκανδαλιζόμην:; 1 aor. ἐσκανδαλίσθην [cf. B. 52 
(45)]; 1 fut. σκανδαλισθήσομαι; (σκάνδαλον) ; Vulg. scan- 


7 
dalizo; Peshitto Sas ; prop. to put a stumbling-block 


or impediment in the way, upon which another may trip 
and fall; to be a stumbling-block; in the N. T. always 
metaph. [R. V. to cause or make to stumble; A. V. to 
offend (cause to offend) ]; a. to entice to sin (Luth. 
ürgern, i. e. arg, bós machen): τινά, Mt. v. 29, [30]; xviii. 
6, 8sq.; Mk: ix. 42sq. 45, 47; Lk. xvii. 2; 1 Co. viii. 13; 
pass. Lat. offendor, [ A. V. to be offended], Vulg. scanda- 


lizor, Peshitto \wao : Ro. xiv. 21 [RGL Trtxt.]; 2 Co. 


xi. 29 [R. V. is made to stumble; cf. W. 153 (145)]. b. 
to cause a person to begin to distrust and desert one whom 
he ought to trust and obey; to cause to fall away, and 
in pass. to fall away [R. V. to stumble (cf. * Teaching’ 
ete. 16, 5; Herm. vis. 4, 1, 3; mand. 8, 10)]: τινά, Jn. 
vi. 61; pass, Mt. xiii. 21; xxiv.10; xxvi 33; Mk. iv. 


““κάνδαλον 


17; xiv. 29; [Jn. xvi. 1]; ἔν τινι [ A. V.] to be offended 
in one, [find occasion of stumbling in], i.e. to see in 
another what I disapprove of and what hinders me from 
acknowledging his authority: Mt. xi. 6; xiii. 57; xxvi. 
31; Mk. vi. 3; xiv. 27; Lk. vii. 23; to cause one to judge 
unfavorably or unjustly of another, Mt. xvii. 27. Since 
the man who stumbles or whose foot gets entangled 
feels annoyed, σκανδαλίζω means c. to cause one 
to feel displeasure at a thing; to make indignant: τινά, 
pass. to be displeased, indignant, [ A. V. offended], Mt. 
xv.12. The verb σκανδαλίζω is found neither in prof. 
.auth. nor in the Sept., but only in the relics of Aquila’s 
version of the O. T., Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 9; Is. viii. 15; [xl. 
30]; Prov. iv. 12 for ow; besides in Sir. ix. 5; xxiii. 
8; xxxv. (xxxii.) 15; [Psalt. Sal. 16, 7. Cf. W.33.]* 
σκάνδαλον, -ov, τό, a purely bibl. [(occurring some 
twenty-five times in the Grk. O. T., and fifteen, quotations 
included, in the New) ] and eccles. word for σκανδάληθρον, 
which occurs occasionally in native Grk. writ.; Sept. for 
Upya (a noose, a snare) and 71722; a. prop. the 
movable stick or tricker (‘trigger’) of a trap, trap-stick ; 
a trap, snare; any impediment piaced in the way and caus- 
ing one to stumble or fall, [a stumbling-block, occasion of 
stumbling]: Lev. xix. 14; πέτρα σκανδάλου [ A. V. a rock 
of offence], i.e. a rock which is a cause of stumbling 
(Lat. offendiculum),—fig. applied to Jesus Christ, whose 
person and career were so contrary to the expectations 
of the Jews concerning the Messiah, that they rejected 
him and by their obstinacy made shipwreck of salvation 
(see πρόσκομμα), Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7), (fr. Is. viii. 
14). b. metaph. any person or thing by which one is 


(‘entrapped’) drawn into error or sin [ef. W. 32]; a. 


of persons [(Josh. xxiii. 13; 1 S. xviii. 21)]: Mt. xiii. 
41; xvi. 23 (where σκάνδαλον “ non ex effectu, sed ex 
natura et condicione propria dicitur," Calov.); 
so Χριστὸς ἐσταυρωμένος is called (because his ignomin- 
ious death on the cross roused the opposition of the 
Jews), 1 Co. i. 23. B. of things: τιθέναι τινὶ σκάν- 
“δαλὸν (literally, in Judith v. 1), to put a stumbling-block 
in one’s way, i. e. to do that by which another is led to 
sin, Ro. xiv. 13; the same idea is expressed by βάλλειν 
«σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιόν τινος [to cast a stumbling-block before 
one], Rev. ii. 14; οὐκ ἔστι σκάνδαλον ἔν τινι (see εἰμί, V. 
4e.), 1 Jn. ii. 10; plur. σκάνδαλα, words or deeds which 
-entice to sin (Sap. xiv. 11), Mt. xviii. 7 [cf. B. 322 (277) n.; 
W.371(348)]; Lk.xvii.1; σκάνδαλα ποιεῖν παρὰ τὴν 
“διδαχήν, to cause persons to be drawn away from the 
true doctrine into error and sin [ef. παρά, ILI. 2 a.], Ro. 
xvi. 17; τὸ σκάνδ. τοῦ σταυροῦ, the offence which the 
cross, i.e. Christ's death on the cross, gives (cf. a. fin. 
above), [R. V. the stumbling-block of the cross], Gal. v. 
11; iq. a cause of destruction, Ro. xi. 9, fr. Ps. Ixviii. 
(Ixix.) 23.* 

σκάπτω; 1 aor. ἔσκαψα; [allied w. it are Eng. ‘ship’, 
“ skiff’, ete.; Curtius § 109; Fick iv. 267; vii. 336]; to 
dig: Lk. vi. 48 (on which see βαθύνων ; xiii. 8 [B. § 130, 
5]; xvi. 3. ([Hom. h. Merc.]; Arstph., Eurip., Xen., 
Plat., Aristot., Theophr. al) [Cowr.: 

37 


, : 
κατα-σκάπτω.] 


OTT 








σκηνή 
σκάφη, -ης, ἡ, (σκάπτω [q. ν.7), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 


down, anything dug out, hollow vessel, trough, tray, tub; 
spec. a boat: Acts xxvii. 16, 30, 32.* 

σκέλος, -ovs, τό, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. e. from the 
hip to the toes inclusive: Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.* 

σκέπασμα, -ros, τό, (σκεπάζω to cover), a covering, 
spec. clothing (Aristot. pol. 7, 17 p. 1830", 17; Joseph. 
Β:1: 2.85 5... Le imevie see 

Zkevas, -a [W. $8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, Sceva, a certain 
chief priest [cf. ἀρχιερεύς, 2 fin.]: Acts xix. 14.* 

σκευή, -7s, ἡ, (cf. σκεῦος], fr. [ Pind., Soph.], Hdt. down, 
any apparatus, equipment, or furniture; used of the uten- 
sils [outfit, i. e. furniture (? — so R. V. mrg.), or tackling 
(?— so A. V., R. V.txt.)] of a ship (Diod. 14, 79): Acts 
xxvii. 19 (Sept. Jon. i. 5).* 

σκεῦος, -ovs, τό, [ prob. fr. τ. sku ‘to cover’; cf. Lat. 
scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius $ 113; Waniéek p. 1115], 
fr. ΓᾺΡ stph.], Thuc. down; Sept. for +>; 1. aves- 
sel: Mk. xi. 16; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. xix. 29; Acts x. 11, 16; 
xi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12; τὰ ox. τῆς λει- 
rovpyías, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb. 
ix. 21; σκεῦος eis τιμήν, unto honor, i. e. for honorable 
use, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (καθαρῶν ἔργων δοῦλα σκεύη, 
Sap. xv. 7); eis ἀτιμίαν, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use 
(as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21 ; σκεύη ὀργῆς, into which wrath 
is emptied, i. e. men appointed by God unto woe, hence 
the addition κατηρτισμένα eis ἀπώλειαν, Ro. ix. 22; σκεύη 
ἐλέους, fitted to receive mercy, 
à προητοίμασεν eis δόξαν, ib. 23; τὸ σκεῦος is used of a 
woman, as the vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see 
κτάομαι ; [al.take it here (as in 2 Co. iv. 7 below) of the 
bodj]); the female sex, as being weaker than the male, 
is likened to a σκεῦος ἀσθενέστερον, in order to com- 
mend to husbands the obligations of kindness towards 
their wives (for the weaker the vessels, the greater must 
be the care lest they be broken), 1 Pet. iii. 7; Mi co 
σκεύη is applied to human bodies, as frail, 2 Co. iv. 
7: 2. an implement; plur. household Eve. do- 
mestic gear: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xvii. 31, [in 
these pass. R. V. goods]; as the plur. often in Grk. 
writ. denotes the tackle and armament of vessels (Xen. 
oec. 8, 12; Plat. Critias p. 117 d.; Lach. p. 183 e.; Polyb. 
22, 26, 13), so the sing. τὸ σκεῦος seems to be used spec. 
and collectively of the sails and ropes (R. V. gear) in 
Acts xxvii. 17. metaph. of a man: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς (gen. 
of quality), a chosen instrument [or (so A. V.) * vessel], 
Acts ix. 15; in a base sense, an assistant in accomplishing 
evil deeds [cf. Eng. *tool"], σκεῦος ὑπηρετικόν, Polyb. 13, 
5, 7; 15, 25, 1.* 

σκηνή, -ῆς, ἡ, [fr. r. ska ‘to cover’ ete.; cf. σκιά, σκό- 
Tos, ete.; Lat. casa, cassis, castrum; Eng. shade, ete. ; 
Curtius $112; Vanicek p. 1054 sq. ], fr. [Aeschyl.], Soph. 
and Thuc. down; Sept. chiefly for os, often also for 
javn, a also for 130; a tent, tabernacle, (made of green 
boughs, or skins, or other materials): Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. 
ix.5; Lk.ix.33; Heb.xi.9; αἱ αἰώνιοι σκηναί (see αἰώ- 
vios, 3), Lk. xvi. 9 (et dabo iis tabernacula aeterna quae 
praeparaveram illis, 4 (5) Esdr. ii. 11); of that well 





σκηνοπηγία 


known movable temple of God after the pattern of 
which the temple at Jerusalem was subsequently built 
[cf. B. D. s. v. Temple]: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 1 Rec.", 21; 
with τοῦ μαρτυρίου added (see μαρτύριον, c. fin.), Acts vii. 
41; the temple is called σκηνή in Heb. xiii. 10; σκηνὴ ἡ 
πρώτη, the front part of the tabernacle (and afterwards 
of the temple), the Holy place, Heb. ix. 2, 6, 8; of the 
Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3; the name is transferred to 
heaven, as the true dwelling-place of God and the pro- 
totype of the earthly ‘tabernacle’ or sanctuary, Heb. ix. 
11; Rev. xiii. 6; hence ἡ σκηνὴ ἡ ἀληθινή, heaven, Heb. 
viii. 2; with a reference to this use of the word, it is 
declared that when the kingdom of God is perfectly es- 
tablished ἡ σκηνὴ tod θεοῦ will be μετὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 
(after the analogy of σκηνοῦν μετά τινος), Rev. xxi. 3; 6 
ναὸς τῆς σκηνῆς τοῦ μαρτυρίου (see μαρτύριον, c. fin.), the 
heavenly temple, in which was the tabernacle of the 
covenant, i. e. the inmost sanctuary or adytum, Rev. xv. 
5. ἡ ox. τοῦ Μολόχ, the tabernacle i.e. portable shrine 
of Moloch, Acts vii. 43 (for the Orientals on their jour- 
neys and military expeditions used to carry with them 
their deities, together with shrines for them ; hence ἡ ἱερὰ 
σκηνή of the Carthaginians in Diod. 20, 65, where see 
Wesseling [but cf. 132 in Miihlau and Volck’s Gesen- 
ius, or the recent Comm. on Am. v. 26]). ἡ σκηνὴ Δαυΐδ 
(fr. Am. ix. 11 for 730), the hut (tabernacle) of David, 
seems to be employed, in contempt, of his house, i. e. 
family reduced to decay and obscurity, Acts xv. 16 (other- 
wise 13 oak in Is. xvi. 5).* 

σκηνοπηγία, -as, 7, (σκηνή and πήγνυμι, cf. Heb. viii. 
2); 1. the construction of a tabernacle or taberna- 
cles: ἡ τῆς χελιδόνος σκηνοπηγία, the skill of the swallow 
in building its nest, Aristot. h. a. 9, 7 [p. 612°, 22]. 2. 
the feast of tabernacles: Jn. vii. 2. This festival was 
observed by the Jews yearly for seven days, beginning 
with the 15th of the month Tisri [i. e. approximately, 
Oct.; cf. BB.DD. s. v. Month], partly to perpetuate the 
memory of the time when their ancestors after leaving 
Egypt dwelt in tents on their way through the Arabian 
desert (Lev. xxiii. 43), partly as a season of festivity and 
joy on the completion of the harvest and the vintage 
(Deut. xvi. 13) [*the feast of ingathe.‘ng’ (see below) ]. 
In celebrating the festival the Jews were accustomed to 
construct booths of the leafy branches of trees, — either 
on the roofs or in the courts of their dwellings, or in the 
streets and squares (Neh. viii. 15, 16), and to adorn them 
with flowers and fruits of all kinds (Lev. xxiii. 40), — 
under which, throughout the period of the festival, they 
feasted and gave themselves up to rejoicing. This feast 
is called i387 1n (ἡ) ἑορτὴ (τῆς) σκηνοπηγίας, Deut. xvi. 
16; xxxi. 10; Zech. xiv. 16, 18sq.; 1 Esdr. v. 50 (51); 
1 Mace. x. 21; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 12; (ἡ) ἑορτὴ (τῶν) 
σκηνῶν, Lev. xxiii. 34; Deut. xvi. 13; [2 Chr. viii. 13; 
Ezra iii. 4]; 2 Macc. x. 6; σκηναί, Philo de septenar. ὃ 24; 
ἡ σκηνοπηγία, 2 Macc. i. 9, 18; once [twice] (Ex. xxiii. 
16; [xxxiv. 22]) syoNn an, i.e. ‘the feast of ingathering’ 
sc. of fruits. [Cf. BB.DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s 
Kitto) ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiv.]* 


578 





σκιρτάω 


σκηνοποιός, -οῦ, ὁ, (σκηνή and ποιέω), a tent-maker, i. q- 
σκηνορράφος (Ael. v. h. 2, 1); one that made small port- 
able tents, of leather or cloth of goats’ hair (Lat. cili- 
cium) or linen, for the use of travellers: Acts xviii. 3 
[cf. Meyer ad loc.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 
vol. xi. p. 359 sq.].* 

σκῆνος, -ovs, τό, [Hippoer., Plat., al.], a tabernacle, a 
tent, everywhere [exe. Boeckh, Corp. inserr. vol. ii. no. 
3071] used metaph. of the human body, in which the soul 
dwells as in a tent, and which is taken down at death: 
2 Co. v. 4; ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους, i. 6. 6 ἐστι 
τὸ σκῆνος [W. $ 59, 7 d., 8 a.], which is the well-known 
tent, ibid. 1 [R. V. the earthly house of our tabernacle). 
Cf. Sap. ix. 15 and Grimm ad loc.; in the same sense 
in (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 100 sqq. and often in other 
philosophie writ.; ef. Fischer, Index to Aeschin. dial. 
Socr.; Passow s. v. ; [ Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 113 
(on 2 Co. v. 1)].* 

e«nvóo, -@; fut. σκηνώσω; 1 aor. ἐσκήνωσα; to fix one's 
tabernacle, have one’s tabernacle, abide (or live) in a tab- 
ernacle (or tent), tabernacle, (often in Xen. ; Dem. p. 1257, 
6); God σκηνώσει ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, will spread his tabernacle 
over them, so that they may dwell in safety and security 
under its cover and protection, Rev. vii. 15; univ. i. q. 
to dwell (Judg. v. 17): foll. by ἐν with a dat. of place, 
Rev. xii. 12; xiii. 6, (ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις, Xen. an. 5, 5, 11); ἐν 
ἡμῖν, among us, Jn. i.14; μετά twos, with one, Rev. xxi. 
3; σύν τινι, to be one's tent-mate, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 49. 
[Cowr.: ἐπι-, kara- σκηνόω.] * 

σκήνωμα, -τος. τό, (oxnvdw), a tent, tabernacle: of the 
temple as God's habitation, Acts vii. 46 (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 
1; xxv. (xxvi.) 8; xlii. (xliii.) 3; xlv. (xlvi.) 5; Pausan. 
3, 17, 6; of the tabernacle of the covenant, 1 K. ii. 28); 
metaph. of the human body as the dwelling of the soul 
(see σκῆνος): ἐν τῷ σκηνώματι εἶναι, of life on earth, 
2 Pet. i. 13; ἀπόθεσις (the author blending the concep- 
tions of a tent and of a covering or garment, as Paul 
does in 2 Co. v. 2), ibid. 14. (Eur, Xen., Plut., al.; 
Sept. for Sas and jaw.) * 

σκιά, -ás, 9, [(see σκηνή, init.)], fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for ὧν ; a. prop. shadow, i. e. shade caused by the 
interception of the light: Mk. iv. 32 (cf. Ezek. xvii. 23) ; 
Acts v. 15; σκιὰ θανάτου, shadow of death (like umbra 
mortis, Ovid. metam. 5, 191, and umbra Erebi, Verg. Aen. 
4, 26; 6, 404), ‘the densest darkness’ (because from of 
old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick 
darkness), trop. the thick darkness of error [i. e. spirit- 
ual death; see θάνατος, 1]: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is. 
ix. 1, where mx). b. a shadow, i. e. an image 
cast by an object and representing the form of that ob- 
ject : opp. to σῶμα, the thing itself, Col. ii. 17 ; hence i. q. 
a sketch, outline, adumbration, Heb. viii. 5; opp. to εἰκών, 
the ‘express’ likeness, the very image, Heb. x. 1 (asin 
Cic. de off. 3, 17, 69 nos veri juris solidam et expresssam 
ejigiem nullam tenemus, umbra et imaginibus utimur).* 

σκιρτάω, -@: 1 aor. ἐσκίρτησα; to leap: Lk. i. 41, 44; 
vi 23. (Gen. xxv. 22; Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6; Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down.) * 


σκληροκαρδία 


σκληρο-καρϑδία, -as, 7, (σκληρός and καρδία), a bibl. word, 
the characteristic of one who is σκληρὸς τὴν καρδίαν (Prov. 
xxviii. 14), or σκληροκάρδιος (Prov. xvii. 20; Ezek. iii. 
7); hardness of heart: Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; xvi. 14; 
for 325 nary, Deut. x. 16; Jer.iv. 4; Sir. xvi. 10; καρ- 
δία σκληρά, Sir. iii. 26,27. [Cf. W. 26, 99 (94).]* 

σκληρός, -d, -óv, (σκέλλω, σκλῆναι, [to dry up, be dry]), 
fr. [Hes., Theogn.], Pind., Aeschyl. down; Sept. for ru7p, 
hard, harsh, rough, stiff, (rà σκληρὰ kx. τὰ μαλακά, Xen. 
mem. 8, 10, 1); of men, metaph., harsh, stern, hard: 
Mt. xxv. 24 (1S. xxv. 3; Is. xix. 4; xlviii. 4; many exx. 
fr. prof. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2 b. ; [L. and S. 
s. v. II. 2; esp. Trench §xiv.]); of things: ἄνεμος, vio- 
lent, rough, Jas. iii. 4; ὁ λόγος, offensive and intolerable, 
Jn. vi. 60, equiv. to ὃς σκανδαλίζει, 61; σκληρὰ λαλεῖν κατά 
twos, to speak hard and bitter things against one, Jude 
15 (σκληρὰ λαλεῖν τινι is also used of one who speaks 
roughly, Gen. xlii. 7, 30; ἀποκρίνεσθαι σκληρά, to reply 
with threats, 1 K. xii. 13); σκληρόν ἐστι foll. by an inf., 
it is dangerous, turns out badly, [A. V. it is hard], Acts 
ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14.* 

σκληρότης, -jros, 7, (σκληρός), hardness; trop. obsti- 
nacy, stubbornness: Ro.ii.5. (Deut. ix. 27; [ Antipho], 
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) * 

σκληρο-τράχηλος, -ov, (σκληρός and τράχηλος), prop. 
stiff-necked ; trop. stubborn, headstrong, obstinate: Acts vii. 
51; Sept. for 337 nwp, Ex. xxxiii. 3,5; xxxiv. 9; [etc.]; 
Bar. ii. 30; Sir. xvi. 11; [cf. σκληροτραχηλία, Test. xii. 
Patr., test. Sym. § 6]. Not found in prof. auth.; [cf. W. 
26, 99 (94)].* 

σκληρύνω [cf. W. 92 (88)]; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. 
σκληρύνητε; Pass., impf. ἐσκληρυνόμην ; 1 aor. ἐσκληρύν- 
Onv; (σκληρός, q. v.) ; Sept. for ΠΡ ΡΤ and pin, to make 
hard, to harden; prop. in Hippocr. and Galen; metaph. 
to render obstinate, stubborn, [ A.V. to harden]: τινά, Ro. 
ix. 18 (in opp. to those who interpret it to treat harshly, 
cf. Fritzsche vol. ii. p. 323 sq.; [ef., too, Meyer ad 
loc.]); τὴν καρδίαν τινος, Heb. iii. 8, 15 and iv. 7, (fr. Ps. 
xciv. (xev.) 8; cf. Ex. vii. 3, 22; viii. 19; ix. 12); pass. 
(Sept. for nup and pm to be hardened, i. e. become obsti- 
nate or stubborn: Acts xix. 9; Heb. iii. 13.* 

σκολιός, -á, -óv, (opp. to ὀρθός, ὄρθιος, εὐθύς [cf. σκώληξ), 
fr. Hom. down, crooked, curved: prop. of a way (Prov. 
xxviii. 18), rà σκολιά, Lk. iii. 5 (opp. to ἡ εὐθεῖα sc. ὁδός, 
fr. Is. x. 4); metaph. perverse, wicked : ἡ γενεὰ ἡ σκολιά, 
Acts ii. 40; with διεστραμμένη added, Phil. ii. 15 (clearly 
so Deut. xxxii. 5); unfair, surly, froward, (opp. to dya- 
Obs x. ἐπιεικής), 1 Pet. ii. 18.* 

σκόλοψ, -οπος, 6, fr. Hom. down, a pointed piece of 
wood, a pale, a stake: ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ; τῇ σαρκί, a sharp 
stake [al say splinter, A.V. thorn; cf. Num. xxxiii. 55 ; 
Ezek. xxviii. 24; Hos. ii. 6 (8); Babr. fab. 122, 1. 10; 
al. (Sir. xliii. 19)] to pierce my flesh, appears to indicate 
some constant bodily ailment or infirmity, which, even 
when Paul had been caught up in a trance to the third 
heaven, sternly admonished him that he still dwelt in a 
frail and mortal body, 2 Co. xii. 7 (cf. 1-4); [cf. W. $31, 
10 N.3; B. $133, 27. On Paul's “thorn in the flesh” 


579 


σκοτεινός 


see Farrar, St. Paul, i. 652 sqq. (Excursus x.); Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. p. 186 sqq.; Schagf in his * Popular 
Commentary’ on Gal. p. 331 sq.] * 

σκοπέω, -à; (σκοπός, q. v.) ; fr. Hom. down; to look at, 
observe, contemplate. to mark: absol., foll. by μή with 
the indic. (see μή, III. 2), Lk. xi. 35; τινά, to fix one's 
eyes upon, direct one's attention to, any one: Ro. xvi. 
17; Phil. iii. 17; σεαυτόν, foll. by μή with the subjunc. 
to look to, take heed to thyself, lest etc. Gal. vi. 1 [see μή, 
IL 1 b.]; τί, to look at, i. e. care for, have regard to, a 
thing: 2 Co. iv. 18; Phil. ii. 4, (2 Macc. iv. 5). [Comp.: 
emt-, κατα-σκοπέω. | * 

[SYN.: σκοπεῖν is more pointed than βλέπειν ; often i. q. to 
scrutinize, observe. When the physical sense recedes, i. q. to fix 
one's (mind's) eye on, direct one's attention to,a thing in order to 
get it, or owing to interest in it, ora duty towards it. Hence 
often equiv. to aim at, care for, ete. Schmidt, Syn. ch. xi. 
Cf. Bewpew, dpaw.| 

σκοπός, -od, 6, [(fr. a r. denoting ‘to spy,’ ‘peer,’ ‘look 
into the distance’; cf. also Lat. specio, speculum, species, 
ete. ; Fick i. 251 sq.; iv. 279 ; Curtius $111)]; fr. Hom. 
down ; 1. an observer, a watchman. 2. the 
distant mark looked at, the goal or end one has in view: 
κατὰ σκοπόν (on this phrase see κατά, Il. 1 c.), Phil. 
1 14. 

σκορπίζω; 1 aor. ἐσκόρπισα; 1 aor. pass. aur 
[(prob. fr. r. skarp ‘to cut asunder,’ ‘cut to pieces’ 
akin is σκορπίος ; cf. Lat. scalpere, scrobs, ete. ; Fick 
i. 240; iii. 811, etc.)]; to scatter: 6 λύκος σκορπίζει rà 
πρόβατα, Jn. X.12; 6 μὴ συνάγων μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει, Mt. 
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (this proverb is taken from a flock, 
—to which the body of Christ’s followers is likened [al. 
regard the proverb as borrowed fr. agriculture]; συνάγει 
τοὺς ἐσκορπισμένους τὸ ὄργανον [i. 6. a trumpet], Artem. 
oneir. 1, 56 init.); τινά, in pass., of those who, routed 
or terror-stricken or driven by some other impulse, 
fly in every direction: foll. by εἰς w. ace. of place, Jn. 
xvi. 32 [cf. W. 516 (481)], (1 Mace. vi. 54; φοβηθέντες 
ἐσκορπίσθησαν, Plut. Timol. 4; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 
3). i.q. to scatter abroad (what others may collect for 
themselves), of one dispensing blessings liberally : 2 Co. 
ix. 9 fr. Ps. exi. (exii.) 9, [ef. W. 469 (437)]. (Ace. to 
Phrynichus the word was used by Hecataeus; it was 
also used — in addition to the writ. already cited — by 
Strabo 4 p. 198; Leian. asin. 32; Ael. v. h. 13, 45 [here 
διεσκ. (ed. Hercher); λόγους (cf. Lat. spargere rumores), 
Joseph. antt. 16, 1, 2]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 
22; 92 (87)]; Sept. for pom, 2 S. xxii. 15; Ps. xvii. 
(xviii.) 15. Attic writers say σκεδάννυμι.) [Cowr. : δια- 
σκορπίζομαι. * 

σκορπίος, -ov, 6, [(for deriv. see the preceding word) ; 
from Aeschyl. down; on its accent, cf. Chandler § 246], 
a scorpion, Sept. for PRI the name of a little animal, 
somewhat resembling a lobster, which in warm regions 
lurks esp. in stone walls; it has a poisonous sting in its 
tail [McC. and S. and BB. DD. s. v.]: Lk. x. 19; xi. 12; 
Rev. ix. 3, 5, 10.* 

σκοτεινός [WH oxorwós; see I], τή; -óv, (σκότος), full 


σκοτία 


of darkness, covered with darkness, [fr. Aeschyl. down]: 
opp. to φωτεινός, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (τὰ σκοτεινὰ 
k. τὰ φωτεινά, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1; [ef. 4, 3, 4]).* 

σκοτία, -as, 7, [on its deriv. cf. σκηνή], (Thom. Mag. ὁ 
σκότος K. τὸ σκότος" TO δὲ σκοτία οὐκ ἐν χρήσει sc. in Attic 
[ef. Moeris s. v.; L. and S. s. v. σκότος, fin.]), darkness: 
prop. the darkness due to want of daylight, Jn. vi. 
17; xx. 1; ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ (λαλεῖν τι), unseen, in secret, 
(i. q. ἐν κρυπτῷ, Jn. xviii. 20), privily, in private, opp. to 
ἐν τῷ φωτί, Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; metaph. used of igno- 
rance of divine things, and its associated wickedness, and 
the resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 L Tr WH; Jn.i. 5; vi. 
17; viii 12; xii. 35,46; 1 Jn.i.5; ii.8 sq. 11. (Ap. 
Rh. 4, 1698; Anth. 8, 187. 190; for n2UT) Mic. iii. 6; 
for bas Job xxviii. 3.) * 

σκοτίζω : Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσκοτισμένος (Eph. iv. 18 RG); 
1 aor. ἐσκοτίσθην;; 1 fut. σκοτισθήσομαι; (σκότος); to cov- 
er with darkness, to darken; pass. to be covered with dark- 
ness, be darkened : prop. of the heavenly bodies, as de- 
prived of light ((Eccl. xii. 2)), Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; 
Lk.xxiii.45[ T WH ἐκλείπω (q.v. 2)]; Rev. viii.12; ix. 2(L 
T Wilexoróe,q.v.]; metaph. of the eyes, viz. of the un- 
derstanding, Ito. xi. 10; ἡ καρδία, the mind [see καρδία, 2 
b. B.], Ro. i. 21; men τῇ διανοίᾳ, Eph. iv. 18 RG. (Plut. 
[adv. Col. 24, 4; Cleomed. 81, 28]; Tzetz. hist. 8, 929; 
Sept. several times for wn; [Polyb. 12, 15, 10; 3 Macc. 
iv. 10; Test. xii. Patr., test. Rub. $ 3; test. Levi $14].) * 

σκότος, -ov, ὁ, (cf. σκοτία, init.), fr. Hom. down, dark- 
ness: Heb. xii. 18 Rec. [cf. WH. App. p. 158; W. 66 
(64); B. 22 (20)].* 

σκότος, -ovs, τό, fr. Pind. down, (see the preceding 
word, and σκοτία, init.), Sept. chiefly for qwn, dark- 
NESS ; a. prop.: Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. 
xxiii. 44; Acts ii. 20; 2 Co. iv. 6; αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐξουσία 
ToU σκότους, this is the power of (night's) darkness, i. e. 
it has the power of rendering men bold to commit crimes, 
Lk. xxii. 53; rà κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους (see κρυπτός), 1 Co. 
iv. 5; of darkened eyesight or blindness: σκότος ἐπι- 
πίπτει ἐπί rwal. e. on one deprived of sight, Acts xiii. 11; 
in fig. disc. εἰ ov . . ., τὸ σκότος πόσον ; if the light that is 
in thee is darkness, darkened (i. e. if the soul has lost its 
perceptive power), how great is the darkness (how much 
more deplorable than bodily blindness), Mt. vi. 23, cf. 
Lk. xi. 35. by meton. put for a dark place: Mt. viii. 
12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30, (see ἐξώτερος) ; ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 
(see ζόφος). 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. b. metaph. of 
ignorance respecting divine things and human duties, 
and the accompanying ungodliness and immorality, to- 
gether with their consequent misery (see σκοτία) : Jn. 
iii. 19; Acts xxvi. 18; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. vi. 12; Col. i. 
13; 1 Pet.ii.9; (abstract for the concrete) persons in 
whom darkness becomes visible and holds sway, Eph. v. 
8; rà ἔργα τοῦ σκότους, deeds done in darkness, harmo- 
nizirg with it, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11; σκότους εἶναι, to 
be given up to the power of darkness [cf. W. $30, 5 a.], 
1 Th. v. 5; ἐν σκότει εἶναι, ib. 4; οἱ ἐν σκότει, Lk. i. 79; 
Ro. ii. 19; 6 λαὸς ὁ καθήμενος ἐν σκότει, Mt. iv. 16 RGT; 
ἐν σκότει περιπατεῖν, 1 Jn. i. 6.* 


580 


flay, ( Anthol.). 





σκώληξ 


σκοτόω, -ὥ: Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσκοτωμένος ; 1 aor. ἐσκο- 
τώθην;; [cf. WH. App. p. 171]; (σκότος); (o darken, 
cover with darkness: Rev. ix. 2 LT WH; xvi.10; met- 
aph. to darken or blind the mind: ἐσκοτωμένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ, 
Eph. iv.18 LT Tr WH. ({Soph.], Plat., Polyb., Plut., 
al.; Sept.) * 

σκύβαλον, -ov, τό, (κυσίβαλόν τι ὄν, τὸ τοῖς κυσὶ βαλλύμε- 
vov, Suid. [p. 3347 e.; to the same effect Etym. Magn. 
p. 719, 53 cf. 125, 44; al. connect it with σκώρ (cf. scoria, 
Lat. stercus), al. with a r. meaning ‘to shiver’, ‘shred’; 
Fick, Pt. i. p. 244]), any refuse, as the excrement of 
animals, offscouring, rubbish, dregs, ete.: [ A. V. dung] 
i. e. worthless and detestable, Phil. iii. 8. (Sir. xxvii. 
4; Philo; Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 7; Plut.; Strabo; often in 
the Anthol) [See on the word, Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
lc.; Gataker, Advers. Miscell. Posth., c. xliii. p. 868 
sqq.] * 

Σκύθης, -ov, 6, a. Scythian, an inhabitant of Scythia i. e. 
modern Russia: Col. iii. 11. By the more civilized na- 
tions of antiquity the Scythians were regarded as the 
wildest of all barbarians; cf. Cic. in Verr. 2,5, 58 $ 150; 
in Pison. 8, 18; Joseph. c. Apion. 2, 37, 6; [ Philo, leg. 
ad Gaium $ 2]; Leian. Tox. 5sq.; 2 Macc. iv. 47; 3 
Mace. vii. 5. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l. c.; Hackett in 
B.D. s. v. Scythians; Rawlinson's Herod., App. to bk. ἵν.» 
Essays ii. and iii.; Vaniéek, Fremdworter, s. v.] * 

σκυθρωπός, -óv, also of three term.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 105 [W. § 11, 1], (σκυθρός and wy), of a sad and 
gloomy countenance (opp. to φαιδρός, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 
4): Lk. xxiv. 17; of one who feigns or affects a sad 
countenance, Mt. vi. 16. (Gen. xl. 7; Sir. xxv. 23; Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

σκύλλω ; pf. pass. ptcp. ἐσκυλμένος ; pres. mid. impv. 
2 pers. sing. σκύλλου ; (σκῦλον, q. V-) ; a. to skin, 
b. to rend, mangle, (Aeschyl. Pers. 
511); to vez, trouble, annoy, (Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4]) : τινά, 
Mk. v. 35; Lk. viii. 49; pass. ἐσκυλμένοι, (Vulg. vezati) 
[ R. V. distressed], Mt. ix. 36 GLTTr WH; mid. to give 
one’s self trouble, trouble one's self: μὴ σκύλλου, Lk. vii. 
6:* 

σκῦλον [Re GL T WH] also σκύλον ([so R*'*'* Tr] cf. 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 44), -ov, τό, (fr. the obsol. 
σκύω. ‘to pull off’, allied to ξύω, ξύλον [but cf. Curtius 
$113; Vanitek p. 1115]); a. a (beast's) skin 
stripped off, a pelt. b. the arms stripped off from an 
enemy, spoils: plur. Lk. xi. 22. (Soph., Thue., sqq.; 
Sept.) * 

σκωληκό-βρωτος, -ov, (σκώληξ and βιβρώσκω), eaten of 
worms: Acts xii. 23, ef. 2 Mace. ix. 9. (of a tree, Theo- 
phr. ὁ; plo; 9) 10)» 

σκώληξ, -ηκος, 6, [perh. akin to σκολιός], a worm (Hom. 
Il. 13, 654); spec. that kind which preys upon dead 
bodies (Sir. x. 11; xix. 3; 2 Maec. ix. 9; Anthol. 7, 480, 
3; 10, 78, 3) : ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, by a fig. bor- 
rowed fr. Is. Ixvi. 24 (cf. Sir. vii. 17; Judith xvi. 07 
‘their punishment after death will never cease’ [ox. 
symbolizing perh. the loathsomeness of the penalty], 
Mk. ix. 44, 46, [T WH om. Tr br. these two verses], 48.* 


σμαράγδινος 


σμαράγδινος, -7, -ον, (σμάραγδος. cf. ἀμεθύστινος, ὑακίν- 
θινος, ete.), of emerald, made of emerald, [see the foll. 
word]: se. λίθος, Rev. iv. 3. [(Lcian.)]* 

σμάραγδος. -ov, ὁ [but apparently fem. in the earlier 
writ., cf. Theophrast. lap. 4, 23; in Hdt. its gend. cannot 
be determined; cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v.], Lat. smarag- 
dus, ΓΑ. V. emerald], a transparent precious stone noted 
esp. for its light green color: Rev. xxi. 19. [From Hdt. 
down; Sept. On the deriv. of the word see Vaniéek, 
Fremdworter, s. v. On its relation to our ‘emerald’ 
(disputed by King, Antique Gems, p. 27 sqq.), see Riehm 
HWB. s. v. ‘ Edelsteine", 17; Deane in the ‘ Bible Edu- 
cator', vol. ii. p. 350 sq.] * 

σμύρνα, -ης, 7, Hebr. 35, WW, myrrh, a bitter gum and 
costly perfume which exudes from a certain tree or 
shrub in Arabia and Ethiopia, or is obtained by incis- 
ions made in the bark: Mt. ii. 11; as an antiseptic it 
was used in embalming, Jn. xix. 39. Cf. Hdt. 2, 40, 86; 
3, 107; Theophr. hist. pl.9,3 sq.; Diod. 5, 41; Plin. h. 
n. 12, 33 sq.; [BB.DD.; Birdwood in the ‘ Bible Edu- 
cator', vol. ii. p. 151; Zr, Aram. Pflanzennam. § 185].* 

Σμύρνα, -ης, 7, Smyrna, an Ionian city, on the ZEgean 
Sea, about 40 miles N. of Ephesus; it had a harbor, and 
flourished in trade, commerce, and the arts; now Zsmir 
[BB.DD.]: Rev.i.11; ii. S. Tdf. after cod. δὲ [(cf. cod. 
Bezae, ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.)] has adopted the form 
Ζμύρν., found also occasionally on coins and in inscerr.; 
cf. Kühner i. p. 200 e.; [Tdf.’s note on Rev. i. 11; and see 
Z,c, s, sub fin.].* 

Σμυρναῖος, -ov, 6, 7, af or belonging to Smyrna, an in- 
habitant of Smyrna: Rey. ii. 8 Rec. [(Pind., Hdt.)] * 

σμυρνίζω : (σμύρνα, q. v.) ; 1. intrans. to be like 
myrrh (Diose. 1, 79). 2. to mix and so flavor with 
myrrh: οἶνος ἐσμυρνισμένος (pf. pass. ptep.) wine [ A. V. 
mingled] with myrrh (Vulg. murratum vinum), i. e. flavored 
or (Plin. h. n. 14, 15) made fragrant with myrrh: Mk. xv. 
23. But since the ancients used to infuse myrrh into 
wine in order to give it a more agreeable fragrance and 
flavor, we must in this matter accept Matthew's account 
(xxvii. 34, viz. ‘mingled with gall’) as by far the more 
probable; [but see χολή, 2].* 

Σόδομα, -ων, τά, (012), Sodom, a city respecting the 
location and the destruction of which see Τόμορρα [and 
(in addition to reff. there given) McC. and S. s. v. Sodom; 
Schaff-Herzog ib.]: Mt. x. 15; xi. 23 sq.; Mk. vi. 11 (R 
Lin br.); Lk.x.12; xvii 29; Ro.ix.29; 2 Pet.ii.6; 
Jude 7; Rev. xi. 8.* 

Σολομῶν (so [Rstbezelz G Li in Lk. xii. 27; RL Tr WH 
in Acts vii. 47 (cf. Tdf. on Mt. vi. 29) ]) and Σολομών [so 
RGLT Tr WH in Mt.i.7; vi. 29; RT Tr WH in 
LK. xii.27; Gin Acts vii. 47; (Σαλωμών Tdf. in Acts vii. 
41)], -dvros (so Rec. uniformly; [L T WH in Acts iii. 11; 
v. 12; Lin Mt.i. 6 also]), and -ὥνος (so [GL T Tr WH 
in Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Jn. x. 23; GT Tr WH in Mt. 
3.6; G Trin Acts iii. 11; v. 12]; the forms -óv, -àvos, 
are undoubtedly to be preferred, cf. [ Taf. Proleg. pp. 
104,110; WH. App. p. 158]; W. 67 (65); B. 16 (14 
Sq.)), 6, (Aw, i. e. ‘pacific’, Zrenaeus, Germ. Fried- 


581 





σοφία 


rich, Eng. Frederick), Solomon, the son of David by 
Bathsheba the wife of Uriah; he succeeded his father, 
becoming the third king of Israel (Β. c. 1015-975 [ace. 
to the commonly accepted chronology; but ef. the art. 
‘Zeitrechnung’ in Riehm's HWB. (esp. p. 1823 sq-)]), 
built the temple at Jerusalem, and was distinguished for 
his magnificence, splendor, and wisdom: Mt. i. 6 sq.; vi. 
29); xii. 42: Lk ost 915. ππὶ 27^ Im. x. 99)» Acta pile 
v. 125 νὴ ἈΠ: Ὁ 

σορός, -οῦ, 7, an urn or receptacle for keeping the bones 
of the dead (Hom. Il. 23, 91); a coffin (Gen. 1. 26; Hdt. 
1, 68; 2,78; Arstph., Aeschin., Plut., al.) ; the funeral- 
couch or bier on which the Jews carried their dead forth to 
burial [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Coffin; Edersheim, Jesus 
the Messiah, i. 555 sq.]: Lk. vii. 14.* 

σός, -7), -óv, possess. pron. of the 2d pers.; fr. Hom. 
down; thy, thine: Mt. vii. 3,22; xiii. 27; xxiv. 3; Mk. 
ii. 18; Lk. xv. 31; xxii. 42; Jn. iv. 42 [here Tr mrg. WH 
mrg. read the personal cov]; xvii. 6, 9, 10, 17; xviii. 35; 
Acts v.4; xxiv.2 (3), 4; 1 Co. viii. 11; xiv. 16; Philem. 
14; of σοί sc. μαθηταί, Lk. v.33; absol. of σοί, thy kins- 
folk, thy friends, Mk. v.19; τὸ σόν, what is thine, Mt. 
xx. 14; xxv. 25; plur. ra σά [A. V. thy goods; cf. W. 
592 (551)], Lk. vi. 30. [Cf. W. $ 22, 7 sqq.; B. 115 
(101) sqq.]* 

σουδάριον, -ov, τό, (a Lat. word, sudarium, fr. sudor, 
sweat; cf. D. 18 (16)), a handkerchief, i.e. a cloth for 
wiping the perspiration from the face and for cleaning 
the nose: Lk. xix. 20; Acts xix. 12; also used in swath- 
ing the head of a corpse [ A. V. napkin], Jn. xi. 44; xx. 
7. [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Handkerchief.] * 

Σουσάννα, -ης [cf. B. 17 (15)], ἡ, (Aww a lily), Su- 
sanna, one of the women that attended Jesus on his 
journeys: Lk. viii. 3.* 

σοφία. -as, 7, (σοφός), Hebr. 193M, wisdom, broad and 


full intelligence, [fr. Hom. down]; used of the knowl- 


edge of very diverse matters, so that the shade of mean- 
ing in which the word is taken must be discovered from 
the context in every particular case. a. the wis- 
dom which belongs to men: univ., Lk. ii. 40,52; spec. 
the varied knowledge of things human and divine, ac- 
quired by acuteness and experience, and summed up in 
maxims and proverbs, as was ἡ σοφία τοῦ Σολομῶνος, Mt. 
xii. 42; Lk. xi.31; the science and learning τῶν Αἰγυ- 
πτίων, Acts vii. 22 [ef. W. 227 (213) n.; B. $ 134, 6]; the 
art of interpreting dreams and always giving the sagest 
advice, Acts vii.10; the intelligence evinced in discov- 
ering the meaning of some mysterious number or vision, 
Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; skill in the management of af- 
fairs, Acts vi. 3; a devout and proper prudence in in- 
tercourse with men not disciples of Christ, Col. iv. 5; 
skill and discretion in imparting Christian truth, Col. i. 
28; iii. 16; [2 Pet. iii. 15]; the knowledge and prae- 
tice of the requisites for godly and upright living, Jas. 
i.5; iii. 13, 17; with which σοφία ἄνωθεν κατερχομένη is 
put in contrast the σοφία ἐπίγειος, ψυχική, δαιμονιώδης, 
such as is the eraftiness of envious and quarrelsome 


| men, Jas. iii. 15, or σαρκικὴ σοφία (see σαρκικός, 1), 


copia 


eraftiness, 2 Co. i. 12 (for the context shows that it does 
not differ essentially from the πανουργία of iv. 2; in 
Grk. writ. also σοφία is not infreq. used of shrewdness 
and cunning; cf. Passow [or L. and 5.7 s. v. 2); the 
knowledge and skill in affairs requisite for the successful 
defence of the Christian cause against hostile accusa- 
tions, Lk. xxi. 15; an acquaintance with divine things 
and human duties, joined to a power of discoursing con- 
cerning them and of interpreting and applying sacred 
Scripture, Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi.2; Acts vi. 10; the wis- 
dom or instruetion with which John the Baptist and 
Jesus taught men the way to obtain salvation, Mt. xi. 
19; Lk. vii. 35, (on these pass. see δικαιόω, 2). In Paul's 
Epp.: a knowledge of the divine plan, previously hidden, 
of providing salvation for men by the expiatory death 
of Christ, 1 Co. i. 30; 11. 6; Eph. i. 8 [W. 111 (105 sq.)]; 
hence all the treasures of wisdom are said to be hidden 
in Christ, Col. ii. 3; w. the addition of θεοῦ (gen. of the 
author), 1 Co. i. 24; ii. 7; πνευματική, Col. i. 9; πνεῦμα 
σοφίας k. ἀποκαλύψεως, Eph. i. 17; λόγος σοφίας, the 
ability to discourse eloquently of this wisdom, 1 Co. xii. 
8; opposed to this wisdom is— the empty conceit of 
wisdom which men make a parade of, a knowledge more 
specious than real of lofty and hidden subjects: such as 
the theosophy of certain Jewish Christians, Col. ii. 23; 
the philosophy of the Greeks, 1 Co. i. 21 sq.; ii. 1; with 
ToU κόσμου added, 1 Co. i. 20; iii. 19; τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, 
1 Co. ii. 6; τῶν σοφῶν, 1 Co. i. 19; ἀνθρώπων, 1 Co. ii. 5, 
(in each of these last pass. the word includes also the 
rhetorieal art, such as is taught in the schools), cf. 
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. i. p. 67 Sq.; σοφία τοῦ λόγου, the 


wisdom which shows itself in speaking [R. V. wisdom of 


words], the art of the rhetorician, 1 Co. i. 17; λόγοι 
(ἀνθρωπίνης [so R in vs. 4 (all txts. in 13) ]) σοφίας, dis- 
course conformed to philosophy and the art of rhetoric, 
1 Co. ii. 4, 13. b. supreme intelligence, such as be- 
longs to God: Rev. vii. 12, also to Christ, exalted to 
God's right hand, Rev. v. 12; the wisdom of God as 
evinced in forming and executing his counsels, Ro. xi. 
33; with the addition of rod θεοῦ, as manifested in the 
formation and government of the world, and to the Jews, 
moreover, in the Scriptures, 1 Co. i. 21; it is called 
πολυποίκιλος from the great variety of ways and methods 
by which he devised and achieved salvation through 
Christ, Eph. iii. 10. In the noteworthy pass. Lk. xi. 49 
(where Christ ascribes to ‘the wisdom of God’ what in 
the parallel, Mt. xxiii. 34, he utters himself), the words 
ἡ σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ εἶπεν seem to denote the wisdom of God 
which is operative and embodied as it were in Jesus, so 
that the primitive Christians, when to comfort them- 
selves under persecution they recalled the saying of 
Christ, employed that formula of quotation [ef. 1 Co. i. 
24, 30, ete.]; but Luke, in ignorance of this fact, took 
the phrase for a part of Christ’s saying. So Eusebius 
(h. e. 3, 32, 8), perhaps in the words of Hegesippus, calls 
those who had personally heard Christ of αὐταῖς ἀκοαῖς 
τῆς ἐνθέου σοφίας ἐπακοῦσαι κατηξιωμένοι; cf. Grimm 
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 332 sqq. [For other 


582 


| 


, 
oTapyavow 


explanations of the phenomenon see the Comm. on Lk. 
le. Cf. Schürer, Zeitgesch. $ 33, V. 1 and reff.]* 

[ϑυν.: on the relation of σοφία to γνῶσις see γνῶσις, fin. 
* While cog. is ‘mental excellence in its highest and fullest 
sense ' (Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 7), σύνεσις and φρόνησις are both 
derivative and special, —applications of σοφία to details: σύν. 
critical, apprehending the bearing of things, φρόν. prac- 
tical, suggesting lines of action” (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 9); 
but cf. Meyer on Col. 1. c.; Schmidt, ch. 18 § 10; ch. 147 8 8. 
See σοφός, fin.] 

copitw: 1 aor. inf. σοφίσαι; (codds) ; 1. to make 
wise, teach: τινά, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; ἐσόφι- 
ads με τὴν ἐντολήν σου, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 98; οὔτε τι vav- 
τιλίης σεσοφισμένος, οὔτε τι νηῶν, Hes. opp. 647). 2. 
Mid. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, mostly as depon. to 
become wise, to have understanding, (ἐσοφίσατο ὑπὲρ πάν- 
tas ἀνθρώπους, | K. iv. 27 (31) ; add, Eccl. ii. 15, ete.; 
freq. in Sir.) ; to invent, play the sophist; to devise cleverly 
or cunningly: pf. pass. ptep. σεσοφισμένοι μῦθοι, 2 Pet. 
i. 16. [Cowr.: κατα-σοφίζομαι. * 

σοφός, -7, -óv, (akin to σαφής and to the Lat. sapio, 
sapiens, sapor, ‘to have a taste’, ete.; Curtius § 628; 
[Vanitek p. 991]), Sept. for nan; [fr. Theogn., Pind., 
Aeschyl. down]; wise, i. e. a. skilled, expert: εἴς tt, 
Ro. xvi. 19; of artificers (cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on 
Sap. [vii. 21] p. 151): ἀρχιτέκτων, 1 Co. iii. 10; Is. iii. 
3, (δημιουργός, of God, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 7). b. wise, 
i.e. skilled in letters, cultivated, learned: Ro. i. 14, 22; 
of the Greek philosophers (and orators, see σοφία, a.), 
1 Co. i. 19 sq. 26 sq.; iii. 18 sq. [20]; of the Jewish 
theologians, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; of Christian teach- 
ers, Mt. xxiii. 34. C. wise in a practical sense, i. e. 
one who in action is governed by piety and integrity: Eph. 
v. 15; Jas. iii. 13; and accordingly is a suitable per- 
son to settle private quarrels, 1 Co.vi.5. ἃ. 
wise in a philosophie sense, forming the best plans and us- 
ing the best means for their execution: so of God, Ro. xvi. 
27, and Rec. in 1 Tim. i. 17; Jude 25; σοφώτερον, con- 
tains more wisdom, is more sagaciously thought out, 
1 Co. i. 25.* 

[Syn.: σοφός, συνετός, φρόνιμος: σοφός wise, see 
above; συνετός intelligent, denotes one who can ‘ put things 
together’ (συνιέναι), who has insight and comprehension ; 
φρόνιμος prudent (A. V. uniformly, wise), denotes primarily 
one who has quick and correct perceptions, hence ‘discreet,’ 
‘circumspect,’ ete. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 147. See σοφία, fin.] 


ZXmavía, -as, 7, Spain, in the apostolic age the whole 
peninsula S. of the Pyrenees: Ro. xv. 24, 28. ([W.25]; 
the more com. Grk. form is Ἱσπανία, 1 Mace. viii. 3, [ap- 
parently the Phoenician or Lat. name for ᾿Ιβηρία; cf. 
Pape, Eigennamen, s. vv.].) * 

σπαράσσω: 1 aor. eondpafa; to convulse [al. tear]: 
τινά, Mk.i.26; ix. 50 R G 'frtxt., 26; Lk. ix. 39; see 
ῥήγνυμι, €. (τὰς γνάθους, Arstph. ran. 424; τὰς τρίχας, 
Diod. 19, 34; in various other senses in Grk. writ.) 
[Come.: συν- σπαράσσω.] * 

σπαργανόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐσπαργάνωσα: pf. pass. ptep. 
ἐσπαργανωμένος ; (σπάργανον a swathing band); to wrap 


σπαταλάω 


in swaddling-clothes : an infant just born, Lk. ii. 7, 12. 
(Ezek. xvi. 4; [Eur., Aristot.], Hippocr., Plut., al.) * 

σπαταλάω, -@; 1 aor. ἐσπατάλησα; (σπατάλη, riotous 
living, luxury); to live luxuriously, lead a voluptuous life, 
[give one’s self to pleasure]: 1'Tim.v.6; Jas.v.5. (Prov. 
xxix. 21; Am. vi. 4 [in both these pass. karauz.; Ezek. 
xvi. 49]; Sir. xxi. 15; Barnab. ep. 10, 3; Polyb. excrpt. 
Vat. p. 451 [i. e. 37, 4, 6 (ed. Didot)], and occasionally 
in later and inferior writ.)* 

σπάω, -à: 1 aor. mid. ἐσπασάμην ; [cogn. w. ἀσπάζομαι 
(to draw to one's self, embrace, ete.), Eng. spasm, etc.]; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for Hw; to draw: mid. 
with μάχαιραν [cf. B. $135, 4], to draw one’s sword, Mk. 
xiv. 47; Acts xvi. 27, (Num. xxii. 31; τὴν ῥομφαίαν, 23 ; 
Judg. ix. 54, etc.). [CoxP.: dva-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐπι-; περι- 
σπάω.} 

σπεῖρα [on the accent cf. B. 11; Chandler $ 161; Tf. 
Proleg. p. 1021, ἡ, gen. -ς (Acts x. 1; xxi. 31; xxvii. 1; 
see [Τ᾿ Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156; and] pa- 
χαιρα, init.), [cogn. w. σπυρίς (q. v-) ]; a. Lat. spira; 
anything rolled into a circle or ball, anything wound, 
rolled up, folded together. b. a military cohort 
(Polyb. 11, 23, 1 τρεῖς σπείρας τοῦτο δὲ καλεῖται τὸ σύν- 
ταγμα τῶν πεζῶν παρὰ Ῥωμαίοις κούρτις), i. e. the tenth 
part of ἃ legion [i. 6. about 600 men (i. e. legionaries), or 
if auxiliaries either 500 or 1000; cf. Marquardt, Rómisch. 
Alterth. IIL. ii. p. 371. But surely τοῦτο τὸ σύνταγμα in 
the quotation comprehends the τρεῖς ow.; hence Polyb. 
here makes a ow. equal to a maniple, cf. 2,3, 2; 6, 24,5; 
ct. Zonaras, Lex. p. 1664, az.- σύνταγμα διακοσίων ἀνδρῶν. 
On the other hand, *the later Grk. writ. almost uniform- 
ly employ ez. as the representative of cohors" (Smith, 
Diet. of Antiq., ed. 2, s. v. exercitus, p. 500) ; and the 
use of χιλίαρχος (which was the equiv. of tribunus, the 
commander of a cohort) in connection with it (Jn. xviii. 
12; Acts xxi. 31), together with the uniform rendering 
of the word by cohors in the Lat. versions, warrants the 
marg. * cohort" uniformly added in R.V. to the render- 
ing band]: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk: xv. 16; Acts x. 1; xxi. 
31; xxvii. l, and often in Josephus; a maniple, or the 
thirtieth part of a legion, often so in Polyb. [(see above)]; 
any band, company, or detachment, of soldiers (2 Mace. 
viii. 23; Jud. xiv. 11): Jn. xviii. 3, 12.* 

σπείρω ; [impf. 2 pers. sing. ἔσπειρες, Mt. xiii. 27 Tr]; 
1 aor. ἔσπειρα; Pass. pres. σπείρομαι; pf. pass. ptep. 
ἐσπαρμένος ; 2 aor. ἐσπάρην ; [derived fr. the quick, jerky, 
motion of the hand; cf. our spurn (of the foot); Cur- 
tius $389]; fr. Hesiod down; Sept. for YU; (o sow, 
scatter seed; a. prop.: absol., Mt. vi. 26; xiii. 3 sq. 
18sq.; Mk. iv. 3 sq. 14; Lk. viii. 5; xii. 24; [Jn. v. 
36 sq. (see in b.)]; 2Co.ix.10; with an acc. of the thing, 
as σπέρμα, ζιζάνια, κόκκον, [cf. B. $131, 5]: Mt. xiii. 24 
sq. [but in 25 L'T Tr WH have ἐπισπ.]), 27, 37, 39; Mk. 
iv. 32; Lk. viii. 5; 1 Co. xv. 36sq.; with specifications 
of place: eis τὰς ἀκάνθας, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 18; ἐν τῷ 
ἀγρῷ, Mt. xiii. 24, [31]; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Mk. iv. 31; ἐπί w. 
an ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 20, 23; Mk. iv. 16, 20; παρὰ 
τὴν ὁδόν, Mt. xiii. 19. 


583 





σπέρμα 


absol., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 54. ; Jn. ἵν. 37; 2Co. 
ix. 6; τί, Gal. vi. 7, (on these sayings see θερίζω, b.). in 
comparisons: σπείρειν eis τὴν σάρκα, εἰς τὸ πνεῦμα, (σάρξ 
and πνεῦμα are likened to fields to be sown), to do those 
things which satisfy the nature and promptings of the 
σάρξ or of the πνεῦμα, Gal. vi. 8; τὸν λόγον, to scatter the 
seeds of instruction, i. e. to impart instruction, Mk. iv. 
l4sq.; ὁ λόγος 6 ἐσπαρμένος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν, the 
ideas and precepts that have been implanted like seed 
in their hearts, i. e. received in their hearts, ibid. 15 
(where Tr txt. WH εἰς αὐτούς into their hearts, T L mrg. 
ἐν αὐτοῖς) ; οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς, this one 
experiences the fate of the seed sown by the wayside, 
Mt. xiii. 19; add, 20-23; Mk. iy. 16, 18, 20. τὸ σῶμα, 
the body, which after death is committed like seed to the 
earth, 1 Co. xv. 42-44; καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης, i. e. that seed 
which produces καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης [see καρπός, 2 b.], Jas. 
ili. 18; σπείρειν τινί τι, to give, manifest, something to 
one, from whom we may subsequently receive something 
else akin to a harvest (θερίζομεν), 1 Co. ix.11. [Comp.: 
δια-. ἐπι- σπείρω.] * 

σπεκουλάτωρ, -ορος (RG -wpos [cf. Tdf. on Mk. as be- 
low]), 6, (the Lat. word speculator), a looker-out, spy, 
scout; under the emperors an attendant and member of 
the body-guard, employed as messengers, watchers, and 
executioners (Sen. de ira 1, 16 centurio supplicio prae- 
positus condere gladium speculatorem jubet; also de 
benef. 3,25); the name is transferred to an attendant of 
Herod Antipas that acted as executioner: Mk. vi. 27. 
Cf. Keim ii. 512 [Eng. trans. iv. 219; J. W. Golling in 
"Thes. Nov. ete. ii. p. 405 sq.] * 

σπένδω: pres. pass. σπένδομαι; (cf. Germ. spenden 
[perh. of the * tossing away ’ of a liquid, Curtius § 296; 
but cf. Vanicek p. 1245 sq.]) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
123; to pour out as a drink-offering, make a. libation; in 
the N. T. σπένδεσθαι, to be offered as a libation, is figura- 
tively used of one whose blood is poured out in a violent 
death for the cause of God: Phil. ii. 17 (see θυσία, b. 
fin.); 2 Tim. iv. 6.* : 

σπέρμα, -ros, τό, (σπείρω, q. v.), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 
yu, the seed (fr. which anything springs) ; a. 
from which a plant germinates; a. prop. the seed 
i.e. the grain or kernel which contains within itself the 
germ of the future plant: plur., Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 
31; 1 Co. xv. 38, (Ex. xvi. 31; 18. viii. 15); the sing. 
is used collectively of the grains or kernels sown: Mt. 
xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq.; 2 Co. ix. 10 [here L Tr σπόρος]. β. 
metaph. a seed i. e. a residue, or a few survivors reserved 
as the germ of a new race (just as seed is kept from the 
harvest for the sowing), Ro. ix. 29 after Is. i. 9, where 
Sept. for Tw, (so also Sap. xiv. 6; 1 Esdr. viii. 85 (87); 
Joseph. antt. 11, 5, 3; 12, 7, 3; Plat. Tim. p. 23c.). b. 
the semen virile; a. prop.: Lev. xv. 16-18; xviii. 
20 sq., etc.; [prob. also Heb. xi. 11, cf. καταβολή 1, and 
see below]; often in prof. writ. By meton. the pro- 
duct of this semen, seed, children, offspring, progeny; 


| family, race, posterity, (so in Grk. chiefly in the tragic 
b. in proverbial sayings: | poets, cf. Passow s. v. 2 b. ii. p. 1498 [L. and S. s. v. IL. 


σπερμολόγος 


3]; and »Ὲ] very often in the O. T. [cf. W. 17, 30]); so 
in the sing., either of one, or collectively of many: Ro. 
ix. 7 sq.; εἰς καταϑολὴν σπέρματος (see [above, and] kara- 
Body, 2), Heb. xi. 11; ἀνιστάναι and ἐξανιστάναι σπέρμα 
τινί, Mt. xxii. 24; Mk. xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28, (Gen. xxxviii. 
8); ἔχειν σπέρμα, Mt. xxii.20; ἀφιέναι σπέρμα τινί, Mk. 
xii. 20-22; τὸ σπ. τινός, Lk. i. 55; Jn. vii. 42; viii. 33, 
37; Acts iii. 25; vii. 5 sq.; xiii. 23; Ro. i. 3; [iv. 13]; 
ix, 73 xi. 1.2 (00:21:22; 2 "Tim: 11. 8; (Heb. nodos x. 
18; in plur.: παῖς ἐκ βασιλικῶν σπερμάτων, of royal de- 
scent, Joseph. antt. 8, 7,6; τῶν ᾿Αβραμιαίων σπερμάτων 
ἀπόγονοι, 4 Mace. xviii. 1; i. q. tribes, races, ἄνθρωποί re 
καὶ ἀνθρώπων σπέρμασι νομοθετοῦμεν rà viv, Plat. legc. 9 
p. 853c. By a rabbinical method of interpreting, op- 
posed to the usage of the Hebr. y^, which signifies the 
offspring whether consisting of one person or many, 
Paul lays such stress on the singular number in Gen. xiii. 
15; xvii. 8 as to make it denote but one of Abraham’s 
posterity, and that the Messiah: Gal. iii. 16, also 19; 
and yet, that the way in which Paul presses the singu- 
lar here is not utterly at variance with the genius of the 
Jewish-Greek language is evident from ᾿Αβραμιαίων σπερ- 
μάτων ἀπόγονοι, 4 Macc. xviii. 1, where the plural is used 
of many descendants [(ef. Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16 
note?; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.)]. τὸ om. ('ABpaáp) τὸ 
ἐκ Tov νόμου, the seed which is such according to the de- 
cision of the law, physical offspring [see νόμος, 2 
p. 4281, τὸ ἐκ πίστεως 'ABp. those who are called Abra- 
ham’s posterity on account of the faith by which they 
are akin to him [see πίστις, 1 b. a. p. 513^ and ἐκ, II. 7], 
Ro. iv. 16; add, 18; ix. 8; Gal. iii. 29; similarly Chris- 
tians are called, in Rev. xii. 17, the σπέρμα of the church 
(which is likened to a mother, Gal.iv.26). ^. whatever 
possesses vital force or life-giving power: τὸ σπέρμα τοῦ 
θεοῦ [(but anarthrous)], the Holy Spirit, the divine en- 
ergy operating within the soul by which we are regener- 
ated or made the τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. iii. 9.* 

σπερμολόγος, -ov, (σπέρμα, and λέγω to collect) ; τίς 
picking up seeds: used of birds, Plut. Demet. 28; Athen. 
9 p. 387 £.; esp. of the crow or daw that picks up grain in 
the fields (Germ. Saatkráhe), Arstph. av. 232, 579; Aris- 
tot. h. a. 8, 3 p. 592^, 28, and other writ. 2. of men: 
lounging about the market-place and picking up a subsis- 
tence by whatever may chance to fall from the loads of mer- 
chandise (Eustath. on Hom. Od. 5, 490 σπερμολόγοι - οἱ 
περὶ τὰ ἐμπόρια k. ἀγορὰς διατρίβοντες διὰ τὸ ἀναλέγεσθαι 
τὰ ἐκ τῶν φορτίων ἀπορρέοντα καὶ διὰ ζῆν ἐκ τούτων) ; hence, 
beggarly, abject, vile, (a parasite); getting a living by 
flattery and buffoonery, Athen. 3 p. 85 f.; Plut. mor. p. 
456 d.; subst. 6am. an empty talker, babbler, (Dem. p. 269, 
19; Athen. 8 p. 344 c.): Acts xvii. 18." 

σπεύδω ; impf. ἔσπευδον; 1 aor. ἔσπευσα; (cogn. w. 
Germ. sich sputen [cf. Eng. speed, Lat. studeo; Vanicek 
p. 1163; Fick iv. 279]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
32, also for 5713, ete. ; 1. intrans. [cf. W. $ 38, 
1; B. 130, 4], to hasten: as often in the Grk. writ., foll. 
by an inf. Acts xx. 16; ἦλθον σπεύσαντες, they came with 
haste, Lk. ii. 16; σπεύσας κατάβηθι [ A. V. make haste 


584 


, 
σπλάγχνον: 


and come down], κατέβη, Lk. xix. 5, 6; σπεῦσον x. ἔξελθε, 
[A. V. make haste and get thee quickly out], Acts xxii. 
18. 2. to desire earnestly: ri, 2 Pet. iii. 12; (Is. 
xvi. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Passow 8. ν. 2 
vol. ii. p. 1501; [L. and S. s. v. II.]).* 

σπήλαιον, -ov, τό, (σπέος [cavern; cf. Curtius $111]), 
a cave, [den]: Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17 ; Lk. xix. 46; Jn. 
xi. 38; Heb. xi. 38; Rev. vi. 15. (Plat., Plut., Lcian.,. 
Ael., al.; Sept. for 113j2.) * 

emu ds, -ados, ἡ, a rock in the sea, ledge or reef, (Hom. 
Od. 3, 298; 5, 401, and in other poets; Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph. b. j. 3, 9, 3) ; plur. trop. of men who by their 
conduct damage others morally, wreck them as it were, 
i. q. σκάνδαλα, [ R. V. txt. hidden rocks], Jude 12 [here 
LT Tr WH read οἱ (se. ὄντες) oz. Some (so R.V. mrg.) 
make the word equiv. to the following; see Rutherford 
as there referred to.]* 

σπῖλος [ WH σπίλος (so Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 87; 
L. and S. 5. v.); but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Lipsius, 
Gram. Untersuch. p. 42], -ov, ó, (Phryn. rejects this word 
in favor of the Attic κηλίς ; but σπῖλος is used by Joseph., 
Dion. Hal, Plut., Leian., Liban., Artemidor.; see Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 28 [cf. W. 25]), a spot: trop. a fault, moral 
blemish, Eph. v. 27; plur. of base and gluttonous men, 
2 Pet. ii. 13.* 

σπιλόω, -à; pf. pass. ptep. ἐσπιλωμένος ; (σπῖλος) ; to 
defile, spot: τί, Jas. 111. 6; Jude 23. (Dion. Hal., Leian., 
Heliod.; Sept.) * 

σπλαγχνίζομαι ; 1 aor. ἐσπλαγχνίσθην [cf. B. 52 (45)]; 
(σπλάγχνον, q. v.) ; prop. to be moved as to one’s bowels, 
hence to be moved with compassion, have compassion, (for 
the bowels were thought to be the seat of love and pity): 
absol, Lk. x. 33; xv. 20; σπλαγχνισθείς with a finite: 
verb, Mt. xx. 34; Mk. i. 41; τινός, to pity one (cf. W. 
8$30,102.; [B. $132, 15; but al. regard σπλ. in the foll. 
example as used absol. and the gen. as depending om 
κύριος), Mt. xviii. 27; ἐπί with dat. of the pers., Mt. 
xiv. 14 GL T Tr WH; Mk. vi. 34 [RG]; Lk. vii. 13 
(where Tdf. ἐπί w. acc.) ; ἐπί twa, Mt. xiv. 14 Rec.; xv. 
32; Mk. [vi. 34 L T Tr WH]; viii. 2; ix. 22; cf. W. $33, 
c.; [B. u.s.]; περί τινος ὅτι, Mt. ix. 36. Besides, several 
times in Test. xii. Patr. [e. g. test. Zab. $$ 4, 6, 7, ete.]; 
and in the N. T. Apocr.; in Deut. xiii. 8 Symm.; [Ex. 
ii. 6 cod. Venet.]; and in 1 S. xxiii. 21 incert.; [Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 7; Herm. mand. 4, 3, 5]; ἐπεσπλαγχνί- 
Copa, Prov. xvii. 5; the act. σπλαγχνίζω is once used for 
the Attic σπλαγχνεύω, 2 Macc. vi.8. Cf. Bleek, Einl. ins 
N. T. ed. 1, p. 75 [Eng. trans. ibid. ; ed. 3 (by Mangold) 
p. 90; W. 30, 33, 92 (87)].* 

σπλάγχνον, -ου, τό, and (only so in the N. T.) plur. 
σπλάγχνα, -ων, τά, Hebr. 0M, bowels, intestines (the 
heart, lungs, liver, ete.) ; a. prop.: Acts i. 18 (2 
Mace. ix. 5 sq.; 4 Mace. v. 29, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down). b. in the Grk. poets fr. Aeschyl. down the 
bowels were regarded as the seat of the more violent pas- 
sions, such as anger and love; but by the Hebrews as the 
seat of the tenderer affections, esp. kindness, benevo- 
lence, compassion, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 8; W. 18]; 


σπόγγος 


hence i. 4. our heart, [tender mercies, affections, etc. (cf. 
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Bowels)]: 1 Jn. iii. 17 (on which see 
κλείω); 2 Co. vi. 12; Phil. ii. 1 [here GL T Tr WH εἴτις 
σπλάγχνα; D. 81 (71), cf. Green 109; Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. |; 
σπλάγχνα ἐλέους (gen. of quality [cf. W. 611 (568); so 
Test. xii. Patr., test. Zab. $8 7, 8]), a heart in which 
mercy resides, [heart of mercy], Lk. i. 78; also σπλ. οἰκ- 
τιρμοῦ [ Rec. -μῶν], Col. iii. 12; rà σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ περισ- 
corépos eis ὑμᾶς ἐστίν, his heart is the more abundantly 
devoted to you, 2 Co. vii. 15; ἐπιποθῶ ὑμᾶς ἐν σπλάγχνοις 
Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, in the heart [R. V. tender mercies] of 
Christ, i. e. prompted by the same love as Christ Jesus, 
Phil. i. 8; dvazavew rà aA. τινός, to refresh one's soul or 
heart, Philem. 7, 20; rà σπλάγχνα ἡμῶν, my very heart, 
i. e. whom I dearly love, Philem. 12 (so Darius calls his 
mother and children Ais own bowels in Curt. 4, 14, 22. 
meum corculum, Plaut. Cas. 4, 4, 14; meum cor, id. Poen. 
1, 2, 154; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philem.1.c.]). The Hebr. 
n'om is translated by the Sept. now οἰκτιρμοί, Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 6; xxxix. (xl.) 12, now ἔλεος, Is. xlvii. 6; once 
σπλάγχνα, Prov. xii. 10.* 

σπόγγος, -ov, 6, [perh. akin is fungus ; Curtius $ 575], 
fr. Hom. down, sponge: Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn. 
zane PES 

σποδός, -ov, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, ashes: Heb. ix. 13; ἐν 
σάκκῳ k. σποδῷ κάθημαι, to sit clothed in sackcloth and 
covered with ashes (exhibiting the tokens of grief, cf. 
Jon. iii. 6; Is. lviii. 5; lxi. 3; Jer. vi. 26; Esth. iv. 1,3; 
1 Mace. iii. 47; cf. σάκκος, b.) : Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13.* 

σπορᾶά, -ᾶς, 7. (σπείρω, 2 pf. £amopa), seed: 1 Pet. i. 23 
[(i. q. a sowing, fig. origin, etc., fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down)].* 

σπόριμος, -ov, (σπείρω, 2 pf. &ozopa), fit for sowing, 
sown, (Xen., Diod., al.) ; rà σπόριμα, sown fields, growing 
crops, [A.V. (exc. in Mt.) corn-fields], (Geop. 1, 12, 37): 
Mt. xii. 1; Mk. n. 23; Lk. vi. 1.* 

σπόρος, -ov, 6, (σπείρω, 2 pf. ἔσπορα) ; 1. a sow- 
ing (Hdt., Xen., Theophr., al.). 2. seed (used in 
sowing): Mk. iv. 26 sq. ; Lk. viii. 5, 11; 2 Co. ix. 10* [L 
Tr, 10°], (Deut. xi. 10; 'Theocr., Plut., al.).* 

σπουδαζω : fut. σπουδάσω (a later form for the early 
τ-άσομαι, cf. Krüger ὃ 40 s. v., vol. i. p. 190; B. 53 (46); 
[W. 89 (85); Veitch s.v.]); 1 aor. ἐσπούδασα; (σπουδή, 
q.v.) ; fr. Soph. and Arstph. down; a. to hasten, 
make haste: foll. by an inf. (cf. σπεύδω, 1), 2 Tim. iv. 9, 
21; Tit. iii. 12, [4]. refer these exx. to b.; but cf. Holtz- 
mann, Com. on 2 Tim. ii. 15]. b. to exert one's self, 
endeavor, give diligence: foll. by an inf., Gal. ii. 10; Eph. 
Ἐν» D'Thon217: 2 ame ii. 155 eb: tv. 11 Ὁ Peter 
10; iii. 14; foll. by acc. with inf. 2 Pet. i. 15.* 

σπουδαῖος. -a, -ov, (σπουδή), fr. Hdt. down, active, dili- 
gent, zealous, earnest: ἔν vun, 2 Co. viii. 22; compar. 
σπουδαιότερος, ibid. 17 [W. 242 sq. (227)], 22 [W. $ 35, 
1]; neut. as adv. (Lat. studiosius), very diligently [cf. B. 
$123, 10], 2 Tim. i. 17 RG.* 

σπουδαίως, adv. of the preceding; a. hastily, with 
haste: compar. σπουδαιοτέρως [cf. B. 69 (61); W. § 11, 
2 c.], Phil. ii. 28 [W. 243 (228)]. b. diligently: 2 
Tim.i.17 L' T TrWH ; Tit. iii. 13 ; earnestly, Lk. vii. 4.* 


585 








g Tao ἐς 


σπουδή, -7s, ἡ, (σπεύδω, [q. v.]), fr. Hom. down; Te 
haste: μετὰ σπουδῆς, with haste, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39, (Sap. 
xix. 2; Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 7; Hdian. 3, 4,1; 6, 4,3). 2 
earnestness, diligence: univ. earnestness in accomplish- 
ing, promoting, or striving after anything, Ro. xii. 11; 
2 Co. vii. 11, 12; viii. 7sq.; ἐν σπουδῇ, with diligence, 
Ro. xii. 8; σπουδὴν ἐνδείκνυσθαι, Heb. vi. 11 ; πᾶσαν σπου- 
δὴν ποιεῖσθαι (see ποιέω, I. 3 p. 525" bot.), to give all dili- 
gence, interest one's self most earnestly, Jude 3; σπουδὴν: 
παρεισφέρειν, 2 Pet. 1. 55 ἡ am. ὑπέρ τινος, earnest care 
for one, 2 Co. viii. 16 {περί τινος, [Dem. 90, 10]; Diod. 
1, 75). 

σπυρίς [L WH σφυρίς, q. v.], -ίδος, ἡ, (allied to σπεῖρα; 
q.v.; hence, something wound, twisted, or folded togeth- 
er), a reed basket, [i. e. a plaited basket, a lunch basket,. 
hamper; cf. B.D. s. v. Basket]: Mt. xv. 37; xvi.10; Mk. 
viii. 8, 20; Acts ix. 25. (Hdt., Theophr., Apollod., Al- 
ciphr. 3, ep. 56; al). See σφυρίς." 

στάδιον, -ov, plur. τὰ στάδια [Jn. vi. 19 Tdf.], and ot 
στάδιοι (so [ Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13; 
Jn. vi. 19 [not Tdf.]; Rev. xxi. 16 [R** GL WH mrg.]; 
2 Mace. xi.5; xii. 10, 29; in the other pass. the gend. is. 
not apparent [see Tf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p- 
157]; Krüger $19, 2, 1), (STAQ, ἵστημι; hence prop., 
‘established,’ that which stands fast, a * stated’ distance, 
a ‘fixed standard’ of length), a stadium, i. e. fign 
measure of length comprising 600 Grk. feet, or 625 Ro- 
man feet, or 125 Roman paces (Plin. h. n. 2, 23 (21), 85), 
hence one eighth of a Roman mile [i. e. 606$ Eng. feet 
(about 50 ft. more than one fifth of a kilom.)]; the space 
or distance of that length [ A.V. a furlong]: [Mt. xiv. 
24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk.xxiv. 13; Jn.vi.19; xi. 18; 
Rev. xiv. 20; xxi. 16. 2. a race-course, i.e. place 
in which contests in running were held; the one who. 
outstripped the rest, and reached the goal first, receiv- 
ing the prize: 1 Co. ix. 24 [here A. V. race]. Courses 
of this description were to be found in most of the larger 
Grk. cities, and were, like that at Olympia, 600 Greek 
feet in length. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Stadium; Grundt 
in Schenkel s. v., vol. v. 375 sq.; [BB. DD. s.v. Games].* 

στάμνος. -ov, 6, 7). (fr. ἵστημι [cf. Curtius § 216]), among 
the Greeks an earthen jar, into which wine was drawn off 
for keeping (a process called κατασταμνίζειν), but also. 
used for other purposes. The Sept. employ it in Ex. 
xvi. 33 as the rendering of the Hebr. ΣΥΝ, that little 
jar [or *pot"] in which the manna was kept, laid up in 
the ark of the covenant; hence in Heb. ix. 4, and Philo. 
de congr. erud. grat. $ 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 400; 
[W. 251." 

στασιαστής, -οὔ, 6, (cracid(o), the author of or a 
participant in an insurrection: Mk. xv. 7 LT Tr WH 
([Diod. fr. 10, 11, 1 p.171, 6 Dind.; Dion. Hal.ii. 1199]; 
Joseph. antt. 14, 1, 3; Ptolem.). The earlier Greeks 
used στασιώτης [ Moeris s. v. ].* 

στάσις. -eos, ἡ, (ἵστημι) ; 1. a standing, station, 
state : ἔχειν στάσιν, to stand, exist, have stability, Lat. locum 
habere, [R. V. is yet standing], Heb. ix. 8 (Polyb. 5, 5, 
3). 2. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, an insurrection 


στατήρ 


(cf. Germ. Aufstand) : Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts 
xix. 40 [see σήμερον, sub fin.]; κινεῖν στάσιν [LT Tr 
WH στάσεις] τινί, [a mover of insurrections among i. e.] 
against [cf. W. 208 (196)] one, Acts xxiv. 5. 3. 
strife, dissension, (Aeschyl. Pers. 738; Diog. Laért. 3, 
51): Acts xv. 2; xxiii. 7, 10:* 

στατήρ, -ῆρος, ὁ, (fr. terns, to place in the scales, weigh 
out [i. e. ‘the weigher’ (Vanicek p. 1126)]), a stater, a 
coin; in the N. T. a silver stater equiv. to four Attic 
or two Alexandrian drachmas, a Jewish shekel (see 
δίδραχμον) : Mt. xvii. 27.* 

σταυρός, -o0, ὁ, [fr. ἵστημι (root sta); cf. Lat. stauro, 
Eng. staff (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.); Curtius $ 216; 
Vanicek p. 1126]; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed 
one, (Hom., Hdt., Thue., Xen.). 2. a cross; a. 
the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignomin- 
ious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans 
from the Pheenicians; to it were affixed among the 
Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the 
guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, rob- 
bers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and oc- 
easionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of 
the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even 
Roman citizens themselves; cf. Win. RW B. s. v. Kreuzi- 
gung; Merz in Herzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also 
Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], s. v. Kreuz; Keim iii. p. 409 
sqq. [Eng. trans. vi. 138; BB.DD. s. vv. Cross, Cru- 
cifixion; Ὁ. Zóckler, Das Kreuz Christi (Gütersloh, 
1875), Eng. trans. Lond. 1878, (where also a list of mono- 
graphs is given) ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 582 
sqq.] This horrible punishment the innocent Jesus 
also suffered: Mt. xxvii. 32, 40, 42; Mk. xv. 21, 30, 32; 
Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 17, 19, 25, 31; Col. ii. 14; Heb. xii. 
2; θάνατος σταυροῦ, Phil.ii.8; τὸ αἷμα τοῦ σταυροῦ, blood 
shed on the cross, Col. i. 20. b. i. q. the crucifixion 
which Christ underwent: Gal. v. 11 (on which see σκάν- 
δαλον, sub fin.); Eph. ii. 16; with the addition of τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. i. 17; the saving power of his crucifixion, 
Phil. iii. 18 (on which see ἐχθρός, fin.) ; Gal. vi. 14; τῷ 
σταυρῷ τοῦ Χριστοῦ διώκεσθαι, to encounter persecution 
on account of one’s avowed belief in the saving efficacy 
of Christ’s crucifixion, Gal. vi. 12; ὁ λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 
the doctrine concerning the saving power of the death 
on the cross endured by Christ, 1 Co. i. 18. The judi- 
cial usage which compelled those condemned to cruci- 
fixion themselves to carry the cross to the place of 
punishment (Plut. de sera numinis vindict. c. 9; Artem. 
oneir. 2, 56, cf. Jn. xix. 17), gave rise to the proverbial 
expression αἴρειν or λαμβάνειν or βαστάζειν τὸν σταυρὸν 
αὐτοῦ, which was wont to be used of those who on behalf 
of God’s cause do not hesitate cheerfully and manfully 
to bear persecutions, troubles, distresses, — thus recall- 
ing the fate of Christ and the spirit in which he encoun- 
tered it (cf. Bleek, Synop. Erkl. der drei ersten Evange. 
i.p.439 sq.): Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21 
[RLinbr.]; xv. 21; Lk.ix.23; xiv. 27.* 

σταυρόω, -ῶ; fut. σταυρώσω; 1 aor. ἐσταύρωσα; Pass., 
pres. σταύρομαι; pf. ptep. ἐσταυρωμένος ; 1 aor. ἐσταυρώ- 


586 








στέλλω 


θην; (σταυρός, q. V-); 1. to stake, drive down stakes: 
Thue. 7, 25, 6 [here of Συρακόσιοι ἐσταύρωσαν, which the 
Scholiast renders σταυροὺς κατέπηξαν]. 2. to for- 
tify with driven stakes, to palisade: a place, Thue. 6, 
100; Diod. 3. to crucify (Vulg. crucifigo): τινά, ἃ. 
prop.: Mt. xx. 19; xxiii. 34; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 22, [23], 26, 
31, 35,38; xxviii. 5; Mk. xv. 13-15, 20, 24 sq. 27; xvi. 
6; Lk. xxiii. 21, 23,33; xxiv. 7, 20; Jn. xix. 6, 10, 15 sq. 
18, 20, 28,41; Actsii.36; iv. 10; 1 00. 1. 118; 28. ii. 2, 
[8]; 2 Co. xiii. 4; Gal iii.1; Rev. xi. 8, (Add. to Esth. 
viii. 13 [34]; for non, to hang, Esth. vii. 9. Polyb. 1, 86, 
4; Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 4; 17, 10, 10; Artem. oneir. 2, 53 
and 56; in native Grk. writ. ἀνασταυροῦν is more com- 
mon). b. metaph.: τὴν σάρκα, to crucify the flesh, 
destroy its power utterly (the nature of the fig. implying 
that the destruetion is attended with intense pain [but 
note the aor.]), Gal. v. 24; ἐσταύρωμαί τινι, and ἐσταύ- 
poraí poi τι, I have been crucified to something and it has 
been crucified to me, so that we are dead to each other, 
all fellowship and intercourse between us has ceased, 
Gal. vi. 14. [Comp.: dva-, συ(ν)- aravpóo.] * 

σταφυλή, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 533, grapes, 
a bunch of grapes: Mt. vii. 165 Lk. vi. 44; Rev. xiv. 18 
[ef. Sept. as referred to s. v. βότρυς." 

στάχυς, -vos [cf. B. 14], ὁ, [connected w. the r. sta, 
torn; Curtius p. 721], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for naw, 
an ear of corn (or growing grain): Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 
23; iv. 28; Lk. vi. 1.* 

Zraxvs, -vos, 6, [cf. the preceding word], Stachys, the 
name of a man [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 174]: Ro. 
xvi. 9.* 

στέγη, -ἡς, 7, (στέγω to cover), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down, a roof: of a house, Mk. ii. 4; εἰσέρχεσθαι ὑπὸ τὴν 
στέγην τινός [see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 p. 187" bot. ], Mt. viii. 8; 
Lk. vii. 6.* 

oréyo; [allied w. Lat. tego, toga, Eng. deck, thatch, 
etc.; Curtius $ 155; Fick Pt. iii. 590]; to cover; uh 
to protect or keep by covering, to preserve: Soph., Plat., 
Plut., al. 2. to cover over with silence; to keep se- 
cret; to hide, conceal: τἀμὰ ἔπη, Eur. Electr. 273; τὸν 
λόγον, Polyb. 8, 14, 5; for other exx. see Passow s. v. 1 b. 
B.; [L. and S. s. v. IT. 2]; μωρὸς ov δυνήσεται λόγον στέ- 
ξαι, Sir. viii. 17; hence ἡ ἀγάπη πάντα στέγει, 1 Co. xiii. 
7, is explained by some, love covereth [so R. V. mrg.], i. e. 
hides and excuses, the errors and faults of others; but it 
is more appropriately rendered (with other interpreters) 
beareth. For oréyo means 3. by covering to keep 
off something which threatens, to bear up against, hold 
out against, and so to endure, bear, forbear, (ras ἐνδείας, 
Philo in Flacc. § 9; many exx. fr. Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. 
down are given by Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s. v. A. 
esp. 3]): 1 Co. ix. 12; xiii. 7; 1 Th. iii. 1, 5.* 

στεῖρος, -a, -ov, (i. 4. aréppos, στερεός q. v.; whence 
Germ. starr, Lat. sterilis), hard, stiff; of men and ani- 
mals, barren: of a woman who does not conceive, Lk. 
i.7,36; xxiii. 29; Gal.iv.27. (Hom., Theocr., Orph., 
Anthol.; Sept. for pz mprj* 

στέλλω : (Germ. stellen; [cf. Grk. στήλη, στολή, etc. ; 


στέμμα 


Lat. stlocus (locus) ; Eng. stall, etc.; Curtius § 218; Fick 
Pt. i. 246; Pt. iv. 274]); fr. Hom. down; 1. to set, 
place, set in order, arrange; to fit out, to prepare, equip; 
Mid. pres. στέλλομαι, to prepare one's self, to fit out for 
one’s self; to fit out for one’s own use: στελλόμενοι τοῦτο 
μή τις ete. arranging, providing for, this ete. i. 6. taking 
care [A. V. avoiding], that no one ete. 2 Co. viii. 20 [ef. 
W. § 45,6a.; B. 292 (252)]. 2. to bring together, 
contract, shorten: τὰ ἱστία, Hom. Od. 3, 11; 16, 353; also 
in mid. 1]. 1, 433; 10 diminish, check, cause to cease; pass. 
to cease to exist: βουλομένη τὴν λύπην τοῦ ἀνδρὸς σταλῆναι, 
Joseph. antt. 5, 8, 8; ὁ χειμὼν ἐστάλη, ibid. 9, 10, 2; mid. 
to remove one’s self, withdraw one's self, to depart, foll. by 
ἀπό with gen. of the pers., to abstain from familiar inter- 
course with one, 2 'Th.ii. 6. [Comp.: dro-, é£-aro-, avv- 
aro-, δια-, ἐπι-, kara-, av(v)-, ὑπο-στέλλω.} * 

στέμμα, -τος, τό, (στέφω, pf. pass. ἔστεμμαι, to crown, 
to bind round), « jillet, a garland, put upon victims: 
Acts xiv. 13 [cf. W. 630 (585); B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gar- 
lands]. (From Hom. down.) * 

στεναγμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (στενάζω), a. groaning, a sigh: Acts 
vii. 34; Ro. viii. 26; see dAdAgros. ([Pind.], Trage., 
Plat., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept. for YN, np, Dps23.)* 

στενάζω; 1 aor. ἐστέναξα; (στένω, akin is Germ. stülnen 
{ef. sten-torian; Vanicek p. 1141; Fick Pt. i. 249]); to 
sigh, to groan: 2 Co. v. 2, 4, [cf. W. 353 (331)]; Heb. xiii. 
17; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, within ourselves, i. e. in our souls, in- 
wardly, Ro. viii. 23; to pray sighing, Mk. vii. 34; κατά 
τινος, Jas. v. 9 [here R. V. murmur]  (Sept.; Trage. 
Dem., Plut, al) [Comr.: dva-, συ(ν)- στενάζω. Syn. 
cf. κλαίω, fin.] * 

στενός, -7, -óv, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for 
WS, narrow, strait: πύλη, Mt. vii. 13, [14 (here L Tr br: 
πύλη)]; Lk. xiii. 24.* 

στενο-χωρέω, -@: (στενόχωρος ; and this fr. στενός, and 
χῶρος a space) ; 1. intrans. to be in a strait place 
(Machon in Athen. 13 p. 582 b.) ; to be narrow (Is. xlix. 
19). 2. trans. to straiten, compress, cramp, reduce 
to straits, (Vulg. angustio), (Diod., Leian., Hdian., al.; 
[Sept. Josh. xvii. 15; Judg. xvi. 16; Is. xxviii. 20; 4 
Mace. xi. 11]): pass. trop. of one sorely ‘straitened’ in 
spirit, 2 Co. iv. 8; οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, ye are not 
straitened in us, ample space is granted you in our souls, 
i. e. we enfold you with large affection, 2 Co. vi. 12; στε- 
νοχωρεῖσθε ev rois σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν. ye are straitened in 
your own affections, so that there is no room there for 
us, i. e. you do not grant a place in your heart for love 
toward me, ibid.* 

στενοχωρία, -as, 7, (arevóxopos), narrowness of place, 
a narrow space, (Is. viii. 22 [al. take this as metaph.]; 
Thue., Plat., al.) ; metaph. dire calamity, extreme afflic- 
tion, [ A. V. distress, anguish]: Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35; 2 Co. 
vi.4; xii. 10. (Deut. xxviii. 53, 55, 57; Sir. x. 26; [Sap. 
v.3]; 1 Macc. ii. 53; xiii. 3; Polyb. 1, 67, 1; [ Artemid. 
oneir. 3, 14]; Ael. v. h. 2, 41; [al.].) [Cf. Trench § lv.]* 

στερεός, -á, -óv, [Vanicek p. 1131; Curtius § 222], fr. 
Hom. down, firm, solid, compact, hard, rigid: λίθος, Hom. 
Od. 19, 494; strong, firm, immovable, θεμέλιος, 2 Tim. ii. 


587 








στεφανόω 


19; τροφή, solid food, Heb. v. 12, 14; στερεωτέρα τροφή, 
Diod. 2,4; Epictet. diss. 2, 16, 39; trop., in a bad 
sense, cruel, stiff, stubborn, hard; often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down: κραδίη στερεωτέρη λίθοιο, Od. 23, 103; in 
a good sense, firm, steadfast: τῇ πίστει, as respects faith, 
firm of faith [cf. W. § 31, 6 a.], 1 Pet. v. 9 (see στερεύω, 
fin.).* 

στερεόω, -à: 1 aor. ἐστερέωσα; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐστε- 
ρεοῦντο; 1 aor. pass. ἐστερεώθην; (στερεός); to make 
solid, make firm, strengthen, make strong: τινά, the body 
of any one, Acts iii. 16; ras βάσεις, pass. Acts iii. 7; 
pass. τῇ πίστει, as respects faith (see στερεός, fin.), Acts 
xvi. 5. (Sept.; Xen., Diod.) * 

στερέωμα, -ros, τό, (στερεόω), that which has been made 
τι; a. (Vulg. firmamentum) the firmament; so 
Sept. for ^p^, the arch of the sky, which in early times 
was thought to be solid, Gen. i. 6-8; Ezek. i. 22-26; 
Sir. xliii. 1, [ef. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Firmament]; 
a fortified place, 1 Esdr. viii. 78 (80). b. that which 
Surnishes a foundation; on which a thing rests firmly, sup- 
port: Aristot. partt. an. 2, 9, 12 p. 655*, 22; κύριος orepe- 
ὠμά pov, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3. c. firmness, steadfast- 
ness: τῆς πίστεως, Col. ii. 5 [some take it here metaph. 
in a military sense, solid front; cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc. 
(per contra Meyer) ].* 

Στεφανᾶς, -à [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Stephanas, a Christian 
of Corinth: 1 Co. i. 16 ; xvi. 15, 17.* 

στέφανος, -ov, 6, (στέφω [to put round; cf. Curtius 
§ 224]), Sept. for Twp, [fr. Hom. down], a crown (with 
which the head is encircled) ; a. prop. as a mark 
of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass. in the 
Sept. as 2 S. xii. 30; 1 Chr. xx. 2; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4; Ezek. 
xxi. 26 ; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet cf. 2 S. i. 10 Compl, Lag.), 
perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw. 
στέφανος and διάδημα (q.v.) was strictly observed in 
Hellenistic Grk.]: Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17 ; Jn. xix. 2, 
5; Rev. iv. 4, 10; vi. 2; ix. 7; xiv. 14; with a gen. of the 
material, ἀστέρων δώδεκα, Rev. xii. 1; the wreath or gar- 
land which was given as a prize to victors in the publie 
games [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Games]: 1 Co. ix. 25, cf. 2 Tim. 
ii. 5. b. metaph. a. the eternal blessedness which 
will be given as a prize to the genuine servants of God and 
Christ: 6 τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος, the crown (wreath) 
which is the reward of righteousness, 2 Tim. iv. 8; with 
an epexeget. gen. in the phrases λαμβάνεσθαι, διδόναι τὸν 
στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς, equiv. to τὴν ζωὴν ὡς τὸν στέφανον, 
Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; κομίζεσθαι τὸν τῆς δόξης στέφανον, 
1 Pet. v. 4; λαβεῖν τ. στέφανόν τινος, to cause one to fail 
of the promised and hoped for prize, Rev. iii. 11. B. 
that which is an ornament and honor to one: so of per- 
sons, Phil. iv. 1; στέφ. καυχήσεως (see καύχησις), 1 Th. 
ii. 19, (Prov. xii. 4; xvi. 31; xvii. 6, etc.).* 

Στέφανος, -ov, 6, Stephen, one of the seven * deacons’ 
of the church at Jerusalem who was stoned to death by 
the Jews: Aetsvi.5,8 sq.; vii. 59; viii. 2; xi. 19; xxii. 
20." 

στεφανόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐστεφάνωσα:; pf. pass. ptep. ἐστε- 
φανωμένος ; (στέφανος) ; fr. Hom. down ; a. to en- 


στῆθος 


circle with a crown, to crown : the victor in a contest, 2 | 


Tim. ii. 5. b. univ. to adorn, to honor: τινὰ δόξῃ x. 
τιμῇ, Heb. ii. 7, 9, fr. Ps. viii. 6.* 

στῆθος, -ovs, τό, (fr. forge; that which stands out, 
is prominent [Etym. Magn. 727, 19 διότι éargkev ἀσάλευ- 
rov]), fr. Hom. down, the breast: Jn. xiii. 25; xxi. 20, 
(cf. κόλπος, 1) ; Rev. xv. θ. τύπτειν els τὸ στῆθος or τύπτ. 
τὸ στῆθος, of mourners (see kózro), Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 
48.* 

cTíko; (an inferior Grk. word, derived fr. éornxa, pf. 
of ἵστημι; see D. 48 (41) ; [W. 24, 26 (25); WH. App. 
p.169; Veitch s.v. écrjko; Mullach s. v. στέκω (p. 
299)]); to stand: Mk. [iii. 31 T Tr WH]; xi. 25 [(cf. 
ὅταν c. B.)]; Jn. i. 26 L mrg. T Trtxt. WH; [Rev. xii. 
4 WH (but see below)]; with an emphasis, to stand 
Jirm ; trop. to persist, persevere, [ A.V. stand fast]: absol. 
to persevere in godliness and rectitude, 2 Th. ii. 15; év 
κυρίῳ, in one's fellowship with the Lord, Phil. iv. 1; 1 
Th. iii. 8 [(cf. ἐάν, I. 2 b.)]; ἐν τῇ πίστει, 1 Co. xvi. 13; 
ev ἑνὶ πνεύματι, Phil. i. 27; to keep one's standing (opp. 
to ζυγῷ ἐνέχομαι), τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, maintain your allegiance 
to freedom [cf. W. $31, 1 k.; B. $133, 12; but L T Tr 
WH take ov. here absol.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.], Gal. 
v. 15 to stand erect, trop. not to sin (opp. to πίπτειν i. q. 
to sin), τῷ κυρίῳ, dat. commodi [W. τι. s.], Ro. xiv. 4. 
[In Jn. viii. 44 (ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ oük(x) ἐστηκεν) WIT read 
the impf. ἔστηκεν (where others adopt ἕστηκεν fr. ἵστημε), 
owing to the preceding οὐκ (T WH after codd. 8 B* D 
L ete.) ; see Westcott, Com. on Jn. l.c. * Additional Note’ ; 
WH. Introd. $ 407. But such an impf. is nowhere else 
found (yet cf. Rev. xii. 4 WH), and respecting confu- 
sion in the ancient use of the breathings, and the inter- 
change of οὐκ and ody, see οὐ ad init. and reff. there, esp. 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 90; moreover, the familiar pf. (pres.) of 
torn thoroughly suits the context; see ἵστημι, IT. 2 d.] 
([Sept., Ex. xiv. 13 Alex., Compl; 1 K. viii. 11]; Alex. 
Aphr. probl. 1, 49 var.; eccles. writ.) * 

στηριγμός, -00, 6, (στηρίζω), firm condition, steadfast- 
ness: of mind, 2 Pet. iii. 17. (of a standing still, Diod. 
1, 81; Plut. mor. p. 76 d.) * 

στηρίζω ; fut. στηρίξω (as in the best Grk. writ.), and 
στηρίσω (in 2 Th. iii. 3 cod. Vat., as in Jer. xvii. 5; στηριῶ, 
Jer. iii. 12; xxiv. 6; Ezek. xiv. 8; Sir. vi. 37 [see reff. 
below]); 1 aor. ἐστήριξα, and ἐστήρισα (στήρισον, Lk. 
xxii. 32 LT Tr WH; Rev.iii. 2G L T Tr WH, as in Judg. 
xix. 5, 8; Ezek. vi. 2; Prov. xv. 25, etc. ; cf. [ WH. App. 
p. 170]; Bttm. Ausf. Sprehl.i. p.372; B. 36 (32); Kühner 
§ 343, i. p. 910; [Veitch s. v.]) ; Pass., pf. eornprypar; 1 
aor.eotnpixOnv ; (στῆριγξ a support ; akin to στερεός, q. v., 
στερρός, and Germ. stürken; cf. Curtius $222); fr. Hom. 
a. to make stable, place firmly, set fast, fix : 
ἐστήρικται (χάσμα, is fixed, Lk. xvi. 26; στηρίζω τὸ πρό- 
σωπον, to set one's face steadfastly, keep the face turned 
(Ezek. vi. 2; xiii. 17 ; xv. 7; etc.) τοῦ πορεύεσθαι eis with 
an acc. of place, a Hebr. expression (see πρόσωπον, 1 b. 
[and cf. B. $140, 16 8. ; W. 33]), Lk. ix. 51. b. to 
strengthen, make firm; trop. (not so in prof. auth.) to 
render constant, confirm, one's mind [A. V. establish]: 


down; 


588 











στοιχεῖον 


τινά, Lk. xxii. 32; [Acts xviii. 23 where R G ἐπιστηρ.1; 
Ro. i. 11; xvi. 25; 1 Th. iii. 2; 2 Th. iii. 8; 1 Pet. v. 10 
[here Ree. has 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. στηρίξαι]; Rev. 
ii. 2; τὴν καρδίαν τινός, 1 Th. iii. 13; Jas. v. 8; τινὰ ἔν 
τινι, 2'Th. ii. 17; 2 Pet. i. 12. [Cowr.: ércorgpito.]* 

στιβάς, -ados, ἡ, (fr. στείβω ‘to tread on, 2 aor. ἔστι- 
Bov) ; a. a spread or layer of leaves, reeds, rushes, 
soft leafy twigs, straw, ete., serving for a bed (Hesych. 
στιβάς- ἀπὸ ῥάβδων ἢ χλωρῶν χόρτων στρῶσις k- φύλλων) ; 
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. b. that which is 
used in making a bed of this sort, a branch full of leaves, 
soft foliage: so Mk. xi. 8 L T Tr WH for στοιβάδας, an 
orthographical error [see Tdf.’s note ad loc. ].* 

στίγμα, -ros, τό, (fr. στίζω to prick; [cf. Lat. stimulus, 
ete.; Germ. stechen, Eng. stick, sting, ete.; Curtius $226], 
a mark pricked in or branded upon the body. Ace. to 
ancient oriental usage, slaves and soldiers bore the name 
or stamp of their master or commander branded or 
pricked (eut) into their bodies to indicate what master 
or general they belonged to, and there were even some 
devotees who stamped themselves in this way with the 
token of their gods (ef. Deyling, Observv. iii. p. 423 sqq.) ; 
hence τὰ στίγματα τοῦ (κυρίου so Rec.) Ἰησοῦ, the marks 
of (the Lord) Jesus, which Paul in Gal. vi. 17 says he 
bears branded on his body, are the traces left there by 
the perils, hardships, imprisonments, scourgings, endured 
by him for the cause of Christ, and which mark him 
as Christ's faithful and approved votary, servant, soldier, 
[see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. c.]. (Hdt. 7, 233; Ar- 
istot., Ael., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

στιγμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (στίζω; see στίγμα, init.), a point: στιγμὴ 
χρόνου, a point (i. e. a moment) of time (Cic. pro Flacco 
c. 25; pro Sest. 24; Caes. b.c. 2,14; al), Lk. iv. 5. 
(Antonin. 2, 17; Plut. puer. educ. 17; Is. xxix. 5; 2 
Mace. ix. 11.) * 

στίλβω ; 10 shine, glisten: of garments (as in Hom. Il. 
3,392; 18, 596; cf. Plat. Phaedo 59 p. 110 d.), Mk. ix. 
3.* 

στοά, -üs, 7, €t portico, a covered colonnade where peo- 
ple can stand or walk protected from the weather and 
the heat of the sun: Jn. v. 2; στοὰ Σολομῶνος, ἃ “ porch” 
or portico built by Solomon in the eastern part of the 
temple (which in the temple’s destruction by the Baby- 
lonians was left uninjured, and remained down to the 
times of king Agrippa, to whom the care of the temple 
was intrusted by the emperor Claudius, and who on 
account of its antiquity did not dare to demolish and 
build it anew; so Josephus relates, antt. 20, 9, 7; [but 
on * Solomon's Porch’ cf. B.D. s. v. Temple (Solomon’s 
Temple, fin.)]) : Jn. x. 23; Acts iii. 11; v. 12.* 

στοιβάς, -ados, 7, see ariBás, b. 

[Zroikés, so Lchm. 'Tdf. for Στωϊκός, q. v.] 

στοιχεῖον, -ov, τό, (fr. στοῖχος a row, rank, series; 
hence prop. that which belongs to any στοῖχος, that of 
which a στοῖχος is composed; hence), any first thing, 


from which the others belonging to some series or composite 


whole take their rise; an element, first principle. The 
word denotes spec. 1. the letters of the alphabet as 


στοιχέω 


the elements of speech, not however the written 
characters (which are called γράμματα), but the 
spoken sounds: στοιχεῖον φωνῆς φωνὴ ἀσύνθετος, Plat. 
defin. p. 414 6.; τὸ ῥῶ τὸ στοιχεῖον, id. Crat. p. 426 d.; 
στοιχεῖόν ἐστι φωνὴ ἀδιαίρετος, ov πᾶσα δέ, GAN ἐξ ἧς πέ- 
φυκε συνετὴ γίγνεσθαι φωνή, Aristot. poet. 20, p. 1450", 
22. 2. the elements from which all things have come, 
the material causes of the universe (ἔστι δὲ στοιχεῖον, ἐξ 
οὗ πρώτου γίνεται τὰ γινόμενα καὶ εἰς ὃ ἔσχατον ἀναλύεται 
... TÓ πῦρ, τὸ ὕδωρ, ὁ ἀήρ, ἡ γῆ, Diog. Laért. Zeno 69, 
137); so very often fr. Plat. down, as in Tim. p. 48 b.; 
in the Scriptures: Sap. vii. 17; xix. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 10, 
12. 3. the heavenly bodies, either as parts of the 
heavens, or (as others think) because in them the ele- 
ments of man's life and destiny were supposed to reside; 
so in the earlier eccles. writ.: Ep. ad Diogn. 7, 2; Justin. 
M. dial. c. Tryph. 23 ; τὰ οὐράνια στοιχεῖα, id. apol. 2, 5; 
στοιχεῖα θεοῦ, created by God, Theoph. Ant. ad Autol. 
1,4; ef. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, pp. 66—77. Hence 
some interpreters infelicitously understand Paul's phrase 
τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου, Gal.iv.3, 9; Col. ii. 8, 20, of the 
heavenly bodies, because times and seasons, and so sa- 
cred seasons, were regulated by the course of the sun 
and moon; yet in unfolding the meaning of the passage 
on the basis of this sense they differ widely. 4. 
the elements, rudiments, primary and fundamental princi- 
ples (cf. our ‘alphabet’ or ‘ab c?) of any art, science, or 
discipline; e. g. of mathematies, as in the title of Euclid's 
well-known work; στοιχεῖα πρῶτα kai μέγιστα χρηστῆς 
πολιτείας, Isocr. p. 18 a.; τῆς ἀρετῆς, Plut.de puer. educ. 
16, 2; many exx. are given in Passow s. v. 4, ii. p. 1550"; 
[ef. L. and S. s. v. II. 3 and 4]. In the N. T. we have 
τὰ cT. τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν λογίων τοῦ θεοῦ (see ἀρχή, 1 b. p. 76^ 
bot.), Heb. v. 12, such as are taught to νήπιοι, ib. 13; τὰ 
στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου, the rudiments with which mankind 
like νήπιοι were indoctrinated before the time of Christ, 
i.e. the elements of religious training, or the ceremonial 
precepts common alike to the worship of Jews and of 
Gentiles, Gal. iv. 3, 9, (and since these requirements on 
account of the difficulty of observing them are to be 
regarded as a yoke — cf. Acts xv. 10; Gal. v. 1 — those 
who rely upon them are said to be δεδουλωμένοι ὑπὸ τὰ 
or.); spec. the ceremonial requirements esp. of Jewish 
tradition, minutely set forth by theosophists and false 
teachers, and fortified by specious arzuments, Col. ii. 8, 
20. The phrase τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου is fully dis- 
eussed by Schneckenburger in the Theolog. Jahrbücher 
for 1848, Pt. iv. p. 445 sqq.; Neander in the Deutsche 
Zeitschrift f. Christl. Wissenschaft for 1850, p. 205 
sqq-; Aienlen in Reuss u. Cunitz’s Beitrüge zu d. theolog. 
Wissenschaften, vol. ii. p. 133 sqq.; E. Schaubach, Com- 
ment. qua exponitur quid στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου in N. T. 
sibi velint. (Meining. 1862).* 

ororxéw, -à; fut. crorynow; (mroiyos ἃ row,series); a. 
to proceed in a row, go in order: Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 34; 
metaph. to go on prosperously, to turn out well: of things, 
Eccl. xi. 6 for 3. b. to walk: with a local dat. 
[W. $31,1a. cf. p. 219 (205); yet cf. B. $ 133, 22 b.], 


589 








, 
στόμα 


τοῖς ἴχνεσί τινος, in the steps of one, i. 6. follow his ex- 
ample, Ro. iv. 12; to direct one’s life, to live, with a dat. 
of the rule [B. u. s.], εἰ πνεύματι . .. στοιχῶμεν, if the 
Holy Spirit animates us [see (do, I. 3 sub fin.], let us 
exhibit that control of the Spirit in our life, Gal. v. 25 ; 
τῷ κανόνι, acc. to the rule, Gal. vi. 16; τῷ αὐτῷ (where 
Rec. adds κανόνι), Phil. iii. 16 [W. $43, 5 d. ; cf. B. $ 140, 
18 fin.], (τῷ παραδείγματί τινος, Clem. hom. 10, 15); with 
a ptep. denoting the manner of acting, στοιχεῖς τ- νόμον 
φυλάσσων, so walkest as to keep the law [A. V. walkest 
orderly, keeping ete.], Acts xxi. 24. [On the word and 
its constr. see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 143. Cowr.: 
συ(ν)- στοιχέω.] * 

στολή, -ῆς, 7; (στέλλω [q. ν.] to prepare, equip, 2 pf. 
€ r0Aa) ; 1. an equipment (Aeschyl.). 2. an 
equipment in clothes, clothing; spec. a loose outer garment 
Jor men which extended to the feet [cf. Eng. stole (Dict. of 
Chris. Antiq. s. v.)], worn by kings (Jon. iii. 6), priests, 
and persons of rank: Mk.xii.38; xvi.5; Lk. xv. 22; 
xx. 46; Rev.vi 11; vii. 9, 13, [14*, 14° Rec.; xxii. 14 
LTTr WH]. (Trage. Xen., Plat.. sqq.; Sept. chiefly 
for333.) [Cf. Trench § 1.]* 

στόμα, -ros, τό, (apparently i. q. ropa, with o prefixed, 
fr. τέμνω, τέτομα, therefore prop. ‘cutting’ [or ‘cut’; so 
Etym. Magn. 728, 18; al. * calling’, etc.; but doubtful, 
cf. Curtius $ 226 b.; Vanicek p. 1141 and reff.]); fr. 
Hom. down; Hebr. n3; the mouth; 1. prop. the 
mouth as a part of the body: of man, Jn. xix. 29; Acts 
xi. 8; Rev.i. 16; iii. 16, and often; of animals, — as of 
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27; of a horse, Jas. 111. 3; Rev. ix. 17; 
of a serpent, Rev. xii. 15 sq.; xiii. 5; the jaws of a lion, 
2 Tim. iv. 17; Heb. xi. 33; Rev. xiii. 2. Since the 
thoughts of man's soul find verbal utterance by his 
mouth, καρδία (‘the heart’ or soul) and στόμα ‘the 
mouth’ are distinguished: Mt. xii. 34; xv. 8 Ree. fr. Is. 
xxix. 13; Ro. x.8,10; in phrases chiefly of a Hebra- 
istic character, the mouth (as the organ of speech) is 
mentioned in connection with words and speech, Mt. xxi. 
16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3), and words are said to proceed ἐκ τοῦ 
στόματος, Mt. iv. 4 (fr. Deut. viii.3); Lk. iv. 22; Eph. iv. 
29; Col. iii. 8; Jas. iii. 10; τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ τι, Jude 16; 
on the Hebr. phrase ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα, see ἀνοίγω, p. 485 
bot. ἡ ἄνοιξις τοῦ στ. Eph. vi. 19; στόμα πρὸς στόμα 
λαλῆσαι (MD-ON 7a 723, Num. xii. 8) lit. mouth (turned) 
to mouth, [A. V. face to face], 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 14, (τὸ 
στόμα πρὸς τὸ στόμα, of a kiss, Xen. mem. 2, 6, 32); 
God or the Holy Spirit is said to speak διὰ τοῦ στόματός 
τινος [cf. B. 183 (159) ], Lk. i. 70; Actsi. 16; iii. 18, 21; 
iv. 25; or a person is said to heara thing διὰ στόματός τ. 
Acts xv. 7; or ἀπὸ τοῦ στ. τ. from his own mouth i. e. what 
he has just said, Lk. xxii. 71; or ἐκ T. στ. Acts xxii. 14; 
θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τ. στ. τ. Lk. xi. 543; τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ or. [the 
breath of his mouth, see πνεῦμα, 1 b.], 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. 
(xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4); ἡ ῥομφαία rod στ. a fig. por- 
traying the destructive power of the words of Christ 
the judge, Rev. ii. 16; δόλος or ψεῦδος ἐν τῷ στ.. 1 Pet. 
ii. 22 and Rev. xiv. 5, (fr. Is. liii. 9); στόμα is put for 
‘statements’, declarations, in Mt. xviii. 16 and 2 Co. xiii. 


στόμαχος 


1, (Deut. xix. 15); Lk. xix. 22 (Eccl. viii. 2). διδόναι 
τινὶ στόμα, apt forms of speech (as distinguished from 
the substance of speech, ἡ σοφία), Lk. xxi. 15; στόμα 
for one who has begun (or is about) to speak, Ro. iii. 19 
(Ps. evi. (evii.) 42; cf. πᾶν γόνυ and πᾶσα γλῶσσα, Phil. 
ii. 10 sq. fr. Is. xlv. 23); metaph. the earth is said to 
open its mouth and καταπίνειν τι, Rev. xii. 16. 2. 
Like Lat. acies, στόμα μαχαίρας, the edge of the sword 
(2331-73, Gen. xxxiv. 26; [Josh. xix. 48; Jer. xxi. 7, 
ete.]; Judg. xviii. 27, ete.; 2 S. xv. 14 [but in the last 
two pass. the Sept. render the Hebr. phrase by or. 
ῥομφαίας. which (together with or. ξίφους) is the more 
common translation; cf. W. 18, 30; B. 320 (274) n.]}): 
Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34, (hence δίστομος, q. v. ; 528 of 
a sword, 2 S. ii. 26; xi. 25). 

στόμαχος, -ov, 6, (στόμα, q. V-); 1. the throat: 
Hom., al. 2. an opening, orifice, esp. of the stomach, 
Aristot. 3. in later writ. (as Plut., al.) the stomach: 
1 Tim. v. 23.* 

στρατεία, -as, 7, (στρατεύω), an expedition, campaign ; 
military service, warfare: Paul likens his contest with the 
difficulties that oppose him in the discharge of his apo- 
stolic duties to a warfare, 2 Co. x. 4 (where Tdf. στρατιᾶς, 
see his note); 1 Tim. i. 18. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)] * 

στράτευμα, -ros, τό, (arparevo), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down; a. an army: Mt. xxii. 7; Rev. ix. 16; xix. 
14 [cf. W. $59, 4 a.], 19. b. a band of soldiers [ R.V. 
soldiers]: Acts xxiii. 10, 27. c. body-guard, guards- 
men: plur. Lk. xxiii. 11 [R. V. soldiers ].* 

στρατεύω: Mid., pres. στρατεύομαι; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 
pers. sing. στρατεύσῃ (1 Tim. i. 18 T Tr txt. WH mrg.); 
(στρατός [related to στρωννύω, q. v.], an encampment, an 
army); fr. Hdt. down; to make a military expedition, to 
lead soldiers to war or to batile, (spoken of a commander); 
to do military duty, be on active service, be a soldier; in 
the N. T. only in the mid. (Grk. writ. use the act. and 
the depon. mid. indiscriminately ; cf. Passow s. v. 1 fin. ; 
[L. and S. s. v. I. 2]): prop. of soldiers, Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co. 
ix. 7; 2 Tim.ii.4; to fight, [.A. V. war]: trop. of the 
conflicts of the apostolic office, 2 Co. x. 3; with a kin- 
dred ace. [W. $32, 2; B. $ 131,5], τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν, 
1 Tim. i. 18 (ἱερὰν x. εὐγενῆ στρατείαν στρατεύσασθαι 
περὶ τῆς εὐσεβείας, 4 Macc. ix. 23); of passions that dis- 
quiet the soul, Jas. iv. 1; 1 Pet. ii. 11. [Coxr.: ἀντι- 
orparevopat. ] * 

στρατηγός, -o0, 6, (στρατός and ἄγω), fr. Hdt. down, 
Sept. chiefly for 135 [only plur. 07322]; 1. the 
commander of an army. 2. in the N. T. a civic 
commander, a governor, (the name of the duumviri or 
highest magistrates in the municipia and colonies; they 
had the power of administering justice in the less im- 
portant cases; of τῆς πόλεως στρατηγοί, Artem. oneir. 4, 
49; of civil magistrates as early as Hdt. 5, 38; [see reff. 
in Meyer on Acts xvi. 20; L. and S. s. v. II. 2sq.; cf. 
Farrar, St. Paul, i. excurs. xvi.]): plur. [R. V. magis- 
trates (after A.V.), with mrg. Gr. pretors], Acts xvi. 20, 
22, 35 sq. [38]. 3. arpar. τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ‘captain of the 
temple’ [ A.V.], i. e. the commander of the Levites who 


590 








στρέφω 


kept guard in and around the temple (Joseph. antt. 20, 
6, 2; [B. D. s. v. Captain, 3; Edersheim, The Temple ete. 
ch. vii., 2ed. p. 119 sq.]) : Acts iv. 1; v. 24; plur. Lk. xxii. 
52; simply [ A. V. captain], Acts v. 26; Lk. xxii. 4.* 

στρατιά, -ds, ἡ, (στρατός [cf. orparevw]), fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down, Sept. for N2Y ; 1. an army, band 
of soldiers. 2. sometimes in the poets i. q. στρατεία, 
as Arstph. eqq. 587 (ἐν arpartais re καὶ μάχαις), 2 Co. x. 
4 Tdf. after the best codd. ((see his note; cf. L. and S. 
s. v. II.]; Passow s. v. στρατεία, fin.). 3. in the 
N. T. ἡ οὐράνιος στρατιά, or ἡ στρατ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Hebr. 
DWT N23), the host of heaven (see δύναμις, f.), i. e. a. 
troops of angels (1 K. xxii. 19; Neh. ix. 6): Lk.ii. 13. — b. 
the heavenly bodies, stars of heaven, (so called on account 
of their number and their order): Acts vii. 42 (2 Chr. 
xxxiil. 3, 5; Jer. viii. 2, etc.).* 

στρατιώτης, -ov, 6, (fr. erpariós [(cf. στρατεύων], like 
ἡλιώτης, κλοιώτης, ἠπειρώτης), fr. Hdt. down, a (common) 
soldier: Mt. viii. 9; Mk. xv. 16; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix. 
2; Acts x. 7; xii. 4, ete. ; with the addition of Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ. metaph., a champion of the cause of Christ, 
2 Tim. ii. 3. 

στρατολογέω, -@: to be a erparoAóyos (and this fr. 
στρατός and λέγω), to gather (collect) an army, to enlist 
soldiers: ὁ στρατολογήσας, [he that enrolled (him) as a 
soldier], of the commander, 2 Tim. ii. 4. (Diod., Dion. 
Hal., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

στρατοπεδάρχης, -ov, 6, (στρατόπεδον and ἄρχω), [cf. 
B. 73 (64)]; a. the commander of a camp and army, 
a military tribune: Dion. Hal. 10, 36 ; Leian. hist. conser. 
22; [Joseph. b. j. 2, 19, 4]. b. Praetorian prefect, 
commander of the praetorian cohorts, i. e. captain of the 
Roman emperor's body-guard: Aets xxviii. 16 [L'T 
Tr WH om. the cl, see Abbot in B. D., Am. ed., s. v. 
Captain of the Guard]. "There were two praetorian pre- 
fects, to whose custody prisoners sent bound to the em- 
peror were consigned: Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 6; Plin. epp. 
10, 65 (57). [See B. D. Am. ed. u. s.; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Phil. p. 7 sq.]* 

[στρατοπέδ-αρχος, -ov, 6; see the preceding word. The 
dat. -y@ is the reading of some codd. (cf. WH rejected 
mrg.) in Acts xxviii. 16; cf. ἑκατοντάρχης, init.*] 

στρατό-πεδον, -ov, τό, (στρατός, and πέδον a plain), fr. 
Hdt. down ; a. a military camp. b. soldiers 
in camp, an army: Lk. xxi. 20.* 

στρεβλόω, -à ; (στρεβλός [fr. στρέφω] twisted, Lat. tor- 
tuosus; hence στρέβλη, fem., an instrument of torture) ; 
to twist, turn awry, (Hdt.) ; to torture, put to the rack, 
(Arstph., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 3 Macc. iv. 14); 
metaph. to pervert, of one who wrests or tortures lan- 
guage to a false sense, 2 Pet. iii. 16.* 

στρέφω: 1 aor. ἔστρέψα; Pass, pres. στρέφομαι 2 
aor. ἐστράφην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 327 also for 
33D, ete. ; to turn, turn round: τί run, to turn a thing to 
one, Mt. v. 39, and T Tr WH in xxvii. 3 [for ἀποστρέφω, 
to bring back; see ἀποστρέφω, 2]; reflexively (W. $38, 
1; B. $130, 4), to turn one's self (i.e. to turn the back 
to one; used of one who no longer cares for another), 


στρηνιάω 


Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; τὶ εἴς 71, i. 4. μεταστρέφω, 
to turn one thing into another, Rev. xi.6. Pass. reflex- 


ively, fo turn one’s self: στραφείς foll. by a finite verb, | 


having turned etc., Mt. vii.6; [ix. 22 L T Tr WH]; xvi. 
23; LK. vii.9; ix. 55; xiv. 25; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 38; xx. 
16; στραφεὶς πρός twa, foll. by a fin. verb, [turning unto 
ete., or turned unto and ete.], Lk. vii. 44; x. 21 (22) [R* L 
T], 23; xxiii. 28; στρέφεσθαι eis τὰ ὀπίσω, to turn one's 
self back, Jn. xx. 14 ; eis rà ἔθνη. Acts xiii. 46; ἐστράφη- 
cav (ev LT Tr WH) rais καρδίαις αὐτῶν eis Αἴγυπτον, 


[R.V.they turned back in their hearts unto Egypt] i.e. to | 


their condition there, Acts vii. 39; absol. and trop. to 
turn one’s self sc. from one’s course of conduct, i. e. to 


change one’s mind [cf. W. u.s.]: Mt. xviii. 3 and LT | 


Tr WH in Jn. xii. 40. 
kara-, peta-, a v(v)-, vro- στρέφω. * 

στρηνιάω, -@: 1 aor ἐστρηνίασα; (fr. στρῆνος, q. v.) ; a 
word used in middle and later Comedy for τρυφᾶν 
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 381; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 
475 sq.; W.25]); to be wanton, to live luxuriously: Rev. 
xviii. 7,9. [Comp.: κατα-στρηνιάω.] * 

στρῆνος, -ovs, τό, [allied w. στερεός, 4. v.], excessive 
strength which longs to break forth, over-strength ; luxury, 


[R. V. wantonness (mrg. luzury)]: Rev. xviii. 3 (see | 
δύναμις, d.) ; for 13N2, arrogance, 2 K. xix. 285 eager de- | 


sire, Lycophr. 438.* 

στρουθίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of στρουθός. a little bird, esp. 
of the sparrow sort, a sparrow: Mt. x. 29, 31; Lk. xii. 
6 sq. (Aristot. h. a. 5, 2 p. 5395, 33; 9, 7 p. 613%, 33; 
Sept. for Wax.) [Cf. Tristram in B.D. s. v. Sparrow; 
Survey of West. Palest., ‘Fauna and Flora’, p. 67 sq.]* 

στρωννύω, or στρώννυμι : impf.3 pers. plur. ἐστρώννυον 
[ef. B. 45 (39)]; laor. ἔστρωσα; pf. pass. ptep. ἐστρω- 


μένος ; (by metathesis fr. στόρνυμι, στορέννυμι, and this | 


fr. STOPEQ; [cf. Lat. sterno, struo, etc.; Eng. strew, 
straw, etc.]; see Curtius $ 227) ; to spread: ἱμάτια ἐν τῇ 
ὁδῷ, Mt. xxi. 8; εἰς τ. ὁδόν, Mk. xi. 8, (πέδον πεδάσμασι, 
Aeschyl Ag. 909; εἵμασι πόρον, ib. 921). sc. τὴν κλίνην 
(which Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down often add, and also 
λέχος, λέκτρον, etc. [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. $130, 57) τινί, 
Acts ix. 34 [ A. V. make thy bed]; to spread with couches 
or divans τὸ dváyawov, pass. [ A. V. furnished], Mk. xiv. 
15; Lk. xxii. 12. [Cowr.: xara-, ómo- στρώννυμι. * 

στυγητός, -óv, (arvyéo to hate), hated, Aeschyl. Prom. 
592; detestable [ X. V. hateful]: Tit. iii. 3; στυγητὸν x. 

, θεομισητὸν πρᾶγμα, of adultery, Philo de decal. § 24 fin. ; 

€pos, Heliod. 5, 29.* 

eTvyváto; 1 aor. ptep. στυγνάσας ; (crvyvós sombre, 
gloomy); to be sad, to be sorrowful: prop. ἐπί τινι [ R.V. 
his countenance fell at etc.], Mk. x. 22; metaph. of the 
sky covered with clouds [ A. V. to be iowering], Mt. xvi. 
3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]. 
Pers. 470; Sept. thrice for Daw, to be amazed, aston- 
ished, ἐπί τινα, Ezek. xxvii. 35; xxxii. 10; στυγνότης, of 
the gloominess of the sky, Polyb. 4, 21, 1.) * 


[Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, δια-, ék-, emt-, | 





(Schol on Aeschyl. | 


στύλος [RG WH (Trin 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. x. 1)], | 


more correctly στῦλος [so L T (Tr in Gal.ii.9; Rev. iii. 
12)]; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin. [cf. Chandler 


| 


591 σύ 


§§ 274, 275; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 43], -ov, 6, [fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], Sept. often for 7319)’, a pillar, 
column: στῦλοι πυρός, pillars of fire, i.e. flames rising 
like columns, Rev. x. 1; ποιήσω αὐτὸν στῦλον ἐν τῷ ναῷ 
τοῦ θεοῦ μου; i. e. (dropping the fig.) I will assign him a 
firm and abiding place in the everlasting kingdom of 


| God, Rey. iii. 12; used of persons to whose eminence 


and strength the stability and authority of any institu- 
tion or organization are due, Gal. ii. 9 [where cf. Bp. 
Lghtft.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 2 and the note in Geb- 
hardt and Harnack, (στῦλοι οἴκων εἰσὶ παῖδες ἄρσενες, 
Eur. Iph. T. 57; exx. fr. [Jewish writ. are given by 
Schoettgen (on Gal. 1. c.) and fr.] eccles. writ. by Suicer, 
Thes. ii. p. 1045 sq.; columen reipublicae, Cic. pro Sest. 
8, 19, and often elsewh. in Lat. auth.); ἃ prop or sup- 
port: τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Tim. iii. 15.* 

Στωϊκός [( WH Στωικός), L T Στοῖκός, see Tdf.’s note 
on Acts as below; WH. App. p. 152], -7, τόν, Stoic, per- 
taining to the Stoie philosophy, the author of which, 
Zeno of Citium, taught at Athens in the portico called 
ἡ ποικίλη στοά: of Στωϊκοὶ φιλόσοφοι, Acts xvii. 18. 
[(Diog. Laért. 7, 5; al.)]* 

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. 
Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, acc. σέ (which oblique cases are 
enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός ce is 
written [uniformly in Rec. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. 
(exc. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts 


| xxiii. 30), in Lehm. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; 


xxi. 92, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; 
Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 
30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 


| 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. 


[W. $6, 3; B. 31 (27)]) ; plur. ὑμεῖς, etc. ; Lat. tu, etc., 
vos, ete.; thou, etc., ye, ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς 
are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ 
Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Lcian. dial. deor. 2, 1), 
Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, 
etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39; — or when the pron. 
has a noun or a ptcp. added to it in apposition in order to 
define it more sharply, as σὺ ᾿Ιουδαῖος ὧν (thou, being a 
Jew), Jn. iv. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 14; ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὄντες, Mt. vii. 
11;— or when several are addressed who are at the 
same time particularized, ov... σύ, Jas. ii. 3; also in 
antithesis, Mt. iii. 14; vi. 17; xi. 3; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. 
xvi 7; Jn. ii. 10; iii. 2; Acts x. 15; 1 Co. iii. 23; Jas. 
ii. 18, and very often; sometimes the antithetic term is 
suppressed, but is easily understood from the context: 
εἰ σὺ ei, if it be thou, and not an apparition, Mt. xiv. 28 ; 
add, Lk. xv. 31; xvii. 8, ete.; —or when a particle is 
added, as σὺ οὖν (at the close of an argument, when the 
discourse reverts to the person to be directly addressed), 
Lk. iv. 7; Jn. viii. 5; Acts xxiii. 21; 2 Tim.ii.1, 3; σὺ 
δέ (in contrasts), Lk. ix. 60; 2 Tim. iii. 10; "Lits ns 
Heb. i. 11, ete.; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mt. xxi. 13; Jas. ii. 6; xal σύ, 
and thou, thou also, thou too, Mt. xi. 23; xxvi. 69, 73; 
Lk. x.15; xix. 19, 42; xxii. 58; plur., Mt. xv. 3, 16; Lk. 
xvii.10; before the 2d pers. of the verb where the per- 
son is to be emphasized (like the Germ. du, thr eben, du 


συγγένεια 


da, ‘it is thou,’ ‘thou art the very man,’ ete.), σὺ et, Mt. 
xxvii. 11; Mk. xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3; Jn. i. 19; ili. 10; iy. 
12; viii. 53; Acts xxiii. 3, etc.; plur. Lk. ix. 55 Rec. ; 
σὺ λέγεις, εἶπας, Mt. xxvi. 25; xxvii. 11; Mk. xv. 2; it 
is used also without special emphasis ([cef. B. $ 129, 12, 
and] see ἐγώ, 1), Mk. xiv. 68; Jn. viii. 13; Acts vii. 28, etc. 
The genitives god and ὑμῶν, joined to substantives, 
have the force of a possessive, and are placed — some- 
times after the noun, as τὸν πόδα cov, Mt. iv. 6; τοὺς 
“(ἀδελφοὺς ὑμῶν, Mt. v. 47, and very often ; — sometimes 
before the noun (see ἐγώ, 3 b.), as σοῦ ai ἁμαρτίαι, Lk. vii. 
48; σοῦ τῆς vedrnros, 1 Tim. iv. 12; ὑμῶν δὲ καὶ τρίχες, 
Mt. x. 30; add, Mk. x. 43 [here Rec. after]; Lk. xii. 
30; Jn. xvi. 6; Ro. xiv. 16; 2 Co. i. 24 [here now be- 
fore, now after];— sometimes between the article and 
noun, as τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, 2 Co. vii. 7; add, 2 Co. viii. 
14 (13), 14; xiii. 9; Phil. i. 19, 25; 11. 30; Col.i.8. ἔσται 
ov πάντα (πᾶσα), Lk. iv. 7 [cf. B. $ 132, 11, L a.]. It 
is added to the pronoun αὐτός: σοῦ αὐτῆς, Lk. ii. 35. 
On the phrase τί ἐμοὶ kai σοί, see ἐγώ,4. [(Fr. Hom.on.)] 

συγγένεια, -as, 7, (συγγενής), fr. Eur. and Thuc. down; 
[Sept.] ; a. kinship, relationship. b. kindred, 
relations collectively, family: Lk.i.61; Acts vii. 3, 14.* 

συγγενής. -és, [acc. sing. συγγενῆ, and in Rom. xvi. 11 
Treg. συγγενῆν ; see ἄρσην], dat. plur. συγγενέσιν and 
(in Mk. vi. 4 T Tr [WH, also in Lk. ii. 44 WI] ace. to 
a barbarous declens., cf. [1 Maec. x. 89] B. 25 (22)) 
ovyyevedow, (σύν and γένος), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl. down; 
Sept.], of the same kin, akin to, related by blood, (Plin. 
congener): Mk. vi. 4; Lk. ii. 44; xxi. 165 τινός, Lk. [i. 
58]; xiv. 12; Jn. xviii. 26; Acts x. 24; Ro. xvi. 7, 11, 21, 
[see below]; 7 ovyy. Lk. i. 36 R G Tr (Lev. xviii. 14) ; 
in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman : 
Ro. ix. 3 [(so some take the word in xvi. 7, 11, 21, above; 
cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philippians p. 175) ].* 

συγγενίς, -idos, ἡ, (see the preceding word), a later Grk. 
word ([Plut. quaest. Rom. 6]; like evyevis, cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 451 sq.; cf. W. 69 (67) ; Kühner i. p. 419 Anm. 
8), a kinswoman: τινός, Lk. i. 36 L'T WH.* 

evy-yvópn [ T WH ovvy., cf. σύν, 11. fin.], -ης, ἡ, (ovy- 
γιγνώσκω, to agree with, to pardon; see γνώμη); fr. [Soph. 
and] Hdt. down, pardon, indulgence: κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ 
‘ar’ ἐπιταγήν, by way of concession or permission, not by 
way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6.* 

συγ-κάθημαι [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, I. fin.)]; fr. Hat. 
down; [Sept.]; to sit together, to sit with another: μετά 
τινος, Mk. xiv. 54; τινί, with one, Acts xxvi. 30.* 

συγ-καθίζω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. συν- 
εκάθισα ; (see καθίζω) ; a. trans. fo cause to sit down 
together, place together: τινά, foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the 
place, Eph. ii. 6. b. intrans. to sit down together: 
Lk. xxii. 55 [where Lehm. txt. περικαθ.]. (Xen., Aris- 
tot., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

συγ-κακοπαθέω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ], -6 : 1 aor. 
impv. συγκακοπάθησον ; (see κακοπαθέω) ; to suffer hard- 
ships together with one: 2 Tim. ii. 3 L T Tr WH; with a 
dat. com. added, τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, for the benefit of the gos- 
pel, to further it, 2 Tim. i. 8. (Eccles. writ.) * 


59 





9 συγκεράννυμε, 


συγ-κακουχέω [TWH συν- (cf. σύν, I. fin.)], -ὦ : pres. 
pass. inf. -χεῖσθαι ; to treat ill with another; pass. to be 
ill-treated in company with, share persecutions or come 
into a fellowship of ills: τινί, with one, Heb. xi. 25. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

συγ-καλέω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IH. fin.) ], -ὦ ; 1 aor. συν- 
εκάλεσα; Mid., pres. συγκαλοῦμαι ; 1 aor. συνεκαλεσάμην ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept.for N3p ; to call together, assemble: 
twas, Lk. xv. 6 [here Tr mrg. has pres. mid.]; τὴν σπεῖ- 
ραν, Mk. xv. 16; τὸ συνέδριον, Acts v. 21; mid. to call to- 
gether to one’s self [cf. B. $ 135, 5]: τινάς, Lk. ix.1; xv. 
[6 Tr mrg.], 9 [RG L Trtxt.]; xxii. 13; Acts x. 24; 
xxviii. 17.* 

συγ-καλύπτω [ (cf. σύν, TT. fin.) ]: pf. pass. ptep. συγκεκα- 
Auppevos; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1322; to cover on all 
sides, to conceal entirely, to cover up completely: ri, pass., 
Lk. xii. 2.* 

συγ-κάμπτω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ]: 1 aor. impv. 
σύγκαμψον ; to bend together, to bend completely : τὸν νῶτόν 
twos, [ A. V. to bow down one's back] i. e. metaph. to sub- 
ject one to error and hardness of heart, a fig. taken from 
the bowing of the back by captives compelled to pass 
under the yoke, Ro. xi. 10, fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. 
(Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) * 

cvy-karo-Batvo [TWH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)]: 2 aor. 
ptep. plur. συγκαταβάντες ; 10 go down with: of those who 
descend together from a higher place to a lower, as from 
Jerusalem to Czesarea, Acts xxv. 5. (Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 
18; Sap.x. 14; Aeschyl., Eur., Thue., Polyb., Plut., al. ; 
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 398; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 
485].)* 

cvy-kará-0ecvs [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ], -ews, 7, 
(συγκατατίθημι, q.v.), prop. a putting together or joint 
deposit (of votes) ; hence approval, assent, agreement, [ Cic. 
acad. 2, 12, 37 adsensio atque adprobalio] : 2 Co. vi. 16. 
(Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

συγ-κατα-τίθημι [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ]: Mid., 
pres. ptep. συγκατατιθέμενος or pf. ptep. συγκατατεθειμένος 
(see below) ; to deposit together with another ; Mid. prop. 
to deposit one’s vote in the urn with another (ψῆφον τιθέναι), 
hence to consent to, agree with, vote for: τῇ βουλῇ κ. τῇ 
πράξει τινός, Lk. xxiii. 51 [here L mrg. T Tr mrg. WH 
mrg. pres. ptep., al. pf. ptep.]. (Ex. xxiii. 1, 32; Plat. 
Gorg. p. 501 c., Isae., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

συγ-κατα-ψηφίζω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.) ]: 1 aor. 
pass. συγκατεψηφίσθην ; 1. by depositing (kara) 
a ballot in the urn (i. e. by voting for) to assign one 
a place among (av), to vote one a place among: τινὰ 
2. mid. to vote against with 


Not 


μετά τινων, Acts i. 26. 
others, i.e. to condemn with others: Plut. Them. 21. 
found elsewhere.* 

συγ-κεράννυμι [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)]: 1 aor. 
cvveképaga ; pf. pass. ptep. συγκεκραμένος and in L T Tr 
WH συγκεκερασμένος [see kepávvupa, init.]; fr. [Aeschyl., 
Soph.], Hdt. down; to mix together, commingles to unite: 
συνεκ. τὸ σῶμα, caused the several parts to combine into 
an organie structure, which is the body, [A.V. tempered 
the body together], 1 Co. xii. 24; τί τινι, to unite one 


“συγκινέω 


thing to another: οὐκ ὠφέλησεν . . . μὴ συγκεκραμένος 
[so ΒΑ Τ WH mrg., but L Tr WH txt. -vous] - - - ἀκού- 
caow, ‘the word heard did not profit them, because it 
had not united itself by faith to [cf. W. $31, 10; B. 
§ 133, 13] them that heard,’ i. e. because the hearers had 
not by their faith let it find its way into their minds 
and made it their own; [or, acc. to the text of L Tr WH 
(R. V.), ‘because they had not been united by faith with 
them that heard '], Heb. iv. 2.* 
cvy-kwéo, -ῶ : 1 aor.3 pers. plur. συνεκίνησαν ; to move 
together with others [Aristot.]; to throw into commotion, 
excite, stir up: τὸν λαόν, Acts vi. 12. (Polyb., Plut., 
Longin., al.) * 
συγ-κλείω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. συν- 
“ἔκλεισα ; Pass., pres. ptep. συγ-(συν-)κλειόμενος, Gal. iii. 23 
LTTrWH; but RG ibid. pf. ptep. -κεκλεισμένος ; fr. Hdt. 
down; Sept. chiefly for 139 and W107, fo shut up, (Lat. 
con cludo), i. e. a. to shut up together, enclose, [so 
s. V. σύν, II. 2; but others (e.g. Fritzsche as below; 
Meyer on Gal. iii. 22) would make the σύν- always 
intensive, as in b.]: a shoal of fishes in a net, Lk. v. 
6. b. to shut up on all sides, shut up completely; 
“τινὰ εἴς τινα or τι; so to deliver one up to the power 
of a person or thing that he is completely shut in, as it 
were, without means of escape: τινὰ eis ἀπείθειαν, Ro. 
xi. 32 (εἰς ἀγῶνα, Polyb. 3, 63, 3; εἰς τοιαύτην ἀμηχανίαν 
συγκλεισθεὶς ᾿Αντίγονος μετεμέλετο, Diod. 19,19; οὐ συνέ- 
κλεισάς με εἰς χεῖρας ἐχθροῦ, Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 9; τὰ κτήνη 
εἰς θάνατον, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. 
ad Rom. ii. p. 545 sq.); also τινὰ ὑπό τι, under the power 
-of anything, i. e. so that he is held completely subject 
to it: ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν, Gal. iii. 22 (the Scripture has shut 
up or subjected, i. e. declared them to be subject); sc. 
ὑπὸ νόμον, with the addition of εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν 
«ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, ib. 23 (see above ad init.) ; on these 
words see eis, B. IT. 3 c. y. p. 185" bot.* 
συγ-κληρο-νόμος [ T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IH. fin.) ], -ov, 6, 7, 
a fellow-heir, a joint-heir, (ἀνεψιὸς καὶ συγκληρονόμος. Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium $10), (see κληρονύμος 1 b.) : Ro. viii. 17; 
Eph. iii. 6; one who obtains something assigned to him- 
self with others, a joint participant (see κληρονόμος, 2) : 
with the gen. of the thing, Heb. xi.9; 1 Pet. iii. 7. Not 
found elsewhere.* 
συγ-κοινωνέω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -6; 1 aor. 
subj. 2 pers. plur. συγκοινωνήσητε, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. 
συγκοινωνήσαντες ; to become a partaker together with oth- 
ers, or to have fellowship with a thing : with a dat. of the 
thing, Eph. v. 11; Phil. iv. 14; Rev. xviii. 4. (with a 
gen. of the thing, Dem. p. 1299, 20; τινί τινος, Dio Cass. 
37,41; 77, 16.)* 
συγ-κοινωνός [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ], -óv, partici- 
pant with others in (anything), joint partner: with a gen. 
of the thing [cf. W. $30, 8a.], Ro. xi. 17; 1 Co. ix. 23; 
with the addition of the gen. of the pers. with whom one 
is partaker of a thing, Phil.i. 7; foll. by ἐν with a dat. 
of the thing, Rev. i. 9.* 
ovy-kopifw: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. συνεκόμισαν; 1. 
to carry or bring together, to collect [see σύν, II. 2]; to 
38 


598 





cwyxéo 


house crops, gather into granaries: Hdt., Xen., Diod., 
Plut., al.; Job v. 26. 2. to carry with others, help in 
carrying out, the dead to be burned or buried (Soph. 
Aj. 1048; Plut. Sull. 38) ; to bury: Acts viii. 2.* 

συγ-κρίνω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, I. fin.) ]; 1 aor. inf. συγ- 
κρῖναι; 1. to join together fitly, compound, combine, 
(Epicharm. in Plut. mor. p.110a.; Plat., Aristot., al.): 
πνευματικοῖς πνευματικά, 1 Co. ii. 13 (for Paul, in deliver- 
ing the things disclosed to him by the Holy Spirit in 
speech derived not from rhetorical instruction but re- 
ceived from the same divine Spirit, ‘combines spiritual 
things with spiritual’, adapts the discourse to the 
subject; other interpretations are refuted by Meyer 
ad loc.; πνευματικοῖς is neut.; [but others would take it 
as masc. and give ovyk. the meaning to interpret (R. V. 
marg. interpreting spiritual things to spiritual men) ; cf. 
Sept. Gen. xl. 8, 16, 22; xli. 12, 15; Judg. vii. 15; Dan. 
v. 12, etc.; see Heinrici in Meyer 6te Aufl.]). 2. acc. 
to a use foreign to the earlier Greeks (who used zapa- 
βάλλω), but freq. fr. the time of Aristotle on (cf. Passow 
s. v. 2; [L. and S. s. v. IT.-]; Zob. ad Phryn. p. 278 sq.; 
[W. 23 (22)]), to compare: ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς, 2 Co. x. 12 
(Sap. vii. 29; xv. 18).* 

cvy-kórro [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; [fr. Hdt. 
down]; to bend completely forwards, to be bowed together, 
[ef. σύν, II. 3]: by disease, Lk. xiii. 11. ([Job ix. 27]; 
Sir xut xix226-)8 Ἔ 

συγκυρία, -ας, 7, (συγκυρεῖν, to happen, turn out), acci- 
dent, chance: κατὰ συγκυρίαν, by chance, accidentally, 
Lk. x. 81. (Hippoer.; eccles. and Byzant. writ.; Grk. 
writ. fr. Polyb. down more com. use συγκύρησις and συγ- 
κύρημα [ W. 24].) * 

cvy-xaípo [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)]; impf. συνέχαι- 
pov; 2 aor. συνεχάρην [ pass. as act., so Veitch (8. v. χαίρω) 
ete.; al.act., after the analogy of verbs in -«]; to rejoice 
with, take part in another's joy, (Aeschyl., Arstph., Xen., 
al.): with a dat. of the pers. with whom one rejoices, 
Lk. i. 58 (cf. 14); xv. 6,9; with a dat. of the thing, 1 Co. 
xiii. 6; to rejoice together, of many, 1 Co. xii. 26; to con- 
gratulate (Aeschin., Polyb., [Plut.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 
Phil. as below; 3 Macc. i. 8; Barn. ep. 1, 3 (and Muller 
ad loc.)]): with the dat. of the pers. Phil. ii. 17 sq.* 

cvy-xéo, avy-xóvo, and συγ-χύννω, [T WH. ovr (ct. 
σύν, II. fin.)] (see ékyéo, init.): impf., 3 pers. sing. συνέ- 
xuve (Acts ix. 22 R G L Tr, -xvvvev T WH), 3 pers. plur. 
συνέχεον (Acts xxi. 27 RG T Tr WH [but some would 
make this a 2 aor., see reff. s. v. ἐκχέω, init.]); 1 aor. 
3 pers. plur. συνέχεαν (Acts xxi. 27 L [see ἐκχέω, init. ]); 
Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. cvy(T WH συν-)χύννεται (Acts 
xxi. 31 L T Tr WH); pf. 3 pers. sing. συγκέχυται (Acts 
xxi. 31 RG), ptep. fem. cvy(T WH συν-)κεχυμένη (Acts 
xix. 33 RGL T Tr WH); 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. συνεχύθη 
(Acts ii. 6 RGL T Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; to pour 
together, commingle: ἣν ἡ ἐκκλησία συγκεχυμένη, was irreg- 
ularly assembled [4]. ‘in eonfusion'], Acts xix. 32; to 
disturb, τινά, the mind of one, to stir up to tumult or out- 
break, Acts xxi. 27, 31; to confound or bewilder, Acts ii. 


6201x022: 


συγχράομαι 


συγ-Χράομαι [T WH συν-]. -ógat; to use with any one, 
use jointly, (Polyb., Diod., [Philo]); with the dat. of a 
pers., to associate with, to have dealings with: Jn. iv. 9 
[ Tdf. om. WH br. the cl. οὐ yàp . . . Xapap.].* 

συγ-χύνω and συγχύννω, see avyxéo. 

σύγχυσις, -ews, 7, (συγχέω), [fr. Eur., Thuc., Plat. 
down], confusion, disturbance: of riotous persons, Acts 
xix. 29) (5. τν Δ 

ovtaw [LT Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; fut. συ- 
ζήσω; to live together with one [cf. σύν, I. 1]: of physical 
life on earth, opp. to συναποθανεῖν, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; τῷ Χριστῷ, 
to live a new life in union with the risen Christ, i. e. a 
life dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 8, cf. De Wette [or Meyer 
ad loc.]; to live a blessed life with him after death, 
2 Tim. ii. 11. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) * 

συ-ζεύγνυμι: 1 aor. συνέζευξα; fr. Eur. and Xen. down; 
prop. to fasten to one yoke, yoke together: ἵππους, Xen. 
Cyr. 2, 2, 26; trop. to join together, unite : τί or τινά, of the 
marriage tie, Mt. xix. 6; Mk. x. 9, (νόμος συζευγνὺς ἄνδρα 
καὶ γυναῖκα. Xen. oec. 7, 30, and often so in Grk. writ.).* 

συ-ζητέω [LT Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, IH. fin.)], -ó; impf. 
3 pers. sing. συνεζήτει; a. to seek or examine together 
(Plat.). b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute, [ques- 
tion (A. V. often)]: absol, [Mk. xii. 28]; Lk.xxiv. 15; 
τινί, with one, Mk. viii. 11; ix. 14 [R GL]; Acts vi. 9; 
in the same sense πρός twa, Mk. ix. [14 T Tr WH], 16 
(where read πρὸς αὐτούς, not with Rec."*7*'7 (x πρὸς ab- 
τούς [see αὑτοῦ, p. 87]); Actsix. 29; πρὸς ἑαυτούς [L Tr 
WH mrg. or mp. αὑτούς R^*7* G] equiv. to πρὸς ἀλλή- 
λους, Mk. i. 27 [where T WH txt. simply αὐτούς as subj.]; 
πρὸς ἑαυτούς with the addition of an indirect quest. τὸ ris 
ete. with the optat. [cf. B. $ 139, 60; W. $ 41 b.4c.], 
Lk. xxii. 23; ri, with the indic., Mk. ix. 10.* 

συ-ζήτησις [cvv- L Tr mrg. (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ews, ἡ, 
(συζητέω), mutual questioning, disputation, discussion : 
Acts xv. 2 Ree. 7 RG L Trmrg.; xxviii. 29 yet GLT 
Tr WH om. the vs. (Cic. ad fam. 16, 21, 4; Philo, opif. 
mund. § 17 fin. [(var. lect.) ; quod det. pot. § 1]; legg. 
alleg. 3, 45.) * 

συ-ητητής [L T Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, I. fin.) ], -o9, 6, 
(συζητέω), a disputer, i. e. a learned disputant, sophist : 
1 Co. i. 30. (Ignat. ad Eph. 18 [quotation ].) * 

c é-tvyos [L T Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, IH. fin.) ], -ov, (συζεύ- 
γνυμι), yoked together; used by Grk. writ. [fr. Aeschyl. 
down] of those united by the bond of marriage, rela- 
tionship, office, labor, study, business, or the like; hence, 
a yoke-fellow, consort, comrade, colleague, partner. Ac- 
cordingly, in Phil. iv. 3 most interpreters hold that by 
the words γνήσιε σύζυγε Paul addresses some particular 
associate in labor for the gospel. But as the word is 
found in the midst of (three) proper names, other 
expositors more correctly take it also as a proper name 
(WH mrg. Svvgvye]; see Laurent, Ueber Synzygos in 
the Zeitschr. f. d. Luther. Theol. u. Kirche for 1865, p. 
lsqq. [reprinted in his Neutest. Studien, p. 134 sq.]); 
and Paul, alluding (as in Philem. 11) to the meaning of 
the word as an appellative, speaks of him as *a genuine 
Synzygus’, i. e. a colleague in fact as well as in name. 


594 


G'UXaryaryéo 


Cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc.; [Hackett in B. D. Am. 
ed. s. v. Yoke-fellow ].* 

συϊζωο-ποιέω, -@: 1 aor. συνεζωοποίησα ; to make one 
alive together with another (Vulg. convivifico) : Chris- 
tians,7@ Χριστῷ [ L br. adds ἐν, so WH mrg.], with Christ, 
Eph. ii. 5; σὺν τῷ Xp. Col. ii. 13; in both these pass. 
new moral life is referred to.* 

συκάμινος, -ov, ἡ, Hebr. Τρ (of which only the plur. 
o'ope is found in the O. T., 1 K. x. 27; Is. ix. 10; Am. 
vii. 14; once NiNpw), a sycamine, a tree having the form 
and foliage of the mulberry, but fruit resembling the fig 
(i. q. συκομορέα, q. v. [but Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the 
Bible, 2d ed. p. 396 sq.; BB.DD., ete., regard the syca- 
mine as the black-mulberry tree, and the sycomore as 
the fig-mulberry]): Lk. xvii. 6. (Often in Theophr. ; 
Strab. 17, p. 823; Diod. 1,34; Dioscorid. 1, 22.) [Cf. 
Vanicek, Fremdworter, p. 54; esp. Lów, Aram. Pflan- 
zennamen, § 332, cf. $338; BB.DD.u.s.; ‘Bible Edu- 
cator* iv. 343; Pickering, Chron. Hist. of Plants, pp- 
106, 258.]* 

συκῆ, -ῆς, 7, (contr. fr. συκέα), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 
MINA, a fig-tree: Mt. xxi. 19-21; xxiv. 32; Mk. xi. 13, 
20sq.; xiii. 28; Lk.xiii.6sq.; xxi.29; Jn.i. 48 (49), 
50 (51); Jas. iii. 12; Rev. vi. 18. [Cf. Lów, Aram. Pflan- 
zennamen, $335.]* 

συκο-μορέα (Lehm. συκομωρέα, [ Rec. *** -μωραία, cf. 
Tdf.’s note on Lk. as below; WH. App. pp. 152 and 
151]), τας, 7, (fr. σῦκον and popea the mulberry tree), 
i. 4- συκάμινος [but see the word, and reff.], a sycomore- 
tree: Lk. xix. 4. (Geop. 10, 3, 7.) * 

σῦκον, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. njwn, a jig, the: 
ripe fruit of ἡ συκῇ [q. v.]: Mt. vii. 16; Mk. xi. 13; Lk. 
vi. 44; Jas. iii. 12.* 

συκοφαντέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐσυκοφάντησα; (fr. συκοφάντης, 
and this fr. σῦκον ‘fig’, and φαίνω ‘to show’. At Athens 
those were called συκοφάνται whose business it was to. 
inform against any one whom they might detect export- 
ing figs out of Attica; and as sometimes they seem to. 
have extorted money from those loath to be exposed, the 
name συκοφάντης from the time of Aristophanes down 
was a general term of opprobrium to designate a malig- 
nant informer, a calumniator; a malignant and base ac- 
cuser from love of gain, [but cf. L. and S. s. v.]; hence 
the verb συκοφαντῶ signifies) 1. to accuse wrong- 
fully, to calumniate, to attack by malicious devices, (Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to exact money wrong- 
fully; to extort from, defraud: Lk. iii. 14 [here R. V. 
marg. accuse wrongfully]; with a gen. of the pers. and 
ace. of the thing, Lk. xix. 8 (τριάκοντα μνᾶς παρά τινος, 
Lys. p. 177, 32. Sept. for pry, to oppress, defraud, Job 
xxxv. 9; Eccl iv. 1; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 122; πένητα, 
Prov. xiv. 31; xxii. 16 ; πτωχούς, Prov. xxviii. 3).* 

συλαγωγέω, -0; (σύλη booty, spoil, [cf. συλάω, init.], 
and dyo); to carry off booty: twa. to carry one off asa 
captive (and slave), θυγατέρα, Heliod. 10, 35 ; παρθένον, 
Nicet. hist. 5 p. 96; to lead away from the truth and 
subject to one's sway [R. V. make spoil of], Col. ii. & 
(Tatian. or. ad Gr. c. 22, p. 98 ed. Otto).* 


συλάω 5 


συλάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐσύλησα; (Lakin to] σύλη ‘spoil’ 
[allied with σκῦλον (q. v., yet cf.) Curtius p. 696]); fr. 
Hom. down; to rob, despoil: twa, 2 Co. xi. 8.* 

συλ-λαλέω, [T WH avv- (cf. σύν, II. fin.; Tdf. Proleg. 
p. 76)], τῶ; impf. 3 pers. plur. evveAáAovv; 1 aor. συνε- 
λάλησα; to talk with: τινί, with one, Mk. ix. 4; Lk. ix. 
30; xxii.4, (Ex. xxxiv. 35; Is.vii.6; Polyb. 4, 22, 8); 
μετά τινος, Mt. xvii. 8; Acts xxv. 12; πρὸς ἀλλήλους [ R.V. 
spake together one with another], Lk. iv. 36. [Cf. W. $52, 
4, 15.]* 

συλ-λαμβάνω [sometimes συν- (see below)]: fut. 2 pers. 
sing. συλλήψη (1, T Tr WH συλλήμψῃ [see M, μ]), Lk. i. 
31; pf. [3d pers. sing. συνείληφεν, Lk. i. 36 Trtxt. WH], 
ptep. fem. συνειληφυῖα [ib. R G L T]; 2 aor. συνέλαβον ; 
1 aor. pass. συνελήφθην (1, T Tr WH συνελήμφθην; see 
M, p); Mid., pres. impv. 2 pers. sing. συλλαμβάνου (T 
Tr WH ovp-, cf. σύν, I. fin.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 76) Phil. 
iv. 3; 2 aor. συνελαβόμην ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 
Sept. for wom and "BE 1. Active, a. to seize, 
take: τινά, one as a prisoner, Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; 
Lk. xxii. 54; Jn. xviii. 12 [cf. W. 275 (259)]; Actsi. 16; 
xii. 3; xxiii. 27; ἄγραν ἰχθύων, Lk. v. 9. b. to con- 
ceive, of a woman (often so in Sept. for 777): absol. 
Lk. i. 24 (Aristot. h. a. 7, 1 p. 582*, 19; gen. an. 1, 19 p. 
721^, 8 sq. ; [ Plut. de vitand. aere alien. 4, 4; cf. W. 595 
(552); B. $130, 5]) ; with év yaorpi added, Lk. i. 31; 
twa, a son, [Lk. i. 36]; with ev τῇ κοιλίᾳ added, Lk. ii. 21; 
metaph. of ‘lust,’ whose impulses a man indulges, Jas. i. 
15. 2. Mid. a. lo seize for one's self; in a 
hostile sense, to make (one a permanent) prisoner : twa, 
Acts xxvi. 21. b. with the dat. of a pers. to take 
hold together with one, to assist, help: Lk. v. 7; to succor, 
Phil. iv. 3, (Soph. Phil. 282; Plat. Theag. p. 129 e.; 
Diod. 11, 40; in this sense in Grk. writ. more commonly 
in the active).* ^ 

συλ-λέγω [cf. σύν, IL. fin.; Tf. Proleg. p. 76]; fut. 
συλλέξω; 1 aor. συνέλεξα ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. gvA- 
λέγεται ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for bp?; to gath- 
er up [cf. σύν, IT. 2]: τὰ ζιζάνια (for removal fr. the 
field), Mt. xiii. 28 sq. 30; pass. ib. 40; ri ἀπό with a gen. 
of the thing, Mt. vii. 16 [cf. W. $58, 9 b. a.] ; ri ἐκ with 
a gen. of the place, to collect in order to carry off, Mt. 
xii. 41; in order to keep, Lk. vi. 44; τὶ εἴς τι; into a 
vessel, Mt. xiii. 48.* 

συλ-λογίζομαι : (impf. συνελογιζόμην Lehm.) 1 aor. avv- 
ἐλογισάμην ; a. to bring together accounts, reckon 
up, compute, (Hdt. et sqq.). b. to reckon with one’s 
self, to reason, (Plat., Dem., Polyb., al.) : Lk. xx. 5.* 

συλ-λυπέω: 1. to affect with grief together: Aris- 
tot. eth. Nic. 9, 11, 4 p. 1171”, 7. 2. Pass., pres. 
ptep. συλλυπούμενος [T WH συν- cf. σύν, II. fin. (Τὰ 
Proleg. p. 76)]; to grieve with one's self [see avv, II. 4 
(so Fritz., De Wette, al.; but al. regard the σύν as ‘sym- 
pathetic’; cf. Meyer, Weiss, Morison, on Mk. as be- 
low)], be inwardly grieved, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb., Diod.): 
of the pain of indignation, ἐπί τινι, Mk. iii. 5.* 

συμ-βαίνω [ξυμ- Rec." in 1 Pet. iv. 12; see Z, g, s fin.]; 
impf. συνέβαινον ; 2 aor. συνέβην, ptep. συμβάς ; pf. συμ- 


95 





συμβιβάξω 


βέβηκα ; fr. [ Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. to walk with 
the feet near together. 2. to come together, meet with 
one; hence 3. of things which fall out at the same 
time, to happen, turn out, come to pass, (so occasionally 
in the Sept. for mp and 8p); as very often in Grk. 
writ. (Sept. Gen. xlii. 4; xliv. 29), συμβαίνει τί τινι, 
something befalls, happens to, one: Mk. x. 32; Acts xx. 
19; 1 Co. x. 11; [1 Pet. iv. 12]; 2 Pet. ii. 22; τὸ cup- 
βεβηκός τινι, Acts iii. 10 (Sus. 26); absol. rà συμβεβη- 
κότα, the things that had happened, Lk. xxiv. 14 (1 
Mace. iv. 26; [Joseph. e. Ap. 1, 22, 17]) ; συνέβη foll. 
by an ace. with inf. it happened [ A.V. so it was] that, 
etc.: Acts xxi. 35 [ef. W. 323 (303) ], exx. fr. prof. auth. 
are given by Grimm on 2 Macc. iii. 2.* 

συμ-βάλλω [συν- WH (so Tdf. exc. Lk. xiv. 31); cf. σύν, 
II. fin.]; impf. συνέβαλλον; 2 aor. συνέβαλον; 2 aor. mid. 
συνεβαλόμην ; fr. Hom. down; to throw together, to bring 
together ; a. λόγους (Lat. sermones conferre), to con- 
verse, Eur. Iphig. Aul. 830; with λόγους omitted [ef. 
Eng. confer], Plut. mor. p. 222 c. (W. 593 (552); [B. 
145 (127)]): τινί, to dispute with one, Acts xvii. 18 
[where A. V. encountered (cf. c. below) ]; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, 
to confer with one another, deliberate among them- 
selves, Acts iv. 15. b. to bring together in one’s 
mind, confer with one’s self [ οἵ. σύν, II. 4], to consider, 
ponder: ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, to revolve in the mind, Lk. ii. 19 
(συμβαλὼν τῷ λογισμῷ τὸ ὄναρ, Joseph. antt. 2,5,3). ο. 
intrans. (W. $38, 1; [B. $130, 4], to come together, meet : 
τινί, to meet one (on a journey), Acts xx. 14 (Hom. Od. 
21, 15 ; Joseph. antt. 2, 7, 5) ; to encounter in a hostile 
sense: τινί, to fight with one (1 Mace. iv. 34; 2 Macc. 
viii. 23; xiv. 17; Polyb. 1, 9, 7; 3,111, 1, and often), 
with eis πόλεμον added, Lk. xiv. 31 (eis μάχην, Polyb. 3, 
56, 6; Joseph. antt. 12, 8, 4; πρὸς μάχην, Polyb. 10, 37, 
4). Mid. to bring together of one's property, to contribute, 
aid, help: πολύ τινι, one, Acts xviii. 27; often so in Grk. 
auth. also, esp. Polyb.; cf. Schweighduser, Lex. Polyb. 
p.576; Passow s.v. 1b. a. ; [L.and S. s. v. I. 2]; Grimm, 
Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. v. 8.* 

συμ-βασιλεύω [ T συν- so WH (exc.in 2 T.as below) ; cf. 
σύν, II. fin.]: fut. συμβασιλεύσω ; 1 aor. συνεβασίλευσα:; 
to reign together: τινί, with one; prop., Polyb. 30, 2, 4; 
Lcian. dial. deor. 16, 2; often in Plut. [also in Dion. Hal., 
Strabo]; metaph. to possess supreme honor, liberty, 
blessedness, with one in the kingdom of God: 1 Co. iv. 8 
[cf. W.41b. 5 N. 2; B. $139, 10]; 2 Tim. ii. 12; see 
βασιλεύω." 

συμ-βιβάζω [WH συν- (so Tdf.in Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 
19); ef. σύν, II. fin.]; 1 aor. συνεβίβασα (Acts xix. 33 
L T Tr WH, but see below) ; Pass., pres. ptep. συμβιβα- 
ζόμενος; 1 aor. ptep. συμβιβασθείς ; (βιβάζω to mount the 
female, copulate with her; to leap, cover, of animals; 
allow to be covered, admit to cover); 1. to cause to 
coalesce, to join together, put together: τὸ σῶμα, pass., of 
the parts of the body *knit together' into one whole, 
compacted together, Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii.19; to unite or 
knit together in affection, pass., Col. ii. 2 [cf. W. $63, 2 
a.; B. $144, 13 a.] (to reconcile one to another, Hdt. 1, 


συμβουλεύω 


74; Thue. 2; 29). 2. to put together in one’s mind, 
to compare; by comparison to gather, conclude, consider : 
foll. by ὅτι, Acts xvi. 10 (Plat. Hipp. min. p. 369 d.; de 
rep. 6 p. 504a.). 3. to cause a person to unite with 
one in a conclusion or come to the same opinion, to prove, 
demonstrate: foll. by ὅτι, Acts ix. 22 ([ Aristot. top. 7, ὃ 
p. 151%, 36]; foll. by ós, [ Aristot. rhet. Alex. 4 p. 1426*, 
37; ete.]; Jambl. vit. Pyth. c. 13 $60; foll. by the 
acc. with inf. Ocell. Lucan. 3, 3) ; by a usage purely 
Biblical, w. the ace. of a pers, to teach, instruct, one: 
1 Co. ii. 16; for 737, Is. xl. 14; for y"mn, Ex. xviii. 
16; Deut. iv. 9; Is. xl. 13 Alex., Ald. ete.; for ΣΤ, 
Ex. iv. 12, 15; Lev. x. 11; ny3 v3,n, Theodot. Dan. 
ix. 22. (The reading συνεβίβασαν in Acts xix. 33, given 
by eodd. 8 A B etc. [and adopted by L T Tr WH] yields 
no sense; [but it may be translated (with R. V. mrg.) 
‘some of the multitude instructed Alexander’, etc. ; 
R. V. txt. translates it they brought Alexander out of the 
multitude, etc. ].) * 

cvp-BovAeóo; 1 aor. συνεβούλευσα; 1 aor. mid. συν- 
εβουλευσάμην ; fr. [Theogn., Soph.], Hdt. down; Sept. 
for yj? and yy; 1. to give counsel: τινί, Jn. 
xviii. 14; foll. by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to 
take counsel with others, take counsel together, to consult, 
deliberate: foll. by ἵνα (see tva, II. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4; 
Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrz.]; foll. by a telie inf., Acts ix. 
23.* 

συμβούλιον. -ov, τό, (σύμβουλος); 1. counsel, which 
is given, taken, entered upon, (Plut. Romul. 14) : Aap- 
βάνω (on this phrase see λαμβάνω, I. 6), Mt. xii. 14 ; xxii. 
15; xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; ποιῶ, to consult, deliberate, 
Mk. iii. 6 [Tr txt. WH txt. ἐδίδουν o.]; xv. 1 [T WH 
mrg. ἑτοιμάσαντες g.; cf. Weiss ad loc.]. 2.a 
council, i. e. an assembly of counsellors or persons in con- 
sultation (Plut. Luc. 26): Acts xxv. 12 (the governors 
and procurators of provinces had a board of assessors 
or advisers with whom they took counsel before render- 
ing judgment; see Cic. ad fam. 8, 8; Verr. 2,13; Sueton. 
vit. Tiber. 33; Lamprid. vit. Alex. Sever. c. 46; cf. Jo- 
Seph- b: ]- 2,16, 1)* 

σύμβουλος, -ov, 6, (σύν and βουλή), an adviser, coun- 
sellor: Ro. xi. 34 fr. Is. xl. 13. ((Tragg., [Hdt.], Arstph., 
Xen., Plat., al.) * 

Συμεών, ὁ, [indecl., B. 16 (14)], (for deriv. see Σίμων), 
Simeon [so A. V. uniformly (on 2 Pet. i. 1 see 5 below)]; 
1. the second son of Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxix. 33): 
Rev. vii. 7. 2. [R. V. Symeon], one of Abraham's 
descendants: Lk. iii. 30. 3. that devout Simeon 
who took the infant Jesus in his arms in the temple: 
Lk. ii. 25 [here Rec.^*ez Σιμεών], 34. 4. Symeon [so 
᾿ς V.] surnamed Niger, one of the teachers of the 
church at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. 5. Peter the apos- 
tle: Acts xv. 14 [R. V. Symeon]; 2 Pet.i.1[here L WH 
txt. Σίμων, and A. V. (R. V.) Simon]; respecting him 
see Σίμων, 1 and Πέτρος, fin.* 

συμ-μαθητής [ T WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.) ], -o9, ὁ, a fel- 
low-disciple: Jn. xi. 16 (Plat. Euthyd. p. 272 c.; Aesop. 
fab. 48). (Phrynichus says that σύν is not prefixed to 


596 








συμπαραγίνομαι 


πολίτης, δημότης. φυλέτης, and the like, but only to those 
nouns which denote an association which is πρόσκαιρος 
i.e. temporary, as συνέφηβος, συνθιασώτης, συμπότης. 
The Latin also observes the same distinction and says 
commilito meus, but not concivis, but civis meus; see 
Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 471; [ef. p. 172; Win. 25].)* 

συμ-μαρτυρέω, -@ [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, I. fin.) ]; to bear 
witness with, bear joint witness (with one): ovppapru- 
ρούσης τῆς συνειδήσεως, their conscience also bearing 
witness, Ro. ii. 15 (i.e. together with the deeds of the 
Gentiles, which aecord with the law of God and so bear 
witness [cf. W. 580 (539)]) ; foll. by ὅτι, Ro. ix. 1 (be- 
sides the fact that the close fellowship I have with Christ 
compels me to tell the truth); τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν, with 
our spirit already giving its testimony, Ro. viii. 16. 
Mid. pres. 1 pers. sing. συμμαρτυροῦμαι, 1 testify on my 
own behalf besides (i.e. besides those things which I 
have already testified in this book), Rev. xxii. 18 Rec. ; 
but the true reading here, μαρτυρῶ, was restored by 
Grsb. (Soph., Eur., Thuc., Plat., al.)* 

συμ-μερίζω [WH συν- (cf. avv, 11. fin.)]: to divide at 
the same time, divide together; to assign a portion; Mid. 
pres. 3 pers. plur. συμμερίζονται : τινί, to divide together 
with one (so that a part comes to me, a part to him), [R.V. 
have their portion with], 1 Co.ix. 13. [Diod., Dion. Hal., 
Diog. Laért.]* 

cvp-péroxos [T WI συν- (cf. avv, IH. fin.)], -ov, par- 
taking together with one, a. joint-partaker : twos, of some- 
thing, Eph. iii. 6; v. 7. (Joseph. b. j. 1, 24, 6; Just. 
Mart. apol. 2, 13.) * 

συμ-μιμητής [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], -od, 6, an 
imitator with others: twos, of one, Phil. iii. 17. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

συμ-μορφίζω [Tdf. συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: pres. pass. 
ptep. συμμορφιζόβενος ; (σύμμορφος) ; to bring to the same 


form with some other pers. or thing, to render like, 


(Vulg. configuro): τινί [ R.V. becoming conformed unto], 
Phil. iii. 10 LT Tr WH. Not found elsewhere.* 

σύμ-μορφος. -ον, (σύν and μορφή), having the same form 
as another [ef. σύν, I. 1], (Vulg. conformis, configuratus) ; 
similar, conformed to, [Lcian. amor. 39]: τινός (ef. 
Matthiae § 379 p. 864; [W. 195 (184); B. § 132, 23]), 
Ro. viii. 29 (see εἰκών, a.) ; τινί (Nicand. th. 321), Phil. 
iii. 21 [(here Tdf. σύνμ.) ; cf. W. 624 (580)].* 

συμ-μορφόω, -à : pres. pass. ptep. συμμορφούμενος ; i.q. 
συμμορφίζω, q. v.: Phil. iii. 10 Ree. Nowhere else.* 

συμ-παθέω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -@: 1 aor. 
συνεπάθησα; (συμπαθής); a. to be affected with the 
same feeling as another, to sympathize with, (Aristot., 
Plut.). b. in reference to the wretched, to feel for, 
have compassion on, (Vulg. compatior) : τινί, Heb. iv. 15 
ΓΔ. V. to be touched with the feeling of |; x. 34, (Isocr. p. 
64b.; Dion. Hal., Plut.).* 

συμπαθής, és, (σύν and πάσχω), suffering or feeling the 
like with another, sympathetic : 1 Pet. iii. 8, cf. Ro. xii. 
15. (Aristot., Theophr., al.) * 

συμ-παρα-γίνομαι [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)] : 2aor. 


mid. συμπαρεγενόμην ; a. to come together: ἐπί Tt, 


συμπαρακαλέω 


Lk. xxiii. 48 (Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 9; Hdt., Thuc., Dem., 
Diod.). b. tocome to one's help: τινί, 2 Tim. iv. 16 
RG [al. rapayiv., q. v. fin.]* 

cvp-rapa-kaAéo [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], τῶ: 1 
aor. pass. inf. συμπαρακληθῆναι ; 1. to call upon or 
invite or exhort at the same time or together (Xen., Plat., 
Plut., al.). 2. to strengthen [ A. V. comfort] with 
others (souls; see παρακαλέω, Il. 4) : συμπαρακληθῆναι ἐν 
ὑμῖν, that I with you may be comforted among you, i. e. in 
your assembly, with you, Ro. i. 12.* 

συμ-παρα-λαμβάνω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IIT. fin.)]; 2 
aor. συμπαρέλαβον; to take along together with (Plat., 
Aristot., Plut. al.); in the N. T. to take with one as a 
companion: twa, Acts xii. 25; xv. 37 sq.; Gal. ii, 1.* 

συμ-παρα-μένω : fut. συμπαραμενῶ ; to abide together with 
(Hippoer., Thuc., Dion. Hal., al.) ; to continue to live to- 
gether: τινί, with one, Phil. i. 25 [ Rec. ; al. παραμένω, q. v] 
(Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 5).* 

συμ-πάρειμι [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)]; to be pres- 
ent together: τινί, with one, Acts xxv. 24. [(Hippocr., 
Xen., Dem., al.)]* 

συμ-πάσχω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)]; to suffer or 
feel pain together (in a medical sense, as in Hippocr. and 
Galen): 1 Co. xii. 26; to suffer evils (troubles, persecu- 
tions) in like manner with another : Ro. viii. 17.* 

συμ-πέμπω : 1 aor. cuveren a; fr. Hdt. down; fo send 
together with : twa μετά τινος, 2 Co. viii. 185 τινί, ibid. 22. 
[C£ W.:$.52, 4, 15.]* 

συμ-περι-λαμβάνω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ] : 2 aor. 
ptep. συμπεριλαβών ; fr. Plat. and Dem. down; Jr 
to comprehend at once. 2. to embrace completely : 
τινά, Acts xx. 10.* 

συμ-πίνω: 2 aor. συνέπιον ; fr. [Hdt., Arstph.], Xen. 
and Plat. down; to drink with: τινί, one, Acts x. 41.* 

συμ-πίπτω : 2 aor. συνέπεσον ; fr. Hom. down; to fall 
together, collapse, fall in: of a house, Lk. vi. 49 T Tr 
VES 

συμ-πληρόω [in Acts T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ], -ó : 
Pass., pres. inf. συμπληροῦσθαι ; impf. συνεπληρούμην ; fr. 
Hdt. down; 1. to fill completely: συνεπληροῦντο 
[ R. V. they were filling with water], of the navigators, 
(as sometimes in Grk. writ. what holds of the ship is ap- 
plied to those on board; cf. Kypke, Observv. i. p. 248), 
Lk. viii. 23. 2. to complete entirely, be fulfilled : of 
time (see πληρόω, 2 b. a.), pass., Lk. ix. 51 [R. V. well 
nigh come]; Acts ii. 1.* 

συμ-πνίγω [T WH avv- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; impf. συν- 
ἐπνιγον ; 1 aor. συνέπνιξα ; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. συμ- 
πνίγονται ; to choke utterly: the seed of the divine word 
sown in the mind, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7, 19, (δένδρα 
συμπνιγόμενα, Theophr. c. plant. 6, 11, 6) ; συμπνίγονται, 
they are choked, i. e. the seed of the divine word in their 
minds is choked, Lk. viii. 14; τινά, to press round or 
throng one so as almost to suffocate him, Lk. viii. 42 
[A. V. thronged ].* 

συμ-πολίτης [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], -ov, 6, (see 
συμμαθητής and reff.), possessing the same citizenship 
with others, a fellow-citizen: συμπολῖται τῶν ἁγίων, spoken 


597 








σύμφυτος 


of Gentiles as received into the communion of the saints 
i. e. of the people consecrated to God, opp. to ξένοι x. 
πάροικοι, Eph. ii. 19. (Eur. Heracl. 826; Joseph. antt. 
19, 2, 2; Ael. v. h. 8, 44.)* 

συμ-πορεύομαι [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)]; impf. 
συνεπορευύμην 5 1. to go or journey together (Eur., 
Xen., Diod.) : τινί, with one, Lk. vii. 11; xiv. 25; xxiv. 
15, (Tob. v. 3, 9; ἡμῶν ἡ ψυχὴ συμπορευθεῖσα θεῷ, Plat. 
Phaedr. p. 249 e. ; μετά τινος, very often in Sept.). 2. 
to come together, to assemble: mpós rwa, Mk. x. 1 (Polyb., 
Plut.).* 

συμπόσιον, -ov, τό, (συμπίνω), a drinking-party, enter- 
tainment, (Lat. convivium) ; by meton. the party itself, 
the guests, (Plut. mor. p. 157 a.; 704 d.); plur. rows of 
guests: συμπόσια συμπόσια, Hebraistically for κατὰ συμ- 
πόσια, in parties, by companies, ([Β. 30 (27); 8. 139 ἃ. 8; 
W. 229 (214); 464 (432)]; see πρασιά), Mk. vi. 39.* — — 

συμ-πρεσβύτερος [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ], -ov, 6, 
a fellow-elder, Vulg. consenior, (see πρεσβύτερος, 2 b.): 1 
Pet. v. 1. (Eccles. writ.) * 

συμ-φάγω, see συνεσθίω. 

συμ-φέρω ; 1 aor. ptep. συνενέγκαντες (Acts xix. 19) ; 
fr. [Hom. (in mid.)], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to bear or 
bring together (Lat. confero), i. e. 1. with a refer- 
ence to the object, to bring together: ri, Acts xix. 
19: 2. with a reference to the subject, to bear to- 
gether or at the same time; to carry with others; to collect 
or contribute in order to help, hence to help, be profitable, 
συμφέρει, it is expedient, profitable, and 
in the same sense with a neut. plur.: with the subject 
πάντα, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 233 τί τινι, 2 Co. viii. 10; with 
an inf. of the object (as in Grk. writ.), Mt. xix. 10; 2 Co. 
xii. 1 (where L T Tr WH have συμφέρον); with the 
acc. and inf. Jn. xviii. 145 συμφέρει τινί foll. by tva (see 
fva, II. 2c. [B. $139,455 W. 337 (316)]), Mt. v. 29 sq. 
xviii. 6; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7. τὸ συμφέρον, that which is 
profitable (Soph., Eur., Xen., Dem., al.) : 1 Co. xii. 7; 
plur. (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 341 e.), Acts xx. 20; advan- 
tage, profit, Heb. xii. 10; τὸ συμφ. τινός (often in Grk. 
writ.) the advantage of one, one's profit, 1 Co. vii. 35; 
x. 33, (in both which pass. LT Tr WH read σύμφορον, 
(PB bs 

σύμ-φημι [T WH σύν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)]; to consent, 
τινί foll by ὅτι, Ro. vii. 16. — (Tragg., Xen., 


be expedient ; 


confess : gg., 
Plat.) * 

σύμφορος, -ov, (συμφέρω, q. V-), fit, suitable, useful; fr. 
[Hes., Theogn.], Hdt. down; 4 Mace. v. 105; subst. τὸ 
σύμφορον, advantage, profit: with a gen. of the pers. 
profited, L'T Tr WH in 1 Co. vii. 35 ; x. 33, [ef. B. $ 127, 
19 n.], (plur. rà σύμφορα, often in prof. auth. [fr. Soph. 
down ]).* 

συμ-φυλέτης, -ov, 6, (σύν and φυλή ; see συμμαθητής), 
one who is of the same people, a fellow-countryman, 
(Vulg. contribulis) : 1 Th. ii. 14. (Eccles. writ.) * 

σύμ-φυτος, -ov, (συμφύω). planted together (Vulg. com- 
plantatus) ; born together with, of joint origin, i. e. τ΄ 
connate, congenital, innate, implanted by birth or nature, 
(3 Mace. iii. 22; Pind., Plat., Aeschyl., Aeschin., Aristot., 


συμφύω 


Philo de Abrah. § 31 init.; Joseph. [as, c. Ap. 1, 8, 
57). 2. grown together, united with, (Theophr. de 
caus. plant. 5, 5, 2); kindred (Plat. Phaedr. p. 246 a.): 
εἰ σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ (sc. τῷ ὁμοιώματι [al. supply Χριστῷ, and take 
the ὁμοιώματι as a dat. of respect; for yet another constr. 
of the second clause cf. B. $132, 23]) τῆς ἀναστάσεως 
ἐσόμεθα, if we have become united with the likeness of his 
death (which likeness consists in the fact that in the 
death of Christ our former corruption and wickedness 
has been slain and been buried in Christ's tomb), i. e. 
if it is part and parcel of the very nature of a genuine 
Christian to be utterly dead to sin, we shall be united also 
with the likeness of his resurrection i. e. our intimate fel- 
lowship with his return to life will show itself in a new 
life consecrated to God, Ro. vi. 5.* 

[συμ-φύω (T WH συν- cf. σύν, II. fin.): 2 aor. pass. 
ptep. nom. plur. fem. συμφυεῖσαι ; 1. trans. to cause 
to grow together (Plat., Aristot.). 2. pass. intrans. 
to grow together, grow with: Lk. viii. 7." ] 

συμ-φωνέω, -ὥ ; fut. συμφωνήσω ([Mt. xviii. 19 T Tr; 
Lk. v. 36 LT Tr txt. WH]); 1 aor. συνεφώνησα; 1 aor. 
pass. συνεφωνήθην; fr. Plat. and Aristot. down; prop. to 
sound together, be in accord ; of sounds and of musical 
instruments. In the N. T. trop. to be in accord, to har- 
monisze, i. e. a. lo agree together: περί (as respects) 
twos, Mt. xviii. 19 (Dion. Hal. 2, 47) ; τινί, with a thing, 
Acts xv. 15 (often in Grk. auth.) ; to agree i. e. corre- 
spond, of things congruous in nature, Lk. v. 36; pass. 
συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν, foll. by an inf., it was agreed between you 
to etc. Acts v. 9. b. to agree with one in making a 
bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polyb., Diod.) : 
μετά τινος ἐκ Snvapiov (see ἐκ, 11. 4), Mt. xx. 2; w.a dat. 
of the pers. and gen. of the price, ibid. 13, (συνεφώνησεν 
per αὐτοῦ τριῶν λιτρῶν ἀσήμου ἀργυρίου, Act. Thom. 
§ 2). 

συμ-φώνησις, -eos, 7, (συμφωνέω), concord, agreement : 
πρός twa, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. (Eccl. writ.) * 

συμφωνία, -as, ἡ, (σύμφωνος), [fr. Plat. down], music: 
Lk. xv. 25. (Polyb. 26, 10, 5; [plur. of ‘the musice of 
the spheres,’ Aristot. de caelo 2, 9 p. 290", 22; al.]) * 

σύμφωνος, -ov, (σύν and φωνή), fr. [Hom. h. Mere. 51; 
Soph. ], Plat., Aristot. down, harmonious, accordant, agree- 
ing; τὸ σύμφωνον, thing agreed upon, compact, [ Epict. 
diss. 1, 19, 27]: ἐκ συμφώνου, by mutual consent, by 
agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 [cf. W. 303 (285); B. $ 139, 20]* 

συμ-ψηφίζω : 1 aor. συνεψήφισα ; to compute, count up: 
τὰς τιμάς, Acts xix. 19. (Mid. τινί, to vote with one, Ar- 
stph. Lys. 142.) * 

σύμ-:ψυχος [T WH σύν- (cf. σύν, IH. fin.) ], -ov, (σύν and 
ψυχή), of one mind (Vulg. unanimis): of one accord, 
Phil. ii. 2. (Eecl writ.) * 

σύν [the older form ξύν is still found in some edd. in 
composition (as ξυμ-βαίνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 Rech; see L. 
and S. s. v. init.; cf. 3, 0, s)], a preposition; it is never 
used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four 
times (texts vary) ], Mark [some five times, or John (three 
times) ], (who prefer μετά), more frequently by Luke 


598 








σύν 
[(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39 
times ; on the comparative frequency of these prepp. in 
the classics, see L. and S. s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Da- 
tive after it, and denotes accompaniment and fellowship, 
whether of action, or of belief, or of condition and ex- 
perience; (acc. to the grammarians [ef. Donaldson, New 
Crat.$181; Kriiger § 68, 13,1; Kühner ii. p. 438]; W. 
391 (366), a fellowship far closer and more intimate 
than that expressed by μετά, although in the N. T. 
this distinction is much oftener neglected than observed). 
Latin cum, Eng. with. 


ic 1. Passages in which the subject of an active 
verb is said to be or to do something σύν τινι; a. 


phrases in which σύν is used of accompaniment: epi 
σύν τινι i. e. — lo be with one, to accompany one, Lk. vii. 12; 
viii. 38 (Mk. v. 18 μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ) ; xxii. 56 (Mt. xxvi. 69 and 
Mk. xiv. 67 pera); Acts xxvii. 2; 10 associate with one, 
Lk. xxiv. 44; Acts iv. 18; xiii. 7; Phil. i. 28; Col. ii. 5; 
2 Pet. i. 18; of σύν τινι ὄντες, the attendants of one on a 
journey, Mk. ii. 26 (Mt. xii. 4 and Lk. vi. 4 τοῖς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ); 
Acts xxii. 9; of σύν τινι 80. dvres, — either the compan- 
ions of one, Lk. v. 9; ix. 32; xxiv. 24, 33; with the noun 
added, of σὺν ἐμοὶ πάντες ἀδελφοί, Gal. i. 2; Ro. xvi. 14; 
or one’s colleagues, Acts v. 17, 21; of σὺν αὐτῷ τε- 
xvirat, his fellow-craftsmen, Acts xix. 38; εἰμὶ σύν τινι, 10 
be on one’s side, Acts xiv. 4 (Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 77); to assist 


one, ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ (ἡ) σὺν ἐμοί, 1 Co. xv. 10. b. 
σύν τινι joined to verbs of standing, sitting, going, 


ete.: σταθῆναι, Acts ii. 14; στῆναι, Acts iv. 14; ἐπιστῆναι, 
Lk. xx. 1; Acts xxiii. 27; καθίσαι, Acts viii. 31; μένειν, 
Lk.i.56; xxiv. 29; Acts xxviii. 16; ἀναπίπτειν, Lk. xxii. 
14; γίνεσθαι, to be associated with, Lk. ii. 13; zapaytve- 
σθαι, to arrive, Acts xxiv. 24; ἔρχεσθαι, Jn. xxi. 3; Acts 
xi.12; 2 Co. ix. 4; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Acts v. 265 εἰσέρχεσθαι, 
Acts ili. 8; xxv. 22; εἰσιέναι, Acts xxi. 18; συνέρχεσθαι, 
Acts xxi. 16; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Jn. xviii. 1; Acts x. 235 xiv. 
20; xvi.3; πορεύεσθαι, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxiii. 32 
[LT Tr WH ἀπέρχεσθαι); xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; διο- 
deve, Lk. viii. 1 sq.; ἐκπλεῖν, Acts xviii. 18. with verbs 
of living, dying, believing: ζῆν, 1 Th. v. 10; dzo- 
θνήσκειν, Mt. xxvi.35; Ro. vi. 85 πιστεύειν, Acts xviii. 8. 
with other verbs: Acts v. 1; xiv. 13; xx. 36; xxi 5; 
Phil. ii. 22; Jas.i. 11. 2. Passages in which one is 
said to be the recipient of some action σύν τινι, or to be 
associated with one to whom some action has reference: 
— dative, τινὶ σύν τινι : as ἔδοξε τοῖς ἀποστόλοις σὺν 6 
τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Acts xv. 22, where if Luke had said καὶ ὅλῃ 
τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ he would have claimed for the church the 
same rank as for the apostles; but he wishes to give to 
the apostles the more influential position; the same ap- 
plies also to Acts xxiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 1; Phil. 
i.l. Accusative, σύν τινί (which precedes) τινα or τὶ 
(the pers. or thing added): Ro. viii. 32 (σὺν αὐτῷ, i. e. 
since he has given him to us); Mk. xv. 27; 1 Co. x. 13; 
τινὰ Or τὶ σύν τινι (the pers. or thing associated or 
added): Mt. xxv. 27; Mk. viii. 34; 2 Co. i. 21; Col. ii. 
13; jv. 9; τὶ σύν τινι, a thing with its power or result, 
Gal. v. 94; Col. iii. 9; ris or ri σύν τινι after passives, as 


σύν 


Mt. xxvii. 838; Mk. ix. 4; Lk. xxiii. 32; 1 Co. xi. 32; 
Gal. iii. 9; Col. iii.3sq.; 1 Th. iv. 17. 3. It stands 
where καί might have been used (cf. B. 331 (285)): 
ἐγένετο ὁρμὴ - - - Ἰουδαίων σὺν τοῖς ἄρχουσιν αὐτῶν (equiv. 
to καὶ τῶν apy. αὖτ.), Acts xiv. 5; add, Lk. xxiii. 11; 
Acts iii. 4; x.2; xxiii 15; Eph. iii. 18. 4. Of that 
which one has or carries with him, or with which he is 
furnished or equipped (σὺν ἅρμασιν, 3 Mace. ii. 7; σὺν 
ὅπλοις, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3,54; many other exx. fr. Grk. writ. 
are given by Passow s. v. B. I. 2 a.; [L. and S. I.4]): 
σὺν τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ, carrying with him this gift or bounty, 
2 Co. viii. 19 R G T cod. Sin. (L Tr WH ἐν τῇ xáp. τ. in 
procuring [R. V. in the matter of] this benefit) ; σὺν τῇ 
δυνάμει τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν 'I. Xp. equipped with the power 
of our Lord Jesus Christ, 1 Co. v. 4 (so acc. to many in- 
‘terpreters [ef. W. 391(366)]; but since the N. T. writ- 
ers are wont to designate the powers and virtues with 
which one is equipped by the preposition ἐν, it is more 
correct to connect σὺν τῇ Suv. with συναχθέντων, so that 
ἡ δύναμις τ. κυρίου is personified and represented as the 
third subject in the gathering; cf. Mt. xviii. 20 [see 
δύναμις, a. sub fin.]). 5. σὺν Χριστῷ ζῆν, to live 
with Christ, i.e. united (in spiritual bonds) to him, and 
to lead a strong life by virtue of this union, 2 Co. xiii. 4; 
σὺν (Rec.) χειρὶ ἀγγέλου (see χείρ), Acts vii. 35 L T Tr 
WH. 6. Of the union which arises from the ad- 
dition or accession of one thing to another: σὺν πᾶσι 
τούτοις, our ‘beside all this’ [W. 391 (3866) ], Lk. xxiv. 21 
(Neh. v. 18 ; 3 Mace. i. 22; Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5). vis 
‘On the combination ἅμα σύν, 1 Th. iv. 17; v. 10, see 
pa, fin. 

II. In composition σύν denotes 1. associa- 
tion, community, fellowship, participation: συνοικέω, 
σύνειμι, συγγενής, σύμμορφος, συζῆν, συμπάσχειν, συγ- 
χρᾶσθαι, etc. 2. together, i. e. several persons or 
things united or all in one; as, συγκεράννυμι, συγκλείω, 
συγκαλέω, συλλέγω, συγκομίζω, ete. 3. completely: 
συγκύπτω, συγκαλύπτω, etc. 4. with one’s self, i. e. 
in one’s mind: συλλυπέομαι [but see the word], σύνοιδα, 
"συνείδησις, συντηρέω; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 642 sq. 
Once or twice in the N. T. after verbs compounded with 
σύν the preposition is repeated before the object [W. 
$52,4,15]: Mt. xxvii. 44 L T Tr WH ; Col. ii. 13. 

As to its Form, σύν in composition before B, μ, z, d, 
yy, passes into cup-, before ἃ into συλ-, before y, x, x into 
-avy-; before ¢ [and c foll. by a consonant] it is elided, 
hence συζῆν, συζητέω, συσταυρόω, συστέλλω. But in the 
older manuscripts assimilation and elision are often ne- 
'gleeted (cf. ἐν, ITI. fin.). Following their authority, LT 
Tr WH write συνζάω, συνζητέω, συνζητητής, σύνζυγος. 
συνσταυρόω, σύνσωμος; LT WH συνστρατιώτης ; TWH 
συνγνώμη, συνκάθημαι, συνκαθίζω, συνκακοπαθέω, συνκα- 
κουχέω, συνκαλέω, συνκάμπτω, συνκαταβαίνω, συνκατάθεσις., 
συνκατατίθημι, συνκαταψηφίζω, συνκεράννυμι, συνκλείω, συν- 
κληρονόμος, συνκοινωνέω, συνκοινωνός, συνκρίνω (' Ασύνκρι- 
Tos), συνκύπτω, συνλαλέω, συνλυπέω, συνμαθητής, συνμαρ- 
τυρέω, συνμέτοχος, συνμιμητής, συνπαθέω, συνπαραγίνομαι, 
'συνπαρακαλέω, συνπαραλαμβάνω, συνπάρειμι, συνπάσχω, 


899 





συνάγω 


συνπεριλαμβάνω, συνπληρύω, συνπνίγω, συνπολίτης, συν- 
πορεύομαι, συνπρεσβύτερος, συνστενάζω, συνστοιχέω, σύν- 
φημι, συνφύω, συνχαίρω, συνχύννω, σύνψυχος; LTr mrg. 
συνζήτησις ; T συνβασιλεύω, συνμορφίζω, σύνσημον; Tr 
WH συνβάλλω, συνβιβάζω, συνμερίζω, συν- 
σχηματίζω, συνχράομαι. But LT Tr WH retain συγγέ- 
ved, συγγενής, συγγενίς, συγκαλύπτω, συγκυρία, σύγχυσις, 
συλλέγω, συμβαίνω, συμβουλεύω, συμβούλιον, σύμβουλος, 
συμμορφύω, συμπαθής, συμπόσιον, συμφέρω, σύμφορος, 
συμφυλέτης, σύμφυτος, συμφωνέω, συμφώνησις, συμφωνία, 
σύμφωνος (ἀσύμφωνος), συστρέφω, συστροφή; LT Tr 
συμμερίζω; LT WH συστατικός ; L'Tr WH συμμορφίζω, 
σύμμορφος, σύσσημον; 1, Tr συγγνώμη, συγκάθημαι, συγ- 
καθίζω, συγκακοπαθέω, συγκακουχέω, συγκαλέω, συγκάμπτω, 
συγκαταβαίνω, συγκατάθεσις, συγκατατίθημι, συγκαταψη- 
φίζω, συγκεράννυμι, συγκλείω, συγκληρονόμος, συγκοινωνέω, 
συγκοινωνός, συγκρίνω, συγκύπτω, συγχαίρω, συγχύννω, 
συγχράομαι, συλλαλέω, συλλυπέω, συμβάλλω, συμβασι- 
λεύω, συμβιβάζω, συμμαθητής, συμμαρτυρέω, συμμέτοχος, 
συμμιμητής, συμπαθέω, συμπαραγίνομαι, συμπαρακαλέω, 
συμπαραλαμβάνω, συμπάρειμι, συμπάσχω, συμπεριλαμβάνω, 
cvunAnpóo, συμπνίγω, συμπολίτης, συμπορεύομαι, συμπρε- 
σβύτερος, σύμφημι, συμφύω, σύμψυχος, συστενάζω, συστοι- 
χέω; L συλλαμβάνω, συσχηματίζω. “Γαΐ. is not uniform 
in συλλαμβάνω, συμβάλλω, συμβιβάζω, σύμμορφος, συμ- 
πληρύω, συσχηματίζω; nor Trin συλλαμβάνω, συσχη- 
ματίζω ; nor W Hin συλλαμβάνω. συμβασιλεύω, συμπληρόω. 
These examples show that assimilation takes place chiefly 
in those words in which the preposition has lost, more or 
less, its original force and blends with the word to which 
it is prefixed into a single new idea; as συμβούλιον, συμ- 
φέρει, σύμφορος. Cf. [ Alex. Buttmann in the Stud. u. 
Krit. for 1862,p. 180]; Philip Buttmann (the son) ibid. 
p. 811sq. [But see Dr. Gregory’s exposition of the 
facts in the Proleg. to Tdf. p. 73 sq.; Dr. Hort in WH. 
App. p. 149; Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. Insehr. § 24.] 
συν-άγω ; fut. συνάξω; 2 aor. συνήγαγον ; Pass., pres. 
συνάγομαι; pf. ptep. συνηγμένος ; 1 aor. συνήχθην; 1 fut. 
συναχθήσομαι; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 8, yap. 
and Υ3Ρ; a. to gather together, to gather: with an 
ace. of the thing, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. vi. 12 sq.; xv. 6; har- 
vests, ὅθεν, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; with ets τε added, Mt. iii. 12; 
vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; zo), Lk. xii. 17; ἐκεῖ, Lk. 
xii. 18; συνάγειν καρπὸν eis ζωὴν αἰώνιον (see καρπός, 2 
d.), Jn. iv. 36; συνάγω μετά twos, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23; 
to draw together, collect : fishes, —of a net in which they 
are caught, Mt. xiii. 47. b. to bring together, assem- 
ble, collect: αἰχμαλωσίαν (i. e. αἰχμαλώτους), Rev. xiii. 10 


συνστατικός; 


RG; εἰς αἰχμαλωσίαν, i. 6. τινάς, οἵ ὦσιν αἰχμάλωτοι, Rev. 
xiii. 10 Led. min.; to join together, join in one (those 
previously separated): rà τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ rà διεσκορπι- 
σμένα εἰς ἕν, Jn. xi. 52, (συνάξειν εἰς Ev rà ἔθνη kal ποιήσειν 
φιλίαν, Dion. Hal. 2, 45; ὅπως εἰς φιλίαν συνάξουσι τὰ 
ἔθνη, ibid.) ; 
ji. 4; xxii. 10; συνέδριον, Jn. xi. 47; τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Acts 
xiv. 27; τὸ πλῆθος, Acts xv. 30; τινὰς εἰς with an ace. 
of place, Rev. xvi. 16; εἰς τὸν πόλεμον, in order to en- 
gage in war, Rev. xvi. 14: xx. 8: ἐπί rwa, unto one, Mt. 


to gather together by convoking: twas, Mt. 


συναγωγή 


xxvii. 27. Pass. to be gathered i.e. come together, gather, 
meet, [cf. B. 52 (45)] : absol., Mt. xxii. 41; xxvii. 17; Mk. 
ii. 2; Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xiii. 44; xv. 6; xx. 7; 1 Co. v. 
1; Rev. xix. 19; with the addition of εἰς and an ace. of 
place, Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts iv. 5; els δεῖπνον, Rev. xix. 17; 


ἔμπροσθέν twos, Mt. xxv. 32; ἐπί τινα, unto one, Mk. v. * 


21; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό [see αὐτός, III. 1], Mt. xxii. 34; Acts iv. 
26; ἐπί τινα, seen one, Acts iv. 27; πρός τινα, unto 
one, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi. 305 vii.1; ἐν 
with dat. of the place, Acts iv. 31; ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Acts 
xi. 26 ; μετά τινος, Mt. xxviii. 12; with adverbs of place: 
οὗ, Mt. xviii. 20; Acts xx. 8; ὅπου, Mt. xxvi. 57; Jn. 
xx. 19 RG; ἐκεῖ, Jn. xviii. 2; Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 
8s7RGL c. to lead with one’s self sc. unto one's 
home, i. e.to receive hospitably, to entertain, [A.V. to take 
in]: ξένον, Mt. xxv. 35, 38, 43, (with the addition of εἰς 
τὴν οἰκίαν, εἰς τὸν οἶκον, Deut. xxii. 2; Josh. ii. 18; Judg. 
xix. 18, etc.). [Come. : émt-ouvayo.|* 

συν-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συνάγω), Sept. for op and very 
often for rYyy. In Grk. writ. a bringing necs gather- 
ing (as of fruits), a contracting; an assembling together of 
men. In the N. T. 1. an assembly of men: τοῦ 
Zaravü, whom Satan governs, Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9. 2. 
a synagogue, i. e. a. an assembly of Jews formally 
gathered together to offer prayer and listen to the reading 
and exposition of the Holy Scriptures; assemblies of the 
sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards 
also on the second and fifth days of every week [see 
reff. below]: Lk. xii. 11; Acts ix.2; xiii. 43; xxvi. 11; 
the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians 
formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2 (Epiph. 
haer. 30, 18 says of the Jewish Christians συναγωγὴν 
οὗτοι καλοῦσι τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐκκλησίαν καὶ οὐχὶ ἐκκλησίαν [cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 192]) ; [ef. Trench, Syn. § 1, 
and esp. Harnack’s elaborate note on Herm. mand. 11, 
9 (less fully and aceurately in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. f. 
wiss. Theol. for 1876, p. 102 sqq.) respecting the use of 
the word by the church Fathers of the 2d, 3d, and 4th 
centuries; cf. Hilgenfeld’s comments on the same in his 
* Hermae Pastor’, ed. alt. p. 183 sq.]. b. the build- 
ing where those solemn Jewish assemblies are held (Hebr. 
no32n mv3, i. e. ‘the house of assembly’). Synagogues 
seem to date their origin from the Babylonian exile. In 
the time of Jesus and the apostles every town, not only 
in Palestine but also among the Gentiles if it contained 
a considerable number of Jewish inhabitants, had at least 
one synagogue, the larger towns several or even many. 
That the Jews held trials and even inflicted punishments 
in them, is evident from such pass. as Mt. x. 17; xxiii. 34; 
Mk. xii.9; Lk. xii. 11; xxi. 12; Actsix. 2; xxii 19; 
xxvi. 11. They are further mentioned in Mt. iv. 23; vi 
2,55; ix. 35; xii. 95 xiii. 54; xxiii. 6; Mk. i. 21, 23, 29, 89; 
iii. 1; vi. 2; xii. 39; Lk. iv. 15 sq. 20, 28, 33, 38, 44 ; vi. 6; 
vii. 5; viii. 41; [xi. 43]; xiii. 10; xx. 46; Jn. vi. 59; xviii. 
20 [here the anarthrous (so G L T Tr WH) sing. has an 
indef. or generic force (R. V. txt. in synagogues)]; Acts 
129,5: 1x. 20; xi, 5,14. 42 Rec; xiv. 15 cv, 1 xv. 
1; 10,17; xviij. 4, 7,19, 26; xix. 85 xxiv, 125 xxvii): 


600 





CUVAXMNác cox 


(Joseph. antt. 19, 6, 3; b. j. 2, 14, 4. [5; 7, 3, 3; Philo, 
quod omn. prob. lib. $ 12]). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syn- 
agogen; Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xv. p. 299 sqq.; Schiirer, 
N. T. Zeitgesch. $ 27 (esp. ii.) ; Kneucker in Schenkel 
v. p. 443 sq.; [Hamburger, Keal-Encycl. ii. p. 1142 sqq.; 
Ginsburg in Alex.'s Kitto, s. v. Synagogue; Edersheüm,. 
Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. x.].* 

συν-αγωνίζομαι : 1 aor. mid. inf. συναγωνίσασθαι; fr.. 
Thue. and Xen. down; to strive together with one, to help 
one in striving: τινὶ ἐν rais προσευχαῖς, in prayers, i. e. to- 
offer intense prayers with one, Ro. xv. 30; in what sense- 
intense prayer may be likened to a strugele, see Philippi 
ad loc. [(cf. dywvi¢. in Col. iv. 12 and Bp. Lghtft.’s note)].* 

συν-αθλέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. συνήθλησα ; to strive at the same 
time with another: with a dat. commodi [cf. W. $ 31, 4]. 
for something, Phil. i. 27; τινὶ ἔν τινι, together with one in 
something, Phil. iv.3. (univ. fo help, assist, Diod. 3, 4.) * 

cvv-a8po(fo: 1 aor. ptep. συναθροίσας ; pf. pass. ptep- 
συνηθροισμένος ; fr. [ Eur., Arstph., al.], Isocr. down; Sept. 
chiefly for yap and yp to Ὁ gather together with others ; 
to assemble: twas, Acts xix. 25; pass. to be gathered to- 
gether i. e. come together, Lk. xxiv. 33 RG; Acts xii. 12.* 

συν-αίρω; 1 aor. inf. συνᾶραι; 1. to take up to-. 
gether with another or others. 2. to bring together 
with others: Aóyov, lo cast up or settle accounts, to make a 
reckoning with, (an expression not found in Grk. auth.),. 
Mt. xviii. 23 sq. ; μετά twos, Mt. xxv. 19." 

συν-αιχμάλωτος, -ov, ὁ, a fellow-prisoner (Vulg. concap-- 
livus): Ro. xvi. 7; Col.iv. 10; Philem. 23, (Leian. asin. 
21). [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. e.; Fritzsche, Com. om 
Rom. vol. i. p. xxi. note.] * 

συν-ακολουθέω, -d; impf. συνηκολούθουν; 1 aor. συνηκο- 
Aovdnoa; fr. Arstph., Thuc., Isocr. down; to follow to- 
gether with others, to accompany: τινί, one, Mk. v. 37 
[where Lehm. ἀκολουθ.}; xiv. 51 1, Τ Tr WH; Lk. xxiii. 
49.* 

συν-αλίζω: (σύν, and ἁλίζω fr. ἁλής, crowded, in a mass; 
[ef. ἄλυσις, init.]) ; to gather together, assemble; pass. 
pres. ptep. evvaMópevos; to be assembled, meet with: τινί, 
with one, Acts i. 4, where αὐτοῖς is to be supplied. (Hdt., 
Xen., [ Plut. de placit. phil. 902], Joseph., Leian., Jambl.) 
[But Meyer defends the rendering given by some of the 
ancient versions (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) eating with (de- 
riving the word from ovvados), so A. V. and R. V. mrg.; 
such passages as Manetho 5, 339; Clem. hom. 13, 4 (al- 
though Dressel after cod. Ottob. reads here evvavA. — yet 
the recogn. 7, 29 renders cibum sumimus) ; Chrysost. iii. 
88 c. (ed. Migne iii. i. 104 mid.); 89 a. (ibid. bottom) ; 
91 d. (ibid. 107 mid.), seem to give warrant for this in- 
terpretation; cf. Valekenaer, Opusce. ii. p. 277 sq. But 
see at length Woolsey in the Bib. Sacer. for Oct. 1882, 
pp. 605-618.]* 

συν-αλλάσσω: (see καταλλάσσω) ; to reconcile (Thuc., 
Xen., Plat., Dio Cass.; in diff. senses by diff. prof. auth.) : 
συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην, (Vulg. reconciliabat, i. e. 
sought to reconcile), conative impf. [cf. B. 205 (178) ;. 
R. V. would have set them at one again], Acts vii. 26 LT 
Tr WH [see συνελαύνω ].* 


, 
cvvavafdatvo 


συν-ανα-βαίνω: 2 aor. συνανέβην ; to ascend at the same 
time, come up together with to a higher place: τινί, with 
one, foll. by eis with the acc. of the place, Mk. xv. 41; 
Acts xiii. 31. (Hdt., Xen., Dion. Hal., Strabo, al.; Sept. 
several times for my) e 

συν-ανά-κειμαι ; 3 pers. plur. impf. avvavékewro; to re- 
cline together, feast together, [A. V. ‘sit down with’, ‘sit at 
meat with’, (cf. ἀνάκειμαι)] : τινί, with one, Mt. ix. 10; 
Mk. ii. 15; Lk. xiv. 10; Jn. xii. 2 Rec.; οἱ συνανακείμενοι; 
[‘they that sat at meat with’], the guests, Mt. xiv. 9; 
Mk. vi. 22, 26[RGL]; Lk. vii.49; xiv.15. ([8 Mace. 
v. 39]; eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* 

ovv-ava-plyvupe: fo mix up together; Pass., pres. impv. 
2 pers. plur. -μίγνυσθε; inf. -μίγνυσθαι ; reflex. and met- 
aph. τινί, to keep company with, be intimate with, one: 
1Co.v. 9,11; 2 Th. iii. 14. (Plut. Philop. 21; [Sept. 
Hos. vii. 8 Alex.].) * 

συν-ανα-παύομαι : 1 aor. subj. συναναπαύσωμαι ; to take 
rest together with: τινί, with one, Is. xi. 6; to sleep together, 
to lie with, of husband and wife (Dion. Hal., Plut.); met- 
aph. τινί, to rest or refresh one's spirit with one (i. e. to give 
and get refreshment by mutual intercourse), Ro. xv. 32 
[Lchm. om. ].* 

συν-αντάω, -à: fut. συναντήσω; 1 aor. συνήντησα; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for p15, 25, 77), DAP, ete.; to meet 
with: τινί, Lk. ix. [18 WH mrg.], 37; xxii. 10; Acts x. 
25; Heb. vii. 1 [cf. B. 293 (252)], 10; trop. of events, 
to happen, to befall: Acts xx. 22 (Plut. Sulla 2; mid. rà 
συναντώμενα, Polyb. 22, 7,14; the Hebr. mp also is used 
of events, Eccles. ii. 14; ix. 11; ete.).* 

συν-άντησις, -eos, 7, a meeting with (Eurip. Ion 535; 
Dion. Hal. antt. 4, 66): eis συνάντησίν τινι, to meet one 
[B. § 146, 3], Mt. viii. 34 R G (for DNTP, Gen. xiv. 17; 
SSeS 10); Ihe 1Ὁ. 21; ἌΨΠῚ: 7) oe 

συν-αντι-λαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. 
συναντιλάβηται; to lay hold along with, to strive to obtain 
with others, help in obtaining, (τῆς ἐλευθερίας, Diod. 14, 8); 
to take hold with another (who is laboring), hence univ. 
to help: τινί. one, Lk. x. 40; Ro. viii. 26, (Ps. Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 22; Ex. xviii. 22; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 4).* 

συν-απ-άγω: Pass, pres. ptep. συναπαγόμενος ; 1 aor. 
cuvannxOnv; to lead away with or together: ἵππον, Xen. 
Cyr. 8,3, 23; τριήρεις, Hell. 5, 1, 23; τὸν λαὸν ped ἑαυτοῦ, 
Sept. Ex. xiv. 6; pass. metaph. to be carried away with : 
with dat. of the thing, i. e. by a thing, so as to experi- 
ence with others the force of that which carries away 
(Zosim. hist. 5, 6, 9 αὐτὴ ἡ Σπάρτη συναπήγετο τῇ κοινῇ τῆς 
Ἑλλάδος ἁλώσει), to follow the impulse of a thing to 
what harmonizes with it, Gal. ii. 13; 2 Pet. iii. 17; to 
suffer one’s self to be carried away together with (some- 
thing that carries away), τοῖς ταπεινοῖς (opp. to τὰ ὑψηλὰ 
φρονεῖν), i. 6. to yield or submit one’s self to lowly things, 
conditions, employments, — not to evade their power, 
Ro. xii. 16.* 

συν-απο-θνήσκω: 2 aor. συναπέθανον; to die together; 
with dat. of the pers. to die with one (Sir. xix. 10, and 
often in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Mk. xiv. 31; sc. 
ὑμᾶς ἐμοί, that ye may die together with me, i.e. that my 


601 





συνδέω.: 


love to you may not leave me even were I appointed to 
die, 2 Co. vii. 3; sc. τῷ Χριστῷ [cf. W. 143 (136) ], to meet 
death as Christ did for the cause of God, 2 Tim. ii. 11.* 

συν-απ-όλλυμι: 2 aor. mid. συναπωλόμην ; fr. Hdt. down; 
to destroy together (Ps. xxv. (xxvi.) 9); mid. to perish 
together (to be slain along with): τινί, with one, Heb. xi. 
9i 

συν-απο-στέλλω : 1 aor. συναπέστειλα ; to send with: 
τινά, 2 Co. xii. 18. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen., Dem., Plut., 
81)" 

συν-αρμολογέω, -ὦ : pres. pass. ptep. συναρμολογούμενος ; 
(ἁρμολόγος binding, joining; fr. ἁρμός a joint, and λέγω); 
to join closely together; to frame together: οἰκοδομή, the 
parts of a building, Eph. ii. 21; σῶμα, the members of 
the body, Eph. iv. 16. (Eccles. writ.; classic writ. use 
συναρμόσσειν and συναρμόζειν.) * 

συν-αρπάζω: 1 aor. συνήρπασα; plupf. συνηρπάκειν ; Y 
aor. pass. συνηρπάσθην ; to seize by force: τινά, Acts vi. 
12; xix. 29; to catch or lay hold of (one, so that he is 
no longer his own master), Lk. viii. 29; to seize by force 
(Trage., Arstph., Xen., 


and carry away, Acts xxvii. 15. gg. 


al.) * 

Peer: to cause to grow together; pres. inf. pass. 
συναυξάνεσθαι, to grow together: Mt xiii. 30. (Xen., 
Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

συνβ-, see συμβ- and σύν, II. fin. 

συνγ-, see συγγ- and σύν, IT. fin. 

σύν-δεσμος, -ov, ὁ, (συνδέω) ; 1. that which binds to- 
gether, a band, bond : of the ligaments by which the mem- 
bers of the human body are united together (Eur. Hipp. 
199; Tim. Loer. p. 100 b. [i. e. 3, 3, p. 386 ed. Bekk.] ; 
Aristot. ἢ. a. 10, 7, 3 p. 688", 9; Galen), Col. ii. 19 
[where see Bp. Lghtft.]; trop.: τῷ συνδέσμῳ τῆς εἰρήνης» 
i. e. τῇ εἰρήνῃ ὡς συνδέσμῳ, Eph. iv. 3 (σύνδεσμος εὐνοίας 
x. φιλίας, Plut. Num. 6) ; ἥτις ἐστὶ avr. τῆς τελειότητος, 
that in which all the virtues are so bound together that 
perfection is the result, and not one of them is wanting 
to that perfection, Col. iii. 14 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ]. 
εἰς σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας ὁρῶ σε ὄντα, 1 see that you have 
fallen into (cf. εἰμί, V. 2 a. p. 119", and see below) the 
bond of iniquity, i.e. forged by iniquity to fetter souls, 
Aets viii. 23 (the phrase σύνδ. ἀδικίας occurs in another 
sense in Is. lviii. 6). 2. that which is bound to- 
gether, a bundle: prop. σύνδ. ἐπιστολῶν, Idian. 4, 12, 
11 [6 ed. Bekk.]; hence some interpreters think that 
by σύνδ. ἀδικίας, in Acts viii. 23 above, Simon is described 
as “a bundle of iniquity”, compacted as it were of iniq- 
uity, (just as Cic. in Pison. 9, 21 calls a certain man “ani- 
mal ex omnium scelerum importunitate . . . concretum "); 
but besides the circumstance that this interpretation is. 
extremely bold, no examples ean be adduced of this 
tropieal use of the noun.* 

συν-δέω: in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down; 1. to tie 
together, to bind together. 2. to bind or fasten on all 
sides. 3. to bind just as (i. e. jointly with) another: 
pf. pass. ptep. ὡς συνδεδεμένοι, as fellow-prisoners [A.V. 
as bound with them], Heb. xiii. 3 (συνδεδεμένος τῷ oi- 
voxóo, Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 3). 


συνδοξάξω 


συν-δοξάζω: 1 aor. pass. συνεδοξάσθην; 1. to ap- 
prove together, join in approving: νόμοι συνδεδοξασμένοι 
ind πάντων, Aristot. pol. 5, 7 (9), 20 p. 1310", 15. 2: 
to glorify together (Vulg. conglorifico) : sc. σὺν Χριστῷ, to 
be exalted to the same glory to which Christ has been 
raised, Ro. viii. 17.* 

σύν-δουλος, -ov, 6, (σύν and δοῦλος), a fellow-servant ; 
one who serves the same master with another; thus used 
of a. the associate of a servant (or slave) in the 
proper sense: Mt. xxiv. 49. b. one who with others 
serves (ministers to) a king: Mt. xviii. 28, 29, 31,33. c. 
the colleague of one who is Christ’s servant in publishing 
the gospel: Col.i. 7; iv. 7 [(where ef. Bp. Lghtft.)]. d. 
one who with others acknowledges the same Lord, Jesus, 
and obeys his commands: Rev. vi. 11. e. one who 
with others is subject to the same divine authority in the 
Messianic economy: so of angels as the fellow-servants 
of Christians, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. (Moeris says, p. 
213, ὁμόδουλος ἀττικῶς, σύνδουλος ἑλληνικῶς. But the 
word is used by Arstph., Eur., Lysias.) * 

συνδρομή, -75, ἡ, (συντρέχω), a running together, con- 
course, esp. hostile or riotous: Acts xxi. 30. (Aristot. 
rhetor. 3, 10 p. 1411%, 29; Polyb., Diod., al.; 3 Macc. 
iii. 8.) * 

cvy-eyepo : 1 aor. συνήγειρα; 1 aor. pass. συνηγέρθην ; 
to raise together, to cause torise together; Vule.conresuscito 
[also conresurgo, resurgo]5 (rà πεπτωκότα, 4 Macc. ii. 14; 
pass. lo rise together from their seats, Is. xiv. 9; trop. 
λύπας kai θρήνους, Plut. mor. p. 117 c.); in the N. T. 
trop. to raise up together from moral death (see @ava- 
tos, 2) to a new and blessed life devoted to God: ἡμᾶς 


60 


τῷ Χριστῷ (risen from the dead, because the ground of | 


the new Christian life lies in Christ’s resurrection), Eph. 
ii. 6; Col. iii. 1; ἐν Χριστῷ, Col. ii. 12." 

συνέδριον. -ov, τό, (σύν and ἔδρα ; hence prop. ‘a sitting 
together’), in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down, any assembly 
(esp. of magistrates, judges, ambassadors), whether con- 
vened to deliberate or to pass judgment; Vulg. concilium ; 
in the Scriptures 1. any session or assembly of per- 
sons deliberating or adjudicating (Prov. xxii. 10; Ps. xxv. 
(xxvi) 4; Jer. xv. 17; 2 Macc. xiv. 5; 4 Mace. xvii. 
17): συνήγαγον συνέδριον, [A. V. gathered a council], Jn. 
xi. 47. 2. spec. a. the Sanhedrin, the great council 
at Jerusalem (Talm. 11322). consisting of seventy-one 
members, viz. scribes (see γραμματεύς, 2), elders, prom- 
inent members of the high-priestly families (hence called 
ἀρχιερεῖς ; see ἀρχιερεύς, 2), and the high-priest, the pres- 
ident of the body. The fullest periphrasis for Sanhe- 
drin is found in Mt. xxvi. 3 RG; Mk. xiv. 43, 53, (viz. 
οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ of γραμματεῖς καὶ oí πρεσβύτεροι). The 
more important causes were brought before this tribunal, 
inasmuch as the Roman rulers of Judza had left to it 
the power of trying such cases, and also of pronouncing 
sentence of death, with the limitation that a capital 
sentence pronounced by the Sanhedrin was not valid 
unless it were confirmed by the Roman procurator 


(cf. Jn. xviii. 31; Joseph. antt. 20, 9, 1). The Jews | 


trace the origin of the Sanhedrin to Num. xi. 16 sq. The 


| 





2 συνείδησις 
Sanhedrin [A. V. council] is mentioned in Mt. v. 22; 


xxvi 59; Mk. xiv.55; xv.1; Lk. xxii.66; Acts iv. 15; 
v. 21, 27, 94, 41; vi. 12, 15; xxii. 80; xxiii. 1, 6, 15, 20, 
28; xxiv. 20; used [(as in class. Grk.)] of the place 
of meeting in Acts iv. 15. b. the smaller tribunal 
or council (so A. V.) which every Jewish town had for 
the decision of the less important cases (see κρίσις, 4) : 
Mt. x. 17; Mk. xiii. 9. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syne- 
drium; Leyrer in Herzog ed.1 s. v. Synedrium [ Strack 
in ed. 2]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 23, IT., 
III. [and in Riehm p. 1595 sqq.]; Holtzmann in Schenkel 
v. p. 446 sqq. ; [BB. DD. s. v. Sanhedrim (esp. Ginsburg 
in Alex.'s Kitto) ; Hamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. pp. 1147 
-1155; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 553 sqq.; Far- 
rar, Life of Christ, Excurs. xiii. ].* 

συν-είδησις, -ews, 7, (συνεῖδον), Lat. conscientia, [lit. 
‘joint-knowledge’; see σύν, II. 41, i. e. a. the con- 
sciousness of anything: with a gen of the obj., τῶν ápap- 
τιῶν, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (τοῦ μύσους, Diod. 
4, 65; συνείδησις εὐγενής, consciousness of nobility; a 
soul mindful of its noble origin, Hdian. 7, 1, 8 [3 ed. 
Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what 
is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and 
shun the latter, commending the one, condemning the other ; 
conscience: with a gen. of the subj., ἡ a. τινος, Ro. ii. 
15 (where the idea of ἡ συνείδησις is further explained 
- 7) kai ἀπολογουμένων [cf. W. 580 (539); 
see ἀπολογέομαι, 2, and avupaprvpéo]); Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. 
viii. 7 [οἷ We 8.30;1.4.}. 10719 50x::99:2/C0:319 1239925 
v. 11; Heb. ix. 14 (ἡ τοῦ φαύλου συνείδησις, Philo, fragm., 
vol. ii. p. 659 ed. Mangey [vi. p. 217 sq. ed. Richter]) ; 
ἡ ἰδία συνείδησις, 1 Tim. iv. 2; ἄλλη συνείδ. i. q. ἄλλου 
twos συν. 1 Co. x. 29; διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν, for conscience’ 
sake, because conscience requires it (viz. the conduct 
in question), Ro. xiii. 5; in order not to occasion 
scruples of conscience (in another), 1 Co. x. 28; μηδὲν 
avaxpivew διὰ τὴν συνείδ. (anxiously) questioning nothing, 
as though such questioning were demanded by con- 
science, 1 Co. x. 25, 27; διὰ συνείδησιν θεοῦ, because con- 
science is impressed and governed by the idea of God 
(and so understands that griefs are to be borne accord- 
ing to God's will), 1 Pet. ii. 19; ἡ συνείδ. τοῦ εἰδώλου, a 
conscience impressed and controlled by an idea of the 
idol (i.e. by a notion of the idol's existence and power), 
1 Co. viii. 7 Rec.; τελειῶσαί τινα κατὰ τὴν συνείδησιν (sc. 
αὐτοῦ), so to perfect one that his own conscience is sat- 
isfied, i. e. that he can regard himself as free from guilt, 
Heb. ix. 9; ἐλέγχεσθαι ὑπὸ τῆς συν. Jn. viii. 9 (ὑπὸ τοῦ 
συνειδότος, Philo de Josepho ὃ 9 fin.; συνέχεσθαι τῇ συν- 
«i0. Sap. xvii.10); ἡ συνείδησις is said μαρτυρεῖν, Ro. ix. 
1; συμμαρτυρεῖν, Ro. ii. 15; τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συν. 2 Co. 
es With epithets: ἀσθενής, not strong enough to 
distinguish clearly between things lawful for a Christian 
and things unlawful, 1 Co. viii. 7,¢f.10; συνείδ. ἀγαθή, 
a conscience reconciled to God, 1 Pet. iii. 21; free from 
guilt, consciousness of rectitude, of right conduct, Acts 
xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, (Hdian. 6, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]) ; ἔχειν 
συνείδ. ἀγαθήν, 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16, (ἐν ἀγαθῇ συν- 


by καὶ μεταξὺ... 


συνεῖδον 


ειδ. ὑπάρχειν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.41,1); ἔχειν συν. καλήν, 
Heb. xiii. 18; συν. καθαρά, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. 1. 3, (Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 7, cf. ἁγνὴ συν. ibid. 1, 3; καθαρὸς τῇ συν- 
evdnoet, Ignat. ad Trall. 7, 2); ἀπρόσκοπος, Acts xxiv. 
16; πονηρά, ἃ mind conscious of wrong-doing, Heb. x. 
22 ([év συνειδήσει πονηρᾷ, * Teaching’ ete. 4, 14]; ἀπρε- 
ams, Leian. amor. 49). ἡ συνείδησις καθαρίζεται ἀπὸ κτλ. 
Heb. ix. 14; μολύνεται, 1 Co. viii. 7; μιαίνεται, Tit. i. 15, 
(μηδὲν ἑκουσίως ψεύδεσθαι μηδὲ μιαίνειν τὴν αὑτοῦ συνείδη- 
σιν, Dion. Hal. jud. Thue. 8. ἅπασιν ἡμῖν ἡ συνείδησις 
θεός, Menand. 597 p. 103 ed. Didot; βροτοῖς ἅπασιν ἡ συν- 
εἰδησις θεός, ibid. 654 p. 101 ed. Didot; Epictet. fragm. 
97 represents ἡ συνείδησις as filling the same office in 
adults which a tutor [παιδαγωγός, q. v.] holds towards 
boys; with Philo, Plutarch, and others, τὸ συνειδός is 
more common. In Sept. once for yy, Eccl. x. 20; [i.q. 
conscience, Sap. xvii. 11; cf. Delitzsch, Brief an d. Rom. 
p.11]. Cf.esp. Jahnel, Diss. de conscientiae notione, 
qualis fuerit apud veteres et apud Christianos usque ad 
aevi medii exitum. Berol. 1862 [also the same, Ueber den 
Begr. Gewissen in d. Griech. Philos. (Berlin, 1872)]; 
Kahler, Das Gewissen. I. die Entwickelung seiner Na- 
men u. seines Begriffes. i. Alterth. u. N. T. (Halle, 1878); 
[also in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Gewissen; Zezschwilz, Pro- 
fangrücitüt u.s.w. pp. 52-57; Schenkel, s. v. Gewissen 
both in Herzog ed. 1, and in his BL.; P. Ewald, De 
vocis συν. ap. script. Novi Test. vi ac potestate (pp. 91; 
1883); other reff. in Schaff-Herzog, s. v. Conscience ].* 

συν-εῖδον, ptep. curdev; pf. σύνοιδα, ptcp. fem. gen. 
συνειδυίας (Acts v. 2 R G,-ge LT Tr WH; ef. B. 12 (11); 
[ Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 1567); (see et8o) ; fr. 
Hdt. down; 1. to see (have seen) together with oth- 
ers. 2. to see (have seen) in one's mind, with one's 
self (cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 120; on Mark 
pp. 36 and 78; [see σύν, IT. 1 and 47), i. e. to understand, 
perceive, comprehend: συνιδών, when he had understood 
it, Acts xii. 12 [ A.V. considered]; xiv. 6 [became aware], 
(2 Maec. iv. 41; xiv. 26,30; 3 Macc. v. 50; Polyb. 1, 4, 
6; 3, 6, 9; etc.; Joseph. antt. 7, 15, 15 b. j. 4, 5, 4; Plut. 
Them. 7). Perfect σύνοιδα [cf. σύν; τι. 5.7 1. ἰο 
know with another, be privyto [so A.V.]: Actsv.2. 2. 
to know in one’s mind or with one’s self; to be conscious of: 
τὶ ἐμαυτῷ, 1 Co. iv. 4 [R. V. know nothing against myself 
(cf. Wright, Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v. * By)] (τὴν 
ἀδικίαν, Joseph. antt. 1, 1,4; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given 
by Passow s. v. σύνοιδα, a. ; [L. and S. s. v. σύνοιδα, 2]; 
foll. by ὅτι, (Dion. Hal. ii. 995, 9]; Barn. ep. 1, (4) 3).* 

σύν-ειμι, ptep. gen. plur. masc. συνόντων ; impf. 3 pers. 
plur. συνῆσαν; (σύν, and εἰμί to be) ; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 270 
down; to be with : rwi,one, Lk. ix. 18 [WH mre. συνήντη- 
cav]; Acts xxii. 11.* 

σύν-ειμι, ptep. συνιών; (ovv, and εἶμι to go); fr. Hom. 
down; to come together: Lk. viii. 4.* 

συν-εισ-έρχομαι : 2 aor. συνεισῆλθον ; to enter together: 
τινί, with one, — foll. by an ace. of the place, Jn. vi. 22; 
xviii. 15. (Eur., Thuc., Xen., al.; Sept.) * 

συν-έκδημος, -ov, 6, 7, (σύν, and ἔκδημος away from one's 
people), a fellow-traveller, companion in travel: Acts 


608 





συνεργός 


xix. 29; 2 Co. viii. 19.  ([Diod. fr. lib. 37, 5, 1 and 4 ed. 
Dind.]; Joseph. vit.14; Plut. Oth. 5; Palaeph. fab. 46, 4.)* 

συν-εκ-λεκτός, 7, -óv, (see ἐκλεκτός), elected or chosen 
(by God to eternal life) together with: 1 Pet. v. 13.* 

συν-ελαύνω : 1 aor. συνήλασα ; fr. Hom. down; to drive 
together, to compel; trop. to constrain by exhortation, 
urge: τινὰ eis εἰρήνην, to be at peace again, Acts vii. 26 
RG (eis τὸν τῆς σοφίας ἔρωτα, Ael. v. h. 4, 15).* 

συν-επι-μαρτυρέω, -à, ptep. gen. sing. masc. συνεπιμαρ- 
τυροῦντος ; lo attest together with; to join in bearing wit- 
ness, to unite in adding testimony: Heb. ii. 4. (Aristot. 
Polyb., [Plut.], Athen., Sext. Emp.; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
23, 5; 43, 1.) * 

συν-επι-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. συνεπεθέμην ; to place upon 
(or near) together with, help in putting on; mid. to attack 
jointly, to assail together, set upon with, (see ἐπιτίθημι, 
2b.): Acts xxiv. 9 GL T Tr WH [R V. joined in the 
charge] (so in Thue. 6, 10; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 3; Plat. 
Phileb. p. 16 a.; Polyb. 5, 78, 4; Diod. 1, 21).* 

συν-έπομαι : impf. συνειπόμην ; fr. Hom. down; to fol- 
low with, to accompany: τινί, one, Acts xx. 4.* 

συνεργέω, -à; impf. 3 pers. sing. συνήργει; (συνεργός, 
q. v.); fr. Eur., Xen., Dem. down; Vulg. codperor [(in 
2 Co. vi. 1 adjuvo)]; to work together, help in work, be a 
partner in labor: 1 Co. xvi. 16; 2 Co. vi. 1; to put forth 
power together with and thereby to assist, Mk. xvi. 20; 
τινί, with one ἡ πίστις συνήργει τοῖς ἔργοις, faith (was 
not inactive, but by coworking) caused Abraham to pro- 
duce works, Jas. ii. 22 [here Trtxt. cuvépye (hardly 
collat. form of συνείργω to unite, but) a misprint for 
-y&]; τινὶ εἴς τι (in prof. writ. also πρός τι, see Passow 
[or L. and S.] s. v.), to assist, help, (be serviceable to) 
one for a thing, Ro. viii. 28 [ A. V. ell things work together 


for good]; τί τινι εἴς τι, a breviloquence equiv. to συνερ- 


γῶν πορίζω τί τινι, so that ace. to the reading πάντα συν- 
epyet ὁ θεός the meaning is, ‘for them that love God, 
God coworking provides all things for good or so that 
it is well with them’ (Fritzsche), [R. V. mrg. God work- 
eth all things with them for good], Ro. viii. 28 Lehm. [WH 
in br.; ef. B. 193 (167)], (ἑαυτοῖς τὰ συμφέροντα, Xen. 
mem. 3, 5, 16). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. vol. ii. p. 
193 sq.* 

συνεργός, -όν, (σύν and EPYQ), [fr. Pind.], Eurip., 
Thue. down, a companion in work, fellow-worker, (Vulg. 
adjutor [Phil. ii. 25; 3 Jn. 8 coóperator]): in the N. T. 
with a gen. of the pers., one who labors with another in 
furthering the cause of Christ, Ro. xvi. 3, 9, 21; Phil. ii. 
25; iv. 3; [1 Th. iii. 2 Rec.]; Philem. 1, 24; θεοῦ, one 
whom God employs as an assistant, as it were (a fellow- 
worker with God), 1 Th. iii. 2 (G L txt. WH mrg. but 
with τοῦ θεοῦ in br.; Ree. et al. διάκονον, q. v. 1). plur.: 
1 Co. iii. 9; with gen. of the thing (a joint-promoter [ A. V. 
helper]), avv. ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς, we labor with you to the 
end that we may rejoice in your Christian state, 2 Co. i. 
94. εἰς ὑμᾶς, (my) fellow-worker to you-ward, in refer- 
ence to you, 2 Co. viii. 23; εἰς τὴν Bac. v. θεοῦ, for the 
advancement of the kingdom of God, Col. iv. 11; τῇ ἀλη- 
θείᾳ, for (the benefit of) the truth, [al. render (so R. V.) 


συνέρχομαι 


‘with the truth’; see Westcott ad loc.], 3 Jn. 8S. (2 
Mace. viii. 7; xiv. 5.) * 

συν-έρχομαι ; impf. συνηρχόμην ; 2 aor. συνῆλθον, once 
(Acts x.45 T Tr WH) 3 pers. plur. συνῆλθαν (see ἀπέρ- 
xouat, init.); pf. ptep. συνεληλυθώς; plupf. 3 pers. plur. 
συνεληλύθεισαν ; fr. Hom. down (Il. 10, 224 in tmesis) ; 
1. to come together, i. e. a. to assemble: absol., Mk. 
iii. 20; Actsi.6; 1.6; x.27; xvi. 13; xix. 32; xxi. 22; 
[xxii. 30 G LTTrWH]; xxvii. 17; [1 Co. xiv. 20; 
foll. by éx with gen. of place, Lk. v. 17 Lehm. txt.]; foll. 
by eis with an ace. of the place, Acts v. 16 ; πρός τινα, 
Mk.vi.33 Rec.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό [see ἐπί, C. I. 1 d.], 1 Co. xi. 
20; xiv. 23 [here L txt. ἔλθῃ}; with a dat. of the pers. 
with one, which sofar as the sense is concerned is equiv. 
to unto one (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2; [L. 
and S. s. v. II. 1 and 3; cf. W. 215 (202)]), Mk. xiv. 53 
[here T WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the dat.]; Jn. xi. 33; 
with adverbs of place: ἐνθάδε, Acts xxv. 17; ὅπου, Jn. 
xviii. 20: [foll by an infin. of purpose, Lk. v.15]; foll. 
by eis, — indicating either the end, as εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν, 1 Co. 
xi. 33; or the result, 1 Co. xi. 17, 34; ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, in 
sacred assembly [R. V. mrg. in congregation], 1 Co. xi. 
18 (W. § 50, 4 a.). b. Like the Lat. convenio i. q. 
coco: of conjugal cohabitation, Mt. i. 18 [but cf. Weiss 
ad loc. (and the opinions in Meyer)] (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 
4; Diod. 3, 58; Philo de caritat. $14; de fortitud. § 7; 
de speciall. lege. $4; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1 and 7, 9, 5; 
Apollod. bibl. 1, 3, 3) ; with ἐπὶ rd αὐτό added, 1 Co. vii. 
5 Rec. 2. to go (depart) or come with one, to ac- 
company one (see ἔρχομαι, II. p. 252%): τινί, with one, Lk. 
xxiii. 55 [Tr txt. br. the dat.]; Acts i. 21 [here A. V. 
company with]; ix. 39; x. 23,45; xi. 12; with eis, τὸ 
ἔργον added, Acts xv. 38; σύν τινι, Acts xxi. 10." 

συν-εσθίω : impf. συνήσθιον ; 2 aor. συνέφαγον ; to eat 
with, take food together with [cf. σύν, IL. 1]: τινί, with 
one, Lk. xv. 2; Acts x. 41; xi. 3; 1Co. v. 11, (2 S. xii. 
17); μετά τινος, Gal. ii. 12; Gen. xliii. 31; Ex. xviii. 12, 
[cf. W. $52, 4, 15]. (Plat., Plut., Lcian.)* 

σύνεσις. -ews, 7, (συνίημι, q. v-) ; 1. a running 
together, a flowing together: of two rivers, Hom. Od. 10, 
515. 2. a. fr. Pind. down, understanding: Lk. 
ii. 47; 1Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. xxix. 14); Eph. iii. 4; Col. ii. 
2; 2 Tim. ii. 7; πνευματική, Col. i. 9. b. the under- 
standing, i. e. the mind so far forth as it understands: Mk. 
xii.33; Sap.iv.11. (Sept. for 723, nan, nj", 71, 
Saw, ete. ; also for Sawn, apoem.) [Syn. see σοφία, fin.; 
ef. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 9; Schmidt ch. 147, 8.]* 

συνετός, -7), -óv, (συνίημι), fr. Pind. down, Sept. for D3n, 
123, ete., intelligent, having understanding, wise, learned: 
Mt. xi. 95; Lk. x. 21; Acts xiii. 7; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. 
xxix. 14). [Svw. see σοφός, fin.]* 

συν-ευτδοκέω, -ῶ; (see evdoxéw, init.) ; a. to be 
pleased together with, to approve together (with others) : 
absol. (yet so that the thing giving pleasure is evident 
from the context), Acts xxii. 20 GL T Tr WH; witha 
dat. of the thing, Lk. xi. 48; Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Rec. 
([Polyb. 24, 4, 13]; 1 Macc. i. 57; 2 Macc. xi. 24). b. 
to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to, 


604 





συνήθεια 


([Polyb. 32, 22, 9]; 2 Mace. xi. 85); foll. by an inf. 1 Co. 
vii. 12 sq. [R.V. here be content]; w. a dat. of a pers. to 
applaud [R. V. consent with], Ro.i.32. (Diod.; eccles. 
writ.) * 

συν-ευωχέω, -à: pres. pass. ptep. συνευωχούμενος ; (εὐω- 
χέω, to feed abundantly, to entertain; fr. εὖ and ἔχω) ; 
to entertain together; pass. to feast sumptuously with : 
Jude 12; τινί, with one, 2 Pet. ii. 13. ([Aristot. eth. 
Eud. 7, 12, 14 p. 1245», 5], Joseph., Leian., al.) * 

συν-εφ-ίστημι: (o place over or appoint together; 2 aor. 
συνεπέστην; to rise up together: κατά τινος, against one, 
Acts xvi. 22. [(From Thue. down.)]* 

cvv-éxo; fut. συνέξω; 2 aor. συνέσχον ; Pass, pres. 
συνέχομαι; impf. συνειχύμην ; fr. Hom. down; 1 
to hold together ; any whole, lest it fall to pieces or some- 
thing fall away from it: τὸ συνέχον rà πάντα. the deity 
as holding all things together, Sap. i. 7 (see Grimm ad 
loc.). 2. to hold together with constraint, to com- 
press, i. e. a. to press together with the hand: rà 
ὦτα, to stop the ears, Acts vii. 57 (τὸ στόμα, Is. lii. 15; 
τὸν οὐρανόν, to shut, that it may not rain, Deut. xi. 17; 1 
K. viii. 35). b. to press on every side: τινά, Lk. viii. 
45; with πάντοθεν added, of a besieged city, Lk. xix. 
43. 3. to hold completely, i. e. a. to hold fast: 
prop. a prisoner, Lk. xxii. 63 (τὰ αἰχμάλωτα, Leian. Tox. 
39); metaph. in pass. to be held by, closely occupied with, 
any business (Sap. xvii. 19 (20) ; Hdian. 1, 17, 22, (9 
ed. Dekk.); Ael. v. h. 14, 22): τῷ λόγῳ, in teaching the 
word, Acts xviii. 5 G L'T Tr WH [here R.V. constrained 
by]. B. to constrain, oppress, of ills laying hold of 
one and distressing him; pass. to be holden with i.q. 
afflicted with, suffering from: νόσοις, Mt. iv. 24; πυρετῷ, 
Lk. iv. 38; δυσεντερίῳ, Acts xxviii. 8 (many exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down are given in Passow 
s. v. συνέχω, I.a.; [L. and S. s. v. I. 4]); of affections 
of the mind: φόβῳ, Lk. viii. 37 (ὀδυρμῷ, Ael. v. h. 14, 
22; ἀλγηδόνι, Plut. de fluv. 2, 1; ἀθυμίᾳ, ib. 7, 5; 19, 1; 
λύπῃ, 17,3; for other exx. see Grimm on Sap. xvii. 
10). y. to urge, impel: trop. the soul, ἡ ἀγάπη . .. 
συνέχει ἡμᾶς, 2 Co. v. 14 [ A. V. constraineth]; πῶς (how 
greatly, how sorely) συνέχομαι, Lk. xii. 50 [ A. V. strait- 
ened]; τῷ πνεύματι, Acts xviii. 5 Rec. συνέχομαι ἐκ 
τῶν δύο, lam hard pressed on both sides, my mind is 
impelled or disturbed from each side [R. V. J am in a 
strait betwixt the two], Phil. i. 23.* 

συνΐ-, see συζ, and σύν, II. sub fin. 

συν-ήδομαι ; 1. in Grk. writ. chiefly fr. Soph., 
Eur. Xen. down, to rejoice together with (another or 
others [ef. σύν, II. 1]). 2. in the N. T. once to re- 


joice or delight with one's self or inwardly (see σύν, II. 


4): τινί, in a thing, Ro. vii. 22, where cf. Fritzsche; [al. 
refer this also to 1; cf. Meyer].* 

συνήθεια, -as, ἡ, (συνηθής, and this fr. σύν and ἦθος), fr. 
Isocr., Xen., Plat. down, Lat. consuetudo, i. e. 1. in- 
tercourse (with one), intimacy : 4 Macc. xiii. 21. 2. 
custom: Jn. xviii. 39 [cf. B. $139, 45]; 1 Co. xi. 16. 3. 
a being used to: with a gen. of the object to which one 
is accustomed, 1 Co. viii. 7 L T Tr ΝῊ." 


συνηλικιώτης 


συν-ηλικιώτης, -ου, ὁ, (fr. σύν, and ἡλικία α. v.), one of 
the same age, an equal in age: Gal. 1.14. (Diod. 1, 53 
fin.; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 49 init.; but in both pass. the 
best codd. have ἡλικιώτης ; [Corp. inserr. iii. p. 434 no. 
4929]; Aleiphr. 1, 12). Cf. συμμαθητής." 

συνθάπτω: 2 aor. pass. συνετάφην ; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down; to bury together with: rà Χριστῷ, together 
with Christ, pass., διὰ rod βαπτίσματος eis τὸν θάνατον sc. 
αὐτοῦ, Ro. vi. 4; ἐν τῷ βαπτίσματι, Col. ii. 12. For all 
who in the rite of baptism are plunged under the water, 
thereby declare that they put faith in the expiatory 
death of Christ for the pardon of their past sins; there- 
fore Paullikens baptism to a burial by which the former 
sinfulness is buried, i. e. utterly taken away.* 

συν-θλάω, -à: 1 fut. pass. συνθλασθήσομαι; to break to 
pieces, shatter, (Vulg. confringo, conquasso) : Mt. xxi. 
44 [but T om. L Tr mrz. WH br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18. 
(Sept.; [Manetho, Alex. ap. Athen., Eratosth., Aristot. 
(v. L.) ], Diod., Plut., al.) * 

συν-θλίβω ; impf. συνέθλιβον ; to press together, press on 
all sides: τινά, of a thronging multitude, Mk. v. 24, 31. 
(Plat.. Aristot., Strab., Joseph., Plut.) * 

συν-θρύπτω, ptep. nom. plur. masc. συνθρύπτοντες ; to 
break in pieces, to crush: metaph. τὴν καρδίαν, to break 
one's heart, i.e. to deprive of strength and courage, 
dispirit, incapacitate for enduring trials, Acts xxi. 13. 
(In eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * 

συν-ιέω, see συνίημι. 

συν-ίημι, 2 pers. plur. συνίετε, 3 pers. plur..cumotow 
(Mt. xiii. 13 RG T; 2 Co. x. 12 Rec., fr. the unused 
form συνιέω), and συνιᾶσιν (2 Co. x. 122 L' T Tr WH), and 
συνίουσιν (Mt. xiii. 13 L Tr WH fr. the unused συνίω), 
subjune. 3 pers. plur. συνιῶσι (RG LT Tr in Mk. iv. 12 
and Lk. viii. 10, fr. the unused συνιέω or fr. συνίημι) and 
’συνίωσι (WH in Mk. and Lk. ll. cc., tr.the unused avvio), 
impv. 2 pers. plur. συνίετε, inf. συνιέναι, ptep. συνιῶν (Ro. 
iii. 11 RG T fr. συνιέω), and συνίων (ibid. L Tr WH, and 
often in Sept., fr. συνίω), and συνιείς (Mt. xiii. 23 L T Tr 
WH; Eph. v. 17 RG; but quite erroneously συνιών, Grsb. 
in Mt. l. c. [ Alf. in Ro. iii. 11 ; cf. WH. App. p. 167; Τὰ ἢ 
Proleg. p. 122]; W.81(77 sq.); Β. 48 (42); Fritzsche on 
Rom. vol. i. p. 174 sq.); fut. συνήσω (Ro. xv. 21); 1 aor. 
συνῆκα; 2 aor. subjunc. συνῆτε, συνῶσι, impv. 2 pers. 
plur. σύνετε (Mk. vii. 14 L T Tr WI); (σύν, and tg to 
send) ; 1. prop. to set or bring together, in a hostile 
sense, of combatants, Hom. Il. 1, 8; 7, 210. 2. to 
put (as it were) the perception with the thing per- 
ceived; to set or join together in the mind, i.e. to under- 
stand, (so fr. Hom. down; Sept. for r3 and Sawn): 
with an acc. of the thing, Mt. xiii. 23, 51; Lk. ii. 50; 
xviii. 34; xxiv. 45; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xvi. 12 ; xvii. 13; 
foll. by an We quest., Eph. v. 17; ézi rois ἄρτοις, ‘on 
the loaves’ as the basis of their reasoning [see ἐπί, B. 2 
a. a.], Mk. vi. 52; where what is understood is evident 
from the preceding context, Mt. xiii. 19; xv. 10; Mk. 
vii. 145 absol. Mt. xiii. 13-15 ; xv. 10; Mk. iv. 12 ; viii. 
17,21; Lk. viii. 10; Acts vii. 25; xxviii. 26sq.; Ro. xv. 
21; 2 Co. x. 123; ὁ συνιῶν or συνίων as subst. [B. 295 


605 











συνοικέω 


(253 54.); W. 109 (104)], the man of understanding, 
Hebraistieally i. q. a good and upright man (as having 
knowledge of those things which pertain to salvation ; 
see μωρός) : Ro. iii. 11 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2). [Sxw. see 
γινώσκω, fin.]* 

συνιστάνω and συνιστάω, see the foll. word. 

συν-ίστημι (Ro. iii. 5; v. 8; xvi. 1; 2 Co. x. 18; Gal. 
ii. 18 Rec.; ptep. συνιστάντες, 2 Co. iv. 2L T Tr; vi. 4L 
T Tr), or συνιστάνω (2 Co. v. 12; Gal. ii. 18 GL T Tr 
WH,;; inf. συνιστάνειν, 2 Co. iii. 1 R GT WH; ptep. συν- 
ἱστάνων, 2 Co. iv. 2 WH; vi. WH; x. 12, I8 LT Tr 
WH), or συνιστάω (inf. συνιστᾶν, 2 Co. iii. 1 L Tr; ptep. 
συνιστῶν, 2 Co. iv. 2 Βα; vi. 43R G; x. 18 Rec.; see 
ἵστημι) ; 1 aor. συνέστησα; pf. συνέστηκα; 2 pf. ptep. συν- 
earós [nom. plur. neut. -τῶτα, 2 Pet. iii. 5 WH mrg.]; pres. 
pass. inf. συνίστασθαι ; fr. Hom. Il. 14, 96 down; 3 
to place together, to set in the same place, to bring or band 
together; in the 2 aor., pf. and plupf. intransitively, to 
stand with (or near): συνεστώς τινι, Lk. ix. 32. 2. 
to set one with another i.e. by way of presenting or 
introducing him, i. e. to commend (Xen., Plat., Dem., 
Polyb., Joseph., Plut.): τινά, 2 Co. iii. 1; vi. 4; x. 12, 
18; τινά τινι, Ro. xvi. 1; 2 Co. v. 12 [cf. B. 393 (336)]; 
τινὰ πρὸς συνείδησίν τινος, 2 Co. iv. 2; pass. ὑπό Twos, 2 
Co. xii. 11, (1 Mace. xii. 48; 2 Mace. iv. 24). 3. 
to put together by way of composition or combination, 
to teach by combining and comparing, hence to show, 
prove, establish, exhibit, [W. 23 (22)]: τί, Ro. iii. 5; v. 8, 
(εὔνοιαν, Polyb. 4, 5, 6); ἑαυτοὺς ὥς τινες, 2 Co. vi. 4; 
with two acc. one of the object, the other of the predi- 
cate, Gal. ii. 18 (Diod. 13,91; συνίστησιν αὐτὸν προφήτην, 
Philo rer. div. haer. $ 52) ; foll. by an acc. with inf. [cf. 
B. 274 (236)], 2 Co. vii. 11 (Diod. 14, 45). 4. to 
put together (i. e. unite parts into one whole), pf., plupf. 
and 2 aor. to be composed of, consist: ἐξ ὕδατος x. δ ὕδα- 
τος, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [cf. W. § 45,6 ἃ. ; (see above, init.)]; to 
cohere, hold together : τὰ πάντα συνέστηκεν ἐν αὐτῷ, Col. i. 
17 (Plat. de rep. 7 p. 530 a.; Tim. p. 61 a.; [Bonitz’s 
index to Aristotle (Berlin Acad. ed.) s. v. συνιστάναι], and 
often in eccles. writ.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]).* 

[συν-κατα-νεύω : 1 aor. ptep. συνκατανεύσας ; to consent 
to, agree with : Acts xviii. 27 WH (rejected) mrg. (Polyb. 
Shoe} Ὁ 5 812}. 

συνκ-. See συγκ- 

συνλ-, see συλὰλ- 

συνμ-, see συμμ- 

συν-οδεύω; to journey with, travel in company with : with 
a dat. of the pers, Acts ix. 7. (Hdian. 4, 7, 11 [6 ed. 
Bekk.], Leian., Plut., al.; Sap. vi. 25.) * 

συνοδία, -as, 7, (σύνοδος), a journey in company; by 
meton. a company of travellers, associates on a journey, a 
caravan, [A. V. company]: Lk. ii. 44. (Strab., Plut., 
[ Epiet. ., Joseph.; ξυνοδεία, Gen. xxxvii. 25 cod. Venet. 
aq. family, Neh. vii. 5, 64, Sept.], al.) * 

συν-οικέω, -ῶ; to dwell together (Vulg. cohabito) : of the 
domestic association and intercourse of husband and 
wife, 1 Pet. iii. 7; for many exx. of this use, see Passow 
[L. and S. s. v. I. 2].* 


cf. σύν, II. fin. 


Spivak 


συνοικοδομέω 


συν-οικοδομέω, -ῶ: pres. pass. συνοικοδομοῦμαι; (Vulg. 
coaedifico) ; to build together i. e. a. to build together 
or with others [1 Esdr. v. 65 (66) ]. b. to put togeth- 
er or construct by building, out of several things to build 
up one whole, (οἰκία εὖ συνῳκοδομημένη καὶ συνηρμοσμένη, 
of the human body, Philo de praem. et poen. § 20): Eph. 
ii. 22. (Besides, in Thue., Diod., Dio Cass., Plut.) * 

συν-ομιλέω, -ὦ ; fo talk with: τινί, one, Acts x. 27. (to 
hold intercourse with, [Ceb. tab. 13 ; Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 
1], Epiphan., Tzetz.) * 

συν-ομορέω, -@; (συνόμορος, having joint boundaries, 
bordering on, fr. σύν and ὅμορος, and this fr. ὁμός joint, 
and ὅρος a boundary); to border on, be contiguous to, 
ΓΔ. V. join hard]: τινί, to a thing, Acts xviii. 7. (By- 
zant. writ.) * 

συν-οχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συνέχω, q. v.), a holding together, nar- 
rowing; narrows, the contracting part of a way, Hom. II. 
23, 330. Metaph. straits, distress, anguish: Lk. xxi. 25; 
with καρδίας added, 2 Co. ii. 4, (contractio animi, Cic. Tuse. 
1, 37, 90; opp. to effusio, 4, 31, 66; συνοχὴν x. ταλαιπω- 
ρίαν, Job xxx. 3; [ef. Judg. ii. 3; plur. Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 
17 Aq.])-* 

συνπ-, see συμπ- 

[συνσ-, see συσ- and evaec-] 

συνστ-, see συστ- 

συν-τάσσω: 1 aor. συνέταξα; fr. Hdt. down; a. 
to put in order with or together, to arrange ; b. to 
(put together), constitute, i. e. to prescribe, appoint, (Aes- 
chin., Dem.; physicians are said συντάσσειν φάρμακον, 
Ael. v. h. 9, 13; [Plut. an sen. sit gerend. resp. 4, 8]) : 
τινί, Mt. xxi. 6 L' Tr WH; xxvi. 19; xxvii. 10; Sept. 
often for rmx.* 

συντέλεια, -as, 7, (συντελής), completion, consummation, 
end, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. on; Sept. chiefly for 
023; for YP in Dan. xii. 4, 13; in other senses fr. Aes- 
chyl. down): αἰῶνος or τοῦ αἰῶνος, Mt. xiii. 39,40 L T Tr 
WH, 49; xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; τοῦ αἰῶνος rovrov, Mt. xiii. 
40 RG; τῶν αἰώνων, Heb. ix. 26 (see αἰών, 3 p. 19" bot. 
[cf. Herm. vis. 9, 12, 3 and Hilgenfeld ad loc.]); καιροῦ 
and καιρῶν, Dan. ix. 27; xii. 4; τῶν ἡμερῶν, ibid. 13; 
ἀνθρώπου. of his death, Sir. xi. 27 (25); cf. xxi. 9.* 

συν-τελέω, -à ; fut. συντελέσω ; 1 aor. cuveréAeca; Pass., 
pres. inf. συντελεῖσθαι ; 1 aor. συνετελέσθην (Jn. ii. 3 T 
WH ‘rejected’ mrg.), ptep. συντελεσθείς ; fr. Thuc. and 
Xen. down; Sept. often for 1322; also sometimes for 
DIA, ny, etc. ; 1. to end together or at the same 
2. to end completely; bring to an end, finish, 
complete: τοὺς λόγους, Mt. vii. 28 RG; τὸν πειρασμόν, 
Lk. iv. 13; ἡμέρας, pass., Lk. iv. 2; Acts xxi. 27, (Job i. 
55 Lob. x. 7). 3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment; 
pass. to come to pass, Mk. xiii. 4; λόγον, a word, i. e. a 
prophecy, Ro. ix. 28 (ῥῆμα, Lam. ii. 17). 4. to 
effect, make, [cf. our conclude]: διαθήκην, Heb. viii. 8 
(Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 8, 15). 5. to finish, i.e. in a use 
foreign to Grk. writ., to make an end of: συνετελέσθη ὁ 
οἶνος τοῦ γάμου, [was at an end with], Jn. ii. 3 Tdf. after 
cod. Sin. (Ezek. vii. 15 for bon; to bring to an end, de- 
stroy, for 1122, Jer. xiv. 12; xvi. 4).* 


cf. σύν, II. fin. 


time. 


606 





συντρίβω 


συν-τέμνω; pf. pass. ptep. συντετμημένος ; fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down; 1. t0 cul to pieces, [cf. σύν, II. 
3]. 2. to cut short; metaph. to despatch briefly, ex- 
ecute or finish quickly 5 ta hasten, (συντέμνειν sc. τὴν ὁδόν, 
to take a short cut, go the shortest way, Hdt. 7, 123; se. 
τὸν λόγον, to speak briefly, Eur. Tro. 441; τὰς ἀποκρίσεις, 
to abridge, sum up, Plat. Prot. p.334 d.; ἐν βραχεῖ πολλοὺς 
λόγους, Arstph. "Thesm. 178): λόγον [q. v. I. 2 b. a.], to 
bring a prophecy or decree speedily to accomplishment, 
Ro. ix. 28; λόγος συντετμημένος, a short word, i. e. an ex- 
pedited prophecy or decree, ibid. [RG Tr mrg. in br.] 
(both instances fr. Sept. of Is. x. 23) ; ef. Fritzsche ad 
loc. vol. ii. p. 350.* 

συν-τηρέω, -@: impf. 3 pers. sing. συνετήρει ; pres. pass. 
3 pers. plur. συντηροῦνται; [fr. Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 
816*, 8 down]; a. to preserve (athing from perish- 
ing or being lost) : τί, pass. (opp. to ἀπόλλυσθαι), Mt. ix. 
17; Lk. v. 38 [Ὁ WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; τινά, to guard 
one, keep him safe, fr. a plot, Mk. vi. 20 (ἑαυτὸν ἀναμάρ- 
τητον, 2 Macc. xii. 42 [cf. Tob. i. 11 ; Sir. xiii. 12]). b. 
to keep within one’s self, keep in mind (a thing, lest it be 
forgotten [ef. σύν, IT. 4]) : πάντα rà ῥήματα, Lk. ii. 19 (τὸ 
ῥῆμα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ pov, Dan. vii. 28 Theod.; τὴν γνώμην 
παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Polyb. 31, 6, 5; [absol. Sir. xxxix. 2]).* 

συν-τίθημι : Mid., 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. συνέθεντο; plpf. 
3 pers. plur. συνετέθειντο; fr. Hom. down; (o put with or 
together, to place together; to join together; Mid. a. 
to place in one's mind, i. e. to resolve, determine; — to 
make an agreement, to engage, (often so in prof. writ. fr. 
Hat. down; cf. Passow s. v. 2 b.; [L. and S. s. v. B. II.]): 
συνετέθειντο, they had agreed together [ W. § 38, 3], foll. 
by tva, Jn. ix. 22 [W. $ 44, 8 b.] ; συνέθεντο, they agreed 
together, foll. by rod with an inf. [ B. 270 (232)], Acts 
xxiii. 20; they covenanted, foll. by an inf. [B. u. s.], Lk. 
xxii. 5. b. to assent to, to agree to: Acts xxiv. 9 
Rec. [see συνεπιτίθημι] (τινί, Lys. in Harpoer. [s. v. Kap- 
ktvos] p. 106, 9 Bekk.).* 

συν-τόμως, (συντέμνω), [fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down], 
adv., concisely i. e. briefly, in few words: ἀκοῦσαί τινος, 
Acts xxiv. 4 (γράψαι, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 1; διδάσκειν, ibid. 
1, 6, 2; [eizeiv, ibid. 2, 14, 1; ἐξαγγέλλειν, Mk. xvi. WH 
(rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]); for exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin.* 

cw-rpéxo; 2 aor. συνέδραμον; fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl., 
Hdt. down; 1. to run together: of the gathering 
of a multitude of people, ἐκεῖ, Mk. vi. 33; πρός τινα, Acts 
iii. 11. 2. to run along with others; metaph. to rush 
with i. e. cast one's self, plunge, 1 Pet. iv. 4. [Comp.: 
ἐπι-συντρέχω.] * 

συν-τρίβω, ptep. neut. -τρίβον Lk. ix. 39 RG Tr, -rpi- 
Bov LT WH (cf. Veitch s. v. τρίβω, fin.) ; fut. συντρίψω; 
1 aor. συνέτριψα ; Pass., pres. συντρίβομαι ; pf. inf. συν- 
τετρίφθαι [RG Tr WH; but -τρῖφθαι LT (cf. Veitch 
τι. 8.)], ptep. συντετριμμένος ; 2 fut. συντριβήσομαι; fr. 
Hat. [(?), Eurip.] down; Sept. very often for 12; to 
break, to break in pieces, shiver, [cf. σύν, II. 3]: κάλαμον, 
Mt. xii. 20; ras πέδας, pass. Mk. v. 4; τὸ ἀλάβαστρον (the 
sealed orifice of the vase [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Alabaster]), 


σύντριμμα 


Mk. xiv. 3; ὀστοῦν, pass. Jn. xix. 36 (Ex. xii. 46; Ps. 
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 21); τὰ σκεύη, Rev. ii. 27; to tread 
down: τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς mó0as (by a pregn. constr. 
[W. $66, 2 d.]), to put Satan under foot and (as a con- 
queror) trample on him, Ro. xvi. 20; to break down, 
crush : τινά, to tear one’s body and shatter one's strength, 
Lk.ix.39. Pass. to suffer extreme sorrow and be, as it 
were, crushed: of συντετριμμένοι τὴν καρδίαν [cf. W. 229 
(215)], i. q- of ἔχοντες τὴν καρδίαν συντετριμμένην, [ A. V 
the broken-hearted], Lk. iv. 18 Rec. fr. Is. Ixi. 1 ([cf. Ps. 
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19; exlvi. (exlvii.) 3, ete.]; συντριβῆναι 
τῇ διανοίᾳ, Polyb. 21, 10, 2; 31, 8, 11; rots φρονήμασι, 
Diod. 11, 78; [rats ἐλπίσιν, 4,66 ; rats ψυχαῖς, 16, 81]).* 
σύν-τριμμα, -ros, τό, (συντρίβω), Sept. chiefly for 33]; 
1. that which is broken or shattered, a fracture: Aristot. 
de audibil. p. 802", 34; of a broken limb, Sept. Lev. xxi. 
19. 2. trop. calamity, ruin, destruction: Ro. iii. 16, 
fr. Is. lix. 7, where it stands for ἰδ, a devastation, laying 
waste, as in xxii. 4; Sap. iii. 3; 1 Mace. ii. 7; [etc.].* 
σύν-τροφος, -ov, 6, (συντρέφω), [fr. Hdt. down], nour- 
ished with one (Vulg. collactaneus [ Eng. foster-brother]) ; 
brought up with one; univ. companion of one's child- 
hood and youth: twés (of some prince or king), Acts 
xiii. 1. (1 Macc.i. 6; 2 Macc. ix. 29; Polyb. 5, 9, 4; 
Diod. 1, 53; Joseph. b. j. 1, 10, 9; Ael. v. h. 12, 26.) * 
Συντύχη and (so Tdf. edd. 7, 8; cf. Lipsius, Gramm. 
Untersuch. p. 31; [ Tf. Proleg. p.103; Kühner $84 fin.; 
on the other hand, Chandler $ 199]) Συντυχή, 7, [ace. 
-nv], Syntyche, a woman belonging to the church at 
Philippi: Phil. iv. 2. (The name occurs several times 
in Grk. inserr. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. e. ].)* 
συν-τυγχάνω: 2 aor. inf. συντυχεῖν; fr. [Soph.], Hdt. 
down; to meet with, come to [ A. V. come at] one: with a 
dat. of the pers., Lk. viii. 19.* 
συν-υπο-κρίνομαι: 1 aor. pass. συνυπεκρίθην, with the 
force of the mid. [cf. B. 52 (45)]; to dissemble with: 
Twi, one, Gal.ii.13. (Polyb. 3, 92, 5 and often; see 
Schweighaeuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 604; Plut. Marius, 14, 
17)* 
συν-υπουργέω, -à ; (ὑπουργέω to serve, fr. ὑπουργός, and 
this fr. ὑπό and EPTQ); to help together: τινί, by any 
thing, 2 Co. i. 11. (Leian. bis accusat. c. 17 συναγωνι- 
Coperns τῆς ἡδονῆς, ἥπερ αὐτῇ rà πολλὰ Évvvrovpye.) * 
συνφ-, see συμῴφ- 
συνχ-: see συγχ- 
συνψ-, see συμψ- 
συν-ωδίνω ; a. prop. to feel the pains of trovail 
with, be in travail together: οἷδε ἐπὶ τῶν ζώων τὰς ὠδῖνας ὁ 
σύνοικος καὶ συνωδίνει γε τὰ πολλὰ ὥσπερ καὶ ἀλεκτρυόνες, 
Porphyr. de abstin. 3, 10; [cf. Aristot. eth. Eud. 7, 6 
p. 12405, 36]. b. metaph. to undergo agony (like a 
woman in childbirth) a/ong with: Ro. viii. 22 (where 
σύν refers to the several parts of which ἡ κτίσις consists, 
cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; κακοῖς, Eur. Hel. 727.* 
συνωμοσία, -as, 7, (συνόμνυμι), fr. Arstph. and Thuc. 
down, a swearing together; a conspiracy: συνωμοσίαν 
ποιεῖν (see ποιέω, I. 1 c. p. 525* top), Acts xxiii. 13 Rec. ; 
ποιεῖσθαι (see ποιέω, I. 3), ibid. L T Tr WH.* 


cf. σύν, 11. fin. 


607 








σύρω 


Συράκουσαι [so accented commonly (Chandler §§ 172, 
175); but aec. to Pape, Eigennamen, s. v., -κοῦσαι in 
Ptol. 3, 4, 9; 8,9, 4], τῶν, ai, Syracuse, a large maritime 
city of Sicily, having an excellent harbor and surrounded 
by a wall 180 stadia in length [so Strabo 6 p. 270; “but 
this statement exceeds the truth, the actual circuit being 
about 14 Eng. miles or 122 stadia" (Leake p. 279) ; see 
Dict. of Geogr. s. v. p. 1067*]; now Siragosa: Acts 
xxviii. 12.* 

Συρία, -as, 7, Syria; in the N. T. a region of Asia, 
bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges, 
on the E.by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by 
Palestine, and on the W. by Phenicia and the Mediter- 
ranean, [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Syria; Ryssel in Herzog ed. 2, 
s. v. Syrien; cf. also ᾿Αντιόχεια, 1 and Δαμασκός]: Mt. iv. 
24; Lk.ii.2; Aetsxv.23,41; xvili.18; xx. 3; xxi. 3; 
Gal. i. 21. [On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.]* 

Σύρος, -ov, 6, α Syrian, i. e. a native or an inhabitant 
of Syria: Lk. iv. 27; fem. Svpa, a Syrian woman, Mk. 
vii. 26 Treg. [(Hdt., al.)]* 

Συροφοίνισσα (so Rec.; a form quite harmonizing 
with the analogies of the language, for as KOu£ forms 
the fem. Κίλισσα, Θρᾷξ the fem. Θρᾷσσα, ἄναξ the fem. 
ἄνασσα, so the fem. of Φοίνιξ is always, by the Greeks, 
called Φοίνισσα), Συροφοινίκισσα (so LT WH; hardly a 
pure form, and one which must be derived fr. Φοινίκη ; 
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 296 sq.; W. 95 (91)), vpaor- 
νίκισσα (Grsb.; ἃ form which conflicts with the law of 
composition), -ys, 7, (Tr ΝῊ mrg. Zópa Φοινίκισσα), © 
Syrophenician woman, i.e. of Syrophoenice by race, 
that is, from the Phoenice forming a part of Syria (Svpo 
being prefixed for distinction’s sake, for there were also 
Λιβυφοίνικες, i. e. the Carthaginians. The Greeks in- 
cluded both Phenicia and Palestine under the name 
ἡ Συρία; hence Συρία ἡ Παλαιστίνη in Hdt. 3, 91; 4, 39; 
Just. Mart. apol. i. 1; and ἡ Φοινίκη Συρία, Diod. 19, 93 ; 
Συροφοινίκη, Just. Mart. dial. c. Tryph. c. 78, p. 305 a.) = 
Mk. vii. 26 [cf. B. D. s. v. Syro-Phenician]. (The masc. 
Supopoimé is found in Leian. coneil. deor. c. 4; [Syro- 
phoeniz in Juv. sat. 8, 159 (ef. 160)].) * 

Dipris[Lehm. σῦρτις ; ef. Τα. Proleg. p. 103; Chand- 
ler § 650], -ews, ace. -wv, ἡ, (σύρω, q. v. [al. fr. Arab. sert 
i.e. ‘desert’; al. al., see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ]). Syrtis, 
the name of two places in the African or Libyan Sea 
between Carthage and Cyrenaica, full of shallows and 
sandbanks, and therefore destructive to ships; the west- 
ern Syrtis, between the islands Cercina and Meninx [or 
the promontories of Zeitha and Brachodes], was called 
Syrtis minor, the eastern [extending from the promon- 
tory of Cephalae on the W. to that of Boreum on the E.] 
was called Syrtis major (sinus Psyllicus); this latter 
must be the one referred to in Acts xxvii. 17, for upon 
this the ship in which Paul was sailing might easily be 
cast after leaving Crete. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Quicksands.] * 

cópo; impf. éovpov; fr. [.Aeschyl. and Hdt. (in comp.), 
Aristot.], Theocr. down; [Sept. 2 S. xvii. 13]; to draw, 
drag: τί, Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xii. 4; τινά, one (before the 
judge, to prison, to punishment; ἐπὶ rà βασανιστήρια, εἰς 


, 
συσπαράσσω 


τὸ δεσμωτήριον, Epict. diss. 1, 29, 22; al), Acts viii. 3; 
ξξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts xiv. 19; ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας, Acts 
xvii. 6. [Comp.: κατασύρω.] * 

συσπαράσσω: 1 aor. συνεσπάραξα; to convulse com- 
pletely (see ῥήγνυμι, c.) : twa, Mk. ix. 20 L'T Tr mrg. 
WH; Lk. ix. 42. (Max. Tyr. diss. 13, 5.) * 

σύσ-σημον [Tdf. συν- (cf. avv, II. fin.)], του, τό, (σύν 
and σῆμα), a common sign or concerted signal, a sign given 
acc. to agreement: Mk. xiv.44. (Diod., Strab., Plut., al.; 
for D3, a standard, Is. v. 26; xlix. 22; lxii. 10.) The 
word is condemned by Phrynichus, ed. Lob. p. 418, who 
remarks that Menander was the first to use it; cf. Sturz, 
De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 196.* 

σύσ-σωμος [L T Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)], -ov, 
(σύν and σῶμα), belonging to the same body (i. e. metaph. 
to the same church) [R. V. fellow-members of the body]: 
Eph. iii. 6. (Eccles. writ.) * 

συ-στασιαστής, -00, 6, (see στασιαστής), @ companion 
in insurrection, fellow-rioter: Mk. xv. 7 RG (Joseph. 
antt. 14, 2, 1).* 

συ-στατικός [Tr συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], 2, -óv, (συν- 
dornpt, 4. v-), commendatory, introductory: ἐπιστολαὶ ava. 
[A. V. epistles of commendation], 2 Co. iii. 1", 1 RG, 
and often in eccles. writ., many exx. of which have been 
collected by Lydius, Agonistica sacra (Zutph. 1700), p. 
123, 15; [Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. ii. 1194 sq.]. (γράμ- 
ματα παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ λαβεῖν συστατικά, Epict. diss. 2, 3, 1; [cf. 
Dios. Laért. 8, 87]; τὸ κάλλος παντὸς ἐπιστολίου συστα- 
“τικώτερον, Aristot. in Diog. Laért. 5, 18, and in Stob. flor. 
65, 11, ii. 435 ed. Gaisf.) * 

συ-σταυρόω [L T Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], τῶ: 
Pass, pf. συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 aor. συνεσταυρώθην ; to cru- 
cify along with; twa τινι, one with another; prop. : 
Mt. xxvii. 44 (σὺν αὐτῷ LT Tr WH); Mk. xv. 32 (aiv 
αὐτῷ LT WH); Jn. xix. 32; metaph.: ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν 
“ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη sc. τῷ Χριστῷ, i. e. (dropping the 
fizure) the death of Christ upon the cross has wrought 
the extinction of our former corruption, Ro. vi. 6; Χριστῷ 
συνεσταύρωμαι, by the death of Christ upon the cross I 
have become utterly estranged from (dead to) my for- 
mer habit of feeling and action, Gal. ii. 19 (20).* 

συ-στέλλω: 1 aor. συνέστειλα; pf. pass. ptep. συνεσταὰ- 
μένος : prop. to place together ; a. to draw together, 
contract, (rà ἱστία, Arstph. ran. 999; τὴν χεῖρα, Sir. iv. 
31; εἰς ὀλίγον συστέλλω, Theophr. de caus. plant. 1, 15, 
1); to diminish (τὴν δίαιταν, Isocr. p. 280 d.; Dio Cass. 
39, 37); to shorten, abridge, pass. 6 καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος 
ἐστίν, the time has been drawn together into a brief 
compass, is shortened, 1 Co. vii. 29. b. to roll to- 
gether, wrap up, wrap round with bandages, ete., to en- 


shroud (τινὰ πέπλοις, Eur. Troad. 378): τινά, i.e. his | 


corpse (for burial), Acts v. 6.* 


συ-στενάζω [T WH συν- (cf. avv, 11. fin.)]; to groan 
together: Ro. viii. 22, where ovv has the same force as 
in συνωδίνω, b. (τινί, with one, Eur. Ion 935; Test. xii. 
Patr. (test. Isach. $ 7) p. 629).* 

cv-e row éo [ T WH avv- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], -@; (see στοι- 
xéo) ; to stand or march in the same row (file) with: so once 


608 








Xvyáp 


prop. of soldiers, Polyb. 10, 21, 7; hence to stand over 
against, be parallel with; trop. to answer to, resemble: wi, 
so once of a type in the O. T. which answers to the anti- 
type in the New, Gal. iv. 25 [cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.].* 

συ-στρατιώτης [ T Tr WH συν- (so Lehm. in Philem.; 
cf. σύν, I. fin.) ], του, 6, a fellow-soldier, Xen., Plat., al. ; 
trop. an associate in labors and conflicts for the cause of 
Christ: Phil. ii. 25; Philem. 2.* 

συστρέφω: 1 aor. ptep. συστρέψας ; pres. pass. ptep. 
avotpepopevos; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; 1. 
to twist together, roll together (into a bundle): φρυγάνων 
πλῆθος, Acts xxviii. 3. 2. to collect, combine, unite: 
twas, pass. [reflexively (?)] of men, to [gather themselves 
together,] assemble: Mt. xvii. 22 L T Trtxt. WH, see 
ἀναστρέφω, ὃ ἃ." 

συ-στροφή, -ῆς; ἡ, (συστρέφωλ) ; a. a twisting up 
together, a binding together. b. a secret combination, 
a coalition, conspiracy: Acts xxiii. 12 (Ps. lxiii. (Ixiv.) 
3; [2K. xv. 15; Am. vii. 107); a concourse of disorderly 
persons, a riot (Polyb. 4, 34, 6), Acts xix. 40.* 

συ-σχηματίζω [ WH συν- (so T in Ro., Tr in 1 Pet.; cf 
σύν, II. fin.) ]: pres. pass. συσχηματίζομαι ; (σχηματίζω, to 
form) ; a later Grk. word; to conform [(Aristot. top. 6, 
14 p. 151, 8; Plut. de profect. in virt. 12 p. 83 b.)]; 
pass. reflexively, τινί, to conform one’s self (i.e. one's 
mind and character) to another's pattern, [ fashion one's 
self according to, (ef. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 130 
sq.)]: Ro. xii. 2; 1 Pet. i. 14 [cf. W. 352 (330 sq.)]. 
(πρός τι, Plut. Num. 20 com. text.) * 

Συχάρ (Rec.9* Siyap), ἡ, Sychar, a town of Samaria, 
near to the well of the patriarch Jacob, and not far from 
Flavia Neapolis (Zvxàp πρὸ τῆς Νέας πόλεως, Euseb. in 
his Onomast. [p. 346, 5 ed. Larsow and Parthey ]) tow- 
ards the E., the representative of which is to be found 
apparently in the modern hamlet al Askar (or ' Asker) : 
Jn. iv. 5, where cf. Büumlein, Ewald, Brückner [in De 
Wette (4th and foll. edd.) ], Godet; add, Ewald, Jahrbb. 
f. bibl. Wissensch. viii. p. 255 sq. ; Bddeker, Palestine, 
pp. 328, 337; [Lieut. Conder in the Palest. Explor. Fund 
for July 1877, p. 149 sq. and in Survey of West. Pal.: 
‘Special Papers’, p. 231; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, 
Appendix xv.]. The name does not seem to differ 
from 3)D, a place mentioned by the Talmudists in 
2:0 py ‘the fountain Suear ' and 3530 py npa ‘the 
valley of the fountain Suear'; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeit- 
schr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1856, p. 240sqq. Most in- 
terpreters, however, think that Svyap is the same as 
Συχέμ (q. v. 2), and explain the form as due to a soften- 
ing of the harsh vulgar pronunciation (cf. Credner, Einl. 
in d. N. T. vol. i. p. 264 sq.), or eonjecture that it was 
fabrieated by way of reproach by those who wished to 
suggest the noun "p? ‘falsehood’, and thereby brand 
the city as given up to idolatry [cf. Hab. ii. 18], or the 
word ^3U, ‘drunken’ (on account of Is. xxviii. 1), and 
thus eall it the abode of μωροί, see Sir. l. 26, where 
the Shechemites are called λαὸς μωρός ; cf. Test. xii. Patr. 
(test. Levi § 7) p. 564 Σικήμ, λεγομένη πόλις ἀσυνέτων. 
To these latter opinions there is this objection, among 


Συχέμ 


others, that the place mentioned by the Evangelist was 
very near Jacob’s well, from which Shechem, or Flavia 
Neapolis, was distant about a mile and a half. [Cf. B.D. 
s.v. Sychar; also Porter in Alex.’s Kitto, ibid.] * 

Συχέμ, Hebr. ὉΞ) [i.e. ‘shoulder,’ ‘ridge’], Shechem 
[A. V. Sychem (see below)], prop. name of 1. ἃ 
man of Canaan, son of Hamor (see ’Eypédp), prince in 
the city of Shechem (Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sqq.) : 
Acts vii. 16 RG. 2. a city of Samaria (in Sept. 
sometimes Συχέμ, indecl., sometimes Σίκιμα, gen. των, as in 
Joseph. and Euseb.; once τὴν Σίκιμα τὴν ἐν ὄρει "Edpaip, 
1 K. xii. 25 [for still other var. see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 
s. v. Shechem ]), Vule. Sichem [ed. Tdf. Sychem; cf. B. D. 
τι. 5.1, situated in a valley abounding in springs at the 
foot of Mt. Gerizim (Joseph. antt. 5, 7, 2; 11, 8, 6) ; laid 
waste by Abimelech (Judg. ix. 45), it was rebuilt by 
Jeroboam and made the seat of government (1 K. xii. 
25). From the time of Vespasian it was called by the 
Romans Neapolis (on coins Flavia Neapolis); whence by 
corruption comes its modern name, Nablus [or Nabu- 
lus]; ace. to Prof. Socin (in Bideker’s Palestine p. 331) 
it contains about 13,000 inhabitants (of whom 600 are 
Christians, and 140 Samaritans) together with a few 
[about 100] Jews: Acts vii. 16.* 

σφαγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (aá(o), slaughter: Acts viii. 32 (after 
Is. liii. 7) ; πρόβατα σφαγῆς, sheep destined for slaughter 
(Zech. xi. 4; Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23), Ro. viii. 36; ἡμέρα 
ahayns (Jer. xii. 3), i. q. day of destruction, Jas. v. 5. 
(Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for N20, 71797, 
etc.) * 

σφάγιον, -ov, τό, (σφαγή), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
that which is destined for slaughter, a victim [ A.V. slain 
beast]: Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 512 (477) ] (Am. v. 25 ; Ezek. 
xxi. 10).* 

σφάζω, Attic σφάττω : fut. σφάξω, Rev. vi. 4L T Tr 
WH; 1 aor. ἔσφαξα; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσφαγμένος ; 2 aor. 
ἐσφάγην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for on, to 
slay, slaughter, butcher: prop., ἀρνίον, Rev. v. 6, 12; 
xiii. 8; τινά, to put to death by violence (often so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12; Rev. v. 9; vi. 4, 
9; xviii. 24. κεφαλὴ ἐσφαγμένη εἰς θάνατον, mortally 
wounded [R.V. smitten unto death], Rev. xiii. 3. [Comp.: 
kara-o páto. ] * 

σφόδρα (properly neut. plur. of epodpds, vehement, vio- 
lent), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, exceedingly, greatly : 
placed after adjectives, Mt.ii. 105 Mk. xvi. 4; Lk. xviii. 
23; Rey. xvi. 21; with verbs, Mt. xvii. 6, 23; xviii. 
31; xix. 25; xxvi. 22; xxvii. 54; Acts vi. 7.* 

σφοδρῶς, adv., fr. Hom. Od. 12, 124 down, exceedingly: 
Acts xxvii. 18.* 

σφραγίζω (Rev. vii. 3 Rec") ; 1 aor. ἐσφράγισα; 1 aor. 
mid. ptep. σφραγισάμενος ; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσφραγισμένος ; 
1 aor. ἐσφραγίσθην ; [in 2 Co. xi. 10 Rec.* gives the form 
odpayicera “de coniectura vel errore" (Tdf.; see his 
note ad loc.)] ; (σφραγίς, q. v-) ; Sept. for DNN; to set a 
seal upon, mark with a seal, to seal ; a. for secu- 
rity: τί, Mt. xxvii. 66; sc. τὴν ἄβυσσον, to close it, 
lest Satan after being cast into it should come out; 

39 


609 


σχεδόν 


hence the addition ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ, over him i.e. Satan, Rev. 
xx. 3, (ἐν à —i. e. δώματι -- κεραυνός ἐστιν ἐσφραγισμένος, 
Aeschyl. Eum. 828; mid. σφραγίζομαι τὴν θύραν, Bel and 
the Dragon 14 Theodot.). b. Since things sealed up 
are concealed (as, the contents of a letter), σφραγίζω 
means trop. to hide (Deut. xxxii. 34), keep in silence, 
keep secret: ti, Rev. x. 4; xxii. 10, (τὰς ἁμαρτίας, Dan. 
ix. 24 Theodot.; τὰς ἀνομίας, Job xiv. 17; τοὺς λόγους 
σιγῇ» Stob. flor. 34, 9 p. 215; θαύματα πολλὰ copy σφρη- 
γίσσατο σιγῇ, Nonn. paraphr. evang. Ioan. 31,140). c. 
in order to mark a person or thing; hence to set a mark 
upon by the impress of a seal, to stamp: angels are said 
σφραγίζειν τινὰς ἐπὶ τῶν μετώπων, i.e. with the seal of 
God (see σφραγίς, c.) to stamp his servants on their 
foreheads as destined for eternal salvation, and by 
this means to confirm their hopes, Rev. vii. 3, cf. Ewald 
ad loc. ; [B.D.s. vv. Cuttings and Forehead]; hence oí 
ἐσφραγισμένοι, fourteen times in Rec. vss. 4—8, four times 
by GL T Tr WH, (δεινοῖσι σημάντροισιν ἐσφραγισμένοι, 
Eur. Iph. Taur. 1372) ; metaph.: τινὰ τῷ πνεύματι and 
ἐν τῷ mv., respecting God, who by the gift of the Holy 
Spirit indicates who are his, pass., Eph. i. 13 ; iv. 30; 
absol, mid. with τινά, 2 Co. i. 22. d. in order to 
prove, confirm, or attest a thing; hence trop. to 
confirm, authenticate, place beyond doubt, (a written 
document τῷ δακτυλίῳ, Esth. viii. 8) : foll. by ὅτι, Jn. iii. 
33; τινά, to prove by one's testimony to a person that he 
is what he professes to be, Jn. vi. 27. Somewhat unu- 
sual is the expression σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν 
τοῦτον, when I shall have confirmed (sealed) to them 
this fruit (of love), meaning apparently, when I shall 
have given authoritative assurance that this money was 
collected for their use, Ro. xv. 28. [Comp.: xara- 
a Qpayíco. ] * 

σφραγίς, -idos, ἡ, (akin, apparently, to the verb φράσσω 
or φράγνυμι), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for ann, a seal; i.e. 
a. the seal placed upon books [cf. B. D. s.v. Writing, sub 
fin; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 27]: Rev. v. 1; λῦσαι 
τὰς a pp., ib. 2, 5 [Ree.]; ἀνοῖξαι, ib. [5 GL T Tr WH], 
Gish tvi-- 15195557519; 19 vn dd b. a signet-ring : 
Rev. vii. 2. c. the inscription or impression made by 
a seal: Rev. ix.4 (the name of God and Christ stamped 
upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident 
from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. ii. 19. d. that by which any- 
thing is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a 
token or proof): Ro. iv. 11; 1 Co.ix. 2. [Cf. BB.DD. 
s. v. Seal.]* 

σφυδρόν, -o, τό, 1. q. σφυρόν, q. v.: Acts iii. 7 TWH. 
(Hesych. σφυδρά- ἡ περιφέρεια τῶν ποδῶν.) * 

σφυρίς, i. q. σπυρίς, q. ν.» (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 113; 
Curtius p. 503; [Steph. Thesaur. s. vv.]), Lchm. in Mt. 
xvi. 10 and Mk. viii. 8; WH uniformly (see their App. 
p. 148).* 

σφυρόν, -o), τό, fr. Hom. down, the ankle [ A.V. ankle- 
bone]: Acts iii. 7 [T WH σφυδρόν, q. v.].* 

σχεδόν, (ἔχω, σχεῖν), adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. near, 
hard by. 2. fr. Soph. down [of degree, i. 6.7 well-nigh, 
nearly, almost; so in the N. T. three times before was: 


σχῆμα 


Acts xiii. 44; xix. 26; Heb. ix. 22 [but see W. 554 (515) 
n.; (R. V. J may almost say)]; (2 Mace. v. 2; 3 Mace. 
3.51457 

σχῆμα, -ros, τό, (ἔχω, σχεῖν), fr. Aeschyl. down, Lat. 
habitus [cf. Eng. haviour (fr. have)], A. V. fashion, Vulg. 
figura [but in Phil. habitus], (tacitly opp. to the mate- 
rial or substance): τοῦ κόσμου rovrov, 1 Co. vii. 31; the 
habitus, as comprising everything in a person which 
strikes the senses, the figure, bearing, discourse, actions, 
manner of life, etc., Phil ii. 7 (8). [Svw. see μορφή, 
fin.] * 

σχίζω [(Lk. v. 36 R GL mrg.)]; fut. σχίσω (Lk. v. 36 
L txt. T Tr txt. WH [cf. B. 37 (32 sq.) ]) ; 1 aor. ἔσχισα; 
Pass., pres. ptep. σχιζόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐσχίσθην ; [allied w. 
Lat. scindo, caedo, ete. (cf. Curtius $295)]; fr. [(Hom. 
h.Merc.)] Hesiod down; Sept. several times for »0Ὀ3, 15. 
xxxvii. 1 for yop: to cleave, cleave asunder, rend: τί, Lk. 
v. 36; pass. ai πέτραι, Mt. xxvii. 51; of οὐρανοί, Mk. i. 10; 
τὸ καταπέτασμα, Lk. xxiii. 45 ; with εἰς δύο added, into two 
parts, in twain [(εἰς δύο μέρη, of a river, Polyb. 2, 16, 
11)], Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; τὸ δίκτυον, Jn. xxi. 11; 
to divide by rending, τί, Jn. xix. 24. trop. in pass. 10 
be split into factions, be divided: Acts xiv. 4; xxiii. 7, 
(Xen. conv. 4, 59; τοῦ πλήθους σχιζομένου κατὰ αἵρεσιν, 
Diod. 12, 66).* 

σχίσμα, -ros, τό, (σχίζω), a cleft, rent ; a. prop. 
arent: Mt. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21, (Aristot., Theophr.). b. 
metaph. a division, dissension: Jn. vii. 43; ix. 16; x. 
19; 1 Co. i. 10; xi. 18; xii. 25, (eccles. writ. [Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 6,etc.; *'Teaching ' 4,3; ete.]). [Cf. reff. 
ἘΠῚ Μὰ αἵρεσις. 5.] : 

σχοινίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of the noun σχοῖνος, 6 and 7, a 
rush), fr. Hdt. down, prop. a cord or rope made of rushes ; 
univ. a rope: Jn. ii. 15; Acts xxvii. 32.* 

σχολάζω ; 1 aor. subjunc. σχολάσω, 1 Co. vii. 5 GL T 
Tr WH; (σχολή, q. v-); 1. to cease from labor; 
to loiter. 2. to be free from labor, to be at leisure, 
to be idle; τινί, to have leisure for a thing, i. e.to give one's 
self to a thing: ἵνα σχολάσητε (Rec. σχολάζητε) τῇ mpoa- 
εὐχῇ. 1 Co. vii. 5 (for exx. fr. prof. auth. see Passow 
s. v.; [L. and S. s. v. III. ]). 3. of things; e. g. of 
places, to be unoccupied, empty: οἶκος σχολάζων, Mt. xii. 
44; [Lk. xi. 25 WH br. Tr mrg. br.], (τόπος, Plut. Gai. 
Grac. 12; of a centurion’s vacant office, Eus. h. e. 7, 15; 
in 600]. writ. of vacant eccl. offices, [also of officers with- 
out charge; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]).* 

σχολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. σχεῖν ; hence prop. Germ. das An- 
halten; [cf. Eng. ‘to hold on,’ equiv. to either to stop or 
to persist ]) ; 1. fr. Pind. down, freedom from labor, 
leisure. 2. ace. to later Grk. usage, a place where 
there is leisure for anything, a school [cf. L. and S. s. v. 
1Π.; W. 23]: Acts xix. 9 (Dion. Hal. de jud. Isocr. 1; 
de vi Dem. 44 ; often in Plut.).* 

cáto [al. σῴζω (cf. WH. Intr. $410; Meisterhans p. 
87)]; fut. σώσω ; 1 aor. ἔσωσα; pf. σέσωκα; Pass., pres. 
σώζομαι: impf. ἐσωζόμην; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Actsiv. 9) σέσω- 
ora and (ace. to Tdf.) σέσωται (cf. Kühner i. 912; [Photius 
s.v.5 Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 99; Veitch s. v.]); 1aor. 


610 





coto 


ἐσώθην: 1 fut. σωθήσομαι; (σῶς ‘safe and sound’ [cf. Lat. 
sanus ; Curtius $570; Vanicek p. 1038]; fr. Hom. down ; 
Sept. very often for yin, also for ub», 5x), and xn, 
sometimes for jy; to save, to keep safe and sound, to 
rescue from danger or destruction (opp. to ἀπόλλυμι, 
q. v.); Vulg. salvumfacio (or fio), salvo, [salvifico, libero, 
ete.]; a. univ., τινά, one (from injury or peril); 
to save a suffering one (from perishing), e. g. one suffer- 
ing from disease, to make well, heal, restore to health: Mt. 
ix. 22; Mk. v.34; x.52; Lk. vii. 50 [al. understand this 
as including spiritual healing (see b. below)]; viii- 
48; xvii. 19; xviii.42; Jas. v. 15; pass., Mt. ix. 21; Mk. 
v. 28, 28; vi. 56; Lk. viii. 36, 50; Jn. xi. 12; Actsiv. 9 
[cf. B. $144, 25]; xiv. 9. to preserve one who is in. 
danger of destruction, to save (i. e. rescue) : Mt. viii. 25; 
xiv. 30; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 40,42, 49; Mk. xiii. 20; xv. 30 
sq.; Lk. xxiii. 35, 37,39; pass., Acts xxvii. 20,31; 1 Pet. 
iv. 18 ; τὴν ψυχήν, (physical) life, Mt. xvi. 25; Mk. iii. 
4; viii. 35; Lk. vi.9; ix. 22and RG Lin xvii. 33; σώζειν 
τινὰ ἐκ with gen. of the place, to bring safe forth from, 
Jude 5; ἐκ τῆς Spas ταύτης, from the peril of this hour, 
Jn. xii. 27; with gen. of the state, ἐκ θανάτου, Heb. v. 7; 
cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 70 sq.; [W. $30,6a.; 
see ἐκ, I. 5]. b. to save in the technical biblical 
sense ; — negatively, to deliver from the penalties of the 
Messianic judgment, Joel ii. 32 (111. 5); to save from the 
evils which obstruct the reception of the Messianic deliver- 
ance: ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν. Mt.i.21; ἀπὸ τῆς ὀργῆς SC. τοῦ θεοῦ, 
from the punitive wrath of God at the judgment of the 
last day, Ro. v. 9; ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης, Acts 
li. 40; ψυχὴν ἐκ θανάτου (see θάνατος, 2), Jas. v. 20; [ἐκ 
πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες, Jude 23]; — positively, to make one a 
partaker of the salvation by Christ (opp. to ἀπόλλυμι, q. v.) = 
hence σώζεσθαι and εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν βασ. τοῦ θεοῦ are 
interchanged, Mt. xix. 25, ef. 24; ΜΚ. x. 36, οἵ. 25; Lk. 
xviii. 26, cf. 25; so cwlerOar and ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν, Jn. 
iii. 17, cf. 16. Since salvation begins in this life (in deliv- 
erance from error and corrupt notions, in moral purity, 
in pardon of sin, and in the blessed peace of a soul recon- 
ciled to God), but on the visible return of Christ from 
heaven will be perfected in the consummate blessings of 
6 αἰὼν ὁ μέλλων, we can understand why τὸ σώζεσθαι is 
spoken of in some passages as a present possession, in 
others as a good yet future:—as a blessing beginning 
(or begun) on earth, Mt. xviii. 11 Rec. ; Lk. viii. 12; 
xix. 10; Jn. v.34; x.9; xii.47; Ro. xi. 14; 1 Co. i. 21; 
vii. 16; ix. 22; x. 33; xv. 2; 1 Th. ii. 16; 2 Th. ii. 10; 
2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. iii. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 21; τῇ ἐλπίδι (dat. of the 
instrument) ἐσώθημεν (aor. of the time when they turned 
to Christ), Ro. viii. 24; χάριτί ἐστε σεσωσμένοι διὰ τῆς 
πίστεως, Eph. ii. 5 [cf. B. $144, 25], 8; — as a thing still 
future, Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 13; [Mk. xiii. 13]; Ro. v. 10; 
1 Co. iii. 15; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Jas. iv. 12; τὴν ψυχήν, Mk. 
viii. 35; Lk. ix. 24; ψυχάς, Lk. ix. 56 Rec. ; τὸ πνεῦμα, 
pass. 1 Co. v. 5; by a pregnant construction (see eis, C. 
1 p. 185^ bot.), τινὰ eis τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ κυρίου αἰώνιον, 
to save and transport into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 (ἡ εὐσέβεια 
ἡ σώζουσα εἰς τὴν ζωὴν αἰώνιον. 4 Mace. xv. 2; many exx. 


σῶμα 


of this constr. are given in Passow vol. ii. p. 1802": [cf. 
L. and 5. 5. ν. II. 2]. υπῖν.: [Mk. xvi. 16]; Acts ii. 
21; iv. 12; xi. 14; xiv.9; xv. 1, [11]; xvi. 30 sq. ; Ro. 
ix.27; x.9,13; xi. 26; 1 Tim.ii.4; iv. 16; Heb. vii. 25; 
Jas. ii. 14; ἁμαρτωλούς, 1 Tim. i. 15; τὰς ψυχάς, Jas. i. 
21; οἱ σωζόμενοι, Rev. xxi. 24 Rec.; Lk. xiii. 23; Acts 
ii. 47; opp. to of ἀπολλύμενοι, 1 Co. i. 18; 2 Co. ii. 15, 
(see ἀπόλλυμι, 1 a. B.). [Comp.: δια-, ἐκ- σώζω.] * 
σῶμα, -ros, τό, (appar. fr. σῶς ‘entire’, [but cf. Curtius 
§ 570; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ‘to cover’, cf. Vaniéek p. 1055; 
Curtius p. 6967), Sept. for wa, mW, ete.; 792) (a 
corpse), also for Chald. Dj; a body; and ^ 1. the 
body both of men and of animals (on the distinction be- 
tween it and σάρξ see σάρξ, esp. 2 init.; [cf. Dickson, St. 
Paul's use of * Flesh’ and ‘Spirit’, p. 247 sqq.]) ; a. 
as everywh. in Hom. (who calls the living body δέμας) 
and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or 
corpse: univ. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG; 
[Mk. xv. 45 RG]; Acts ix. 40; plur. Jn. xix. 31; τὸ c. 
twos, Mt. xxvii. 98sq.; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 52, 55; Jn. 
xix. 38,40; xx. 12; Jude 9; of the body of an animal 
offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14; Num. 
xix.3). — b. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living 
body :—of animals, Jas. iii. 3; — of man: τὸ σῶμα, ab- 
sol, Lk. xi. 34; xii. 23; 1 Co. vi. 13, etc.; ἐν σώματι 
εἶναι, of earthly life with its troubles, Heb. xiii. 3; dis- 
tinguished fr. τὸ αἷμα, 1 Co. xi. 27; τὸ σῶμα and rà μέλη 
of it, 1 Co. xii. 12, 14-20; Jas. iii. 6; τὸ σῶμα the tem- 
ple of τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα, 1 Co. vi. 195; the instrument of 
the soul, ra διὰ τοῦ σώμ. sc. πραχθέντα, 2 Co. v. 105 it is 
distinguished — fr. τὸ πνεῦμα, in Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. v. 3; 
vi.20 Rec.; vii. 34; Jas. ii. 26, (4 Macc. xi. 11); —fr. ἡ 
ψυχή; ἴῃ Mt. vi. 25; x. 28; Lk. xii. 22, (Sap. 1. 4; viii. 19 
sq.; 2 Macc. vii. 37; xiv. 38; 4 Macc. i. 28, etc.) ; — fr. 
ἡ ψυχή and τὸ πνεῦμα together, in 1 Th. v. 23 (cf. Song of 
the Three,63); σῶμα ψυχικόν and σ. πνευματικόν are dis- 
tinguished, 1 Co. xv. 44 (see πνευματικός, 1 and ψυχικός, 
a.); Tóc.Twos, Mt.v.29 sq.; Lk. xi. 34; Ro. iv. 19; viii. 
23 [cf. W. 187 (176)], etc.; 6 ναὸς ro) cop. αὐτοῦ, the 
temple which was his body, Jn. ii. 21; plur., Ro. i. 24; 
1 Co. vi. 15; Eph. v. 28; the gen. of the possessor is 
omitted where it is easily learned from the context, as 
1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co.iv. 10; v. 8; Heb. x. 22 (23), etc. ; τὸ 
σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως ἡμῶν, the body of our humiliation 
(subjective gen.), i.e. which we wear in this servile and 
lowly human life, opp. to τὸ σ. τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ (i. e. τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ), the body which Christ has in his glorified state 
with God in heaven, Phil. iii. 21; διὰ τοῦ cap. τοῦ Χρι- 
στοῦ, through the death of Christ's body, Ro. vii. 4; διὰ 
τῆς προσφορᾶς τοῦ cap. "Ingo? Χριστοῦ. through the sacri- 
ficial offering of the body of Jesus Christ, Heb. x. 10; 
τὸ c. τῆς σαρκός, the body consisting of flesh, i. e. the 
physieal body (tacitly opp. to Christ's spiritual body, 
the church, see 3 below), Col. i. 22 (differently in ii. 11 
[see just below]); σῶμα τοῦ θανάτου, the body subject to 
death, given over to it [cf. W. $30, 2 8.], Ro. vii. 24 ; 
the fact that the body includes ἡ σάρξ, and in the flesh 
also the incentives to sin (see σάρξ, 4), gives origin to 


611 








“TOMATLKOS 


the foll. phrases: μὴ βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ 
ὑμῶν σώματι, Ro. vi. 12 [οἵ. W. 524 (488)]; αἱ πράξεις 
Tov σώματος, Ro. viii. 13. Since the body is the instru- 
ment of the soul (2 Co. v. 10), and its members the in- 
struments either of righteousness or of iniquity (Ro. vi. 
13, 19), the foll. expressions are easily intelligible: σῶμα 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, the body subject to, the thrall of, sin [cf. 
W. § 30, 28.], Ro. vi. 6; τὸ σ- τῆς σαρκός, subject to the 
incitements of the flesh, Col. ii. 11 (where Rec. has τὸ c. 
τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τῆς σαρκός). δοξάζετε τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ σώματι 
ὑμῶν, 1 Co. vi. 20; μεγαλύνειν τὸν Χριστὸν ἐν τῷ σώματι, 
εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς, εἴτε διὰ θανάτου, Phil. i. 20; παραστῆσαι τὰ 
σώματα θυσίαν ζῶσαν ... τῷ θεῷ (i. e. by bodily purity [cf. 
Mey. ad loc.]), Ro. xii. 1. c. Since acc. to ancient 
law in the case of slaves the body was the chief thing 
taken into account, it is a usage of later Grk. to call 
slaves simply σώματα; once so in the N. T.: Rev. xviii. 
13, where the Vulg. correctly translates by mancipia 
[ A. V. slaves], (σώματα τοῦ οἴκου, Gen. xxxvi. 6; σώματα 
kai κτήνη. Tob. x. 105 Ἰουδαϊκὰ σώματα, 2 Macc. viii. 11; 
exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by Lob. ad Phryn. p. 378 sq. 
[add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.), Polyb. 1, 29, 7; 4, 38, 4, also 
3,17, 10 bis]; the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. 
said σώματα δοῦλα, οἰκετικά, etc.). 2. The name is 
transferred to the bodies of plants, 1 Co. xv. 37 56.» 
and of stars [ef. our ‘heavenly bodies'], hence Paul 
distinguishes between σώματα ἐπουράνια, bodies celestial, 
i.e. the bodies of the heavenly luminaries.and of angels 
(see ἐπουράνιος, 1), and σ. ἐπίγεια, bodies terrestrial (i. e. 
bodies of men, animals, and plants), 1 Co. xv. 40 (ἅπαν 
σῶμα τῆς τῶν ὅλων φύσεως . . . τὸ σῶμα τοῦ κόσμου, Diod. 
1 Τὺ: 3. trop. σῶμα is used of a (large or small) 
number of men closely united into one society, or family as 
it were; a social, ethical, mystical body; so in the N. T. 
of the church: Ro. xii. 5; 1 Co. x. 17; xii. 13; Eph. ii. 16; 
iv.16; v. 23; Col.i.18; ii. 19; iii. 15; with rod Χριστοῦ 
added, 1 Co. x. 16 ; xii. 27; Eph. i. 23; iv. 12; v. 30; Col. 
i.24; of which spiritual body Christ is the head, Eph. 
iv.15 sq.; v. 23; Col. i. 18; ii. 19, who by the influence 
of his Spirit works in the church as the soul does in the 
body. ἕν σῶμα κ. ἕν πνεῦμα, Eph. iv. 4. 4. ἡ σκιά 
and τὸ σῶμα are distinguished as the shadow and the 
thing itself which casts the shadow: Col. ii. 17; σκιὰν 
αἰτησόμενος βασιλείας, Rs ἥρπασεν ἑαυτῷ τὸ σῶμα; Joseph. 
b. j. 2, 2,5; [(Philo de confus. ling. $37; Leian. Her- 
mot. 79)]. 

σωματικός, -7, -óv, (copa), fr. Aristot. down, corporeal 
(Vulg. corporalis), bodily ; a. having a bodily form 
or nature: σωματικῷ εἴδει, Lk. iii. 22 (opp. to ἀσώματος, 
Philo de opif. mund. $ 4). b. pertaining to the body: 
ἡ γυμνασία, 1 Tim. iv. 8 (ἕξις, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 6; ἐπε- 
θυμίαι cop. 4 Mace. i. 32; [ἐπιθυμίαι καὶ ἡδοναί, Aristot. 
eth. Nic. 7, 7 p. 1149", 26; al; ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν καὶ 
σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν, * Teaching’ ete. 1, 4]).* 

σωματικῶς, adv., bodily, corporeally (Vulg. corporaliter), 
i. q. ἐν σωματικῷ εἴδει, yet denoting his exalted and spir- 
itual body, visible only to the inhabitants of heaven, Col. 
ii. 9, where see Meyer [cf. Bp. Lghtft.].* 


Σώπατρος 


Σώπατρος, “ov, ó, [cf. W. 103 (97)], Sopater, a Chris- 
tian, one of Paul's companions: Acts xx.4. [See Σωσί- 
marpos. |* 

σωρεύω: fut. σωρεύσω ; pf. pass. ptep. σεσωρευμένος:; 
(σωρός, a heap); [fr. Aristot. down]; to heap together, 
to heap up: τὶ ἐπί τι, Ro. xii. 20 (fr. Prov. xxv. 22; see 
dvÓpaÉ); τινά run, to overwhelm one with a heap of any- 
thing: trop. ἁμαρτίαις, to load one with the conscious- 
ness of many sins, pass. 2 Tim. iii. 6. [Comp.: ém- 
copevo. ] * 

Σωσθένης, -ov, 6, Sosthenes; 1. the ruler of the 
Jewish synagogue at Corinth, and an opponent of Chris- 
tianity: Acts xviii. 17. 2. a certain Christian, an 
associate of the apostle Paul: 1 Co.i.1. The name 
was a common one among the Greeks.* 

Σωσίπατρος, -ov, 6, Sosipater, a certain Christian, one 
of Paul's kinsmen, (perhaps the same man who in Acts 
xx. 4 is called Σώπατρος [q. v.; yet the latter was from 
Berea, Sosipater in Corinth]; cf. Σωκράτης and Σωσι- 
κράτης, Σωκλείδης and Σωσικλείδης, see Fritzsche, Ep. ad 
Rom. vol. iii. p. 316; [ef. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. 
79, 80]): Ro. xvi. 21.* 

σωτήρ, -7pos, 6, (coto), fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, 
Sept. for pwr, nw [win], savior, deliverer; pre- 
server; (Vulg. [exe. Lk. i. 47 (where salutaris) ] salvator, 
Luth. Heiland) [cf. B. D. s. v. Saviour, I.]; (Cic. in Verr. 
ii. 2, 63 Hoe quantum est? ita magnum, ut Latine uno 
verbo exprimi non possit. Is est nimirum ‘soter’, qui 
salutem. dedit. The name was given by the ancients to 
deities, esp. tutelary deities, to princes, kings, and in 
general to men who had conferred signal benefits upon 
their country, and in the more degenerate days by 
way of flattery to personages of influence; see Passow 
[or L. and S.] s. v.; Paulus, Exet. Hdbch. üb. d. drei 
erst. Evang. i. p. 103 sq. ; [ Wetstein on Lk. ii. 11; B. D. 
τι. 5.1). In the N. T. the word is applied to ἃ οα, -- σωτ. 
pov, he who signally exalts me, Lk.i.47; ὁ car. ἡμῶν, the 
author of our salvation through Jesus Christ (on the 
Christian conception of ‘to save’, see σώζω, b. [and 
on the use of σωτήρ cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iv. 14]), 1 Tim. 
i.1; 1.3; Tit.i.3; ii. 10; iii. 4; with διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 
added, Jude 25 [Rec. om. διὰ Ἰ. X.]; σωτὴρ πάντων, 
1 Tim. iv. 10 (cf. Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 5; xxvi. (xxvii.) 1; 
Is. xii. 2; xvii. 10; xlv. 15, 21; Mic. vii. 7, ete.) ; — to 
the Messiah, and Jesus as the Messiah, through 
whom God gives salvation: Lk. ii.11; Acts v.31; xiii. 
23; ὁ cor. τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. iv. 42; 1 Jn. iv. 14; ἡμῶν, 
2 Tim.i.10; Tit.i.4; ii.13; iii. 6; σωτὴρ Ἰησοῦς Χρι- 
στός, 2 Pet.i.[1 (where Rec.b¢ inserts 2uóv)], 11; ii. 
20; iii. 18; ὁ κύριος kai σωτήρ, 2 Pet. iii. 2; σωτὴρ τοῦ 
σώματος, univ. (‘the savior’ i. e.) preserver of the body, 
i. e. of the church, Eph. v. 23 (σωτὴρ ὄντως ἁπάντων ἐστὶ 
καὶ yevérop, of God the preserver of the world, Aristot. 
de mundo, c. 6 p. 397^, 20); σωτήρ is used of Christ 
as the giver of future salvation, on his return from 
heaven, Phil. iii. 20. [The title is confined (with the 
exception of the writings of St Luke) to the later writ- 
ings of the N. T.” (Westcott u. s.)]* 


2 σωφρονέω 


61 








σωτηρία, -as, ἥ, (σωτήρ), deliverance, preservation, safety, 
salvation: deliverance from the molestation of enemies, 
Acts vii. 25; with ἐξ ἐχθρῶν added, Lk. i. 71; preserva- 
tion (of physical life), safety, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi. 
7. in an ethical sense, ‘hat which conduces to the soul’s 
safety or salvation: σωτηρία τινὶ ἐγένετο, Lt. xix. 9; ἡγεῖ- 
σθαί τι σωτηρίαν, 2 Pet. iii. 15; in the technical biblical 
sense, the Messianic salvation (see σώζω, b.), a: 
univ.: Jn. iv. 22; Actsiv. 12; xiii.47; Ro. xi. 11; 2 Th. ii. 
13; 2 Tim. iii.15; Heb. ii.3; vi.9; Jude 3; opp. to ἀπώ- 
Neca, Phil. i. 28; αἰώνιος σωτηρία, Heb. v. 9 (for npn 
Ὁ} Is. xlv. 17); [add, Mk. xvi. WH in the (rejected) 
‘Shorter Conclusion]; 6 λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης, in- 
struetion concerning that salvation which John the Bap- 
tist foretold [cf. W. 237 (223)], Acts xiii. 26; τὸ εὐαγγέ- 
λιον τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, Eph. i. 13; ὁδὸς σωτηρίας, Acts 
xvi. 17; κέρας σωτηρίας (see κέρας, b.), Lk. i. 69; ἡμέρα 
σωτηρίας, the time in which the offer of salvation is 
made, 2 Co. vi. 2 (fr. Is. xlix. 8); κατεργάζεσθαι τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
σωτηρίαν, Phil. ii. 12; κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν, Heb. i. 14; 
[ὁ ἀρχηγὸς τῆς σωτηρίας. Heb. ii. 10]; eis σωτηρίαν, unto 
(the attainment of) salvation, Ro. [i. 16]; x. [1], 10; 
1 Pet. ii. 2 [ Rec. om. ]. b. salvation as the present 
possession of all true Christians (see σώζω, b.): 2 Co. 
i.6; vii. 10; Phil.i.19; σωτηρία ἐν ἀφέσει ἁμαρτιῶν, 
Lk. i. 77; σωτηρίας τυχεῖν μετὰ δύξης αἰωνίου, 2 Tim. 
ii. 10. c. future salvation, the sum of benefits 
and blessings which Christians, redeemed from all 
earthly ills, will enjoy after the visible return of Christ 
from heaven in the consummated and eternal king- 
dom of God: Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Th. v. 9; Heb. ix. 28; 1 
Pet. i. 5, 10; Rev. xii. 10; ἐλπὶς σωτηρίας, 1 Th. v. 8; 
κομίζεσθαι σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν, 1 Pet. i. 9; ἡ σωτηρία τῷ θεῷ 
ἡμῶν (dat. of the possessor, se. ἐστίν [οἵ. B. § 129, 22]; 
cf. πρλ τ mim, Ps. i. 9), the salvation which is 
bestowed on us belongs to God, Rey. vii. 10; ἡ σωτηρία 
... τοῦ θεοῦ (gen. of the possessor [cf. B. $132, 11, i. a.], 
for Rec. τῷ θεῷ) ἡμῶν sc. ἐστίν, Rev. xix. 1. (Tragg., 
[Hdt.], Thuc. Xen., Plat. al. Sept. for pur, nyaw, 
τ, nwa escape.) * 

σωτήριος, -ov, (σωτήρ), fr. Aeschyl., Eur., Thuc. down, 
saving, bringing salvation: ἡ χάρις ἡ σωτήριος, Tit. ii. 11 
(Sap. i. 14; 3 Mace. vii. 18; ἡ σωτήριος δίαιτα, Clem. 
Alex. Paedag. p. 48 ed. Sylb.). Neut. τὸ σωτήριον 
(Sept. often for nv, less freq. for YW), as often in 
Grk. writ., substantively, safety, in the N. T. (the Mes- 
sianic) salvation (see σώζω, b. and in σωτηρία): with 
τοῦ θεοῦ added, decreed by God, Lk. iii. 6 (fr. Is. xl. 5); 
Acts xxviii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35,12; he who em- 
bodies this salvation, or through whom God is about to 
achieve it: of the Messiah, Lk. ii. 30 (τὸ eer. ἡμῶν Ἴη- 
gods Xp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 1 [where see Harnack]) ; 
simply, equiv. to the hope of (future) salvation, Eph. vi. 
17. (In the Sept. τὸ ewr. often for D5w, a thank-offer- 
ing [or *peace-offering'], and the plur. occurs in the same 
sense in Xen., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Leian., Hdian.) * 

σω-φρονέω, -@; 1 aor. impy. σωφρονήσατε ; (σώφρων, 
q. v.); fr. Tragg., Xen., Plat. down; to be of sound 


Do" 


σωφρονίζω 


mind, i. 6. a. to be in one’s right mind: of one 
who has ceased δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mk. v. 15; Lk. viii. 35; 
opp. to ἐκστῆναι, 2 Co. ν. 13, (the σωφρονῶν and paveis 
are contrasted in Plat. de rep. i. p. 331 ¢.; σωφρονοῦσαι 
and paveioa, Phaedr. p. 244 b.; ὁ μεμηνὼς... . ἐσωφρό- 
νησε, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6). b. to exercise self-control; 
th 6. a. to put a moderate estimate upon one’s self, 
think of one’s self soberly: opp. to ὑπερφρονεῖν, Ro. xii. 
3. B. to curb one’s passions, Tit. ii. 6; joined with 
νήφω (as in Leian. Nigrin. 6), [R. V. be of sound mind 
and be sober], 1 Pet. iv. 7.* 

σωφρονίζω, 3 pers. plur. ind. -ζουσιν, Tit. ii. 4 Lmrg. T 
Tr, al. subjunc. -ζωσε; to make one σώφρων, restore one 
to his senses; to moderate, control, curb, discipline; to hold 
one to his duty; so fr. Eur. and Thue. down; to admon- 
ish, to exhort earnestly, [R. V. train]: τινά foll. by an inf. 
Tit. ii. 4.* 

σωφρονισμός, -o), 6, (σωφρονίζωλ) ; 1. an admon- 
ishing or calling to soundness of mind, to moderation and 
self-control: Joseph. antt. 17, 9, 2; b. j. 2, 1,3; App. 
Pun.8,65; Aesop. fab. 38; Plut.; [Philo, legs. alles. 3, 
691. 2. self-control, moderation, (σωφρονισμοί τινες 
ἢ μετάνοιαι τῶν νέων, Plut. mor. p. 712 c. i. e. quaest. 
conviv. 8, 3): πνεῦμα σωφρονισμοῦ, 2 Tim. i. 7, where 
see Huther; [but Huther, at least in his later edd., takes 
the word transitively, i.q. correction (R. V. disci- 
pline); see also Holtzmann ad loc.].* 


613 


ταλαιπωρία 


σωφρόνως, (σώφρων), adv., fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, 
with sound mind, soberly, temperately, discreetly: Tit. ii. 
12 (Sap. ix. 11).* 

σωφροσύνη, -ης, 7, (σώφρων), fr. Hom. (where cao po- 
σύνη) down ; a. soundness of mind (opp. to pavia, 
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 16; Plat. Prot. p. 323 b.): ῥήματα cwdpo- 
σύνης, words of sanity [A. V. soberness], Acts xxvi. 
25. b. self-control, sobriety, (ea virtus, cujus pro- 
prium est, motus animi appetentes regere et sedare sem- 
perque adversantem libidini moderatam in omni re ser- 
vare constantiam, Cic. Tusc. 3, 8, 17; ἡ σωφροσ. ἐστὶ 
kai ἡδονῶν τινων καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν ἐγκράτεια. Plat. rep. 4, 
480 e.; cf. Phaedo p. 68 c.; sympos. p. 196 c.; Diog. 
Laért. 3, 91; 4 Macc. i. 31; σωφροσύνη δὲ ἀρετὴ δ ἣν 
πρὸς Tas ἡδονὰς τοῦ σώματος οὕτως ἔχουσιν ὡς 6 νόμος 
κελεύει, ἀκολασία δὲ τοὐναντίον, Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 9): 
1 Tim. ii. 15; joined with αἰδώς (as in Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 
30 sq.) ibid. 9; [ef. Trench, N. T. Syn. $ xx., and see 
αἰδώς ].* 

σώφρων, -ov, (fr. ados, contr. σῶς [cf. σώζω, init.], and 
φρήν, hence the poet. caó $pov; cf. ἄφρων, ταπεινόφρων, 
μεγαλόφρων), [fr. Hom. down]; a. of sound mind, 
sane, in one’s senses, (see σωφρονέω, a. and σωφροσύνη, 
a.). b. curbing one's desires and impulses, self-con- 
trolled, temperate, [R. V. soberminded ], ([ἐπιθυμεῖ ὁ σώ- 
pov ὧν δεῖ καὶ ὡς δεῖ καὶ ὅτε, Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 15 fin. ], 
see σωφροσύνη, b.): 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i. 8; ii. 2, 5.* 


Ἕ 


[T, 7: on the receding of rr in the vocabulary of the N. T. 
before oo, see under Z, c, s.] 

ταβέρναι, -óv, ai, (a Lat. word [cf. B. 17 (15)]), tar- 
erns: Τρεῖς Ταβέρναι (gen. Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν), Three Tav- 
erns, the name of an inn or halting-place on the Ap- 
pian way between Rome and The Market of Appius 
[see "Azztos]; it was ten Roman miles distant from the 
latter place and thirty-three from Rome (Cic. ad Attic. 
2, 10, (12)) [cf. B.D. s. v. Three Taverns]: Acts xxviii. 
15.* 

Tafg.0& [WH Ταβειθά, see their App. p. 155, and s. v. 
et, t5 the better accent seems to be -θᾷ (see Kautzsch as 
below)], 7, (Niv30, a Chald. name in the ‘emphatic state? 
[Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. u. s. w. p. 11, writes it 
8120, stat. emphat. of $920], Hebr. ^3, i. e. δορκάς, 
q. v-), T'abitha, a Christian woman of Joppa, noted for 
her works of benevolence: Acts ix. 36, 40. [Cf. B. D. 
s. v. Tabitlia.] * 

τάγμα, -τος, τό, (τάσσω): a. prop. that which has 
been arranged, thing placed in order. b. spec. a body 


of soldiers, a corps: 29 S. xxiii. 13; Xen. mem. 3, 1, 11; 
often in Polyb.; Diod. 17, 80; Joseph. b. 1. 1, 9, 1; 3, 4, 
2; [esp. for the Roman ‘legio’ (exx. in Soph. Lex. 5. v. 
3)]; hence univ. a band, troop, class: ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ 
τάγματι (the same words occur in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 37, 
3 and 41, 1), 1 Co. xv. 23, where Paul specifies several 
distinct bands or classes of those raised from the dead 
[A. V. order. Of the ‘order’ of the Essenes in Joseph. 
b. j. 2, 8, 3. 8] 

τακτός, -7, -óv, (τάσσω), fr. Thue. (4, 65) down, or- 
dered, arranged, fixed, stated: τακτὴ ἡμέρα (Polyb. 3, 34, 
9; Dion. Hal. 2, 74), Acts xii. 21 [ A. V. set].* 

TaÀavropéo, -5: 1 aor. impv. ταλαιπωρήσατε;; (raAaí- 
πωρος, q. v.); fr. Eur. and Thuc. down; Sept. for 
TW; a. to toil heavily, to endure labors and hard- 
ships; to be afflicted; to feel afflicted and miserable: Jas. 
yes 9. b. in Grk. writ. and Sept. also transitively 
[ef. L. and S. s. v. II.], to afflict: Ps. xvi. (xvii.) 9; Is. 
xxxiii. 1.* 

ταλαιπωρία, -as, 7, (ταλαίπωρος; q. v.) hardship, trouble, 


ταλαίπωρος 


calamity, misery: Ro. iii. 16 (fr. Is. lix. 7); plur. [mis- 
eries], Jas. v. 1. (Hdt., Thuc., Isocr., Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph., al.; Sept. chiefly for 7%.) * 

ταλαίπωρος, -ov, (fr. TAAAQ, TAAQ, to bear, undergo, 
and zópos a callus [al. πωρός, but cf. Suidas (ed. Gaisf.) 
p. 3490 c. and note; al. connect the word with περάω, 
πειράω, cf. Curtius § 4667), enduring toils and troubles; 
afflicted, wretched: Ro. vii. 24; Rev. iii.17. (Is. xxxiii. 
1; Tob. xiii. 10; Sap. iii. 11; xiii. 10; [Pind.], Trage., 
Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Aesop., al.) * 

ταλαντιαῖος, -a, -ov, (τάλαντον, q. v.; like δραχμιαῖος, 
στιγμιαῖος, δακτυλιαῖος, λιτριαῖος, ete.; see Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 544), of the weight or worth of a talent: Rev. xvi. 21. 
(Dem., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

τάλαντον, -ov, τό, (TAAAQ, TAAQ [to bear]); als 
the scale of a balance, a balance, a pair of scales (Hom.). 
2. that which is weighed, a talent, i. e. a. a weight, 
varying in different places and times. b. a sum of 
money weighing a talent and varying in different states 
and acc. to the changes in the laws regulating the cur- 
rency; the Attic talent was equal to 60 Attic minae 
or 6000 drachmae, and worth about 200 pounds sterling 
or 1000 dollars [cf. L. and S. s. v. IT. 2 b.]. But in the 
N. T. probably the Sy rian talent is referred to, which 
was equal to about 237 dollars [but see BB. DD. s. v. 
Money]: Mt. xviii. 24; xxv. 15 sq. [18 Lehm.], 20, 22, 
24sq. 28. (Sept. for 323, Luth. Centner, the heaviest 
Hebrew weight; on which see Kneucker in Schenkel v. 
p. 460 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. v. Weights].)* 

ταλιθά [WII ταλειθά, see their App. p. 155, and s. v. 
eu εἴ more correctly accented -0à (see Kautzsch, as be- 
low, p. 8; cf. Tdf: Proleg. p. 102)], a Chald. word 5b 
[ace. to Kautzsch (Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 12) more cor- 
rectly x90, fem. of wou ‘a youth’], a damsel, maiden: 
Mk. v. 41." 

ταμεῖον [so T WH uniformly], more correctly ταμιεῖον 
[R G L Tr in Mt. vi. 6], (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 493; W. 
94 (90); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 88 sq.]), του, τό, (ταμιεύω), fr. 
Thue. and Xen. down; 1. a storechamber, store- 
room: Lk. xii. 24 (Deut. xxviii. 8; Prov. iii. 10 [Philo, 
quod omn. prob. lib. $ 127). 2. a chamber, esp. ‘an 
inner chamber’; a secret room: Mt. vi.6; xxiv. 26; Lk. 
xii. 3, (Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 5; Sir. xxix.12; Tob. vii. 15, and 
often in Sept. for ὙΠ). 

τανῦν, see νῦν, 1 f. a. p. 430° top. 

τάξις, -ews, 7, (τάσσω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 
1. an arranging, arrangement. 2. order,i.e. a fixed 
succession observing also a fixed time: Lk. i. 8. 3. 
due or right order: κατὰ τάξιν, in order, 1 Co. xiv. 40; 
orderly condition, Col. ii. 5 [some give it here a military 
sense, ‘orderly array’, see στερέωμα, c.]. 4. the post, 
rank, or position which one holds in civil or other affairs; 
and since this position generally depends on one's talents, 
experience, resources, τάξις becomes equiv. to character, 
Jashion, quality, style, (2 Mace. ix. 18; i. 19; οὐ yap 
ἱστορίας, ἀλλὰ κουρεακῆς λαλιᾶς ἐμοὶ δοκοῦσι τάξιν ἔχειν, 
Polyb. 3, 20, 5): κατὰ τὴν τάξιν (for which in vii. 15 we 
have κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα) Μελχισεδέκ, after the manner 


614 


ταπεινόω 


of the priesthood [A. V. order] of Melchizedek (ace. 
to the Sept. of Ps. cix. (ex.) 5 *727-53’), Heb. v. 6, 
10; vi. 20; vii. 11, 17, 21 (where T Tr WH om. the 
phrase).* 

ταπεινός, -ἡ -óv, fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down, Sept. 
for *3y, 3j, baw, ete., low, i. e. a. prop. not rising 
Jar from the ground: Ezek. xvii. 24. b. metaph. 
a. as to condition, lowly, of low degree: with a subst. 
Jas. i. 9; substantively of ταπεινοί, opp. to δυνάσται, Lk. 
i. 52; i. q. brought low with grief, depressed, (Sir. xxv. 
23), 2 Co. vii. 6. Neut. τὰ ταπεινά, Ro. xii. 16 (on 
which see συναπάγω, fin.). B. lowly in spirit, Awm- 
ble: opp. to ὑπερήφανος, Jas. iv.6; 1 Pet. v. 5 (fr. Prov. 
lii. 34) ; with τῇ καρδίᾳ added, Mt. xi. 29 (τῷ πνεύματι, Ps. 
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19); in a bad sense, deporting one's self 
abjectly, deferring servilely to others, (Xen. mem. 3, 10,” 
5; Plat. lege. 6 p. 774c.; often in Isocr.), 2 Co. x. 1. 
(Cf. reff. s. v. ταπεινοφροσύνη, fin. ] * 

ταπεινοφροσύνη, -7s, 7, (ταπεινόφρων ; opp. to peyado- 
φροσύνη, ὑψηλοφροσύνη, [cf. W. 99 (94)]), the having a 
humble opinion of one’s self; a deep sense of one’s (moral) 
littleness; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind; (Vulg. 
humilitas, Luth. Demuth): Acts xx. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Phil. 
ii. 3; Col. iii. 12; 1 Pet. v. 5; used of an affected and 
ostentatious humility in Col. ij.18,23. (The word occurs 
neither in the O. T., nor in prof. auth. — [but in Joseph. 
b. j. 4, 9, 2in the sense of pusillanimity; also Epictet. 
diss. 3, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See T'rench, N.'T. Syn. 
$xlii.; Bp. Zghtft. on Phil. 1. ο. ; Zezschwitz, Profangrü- 
citàt, u.s.w., pp. 20,62; W. 26].)* 

ταπεινόφρων, -ov, (ταπεινός and φρήν), humble-minded, 
i.e. having a modest opinion of one's self: 1 Pet. iii. 8, 
where Ree. φιλόφρονες. (Prov. xxix. 23; in a bad sense, 
pusillanimous, mean-spirited, μικροὺς 7) τύχη καὶ περιδεεῖς 
ποιεῖ͵ καὶ ταπεινόφρονας, Plut. de Alex. fort. 2,4; [de 
tranquill. animi 17. See W. § 34, 3 and reff. s. v. ταπει- 
voppoovyn, fin. ].) * 

ταπεινόω, -@; fut. ταπεινώσω ; 1 aor. ἐταπείνωσα; Pass., 
pres. ταπεινοῦμαι ; 1 aor. ἐταπεινώθην; 1 fut. ταπεινωθή- 
σομαι; (ταπεινός); to make low, bring low, (Vulg. hu- 
milio) ; a. prop.: ὄρος, βουνόν, i. 6. to level, reduce 
to a plain, pass. Lk. iii. 5 fr. Is. xl. 4. b. metaph. 
to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circum- 
stances; i. e. a. to assign a lower rank or place to; to 
abase; twa, pass., to be ranked below others who are hon- 
ored or rewarded [R. V. to humble]: Mt. xxiii. 12; Lk. 
xiv. 11; xviii. 14. B. ταπεινῶ ἐμαυτόν, to humble or 
abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Co. xi. 7; in pass. of 
one who submits to want, Phil. iv. 12; ἑαυτόν, of one 
who stoops to the condition of a servant, Phil. ii. 8. c. 
to lower, depress, [Eng. humble]: twa, one's soul, bring 
down one's pride; ἐμαυτόν, to have a modest opinion of 
one's self, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid 
of all haughtiness, Mt. xviii. 4; xxiii. 12; Lk. xiv. 11; 
xviii. 14; pass. ταπεινοῦμαι ἐνώπιον κυρίου (see ἐνώπιον, 2 
b. fin.) in a mid. sense [B. 52 (46)], to confess and de- 
plore one's spiritual littleness and unworthiness, Jas. iv. 
10 (in the same sense ταπεινοῦν τὴν Ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, Sir. ii. 


ταπείνωσις 


17; vii. 17; Sept. for jw51 n3y, he afflicted his soul, of 
persons fasting, Lev. xvi. 29, 31; xxiii. 27, 32; Is. lviii. 
3, 5, 105. τὴν ψυχήν twos, to disturb, distress, the soul 
of one, Protev. Jac. c. 2. 13. 15 [rather, to humiliate; see 
the passages]); ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖρα T. θεοῦ, to submit one's 
self in a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Pet. 
v. 6 (cf. Gen. xvi. 9) ; i.q. to put to the blush, 2 Co. xii. 
21. ([Hippocr.], Xen., Plat, Diod., Plut.; Sept. for 
my, Daw and Yawn, w23, 327, ete.) [See reff. s.v. 
ταπεινοφροσύνη. * 

ταπείνωσις, -ews, 7, (ταπεινόω), lowness, low estate, [hu- 
miliation]: Lk. i. 48; Acts viii. 33 (fr. Is. liii. 8); Phil. 
iii. 21 (on which see σῶμα, 1 b.) ; metaph. spiritual abase- 
ment, leading one to perceive and lament his (moral) 
littleness and guilt, Jas. i. 10, see Kern ad loc. (In va- 
rious senses, by Plat, Aristot, Polyb., Diod., Plut.; 
Sept. for^3y.) [See reff. s. v. ταπεινοφροσύνη. | * 

ταράσσω ; impf. ἐτάρασσον ; 1 aor. érápa£a; Pass., pres. 
impv. 3 pers. sing. ταρασσέσθω ; impf. ἐταρασσόμην ; pf. 
τετάραγμαι ; 1 aor. ἐταράχθην ; fr. Hom. down; to agitate, 
trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and 
fro) ; a. prop.: τὸ ὕδωρ, Jn. v. 4 [RL], 7, (Ezek. 
xxxii. 2; τὸν πόντον, Hom. Od. 5, 291; τὸ πέλαγος, Eur. 
Tro. 88; τὸν ποταμόν, Aesop. fab. 87 (25)). b. trop. 
to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of 
mind, disturb his equanimity; to disquiet, make restless, 
(Sept. for 5513, ete.; pass. ταράσσομαι for 13» to be 
stirred up, irritated) ; a. to stir up: τὸν ὄχλον, Acts 
xvii. 8; [τοὺς ὄχλους, Acts xvii. 13 L T Tr WH]. β. 
10 trouble: τινά, to strike one's spirit with fear or dread, 
pass., Mt. ii. 3; xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 12; [xxiv. 
38]; 1 Pet. iii. 14; ταράσσεται ἡ καρδία, Jn. xiv. 1, 27; 
to affect with great pain or sorrow: ἑαυτόν (cf. our to 
trouble one's self), Jn. xi. 33 [A. V. was troubled (some 
understand the word here of bodily agitation)] (σεαυτὸν 
μὴ τάρασσε, Antonin. 4, 26); τετάρακται 7) ψυχή; Jn. xii. 
27 (Ps. vi. 4) ; ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι, Jn. xiii. 21. Ύ- 
to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of 
one by suggesting scruples or doubts, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 
17): Gali. 7; v. 10; τινὰ λόγοις, Acts xv. 24. [Comp.: 
Oua-, €k- ταράσσω.} * 

ταραχή, -ῆς, 7, (ταράσσω), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, dis- 
turbance, commotion: prop. τοῦ ὕδατος, Jn. v. 4 [RL]; 
metaph. a tumult, sedition: in plur. Mk. xiii. 8 R G.* 

τάραχος, -ov, 6, (ταράσσω), commotion, stir (of mind): 
Acts xii. 18; tumult (A.V. stir], Acts xix. 23. (Sept. ; 
Xen., Plut., Leian.) * 

Tapcets, -éos, 6, (Ταρσός, q. v.), belonging to Tarsus, 
of Tarsus: Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39.* 

Tapcós, -o), 7, [on its accent cf. Chandler 88 317, 
318], in prof. auth. also Ταρσοί, -àv, ai, Tarsus, a mari- 
time city, the capital of Cilicia during the Roman period 
(Joseph. antt. 1, 6, 1), situated on the river Cydnus, 
which divided it into two parts (hence the plural Tapaot). 
It was not only large and populous, but also renowned 
for its Greek learning and its numerous schools of phil- 
osophers (Strab. 14 p. 673 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 303 
sq.]. Moreover it was a free city (Plin. 5, 22), and 


615 


SUE VE 
ταυταὰ 


exempt alike from the jurisdiction of a Roman governor, 
and the maintenance of a Roman garrison; although it 
was not a Roman ‘colony’. It had received its free- 
dom from Antony (App. b. civ. 5, 7) on the condition 
that it might retain its own magistrates and laws, but 
should acknowledge the Roman sovereignty and furnish 
auxiliaries in time of war. It is now called Tarso or 
Tersus, a mean city of some 6000 inhabitants [others 
set the number very much higher]. It was the birth- 
place of the apostle Paul: Acts ix. 30; xi. 25; xxii. 3. 
[BB.DD. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq. cf. 2.]* 

ταρταρόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. raprapocas; (ráprapos, the 
name of a subterranean region, doleful and dark, re- 
garded by the ancient Greeks as the abode of the 
wicked dead, where they suffer punishment for their evil 
deeds; it answers to the Gehenna of the Jews, see ye- 
evva); to thrust down to Tartarus (sometimes in the Scho- 
liasts) [cf. W. 25 (24) n.]; — to hold captive in Tartarus: 
τινὰ σειραῖς [q. v.] ζόφου, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [ A. V. cast down to 
hell (making the dat. depend on παρέδωκεν) ].* 

τάσσω: 1 aor. ἔταξα; pf. inf. τεταχέναι (Acts xviii. 2 
T Trmrg.); Pass. pres. ptep. τασσόμενος ; pf. 3 pers. 
sing. τέτακται, ptcp. τεταγμένος; 1 aor. mid. éra£dumv; fr. 
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. for ni, and occa- 
sionally for qn, mis, mu, ete.; to put in place; to sta- 
tion; a. to place in a certain order (Xen. mem. 3, 
1, 7 [9]), to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint: τινά, 
pass. ai ἐξουσίαι ὑπὸ θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν [A. V. or- 
dained], Ro. xiii. 15 [καιρούς, Acts xvii. 26 Lehm.]; ἑαυτὸν 
εἰς διακονίαν τινί, to consecrate [ R. V. set] one's self to 
minister unto one, 1 Co. xvi. 15 (ἐπὶ τὴν διακονίαν, Plat. 
de rep. 2 p. 371 €.; eis τὴν δουλείαν, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 11); 
ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, as many as were 
appointed [A. V. ordained] (by God) to obtain eternal 
life, or to whom God had decreed eternal life, Acts xiii. 
48; twa ὑπό twa, to put one under another’s control 
ΓΔ. V. set under], pass., Mt. viii. 9 L WH in br., cod. 
Sin.; Lk. vii. 8, (ὑπό τινα, Polyb. 3, 16, 3; 5, 65, 7; Diod. 
2, 26, 8; 4, 9, 5) ; τινί τι, to assign (appoint) a thing to 
one, pass. Acts xxii. 10 (Xen. de rep. Lae. 11, 6). b. 
to appoint, ordain, order: foll. by the ace. with inf., Acts 
xv. 2; [xviii. 2 T Tr mrg.]; (foll. by an inf., Xen. Hier. 
10,4; Cyr.4,5,11). Mid. (as often in Grk. writ.) prop. 
to appoint on one’s own responsibility or authority: οὗ 
ἐτάξατο αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς sc. πορεύεσθαι, Mt. xxviii. 16; 
to appoint mutually, i. 6. agree upon: ἡμέραν (Polyb. 18, 
19, 1, ete.), Acts xxviii. 23. [Comp.: ἀνα- (μαι), dvrt-, 
ἀπο-, δια-, ἐπι-δια-(-μαι). ἐπι-, προ-, προσ-; avv-, ὑπο- τάσσω. 
SYN. see κελεύω, fin.] e: 

ταῦρος, -ov, 6, [fr. r. meaning ‘thick’, ‘stout’; allied 
w. σταυρός, q. V.; cf. Vanicek p. 1127; Fick Pt. i. p. 246. 
Cf. Eng. steer], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for iw, a bull (ox): 
Mt. xxii. 4; Acts xiv. 13; Heb. ix. 13; x. 4.* 

ταὐτά, by crasis for τὰ αὐτά : 1 Th. ii. 14 R L mrg., and 
some manuscripts [(but see Tdf. on Lk. as below)] and 
edd. also in Lk. vi. 23 [L mrg.], 26 [L mrg.]; xvii. 30 
GL. [See W.$5,3; B.10; WH. App. p.145 ; Meister- 
hans $18, 1; cf. αὐτός, III.]* 


ταφή 


ταφή, -ῆς, 7, (θάπτων), fr. Hdt. down; Sept. several 
times for 7733p and 43), burial: Mt. xxvii. 7." 

τάφος, -ov, 6, (θάπτω) ; 1. burial (so from Hom. 
down). 2. a grave, sepulchre, (so fr. Hes. down) : 
Mt. xxiii. 27, 29; xxvii. 61, 64, 66; xxviii. 1; in a com- 
parison: τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν, their speech 
threatens destruction to others, it is death to some one 
whenever they open their mouth, Ro. iii. 13. Sept. for 
2p, and sometimes for 133.* 

τάχα, (ταχύς), adv. ; 1. hastily, quickly, soon, (so 
fr. Hom. down). 2. as often in Grk. writ. fr. [Hes., 
Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, perhaps, peradventure: Ro. v. 7; 
Philem. 15.* 

[τάχειον, WH for τάχιον, 4- v.; and ef. s. v. et, «.] 

ταχέως, (ταχύς), adv., [fr. Hom. down], quickly, shortly: 
Lk. xiv. 21; xvi 6; Jn.xi.31; 1Co.iv.19; Gali.6; 
Phil. ii. 19, 24; 2 Tim. iv. 9; with the added suggestion 
of inconsiderateness [hastily]: 2 ΤῊ. ii. 2; 1 Tim. v. 22.* 

ταχινός, -7, -óv, fr. Theoer. down, swift, quick: of 
events soon to come or just impending, 2 Pet. i. 14; ii. 
1, (Is. lix. 7; Sap. xiii. 2; Sir. xviii. 26).* 

τάχιον [WH τάχειον ; see their App. p. 154 and cf. 
et, t], (neut. of the compar. raxtov), adv., for which the 
more ancient writ. used θᾶσσον or θᾶττον, see Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 76 sq.; W. $ 11, 2a.; [B. 27 (24)]; more 
swifily, more quickly: in comparison, Jn. xx. 4 [cf. W. 
604 (562)]; with the suppression of the second mem- 
ber of the comparison [W. 243 (228)]: Heb. xiii. 19 
(sooner, sc. than would be the case without your prayers 
for me), 23 (sc. than I depart) ; Jn. xiii. 27 (sc. than you 
seem to have resolved to); 1 Tim. iii. 14 RG T (sc. than 
T anticipated).* 

τάχιστα, (neut. plur. of the superl. τάχιστος, fr. τάχυς), 
adv. [fr. Hom. down], very quickly: ὡς τάχιστα, as 
quickly as possible [A. V. with all speed], Acts xvii. 15.* 

τάχος, -ους, τό, fr. Hom. down, quickness, speed: ἐν τάχει 
(often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down), 
quickly, shortly, Acts xii. 7; xxii. 18; [xxv. 4]; Ro. xvi. 
20; speedily, soon, (Germ. in Bülde), Lk. xviii. 8; 1 Tim. 
i. 14 L Tr WH; Rev. 1.1; xxii. 6.* 

ταχύ, (neut. of the adj. ταχύς), adv., [fr. Pind. down], 
quickly, speedily, (without delay): Mt. ν. 25; xxviii. 7 
sq.; Mk. xvi. 8 Rec.; Lk. xv. 22 L Tr br. WH; Jn. xi. 
29; ἔρχεσθαι, Rev. ii. 5 Rec.^^7, 16; iii 11; xi. 14; 
xxii. 7,12, 20; forthwith, i.e. while in the use of my 
name he is performing mighty works, Mk. ix. 39.* 

ταχύς, -eia, -v, fr. Hom. down, quick, fleet, speedy: opp. 
to βραδύς (as in Xen. mem. 4, 2, 25), eis τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, [ A. V. 
swift to hear], Jas. i. 19.* 

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. 
τῇ: prop. as; [8]. ally it with καί, cf. Curtius $8 27, 647; 
Vanicek p.95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. 
§ 195]), a copulative enclitic particle (on the use of 
which cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 
2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently 
in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat 
rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in 
Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John's Gospel three times; 


616 








, 
TE 


nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in 
the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Ree. of 
Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from 
the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ 
adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Büumlein (Griech. 
Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under 
the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ 
marks it as having an inner connection with what pre- 
cedes; hence καί is the more general particle, τέ the 
more special and precise; καί may often stand for τέ, 
but not τέ for καί. (Cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer., s. v. καί, 
init.) ]. 

1. τέ, standing alone (i. e. not followed by another ré, 
or by καί, or other particle), joins a. parts of one 
and the same sentence, as συναχθέντες συμβούλιόν τε 
λαβόντες, Mt. xxviii. 12; ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραὔτητος, 
1 Co. iv. 21; add, Acts ii. 83; x. 22; xi. 26; xx. 11; 
xxiii. 10 [WH txt. om.], 24; xxiv. 5; xxvii. 20 sq.; xxviii. 
28; Heb.i.3; vi. 5; ix. 1. b. complete sentences: 
Jn. iv. 42; vi.18; Acts ii. 37; iv. 88; v.19, 35,42; vi. 
7, 12sq.; viii. 3, 13, 25,31; x. 28, 33, 48 [here T Tr WH 
δέ (see 6 below)]; xi. 21; xii. 6,8 [L Tr WH δέ (see 6 
below) ], 12; xiii. 4; xv. 4,39; xvi. 13, 23 [WH txt. δέ 
(see 6 below)], 34; xvii.5 [R G], 19 [Trtxt. WH δέ (see 6 
below) ], 26; xviii. 11 [R G], 26; xix. 11, 18, 29; xx. 3, 7; 
xxi. [18° Taf. 1, we 20 [not Lehm.], 37; xxii. 8; xxiii. 5; 
xxiv. 27; xxvii. 5, 8, 17, 29 [Trmrg. δέ (see 6 below) ], 
43; Ro.ii. 19; Hob. xii. 2; introduces a sentence serv- 
ing to illustrate the matter in hand, Acts i 15; iv. 
13. 2. ré .. . καί, and τὲ καί, not only... but also, 
as well...as, both...and; things are thus connected 
which are akin, or which are united to each other by 
some inner bond, whether logical or real; [ace. to W. 
439 (408); Biiumlein u. s. p. 224 sq., these particles give 
no intimation respecting the relative value of the two 
members; but acc. to Rost, Griech. Gram. § 184,4: Don- 
aldson, Gr. Gram. § 551; Jelf § 758; Klotz ad Devar. 
II. 2, p. 740, the member with καί is the more em- 
phatic]; a. parts of one and the same sentence 
(which is completed by a single finite verb): ἐσθίειν τε 
kai πίνειν, Lk. xii. 45; φοβητρά te kai σημεῖα. Lk. xxi. 11; 
ἀρχιερεῖς re καὶ γραμματεῖς, Lk. xxii. 66; πονηρούς τε kai 
ἀγαθούς, Mt. xxii. 10; Ἡρώδης re καὶ Πόντιος Πιλᾶτος, 
Acts iv. 27; ἄνδρες τε καὶ γυναῖκες, Acts viii. 12; ix. 2; 
xxii. 43 πάντη τε κι πανταχοῦ. Acts xxiv. 3; ἀσφαλῆ τε 
καὶ βεβαίαν, Heb. vi. 19; add, Acts 1. 1; ii. 9 sq. ; ix. 29; 
xiv. 1,55 πν. 9; xvii. 4.; xix. ΤῸ, 17. ἘΣ. oll vem Τ 
xxvi 22.2.80. 15 LOMA Gin 9» exe oe OPI: 2[RG], 
24, 30; Heb. iv. 12" Rec., 12°; v. 1 [here Lom. Tr WH 
br. τέ], 7,14; viii. 8; 1x. 9, 19; x. 33; x1. 82; Jas. i. 7; 
τέ is annexed to the article, which DE repeated 
after the καί before the following noun, Lk. ii. 165 xxiii. 

2; Jn.ii.15; Acts v.24; viii. 88; xvii. 10; xviii. 5; 
xxi. 25 [RG]; xxvi. 30; — or (less commonly) omitted, 
Actsi.13; xii.1; [xxi. 25 L' T Tr WH]; Ro.i.20. τέ 
is annexed to a preposition, which after the following 
καί is — either repeated, Acts i. 8 where L om. Tr br. the 
repeated ἐν; Phil. i. 7 [R om. L br. the second ἐν]; — 


τεῖχος 


or omitted, Acts x. 39 [Trtxt. WH]; xxv. 23; xxviii. 
93. τέ is annexed to a relative pronoun, although it 
does not belong so much to the pronoun as to the sub- 
stantive connected with it, Acts xxvi. 22. itis annexed 
to an adverb, ἔτι re καί, [and moreover], Acts xxi. 28. 
When more than two members are joined together, the 
first two are joined by τὲ καί or τὲ . . . καί, the rest by 
καί: Lk. xii.45; Actsi.13; v. 24 [R G]; xxi. 25; 1 Co. 
i. 30; Heb. ii. 4. b. ré... «ai connect whole sen- 
tences (each of which has its own finite verb, or its own 
subject): Actsii.3sq. RG; xvi. 26 RG; τὲ .. 
kat, Acts xxi. 30. 3. τὲ... δέ are so combined 
that ré adds a sentence to what has been previously 
said, and 8é introduces something opposed to this added 
sentence [W. 439 (409)]: Acts xix. 2 LT Tr WH; 3R G 
LTrtxt. WH txt.; xxii. 28 RG. 4. τὲ... ré pre- 
sents as parallel (or coordinate) the ideas or sen- 
tences which it connects, as... so (cf. Kühner $ 520; [Jelf 
§ 754,3; W. $53,4]; on the Lat. que... que cf. Herzog 
on Sallust, Cat. 9, 3): Acts ii. 46; xvi 11 sq. RG; 
xvii.4; xxvi. 10 L T Tr WH txt., 16; Heb. vi. 2 [Tr br. 
WH txt. om. second τέ], (Sap. vii. 13; xv. 7); 
... τέ; Acts ix. 15 [LT Tr WH]; 
Acts xxvi. 20 [L T Tr WH]. 
15; ἐάν τε. . . ἐάν re, see ἐάν, . 3e. pate... ujre ... 
τέ, neither ... nor... and, Acts xxvii. 20 (Xen. an. 4, 
4, 6). 5. ré yáp (which began to be frequent fr. 
Aristot. down), Lat. namque, etenim, for also, for indeed, 
[W. 448 (417)], are so used that the former particle 
connects, the latter gives the reason: Ro. i. 26 (so that 
in 27 we must read ὁμοίως δὲ kat [with L Tr mrg.], see 
in 6 below) ; vii. 7 (4 Mace. v. 22) ; ré yàp . . . καί, Heb. 
ii. 11; ἐάν re yap... ἐάν τε, for whether . . . or (whether), 
Ro. xiv. 8; ἐάν re yap καί, for although (Lat. namque 
etiamsi), 2 Co. x. 8 [RG]. 6. The reading often 
varies in codd. and edd. between ré and δέ; as, Mt. xxiii. 
6; Aetsii.10; iv. 14; viii. 1, 6 ; ix. 24; xiii. 46; Jude 
6, ete. [see in 1 b. above]. In Ro.i. 27, following Lchm. 
[Tr mrg.], we ought certainly to read ὁμοίως δὲ καί; cf. 
Fritzsche ad loe. p. 77; [B. 361 (309) n.]. 7. As 
respects Position (cf. Kühner $ 520 Anm. 5; W. 559 
sq. (520)), ré is properly annexed to that word or idea 
which is placed in parallelism with another (as Ἰουδαῖοί 
τε καὶ Ἕλληνες) ; but writers also take considerable lib- 
erty in placing it, and readily subjoin it to an article or 
a preposition; for examples see in 2 a. above. 

τεῖχος, τους, τό, [cf. Oryyávo; allied with it are Ene. 
‘dike’ and ‘ditch’], fr. Hom. down, Sept. very freq. for 
main ‘wall’; the wall round a city, town-wall: Acts ix. 
25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. xi. 30; Rev. xxi. 12, 14 sq., 17-19.* 

τεκμήριον, -ov, τό, (fr. τεκμαίρω to show or prove by 
sure signs; fr. τέκμαρ a sign), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
that from which something is surely and plainly known ; 
an indubitable evidence, a proof, (Hesych. τεκμήριον - 
σημεῖον ἀληθές): Acts i. 3 (Sap. v. 11; 3 Macc. iii. 24).* 

τεκνίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of τέκνον, q. v. ; [on the accent, 
cf. W. 52; Chandler ὃ 8477), a little child; in the N. T. 
used as a term of kindly address by teachers to their 


Y 
* Küt . .- 


: 
τὲ kal 

^ * , 
Té kal... TÉ .. . kal, 
etre . . . etre, see ei, III. 


617 





τέκνον 


disciples [always in the plur. little children: Mk. x. 24 
Lehm.]; Jn. xiii. 33; Gal. iv. 19 (where L txt. T Tr WH 
mrg. τέκνα) ; 1Jn. ii. 1, 12, 28; iii. 7 [WH mrg. παιδία], 
18; iv. 4; v. 21. (Anthol)* 

TeKvoyovew, -à; (rekvoyóvos, and this fr. τέκνον and 


TENQ) ; to beget or bear children: 1'Tim. v. 14. (An- 
thol. 9, 22, 4.) * 
τεκνογονία, -as, 7, child-bearing: 1 Tim. ii. 15. (Aris- 


tot. h. a. 7, 1, 8 [[p.582%, 28].) * 

τέκνον, -ov, τό, (τίκτω, τεκεῖν), fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
chiefly for 13» sometimes for 395 offspring; plur. chil- 
dren; a. prop. a. univ. and without regard to 
sex, child: Mk. xiii. 12; Lk. i. 7; Acts vii.5; Rev. xii. 
4; plur, Mt. vii. 11; x. 21; xv. 26; Mk. vii. 27; xii. 
19; Lk.i.17; xiv. 26; Actsxxi.5; 2Co. xii. 14; Eph. 
vi.1; Col. id. 20sq.; 1 Th. ii. 7, 11; 1 Tim.iH.4; Tit. 
i.6; 2 Jn. 1, 4, 13, and often; with emphasis: to be 
regarded as true, genuine children, Ro. ix. 7; τέκνα 
ἐπαγγελίας, children begotten by virtue of the divine 
promise, Ro. ix. 8; accounted as children begotten by 
virtue of God's promise, Gal.iv. 28; τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός, 
children by natural descent, Ro. ix. 8. in a broader 
sense (like the Hebr. 0°13), posterity: Mt. ii. 18; iii. 9; 
Lk. iii. 8; Acts ii. 39; xiii. 33 (32). with emphasis : 
genuine posterity, true offspring, Jn. viii. 39; (of wo- 
men) to be regarded as children, 1 Pet. iii. 6. p. 
spec. a male child, a son: Mt. xxi. 28; Acts xxi. 21; 
Rev. xii. 5; in the voc., in kindly address, Mt. xxi. 28 ; 
Lk. ii. 48; xv. 31. b. metaph. the name is trans- 
ferred to that intimate and reciprocal relationship formed 
between men by the bonds of love, friendship, trust, 
just as between parents and children; a. in affec- 
tionate address, such as patrons, helpers, teachers, and 
the like, employ; voc. child (son), my child, children, 
(Lat. fili, mi fili, ete., for carissime, ete.): Mt. ix. 2; Mk. 
ii. 5; x. 24 [here Lehm. τεκνία, q. v.]. B. just as in 
Hebrew, Syriae, Arabie, Persian, so in the N. T., pupils 
or disciples are called children of their teachers, because 
the latter by their instruction nourish the minds of their- 
pupils and mould their characters (see γεννάω, 2 b.): 
Philem. 10; 2 Tim.i.2; 3 Jn.4; in affectionate ad- 
dress, Gal. iv. 19 L txt. T Tr WH mrg.; 1 Tim. i. 18; 2 
Tim. ii. 1; with ἐν κυρίῳ added, 1 Co. iv. 17; ἐν πίστει, 
1 Tim.i.2; κατὰ κοινὴν πίστιν, Tit. i. 4, (D839 "33, sons 
i.e. disciples of the prophets, 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 35; 2 K. 
ii. 3, 5, 7; among the Persians, ‘sons of the Magi’ i. e. 
their pupils). y- τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ, children of God, —in 
the O. T. of ‘the people of Israel’ as especially dear to 
God: Is. xxx. 1; Sap. xvi. 21; —inthe N. T., in Paul's 
writings, all who are animated by the Spirit of God (Ro. 
viii. 14) and thus are closely related to God: Ro. viii. 
16 sq. 21; Eph.v.1; Phil. ii. 15; those to whom, as dear- 
ly beloved of God, he has appointed salvation by Christ, 
Ro. ix.8; inthe writings of John, all who ἐκ θεοῦ éyev- 
νήθησαν (have been begotten of God, see γεννάω, 2 d.) : Jn. 
i. 12sq.; 1 Jn. iii. 1 sq. 10; v. 2; those whom God knows 
to be qualified to obtain the nature and dignity of his 
children, Jn. xi. 52. [Cf. Westcott on the Epp. of St. 


; 
τεκνοτροφέω 


John, pp. 94, 120; “In St. Paul the expressions ‘sons 
of God’, ‘children of God’, mostly convey the idea of 
liberty (see however Phil. ii. 15), in St. John of guile- 
lessness and love; in accordance with this distinction 
St. Paul uses υἱοί as well as τέκνα, St. John τέκνα only " 
(Bp. Lghtft.) ; cf. vids τοῦ θεοῦ, 4.] 8. τέκνα τοῦ δια- 
βόλου, those who in thought and action are prompted by the 
devil, and so reflect his character: 1 Jn. iii. 10. Q. 
metaph. and Hebraistically, one is called rékvov of any- 
thing who depends upon it, is possessed by a desire or 
affection for it, is addicted to it; or who is liable to any 
fate; thus in the N. T. we find a. children of a 
city, i. e. its citizens, inhabitants, (Jer. ii. 30; Joel ii. 
23; 1 Mace. i. 38; υἱοὶ Σιών, Ps. exlix. 2): Mt. xxiii. 
37; Lk. xiii. 34; xix. 44 ; Gal. iv. 25. B. τέκνα τῆς 
σοφίας, the votaries of wisdom, those whose souls have, 
as it were, been nurtured and moulded by wisdom: Mt. 
xi. 19 (where T Tr txt. WH have hastily adopted ἔργων 
for τέκνων ; cf. Keim ii. p. 369 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 43 sq.; 
per contra, see Tdf.’s note and WH. App. ad loc.]) ; Lk. 
vii. 35; τέκνα ὑπακοῆς; those actuated by a desire to obey, 
obedient, 1 Pet. i. 14 ; τοῦ φωτός, both illumined by the 
light and loving the light, Eph. v. 8. Y- κατάρας 
τέκνα, exposed to cursing, 2 Pet. ii. 14; τῆς ὀργῆς, doomed 
to God's wrath or penalty, Eph. ii. 3; cf. Steiger on 1 
Pet.i. 14; W.238(223); [B. 161 (141)]. In the same 
way ἔκγονος is used sometimes in Grk. writ.; as, ey. 
ἀδικίας, δειλίας, Plat. lege. 3 p. 691¢.; 10 p. 901e. 

[SvN. τέκνον, vids: τ. and ví. while concurring in point- 
ing to parentage, differ in that 7. gives prominence to the 
physical and outward aspects, ví. to the inward, ethical, legal. 
Cf. b. y. above; vids τοῦ θεοῦ, fin. ; παῖς, fin. and reff. (esp. 
that to Hohne).] 

τεκνο-τροφέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐτεκνοτρύφησα ; (rekvorpódos, 
and this from τέκνον and τρέφω) ; to bring up children: 
1 Tim. v. 10. (φέρει ὕδωρ, ὅταν τεκνοτροφῇ, sc. the bee, 
Aristot. h. a. 9, 40 [27], 14 [p. 6255, 20].) * 

τέκτων, -ovos, 6, (τεκεῖν, τίκτω ; akin to τέχνη, τεύχω, 
hence prop. * begetter* [Curtius § 235]), fr. Hom. down, 
Sept. for wn; a worker in wood, a carpenter: Mt. xiii. 
55; Mk. vi. 3 [see WH. App. on the latter pass.].* 

τέλειος, -a, -ov, (τέλος), in classic Grk. sometimes also 
τος; -ov, (cf. W. $ 11, 1), fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times 
for poU, DDN, ete.; prop. brought to its end, finished ; 
wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect: épyov, 
Jas. i.4 ; ἡ ἀγάπη, 1 Jn. iv. 18; ὁ νόμος, Jas. i. 25; [δώρημα, 
Jas.i.17]; τελειοτέρα σκηνή, a more perfect (excellent) 
tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11; τὸ τέλειον, substantively, that 
which is perfect: consummate human integrity and vir- 
tue, Ro. xii. 2 [al. take it here as an adj. belonging to 
θέλημα] : the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in 
by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10; of 
men, full-grown, adult; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl. 
Ag. 1504; Plat. legg. 11 p.929c.): Heb. v. 14; τέλ. ἀνήρ 
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4 sq.; 8, 7,6; Philo de cherub. $32; opp. 
to παιδίον νήπιον, Polyb. 5, 29, 2; for other exx. fr. other 
auth. see Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 133 sq.), μέχρι 
- - - eis ἄνδρα τέλειον, until we rise to the same level of 


618 


TEAELOW 


knowledge which we ascribe to a full-grown man, until 
we can be likened toa full-grown man, Eph. iv. 13 (opp. 
to νήπιοι, 14); τέλειοι ταῖς φρεσί (opp. to παιδία and 
νηπιάζοντες ταῖς φρεσί), 1 Co. xiv. 20 [here A. V. men]; 
absol. of τέλειοι, the perfect, i.e. the more intelligent, 
ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Co. ii. 6 [R.V. mrg. 
full-grown] (opp. to νήπιοι ἐν Χριστῷ, iii. 1; in simple opp. 
to νήπιος, Philo de legg. alleg. i. § 305 for 35, opp. to 
μανθάνων, 1 Chr. xxv. 8; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 28; 
Phil. iii. 157}; of mind and character, one who has 
reached the proper height of virtue and integrity: Mt. 
v. 48; xix. 21; Phil. iii. 15 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. u. s.]; Jas. 
i.4; in an absol. sense, of God: Mt. v. 48; τέλειος 
ἀνήρ, Jas. iii. 2 (red. δίκαιος, Sir. xliv. 17); as respects 
understanding and goodness, Col. iv. 12; τέλ. ἄνθρωπος 
ἐν Χριστῷ, Col. i. 28 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. u. s. Syn. see 
ὁλόκληρος, and Trench $ xxii. ].* 

τελειότης, τητος, 7, (τέλειος, q. v.), perfection; a. 
i. e. the state of the more intelligent: Heb. vi. 1 [here R.V. 
mrg. full growth]. b. perfection: (τῆς ἀγάπης, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 1 [where see Harnack]); absol. moral 
and spiritual perfection, Col. iii. 14 [ A.V. perfectness], on 
which pass. see σύνδεσμος, 1. (Prov. xi.3 Alex.; Judg. 
ix. 16,19; Sap. vi. 16; xii. 17; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 5; 
Plat. deff. p. 412 b. d.; [ Aristot. phys. 3, 6 p. 207%, 21; 8, 
7 p.261*,36]; Antonin. 5, 15.)  [Cf. reff. s. v. τέλειος, 
and B. Hartung, Der Begriff der τελειότης im N. T. 
(4to. Leipz. 1881).]* 

τελειόω (in prof. auth. also τελεόω, which Hdt. uses 
everywhere [and which is *the prevailing form in Attie 
prose" (L. and S.)]; other writ. use both forms indif- 
ferently), τῶ: 1 aor. ἐτελείωσα ; pf.rereAe(oka; Pass. (or 
Mid.), pres. τελειοῦμαι; pf. τετελείωμαι ; 1 aor. ἐτελειώθην; 
(τέλειος) ; fr. Hdt., Soph., Thuc., and Plat. down; equiv. 
to τέλειον ποιῶ, to make perfect or complete; 1. to 
carry through completely; to accomplish, finish, bring to 
an end: τὸν δρόμον, Acts xx. 24; τὸ ἔργον, Jn. iv. 34; v. 
36; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi. 16; τὸν οἶκον, 2 Chr. viii. 16); ras 
ἡμέρας, Lk. ii. 43; mid. [pres. cf. B. 38 (33)] τελειοῦμαι, 
I finish, complete, what was given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32 
[some (so A. V.) take it here as pass. J am perfected 
(understanding it of his death; cf. Ellicott, Life of our 
Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n; Keim ii. 615 n.?) . 2. to 
complete ( perfect), i. e. add what is yet wanting in order 
to render a thing full: τὴν ἀγάπην, pass., 1 Jn. ii. 5; iv. 
12, 17; ἡ δύναμίς μου ev ἀσθενείᾳ τελειοῦται, my power 
shows itself most efficacious in them that are weak, 2 Co. 
xii. 9 RG; ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη, by works 
faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, Jas. ii. 
22; τετελείωταί τις ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ; one has been made perfect 
in love, his love lacks nothing, 1 Jn. iv. 18 (οἱ τελειω- 
θέντες ἐν ἀγάπῃ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 3; [τελειῶσαι τὴν 
ἐκκλησίαν σου ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου, ‘Teaching’ ete. 10, 5]); 
ἵνα ὦσι τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν, that they may be perfected into 
one, i. e. perfectly united, Jn. xvii. 23. τινά, to bring 
one's character to perfection: ἤδη τετελείωμαι, I am already 
made perfect, Phil. iii. 12 (Sap. iv. 13; ὦ ψυχὴ . - - ὅταν 
τελειωθῇς kai βραβείων kai στεφάνων ἀξιωθῇς, Philo de legg. 


τελείως 


alles. 3, 23; ψυχὴ - - - τελειωθεῖσα ἐν ἀρετῶν ἄθλοις καὶ 
ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρον ἐφικομένη τοῦ καλοῦ, id. de somn. 1, 21; i. q. 
to be found perfect, Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 10). 3. to 
bring to the end (goal) proposed: οὐδέν, Heb. vii. 19; 
τινά, [to perfect or consummate] i.e. to raise to the state 
befitting him: so of God exalting Jesus to the state of 
heavenly majesty, Heb. ii. 10; in pass., Heb. v. 9; vii. 
28; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who 
put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, pass., 
Heb. xi. 40; xii. 23, ([Act. Petr. et Paul. $88, ed. Tdf. 
p. 39; Act. Barnab. $ 9, id. p. 68; cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 
16, 2]; with μαρτυρίῳ added, of the death of the apost. 
Paul, Euseb. h. e. 2, 22, 2 [cf. Heinichen's note on 7, 15, 
5]); to make one meet for future entrance on this state 
and give him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Heb. 
x. 1, 14; τινὰ κατὰ συνείδησιν, Heb. ix. 9; cf. Bleek, Brief 
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 297 sqq.; C. R. Kóstlin, Lehrbegriff 
des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843) p. 421 
sqq.5; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Hebr.-Br., § 42, p. 340 sqq. ; 
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 72 
sqq. ]. 4. to accomplish, i. e. bring to a close or ful- 
Jilment by event: τὴν γραφήν, the prophecies of Scripture, 
pass., Jn. xix. 28 [cf. W. 459 (428); B. § 151, 20].* 

τελείως, (τέλειος), adv., perfectly, completely: 1 Pet. i. 
13. [Plat., Isoer., Aristot., etc. ; cf. W. 463 (431).]* 

τελείωσις, -ews, 7, (τελειόω), & completing, perfecting ; 
a. fulfilment, accomplishment; the event which verifies 
a promise (see τελειόω, 4): Lk.i. 45 [Judith x. 9; Philo 
de vit. Moys. iii. $ 39]. b. consummation, perfection, 
(see τελειόω, 3) : Heb. vii. 11. (In various senses in 
Aristot. Theophr. Diod.) [Cf. reff. s. v. τελειόω, 3.] * 

τελειωτής, -00, 6, (τελειόω), (Vulg. consummator), a per- 
Jfecter: τῆς πίστεως, one who has in his own person raised 
faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest 
example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs no- 
where else.* 

τελεσφορέω, -à; (τελεσφόρος, fr. τέλος and φέρω) ; to 
bring to (perfection or) maturity (sc. καρπούς) : Lk. viii. 
14. (Used alike of fruits, and of pregnant women and 
animals bringing their young to maturity; 4 Macc. xiii. 
19; Theophr., Geop., Philo, Diod., Joseph., al.; [ Ps. lxiv. 
(Ixv.) 10 Symm.].) * 

τελευτάω, -@; 1 aor. ἐτελεύτησα ; pf. ptep. τετελευτηκώς 
(Jn. xi. 39L T Tr WH) ; (τελευτή); fr. Hom. down; 1. 
trans. to finish ; to bring to an end or close: τὸν βίον, to 
finish life, to die, often fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down. 2. 
intrans. [cf. B. $130, 4] to have an end or close, come to an 
end; hence to die, very often so fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down (Sept. for ni), and always in the N. T.: Mt. ii. 
19; ix. 18; xxii. 25; Mk. ix. 44, 46 [(these two vss. T 
WH om. Tr br.)], 48; Lk. vii. 2; Jn. xi. 891, T Tr WH; 
Acts ii. 29; vii. 15; Heb. xi. 22; θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (in 
imitation of the Hebr. nov ny, Ex. xxi. 12, 15-17, 
ete.), [A. V. let him die the death i. e.] let him surely die 
[W. 339 (319); B. $ 133, 22], Mt. xv. 4; Mk. vii. 10.* 

τελευτή, -ῆς, 7, (τελέω), end [see τέλος, 1 a. init.]; the 
end of life, decease, death: Mt. ii. 15 (and often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Pind. and Thue. down; Sept. for n5; with 


619 


τέλος 


βιότοιο added, Hom. Il. 7, 104; τοῦ βίου, Hdt. 1, 30, and 
often in Attic writ.).* 

τελέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐτέλεσα [cf. W. $13, 3 c.]; pf. τετέλεκα 
(2 Tim. iv. 7); Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. τελεῖται (2 Co. 
xii. 9 LT Tr WH); pf. τετέλεσμαι;; 1 aor. ἐτελέσθην ; 
1 fut. τελεσθήσομαι; (τέλος) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to 
bring to a close, to finish, to end : ἔτη, pass., passed, finished, 
Rev. xx. 3, 5, 7, ([so fr. Hom. and Hes. down; Aristot. 
h. a. 7, 1 init. p. 580°, 14 ἐν rois ἔτεσι rois δὶς ἑπτὰ rere- 
λεσμένοις] ; τριῶν τελουμένων ἡμερῶν, Lcian. Alex. 38); 
τὸν δρόμον (Hom. Il. 23, 373, 768; Soph. Electr. 726), 
2 Tim. iv. 7; τοὺς λόγους, Mt. vii. 28 L'T Tr WH; xix. 
1; xxvi. 1; τὰς παραβολάς, Mt. xiii. 53; [ἄχρι τελεσθῶσιν 
ai πληγαί, Rev. xv. 8]; a rare use is τελεῖν τὰς πόλεις, i. e. 
your flight or journey through the cities [R. V. ye shall 
not have gone through the cities, etc.], Mt. x. 23 (similar 
are ἀνύειν τοὺς τόπους, Polyb. 5, 8, 1; τὰ ἕλη, 3, 79, 5; con- 
summare Italiam, Flor. 1, (13) 18, 1; ezplere urbes, Ti- 
bull. 1, 4, 69; conficere aequor immensum, Verg. Georg. 
2, 541; also xii. sienorum orbem, Cic. nat. deor. 2, 20, 
52); with the ptep. of a verb (like ἄρχομαι, παύομαι, cf. 
W. § 45, 4 ἃ.; B. § 144, 14), Mt. xi. 1. 2. to per- 
form, execute, complete, fulfil, (so that the thing done 
corresponds to what has been said, the order, command, 
ete): a. with special reference to the sub- 
ject-matter, to carry out the contents of a command : 
τὸν νόμον, Ro. ii. 27 [cf. W. 134 (127)]; Jas. ii. 8; τὴν 
ἐπιθυμίαν (i. e. τὸ ἐπιθυμούμενον), Gal. v. 16. B. with 
reference also to the f or m, to do just as commanded, and 
generally involving a notion of time, to perform the last 
act which completes a process, to accomplish, fulfil: 
ἅπαντα (πάντα) τὰ κατὰ νόμον, Lk. ii. 39; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, 
the duty of testifying, Rev. xi. 7; τὸ μυστήριον, pass. 
Rev. x. 7 [ef. W. 277 (260)]; τὸ βάπτισμα, pass. Lk. xii. 
50; πάντα, pass. Jn. xix. 28 [the distinction betw. τελέω 
and τελειόω may be seen in this vs.]; τοὺς λόγους (τὰ 
ῥήματα) τοῦ co), pass. Rev. xvii. 17; ἅπαντα (πάντα) τὰ 
γεγραμμένα, Acts xiii. 29; pass., Lk. xviii. 31 [see γράφω, 
2 c.]; with ἐν ἐμοί (in me) added, in my experience, Lk. 
xxii. 37; ἐν πληγαῖς, in the infliction of calamities, Rev. 
xv. 1; τετέλεσται, [A. V. it is finished] everything has 
been accomplished which by the appointment of the 
Father as revealed in the Scriptures I must do and bear, 
Jn. xix. 30. i.q. τελειόω, 2, q. v. (made perfect): 2 Co. 
xii. 9 L T Tr WH. 3. to pay: rà δίδραχμα, Mt. 
xvii. 24; φόρους, Ro. xiii. 6, (τὸν φόρον, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 
123 a.; τὰ τέλη, often in Attic writ.). [Comp.: ἀπο-, 
Sua-, ék-, ἐπι-» συν- reMéo.] * 

τέλος, -ous, τό, [cf. Curtius $ 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
mostly for Yps 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the 
limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ. 
always of the end of some aet or state, but not of the 
end of a period of time, which they call τελευτή ; in the 
Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is 
everywhere called πέρας) : τῆς βασιλείας, Lk. i. 33; ζωῆς, 
Heb. vii. 3; τοῦ καταργουμένου, 2 Co. iii. 13; τὰ τέλη τῶν 
αἰώνων, 1 Co. x. 11 (τέλος τῶν ἡμερῶν, Neh. xiii. 6; τῶν 
ἑπτὰ ἐτῶν, 2 K. viii. 3; ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος καὶ μεσότης χρόνων, 


τέλος 6 


Sap. vii. 18); i. q. he who puts an end to: τέλος νόμου 
Χριστός, Christ has brought the law to an end (πᾶσίν 
ἐστιν ἀνθρώποις τέλος τοῦ βίου θάνατος, Dem. 1306, 25), 
Ro. x. 4; cf. Fritzsche ad loc., vol. ii. p. 377 sq. 
τὸ τέλος. the end of all things (i. e. of the present order 
of things), 1 Pet. iv. 7; also in the phrases ἕως τέλους, 
1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co. i. 13; μέχρι τέλους, Heb. iii. 6 [Tr mrg. 
WH br. the cl.], 14; ἄχρι τέλους, Heb. vi. 14; Rev. ii. 
26. what *end' is intended the reader must deter- 
mine by the context; thus, τὸ τέλος denotes the end of 
the Messianic pangs (dolores Messiae; see div) in Mt. 
xxiv. 6, 14, (opp. to ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων) ; Mk. xiii. 7 (cf. 9); 
Lk. xxi. 9; τὸ τέλος in 1 Co. xv. 24 denotes either the 
end of the eschatological events, or the end of the res- 
urrection i. e. the last or third act of the resurrection (to 
include those who had not belonged to the number of οἱ 
TOU Χριστοῦ ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ), 1 Co. xv. 24 cf. 23; 
see De Wette ad loc.; Weizel in the Theol. Stud. u. 
Krit. for 1836, p. 978; Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wis- 
sensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 388 sqq.; [yet cf. Heinrici in 
Meyer (6te Aufl.) ad loc.]. εἰς réXos, — to the very end 
appointed for these evils, Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 13; Mk. xiii. 
13; also at the end, at last, finally, Lk. xviii. 5 (Vulg. in 
novissimo) [i. e. lest at last by her coming she wear me 
out; but al. take it i.q. Hebr. ΠΣ} (cf. Job xiv. 20 ete. 
see Trommius) and connect it with the ptep., lest by her 
coming to the last i.e. continually; see ὑπωπιάζω, sub fin. ] ; 
Jn. xiii. 1 [al. to the uttermost, completely (cf. our to the 
very last); see Westcott, and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aufl.) 
ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 29], cf. ἀγαπάω, sub fin., 
(Xen. oec. 17, 10; Hes. opp. 292; Hdt. 8, 40; 9, 37; 
Soph. Phil. 409; Eur. Ion 1615; Ael v.h. 10, 16); to 
the (procurement of their) end, i. e. to destruction [ A. V. 
to the uttermost (cf. reff. u. s.)], 1 Th. ii. 16 (for 1535, 
2 Chr. xii. 12); τέλος ἔχειν, to have an end, be finished, 
(often in Grk. writ.), Lk. xxii. 37 [al. give τέλος here 
the sense of fulfilment (cf. τελέω, 2)]; i. q. to perish, Mk. 
iii. 26. τὸ δὲ τέλος, adverbially, finally (denique vero): 
1 Pet. iii. 8 (Plat.legg. 6 p. 768 b.; καὶ τό ye τέλος, ibid. 
5 p. 740 e. ; but generally in prof. auth. τέλος in this 
sense wants the article; cf. Passow ii. p. 1857*; [L. and 
S. s. v. I. 4 a.]). b. the end i.e. the last in any suc- 
cession or series: (ἡ) ἀρχὴ kai (τὸ) τέλος, of God, who by 
his perpetuity survives all things, i. e. eternal, Rev. i. 8 
Rec.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. c. that by which a thing is 
finished, its close, issue: Mt. xxvi. 58; final lot, fate, as 
if a recompense: with a gen. of the thing, Ro. vi. 21 
sq.; Heb. vi. 8; 1 Pet. i.9; with a gen. of the person 
whom the destiny befalls, 2 Co. xi. 15; Phil. iii. 19; 1 
Pet.iv. 17; τοῦ κυρίου (gen. of author), the closing ex- 
perience which befell Job by God's command, Jas. v. 11 
(referring to Job xlii. [esp. 12]). d. the end to 
which all things relate, the aim, purpose: 1 Tim. i. 5 
(often so in philos. fr. Plat. de rep. 6 p. 494 a. down; cf. 
Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 378). 2. toll, custom, [i. e. 
an indirect tax on goods; see φόρος and κῆνσος]: Mt. 
xvii. 25; Ro. xiii. 7, (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Aeschin., Dem., 
al.; 1 Macc. x. 31; xi. 35).* 


πάντων 


0 τεσσαρακοντατέσσαρες 


τελώνης, -ου, ὁ, (fr. τέλος [(q. v. 2)] tax, and ὠνέομαι to 
buy; cf. δημοσιώνης, ὀψώνης, δεκατώνης), fr. Arstph., 
Aeschin., Aristot., Polyb. down; 1. a renter or 
Jürmer of taxes (Lat. publicanus); among the Romans 
usually a man of equestrian rank. 2. a taz-gatherer, 
collector of taxes or tolls, (Vulg. publicanus incorrectly ; 
[so A. V. publican]), one employed by a publican or far- 
mer-general in collecting the taxes. The tax-collectors 
were, as aclass, detested not only by the Jews but by other 
nations also, both on account of their employment and of 
the harshness, greed, and deception, with which they 
prosecuted it; (hence they are classed by Artem. oneir. 
1, 23; 4, 57, with καπήλοις καὶ τοῖς μετὰ ἀναιδείας ζῶσι καὶ 
λῃσταῖς καὶ ζυγοκρούσταις καὶ παραλογισταῖς ἀνθρώποις ; 
Leian. necyom. ec. 11 puts together μοιχοί, πορνοβοσκοὶ 
kal τελῶναι καὶ κόλακες καὶ συκοφάνται [ Theophr. charact. 
6 (περὶ ἀπονοίας) πανδοχεῦσαι, καὶ πορνοβοσκῆσαι, καὶ 
τελωνῆσαι}) : Mt. v. 46, 47 Rec.; x. 3; Lk. 111.12; v. 27, 
29; vii. 29; xviii. 10, 11, 13; the plur. is joined with 
ἁμαρτωλοί, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; [xi. 19]; Mk. xi. 15 sq.; Lk. 
v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1; with πόρναι, Mt. xxi. 31 sq.; ὁ ἐθνι- 
Kos k. ὁ τελώνης, Mt. xviii. 17. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Zoll, 
Zollner; [BB. DD. s.v. Publican; Wetstein on Mt. v. 
46; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 515 sqq.].* 

τελώνιον, -ov, τό, (τελώνης, cf. δεκατώνιον) ; [1. cus- 
toms, toll: Strabo 16, 1, 27. 2.] toll-house, place of 
toll, tax-office: the place in which the tax-collector sat 
to collect the taxes [ Wiclif, tolbothe]: Mt.ix.9; Mk. ii. 
14; Lk. v. 27." 

τέρας, gen. réparos, pl. τέρατα (see κέρας, init.), (appar- 
ently akin to the verb τηρέω ; accordingly something so 
strange as to cause it to be ‘watched’ or ‘observed’; 
[others connect it with ἀστήρ, ἀστραπή, etc., hence ‘asign 
in the heavens’; Vanicek p. 1146 ; Curtius § 205]; see 
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 270), fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for ND‘, a prodigy, portent; miracle [ A.V. wonder] per- 
Jormed by any one; in the N. T. it is found only in the 
plur. and joined with σημεῖα ; for the passages see σημεῖον, 
p. 574%, 

Téprios, -ov, 6, Tertius, an amanuensis of the apostle 
Paul: Ro. xvi.22. [B.D.s.v.]* 

TéprvAXos, -ov, 6, T'rtullus, a Roman orator: Acts 
xxiv. 1sq. [See pyrep.]* 

τεσσαράκοντα [ἰ (ἡ, but several times [i. e. betw. 8 and 
14] in Lehm. and everywhere in T WH (and Tr, exc. 
Rev. xxi. 17) τεσσεράκοντα (a form originally Ionic [yet 
cf. B. as below]; see Kühner $187, 5; B. 28 (25) sq. ; 
cf. W. 43; [ Tdf. Proleg. p. 850; WH. App. p. 1507), oi, 
ai, rd, indecl. numeral, forty: Mt. iv. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk. 
iv. 2; Jn. ii. 20; ete. 

[τεσσαρακοντα-δύο, forty-two: Rev. xi. 2 Rec.**7; xiii. 5 
Rec.bez px 

τεσσαρακονταετής (T Tr WH reca ep-, see τεσσαράκον- 
ta; LT accent -έτης, see ἑκατονταέτης); és, (τεσσαράκον- 
ra, and ἔτος), of forty years, forty years old: Acts vii. 
23; xiii. 18. (Hes. opp. 441.) * 

[τεσσαρακοντα-τέσσαρες, -ov, forty-four: Rev. xxi. 17 
Rec.»e IER] 


τέσσαρες 


τέσσαρες; -ὧν, οἷ, ai, τέσσαρα, τά, gen. τεσσάρων, dat. 
τέσσαρσιν, ([Lchm. reads τέσσερες 7 times to 33, Tdf. 6 
to 35, Tr 6 to 33, WH 6 to 34; Lehm. sometimes has 
τέσσερα, T Tr WH always; L Tr sometimes have τέσ- 
c e pas (see WH. App. p. 150)]; but no editor adopts e in 
the gen. or dat. ; see τεσσαράκοντα and reff.), four : Mt. 
xxiv. 91; Mk. 11.3; Dk: 11.375 dn. xb 175 Acta x. 11; 
Rev. iv. 4, etc. 

τεσσαρες-και-δέκατος, -r, -ov, the fourteenth: Acts xxvii. 
27, 83." 

[τεσσερ- see τεσσαρ- (cf. Meisterhans § 21, 4)] 

τεταρταῖος. -a, -ον; (τέταρτος), an ordinal numeral, used 
in answer to the question on what day ? one who does or 
suffers a thing till the fourth day or on the fourth day: 
τεταρταῖός ἐστιν, i. e. he has been four days in the tomb, 
or it is the fourth day since he was buried, [A. V. he 
hath been dead four days], Jn. xi. 39 (ἤδη yap ἦσαν πεμ- 
mraiot, already five days dead, Xen. an. 6, 4 (2), 9).* 

τέταρτος, -n, -ov, (fr. τέτταρες), the fourth: Mt. xiv. 25; 
Mk. vi. 48; Acts x. 30; Rev. iv. 7, ete. [From Hom. 
down. | 

Terpa-, in composition i. q. réropa, Aeolie [Doric 
rather] for τέσσαρα. 

[τετρααρχέω, see τετραρχέω.] 

[τετραάρχης, see τετράρχης.] 

τετράγωνος, -ον, (fr. rérpa, q. v., and γῶνος [i. e. γωνία), 
quadrangular, square; [A. V. four-square] (Vulg. in 
quadro positus): Rev. xxi.16. (Sept.; Hdt., Plat., Ar- 
istot., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

τετράδιον, -ov, τό, (τετράς, the number four), a quater- 
nion (τὸ ἐκ τεσσάρων συνεστός, Suid.): τῶν στρατιωτῶν, 
a guard consisting of four soldiers (for among the Ro- 
mans this was the usual number of the guard to which 
the custody of captives and prisons was intrusted ; two 
soldiers were confined with the prisoner and two kept 
guard outside), Acts xii. 4, where the four quaternions 
mentioned were on guard one at a time during each of 
the four watches. (Philo in Flacc. § 13 i. e. ed. Mang. 
vol. ii. p. 533, 25.)* 

τετρακισ-χίλιοι, -at, -a, (τετράκις and χίλιοι), four thou- 
sand: Mt. xv. 38; xvi.10; Mk. viii. 9,20; Acts xxi. 38. 
[CHdt., Arstph., Thue., al.)]* 

τετρακόσιοι, -ar -a, (fr. τετράκις, and the term. -όσιος 
indicating one hundred; [cf. G. Meyer, Gr. Gram. § 16 
f.]), four hundred: Acts v. 36; vii. 6; xiii. 20; Gal. iii. 
17. [(Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.)]* 

τετράμηνος, -ov, (fr. rérpa, q. v., and μήν ; cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 549), of four months, lasting four months: τε- 
τράμηνός ἐστιν 80. χρόνος, Jn. iv. 35, where Rec. rerpd- 
μηνόν ἐστιν, as in Judg. xix. 2 Alex.; xx. 47. (Thuc. 
Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

TerpamAóos, (-ods), -dn (-ἢ), -dov (-obv), (fr. rérpa, and 
πλόος, to which corresponds the Lat. -plus in duplus, 
triplus, fr. ΠΛΈΩ [but ef. Vanicek p. 501]), quadruple, 
Jourfold: Lk.xix.8. (Sept.; Xen., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

τετρά-πους, -ovr, gen. -odos, (fr. rérpa, q. v., and πούς a 
foot), fr. Hdt. and Thue. down, four-footed : neut. plur. 
sc. beasts, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro.i.23. (Sept. for 7793.) * 


621 











τηλικοῦτος 


τετραρχέω [T WH rerpaapx. (see WH. App. p. 145)], 
τῶ; (τετράρχης, q. v.), to be governor of a tetrarchy, be 
tetrarch: with a gen. of the region, Lk. iii. 1. [(Joseph. 
b. j. 3, 10, 7.)]* 

τετράρχης [T WH rerpadpyns; see the preceding word, 
and cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117], -ov, 6, (fr. rérpa, q. v., and 
ápxo), a tetrarch ; i. e. 1. a governor of the fourth 
part of any region. Thus Strabo, 12 p. 567, states that 
Galatia was formerly divided into three parts, each one 
of which was distributed into four smaller subdivisions 
each of which was governed by ‘a tetrarch’; again, in 
lib. 9 p. 430, he relates that Thessaly, before the time 
of Philip of Macedon, had been divided into four *tet- 
rarchies’ each of which had its own ‘tetrarch’. 2. 
the word lost its strict etymological force, and came to 
denote the governor of a third part or half of a country, 
or even the ruler of an entire country or district provided 
it were of comparatively narrow limits; a petty prince 
[cf. e. g. Plut. Anton. 56, 3, i. p. 943 4.1. Thus Antony 
made Herod (afterwards king) and Phasael, sons of 
Antipater, fetrarchs of Palestine, Joseph. antt. 14, 13, 1. 
After the death of Herod the Great, his sons, Archelaus 
styled an ethnarch but Antipas and Philip with the title 
of *tetrarchs', divided and governed the kingdom left 
by their father; Joseph. antt. 17, 11, 4. Cf. Fischer, 
De vitiis etc. p. 428; Win. RWB. s. v. Tetrarch, and 
esp. Keim in Schenkel v. p. 487 sqq. The tetrarch 
Herod Antipas is mentioned in Mt. xiv. 1; Lk. iii. 19 ; 
1χ. 7; Αοὐϑ χα]. 1.5 

τεύχω, See τυγχάνω. 

τεφρόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. τεφρώσας ; (τέφρα ashes) ; to 
reduce to ashes: 2 Pet. ii. 6. (Aristot. [7], Theophr., 
Dio Cass., Philo, Antonin., al.) * 

τέχνη. -ης, 7, (fr. τεκεῖν, see τέκτων), fr. Hom. down, 
art: univ. Rev. xviii. 22 [here A. V. craft]; of the plas- 
tie art, Acts xvii. 29; of a trade (as often in Grk. writ.), 
Acts xviii. 3.* 

τεχνίτης, -ov, 6, (τέχνη), fr. Soph. [(?), Plato], Xen. 
down, Sept. several times for wn, an artificer, crafts- 
man: Acts xix. 24, 38; Rev. xviii. 22; of God the framer 
of the higher and eternal course of things, Heb. xi. 10 
(of God the architect of the world, Sap. xiii. 1, where 
ef. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. p. 234 [ef. also Trench, Syn. 
§ ev.; Piper, Monumentale Theol. § 26]).* 

τήκω: fr. Hom. down; to make liquid; pass. to become 
liquid, to melt; to perish or be destroyed by melting: 2 Pet. 
iii. 12, where for the pres. 3 pers. sing. τήκεται Lchm. 
gives the fut. τακήσεται [see WH on the pass. and in 
their App. p. 171], cf. Is. xxxiv. 4 τακήσονται πᾶσαι ai 
δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν. [Cf. Veitch s. v.]* 

τηλαυγῶς, adv., (fr. the adj. τηλαυγής, far-shining, fr. 
τῆλε afar, and αὐγή radiance), at a distance and clear- 
ly: Mk. viii. 25 [where TWH mrg. δηλαυγῶς, 4. v.]. 
(adj., Job xxxvii. 20; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 9; and esp. in 
the Grk. poets fr. Pind. down; τηλαυγέστερον ὁρᾶν, Diod. 
1, 50.)* 

τηλικ-οῦτος, -αύτη, -oUro, (fr. τηλίκος and οὗτος [but 
then (it is urged) it should have been τηλιχοῦτος ; hence 


τηρέω 


better connected with αὐτός : ai ai Cf. Bttm. Ausf. 
Spr. § 79 A.4; Kühner $173, 6: Vanicek p. 268; L. and 
S. s.v. οὗτος, init.]),in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl.down; 1. 
of such an age; used of any age, of so great an age, so 
old; also so young. 2. of so great a size, in bulk: 
πλοῖα, Jas. 111. 4. 3. intensively, such and so great 
(Lat. tantus talisque) : 2 Co. i. 10; Heb. ii. 3; Rev. xvi. 
18.* 

τηρέω, -ὥ; impf. ἐτήρουν; fut. τηρήσω; 1 aor. ἐτήρησα; 
pf. τετήρηκα, 3 pers. plur. τετηρήκασιν (Jn. xvii. 6 RG) 
and τετήρηκαν (ibid. LT Tr WH, [see γίνομαι, init. ]) ; 
Pass, pres. τηροῦμαι; impf. ἐτηρούμην; pf. τετήρημαι; 
1 aor. ἐτηρήθην ; (τηρός, found only once, Aeschyl. suppl. 
248, where it is doubtful whether it means ‘ guarding’ or 
‘watching ’), fr. Pind., Soph., Thue. down; Sept. several 
times for 357, *w2, etc.; to attend to carefully, take 
care of; i. e. a. prop. to guard: twa, a prisoner, 
Mt. xxvii. 36, 54; Acts xvi. 23; pass., Acts xii. 5; 
[xxiv. 23]; xxv. 4, 21["]; τί, xii. 6; of τηροῦντες, [(R.V.) 
the watchers] the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant. iii.3). ^b. 
metaph. to keep: τινά, one in that state in which he is, 
τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον, his own virgin daughter, 50. as a 
virgin i. e. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37 ; ἑαυτόν, himself such 
as he is, i. e. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but here T Tr 
WH αὐτόν]; with a pred. accus. added: ἅγνον, 1 Tim. 
v. 22; ἄσπιλον ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου, Jas. i. 27; ἀβαρῆ τινι, 
2 Co. xi. 9, (ἁπλοῦν, Antonin. 6, 30; τινὰ ἄμεμπτον τῷ 
θεῷ, Sap. x. 5); τί with a pred. accus. 1 Tim. vi. 14 
[but see in e. below]; pass. τηροῦμαι, with an adv., 
ἀμέμπτως, 1 Th. v. 23; with a dat. of the pers., Χριστῷ, 
devoted to Christ, [W. 421 (392)], Jude 1; τηρεῖν τινα 
ἕν τινι, to keep in i.e. cause one to persevere or stand 
firm in a thing: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι θεοῦ (see p. 447^ bot.), Jn. 
Xvii. 11 sq.; ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ, Jude 21; twa ἔκ τινος, by 
guarding to cause one to escape in safety out of etc.: ἐκ 
Tov πονηροῦ, out of the power and assaults of Satan, Jn. 
xvii. 15 [ef. B. 327 (281); W. 410 (383)]; ἐκ τῆς ὥρας 
ToU πειρασμοῦ, Rev. iii. 10. — to keep: i. e. not to leave, 
τὴν ἀρχήν, Jude 6; not to throw away, rà ἱμάτια, Rev. 
xvi. 15. to hold firmly: τὴν ἑνότητα τοῦ πνεύματος, Eph. 
iv. 3; anything as a mental deposit, τὴν πίστιν, 2 Tim. 
iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 12 [ef. W. 536 (499); B. 78 (68)]. to 
show one's self to be actually holding a thing fast, 
i.e. C. to observe: sc. πῶς krÀ. Rev. iii. 3; τί, Mt. 
xxiii. 3; Acts xxi. 25 [Rec.]; τὴν παράδοσιν, Mk. vii. 9 
[WH (rejected) mrg. στήσητε] (rà ἐκ παραδόσεως τῶν 
πατέρων, Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); τὸν νόμον, Acts xv. 5 
and Ree. in 24; Jas. ii. 10; τὸ σάββατον. the command 
respecting sabbath-keeping, Jn. ix. 16; τὰς ἐντολάς (of 
either God or Christ), Mt. xix. 17; Jn. xiv. 15, 21; xv. 
10; 1Jn.ii.3sq.; iii. 22,24; v. 2 (where LT Tr WH 
ποιῶμεν) ; V.3; Rev. xii. 17; xiv. 12 [see above, b. fin. ]; 
τὴν ἐντολήν, 1 Tim. vi. 14 [see in b. above; πάντα ὅσα 
ἐνετειλάμην, Mt. xxviii. 20]; τὸν λόγον, either of Christ 
or of God, Jn. viii. 51 sq. 55; xiv. 23; xv. 20; xvii. 6; 
Rev. iii. 8; τοὺς λόγους, of Christ, Jn. xiv. 
24; τὸν λόγον τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου (i. 6. Ἰησοῦν), Rev. iii. 10; 
τὰ ἔργα μου, the works that I command, Rev. ii. 26; τοὺς 


1 Jn. ii. 5; 


622 





τίθημι 


λόγους τῆς προφητείας, Rev. xxii. 7; τοῦ βιβλίου τούτου, 
Rey. xxii. 9; τὰ ἐν τῇ προφητείᾳ γεγραμμένα, Rey. i. 3; 
ef. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 194 86. ἃ. 
to reserve: τινὰ εἴς τι, to undergo something, 2 Pet. ii. 4 
[cf. W. 342 (321); εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν, Acts 
xxv. 315]; Jude 6; τινὰ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως, 2 Pet. ii. 9: 
τοὺς οὐρανοὺς πυρὶ (to be burned with fire) εἰς ἡμέραν 
κρίσεως, 2 Pet. iii. 7; τὶ εἴς τινα, a thing for one's advan- 
tage, 1 Pet. i. 4; ri εἰς ἡμέραν τινά, to be used some day 
for some purpose, Jn. xii. 7; τὶ ἕως ἄρτι, Jn. ii. 10; τί 
with the dat. of the pers., for rewarding or punishing 
one, pass., 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Cowr. : δια-, mapa-, 
συν-τηρέω. | * 

[SYN. τηρέω, φυλάσσω: Typ. to watch or keep, ur. to 
guard; rnp. expresses watchful care and is suggestive of 
present possession, $vA. indicates safe custody and often 
implies assault from without; rp. may mark the result 
of which gua. is the means (e.g. Jn. xvii. 12 where the 
words occur together, cf. Wisd. x. 5). See Westcott on Jn. 
viii. 51.] 

τήρησις, -ews, 7, (TPE) ; a. a watching: of pris- 
oners (Thue. 7, 86); the place where prisoners are 
kept, a prison, [R. V. ward]: Aetsiv.3; v. 18. b. 
a keeping, i.e. complying with, obeying: τῶν ἐντολῶν, 
1 Co. vii. 19; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 23; νόμων, Sap. vi. 19.* 

Τιβεριάς, -ddos, ἡ, (fr. Τιβέριος), a city of Galilee, near 
the Lake of Gennesaret, which Herod Antipas, tetrarch 
of Galilee, greatly enlarged [but see BB.DD. s. v. and 
esp. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 234 note] and beau- 
tified, and named Tiberias in honor of Tiberius Caesar 
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 3). It is now called Tubariyeh, a 
poor and wretched town of about 3000 inhabitants, 
swarming with fleas for which the place is notorious 
throughout Syria: Jn. vi. 1, 23; xxi. 1. Cf. Robinson 
ii. 380-394; Win. RWB. s. v.; Riietschi in Herzog ed. 1 
xvi. 161; JWeizsücker in Schenkel v. 526 sq. ; [Miihlau 
in Riehm p. 1661 sq.]; Büdeker pp. 367-369.* 

Τιβέριος, -ov, 6, Tiberius, the Roman emperor (fr. 
[Aug. 19] A. n. 14 to [March 16] A. n. 37) in whose 
reign Christ was crucified: Lk. iii. 1.* 

τιθέω, i. q. τίθημι, q. v. 

τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. τιθέασιν (Mt. v. 15; [W. $14,1a.; 
B. 44 (38)]) ; impf. (fr. τιθέω) 3 pers. sing. ἐτίθει (2 Co. 
iii. 13), 3 pers. plur. ἐτίθουν (Mk. vi. 56 [RG L]; Acts iii. 
2; iv. 35) [and (T Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.) ἐτίθεσαν, cf. B. 45 
(39); WH. App. p. 167]; fut. θήσω ; 1 aor. ἔθηκα; 2 aor. 
(€6nv) subj. θῶ, [impv. 2 pers. plur. θέτε, Lk. xxi. 14 L T Tr 
WII (for RG 2 aor. mid. impv. θέσθε). inf. θεῖναι, ptep. 
θείς ; pf. τέθεικα ; Pass. pres. 3 pers. sing. τίθεται (Mk. 
xv. 47 RG); pf. 3 pers. sing. τέθειται (Mk. xv. 47 LT 
Tr WH); 1 aor. ἐτέθην ; 2 aor. mid. ἐθέμην (2 pers. sing. 
ἔθου. Acts v. 4); (see ἐπιτίθημι); fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
mostly for ow and DWH, py, Mw and mun, man» 
ete. ; 1. to set, put, place, i.e. causative of κεῖσθαι; 
hence a. to place or lay: τί, as θεμέλιον, [ Lk. vi. 
48]; xiv. 29; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (θεμείλια, Hom. Il. 12, 29) ; 
λίθον, Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 6; τί, opp. to αἴρειν, Lk. xix. 
21 sq. (cf. Xen. oec. 8, 2) ; τινὶ πρόσκομμα [or (ace. to WH 
mrg.) σκάνδαλον], Ro. xiv. 13; τὶ εἴς τι, Lk. xi. 33 [W. 


τίθημι: 6 


238 (223)]; τινὰ ποῦ, ὅπου, ἐκεῖ, [ὡς], of the dead laid 
to rest somewhere, Mk. xv. 47; xvi. 6; [Lk. xxiii. 55]; 
Jn. xi. 34; xix. 42; xx. 2, 13, 15; ἐν with dat. of the 
place, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. vi. 29; [xv. 46 L Tr WH]; Lk. 
xxiii. 53; Jn. xix. 41; Acts vii. 16; ix. 37; εἰς μνημεῖον, 
Acts xiii. 29; Rev. xi. 9; (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, 
very often of the laying away or depositing anywhere 
of the bones or ashes of the dead ; like Lat. ponere i. q. 
sepelire, cf. Klotz, Handworterb. d. Lat. Spr. ii. 822°; 
[Harpers’ Lat. Diet. s. v. pono, I. B. 10]). Tl Or τινὰ 
ἐπί τινος, [Lk. viii. 16^ L T Tr WH]; Acts v. 15; Jn. 
xix.19; [Rev. x. 2 GL T Tr WH]; ἐπί 7, [ Mk. iv. 21 
LT Tr WH ; viii. 25 Tr txt. WH]; 2 Co. iii. 13; Rev. 
x. 2[Ree.]; ἐπί τινα, to put upon one, τὰς χεῖρας, Mk. 
x. 16 ; [τὴν δεξιάν, Rev.i. 17 GL T Tr WH]; τὶ ὑπό τι, 
Mt. v. 15; Mk.iv. 21; Lk. xi. 33; ὑποκάτω τινός, Lk. 
viii. 16; τινὰ ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας (see πούς), 1 Co. xv. 25 
[cf. W. 523 (487)]; ri παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τ. to lay at one's 
feet, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf. πρὸς]; v. 2; τινὰ ἐνώπιόν 
T. Lk. v. 18; metaph. ἐπί twa τὸ πνεῦμα, i. e. to imbue 
one with, Mt. xii. 18. Mid. to have one put or placed : 
τινὰ eis φυλακήν, to order one to be put in prison, Acts 
xii. 4; ἐν (τῇ) φυλακῇ, Mt. xiv. 3 [here LT Tr WH azo- 
τίθ.1; Acts v. 25, (Gen. xli. 10; xlii. 17, 30; [B. 329 
(283) ; W. 414 (386)]); eis τήρησιν, Acts iv. 3; ἐν τηρή- 
ceu Acts v.18. to place for one's self: as βουλήν, to lay 
a plan [A. V. advised], Acts xxvii. 12 (Judg. xix. 30; 
βουλὰς ἐν ψυχῇ pov, Ps. xii. (xiii.) 3) ; rà μέλη, to set, 
dispose, 1 Co. xii. 18; [καιροὺς ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ, set 
within his own authority, Acts i. 7 (so R. V. txt.; but 
al. refer it to 2 below)]; ri eis τὰ ὦτά pov, to receive 
[A. V. let sink] into the ears, i.e. to fix in the mind, Lk. 
ix. 44; eis τὴν καρδίαν, to propose to one's self, to pur- 
pose, foll. by an inf. Lk. xxi. 14 [RG]; also τὶ ἐν τῇ 
καρδίᾳ, to lay a thing up in one's heart to be remembered 
and pondered, Lk. i. 66; [xxi. 14 LT Tr WH], (1 S. 
xxi. 12; [W. $2,1 c., and B. as above]); to propose to 
one's self something [A. V. conceived this thing in thine 
heart], Acts v. 4; also ἐν τῷ πνεύματι, foll. by an inf. [ A.V. 
to purpose in the spirit], Acts xix. 21; to place (or posit) 
Sor the execution of one's purpose, θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον 
τῆς καταλλαγῆς, since he has placed (deposited) in our 
minds the doctrine concerning reconciliation (sc. to be 
made known to others), 2 Co. v. 19. b. to put down, 
lay down; i. e. a. to bend downwards: τὰ γόνατα, 
to bend or bow the knees, to kneel, Mk. xv. 19; Lk. xxii. 
41; Acts vii. 60; ix. 40; xx. 36; xxi. 5, (Lat. genua 
pono, Ovid. fast. 2, 438; Curt. 8, 7, 13). B. like Lat. 
pono (cf. Klotz s. v. ; [Harpers’ Dict. s. v. I. B. 9]), to lay 
off or aside, to wear or carry no longer: τὰ ἱμάτια (Lat. 
vestes pono), Jn. xiii. 4 (Plut. Ale. 8) ; τὴν ψυχήν, to lay 
down, give up, one's life, Jn. x. 17sq.; with ὑπέρ τίνος 
added, Jn. x. 11, 15; xiii. 37sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16, 
(ἔθηκε [or τέθεικεν] τὴν σάρκα αὐτοῦ κύριος, Barn. ep. 6, 3 
[irrelevant ; see the passage]; unlike the Lat. phrases 
vitam ponere, Cic. ad fam. 9, 24, 4; Propert. eleg. 2, 10, 
43; [animam ponere], Sil. Ital. 10, 303; spiritum ponere, 
Val. Max. 7, 8, 8, since these phrases mean only to die; 


23 


τίλλω 


more like the expression prius animam quam odium de- 
ponere, Nep. Hann. 1, 3). y. to lay by, lay aside 
money: παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, 1 Co. xvi. 2. C. to set on (serve) 
something to eat or drink: οἶνον, Jn. ii. 10 (Xen. mem. 
3,14, 1; soalso Lat. pono; cf. Klotz u. s. p. 822^; [Har- 
pers’ Diet. s. v. I. B. 8]). d. to set forth, something 
to be explained by discourse: τὴν βασιλείαν T. θεοῦ ἐν 
παραβολῇ, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Tr txt. WH (on this pass. 
see παραβολή, 2). 2. to make (Lat. constituo), τινά 
with a pred. acc.: twa ὑποπόδιον, Mt. xxii. 44 [where 
LT Tr WH ὑποκάτω, put underneath]; Mk. xii. 36 [WH 
ὑποκάτω]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 13, 
(fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); add, Ro. iv. 17 (fr. Gen. xvii. 5) ; 
Heb. i. 2; pass, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11; τί with a 
pred. aec.: 1 Co. ix. 18 (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, 
often in the poets, rarely in prose writ., as Ael. v. h. 13, 
6; Lcian. dial. marin. 14, 2; in the O. T. cf. Gen. xvii. 
5; Lev. xxvi. 81; Is. v. 20; Sap. x. 21; 2 Mace. v. 21; 
3 Macc. v. 43). Mid. to make (or set) for one's self or 
for one's use: twa with a pred. acc., Acts xx. 28; 1 Co. 
xii. 28, (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, even in prose, to 
make one one’s own, as twa φίλον to make one a friend, 
see Passow p. 1893*; [L. and S. s. v. B. 1.1). τιθέναι τινὰ 
ets 71, to appoint one to (destine one to be) anything, pass., 
1 Pet. ii. 8; w. ets τε instead of the pred. aec. (Hebrais- 
tieally [cf. W. 228 (214); B. $131, 7]), Acts xiii. 47 
fr. Is. xlix. 6 (Jer. i. 5). Mid. to appoint for one's use: 
τινὰ eis διακονίαν, to appoint one to one's service, 1 Tim. 
i. 12 [W. $45, 4 fin.]; to appoint with one’s self or in 
one’s mind: τινὰ eis ὀργήν, to decree one to be subject 
to wrath, 1 Th. v. 9 ; [to this use many refer Acts i. 7, see 
ἐξουσία 1, and ἐν, I. 5 d. 8.; cf. 1a. above] τιθέναι 
τινὰ tva, Jn. xv. 16; τιθέναι TO μέρος τινὸς μετά τινος (see 
μέρος, 1), Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 3. to set, fix, 
establish, (Lat. statuo) ; a. to set forth (Germ. auf- 
stellen): ὑπόδειγμα, 2 Pet. ii. 6. b. to establish, or- 
dain, (Germ. festsetzen, anordnen) : νόμον, to enact, Gal. 
iii. 19 Grsb. (very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down, 
both in the act. and the mid.; cf. Passow s. v. III. 3 b. ; 
[L. and S. s. v. A. III. 5]).  [Coxr.: dva-, mpoc-ava-, 
ἀπο-, δια-, ἀντι-δια-, €k-, ἐπι-, συν-επι-, kara-, συν-κατα-, 
μετα-, παρα-: TEpt-, προ-; mpog-, συν-, ὗπο- τίθημι. * 

τίκτω ; fut. τέξομαι ; 2 aor. ἔτεκον ; 1 aor. pass. ἐτέχθην ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3935 to bring forth, bear, produce 
(fruit from the seed); prop., of women giving birth: 
absol., Lk. i. 57 [B. 267 (230)]; ii.6; Jn. xvi. 21; Gal. 
iv. 27; Heb. xi. 11 Rec.; Rev. xii. 2, 4; υἱόν, Mt. i. 21, 
23, 25; Lk. i. 31; ii. 7; Rev. xii.5, 13; pass., Mt. ii. 2; 
Lk.ii.11; of the earth bringing forth its fruits: βοτάνην, 
Heb. vi. 7 (Eur. Cycl. 333; γαῖαν, ἣ τὰ πάντα τίκτεται, 
Aeschyl. Cho. 127; γῆς τῆς πάντα τικτούσης, Philo opif. 
m. § 45, who draws out at length the comparison of the 
earth to a mother). metaph. to bear, bring forth: 
ἁμαρτίαν, in the simile where ἢ ἐπιθυμία is likened to a 
female, Jas. i. 15 (ἀρετήν, Plat. conv. p. 212 a.).* 

τίλλω ; impf. ἔτιλλον ; fr. Hom. down; to pluck, pluck 
off: στάχυας, Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 23 [on this cf. p. 524^ 
top]; Lk. vi. 1.* 


Τιμαῖος 


Tipatos (N20 fr. Chald. τ, Hebr. N50, to be un- 
clean), του, 6, Timeus, the name of a man: Mk. x. 46." 
τιμάω, -@; fut. τιμήσω ; 1 aor. ἐτίμησα ; pf. pass. ptep. 
τετιμημένος ; 1 aor. mid. ἐτιμησάμην ; (τιμή) ; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. to estimate, to fix the value ; mid. to fix 
the value of something belonging to one’s self (Vulg. ap- 
pretio; ef. Hagen, Sprachl. Erórterungen zur Vulgata, 
Freib. 1863, p. 99) : τινά, [R. V. to price], Mt. xxvii. 9 
(on which see ἀπό, I. 2) ; Sept. ΕΣ yw, Lev. xxvii. 8, 
12, 14. 2. tohonor [so uniformly A. V.], to have in 
honor, to revere, venerate ; Sept. for 133 : God, Mt. xv. 8; 
Mk. vii. 6; Jn. v. 23; viii 49; Christ, Jn. v. 23; parents, 
Mt. xv.4sq.; xix. 19; Mk. vii. 10; x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; 
Eph. vi. 2; other men, 1 Tim. v. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 17; with 
πολλαῖς τιμαῖς added, to honor with many honors, Acts 
xxviii. 10; of God, rewarding Christians with honor 
and glory in his kingdom, Jn. xii. 26. [Cowr.: 
Tid. ] * 
τιμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. río, to estimate, honor, pf. pass. τέτι- 
μαι), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 1}: (a valuing, rating), 
723, IP, ὙΠ; 1. a valuing by which the price is 
Jixed; hence the price itself: of the price paid or re- 
ceived for a person or thing bought or sold, with a gen. 
of the pers. Mt. xxvii. 9; with a gen. of the ibingy Acts 
v.2sq.; plur, Acts iv. 34; xix. 19; τιμὴ αἵματος, the 
price paid for killing, [cf. jNebeeecs ”), Mt. xxvii. 6; 
ἠγοράσθητε τιμῆς, (not gratis, but) with a price, i. e. Gat 
textually, with emphasis) at a great price [B. § 132, 13; 
yet see W. 595 (553)], 1 Co. vi. 20 [here Vulg. magno 
pretio]; vii. 23; ὠνεῖσθαι τιμῆς ἀργυρίου, to buy for a 
price reckoned in silver, i.e. for silver, Acts vii. 165 thing 
prized [A. V. honor], Rev. xxi. 24 [Rec.], 26. 2. 
honor which belongs or is shown to one: the honor of 
one who outranks others, pre-eminence, δόξα x. τιμή, 
Heb. ii. 7, 9; 2 Pet. i. 17; in the doxologies: τῷ θεῷ (sc. 
ἔστω [cf. B. $129, 22 Rem.]) τιμή or ἡ τιμή, 1 Tim. i. 17; 
vi.16; Rev. v. 13; vii. 12; xix. 1 Rec. ; the honor which 
one has by reason of the rank and state of the office which 
he holds, Heb. v. 4 (and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Bleek 
on Heb. l.c.) ; veneration: διδόναι, λαβεῖν, τιμήν, Rev. iv. 
9, 11; v. 12; deference, reverence, Ro. xii. 10; xiii. 7; 
1 Tim. v. 17; vi. 1; honor appearing in the rewards of 
the future life, Ro. ii. 7, 10; 1 Pet. i. 7; praise of which 
one is judged worthy, 1 Pet. ii. 7 [here R.V. txt. precious- 
ness (cf. 1 above)]; mark of honor, πολλαῖς τιμαῖς τιμᾶν 
τινα, Acts xxviii. 10; univ. in phrases: ἐν τιμῇ, honor- 
ably, 1 Th. iv. 4 (on this pass. see krdopat) ; οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ 
τινι, not in any honor, i. e. worthy of no honor, Col. ii. 
23 [al. value; see πλησμονή] ; eis τιμήν, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. 


> 
επι- 


ii. 20 sq., (on these pass. see σκεῦος, 1); περιτιθέναι rui | 


τιμήν, 1 Co. xii. 23 (see περιτίθημι, b.) ; τιμὴν ἀπονέμειν 
τινί, to show honor to one, 1 Pet. iii. 7; διδόναι τιμήν, 
1 Co. xii. 24; ἔχειν τιμήν, to have honor, be honored, 
Jn. iv. 44; Heb. iii. 3.* 

τίμιος, -a, -ov, (τιμή), fr. Hom. down; 
as of great price, i.e. precious: λίθος, Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. 
12, 16; xxi. 19; plur. 1 Co. iii. 12 [R. V. costly stones] ; 
compar. τιμιώτερος, 1 Pet. i. 7 


a. prop. held 


Rec.; superl. τιμιώτατος, 


624 








τίς 


Rev. xviii. 12; xxi. 11. b. metaph. held in honor, 
esteemed, especially dear: Heb. xiii. 4; τινί, to one, Acts 
v. 34; xx. 24 [here with a gen. also, ace. to the text of 
T Tr WH (οὐδενὸς Aóyov etc. not worth a word; cf. Meyer 
ad loc.)]; καρπὸς τῆς γῆς, Jas. ν. 7; αἷμα, 1 Pet. i. 19; 
ἐπαγγέλματα, 2 Pet. i. 4." 

τιμιότης, τητος, 7, (τίμιος) ; 
costliness; an abundance of costly things: Rev. xviii. 
19. b. metaph. worth, excellence: Aristot. de partt. 
an. 1, 5 [p. 6445, 32]; eth. Nic. 10, 7 fin. [p. 11784, 1]; 
διαφέρουσι τιμιύτητι ai ψυχαὶ καὶ ἀτιμίᾳ ἀλλήλων, de gen. 
anim. 2, 3 [p. 736^, 811." 

Τιμόθεος, -ov, 6, voc. Τιμόθεε (1 Tim. vi. 20; cf. Krüger 
$16 Anm. 2; [W.§8, 2 ο.; B.12]), Timothy, a resident of 
Lystra, apparently, whose father was a Greek and moth- 
er a Jewess, Acts xvi. 1 sqq. He was Paul's companion 
in travel, and fellow-laborer: Acts xvii. 14 sq.; xviii. 5; 
Kix. 22; xx. 4; Roixvi- 215 ᾿ (10: ὧν: 17. 91:105 42) Oo; 
101,19; ἘΠ1]...1.01.:.19. Colpo naire 
2 Th. i. 1; 1 Tim. i. 2, 18; vi. 20; 2 Tim.i. 2; Philem. 
Ibs ΕΓ, 113285 

Τίμων [on the accent cf. W. $6, 1, 1.], -wvos, 6, Timon, 
one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem: 
Acts vi. 5 

τιμωρέω, -O } 


a. prop. preciousness, 


1 aor. pass. ἐτιμωρήθην ; (fr. τιμωρός, and 
this fr. τιμή and οὖρος, see θυρωρός) ; fr. Soph. and 
Hdt. down; prop. to be a guardian or avenger of honor; 
hence 1. to succor, come to the help of: τινί, one, 
Soph., Hdt., Thuc., al. 2. to avenge: τινί, one, 
Hdt., Xen., al. 3. in the N. T. τιμωρῶ τινα, to take 
vengeance on one, to punish: Acts xxii. 5; xxvi. 11, 
(Soph. O. R. 107; in Grk. writ. the mid. is more com. in 
this sense).* 

τιμωρία, -as, 7, (τιμωρός, see TYLwpEw) ; 1. aren- 
dering help; assistance, [(Hdt., Thuc., al.)]. 2. 
vengeance, penalty, punishment: Heb. x. 29 (Prov. xix. 
29; xxiv. 22; in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down). [Svw. see κόλασις, fin.]* 

Tlvo : fut. τίσω ; fr. Hom. down; to pay, to recompense : 
δίκην, to pay penalty, suffer punishment, 2 Th. i. 9 (Plat. 
Phaedo p. 81 d.; Theaet. p. 177 a.; Ael. v. ἢ. 13, 2; δίκας, 
id. 1, 24; θωήν, Hom. Od. 2, 193; ποινάς, Pind. Ol. 2, 106; 
¢yuiav, Sept. Prov. xxvii. 12). [Cowr.: ἀπο-τίνω.} " 

τίς, neut. ri, gen. τίνος, interrogative pronoun, [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. who, which, what? Sept. ris for 
"2, τί for 12; a. used Adjectively, in a direct 
question: τίς βασιλεύς, Lk. xiv. 31; τίς γυνή, Lk. xv. 8; 
τί περισσόν, Mt. v. 47; τί σημεῖον, Jn. ii. 18, and many 
other passages. in an indirect question, 1 Th. iv. 2, ete.; 
τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρόν, 1 Pet.i.11; used instead of a pred. 
in a direct quest., ris (sc. ἐστιν) ἡ αἰτία, Acts x. 21; τίς 
καὶ ποταπὴ ἡ γυνή. Lk. vii. 39; add, Ro. iii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 
18,etc.; neut., Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk.v.9; in an indir. quest. 
with the optative, Lk. viii. 9; τίς foll. by ἄν, Jn. xiii. 24 
RG; Acts xxi. 33 [RG]; τί with the optative, Lk. xv. 
26 [Tr WH add ἄν, so L br.]; xviii. 36 [L br. Tr br. WH 
mrg. add dv]; with the indicative, Eph. i. 18; b. 
used alone or Substantively: in a direct quest., ris 


΄ 
τις 


ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν ; Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; Rev. xviii. 
18, etc.; τίνος, Mt. xxii. 20, 28; Mk xii. 16; τίνι, Lk. 
xiii. 18; τίνα, Jn. xviii. 4, 7; τί θέλετέ μοι δοῦναι ; Mt. xxvi. 
15; iin an indirect quest., foll. by the indicative, Mt. 
vi. 3; Jn. xiii. 12; 1 Co. xiv. 16; Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, and 
very often; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Mt. vi. 25; Lk. 
xii. 11, ete.; foll. by the optative w. av, Lk. i. 82; vi. 11, 
ete. Emphatic words get prominence by being placed 
before the pronoun [B. $151, 16]: ὑμεῖς δὲ riva pe λέγετε 
εἶναι, Mt. xvi. 15; Mk. viii. 29; Lk. ix. 20; καὶ ἡμεῖς τί 
ποιήσομεν (or ποιήσωμεν), Lk. iii. 14; οὗτος δὲ τί, Jn. xxi. 
21 [cf. e. 8.]; add, Jn. i. 19; viii. 5; ix. 17; Acts xix. 
15; Ro. ix. 19^ [cf. W. 274 (257)], 20; xiv. 4,10; Eph. 
iv.9; Jas.iv. 12; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Passow 
p.1908»5; [L.and S. s. v. B. L.1b.]. A question is often 
asked by ris as the leading word, when the answer ex- 
pected is “no one”: Acts viii. 33; Ro. vii. 24; viii. 33 
sq.; ix. 19; x. 16; xi. 34sq.; 1 Co.ix. 7; 2 Co. xi. 29; 
Heb.i.5,13. τίς εἰ μή, who. . . save (or but), (i. e. no one 
but), Mk. ii. 7; Lk. v. 21; Ro. xi. 15; 1Co.ii. 11; Heb. 
ii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 22; v.5. C. two questions are 
blended into one: τίς τί apy, what each should take, Mk. 
xv. 24; τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο, Lk. xix. 15 [not Tr 
WH]; ἐγὼ δὲ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν θεόν; who 
was I? was I able to withstand God? Acts xi. 17; cf. W. 
§66, 5,3; Passow p. 1909; Ast, Lex. Platon. iii. p. 394; 
Franz V. Fritzsche, Index ad Leian. dial. deor. p. 164; 
the same constr. occurs in Lat. writ.; cf. Ramshorn, Lat. 
Gram. p. 567. τίς is joined with conjunctions: καὶ τίς, 
Mk. x. 26; Lk. x. 29; xviii. 26; Rev. vi. 17, (see καί, 1. 
29g.); τίς ἄρα, see dpa,1; τίς οὖν, Lk. x. 36 [here T WH 
om. L Tr br. οὖν]; 1 Co.ix.18. τίς with a partitive gen.: 
Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk. x. 36; Acts vii. 52; Heb. 
i.5,13; with ἐκ and a gen. of the class, Mt. vi. 27; Lk. 
xiv. 28; Jn.viii. 46; in an indir. quest. with the optat., 
Lk. xxii. 23 [cf. W. $41 b. 4 c.]; with ἄν added, Lk. ix. 
46. d. in indir. questions the neuter article is some- 
times placed before the pronouns ris and ri; see 6, IT. 
10 a. e. Respecting the neuter τί the following 
partieulars may be noted : a. τί οὗτοί σου karapap- 
τυροῦσιν; a condensed expression for τί τοῦτό ἐστιν, ὃ 
οὗτοί σου καταμ.; Mt. xxvi. 62; Mk. xiv. 60, (Β. 251 
(216) explains this expression differently); also τί τοῦτο 
ἀκούω περὶ σοῦ; [(R.V.)] what is this (that) I hear of thee? 
(unless preference be given to the rendering, ‘why do I 
hear this of thee’ [see under 8. below]), Lk. xvi. 2; cf. 
Bornemann ad loc.; [W. § 66, 5, 3]. B. τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς; 
56. ἐστίν, what is that to us? [W. 586 (545); B. 138 
(121) ], Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. xxi. 22; τί ἐμοὶ x. coi; see ἐγώ, 
4; τί μοι etc. what have I to do with ete. 1 Co. v. 12; 
τί σοι Or ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; [what thinkest thou ete.], Mt. xvii. 
25; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi 66; Jn. xi. 56 (here before ὅτι 
supply in thought δοκεῖ ὑμῖν, to introduce a second ques- 
tion [R. V. What think ye? That he will not come ete.]). 
τί θέλεις ; and ri θέλετε ; foll. by a subjunc., our what wilt 
thou (that) I should etc.: Mt. xx. 32 [here Lehm. br. in- 
serts iva]; Mk. x. 51; xv. 12 [WH om. Tr br. 6&A.]; Lk. 
xviii. 41; 1 Co. iv. 21; τί with the deliberative subj. : 
40 


625 





Tig 


Mt. vi. 31; xxvii. 22; Mk. iv. 30 [here L mrg. T Tr 
txt. WH πῶς]; Lk.xii.17; xiii. 18; Jn. xii.27; τί foll. 
by ἃ fut.: Acts iv. 16 (where Led. ster. T Tr WH ποιή- 
σωμεν) ; 1 Co. xv. 29; τί (se. ἐστίν [B. 358 (307); W. 
$ 64, 2 a.]) ὅτε etc., how is it that etc. i.e. why ete., 
Mk.ii.16 R GL; Lk.ii.49; Acts ν. 4, 9; τί γέγονεν, ὅτι 
ete. [R. V. what is come to pass that etc.], Jn. xiv. 22; 
οὗτος δὲ τί (sc. ἔσται or γενήσεται [W. 586 (546); B. 394 
(338)]), what will be his lot? Jn. xxi. 21 (cf. Acts xii. 
18 τί dpa ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο; Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 17 ri ἔσοιτο 
ἡ πολιτεία). τί 1. q. διὰ τί, why? wherefore? (Matthiae 
§ 488, 8; Krüger ὃ 46, 3 Anm. 4; [W. $21, 3 N. 27): 
Mt. vi. 28; vii. 3; Mk.ii. 7sq.; xi.3; Lk. ii. 48; vi. 41; 
xii. 57; xxiv. 38; Jn. vii. 19; xviii. 23; Acts xiv. 15; 
xxvi. 8; Ro. iii. 7; ix. 19sq.; 1 Co. iv. 7; x. 30; xv. 29 
56. ; Gal. iii. 19; v. 11; Col. ii. 20, and often. iva τί or 
ἱνατί, see s. v. p. 305%. διὰ τί [or διατί (see διά, B. II. 2 a. 
p- 134°) ], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; Mk. 
vil. 5; xi. 31; Lk. xix. 23, 31; Jn. vii. 45; xiii. 37; Acts 
v.3; 1 Co. vi. 7; 2 Co. xi. 11; Rev. xvii. 7,andoften. εἰς 
τί, to what? to what end? to what purpose? Mt. xiv. 31; 
xxvi.8; Mk. xiv. 4; xv. 34, (Sap. iv. 17 ; Sir. xxxix. 21). 
τί οὖν, etc. why then, etc. : Mt. xvii. 10; xix. 7; xxvii. 22; 
Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 15; Jn. i. 25; see also in οὖν, b. a. ; 
Tí οὖν ἐροῦμεν, see ibid. τί ydp; see yap, II. 5. Y. 
Hebraistically for 132, how, how greatly, how much, with 
adjectives and verbs in exclamations [W. § 21 N.3; cf. 
B. 254 (218)]: Mt. vii. 14 G L Tr; Lk. xii. 49 [on this 
see ei, I. 4 fin.], (Ps. iii. 2; 2 S. vi. 20; Cant. i. 10; τί 
πολὺ τὸ ἀγαθόν cov; Symm. Ps. xxx. 19). 2. equiv. 
to πότερος, -a, -ov, whether of two, which of the two: Mt. 
xxi 31; xxiii.17 [here Lri; see below]; xxvii. 17, 21; 
Lk. xxii. 27; neut. ri, Mt. ix. 5; [xxiii. 17 Lchm., 19]; 
Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; Phil. i. 22; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii. 
p. 394; Matthiae $488, 4; W. 169 (159). 3. equiv. 
to ποῖος, -a, -ov, of what sort, what (kind): Mk.i. 27; vi. 
2; Lk. iv. 36; viii. 9; xxiv. 17; Jn. vii. 36; Acts xvii. 
19; 1 Co. xv. 2; Eph.i.18sq. Cf. Hermann on Viger 
p- 191. 4. By a somewhat inaccurate usage, yet one 
not unknown to Grk. writ., it is put for the relatives ὅς 
and ὅστις : thus, τίνα (L T Tr WH τῷ) pe ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι, 
οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ (where one would expect ὅν), Acts xiii. 25 ; 
δοθήσεται ὑμῖν, τί λαλήσετε [-σητε T Tr WH; L br.thecl.], 
Mt. x. 19; ἑτοίμασον, ri δειπνήσω, Lk. xvii. 8; [οἶδα τίνας 
ἐξελεξάμην, Jn. xiii. 18 T Trtxt. WH]; esp. after ἔχειν 
(as in the Grk. writ.): οὐκ ἔχουσι, τί φάγωσιν, Mt. xv. 
32; Mk. vi. 36; viii. 1 sq.; cf. W.§ 25,1; B. 251 (216); 
on the distinction betw. the Lat. Labeo quid and Aabeo 
quod cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. p. 565 sq. 

τὶς, neut. 7i, gen. τινός, indefinite (enclitic) pronoun 
(bearing the same relation to the interrog. ris that πού, 
πώς, ποτέ do to the interrogatives ποῦ, πῶς, πότε); T. 
a certain, a certain one; used of persons and things con- 
cerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak 
more particularly ; a. joined to nouns substantive, 
as well as to adjectives and to numerals used substan- 
tively ; as, Σαμαρείτης τις, Lk. x. 33; ἱερεύς, Lk. i. 5; x. 
31; ἀνήρ, Lk. viii. 27; Acts iii.2; viii. 9; xiv. 8; ἄνθρω- 


τὶς 6 


πος, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; Acts ix. 33; plur. Jude 4; 
τόπος, Lk. xi. 1; Acts xxvii. 8; κώμη, Lk. x. 38; xvii. 12, 
and in many other pass.; with proper names (as τὶς 
Σίμων). Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Actsix.43; xxi. 16; 
xxv.19. δύο τινές with a partit. gen., Lk. vii. 18 (19); 
Acts xxiii. 23; ἕτερος, Acts viii. 34; plur. Acts xxvii. 1; 
it indicates that the thing with which it is connected 
belongs to a certain class and resembles it: ἀπαρχήν 
τινα, a kind of firstfruits, Jas. i. 18, cf. W. § 25, 2a; 
joined to adjectives of quality and quantity, it requires 
us to conceive of their degree as the greatest possible; 
as, φοβερά τις ἐκδοχή, a certain fearful expectation, Heb. 
x. 27, where see Delitzsch [or Alford] (δεινή τις δύναμις, 
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; other exx. fr. the Grk. writ. are 
given in W. § 25,2c.; [L. and S. s. v. A. II. 8]; Mat- 
thiae $ 487, 4; [Bnhdy. p. 442]; incredibilis quidam 
amor, Cic. pro Lig. c. 2,5); μέγας τις, Acts viii. 9. b. 
it stands alone, or substantively: univ. ris one, a certain 
one, Mt. xii. 47 [but WH in mrg. only]; Lk. ix. 49, 57; 
xiii. 6, 23; Jn. xi. 1; Acts v. 25; xviii. 7; plur. τινές, cer- 
tain, some: Lk.xiii.1; Actsxv.1; Ro. iii.8; 1 Co.iv. 
18: xv.84; 2 06.11.1; Gal.ii.12; 2'Th. iii. 11; 1 Tim. 
1.3,19; iv. 1; v. 15; vi. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 9; rivéc ev ὑμῖν; 
some among you, 1 Co. xv. 12; a participle may be 
added, — either with the article, τινὲς οἱ etc., Lk. xviii. 
9; 2 Co. x. 2; Gal.i.7; or without it, 1 Tim. vi. 21; 
τὶς and τινές with a partit. gen.: Lk. xi. 1; xiv. 15; 2 Co. 
x. 12. 2. a. joined to nouns and signifying 
some: χρόνον τινά, some time, a while, 1 Co. xvi. 7; ἡμέραι 
τινές, some (or certain) days, Actsix.19; x. 48; xv. 36; 
xvi.12; xxiv. 24; xxv. 13; μέρος τι, Lk. xi. 36 [here WH 
mrg.br. τι]; Acts v.2; 1 Co.xi 18; τὶ βρώσιμον, Lk. 
xxiv. 41; add, Mk. xvi. 18; Jn. v. 14; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii. 
20; xxviii. 21; Heb. xi. 40; βραχύ τι, Acts v. 34 (where 
LTTrWH om. τι); Heb. ii. 7; περισσότερόν τι, 2 Co. x. 
8: μικρόν τι, 2 Co. xi. 16; it serves modestly to qualify 
or limit the measure of things, even though that is thought 
to be ample or large [cf. 1 a. sub fin.]: κοινωνία rts; & cer- 
tain contribution, Ro. xv. 26; καρπός, Ro. i. 13; χάρισμα, 
ibid. 11. with a participle, ἀθετήσας τις, if any one has 
set at nought, Heb. x. 28 [but this ex. belongs rather 
under the next head]. b. standing alone, or used 
substantively, and signifying some one, something; any 
one, anything: univ., Mt. xii. 29; Mk. ix. 30; xi. 16; Lk. 
viii. 46; Jn. ii. 25; vi. 46; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. v. 7; 1 Co. 
xv. 35; 2 Co. xi. 20sq.; Heb. iii. 4; Jas.ii. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 
19, ete.; ris ἐξ ὑμῶν, Jas. ii. 16; ἐξ ὑμῶν τις, Heb. iii. 13; 
with a partitive gen., Lk. vii. 36; xi.45; 1 Co. vi.1; 
neut. ri with a partit. gen., Acts iv. 32; Ro. xv. 18; Eph. 
γ᾽ 21. eis Tis, see eis, 3 p. 187*. it answers not in- 
frequently to the indefinite one (Germ. man, French on): 
Mk. viii. 4; Jn.ii.25; xvi.30; Ro. viii. 24; Heb. v. 12 
(where some [viz. RG T Tr (cf. W. 169 (160); R. V. 
mrg. which be the rudiments ete.; cf. c. below)] incor- 
rectly read τίνα [yet cf. B. 268 (230) note, cf. 260 (223) 
note]), ete.; cf. Matthiae § 487, 2. εἴ τις, see ei, III. 16; 
ἐάν τις; τινος, etc. : Mt. xxi. 3; xxiv. 22; Mk. xii. 19; Lk. 
xvi. 31; Jn.vi.51; vii. 17; viii. 51 80-5" 1x. 22, 915 x: 9; 





6 τὶς 


xi. 9 54. ὅ7 ; xii. 26,47; Acts ix. 2 [here Tdf. dv]; xiii. 
41; 1 Co. v.11; viii. 10; x. 28; Col. iii.18; 1 Tim.i.8; 
2 Tim. ii. 5, 21; Jas. ii. 14; v.19; 1 ὅπ. ii. 15; iv. 20; v. 
16; Rey. iii. 20; xxii. 18 sq.; ἄν τινων, Jn. xx. 23 [here 
Lehm. ἐάν] ; ἐὰν μή τις, Jn. iii. 3,5; xv.6; Acts viii. 31; 
OU... τις, not... any one, i. e. no one, dn. x. 285 οὔτε 

.. τις, Acts xxviii. 21; ovdé... τις, Mt. xi. 27; xii. 19; 
οὐκ... ὑπό twos, 1 Co. vi. 125 μή vis, lest any (man), Mt. 
xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Acts xxvii. 42; 1 Co. i. 15; xvi. 11; 
2 Co. viii. 20; xi. 16; xii. 6; Eph. ii. 9; 1 Th. v. 15; Heb. 
iv. 11; xii. 15; hath any (one), Jn. iv. 33 [cf. pyres, 2] 5 μή, 
twa, 2 Co. xii. 17; πρὸς τὸ μὴ - - - τινα, 1 ΤῊ. ii. 9; ὥστε 
2. μή τινα, Mt. viii. 28; like the Lat. aliquis, it is used 
with the verb εἶναι emphatically: to be somebody, i. e. 
somebody of importance, some eminent personage, [ W. 
§ 25,2¢.; D. $127, 16], Acts v. 36 (see exx. fr. the Grk. 
writ. in Passow s. v. B. IT. 2d.; [L. and S. ibid. A. II. 5]; 
on the phrase τὶ εἶναι see e. B. below). Plur. τινές, 
some (of that number or class of men indicated by the 
context): Mk. xiv. 4, 65; Lk. xxi. 5; Jn. xiii. 29; τινές 
are distinguished from oí πάντες, 1 Co. viii. 7; ix. 22. 
τινές with an anarthrous participle, Mk. xiv. 57; Lk. 
xiii. 1; ταῦτά τινες ἦτε, such (of this sort) were some of 
you, 1 Co. vi. 11 [ef. οὗτος, I. 2 d.]; τινές with a partitive 
gen. Mt. ix.3; xii.38; xxviii. 11; Mk. vii. 1sq.; xii. 
18; Lk. vi 2; xix. 89: Acts v.15; xvii.18, 28, and 
often; foll. by ἐκ and a partit. gen., Lk. xi. 15; Jn. vi. 
64; vii. 25, 44; ix. 16; xi.87,46; Acetsxi.20; xv. 24, 
ete.; Paul employs τινές by meiosis in reference to many, 
when he would mention something censurable respecting 
them in a mild way: Ro.iii.3; 1 Co. x. 7-10. Ὅς 
Sometimes the subject ris, τινές, or the object τινά, τινάς, 
is not added to the verb, but is left to be understood by 
the reader (cf. B. § 132,6; [W. 88 58,2; 64,47): be- 
fore the partit. gen. Acts xxi.16; before ἀπό, Mt. xxvii. 
9 (1 Mace. vii. 33); before ἐκ, Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xxi. 
16; [Jn. i. 24 T Tr WH (cf. R. V. mrg.); vii. 40 LT 
Tr WH (cf. R. V. mrg.)]; xvi. 17; [2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 
10]. [Other exx*of its apparent omission are the fol- 
lowing: as subject, — of a finite verb (W. $58, 9 b. 8.; 
Β. § 129,19): φησί, 2Co. x. 10 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος, Jn. viii. 44 (acc. to one interpreta- 
tion; see R. V. marg.); of an infin.: od χρείαν ἔχετε 
γράφειν ὑμῖν, 1 Th. iv. 9 ἃ T Tr txt. WH; χρείαν ἔχετε 
τοῦ διδάσκειν ὑμᾶς, τίνα etc. Heb. v. 12 R G T Tr (but see 
2 b.above). as object: δός pou πιεῖν, Jn. iv. 7; cf. Mk. 
v.43. See Kiihner § 352¢.; Krüger § 55, 3, 21.] d. 
It stands in partitions: ris... ἕτερος δέ, one... and 
another, 1 Co. iii. 4; plur. τινὲς (μὲν) . - - τινὲς (δέ), Lk. 
ix. 7 sq.; Acts xvii. 18; Phil. i. 15; cf. Passow s. v. B. 
II. 2 e.; [L. and S. ibid. A. II. 11. c.]. e. Besides 
what has been already adduced, the foll. should be no- 
ticed respecting the use of the neut. zi; a. univ. 
anything, something: Mt. v. 23; Mk. viii. 23; Lk. xi. 54; 
Acts xxv. 5,11; 1 Co. x. 31, and very often; οὐδὲ ...rí, 
neither . . . anything, 1 Tim. vi. 7. B. like the Lat. 
aliquid it is used emphatically, equiv. to something of 
consequence, something extraordinary (cf. b. above) : in 


Τίτιος 0 


the phrase εἶναί τι, 1 Co. iii. 7; Gal. ii. 6 ; vi.3; cf. Pas- 
sow s. v. B. II. 2d.; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 5] ; and on the 
Lat. aliquid esse see Klotz, Handwürterb. d. Lat. Spr. i. 
298; [Harpers Dict. s. v. aliquis, IT. C. 1] (on the 
other hand, in 1 Co. x. 19 zi εἶναι means to be anything, 
actually to exist); εἰδέναι [LT Tr WH ἐγνωκέναι] τι; i. e. 
much, 1 Co. viii. 2. 3. As respects the Position 
of the word, when used adjectively it stands — now be- 
fore its noun (τὶς ἀνήρ, Acts iij. 2; xiv. 8; ris μαθητής, 
Acts ix. 10; τινὰς ἑτέρους, Acts xxvii. 1; τὶ ἀγαθόν, Jn. i. 
47); now, and indeed far more frequently, after it, as 
ἱερεύς τις, Lk. i. 5; x. 31; ἀνήρ τις, Lk. viii. 27, ete., etc. 
Twés, used substantively, is found at the beginning of a 
sentence in Mt. xxvii. 47; Lk. vi. 2; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Tim. 
v.24; Phil.i.15; cf. W. § 25, 2 Note, and 559 (520). 
The particle 6¢ may stand betw. it and its substantive 
(as Σαμαρείτης δέ τις), as in Lk. x. 33, 38; Acts viii. 9; 
Heb. x. 27. 

Tirtos, -ov, 6, the praenomen of a certain Corinthian, 
a Jewish proselyte, also surnamed Justus: Acts xviii. 7 
T Tr br. WH (see Téros).* 

τίτλος, -ov, ὁ, a Lat. word, a title; an inscription, giv- 
ing the accusation or crime for which a criminal suf- 
fered: Jn. xix. 19, 20, and after it Ev. Nic. c. 10, 1 fin. 
(Sueton. Calig. c. 32 praecedente titulo qui causam 
poenae indicaret; again, Domit. c. 10 canibus objecit 
cum hoe titulo: impie locutus parmularius.) * 

Tiros [Rec.* in the subscription, Tiros; cf. Lipsius, 
Gram. Unters. p. 42 sq.; ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 103; Pape, 
Eigennamen, s. v.; W. $6, 1 m.], του, 6, Titus, a Gentile 
Christian, Paul's companion in some of his journeys and 
assistant in Christian work: 2 Co. ii. 13; vii. 6, 13 sq. ; 
viii. 6, 16, 23; xii.18; Gal.1i. 1, 35; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. i. 
4. Heisnot mentioned in the Book of Acts. But since 
Titus is the praenomen, perhaps he appears in the 
Acts under his second, or, if he was a Roman, under 
his third name; cf. Rückert on 2 Cor. p. 410. He is 
by no means, however, to be identified (after Wieseler, 
Com. ü. d. Brief a. d. Galater, p. 573 sq. [also his Chron. 
d. apost. Zeit. p. 204]) with the Titus of Acts xviii. 7, 
even if the reading (of some authorities [see Tdf.’s note 
ad loc.]) Τίτου [see Τίτιος above] Ἰούστου be the true 
one.* 

Tío, a form from which some N. T. lexicons [e. s. 
Wahl, Bretschneider, Robinson, Bloomfield, Schirlitz, 
Harting, al.] incorrectly derive rícovow in 2 Th. 1. 9: see 
tive. 

τοιγαροῦν, (fr. the enclitie τοί or τῷ, γάρ, and ov, Germ. 
doch denn nun; cf. Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 1; [Ellicott on 
1 Th. iv. 87), a particle introducing a conclusion with 
some special emphasis or formality, and generally occu- 
pying the first place in the sentence, wherefore then, for 
which reason, therefore, consequently: 1 Th. iv.8; Heb. 
xii. 1, (for 12-5», Job xxii.10; xxiv. 22; 4 Macc.i. 34; 
vi. 28 var.; xiii. 15; Soph., Xen., Plato, sqq.) ; ef. Klotz 
ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 738.* 

Tolye in καίτοιγε, see γέ, 3 f. 

τοίνυν, (fr. the enclitie τοί and νῦν), fr. Pind. [and 


ToApaw 


Hdt.] down, therefore, then, accordingly ; contrary to the 
use of the more elegant Grk. writ., found at the begin- 
ning of the sentence (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342 sq.; [W. 
559 (519 sq.) ; B. $150, 197): Heb. xiii. 13 (Is. iii. 10; 
v.13); as in the better writ., after the first word: Lk. 
xx. 25 [yet T Tr WH put it first here also]; 1 Co. ix. 
26 and Ree. in Jas. ii. 24, (Sap. i. 11; viii. 9; 4 Macc. 
i. 13, 15 sqq.).* 

τοιόσδε, τοιάδε, τοιόνδε, (rotos and δέ), fr. Hom. down, 
such, generally with an implied suggestion of something 
excellent or admirable: 2 Pet. i. 17.* 

τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο and τοιοῦτον (only this sec- 
ond form of the neut. occurs in the N. T., and twice [but 
in Mt. xviii. 5'T WH have -ro]), (fr. τοῖος and οὗτος [al. 
say lengthened fr. τοῖος or connected with αὐτός ; cf. 
τηλικοῦτος |), [fr. Hom. down], such as this, of this kind or 
sort; a. joined to nouns: Mt. ix. 8; xviii. 5; Mk. 
iv. 33; vi. 2; vii. 8 [here T WH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13; 
ix. 37 [here Tdf. τούτων]; Jn. ix. 16; Acts xvi. 24; 1 
Co. v. 1; xi. 16; 2 Co. iii. 4, 12; xii. 3; Heb. vii. 26; 
vil. 1; xii. 3; xiii, 16+ Jas. iv. ἴδ᾽ b. οἷος ... 
τοιοῦτος: Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co. xv. 48; 2 Co. x. 11; rotov- 
TOS... ὁποῖος, Acts xxvi. 29; τοιοῦτος ὧν ὡς etc. Philem. 
9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. C. used substantive- 
ly, a. without an article: Jn. iv. 23; neut. μηδὲν votov- 
rov, Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; plur. Lk. ix. 9; xiii. 2 [here T 
Tr txt. WH ταῦτα]. B. with the article, 6 τοιοῦτος 
one who is of such a character, such a one, [B. $124,5 ; W. 
111 (106); Krüger $50,4,6; Kühner on Xen. mem. 1, 
5, 2; Ellicott on Gal. v. 21]: Acts xxii. 22; 1 Co. v. 5, 
115.2: Co. 1: 6.56: x: 11 Σπ' 9. ὃν Gral 1: ΠῚ ἡ 
11; plur., Mt. xix. 14; Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16; Jn. viii. 
5; Ro. [ii. 14 Lmrg.]; xvi. 18; 1 Co. vii. 28; xvi. 16,18; 
2.00. xi. 185 Phil 117129502 T'hoone19 7 1 hm; ce 1505 
Rec.; 3 Jn. 8; neut. plur., Acts xix. 25; Ro.i.32; ii. 2 
sq.; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v. 21, 23; Eph. v. 27; Heb. xi. 14.* 

τοῖχος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for TP: a 
wall [esp. of a house; cf. retyos]: Acts xxiii. 3.* 

τόκος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. τίκτω, pf. τέτοκα) ; Girth Eat 
the act of bringing forth. b. that which has been 
brought forth, offspring; (in both senses from Homer 
down). 2. interest of money, usury, (because it 
multiplies money, and as it were ‘breeds’ [cf. e. y. Mer- 
chant of Venice i. 87): Mt. xxv. 27; Lk. xix. 23, (so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Arstph. down; Sept. for 31/3).* 

τολμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐτόλμα, plur. ἐτόλμων; 
fut. τολμήσω: 1 aor. ἐτόλμησα; (τόλμα or τόλμη [: dar- 
ing’; Curtius $ 236]); fr. Hom. down; to dare; a. 
not to dread or shun through fear: foll. by an inf., Mt. 
xxii. 46; Mk. xii. 34; Lk. xx. 40; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. $65, 
7b.]; Acts v. 13; vii. 32; Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. x. 12; Phil. 
i. 14; Jude 9; τολμήσας εἰσῆλθεν, took courage and went 
in, Mk. xv. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22; Plut. vit. Cam. 22, 
6]. b. to bear, endure; to bring one’s self to; [ef. 
W. u. s.]: foll. by an inf., Ro. v. 7; 1 Co. vi. 1. c. 
absol. to be bold; bear one's self boldly, deal boldly: 2 Co. 
xi. 21; ἐπί twa, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [Comp.: dzo- 
ToAuáo. | * 


τολμηρότερον 


[Syx. τολμάω, θαρρέω: θ. denotes confidence in one's 
own strength or capacity, r. boldness or daring in under- 
taking; 0. has reference more to the character, m. to its 
manifestation. Cf. Schmidt ch. 24,4; ch. 141. The words 
are found together in 2 Co. x. 2.] 

τολμηρότερον, (neut. compar. from the adj. τολμηρός). 
[Thue., sqq.], more boldly: Ro. xv. 15 [L ed. ster. Tr 
txt. WII -répos; W. 243 (228)].* 

τολμητής, -o0, ὁ, (τολμάω), a daring man: 2 Pet. ii. 
10. (Thue. 1, 70; Joseph. b. j. 3, 10, 2; Philo de Jo- 
seph. § 38, Plut., Leian.) * 

τομώτερος, -a, -ov, (compar. fr. rouds cutting, sharp, and 
this fr. réuvw), sharper: Heb. iv. 12 ([ Pseudo-] Phocylid. 
vs. 116 [(Gnom. Poet. Graec. ed. Brunck p. 116)] ὅπλον 
τοι λόγος ἀνδρὶ τομώτερόν ἐστι σιδήρου; add, Timon in 
Athen. 10 p. 445 e.; Lcian. Tox. 11).* 

τόξον, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for nep, a 
bow: Rev. vi. 2.* 

τοπάζιον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. τοπάζιος, fr. τόπαζος), 
topaz, a greenish-yellow precious stone (our chrysolith 
[see BB. DD., esp. Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 18]): Rev. 
xxi. 20 (Diod., Strab.; Sept. for 1153, Ex. xxviii. 17; 
xxxvi 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13. The Grk. writ. 
more commonly use the form róza(os).* 

τόπος, -ov, 6, in Attic fr. Aeschyl. and his contempo- 
raries on; Sept. DIP? place; i.e. 1. prop. any 
portion of space marked off, as it were, from surrounding 
space; used of a. an inhabited place, as a city, 
village, district: Lk. iv. 37; x. 1; Acts xii. 17; xvi. 3; 
xxvii 2,8; 1 00.1.2; 2 Co. 1i. 14; 1 Th. i. 8; Rev. xviii. 
17 [G L T Tr WH); τὸν τόπον kai τὸ ἔθνος, the place 
which the nation inhabit, i.e. the holy land and the 
Jewish people, Jn. xi. 48 (cf. 2 Mace. v. 19 sq.) ; τόπος 
ἅγιος, the temple (which the Sept. of Is. Ix. 13 calls ὁ 
ἅγιος τύπος τοῦ θεοῦ), Mt. xxiv. 15. of a house, Acts 
iv. 31. of uninhabited places, with adjectives: ἔρημος, 
Mt. xiv. 13,15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 81 sq.; Lk. iv. 42; ix. 
10 RGL, 12; medwos, Lk. vi. 17; ἄνυδρος, plur., Mt. xii. 
43; Lk. xi. 24. of any place whatever: xarà τύπους. 
[ R. V. in divers places] i. e. the world over [but see κατά, 
II. 3 a. a. ], Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk. xiii. 8; [ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ, 2 Th. 
iii. 16 Lehm.]; of places in the sea, τραχεῖς τόποι, Acts 
xxvii. 29 [R.V. rocky ground]; róm. διθάλασσος, [A. V. 
place where two seas met], ibid. 41. of that *place' 
where what is narrated occurred: Lk. x. 32; xix. 
xxii. 40; Jn.v.13; vi.10; xviii. . of a place or spot 
where one can settle, abide, dwell: ἑτοιμάζειν τινὶ τόπον, 
Jn. xiv. 2 sq., cf. Rev. xii. 6; ἔχειν τόπον, ἃ place to dwell 
in, Rev. 1. c.; οὐκ ἦν αὐτοῖς τόπος ἐν τῷ καταλύματι, Lk. 
li. 7; διδόναι τινὶ τόπον, to give one place, give way to 
one, Lk. xiv. 9°; τόπος οὐχ εὑρέθη αὐτοῖς, Rev. xx. 11; 


55 


of the seat which one gets in any gathering, as at a | 


feast, Lk. xiv. 10; τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν, ibid. 9^; 
of the place or spot oceupied by things placed in it, Jn. 
xx. 7, the particular place referred to is defined by 
the words appended: — by a genitive, róz. τῆς Βασάνου, 
Lk. xvi. 28; τῆς καταπαύσεως, Acts vii. 49: κρανίου, Mt. 
xxvii. 33; Mk. xv. 22; Jn. xix. 17: [τὸν τόπον τῶν ἥλων, 
Jn. xx. 3501, T Tr mrg.]; — by the addition of οὗ, ὅπου, 


62 


8 


ep or ἐν à, foll. by finite verbs, Mt. xxviii. 6; Mk. 
xvi. 6; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 28; x.40; xi. 6,30; xix.41; Acts 
vii. 33; Ro.ix. 26 ;— by the addition of a proper name: 
τύπος λεγόμενος, OY καλούμενος, Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. xv. 
22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 13; Rev. xvi. 16; ὁ τόπος 
τινός, the place which a person or thing occupies or has 
a right to: Rev. ii. 5; vi. 14; xii.8; where a thing is 
hidden, τῆς μαχαίρας i.e. its sheath, Mt. xxvi. 52. the 
abode assigned by God to one after death wherein to re- 
ceive his merited portion of bliss or of misery: (6 ἴδιος 
τόπος (τινός), univ. Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 1 [cf. 6 αἰώνιος 
τόπος. Tob. iii. 6]) ; applied to Gehenna, Acts i. 25 (see 
ἴδιος, 1 c.); 6 ὀφειλόμενος τόπος, of heaven, Polye. ad 
Philip. 9, 2; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 4; also ὁ ἅγιος τόπος, 
ibid. 5, 7; [ὁ ὡρισμένος τ. Barn. ep. 19, 1; Act. Paul et 
Thecl. 28; see esp. Harnack's note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
5, 41. b. a place (passage) in a book: Lk. iv. 17 
(καὶ ἐν ἄλλῳ τόπῳ φησίν, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 20 [(but this 
is doubtful; cf. L. and S. s. v. I. 4; yet cf. Kühner ad 
loc.); Philo de Joseph. § 26 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 4]; in 
the same sense χώρα in Joseph. antt. 1, 8, 3). 2. 
metaph. a. the condition or station held by one in 
any company or assembly: ἀναπληροῦν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώ- 
του, [ R. V. filleth the place of the unlearned], 1 Co. xiv. 
16; τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς, [ R.V. the place in 
this ministry, ete.], Acts i. 25 L'T Tr WH. b. op- 
portunity, power, occasion for acting : τόπον λαμβάνειν τῆς 
ἀπολογίας, Opportunity to make his defence, Acts xxv. 
16 (ἔχειν τ. ἀπολογίας, Joseph. antt. 10, 8, 5) ; τόπον διδό- 
vat τῇ ὀργῇ (se. τοῦ θεοῦ), Ro. xii. 19; τῷ διαβόλῳ, Eph. 
iv. 27, (τῷ ἰατρῷ. to his curative efforts in one’s case, 
Sir. xxxviii. 12; νόμῳ ὑψίστου, ibid. xix. 17; τόπον διδό- 
ναι τινί, foll. by an inf, ibid. iv. 5); rom. μετανοίας εὑρί- 
oxew, Heb. xii. 17, on this pass. see εὑρίσκω, 3 (διδόναι. 
Sap. xii. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 5; Lat. locum relin- 
quere paenitentiae, Liv. 44, 10; 24, 26 ; [ Plin. ep. ad Trai. 
96 (97), 10 ef. 2]; ἔχειν τόπον μετανοίας, Tat. or. ad 
Graec. 15 fin. ; διὰ τὸ μὴ καταλείπεσθαί σῴφισι τόπον ἐλέους 
μηδὲ συγγνώμης, Polyb. 1, 88, 2); τόπον ἔχειν sc. τοῦ εὐαγ- 
γελίζεσθαι, Ro. xv. 23; τ. ζητεῖν, with a gen. of the thing 
for which influence is sought among men: διαθήκης, pass. 
Heb. viii. 7 [(cf. μέμφομαι) ]. 

[Syn. τόπος 1, χώρα, χωρίον: τόπ. place, indefinite ; a 
portion of space viewed in reference to its occupancy, or as 
appropriated to a thing; χώρα region, country, extensive; 
space, yet bounded; χωρίον parcel of ground (Jn. iv. 5), cir- 
cumscribed ; a definite portion of space viewed as enclosed 
or complete in itself ; τόπος and χωρίον (plur., R. V. lands) 
occur together in Acts xxviii. 7. Cf. Schmidt ch. 41.] 


τοσοῦτος, -αύτη, -ovro (Heb. vii. 22 L T Tr WH) and 


τοσοῦτος 








τοῦτον, (fr. τόσος and οὗτος ; [al. say lengthened fr. τόσος; 
cf. τηλικοῦτος, init.]), so great; with nouns: of quantity, 
roc. πλοῦτος, Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount, 
πίστις, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9; [ὅσα ἐδόξασεν ἑαυτήν, ro- 
σοῦτον δότε βασανισμόν. Rev. xviii. 7]; of size, νέφος, Heb. 
xii. 1; plur. so many: ἰχθύες, Jn. xxi. 11; σημεῖα, Jn. 
xii. 37 ; γένη φωνῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 10; ἔτη, Lk. xv. 29 [ (here 
| A.V. these many)], (in prof. writ., esp. the Attic, we 
| often find τοσοῦτος καὶ τοιοῦτος and the reverse; see Hein- 


TOTE 6 


dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923"; [L. and 5. 
s. vv.]) ; foll. by ὥστε, so many as to be able, ete. [B. 244 
(210)], Mt. xv. 33; of time: so long, χρόνος, [ Jn. xiv. 9]; 
Heb. iv. 7; of length of space, τὸ μῆκος τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν 
ὅσον etc. Rev. xxi. 16 Rec.; absol, plur. so many, Jn. 
vi. 9; neut. plur. [so many things], Gal. iii. 4; τοσούτου, 
Jor so much (of price), Acts v. 8 (9); dat. τοσούτῳ, pre- 
ceded or followed by ὅσῳ (as often in the Grk. writ. fr. 
Hdi. down [W. $35, 4 N. 2]), by so much: roo. κρείττων, 
by so much better, Heb. i. 4; τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον ὅσῳ etc. 
Heb. x. 25; καθ᾽ ὅσον . . . κατὰ τοσοῦτον, by how much... 
by so much, Heb. vii. 22.* 

Tóre, demonstr. adv. of time, (fr. the neut. art. r6, 
and the enclit. ré [q. v.]; answering to the relative 
ore [Kühner $506, 2 c.]), fr. Hom. down, then; at that 
times a. then i. e. at the time when the things under 
consideration were taking place, (of a concomitant 
event): Mt. ii. 17 (rore ἐπληρώθη) ; iii. 5, 13; xii. 22, 38 ; 
xv.1; xix. 13; xx. 20; xxvii.9, 16; Ro. vi. 21; foll. by 
a more precise specification of the time by means of an 
added participle, Mt. ii. 16 ; Gal. iv. 8; opp. to νῦν, Gal. 
iv. 29; Heb. xii. 26 ; ὁ τότε κόσμος, the world that then 
was, 2 Pet. iii. 6. b. then i. e. when the thing un- 
der consideration had been said or done, thereupon; so 
in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transi- 
tion from one thing mentioned to another which could 
not take place before it [W. 540 (503); B. § 151, 31 
fin.]: Mt. iv. 1,5 ; xxvi. 14; xxvii. 38; Acts i. 12; x. 48; 
xxi. 33; not infreq. of things which took place imm e- 
diately afterwards, so that it is equiv. to which having 
been done or heard: Mt. ii. 7; iij. 15 ; iv. 10 sq.; viii. 26 ; 
xii. 45; xv. 28; xvii. 19; xxvi. 36,45; xxvii. 26 sq. ; 
Lk. xi. 26; τότε οὖν, Jn. xi. 14 [Lchm. br. ov]; xix. 1, 
16; xx. 8; εὐθέως τότε, Acts xvii. 14; τότε preceded 
by a more definite specification of time, as pera τὸ 
ψωμίον, Jn. xiii. 27; or by an aor. ptep. Acts xxviii. 1. 
Ore... τότε, etc., when . . . then: Mt. xiii. 26; xxi. 1; Jn. 
xii. 16; Os... τότε, etc., Sul Vit. 10... x1:6; pedi by 
a gen. absol. which specifies time, Acts xxvii. 21. ἀπὸ 
τότε from that time on, see ἀπό, I. 4 b. p. 58°. c. of 
things future; then (at length) when the thing under 
discussion takes place (or shall have taken place): róre 
simply, Mt. xxiv. 23, 40; xxv. 1, 34, 37, 41, 44 sq. ; opp. 
to ἄρτι, 1 Co. xiii. 12; καὶ τότε, Mt. vii. 23; xvi. 27; 
xxiv. 10, 14, 30; Mk. xiii. 21, 26 sq.; Lk. xxi. 27; 1 Co. 
iv. 5; Gal vi.4; 2 Th.ii.8; καὶ τότε preceded by zpó- 
rov, Mt. v. 24; vii. 5; Lk. vi.42. ὅταν (with a subjune. 
pres.) . - - τότε, ete. when . . . then, ete. [W. § 60, 5], 2 Co. 
xii. 10; 1 Th. v. 3; ὅταν (with an aor. subj. i. q. Lat. fut. 
pl.) ... τότε, etc., Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 16; xxv. 31; Mk. 
ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; xxi. 20 sq.; Jn.ii. 10 [T WH 
om. L Tr br. τότε]; viii. 28; 1 Co. xv. 28, 54; xvi. 2; 
Col. iii. 4. Of the N. T. writ. Matthew uses róre most 
frequently, ninety-one times [(so Holtzmann, Syn. Evang. 
p. 293); rather, eighty-nine times ace. to RT, ninety 
times acc. to G L Tr WH]; it is not found in [Eph., Phil., 
Philem., the Past. Epp., the Epp. of Jn., Jas., Jude], the 
Rev. 


9 τραχηλίξζω 


τοὐναντίον (by crasis for τὸ évavriov | B. 107), [(Arstph., 
Thue., al.)], on the contrary, contrariwise, (Vulg. e con- 
trario), aecus. used adverbially [W. 230 (216)]: 2 Co. 
1.7; Gab 754 Bets 111: 9° 

τοὔνομα (by crasis for τὸ ὄνομα [B. 10; WH. App. p. 
145]), [fr. Hom. Il. 3, 235 down], the name; accus. absol. 
[B. $131, 12; W. 230 (216) cf. ὄνομα, 1] by name: Mt. 
xxvii. 57.* 

τουτέστι [cf. W. p. 45; B. 11 (10)] for τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι, and 
this for τοῦτό ἐστι, see εἰμί, II. 3. 

τράγος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a Ae-goat : 
ix. 12sq. 19; x. 4:* 

τράπεζα, -ης, ἡ, (fr. rérpa, and πέζα a foot), fr. Hom. 
down, Sept. for now, a table; 1 a. a table 
on which food is placed, an eating-table: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. 
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21; xix. 23; xxii. 21, 30; the table in 
the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves 
were placed (see πρόθεσις, 1), Heb. ix. 2. b. equiv. 
to the food placed upon the table (cf. Fritzsche on Add. 
to Esth. iv. 14): παρατιθέναι τράπεζαν, (like the Lat. 
mensam apponere [cf. our ‘to set a good table"]), to set a 
table, i.e. food, before one (Thue. 1, 130; Ael. v. ἢ. 2, 17), 
Acts xvi. 34; διακονεῖν rais τραπέζαις (see διακονέω, 3), 
Acts vi. 2. c. a banquet, feast, (fr. Hdt. down): Ro. 
xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23); μετέχειν τραπέζης δαιμο- 
viov, to partake of a feast prepared by [(?) see below] 
demons (the idea is this: the sacrifices of the Gentiles 
inure to the service of demons who employ them in pre- 
paring feasts for their worshippers; accordingly one who 
participates in those feasts, enters into communion and 
fellowship with the demons); κυρίου, to partake of a feast 
prepared by [(?) see below] the Lord (just as when he 
first instituted the supper), 1 Co. x. 21 [but it seems 
more natural to take the genitives Say. and κυρ. simply 
as possessive (cf. W. 189 (178); B. $127, 27), and 
to modify the above interpretation accordingly ]. 2. 
the table or stand of a money-changer, where he sits, ex- 
changing different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and 
paying back with interest loans or deposits, (Lys., Isocr., 
Dem., Aristot., Joseph., Plut., al.): Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 
15; Jn.ii. 15; τὸ ἀργύριον διδόναι ἐπὶ (τὴν) τράπεζαν, to put 
the money into a (the) bank at interest, Lk. xix. 23.* 

τραπεζίτης [-ζείτης T WH; see WH. App. p. 154, and 
cf. et, 1], του, 6, (τράπεζα, q. v-), a money-changer, broker, 
banker, one who exchanges money for a fee, and pays 
interest on deposits: Mt. xxv. 27. (Cebet. tab. 31; 
[Lys.], Dem., Joseph., Plut., Artem., al.) * 

τραῦμα, -ros, τό, (TPAQ, TPQQ, τιτρώσκω, to wound, 
akin to θραύω), a wound: Lk. x. 34. (From Aeschyl 
and Hdt. down; Sept. several times for yx.) * 

τραυματίζω: 1 aor. ptep. rpavparícas; pf. pass. ptep. 
τετραυματισμένος ; (rpaüpa) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
to wound: Lk. xx. 12; Acts xix. 16.* 

τραχηλίζω : (τράχηλος) ; 1. to seize and twist the 
neck or throat; used of combatants who handle thus 
their antagonists (Philo, Plut., Diog. Laért., al.). 2: 
to bend back the neck of the victim to be slain, to lay 
bare or expose by bending back; hence trop. to lay bare, 


plur., Heb. 


πράχηλος 


uncover, expose: pf. pass. ptep. τετραχηλισμένος τινί, laid 
bare, laid open, made manifest to one, Heb. iv. 18." 

τράχηλος, -ov, 6, [allied w. τρέχω ; named from its mov- 
ableness; cf. Vanicek p. 304], fr. Eur. and Arstph. down, 
Sept. chiefly for 3x, also for yp, ete., the neck: Mt. 
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. xv. 20; xvii. 2; Acts xv. 10; 
XX. 97; τὸν ἑαυτοῦ τράχηλον ὑποτιθέναι (sc. ὑπὸ τὸν σίδη- 
pov), [A.V. to lay down one’s own neck i. 6.1 to be ready 
to incur the most imminent peril to life, Ro. xvi. 4.* 

τραχύς, -eia, -v, fr. Hom. down, rough: ὁδοί, Lk. iii. 5 ; 
τόποι, rocky places (in the sea), Acts xxvii. 29.* 

Tpaxoviris, -ἰδος, ἡ, Trachonitis, a rough [(Grk. rpa- 
X5s)] region, tenanted by robbers, situated between An- 
tilibanus [on the W.] and the mountains of Batanaea [on 
the E.], and bounded on the N. by the territory of Da- 
maseus: Lk. iii. 1 (Joseph. antt. 16, 9, 3 and often). 
[See Porter in BB. DD.] * 

τρεῖς, οἱ, ai, τρία, τά, three: Mt. xii. 40; Mk. viii. 2; 
Lk. i. 56; Jn. ii. 19, and often. [From Hom. down.] 

Tpels TaBepvar, see ταβέρναι. 

τρέμω ; used only in the pres. and impf.; fr. Hom. 
down; to tremble: Mk. v. 33; Lk. viii. 47; Acts ix. 6 
Rec.; with a ptep. (cf. W. $ 45, 4a.; [B. 8144, 15a.]), 
to fear, be afraid, 2 Pet. ii. 10. [SvN. see φοβέω, fin.]* 

τρέφω; 1 aor. ἔθρεψα ; Pass., pres. τρέφομαι ; pf. ptep. 
τεθραμμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to nourish, support; to feed : 
τινά, Mt. vi. 26; xxv. 37; Lk.xii.24; Acts xii. 20; Rev. 
xii. 6, 14; to give suck, Lk. xxiii. 29 L'T Tr WH ; to 
fatten, Jas. v. 5 [here A. V. nourish]. to bring up, 
nurture, Lk. iv. 16 [here TWH mrg. ἀνατρέφω] (1 Mace. 
iii. 33; xi, 39, and often in prof. auth.). [Cowr.: dva-, 
ἐκ-, ev- τρέφω. * 

τρέχω ; impf. érpexov; 2 aor. ἔδραμον ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 335; to run; a. prop.: of persons in haste, 
Mk. v. 6; Jn. xx. 2, 4; with a telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8; 
δραμών with a finite verb, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; 
Lk. xv. 20; τρέχω ἐπί with an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv. 
12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; eis πόλεμον, 
Rev. ix. 9; of those who run in a race-course (ἐν σταδίῳ), 
1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph.: of doctrine rapidly 
propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1[R.V. run]; by a metaphor 
taken from the runners in a race, /o exert one's self, strive 
hard ; to spend one’s strength in performing or attaining 
something: Ro.ix.16; Gal v. 7; εἰς κενόν, Gal. ii. 2 [W. 
504 (470); B. $ 148, 10]; Phil. ii. 16; τὸν ἀγῶνα, Heb. 
xii. 1 (see ἀγών, 2); the same expression occurs in Grk. 
writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires 
the exertion of all one's efforts to overcome, Hat. 8, 
102; Eur. Or. 878; Ale. 489; Electr. 883; Iph. Aul. 
1456; Dion. Hal. 7, 48, ete.; miserabile currunt. certa- 
men, Stat. Theb. 3,116. [Comp.: 
Tpoo-, συν-, ἐπι- Tuv-, ὗπο- Tpexa. |* 

τρῆμα, -ατος, τό, (τιτράω. τίτρημι, TPAQ, to bore through, 
pierce), a perforation, hole: βελόνης, Lk. xviii. 25 L T Tr 
WH; [ῥαφίδος, Mt. xix. 24 WH txt.]. (Arstph., Plat., 
Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

τριάκοντα, oi, ai, τά, (rpeis), thirty: Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 
8; Lk. iii. 23, ete. [From Hom. down.] 


εἰσ-, kara-, mrept-, Tpo-, 


080 


τρόμος 


τριακόσιοι, -at, -α, three hundred: Mk. xiv. 5; Jn. xii. 
5. [From Hom. down.]* 

tplBodos, -ov, ὁ, (τρεῖς and βάλλω, [(cf. βέλος), three- 
pointed ]), a thistle, a prickly wild plant, hurtful to other 
plants: Mt. vii. 165 Heb. vi. 8. (Arstph., al.; Sept. for 
CUT Gen. iii. 18; Hos. x. 8; for Ὁ.» thorns, Prov. 
xxii. 5.) [Cf. B. D. s. v. Thorns and Thistles, 4; Léw, 
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 302.]* 

τρίβος, -ov, ἡ, (τρίβω to rub), a worn way, a path: Mt. 
ii.3; Mk.i.3; Lk. iii. 4, fr. Is. xl. 3. (Hom. hymn. 
Mere. 448; Hdt., Eur., Xen., al.; Sept. for nan, ns, 
n505, 111, ete.)* 

τριετία, -as, 7), (τρεῖς and ἔτος), a space of three years: 
Acts xx. 31. (Theophr., Plut., Artem. oneir. 4, 1; al.)* 

τρίζω ; to squeak, make a shrill cry, (Hom., Hdt., Aris- 
tot., Plut., Leian., al.) : trans. τοὺς ὀδόντας, to grind or 
gnash the teeth, Mk. ix. 18; κατά twos, Ev. Nicod. c. δ." 

τρίμηνος, -ov, (τρεῖς and μήν), of. three months (Soph., 
Aristot., Theophr., al.) ; neut. used as subst. a space af 
three months (Polyb., Plut., 2 K. xxiv. 8): Heb. xi. 23.* 

τρίς, (τρεῖς), adv., thrice: Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv. 
30, 72; Lk. xxii. 34, 61; Jn. xiii. 88; 2 Co. xi. 25; xii. 
8; ἐπὶ τρίς [see ἐπί, C. I. 2 d. p. 235" bot.], Acts x. 16; 
xi. 10. [From Hom. down.]* 

τρίστεγος. -ov, (τρεῖς and στέγη). having three roofs or 
stories: Dion. Hal. 3, 68; [Joseph. b. 1. 5, 5, 5]; τὸ τρί- 
στεγον, the third story, Acts xx. 9 (Gen. vi. 16 Symm.) ; 
ἡ τριστέγη, Artem. oneir. 4, 40." 

τρισ-χίλιοι, -ar, -a, (τρίς and χίλιοι), three thousand: 
Acts ii. 41. [From Hom. down.]* 

τρίτος, -n, -ov, the third: with substantives, Mk. xv. 25; 
Lk. xxiv. 21; Actsii. 15; 2 (δ: xii. 2; Rev. iv. 7; vi..b; 
viii. 10; xi. 14, ete.; τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, Mt. xvi. 21; xvii. 23; 
xx. 19; Mk. ix. 31 [Rec.]; x. 34 Rec.; Lk. xxiv. 46; Acts 
x.40; 1 Co. xv. 4; τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ, Lk. xviii. 33; Jn. 
ii. 1 [L mrg. Tr WH mre. τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ]; ἕως τῆς τρίτ. 
ἡμέρας, Mt. xxvii. 64; τρίτον, acc. masc. substantively, 
a third [(sc. servant)], Lk. xx. 12; neut. τὸ τρίτον with 
a gen. of the thing, the third part of anything, Rev. viii. 
7-12; ix.15,18; xii.4; neut. adverbially, τὸ τρίτον 
the third time, Mk. xiv. 41; Jn. xxi.17; also without 
the article, τρίτον a third time, Lk. xxiii. 22; τοῦτο τρί- 
tov, this is (now) the third time (see οὗτος, II. d.), Jn. 
xxi 14; 2 Co. xii. 14 [not Rec."]; xiii. 1; τρίτον in 
enumerations after πρῶτον, δεύτερον, in the third place, 
thirdly, 1 Co. xii. 98; ἐκ τρίτου, a third time [W. § 51, 
d.], Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ἐκ τρίτου. 

τρίχινος, -7, -ov, (θρίξ, q. v.), made of hair (Vulg. cili- 
cinus): Rev. vi. 12 [see σάκκος, b.]. (Xen., Plat., Sept., 
al.) * 

τριχός, see θρίξ. 

τρόμος, -ov, 6, (τρέμω), fr. Hom. down, a trembling, 
quaking with fear: Mk. xvi. 8; μετὰ φόβου x. τρύμου, 
with fear and trembling, used to describe the anxiety of 
one who distrusts his ability completely to meet all re- 
quirements, but religiously does his utmost to fulfil his 
duty, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12; ἐν q. x. ἐν rp. 
(Is. xix. 16), 1 Co. ii. 2 (φόβος and τρόμος are joined in 


προπή 


Gen. ix. 3; Ex.xv. 16; Deut. [1]. 25]; xi. 25, οἴο.; ἐν φ. 
ον ἐν rp. Ps. ii. 11). [Svx. ef. φοβέω, fin.]* 

τροπή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. τρέπω to turn), a turning: of the 
heavenly bodies, Jas. i. 17 (on this see ἀποσκίασμα); often 
so in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hes. down [see L. 
and S. s. v. 1]; cf. Job xxxviii. 33; Sap. vii. 18; Deut. 
xxxiii. 14; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

τρόπος, -ov, 6, (fr. τρέπω, see τροπή), fr. [ Pind.], Ae- 
schyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. a manner, way, fashion : 
ὅν τρόπον, as, even as, like as, [W. $ 32,6; B. $ 131, 12]: 
Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk.xiii.34; Actsi 11; vii.28; 2 Tim. 
iii. 8, (Gen. xxvi. 29; Ex. xiv. 13; [Deut. xi. 25; Ps. xli. 
(xlii. 2]; Ezek. xlii. 7; xlv.6; Mal. iii. 17; Xen. mem. 
1,2, 59; anab. 6, 1 (3), 1; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 e.) ; τὸν 
ὅμοιον τούτοις τρόπον; [in like manner with these], Jude 7; 
καθ᾽ ὃν τρόπον, as, Acts xv. ll; xxvii. 25; κατὰ πάντα 
τρόπον, ho. iii. 2; κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον, in no wise, 2 Th. 
ii.3 (4 Mace. iv. 24; x. 7; κατὰ οὐδένα τρόπον, 2 Macc. 
xi.31; 4 Macc. v. 16) ; παντὶ τρόπῳ, Phil. i. 18 (1 Maec. 
xiv. 35, and very often in the Grk. writ.); also ἐν παντὶ 
Tpóro, 2 Th. iii. 16 [here Lehm. ἐν z. τόπῳ ; cf. W. $ 31, 
8 d.]. 2. manner of life, character: Web. xiii. 5 
[ R. V. mre. ‘turn of mind’; (cf. τοὺς τρόπους κυρίου ἔχειν, 
* Teaching ' 11, 8) ].* 

τροπο-φορέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐτροποφόρησα; (fr. τρόπος, and 
φέρω to bear); to bear one’s manners, endure one’s charac- 
ter: τινά, Acts xiii. 18 R Tr txt. WH (see their App. ad 
loc.), after codd. δὲ B ete.; Vulg. mores eorum sustinuit; 
(Cie. ad Attic. 13,29; Schol. on Arstph. ran. 1432; 
Sept. Deut. i. 31 cod. Vat.; [Orig. in Jer. 248; Apost. 
constt. 7, 36 (p. 219, 19 ed. Lagarde) ]); see τροφοφορέω." 

τροφή. -ῆς, ἡ, (τρέφω, 2 pf. τέτροφα), food, nourish- 
ment: Mt. 111.4:; vi. 25; x. 10; xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 28; Jn. 
iv.8; Acts ii.46; ix. 19; xiv. 17; xxvii. 33 sq. 36, 38; 
Jas.ii.15; of the food of the mind, i.e. the substance 
of instruction, Heb. v. 12,14. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., 
sqq.; Sept. for am, 238, jm, ete.) * 

Tpddipos [on its accent cf. W.§ 6, 1 1.1, του, 6, Trophi- 
mus, an Ephesian Christian, a friend of the apostle Paul: 
Acts xx. 4; xxl. 29; 2 Tim. iv. 20.* 

τροφός, -ov, 7, (τρέφω ; see τροφή), a nurse: 1 Th. ii. 
7. (From Hom. down ; for npn, Gen. xxxv. 8; 2 K. 
xi. 2; Is.xlix. 23.) * 

τροφο-φορέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐτροφοφόρησα; (τροφός and 
φέρων; to bear like a nurse or mother, i. e. to take the most 
anxious and tender care of: twa, Acts xiii. 18 GL T Tr 
mrg. [R. V. mrg. bear as a nursing-father] (Deut. i. 31 
eod. Alex. ete.; 2 Mace. vii. 27; Macar. hom. 46, 3 and 
other eccles. writ.); see rpozodopéo.* 

τροχιά, -as, ἡ, (τροχός, 4. v.), a track of a wheel, a rut; 
a track, a path: rpoxiàs ὀρθὰς ποιήσατε rois ποσὶν ὑμῶν, 
i. e. follow the path of rectitude, do right, Heb. xii. 13 
after Prov. iv. 26 (where for 53ym, as in ii. 15; iv. 11; 
v. 6, 21; in some of the later poets equiv. to rpoxós).* 

τροχός, -o), 6, (τρέχω), fr. Hom. down, a wheel: Jas. iii. 
‘6 (on this pass. see γένεσις 3; [cf. W. 54 (53) ]).* 

τρύβλιον [so T (cf. Proleg. p. 102) WH; -βλίον RGL 
ΤΥ] (on the accent see Passow s. v.; [Chandler § 350; 


631 








τρώγω 


Gottling p. 4087), -ov, τό, a dish, a deep dish [cf. B. D. 
s. v. Dish]: Mt. xxvi. 23; Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Plut., 
Leian., Ael. v.h. 9, 37; Sept. for Dmyps for which also 
in Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 10; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 14.) * 

Tpvyáo, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐτρύγησα ; (fr. τρύγη [lit. ‘dryness '] 
fruit gathered ripe in autumn, harvest); fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. several times for 2x3, 778, "Sp; to gather in ripe 
Jruits; to gather the harvest or vintage :«as in the Grk. 
writ., with acc. of the fruit gathered, Lk. vi. 44; Rev. 
xiv. 18; or of the plant from which it is gathered, Rev. 
xiv. 19.* 

τρυγών, -óvos, ἡ, (fr. τρύζω to murmur, sigh, coo, of 
doves; cf. yoyyi¢w), a turtle-dove: Lk.ii.24. (Arstph., 
Theocr., al.; Ael. v. h. 1, 15; Sept. for 3.) * 

τρυμαλιά, -Gs, ἡ, (i. q. τρῦμα, or τρύμη: fr. τρύω to wear 
away, perforate), a hole, [eye of a needle]: Mk. x. 25, 
and R Gin Lk. xviii. 25. (Judg. xv. 11; Jer. xiii. 4; 
xvi. 16 ; Sotad. in Plut. mor. p. 11 a. [i. e. de educ. puer. 
$14]; Geop.) * 

τρύπημα, -ros, τό, (τρυπάω to bore), a hole, [eye of a 
needle]: Mt. xix. 24 [here WH txt. τρῆμα, q. ν.]. (Ar- 
stph., Plut., Geop., al.) * 

Tpidawwa, -ης. 7, (τρυφάω, q.v.), Tryphena, a Chris- 
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Phil. p. 175 sq.]* 

τρυφάω, -@: 1 aor. ἐτρύφησα ; (τρυφή, q. v.) ; to live 
delicately, live luxuriously, be given to a soft and luxuri- 
ous life: Jas. v. 5. (Neh. ix. 25; Is. Ixvi. 11; Isocr., 
Eur. Xen., Plat, sqq.) [Cowr.: ἐν-τρυφάω. Syn. cf. 
Trench $ liv.]* 

τρυφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. θρύπτω to break down, enervate; 
pass. and mid. to live softly and delicately), softness, 
effeminacy, luxurious living: Lk. vii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 13. 
(Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, sqq.; Sept.) * 

Tpvpdca, -ns, 7, (τρυφάω, q.v.), T'ryphosa, a Chris- 
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [See reff. under Tpódaua.] * 

Tpwds, and (so L T WH [see I, « and reff. in Pape, 
Eigennamen, s. v.]) Tpodás, -á8os, ἡ, [on the art. with it 
see W. $5, b.], Troas, a city near the Hellespont, for- 
merly called ᾿Αντιγόνεια Τρ.» but by Lysimachus ᾿Αλεξάν- 
Ópeta ἡ Tp. in honor of Alexander the Great ; it flourished 
under the Romans [and with its environs was raised by 
Augustus to a colonia juris italici, ‘the "Troad"; cf. 
Strab. 13,1, 26; Plin. 5, 33]: Acts xvi. 8, 11; xx. 5 sq.; 
2.Co.ii.12; 2 Tim. iv. 13. [B.D.sy.]* 

Τρωγύλλιον (so Ptolem. 5, 2, 8), or Τρωγίλιον [ (better 
-γύλιον ; see WH. App. p. 159)] (so Strab. 14, p. 636), 
του, τό, T'rogyllium, the name of a town and promontory 
of Ionia, not far from the island Samos, at the foot of 
Mt. Mycale, between Ephesus and the mouth of the 
river Maeander: Acts xx. 15 RG. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] * 

τρώγω; (o gnaw, craunch, chew raw vegetables or fruits 
(as nuts, almonds, ete.): ἄγρωστιν, of mules, Hom. Od. 
6, 90, and often in other writers of animals feeding; 
also of men fr. Hdt. down (as σῦκα. Hdt. 1, 71; βότρυς, 
Arstph. eqq. 1077; blackberries, Barn. ep. 7, 8 [where 
see Harnack, Cunningham, Müller]; κρόμυον μετὰ δεῖ- 
mvov, Xen. conv. 4, 8) ; univ. to eat: absol. (δύο τρώγομεν 


τυγχάνω 


ἀδελφοί, we mess together, Polyb. 32, 9, 9) joined with 
πίνειν, Mt. xxiv. 38 (so also Dem. p. 402, 21; Plut. symp. 
1,1, 2; Ev. Nicod. c. 15, p. 640 ed. Thilo [p. 251 ed. 
'Tdf.]); τὸν ἄρτον. Jn. xiii. 18 (see ἄρτος 2 and ἐσθίω b.); 
figuratively, Jn. vi. 58; τὴν σάρκα, the ‘flesh’ of Christ 
(see σάρξ, 1), Jn. vi. 54, 56 sq.* 

τυγχάνω; 2 aor. ἔτυχον ; pf. (Heb. viii. 6) rérevya [so 
cod. B], and (so L T Tr mrg. WH cod. δὲ) rérvxa a later 
and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is 
everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67 
(59); Kühner$343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; Phryn. ed. Lob. 
p.595; WH. App. p. 171]), in some texts also τετύχηκα 
(a form com. in the earlier writ. [ Rutherford, New Phryn. 
p. 483 sq., and reff. as above]) ; a verb in freq. use fr. 
Hom. down; *est Lat. attingere et contingere; Germ. 
treffen, c. accus. i. q. etwas erlangen, neut. es trifft sich.” 
Ast, Lex. Platon. s. v.; hence 1. trans. a. 
prop. to hit the mark (opp. to ἁμαρτάνειν to miss the 
mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Hom., 
Xen., Leian.). b. trop. to reach, attain, obtain, get, 
become master of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200 
(188)), Lk. xx. 35 [W. 609 (566)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3); 
xxvi 22; xxvii. 3; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. viii. 6; xi. 
35. 2. intrans. to happen, chance, fall out: εἰ τύχοι 
(if it so fall out), it may be, perhaps, (freq. in prof. auth.), 
1 Co. xiv. 10, where see Meyer; or, considered in ref. 
to the topie in hand, it may be i.q. to specify, to take a 
case, as, for example, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Vulg. in each pass. 
ut puta; [cf. Meyer u. s.]) ; τυχόν, adverbially, perhaps, 
it may be, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (cf. B. $145, 8; [W. § 45,8 N. 1]; 
see exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Passow s. v. IT. 2 b. ; [L. and S. 
s. v. B. III. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v.]). to meet one; hence ó 
τυχών, he who meets one or presents himself unsought, any 
chance, ordinary, common. person, (see Passow s. v. II. 2; 
[L. and S. s. v. A. IT. 1 b.; Soph. Lex. s. v.]) : οὐ τυχών, not 
common, i. e. eminent, exceptional, [.A. V. special], Acts 
xix. 11; xxviii 2, (3 Macc. iii. 7); to chance to be: 
ἡμιθανῆ τυγχάνοντα, half dead as he happened to be, just 
as he was, Lk. x. 30 RG.  [Cowr.: év-, ómep-ev-, ἐπι-, 
mapa-, συν- τυγχάνω. * 

τυμπανίζω : (τύμπανον) ; 1. to beat the drum or 
timbrel. 2. to torture with the tympanum, an in- 
strument of punishment: ἐτυμπανίσθησαν (Vulg. distenti 
sunt), Heb. xi. 35 [R. V. were tortured (with marg. Or, 
beaten to death)] (Plut. mor. p. 60 a.; joined with avacko- 
λοπίζεσθαι, Lcian. Jup. trag. 19) ; the tympanum seems 
to have been a wheel-shaped instrument of torture, over 
whieh criminals were stretched as though they were 
skins, and then horribly beaten with clubs or thongs 
[cf. our ‘to break upon the wheel’; see Eng. Diets. s. v. 
Wheel]; cf. [Bleek on Heb. u. s.]; Grimm on 2 Macc. vi. 
19 sq.* 

τυπικῶς, (fr. the adj. τυπικός, and this fr. τύπος), adv., 
by way of example (prefiguratively) : ταῦτα τυπικῶς avvé- 
βαινον ἐκείνοις, these things happened unto them as a 
warning to posterity [ R. V. by way of example], 1 Co. x. 
11 LTTrWH. (Eccles. writ.) * 

τύπος, -ov, ὁ, (τύπτω). fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; 


63 


2 Τύριος 


1. the mark of a stroke or blow; print: τῶν ἥλων, Jn. xx. 
25%, 25" [where L T Trmrg. τόπον], (Athen. 13 p. 585 c. 
τοὺς τύπους τῶν πληγῶν ἰδοῦσα). 2. a figure formed 
by a blow or impression; hence univ. a figure, image: of 
the images of the gods, Acts vii. 43 (Amos y. 26; Jo- 
seph. antt. 1, 19, 11; 15, 9, 5). [Cf κύριοι τύπος θεοῦ, 
Barn. ep. 19, 7 ; * Teaching’ 4, 11.] 3. form: διδα-: 
xis, i. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and sub- 
stance of religion and represents it to the mind, Ro. vi. 
17; i. q. manner of writing, the contents and form of a 
letter, Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Macc. iii. 30). 4. an ex- 
ample ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in 
conformity to which a thing must be made: Acts vii. 44 ;. 
Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. xxv. 40). B. in an ethical sense,. 
a dissuasive example, pattern of warning: plur. of ruin- 
ous events which serve as admonitions or warnings to- 
others, 1 Co. x.6, 11 RG; an example to be imitated: of 
men worthy of imitation, Phil. iii. 17; with a gen. of the 
pers. to whom the example is offered, 1 Tim. iv. 12; 1 
Pet. v. 3: τύπον ἑαυτὸν διδόναι τινί, 2 Th. iii. 9; γενέσθαι 
τύπον [τύπους R L mrg. WH mrg.; cf. W. $27, 1 note] 
τινί, 1 Th. i. 7; παρέχεσθαι ἑαυτὸν τύπον καλῶν ἔργων, to 
show one’s self an example of good works, Tit.ii. 1. ^ y. 
in a doctrinal sense, a type i. e. a person or thing prefigur- 
ing a future (Messianic) person or thing: in this sense 
Adam is called τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος sc. ᾿Αδάμ, i. e. of 
Jesus Christ, each of the two having exercised a pre-emi- 
nent influence upon the human race (the former destruc- 
tive, the latter saving), Ro. v. 14.* 

τύπτω: impf. ἔτυπτον ; pres. pass. inf. τύπτεσθαι; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for 75m; to strike, smite, beat (with 
a staff, a whip, the fist, the hand, ete.) : τινά, Mt. xxiv. 
49; Lk. xii. 45; Acts xviii. 17 ; xxi. 32; xxiii.3: τὸ στόμα 
τινός, Acts xxiii. 2; τὸ πρόσωπόν twos, Lk. xxii. 64 [here 
L br. T Tr WH om. the cl.]; τινὰ ἐπὶ [ Tdf. eis] τὴν σια- 
γόνα, Lk. vi. 29; eis τ. κεφαλήν τινος, Mt. xxvii. 305 [τὴν 
κεφαλήν twos, Mk. xv. 19]; ἑαυτῶν τὰ στήθη (Lat. plan- 
gere pectora), of mourners, to smite their breasts, Lk. 
xxiii. 48; also τ. eis τὸ στῆθος, Lk. xviii. 13 [but GLT 
Tr WH om. eis]. God is said τύπτειν to smite one on 
whom he inflicts punitive evil, Acts xxiii. 3 (Ex. viii. 2; 
2 S. xxiv. 17; Ezek. vii. 9; 2 Mace. iii. 39). to smite 
metaph. i.e. to wound, disquiet : τὴν συνείδησίν τινος, one's 
conscience, 1 Co. viii. 12 (tva τί τύπτει σε ἡ καρδία aov; 
1 S.i. 8; τὸν δὲ ἄχος ὀξὺ κατὰ φρένα τύψε βαθεῖαν, Hom. 
ΤΙ. 19, 125; Καμβύσεα ἔτυψε ἡ ἀληθηΐη τῶν λόγων, Hat. 8, 
64).* 

Téípavvos, -ov, 6, Tyrannus, an Ephesian in whose 
school Paul taught the gospel, but of whom we have no: 
further knowledge [cf. B. D.s. v.]: Acts xix. 9.* 

τυρβάζω : pres. pass. τυρβάζομαι ; (τύρβη, Lat. turba,, 
confusion; [ef. Curtius $ 250]); [fr. Soph. down]; to: 
disturb, trouble: prop. τὸν πηλόν, Arstph. vesp. 257; trop.. 
in pass. to be troubled in mind, disquieted : περὶ πολλά,. 
Lk. x. 41 RG (with the same constr. in Arstph. pax. 
1007; μὴ ἄγαν τυρβάζου, Nilus epist. 2, 258).* 

Τύριος, -ov, 6, ἡ, α Tyrian, inhabitant of Tyre: Acts: 
xii. 20. [(Hdt., al.)]* 


Τύρος 


Τύρος, -ου, 7, (Hebr. ^is or ἫΝ ; fr. Aram. 730 a rock), 
Tyre, ἃ Pheenician city on the Mediterranean, very an- 
cient, large, splendid, flourishing in commerce, and pow- 
erful by land and sea. In the time of Christ and the 
apostles it was subject to the Romans, but continued to 
possess considerable wealth and prosperity down to 
A.D. 1291. It is at present an obscure little place con- 
taining some five thousand inhabitants, part Mohamme- 
dans part Christians, with a few Jews (cf. Büdeker's 
Palestine p. 425sq.; [Murray's ditto p. 370 sq.]). It is 
mentioned Acts xxi. 3, 7, and (in company with Sidon) 
in Mt. xi. 21sq.; xv. 21; Lk.vi. 17; x. 13 sq.; Mk. iii. 8; 
vii. 24 (where T om. Trmrg. WH br. καὶ Σιδῶνος), 31. 
[BB. DD.]* 

τυφλός, -o), 6, (τύφω, to raise a smoke; hence prop. 
‘darkened by smoke’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 73)", 
blind ; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 27sq.; xi. 5; Mk. viii. 22 
sq-; x. 46; Lk. vii. 21sq.; xiv. 13,21; Jn. ix. 1 sq. 13; 
x. 21, etc. b. asoften in prof. auth. fr. Pind. down, 
mentally blind: Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 17, 19, 24, 26; Jn. 
ix. 39-41; Ro.ii.19; 2 Pet. i. 9; Rev. iii. 17. 

τυφλόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐτύφλωσα; pf. τετύφλωκα; fr. [ Pind. 
and] Hdt. down; to blind, make blind; in the N. T. 
metaph. to blunt the mental discernment, darken the mind: 


[Y, v: on the use and the omission of the mark of diaeresis 
with, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 
136 sqq.; ef. Scrivener, Collation of Cod. Sin. ete. 2d ed. p. 
xxxviii.] , 

ὑακίνθινος, -7, -ov, (ὑάκινθος), of hyacinth, of the color 
of hyacinth, i.e. of a red color bordering on black 
(Hesych. ὑακίνθινον - ὑπομελανίζον) : Rev. ix. 17 (Hom., 
Theoer., Lcian., al.; Sept.).* 

ὑάκινθος, -ov, 6, hyacinth, the name of a flower (Hom. 
and other poets; Theophr.), also of a precious stone of 
the same color, i. e. dark-blue verging towards black 
ΓΑ. V. jacinth (so R. V. with mrg. sapphire) ; ef. B. D. 
s. v. Jacinth; Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 9] (Philo, Joseph., 
Galen, Heliod., al.; Plin. h. n. 37, 9, 41): Rev. xxi. 20.* 

ὑάλινος, -η, -ov, (ὕαλος, q. v.), in a fragment of Corinna 
and occasionally in the Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down, of 
glass or transparent like glass, glassy: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2.* 

ὕαλος, -ov, 6, [ prob. allied w. ὕει. ὑετός (q.v.); hence 
‘rain-drop’, Curtius $604; Waniéek p. 1046; but al. 
make it of Egypt. origin (cf. L. and S. s. v.)], fr. Hdt. 
([3, 24] who writes vedos; [cf. W. 22]) down; qu 
any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass: Rev. xxi. 
18, 21.* 


633 











ὑβριστής 


Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 11; τὰ νοήματα, 2 Co. iv. 4, (τὴν 
ψυχὴν τυφλωθείην, Plat. Phaedo p. 99 e.).* 

Tv$óo, -@: Pass., pf. τετύφωμαι ; 1 aor. ptep. τυφωθείς ; 
(τύφος, smoke; pride); prop. to raise a smoke, to wrap 
in a mist; used only metaph. 1. to make proud, 
puff up with pride, render insolent; pass. to be puffed 
up with haughtiness or pride, 1 Tim. iii. 6 (Strab., Jo- 
seph., Diog. Laért., 812). 2. to blind with pride or 
conceit, to render foolish or stupid: 1 Tim. vi. 4; pf. 
ptep. beclouded, besotted, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Dem., Aristot., 
Polyb., Plut., al.).* 

τύφω: (τῦφος, smoke); fr. Hdt. down; to cause or 
emit smoke (Plaut. fumifico), raise a smoke; pass. (pres. 
ptep. rupopevos) to smoke (Vulg. fumigo): Mt. xii. 20.* 

τυφωνικός, -7, -óv, (τυφῶν [cf. Chandler ed. 1 ὃ 659], 
a whirlwind, hurricane, typhoon), like a whirlwind, 
tempestuous : ἄνεμος, Acts xxvii. 14.* 

Τύχικος [so WH; W. $6, 11.] but RGL T Tr Τυχι- 
xos (Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; 
Chandler § 266]),-ov, 6, Tychicus, an Asiatic Christian, 
friend and companion of the apostle Paul: Acts xx. 4; 
Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv. 12; Tit. iii.12. [See 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ο.; B. D. s. v.]* 

τυχόν, see τυγχάνω, 2. 


M 


UPpitw; 1 aor. ὕβρισα; Pass, 1 aor. ptep. ὑβρισθείς ; 
1 fut. ὑβρισθήσομαι ; (ὕβρις) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. 
intrans. to be insolent; to behave insolently, wantonly, 
outrageously. 2. trans. to act insolently and shame- 
fully towards one (so even Hom.), to treat shamefully, 
[cf. W. $32, 1 b. B.]: Mt. xxii. 6; Lk. xviii. 32; Acts 
xiv. 5; [1 Th. ii. 2]; of one who injures another by 
speaking evil of him, Lk. xi. 45. [Comp.: év-v8pi£o.] * 

ὕβρις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. ὑπέρ [(see Curtius p. 540) ; cf. Lat. 
superbus, Eng. *uppishness ']), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
DNA, 783, mr, ete. ; a. insolence ; impudence, pride, 
haughtiness. b. a wrong springing from insolence, 
an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental in- 
jury and the wantonness of its infliction being prom- 
inent; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26; 2, 2,5; see 
ὑβριστής}: prop. plur. 2 Co. xii. 10 (Hesych. ὕβρεις - 
τραύματα. ὀνείδη) ; trop. injury inflicted by the violence of 
a tempest: Acts xxvii. 10, 21, (τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ὄμβρων ὕβριν, 
Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 4; δείσασα θαλάττης ὕβριν, Anthol. 7, 
291,3; [cf. Pind. Pyth. 1, 140]).* 

ὑβριστής, -o?, 6, (ὑβρίζων, fr. Hom. down, an insolent 
man, ‘one who, uplifted with pride, either heaps insulting 
language upon others or does them some shameful act of 


ὑγιαίνω 


wrong’ (Fritzsche, Ep.ad Rom. i. p. 86; [cf. Trench, Syn. 
$ xxix.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 5 (see dBpis)]) : 
Ron1580591 0m. 5.19.5 

ὑγιαίνω; (ὑγιής); fr. Hdt. down; to be sound, to be 
well, to be in good health: prop., Lk. v. 31; vii. 10; xv. 
27; [3 Jn. 2]; metaph. the phrase ὑγιαίνειν ἐν τῇ πίστει 
[ B. $ 133, 19] is used of one whose Christian opinions are 
free from any admixture of error, Tit. i.13; τῇ πίστει, 
τῇ ἀγάπῃ, τῇ ὑπομονῇ, [ cf. B. u. 5.7, of one who keeps these 
graces sound and strong, Tit. ii. 2; ἡ ὑγιαίνουσα dida- 
σκαλία, the sound i.e. true and incorrupt doctrine, 1 
Tim. i. 10; 2 Tim. iv. 3; Tit.i.9; ii. 1; also λόγοι ὑγιαί- 
vovres (Philo de Abrah. § 38), 1 Tim. vi.3; 2 Tim. i. 13, 
(ὑγιαίνουσαι περὶ θεῶν δόξαι καὶ ἀληθεῖς, Plut. de aud. 
poet. c. 4).* 

ὑγιής, -és, acc. ὑγιῆ (four times in the N. T., Jn. v. 11, 
15; vii. 23; Tit. ii. 8; for which ὑγιᾶ is more com. in 
Attic [cf. Meisterhans p. 66]), fr. Hom. down, sound: 
prop. [ A. V. whole], of a man who is sound in body, Mt. 
xv. 31 [WH only in mrg., but Tr br. in mrg.]; Acts iv. 
10; γίνομαι, Jn. v. 4 [RL], 6, 9, 14 ; ποιεῖν τινα ὑγιῆ 
(Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.), to make one whole i. e. restore 
him to health, Jn. v. 11, 15; vii. 23; ὑγιὴς ἀπό ete. sound 
and thus free from etc. (see ἀπό, I. 3 d.), Mk. v. 34; of 
the members of the body, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5 Ree. ; 
Lk.vi.10 Ree.; metaph. λόγος dy. [A. V. sound speech] 
i. e. teaching which does not deviate from the truth (see 
ὑγιαίνω), Tit. ii. 8 (in the Grk. writ., often equiv. to whole- 
some, fit, wise: μῦθος, Il. 8, 524; λόγος οὐκ ὑγιής, Hat. 1, 
8; see other exx. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II. 
2 and 3]).* 

ὑγρός, -d, -óv, (ὕω to moisten; [but al. fr. a different 
r. meaning ‘to moisten’, fr. which also Lat. umor, 
umidus; ef. Vanicek p. 867; Curtius $ 158]), fr. Hom. 
down, damp, moist, wet; opp. to ξηρός (q. v.), full of sap, 
green: ξύλον, Lk. xxiii. 31 (for 30^ sappy, in Job viii. 
16).* 

ὑδρία, -as, ἡ, (ὕδωρ), a vessel for holding water; a water- 
jar, water-pot: Jn.ii.6 sq.; iv. 98.  (Arstph., Athen., al.; 
Sept. for 73. [Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 23.]) * 

ὑδροποτέω, -ὥ; (ὑδροπότης) ; to drink water, [be a 
drinker of water; W. 498 (464)]: 1 Tim. v. 23. (Hat. 
1, 71; Xen., Plat., Leian., Athen., al.; Ael. v. h. 2, 38.)* 

ὑδρωπικός, -7), -óv, (ὕδρωψ, the dropsy, i. e. internal 
water), dropsical, suffering from dropsy: Lk. xiv. 2. 
(Hipper., [Aristot.], Polyb. 13, 2, 2; [al.].) * 

ὕδωρ, (ὕω [but cf. Curtius $ 8007), gen. ὕδατος, τό, fr. 
Hom. down, Hebr. p'5, water: of the water in rivers, 
Mt. iii.16; Rev.xvi.12; in wells, Jn. iv. 7; in fountains, 
Jas.iii.12; Rev. viii. 105 xvi.4; in pools, Jn. v. 3 sq. 
[RL], 7; of the water of the deluge, 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. 
iii. 6 [W. 604 sq. (562)]; of water in any of earth's re- 
positories, Rev. viii. 10 sq.; xi. 6; ὁ ἄγγελος τῶν ὑδάτων, 
Rev. xvi. 5; of water as a primary element, out of and 
through which the world that was before the deluge 
arose and was compacted, 2 Pet. iii. 5. plur. τὰ ὕδατα, 
of the waves of the Lake of Galilee, Mt. xiv. 28 8q.; (so 
also the sing. τὸ ὕδωρ in Lk. viii. 25); of the waves of 


634 





er 
vlogs 


the sea, Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2, (on both these pass. see φωνή, 
1); πολλὰ ὕδατα, many springs or fountains, Jn. iii. 23 ; 
fig. used of many peoples, Rev. xvii. 1, as the seer him- 
self explains it in vs. 15, ef. Nah. ii. 8; of a quantity of 
water likened to a river, Rev. xii. 15; of a definite quan- 
tity of water drawn for drinking, Jn. ii. 7; ποτήριον ὕδα- 
τος, Mk. ix. 41; for washing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Lk. vii. 44; 
Jn. xiii. 5; Heb. x. 22 (23); τὸ λουτρὸν τοῦ ὕδατος, of 
baptism, Eph. v. 26 [cf. W. 138 (130)]; κεράμιον ὕδατος, 
Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. in opp. to other things, 
whether elements or liquids: opp. to τῷ πνεύματι x. πυρί 
[ef. B. $ 133, 19; W. 217 (204), 412 (384)], Mt. iii. 11; 
Lk. iii. 16; to πνεύματι alone, Jn. i. 26, 31, 33; Aetsi. 5, 
(in all these pass. the water of baptism is intended); to 
τῷ πυρί alone, Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22; to τῷ οἴνῳ, Jn. ii. 
9; iv.46; to τῷ αἵματι, Jn. xix. 34; Heb. ix. 19; 1 Jn. 
v.6,8. Allegorically, that which refreshes and keeps 
alive the soul is likened to water, viz. the Spirit and truth 
of God, Jn. iv. 14 sq. (ὕδωρ σοφίας, Sir. xv. 3); on the 
expressions ὕδωρ ζῶν, τὸ ὕδωρ τ. ζωῆς, ζῶσαι πηγαὶ ὑδά- 
τῶν, see Cáo, II. a. and ζωή, 2 b. p. 274*. 

ὑετός, -οὔ, 6, (ὕω to rain), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
DW and WN, rain: Acts xiv. 17; xxviii. 2; Heb. vi. 7; 
Jas. v. 7 (where L T Tr WH om. ὑετόν ; on this pass. see 
ὄψιμος and mpwipos); ibid. 18; Rev. xi. 6.* 

υἱοθεσία, -as, 7, (fr. vids and θέσις, cf. ὁροθεσία, νομο- 
θεσία; in prof. auth. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down we find 
θετὸς vids or θετὸς παῖς, an adopted son), adoption, adop- 
tion as sons (Vulg. adoptio filiorum) : [Diod. 1. 31 § 27, 5 
(vol. x. 31, 13 Dind.)]; Diog. Laért. 4, 53; Inserr. In 
the N. T. it is used to denote a. that relationship 
which God was pleased to establish between himself and 
the Israelites in preference to all other nations (see vids 
ToU θεοῦ, 4 init.): Ro. ix. 4. b. the nature and 
condition of the true disciples of Christ, who by receiv- 
ing the Spirit of God into their souls become the sons 
of God (see vids rod θεοῦ, 4): Ro. viii. 15; Gal.iv.5; 
Eph. i. 5; it also ineludes the blessed state looked for 
in the future life after the visible return of Christ from 
heaven; hence ἀπεκδέχεσθαι υἱοθεσίαν, to wait for adop- 
tion, i. e. the consummate condition of the sons of God, 
which will render it evident that they are the sons of 
God, Ro. viii. 23, cf. 19." 

vids, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 3 and Chald. ἼΞ, 
a son (male offspring) ; 1. prop. a. rarely of 
the young of animals: Mt. xxi. 5 (Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 1; 
Sir. xxxviii. 25); generally of the offspring of men, and 
in the restricted sense, male issue (one begotten by a father 
and born of a mother): Mt.x.37; Lk.i.13; [xiv. 5 L'T 
Tr WH]; Acts vii. 29; Gal. iv. 22, etc.; ὁ vids τινος, Mt. 
vii. 9; Mk. ix. 17; Lk. iti. 2; Jn. i 42 (43), and very 
often. as in Grk. writ., vids is often to be supplied by 
the reader [ W. $ 30, 5 p. 593 (551)]: as τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, 
Mt. iv. 21; Mk.i.19. plur. υἱοί τινος, Mt. xx. 20 sq. ; 
Lk. v. 10; Jn. iv. 12; Acts ii. 17; Heb. xi. 21, ete. with 
the addition of an adj., as πρωτότοκος, Mt. i. 25, [RG]; 
Lk.ii.7; μονογενής, Lk. vii. 12. οἱ υἱοί, genuine sons, 
are distinguished fr. of νόθοι in Heb. xii. 8. i.q. τέκνον 


er 
vtos 


with ἄρσην added, a man child [B. 80 (70)], Rev. xii. 5; 
of one (actually or to be) regarded as a son, although 
properly not one, Jn. xix. 26; Acts vii. 21; Heb. xi. 24; 
in kindly address, Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11 (see τέκνον, 
a. β.). b. in a wider sense (like θυγάτηρ, τέκνον), a 
descendant, one of the posterity of any one: τινός, Mt. i. 
20; ὁ vids Δαυΐδ, of the Messiah, Mt. xxii. 42,45; Mk. 
xii. 35,37; Lk. xx. 41, 44; of Jesus the Messiah, Mt. ix. 
27; xii. 23; xv. 22; xx. 30 sq.; xxi. 9, 15; Mk. x. 47 sq.; 
Lk. xviii. 38 sq. plur. υἱοί τινος, Mt. xxiii. 31; Heb. vii. 
5; υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ, Israelites [the children of Israel], Mt. 
xxvii.9; Actsix.15; x.36; 2 Co.in.7, 13; Heb. xi. 
21 sq.; Rey. ii. 14; vii. 4; xxi. 12, (see Ἰσραήλ) ; viol 
᾿Αβραάμ, sons of Abraham, is trop. applied to those who 
by their faith in Christ are akin to Abraham, Gal. iii. 
de 2. trop. and ace. to the Hebr. mode of speech 
[W. 33 (32)], υἱός with the gen. of a person is used 
of one who depends on another or is his follower : oí υἱοί 
of teachers, i. q. pupils (see τέκνον, b. B. [cf. Iren. haer. 
4, 41, 2 qui enim ab aliquo edoctus est, verbo filius do- 
centis dicitur, et ille eius pater]), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 
19; τοῦ πονηροῦ, who in thought and action are prompted 
by the evil one and obey him, Mt. xiii. 38 ; vids διαβόλου, 
Acts xiii. 10; with the gen. of a thing, one who is 
connected with or belongs to a thing by any kind of 
close relationship [W. § 34, 3 N. 2; B. $ 132, 10]: υἱοὶ 
τοῦ νυμφῶνος (see νυμφών), Mt.ix.15; Mk.ii.19; Lk. 
v. 34, (τῆς ἄκρας, the garrison of the citadel, 1 Mace. iv. 
2; in Ossian ‘a son of the hill’ i. e. ‘a hunter’, ‘a son of 
the sea’ i. e. ‘a sailor’; ef. Jen. Lit. Zeit. for 1836 No. 
58 p. 462 sq.) ; τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, those whose character 
belongs to this age [is ‘ worldly '], Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 34; 
τῆς ἀπειθείας, i. 6. ἀπειθεῖς, Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 6 
[here T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.], (ἀνομίας, Ps. Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 23: τῆς ὑπερηφανίας, 1 Mace. ii. 47); βροντῆς, 
who resemble thunder, thundering, (see Boavepyés), Mk. 
iii. 17; τοῦ φωτός, instructed in evangelical truth and 
devotedly obedient to it, Lk. xvi.8; Jn. xii. 36; with 
καὶ τῆς ἡμέρας added, 1 Th. v. 5; τῆς ἀναστάσεως, sharers 
in the resurrection, Lk. xx. 36; παρακλήσεως, Acts iv. 
36; one to whom any thing belongs: as viol τῶν προφη- 
τῶν k. τῆς διαθήκης, those to whom the prophetic and 
covenant promises belong, Acts iii. 25; for whom a thing 
is destined, as υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 38; 
τῆς ἀπωλείας, Jn. xvii. 125; 2 Th. 11. 3; one who is worthy 
of a thing, as γεέννης, Mt. xxiii. 15; εἰρήνης, Lk. x. 6, 
(θανάτου, 1 S. xx. 31; 2 S. xii. 5; n»n 13, Sept. ἄξιος 
πληγών, Deut. xxv. 2). [SYN. see rékvov.] 

υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, Sept. for DIS 13, Chald. was 43, 
son of man ; it is 1. prop. a periphrasis for ‘man’, 
esp. com. in the poet. bks. of the O. T., and usually car- 
rying with it a suggestion of weakness and mortality: 
Num. xxiii. 19; Job xvi. 21; xxv. 6; Ps. viii. 5; Is. li. 
12; Sir. xvii. 30 (25), ete.; often in Ezekiel, where God 
addresses the prophet by this name, as ii. 1, 3; iii. 1 (ii. 
10), ete. ; plur. DINT ^23 (because DN wants the plur.), 
υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Gen. xi. 5; 1 S. xxvi. 19; Ps. x. (xi.) 
4; Prov. viii. 81, ete... So ἴῃ {πὸ N. T.: Mk. iii. 28; Eph. 





635 








er 
vlog 


iii. 5, (Sap. ix. 6); sing. ὅμοιος vid dvOp. [like unto a son 
of man], of Christ in the apocalyptic vision, Rev. i. 18 
[here υἱόν T WH txt.]; xiv. 14 [υἱόν T WH], (after Dan. 
vii. 13). 2. In Dan. vii. 13 sq., cf. 18, 22, 27, the 
appellation son of man (38 ^3) symbolically denotes 
the fifth kingdom, universal and Messianic; and by 
this term its humanity is indicated in contrast with the 
barbarity and ferocity of the four preceding kingdoms 
(the Babylonian, the Median, the Persian, the Macedo- 
nian) typified under the form of beasts (vs. 2 sqq.). 
But in the book of Enoch (written towards the close of 
the 2d cent. before Christ [but cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) ; 
Lipsius in Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. νι; Dillmann in Her- 
zog (ed. 2, vol. xii. p. 350 sq.) ; Schodde, Book of Enoch, 


| p. 20 sqq.]) the name ‘son of man’ is employed to desig- 


nate the person of the Messiah: 46, 2sq.; 48, 2; 62, 7. 
9.14; 63,11; 69, 26 sq.; 70,1; 71,17. (The chapters 
in which the name occurs are the work, if not of the 
first author of the book (as Ewald and Dillmann think 
[but see B. D. Am. ed. p. 740^; and Herzog as above p. 
351]), atleast of a Jewish writer (cf. Schürer, Neutest. 
Zeitgesch. $ 32 V. 2 p. 626), certainly not (as Hilgen- 
feld, Volkmar, Keim, and others imagine) of a Chris- 
tian interpolator.) In the language of the Jews in Jn. 
xii. 34 the titles Χριστός and vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου are used 
as synonyms. 3. The title 6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, the 
Son of Man, is used by Jesus of himself (speaking in 
the third person) in Mt. viii. 20; ix. 6; x. 23; xi. 19; 
xii. 8, 32,40; xiii. 37, 41; xvi. 13, 27 sq. ; xvii. 9, 12, 22; 
xvii. 11 Rec.; xix. 28; xx. 18, 28; xxiv. 27, 30, 37, 39, 
44; xxiv. 30 (twice); xxv. 13 Rec., 31; xxvi. 2, 24, 45, 
64; Mk. n. 10, 285 viii. 31, 38; ax. 9) 12) 915» x. 38, 45; 
xili 26; xiv.21,41, 062; Lk. y.24; vi.5, 225 vii.34; ix. 
22, 26, 44, 56 Rec., 58; xi. 30; xii. 8, 10, 40; xvii. 22, 
24, 26, 30; xviii. 8, 31; xix. 10; xxi. 27, 36; xxii. 92, 
48,69; xxiv. 7; Jn.i. 51 (52) ; iii. 13 sq.; vi. 27, 53, 62; 
viii. 28; xii. 23, 34 ; xiii. 31, (once without the article, 
Jn. v. 27), doubtless in order that (by recalling Dan. vii. 
13 sq. — not, as some suppose, Ps. viii. 5) he might thus 
intimate his Messiahship (as is plain from such pass. as 
ὄψεσθε τ. vi. τ. ἀνθρ.... ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν vedhe- 
λῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62, cf. Dan. 
Vii. 13; τὸν vi. τ. dvOp. ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ, 
Mt. xvi. 28; ὅταν καθίσῃ 6 vi. τ. ἀνθρ. ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης 
αὐτοῦ, Mt. xix. 28); and also (as appears to be the 
case at least fr. Mk. ii. 28, where 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 
stands in emphatic antithesis to the repeated 6 ἄνθρωπος 
preceding), that he might designate himself as the head 
of the human race, the man κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν, the one who 
both furnished the pattern of the perfect man and acted 
on behalf of all mankind. Christ seems to have pre- 
ferred this to the other Messianic titles, because by its 
lowliness it was least suited to foster the expectation of 
an earthly Messiah in royal splendor. There are no 
traces of the application of the name to Jesus in the 
apostolic age except in the speech of Stephen, Acts vii. 
56, and that of James, the brother of Jesus, in a frag- 
ment from Hegesippus given in Eus. h. e. 2, 23 (25), 13, 


er 
vlos 


each being a reminiscence of the words of Jesus in Mt. 
xxvi. 64, (to which may be added, fr. the apostolic fathers, 
Ignat. ad Ephes. 20, 2 ἐν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστῷ τῷ κατὰ σάρκα ἐκ 
γένους Δαυΐδ, τῷ υἱῷ ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱῷ θεοῦ). ‘This dis- 
use was owing no doubt to the fact that the term did not 
seem to be quite congruous with the divine nature and 
celestial majesty of Christ; hence in Barn. ep. 12, 10 we 
read, Ἰησοῦς οὐχ vids ἀνθρώπου (i.e. like Joshua), ἀλλ᾽ 
υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ [cf. Harnack's note on the pass.]. On this 
title, see esp. Holtzmann in Hilgenfeld's Zeitschr. für 
wissenschaftl. Theol, 1865, p. 212 sqq. ; Keim ii. p. 65 
sqq. [(Eng. trans. vol. iii. p. 79 sqq.) ; Zmmer, Theol. d. 
N. T. p. 105 sqq. ;. Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 33 sq.; and 
other reff. in Meyer on Mt. viii. 20; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Son of Man].* 

vids τοῦ θεοῦ, son of God; 1. ina physical 
sense, in various applications: originating by direct 
creation, not begotten by man,—as the first man 
Adam, Lk. iii. 38; Jesus, begotten of the Holy Ghost 
without the intervention of a human father, Lk. i. 35; 
in a heathen sense, as uttered by the Roman centurion 
of Jesus, a *demigod ' or ‘hero’, Mt. xxvii. 54; Mk. xv. 
39. 2.ina metaphysical sense, in various ap- 
plications: plur., of men, who although the issue of hu- 
man parents yet could not come into being without the 
volition of God, the primary author of all things, Heb. 
ii. 10, ef. vss. 11, 13; of men as partaking of immortal life 
after the resurrection, and thus becoming more closely 
related to God, Lk. xx. 36 ; of angels, as beings superior 
to men, and more closely akin to God, Deut. xxxii. 43 ; 
for ὈΠῸΝ 3 in Sept. of Gen. vi. 2, 4; Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 
1; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 7 (a phrase which in Job i. 6; ii. 
1; xxxviii. 7 is translated ἄγγελοι θεοῦ) ; in the highest 
sense Jesus Christ is called ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ as of a nature 
superhuman and closest to God : Ro. i. 4; viii. 3; Gal. 
iv. 4; and esp. in the Ep. to the Heb., i. 2 (1), 5, 8; iii. 6; 
iv. 14; v. 5,85 vi. 65; vii.3, 28; x. 29. [Cf. B. D. s.v. Son 
of God, and reff. in Am. ed.] 3. in a theocratic 
sense: of kings and magistrates, as vicegerents of God 
the supreme ruler, 2 S. vii. 14; Ps. ii. 7; υἱοὶ ὑψίστου, 
Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6; πρωτότοκος (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), of the 
king of Israel, Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28. In accordance 
with Ps. ii. 7 and 2 S. vii. 14, the Jews called the Mes- 
siah 6 vids rod θεοῦ pre-eminently, as the supreme repre- 
sentative of God, and equipped for his office with the 
fulness of the Holy Spirit, i. e. endued with divine 
power beyond any of the sons of men, Enoch 105, 2. In 
the N.' T. it is used of Jesus —in the utterances of the 
devil, Mt. iv. 3,6; Lk. iv. 3, 9; in passages where Jesus 
is addressed by this title by others, Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 33; 
xxvii. 40, 43; Mk. iii. 11; v. 7; Lk. iv. 41; viii. 28; 
xxii. 70; Jn. xix. 7; Acts viii. 37 Rec.; ix. 20; xiii. 33; 
vids τοῦ ὑψίστου, Lk. i. 32; in the language of Jesus 
concerning himself, Mt. xxviii. 19; Jn. ix. 35; x. 36, cf. 
Mt. xxi.37sq.; Mk.xii.6; besides, in Rev.ii.18; ὁ vi. 
7. €. (6) βασιλεὺς τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, Jn.i. 49 (50); ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ 
vi. τ. θ., Mt. xxvi. 63; Jn. xi. 27; Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς vi. T. 
[L'Tr Π marg. om. τοῦ] 6. Mk. i. [here T WH txt. om. 





636 





Ὑμέναιος 


(see WH. App. p. 23)]; ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ εὐλογητοῦ, 
Mk. xiv. 61; with the added ethical idea οἵ one who 
enjoys intimate intercourse with God: ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ vi. τ. 
θεοῦ ζῶντος. Mt. xvi. 16, and Rec. in Jn. vi. 69. in the 
solemn utterances of God concerning Jesus: 6 vids pov 
ὁ ἀγαπητός, Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk.i.11; ix. 7; Lk. iii. 
22; ix. 35 [R ΟἿΌΝ txt.]; 2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mt. ii. 15. 4. 
in an ethical sense with very various reference; those 
whom God esteems as sons, whom he loves, protects and 
benefits above others: so of the Jews, Deut. xiv. 1; Sap. 
xii. 19 sqq.; xviii. 4; υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες τοῦ θεοῦ, Is. xliii. 
6; Sap. ix. 7; πρωτότοκος τοῦ θεοῦ, Ex. iv. 22; in the 
N. T. of Christians, Ro. ix. 26; Rev. xxi. 7; those whose 
character God, as a loving father, shapes by chastisement, 
Heb. xii. 5-8; — those who revere God as their father, the 
pious worshippers of God, Sap. ii. 13 [here παῖς κυρίου], 
185 those who in character and life resemble God (Sir. iv. 
10 υἱοὶ ὑψίστου ; [cf. Epict. dissert. 1, 9, 6]): Mt. v. 9, 
45; viol ὑψίστου, Lk. vi. 35; υἱοὶ x. θυγατέρες, spoken of 
Christians, 2 Co. vi. 18; those who are governed by the 
Spirit of God, Ro. viii. 14 (ὅσοι πνεύματι θεοῦ ἄγονται, οὗτοι 
viol εἰσι τοῦ θεοῦ). repose the same calm and joyful trust 
in God which children do in their parents, Ro. viii. 14 
sqq.; Gal. iii. 26; iv. 6 sq., and hereafter in the blessed- 
ness and glory of the life eternal will openly wear this dig- 
nity of sons of God, Ro. viii. 19 (ἀποκάλυψις τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ 
Geod), cf. 1 Jn. iii. 2, (see τέκνον, b. y. [and reff.]). pre- 
eminently of Jesus, as enjoying the supreme love of God, 
united to him in affectionate intimacy, privy to his saving 
counsels, obedient to the Father's will in all his acts: Mt. 
xi 27; Lk. x. 22; Jn. iii. 35 sq.; v. 19sq. In many 
passages of the writings of John and of Paul, this ethi- 
cal sense so blends with the metaphysical and the theo- 
cratic, that it is often very difficult to decide which of 
these elements is predominant in a particular case: Jn. 
i. 34; iii. 17 ; v. 21-23, 25 sq.; vi. 40; viii. 85 sq.; xi. 4; 
xiv. 13; xvii. 1; 1Jn. 1. 8, 7 ; ii. 22-24 ; iii. 8, 23; iv. 10, 
14 sq.; v. 5,9-13, 20; 2 Jn.3, 9; Ro. i. 3, 9; v. 10; viii. 
8,.29,:82; 1 Covi: 9: xv. 285. 2/0021:195; {τη} 5. 105 11: 
20; Eph. iv. 13; 1 Th. i. 10; 6 vids τῆς ἀγάπης αὐτοῦ 
(i. e. God's), Col. i. 13; ὁ Χριστὸς 6 vi. τ. 6. Jn. xx. 31; 6 
μονογενὴς vi., Jn. i. 18 [here Tr WH povoy. θεός, L mrg. 
6 p. @. (see povoy. and reff.)]; iii. 18; ὁ vi. r. 6. 6 povoy., 
ii. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 9, (see μονογενής). It can hardly be 
doubted that a reverent regard for the transcendent 
difference which separates Christ from all those who by 
his grace are exalted to the dignity of sons of God led 
John always to call Christians τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ, not as 
Paul does υἱοί and τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ indiscriminately ; the 
like reverence moved Luther to translate the plur. υἱοὶ 
τ. 6. everywhere by Kinder Gottes ; [cf., however, τέκνον, 
b. y. and reff.]. This appellation is not found in 2 
Th., Phil., Philem., the Pastoral Epp., nor in 1 Pet. or in 
the Ep. of James.* 

ὕλη, -ης, 9, α forest, a wood; felled wood, fuel: Jas. iii. 
5. (From Hom. down; Sept.) * 

ὑμεῖς. see σύ. 


Ὑμέναιος [on its accent cf. W. § 6, 11.; Chandler 


ὑμέτερος 


§ 253], -ov, 6, (Ὑμήν, -ένος, 6, the god of marriage), Hy- 
menceus, a heretic, one of the opponents of the apostle 
Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim.ii.17. [B.D.s.v.]* 

ὑμέτερος, -a, -ov, (ὑμεῖς), possess. pron. of the 2d pers. 
plur., your, yours ; a. possessed by you: with sub- 
stantives, Jn. viii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 8 [Rec.* jyer.]; Gal. 
vi. 13; neut. τὸ dp. substantively, opp. to τὸ ἀλλύτριον, 
Lk. xvi. 12 [(WH txt. τὸ ἡμέτ.) ; cf. W. $61,3a.]. b. al- 
lotted to you: ip. σωτηρία, Acts xxvii. 34; τὸ ip. ἔλεος, 
Ro. xi. 31; 6 καιρὸς 6 tpér., the time appointed, oppor- 
tune, for you, Jn. vii. 6; as a predicate, ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ 
βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. vi. 20. c. proceeding from you: 
τὸν ὑμέτ. sc. λόγον, Jn. xv. 20; [1 Co. xvi. 171, Ὁ Tr WH 
txt.]. d. objectively (see ἐμός, c. 8.; [W. § 22, 7; B. 
8132, 3]) : ὑμετέρα (Rec.* ἡμετ.) καύχησις, glorying in 
you,1Co.xv.31. [On the use of the word in the N. T. 
cf. B. § 127, 21.]* 

ὑμνέω, -ó: impf. ὕμνουν; fut. ὑμνήσω; 1 aor. ptcp. 
ὑμνήσας ; (Upvos); fr. Hes. down; Sept. often for bon, 
nmn, vun, VT; 1. trans. to sing the praise of, 
sing hymns to: τινά, Acts xvi. 25; Heb. ii. 12. 2: 
intrans. fo sing a hymn, to sing: Mt. xxvi. 30; Mk. xiv. 
26, (in both pass. of the singing of the paschal hymns; 
these were Pss. exiii.-exviii. and Ps. exxxvi., which the 
Jews call the ‘great Hallel’, [but see Ginsburg in Kitto 
s. v. Hallel; Edersheim, The Temple ete. p. 191 sq.; 
Buxtorf (ed. Fischer) p. 314 sq.]); Ps. lxiv. (Ixv.) 13 
(14) ; 1 Macc. xiii. 47.* 

ὕμνος, -ov, 6, in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a song in 
praise of gods, heroes, conquerors, [ οἵ. Trench as below, 
p. 297], but in the Seriptures of God; a sacred song, 
hymn: plur., Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16. (1 Mace. iv. 33; 
2 Mace. i. 30; x. 7; [Jud. xvi. 13], ete. ; of the Psalms 
of David, Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 3; for nda, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 
4; Ixiv. (Ixv.) 2; for Vv, Is. xlii. 10.) * 

[Svw. ὕμνος, ψαλμός, φδή: δή is the generic term; 
ψαλμ. and Suv. are specific, the former designating a song 
which took its general character from the O. T. ‘ Psalms’ (al- 
though not restricted to them, see 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26), the latter 
a song of praise. ‘“ While the leading idea of ψαλμ. is a 
musical accompaniment, and that of Suv. praise to God, 
ᾧδή is the general word for a song, whether accompanied or 
unaccompanied, whether of praise or on any other subject. 
'Thus it was quite possible for the same song to be at once 
ψαλμός, ὕμνος and 982" (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 16). The 
words occur together in Col. iii. l6 and Eph. v. 19. See 
Trench, Syn. ὃ Ixxviii.] 

ὑπ-άγω ; impf. ὑπῆγον ; 1. trans. to lead under, 
bring under, (Lat. subducere) ; so in various applications 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; once in the Seriptures, 
ὑπήγαγε κύριος τὴν θάλασσαν, for 371, he caused to re- 
cede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the 
N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 
down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one's self, to go 
away, depart, [cf. ἄγω, 4; and see B. 204 (177)]: absol., 
Mk. vi. 33; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Tr mrg. πορεύεσθαι) ; 
xvii. 14; Jn. viii. 21; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5); οἱ ἐρχό- 
μενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες, coming and going, Mk. vi. 31; 
ὑπάγει k. πωλεῖ, Mt. xiii. 44; ὑπῆγον x. ἐπίστευον, Jn. xii. 


637 





e , 
ὑπακοή 


11; [ἵνα ὑπάγητε x. καρπὸν φέρητε, Jn. xv. 16]; ἀφίημί 
τινα ὑπάγειν, to permit one to depart freely wherever he 
wishes, Jn. xi. 44; xviii.8; ὕπαγε is used by one in 
dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 R T Tr WH]; viii. 13; 
xx.14; Mk.[ii.9 Tdf.]; vii. 29; x. 52; with eis εἰρήνην 
added, Mk. v. 34; ὑπάγετε ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Jas. ii. 16; or in 
sending one somewhere to do something, Lk. x. 3; plur. 
Mt. viii. 32; with oriental cireumstantiality (see dvi- 
στημι, II. 1 c.) ὕπαγε is prefixed to the imperatives of 
other verbs: Mt. v. 24; viii. 4; [xviii. 15 GL T Tr WH]; 
xix. 21; xxi. 28; xxvii. 65; xxviii.10; Mk.i.44; x. 21; 
xvi 7; Jn.iv.16; ix. 7; Rev.x.8; with καί inserted, 
Mt. xviii. 15 Rec. ; Mk. vi. 38[ T Tr WH om. Tr br. xat]; 
Rev. xvi. 1. Particularly, ὑπάγω is used to denote the 
final departure of one who ceases to be another's com- 
panion or attendant, Jn. vi. 67; euphemistically, of one 
who departs from life, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. — with 
designations of place: ποῦ (for ποῖ [W. § 54, 7; B. 71 
(62)]), Jn. xii. 35; xiv.5; xvi.5; 1Jn.ii.11; opp. to 
ἔρχεσθαι, to come, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; ὅπου (for ὅποι [W. 
and B. u. s.]), Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36; xiv.4; Rev. 
xiv. 4; ἐκεῖ, Jn. xi. 8; πρὸς τὸν πέμψαντά με, πρὸς τὸν 
πατέρα, πρὸς τὸν θεόν, to depart (from earth) to the father 
(in heaven) is used by Jesus of himself, Jn. vii. 33; xiii. 
3; xvi. 5,10, 16 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 17; foll. 
by eis with an ace. of the place, Mt. ix. 6; xx.4,7; Mk. 
ii.11; xi.2; xiv. 13; Lk. xix. 30; Jn. vi. 21 [ef. B. 283 
(243)]; vii.3; ix. 11; xi. 31; eis αἰχμαλωσίαν, Rev. xiii. 
10; εἰς ἀπώλειαν, Rev. xvii. 8, 11; foll. by eis w. an ace. 
of the place and πρός twa, Mt. xxvi. 18; Mk..v. 19; 
ὑπάγω ἐπί twa, Lk. xii. ὅ8: ὑπάγω with an inf. denoting 
the purpose, Jn. xxi. 3; μετά τινος with an ace. of the 
way, Mt. v. 41. On the phrase ὕπαγε ὀπίσω pov [ Mt. iv. 
10GLbr.; xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; Lk.iv.8 RL in br.], 
see ὀπίσω, 2 a. fin.* 

ὑπ-ακοή, -75, 7, (fr. ὑπακούω, q. v.), obedience, compli- 
ance, submission, (opp. to mapaxon): absol. eis ὑπακοήν, 
unto obedience i. e. to obey, Ro. vi. 16 [cf. W. 612 (569); 
Β. 8 151, 28d.]; obedience rendered to any one's coun- 
sels: with a subject. gen., 2 Co. vii. 15; x. 6; Philem. 
21; with a gen. of the object, — of the thing to which 
one submits himself, τῆς πίστεως (see πίστις, 1 b. a. p. 
513°), Ro. 1. δ; xvi. 26; τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Pet. i. 22; of the 
person, τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. x.5; the obedience of one 
who conforms his conduct to God’s commands, absol. 
1 Pet. i. 2; opp. to ἁμαρτία, Ro. vi. 16 ; τέκνα ὑπακοῆς, i. e. 
ὑπήκοοι, 1 Pet. i. 14; with a subjective gen. Ro. xv. 18; 
an obedience shown in observing the requirements of 
Christianity, ὑπ. ὑμῶν, i. e. contextually, the report con- 
cerning your obedience, Ro. xvi. 19; the obedience with 
which Christ followed out the saving purpose of God, 
esp. by his sufferings and death: absol. Heb. v. 8; with 
a gen. of the subject, Ro. v. 19. (The word is not 
found in prof. auth.; nor in the Sept., except in 2 S. 
xxii. 36 with the sense of favorable hearing; in 2 S. 
xxiii. 23 Aq. we find ὁ ἐπὶ ὑπακοήν τινος, Vulg. qui alicui 
est a secretis, where it bears its primary and proper 
signification of listening; see ὑπακούω.) * 


ὑπακούω 


ὑπ-ακούω ; impf. ὑπήκουον ; 1 aor. ὑπήκουσα; fr. Hom. 
down; /o listen, hearken ; 1. prop.: of one who on 
a knock at the door comes to listen who it is, (the duty 
of the porter), Acts xii. 13 [where A. V. hearken, R. V. 
answer] (Xen. symp. 1, 11; Plat. Crito p. 43 a.; Phaedo 
p.59 e.; Dem., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to hearken to 
a command, i. e. to obey, be obedient unto, submit to, (so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): absol. Phil. ii. 12 (cf. W. 594 
(552)]; ὑπήκουσεν ἐξελθεῖν, [ R. V. obeyed to go out i. e.] 
went out obediently, Heb. xi. 8; with a dat. of the pers. 
(in Grk. writ. also w. a gen.), Mt. viii. 27; Mk.i.27; 
iv. 41; Lk. vii.25; xvii 6; Ro. vi 16; Eph. vi.1,5; 
Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb. ν. 9; 1 Pet. iii.6; with a dat. of 
the thing, τῇ πίστει (see πίστις, 1 b. a. p. 513" near top), 
Acts vi. 7; ὑπηκούσατε εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς, 
by attraction for τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὃν κτλ. [W. § 24, 
2b.; cf. τύπος, 3], Ro. vi. 17; τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, Ro. x. 16; 
2 'Th.i.8; τῷ λόγῳ, 2 Th. iii. 14; τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ (Rec.), rais 
ἐπιθυμίαις (1, Τ Tr WH), i. e. to allow one’s self to be 
captivated by, governed by, ete., Ro. vi. 12.* 

ὕπανδρος, -ov, (ὑπό and ἀνήρ), under i. e. subject to a 
man: γυνή, married, Ro. vii. 2. (Num. v. [20], 29; Sir. 
ix. 9; [ Prov. vi. 24]; xli. 21; Polyb. 10, 26, 3; [ Diod. 32, 
10, 4 vol. v. 50, 17 ed. Dind.]; Plut., Artem., Heliod.) * 

Vm-avráo, -@: 1 aor. ὑπήντησα; to go to meet, to meet: 
τινί, Mt. viii. 28; Lk. viii. 27; Jn. xi. 20, 30; xii.18; also 
LT Tr WH in Mk. v. 2; Jn. iv. 51; and T Tr WH in 
Mt. xxviii. 9; Acts xvi. 16; [and T in Lk. xvii. 12 (so 
WH mrg. but without the dat.) ] ; in a military reference, 
of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 L'T Tr WH.  (Pind., 
Soph., Eur., Xen., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., al.) * 

ὑπ-άντησις, -eos, 7, (ὑπαντάω), a going to meet: Jn. xii. 
13, and L T Tr WH in Mt. viii. 34 [B. $ 146, 3] and xxv. 
1 [cf. Β. 1. 6.1. (Judg. xi. 34; Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4; 
App. b. c. 4, 6.) * 

ὕπαρξις, -ews, 7, (ὑπάρχω, q. v.), [fr. Aristot. down], 
possessions, goods, wealth, property, (i. q- rà ómápxovra) : 
Acts ii. 45; Heb. x. 34, (for 325, 2 Chr. xxxv. 7; Dan. 
xi. 24 Theodot.; for 1205, Ps, Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 48; Jer. 
ix. 10; for in, Proy. xviii. 11; xix. 14; Polyb., Dion. 
Hal., Diod., Plut., Artem.).* 

ὑπ-άρχω; impf. ὑπῆρχον; 1. prop. to begin below, 
to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl., 
Hdt., sqq.). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be 
ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.): univ. 
and simply, Acts xix. 40 [ef. B. $ 151, 29 note]; xxvii. 
12, 21; ἔν rem, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18: with 
a dat. of the pers. ὑπάρχει pot τι, something is mine, I 
have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 
8 (where Lchm. παρόντα; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17; 
Job ii. 4, ete.) ; rà ὑπάρχοντά τινι, one's substance, one's 
property, Lk. viii. 3; xii. 15 L txt. T Tr WH; Acts iv. 
32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40); also ra 
ὑπ. τινος, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv. 47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21; 
xii. 15 RG L mrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the 
dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi.1; xix. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 3; Heb. x. 34, 
(often in Sept. for "aps, WADI, 0023; Sir. xli. 1; Tob. i. 
20, ete. ; τὰ ἴδια ὑπάρχοντα, Polyb. 4, 3, 1). 3. to be, 


638 





C d 
ὑπερ 


with a predicate nom. (as often in Attic) [cf. D. § 144, 
14, 15 a, 18; W. 350 (328)]: as ἄρχων τῆς συναγωγῆς 
ὑπῆρχεν, Lk. viii. 41; add, Lk. ix. 48; Acts vii. 55; 
viii. 16; xvi.3; xix. 36; xxi. 20; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; xii. 225 
Jas. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii 11; the ptep. with a predicate 
nom., being i. e. who is ete., since or although he ete. is: 
Lk. xvi. 14; xxiii. 50; Acts ii. 80; iii. 2; xiv. 8 Rec.; 
xvii.24; [xxii.3]; Ro.iv.19; 1 Co. xi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 17; 
xii. 16; Gal.i.14; ii. 14; plur., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xvi. 20, 
875 xvii. 29; 2 Pet. i 19: ὑπάρχειν foll. by ἐν w. a 
dat. of the thing, to be contained in, Acts x. 12; to be in 
a place, Phil. iii. 20; in some state, Lk. xvi. 23; ἐν τῇ 
ἐξουσίᾳ τινός, to be left in one’s power or disposal, Acts 
v. 45 ἐν ἱματισμῷ ἐνδόξῳ καὶ τρυφῇ, to be gorgeously ap- 
parelled and to live delicately, Lk. vii. 25; ἐν μορφῇ 
θεοῦ ὑπάρχειν, to be in the form of God (see μορφή), Phil. 
ii. 6 [here R.V. mrg. Gr. being originally (? ; yet cf. 1 Co. 
xi. 7)]; foll. by év with a dat. plur. of the pers., among, 
Acts iv. 34 RG; 1 Co. xi. 18. ὑπ. μακρὰν ἀπό τινος, Acts 
xvii. 27; πρὸς τῆς σωτηρίας, to be conducive to safety, 
Acts xxvii. 34. [Comp.: mpo- vrápxo.] * 

ὑπ-είκω ; fr. Hom. down; to resist no longer, but to give 
way, yield, (prop. of combatants); metaph. to yield to 
authority and admonition, to submit: Heb. xiii. 17.* 

ὑπ-εναντίος. -a, -ov; a. opposite to; set over against: 
ἵπποι ὑπεν. ἀλλήλοις, meeting one another, Hes. scut. 
347. b. trop. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.), opposed 
to, contrary to: τινί, Col.ii. 14 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; 
ὁ ὑπεν. as subst. (Xen., Polyb., Plut.), an adversary, Heb. 
x. 27, cf. Sept. Is. xxvi. 11, (Sept. for 38, 33); often 
in the O. T. Apocr.* 

ὑπέρ, [cf. Eng. up, over, ete.], Lat. super, over, a prep- 
osition, which stands before either the gen. or the acc. 
according as it is used to express the idea of state and 
rest or of motion over and beyond a place. 

I. with the GENITIVE; cf. W. 382 (358) sq. Hs 
prop. of place, i. e. of position, situation, extension : 
over, above, beyond, across. In this sense it does not 
oceur in the N. T.; but there it always, though joined 
to other classes of words, has a tropical signification de- 
rived from its original meaning. 2. i.q. Lat. pro, 


for, i.e. for one's safety, for one's advantage or benefit, 


(one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as 
standing or bending *over' the one whom he would shield 
or defend [ef. W. τι. 5.7) : προσεύχομαι ὑπέρ τ. Mt. v. 44; 
Lk. vi. 28 [T Tr mrg. WH περί (see 6 below)]; Col. i. 3 
L Tr WH mre. (see 6 below); [Jas. v. 16 Τῷ Trmrg. WH 
txt.], 9; εὔχομαι, Jas. v. 16 [R G T Tr txt. WH mrg.]; 
after δέομαι, Acts viii. 24 ; and nouns denoting prayer, as 
δέησις, Ro. x. 1; 2 Co. i. 11; ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; Eph. vi. 
19; προσευχή, Acts xii. 5 (here L T Tr WH περί [see 6 
below]); Ro. xv. 30; 1 Tim.ii. 1,2; εἶναι ὑπέρ τ. (opp. 
to κατά twos), to be for one i. e. to be on one's side, to 
favor and further one's cause, Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; 
Ro. viii. 31, cf. 2 Co. xiii. 8; τὸ ὑπέρ v. that which is for 
one's advantage, Phil. iv. 10 [but see ἀναθάλλω and 
φρονέω, fin.] i ἐντυγχάνω and ὑπερεντυγχάνω, Ro. viii. 26 
RG, 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, cf. ix. 24; Aéyo, Acts xxvi. 1 


e , 
ὑπέρ 


R WH txt. [see6 below]; μεριμνῶ, 1 Co. xii. 25 ; ἀγρυπνῶ, 
Heb. xiii. 17; ἀγωνίζομαι ἐν rais προσευχαῖς, Col. iv. 12, 
cf. Ro. xv. 30; πρεσβεύω, Eph. vi. 20; 2 Co. v. 20; with 
subst.: ὥλος, 2 Co. vii. 7; [Col. iv. 13 Rec.]; πόνος, Col. 
iv. 13 [GL T Tr WH]; σπουδή, 2 Co. vii. 12; viii. 16; 
διάκονος, Col. i. 7; to offer offerings for, Acts xxi. 26; 
to enter the heavenly sanetuary for (used of Christ), 
Heb. vi. 20; ἀρχιερέα καθίστασθαι, Heb. v. 1; after the 
ideas of suffering, dying, giving up life, ete.: 
Ro. ix. 3; xvi.4; 2 Co.xii. 15; after τὴν ψυχὴν τιθέναι 
(ὑπέρ τινος), in order to avert ruin, death, etc., from 
one, Jn. x. 11; xiii. 37 sq. ; of Christ dying to procure 
salvation for his own, Jn. x. 15; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; 
Christ is said τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ékyóvew, pass., Mk. xiv. 24 
L' T TrWH [see 6 below]; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the 
pass.]; ἀπολέσθαι, Jn. xviii. 14 Rec. ; ἀποθνήσκειν, Jn. xi. 
50 sqq.; [xviii. 14 L T Tr WH]; Acts xxi. 13; Ro. v. 7; 
of Christ undergoing death for man's salvation, Ro. v. 
6, 8; xiv. 15; 1 Th. v. 10 [here T Tr WH txt. περί (see 
6 below) ; 1 Pet. iii. 18 LT Tr WH txt.]; γεύεσθαι θανά- 
rov, Heb. ii. 9; σταυρωθῆναι, 1 Co. i. 13 (here L txt. Tr 
mrg. WH mrg. περί [see 6 below]); [of God giving up 
his Son, Ro. viii. 32]; παραδιδόναι τινὰ ἑαυτόν, Gal. ii. 20 ; 
Eph. v. 2, 25; διδόναι ἑαυτόν, Tit. ii. 14; with a predi- 
cate accus. added, dvr(Avrpov, 1 Tim. ii. 6; τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 
διδόναι, pass. Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.], cf. 1 Co. 
xi. 24; τυθῆναι (θυθῆναι, see θύω, init.), 1 Co. v. 7; παθεῖν, 
1 Pet.ii.21; iii. 18 [ἢ G WHmrg.; iv.1 RG]; ἁγιάζειν 
ἑαυτόν, Jn. xvii. 19. Since what is done for one’s ad- 
vantage frequently cannot be done without acting in 
his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death 
of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force 
of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead), 
we easily understand how ὑπέρ, like the Lat. pro and 
our for, comes to signify 3. in the place of, instead 
of, (which is more precisely expressed by ἀντί; hence 
the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv. 
haer. 5, 1, τῷ ἰδίῳ αἵματι λυτρωσαμένου ἡμᾶς τοῦ κυρίου 
καὶ δόντος τὴν ψυχὴν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἡμετέρων ψυχῶν καὶ τὴν 
σάρκα τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀντὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων σαρκῶν): ἵνα ὑπὲρ 
σοῦ μοι διακονῇ, Philem. 13; ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν βαπτίζεσθαι 
(see βαπτίζω, fin.), 1 Co. xv. 29; [add, Col. 1. 7 L txt. Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; in expressions concerning the death of 
Christ: εἷς ὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν (for the inference is 
drawn dpa οἱ πάντες ἀπέθανον, i.e. all are reckoned as 
dead), 2 Co. v. 14 (15), 15; add, 21; Gal. iii. 13. [On 
this debated sense of ὑπέρ, see Meyer and Van Hengel 
on Ro. v. 6; Ellicott on Gal. and Philem. ll. cc. ; Wieseler 
on Gal. 1. 4: Trench, Syn. $1xxxii.; W. 383 (358) note.] 
Since anything whether of an active or passive char- 
acter which is undertaken on behalf of a person or 
thing is undertaken ‘on account of’ that person or 
thing, ὑπέρ is used 4. of the impelling or moving 
cause; on account of, for the sake of, any person or thing : 
ὑπὲρ τῆς ToU κόσμου ζωῆς, to procure (true) life for man- 
kind, Jn. vi. 51; to do or suffer anything ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 
θεοῦ, ᾿Ιησοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου: Actsv.41; ix. 16; xv. 263; xxi. 
13; Ro. i. 55; 3 Jn. 7 ; πάσχειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Phil. i. 


639 








e , 
ὑπέρ 


29; ὑπὲρ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ, 2 Th. i. 5; στενοχωρίαι. 
ὑπὲρ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xii. 10 [it is better to connect 
ὑπέρ etc. here with εὐδοκῶ] ; ἀποθνήσκειν ὑπὲρ θεοῦ, 
Ignat. ad Rom. 4. examples with a gen. of the thing 
are, Jn. xi. 4; Ro. xv. 8; 2Co.i.6; xii. 19; ὑπὲρ τῆς 
εὐδοκίας, to satisfy (his) good-pleasure, Phil. 11. 18: with 
a gen. of the pers., 2 Co.i.6; Eph. iii.1,13; Col. i. 24; 
δοξάζειν, εὐχαριστεῖν ὑπέρ τ. (gen. of the thing), Ro. xv. 
9; 1 Co. x. 30; ὑπὲρ πάντων, for all favors, Eph. v. 20; 
εὐχαριστεῖν ὑπέρ with a gen. of the pers., Ro. i. 8 (here 
LT Tr WH περί [see 6 below]); 2 Co. i. 11; Eph.i. 16; 
ἀγῶνα ἔχειν ὑπέρ with a gen. of the pers. Col. ii. 1 L T Tr 
WH [see 6 below]; ὑπὲρ (τῶν) ἁμαρτιῶν (or ἀγνοημάτων), 
to offer sacrifices, Heb. v. 1, 3 (here L T Tr WH περί [see 
6 below]); vii. 27; ix. 7; x. 12; ἀποθανεῖν, of Christ, 
1 Co. xv. 3; ἑαυτὸν δοῦναι, Gal. i.4 R WH txt. [see 6 be- 
low]. 5. Like the Lat. super (cf. Klotz, HWB. d. 
Lat. Spr. ii. p. 1497"; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. II. B. 
2 b.]), it freq. refers to the object under consideration, 
concerning, of, as respects, with regard to, ([cf. B. § 147, 
21]; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in W. 383 (358 sq.)); 
so after καυχᾶσθαι, καύχημα, καύχησις, [ R. V. on behalf 
of]: 2 Co. v. 12; vii. 4,14; viii.94; ix.2sq.; xii. 5; 
2 Th.i. 4 [here LT Tr WH ey- (or &-) καυχᾶσθαι]; φυ- 
σιοῦσθαι, 1 Co. iv. 6 [4]. refer this to 4 above; see Meyer 
ed. Heinrici (cf. φυσιόω, 2 fin.)]; ἐλπίς, 2 Co. i. 7 (6); 
ἀγνοεῖν, 8 (here LT Tr WH mrg. περί [see 6 below]); 
φρονεῖν, Phil. i. 7 (2 Mace. xiv. 8); ἐρωτᾶν, 2 Th. ii. 1; 
κράζειν, to proclaim concerning, Ro. ix. 27; [παρακαλεῖν, 
1 Th. iii. 2 G L'T Tr WH (see 6 below)]; after εἰπεῖν, 
Jn. i. 30 LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; (so after verbs of 
saying, writing, etc., 2 S. xviii. 5; 2 Chr. xxxi. 9; Joel i. 
3; Judith xv. 4; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; 2 Mace. xi. 35); etre 
ὑπὲρ Τίτου, whether inquiry be made about Titus, 2 Co. 
viii. 23; ὑπὲρ τούτου, concerning this, 2 Co. xii. 8. 6. 
In the N. T. Mss., as in those of prof. auth. also, the 
prepositions ὑπέρ and περί are confounded, [cf. W. 383 
(358) note; $50, 3; B.§ 147,21; Kühner § 435, I. 2e.; 
Meisterhans $ 49, 12; also Wieseler or Ellicott on Gal. as 
below; Meyer on 1 Co. xv. 3, (see περί I. c. 8.)]; this oc- 
curs in the foll. pass.: Mk. xiv. 24; [Lk. vi. 28]; Jn. i. 
30; Acts xii. 5; xxvi. 1; Ro.i.8; 1 Co.i.13; 2 Co.i. 8; 
Ga1.i.4; Col.i.3; 1i. 15 [1 Th. 11.2; v. 10]; Heb. v. 3: 
[For ὑπὲρ ἐκ περισσοῦ or ὑπὲρ ἐκπερισσοῦ, see ὑπερεκπε- 
ρισσοῦ.] 

II. with the Accusative (cf. W. § 49, e.) ; over, be- 
yond, away over; more than; 1. prop. of the 
place ‘over’ or ‘beyond’ which, as in the Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down; not thus used in the N. T., where it is 
always 2. metaph. of the measure or degree 
exceeded [ef. B. $147, 21]; a. univ.: εἶναι ὑπέρ 
twa, to be above i. e. superior to one, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 
40; τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 80. ὄν, the name superior 
to every (other) name, Phil. ii. 9; κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα 
sc. οὖσαν, the supreme head or lord [ A.V. head over all 
things], Eph. i. 22; ὑπὲρ δοῦλο» ὄντα, more than a ser- 
vant, Philem. 16; more than [R. V. beyond], ibid. 21; 
ὑπὲρ πάντα, above (i.e. more and greater than) all, Eph. 


ὑπεραίρω 


ii. 20°; ὑπὲρ τὴν λαμπρότητα τοῦ ἡλίου, above (i. e. sur- 
passing) the brightness of the sun, Acts xxvi. 13; more 
(to a greater degree) than, φιλεῖν twa ὑπέρ τινα, Mt. 
x. 87 (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Fritzsche ad 
loc.) ; beyond, 1 Co. iv. 6; 2 Co. xii. 6; ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε, 
beyond what ye are able, beyond your strength, 1 Co. 
x. 18 [cf. W. 590 (549)]; also ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, 2 Co. i. 8; 
opp. to κατὰ δύναμιν (as in Hom. Il. 3, 59 κατ᾽ αἶσαν, οὐδ᾽ 
ὑπὲρ αἶσαν, cf. 6, 487; 17,321. 327), 2 Co. viii. 3 (where 
L'TTr WH παρὰ δύναμιν). b. with words imply- 
ing comparison: προκόπτειν, Gal. i. 14; of the measure 
beyond which one is reduced, ἡττᾶσθαι, 2 Co. xii. 13 [W. 
8 49 e.], (πλεονάζω, 1 Esdr. viii. 72; περισσεύω, 1 Mace. 
ii. 30; ὑπερβάλλω, Sir. xxv. 11); after comparatives 
i. q. than, Lk. xvi. 8; Heb. iv. 12, (Judg. xi. 25 ; 1 K. xix. 
4; Sir. xxx. 17); cf. W. $35, 2; [B. $147, 21]. c. 
ὑπέρ is used adverbially; as, ὑπὲρ ἐγώ [L vmepeyó (cf. W. 
46 (45)), WH ὕπερ ἐγώ (cf. W. $14, 2 Note) ], much more 
(or in a much greater degree) I, 2 Co. xi. 23; cf. Kypke 
ad loe.; W.423 (894). [For ὑπὲρ λίαν see ὑπερλίαν.] 

III. In Composition ὑπέρ denotes 1. over, above, 
beyond: ὑπεράνω, ὑπερέκεινα, ὑπερεκτείνω. 2. excess 
of measure, more than: ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ, ὑπερνικάω. 8. 
aid, for; in defence of: ὑπερεντυγχάνω. Cf. Viger. ed. 
Hermann p. 668; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 351; [Elli- 
cott on Eph. iii. 20].* 

ὑπερ-αίρω: pres. mid. ὑπεραίρομαι ; (ὑπέρ and atpo); 
to lift or raise up over some thing; mid. to lift one's self 
up, be exalted, be haughty: 2 Co. xii. 7 [R.V. to be exalted 
overmuch] ; ἐπί τινα, above one, 2 Th. ii. 4; with a dat. 
incom. τινί, to carry one’s self haughtily to, behave inso- 
lently towards one, 2 Mace. v. 23; (very variously in 
prof. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Plato down).* 

ὑπέρακμος, -ov, (Vulg. superadultus) ; 1. beyond 
the axpn or bloom of life, past prime, (Plat. de rep. 5 p. 
460 e. Gp’ οὖν σοι ξυνδοκεῖ μέτριος χρόνος ἀκμῆς Ta εἴκοσιν 
ἔτη γυναικί, ἀνδρὶ δὲ τὰ τριάκοντα) : Eustath. 2. 
overripe, plump and ripe, (and so in greater danger of 
defilement): of a virgin [R. V. past the flower of her 
age], 1 Co. vii. 36.* 

ὑπερ-άνω, (ὑπέρ and ἄνω), adv., above: τινός [cf. W.$54, 
6], above a thing, — of place, Eph. iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5; 
of rank and power, Eph.i.21. (Sept.; [ Aristot. ], Polyb., 
Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ael, al., [W. $ 50, 7 Note 1; B. 
8 146, 4].)* 

ὑπερ-αυξάνω ; to increase beyond measure; to grow ex- 
ceedingly : 2 Th. i. 3. [Andoc., Galen, Dio Cass., al.]* 

ὑπερ-βαίνω; fr. Hom. down; to step over, go beyond ; 
metaph. to transgress: δίκην, νόμους, etc., often fr. Hdt. 
and Pind. down; absol. to overstep the proper limits i. e. 
to transgress, trespass, do wrong, sin: joined with ἅμαρ- 
τάνειν, Hom. Il. 9, 501; Plat. rep. 2 p. 366 a.; spec. of 
one who defrauds another in business, overreaches, 
(Luth. zu weit greifen), with kai πλεονεκτεῖν added, 1 Th. 
iv. 6 [but see πρᾶγμα, b.].* 

ὑπερβαλλόντως, (fr. the ptep. of the verb ὑπερβάλλω, 
as ὄντως fr. dv), above measure: 2 Co. xi. 23. (Job xv. 
11; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al.) * 


640 





ὑπερέχω 


ὑπερ-βάλλω ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. trans. to surpass 
in throwing; to throw over or beyond any thing. 2; 
intrans. to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel; ptep. ὑπερ- 
βάλλων, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. [in Eph. i. 19; iii. 
19] supereminens; (Aeschyl, Hdt., Eur., Isocr., Xen., 
Plat.,al.): 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 14; Eph. i. 19; ii. 7; with 
a gen. of the object surpassed (Aeschyl. Prom. 923; 
Plat. Gorg. p. 475 b. ; cf. Matthiae § 358, 2), ἡ ὑπερβάλ- 
λουσα τῆς γνώσεως ἀγάπη Χριστοῦ, the love of Christ which 
passeth knowledge, Eph. iii. 19 [cf. W. 346 (324) note ].* 

ὑπερ-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ὑπερβάλλω, q. v.), fr. Hdt. [8, 112, 4] 
and Thuc. down ; 1. prop. a throwing beyond. 2. 
metaph. superiority, excellence, pre-eminence, [R. V. ez- 
ceeding greatness] : with a gen. of the thing, 2 Co. iv. 7; 
xii. 7; καθ᾽ ὑπερβολήν, beyond measure, exceedingly, pre- 
eminently: Ro. vii. 135 1 Co. xii. 31 [cf. W. $54, 2 b. ; B. 
$125, 11 fin.]; 2 Co. i. 8; Gal. i. 13, (4 Macc. iii. 18; 
Soph. O. R. 1196; Isocr. p. 84 d. [i. e. πρὸς bid. 5]; Polyb. 
3, 92, 10; Diod. 2,16; 17, 47); καθ᾽ ὑπ. eis ὑπερβολήν, 
beyond all measure, [ R. V. more and more exceedingly), 
2 Co. iv. 17.* 

ὑπερ-εγώ [ Lchm.], i. q. ὑπὲρ ἐγώ (see ὑπέρ, II. 2 c.) : 2 
Co. xi. 23. Cf. W. 46 (45).* 

ὑπερ-εἴδον ; (see εἴδω) ; fr. Hdt. and Thue. down; to 
overlook, take no notice of, not attend to: ri, Acts xvii. 
30.* 

ὑπερ-έκεινα, (i. q. ὑπὲρ ἐκεῖνα, like ἐπέκεινα; i. q. ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα 
[W. $6, 11.]), beyond: τὰ ὑπ. τινος, the regions lying be- 
yond the country of one’s residence, 2 Co. x. 16 [cf. W. 
$54,6]. (Byzant. and eccles. writ.; ἐπέκεινα ῥήτορες 
λέγουσι . . . ὑπερέκεινα δὲ μόνον of σύρφακες, Thom. Mag. 
p. 336 [W. 463 (431)].) * 

ὑπερ-εκ-περισσοῦ, [ Rec. ὑπὲρ ἐκπερ. and in Eph. ὑπὲρ 
ἐκ mep.; see περισσός, 1], adv., (Vulg. [in Eph. iii. 20] 
superabundanter), superabundantly ; beyond measure ; 
exceedingly: 1 ΤῊ. v. 18 RG WH txt.; iii. 105 [exceed- 
ing abundantly foll. by ὑπέρ i. q.] far more than, Eph. iii. 
20 [B. § 132, 21]. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Dan. 
ii. 22 Ald., Compl. Cf. B. $ 146, 41." 

ὑπερ-εκ-περισσῶς, adv., beyond measure: 1 Th. v. 13 
LT Tr WH mrg. [R. V. exceeding highly]; see ἐκπερισ- 
σῶς. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11.)* 

ὑπερ-εκ-τείνω ; to extend beyond the prescribed bounds, 
stretch out beyond measure, stretch out overmuch: 2 Co. x. 
14 [ef. W. 474 (442)]. (Anth. 9, 643, 6 ace. to the 
emendation of Wm. Dind.; Greg. Naz., Eustath.) * 

ὑπερ-εκ-χύνω (-àvvo, LT Tr WH; see ἐκχέω, init.) ; to 
pour out beyond measure; pass. to overflow, run over, 
(Vulg. supereffluo) : Lk. vi. 38; Joel ii. 24 [ Alex., etc. ]. 
(Not found elsewhere.) * 

ὑπερ-εν-τυγχάνω ; to intercede for one: ὑπέρ twos [W. 
§ 52, 4, 17], Ro. viii. 26; on this pass. see πνεῦμα p. 522". 
(Eecl. writ.) * 

vmep-xo; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to have or 
hold over one (as τὴν χεῖρα, of a protector, with a gen. 
of the pers. protected; so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 
Joseph. antt. 6, 2, 2). 2. intrans. to stand out, rise 
above, overtop, (so prop. first in Hom. Il. 3, 210); met- 


ὑπερηφανία τ 


aph. a. to be above, be superior in rank, authority, 
power: βασιλεῖ ὡς ὑπερέχοντι, [A. V. as supreme], 1 Pet. 
li. 13; ἐξουσίαι ὑπερέχουσαι, of magistrates (A. V. higher 
powers), Ro. xiii. 1 (οἱ ὑπερέχοντες, substantively, the 
prominent men, rulers, Polyb. 28, 4, 9; 30,4, 17; of 
kings, Sap. vi. 6). b. to excel, to be superior: τινός, 
better than [cf. B. $132, 22], Phil. ii. 3 (Sir. xxxvi. 7; 
Xen. venat. 1, 11; Plat. Menex. p. 237 d.; Dem. p. 689, 
10; Diod. 17, 77); to surpass: twa or τί [cf. B. $130, 
4], Phil. iv. 7; τὸ ὑπερέχον, subst. the excellency, sur- 
passing worth [cf. W. $34, 2], Phil. iii. 8.* 

ὑπερηφανία, -as, ἡ, (ὑπερήφανος, q. v-), pride, haughti- 
ness, arrogance, the characteristic of one who, with a 
swollen estimate of his own powers or merits, looks 
down on others and even treats them with insolence 
and contempt: Mk. vii. 22. (From Xen. and Plat. down; 
Sept. for M8] and 115} ; often in the Ὁ. T. Apocr.) * 

ὑπερήφανος, -ov, (Ir. ὑπέρ and φαίνομαι, with the con- 
nective [or Epie extension (cf. Curtius $ 392)]n; cf. 
ὑπερη φερής, Susy λεγής, ταν Aeyns, evn yerns), fr. Hes. 
down ; 1. showing one’s self above others, overtop- 
ping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent, (Plat., Plut., 
al.). 2. especially in a bad sense, with an over- 
weening estimate of one’s means or merits, despising others 
or even treating them with contempt, haughty, (cf. Westcott, 
Epp. of St. John, p. 64°]: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2; opp. 
to ταπεινοί, Jas. iv.6; 1 Pet. v. 5, (in these two pass. 
after Prov. iii. 34); with διανοίᾳ καρδίας added, Lk. i. 51. 
(Sept. for ^i, D^, 783, etc.; often in the O. T. Apocr.) 
[See T'rench, Syn. $ xxix.]* 

ὑπερλίαν (formed like ὑπεράγαν, vmépev), and written 
separately ὑπὲρ λίαν (so R Tr [cf. W. $50, 7 Note; B. 
$146, 4]), over much; pre-eminently : ot ὑπερλίαν ἀπόστο- 
λοι, the most eminent apostles, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11.* 

ὑπερ-νικάω, -@; (Cyprian supervinco); to be more than 
a conqueror, to gain a surpassing victory: Ro. viii. 37. 
(Leon. tactic. 14, 25 νικᾷ x. μὴ ὑπερνικᾷ ; Socrat. h. e. 3, 
21 νικᾶν καλόν, ὑπερνικᾶν δὲ ἐπίφθονον. Found in other 
eccl writ. Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 15, uses ὑπερ εκ νικᾶν.) * 

ὑπέρ-ογκος, -ov, (ὑπέρ, and ὄγκος a swelline), over- 
swollen; metaph. immoderate, extravagant: λαλεῖν, φθέγ- 
γεσθαι, ὑπέρογκα, [A.V. great swelling words] expressive 
of arrogance, Jude 16; 2 Pet. ii. 18; with ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν 
added, Dan. xi. 36 Theodot., cf. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26. 
(Xen., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael, Arr.) * 

ὑπεροχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ὑπέροχος, and this fr. ózepéxo, q. v.), 
prop. elevation, pre-eminence, superiority, (prop. in Polyb., 
Plut., al.); metaph. excellence (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., 
Joseph., Plut., al.) : of ἐν ὕπερ. sc. ὄντες, [R. V. those that 
are in high place], of magistrates, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (ἐν ὕπερ. 
κεῖσθαι, to have great honor and authority, 2 Mace. iii. 
11) ; καθ᾽ ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας, [ A.V. with excellency 
of speech or of wisdom i. 6.1 with distinguished elo- 
quence or wisdom, 1 Co. ii. 1.* 

ὑπερ-περισσεύω: 1 aor. ὑπερεπερίσσευσα; Pres. pass. 
ὑπερπερισσεύομαι; (Vulg. superabundo); to abound be- 
yond measure, abound exceedingly : Ro. v. 20; pass. (see 
περισσεύω, 2), to overflow, to enjoy abundantly: with a 

41 


641 





ὑπηρέτης 


dat. of the thing, 2 Co. vii. 4. (Moschion de pass. mulier. 
p. 6, ed. Dewez; Byzant. writ.) * 

ὑπερ-περισσῶς, adv., beyond measure, exceedingly: Mk. 
vii. 37. Scarcely found elsewhere.* 

ὑπερ-πλεονάζω: 1 aor. vmepemAeóvaca; (Vulg. super- 
abundo) ; to be exceedingly abundant: 1'Tim. i. 14 (τὸν 
ὑπερπλεονάζοντα ἀέρα, Heron. spirit. p. 165, 40; several 
times also in 666]. writ. [ὑπερπλεονάζει absol. overflows, 
Herm. mand. 5, 2, 5]; to possess in excess, ἐὰν ὑπερπλεο- 
νάσῃ 6 ἄνθρωπος, ἐξαμαρτάνει, Ps. Sal. ν. 19).* 

ὑπερτυψόω, -@: 1 aor. ὑπερύψωσα; (Ambros. super- 
exalto); metaph. a. to exalt to the highest rank and 
power, raise to supreme majesty: τινά, Phil. ii. 9; pass. 
Ps. xcvi. (xcvii.) 9. b. to extol most highly: Song of 
the Three ete. 28 sqq. ; Dan. iii. (iv.) 34 Theodot. c. 
pass. to be lifted up with pride, exalted beyond measures; to 
carry one’s self loftily: Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 35. (Eccl. 
and Byzant. writ.) * 

ὑπερ-φρονέω, -@; (ὑπέρφρων) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; to think more highly of one's self than is proper : 
Ro. xii. 3.* 

ὑπερῷον, -ov, τό, (fr. ὑπερῷος or ὑπερώϊος, ‘upper,’ and 
this fr. ὑπέρ; like πατρώϊος, πατρῷος, fr. πατήρ; [cf. W. 
96 (91)]), in the Grk. writ. (often in Hom.) the Aighest 
part of the house, the upper rooms or story where the wo- 
men resided; in bibl. Grk. (Sept. for tm5y), a room in 
the upper part of a house, sometimes built upon the flat 
roof of the house (2 K. xxiii. 12), whither Orientals 
were wont to retire in order to sup, meditate, pray, 
etc. ; [ R. V. upper chamber; cf. B. D. s. v. House; McC. 
and S.s. v.]: Acts i. 13; ix. 37, 39; xx. 8, (Joseph. vit. 
30).* 

ὑπ-έχω : prop. to hold under, to put under, place under- 
neath; as τὴν χεῖρα. Hom. Il. 7,188; Dem., Plat., al.; 
metaph. to sustain, undergo: δίκην, to suffer punishment, 
Jude 7 (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Soph. down ; also 
δίκας, κρίσιν, τιμωρίαν, etc.; ζημίαν, Eurip. Ion 1308; 2 
Macc. iv. 48).* 

ὑπήκοος, -ov, (ἀκοή ; see ὑπακούω, 2), fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down, giving ear, obedient: Phil. ii. 8; with dat. 
of the pers. Acts vii. 39; eis πάντα, 2 Co. ii. 9.* 

ὑπηρετέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ὑπηρέτησα;: fr. Hdt. down; to be 
ὑπηρέτης (4: v-), prop. a. to act as rower, to row, 
(Diod., Ael.). b. to minister, render service: τινί, 
Acts xiii. 36; xx. 34; xxiv. 23.* 

ὑπηρέτης, -ov, 6, (fr. ὑπό, and ἐρέτης fr. ἐρέσσω to row), 
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. prop. an under 
rower, subordinate rower. b. any one who serves with 
his hands; a servant; in the N. T. of the officers and 
attendants of magistrates as — of the officer who exe- 
cutes penalties, Mt. v. 25; of the attendants of a king, 
οἱ ὑπ. of ἐμοί, my servants, retinue, the soldiers I should 
have if I were a king, Jn. xviii. 36; of the servants or 
officers of the Sanhedrin, Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54, 65; 
Jn. vii. 32, 45 sq. ; xvili. 3, 12, 22; xix.6; Acts v. 22, 26; 
joined with δοῦλος (Plat. polit. p. 289 c.), Jn. xviii. 18 ; 
of the attendant of a synagogue, Lk. iv. 20; of any one 
ministering or rendering service, Acts xiii. 5. C. any 


“Ἄ 
ὕπνος 


one who aids another in any work; an assistant: of a 
preacher of the gospel [A. V. minister, q. v. in B. D.], 
Acts xxvi. 16; ὑπηρέται λόγου, Lk. i. 2; Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. 
iv. 1. [SYN. see διάκονος, fin. ] * 

ὕπνος, -ov, ὁ, [i. 6. σύπνος, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus; 
Curtius $391], fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 5332, sleep: prop., 
Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; Jn. xi. 13; Acts xx. 9; metaph. 
ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι (see éyeipo, 1), Ro. xiii. 11.* 

ὑπό (i.e. Lat. sub [Curtius $ 393]), prep., under, in 
prof. auth. used with the gen. dat. and ace., but in the 
N. T. with the gen. and ace. only. [On the use and 
the omission of elision with it before words beginning 
with a vowel, see WH. App. p. 146°; Tdf. Proleg. p. iv. 
(addenda et emendanda).] 

I. with the GExrTIVE (cf. W. 364 (342), 368 sq. (346) ; 
B. $147, 29), it is used 1. prop. in a local sense, of 
situation or position under something higher, as ὑπὸ 
χθονός, often fr. Hom. down; ὁ ἐπὶ γῆς καὶ ὑπὸ γῆς 
χρυσός, Plat. lege. 5 p. 728 a.; hence 2. metaph. 
of the efficient cause, as that under the power of 
which an event is conceived of as being; here the Lat. 
uses a or ab, and the Eng. by; thus a. after pas- 
sive verbs,— with the gen. of a person: Mt. i. 22; ii. 
15sq.; Mk.i.5;ii.3; [viii. 31 L T Tr WH]; Lk.ii. 18; 
[vi.18 Rec.]; Jn.x. 14 RG; xiv. 21; Aectsiv.11; xv. 
4; [xxii. 30 LT Tr WH]; Rom. xv. 15[R GL]; 1 Co. 
1.11; 2C0.1.4, 16; Gal.i.11; Eph.ii. 11; Phil. iii. 12; 
1 Th.i.4; 2 Th.ii. 13; Heb. iii.4, and in many other 
pass.; φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς μεγαλοπρεποῦς δόξης, 
when a voice was brought by the majestic glory [cf. R. V. 
mrg. 7, i.e. came down to him from God, 2 Pet. i. 17 ; after 
γίνομαι, to be done, effected, Lk. ix. ? RLinbr.; xiii. 17; 
xxiii. 8; Eph. v. 12; γίνεταί τινι ἐπιβουλή, Acts xx. 3; 
ἡ ἐπιτιμία ἡ ὑπὸ τῶν πλειόνων, sc. ἐπιτιμηθεῖσα, 2 Co. ii. 6 ; 
— with the gen. of a thing: Mt. viii. 24; xi. 7; xiv. 24; 
Lk. vii. 24; viii. 14 [see πορεύω, fin.]; Jn. viii. 9; Acts 
xxvii. 41; Ro.iii. 21; xii. 21; 1 Co. x. 29; 2 Co. v. 4; Eph. 
v.13; Col ii. 18; Jas.i.14; ii.9; iii.4,6; 2 Pet. ii. 7, 
17; Jude 12; Rev. vi. 13. b. with neuter verbs, 
and with active verbs which carry a passive meaning: 
πάσχειν ὑπό τινος, Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14, 
(Hom. Il. 11, 119; Thuc. 1, 77; Xen. symp. 1, 9; Cyr. 
6,1, 36; Hier. 7,8); ἀπολέσθαι, to perish, 1 Co. x. 9 sq. 
(very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 3, 32 on); ὑπομένειν 
τι, Heb. xii. 3 [cf. ἀντιλογία, 2] ; λαμβάνειν sc. πληγάς, to 
be beaten, 2 Co. xi. 24; after a term purely active, of 
a foree by which something is bidden to be done: dzo- 
κτεῖναι ev ῥομφαίᾳ καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς, by the wild 
beasts, Rev. vi. 8 [ef. ix. 18 Rec.], (so ὥλεσε θυμὸν ὑφ᾽ 
Ἕκτορος, Hom. Il. 17, 616; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1393; 
[B. 341 (293)]). 

IL. with the Accusative (W. § 49, k.) ; 1. of 
motion, in answer to the question ‘whither?’: to come 
ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην, Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6; ἐπισυνάγειν, Mt. 
xxii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; with verbs of putting or plac- 
ing: Mt. v. 15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. xi.33; 1 Co. xv. 25; of 
placing under or subjecting, Lk. vii.8; Ro. vii. 
14; xvi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 27; Gal. 111. 22; iv. 3; Eph. i. 22; 


642 


ὑπόδειγμα 


1 Pet. v. 6; ἔχω τινὰ ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτόν, Mt. viii. 9; Lk. vii. 8; 
γίνεσθαι, born under i. e. subject to, Gal. iv.4; of fall- 
ing, trop. Jas. v. 12 [where R* εἰς ὑπόκρισιν]. 2. 
of situation, position, tarrying: after κατασκη- 
νοῦν, Mk. iv. 32; κάθημαι, Jas. ii. 3; with the verb εἶναι 
(to and under) in a local or prop. sense, Jn. i. 48 (49); 
Acts iv. 12; Ro. iii. 13; 1 Co. x. 1; ἡ ὑπὸ (τὸν) οὐρανόν: 
se. χώρα, Lk. xvii. 24; πάσῃ κτίσει τῇ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. se. 
οὔσῃ, Col. i. 23; τὰ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν sc. ὄντα, Acts ii. 5, 
(τὰ ὑπὸ σελήνην, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. § 12); εἶναι ὑπό. 
τινα or τι, to be under, i. e. subject to the power of, any 
person or thing: Ro. iii. 9; vi. 14,15; 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. 
iii. 10, 25; iv. 2,21; v.18; 1 Tim. vi. 1; ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν: 
sc. àv, Mt. viii. 9 (where L WH br. read ὑπὸ ἐξ. τασσό- 
μενος [set under authority], so also cod. Sin.); of ὑπὸ: 
νόμον sc. ὄντες, 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. iv. 5, (ὑπὸ ἔκπληξιν εἶναι, 
Protey. Jac.18). τηρεῖν τινα, Jude 6; φρουρεῖσθαι, Gal. 
iii. 28. 3. of time, like the Lat. sub (cf. sub vespe- 
vam), i. q. about (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow p. 
2111°; [L. and S. s. v. C. ITI.]: ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον, about day- 
break, Acts v. 21. This prep. occurs with the accus. 
nowhere else in the N. T. The apostle John uses it only 
twice with the gen. (xiv. 21; 3 Jn. 12— three times, 
if x. 14 RG is counted [ef. viii. 97), and once with the 
aceus. (i. 48 (49)). 

III. in Composition ὑπό denotes 1. locality, 
under: ὑποκάτω, ὑποπόδιον, ὑπωπιάζω, imodéw; of the 
goal of motion, i. 6. ὑπό τι, as ὑποδέχομαι (under one’s 
roof); ὑπολαμβάνω (to receive by standing under); ὑπο- 
βάλλω, ὑποτίθημι ; trop. in expressions of subjection, 
compliance, etc., as ὑπακούω, ὑπακοή, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, 
ὕπανδρος, ὑπάγω, ὑπολείπω, ὑποχωρέω. 2. small in 
degree, slightly, as ὑποπνέω. 

ὑπο-βάλλω: 2 aor. ὑπέβαλον ; [fr. Hom. down]; d 
lo throw or put under. 2. to suggest to the mind. 3. 
to instruct privately, instigate, suborn: twa, Acts vi. 11 
(ὑπεβλήθησαν κατήγοροι, App. bell. civ. 1, 74; Myvurns 
τις ὑποβλητός, Joseph. b. j. 5, 10, 4).* 

ὑπογραμμός, -ov, ὁ, (ὑπογράφω), prop. 1. a writ- 
ing-copy, including all the letters of the alphabet, given 
to beginners as an aid in learning to draw them: Clem. 
Alex. strom. 5, 8, 50. Hence 2. an example set 
before one: 1 Pet. ii. 21 (2 Mace. ii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 16, 17; 33, 8; [Philo, fragm. vol. ii. 667 Mang. (vi. 
229 Richter)], and often in eccl. writ.; ὁ Παῦλος ὑπο- 
μονῆς γενόμενος μέγιστος ὑπογραμμύς, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
5, 7 [where see Bp. Lghtft. ]).* 

ὑπό-δειγμα, -ros, τό, (ὑποδείκνυμι, q. v.), a word rejected 
by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writ. used 
παράδειγμα; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12; [ Rutherford, New 
Phryn.p.62]. It is used by Xen. r. eq. 2, 2, and among 
subsequent writ. by Polyb., Philo, Joseph., App., Plut., 
Hdian., al.; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 554; a. 
a sign suggestive of anything, delineation of a thing, repre- 
sentation, figure, copy: joined with σκιά, Heb. viii. 5; 
with a gen. of the thing represented, Heb. ix. 23. b. 
an example: for imitation, διδόναι τινί, Jn. xiii. 15; κατα- 
λελοιπέναι, 2 Macc. vi. 28; with a gen. of the thing to 


€ , 
ὑποδείκνυμι 


be imitated, Jas. v. 10 (Sir. xliv. 16; 2 Mace. vi. 31); for 
warning: with a gen. of the thing to be shunned, τῆς ἀπει- 
θείας, Heb. iv. 11; with a gen. of the pers. to be warned, 
2 Pet. ii. 6 (τοὺς “Popaious . . . εἰς ὑπόδειγμα τῶν ἄλλων 
ἐθνῶν καταφλέξειν τὴν ἱερὰν πόλιν; Joseph. b. j. 2, 16, 4).* 

ὑπο-δείκνυμι : fut. ὑποδείξω; 1 aor. ὑπέδειξα; fr. Hdt. 
and Thue. down; Sept. several times for Ti; 3. 
prop. to show by placing under (i.e. before) the eyes: 
ὑπέδειξεν αὐτοῖς τὸν πλοῦτον αὐτοῦ, Esth. v. 11; add, Sir. 
xlix. 8; [al give ὑπό in this compound the force of 
*privily^; but cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 126]. 2. to 
show by words and arguments, i. e. to teach (for rYWn, 2 
Chr. xv. 3) [ A.V. freq. to warn]: τινί, foll. by an inf. of 
the thing, Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; to teach by the use of a 
figure, τινί, foll. by indir. dise., Lk. vi. 47 ; xii. 5; to show 
or teach by one's example, foll. by ὅτι, Acts xx. 35; to 
show i.e. make known (future things), foll. by indir. 
disc. Acts ix. 16.* 

ὑπο-δέχομαι (see ὑπό, IIT. 1): 1 aor. ὑπεδεξάμην ; pf. 
ὑποδέδεγμαι; fr. Hom. down; to receive as a guest: τινά, 
Lk. xix. 6; Acts xvii. 7; Jas. ii. 25; εἰς τὸν οἶκον, Lk. x. 
38. [Cf. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

ὑπο-δέω: 1 aor. ὑπέδησα ; 1 aor. mid. ὑπεδησάμην ; pt. 
pass. or mid. ptep. ὑποδεδημένος ; fr. Hdt. down (in 
Hom. with tmesis) ; to under-bind; mostly in the mid. 
to bind under one’s self, bind on; [ptep. shod]; with an 
ace. of the thing: σανδάλια, Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii. 8, (ὑπο- 
δήματα, Xen. mem. 1,6, 6; Plat. Gorg. p.490e.); with 
an acc. of the member of the body: τοὺς πόδας with ἐν 
ἑτοιμασίᾳ added, with readiness [see ἑτοιμασία, 2], Eph. 
vi. 15 (πόδα σανδάλῳ, σανδαλίοις, Leian. quom. hist. sit 
eonscrib. 22; Ael. v. h. 1, 18). [Cf. B. $135, 2.]* 

ὑπόδημα, -τος, τό, (ὑποδέω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
bya, what is bound under, a sandal, a sole fastened to 
the foot with thongs: Mt. iii. 11; x. 10; Mk. i. 7; Lk. 
iii. 16; x.4; xv.22; xxii. 35 ; Jn.i.27; with τῶν ποδῶν 
added, Acts vii. 33 ; xiii. 25, (ποδός, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 128 a.). 
[See cavdadtov. ] * 

ὑπόδικος, -ov, i. q. ὑπὸ δίκην av, under judgment, one who 
has lost his suit; with a dat. of the pers. debtor to one, 
owing satisfaction to: τῷ θεῷ, i. e. liable to punishment 
from God, Ro. iii. 19 [see Morison, Critical Exposition 
of Romans Third, p. 147 sq.]. (Aeschyl., Plat., Andoc., 
Lys., Isae., Dem., al.) * 

ὑπο-ζύγιος, -a, -ov, i. q. ὑπὸ ζυγὸν àv, under the yoke; 
neut. τὸ ὑπ. as subst. a beast of burden (so fr. Theogn. 
and Hdt. down); in bibl. Grk. (since the ass was the 
common animal used by the Orientals on journeys and 
for carrying burdens [cf. B. D. s. v. Ass, 17) spec. an ass: 
Mt. xxi. 5 (Zech. ix. 9) ; 2 Pet. ii. 16; Sept. for Won, 
an ass.* j 

ὑπο-ζώννυμι ; fr. Hdt. down; to under-gird : τὸ πλοῖον, 
to bind a ship together laterally with ὑποζώματα (Plat. 
de rep. 10 p. 616 c.), i. e. with girths or cables, to enable 
it to survive the force of waves and tempest, Acts xxvii. 
17 (where see Overbeck [or Hackett ; esp. Smith, Voyage 
and Shipwreck, etc., pp. 107 sq. 204 sqq. (ef. βοήθεια) ]). 
(Polyb. 27, 3, 3.)* 


648 


΄ , 
ὑπολήνιον 


ὑπο-κάτω, under, underneath: τινός [W. ὃ 54, 6; B. 
$146, 1], Mt. xxii.44 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 11; vii. 28; 
[xii. 36 WH]; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. i. 50 (61); Heb. ii. 8; 
Rev. v. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; vi.9; xii. 1. (Sept.; 
Plat. Aristot. Polyb., Diod., Plut, al.) [ΟΕ W. $ 50, 
7 N.1; B. $146, 4.]* 

ὑπο-κρίνομαι ; 1. to take up another’s statements 
in reference to what one has decided for one’s self (mid. 
κρίνομαι), i.e. to reply, answer, (Hom., Hdt., al.). 2. 
to make answer (speak) on the stage, i. e. to personate 
any one, play a part, (often so fr. Dem. down). Hence 
3. to simulate, feign, pretend, (fr. Dem. and Polyb. 
down): foll by an acc. with the inf. Lk. xx. 20. (2 
Mace. vi. 21, 24; 4 Macc. vi. 15; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 15; 
xxxvi (xxxiii) 2.) [Comp.: συν-υποκρίνομαι.} * 

ὑπό-κρισις, -ews, 7, (ὑποκρίνομαι, q.v.); 1. an 
answering; an answer (Hdt.). 2. the acting of a 
stage-player (Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal, Plut., Lcian., 
Artem., al.). 3. dissimulation, hypocrisy : Mt. xxiii. 
28; Mk. xii. 15; Lk. xii. 1; Gal. ii. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 2; 
[Jas. v. 12 Rec.*]; 1 Pet. ii. 1 [cf. B. $ 123, 2], (2 Mace. 
vi. 25; Polyb. 35, 2, 13; Lcian. am. 3; Aesop. fab. 106 
(284); [Philo, quis rer. div. haeres $ 8; de Josepho 
8147) 

ὑπο-κριτής, -o), 6, (ὑποκρίνομαι, q. v.) ; 1. one who 
answers, an interpreter, (Plat., Leian.). 2. an actor, 
stage-player, (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Ael., Hdian.). 3. 
in bibl. Grk. a dissembler, pretender, hypocrite: Mt. vi. 2, 
5,16; vii.5; xv. 7; xvi. 3 Rec.; xxii. 18; xxiii. 13 Rec., 
14 (13 Tdf.), 15, 23, 25, 27, 29; xxiv. 51; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. 
vi. 42; xi. 44 R Lin br.; xii. 56; xiii. 15. (Job xxxiv. 
30; xxxvi. 13, for 3M profane, impious.) [Mention is 
made of Heimsoeth, De voce ὑποκριτής comment. (Bonnae, 
1874, 4to.).]* 

ὑπολαμβάνω; 2 aor. ὑπέλαβον; 1. to take up 
(lit. under [cf. ὑπό, III. 1]) in order to raise, to bear on 
high, (Hdt. 1, 24) ; to take up and carry away (ὥσπερ νῆα 
ἄνεμοι ὑπολαβόντες. Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 17) : twa, Acts i. 
9 (see ὀφθαλμός, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, wel- 
come: twa, 3 Jn. SL T Tr WH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 3. 
to take up i. e. follow in speech, in order either to reply 
to or controvert or supplement what another has said 
(very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): ὑπολαβὼν 
εἶπεν, Lk. x. 30 (for 73, Job ii. 4; iv. 1; vi. 1; ix. 1; 
xpi, ete:)- 4. to take up in the mind, i. e. 
to assume, suppose: Acts ii. 15; foll by ὅτι (sc. πλεῖον 
ἀγαπήσει), Lk. vii. 43, (Job xxv. 3; Tob. vi. 18; Sap. 
xvii. 2; 3 Macc. iii. 8; 4 Macc. v. 17 (18) etc., and often 
in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat. down).* 

ὑπό-λειμμα [-λιμμα WH (see their App. p. 154; ef. I, 
t)], ros, τό, @ remnant (see κατάλειμμα) : Ro.ix.27 LT 
TrWH. (Sept.; Aristot., Theophr., Plut., Galen.) * 

ὑπο-λείπω: 1 aor. pass. ὑπελείφθην ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for Nw and vin; o leave behind [see ὑπό, 
III. 1]; pass. to be left behind, left remaining, Sept. for 
WU and ὙΠ) : used of a survivor, Ro. xi. 8." 

ὑπολήνιον, -ov, τό, (i. e. τὸ ὑπὸ τὴν ληνόν, cf. τὸ ὑπο- 
ζύγιον), a vessel placed under a press (and in the Orient 


L4 , 
ὑπολιμπάνω 


usually sunk in the earth) to receive the expressed juice 
of the grapes, a pit: [ὥρυξεν ὑπολήνιον, R. V. he digged a 
pit for the winepress], Mk. xii. 1; see ληνός [and B. D. 
s. v. Winepress].  (Demiopr. ap. Poll. 10 (29), 130; 
Geop. ; Sept. for 3p, Is. xvi. 10; Joel iii. 13 (iv. 18); 
Hagg. ii. 16; Zech. xiv. 10 Alex.) * 

ὑπο-λιμπάνω ; (λιμπάνω, less common form of the verb 
λείπων ; to leave, leave behind: 1 Pet.ii.21. (Themist.; 
eccl. and Byzant. writ.; to fail, Dion. Hal. 1, 23.)* 

ὑπο-μένω ; impf. ὑπέμενον ; fut. 2 pers. plur. ὑπομενεῖτε ; 
1 aor. ὑπέμεινα ; pf. ptep. ὑπομεμενηκώς ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for mp, nan, oms 1. to remain i.e. tarry 
behind: foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43; 
ἐκεῖ, Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain i. e. abide, not re- 
cede or flee; trop. a. to persevere: absol. and em- 
phat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one's 
faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure], Mt. x. 22; 
xxiv. 13; Mk. xiii. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 12 [cf. vs. 10 in b.]; 
Jas. v. 11; with τῇ θλίψει added, when trial assails 
[A. V. in tribulation (i. e. dat. of circumstances or condi- 
tion)], (cf. Kühner § 426, 3 [Jelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12 
(quite different is ὑπομένειν τῷ κυρίῳ, mo Onin, Lam. 
iii. 21,24; Mic. vii. 7; 2 K. vi. 33; "ἢ 11271, Ps. xxxii. 
(xxxiii.) 20, to cleave faithfully to [ A. V. wait for] the 
Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to 
Grk. usage [cf. W. $ 52, 16]). b. to endure, bear 
bravely and calmly: absol, ill-treatment, 1 Pet. ii. 20; 
eis παιδείαν, 1. e. εἰς τὸ παιδεύεσθαι, [ for or unto chasten- 
ing], Heb. xii. 7 ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH which 
is defended at length by Delitzsch ad loc. [and adopted 
by Riehm (Lehrbegriff u. s. w. p. 758 note), Alford, Moul- 
ton, al.], but successfully overthrown [?] by Fritzsche 
(De eonformatione N. Ti. critiea quam Lchm. edidit, 
p. 24 sqq.) [and rejected by the majority of commenta- 
tors (Bleek, Lünemann, Kurtz, al.)]. with an ace. of 
the thing, 1 Co. xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. x. 32; xii. 
2sq. 7 RG; Jas. i. 12.* 

ὑπο-μιμνήσκω; fut. ὑπομνήσω: 1 aor. inf. ὑπομνῆσαι; 1 
aor. pass. ὑπεμνήσθην:; fr. Hom. down; [cf. our *sug- 
gest’, see ἀνάμνησις]; 1. actively, to cause one to 
remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind: τί (to 
another), 2 Tim. ii. 14; τινά τι, Jn. xiv. 26 (Thue. 7, 
64; Xen. Hier. 1, 3; Plat., Isocr., Dem.) ; with implied 
censure, 3 Jn. 10; τινὰ περί twos, to put one in remem- 
brance, admonish, of something: 2 Pet. i. 12 (Plat. Phaedr. 
p. 275 d.) ; τινά, foll. by ὅτι, Jude 5 (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 8; 
Plat. de rep. 5 p. 452 c.; Ael.v.h.4, 17); τινά, foll. by 
an inf. (indicating what must be done), Tit. iii. 1 (Xen. 
hipparch. 8, 10). 2. passively, to be reminded, to 
remember: τινός, Lk. xxii. 61.* 

ὑπό-μνησις, -ews, 7. (ὑπομιμνήσκω), fr. Eur., Thuc., 
Plat. down; a. transitively, (Vulg. commonitio), 
a reminding (2 Mace. vi. 17): ἐν ὑπομνήσει, by putting 
you in remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1 [W. § 61, 3 
b.]. b. intrans. remembrance: with a gen. of the 
obj. 2 Tim. i. 5 [(R. V. having been reminded of etc.) ; 
al adhere to the trans. sense (see Ellicott, Huther, 
Holtzmann ad loc.). Syn. see ἀνάμνησις, fin.] * 


644 


ὑπόστασις 


ὑπο-μονή, -7s; ἡ, (ὑπομένω) ; 1. steadfastness, con- 
stancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in 
Jas. v. 11 sufferentia) ; in the N. T. the characteristic 
of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate pur- 
pose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the 
greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; xxi. 19; 
Ro. v. 3sq.; xv. 4 sq.; 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 12; Col. i. 11; 
2 Th.i.4; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim.iii.10; Tit.ii.2; Heb. 
x. 36; Jas. i. 3 sq.; v. 11; 2 Pet. i.6; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 19; 
xiii. 10; xiv. 12, (cf. 4 Macc. i. 11 ; ix. 8, 30; xv. 30 (27); 
xvii. 4, 12, 23); with a gen. of the thing persevered 
in [W. $30, 1 fin.]: τοῦ ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, Ro. ii. 7; τῆς ἐλπί- 
δος, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (136)]; δι᾿ ὑπομονῆς, [with pa- 
tience (cf. W. $ 51, 1 b.) i. e.] patiently and steadfastly, 
Ro. viii. 22; Heb. xii. 1. 2. a patient, steadfast 
waiting for; [al. question this sense in the New Test., 
and render the gen. by ‘characterizing’, ‘in respect to’, 
ete.]: Χριστοῦ (gen. of the obj.), the return of Christ 
from heaven, 2 Th. iii.5; Rev. i. 9 (where L T Tr WH 
ἐν Ἰησοῦ [which is in Jesus]); iii. 10, (cf. Ps. xxxviii. 
(xxxix.) 8; for mp»; expectation, hope, 2 Esdr. x. 2; 
Jer. xiv. 8; xvii. 13; for mpn, hope, Ps. [ix. 19]; Ixi. 
(Ixii.) 6; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 5; [Job xiv. 19]; for nonin, Prov. 
x. 28 Symm.; ὑπομένειν τινά, Xen. an. 4, 1, 21; App. b. 
civ. 5, 81). 3. a patient enduring, sustaining : τῶν 
παθημάτων, 2 Co. i. 6 (λύπης, Plat. defin. p. 412 c. ; θανά- 
του, Plut. Pelop. 1). [Svw. see μακροθυμία, fin.] * 

ὑπο-νοέω, -ῶ ; impf. ὑπενόουν ; fr. Hdt. down; to sup- 
pose, surmise: Acts xxv. 18; foll. by an acc. with the 
inf., Acts xiii. 25 [(cf. τίς, 4)]; xxvii. 27.* 

ὑπόνοια, -as, ἡ, (ὑπονοέω). fr. Thuc. down, a surmising : 
1 Tim. vi. 4.* 

vro-mto, a later form of ὑποπιέζω, to keep down, keep 
in subjection: 1 Co. ix. 27 Tdf. ed. 7 after the faulty 
reading of some Mss. for ὑπωπιάζω, q. v. Cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 461; [ Soph. Lex. s. v.; W.$5,1d. 5; see 
ἀμφιάζω." 

ὑπο-πλέω: 1 aor. ὑπέπλευσα ; (Vulg. subnavigo); to 
sail under, i. e. to sail close by, pass to the leeward of: 
with the ace. of the place, Acts xxvii. 4,7. (Dio Cass., 
Dio Chr., al.) * 

ὑπο-πνέω: 1 aor. ὑπέπνευσα; a. to blow under- 
neath (Aristot.). b. to blow softly [see ὑπό, III. 2]: 
Acts xxvii. 18." 

ὑποπόδιον, του, τό, (ὑπό and πούς), a footstool (Lat. 
suppedaneum): Mt. v. 35; Acts vii. 49 (fr. Is. Ixvi. 1); 
Jas. ii. 3; τιθέναι τινὰ trom. τῶν ποδῶν τινος, to make 
one the footstool of one’s feet, i.e. to subject, reduce un- 
der one’s power, (a metaph. taken from the practice 
of conquerors who placed their feet on the necks of their 
conquered enemies): Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 
[here WH ὑποκάτω τῶν π.}; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; 
Heb. i. 13; x. 13, after Ps. cix. (ex.) 2. (Leian., Athen., 
al.; Sept. for 079; [ef. W. 26].)* 

ὑπό-στασις, -ews, 7, (ὑφίστημι), a word very com. in 
Grk. auth., esp. fr. Aristot. on, in widely different 
senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve 
to illustrate N. T. usage; 1. a setting or placing 


ὑποστέλλω 


under; thing put under, substructure, foundation : Ps. | 


Ixviii. (Ixix.) 3; rod οἴκου, Ezek. xliii. 11; τοῦ τάφου, 
Diod. 1, 66. 2. that which has foundation, is firm; 
hence, a. that which has actual existence; a sub- 
stance, real being: τῶν ἐν ἀέρι φαντασμάτων τὰ μέν ἐστι 
κατ᾽ ἔμφασιν, τὰ δὲ καθ᾽ ὑπόστασιν, Aristot. de mundo, 4, 
19 p. 895", 30; φαντασίαν μὲν ἔχειν πλούτου, ὑπόστασιν 
δὲ μή, Artem. oneir. 3, 14; (ἡ αὐγὴ) ὑπόστασιν ἰδίαν οὐκ 
ἔχει, γεννᾶται δὲ ἐκ φλογός, Philo de incorruptibil. mundi 
$18; similarly in other writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s.v. 5; L. 
and S. s. v. III. 2]. b. the substantial quality, na- 
ture, of any pers. or thing: τοῦ θεοῦ [R. V. substance], 
Heb. i. 3 (Sap. xvi. 21; ἴδε. . . τίνος ὑποστάσεως ἢ Tivos 
εἴδους τυγχάνουσιν ods ἐρεῖτε καὶ νομίζετε θεούς, Epist. ad 
Diogn. 2,1; [cf. Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]). c. steadi- 
ness of mind, firmness, courage, resolution, (οἱ δὲ “Ῥόδιοι 
θεωροῦντες τὴν τῶν Βυζαντίνων ὑπόστασιν, Polyb. 4, 50, 
10; οὐχ οὕτω τὴν δύναμιν, ὡς τὴν ὑπόστασιν αὐτοῦ καὶ τόλ- 
pav καταπεπληγμένων τῶν ἐναντίων, id. 6, 55, 2; add, 
Diod. 16,32 sq.; Joseph. antt. 18, 1, 6) ; confidence, firm 
trust, assurance : 2 Co. ix. 4; xi. 17; Heb. iii. 14; xi. 1, 
(for mpn, Ruth i. 12; Ezek. xix. 5; for nomin, Ps. 
xxxviii. (xxxix.) 8). Cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. ii. 1 pp. 
60 sqq. 462 sqq.* 

ὑπο-στέλλω : impf. ὑπέστελλον ; 1 aor. mid. ὑπεστειλά- 
μην: 1. Act. to draw down, let down, lower : ἱστίον, 
Pind. Isthm. 2, 59; to withdraw, [draw back]: ἐμαυτόν, 
of a timid person, Gal. ii. 12 ([cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; 
often so in Polyb.). 2. Mid. to withdraw one’s self, 
i. e. to be timid, to cower, shrink : of those whofrom timid- 
ity hesitate to avow what they believe, Heb. x. 38 (fr. 
Habak. ii. 4 [cf. W. 523 (487)]); to be unwilling to utter 
from fear, to shrink from declaring, to conceal, dissemble : 
foll. by τοῦ with the inf. [W. 325 (305); B. 270 (232)], 
Acts xx. 27; οὐδέν, ibid. 20, (often so in Dem.; cf. 
Reiske, Index graecit. Dem. p. 774 sq.; Joseph. vit. § 54; 
bh311,:2071):* 

ὑπο-στολή, -ῆς. ἡ, (ὑποστέλλω, q. v-), prop. a withdraw- 
ing (Vulg. subtractio), [in a good sense, Plut. anim. an 
corp. aff. sint pej. $ 3 sub fin.]; the timidity of one stealthi- 
ly retreating: οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑποστολῆς (see εἰμί, IV. 1 ¢.), 
we have no part in shrinking back etc., we are free from 
the cowardice of etc. [ R. V. we are not of them that shrink 
back etc.], Heb. x. 39 (λάθρα rà πολλὰ kal μεθ᾽ ὑποστολῆς 
ἐκακούργησεν, Joseph. b. j. 2, 14, 2; ὑποστολὴν ποιοῦνται, 
antt. 16, 4, 3).* 

ὑπο-στρέφω ; impf. ὑπέστρεφον ; fut. ὑποστρέψω: 1 aor. 
ὑπέστρεψα; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3:0; 1. 
trans. to turn back, to turn about: as ἵππους, Hom. Il. 5, 
581. 2. intrans. to turn back i. e. to return : absol., 
Mk. xiv. 40 [here L WH πάλιν ἐλθών Tr ἐλθών] ; Lk. ii. 
20 (here Rec. ἐπιστρέφ.), 43; viii. 37,40; ix. 10; x. 17; 
xvii. 15; xix. 12; xxiii. 48, 56; Acts viii. 28; foll. by an 
inf. of purpose, Lk. xvii. 185 foll. by διά with a gen. of 
place, Acts xx. 3; εἰς with an ace. of place, Lk. i. 56; ii. 
39 [here T Tr mrg. WH ἐπιστρέφ.1, 45; iv. 14 ; vii. 10; 
viii. 39; xi. 24; xxiv. 33, 52; Actsi. 12; viii. 25; xiii. 
18; xiv. 21; xxi 6; xxn. 17; xxi 325 Gal. i. 17%) εἰς 


645 











ὑποφέρω 


διαφθοράν, Acts xiii. 34; ἀπό with a gen. of place, Lk. 
iv. 1; xxiv. 9 [WH br. dzoete.]; ἀπό with a gen. of the 
business, Heb. vii. 1; ἐκ with z gen. of place, Acts 
xii. 22; ἐκ τῆς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς, of those who after embrac- 


| ing Christianity apostatize, 2 Pet. ii. 21 T Tr WH, but 
| Lehm. (against the authorities) eis rà ὀπίσω ἀπὸ τῆς 


ete.* 

ὑπο-στρώννυμι and ὑποστρωννύω (later forms, found in 
Plut., Themist., Athen., al., for the earlier ὑποστορέννυμε 
and ὑποστόρνυμι) : impf. 3 pers. plur. ὑπεστρώννυον ; to 
strew, spread under: τί, Lk. xix. 36 (Is. lviii. 5).* 

ὑπο-ταγή, -ῆς, 7. 1. the act of subjecting (Dion. 
Hal.). 2. obedience, subjection: 2 Co. ix. 13 (on 
which see ὁμολογία, b.) ; Gal. 11. 5 ; 1 Tim. ii. 11; iii. 4.* 

ὑποτάσσω: 1 aor. ὑπέταξα; Pass., pf. ὑποτέταγμαι; 2 
aor. ὑπετάγην ; 2 fut. ὑποταγήσομαι ; pres. mid. ὑποτάσ- 
copa; to arrange under, to subordinate ; to subject, put in 
subjection: τινί τι or τινα, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Heb. ii.5; Phil. 
iii. 21; pass, Ro. viii. 20 [see διά, B. II. 1 b.]; 1 Co. 
xv. 27° sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22; τινὰ or τὶ ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας 
τινός, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Eph. i. 22; ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν τινος, 
Heb. ii. 8; mid. to subject one’s self, to obey; to submit 
to one’s control; to yield to one’s admonition or advice: 
absol, Ro. xiii. 5; 1 Co. xiv. 34 [cf. B. $151, 30]; τινί, 
Lk. ii. 51; x. 17, 20; Ro. viii. 7; xiii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 32; 
xvi. 16; Eph. v. 21 sq. [but in 22 G T WH txt. om. Tr 
mrg. br. ózorácg.], 24; Col. iii. 18; Tit. ii. 5, 9; iii. 1; 
1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 1,5; v. 5; 2 aor. pass. with mid. force, 
to obey [R. V. subject one's self, B. 52 (46)], Ro. x. 3; 
impv. obey, be subject: Jas. iv. 1; 1 Pet.ii.13; v. 5; 2 
fut. pass. Heb. xii. 9. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb., Plut., 
Arr., Hdian.) * 

ὑπο-τίθημι: 1 aor. ὑπέθηκα ; pres. mid. ptep. ὑποτιθέμε- 
vos; fr. Hom. down ; to place under (cf. ὑπό, III. 1) : ri, 
Ro. xvi. 4 (on which see rpáxzAos). Mid. metaph. to 
supply, suggest, (mid. from one's own resources) ; with a 
dat. of the pers. and ace. of the thing: ταῦτα, these in- 
structions, 1 Tim. iv. 6. (Often so in prof. auth. fr. 
Hom. down.) * 

ὑποτρέχω: 2 aor. ὑπέδραμον ; fr. Hom. down; prop. 
to run under; in N. T. once, viz. of navigators, to run 
past a place on the shore, and therefore in a higher posi- 
tion (see ὑποπλέω) : νησίον, Acts xxvii. 16 ΓΒ. V. run- 
ning under the lee of; ef. Hackett ad loc.].* 

ὑπο τύπωσις, -eos, 7), (ὑποτυπόω, to delineate, outline) ; 
a. an outline, sketch, brief and summary exposition, (Sext. 
Empir., Diog. Laért., al.). b. an example, pattern : 
πρὸς (mor. τῶν μελλόντων πιστεύειν κτλ. for an example 
of those who should hereafter believe, i.e. to show by 
the example of my conversion that the same grace which 
I had obtained would not be wanting also to those who 
should hereafter believe, 1 Tim. i. 16; the pattern 
placed before one to be held fast and copied, model: 
ὑγιαινόντων λόγων, 2 Tim. i. 18." 

ὑποφέρω; 1 aor. ómjveyka; 2 aor. inf. ὑπενεγκεῖν ; fr. 
Hom. down; to bear by being under, bear up (a thing 
placed on one's shoulders); trop. fo bear patiently, to en- 
dure, (often so fr. Xen. and Plat. down): τί, 1 Co. x. 


ὑποχωρέω 


13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet.ii.19. (Prov. vi.33; Ps. xviii. 
(Ixix.) 8; Mic. vii. 9; Job ii. 10.)* 

ὑπο-χωρέω, -&; 1 aor. ὑπεχώρησα; fr. Hom. down; to 
go back [see ὑπό, III. 1 fin.]; to withdraw: els τόπον épn- 
pov, Lk. ix. 10; with év and a dat. of the place (see ἐν, 
I. 7), Lk. v. 16 [cf. W. 50, 4 a.; B. 312 (268)].* 

ὑπωπιάζω; (fr. ὑπώπιον, compounded of ὑπό and dy, 
mos, which denotes a. that part of the face which 
is under the eyes; b. a blow in that part of the face; 
a black and blue spot, a bruise) ; prop. to beat black and 
blue, to smite so as to cause bruises and livid spots, (Aris- 
tot. rhet. 3, 11, 15 p. 1413*, 20; Plut. mor. p. 921 f.; Diog. 
Laért. 6, 89): τὸ σῶμα, like a boxer I buffet my body, 
handle it roughly, discipline it by hardships, 1 Co. ix. 27; 
metaph. (πόλεις ὑπωπιασμέναι, cities terribly scourged 
and afllieted by war, bearing the marks of devastation, 
Arstph. pax 541) to give one intolerable annoyance [* beat 
one out’, ‘wear one out], by entreaties [cf. τέλος, 1 a.], 
Lk. xviii. 5 (cf. aliquem. rogitando obtundat, Ter. Eun. 
8, 5, 6).* 

ts, ids, 6, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for 
Vit}, a swine: 2 Pet. ii. 22.* 

ὕσσωπος [on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144*; 
Lchm. (in both his edd.) spells it with one o in Jn. ], -ov, 
ἡ, (Hebr. ays, Ex. xii. 22; Num. xix. 6, 18, ete.), hyssop, 
a plant a bunch of which was used by the Hebrews in 
their ritual sprinklings: Heb. ix. 19; ὑσσώπῳ, i.q. 
καλάμῳ ὑσσώπου, Jn. xix. 29. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. 
Ysop; Arnold in Herzog xviii. p. 337sq.; Furrer in 
Schenkel v. 685 sq.; [Riehm p. 1771 sq.; Lów, Aram. 
Pflanzennamen, $93; Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 455 
sq.; B. D. s. v. (esp. Am. ed.) ].* 

ὑστερέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ὑστέρησα; pf. ὑστέρηκα; Pass. 
pres. ὑστεροῦμαι ; 1 aor. ptep. ὑστερηθείς; (ὕστερος); 1. 
Act. to be ὕστερος i. 6. behind ; i.e. a. to come late 
or too tardily (so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Heb. iv. 
1; to be left behind in the race and so fail to reach the 
goal, to fall short of the end; with ἀπό and the gen. in- 
dicating the end, metaph. fail to become a partaker : ἀπὸ 
τῆς χάριτος, Heb. xii. 15 [4]. render here fall back (i.e. 
away) from; cf. W.§ 30,6 b.; B. 322 (276) sq. cf. $132, 
5] (Eccl. vi. 2). b. to be inferior, in power, influ- 
ence, rank, 1 Co. xii. 24 (where L T Tr WH pass. tore- 
povuévo) ; in virtue, τί ἔτι ὑστερῶ ; in what am I still de- 
ficient [ A.V. what lack I yet (cf. B. $131, 10)], Mt. xix. 
20 (Sir. li. 24 ; tva γνῶ τί ὑστερῶ ἐγώ, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 
5; μηδ᾽ ἐν ἄλλῳ μηδενὶ μέρει ἀρετῆς ὑστεροῦντας, Plat. de 
rep. 6 p. 484 d.) ; μηδέν or οὐδέν foll. by a gen. (depend- 
ing on the idea of comparison contained in the verb [B. 
$132, 22]) of the person, to be inferior to [.A.V. to be be- 
hind] another in nothing, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11. e. 
to fail, be wanting, (Diose. 5, 86): Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.]; 
ἕν σοι [T WH Tr mrg. σε (cf. B. u. s.)] torepet, Mk. x. 
21. d. to be in want of, lack: with a gen. of the 
thing [W. $ 30,6], Lk. xxii. 35 (Joseph. antt.2,9,1). 2. 
Pass. to suffer want [W. 260 (244)]: Lk. xv. 14; 2 Co. 
xi.9 (8); Heb. xi. 37, (Sir. xi. 11) ; opp. to περισσεύειν, 
to abound, Phil. iv. 12; τινός, to be devoid [R.V. fall 


646 


j short] of, Ro. iii. 23 (Diod. 18, 71; Joseph. antt. 15, 6 





ὑψηλοφρονέω 


, 
7); ἕν τινι, to suffer want in any respect, 1 Co. i. 7, opp. 


to πλουτίζεσθαι ἔν τινι, ibid. 5; to lack (be inferior) in 
excellence, worth, opp. to περισσεύειν, [ A. V. to be the worse 
... the better], 1 Co. viii. S. [Cowr.: ἀφ-υστερέω. * 

ὑστέρημα, -ros, τό, (ὑστερέω) ; a. deficiency, that 
which is lacking: plur. with a gen. of the thing whose 
deficiency is to be filled up, Col. i. 24 (on which see 
ἀνταναπληρόω, and θλίψις sub fin.) ; 1 Th. iii. 10; τὸ bor. 
with a gen. [or its equiv.] of the pers., the absence of one, 
1 Co. xvi. 17 [ὑμ. being taken objectively (W. § 22, 
7; B. §132, 3) ; al. take dy. subjectively and render that 
which was lacking on your part]; τὸ ὑμῶν bor. τῆς πρός 
με λειτουργίας, your absence, owing to which something 
was lacking in the service conferred on me (by you), 
Phil. ii. 30. b. in reference to property and re- 
sources, poverty, want, destitution: Lk. xxi. 4; 2 Co. viii. 
14 (18); ix. 12; xi. 9, (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10; Judg. 
xviii. 10, etc. ; eccl. writ.).* 

ὑστέρησις, -ews, 7, (ὑστερέω), want, poverty: Mk. xii. 
44; καθ᾽ ὑστέρησιν, on account of want, Phil. iv. 11 [ef. 
κατά, 11. 3 e. y. p. 328" bot.]. (Eccl. writ.) * 

ὕστερος, -a, -ov, latter, later, coming after: ἐν ὑστέροις 
καιροῖς, 1 Tim. iv. 1; ὁ dor. i. q. the second, Mt. xxi. 31 
LTrWH, but cf. Fritzsche's and Meyer's crit. notes 
[esp. W.H. App.] ad loc. Neut. ὕστερον, fr. Hom. 
down, adverbially, afterward, after this, later, lastly, used 
alike of a shorter and of a longer period: Mt. iv. 2; xxi. 
29,82, 87; xxv. 11; xxvi 60; Mk. xvi 14; Lk. iv. 2 
Rec.; [xx. 32 L T Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 36; Heb. xii. 11; 
with a gen. after one, Mt. xxii. 27; Lk. xx. 32 [RG].* 

ὑφαίνω ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 118; to weave: Lk. 
xii. 27 T WH (rejected) mrg.* 

ὑφαντός, -i, -óv, (Upaive, q. v.), fr. Hom. down; woven: 
Jn. xix. 23. (For 398, Ex. xxxvi 30 (xxxix. 22); 
xxxvi. 35 (xxxix. 27); for wn, Ex. xxvi. 31, etc.) * 

ὑψηλός. -7, -óv, (ὕψε on high, ὕψος), [fr. Hom. down], 
high; lofty; a. prop. of place: ὄρος, Mt. iv. 8; 
xvii.1; Mk. ix.2; Lk. ἵν. ὃ RGLbr.; Rev. xxi. 10; τεῖχος, 
Rey. xxi. 12; neut. rà ὑψηλά (the heights of heaven; 
Sept. for njw, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 4; exii. (exiii.) 5; Is. 
xxxiii. 5; lvii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high; cf. B. $124, 
8.4.1, Heb.i.3; exalted on high: ὑψηλότερος τῶν οὐρανῶν, 
[made higher than the heavens], of Christ raised to the 
right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv. 10) ; pera 
βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ, with a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with 
signal power, Acts xiii. 17 (Sept. often ἐν βραχίονι ὑψηλῷ 
for 730) jYW3, as in Ex. vi. 6; Deut. v. 15). b. 
metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk. 
xvi. 15; ὑψηλὰ φρονεῖν, to set the mind on, to seek, high 
things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii. 
16; also Ro. xi. 20 L mrg. T Tr WH; 1 Tim. vi. 17 T 
WH mrg.; (Leian. Icaromen. 11, Hermot. 5).* 

ὑψηλο-φρονέω, -ὦ; (ὑψηλόφρων, and this fr. ὑψηλός 
and piv); to be high-minded, proud: Ro. xi. Ξ0[Β GL 
txt.]; 1 Tim. vi. 17 [R GL Tr WH txt.], (Schol. ad 
Pind. Pyth. 2, 91). In Grk. writ. μεγαλοφρονεῖν is more 
common.” 


ὕψιστος 


ὕψιστος, -, -ov, (superl. ; fr. ὕψι on high), in Grk. writ. 
mostly poetie, highest, most high ; a. of place: neut. 
cà ὕψιστα (Sept. for O17), the highest regions, i. e. 
heaven (see ὑψηλός, a.), Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 10; Lk. ii. 
14; xix. 38, (Job xvi. 19; Is. lvii. 15). b. of rank: 
of God, ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕψιστος, the most high God, Mk. v. 7; 
Lk. viii. 28; Acts xvi 17; Heb. vii. 1; [Gen. xiv. 18; 
Philo de leg. ad Gaium ὃ 23]; and simply ὁ ὕψιστος, the 
Most High, Acts vii. 48; and without the article (cf. B. 
§ 124, 8 b. note; [ WH. Intr. $ 416]), Lk. i. 32, 35, 76; 
vi. 35, and very often in Sir.; (Hebr. m», mo». ON, 
Troy ods, moy nim; Ζεὺς ὕψιστος, Pind. Nem. 1, 
90; 11, 2; Aeschyl. Eum. 28).* 

ὕψος, -ovs, τό, fr. Aeschyl and Hdt. down, Sept. for 
DID, MIP, 133, ete., height: prop. of measure, Eph. iii. 
18; Rey. xxi. 16; of place, heaven [ A.V. on high], Eph. 
iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; 
metaph. rank, high station: Jas.i. 9 (Job v. 11; 1 Macc. 
i 40; x. 24; ὕψος ἀρετῆς, Plut. Popl. 6).* 

tow, -ó; fut. ὑψώσω; 1 aor. ὕψωσα; Pass, 1 aor. 
ὑψώθην: 1 fut. ὑψωθήσομαι ; (ὕψος) ; [Batr. 81; Hip- 
poer., al.]; Sept. very often for pi», also for 522, Sw, 
513, ete. ; to lift up on high, to exalt, (Vulg. exalto) : τινά 
or τί, prop. of place, Jn. iii. 14^; used of the elevation 
of Jesus on the cross, Jn. iii. 14^; viii. 28; xii. 34; with ἐκ 
τῆς γῆς added, to remove from (lit. out of) the earth by 
crucifixion (ὑψοῦν twa foll. by ἐκ, Ps. ix. 14), Jn. xii. 32 
(the Evangelist himself interprets the word of the lift- 
ing up upon the cross, but a careful comparison of viii. 28 
and xii. 32 renders it probable that Jesus spoke of the 
heavenly exaltation which he was to attain by the cru- 
cifixion (cf. xii. 23 sqq., xiii. 31 sqq., Lk. xxiv. 26), and 
employed the Aramaic word O35, the ambiguity of which 
allowed it to be understood of the crucifixion ; cf. Bleek, 


647 





φαίνω 


Beitrage zur Evangelienkritik, p. 231 sq.; [the ‘lifting 
up’ includes death and the victory over death; the pas- 
sion itself is regarded as a glorification; cf. Westcott 
ad loc.]); τινὰ ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (opp. to καταβιβάζειν [or 
καταβαίνειν) ἕως adov), metaph. to raise to the very sum- 
mit of opulence and prosperity, pass., Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 
15, [al. understand exaltation in privilege as referred to 
in these pass. (see vs. 21 in Mt.)]; simply τινά, to exalt, 
to raise to dignity, honor, and happiness : Lk.i. 52 (where 
Opp. to ταπεινῶ) ; Acts xiii. 17; to that state of mind 
which ought to characterize a Christian, 2 Co. xi. 7; to 
raise the spirits by the blessings of salvation, Jas. iv. 10; 
1 Pet. v. 6; ἐμαυτόν, to exalt one’s self (with haughti- 
ness and empty pride), (opp. to razews), Mt. xxiii. 12; 
Lk. xiv. 11; xviii. 14;— in these same pass. ὑψωθήσεται 
occurs, he shall be raised to honor. By a union of the 
literal and the tropical senses God is said ὑψῶσαι Christ 
τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, Acts v. 31; pass. Acts ii. 33; the dative 
in this phrase, judged according to Greek usage, hardly 
bears any other meaning than with (by means of) his 
right hand (his power) [R. V. txt.]; but the context 
forbids it to denote anything except a! (to) the right hand 
of God [so R. V. mrg.]; hence the opinion of those 
has great probability who regard Peter's phrase as 
formed on the model of the Aramaean ros; cf. Bleek, 
Einl. in das N. T. ed. 1, p. 346 [but see W. 214 (201), 
215 (202); Meyer ad loc. Comp.: ózep-vy/óo.] * 

ὕψωμα, -ros, τό, (ὑψόω), thing elevated, height: prop. 
of space, opp. to βάθος, Ro. viii. 39 (rod ἀέρος, Philo de 
praem. et poen. $1; ὅταν ὕψωμα λάβῃ μέγιστον ὁ ἥλιος, 
Plut. mor. p. 782 d.) ; spec. elevated structure i. e. bar- 
rier, rampart, bulwark: 2 Co. x. 5.  [Sept. (in Jud. x. 8; 
xiii. 4, actively) ; cod. Ven. for ‘heave-offering’ in Lev. 
vii. 14, 32; Num. xviii. 24 sqq.] * 


o 


φάγος, -ov, ὁ, (φάγω), a voracious man, a glutton, (it 
is a subst. and differs fr. φαγός the adj.; cf. φυγός, 
φειδός; see Fritzsche on Mark p. 790 sqq., but cf. 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 28; W. $16, 3 c. a., [and 
§ 6, 1 1. ; esp. Chandler $ 230]): joined with οἰνοπότης, 
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.* 

φάγω, see ἐσθίω. 

φαιλόνης (so Reo.eres steph) or φελόνης (with most Mss. 
including cod. Sin., Rec.*ez*tz G LT Tr [WH (ef. their 
Intr. $ 404 and App. p. 151°; W. Dindorf in Steph. 
Thes. s. v. φαινόλης, col. 583)]), by metath. for the more 
com. φαινόλης (found in [Epict. 4, 8, 24]; Artem. oneir. 
2,3; 5,29; Pollux 7, (13) 61; Athen. 3 p. 97), -ov, 6, Lat. 


paenula, a travelling-cloak, used for protection against 
stormy weather: 2 Tim. iv. 13, where others errone- 
ously understand it to mean a case or receptacle for 


o 
books as even the Syriae renders it todo dus.” 


φαίνω ; [1 aor. act. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. φάνῃ, LT WH 
in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and dva$atvo ; W. 
$15 s. v.; B. 41 (35))]; Pass, pres. φαίνομαι; 2 aor. 
ἐφάνην ; 2 fut. φανήσομαι and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) φανοῦμαι 
(cf. Kühner $343 s. v. ; [Veitch s.v.]); (φάω) ; in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; to bring forth into the light, cause 
to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransie 
tively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly 


Φαλέκ 


(cf. L. and S. s. v. A. IT.)] express by the passive), Sept. 
for "WD: τὸ φῶς φαίνει, Jn. i. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 8; ὁ λύχνος, 
Jn. v. 35; 2 Pet. i. 19, (1 Mace. iv. 50; Gen. i. 17); ὁ 
ἥλιος, Rev. i. 16 ; ὁ A. καὶ ἡ σελήνη, Rev. xxi. 23; ἡ ἡμέρα, 
Rev. viii. 12 Rec. 2. Passive, a. lo shine, be 
bright or resplendent: ἡ ἡμέρα, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(see 
above); xviii. 23 RG Tr— but see Veitch s. v.; moreover, 
the foll. exx. should be brought under the next head; see 
Meyer on Phil. ii. 15]; ὡς φωστῆρες, Phil. ii. 15; ὁ ἀστήρ, 
Mt. ii. 7; ἡ ἀστραπή, Mt. xxiv. 27. b. to become 
evident, to be brought forth into light, come to view, appear : 
Mt. xxiv. 30; opp. to ἀφανίζεσθαι, Jas. iv. 14; of the 
appearance of angels: τινί, Mt. i. 20; ii. 13, 19, (2 Mace. 
iii. 33; x. 29; xi. 8; of God, Joseph. antt. 7, 7, 3; for 
nop3in ref. to the same, Num. xxiii. 3); of those re- 
stored to life, Lk. ix. 8; τινί, Mk. xvi. 9; of growing 
vegetation, fo come to light, Mt. xiii. 26; univ. to appear, 
be seen: φαινόμενα, Heb. xi. 3; impersonally, φαίνεται, 
it is seen, exposed to view: οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως ἐν τῷ 
Ἰσραήλ, never was it seen in such (i. e. so remarkable) 
a fashion — never was such a sight seen — in Israel, Mt. 
ix. 33. c. to meet the eyes, strike the sight, become 
clear or manifest, with a predicate nom. (be seen to be) 
[ef. B. $144, 15 a., 18]: Mt. vi. 16, 18; xxiii. 27sq.; 2 
Co. xiii. 7; ἵνα (sc. ἡ ἁμαρτία) φανῇ ἁμαρτία (equiv. to 
ápaproAós), Ro. vii. 13; with the dat. of the pers. added, 
Mt. vi. 5 (sc. προσευχόμενοι praying); to be seen, appear: 
ὁ ápaproAós ποῦ φανεῖται ; i.e. he will nowhere be seen, 
will perish, 1 Pet. iv. 18. d. to appear to the mind, 
seem to one's judgment or opinion: τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται, [ A.V. 
what think ye], Mk. xiv. 64 (1 Esdr. ii. 18 (21)) ; ἐφάνη- 
cav ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ ληροί, Lk. xxiv. 11 [W. $33 f. ; B. 
$133, 3. Syn. see δοκέω, fin.]* 

Φαλέκ [L txt. Tr WH Φάλεκ (but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 
104); L mrg. @ddey], 6, Peleg, (123 ‘ division’), son of 
Eber (Gen. x. 25): Lk. iii. 35.* —— 

avepds, -á, -óv, (φαίνομαι), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, ap- 
parent, inanifest, evident, known, (opp. to κρυπτός and 
ἀπόκρυφος) : Gal. v. 19; ἐν πᾶσιν, among all, 1 Tim. iv. 
15 Ree.; ἐν αὐτοῖς, in their minds, Ro. i. 19; τινί, dat. of 
the pers., manifest to one, of a pers. or thing that has 
become known, Acts iv. 16; vii. 13; [1 Tim. iv. 15 GL 
T TrWH]; φανερὸν γίνεσθαι: Mk. vi. 14; [Lk. viii. 
17]; 1 Co. iii. 13; xiv. 25; ἐν ὑμῖν, among you,1 Co. 
Xi. 19; ἐν with a dat. of the place, Phil. i. 13 [see 
πραιτώριον, 3]; φανερὸν ποιεῖν τινα, [ A. V. to make one 
known, i.e.] disclose who and what he is, Mt. xii. 16; 
Mk. iii. 12; εἰς φανερὸν ἐλθεῖν, to come to light, come to 
open view, Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; ἐν τῷ φανερῷ, in 
publie, openly (opp. to ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ), Mt. vi. 4 Rec., 6 
RG,[18 Rec.]; Ro.ii.28 [here A.V. outward, outward- 
ly]. manifest i.e. to be plainly recognized or known: 
foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the thing in (by) which, 1 Jn. 
iii. 10. [SvN. see δῆλος, fin.]* 

φανερόω, -à; fut. φανερώσω; 1 aor. ἐφανέρωσα; Pass., 
pres. φανεροῦμαι : pf. πεφανέρωμαι; 1 aor. ἐφανερώθην; 1 
fut. φανερωθήσομαι; (φανερός) ; to make manifest or visi- 
ble or known what has been hidden or unknown, to 


648 








pavepow 


manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or in any other 
way; a. with an ace. of the thing: pass., Mk. iv. 
22; Eph. v. 13; Rev. iii. 18; rà ἔργα τινός, pass. Jn. iii. 
21; with ἔν τινι added, Jn. ix. 3; τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, of 
Christ, Jn. ii. 115 se. τὴν γνῶσιν, 2 Co. xi. 6 L'T Tr WH; 
τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν, of God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; τὴν; 
ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ SC ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ, 2 Co. ii. 
14; τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, pass. 2 Co. vii. 
12; τὴν ζωὴν τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκί, 
pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 56.; χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ φανερωθεῖσα διὰ τῆς: 
ἐπιφανείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Tim. i. 10; pass. used of some- 
thing hitherto non-existent but now made actual and 
visible, realized, 1 Jn. iii. 2 (Germ. verwirklicht werden, 
in die Erscheinung treten); ὁδός, Heb. ix. 8 (ef. iter 
per Alpes patefieri volebat, Caes. bell. gall. 3,1); to 
bring to light or make manifest, by the advent, life, death,. 
resurrection, of Jesus Christ: τὸ μυστήριον, pass. Ro. 
Xvi. 26; with rots ἁγίοις added, Col. i. 26; to make 
known by teaching: τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις; 
Jn. xvii. 6; τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Col. ἵν. 4 ; τὸν λόγον 
αὐτοῦ, of God giving instruction through the preachers 
of the gospel, Tit. i. 3; τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῖς, of 
God teaching the Gentiles concerning himself by the 
works of nature, Ro. i. 19; pass. δικαιοσύνη θεοῦ (made 
known in the gospel [cf. δικαιοσύνη, 1 c. p. 149^ bot.]), 
Ro. iii. 21; pass. to become manifest, be made known: ἐν" 
τούτῳ sc. ὅτι ete. herein that, etc. [see οὗτος, I. 2b.], 1 Jn. 
iv. 9; τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xv. 4. b. with am 
ace. of the person, to expose to view, make manifest, show 
one: ἑαυτὸν τῷ κόσμῳ, of Christ coming forth from his 
retirement in Galilee and showing himself publicly at 
Jerusalem, Jn. vii. 4; τοῖς μαθηταῖς, of the risen Christ, 
Jn. xxi.1; pass. to be made manifest, to show one’s self, 
appear: ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. v. 105 
of Christ risen from the dead, τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, Jn. 
xxi. 14; Mk. xvi. 14; with ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ added, Mk. 
xvi. 12 (absol. φανερωθείς, Barn. ep. 15, 9); of Christ 
previously hidden from view in heaven but after his incar- 
nation made visible on earth as a man among men, Heb. 
ix. 26 (opp. to δεύτερον ὀφθήσεσθαι, of his future return 
from heaven, ibid. 28); 1 Pet. i. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 5, 8; with 
ἐν σαρκί added, 1 Tim. iii. 16, (Barn. ep. 5, 6; 6, 7. 9. 
14 ete.); ἡ ζωὴ (the life embodied in Christ; the centre 
and source of life) ἐφανερώθη, 1 Jn. i. 2; of Christ now 
hidden from sight in heaven but hereafter to return 
visibly, Col. iii. 4 (cf. 3); 1 Pet. v. 4; 1 Jn. ii. 28; [cf. 
Westcott on the Epp. of St. John p. 79 sq.]. of Chris- 
tians, who after the Saviour's return will be manifested 
ἐν δόξῃ [see δόξα, III. 4 b.], Col. iii. 4. Pass. to be- 
come known, to be plainly recognized, thoroughly under- 
stood: who and what one is, τινί, Jn. i. 31; what sort 
of person one is, τῷ θεῷ, 2 Co. v. 11; ἐν rais ovverdjoeow 
ὑμῶν, ibid.; φανεροῦμαι foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. iii. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 
19; ἐν παντὶ φανερωθέντες ἐν πᾶσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς, in every way 
made manifest (such as we are) among all men to you- 
ward, 2 Co. xi. 6 [but L T Tr WH give the act. pavepa- 
σαντες, we have made it manifest]. (Hdt., Dion. Hal... 
Dio Cass, Joseph.) [SyN. see ἀποκαλύπτω, fin.]* 


φανερῶς 


φανερῶς, (see φανερός), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], 
adv., manifestly ; i.e. a. plainly, clearly: ἰδεῖν τινα, 
Acts x. 3. b. openly: Mk. i. 45; opp. to ev κρυπτῷ, 
Jn. vii. 10.* 

φανέρωσις, -ews, 9, (pavepow), manifestation: with a 
gen. of the object, 1 Co. xii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 2. ([Aristot. 
de plantis 2, 1 and 9; also for D8 (Sept. δήλωσις) 
Lev. viii. 8 cod. Ven.] Eccles. writ.; Hesych.) [Svw. 
see ἀποκαλύπτω, fin. ] * 

φανός, -o), ὁ, (paivw), a torch. [A. V. lantern; Hesych. 
*Arrixol δὲ λυχνοῦκον ἐκάλουν ὃ ἡμεῖς νῦν φανόν ; cf. Phryn. 
p. 59 and Lob.’s note; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 131; 
Athen. 15 p. 699 d. sqq. and Casaubon's notes ch. xviii. 
see λαμπάς and reff.]: Jn. xviii. 3. (Arstph., Xen., 
Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

Φανουήλ, (59113 i. e. πρόσωπον θεοῦ), indecl., Phanuel, 
the father of Anna the prophetess: Lk. ii. 36.* 

φανταζω : (aive) ; pres. pass. ptep. φανταζόμενος ; fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to cause to appear, make visi- 
ble, expose to view, show : τὸ φανταζόμενον, the appearance, 
sight, Heb. xii. 21.* 

φαντασία, -as, 7, show, showy appearance, display, 
pomp: Acts xxv. 23. (Polyb. 15, 25, 5, ete.; [Diod. 
12, 83]; al.)* 

φάντασμα, -ros, τό, (φαντάζω), an appearance; spec. 
an apparition, spectre: Mt. xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 49. (Aes- 
chyl., Eur. Plat. Dion. Hal, Plut. al.; Sap. xvii. 14 
(15).)* 

φάραγξ, -ayyos, 7, a valley shut in by cliffs and preci- 
pices; a ravine: Lk. iii. 5. (Alem., Eur., Thuc., Dem., 
Polyb., al.; Sept.) * 

Φαραώ, (1173; in Joseph. antt. 2,13 and 14 Φαραώθης 
[also Φαραών, -ῶνος, 8, 6, 2, ete. ]), 6, [indecl. B. 15 (14)], 
Pharaoh, the common title of the ancient kings of Egypt 
(ὁ φαραὼν κατ᾽ Αἰγυπτίους βασιλέα σημαίνει, Joseph. antt. 
8, 6, 2 face. to Ebers (in Riehm s. v. Pharao) the name 
is only the Hebr. form of the Egyptian per-aa denoting 
(as even Horapollo 1, 62 testifies) great house, a current 
title of kings akin to the Turkish “ sublime porte”; al. 
al.; see BB. DD.s. v.]) : Acts vii. 13, 21; Ro. ix. 17; Heb. 
xi. 24; Φαραώ with βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου added in apposi- 
tion (as if Φαραώ were a proper name, as sometimes in 
the O. T.: op 39D nj?5, 1 K. ii. 1; ix. 16; 2 K. 
xvii. 7; Is. xxxvi. 6, etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 23), Acts vii. 10. 
Cf. Vaihinger in Herzog xi. p. 490 sqq.; [bers in Riehm 
ve EA] e 

Φαρές [on its accent see Tdf. Proleg. p. 1047, 6, ΟΞ 
a breach, Gen. xxxviii. 29), Perez [A. V. Phares], a son 
of Judah by Tamar his daughter-in-law: Mt. i. 3; Lk. 
iii. 39.* 

Φαρισαῖος, -ov, 6, α Pharisee, a member of the sect or 
party of the Pharisees (Syr. [POTES rabbinie v3, 


fr. 43 ‘to separate’, because deviating in their life from 
the general usage; Suidas s.v. quotes Cedrenus as fol- 
lows, Φαρισαῖοι, ot ἑρμηνευόμενοι ἀφωρισμένοι παρὰ τὸ pept- 
ζειν x. ἀφορίζειν ἑαυτοὺς τῶν ἄλλων ἁπάντων εἴς τε τὸ καθα- 
ρώτατον τοῦ βίου καὶ ἀκριβέστατον, καὶ εἰς τὰ τοῦ νόμου 


649 ᾿ 








φαρμακεύς 


ἐντάλματα). The first and feeble beginnings of this sect 
seem to be traceable to the ace immediately succeeding 
the return from exile. In addition to the books of the 
O. T. the Pharisees recognized in oral tradition (see 
παράδοσις, 2) a standard of belief and life (Joseph. antt. 
13,10, 6; Mt.xv.1; Mk. vii. 3). They sought for dis- 
tinction and praise by the observance of external rites 
and by the outward forms of piety, such as ablutions, 
fastings, prayers, and alms-giving; and, comparatively 
negligent of genuine piety, they prided themselves on 
their fancied good works. They held strenuously to a 
belief in the existence of good and evil angels, and to 
the expectation of a Messiah; and they cherished the 
hope that the dead, after a preliminary experience 
either of reward or of penalty in Hades, would be re- 
called to life by him and be requited each according to 
his individual deeds. In opposition to the usurped do- 
minion of the Herods and the rule of the Romans, they 
stoutly upheld the theocracy and their country’s cause, 
and possessed great influence with the common people. 
According to Josephus (antt. 17, 2, 4) they numbered 
more than 6000. They were bitter enemies of Jesus 
and his cause; and were in turn severely rebuked by 
him for their avarice, ambition, hollow reliance on out- 
ward works, and affectation of piety in order to gain 
notoriety: Mt. iii. 7; v. 20; vii. 29 Lehm.; ix. 11, 14, 
34; xii. 2, 14, 24, 38 Lehm. om. ; xv. 1, 12; xvi. 1,6, 11sq. ; 
xix. 3; xxi. 45; [xxii. 15, 34, 41]; xxiii. 2, 13-15, 23, 25— 
27,29; xxvii. 62; Mk. ii. 16,18, 24; iii. 6; vii. 1, 3, 55 
viii. 11, 155 [ix. 11 Lin br. T]; x. 2; xii.13; Lk. v. 17, 
21, 30, 33; vi. 2, 7; vii. 30, 36 sq. 39; xi. 37—39, 42—44 
[but in 44 G T Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 53; xii. 1; 
xiii. 81; xiv. 1,9; xv. 25 xvi. 14; xvii. 20; xviii. 10 sq.; 
xix. 39; Jn. i. 24; iii. 1; iv. 1; vii. 32, 45, 47 sq.; viii. 
3, 13; ix. [13], 15 sq. 40; xi. 46 sq. 57 ; xii. 19, 42; xviii. 
3; Acts v. 34; xv. 5; xxiii. 6-9; xxvi. 5; Phil. ii. 5. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Pharisiier; Reuss in Herzog xi. 
p- 496, and the works referred to above s. v. Saddouxatos,. 
fin. [esp. Sieffert's dissertation in Herzog ed. 2 (vol. xiii. 
p. 210 sqq.) and the copious reff. at its close]. An ad- 
mirable idea of the opinions and practices of the Phari- 
sees may be gathered also from Paret, Ueber d. Phari- 
süismus des Josephus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 
1856, No. 4, p. 809 sqq.* 

φαρμακεία [WH xia, so T (exe. in Gal. v. 20; cf. the: 
Proleg. p. 88) ; see I, c], -as, 9, (φαρμακεύω) ; a. the 
use or the administering of drugs (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 
17). b. poisoning (Plat., Polyb., al): Rev. ix. 21 
[here WH txt. Tr mrg. φαρμάκων ; many interpp. refer 
the pass. to next head]. c. sorcery, magical arts, 
often found in connection with idolatry and fostered by 
it: Gal v. 20 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] (Sap. xii. 4; 
xviii. 13; for ΞΟ. Is. xlvii. 9; for Ὁ"), Ex. vii. 22: 
viii. 18; for Dvn, Ex. vii. 11); trop. of the decep- 
tions and seductions of idolatry, Rev. xviii. 23.* 

φαρμακεύς, -éos, ὁ, (φάρμακον), one who prepares or 
uses magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Rec. 
(Soph., Plat., Joseph., Leian., Plut., al.) * 


φάρμακον 


[φάρμακον, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, a drug; an enchant- 
ment: Tr mrg. WH txt. in Rev. ix. 21 (R.V. sorceries), 
for φαρμακεία, q. v. (in b.).*] 

φαρμακός, -7, -óv, (φαρμάσσω [to use a φάρμακον), [fr. 
Arstph. down]; 1. pertaining to magical arts. 2. 
ὁ φαρμακός, subst., i. e. φαρμακεύς, q. v.: Rev. xxi. 8 GL 
T Tr WH; xxii. 15. (Sept. several times for 5725.) * 

φάσις, -ews, 7, (fr. paiva) ; 1. in the Attie ora- 
tors, the exposure of (informing against) those who have 
embezzled the property of the state, or violated the laws 
respecting the importation or exportation of merchandise, 
or defrauded their wards. 2. univ. a disclosure of 
secret crime (κοινῶς δὲ φάσεις ἐκαλοῦντο πᾶσαι ai μηνύσεις 
τῶν λανθανόντων ἀδικημάτων, Pollux 8, 6, 47): Susan. 55 
Theod.; of information by report [A. V. tidings], Acts 
παι, 91. 

φάσκω; impf. ἔφασκον; (PAQ, φημί) ; fr. Hom. down; 
to affirm, allege, to pretend or profess: foll. by the acc. 
with the inf., Acts xxiv. 9; xxv. 19; with the inf. and 
an ace. referring to the subject, Rev. ii. 2 Ree. ; foll. by 
an inf. with a subject nom., Ro. i. 22.* 

φάτνη, -ns, ἡ; [(πατέομαι to eat ; Vaniéek p. 445)], a 
crib, manger: Lk. ii. 7, 12, 16; xiii. 19. (From Hom. 
down; Sept. for 0328, Job xxxix. 9; Prov. xiv. 4; Is. 
i. 3; plur. for na^, Hab. iii. 17.) * 

φαῦλος, -7, -ov, (akin to Germ. faul and flaw), easy, 
slight, ordinary, mean, worthless, of no account; ethically, 
bad, wicked, base (Theogn. [?], Eur., Xen., Plat., Plut.) : 
Jas. iii. 16; φαῦλόν τι λέγειν περί τινος, Tit. 11. 8; φαῦλα 
πράσσειν, [ R.V. to do ill], Jn. iii. 20; rà $. πράσσειν opp. 
to rà ἀγαθὰ ποιεῖν, Jn. v. 29; φαῦλον (opp. to ἀγαθόν) 
πράσσειν, Ro. ix. 11 LT Tr WH; 2 Co. v. 10 T Tr txt. 
WH. [See Trench, Syn. $1xxxiv.]* 

φέγγος, -ovs, τό, (akin to φαίνειν), fr. Aeschyl. and 
Pind. down, light: of the moon, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 
24; of a candle or lamp, Lk. xi. 33 R G T Tr mrg. [cf. 
«ἀστραπή, ib. vs. 36]. (Joel ii. 10; iii. (iv.) 15 (20) ; Ezek. 
ἈΠ 5 5. Hass vin 65)* 

[Sxs.: αὐγή, φέγγος, φῶς: φῶς light—the general 
term, (of the light of a fire in Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xxii. 56); 
Qéyyos a more concrete and emphatic term (cf. Lk. xi. 33), the 
bright sunshine, the beam of light, ete.; αὐγή ἃ still stronger 
term, suggesting the fiery nature of the light ; used of shoot- 
ing, heating, rays. A Greek spoke of ἡλίου φῶς, φέγ- 
“γος, αὐγή; Or, φωτὸς φέγγος, αὐγή; or, φέγγους αὐγή; but 
these formulas are not reversible. Schmidt ch. 33; cf. 
Trench § xlvi.] 

φείδομαι ; fut. φείσομαι ; 1 aor. ἐφεισάμην ; depon. mid.; 
fr. Hom. down ; oe for Don, on, WN (to keep Back: 
to spare: absol 2 Co. xiii. 2; τινός, to spare one [W. 
§ 30, 10 d.; B. $132, 15], Acts xx. 29; Ro. viii. 32; xi. 
21; 1 Co. vii. 28; 2 Co. i. 23; 2 Pet. ii. 4 sq.; to abstain 
[ A. V. forbear], an inf. denoting the act abstained from 
being supplied from the context : καυχᾶσθαι, 2 Co. xii. 6 
(μὴ φείδου ---- se. διδάσκειν — el ἔχεις διδάσκειν, Xen. Cyr. 
1, 6, 35; with the inf. added, λέγειν κακά, Eur. Or. 393; 
Spacai τι τῶν τυραννικῶν, Plat. de rep. 9 p. 574 b.).* 

φειδομένως, (fr. the ptep. φειδόμενος), adv., sparingly : 
2 Co. ix. 6 (mildly, Plut. Alex. 25).* 


650 





φέρω 


φελόνης, see φαιλόνης. 

φέρω ; (allied to Germ. führen, fahren, [Eng. bear, etc. 
B bairn, ete. ete.; οἵ. Curtius $411]) ; impf. ἔφε- 
pov; Pass., pres. φέρομαι ; impf. ἐφερόμην; fut. act. οἴσω 
(Jn. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 26); 1 aor. ἤνεγκα, ptep. ἐνέγκας; 
2 aor. inf. ἐνεγκεῖν (Mt. vii. 18 T WH); 1 aor. pass. 
nvexOnv (2 Pet. i. 17, 21); [cf. WH. App. p. 164; B. 68 
(60); W.90 (85 54.) ; esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.]; fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. for #737 and Nw3; to bear, i.e. 1. to 
carry} a. to carry some burden: τὸν σταυρὸν ὄπι- 
σθέν τινος, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one's self (which the 
Grk. writ. express by the mid.), [ A. V. to bring]: ri, Lk. 
xxlv. 1; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing ; pass. 
like the Lat. feror i.q. moveor, to be conveyed or borne, 
with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof. 
auth. fr. Hom. down): of persons borne in a ship over 
the sea, [A. V. to be driven], Acts xxvii. 15, 17; of a 
gust of wind, 10 rush, Acts ii. 2 (cf. Jer. xviii. 14) ; φωνὴ 
ἐνεχθεῖσα, was brought, came, 2 Pet. i. 17, 18 (see ὑπό, I. 
2a.); of the mind, to be moved inwardly, prompted, 
ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου, 2 Pet. i. 21; φέρομαι emi τι [ R. V. 
press on], Heb. vi. 1. c. acc. to a less freq. use to 
bear up, i. e. uphold (keep from falling): φέρων rà πάντα 
τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, of God [the Son] the pre- 
server of the universe, Heb. i. 3 (so in the Targums and 
Rabbinical writ. 530 is often used, e. g. yooiy 53ib, of 
God ; οὐ δυνήσομαι ἐγὼ μόνος φέρειν τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον. Num. 
xi 14, cf. 11; add, Deut. i. 9, for Ni73; ὁ τὰ μὴ [μὲν] 
ὄντα φέρων καὶ τὰ πάντα γεννῶν, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 7; 
fr. native Grk. writ. we have φέρειν τὴν πόλιν, Plut. 
Lucull. 6; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 70 sq.). 2. 
lo bear i. e. endure (exx. without number in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. B. I. 3; [L. and S. s. v 
A. IIT. ]) : τὸν ὀνειδισμόν, Heb. xiii. 13; τί, to endure the 
rigor of a thing, Heb. xii. 20; τινά, to bear patiently 
one's conduct, or to spare one (abstain from punishing 
or destroying), Ro. ix. 22. 3. to bring, bring to, 
bring forward ; a. prop.: τινά, Acts v. 16; τί, Mk. 
[vi.27 RG T Tr WH]; x * ΤΠ ΕΠ; πὶ, ORCI s 

23; Acts iv. 84, 37; v.2; 2 Tim. iv. 13; τινὰ πρός τινα, 
Mk. i 1.32; ii. 3 [T Tr mrg. WH); ix. 17 [W. 278 (262)], 
19 sq.; [τινὰ ἐπί τινα, Lk. xii. 11 Tr mrg.]; τινά τινι, Mk. 
vii. 32; viii. 22; [τινὰ ἐπί τινος, Lk. v. 18]; τί τινι, Mk. 
xii. 15; Jn. ii. 8; with ὧδε added, Mt. xiv. 18 [here Tr 
mrg. br. Sd]; xvii. 17; τὶ πρός twa, Mk. xi. 7 [T Tr 
WH]; τὶ εἰς with an acc. of the place, Rev. xxi. 24, 26; 
Ti ἐπὶ πίνακι, Mt. xiv. 11; Mk. vi. [27 Lehm.], 28; ἀπό 
τινος (a part of [see ἀπό, I. 27), Jn. xxi. 10; φέρω τινὶ 
φαγεῖν, Jn. iv. 33. b. to move to, apply: τὸν δάκτυ- 
Xov, τὴν χεῖρα, ὧδε, eis γος an acc. of the place, [ A. V. 
reach], Jn. xx. 27. . φέρεται ὑμῖν Ts a thing is 
offered (lit. *is being ἘΠῚ ἢ to you: ἡ χάρις, 1 Pet. 
1: 118. c. to bring by announcing: διδαχήν, 2 Jn. 10 
(τινὶ ἀγγελίην, μῦθον, λόγον, φήμην, ete., in Hom., Pind., 
al.); to announce (see Passow s. v. p. 2231°; [L. and S. 
s. v. A. IV. 47) : θάνατον, Heb. ix. 16. d. to beari. e. 
bring forth, produce ; a. prop.: καρπόν, [Mt. vii. 18* 
T WH, 18 T]; Mk. iv. 8 [on ἐν ἑξήκοντα etc. WH txt., 


φεύγω 


see ἐν, I. 5 1.1; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2, 4 sq. 8, 16; (Hom. 
Od. 4, 229; Hes. opp.117; Xen. mem.2,1,28; al). f. 
to bring forward in speech: προφητεία, 2 Pet. i. 21 [ A. V. 
came]; κρίσιν κατά τινος, 2 Pet. ii. 11; [κατηγορίαν κατά 
τινος, Jn. xviii. 29 RG L Tr (but here T WH om. xara) ]; 
alr.ópara κατά Twos, Acts xxv. 7 αὶ G [but G om. κατά v. ]; 
αἰτίαν, ibid. 18 L T Tr WH; (πάσας αἰτίας, reasons, Dem. 
p. 1328, 22; ἀπολογισμούς, Polyb. 1, 32, 4). e. to 
lead, conduct, [ A. V. bring, carry, etc. (Germ. führen) ]: 
ἐπί with an acc. of the place, Mk. xv. 22; Acts xiv. 13; 
(ἐκεῖ) ὅπου, Jn. xxi. 18; metaph. a gate is said φέρειν 
(Lat. ferre [Eng. lead ]) εἰς τὴν πόλιν, Acts xii. 10 (ὁδὸς 
φ. eis ἱρόν, Hdt. 2, 122; διὰ τῆς ἀγορᾶς és τὸ πρὸς ἠῶ, id. 
2,138 [ef. L. and S. s. y. A. VIL]). [Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, 
δια-, eia, παρ-εισ-, ék-, €mi-, kara-, Tapa-, περι-; προ-; προσ-, 
συν-, vro-Dépe. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] * 

φεύγω ; fut. pevéouar; 2 aor. ἔφυγον ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for D1] and 13; to flee, i. e. a. to flee 
away, seek safety by flight: absol. Mt. viii. 33; xxvi. 56; 
Mk. v. 14 ; xiv. 50; Lk. viii. 34; Jn. x. 12, [13 (here G T 
‘Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br.thecl)]; Acts vii. 29; foll. 
by eis with an acc. of the place, Mt.ii.13; x. 23; [xxiv. 
16, here RG TWH mre. ἐπί]; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 21; 
(Jn. vi. 15 Tdf.]; Rev. xii. 6; foll. by ἐπί with an acc. 
of the place, Mt. xxiv. 16 [here L Tr WH txt. eis]; ἐκ 
τοῦ πλοίου, Acts xxvii. 30; foll. by ἀπό with a gen. of the 
place, in a purely local sense, to leave by fleeing, as in 
Grk. writ. (cf. W. 223 (210) ; [B. $131, 1]), Mk. xvi. 8; 
by ἀπό with a gen. of the pers. inspiring fear or threat- 
ening danger (after the Hebr.), Jn. x. 5; Jas. iv. 7; 
poetically, φεύξεται ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν ὁ θάνατος, death shall flee 
from them, opp. to ζητήσουσι θάνατον, Rev. ix. 6. b. 
metaph. to flee (to shun or avoid by flight) something ab- 
horrent, esp. vices: with an ace. of the thing, 1 Co. vi. 
18 (Sap. i. 5; 4 Mace. viii. 18) ; opp. to διώκειν, 1 Tim. vi. 
11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; Hebraistically foll. by ἀπό with a gen. 
of the thing, 1 Co. x. 14 (ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας, Sir. xxi. 2). ο. 
to be saved by flight, to escape safe out of danger: absol. 
Heb. xii. 25 RG; with an ace. of the thing, Heb. xi. 34; 
Hebraistically foll. by ἀπό with a gen. — of the thing, Mt. 
lii 7; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; of the pers. Mk. xiv. 52 [T 
Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. dw αὐτῶν]. d. poeti- 
cally, to flee away i. q. vanish: πᾶσα νῆσος ἔφυγε kai ὄρη 
ovx εὑρέθησαν, Rev. xvi. 20; with the Hebraistic addi- 
tion ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (as in Deut. xxviii. 7; Josh. vii. 
4; viii. 5; 2 Chr. x. 2, ete.; see πρόσωπον, 1 b. p. 551° 
mid.), Rev. xx. 11.  [Cowr. and Sv. : ἀποῴ. (empha- 
sizes the inner endeavor or aversion), Ota. (suggests 
the space which the flight must traverse), exp. (looks 
rather to the physical possibility), cara. (points to the 
place or the person where refuge is sought); Schmidt, 
Syn. ch. 109.] * 

bare (Lchm. Φήλιξ, [so Tr in Acts xxiv. 22 (by mis- 
take ?)]; cf. Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37; B. 13 
(12) ; [ Tdf. Proleg. p. 104; and reff. s. v. κήρυξ]), [lit. 
*happy', ‘fortunate ’], 4xos, 6, (Claudius [but in Tacit. 
hist. 5, 9 called Antonius]) Felix, the eleventh procura- 
tor of Judea, (apparently between A.p. 52 and 60). 


651 


Φῆστος 


He was ἃ freedman of Claudius and his mother Antonia, 
and the brother of Pallas, the powerful favorite of the 
emperor. He first married Drusilla [(?) see Dict. of 
Grk. and Rom. Biogr. s. v. 4], the granddaughter of 
Cleopatra and Antony; and afterwards Drusilla, the 
daughter of Herod Agrippa. Ace. to Tacitus “per 
omnem saevitiam ac libidinem jus regium servili in- 
genio exercuit", and by his cruelty and injustice he 
stimulated the rage of the turbulent Jews against the 
Roman rule. When he had retired from the province 
and come to Rome, the Jews of Czsarea accused him 
before the emperor, but through the intercession of his 
brother Pallas he was acquitted by Nero (cf. Tacit. 
hist. 5, 9, 5 sq.; annal. 12, 54; Suet. vit. Claudii, 28; 
Joseph. antt. 20, 7, 1 sq. and 8, 5 sq.; 7, 9; b. j. 2, 13): 
Acts xxiii. 24, 26; xxiv. 3, 22, 24 sq. 27; xxv. 14. Cf. 
Win. RWB.s. v.; Paret in Herzog iv. 354; [ V. Schmidt 
in Herzog ed. 2, iv. 518 sq.]; Overbeck in Schenkel ii. 
263sq.; Schürer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 303 sq. $19, 4; 
[Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xli. ].* 

φήμη. -ης, ἡ, (φημί). fame, report: Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 
14. [(From Hom. down.)]* 

$np(; impf. ἔφην ; (fr. φάω, to bring forth into the 
light [cf. Curtius $407]); hence [fr. Hom. down] prop. 
to make known one's thoughts, to declare; to say: ἔφη, he 
said (once on a time), Mt. xxvi. 61; historieal writers, 
in quoting the words of any one, prefix φησίν, ἔφη, (Lat. 
ait, inquit) : Lk. xxii. 58; Acts viii. 36, and often; 
φησίν and ἔφη are used of a person replying, Mt. xiii. 
29; Lk. vii. 40; Jn. i. 23; ix. 38; Acts vii. 2, etc.; of 
one who asks a question, Mt. xxvii. 23; Acts xvi. 30; 
xxi. 37; ἔφη μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ, Acts xxvi. 24; ἀποκριθεὶς 
ἔφη, Mt. viii. 8; φησίν is interjected into the recorded 
speech of another [cf. W. $61, 6], Mt. xiv.8; Acts xxv. 
5, 22; xxvi. 25; also ἔφη, Acts xxiii. 35; φησίν, like the 
Lat. ait, inquit, is employed esp. in the later Grk. usage 
with an indefinite subject (‘impersonally’) [ef. man sagt, 
on dit, they say] (inserted in a sentence containing the 
words of another [cf. W. u. 5.7): 2 Co. x. 10 where L 
Tr mrg. WH mre. φασίν (cf. Passow ii. p. 2238"; [L. 
and S. s. v. II. 1]; B. $129, 19; [W. $58, 9b. 8.; $64, 
3]. φησίν 56. ὁ θεός, 1 Co. vi. 16 [here Lehm. br. φησίν]; 
Heb. viii. 5; [W.522 (486 sq.)]. The constructions of 
the verb are the foll: ἔφη αὐτῷ, αὐτοῖς, he replied to 
him, to them, Mt. iv. 7; xiii. 28; xxi. 27, etc. ; Mk. [ix. 
12 T Trtxt. WH]; xiv. 29; Lk. vii. 44; Acts xxvi. 32; 
ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ ἔφη, Lk. xxiii. 3; ἔφη πρός τινα, Lk. xxii. 
70; Acts x. 28; xvi 37; xxvi. 1; with an acc. of the 
thing, 1 Co. x. 15, 19; foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. x. 19; τοῦτο etc. 
ὅτι, 1 Co. vii. 29 [Rec.be ez ; al. om. dre]; xv. 50; foll. 
by an ace. with inf, Ro. iii. 8. [On its alleged omission, 
see W.§64, 7a. Cowr.: σύμ-φημι.] 

φημίζω: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἐφημίσθη ; esp. freq. 
in the poets fr. Hesiod down; to spread a report, to 
disseminate by report: Mt. xxviii. 15 TWH mrg. (after 
codd. N A 33 ete.) for δὲαφημ- q. v.* 

ᾧῇστος, -ov, 6, (Porcius) Festus, a procurator of Judea, 
the successor of Felix [c. A.D. 60] (see Φῆλιξ [and reff., 


φθάνω 


esp. Schiirer p. 308 sq.]): Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 1, 4, 9, 
12-14, 22-24; xxvi. 24 sq. 32. (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 9 
and 9, 1; b. 7: 2, 14, 1.) * 

φθάνω: 1 aor. ἔφθασα [ W. ὃ 15 s. v.]; pf. ἔφθακα (1 Th. 
ii. 16 L txt. WH mrg.); fr. Hom. down; 1. to come 
before, precede, anticipate: ἡμεῖς οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν (see μή, 
IV. 2) τοὺς κοιμηθέντας, we shall not get the start of those 
who have fallen asleep, i.e. we shall not attain to the 
fellowship of Christ sooner than the dead, nor have pre- 
cedence in blessedness, 1 Th. iv. 15; ἔφθασεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς 
ἡ ὀργή, (God's penal) wrath came upon them unexpect- 
edly, 1 Th. ii. 16; ἔφθασεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the kingdom of God has come upon you sooner than you 
expected, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. xi. 20; [but all the preceding 
exx. except the first are referred by the majority of re- 
cent interpp. to the foll. head ; —a meaning esp. common 
when the verb is construed with prepositions]. 2: 
in the Alex. [and other later] writ. the idea of pri- 
ority disappears, to come to, arrive at: ets τι, Phil. iii. 
16; to reach, attain to, a thing, Ro. ix. 31; ἄχρι τινός, 
2 Co. x. 14; (τινί, to a thing, Tob. v. 19; ἕως τοῦ ovpa- 
νοῦ, Test. xii. Patr. p. 530 [i. e. test. Rub. 5 fin.]; ἡ pe- 
γαλωσύνη cov ἐμεγαλύνθη καὶ ἔφθασεν eis τὸν οὐρανόν, 
Dan. 4, 19 Theod. [ef. 17, 25; φθ. ἕως τῶν οὐρανῶν, 2 Chr. 
xxviii. 9; ἔφθασεν ὁ μὴν ὁ ἕβδομος, 2 Esdr. iii. 1; Philo 
de mund. opif. $1; de legg. alleg. iii. 76 ; de confus. linge. 
$29; Plut. apotheg. Lacon. $ 28; de Alex. s. virt. s. 
fort. orat. ii. 5. Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.; Geldart, Mod. 
Greek, p. 206; W.$2,1b.]).. [Comp.: προ-φθάνω. * 

φθαρτός, -7, -óv, (φθείρω), corruptible, perishable, (Vulg. 
corruptibilis) : 1 Co. ix. 25; 1 Pet. i. 23; ἄνθρωπος, i. e. 
mortal, opp. to ὁ ἄφθαρτος θεός, Ro. i. 23; οὐ φθαρτοῖς 
ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, not with corruptible things, with silver 
or gold, 1 Pet. i. 18 [W. $53, 5 fin.] (χρυσὸς x. ἄργυρος, 
οὐσίαι φθαρταί, Philo de cherub. $ 14; οὐκ ἄργυρον οὐδὲ 
χρυσόν τινα, ἣ ἄλλο τῶν ἐν ὕλαις $faprais, de congr. eru- 
dit. grat. § 20); neut. τὸ φθαρτόν, that which is liable 
to corruption, [τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο this corruptible (A.V.)], 
1 Co. xv. 53 sq. (Diod. 1, 6; Philo de legg. alleg. 2, 1; 
de cherub. § 2; [ Aristot.], Plut., Sext. Emp., al.; 2 Mace. 
vii. 16; Sap. ix. 15; xiv. 8.)* 

φθέγγομαι; 1 aor. ptep. φθεγξάμενος ; (φέγγος [but 
cf. Vanicek p. 1176], AQ); depon. mid.; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. to give out a sound, noise, or cry; used 
by the Grks. of any sort of sound or voice, whether of 
man or animal or inanimate object — as of thunder, mu- 
sical instruments, etc.; [φθέγγ. denotes sound in its re- 
lation to the hearer rather than to its cause; the 
μέγα λαλῶν is a braggart, the μέγα φθεγγόμενος is a lofty 
orator; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 581. 2. to proclaim; 
to speak, utter: Acts iv. 18; ὑπέρογκα, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (ἄδικα, 
Sap. i. 8); ὑποζύγιον ἄφωνον ἐν ἀνθρωπίνῃ φωνῇ φθεγξά- 
μενον, 2 Pet. ii. 16. [Cowr.: ἀπο-φθέγγομαι. * 

dc(po; fut. φθερῶ: 1 aor. ἔφθειρα; Pass., pres. φθείρο- 
μαι; 2 aor. ἐφθάρην ; 2 fut. φθαρήσομαι ; (akin to Germ. 
verderben); Sept. for nw; [fr. Hom. down]; to cor- 
rupt, to destroy: prop. τὸν ναὸν τοῦ θεοῦ (in the opinion 
of the Jews the temple was corrupted, or ‘destroyed’, 


652 





φθορά 


when any one defiled or in the slightest degree damaged 
anything in it, or if its guardians neglected their duties; 
cf. Deyling, Observy. sacrae, vol. ii. p. 505 sqq-), drop- 
ping the fig., to lead away a Christian church from that 
state of knowledge and holiness in which it ought to 
abide, 1 Co. iii. 17*; τινά, to punish with death, 1 Co. 
iii. 17°; i. q. to bring to want or beggary (cf. our ruin 
[A. V. corrupt]), 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. to be destroyed, to 
perish: ἔν τινι, by a thing, Jude 10; ἐν with a dat. denot- 
ing the condition, ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν, 2 Pet. ii. 12 LT Tr 
WH. inan ethical sense, to corrupt, deprave: φθείρου- 
σιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί (a saying of Menander [see 
ἦθος, 2], which seems to have passed into a proverb [see 
Wetstein ad loc.; Gataker, Advers. miscel. 1. i.c. 1 p. 
174 sq.]), 1 Co. xv. 33; the character of the inhabitants 
of the earth, Rev. xix. 2; pass. φθείρομαι ἀπό twos, to 
be so corrupted as to fall away from a thing [see ἀπό, 
1.3d.], 2 Co. xi. 3; φθειρόμενον κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυμίας, 
[R. V. wazeth corrupt ete.], Eph. iv. 22. [Comp.: δια-» 
κατα-φθείρω. * 

φθιν-οπωρινός, -7, -óv, (φθινόπωρον, late autumn; fr. 
φθίνω to wane, waste away, and ὀπώρα autumn), au- 
tumnal (Polyb. 4, 37, 2; Aristot. h. a. 5, 11; [Strab.], 
Plut.): δένδρα dwom. autumn trees, i. e. trees such as 
they are at the close of autumn, dry, leafless and with- 
out fruit, hence ἄκαρπα is added; used of unfruitful, 
worthless men, Jude 12 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. A Fresh Re- 
vision ete. p. 134 sq. ].* 

φθόγγος, -ov, 6, (φθέγγομαι, q. v.), a musical sound, 
whether vocal or instrumental (Sap. xix. 17): 1 Co. 
xiv. 7; Ro. x. 18, in this latter pass. Paul transfers 
what is said in Ps. xviii. (xix.) 5 to the voices of the 
preachers of the gospel. (Hom., Tragg., Xen., Plat., 
al.) * 

φθονέω, -d; (pOdvos); fr. Hom. down; to envy: τινί, 
one, Gal. v. 26 [here Ltxt. Tr mrg. WH mrg. read the 
accus.; see D. $132, 15 Rem.; W. $31, 1 b.].* 

φθόνος, -ov, ὁ, fr. [ Pind. and] Hdt. down, envy: Ro. i. 
29; Gal. v.21; 1'Tim.vi.4; Tit.1i.3; 1 Pet.ii. 1; da 
φθόνον. for envy, i.e. prompted by envy [see διά, B. II. 
2 b.], Mt. xxvii. 18; Mk. xv. 10; Phil. i. 15, (Dio Cass. 
44, 36) ; πρὸς φθόνον ἐπιποθεῖ τὸ πνεῦμα ὃ κατῴκησεν [but 
see κατοικίζω] ἐν ἡμῖν ; doth the Spirit which took up its 
abode within us (i. e. the Holy Spirit) long enviously? 
(see πρός, I. 3 g.), Jas. iv. 5 [but 7 (WH in second mrg.) 
drop the interrog.]; see on the pass. Grimm in the 
Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 934sqq. [Syn. see 
Gos, 2 fin.]* 

φθορά, -ás, 7, (φθείρων), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
1. corruption, destruction, perishing, (opp. to γένεσις, ori- 
gin, often in Plat., Aristot., Plut.; opp. to σωτηρία, Plat. 
Phileb. p. 35 e.; for nrw, Ps. cii. (ciii.) 4; Jon. ii. 7): 
Ro. viii. 21 (on which see δουλεία) ; 2 Pet. ii. 13" [some 
(cf. R. V. mrg.) take $6. here actively: eis φθοράν, to de- 
stroy]; ἐν φθορᾷ, in a state of corruption or decomposi- 
tion (of the body at burial 1 Co. xv. 42; by meton. 
that which is subject to corruption, what is perishable, opp. 
to apOapoia, ibid. 50; in the Christian sense, the loss of 


φιάλη 


salvation, eternal misery (which elsewhere is called ἀπώ- 
Aera), Col. ii. 22 (see ἀπόχρησις) ; opp. to ζωὴ αἰώνιος, 
Gal. vi. 8, cf. Schott ad loc. 
ethical sense, corruption i. e. moral decay: 2 Pet. i. 4; 


ii. 12” [some take the word here actively (R.V. txt. in | 


their destroying), al. refer it to 1 above],19; with τῆς 
ζωῆς added, Sap. xiv. 12.* 

φιάλη, -7s, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for po, a broad, 
shallow bowl, deep saucer [Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Patera; 
B. D. Am. ed.s. v. Vial]: Rev. v. 8; xv. 7; xvi. 1-4, 8, 
105 12, 17. ὅχντι" 1.) χει ΟἿΣ 

φιλ-άγαθος, -ov, (fr. φίλος and ἀγαθός), loving goodness : 
Tit.i.8. (Sap. vii. 22; Plut. praec. conjug. c. 17; also 
comp. Thes. c. Rom. c. 2; [φιλάγαθος οὐ φίλαυτος, Aris- 
tot. magn. mor. ii. 14 p. 121218; Polyb. 6, 53, 9; Philo 
de vit. Moys. ii. § 2].) * 

Φιλαδέλφεια [TWH -ia (cf. Tf. Proleg. p. 87), see 
I, c]. -as, ἡ, Philadelphia (now Alahshar, Allahschir, [or 
Ala-Shehr i. e. *'The White City " (Sayce)]), a city of 
Lydia in Asia Minor, situated near the eastern base 
of Mount Tmolus, founded and named by the Per- 
gamene king Attalus II. Philadelphus. After the death 
of king Attalus III. Philometor, B. C. 133, it together 
with his entire kingdom came by his will under the 
jurisdiction of the Romans: Rev. i. 11; iii. 7.* 

φιλαδελφία, -as, ἡ, (φιλάδελφος), the love of brothers 
(or sisters), brotherly love, (prop., 4 Mace. xiii. 22; xiv. 
1; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium $ 12]; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4; 
Leian. dial. deor. 26, 2; Plut. libell. περὶ φιλαδελφίας; 
{ef. Babrius 47, 15]) ; in the N. T. the love which Chris- 
tians cherish for each other as ‘brethren’ (see ἀδελφός, 
4); [love of the brethren] (Vulg. caritas or amor fra- 
ternitatis): Ro. xii. 10; 1 Th.iv.9; Heb. xiii. 1; 1 Pet. 
τ 29,» 9) Pets 1. 7, Che 1 πον 158 

φιλ-άδελφος, -ov, (φίλος and ἀδελφός), loving brother or 
sister (Soph., Plut., Anthol.) ; in a broader sense, loving 
one like a brother, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 17; loving one's fellow- 
countrymen, of an Israelite, 2 Mace. xv. 14; of a Chris- 
tian loving Christians, 1 Pet. iii. 8 [R.V. loving as breth- 
ren].* 

φίλανδρος, -ov, (φίλος and ἀνήρ), [fr. Aeschyl. down 
(in other senses) ], loving her husband: Tit. ii. 4 (φίλαν- 
Spor kal σώφρονες γυναῖκες, Plut. praec. conj. c. 28).* 

φιλανθρωπία, -as, 7, (φιλάνθρωπος), fr. Xen. and Plat. 
down, love of mankind, benevolence, (Vulg. humanitas), 
[R.V. kindness]: Acts xxviii. 2; Tit. ii.4. [Cf. Field, 
Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad ll. cc.]* 

φιλανθρώπως, adv., humanely, kindly: Acts xxvii. 3. 
(Isocr., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; 2 Maec. ix. 27.)* 

φιλαργυρία, -as, 7, (φιλάργυρος), love of money, avarice : 
1 Tim. vi. 10. (Isocr., Polyb., Ceb. tab. c. 23; Diod. 5, 
26; [Diog. Laért. 6, 50; Stob. flor. 10, 38; Philo de 
mut. nom. $ 40]; Plut., Leian., Hdian. 6, 9, 17 (8); 4 
Mace. i. 26.) [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xxiv.]* 

φιλ-άργυρος, -ov, (φίλος and ἄργυρος), loving money, 
avaricious: Lk. xvi. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Soph., Xen., 
Plat., al.) * 

φίλ-αυτος, -ov, (φίλος and αὐτός), loving one's self; too 


653 


| 


2. in the N. T. in an | 





φιλέω 


intent on one’s own interests, selfish: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aris- 
tot. [(cf. φιλάγαθος) ; rhet. 1, 11, 26 (where cf. Cope) 
ἀνάγκη πάντας φιλαύτους εἶναι ἢ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον] ; Philo, 
lege. alleg. 1, 15; Plut., [ Epict.], Leian., Sext. Emp.; 
διὰ τὸ φύσει πάντας εἶναι φιλαύτους, Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 1.) 
[C£. Trench, Syn. § xciii.]* 

φιλέω, -ὦ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. epider; 1 aor. ἐφίλησα; 
pf. πεφίληκα; (φίλος); fr. Hom. down; 1. to love; 
to be friendly to one, (Sept. several times for IAN) : teva, 
Mt. x. 37; Jn. v. 20 [here L mrg. ἀγαπᾷ]; xi. 3, 36 ; xv. 
19; xvi. 27; xx. 2; xxi. 15-17; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. iii. 
19; with ἐν πίστει added, with a love founded in and 
springing from faith, Tit. iii. 15; τί, to love i. e. delight 
in, long for, a thing: τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν, Mt. xxiii. 65 
ἀσπασμούς, Lk. xx. 465 τὴν ψυχήν, to be desirous of pre- 
serving one's life (opp. to μισεῖν, to hate it when it can- 
not be kept without denying Christ), Jn. xii. 25; with 
nouns denoting virtues or vices: τὸ ψεῦδος, Rev. xxii. 
15 (σοφίαν, Prov. xxix. 3; viii. 17); foll. by an inf., like 
the Lat. amo facere, to love to do, i. e. to do with pleasure : 
Mt. vi. 5 (Is.lvi.10; Pind. Nem. 1,15; Aeschyl. septem 
619; Agam. 763; Suppl. 769; Eur. Iph. Taur. 1198; 
Rhes. 394; Xen. hipparch. 7, 9; Ael. v. h. 14, 37). 2. 
to kiss: τινά, Mt. xxvi. 48; Mk. xiv. 44; Lk. xxii. 47, 
(often in the Grk. writ.; Sept. for pw3, Gen. xxvii. 26 
sq., and often). 3. As to the distinction between 
ἀγαπᾶν and φιλεῖν : the former, by virtue of its connec- 
tion with ἄγαμαι, properly denotes a love founded in ad- 
miration, veneration, esteem, like the Lat. diligere, to 
be kindly disposed to one, wish one well; but φιλεῖν de- 
notes an inclination prompted by sense and emotion, 
Lat. amare; 6 μή του δεόμενος οὐδέ τι ἀγαπῴη av: ὁ δὲ μὴ 
ἀγαπῴη [-πῶν (?)], οὐδ᾽ ἂν φιλοῖ, Plat. Lys. p. 215 b. ; 
ἐφιλήσατε αὐτὸν (Julius Caesar) ὡς πατέρα καὶ ἠγαπήσατε 
ὡς εὐεργέτην, Dio Cass. 44, 48; ut scires, eum a me 
non diligi solum, verum etiam amari, Cic. ad fam. 13, 
47; L. Clodius valde me diligit vel, ut ἐμφατικώτερον 
dicam, valde me amat, id. ad Brut. 1. Hence men are 
said ἀγαπᾶν God, not φιλεῖν ; and God is said ἀγαπῆσαι 
τὸν κόσμον (Jn. iii. 16), and φιλεῖν the disciples of Christ 
(Jn. xvi. 27); Christ bids us ἀγαπᾶν (not φιλεῖν) τοὺς 
ἐχθρούς (Mt. v. 44), because love as an emotion can- 
not be commanded, but only love as a choice. Wis- 
dom says, τοὺς ἐμὲ φιλοῦντας ἀγαπῶ, Prov. viii. 17. As 
a further aid in judging of the difference between the 
two words compare the foll. pass.: Jn. xi. 3, 5, 36; xxi. 
15-17; [even in some cases where they might appear 
to be used interchangeably (e.g. Jn. xiv. 23; xvi. 27) 
the difference can still be traced]. From what has 
been said, it is evident that ἀγαπᾶν is not, and cannot 
be, used of sexual love [but it is so used occasionally by 
the later writers; cf. Plut. Pericl. 24, 12 p. 165e.; symp. 
7 p. 180 b. ó ἐρώμενος τὸν ἐραστὴν ἀγαπᾶ ; cf. Steph. 
Thesaur. i. p. 209 a.; Soph. Lex. s. v. ἀγαπάω, ?; Wool- 
sey in the Andover Rev. for Aug. 1885, p. 170sq.]. Cf. 
Tittmann, Syn. N. T. i. p. 50 sqq.; Cremer s. v. ἀγαπάω 
[4te Aufl. p. 9 sq.]; Trench § xii.; [Schmidt ch. 136, 
esp. $6; Cope, Aristot. rhet. vol. i. App. A. (also given 


φίλη 


in the Journ. of Philol. for 1868, p. 88 sqq.) ; also Héhne 
in (Luthardt's) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w. 
for 1882, p. 6 sqq.; esp. Woolsey τι. s. COMP.: xara- 
idréo.]* 

φίλη. ἡ, see φίλος, 2. 

φιλήδονος, -ον, (φίλος and ἡδονή), loving pleasure: 2 
Tim. iii. 4. (Polyb. 40, 6, 10; Plut., Leian., al.) * 

φίλημα, -ros, τό, fr. Aeschyl. down, a kiss (see φιλέω, 
2): Lk. vii. 45; xxii. 48, (Prov. xxvii. 6; Cant. i. 2); 
ἅγιον, the kiss with which, as a sign of fraternal affection, 
Christians were accustomed to welcome or dismiss their 
companions in the faith: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 
Co. xiii. 12; 1 Th. v. 26; it is also called φίλημα ἀγάπης, 
1 Pet. v. 14. Cf. Kahle, De oseulo sancto (Regiom. 
1867); [B. D. s. v. Kiss; also Dict. of Christ. Antiq. 
s. v. Kiss].* 

Φιλήμων, -ovos, 6, Philemon, of Colossz, converted to 
Christianity by Paul (Philem. 19), and the recipient of 
the lovely little letter which bears his name in the N. T. : 
Philem. 1. [BB. DD. s. v.; esp. Bp. ZgAtft. Com. on 
Col. and Philem., Intr.]* . 

Φίλητος ([Chandler $325; but] R L T Tr Φιλητός, see 
Τυχικός [ Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), -ov, 6, Philetus, a heretic: 
2 Tim. ii. 17.* 

φιλία, -as, ἡ, (φίλος), friendship: with a gen. of the 
object, Jas. iv. 4. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]* 

Φιλιππήσιος, -ov, 6, α Philippian: Phil. iv. 15.* 

Φίλιπποι, -ων, of, [on the plur. cf. W. $ 27, 3], Philippi, 
a city of Macedonia Prima [see B. D s. v. Macedonia], 
situated on [near] the northern coast of the ZEgean 
Sea, between the rivers Strymon and Nestus, and the 
cities Neapolis and Amphipolis. It took its name from 
Philip I. of Macedon, who built it up from a village called 
Kpnvides, and adorned and fortified it: Acts xvi. 12 (on 
this pass. see κολώνια) ; xx. 6; Phil i. 1; 1 Th. ii. 2. 
[See Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip., Intr. iii.]* 

Φίλιππος, -ov, 6, Philip; 1. a son of Herod the 
Great by his fifth wife, Cleopatra of Jerusalem (Joseph. 
antt. 17, 1, 3), and by far the best of his sons. He was 
tetrarch of Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, Batanzea, 
and (ace. to the disputed statement of Lk. iii. 1) of Itu- 
rea also[cf. Schürer as below; but see B. D. Am. ed. 
s. v. Iturzea]; and the founder of the cities of Czesarea 
Philippi (in the Decapolis) and Julias. After having 
lived long in celibacy, he married Salome, the daughter 
of Herod [Philip, the disinherited ; see below] his half- 
brother (Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 4). He ruled mildly, justly 
and wisely thirty-seven years, and in A. D. 34died with- 
out issue, leaving a grateful memory of his reign in the 
minds of his subjects (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 and 4, 6; 
b.3:2,9; 1): ΜῈ xvi. 195 ΜῈ vau- 97:5 ΒΕ ἘΪ 15: ΟἿ᾽ 
Keim in Schenkel iii. p. 40 sqq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeit- 
gesch. $17, a.; [BB. DD.]. In Mt. xiv. 3; Mk. vi. 17, 
and Lk. iii. 19 Rec. it is said that his wife was Herodias 
(see “Hpwdids) ; thus Herod, the son of Herod the Great 
by Mariamne the daughter of the high-priest Simon 
(Joseph. antt. 18,5, 1; b. j. 1, 28, 4), who lived as a pri- 
vate citizen in comparative obscurity and was the first 


654 





φίλος 


husband of Herodias (Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 4), seems to 
have been confounded with Philip, who as a ruler was 
better known (cf. Volkmar, Ueber ein. histor. Irrthum 
in den Evangg., in Zeller’s Theol. Jahrbb. for 1846, p. 363 
sqq.). Many interpreters (see esp. Krebs, Observv. etc. 
p.37 sq.; [Deyling, Observv. sacr. vol. ii. (ed. 2) p. 342 
sqq. ]), in vindication of the Evangelists, make the some- 
what improbable conjecture that the first husband of 
Herodias had two names, one a family name Herod, the 
other a proper name Philip; [yet so Winer, RWB. s. v. 
Philippus, 5; BB. DD.; Gerlach in the Zeitschr. f. Luth. 
Theol. for 1869, p. 32 sq.; Meyer on Mt.l.c.; Weiss on 
Mk. 1. c.]. 2. Philip of Bethsaida [in Galilee], one 
of the apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14 ; Jn. i. 
43-48 (44-49); vi. 5, 7; xii. 21 sq.; xiv. 8sq.; Acts i. 
13. 3. Philip, one of the seven deacons of the 
church at Jerusalem, and also an ‘evangelist’ (εὐαγγελι- 
στής, q. V.) : Acts vi. 5; viii. 5-40; xxi. 8.* 

φιλόθεος. -ov, (φίλος and θεός), loving [A.V. lovers of] 
God: 2'Tim.ii.4.  ([Aristot. rhet. 2, 17, 6], Philo, 
Lcian., al.) * 

Φιλόλογος, -ov, 6, [lit. ‘fond of talk'], Philologus, a 
certain Christian: Ro. xvi.15. [Cf. Bp. LgAtft. Com. 
on Philip., note on * Czsar’s Household” $ 10.]* 

φιλονεικία, -as, ἡ, (φιλόνεικος, q. V-), love of strife, eager- 
ness to contend, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.; 4 Mace. i. 26); 
contention: Lk. xxii. 324. (2 Mace. iv. 4; Thue. 8, 76; 
Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 4; Antonin. 3, 4; in a good sense, 
emulation, Xen., Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) * 

φιλό-νεικος, -ov, (φίλος, and νεῖκος strife), fond of strife, 
contentious: 1 Co. xi. 16. (Pind., Plat., Polyb., Joseph., 
Plut. al.; in a good sense, emulous, Xen., Plat., Plut., 
al.) * 

φιλο-ξενία, -as, 7, (φιλόξενος, q. ν.), love to strangers, 
hospitality: Ro. xii. 13; Heb. xiii. 2. (Plat., Polyb., 
al.) * 

φιλό-ξενος, -ov, (φίλος and ξένος), fr. Hom. down, hos- 
pitable, generous to quests, [given to hospitality]: 1 Tim. 
ii. 2; Dit. 1.58; eet ave ΟἿΣ 

φιλο-πρωτεύω ; (φιλόπρωτος, fond of being first, striv- 
ing after the first place; fr. φίλος and πρῶτος : Artem. 
oneir. 2, 32; Plut. [Alcib. 2, 2]; mor. p. 471 e. [i.e. de 
tranquil. an. 12; p. 793 e. i. e. an seni sit ete. 18, 87); 
to aspire after pre-eminence, to desire to be first: 3 Jn. 9. 
(Several times in eccles. writ.) * 

φίλος, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, friendly [ef. L. and S. 
s. v. I. and IL]: φίλον εἶναί τινι, to be friendly to one, 
wish him well, Acts xix. 31; 1. ὁ φίλος, Sept. for 
32, ITs, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6; xi. 5; xv. 6; xvi. 
9. xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii. 3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); joined with 
συγγενεῖς. Lk. xxi. 165 an associate, opp. to δοῦλος, Jn. xv. 
15; φίλοι ἀναγκαῖοι, [A. V. near friends] Lat. necessitate 
conjuncti, Acts x. 24; ide, friend, in kindly address, 
Lk. xiv. 10; with a gen. of the subject, 6 φίλος τινός, 
Lk. xi. 6, [8]; xii. 4; xiv. 12; xv. 29; Jn. xi. 11; xv. 
13 sq.; spec. he who associates familiarly with one, a com- 
panion, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34; ὁ φ. τοῦ νυμφίου, the 
rabbinical 13:15 [q. v. in Buxtorf or Levy] (i. e. ‘son of 


φιλοσοφία 


gladness’), one of the bridegroom’s friends who on his 
behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him 
various services in closing the marriage and celebrating 
the nuptials [B. D. s. v. Marriage, ΠΠ.; Edersheim, Jew- 
ish Social Life, p. 152], Jn. iii. 29; φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος, on 
Caesar’sside, loyal to his interests, Jn. xix. 12; θεοῦ, esp. 
dear to God, peculiarly favored with his intimacy, Jas. 
ii. 23 ([cf. Harnack and Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
10,1; Rénsch in the Zeitschr. f£. wissenschaftl. Theol. for 
1873, p. 583 sq.]; also in prof. auth. cf. Grimm, Exeget. 
Hdbch. on Sap. vii. 27 p. 164) ; with a gen. of the thing, 
one who finds his pleasure in a thing, φίλος τοῦ κόσμου, 
das. iv. 4. 2. Fem. φίλη, 9, a (female) friend: Lk. 
2.95 s 

φιλο-σοφία, -as, ἡ, (fr. φιλόσοφος), prop. love (and pur- 
suit) of wisdom; used in the Grk. writ. of either zeal for 
or skill in any art or science, any branch of knowledge, 
see Passow s. v. [cf. L. and S. s. v.]. Once in the N. T. 
of the theology, or rather theosophy, of certain Jewish- 
Christian asceties, which busied itself with refined and 
speculative inquiries into the nature and classes of 
angels, into the ritual of the Mosaic law and the regu- 
lations of Jewish tradition respecting practical life: Col. 
ii. 8; see Grimm on 4 Macc. i. 1 p. 298 sq.; [Bp. Lehtft. 
on Col. 1. c., and Prof. Westcott in B. D. s. v. Philoso- 
phy].* 

φιλό-σοφος, -ov, 6, (φίλος and σοφός), a philosopher, one 
given to the pursuit of wisdom or learning [Xen., Plat., 
3l]; in a narrower sense, one who investigates and. dis- 
cusses the causes of things and the highest good: Acts xvii. 
18. [See reff. under the preceding word.]* 

φιλόστοργος, -ov, (φίλος, and στοργή the mutual love of 
parents and children; also of husbands and wives), /ov- 
ing affection, prone to love, loving tenderly; used chiefly 
of the reciprocal tenderness of parents and children: 
τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ (dat. of respect) εἰς ἀλλήλους, [R. V. in 
love of the brethren tenderly affectioned one to another], 
Ro. xii. 10. (Xen., Plut. Leian., Ael, al.) Cf. Fritzsche, 
Com. on Rom. vol. iii. p. 69.* 

φιλότεκνος, -ov, (φίλος and τέκνον), loving one’s off- 
spring or children: joined with φίλανδρος (as in Plut. 
mor. p. 769 c.), of women, Tit. ἢ. 4. (4 Mace. xv. 3-5; 
Hat. 2, 66; Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

φιλοτιμέομαι, -οὔμαι; (φιλότιμος, and this fr. φίλος 
and τιμή) ; depon. pass. (with fut. mid.); freq. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Andoc., Lysias, Xen., Plat. down; a. to be 
Sond of honor; to be actuated by love of honor; from a 
love of honor to strive to bring something to pass. b. 
foll. by an inf., to be ambitious to etc., 1 Th. iv. 11; Ro. 
Xv. 20; to strive earnestly, make it one’s aim, 2 Co. v. 9.* 

φιλοφρόνως, (φιλόφρων, q. v.), adv., kindly, in a friendly 
manner, [ A.V. courteously]: Acts xxviii. 7. (2 Macc. iii. 
9; 4 Macc. viii. 5; occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. 
and] Hdt. down.)* 

φιλόφρων, -ov, (φίλος and φρήν, fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. 
down, friendly, kind: 1 Pet. iii. 8 Rec.* 

φιμόω, -à, [inf. φιμοῖν, 1 Pet. ii. 15 WH (see their App. 
p. 166 and Intr. ὃ 410; B. 44 (38); see ἀποδεκατόω] ; 


655 


$oBéo 


fut. φιμώσω; 1 aor. ἐφίμωσα : Pass. pf. impv. 2 pers. 
sing. πεφίμωσο; 1 aor. ἐφιμώθην; (φιμός a muzzle) ; to 
close the mouth with a muzzle, to muzzle: prop. βοῦν, the 
ox, 1 Co. ix.9 RGL WH txt. (see κημόω); 1 Tim. v.18, 
fr. Deut. xxv. 4 where for DOM; (univ. to fasten, com- 
press, τῷ ξύλῳ τὸν αὐχένα τινός, Arstph. nub. 592); 
metaph. to stop the mouth, make speechless, reduce to si- 
lence: τινά, Mt. xxii. 34; 1 Pet. ii. 15; pass. to become 
speechless, hold one’s peace, Mt. xxii. 12; Mk. i. 25; iv. 
39; Lk. iv. 35, (Joseph. b. j. prooem. 8/55 lib: 35.92»8 
Leian. de morte peregr. 15; univ. to be kept in check, 
4 Macc. i. 35).* 

Φλέγων [i. e. *burning?], -ovros, ὁ, Phlegon, a Christian 
at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.* 

$Xoyito ; (φλόξ, q. v.); to ignite, set on fire, (Sir. iii. 
30; Ex.ix. 24; Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 3; to burn up,1 Macc. 
iii 5; Soph. Philoct. 1199): in fig. disc. to operate de- 
structively, have a most pernicious power, Jas. iii. 6; in 
the pass. of that in which the destructive influences are- 
kindled, ibid. (see πῦρ, p. 558” top).* 

φλόξ, gen. φλογός, 7, (φλέγω [to burn ; cf. Lat. ‘flagro’, 
ete.]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 295 and nan», a flame : 
Lk. xvi. 24; on the phrases φλὸξ πυρός and πῦρ φλογός. 
see πῦρ, p. 958%. 

φλυαρέω, -à; (φλύαρος, q. v.) ; to utter nonsense, talk 
idly, prate, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.) ; to bring 
forward idle accusations, make empty charges, Xen. Hell. 
6,3, 12; joined with βλασφημεῖν, Isocr. 5, 33: τινὰ λόγοις" 
πονηροῖς, to accuse one falsely with malicious words, 
3 Jn. 10 [ A. V. prating against ete. ].* 

φλύαρος, -ov, (PAva, ‘to boil up,’ * throw up bubbles’, 
of water; and since bubbles are hollow and useless 
things, ‘to indulge in empty and foolish talk’); of per- 
sons, uttering or doing silly things, garrulous, babbling,. 
ΓΑ. V. tattlers]: 1 Tim. v. 13 [Dion. Hal. de comp. 
verb. 26, vol. v. 215, 3; al.]; of things, foolish, trifling, 
vain: φιλοσοφία, 4 Macc. v. 10. (Plat, Joseph. vit. 
$31; often in Plut.; Aeschyl. dial. Socr. 3, 13 ; al.)* 

φοβερός. -d, -óv, (φοβέω), fr. Aeschyl. down, [ fearful 
i. 6.1 1. (actively) inspiring fear, terrible, formi- 
dable; Sept. for wo. 2. (passively) affected with 
fear, timid; in the N. T., only in the former (active) 
sense: Heb. x. 27, 31 ; xii. 21.* 

φοβέω, -d: Pass, pres. φοβοῦμαι ; impf. epoBovpny;. 
1 aor. ἐφοβήθην ; fut. φοβηθήσομαι ; (φόβος); fr. Hom. 
down; to terrify, frighten, Sap. xvii. 9; to put to flight by 
terrifying (to scare away). Pass. 1. to be put to 
light, to flee, (Hom.). 2. to fear, be afraid ; Sept. 
very often for NY; absol to be struck with fear, to be 
seized with alarm : of those who fear harm or injury, Mt. 
x. 31; xiv. 30; xxv. 25; Mk. v. 33, 36; x. 32; xvi. 8; 
Lk.viii.50; xii. 7, 32; Jn. xii. 15; xix. 8; Acts xvi. 38; 
xxii. 29; [Ro. xiii.4]; Heb.xiii.6; 1 Jn.iv. 18; opp. to 
ὑψηλοφρονεῖν, Ro. xi. 20; of those startled by strange 
siehts or occurrences, Mt. xiv. 27; xvii.7; xxviii. 5, 10; 
Mk. vi. 50; Lk.i. 13, 30; ii. 10; ix. 34; [xxiv. 36 L in 
br.]; Jn. vi. 19, 20; Acts xviii. 9; xxvii. 24, [but in the 
last two pass. perh. the exhortation has a wider ref.] ; 


φόβητρον 


Rey. i. 17; with σφόδρα added, Mt. xvii. 6; xxvii. 54; 
of those struck with amazement, [Mt.ix.8 LT Tr WH]; 
Mk. v. 15; Lk. v. 10; viii..25, 35. with an ace. of 
the contents [cognate acc. ] (see ἀγαπάω, sub fin.) : φόβον 
μέγαν, lit. to ‘fear a great fear,’ fear exceedingly, Mk. 
iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9, (1 Mace. x. 8); φόβον αὐτῶν, the fear 
which they inspire [see φόβος, 1], 1 Pet. iii. 14 (Is. viii. 
12; τοῦ Ταντάλου, to be filled with the same fear as Tan- 
talus, Schol. ad Eur. Or. 6) ; with the synonymous πτόη- 
σιν (q. v-), 1 Pet. iii. 6. τινά, to fear one, be afraid of 
one, lest he do harm, be displeased, ete.: Mt. x. 26; xiv. 
5; xxi. 26,46; Mk. xi. 18, 32 [cf. B. $151, 11]; xii. 12; 
Lk. xix. 21; xx. 19; xxii. 2; Jn. ix. 22; Acts v. 26 [cf. 
B.$139,48; W. 505 (471)]; ix. 26; Ro. xiii. 3; Gal. ii. 
12; τὸν θεόν, God, the judge and avenger, Mt. x. 28; Lk. 
xii. 5; xxiii. 40, (Ex. i. 17, 21; 1 S. xii. 18) ; ri, to fear 
danger from something, Heb. xi. 23, 27; to fear (dread 
to undergo) some suffering, Rev. ii. 10. in imitation of 
the Hebr. (19. $3), foll. by ἀπό twos (cf. B. $147, 3): 
Mt. x. 28; Lk. xii. 4, (Jer. i. 8, 17; x. 2; Lev. xxvi. 2; 
1 Mace. ii. 62; viii. 12; Jud. v. 23). as in the Grk. 
writ., φοβοῦμαι μή, to fear lest, with the subjunc. aor. : 
Acts [xxiii. 10 LT Tr WH]; xxvii. 17; μήπως, lest per- 
chance, Acts xxvii. 29 [here L μήπω (q. v. 2), al. μήπου 
(q.v.)]; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20; φοβηθῶμεν (i. q. let us take 
anxious care) μήποτέ τις δοκῇ, lest any one may seem 
[see δοκέω, 2 fin.], Heb. iv. 1; φοβοῦμαι ὑμᾶς, μήπως 
κεκοπίακα, Gal. iv. 11 (see μήπως, 1 b.); φοβοῦμαι with 
an inf. to fear (i.e. hesitate) to do something (for fear 
of harm), Mt. i. 20; ii. 22; Mk. ix. 32; Lk. ix. 45, (for 
numerous exx. in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down see 
Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2815"; [L. and S. s. v. B. II. 
4]. 3. to reverence, venerate, to treat with defer- 
ence or reverential obedience: τινά, Mk. vi. 20; Eph. v. 
33; τὸν θεόν, used of his devout worshippers, Lk. i. 50; 
xviii. 2, 4; Acts x. 2, 22, 35; [Col. iii. 22 Rec.]; 1 Pet. 
ii. 17; Rev. xiv. 7; xix. 2; also τὸν κύριον, Col. iii. 22 
[GL TTrWH]; Rev.xv.4; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. 
xi. 18, (Deut. iv. 10; v. 29; vi. 2, 18, 24; xiii. 4; xiv. 
22 (23); Prov.iii. 7; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10, and many 
other pass.; very often in Sir., cf. Wail, Clavis Apocr. 
V. T. s. v. fin.) ; of φοβούμενοι τ. θεόν spec. of proselytes : 
Acts xiii. 16, 26, (see σέβω). Comp.: ἐκ- φοβέω." 
[Sxw.: ἐκπλήσσεσθαι to be astonished, prop.to be struck 
with terror, of a sudden and startling alarm ; but, like our 
“astonish " in popular use, often employed on comparative- 
ly slight occasions, and even then with strengthening parti- 
cles (as σφόδρα Mt. xix. 25, ὑπερπερισσῶς Mk. vii. 37) ; v o- 
«iv to terrify, to agitate with fear; τρέμειν to tremble, pre- 
dominantly physical; φοβεῖν to fear, the general term; 
often used of a protracted state. Cf. Schmidt ch. 139.] 


φόβητρον [or -6pov (so LTrWH; see WH. App. 
p. 149)], -ov, τό, (φοβέω), that which strikes terror, a 
terror, (cause of) fright: Lk.xxi.11. (Plat. Ax. p. 367a.; 
Hippocr., Leian., al., [but always in plur." (L. and S.)]; 
for wn, Is. xix. 17.) * 

φόβος, -ov, ὁ, (φέβομαι ; like φόρος, τρόμος, πόνος, fr. 
φέρω, τρέμω, πένομαι), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ANY, ἼΓΙΞ, 


656 


φοίνιξ 


MDs (terror), MAM (id.) ; 1. fear, dread, terror; 
in a subjective sense (οὐδέν ἐστε φόβος εἰ μὴ mpo- 
δοσία τῶν ἀπὸ λογισμοῦ βοηθημάτων, Sap. xvii. 11; προσ- 
δοκίαν λέγω κακοῦ τοῦτο, εἴτε φόβον, εἴτε δέος καλεῖτε, 
Plat. Protag. p. 358 d.): univ., 1 Jn. iv. 18; φόβος ἐπί 
twa πίπτει, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Ree.; ém- 
πίπτει, Lk. i. 12; Acts xix. 17[RGT WH; Rev. xi.11 
LT Tr WH); ἐγένετο, Lk. i. 65; Acts v. 5, 11; λαμβάνει 
τινά, Lk. vii. 16 (Hom. Il. 11, 402) ; γίνεταί τινι, Acts ii. 43; 
πλησθῆναι φόβου, Lk. v. 26; συνέχεσθαι φόβῳ, Lk. viii. 
37; ἔχειν φόβον, 1 Tim. v. 20 (Hdt.8, 12); κατεργάζεσθαί 
τινι φόβον, 2 Co. vii. 11; φοβεῖσθαι φόβον (see φοβέω, 2), 
Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; with a gen. of the object added, 
1 Pet. iii. 14 [so W. $32, 2; al. subject. gen.]; ἀπὸ φόβου, 
Jor fear, Lk. xxi. 26; ἀπὸ τοῦ φόβ. for the fear, with 
which they were struck, Mt. xiv. 26; with a gen. of the 
object added, Mt. xxviii. 4; εἰς φόβον, unto (that ye 
may) fear, Ro. viii. 15 ; pera φόβου, Mt. xxviii. 8; with 
καὶ τρόμου added, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12; 
ev φόβῳ x. ἐν τρόμῳ (see τρόμος). 1 Co. ii. ὃ; τινὰ ἐν φόβῳ 
σώζειν (Rec.), ἐλεᾶν (L T Tr WH), with anxious heed 
lest ye be defiled by the wickedness of those whom ye 
are rescuing, Jude 23; plur. φόβοι, feelings of fear, 
fears, [W. 176 (166)], 2 Co. vii. 5; φόβος τινός, gen. of 
the obj. (our fear of one) : τῶν Ιουδαίων, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 
38; xx. 19; Bacar po, Rev. xviii. 10, 15; θανάτου, Heb. 
ii. 15 (Xen. mem. 1, 4, 7). In an objective sense, 
that which strikes terror: φόβος ἀγαθῶν ἔργων, or more 
correctly (with L T Tr WH) τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, a terror to 
(or for), Ro. xiii. 3. 2. reverence, respect, (for au- 
thority, rank, dignity): Ro.xiii.7; 1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 16 
(15); ἡ ἐν φόβῳ ἀναστροφή, behavior coupled with [cf. 
ev, I. 5 e.] reverence for one's husband, 1 Pet. iii. 23 
φόβος with a gen. of the obj.: τοῦ κυρίου, Acts ix. 31; 
2 Co. v. 11; Χριστοῦ, Eph. v. 21 [not Rec.]; θεοῦ, Ro. iii. 
18; 2 Co. vii. 1; [Eph. v. 21 Rec.]; θεοῦ is omitted as 
suggested by the context, 1 Pet. i.17; (often in the O. T. 
Tim ANY and priow NY). [Svw. see δειλία, δέος, 
fin.; cf. φοβέω.7 " 

Φοίβη, -ης, ἡ, [ it. ‘bright’, ‘radiant’], Phabe or Phebe, 
a deaconess of the church at Cenchreex, near Corinth: 
Ro. xvi. 1 [(see διάκονος, 2 fin.) ].* 

Φοινίκη, -ns, ἡ, Phenice or Phenicia, in the apostolic 
age a tract of the province of Syria, situated on the 
coast of the Mediterranean between the river Eleu- 
therus and the promontory of Carmel, some thirty miles 
long and two or three broad, [but see BB. DD. s. v.]: 
Acts xi. 19; xv. 35 xxi. 2.* 

Φοινίκισσα, see Συροφοίνισσα. 

φοίνιξ (or, as some prefer to write it, φοῖνιξ ; cf. W. $6, 
1 c.; [and reff. s. v. κήρυξ), -txos, 6; I. as an ap- 
pellative, a palm-tree (fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 325) : 
τὰ Baia τῶν ow. (see Batov), the branches of the palm- 
trees, Jn. xii. 13; but φοίνικες itself [A. V. palms] is put 
for the branches in Rev. vii. 9 (2 Macc. x. 7; xiv. 4; 
[so Aristot. magn. mor. $34 p. 11968, 36]). II. a 
prop. name, Phenix, a city and haven of Crete [B. D. 
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Phenice]: Acts xxvii. 12.* 


“φονεύς 


φονεύς, -έως, ὁ, (φόνος), fr. Hom. down, a murderer, a 
homicide: Mt. xxii. 7; Acts vii. 52; xxviii. 4; 1 Pet. 
iv. 15; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15; ἀνὴρ φονεύς [cf. ἀνήρ, 3], 
Acts iii. 14.* 

[Sxs.: φονεύς any murderer,—the genus of which σικάριος 
the assassin is a species; while ἀνθρωποκτόνος (q. v.) has in 
the N. T. a special emphasis. Trench $1xxxiii.] 

Φονεύω ; fut. φονεύσω ; 1 aor. epdvevaa; (φονεύς) ; fr. 
TPind. Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. mostly for r^, 
also for 199, 7377, ete.; to kill, slay, murder; absol. to 
commit murder LA. V. kill]: Mt. v. 21; Jas. iv. 2; od (q. v. 
6) φονεύσεις, Mt. v. 21; xix. 18; Ro. xiii. 9, (Ex. xx. 
15); μὴ $ovevags, Mk. x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; Jas. ii. 11. 
-rwá : Mt. xxiii. 31, 35 ; Jas. v. 6.* 

φόνος, -ov, 6, (PENQ ; cf. φόβος, init.), fr. Hom. down, 
murder, slaughter: Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts ix. 
1; Ro.i. 29; ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρας, Heb. xi. 37 (Ex. xvii. 13; 
Num. xxi. 24; Deut. xiii. 15; xx.13); plur. φόνοι, mur- 
ders: Mt.xv.19; Mk. vii, 21; Gal.v. 21 [T WH om. L 
"Tr br. $ov.]; Rev. ix. 21." 

φορέω, -à; fut. φορέσω [1 Co. xv. 49 RG WH mrg.]; 
1 aor. ἐφόρεσα, (later forms for the earlier φορήσω and 
-€popnoa, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 315; Kühner [and esp. 
Veitch]s. v.; W. $13,3c.; [B. 37 (32) ]) ; (frequent. of 
“φέρω, and differing from it by denoting not the simple 
and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or ha- 
bitual bearing; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 585 sq. ; Hermann 
on Soph. Electr. 715; [Trench § lviii.; Schmidt, ch. 105, 
6]; accordingly, ἀγγελίην φέρειν means ‘to carry a (sin- 
gle) message’, Hdt. 3, 53 and 122; ἀγγελίην φορέειν, ‘ to 
serve as (fill the office of) a messenger’, Hdt. 3, 34; 
hence we are said φορεῖν those things which we carry 
about with us or wear, as e. g. our clothing) ; fr. Hom. 
-down; to bear constantly, wear: of clothing, garments, 
armor, ete., Mt. xi. 8; Jn. xix. 5; Ro. xiii. 4 (on this 
pass. see μάχαιρα, 2); 1 Co. xv. 49 [see above, and WH. 
Intr. $ 404]; Jas. ii. 3, (Sir. xi. 5; xl. 4).* 

φόρον, -ov, τό, Lat. forum; see"Asmtos. 

φόρος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. φέρω, hence prop. à φέρεται; cf. 
-poBos), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for Ὁ and (2 Esdr. iv. 20; 
vi. 8; Neh. v. 4) for 1115, tribute, esp. the annual tax 
levied upon houses, lands, and persons [cf. Thom. Mag. 
ed. Ritschl p. 387, 13; Grotius as quoted in Trench 
§ evii. 7; see τέλος, 2]: φόρον, φόρους διδόναι Καίσαρι, 
Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2, (1 Mace. viii. 4, 7); ἀποδιδόναι, Ro. 
xiii. 7: τελεῖν, Ro. xiii. 6.* 

φορτίζω ; pf. pass. ptep. πεφορτισμένος ; (φόρτος, q. v.) ; 
to place a burden upon, to load: φορτίζειν τινὰ φορτίον 
on the double aec. see B. 149 (130)), to load one with 
a burden (of rites and unwarranted precepts), Lk. xi. 
46 ; πεφορτισμένος ‘heavy laden’ (with the burdensome 
requirements of the Mosaic law and of tradition, and 
with the consciousness of sin), Mt. xi. 28. (Ezek. xvi. 
33; Hes. opp. 692; Leian. navig. 45; Anthol. 10, 5, 5; 
eccles. writ.) [Comp.: ἀπο-φορτίζομαι.7 * 

φορτίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of φόρτος, but dimin. only in 
form not in signif.; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 440; [W. 
§ 2, 1 d. fin.]), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for swn, a burden, 

42 


657 











φρεναπατάω 


load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 645, 695 down), Acts xxvii. 10 GL 
T Tr WH. Metaph.: of burdensome rites, plur., [Mt. 
xxiii. 4]; Lk. xi.46; of the obligations Christ lays upon 
his followers, and styles a ‘burden’ by way of contrast 
to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which 
was most oppressive, Mt. xi. 30 (αὐτὸς μόνος δύναται Ba- 
στάσαι Ζήνωνος φορτίον, Diog. Laért. 7, 5, 4 (171); see 
ζυγός, 1 b.); of faults, the consciousness of which op- 
presses the soul, Gal. vi. 5 [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. 
Sx. see ὄγκος, fin.]* 

φόρτος, -ov, 6, (fr. φέρω), fr. Hom. down, a load, bur- 
den: Acts xxvii. 10 Rec. [of a ship's lading ].* 

Φορτουνάτος (or dovpr. R G), -ov, 6, [a Lat. name, 
*happy], Fortunatus, a Christian of Corinth [cf. Bp. 
Lehtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59 (65)]: 1 Co. xvi. 17.* 

φραγέλλιον, -ov, τό, (Lat. flagellum; B. 18 (16)), a 
scourge: Ju. ii. 15.* 

φραγελλόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. φραγελλώσας ; [Lat. fla- 
gello]; to scourge: twa, Mt. xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15. 
(Eccles. writ.) * 

φραγμός, -ov, ὁ, (φράσσω to fence round), a hedge, 
a fence: Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 23; trop. that 
which separates, prevents two from coming together, 
Eph. ii. 14 [ A. V. partition], see μεσότοιχον. (Sept. Sir. 
xxxvi. 30 (27); Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plut., al.) * 

$páto: 1 aor. impv. φράσον; fr. Hom. down; to indi- 
cate plainly, make known, declare, whether by gesture 
(φωνῆσαι μὲν οὐκ εἶχε, τῇ δὲ χειρὶ ἔφραζεν, Hat. 4, 113), 
or by writing or speaking, or in other ways; to explain: 
τινὶ τὴν παραβολήν, the thought shadowed forth in the 
parable, Mt. xiii. 36 [RG T Tr txt.]; xv. 15. (Twice 
in Sept. for 739, Job vi. 24; 71n, ἘΠ 8.) * 

φράσσω: 1 aor. éppaéa; Pass, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. 
sing. φραγῇ: 2 fut. 3 pers. sing. φραγήσεται (2 Co. xi. 10 
Rezelz GLT Tr WH); [(allied w. Lat. farcio, Germ. 
Berg, Eng. borough; cf. Vanicek p. 614); fr. Hom. 
down]; to fence in, block up, stop up, close up, (rà dra 
τοῦ μὴ ἀκοῦσαι, Prov. xxi. 13; τὴν ὁδὸν ἐν σκόλοψιν, Hos. 
ii. 6; πηγήν, Prov. xxv. 26; στόματα λεόντων, Heb. xi. 
33): ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται, this glorying shall 
not be stopped, i. e. no one shall get from my conduct 
an argument to prove that it is empty, 2 Co. xi. 10 [on 
the reading of Ree.* (σφραγίσεται) see σφραγίζω, init.]; 
trop. to put to silence, [ A. V. stop]: τὸ στόμα. Ro. iii. 19.* 

φρέαρ, -aros, τό, fr. the Hom. hymn Cer. 99 and Hat. 6, 
119 down; Sept. for 183 and (in 1 S. xix. 22; 2 S. iii. 26 ; 
Jer. xlviii. (xli.) 7, 9) 3 (a pit, cistern), a well: Lk. 
xiv. 5; Jn.iv. 11sq.; fp. τῆς ἀβύσσου, the pit of the abyss 
(because the nether world is thought to increase in size 
the further it extends from the surface of the earth and 
so to resemble a cistern, the orifice of which is narrow), 
Rev. ix. 1 sq.* 

φρεν-απατάω, -; (φρεναπάτης, q. V-): τινά, to deceive 
any one's mind, Gal. vi. 3 [more is implied by this word 
than by ἀπατᾶν, for it brings out the idea of subjec- 
tive fancies” (Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; ef. Green, Crit. 
Notes ad loe.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* 


φρεναπάτης 


φρεναπάτης, -ου, ὁ, (φρήν and ἀπάτη), a mind-deceiver ; 
Vulg. seductor; [A. V. deceiver]: Tit. 1. 10. (Several 
times in eccles. writ.) * 

φρήν, φρενός, 7, plur. φρένες, fr. Hom. down, Sept. sev- 
eral times in Prov. for 3? ; 1. the midriff or dia- 
phragm, the parts about the heart. 2. the mind; 
the faculty of perceiving and judging: also in the plur.; 
as, 1 Co. xiv. 20.* 

φρίσσω; very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to 
be rough, Lat. horreo, horresco, i.e. 1. to bristle, 
stiffen, stand up: ἔφριξάν pov τρίχες, Job iv. 15 Sept.; 
with ὀρθαί added, Hes. opp. 510; ὀρθὰς... φρίσσει τρίχας 
(cogn. ace. of the part affected), Hes. scut. 391; with 
cold, διὰ τὸ ψῦχος, Plut. quaest. nat. 13, 2 p. 915 b. 2. 
to shudder, to be struck with extreme fear, to be horrified : 
absol., Jas. ii. 19; 4 Mace. xiv. 9; like the Lat. horreo, 
horresco, constr. with an ace. of the object exciting 
the fear, Hom. Il. 11, 383, and often.* 

φρονέω, -o; impf., 1 pers. sing. ἐφρόνουν, 2 pers. plur. 
ἐφρονεῖτε ; fut. 2 pers. plur. φρονήσετε ; pres. pass. impv. 
3 pers. sing. φρονείσθω, Phil. ii. 5 RG (see 3 below) ; 
(φρήν) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to have understanding, 
be wise, (Hom., al.). 2. to feel, to think: absol. ὡς 
νήπιος ἐφρόνουν, 1 Co. xiii. 11; to have an opinion of one's 
self, think of one’s self: μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ᾽ 6 δεῖ φρονεῖν, 
Ro. xii. 3 (μεῖζον φρονεῖν i) kar’ ἄνδρα, Soph. Ant. 768) ; 
φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν, [R. V. so to think as to think 
soberly}, to be modest, not to let one's opinion (though 
just) of himself exceed the bounds of modesty, ibid. ; 
ὑπὲρ ὃ γέγραπται, in one’s opinion of one's self to go be- 
yond the standard prescribed in Scripture, 1 Co. iv. 6 
RG [cf. B. 394 sq. (338); W. § 64,4]. with an ace. of 
the thing, fo think, judge: ἃ φρονεῖς, what your opinion 
is, Acts xxviii. 22; οὐδὲν ἄλλο, Gal. v. 10; τὶ ἑτέρως, 
Phil. 111. 15; several persons are said φρονεῖν τὸ αὐτό, 
lo be of the same mind, i.e. to agree together, cherish 
the same views, be harmonious: 2 Co. xiii. 11; Phil. ii. 
2; iii. 16 Rec.; iv. 2; with ἐν ἀλλήλοις added, Ro. xv. 5; 
also τὸ ἐν φρονοῦντες, having that one mind, Phil. ii. 2 
(the phrase τὸ ἕν having reference to τὸ αὐτό: see Meyer 
[but ef. Bp. Lehtft.] ad loc.) ; τὶ ὑπέρ twos, to hold some 
opinion, judge, think, concerning one, Phil. i. 7; τὸ αὐτὸ 
εἰς ἀλλήλους, to be of the same mind towards one anoth- 
er, Ro. xii. 16. 3. to direct one’s mind to a thing, to 
seek or strive for; τά twos, to seek one’s interests or ad- 
vantage; to be of one’s party, side with him, (in public 
affairs, Add. to Esth. viii. 5; 1 Mace. x. 20; Dio Cass. 
51,4; Hdian. 8, 6, 14 (6); for other exx. fr. Xen. [or 
Hdt. 1, 162 fin] down see Passow s. v. II. ; [L. and S. 


II. 2 c.]; hence) τὰ rod θεοῦ and τὰ τῶν dvÓp., to be in- | 


tent on promoting what God wills (spec. his saving pur- 
poses), and what pleases men, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; 
Ta τῆς σαρκός and τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος (σάρξ [q. v. 4] and 


πνεῦμα [q. v. p. 522*] being personified), to pursue those | 


things which gratify the flesh, ... the Holy Spirit, Ro. 
viii. 5, cf. 6. rà ἐπίγεια, Phil. iii. 19; τὰ dvo and rà ἐπὶ 
τῆς γῆς, Col. iii. 2, (ἀνθρώπινα, θνητά, Aristot. eth. Nic. 
10, 7 p. 1177", 32) ; τοῦτο φρονεῖτε (pres. impy.) ἐν ὑμῖν, 


658 








φρυάσσω 


[R. V. have this mind in you], be intent within yourselves. 
on this, Phil. ii. 5 L'T Tr WH; pass. φρονεῖταί τι ἔν run, 
some habit of thought (expressed by deeds) exists in 
one, Phil. ii. 5 R ἃ [ A. V. let this mind be in you]; ὑψηλά 
(see ὑψηλός, b.). φρονεῖν ἡμέραν, to regard a day, observe 
it as sacred, Ro. xiv. 6; gp. ὑπέρ τινος, to take thought, 
have a care, for one, Phil. iv. 10 [see ἀναθάλλω, fin. 
Cowr.: xata-, wapa-, rept-, ὑπερ- φρονέω. * 

φρόνημα, -ros, τό, (φρονέω, q. v.), what one has in mind, 
the thoughts and purposes, [A. V. mind]: Ro. viii. 6 sq. 
27. (Hesych. φρόνημα: βούλημα, θέλημα. In various 
other senses also fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

φρόνησις, -ews, ἡ, (φρονέω), understanding : joined with. 
σοφία (as 1 K. iv. 25 (29); Dan. i. 17 Theod. ; ἡ copia 
ἀνδρὶ τίκτει φρόνησιν, Prov. x. 23), Eph. i. 8 LA. V. pru- 
dence; see σοφία, fin.]; spec. knowledge and holy love 
of the will of God (A.V. wisdom], Lk. i. 17 (Sap. iii. 15 ;. 
Sept. for ny3, nn, 723M; used variously by Grk. 
writ. fr. Soph. and Eur. down).* 

φρόνιμος, -ov, (φρονέω) ; a. intelligent, wise [sa 
A.V. uniformly]: 1 Co. x. 15; opp. to μωρός, 1 Co. iv. 
10; opp. to ἄφρων, 2 Co. xi. 19; φρόνιμος παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, 
one who deems himself wise, [A. V. wise in one's own 
conceits], Ro. xi. 25 ; xii. 16, (Prov. iii. 7). b. pru- 
dent, i.e. mindful of one’s interests: Mt. x. 165 xxiv. 455 
Lk. xii. 42; opp. to μωρός, Mt. vii. 24 (cf. 26) ; xxv. 2, 4,. 
8sq. compar. φρονιμώτερος, Lk. xvi. 8. (From Soph., 
Xen. Plat. down; Sept. for 113), DIN, 732.) [Sxw. 
see σοφός, fin.]* 

Φρονίμως, adv., prudently, wisely: Lk. xvi. 8. 
Arstph. down.]* : 

φροντίζω: (φροντίς [*thouzht', fr. φρονέω); fr. Theogn.. 
and Hdt. down; to think, to be careful; to be thoughtful 
or anxious: foll. by an inf. Tit. iii. 8.* 

$povpéo, -o: impf. ἐφρούρουν; fut. φρουρήσω; Pass., 
pres. ptep. φρουρούμενος ; impf. ἐφρουρούμην ; (dpovpás, 
contr. fr. zpoopós fr. zpoopác to see before, foresee) ; fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 1. to guard, protect by a 
military guard, either in order to prevent hostile inva- 
sion, or to keep the inhabitants of a besieged city from 
flight; (often so fr. Thue. down) : τὴν πόλιν, i. e. not he 
surrounded the city with soldiers, but by posting sentries - 
he kept the gates guarded, 2 Co. xi. 32 [.V. guarded], cf. 
Acts ix. 24. 2. metaph.: τινά, pass.9imd νόμον, under 
the control of the Mosaic law, that we might not escape 
from its power, with συγκεκλεισμένοι [συν(γ)κλειόμενοι 


[From 


| LT Tr WH] added, Gal. iii. 23 [R. V. kept in ward; cf. 


Plut. de defect. orac. $ 29; Sap. xvii. 15]; to protect by 
guarding (Soph. O. R. 1479), to keep: τὰς καρδίας ev 
Χριστῷ, i. e. in close connection with Christ, Phil. iv. 7; 
τινὰ εἴς τι, by watching and guarding to preserve one for 
the attainment of something [R. V. guarded unto ete.], 
pass. 1 Pet. i. 5.* 

φρυάσσω: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. ἐφρύαξαν ; (everywhere 
in prof. auth. and also in Mace. as a depon. mid. φρυάσσο- 
μαι [W. 24]); to neigh, stamp the ground, prance, snort; 
to be high-spirited: prop. of horses (Anthol. 5, 202, 4; 
Callim. lav. Pallad. vs. 2); of men, to take on lofty airs, 


φρύγανον 


behave arrogantly, (2 Macc. vii. 34; 3 Mace. ii. 2; An- 
thol., Diod., Plut., al.; [cf. Wetstein on Acts as below ]); 
active for vU, to be tumultuous, to rage, Acts iv. 25 fr. 
IPs: 

φρύγανον, -ov, τό, (fr. φρύγω or φρύσσω, φρύττω. to dry, 
parch; cf. Lat. frigo, frux, fructus), a dry stick, dry 
twig; generally in the plur. this word comprises all dry 
sticks, brush-wood, fire-wood, or similar material used 
as fuel: Acts xxviii. 3. (Hdt. 4,62; Arstph., Thuc., 
Xen., Philo, al.; Sept. for Up straw, stubble, Is. xl. 24; 
xli. 2; xlvii. 14; for San bramble, Job xxx. 7.) * 

Φρυγία, -as, ἡ, Phrygia, a region of Asia Minor, 
bounded by Bithynia, Galatia, Lycaonia, Pisidia, Lydia, 
and Mysia. Those of its cities mentioned in the N. T. 
are Laodicea, Hierapolis, and Colossze: Acts ii. 10; xvi. 
6; xviii. 23. [B.D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col., Intr., 
diss. i. esp. pp. 17 sq. 23 sq.]* 

Φύγελλος and (1, T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 159]) 
Φύγελος, -ov, 6, Phygellus [better Phyg-elus], a Christian, 
who was with Paul at Rome and deserted him [see B.D. 
s. v. and the Comm.]: 2 Tim. i. 15.* 

φυγή. -5s. 7. (φεύγω), fr. Hom. down, flight: Mt. xxiv. 
20; Mk. xiii. 18 Rec.* 

φυλακή, -ῆς, ἡ. (φυλάσσω). fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
nouo, Ww, nn (a prison), x55 (enclosure, con- 
finement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense, 
a watching, keeping watch: φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, to keep 
watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6, 
10, etc.; Plat. lege. 6 p. 758 d. down; [ef. φυλακὰς ἔχειν, 
ete. fr. Hom. (Il. 9, 1 ete.) on]; often also in Sept. for 
NIWA Ww). b. like the Lat. custodia and more 
freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Har- 
pers’ Lat. Dict.] s. v.), i. q- persons keeping watch, a 
guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. ward] (and 
very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the 
place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10; 
xxv. 36, [39], 43 sq.; Mk. vi. ΤΊ: 27 (28); LK. iii. 20; 
xxi 12; xxii.33; Acts v.19, 22; viii3; xii. 5sq.17; 
Xvi. 27,40; xxii.4; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in 
Heb. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment]; 2 Co. xi. 23; 1 Pet. iii. 
19; Rey. xviii. 2 [twice; rendered in a V. hold and 
cage (R. V. hold)]; xx. 7, (Hdt. 3, 152 Rue 3, 34; 
Plut, al; Sept. for n05, N23 m3, Se 23n ma, 
222); βάλλειν or SUE τινὰ εἰς (τ.) φυλακήν or ἐν 
(τῇ) φυλακῇ: Mt. v. 25; xiv. 8 [R G, al. ἀπέθετο] ; xviii. 
30; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19, 25; Jn.iii.24; Acts v. 25; 
viii. 3 [here παραδιδόναι εἰς $.]; xii. 4; xvi. 23 sq. 37; 
Rev. ii. 10. d. of the time (of night) during which 
guard was kept, a watch i. e. the period of time during 
which a part of the guard were on duty, and at the end 
of which others relieved them. As the earlier Greeks 
divided the night commonly into three parts [see L. and 
S. s. v. I. 4], so, previously to the exile, the Israelites 
also had three watches in a night; subsequently, how- 
ever, after they became subject to Rome, they adopted 
the Roman custom of dividing the night into four 
watches: Mt. xxiv. 43; ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ, τρίτη. Lk. xii. 
38; τετάρτῃ, Mt. xiv. 25; Mk. vi. 48. Cf. Win. RWB. 


659 











φυλάσσω 
s.v. Nachtwache; [McC. and S. s. v. Night-watch; B.D. 
s. v. Watches of Night ].* 

φυλακίζω ; (φυλακή [or $Aa£]); to cast into prison, 
imprison: Acts xxii. 19. (Sap. xviii. 4; eccles. and 
Byzant. writ.) * 

φυλακτήριον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. φυλακτήριος, -a, 
τον, fr. φυλακτήρ [ poetic for φύλαξ 1) ; 1. a forti- 
Jied place provided with a garrison, a station for a guard 
or garrison. 2. a preservative or safeguard, an am- 
ulet: Dem. p. 71, 24; Diose. 5, 158 (159) sq., often in 
Plut. The Jews gave the name of φυλακτήρια (in the 
Talm. roan prayer. -fülets, Germ. G'ebetsriemens [cf. O. T. 
: froutlels 1) to small strips of parchment on which were 
written the foll. pass. from the law of Moses, Ex. xiii. 
1-10, 11-16; Deut. vi. 4-9; xi. 13-21, and which, en- 
closed in little cases, they were accustomed when en- 
gaged in prayer to wear fastened by a leather strap to 
the forehead and to the left arm over against the heart, 
in order that they might thus be solemnly reminded of 
the duty of keeping the commands of God in the head and 
in the heart, acc. to the directions given in Ex. xiii. 16 ; 
Deut. vi. 8; xi. 18; (cf. Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 13). "These 
scrolls were thought to have power, like amulets, to 
avert various evils and to drive away demons (Targ. on 
Cant. viii. 3); hence their Greek name. [But see Gins- 
burg in Alex.’s Kitto s. vv. Phylacteries (sub fin.) and 
Mezuza.] The Pharisees were accustomed τὰ φυλα- 
κτήρια αὐτῶν πλατύνειν. to widen, make broad, their phylac- 
teries, that they might render them more conspicuous 
and show themselves to be more eager than the majority 
to be reminded of God's law: Mt. xxiii. 5. Cf. Win. 
RWB.s.v. Phylakterien; Leyrer in Herzog xi. 639 
sqq.; Kneucker in Schenkel i. 601 sq.; Delitz sch i in Riehm 
270 sq.; [Edersheim, Jewish Social Life ete., p. 220 
sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Frontlets; esp. Hamburger, Real-Encycl. 
s. v. Tephillin, vol. ii. p. 1203 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.'s 
Kitto u. s.].* 

φύλαξ, -axos, 6, (φυλάσσω), a guard, keeper: Acts v. 
23; xii. 6, 19. (From Hom. down; Sept. for *9U.) * 

φυλάσσω ; fut. φυλάξω; 1 aor. ἐφύλαξα; Mid., pres. 
φυλάσσομαι; 1 aor. ἐφυλαξάμην ; pres. pass. φυλάσσομαι ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. times too many to-count for 33:/, 
occasionally for 5x3, [ete.]; 1. Act. to guard (Lat. 
custodio); i.e. a. to watch, to keep watch: with 
φυλακήν added, Lk. ii. 8 (see φυλακή, a.). b. to 
guard or watch, have an eye upon: τινά, one, lest he es- 
cape, Acts xii. 4; xxviii. 16; pass. Acts xxiii. 35; Lk. 
viii. 29; ri, any thing, lest it be carried off: rà ἱμάτια, 
Acts xxii. 20. c. to guard a person (or thing) that 
he may remain safe, i.e. lest he suffer violence, be de- 
spoiled, ete., i. q. to protect: τὴν αὐλήν, Lk. xi. 21; ἀπό 
τινος. to protect one from a pers. or thing, 2 Th. iii. 3 
[see πονηρός. p. 531*], (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 7; Ps. exl. (exli.) 
9; cf. B. § 147, 3; [W. 223 (209)]); τὴν παραθήκην (or 
παρακαταθήκην), to keep from being snatched away, pre- 
serve safe and unimpaired, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; 
with the addition of εἴς τινα ἡμέραν, i. e. that it may be 
forthcoming on that day, 2 Tim.i.12; to guard from 


φυλή 


being lost or perishing, i. 6. (with the predominant idea 
of a happy issue), fo preserve: τινά, Jn. xvii. 12 (where 
ἐφύλαξα is explained by the foll. οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο 
[ef. τηρέω, fin.]) ; 2 Pet. ii. ὃ ; τινά with a pred. accus. 
Jude 24; φυλάξει (opp. to ἀπολέσει) τ. ψυχὴν eis Conv 
αἰών. i. e. will keep it with the result that he will have 
life eternal, Jn. xii. 25 ; ἑαυτὸν ἀπό τ. to guard one's self 
from a thing, 1 Jn. v. 21 [where cf. Westcott]. d. 
to guard, i. e. to care for, take care not to violate; to ob- 
serve: τὸν νόμον, Acts vii. 53; xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13, (Lev. 
xix. 37, ete.; Soph. Trach. 616; al.; νόμους, Xen. Hell. 
1, 7, 30; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 484 b.; polit. p. 292 a.) ; sin- 
gle precepts of the Mosaic law, Mt. xix. 20 LT Tr WH; 
Mk. x. 20 Lehm.; Lk. xviii. 21 LT Tr txt. WH; [rà 
δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 26]; τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. 
xi. 28; τὰ ῥήματα of Jesus, Jn. xii. 47 L T Tr WH; 
apostolic directions, Acts xvi. 4; 1 Tim. v. 21. 2. 
Mid. a. to observe for one's self something to es- 
cape, i. e. to avoid, shun, flee from: by a use com. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, with an acc. of the 
obj., τί, Acts xxi. 25 [ A. V. keep themselves from]; τινά, 
2 Tim. iv. 15 [ A.V. be thou ware of ]; ἀπό τινος, to keep 
one’s self from a thing, Lk. xii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 8, 9; 
[Hell. 7, 2, 10]) ; twa μή, 2 Pet. iii. 17 (ὅπως μή, Xen. 
mem. 1, 2, 37; other exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2360"; [L. 
and S. s. v. C. II. ]). b. by a usage foreign to Grk. 
writ. but very fréq. in the Sept. (cf. W. 253 (238)), to 
guard for one's self (i. e. for one's safety's sake) so as 
not to violate, i. e. to keep, observe: ταῦτα πάντα (the pre- 
cepts of the Mosaic law), Mt. xix. 20 RG; Mk. x. 20 
RGT Tr WH; Lk. xviii. 21 RG Tr mrg., (Ex. xii. 17; 
Lev. xviii. 4; xx. 8, 22; xxvi. 3, and many οἱ er pass.). 
[Cowr.: δια-τφυλάσσω. SYN. see τηρέω, 

φυλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. pw), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; 1. 
a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one 
of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for 7073 
and D327; also for nTY3U5, see πατριά, 2): Heb. vii. 13 
sq.; with the addition of the genitives ᾿Ασήρ, Βενιαμίν, 
ete., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. xi.1; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. 
v. 9; vii. 5-8; δώδεκα φ. τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. xix. 28; Lk. 
xxii. 30; Jas.i.1; Rev. xxi. 12; [πᾶσα φυλὴ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, 
Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv. 
$0; Rev. [1. 7]; vers) νἱ].. 9.5 [3379 ]; στῆς 7; πῖν Ge 

φύλλον, -ov, τό, (φύω), a leaf: Mt. xxi. 19; xxiv. 32; 
Mk. xi. 13; xiii. 28; Rev. xxii. 2. [From Hom. down.]* 

φύραμα, -ros, τό, (φυράω to mix), any substance mixed 
with water and kneaded ; a mass, lump: of dough (Num. 
xv. 20 sq.; [plur., Ex. viii. 3; xii. 34]; Aristot. probl. 21, 
18 p. 929%, 25; Plut. quaest. conv. 6, 7, 2, 15 p. 693 e.), 
1 Co. v. 6sq.; Gal. v. 9, (on the meaning of which pass. 
see ζύμη) : Ro. xi. 16; of clay (Plut. praec. ger. reip. 15, 
4 p. 811 c.), Ro. ix. 21 [cf. B. $ 140, 3 Rem.].* 

φυσικός, -7, -ov, (φύσις), natural; i.e. a. pro- 
duced by nature, inborn, (very often so fr. Xen. [mem. 
3, 9, 1] down). b. agreeable to nature, (Dion. Hal., 
Plut., al.) > opp. to παρὰ φύσιν, Ro. i. 26, [27]. οἱ 
governed by (the instincts of) nature: ζῶα γεγεννημένα 
φυσικά, 2 Pet. ii. 12 [R. V. born mere animals].* 


660 





φύσις 


φυσικῶς, adv., in a natural manner, by nature, under 
the guidance of nature: by the aid of the bodily senses, 
Jude 10. [(Aristot., Philo, al.)] * 

φυσιόω, -à ; Pass., pres. φυσιοῦμαι; pf. ptep. πεφυσιωμέ- 
vos; laor. ἐφυσιώθην ; 1. (fr. φύσις), to make nat- 
ural, to cause a thing to pass into nature, (Clem. Alex.; 
Simplic.). 2. i. q. φυσάω, φυσιάω (fr. φῦσα a pair 
of bellows), to inflate, blow up, blow out, to cause to swell 
up; trop. to puff up, make proud: 1 Co. viii. 1; pass. to 
be puffed up, to bear one’s self loftily, be proud: 1 Co. iv. 
18sq.; v. 2; xiii. 4; ὑπὸ τοῦ vods τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ, Col. 
li. 18; ὑπέρ τινος (see ὑπέρ, I. 2 [and cf. 5]) κατά τινος, 
1 Co.iv. 6 [see ἵνα, IT. 1 d.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* 

φύσις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. φύω, q. v. as Lat. natura fr. nascor, 
ingenium fr. geno, gigno), fr. Hom. Od. 10, 303 down; 
nature, i.e. a. the nature of things, the force, laws, 
order, of nature; as opp. to what is monstrous, abnor- 
mal, perverse: 6, 7, τὸ mapa φύσιν, that which is con- 
trary to nature’s laws, against nature, Ro. i. 26 (οἱ παρὰ 
φύσιν τῇ ᾿Δφροδίτῃ χρώμενοι, Athen. 13 p. 605; ὁ matde- 
ραστὴς ... τὴν παρὰ φύσιν ἡδονὴν διώκει, Philo de spec. 
lege. 1. 8 7); as opposed to what has been produced by the 
art of man: of κατὰ φύσιν κλάδοι, the natural branches, 
i.e. branches by the operation of nature, Ro. xi. 21, 24 
[W. 198 (182)], contrasted with οἱ ἐγκεντρισθέντες mapa 
φύσιν, contrary to the plan of nature, cf. 24; ἡ κατὰ 
φύσιν ἀγριέλαιος, ibid.; as opposed to what is imagi- 
nary or fictitious: of μὴ φύσει ὄντες θεοί, who are 
gods not by nature, but ace. to the mistaken opinion of 
the Gentiles (λεγόμενοι θεοί, 1 Co. viii. 5), Gal. iv. 8; 
nature, i.e. natural sense, native conviction or knowledge, 
as opp. to what is learned by instruction and accom- 
plished by training or prescribed by law: ἡ φύσις (i.e. 
the native sense of propriety) διδάσκει τι, 1 Co. xi. 14; 
φύσει ποιεῖν τὰ τοῦ νόμου. natura magistra, guided by their 
natural sense of what is right and proper, Ro. ii. 14. b. 
birth, physical origin : ἡμεῖς φύσει ᾿Ιουδαῖοι. we so far as 
our origin is considered, i. e. by birth, are Jews, Gal. ii. 
15 (φύσει νεώτερος. Soph. O. C. 1295; τῷ μὲν φύσει 
πατρίς. τὸν δὲ νόμῳ πολίτην ἐπεποίηντο. Isocr. Evagr. 21; 
φύσει βάρβαροι ὄντες, νόμῳ δὲ Ἕλληνες, Plat. Menex. 
p. 348 d.; ef. Grimm on Sap. xiii. 1) ; ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκρο- 
βυστία, who by birth is uncircumcised or a Gentile (opp. 
to one who, although cireumcised, has made himself a 
Gentile by his iniquity and spiritual perversity), Ro. ii. 
21. c. a mode of feeling and acting which by long 
habit has become nature: ἦμεν φύσει τέκνα ὀργῆς, by (our 
depraved) nature we were exposed to the wrath of God, 
Eph. ii. 3 (this meaning is evident from the preceding 
context, and stands in contrast with the change of 
heart and life wrought through Christ by the blessing 
of divine grace; φύσει πρὸς τὰς κολάσεις ἐπιεικῶς ἔχουσιν 
οἱ Φαρισαῖοι. Joseph. antt. 13,10,6. [Others (see Meyer) 
would lay more stress here upon the constitution in 
which this ‘habitual course of evil’ has its origin, wheth- 
er that constitution be regarded (with some) as already 
developed at birth, or (better) as undeveloped; ef. 
Aristot. pol. 1, 2 p. 1252, 32 sq. οἷον ἕκαστόν ἐστι τῆς 


φυσίωσις 


γενέσεως τελεσθείσης, ταύτην φαμὲν τὴν φύσιν εἶναι ἑκά- 
στου, ὥσπερ ἀνθρώπου, etc.; see the exx. in Bonitz's index 
s.v. Cf. W. § 31, 6a.]). d. the sum of innate prop- 
erties and powers by which one person differs from oth- 
ers, distinctive native peculiarities, natural character- 
istics: φύσις θηρίων (the natural strength, ferocity and 
intractability of beasts [A. V. (every) kind of beasts]), ἡ 
φύσις ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη (the ability, art, skill, of men, the 
qualities which are proper to their nature and necessa- 
rily emanate from it), Jas. iii. 7 [cf. W. $31, 10]; θείας 


κοινωνοὶ φύσεως, (the holiness distinctive of the divine | 


nature is specially referred to), 2 Pet. i. 4 ('Auevóje . . . 


, Ξ ; , ; A «| 
θείας δοκοῦντι μετεσχηκέναι φύσεως κατά Te σοφίαν kai 


| $407; L. and S. s. v. φάω]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 


πρόγνωσιν τῶν ἐσομένων, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 26).* 

φυσίωσις, -eos, 7. (φυσιόω, q. v-), (Vulg. inflatio), a 
puffing up of soul, loftiness, pride: plur. [A.V. swellings] 
2 Co. xii. 20. (Eccles. writ.) * 

φυτεία, -as, ἡ, (φυτεύω, q. v); 1. a planting 
(Xen., Theophr., Plut., Ael., al.). 2. thing planted, 
a plant, (i. q. φύτευμα) : Mt. xv. 13, [ Athen. 5 p. 207 d.; 
Boeckh, Corp. inserr. No. 4521 vol. iii. p. 240].* 

$vreóo; impf. éjórevov; 1 aor. ἐφύτευσα ; pf. pass. 
ptep. wehurevpevos; 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. φυ- 
τεύθητι ; (φυτόν) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for yw, several 
times for ow; to plant: absol., Lk. xvii. 28; 1 Co. iii. 
6-8; φυτείαν, Mt. xv. 13; ἀμπελῶνα, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. 
xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9; 1 Co. ix. 7; τὶ ἐν with a dat. of the 
place, pass., Lk. xiii. 6; xvii. 6.* 

iw; 2 aor. pass. (ἐφύην) ptep. φυέν (for which the 
Attic writ. more com. use the 2 aor. act. ἔφυν with the 
ptcp. gus, φύν, in a pass. or intrans. sense; cf. Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 321; Krüger $40 s.v.; Kühner § 343 
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]; W. § 15 s. v.; [B. 68 (60)]) ; [cf. 
Lat. fui, fore, etc.; Curtius $ 417]; fr. Hom. down; 4: 
to beget, bring forth, produce; pass. to be born, to spring 
up, to grow: Lk. viii. 6, 8 ; 2. intrans. to shoot forth, 
spring up: Heb. xii. 15 [W. 252 (237). Comp. : ἐκ-, 
συμ-φύω.} * 

φωλεός, -o0, 6, a lurking-hole, burrow; a lair: of ani- 
mals, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. (Aristot., Ael, Plut. 
Geop., al.) * 

φωνέω, -ῶ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐφώνει; fut. φωνήσω; 1 
aor. ἐφώνησα; 1 aor. inf. pass. φωνηθῆναι ; (φωνή); 2: 
as fr. Hom. down, intrans. to sound, emit a sound, to 
speak: of a cock, to crow, Mt. xxvi. 34, 74 sq.; Mk. xiv. 
30, 68 [L br. WH om. the cl. (see the latter's App. ad 
loc.)], 72; Lk. xxii. 34, 60sq.; Jn. xiii. 38; xviii. 27, (of 
the cries of other animals, Is. xxxviii. 14; Jer. xvii. 11; 
Zeph. ii. 14 ; rarely so in prof. auth. as [ Aristot. (see L. 
and S. s. v. I. 2)], Aesop. fab. 36 [225 ed. Halm]); of 
men, to cry, cry out, cry aloud, speak with a loud voice: 
foll. by the words uttered, Lk. viii. 8; with φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 
added [(cf. W. $32, 2 fin.), Mk. i. 26 T Tr WH]; Acts 
xvi. 28; ἐφώνησε λέγων, Lk. viii. 54; φωνήσας εἶπεν, Lk. 
Xvi. 24; φωνήσας φωνῇ pey. εἶπεν, Lk. xxiii. 46; ἐφών. 
κραυγῇ [L T Tr WH φωνῇ] pey. λέγων, Rev. xiv. 18; 
[φωνήσαντες ἐπυνθάνοντο (WH txt. ἐπύθοντο), Acts x. 
18]. 2. as fr. [Hom. Od. 24, 5351 Soph. down, 


661 





φωνή 


trans. a. to call, call to one’s self: rwá, — either 
by one's own voice, Mt. xx. 32; xxvii. 47; Mk. ix. 35: 
x. 49 [cf. B. $141, 5fin.]; xv. 35; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 9; 
iv.16; x. 3L T Tr WH ; xi. 28*; xviii. 33; Acts ix. 41; 
x. 7;—or through another; to send for, summon: Mk. 
iii. 31 RG; Lk. xvi. 2; Jn. ix. 18, 24; xi. 28>; εἶπε por 


^ 3^ , L xix. 15- 1 
| θῆναι αὐτῷ τούς κτλ. Lk. xix. 15; hav. τινα ἐκ, with a gen 


of the place, to call out of (i.e. bid one to quit a place 
and come to one), Jn. xii. 17. b. to invite : Lk. xiv. 
12. C. i. q- to address, accost, call by a name: τινά, 
foll. by a nom. of the title (see W. $29, 1; [B. $131, 8]), 
Jn. xiii. 13. [Cowr.: dva-, ἐπι-, προσ-, συμ-φωνέω. * 
φωνή, -5s, ἡ, (φάω to shine, make clear, [cf. Curtius 


ip; 1. a sound, tone: of inanimate things, as of 
musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [ T om. ¢., WH give it 
only in mrg.; ef. B. $132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; Rev. 
xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3; xxiv. 8; Sir.1.16 ; 1 Macc. 
v. 31; ὀργάνων, Plat. de rep. 3 p. 397a.; συρίγγων, Eur. 
Tro. 127; ψαλτηρίου καὶ αὐλοῦ, Plut. mor. p. 713 c.) ; of 
wind, Jn. iii. 8; Acts ii. 6 ; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1; xiv. 
2; xix. 6, cf. iv. 5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; noise, of a 
millstone, Rev. xviii. 22; of a thronging multitude, Rev. 
xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek. 
i. 24), ibid.; of waters (Ezek. i. 24; 4 Esdr. vi. 17), Rev. 
i 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6; also with the gen. of a thing im- 
plying speech, the sound [A.V. voice]: τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ, 
Lk. i. 44; ῥημάτων, Heb. xii. 19; the ery (of men), φωνὴ 
μεγάλη. ἃ loud ery, Mk. xv. 37; the clamor of men mak- 
ing a noisy demand, Lk. xxiii 23, cf. Acts xix. 34; 
absol. a cry i. e. wailing, lamentation, Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer. 
xxxvii. (xxxi) 15). 2. a voice, i. e. the sound of 
uttered words: λαλεῖν φωνάς, Rev. x. 3; those who begin 
to cry out or call to any one are said τὴν φωνὴν αἴρειν, 
Lk. xvii. 13; πρός twa, Acts iv. 24; φωνὴν ἐπαίρειν, Lk. 
xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22; [φ. κράζειν (or ἐκ- 
κράζειν), Acts xxiv. 21 (cf. B. $143,11)]; φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 
added to verbs: to λέγειν, Rev. v.12: viii. 13; (ἐν φωνῇ 
pey. Rev. xiv. 7 [Lehm. om. ἐν; xiv. 9]) ; to εἰπεῖν, Lk. 
viii. 28; Acts xiv. 10; to φάναι, Acts xxvi. 24; to αἰνεῖν τὸν 
θεόν, Lk. xix. 37; with verbs of crying out, shout- 
ing: ἀναβοᾶν, Mt. xxvii. 46 [RGLtxt. T]; βοᾶν, [ Mt. 
xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH]; Mk. xv.34; Actsviii. 7 ; φωνεῖν, 
[Mk.i. 26 T Tr WH]; Lk. xxiii. 46; Acts xvi. 28; [Rev. 
xiv. 18 LT Tr WH); ἀναφωνεῖν, Lk.i. 42 [R GL Tr mrg.]; 
κηρύσσειν (ἐν pov. pey.), Rev. v. 2 [ Rec. om. év]; κραυγά- 
(ew, Jn. xi. 43; dvakpá(ew, Lk. iv. 33 ; κράζειν, Mt. xxvii. 
50; Mk.i. 26[RG L]; v. 7; Acts vii. 57, 60; Rev. vi. 10; 
vii. 2, 10; x. 3; [xviii. 2 Rec. ]; xix. 17; κράζ. ἐν pov. pey- 
Rev. xiv. 15; ἐν ἰσχυρᾷ φωνῇ, Rev. xviii. 2 [GL T Tr 
WH]; pera φωνῆς pey. δοξάζειν τὸν θ. Lk. xvii. 15; of 
declarations from heaven, heard though no speaker is 
seen: ἰδοὺ φωνὴ λέγουσα, Mt. iii. 17; xvii. 5; ἔρχεται 
φωνή. Mk. ix. 7[R GL Tr txt.]; Jn. xii. 28; ἐξέρχεται, 
Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; γίνεται φωνή, Mk. i. 11 [Τ᾿ om. WH 
br. éyév.; ix. 7 T Tr mre. WH]; Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35 sq.; 
Jn. xii. 30; [Acts vii. 31 (where Rec. adds πρὸς airév)]; 
πρός τινα, Acts x. 13, 15; [φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ, 2 Pet. 


φῶς 
i 17]; ἐγένοντο φωναὶ μεγάλαι, Rev. xi. 15; [ἀπεκρίθη 
φωνή, Acts xi. 9]; ἀκούειν φωνὴν [cf. B. §§ 132,17; 144, 
16 a.], Acts ix. 4; xxii. 9, [14]; xxvi. 14; 2 Pet. i. 18; 
Rev.i.10; iv. 1[B. $ 129, 8 b.]; vi. 6 [here L T TrWH 
insert ὡς], 7 [here G om. Tr br. $ov.]; ix. 13 [B. u.s.]; 
x. 4, 8; xi. I2[R GL WH mrg.]; xii. 10; xiv. 2; xviii. 
4; xix. 6; ἀκούειν ovis [B. $132, 17; W. $30, τ d.], 
Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 7; Rev. (xi. 12 T Tr WH txt.]; 
xiv. 13; xvi. 1; xxi.3; βλέπειν τὴν dov. i.e. the one 
who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12. φωνή with a gen. of 
the subject: βοῶντος, Mt.iii.3; Mk.i.3; Lk.iii.4; Jn. 
i. 23, all fr. Is. xl. 3; [ἀγγέλου ὅταν μέλλῃ σαλπίζειν, Rev. 
x. 7]; ἡ φΦ. τινος, the natural (familiar) sound of one's 
voice, Acts xii. 14; Rev. iii. 20, (Cant. v. 2); the man- 
ner of speaking, as a shepherd's (ery or eall to his 
sheep), Jn. x. 3-5; to such ‘voices’ Jesus likens his 
precepts approved (‘heard’) by all the good, Jn. x. 16, 
27, ef. xviii. 37; ἀνθρώπου, human utterance, 2 Pet. ii. 
16; φ. τινος, the voice of a clamorous person, Mt. xii. 19 
(Is. xlii. 2) ; of one exulting, jubilant, Jn. iii. 29; Rev. 
xviii. 23; ἀγγέλων πολλῶν, singing the praises of Christ, 
Rev. v. 11 sq.; the sound of the words of Christ as he 
shall recall the dead to life (the Resurrection-cry), Jn. 
v. 25, 28; ἀρχαγγέλου, the awakening shout of the arch- 
angel, the leader of the angelic host, 1 Th. iv. 16; τοῦ 
θεοῦ, of God, —teaching, admonishing, whether in the 
O. T. Seriptures or in the gospel, Jn. v. 37; Heb. iii. 7, 
15; iv. 7; shaking the earth, Heb. xii. 26; the speech, 
discourse, θεοῦ οὐκ ἀνθρ. Acts xii. 22; [τὰς φωνὰς τῶν 
προφητῶν, the predictions (‘read every sabbath’), Acts 
xiii. 27] ; ἀλλάξαι τὴν φ. (see ἀλλάσσω), Gal.iv. 20. 8. 
speech, i.e. a language, tongue: 1 Co. xiv. 10 sq. (Joseph. 
c. Ap. 1, 1; [1, 9, 2; 1, 14,1,ete.]; Ceb. tab. 33; Ael. 
v. h. 12, 48; Diog. Laért. 8, 3; for other exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. see Passow s. v. p. 2377^; [L. and S. s. v. II. 3]; 
Gen. xi. 1; Deut. xxviii. 49; τῇ ἑβραΐδι φωνῇ, 4 Macc. 
xii. 7; τῇ πατρίῳ φωνῇ, 2 Macc. vii. 8, 21, 27). [Svw. 
cf. Schmidt ch. 1 $27; Trench $1xxxix.; and see AaAéo, 
ad init. ]* 

as, φωτός. τό, (contr. fr. φάος, fr. φάω to shine), fr. 
Hom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form φάος) down, 
Hebr. Ws, light (opp. to τὸ σκότος, ἡ σκοτία) ; 1. 
prop. a. univ.: 6 θεὸς ὁ εἰπὼν ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι, 
2 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3); λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; 
νεφέλη φωτός [Grsb. txt.] i. e. consisting of light, i. q. 
φωτεινή in R L T Tr WH, Mt. xvii. 5; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου, 
of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ, the light 
(i.e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he 
does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi. 
10; thelight emitted by a lamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33 L Tr 
txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels 
when they appear on earth: hence ἄγγελος φωτός, 2 Co. 
xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear, 
Acts xii. 7; a light of this kind shone around Paul when 
he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [9], 11[W. 371 
(318)]; with the addition of οὐρανόθεν, Acts xxvi. 13; 
of ἀπὸ [or ἐκ] τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Acts ix. 3. b. by meton. 
anything emitting light: a heavenly luminary (or star), 


662 











φῶς 
plur. Jas. i. 17 [see πατήρ, 3 a.]; fire, because it is light 
and gives light: Lk. xxii. 56 ; θερμαίνεσθαι πρὸς τὸ φῶς, 
Mk. xiv. 54, (1 Mace. xii. 29; Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 29; Cyr. 
7, 5, 27); a lamp or torch: plur. φῶτα, Acts xvi. 29 (pas 
ἔχειν, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 8; in plur. often in Plut.). ο. 
light i.e. brightness (Lat. splendor), [see a. above]: 
ἡλίου, Rey. xxii. 5; of a lamp, Jn. v. 85 (where it sym- 
bolizes his rank, influence, worth, mighty deeds) ; with 
the addition of λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23 (Jer. xxv. 10); of 
the divine Shechinah (see δόξα, III. 1), Rev. xxi. 24 (Ps. 
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 16; Is. Ix. 1, 19 sq.). 2. φῶς is 
often used in poetic discourse, in metaphor, and in 
parable ; a. The extremely delicate, subtile, pure, 
brilliant quality of light has led to the use of φῶς as an 
appellation of God, i. e. as by nature incorporeal, spot- 
less, holy, [cf. Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 15 sqq.]: 
1 Jn. i. 5 (Sap. vii. 26 where cf. Grimm); he is said εἶναι 
ἐν τῷ φωτί, in a state of supreme sanctity, 1 Jn. i. 7; 
φῶς οἰκῶν ἀπρόσιτον, a fig. describing his nature as alike 
of consummate majesty and inaccessible to human com- 
prehension, 1 Tim. vi. 16 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2); used of 
that heavenly state, consummate and free from every 
imperfection, to which the true disciples of Christ will 
be exalted, i. q. the kingdom of light, Col. i. 12. b. 
By a fig. freq. in the N. T. [cf. in classie Grk. τῆς ἀλη- 
θείας τὸ φῶς, Eur. I. T. 1046 etc.; see L. and S. s. v. 
II. 2], φῶς is used to denote truth and its knowledge, to- 
gether with the spiritual purity congruous with it, (opp. to 
τὸ σκότος b., ἡ σκοτία, q. V.) : ἡ ζωὴ ἦν τὸ φῶς τῶν avOpa- 
πων, had the nature of light in men, i. e. became the 
source of human wisdom, Jn. i. 4; esp. the saving truth 
embodied in Christ and by his love and effort imparted 
to mankind, Mt. iv. 16; Jn. i. 5; iii. 19-21; Acts xxvi. 
18, 23; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. v. 185 [ef. below]; τὸ φῶς τὸ 
ἀληθινόν, 1 Jn. ii. 8; τὸ θαυμαστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ φῶς, 1 Pet. 
ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2 cf. 59, 2); τὸ φῶς ὑμῶν, 
the divine truth with which ye are imbued, Mt. v. 16; 
ἔχειν τὸ φ. τῆς ζωῆς, the light by which the true life is 
gained, Jn. viii. 12; τὰ érAa[Lehm. mrg. ἔργα] τοῦ φωτός, 
Ro. xiii. 12; καρπὸς τοῦ φωτός, Eph. v.9GLT Tr WH; 
ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατεῖν, to live agreeably to saving wis- 
dom, 1 Jn. i. 7; ἐν τῷ φωτὶ εἶναι, to be imbued with 
saving wisdom, μένειν, to continue devoted to it, to per- 
severe in keeping it, 1 Jn. ii. 9 sq.; of viol τοῦ φωτός 
(see vids, 2 p. 6352), Lk. xvi. 8; Jn. xii. 36; 1 Th. v. 5; 
τέκνα τοῦ d. (see τέκνον, c. B. p. 618"), Eph. v. 8. by 
meton. φῶς is used of one in whom wisdom and spiritual 
purity shine forth, and who imparts the same to others: 
φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει, Ro. ii. 19; [pas ἐθνῶν, Acts xiii. 47]; 
in a pre-eminent sense is Jesus the Messiah called 
φῶς and τὸ φῶς: Lk. ii. 32; Jn. i. 7sq.; xii. 35 sq. 46; 
τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5, (τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου 
τὸ δοθὲν ἐν ὑμῖν εἰς φωτισμὸν παντὸς ἀνθρώπου, Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Levi § 14); τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινόν, Jn. i. 9; by 
the same name the disciples of Jesus are distinguished, 
Mt. ν. 14; Christians are called φῶς ἐν κυρίῳ, having 
obtained saving wisdom in communion with Christ, Eph. 
v. 8. πᾶν τὸ φανερούμενον pas ἐστιν, everything made 


φωστήρ 


manifest by the aid of Christian truth has taken on the 
nature of light, so that its true character and quality 
are no longer hidden, Eph. v. 13> [al. take φῶς here in 
‘an outward or physical sense, and regard the state- 
ment as a general truth confirmatory of the assertion 
made respecting spiritual “φωτός just before (cf. 
above) J. c. By a fig. borrowed from daylight φῶς 
is used of that which is exposed to the view of all: ἐν τῷ 
φωτί (opp. to ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ), openly, publicly, (ἐν φάει, 
Pind. Nem. 4, 63), Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3. d. reason, 
mind; the power of understanding esp. moral and spir- 
itual truth: τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοί, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 35. 
[Sxx. see φέγγος, fin.] * 

φωστήρ, -jpos, 6, (φῶς, Parka) ; 1. that which 
gives light, an illuminator, (Vulg. luminar): of the stars 
(luminaries), Phil. ii. 15 (Sap. xiii. 2; Sir. xliii. 7; Gen. 
i. 14, 16; Heliod. 2, 24 ; [ Anthol. Pal. 15,17; of sun and 
moon, Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi 14]; eccles. writ.). 2 
light, brightness : Rev. xxi. 11 (Anthol. 11, 359) [al. refer 
this to 1; cf. Trench § xlvi.].* 

φωσ-φόρος, -ov, (pas and φέρω), light-bringing, giving 
light, ( Arstph., Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; as subst. ὁ φ. (Lat. 
Lucifer), the planet Venus, the morning-star, day-star. 
(Plat. Tim. Loer. p. 96 e.; Plut., al.): 2 Pet. i. 19, on 
the meaning of this pass. see Avyvos.* 

$oravós [WH dards, see I, c]. τῆ, τόν, (pas), light, 
i. e. composed of light, of a bright character : νεφέλη, Mt. 
xvii. 5 [not Grsb.]: of ὀφθαλμοὶ κυρίου μυριοπλασίως ἡλίου 
“φωτεινότεροι, Sir. xxiii. 19. — full of light, well lighted, 
opp. to σκοτεινός, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (rà σκοτεινὰ 
"καὶ Ta φωτεινὰ σώματα, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1).* 

Φωτίζω : fut. φωτίσω (Rev.xxii.5 L WH; 1 Co. iv. 5), 
Attic φωτιῶ (Rev. xxii. 5 G T Tr); 1 aor. ἐφώτισα ; pf. 
pass. ptep. πεφωτισμένος : 1 aor. pass. ἐφωτίσθην ; 1. 
intrans. to give light, to shine, (Aristot., Theophr., Plut., 
al.; Sept. for ^N, Num. viii. 2, ete.): ἐπί τινα, Rev. xxii. 
5 [Rom. WH br. ἐπί]. 2. trans. a. prop. to en- 


Jighten, light up, illumine: τινέ, Lk. xi. 36; τὴν modu, | 


663 





χαίρω 


Rev. xxi. 23 (ἀκτῖσι τὸν κόσμον, of the sun, Diod. 3, 48; 
Sept. for YN); ἡ γῆ ἐφωτίσθη ἐκ τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, [A.V. 
was lightened] shone with his glory, Rev. xviii. 1. b. 
to bring to light, render evident: ta κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους, 
1 Co. iv. 5; [Eph. iii. 9 ace. to the reading of T L br. 
WH txt. (but see c.) ]. (τὴν αἵρεσίν twos, the preference, 
opinion, of one, Polyb. 23, 3, 10; τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Epict. 
diss. 1, 4, 31; πεφωτισμένων τῶν πραγμάτων ὑπὸ τῆς ἀλη- 
θείας, Leian. cal. non tem. ered. 32); to cause something 
to exist and thus to come to light and become clear to all : 
ζωὴν k. ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου. opp. to καταργῆσαι 
τὸν θάνατον, 2 Tim. 1. 10. c. by a use only bibl. and 
eccles. to enlighten spiritually, imbue with saving knowl- 
edge: twa, Jn. i. 9; with a saving knowledge of the 
gospel: hence φωτισθέντες of those who have been 
made Christians, Heb. vi. 4; x. 32; foll. by an indir. 
quest. Eph. iii. 9 [see b. above], (Sir. xlv. 17; for 1x7, 
Ps. exviii. (exix.) 130; for 77)n, to instruct, inform, 
teach, Judg. xiii. 8 Alex.; 2 K. xii. 2; φωτιοῦσιν αὐτοὺς 
τὸ κρίμα τοῦ θεοῦ τῆς yrs, 2 K. xvii. 27 [cf. 28; al.]) ; to 
give understanding to: πεφωτισμένοι τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τῆς 
καρδίας [ Rec. διανοίας, as respects the eyes of your soul, 
Eph. i. 18 [B. $145, 6]; [(ef. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 20, 
etc.) ]-* 

φωτισμός, -o), 6, (φωτίζω) ; a. the act of enlight- 
ening, illumination : πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως, i. q. πρὸς 
τὸ φωτίζειν τὴν γνῶσιν, that by teaching we may bring to 
light ete. 2 Co. iv. 6 (on which pass. see πρόσωπον, 1 a. 
sub fin. p. 551° top). b. γι φηϊπεϑε, bright light, (ἐξ 
ἡλίου. Sext. Emp. p. 522, 9; ἀπὸ σελήνης, Plut. [de fac. 
in orb. lun. $ 16, 13] p. 929 d. [ib. $ 18, 4 p. 931 a.]; Sept. 
for ἬΝ, Ps. xxvi. (xxvii) 1; xliii. (xliv.) 4; lxxvii. 
(Ixxviii.) 14; Job iii. 9; for isn, Ps. Ixxxix. (xe.) 8): 
eis TO μὴ αὐγάσαι [καταυγάσαι L mrg. Tr mrg.] τὸν $. τοῦ 
εὐαγγελίου, that the brightness of the gospel might not 
shine forth [R. V. dawn (upon them)], i. e. (dropping 
the fig.) that the enlightening truth of the gospel might 
not be manifest or be apprehended, 2 Co. iv. 4.* 


X 


χαίρω; inpe ἔχαιρον ; fut. χαρήσομαι (Lk. i. 14; Jn. 
xvi. 20, 22; Phil. i. 18, for the earlier form χαιρήσω, cf. 
{W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60)]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 322 sq. ; 
Matthiae § 255 s. v.; Kühner $343 s.v.; Kriiger § 40 
s. v.; [Veitch s. v.]), once yap (Rev. xi. 10 Rec., a form 
occurring nowhere else); 2 aor. [pass. as act.] ἐχάρην 
(cf. συγχαίρω, init.]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nn, 
ou, Uy; to rejoice, be glad; 
strict sense: [Mk. xiv. 11]; Lk. xv. 5, [32]; xix. 6, 37; 
xxii. 5; xxiii. 8; Jn. iv. 36; viii. 56; xx. 20; Actsv.41; 


a. in the prop. and | 





viii. 39 ; xi. 23; xiii. 48; 2 Co. [vi. 10] ; vii. 7; xiii. 9, 11 
[some refer this to b. in the sense of farewell]; Phil. ii. 
17, 28; Col. ii. 5; 1 Th. v. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 13; .3.Jn.,35 
opp. to κλαίειν, Ro. xii. 15; 1 Co. vii. 30; opp. to κλαίειν 
x. θρηνεῖν, Jn. xvi.20; opp. to λύπην ἔχειν, ib. 22; joined 
with ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι, Mt. v. 12; Rey. xix. 7; with oxipray, 
Lk. vi. 23; χαίρειν ἐν κυρίῳ (see ἐν, I. 6 b. p.211" mid. [ef. 
B. 185 (161)]), Phil. iii. 1; iv. 4, 10; χαίρειν χαρὰν 
μεγάλην [cf. χαρά, a.], to rejoice exceedingly, Mt. ii. 10; 
also χαρᾷ χαίρειν (W. $54, 3; B. $133, 22), Jn. iii. 29; 


χάλαζα 


ἡ χαρά ἧ χαίρομεν, 1 Th. iii. 9; χαίρειν ἐπί with a dat. of 
the object, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i. 14 ; xiii. 17; Acts xv. 31; 
xvi.19 L T Tr WH ; 1 Co. xiii. 6; xvi. 17; 2 Co. vii. 

; Rev. xi. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 35; Cyr. 8,4, 12; Plat. 
lg 5p. 739d.; ef. Kühner $425 Anm. 6; [W. $33 a.; 
B. $133, 23]; in the Grk. writ. generally LS a simple 
dat. of the obj. as Prov. xvii.-19) ; διά τι, Jn. iii. 29 ; 
διά twa, Jn. xi. 15; 1 Th. iii. 9; ἐν τούτῳ, Phil. i. 18; 
[ἐν τ. παθήμασί pou, Col. i. 24]; with an ace. of the obj., 
τὸ αὐτό, Phil. ii. 18 (ταὐτά, Dem. p. 323,6; cf. Matthiae 
$414 p. 923; Krüger § 46, 5, 3 ; τὸ ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν (eee ὁ 6, II. 
8 p. 436°), Ro. xvi. 19 RG; ἀπό twos, i. q. χαρὰν ἔχειν, 
to derive joy from one, 2 Co. ii. 3; χαίρ. foll. by ὅτι, 
Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16; 2 Jn. 4; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, Lk. 
x.20; with a dat. of the cause: τῇ ἐλπίδι χαίροντες, let 
the hope of future blessedness give you joy, Ro. xii. 12 
[yet ef. W. $31, 1 k., 7 d.]. b. in a broader sense, 
lo be well, to thrive; in salutations, the impv. χαῖρε, hail / 
Lat. salve, (so fr. Hom. down): Mt. xxvi.49; xxvii. 29; 
Mk. xv. 18; Lk. i. 28; Jn. xix. 3; plur. xaípere, [ A. V. 
all hail], Mt. xxviii. 9; at the beginning of letters the 
inf. χαίρειν (sc. λέγει or κελεύει): Acts xv. 23; xxiii. 
26; Jas. i. 1, (often in the bks. of Mace.; cf. Grimm on 
1 Mace. x. 18; Otto in the Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for 
1867, p. 678 sqq.; ef. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 99 
sqq.; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 27; Ael. v. h. 1, 25); fully, χαίρειν 
λέγω, to give one greeting, salute, 2 Jn. 10, [11]. [Cowr.: 
cw-xatpo. ] * 

χάλαζα, -ης, ἡ, (χαλάω, q. v. [so Etym. Magn. 805, 1; 
but Curtius ($ 181) says “certainly has nothing to do 
with it "]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 773, hail: Rev. viii. 
Ἐπὶ 19.) xy 21. 

χαλάω, -@; fut. yakdow; 1 aor. ἐχάλασα; 1 aor. pass. 
Aeschyl. and Pind. down; a. to 
loosen, slacken, relax. b. to let down from a higher 
place to a lower: τί or τινά, Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v. 4 sq.; Acts 
xxvii. 17, 30, [in these two pass. in a nautical sense, to 
lower]; τινὰ ἐν σπυρίδι, Acts ix. 25; pass. 2 Co. xi. 33.* 

XahSaios, -ov, 6, a Chaldwan; γῆ Χαλδαίων the land of 
the Chaldwans, Chaldza: Acts vii. 4, where a reference 
to Gen. xi. 28, 31 and xv. 7 seems to show that southern 
Armenia is referred to. The different opinions of oth- 
er interpreters are reviewed by Dillmann on Genesis 
(3te Aufl) p. 223 sq.; [ef. Schrader in Riehm 8. v.; 
Sayce in Encycl. Brit. s. v. Babylonia ].* 

χαλεπός, -7, -óv, (fr. χαλέπτω to oppress, annoy, [(?)]), 
fr. Hom. down, hard (Lat. difficilis) ; a. hard to do, 
to take, to approach. b. hard to bear, troublesome, 
καιροὶ χαλεποί, [R.V. grievous], 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; 
of men, Mt. viii. 28 (Is. xviii. 2 
and often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down).* 

χαλιναγωγέω, -ὦ ; 


ἐχαλάσθην; fr. 


dangerous : 
harsh, fierce, savage: 


1 aor. inf. χαλιναγωγῆσαι ; (χαλινός 
and dye); to lead by a bridle, to guide, (ἵππον, Walz, 
Rhett. Graec. i. p. 425, 19) ; trop. to bridle, hold in check, 
restrain: τὴν γλῶσσαν, Jas. i. 26 ; τὸ σῶμα, Jas. iii. 2; τὰς 
τῶν ἡδονῶν ὀρέξεις. Leian. tyrann. 4. [(Poll. 1 § 215.)]* 

χαλινός, -o), ὁ, (χαλάω), α bridle: Jas. iii. 3; Rey. xiv. 
20. (From Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) * 


664 


xapá 


χάλκεος, -éa, -eov, contr. -ods, -ἢ, -oUv, (χαλκός), fr. Hom. 
down, brazen, [A. V. of brass]: Rev. ix. 20.* 

χαλκεύς, -Ews, ὁ, (χαλκός), fr. Hom. down, a worker in 
copper or iron, a smith: 2 Tim. iv. 14 [A. V. copper- 
smith J.* 

χαλκηδών, -óvos, 6, chalcedony, a precious stone de- 
scribed by Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (18), 72 [see B. D. (esp. Am. 
ed.) s. v-] : Rev. xxi. 19.* 

χαλκίον, -ov, τό, (χαλκός), & (copper or) brazen vessel: 
Mk. vii. 4. ([Arstph.], Xen. oec. 8, 19; [al.].) * 

χαλκο λίβανον (so Suidas [but see ed. Gaisf. s. v.]), -ov,. 
τό, more correctly χαλκολίβανος, -ov, ἡ, (acc. to the read- 
ing as it ought to be restored [(but see the edd.)] in. 
Rey. i. 15 ὡς ἐν καμίνῳ πεπυρωμένῃ ; cf. Düsterdieck's crit. 
note [see B. 80 (69) note]), a word of doubtful meaning,. 
found only in Rev. i. 15, and ii. 18, chalcolibanus, Vulg. 
aurichaleum or orichaleum (so cod. Amiat., [4]. aeric.]; 
Luther Messing, [R. V. burnished brass]); ace. to the 
testimony of an ancient Greek [ Ansonius] in Salmasius 
(Exercitt. ad Solin. p. 810 a.: 
δένδρων, kai ὁ μὲν ἄῤῥην ὀνομάζεται χαλκολίβανος, ἡλιοειδὴς 
καὶ πυῤῥὸς ἤγουν ξανθός), a certain kind of (yellow) 
Jrankincense; but both the sense of the passages in Rev. 
and a comparison of Dan. x. 6 and Ezek. i. 7, which 
seem to have been in the writer's thought, compel us to 
understand some metal, like gold if not more precious (cf. 
Hebr. Sown, a metal composed of gold and silver, Sept. 
ἤλεκτρον, Vulg. electrum, Ezek. i. 4,27; viii. 2); this in- 
terpretation is confirmed by the gloss of Suidas: εἶδος 
ἠλέκτρου τιμιώτερον χρυσοῦ, ἔστι δὲ τὸ ἤλεκτρον ἀλλότυπον" 
χρυσίον μεμιγμένον ὑέλῳ k. λιθείᾳ. The word is com- 
pounded, no doubt, of χαλκός and λίβανος, not of χαλκός 
and 129 ‘white. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Metalle; Wetzel 
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1869, p. 92 sqq.; cf. 
Ewald, Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 117 sq.; [Lee in the- 
*Speaker's Com.’ ad loc. J.* 

χαλκός, -o, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nna, brass: 
1 Co. xiii. 1; Rev. xviii. 12; (like the Lat. aes) what is. 
made of eem money, coins of brass (also of silver and 
of gold), Mt.x. 9; Mk.vi.8; xii. 41. [B.D. s. v. Brass; 
Dict. of Antiq. s. v. aes.] * 

χαμαί, adv. ; a. on the ground, on the earth. b. 
to the ground; in both senses fr. Hom. down; in the- 
latter sense Jn. ix. 6 [where, however, Eng. idiom re- 
tains on]; xviii. 6.* 

Χαναάν, ἡ, Hebr. 1}}}5 [lit. ‘lowland '], Canaan, the 
land of Canaan, indecl. prop. name: in the narrower 
sense, of that part of Palestine lying west of the Jordan, 
Acts vii. 11; in a wider sense, of all Palestine, Acts 
x02 

Xavavaios, -a, -ov, Hebr. *3733, Canaanite; the name 
of the ancient inhabitants of Palestine before its con- 
quest by the Israelites; in Christ's time i. q. Phanician 
[R. V. Canaanitish]: Mt. xv. 22.* 

χαρά, -as, 7, (χαίρω), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph. down, 
Sept. for yo? and pei», Joy, gladness ; a: Lika: 
14; xv. 7,10; Jn. xv. 11; xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 18: Acts viii.. 

; 2 Co. vii. 13; viii. 2; Gal. v. 22; Col. 1.115 Phil ie 


ὁ λίβανος ἔχει τρία εἴδη: 


χάραγμα 


2; 1Jn.i.4; 2 Jn. 12; opp. to κατήφεια, Jas. iv. 9; opp. 
to λύπη, Jn. xvi. 20; 2 Co. ii. 3; Heb. xii.11; ὑμῶν, i. e. 
the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the ‘sor- 
row’ which Paul on returning to Corinth would both 
experience and give, ii. 1-3) ; χαρὰ τῆς πίστεως, spring- 
ine from faith, Phil. i. 25; χαίρειν χαρὰν pey. Mt. ii. 10 
[W.$32, 2; B. 131, 5]; ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι χαρᾷ, 1 Pet. i. 8; 
χαρὰν [ Rec." χάριν] πολλὴν ἔχειν ἐπί with a dat. of the 
thing, Philem. 7; πληροῦν τινα χαρᾶς, Ro. xv. 13; πλη- 
ροῦσθαι χαρᾶς, Acts xiii. 52; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; ποιεῖν τινε χαρὰν 
μεγάλην, Acts xv. 35 ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς, for joy, Mt. xiii. 44; 
Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts xii. 14; ἐν χαρᾷ (ἔρχεσθαι), Ro. xv. 
32; pera χαρᾶς, with joy, Mt. xiii. 20; xxviii. 8; Mk. iv. 
16; Lk. viii. 13; x. 17; xxiv. 52; Acts xx. 24 Rec.; Phil. 
1.4; ii. 29; Heb. x. 34; xu 17, (Polyb. 11, 33, 7; 22, 
17, 12; Xen. Hiero 1, 25); with πνεύματος ἁγίου added, 
joy wrought by the Holy Spirit, 1 Th. i. 6; χαρὰ ἐν 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ, joyousness caused by [ef. ἐν, I. 6 (p. 211° 
bot.) and B. § 133, 23] the Holy Spirit, Ro. xiv. 17; χαρὰ 
ἐπί τινι, 2 Co. vii.4; χαίρειν χαρᾷ διά τι, Jn. iii. 29 [cf. 
χαίρω. a] ; also διά τινα (a relative pron. intervening), 
1 Th.iii.9; ἡ χαρὰ ὅτι, Jn. xvi. 215 χαρὰ tva (see tva, IT. 
92 d.), 3 Jn. 4. b. by meton. the cause or occasion 
of joy: Lk. ii. 10; Jas. i. 2; [so 2 Co. i. 15 WH txt. Tr 
mrg. (al. χάρις, q. v. 3 b.)]; of persons who are one's 
‘joy’: 1 Th. ii. 19 sq. ; Phil.iv. 1; of a joyful condition 
or state : - χαρᾶς, to attain to blessedness at the 
right hand of God in heaven, Heb. xii. 2; the same 
idea is expressed in the parable by the words, 7 yapa 
tov κυρίου, the blessedness which the Lord enjoys, Mt. 
xxv. 21.29.* 

χάραγμα, -ros, τό, (χαράσσω to engrave) ; a. a 
stamp, an imprinted mark: of the mark stamped on the 
forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers 
of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq.; xiv. 9, 11; xv. 2 Rec.; 
xvi 2; xix. 20; xx. 4, (πυρός, the mark branded upon 
horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thing carved, sculp- 
ture, graven work: of idolatrous images, Acts xvii. 29. 
(In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.) * 

χαρακτήρ. -7pos, ὁ, (χαράσσω to engrave, cut into), fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. prop. the instrument 
used in engraving or carving, (cf. ζωστήρ, λαμπτήρ, Xov- 
Tp. φυσητήρ; cf. our ‘stamp’ or ‘die’). 2. the 
mark (figure or letters) stamped upon that instrument or 
wrought out on it; hence univ. a mark or figure burned 
in (Lev. xiii. 28) or stamped on, an impression; the 
exact expression (the image) of any person or thing, 
marked likeness, precise reproduction in every respect (cf. 
facsimile): x. τῆς ὑποστάσεως τοῦ ἔτει of Christ, acc. to 
his nature as 6 θεῖος λόγος. Heb. i. 3; σφραγῖδι θεοῦ. ἧς 
ὁ χαρακτήρ ἐστιν ὁ ἀΐδιος λόγος, Philo de plant. Noé $5; 
x: θείας δυνάμεως, of the human mind, Philo, quod det. 
potiori ins. § 23; God τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἔπλασεν τῆς ἑαυτοῦ 
εἰκόνος χαρακτῆρα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 33,4; of πιστοὶ ἐν 
ἀγάπῃ χαρακτῆρα θεοῦ πατρὸς διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (ἔχουσιν), 
Tgnat. ad Magnes. ὅ, 3. the peculiarity, by which things 
are recognized and distinguished from each other, [cf. 
Eng. characteristic]: 2 Mace. iv. 10.* 


AA 
avit . . 


66 








- 


5 χάρις 


χάραξ, -ακος, 6, (χαράσσωλ) ; 1. a pale or stake, a 
palisade, [(Arstph., Dem., al.)]. 2. a palisade or 
rampart (i. e. pales between which earth, stones, trees 
and timbers are heaped and packed together): Lk. xix. 
43 (Is. xxxvii. 33; Ezek. iv. 2; xxvi. 8; Polyb.; Joseph. 
vit. 43; Arr. exp. Alex. 2, 19, 9; Plut., al.).* 

χαρίζομαι ; depon. mid.; fut. χαρίσομαι (Ro. viii. 32; 
Leian. d. mar. 9, 1, for which Grk. writ. com. use the 
Attic χαριοῦμαι [cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq.; B. 37 (32); 
W.$15s.v.]); pf.k«exápwrpar; 1 aor. ἐχαρισάμην ; 1 aor. 
pass. ἐχαρίσθην (Acts iii. 14; 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29, [ef. 
B. 52 46); fut. pass. χαρισθήσομαι with a pass. signif. 
(Philem. 22); (χάρις); often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; 
to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to do & 
favor to, gratify ; a. univ. to show one’s self gra- 
cious, kind, benevolent: τινί, Gal. iii. 18 [4]. (supply T. 
κληρονομίαν and) refer this to c. below]. b. to grant 
forgiveness, to pardon: 2 Co. ii. 7; with a dat. of the 
pers., Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 13; with an ace. of the thing, 
2 Co. ii. 10-[cf. W. § 39,1 b. and 3 N. 3]; τινὶ τὴν ἀδικίαν, 
2 Co. xii. 13 ; τὰ παραπτώματα, Col. ii. 13. c. to give 
graciously, give freely, bestow: τινί τι, Lk. vii. 21; Ro. 
viii. 32; Phil. ii. 9; pass., 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29; where 
a debt is referred to, to forgive [cf. b. above], Lk. vii. 
42 sq. ; τινί τινα, graciously to restore one to another who 
desires his safety (e. g. a captive [R.V. grant]), pass., 
Actsiii. 14; Philem. 22; ; or to preserve for one a person in 
peril, Acts xxvii. 24; τινά τινι, to give up to another one 
whom he may punish or put to death, Acts xxv. 11 [(cf. 
R. V. mrg)]; with the addition of eis ἀπώλειαν, ib. 16.* 

χάριν, acc. of the subst. χάρις used absol.; prop. in favor 
of, for the pleasure of: χάριν Ἕκτορος, Hom. Il. 15, 744, 
al; 1 Mace. ix. 10; Judith viii. 19; like the Lat. abl. 
gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposi- 
tion, and is joined to the gen., for, on account of, for the 
sake of: Gal. iii. 19 (on which see παράβασις) : 1 Tim. 
v. 14; Tit.i.11; Jude 16; τούτου χάριν, on this account, 
Jor this cause, Eph. iii. 1 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54); τούτου x. 
ἵνα, Eph. iii. 14 [cf. W. 566 (526)]; Tit. i. 5; οὗ χάριν, 
for which cause, Lk. vii. 47 ; χάριν τίνος ; Jor what cause ? 
wherefore? 1 Jn.iii.12. Except in 1 Jn. iii. 12, χάριν is 
everywhere in the N. T. placed after the gen., as it gen- 
erally is in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. I. 3 a. p. 2416; 
Herm. ad Vig. p. 701); in the O. T. Apocr. it is placed 
sometimes before, sometimes after; cf. WaAl, Clavis 
Apoer. s .v. 6 b.; Grimm on 1 Macc. iii. 29.* 

χάρις, -cros, acc. χάριν, and twice in LT Tr WH the 
rarer form χάριτα (Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4) which is also 
poetic (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. $44 Anm.1; [ WH. App. 
157^; B. 13 (12)]), ace. plur. χάριτας (Acts xxiv. 27 
RG), ἡ, (χαίρω), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. jim, grace; 
i.e. 1. prop. that which affords joy, pleasure, de- 
licht, sweetness, charm, loveliness : grace of speech (Eccl. 
x. 12; Sir. xxi. 16; xxxvii. 21; Hom. Od. 8 
λόγων, Dem. 51, 9; 1419, 16; χάριτες μωρῶν, verbal 
pleasantries which the foolish affect in order to ingra- 
tiate themselves, Sir. xx. 13), λόγοι χάριτος (gen. of 
quality), Lk. iv. 22 


175; τῶν 


; χάριν διδόναι τοῖς ἀκούουσιν, Eph. iv. 


χάρις 


29; ἐν χάριτι, with grace [the subst. ἅλας being added ; 
see Bp. Lghtft.], Col. iv. 6. 2. good-will, loving- 
kindness, favor: in a broad sense, χάρις παρά τινι, Lk. 
ji. 52; ἔχειν χάριν πρός τινα. to have favor with one, Acts 
ii. 47; χάρις ἐναντίον τινός, Acts vii. 10; [χάριν κατά 
twos αἰτεῖσθαι ὅπως (q. v. II. 2), Acts xxv. 3 (but al. 
refer this to 3 b. below) ]; χάρις (of God) ἐστὶν ἐπί τινα, 
attends and assists one, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; χάριν 
(χάριτα) χάριτας κατατίθεσθαί τινι (see κατατίθημι). Acts 
xxiv. 27; xxv. 9; favor (i. e. act of favoring [cf. W.§ 66 
fin.]), 2 Co. viii. 4. χάρις is used of the kindness of a 
master towards his inferiors or servants, and so esp. 
of God towards men: εὑρίσκειν χάριν παρὰ τῷ 0. Lk. i. 
30; ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts vii. 46; τοῦτο χάρις sc. ἐστίν, 
this wins for us (God's) favor [R.V. is acceptable], 1 Pet. 
ii. 19; with παρὰ θεῷ added, ib. 20; παραδίδοσθαι τῇ x. 
ToU θεοῦ, to be committed or commended to the protect- 
ing and helping favor of God, Acts xiv. 26; xv. 40. The 
apostles and N. T. writers at the beginning and end of 
their Epp. crave for their readers the favor (* grace ") of 
God or of Christ, to which all blessings, esp. spiritual, 
are due: Ro.i. 7; xvi. 20, 22 (R G]; 1 Co.i.3; xvi. 23; 
2Co.i. 2; xiii. 13 (14); Gal. i. 3; vi. 18; Eph.i:2; vi. 
24: Phil i.2; iv: 28; Col. i. 2; iv. 18; 1 Th.i.1; v.28; 
2'Th:1.2; 1.18; 1 'T'1m.1.25 vi. 21(22);.2 Tim.1:251v.99; 
Tit. i. 4 ; iii. 15; Philem. 3, 25 ; Heb. xiii. 25; 1 Pet. i. 2; 
2 Pet. i. 2; iii. 18[cf. 3 a.]; 2Jn.3; Rev. i.4; xxii. 21; cf. 
Otto, Ueber d. apostol. Sezensgruss χάρις ὑμῖν ete., in the 
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1867, p.678sqq. ^ More- 
over, the word χάρις contains the idea of kindness which 
bestows upon one what he has not deserved: Ro. xi. 6; 
hence κατὰ χάριν and κατὰ ὀφείλημα are contrasted in 
Ro. iv. 4, 16; χάριτι and ἐξ ἔργων in Ro. xi. 6; κατ᾽ 
ἐκλογὴν χάριτος, ib. 5; but the N. T. writers use χάρις 
pre-eminently of that kindness by which God bestows 
favors even upon the ill-deserving, and grants to 
sinners the pardon of their offences, and bids them ac- 
cept of eternal salvation through Christ: Ro. iii. 24 ; 
v. 17, 20 sq.; [vi. 1]; 1 Co. xv. 10; Gal. i. 15; 11. 21; Eph. 
1.6; [ΠῚ 11. 5: 7 8ητὶ Philo: ἢ; ΟἹ θ᾽...» ΠῚ τ ihe 
1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. 1. 9; Heb. ii. 9 [here Treg. mrg. 
χωρίς]; x. 29; xii. 15; xiii.9; 1 Pet.i.10; Jude 4; εὑρί- 
oxew χάριν, Heb. iv. 16; ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ σωτήριος, Tit. 
ii. 11; ὁ λύγος τῆς χάριτος, the message of his grace, Acts 
xiv. 3; xx. 32; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts 
xx. 24; it is styled ‘the grace of Christ, in that through 
pity for sinful men Christ left his state of blessedness 
with God in heaven, and voluntarily underwent the 
hardships and miseries of human life, and by his suffer- 
ings and death procured salvation for mankind: [Acts 
xv. 11]; 2 Co. viii. 9; Ro-v. 15; Gal.i.65: [ Tit. 11.7]; 
Jn. i. 14, 17. χάρις is used of the merciful kindness 
by which God, exerting his holy influence upon souls, turns 
them to Christ, keeps, strengthens, increases them in Chris- 
tian faith, knowledge, affection, and kindles them to the 
exercise of the Christian virtues: 2 Co. iv. 15; vi. 1; 
2 ΤῊ. 1. 12; of πεπιστευκότες διὰ τῆς χάριτος, Acts xviii. 
27; ὑπὸ χάριν εἶναι, to be subject to the power of grace, 


666 


χάρις 


opp. to ὑπὸ νόμον εἶναι, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; ἐκπίπτειν τῆς 
xáp- Gal. v. 4; προσμένειν τῇ x- Acts xiii. 43 [GL T Tr 
WH]; ἐπιμένειν, ibid. Rec.; ἐν τῇ χάριτι (RG WH txt. 
om. the art.), prompted by grace, Col. iii. 16; the grace 
of God promoting the progress and blessings of the 
Christian religion, Acts xi. 23; [prompting its posses- 
sors to benefactions, 2 Co. ix. 14]; sustaining and aiding 
the efforts of the men who labor for the cause of 
Christ, 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. i. 12; the favor of Christ, 
assisting and strengthening his followers and ministers 
to bear their troubles, 2 Co. xii. 9. 3. what is 
due to grace; a. the spiritual condition of one 
governed by the power of divine grace, what the theolo- 
gians call the ‘status gratiae’: ἑστηκέναι ἐν τῇ x. Ro. v. 
2: εἰς τὴν x. 1 Pet. v. 12; αὐξάνειν ἐν χάριτι, 2 Pet. iii. 
18; ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ, 2 Tim. 11. 
1. b. a token or proof of grace, 2 Co. i. 15 [ A. V. 
benefit (WH txt. Tr mrg. χαράν, q. v. under b.)]; a gift 
of grace; benefaction, bounty: used of alms, 1 Co. xvi. 3; 
2 Co. viii. 6 sq. 19, (Sir. iii. 29 (31); xxix. 15; xxx. 6; 
4 Mace. v. 8; Xen. Ages. 4, 3sq.; Hier. 8, 4) : πᾶσα χάρις, 
all earthly blessings, wealth, ete., which are due to divine 
goodness, 2 Co. ix. 8; 6 θεὸς πάσης χάριτος, the author 
and giver of benefits of every kind, 1 Pet. v. 10. the aid 
or succor of divine grace: διδόναι χάριν ταπεινοῖς, 1 Pet. 
ν. 5; Jas. iv. 6; the salvation offered to Christians is 
called χάρις, a gift of divine grace, 1 Pet.i.10,13; of the 
various blessings of Christ experienced by souls: λαβεῖν 
χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος (see ἀντί, 2 e. p. 49" bot.), Jn. i. 16; 
χάρις ζωῆς. the gift of grace seen in the reception of life 
[cf. ζωή, 2 b.], 1 Pet. iii. 7; capacity and ability due to the 
grace of God (Germ. Gnadenausrüstung), Eph. iv. 7; 
πλήρης χάριτος. Acts vi. 8 GLT Tr WH; ποικίλη χάρις, 
the aggregate of the extremely diverse powers and gifts 
granted to Christians, 1 Pet.iv.10; used of the power 
to undertake and administer the apostolic office : λαβεῖν 
χάριν καὶ ἀποστολήν, i. e. χάριν τῆς ἀποστολῆς, Ro. i. ὃ; ἡ 
x: ἡ δοθεῖσά μοι (Paul), Ro. xii. 3, 6; xv. 15; 1 Co. iii. 10; 
Gal. ii. 9; Eph. iii. 2, 7; 500. ὑμῖν, of the gifts of knowl- 
edge and utterance conferred upon Christians, 1 Co. i. 
4; ἐδόθη μοι ἡ x- αὕτη, foll. by an inf., Eph. iii. 8; of the 
desire to give alms roused by the grace of God, 2 Co. 
viii. 1. 4. thanks (for benefits, services, favors) ; 
prop. : χάριτι, with thanksgiving, 1 Co. x. 305 χάριν ἔχειν 
τινί (Lat. gratiam habere alicui), to be thankful to one, 
Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xii.28, (2 
Macc. iii. 33, and countless times in prof. auth.; cf. Pas- 
sow s. v. p. 2416* sub fin.; [L. and S. s. v. IT. 2] ; Ast, Lex. 
Plat. ii. p. 539 sq. ; Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2, p. 975) ; 
foll. by ἐπί with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7 T edd. 2 
and 7, Rec.*"** (cf. p. 233* mid.); χάρις τῷ θεῷ sc. ἔστω, 
Ro. vii. 25 LT Tr WH txt.; foll. by ὅτι, Ro. vi. 17 (x. τοῖς 
θεοῖς, ὅτι ete. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 2; 8, 7,3; an. 3, 3, 14; oec. 
8, 16); with a ptep. added to the dat. (by apposition), 
1 Co. xv. 57; 2 Co. ii. 14; viii. 16; foll. by ἐπί with a dat. 
of the thing [cf. ἐπί, B. 2 a. 8.], 2 Co. ix. 15. i.q. 
recompense, reward, Lk. vi. 32-34 (for which Mt. v. 46 
uses μισθός)" 


χάρισμα 


χάρισμα, -τος, τό, (χαρίζομαι), a gift of grace; a favor 
which one receives without any merit of his own; in the 
N. T. [where (exc. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the 
gift of divine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legs. iii. § 24 
fin. δωρεὰ καὶ εὐεργεσία καὶ χάρισμα θεοῦ rà πάντα ὅσα ev 
κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ κόσμος ἐστίν) ; used of the natural gift 
of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co. 
vii. 7; deliverance from great peril to life, τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς x. 
bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11; the gift of faith, knowl- 
edge, holiness, virtue, Ro. i. 11; the economy of divine 
grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation 
is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of 
Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23; plur. 
of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro. 
xi. 29; in the technical Pauline sense χαρίσματα [ A. V. 
gifts] denote extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain 
Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ, 
the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace 
operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit [cf. Cremer in 
Herzog ed. 2 vol. v. 10 sqq. s. v. Geisteszaben]: Ro. xii. 
6; 1Co.i. 7; xii. 4, 31; 1 Pet. iv. 10; χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων, 
1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; spec. the sum of those powers requisite 
Jor the discharge of the office of an evangelist: 1 Tim. iv. 
14; 2 Tim. 1. 6. ([Of temporal blessings, * Teaching 
1, 5 (cf. δώρημα in Herm. mand. 2, 4)]; eccl. writ.) * 

xapuróo, -@: 1 aor. éyapíroca; pf. pass. ptep. Kexapt- 
τωμένος ; (χάρις); 1. to make graceful i. 6. charm- 
ing, lovely, agreeable: pass. Sir. xviii. 17 ; ταῖς διαλόξοις 
στροφαῖς χαριτούμενος ὀφρύν, Liban. vol. iv. p. 1071, 
14. 2. to pursue with grace, compass with favor; to 
honor with blessings: τινά, Eph. i. 6; pass. Lk. i. 28, 
[some would take it in these two exx. subjectively 
(R. V.mrg. endued with grace)]; Ps. xviii. 26 Symm. ; 
[Herm. sim. 9, 24, 3; Test. xii. Patr. test. Joseph. 1]; 
eccles. and Byzant. writ.* 

Χαρράν, (Hebr. ;?r1 [i. e. (prob.) ‘parched’, ‘arid’], 
Gen. xi. 31; xii. 5; xxvii. 43), Haran [so R. V.; A. V. 
(after the Grk.) Charran], called Kappa in Grk. writ. 
and Carrae in Lat., a city of Mesopotamia, of great anti- 
quity and made famous by the defeat of Crassus: Acts 
vii. 2,4. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v.; Vaihinger in Herzog v. 
539; [Schultz in Herzog ed. 2, s. v.] ; Steiner in Schenkel 
ii. 592; Schrader in Riehm p. 571.* 

χάρτης, -ov, 6, (χαράσσω), paper: 2 Jn. 12; Jer. xliii. 
(xxxvi.) 23. ([Plat. Com. fragm. 10 p. 257 (Didot) ; cf. 
inser. (B.c. 407) in Kirchhoff, Inserr. Attic. i. No. 324]; 
Ceb. tab. 4; Diosc. 1, 115.) [Cf. Birt, Antikes Buch- 
wesen, index i. s.v.; Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeo- 
graphie, p. 23; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. p. 270 
sq.]* 

χάσμα, -ros, τό, (xatvo to yawn), a gaping opening, a 
chasm, gulf: i.q. a great interval, Lk. xvi. 26. (Hes. 
theog. 740; Eur., Plat., Plut., Lcian., Ael., al.) * 

χεῖλος, -ovs, τό, gen. plur. in the uncontr. form χειλέων 
(Heb. xiii. 15; see ὄρος), (xéo i. q. XAQ, xatvo), fr. Hom. 
down, Sept. for nai, a lip; a. in the N. T. of the 
speaking mouth [cf. W. 32]: Mt. xv. 8; Mk. vii. 6; Ro. 
iii. 13; 1 Co. xiv. 21; Heb. xiii. 15 (on which see καρπός, 


667 


χείρ 


2 c.) ; 1 Pet. iii. 10. b. metaph.: χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσ- 
ons, the sea-shore, Heb. xi. 12 (Gen. xxii. 17; Ex. vii. 
15; xiv. 30, ete.; of the shore of a lake, Joseph. b. j. 
3, 10, 7; of the banks of rivers, Hdt. 2, [70]. 94; [Ar- 
istot. de mirab. aud. 46; 150; cf. hist. an. 6, 16 p. 5705, 
22]; Polyb. 3, 14, 6 ; [cf. W. pp. 18, 30]).* 
χειμάζω : pres. pass. ptep. χειμαζόμενος ; (χεῖμα stormy 
weather, winter [ef. χειμών) ; to afflict with a tempest, to 
toss about upon the waves: pass. Acts xxvii. 18 [R. V. 
labored with the storm]. (Aeschyl., Thuc., Plat., Diod., 
Plut, Leian., al.) [Cowr.: zapa-xeigato.]* 
χείμαρρος, (for the more com. χειμάρροος [sc. ποταμός, 
Att. contr. χειμάρρους [q. v. in L. and S. fin.], cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 234), -ov, 6, (χεῖμα winter, and péo, póos), fr. 
Hom. down, Sept. very often for 5r, lit. flowing in 
winter, a torrent: Jn. xviii. 1 [where A. V. brook].* 
Χειμών, -dvos, 6, (χεῖμα, and this fr. χέω on account of 
the ‘pouring’ rains; [al connect it with χιτών, snow, 
frost (cf. Lat. hiems, etc.) ; see Curtius $194; L. and S. 
8. V. χιών, fin. ]), winter ; a. stormy or rainy weather, 
a tempest (so fr. Hom. down) : Mt. xvi. 3 [Tdf. br. WH 
reject the pass.]; Acts xxvii. 20. b. winter, the 
winter season, (so fr. Thue. and Arstph. down): Jn. x. 22; 
2 Tim. iv. 21; χειμῶνος, in winter (-time), in the winter 
- (Plat. de rep. 3 p.415 e.; Xen. mem. 3, 8,9; al. [cf. W. 
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. xiii. 18.* 
χείρ, gen. χειρός, acc. χεῖραν (1 Pet. v. 6 Tdf.; see ἄρσην, 
fin.), 7, [fr. r. meaning ‘to lay hold of’; ef. Lat. heres, 
etc.; Curtius § 189; Vaniéek p. 249 sq.], fr. Hom. down, 
Hebr. T, the hand: Mt. iii. 12; Mk. iii. 1; Lk. vi. 6; 
1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often; the gen. with the 
verbs ἅπτομαι. ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, κρατέω, πιάζω, etc., which 
see in their places; the dat. with ἐργάζομαι, ἐσθίω, ete. ; 
6 ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί, 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col.iv. 18; 2 Th. 
iii. 17; the acc. with the verbs αἴρω, δέω. ἐκπετάννυμι, 
ἐκτείνω, ἐμβάπτω. ἐπιτίθημι, καθαρίζω, κατασείω, vinta, 
ete. ἡ ἐπίθεσις τῶν χειρῶν [see ἐπίθεσις and reff.], 
1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim. 1. θ; Heb.vi.2; ἐν χειρί τινος, in 
imitation of the Hebr. 5 Ὑ3 [ef. B. $133, 20 ef. 319 sq. 
(274); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 19]. by the help or agency, 
of any one, by means of any one, Acts vii. 35 Rec.; Gal. 
iii. 19; σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου, with the aid or service of the 
angel [cf. B. u.s.], Acts vii. 35 LT Tr WH; those things 
in the performance of which the hands take the princi- 
pal part (as e. g. in working miracles), are said to be 
done διὰ χειρός or χειρῶν or τῶν [cf. B. $124, 8 d.] χειρῶν 
twos, Mk. vi. 2; Acts v. 12; xiv. 3; xix. 11; univ., Acts 
li. 23; vii. 25; xi. 30; xv. 23; ἐπὶ χειρῶν, Mt. iv. 6; Lk. 
iv. 11; ἐπὶ τὴν x., Rev. xiv. 9; xx. 1 [here Treg. mrg. 
ἐν τῇ X-], 4; ἐκ, Acts xxviii. 4; Rev. viii. 4; εἰς τὴν x. 
(on his hand), Lk. xv. 22; ἡ χείρ, as an acting subject 
(see γλῶσσα, 1), Lk. xxii. 21; plur., Acts xvii. 25; xx. 
34; 1 Jn.i.1; τὰ ἔργα τῶν x., Acts vii. 41; Rev. ix. 20; 
ἐκδικεῖν τὸ αἷμά τινος ἔκ τινος (see ἐκδικέω, b. and ἐκ I. 7), 
Rey. xix. 2. By meton. ἡ χείρ is put for power, activity, 
(for exx. fr. prof. auth. fr. Hom. down see Passow s. v. 
p. 2431°; [L.and S. s. v. p. 1720*]) : παραδιδόναι τινὰ εἰς 
χεῖράς τινων, into the hostile hands (Deut. i.27; Job xvi. 





χειραγωγέω 


11), Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi. 45 ; Mk. ix. 31; Lk. ix. 44; xxiv. 
7; Acts xxi. 11; xxviii. 17; διδόναι τι ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος, 
to commit to one's protecting and upholding power, Jn. 
iii. 35; also eis τ. χεῖράς twos, Jn. xiii. 3; τινὰ ἐκ τῶν 
xetp. or ἐκ χειρός twos (fr. the hostile power of any one) 
ἀπάγειν, Acts xxiv. 7 Rec.; ἐξελέσθαι, Acts xii. 11 (Gen. 
xxxii. 11; Ex. xviii. 8 sq.) ; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Jn. x. 39; ῥυ- 
σθῆναι, Lk. i. 74; σωτηρία, ib. 71; ἐκφεύγειν τὰς χεῖράς 
twos, 2 Co. xi. 33. By a fig. use of language χείρ 
or xeipes are attributed to God, symbolizing his might, 
activity, power; conspicuous a. in creating the 
universe: ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 
26). β. in upholding and preserving: Lk. 
xxili. 46; Jn. x. 29 (cf. 28); χεὶρ κυρίου ἐστὶ μετά τινος, 
God is present, protecting and aiding one, Lk. i. 66; 
Acts xi. 21. y. in punishing: χεὶρ κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ, 
Acts xiii. 11 (1 S. xii. 15) ; ἐμπίπτειν εἰς x- θεοῦ ζῶντος, 
Heb. x. 31. δ. in determining and controlling 
the destinies of men: Acts iv. 28; ταπεινοῦσθαι ὑπὸ 
τὴν κραταιὰν χεῖρα τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Pet. v. 6. 

χειραγωγέω, -@; pres. pass. ptep. χειραγωγούμενος ; 
(χειραγωγός, 4- ν-; cf. yakwaywyew) ; to lead by the hand: 
τινά, Acts ix.8; xxii. 11. (Anacr., Diod., Plut., Leian., 
Artem., al.) * 

xep-ayoyós, -óv, (χείρ and ἄγω), leading one by the 
hand: Acts xiii. 11. (Artem. oneir. 1, 48; Plut., al.) * 

χειρόγραφον, -ov, τό, (χείρ and γράφω), a handwriting ; 
what one has written with his own hand (Polyb. 30, 8, 4; 
Dion. Hal. 5, 8; al.) ; spec. a note of hand, or writing 
in which one acknowledges that money has either been 
deposited with him or lent to him by another, to be re- 
turned at an appointed time (Tob. v. 3; ix. 5; Plut. 
mor. p. 829 a. de vitand. aere al. 4, 3; Artem. oneir. 3, 
40); metaph. applied in Col. ii. 14 [(where R.V. bond)] 


to the Mosaic law, which shows men to be chargeable ; 


with offences for which they must pay the penalty.* 
χειρο-ποίητος, -ov, (χείρ and ποιέω), made by the hand 
i. e. the skill of man (see ἀχειροποίητος) : of temples, Mk. 
xiv. 58; Acts vii. 48; xvii. 24; Heb. ix. 11, 24; of cir- 
cumcision, Eph. ii.11. (In Sept. of idols; of other things, 
occasionally in Hdt., Thue., Xen., Polyb., Diod.) * 
xepo-rovéo, -@: 1 aor. ptep. χειροτονήσας ; 1 aor. pass. 
ptep. yerporovndeis; (fr. xeiporóvos extending the hand, 
and this fr. χείρ and τείνω) ; fr. [Arstph.], Xen., Plat., 
Isoer. down ; a. prop. to vote by stretching out the 
hand (cf. Xen. an. 3, 2, 33 ὅτῳ Soxet ταῦτα, ἀνατεινάτω 
τὴν χεῖρα" dvérewav ἅπαντες). b. to create or appoint 
by vote: τινά, one to have charge of some office or duty, 
pass. 2 Co. viii. 19, and in the spurious subscriptions in 
2 Tim. iv. 23; Tit. ii. 15. c. with the loss of the 
notion of extending the hand, to elect, appoint, create: 
twa, Acts xiv. 23 (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow 
s. v. p. 2440"; χειροτονεῖσθαι ὑπὸ θεοῦ βασιλέα, Philo de 
praem. et poen. $9; [βασιλέως ὕπαρχος ἐχειροτονεῖτο, de 
Joseph. $41]; Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 2; [7, 11,1; of the 
choice of Jon. as high-priest, 13, 2, 2; cf. Hatch in Diet. 
of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Ordination, p. 1501^; Harnack on 
‘Teaching’ ete. 15, 17). [Comp.: προ-χειροτονέω.] * 


668 





χιλίαρχος 


χείρων, -ον, (compar. of κακός ; derived fr. the obsol. 
χέρης» which has been preserved in the dat. χέρηϊ, acc. 
χέρηα, plur. χέρηες, χέρηα ; cf. Bim. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 268 
[ef. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. χέρης}), [fr. Hom. down], 
worse: Mt. ix. 16; xxvii. 64; Mk. ii. 21; γίνεται τὰ 
ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων, Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. 
li. 20; εἰς τὸ χεῖρον ἔρχεσθαι, [lo grow worse], of one 
whose illness increases, Mk. v. 26; tva μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι 
γένηται, lest some worse thing befall thee, Jn. v. 14; 
πόσῳ χείρων τιμωρία, [A.V. how much sorer punishment], 
Heb. x. 29; ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον προκόπτειν ([ Δ. V. wax worse 
and worse]; see προκόπτω, 2), 2 Tim. iii. 13; of the moral 
character, ἀπίστου χείρων, 1 Tim. ν. 8.* 

“Χερουβίμ (NG) and Χερουβείν (L T Tr WH; in Mss. 
also XepouBiv, XepovBeip ; [cf. Taf. Proleg. p. 84; WH. 
App. p. 155^; and s. v. et, «]), τά (neut. gend. also in most 
places in the Sept.; rarely, as Ex. xxv. 18, 19, of Xep.; 
XepovBes in Ex. xxv. 18 [but this is a mistake; the 
form in -εἰς seems not to occur in the O. T.]; in Philo 
τὰ Χερουβίμ, in Joseph. oí XepovBeis, antt. 3, 6, 5; αἱ 
XepovBeis, ibid. 8, 3, 3; the use of the neut. gender 
seemed most suitable, because they were ζῶα ; Χερουβεῖς 
ζῶά ἐστι πετεινά, μορφὴν δ᾽ οὐδενὶ τῶν ὑπ᾽ ἀνθρώπων éopa- 
μένων παραπλήσια, Joseph. antt. 3, 6, ὅ), Hebr. D319 
(hardly of Semitie origin, but cognate to the Grk. γρύψ, 
γρυπός [for the various opinions ef. Gesenius’s Hebr. 
Lex. ed. Mühlau and Volck s. v. 273), cherubim, two 
golden figures of living creatures with two wings; they 
were fastened to the lid of the ark of the covenant in 
the Holy of holies (both of the sacred tabernacle and of 
Solomon’s temple) in such a manner that their faces 
were turned towards each other and down towards the 
lid, which they overshadowed with their expanded 
wings. Between these figures God was regarded as 
having fixed his dwelling-place (see δόξα, III. 1): Heb. 
ix. 5. In Ezek. i. and x. another and far more elabor- 
ate form is ascribed to them; but the author of the 
Ep. to the Heb. has Ex. xxv. 18-20 in mind. Cf. 
Win. RWB. s. v. Cherubim; Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 710 
sq.; Dillmann in Schenkel i. 509 sqq.; Riehm, De Na- 
tura et Notione Symboliea Cheruborum (Basil. 1864) ; 
also his * Die Cherubim in d. Stiftshütte u. im Tempel’ 
in the Theol. Stud. τι. Krit. for 1871 p. 399 sqq.; and in 
his HWB. p. 227 sqq.; [ef Lenormant, Beginnings of 
History, (N. Y. 1882), ch. iii.].* 

χήρα, -as, ἡ, (fem. of the adj. χῆρος, ‘bereft’; akin to 
χέρσος, sterile, barren, and the Lat. careo, [but cf. Cur- 
tius $ 192]), fr. Hom. Il. 6, 408 down, Sept. for 01298, 
a widow: Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40, 42 sq.; 
Lk.ii.37; iv.95; vii.12; xviii. 3,5; xx.47; xxi. 2sq.; 
Acts vi. 1; ix. 39, 41; 1 Co. vii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 3-5, 9, 11, 
16; Jas. i. 27; with γυνή added (2 S. xiv. 5, and often 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 2, 289 down), Lk. iv. 26; 
a city stripped of inhabitants and riches is represented 
under the figure of a widow, Rev. xviii. 7.* 

χθές (Rec.; also Grsb. in Acts and Heb.), i. q. ἐχθές 
(q. v.), yesterday; Sept. for iA. [Hom. (h. Merc.), 1.7 

χιλίαρχος, -ov, 6, (χίλιοι and dpyo:; [on the form of 


χιλιάς 


the word cf. reff. s. v. ἑκατοντάρχης, and L. and S. s. v 
xAidpxns]), the commander of a thousand soldiers, a 
chiliarch; the commander of a Roman cohort (a military 
tribune): Jn. xviii. 12; Acts xxi. 31-33, 57; xxii. 24, 
26-29; xxiii. 10, 15, 17-19, 22; xxiv. 7 Rec., 22; xxv. 
23, (Sept. fori 35x qv and Ὁ" "BW U UN). any military 
commander Εν: ‘high or chief captain, captain]: Mk. 
. 21; Rev. vi. 15; xix. 18. [(Aeschyl., Xen., al.)]* 

TRU -άδος, ἡ, (χίλιοι), a thousand, the number one 
thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv.4; 1 Co. x. 8; 
Rev. v. 11; vii. 4-8; xi. 13; xiv. 1-3; xxi. 16; Sept. 
for sow, DDN. [Hat. on. 1" 

χίλιοι, -at, 7a thousand: 2 Pet.iii.8; Rev. xi. 3, etc. 

Χίος, -ov, #, Chios, an island in the AP Sea, be- 
tween Samos and Lesbos, not far from "ihe shore of 
Lydia: Acts xx. 15.* 

χιτών, -Gvos, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nin and 
D353, a tunic, an undergarment, usually worn next the 
skin: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 9; Lk. iii. 11; ix. 3; Jude 23; 
it is distinguished from τὸ ἱμάτιον (q. v. 3) or rà ἱμάτια in 
Mt. v. 40; Lk. vi. 29; Jn. xix. 23; Acts ix. 39; univ. a 
garment, vestment ( Xeschyl. suppl. 903), plur. (Plut. Tib. 
Gracch. 19), Mk. xiv. 63.  [Cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. 
Tunica; and reff. s. v. ἱμάτιον, u.s. ] * 

χιών, -dvos, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for bg, Snow : 
Mt. xxviii. 3; Mk. ix. 3 (where it is omitted by G T Tr 
WH); Rev. i. 14.* 

χλαμύς, -ύδος, 7, (acc. to the testimony of Pollux 10, 
38, 164, first used by Sappho), a chlamys, an outer gar- 
ment usually worn over the χιτών [q. v.]; spec. the Lat. 
paludamentum [q.v. in Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. sub 
fin.], a kind of short cloak worn by soldiers, military 
officers, magistrates, kings, emperors, etc. (2 Macc. xii. 
35; Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 10; Hdian., Ael, al.; often in 
Plut.) : Mt. xxvii. 28, 31, [A.V. robe ; see Meyer ad loc.; 
Trench, Syn. $1.; Rich (as above) s.v. Chlamys; and 
other reff. s. v. ἱμάτιον]. 

xAevdto ; impf. ἐχλεύαζον ; (χλεύη, jesting, mockery) ; 
to deride, mock, jeer: Actsii.13 Rec.; xvii. 32. (2 Mace. 
vii. 27; Sap. xi. 15; Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Leian., al) [Comp.: δια-χλευάζω.] * 

xAtapds, -d, -όν, (yAiw, to become warm, liquefy, melt), 
tepid, lukewarm: metaph. of the condition of a soul 
wretchedly fluctuating between a torpor and a fervor of 
love, Rev. iii. 16. (Hdt., Pind., Diod., Plut., Athen., 
Geop.) * 

Χλόη [(i. e. ‘tender verdure'; an appellation of De- 
meter, ‘the Verdant ")], -ns, 7, Chloe, a Christian woman 
of Corinth: 1 Co. i. 11. [Cf. B.D. s. v.]* 

xAwpos, -ά, -óv, (contr. fr. yXoepós, fr. χλόη, tender 
green grass or corn) ; 1. green: xópros, Mk. vi. 39 
(Gen. i. 30); Rev. viii. 7; πᾶν χλωρόν, ix. 4. 2. 
yellowish, pale: ἵππος, Rev. vi. 8. (In both senses fr. 
Hom. down.) * 

xés”, sir hundred and sixty-six (y/— 600; &=60; 
$'—6),a mystical number the meaning of which is clear 
when it is written in Hebr. letters, ΟΡ 1n, i. e. Νέρων 
Καῖσαρ, * Nero Caesar’, (sometimes the Jews write "op 


669 


Xopatív 


for the more common 40D"), the Syriae always £125, 


cf. Ewald, Die Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 263 note; 
[Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. ed. 1, § 25 III. p. 449 note]; 
ἸΞΞΞ ΞΟ θοῦ p= 100, gom uy 
200): Rev. xiii, 18 RGT Tr. [Fora digest of opin- 
ions respecting this much debated number see Lee in 
the * Speaker's s Com.’ ad loc.]* 

χοϊκός, -ἡ -óv, (χοῦς, q. v-), made of earth, earthy: 1 Co. 
xv. 47-49. (γυμνοῖ τούτους τοῦ χοϊκοῦ βάρους, Anon. in 
Walz, Rhett. i. p. 613, 4; [Hippol. haer. 10, 9 p. 314, 
95])* 

χοῖνιξ, -cxos, 7, fr. Hom. Od. 19, 28 down, a choeniz, 
a dry measure, containing four cotylae or two sextarii 
[i.e. less than our ‘quart’; cf. L. and S. s. v.] (or as 
much as would support a man of moderate appetite for 
aday; hencecalled in Athen. 3 $ 20 p. 98 e. ἡμεροτροφίς 
[ef. ἡ χοῖνιξ ἡμερήσιος τροφή, Diog. La&rt. 8, 18]): Rev. 
vi. 6 [where A.V. measure (see Am. appendix ad loc.) ].* 

χοῖρος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a swine: plur., Mt. vii. 
6; viii. 30, [31], 32; Mk. v. 11-13, 14 Rec., [16]; Lk. 
viii. 32sq.; xv. 15 sq. (Not found in the O. T.) * 

χολάω, -à ; (χολή, q.v-) ; 1. to be atrabilious; to 
be mad (Arstph. nub. 833). 2. to be angry, en- 
raged, (for χολοῦμαι, more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down) : τινί, Jn. vii. 23 (3 Mace. iii. 1; Artem., 
Nicand., Mosch., Diog. Laért., al.).* 

χολή, -ῆς, 7, (i. q. χόλος, fr. xéo to pour out [now 
thought to be connected with χλόη, xAcpós; etc. * yellow- 
ish green’; cf. Curtius $200; Vaniéek p. 247]), first 
found in Archilochus (8th cent. B. C.), afterwards in 
Aeschyl. et sqq. 1. bile, gall: Mt. xxvii. 34 (cf. 
Sept. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 22) [cf. B. D. s. v. Gall]; Acts viii. 
23 (on which see πικρία) ; for 1112, Job xvi. 13. 2. 
in the O. T. it is also used of other bitter things; for 
map, wormwood, Prov. v. 4; Lam. iii. 15; hence some 
understand the word in Mt. xxvii. 34 to mean myrrh, on 
account of Mk. xv. 23; but see σμυρνίζω, 2 ; [ B. D. u.s.].* 

χόος, see χοῦς. 

Χοραζίν ([so GL, also Mt. xi. 21 Rec.; Lk. x. 13 Rec.*'*] ; 
Χοραζείν T Tr WH; [Xopattv, Lk. x. 13 Rec.*'***; see 
et, .; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; WH. App. p. 155*]), ἡ, indecl. 
Chorazin, a town of Galilee, which is mentioned neither 
in the O. T. nor by Josephus; aec. to Jerome (in his 
Onomast. [cf. Euseb. onomast. ed. Larsow and Parthey 
p. 3747} two miles distant from Capernaum; perhaps the 
same place which in the talmud, Menach. f. 85, 1 is called 
pos [ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 139], the re- 
mains of which Robinson (Biblical Researches, iii. 347, 
359 sq.) thinks must be sought for in the ruins of the 
modern Tell Ham; but Wilson (Recovery of Jerusalem 
Am. ed. pp. 270, 292 sqq.; Our Work in Palestine, 
p. 188), with whom [Thomson (Land and Book, ii. 8)], 
Socin (in Baedeker’s Palestine and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 
374), Wolff (in Riehm p. 235), [the Conders (Hdbk. to 
the Bible, p. 324), and the majority of recent scholars] 
agree, holds to the more probable opinion which identi- 
fies it with Kerázeh, a heap of ruins lying an hour's 


χορηγέω 


journey to the N. E. of Tell Ham: Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 
13. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim i. p. 605 [Eng. trans. 
ii. 367] and ii. 118 [Eng. trans. iii. 143 ].* 

xopnyéo, -@; fut. 3 pers. sing. χορηγήσει (2 Co. ix. 10 
GL TTr WH); 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. χορηγήσαι (ib. 
Ree.) ; (χορηγός, the leader of a chorus; fr. χορός and 
ἄγω [ἡγέομαι)) ; fr. [Simon.], Xen., Plat. down; ne 
to be a chorus-leader, lead a chorus. 2. to furnish 
the chorus at one's own expense; to procure and supply 
all things necessary to fit out the chorus (so very often in 
the Attic writ.). 3. in later writ. ([ Aristot.], Polyb., 
Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael, al.; 1 K. iv. 7; 1 Macc. 
xiv. 10; 2 Macc. iii. 3, etc.), to supply, furnish abundant- 
ly: ri, 2 Co. ix. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 11. [Cowr.: ἐπι-χορη- 
yéo-] * 

χορός, -o), 6, (by metath. fr. ὄρχος, ὀρχέομαι, [(?); prob. 
related to xópros (Lat. hortus), χρόνος, etc., denoting 
primarily ‘an enclosure for dancing’; cf. Curtius $189]), 
fr. Hom. down, a band (of dancers and singers), a cir- 
cular dance, a dance, dancing: Lk. xv. 25 (for nons, 
Ex. xv. 20; Judg. xi. 34, ete.; for din, Lam. v. 15; Ps. 
cl. 4).* 

Xopráto: 1 aor. éyópraca; 1 aor. pass. éxopráoÓmv; 
fut. pass. χορτασθήσομαι; (χόρτος, q. v.) ; first in Hesiod 
(opp. 450) ; a. to feed wilh herbs, grass, hay, to fill 
or satisfy with food, to fatten; animals (so uniformly 
in the earlier Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. iv. 12; 
W. 23]): ὄρνεα ἐκ τῶν σαρκῶν, pass. Rev. xix. 21 [here 
A.V. were filled ]. b. in later (cf. Sturz, Dial. 
Maced. and Alex. p. 200 sqq.) and Biblical Greek, to 
fill or satisfy men (Sept. for pay and jrabn; with 
some degree of contempt in Plat. de rep. 9 p. 586 a. 
kexugores εἰς γῆν καὶ eis τραπέζας βόσκονται χορταζόμενοι 
καὶ ὀχεύοντες). a. prop.: τινά, Mt. xv. 33; pass, 
Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 42; vii. 27; viii. 8; Lk. ix. 
17; Jn. vi. 26; Jas. ii. 16; opp. to πεινᾶν, Phil. iv. 12; 
τινά twos (like πίμπλημι [cf. W. $ 30, 8 b.]): ἄρτων, with 
bread, Mk. viii. 4 (Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 15) ; τινὰ ἀπό with 
a gen. of the thing [cf. B. $ 132, 12], pass. Lk. xvi. ?1 
(Ps. ciii. (civ.) 13); [τινὰ ἐκ w. gen. of the thing (B. u.s.), 
pass. Lk. xv. 16 Tr mrg. WH]. B. metaph.: τινά, 
to fulfil or satisfy the desire of any one, Mt. v. 6; Lk. 
vi. 21, (Ps. evi. (evii.) 9).* 

Xoptacpa, -ros, τό, (xopráto), feed, fodder, for animals 
(Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; food, (vegetable) sus- 
tenance, whether for men or flocks: plur. Acts vii. 11.* 

χόρτος, -ov, 6; 1. the place where grass grows 
and animals graze: Hom. Il. 11, 774; 24, 640. 2. 
fr. Hes. down, grass, herbage, hay, provender: of green 
grass, Mt. vi. 30; xiv. 19; Lk. xii. 28; Jn. vi. 10; Jas. 
i. 10 sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24 (fr. Is. xl. 6 544.) ; Rev. ix. 4; xópr. 
xXopós, Mk. vi. 39; Rev. viii. 7; χόρτος of growing crops, 
Mt. xiii. 26; Mk. iv. 28; of hay, 1 Co. iii. 12. (Sept. 
for "ST grass, and 3ij.) * 

Xovtas, -à [ Tf. Proleg. p. 104; B. 20 (18)], 6, Chuzas 
[ A.V. (less correctly) Chusa], the steward of Herod 
Antipas: Lk. viii. 3.* 

χοῦς, -ods, acc. -oUv, 6, (contr. for xóos, fr. χέω, to pour), 


670 





χρεία 


fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop. earth dug out, an earth-heap 
(Germ. Schutt): ὁ χοῦς ὁ ἐξορυχθείς. Hdt. 2,150. ' 2. 
dust (Sept. for 535?) : Mk. vi. 11; Rev. xviii. 19, ([Josh. 
vil 11; Sap. v. 15; Sir. xliv. 21, etc.]; Plut. mor. 
p. 1096 b. [i. e. non posse suaviter etc. 13, 7]).* 

Xpdopat, χρῶμαι : impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐχρῶντο; 1 aor. 
ἐχρησάμην ; pf. κέχρημαι (1 Co. ix. 15 GL T Tr WH); 
fr. Hom. down ; (mid. of xpáe [thought to be allied by 
metath. with xeíp (cf. Curtius $189)], ‘to grant a loan’, 
‘to lend’ [but ef. L. and S. s. v.; they regard the radical 
sense as ‘to furnish what is needful']; hence) a 
prop. to receive a loan; to borrow. 2. to take for 
one’s use; to use: τινί [W. § 31, 1 1.7, to make use of a 
thing, Acts xxvii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 12,15; 1 Tim. i. 8; v. 
23; τῷ κόσμῳ, the good things of this world, 1 Co. vii. 
31 RG (see below); μᾶλλον χρῆσαι, se. the opportunity 
of becoming free, ib. 21 (where others, less fitly, supply 
τῷ κληθῆναι δοῦλον [see reff. s. v. ei, ITI. 6 a.]). contrary 
to the regular usage of class. Grk. with an ace.: τὸν κό- 
σμον, 1 Co. vii. 31 L T Tr WH; see Meyer ad loc.; B. 
§ 133, 18; W.u.s.; (also in Sap. vii. 14 ace. to some 
codd.; [L. and S. give (Pseudo-)Aristot. oecon. 2, 22 
p.1350*, 11). with the dat. of a virtue or vice describing 
the mode of thinking or acting : τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ, [ R. V. ‘shew 
fickleness'], 2 Co. i. 17; πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ, ib. iii. 12, (for 
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, see Passow 
ii. p. 2497°; [L. and S. s. v. IT. a.]). with adverbs (see 
Passow ii. p. 2497*; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]) : ἀποτόμως, to 
deal sharply, use sharpness, 2 Co. xiii. 10. of the use of 
persons: τινί, to bear one's self towards, to deal with, 
treat, one (often soin Grk. writ.; see Passow ii. p. 3490"; 
[L. and S. s. v. III. 1 and 27), Acts xxvii. 8." 

χράω, see κίχρημι. 

χρεία, -ας. 7, (χρή). fr. Aeschyl. and Soph. down; 1. 
necessity, need: τὰ πρὸς τὴν χρείαν [ L T Tr WH ap. τὰς 
χρείας (cf. below)], such things as suited the exigency, 
such things as we needed for sustenance and the jour- 
ney, Acts xxviii. 10 ; εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας, [A. V. for 
necessary uses] i.e. to supply what is absolutely neces- 
sary for life [(cf. Babr. fab. 136, 9) ; al. understand the 
‘wants’ here as comprising those of charity or of wor- 
ship], Tit. iii. 14; πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν τῆς χρείας, for the edi- 
fication of souls, of which there is now special need, 
Eph. iv. 29 [ef. R. V. and mrg.]; ἔστι χρεία, there is 
need, foll. by an ace. with inf. Heb. vii. 11; ἔστι χρεία 
τινός, there is need of something, Rev. xxii. 5 Grsb.; Lk. 
x. 42 [(but not WH mrg.)]; ἔχω χρείαν τινός, to have 
need of (be in want of) some thing (often in the Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, cf. Passow s. v. 1; [L. and S. 
s. v. II. 1]), Mt. vi. 8; xxi.3; Mk. xi. 3; Lk. [ix. 11; xv. 
7]; xix. 31, 34; xxii. 71; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Co. xii. 21, 24; 
1 Th. iv. 12; Heb. x. 36; Rev. iii. 17 R G (see below) ; 
xxi. 23; xxii. 5 (not Grsb.) ; τοῦ with an inf. Heb. v. 
12 [W. $ 44, 4 a. ; cf. τὶς, 2 b. p. 626* bot.]; the gen. of 
the thing is evident fr. the context, Acts ii. 45; iv. 35; 
with the gen. of a pers. whose aid, testimony, ete., is 
needed, Mt. ix. 12; xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 17; xiv. 63; Lk. 
v.31; ἔχω χρείαν. foll. by an inf. (cf. B. $ 140, 3), Tete. 


χρεωφειλέτης 


have need to ete., Mt.iii.14; xiv. 16; Jn. xiii. 10; 1 Th. 
i.8; iv. 9 [with which cf. v. 1 (see W. 339 (318) ; B. 
$140, 3)]; foll by ἵνα (see tva, II. 2 c. [B. $ 139, 46; 
cf. Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 18]), Jn. ii. 25; xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 
27; χρείαν ἔχω, absol, to have need: Mk. ii. 25; [Eph. 
iv. 28]; 1 Jn.iii. 17; οὐδὲν χρείαν ἔχω, to have need as 
to nothing [cf. B. $ 131, 10], Rev. iii. 17 L T Tr WH. 
ἡ χρεία with a gen. of the subj. the condition of one de- 
prived of those things which he is scarcely able to do with- 
out, want, need : evroupyos τῆς χρείας μου (see λειτουργός, 
2 fin.), Phil. ii. 25; πληροῦν τὴν χρείαν τινός (Thue. 1. 
70), Phil. iv. 19; [add, εἰς (Lehm. br. εἰς) τὴν χρείαν μοι 
ἐπέμψατε, unto (i. e. to relieve, cf. εἰς, B. IL. 3 c. y. p. 185^ 
top) my need, Phil. iv. 16]; plur. one’s necessities : 
ὑπηρετεῖν rais x. to provide for one’s necessities, Acts 
XX. 34; κοινωνεῖν ταῖς x. [cf. p. 352° top], Ro. xii. 13. 2. 
duty, business, (so esp. fr. Polyb. down [cf. Jud. xii. 10; 
1 Mace. xii. 45; xiii. 37; 2 Macc. vii. 24, ete.]): Acts 
vi. 3.* 

Χρεωφειλέτης (L T Tr WH ypeod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p.691; W.§5,1d.13; [WH. App. p. 152^; Tdf. Pro- 
leg. p. 89; T (?; seeu. s.) WH -φιλέτης, cf. WH. App. 
p. 154” (see I, 0) |), -ov, 6, (χρέος or χρέως, a loan, a debt, 
and ὀφειλέτης, q. v.),a debtor : Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 5. (Prov. 
xxix. 13; Job xxxi. 37; Aesop. fab. 289 [ed. Coray, 11 
ed. Halm]; severaltimes in Plut.; [also in Diod., Dion. 
Hal.; see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 

Χρή ; (fr. xpáo, χράει contr. xp) ; impers. verb, it is 
necessary; it behooves: foll. by an inf. Jas. iii. 10 [(B. 
$8131, 3; 132, 12). From Hom. on. Syn. see δεῖ, fin.]* 

xPute; (χρή); fr. Hom. down; to have need of, to be 
in want of : with a gen. of the obj. [W. $30, 8 a.], Mt. 
vi. 32; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 30; Ro. xvi. 2 [here w. gen. of a 
pers 2/€0-1- 1.* 

χρῆμα, -ros, τό, (xpáopat), in Grk. writ. whatever is 
for use, whatever one uses, a thing, matter, affair, event, 
business; spec. money (rarely so in the sing. in prof. 
auth., as Hdt. 3, 38; Diod. 13, 106 [cf. L. and S. s. v. I. 
sub fin.]): Actsiv.37; plur. riches (often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. Od. 2, 78; 16, 315 etc. down), Mk. x. 24 [T 
WH om. Tr mrz. br. the cl.]; of rà χρήματα ἔχοντες, they 
that have riches, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; money, Acts 
viii. 18, 20; xxiv. 26, (for 325, silver, Job xxvii. 17; for 
D'023, riches, Josh. xxii. 8; 2 Chr. i. 11 sq.).* 

χρηματίζω ; fut. χρηματίσω (Ro. vii. 3 [cf. B. 37 (33)]; 
in Grk. writ. everywh. the Attic 4à, so too Jer. xxxii. 
16 (xxv. 30) ; xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2); 1 aor. ἐχρημάτισα; pf. 
Pass. κεχρημάτισμαι; 1 aor. pass. ἐχρηματίσθην ; (χρῆμα 
business); in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; 1. to 
transact business, esp. to manage public affairs ; to advise 
or consult with one about public affairs; to make answer 
to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests, ete. ; 
used of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence in 
some later Grk. writ. 2. to give a response to those 
consulting an oracle (Diod. 3, 6; 15, 10; Plut. mor. 
p. 435 c. [i. e. de defect. orace. 46]; several times in 
Leian.); hence used of God in Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14; 
10, 1, 3; 11, 8, 4; univ. (dropping all ref. to a previous 


671 








χρηστός 


consultation), to give a divine command or admonition, 
to teach from heaven, [(Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 30))]: with 
a dat. of the pers. Job xl. 3; pass. foll. by an inf. [ A. V. 
revealed ete.], Lk. ii. 26 (χρηματίζειν λόγους πρός τινα, 
Jer. xxxvii. (xxx.) 2) ; pass. to be divinely commanded, 
admonished, instructed, [R. V. warned of God], Mt. ii. 
12,22; Acts x. 22; Heb. viii. 5; xi. 7, (this pass. use 
is hardly found elsewh. exc. in Joseph. antt. 3, 8,8 ; [11, 
8,4]; cf. B. $134,4; [W. $39, 1a.]) ; to be the mouth- 
piece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands af 
God, (τινί, Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2; xxxvi. (xxix.) 23): 
of Moses, Heb. xii. 25 [ R. V. warned]. 3. to assume 
or take to one’s self a name from one’s public business 
(Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; univ. to receive a name or 
title, be called: Acts xi. 26; Ro. vii. 3, (Joseph. antt. [8, 
6, 2]; 13, 11, 35 b.j. 2, 18, 7; [6. Apion. 2, 3,1; Philo, 
quod deus immut. § 25 fin.; leg. ad Gaium $43]; ᾿Αντίο- 
xov τὸν ᾿Επιφανῆ χρηματίζοντα, Diod. in Miller's fragm. 
vol. ii. p. xvii. no. xxi. 4; Ἰάκωβον τὸν χρηματίσαντα 
ἀδελφὸν τοῦ κυρίου, Acta Philippi init. p. 75 ed. Tdf.; 
᾿Ιακώβου ... ὃν kai ἀδελφὸν tod Χριστοῦ χρηματίσαι ot 
θεῖοι λόγοι περιέχουσιν, Eus. h. e. 7, 19; [ef. Soph. Lex. 
S:v22])-* 

Xpnpatirpds, -ov, 6, (χρηματίζω, q. v.), a divine response, 
an oracle: Ro. xi. 4. (2 Macc. ii. 4; cf. Diod. 1,1; 14, 
7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17,5; [cf. Artem. oneir. 1, 2 p. 8; 
Suicer, "Thesaur. s. v. (vol. ii. col. 1532)]; in various 
other senses in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) * 

χρήσιμος, -7, -ov, (xpáopat), first in Theogn. 406, fit for 
use, useful: 2 Tim. ii. 14.* 

χρῆσις, -ews, 7, (χράομαι), use: of the sexual use of a 
woman, Ro. i. 26 sq. (παιδική, Leian. amor. 25; ὀρέξεις: 
παρὰ tas χρήσεις, Plut. placit. philos. 5, 5; [ef. Isoer. 
p. 386 c.; Plat. lege. 8 p. 841 a.; Aristot., al.]).* 

χρηστεύομαι : (χρηστός, q. v.); to show one's self mild, 
to be kind, use kindness: 1 Co. xiii. 4. (Eccles. writ., as 
Euseb h. e. 5, 1, 46 ; τινί, towards one, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
13, 2; 14, 3.) * ; : 

χρηστολογία, -as, 7, (fr. χρηστολόγος, and this fr. 
χρηστός, q. v., and λέγω; cf. Jul. Capitol. in the life of 
Pertinax c. 13 * Omnes, qui libere fabulas conferebant, 
male Pertinaci loquebantur, χρηστολόγον eum appel- 
lantes, qui bene loqueretur et male faceret" ), fair speak- 
ing, the smooth and plausible address which simulates 
goodness: Ro. xvi. 18. (Eustath. p. 1437, 27 [on Il. 23, 
598]; eccles. writ.) * 

χρηστός, -ἤ, -óv, (χράομαι), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for 
510; 1. prop. fit for use, useful; virtuous, good : 
ἤθη χρηστά, 1 Co. xv. 33 ([Treg. χρῆστα (but cf. B. 11)], 
see ἦθος, 2). 2. manageable, i. e. mild, pleasant, (opp. 
to harsh, hard, sharp, bitter) : of things, χρηστότερος οἶνος, 
pleasanter, Lk. v. 39 [here T Tr txt. χρηστός ; so WH 
in br.] (of wine also in Plut. mor. p. 240 d. [i. e. Lacaen. 
apophtheg. (Gorg. 2); p. 1073 a. (i. e. de com. notit. 
28)]: of food and drink, Plat. de rep. 4 p. 438a. ; σῦκα, 
Sept. Jer. xxiv. 3, 5); ὁ ζυγός (opp. to burdensome), 
Mt. xi. 30 [A. V. easy]; of persons, kind, benevolent: of 
God, 1 Pet. ii. 3 [ A. V. gracious] fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 


χρηστότης 


9; τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 1. q. ἡ χρηστότης [W. $34, 2], Ro. 
ii. 4; of men, εἴς τινα towards one, Eph. iv. 32; ἐπί τινα, 
Lk. vi. 35 [here of God; in both pass. A. V. kind].” 
χρηστότης, -nTos, 7, (xpynoTos) ; 1. moral good- 
ness, integrity: Ro. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) [A. V. 
*doeth good’. 2. benignity, kindness: Ro.ii.4; 2 
Co. vi. 6; Gal. v. 22; Col. iii. 12; Tit. iii. 4 ; ἡ xp. τινὸς 
ἐπί τινα, Ro. xi. 22 (opp. to ἀποτομία [q. v.]); Eph. ii. 7. 
(Sept.; Eur., Isae., Diod., Joseph., Ael, Hdian.; often 
in Plut.) [See Trench, Syn. ὃ lxiii.]* 
χρίσμα (so R G L ed. min. WH) and χρῖσμα (L ed. 
maj. T Tr; on the accent see W. ὃ 6, 1e.; Lipsius, 
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35; [7df. Proleg. p. 1037), -ros, 
τό, (χρίω, q. v.), anything smeared on, unguent, ointment, 
usually prepared by the Hebrews from oil and aromatic 
herbs. Anointing was the inaugural ceremony for 
priests (Ex. xxviii. 37; xl. 13 (15) ; Lev. vi. 22; Num. 
xxxv. 25), kings (1 S. ix. 165 x. 1; xv. 1; xvi. 8, 13), 
and sometimes also prophets (1 K. xix. 16 cf. Is. lxi. 1), 
and by it they were regarded as endued with the Holy 
Spirit and divine gifts (1 5. xvi. 13; Is. lxi. 1; Jo- 
seph. antt. 6, 8, 2 πρὸς τὸν Aavidjy—when anointed 
by Samuel —peraBaiver τὸ θεῖον καταλιπὸν ZáovAov: καὶ 
6 μὲν προφητεύειν ἤρξατο, τοῦ θείου πνεύματος εἰς αὐτὸν 
μετοικισαμένου) ; [see BB. DD. s. vv. Ointment, Anoint- 
ing]. Hence in 1 Jn. ii. 20 (where ἀπὸ τοῦ ἁγίου is so 
used as to imply that this χρίσμα renders them dyious 
[cf. Westeott ad loc.]) and 27, τὸ χρίσμα is used of the 
gift of the Holy Spirit, as the eflicient aid in getting a 
knowledge of the truth; see χρίω. (Xen., Theophr., 
Diod., Philo, al.; for ΤΠ), Ex. xxix. 7; xxx. 25; 
xcv 14... 5]: 7.19)" 

Χριστιανός [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 16 note], -ov, 
6, (Χριστός), a Christian, a follower of Christ: Acts xi. 
26; xxvi. 28; 1 Pet. iv. 16. The name was first given 
to the worshippers of Jesus by the Gentiles, but from the 
second century (Justin Mart. [e. g. apol. 1, 4 p. 55 a.; 
dial. c. Tryph. $ 35; cf. ‘Teaching’ ete. 12, 4]) onward 
accepted by them as a title of honor. Cf. Lipsius, 
Ueber Ursprung τι. ültesten. Gebrauch des Christen- 
namens. 4to pp. 20, Jen. 1873.  [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 2; 
Farrar in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; on the ‘Titles of Believers 
in the N. T.' see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 125 sq. ; 

: ef. Dict. of Chris. Antiqq. s. v. * Faithful ’.] * 

Χριστός, -7, -dv, (χρίω), Sept. for mw, anointed: ὁ 
ἱερεὺς ὁ χριστός, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; of χριστοὶ ἱερεῖς, 2 
Mace. i. 10; the prophets are called, substantively, oi 
χριστοὶ θεοῦ, Ps. civ. (ev.) 15; the sing. 6 χριστὸς τοῦ 
κυρίου (Nim? Tw) in the O. T. often of the king of 
Israel (see χρίσμα). as 1 S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11; xxvi. 
9, 11, 23]; 2.5.1. 14; Ps. ii. 2; xvii (xvii) 51; Hab. 
iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus, 
as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1; of the coming king whom the 
Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the 
author of their highest felicity: the name ὁ χριστός 
(mw, Chald. Nrrv2) is not found in the O. T. but is 
first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [cf. 
Schodde's note]; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which 


672 








χριστός 


some have attempted to prove that the section contain- 
ing these passages is of Christian origin are not 
convincing [cf. vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, 2 and reff. ]), after Ps. 
ii. 2 referred to the Messiah; [cf. Psalter of Sol. 17, 36; 
18, 6.8 ete.]. Cf. Keim ii. 549 [Eng. trans. iv. 263 sq. ; 
Westcott ‘Additional Note'on 1 Jn.v.1. On the gen- 
eral subject see Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. $29.] In 
the N. T. it is used 1. of the Messiah, viewed in 
his generie aspects [the word, that is to say, being used 
as an appellative rather than a proper name], ó χριστός: 
Mt.ii.4; xvi.16; xxiii. 10; xxiv.5, 93; xxvi. 63; Mk. 
Vili. 29; xli 35; xiii. 21; xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 15; iv. 41; xx. 
41; xxii. 67 (66); xxiii. 39; xxiv. 26,46; Jn. i. 20, 25, 
[41 (42) Rec.]; iii. 28; iv.29; vi.69 Rec.; vii. 26, 31, 
41; xi 27; xii. 34; xx. 31; Acts ii. 30 Rec., 31; iii. 18; 
Vill. 5; 1x. 22; xvii. 9"; xviii. 5, 28; xxvi. 98; 1 Jn. iL 
225v. 15 ὁ χριστὸς κυρίου Or τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. ii. 26 ; ix. 
20; Actsiv. 26; without the article, Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2; 
Jn. i. 41 (42) L T Tr WH; ix. 22; Acts ii. 36; ὁ χρι- 
στός, ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, Mk. xv. 32; ὁ χριστός so 
used as to refer to Jesus, Rev. xx. 4,6; with τοῦ θεοῦ 
added, Rev. xi. 15; xii. 10. 2. It is added, as an 
appellative (* Messiah’, ‘anointed’), to the proper name 
Ἰησοῦς; ^ a. ἸΙησοῦς ὁ χριστός, Jesus the Christ (* Mes- 
siah’): Acts v. 42 RG; ix. S4[R G]; 1 Co. iii. 11 Rec. ; 
1 Jn. v. $6 [RGL]; Ἰησοῦς ὁ λεγόμενος χριστός, who they 
say is the Messiah [ (cf. b. below) ], Mt. xxvii. 22; with- 
out the art. Ἰησοῦς χριστός, Jesus as Christ or Messiah, 
Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7, [but in all three exx. it 
seems better to take xp. as a prop. name (see b. below) ]; 
ὃ χριστὸς ᾿Ιησοῦς, the Christ (Messiah) who is Jesus, [ Mt. 
i. 18 WH mre. (see b. below)]; Acts v. 433 L T Tr WH 
[R. V. Jesus as the Christ]; xix. 4 Rec. b. ὁ Xpc 
στός is a proper name (cf. W. $18,9 N.1; [as respects 
the use of a large or a small initial letter the critical edd. 
vary: Tdf. seems to use the capital initial in all cases; 
Treg. is inconsistent (using a small letter, for in- 
stance, in all the exx. under 1 above, exc. Lk. xxii. 67 
and Jn. iv. 29; in Mt.i.1 a capital, in Mk. 1.1 ἃ 
small letter, etc.); WH have adopted the principle of 
using a capital when the art. is absent and avoiding it 
when the art. is present (1 Pet. being intentionally ex- 
cepted; the small letter being retained also in such exx. 
as Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2; Acts ii. 36, etc.) ; see WH. Intr. 
$415]): Mt.i.17; xi. 2; Ro. i. 16 Rec.; vii. 4; ix. 5; 
xiv. 18 [here L om. Tr br. the art.]; xv. 19; 1 Co. i. 6, 
ete. without the article, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. vi. 4; viii. 9, 
17; 1Co.i. 12; Gal. ii. 16 sq. 19 (20), 21; iii. 27; Phil. 
i. 10, 13, 19-21, 23; ii. 16; Col.ii.5, 8; Heb. iii. 6, and 
often. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός, Mt. i. 1,18 [here Tr om. Ἰ. WH. 
txt. br. Xp.; al. 6 I. Xp. which is unique; see WH. App. 
ad loc.]; Mk. i. 1; Jn. i. 17; Acts ii. 38; iii. 6; iv. 10; 
viii. 12 ; [ix. 34 LT Tr WH]; x. 36 ; xi. 17; xv. 26; xvi. 
18, 31 [R G]; xx. 21 [here L WH txt. om. Tr br. Xp.]; 
xxviii. 31 [ Tdf. om. Xp.]; Ro. i. 1 [R G WH txt. (see be- 
low)], 6, 8; ii. 16 [RG Tr txt. WH mrg. (see below)]; 
1 Co. i. 7-9; iii. 11 [G T Tr WH (Rec. 'I. 6 Xp.)]; xv. 
57, and very often in the Epp. of Paul and Peter; Heb. 


χρίω 


xiii. 8, 21; 1Jn.i.3, 7 [RG]; ii.1; [v.6 GT Tr WH]; 
2 Jn. 7 [(see a. above)]; Jude 4, 17,21; Rev.i. 1sq.5; 
xxii. 21 [R G@(WH br. al. om. Xp.)]. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς, 
Ro. [i. 1 T Tr WH mrg. (see above) ; ii. 16 T Tr mrg. 
WH txt. (see above) ]; vi. 3[WH br.'r.]; 1 Co. i. 2, 30; 
{iii 11 Lehm. (see above)]; Gal. iii. 14 [here Tr txt. 
WH txt. 1. X.]; iv.14; v. 6 [WH br. 1]; vi. 15; Phil. ii. 
5; iii. 3,14; Colii.6; 1 Tim.i. 2; ii. 5. Ἰησοῦς 6 λεγό- 
μενος Χριστός, surnamed ‘Christ’ [(cf. a. above) ], Mt. i. 
16. on the phrases ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, see ἐν, 
I. 6 Ὁ. p. 211° [ef. ὙΥ. 8.20, 2 ἃ.1. Χριστός and Ἰησοῦς Xp. 
ἔν τισιν, preached among, 2 Co. i. 19; Col. i. 27 [al. (so 
R.V.) would take ἐν here internally (asin the foll. exx.), 
within; cf. ἐν, I. 2]; Χριστὸς ἔν τισιν is used of the per- 
son of Christ, who by his holy power and Spirit lives in 
the souls of his followers, and so moulds their characters 
that they bear his likeness, Ro. viii. 10 (cf. 9); 2 Co. 
xiii. 5; Gal. ii. 20; Eph. iii. 17; a mind conformed to 
the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 19. 

xplw: 1 aor. ἔχρισα; (akin to χείρ [(?), see Curtius 
§ 201], χραίνω ; prop. ‘to touch with the hand’, ‘to be- 
smear’); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Nw; to anoint (on 
the persons who received anointing among the Hebrews, 
see χρίσμα) ; in the N. T. only trop. of God a. con- 
secrating Jesus to the Messianic office, and furnishing 
him with powers necessary for its administration (see 
χρίσμα) : Lk. iv. 18 (after Is. Ixi. 1) ; contrary to com- 
mon usage with an acc. of the thing, ἔλαιον (like verbs 
of clothing, putting on, etc. [cf. W. $32, 4a.; B. $131, 
6]), Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; in Theoph. ad Autol. 
1, 12 we find χρίεσθαι ἔλαιον θεοῦ and yp. φωτὶ kai πνεύ- 
ματι almost in the same sentence); πνεύματι ἁγίῳ καὶ 
δυνάμει, Acts x. 38; also χρίειν used absol., Acts iv. 
2T- b. enduing Christians with the cifts of the 
Holy Spirit [cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. ii. 20]: 2 Co. i. 21. 
[Comp.: év-, ἐπι- xpia. SYN. see ἀλείφω, fin.]* 

xpovitw; fut. ypovicw (Heb. x. 37 T Tr txt. WH), Attic 
χρονιῶ (ibid. RG 1, Trmrg.); (χρόνος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down; Sept. for ὙΠ ; ἐσ linger, delay, tarry: Mt. 
xxv. 5; Heb. x. 37; foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the place, 
Lk. i. 21; foll. by an inf., Mt. xxiv. 48 [LT Tr WH om. 
inf.]; Lk. xii. 45.* 

χρόνος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ov, Ny’, ete. 
time : Heb. xi. 32; Rev. x. 6 ; 6 xp. τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος, 
the time since the star began to shine [cf. φαίνω, 2 a.], 
Mt. ii. 7; [ὁ xp. τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν (Gen. xxv. 24), Lk. i.57 
(B. 267 (230); cf. W. ὃ 44, 4 a.)]; τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, Acts 
vii. 17; τῆς παροικίας, 1 Pet. 1. 17: χρόνοι ἀποκαταστάσεως, 
Acts iii. 21; of xp. τῆς ἀγνοίας, Acts xvii. 30; χρόνου 
διαγενομένου, Acts xxvii. 9; πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν, ὡς τοῦτο 
γέγονεν, Mk. ix. 21; ὁ παρεληλυθὼς xp. 1 Pet. iv. 3 (where 
Ree. adds τοῦ βίου) ; τεσσαρακονταετής, Acts vii. 23 ; xiii. 
18; στιγμὴ χρόνου, Lk. iv. 5; πλήρωμα τοῦ χρόνου, Gal. 
iv. 4; ποιεῖν ([q. v. IT. d.] to spend) χρόνον, Acts xv. 33; 


xviii. 23; βιῶσαι τὸν ἐπίλοιπον χρόνον. 1 Pet. iv. 2; διδόναι | 


χρόνον τινί (i.e. a space of time, respite), tva etc. Rev. ii. 

21 [(Joseph. b. 1. 4, 3, 10)]; plur. joined with καιροί, 

Acts i. 7; 1 Th. v. 1, (see καιρός, 3 e. p. 319") ; ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτων 
43 


673 





χρυσίον 


(LT Tr WH ἐσχάτου) τῶν xp. (see ἔσχατος, 1 fin.), 1 Pet. 
i. 20; [add, ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου τοῦ (Tr WH om. τοῦ) χρόνου, 
Jude 181, T Tr WH]. with prepositions: ἄχρι, Acts 
iii. 21; διὰ τὸν xp.,on account of the length of time, 
Heb. v. 12 (Polyb. 2, 21, 2; Aleiphr. 1, 26, 9); ἐκ χρόνων 
ἱκανῶν, for a long time, Lk. viii. 27 [R GL Tr mre. (see 
below)]; ἐν χρόνῳ, Acts i. 6, 21; ἐν ἐσχάτῳ χρόνῳ, Jude 
18 Reec.; ἐπὶ χρόνον, [ A. V. for a while], Lk. xviii. 4; ἐπὶ 
πλείονα xp. [ A. V. a longer time], Acts xviii. 20; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον 
xp: for so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 
39; Gal iv. 1; κατὰ τὸν χρόνον, according to (the rela- 
tions of) the time, Mt. ii. 16; μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον, Mt. xxv. 
19; μετὰ τοσοῦτον xp. Heb. iv. 7; πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων, 
[R. V. before times eternal], 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2. the 
dative is used to express the time during which some- 
thing occurs (dat. of duration of time, ef. W. $31, 9; 
[B. § 133, 26]): [χρόνῳ ἱκανῷ, for a long time, Lk. viii. 
21 T Trtxt. WH]; ἱκανῷ χρόνῳ, Acts viii. 11 ; [τοσούτῳ 
χρόνῳ, Jn. xiv. 9 LT Tr mrz. WH mrg.]; πολλοῖς χρόνοις 
[ R. V. mrg. of a long time (A. V. oftentimes) ; cf. πολύς, 
c.], Lk. viii. 29; αἰωνίοις, [R. V. through times eternal], 
Ro. xvi. 25. the accus. is used in answer to the 
question how long: xpóvov, for a while, Acts xix. 22; 
Rev. vi. 11 (where in R L T Tr WH μικρόν is added) ; 
also xp. τινά, [ A.V. a while], 1 Co. xvi. 7; ὅσον xp. [ A.V. 
while], Mk. ii. 19; χρόνους ἱκανούς, for a long time, Lk. 
XX. 9; μικρὸν χρόνον, Jn. vii. 33; xii. 35; Rev. xx. 3; 
πολὺν xp. Jn. v. 6; τοσοῦτον xp. Jn. xiv. 9 [R G Tr txt. 
WH txt.]; ἱκανόν, [ A. V. long time], Acts xiv. 3; οὐκ 
ὀλίγον, [ R. V. no little time], Acts xiv. 28; τὸν πάντα xp. 
Acts xx. 18. [On the ellipsis of χρόνος in such phrases 
as ἀφ᾽ οὗ, ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς (Lk. vii. 11 L mrg. Tr txt. WH txt.), 
ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς (Lk. viii. 1), ἐξ ἱκανοῦ, etc., see ἀπό, I. 4 b. 
p. 58° top, ἑξῆς, καθεξῆς, ἐκ IV. 1, ete. SYN. see καιρός, 
fin.; cf. aiov, fin.]* 

xpovorpiBéo, -ῶ: 1 aor. inf. χρονοτριβῆσαι; (χρόνος 
and τρίβω) ; to wear away time, spend time: Acts xx. 16. 
(Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 3 [p. 1406*, 37]; Plut., Heliod., 
Eustath., Byz. writ.) * 

χρύσεος, -éa, -eov, contr. -oUs, -7, -ovv, [but acc. sing. 
fem. -σᾶν, Rev. i. 13 L T Tr WH; gen. plur. -aéov, Rev. 
ii. 4 L Tr; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (23); Phryn. ed. 
Lob. p. 207; L. and S. s. v. init.)], (χρυσός), fr. Hom. 
down, golden; made of gold; also overlaid or covered 
with gold: 2 'Tim. ii. 20; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20; 
ii.1;i1v.4; v.8; viii. 3; ix. 7 Grsb., 13, 20; xiv. 14; xv. 
6 sq.; xvii. 4; xxi. 15.* 

χρυσίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of χρυσός. cf. φορτίον), fr. Hat. 
down, Sept. for 371, gold, both that which lies imbedded 
in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e.; 
Sept. Gen. ii. 11; hence μεταλλευθέν, Lcian. de sacr. 11): 
Xp- πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρός, [R. V. refined by fire], Rev. 
iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought, 
Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii.12 T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. 
xxi. 18,21; i.q. gold coin, ‘gold’: Acts iii. 6; xx. 33; 
1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of 
gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt.; 1 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 
GLWHtat.; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. xpvaos).* 


χρυσοδακτύλιος 


χρυσο-δακτύλιος, -ον, (χρυσός and δακτύλιος), gold- 
ringed, adorned with gold rings: Jas. ii. 2. (Besides 
only in Hesych. s. v. χρυσοκόλλητος ; [W. 201.) [Cf. 
B. D. 5. v. Ring.]* 

χρυσό-λιθος, -ov, ὁ, (χρυσός and λίθος), chrysolith, chryso- 
lite, a precious stone of a golden color ; our topaz [cf. BB. 
DD. s. v. Chrysolite ; esp. Riehm, HWB. s.v. Edelsteine 
5 and 19]: Rev.xxi.20. (Diod. 2,52; Joseph. antt. 3, 
7,5; Sept. for vv, Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix. 
13); [Ezek. i. 16 Aq.].)* 

χρυσό-πρασος [-ov Lchm.], -ov, 6, (fr. χρυσός, and πράσον 
a leek), chrysoprase, a precious stone in color like a leek, 
of a translucent golden-green [cf. BB. DD. s. v.; Riehm, 
IIWB. s. v. Edelsteine 6]: Rev. xxi. 20.* 

χρυσός, -οὔ, ὁ, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 2171, gold (ὁ ἐπὶ 
γῆς καὶ ὁ ὑπὸ γῆς, Plat. legge. 5 p. 728 a.): univ., Mt. ii. 
11; 1Co. iii. I2[R G L (al. χρυσίον, q. v.)]; Rev. ix. 7; 
i. q. precious things made of gold, golden ornaments, Mt. 
xxiii. 16 54. : 1 Tim. ii. 9 [here L WH txt. χρυσίον] ; Jas. 
v. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 (L WH txt. χρυσίον) ; xviii. 12, 16 (L 
Tr txt. WH txt. xypvatov); an image made of gold, Acts 
xvii. 29; stamped gold, gold coin, Mt. x. 9.* 

χρυσοῦς, see χρύσεος. 

χρυσόω, -à : pf. pass. ptep. κεχρυσωμένος ; to adorn with 
gold, to gild: κεχρυσωμένη χρυσῷ, [ A.V. decked with gold ], 
Rey. xvii. 4; and ἐν [GL Tr om. WH br. ev] χρυσῷ, 
xviii. 16, of a woman ornamented with gold so profusely 
that she seems to be gilded; Sept. for 397 7539 in Ex. 
xxvi 32. (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) * 

χρώς, Zen. χρωτός, ὁ, (cf. ypord, the skin [ef. Curtius 
§ 201]), fr. Hom. down, (who [generally] uses the gen. 
xpoos ete. [ef. Ebeling, Lex. Hom., or L. and S. s. v.]), the 
surface of the body, the skin: Acts xix. 12; Sept. for 
wa, twice for Wy, Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. Alex.* 

χωλός, -7, -óv, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for r123, /ame : 
Acts iii. 2, 11 Rec. ; xiv. 8; plur., Mt. xi. 5; xv. 30 sq. ; 
xxi. 14; Lk. vii. 22; xiv. 18, 21; Jn.v.3; Acts vili. 7; 
τὸ χωλόν, Heb. xii. 13 (on which see ἐκτρέπω, 1). de- 
prived of a foot, maimed, [ A. V. halt]: Mt. xviii. 8; Mk. 
ix. 45.* 

χώρα, -as, ἡ. (XAQ [cf. Curtius $179], to lie open, be 
ready to receive), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for yw, 112 
*a province'; 1. prop. the space lying between two 
places or limits. 2. a region or country; i. e. a tract 
of land: ἡ x- ἐγγὺς τῆς ἐρήμου, Jn. xi. 54; [in an ellipti- 
cal phrase, ἡ ἀστραπὴ (ἡ) ἀστράπτουσα ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν 
οὐρανὺν eis τὴν ὑπ᾿ οὐρανὸν λάμπει, A.V. part... part, Lk. 
xvii. 24 (cf. W. $ 64, 5) ; on the ellipsis of χώρα in other 
phrases (ἐξ ἐναντίας, ἐν δεξιᾷ, etc.), see W. l. c. ; B. 82 
(72)]; land as opp. to the sea, Acts xxvii. 27; land as 
inhabited, a province or country, Mk. v. 10; [vi. 55 L 
mre. T Tr WH]; Lk. xv. 13-15; xix. 12; Acts xiii. 49; 
with a gen. of the name of the region added: Tpaxovt- 
τιδος, Lk. iii. 1; τῆς Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20; [(or an 
equiv. adj.)] Γαλατική, Acts xvi. 6; xviii. 23; τῶν 'Iov- 
δαίων, Acts x. 39; plur. τῆς Ἰουδαίας kai Σαμαρείας, [ A. V. 
regions], Acts viii. 1; ἐν χώρᾳ x. σκιᾷ θανάτου, in a re- 
gion of densest darkness (see σκιά, a), Mt. iv. 16; τινός, 


674 





χωρίον 


the country of one, Mt. ii. 12; x. for its inhabitants, 
Mk. i. 5; Acts xii. 20; the (rural) region environing a 
city or village, the country, Lk. ii. 8; Ῥεργεσηνῶν, Tepa- 
σηνῶν, Ταδαρηνῶν, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. v. 1; Lk. viii. 26; 
the region with towns and villages which surrounds the 
metropolis, Jn. xi. 55. 3. land which is ploughed 
or cultivated, ground: Lk. xii. 16; plur, Lk. xxi. 21 
[R.V. country]; Jn.iv. 85 [ A.V. fields]; Jas. v. 4 [A. V. 
fields). [Svw. see τόπος, fin.]* 

[Xwpatly, see Xopattv.] 

xopéo, -; fut. inf. χωρήσειν (Jn. xxi. 25 Tr WH); 
1 aor. ἐχώρησα ; (χῶρος, a place, space, and this fr. XAQ, 
cf. xópa) ; 1. prop. to leave a space (which may be 
occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place, 
yield, (Hom. Il. 12,406; 16, 592; al.); to retire, pass: 
of a thing, εἴς τι, Mt. xv. 17. metaph. to betake one’s 
self, turn one’s self: εἰς μετάνοιαν, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [ A. V. 
come ; cf. μετάνοια, p. 406^]. 2. to go forward, ad- 
vance, proceed, (prop. νύξ, Aeschyl. Pers. 384); to make 
progress, gain. ground, succeed, (Plat. Eryx. p. 398 b.; 
lege. 3 p. 684 e.; [χωρεῖ τὸ κακόν, Arstph. nub. 907, vesp. 
1483; al.]; Polyb. 10, 35, 4; 28,15, 12; al.): ὁ λόγος ὁ: 
ἐμὸς οὐ χωρεῖ ev ὑμῖν, gaineth no ground among you or 
within you [R. V. hath not free course (with mrg. hath 
no place) in you], Jn. viii. 37 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars 
iii. ad loc. ]. 3. to have space or room for receiving 
or holding something (Germ. fassen); prop.: τί, a thing 
to fill the vacant space, Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; of a 
space large enough to hold a certain number of people, 
Mk. ii. 2 (Gen. xiii. 6 [cf. Plut. praec. ger. reipub. 8, 5 
p. 804 b.]) ; of measures, which hold a certain quantity, 
Jn.ii.6; 1 K. vii. 24 (38); 2 Chr. iv. 5, and in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt. down. metaph. /o receive with the mind or 
understanding, to understand, (τὸ Κάτωνος φρόνημα, Plut. 
Cat. min. 64; ὅσον αὐτῷ ἡ ψυχὴ χωρεῖ, Ael. v. h. 3, 9) ; 10 
be ready to receive, keep in mind, and practise: τὸν λόγον 
τοῦτον, this saying, Mt. xix. 11 sq. [(ef. Plut. Lycurg. 
13, 5)]; τινά, to receive one into one's heart, make room 
Jor one in one’s heart, 2 Co. vii. 2. [Comp.: dva-, dzo-, 
ék-, ὑπο- χωρέω. SYN. cf. ἔρχομαι." 

xop(to; fut. ywpiow [B. 37 (33)]; 1 aor. inf. χωρίσαι; 
pres. mid. χωρίζομαι ; pf. pass. ptep. κεχωρισμένος ; 1 aor. 
pass. ἐχωρίσθην; (χωρίς, q.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to separate, 
divide, part, put asunder: ri, opp. to συζεύγνυμι, Mt. xix. 
6; Mk. x. 93; τινὰ ἀπό τινος, Ro. viii. 35, 39, (Sap. i. 3); 
pf. pass. ptep. Heb. vii. 26. Mid. and 1 aor. pass. 
with a reflex. signif. to separate one’s self from, to de- 
part; a. to leave a husband or wife: of divorce, 1 
Co. vii. 11, 15; ἀπὸ ἀνδρός, ib. 10 (a woman kexopipévry 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνδρός, Polyb. 32, 12, 6 [al.]). b. to depart, 
go away: [absol. Philem. 15 (euphemism for ἔφυγε), 
R. V. was parted from thee]; foll. by ἀπό with a gen. of 
the place, Acts i. 4; ἐκ with a gen. of the place, Acts 
xviii. 1 sq. ((W. § 36, 6a.]; εἰς with an ace. of the place, 
2 Maec. v. 21; xii. 12; Polyb., Diod., al). [Cowr.: 
ἀπο-, δια- xopíto.] * 

χωρίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of χῶρος or xópa), fr. Hat. 
down; 1. a space, a place; a region, district. 2. 


χωρίς 


a piece of ground, a field, land, (Thue., Xen., Plat., al.) : 
Mt. xxvi 36; Mk. xiv. 32; Jn. iv. 9 [A. V. parcel of 
ground]; Acts i. 18sq.; iv. 34 [plur. lands]; v. 3, 8; a 
farm, estate: plur. Acts xxviii. 7. [SYvN. see τόπος, fin.]* 

χωρίς, (XAQ, see χώρα [cf. Curtius § 192]), adv., fr. 
Hom. down; 1. separately, apart: Jn. xx. 7. 2. 
as a prep. with the gen.[W. $54,6]; ^ a. without any 
pers. or thing (making no use of, having no association 
with, apart from, aloof from, ete.) : 1 Co. [iv. 8]; xi. 11; 
Phil.ii.14; 1 Tim.ii. 8; v. 21; Heb. [ii. 9 Treg. mrg.]; 
xi. 40; παραβολῆς, without making use of a parable, Mt. 
xiii. 34; Mk. iv. 34; ὁρκωμοσίας, Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21; 
x: αἵματος, Heb. ix. 7,18; aiparexyvoias, Heb. ix. 22; 
without i. e. being absent or wanting: Ro. vii. 8 sq. [R.V. 
apart from]; Heb. xi. 6; xii. 8, 14; Jas. ii. 18 (Rec. ἐκ), 
20, 26, [in these three exx. R. V. apart from]; without 
connection and fellowship with one, Jn. xv. 5 [R. V. 


675 





ψεύδομαι 


apart from]; destitute of the fellowship and blessings 
of one: χωρὶς Χριστοῦ [cf. W. $54, 2 ἃ. ; R. V. separate 
Jrom Christ], Eph. ii. 12; without the intervention (par- 
ticipation or co-operation) of one, Jn. i. 3; Ro. iii. 21, 
[28; iv. 6; x. 14]; x. θεμελίου, without laying a foun- 
dation, Lk. vi. 49; x. τῆς σῆς γνώμης, without consulting 
you, [ef. γνώμη, fin. (Polyb. 3, 21, 1. 2. 7)], Philem. 14; 
‘without leaving room for’: x. ἀντιλογίας, Heb. vii. 7; 
οἰκτιρμῶν, X. 98. x. τοῦ σώματος, freed from the body, 
2 Co. xii. 3 L T Tr WH (Rec. ἐκτός, q. v. b. a.) ; χωρὶς 
ápaprías, without association with sin, i. e. without yield- 
ing to sin, without becoming stained with it, Heb. iv. 
15; not to expiate sin, Heb. ix. 28. b. besides: 
Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38; 2 Co. xi. 28. [SvN. cf. dvev.]* 
χῶρος, -ov, 6, the north-west wind (Lat. Corus or 
Caurus): for the quarter of the heavens from which 
this wind blows, Acts xxvii. 12 (on which see λίψ, 2).* 


Ψ 


ψάλλω ; ἐπί. ψαλῶ ; (fr. ψάω, to rub, wipe; to handle, 
touch, [but cf. Curtius p. 7807) ; a. to pluck off, 
pull out: ἔθειραν, the hair, Aeschyl. Pers. 1062. b. 
to cause to vibrate by touching, to twang: τόξων vevpàs 
χειρί, Eur. Bacch. 784; spec. χόρδην, to touch or strike 
the chord, to twang the strings of a musical instrument so 
that they gently vibrate (Aristot. probl. 19, 23 [p. 919", 
2]); and absol. to play on a stringed instrument, to play 
the harp, ete. : Aristot., Plut., Arat., (in Plat. Lys. p. 209b. 
with καὶ κρούειν τῷ πλήκτρῳ added [but not as ex plan- 
atory of it; the Schol ad loc. says ψῆλαι, τὸ ἄνευ 
πλήκτρου τῷ δακτύλῳ τὰς χορδὰς ἐπαφᾶσθαι] ; it is distin- 
guished from κιθαρίζειν in Hat. 1, 155) ; Sept. for 12 and 
much oftener for 7191; to sing to the music of the harp; 
in the N. T. to sing a hymn, to celebrate the praises of God 
in song, Jas. v. 13 [ R.V. sing praise]; τῷ κυρίῳ, τῷ ὀνόματι 
αὐτοῦ, (often so in Sept.), in honor of God, Eph. v. 19 
[here A. V. making melody]; Ro. xv. 9; ψαλῶ τῷ πνεύ- 
part, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ voi, * I will sing God's praises indeed 
with my whole soul stirred and borne away by the Holy 
Spirit, but I will also follow reason as my guide, so that 
what I sing may be understood alike by myself and by 
the listeners’, 1 Co. xiv. 15.* 

Wadpos, -od, 6, (ψάλλω), a. striking, twanging, [(Eur., 
al)]; spec. a striking the chords of a musical instru- 
ment [(Pind. Aeschyl., al.)]; hence a pious song, a 
psalm, (Sept. chiefly for 7212), Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16; 
the phrase ἔχειν ψαλμόν is used of one who has it in his 
heart to sing or recite a song of the sort, 1 Co. xiv. 26 
[ef. Heinrici ad loc., and Bp. Lghtft. on Col. u. s.]; one 
of the songs of the book of the O. T. which is entitled 





Wadpoi, Acts xiii. 33; plur. the (book of) Psalms, Lk. 
xxiv.44; βίβλος ψαλμῶν, Lk. xx. 42; Actsi.20. [Svw. 
see ὕμνος, fin.] * 

wevd-adehpos, -ov, 6, (ψευδής and ἀδελφός), a false 
brother, i.e. one who ostentatiously professes to be a 
Christian, but is destitute of Christian knowledge and 
piety: 2Co. xi. 26; Gal. ii. 4.* 

ψευδ-απόστολος, -ov, ὁ, (ψευδής and ἀπόστολος), a false 
apostle, one who falsely claims to be an ambassador of 
Christ 42) Οο. χὶ. 18." 

ψευδής, -és, (ψεύδομαι), fr. Hom. Il. 4, 235 down, lying, 
deceitful, false: Rev. ii. 2; μάρτυρες, Acts vi. 13; sub- 
stantively of ψευδεῖς, [A. V. liars], Rev. xxi. 8 [here 
Lehm. ψευστής, q. v.].* 

ψευδο-διδάσκαλος, -ov, 6, (ψευδής and διδάσκαλος), a 
false teacher: 2 Pet. ii. 1.* 

ψευδο-λόγος, -ov, (ψευδής and λέγω), speaking (teach- 
ing) falsely, speaking lies: 1 Tim. iv.2. (Arstph. ran. 
1521; Polyb., Leian., Aesop, al.) * 

ψεύδομαι ; 1 aor. ἐψευσάμην ; (depon. mid. of ψεύδω 
[allied w. ψιθυρίζω etc. (Vaniéek p. 1195)] ‘ to deceive’, 
‘cheat’; hence prop. to show one's self deceitful, to play 
false); fr. Hom. down ; to lie, to speak deliberate false- 
hoods: Heb. vi. 18; 1 Jn. i. 6; Rev. iii. 9 ; οὐ ψεύδομαι, 
Ro. ix. 1; 2Co. xi. 31; Gal.i.20; 1 Tim.ii. 7; τινά, to 
deceive one by a lie, to lie to, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plut., 
al): Actsy. 3; like verbs of saying, with a dat. of the 
pers. (cf. W. § 31,5; B. §133,1; Green p. 100 sq.), Acts 
v. 4 (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 45 ; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 36; Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 36; Josh. xxiv. 27; [Jer. v. 12], ete.) ; εἴς τινα, 
Col. iii. 9; κατά τινος, against one, Mt. v. 11 [L G om. 


ψευδομάρτυρ 


Tr mrg. br. ψευδ. ; al. connect καθ᾽ ὑμῶν with εἴπωσι and 
make Ves. a simple adjunet of mode (A. V. falsely)]; 
κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας, Jas. iii. 14 [here Tdf. makes Wedd. 
absol.; cf. W. 470 (438) n.2]. (Sept. for wma and 213.)* 

ψευδο-μάρτυρ, unless more correctly yrevüopápr vs or 
rather Ψψευδόμαρτυς (as αὐτόμαρτυρ; see Passow s.v. 
ψευδομάρτυς [esp. Lob. Paralip. p. 217; cf. Etym. Magn. 
506, 26]), -vpos, 6, (ψευδής and μάρτυρ [q. v.]), a false 
witness: Mt. xxvi. 60; τοῦ θεοῦ, false witnesses of i. e. 
concerning God [W. $30, 1 a.], 1 Co. xv. 15. (Plat. 
Gorg. p. 472 b. ; Aristot. pol. 2, 9, 8 [p. 12745, 6; but 
the true reading here is ψευδομαρτυριῶν (see Bentley’s 
Works ed. Dyce, vol. i. p. 408) ; a better ex. is Aristot. 
rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432*, 6; cf. Plut. praec. ger. reip. 
29, 1; Constt. apost. 5, 9; Pollux 6, 36, 153].) * 

ψευδο-μαρτυρέω, -ὦ : impf. éyrevüopaprópovv; fut. ψευ- 
δομαρτυρήσω; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. sing. ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς ; 
lo utter falsehoods in giving testimony, to testify falsely, 
to bear false witness, (Xen. mem. 4, 4, 11; Plat. rep. 9, 
p. 975 b.; legg. 11 p. 937 c.; Aristot. rhet. 1, 14, 6 p. 
1375", 12; [rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1482", 6]; Joseph. 
antt. 3, 5, 5): Mt. xix. 18; [Mk. x. 19]; Lk. xviii. 20; 
Ro. xiii. 9 Rec.; κατά τινος, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. (as Ex. xx. 
16; Deut. v. 20).* 

ψευδο-μαρτυρία, -as, 7. (\revSouaprupew), false testimony, 
false witness: Mt. xv. 19; xxvi.59. (Plat., Plut.; often 
in the Attic orators.) ἢ 

ψευδομάρτυς, see ψευδομάρτυρ. 

ψευδο-προφήτης, -ov, ὁ, (ψευδής and προφήτης), one who, 
acting the part of a divinely inspired prophet, utters false- 
hoods under the name of divine prophecies, a false prophet: 
Mt. vii. 15; xxiv. 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vi. 26; Acts 
xiii. 6; 2 Pet. ii. 1; 1 Jn. iv. 1; Rev. xvi. 13; xix. 20; 
xx. 10. (Jer. vi 13; xxxiii (xxvi) 8, 11, 16; xxxiv. 
(xxvii) 7; xxxvi (xxix.) 1, 8; Zech. xiii. 2; Joseph. 
antt. 8, 13, 1; 10, 7, 3; b. j. 6, 5, 2; [τὸν τοιοῦτον eiv- 
βόλῳ ὀνόματι ψευδοπροφήτην προσαγορεύει, κιβδηλεύοντα 
τὴν ἀληθῆ προφητείαν k. τὰ γνήσια νόθοις εὑρήμασι ἐπι- 
σκιάζοντα κτλ. Philo de spec. legs. iii. $8]; eccles. writ. 
[* Teaching’ 11, 5 ete. (where see Harnack)]; Grk. writ. 
use Ψευδόμαντις. ) E: 

ψεῦδος, -ovs, τό, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for TY, 313, 
wm, a lie; conscious and intentional falsehood : uniy. 
Rev. xiv. 5 (where Rec. δόλος) ; opp. to ἡ ἀλήθεια, Jn. 
viii. 44; Eph. iv. 25; οὐκ ἔστι ψεῦδος, opp. to ἀληθές 
ἐστιν, is no lie, 1 Jn. ii. 27; τέρατα ψεύδους, [ A. V. lying 
wonders] exhibited for the treacherous purpose of de- 
ceiving men, 2 Th. ii. 9; in a broad sense, whatever is 
not what it professes to be: so of perverse, impious, deceit- 
ful precepts, 2 Th. ii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 21; of idolatry, Ro. 
i. 25 ; ποιεῖν ψεῦδος, to act in Secerdancé with the pre- 
cepts and principles of idolatry, Rey. xxi. 27; xxii. 15, 
[ef. xxi. 8, and p. 526^ mid.].* 

Ψψευδό-χριστος, -ov, 6, (ψευδής and χριστός), a false 
Christ (or Messiah), (one who falsely lays claim to the 
name and office of the Messiah): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. 
ΡΝ 


ψευδώνυμος, -ον, (ψεῦδος [Ψευδής, rather] and ὄνομα), 


676 








ψιθυριστής 


Jülsely named [A.V. falsely so called]: 
(Aeschyl., Philo, Plut., Sext. Emp.) * 
ψεῦσμα, -ros, τό, (ψεύδω), a falsehood, a lie, (Plat. Meno 
p- 71d.; Plut, Leian.; Sept.); spec. the perfidy by 
which a man by sinning breaks faith with God, Ro. iii. 


7.» 


1 Tim. vi. 20. 


TM του, ὃ, (ψεύδω), fr. Hom. down, a liar: n 
viii. 44, 55; 1 Jn. i. 10; 11. 4, 22: iv. 20; v. 10; 1 Tim. i. 
105 Dit. i 13; [Rev. xxi. 8 Lehm. (al. ψευδής, q. v.)]; 
one who breaks faith, a false or faithless man (see 
ψεῦσμα), Ro. iii. 4 cf. Prov. xix. 22.* 

ψηλαφάω, -O: 1 aor. ἐψηλάφησα, optat. 3 pers. plur. 
ψηλαφήσειαν (Acts xvii. 27, the ZEolie form; see ποιέω, 
init.); pres. pass. ptep. ψηλαφώμενος ; (fr. ψάω, to 
touch) ; to handle, touch, feel: ri or τινά, Lk. xxiv. 39; 
Heb. xii. 18 [see R. V. txt. and mrg., cf. B. $134, 8; W. 
343 (322)]; 1Jn.i.1; metaph. mentally to seek after 
tokens of a person or thing: θεόν, Acts xvii. 27 [ A.V. feel 
after]. (Hom., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Philo, Plut. ; 
often for win, WIT, UU.) [SyN.see ἅπτω, 2 c.]* 

Vmnó(to; 1 aor. ἐψήφισα; (ψῆφος, 4. v.) ; to count with 
pebbles, to compute, calculate, reckon: τὴν δαπάνην, Lk. 
xiv. 28; τὸν ἀριθμόν, to explain by computing, Rev. xiii. 
18. (Polyb. Plut. Palaeph., Anthol; commonly and 
indeed chiefly in the mid. in the Grk. writ. to give one’s 
vole by casting a pebble into the urn; to decide by voting.) 
[Comp.: συγ- kata-, cvp- ψηφίζω.}" 

ψῆφος, -ov, 7, (fr. yaw, see ψάλλω), a small, worn, 
smooth stone; pebble, [fr. Pind., Hdt., down; (in Hom. 
ymis)]; 1. since in the ancient courts of justice 
the accused were condemned by black pebbles and ac- 
quitted by white (cf. Passow s. v. ψῆφος, 2 c., vol. ii. p. 
2574^; [L.and S. s. v. 4 d.]; Ovid. met. 15, 41; [Plut. 
Alcib. 22, 2]), and a man on his acquittal was creo of 
as νικήσας (Theophr. char. 17 (19), 3) and the ψῆφος 
acquitting him called νικητήριος (Heliod. 3, 3 sub fin.), 
Christ promises that to the one who has gained eternal 
life by coming off conqueror over temptation (rà vikoüvrt 
[A. V. to him that overcometh]) he will give ψῆφον λευκήν, 
Rev. ii. 17; but the figure is explained differently by 
different interpp.; cf. Düsterdieck [or Lee in the *Speak- 
er's Com.'] ad loc.; [B. D. s. v. Stones, 8]. Ewald (Die 
Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 136; [cf. Lee u. s.; Plumptre in 
B. D. s. v. Hospitality, fin.]) understands it to be the 
tessera. hospitalis [ef. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Tessera, 
3; Becker, Charicles, sc.i. note 17], which on being shown 
secures admission to the enjoyment of the heavenly 
manna; the Greek name, however, for this tessera, is 
not ψῆφος. but σύμβολον. 2. a vote (on account of 
the use of pebbles in voting): καταφέρω (q.v.), Acts 
xxvl. 10.* 

Ψιθυρισμός, -o0, ὁ, (ψιθυρίζω, to whisper, speak into 
one's ear), a whispering, i.e. secret slandering, (Vulg. 
susurratio, Germ. Ohrenbldserei): joined w. καταλαλιά 
[ef. Ro. i. 29 (30) ], 2 Co. xii. 20; Clem. Rom. 30, 3; 35, 5. 
(Plut.; Sept. for wn, of the magical murmuring of a 
charmer of snakes, Eccl. x. 11.) * 

Ψιθυριστής, -ov, 6, (see the preced. word). a whisperer, 


ψιχίον 


secret slanderer, detractor, (Germ. Ohrenbláser): Ro. i. 
29 (30). (At Athens an epithet of Hermes, Dem. p. 
1358, 6; also of 6”Epws and Aphrodite, Suidas p. 3957 
e.5 [ef. W. 24].)* 

ψιχίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of WiE, ψιχός, 7, a morsel), a little 
morsel, a crumb (of bread or meat): Mt. xv. 27; Mk. 
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21 [T WH om. L Tr br. y.]. (Not 
found in Grk. auth. [cf. W. 24; 96 (91)].)* 

ψυχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ψύχω, to breathe, blow), fr. Hom. down, 
Sept. times too many to count for 7/23, occasionally also 
for 39 and 239; 1. breath (Lat. anima), i. e. a. 
the breath of life; the vital force which animates the body 
and shows itself in breathing : Acts xx. 10; of animals, 
Rev. viii. 9, (Gen. ix. 4 sq. ; xxxv. 18; ἐπιστραφήτω ἡ 
ψυχὴ Tod παιδαρίου, 1 K. xvii. 21); so also in those pass. 
where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold 
division of human nature by the Greeks, ἡ Ψυχή is dis- 
tinguished from τὸ πνεῦμα (see πνεῦμα, 2 p. 520* [and 
reff. s. v. mv. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. iv. 12. b. life: 
μεριμνᾶν τῇ ψυχῇ, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; τὴν ψυχὴν 
ἀγαπᾶν, Rev. xii. 11; [μισεῖν, Lk. xiv. 26]; τιθέναι, Jn. 
x. 11, 15,17; xiii. 37 sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; παρα- 
διδόναι, Acts xv. 26; διδόναι (λύτρον, q. v-), Mt. xx. 28; 
Mk. x. 45; ζητεῖν τὴν ψυχήν twos (see ζητέω, 1 a.), Mt. 
i. 20; Ro. xi. 8; add, Mt. vi. 25; Mk. iii.4; Lk. vi.9; 
xii. 20, 23; Acts xx. 24; xxvii. 10, 22; Ro.xvi.4; 2 Co. 
i. 23; Phil. ii. 30; 1 Th.ii. 8; in the pointed aphorisms 
of Christ, intended to fix themselves in the minds of his 
hearers, the phrases εὑρίσκειν, σώζειν, ἀπολλύναι τὴν 
Ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, etc., designate as ψυχή in one of the anti- 
thetic members the life which is lived on earth, in the 
other, the (blessed) life in the eternal kingdom of God: 
Mt. x. 39; xvi. 25 sq.; Mk. viii. 35-37; Lk. ix. 24, 56 
Rec.; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; the life destined to enjoy 
the Messianic salvation is meant also in the foll. phrases 
[Qvhere R. V. soul)]: περιποίησις ψυχῆς, Heb. x. 39; 
κτᾶσθαι τὰς ψυχάς, Lk. xxi. 19; ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν, [here 
A.V. (not R.V.) for you; οἵ. ο. below], 2Co. xii. 15. — c. 
that in which there is life; a living being: ψυχὴ ζῶσα, a 
living soul, 1 Co. xv. 45; [Rev. xvi. 3 R Tr mrg.], (Gen. 
ii. 7; plur. i. 20); πᾶσα Ψυχὴ ζωῆς, Rev. xvi. 3 [GL T 
Tr txt. WH] (Lev. xi. 10) ; πᾶσα Ψυχή, every soul, i. e. 
every one, Acts ii. 43; iii. 23; Ro. xiii. 1, (so 733-53, 
Lev. vii. 17 (27) ; xvii. 12); with ἀνθρώπου added, every 
soul of man (DIS 3), Num. xxxi. 40, 46, [cf. 1 Mace. 
ii. 38]), Ro.ii. 9. ψυχαί, souls (like the Lat. capita) i. e. 
persons (in enumerations; cf. Germ. SeelenzaAl): Acts 
li. 41; vii. 14; xxvii. 37; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xlvi. 15, 
18, 22, 26, 27; Ex.1.5; xii. 4; Lev. ii. 1; Num. xix. 
11, 13, 18; [Deut. x. 22]; the exx. fr. Grk. authors (cf. 
Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2590^) are of a different sort 
[yet cf. L. and S. s. v. IT. 2]) ; ψυχαὶ ἀνθρώπων of slaves 
[A. V. souls of men (R.V. with mrg. * Or lives’)], Rev. 
xviii. 13 (so [ Num. xxxi. 35]; Ezek. xxvii. 13; see σῶμα, 
1 e. [cf. W. $22, 7 N. 3]). 2. the soul (Lat. ani- 
mus), a. the seat of the feelings, desires, affections, 
aversions, (our soul, heart, etc. [R. V. almost uniformly 
soul]; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. 


6TT 








ψυχικός 


p. 3589"; [L. and S. s. v. IT. 3]; Hebr. 73), cf. Gesenius, 
Thesaur. ii. p. 901 in 3): Lk.i. 46; ii. 35; Jn. x. 24 [cf. 
atpo, 1 b.]; Acts xiv. 2, 22; xv. 24; Heb. vi. 19; 2 Pet. 
li. 8, 14; ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῆς Ψ. Rev. xviii. 14; ἀνάπαυσιν rais 
ψυχαῖς εὑρίσκειν, Mt. xi. 29; Ψυχή, - - - dvamavov, φάγε, 
πίε [ WH br. these three impvs. ], εὐφραίνου (personifica- 
tion and direct address), Lk. xii. 19, cf. 18 (ἡ Ψυχὴ ava- 
παύσεται, Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 28; εὐφραίνειν τὴν ψυχήν, Ael. 
v.h.1,32); εὐδοκεῖ ἡ ψυχή μου (anthropopathically, of 
God), Mt. xii. 18; Heb. x. 38; περίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ Ψυχή 
pov, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34; ἡ ψυχή μου τετάρακται, 
Jn. xii. 27; ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν ἐκλυόμενοι, [ fainting in your 
souls (cf. ἐκλύω, 2 b.)], Heb. xii. 3; ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου, 
with all thy soul, Mt. xxii. 37; [Lk. x. 27 Ltxt. T Tr 
WH); ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου (Lat. ex toto animo), with 
[lit. from (cf. ἐκ, IT. 12 b.)] all thy soul, Mk. xii. 30, 33 
[here T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the phrase]; Lk. x. 27 
[R G], (Deut. vi. 5; [Epict. diss. 3, 22, 18 (cf. Xen. anab. 
7, 7, 43)]; Antonin. 3, 4; [esp. 4, 31; 12, 29]; ὅλῃ τῇ 
ψυχῇ φροντίζειν τινός [rather, with κεχαρίσθαι], Xen. 
mem. 3, 11,10); μιᾷ ψυχῇ: with one soul [cf. πνεῦμα, 2 
p. 520* bot.], Phil. i. 27; τοῦ πλήθους .. . ἦν ἡ καρδία καὶ 
ἡ Ψυχὴ pia, Acts iv. 32 (ἐρωτηθεὶς τί ἐστι φίλος, ἔφη - pia 
ψυχὴ δύο σώμασιν ἐνοικοῦσα, Diog. Laért. 5, 20[ cf. Aristot. 
eth. Nic. 9, 8, 2 p. 11685, 7; on the elliptical ἀπὸ μιᾶς 
(se. ψυχῆς 23, see ἀπό, I11.]); ἐκ ψυχῆς, from the heart, 
heartily, [Eph. vi. 6 (Tr WH with vs. 7)]; Col. iii. 23, 
(ἐκ τῆς ψυχῆς often in Xen.; τὸ ἐκ ψυχῆς πένθος, Joseph. 
antt. 17, 6, 5). b. the (human) soul in so far as it 
is so constituted that by the right use of the aids offered it 
by God it can attain its highest end and secure eternal 
blessedness, the soul regarded as a moral being designed 


for everlasting life: 3 Jn. 2; ἀγρυπνεῖν ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν, 


IIeb. xiii. 17; ἐπιθυμίαι, αἵτινες στρατεύονται κατὰ τῆς 
ψυχῆς, 1 Pet. ii. 11; ἐπίσκοπος τῶν ψυχῶν, ib. 3ὅ ; σώζειν 
τὰς ψυχάς, Jas. i. 21; ψυχὴν ἐκ θανάτου, from eternal 
death, Jas. v. 20; σωτηρία ψυχῶν, 1 Pet. i. 9; ἁγνίζειν 
Tas ψυχὰς ἑαυτῶν, ib. 22; [ras ψυχὰς πιστῷ κτίστῃ mapa- 
τίθεσθαι, 1 Pet. iv. 19]. C. the soul as an essence 
which differs from the body and is not dissolved by death 
(distinguished fr. τὸ σῶμα, as the other part of human 
nature [so in Grk. writ. fr. Isocr. and Xen. down; cf. 
exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2589* bot.; L. and S. s. v. II. 2]) : 
Mt. x. 28, cf. 4 Mace. xiii. 14 (it is called ἀθάνατος, Hdt. 
2, 123; Plat. Phaedr. p. 245 ο.. 246 a., al.; ἄφθαρτος, Jo- 
seph. b. j. 2, 8, 14 ; διαλυθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος, 
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 14) ; the soul freed from the body, a 
disembodied soul, Acts ii. 27, 31 Rec.; Rev. vi. 9; xx. 
4, (Sap. iii. 1; [on the Homeric use of the word, see 
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. 3 and reff. sub fin., also Proudfit 
in Bib. Saer. for 1858, pp. 753-805 ]).* 

rox tos, -7, -óv, (ψυχή), (Vulg. animalis, Germ. sinn- 
lich), of or belonging to the ψυχῆ; a. having the 
nature and characteristics of the ψυχή i. e. of the prin- 
ciple of animal life, which men have in common with the 
brutes (see ψυχή, 1 a.) , ΓΑ. V. natural]: σῶμα ψυχικόν, 
1 Co. xv. 44; substantively, τὸ ψυχικόν [ W. 592 (551)], 
ib. 46; sinee both these expressions do not differ in 


ψύχος 


substance or conception from σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα in vs. 50, 
Paul might have also written σαρκικόν ; but prompted 
by the phrase ψυχὴ ζῶσα in vs. 45 (borrowed fr. Gen. ii. 
7), he wrote ψυχικόν. Ὁ. governed by the ψυχή 
i.e. the sensuous nature with its subjection to appetite 
and passion (as though made up of nothing but ψυχή) : 
ἄνθρωπος (i.q. σαρκικός [or σάρκινος, q. v. 3] in iii. 1), 
1 Co.ii.14; ψυχικοί, πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες, Jude 19 [ A. V. 
sensual (R. V. with mrg. *Or natural, Or animal"); so in 
the foll ex.]; σοφία, a wisdom in harmony with the 
corrupt desires and affections, and springing from them 
(see σοφία, a. p. 581^ bot.), Jas. iii. 15. (In various 
other senses in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down.)* 
ψύχος (RG Tr WH), more correetly ψῦχος (LT; ef. 
[ T'df. Proleg. p. 102]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p.44 
sq.), τους, τό, (ψύχω, q. v), fr. Hom. down, cold: Jn. 
xvii. 18; Acts xxviii 2; 2 Co. xi. 27; for ^p, Gen. 
viii. 22; for rY3p, Ps. exlvii. 6 (17), Job xxxvii. 8.* 
ψυχρός, -d, -dv, (ψύχω, q. v.), fr. Hom. down, cold, 
cool: neut. of cold water, ποτήριον ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42 
([ψυχρῷ Aodvrar, Hdt. 2, 37]; ψυχρὸν πίνειν, Epict. 
ench. 29, 2; πλύνεσθαι ψυχρῷ, diss. 4, 11, 19; cf. W. 
591 (550)); metaph. like the Lat. frigidus, cold i. e. 
sluggish, inert, in mind (yr. τὴν ὀργήν, Leian. Tim. 2): of 


678 





ὧδε 


one destitute of warm Christian faith and the desire for 
holiness, Rev. iii. 15 sq.” 

oxo: 2 fut. pass. ψυγήσομαι [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 918 ; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 421 s. v.]; fr. Hom. down ; to 
breathe, blow, cool by blowing ; pass. to be made or to grow 
cool or cold : trop. of waning love, Mt. xxiv. 12.* 

Vopí(to; 1 aor. ἐψώμισα ; (ψωμός, a bit, a morsel; see 
ψωμίον) ; a. to feed by pulling a bit or crumb (of 


food) into the mouth (of infants, the young of animals, 


ete.) : τινά τινε (Arstph., Aristot., Plut., Geop., Artem. 
oneir. 5, 62; Porphyr., Jambl.). b. univ. to feed, 
nourish, (Sept. for DONT) [W. § 2,1b.]: τινά, Ro. xii. 
20; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55,2; with the ace. of the 
thing, to give a thing to feed some one, feed out to, (Vulg. 
distribuo in cibos pauperum [ A. V. bestow . . . to feed the 
poor]) : 1 Co. xiii. 3; in the O. T. τινά τι, Sir. xv. 3; Sap. 
xvi 20; Num. xi. 4; Deut. xxxii. 13; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 
6; Is. lviii. 14, etc. ; cf. W. $ 32, 4 a. note.* 

ψωμίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ψωμός), a fragment, bit, 
morsel, [A. V. sop]: Jn. xiii. 26 sq. 30. (Ruth ii. 14; 
Job xxxi. 17, [but in both ψωμός}; Antonin. 7, 3; Diog. 
Laért. 6, 37.)* 

Vóxo; (fr. obsol. ψώω for dw) ; to rub, rub to pieces: 
τὰς στάχυας rais χερσίν, Lk. vi. 1. [(mid. in Nicand.)]* 


Q 


Q, o: omega, the last (24th) letter of the Grk. alpha- 
bet: ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ O9 [WH *Q, L à, T o], i. q. τὸ τέλος, i. e. 
the last (see A, a, ἄλφα [and B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. 
and art. * Alpha’, also art. A and Q by Piper in Herzog 
(cf. Schaff-Herzog), and by Tyrwhitt in Dict. of Chris. 
Antiq.]) Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. [On the 
interchange of and o in Mss. see Scrivener, Plain In- 
troduction ete. p. 627; ‘Six Lectures’ ete. p.176; WH. 
Intr. §404; cf. esp. Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. Inschr. 
T2551] 

à, an interjection, prefixed to vocatives (on its use in 
the No. ΟΣ 7B. 140) (122); [We 5.29) 9» Ὁ, at as 
used a. in address: ὦ Θεόφιλε, Acts i. 1; add, 
Acts xviii. 14; xxvii. 21 [here Tdf. à (ex errore); on 
the pass. which follow cf. B. τι. s.]; Ro. ii. 1, 3; ix. 20; 
1 Tim. vi. 20; and, at the same time, reproof, Jas. ii. 
20. b. in exclamation: and that of admiration, 
Mt. xv. 28; Ro. xi. 33 [here Rec." Lehm. à; ef. Chand- 
ler $$ 902, (esp.) 904]; of reproof, Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts 
xii. 10; Gal. iii. 1; with the nom. (W. § 29, 2), Mt. 
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix.41. [(From Hom. down.) ]* 

Ὠβηδ (RG; see Ἰωβήδ), ὁ. (Hebr. 1237 [i. e. *ser- 
vant’ se. of Jehovah]), Obed, the grandfather of king 
David: Mt.i.5; Lk. iii. 32, (Ruth iv. 17 sq.; 1 Chr. ii. 
I2) 





ὧδε, adv., (fr. ὅδε); 1. so, in this manner, (very 
often in Hom.). 2. adv. of place; a. hither, 
to this place (Mom. Il. 18, 392; Od. 1, 182; 17, 545 ; cf. 
B. 71 (62 sq.) [c W. $54, 7; but its use in Hom. of 
place is now generally denied; see Ebeling, Lex. 
Hom. s. v. p. 484%; L.and S. s. v. II.]) : Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 
18 [Tr mrg. br. ὧδε; xvii. 17 ; xxii. 12; Mk. xi. 3; Lk. 
ix. 41; xiv. 21; xix. 97; dm. vi. 20; xx. 273 Acts ix. 21): 
Rev. iv.1; xi. 12, (Sept. for Bon, Ex.iii.5; Jude. xviii. 
3; Ruth ii. 14); ἕως ὧδε, [even unto this place], Lk. 
xxiii. 5. b. here, in this place: Mt. xii. 6, 41 sq. ; 
xiv. 17: Mik. ax. 15/55 *xv1-10/: DE. 1x98 3 XX11485 5 elves 
6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. vi. 9; xi. 21, 32, and often, 
(Sept. for 13); τὰ ὧδε, the things that are done here, 
Col. iv. 9; ὧδε, in this city, Acts ix. 14; in this world, 
Heb. xiii. 14 ; opp. to ἐκεῖ (here, i. e. according to the 
Levitical law still in force; there, i. e. in the passage in 
Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Heb. vii. 8; ὧδε 
with some addition, Mt. xiv. 8; Mk. vi. 3; viii. 4; Lk. 
iv. 23; ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἢ ὧδε, here is Christ, or there, [so 
A. V., but R. V. here is the Christ, or, Here (cf. ὧδε kai 
ὧδε, hither and thither, Ex. ii. 12 ete.)], Mt. xxiv. 23; 
ὧδε 7... ἐκεῖ, Mk. xiii. 21 [T WH om. ἢ ; Tr mrg. reads 
καὶ]: Lk. xvii. 21, 23 [here T Tr WH mrg. éket . . . ὧδε 
(WH txt. ἐκεῖ 5 . . . $0e)]; Jas. ii. 3 [here Rec. ἐκεῖ 7. . - 


E 


ὧδε; GL T Tr WH om. ὧδε (WH txt. and marg. vary- 
ing the place of ἐκεῖ). Metaph. in this thing, Rev. xiii. 
10, 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9, [the phrase ὧδέ ἐστιν in at 
least two of these pass. (viz. xiii. 18; xiv. 12) seems to 
be equiv. to ‘here there is opportunity for’, ‘need of’ 
ete. (so in Epiet. diss. 3, 22, 105) ]; i this state of things, 
under these circumstances, 1 Co. iv. 2 L [who, however, 
connects it with vs. 1] TTr WH; τ Meyer ad loc. 

φδή, -ῆς, ἡ, (i. q. ἀοιδή, fr. ἀείδω i.e. ἄδω, to sing), fr. 
Soph. and Eur. down, Sept. for Vw and AVY, a song, 
lay, ode; in the Scriptures a song in praise of God or 
Christ: Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3; Μωῦὔσέως x. τοῦ ἀρνίου, the 
song which Moses and Christ taught them to sing, Rev. 
xv. 3; plur. with the epithet πνευματικαί, Eph. v. 19 
[here L br. z».]; Col. ii. 16. [Sy¥N. see ὕμνος, fin.]* 

ὠδίν (1 Th. v. 3; Is. xxxvii. 3) for ὠδίς (the earlier 
form; cf. W. § 9, 2 e. N. 1), -ivos, ἡ, fr. Hom. Il. 11, 271 
down, the pain of childbirth, travail-pain, birth-pang : 
1 Th. v. 3; plur. ὠδῖνες ([pangs, throes, R. V. travail]; 
Germ. Wehen), i. q. intolerable anguish, in reference to 
the dire calamities which the Jews supposed would pre- 
cede the advent of the Messiah, and which were called 
mun oan [see the Comm. (esp. Keil) on Mt. 1. c.], 
Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9); ὠδῖνες θανάτου [Tr mre. 
δου], the pangs of death, Acts ii. 24, after the Sept. 
who translated the words n\) *"53n by ὠδῖνες 6., deriv- 
ing the word ^?3mn not, as they ought, from oon. i i. e. 
σχοινίον ‘cord’, but from 5an, dis, “Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5; 
exiv. (cxvi.) 3; 2 S. xxii. 6.* 

ὠδίνω; fr. Hou down; Sept. for 5n, thrice for San; 
to feel the pains of childbirth, to travail: Gal. iv. 27; 
Rev. xii. 2; in fig. disc. Paul uses the phrase οὖς πάλιν 
ὠδίνω, i. e. whose souls I am striving with intense effort 
and anguish to conform to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 
19. [Comp.: συν-ωδίνω. ἢ 

ὦμος, -ov, 6, (OIO i. q. φέρω [(?) ; allied w. Lat. umerus, 
cf. Vanicek p. 38; Curtius $487]), fr. Hom. down, the 
Shoulder: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xv. 5.* 

ὠνέομαι, -οῦμαι : 1 aor. ὠνησάμην (which form, as well 
as ἐωνησάμην, belongs to later Grk., for which the earlier 
writ. used ἐπριάμην; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 137 sqq. ; 
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 210 sqq.; Veitch s. v.]; 
W. §12, 2; $16 s. v.); fr. Hdt. down; to buy: with a 
gen. of the price, Acts vii. 16.* 

ὠόν [so RG Tr, but L'T WH góv; see (Etym. Magn. 
822, 40) 1, c], -o), τό, fr. Hdt. down, an egg: Lk. xi. 12, 
(for n3, found only in the plur. b'y'3, Deut. xxii. 
$ sq: ; Is. x. 14, ete.).* 

ὥρα, -as, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ny and in Dan. 
for ny; 1. a certain definite time or season fixed 
by natural law and returning with the revolving year; 
of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, 
winter, as ὥρα τοῦ θέρους. mpwipos k. ὄψιμος, χειμερία, 
ete. ; often in the Grk. writ. [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1 c., 
and on the inherent force of the word esp. Schmidt ch. 
44 $6 sq.]. 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising 
and the setting of the sun), a day: ὥρα παρῆλθεν, Mt. 
xiv. 15 ; ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης (or γινομένης), [ A. V. 


679 








e" 
ὥρα 


when the day was now far spent], Mk. vi. 35 (see πολύς, c 
[but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited πολλῆς 
ὥρας means early}); ὀψίας [ὀψὲ T Tr mrg. WH txt.] ἤδη 
οὔσης τῆς ὥρας [WH mrg. br. τῆς ὥρας], Mk. xi. 11 
(ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας, Polyb. 3, 83, 7; τῆς ὥρας ἐγίγνετο ὀψέ, 
Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. a twelfth part of the day-time, 
an hour, (the twelve hours of the day are reckoned from 
the rising to the setting of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 [ef. BB. 
DD. s. v. Hour; Riehm’s HWB. s. v. Uhr]) : Mt. xxiv. 
36; xxv. 13 ; Mk. xiii. 32; xv. 25, 33; Lk. xxii. 59; xxiii. 
44; Jn. i. 39 (40) ; iv. 6; xix. 14; with τῆς ἡμέρας added, 
Acts ii. 15; of the hours of the night, Lk. xii. 39; 
xxii. 59; with τῆς νυκτός added, Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 23; 
dat. @pa, in stating the time when [W. $31, 9; B. 
$133, 26]: Mt. xxiv. 44; Mk. xv. 34; Lk. xii. 39 sq.; 
preceded by ἐν, Mt. xxiv. 50; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xvi. 33; 
accus. to specify when [W. 8 32, 6; B. $ 131, 11]: Jn. 
iv.52; Actsx.3; 1 Co. xv. 30; Rev.iii.3; also to express 
duration [W. and D. ll. cc.]: Mt. xx. 12 [cf. ποιέω, I. 
la.fin.]; xxvi. 40; Mk.xiv. 37; preceded by preposi- 
tions: ἀπό, Mt. xxvii. 45 ; Acts xxiii. 23; ἕως, Mt. xxvii. 
45; μέχρι, Acts x. 30; περί with the accus. Acts x. 9. 
improp. used for a very short time: μιᾷ ὥρᾳ, Rev. xviii. 
10 [Rec. ἐν, WH mrg. ace.], 17 (16), 19; πρὸς ὥραν, 
[A. V. for a season], Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8; Gal. ii. 5 
[here A. V. for an hour]; Philem. 15; πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας, 
[for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17. 4. any definite 
time, point of time, moment: Mt. xxvi. 45 ; more precisely 
defined — by a gen. of the thing, Lk.i.10; xiv.17; Rev. 
iii. 10; xiv. 7, 15; by agen. of the pers. the fit or oppor- 
tune time for one, Lk. xxii. 53; Jn.ii. 4; by a pronoun 
or an adj.: ἡ ἄρτι dpa, [ A. V. this present hour], 1 Co. 
iv. 11; ἐσχάτη ὥρα, the last hour i. e. the end of this age 
and very near the return of Christ from heaven (see 
ἔσχατος. 1 p. 253^), 1 Jn. ii. 18 [ef. Westcott ad loc.]; 
αὐτῇ τῇ Spa, that very hour, Lk. ii. 38 [here A.V. (not 
R.V.) that instant]; xxiv. 38; Acts xvi. 18; xxii. 13; ἐν 
αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ, in that very hour, Lk. vii. 21 [R GL txt.]; 
xii. 12; xx. 19; ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ, Mt. viii. 13; ἐν ἐκείνῃ 
τῇ Spa, Mt. x. 19 [Lehm. br. the cl.] ; Mk. xiii. 11; [Lk. 
vii. 21 L mrg. T Tr WH]; Rev. xi. 13; ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνης τῆς 
27; ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης, Mt.ix.22; xv. 
28; xvii.18; by ἃ conjunction: ὥρα ὅτε, Jn. iv. 21, 23; 
v. 25: xvi. 25; ἵνα (see tva, II. 2 d.), Jn. xii. 22; xiii. 
1; xvi 2,32; by καί and a finite verb, Mt. xxvi. 45; 
by a relative pron. ὥρα ἐν 7, Jn. v. 28; by the addition 
of an ace. with an inf. Ro. xiii. 11 (οὔπω ὥρα συναχθῆναι 
τὰ κτήνη, Gen. xxix. 7; see exx. in the Grk. writ., fr. 
Aeschyl. down, in Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2620*; [L. and 
S. s. v. B. I. 3]; so the Lat. tempus est, Cic. 'T'usc. 1, 41, 
99; ad Att. 10,8). Owing to the context dpa some- 
times denotes the fatal hour, the hour of death : Mt. xxvi. 
45; Mk. xiv. 35,41; Jn. xii. 27; xvi. 4 [here L Tr WH 
read ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν i.e. the time when these predictions 
are fulfilled]; xvii. 1; ἡ ὥρα τινός, ‘one’s hour’, i.e. 
the time when one must undergo the destiny appointed 
him by God: so of Christ, Jn. vii. 30; viii. 20, cf. xvi. 21. 
[On the omission of the word see ἐξαυτῆς, (ἀφ᾽ ἧς Ὁ cf. 


Spas, Jn. xix. 


ὡραῖος 


p. 58 top), W. $64,5 s. v. ; B. 82 (71); on the omission 
of the art. with it (e.g. 1 Jn. ii. 18), see W. $19. v.] 

ὡραῖος, -a, -ov, (fr. Spa, ‘the bloom and vigor of life’, 
‘beauty’ in the Grk. writ., who sometimes join the word 
in this sense with χάρις [which suggests grace of move- 
ment] or κάλλος [which denotes, rather, symmetry of 
form]), fr. Hes. down, ripe, mature, (of fruits, of human 
age, etc.) ; hence blooming, beautiful, (of the human 
body, Xen., Plat., al.; with τῇ ὄψει added, Gen. xxvi. 
7; xxix. 17; xxxix. 6; 1 K.i. 6): πόδες, Ro. x. 15; of a 
certain gate of the temple, Acts iii. 2, 10; [τάφοι κεκο- 
νιαμένοι, Mt. xxiii. 27]; σκεῦος, 2 Chr. xxxvi. 19. [Cf. 
Trench, Syn. § cvi.]* 

ὠρύομαι ; depon. mid.; Sept. for asw; to roar, to howl, 
(of a lion, wolf, dog, and other beasts): 1 Pet. v. 8 
(Judg.xiv. 5; Ps. xxi. (xxii) 14; Jer. ii. 15; Sap. xvii. 
18; Theoer., Plut., al.); of men, to raise a loud and in- 
articulate cry: either of grief, Hdt. 3, 117; or of joy, 
id. 4, 75 ; to sing with a loud voice, Pind. Ol. 9, 163.* 

ds [Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 ὥς; cf. W. 
462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex. 
Hom. s. v. p. 494" bot. ], an adverbial form of the rela- 
tive pron. ὅς, 7, 6 which is used in comparison, as, like 
as, even as, according as, in the same manner as, ete. 
(Germ. wie); but it also assumes the nature of a con- 
junction, of time, of purpose, and of consequence. 
On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, 
ch. xxxv. p. 756 sqq.; [L. and S. s. v.]. 

I. ὡς as an adverb of camparison; 1. It 
answers to some demonstrative word (οὕτως, or the like), 
either in the same clause or in another member of the 
same sentence [cf. W. $53, 5]: otras... ὡς, Jn. vii. 46 
[L WH om. Tr br. ὡς etc.]; 1 Co. iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26; 
Eph. v. 28, 33; Jas.ii. 12; otras... ὡς ἐὰν [T Tr WH 
om. ἐὰν (cf. Eng. as should a man cast ete.)] . . . βάλῃ, 
so etc. ... as if ete. Mk. iv. 26; os... οὕτως, Acts viii. 
32; xxiii. 11; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. xi 3 [R 6]; 1 Th. v. 
2; ὡς dv (ἐάν) foll. by subj. [(cf. ἄν, ITI. 2 a. fin.)] .. . 
οὕτως, 1 Th. ii. 7 54.; os... οὕτω καί, Ro. v. 15 [here 
WH br. καί], 18; 2Co.i. 7 LT Tr WH; vii. 14; és [T 
Tr WH xa6ós] . . . κατὰ rà αὐτά [LG ταὐτά, Rec. ταῦτα], 
Lk. xvii. 28-30; ἴσος . . . ὡς kat, Acts xi. 17; sometimes 
in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative 
word (οὕτως, or the like) is omitted and must be sup- 
plied by the mind, as Mt. viii. 13; Col.ii.6; ds... 
καί (where οὕτω καί might have been expected [W. τι. s. ; 
B. $ 149, 8 c.]), Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 [here G T Tr WH 
om. L br. the cl.]; Acts vii. 51 [Lehm. καθώς]; Gal. i. 9; 
Phil. i. 20, (see καί, IT. 1 a.); to this construction must 
be referred also 2 Co. xiii. 2 ὡς παρὼν τὸ δεύτερον, καὶ 
ἀπὼν viv, as when I was present the second time, so now 
being absent [(ef. p. 317* top); al. render (cf. R. V. 
mrg.) as if I were present the second time, even though 
I am now absent]. 2. os with the word or words 
forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preced- 
ing verb that οὕτως must be mentally inserted before 
the same. When thus used ὡς refers a. to the 
manner (‘form’) of the action expressed by the finite 


680, ὡς 


verb, and is equiv. to in the same manner as, after the 
Jashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (nom.) 
of the verb: Mt. vi. 29; vii. 29; xiii. 43; 1 Th. ii. 11; 
2 Pet.ii. 12; Jude 10, etc. ; toan acc. governed by the 
verb: as ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον aov ὡς σεαυτόν, Mt. xix. 19 ; 
xxii.39; Mk.xii.31, 33; Lk.x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9; Gal. v. 
14; Jas. ii. 8; add, Philem. 17 ; Gal. iv. 14; [here many 
(cf. R. V. mrg.) would bring in also Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 
(cf. c. below)]; or to another oblique case: as Phil. ii. 
22; to a subst. with a prep.: as ὡς ἐν κρυπτῷ, Jn. vii. 
10 [Tdf. om. ὡς}; ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς, Jas. v. 5 (RG; 
al. om. s]; ὡς διὰ ξηρᾶς, Heb. xi. 29; add, Mt. xxvi. 55; 
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; Ro. xiii. 13; Heb. iii. 8; 
when joined to a nom. or an acc. it can be rendered /ike, 
(like) as, (Lat. instar, veluti) : Mt. x. 16; Lk. xxi. 85; 
xxii. 31; 1 Co. iii. 10; 1 Th. v. 4; 2 Tim.ii. 17; Jas. i. 
10; 1 Pet. v. 8; 2 Pet. iii. 10; καλεῖν τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα 
(see καλέω, 1 b. B. sub fin.), Ro. iv. 17. b. ós joined 
to a verb makes reference to the ‘substance’ of the 
act expressed by the verb, i. e. the action designated by 
the verb is itself said to be done ὡς, in like manner 
(just) as, something else: Jn. xv. 6 (for τὸ βάλλεσθαι 
ἔξω is itself the very thing which is declared to happen 
[i.e. the unfruitful disciple is ‘east forth’ just as the 
severed branch is ‘cast forth']) ; 2 Co. iii. 1 [Lehm. ὥς 
[7ep]]: generally, however, the phrase ὡς καί is employed 
[W. § 53,5], 1 Co. ix. 5; xvi. 10 [here WH txt. om. kat] ; 
Eph.ii.3; 1 Th.v.6 [L T Tr WH om. καί]; 2 Tim. iii. 
9; Heb.ii.2; 2 Pet. iii. 16. C. ὡς makes refer- 
ence to similarity or equality, in such expres- 
sions as εἶναι ὥς τινα, i. e. ‘to be like’ or ‘equal to’ one, 
Mt. xxii. 380; xxviii. 3; Mk. vi. 34; xii. 25; Lk.vi.40; 
xi.44; xvii. 11; xxii. 26 sq. Ro. ix. 27; 1:00: vir. ἦν 
29-31; 2 Co. ii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 8; tva μὴ ὡς 
κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην τὸ ἀγαθόν σου 7), that thy benefaction may not 
be like something extorted by force, Philem. 14; γίνεσθαι 
ὥς τινα, Mt. x. 25; xviii. 3; Lk. xxii. 26; Ro. ix. 29; 1 Co. 
iv. 13; ix. 20-22 [in vs. 22 T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. 
és]; Gal. iv. 12; μένειν ὥς τινα, 1 Co. vii. 8; ποιεῖν τινα 
ὥς twa, Lk. xv. 19; passages in which ἐστίν, ἦν, dv (or 
ὁ dy) is left to be supplied by the reader: as ἡ φωνὴ 
αὐτοῦ ὡς φωνὴ ὑδάτων, Rev. i. 15; ὀφθαλμούς, sc. ὄντας, 
Rev. ii. 18; πίστιν sc. οὖσαν, Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 6; 
add, Rev.1v.i7/5 15. 2. 15, ἡἐξο. lit 2 x- UL EDS DOE TUNIS 
xiv. 2; xx. 8; xxi. 21; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37, [many (cf. 
R. V. mre.) refer these last two pass. to a. above]; x. 
11; xi. 5, ete.; before ὡς one must sometimes supply 
τί, ‘something like’ or ‘having the appearance of’ this 
or that: thus ὡς θάλασσα, i. 6. something having the ap- 
pearance of [R. V. as it were] a sea, Rev. iv. 6 GL T Tr 
WH; viii. 8; ix. 7; xv. 2, (so in imitation of the Hebr. 
5, cf. Deut. iv. 32; Dan. x. 18; ef. Gesenius, Thes. p. 
648° [ Soph. Lex. s.v. 2]); passages where the compar- 
ison is added to some adjective: as, ὑγιὴς ὡς, Mt. xii. 13 5 
λευκὰ ὡς, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk. ix. 3 [R L]; add, Heb. xii. 16; 
Rey. i. 14; vi. 125 viii. 10; x. 9; xxi. 2; xxii. 1. d. 
ὡς so makes reference to the quality of a person, 
thing, or action, as to be equiv. to such as, exactly like, as 


e 
ως 


it were; Germ. als; and a. to a quality which 
really belongs tothe person or thing: ws ἐξουσίαν 
ἔχων, Mt. vii. 29; Mk. i. 22; ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρύς, 
Jn. i. 14; add, [( T Tr WH in Mt. v. 48; vi. 5, 16)]; 
Acts xvii. 22; Ro. vi. 13 [here L T Tr WH ὡσεί] ; xv. 
15/571: Commis 17 va. 221 216021, 4; xi. 16.5 Ephiiv. 1; 
8: 15; 01" 1ππ 9.5 1 ΠΕ Πἴ' Δ... tim: vy. 1 8055-2» Lim. 
ii. 3; Tit.i.7; Philem. 9, 16 [where cf. Bp. Lehtft.]; 
Heb. iii. 5 sq. ; vi. 19; xi. 95 xiii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 14, 195 ii. 
2, 5, 11; iii. 7; iv. 10, 15sq. 19 [R G] ; 2 Pet. i. 19; 2 Jn. 
5: 815. 11 1.» Rev dl: Vs 0 XVI 21/5 XVII 1:97 ete. 
ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως sc. τρέχων, as one who is not running 
etc. 1 Co. ix. 26; concisely, ὡς ἐξ εἰλικρινείας and ἐκ 
θεοῦ sc. λαλοῦντες, borrowed from the neighboring 
λαλοῦμεν, 2 Co. ii. 17; τινὰ ὥς twa or τι after verbs 
of esteeming, knowing, declaring, ete. [W. 
88 32, 4 b.; 59, 6]: as, after λογίζειν, λογίζεσθαι, Ro. 
viii. 36; 1 Co. iv. 1 (where οὕτως precedes); 2 Co. x. 
25 ἡγεῖσθαι, 2 Th. iii. 15; ἔχειν, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, 46 
[but here L T Tr WH read εἰς (cf. ἔχω, I. 1 £.)], (τινὰς 
ὡς θεούς, Ev. Nicod. c. 5); ἀποδεικνύναι, 1 Co. iv. 9; 
παραβάλλειν [or ὁμοιοῦν (q. v.)], Mk. iv. 31; διαβάλλειν, 
pass. Lk. xvi. 15 ἐλέγχειν, pass. Jas. 11. 9; εὑρίσκειν, pass. 
Phil. ii. 7 (8). B. toa quality which is supposed, 
pretended, feigned, assumed: ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρί- 
νομαι, Ro. iii. 7; ὡς πονηρόν, Lk. vi. 22; add, 1 Co. iv. 7 ; 
viii. 7; 2 Co. vi. 8-10; xi. 15 sq. ; xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 12 ; 
frequently it can be rendered as 7f; as though, Acts iii. 
Dor xoci 10. 20; sexiti9 3050150 05:29:74 21€ 0 κὶ ΤᾺ; xi. 
17; Col ii. 20; Heb. xi. 27; xiii. 3; ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δι᾽ 
ἡμῶν, sc. γεγραμμένης, 2 Th. ii. 2. 3. ὡς with the 
gen. absol. presents the matter spoken of — either as 
the belief of the writer, 2 Co. v. 20; 2 Pet. i. 3; or as 
some one's erroneous opinion : 1 Co. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12; 
cf. W. $65, 9; [B.§ 145, 7; esp. $144, 22]. In gen- 
eral, by the use of ós the matter spoken of is presented — 
either as a mere matter of opinion: as in ὡς ἐξ ἔργων 
sc. ὁ Ἰσραὴλ νόμον δικαιοσύνης ἐδίωξεν, Ro. ix. 32 (where 
itmarks the imaginary character of the help the 
Tsraelites relied on, they thought to attain righteous- 
ness in that way [A. V. as it were by works]) ; —or 
as a purpose: πορεύεσθαι ὡς ἐπὶ θάλασσαν, that, as 
they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts xvii. 14, cf. 
Meyer ad loc.; W. 617 (573 sq.), [but LT Tr WH 
read ἕως, as far as to ete.]; — or as merely the thought 
of the writer: Gal. iii. 16; before ὅτι, 2 Co. xi. 21; — or 
as the thought and pretence of others: also before ὅτι, 
2 Th. ii. 2: cf. W. u. s.; [B. § 149, 3; on ὡς ὅτι in 2 Co. 
v. 19 (A. V. to wit) see W. and B. ll. cc. (cf. Esth. iv. 
14; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 11, 1 and Miiller’s note; L. and S. 
s. v. G. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 7)]; ὡς dv, as if, as though, 
2 Co. x. 9 [cf. W. 310 (291); but cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1, 
‘and see ἄν, IV. ]. 4. ws has its own verb, with which 
it forms a complete sentence ; a. ós with a finite 
verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be trans- 
lated as, just as, (Lat. sicut, eo modo quo) : Eph. vi. 20; 
ΟὟ τὶ 1v 4 NIS beta.) Gy 2) ket. n5 Jnv175 
Rev. ii. 28 (27) [this ex. is referred by some (ef. R. V. 





681 








ὡς 


mrg.) to 2 a. above]; vi. 13; ix. 3; xviii. 6 [here ὡς καί; 
the ex. seems to belong under 2 b. above]. in phrases 
in which there is an appeal— either to the O. T. (ὡς 
γέγραπται), ΜΚ. 1. 2 [here T Tr WH καθώς] ; vii. 6; Lk. 
li. 4; Acts xiii. 33; or in general to the testimony of 
others, Acts xvii. 28; xxii. 5; xxv. 10; Ro. ix. 95: 1 
Co. x. 7 R G (cf. ὥσπερ, b.). in phrases like ποιεῖν 
ὡς προσέταξεν or συνέταξεν, etc.: Mt. i. 24; xxvi. 19; 
xxviii. 15; Lk. xiv. 22 [here T Trtxt. WH 6]; Tit. i. 
5; likewise, Mt. viii. 13; xv. 28; Rev. x. 7; se. γενηθή- 
TO pot, Mt. xxvi. 39. in short parenthetie or inserted 
sentences: ὡς εἰώθει, Mk. x. 1; ὡς ἐνομίζετο, Lk. iii. 23 ; 
ὡς λογίζομαι, 1 Pet. v. 12; ὡς ὑπολαμβάνετε, Acts ii. 15; 
ὡς λέγουσιν, Rev. ii. 245 ὡς àv ἤγεσθε, [ R. V. howsoever 
ye might be led] uteunque agebamini [cf. B. $ 139, 13; 
383 sq. (329); W. § 42, 3 a.], 1 Co. xii. 2. ὡς serves 
to add an explanatory extension [and is rendered in 
A. V. how (that)]: Acts x. 88; tiv... 
2 Co. vii. 15 ; rod λόγου τοῦ κυρίου, ὡς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Lk. 
xxii. 61; τοῦ ῥήματος, ὡς ἔλεγεν, Acts xi. 16, (Xen. Cyr. 
8, 2, 14; an. 1, 9,11); ef. Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc. 
p. 141. b. ós is used to present, in the form of a 
comparison, a motive which is urged upon one, — as 
ἄφες ἡμῖν rà ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν (RG 
ἀφίεμεν) κτλ. (for which Lk. xi. 4 gives καὶ γὰρ αὐτοὶ 
ἀφίομεν), Mt. vi. 12, —or which actuates one, as χάριν 
ἔχω TO ÜcQ ... ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω τὴν περὶ σοῦ μνείαν, 
2 Tim. i. 3 (for the dear remembrance of Timothy moves 
Paul's gratitude to God) ; [cf. Jn. xix. 33 (ef. IL. a. be- 
low)]; in these examples ὡς has almost the force of a 
causal particle; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 766; [L. and 
S. s. v. B. IV.; W. 448 (417)]. C. ws adds in a 
rather loose way something which serves to illustrate 
what precedes, and is equiv. to the case is as though 
[R. V. it is as when]: Mk. xiii. 34, where cf. Fritzsche 
p. 587; unless one prefer, with Meyer et al., to make it 
an instance of anantapodoton [ef. A. V. ‘For the Son 
of Man is as aman’ ete.]; see ὥσπερ, a. fin. 5. ac- 
cording as: Ro. xii. 3; 1 Co. iii. 5; Rev. xxii. 12. 6. 
ὡς, like the Germ. wie, after verbs of reading, nar- 
rating, testifying, and the like, introduces that 
which is read, narrated, etc. ; hence it is commonly said 
to be equivalent to ὅτι (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 765); 
but there is this difference between the two, that ὅτε ex- 
presses the thing itself, ὡς the mode or quality 
of the thing [hence usually rendered how], (cf. W. $53, 
9; [Meyer on Ro. i. 9; cf. L. and S. s. v. B. 1.1): thus 
after ἀναγινώσκειν, Mk. xii. 26 (where T Tr WH zàs); 
Lk. vi. 4 [here Tr WH br. os; Ltxt. reads ras]; μνησθῆ- 
va, Lk. xxiv. 6 [Lmrg. ὅσα]; θεᾶσθαι, Lk. xxiii. 55; 
ὑπομνῆσαι, Jude 5 [here ὅτε (not os) is the particle], 7 
[al. regard ὡς here as introducing a confirmatory illus- 
tration of what precedes (A.V. even as ete.) ; cf. Huther, 
or Brückner's De Wette, ad loc.]; εἰδέναι, Acts x. 38; 
Ro. xi. 2; 1 Th. ii. 11 ; ἐπίστασθαι, Acts x. 28 [here many 
(cf. R. V. mrg.) connect ós with the adj. immediately 
following (see 8 below)]; xx. 18, 20; ἀπαγγέλλειν, Lk. 
viii. 47; ἐξηγεῖσθαι, Lk. xxiv. 35; μάρτυς, Ro. i. 9 [here 


ς peer: 
ὑπακοὴν, ὡς etc. 


ὡς 682 


al. connect ὡς with the word which follows it (cf. 8 
below) ]; Phil. i. 8. 7. ὡς before numerals denotes 
nearly, about: as, ὡς δισχίλιοι, Mk. v. 13; add, Mk. viii. 
9; Lk. ii. 37 (here L T Tr WH és) ; viii. 42; Jn. i. 39 
(40); [iv. 6 LT Tr WH); vi. 19 (here Lehm. ὡσεί); 
xi.18; [xix. 39 GL T TrWH]; xxi. 8; Actsi. 15 [Tdf. 
ὡσεί]; v. 7, [36 LT Tr WH]; xiii. [18 (yet not WH 
txt.) ; ef. καί, I. 2 f.], 20; xix. 34 [WH ὡσεί] ; Rev. viii. 
1, (3,1 S. xi. 1; xiv. 2, etc.) ; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. 
see Passow s. v. vol ii. p. 26315; [L. and S. s. v. E; 
Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]. 8. ós is prefixed to adjectives 
and adverbs, and corresponds to the Lat. quam, how, 
Germ. wie, (so fr. Hom. down): ὡς ὡραῖοι, Ro. x. 15; 
add, Ro. xi. 33; ὡς ὁσίως, 1 Th. ii. 10, (Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 
1); with a superlative, as much as can be: ὡς τάχιστα; 
as quickly as possible (very often in prof. auth.), Acts 
xvii. 15; cf. Viger. ed. Hermann, pp. 562, 850; Passow 
ii. 2 p. 2631^ bot.; [L. and S. s. v. Ab. III. . 

II. ὡς as a particle of time; a. as, when, 
since; Lat. ut, cum, [W. $41 b. 3,1; § 53, 8]: with the 
indic., ὡς δὲ ἐπορεύοντο, Mt. xxviii.8 (9); Mk.ix.21 [Tr 
mrg. ἐξ οὗ]; Lk. i. 23, 41, 44; ii. 15, 39; iv. 25; v. 4; 
Xii 12: x10: 03:9: 255 9X1X«10. 29.) ΧΙ 66 2 Ro, 
xxiv. 32; Jn.ii.9, 28; iv. 1, 40, [45 Td£.]; vi. 12, 16; 
vii. 105 viii. 7; xi. 6, 20, 29, 32 sq.; xviii.6 ; [cf. xix. 
33 (see I.4 b. above)]; xx. 11; xxi 9; Actsi.10; v. 
24: vii. 23; viii. 80; ix. 28; x. 7,17, 25; xiii. [48 WH 
txt. (see I. 7 above)], 25, 29 ; xiv. 55 xvi. 4, 10, 15; xvii. 
185 xviii. bs xix. 9, 21; xx. 14, 18; xxl. 1,12, 27 sexx: 
11, 25; xxv. 14; xxvii. 1, 27; xxviii. 4, (Hom. Il. 1, 
600; 2,321; 3,21; Hdt.1, 65,80; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 4. 
8. 20; often in the O. T. Apoer. esp. 1 Mace. ; cf. Wahl, 
Clavis apocr. V. T.., s. v. IV. e. p. 507 sq.). b. while, 
when, (Lat. dum, quando): Lk. xx.37 ; as long as, while, 
Jn. [ix. 4 Tr mrg. WH mrg. (cf. ἕως, I. 2)]; xii. 35, [36], 
LTTr WH [(cf. ἕως, α. s.)]; Lk. xii. 58; Gal vi. 10 
[here A.V. as (so R.V.in Lk. 1. c.) ; T WH read the subj. 
(as we may have etc.) ; Meyer (on Jn. xii. 35; Gal. 1. c.) 
everywhere denies the meaning while ; but cf. L. and S. 
s. v. B. V. 2.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. 6.1. C. ὡς ἄν, as 
soon as: with the subj. pres. Ro. xv. 24 [A. V. here 
whensoever]; with the 2 aor. subj. having the force of 
the fut. perf., 1 Co. xi. 34 [R. V. whensoever]; Phil. ii. 
23. [Cf. B. 232 (200); W. § 42, 5a. ; Soph. Lex. s. v. 
6.] 

III. ὡς as a final particle (Lat. wt), in order that, 
in order to [cf. Gildersleeve in Am. Journ. of Philol. No. 
16, p. 419 sq.]: foll. by an inf. [ (cf. B. 244 (210) ; W. 318 
(299) ; Krüger § 65, 3, 4), Lk. ix. 52 L mrg. WH]; Acts 
xx. 24, (3 Mace. i. 2; 4 Mace. xiv. 1); ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν; 
so to say (see εἶπον, 1 a.), Heb. vii. 9 [L mre. εἶπεν]. 

IV. ὡς as a consecutive particle, introducing a 
consequence, so that: so (ace. to the less freq. usage) 
with the indic. (IIdt. 1, 163; 2, 135; W. 462 (431)), 
Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, (Hebr. ws, Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11); 
[but many interpp. question this sense with the indic. 
(the exx. fr. Hdt. are not parallel), and render os in 
Heb. ll. cc. as (so R. V.)]. 


ὥσπερ 


ὦσαννά [see WH. Intr. § 408; but LT óc; see Tdf 
Proleg. p. 107], (derived from Ps. exvii. (exviii) 25 
Nl nj Un ie. ‘save, I pray’, Sept. σῶσον δή; [in 
form the word seems to be the Greek reproduction of 
an abbreviated pronunciation of the Hebr. (w3-yvin) ; 
al. would make it &3yvN. (‘save us’); cf. Hilgenfeld, 
Evang. sec. Hebraeos (ed. alt. 1884) p. 25 and p. 122; 
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 173]), hosanna; be 
propitious: Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9sq. ; Jn. xii. 13; with 
τῷ υἱῷ Δαυΐδ added, be propitious to the Messiah, Mt. 
xxi. 9, 15, [ef. ὡσαννὰ τῷ θεῷ Δαβίδ, ‘Teaching’ 10, 6 
(where see Harnack's note) ].* 

ὡσ-αύτως, (ws and αὔτως), adv., [asa single word, Post- 
Homerie], in like manner, likewise: put after the verb, 
Mt.xx.5; xxi. 30, 36 ; put before the verb, Mk. xiv. 31; 
Lk. xiii. 3 (here L T Tr WH ὁμοίως), 5 (T Trtxt. WH); 
Ro. viii. 26; 1 Tim. v. 25; Tit. ii. 6; as often in Grk. 
writ. the verb must be supplied from the preceding con- 
text, Mt. xxv. 17; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xx. 31; xxii. 20 [WH 
reject the pass.]; 1 Co.xi. 25; 1 Tim. ii. 9 (sc. βούλομαι, 
cf. 8); iii. 8 (sc. δεῖ, cf. 7), 11; Tit. ii. 3 (sc. πρέπει 
εἶναι)." 

ao-el, (ὡς and εἰ [Tdf. Proleg. p. 1107), adv., fr. Hom. 
down, prop. as if, i. e. a. as it were (had been), as 
though, as, like as, like: Mt. iii. 16; ix. 80 [Treg. os]; 
Lk. iii. 22 (LT Tr WH as); Acts ii. 3; vi. 15; ix. 18 
[LT Tr WH os]; Ro. vi. 13 L T Tr WH; Heb. i. 12; 
also Rec. in Mk.i.10; Jn. i. 32; γίνεσθαι ὡσεί, Mt. xxviii. 
4 RG; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the 
pass.]; εἶναι ὡσεί, Mt. xxviii. 3 [LT Tr WH ὡς], and 
Rec. in Heb. xi. 12 and Rev. i. 14; φαίνεσθαι ὡσεί τι, to 
appear like a thing, Lk. xxiv. 11. b. about, nearly : 
a. before numerals: Mt. xiv. 21; Lk. i. 56 [R G]; iii. 
23; ix. 14, 28; xxii. 41,59; xxiii. 44; Jn. vi. IJO[R GL 
(al.ós)]; Acts 11. 41; iv.4[RG]; x.3 [in LT Tr WH 
it is strengthened here by the addition of wept]; xix. 7; 
also, Rec. in Mk. vi. 44; R Gin Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [G ?], 
39; Acts v. 36; Lehm. in Jn. vi. 19, (Judg. iii. 29 ; Neh. 
vii. 66; Xen. Hell. 1, 2, 9; 2,4, 25). B. before a 
measure of space: ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν, Lk. xxii. 41.* 

Ὡσηέ [ἃ T Tr, but RL 'Qc.; see WH. Intr. $408; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], (yu ‘deliverance’), 6, Hosea, a 
well-known Hebrew prophet, son of Beeri and contem- 
porary of Isaiah (Hos. i. 1 sq.): Ro. ix. 25.* 

ὥσ-περ, ([cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]; fr. ὡς and the enclit. 
particle zép, which, *in its usual way, augments and 
brings out the force of ós" Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 768; 
see πέρ), adv., [fr. Hom. down], just as, even as ; a. 
in a protasis with a finite verb, and followed by οὕτως or 
οὕτως καί in the apodosis [cf. W. §§ 53, 5; 60, 5]: Mt. 
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27,37 sq. 38 (LT Tr [cf. ὡς init.] 
WH as); Lk. xvii. 24; Jn. v. 21, 26; Ro. v. 19, 21; vi. 
4, 19; xi. 80; 1 Co. xi. 12; xv. 22; xvi. 1; 2 Co. i. 7 (here 
| LT Tr WH ὡς): Gal. iv. 29; Eph. v. 24 [L T Tr WH 
| as]; Jas. ii. 26; ὥσπερ - .. tva καί ([ef. W. $43, 5 a.; 
| B. 241 (208); cf. tva, IT. 4 b.]), 2 Co. viii. 7; εὐλογίαν 
| .. « ἑτοίμην εἶναι [cf. W. $44, 1 c.] οὕτως ὡς εὐλογίαν kal 
μὴ ὥσπερ ete. ‘that your bounty might so be ready as a 








ὡσπερεί 


matter of bounty and not as if’ ete. 2 Co. ix. 5 [but only 
Rec. reads ὥσπερ, and even so the example does not 
strictly belong under this head]; the apodosis which 
should have been introduced by οὕτως is wanting [W. 
§ 64, 7 b.; p. 569 (530) ; cf. B. $ 151, 12 and 23g.]: Ro. 
v. 12 (here what Paul subjoined in vs. 13 sq. to prove the 
truth of his statement πάντες ἥμαρτον, prevented him 
from adding the apodosis, which had it corresponded 
accurately to the terms of the protasis would have run 
as follows: οὕτω καὶ δ᾽ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ δικαιοσύνη eis τὸν 
κόσμον εἰσῆλθε καὶ διὰ τῆς δικαιοσύνης ἡ ζωή" καὶ οὕτως εἰς 
πάντας ἀνθρώπους ἡ ζωὴ διελεύσεται, ἐφ᾽ à πάντες δικαιω- 
θήσονται; this thought he unfolds in vs. 15 sqq. in an- 
other form); Mt. xxv. 14 (here the extended details of 
the parable caused the writer to forget the apodosis 
which he had in mind at the beginning; [cf. ds, I. 
4 e. ]. b. it stands in close relation to what pre- 
cedes: Mt. v. 48 (LT ΤΥ ΜῊ óc) ; vi. 2, 5 (LT Tr 
WH as), 7,16 (L T TrWH as); xx. 28; xxv. 32; Acts 
ἘΠΕ 17; xis 15; 1 Co.vill.\o ἘΠῚ veo, ΗΒ: av. 10: vit. 
27; ix. 25; Rev. x. 3; ὥσπερ γέγραπται, 1 Co. x. 11, Τ' 
Tr WH; εἰμὶ ὥσπερ τις, to be of one’s sort or class (not 
quite identical in meaning with és or ὡσεί τις, to be like 
one [cf. Bengel ad loc.]), Lk. xviii. 11 [but L Tr WH 
mrg. às]; γίνομαι, Acts ii. 2 (the gen. is apparently not 
to be explained by the omission of ἦχος, but rather as 
gen. absol.: just as when a mighty wind blows, i. e. just 
as a sound is made when a mighty wind blows [R.V. as 
of the rushing of a mighty wind]); ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ ὁ 
ἐθνικός κτλ. let him be regarded by thee as belonging to 
the number of etc. Mt. xviii. 17.* 

ὡσ-περ-εἰ, (ὥσπερ and εἰ [T'df. Proleg. p. 110]), adv., 
fr. Aeschyl. down, as, as it were: 1 Co. xv. 8.* 

ὥσ-τε, (fr. ds and the enclit. τέ [Tdf. Proleg. p. 1107), 
a consecutive conjunction, i.e. expressing conse- 
quence or result, fr. Hom. down, cf. K7otz ad Devar. ii. 
2 p. 770 sqq.; W. $ 41 b. 5 N. 1 p. 301 (282 sq.) ; [B. 
§ 139, 50]; 1. so that, [ A. V. frequently insomuch 
that]; a. with an inf. (or ace. and inf.) [B. § 142, 
3; the neg. in this construction is uj, D. $ 148, 6; W. 
480 (447)]: preceded by the demonstr. οὕτως, Acts xiv. 
1; τοσοῦτος, Mt. xv. 33 (so many loaves as to fill ete.) ; 
without a demonstr. preceding (where ὥστε defines 
more accurately the magnitude, extent, or quantity), 
Mt. vin. 24, 28; xii. 22; xiii. 2, 32, 54; xv. 31; xxvii. 
PAV 1097745. 31:2) 712 5 11.105 20/5 ἔν. 1,32» ois) 1x- 
Dore xvab ike veg; Xie 15 -AGtS 1. 195 v. 155 ve 395 
zcv132 6 πεῖ κ ΤῸ: ΤῸ. Gs ΒΟ, ναι. 6.» xv. 195 1 Conia ia We 
Sexe OO Is 5; 1: 2: 11. ἧς ὙΠ 1 ΒΗ 1151} 
'Th.i.7sq.; 2 ΤῊ. 1. 4; ii. 4; Heb. xiii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 21; 
it is used also of a designed result, so as to i.q. in 
order to, for to, Mt. x. 1; xxiv. 24 [their design]; xxvii. 
1; Lk. iv. 29 (Rec. eis τό); ix. 52 [L mrg. WH ὡς, q. v. 
IIL]; and L T Tr WH in Lk. xx. 20 [RG eis τό], (1 
Mace. i. 49; iv. 2, 28; x. 3; 2 Macc. ii. 6; Thuc. 4, 23; 
Xen. Cyr. 3, 2,16; Joseph. antt. 13, δ, 10; Eus. h. e. 3, 


683 





ὠφέλιμος 


28, 3 [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.5]); ef. W. 318 (298) ; B. $139, 
50 Rem. b. so that, with the indicative [B. 244 
(210); ef. W. 301 (283); Meyer or Ellicott on Gal. 
as below]: Gal. ii. 13, and often in prof. auth.; preceded 
by οὕτως, Jn. iii. 16. 2. so then, therefore, wherefore : 
with the indic. (cf. Passow s. v. IL. 1 b., vol. ii. p. 2639"; 
[L. and S. s. v. B. II. 2; the neg. in this constr. is οὖ, 
B. $148, 5]), Mt. xii. 12; xix. 6; xxiii. 31; Mk. ii. 28; 
x 87 Ro. vil. 4, 125 x. 250160211527: vie soe 05 
xiv. 22; 2 Co.iv. 12; v.16sq.; Gal. iii. 9, 24; iv. 7, 165 
once with a hortatory subj.1 Co. v. 8 [here L mrg. ind.]. 
before an imperative: 1 Co. iii. 21; [iv. 5]; x. 12; xi. 
835 xiv. 59: xv. 58: ἘΠῚ 1. 12 ἵν: 150 1. Π’ awedios 
Jas. 1.19 [L T Tr WH read tere ; cf. p.174*top]; 1 Pet. 
ἐν: UGH s 

ὠτάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of οὖς, ὠτός ; cf. γυναικάριον 
[W. 24, 96 (91)]), iq. ὠτίον (q. v-), the ear: Mk. xiv. 
47 LTTr WH; Jn. xviii. 10 T Tr WH. (Anthol. 11, 
75, 2; Anaxandrides ap. Athen. 3, p. 95 c.) * 

ὠτίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of οὖς, ὠτός, but without the 
dimin. force; *the speech of common life applied the 
diminutive form to most of the parts of the body, as ra 
ῥινία the nose, rà óppártov, στηθέίδιον. χελύνιον, σαρκίον 
the body” Lob. ad Phryn. p. 211 sq. [cf. W. 25 (24)]), 
a later Greek word, the ear: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv. 47 
ΓΒ G (ef. órápiov)] ; Lk. xxii. 51; Jn. xviii. 10 [RG L 
(cf. órápiov)], 26. (Sept. for jis, Deut. xv. 17; 1 S. ix. 
15; xx. 2, 13; 2 S. xxii. 45; Is. 1. 4; Am. iii. 12.) * 

ὠφέλεια [[W H. -Ma (cf. I, c) ], -as, ἡ, (Peds), fr. [Soph. 
and] Hat. down, usefulness, advantage, profit: Ro. iii. 1; 
τῆς ὠφελείας χάριν (Polyb. 8, 82, 8 [yet in the sense of 
*booty']), Jude 16. (Job xxii. 3; Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 
10.)* 

ὠφελέω, -ῶ; fut. ὠφελήσω; 1 aor. ὠφέλησα ; Pass., pres. 
ὠφελοῦμαι ; 1 aor. SparnOnv; 1 fut. ὠφεληθήσομαι (Mt. 
xvi. 26 LT Tr WH); (ὄφελος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; Sept. for Spin; to assist, to be useful or advan- 
tageous, to profit: absol. Ro. ii. 25 ; with aec. οὐδέν, to be 
of no use, to effect nothing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Jn. vi. 63; xii. 
19, [in these exx. (Jn. vi. 63 excepted) A. V. prevail]; 
τινά, to help or profit one, Heb. iv. 2; τινά τι to help, profit, 
one in a thing ([but the second acc. is a cognate ace. or 
the acc. of a neut. adj. or pron.; ef. W. 227 (213)] so fr. 
Hat. 3, 126 down): οὐδέν twa, 1 Co. xiv. 6; Gal. v. 25 
τί ὠφελήσει [or ὠφελεῖ (tov) ] ἄνθρωπον, ἐάν κτὰλ.; [CT 
WH follow with an inf.)], what will (or * doth’) it profit 
a man if etc. [(or ‘to’ etc.)] ? Mk. viii. 36; pass. ὠφελοῦ- 
μαι, to be helped or profited: Heb. xiii. 9; with ace. μηδέν, 
Mk. v. 26; οὐδέν, 1 Co. xiii. 3; with acc. of the interrog. 
ri, Mt. xvi. 26; Lk. ix. 25 [here WH mrg. gives the 
act.]; ri ἔκ τινος (gen. of pers.), to be profited by one 
in some particular [cf. Mey. on Mt. as below ; ἐκ, I. 5], 
Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11.* 

ὠφέλιμος, -ov, (ὠφελέω), profitable: τινί (dat. of advan- 
tage), Tit. iii. 8; πρός τι (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 607 d. [W. 
213 (200)]), 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. iii. 16.* 





APPENDIX. 





PREFATORY REMARKS. 





HE lists of words herewith subjoined, as an aid to researches involving the language of the 
New Testament, require a few preliminary remarks by way of explanation. 


In the attempt to classify the vocabulary of the New Testament, words which occur in 
secular authors down to and including Aristotle (who died s.c. 322) are regarded as belonging 
to the classical period of the language, and find no place in the lists. 

Words first met with between s.c. 322 and m.c. 150 are regarded as “Later Greek” and 
registered in the list which bears that heading; but between s.c. 280 and 8.0. 150 they have 
“Sept.” appended to them in case they also occur in that version. 

Words which first appear in the secular authors between r.c. 150 and s.c. 100 and are also 
found in the Septuagint are credited to “Biblical Greek” (list 1 p. 693), but with the name of 
the secular author added. 

Words which first appear between B.c. 100 and A.p. 1 are registered solely as * Later Greek.” 

Words which first occur between s.p. 1 and a.p. 50 are enrolled as “ Later Greek,” but. 
with the name of the author appended. 

Words which appear first in the secular authors of the last half of the first century of our 
era have an asterisk prefixed to them, and are enrolled both in the list of “Later Greek” 
and in the list of “ Biblical Greek.” 

A New Testament word credited to Biblical Greek, if not found in the Septuagint but 
occurring in the Apocryphal books of the Old Testament, is so designated by an appended 
* Apocr." ! 

Whenever a word given in either the Biblical or the Later Greek list is also found in the 
Anthologies or the Inscriptions, that fact has been noted (as an intimation that such word 
may possibly be older than it appears to be); and if the word belong to “ Later Greek,” the 
name of the oldest determinate author in which it occurs is also given. 

The New Testament vocabulary has thus been classified according to hard and fast 
chronological lines. But to obviate in some measure the incorrect impression which the rigor 
of such a method might give, it will be noticed that a twofold recognition has been accorded 
to words belonging to the periods in which the secular usage and the sacred may be supposed to 
overlap: viz., for the period covered by the preparation of the Septuagint, for the fifty years 
which followed its completion, and for the last half of the first Christian century. Nevertheless, 
the uncertainty inseparable from the results no scholar will overlook. Indeed, the surprises 


1 Tt should be noted that in the following lists the term * Sept." is used in its restricted sense to designate merely 
the canonical books of the Greek Old Testament; but in the body of the lexicon “Sept.” often includes all the 
books of the Greek version, — as well the apocryphal as the canonical. In the lists of words peculiar to individual 
writers an appended * fr. Sept." signifies that the word occurs only in a quotation from the Septuagint. 


688 


almost every one has experienced in investigating the age of some word in his vernacular which 
has dropped out of use for whole stretches of time and then reappeared, may admonish him of 
the precarious character of conclusions respecting the usage of an ancient language, of which 
only fragmentary relics survive, and those often but imperfectly examined. The rough and 
problematical results here given are not without interest; but they should not be taken for 
more than they are worth. 

The scheme of distribution adopted will be rendered more distinct by the subjoined 


CHRONOLOGICAL CONSPECTUS. 


Words in use before B.c.322. . . . . . . . . . . . . are ranked as classical, and remain unregistered. 


Words first used between B.c. 322 and B.c. 280 . . . . - . . are enrolled as Later Greek. 
receive a anal enrolment but double notation, viz. 
as Later Greek with Sept. usage noted. 
receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz. 
as Biblical Greek with secular usage noted. 
. are enrolled simply as Later Greek. 


Words first used between B.c. 280 and B.c. 150 . ᾿» 
b are AMET as Later Greek but with the name of the 


Words first used between B.c. 150 and m.c. 100 . . . 


Words first used between B.c. 100 and 4.D. 1 . . .. 

Words first used between a.p. 1 and A.D. 50 . . . - author appended. 

receive a double enrolment, viz. both as Biblical and 
as Later Greek (with asterisk prefixed and name 
of secular author appended). 


Words first used between a.p. 50 and A.p.100 . . . - 


The selection of the distinctive New Testament significations has not been so simple a 
matter as might be anticipated : — 

It is obvious that the employment of a word in a figure of speech cannot be regarded as 
giving it a new and distinct signification. Accordingly, such examples as ἀνακλίνω in the 
description of future blessedness (Mt. viii. 11), ἄνεμος to designate the ever-changing doctrinal 
currents (Eph. iv. 14), ἀπαρχή of first converts (Ro. xvi. 5), πόλις of the consummated kingdom 
of God (Heb. xiii. 14 etc.), eravpóo as applied to the σάρξ (Gal. v. 24 etc.), χείρ to denote God's 
power (Lk. i. 66 etc.), and similar uses, are omitted. 

Again, the mere application of a word to spiritual or religious relations does not in general 
amount to a new signification. Accordingly, such terms as γινώσκειν θεόν, δοῦλος Χριστοῦ, ὑπηρέτης 
τοῦ λόγου, λύτρον and μαρτυρέω in the Christian reference, μένω in St. John's phraseology, and 
the like, have been excluded. Yet this restriction has not been so rigorously enforced as to 
rule out such words as éxAéyopat, καλέω, κηρύσσω, κρίνω, προφητεύω, and others, in what would be 
confessed on all hands to be characteristic or technical New Testament senses. 

In general, however, the list is a restricted rather than an inclusive one. 


An appended mark of interrogation indieates uncertainty owing to diversity of text. In 
the lists of words peculiar to individual New Testament writers — 

a. When the use of a word by an author (or book) is unquestioned in any single passage 
such word is credited to him without an interrogation-mark, even though its use be disputed by 
some edition of the text in every other passage of that author. 

Ὁ. When a word is found in one author (or book) according to all editions, but though 
occurring in others is questioned there by some form of the text in every instance, it is credited 
to the first, and the name of the others is appended in parenthesis with a question-mark. 


689 


c. When a word is found in two authors (or books), but in one of them stands in a 
quotation from the Septuagint, it is credited to the one using it at first hand, and its use by 
the other is noted with “Sept.” or “fr. Sept." appended. 

d. A word which is found in but a single author (or book) is credited to the same with a 
question-mark, even though its use be disputed by one or another form of the text in every 
instance of its occurrence. 

e. A word which is found in two or more authors (or books) yet is disputed by one or 
another form of the text in every instance, is excluded from the lists altogether. 


The monumental misjudgments committed by some who have made questions of authorship 
turn on vocabulary alone will deter students, it is to be hoped, from misusing the lists 
exhibiting the peculiarities of the several books. 


Explanations whieh apply only to particular lists are given at the beginning of those lists. 
Proper names of persons, countries, rivers, places, have been omitted. 

In drawing up the lists free use has been made of the collections to be found in Winer's 
Grammar, the various Introductions and Encyclopedias, the articles by Professor Potwin in 
the Bibliotheca Sacra for 1875, 1876, 1880, such works as those of Holtzmann on the Synoptical 
Gospels and the Pastoral Epistles, and especially the copious catalogues given by Zeller in his 
Theologisehe Jahrbücher for 1843, pp. 445-525. 

In conclusion, a publie expression of my thanks is due to W. W. Fenn, A. B., a student in 
the Theological department of the University, for very efficient and painstaking assistance. 


ἘΠ ΕΠ Ak 


ΟΟΝΤΕΝΈΊ 5. 





I. Laver, i.e. POST-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK Worps ΙΝ THE NEW TESTAMENT . 


IL Borrowrep Worps VS ES 
1. Words borrowed from the Hebrew 
2. Words borrowed from the Latin 
9. Words borrowed from other Foreign Tongues 


IIL ΒΙΒΙΙΟΑΙ, 4e. New TrsTAMENT, GREEK . 
1. Biblical Words 
2. Biblical Significations . 


IV. Worps rECULIAR TO IxpivIDUAL New TESTAMENT WRITERS 
1. To Matthew . 
2. To Mark 
9. To Luke T Me 
4. To all three Synoptists . 
5. To John 
6. To Paul 
a. To the Longer Epistles A Donar 
v. To the Pastoral Epistles : 
e. To both the Pastoral and the other Pauline Epistles 
7. To the Epistle to the Hebrews 
8. To James . 
9. To Peter 
10. To Jude 
11. To the Apocalypse : 
12. To the Apocalypse and the Fourth NEN 


V. ἘΘΈΜΕ, ὍΒ VERSES . '- 3.25908 999 8 00. s e T DTDESESTESRCRE S 


ADDITIONS’ AND CORRECTIONS, 77 999595 be) e. ese aiiis τ εὐ es 


ALAN D LX: 





p 


LATER, ie. POST-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WORDS IN THE 


"ἀγαθοποιός Plut. 
ἀγνόημα 

ἀδηλότης 

ἀδιαλείπτως 

ἄθεσμος 

ἀθέτησις Cicero 
ἄθλησις Polyb., Inscr. 
ἀκαιρέομαι 

ἀκατάλυτος 
ἀκατάπαυστος 

ἀκρασία 

*dxpoatnptov Plut. 
ἀκυρόω 

ἀλάβαστρον (-rov Hat.) 
ἀλεκτοροφωνία Aesop 
᾿Αλεξανδρινός (or -dpivos) 
ἀλήθω Anthol. 
ἀλληγορέω Philo 
ἀμαράντινος Inser.? 
ἀμετάθετος 

ἀμετανόητος 

*avayevvaw Joseph. 
ἀνάδειξις 

ἀνάθεμα Anthol. 
ἀναθεωρέω 
ἀναντίρρητος 
ἀναντιρρήτως 
ἀναπολόγητος 
"ανατάσσομαι Plut. (Sept. ?) 
ἀνάχυσις 
"ἀνεπαίσχυντος Joseph. 
*avOurarevw Plut. 
ἀνθύπατος Inscr., Polyb. 
ἀντιδιατίθημι Philo 
"ἀντιλοιδορέω Plut. 
᾿Αντιοχεύς 

*ávrAgpa Plut. 
ἀντοφθαλμέω 
ἀνυπότακτος 
ἀπαράβατος 
ἀπαρτισμός 

ἀπαύγασμα Philo 


N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks, 


*ameipactos Joseph. 

᾿ἀπεκδύομαι Joseph.? 

ἀπίον ἀφ-)ελπίζω 

ἀπερισπάστως 

*amóDekros Plut. 

ἀποθησαυρίζω 

ἀποκαραδοκία 

ἀπόκριμα Polyb., Inser. 

ἀπολείχω 

ἀποτομία 

ἀπολύτρωσις 

ἀποστασία Archim., Sept. 

ἀποφορτίζομαι Philo 

*anoxpynots Plut. 

ἀπρόσιτος 

“Apay Strab. 

ἀροτριάω 

*dpraypos Plut. 

ἀρτέμων Vitruv. 

*ápxtepartkós Joseph., Inscr. 

᾿Ασιάρχης Strab., Inser. 

ἀσσάριον Anth., Dion. Hal., 
Inser. 

ἀστοχέω 

ἀφθαρσία Philo 

ἤἄψινθος Aret. (ς-θιον Xen. 
on). 

βαθέως 

᾿βαπτισμός Joseph. 

᾿βαπτιστής Joseph. 

βιαστής Philo (βιατάς Pind.) 

*yayypawa Plut. 

γάζα Theophr., Inser. 

γονυπετέω 

γραώδης Strab. 

᾿γυμνητεύω Plut. 

δεισιδαιμονία Polyb., Inser. 

“SeopopvAaé Joseph. 

"δηνάριον Plut. 

διαγνωρίζω Philo 

διάταγμα Sap., Inser. 

διαυγάζω 


διαφημίζω 
διδακτικός Philo 
διερμηνεύω 

διετία Philo, Inser. 
διθάλασσος 
δίψυχος Philo 
δουλαγωγέω 
δυσεντέριον(-τερία Hippocr.) 
δυσερμήνευτος 
ἐγκακέω OF ἐκκακέω 
ἐγκοπή Or ἐκκοπή 
ἐθνάρχης Philo 


ἐθνικός 





ἐκδαπανάω 

ἔκθαμβος 

ἐκθαυμάζω Sir. 

ἐκνήφω Anthol. 

ἔκπαλαι Philo 

ἐκπλήρωσις 

ἐκτένεια 

*ehadppia Aret. 

ἐλεημοσύνη Sept. (Gen.) 
ἔλευσις 

*€upaivouar Joseph. 
ἐμπλοκή 

"ἐνδόμησις Joseph. 
ἐνέργημα 

*évopk((o ἢ Joseph., Inser. 
ἐνώπιον 

*é£apri(o Joseph., Inser. 
ἐξισχύω 

"ἐξορκιστής Joseph. 
*é£vmvos Joseph. 
"“ἐπαγωνίζομαι Plut., Inscr. 
"ἐπαθροίζω Plut. 

ἐπάν (B.C. 265) 

ἐπαρχία 

ἐπαφρίζω 

"ἐπενδύω Joseph. dive Hat.) 
ἐπιβαρέω Dion. Hal., Inscr. 
ἐπιθανάτιος 

᾿Ἐπικούρειος 








NEW TESTAMENT. 


ἐπισκηνόω 

᾿ἐπισωρεύω Plut. 

ἐπιταγή 

ἐπιχομηγέω 

ἑτερόγλωσσος 

εὐθυδρομέω 

εὐκαιρέω 

εὔκοπος 

"εὐνουχίζω Joseph. 

᾿εὐποιΐα Joseph., Inser. 

"εὐπρόσδεκτος Plut. 

"εὐψυχέω Joseph., Anthol., 
Inser. 

ζεστός 

ἡμιθανής Anthol. 

ἡμιώριον 

‘pens 

“Hpwbdiavoi Joseph. 

θειότης Philo 

"θεόπνευστος Plut. Orae. 
Sibyl. 

"θεότης Plut. 

θηριομαχέω 

θρησκεία (-κίη Hat.) 

θριαμβεύω 

θύϊνος 

θυμομαχέω 

ἱερουργέω Philo, Inser. 

ἱματισμός 

"Ἰουδαϊκός Joseph. 

"᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς Joseph. 

ἰσότιμος Philo 

*kaBe£rs Plut., Inscr. 

καθημερινός 

κακουχέω 

καταβαρέω 

καταβαρύνω 

καταγωνίζομαι 

κατάκριμα 

καταντάω 

"κατάρτισις Plut. 


κατάστημα 


LATER GREEK. 


καταυγάζω ? Apoll Rhod., 
Anthol. 

"κατευλογέω ? Plut. 

κατηχέω 

κατοπτρίζομαι Philo 

καυματίζω 

καυστηριάζω ? 

κενοδοξία 

κενόδοξος 

κεντυρίων 

κερματιστής 

κολώνια (-νία, etc.) Inser. 

"κορβᾶν (-Bavas) Joseph. 

kpáBarros or κράββατος 

κρυπτή 

κτήτωρ Diod., Inser., Anth. 

κτίσμα 

κωμόπολις 

"μαθητεύω Plut. 

μαθήτρια 

*pákeAAov Plut. 

μαργαρίτης 

“ματαιολογία Plut. 

μεθερμηνεύω 

"μεσουράνημα Plut. 

μεταμορφόω 

μετριοπαθέω Philo 

"μιασμός Plut. 

μίλιον 

μορφόω Anth. 

μόρφωσις 

νάρδος Anth. 

*vexpow Plut., Anth., Inscr. 

"νέκρωσις Aret. 

VEWTEPLKOS 

νησίον 

"ξέστης ? Joseph., Anthol. 

Evpdw (ξυρέω Hdt.) 

ὁδηγός 

οἰκέτεια ? Strab., Inscr. 

*oikakós Plut. 


1. Words borrowed from 
the Hebrew. 


' . N. B. Hebraisms in signifi- 
cation and construction 
(whether ‘proper’ or ‘improper ’) 
are excluded; so, too, are words 
of Semitic origin which had pre- 
viously found their way into 
Greek usage. 


᾿Αβαδδών 
'A88a 
᾿Ακελδαμά 





09 


"οἰκοδεσποτέω Plut. 
οἰκτίρμων Theocr., Sept., 
Anthol. 
ὀνάριον 
παλιγγενεσία Philo 
πανδοχεῖον ? (-κεῖον Arstph.) 
πανδοχεύς ? (-κεύς Plato) 
παρατήρησις Epigr. 
παραχειμασία 
παρείσακτος 
παρεισέρχομαι 
παρεκτὸς 
πατροπαράδοτος 
Inser. 
περιλάμπω 
περιοχή 
περιπείρω 
περπερεύομαι M. Antonin. 
πολλαπλασίων 
"πολυμερῶς Joseph. 
πολυτρόπως Philo 


Diod., 


πορισμός 

ποταπός (ποδαπός Aeschyl.) 
*mpavrópiov Joseph., Inser. 
mpairabea (-θία) ? Philo 
"πρόγνωσις Plut., Anthol. 
προελπίζω 
προευαγγελίζομαι Philo 
"προκαταγγέλλω Joseph. 
προκοπή 

"προσαίτης Plut. 





προσανέχω ? 
πρόσκαιρος 
mpook\npow Philo 
πρόσκλισις ? 
προσκοπή 
᾿προσρήγνυμι Joseph. 
προσφάτως 
προφητικός Philo 
ῥᾳδιούργημα 

ῥητῶς 


9 


- 


ῥοιζηδόν 

ῥομφαία Sept. 

"σαββατισμός Plut. 

*Ea00ovkatos Joseph. 

σαλπιστῆς Theophr., Inscr. 
(τπίγκτης Thue.) 

σάπφειρος 

σαρόω 

σέβασμα 

σεβαστός Strab., Inscr. 

σημειόω 

σηρικός 

"σικάριος Joseph. 

σίναπι 

"σιτιστός Joseph. 

σκοτία Apoll. Rhod., Sept., 
Anthol. 

σκύβαλον Anthol., Strab. 

σκωληκόβρωτος 

σπιλόω 

στασιαστής ? 

στρατολογέω 

στρατοπεδάρχης 

στρῆνος Lycoph., 
Anthol. 

*ovyyevis? Plut., Inser. 

συγκατάθεσις 

"συγκαταψηφίζω Plut. 

συγκληρονόμος Philo 

συγχράομαι ? 

συζήτησις ? 

συμβασιλεύω 

συμβούλιον Inscr. 

συμμεμίζω 

σύμμορφος 

συμπνίγω 

συναθλέω 

συνέκδημος Palaeph. 

συνηλικιώτης Inser. 

συνκατανεύω ? 

Ἐσυνοδεύω Plut. 


Sept., 


im 


BORROWED WORDS. 


ἀλληλούϊα Sept. 
ἀμὴν Sept. 

Baad Sept. 

Bap 

βάτος Apocr. 
Βεελζεβούλ (-BovB) 
Βελίαρ (-Aiad) 
Boavepyés 

Ταββαθᾶ 

γέεννα (γαιέν. Josh. xviii. 16) 
Toyoda 


‘EBpaixds 

“Ἑβραῖος Sept. 

“EBpais Apocr. 

‘EBpaiori Apocr. 

ἐλωΐ (cf. HAL) 

᾿Εμμανουήλ Sept. 

ἐφῴφαθά 

ζιζάνιον 

ἠλί or HAL or ἡλεί (cf. eAot) 
᾿Ιουδαΐζω Sept. 

᾿ΙἸουδαϊκός Apocr. and -κῶς 








BorrowEep Wonps. 


συνυποκρίνομαι 
συσπαράσσω 
συστατικός (-κώτερον Aris- 
tot.) 
"συστασιαστής ? Joseph. 
συστοιχέω 
᾿σωματικῶς Plut. 
σωφρονισμός Philo, Aesop 
"ταπεινοφροσύνη Joseph. 
ταχινός Theocr., Sept. 
τάχιον 
τελώνιον 
τετράδιον Philo 
"τετραρχέω Joseph. 
τετράρχης 
τομώτερος 
τριετία 
τρίστεγος 
τροχιά Nicand., Sept., 
Anthol. 
"τυφωνικός Plut. 
viobecia Diod., Inser. 
ὑπερπλεονάζω 
ὑπογραμμός Philo 
ὑπολιμπάνω 
ὑποπόδιον Chares, Sept. 
“brroarodn Joseph. 
ὑποταγή 
ὑποτύπωσις Quint. 
ὑφειδομένως Plut. 
φιλαδελφία (Alex. ?) Philo 
φιλήδονος Anth. 
φρυάσσω Callim., 
Anth. 
χάρισμα Philo 
χειρόγραφον Polyb., Inscr. 
χόρτασμα Phylarch., Sept. 
ψώχω 
ὠτίον Sept., Anth. 
Toray 318 (75*, 16 ?) 


Sept., 


᾿Ιουδαΐσμός Apocr. 

Kavavatos ? 

Kavavirns? 

κατήγωρ ? 

κορβᾶν or kopBavas 

κόρος Sept. 

κοῦμι OF κοῦμ OF κούμ 

λαμά or λαμμᾶ or λεμά ΟΥ̓ 
Anpa, ete. 

μαμωνᾶς 

μάννα Sept. 


Borrowrep Worbs. 


papav ada (μαραναθά) 
Meooias 

Μολόχ Sept. 

(μωρέ ?) 

πάσχα Sept. 


προσάββατον ? Sept. Apocr. | 


ῥαββί, -βεί 

ῥαββονί, -βουνί, -νεί 
ῥακά or ῥακᾶ or ῥαχά 
σαβαχθανί, -νεί 
σαβαώθ Sept. 
σαββατισμός 
σάββατον Sept. 
Σαδδουκαῖος 

σατᾶν or σατανᾶς Sept. 
σάτον Sept. 

σίκερα Sept. 

ταλιθᾶ 


BIBLICAL, i.e. 


1. Biblical Words. 


᾿Αβαδδών Sept. 

'ABBà 

ἄβυσσος, ἡ, Sept. (as adj. 
Aeschyl. et sqq.) 

ἀγαθοεργέω (-θουργέω ?) 

ἀγαθοποιέω Sept. 

ἀγαθοποιΐα 

"ἀγαθοποιός Plut. 

ἀγαθωσύνη Sept. 

ἀγαλλίασις Sept. 

ἀγαλλιάω Sept. 

ἀγάπη Sept. 

ἀγενεαλόγητος 

ἁγιάζω Sept., Anthol. 

ἁγιασμός Sept. 

ἁγιότης Apocr. 

ἁγιωσύνη Sept. 

ἄγναφος 

ἁγνισμός Sept., Inser. 

dyvorns Inscr. 

ἀδελφότης Apocr. 

ἀδιαφθορία ? 

ἀθετέω Sept., Polyb., Inscr. 

αἱματεκχυσία 

αἴνεσις Sept. 

αἰσχροκερδῶς 

αἰτίωμα ? 








693 


ὕσσωπος Sept. 
Φαρισαῖος 
Χερουβίμ, -βείν, Sept. 
ὥσαννά 

Tora. 57. 


2. Words borrowed from 
the Latin. 


N. B. Proper names are ex- 
cluded, together with Latinisms 
which had already been adopted 
by profane authors. 


δηνάριον 

δίδωμι ἐργασίαν i. q. operam 
do 

ἔχω 1. q. aestimo 

κῆνσος 

κοδράντης 


κολωνία ete. 

κουστωδία 

λαμβάνω (q.v. I. 3 e.) i.q. 
capto 

τὸ ἱκανὸν λαμβάνειν 1. 4. satis 
accipere 

συμβούλιον λαμβάνειν i. q. 
consilium capere 

Aeyeóv (through Aram. ?) 

λέντιον 

λιβερτῖνος 

μάκελλον 

μεμβράνα 

μόδιος 

ξέστης 

πραιτώριον 

peda or -05? (cf. 3 below.) 

σικάριος 


TIT. 


N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks. 


αἰχμαλωσία Sept., Polyb. 

αἰχμαλωτεύω Sept. 

αἰχμαλωτίζω Sept., Inscr. 

ἀκαθάρτης ? 

ἀκατάγνωστος Epigr., Inscr., 
Apocr. 

ἀκατακάλυπτος Sept., Polyb. 

ἀκατάκριτος 

ἀκατάπαστος ? 

ἀκαταστασία Sept., Polyb. 

ἀκατάσχετος Sept. 

᾿ΑἈκελδαμά 

*axpoatnptov Plut. 

ἀκροβυστία Sept. 

ἀκρογωνιαῖος Sept. 

da? 

ἀλάλητος Anthol. 

ἁλιεύω Sept. 

ἁλίσγημα 

ἀλληλούϊα Sept. 

ἀλλογενής Sept. 

ἀλλοτρι(ο)γεπίσκοπος 

ἀλόη Sept. ? [Apocr. 

ἀμάραντος Orac. Sib., Inser., 

ἀμέθυστος Sept., Anthol. 

ἀμήν Sept. 

ἀμφιάζω Sept., Anthol. 

*avayevvaw Joseph. 

ἀναζάω Inscr. 





ἀναζώννυμι Sept. 

ἀναθεματίζω Sept., Inser. 

avakawow 

ἀνακαίνωσις 

ἀνάπειρος ? Apocr. (-mnpos, 
Plato sqq-) 

ἀναστατόω Sept. ? 

‘dvardooopat Plut. (Sept. ?) 

ἀνεκδιήγητος 

ἀνεκλάλητος 

ἀνέλεος ? 

ἀνεμίζω 

ἀνένδεκτος 

ἀνεξίκακος 

ἀνεξιχνίαστος Sept. 

*áàvera(a xvvros Joseph. 

dverá( Sept. ? 

ἀνεύθετος 

ἀνθρωπάρεσκος Sept. 

"ἀνθυπατεύω Plut. 

ἀνίλεως ? 

ἀνταπόδομα Sept. 

ἀνταποκρίνομαι Sept., Aesop 

ἡἀντιλοιδορέω Plut. 

ἀντίλυτρον Sept., Orph. 

ἀντιμετρέω ? 

ἀντιμισθία 

ἀντιπαρέρχομαι Anthol. 
ἌΡοον. 





BrBLiCAL Worps. 


σιμικίνθιον 
σουδάριον (cf. ITI. 1) 
σπεκουλάτωρ 
ταβέρναι (ai) 
τίτλος 
φαινόλης paenula (cf. φαι- 
λόνης in IIT. 1) 

φόρον 
φραγέλλιον 
φραγελλόω 
χῶρος (?) 

TorAr 80, 


8. Words borrowed from 
other Foreign Tongues. 

Baiov (Egyptian) 

ῥέδα or -δη (Gallic? cf. 2) 


NEW TESTAMENT, GREEK. 


ἀντίχριστος 
*ávrAgpa Plut. 
ἀνυπόκριτος Apoer. 
ἀπασπάζομαι ? 
*áme(paaros Joseph. 
ἀπεκδέχομαι 
"ἀπεκδύομαι Joseph. ὃ 
ἀπέκδυσις 
ἀπελεγμός 
ἀπελπίζω — Sept., 
Anth. 
ἀπέναντι Sept., Polyb.,Inser. 
ἀπερίτμητος Sept. 
ἀποδεκατόω Sept. (-reóo ?) 
*amóüekros Plut. 
ἀποκάλυψις Sept. 
ἀποκαταλλάσσω 
ἀποκεφαλίζω Sept. (David 
over Goliath) 
ἀποκυλίω Sept. 
᾿Απολλύων 
ἀποσκίασμα 


Polyb., 


ἀποσυνάγωγος 
ἀποφθέγγομαι Sept. 
"ἀπόχρησις Plut. 
ἀπρόσκοπος Apocr. 
ἀπροσωπολή(μ)πτως 
ἀργυρόκοπος Sept., Inser. 
dpxeros Chrysipp., Anthol. 


BrisrLicAL Worps. 


“Appayedav ete. 
"ἁρπαγμός Plut. 
appados 


dpoevoxoirns Anthol., Orac. 


Sibyl. 
ἀρτιγέννητος 


οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως Sept. 


ἀρχάγγελος 


"ἀρχιερατικός Joseph., Inscr. 


ἀρχιποίμην 

ἀρχισυνάγωγος Inser. 

ἀρχιτελώνης 

ἀρχιτρίκλινος 

ἀσαίνω ? (q. v.) 

ἄσπιλος Anthol. 

dgraréo Anthol. 

ἀστήρικτος Anthol. 

ἀσφαλίζω Sept., Polyb. 

αὐθεντέω 

αὐτοκατάκριτος 

ἀφεδρών 

ἀφελότης 

ἀφθορία ? 

ἀφιλάγαθος 

ἀφιλάργυρος 

ἀφυπνόω Sept., Anthol. 

ἀφυστερέω Sept., Polyb. 

ἀχειροποίητος 

ἀχρειόω Sept., Polyb. 

ἡἄψινθος Aret. (-Ocov from 
Xen. on) 

Baad Sept. 

βαθμός Sept. 

Baiov Sept.? Apocr. 

βάπτισμα 

"Βαπτισμός Joseph. 

᾿βαπτιστῆς Joseph. 

Βάρ 

βασιλίσκος ἢ Sept., Polyb., 
Aesop, Inser. 

βάτος Apoer. 

Barrodoyew 

βδέλυγμα Sept. 

βδελυκτός Sept. 

βεβηλόω Sept. 

Βεελζεβούλ (-βούβ) 

Βελίαρ (-λίαλ) 

βήρυλλος Apocr., Anthol. 

βιβλαρίδιον 

βίωσις Apoer. 

βλητέος 

Boave (01 -η-) pyés 

βολίζω 

βολίς Sept., Anthol. 

βραδυπλοέω 

βροχή Sept. 

βυρσεύς Inser. 

Ta8Baba 

*yayypawa Plut. 

γαζοφυλάκιον Sept. 








694 


γαμίζω 

γέεννα (Sept. Josh. xviii. 16) 

γεώργιον Sept. 

γνώστης Sept. 

γογγύζω Sept. 

yoyyuopos Sept. 

yoyyvarijs 

Τολγοθᾶ 

᾿γυμνητεύω Plut. 

γυμνότης 

δαιμονιώδης 

δειγματίζω 

δειλιάω Sept. 

δεκαδύο Sept. 

δεκαέξ Sept. 

δεκαοκτώ Sept. 

δεκαπέντε Sept., Polyb. 

δεκατέσσαρες Sept., Polyb. 

δεκατόω Sept. 

Sexros Sept. 

δεξιοβόλος (-AaBos) 

"δεσμοφύλαξ Joseph. 

δευτερόπρωτος ? 

"δηνάριον Plut. 

διαγογγύζω Sept. 

διαγρηγορέω 

διακαθαρίζω 

διακατελέγχομαι 

διαλιμπάνω Apoer. 

διανεύω Sept., Polyb. 

διαπαρατριβή ? 

διασκορπίζω Sept., Polyb. 

διασπορά Apocr. 

διαταγή Sept., Inser. 

δίδραχμον Sept. 

δίδωμι ἐργασίαν 

διενθυμέομαι ὃ 

διερμηνεία ? 

διερμηνευτής ? 

δικαιοκρισία Sept. ? 

δίλογος 

διοδεύω Sept., Polyb., Inser., 
Anthol. 

δισμυρίας ? 

διώκτης 

δογματίζω Sept., Anthol. 

δοκιμή 

δοκίμιον (-μεῖον, Plato) 

δολιόω Sept. 

δότης Sept. 

δυναμόω Sept. 

δυνατέω 

δυσβάστακτος Sept. 

δωδεκάφυλον Orac. Sib. 

Swpoopia? 

ἑβδομηκοντάκις Sept. 

ἑβδομηκονταπέντε Sept. 

"EBpaikos 

Ἑβραῖος Sept. 

"EBpats Apocr. 





‘E8paiori Apocr. 

ἐγκαίνια Sept. 

ἐγκαινίζω Sept. 

ἐγκαυχάομαι Ἵ Sept., Aesop 

ἐγκομβόομαι 

ἑδραίωμα 

ἐθελοθρησκεία 

ἐθνικῶς 

εἰδωλεῖον Apocr. 

εἰδωλόθυτος Apocr. 

εἰδωλολατρεία 

εἰδωλολάτρης 

εἰρηνοποιέω Sept. 

ἐκγαμίζω ? 

ἐκγαμίσκω 

ἐκδικέω Sept., Inser. 

ἐκδίκησις Sept., Polyb., In- 
ser. 

ἐκζητέω Sept. 

ἐκζήτησις ? 

ἐκθαμβέω Sept.? Apocr., 
Orph. 

ἐκμυκτηρίζω Sept. 

ἐκπειράζω Sept. 

ἐκπερισσῶς ? 

ἐκπορνεύω Sept. 

ἐκριζόω Sept., Orac. Sib., 
Inser. 

ἔκτρομος ? 

ἐλαιών Sept. 

*ehadpia Aret. 

ἐλαχιστότερος 

ἐλεγμός ? Sept. 

ἔλεγξις Sept. 

ἔλεος, τό, Sept., Polyb. 

ἐλλογάω (-γέω) 

ἐλωΐ Sept. (cf. Hrd) 

"ἐμμαίνομαι Joseph. 

᾿Εμμανουήλ Sept. 

ἐμμέσῳ ? 

€um avypovi) ? 

ἐμπαιγμός Sept. 

ἐμπαίκτης Sept. 

ἐμπεριπατέω Sept. 

ἐναγκαλίζομαι Sept., Anthol. 

ἔναντι ἢ Sept. 

ἐνδιδύσκω Sept. 

"ἐνδύμησις Joseph. 

ἐνδοξάζω Sept. 

ἔνδυμα Sept. 

ἐνδυναμόω Sept. 

evedpov ? Sept. 

€vevAoyéo ? Sept. 

€vvevnkovraevvéa 

*évopkt(o? Joseph., Inscr. 

ἔνταλμα Sept. 

ἐνταφιάζω Sept., Anthol. 

ἐνταφιασμός 

ἔντρομος Sept., Anthol. 

ἐνωτίζομαι Sept. 


? 








Brsricat Worps. 


ἐξαγοράζω Sept., Polyb. 
ἐξακολουθέω Sept., Polyb. 
ἐξάπινα Sept. 
ἐξαπορέω Sept., Polyb. 
"ἐξαρτίζω Joseph., Inser. 
ἐξαστράπτω Sept. 
ἐξέραμα 
ἐξηχέω Sept., Polyb. 
ἐξολοθρεύω Sept. 
ἐξομολογέω Sept. 
“ἐξορκιστής Joseph. 
ἐξουδενέω (-vóo) Sept. 
ἐξουθενέω (-vóo) Sept. 
ἐξυπνίζω Sept. 
"ἔξυπνος Joseph. 
ἐξώτερος Sept. 
*eraywvitouat Plut., Inscr. 
"ἐπαθροίζω Plut. 
ἐπαναπαύω Sept. 
ἐπάρχειος Inser. 
ἐπαύριον Sept. 
“erevdiw Joseph. (-dive 
Hdt.) 
ἐπιγαμβρεύω Sept. 
ἐπίγνωσις Sept., Polyb. 
ἐπιδιατάσσομαι 
ἐπιδιορθόω Inscr. 
ἐπικατάρατος Sept., Inser. 
᾿Ἐπικούρειος Anthol. 
ἐπιλείχω ? 
ἐπιλησμονή Apocr. 
ἐπιούσιος 
ἐπιπόθησις 
ἐπιπόθητος 
ἐπιποθία 
ἐπιπορεύομαι Sept., Polyb. 
ἐπιρράπτω 
ἐπισκοπή Sept. 
ἐπισυνάγω Sept., 
Aesop 
ἐπισυναγωγή Apocr. 
ἐπισυντρέχω 
ἐπισύστασις Sept. 
"ἐπισωρεύω Plut. 
ἐπιφαύσκω Sept. 
ἐπιφώσκω Inscr. 
ἐπιχορηγία 
ἐρήμωσις Sept. 
ἐρίφιον ? Apocr. 
ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω 
ἑτεροζυγέω 
εὐαγγελιστής 
εὐάρεστος Apocr. 
εὐδοκέω Sept., Polyb. 
εὐδοκία Sept., Inser. 
εὐκοπώτερον (-κοπος Polyb.) 
εὐλογητός Sept. 
εὐμετάδοτος 
*etvovyi¢w Joseph. 
εὐπάρεδρος ? 


Polyb., 


BrsiicaL Worps. 


*ebroia Soseph., Inscr. 

"εὐπρόσδεκτος Plut. 

εὐπρόσεδρος 

εὐπροσωπέω 

εὐρακύλων } 

εὐρο(ον-υ-Ἰκλύδων 

*ebyyvxéo Joseph., Anthol., 
Inscr. 

ἐφημερία Sept. 

eppaba 

ζευκτηρία 

ζιζάνιον 

ἦλί (cf. edi) 

*Hpo8tavot Joseph. 

ἥττημα Sept. 

θεατρίζω 

(θειώδης 

θέλησις Sept. 

(εοδίδακτος 

θεομάχος Alleg. Homer. 

*@eonvevoros Plut., Orac. 
Sibyl. 

*Oeorns Plut. 

θορυβάζω ? 

OpnoKos 

θυσιαστήριον Sept. 

ἱεράτευμα Sept. 

ἱερατεύω Sept., Inser. 

ixavow Sept. 

iXapórgs Sept. 

ἱλασμός Sept. 

ἱλαστήριος Sept. 

ἱματίζω 

᾿Ἰουδαΐζω Sept. 

*Tovdaixos Apocr. 

Ῥϊουδαϊκῶς Joseph. 

᾿Ιουδαϊσμός Apocr. 

ἐσάγγελος 

καθαρίζω Sept. (Hippocr. ) 

καθαρισμός Sept. 

καθεξῆς Plut., Inser. 

καλοδιδάσκαλος 

καλοποιέω Sept. ? 

κάμιλος ? 

Kavavaios ? 

Kavavirns? 

καρδιογνώστης 

καταγγελεύς 

κατάθεμα ? 

καταθεματίζω ? 

κατακαυχάομαι Sept. 

κατακληροδοτέω ? Sept. ? 

κατακληρονομέω ? Sept. 

κατακολουθέω Sept., Polyb. 

κατάκρισις 

καταλαλιά 

κατάλαλος 

κατάλειμμα ἢ Sept. 

καταλιθάζω 

κατάλυμα Sept., Polyb. 


695 


κατανάθεμα 

καταναθεματίζω ? 

καταντάω Sept., Polyb. 

κατάνυξις Sept. 

κατανύσσω Sept. 

καταπέτασμα Sept. 

"κατάρτισις Plut. 

καταρτισμός 

κατασκήνωσις Sept., Polyb., 
Inser. 

κατασοφίζομαι Sept., Inscr. 

καταστρηνιάω 

κατάσχεσις Sept. 

καταφρονητής Sept. 

κατείδωλος 


- κατέναντι Sept., Inser. 


κατενώπιον Sept. 
κατεξουσιάζω 
*karevAoyéo ? Plut. 
κατεφίστημι 

κατήγωρ ? 

κατιόω Apocr. 
κατοικητήριον Sept. 
κατοικία Sept., Polyb. 
καυσόω 

καύσων Sept. 

καύχησις Sept. 
kevopovia 

κεφαλιόω (-λαιόω Thue.) 
κῆνσος Inscr. 
κλυδωνίζομαι Sept. 
κοδράντης 

κόκκινος Sept. 
κολαφίζω 

κολωνία ete. 

*kopBàv or κορβανᾶς Joseph. 
κόρος Sept. 
κοσμοκράτωρ Orph., Inser. 
κοῦμι ete. 

κουστωδία 

κραταιόω Sept. 
κρυσταλλίζω 

κύλισμα ? or κυλισμός ? 
κυριακός Inser. 
κυριότης 

λαμά ete. 

λαξευτός Sept. 
λατομέω Sept. 

λεγιών ete. (cf. list II. 2) 
λειτουργικός Sept. 
λέντιον 

λιβερτῖνος Inser. 
λιθοβολέω Sept. 

λογία (ἡ) 

λογομαχέω 

λογομαχία 

λυτρωτής Sept. (Philo) 
λυχνία Sept., Inser. 
"μαθητεύω Plut. 
ἤμάκελλον Plut. 


μακρόθεν Sept., Polyb. 

μακροθυμέω Sept. 

μακροθύμως 

μαμωνᾶς 

μάννα Sept. 

μαρὰν ἀθά (μαραναθά) 

"ματαιολογία Plut. 

ματαιότης Sept., Inser. 

ματαιόω Sept. 

μεγαλειότης Sept., Inser. 

μεγαλωσύνη Sept. 

μεγιστάν Sept. 

μεθοδεία 

μελίσσιος Ἵ (-aios, Nicand.) 

μεμβράνα 

μεριστής 

μεσίτης Sept., Polyb. 

μεσότοιχον (-xos, Eratos.) 

*peaovpávgpa Plut. 

Μεσσίας 

μετοικεσία Sept., Anthol. 

ἡμιασμός Plut. 

μισθαποδοσία 

μισθαποδότης 

μίσθιος Sept., Anthol. 

μογ(γ)ιλάλος Sept. 

μόδιος 

μοιχαλίς Sept. 

μολυσμός Sept. 

μοσχοποιέω 

μυλικός ? 

μύλινος ? Inscr. 

μύλος Sept., Anthol., Orac. 
Sibyl. 

(μωρέ ?) 

*vekpóo Plut. Anthol, In- 
scr. 

*yéxpwots Aret. 

veoutos Sept. (lit.; so Ar- 
stph. in Pollux 1, 231) 

νῖκος Sept., Anthol. Orph. 

νιπτήρ 

νομοδιδάσκαλος 

νοσσιά δορί. (νεοσσιά Hdt., 
al.) 

νυμφών Apocr. 

νυχθήμερον Orac. Sibyl. 

ξενοδοχέω Graec. Ven. (-kéo, 
Hat.) 

*£éa gs? Joseph., Anthol. 

*oikiakos Plut. 

"οἰκοδεσποτέω Plut. 

οἰκοδομή Sept. (Aristot. ?) 

oixoupyos ? 

ὀκταήμερος (Graec. Ven.) 

ὀλιγοπιστία ? 

ὀλιγόπιστος 

ὀλιγόψυχος Sept. 

ὀλίγως Anthol. 

ὀλοθρευτής 


ΒΙΒΙΙΟΘΑΙ, Worps. 


ὀλοίον -ε-)θρεύω Sept., An- 
thol. 

ὁλοκαύτωμα Sept. 

ὁλοκληρία Sept. 

6peipopa? Sept. ? 

ὁμοιάζω ? 

ὀνειδισμός Sept. 

ὀνικός 

ὀπτάνω Sept. 

ὀπτασία Sept., Anthol. 

ὀρθοποδέω 

ὀρθοτομέω Sept. 

ὀρθρίζω Sept. 

ὀρθρινός ? Sept., Anthol. 

ὁρκωμοσία Sept. 

ὁροθεσία 

οὐά 

οὐαί Sept. 

ὀφειλή 

ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 

ὀχλοποιέω 

ὀψάριον 

παγιδεύω Sept. 

παιδιόθεν ° 

παμπληθεί 

παντοκράτωρ Sept., Anthol., 
Inscr. 

παραβιάζομαι Sept., Polyb. 

παραβολεύομαι ? 

παραβουλεύομαι ὁ 

παραδιατριβή ? 

παραδειγματίζω Sept., Polyb. 

παραζηλόω Sept. 

παραλυτικός 

παραπικραίνω Sept. 

παραπικρασμός Sept. 

παράπτωμα Sept., Polyb. 

παραφρονία 

παρεπίδημος Sept., Polyb. 

παροικία Sept. 

παρομοιάζω ? 

παροργισμός Sept. 

πάσχα Sept. 

πατριάρχης Sept. 

πειθός 

πειρασμός Sept. 

πεισμονή 

πελεκίζω Sept., Polyb. 

πεντεκαιδέκατος Sept. 

πεποίθησις Sept. 

περιαστράπτω Apocr. 

περίθεσις 

περικάθαρμα Sept. 

περικεφαλαία Sept., Polyb., 
Inser. 

περικρατής Apocr. 

περικρύπτω 

περιούσιος Sept. 

περισσεία Sept., Inser. 

περιτομή Sept. 


BisnicAL WorpDs. 


περίψημα Sept., Inser. 

πλημμύραοϊο. Sept, Anthol. 

πληροφορία 

πνευματικῶς 

πολιτάρχης Inser., Epigr. 

"πολυμερῶς Joseph. 

πολύσπλαγχνος 

πορφυρόπωλις 

ποταμοφύρητος 

"πραιτώριον Joseph., Inser. 

πρεσβυτέριον Inser. 

προαιτιάομαι 

προαμαρτάνω 

προβλέπω Sept. 

"πρόγνωσις Plut., Anthol. 

προενάρχομαι 

προεπαγγέλλω 

"προκαταγγέλλω Joseph. 

πρόκριμα 

προκυρόω 

προμαρτύρομαι 

προμεριμνάω 

προορίζω 

προσάββατον ? Sept.?, Apo- 
erypha 

"προσαίτης Plut. 

(προσαχέω ?) 

προσδαπανάω Inscr. 

προσεάω 

προσεγγίζω 3 Sept., Polyb., 
Anthol. 

προσευχή Sept., Inscr. 

προσήλυτος Sept. 

προσκαρτέρησις 

πρόσκομμα Sept. 

προσκυνητής Inscr. 

προσοχθίζω Sept., 
Sibyl. 

προσπαίω ? (Soph. ?) 

πρόσπεινος 

"προσρήγνυμι Joseph. 

προσφάγιον Inser. 


Orac. 


πρύσχυσις 

προσωπολη(μ)πτέω 

πρυσωπολή(μγπτης 

προσωπολη(μ)ψία 

προφητεία Sept., Inser. 

πρωϊνός Sept. 

πρωτοκαθεδρία 

πρωτοκλισία (ἡ) Apocr. 

πρωτοτόκια (τά) Sept. 

πρωτότοκος Sept., Anthol. 
(τόκος, act., Hom. down) 

τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον ete. 

πυρράζω ? (-pt£o Sept.) 

ῥαββί, -Bet 

ῥαββονί etc. 

paxa ete. 

ῥαντίζω Sept. 

ῥαντισμός Sept. 





696 


ῥέδη or peda 

ῥυπαρεύομαι ? 

σαβαχθανί, -νεί 

σαβαὼθ Sept. 

"σαββατισμός Plut. 

σάββατον Sept., Anthol. 

σαγήνη Sept. 

*Saddovkaios Joseph. 

odpdwos? 

σαρδιόνυξ ? 

carüv or σατανᾶς Sept. 

σάτον Sept. 

σεληνιάζομαι 

σητόβρωτος 
Sibyl. 

σθενόω 

"σικάριος Joseph. 

σίκερα Sept. 

σιμικίνθιον 

σινιάζω 

ἔσιτιστός Joseph. 

σιτομέτριον (-rpov Plut.) 

σκανδαλίζω 

σκάνδαλον Sept. 

σκηνοποιός 

σκληροκαρδία Sept. 

σκληροτράχηλος Sept. 

σκοτίζω Sept., Polyb. 

σμαράγδινος 

σμυρνίζω 

σουδάριον (σωδάριον Her- 
mippus) 

σπεκουλάτωρ 

σπλαγχνίζομαι Sept. ? 

στήκω Sept. 


Sept, Orac. 


στρατοπέδαρχος ? 
στυγνάζω Sept., Polyb. 
*avyyevis ? Plut., Inser. 
συγκακοπαθέω 
συγκακουχέω 
*evykaraymotto 
συγκοινωνός 
συζητητής 
συζωοποιέω 
συκομυρέα 
συλαγωγέω 
συλλαλέω | Sept., 
συμμιμητής 
συμμορφίζω ? 
συμμορφόω ? 
συμπρεσβύτερος 
συμφυλέτης 
συμφώνησις 
σύμψυχος 
συναιχμάλωτος 
συνανάκειμαι Apocr. 
συναναμίγνυμι Sept. ? 


[Inser. 
Polyb., 


ovvavarravopar? Sept. 
συναντιλαμβάνομαι 
Inser. 


Sept., 











συναρμολογέω 
συνεγείρω Sept. 
συνεκλεκτός 
συνθρύπτω 
"συνοδεύω Plut. 
συνομορέω 
σύσσημον 
Phryn.), Sept. 


σύσσωμος 


"συστασιαστής Joseph. 


cvoravpóo 
σφυδρόν ? 
"σωματικῶς Plut. 
ταβέρναι (ai) 
ταλιθᾶ 


ταπεινόφρων Ἱ Sept. 
"ταπεινοφροσύνη Joseph. 


ταρταρόω 

τεκνίον Anthol. 
τεκνογονέω Anthol. 
τελειωτής 
τεσσαρακονταδύο ? 


τεσσαρακοντατέσσαρες ? 
"τετραρχέω Joseph. 


τίτλος Inscr. 
τοπάζιον Sept. 


tporropopew? Sept. 
tpopopopéw? Sept. ὃ 
τρυμαλιά Sept. (Sotad.) 


τυπικῶς ? 
*ruperixos Plut. 
ς ΜΡ" 

ὑπακοὴ Sept. 


ὕπανδρος Sept., Polyb. 


ὑπάντησις Sept. 
ὑπερέκεινα 


ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ Sept. ? 


ὑπερεκπερισσῶς ? 


ὑπερεκτείνω Anthol.? 


ὑπερεκχύνω Sept. ? 
ὑπερεντυγχάνω 
ὑπερνικάω 
ὑπερπερισσεύω 
ὑπερπερισσῶς 
ὑπερυψόω Sept. 
ὑπολήνιον Sept. 
ὑποπιάζω ? 
ὑποπλέω Anthol. 
"ὑποστολή Joseph. 
ὑποστρώννυμι Sept. 
ὕσσωπος Sept. 
ὑστέρημα Sept. 
ὑστέρησις 


ὑψηλοφρονέω ? 


ὕψωμα Sept., Orac. Sib. 


φάγος 


par(or φε-)λόνης (φαινόλης 
Rhinthon, c. B.c. 300, in 


Pollux 7, 61) 
Φαρισαῖος 


"φειδομένως Plut. 


(Menander 


BisriCcAL SIGNIFICATIONS. 


φιλοπρωτεύω 
φόρον 
φραγέλλιον 
φραγελλόω 
φρεναπατάω 
φρεναπάτης 
φυλακίζω Sept. 
φυσίωσις 
φωστήρ Sept., Antho!. 
φωτισμός Sept. 
χαλιναγωγέω 
χαλκηδών (Pliny) 
χαλκολίβανον 
χαριτόω Apocr. 
Χερουβίμ ete. Sept. 
xoikos 
χρεωφειλέτης — ete. 
Aesop 

χρηστεύομαι 
χρηστολογία 
χρυσοδακτύλιος 
χρυσόλιθος Sept. 
xpucorpagos 
χῶρος 
ψευδάδελφος 
ψευδαπόστολος 
ψευδοδιδάσκαλος 
ψευδοπροφήτης Sept. 
ψευδόχριστος 
ψιθυρισμός Sept. 
ψιχίον 
ψωμίον Sept. 
ὡὥσαννά 

TorAL 767, (76*, 89 ?) 


Sept., 


2. Biblical Significations. 


N. B. ** Sept." or * Apocr." is 
added to a word in case it occur 
in the same sense in the Septua- 
gint version or (if not there) in 
the Apocryphal books of the O.T. 
Moreover, characteristic N. T. 
significations which also occur 
in Philo and Josephus but inno 
other secular authors have been 
included in the list, with the 
proper designations appended. 
See the Prefatory Remarks, p. 
688. 


ἡ ἄβυσσος (Sept.) 

ἀγάπη 2 

ἄγγελος 2 (Sept., Philo) 

ἀδελφή 2 

ἀδελφός 2 (Sept., Philo), 4, 
5 (Sept.) 

ἀδιάκριτος 2 

ἁδροτής 

ἀδυνατέω b. (Sept.) 

αἵρεσις 5 

αἱρετικός 2 


BiBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS. 


αἰών 2 (Apocr.), 3 
ἀλήθεια I. 1 c. 

ἀληθεύω b. 

ἁμαρτία 3, 4 

ἀμήτωρ 5 (Philo) 

ἀνάθεμα 2 a., b. 
(avacravpow ) 

ἀναφέρω 2 (Sept.) 
ἀνθομολογέομαι 3 fin. (Sept.) 
ἄνομος 1 

ἀνόμως 

ἀνοχή 

ἀντίληψις (Sept.) 
ἀντιλογία 2 (Sept.) 
ἀντίτυπος 1, 2 

ἀπάτωρ 

ἀπαύγασμα (Apocr.) 
ἁπλότης fin. (Joseph.) 
ἀποθνήσκω 11. 
ἀποκαλύπτω 2 c. (Sept.) 
ἀποκάλυψις 2 a. 

ἀποκρίνω 2 (Sept.) 
ἀπόλλυμι 1 a. β. 
ἀπολύτρωσις 2 

ἀποστάσιον 1 (Sept.), 2 
ἀποστολή 4 

ἀπόστολος 2, 3 
ἀποστοματίζω 

ἀποτάσσω 1 

ἀπώλεια 2 b. 

ἀρεσκεία (Philo) 

ἀρχή 5 

ἀσύνετος fin. (Apoc.) 
αὐγάζω 2 (Sept.) 

αὐτός II. 2 (Sept.) 
ἀφυπνόω b. 
ἀφυστερέω 2 
βαπτίζω II. 
βαπτισμός (Joseph.) 
βασιλεία 3 

βλέπω 2 c. mid. 
γαμέω 2 


(Sept.) 


γένεσις 3 

yevvaw 2 b. (Philo), c., d. 

γλῶσσα 2 init. 

γράμμα 2 c. (Philo, Joseph.) 

γραμματεύς 2 (Sept.) 

δαίμων 2 (Joseph.) 

δέω 2 c. 

ὁ διάβολος Sept. 

διαθήκη 2 (i. ᾳ. 3) 

διακονία 3, 4 ] 

διάκονος 2 

διακρίνομαι 3 

διανοίγω 2 

διαπονοῦμαι c. ( Apocr.) 

διατίθεμαι διαθήκην 
(Sept.) 

δίδωμι IV. 5 

δικαιοσύνη 1 c. 


etc. 


697 


δικαιόω 2, 3, (Sept.) 
δικαίωσις 

δίλογος 2 

διώκω 8 

δόξα III. (Sept.) 

δοξάζω 4 (Sept.) 

δύναμις b. 

δῶμα 3 (Sept.) 

δωρεά b. (Sept.) 

ἐγγύς 1 b. 

ἐγείρω 2, 4 

ἔγερσις fin. 

ἐθνικός 3 

ἔθνος 4 (Sept.), 5 

εἰ I. 5 (Sept.), III. 9 (Sept.) 
εἴδω II. 3 (Sept.) 

εἴδωλον 2 (Sept.) 

εἰμί 11. 5 (Sept.) 

εἶπον 5 (Sept.) 

εἰρήνη 3 (Sept.), 4, 5, 6 (Sept.) 
ex I. 7 (Sept.) 

ἔκβασις 2 (Apocr.) 

ἐκδοχή 4 

ἐκκλησία 2 (Sept.), 4 
ἐκλέγομαι (Sept.) 

ἐκλεκτός (Sept.) 

ἐκλογή 

ἔκστασις 3 (Sept.) 

ἔλεος 2, 3 

“Ἑλληνίς 2 

ἐμβατεύω 2 ( Apocr., Philo) 
ἐμβριμάομαι fin. 

ev I. 6 b., 8 b. (Sept.), 8c. 
ἐναντίον 2 fin. (Sept.) 
evepyew 3 

ἐξανάστασις fin. 

ἔξοδος fin. (Philo) 
ἐξομολογέω 2 (Sept.) 
ἐξουσία 4 c. BB., d. 
ἐπερωτάω 2 (Sept.) 
ἐπερώτημα 3 

ἐπιγαμβρεύω 2 (Sept.) 
ἐπικαλέω 2 (Sept.) 
ἐπισκέπτομαι b. (Sept.) 
ἐπισκοπή b. (Sept.), c. (Sept.) 
ἐπίσκοπος fin. 

ἐπιστροφή Apocr. 

ἐπιτιμία Apocr. 

ἐρεύγομαι 3 (Sept.) 
εὐαγγελίζω IIT. 

εὐαγγέλιον 2 a., b. 

εὐδοκέω 2 (Sept.) 

εὐλογέω 2, 3, 4, (Sept.) 
εὐλογία 3 Sept., 4, 5 (Sept.) 
εὔσπλαγχνος (Apocr.) 

ἔχω I. 1 f. 

Caw I. 2 

ζωή 2 a., b. 

ζωογονέω 3 (Sept.) 


ζωοποιέω 2 








ἡμέρα 1 b., 3 (Sept.) 

ἡσυχάζω c. (Sept.) 

θάνατος 2 (Sept., Philo) 

θέλω 4 (Sept.) 

θεός 4 (Sept.) 

θεωρέω 2 c. sub fin. 

θριαμβεύω 2 

θροέω fin. (Sept.) 

θυγάτηρ b. (Sept.) 

θυμιατήριον 2 (Philo, Jo- 
seph.) 

ἴδιος 1 d. (Apocr.) 

ἱερεύς b. 

ἱλασμός 2 (Sept.) 

ἱλαστήριον, τό, 1 (Sept.), 2 

ἰσχύω 2 a. (Sept.) 

καθαρίζω 1 b. (Apocr.), 2 
(Sept.) 

καθεύδω 2 b. (Sept.) 

κακία 3 (Sept.) 

κακόω 2 (Sept.) 

κακολογέω 2 (Sept.) 

καλέω 1 b. β. 

καμμύω (Sept.) 

κάμπτω b. (Sept.) 

κανών 1 

καρπός 2 c. (Sept.) 

karaug xvvo 2 fin. (Sept.) 

κατάπαυσις 2 (Sept.) 

καταστολή 2 (Sept.) 

κατατομή 

κέρας b. (Sept.) 

κεφαλαιόω 2 

κήρυγμα (Sept.) 

κήρυξ 1 fin. 

κηρύσσω b. 

κληρονομέω 2 fin. 

κληρονομία 2 a., b. 

κληρονόμος 1 b., 2 (Sept.) 

κληρόω 4 (Apoer.) 

κλῆσις 2 

κλητός à., b. 

κοιλία 5 (Sept.) 

kowós 2 (Apoer.) 

κοινόω 2 (Apocr.) 

κοινωνία 3 

κοπή 2 (Sept.) 

κοπιάω 2 (Sept.) 

κοσμικός 2, 3 

κόσμος 5 (Apoer.), 6, 7, 8 
(Sept.) 

κρίνω 5 a. B., 6 (Sept.) 

κρίσις 3 b., 4 (Sept.), 5(Sept.) 

κριτήριον 3 

κριτής 2 (Sept.) 

κτίσις 2 (Apocr.), 3 

κτίσμα 

κῶλον 

λαμβάνω I. 3 e. (cf. list IT. 2) 


λάσκω 2 








ΒΙΒΙΙΟΑΙ, SIGNIFICATIONS. 


λειτουργέω 26. (Apocr.) 
λειτουργία 3 b. 
λιβανωτός 2 

λικμάω 3 (Sept.) 

λόγος ITI. 

λύτρωσις fin. (Sept.) 
μαθητεύω 2 

μακροθυμέω 2 (Sept.) 
μακροθυμία 2 (Sept.) 
μάρτυς c. 
μεσιτεύω 2 (Philo) 

μεταίρω 2 

μοιχαλίς b. (Sept.) 

μοιχός fin. 

μυστήριον 2, 3 (Sept.) 
μωραίνω 2 (Sept.) 

μωρός fin. (Sept.) 

νεκρός 2 

νεώτερος ἃ. 

νόμος 2 (Apocr.), 8,4 (Sept.) 
νύμφη 2 fin. (Sept.) 
οἰκοδομέω b. B. 

οἰκοδομή 1 

ὁμολογέω 4 

ὄνομα 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4 
ὀπίσω 2 (Sept.) 

οὐρανός 2 (Sept.) 

ὀφειλέτης b. 

ὀφείλημα b. 

ὀφείλω c. 

ὀφθαλμός in phrases (Sept.) 
ὀχύρωμα 2 (Sept.) 

ἡ ὀψία 

ὀψώνιον 2 

παιδεία 3 Ὁ. (Sept.), c. (Sept.) 
παιδεύω 2 b. (Sept.), c. (Sept.) 
mais 2 fin. (Sept. ; i.q. 127) 
παράκλητος 3 (Philo) 
παραβολή 3, 4, (Sept.) 
παράδεισος 3, 4 

mapakor 2 

παρασκευή ὃ (Joseph.) 
παρθένος 2 

πάροικος 2 (Sept.) 

παρρησία 3 (Philo) 
πατάσσω 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.) 
πειράζω 2 d. (Sept.) 
πειρασμός b., c., (Sept.) 
πεντηκοστή (Apocr.) 
περιπατέω Ὁ. 

περιποίησις 2, ὃ 

περισσεία 4 

περίσσευμα 2 

περισσεύω 2 

περιτομή a. y», b. 

πιστεύω 1 b. 

πίστις 1 b. 

πνεῦμα 3 €., d., 4 
πνευματικός 3 

πορεία 


BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS. 698 INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 
υἱοθεσία a., b. 

vids 2 (Sept.) 

vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 3 (Sept.) 
vids τοῦ θεοῦ 2, 3, (Sept.) 
ὑποκριτής 3 (Sept) 
ὑποπνέω b. 

ὑποτύπωσις b. 

φυλακτήριον 2 


σάββατον 2 

σαρκικός 1 

σάρκινος 3 

σάρξ 2 b. (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4 
σεβάζομαι 2 

σκανδαλίζω (A pocr.) 
σκάνδαλον b. (Sept.) 
σκηνοπηγία 2 (Sept.) 


συνάγω c. (Sept.) 
συναγωγή 2 (Joseph., Philo) 
συναίρω 2 

συνδοξάζω 2 

συνεγείρω fin. 

συνέδριον 2 b. 

συντελέω 5 (Sept.) 
σύντριμμα 2 (Sept.) 


πορεύω b. (Sept.) 
πορνεία b. (Sept.) 
πορνεύω 3 (Sept.) 
πόρνη 2 

ποτήριον b. 
πρεσβύτερος 2 a., Ὁ.» c. 
προάγω 2 Ὁ. 
προσανέχω 2 


προσευχή 2 (Philo) σκότος b. σχίσμα b. φυλάσσω 2 b. (Sept.) 
προσήλυτος (Joseph.) σοφία b. σώζω b. (Sept.) φωτίζω 2 c. (Sept.) 
προσκαλέω b. σταυρός 2 b. σῶμα 3 χαρίζομαι b. 


προστίθημι 2 sub fin. (Sept.) 
πρόσωπον 1 b., c., 2, (Sept.) 


στέφανος b. a. 
στηρίζω b. 


σωτήρ (Sept.) 
σωτηρία a. (Sept.), b., c. 


χάρις 2 sub fin., 3 a. 
χάρισμα (Philo) 


προφητεύω b., c., d., (Sept.) στοιχεῖον 3 σωτήριον, τό (Sept.) χαριτόω 2 
προφήτης II. 1 (Sept.) στόμα 2 (Sept.) τέκνον c. (Sept.) χριστός 2 
πρωτότοκος b. στρατιά 3 (Sept) tis 1 e. y. (Sept.) xpío a., b. 
ῥῆμα 2 (Sept.) συζητέω b. τραχηλίζω 2 Ψυχή 1 c., 2 b. 
ῥίζα 2 (Sept.) συμβιβάζω 3 fin. τύπος 4 y. ψωμίζω b. 


TV. 


WORDS PECULIAR TO INDIVIDUAL NEW TESTAMENT WRITERS. 


N.B. A word which occurs only in a quotation by the N. T. writer from the Septuagint is so marked. In the Apocalypse, which 
contains no express quotations, a word is so designated only when the context plainly indicates a (conscious or unconscious) 


reminiscence on the part of the writer. 





For other explanations see the Prefatory Remarks, p. 688 sq. 


1. To Matthew δέσμη ἐρίζω μεταίρω 
διακαθαρίζω (Lk. ?) epiquov? μετοικεσία 
ἀγγεῖον διακωλύω ἑταῖρος μίλιον 
ἄγγος ? διαλλάσσω εὐδία ? μισθόω 
ἄγκιστρον διασαφέω εὐνοέω μυλών ? 
ἀθῷος δίδραχμον εὐνουχίζω νόμισμα 
αἷμα ἀθῷον διέξοδος εὐρύχωρος νοσσίον (Lk. ?) 
αἷμα δίκαιον διετής ζιζάνιον οἰκέτεια ? 
aipoppoew διστάζω ἦλί οἰκιακός 
αἱρετίζω διυλίζω θαυμάσιος ὀλιγοπιστία ? 
ἀκμήν διχάζω (θεέ voc.) ὄναρ (κατ᾽ dvap) 
ἀμφίβληστρον (Mk. ?) ἑβδομηκοντάκις θεριστής ὀνικός (Mk. Ὁ Lk.?) 
ἀκριβόω ἔγερσις θρῆνος ? οὐδαμῶς 
ἀναβιβάζω ἐγκρύπτω (Lk. ?) θυμόω βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν 
ἀναίτιος ὁ ἐθνικός (3 Jn. ?) (ἰδέα, see εἰδέα) παγιδεύω 
ἄνηθον ἐνθυμέομαι (Acts ?) ἰῶτα παραθαλάσσιος 
ἀπάγχω εἰδέα (ἰδέα) καθά παρακούω (ΜΚ. ?) 
ἀπονίπτω εἰρηνοποιός καθηγητής παρατιθέναι παραβολήν 
Bap? ἐκλάμπω καταθεματίζω ? παρομοιάζω ? 
βαρύτιμος ? "EppavovrA fr. Sept. καταμανθάνω παροψίς 
βασανιστής ἐμπορία καταναθεματίζω ? πεζός ? 
(βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν, see | ἐμπρήθω καταποντίζω πικρῶς (Lk. ?) 
οὐρανός) ἐξορκίζω κῆτος fr. Sept. πλατύς 
βαττολογέω ἐξώτερος κουστωδία πληροῦν τὸ ῥηθέν 
βιαστής ἐπιγαμβρεύω κρυφαῖος ? πολυλογία 
βροχή ἐπικαθίζω κύμινον προβιβάξζω (Acts?) 
δαίμων (Mk.? Lk.? Rev.?) ἐπιορκέω κώνωψ [ovpB.) | προσπαίω Ὧ 
δάνειον ἐπισπείρω Ὁ (λαμβάνειν συμβούλιον, see | προφθάνω 
ὁ δεῖνα ἐρεύγομαι μαλακία πυρράζω ? 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


pak(or -x-)à (or paka) 
ῥαπίζω 
ae 
σεληνιάζομαι 
σιτιστός 
στατήρ : 
συμβούλιον λαμβάνειν 
συναίρω (λόγον) 
συνάντησις ? 
συναυξάνω 
συντάσσω 
τάλαντον 
ταφή 
τελευτή 
τοὔνομα Ἱ 
τραπεζίτης 
τρύπημα ? 
τύφω 

niga ? 
φράζω 
φυγή (Mk. ?) 
φυλακτήριον 
φυτεία 
“Χαναναῖος 
χλαμύς 
ψευδομαρτυρία 
ψύχω 


Τοται, 137 (2 fr. Sept., 21 ?) 


2. To Mark. 


ἀγρεύω 

ἄλαλος 
ἀλεκτοροφωνία 
ἀλλαχοῦ ? 
ἀμφιβάλλω ? 
ἄμφοδον 
ἀνακυλίω ? 
ἄναλος 

ἀναπηδάω ? 
ἀναστενάζω 
ἀπόδημος 
ἀποστεγάζω 
ἀτιμάω | 9 
ἀτιμόω 

ἀφρίζω 
βοανε(οτ-η-)ργές 
γναφεύς 
δηλαυγῶς ? (cf. τηλαυγῶς) 
διαρπάζω (Mt. ?) 
δισχίλιοι 

δύσις ? 

δύσκολος 
ἔγγιστα ? 

εἶτεν ? 

ἐκθαμβέω 
ἐκθαυμάζω ? 
ἐκπερισσῶς ? 


ἔκφοβος (Heb. fr. Sept.) 


ἐλωΐ 
ἐναγκαλίζομαι 
ἐνειλέω 

ἔννυχος 

ἐξάπινα 
ἐξουδ(ον-θ-)ενόω ? 
ἐπιβάλλω (intr.) 
ἐπικεφάλαιον ? 
ἐπιρράπτω 
ἐπισυντρέχω 
ἐσχάτως (ἔχειν) 
ἐφφαθά 
θαμβέω (Acts?) 
θανάσιμος 
θυγάτριον 

τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν 
καταβαρύνω ? 
καταδιώκω 
κατακόπτω 
κατευλογέω ? 
κατοίκησις 
κεντυρίων 
κεφαλαιόω } 
κεφαλιόω 

κοῦμι etc. 
κυλίω 
κωμόπολις 
μεθόριον ? 
μηκύνω 
μογ(γ)ιλάλος 
μυρίζω 
νουνεχῶς 
ξέστης 
ὁδοποιέω ? 
(ὁδὸν ποιέω ?) 
ὄμμα (Mt. ?) 
ὅσπερ 

οὐά 

Oxerós? 

ὄψιος (adj.)? 
παιδιόθεν 
πάμπολυς ? 
πανταχόθεν ? 
παρύμοιος 

πεῷ (Mt. ?) 
περιτρέχω 
πρασιά 
προαύλιον 
προμεριμνάω 
προσάββατον ? 
προσεγγίζω ? 
προσκεφάλαιον 
προσορμίζω 
προσπορεύομαι 
πυγμή ἢ 

σκώληξ fr. Sept. 
σμυρνίζω 
σπεκουλάτωρ 
στασιαστής ? 


στιβάς (στοιβάς) ? 


699 


στίλβω 
συλλυπέω 
συμβούλιον ποιεῖν ? 
συμπόσιον 
συνθλίβω 
Συραφοινίκισσα 
Συροφοινίκισσα E 
Συροφοίνισσα 1 
σύσσημον 
συστασιαστής ? 
ταλιθᾶ 
τηλαυγῶς ? (cf. δηλαυγῶς) 
τρίζω 
τρυμαλιά (Lk.?) 
ὑπερηφανία 
ὑπερπερισσῶς 
ὑπολήνιον 
χαλκίον 

Tora. 102 (1 fr. Sept., 32 2) 


3. To Luke. 


N. B. Words found only in the 
Gospel are followed by a G.; 
those found only in the Acts, by 
an A.; those undesignated are 
common to both. 


ἀγαθουργέω A.? 
ἀγκάλη G. 

ἁγνισμός A. 
ἄγνωστος A. 
ἀγοραῖος A. 

aypa G. 
ἀγράμματος A. 
ἀγραυλέω G. 

ἀγωνία G.? 

ἀηδία G.? 

᾿Αθηναῖος A. 
ἀθροίζω G.? 

aivos G. (Mt. fr. Sept.) 
αἰσθάνομαι G. 
αἴτιον(τό) 

αἰτίωμα (-apa) A. 
αἰχμάλωτος G. fr. Sept. 
ἀκατάκριτος A. 
ἀκρίβεια A. 

ἀκριβής A. 
ἀκροατήριον A. 
ἀκωλύτως A. 
᾿Αλεξανδρεύς A. 
᾿Αλεξανδρῖνος (or -vós) A. 
ἀλίσγημα A. 
ἀλλογενής G. 
ἀλλόφυλος A. 
ἀμάρτυρος A. 
ἀμπελουργός 6. 
ἀμύνω A. 

ἀμφιά(ονυ -ἐ-γξω G.? 
ἀναβαθμός A. 
ἀναβάλλω A. 





INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἀνάβλεψις G. fr. Sept. 
ἀναβολή ^. 
ἀναγνωρίζω A.? fr. Sept. 
ἀναδείκνυμι 
ἀνάδειξις G. 
ἀναδίδωμι A. 
ἀναζητέω 

ἀναθέματι ἀναθεματίζειν A. 
ἀνάθημα G.? 
ἀναίδεια G. 
ἀναίρεσις A. 
ἀνακαθίζω A. (G.?) 
ἀνάκρισις A. 
ἀνάλη(μ)ψις 6. 
ἀναντίρρητος A. 
ἀναντιρρήτως A. 
ἀναπείθω A. 
ἀνάπειρος | ἘΣ 
ἀνάπηρος 
ἀναπτύσσω G.? 
ἀνασκευάζω A. 
ἀνασπάω 
ἀνατάσσομαι Ge 
ἀνατρέφω A. (G.?) 
avapaive 

avapavew α. 
ἀνάψυξις ^. 
ἀνέκλειπτος G. 
ἀνένδεκτος G. 
ἀνετάζω A. 
ἀνεύθετος A. 
ἀνευρίσκω 
ἀνθομολογέομαι G. 
ἀνθυπατεύίω A.? 
ἀνθύπατος A. 
ἀνοικοδομέω A. fr. Sept. 
ἀντεῖπον 

ἀντιβάλλω G. 
ἀντικαλέω 6. 
ἀντικρύ etc. A. 
ἀντιπαρέρχομαι Ge 
ἀντιπέρα(-ν) | zt 
ἀντίπερα 

ἀντιπίπτω A. 
ἀντοφθαλμέω A. 
ἀνωτερικός A- 
(ἀξιόω w. inf.) 
ἀπαιτέω 6. 
ἀπαρτισμός 6. 
ἀπασπάζομαι A.? 
ἄπειμι abeo A. 
ἀπελαύνω A. 
ἀπελεγμός A. 

ám (or αφ-)ελπίζω 6. 
ἀπερίτμητος A. fr. Sept. 
ἀπογραφή 
ἀποδεκατεύω G. ? 
ἀποδέχομαι 
ἀποθλίβω G. 
ἀποκατάστασις A. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἀποκλείω G. 
ἀπολείχω G.? 
ἀπομάσσω G. 
ἀποπίπτω A. 
ἀποπλέω A. 
ἀποπλύνω G.? 
ἀποπνίγω G. (Mt. ?) 
ἀπορία G. 
ἀπορρίπτω A. 
ἀποσκευάζω A.? 
ἀποστοματίζω G. 
ἀποτινάσσω 
ἀποφθέγγομαι A. 
ἀποφορτίζομαι A. 
ἀποψύχω G. 
ἀράγε (ἄρά ye) A. 
ἀργυροκόπος A. 
"Apa A. 
"Apetos πάγος A. 
᾿Αρεοπαγίτης A- 
(ἀρὴν) apvos G. 
ἄροτρον G. 
ἀρτέμων A. 
ἀρχιερατικός A. 
ἀρχιτελώνης G. 
ἄσημος A. 
᾿Ασιανός A. 
Aowdpyns ^. 
ἀσιτία A. 

ἄσιτος A. 

ἀσκέω A. 
ἀσμένως A. 
ἄσσον A.? 
ἀστοάπτω G. 
ἀσυμῴφωνος A. 
ἀσώτως G. 
ἄτεκνος G. 

ἄτερ G. 

αὐγή Ae 
Αὔγουστος G. 
αὐστηρός G. 
αὐτόπτης G. 
αὐτόχειρ A. 
ἄφαντος 6. 
ἀφελότης A. 
ἀφελπίζω (cf. ἀπελπίζω) G- 
ἄφιξις A. 

ἄφνω A. 

ἀφρός G. 
ἀφυπνόω G. 
ἀχλύς A. 

βαθέως c.? 
βαθύνω α. 
BaX(X)ávrtov G. 
βάπτω 6. (Jn.? Rev. ?) 
βαρύνω G.? 

τὰ βασίλεια G. 
βάσις ^. 

βάτος (Heb. Bath) c. 
βελόνη G.? 


Βεροιαῖος A. 
Bia ^. 
βίαιος A. 
βίωσις A. 
Body G. 
βολίζω ^. 
βουνός c. fr. Sept. 
βραδυπλοέω A. 
βρύχω A. 
βρώσιμος G. 
Bupoevs ^. 
βωμός A. 
γάζα A. 
Ταλατικός A. 
γελάω G. 
γερουσία A. 
γῆρας G. 
γλεῦκος A. 
γνώστης A. 
δακτύλιος G. 
δαν(ε)ιστής G. 
δαπάνη G. 
δεισιδαιμονία A. 
δεισιδαίμων A. 
δεκαδύο Δ. ? 
δεκαοκτώ G.? 
δεξιοβόλος ? 
δεξιολάβος | 
Δερβαῖος ^. 
δεσμέω G. ? 
δεσμοφύλαξ A. 
δεσμώτης A. 
δευτεραῖος A. 
δευτερόπρωτος G.? 
δημηγορέω A. 
δῆμος A. 
δημόσιος A. 
διαβάλλω G. 
διαγγέλλω (Ro. fr. Sept.) 
διαγινώσκω A. 
διαγνωρίζω G.? 
διάγνωσις A. 
διαγογγύζω G. 
διαγρηγορέω G. 
διαδέχομαι A. 
διάδοχος A. 
διαδίδωμι (Jn.? Rev. ?) 
διακαθαίρω G. ? 
διακατελέγχομαι A. 
διακούω A. 
διαλαλέω G. 
διαλείπω G. 
διάλεκτος Δ. 
διαλιμπάνω A.? 
διαλύω A. 
διαμάχομαι A. 
διαμερισμός 6- 

| διανέμω A. 
διανεύω G. 
διανόημα G. 


700 


διανυκτερεύω G. 
διανύω A. 

διαπλέω ^. 

διαπονέω A. 

διαπορέω 
διαπραγματεύομαι G. 
διαπρίω A. 

διασείω G. 

διασπείρω A. 
διάστημα A. 
διαταράσσω G. fr. Sept. 
διατελέω A. 

διατηρέω 

διαφεύγω A. 
διαφθορά ^. 
διαφυλάσσω G. fr. Sept. 
διαχειρίζω A. 
διαχλευάζω A. ? 
διαχωρίζω G. 
διενθυμέομαι ^. ? 
διεξέρχομαι A. ? 
διερωτάω A. 

διετία A. 

διήγησις G. 
διθάλασσος A. 
διίστημι 
διϊσχυρίζομαι 

δικάζω G.? 

δικαστής A. (6. ?) 
διοδεύω 

διοπετής A. 

διόρθωμα A.? 
Διόσκουροι A. 

δούλη 

δοχή G. 

δραχμή α. 
δυσβάστακτος a. (Mt. ?) 
δυσεντερία (-τέριον) A. 
δωδεκάφυλον A. 

ἔα G. (Mk. ?) 
ἑβδομήκοντα 
ἑβδομηκονταέξ ^.? 
ἑβδομηκονταπέντε A. ? 
"EBpaikós G. ? 
ἐγκάθετος G. 

ἔγκλημα A. 

€y(or év-)kvos G. 
ἐδαφίζω c. fr. Sept. 
ἔδαφος A. 

ἐθίζω G. 

εἰσκαλέομαι A. 
εἰσπηδάω A. 

εἰστρέχω A. 
ἑκατοντάρχης A. G.? (Mt. ?) 
ἐκβολή A- 

ἐκγαμίσκω G. ? 
ἐκδιηγέομαι A. 
ἔκδοτος A. 

ἐκεῖσε A. 

ἔκθαμβος A. 


InpivipuaL Writers. 


ἔκθετος A. 
ἐκκολυμβάω A. 
ἐκκομίζω G. 
ἐκκρέμαμαι (or ἐκκρέμομαι) G. 
ἐκλαλέω A. 

ἐκλείπω G.? (Leb. fr. Sept.) 
ἐκμυκτηρίζω G. 
ἐκπέμπω A. 

ἐκπηδάω A.? 

ἐκπλέω A. 

ἐκπληρόω A. 
ἐκπλήρωσις A. 
ἐκσώζω A.? 
ἐκταράσσω A. 
ἐκτελέω G. 

ἐκτένεια A. 
ἐκτενέστερον 6. ? 
ἐκτίθημι A- 

ἐκχωρέω G. 

ἐκψύχω A. 

ἐλαιών A. (α. ὅ) 
᾿Ελαμ(ε)ίτης A. 
ἔλευσις A. 

ἑλκόω G. 
“Ἑλληνιστής A. 
ἐμβάλλω G. 
ἐμβιβάζω A. 
ἐμμαίνομαι A. 
ἐμπιπράω A.? 

ἐμίον ἐν-)πνέω A. 
ἐμφανής A. (Ro. fr. Sept.) 
ἔναντι ? 

ἐνδεής A. 

ἐνδέχεται (impers.) G. 
ἐνδιδύσκω G. (Mk.?) 
ἐνέδρα ^. 

ἐνεδρεύω A. (G-?) 
ἔνεδρον A.? 

ἐνισχύω A. (6.?) 
ἔνκυος cf. ἔγκυος 
ἐννέα G. 

ἐν(ν)εός ^. 

ἐννεύω G. 

(rà) ἐνόντα G. 
ἐνοχλέω G.? (Heb. fr. Sept.) 
ἐνπνέω cf. ἐμπνέω 
ἐντόπιος A. 

ἔντρομος ^. (Heb. ?) 
ἐνύπνιον A. fr. Sept. 
ἐνωτίζομαι A. 
ἐξαιτέω G. 
ἐξάλλομαι A. 
ἐξαστράπτω 6. 
ἔξειμι A. 

ἑξῆς 

ἐξολοθρεύω 
ἐξολεθρεύω | 
ἐξορκιστῆς As 

ἐξοχή ^. 

ἔξυπνος A. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἐξωθέω A. 
ἐπαθροίζω G. 
ἐπαιτέω G. 
ἐπακροάομαι A. 
ἐπάναγκες A. 
ἐπανέρχομαι G. 
ἐπάρχειος A.? 
ἐπαρχ(ε)ία A. 
ἔπαυλις A. fr. Sept. 
ἐπεγείρω A. 
ἐπειδήπερ G- 

ἐπίον ἐφ-)εῖδον 
ἔπειμι (εἶμι) A. 
ἐπεισέρχομαι 6. ? 
ἐπέκεινα A. fr. Sept. 
τὸ ἐπιβάλλον G. 
ἐπιβιβάζω 

ἐπιβοάω A. ? 
ἐπιβουλή A. 
ἐπιγίνομαι A. 
ἐπιδημέω A. 
ἐπικέλλω A.? 
᾿Ἐπικούρ(ε)ιος A. 
ἐπικουρία A. 
ἐπικρίνω G. 
ἐπιλείχω G.? 
ἐπιμέλεια A. 
ἐπιμελῶς Ge 

ἐπινεύω A. 

ἐπίνοια A. 
ἐπιπορεύομαι G. [Sept.) 
ἐπιρρίπτω G. (1 Pet. fr. 
ἐπισιτισμός 6. 
ἐπισκευάζω A.? 
ἐπιστάτης α. 
ἐπιστηρίζω A. 
ἐπιστροφή A. 
ἐπισφαλής A. 
ἐπισχύω α. 
ἐπιτοαυτό A.? 
ἐπιτροπεύω G.? 
ἐπιτροπή A. 
ἐπιφανής A.? fr. Sept. 
ἐπιφωνέω 

ἐπιχειρέω 

ἐπιχέω G. 

ἐπλήσθη χρόνος τ 
ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι } : 
ἐποκέλλω A. ? 
ἐρείδω A. 

ἔρημοι (at) G. 
ἔσθησις ? 

ἑσπέρα 

ἑσπερινός G.? 

εὖγε c. ? 

ebepyeréo A. 
εὐεργέτης G. 
εὐθυδρομέω A. 
εὔθυμος A. 

εὐθύμως A.? 


"m 


εὐλαβής 

εὐπορέω A. 
εὐπορία A. 
εὐρακύλων 
εὐροκλύδων f A. 
εὐρυκλύδων 
εὐτόνως 

εὐφορέω G. 
εὐφροσύνη A. 
ἐφάλλομαι A. 
(ἐφεῖδον, cf. ἐπεῖδον) 
Ἐφέσιος A. 
ἐφημερία α. 
ζεῦγος G. 
ζευκτηρία A. 
ζήτημα A. 
ζωογονέω (1 Tim. ?) 
ἡγεμονεύω G. 
ἡγεμονία G. 
ἡμιθανής G. 

ἦχος (τό) Ge 

ἠχώ G.? 

θάμβος 

θάρσος A. 

θεά A. 

θεομαχέω A. ? 
θεομάχος A. 

θέρμη A. 

θεωρία G. 

θηρεύω G. 
θορυβάζω α. ὃ (cf. τυρβάζω) 
θραύω G. fr. Sept. 
θρόμβος G.? 
θυμιάω G. 
θυμομαχέω A. 
ἴασις 

ἱδρώς ο. ὃ 
ἱερατεύω α. 
ἱερόσυλος Α. 

ἰκμάς G. 

ἱππεύς A. 
ἰσάγγελος G. 

ἴσως G. 

᾿Ιταλικός A. 
καθάπτω A. 
καθεξῆς 
καθημερινός A. 
καθίημι 

καθόλου A. 
καθοπλίζω G. 
καθότι 

κἀκεῖθεν A. α. ? (Mk. ?) 
κάκωσις A. fr. Sept. 
καρδιογνώστης A- 
καρποφόρος A. 
κατάβασις G. 
καταγγελεύς A. 
καταδέω G. 
καταδίκη A. ? 
κατακλείω 


01 


κατακληροδοτέω ? fr. 
κατακληρονομέω ? | zs Sept. 
κατακλίνω ἃ. 
κατακολουθέω 
κατακρημνίζω G. 
καταλιθάζω G. 
κατάλοιπος A. fr. Sept. 
καταμένω A. 

κατανεύω G. 
κατανύσσω A. 
καταπίπτω A. (6. ) 
καταπλέω G. 
καταριθμέω Ae 
κατασείω A. 
κατασοφίζομαι A. fr. Sept. 
καταστέλλω A. 
κατασύρω G. 
κατασφάζω G. 
κατάσχεσις A. 
κατατρέχω A. 
καταφέρω A. 
καταφρονητής A. fr. Sept. 
καταψύχω G. 
κατείδωλος A. 
κατεφίστημι A- 
κατοικία A. 

κατόρθωμα A. ? 
κέραμος 6. 

κεράτιον G. 

κηρίον α. 

κίχρημι G. 

κλάσις 

κλινάριον A.? 

κλίνει ἡ ἡμέρα α- 
κλινίδιον α- 

κλισία α. 

κοιτών A. 

κολυμβάω A. 

κολωνία (-νεια ete.) A. 
κοπετός A. 

κοπρία G. 

κόπριον 6. ? 

κόραξ ο. 

κόρος G. 

κουφίζω ^. 

κραιπάλη G« 

κράτιστος 

κρυπτή (or κρύπτη) 6. 
κτήτωρ A. 

λακτίζω A. 

λαμπρύτης A. 

λαμπρῶς G. 

λαξευτός α. 

λάσκω A. 

λεῖος 6. fr. Sept. 
λεπίς A. 

λῆρος 6. 

λιβερτῖνος ^. 

λικμάω α. (Mt. ?) 
λιμήν A. 








INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


λίψ ^. 

λόγιος A. 
Λυκαονιστί A. 
λυμαίνομαι A 
λυσιτελεῖ G. 
λυτρωτής A. 
μαγεία (-yia) ^. 
μαγεύω A. 
μαθήτρια A. 
μακροθύμως A. 
μανία A. 
μαντεύομαι A. 
μαστίζω A. 
μαστός G. (Rev. ?) 
μεγαλεῖος A. (G.?) 
μελίσσιος G. ? 
μεριστῆς G. 
μεσημβρία A. 
μεστόω A. 
μεταβάλλω A. 
μετακαλέω A. 
μεταπέμπω A. 
μετεωρίζω Ge 
μετοικίζω Ae 
μετρίως A. 
μηδαμῶς A. 
μήπου A.? 
μίσθιος G. 
μίσθωμα A. 
μνᾶ G. 

μόγις G.? 
μοσχοποιέω A. 
ναύκληρος A. 
ναῦς A. 
veavias A. 
νεοσσός (νοσσός) G. fr. Sept. 
νεωκόρος A. 
νησίον A. 
νοσσιά G. ? 
νοσσός, See νεοσσός 
ὀγδοήκοντα 6. 
ὁδεύω G. 
ὁδοιπορέω A. 
ὀδυνάω 

ὀθόνη ^. 
οἴκημα A« 
οἰκοδόμος A. ? 
οἰκονομέω G. 
ὀκνέω A. 
ὁλοκληρία A. 
ὄμβρος 6. 
ὁμιλέω 
ὁμότεχνος A- 
ὄνειδος G. 
ὁπότε G. f 
ὀπτάνω A. 
ὀπτός G. 
ὀργυιά A- 
óp(e)wós 6. 
ὀρθρίζω G. 


InpIvVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ὄρθριος G.? 
ὄρνιξ G.? 
ὁροθεσία A. 
οὐρανόθεν A. 
οὐσία G. 
opus G. 
ὀχλέω A. (6. ἢ 
ὀχλοποιέω A. 
παθητός A. 
παῖς, 1), G. 
παμπληθεί 6. 


πανδοχεῖον (ΟΥ -κίον) G. 
πανδοχεύς (or -κεύς) G. 


πανοικί (Or -κεί) A. 


πανταχῆ or πανταχῇ A.? 


πάντη (or -τῃ) ^- 


παραβάλλω a. (Mk. ?) 


παραβιάζομαι 
παράδοξος 6. ~ 
παραθεωρέω A. 
παραινέω A. 
παρακαθέζομαι G. ? 
παρακαθίζω G.? 
παρακαλύπτω G. 
παραλέγομαι A. 
παράλιος G. 
παρανομέω A. 
παραπλέω A. 
παράσημος A. 
παρατείνω A- 
παρατήρησις 6. 
παρατυγχάνω A. 
παραχειμασία A. 
παρεμβάλλω G. ? 
mapevoxAéo A. 
παρθενία G. 
παροίχομαι A. 
παροτρύνω A. 
πατρῷος A. 
πεδινός G. 
πεζεύω A. 

πειράω A. (Heb.?) 
TEVLXPOS Ge 
πεντεκαιδέκατος 6. 
περαιτέρω A. ? 
περιάπτω G.? 
περιαστράπτω A. 
περικαθίζω G.? 
περικρατῆς A. 
περικρύπτω G. 
TEPLKUKAO® G. 
περιλάμπω 
περιμένω A. 
πέριξ A. 
περιοικέω G. 
περίοικος G. 
περιοχή A. 
περιρ(ργήγνυμιε Ἂς 
περισπαῶ G. 
περιτρέπω A. 


702 


πήγανον G. 

πιέζω G. 

πιμπράω A.? 
πινακίδιον G. ? 
πινακίς G.? 

πλέω (Rev. ?) 
πλήμ(μ)γυρα (or ipa) 6. 
πλόος ^. 

πνικτός A. 

πνοή A. 

πολίτης (Heb.?) 
πολλαπλασίων G. (Mt. ?) 
πολιτάρχης Δ. 

Ποντικός A. [Sept.) 
πόρρω G. (Mt. and Mk. fr. 
πορφυρόπωλις A. 
πραγματεύομαι 6. 
πράκτωρ G. 

πρεσβεία ἃ. 

πρηνής A- 

προβάλλω 
προκαταγγέλλω A. (2 Co.?) 
προκηρύσσω A. 
προμελετάω G. 

προοράω A. 

προπορεύω 
προσαναβαίνω G. 
προσαναλίσκω G. ? 
προσανέχω A.? 
προσαπειλέω A. 
προσαχέω A.? 
προσδαπανάω 6. 
προσδέομαι A. 

προσδοκία 

προσεάω A. 
προσεργάζομαι α. 
προσέχειν ἑαυτοῖς 
προσκληρόω ^. 
προσκλίνω A.? 
προσλαλέω A. 
πρόσπεινος A. 
προσπήγνυμι A. 
προσποιέω G. (Jn. ? ?) 
προσρήγνυμι G. (Mt. ?) 
προσφάτως A. 
προσψαύω G. 
προσωπολή(μ)πτης A- 
προτάσσω A.? 

προτείνω A. 

προτρέπω A. 

προὐπάρχω 

προφέρω 6. 

προχειρίζω A. 
προχειροτονέω A. 

πρώ (or -à-, or -@-) pa A. 
πρωτοστάτης A. 

πρώτως A. ? 

πτοέω G. 

πτύσσω G. 

πύθων A. 





πυρά A. 
ῥαβδοῦχος A. 
ῥᾳδιούργημα A. 
padioupyia a. 
ῥῆγμα G. 
ῥήτωρ A. 
“Ῥωμαϊκός G. ? 
ῥώννυμι A. 
σάλος G. 
aavis A. 
σεβαστός A. 
Σιδώνιος 
σικάριος A. 
σίκερα G. 
σιμικίνθιον A. 
σινιάζω G. 
σιτευτός G. 
σιτίον A.? 
σιτομέτριον Ge 
σκάπτω G. 
σκάφη A. 
σκευή Ae 
σκηνοποιός A. 
σκιρτάω G. 
σκληροτράχηλος A. 
σκῦλον (or σκύλον) G. 
σκωληκόβρωτος A. 
σορός G. 
σπαργανόω G. 
σπερμολόγος A. 
στέμμα A. 
cTepeóo A. 
στιγμή G- 
στρατηγός 
στρατιά (cf. 3 Co. x. 4 Tdf.) 
arparoredapyns? | A 
στρατοπέδαρχος Ὁ | ^ 
στρατόπεδον G. 
Στωϊκός A. 
συγγένεια 
συγγενίς G.? 
συγκαλύπτω 6. 
συγκαταβαίνω A. 
συγκατατίθημι G. 
συγκαταψηφίζω A. 
συγκινέω A. 
συγκομίζω A. 
συγκύπτω G. 
συγκυρία G. 
συγχέω A. 
σύγχυσις A. 
συ(ν)ζήτησις ΔΑ. ὃ 
συκάμινος G- 
συκομορέα 
-μωρέα G. 
-μωραία 
συκοφαντέω Ge 
συλλογίζομαι G. 
συμβάλλω 
συμπαραγίνομαι G.(2'Tim.?) 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


συμπάρειμι A. 
συμπεριλαμβάνω A. 
συμπίνω A. 

συμπίπτω G.? 
συμπληρόω 

συμφύω α. 

συμφωνία α. 
συμψηφίζω a. 
συναθροίζω A. (6. ὃ) 
συνακολουθέω α. (Mk.?) 
συναλίζω A. 
συναλλάσσω A.? 
συναρπάζω 

συνδρομή A- 

σύνειμι (εἰμί) A. (G.?) 
σύνειμι (εἶμι) α. 
συνελαύνω Δ. ? 
συνεπιτίθημι A.? 
συνέπομαι A. 
συνεφίστημι A. 
συνθλάω c. (Mt. ?) 
συνθρύπτω A. 
συνκατανεύω A.? 
συνοδεύω A. 

συνοδία G. 

συνομιλέω A. 
συνομορέω A. 
συντόμως A. (Mk. ? ?) 
σύντροφος A. 
συντυγχάνω 6. 
συνωμοσία A. 

Σύρος G. (Mk. ?) 
Σύρτις (or σῦρτις) A. 
συσπαράσσω G. (Mk. ?) 
συστρέφω A. (Mt. ?) 
συστροφή A- 

σφάγιον A. fr. Sept. 
σφοδρῶς A. 

σφυδρόν A. ? 

σφυρόν A.? 

σχολή A. 

TAKTOS A. 

τανῦν (τὰ νῦν) A. 
τάραχος A. 

τάχιστα A. 

τεκμήριον A. 
τελεσφορέω G. 
τεσσαρακονταετῆς A. 
τεσσαρεσκαιδέκατος A. 
τετράδιον A. 
rerpamAóos G. 
Terpapxéo G. [καρδίᾳ 
τίθεσθαι εἰς τὰ ὦτα οΥ ἐν 
τιμωρέω A. 

τοῖχος A. 

τραῦμα G. 

τραυματίζω 

τραχύς 

τριετία A. 

τρίστεγος A. 


InpivipuaL WRITERS. 


τρισχίλιοι A. 
zporopopect E fr. Sept. 
τροφοφορέω ? 
τρυγών G. fr. Sept. 
τυρβάζω G. ? (cf. θορυβάζω) 
Τύριος A. 
τυφωνικός A. 
ὑγρός α. 
ὑδρωπικός G. 
ὑπερεῖδον A. 
ὑπερεκχύνω G. 
ὑπερῷον A. 
ὑπηρετέω A. 
ὑποβάλλω A. 
ὑποζώννυμι A. 
ὑποκρίνομαι G. 
ὑπολαμβάνω (3 Jn. ?) 
ὑπονοέω A. 
ὑποπλέω A. 
ὑποπνέω A. 
ὑποστρώννυμι 6. 
ὑποτρέχω A. 
ὑποχωρέω G. 
ὑφαίνω G.? 
φαντασία ^. 
φάραγξ α. fr. Sept. 
φάσις A. 
φάτνη 6. 
φιλανθρώπως A. 
didn (ἢ e. 
φιλονεικία G- 
φιλόσοφος ^. 
φιλοφρόνως A. 
φόβηθρον(ον -rpov) G. 
φόρτος A.? 
φρονίμως G. 
φρυάσσω ^. fr. Sept. 
φρύγανον A. 
φυλακίζω A. 
φύλαξ A. 
Χαλδαῖος a. 
χάραξ G. 
χάσμα G. 
χειμάζω A. 
χειραγωγέω A. 
χειραγωγός A. 
χλευάζω A. 
χορός G. 
χόρτασμα A. 
χρεωφειλέτης (or χρεοφιλ.) a. 
χρονοτριβέω A. 
χρώς A. 
χῶρος A. 
ψώχω ο. 
ὠνέομαι A. 
ὧὠόν G. 
Gospel 312 (11 fr. Sept., 52?) 
Acts 478 (15 fr. Sept., 49?) 
Both 61. 
"TTorAL 851 (26 fr. Sept., 101?) 








108 


4. To all three Synoptists. 


dyavakréo 

ἀγέλη 

ἅλα Ὁ 

ἀλάβαστρον 
ἁλιεύς 

ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν 
ἀναβοάω ? 
ἀνακλίνω 

ἀνεκτός 

ἀπαίρω 

ἀποδημέω 
ἀποκεφαλίζω 
ἀποκυλίω 

οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως 
ἄσβεστος 

ἀσκός 

βαπτιστής 
Βεελζεβούλ (-βούβ) 
γαλήνη 

γαμίσκω ? 
διαβλέπω ? 
διαλογίζομαι (Jn. ?) 
δυσκόλως 
ἑκατονταπλασίων ? 
ἐκδίδωμι 

ἐμπαίζω 

ἐμπτύω 

ἐπίβλημα 
ἐπιγραφή 
ἐπισυνάγω 
ἐρήμωσις 
εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστι 
θέρος 

θηλάζω 

κακῶς ἔχειν 
κάμηλος 
καταγελάω 
κράσπεδον 
κρημνός 

κωφός 

λεγεών (-γιών) 
λέπρα 

λεπρός 

μακρός ? 

μύδιος 

νυμφών 
οἰκοδεσπότης 
ὀρχέομαι 
παραλυτικός ? 
πενθερά 
περίλυπος 

πήρα [Sept.) 
(πόρρω Mt. and Mk. fr. 
πίναξ 

προβαίνω 
πρωτοκαθεδρία 
πρωτοκλισία 
πύργος 








jadis 
ῥήγνυμι (Gal. fr. Sept.) 
σίναπι 
σινδών 
σκύλλω ? 
σπλαγχνίζομαι 
τὰ σπόριμα 
στάχυς 
στέγη 
συμπνίγω 
συντηρέω 
τελώνης 
τελώνιον 
τίλλω 
τρίβος fr. Sept. 
vids Aavid 
ὑποκριτής 
φέγγος ? 
χοῖρος 
ψευδομαρτυρέω (Ro. ?) 
ψιχίον 
Torar 78 (1fr. Sept., 10 ?) 


5. To John. 


N. B. Words peculiar to the 
Gospel, or to one or another of 
the Epistles, are so marked. 


ἀγγελία 1 Er. 
ἀγγέλλω G. ? 
ἁλιεύω G. 
ἀλλαχόθεν 6. 
ἀλόη G. 
ἁμαρτίαν ἔχειν G., 1 Er. 
ἀμὴν ἀμήν ἃ. 
ἄν (ἐάν) G.? 1 Εν». 
ἀναμάρτητος 6. (viii. 7) 
ἀνάστασις ζωῆς | G 
| κρίσεως 
ἀνθρακιά G. 
ἀνθρωποκτόνος G., 1 Er. 
ἀντίχριστος 1 Ἐν.» 2 Lp. 
ἀντλέω G. 
ἄντλημα G. 
ἀπεκρίθη καὶ εἶπε G. 
ἀπέρχομαι εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω G. 
ἀποσυνάγωγος G- 
ἄρ(ργαφος G. 
ἀρχιτρίκλινος G. 
ὁ ἄρχωντοῦ kóg ov (rovrov) G. 
αὐτόφωρος G. (viii, 4). 
Batov G. 
βασιλίσκος G. ? 
βιβρώσκω G. 
ΓΤαββαθᾷ c. 
γενετή G. 
γεννηθῆναι ἄνωθεν G., ἐκ (τοῦ) 
θεοῦ G. 1 Er., ἐκ (τοῦ) πνεύ- 
ματος G. 


ΤΝΡΙΨΊΡΌΑΙ, WRITERS. 


γέρων G. 

γλωσσόκομον 6. 

δακρύω α. 

δειλιάω G. 

δήποτε G.? (v. 4) 

διαζωννύω G. 

δίδυμος G. 

ἐγκαίνια α. 

εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου G., 1 ἘΡ- 
{ἐκ τῶν ἄνω 

| ἐκ τῶν κάτω | 

bw 

Eineuot j gu 

ἐκνέω 


5 
εἰναι 


ἕλιγμα ο. 

ἐμπόριον G. 

ἐμφυσάω G. 

ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ (ἀπὸ, mapa) 
τοῦ θεοῦ G. 

ἐξυπνίζω α. 

ἐπάρατος G. ? 

ἐπενδύτης G. 

ἐπιδέχομαι 3 Er. 

ἐπιχρίω G. 

(ἡ) ἐσχάτη ἡμέρα c. 

ζώννυμι 6. (Acts ?) 

ἧλος G. 

ἤπερ G.? 

θεοσεβής G. 

θήκη G. 

θρέμμα G. 

ἱλασμός 1 Er. 

καθαίρω G. (Heb. Ὁ) 

καταγράφω c. ? (viii. 6). 

κέδρος G. ? 

κειρία G. 

κέρμα ἃ. 

κερματιστής G. 

κηπουρός G. 

κίνησις G. (v. 3) 

κλῆμα G. 

κοίμησις ἃ. 

κολυμβήθρα G. 

κομψότερον ἔχειν Ge 

κρίθινος ἃ. 

λέντιον 6. 

λιθόστρωτος G. 

λίτρα G. 

λόγχη G- 

negóo G. 

Μεσσίας G. 

μετρητής G. 

μίγμα G. ὃ 

μονή G. 

νίκη 1 Ep. 

νιπτήρ G. 

νόσημα G.? (v. 4) 

νύσσω 6. , 

ὄζω G. 

ὀθόνιον G. (Lk. ?) 

ὁμοῦ G. (Lk.?) 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ὀνάριον G. 
οὐκοῦν G. 
ὀψάριον G. 
παιδάριον G. (Mt. ?) 
πενθερός G. 
περιδέω G. [8 Er. 
περιπατεῖν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 2 Ἐν.» 
περιπατεῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ (or 
ἐν τῷ σκότει) G., 1 xr. 
περιπατεῖν ἐν τῷ φωτί 1 Er. 
ποιεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ὁ.» 1 Ἐν. 
πότερος 6. 
προβατική G- 
προβάτιον G. ? 
προσαιτέω G. (Mk. ὃ Lk.?) 
προσκυνητής G. 
προσφάγιον G. 
πτέρνα G. 
πτύσμα G. 
peo G. 
*Popnaicrí G. 
σκέλος G. 
σκηνοπηγία G. 
συγχράομαι G.? 
συμμαθητής G. 
συνεισέρχομαι G. 
τεκνίον G., 1 Er. (Mk.? Gal. ?) 
τεταρταῖος G. 
τετράμηνος G. 
τιθέναι ψυχήν G., 1 Er. 
τίτλος α. 
ὑδρία α. 
ὑπάντησις G. (Mt. ?) 
ὑφαντός G. 
paves G. 
φΦιλοπρωτεύω 3 Er. 
φλυαρέω 3 Ep. 
φραγέλλιον G. 
χαμαί G. 
χάρτης 2 Er. 
χείμαρρος G. 
χολάω G. 
χρίσμα 1 Ep. 
ψυχὴν τιθέναι, see τιθέναι y. 
ψωμίον G. 
Gospel 114 (12 2) 
Epp. 11 
Gospel and Epp. 8 (1 ?) 
Torar 133 (13 ὃ) 


6. To Paul. 


a. To THE LONGER EPISTLES 
AND PHILEMON. 


N. B. Words peculiar to any 
single Epistle are so designated 
by the appended abbreviation. 


ἀβαρής 2 Co. 
ἀγαθωσύνη 
ἄγαμος 1 Co. 





104 


ἀγανάκτησις 2 Co. 
ἀγενής 1 Co. 
ἁγιωσύνη 
ἁγνότης 2 Co. 
ἁγνῶς Phil. 
ἀγριέλαιος Ro. 
ἀγρυπνία 2 Co. 
ἀδάπανος 1 Co. 
ἀδήλως 1 Co. 
ἀδιαλείπτως 
ἁδροτής 2 Co. 
ἀθά cf. papav aba 
ἄθεος Eph. 
ἀθυμέω Col. 
αἴνιγμα 1 Co. 
αἴσθησις Phil. 
αἰσχρολογία Col. 
αἰσχρότης Eph. 
αἰτιάομαι Ro. 
αἰχμαλωτεύω Eph. fr. Sept. 
(22152) 
ἀκαιρέομαι Phil. 
ἀκατακάλυπτος 1 Co. 
ἄκων 1 Co. 
ἀλάλητος Ro. 
ἀληθεύω 
ἀλληγορέω Gal. 
ἄλυπος Phil. 
ἀμέμπτως 1 ΤῊ. 
ἀμετακίνητος 1 Co. 
ἀμεταμέλητος 
ἀμετανόητος Ro. 
ἄμετρος 2 Co. 
ἀναθάλλω Phil. 
ἀνακαινόω 
ἀνακαλύπτω 2 Co. 
ἀνακεφαλαιόω 
ἀνακόπτω Gal. ? 
ἀναλογία Ro. 
ἀναμένω 1 Th. 
dvaveóo Eph. 
ἀνάξιος 1 Co. 
ἀναξίως 1 Co. 
ἀναπολόγητος Ro. 
ἀνδρίζω 1 Co. 
ἀνεκδιήγητος 2 Co. 
ἀνελεήμων Ro. 
dveEeped(or -pav-)ynros Ro. 
ἀνεξιχνίαστος 


| ἀνεψιός Col. 


ἀνήκω 

ἄνθραξ Ro. fr. Sept. 
ἀνθρωπάρεσκος 
ἀνθρώπινον λέγω Ro. 
ἄνοιξις Eph. 

ἀνόμως Ro. 

ἀνοχή Ro. 
ἀνταναπληρόω Col. 
ἀνταπόδοσις Col. 


ἀντίληζμ)ψις 1 Co. 


ἀντιμισθία 
ἀντιστρατεύομαι Ro. 
ἀπαλγέω Eph. 
ἀπαλλοτριόω 
ἀπαρασκεύαστος 2 Co. 
ἀπίον ἀφ-)εῖδον Phil. 
ἄπειμι absum 
ἀπεῖπον 2 Co. 
ἀπεκδύομαι Col. 
ἀπέκδυσις Col. 
ἀπελεύθερος 1 Co. 
ἀπερισπάστως 1 Co. 
ἁπλότης 

ἀπόδειξις 1 Co. 
ἀποκαραδοκία 
ἀποκαταλλάσσω 
ἀπόκριμα 2 Co. 
ἀπορφανίζω 1 Th. 
ἀποστυγέω Ro. 
ἀποτίνω Philem. 
ἀποτολμάω Ro. 
ἀποτομία Ro. 
ἀπουσία Phil. 
ἀπόχρησις Col. 

ἄρα οὖν 

apa Ro. 

ἀρραβών 

ἀρεσκεία Col. 
ἁρμόζω 2 Co. 
ἁρπαγμός Phil. 
ἄρρητος 2 Co. 
ἀρχιτέκτων 1 Co. 
ἀσαίνω 1 Th. ? 
ἀσθένημα Ro. 
ἄσοφος Eph. 

ἀσπίς Ro. 

ἀστατέω 1 Co. 
ἀσύνθετος Ro. 
ἀσχημονέω 1 Co. 
ἀσχήμων 1 Co. 
ἀτακτέω 2 Th. 
ἄτακτος 1 Th. 
ἀτάκτως 2 Th. 
Gropos 1 Co. 
αὐγάζω 2 Co.? 
αὐθαίρετος 2 Co. 
αὐλός 1 Co. 
αὔξησις 

αὐτάρκης Phil. 
ἀφειδία Col. 

ἁφή 

ἀφικνέομαι Ro. 
᾿Αχαϊκός 1 Co. 
ἀχρειόω Ro. fr. Sept. 
ἄχρηστος Philem. 
ἄψυχος 1 Co. 

BaaA Ro. fr. Sept. 
βασκαίνω Gal. 
Βελίαλ or Βελίαρ 2 Co. 
βέλος Eph. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


βραβεῖον 

βραβεύω Col. 

βρόχος 1 Co. 

βυθός 2 Co. 

Ταλάτης Gal. 
γεώργιον 1 Co. 
γνησίως Phil. 
γραπτός Ro. 
γυμνητεύω 1 Co, 
δάκνω Gal. 
Δαμασκηνός 2 Co. 
δειγματίζω Col. (Mt. ?) 
διαίρεσις 1 Co. 
διαστολή 

διδακτός 1 Co. (Jn. fr. Sept.) 
διερμηνεία 1 Co.? 
διερμηνευτῆς 1 (Ὁ. ὃ 
δικαιοκρισία Ro. 
δικαίωσις Ro. 

διόπερ 1 Co. 
διχοστασία 

δίψος 1 Co. 
δογματίζω Col. 
δοκιμή 

δόλιος 2 Co. 

δολιόω Ro. fr. Sept. 
δολόω 2 Co. 

δότης 2 Co. 
δουλαγωγέω 1 Co. 
δράσσομαι 1 Co. 
δυναμόω Col. (Eph.? Heb.?) 
δυνατέω 2 Co. (Ro.?) 
δυσφημέω 1 Co.? 
δυσφημία 2 Co. 
δωροφορία Ro.? 
ἐγγράφω 2 Co. (Lk. ?) 
ἐγγύτερον Ro. 
ἐγκαυχάομαι 2 ΤῊ. ? 
ἐγκεντρίζω Ro. 
ἐγκοπή (or ἐκκ-, or éyk-) 1 Co. 
ἐγκρατεύομαι 1 Co. 
ἐγκρίνω 2 Co. 

ἑδραῖος 

ἐθελοθρησκεία Col. 
ἐθνάρχης 2 Co. 
ἐθνικῶς Gal. 
εἰδωλεῖον 1 Co. 

εἰκῆ, -K (Mt. ?) 

εἴκω Gal. 

εἰλικρίνεια (or -via) 
εἰρηνοποιέω Col. 
εἰσδέχομαι 2 Co. 
ἑκατονταέτης Ro. 
ἐκδαπανάω 2 Co. 
ἐκδημέω 2 Co. 

ἔκδικος 

ἐκδιώκω 1 Th. (Lk. ?) 
ἐκκαίω Ro. 

ἐκκλάω Ro. 

ἐκκλείω 


InpIvIpDUAL WRITERS. 


ἐκκοπή cf. ἐγκοπή 
ἐκνήφω 1 Co. 

ἑκούσιος Philem. 
ἐκπετάννυμι Ro. fr. Sept. 
ἐκπτύω Gal. 

extpepo Eph. 

ἔκτρωμα 1 Co. 

ἐκφοβέω 2 Co. 

ἑκών 

ἐλαττονέω 2 Co. fr. Sept. 
ἐλαφρία 2 Co. 
ἐλαχιστότερος Eph. 
ἐλλογάω or -γέω 
ἐμβατεύω Col. 


ἐμπεριπατέω 2 Co. fr. Sept. 


ἐνάρχομαι 
ἔνδειγμα 2 ΤῊ. 
ἔνδειξις 
ἐνδημέω 2 Co. 
ἐνδοξάζω 2 Th. 
ἐνέργεια 
ἐνέργημα 1 Co. 
ἐνκοπή cf. ἐγκοπή 
ἐνορκίζω 1 'Th. ὃ 
ἑνότης Eph. 
ἐντροπή 1 Co. 
ἐντυπόω 2 Co. 
ἐξαγοράξζω 


ἐξαίρω 1 Co.? and fr. Sept. 


ἐξανάστασις Phil. 
ἐξαπατάω (1 Tim. ?) 
ἐξαπορέω 2 Co. 
ἐξεγείρω 

ἐξηχέω 1 ΤῊ. 

ἐξισχύω Eph. 

ἑορτάζω 1 Co. 

ἐπακούω 2 Co. fr. Sept. 
ἐπαναμιμνήσκω Ro. 
ἐπείπερ Ro. ? 

ἐπεκτείνω Phil. 
ἐπενδύω 2 Co. 
ἐπιβαρέω 
ἐπιδιατάσσομαι Gal. 
ἐπιδύω Eph. 
ἐπιθανάτιος 1 Co. 
ἐπιθυμητής 1 Co. 
ἐπικαλύπτω Ro. fr. Sept. 


ἐπικατάρατος Gal. fr. Sept. 


(Jn.?) 
ἐπιπόθησις 2 Co. 
ἐπιπόθητος Phil. 
ἐπιποθία Ro. 
ἐπισκηνόω 2 Co. 
ἐπισπάω 1 Co. 
ἐπιτιμία 2 Co. 
ἐπιφαύσκω Eph. 
ἐπιχορηγία 
ἐπονομάζω Ro. 
ἑπτακισχίλιοι Ro. 
ἐρεθίζω 2 Co. (Col.?) 

45 


105 


ἑρμηνεία 1 Co. 

ἑρμηνευτής 1 Co.? 

τί ἐροῦμεν Ro. 

ἑτερόγλωσσος 1 Co. 

ἑτεροζυγέω 2 Co. 

ἑτέρως Phil. 

ἑτοιμασία Eph. 

εὔνοια Eph. (1 Co. ?) 

εὐπάρεδρος | 1 

εὐπρόσεδρος | 

εὐπροσωπέω Gal. 

εὔσημος 1 Co. 

εὐσχημόνως 

εὐσχημοσύνη 1 Co. 

εὐτραπελία Eph. 

εὐφημία 2 Co. 

εὔφημος Phil. 

εὐχάριστος Col. 

εὐψυχέω Phil. 

εὐωδία 

ἐφευρετής Ro. 

ἐφικνέομαι 2 Co. 

ὁ ἠγαπημένος (of Christ) 
Eph. 

ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε Ro. 

ἥδιστα 2 Co. 

ἦθος 1 Co. fr. Menander 

ἡνίκα 2 Co. 

ἤτοι Ro. 

ἥττημα 

ἥττων OF ἥσσων ' 

ἠχέω 1 Co. (Lk. ?) 

θειότης Ro. 

θέλω ἐν Col. 

θεοδίδακτος 1 ΤῊ. 

θεοστυγής Ro. 

θεότης Col. 

θήρα Ro. 

θηριομαχέω 1 Co. 

θνητὸς 

θριαμβεύω 

θυρεός Eph. 

ἴαμα 1 Co. 

ἱερόθυτος 1 Co.? 

ἱεροσυλέω Ro. 


Co. 


ἱερουργέω Ro. 
ἱκανότης 2 Co. 
ixavow 

ἱλαρός 2 Co. 
ἱλαρότης Ro. 
ἱμείρομαι ( ? cf. ὁμείρομαι) 
tva (‘where’)? 
᾿Ιουδαΐζω Gal. 
᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς Gal. 
*Tovdaicpds Gal. 
ἰσότης 

ἰσόψυχος Phil. 
ἱστορέω Gal. 
καθαίρεσις 2 Co. 
καθό (1 Pet.?) 


καθοράω Ro. 
καινότης Ro. 
κακοήθεια Ro. 
καλάμη 1 Co. 
καλλιέλαιος Ro. 
καλοποιέω 2 Th. 
κάλυμμα 2 Co. 
κάμπτω 

κανών 

καπηλεύω 2 Co. 
καταβαρέω 2 Co. 
καταβραβεύω Col. 
καταδουλόω 
κατακαλύπτω 1 Co. 
κατάκριμα Ro. 
κατάκρισις 2 Co. 
κατάλαλος Ro. 
κατάλειμμα Ro. ὃ 
καταλλαγή 
καταλλάσσω 
καταναρκάω 2 Co. 
κατάνυξις Ro. fr. Sept. 
κατάρτισις 2 Co. 
καταρτισμός Eph. 
κατασκοπέω Gal. 
καταστρώννυμι 1 Co. 
κατατομή Phil. 
καταυγάζω 2 Co.? 
καταχθόνιος Phil. 
καταχράομαι 1 Co. 
κατοπτρίζομαι 2 Co. 
κατώτερος Eph. 
κέλευσμα 1 Th. 
κενοδοξία Phil. 
κενόδοξος Gal. 
κενόω 

κημόω 1 Co.? 
κίνδυνος 

κληρόω Eph. 
κλίμα 
κλυδωνίζομαι Eph. 
κολακεία 1 ΤῊ. 
κομάω 1 Co. 

κύμη 1 Co. 
κοσμοκράτωρ Eph. 
κρέας 

κρυφῆ, -φῇ Eph. 
κυβεία Eph. 
κυβέρνησις 1 Co. 
κύμβαλον 1 Co. 
κυριακὸν δεῖπνον 1 Co. 
κυρόω 

Λαοδικεύς Col. (Rev. ?) 
λάρυγξ Ro. 

λεῖμμα Ro. 

λῆψις Phil. 

λογία 1 Co. 
λογισμός 

λοίδορος 1 Co. 
λύσις 1 Co. 


InpivipuAL WRITERS. 


μακαρισμός 

μάκελλον 1 Co. 

μακροχρόνιος Eph. 

papàv ἀθά (papavaba) 1 Co. 

pataow Ro. 

μεγάλως Phil. 

μέγεθος Eph. 

μεθοδεία Eph. 

μέθυσος 1 Co. 

μεσότοιχον Eph. 

peraxwew Col. 

μεταλλάσσω Ro. 

μετασχηματίζω 

μετοχή 2 Co. 

μήτιγε (μήτι ye, μή τι ye) 1 
Co. 

μολυσμός 2 Co. 

μομφή Col. 

μορφόω Gal. 

μόχθος 

μυέω Phil. 

μυκτηρίζω Gal. 

μωμάομαι 2 Co. 

μωρία 1 Co. 

μωρολογία Eph. 

νέκρωσις 

vij 1 Co. 

νηπιάζω 1 Co. 

νόημα 

νομοθεσία Ro. 

νουμηνία Col. 

νυχθήμερον 2 Co. 

νῶτος Ro. fr. Sept. 

οἰκτείρω Ro. fr. Sept. 

ὀκταήμερος Phil. 

ὀλέθριος 2 ΤῊ. 

ὀλιγόψυχος 1 Th. 

ὀλοθρευτής 1 Co. 

ὁλοτελής 1 Th. 

ὁμείρομαι 1 ΤῊ. ὃ (cf. ipetp.) 

ὁμιλία 1 Co. fr. Menander 

ὀνίνημι Philem. 

δρατός Col. 

ὄρεξις Ro. 

ὀρθοποδέω Gal. 

ὅσγε Ro. 

ὁσίως 1 Th. 

ὄσφρησις 1 Co. 

ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 

ὀχύρωμα 2 Co. 

πάθος 

παιδαγωγός 

παίζω 1 Co. fr. Sept. 

παλαιότης Ro. 

πάλη Eph. 

πανοῦργος 2 Co. 

παραβολεύομαι ? | Phi 

παραβουλεύομαι ? j 

παραζηλόω 

παράκειμαι Ro. 


InpDIvVIDUAL WRITERS. 


παραμυθία 1 Co. 
παραμύθιον Phil. 
παραπλήσιον Phil. 
παραυτίκα 2 Co. 
παραφρονέω 2 Co. 
mapedpevo (cf. mpooedp.) 1 
Co.? 
παρείσακτος Gal. 
παρεισέρχομαι 
πάρεσις Ro. 
παρηγορία Col. 
πάροδος 1 Co. 
παροργίζω 
παροργισμός Eph. 
πατρικός Gal. 
πειθός 1 Co. 
(Πειθώ 1 Co. ?) 
πεισμονή Gal. 
πένης 2 Co. fr. Sept. 
πεντάκις 2 Co. 
πεποίθησις 
περιεργάζομαι 2 Th. 
περικάθαρμα 1 Co. 
περικεφαλαία 1 Th. (Eph. 
fr. Sept.) 
περιλείπω 1 Th. 
περίψημα 1 Co. 
περπερεύομαι 1 Co. 
πέρυσι 2 Co. 
πιθανολογία Col. 
πιότης Ro. 
πλάσμα Ro. 
τὸ πλεῖστον (adv.) 1 Co. 
πλεονεκτέω 
πλεονέκτης 
πλησμονή Col. 
πλουτίζω 
ποίημα 
πολίτευμα Phil. 
πολυποίκιλος Eph. 
πρεσβεύω 
προαιρέω 2 Co. 
προαιτιάομαι Ro. 
mpoaxovw Col. 
προαμαρτάνω 2 Co. 
προγίνομαι Ro. 
προδίδωμι Ro. 
προελπίζω Eph. 
προενάρχομαι 2 Co. 
προεπαγγέλλω Ro. (2 Co. ?) 
προετοιμάζω 
προευαγγελίζομαι Gal. 
προέχω Ro. 
προηγέομαι Ro. 
προθέσμιος Gal. 
προκαλέω Gal. 
προκαταρτίζω 2 Co. 
προκυρόω Gal. 
προλέγω 
προπάσχω 1 Th. 


706 


προπάτωρ Ro. ? 
προσαγωγή 
προσαναπληρόω 2 Co. 
προσανατίθημι Gal. 
προσεδρεύω (cf. wapedp.) 1 
Co.? 
προσηλόω Col. 
προκαρτέρησις Eph. 
προσκοπή 2 Co. 
πρόσλη(μ)ψις Ro. 
προσοφείλω Philem. 
προστάτις Ro. 
προσφιλής Phil. 
προτίθημι 
πρωτεύω Col. 
πτηνά (τά) 1 Co. 
πτύρω Phil. 
πτωχεύω 2 Co. 
πυκτεύω 1 Co. 


puris Eph. 

σαίνεσθαι 1 Th.? 
σαργάνη 2 Co. 

carav (not -vas) 2 Co.? 
σεβάζομαι Ro. 

σημειόω 2 Th. 

σκῆνος 2 Co. 

σκληρότης Ro. 

σκόλοψ; 2 Co. 

σκοπός Phil. 

σκύβαλον Phil. 

Σκύθης Col. 

σπουδαῖος 2 Co. (2 T. ?) 
στέγω 

στέλλω 

στενοχωρέω 2 Co. 
στενοχωρία 

στερέωμα Col. 

στίγμα Gal. 

συγγνώμη 1 Co. 
συγκαθίζω Eph. (Lk.?) 
συγκάμπτω Ro. fr. Sept. 
συγκατάθεσις 2 Co. 
συγκρίνω 

συζητητῆς 1 Co. 
σύζυγος Phil. 
συζωοποιέω 

συλαγωγέω Col. 

συλάω 2 Co. 

σύμβουλος Ro. fr. Sept. 
συμμαρτυρέω Ro. (Rev. ?) 
συμμερίζω 1 Co. 
συμμέτοχος Eph. 
συμμιμητῆς Phil. 
συμμορφίζω Phil. ὃ 
σύμμορφος 

συμμορφόω Phil. ὃ 
συμπαρακαλέω Ro. 


συμπαραμένω Phil. ὃ 
συμπάσχω 
συμπέμπω 2 Co. 
συμπολίτης Eph. 
σύμφημι Ro. 
σύμφορον, τό, 1 Co.? 
συμφυλέτης 1 Th. 
σύμφυτος Ro. 
συμφώνησις 2 Co. 
σύμφωνος 1 Co. 
σύμψυχος Phil. 
συναγωνίζομαι Ro. 
συναθλέω Phil. 
συναιχμάλωτος 
συναναμίγνυμι 
συναναπαύομαι Ro.? 
συναποστέλλω 2 Co. 
συναρμολογέω Eph. 
συνδοξάζω Ro. 
συνεγείρω 

συνήδομαι Ro. 
συνηλικιώτης Gal. 
συνθάπτω 
συνοικοδομέω Eph. 
συντέμνω Ro. fr. Sept. 
σύντριμμα Ro. fr. Sept. 
συνυποκρίνομαι Gal. 
συνυπουργέω 2 Co. 
συνωδίνω Ro. 
σύσσωμος Eph. 
συστατικός 2 Co. 
συστενάζω Ro. 
συστοιχέω Gal. 
συστρατιώτης 

σχῆμα 

σωματικῶς Col. 
τάγμα 1 Co. 

τάχα 

τίνω 2 Th. 
τολμηρότερον or -τέρως Ro. 
τράχηλον ὑποτιθέναι Ro. 
τροφός 1 Th. 
τυπικῶς 1 Co. ? 

εἰ τύχοι, τυχόν, 1 Co. 
υἱοθεσία 

ὕμνος 

ὕπαυνδρος Ro. 
ὑπεραίρω 

ὑπέρακμος 1 Co. 
ὑπεραυξάνω 2 Th. 
ὑπερβαίνω 1 Th. 
ὑπερβαλλόντως 2 Co. 
ὑπερβάλλω 

ὑπερβολή 

ὑπερεγώ 2 Co.? 
ὑπερέκεινα 2 Co. 
ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ 
ὑπερεκπερισσῶς 1 Th.? 
ὑπερεκτείνω 2 Co. 
ὑπερεντυγχάνω Ro. 


Inpryimvuat Writers. 


ὑπερλίαν 2 Co. 
ὑπερνικάω Ro. 
ὑπερπερισσεύω 
ὑπερυψόω Phil. 
ὑπερφρονέω Ro. 
ὑπόδικος Ro., 
ὑπόλειμμα Ro. ? 
ὑπολείπω Ro. 
ὑποπιάζω 1 Co.? 
ὕψωμα 
φανέρωσις 
φειδομένως 2 Co. 
φθόγγος 1 Co. (Ro. fr. Sept.) 
φθονέω Gal. 
Φιλιππήσιος Phil. 
φιλόνεικος 1 Co. 
φιλοσοφία Col. 
φιλόστοργος Ro. 
φιλοτιμέομαι 
φρεναπατάω Gal. 
φρήν 1 Co. 
φρόνημα Ro. 
φύραμα 

φυσιόω 

φυσίωσις 2 Co. 
φωτισμός 2 Co. 
χειρόγραφον Col. 
xoikos 1 Co. 
χρηματισμός Ro. 
χρῆσις Ro. 
χρηστεύομαι 1 Co. 
χρηστολογία Ro. 
Ψψευδάδελφος 
ψευδαπόστολος 2 Co. 
ψεῦσμα Ro. 
Ψψιθυρισμός 2 Co. 
ψιθυριστής Ro. 
ψωμίζω 


ὡσπερεί 1 Co. 


Ro. 113 (13 fr. Sept., 6 ?) 
1 Co. 110 (2 fr. Sept., 12 ?) 
2 Co. 99 (4 fr. Sept., 4 ?) 
Gal. 34 (1 fr. Sept., 1?) 
Eph. 43 (1 fr. Sept.) 
Phil. 41 (4 ?) 
Col. 38 
1 Thess. 23 ( 5?) 
2 Thess. 11 (2?) 
Philem. 5. 
Common to two or more Epis- 
tles 110. 
Tora. 627 (21 fr. Sept., 34 ?) 


b. To THE PASTORAL 
EPIsTLEs. 


N. B. Words peculiar to some 
single Epistle of the three are 
so designated. 


ἀγαθοεργέω 1 T. 
ἁγνεία 1 T. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἀγωγή 2 T. 
ἀδηλότης 1 T. 
ἀδιαφθορία Tit.? (cf. ἀφθο- 
pia) 
ἀθλέω 2 T. 
αἰδώς 1 T. (Heb. ?) 
aipertxos Tit. 
αἰσχροκερδής 
αἰχμαλωτεύω 2 T.? (Eph. 
fr. Sept.) 
ἀκαίρως 2 'T. 
ἀκατάγνωστος Tit. 
ἀκρατής 2 T. 
ἄλλως 1 T. 
ἄμαχος 
ἀμοιβή 1 T. 
ἀναζωπυρέω 2 TT. 
ἀνάλυσις 2 T. 
ἀνανήφω 2 'T. 
ἀνατρέπω 
ἀναψύχω 2 T. 
ἀνδραποδιστής 1 T. 
ἀνδρόφονος 1 'T. 
ἀνεξίκακος 2 T. 
ἀνεπαίσχυντος 2 'T. 
ἀνεπίληπτος 1 T. 
ἀνήμερος 2 T. 
ἀνόσιος 
ἀντιδιατίθημι 2 T. 
ἀντίθεσις 1 T. 
ἀντίλυτρον 1 T. 
ἀπαίδευτος 2 T. 
ἀπέραντος 1 T. 
ἀπόβλητος 1 T. 
ἀπόδεκτος 1 T. 
ἀποδοχή 1 T. 
ἀποθησαυρίζω 1 T. 
ἀποτρέπω 2 T. 
ἀπρόσιτος 1 T. 
ἄρτιος 2 T. 
ἄσπονδος 2 T. (Ro.?) 
ἀστοχέω 
αὐθεντέω 1 T. 
αὐτοκατάκριτος Tit. 
apOopia Tit.? (ef. ἀδιαφθο- 
pía) 
ἀφιλάγαθος 2 T. 
ayrevórs Tit. 
βαθμός 1 T. 
βασιλεὺς τῶν αἰώνων 1 'T. 
βδελυκτός Tit. 
βελτίων 2 T. 
βλαβερός 1 T. 
γάγγραινα 2 'T. 
yeveahoyia 
γόης 2 T. 
(rà) ἱερὰ γράμματα 2 T. 
ypawdns 1 T. 
γυμνασία 1 T. 
γυναικάριον 2 T. 


707 


δειλία 2 T. 
διαβεβαιόομαι 
διάβολος (as adj.) 
διάγω 
διαπαρατριβή 1 T.? (cf. παρα- 
διατριβή) 
διατροφή 1 T. 
διδακτικός 
δίλογος 1 T. 
διώκτης 1 T. 
ἐγκρατής Tit. 
ἑδραίωμα 1 T. 
ἔκγονα (ra) 1 T. 
ἔκδηλος 2 TT. 
ἐκζήτησις 1 T.? 
ἐκλεκτοὶ ἄγγελοι 1 T. 
ἐκστρέφω Tit. 
ἔλαττον (adv.) 1 T. 
ἐλεγμός 2 T. ? 
ἡ μακαρία ἐλπίς Tit. 
ἐνδύνω intrans. 2 T. 
ἔντευξις 1 T. 
ἐντρέφω 1 TT. 
ἐπανόρθωσις 2 T. 
ἐπαρκέω 1 'T. 
ἐπιδιορθόω Tit. 
ἐπίορκος 1 T. 
ἐπιπλήσσω 1 T. 
ἐπιστομίζω Tit. 
ἐπισωρεύω 2 'T. 
ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω 1 'T. 
εὐμετάδοτος 1 T. 
εὐσεβῶς 
ἤρεμος 1 T. 
Ocónvevaros 2 T. 
θεοσέβεια 1 IT. 
ἱεροπρεπῆς Tit. 
᾿Ιουδαϊκός Tit. 
καλοδιδάσκαλος Tit. 
καταλέγω 1 T. 
κατάστημα Tit. 
καταστολή 1 T. 
καταστρηνιάω 1 T. 
καταστροφή 2 T. (2 Pet.?) 
καταφθείρω 2 'T. (2 Pet.?) 
κατηγορία (Lk. and Jn. ?) 
καυστηριάζω ? | 1T 
καυτηριάζω ? D 
κενοφωνία 
κνήθω 2 T. 
κοινωνικός 1 T. 
κόσμιος 1 'T. 
κοσμίως 1 T. ? 
Aoyopaxéo 2 'T. 
λογομαχία 1 T. 
λόγος ὑγιής Tit. 
μάμμη 
ματαιολογία 1 T. 


ματαιολόγος Tit. [ΜΚ. ?) 


μεμβράνα 2 T. 
μετάλη(μ)ψις 1 T. 
μηδέποτε 2 T. 
μητραλῴας ? | 1T. 
pntpod@as ? 
μητρόπολις 1 T. 
povow 1 T. 
veoputos 1 T. 
νεωτερικός 2 T. 
νηφάλεος 
νομίμως 
νοσέω 1 T. 
ξενοδοχέω 1 T. 
οἰκοδεσποτέω 1 T. 
οἰκοδομία 1 T.? 
euge j Tit. 
oikoupos ? 
ἡ καλὴ ὁμολογία 1 T. 
ὁμολογουμένως 1 TT. 
ὀργίλος Tit. 
ὀρθοτομέω 2 T. 
παραδιατριβή 1 T. ? (cf. δια- 
παρατριβή) 
παραθήκη 2 Τ. (1 T.?) 
παρακαταθήκη 2 T. (1 T.?) 


πάροινος 

πατραλῴας ἵ } 1T 

marpoAoas ? É 

περιΐστασθαι (** to avoid”) 

περιούσιος Tit. 

περιπείρω 1 T. 

mepippovew Tit. 

πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (cf. Rev. xxi. 
5 ete.) 

πιστόω 2 T. 

πλέγμα 1 TT. 

πλήκτης 

πορισμός 1 T. 

πραγματεία 2 'T. 

πραὐπάθεια (-θία) 1 T.? 

πρεσβῦτις Tit. 

πρόγονος 

πρύκριμα 1 T 

πρόσκλησις ? | 1T 

πρόσκλισις ? ; 

προφήτης (of a poet) Tit. 

ῥητῶς 1 T. 

σεμνότης 

σκέπασμα 1 T. 

στεφανόω 2 T. (Heb. fr. 
Sept.) 

στόμαχος 1 T. 

στρατυλογέω 2 T. 

στυγητός Tit. 

συγκακοπαθέω 3 'T. 

σώζω εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν κτλ. 
2 

σωτήριος (as adj.) Tit. 

σωφρονίζω Tit. 


μελετάω 1 T. (Acts fr. Sept., | σωφρονισμός 2 T. 





IxprviDUAL WRITERS. 


σωφρόνως Tit. 
σώφρων 
τεκνογονέω 
τεκνογονία 1 TT. 
τεκνοτροφέω 1 T. 
τυφόω : 
ὑγιαίνω metaph. (τῇ ἀγάπῃ, 
πίστει, ὑπομονῇ, ete.) 
ὑδροποτέω 1 T. 
ὑπερπλεονάζω 1 T. 
ὑπόνοια 1 T. 
ὑποτύπωσις 
adorns? | , 
Peay ἢ 2 T. (ef. TII. 1) 
φιλάγαθος Tit. 
φίλανδρος Tit. 
φιλαργυρία 1 T. 
φίλαυτος 2 'T. 
φιλήδονος 2 T. 
φιλόθεος 2 T. 
φιλότεκνος Tit. 
φλύαρος 1 T. 
φρεναπάτης Tit. 
φροντίζω Tit. 
χαλκεύς 2 T. 
χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη ἀπὸ 0. 
(as a salutation) 
χρήσιμος 2 T. 
ψευδολόγος 1 T. 
ψευδώνυμος 1 T. 
ὠφέλιμος 
1 Tim. 82 (6 2) 
2 Tim. 53 (2?) 
Tit. 33 (22) 
Tora 168 (10 ?) 


e. Born ro THE PASTORAL 
AND THE OTHER PAULINE 
ErrsTLES. 


ἀδιάλειπτος 
5 ; 
ἀθανασία 
αἰσχρός 

> , 
αἰχμαλωτεύω ? 
ἀλαζών 
ἀλοάω 
ἀνακαίνωσις 
ἀνέγκλητος 
ἀποτόμως 
ἀρσενοκοίτης 
ἄσπονδος ? 
ἄστοργος 
ἀτιμία 
αὐτάρκεια 
ἀφθαρσία 
3 ; 
ἀφορμή 
γνήσιος 
5 , 
exxabaipo 
ἐνοικέω 
ἐξαπατάω ? 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἐπιταγή 
ἐπιφάνεια 
ἔρις 
εὔχρηστος 
ἤπιος 
ἱερός (Mk.?) 
κέρδος 
λουτρόν 
μνεία 
μόρφωσις 
ναυαγέω 
νουθεσία 
ὀδύνη 
οἰκεῖος 
οἰκέω 
ὄλεθρος 
ὀστράκινος 
πλάσσω 
προΐστημι 
προκοπή 
προνοέω 
σεμνός 
σπένδω 
στρατεία ? 
συζάω 
συμβασιλεύω 
σωρεύω 
ὑβριστής 
ὑπεροχή 
ὑποταγή 
ὑποτίθημι 
ὑψηλοφρονέω ? 
Χχρηστύτης 
Tora. 58 (6 ?) 


7. To the Epistle to the 
Hebrews. 


dyeveahoynros 
ἁγιότης (2 Co.?) 
ἀγνόημα 
ἀθέτησις 
ἄθλησις 
αἴγειος 
αἱματεκχυσία 
αἴνεσις 
αἰσθητήριον 

» ς 
αἴτιος (ὁ) 
ἀκατάλυτος 
ee 
akhuns 

> 1 
ἀκροθίνιον 
ἀλυσιτελής 
ἀμετάθετος 
ἜΤ 
avakat vito 
avahoyiCopat 
ἀναρίθμητος 
ἀνασταυρόω 
ἀνταγωνίζομαι 





ἀντικαθίστημι 
ἀπαράβατος 
ἀπάτωρ 
ἀπαύγασμα 
ἄπειρος 

ἀποβλέπω 
ἀπόστολος of Christ 
dppos 

ἀφανής 

ἀφανισμός 
ἀφομοιόω 

ἀφοράω 

βοηθός fr. Sept. 
βολίς ? fr. Sept. 
βοτάνη 

γενεαλογέω 
γεωργέω 

γνόφος 

δάμαλις 

δεκάτη 

δεκατόω 

δέος ? 

δέρμα 

δημιουργός 

δήπου 

διάταγμα ? 
διαφορώτερος 
διηνεκής 

διϊκνέομαι 
διόρθωσις 
δοκιμασία ? 
δυσερμήνευτος 
ἐάνπερ 

(7) ἑβδόμη 

ἔγγυος 

ἐγκαινίζω 

εἰ μήν ? 

ἐκβαίνω ? 

ἐκδοχή 

ἐκλανθάνω 
ἔκτρομος ? 

ἔλεγχος (2 Tim. ?) 
ἐμπαιγμός 
ἐνυβρίζω 

ἕξις 

ἐπεισαγωγή 
ἐπιλείπω 
ἐπισκοπέω (1 Pet. ?) 
ἔπος 

εὐαρεστέω 
εὐαρέστως 

εὐθύτης fr. Sept. 
εὐλάβεια 
εὐλαβέομαι (Acts?) 
εὐπερίστατος 
εὐποιΐα 

5 pny? (cf. εἰ μήν) 
θεατρίζω 

θέλησις 

θεμέλιον καταβάλλομαι 


708 


θεράπων 

θύελλα 

θυμιατήριον 
ἱερωσύνη 

ἱκετήριος 

καθαρότης 

καίτοι (Lk. ?) 
κακουχέω 

καρτερέω 
καταγωνίζομαι 
κατάδηλος 
καταναλίσκω 
κατασκιάζω 
κατάσκοπος 
κατατοξεύω ? fr. Sept. 
καῦσις 

κεφαλίς fr. Sept. 
κοπή fr. Sept. 
κριτικός 

κῶλον tr. Sept. 
λειτουργικός 
Aevirikós 

μερισμός 

μεσιτεύω 

μετάθεσις 
μετέπειτα 
μετριοπαθέω 
μηδέπω 

μηλωτή 
μισθαποδοσία 
μισθαποδότης 
μυελός 

νέφος 

νόθος 

νομοθετέω 

νωθρός 

ὄγκος 

ἡ οἰκουμένη ἣ μέλλουσα 
ὀλιγωρέω fr. Sept. 
ὀλοθρεύω, ὀλεθρεύω 
ὁμοιότης 

ὁ ὀνειδισμὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ 
ὁρκωμοσία 
πανήγυρις 
παραδειγματίζω (Mt. Ὁ) 
παραπικραίνω 
παραπικρασμός fr. Sept. 
παραπίπτω 
παραπλησίως 
παραρρέω 

παρίημι (Lk. ?) 
παροικέω (Lk. ?) 
πεῖρα 

πήγνυμι 

πολυμερῶς 
πολυτρόπως 

πρίζω (πρίω) 
προβλέπω 
πρόδρομος 
προσαγορεύω 














InDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


προσοχθίζω fr. Sept. 

mpoadparos 

Tmpoorxvots 

πρωτοτύκια 

ῥαντίζω (ΜΚ. Rev.?) 

σαββατισμός 

ὁ σκότος ? 

στάμνος 

συγκακουχέω 

συμπαθέω 

συναπόλλυμι 

συνδέω 

συνεπιμαρτυρέω 

τελειωτής 

τιμωρία 

τομώτερος 

τράγος 

τραχηλίζω 

τρίμηνος 

τροχιά fr. Sept. 

τυμπανίζω 

ὑπείκω 

ὑποστολή 

φαντάζω 

φοβερός 

χαρακτήρ 

Χερουβίμ, -βείν 
TorAL 168 (11 fr. Sept., 10 2) 


8. To James. 

- 
aye 
SR 
ἀδιάκριτος 
ἀκατάστατος 
ἀκατάσχετος ? 
NE 
ἁλυκός 
apaw 
ἀνέλεος ? 
ἌΤΙ 
ἀνεμίζω 
ἀνίλεως ? 
ἀπείραστος 
CEA 
ἁπλῶς 
ἀποκυέω 
ἀποσκίασμα 
ἀποτελέω (Lk. 3) 
αὐχέω ? 
> , 
ἀφυστερέω ? 
βοή 

, 
βρύω 
γέλως 
δαιμονιώδης 
δίψυχος 
EIKQ 
ἔμφυτος 
ἐνάλιος 
ἐξέλκω 
ἔοικα (see EIKQ) 
ἐπιλησμονή 
ἐπιστήμων 
ἐπιτήδειος 


InpIvipUAL WRITERS. 


6 εὐθύνων ; ἄδολος 1 κακοποιός 1 (Jn. ?) ψευδοδιδάσκαλος 2 
εὐπειθής ἄθεσμος 2 κατακλύζω 2 ὠρύομαι 1 
εὐπρέπεια αἰσχροκερδῶς 1 καυσόω 2 1 Epistle 63 (1 fr. Sept., 22) 
ἐφήμερος ἀκατάπαστος 7). κλέος 1 2 Epistle 57 (5 ?) 
θανατηφόρος dkarázava os? κραταιός 1 Common to Both 1 
θρῆσκος ἀλλοτρι(ο)επίσκοπος 1 κτίστης 1 Toran 121. 
ἰός (Ro. fr. Sept.) ἅλωσις 2 κύλισμα ? 
κακοπάθεια ἀμαθής 2 κυλισμός ? 
κατήφεια ἀμαράντινος 1 λήθη 2 10. To Jude. 
κατιόω ἀμάραντος 1 μεγαλοπρεπής 2 > ἘΠ "e 
κατοικίζω ? ἀμώμητος 2 (Phil.?) μίασμα 2 ἘΣ mie RC RENE 
re iesu ἘΞ Σ πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος 
; ; E vee ἀποδιορίζω 
μαραίνω ἀναγκαστῶς 1 μνήμη 2 = 
5 aS ; ἄπταιστος 
μεγαλαυχέω ? ἀναζώννυμι 1 μυωπάζω 2 E 
μετάγω ἀνάχυσις 1 μώλωψ 1 fr. Sept. EUCH 
μετατρέπω ? ἀνεκλάλητος 1 μῶμος 2 lapis 
νομοθέτης ἀντιλοιδορέω 1 οἰνοφλυγία 1 Sea eee Lk. fr. S 
UT. Pos éhiyos ? 2 ea . fr. Sept.) 
ὁμοίωσις fr. Sept. ἀπόθεσις ὁμίχλη ? 2 de aen 
d SOC A ἐπαγωνίζομαι 
ὄψιμος ἀπονέμω 1 ὁμόφρων 1 > / 
Xavi E 7 ser ἐπαφρίζω 
παραλλαγή ἀποφεύγω 2 ὁπλίζω 1 ; 
; > , ; μεμψίμοιρος 
πικρός ἀπροσωπολή(μ)πτως 1 παρανομία 2 a? ; 
; Bree oe ὀπίσω σαρκός 
mola? apyeo 2 mapappovia 2 AN 
ποίησις ἀρτιγέννητος 1 παρεισάγω 2 D φοὶ 
πολύσπλα i iunv 1 tow 2 CAE 
γχνος ἀρχιποίμην παρεισφέρω 2 , , 
, Aish ; πρόσωπα θαυμάζω 
προσωπολη(μ)πτέω ἀστήρικτος 2 πατροπαράδοτος 1 one 
mpw(Or-0-)ijos αὐχμηρός 2 περίθεσις 1 Gee 
ῥιπίζω βιόω 1 πλαστός 2 x ; 
τ É ἢ 4 » φθινοπωρινός 
ῥυπαρία βλέμμα 3 πότος 1 ἐπ μεύτῆς 
ῥυπαρός (Rev. ?) BopBopos 2 προθύμως 1 
τήρῳ Βραδυτής 2 ἢ Torar 20 (1?) 
σητόβρωτος γυναικεῖος 1 πτόησις 1 
ταλαιπωρέω διαυγάζω 2 ῥοιζηδόν 2 
, M 11. Ἢ : 
ταλαιπωρία (Ro. fr. Sept.) | δυσνόητος 2 ῥύπος 1 othe Soper ies 
ταχύς ἐγκατοικέω 2 σειρά ? | τὸ A καὶ τὸ Q 
τροπή ἐγκομβόομαι 1 σειρός Ὁ ὁ 2 ᾿Αβαδδών 
τροχός ἑκάστοτε 2 σιρός ? Ϊ αἰχμαλωσία (Eph. fr. Sept.) 
τρυφάω ἔκπαλαι 2 σθενόω 1 ἀκαθάρτης ? 
ὕλη ἐκτενής 1 (Lk. ?) σπορὰ 1 ἀκμάζω 
φιλία ἐκτενῶς 1 (Lk. ?) στηριγμός 2 ἄκρατος fr. Sept. 
φλογίζω ἔλεγξις 2 στρεβλόω 3 ἀλληλούϊα 
φρίσσω ἐμπαιγμονή 2 συμπαθής 1 ἄλφα (see τὸ A καὶ τὸ Q) 
χαλιναγωγέω ἐμπλοκή 1 συμπρεσβύτερος 1 ἀμέθυστος 
χρή ἔνδυσις 1 συνεκλεκτός 1 ὁ ἀμὴν 
χρυσοδακτύλιος ἐντρυφάω 2 συνοικέω 1 ἄμωμον ? 
Tora 73 (1 fr. Sept., 9 ?) ἐξαγγέλλω 1 (Mk. ὃ ?) ταπεινόφρων 1? ava εἷς ἕκαστος 
ἐξακολουθέω 2 Taptapow 2 ᾿Απολλύων 


709 








INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἐξέραμα 2 ταχινός 2 ἄρκος Or ἄρκτος 
Ἢ ΠΟΤΩ͂Ι ἐξεραυνάω ? | 1 τελείως 1 “Appayedav ete. 
. To Peter. ἢ 225 lw x 
e&epevváco ? τεφρόω 2 ἄψινθος 
ἐπάγγελμα 2 τήκω 2 βάλλειν σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιον 
N. B. Words peculiar to one emend 1 bode 2 B , 
Epistle or the other are so| $ ^4 "d gee τ pe aia 
marked by the numeral which ἐπικάλυμμα 1 τολμητής 2 βάτραχος 
follows them; words unmarked ἐπίλοιπος 1 ὑπογραμμός 1 βήρυλλος 
are common to both. ELI 2 ] , 2 (Mt. fr. Sé , 
ίλυσις 2 ὑποζύγιον 2 (Mt. fr. Sept.) | βιβλαρίδιον 
, " ἐπιμαρτυρέω 1 ὑπολιμπάνω 1 βιβλιδάριον ? 
ἀγαθοποιΐα 1 ἐποπτεύω 1 ὗς 2 βότρυς 
> , ^ Uu , 
ἀγαθοποιός 1 ἐπόπτης 2 φιλάδελφος 1 βύσσινος 





ἀδελφότης 1 
ἀδίκως 1 


τὸ δάκρυον ? 
τὸ δέκατον as subst. 


φιλόφρων 1? 
φωσφόρος 2 


Par 
ἱεράτευμα 1 
5 
ἰσότιμος 2 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


διάδημα 

διαυγής ὃ 

διαφανής ὃ 

διπλόω 

δισμυριάς ? 

δράκων 

δωδέκατος 

ἐγχρίω 

εἱλίσσω ? 

ἐλεφάντινος 

Ἑλληνικός (Lk. ?) 

ἐμέω 

ἐμμέσῳ ? 

ἐνδόμησις (ἐνδώμησις) 

ἑξακόσιοι 

᾿Εφεσῖνος ? 

ζηλεύω ? 

ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς fr. Sept., 
ζωῆς πηγαὶ ὑδάτων Ὁ fr. 
Sept., (τὸ) ὕδωρ (τῆς) 


ζωῆς fr. Sept. 
ζεστός 
ἡμιώριον (ἡμίωρον) 
T sul 
o0 nv 


ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερος 
θαῦμα (2 Co. 7) 

θαῦμα (μέγα) θαυμάζειν 
θειώδης 
θεολόγος ? 
θύϊνος 
ἴασπις 
ἱππικός 
ipis 
κατάθεμα ? 

κατανάθεμα ἢ | iege 
κατασφραγίζω 

κατήγωρ ? 

καῦμα 





κεραμικός fr. Sept. 
κεράννυμι 

κιθαρῳδός 
κιν(νγάμωμον 

κλέμμα 

κολλούριον (κολλύριον) 
κριθή 

κρυσταλλίζω 
κρύσταλλος 

κυκλεύω ? 

κυκλόθεν 

ἡ κυριακὴ ἡμέρα 
λευκοβύσσινον ? 
λιβανωτός 

λίνον ? (Mt. fr. Sept.) 
λιπαρός 

patos? 

μασθός ? | 

páppapos 
μασ(σ)άομαι 
μεσουράνημα 

μέτωπον 

μηρός 

μουσικός 

μυκάομαι 

μύλινος ? 

νεφρός fr. Sept. 
Νικολαΐτης 

ὄλυνθος 

ὅμιλος ? 

ὅπου ἐκεῖ (Hebr. OY Ws) 
ὀπώρα 

ὅρασις (Lk. fr. Sept.) 
ὅρμημα 

opveov 

ἡ ovat 

ovai w. ace. of pers.? 
οὐρά 


710 


πάρδαλις 
πελεκίζω 
πέμπτος 
περιρ(ρ)γαίνω ? 
(πετάομαι) πέτομαι 
πλήσσω 

πλύνω (Lk. ?) 
ποδήρης 

πόνος (Col. ?) 
ποταμο(φόρητος 
πρωϊνός ete. 

ὁ πρῶτος κ. ὁ ἔσχατος 
πύρινος 

πυρρός 

δέδη (ῥέδα) 
ῥυπαίνω ? 
ῥυπαρεύομαι ? 
ῥυπόω ? 
σαλπιστής 
σάπφειρος 
σάρδινος ? 
σάρδιον ? 
σαρδιόνυξ ? 
σαρδόνυξ ? | 
σεμίδαλις 
σηρικός (σιρικός) 
σίδηρος 

σκοτόω (Eph. ?) 
σμαράγδινος 
σμάραγδος 
Σμυρναῖος ? 
στρηνιάω 
στρῆνος 

σώματα slaves 
ταλαντιαῖος 
τεσσαρακονταδύο ? 


τεσσαρακοντατέσσαρες ? 


τετράγωνος 





IxpriviIDUAL WRITERS. 


τιμιότης 
τόξον 
τοπάζιον 
τρίχινος 
ὑακίνθινος 
ὑάκινθος 
ὑάλινος 
ὕαλος 
φαρμακεύς ? 
φάρμακον ? 
φαρμακός 
φιάλη 
χάλαζα 
χάλκεος 
χαλκηδών 
χαλκολίβανον 
χλιαρός 
χοῖνιξ 
χρυσόλιθος 
χρυσόπρασος 
χρυσόω 

τὸ Ὡ (see τὸ A καὶ τὸ Q) 


ΤΟΤΑΙ, 156 (7 fr. Sept., 33 ?) 


12. To the Apocalypse and 
the Fourth Gospel. 


βροντή (cf. Mk. iii. 17) 
δέκατος 
ἑἙβραϊστί 
ἐκκεντέω 
κυκλεύω ? 
ὄψις 
πορφυροῦς 
σκηνόω 
φοίνιξ 
Tora 9 (1?) 


FORMS 


OF VERBS. 





The List which follows is not intended to be a mere museum of grammatical curiosities on the one hand, or a catalogue of all the 
verbal forms occurring in the Greek Testament on the other ; butit is a collection of those forms (or their representatives) which may 
possibly occasion a beginner some perplexity. The practical end, accordingly, for which the list has been prepared has prescribed a 
generous liberty as respects admission to it. Yet the following classes of forms bave been for the most part excluded: forms which are 
traceable by means of the cross references given in the body of the Lexicon, or which hold so isolated a position in its alphabet that even 
a tyro can hardly miss them ; forms easily recognizable as compounded, in case the simple form has been noted ; forms readily explain- 


able by the analogy of some form which is given. 


Ordinarily it has been deemed sufficient to give the representative form of a tense, viz., the First Person (or in the case of the Impera- 
tive the Second Person) Singular, the Nominative Singular Masculine of a Participle, etc.; but when some other form seemed likely to 
prove more embarrassing, or was the only one found in the New Testament, it has often been the form selected. 

The word “of” in the descriptions introduces not necessarily the stem from which a given form comes, but the entry in the Lexicon 
under which the form will be found. The epithet ** Alex.", it is hardly necessary to add, has been employed only for convenience and in 


its technical sense. 


ἀγάγετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἄγω. 
ἀγάγῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἄγω. 
ἁγνίσθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of ἁγνίζω. 
αἴσθωνται, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. of αἰσθάνομαι. 
alre(rw, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of airéa. 
ἀκήκοα, 2 pf. act. of ἀκούω. 

ἀλλαγήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of ἀλλάσσω. 

ἀλλάξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἀλλάσσω. 

ἀλλάξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀλλάσσω. 
“ἁμαρτήσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἁμαρτάνω. 
ἀμησάντων, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. plur. of ἀμάω. 
ἀνάβα and ἀνάβηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἀναβαίνω. 
ἀναβέβηκα, pf. act. of ἀναβαίνω. 

ἀναγαγεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀνάγω. 

ἀναγνούς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀναγινώσκω. 
ἀναγνῶναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀναγινώσκω. 


ἀναγνωσθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναγινώσκω. 


ἀνακεκύλισται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνακυλίω. 
ἀναλοῖ, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναλίσκω. 
ἀναλωθῆτε, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of ἀναλίσκω. 
ἀναμνήσω, fut. act. of ἀναμιμνήσκω. 

ἀναπαήσομαι, fut. mid. of ἀναπαύω (cf. also παύω, init.). 
ἀνάπεσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἀναπίπτω. 

ἀνάπεσε, ἀνάπεσον, 2 and 1 aor. act. impv. of ἀναπίπτω. 
ἀνάστα and ἀνάστηθι, 2 aor. act. impy. of ἀνίστημι. 
ἀνατεθραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνατρέφω. 

ἀνατείλῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατέλλω. 
ἀνατέταλκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατέλλω. 
ἀναφάναντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of ἀναφαίνω. 
ἀναφανέντες, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. of ἀναφαίνω. 
ἀναχθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of avayo. 
ἀνάψαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ἀνάπτω. 
ἀνέγνωτε, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of ἀναγινώσκω. 
ἀνεθάλετε, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of ἀναθάλλω. 
-Avelégmy, 2 aor. mid. of ἀνατίθημι. 


ἀνέθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνίημι. 

ἀνεθρέψατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of dvarpépax 
ἀνείλετο (-aro, Alex.), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναιρέω. 
ἀνεῖλον (-are, -av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. of dvatpéo. 
ἀνειχόμην, impf. mid. of dvéxo. 

ἀνελεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvatpéo. 

ἀνελεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀναιρέω. 

ἀνέλωσι, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ἀναιρέω. 
ἀνενέγκαι, -kas, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of ἀναφέρω. 
ἀνενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀναφέρω. 

ἀνέντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ἀνίημι. 
ἀνέξομαι, fut. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἀνέπεσον (-cav, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀναπίπτω. 
ἀνέσεισα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνασείω. 

ἀνεστράφημεν, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of ἀναστρέφω. 
ἀνεσχόμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἀνέτειλα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνατέλλω. 

ἀνετράφη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατρέφω. 
ἀνεῦρον (-av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνευρίσκω. 
ἀνέῳγα, 2 pf. act. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνεῳγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνεῳγότα, 2 pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of ἀνοίγω. 
ἀνέῳξα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνεῳχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνήγαγον, 2 aor. act. of ἀνάγω. 

ἀνήγγειλα, 1 aor. act. of ἀναγγέλλω. 

ἀνηγγέλην, 2 aor. pass. of ἀναγγέλλω. 

ἀνήνεγκεν, 1 or 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναφέρω. 
ἀνῃρέθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀναιρέω. 

ἀνήφθη. 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνάπτω. 

ἀνήχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀνάγω. 

ἀνθέξεται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀντέχω. 

ἀνθέστηκε. pf. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνθίστημι. 
ἀνθίστανται, pres. mid. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνθίστημι. 
ἀνθίστατο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνθίστημι. 


Forms or VERBS. 


ἀνιέντες, pres. act. ptep. nom, plur. masc. of ἀνίημι. 

ἀνοιγήσεται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοιγῶσιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοῖξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοίξῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἄνοιξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοίσω, fut. act. of ἀναφέρω. 

ἀνοιχθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοιχθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνταποδοῦναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀνταποδίδωμι. 

ἀνταποδώσω, fut. act. of ἀνταποδίδωμι. 

ἀντέστην, 2 aor. act. of ἀνθίστημι. 

ἀντιστῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀνθίστημι. 

ἀντίστητε, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἀνθίστημι. 

ἀνῶ, 2 aor. act. subj. of ἀνίημι. 

ἀπαλλάξῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπαλλάσσω. 

ἀπαρθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπαίρω. 

ἀπαρνησάσθω, 1 aor. mid. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπαρνέομαι. 

ἀπαρνήσῃ, fut. 2 pers. sing. of ἀπαρνέομαι. 

ἀπατάτω, pres. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of dzardo. 

ἀπατηθεῖσα, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of ἀπατάω. 

ἀπέβησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dzofatvo. 

ἀπέδειξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδείκνυμι. 

ἀπέδετο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπεδίδοσαν, ἀπεδίδουν, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέδοτο, -δοσθε, etc., 2 aor. mid. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέδωκεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέθανεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποθνήσκω. 

ἀπειπάμεθα, 1 aor. mid. 1 pers. plur. of ἀπεῖπον. 

ἀπεῖχον, impf. act. of ἀπέχω. 

ἀπεκατεστάθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀποκαθίστημι. 

ἀπεκατέστην, 2 aor. act. of ἀποκαθίστημι. 

ἀπεκρίθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀποκρίνω. 

ἀπεκτάνθην, 1 aor. pass. of dzokretvo. 

ἀπεληλύθεισαν, plpf, 3 pers. plur. of ἀπέρχομαι. 

ἀπελθών, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀπέρχομαι. 

ἀπενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of azodépo. 

ἀπενεχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἀποφέρω. 

ἀπεπνίγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποπνίγω. 

ἀπέπνιξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀποπνίγω. 

ἀπεστάλην, 2 aor. pass. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπέσταλκα, pf. act. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπεσταλμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπέστειλα, 1 aor. act. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπέστη (-ησαν), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ἀφί- 
στημι. 

ἀπεστράφησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. οὗ ἀποστρέφω. 

ἀπετάξατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποτάσσω. 

ἀπήεσαν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ἄπειμι. 

ἀπήλασεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dzreAaóvo. 

ἀπηλγηκότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ἀπαλγέω. 

ἀπῆλθον (-θαν, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. of ἀπέρχομαι. 

ἀπηλλάχθαι, pf. pass. inf. of ἀπαλλάσσω. 

ἀπηρνησάμην, 1 aor. of ἀπαρνέομαι. 

ἀπησπασάμην, 1 aor. of ἀπασπάζομαι. 

ἀποβάντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀποβαίνω. 

ἀποβήσεται, fut. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποβαίνω. 

ἀποδεδειγμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of ἀποδείκνυμι. 





112 


Forms or VERBs. 


ἀποδεικνύντα (-Seyviovra), pres. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc. 
of ἀποδείκνυμι. 

ἀποδεῖξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἀποδείκνυμι. , 

ἀποδιδόναι, -δότω, pres. act. inf. and impv. (3 pers. sing.) 
of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδιδοῦν, pres. act. ptep. neut. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδοθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

robot, -δῷ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπόδος, -Sore, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδοῦναι, -δούς, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδῴη, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποθανεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀποθνήσκω. 

ἀποκαθιστᾷ, -τάνει, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποκαθίστημι. 

ἀποκατηλλάγητε, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἀποκαταὰ- 
λάσσω. 

ἀποκριθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of ἀποκρίνω. 

ἀποκταίνω, -κτείνω, -κτέννω, -κτένω, pres.; see ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀποκτανθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. οἵ ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀποκτέννυντες, pres. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀποκτενῶ, fut. act. of ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀπολέσαι, -λέσω, 1 aor. act. inf. and subj. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπολέσω, fut. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπολοῦμαι, fut. mid. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπολῶ, fut. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπόλωλα, 2 pf. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπο(ρ)ρίψαντας, 1 aor. act. ptep. aec. plur. masc. of 
ἀπο(ρ)ρίπτω. 

ἀποσταλῶ, 2 aor. pass. subj. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀποστείλας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀποστῇ; 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀποστήσομαι, fut. mid. of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀπόστητε (-στήτω), 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (3 pers. 
sing.) of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀποστραφῇς, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of ἀποστρέφω. 

ἀπόστρεψον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἀποστρέφω. 

ἀποταξάμενος, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of ἀποτάσσω. 

ἅπτου, pres. mid. impv. of ἅπτω. 

ἀπώλεσα, 1 aor. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπωλόμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀπύλλυμι. ᾿ 

ἀπωσάμενος, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of ἀπωθέω. 

ἄραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of αἴρω. 

ἄρας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of αἴρω. 

ἀρέσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἀρέσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἄρῃ; 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of αἴρω. 

ἀρθῇ (-θῶσιν), 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of 
αἴρω. 

ἀρθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of αἴρω. 

ἄρθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of αἴρω. 

ἀρκέσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀρκέω. 

ἄρον, 1 aor. act. impv. of αἴρω. 

ἁρπαγέντα, 2 aor. pass. ptep. acc. sing. masc. of ἁρπάζω. 

ἀρῶ (-otcwv), fut. act. 1 pers. sing. (3 pers. plur.) of atpo. 

αὐξηθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of αὐξάνω. 

ἀφέθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφεῖλεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφαιρέω. 

ἀφεῖναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀφίημι. 

deis, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of (ἀφέω) ἀφίημι. 


Forms or VERBS. 


ἀφείς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφελεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφαιρέω. 

ἀφελεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀφαιρέω. 

ἀφέλῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφαιρέω. 

ἄφες, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφέωνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφῇ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφῆκα, 1 aor. act. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφίεμεν, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφίενται, -ovrat, pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφίκετο, 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφικνέομαι. 

ἀφίομεν, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of (ἀφίω) ἀφίημι. 

ἀφιοῦσιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of (ἀφιέω) ἀφίημι. 

ἀφίστασο, pres. mid. impv. of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀφίστατο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀφοριεῖ, -οῦσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. and plur. of ἀφο- 
ρίζω. 

ἀφῶμεν, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφωμοιωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀφομοιόω. 

ἀχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἄγω. 

ἀχθήσεσθε, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἄγω. 

ἅψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἅπτω. 

ἅψῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἅπτω. 


βαλῶ, fut. act. of βάλλω. 

βάλω, -λῃ, (-Ac), 2 aor. act. subj. (impv.) of βάλλω. 
βαρείσθω, pres. impv. pass. 3 pers. sing. of βαρέω. 
βάψῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Barro. 
βεβαμμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of Barro. 
βέβληκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of βάλλω. 
βεβλημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of βάλλω. 

βέβληται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of βάλλω. 

βληθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of βάλλω. 

βλήθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of βάλλω. 


γαμησάτωσαν, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. plur. of γαμέω. 
γεγένημαι, pf. pass. of γίνομαι. 

γεγέννημαι, pf. pass. of yevváo. 

γέγοναν (-vós), 2 pf. act. 3 pers. plur. (ptep.) of γίνομαι. 
γεγόνει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. (without augm.) of γίνομαι. 
γενάμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. (Tdf. ed. 7) of γίνομαι. 
γενέσθω, 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. of γίνομαι. 

γενηθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of γίνομαι. 
γένησθε, 2 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of γίνομαι. 
γένωνται, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of γίνομαι. 
γήμας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of γαμέω. 

yarns, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of yapéo. 

yvot, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 

γνούς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of γινώσκω. 

γνῶ, γνῷ, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 
γνῶθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of γινώσκω. 

yoptotow, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of γνωρίζω. 
γνωσθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 
γνωσθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 
γνώσομαι, fut. of γινώσκω. 

yore, 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 


118 


Forms OF VERBS. 


δαρήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of δέρω. 

δέδεκται, pf. 3 pers. sing. of δέχομαι. 

δεδεκώς, pf. act. ptep. of δέω. 

δέδεμαι, pf. pass. of δέω. 

δεδιωγμένος, pf. pass. ptcp. of διώκω. 

δέδοται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 

δεδώκεισαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of δίδωμι. 

δέῃ, pres. subj. of impers. δεῖ. 

δεθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of δέω. 

Selpavres, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of δέρω. 

δέξαι, 1 aor. impv. of δέχομαι. 

δέξηται (τωνται), 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of δέχομαι- 

δῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of δέω. 

δήσῃ; 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δέω. 

διαβάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of διαβαίνω. 

διαβῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of διαβαίνω. 

διάδος, 2 aor. act. impv. of διαδίδωμι. 

διακαθᾶραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of διακαθαίρω. 

διαλλάγηθι, 2 aor. pass. impv. of διαλλάσσω. 

διαμείνῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of διαμένω. 

διαμεμενηκότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of διαμένω- 

Stapévets, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of διαμένω. 

Siapevets, fut. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of διαμένω. 

διανοίχθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of διανοίγω. 

διαρ(ρ)ήξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of διαρρήγνυμι. 

διασπαρέντες, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of δια- 
σπείρω. 

διασπασθῇ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of διασπάω. 

διαστάσης, 2 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of διίστημι.- 

διαστρέψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of διαστρέφω. 

Siarayels, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of διατάσσω. 

διαταχθέντα, 1 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of διατάσσω- 

διατεταγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of διατάσσω. 

διατεταχέναι, pf. act. inf. of διατάσσω. 

διδόασι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of δίδωμι. 

διέβησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of διαβαίνω. 

διεῖλον, 2 aor. act. of διαιρέω. 

διενέγκῃ, 1 or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of διαφέρω. 

διερ(ρ)ήγνυτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of διαρρήγνυμι. 

διέρ(ρ)ηξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of διαρρήγνυμι. 

διερ(ρ)ήσσετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of διαρρήγνυμι- 

διεσάφησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of διασαφέω. 

διεσπάρησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of διασπεέρω. 

Suec mrág Oat, pf. pass. inf. of διασπάω. 

διεστειλάμην, 1 aor. mid. of διαστέλλω. 

διέστη, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of διΐστημι. 

διεστραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of διαστρέφω. 

διέταξα, 1 aor. act. of διατάσσω. 

διεφθάρην, 2 aor. pass. of διαφθείρω. 

διεφθαρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of διαφθείρω. 

διηκόνουν, impf. act. of διακονέω. 

διήνοιγεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. Of διανοίγω. 

διήνοιξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of διανοίγω. 

διηνοίχθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of διανοίγω. 

διορυγῆναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of διορύσσω. 

διορυχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of διορύσσω. 

διώδενε, impf. 3 pers. sing. of διοδεύω. 

διωξάτω, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of διώκω. 


Forms OF VERBS. 


διώξητε, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of διώκω. 
διωχθήσονται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of διώκω. 
δοθεῖσαν, 1 aor. pass. ptep. ace. sing. fem. of δίδωμε. 
δοθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 
δοθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of δίδωμι. 

Sot, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 

δός, δότε, δότω, 2 aor. act. impy. of δίδωμι. 
δοῦναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of δίδωμι. 

δούς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of δίδωμι. 

δύνῃ, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of δύναμαι. 

$6, δώῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 
ϑῴη, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 


Sópev, δῶτε, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 2 pers. plur. of δίδωμι. 
δώσῃ (-copev), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. (1 pers. 


plur.) of δίδωμι. 


ἔβαλον (-av, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. of βάλλω. 
ἐβάσκανε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of βασκαίνω. 
ἐβδελυγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of βδελύσσω. 
ἐβέβλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of βάλλω. 
ἐβλήθην, 1 aor. pass. of βάλλω. 

ἐγγιεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγγίζω. 
ἐγγίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγγίζω. 

ἐγεγόνει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of γίνομαι. 
ἔγειραι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἐγείρω. 

ἐγεῖραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγείρω. 

éyelpov, pres. pass. impv. of ἐγείρω. 

ἐγενήθην, 1 aor. pass. of γίνομαι. 

ἐγεννήθην, 1 aor. pass. of γεννάω. 

ἐγερεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγείρω. 

ἐγερθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of ἐγείρω. 
ἐγερθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγείρω. 
ἐγέρθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of ἐγείρω. 
ἐγήγερμαι, pf. pass. of ἐγείρω. 

€ynpa, 1 aor. act. of γαμέω. 

ἐγκρῖναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγκρίνω. 


ἔγνωκαν (i. q. ἐγνώκασιν), pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of γινώσκω. 


ἐγνωκέναι, pf. act. inf. of γινώσκω. 

ἔγνων, 2 aor. act. of γινώσκω. 

ἔγνωσται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 
ἔγχρισαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἐγχρίω. 

ἐγχρῖσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγχρίω. 

ἔγχρισον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἐγχρίω. 

ἐδαφιοῦσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of ἐδαφίζω. 
ἐδέετο, ἐδεεῖτο, ἐδεῖτο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of δέομαι. 
ἔδει, impf. of impers. δεῖ. 

ἔδειραν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of δέρω. 

ἔδησα, 1 aor. act. of δέω. 

ἐδίωξα, 1 aor. act. of διώκω. 

ἐδολιοῦσαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of δολιόω. 
ἔδραμον, 2 aor. act. of τρέχω. 

ἔδυ, ἔδυσεν, 2 and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of δύνω. 
ἔζην. ἐζῆτε, ἔζων, impf. act. of ζάω. 

ἔζησα, 1 aor. act. of ζάω. 

ἐθέμην, 2 aor. mid. of τίθημι. 

ἔθετο (-evro), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of τίθημι. 
ἔθηκα, 1 aor. act. of τίθημι. f 


714 


Forms oF VERBS. 


ἔθου, 2 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of τίθημι. 

ἔθρεψα, 1 aor. act. of τρέφω. 

ἐθύθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θύω. 

ela, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐάω. 

εἴασα, 1 aor. act. of ἐάω. 

εἶδα, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of εἴδω. 

εἰθισμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of ἐθίζω. 

εἵλατο (-ero), aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of αἱρέω. 
εἴληπται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of λαμβάνω. 

εἴληφες (-6as), pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of λαμβάνω. 
εἴλκον, impf. act. of ἕλκω. 

εἱλκωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἑλκόω. 

εἴξαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of εἴκω. 

εἰσδραμοῦσα, 2 aor. act. ptep. fem. of εἰστρέχω. 
εἰσελήλυθαν (-λύθασιν), pf. 3 pers. plur. of εἰσέρχομαι. 
eloqet, impf. 3 pers. sing. of εἴσειμι. 

εἰσίασιν, pres. ind. 3 pers. plur. of εἴσειμι. 
εἱστήκεισαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἵστημι- 

εἶχαν. εἴχοσαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of ἔχω. 
εἴων, impf. of eda. 

ἐκαθέ(ον d)pirev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω. 
éxaGe(or α)ρίσθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω. 
ἐκδόσεται, -δώσεται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκδίδωμε. 
ἐκέκραξα and ἔκραξα, 1 aor. act. of κράζω. 

éxépaca, 1 aor. act. of κεράννυμι. 

ἐκέρδησα, 1 aor. act. of κερδαίνω. 

ἐκκαθάρατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐκκαθαίρω. 
ἐκκαθάρῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκκαθαίρω. 
éxkexupevos, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐκχέω. 

ἐκκοπήσῃ; 2 fut. pass. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκκόπτω. 
ἔκκοψον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἐκκόπτω. 

ἔκλασα, 1 aor. act. of κλάω. 

ἔκλαυσα, 1 aor. act. of κλαίω. 

ἐκλέλησθε, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of ἐκλανθάνω. 
ἐκλήθην, 1 aor. pass. of καλέω. 

ἐκόψασθε, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. plur. of κόπτω. 
ἐκπλεῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐκπλέω. 

ἔκραξα, 1 aor. act. of κράζω. 

ἐκρύβη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κρύπτω. 

ἐκσῶσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐκσώζω. 

ἐκτενεῖς, fut. act. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκτείνω. 

ἐκτησάμην, 1 aor. of κτάομαι. 

ἔκτισται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κτίζω. 

ἐκτραπῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ékrpézo. 
ἐκτραπήσονται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκτρέπω. 
ἐκφύῃ, pres. subj. or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκφύω. 
ἐκφυῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκφύω. 
ἐκχέαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐκχέω. 

éxxéare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐκχέω. 
ἐκχέετε, pres. (or 2 aor.) act. impy. 2 pers. plur. of ἐκχέω. 
ἐκχυννόμενος, ἐκχυνόμενος, see ἐκχέω. 

ἐλάβατε (-βετε), 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of λαμβάνω. 
ἐλάκησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of λάσκω. 

ἔλαχε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of λαγχάνω. 

ἐλέησον, 1 aor. act. impy. of ἐλεέω. 

ἐλεύσομαι, fut. of ἔρχομαι. 

ἐληλακότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ἐλαύνω. 
ἐλήλυθα, pf. of ἔρχομαι. 


Forms or VERBS. 


ἐλιθάσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of λιθάζω. 
ἑλκύσαι or ἑλκῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἕλκω. 

ἐλλογᾶτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐλλογέω. 
ἑλόμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of aipew. 

ἐλπιοῦσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of ἐλπίζω. 

ἔμαθον. 2 aor. act. of μανθάνω. 

ἐμασσῶντο, ἐμασῶντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of μασ(σ)άομαι. 
ἐμβάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἐμβαίνω. 

ἐμβάψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἐμβάπτω. 

ἐμβῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἐμβαίνω. 

ἔμιξε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μίγνυμι. 
ἐμπεπλησμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐμπίπλημι. 

ἐμπλακείς, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of ἐμπλήσσω. 

ἐμπλησθῶ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing. of ἐμπίπλημι. 
ἐνεδυναμοῦτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐνδυναμόω. 
ἐνεῖχεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐνέχω. 

évévevov, impf. act. of ἐννεύω. 

ἐνέπλησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐμπίπλημι. 
ἐνεπλήσθησαν. 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐμπίπλημι. 
ἐνέπρησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐμπρήθω. 


ἐνέπτυον, -σαν, impf. and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐμπτύω. 


ἐνεστηκότα, pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc. of ἐνίστημι. 


ἐνεστῶτα, -ὥσαν, -ῶτος, pf. act. ptep. acc. masc. and fem. 


and gen. sing. of ἐνίστημι. 
ἐνετειλάμην, 1 aor. mid. of ἐντέλλω. 
ἐνεφάνισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐμφανίζω. 
ἐνεφύσησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐμφυσάω. 
ἐνεχθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of φέρω. 
ἐνήργηκα, pf. act. of évepyéo. 
évkpivat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγκρίνω. 
ἐνοικοῦν, pres. act. ptep. nom. sing. neut. of ἐνοικέω. 
ἐντελεῖται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐντέλλω. 
ἐντέταλται, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐντέλλω. 
ἐντραπῇ. 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐντρέπω. 
ἐντραπήσονται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐντρέπω. 
ἔνυξε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ricco. 
ἐνύσταξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of νυστάζω. 
ἐνῴκησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐνοικέω. 
ἐξαλ(ε)ιφθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἐξαλείφω. 
ἐξαναστήσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξανίστημι. 
ἐξανέστησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐξανίστημι. 
ἐξάρατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐξαίρω. 
ἐξαρεῖτε, fut. act. 2 pers. plur. of ἐξαίρω. 
ἐξαρθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξαίρω. 
ἐξέδετο or ἐξέδοτο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκδίδωμι. 
ἐξείλατο or ἐξείλετο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξαιρέω. 
ἐξεκαύθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκκαίω. 
ἐξέκλιναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκκλίνω. 
ἐξεκόπης, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκκόπτω. 
ἔξελε, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἐξαιρέω. 
ἐξελέξω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκλέγω. 
ἐξέληται, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξαιρέω. 


ἐξενέγκαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ἐκφέρω. 


ἐξενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἐκῴερω. 

ἐξένευσα, 1 aor. act. either of ἐκνεύω or ἐκνέω. 
ἐξεπέτασα, 1 aor. act. of ἐκπετάννυμι. 

ἐξεπλάγησαν. 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκπλήσσω. 
ἐξέπλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκπλέω. 


715 


Forms or VERBS. 


ἐξεστακέναι, pf. act. inf. of ἐξίστημι. 

ἐξέστραπται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκστρέφω. 

ἐξετάσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐξετάζω. 

ἐξετράπησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκτρέπω. 

ἐξέχεε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκχέω. 

ἐξεχύθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκχέω. 

ἐξέωσεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξωθέω. 

ἐξήεσαν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ἔξειμι. 

ἐξηραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of Enpaive. 

ἐξήρανα and -ράνθην, 1 aor. act. and pass. of ξηραίνω. 

ἐξήρανται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of £npatvo. 

ἐξηρεύνησα, 1 aor. act. of é£epevváo. 

ἐξηρτισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐξαρτίζω. 

ἐξήχηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξηχέω. 

ἐξιέναι, pres. inf. of ἔξειμι. 

ἐξιστάνων, ἐξιστῶν, see ἐξίστημι. 

ἐξοίσουσι, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. οὗ ἐκφέρω. 

ἐξῶσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐξωθέω. 

ἔξωσεν or ἐξῶσεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξωθέω. 

ἑόρακα, pf. act. of ὁράω. 

ἐπαγαγεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἐπάγω. 

ἔπαθεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of πάσχω. 

ἐπαναπαήσομαι, fut. mid. of ἐπαναπαύω (see παύω). 

ἔπάξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἐπάγω. 

ἐπάρας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπειράσω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of πειράζω. 

ἐπειρᾶτο (-ρῶντο), impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of πειράω. 

ἔπεισα, 1 aor. act. of πείθω. 

ἐπείσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πείθω. 

ἐπεῖχεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπέχω. 

ἐπέκειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐπικέλλω. 

ἐπεκέκλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπικαλέω. 

ἐπελάθετο (-Sovro), 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ἐπιλαν- 
θάνομαι. 

ἐπέλειχον, impf. act. of ἐπιλείχω. 

ἐπεποίθει, 2 plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of πείθω. 

ἔπεσα, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of πίπτω. 

ἐπέστησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἐπέσχεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπέχω. 

ἐπετίμα, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιτιμάω. 

ἐπετράπη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιτρέπω. 

ἐπεφάνη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιφαίνω. 

ἐπέχρισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιχρίω. 

ἐπηκροῶντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ἐπακροάομαι. 

ἐπήνεσεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπαινέω. 

ἔπηξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of πήγνυμι. 

ἐπῆρα. 1 aor. act. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπήρθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπῆρκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπῃσχύνθην and ἐπαισχύνθην. 1 aor. of ἐπαισχύνομαι. 

ἐπίβλεψαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἐπιβλέπω. 

ἐπιβλέψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐπιβλέπω. 

ἐπίβλεψον. 1 aor. act. impv. of em Sera. 

ἔπιδε, impv. of ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐπίθες, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἐπιτίθημι. 

ἐπικέκλησαι, pf. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ἐπικαλέω. 

ἐπικέκλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπικαλέω. 

ἐπικληθέντα, 1 aor. pass. ptep. acc. sing. masc. of ἐπικαλέω. 


Forms OF VERBS. 


ἐπικράνθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πικραίνω. 

ἐπιλελησμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐπιλανθάνομαι. 

ἐπιμελήθητι, 1 aor. pass. impy. of ἐπιμελέομαι. 

ἔπιον, 2 aor. act. of πίνω. 

ἐπιπλήξῃς, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of ἐπιπλήσσω. 

ἐπιποθήσατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐπιποθέω. 

ἐπιστᾶσα, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἐπίσταται, pres. ind. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἐπίσταται, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπίσταμαι. 

ἐπίστηθι, 2 aor. act, impv. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἐπιστώθης, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of πιστόω. 

ἐπιτεθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιτίθημι. 

ἐπιτιθέασι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐπιτίθημι. 

ἐπιτίθει, pres. act. impv. of ἐπιτίθημι. 

ἐπιτιμῆσαι (-μήσαι), 1 aor. act. inf. (opt. 3 pers. sing.) 
of ἐπιτιμάω. 

ἐπιφᾶναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐπιφαίνω. 

ἐπλανήθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πλανάω. 

ἐπλάσθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πλάσσω. 

ἐπλήγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πλήσσω. 

ἔπλησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πίμπλημε. 

ἐπλήσθη (-θησαν), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of 
πίμπλημι. 

ἐπλουτήσατε, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of πλουτέω. 

ἐπλουτίσθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of πλουτίζω. 

ἔπλυναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πλύνω. 

ἔπνευσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πνέω. 

ἐπνίγοντο, impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πνίγω. 

ἔπνιξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πνίγω. 

ἐπράθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πιπράσκω. 

ἐπρίσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πρίζω. 

ἐπροφήτευον (-ca), impf. (1 aor.) act. of προφητεύω. 

ἔπτυσε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of πτύω. 

ἐπώκειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐποκέλλω. 

ἐρ(ρ)άντισε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of partite. 

ἐρ(ρ)άπισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ῥαπίζω. 

ἐρριζωμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ῥιζόω. 

ἐρ(ρ)ιμμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of fízro. 

ἔρίρ)ιπται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ῥίπτω. 

€p(p)upay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ῥίπτω. 

ἐρ(ρ)ύσατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ῥύομαι. 

ἐρ(ρ)ύσθην, 1 aor. pass. of ῥύομαι. 

ἔρρωσο, ἔρρωσθε, pf. pass. impv. of ῥώννυμι. 

ἐσάλπισε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of σαλπίζω. 

ἔσβεσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of σβέννυμι. 

ἐσείσθην, 1 aor. pass. of σείω. 

ἐσκυλμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of σκύλλω. 

ἐσπαρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σπείρω. 

ἐστάθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἵστημι. 

ἑστάναι, ἑστᾶναι, pf. act. inf. of ἵστημι. 

ἑστήκεισαν, -kerav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἵστημι. 

ἔστηκεν, impf. 3 pers. sing. of στήκω. 

ἑστηκώς, pf. act. ptep. of ἵστημι. 

ἔστην, % aor. act. of ἵστημι. 

ἐστηριγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of στηρίζω. 

ἐστήρικται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of στηρίζω. 

ἑστός (-ós), pf. act. ptep. neut. (masc, and neut ) of ἵστημι. 

ἐστράφησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of στρέφω. 


716 


Forms or VERBS. 


ἐστρωμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of στρωννύω. 
ἔστρωσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of στρωννύω. 
ἔστωσαν, impy. 3 pers. plur. of εἰμί. 

ἐσφαγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σφάζω. 
ἐσφραγισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σφραγίζω. 
ἔσχηκα, pf. act. of ἔχω. 

ἐσχηκότα, pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of ἔχω. 
ἔσχον, 2 aor. act. of ἔχω. 

ἐτάφη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θάπτω. 
ἐτέθην, 1 aor. pass. of τίθημι. 

ἐτεθνήκει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of θνήσκω. 
ἔτεκεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers, sing. of τίκτω. 

ἐτέχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of τίκτω. 

ἐτίθει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of τίθημι. 

ἐτύθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θύω. 
εὐηρεστηκέναι (εὐαρεστηκέναι), pf. act. inf. of εὐαρεστέω. 
εὐξάμην (εὐξαίμην). 1 aor. (opt.) of εὔχομαι. 
εὕραμεν, evpav, ( Alex.) 2 aor. act. of εὑρίσκω. 
εὑράμενος and εὑρόμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of εὑρίσκω. 
εὑρεθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of εὑρίσκω. 
εὑρηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of εὑρίσκω. 

εὐφράνθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of εὐφραίνω. 
ἔφαγον, 2 aor. act. of ἐσθίω. 

ἐφαλλόμενος, ἐφαλόμενος, 2 aor. ptep. of ἐφάλλομαι. 
ἐφάνην, 2 aor. pass. of daive. 

ἔφασκεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of φάσκω. 
ἐφείσατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of φείδομαι. 
ἐφεστώς, pf. act. ptep. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἔφθακα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of φθάνω. 
ἐφθάρην, 2 aor. pass. of φθείρω. 

ἔφιδε (ἔπιδε), impv. of ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐφίλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of φιλέω. 
ἐφίσταται, pres. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐφίστημι. 
ἔφραξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of φράσσω. 
ἐφρύαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of φρυάσσω. 
ἔφυγον, 2 aor. act. of φεύγω. 

ἐχάρην, 2 aor. pass. (as act.) of χαίρω. 

ἔχρισα. 1 aor. act. of xpio. 

ἐχρῶντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of χράομαι. 

ἐψεύσω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ψεύδομαι. 
ἑώρακαν, -ράκασιν, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ὁράω. 
ἑωράκει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὁράω. 
ἑωρακώς, pf. act. ptep. of ὁράω. 

ἑώρων, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ὁράω. 


{Révvure, pres. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (Tdf.) of σβέννυμι. 
tq, tiv or tiv, tis, ζῶ, see Caw. 

ζῶσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ζώννυμι. 

ζώσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ζώννυμι. 


ἠβουλήθην, etc., see βούλομαι. 

ἤγαγον, 2 aor. act. of ἄγω. 

ἠγάπα, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀγαπάω. 
ἠγαπηκόσι, pf. act. ptep. dat. plur. of ἀγαπάω. 
ἤγγειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀγγέλλω. 
ἤγγικα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of ἐγγίζω. 


Forms or VERBS. 


ἤγειρεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγείρω. 
ἠγέρθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἐγείρω. 


ἤγετο (-yovro), impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ἄγω. 


ἥγημαι, pf. of ἡγέομαι. 

ἡγνικότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ἁγνίζω. 
ἡγνισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἁγνίζω. 

ἠγνόουν, impf. act. of ἀγνοέω. 

ἤδεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of οἶδα (see ida, II.). 
ἠδύνατο (ἐδύνατο), impf. 3 pers. sing. of δύναμαι. 
ἠδυνήθη, ἠδυνάσθη, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of δύναμαι. 
ἤθελον, impf. of θέλω. 

ἥκασι, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἥκω. 
ἠκολουθήκαμεν, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of ἀκολουθέω. 
ἥλατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of ἅλλομαι. 
ἠλαττωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐλαττόω. 
ἠλαύνετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐλαύνω. 
ἠλεήθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἐλεέω. 

ἠλεημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐλεέω. 

ἠλέησα, 1 aor. act. of ἐλεέω. 

ἤλειψα, 1 aor. act. of ἀλείφω. 

ἡλκωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἑλκόω. 

ἤλλαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀλλάσσω. 
ἥλλετο, impf, 3 pers. sing. of ἅλλομαι. 

ama, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of ἐλπίζω. 
“ἡμάρτηκα, pf. act. of ἁμαρτάνω. 

“ἥμαρτον, 2 aor. act. of ἁμαρτάνω. 

ἤμεθα, ἦμεν, impf. 1 pers. plur. of εἰμί. 

ἤμελλον and ἔμελλον, impf. of μέλλω. 

ἤμην, impf. of εἰμί. 

ἠμφιεσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀμφιέννυμι. 
ἤνεγκα, 1 aor. act. of φέρω. 

ἠνειχόμην, impf. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἠνεσχόμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἠνέχθην, 1 aor. pass. of φέρω. 

ajveeypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἠνέῳξα (ἠνέωξα Tr ?), 1 aor. act. of ἀνοίγω. 
ἠνεῴχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἠνοίγην, 2 aor. pass. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἠνοιγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἤνοιξα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἠνοίχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀνοίγω. 

“ἕξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἥκω. 

“ἥξῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἥκω. 

ἠξίου, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of a£ióo. 

ἠξίωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of d£ióo. 
ἠπατήθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπατάω. 
ἠπείθησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀπειθέω. 
“ἠπείθουν, impf. act. of ἀπειθέω. 

ἠπείλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπειλέω. 
ἠπίστουν, impf. act. of ἀπιστέω. 

ἠπόρει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dzopéo. 
ἥπτοντο, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of ἅπτω. 

ἦρα, 1 aor. act. of αἴρω. 


ἠρ-(εἰρ-)γγαζόμην, -σάμην, impf. and 1 aor. of ἐργάζομαι. 


“ἠρέθισα, 1 aor. act. of ἐρεθίζω. 

ἤρεσα, 1 aor. act. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἤρεσκον, impf. act. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἠρημώθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐρημόω. 


{|| 





ἠρημωμένην, pf. pass. ptep. ace. sing. fem. of ἐρημόω. 
ἤρθην, 1 aor. pass. of αἴρω. 

vjpkev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of αἴρω. 

ἠρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of αἴρω. 

ἠρνεῖτο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ἀρνέομαι. 

ἤρνημαι, pf. pass. of ἀρνέομαι. 

ἠρνημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀρνέομαι. 
ἠρνησάμην, 1 aor. of ἀρνέομαι. 

ἠρνήσω, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of ἀρνέομαι. 
ἠρξάμην, 1 aor. mid. of ἄρχω. 

ἡρπάγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἁρπάζω. 
ἥρπασε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἅρπάζω. 
ἡρπάσθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἁρπάζω. 
ἠρτυμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of dpria. 

ἤρχοντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ἔρχομαι. 

ἠρώτουν, ἠρώτων, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. οἵ ἐρωτάω. 
ἧς, ἦσθα, impf. 2 pers. sing. of εἰμί. 

ἤσθιον, impf. act. of ἐσθίω. 

ἡσσώθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἡττάω. 
ἠτήκαμεν, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of airéo. 

ἤτησα, -σάμην, 1 aor. act. and mid. of αἰτέω. 
ἠτίμασα, 1 aor. act. of ἀτιμάζω. 

ἠτίμησα, 1 aor. act. of ἀτιμάω. 

ἠτιμωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀτιμόω. 

ἡτοίμακα, pf. act. of ἑτοιμάζω. 

ἠτοῦντο, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of airéw. 
ἡττήθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἡττάω. 
ἥττηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἡττάω. 

ἤτω, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of εἰμί. 

ηὐδόκησα, 1 aor. act. of εὐδοκέω. 

ηὐδοκοῦμεν, impf. act. 1 pers. plur. of εὐδοκέω. 
ηὐκαίρουν, impf. of εὐκαιρέω. 

ηὐλήσαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of αὐλέω. 
ηὐλόγει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of εὐλογέω. 
ηὐλόγηκα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of εὐλογέω. 
ηὔξησα, 1 aor. act. of αὔξανω. 

ηὐπορεῖτο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of εὐπορέω. 
ηὑρίσκετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of εὑρίσκω. 
ηὕρισκον, impf. act. of εὑρίσκω. 

ηὐφόρησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of εὐφορέω. 
ηὐφράνθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of εὐφραίνω. 
ηὐχαρίστησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of εὐχαριστέω. 
ηὐχόμην, impf. of εὔχομαι. 

ἤφιε, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφίημι (aia). 
ἤχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἄγω. 

ἠχρειώθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀχρειόω. 
ἡψάμην, 1 aor. mid. of ἅπτω. 


θάψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of θάπτω. 

θεῖναι, θείς. 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of τίθημι. 
θέμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of τίθημι. 

θέντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of τίθημι. 
θέσθε, 2 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 
θέτε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 


θίγῃς. θίγῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 and 3 pers. sing. of Ory 


yavo. 
θῶ, 2 aor. act. subj. of τίθημι. 


Forms or VERBS. 


Forms or VERBs. 


ἰάθη (-θῇ), 1 aor. pass. ind. (subj.) 3 pers. sing. of ἰάομαι. 
tarat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of idopat. 

ldrat, pres. 3 pers. sing. of ἰάομαι. 

ἰῶτο, impf. 3 pers. sing. idopat. 

ἴδαν, ἴδον, collat. forms of εἶδον. 

ἴσασι, 3 pers. plur. of the 2 pf. οἶδα (see εἴδω, II.). 
ἴσθι, impv. 2 pers. sing. of εἰμί. 

ἱστάνομεν and ἱστῶμεν, pres. ind. 1 pers. plur. of ἵστημι. 
ἴστε, 2 pers. plur. ind. or impv. of οἶδα (see εἴδω, 11.). 
ἱστήκειν, plpf. act. of ἵστημι. 

ἰώμενος, pres. ptep. of ἰάομαι. 


καθαριεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω. 
καθαρίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of καθαρίζω. 
καθαρίσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω. 
καθαρίσθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of καθαρίζω. 
καθεῖλε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of καθαιρέω. 
καθελῶ, fut. act. of καθαιρέω. 
κάθῃ, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of κάθημαι. 
καθῆκαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of καθίημι. 
καθήσεσθε, fut. 2 pers. plur. of κάθημαι. 
καθῆψε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers, sing. of καθάπτω. 
κάθου, pres. impv. of κάθημαι. 
καλέσαι, 1 aor, act. inf. of καλέω. 
κάλεσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of καλέω. 
κάμητε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of κάμνω. 
κατάβα and κατάβηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of καταβαίνω. 
καταβάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of καταβαίνω. 
καταβέβηκα, pf. act. of karaBatvo. 
καταβῇ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of karagatvo. 
κατακαήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of karakato. 
κατακαῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of karakato. 
κατακαυχῶ, pres. impv. of κατακαυχάομαι. 
καταλάβῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καταλαμβάνω. 
καταπίῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καταπίνω. 
καταποθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καταπίνω. 
καταρτίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. or opt. (3 pers. sing.) of xa- 
ταρτίζω. 
κατασκηνοῖν (-νοῦν), pres. act. inf. οἵ κατασκηνόω. 
κατάσχωμεν, 2 aor. act, subj. 1 pers. plur. of κατέχω. 
κατεαγῶσιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κατάγνυμι. 
κατέαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of κατάγνυμι. 
κατεάξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of κατάγνυμι. 
κατέβη (-ησαν), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of καταβαίνω. 
κατεγνωσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταγινώσκω. 
κατειλημμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταλαμβάνω. 
κατειληφέναι, pf. act. inf. of καταλαμβάνω. 
κατεκάη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κατακαίω. 
κατέκλασε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of κατακλάω. 
κατέκλεισα, 1 aor. act. of κατακλείω. 
κατενεχθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of καταφέρω. 
κατενύγησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of κατανύσσω. 
κατεπέστησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of κατεφίστημι. 
κατέπιε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of καταπίνω. 
κατεπόθην, 1 aor. pass. of καταπίνω. 
κατεσκαμμένα, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. neut. of κατα- 
; 
σκάπτω. 


118 


Forms or Verbs. 


κατεστρεμμένος, -στραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταστρέφω. 
κατεστρώθησαν, 1 aor, pass. 3 pers. plur. of καταστρώννυμι. 
κατευθῦναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of κατευθύνω. 

κατευθύναι, 1 aor, act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of κατευθύνω. 
κατέφαγον, 2 aor. act. of κατεσθίω. 

κατήγγειλα, 1 aor, act. of καταγγέλλω. 

κατηγγέλη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of καταγγέλλω. 
κατήνεγκα, 1 aor, act. of καταφέρω. 

κατήντηκα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of καταντάω. 
κατηράσω, 1 aor. 2 pers, sing. of καταράομαι. 
κατήργηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of καταργέω. 
κατηρτισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταρτίζω. 
κατηρτίσω, 1 aor. mid, 2 pers. sing. of καταρτίζω. 
κατῃσχύνθην, 1 aor. pass. of καταισχύνω. 

κατήχηνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of κατηχέω. 
κατηχήσω, 1 aor. act. subj. of κατηχέω. 

κατίωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κατιύω. 

κατῴκισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of κατοικίζω. 
καυθήσωμαι, καυχήσωμαι, see καίω. 

καυχᾶσαι, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of καυχάομαι. 
κεκαθα(οι ε)ρισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καθαρίζω. 
κεκαθαρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καθαίρω. 

κεκαλυμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καλύπτω. 

κεκαυμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καίω. 

κεκερασμένου, pf. pass. ptep. gen. sing. masc. of κεράννυμι. 
κέκλεισμαι, pf. pass. of κλείω. 

κέκληκα, pf. act. of καλέω. 

κέκληται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of καλέω. 

κέκλικεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of κλίνω: 

κέκμηκας, pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of κάμνω. 
κεκορεσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of κορέννυμι. 

κέκραγε. 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of κράζω. 

κεκράξονται, fut. mid. 3 pers. plur. of κράζω. 
κεκρατηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of κρατέω. 

κεκράτηνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of κρατέω. 

κεκρίκει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of κρίνω. 

κέκριμαι, pf. pass. of κρίνω. 

κεκρυμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of κρύπτω. 

κεράσατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of κεράννυμι. 
κερδανῶ, κερδήσω, fut. act. of κερδαίνω. 

κερδάνω, 1 aor. act. subj. of κερδαίνω. 

κεχάρισμαι, pf. of χαρίζομαι. 

κεχαριτωμένη, pf. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of χαριτόω. 
κέχρημαι, pf. of χράομαι. 

κεχωρισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of χωρίζω. 

κηρύξαι (al. κηρῦξαι), 1 aor. act. inf. of κηρύσσω. 
κλάσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of κλάω. 

κλαύσατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of κλαίω. 
κλαύσω, κλαύσομαι, fut. of κλαίω. 

κλεισθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κλείω. 
κληθῇς, κληθῶμεν, κληθῆναι, κληθέν, 1 aor. pass. Of καλέω. 
κλῶμεν, pres. ind. act. 1 pers. plur. of κλάω. 
κλώμενον, pres. pass. ptep. neut. of κλάω. 

κλῶντες, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of «do. 
κοιμώμενος, pres. pass. ptep. of κοιμάω. 

κολλήθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of κολλάω. 

κομιεῖται, (Attic) fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of κομίζω. 
κομίσασα, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of κομίζω. 


Forms or VERBs. 


κορεσθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of κορέννυμι. 
κόψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of κόπτω. 

κρᾶζον (not kpdtov), pres. ptcp. neut. of κράζω. 
κράξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of κράζω. 

κράξουσιν, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of κράζω. 

κράτει, pres. impv. of κρατέω. 

κριθήσεσθε, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of κρίνω. 
κριθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κρίνω. 
κρυβῆναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of κρύπτω. 

κτήσασθε, 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of κτάομαι. 
κτήσησθε, 1 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of κτάομαι. 


AaBe(-By), 2 aor. act. impv. (subj. 3 pers. sing.) of λαμβάνω. 
λαθεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of λανθάνω. 

λαχοῦσι, 2 aor. act. ptep. dat. plur. of λαγχάνω. 
λάχωμεν, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of λαγχάνω. 
AeAou(o)pévos, pf. pass. ptep. of λούω. 

λέλυσαι, pf. pass. 2 pers. sing. of λύω. 

λη(μ)φθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of λαμβάνω. 
λή(μγ)ψομαι, fut. of λαμβάνω. 

AGry, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of λείπω. 


μάθετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of μανθάνω. 

μάθητε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of μανθάνω. 

μαθών, 2 aor. act. ptep. of μανθάνω. 

μακαριοῦσι, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of μακαρίζω. 

μακροθύμησον, 1 aor. act. impv. of μακροθυμέω. 

μεθιστάναι, pres. act. inf. of μεθίστημι. 

μεθυσθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of μεθύσκω. 

μεῖναι, 1 aor. inf. of μένω. 

μείναντες, 1 aor. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of μένω. 

μείνατε, μεῖνον, 1 aor. impv. of μένω. 

μείνῃ, -qTe, τωσιν, 1 aor. subj. of μένω. 

μελέτα, pres. act. impv. of μελετάω. 

μεμαθηκώς, pf. act. ptep. of μανθάνω. 

μεμενήκεισαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of μένω. 

μεμιαμμένος or -σμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of μιαίνω. 

μεμίανται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. or plur. of μιαίνω. 

pepeypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of μίγνυμι. 

μέμνησθε, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of μιμνήσκω. 

μεμύημαι, pf. pass. of μυέω. 

pevetre, fut. ind. 2 pers. plur. of μένω. 

μένετε, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of μένω. 

μετάβα, μετάβηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of peraBatvo. 

μετασταθῶ, 1 aor. pass. subj. of μεθίστημι. 

μεταστραφήτω, 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of pera- 
στρέφω. 

μετέθηκεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. οἵ μετατίθημι. 

μετέστησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μεθίστημι. 

μετέσχηκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of μετέχω. 

μετετέθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of μετατίθημι. 

μετήλλαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of μεταλλάσσω. 

μετῆρεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μεταίρω. 

μετοικιῶ, (Attic) fut. act. of μετοικίζω. 

μετῴκισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μετοικίζω. 


719 


Forms or VERBS. 


μιανθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of μιαίνω. 
μνησθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of μιμνήσκω. 

μνήσθητι, -re, 1 aor. pass. impv. of μιμνήσκω. 
μνησθῶ, -θῇς, 1 aor. pass. subj. of μιμνήσκω. 


νενίκηκα, pf. act. of νικάω. 

νενομοθέτητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of νομοθετέω. 
νήψατε, 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of νήφω. 

νόει, pres. act. impv. of νοέω. 

νοούμενα, pres. pass. ptep. neut. plur. of νοέω. 


ὀδυνᾶσαι, pres. ind. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ὀδυνάω. 
οἴσω, fut. act. of φέρω. 

ὀμνύναι, ὀμνύειν, pres. act. inf. of ὀμνύω. 

ὀμόσαι, -as, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of ὀμνύω. 
ὀμόσῃ; 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ὀμνύω. 
ὀναίμην, 2 aor. mid. opt. of ὀνίνημι. 

ὁρῶσαι, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of ópdo. 
ὀφθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of ópdo. 

ὄψει, ὄψῃ, fut. 2 pers. sing. of ὁράω. 

ὄψεσθε, fut. 2 pers. plur. of ópdo. 

ὄψησθε, 1 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of ὁράω. 


παθεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πάσχω. 

πάθῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of πάσχω- 

παίσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of rata. 

παραβολευσάμενος, 1 aor. ptep. of παραβολεύομαι. 

παραβουλευσάμενος, 1 aor. ptcp. of παραβουλεύομαι. 

παραδεδώκεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of παραδίδωμι. 

παραδιδοῖ, παραδιδῷ, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of παραδίδωμε. 

παραδιδούς (παραδούς), pres. (2 aor.) ptep. of παραδίδωμι. 

παραδῷ (-Bot), 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of παραδίδωμι- 

παραθεῖναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of παρατίθημι. 

παράθου, 2 aor. mid. impv. of παρατίθημι. 

παραθῶσιν, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of παρατίθημι. 

παραιτοῦ, pres. impv. of παραιτέομαι. 

παρακεκαλυμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of παρακαλύπτω. 

παρακεχειμακότι, pf. act. ptep. dat. sing. of παραχειμάζω. 

παρακληθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of παρακαλέω. 

παρακύψας, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of παρακύπτω. 

παραλη(μ)φθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of παραλαμ- 
βάνω. 

παραπλεῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of παραπλέω. 

trapap(p)vapev, 2 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. plur. of παραρρέω. 

παραστῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of παρίστημι. 

παραστήσατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of παρίστημι. 

παραστῆτε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of παρίστημι. 

παρασχών, 2 aor. act. ptep. of παρέχω. 

παρατιθέσθωσαν, pres. impv. 3 pers. plur. of παρατίθημι. 

παρεδίδοσαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of παραδίδωμε. 

παρέθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of παρατίθημι. 

πάρει, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of πάρειμι. 

παρειμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of παρίημι. 

παρεῖναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of παρίημι and pres. inf. of πάρειμε. 

παρεισάξουσιν, fut. act. 3 pers, plur. of παρεισάγω. 


Forms or VERBS. T 

παρεισεδύησαν, 2 aor, pass. 3 pers. plur. of παρεισδύω. 

παρεισέδυσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρεισδύω. 

παρεισενέγκαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of 
παρεισφέρω. 

παρειστήκεισαν; plpf. act. 3 pers, plur. of παρίστημι. 

παρεῖχαν, impf, ( Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of παρέχω. 

παρειχόμην, impf. mid. of παρέχω. 

παρέκυψεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of παρακύπτω. 

παρελάβοσαν, 2 aor. act. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of zapa- 
λαμβάνω. 

παρελεύσονται, fut. 3 pers. plur. of παρέρχομαι. 

“παρεληλυθέναι (-θώς), pf. act. inf. (ptep.) of παρέρχομαι. 

παρελθάτω (-θέτω), 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of 
παρέρχομαι. 

παρενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of παραφέρω. 

“παρέξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of παρέχω. 

παρέξῃ, fut. mid. 2 pers. sing. of παρέχω. 

παρεπίκραναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παραπικραίνω. 

παρεσκεύασται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of παρασκευάζω. 

παρεστηκότες and παρεστῶτες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. 
masc. of παρίστημι. 

παρεστήσατε, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of παρίστημι. 

mapérewe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of maparetvo. 

“παρετήρουν, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρατηρέω. 

παρήγγειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παραγγέλλω. 

παρηκολούθηκας (-cas), pf. (1 aor.) act, 2 pers. sing. of 
παρακολουθέω. 

arapyjvet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of παραινέω. 

παρῃτημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of παραιτέομαι. 

παρῃτήσαντο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of παραιτέομαι. 

παρῴκησεν, 1 aor. act.'3 pers. sing. of παροικέω. 

παρωξύνετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of παροξύνω. 

παρώτρυναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παροτρύνω. 

παρῳχημένος, pf. ptep. of παροίχομαι. 

παυσάτω, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of παύω. 

πεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίνω 

πείσας, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of πείθω. 

πείσω, fut. act. of πείθω. 

πέπαυται, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of παύω. 

πεπειραμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πειράω. 

πεπειρασμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πειράζω. 

πέπεισμαι, -μένος, pf. pass. ind. and ptep. of πείθω. 

πεπιεσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πιέζω. 

πεπιστεύκεισαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of πιστεύω. 

πεπιστευκόσι, pf. act. ptep. dat. plur. of πιστεύω. 

πεπλάνησθε, pf. pass. 2 pers. plur. of πλανάω. 

πεπλάτυνται, pf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of πλατύνω. 

πεπληρωκέναι, pf. act. inf. of πληρόω. 

πέποιθα, 2 pf. of πείθω. 


» 


πέπονθα, 2 pf. of πάσχω 

πεπότικεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ποτίζω. 

πέπρακε, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of πιπράσκω. 
πεπραμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πιπράσκω. 

πέπραχα, pf. act. of πράσσω. 

πέπτωκα, -Kes, -kav, pf. act. of πίπτω. 

πεπυρωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of zvpóo. 

πέπωκε (-kav), pf. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of πίνω. 
πεπωρωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of mapdw. 


20 


Forms or VERBS. 


περιάψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of περιάπτω. 

περιδραμόντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of περιτρέχω. 

περιεδέδετο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of περιδέω, 

περιεζωσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of περιζωννύω. 

περιέκρυβον, 2 aor. of περικρύπτω (or impf. of περικρύβω). 

περιελεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of περιαιρέω. 

περιέπεσον, 2 aor. act. of περιπίπτω. 

περιεσπᾶτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of περισπάω. 

περιέσχον, 2 aor. act. of περιέχω. 

περιέτεμον, 2 aor. act. of περιτέμνω. 

περίζωσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of περιζωννύω. 

περιῃρεῖτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of περιαιρέω. 

περιθέντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of περιτίθημι. 

περιίστασο, pres. mid. (pass.) impv. of περιΐστημι. 

περιπέσητε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of περιπίπτω. 

περιρεραμμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of περιρραίνω. 

περιρ(ργήξαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of περιρρήγνυμι. 

περισσεῦσαι 1 aor. act. inf., and περισσεύσαι 1 aor. act. 
opt. 3 pers. sing., of περισσεύω. 

περιτετμημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of περιτέμνω. 

περιτιθέασιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of περιτίθημι. 

περιτμηθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of περιτέμνω. 

πεσεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίπτω. 

πεσεῖται (-odyrat), fut. 3 pers. sing. (plw.) of πίπτω. 

πέσετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of πίπτω. 

πέτηται, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of πέτομαι. 

πετώμενος, pres. ptep. of πετάομαι. 

πεφανέρωται (-νερῶσθαι), pf. pass. (inf.) of φανερόω. 

πεφίμωσο, pf. pass. impv. of φιμόω. 

πιάσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of mao. 

πίε, 2 aor. act. impv. of πίνω. 

πιεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίνω. 

πίεσαι, πίεσθε, fut. 2 pers. sing. and plur. of πίνω. 

πίῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of πίνω. 

πικρανεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of πικραίνω. 

πῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίνω. 

πίω, 2 aor. act. subj. of πίνω. 

πλάσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πλάσσω. 

πλέξαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of πλέκω. 

πλεονάσαι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of πλεονάζω. 

πληθύναι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of πληθύνω. 

πληθύνει, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of πληθύνω. 

πληθυνεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of πληθύνω. 

πληθυνθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf, of πληθύνω. 

πληρωθῇ, -θῆτε, -θῶ, -θῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. of πληρόω. 

πληρῶσαι 1 aor. inf., and πληρώσαι 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. 
sing., of πληρόω. 

πλήσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πίμπλημι. 

πλησθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of πίμπλημι. 

πλησθῇς, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of πίμπλημι. 

πνέῃ, pres. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of πνέω. 

ποιήσειαν, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of ποιέω. 

ποιμαίνει, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of ποιμαίνω. 

ποιμάνατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ποιμαίνω. 

ποιμανεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ποιμαίνω. 

πορεύου, pres. mid. impv. of πορεύω. 

πραθέν, 1 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of πιπράσκω. 

πραθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of πιπράσκω. 


Forms oF VERBS. 


-mpoBas, 2 aor. act. ptep. of προβαίνω. 
προβεβηκυῖα, pf. act. ptep. fem. of προβαίνω. 
προγεγονότων, pf. act. ptep. gen. plur. of προγίνομαι. 
προεβίβασαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of προβιβάζω. 
προεγνωσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προγινώσκω. 
προελεύσεται, fut. 3 pers. sing. of προέρχομαι. 
προενήρξατο (-acGe), 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. (2 pers. plur.) 
of mpoevápxopat. 
προεπηγγείλατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of προεπαγγέλλω. 
“προεπηγγελμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προεπαγγέλλω. 
προεστῶτες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of προΐστημι. 
προέτειναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of προτείνω. 
προεφήτευον, impf. act. of προφητεύω. 
προέφθασεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of προφθάνω. 
προεωρακότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of mpoopde. 
προῆγεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of προάγω. 
προηλπικότας, pf. act. ptep. acc. plur. masc. of προελπίζω. 
“προημαρτηκώς, pf. act. ptep. of zpoapaprávo. 
“προῃτιασάμεθα, 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. of προαιτιάομαι. 
προητοίμασα, 1 aor. act. of προετοιμάζω. 
“προκεκηρυγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προκηρύσσω. 
προκεχειρισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προχειρίζω. 
προκεχειροτονημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προχειροτονέω. 
προορώμην and προωρώμην, impf. mid. of προοράω. 
προσανέθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of προσανατίθημι. 
προσειργάσατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of mpocepyd- 
Copa. 
προσεκλίθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ποοσκλίνω. 
προσεκολλήθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of προσκολλάω. 
προσεκύνουν, impf. act. of προσκυνέω. 
προσενήνοχεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of προσφέρω. 
προσέπεσε, -σαν, -σον, 2 aor. act. of προσπίπτω. 
-mpooép(p)néa, 1 aor. act. of προσρήγνυμι. 
προσέσχηκα, pf. act. of προσέχω. 
προσεφώνει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of προσφωνέω. 
προσεῶντος, pres. act. ptep. gen. sing. of προσεάω. 
προσήνεγκα (-kov), 1 aor. (2 aor.) act. of προσφέρω. 
προσηνέχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of προσφέρω. 
προσηργάσατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of προσεργάζομαι. 
προσηΐξατο, 1 aor. 3 pers, 
προσηύχετο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of προσεύχομαι. 
πρόσθες, 2 aor. act. impv. of προστίθημι. 
προσκύνησον, 1 aor. act. impv. of zpockvvéo, 
προσλαβοῦ, 2 aor. mid. impv. of προσλαμβάνω. 
προσμεῖναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of προσμένω. 
προσπήξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of προσπήγνυμι. 
προστῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of προΐστημι. 
προσωρμίσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of προσορ- 
pico. 
προσώχθισα, 1 aor. act. of προσοχθίζω 
προτρεψάμενος, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of προτρέπω. 
προὐπῆρχον, impf. act. of προὐπάρχω 
πταίσητε, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of πταίω. 
πτοηθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of πτοέω. 
πτοηθῆτε, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of πτοέω. 
πτύξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ricco. 
πτύσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πτύω. 
πυθόμενος, 2 aor. ptep. of πυνθάνομαι. 
46 


sing. of προσεύχομαι. 


T 


1 


Forms or VERBS, 


ῥαντίσωνται, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ῥαντίζω. 

ῥεραντισμένοι (or ῥεραντ. or éppavr.), pf. pass. ptep. nom. 
plur. masc. of ῥαντίζω. 

ῥεριμμένος (or ἐρριμμένος or ἐριμμ.), pf. pass. ptep. of ῥίπτω. 

ῥεύσουσιν, fut. 3 pers. plur. of ῥέω. 

ῥῆξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ῥήγνυμι. 

ῥήξωσιν, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ῥήγνυμι. 

ῥίψαν (better pipav), 1 aor. act. ptcp. neut. of ῥίπτω. 

ῥυπανθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ῥυπαίνω. 

ῥυπαρευθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ῥυπαρεύο- 
pat. 

ῥῦσαι, -σάσθω, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ῥύομαι. 

ῥυσθῶ (-θῶμεν), 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing. (plur.) of 
pvopat. 


σαροῖ, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing. of σαρόω. 

σβέσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of σβέννυμι. 

σβέσει. fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of σβέννυμι. 

σβεσθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of σβέννυμι. 

σεσαλευμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σαλεύω. 

σεσαρωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of capda. 

σέσηπε. 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of σήπω. 

σεσιγημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σιγάω. 

σέσωκα, pf. act. of cata. 

σέσωσται and σέσωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cafe. 

σημᾶναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of σημαίνω. 

σθενώσαι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of σθενόω. 

σθενώσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of σθενόω. 

σιγήσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of σιγάω. 

σκύλλου, pres. mid. impv. of σκύλλω. 

σπαρείς, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of σπείρω. 

σπεῦσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of σπεύδω. 

σταθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of tornpe. 

σταθῆναι, 1 aor pass. inf. of ἵστημι. 

στάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἵστημι. 

στῆθι (στῆναι), 2 aor. act. impv. (inf.) of ἵστημι. 

στηρίξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. or 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. 
στηρίζω. 

στήριξον and στήρισον, 1 aor. act. impv. οἵ στηρίζω. 

στηρίξω, στηρίσω, στηριῶ, fut. act. οὗ στηρίζω. 

στήσῃ; στήσῃς, στήσητε, etc., 1 aor. act. subj. of ἵστημει. 

στήσομαι, 1 fut. mid. of ἵστημι. 

στραφείς -φέντες, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of στρέφω. 

στραφῆτε, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of στρέφω. 

στρῶσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of στρωννύω. 

συγκατατεθειμένος, pf. mid. ptep. of συγκατατίθημι. 

συγκατατιθέμενος, pres. mid. ptep. of συγκατατίθημι. 

ovykekepacpévos and συγκεκραμένος, pi. pass. ptep. of 
συγκεράννυμι. 

συγκέχυται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of συγχέω. 

συλλαβοῦσα, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of συλλαμ- 
Bavo. 

συλλή(μ)ψῃ; fut. 2 pers. sing. of συλλαμβάνω. 

συμπαρακληθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of συμπαρακαλέω. 

συμπαρόντες, pres. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of συμπάρειμε. 

συμφυεῖσαι, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of συμφύω- 

συναγάγετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of συνάγω. 


of 


Forms or VERBS. i 


evvavékewro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of συνανάκειμαι. 

συναπαχθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of 
συναπάγω. 

συναπέθανον, 2 aor. act. of συναποθνήσκω. 

συναπήχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of συναπάγω. 

συναπώλετο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of συναπόλλυμι. 

συνᾶραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of συναίρω. 

συναχθήσομαι, 1 fut. pass. of συνάγω. 

συνδεδεμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of συνδέω. 

συνέζευξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συζεύγνυμι. 

συνέθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of συντίθημι. 

συνειδυίης (or-as), pf. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of συνεῖδον. 

συνειληφυῖα, pf. act. ptep. fem. of συλλαμβάνω. 

συνείπετο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of συνέπομαι. 

συνείχετο, impf. pass, 3 pers. sing. of συνέχω. 

συνεκόμισαν. 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συγκομίζω. 

συνεληλύθεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of συνέρχομαι. 

συνεληλυθυῖαι, pf. ptcp. nom. plur. fem. of evvépxopat. 

συνεπέστη, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συνεφίστημι. 

συνέπιον, 2 aor. act. of συμπίνω. 

συνεσπάραξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συσπαράσσω. 

συνεσταλμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συστέλλω. 

συνεστῶσα (-τῶτα), 2 pf. ptcp. nom. sing. fem. (neut. 
plur.) of συνίστημι. 

συνέταξα, 1 aor. act. of συντάσσω. 

συνετάφημεν, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of συνθάπτω. 

σύνετε, 2 aor. act. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνετέθειντο, plpf. mid. 3 pers, plur. of συντίθημι. 

συνετήρει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of συντηρέω. 

συνέφαγες, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. sing. of συνεσθίω. 

συνέχεαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συγχέω. 

συνέχεον, impf. (2 aor.? cf. ἐκχέω) 3 pers. plur. of συγχέω. 

συνεχύθη, 1 aor. pass, 3 pers. sing. of συγχέω. 

συνεψήφισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συμψηφίζω. 

συνηγέρθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of συνεγείρω. 

συνηγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συνάγω. 

συνήθλησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συναθλέω. 

συνηθροισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συναθροίζω. 

συνῆκαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνήλασεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συνελαύνω. 

συνήλλασσεν, impf, act. 3 pers. sing. of συναλλάσσω. 

συνήντησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συναντάω. 

συνήργει, impf. 3 pers. sing. of συνεργέω. 

συνηρπάκει. plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of συναρπάζω. 

συνήρπασαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers, plur. of συναρπάζω. 

συνῆσαν, impf, 3 pers. plur. of σύνειμι. 

συνήσθιεν, impf. 3 pers. sing. of συνεσθίω. 

συνῆτε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνήχθη (-ησαν), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of συνάγω. 

συνιᾶσι, συνιοῦσι, συνίουσι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of 
συνίημι. 

συνιδών, ptep. οἵ συνεῖδον. 

συνιείς, συνίων. συνιῶν (not -ἰών), pres. ptep. of συνίημι. 

συνίετε, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνιόντος, ptep. gen. sing. of σύνειμι (εἶμι). 

συνιστᾶν, -ῶν, pres. inf. and ptep. of συνίστημι. 

συνίωσι and συνιῶσι, pres. subj. 3 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνόντων, ptep. gen. plur. of σύνειμι (εἰμί). 


22 


Forms or VERBS. 


συνταφέντες, 2 aor, pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of cur 
barre. 

συντελεσθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of συντελέω. 

συντετμημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συντέμνω. 

συντετριμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συντρίβω. 

συντετρίφθαι or -τρῖφθαι, pf. pass. inf. of συντρίβω. 

συντρίβον or -rpifov, pres. act. ptep. neut. of συντρίβω. 

συνυπεκρίθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of συνυποκρί- 
vopat. 

συνῶσι, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

σωθῇ, -θῆναι, -θῆτε, -θῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. of σώζω. 

σῶσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of cota. 


τακήσεται, fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of τήκω, q. v. 
ταραχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ταράσσω. 
τεθέαται, pf. 3 pers. sing. of θεάομαι. 

τέθεικα, pf. act. of τίθημι. 

τεθεμελίωτο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θεμελιόω. 
τεθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of τίθημι. 
τεθλιμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of θλίβω. 

τεθνάναι, 2 pf. act. inf. of θνήσκω. 

τεθνηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of θνήσκω. 

τεθραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of τρέφω. 
τεθραυσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of θραύω. 
τεθυμένα, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of θύω. 

τεθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 
τέκῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of τίκτω. 
τελεσθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of τελέω. 
τέξῃ, fut. 2 pers. sing. of τίκτω. 

τεταγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of τάσσω. 

τέτακται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of τάσσω. 
τεταραγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ταράσσω. 
τετάρακται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ταράσσω. 
τεταχέναι, pf. act. inf. of τάσσω. 

τετέλεσται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of reAéo. 
τέτευχα, pf. act. of τυγχάνω. 

τετήρηκαν, -ασιν, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of τηρέω. 
τετιμημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ruido. 
τετραχηλισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of τραχηλίζω. 
τετύφωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rudda. 
τέτυχα, τετύχηκα. pf. act. of τυγχάνω. 

τεχθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of τίκτω. 

τιθέασιν, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 
τίσουσιν, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of rive. 


ὑπέδειξα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποδείκνυμι. 

ὑπέθηκα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποτίθημι. 

ὑπέλαβεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὑπολαμβάνω. 
ὑπελείφθην, 1 aor. pass. of ὑπολείπω. 

ὑπέμεινα, 1 aor. of ὑπομένω. 

ὑπέμενον, impf. of ὑπομένω. 

ὑπεμνήσθην, 1 aor. pass. of ὑπομιμνήσκω. 
ὑπενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ὑποφέρω. 

ὑπενόουν, impf. act. of ὑπονοεω. 

ὑπεπλεύσαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of ὑποπλέω.. 
ὑπεριδών, ptep. of ὑπερεῖδον. 


Forms or VERBS. 


ὑπέστρεψα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποστρέφω. 

ὑπεστρώννυον, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ὑποστρώννυμι. 

ὑπετάγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑπέταξα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑπῆγον, impf. act. of ὑπάγω. 

ὑπήκουον, impf. act. of ὑπακούω. 

ὑπήνεγκα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποφέρω. 

ὑπῆρχον, impf. act. of ὑπάρχω. 

ὑποδέδεκται, pf. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποδέχομαι. 

ὑποδεδημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ὑποδέω. 

ὑπόδησαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ὑποδέω. 

ὑποδραμόντες, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of ὑπο- 
τρέχω. 

ὑπομείνας, 1 aor. act. ptep. οὗ ὑπομένω. 

ὑπομεμενηκότα, pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. mase. of ὑπομένω. 

ὑπομνῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ὑπομιμνήσκω. 

ὑπομνήσω, fut. act. of ὑπομιμνήσκω. 

ὑποπνεύσαντος, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. of ὑποπνέω. 

ὑποστείληται, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποστέλλω. 

ὑποταγῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποταγήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποτάγητε, 2 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποτάξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποτασσέσθωσαν, pres. mid. impv. 3 pers. plur. of ὑπο- 
τάσσω. 

ὑποτέτακται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑστερηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of ὑστερέω. 

ὑψωθῶ, 1 aor. pass. subj. of ὑψόω. 


φάγεσαι, fut. 2 pers. sing. of ἐσθίω. 

ayy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of daive. 
φανῇ, -νῇς, -νῶσιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. of φαίνω. 
φανήσομαι and φανοῦμαι, 2 fut. pass. of paiva. 
φείσομαι, fut. of φείδομαι. 

φεύξομαι, fut. of φεύγω. 

φθαρῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of φθείρω. 
φθαρήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of φθείρω. 

φθάσωμεν, 1 aor. subj. 1 pers. plur. of φθάνω. 
φθερεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of φθείρω. 

φιμοῖν, -μοῦν, pres. act. inf. of φιμόω. 

φιμώθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. of φιμόω. 
φραγῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of φράσσω. 
φραγήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of φράσσω. 

φράσον, 1 aor. impv. of φράζω. 

φρονείσθω, pres. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of φρονέω. 


128 





Forms or VERBs. 


φυέν, 2 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of dia. 
φύλαξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of φυλάσσω. 
us, 2 aor. act. ptep. of dia. 

φυτεύθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of φυτεύω. 
φωτιεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of φωτίζω. 


Χαλῶσιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of χαλάω. 

χαρῆναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of χαίρω. 

χαρήσομαι, fut. mid. of χαίρω. 

Χχάρητε, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of χαίρω. 

χαρῆτε, 2 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. of χαίρω. 
Χαροῦσιν, fut. 3 pers. plur. of χαίρω (Rev. xi. 10 unique). 
χρῆσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of χράομαι. 

χρήσηται, 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. of χράομαι. 
χρῆσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of κίχρημι. 

Χρῆται, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xpdopat. 

χρονιεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of χρονίζω. 

χρῶ, pres. impv. of χράομαι. 

χωρῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of xopéo. 

χωρίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of χωρίζω. 

χωροῦσαι, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of χωρέω. 
χωροῦσι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of xopéo. 


ψηλαφήσειαν, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of ψηλαφάω. 
ψυγήσεται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ψύχω. 
ψωμίσω, 1 aor. act. subj. of ψωμίζω. 


φκοδόμητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of οἰκοδομέω. 
ὠκοδόμουν, impf. act. of οἰκοδομέω. 

ὡμίλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὁμιλέω. 
ὡμολόγουν, impf. act. of ὁμολογέω. 

ὥμοσα, 1 aor. act. of ὄμνυμι. 

ὠνείδισε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὀνειδίζω. 
dvépaca, 1 aor. act. of ὀνομάζω. 

ὥρθριζεν, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ὀρθρίζω. 
ὥρισα, 1 aor. act. of ὁρίζω. 

ὡρισμένος, pf. pass. ptcp. of ὁρίζω. 

ὥρμησα, 1 aor. act of ópudo. 

ὥρυξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὀρύσσω 
ὠρχήσασθε, 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. of ὀρχέομαι. 
dpeXov, impf. of ὀφείλω. 

ὥφθην, 1 aor. pass. of ὁράω. 





ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 





p- 1°, s. v.' A88à ; respecting its accent see Tdf. Proleg. | 


p. 102; Kautzsch, Grammatik d. Biblisch-Aramiischen 
u.s. w. (Leipzig, 1884) p. 8. 

p. 4%, s. v. ἀγάπη, line 13, “Philo” — yet see Quod 
deus immut. § 14. 

p. 4^ line 1, add “See Westcott, Epp. of St. John, 
p. 48 sq.” 1 

p. 11, 5. v. ἀδιάκριτος; on the passage in Ignat. ad 
Eph. see Bp. Lghtfi. Apost. Fathers, Pt. ΤΙ. vol. ii. sect. 
i. p. 39. 

p. 135, s. v. ἄθεος ; on the application of the term to 
Christians by the heathen see Bp. Lghtft/s note on 
Ign. ad Trall. 3, vol. ii. p. 160. 

p. 195, s. v. αἰών, 1 b. fin., add “οἱ ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος Ῥωμαῖοι; 
Dion Cass. 63, 20, 2 cf. 5.” 

p- 74%, s. v. ‘Appayedar, fin., add “But see WH u. s." 

p. 785, s. v. ἀρχιερεύς 3, for the application of the 
term to Christ by the early writers see Bp. Lghtft. on 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36 p. 118 sq., and on Ign. ad Philad. 
9 vol. ii. p. 274. 

p. 79%, ἄρχων, end, add “See Hort in Dict. of Chris. 
Biography, s. v. Archon.” 

p- 98°, s. v. βασιλεία, fin. —to the reff. add “Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 264 sqq.” 

p. 1005, s. v. Βεελζεβούλ, last line but one, add “ But 
see Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2, vol ii. p. 209 sq.; 
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9." 

p. 120%, s. v. Τολγοθά (or -0á), add a reference to 
Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Aramiischen (Leip- 
zig, 1884), p. 10. 

p. 1645, s. v. Ἑ βραΐς, add to the reff. * Neubauer in 
Studia Biblica (Oxford, 1885), pp. 39-74." 

p. 181^, s. v. εἶπον, 3 d. (on the acc. w. inf. after it) 
add * See Gildersleeve's note on Just. Mart. apol. 1, 12, 
p- 127 sq." 

p- 192", s. v. ἑκατοντάρχης ; on the Attic preference 
for the termination -apyos, rather than -dpxys, see 
Meisterhans, Gram. d. Attisch. Inschriften, p. 53 sq. 

p- 194*, s. v. ἐκδίκησις, line 6, add (cf. Test. xii. Patr., 
test. Rub. 6). 


p. 198^, insert in its place “ ἐκ-περισσοῦ, see ékrepio- | 


σῶς and ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ.᾽" 








p- 247°, s. v. ἐργάζομαι, 2 a., to the reff. on Rev. xviii. 
17, add “See Wetstein ad loc.” 

p. 268%, s. v. ἕως, II. 2 c., for ἕως πρός in Lk. xxii. 50, 
note the rendering given in R. V.: until they were over 
against etc. 

p. 2745, s. v. ζωή, fin., to the works referred to add 
“ Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 204 sqq." 

p. 276", s. v. ἡδύοσμος, fin., add to the reff. “ Lów, 
Aram. Pflanzennamen, $ 200.” 

p. 287°, s. v. θεός, 1 fin., add * For θεοί in application 
to deceased Christians see Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 27; 
Hippol. refut. omn. haer. 10,34." s. v. θεός, 3, add “On 
ὁ θεός and θεός, esp. in the writings of John, see Westcott, 
Epp. of St. John, p. 165 sq." 

p. 292%, s. v. θριαμβεύω, add to the reff. at the close 
* Findlay in Expositor, vol. x. p. 403sqq.; xi. 78; Waite 
in the Speaker’s Com. on 2 Co. l. c. p. 404 sq.” 

p. 2925, s. v. θρόνος, fin., add “ Test. xii. Patr., test. 
Levi 3." 

p. 295%, s. v. L, 1. On the interchange of ε and εἰ cf. 
Meisterhans, Gram. d. Attisch. Inschriften, p. 23 sqq. 

p. 3355, s. v. καταπέτασμα, see Survey of Western Pal- 
estine, vol. * Jerusalem," p. 340 sq. 

p. 358%, s. v. κοῦμι; add “See Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, i. 631 note." 

p. 365%, line 18, add to the ref. “Bp. Lghtft.’s note 
on Ign. mart. Polyc. 8 p. 959." : 

p. 376%, s. v. λέπρα. add to the reff. “Clark in the 
Speaker's Com. on Lev. pp. 559 sqq. 570 sqq." 

p. 382%, s.v. λόγος III. A translation of Lücke's dis- 
cussion may be found in the Christian Examiner for 
1849, pp. 165 sqq. 412sqq. To the reff. given may be 
added “ Mansel in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Philosophy." 

p- 3885, μαμωνᾶς ; cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. 
p.173. 

p- 402", s. v. μέσος 2, on ἐν μέσῳ and ἀνὰ μέσον cf. 


| R. F. Weymouth in Journ. of Philol. for 1869, ii. pp. 


318-322. 

p- 421%, s. v. N, v; on v ἐφελκυστικόν see Meisterhans, 
Gram. d. Attisch. Inschriften, ὃ 25. 

p. 433%, insert in its place O, o :— on its interchange 
with omega see Q, o. 


726 


p. 4455, s. v. ὁμοίωμα, fin.; add to the reff. “ Dickson, 
St. Paul's Use of the Terms ‘Flesh’ and ‘Spirit’ (Glas- 
gow, 1883), p. 322 sqq." 

p. 474%, s. v. παῖς, Syn. sub fin., on the elasticity of 
the term as respects age see Bp. Lghtft. Apostolic 
Fathers, Pt. IT. vol. i. p. 432. 

p. 514°; to the reff. s. v. πίστις add “ A. Schlatter, Der 
Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885).” 

p. 529”, s. v. πολύς, 6. On the example from Polyb. 
(5, 8, 3) cf. ὥρα, 2, p. 6795, line 2. 

p. 572%, s. v. σατᾶν, fin.; add to the reff. * Dorner, 
System d. Christ. Glaubenslehre, § 85, vol. ii. 1 p. 188 
sqq.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2, xv. 358 sq." 

p. 581%, s. v. Σμύρνα; on the form Ζμύρνα see Bp. 
Lghtft. Apostolic Fathers, Pt. II. vol. ii. p. 331 note. 

p. 669°, line 3, add to the ref. “cf. Expositor for 
Nov. 1885, p. 381 sqq." 

p. 672", s. v. Χριστιανός ; to the reff. at the close add 
* Bp. Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. i. p. 400 sqq." 


Many interesting facts relative to noteworthy New 
Testament forms will be found in that admirable little 
compend Meisterhans’s Grammatik der Attischen In- 
schriften (Berlin, 1885). See, for example, on the in- 
trusion into the 2 aor. of the a of the 1 aor. (ἤνεγκαν, 
εἴπας, εὑράμενος, etc.) pp. 81 sq., 85, 88; on the aorists 
in -ka and -σα, p. 81 56. ; on γί(γ)νομαι, γι(γ)νώσκω, 
p. 84 56.; on ἔνι and ἔνεστι, p. 83; on (ἐ)θέλω, p. 85; 
on the fut. χαρήσομαι, p. 89; ete., ete. On anomalies or 
variations in augment, see $ 40 of the same book; on 
ἑλπίς, see § 20, 1 ἃ. ; on ἕνεκεν, εἵνεκεν, see $49, 8. Ref- 
erences to it have been introduced into the body of 
the Lexicon where the plates easily permitted. 


The printing of the Lexicon was nearly finished be- 
fore the plan of the Appendix, as respects its details, had 
been decided on. Consequently facts respecting a 
word’s use are occasionally assumed there which are 
not expressly stated under the word itself. Professor 
Grimm held it to be unnecessary to refer to profane 


usage in the case of familiar and current words. And 
although the number of classic vouchers for the age of 
a word has been greatly multiplied, they have not been 
given with that invariable completeness which the chron- 
ological distribution of the vocabulary in the Appendix 
renders desirable. Consistency would require that it be 
expressly noted that the following words are in use as 
early as Homer or Hesiod: ἄγκιστρον, ἁγνῶς, ἄγρα, ἁδρό- 
της. ἀθέμι(σγτος, ᾿Αθηναῖος, Αἰγύπτιος, Αἰθίοψ, αἰσχρός, 
δή, δια(ον η)κόσιοι, εἶμι, ἐκεῖθεν, ἐκεῖσε, Ἑλλάς, Ἕλλην, 
ἕνεκα, ἐντεῦθεν, ἕξ, ἐξάγω, ἐξαίρω, ἔξειμι, ἐξέρχομαι, ἑξή- 
κοντα, ἔξω, ἐπεγείρω. ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ἐπεῖδον, ἔπειτα, ἐπικα- 
λύπτω, ἔπος, ἑπτά, ἥλιος, θαρσέω, θάρσος, Κρής, κτῆμα. 
μηκέτι, μήτις (μήτι), νίπτω, χίλιοι ; that the following 
are as old as Pindar, Herodotus, or the Tragedians: 
ἀγνωσία, aipoppoéw, ἐκδοχή, ἐνοικέω, ἑξακόσιοι, ἔξωθεν, 
ἔπαινος. ᾽᾿Εφέσιος, θροέω, κοινόω, κολάζω, κράσπεδον, Make- 
δών, μάταιος, μέντοι, μετέχω. μηδέποτε, μηδέπω, Μῆδος, 
μωραίνω, vj, οὐκοῦν, οὐχί, ὀχετός, παράσημος, πάροικος, 
πόμα, προστάτις, στάδιον, στατήρ, στοά, συνοικέω, XaÀ- 
δαῖος ; that the following may be found in Thucydides, 
Aristophanes, Plato, or Xenophon: ἀγράμματος, add- 
mavos, ἀλήθω, '"Axata, ἔγγιστα, ἐγγύτερον, ἐπίθεσις, ἐπι- 
καθίζω, ἐπισκευάζω. καταλαλέω, ματαιολόγος, μήτιγε, μνᾶ, 
μουσικός, νυνί, ὀθόνιον, πάροινος, ῥαφίς, σπουδαίως, στά- 
μνος, συναγωγή, συναίρω, σφυρίς, φάσις, φιλοσοφία ; that 
the following are in use from Aristotle on: ἐπεκτείνω, 
ἐπιστηρίζω, εὐθύτης, ἦχος, κεράτιον, κοπή, μαργαρίτης 
(Theophr.), νάρδος (Theophr.), πρώτως; that the fol- 
lowing may be found in the 3d century before Christ : 
βαθέως, ἐπάν (inscr. B.C. 265),—SdexaeE and δεκαοκτώ 
in the Sept.; that the following appear in Polybius: 
᾿Αλεξανδρινός, ᾿Αντιοχεύς, προσανέχω; while Diod. Sic., 
Dion. Hal, or Strabo vouch for “Apa, ᾿Ασιάρχης, 
᾿Ἐπικούρειος, τάχιον. 


Other words without vouchers either first make their 
appearance in the New Testament writings, or are 
so treated in the Lexicon as to furnish a student with 
the means of tracing their history. 


CORRIGENDA 


THAYER’S GRIMM’S NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. 





. xvi, Il. 3, 4, for with Supplement .. . 


. 149, s. v. ἀθλέω, line 2 


9 
2 


CORRIGENDA 


THAYER’S 


IN 


GRIMMS NEW 


TESTAMENT LEXICON. 





. xiv*, insert as line 2, Sapientia (Salomonis), see Wis- 


dom of Solomon. 


. xv*, l. 9, for schen read sche 
. xvi", let the first four entries succeed one another 


alphabetically, viz. Gottling, ete., Goodwin, 
ete., etc. 

appeared. 
read with Supplement, vol. i. (1885), vol. ii. 
with Addenda (1887). 


. xvi, s. v. Schaff-Herzog: — add at end * Revised 


edition, 1887." 
xviii^, paragraph 5, line 3, for 5420 read 5594 
line 4, for 5260 read 5300 
28, heading, read ᾿Αβιληνή 
s. v. ἄβυσσος, last line but three, read Diog. 
Laért. 4, (5,) 27 
7^, s. v. ἄγκυρα, line 3 sqq., read with two teeth- 
like extremities often but by no means always 
without flukes; see Roschach in Daremberg 
and Saglio’s Dict. des Antiq. (1873) p. 267; 
Guhl and Koner p. 258]: 
sq. read “contend in public 
games (e. g. Olympian,” ete. 
line 4, read * poniard [?], gauntlet, 
quoit," etc. 


. 155, s. v. αἷμα, 1 d., last line but one, for (Joel iii. 4) 


read (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)) 


. 16%, last line but two, for 1, 13, 18 sq. read 1, (13,) 


18 sq. 


. 195, last line, for 7. 34 read 7, 34 
. 195, line 8, for Nan read N39 
. 220, s. v. ἀκολουθέω, last line but two, for "35 read 


*393 (i. e. remove the daghesh). 

5, page-numeral has ‘wrong font’ 5 

75, s. v. ἀληθινός, last line but one, after “ Rev." 
insert [xix. 9]; 


. 28>, s, v. ἀλληλούϊα, note the fact that WH accent 


᾿“Αλληλουιά 








. 485, 


GA 
. 52^, last line but four, dele the comma after i. 3 


5 Ὃ τ Ὁ Ὁ 


. 935, s. v. ᾿Αμώς, line 2, before Lk. insert [Mt. i. 10 


LIT WE ' 

line 4, dele the , after 28 

44*, s. v. ἄνεμος, last line but one, insert a comma 
after διδασκαλίας 

last line, dele the comma after Lk. xvii. 1 

s. V. ἀντίχριστος, add an * at end. 


“ 


64, 
692, 
695, 


734, 


8. V. ἀποκτείνω, line 3, for p. 76 read p. 79 

line 9, place the period inside the last ) 

s. v. ἀποφέρω, line 1, for ἀπηνεγκεῖν read ἀπενεγκεῖν 

s. v. ἀρετή, 2 b. for excellencies read excellences 

s. v. ἄρσην, last line but one, for (and [Inscrr. 
as there referred to) read ; Muller's note on 
Barn. ep. 6, 2 p. 158 

75”, SYN. ἄρτι, ἤδη, νῦν, line 9 sq , for νῦν and ἤδη 

are associated in 1 Jn. iv. 3 read ἤδη and ἄρτι 

are associated in 2 Th. ii. 7; νῦν and ἤδη in 

1 Jn. iv. 3. 

v. ᾿Ασύγκριτος, line 1, after ᾿Ασύνκρ. add (cf. 

cvv, II. fin.) 

first paragraph, last line, for Rev. viii. 6, ete.). 
read Rev. viii. 6; xviii 7; cf. Scrivener’s 
Greek Testament (1887) p. v note). Tr reads 
αὑτῶν in Rev. vii. 11. 

page-numeral, the first 8, is ‘wrong font’ 

s. v. apeidov, last line, add Curtius p. 687 sq. 

heading, turn the ᾧ 

s. v. βαπτίζω. line 4, after * frequentative ” in- 
sert [?] 

line 15," en m2355 — probably the article should 
be stricken out; cf. Prof. Geo. F. Moore in 
the * Andover Review” for July 1887, p. 105. 


8. 


. 98>, s. v. βαστάζω, line 1, after 1 aor. ἐβάστασα; add, 


Pass, pres. inf. Baord¢ec@ac; impf. 3 pers. 
sing. égacrá(ero ; 


. 1074, line 1, for -θά WH read -6a Tr WH 
. 1075, s. v. Pd¢a, line 7, for 16, 30 read 16, 2, 30 


p. 108^, s. v. Γαλιλαία, last line but four, for 16, 34 read 


16, 2, 34 


p. 1115, s. v. yéevva, line 3, in the word 13 remove the 


point under ; 

line 15, insert a comma after the 
square brackets. 

line 29, for 2 K. i. read 2 K. i. 10-12 


- 2815, s. v. θεός, line 17, for 1 Co. viii. 5 read 1 Co. 


viii. 5* 
line 19, for 1 Co. viii. 5 read 1 Co. 
viii. 5^ 


. 288*, line 15, for fin. read init. 
. 2895, for Θεσσαλονική read Θεσσαλονίκη 
- 300%, s. v. Ἰησοῦς, line 10, read “in the Zeitschr. f. d. 


p. 1135, s. v. Γεννησαρέτ, line 5, first Hebrew word, for 
70°31 read 30731 (Eng. trans. ii. 97 sq.)] 
p- 1185, line 1, before * Eph. v. 5” insert 1 Co. ii. 11; | p. 3095, s. v. Ἰωάθαμ, add [-θάμ WH] 
p. 135*, s. v. διαβάλλω, line 12, dele the comma after | p.314b, s. v. καθόλου, line 2, before wholly insert 
Lk. xvi. 1 e adv 
p- 136%, s. v. διαδίδωμε, line 1, for διαδώσω read διαδιδώσω | p. 317, s. v. Kaiváv, line 2, for “WH Καινάν 1" etc. 
p- 1385, s. v. διακρίνω, line 12 sq. for τὸ σῶμα τοῦ κυρίου, read “ΜῊ Kawap both 1 and 2” 
1 Co. xi. 29 [Β 6] read τὸ σῶμα (ro) κυρίου). | p. 318*, s. v. καινότης, line 5, for “was” read “is” 
1 Co. xi. 29. p. 323^, line 2, add an asterisk. 
p- 142*, line 2 sq. read *sojourners far away from home, | p. 324*, s. v. kavóv, line 2, the first letter of the Arabie 
in Pontus" word should be Qaf. 
8. V. διαστρέφω, line 7, dele the comma after | p. 3305, s. v. καταγινώσκω, line 6, for $ 134, 4, 8 read 
Lk. xxiii. 2 § 134, 4. 8 
p- 1435, s. v. διαφθείρω, line 1, strike out [impf. διέφθει- | p. 340%, s. v. katnyopew, line 2, for ἐκατηγόρησα read 
pov]; κατηγόρησα 
p- 1005, line 8, for only read chiefly 3489, s. v. κλείω, line 3, for 130 read 130 
p. 163^, for ἑβδομηκονταέξ read ἑβδομηκοντα-έξ 352%, s. v. κοινωνικός, line 3, for def. read deff. 
Sor ἑβδομηκονταπέντε read ἑβδομηκοντα-πέντε paragraph 4, line 7, for Deff. read deff. 
p. 1805, s. v. εἶπον, line 4, dele * optat. εἴποιμι." 354", line 15, the words eis τοὺς κόλπους αὐτῶν are 
p. 181%, last line but four, dele the comma after “ indi- wanting in good Mss. 
cated ” p. 3575, line 23 from bot., for vii. 31 read vii. 31* 
p. 181^, line 5, for “with the use” ete. read “by the | p. 376%, s. v. Necroupyds, last line but 8, after “ decrees” 
use " etc. put a colon. 
p. 184^, line 26, for ets ὑμᾶς read eis ὑμᾶς p. 381%, line 3, for ii. 4 read ii. 1 
p. 1925, s. v. ἐκβάλλω, line 8, for “greater” read “more” | p. 389%, s. v. μάννα. lines 3 and 4, the initial letter of the 
p- 197*, at end of first paragraph put an asterisk. Arabie word should be Mim. 
P 
P 


luth. 'Theol. 1876, p. 209 sq.; [Keim i. 384 sq 


Ὁ Ὁ Ὁ Ὁ 
co 
or 
e 
a" 


. 199, s. v. ἐκτείνω, line 1, dele (impf. é£érewov] ; p. 3925, s. v. μασσάομαι, line 6, for the semicolon read a 
. 200, s. v. ἐκτινάσσω, last line but one, read “ Acts colon. 
xviii. 6; [cf. B. D. u. s.; Neh. v. 13]." p- 3945, s. v. μέγας. line 4, for compar. μείζων read com- 
p. 203, 1. 18 from bot., for Gen. xix. 18 read Gen. xix. 19 par. μείζων, -ov, 
p. 212°, middle, for contemporaneousness read concomi- | p. 3965, s. v. μέλλω, line 3, beginning, for (exc. T) read 


tance (exe. T WH) 

p. 2135, fine print paragraph, last line, for W. 48 read | p. 4055, s. v. ueravoéo, line 1, for ἐμετανόησα read pere- 
esp. Meisterhans p. 46 vónca 

p. 2165, s. v. ἐννέα, put an asterisk at the end. p. 4095, line 9 from bottom, for cf. Gildersleeve as above 


p. 55 sq. read see C. J. Vaughan's Com. on 





p- 2195, s. v. ἐνυπνιάζω. last line but two, for sensuous 


read sensual Ro. ii. 14 
p- 241°, line 15, for 1M) read ἍΤΙΣ p. 4185, s. v. μορφόω. line 2, for in figurative discourse 
line 17, for an read 71705, and for pono read read “to form: in fig. discourse” 
son? i es p. 423^, line 6; add to the reff. “ Meisterhans p. 8” 
MOIS gv. ἔργον, line 3, for max read ΤΙΝ p. 4255, s. v. νηστεύω, line 6, after xviii. 12 insert [(cf. 


P : 
p. 263%, s. v. εὐφημία, line 3, dele the comma after 8 * Teaching’ 8, 1)] 
p. 268*, last line but two, read Phaedo p. 89 c.) ; [Mk. | p. 4445, s. v. ὄλυνθος, line 1, for ἡ read 6 
vi. 45 (cf. c. above)]. s. v. ὅλως, line 3, after vi. 7 dele the words en- 
p. 2795, let the first two lines run [Neut. τὸ ἡμέτ. sub- closed in square brackets. 
stantively: Lk. xvi 12 WHtxt. (Cf. W. | p. 458s, 7th line from bottom, after “when” insert [Mt. - 
§ 22, 7 sqq.; B. $ 127, 19 sqq.]* v. 11 Tdf.]; 
p- 2835, 1st par., last line but one, for Lehren read Lehre | p. 459^», 10th line from bottom, after “Mt. ii. 23” in- 
p. 285%, s. v. θέλημα, line 11, dele the comma. sert [?] 
p. 2865, line 24, after * Rost, Worterb. ed. 4” insert a | p. 476%, s. v. πανταχῆ, line 1, after L Tr add WH 
semicolon. | p. 516%, s. v. πλεονάζω, line 4, for A. V. read R.V. 


p. 520%, 10th line from bottom, insert a comma after 
* in short” 

p. 521*, paragraph **4," line 2, print in thought in 
spaced Roman. 

p. 541%, s. v. mpoopi(o, line 1, for προωρισθέντες read 
προορισθέντες 

p. 558%, last line but two, last word, for πυρὶ read πυρί 

p- 560%, last line, for P3 read 133 

p. 9665, s. v. Sada insert [Lchm. Sada] 

p. 572%, s. v. σβέννυμι, line 3, dele “1 fut. σβεσθήσο- 
pac; " 

p. 573%, line 3 from bottom, for 396 read Σήθ 

p. 584%, line 24, for Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16 note? 
read Geiger in Zeitsch. d. deutsch. Morg. 
Gesellsch. 1858, pp. 307-309 

p- 586°, last line, for pf. ptep. ἐσταυρωμένος read perfect 
ἐσταύρωμαι 

p. 595°, s. v. συμβασιλεύω, line one, read (within the 
brackets) “T συν- so now WH (in 2 T. as 
below); ef.’’ ete. 

p. 599, line 8 from bot., read συνσταυρόω, συνστρατιώ- 
τῆς; σύνσωμος; T WH συνβασιλεύω, συν- 
γνώμη, etc. 

p- ὅ99 5 line 1, dele συνπληρόω 


P- 


inline 3, read συνχαίρω, avvxpáopat, συνχέω. σύν- 
Woxos, ete. 

4, dele συνβασιλεύω 

6, dele συνχράομαι 

inline 7, dele συγγενίς 

in line 9, dele συμμορφόω 

in line 12, after L T WH insert συγγενίς 

in line 17, for συγχύννω read συγχέω 

in line 27, dele συμβασιλεύω 


in line 
in line 





p. 6015, s. v. συναναμίγνυμι, line 4, after 2 Th. iii. 14 add 
[here R'T -σθε, L Tr WH -σθαι] 

p. 607, s. v. Σύρος, line 3, for vii. 26 Treg. read vii. 26 
Tr WH mrg. 

p- 6085, s. v. συστρατιώτης, line 1, for T Tr WH συν- (so 
Lehm. in Philem.; read 1, Τ Tr WH ovp- ( 

p. 614%, s. v. τάλαντον, line 8, for 210 read 200 

line 9, for 1167 read 1000 

p. 620^, s. v. τελώνης, Sth line from end, for Mk. xi. 
15 sq. read Mk. ii. 15 sq. 

p. 626^, under c., line 7, before ** 2 Jn. 4" insert Acts 
xix. 33 R. V. mrg.; 

p. 637%, s. v. ὑμέτερος, line 5, read Lk. xvi. 12 [((WH 
txt. τὸ ἡμέτ.), cf. ete. 

p. 653", s. v. Φιλαδέλφεια, line 3, “The White City” 
(Sayce), add al. “the pied or striped city” 
(cf. Bp. Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. ii. 
sect. i. p. 245) 

p. 669, line 7, add to ref. Schaff, Hist. i. 841 sqq. 

p. 672%, s. v. χριστός, line 3, for prophets read patriarchs 

p. 6725, line 5, dele the * ete.” 

p. 6735, s. v. χρύσεος, line 3, for ii. 4 read ii. 1 

p. 6785, s. v. Wyo, fin, add [Comp.: dva» ἀπο-, ék-, 
kara-, also ed ψύχω.] 

p. 6825, s. v. ὥσπερ, line 4, for περ read πέρ 


- 


P. 
Ρ. 


. 708, col. 2, insert (in its place) “ ἐνοχλέω fr. Sept. 


(Lk. ?)” 
708, col. 4, middle, read “ ToTar 169 (12 fr. Sept., 11?) 
7125, dele the line beginning ἀνοίσω 
s. v. ἀπαρνήσῃ. after “fut.” add “and 1 aor. mid. 
subj.” 
dele the word ἀπεδίδοσαν 
dele the line beginning ἀπηρνησάμην 


ADDENDA. 


725%, insert (in its place) p. 7°, paragraph one, add 
to the reff. E. Issel, Der Begriff der Heiligkeit 
im N. T. (Leiden, 1887). 

p. 72^, last line but one, after * Arabian king" 
insert * Aretas IV., styled on coins the ‘lover 
of his people,’ who reigned B.c. 9 (or 8) to 
A. D. 39 (or 40) (see Gutschmid's List of Na- 
bathaean kings in J. Euting, Nab. Inschriften 
aus Arabien, Berlin 1885, p. 81 sq.)" 

p. 128%, line 2, add to the reff. * Caspari, Chron.- 
geogr. Einl pp. 83-90; Schiirer, Neutest. 
Zeitgesch. $ 23, I. vol. ii. p. 83 (Eng. trans. 
li.! p. 94) " 


p. 135», add p. 2979, s. v. ἴδιος, 7th line from end, add 


[on καθ᾽ ἰδίαν (WH's ‘alt.’ in Mt. xiv. 23; | 


xvii 1,19; xx. 17; xxiv. 3; Mk. iv. 84; vi. 
31; ix. 28; xiii. 3), see their App., pp. 143, 
145; Meisterhans n.395] 


CaMz2RIDGE, March, 1888. 





P- 


p. 314^, s. v. καθολικός. line 5, after * Smyrn. 
c. 8” insert * [see esp. Bp. Lehtft.'s note] " 
p- 3195, s. v. καίω, line 7, to the reff. on Kan yn- 
coua add “Bp. Lghtft. on Col, 7th ed. 
p. 395 n." 

p. 331*, s. v. κατάθεμα. last line, add a ref. to 
‘Teaching’ 16, 5 

p. 355%, s. v. κυριακός, line 9, after “ Harnack” 
add “ Harris p. 105 sq." to the addition for 
* p. 3762" add “Sir Risdon Bennett, Diseases 
of the Bible. 1887. (* By-Paths of Bible 
Knowledge” vol. ix.)." 

p. 4565, s. v. ὁσιότης, fin., add [Cf. Meinke in 
Stud. u. Krit., 1884, pp. 743-768.] 

726° add on p. 568^, line 2, “On the Christology of 

the Samaritans see Westcott, Introd. to the 
Study of the Gospels, 5th ed. p. 159 sq." 


VALUABLE AND INTERESTING WORKS 


FOR 


PUBLIC AND PRIVATE LIBRARIES 


PUBLISHED BY HARPER ἃ BROTHERS, New York. 





t= For a full List of Books suitable for Libraries published by Harrer & Brorners, see Harper’s CaTALOGUE, which may be had gra- 
tuitously on application to the publishers personally, or by letter enclosing Ten Cents in postage-stamps. 


= Harrer & Brotuers will send their publications by mail, postage prepadd, on receipt of the price 





A GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TES- | THE REVJSED GREEK-ENGLISH NEW TESTA- 


TAMENT;; being Ggrww's WILKeE’s Cravis Novi TEs- 
TAMENTI, Translated, Revised, and Enlarged by JoserH 
Heyry Tuayer, D.D., Bussey Professor of New Tes- 
tament Criticism and Interpretation in the Divinity 
School of Harvard University. pp.xix., 726. 4to, Cloth. 
(Just Ready.) 


HARPER'S LATIN DICTIONARY. A Latin Diction- 


MENT. The Revised Greek-English New Testament: 
being Westcott and Hort's Revised Text of the New 
"Testament in the Original Greek, and the Revised Eng- 
lish Version of the New Testament printed on opposite 
pages. Together with Dr. Philip Schaff's Introduction | 
to Westcott & Hort’s ** New Testament in the Original 
Greek.” Crown 8vo, Half Leather, $3 50. 


ary Founded on the Translation of *Freund's Latin- | 4 COMPANION TO THE GREEK TESTAMENT 


German Lexicon." Edited by E. A. ANpREws, LL.D. 
Revised, Enlarged, and in great part Rewritten by CHARL- 
TON T. Lewis, Ph.D., and Cnaznres Sgonr, LL.D., Pro- 
fessor of Latin in Columbia College, N. Y. Royal 8vo, 
Sheep, $6 50; Full Russia, $10 00. 





AND THE ENGLISH VERSION. By Puuipe 
Scuarr, D.D., LL.D. With Fac-simile Illustrations 
of MSS. and Standard Editions of the New Testament. 
Second Edition, Revised. Post 8vo, Cloth, $2 75. 


M‘CLINTOCK AND STRONG'S CYCLOPZEDIA. A 


LIDDELL AND SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEX- 
ICON. NEW EDITION. A Greek-English Lexicon. 
Compiled by Henry Grorce Lippert, D.D., Dean of 
Christ Church, and RoBERT Scorr, D.D., Master of Bal- 
liol College, with the Co-operation of Professor DRISLER, 
of Columbia College, New York. Seventh Edition, Re- 
vised and Augmented. 4to, Cloth, $9 00; Sheep, $10 00. 


Cyclopzdia of Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical 
Literature. By the late Rev. Joan M*CrizNTOock, D.D., 
and James Strone,S.T.D. With Maps and numerous 
Illustrations. Complete in Ten Volumes and Two Sup- 
plementary Volumes. 8vo, price per Volume, Cloth, 
$5 00; Sheep, $6 00; Half Morocco, $8 00. 


Abridged Edition, Small 4to, Half Leather, $2 00. THE ENGLISHMANS GREEK CONCORDANCE. 


STORMONTH’S ENGLISH DICTIONARY. A Dic- 
tionary of the English Language, Pronouncing, Etymo- 
logical, and Explanatory: embracing Scientific and other 
Terms, Numerous Familiar Terms, and a Copious Selec- 
tion of Old English Words. By the Rev. James Sror- 
MONTH. The Pronunciation Carefully Revised by the 


'The Englishman's Greek Concordance of the New Tes- 
tament: being an Attempt at a Verbal Connection be- 
tween the Greek and the English Texts; including a 
Concordance to the Proper Names, with Indexes, Greek- 
English and English-Greek. 8vo, Cloth, $3 50; Sheep, 
$3 87; Half Calf, $5 25. 


Rev. P.H. Poetry, M.A. Imperial 8vo, Cloth, $6 00; | ANTHON'S CLASSICAL DICTIONARY. Containing 


Half Roan, $7 00; Full Sheep, $7 50. 


WESTCOTT AND HORT'S GREEK NEW TESTA- 
MENT. 'The New Testament in the Original Greek. 
The Text Revised by Brooxe Foss Wrsrcorr, D.D., 
Regius Professor of Divinity, Canon of Peterborough; 
and F. J. A. Hort, D.D. Vol. I. American Edition. 
With an Introduction by Pnuirir Scuarr, D.D., LL.D. 





an Account of the Principal Proper Names mentioned in 
Ancient Authors, and intended to elucidate all the Im- 
portant Points connected with the Geography, History, 
Biography, Mythology, and Fine Arts of the Greeks and 
Romans, together with an Account of the Coins, Weights, 
and Measures, with Tabular Values of the same. Royal 
8vo, Sheep, $4 25. 


Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. Student's Edition (with Ap- | ANTHON'S SMITH'S DICTIONARY OF ANTIQUI- 


pendix containing chapters regarding the Principles of 
"Textual Criticism, Documentary Evidence, Orthography, 
&c.,and a List of Quotations from the Old Testament), 
12mo, Cloth, $1 00. (The Student's Edition does not 
contain Dr. Schaff's Introduction.) 


gz Vol. II. Containing Introduction and Appendix 
by the Editors. Crown 8yo, Cloth, $200. * 


TIES. A Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities. 
Edited by Wrrrraw Situ, LL.D., and Illustrated by 
numerous Engravings on Wood. Third American Edi- 
tion, carefully Revised, and containing also numerous 
additional Articles relative to the Botany, Mineralogy, 
and Zoology of the Ancients. By CHARLES ANTHON, 
LL.D. Royal 8vo, Sheep, $4 25. 


Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. 





ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. A Copious and 
Critical English-Latin Dictionary. By WirrrAM Situ, 
LL.D., and Turoruitus D. Hatt, M.A. With a Dic- 
tionary of Proper Names. 8vo, Sheep, $4 00. 


SHELDON’S HISTORY OF CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE. 
History of Christian Doctrine. By H. C. SuErpow, 
Professor of Church History in Boston University. 2 
vols., 8vo, Cloth, $3 50 per set. 


SCHAEF'S CREEDS OF CHRISTENDOM. Bibliotheca 
Symbolica Ecclesie Universalis. The Creeds of Christ- 
endom, with a History and Critical Notes. By the Rev. 
Pure Scuarr, D.D., LL.D. Three volumes. 8vo, 
Cloth, $15 00. 


ABBOTT'S LIFE OF CHRIST. Jesus of Nazareth: 
his Life and Teachings; founded on the Four Gospels, 
and Illustrated by Reference to the Manners, Customs, 
Religious Beliefs, and Political Institutions of his Times. 
By Lyman AnBorr, D.D. With Designs by Doré, De- 
laroche, Fenn, and others. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $1 75. 


BISHOP SIMPSON'S SERMONS. Sermons of the Rev. 
Matthew Simpson, D.D., LL.D., late Bishop of the 
Methodist Episcopal Church. ^ Edited by the Rev. 
GroncE ΒΕ. Crooxs, D.D. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. 


TAYLORS (THE REV. DR. W. M.) WORKS. 
Cloth, $1 50 per vol. 

Davi, Kine or Ismarr.—ErrjAu THE PROPHET.— 
PrrER THE APOSTLE.—DaNIEL THE BELOvED.—MosEs 
THE LAW-GIVER.—PAUL THE MissioNARY.—JOSEPH 
THE PRIME-MINISTER. 


ROBERTSONS (THE REV. F. W.) LIFE AND 
WORKS. 


Lire, LeTTERS, LECTURES oN CORINTHIANS, AND AD- 
DRESSES of the late Frederick W. Robertson, M. A., In- 
cumbent of Trinity Chapel, Brighton, 1847-1853. With 
Portrait on Steel. Large 12mo, Cloth, $2 00; Half Calf, 
$3 75. 

Sermons PnEACHED AT BmicuroN. With Portrait 
on Steel. Large 12mo, Cloth, $2 00; Half Calf, $3 75. 

*'TuE Human Race,” AND OTHER SERMONS, Preached 
at Cheltenham, Oxford, and Brighton. 12mo, Cloth, 
$1 50; Half Calf, $3 25. 


COLERIDGES COMPLETE WORKS. The Com- 
plete Works of Samuel Taylor Coleridge. With an 
Introductory Essay upon his Philosophical and Theo- 
logical Opinions. Library Edition. Edited by Profess- 
or W. G. T. SHepp. With an Index prepared by Ar- 
thur Gilman. In Seven Volumes. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00 
per volume, or $12 00 per set. 


LEES EVENTFUL NIGHTS IN BIBLE HISTORY. 
Eventful Nights in Bible History. By the Rt. Rev. At- 
FRED Ler, D.D., Bishop of the Protestant Episcopal 
Church in Delaware. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. 


HAYDN’S DICTIONARY OF DATES. A Dictionary 
of Dates and Universal Information relating to all Ages 
and Nations. Seventeenth Edition, containing the His- 
tory of the World to the Autumn of 1881. By Brnga- 
MIN Vincent, Librarian of the Royal Institution of Great 
Britain. Revised for American Readers. Large 8vo, 
Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, $5 50; Half Calf, $7 25. 


12mo, 


FROUDE'S LIFE OF THOMAS CARLYLE. 

Panr. I. A History of the First Forty Years of Car- 
lyle’s Life (1795-1835). By James ANTHONY FROUDE, 
M.A. With Portraits and Illustrations, 2 volumes in 
one, 12mo, Cloth, $1 00. 

Part. II. A History of Carlyle’s Life in London 
(1834-1881). By James ANTHONY ποῦθε, M.A. II- 
lustrated. 2 volumes in one. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00. 


STANLEY’S THROUGH THE DARK CONTINENT. 
Through the Dark Continent; or, The Sources of the 
Nile, Around the Great Lakes of Equatorial Africa, and 
Down the Livingstone River to the Atlantic Ocean. 149 
Illustrations and 10 Maps. By H. M. Stanuey. 2 vols., 
8vo, Cloth, $10 00; Half Morocco, $15 00. 


STANLEY’S CONGO. The Congo, and the Founding 
of its Free State: A Story of Work and Exploration. 
By H. M. SrasLEx. With over One Hundred Illustra- 
tions and Two Large Maps in Pockets and Smaller 
Maps. 2 vols., 8vo, Ornamental Cloth, $10 00. 


ABBOTT'S (C. C. UPLAND AND MEADOW. Up- 
land and Meadow. A Poaetquissings Chronicle. By 
CnannLEs C. ΑΒΒΟΤΊ, M.D. 12mo, Ornamental Cloth, 
$1 50. 

DWIGHT'S THEOLOGY.  'Theology Explained and 
Defended, in a Series of Sermons. By Triworuv 
Dwicur, S.T.D., LL.D. With a Memoir of the Life 
of the Author. Portrait. 4 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $8 00; 
Sheep, $10 00. 


DRAPER’S INTELLECTUAL DEVELOPMENT OF 
EUROPE. A History of the Intellectual Development 
of Europe. By Jonny W. Dnarren, M.D., LL.D. New 
Edition. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 00; Half Calf, $6 50. 


TYERMAN’S LIFE OF JOHN WESLEY. The Life 
and Times of the Rev. Joun Westvy, M.A, By Rev. 
Luxe TxERMAN. Three Steel Portraits. 3 vols., 8vo, 
Cloth, $7 50; Half Calf, $14 25. 


TYERMAN’S OXFORD METHODISTS. The Oxford 
Methodists: Memoirs of the Rey. Messrs. Clayton, Ing- 
ham, Gambold, Hervey, and Broughton, with Biograph- 
ical Notices of others. By Rev. Luke Tyerman. With 
Portraits. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. 


INDEX TO HARPER’S MAGAZINE. Alphabetical, 
Analytical, and Classified. Vols. I. to LXX., inclusive. 
Compiled by C. A. Durrer.  8vo, Cloth, $4 00; Half 
Calf, $6 25. 

PEARS'S FALL OF CONSTANTINOPLE. The Fall 
of Constantinople. Being the Story of the Fourth Cru- 
sade. By Epwin Pears, LL.B. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. 


LAYARD'S DISCOVERIES AT NINEVEH. Discov- 
eries among the Ruins of Nineveh and Babylon; with 
Travels in Armenia, Kurdistan, and the Desert: being 
the Result of a Second Expedition, undertaken for the 
Trustees of the British Museum. By Austen Henry 
Layarp, M.P. With Maps, Plans, and Illustrations. 
Svo, Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, $6 25. 

TRISTRAM'S LAND OF MOAB. The Land of Moab: 
Travels and Discoveries on the East Side of the Dead 
Sea and the Jordan. By H. B. Tristram, M.A., LL.D., 
F.R.S., Honorary Canon of Durham. With a Chapter 
on the Persian Palace of Mashita, by James FERGUSON, 
F.R.S.: Illustrated. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. 


Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. 





πο θθυς S NEW CLASSICAL LIBRARY OF LITER- 


AL TRANSLATIONS. Literal Translations of the 
principal Greek and Latin Authors read in American 
Schools and Colleges. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00 per vol. 
Casar.— VireiL.— SaArLUsT.— Horace.— Cicero’s 
OnaTIONS.—CICERO ON ORATORY AND ORATORS.—CICE- 
RO's TuscuLan DisPUTATIONS, &c.—CICERO'S OFFICES, 
&c.—Tacrrus. 2 vols.— TERENCE. —J UV ENAL.—XENO- 
PHON.— Homer’s In1ap.— Homer’s OpxssEx.— Livy. 
Books L-XXX. 2vols.—HEnonorus.—DEMOSTHENES. 
2 vols. —THrcxvDpiDEs.—JEscHYLus.—SOPHOCLES.—Ev- 
RIPIDES. 2 vols.—Praro. [Select Dialogues.] 


HARPER’S GREEK AND LATIN TEXTS. 18mo, 


Paper, per vol. 32 cents; Flexible Cloth, per vol., 50 
cents. 

CuxsARn.— VrnGIL.—SALLUST.—HORACE.— CICERO DE 
Natura Drorum, ΡῈ DrivivATIONE, DE Fato.—Cice- 
RONIS ORATIONES SELECTJE.— CICERO DE SENECTUTE, DE 
AmiciTIA, and DE Orricus.—Ciceronis TuscuLANJE 
DisPvuTATIONES. — CicERO DE FiNrBUS. — CICERONIS 
EpistuL2® SELECT4E.— LUCRETIUS.— X ENOPHON.— X EN- 
oPHoNTIS Lipri Socraticr.—/AscuyLus.—EvriPiwes. 
3 vols.—Heropotus. 2vols.—Tuucypipes. 2 vols.— 
SornocrEs.—Praro. [Six Dialogues. ] 


HARPER'S CLASSICAL SERIES. Edited by Professor 


H. Drister, of Columbia College. With Introductions 
and Notes. 

GILDERSLEEVE's (B. L.) Otympic AND ΡΎΤΗΙΑΝ ODES 
or Piypar. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. 

LaxBERrTON's (W. A.) Tuucypipes. Books VI. and 
VII. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. 

Merriam’s (A. C.) HEnoporus. Books VI. and VII. 
12mo, Cloth, $1 50. 

SiurLER's (E. G.) Proracoras or Prato. 12mo, 
Cloth, 75 cents. 

Srickney’s (A.) Cicero’s Orrices. 12mo, Cloth, 
$1 50. 

Tyxer’s (W.S.) Homer’s In1ap. Books XVI. to 
XXIV. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. 


Other volumes in preparation. 


MOSHEIM’S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY. Ancient 


and Modern Ecclesiastical History, in which the Rise, 
Progress, and Variation of Church Power are Consid- 
ered in their Connection with the State of Learning 
and Philosophy, and the Political History of Europe 
during that Period. Translated, with Notes, &c., by A. 
Macrainz, D.D. Continued to 1826, by C. Coors, 
LL.D. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $4 00; Sheep, $5 00. 


YONGE'S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON. An English- 


Greek Lexicon. By CHannLEes Duxe Yoner. With 
Many New Articles, an Appendix of Proper Names, and 
Pilon's Greek Synonymes. To which is prefixed an 
Essay on the Order of Words in Attic-Greek Prose, by 
Cnuanres Suonxr, LL.D. Edited by Henry DnmrsLER, 
LL.D. $8vo, Sheep, extra, $4 50. 


HUME'S ENGLAND. History of England, from the In- 


vasion of Julius Cesar to the Abdication of James II., 
1688. By Davi» Hume. New and Elegant Library 
Edition, from new Electrotype Plates. 6 vols. in a Box, 
8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt 
Tops, $12 00. Sold only in Sets. Popular Edition, 6 
vols. in a Box, 12mo, Cloth, $3 00; Sheep, $6 00. 





MACAULAY’S ENGLAND. The History of England 
from the Accession of James Il. By Tuomas Baprne- 
TON Macaurax. New Edition, from new Electrotype 
Plates. 5 vols. in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, 
Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $10 00. Sold only in 
Sets. Cheap Edition, 5 vols. in a Box, 12mo, Cloth, 
$2 50; Sheep, $5 00. 


MACAULAY’S MISCELLANEOUS WORKS. The 
Miscellaneous Works of Lord Macaulay. From New 
Electrotype Plates. 5 vols. in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with 
Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $10 00. Sold 
only in Sets. 


GIBBON’S ROME. The History of the Decline and Fall 
of the Roman Empire. By Epwarp Gisson. With 
Notes by Dean Mirman, M. Guizor, and Dr. WiLLiAM 
SwrrH. New Edition, from new Electrotype Plates. 
6 vols., 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and 
Gilt Tops, $12 00. Sold only in Sets. Popular Edition, 
6 vols. in a Box, 12mo, Cloth, $3 00; Sheep, $6 00. 


HILDRETH'S UNITED STATES. History of the United 
States. Firsr Serres: From the Discovery of the 
Continent to the Organization of the Government under 
the Federal Constitution. SEcowp Serres: From the 
Adoption of the Federal Constitution to the End of the 
Sixteenth Congress. By Ricmagp HitpretH. Popular 
Edition, 6 vols. in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, 
Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $12 00. Sold only in Sets. 


MOTLEY’S DUTCH REPUBLIC. The Rise of the 
Dutch Republic. A History. By Joun LorungoP Mor- 
LEY, LL.D., D.C.L. With a Portrait of William of 
Orange. Cheap Edition, 3 vols. in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, 
with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $6 00. 
Sold only in Sets. Original Library Edition, 3 vols., 
8vo, Cloth, $10 50; Sheep, $12 00; Half Calf, $17 25. 

MOTLEY'S UNITED NETHERLANDS. History of the 
United Netherlands: from the Death of William the 
Silent to the Twelve Years’ Truce—1584-1609. With 
a full View of the English-Dutch Struggle against Spain, 
and of the Origin and Destruction of the Spanish Ar- 
mada. By Joun Lormgoe Morrry, LL.D., D.C.L. 
Portraits. Cheap Edition, 4 vols. in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, 
with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $8 00. 
Sold only in Sets. Original Library Edition, 4 vols., 
8vo, Cloth, $14 00; Sheep, $16 00; Half Calf, $23 00. 

MOTLEY’S JOHN OF BARNEVELD. The Life and 
Death of John of Barneveld, Advocate of Holland : with 
a View of the Primary Causes and Movements of the 
‘Thirty Years’ War.” By Jouw Lorugoe MorrEr, 
LL.D., D.C.L. Illustrated. Cheap Edition, 2 vols. in 
a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and 
Gilt Tops, $4 00. Sold only in Sets. Original Library 
Edition, 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $7 00; Sheep, $8 00; Half 
Calf, $11 50. 

TREVELYAN'S LIFE OF MACAULAY. The Life and 
Letters of Lord Macaulay. By his Nephew,Grorce Orro 
TreveLyan, M.P. With Portrait on Steel. 2 vols., 
8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $5 00; Sheep, 
$6 00; Half Calf, $9 50. Popular Edition, 2 vols. in 
one, 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. 

TREVELYAN'S LIFE OF FOX. The Early History of 
Charles James Fox. By Georce Orro TREVELYAN. 
8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $2 50. 


Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. 





GOLDSMITH’S WORKS. The Works of Oliver Gold- 
smith. Edited by Peter Cunnincuam, F.S.A. From 
new Electrotype Plates. 4 vols., 8vo, Cloth, Paper 
Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $8 00. 


SYMONDS'S SKETCHES AND STUDIES IN SOUTH- 
ERN EUROPE. Sketches and Studies in Southern 
Europe. By Joumw Appixcton Symonps. 2 vols., Post 
8vo, Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, $7 50. 


SYMONDS'S GREEK POETS. Studies of the Greek 
Poets. By Joux AppiNGTON Symonps. 2 vols., Square 
16mo, Cloth, $3 50; Half Calf, $7 00. 


MAHAFFYS GREEK LITERATURE. A History of 
Classical Greek Literature. By J.P. Manarry. 2 vols., 
12mo, Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, $7 50. 


SIMCOX'S LATIN LITERATURE. A History of Latin 
Literature, from Ennius to Boethius. By Grorce Av- 
ceusrUs Siwcox, M.A. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $4 00. 


DU CHAILLU'S LAND OF THE MIDNIGHT SUN. 
The Land of the Midnight Sun. Summer and Winter 
Journeys in Sweden, Norway, and Lapland, and North- 
ern Finland. By Paur B. Du CnairLv. Illustrated. 
2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $7 50; Half Calf, $12 00. 

COLLINS'S BOLINGBROKE AND VOLTAIRE.  Bol- 
ingbroke: a Historical Study; and Voltaire in England. 
By Jouw Cuurton CorrrNs. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00. 

GEORGE ELIOT'S LIFE. George Eliot's Life, as Re- 
lated in her Letters and Journals. Arranged and Edit- 
ed by her Husband, J. W.Cross. Portraits and Illus- 
trations. In Three Volumes. Library Edition. 12mo, 
Cloth, $3 75. Popular Edition, 12mo, Cloth, $2 25. 


DU CHAILLU'S ASHANGO LAND. A Journey to 
Ashango Land, and Further Penetration into Equatorial 


Africa. By P. B. Du CnarrLv. Illustrated.  8vo, 
Cloth, $5 00; Half Calf, $7 25. 
DEXTER'S CONGREGATIONALISM. The Congrega- 


tionalism of the Last Three Hundred Years, as Seen in 
its Literature: with Special Reference to certain Recon- 
dite, Neglected, or Disputed Passages. With a Biblio- 
graphical Appendix. By H. M. Dexter. Large 8vo, 
Cloth, $6 00. 


BARTLETT'S FROM EGYPT TO PALESTINE. 
From Egypt to Palestine. Through Sinai, the Wilder- 
ness, and the South Country. Observations of a Jour- 
ney made with Special Reference to the History of the 
Israelites. By S. C. Bartietr, D.D., LL.D. With 
Maps and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $3 50. 


FORSTER'S DEAN SWIFT. The Early Life of Jon- 
athan Swift (1667-1711). By Joun Forster. With 
Portrait. 8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $2 50. 


GREEN’S ENGLISH PEOPLE. History of the English 
People. By Jouw Ricnarp Green, M.A. With Maps. 
4 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $2 50 per volume. 

GREEN'S MAKING OF ENGLAND. The Making of 


England. By J.R.Greex. With Maps. 8vo, Cloth, 
$2 50. 


GREEN'S CONQUEST OF ENGLAND. The Conquest 
of England. By J. R. Green. With Maps.  8vo, 
Cloth, $2 50. 





ADAMS'S MANUAL OF HISTORICAL - LITERA- 
TURE. A Manual of Historical Literature. Compris- 
ing Brief Descriptions of the Most Important Histories - 
in English, French, and German. By C. K. Apams, 
LL.D., President of Cornell University. — 8vo, Cloth, 
$2 50. 

REBER’S HISTORY OF ANCIENT ART. History of 
Ancient Art. By Dr. Franz von Reser. Revised by 
the Author. Translated and Augmented by Joseph 
Thacher Clarke. With 310 Illustrations and a Glos- 
sary of Technical Terms. ὅνο, Cloth, $3 50. 


REBER’S HISTORY OF MEDLEVAL ART. History 
of Medixzval Art. By Dr. Franz von Rezver. "Trans- 
lated by Joseph Thacher Clarke. Illustrated. — 8vo, 
Cloth. (Zn Press.) 


KINGLAKE’S CRIMEAN WAR. The Invasion of the 
Crimea: its Origin, and an Account of its Progress 
down to the Death of Lord Raglan. By ALEXANDER 
WirtLiAw KrwGLAKE. With Maps and Plans. Four 
Volumes now ready. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00 per vol. 


REID'S LIFE OF SYDNEY SMITH. A Sketch of the 
Life and Times of the Rev. Sydney Smith. Based on 
Family Documents and the Recollections of Personal 
Friends. By SrvAnT J. Rem. With Steel-Plate Por- 
traits, Numerous Illustrations, and Autograph Letter. 
8vo, Cloth, $3 00. 


HALLAM’S MIDDLE AGES. 
Europe during the Middle Ages. 
8vo, Cloth, $2 00; Sheep, $2 50. 


HALLAM’S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY OF ENG- 
LAND. The Constitutional History of England, from 
the Accession of Henry VII. to the Death of George II. 
By Henry HarrLAM. 8vo, Cloth, $2 00; Sheep, $2 50. 


ENGLISH MEN OF LETTERS. Edited by Jon Mon- 
LEY. 12mo, Cloth, 75 cents per volume. ‘The following 
volumes are now ready. Others will follow : 

Jounsoy. By L.Stephen.—GriBBow. By J. C. Mor- 
ison.—Scorr. By R. H. Hutton.—SnuELLEYy. By J. A. 
Symonds.— GorpswirH. By W. Black.—Hume. By 
Professor Huxley.—Drror. By W. Minto. — Burns. 
By Principal Shairp.—Srenser. By R. W. Church.— 
Tuackeray. By A. Trollope. —Burke. By J. Mor- 
ley.— Mitton. By M. Pattison. —Sournry. By E. 
Dowden.—Cuaucer. By A. W. Ward.—Bunyan. By 
J. A. Froude.—Cowrer. By G.Smith.—Porr. By L. 
Stephen. — Byron. By J. Nichol.—LockrE. By T. 
Fowler.—WonpswoRrH. By F. W. H. Myers.—Haw- 
THORNE. By Henry James, Jr.—Drypen. By G. 
Saintsbury. — Lanpor. By S. Colvin.—De Quincey. 
By D. Masson. — Lams. By A. Ainger. — BENTLEY. 
By R. C. Jebb.— DickEss. By A. W. Ward.—Gnax. 
By E. W. Gosse.—Swirr. By L. Stephen. — STERNE. 
By H. D. Trail. — Macavrax. By J. C. Morison.— 
FrELpDiNG. By Austin Dobson.—SnuERiDAN. By Mrs, 
Oliphant. — Apprsow. By W. J. Courthope.—Bacon. 
By R. W. Church.—Corermwee. By H. D.Traill. 


TENNYSON’S COMPLETE WORKS. The Poetical 
Works of Alfred Tennyson. With an Introductory 
Sketch by Anne Thackeray Ritchie. With Portraits 
and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $2 00; Gilt Edges, 
$2 50. 


View of the State of 
By Henry Haram. 


Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. 





CESNOLA’S CYPRUS. Cyprus: its Ancient Cities, 
Tombs, and Temples. A Narrative of Researches and 
Excavations during Ten Years’ Residence in that Island. 
By L. P. pt CEsNoLa. With Portrait, Maps, and 400 
Illustrations. S8yo, Cloth, Extra, Uncut Edges and Gilt 
Tops, $7 50. 


NEWCOMB’S ASTRONOMY. Popular Astronomy. By 
Simon Newcoms, LL.D. With 112 Engravings, and 
five Maps of the Stars. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50: School Edi- 
tion, 12mo, Cloth, $1 30. 


NEWCOMBS POLITICAL ECONOMY. The Princi- 
ples of Political Economy. By Smron Newcoms, LL.D. 
Svo, Cloth, $2 50. 


VAN-LENNEP’S BIBLE LANDS. Bible Lands: their 
Modern Customs and Manners Illustrative of Scripture. 
By Henry J. Van-Lenner, D.D. 350 Engravings and 
2 Colored Maps. ὅνο, Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, $6 00; 
Half Morocco, $8 00. 


BAKER'S ISMAILIA. Ismailia: a Narrative of the Ex- 
pedition to Central Africa for the Suppression of the 
Slave-trade, organized by Ismail, Khedive of Egypt. By 
Sir Samurer W. Bakrng. With Maps, Portraits, and 
Illustrations. ὅνο, Cloth, $5 00; Half Calf, $7 25. 


HIGGINSON'S LARGER HISTORY OF THE UNIT- 
ED STATES. A Larger History of the United States 
of America to the Close of President Jackson's Admin- 
istration. By THomas WrwTwoRnTH Hicerxson. ll- 
lustrated by Maps, Plans, Portraits, and other Engray- 
ings. Svo, Cloth, $3 50. 


FORBES'S NATURALIST'S WANDERINGS. A Nat- 
uralist’s Wanderings in the Eastern Archipelago. A 
Narrative of Travel and Exploration from 1878 to 1883. 
By Henry O. Forpes, E.R.G.S., &c. With many Il- 
lustrations and Maps. 8yo, Ornamental Cloth, $5 00. 


RANKE’S UNIVERSAL HISTORY. 
tory. Vol.I 
and the Greeks. 
G. W. PnornuEno. 


Universal His- 

The Oldest Historical Group of Nations 

By Lrororp von Ranke. Edited by 
8vo, Cloth, $2 50. 


LIVINGSTONE'S ZAMBESI. Narrative of an Expe- 
dition to the Zambesi and its Tributaries, and of the 
Discovery of the Lakes Shirwa and Nyassa, 1858-1864. 
By Davip and Cmamres Livinestony. — Illustrated. 
8vo, Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, $5 50. 


LIVINGSTONE'S LAST JOURNALS. The Last Jour- 
nals of David Livingstone, in Central Africa, from 1865 
to his Death. Continued by a Narrative of his Last 
Moments, obtained from his Faithful Servants Chuma 
and Susi. By Horace Warrrm, F.R.G.S. With Por- 
trait, Maps, and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, 
$6 00. Cheap Popular Edition, 8vo, Cloth, with Map 
and Illustrations, $2 50. 


BLAIKIE'S LIFE OF DAVID LIVINGSTONE. The 
Personal Life of David Livingstone, LL.D., D.C.L. 
Chiefly from his Unpublished Journals and Correspond- 
ence. By W. G. Brarkrige, D.D. With Portrait and 
Map. 8vo, Cloth, $2 25. 





GROTE’S HISTORY OF GREECE. 12 vols., 12mo, 
Cloth, $18 00; Sheep, $22 80; Half Calf, $39 00. 


DUNN’S MASSACRES OF THE MOUNTAINS. Mas- 
sacres of the Mountains. A History of the Indian Wars 
of the Far West. By J. P. Dunn, Jr., M.S., LL.B. 
With Map and Illustrations. 8vo, Illuminated Cloth, 
$3 75. 


CURTIS'S LIFE OF BUCHANAN. Life of James 
Buchanan, Fifteenth President of the United States. By 
Grorce Ticknor Curtis. With Two Steel-Plate Por- 
traits. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, 
$6 00. 

TILDEN’S WRITINGS AND SPEECHES. Writings 
and Speeches of Samuel J. Tilden. Edited by Joun 
Bieetow. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, Gilt Tops and Uncut 
Edges, $6 00 per set. 


DIX'S MEMOIRS. Memoirs of John Adams Dix. Com- 
piled by his Son, Morcan Dix. With Five Steel-plate 
Portraits. 2 yols., 8vo, Cloth, Gilt Tops and Uncut 
Edges, $5 00. 


HUDSON’S RAILWAYS AND THE REPUBLIC. The 
Railways and the Republic. By J. F.Hupson. 8vo, 
Cloth, $2 00. 


NORDHOFF'S COMMUNISTIC SOCIETIES OF THE 
UNITED STATES. ‘The Communistic Societies of 
the United States, from Personal Visit and Observation ; 
including Detailed Accounts of the Economists, Zoar- 
ites, Shakers, the Amana, Oneida, Bethel, Aurora, Ica- 
rian, and other existing Societies. By Cuartes Norp- 
HOFF. Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. 


SMILES’S HISTORY OF THE HUGUENOTS. The 
Huguenots: their Settlements, Churches, and Industries 
in England and Ireland. By βάσει, Suites. With 
an Appendix relating to the Huguenots in America. 
Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. 


SMILESS HUGUENOTS AFTER THE REVOCA- 
TION. 'The Huguenots in France after the Revoca- 
tion of the Edict of Nantes; with a Visit to the Coun- 
try of the Vaudois. By SawuErL SmiLes. Crown 8yo, 
Cloth, $2 00. 


SMILES'S LIFE OF THE STEPHENSONS. The 
Life of George Stephenson, and of his Son, Robert Ste- 
phenson; comprising, also, a History of the Invention 
and Introduction of the Railway Locomotive. By Sam- 
VEL SMILES. Illustrated. — 8vo, Cloth, $3 00. 


SCHLIEMANN'S ILIOS. Πῖοβ, the City and Country 
of the Trojans. A Narrative of the Most Recent Dis- 
coveries and Researches made on the Plain of Troy. 
By Dr. Henry SeHLrEMANN. Maps, Plans, and Illus- 
trations. Imperial 8vo, Illuminated Cloth, $12 00; 
Half Moroeco, $15 00. 


SCHLIEMANN'S TROJA. Troja. Results of the Lat- 
est Researches and Discoveries on the Site of Homer's 
Troy, and in the Heroic Tumuli and other Sites, made 
in the Year 1882, and a Narrative of a Journey in the 
Troad in 1881. By Dr. Henry ScHLIEMANN. Preface 
by Professor A. H. Sayce. With Wood-cuts, Maps, and 
Plans. Svo, Cloth, $7 50. 


Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. 








GIESELER’S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY. A Text- 
Book of Church History. By Dr. Joun C. L. GresELER. 
Translated from the Fourth Revised German Edition. 
Revised and Edited by Rev. Henry B. Swrrg, D.D. 
Vols. I., II., III., and IV., 8vo, Cloth, $2 25; Vol. V., 
$vo, Cloth, $3 00. Complete Sets, 5 vols. Sheep, 
$14 50; Half Calf, $23 25. 


GRIFFIS'S JAPAN. The Mikado's Empire: Book I. 
History of Japan, from 660 B.C. to 1872 A.D. Book 
II. Personal Experiences, Observations, and Studies in 
Japan, from 1870 to 1874. By W. E. Grirris. Copi- 
ously Illustrated. 8vo, Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, $6 25. 


SCHWEINFURTH'S HEART OF AFRICA. Three 
Years Travels and Adventures in the Unexplored Re- 
gions of the Centre of Africa—from 1868 to 1871. By 
Dr. Geore Scuwernrurtu. ‘Translated by ErrEN E. 
Frewer. Illustrated. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $8 00. 


NORTON'S STUDIES OF CHURCH - BUILDING. 
Historical Studies of Church- Building in the Middle 
Ages. Venice, Siena, Florence. By CnmamrEs E ior 
Norton. 8yo, Cloth, $3 00. 


THE VOYAGE OF THE “CHALLENGER.” The 
Atlantic: an Account of the General Results of the Voy- 
age during 1873, and the Early Part of 1876. By 
Sir Wyvitte Tnowsow, K.C.B., F.R.S. Illustrated. 
2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $12 00. 


BLUNT'S BEDOUIN TRIBES OF THE EUPHRA- 
TES. Bedouin Tribes of the Euphrates. By Lapy 
Anne BLuwr. Edited, with a Preface and some Ac- 
count of the Arabs and their Horses, by W. S. B. Map 
and Sketches by the Author. 8yo, Cloth, $2 50. 


THE STUDENT'S SERIES. 
12mo, Cloth. 


France. — Gipson. — GnrEECE. — Rome (by Lrp- 
DELL).—OLp 'TrsrawENT History.—New  TEsTA- 
xENT Hisrogy.— SrRICKLAND's QuEENS or ENG- 
LAND.—ANCIENT History oF THE Easr.—HaLLAMw's 
MipprEÉ AcEs.—HarLAWw's ConstitutionaL History 
or ExcrAND.—LYELL's ELEMENTS OF GEOLOGY.— 
MrmrvaLEs GENERAL History or Rome. — Cox's 
GrxERAL History or Greece.—CLassicaL DICTION- 
ARY.—SkEAT's ErvwoLocicAL Dicrionary.—Raw- 
LINSON'S ANCIENT History. $1 25 per volume. 


Maps and Illustrations. 


Lopce’s Moprern Evnorr.—LrEwiss History OF 
Germany.—EcciesiasticaL History. 2 volumes.— 
Huxr's ExcLAND. $1 50 per volume. 


Wrsrcorr ἃ Honrs Greek New TESTAMENT. 
$1 00.—SrrEwAN's MvrHoLocx. 60 cents. 


BOURNES LOCKE. 
H. R. Fox Bourne. 


The Life of John Locke. By 
2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. 


CAMERON'S ACROSS AFRICA. Across Africa. By 
Verney Loverr Cameron. Map and Illustrations. 
8vo, Cloth, $5 00. 


DYER’S FOLK-LORE OF SHAKESPEARE.  Folk- 
Lore of Shakespeare. By the Rev. T. F. TürsELTON 
Dyer, M.A., Oxon. Svo, Cloth, $2 50. 








THOMSON’S LAND AND THE BOOK. The Land 
and the Book ; or, Biblical Illustrations drawn from the 
Manners and Customs, the Scenes and Scenery, of the 
Holy Land. By W. M. Tuomson, D.D. In 3 volumes, 
8vo. Price per vol., Cloth, $6 00; Sheep, $7 00; Half 
Morocco, $8 50; Full Morocco, $10 00. (Volumes sold 
separately.) 


Vol. I. SourHern PALESTINE AND JERUSALEM. 140 
Illustrations and Maps. 
Vol. II. CENTRAL PALESTINE AND Puanicra. 130 


Illustrations and Maps. 


Vol. III. LEBANow, Damascus, AND BEYOND Jor- 
DAN. 147 Illustrations and Maps. 


PoruraR Eprrrox (sold only in sets), $9 00. 
HARPER'S CYCLOPZEDIA OF BRITISH AND AMER- 
ICAN POETRY. Edited by Eres Sarcent. Royal 
8vo, Illuminated Cloth, Colored Edges, $4 50. 
CARLYLES WORKS. 


FREDERICK THE GREAT. 
6 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $7 50. 


Tue FRENCH REVOLUTION. 
$2 50. 


OrrvER CROMWELL. 


Portraits, Maps, Plans, &c. 
2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, 


2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $2 50. 


Past AND Present, CHARTISM, AND SARTOR KESAR- 
TUS. 12mo, Cloth, $1 25. 


Earty Kines or Norway, AND THE PORTRAITS OF 
Joun Kwox. 12mo, Cloth, $1 25. 


ReMINISCENCES OF MY IRIsH JOURNEY IN 1849. 
With Portrait. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00. 


PERRY'S (T. S.) ENGLISH LITERATURE. English 
Literature in the Eighteenth Century. By Tuomas 
SERGEANT Perry. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00. 


TROLLOPE'S CICERO. Life of Cicero. 
'TRoLLoPE. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 00. 


PERRY'S (G. G.) HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF 
ENGLAND. A History of the English Church, from the 
Accession of Henry VIII. to the Silencing of Convoca- 
tion. By G. G. Perry, M.A. With a Sketch of the 
History of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the Unit- 
ed States, by J. A. SeENcER, S. T.D. Crown 8vo, Cloth, 
$2 50. 


M‘CARTHY’S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. A History 
of Our Own Times, from the Accession of Queen Vic- 
toria to the General Election of 1880. By Justin 
M‘Cartny. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $2 50. 


M‘CARTHY’S FOUR GEORGES. 
Four Georges. By Justin M‘Carrny. 
Cloth, $1 25. 


WATSON’S MARCUS AURELIUS ANTONINUS. 
Marcus Aurelius Antoninus. By PaurL Barron War- 
son. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. 


THOMSON’S (W. Η.) THE GREAT ARGUMENT. 
The Great Argument; or, Jesus Christ in the Old Tes- 
tament. By W. H. THowsoN, M.A., M.D. Crown 8vo, 
Cloth, $2 00. 


By ANTHONY 


A History of the 
Vol. I. 12mo, 














L 007 625 


MIU I 


72 5 


DOTT 


D 000907537 ; 


en tase t 


a 
Aa 


RV Na 


mcm An RA ate qmi We SIR i EISE EDGE 2 eae SMa aris EHE : DEPO Ὁ "ddl ver en ent NU Se SG 


ARA TX 





SMES «STEPS AR HES Bere i LORD Rr qum inti MA m RA en 


«Ἐνῷ vL SLE) 


